the cruise of the mary rose, or here and there in the pacific, by william h g kingston. ________________________________________________________________________ this book is very largely about the work of christian missionaries in the pacific. there is a thin plot, but otherwise we are treated to lengthy texts extracted from the reports of various missionaries, and of naval officers who had visited the area. the book is dressed up with a cover and a title that makes it look like a boy's adventure story from the second half of the nineteenth century. i imagine that many a kindly old aunt, searching for a christmas present for a favourite nephew, will have bought a copy, and been surprised when the "thank-you" letter didn't seem as effusive as she expected. but don't let me stop you reading it if you are interested in the work of these brave missionaries. kingston is generally quite pious in his writings, so you can imagine how pious he is when trying to out-missionary the missionaries. some of their more nauseous habits of their "clients" are described, such as eating your enemy when you have killed him. ________________________________________________________________________ the cruise of the mary rose, or here and there in the pacific, by william h g kingston. chapter one. uncle john's journal. my family had for centuries owned the same estate, handed down from father to son undiminished in size, and much increased in value. i believe there had been among them in past generations those who feared the lord. i know that my father was a man of true piety. "casting all your care upon him, for he careth for you," was his favourite motto. what a world of doubt and anxiety, of plotting, and contriving, and scheming, does this trust in god save those who possess it. on this blessed assurance my father took his stand in all the difficulties of life. it never failed him, and so we his sons had a good training and a godly example. the younger members of each generation followed various honourable professions, but they failed to rise to high rank in them, owing, i fancy, to a want of worldly ambition--the general characteristic of our race. altogether, however, i believe them to have been a simple-minded, upright, clear sighted set of people, who did whatever their hands found to do honestly and with all their might. such people ought to rise, it may be said. so they do,--but not to what the world calls the summit. they generally rise to a position of independence, where they may enjoy fair scope for the exercise of their mental and spiritual faculties. there they are content to remain, for a time. this world is not their rest. another world opens to their view. in that they see the goal at which they aim. there is the golden crown. why then be distracted by the glittering baubles which are held up to draw their attention from the real jewel--the gem without price? i am happy in the belief that such was the reason that my ancestors did not become men of much worldly note. the occupant of the family estate had always attended to its cultivation, and was properly called a gentleman farmer. unostentatious and frugal, he never lacked means, in spite of bad harvests or unexpected losses, to assist the younger members of the family in starting in life, or to help forward any good cause which required aid. my father, paul harvey, was a perfect type of the family--so was my elder brother, his namesake. john came next; a daughter followed; i was his fourth child. he kept up a good old custom--never broken through from any excuse. an hour before bed-time his children and the whole household assembled in the sitting-room, when he read and explained a chapter in the bible. a hymn was sung, and prayers full of fervour were offered up to the throne of grace. after this a simple supper was placed on the table, and we were encouraged to speak on the events of the day, or on what we had read or thought of. that hour was generally the pleasantest of the twenty-four. our father guided, if he did not lead the conversation, and generally managed to infuse his spirit into it. although many of the subjects discussed even now rise up to my memory, i will mention but one, which had a powerful influence on the career of some of those present. i had been reading an account of the crusades, and my enthusiasm had been unusually stirred up on the subject. "i wish that i could have lived in those days!" i exclaimed (i was but a lad it must be remembered.) "what a glorious work those warriors of old undertook, who with sword and lance, under the banner of the cross, they went forth to conquer infidels, to establish the true faith, to recover the blessed land, hallowed by the redeemer's footsteps, from the power of the cruel followers of the false prophet of mecca. how degenerate are we christians of the present generation! who among us dreams of expelling the turks from syria? on the contrary, our statesmen devote their energies to keep them there. i really believe that were peter the hermit to rise from his grave, he would not find a dozen true men to follow him." "possibly not," said my father, quietly; "though he might find two dozen fully as wise, and as honest, too, as those he led to destruction. but has it not struck you, david, that there are other conquests to be achieved in the present age more important than winning palestine from the moslem; that there is more real fighting to be done than all the true soldiers of the cross, even were they to be united in one firm phalanx, could accomplish? sword and spear surely are not the weapons our loving saviour desires his followers to employ when striving to bring fresh subjects under his kingdom. that they were to be used was indeed the idea of our ignorant ancestors, when the teaching of a corrupt church had thrown a dark veil over their understandings. christians only in name, the truth was so disfigured and transformed among them, that it exercised no influence over their hearts; and though they believed the bible to be of value, they regarded it rather in the light of a mystic charm than the word of god. thus all the great truths of our most holy faith were so travestied and changed as to produce alone a degrading superstition. they believed that the bible had the power of exorcising spirits of evil. so it has; but it is not the closed bible, which they in their ignorance employed--not the mere printed paper bound into a volume--unread, or if read, misunderstood, at which the devil and his angels tremble. no; it is the open bible--the bible in many tongues--read and understood through god's gracious teaching, sought for by prayer earnestly. it is the blessed gospel of peace which alone can put to flight debasing superstition, gross customs, murderous propensities, cruel dispositions, barbarism in its varied forms, and all the works of darkness instigated by satan and his angels. again, i say that the bible, and the bible alone, is the true crusader's weapon; armed with that sword of the spirit, with the shield of faith on his arm, and under the guidance (never to be withdrawn while he seeks it) of god's holy spirit, he may go boldly forth conquering and to conquer the numberless hosts of heathenism arrayed for battle against the truth. these weapons are dreaded by the spirit of evil more than all those iron implements of warfare on which man in his folly and blindness relies. the victories won by the bible are lasting in this world, and not only in this world, but through eternity. "to drop metaphor, what is, and what long has been the condition of those lands the crusaders vainly boasted they had won from the followers of mohammed? in what state do we find those vast territories of the new world conquered by spain? both gained by sword and spear, under a banner falsely called the `banner of the cross.' compare these and similar conquests over heathenism with those victories won in pagan lands by the bible--the sword of the spirit. how great the contrast!" our father spoke with far more animation than was his wont. i listened respectfully, though i confess that at first i did not comprehend the full meaning of his remarks. still, they considerably dimmed the bright halo with which my imagination had surrounded the crusades. my second brother, john, however, fixing his eyes attentively on our father, drank in every word he uttered. "yes, glorious indeed are the victories gained by the gospel of peace in heathen lands, and happy are those permitted to fight them," he whispered, with a sigh, after a few minutes' silence. john was less robust in health than were most of us, and it was intended that he should devote himself to mercantile pursuits, for which i had long suspected that he had no great taste; still, at the call, as he believed, of duty, he had begun the task of acquiring the necessary knowledge. "i suppose, father, that you are alluding to the labours of missionaries in foreign lands?" i observed. "but i have heard it said, that in spite of all the money expended, their preaching produces but meagre results. in india, for instance, the company will not admit them. in africa, the climate destroys them. the fanatical turks and other mohammedan nations will not listen to their message; and it would be but time lost and energies wasted were they to attempt to preach to the cannibals of new zealand and the other islands of the pacific, or to the almost baboons of australia and new guinea." "you have not, i see, given much thought to the subject, david," observed my father, mildly; "god's grace is sufficient for all men. the gospel is to be preached to all men, without distinction of race, or colour, or nation, or rank. what says the bible? `go ye into all the world, and preach the gospel to every creature.' who is to decide then from what depths of moral degradation the power of god's grace will fail to lift up a human being? certainly, we mortals, fallible, helpless, sinful, as we must feel ourselves, are not capable of judging. all we have to do is to receive the plain command, and obey it. oh, there is scope, believe me, for the exertions, not of one missionary only, but of hundreds and thousands of the soldiers of the cross in those very regions of which you have spoken. how can we dare to doubt how the gospel will in the end be received? `blessed are ye which sow beside all waters,' `cast thy bread upon the waters: for thou shalt find it after many days.' `in the morning sow thy seed, and in the evening withhold not thine hand, for thou knowest not which shall prosper, either this or that, or whether they both shall be alike good.' our duty as disciples of christ is plain. we are to sow. `god giveth the increase.' that is not to be our care. we are to `preach the gospel to every creature.' some will hear; some will turn away from the truth. with that we have nothing to do, except to pray and work on, awaiting god's time. you have none of you seen more than the outside of my uncle john's journal. indeed, i had not myself till lately looked into it. he was, as you may have heard, a seaman, and he made more than one voyage to the pacific. possessing more education than most officers in the merchant service in those days, he seems to have carefully noted the observations he made as he sailed from place to place. his descriptions are graphic, and he was of an acute and inquiring mind; his remarks, too, are of value. i think, therefore, that we may glean from it both amusement and instruction." we of course all expressed a wish to hear the contents of our relative's journal, and it was agreed that the next few evenings should be devoted to its perusal. i should observe that our father's interest in the subject of missions to the heathen in foreign lands had lately been awakened by the visit of an old friend, one of that band of great and good men who were then endeavouring against contumely, ridicule, and every opposition which the prince of this world could raise, to send the glad tidings of salvation to the perishing millions scattered thickly on the surface of the globe, over which midnight--the midnight of heathen darkness--reigned. i believe that the thought of our dear father's heart at that time was--"i have many sons given me by god; surely not one of them have i a right to withhold from his service; all, all, every one of them should be freely, joyfully given if it be his will to accept their services." i do not mean to say that he uttered these words, but that such was the language of his heart spoken to heaven, i am certain, from conversations and circumstances which subsequently occurred. of all the family our brother, john, appeared to be the most deeply impressed with the remarks which had dropped from our father's lips, and as i watched his expressive countenance, i observed the changes passing over it, and am now certain that feelings were then working within his bosom too deep for utterance, and which afterwards exerted a powerful influence on his career. the following evening, the word of god having been read and our frugal supper discussed, the looked-for journal, a dogskin-covered, somewhat worn folio, was produced. john, by a unanimous vote, was chosen to read it, and i am bound to say that the honest seaman's descriptions gained considerably by the spirit which our brother's animated voice threw into them. chapter two. supped at the "three crowns" with phineas golding our supercargo, and so aboard, my leave being up, and work enough and over to get the ship ready for sea. a long voyage before us of four, or it may be of five years. meeting our supercargo at the owner's, i had deemed him a quiet, well-behaved young man; i now find him a slashing blade, ever ready with his fist, or his sword, as with his pen,--hot in dispute, and always eager to bring a quarrel to the arbitration of one of the former. how differently do men appear when in presence of those they serve and when out of their sight! there exists one out of whose sight we cannot escape. how comes it that we do not always bear that truth in mind? are we more afraid of a fellow-creature than of the maker and judge of all the world? i said thus much to phineas golding. he replied with an oath, which caused me to feel that i had been casting pearls before swine. and yet i was right, surely; for by speaking the truth boldly on fitting occasions, i do hold that the truth will in the end prevail, and may be conquer the unbeliever's heart. on one thing, therefore, i am resolved, to go on as i have begun, and speak the truth always with earnestness of purpose. of my other shipmates i will speak a word. the master simon fuller, is grave man, the snows of nearly sixty winters settling on his head. he has made many voyages, and seems a fit man to command men. the first mate, too, james festing, is every inch a seaman, but somewhat handy with his fist, a rope's end, or a marline spike, or, truth to say, whatever lies nearest, and withal not over choice in his words when angered, or desirous of getting work done smartly. of myself, as second mate, it becometh me not to speak. i have been five years at sea, am a fair navigator, and an average seaman. i fear god, and strive to do my duty, though not always succeeding. our ship's company muster thirty-five good men, i hope, all told fore and aft. the ship, as is requisite, is well armed, with six guns with swivels on the quarters, and muskets, pikes, axes, and cutlasses for all hands. we have to visit many strange places and strange people, and we must expect often and again to fight for our lives with the savages. phineas golding rejoices in adventure, and says such chiefly induced him to leave home. he has never before been at sea, and dreams not of the troubles in store for him. _june_.--we have taken our departure from the land, which is even now sinking astern, a strong breeze blowing from the north-east. _july_.--we have touched at madeira, belonging to the portingalls, as the old voyagers call them. they are a suspicious people, though civil when not angered. i witnessed some public exhibitions, which i was told were religious. i cannot suppose that such performances are acceptable to our lord and master, or he would surely have ordered such. but it becomes not me, after so slight acquaintance with a people, to pass much censure on their customs, though i see not how to approve them. crossing the line, we had a usual father neptune and his tritons on board. tony hinks, our boatswain, was neptune. he and his mates severely handled some of the men who had shown ill manners or bad tempers, tarring their faces, and shaving their chins with rusty hoops. phineas vowed that he would not be so treated, but had to succumb, escaping with a thorough sousing from a dozen buckets. phineas vows vengeance on the boatswain; but i warn him that tony hinks followed but the custom of the sea, and is not a man over whom it would be easy to get an advantage, for he boasts that he always sleeps with one eye open. we have touched at rio, the chief town in the brazils. from what i saw, i should take the people to be heathens, such as i have read of in roman and grecian history; but they say that they are christians. one thing is certain, that if they desire to keep the sabbath holy, they have a curious way of so doing. still i say, it would be easy to sail from place to place and to condemn all we visit unheard. one thought occurs to me: "look to it that we fall not into like errors." proceeding south before rounding cape horn, we again made the land, and standing in, anchored the ship in a sheltered cove. it was the southern part of that region known as patagonia. the captain, with phineas golding and i, with a crew of eight men, well armed, took the long boat and went ashore. the aspect of the country was not pleasant; rocks, and trees, and marshes, but no signs of cultivation. suddenly from among the rocks some creatures appeared watching us. "are they men or are they baboons?" asked phineas, levelling his musket; but the master held back his arm. they approaching slowly and with hesitation, we discovered that they were human beings, though marvellously ill-favoured in aspect. their skin, which seemed of a dark brown, was covered with dirt, and their faces, which were flat with high cheek-bones, were besmeared with red and yellow ochre. their long black coarse hair hanging down straight over their shoulders, their small twinkling bleared eyes peeping out between it, like two hot coals. they had spears in their hands and short clubs. they were nearly naked, their chief garment consisting in a piece of sealskin, which they wore on the side whence the wind blew. again phineas was about to shoot in very wantonness. "what's the harm?" he asked. "we have no chance of trading with such people; and if we were to kill a few, what would it matter?" "they have souls, master golding," said i, for i could not keep silence; "and souls, i have learned, are precious things." a scornful laugh was his reply, and he still kept his musket ready, as if to fire. the savages, however, seemed in no way afraid, but lifted up their hands, and made as if they too had muskets; and when we laughed they laughed, and when we shook our fists they shook theirs; and so we discovered that, though hideous, they were a harmless race, and great mimics. they readily accepted beads, and knives, and coloured handkerchiefs, and such like things. these people, we learn from tony hinks, who has before been on the coast (indeed where has he not been?) are different from the tribes of patagonians who inhabit the country to the north as far as the spanish settlements. these latter are a fierce race, often of large stature, though not giants, as some suppose, and dress in skins and ride on horseback. again, there are other tribes whose dwellings are among the marshes and inlets of the sea up the straits of magellan. they move about only in their canoes, living on shell-fish, seals' flesh, and fish, their habits being more filthy and disgusting even than are those of our present friends. phineas laughs at the notion of their being our fellow-creatures, and says that they must have sprung from apes; but tony, who has seen many strange people, says that he would not give a fig for the supercargo's opinion, for that he has known white men become almost as brutish in their appearance, and much more brutish in their manners, just from living a few years among born savages, cut off from all communication with their fellow whites. a little practical experience often shows the folly of these would-be philosophers. on the pacific coast of this end of america are found the unsubdued tribes of the araucanians in vast numbers, so that in this one small portion of the continent are many hundred thousand savages, all lying in the midnight of heathen darkness. phineas observes that it is a pity they cannot be swept away, and civilised men, with whom it would be an advantage to trade, introduced in their stead. he esteems men in proportion as they are able to exchange gold dust, ivory, spices or precious stones, not knowing their value, for glass beads and brummagem knives and needles. i cannot help thinking that all those savages have immortal souls, and regretting that they should be allowed to pass away from this life without having the light of gospel truth set before them. year after year passes by, thousands are swept away, and still darkness dense as ever broods over the land. once more we are under weigh. with a fair breeze gliding over a long heavy swell, we pass cape horn, which stands out boldly into the blue waters, and enter the mighty pacific. tony hinks tells us that, though peaceable enough at times, he has seen here as fierce gales and heavy seas as ever sent tall ships to the bottom. grant that we do not encounter the loss and disaster met with by lord anson, whose voyage i have been reading. hitherto a kind providence has favoured us, and we are standing up along the coast of chili, the lofty andes rising blue and distinct against the sky in the distance. chapter three. tahiti in heathen days. anchored in the bay of conception to obtain meat and vegetables, and to refresh our ship's company. the town whence we obtained supplies is talcaguana, the old town of conception having been destroyed by an earthquake, and the new town standing some way inland. it is a wealthy place--no lack of silver and gold utensils in the houses, and flocks and herds outside, but the inhabitants lead uneasy lives, for not far off beyond the mountains are found tribes of fierce araucanians, who, riding fleet horses, now and again pounce down on the town, and never fail to carry off a rich booty. they care not for the spanish artillery and musketry, they keep out of range of them; but might not the power of gospel truth spoken in season change their savage natures? could some christian men find their way among them, they might tell them of happier employments than killing each other, and robbing their neighbours. yet i dream. such seems to be the chief occupation, not only of savages, but of civilised people all over the world. what power can assuage such a flood of iniquity? there is one and one alone, the bright light of gospel truth, and the living power of divine grace. having shipped our stores, the boat was leaving the shore for the last time, when a brown man, dressed as a seaman, with strange marks on his face and hands, came down begging to be taken on board. his name he said was taro, and that he was a native of an island far to the west, also that he had long been on board an english ship, the master of which had left him here sick. captain fuller believing his tale, and well pleased to obtain the services of one who might prove useful as an interpreter, consented to receive him among the crew. our ship's company gave him at first the name of tar, and hence he soon became known among them as tom tar. he proves an amusing, and seemingly a good-natured fellow till he is angered, and then he will cast off his clothes, and seizing a billet of wood or whatever comes to hand, will flourish it, threatening the lives of all near him, exhibiting his body covered with strange devices, appearing, as he is still, the fierce, vindictive savage. he comes from an island called new zealand, where the inhabitants are terribly fierce, and undoubted cannibals. i asked taro whether he had ever eaten any of his fellow-creatures. he nodded, laughing, and i doubt not, from the expression of his countenance, that he had often done so, and would not hesitate in again indulging in such a practice. though living so long among men professing to be christians, he is still a heathen in all his thoughts and ways. i asked him one day how this was. his answer was simple: "they say and do just what heathen man say and do. they no pray to their god; they no care for their god; they no love their god. why should i?" taro spoke the truth; i felt abashed. how can we expect the heathen to become christians, when those who call themselves so show so little regard to the religion of christ? i see the same sad shortcoming on shore. christians do not strive to bring honour to the name of christ. for three weeks and more we traverse the pacific, keeping bright look-out by night and day for rocks and reefs. "land on the starboard bow," is the cry. we haul up for it. as the ship rises and falls on the long, slow swell, now the trees appear partly out of the water, now they disappear looking thus at a distance like a fleet at anchor. there are cocoa-nut palms, pandanus trees, and many shrubs, growing on a low island, fifteen feet at most above the level of the sea, some twelve miles long, and not a quarter of a mile wide, with a deep blue lagoon inside. this is one of those wonderful coral islands of which i have read, formed by minute insects working upwards from rocky foundations amid the ocean, and ceasing their work when they have reached the surface. the waves have torn off masses and thrown them up so as to form an elevation above the water; then birds have come, dropped seeds, and formed their nests, and dwelt there; and timber and plants floating about have been cast on shore, and their vitality not yet destroyed, have taken root; and more coral and shells have been heaved up and ground fine by the toiling waves to form a beach; and thus a fit dwelling-place for man has been formed. nearing the sandy beach we heave-to for soundings, but finding none, the ship stands off, while phineas and i, with tom tar and our boat's crew, well armed, pull in with the intention of landing. this the surf will not let us do; and as we are lying off on our oars, presently, from out of the bushes, rush a herd of savages with spears and clubs, which they flourish furiously, making signs to us to be gone. we pull on, however, and find an opening in the reef, through which we get close to the beach. the natives shout and gesticulate more vehemently than ever. they declare (so taro interprets) that we come for no good purpose, and that they want no strangers. phineas hopes that they may possess pearls with which to trade, so we row in, he standing up in the bows of the boat, holding up a looking-glass and a string of glass beads in one hand, while he keeps his musket ready in the other. he is bold, and leaping on shore, approaches the natives. at first the savages retire; then one advances, stops, gazes at the supercargo, and with a loud shout, flourishing his club, rushes towards him. phineas, flinging down the looking-glass and the beads, springs back, firing his musket in the air. the savage is upon him. in another moment that huge club will have dashed out his brains. i see his danger. i have no thought but to save him--no feeling that i am about to slay a fellow-creature. i raise my musket to my shoulder and fire, taking good aim. the savage falls. phineas, shouting to us to give the indians a volley, is hauled in. the men obey as the indians, with terrific howls, rush towards us. five more fall, some in the water, which is tinged with their blood, others on the land. our passions are up. golding urges us to load and fire again. having thus done, we pull away. says golding, "they'll not meddle another time with strangers who peaceably visit their shores to trade." we leave ten or twelve poor heathens dead or wounded on their native strand. my thoughts are sad. the face of that hapless savage as he turned his eye on me when falling is still in my sight. true, i fired to save the life of a shipmate. yet it is an awful thing to shed the blood of a fellow-being, let it be in warfare or in any other way which men justify as from stern necessity. are such, too, the blessings which we christian and civilised men distribute in our course round the globe? the loud laugh of my companion sounds in my ear. "come, rouse thee, john harvey," he says. "art down-hearted, lad, because we have not been more successful in our traffic? not a good beginning, but the pacific is wide, and there will be no lack of customers." standing on for three days we sight several islands. on the nearest is a grove of fine cocoa-nut trees. we require a supply of nuts. two boats with crews well armed leave the ship. an opening appears in the reef--we pull through it and land easily. our men climb the tall trees and shake down the nuts in heavy showers. while we are collecting the nuts, the men in the trees shout that they see a fleet of large canoes crossing from another island. we deem that it will be prudent to regain the boats. the indians, seeing the broken nuts strewing the ground, and the heap we are carrying away, shriek, and shout, and shake their clubs and spears, and then furiously rush towards us. golding, as before, cries out to the men to fire, but i order them to shove off, that we may escape without killing any, for which i see no necessity. we have stolen the savages' provisions, and they have right on their side. the men obey me, and we strive to get the boat afloat. no time to lose. the indians draw their bows, and the arrows fall thick around us; some come on with stones, and others plunge into the water with clubs and spears to do battle for their rights. our lives are in jeopardy, and one of our men is fearfully wounded. the savages throng around the boat and try to drag her to the shore. we keep back the savages with the stretchers, and i hope to escape without bloodshed. again golding shouts out, "fire, lads! fire! why keep back the men from firing? we shall all be murdered." urged by his example, the men fire a volley among the surrounding savages. with fearful howls those grasping the boat let go; others fall back killed; the mass rush in terror up the beach. we escape into deep water, two or three arrows sticking in the arms of our men and in the sides of the boat. golding cries out for vengeance; and the men fire till every savage has disappeared. we return on board. it strikes me that we cannot appear very well favoured in the sight of these poor savages. i say as much that day at dinner to the captain. he is a man of few words. "you are right, john; the next comers will suffer," he remarks. "that matters nought to us," says phineas golding. "we shall not come here again." "scant kindness to the next comers; as scant as that we have showed the natives," i observe. "we must all look out for ourselves in these seas," says the captain. "it will be our own fault if we are at any time caught unawares. remember that, master harvey." i make no answer, for the captain does not bear contradiction. the first mate, golding, and the doctor, keep always well with him. so do i, for this reason: i heard him once say, "that john harvey needs keeping under." on that, i resolved, as far as it should lie in my power, to keep myself under--to do my duty, and give him no occasion to find fault. thus far i have succeeded--but not always with ease; for simon fuller has had uncontrolled power as a sea captain for many a long year, often over rogues and vagabonds, whom fear alone will keep in order, so he fancies. i have heard say that the rule of kindness will work wonders. i have never seen it tried as i could desire, but i find that the worst of our ship's company obey me more readily than they do james festing, and yet the first mate is an older, and, i truly believe, a better seaman than i am. i speak quietly to the lads, eschew oaths, and never handle a rope's end in wrath. he swears loudly, and uses both. i was called forward to see tom collis, the poor fellow who was wounded in the boat. the surgeon can do nothing for him, he says, and i see that the man's countenance is marked by death's hand. around us, as i sit by him, we hear laughter, and oaths, and gross talking. collis is suffering great agony. "mercy! mercy!" he shrieks out. "to die thus-- no time for repentance, with hideous crimes weighing down my soul!" sometimes he raves, and says things which make my blood run cold; but i talk quietly to him, and he grows calmer. i tell him in few words of that simple plan god in his gracious mercy arranged before the world began, by which sinners even great as he might be saved. he drinks in every word. i tell him how the loving jesus came on earth to live as a man a life of suffering, that men might understand that he knows how they suffer; that he was tempted, that they might feel assured he pities, and will help them when they are tempted; that he was crucified,--made a sacrifice, that he might take their sins on his shoulders; that his blood was shed that it might wash away the sins of all who trust in it, and look to him; that he was buried, and rose again, that he might conquer death, and show that all who follow him must conquer too; and that he ascended up on high, that he might present all who place their faith in him washed from their sins pure and undefiled before the throne of god. "but all that could not be done for such a wretch as me," says collis. "if god would let me live, i might repent, and lead a different sort of life, and do all sorts of things to please him; and then perchance he might think me more fit for heaven." "oh, my dear shipmate," i say, "don't think of such folly. you could never do anything to make you more fit for heaven than you now are, vile, sinful, guilty wretch as you may be." i then read to him how the israelites, bit by the fiery serpents in the wilderness, were saved from death and cured by looking at the brazen serpent held up by moses. and then i read about the thief on the cross, and then i say: "just look to jesus in that way. feel that you are bitten by sin, helpless, and dying, and deserving of death; and he says to you, as he said to the thief on the cross, `to-day shalt thou be with me in paradise.'--`thy sins are forgiven thee.'" "what, sir!" exclaims collis, "you don't mean to say that the son of the great god who made heaven and earth, and all those thousands of stars we see up there, did all that for me, and such as me,--that he says all that to me, and such as me?" "shipmate," i answer, solemnly, "he did do all that for you, and such as you,--and he says all that to you. take hold of but the hem of his garment, so to speak, by faith, and you are saved. as to satisfaction to divine justice, it is done. you have nothing to do with that, you have but to feel that you are sinful and guilty. you have to repent, which, may god the holy spirit help you to do. you have to look to jesus as the only cure, as the only saviour,--to his blood as the only means by which you can be cleansed; and the holy word of god says it, `thy faith hath saved thee,'--`by faith ye are saved,'--`his blood cleanseth from all sin.' he doesn't say from little sins, or slight sins, but from all sin. he doesn't say he will receive you by-and-by, perhaps, when you have done something to please him; but he does invite you, he does receive you. no power of earth or hell can prevent him from presenting you faultless before the throne of grace. shipmate, if you only feel your guiltiness, it is you he invites, with all your sins upon you, to come to him,--it is you he will present faultless and fearless before god's judgment throne, welcomed as a son of god,--not crying out, as numbers will be doing, for the mountains to cover them, for the rocks to fall on them." "this is news indeed,--glorious news!" says the poor fellow, in a cheerful, happy tone, very different from what he had before spoken in. "i wish that i had known it before. but i know it now, and that's enough. jesus died for me, and i trust in jesus." i have soon to leave him to attend to my duty on deck. captain fuller would not hold it as an excuse that i was attending to a dying man. after some time, my watch on deck being almost out, tony hinks comes to me and tells me that collis is dead; but says he, "it was strange to hear him saying over and over, again and again, `jesus died for me, and i trust in jesus.' what does that mean, mr harvey?" i tell him. he goes forward, muttering, "strange! i never heard the like." i see collis once more before he is sewn up in his hammock. there is a smile on his features, such as i had never before seen there. six days more, and we sight the high land of king george the third island, called by the natives otaheite, or taheite. as we draw near it, the prospect becomes truly pleasing to the sight. lofty hills, covered with beautiful flowering shrubs, and fringed by pandanus, cocoa-nut, and various other trees which we see in these tropical regions, rise up into the clear blue sky, with green valleys between them, and sparkling waterfalls rushing down their sides. a line of white breakers intervene, however, foaming over a coral reef, with a belt of deep blue water between it and the white glittering beach and the feathery fringe of vegetation which springs up close to the strand, the trees overshadowing it with their branches. never have i seen a more lovely picture; and tony hinks, who has been here before, tells us there is no country, to his mind, more pleasant to dwell in. "a man may live here," says he, "with nothing to do, abundance to eat, and plenty of people to tend on him." he gives the first mate and me a hint to keep a sharp look-out on the ship's company, or some of them may be missing when we sail. no wonder, i think, if the place is such an earthly paradise. he speaks of many other things likely to prove attractive to seamen. i ask if the natives are christians. "christians? no," he answers, with a laugh. "they would be spoilt, to my mind, if they were. they are much better as they are, as you'll agree, mr harvey, when you go on shore." i am inclined to be at issue with tony on that point; but still i would fain judge of the savage virtues of which he speaks before i condemn them. we coast some way round the island, till we reach an opening in the reef, entering through which we moor the ship in a commodious harbour. soon she is surrounded with native canoes, laden with cocoa-nuts, bananas, bread-fruits, apples, figs, and other pleasant vegetable productions. the natives bring boughs with them, which tom tar tells us we are to make fast to the rigging, to show that we are friends. we now drive a brisk trade, giving beads, and trinkets, and looking-glasses, and bits of cloth and coloured calico, for fruit, vegetables, pigs, and fowls; but the captain will allow no one to come on board. he says that they are arrant thieves, and so we find them. by-and-by phineas, with the doctor, tony, and i, having tom tar to interpret, go on shore, but take ten men well armed at our heels. it is a hard matter to keep the men together: but it is not safe to let them separate. the natives are treacherous and revengeful, at least if they are like those we have already encountered. our men might easily provoke them, especially by rude conduct to the women. seldom have i seen more comely females. their manners are attractive, and they know how to add to their charms, by dressing their glossy hair with flowers and shells, and such like ornaments. the country is as beautiful as it appeared a distance. the houses are mostly open at the sides, and thatched with palmetto leaves; but some are enclosed, and all are neat and clean. a house is offered to us by the chief, in which we may take up our abode while we remain on shore. it is amidst a grove of trees, with matting for the walls and floor. a sparkling torrent, rushing down the side of a hill, flows in front of it, cooling the air, while afar off is seen the deep blue sea. provisions of all sorts are sent us by the king,--baked pig, and roasted bread-fruit, and plantains, and fish, and other articles of food, all served in large leaves. the bread-fruit is about the size of a horse-chestnut, and when baked is somewhat of the consistency of new bread. it is not fit to be eaten raw. the king and the people seem friendly; but to my mind there is no dependence to be placed on them. it is made clear to us that they are sadly depraved, nor can i describe many of the scenes which take place. suffice it to say that, like other heathens who know not god, they give themselves up to work all manner of abominations without constraint or shame. we place a guard during the night; but when we awake there is great shouting among our party for missing articles, and it is found that we all have been robbed of articles of dress, knives, pistols, handkerchiefs, and pocket-books. phineas declares that he will shoot the first savage he finds purloining, chief or not. we complain of our loss to the king, who gets back some of the articles; but taro surmises that he has got the remainder himself. after a bountiful breakfast we continue our progress through the island. our surprise is great to come upon a large edifice of stone among a people supposed only able to erect huts of leaves. it is a pyramid, nearly three hundred feet long and one hundred wide, with a flight of steps on either side leading to the summit, which is fifty feet from the ground. on the top is a bird made of wood, and a fish of stone. this building forms one side of a court, the other three sides being composed of a wall of hewn stone; the enclosed area is covered with a pavement of flat stones. in this court are several altars of stone, on which are placed baskets of bread-fruit, sweet potatoes, cocoa-nuts, and other food, which we conclude were offerings to their eatuas, or gods, which they ignorantly worship. not far off we come upon a figure of one of these gods. it is made of wicker-work, in the form of a man; it is seven feet high, and covered over with black and white feathers. we learn that this pyramid is a temple, and that the court is a burying-place, called a morai; the altars are called ewattuas. while we are about to proceed on our journey we see a concourse of people collecting from all quarters, and hurrying toward the morai. we inquire of taro for what object they are assembling. "to offer a sacrifice to their eatua, their god," he answers. "of what will the sacrifice consist?" i ask, thinking that it would be of the bread-fruit and other fruits we saw on the altars. "you will see," he answered, with one of those gleams of savage pleasure which ever and anon pass over his countenance. we remark that there are only men and boys among the crowd,--no women nor girls. the crowd increases,--there is expectation on their countenances, as if something of importance is about to happen. still we can obtain no information from taro; he only says, "you will see, you will see." "a very well-behaved set of people are these," observes golding. "in england, among such a crowd, there would be fighting and squabbling. i would as lief be one of these happy islanders as an englishman, with all our religion and civilisation." "i have an idea, begging pardon, master golding, that you are not yet very well acquainted with these happy islanders," observes tony hinks. "it strikes me that ere long you will change your opinion. wait a bit; as tom tar says, you will see--you will see." chapter four. a narrow escape. the air is warm and balmy, the blue sea sparkles brightly, the lofty mountains, glowing in the sunshine, rise up majestically into the clear sky, the graceful palm-trees gently wave their boughs; all nature is smiling with life, and health, and beauty, and all the perfections which a bountiful creator has spread over these regions. "what a paradise," exclaims the surgeon. "i agree with golding, i should be well content to remain here to end my days." while watching for what is next to occur, we see four chief men, so they seem by their dress and bearing, walking along the beach. taro says they are priests. there are several men in attendance. they stop, as if waiting for some one. they are armed with clubs and knives. among the crowd comes a young man taller than his companions, and comely in his appearance. he seems joyous and light of heart, for he sings and laughs, regardless of coming ill. the priests, watching him steadfastly, slowly approach. he stops and looks at them with an inquiring expression on his youthful countenance. "we require one quick of foot to bear a message to the eatua," says the chief priest. the youth starts. before he can reply, a blow from the priest's club lays him low on the sand. the others fall on him with their clubs, and drive out any life remaining. the priests, surrounding the corpse, place it with the feet towards the sea, and utter some long incantations, each priest holding in his hand a bunch of red feathers. then they rise and place the body of their victim parallel with the line of the sea beach, and more incantations are uttered. the king, meantime, and his principal chiefs have assembled, and take their stand near the temple. hair is now plucked from the head of the victim, and one eye is taken out and wrapped in leaves, and presented to the king. with drums beating slowly the body is now borne up by the attendants of the priests, and placed on one of the altars. the tufts of red feathers are at the feet, and rolls of cloth at the head. after this, for a quarter of an hour or more the chief priest addresses it, and pretends to give the message it is to convey to the world of spirits. the surrounding populace look on with stupid amazement, no one knowing whose turn it may be next to be slaughtered as a sacrifice to their blood-loving deity. while the priests are chanting round the corpse the attendants dig a shallow grave, into which it is thrown with little ceremony, and covered up with stones and earth. fires are now lighted, and dogs and pigs are slaughtered and roasted, and these being placed on the altars, the eatua is invited to partake of the feast prepared for him. when we left the spot, i shuddering with a horror i had never before felt, the provisions remained on the altars. taro tells us that the priests, if angered with a person, avenge themselves by selecting him as a victim, and that for fear of offending them no one ventures to interfere. the priests have thus gained more real power than the chiefs themselves. they generally, however, select some of the poorer people as their victims. we see arranged near the morai a pile of sixty skulls, and that of the youth just slain is now added to it. they appear but little changed by the air, and taro says that they are those of victims who have all been offered up within the last few months. he tells us that whenever one of the chiefs is about to commence an undertaking, he selects some unhappy victim, who is forthwith slaughtered and sacrificed. we have undoubted evidence, too, that they often eat their enemies, and they do this without shame or compunction. we see many of the chiefs and warriors going about with human jawbones hanging as ornaments round their necks, and we learn that they are those of enemies slain in war. sick at heart i accompany my shipmates. "friend golding, what do you now say of these pleasant-mannered, happy islanders?" i ask. "i knock under," says he. "england is a better place; but there are thousands there who get on very well without religion, so i say religion has nothing to do with it." "religion has everything to do with it," i answer, in a somewhat hasty tone. "religion influences those who have no religion themselves. the heathen world of old, with all its civilisation, was not one jot better than are these cannibals, equally given over to work all manner of uncleanness. if it were not for the true faith of some, influencing general opinion, many englishmen would even yet be the same as these savages. i may say, as said a pious minister of whom i have read, if it were not for god's grace, we ourselves should be as are these poor barbarians; we might well see ourselves in them." "a truce with your preaching, john harvey. you would make us all out blacker than we are," says phineas, walking on quickly. "that were a hard matter," i say. "be not offended, i include myself, remember. it is only as we see ourselves in christ jesus that we are otherwise than most black, guilty, and lost." "i understand you not, john," he answers. "but you shall not force me to acknowledge that i am not better than these half-naked savages." "i did not say that; by god's grace, or in his providence, there are great differences, but all are sinners in the sight of god's holy law. but we will talk more of this another time." this island of tahiti, or otaheite, is the largest of a group known as the society islands. it is about fifty miles long, consisting of two peninsulas joined by a narrow isthmus. it contains a mountain rising twelve thousand feet above the level of the sea. the other islands of the group are mostly lofty. they are eimeo, huaheine, ulitea, bolabola, and others. they are volcanic, and mostly fertile in the extreme. we visit ulitea, a beautiful island where there is a vast morai. numbers of priests reside here, and it is looked on as the sacred island of the group. in reality it is more given over to horrible wickedness than any other. while on shore we witness another terrible human sacrifice. not a week passes but some unhappy people fall victims to the bloodthirsty passions of the priests. this my first introduction to savage life makes me feel doubly grateful to god that i was born of christian parents, and in a land where the law of christ, however imperfectly obeyed, is acknowledged in some sort as the standard. the wind being fair, we sail north-east towards the marquesas. we have been for ten days at the anchorage of taogou, off the island of ohevahoa, the most fertile of the marquesas. we have been engaged most profitably in purchasing sandal-wood, and hogs, and fruits, and vegetables of all sorts, and phineas golding is in high spirits, and declares that these are a people truly after his own heart. their country certainly is beautiful, for though the mountains are not so lofty as those of the islands we have lately left, they equally please the eye, as do the groves, the valleys, and the waterfalls. the men are tall, handsome, and athletic, and the women are scarcely inferior in beauty to those of tahiti. alas, that i can say no more in their praise. both men and women are most depraved, of which we have constant evidence. hitherto we have been on good terms with these islanders. we have a strict watch kept, and whatever may be their secret disposition, they have had no opportunity of taking us at advantage. taro warns us to be on our guard. he tells us that they are treacherous, and that if they thought they would gain by murdering every man of our crew they would do so. taro understands their language, which is much like that of tahiti and his own country. the men are much tattooed, their only clothing being a piece of native cloth round their loins, but the women wear a petticoat and a mantle over the shoulder. this cloth is made of the fibre of a sort of mulberry tree--not woven, but beaten into a consistency of paper. when torn the rent is mended by beating on a fresh piece. it will bear washing only once. a garment thus lasts about six weeks. the women are better treated than among most indian tribes. their occupations are entirely domestic--they manufacture cloth, cook, tend the house, and look after the children, but from all we hear and see, their morals are degraded in the extreme. having completed refitting the ship as far as is necessary, i have been able to go on shore. we form a strong body, twelve officers and men in all, with muskets. our chief object is to visit a valley where the sandal-wood grows, to learn on what supply we can depend. high up the valley we come suddenly on a platform on which grows a large grove of bread-fruit, cocoa-nut, toa, and other trees. amid them is a large idol of hewn stone of a man in a squatting posture. the figure is not ill sculptured. his mouth is wide, and his eyes and ears large, while his arms and legs are short and out of proportion. there are numerous other idols, of the same size and form, made out of the bread-fruit tree, arranged on either side and behind him, as if they were his ministers and attendants. to the right and left of these hideous idols are two obelisks, about thirty-five feet in height, built very neatly of bamboos, with the leaves of palm and cocoa-nut trees interwoven. at the base are hung the heads of hogs and tortoises, offerings to the idols. they are also ornamented with streamers of white cloth. a few paces to the right of the grove we see four large war-canoes, furnished with their out-riggers, and decorated with ornaments of human hair, coral, shells, and white streamers. in the stern of each sits the figure of a man steering with a paddle, and in full dress, with plumes, ear-rings shaped like whale's teeth, and all the ornaments fashionable in the country. these canoes are placed here to be blessed, we suppose, by the priests. these priests have great power, for they are looked upon as little inferior to the idols. we see this same stone idol represented in a variety of ways, made of human bones, hung round their necks, or carved on their clubs, or making handles to their fans and walking-sticks. we find that there is no lack of sandal-wood, which raises golding's spirits. mine sink when i see the idolatry of these poor people, with no hope that they may be taught better. on descending the valley we pass a morai, or worshipping place, i may call it. on the ground is seated the chief, with his sons, and a large number of his attendants, or courtiers. in front of them are a number of little houses, or sheds, made of bamboo, each about two feet long and rather less in height, and ornamented with shreds of cloth. there are a dozen or more, forming a cluster like a village. the chief and the rest are singing and clapping their hands, and thus they go on for an hour or more. this they call praying to their gods,--a fit homage to gods of wood and stone. sometimes they stop, and laugh and talk together, as if they have forgotten what they are about. we have seen no human sacrifices, but we have reason to believe that they take place, and from what we hear the people are undoubtedly cannibals. there are several tribes on the islands, in some instances two or more an the same island, who carry on devastating wars with each other, and who all slaughter and eat the captives taken in battle. though they seem much attached to their country, they firmly hold to the belief that there is a far better land to the east, and numbers are seized with a strong desire to visit it. year after year the largest canoes are fitted out and provisioned, and men, women, and children crowding on board, they set sail, and away they glide, never to return. strange to say, that although those who have gone have not again been heard of, others are found equally ready to go in the same direction, believing that their predecessors have reached the happy land. the priests encourage this infatuation, as those who embark leave their property to them. this is faith, but alas! sadly misdirected. it shows a yearning for something better,--to escape from cruel wars and practices and misgovernment, to attain peace and quiet and rest. it is certain that almost all who thus embark perish horribly at sea. a few may be thrown on coral islands,--probably to die,-- certainly never to return. i must speak of the sandal-wood in which we are trading. it is a small tree, with numerous irregular branches, and which with the trunk are covered with a thick red-brown bark. the leaves, which turn inwards, are of a very dark green colour. the flowers, growing in clusters, are white, with a red exterior. the wood is of a light yellow colour, and is very fragrant. it is sold to the chinese, who burn it as incense in their temples, and manufacture from it a variety of articles. candles are also made from it thus: a thin sheet of the wood forms a wick, which is surrounded by a mixture of its sawdust and rice-paste. our traffic has continued without interruption. tony hinks, in command of a boat with golding, is embarking the sandal-wood, of which a pile lies on the beach. i am watching from the deck through my glass what is taking place. the vendor of the wood is a young chief: he has been examining the articles given him in barter. suddenly he seems discontented with them, and refuses to put more wood into the boat golding, who is on shore, threatens him. he lifts his club, and i believe that the last moment of the supercargo has arrived. tony hinks is in the boat; he lifts his musket, and before the club can descend on golding's head a bullet is sent through the chiefs shoulder, and the weapon drops powerless. howling with rage, he retreats; but it is to summon his countrymen, who with threatening gestures rush on. golding leaps into the boat amid showers of stones cast from the natives' slings, followed by spears and darts. while some of the men shove off others fire, and load again and fire. the boat is heavily laden, and can with difficulty be moved. i fear that my shipmates will be cut off, and share the fate of captain cook, and many others since his day. i order another boat to be lowered, and cry out for volunteers. no lack of them. i send down to the captain--there is not a moment to be lost. i, with eight hands, leap into the boat. away we pull. the captain comes on deck and calls us back. he points to a fleet of war-canoes coming round the point: he fears that we also shall be cut off, and that the ship, with the loss of half her crew, may fall a prey to the savages. still i cannot without an effort see my shipmates destroyed. we dash on,--the foam flies from our bows. hinks has got his boat afloat, but several of his men are wounded; yet they struggle bravely. we open fire, and keep the savages at bay. the war-canoes, however, approach,--hinks' boat gets up to us. it is doubtful whether we or our enemies will gain the ship first. we pull for our lives. simon fuller will fight his ship to the last. our shipmates are casting loose the guns ready for action. the savages in the war-canoes stand up ready to shower down their darts and stones at us. "give them a volley,--give them a volley," shouts golding. "it were lost time," i tell my men. "it were better get on board." we keep ahead of the enemy, and gain the ship's side. the falls are ready,--we hook on,--the boats are hoisted up, and we hasten to man the guns. there is a favourable breeze out of the harbour, the anchor is being hove up, the sails are loosed. the canoes gather round us; the savages begin to assail us with all their weapons, shouting and shrieking terribly. the ship gathers way; the savages, grown bold, are climbing up the sides. "depress your guns, lads," says the captain. "small-arm men, give it them." the shot goes crashing in among the canoes, knocking many to pieces. not a native clinging to the sides escapes the small-arm men. again and again we fire, leaving the natives terrified and amazed at the power of our arms. our guns loaded with langrage commit great havoc among them. they lose courage,--the ship is clear of them. "and so we bid you farewell," says phineas golding, firing his musket at a chief with whom he had the day before been lodging. we sail out of the bay, firing shot on either side. "we have a good supply of sandal-wood, however," observes phineas golding. "but we had a narrow escape from the savages." not a word does he say of his merciful preservation from death; and far be it from me to hint that by my promptness i had a second time saved him, and all with him, from destruction. tony hinks, however, when we are clear away at sea, comes up to me and says-- "we owe our lives to you, mr harvey. if you hadn't come when you did, it's my belief that not one of us would have escaped." chapter five. among the cannibals. afar off appears above the blue line of the horizon a silvery dome clearly defined against the sky. it might be taken for a cloud, but that it never moves its position. it is the summit of the lofty mountain of mona roa in owhyee, the largest of the sandwich islands, now fully fifty miles away. there are ten of these islands, though eight only are inhabited, the other two being barren rocks on which fishermen dry their nets. as we draw near, other mountain tops are seen, those of mona kea and mona huararia. mona roa is a volcano, and the whole country round is volcanic. it is said to rise above twelve thousand feet above the level of the sea. it is night before we cast anchor in a sheltered bay. next morning we are surrounded by canoes, and many people come swimming off to the ship, for they are as expert as other islanders of the pacific in the water. we are plentifully supplied with taro, yams, cocoa-nuts, bananas, and water melons, also with hogs, which are of a large size. friend golding, however, finds that he cannot trade with them on the same easy terms as with other savages we have met, for many ships have visited them, and they now require firearms, and powder and shot. these people are much in appearance like those we have before seen--they are tall and athletic, and many of the chief people, both men and women, are of great bulk. i cannot but remember that it was at this island the renowned navigator, captain cook, was slain; and the people have long in consequence been looked upon as very savage and treacherous. this we do not find them to be, but they are heathens given up to gross superstition, and are ignorant and immoral. they carry on bloody wars with each other, offer up human sacrifices, and are, it is reported, cannibals. but if so be they are all this, and more, surely it behoves us as christians to teach them better things. what, however, do we do? we sell them firearms and ammunition to carry on their wars, we partake in their immorality; so far from showing them any of the graces of our religion, we make them by our lives believe that we have no religion at all, while by all those who visit these shores not a voice is raised to tell them of the truth. we find them more mild and gentle than the people of tahiti, and very different from the fierce savages of the marquesas. not far off is karakaka bay, where captain cook fell. we communicate with two other ships while lying here, and the officers all speak in favourable terms of the people. captain fuller, therefore, allows us to visit the shore more than he would otherwise have considered safe. we find these people very different from the wild inhabitants of the coral islands we have visited. they have attained considerable proficiency in many arts--their cloth is fine, and beautifully ornamented, as are their mats, but they excel in feather work. the helmets, and mantles, and capes of their chiefs are very beautiful. the helmets are in the form of those of ancient greece, and are covered with bright red feathers, worked in to look like velvet, with tall plumes, and as their cloaks are of the same texture and colour, and the wearers are tall, powerful men, they have, when armed with dubs or spears, a very imposing and warlike appearance. the king alone is allowed to wear a dress of yellow feathers. the common people, however, wear but scant clothing, none being required in this favoured climate. their great war-god is tairi. to propitiate him human sacrifices are offered up, and his idol is carried at the head of their armies. lesser chiefs have also their idols carried before them. one of their temples, a morai, merits description. it is formed by walls of great thickness, like that at tahiti. it is an irregular parallelogram, two hundred and twenty-four feet long, and a hundred wide. the walls on three sides are twenty feet high and twelve feet thick, but narrowing towards the top. the wall nearest the sea is only eight feet high. the only entrance is by a narrow passage between two high walls leading up to an inner court, where stands the grim god of war, with numerous other idols on either side of him. in front rises a lofty obelisk of wicker-work, and inside this the priest who acts the part of the oracle takes his stand. just outside this inner court is the altar on which the human sacrifices are made. near it stands the house occupied by the king when he resides in the temple, and numerous other idols fill the rest of the space. all have hideous countenances, large gaping mouths, and staring eyes. tairi is crowned with a helmet, and covered with red feathers. great labour must have been expended in rearing this vast structure, and in carving all these hideous images, and sad indeed is it to consider the object for which all these pains have been taken. the king, with whom we have been on good terms, sends to captain fuller to beg that he will lend him some of his ship's guns and muskets, and a few of his crew, as he is about to make war on a neighbouring island. i am on shore with golding and taro, and while a message is being returned, he invites us to witness the usual ceremonies which take place before war. as we accompany him to the morai, we see dragged on by the crowd no less than eleven men, whose looks of terror, show that something they dread is about to happen. arrived before the temple, there is a cry from the multitude, who instantly set on them with their clubs. taro tells us not to grieve; that some are prisoners taken in war, others guilty persons who have broken a taboo, and others the lowest of the people. while we stand shuddering, a concourse of people arrive bearing fruits of all sorts, and hogs, and dogs. the human victims are stripped of all their garments, and placed in rows on the altars; the priests now offer up some prayers to the hideous idol, and then the hogs and dogs are piled up over the human bodies, and the whole, we are told, are left to rot together. sometimes, on occasions of great importance, twenty-two persons have been offered up. the oracle is favourable, we hear, and the king sends round to all his subjects to collect at his camp with their arms--spears, clubs, javelins, and slings--ready for battle. no one dares refuse. vast numbers assemble, but a few only of his immediate attendants have firearms. nothing can be more fittingly hideous than their idol god of war, with his grinning mouth armed with triple rows of sharks' teeth. a hundred war-canoes are prepared. the army embarks, and, like a flight of locusts, they descend on the opposite coast. we see flames ascending from spots where lately stood smiling villages. a few days pass, and the army returns victorious with numerous captives. some are forthwith offered up to the war-god, others are kept to be sacrificed on a future occasion. a great chief dies of his wounds, and several victims are offered at his tomb, while, as a sign of grief, his relations and followers knock out their front teeth, and fix them in a tree in his morai. his people also appear to have gone mad, committing every species of abomination, and we hear that many people lose their lives on the occasion. the sandwich islanders have many more idols than those of which i have spoken. there is mooaru, or the shark god, whose temple stands on almost every point or headland. to him the fishermen offer, on landing, the first fish they have caught that day--for they imagine that he it is who drives the fish to their shores. but the greatest of all their gods, or, at all events, the most feared, is pele, the goddess of the volcano. she resides on the summit of mona roa, and descends in fire and flames to punish her enemies below. she has many priestesses, who appear in the villages with singed garments and marks of fire on their persons, to demand tribute from the inhabitants to avert her vengeance. i do not hear of one of their idols who has a mild or beneficent disposition. all the sacrifices offered are simply to avert their vengeance. the people have no love nor veneration for their idols, and they believe that their idols' chief pleasure is in tormenting and punishing them. one of the most remarkable objects i have met with in the sandwich islands is what may properly be called a city of refuge. it is a sort of morai, surrounded by strong walls, with an entrance on each side. in the interior are temples and numerous houses, in which the priests and occasional occupants reside. here, whatever crime a fugitive may have committed, if he can reach it he is safe. a victorious enemy in pursuit of foes will come up to the gates, but if the vanquished have entered they are safe. during an invasion of the territory, therefore, all the women and children are sent in here, where they may remain in security. there are several such places of refuge in the islands. the taboo system is also very curious. the priests govern chiefly in this matter. they settle what or who is to be tabooed, and how long it is to last. to taboo is not only to set aside for a particular object, but to make sacred. the king, a hog, or a house, may be tabooed. during that time people may not do certain acts, and animals or things may not be touched or used. so important are these taboos held, that any person breaking through one of them is punished severely, often with death. is it not possible that some of the customs i have mentioned, though barbarous and debased, may have been derived from ancient tradition? whence has sprung that strange expectation of the return of their long-lost god, rona, to bring a blessing on their nation? what means that longing for a better land far away in the east, entertained by the marquesas islanders? the king of this island seems to have great power. he is the owner of all the land, and is the lord and master of all his subjects. he rules wisely, and has the affection of his people. i might say a great deal more about these sandwich islanders--their history, habits, and customs, and of the events which have taken place since we have been here, but should i write all i might, my journal would be soon filled. to describe them briefly thus:--their islands are grand and picturesque; they are very intelligent, and are physically powerful, but they seem abandoned to a debased idolatry, to cruel customs, and to a gross licentiousness. constant and barbarous warfare, infanticide, and the diseases introduced by their foreign visitors have so rapidly decreased their numbers that the population consists of one-third less now than it did at the time of cook. captain fuller, and the other masters and mates of the ships here laugh at the idea of their ever becoming christians or civilised, and, in truth, unless they have faith in god's grace, it would seem a hard matter; but i know that he can order all things according to his will, and that, in spite of all man's theories and doubts, he will find means to accomplish his work. phineas golding has just come on board in high glee. he says that he has just heard from taro, who gets the information i know not how, that there are to the southward of this several coral islands, where abundance of mother-of-pearl and also pearls of great size are to be procured; and thus, instead of sailing west, as we had proposed, he has arranged with captain fuller to sail once more south towards the hervey group, and to touch at the friendly, fiji, and many other islands, ere we once more steer north-west towards our destination. to complete our stores, we take in a good supply of salt, to be obtained here in abundance; and then bidding farewell to our friends the sandwich islanders, we make sail, and steer south. we find a young lad, the son of a chief, who had managed to secrete himself on board. we ask him why he has done so. he answers that he wishes to see the great country from which we come, and promises to do everything we require if we will let him remain. captain fuller consents; but i fear sometimes that he will have a hard life of it. i resolve, however, to protect him as far as i can. he gets the name of charlie, but no other. we have sighted several low coral islands, but at length we reach the neighbourhood of a group known as the penrhyn islands, about six hundred miles due north of the hervey group, which we also purpose to visit. we sight a coral island, which we estimate as fifty feet high, nine or ten miles long and five broad, with a deep lagoon in the centre. it is as if a huge coral ring had been thrown down in the ocean. at one end there is an opening, through which a boat can enter the lagoon. the island is covered with groves of cocoa-nut, pandanus, and other trees; and, from the number of huts we see, and the people moving about, it seems to be thickly populated. while the ship is hove-to, i take charge of a boat to carry the supercargo, and taro, and charlie; with six men, on shore. we pull round, but find that there is so heavy a surf running that we cannot land on the outside. to save time, taro and charlie swim on shore to communicate with the natives. i anxiously wait off to receive their report. after some time we see them running, pursued by many natives. they leap into the water, and dash through the surf. some of the natives attempt to follow, but our shipmates distance them, and are taken safe on board. they say the natives, though looking very wild and fierce, were kind in their manners, and invited them up to their houses, and brought them food; but that they soon pressed round them, and began to strip off their clothes, and to take possession of everything they had. seeing them preparing some hot stones with which to heat an oven, they believed that they were to be cooked and eaten, and so starting up, they rushed headlong for the shore, so completely taking their entertainers by surprise, that no one at first attempted to stop them. they report, however, that they saw pearl-shell ornaments, and even pearls, worn by the savages; which so excites golding's imagination, that he insists on our attempting further communication with the people. finding at length the opening into the lagoon, we approach the mouth, the surf breaking over the rocks on either side with great violence. there is a narrow lane of clear water; we pull in; a strong current carries the boat along with fearful speed, and several seas break into her. it seems as if we were in a whirlpool. the rudder has lost its power, and we are spun round and round helplessly; about every moment it seems to be hove on the rocks. she violently rises and falls, and then we are cast, as it were, into the smooth water of the lagoon, though still carried upward for some distance. it strikes me at the moment that we are like mice caught in a trap, and that it must depend on the pacific disposition of the natives whether or not we escape. at length we steer for the shore, where we see several indians collected. they retire as we draw near. we again send taro and charlie on shore with looking-glasses and trinkets; they go not very willingly. the savages stop, and cast at us glances of suspicion. then they make a rush forward, seize all the articles they can lay hands on, and again run off. our two interpreters now come down shaking their heads, and saying that there is no hope of trading with these savages. still phineas will not give up the attempt; he has seen the pearls, and is longing for them. "why, such a necklace as that would be worth a hundred pounds, or more," he exclaims. "we must have the fellow dead or alive." he stands up in the boat with his piece, ready to fire. i sternly draw him back, crying out, indignantly: "i will not allow murder to be committed; for murder it would be, if the men were ten times more savage than they are. they have souls immortal as ours, which we have no right to drive out of their bodies before their time." "souls or not, mate, you have made me lose my pearl necklace," says the supercargo, angrily. "it were better to lose a dozen pearl necklaces, or all the pearls the bottom of the sea can produce, than commit a great crime," i answer, more hotly than usual; and then, knowing that another sort of argument would have more weight with such a man, i added, "remember, too, we are yet inside the trap. if we kill one of these people, their countrymen may assemble at the entrance, and slaughter every one of us." this silenced golding. we pull some way up the lagoon. the water swarms with fish, and the shore seems more fertile than any of the coral islands we have visited. in all directions we see signs of inhabitants, and in some places small canoes hauled up, but none approach us. we now pull back towards the passage by which we entered; but the tide still runs in like a mill-stream. suddenly we run aground. the men jump out and lift the boat off. we are in a wrong channel. we at length get into what we believe to be the right passage. the men track the boat along, but we make little way. night comes on rapidly. there will be a moon, but it has not yet risen, and without its light we cannot escape. we secure the boat to the rock, and wait anxiously for that time. few of us can sleep, for we know not any moment whether the savages may be upon us. both taro and charlie declare, from what they saw on shore, that the people are cannibals. there was also the remains of a wreck burnt on the beach, and they declare their belief that some ship has been cast away there, and the unfortunate crew destroyed. we wait anxiously. golding says very little; he is evidently ill at ease. i write it, not to boast, but my own mind is far more at ease; for i can say, "in god put i my trust: i will not fear what man can do unto me." thus, through god's grace, i have always been allowed to feel when in positions of great peril. my shipmates i have heard speak of me as the bravest man among them. so i verily believe i am; but then i am brave not in my own strength, but in the strength of him who is strong to save. there would be many more brave men in the world, if all knew on whom they may leap confidently for support. there is a kind of bravery that is natural to some, and is a constitutional fearlessness; but a far higher and surer courage belongs to those who have committed their souls to their god and saviour, and who feel that whatever may befall them, when in the way of duty, must be for the best. these thoughts pass through my mind as i keep watch while the men are sleeping around me. still the night continues dark; but as i peep through the obscurity, i fancy that i see against the sky some objects flitting here and there over the rocks. i step cautiously back into the boat, rouse up the men, who seize their arms, and with the oars ready to shove off, if necessary, we wait prepared. the figures approach silently in great numbers, but cautiously stealing along, as if not aware that we are awake. we make no sound. on they come over the rocks, with more ease than we could advance in daylight. in less than a minute they will be upon us. i wish to save bloodshed. there is a faint light in the sky: it is the looked-for moon about to rise. suddenly the silence is broken by loud unearthly yells, and hundreds of naked forms spring up as it were from the ground upon us. chapter six. saved by a storm. never have i heard yells more terrific than those with which the penrhyn islanders set on us. we are assailed also with showers of darts and stones, which wound many of our people sorely. golding, brave as he is on most occasions, utters a cry of terror, and nearly leaps overboard on the opposite side of the boat i give unwillingly the word to fire. many of the foremost savages fall--the rest hang back. we shove off. the oars are quickly got out. the moon rises. i distinguish the channel. it is almost slack water. we pull for our lives. golding and taro stand up and fire. the savages either do not see their comrades fall or do not dread the bullets, for they rush along the rocks still within a few yards of us hurling their stones and darts. i feel assured that if we strike a rock our lives will pay the penalty. the rising moon gives me more light to steer, and allows golding and taro to take better aim. it shows us, however, more clearly to the savages. there is still the narrowest channel to pass. the savages are making for the point when, golding and taro firing together, two of their chief men fall. it is as i thought, they had not before noticed who had been struck. now they stop, and with loud howls lift up the bodies of their chiefs. our men bend to their oars--we dart through the narrow opening, and though many of the savages spring after us, they fail to reach the point in time. golding and taro continue firing without necessity. the poor wretches have received punishment enough, and why thus slaughter them when our own safety does not sternly require us to kill? the lights on board our ship greet our sight, and we pull gladly towards her--golding still uttering his regrets at the loss of his pearl necklace. we reach the ship, and stand off for the night, golding insisting that he will try his luck to-morrow. the morrow comes, but when we pull in the aspect of the people on shore is so hostile that even golding acknowledges that we are not likely to get pearls from them this visit. captain fuller, therefore, resolves to steer south for the hervey islands, according to orders, although, from the accounts i find in captain cook's voyages, i doubt much whether our supercargo will be satisfied with the traffic we may chance to open up with the natives. the first island we made is that of atiu, the same which captain cook calls wateeoo. it is about seven hundred miles west of tahiti. we passed not far from the low island known as hervey island, which gives its name to the whole group. we now sail round this island of atiu, in hopes of finding a landing-place, but none appears--a coral reef surrounds the whole. still our bold supercargo is anxious to land, and so while the ship stands off and on, i take him, with taro as interpreter, towards the shore, in the long boat, in which we have a gun mounted. we pull in as close as we may venture outside the surf. numerous natives are on the shore. taro beckons, and three small canoes are launched. they paddle swiftly through the surf, and come alongside. those on the shore stand waving green branches as a sign of amity, so golding determines to land with taro. away they go, and as i may not quit the boat, i watch them anxiously. they land in safety, and vast numbers of the natives instantly close round them. i see them borne up by the throng away from the beach, and then lose sight of them. two hours pass away, and they do not appear. i begin to dread that they have been cut off. i wait another hour. just as i am about to return to the ship, the canoes are launched. as they approach, to my disappointment i do not see our shipmates. "the indians are just thinking that they will knock us on the head," i hear one of my men say. "it will be our fault if we let them," i answer, not feeling, however, altogether satisfied that the man was wrong, yet unwilling to show any fear; "we'll let them know what we can do if they play us tricks. hand me the slow match." there was a clump of palm-trees close down to the beach. i step forward to the gun, and have the boat's head put towards the shore. on come the indian canoes paddling rapidly through the surf--the men shouting and shrieking, and whirling their paddles round their heads. i am unwilling to injure the poor wretches. i aim instead at the trees. the white splinters start off on either side from a palm-tree struck by the shot. the effect is like magic, the indians' threatening shrieks are changed to cries of terror, and in hot haste they dash back through the surf towards the shore. still we are left in doubt as to the fate of our friends. it is clear that we cannot land to go to their assistance. but i resolve not to give them up. we rest on our oars watching the beach. at length we see a concourse of people coming over a ridge of sand which shuts out the view of the interior from us. golding and taro appear in the midst of them. the savages seem to be paying them great respect, and golding bows with infinite condescension now on one side, now on the other. canoes are launched, they step into them, and the obedient natives come paddling off to us through the surf. golding steps on board and signs to the indians to return. "now, harvey, get on board as fast as we can," says he. "it has been a question in my mind all day whether we were to be treated as gods, or to be cooked and eaten; and even now i don't feel quite comfortable on the subject. your shot turned the scale in our favour, for notwithstanding all taro's boastings, they had no great opinion of us when they found that we could not bring our big boat through the surf." taro at length bethought himself of boasting that we could make thunder and lightning, and set off a few cartridges he had in his pocket to convince them. the effect was considerable, but not as great as was hoped for. there was the lightning, but the thunder was wanting. on the hill-side were some ovens with fire in them heating. taro looked at them suspiciously, not quite satisfied that he might not before long be put inside one of them. turning about, he saw some warriors walking round and round with huge clubs in their hands. he had no longer any doubt of their intentions. golding saw them also, and became not slightly uncomfortable. just then our gun was fired. many of the natives fell flat on the ground, others rushed hither and thither, while some of the braver examined the trees which had been struck, and reported the effects of the white man's thunder and lightning. instead of knocking our friends on the head and eating them as they had purposed, the savages came crouching down before them in the most abject manner, as if they were beings altogether of a different nature. still, as golding says, the look of those ovens made him glad to get down to the beach, lest the indians should again change their minds about him. two days after this we sight another island. again golding goes on shore with taro, and the captain, and tony hinks. i cannot be surprised if some day golding is cut off by the savages. he is bold and daring, and far from cautious. aitutaki is the name of the island. natives come off to us in great numbers singing and shouting. they are tattooed from head to foot. never have i seen wilder savages. some of their faces are smeared with ochre, others with charcoal, and are frightful to behold. we keep on our guard, for we know not any moment that they may venture to attack us. as taro is on shore we cannot understand what they say. festing and i allow only a few at a time to come on board. they attempt to climb up the sides, but we keep them off by striking at their hands with boarding pikes, and pointing to the gangway, showing that they may only enter there, a few at a time. still they persist, when festing taking up a musket ready at hand, fires it over their heads. they look around for a moment, as if not certain whether they are standing on their heads or their feet, and then leap headlong, some into their canoes and some into the water. they paddle to a distance, but then stopping, look back and threaten us. festing insists that the only way to make these countries of any use is to sweep the people off into the sea. as to civilising them, that, he says, is impossible. i differ from him. we wait anxiously as before for the return of the captain and our other shipmates. hour after hour passes by. however great the danger in which they may be placed, we cannot go to their assistance. we begin to fear that they have fallen victims to the savages. "you and i, harvey, will have to take the ship home, i suspect," observes festing; "i am sorry for the old man especially, as we can do nothing to revenge his death." "that were small consolation," i observe; "nor is that as god wills it." festing looks astonished. he would be very angry if he were accused of not being a christian, and yet, it seems to me, that he encourages feelings and ideas very much opposed to the rules christ our master laid down for the government of his disciples. evening approaches. with thankfulness i see the boat putting off from the beach. we stand in as close as the reef will let us to meet her. she makes for a narrow channel between the breakers. it is a question whether she will get through. the spray, as it curls upwards, completely conceals her. or--i look through my glass--has she been capsized by the breakers? no, she is seen again. her crew give way. she is soon alongside. all have come back safe, though they have been in great peril of their lives. captain fuller has a curious story to tell of the inhabitants of this lovely spot. they are the wildest savages he has ever seen. more like wild beasts than men, yet not so cruel as some of the islanders we have met. as an example. it appears from what taro has learned on shore, that a vessel calling off here but a few days back, landed a number of natives from another island, who, instead of being killed and eaten, have been kindly treated. the name of the island is raratonga, but whereabouts it lies taro could not learn, for the vessel appeared off the coast at early dawn on the east side, and no one saw whence she came. they are young women, and have a pitiable tale to tell of the cruel way in which they were kidnapped by these monsters in human shape. probably to prevent disputes among his crew, the captain landed these poor creatures, certainly from no motives of humanity if the account taro gives of them is true. the vessel only left the island three days ago, so that we may chance to fall in with her. both captain fuller and the supercargo declare that they will give the master a bit of their mind. "suppose," say they, "we had chanced to call off that island directly after those fellows had perpetrated this rascality, not suspecting harm, what would have been our fate? without doubt we should have been clubbed." "so we might, indeed!" i observe, but i think to myself, what may other voyagers say who follow in our footsteps. have we not shot down the poor savages, who have been defending their own shores? well may the islanders be ready to destroy any white men they can get into their power. captain fuller says that he never was in greater danger of losing his life than on this morning. if one of the party had wavered, the savages would have been encouraged to rush in on them and club them. he and golding talk of looking for raratonga in the hopes of trading with the natives, but we can by no means learn in what direction it is to be found. there is another group we hear of to the south of the society islands called the austral islands, but it would take up too much time to visit them, and so we shape a course for the tonga or friendly islands. rumours have reached us that the people do not quite deserve the character given of them by captain cook. steeling west, we again sight land. we stand in, and heave-to off the coast. it is savage island, justly so-called by captain cook. several canoes, with uncouth, fierce-looking savages, come off to us, with painted faces and long hair, even more brutal than those of aitutaki. taro ascertains from them that another vessel with two masts has just called there, but gone away,--undoubtedly the brig which carried off the poor people from raratonga, the unknown island. we may therefore overtake her. a calm comes on,--the savages surround the vessel, and contemplate an attack on us, it seems. the guns are loaded with langrage, and captain fuller issues orders to prepare for our defence. their numbers increase. taro warns us that they are about to commence an assault on the vessel. he signs to them that they had better not make the attempt; but by their gestures they show their contempt and boldness. again with loud shouts they come on, shooting their arrows, and hurling darts, and spears, and stones. "depress the guns, and fire," cries captain fuller. the order is obeyed. in an instant the sea is covered with the forms of human beings, some swimming from their canoes cut in two, others having jumped overboard through terror. the sea is red with the blood of those wounded. the captain orders that the guns be again loaded. shrieks, and groans, and cries rise from the water. it is fear, i feel sure, prevents the poor wretches moving. i wish that i might beg the captain not again to fire; but he would not listen. he is about to lift his hand when i see the topsails fill, and the vessel glides out from among the crowd of canoes. "hold," cries the captain; "they have had enough of it." away we sail, following the setting sun. "a pretty day's work," i think to myself, as i get into my berth. "yet how is it to be avoided?" i drop asleep. i know that i am asleep, and yet i fancy that i am looking over the side of a vessel,--not the _mary rose_, though,--and i see the ocean covered with the forms of men, their skins brown, and white, and black, swimming towards all points of the compass. they swim strongly and boldly; each on his head wears a crown of gold, and in his right hand carries a book,--an open book. i look again,--it is the bible. they read the book as they swim, and it gives them strength to persevere; for sharks rise up to threaten them, and other monsters of the deep. and now land appears, the very island we have left, and two or more swim towards it, and the savage inhabitants come out in their canoes to attack them, and i tremble for their fate; but the swimmers hold up their bibles, and the savages let them pass, and follow slowly. soon the swimmers land, and numbers collect round them and listen attentively while they read. weapons are cast away,--the countenances of the islanders are no longer savage. they kneel,--they clasp their hands--they lift up their eyes towards heaven,--their lips move in prayer. they soon appear well clothed, parents with their children dwelling in neat cottages, and lo! a large edifice rises before my eyes: it is a house of god. a bell sounds, and from every side come men, women, and children all neatly clad; and then the words of a hymn strike my ear. the music is sweet, but the words are strange. it grows louder and louder, till i hear the cry of "all hands shorten sail!" i spring on deck. the ship has been struck by a squall; she is almost on her beam-ends. it is blowing heavily, the thunder rolls along the sky, the lightning flashes vividly. not without difficulty the canvas is got off her. once more she rights, and now away she flies before the gale. the sea rises covered with foam. still she flies on. we prepare to heave her to; for thus running on, with coral islands abounding, may prove our destruction. it is a moment of anxiety, for it is questioned whether the canvas will stand. it requires all hands, and even then our strength is scarce sufficient for the work. we, under circumstances like these, see the true character of men. golding, hitherto so daring and boastful, trembles like an aspen leaf. he believes that the ship is going down, and dares not look death in the face. i may write what i feel: "whoso putteth his trust in the lord shall be safe," as says solomon, and as his father david had often said in other words before him. it is this knowledge makes the truly bold and brave seaman at all times. this night is one truly to make a stout heart sink not thus supported. at the main-mast-head appears a ball of fire. now it descends,--now it runs along the main-yard-arm,--now it appears at the mizen-mast-head,-- now there is a ball at each mast-head. the men declare that it is a spirit of evil come to guide us to destruction. often while the foaming seas are roaring and hissing round us, and the wind is shrieking and whistling through the shrouds, and all is so dark that a hand held up at arm's length can scarcely be seen, flashes of lightning burst forth making it light as day, and revealing the pale and affrighted countenances of those standing around. day dawns at length. as i looked to leeward, not half a mile away, i see a vessel. she is dismasted, labouring heavily. we are drifting slowly down towards her. now she rises, now she falls in the trough of the sea, and is hid from view. she is a brig, as we discover by the stumps of her two masts, and we do not doubt the very vessel of which we have lately heard. a signal of distress is flying from a staff lashed to the main-mast; but, with the sea now running, what help can we render her hapless crew? we watch her anxiously; even phineas golding, his thoughts generally running on dollars, seems to commiserate the fate of those on board, especially when tony hinks remarks in his hearing that such may be ours ere long. the men are at the pumps, and we can see them working for their lives; but, by the way she labours, there seems but little chance that they will keep her afloat. we are gradually dropping down towards her; we can distinguish through our glasses the countenances of the crew, their hair streaming in the gale. what looks of horror, of hopeless despair are there! they know that we cannot help them, though so near. the vessel is sinking lower and lower; the crew desert the pumps, and hold out their hands imploringly towards us as we drive down towards them. their boats have been all washed away: it were madness in us to attempt to lower one. some with hatchets are cutting away at the bulwarks and companion hatch to form rafts, others run shrieking below to the spirit-room, or rush bewildered here and there; not one do i see on bended knees imploring aid from heaven. the vessel now labours more heavily than ever; a huge sea rolls towards her,--she gives a fearful plunge. many of our people, rough and hardened as they are, utter cries of horror. i pass my hands across my eyes, and look, and look again. she is gone!--not a trace of her remains but a few struggling forms amid the white foam. one by one they disappear, till one alone remains clinging to a plank. we see him tossed to and fro, looking wildly towards us for help. not another human being of those who stood on the deck of the foundered vessel remains alive. will this one be saved? i feel a deep pity for him. as i watch him, i lift up my heart in prayer to god that he may be saved. the gale has been decreasing, and the ship lies-to more easily. we hope in a short time to make sail. the seaman still floats in sight. at length i believe a boat would live. i ask captain fuller leave to go in search of the man, and sing out for volunteers. no lack of them. we must have drifted some way to leeward of the man; but still, as i took the bearings when i last saw him, i believe that i can find him. away we pull; the seas are heavy, but long, and do not break much. i look out in vain for the seaman. "he must have gone down before this," i hear one of the crew remark. "but the plank would be floating still," i observe. "that man has a soul, whoever he may be. if we save his body, by god's grace his soul may be saved." this thought encourages me to persevere. often the boat is half full of water, but we bail her out, and pull on. already we are at some distance from the ship, when i see a dark, speck rise on the crest of a sea and then disappear. my hopes rise that it is the person of whom we are in search. we hear a faint cry. he is still alive. the crew cheer, and pull lustily towards him. the stranger gazes at us eagerly: he if a youth, with long light hair hanging back in the water. his strength is evidently failing. i urge on my men. even now i fear that he will let go his hold ere we can reach him. again he cries out imploringly. a sea striking the boat half fills her with water, and i lose sight of the lad. "he is gone, he is gone!" some of the men cry out. but no; i see his hair far down, close under the stern of the boat i plunge in, and diving, grasp it and bring him to the surface. the boat has forged ahead. with difficulty i get him alongside, and we are hauled on board. the young man has still life in him, but cannot speak. we pull back to the ship, more than once narrowly escaping being swamped. it is some time before the stranger can speak. even then he does not seem willing to say much. he does not mention the name of the brig to which he belonged, nor whether he was serving before the mast or as an officer; but he speaks like a lad of education. he is, however, so much exhausted, that it would be cruel to ask him questions. indeed, from a remark he made, i suspect that he believes himself to be dying. i fear that he may be right; but, alas! it is without hope that he looks on death,--only with dark horror and despair. i speak to him of one who died to save all sinners who look to him for salvation and repent; but my words seem to fall unheeded on the young man's car. chapter seven. a land of horrors. the young man we picked up two days ago is better. he takes more to me than to any one else, yet he is reserved even to me. his name is, he says, joseph bent, and the brig was the _wanderer_. i suspect that he is one of those castaways who have fled from the restraints of parents, or pastors and masters, and that he has been reaping the fruits of his folly, and found them bitter. the brig undoubtedly visited the island of which we have heard, and her crew were the men who committed those black deeds of which i have spoken, but do not here again describe. how soon are they all sent to their dread accounts except this youth! great is his astonishment when i speak to him of what was done, and of the poor natives so barbarously carried away. "the vengeance of a pure and just god quickly finds out the doers of such deeds," i remark. "and, joseph, my friend, where would you now have been had you not been rescued by the hand of mercy from the jaws of death?" "in torment--in torment!" he shrieks out; "in everlasting torments! rightly condemned--rightly condemned!" "but, think you not, that the same loving hand which saved your life from destruction will preserve your far more precious soul from death eternal if you will but believe in his power and will to save you? do not have any doubts on the subject. the most guilty are entreated to repent and to come to jesus--the loving saviour--the friend of sinners." "these are strange words you speak, mate," said the young man sitting up and looking earnestly at me. "not strange, friend," say i. "thousands and thousands of times have they been spoken before to the saving of many a perishing soul. let them not be spoken to you in vain." thus do i continue for some time, till i see tears starting into the eyes of the young man. the knowledge of a saviour's love softens his heart, while his sins still make him afraid. "i remember to have heard words like those you have been speaking, mate, long, long ago," he observes. "i forgot them till now. they sound sweetly to my ears." "never forget them again, friend," i answered, having now to go on deck to keep my watch. joseph bent lives, and is gaining strength, but as he does so he seems to be hardening his heart, and avoids religious subjects; yet he speaks of the doings of his late shipmates at raratonga. what must have been their feelings when their ship was going down, and the thoughts of their late evil deeds came rushing on their minds. if people would but reflect each morning as they rise, and say to themselves, "for what i do this day i must most assuredly account before the judgment-seat of the almighty," how many a sin might be avoided; and yet, surely, the love of jesus, the dread of grieving our blessed master, will do more than that. with me love is the constraining power--with some men the fear of judgment may have more effect; fear may prevent sin, but love surely advances more the honour and glory of christ's kingdom. it is love to his blessed master which will make a man give up home and country, and go forth to preach the unsearchable riches of christ to the perishing heathen; fear will keep him strictly observant of his religious duties at home: fear rules where the law exists; love reigns through the liberty of the gospel. yes, i am sure, that love, and love alone, will make a man a persevering missionary of the truth. we bring up at length on the north shore of tongatabu, at the same spot where, many years back, captain cook anchored his ships, when he called the island amsterdam. it is the largest by far of all the friendly islands, being some twenty miles long and twelve broad, and it is very beautiful, though not rising anywhere more that sixty feet above the level of the sea. its beauty consists in the great variety of trees and shrubs with which it is covered, while few spots on the earth's surface are more productive; added to this there is a clearness and brightness in the atmosphere which is in itself lovely. captain cook bestowed the name of the friendly islands on this group, on account of the friendly way in which the natives received him. captain fuller says that he has heard certain reports which make him doubt as to the friendliness of the natives. they come off to us in large double canoes, unlike any we have before seen. they consist of two canoes secured side by side, though at some distance apart, by a strong platform, which serves as a deck. in the centre is a house with a flat roof on which the chiefs stand. the sail is triangular, and formed of matting, and long oars are also used, worked on either side. these canoes carry a hundred men or more, and make long voyages, often to fiji, on the east, and lo! the navigators islands, on the north. when sailing forth for war covered with armed men, blowing conch-shells and flourishing their clubs and spears, they have a very formidable appearance. many smaller single canoes came off to us ringing fruits and fowl of all sorts. they are a very fine race of men, taller than most englishmen, and well formed and of a light healthy brown colour. they come on board in great numbers, and laugh, and appear to be well disposed. the captain's suspicions are soon lulled, and so are golding's. he wishes to trade with them for cocoa-nut oil and other articles. several of our men ask leave to go on shore, and the captain allows them. just as they have gone off, joseph bent comes on deck. he has, he tells me, been living on shore here for some time, and knows the people. notwithstanding their pleasant manners and handsome figures and countenances, they are treacherous in the extreme. he tells that of which i have not before heard, that missionaries have already been sent out to these seas; that some were landed on this very island, of whom three were killed, and the rest driven away. some, strange to say, were in king george's islands while we were there, but we heard not of them nor they of us. indeed, i fear that our captain would have taken but little interest in the matter, though he might have shown those poor banished ones, as countrymen, some of the courtesies of life. thus i see that people may visit a place, and fancy that they know all about it, and yet be very ignorant of what is going on within. other missionaries have gone, so says bent, to the marquesas islands. we heard nothing of them; indeed, our captain laughs at the notion of such savages being turned into christians. "who can this bent really be?" i have asked myself more than once. for one so young he knows much about these seas, and what has taken place here. while i have been thinking how good a thing it would be to have missionaries sent out among them, i find that people at home have already done so, though as yet to no purpose, as far as man can see. the people seem everywhere sunk in heathen darkness. when bent sees that some of our men are going on shore, he urges that they may be at once recalled; but captain fuller says that the supercargo, taro, and tony hinks, will take care they do not get into mischief. the half-naked chiefs, with their clubs in their hands, and many other people are wandering about the deck, examining everything they see, and now and then standing and talking, as if expressing their wonder. i observe bent moving quietly among them. soon afterwards he comes up to me. "mate," he says, in an ordinary tone, as if there was nothing the matter, "these men are plotting to take the ship. the fellows on shore will all be murdered, and so shall we unless we manage well. my advice is to get the chiefs into the cabin on pretence of giving them a feast, and then seize them and hold them as hostages. directly that is done, run the after-guns inboard and clear the decks. it will be better to knock away the bulwarks than to be clubbed." the captain seems unwilling to believe this. "i have little to thank you for in saving my life if you do not now take my advice," says bent, earnestly. "you, and i, and all on board may be numbered with the dead before many minutes are over. look at those men's arms, and at their heavy clubs. whose head would stand a single blow from one of them?" i urge the point with the captain, for i am convinced that bent is right. he is still irresolute, when we see some more canoes coming off from the shore. this decides him. fortunately the men's dinner is ready. the captain sends for it into the cabin, and the steward covers the table with all other food he has at hand. we then fix upon four of the leading chiefs whom bent points out, and by signs invite them to feast below. they look suspicious, and, we are afraid, will not come. bent stands by to hear what they say. he whispers to me that one of them proposes coming, as it will throw us more off our guard. again, by signs, we press them to come below. when at length they comply, we endeavour not to show too much satisfaction. we treat them with great courtesy seemingly, keeping our eyes, however, constantly fixed on them. we have the steward and two other men concealed with ropes ready to spring out and secure them. the captain, festing, and bent, go below, while i remain in charge of the deck, and festing hands me up a brace of pistols and a cutlass, through the companion hatch. the crew have been prepared, and stand ready to run in the after-guns and to slew them round the instant the chiefs are secured. i listen for the signal, anxiously watching the proceedings of the savages. now i see them talking together; now they handle their clubs, and look towards the cabin, as if waiting for the return of their chiefs to begin the work of death. they eye our men askance. it is clear that both parties mistrust each other. the suspense is painful in the extreme. there is a sound of struggling, and shouts from the cabin; the savage warriors press aft. just then the captain cries out that the chiefs are secured. i order the guns to be slewed round, and sign to the natives to keep back. they are about to make a rush, when bent springs on deck, and shouts to them in their own language, warning them that if they move our war-fire will burst forth on them, and that their chiefs will be killed. the men, looking grim and fierce, stand match in hand at the guns. bent now orders the savages to return to their canoes. sulkily, and with many a glance of defiance at us, they stand, unwilling to obey, till captain fuller brings on deck, bound, one of their chiefs, holding a pistol to his ear. the chief speaks to them, and one by one they go down the ship's side. bent now tells them that unless all our companions return in safety the lives of the chiefs will be taken. i bethink me of writing a note to the supercargo, telling him what has occurred, and urging him to return instantly. i give it to the last savage who leaves the deck, and bent explains to whom the paper is to be delivered. we now use all haste to get ready for sailing. we have for the present escaped a great danger, but we tremble for the fate of our shipmates, and we are convinced that fear alone will keep these savages in order. the chiefs, finding that bent can speak their language, endeavour to persuade him to let them go. "when our friends return you will be set at liberty," is his answer. it seems at present very doubtful whether they ever will return. bent says that these people are treacherous in the extreme, worshippers of devils, offerers up of human sacrifices, and cannibals, though not so bad as the people of fiji, the next islands we are to visit. the chiefs all this time are kept in durance below. i have seldom seen four finer men in figure and feature. the children, bent says, are often quite white, like english children, but as heathens they are born, and as heathens they die, without hope. a boat is now reported coming off from the shore. a large canoe follows. in the boat are fewer men than left the ship. what has been the fate of the rest? they come alongside, and we order the big canoe to keep off. the supercargo and taro make their appearance on deck. their escape has been most miraculous. already had the clubs of the natives begun to play on the heads of their companions, and five had fallen. golding tells me that he expected every moment to be his last. the man next him had been struck down, and lay writhing on the ground, when a cry was raised, and the canoes were seen hurrying away from the ship, the savages refrained from letting drop their uplifted clubs, and watched the approaching canoes. when the messenger with the note arrived there was a long consultation. golding says he never felt so uneasy. it was handed to tony hinks, who, unable to read, gave it to golding. he assumed a tone of authority, and through taro told the savages that if all the survivors were not released their chiefs would be carried away captives. they seemed to hesitate. golding believed that they were balancing in their minds whether they loved their chiefs or the blood of the white strangers most. at last they decided to let golding and taro with three other men go, and to keep tony hinks, whom they take to be a chief, as a hostage. tony was very unhappy at being left, and tried to escape, but the savages held him fast, and taro, it seems, who owes him a grudge, would not help him. thus we are placed in a difficulty to know how to get tony back without first liberating the chiefs. if it were not for the boatswain, the captain says he would hang all four at the yard-arm. at last it is decided that one alone shall go, and bent is instructed to tell him, that unless the boatswain instantly returns alive and unhurt, the other three shall be hung up. i put him on board a canoe, which comes out to meet our boat as we pull in. some time passes, and at length tony appears on the beach. we make signals that he must be brought off in a canoe. as he steps into the boat, stout-hearted fellow as he generally is, he sinks down, overcome with the terror he has been in. several of the crew cry out that now we have got him back, we must hang the savages we have in our power in revenge for our shipmates who have been clubbed. the captain says that we are bound to let one go. i plead that all should be let go, that on the faith of this tony was returned to us, and that it is both our duty, and wise as a christian and civilised people, to show clemency to the savages. with difficulty, however, i prevail, and bent tells the chiefs that they may order a canoe to come alongside, and may go free. they appear very much astonished, and doubtful whether we are in earnest. i watch their eyes when they fully understand that they are free to go. savages though they may be, there is human sympathy between us; they are grateful for the way we have treated them; and i feel sure that we should be far safer on shore should we return, than if we had hanged them as proposed. "we are well quit of these savages," observes golding, as we get free of the reefs, and stand out to sea. there is another group to the north of the tongas called samoa, or navigators islands. the people, bent tells me, are very like those of the tonga group. of this tonga group which we are leaving there are numerous islands--the first collection to the north, called the haabai group, while further north is that of vavau--all governed by different chiefs, who spend their time in fighting with each other. while i am on deck in charge of the watch that night i see a bright light burst forth to the north-east, rising out of the sea and reaching to the sky. there is a noise at the same time as if there was distant thunder. i fancy at first that some hapless ship has caught fire, and i send below to ask leave of the captain that we may steer towards her to pick up any of the crew who may have escaped. the captain bids me come and examine the chart, and i see several islands with burning mountains on them marked down. the fire we see proceeds undoubtedly from one of them--koa, perhaps. the matter is settled by finding our deck covered with fine ashes fallen from the sky. four days after leaving tonga we find ourselves among islands of every size and shape and height, many of them having lofty mountains in their centres, while coral reefs are in all directions. never has my eye rested on scenes of greater loveliness than these islands present; they are apparently fertile in the extreme, green gems dotting the blue ocean. if men could be perfectly happy and gentle and contented, loving each other and being loved, it would, i should think, be here. each island looks like a paradise--the abode of peace and innocence. we are standing in towards a secure harbour formed by a coral reef, a native town appearing on the beach, with a hill covered with graceful trees rising above it, down which a waterfall tumbles and glitters in the sunbeams, forming a clear pool, from which we expect to fill our casks. i remark on its beauty to bent. "no doubt about that, mr harvey," he answers. "but we have more need to be on our guard against the natives here than in any islands of the pacific. a more treacherous, fierce, and determined race of cannibals is not to be found. of all the islands we see scattered around, and of many score more, the inhabitants of one dare not visit their nearest neighbours, for fear of being entrapped and killed and eaten. their great chiefs and warriors boast of the number of people they have killed and devoured; and if they have no captives in their hands when they wish to make a feast, they will kill some of their own slaves, or will send a party of their warriors to any small island near, to knock as many people on the head as they may require." i fancy that bent is joking, though it is not a lively subject to joke about. the captain, however, says that he will be on his guard, and a strong party, well armed, will alone be allowed to go on shore. still, as we require water and fuel and fresh meat and vegetables, we must put in here to obtain them. we drop our anchor in a calm bay, with scarce a ripple on the surface of the clear blue waters, while against the outer edge of the coral reef the sea rolls in and breaks in masses of white foam. there is a town in sight, surrounded by a ditch and bank, and bamboo stockades, and full of cottages with high-thatched roofs. above the town, on the hill, is a separate tall building with an exceedingly high-pitched roof, also thatched, the ridge-pole extending out on either side. it is a temple, bent says, where human sacrifices are offered, and many other abominable things done. the god may be a whale's tooth, or a piece of cloth, or a hideous wooden idol. soon after we have furled sails, two large double canoes make their appearance inside the reef, running for the town. they have vast mat sails, and on the deck of each are fully a hundred black warriors armed with clubs and spears and bows. they are painted hideously. several have huge heads of hair, and all are gesticulating violently, as if recounting their deeds of valour. they pass close to our vessel, but do not seem to heed us much. we have our guns run out and the crew at quarters ready for them. as i look through my glass i see in the bows of each some twenty dead bodies arranged in rows--men, women, and children. "alas! were these taken in war?" i ask. the canoes reach the beach, and crowds come down with loud shouting and wild leaps, and the canoes are hauled on shore, and then the dead bodies are dragged up the hill towards the temple, all the men shouting and shrieking louder than ever. they appear truly like a horde of evil spirits let loose on earth. i accompany the captain and supercargo with bent, taro, and a boat's crew, all well armed, on shore. taro explains that we come as friends, and as the people see that we are well prepared for war, no opposition is offered. we enter the house of a chief who has just died; his body lies at one end of a long hall full of people. among them are some twenty women, most of them young and fine-looking persons. their hair is adorned with flowers, and their bodies are oiled. some look dull and indifferent to what is taking place, others are weeping, and others look well pleased. taro tells us that they are the wives of the king. several men stand near them; ropes are cast round their necks, and suddenly, before we have time to rescue them, as we feel inclined to do, five of them are strangled, and fall dead corpses on the ground. their bodies are quickly carried off, with that of the chief, and all are buried in one common grave. the new king now appears, and the crowd come to do him honour. he is a tall, stout young man--every inch a savage. we look with horror at what we witness--the bodies are dragged up the hill, and thrust into huge ovens. some of the captives not yet dead are blackened and bound in a sitting posture, and thus, horrible to relate, are placed _in the ovens to be baked alive_. it is too sickening to write what afterwards follows. none of us can longer doubt that these people are the most terrible of cannibals. i feel inclined to charge forward to rescue them, but the captain orders us all to stand fast, or we may chance to be treated in the same way ourselves. we now, through taro, tell the chief that we require water and fruit and vegetables and hogs and fowls, and that we will pay for all. he receives the message somewhat haughtily, and informs us with the air of an emperor, that though he is one of the greatest sovereigns on earth, and that all men bow down to and fear him, he will grant our request. there he sits, a naked black savage, benighted and ignorant in the extreme; and yet such is his opinion of himself. i cannot help thinking, as i look at him, that i have seen civilised men almost as well contented with themselves with as little cause. we do not find any of our men inclined to straggle, after what they have seen. we hurry down to the beach. the boat has been left hauled off at some distance, under charge of three men, well armed. they pull in when they see us, and say that they are not a little glad to find us safe, for that many canoes with fierce-looking savages have been paddling round and round them, the cannibals showing their white teeth, and making signs that they would like to eat them. whether this is only the fancy of our men i cannot say. even golding, when we get on board, looks pale and says little. it seems to me as if satan had truly taken possession of the people of these islands, for bent tells me that the scenes we have witnessed are only such as occur constantly. we keep a watchful look-out all night, ready for action at a moment's notice. again we visit the shore, armed as yesterday. preparations are making to build a house for the new chief. the four uprights for the corners are already placed in large holes dug deep into the earth. in each hole stands a living man bound to the post, with upturned eyes gazing at the light of day. what is our horror to see parties of savages begin to throw in the earth upon them. it covers their breasts, their shoulders, and rises up, the hapless wretches still breathing, till the tops of their heads are concealed, and then with eager haste the murderous wretches stamp down the ground over them. taro tells us the savages say that the spirits of the dead men will guard the house, so that no evil will befall its inmates. truly i shall be glad to be clear of this land of horrors, yet it is a fruitful land, and one producing a variety of articles for barter. with cocoa-nut oil alone we could quickly load our vessel, and with the population these islands possess, what numberless other tropical productions might they not furnish, if means could be found to civilise the people! chapter eight. in perils various. again we go on shore, armed as yesterday. the men cast uneasy glances around, and show no inclination to separate from each other. we meet the chief, who looks taller and fiercer than ever. his black hair is frizzled out in the most extraordinary manner, and on the top he wears twisted round it a piece of smoke-coloured native cloth like a turban. he has rings round his arms and legs, and a small piece of cloth round his loins, but otherwise this great king, as he believes himself, is entirely naked. he carries in his hand a richly carved black club--so heavy, that to strike with it is to kill. he receives us in the same haughty manner as before, as if he wished to impress us with his importance. as he strides along, the people fly on either side, or bow down before him, though he does not in the slightest degree heed them. he is on his way to witness the launching a large new war-canoe, and which, now decked with streamers, we see at some distance from the beach. conch-shells are sounding, and there is much shouting and dancing. as we draw near, a band of prisoners, with downcast looks of horror, are driven along towards the canoe. men stand ready with long ropes to drag her to the water. before she is moved, the captives, bound hand and foot, are cast down before her; then loud shouts arise-- the men haul at the ropes--the canoe moves, and is dragged over the bodies of the slaves, crushing them to death. no one pities them. this night the cannibal chiefs will feast on their bodies. even now the ovens in the great square are heating to cook them. it strikes me that these people take a pride in showing to us the enormities they dare to commit. as later in the day we are passing through the town, we see two people, a man and woman, wrangling. the man grows more and more angry. a young child is near them; it runs to its mother's arms, but the man seizes it, and in an instant he has killed the poor little creature, and with a fierce gesture thrown the yet panting body on the ground. he gazes for a few seconds moodily at the dead child. the mother does not attempt to touch it; then he orders her to bring a spade. he digs a hole in the floor; the still warm body is thrust in; the earth is thrown back; both stamp it down, and then return to their seats as if nothing had happened. we see another day a young man buried alive by his own parents. taro says he had grown weary of life, and they did it to please him. we see very few old people, and we hear that when people get weak and ill from age, their children either strangle them or bury them alive. bent tells me that human sacrifices are often made to their gods, when the priests and chiefs feast on the victims. we see many people with fingers cut off, and we hear that they have been devoted as offerings to their chiefs who have died, or may only have been ill. no crime is more common than that of killing children, especially girls, indeed, it is remarkable that these people do not seem at all sensible that they are committing crimes. at all events they glory in their shame. i might note down many more things we see and hear during our stay in this group, but i feel sick at heart as i write and think of all that is told me; and every day, as i tread these blood-stained shores, the very air seems polluted, and the shrieks of the wretched victims of their fellows cruelty, ring in my ears. wars seem never to cease among them. one tribe is always attacking another, and those inhabiting islands within two or three miles of each other cannot live at peace. the desire to retaliate is the great cause of all their quarrels. if a man is killed by those of another tribe, his friends are not content till they have killed some of that tribe; then the people of that tribe do not rest till they have avenged the death of their relations; and so it goes on, each murder producing another, till there is not a man among all their tribes who does not feel that there are numbers ready to take his life, while he is also on the watch to kill certain people with whom he is at feud. of another thing i hear, which, had i not seen so many horrible things they do, i could scarcely credit. if the people of a small island offend a chief, he does not kill them at once, but he takes away all their canoes, so that they cannot escape. then, whenever he wants victims to offer in his temples, or to feast any friendly chief who may visit him unexpectedly, he sends and brings off one or more families, or parts of families, from the doomed island. no one knows who will be next taken, but they live on with the full consciousness of what their fate will be. they see their relatives and friends taken and carried off to be baked, and they know that, perhaps, their turn may come next. bent was some time among them, protected by one of their chiefs, to whom he made himself useful, yet he says that he never felt sure of his life an hour together; and whenever he saw the chief handling his club, he could not help fancying that it might come down on his head. dreadful as these accounts are, we can speak of little else on board. "it would be as easy to wash a blackamoor white, as to make these men christians," observed phineas, one evening, as we sit in the cabin. "what say you, mr bent; would you like to make the attempt?" bent casts his eyes on the deck, and does not answer. golding looks at me. "i'll tell you my opinion," i reply. "if man alone had to accomplish the work, i would say, it is impossible. but man works not alone. god's holy spirit is on his side. we are all by nature vile; we have all gone astray. all our natural hearts are of stone. god's grace can alone soften our stony hearts, can alone bring us back to himself, and as he surely is all-powerful, to my mind he can just as easily shed his grace on the hearts of these black heathen cannibals, and soften them, and bring them to love and worship him, as he can work the same change in any white man; and so i see no reason to doubt that if the gospel is put before them some will hear it gladly and accept it." the captain, as i speak, begins to grow angry. golding bursts into a fit of laughter. "you're talking greek to me," says he. "how could these black savages, who have never seen a book in their lives, understand the bible, even if you gave it them? it's hard enough for civilised white people to comprehend, eh, captain fuller! you find it a tough job? i'm sure i do." "as to that, i don't pretend to much learning in that line--like my second mate here, but i always leave such matters to the parson." what the captain meant i cannot tell. on looking up, i see bent's eyes full of tears, and he says nothing. i do not press the subject now as it will only provoke hostility, but i resolve to speak privately to bent whenever i can. yes, i am sure, by god's grace, and through the instrumentality of human ministers and his book, these dark heathens may become enlightened worshippers of him. we hear that there is a port at the great island of vanua levu, where sandal-wood is to be procured, and we accordingly forthwith sail there. truly it is dangerous work navigating these seas among coral banks in every direction, some just above water, others three, four, and fifteen feet below it. it is only when the sun is shining and the sea blue that we can distinguish the coral, which gives a green tinge to it, under water. one of us is always stationed aloft to pilot the ship. we have hitherto escaped. i pray we may, for if we were to wreck the good ship, these savages would spare the lives of none of us. once more we drop our anchor, and canoes come off to us. we make known that we have come for sandal-wood, and have axes, and knives, and nails, to give in exchange. the natives seem so ready to trade that golding is quite enamoured of them, but the captain wisely will allow no one to go on shore. we keep a careful watch as before. the natives, however, seem very peaceable. they tell taro that they wish to trade with us, and be our friends, and tempt us to come back again. the first mate, tony hinks, and others, declare that the captain's regulations are too strict, and that they ought to be allowed to go on shore. two days pass by, and we are almost ready once more to sail. i am below talking with bent and the doctor. most of the men are forward at their dinner, the captain, and the first mate, and the watch only being on deck. there is a loud sound like a blow given on the deck, then a shout and a piercing shriek. something is the matter. we seize cutlasses and pistols, and any weapons we can lay hands on, and spring on deck. upwards of a dozen savages are collected there with heavy clubs in their hands uplifted, and our men are righting desperately with them, but almost overpowered. the first mate lies dead on the deck near the companion, and further forward are tony hinks and a seaman with their heads beaten in. the supercargo is defending himself with a capstan-bar against several savages, while the captain stands in one of the quarter boats, which has been lowered partly down, pointing a telescope at the savages, who look at it as if they think it some sort of firearm. most of the cannibals turn upon us, and advance furiously with their heavy clubs. we have, i deem, but little chance of contending with numbers so overpowering. i hand a cutlass and a pistol to the captain, who springs out of the boat on deck. bent stands wonderfully cool, and levelling his pistols kills two of our assailants almost at the same moment. the rest hesitate; they have not thought of putting on the hatches, and to our great relief we see the crew springing up from the forepeak armed with axes, knives, and harpoons. with loud shouts and threats of vengeance they rush at the savages, some of whom they cut down, others they hurl overboard; we from aft join in the onslaught, till the savages take fright, and in another instant our decks are clear. the guns are always kept loaded--the captain orders them to be depressed and fired at the canoes, towards which our late assailants are swimming. many are struck, and several of the canoes are knocked to pieces. the greater number of the people swim to the shore with the greatest ease, diving when they see the guns fired, or the levelling of the muskets. we make sail and stand out of the harbour to the west, intending to bury our chief mate and boatswain in deep water, out of sight of these cannibal regions. truly it makes me sad to think of these two men thus suddenly cut off, utterly unprepared to go into the presence of a holy god. they trusted not to him who alone could washed them clean. they were good seamen, but they were nothing else. the captain comes on deck, as their bodies lie near the gangway, lashed in their hammocks, with that of the other man killed, and covered up with flags. we read a portion of the burial service, and commit them to the deep, till "the sea shall give up her dead." the next island we make, sailing north, is tutuila, one of the navigators', or samoan group. the harbour we enter is pango pango. it is the most curious we have seen. it runs deep into the land, and on either side are high precipices, some a thousand feet high, with two or three breaks, by which the waters of the harbour are approached from the shore. the people come off to us with great confidence in their large dug-out canoes. they are a brown race, like those of tahiti. they are evidently a better disposed people than those we have just left. we have no fear about going on shore, and meet with civil treatment. yet they are great thieves and beggars--the greatest chiefs asking for anything to which they take a fancy. they are also debased idolaters; and taro says they worship fish, and eels, and all sorts of creeping things. they are also savage and cruel, and constantly fighting among each other. as to their morals, they are undoubtedly superior to the people of tahiti, yet, from the style of their dances, we cannot argue much in their favour. there is much wild and beautiful scenery in the islands of this group, and as far as we are able to judge, the climate is good. we keep as usual on our guard, and from what we hear, not without reason, for numerous articles of dress, and carpenters tools, and iron work, and chests, and parts of a vessel, have been seen among the people, which leaves no doubt that some unfortunate ship's company have been wrecked on their shores or put off by them. indeed, it is worthy of remark that, with the exception of tahiti, there is not a single group at which we have touched where we have not had evidence that ships had been attacked or wrecked, and a part, if not the whole, of the ship's company cut off. in some, only boats' crews have been destroyed, as was the fate of captain cook and his companions, but at several of the islands several ships' crews have been captured, and the greater number of the people killed and eaten. indeed, such is the barbarous heathen and debased condition of the countless inhabitants of this island-world of the pacific, that the navigation of these seas is indeed an undertaking of great peril. no man can tell when he is safe, or at what moment the treacherous islanders may not turn round and destroy him, just as they did captain cook, and just as they have treated many other unfortunate englishmen since his time. truly, it may be said, that these islands lie in darkness and in the shadow of death. there is but one means by which they can be changed--the sending to them the gospel. yet my brother seamen and the traders laugh at such a notion, and people at home, who ought to know better, call it fanatical nonsense. i do not wish to set my opinion up against that of others, but there are certain points where a man can feel that he is right and others wrong, and this is one of them. the gospel has power to change the evil heart. nothing else can do it. that never fails if accepted. god has said it. why should we doubt? we hear that the people of this place are carrying on war with those of another island. some of the chiefs come and invite captain fuller to help them, but he replies, that if they wish to fight, they must fight among themselves. i would rather he had tried to dissuade them not to fight at all. we make sail out of the harbour, and are becalmed not far off a fortress on the summit of a high cliff which is to be attacked. it is crowded with the whole population of the island. with our glasses we can see clearly what is taking place. soon the canoes from pango pango, and of other tribes, their allies, appear. the people land, and begin to scale the rock. numbers are hurled down and killed, but others climb up. higher and higher they get. they seem determined to conquer. i tremble for the fate of the hapless defenders if they succeed. we can hear their shouts and cries. some of the assailants have gone round on the land side. we observe the multitude inside rushing here and there. those scaling the rock on our side have reached the summit; several fall, but now the rest break through the stockade, and rush with their clubs and spears against the shrieking crowd. the rest of the invaders have succeeded in gaining an entrance on the opposite side. the work of death goes on. all are indiscriminately slaughtered--men, women, and children. the warriors hold together, and fight despairingly. one by one they fall before the victors' clubs. a breeze springs up, and we stand clear of the reefs and once more out to sea. in the last glimpse we obtain of the fort the fighting is still going on, and thus it continues till the scene fades in the distance. "such is the warfare carried on among these savages," observes bent. "those who are victorious to-day will be attacked by other tribes before long, and in like manner cut to pieces. in a few years not one of these numberless tribes will remain. war kills many; but in war, crops are destroyed, and famine ensues, and kills many more; and disease, with no sparing hand, destroys numberless others also. a few years hence, those navigating these seas will find none alive to welcome them." the carpenters declare the ship in such good condition that the captain and supercargo resolve to explore the loyalty and new hebrides, and other groups in that direction, before seeking our final port. these islands are especially rich in sandal-wood, with which it is resolved we shall fill up. the first land we make is mare--one of the loyalty islands--a low coral island, about seventy miles in circumference. the inhabitants are almost black, and a more brutalised savage race we have not yet seen. there are four tribes constantly at war with each other-- the victors always eating their captives. hence we steer north, and bring up in a fine harbour in the island of fate, or sandwich island. it is a large, mountainous, and fertile island, with great beauty of scenery. the inhabitants are tall, fine-looking people, but most debased savages and terrible cannibals. here sandal-wood is to be had in abundance, and very fine, so that golding is highly delighted, and declares that it is the finest country he has yet been in. more than once, however, our suspicions are aroused with regard to the natives, who are, we think, meditating an attack on us on board, or when we go on shore to bring off the wood. while here i will write down a brief account of some of these numberless islands in the western pacific, among which we are cruising. the largest is new guinea, to the north of australia, the inhabitants of which resemble the negroes of africa, but are more barbarous. next, to the south-east of it, is new caledonia, also a very large island, with barbarous inhabitants. to the south-east is the isle of pines, and to the north-east is the loyalty group, of which mare is one, and livu, and uea. north-east again, we come to the considerable islands of aneiteum, tana, eromanga, and fate. north again, we fall in with the shepherds' islands and the new hebrides, of which malicolo and espiritu santo are the largest; and then there are the northern new hebrides and the santa cruz group, and the solomon islands, and new britain, and new ireland, between where we now are and new guinea. then there are the caroline group--the isles as thick as the stars in the milky way; and the ladrone islands, and gilbert islands, and many others, too many indeed to write down. i do not say, however, that the countless inhabitants of these islands do not differ from each other in appearance, and manners, and customs. some are almost jet black, and others only of a dark brown, but in one thing they are similar--they are all equally fierce heathen savages, and mostly cannibals. we have now a full cargo, and golding rejoicingly calculates that he will make several hundreds per cent, on the original outlay. he does not, methinks, reckon the lives of those who have been lost in the adventure. having laid in a supply of yams, taro, bread-fruit, cocoa-nuts, and other roots, fruits, and vegetables, we raise our anchor for the last time we hope till our voyage is over. the captain and golding can talk of nothing but their plans for the future--how they will return and load the ship with sandal-wood and other valuables. whether the captain is thinking more of his speculations than of our reckoning i know not. he has insisted that we are clear of all danger, and we are running on at night under all sail before a fresh breeze, when the cry of "breakers ahead" makes me spring from my berth. before the ship can be rounded to she strikes heavily. again and again she strikes, and i can hear the coral grinding through the bottom; the masts go by the board, and the ship lies a helpless wreck on the reef. the wind has fallen, and, being sheltered by another part of the reef, we have no fear of her yet going to pieces. we wait anxiously for day, not knowing whether we may not be near one of those cannibal islands from whose inhabitants we may expect little mercy. another day has passed. we find a sand-bank some eighty yards across, close inside the reef. on this, having saved one small boat, we are landing our stores, and provisions, and arms. we set to work to build a small vessel. the men labour diligently, though they grumble. we, the officers, keep watch over the spirit casks. our great want is water. we dig deep, but the little we find is brackish. the schooner is finished, and captain fuller proposes steering for port jackson, where there is a convict settlement. the schooner is launched, but when we search for a passage to take her over the reef, none is to be found. in vain we make the attempt. everywhere we are baffled. some of our people almost go mad with despair. i propose building a large flat-bottomed punt from the deck of the ship, which can pass over the reef. all agree. our punt is almost completed. we see three objects in the distance, which prove to be canoes. we are discovered, for they approach. they are filled with black savages, who keep at a little distance, shouting and flourishing their spears. we make signs of friendship, but they still come on. we stand to our arms, and as they begin to hurl their spears at us, we are compelled to fire; several fall. with loud howls they paddle off to a distance, watching us. we have little doubt that they will return. the punt is completed and provisioned. we get her over the reef, and try again to get the schooner across. in vain. we abandon her on the reef. it is time to be away, for we see a fleet of canoes approaching from the north. we hoist sail. the sea is smooth, and we glide rapidly over it, but on come the canoes still faster. they may overwhelm us with their numbers. much of our powder has got wet. the men do not know it though. happily the savages catch sight of the schooner and our tent left on the sand-bank. their eagerness to secure the plunder from the wreck overcomes every other consideration, and they dash over the reef, and allow us to proceed unmolested. ------------------------------------------------------------------------ we have been many days at sea; frequent calms and little progress made. the men are becoming discontented, and several are sick. we have avoided nearing any land. several islands have been seen, but were we to touch the shore, our prospect of escape would be small indeed. far better, we agree, to trust to the fickle ocean. no, strange as it may seem, there is not among all these rich and lovely islands one on which we dare set foot. ------------------------------------------------------------------------ several of our men have died; the rest are in a state of insubordination. we are on a short allowance of water, and we fear that our provisions will not hold out. our frail punt has been so damaged by a gale that we can never cease baling. ------------------------------------------------------------------------ [port jackson.] when almost despairing that one of our company would escape to tell the tale of our disasters, a ship hove in sight, took us on board, and brought us hither. thus ends our voyage, and all the bright anticipations of wealth enjoyed so long by golding and our old captain--not a log of sandal-wood, not a string of pearls preserved. ... bent has told me his history. he feels his heart warmed with gratitude to the almighty, who by his grace has preserved him from death of body and soul, and his whole mind is bent on going home with me forthwith, and returning to carry the gospel of salvation to the perishing heathen of the wide-spreading islands we have visited. surely he could not devote his strength and life to a more glorious purpose. chapter nine. a noble resolve. i must ask the reader to return to the scene described in the introductory chapter, where we commenced hearing the extracts from the sea journal of old john harvey. it will be remembered that at our family gathering at my father's house my brother john was the reader. "father," said my brother john, pausing awhile after he had finished reading our uncle's journal, "god willing, and with your permission, i will go and preach the gospel to the heathen of those pacific islands." "go, my son," said our father, promptly. "you shall have my prayers that your preaching may not be in vain." "what! go off at once, dear john, and leave us all?" exclaimed several of the younger members of the family in chorus. "i think not," answered john, calmly, with that sweet smile and gentle voice which gained him so many hearts; "i have much to learn and much to do before i shall be fitted for the office of a missionary. it is not a task to be undertaken lightly and without consideration. when a man charges among a host of foes, he must be armed at all points. a missionary, too, should be like a light shining amid the surrounding darkness; he should be able to show the heathen how to improve their moral and physical, as well as their spiritual condition. he should be fairly versed in the most useful mechanical arts, and possess especially some knowledge of medicine and surgical skill." "well, it will take you a good many years before you can do all that, and perhaps you will change your mind before the time comes," said one of the younger ones, who did not, as indeed they could not be expected to do, enter into john's thoughts and feelings on the subject. i may say from that very moment john devoted all the energies of his mind and body to preparing himself for the high and holy calling he had undertaken. long, i know, that night he knelt in prayer for grace, and wisdom, and strength to direct, fit, and support him for the work. besides giving much time to his studies at the theological college, he gained a considerable knowledge of medicine and surgery, and was to be seen now with saw and plane labouring with a carpenter,--at the blacksmith's anvil, with hammer in hand, forming a bolt, or hinge, or axe,--and now at the gardener's, with hoe or spade, planting or digging, or pruning. many wondered how his mind could take in so many new things, or his slight frame undergo so much labour. few could comprehend the spirit which sustained him. he grew indeed stronger and more robust than any one would have supposed he would become. i had since my childhood wished to go to sea, and my father allowed me to follow the bent of my inclinations. i now and then thought that i ought to go forth as a missionary also; but when i compared myself with john, and considered his great superiority to me, i gave up the idea, which i had mentioned to no one, as preposterous. my first two voyages were to india and china, and when i came back from the second john was still at college. i remember thinking that he was losing a great deal of time in preparation. he, however, said that he was gaining time. "a blunt tool can never properly perform the work. i am getting sharpened, that i may be used to advantage," was his remark. on my return home from my third voyage, he had gone to the pacific. where he was to be stationed was not known. he had not gone alone, for he had taken a wife to support and solace him. i had never seen her; but i was told that her heart was bound up with his in the work in which he was engaged. having now become a fair seaman, i determined to seek a berth as a mate. an old shipmate and friend had just got command of a fine ship bound round cape horn; and though i had had no previous intention of going to the pacific, i was glad to ship with him as third officer. my sisters had copied out our uncle's journal for john; they now kindly performed the same task for me. my ship was the _golden crown_ a south-sea whaler, and mr richard buxton was master, belonging to liverpool. things had changed greatly since the days of my uncle john. we had a definite object: no supercargo was required, and every spot we were likely to visit was well known, and mapped down in the charts. we had several passengers--two missionaries and their wives, newly married. i thought them inferior to john; but they were good men, humble too, with their hearts in the work. we had also another gentleman, a merchant or speculator of some sort. what he was going to do i could never make out. his heart was in his business, and he seemed to consider it of greater importance than anything else. this made him look down with undisguised contempt on the missionaries and their work, nor could he comprehend their objects. "if people want to go to church, let them," he more than once remarked: "but i don't see why you two should be gadding about the world to teach savages, who would know nothing about chapels, nor wish to build them, if you would let them alone, and stay quietly at home and mind a shop, or some other useful business." the missionaries seldom answered his remarks. they continued perseveringly studying the language of the natives among whom they were to labour, and prayed with and expounded the scriptures to all on board who would join them. i am writing an account of certain events, and not a journal, so i must suppose the horn rounded, chili visited, and raratonga, where we were to land the missionaries, reached. this was the island whose very position was unknown when my uncle visited those seas, and for long afterwards lay sunk in heathen darkness. it had now become the very centre of christianising influences, whence rays of bright light were emanating and reaching the farthest islands of the pacific ocean. i have seldom seen a more attractive-looking spot than raratonga appeared as we came off it. in the centre rise mountains four thousand feet above the level of the sea, with lower hills and beautiful valleys around them, clothed with every variety of tropical tree and shrub. at the foot of the hills is a taro swamp, and then a belt of rich country covered with cocoa-nut, bread-fruit, and banana trees; and then a broad white sandy beach, and a band of blue water; and next a black broad coral reef, like a gigantic wall, against which the swell of the pacific comes thundering, and rising majestically to the height of twenty feet, curls over and breaks into masses of sparkling foam. the openings in the reef are few and narrow, so that no ship can anchor near the coral-girt isle. canoes, however came off to us with natives on board, well clothed, and gentle in their manners, who welcomed the missionaries with a warmth and affection which must have been very gratifying to them. i accompanied the captain on shore to obtain supplies. we took with us a chest of suitable goods for barter. an officer met us on the beach, the appointed salesman of the place, and putting out his hand, said, "blessing on you." he then led us to the market-house, where we found collected a large store of all the chief productions of the island,-- cocoa-nuts, bananas, potatoes, yams, pumpkins, hops, fowls, eggs, and many other things. we selected all we required, payment was made, and the salesman engaged four canoes to carry them off at once to the ship. i was but a short time on shore, but i saw enough to wonder at. everybody was well clothed,--the men in jackets, shirts, waistcoats, and trousers, with straw hats, and many had shoes and socks; the women in gowns, shawls or mantles, and bonnets. there were many stone cottages, neatly furnished, and others of a less enduring character. there was a handsome stone church, and an institution, a substantial stone building, for training native youths for the ministry, surrounded by cottages, the residences of those who were married; while gardens and cultivated fields were seen on every side. such, i was assured, was the condition of the whole island, there being ample church and school accommodation for all the inhabitants, provided entirely by themselves. i saw also an excellent printing-press, at which several editions of the whole bible had been printed, as well as commentaries, and numerous other works, and issued well bound, almost the whole work being performed by native youths, whose fathers were wild savage cannibals, as indeed were all the natives when first visited by the reverend j williams, in , and such they would have remained, had not christian missionaries arrived among them. i have fallen in with many seafaring men who have abused the missionaries in no measured terms, and i have read books written by educated men who have done the same, and i was not quite decided whether they were right or wrong till i went to the pacific. then i discovered why those men abused the missionaries. where the missionary has laboured faithfully, the natives will not desecrate the sabbath, and will not pander to the gross desires of their civilised visitors. that is the secret of their dislike to the missionaries. again, however, i have met many masters of whalers and numerous officers of the royal navy who have spoken and written in the highest terms of the missionaries, and acknowledged that the change which has been wrought through their instrumentality has been most beneficial to the cause of commerce as well as humanity; and that whereas where formerly, if a ship was wrecked, the destruction of her crew was almost inevitable, now through nearly the whole of eastern, and a considerable portion of western polynesia, they would receive succour, and sympathy, and kindness. still there are many--very many--dark places both in eastern and western polynesia, and no christian soldier need sigh, like alexander, that no more worlds remain to be conquered. during our voyage to raratonga i learned a great deal more about the progress made by the missionaries of the gospel in these seas, which, while the _golden crown_ lies off the island, i will briefly describe. the london missionary society was established in , and in the following year it sent forth, on board the _duff_, a band of twenty-nine missionaries, who landed at tahiti, one of the society islands, march, . some went on to tongatabu, the chief of the friendly islands, and two to christina, one of the marquesas. the savage character of the inhabitants of the two last-named groups prevented success. at tongatabu three missionaries were murdered, and the rest made their escape, as did those at the marquesas. at tahiti they were received at first in a friendly way by the chiefs and people; but for several years very little real progress was made in instructing the people in the truths of christianity. indeed, at one time all the missionaries, in despair of success, in consequence of the unceasing wars of the natives, sailed for new south wales. favourable reports, however, reaching them, some returned, and from that time forward slow but steady progress was made, though it was not till the year that christianity was firmly established, and idolatry almost completely abolished. the year was memorable on account of the arrival of two of the most distinguished missionaries who have laboured among the isles of the pacific--the reverend j williams and the reverend w ellis. mr williams, who combined a wonderful mechanical talent with the most ardent zeal for the propagation of the gospel, soon after took up his abode at the island of raiatea where by his example he advanced the natives in the arts of civilisation, at the same time that he instructed them in the truths of christianity. the natives of the society islands having sincerely accepted christianity, became anxious to spread the good tidings among their heathen neighbours. a considerable number prepared themselves for the office of teachers. some went forth to the paumotu group, or low archipelago, to the east; others to the austral isles, to the south; and others, among whom was papehia, accompanied mr williams on a voyage to the hervey group. his first visit was to aitutaki, where some native teachers were left, by whose means the natives became christians. after paying a second visit to aitutaki, mr williams sailed in search of raratonga, of the position of which even he was uncertain. he was accompanied by papehia, and by some natives of raratonga, who had been carried away by a trading vessel from their own island, and cruelly deserted on aitutaki. among them was tapaeru, the daughter of a chief, who had become impressed with the truth of christianity. at length raratonga was discovered, and the native teachers were landed; but had it not been for the courage and constancy of tapaeru, they and their wives would have been destroyed on the first night they were on shore. sadly disconcerted, they returned next morning on board, and the enterprise was about to be abandoned, when the devoted papehia stepped forward and volunteered to return on shore. "whether the natives spare me or kill me, i will land among them," he exclaimed. "jehovah is my shepherd--i am in his hand." clothed in a shirt, with a few yards of calico in which he had wrapped some portions of the holy scriptures, the intrepid pioneer landed alone among a host of heathen warriors, who stood on the reef with their spears poised ready to hurl at him. he had not trusted in vain. he persevered, and soon a powerful chief, tinomana, turned to the truth, and burned his idols. again mr williams came to raratonga--this time to remain for many months, to see christianity established, to erect a large place of worship, and to perform one of the most wonderful tasks i have ever heard of a man single-handed doing. it was to build in three months a schooner of eighty tons, without one single portion of her being in readiness. he taught the natives to cut down, and saw, and plane the wood; then he erected a bellows and forge for the smith's work, which he performed himself; a lathe to turn the blocks, a rope-making machine, and a loom to manufacture the sail-cloth. all the time he laboured, he taught the wondering natives in the truths of christianity. in three months from the day the keel was laid, this prodigy of a vessel was safely launched, and named "_the messenger of peace_." she proved a seaworthy, trusty little vessel, and from island to island, across many thousand miles of water, she was the means of conveying numerous missionaries of the gospel of peace to their benighted inhabitants. first, several islands of the hervey group were visited by her, and then she sailed for raiatea; whence, after remaining some time, she once more sailed with a party of english missionaries and native teachers on a long voyage, calling at the hervey islands, then at savage island, where an unsuccessful attempt was made to land teachers. next, she called at tongatabu, already occupied by missionaries of the wesleyan missionary society. then she steered north for samoa, known as the navigators islands. here mr williams and his companions met with a most cordial reception from the chiefs and people, and teachers were soon established on several of the islands. the wesleyans had before sent some missionaries to samoa, but in a truly christian spirit, worthy of imitation, they agreed to yield the group to the care of the london missionary society, while they devoted their exclusive attention to the friendly and fiji groups. they had made great progress among the friendly islanders, and the king himself had become a christian, when it was resolved to attempt the conversion of the fijians. between tonga and fiji a constant intercourse was kept up, and thus the way seemed opened to carry the gospel to the latter group. there was also no lack of interpreters, an important advantage at the first. the first missionaries to fiji were established on the island of lakemba, where, in spite of great opposition, they laboured on faithfully and steadily, extending their efforts to other islands, till finally the cross was triumphant even at mbau, the blood-stained capital of the group, where the cannibal monarch himself, the dreaded thakombau, became a christian. in the meantime, the inhabitants of the sandwich islands had heard of the gospel from english and american ships visiting the group. no sooner did king rihoriho ascend the throne than he decreed that idolatry should be abandoned, because he had discovered that his idols could not benefit him; but he knew little or nothing of the christian religion. at that very time, however, the american board of missions had sent out a band of missionaries to them, who on arriving to their joy heard that the idols of hawaii were overthrown. they were, i believe, chiefly episcopalians. while these glorious events were taking place in eastern polynesia, the church missionary society had sent forth missionaries among the fierce cannibals of new zealand. they were joined by several wesleyans, who together laboured with so much perseverance and success, that a very large number of the inhabitants became acquainted with the truths of the gospel. numerous well-trained native teachers have gone forth from tahiti and raratonga to the surrounding isles, and many of them to the loyalty and new hebrides groups, and other parts of western polynesia. following this example, the bishop of new zealand has brought natives from a large number of the islands in western polynesia, which he has visited, and having instructed them, at a college he has established near auckland, is sending them back, to spread among their countrymen the truths they have learned. thus christianity has begun to spread among the dark-skinned races of those almost countless islands. to carry the gospel to them had been one of the energetic williams's darling schemes; and it was while carrying it out that, landing at eromanga, he, with a young missionary, mr harris, was barbarously murdered by the savage natives. still the society persevered, and missionaries have been established at several of the islands, and many of the natives have become christians. among these islands several presbyterian missionaries have been established, who have laboured steadily and successfully in the lord's vineyard. thus several sections of the protestant church have been engaged cordially together in instructing the heathen nations of the pacific in a knowledge of the truth, and in many instances the holy spirit has richly blessed their efforts. still there are many hundred islands the inhabitants of which remain in gross darkness, while a large portion of those who have been converted require instruction, support, and the correction of errors. much is done through native agency, but still the superintendence of well-educated and well-trained english missionaries is required at even the most advanced settlements to act as overseers or superintendents. having now given a very brief account of the progress of christianity since those midnight hours when my uncle sailed in these seas, i may commence my personal narrative. it must be understood that i have somewhat anticipated events in the above account. at the time my narrative commences, christianity, though advancing, had not made the great progress it has since done, and many of the islands which are now entirely christian, were then only partially so, heathen practices prevailed, and the heathen chiefs had still influence and power. it is daylight over these regions, but nearer the dawn than noon. many a year must pass away before the full blaze of the light of truth will shine from east to west across the vast pacific. i must not forget to mention the impediments which the priests of rome, chiefly frenchmen, endeavour to throw in the way of the progress of the pure faith in christ. to gain an influence with the natives they wink at many of their vices, they teach them an idolatrous faith, and try to prejudice them against the protestants. having performed our contract at raratonga, landing the missionaries and their goods, we sailed for our fishing ground in the south, where we were tolerably successful. whale catching is very hard work, and at length it became necessary to return north, to obtain fresh provisions and to recruit our crew. our captain had resolved also to try his fortune on the fishing grounds in the neighbourhood of the new hebrides and the other western archipelago. "a sail on the starboard bow," cried the look-out man, from aloft. i was officer of the watch. we were far away from land, and meeting with a strange sail is always a matter of interest in those seas. i went to the mast-head with my glass, and made out that the sail was that of a large double canoe. we kept away for her, not doubting that she had been driven far out of her course. of this the sad spectacle which met our eyes as we drew near convinced us. on her deck were numerous savages--some grouped together in the after part, others lying about in different places, or leaning against the mast, and some apart in every variety of attitude. many appeared to be dead or in the last stage of existence. some few lifted up their hands imploringly towards us. others shook their spears and clubs, which they held in their fast-failing grasp, possibly unconscious of what they were doing--the ruling passion being, with them as with others, strong in death. the ropes of their mat sail had given way, and it no longer urged them on. it was necessary to approach them cautiously, for, though the savages had but little strength left, they might, in their madness, attack us. we lowered two boats, and, with our men well armed, pulled up to them. as we got nearly alongside, some of the people in the after group rose from their seats, and one endeavoured to drag himself towards us. he was a young man--a light-coloured indian--tall and handsome, and, unlike most of the rest, clothed in jacket and trousers. the others moving, showed us a young girl of the same light hue, reclining on a pile of mats. she was clothed; her head was adorned with a wreath of coral, and her arms and ankles with strings of beads. she struck me at once as being very beautiful, though, as i saw her nearer, i perceived that her eye had lost its lustre, and that her face was wan and emaciated. the canoe was a very large one, capable of carrying a hundred and fifty people, though not more than sixty were on board, and of that number nearly half lay dead or dying on the deck. it was easy to divine what had become of the rest. the young man made a sign that he would speak, and pointing to the girl, he said, in a husky voice, "save her, save her! she christian!" and then sunk exhausted on the deck. chapter ten. the destruction of the idols. the canoe, it was evident, had met with some severe weather, and she could scarcely, we considered, have held together had she encountered another gale. we lost no time in getting the survivors into the boats. the suspicions of the warriors were soon calmed by the explanations of the young man, and they allowed us without resistance to lift them on board. the chief's daughter, or young princess, she might have been called, was less exhausted than many of the strong men. i lifted her up with care, and placed her on her mats in the stern sheets, and pulled back as fast as we could to the ship, that the sufferers might have the advantage of our surgeon's assistance. having removed the sinnets, mats, and other articles with which she was loaded, we abandoned the ill-fated canoe, and stood on our course. i asked the doctor what he thought of the state of the indians. "the princess and her attendants require careful nursing, and so does that young man, but for the rest who are still alive i have no fear," he answered. "the greater number died for want of water. they had no lack of food, i suspect." i looked in his face, and shuddered at the answer he gave. several days passed by before the young man who had addressed us in english was again able to speak. he spoke but a few words of english, but enough to let me understand that his name was john vihala, that he was related to the young girl, daughter of the chief or king of one of the islands; that her name was alea; that she had become a christian; but that her father and most of the family remained heathens. she had been betrothed (as is the custom, at an early age) to a powerful chief of a distant island, still a heathen and a cannibal; and, notwithstanding all her prayers and entreaties, her father insisted on her fulfilling the contract. she, in due state, accompanied by several of her relations and female attendants, was placed on board the canoe, which sailed for its destination. at first the wind was propitious, but a fierce gale arose, which drove the canoe out of her course for many days before it, till those on board were unable to tell in what direction to steer to regain their own island. another gale sprang up, which drove them still farther away, and then famine began, and sickness, and then water failed, and death followed, and despair took possession of even the bravest. alea's chief relations died, but she and vihala were wonderfully supported. while their heathen companions lost all hope, they encouraged them, spoke to them of their own religion, and endeavoured to teach the truths of the gospel. much to my satisfaction, captain buxton agreed, on hearing their story, to take them back to their own island. i do not mention the name of the island for reasons which will appear. it took us some days to beat up to it. it was a lovely spot, of volcanic formation, with lofty mountains in the centre, and in most parts clothed with the richest vegetation. alea and her female attendants were by this time able to come on deck. her astonishment at seeing her native island was very great, but her satisfaction was less than i expected. i asked vihala the reason of this. "she expects to be sent again to her intended husband," he answered, in a melancholy tone. i suspected that vihala loved his young cousin, nor was it surprising that he should do so. they were of the same faith, and pity for the sad condition to which she would be reduced if the wife of a heathen chief, would have made him wish to free her. we anchored the ship in a secure harbour, and at once sent vihala and several natives on shore as a deputation to the chief, to inform him of the arrival of his daughter. after some time, they returned with the announcement that the chief would receive us, and that his daughter would be welcome. we found him seated under a wide-spreading tree, on a bundle of mats, in great state, with numerous lesser chiefs and attendants standing on either side of him. his only clothing was a piece of native cloth wound round his body, and he looked every inch the savage. we expected vihala to act as interpreter, but when we approached the chief, a person whom we supposed to be a native, though he had a rougher and more savage appearance than the rest, and had on as little clothing as they, advanced a few steps, and informed us in undoubted english, or rather irish, that he had the honour of being the king's prime minister, and that it was his duty to perform that office. his name was dan hoolan (a runaway seaman, we found), and he had been fifteen years on the island, and was married and settled with a family. after we had made our statement, poor alea was allowed to approach her father, which she did in a humble posture, with fear and trembling. he manifested very little concern at seeing her, and directed her to be conducted to her mother's cottage. i was anxious to know how alea and vihala had become christians, and asked dan if he had taught them. "no, indeed, i have not," he answered drawing himself up. "i hope that i am too good a catholic to teach them the sort of religion they know. there is a sort of old missionary fellow comes over here who has taught them, and he has left a native teacher here, who does nothing but abuse me because i do not make the king here _lotu_, and do not _lotu_ myself, as they call it, and give up my wives, and make myself miserable." from this speech of dan hoolan's, i had no difficulty in understanding the state of the case. the wretched man would not give up his own sins, and, therefore, tried to keep the chief in heathen darkness. it would, however, be impolitic to quarrel with him, or, rather, wrong, because the so doing would have increased the difficulty of bringing him round. i should explain that the term _lotu_ means becoming a nominal christian. "but i thought, friend hoolan, you said that you were a christian," i remarked quietly, looking fixedly at him. "so i am inwardly, of course, mate," he answered, with a wink he could not suppress. "that is to say, a right raal catholic, as my fathers were before me, with nothing of your missionary religion about me; but just on the outside, maybe, i'm a heathen, just for convenience sake, you'll understand." i did not press the subject then, but being interested about poor alea, i inquired if he could tell me how her father would treat her. "why, send her on to her husband, of course, mate," he answered, with the greatest unconcern; "it's the right thing to do." "but the chief to whom she is to be given is a heathen and a cannibal, and old enough to be her grandfather," i remarked. "maybe, but it's the rule; we don't set much value or women in this part of the world," observed the prime minister; "i might have married her myself for that matter, but it would have brought on a war with the old chief for whom she is intended, so i did the right thing, do ye see, mate, and let it alone." i now turned the subject, and asked what assistance he could give in refitting the ship and supplying fresh provisions. he was immediately in his element, and showed himself in worldly matters a shrewd, clever fellow. everything now seemed to go on smoothly, and the repairs of the ship progressed rapidly, while we had no lack of fresh provisions. we soon discovered that another double canoe was fitting out to carry alea to her intended husband. my heart bled for the poor girl, and i would have done anything to save her, i thought over all sorts of plans. they were, however, needless, for the next morning i heard that she had disappeared. no one knew where she had gone. at first i feared that her father had sent her off secretly; but hoolan's rage and undisguised fears of the consequences which might occur when the old chief discovered that he had lost his bride, convinced me that such was not the case. i suspected that vihala might have had something to do with it when i found that he had disappeared about the same time. we were at first suspected, but i convinced hoolan that we had had nothing to do with the matter. several days passed, and not a clue was gained as to what had become of the young princess. one evening, when the men had knocked off work, as i was sitting under an awning on deck, i saw a large canoe entering the harbour. it struck me that it might contain the old chief come to claim his bride; so, as it was not my watch, i jumped into a boat and went on shore to see what would happen. as the canoe drew near, however, i saw that instead of her deck being crowded with tattooed, naked, and painted warriors, dancing, and shouting, and sounding conch-shells, all the people on board were well clothed, while in the after part stood a venerable-looking man with long white hair escaping from under his broad-brimmed hat, and by his side a young lady, both evidently europeans. i at once naturally walked towards the part of the beach where they would land, and waited for them. no sooner did the canoe touch the shore than several natives from the crowd rushed forward, and lifting the strangers on their shoulders, bore them, with every demonstration of respect, to dry ground. i at once went forward and addressed them in english, and was warmly greeted in return. the old man said he came from a station about fifty miles off. the young lady was his daughter. they had come over on a periodical visit to the christian converts of this island, and were much concerned to hear that vihala and the young princess had disappeared. "they should have abided the storm," the old man remarked. "i will go see this heathen chief, and try again if by god's grace his heart may be softened." i undertook to get pat hoolan out of the way, as it was evident that all his influence was exerted to prevent his master from becoming a christian. i had fortunately arranged to transact some business with him about this time; so, leaving the missionary addressing the people under a cocoa-nut tree, i hurried up to the king's village, and without much difficulty persuaded hoolan to accompany me on board. i kept him there as long as i possibly could. meanwhile the missionary sought out the chief, and found him willing to listen while he unfolded the story of the gospel. a long time the two conversed; and for the first time the benighted savage heard the message of salvation. gradually the truth interested him, and he began to turn a more favourable ear to the missionary's exhortations than he had ever before done. "ah, would that i had vihala with me," he would frequently exclaim to the missionary. "when you are gone he would instruct me further in the wonderful things i hear." but neither vihala nor alea were to be found. he had driven them forth, there could be no doubt, by resolving to unite his daughter to a heathen chief; and yet was vihala free from blame in carrying off the young princess? the heathens said that they had committed suicide, and were drowned, but judging from vihala's generally consistent character, i felt sure that that was not the case. from the first i had felt myself drawn very much towards the venerable missionary. his gentleness, yet firmness of manner, his utter negation of self and devotedness to his master's cause were very remarkable. his tender love for his daughter, too, was very beautiful. she returned it with the deepest affection and devotion. accustomed as i had been to the endearments of a happy, well-ordered home, i was sensibly touched by it, and took every opportunity of being in their company. it may appear curious that three days had passed before i learned the name of the good old man. everybody called him the missionary, spoke of him as the missionary,--thrice-honoured name! in the same way he knew me only as the mate. he had a house assigned to him by the chief, which, by being partitioned off into three chambers, was made tolerably habitable. i was one evening drinking tea there with him and his daughter, when i happened to mention my name. "what! are you any relative to that devoted missionary, john harvey?" he asked. when i told him that i was his brother, "ah, that accounts for your having so friendly a feeling for missionaries," he observed. "i learned to respect missionaries, and to see the importance of their work, long before my brother became one," i answered; and i then told him of my uncle's journal, which i promised to bring on shore to show him. he was evidently much interested, and made many inquiries about it. "does he mention the name of joseph bent?" he asked suddenly. i remembered well several circumstances connected with that person. "i am the very man," he exclaimed, grasping my hand. "oh, how much do i owe to that excellent man! he saved my life; but he did far more,--he brought the truth before me,--he showed me my own vileness by nature; and thus, by his instrumentality brought by grace to trust in jesus, has my soul been saved. can one man owe a greater debt to another than i owe to him? i had begun to like you for your own sake, and for that of john harvey i shall ever regard you as a son. your uncle was an example of the good a true christian layman can effect in his ordinary course in life. those on board every ship in which he sailed benefited by his presence, not so much from what he said as from what he did, from his pure and bright example; for he was a man of few words under ordinary circumstances, though he could speak on occasion, and well. many by his means were brought to know jesus, and to serve and love him as their lord and master. when john harvey left the sea and went to live on shore, he devoted his whole time to doing god's service, and great has long since been his reward." this was indeed an interesting discovery. it was gratifying to me to hear the fine old man speak thus of my uncle, as i was sure the praise was not undeserved. as i looked at him, too, i felt how great is the power of grace. i saw before me the drowning youth snatched from the very jaws of death, and of eternal death, too, and allowed to spend a long life in making known to the heathen the inexhaustible riches of christ. from that day i naturally looked on mr bent as an old friend, and was more than ever with him. indeed, i confess that i was thus drawn into a more intimate acquaintance with his daughter mary than would have been otherwise the case, and to discover and admire her many excellences. the missionary was never idle during his visit to the island, and in a week after his arrival the king declared openly that he could no longer withstand the arguments he brought forward in support of his religion, and that he was resolved to lotu. hoolan, who had been tipsy for some days, or as he called it, enjoying himself, was very indignant when he recovered and heard this, and hastily going to the king, advised him to wait till the arrival of some roman catholic priests, who were the proper persons to whom to lotu; but the king replied, that the advice of a man who had been making himself no better than a hog was not worth having; that he had heard what he was sure was true from the missionary, and that therefore he should become of the missionary's religion. to show his sincerity, he resolved to destroy his gods and burn their moraes, or temples. his great regret was that his daughter and vihala were not present to see the work done. the missionary urged him to lose no time. it was impossible to say what a day might bring forth. it was not a thing to be done lightly. the missionary visited the king the evening before the ceremony, and many hours were passed in prayer and in reading the scriptures. the next morning the king, attended by some of his principal chiefs, and all those who had already professed christianity, assembled at an early hour, armed with axes and clubs, and firebrands, and ropes, and proceeded to the principal morae, or temple. the heathens also assembled, and stood at a distance trembling, in the expectation that something dreadful would happen. as the king approached the morae, some of his own followers even drew back, and formed a knot at a distance. they had been taught that their gods were full of revenge and hatred, delighting in doing harm to mortals. as mr bent considered it to be most important that the natives should destroy their idols themselves, we also stood some way off watching proceedings. the king advanced, exclaiming, "jehovah is the true god--these are but senseless blocks of wood. see!" as he uttered the last word he struck the principal idol a blow which brought it to the ground. he then rushed at another, several of his chiefs following his example, and in a few minutes every idol was overthrown. [see note .] all the time it was interesting to watch the attitudes and gestures of the heathen, who were evidently under the expectation that fire would come down from heaven, or that the earth would open and destroy their impious chiefs. their astonishment was proportionably great when nothing of the sort happened, and when the iconoclasts, fastening ropes round the senseless logs, dragged them ignominiously forth, while others of the king's followers applied their torches in all directions to the morae, and set it on fire. while the conflagration was at its height several of the idols were thrown into it, and speedily consumed; others were dragged down to the sea, where blocks of coral were fastened to them, and they were put on board canoes, ready to be carried into deep water and sunk; while the remainder we secured, to be sent home as trophies won by the soldiers of christ. the king and the chiefs dragged them up to us, shouting as they did so, "the reign of satan is at an end--the reign of satan is at an end." so far i could agree with them that his kingdom was shaken to the foundation, as it always is where the free gospel is introduced. just at this juncture hoolan, who had remained on board all night, came on shore. his astonishment gave way to rage, and walking up to the king, he shook his fist in his face, and asked him how he dared lotu to the missionaries, and not wait for the arrival of the catholic priests whom he expected? the chief, accustomed to the eccentricities of his late prime minister, answered calmly: "because the reign of satan is over. the missionaries told us news which we know to be good, and we have believed them. when the priests you speak of come, will they tell us better?" hoolan had nothing to say; he soon got calm again, and observed, as he turned on his heel, "well, i only hope that you'll be after getting on as well under your new system as you did under mine, that's all." the king made no reply. he steadily progressed in his knowledge of the scriptures, and gave very hopeful signs that he was really converted. no men could be more scrupulous as to receiving converts in name as really converted than were all the missionaries i met; and i boldly declare that very many of the newly converted could give a better reason for the faith that was in them than can, alas! a very large number both of young and old with whom i have conversed on the subject in england. there still remained, however, a strong heathen party in the island, under the leadership of a warlike and fierce chief, who was very likely, we feared, to give the king a good deal of trouble. it was necessary, however, for mr bent to return to his station. he says that, although called by the natives a missionary, he was not employed by any society, but felt it a privilege to help on the good work, supporting himself by trading, and supplying necessaries to the ships that touched at the island where he had fixed his residence. on asking him about some of the places mentioned in old john harvey's journal, he said he could tell me of wonderful works of god which he had either witnessed himself, or of which he had heard from those in whose reports he could place the fullest confidence. i need scarcely say how much i felt the idea of being parted from him and his daughter, and i bethought me that i would ask permission from the captain to carry them back in our largest boat. it was at once kindly granted, as a much safer mode of conveyance than a native canoe. i was very happy at being able to pay this last mark of attention to those i so much esteemed; and having made every arrangement i could think of for their comfort during our short voyage, i received them on board at the earliest dawn, in the hopes that we might reach the station before night fell. how true is the saying, "man proposes, god disposes." oh that men would therefore throw all their cares on the lord, remembering alway that "he careth for us." ------------------------------------------------------------------------ note . in the early missionary reports wonderful narratives are given of the speedy destruction of idolatry in many of the islands. with too sanguine hopes, some of the missionaries spoke of these revolutions as the result of religious zeal, and even quoted the prophecy of "a nation being born in a day." a few years' experience taught them that in many instances the first profession of christianity was due to various influences, and that the people with impetuous impulse followed the example of their chiefs. not without prayerful labour and long patience did the missionaries at length obtain precious fruits of spiritual conversion from the good seed sown in these regions. the statement in our narrative only expresses what was often true as a historical fact. in "brown's history of missions," volume two, will be found some of the more remarkable instances of the sudden overthrow of idolatry. chapter eleven. vihala's narrative. the missionary and his daughter were on the beach attended by a number of natives, among whom was the chief, so lately a fierce heathen, now deeply affected at the thought of parting from his friend. as the boat drew near, they all knelt down and offered up prayers, reminding me forcibly of the departure of paul the apostle from miletus. it was a deeply interesting sight. in the centre was the venerable missionary with his silvery hair, his daughter kneeling by his side, while around were the king and other chiefs and people, with many women and children. my men without my orders lay on their oars till the prayers had ceased. we then pulled in, and my friends embarked, when the natives burst forth into a hymn, and as we rowed away from the land, we continued to hear it still growing fainter and fainter, till the sound was lost in the increasing distance. we then set our sails and glided swiftly and pleasantly over the sparkling waters. i felt very happy. i would not think of the separation to take place, and determined to enjoy the society of my friends to the utmost. this, perhaps, prevented me from observing as carefully as i might have done the signs of a change in the weather. i believe, however, that mr bent, who had more experience as a seaman in this ocean than i possessed, had perceived but he said nothing. the wind suddenly dropped, then it sprung up again, then once more dropped, and the boat scarcely moved through the water. at last it fell altogether, and the sun's rays struck down with intense violence. my men, however, willingly took to the oars, and we proceeded slowly on our course. still the island was far away, and i lost all hopes of reaching it before dark, though i could not persuade myself that there was any danger to be apprehended. mr bent, however, more than once cast a look round the horizon, anxious more on his daughter's account than his own. we had lowered the sail, for it was useless keeping it set. suddenly mr bent exclaimed, "here it comes, round with her head, david." i looked up, and saw a foam-covered sea rolling towards us. i placed the boat's head so as to receive it, while the men pulled on steadily as before. the question was whether they would be able to continue so doing. the gale was coming from the west, and should it blow with the same fury for any length of time, we might be driven far away to the east without falling in with any land where shelter could be found. i was thankful that my friends were not on board a native canoe. it would have fared much worse with them. we had the means of finding our way, and might beat back when the weather moderated. mary behaved with beautiful composure when the sea came seething and hissing up alongside us. "this is only one of the trials and dangers to which missionaries are exposed," she observed. "we should bear it patiently and trustfully." "trustfully!" how seldom employed, how still less frequently made a practical use of. that one word described much of her character. the gale soon reached its height; the sea, lashed into fury, seemed one mass of foam, and broke over us so frequently that every instant i expected the boat to be swamped. two men baling could scarcely keep her free. our only chance was to run before it, for the strength of the crew no longer availed to keep our small craft's head to wind. the danger of getting her round was very great; should a sea strike her on the beam, it would have rolled her over helplessly. i gave exact orders what was to be done--one man to hoist the foresail, two to pull round with the starboard oars, the rest to spring aft so as to throw the greatest weight into the stern of the boat, thus allowing her head to come round more rapidly. i waited till a heavy sea had rolled past, and then before we had sunk to the hollow i gave the word. for the first time mr bent and his daughter turned pale. the boat flew round, and seemed to be climbing up the ascent towards the crest which had just hissed by, and then on we darted with the small patch of sail we could show to the gale. on, on we went, the huge seas rolling up astern of us, and appearing as if they would come down and overwhelm us. during all my nautical career i had never been in an open boat exposed to such a gale, though frequently in a big ship, and even then i have felt the helplessness, the nothingness of man. still more sensibly now was it brought before me--"he commandeth and raiseth the stormy wind, which lifteth up the waves thereof. they mount up to the heaven, they go down to the depths; their soul is melted because of trouble. then they cry unto the lord in their trouble, and he bringeth them out of their distresses." the missionary was repeating those lines, which come so home to the christian sailor's heart; and at his exhortation, we offered up our united supplications for protection in our sore distress. to the few solemn words which he spoke, the seamen listened earnestly. they knew that at any moment they might be summoned away. i felt an unusual calmness. i may say that i had no fear: i knew the danger, and yet i believed that we should be preserved. on, on we drove, farther and farther to the east, our view now confined to the sides of the two seas, in the dark trough between which we floated, seemingly about to be swallowed up, and now lifted on the summit of a foam-crested billow to the tumultuous mountain masses of water which madly leaped and danced one beyond the other till lost in the line where the murky sky sunk over the seething caldron. we had an abundance of provisions on board, but for many hours anxiety prevented any one of us from wishing to partake of them, even the rough seamen seemed indifferent about the matter. at length, however, mr bent and i agreed that mary ought to take some food, which, after a blessing had been asked for, she did, the rest of the party following her example. we all felt wonderfully refreshed, and hope revived in the hearts of the most desponding. still we could scarcely dare to conjecture by what means we should be saved. we could not conceal from ourselves that the gale might continue to blow for many days, and that we might be driven far away to the east, whence a long time would be occupied in returning, or that we might be thrown on one of the numberless coral reefs of those seas, or hurled against some rocky shore and be dashed to pieces, while we knew that any moment some cross sea might strike us and send us to the bottom. i have heard of people's hair turning grey in a single night. the anxiety i began to feel the moment i allowed myself to dwell on our too possible fate would quickly have turned my hair grey, and yet directly i turned my gaze upward, and put my trust in him who said to the waves, "peace, be still," all my anxious fears vanished, and hope came back strong as ever. the missionary all the time maintained the most perfect and beautiful equanimity, not speaking much, but occasionally offering a few words of encouragement to his daughter. she looked up in his face and smiled. "i have no fear," she said, calmly. "we cannot be separated, dear father. should the ocean overwhelm us, we shall together begin a joyful eternity. you have taught me that our redeemer liveth. `i know in whom i have believed, and am persuaded that he is able to keep that which i have committed unto him against that day.'" this hope gave her courage when others would have shrieked with fear. the gale continued, the boat driven before it. the night approached. darkness came down on the face of the waters. oh, the horrors of that night. the sea roared and hissed, and we knew that those mountain waves were following us as before, though the sight could scarcely distinguish the vast watery masses which, in the obscurity, seemed doubled in height. that a delicate girl should exist through the time appeared indeed surprising; yet, anxious as i was, i could discover no failing of strength or energy in her. when the sun went down, the missionary had called on us all to join in prayer. at midnight he did so again, thereby comfort and consolation being brought to the souls, i believe, of all of us. he then offered to take the helm, to allow me a short sleep, which nature much required. the instant my hand was off the helm, i dropped down and was fast asleep, too soundly even to dream. i was awoke by a cry from the men, and starting up, i beheld a sight sufficient to alarm the stoutest heart. before us in the direction the men were gazing, as we rose to the summit of a sea, appeared in the grey light of morning a long row of breakers unbroken apparently for miles, the sign of a coral reef. the sea, hurled against it, rose to a height so great in a wall of foaming water that it was impossible to see beyond whether there was land or not; indeed that was a matter of indifference i felt, as the boat must be dashed to pieces and overwhelmed the instant it reached those fearful breakers. these were the thoughts which flew rapidly through my mind as with the first impulse of waking i looked ahead. my next was to turn round, when i saw the venerable missionary standing up on the after seat gazing earnestly ahead, while his daughter clung to his legs in her anxiety lest he should be thrown overboard with the violent movement of the boat. i could not help being struck, even at that moment, with the appearance of the old man, so calm and collected, and so earnest as he kept his eye fixed on some object ahead. "courage, courage, friends! god will find us a way to escape," he cried out, at length. "an opening appears in the reef; yes, yes, the boat is heading in for it." as he spoke, i observed a dark spot in the wall of foam which an unpractised eye would not have discovered. as we rushed on towards the breakers, it increased in width till i felt assured that it was indeed an opening, and now beyond it appeared the tops of palm, pandanus, and other trees of those regions, giving us the assurance that we should find land and a haven where we might rest secure from the storm. still, humanly speaking, our peril was fearful. the greatest skill and judgment were required to guide a boat in a direct course across the tumultuous sea on which we floated. but looking up at the calm countenance of the missionary, as he called me to his side, i had no doubt about the result. on we flew. on either side appeared those walls of foam; one narrow space alone was to be seen where the waves rushed in unbroken by the resistance of the reef. we mounted to the summit of a vast billow--it seemed as if it were about to hurl us on the reef. in another instant we must be struggling helplessly amid that foaming mass of water i heard a cry of despair from more than one of my men. but no, the boat's head again turned towards the opening, and gliding down the billow we dashed through it, and saw on either side a comparatively smooth lagoon extending between the reef and the shore. the sheet was immediately hauled aft, and we ran along parallel with the beach in search of a favourable place for landing. we could scarcely judge of the size of the island, but we supposed it to be about three miles in length, and a mile or two in width, but mr bent did not know its name nor the character of its inhabitants. the question now arose as to whether they were the treacherous savages and cannibals most of the islanders of those seas were till the introduction among them of christianity, and would attempt our destruction as soon as we landed, or whether they would receive us with kindness and hospitality. as yet we had seen neither houses nor people; but a smooth beach appearing, with a natural quay of rocks, we resolved to land. we stood in towards the shore, and soon found a calm dock, into which we ran the boat and secured her. with thankful hearts we stepped on the dry land, when the missionary exclaimed, "let us, dear friends, return thanks to god for the merciful deliverance he has vouchsafed us." following his example, we all knelt in prayer, bursting forth at the end in a hymn of thanksgiving. while we were thus engaged a sound made me look up, and i saw emerging from among the cocoa-nut trees a band of unclad indians with long hair and beards, and armed with spears, and bows, and clubs. that they were still savage heathens there could be no doubt. however, as emerging from the wood they saw us kneeling, they stopped, apparently watching us with the greatest astonishment. not till we rose from our knees did they again advance. flourishing their weapons, however, with frightful gestures, they rushed towards us. happily they did not shoot their arrows. mr bent called out to them, but so loud were their shrieks and cries that his voice was not heard. we had a couple of muskets and a fowling piece in the boat; but so completely wetted had they been, that i doubted if they would go off, even had there been time to get them. we waved our handkerchiefs and lifted up our hands, to show that we were unarmed, and desired their friendship; but they disregarded all our signs, and came rushing on. our destruction appeared inevitable. "it's hard lines to lose our lives by these savages, after escaping all the dangers of the seas," exclaimed one of my men near me. "friend, god knows what is best for us," said the missionary, calmly. "his will is never really hard, though we may think it so. trust in him." mary was clinging to her father's arm, ready to share his fate. i stood by her side, resolved to defend her to the last. the savages were close upon us, when another person appeared from the wood, flying at full speed towards us, shouting at the same time in a loud voice to the savages. he was fully clothed in native fashion, and at first i thought that he was a chief, till, as he came nearer, i recognised in him our missing friend vihala, the christian teacher. the natives stopped when they became aware of his approach, and, finding that we made no resistance, contented themselves with standing around us, till he, rushing through them, cast himself down at the feet of the missionary, sobbing with joy at again seeing him. he then turned round to the natives, telling them that we were their greatest friends, and had left our homes and come from a far-off land to do them good. he spoke in a manly, authoritative tone, and greatly to our relief the savages at once retired, watching us at a distance. mary's first inquiry was for alea, in whom she took a great interest. "she is here, and safe," answered vihala; and he then briefly recounted the way in which they had been brought to the island. when first escaping, their intention had been to visit mr bent, and to get him to intercede with alea's father, and to try and conciliate the heathen chief to whom she was betrothed: but the small canoe in which they had embarked being driven out of its course, they were unable to find their way back, and finally reached this island. the weather had greatly moderated before they got near it, or their frail canoe would in all probability have been dashed to pieces on the reef. they found a passage similar to that by which we entered, and with fear and hesitation approached the beach. still they had no choice; their water and food was expended, they were suffering from hunger and thirst, and their limbs were cramped and chilled, and they must land or perish. their chief hope was that the island was not inhabited; for they knew too well the savage character of the people of most of the islands surrounding their own to have much hope of escaping without being either killed or made slaves. they had little doubt that there were inhabitants, from the fertile appearance of the country, and as their canoe touched the beach a number of savages darted out of the wood and surrounded them. they cried out that they had come with no evil intent, and that they had some news of great importance to announce to them. notwithstanding this, the savages showed an inclination to maltreat them, and were proceeding to rifle their canoe, when another party appeared on the stage. vihala at once saw that they were chiefs or people of consideration, and immediately thereupon cried out, and entreated that their lives might be spared. the chiefs, for such they were, came forward, and with some interest asked numerous questions in their native tongue, and soon there commenced a most affectionate rubbing of noses all round, and vihala discovered with great satisfaction that the chiefs were his own relatives, who had left their native island some years previously, and were supposed to have been lost. alea, as the daughter of the king, they treated with even more consideration than vihala. most providential was the influence the young people were thereby enabled to gain over their savage countrymen; nor did they fail to endeavour immediately to exercise it for good. this was clearly one of god's ways of working, and one which has been more than once employed in polynesia. they had glorious tidings to give,--to describe the new and beautiful religion brought to them by people from a far-off country, who had left their native land, their homes, and their families for love of their souls, in obedience to the loving, merciful god whom they served. some listened, rejoicing in the news; others would not understand, and many turned aside altogether. a small band had, however, been taught by the spirit to acknowledge jesus as their saviour, and they now welcomed heartily the missionary who had at first brought the glad news into that region. vihala was able to repeat many of the words of truth, which were dropped as seeds in the hearts of the people. the conduct of alea, even in her living in a different part of the island from vihala, excited their curiosity and gained their attention. so admirable an example had they set, and assiduously had they laboured, that many of those who had become christians were already well instructed in the faith, and could give a reason for the hope that was in them. even the heathen party appeared to have no enmity towards them; when they heard that we were people of peace, and anxious only to do them good, they showed their friendly disposition by bringing us provisions, and in preparing a house for our reception under the direction of vihala. alea was on the other side of the island when we arrived, so that we had been on shore some time before she appeared. the meeting between mary and her was very affecting. she threw herself into mary's arms, and sobbed aloud with joy, exclaiming, "oh, my sister, my sister,--my more than sister,--my teacher, my mother, my soul's friend!--and have i found you again? do i once more hear that dear voice,--do i once more kiss those sweet lips which have told me such holy truths? ah me! i have gone through much pain and terror, and sorrow and suffering of the spirit, and i have done very wrong, i fear; but i think that i am forgiven, because that i am allowed once more to see you in this wonderful way." often have i since thought of the words uttered by that young unsophisticated child of nature, so lately a child of satan, and the remarks made by the venerable missionary to me:--"`my soul's friend!' do we, with all our learning, and knowledge, and religious privileges, thus measure the value of our friends? how many of our friends are our soul's friends? oh, as we value our souls, let us try and find out and cling to those which are so. do we value most the lips which tell us holy truths or those which speak to us pleasant words,--flattering words? let us seek, my friend, those only whose lips ever speak to us holy truths,--who will tell us of our faults,--who will not flatter with their tongues." i will not repeat more of his remarks, but i may mention that, like all faithful pastors of the lord's flock, he never lost an opportunity of inculcating the truth, of exhorting of advising. he knew the value of a soul in his master's sight. the chiefs assured us that our boat would be safe; so having unloaded her, we hauled her up on the beach, and left her in charge of some natives, with whom it was arranged my men should lodge till we were again able to put to sea. i took one of them with me well armed, as i was myself; for i own that i did not like altogether to trust the missionary and his daughter alone among the savages, the greater number of whom were still heathen in all their notions and customs. chapter twelve. a loving welcome. we now set off with alea and her friends through the woods to the other side of the island. the natives kept at a respectful distance, the children peeping at us out of the entrances to their huts or from behind the trees, we being the first white people they had ever seen. we reached at length the shore of a beautiful sandy bay, where in a grove of cocoa-nuts we found vihala busily employed in forming divisions in a large native hut to suit our requirements. so assiduously had he and his christian converts worked, that it was almost ready for our reception. the people began immediately to assemble round us, expecting that the missionary would address them, as vihala had been accustomed to do, but he told them that we were weary from our long voyage and needed rest, as indeed we did. "no, no, my friend," said mr bent, "do not send the people away till we have bestowed on them some portion of the bread of life." on this, greatly fatigued though he was, the missionary spoke to them in plain and simple, yet in tender and glowing words, of the great love of god for a perishing world, which caused him to send his only son down on earth, that all who believe in him should not perish, but have life everlasting. many wept and cried out that they were sinners, and entreated that he would talk to them again of this matter as soon as he was able. after an ample repast, provided by the natives, we retired to rest without fear, for we felt that we were watched over by one who never slumbers nor sleeps. i do not believe that i ever slept more soundly in my life. the next morning the people again assembled to hear the missionary deliver his message, his glad tidings of great joy, and glad tidings indeed they were to many of those long-benighted beings. they had never dreamed of a god of love; their only notion of a superior power was one which inspired them with awe and terror. i have frequently observed that the unsophisticated minds of savages grasp the simple and glorious truths of the gospel with an avidity and a power of comprehension which would be surprising to those who have been accustomed week after week and year after year to set the same truths before those to whom they are familiar. as i heard mr bent and vihala addressing the people, whose upturned eager earnest countenances i watched, my heart glowed within me, and i longed to be able also to spread the same glad tidings among a race so eager to receive them. mary bent was not idle either, for she had collected round her a number of young women and girls, to whom she was telling the same truths in a way calculated to fix them on their memories. i deeply regretted that we could not remain on the island till some at least had been thoroughly instructed in the doctrines of christianity, but it was clearly my duty to return as soon as i possibly could to my ship. "find out what is right and do it, independent of all other considerations," was a maxim in which i had been instructed. mr bent, although more anxious to remain for some time longer even than i was, saw things in the same light i set to work, therefore, with my crew to prepare our boat for sea, so as to commence our return voyage directly the storm should cease and the sea become calm. a week, however, elapsed before i considered that we might safely venture to put to sea. when the natives heard that we were about to take our departure, they entreated with tears that we would remain some time longer. finding that they could not prevail, they then of their own accord begged that vihala might be left with them. this was a sore trial to him, for alea had been convinced that it was her duty at once to return to her father, and the separation was grievous to both. still the path of duty seemed clearly marked out for them. there was no hesitation. vihala felt that he could not abandon those who had been so lately taught to know the truth, and who so much needed further instruction. the young people consoled themselves that they might soon again meet to be united for ever. "fear not, dearest," said vihala. "let us put our trust in god. we are doing our duty. he always protects those who do that." still, though they thus bravely spoke, they were both deeply affected at parting. a large multitude of the natives accompanied us to the beach, and earnest prayers were offered up for our safety. mary and her friend were already in the boat, when there was a cry among the crowd, which opening in the centre, several men appeared dragging by ropes what looked like logs of wood. "here, take these things," they shouted. "these were once our gods--we are ashamed of them; but they will serve to show the people of other lands that we are no longer what we were, trusting to blocks of wood and stone, but disciples of the true god, who made the heavens, and the earth, and all things therein. take them-- take them with you, or cart them into the sea, so that we may never behold them again." the boat was already fully loaded; but we could not refuse this request, so fixing one at the stern, and another at the bows, and some smaller idols under the seats, we, thus freighted, pulled out through the reef and made sail for the mission station. the wind was light, and we could scarcely expect to accomplish the voyage within three days. as however the boat was large, we were able to fit up a small shelter, in which mary and alea could sleep with tolerable comfort while the weather was fine. the conversation of mr bent i found of unspeakable advantage. he and i kept watch and watch, though i insisted on keeping five to his three, not to run the risk of fatiguing him overmuch. i remember, during a midnight watch, feeling some uneasy sensations come over me with occasional shivering, but at the time thought little of it. the second morning dawn had just broken, when i saw in the distance an object, which, as we neared it, proved to be a large double canoe. where she could have come from, and what was the character of the people on board i could not tell, and this caused me no little anxiety. still, without going much out of our course, it would be difficult to avoid them. i awoke mr bent, and we agreed to sail directly on, taking no notice of them, unless the people showed a friendly disposition. in a short time we got near enough to ascertain without doubt that she was crowded with heathen warriors, who were indulging themselves in every conceivable variety of violent gesticulation. we had too much reason to believe that they would attack us. our men loaded the firearms, but i hoped that we might avoid having to fight for our lives. providentially the wind was light. under sail the canoe could beat us hollow, but we could pull faster than she could. i accordingly ordered the oars to be got out, so as to avoid her if necessary. suddenly, however, as she got close to us down came her sail, and all the warriors prostrated themselves on the deck, where they remained as we glided by. had we been alone we should have boarded them, but with mary and alea on board, we felt it more prudent to avoid them. the wind soon again springing up, on we sailed, and as long as we could distinguish the people on the deck, they were seen still lying down as they were when we passed. the cause of this strange behaviour did not till then strike me, when my eye fell on the hideous idol in our bow, and i found many months afterwards that i was right in my conjectures, when i met with one of the men who had formed the crew of the canoe. he and his companions were among the most ferocious of the cannibals of the pacific. on seeing us they had borne down upon us intending our destruction. when, however, they saw the two hideous idols stuck up at either end of the boat, they were impressed with the idea that some powerful gods were on a cruise, or about to visit some new country, and completely awestruck, they dared not examine us further. thus were we delivered from another great danger. it was not till we were out of sight of the war-canoe, that mary and alea awaking, we told them of what had occurred. the indian girl trembled, as well she might, for there was much reason to suppose that it belonged to the heathen chief to whom she was betrothed, and that had she been discovered she would have been carried away as a prisoner. again a feeling of illness came over me, for which i could not account, but i exerted myself and succeeded in overcoming the sensation. our voyage continued prosperous though our progress was slow, and it was not till the morning of the fourth day that we sighted the high land above the missionary station. as we sailed in through an intricate passage, under the guidance of mr bent, we saw people collecting on the beach. he stood up and waved to them with his daughter resting on his arm. a minute passed, when it was evident that he was recognised, for there was an immediate hurrying to and fro--numbers rushing down to the beach from all quarters, clapping and stretching out their hands, and leaping, and dancing, with other demonstrative gesticulations; and as we got closer we could hear them shouting forth their welcomes, and then a song of gratitude and praise arose from the mouths of the many hundreds collected together. the reception was truly touching and gratifying. "oh, how they love my father!" said mary. those words spoke volumes. i did not propose allowing myself more than an hour on shore, intending to start immediately for my ship. scarcely, however, had i walked ten paces than i tottered, and should have fallen had not mr bent and some of the natives caught me; and i found myself carried away to his house. my impression was that i was dying, and mr bent insisting that he would not allow me to undertake the voyage, i begged that my men would return to the ship. as the coxswain was a steady fellow, and the wind was fair, i had no anxiety as to their finding their way. the boat, therefore, immediately sailed, and i was left alone at the missionary station. i have ever felt that it was providential my illness seized me when it did, for had i embarked, i do not believe, humanly speaking, that i should have survived. i use the term providential, at the same time that i believe nothing happens to us which is not subject to god's providing care. for many days mr bent believed that my life hung by a thread, as the expression is, and it was owing, as far as human means were concerned, to his and his daughters watchful care that i recovered, and to his knowledge of medicine. i do not wish to trouble the reader of this narrative with more than is seemly of my personal affairs, but i must briefly refer to what proved the happiest event of my life. after having seen so much of mary bent, i felt that no pain could be greater than that of having to part from her, and i found also to my joy that she had given me her affection. we at once told all to mr bent. "my only regret, if i have one, david, is, that you are not a missionary," was his reply. "i had wished mary to have become the helpmate of one entirely devoted to the glorious service of our lord and master." "but, sir, surely without being set aside exclusively for the work of a missionary, i may labour not without effect in the lord's vineyard," i answered, promptly, for i had often read and often felt how much might really be done by a christian layman in the cause of christ. "true, true, david, and i pray god that you and many more like you may thus labour in whatever course of life you are called," answered the missionary. "i believe you, indeed i may say that i know you, to be (as far as one man can judge another) a true and sincere christian, or no consideration would induce me to entrust my child to you. i do, however, give her to you with confidence that you will watch over her spiritual, as i am assured you will over her temporal welfare." i will not repeat more that mr bent said to me on the occasion. the exhortation he then uttered i have repeated often to others. husbands and wives, do you watch over each other's spiritual welfare? are you each jealously watchful over every word and action which may lead the other into sin? with whom do you associate? in what sort of amusements do you indulge? what sort of places do you prefer to visit? in these matters your consciences do not accuse you. very well. but do you pray together, and pray aright? do you read the scriptures together? are you constantly pointing out to each other the heavenward way? do you more earnestly desire each other's salvation than all the wealth the world can give, than all earthly blessings? have you assured yourselves that you will meet together before the great white throne clothed in the bright robes of the lamb? surely those alone are truly happy and fitly matched who can answer yes, yes, in a joyful chorus, to such questions. it would be profitable if i could repeat many of the remarks made to me from time to time by mr bent. "how sad it is that seamen are generally so ignorant of their awful responsibilities, and of the immeasurable amount of good they have it in their power to effect in the christian cause during their visits to foreign lands," he one day observed to me. "ay, alas! and to think of the immeasurable amount of harm they by their too general conduct produce. thousands and thousands of professed christian seamen are found every day in the year at seaports inhabited by heathens. into what disrepute do they too generally bring christianity, instead of exhibiting its beauty and excellence by the propriety and correctness of their lives--i will not say, as i could wish, by their purity and holiness. "it is impossible to calculate the amount of harm nominally christian seamen have produced among these islands of the pacific. there have been bright exceptions, especially among the british ships of war happily commanded by christian officers; sir everard home, captain waldegrave, and others--names that will ever be honoured among the isles of the pacific. several masters of whalers and merchantmen also have come here and done credit to the christian character; but the larger number, with their crews, have done incalculable mischief to the hapless natives, and when they have found their evil practices opposed by the missionaries of the gospel, they have wreaked their revenge by spreading on their return home reports intended to injure them, and to prevent the spread of christianity among the isles of the pacific. god ever protects those labouring earnestly in his cause; and although these reports have done little harm at home, they will have to render up a tremendous account for their own doings among the inhabitants of polynesia. the missionaries and their supporters only desire that those at home should read their statements as well as the reports of their traducers, feeling assured that every impartial judge will pronounce a verdict in their favour. the missionaries to the pacific desire that their fellow-men should approve their proceedings, not for their own sakes (for to their master they joyfully and confidently commit their cause), but that their so glorious cause may not suffer, and may obtain the required support." but to return to my narrative. chapter thirteen. the romance of missions. i have not described the mission station where i had spent the last few weeks. it was beautifully situated on gently rising ground backed by lofty hills wooded to their very summits. here and there dark and rugged masses of rock might be seen peeping out from amid the trees and streams of sparkling water falling down their sides far away below into basins of foam, and then taking their course in rapid, bubbling rivulets towards the blue sea. the windows of the house, which were very large to admit a free current of air, and were shaded by a deep-roofed verandah, looked on one side up towards the hills, and on the other over the boundless ocean. the interior was a pattern of neatness. the furniture, though simple, was pretty and well made, with snowy white curtains to the windows and beds, and green blinds to keep out the glare of that hot clime. the verandah ran completely round the house, and a thick thatch of leaves formed a roof which effectually prevented the sun's rays from penetrating below. in front was a pretty flower-garden, and in the rear a well-stocked kitchen garden, producing in perfection all the native vegetables, fruits, and roots, as well as many from europe. the islanders there saw even their own fruits and roots increased in size, and improved in flavour by careful culture. near it was a cool grove of cocoa-nut palm and bread-fruit trees, through which a fresh current of trade wind was continually blowing. the church, although built by the natives of wood--under the direction of course of mr bent--was a commodious and imposing edifice. the school-house was also a large and neat building. in its neighbourhood was a long street of cottages inhabited by natives, constructed after the plan of the teachers' dwellings--some of stone or rather rock coral, and others of wood--all having both flower and kitchen gardens, while round the settlement were extensive fields where the chief food for the support of the community was produced. of the many missionary stations which i have visited, all are more or less like the one i have described. the missionaries have thus not only taught the natives of these wide-scattered islands the truths of the gospel, but by practically showing them the very great advantages which civilised men possess over savages, they have induced them to become industrious, and to learn those elementary arts by which alone their civilisation can be advanced and secured. however, it must be remembered that very few communities are so favourably placed that they can advance far in civilisation unless they have the means of exchanging the produce of their labour with that of other people, and on this account mr bent was very anxious to obtain another vessel in lieu of one which had been lost, so that he might enable the natives under his special charge to trade with other islanders, and might at the same time convey missionaries and teachers wherever they might desire to move. i offered to assist in building such a craft--a schooner which could be easily handled--and afterwards to take command of her should the _golden crown_ not return for me. in the event of her appearing, i hoped that still captain buxton would give me my discharge; but should he be unwilling to comply with my wish i purposed returning out to the island as soon as possible, that i might marry mary bent, and then commence the very important undertaking i had proposed. that no time might be lost, we forthwith drew out the plan of our vessel. i was still unable to move about to assist mr bent; he, however, at once set the natives to work to cut down the necessary trees, and to prepare the timber. when we remembered how much that great and good missionary, williams, had accomplished single-handed, we agreed that we ought not to be daunted by any difficulties which might occur. we had already an ample supply of tools, a carpenter's and a blacksmith's workshop, and several of the younger natives had become, if not perfectly skilled, at all events very fair artisans; indeed, fully capable of performing all the rougher work, both of wood and iron, which would be required. indeed, i may say, that in a great degree they made up for their want of skill by their teachableness and anxiety to do their work in a satisfactory manner. they understood as clearly as we did the importance of the undertaking, both on account of the worldly advantage it might prove to them, and the benefit of a religious character the vessel might convey to others. the more i saw the work progressing as i lay helpless on my couch, and the more i thought of the benefit, not one alone, but a fleet of such vessels, might prove to the pacific isles, the more eagerly i prayed for my recovery, that i might take my share in it. it was indeed a joyful day when at length i was able to go out and join the rest, even although only for a short time, in the work. i had brought my uncle's journal with me that i might lend it to mr bent, as i felt sure that he would be interested in reading it. "the perusal of that manuscript has caused me tears of joy and thankfulness," he observed, as he returned it to me. "wonderful, under god's providence, are the changes which have been wrought among the inhabitants of a large portion of polynesia since the time of which he wrote. they have indeed truly been called from out of darkness into light; and even those who have not been converted, benefit by the light which shines among them. the description he gives of their spiritual condition and of the scenes which were constantly enacted among them is indeed most true. you see what they have become; you see order and civilisation prevailing among those who were considered the most savage and debased; places of worship, educated and enlightened ministers, well-regulated schools, a large proportion able to read the word of god in their own tongue; but you are not acquainted with the means by which this glorious change has been wrought--with what may be called `the transition state' of polynesia. one of the chief reasons why people at home are incredulous as to the present condition of these islands is, that they are ignorant of the events which have occurred, and of the nature of the instrumentality which has been employed. they say that man could not have done it, and, therefore, that it cannot have been done. they are right in saying that man could not have done it, but it has been done by the holy spirit of god working by means of human agency; weak things have indeed been employed to confound the strong." i was seated with mr bent and his daughter at our evening meal--the labours of the day being over--enjoying the cool sea breeze, which blowing through the room afforded us that strength and refreshment which our frames, exhausted by the heat, greatly required. i assured him how thankful i should be to have the account he offered, confessing that except with respect to the islands at which we had touched, and where i could judge of the changed state of the people, i was still very ignorant of the condition of the principal part of the inhabitants of polynesia. indeed, i owned, that had i believed the accounts given in two works we had on board, i should have supposed that the inhabitants had rather suffered than benefited by the advent of missionaries among them, and that from being light-hearted, happy beings, they had become morose, discontented, and inhospitable. i mentioned kotzebue's "voyage round the world," in which work the author abuses the missionaries in unmeasured terms, and another by a mr beale, the surgeon of a south-sea whaler, who, in a book full of valuable descriptions of whales, and the mode of catching them, loses no opportunity of showing his dislike to missionaries, and the principles they have inculcated on their native converts. "yes, indeed," said mr bent; "i might mention several other works of a similar character, which, i believe, have prevented many persons from supporting missions to these seas, or served as an excuse to them for not doing so; but i also have many works written by men of high standing, and thoroughly unprejudiced as witnesses, who do full justice to the labours of my missionary brethren, or rather, i would say, to the results which by their instrumentality have been produced. the hon. captain keppel (now admiral yelverton), of hms _meander_, who visited these islands in , will, i know, speak in favourable terms. captain erskine, of hms _havannah_, has done so in a very interesting work on the `islands of the pacific' captain wilkes, of the united states navy, in his `voyages round the world,' speaks most favourably of the result of missionary enterprise; and so indeed do many other naval officers of both nations. i myself must be considered as an impartial witness to the magnitude of the work which has resulted from the labours of the agents of the various societies which have sent the gospel of peace to the islands of these seas. on being rescued from more than death by your uncle i was received back as a returned prodigal by my family, and was enabled to pursue a course of studies which would fit me for the work to which i had resolved to devote myself. my father, when he consented to my wishes, made the proviso, however, that i should not connect myself with any religious body for the purpose, or act as the agent of any missionary society, but that i should go forth by myself, relying on the funds which he would place at my disposal. while he lived he supported me liberally, enabling me to marry and to bring out a wife to be the sharer of my toils, and on his death he left me an income which has been sufficient, with that derived by my own labours, for all my wants. i have thus been able, by means of the little vessel i spoke of, to move about among the islands as i judged best, and often to render assistance to brother ministers of various denominations, whose work had become too great for their strength. i do not speak of the mode of proceeding i adopted, to induce others to follow in the same course, but simply to explain how it is that you find me unattached to any missionary society, and yet acquainted with the transactions of all those labouring in this part of the world. i propose, my young friend, that you may the more clearly understand the present spiritual condition of these pacific isles, to give you a brief sketch of what i consider the four great prominent events which have taken place connected with them, and almost immediately, i may say, under my own eye--events of importance unspeakable, as marking the signal overthrow of satan's power. first, the declaration by the king of tahiti, one of the georgian islands, of his conviction of the truth of christianity, and of his desire to become a servant of the true god, on the th june, , just fifteen years after the arrival of the missionaries in that group, followed immediately by the open profession of several natives of tahiti. the second event occurred in november, , when king rihoriho, of hawaii, one of the sandwich islands, in one day breaking through the most revered of heathen customs, set fire to the temples, and destroyed the idols, a few months before the arrival of the missionaries, who were then on their way to attempt the conversion of his people. the third event occurred in . it was the conversion of a powerful chief of the friendly islands, who afterwards became king george of tonga. some time before this, two tahitian teachers connected with the london missionary society, on their way to fiji had resided with tubou, chief of nukualofa. under their influence and instruction tubou gave up the tonga gods, destroyed the spirit house, and erected a place for christian worship, in which he and his people, to the number of two hundred and forty, assembled to listen to divine truth in the tahitian language, on the th of february, . he was not, however, baptised till . a fourth event, which appears still more wonderful to those who know the man than any i have before mentioned, was the conversion of the fierce and proud cannibal, king thakombau, of bau, the most powerful among the chiefs of fiji, on the th april, . he may, indeed, be considered the king of all fiji, for all the other chiefs are either his vassals, or vassals to those who acknowledge him as their chief. although a large number of the inhabitants of the group, of all ranks, had embraced christianity before the king, yet his conversion more especially marked the triumph of the truth in fiji, and proves the power of the gospel to change the heart of a man, however benighted, savage, and bloodthirsty he may have been. "to these more prominently important events may be added the establishment of a church at raratonga, in may, , ten years after the landing of the first native teacher, which went on increasing till the entire population had been brought under christian instruction. "still more important than the former events was the arrival of messrs. williams and barff at samoa, with a band of native teachers, in , at the moment when tamafaigna, a despot, who united the supreme spiritual with great political power, and whose boundless sway presented a most formidable barrier to the introduction of the gospel, had just been slain, and their cordial reception by malietoa, a chief of an acute and inquiring mind and amiable disposition, who himself, with his sons, and their wives and children, soon afterwards renounced their superstitions, and destroyed the only idol found in samoa. the population, when the missionaries landed, amounted to forty thousand, who, though not so cruel and bloodthirsty as that of other groups, were still sunk in the lowest depths of pagan ignorance and misery. "i have watched too the partial establishment of christianity among the native inhabitants of new zealand, and its extension thence northward, as also from the east among the islands of western polynesia--the new hebrides, new caledonia, and the loyalty and britannia islands. still the great work is progressing. new labourers are appearing in the field. from all directions the heathen are crying out for instruction in the wonderful gospel, and more and more labourers are required to supply their urgent wants. a very remarkable feature in this great work is the mode in which it has been accomplished. the number of educated white men engaged in it has been comparatively very small. the most unexpected results, the greatest triumphs have been brought about through native agency. the natives of the society islands and hervey group especially, instructed by english missionaries, and inspired by the holy spirit, have, with love in their hearts for their perishing brethren and a burning desire for their conversion, gone forth, braving all perils, some to the surrounding, others to far distant islands, and their language being similar, they have at once been able to address their heathen inhabitants. many have died from sickness, others have been murdered by those they came to help, but the remainder have persevered till they have seen the cause of the gospel triumphant. "oh, mr harvey, i wish that others were impressed as i am with the awful thought that day after day thousands upon thousands of heathen are perishing in darkness and sin who might, did their christian fellow-men use more exertion, have had the glorious gospel preached to them, and have been brought to see the light. i will illustrate the remarks i have made," said mr bent, "by examples as they occur to me, keeping, as much as my memory will allow, to the sequence of events." ------------------------------------------------------------------------ to the testimonies referred to in the foregoing chapter may be added that given by dr seemann, in "viti: an account of a government mission to the vitian or fijian islands in the years - ." he was sent out by the english government to ascertain the fitness of the group for the production of cotton. he was absent only thirteen months from england, and had time not only to sow the seed, but to pluck the cotton which it produced. speaking of the missionaries to the group, he says: "it was all up-hill work; yet results have been attained to which no right-minded man can refuse admiration. according to the latest returns, the attendance on christian worship in was , , and there were , in the day-schools. for the supervision of this great work the society had only eleven european missionaries and two schoolmasters, assisted by a large class of native agents who are themselves the fruits of mission toil, and some of whom, once degraded and cannibal heathens, are becoming valuable and accredited ministers of the gospel." dr seemann is a naturalist, and certainly is not prejudiced in favour of the wesleyans, or of any other religious body. his evidence is therefore of more value. a description of the condition of fiji as it was is sickening; and yet it is necessary to show the depth of depravity to which human nature can sink, and the glorious change which the gospel can work even in savages such as these. they were constantly at war with each other, and often fought for no other purpose than to procure people for their ovens. they have been known even to bake men alive. often a town was attacked, and all the inhabitants, sometimes four or five hundred in number, were slaughtered. when the son of a great chief arrived at manhood, it was the custom to endue him with his _toga virilis_ on the summit of a large heap of slaughtered enemies; and the whole population of a town was ruthlessly murdered for no other purpose than to form such a heap. when a chief received a visit from a brother chieftain, if he had no captives ready to kill, he would kill some of his own slaves, or send out to catch some men, women, or children from a neighbouring island, or from among his own people. indeed, no man, whatever his rank, was safe; and hundreds thus lost their lives every year, that the cannibal propensities of the chiefs might be gratified. infanticide was common among the chiefs as well as among the lower orders; and mothers, abandoning all natural affection, considered it no crime to kill their children. it was an ordinary matter for children to bury their aged parents alive; and fathers and mothers have been known to bury alive their grown-up sons who might complain of illness, or have become weary of life, stamping down on their graves with the greatest unconcern. on the death of a chief his favourite wives were invariably strangled with him. numerous slaves also were killed, to form his band of attendants to another world; and a great cannibal feast was also held. human victims were offered to their obscene deities by their priests in their temples, groves, and high places. when a house was to be built for a chief, four live slaves were placed in deep holes to support the corner posts, when the earth was filled in on them, that their spirits might watch over the edifice. when a large canoe was to be launched victims were clubbed, or the canoe was drawn over their living bodies like the car of juggernaut, crushing them to death. for the slightest offence a chief would club to death one of his wives, or any of his people, and feast afterwards on their bodies. but enough has been said to show the character of the people of fiji. they are, especially the chiefs, tall, handsome men; and though their skin is black, they have not the features of negroes. they are also very intelligent, active and energetic. dr seemann says, page of his work, "until , bau, which is the name of the metropolis as well as of the ruling state, was opposed to the missionaries, and the ovens in which the bodies of human victims were baked scarcely ever got cold. since then, however, a great change has taken place. the king and all his court have embraced christianity; of the heathen temples, which by their pyramidical form gave such a peculiar local colouring to old pictures of the place, only the foundations remain; the sacred groves in the neighbourhood are cut down; and in the great square, where formerly cannibal feasts took place, a large church has been erected. not without emotion did i land on this blood-stained soil, where probably greater iniquities were perpetrated than ever disgraced any other spot on earth. it was about eight o'clock in the evening; and, instead of the wild noise which greeted former visitors, family prayer was heard from nearly every house. "to bring about such a change has indeed required no slight efforts, and many valuable lives had to be sacrificed; for although no missionary in fiji has ever met with a violent death, yet the list of those who died in the midst of their labours is proportionately great. the wesleyans, to whose disinterestedness the conversion of these degraded beings is due, have, as a society, expended , pounds on this object; and if the private donations of friends to individual missionaries and their families be added, the sum reaches to the respectable amount of , pounds." dr seemann describes a visit to the island of lakemba, hallowed as the spot on which the first christian mission was established. mr fletcher, the resident missionary, conducted him and his companions through a grove of cocoa-nut palms and bread-fruit trees to his house, a commodious building, thatched with leaves, surrounded by a fence and broad-boarded verandah, the front of the house looking into a nice little flower-garden, the back into the courtyard. the ladies gave them a hearty welcome, glad to look once more upon white faces, and to hear accounts from home. though the thermometer ranged more than degrees fahrenheit, the thick thatch kept off the scorching rays, and there was a fresh current of trade wind blowing through the rooms. it was pleasing to see everything so scrupulously neat and clean; the beds and curtains as white as snow, and everywhere the greatest order prevailed. "there are the elements of future civilisation,--models ready for imitation,--hallowed homes which no romish priest can afford," observes the doctor, "the yard well-stocked with ducks and fowls, pigs and goats,--the gardens replete with flowers, cotton shrubs twelve feet high, and bearing leaves, flowers, and fruit in all stages of development. these missionary stations are fulfilling all the objects of convents in their best days, and a great deal more; for their inmates are teaching a pure and simple faith in jesus, which those of the convents did not." mr fletcher showed them over the town, the first spot in fiji where christianity was triumphant and a printing-press was established, from which was issued an edition of the whole bible in the language of the people, and several other works. there exist, indeed, two versions of the bible in the language of fiji. the church in the town is a substantial building, capable of holding three hundred people. there are some thirty other churches in the lakemba district alone. from lakemba, occupying a week on the voyage, they proceeded to the island of somosomo, till lately one of the strongholds of idolatry and cannibalism. golea, the king, was a heathen, but his chief wife, eleanor, was a christian, and they believed a sincere one, judging from the almost frantic manner in which she endeavoured to obtain a fijian bible seen in their possession. she exhausted every argument to get it, and her joy was indescribable when her wishes were acceded to. dr seemann writes: "if the wesleyan society had more funds at its disposal, so as to be able to send out a greater number of efficient teachers, a very few years would see the whole of fiji christianised, as all the real difficulties now in the way of the mission have been removed. on my representing the case in this light, his majesty the king of hanover was graciously pleased to subscribe his first gift of pounds towards so desirable an object, at the same time expressing his admiration for the labours of the individual missionaries i named." chapter fourteen. from darkness to daylight. "my dear young friend," said mr bent, addressing me, in continuation of the subject on which he had before been speaking, "we should never despair while god is with us of the success of our labours among the heathen. in my experience i have known numerous instances in which, when it appeared that profound darkness rested on the land, light has burst forth and spread far and wide around. "i believe that thirteen years had passed after the _duff_ had made her most successful voyage to these seas in , and landed a large body of missionaries at tahiti, before one single acknowledged convert to christianity was made. still the diminished band of missionaries laboured on. they obeyed god's express command to preach the word to all creatures, and they knew that his word would not return to him void. god works through human agency, and it must be confessed that many of these missionaries were not fitted by education for the work they had undertaken. it may be said with justice that therefore they did not succeed. still they laboured on, teaching many the principles of christianity although none turned to the truth. "pomare, the king of tahiti, although he was friendly to the missionaries, for long remained as determined a heathen as any of his people. at length, however, attacked by his own subjects, he could not protect the missionaries, and the larger number were compelled to retire to the island of huahine, where they hoped to be in safety. so little progress did they appear to be making even here in their undertaking, that, with one exception, the following year they left huahine and retired to new south wales, thus bringing the once promising mission to the society islands to a termination. i refer to this time to show you how necessary it is that missionaries should not under any circumstances despair of success. nothing could be more hopeless than this mission now seemed. pomare, although he befriended the missionaries, remained still seemingly as dark and determined a heathen as at first, and he had now indeed no longer the power of helping them. he had, however, received a considerable amount of instruction from them. he had acquired the arts of reading and writing his own language, and had learned the first principles of christianity. "the seed had not, as was supposed, been sown on stony ground, though it took long in growing up. adversity caused pomare to think. he had been told that jehovah is a god of purity and holiness, and he began to reflect that the life he and his people led must be very distasteful to such a god, and might be the cause of the sufferings he was enduring. the holy spirit seemed to apply the truth, so that he at length comprehended the nature of sin, and especially felt his own great sinfulness. he, therefore, wrote letter after letter, entreating the missionaries to return. with joy they accepted his invitation. on their arrival, the king and several of his people professed their belief in the new religion; but a coalition of heathen chiefs being formed against them, some severe fighting took place. the heathens were defeated. pomare treated them with great leniency, allowing no one to be injured, and even sending the body of a chief killed in battle back to his own people to be buried. so great was the effect of this conduct that the heathen party became anxious to know more of the new faith, and in a few months the idols of tahiti were thrown to the ground. although pomare and some of his chiefs, as well as the lower orders, had embraced christianity in spirit as well as in name, the mass of the people remained, as might have been expected, ignorant of its principles, and indulged in habits the very reverse of those it inculcates. still the true faith went on taking root downwards and bearing fruit upwards. in a large number of missionaries arrived from england at eimeo. among them came two whose names are known far beyond their spheres of action--william ellis and john williams. the following year some of them removed to huahine, the principal of the leeward or society group, and soon after john williams and mr l threlkeld, invited by tapa and other chiefs of raiatea, settled in that island. similar invitations were received from the chiefs of other large islands, while native teachers were sent to the smaller islands which were also occasionally visited by the missionaries. thus in a few years the entire population of the georgian and society islands had renounced idolatry, and were in general outwardly very strict in their religious observances. i say outwardly, because many of those who attended religious worship and refrained from all work and amusement on the sabbath, still continued in the practice of heathen vices. yet i believe that at that very time the great mass of the people were not more ignorant of christian truth, nor more vicious, than are too many communities of like size in so-called christian europe. we should judge of people who have lately been brought out of a savage state, not by a standard which we should wish them to attain, but by other people who have long been considered civilised christians; and thus judging of the inhabitants of tahiti and the neighbouring islands, i am certain that they will not lose by comparison with many of those who have claimed for centuries to be civilised, and whose religion has long been nominally christian. i say this with confidence, but after all it is not saying much in their praise. one thing, however, is very clear. a few years ago they were ignorant barbarians, savage and debased, not knowing right from wrong. now they abstain from their former cruel and sanguinary practices, they go about clothed and live in neat cottages, and industriously cultivate the ground; they can generally read and write their own language, and have learned many mechanical arts; they understand the principles of christianity, attend divine worship, and respect the sabbath, while undoubtedly some, and perhaps many, have been `created anew in christ jesus unto good works,' and not a few have risked their lives, and laid them down for the gospel's sake. a large number of the native teachers who have gone forth among the savage tribes of the wide-scattered islands of the ocean to carry to them the glad tidings of salvation, have come from tahiti and other parts of the georgian and society archipelago. "great as was the change, after all allowances are made, in the islands of which i have been speaking, that produced by the promulgation of the truth in raratonga was still greater. you know how john williams, after founding the church in huahine, moved to raiatea, in the hervey group, and thence sailing forth, discovered the then savage raratonga, where the devoted papehia landed to commence the work which he was afterwards enabled to perfect. papehia began his ministrations by telling the people about the power and purity of god, and his love to mankind, and contrasting his attributes with those of their idols. by teaching both old and young portions of scripture, and the latter to read, they began to perceive the follies of heathenism. "thus the old religion was undermined, and a way prepared for the introduction of the new faith. the priests were the most inveterate opponents of christianity, yet the first person who destroyed his idols was a priest. several others followed his example. soon another native teacher from tahiti joined papehia to aid in the work which so rapidly progressed. the first chief converted was tinomana. after a lengthened conversation with papehia, in spite of the expostulations of priests and people, saying, `my heart has taken hold of the word of jehovah,' he ordered a servant to set fire to his idol and his temple. the christians now united, with tinomana at their head, to live together in one community, numbering four or five thousand. not fifteen months after papehia landed, they erected a chapel three hundred feet long, with a pulpit at either end, from which each teacher addressed nearly fifteen hundred wild, naked savages at once, without inconvenience. this wonderful change had been effected, you must remember, by two native teachers alone, in less than two years and a half from the day of their landing in raratonga, and who were themselves born heathens and trained in idolatry in an island nearly seven hundred miles away. "four years after the discovery of the island, john williams took up his abode there with the reverend c pitman, they being afterwards joined by the reverend a buzacott. laws were now formed, and the first christian community divided into two separate villages. a chapel of a substantial character was next planned. a site was cleared, large trees were cut down, coral lime was burned, the timber was sawn, and in two months from the commencement an edifice an hundred and fifty feet long and fifty-six feet wide, the thatched roof supported on either side by seven iron-wood pillars twenty-five feet high, was erected. there were ten doors, three at each side and two at each end, and twenty windows, with large venetian blinds. this chapel was a substantial proof of the zeal of the christian converts; but the heathens were still numerous and powerful, and at length, hoping to overthrow the new faith, they attacked the settlement, and burned the chapel and many of the christians' houses. a fearful storm and flood and a severe epidemic followed, carrying off hundreds of the natives. though severely tried, the missionaries were not cast down. the heathen retired, the epidemic ceased, the damage caused by the storm was repaired, and the work of civilisation proceeded. "it became expedient to form a new village for the immediate followers of tinomana. a site was fixed on, the land was cleared, and in a few months the village was completed. it was nearly a mile and a half in length; a wide and straight road, gravelled with sea-side sand, was made from one extremity to the other, on either side of which were rows of the tall and beautiful tufted-top `ti' trees. the houses were built of lime and wattle, each about forty feet long, twelve high, twenty wide, and divided into three or four rooms. they stood back some fifty yards from the road, and were that distance from one another. about the centre, on one side of the street, was the chapel, and on the other the school-house. a belt of trees protected the settlement on the sea-side, while inland rose ranges of picturesque mountains, the intervening space being occupied by pastures and fields cultivated or in the course of cultivation. i remember the scene well. it gave me an indescribable feeling of satisfaction when i first saw it, for it proved that a very great change must have been wrought in the habits of the people, and i trusted that their spiritual condition had likewise been much improved. this was the first on the same plan of many villages which were erected as christianity spread among the people. at each village, or even where there was a chapel alone, a school-house was erected, where the elements of reading, writing, arithmetic, and geography, were taught to adults as well as to children, and only eight years after the landing of papehia, two thousand children and one thousand six hundred adults were under instruction. although many of the adults could never be taught to read, they learned portions of scripture, and as they willingly listened to the teachers, the truth gradually spread among the whole population. "a printing press was during this year of introduced into the island, and the first native raratongan teacher went forth to carry the glad tidings of salvation to the people of the samoan group, then lying in darkness. `teava' was one of the first converts made by papehia, and a devoted imitator of the noble example he set. he wrote earnestly, praying to be allowed to go samoa, thus expressing himself: `my desire is very great to fulfil christ's command when he said, "go ye into all the world." my heart is compassionating the heathen, who know not the salvation which god has provided. let me go. why this delay?' he was conveyed to samoa, and gained a position among its then savage people at monono, where he has proved one of the most consistent pioneers to the european missionaries, and one of the best native assistants both in the schools and in translating the bible and other works. a letter he wrote to his friends in raratonga a few years afterwards is worthy of note. in it he says: `when i left you, the good work had not taken much root, but now i hear it has spread over the land. all the people have received it. my friends, be diligent in the use of the means, in learning, in reading, in hearing, in prayer; search the word of god. but i will ask you, do you expect to be saved by your works? no; no man can thus be saved. salvation is obtained through jesus. there are two kinds of scaffolding, one of banana stalks and the other of iron-wood: those who trust in their own works are resting on the banana stalks, and will fall; but let our minds be fixed on jesus alone, and we shall be safe.' such are nearly the exact words he used. they prove the soundness of his knowledge and faith. the glorious work progressed wonderfully in raratonga. churches and schools were built at all the settlements, and several works printed by natives, under the superintendence of the missionaries, issued from the press. i was present on the arrival of the _camden_ from england with an edition of five thousand copies of the new testament in the language of the people, and several missionaries. crowds came from morning till night to purchase the book, and for many days the missionaries house was more like a bazaar than a private dwelling. "one day a messenger at full speed arrived from the old chief tinomana. seating himself cross-legged on the floor, he asked if a missionary had arrived for his part of the island. on one being pointed out to him as destined to labour in his settlement, he sprang up with an expression of joy, and hastened back at full speed with the intelligence to his chief. this was at avarua, where a chapel had been erected worthy of description. it was built in a frame, a hundred and forty feet long and forty-five feet wide, filled up with wattle and lime plaster, white as snow. it was well floored, surrounded by a gallery, and had a pulpit and desk at one end. on the day i was there it was filled with sixteen hundred natives, mostly clothed in home-made cloth, the greater number really thirsting for religious knowledge. next to the chapel stood the school-house filled in the morning with seven hundred children, each class of ten or twelve having its teacher. near it was the missionaries' cottage, neat, clean, and commodious; and not far off that of the chief, which was large, well-built, and convenient. it was thoroughly furnished with chairs, sofas, tables, and beds, and the floors covered with mats; while on the tables were several books, which he could read with fluency. ten years before this he and his people were naked savage cannibals. missionary meetings were held in the island to assist in sending the gospel to other lands. thus spoke an aged native at one of them to the young people: `exalt your voices high in praise of god. he has saved you from the pit of heathenism. we your fathers know the character of that pit; some of us were born there. the place on which we are now met was once a place of murder; spears and the sling and stone were our companions; we ate human flesh, we drank human blood. let us do what we can to send the word of god to those who _are_ as once we _were_.' that year three thousand pounds of arrowroot were subscribed for missionary purposes. "more effectually to carry out this object, it was resolved to establish a missionary college. a piece of ground was purchased, a number of neat stone cottages for the students and a house for resident missionaries, and lecture-halls, one of which was for female classes, were erected. the latter were under the charge of the missionary's wife. here one hundred men and women have been instructed, a considerable proportion of whom were married couples. some have been employed on the home stations, and others have gone forth to the western islands to prepare the way for european teachers. a boarding-school was also established, where some forty boys have received instruction. at the college the students go through a course of theology, church history, biblical exposition, biography, geography, grammar, and composition of essays and sermons. for three hours in the morning they are employed in the workshop, and in the afternoon in study, in class, or examination. "in the hervey group ten or more stations are well worked by these native teachers; in samoa four of them have stations; they have introduced the gospel to the maniiki group; and in western polynesia they have successfully preached the truth in the language of the inhabitants, and braved, and several have suffered, martyrdom for the gospel's sake. what should you suppose is the total expense of instructing, clothing, feeding, and lodging these most valuable missionaries? only five pounds a year; while the entire outlay of their providing for twenty students does not amount to the sum of three pounds a week, or less than a hundred and fifty pounds per annum. comparatively very few of those educated at the college have fallen away or proved unworthy of the confidence placed in them. of course there, as elsewhere, the faith of the missionaries has been tried. storms, and floods, and disease have visited the island; evil-disposed persons have come from other lands and endeavoured to introduce drunkenness, and to turn the unstable to their own bad courses. still i may safely say, that there are not twenty persons in the island, and very few in the whole group, who do not attend christian worship. "a large edition of the whole bible has been purchased by them; and i may also venture to assert that, in consistency of conduct, in civil and social propriety, in commercial industry and honesty, and in zeal and liberality, they are not behind any other community in the world. the gospel has been introduced and completely established in the penrhyn islands, or maniiki group, as they are more properly called, entirely by native teachers from raratonga. but i wish to describe to you the progress made by the gospel in samoa. before i do so, however, i will give you a sketch of the way in which some of the missionaries i have met, whose duties require them to be stationary, spend their time. "the missionary in some instances attends the early morning adult service, those present having then to go forth to their daily duties in the field or on the water. in other instances he devotes the hour from six to seven o'clock in dispensing medicine to the sick; from eight to nine he is either at the children's general school in the village, or attending to private advanced classes at home, or discussing public matters with neighbouring chiefs. from nine to eleven he lectures in the class-room; thence till noon he is in the workshop, where the students or the boys at the boarding-school are learning the use of carpenters' tools. until dinner time, at one, he is in the printing-office, where the natives have been composing, printing, and binding for several hours. during the next hour the students dine and read. from two to three the missionary holds private conversation with members of the church, candidates for church fellowship, or inquirers. four days in the week bible-classes are held, and at most stations public services take place three days in the week, from five to six. the missionary and his wife generally walk out from six to seven, visiting any who are sick or unable to come to them. for an hour afterwards he is in his study reading, translating, writing sermons, or looking over proof-sheets. the next half hour is occupied in family prayer, and the last in pleasant and instructive conversation with his family and the natives in his household; and thus closes his day of labour. the missionary's wife is as busy with the women and girls as is her husband with the men and boys, and her influence and example are calculated to produce a lasting effect on the rising generation. with this succession of occupations the missionaries have found time to write and to superintend the printing of numerous works in the language of raratonga,--works which are eagerly sought for and read by all classes of the community,--the elder of whom were once naked cannibal savages. when you write home, mention this with your own experience, and ask whether they do not consider missionaries worthy of support, and the results they have produced an encouragement to perseverance. "one remark more. you have often heard of the fearful decrease in the population of these islands. raratonga has been no exception to the general rule, and yet its circumstances are very different from most others. its climate is perfectly healthy; no foreigners reside on it; and, as it possesses no harbour, the crews of ships can never land on its shores, as they merely call off for supplies and proceed immediately on their voyage. before the introduction of christianity, when the islanders had not the slightest intercourse with europeans,--were, indeed, entirely unknown,--the deaths must have been as six or eight to one in excess of the births. as christianity spread, the deaths were as four to one, then as two to one, then but slightly in excess; and now i rejoice to say that the births slightly exceed the deaths. it is easy to account for their decrease while they were heathens,--their wars, and famine consequent on it,--disease, produced by immorality, and infanticide destroyed many, and prevented increase. christianity at once mitigated these evils, but the effects of many of them still existed, and it has taken years before the population could gain that health and strength which is the reward in this world of virtuous and industrious lives. "i find it stated that a hundred ships touch at the islands of the group annually, and receive produce of native labour for manufactured wares, amounting to not less than three thousand pounds. we have here a notable example of the way in which civilisation, industry, and commerce result from the establishment of christianity. the commanders of many of those ships must remember the time when they dared not set foot on these shores, from which they now are sure to obtain the supplies on which the health of their crews and the success of their voyage so greatly depends, and will, i trust, be ready to bear witness that thousands on thousands of the once savages of polynesia have become christian in name and character, and truly and completely civilised." chapter fifteen. passing on the blessing. "when describing missionary enterprise, we cannot dwell too much on the value of native agency, and should therefore endeavour to show the importance of establishing training colleges for native youths," continued mr bent, who, once having entered on the subject to which he had devoted his life, showed no desire to drop it. "humanly speaking, not one-third part of the work which has been done could without native help have been accomplished. mangaia is a notable example. that island is about twenty miles in circumference, and contains about three thousand inhabitants. when williams visited them in with a few native married missionaries, who went on shore for the purpose of remaining, the latter were so barbarously treated by the savage people that they were compelled to return on board the mission ship, thankful to escape without loss of life. two years afterwards, however, he returned with two zealous tahitians, davida and tiere, who swimming on shore through the surf, as did papehia at raratonga, with their books and clothes in a cloth on their heads, landed among the fierce natives. god had so ordered it that their reception was very different from what they had expected. an epidemic had attacked the island, carrying off chiefs and people, the old and young alike: and believing that it was a punishment sent by the white man's god in consequence of the way they had treated the former missionaries, the inhabitants hoped to avert the evil by behaving in a more friendly manner to the new comers. the way was thus providentially prepared for davida, who laboured on alone for fifteen years,--for tiere was soon afterwards removed by death,--till assistance was sent him from raratonga, itself lying in darkness when he commenced his ministrations. he received, however, occasional visits from the missionaries at tahiti. twenty years passed by before the reverend william gill arrived to spend some weeks among them. he found, with but few exceptions, that the whole population had renounced idolatry. several large churches and schoolrooms had been built. in one school-room from eight hundred to nine hundred children and young persons were present, who, after singing and prayer, were led in classes to attend public worship. the church was very large, and really handsome. the numberless rafters of its roof, coloured with native paint, were supported by twelve or fourteen pillars of the finest wood, carved in cathedral style. it was crowded,--those unable to get in looking through the windows,--not less than two thousand being present. still many at that time were very ignorant with regard to scriptural knowledge, though many even of the heathens could read. "a few years have passed by, the heathens have one by one turned to the truth, and sound scriptural knowledge is possessed by the population generally. a european missionary lives among them. they have built a handsome stone church with a gallery, capable of seating two thousand persons. there exist two other large stone chapels and three stone school-houses, each about seventy feet long and thirty-five feet wide. but what is far more important, there are one thousand six hundred children and adults under daily instruction, besides five hundred members in consistent church communion, leaving but one-third of the population who, though educated and nominal christians, must be looked on as yet not earnest in spiritual matters. of the former, some seven or more are at the raratonga training college, and several have gone forth as evangelists to the heathen many thousand miles away; while there are more than one hundred native teachers in the schools, gratuitously employing themselves in instructing the rising generation. the excess of births over the deaths is very considerable, so that the population, which at one time was diminishing, is rapidly on the increase. davida is dead. he departed just twenty-five years after he commenced his missionary labours. `is it right,' he asked, in a humble tone, `for me to say, in the language of saint paul, "i have fought the good fight, i have finished my course"? these people were wild beasts when i came among them; but the sword of the spirit subdued them. it was not i, it was god who did it.' davida and papehia, and many other dark-skinned sons of these fair isles of the pacific, themselves born in darkest heathenism, have gained their crowns of glory in the heavens, never to fade away, which the highly educated inhabitants of civilised europe may have cause to envy. "people in england are, i hear, astonished at the rapid progress made by christianity in these islands, and assert that either the accounts are exaggerated, and that the great mass of the people remain heathens as before, or that if they have become nominal christians, it is because they have been compelled by their chiefs to embrace the new faith. to this last objection i reply, first: you well know how slight is the influence exercised by the chiefs over the people, and in no island with which i am acquainted would a chief be able to compel his followers to abandon idolatry and embrace christianity. in the greater number of instances by far, a considerable proportion of the people have become christians before the chief has given up his idols. pomare was still an idolater when many of his subjects had been converted. there were numerous christians in samoa before malietoa became one; and services had been, held in tongatabu before any of the chief men turned to the faith; and already numerous churches had been established in fiji before thakombau, the most despotic and fierce of the rulers of the isles of the pacific, bowed his knee in worship to the true god. people who know how utterly savage and barbarous the natives had become will easily understand that numbers among them were pining for a purer faith, for some system which would relieve them from the intolerable burdens, from the utter misery under which they groaned. when rihoriho overthrew his idols and burned his temples he knew nothing of christianity; but he had discovered that his idols were no gods, and that the religion of his fathers was utterly abominable and foolish. in many islands, when a chief lotued before his subjects, he did so at the risk of being deposed by them; and in every direction there are instances of rebellions being raised by the heathens against the chiefs who had professed christianity. for many years the fact, that whole communities of once cannibal savages had become civilised christians was denied; and now that the fact can no longer be denied, certain so-called philosophers in europe are at pains to invent explanations to suit their own theories. the natives might answer them as the blind man restored to sight by jesus did the pharisees of old: `why, herein is a marvellous thing, that ye know not from whence he is, and yet he hath opened mine eyes.' the explanation which should best satisfy christians is, that god has worked with us. in his infinite compassion and love he has presented instruments exactly fitted for the work to be accomplished; and though he has thought fit in many instances to exercise the faith and patience of his servants, he has at length made the way clear before them. "if i desired a particular proof that man has fallen from a high estate, and that he came forth pure and bright, and with a mind capable of rapidly acquiring knowledge, from the hands of his maker, i should point to these savages, among whom, debased as they are, so many have a yearning after a better existence, a consciousness of sin, a desire to propitiate an offended deity, a weariness of their degraded condition, of the state of anarchy, of the bloodshed and immorality amid which they live. if these and other facts were known in england, though people might still wonder at the great change which has taken place in these islands, they would cease to disbelieve the statements which have been made by missionaries and others on the subject. "but i must go on with my account. i was going to tell you how christianity was introduced into samoa,--and here the guiding hand of god can especially be traced. "when john williams sailed from tahiti on his first long voyage in the _messenger of peace_, after visiting the hervey group, and many other islands, he touched at the tonga, or friendly islands, many of the inhabitants of which had already become christian. the history of the group i will give you presently. at tonga, a chief of the navigator islands, called fanea, was met with, who had been eleven years away from home. his wife had become a christian, and he himself was favourable to the new religion. he offered to accompany mr williams, and to introduce him to his brother chiefs. his account of himself being found correct, his offer was accepted, and he and his wife embarked. the voyage was prosperous, and sapapalii, or savaii, an island two hundred and fifty miles in circumference, was reached. fanea now showed how especially fitted he was to assist the missionaries in their task. calling them aside to a private part of the vessel, he requested them to desire the teachers not to commence their labours among their countrymen by condemning their canoe races, their dances, and other amusements, to which they were much attached, lest in the very onset they should conceive a dislike to the religion which imposed such restraints. `tell them,' said he, `to be diligent in teaching the people, to make them wise, and they themselves will put away that which is evil. let the "word" prevail, and get a firm hold upon them, and then we may with safety adopt measures which at first would prove injurious.' fanea was related to malietoa, one of the principal chiefs of the island, and was therefore, by his influence with his relatives, able to render great assistance to the work. he expressed, however, his fears that a powerful and perhaps an insuperable opposition would be offered by a still greater chief, who was besides a sort of pope or high priest, the head of such religious institution as they possessed. his name was tamafaigna. fanea asked after him in a trembling voice. `he is dead,-- killed ten days,--clubbed to death, as he deserved,' shouted the people, in evident delight, showing that they dreaded more than respected him. `the devil is dead,--the devil is dead,' cried fanea. `there will now be no opposition to the lotu.' this was found to be the case. had the event occurred a few days before, there would have been time to elect a successor. this man was supposed to have within him the spirit of one of the principal war-gods. the tithes of the two large islands had been given him, and in pride and profligacy he had become a pest and a proverb. he had, however, his supporters, who took up arms to avenge him, and among them were his relatives malietoa and his brother tamalelangi, who, although they rejoiced at his death, were compelled, according to the custom of the country, to endeavour to punish those who had killed him. tamalelangi from the first showed himself a warm friend of the missionaries, and, while his brother was engaged in fighting, assisted them to land with their effects and stores, and to establish themselves on shore. malietoa afterwards proved their warm friend, and four teachers were left with him, and four with tamalelangi. their people showed the teachers the greatest kindness, and, as a mark of it, each man who could get hold of a child carried it off to his own cottage, killed a pig for its food, and stuffed it to repletion before he carried it back to its anxious parents. fanea, too, was unwearied in explaining the advantages of christianity and the wonderful knowledge possessed by the missionaries, which enabled them to communicate their thoughts merely by making marks on a bit of paper. it is possible that he was somewhat influenced by ambitious motives, and the credit the introduction of christianity would bring to him. his wife, however, appears to have been a sincere believer, and by her example and exhortations greatly to have forwarded the cause of truth. malietoa, who inherited all tamafaigna's political influence, exerted it to the end of his life in favour of the christians. the truth was not, as it might be expected, to be established without opposition; and on one occasion a large heathen party approached the dwellings of the teachers, resolved on their destruction. their friends turned out completely armed in native fashion, with clubs, and bows, and slings, and spears, for their defence, not unfrequently expressing in their tone and gesture the untamed ferocity of their nature by their appearance and loud shouts, even when kneeling in the attitude of devotion. thus the night was spent in expectation every moment of an attack; but when the morning came it was discovered that their foes had disappeared. the native teachers, who could preach as well as instruct in school, made rapid progress. the people began to eat the fish and other creatures which they had formerly worshipped as gods, and dreaded to injure or even to touch. some daringly devoured them, others cautiously put the dreaded morsels in their mouths, while the awestruck spectators waited as did the people of melita when saint paul was bitten by a snake, expecting to see them swell or fall down dead. from this the natives concluded that jehovah was indeed the true god, and were about to cast their war-god popo, a block covered with a piece of matting, into the sea, and had tied a stone round it to sink it, when the teachers rescued the image, that they might present him as a trophy of the triumphs of the gospel. "the samoans, though not such gross idolaters, and certainly not so inhuman in their practices, as most of the other islanders in the pacific, were much degraded both in mind and morals. they are perhaps the finest people in a physical point of view of any, yet they had more pharisaical pride and less consciousness of sin; and this, it is possible, prevented them from adopting some of those cruel practices prevalent among their neighbours. "the teachers left by williams laboured perseveringly. still they could not persuade malietoa to abandon the war. he went on one occasion to upolu with all his fighting men, and three of the teachers resolved to follow him, hoping thus to influence him the more. he had allowed his son to join them. on their way they preached the word at several villages through which they passed, and the people heard them gladly. malietoa was unmoved, and they had to return; but their journey had not been so bootless as they supposed. scarcely had they reached home, than a messenger arrived from the chief of a village they had visited at apolulu, begging them to return in haste, as he and his people were waiting to hear from their lips the truths of the gospel. three of them set out for the settlement, where they were warmly welcomed by the chief and a thousand followers. after the usual salutations, the chief turned to the teachers and said, `have you brought a fish spear?' surprised at this strange inquiry, they replied, `no! why do you ask for that?' `i want it,' he answered, `to spear an eel. this is my _etu_--i will kill, cook, and eat it. i have resolved to become _lotu_.' he then added that he would afterwards spear and eat a fowl, as the spirit of his god was supposed to reside in that also. and these bold designs were no sooner formed than executed, though none of his followers supported him, nor was it till they saw that no evil results were the consequence, that they ventured to imitate his example. numbers then declared that they wished to become christians, and to be instructed in that faith. returning from this expedition, they saw the stronghold of the heathen party in flames. malietoa treated the conquered party with great leniency, and on one of their battle-fields erected a church to the service of the true god, while popo, the god of war, was banished for ever. many other chapels were built in different directions, and the new faith made great progress, though at that time, probably, many of the converts were very far from enlightened christians. while these events were taking place in the larger islands, a large canoe with some christians on board was driven on tau, the most eastern island of the group, having embarked at ravavai, one of the austral group, two thousand miles distant, intending to proceed to some neighbouring island. their lives and their health had been providentially preserved, and they received a friendly greeting from the natives, to whom they imparted a knowledge of the faith they professed. several joined them, and the little congregation thus formed without a teacher, was looking forward to the arrival of a missionary ship, which they had heard would bring one, when williams himself touched at their settlement. soon after this three english missionaries visited the group, and one remained till the arrival of a considerable number, who came out direct from england for especial service in samoa. the first care of this most efficient body of men was to master the language, and when this was done they lost no time in commencing a translation of the bible. a printing-press was set up in , and in july of that year printing was commenced in samoa. the natives took a deep interest in it, and called it the fountain whence the word of god flowed to all samoa. the native youths quickly learned to work it, and surrounded by numbers of their countrymen, standing as if riveted to the spot, and gazing with intense interest, now speechless with wonder, now shouting with delight, they endeavoured to show with what dexterity they could throw off the sheets. numerous works were printed by them--sermons, catechisms, hymn-books, works on geography, astronomy, arithmetic, bunyan's pilgrim's progress, and a native magazine. upwards of , pounds was paid by the purchasers of the scriptures and these books. "in , the `samoan mission seminary' was commenced. it was on a far larger scale than that i have described at raratonga, though conducted on a very similar plan. it was for a group, it must be remembered, of considerable extent, containing not less than , inhabitants. special attention is paid in the institution to the instruction of the wives of the students, and so highly are the labours of these female teachers prized in the islands, that inferior men are sometimes chosen on account of the high qualifications of their wives. i believe that nearly a hundred and fifty teachers have gone forth from the institution, some to labour in samoa, and others in the loyalty islands, new hebrides and savage island--many with their devoted wives having died from the effects of climate or fallen by the murderous hands of the savages to whom they carried the gospel. a high school is attached to the institution, as well as one for the children of the students. there are, i find, fifty boarding-schools in the group, having scholars; children's day-schools with , scholars, and adult sabbath and day-schools with , scholars. when first williams landed at samoa, the natives wore no clothing except the most scanty of leaves or native cloth. now i find it stated, that apart from all other articles of foreign manufacture, the demand for cotton goods alone amounts to , pounds per annum, and is every year increasing. [see note .] i mention these facts because they are beyond dispute, and i beg that you will repeat them when you write home, as they may convince some who deny that the polynesian savage can comprehend the spirit of the gospel, that at all events he has made considerable advances in civilisation, and that his connection is worth cultivating. you and i, and all who take the trouble of observing, know that he is as capable as the most highly educated european of understanding the whole scope of the gospel in all its beauty and holiness, and accepting it in all its fulness. we must never forget the saying of our blessed lord, who knew what was in man, `that many are called but few chosen,' and that this is true in samoa as elsewhere. of the many thousands who have become nominal christians, we have every reason to hope that some--i might dare to say many--have accepted christ to their eternal salvation. and samoa forms but one group out of the many thousand isles of this ocean. "let us take a glance at tonga, at which williams called, as i told you, on that first voyage, so peculiarly blessed to samoa. you have heard how a body of missionaries so far back as were landed at tongatabu, from the ship _duffy_ by captain wilson. they were all ultimately compelled to leave the island, very much in consequence of the conduct of some white runaway seamen or convicts, who set the natives against them. several were ultimately murdered, the rest escaped to new south wales with the exception of one, who, sad to say, apostatised, and lived as a savage among the savages for some years. more than twenty years passed by, and the savage character of the wrongly named friendly islanders prevented any further attempt being made to offer them the gospel of peace; when god put it into the heart of the reverend w laury, a wesleyan minister residing in new south wales, who had been interested in the people by a widow of one of the early missionaries, to attempt their conversion. he sailed from sydney in june, , on board the _saint michael_, a merchant vessel, with his family, accompanied by a carpenter and blacksmith, both pious young men. he reached tonga in safety, and remained for upwards of a year, gaining the language of the people, and protected by the chiefs, but without making any converts. on his return to sydney he left the two young mechanics, and they were afterwards joined by the reverend john thomas, a young ardent missionary from england. they had indeed need of faith and patience. the chiefs who at first protected them proved themselves fickle and treacherous, robbing them of all they possessed, and it was evident that they valued their presence among them on account of the property they brought, not for the sake of the religious instruction they would afford. just before mr thomas's arrival at hihifo, on the west side of tonga, two native teachers from tahiti, on their way to fiji, had landed at nukualofa on the north coast. the preaching of these devoted men had awakened such a spirit of inquiry, that when mr thomas preached at hihifo, numbers came over a distance of twelve miles to hear him. tubou, the chief of nukualofa, appeared convinced of the truths of christianity, had a chapel built, and attended service; but tempted by his brother chiefs, who promised to make him king of the whole group if he would adhere to the old faith, he declined for the present to make a profession of christianity. the work thus commenced at nukualofa by the london society's tahitian teachers, was carried on in a spirit of brotherly love by the reverend n turner and william cross and their devoted wives, sent out by the wesleyan missionary society in . they began schools there, which were well attended, while mr thomas opened one at hihifo, at which, in spite of the opposition of the chief ata, some twenty boys attended. in two years mr thomas could preach fluently in the language of the people, and congregations for public worship were formed and well attended. mr thomas had gone over to nukualofa to preach, when the king tubou, who had been absent for six months, attended, with two hundred of his subjects, the chapel which he himself had built, and where he now heard in his own tongue from the lips of an english minister the gospel clearly explained. other chiefs from the two groups of islands to the north, vavau and haabai, in the course of the year sent to petition for teachers, or rather, one sent, being indifferent about the matter; the latter, tui-haabai, as he was called, came to tonga in person. though he earnestly pressed the point, there was no one to send; and so on his return home, finding an english sailor who could read and write, though sadly ignorant of the truths of religion, he made him his teacher. his perseverance and earnestness were to be rewarded. a sick lad, a step-son of ata's, was the first convert at hihifo, but on his death, the chief still more hardening his heart, it was agreed by the missionaries that mr thomas should remove from that station to haabai. they however first sent one peter, a native convert, to prepare the way, a plan which has been almost universally successful. the missionaries now spent some time together at nukualofa, where the field appeared so promising. so indeed it proved; often so crowded was the chapel, that the missionaries went out amid the encampments of their visitors on the sea-side, that they might preach to them the words of eternal life under the free vault of heaven. it was at this time that king tubou was baptised with his family and nearly thirty men and sixty women of his tribe. it was indeed a day to make the hearts of the long persevering and faithful missionaries rejoice." to many readers of missionary reports these statements may not be new, but it was pleasant to have such testimony amidst the scenes themselves. ------------------------------------------------------------------------ note . see turner's "nineteen years in polynesia." "of an evening," says lieutenant walpole, rn, writing of samoa, "when, taking advantage of intervals of fine weather, we went for a ramble in the delightful woods, the quiet of the grove was often disturbed by a ruthless savage, who would rush out upon you, not armed with club or spear, but with slate and pencil, and thrusting them into your hands, make signs for you to finish his difficult exercise or sum." dr coulter, surgeon of hms _stratford_, has given this testimony: "the power of religion has completely altered the naturally uncontrolled character of the natives, and effectually subdued barbarism. the former history of these islanders is well known to all readers. they were guilty of every bad and profane act. infanticide and human sacrifices, in all their horrid shapes, were common occurrences. utter abandonment and licentiousness prevailed over these islands (the friendly islands). what are they now? the query may be answered in a few words: they are far more decided christians than the chief part of their civilised visitors." chapter sixteen. how the light came to fiji. "tui-haabai tuafaahan, or george, the name he assumed when he became a christian, the chief or king of the haabai islands, was no ordinary man. he possessed great influence over his people; and in this instance there can be no doubt that, in consequence of his embracing christianity, great numbers of his subjects immediately professed it. so much was this the case, that out of eighteen inhabited islands of which the group consists, the people of all but two called themselves christians when mr thomas arrived in . of course they were very ignorant of religious truths; but at the same time they were aware of their ignorance, and desired to be taught,--and what more could a missionary pray for? they consequently made great progress, though the work nearly wore out the missionary. a second, however, the reverend peter turner, joined mr thomas the next year. their wish at once was to extend the sphere of their labours. "in april, , king george, now himself well able to expound the gospel, with twenty-four sail of canoes, visited finau, chief of vavau, who had once sent for instruction to the missionaries at tonga. with the king went the faithful missionary peter, bearing a letter from messrs. thomas and turner. king george, too, endeavoured to convince finau of the truth, and at length he promised to join in worshipping the lord on the next sabbath. this he did accompanied by several chiefs and others; and when monday came he directed that seven of his principal idols should be placed in a row. he then addressed them: `listen to my words, that you may be without excuse. i have brought you here to prove you.' commencing with the first, he said, `if you are a god, run away, or you shall be burned in the fire which is ready for you.' the idol made no attempt to escape. in the same manner he addressed the next, and the next, till he came to the last. as none of them ran, he directed that their temples should be set on fire. the order was at once obeyed, and some eighteen or more with their idols were consumed. george and all his people capable of explaining the truths of christianity, were employed in preaching and speaking night and day during their stay, so eager were the people to be instructed. all ordinary occupation was suspended. the reply to any expostulation was, `we can labour when you are gone: let us while you stay learn how to worship god.' afterwards two native teachers were sent to vavau, till a missionary could be spared for them. "finau, who had himself once strongly opposed the christians, now met with opposition from one of his own chiefs, who had been absent at fiji. this chief threw himself into a strong fort; but it was surprised by the christians, and the insurgents being brought out, it was burnt to the ground, without one person being killed. mr cross was soon afterwards appointed to vavau, and on his voyage there from tonga his canoe was wrecked, and his wife was drowned besides twenty other persons. "it was about this time that the reverend william yate, of the church missionary society, visited tonga from new zealand. he had heard much of the great change among the people, and was disposed to regard part at least as too strange and too good to be true. he therefore went much among the people, observing their domestic habits, and their attention to their religious duties, and he assured the missionaries that what he saw exceeded all that he had heard. "christianity was making progress in all the three groups, though in tonga a powerful body of heathens, under ata of hihifo, still remained, when finau, king of vavau, died, leaving his government to king george of haabai, who thus became sovereign of both groups. he and his wife gave full evidence soon after this that they were christians not only in name, but in spirit and in truth. they were made class-leaders," and the king was appointed a local preacher. he did not presume on his high civil dignity, but always conducted himself in the house of god with becoming humility. one who heard him preach his first sermon told me that the great court-house, more than seventy feet long, could not contain the people who thronged to hear their king. every chief on the island and all the local preachers were present. the king led the singing. he preached with great plainness and simplicity, and in strict accordance with the teaching of god's word; dwelling on the humility and love of the saviour, the cleansing efficacy of his atoning blood, and the obligations under which we are laid to serve and glorify him. but a few years before part of this very congregation might have been seen in this same house preparing guns, spears, and clubs, in order to slay their fellow-men, and waiting to be led forth to battle by the great warrior who was now the royal preacher. he proved his christianity in another way. hearing that the english had abolished slavery and that it is abhorrent to the character of the gospel, he that very day called all his slaves together and forthwith gave them their liberty. he next employed himself in building a church upwards of a hundred feet long and fifty wide, the largest building that had ever been erected in tonga. he also exhibited his wisdom by framing a code of laws, by which all chiefs as well as people were to be equally bound. they were most judicious, and admirably fitted for the wants of the people. not one professed heathen now remained in the two groups governed by king george, and the blessings he had received he was anxious to send to others. a missionary and several native teachers therefore went forth and established churches in samoa, as well as in some small islands lying between the two groups. the missionaries were afterwards removed, it having been agreed between the wesleyan and london missionary societies that samoa should be left entirely under the charge of the london missionary society,--a wise resolve, the object of which does not appear to have been very clearly comprehended by the samoan christians, accustomed to the wesleyan form, or by king george, who made a voyage to samoa to consult about the matter. the reason of the arrangement was, that the wesleyan society might be able to devote all their means and energies to the promulgation of the gospel in the fiji islands, a work which they forthwith commenced and have carried on with unsurpassed vigour and success. i will describe it to you presently. "josiah tubou, the king of tonga proper, or tongatabu though a consistent christian, was a man every way inferior to king george in energy and talent, and the heathen chiefs and other ill-disposed persons set his power at defiance. they even went so far as to take up arms, in the hope of deposing him. in this, however, they were disappointed; for king george, with a large body of warriors, came to his assistance, and they were compelled to take refuge in certain strongly-built forts in their native districts, where they continued to hold out against his power. the war thus commenced and carried on for some years, proved a sad hindrance to religion and the advancement of civilisation. two roman catholic priests were also landed from a french ship of war, and took up their residence with the heathens, whom they undoubtedly supported against their chief. "it was while endeavouring to negotiate with the rebels in one of these forts that captain croker of hms _favourite_, who had with him a party of his ship's company, was shot at and killed. another officer and several men fell on the occasion, while many were badly wounded. several forts were taken or yielded, and the defenders pardoned; but the rebels were still holding out in the strongest, that of bea, where the romish priests resided, when sir everard home, in the _calliope_, arrived at tonga. several times the fort had been summoned to surrender, and sir everard home had now the satisfaction of witnessing the way in which it was captured, and the leniency with which the rebels were treated, while he and king george himself were instrumental in saving the property of the romish priests from destruction. from that time king george has been employed in consolidating his power, and in advancing the material as well as spiritual interests of his subjects. "the success which attended the exertions of the missionaries at tonga encouraged them to commence the work at fiji, with which extensive group tonga has for years been intimately connected, although the inhabitants are of a totally different race and character. i must go back again from the time of which i have just been speaking to the year . utterly debased and savage as were the people of fiji at that period, the mission was commenced under peculiarly favourable circumstances. it was especially supported by king george of tonga, who was much respected by the inhabitants of lakemba, the spot which had been fixed on as the residence of the missionaries. many tongans also resided there, who could at once be addressed in their own language, which was also understood by the chief and many of the people of lakemba. as many fijians were living at tonga, the missionaries were able likewise to prepare and print some books in fijian. king george's introduction insured them a favourable reception from the chief of lakemba, who at once gave them ground for the missionary premises. house-building is short work in fiji, and a large body of natives, having prepared posts, spars, reeds, etcetera, assembled at the chosen site, and commenced operations. on the third day all the furniture, articles for barter, books, clothes, doors, windows, and various stores were landed, and carried to the two houses, of which the families took possession that evening. lakemba is thirty miles in circumference, and contains, besides the king's town, eight other towns and three tongan settlements. many of the people inhabiting them, on their visits to head-quarters saw the mission premises, and went home to tell of what had excited their own admiration. thus the number of visitors increased, and many becoming dissatisfied with their own gods, and tired with the exactions of the priests, came regularly on the sabbath to worship at the chapel. as they had to pass the king's town they were observed, and abused for presuming, though common people, to think for themselves in the matter of religion, and even daring to forsake their own gods for the new god of whom the strangers spoke. threats were used, and the christians would immediately have been persecuted, had not a chief from tonga, who had come over to protect the christians from the people of mbau, himself adopted the new faith, letting it be known that he would protect his co-religionists. they did not escape altogether: their houses were pillaged, and many had to fly for their lives. they however went to other islands, carrying, as did the christians of old, their religion with them, and were the means of spreading it to other parts of the group. many of the tongans heard the word gladly, though hitherto known for their evil doings, and returned home changed in heart and manners. the king of lakemba even pretended that he wished to become a christian, though his profession was not sincere, as he continued to persecute the converts. he at last said that he would lotu if some other powerful chiefs would do so; and suggested that the missionaries should go to mbau and see what change they could effect in the rulers of that notorious cannibal island. mr cross took the king at his word, and with his wife and family embarked for mbau. on his arrival there, he found that war had been raging, that two bodies were in the ovens, and that very little attention to his preaching could be expected. though thakombau, the king's son, promised him his protection and a spot of ground for a house, he considered it wiser to proceed to rewa, a town about twelve miles away on the main island, where the chief promised to protect him, and to allow as many of his people to lotu as desired it. at first mr cross preached in the open air; but a chief of some rank and his wife becoming christians, they opened their house for worship, and a hundred hearers would sometimes assemble there to listen. "off the island of great fiji is another small island, that of viwa. the chief, namosi, and his nephew, verani, had captured a french brig and destroyed the crew. the captain, it was proved, had allowed his vessel to be used in the native wars, and had even suffered the body of an enemy to be cooked and eaten on board. to punish namosi, two french men-of-war appeared off the coast, and the crews landing, burned down his town and destroyed his crops. this misfortune seems so to have affected him, that he begged a teacher might be sent to instruct him in the new religion; and to show his sincerity, he built a large chapel, where many of his people joined him in worshipping god. thus were two centres formed in fiji, where two men single-handed battled with almost incredible difficulties, cheered, however, by no inconsiderable success,--that is to say, mr cargill at lakemba, and mr cross at rewa. "in three missionaries arrived from england. one of them was the devoted john hunt, who at once volunteered to go to the assistance of mr cross, who was already breaking down with his labours at rewa. with them also came a printer, a printing-press, and book-binding materials. early in saint mark's gospel and a catechism in fijian were printed,--an important event in the history of a people who three years before had no written language, and who seemed sunk in the utter depths of darkness and moral degradation. fiji was indebted for mr hunt to the christian liberality of a lady--mrs brackenbury, of raithbury hall, lincolnshire, who offered to pay all the expenses of his outfit and passage, and pounds a year for three years, provided the committee would send another missionary, and thus raise the number to seven. "the mission establishment at rewa drew many visitors, especially the people from mbau, who came to make inquiries about the lotu. to this place the printing-press was moved, and it was made the head-quarters of the fijian mission. on an island off vanua levu, or the great land, was situated the town of somosomo, the chief of which, who had considerable power, begged that missionaries might be sent to him. "accordingly mr hunt and mr lyth, with their families, went there, and took up their quarters in a large house provided by the chief. he showed clearly, however, that he only required their goods; and not only were the families neglected, but the most horrible cannibal practices took place close to them, encouraged by the chief. his son was wrecked on an enemy's shore, when he and his followers were killed and eaten. in consequence a number of women were murdered, in spite of the entreaties of the missionaries that their lives might be spared, while captives were constantly dragged before their windows to be killed and baked. ultimately the station was abandoned, and the chief was murdered by one of his own sons, who was himself murdered by a brother; and such anarchy and confusion reigned, that somosomo was laid almost desolate. "after a time the remaining chiefs and people, brought low by distress, turned to the god of the strangers, and great numbers became christians,--showing that the seed had been sown and taken root, though when the missionaries left the island they were disposed to fear that no good had been effected. "the truth spread by a great variety of means. a chief named wai, of the far-off island of ono, tributary to lakemba, came to that island to pay his dues. he there met with takai, another fijian chief, who had visited sydney and tahiti, and had become a christian. with such knowledge as he could thus pick up he returned home. he there taught his people; and so great a thirst for further instruction sprang up among them, that a whaler calling at ono for provisions, they engaged a passage in her for two messengers who were to beg the missionaries at tonga to send them a teacher. a long time must have elapsed before one could have reached them; but the lord knew the desire of their hearts, and took his own means for giving them the spiritual food after which they hungered. "early in a canoe, on board which was josiah, a converted tongan, with other christians, sailed from lakemba for tonga, but was driven out of her course to turtle island, about fifty miles from ono. hearing when there that the people of ono were seeking after religious instruction, josiah hastened there to tell them all he could of the gospel. in a short time forty persons became worshippers of god, and a chapel was built to hold a hundred. in the meantime their two messengers reached tonga, where they were told that as missionaries were now stationed at lakemba they must apply there for the help they sought. a teacher was found, once a wild youth, who had been converted at lakemba. here he remained two years preparing for his work, till he had an opportunity of going to ono. on his arrival he found that one hundred and twenty adults had become christians. a strong heathen party was, however, formed against them, and they had more than once to fight for their lives. even the king of lakemba threatened to destroy them because they would not give up a young christian girl who had in her infancy been betrothed to him. a gale drove back the king's canoe, and some of those of his followers were lost; so that he was persuaded that the god of the christians frowned on his design. the island was visited several times by english missionaries, and at last one was appointed to reside there. "all the people have now become christians, and probably fifty agents have been raised up there to carry the gospel to other parts of fiji. christianity spread among the islands in the neighbourhood of lakemba subject to somosomo. this was in spite of the belief in a threat of the king, that he would kill and eat any of his subjects who should lotu. the king arrived, and hearing of the tale indignantly denied it. he ordered, however, that tribute should be paid to him on sunday. this the christians refused to do, but the following day they appeared with their offerings. this produced a favourable impression on the king, showing as it did, what was the genuine effect of christianity when carried out. no one was punished, though unhappily the king seemed to remain as complete a heathen as before till his death. "in lakemba the christians multiplied, and the whole population of one town, that of yaudrana, lotued in one day. they had been ill-treated, and two of their number had been killed by the king or his people. suddenly they came to the conclusion that their own gods could no longer protect them, and they resolved to pray to jehovah the god of the christians. they accordingly sent to mr calvert, the missionary. the chiefs of the town met him to speak on the matter, in the principal temple in the place, and after singing and prayer they bowed down to worship god. the following sabbath the whole population, by agreement, openly abandoned idolatry. the king sent to forbid them, but his message arrived after the ceremony had been performed, and they replied that they would pay him lawful tribute, but would not abandon their new faith. after this movement of the larger number of his subjects, the king himself became a christian. "i can with difficulty recollect the numerous events connected with missionary work as they occurred in the wide extending group of fiji. of the most important i have not yet spoken. it is necessary to remember the names of three important places: mbau, though a small island, contains the capital of the powerful chief thakombau, now called the king of all fiji. twelve miles off, on the mainland, is rewa; and on another small island two miles from mbau, is viwa, the residence of namosimalua, who had become nominally christian, or was at all events favourable to the christians. here mr cross took up his abode, when thakombau refused him admission to mbau. thakombau was the son of tanoa, the chief of mbau. mbau had obtained the influence it possessed over other parts of fiji in consequence of its having become the abode of charles savage, a runaway seaman, a horrible ruffian, a swede by birth, who managed to obtain a large supply of firearms and ammunition, and led her armies for many years against her neighbours of the larger islands, compelling them to become tributary to her. at length, being defeated in viti levu, by a party of natives against whom, in conjunction with the master of an english trading vessel, the _hunter_, of calcutta, he was carrying on a war for the sake of procuring a cargo of sandal-wood for the ship, he was, together with fourteen of the crew, put to death and eaten, his body being treated with every mark of detestation, and his bones converted into sail-needles, and distributed among the people as a remembrance of the victory. namosimalua was looked upon as the ulysses of those regions. he in conjunction with other chiefs, weary of the exactions of tanoa, rebelled against him, and compelled him to fly, also advising that his young son thakombau, whose talents he had discovered, should be put to death. this not having been done, he resolved to gain the friendship of tanoa without committing himself. he therefore offered to go in pursuit of the king, but secretly sent a messenger to warn him of his danger. when thakombau restored his father to his possessions, tanoa saved namosi's life, though the former never forgave him his intentions towards him. "among the greatest warriors and fiercest cannibals of fiji was a nephew of namosi's, called verani, who was a firm friend of thakombau's. at rewa a mission had been established, but its chief ratu nggara remained a heathen, and was a powerful rival of thakombau. some time after the establishment of the missions at viwa, namosi its chief became a christian; and as visitors from mbau and other places visited the mission-house, the knowledge of the new faith spread in every direction around. the fierce warrior verani even listened to what the missionary had to say, and hopes were entertained that he too might lotu; but his friend thakombau urged him to remain firm to the old faith, and to join him as before in his wars. at first, verani yielded to evil counsels; but, happily, again and again he visited the missionary, till he declared his conviction that christianity was true; and from that day he became as resolute and bold in promulgating the truth, as he had before been in supporting the customs of heathenism. for several years he held a consistent christian course of life, and his example had probably an influence on his friend thakombau. his good influence was, however, opposed by some of the abandoned white men, resident on neighbouring islands, who dreaded, should the king turn christian, that a stop would be put to their own evil doings. they even went so far, when they thought this possible, as to join the natives in carrying on war against him; and so successful were they that on every side he found his power decreasing. what force or persuasion could not effect, affliction accomplished. during the time of his greatest distress he received a letter from king george of tonga, urging him to delay no longer, but to turn to the god of the christians. this letter seems to have decided him. "on the th april, , at nine o'clock the death-drum was beaten--the signal for assembling in the great `strangers' house' for the worshipping of the true god. ten days before, its sound had called people together to a cannibal feast. three hundred persons were present in the ample lotu dress, before whom stood thakombau, the chief, with his children and wives. the missionary, who had so long watched for this event, was deeply moved, and could scarcely proceed with the service. it was indeed a day to be remembered in the annals of fiji. after worship, the people crowded round the missionaries, to ask for alphabets, and gathered in groups to learn forthwith to read. the king, after this, caused the sabbath to be observed. his deportment was serious, and his own attendance at preaching and prayer-meetings was regular. his little boy, about seven years old, had already learnt to read, and he now became the instructor of his parents, who were both so eager to acquire knowledge, that their young teacher would often fall asleep in the midst of his lesson. "among the most implacable enemies of thakombau was the king of rewa. elijah verani undertook a mission to that chief, in the hopes of bringing about peace, when he and most of his companions were traitorously murdered and eaten. not long after this the king of rewa himself died, and his people sued for peace. "thakombau, the once cannibal and homicide, was not allowed to remain quiet. he had enemies on every side; some of them he conquered in war, but often his life was in danger from his own former associates and relations. the effect, however, was good, as it made him turn more and more to god for pardon through jesus christ and to the consolations of religion. at length he triumphed, and his enemies were subdued under him. he had from the first prohibited cannibalism; murder was now declared to be against the law. the first two murderers guilty of the crime before the law was promulgated were pardoned, but the next, though a chief, was tried, and being found guilty of the murder of his wife, was publicly executed by his countrymen at mbau, the missionary wisely absenting himself at the time. in the same year three chiefs of rank were publicly married, each to one wife, a step afterwards taken by the king himself. churches were now built in every direction, and thousands of the people of fiji abandoned their horrible customs, put away their idols, and turned to the true god." chapter seventeen. the courage of kapiolani. "although the change in fiji is very great, much remains to be done. it is not more than we may justly say, that cannibalism and the more abominable crimes once common have ceased to exist wherever english missionaries reside, and in most places where native teachers have gained a footing. the kingdom of peace is making daily progress. the gospel has firmly established itself in the heart of fiji. thakombau remains firm and consistent in his profession of christianity, and though certain chiefs rebelled against him, he has dealt as leniently with them as the maintenance of authority and order will allow, and has striven as far as possible to avoid bloodshed. "it is satisfactory to see the way captain erskine, of hms _havannah_, speaks of those who have contributed to bring about this state of things. i cannot refrain from touching on a circumstance which he mentions, redounding as it does so greatly to the honour of the wives of two of the missionaries, mrs lyth and mrs calvert. it occurred while old tanoa was still alive, and of course long before thakombau became a christian. "a powerful tribe had sent a deputation to mbau with tribute, and it was necessary to provide them with a banquet, a portion of which must, according to custom, be human flesh. the chief whose business it was to provide for the occasion, not having any enemies, set forth by night and captured a number of women belonging to a village along the coast, who had come down to pick shell-fish for food. immediately namosimalua, the christian chief, heard of it, he hastened to the missionary station; but the missionaries' wives alone were at home. these heroic women, however, resolved to go themselves, and to endeavour at all risks to save the lives of the captives. accompanied by the faithful christian chief they embarked in a canoe for mbau. each carried a whale's tooth decorated with ribbons, a necessary offering on preferring a petition to a chief. as they landed near old tanoa's house, the shrieks of two women then being slaughtered for the day's entertainment chilled their blood, but did not daunt their resolution. ten had been killed; one had died of her wounds; the life of one girl had been begged by thakombau's principal wife, to whom she was delivered as a slave, and three only remained. regardless of the sanctity of the place, it being tabooed to women, they forced themselves into old tanoa's chamber, who demanded, with astonishment at their temerity, what those women did there? the christian chief, presenting the two whales' teeth, answered that they came to solicit the lives of the remaining prisoners. "tanoa, still full of wonder, took up one of these teeth, and turning to an attendant, desired him to carry it immediately to navindi--the chief who had captured the prisoners--and ask, `if it were good?' "a few minutes were passed in anxious suspense. the messenger returned. navindi's answer was, `it is good.' the women's cause was gained, and old tanoa thus pronounced his judgment: `those who are dead, are dead; those who are alive shall live.' the heroic ladies retired with their three rescued fellow-creatures, and had the satisfaction besides of discovering that their daring efforts had produced a more than hoped-for effect. a year or two ago, no voice but that of derision would have been raised towards them, but now returning to their canoe, they were followed by numbers of their own sex blessing them for their exertions, and urging them to persevere. "captain erskine, who heard this account from the ladies themselves, and gives it much as i have done, adds, `if anything could have increased our admiration of their heroism, it was the unaffected manner in which when pressed by us to relate the circumstances of their awful visit, they spoke of it as the simple performance of an ordinary duty.' he continues: `i could not fail to admire the tolerant tone of the missionaries when speaking of these enormities. accustomed for years to witness scenes such as few believe are to be seen on the face of the earth, and to combat the wildest errors step by step, with slow but almost certain success, these good men know well that a constant expression of indignation, such as must naturally arise in the mind of a stranger, would not produce the desired effect on the unhappy beings to whose loftiest interests they have with much self-sacrifice devoted themselves. navindi, the cannibal chief of the fishermen, whose natural disposition they describe as kindly and confiding, was received quite on the footing of a friend, and thakombau was also spoken of as a man of great energy and good intentions, by whose instrumentality much good might yet be effected among his numerous subjects or dependants. the wisdom of their conduct has been proved. these men have been won over to the truth. when our blessed lord walked on earth he reproved in strongest language the scribes and pharisees who knew the law, but not the publicans and sinners who knew it not. captain erskine describes the missionaries as engaged in the translation of the scriptures and other religious works to be completed before a given time--a labour to be carried on in the midst of constant interruptions, to which the members of this mission and their families are liable at all hours of the day. besides being referred to in cases of quarrels and disputes, the care of the sick and the distribution of medicines are duties which they have undertaken, and carry out with unremitting attention.' "i wish that people in england knew of the efforts made by the priests of rome to impede the progress of the pure gospel. their mode of proceeding is very clearly described in a few words by captain erskine. he says, `there are two french roman catholic missionaries stationed at lakemba, but, as at tongatabu, it is to be feared that their presence will tend rather to retard than advance the improvement of the natives. the practice of this (roman catholic) mission, in availing themselves of the pioneer-ship of men of a different sect, for the purpose of undermining their exertions, cannot be too severely reprobated. being very irregularly furnished with supplies from their own country, these two are sometimes dependent for the common necessaries of life on the wesleyans, for whom they entertain the strongest dislike, and who cannot be expected to treat them otherwise than as mischievous intruders; nor are their privations in any way compensated by success in their objects.' he describes a visit to the fortress of bea, in tonga, where two roman catholic priests reside, and which is inhabited partly by roman catholics and partly by heathens. `the appearance of the people in this fortress was not such as to impress one favourably, compared with the others of their countrymen we had seen. they were more scantily clothed, and apparently less cleanly in their persons and houses, a natural consequence of living in a more confined space; and the absence of that cordiality which we everywhere met with from persons connected with the protestant missions was very apparent. i heard also among the younger officers of pockets picked and handkerchiefs stolen, showing a more lawless state of life, and a retention of their old habits, which were so obnoxious to their early european visitors.' the priests complained to captain erskine of the way the missionaries spoke of them, on which he says, `it is perhaps sufficient to remark that, even if the wesleyans were guilty (which i do not believe) of all the improper conduct attributed to them by m calinon, it has been occasioned entirely by the obtrusion of the society to which he belongs into ground previously occupied by others, who would undoubtedly, had their efforts remained unopposed or unassisted, soon have numbered the whole of the population among their fellow-worshippers.' "the priest also wrote to captain erskine, repeating his accusations of intolerance against the wesleyans, and expressing his fears that their efforts to disparage him would be renewed on their departure, and the flight of the pope from rome, of which they had heard, represented as the downfall of the catholic church. "the captain says, `i thought it right to answer his letter, as i could exonerate the missionaries from any charge of having attempted to prejudice us against the roman catholic priests, nor did i believe that they would make use of any unfair argument against their faith, founded on the political position of the pope.' i must also express my conviction that the charge against the wesleyans made by the priests of adopting as proselytes all who offer without examination is quite unfounded. the putting away of all but one wife--no small sacrifice on the part of a people who have practised polygamy for ages--is always insisted on as a first step, and regular attendance on religious worship is also expected. among the older christians i saw every evidence of their having adopted the new faith from conscientious conviction, and the chiefs of the highest distinction are probably better read in the new testament than any of the english met with among the islands. "captain erskine also bears testimony to the character of other missionaries. describing the work at samoa, he says: `the first circumstance which must strike a stranger on his arrival, and one which will come hourly under his notice during his stay, is the influence which all white men, but in particular the missionaries, exercise over the minds of the natives. "`no unprejudiced person will fail to see that had this people acquired their knowledge of a more powerful and civilised race than their own, either from the abandoned and reckless characters who still continue to infest most of the islands of the pacific, or even from a higher class engaged in purely mercantile pursuits, they must have fallen into a state of vice and degradation to which their old condition would have been infinitely superior. that they have been at least rescued from this state, is entirely owing to the missionaries; and should the few points of asceticism which these worthy men, conscientiously believing them necessary to the eradication of the old superstitions, have introduced among their converts, become softened by time and the absence of opposition, it is not easy to imagine a greater moral improvement than will then have taken place among a (once) savage people. "`with respect to those gentlemen of the london mission, whose acquaintance i had the satisfaction of making in samoa, i will venture, at the risk of being considered presumptuous, to express my opinion, that in acquirements, general ability, and active energy, they would hold no undistinguished place among their christian brethren at home. the impossibility of accumulating private property, both from the regulations of the society and the circumstances surrounding them, ought to convince the most sceptical of their worldly disinterestedness, nor can the greatest scoffers at their exertions deny to them the possession of a virtue which every class of englishman esteems above all others, the highest order of personal courage.' [see note.] "but i need not quote further from captain erskine, nor from other unprejudiced writers, to convince you, and through you your friends, of what has been accomplished through the instrumentality of missionaries. you will have many opportunities of judging for yourself. there is, however, another subject to which i would urge you to draw attention, that is, the attempts made by french priests of the church of rome to counteract the efforts of the missionaries. you know what has been done at tahiti. you hear from captain erskine what is doing at tonga and fiji. the same attempts are being made at samoa and elsewhere, wherever english missionaries have pioneered the way, and there are good harbours, but not otherwise. this almost looks as if their designs are political as well as religious, and that the object of those who send them is to establish french posts across the pacific, so that in time of war they may have coaling stations and harbours of refuge in every direction. as they have by means of these priests a party in each group, they will never want an excuse for interfering in the affairs of the islands whenever they may have occasion to do so. "but i must tell you more of many other islands brought under christian instruction. savage island offers a notable example of what can be done in a short time. captain cook gave it that name, on account of the savage appearance of the inhabitants. when williams first visited them in , they appeared to be in no way improved. several at length were induced to visit samoa, where at the training college they gained so sound a knowledge of christianity, that in two of them were well fitted to impart it to their long-benighted countrymen. they narrowly, however, escaped with their lives, and some time elapsed before they could gain the confidence of those they came to instruct. when visited by the reverend a murray in , about two hundred converts had been made, and many others had learned to look at the teachers with affection. unhappily that very year several of the natives were killed by the crew of a man-of-war which had called off the island, because one of them had stolen a carpenter's tool, and among them was the chief who had protected the missionaries on first landing. still they were already too well instructed to wish to return evil for evil, and with simplicity complained that the punishment was rather severe, especially as the innocent suffered, though not altogether undeserved. from this time forward, under their native teachers, the people made great progress in their knowledge of religious truth, and so rapidly were numbers added to the church, that in a few years not a heathen remained on the island. it was not indeed till quite lately that an english missionary was placed on the island, and he found five large churches built, one of which was capable of holding more than a thousand people; and many young men were anxious to be trained, that they might carry the gospel to other lands. i might give you a similar account of the way christianity has been introduced into many other islands, and small groups of islands in this part of the pacific; but i have a very different one to give of the western part, or of those islands which form what is called melanesia. they consist of five groups, and not only do the inhabitants of each group speak different languages, but frequently those of neighbouring islands. "we will begin with the large island of new caledonia, on which the french have lately formed a convict establishment. to the south of it is the isle of pines, and to the east the three islands of mare, livu, and uea, forming the loyalty group. at mare and livu chiefly, christianity has made progress, and protestant missionaries have for some years been residing on them, while the people of uea have gladly received the word; but the isle of pines has been stained with the blood of several native missionaries; and not only did the savage people reject the offer themselves, but they impeded its progress on new caledonia, by threatening all who became christians, till the french arrived and put a stop to the promulgation of protestant truth among the people. altogether, the influence of romanism has been most pernicious in these islands. "to the north-east of them are the new hebrides, the most southern of which is aneiteum; next tanna, eromanga, fate, malicolo, espiritu santo, and many others. the next group is that of banks' island, with santa maria, and many small isles. the santa cruz group is the fourth in the list; and to the north-west of them the solomon isles, consisting of many large islands, make the fifth group. the london missionary society have made every effort to carry the gospel to the inhabitants of the two first named groups, and in some instances successfully. "it was at eromanga that the devoted missionary john williams fell, with his young companion mr harris, struck down by the club of a chief. this sad murder did not prevent the society from making further efforts to send the gospel to the benighted inhabitants. those efforts have been blessed, and among the converts was the chief who committed the deed, and who gave up to a missionary the very weapon with which the fatal blow was struck. on aneiteum, english missionaries are located, christian churches have been established, and, with few exceptions, the whole of the population have in name become christian. "these five groups are now called melanesia. they have for some years past been regularly visited by the energetic bishop of new zealand, who has induced young men from most of them to accompany him in his mission vessel to new zealand, where at the auckland training college they are prepared to carry back the gospel to their savage countrymen. a missionary bishop has lately been appointed to superintend the work, which, if carried on in the spirit with which it has been commenced, must with god's blessing prosper. "these islands were long noted for the deeds of blood committed on their shores, for the number of vessels cut off, and both white and native missionaries murdered, and the natives have been looked on in consequence as of the most fierce and sanguinary character. that they deserved it in a degree there is no doubt; but at the same time it is very certain that their conduct towards foreigners was caused by the unjust, cruel way in which they were treated by the crews of vessels which came to procure sandal-wood on their shores. these men shot them down, cheated them, and ill-treated them in every possible way, sometimes carrying off chiefs and people from one place to exchange them as slaves for sandal-wood in another. over and over again natives have been shot both on board vessels and on shore by the traders. such was the cause of the death of the lamented john williams and young harris. a trading vessel had touched at eromanga a short time before their arrival, her crew having shot several natives, among whom was the son of a chief, who afterwards confessed that it was in retaliation he had instigated his countrymen to the attack, and had himself struck the fatal blow. "but time will not allow me to give a further description of this portion of the pacific. i have as yet told you nothing of the sandwich islands, or, as they are now called, the hawaiian islands, with their capital honolulu, in the isle of oahu, and their late sovereign, king kamehameha the fourth. they consist of several large and beautiful islands: that of hawaii (owhyee), containing two mountains, mouna kea and mouna roa, said to be eighteen thousand feet in height, and by far the most lofty in the whole pacific. the inhabitants are a fine and handsome race. their religion was one of gross superstition, and so overloaded with restrictions, constantly increasing, and curtailing the liberty of all classes except the priests, that the chiefs and people at length became utterly weary of it. even when visited by captain vancouver in , some of the chiefs requested him to send them instructors in the christian faith,--a prayer to which little attention appears to have been paid. "it was not till the year that the young king rihoriho, who had ascended the throne established by his victorious father, no longer believing in the power of his idols, and weary of the restraints of the old religion, at one stroke broke through the hitherto sacred taboo and the entire system of priestcraft. "just before this eventful time it had been put into the hearts of christian men in the united states, who formed the american board of missions, to send missionaries to the long-known savage murderers of captain cook. a band of devoted men, admirably selected, arrived on the th march, , in sight of mouna roa. they were received in a friendly way by the king and many of the chiefs, and three stations were soon occupied by them and their families. "two years afterwards, mr ellis, of the london missionary society, was invited to come from tahiti to aid in the work, which he was happily enabled to do. he came accompanied by some native tahitian teachers, who were of the greatest assistance to the missionaries. he remained until the ill-health of mrs ellis compelled him to return to england. the king of the sandwich islands and his excellent queen, after they had become christians, paid a visit to england, where they soon died from the measles, which they caught on landing. king rihoriho, who had assumed the title of kamehameha the second, was succeeded by his younger brother, the islands being well governed in the mean time by his mother and one of his chiefs. "the missionary stations were increased in number, many schools were established, and the natives began to understand the truths of the gospel, and to accept its offers, when there came a rude interruption from an outbreak of heathen chiefs, set on by their priests. after some severe fighting the rebels were defeated, and the insurrection completely put down. christianity and civilisation once more again made progress; but the missionaries had to contend with opposition not only from the heathen natives, but from so-called christian strangers, who were furious at finding that they could no longer indulge in the gross licence in which in former days they had been accustomed to revel. not only were they insulted by masters of whalers, but the american missionaries complain that they were ill-treated by the commander of one of their own men-of-war, and by all his subordinates. from such sources have arisen the numerous calumnies current against the missionaries in the south-sea." [see note .] "in about ten years from the landing of the first missionaries one-third of the population were under instruction, and there were no less than nine hundred native teachers; but even at that time, and much later, there were many heathens, and vice and immorality were very prevalent among professing christians. still among all classes there were notable examples of true piety, and ardent zeal for the propagation of the truth. the excellent queen-mother, kaahumanu, by her precept and example did much to advance the cause of religion. i must tell you of another native lady, kapiolani, the wife of naike, the public orator of the kingdom, by whose courage and faith one of the most terrible of the old superstitions of hawaii was overthrown. the old religion was coloured by the awful volcanic phenomena of which these islands are the theatre. the most fearful of all their deities was pele, a goddess supposed to reside in the famous volcano of kilauea. here, with her attendant spirits, she revelled amid the fiery billows as they dashed against the sides of the crater. to the base of this volcano the old heathenism, driven from the rest of hawaii, slowly retreated, though the priestesses of pele several times ventured even into the presence of the king, to endeavour by threats of the vengeance of the goddess to induce him to support the faith of his fathers. these impostors still exercised considerable influence over the uneducated masses. "kapiolani, bold in the christian faith, resolved practically to show how utterly powerless were these supposed fiery gods. after a journey of a hundred miles, as she neared the side of the mountain, a prophetess of the supposed goddess met her with warnings and denunciations of vengeance. but undauntedly she persevered, and as she stood on the black edge of the seething caldron she addressed, in words of perfect faith, the anxious bystanders watching for the effects of pele's wrath: `jehovah is my god: he kindled these fires. i fear not pele. if i perish, then you may believe that she exists, and dread her power. but if jehovah saves me, then you must fear and serve him.' as she spoke, she cast with untrembling hand the sacred berries into the burning crater, quietly waiting till the spectators should be convinced that no result was to follow. thus she succeeded in breaking through the last lingering remnant of the long-dreaded taboo; and while the priests and priestesses were compelled to support themselves by honest labour, their votaries abandoned their heathen practices, and in many instances sought instruction in the new faith. "the examples i have given will show you the mode in which christianity has spread over the isles of the pacific. but there are still numberless dark spots to which the gospel has not been carried, and in all, the churches still require the support, strengthening, and instruction which in general white men can alone afford." ------------------------------------------------------------------------ note . "journal of a cruise among the islands of the pacific," by captain j elphinstone erskine, rn, page . ------------------------------------------------------------------------ note . the _quarterly review_, , in noticing accounts of voyages in the pacific, after quoting the favourable testimonies of some writers, thus refers to others: "there is one circumstance which produces a very painful impression: it is the extreme unfairness which has been brought to bear against the missionaries and their proceedings, even by reporters whose substantial good intentions we have no right to controvert. surely their work was one which, whatever exception we may take against particular views or interests, ought to have excited the sympathies, not only of those who belong to the religious party, as it is commonly called, but of all who do not take a perverse pleasure in contemplating human degradation as a kind of moral necessity. the object of these devoted men was to redeem the natives from no mere speculative unbelief, but from superstitions the most sanguinary and licentious. even those who were careless as to the great truths which the polynesians had to learn, must feel, upon reflection, that merely to unteach the brutal and defiling lesson of ages of darkness was to confer a priceless blessing. every prejudice should surely be in favour of the men who have by general confession accomplished the first and apparently most laborious part of this task; instead of which a large class of writers find a species of satisfaction in thinking nothing but evil." chapter eighteen. a hazardous exploit. mr bent had been waiting for my recovery to restore alea to her father, and to revisit the newly-established christian community in her native island. it was important to lose no time in doing this. mary bent would have accompanied us; but as her father proposed being absent only a short time, and as the inconveniences of voyaging in a native canoe were very great, he wished her to remain at home. she was, however, not alone; for the widow of a missionary resided with her, and shared her onerous duties in instructing the native girls, an occupation in which both ladies took the greatest delight. all the inhabitants of the island now, it must be understood, professed christianity, and might justly be called thoroughly civilised. many also were true and sincere believers; so that these two english ladies, left alone on a small island of the pacific, felt as secure as they would have done in the centre of civilised england. as we drew near her father's island, alea showed considerable trepidation and anxiety as to the way in which she would be received. she could not persuade herself that one from whom she had fled so short a time before, and left a fierce, ignorant heathen, would be willing to forgive her, and treat her with kindness. might he not also, after all, compel her to become the wife of the cannibal chief to whom she had been betrothed? that was the most dreadful thought. mr bent used every possible argument to calm her apprehensions. although the poor girl had felt the influence of grace in her own soul, she scarcely as yet comprehended its power to change the heart of men. i had entertained a sincere interest in the fate of the young princess from the day we had found her and her perishing companions on board the canoe. i was now able to exchange a few words with her, and there was one subject on which she was never tired of dwelling,--the praise of mary bent,--in which i could always join. believing that my future lot would be cast among the people of these islands, i had begun seriously to study their language, and i took every opportunity of practising myself in speaking it. we had two native teachers on board, who were to be left among the new converts, and all day long i was talking to them, so that i found myself making rapid progress in their somewhat difficult language. with a fair wind, the missionary flag flying from the mast-head, we entered the harbour. the shore was crowded, and more and more people came rushing down from all quarters. it was evident that they would not receive us with indifference. mr bent had wished to prepare the king for his daughter's return; but she was recognised before we reached the beach, and several people hurried off to inform her father of her arrival. as the vessel's keel touched the strand we saw the people separating on either side, and between them appeared the old chief hurrying down towards us. we instantly landed with alea, and no sooner did her father reach her than, contrary to all native customs, he folded her in his arms, and kissing her brow, burst into tears?--but they were tears of joy. "forgive you, daughter!" he answered to her petition. "it is i have to be thankful that i could not succeed in ruining your soul and body as i proposed. what agony should i now be feeling had i cast you into the power of the child of satan, to the destruction of your soul and body alike!" these words made alea truly happy, and still more so when her father gave her free permission to become the wife of vihala. during their first interview we stood aside; but now the king came forward, and invited us to come up to his abode. he had evidently some reason for wishing us to come at once. what was our surprise to see on the summit of a hill a building beyond all comparison larger than had ever been erected in the island. the king pointed it out to us with no slight pride. it was a church built entirely by the natives, according to the descriptions given them by vihala, and the assistance of two or three of them who had seen christian places of worship during their visits to other islands, though they were at the time themselves heathen. often have i since seen heathens sitting at the porch of a place of worship, or standing outside the circle of eager listeners; and i have hoped, not without reason, that those men were imbibing some portion of the seed thus scattered, to bring forth fruit in due time. this fact alone is encouraging; indeed there is every encouragement to persevere in missionary labour throughout the pacific. where, indeed, is it not to be found, if waited for with patience? the missionary, too, feels that he goes not forth in his own strength,--that a far higher influence is at work, and on that he places his confidence of success. nothing could be more satisfactory than the reception afforded us by the chief; but i need not describe the number of hogs and fowls, of bread-fruit, of taro, of the sweet potato, and of numerous other articles of food which were collected to make a feast in honour of our arrival. mr bent lost no time in carrying out the object of our visit, in addressing the people, and in installing the teachers in their office. one of our first works was to plan a school-room and houses for the teachers, and to suggest certain alterations in the church to make it more suitable for public worship. it had been arranged that we should return before the next sabbath; but as it was possible to complete the building by that day, mr bent resolved to remain and open it in due form, the natives redoubling their efforts, and working almost day and night to effect that object. i lent a hand, and in sailor fashion erected a pulpit, which, as there was no time to carve, i covered with matting and native cloth, which had a novel, though not unpleasing, appearance. i did not before speak of my ship: i scarcely expected to find her here on my arrival. indeed the captain, i understood, thought that all on board the boat had been lost. he had waited, however, day after day, till losing all patience, he had sailed at length the very day we had reached the missionary station. i was most concerned to hear that my boat had not reached the island, though i had a hope that she had fallen in with the _golden crown_, and been picked up. if, on the contrary, she had been lost or captured by savages, i felt how grateful i should be for having escaped destruction. captain buxton, fully believing that i was lost, had left no message for me, so that i could not tell where the ship had gone, nor what were his intentions. i must now return to the subject of the church. the opening was one of the most interesting sights i ever beheld. it was crowded at an early hour with people, old and young, all clothed in native cloth, and with their hair cut short,--signs that they had lotued, or become christians; while numbers were seen approaching from all directions, many of whom, being unable to obtain seats inside, crowded round the doors and windows. mr bent's address was most fervent, and, though i could understand but little of it, yet, judging from the way in which the attention of every one present was absorbed, it must have been deeply interesting. of course but comparatively a small number of those present were really christians, or understood even the great principles of christianity. they now required the instruction which man can give, and the work of the holy spirit to change their hearts. i may here remark, that i have often heard missionaries accused of over eagerness to increase the number of their flocks; but i should say that protestant missionaries are never willing to consider those converted who are not really so, and that no ministers of the gospel are more strict in the tests they apply to ascertain the fitness of converts for baptism. mr bent well knew the character of his congregation, and addressed them accordingly; but surely it was glorious progress to have some hundreds of persons, not long ago untamed savages, listening attentively to the truths of the gospel. no work of man could thus have progressed,--no mere civilising influence would have produced such an effect. when the morning service was over, the people assembled on the hill-side and in open spaces in the neighbourhood of the church, and there, while eating the provisions they had brought with them, they eagerly discussed the subject of the discourse they had just heard. the teachers i observed went about among them, now sitting down with one group, now with another, and were thus able to answer questions, to give information, and to correct the erroneous notions which were likely to be entertained. alea scarcely ever left her father's side, and was continually engaged in imparting to him the instruction which she had received from mr bent and mary; and it was interesting to observe the avidity with which the old man received the truth from the lips of the young girl. i heard reports, however, that the heathen party, still numerous, were mustering strongly in another part of the island. it had been ascertained also that a canoe manned by heathens had left the island some time back, but where they had gone was not known. these circumstances i thought suspicious, and i feared foreboded evil. the meeting at the service in the afternoon, of the natives professing christianity, was fully equal to that in the morning, but there were fewer heathens. the service continued with prayer and songs of praise, and an address full of instruction and exhortation from mr bent. it was almost concluded, when a heathen chief, an old friend of the king, i found, rushed breathless into the building, announcing that a large fleet of double canoes was approaching the island,--that it was that of the cannibal chief to whom alea was betrothed, coming undoubtedly with hostile intent. "how far off are the canoes?" asked the king. "some distance as yet," was the answer. "then we will pray for protection from one mighty to save," exclaimed the king. "we shall now judge which is the most powerful,--jehovah, whom we have lately learned to worship, or the false gods whom we have cast away." none of the people moved from their places. the missionary concluded his discourse, and then offered up an earnest prayer for protection from all dangers, to which every one present repeated a loud amen. they then moved in an orderly manner out of the church, when the greater number hurried up the hill, whence they could see the approaching canoes. of these there were some fifteen or twenty of different sizes, but most of them large enough to contain a hundred men at least. they were making for a sandy point some way from the town or settlement, where we concluded the enemy would land. i could see with my glass the warriors dancing, and shaking their spears, and gesticulating violently, in a way intended to insult those they had come to attack, and to strike terror into their hearts. a council of war was now held. it was believed that the enemy would not attempt to make an attack that night, but would wait till the morning; still it was necessary to be prepared. the warriors accordingly armed themselves, and assembled in strong bodies under their different leaders. it was a difficult position for mr bent and me. he, however, at once stated that he could not assist our friends except by his advice and prayers, but he told me that i might act as i thought fit. should i fight, or should i not? there was a sore conflict within me. my inclinations prompted me to fight, but my new-born principles taught me to pray rather than to fight, where not called on positively by duty to do so. in either case, my example might be of service. i prayed (as all men in a difficulty should pray) to be guided aright. i decided to remain with the missionary, and use every means to stay the fight, or to mitigate its horrors should it take place. "i am glad, my son, that you have so resolved," remarked mr bent, when i told him of my determination. "surely the prayers of a believing man are of more avail than the strong arm of the bravest of warriors. it is a trial of your faith, certainly; but oh, pray that your faith may not waver." while i had been consulting with mr bent, i found that a herald from the enemy had arrived with a demand that the princess alea should be forthwith delivered up to his master, and threatening the king and all his adherents with utter destruction if he refused compliance. "tell your chief that once i was in the dark as he is. then i thought it no sin to give him my daughter; now i have light, and see my wickedness and folly. when he has light, he likewise will see as i do. my daughter cannot be his wife." this bold speech seemed to astonish the herald, who, having repeated his threats, took his departure. active preparations were now commenced for the defence of the settlement, and such fortifications as the natives use were thrown up on all sides. slight as they may appear, they are capable of offering a considerable resistance, and on one occasion, in the island of tongatabu, a brave english naval officer and several of his men lost their lives in an attack on one of them held by a rebel and heathen chief who had set at defiance the authority of king george. as evening drew on we could see the enemy on the sand-bank, dancing round large fires which they had kindled, the sound of their war-shrieks and shouts, and the blowing of their conch-shells reaching us through the calm night air. meantime the missionary repaired to the church, which during the night was visited at intervals by the whole christian population. the king also sat frequently in council with his chiefs. one of the youngest, who had, however, greatly distinguished himself, arose and proposed leading a band of chosen warriors to attack the enemy before they commenced their march in the morning. "while they are singing and dancing, they will not keep a good watch, and thus we may approach them without being discovered. jehovah will aid us. it is satan fights for them. we will prove which is the strongest." all approved the words of the young chief, and he had no lack of volunteers. about two hundred men were chosen and well armed; they at once set out on their hazardous exploit. they had resolved to conquer and save their brethren or die, and yet, perhaps, there was not one who did not expect to be victorious. i had not seen alea for some time. while i was with the king, who was surrounded by several of his chiefs, she unexpectedly made her appearance among us. she was weeping bitterly. "father," she said, "i am the cause of all the bloodshed which is about to occur. let my life be sacrificed rather than that of so many of your friends. give me up to the chief. he can then have no cause to complain. i will never be his wife. i may make my escape or i may die, but the lives of you and your friends will be preserved." on hearing this noble resolve, the chiefs to a man exclaimed that nothing should induce them to abandon the princess. prayers from all sides were in the mean time offered up for the success of the band of warriors who had gone forth to attack the enemy. no one, however, slackened in their efforts to fortify the town, and all, from the king, when not engaged in council, down to the slave taken in battle, carried baskets of earth or posts for stockades, during the greater part of the night, to those parts of the fortifications which required strengthening. as the hours drew on we waited anxiously for the result of the expedition. i could not help feeling how critical was our position. i was not anxious, however, on my own account, but i could not help reflecting on the sad condition to which mary would be reduced should her father and i be cut off, as we might too probably be if the heathens gained the victory. then came the blessed and consoling thought that god cares for the orphans, especially of those who serve him; what strength and courage does it give those who rest on his sure promises--a comfort which people of the world can never enjoy. i went the rounds of the fortifications a short time before dawn, and found all the warriors at their posts. i then rejoined mr bent, and was conversing with him, when a loud shout from a distance reached our ears, followed by a confused sound of shrieks and cries mingled with the shouts, which continued without cessation for many minutes. scouts were sent out to ascertain the cause, but no one returned before day broke. the light then revealed to us the fleet of the enemy shoving off from the land. some of the canoes had already got away, others were hoisting their sails, while a body of the enemy were defending themselves on the beach, hard pressed by our friends. on seeing this the warriors in the town rushed from their trenches, but before they could reach the scene of action not an enemy remained on their strand, with the exception of three or four slain and some thirty or more taken prisoners. the rest sailed away in hot haste, seized with an unusual, if not an unaccountable panic. as their sails had become mere dots on the horizon, the victors entered the town singing, not as before songs of triumph in honour of their idols, but praises to jehovah, to whom they ascribed their victory. mr bent and i, with the women and children and aged men who had not gone forth to the fight, met them, when the king, in set form, recounted what had occurred. the first band had remained concealed till near daylight, when the enemy appeared to be getting drowsy after all their feasting and dancing. at a signal from their leader they dashed forth on the foe, who, totally unprepared for them, were seized with a sudden panic, and the greater number, leaving even their arms, fled towards their canoes. the few who were killed had refused to receive quarter, and as many as could be seized were taken prisoners. these latter fully expected to be slaughtered immediately, and to be offered up to idols, if not to be eaten. they had been somewhat surprised in the first instance to see that their friends who had been killed in the fight were decently interred where they fell, instead of being dragged ignominiously by the heels to the town. they only concluded that this was one of the new customs of the lotu people, and had no expectation in consequence of escaping the common doom of captives. several of them were chiefs who had attempted to defend the rear while their countrymen were embarking. they stood with downcast, sullen looks, prepared for torture and death. the king now approached them. "why, o chiefs, did you come to attack my island and my people?" he asked calmly. "we are now among those who wish to live at peace with all men, to have enmity towards no one. why did you desire to do us harm?" "we came against you because our king and master ordered us," answered one of the prisoners, looking up with a fierce scowl of defiance on his countenance. "our object was to carry off your daughter to become our king's wife; the rest of you we should have killed and eaten." "and i, o chiefs, let you go free because my king and master orders me to be merciful, that i may obtain mercy," answered the king. "you, o chiefs and people, are free to return to your own island, but before you go you must learn something of the new religion which we have been taught, that you may go back and speak of it to your people, or wherever you may go." the astonished captives could scarcely believe their senses, the treatment was so unlike anything those they had known taken in war had experienced. they consulted together and expressed their willingness to accept the offer. they were completely overcome when the king promised them a large canoe and ample provisions for their return. the people having taken some refreshment, assembled at the church, where hearty thanksgivings were offered up for the deliverance they had experienced. the captives attended. i watched their countenances. they seemed lost in amazement. all the sentiments were so new and strange. the reign of the prince of peace was spoken of. they soon after came to the missionary desiring that they might be allowed to serve so good a master. they never seemed tired of receiving instruction in the new doctrine, and i was struck with its wonderful adaptability to unsophisticated man, and its power of satisfying his heart yearnings, from the avidity with which they seized each point as presented to them. it was now time to return to the mission station. we bade an affectionate farewell to alea, promising to send her intended husband back to the island as soon as possible. the now liberated captives agreed to embark on the same day. their chief entreaty was that a missionary or a teacher might be sent them to instruct them in the way of eternal life, that way which, by a wonderful combination of circumstances, they were now anxious to follow. thus the almighty works often, and thus he has thought fit in an especial manner to work throughout the pacific. the difficulty was to obtain a teacher. mr bent had several under training at the station, and he told the captives that if they would accompany us he would endeavour to find one who would return with them to their island. they were delighted with the proposal, and exhibited an extraordinary eagerness to set forth. their hurry was at the time unaccountable, as they were evidently sincere in their expressions. anxious to please them, we accordingly had our canoe launched, taking several of them on board, the remainder going in the canoe given by the king. the wind being fair, we had a quick run till more than half way across. just then, through our glasses, we caught sight of a canoe, which, on discovering us, as it seemed, paddled off at right angles to avoid us--her people evidently mistrusting our character. we instantly altered our course to cut her off, and approached her with our missionary flag flying. no sooner was this discovered than the canoe turned again towards us. she soon drew near, when we recognised the people in her as belonging to the station. by their gestures and countenances we had too much reason to believe that they brought us evil tidings. "haste! haste! haste!" they exclaimed, leaping on board. "a heathen fleet has arrived at the island, and the chief threatens to attack the station. even now he may have begun the onslaught, for his fury was great. haste! haste! haste!" chapter nineteen. the launch of the olive branch. we now understood more of the dangers to which the families of missionaries have often been exposed in all parts of the world. i must own that in my fears for mary bent's safety, my own faith and fortitude were well nigh giving way. mr bent retained his calmness in a wonderful manner. "all things are in god's hands," he observed. "he will guide them as he knows to be best. we have to go on labouring to the utmost of our power, leaving the rest to him." i felt that i must be in action, and hauling the canoe on board with the aid of her crew, we got out the paddles and urged our craft ahead somewhat faster than the wind was doing. every moment might be of consequence. as the cannibal chief, exasperated at having been deprived of alea, might attempt to carry off mary, the very thought drove me almost distracted. i had had few or no trials in life, and was not prepared for this one. mr bent wished to ascertain whether, if required, we could depend on the assistance of our new friends. they had heard what had occurred, and at once volunteered to use every means in their power to prevent their chief from doing harm, even to turning against him. "he will live perhaps to thank us," one of them, a young and intelligent chief, observed. "at all events you have bound us to serve you." all now seemed to depend on our arriving before the attack had begun. we trusted that if not begun we should be able to prevent it. meantime all we could do was to offer up constant, earnest prayer for the protection of one so dear to us, and for all those at the settlement. the wind, hitherto blowing a strong breeze, now fell light, and our progress was slower than before. "all is for the best, depend on that, my son," repeated the missionary several times, when he observed my look of anxiety. "god's loving mercy endureth for ever. pray against doubt--pray against doubt. put on the armour of faith. in that you will find strength to quench all the fiery darts of the evil one." my venerable friend spoke the truth, and already my fears began to subside, although i could in no way see the mode of deliverance. i expressed the same to mr bent. "nor did we the other day, but god clearly fought for us as he did in days of old for the children of israel, by putting fear into the hearts of their enemies, and so can he now find some means for the protection of those who serve him." on we glided over the calm blue water. now the breeze freshened, and as the surface became rippled over, it sparkled brightly in the sunbeams. as the island came in sight my heart beat quicker and quicker, and with difficulty i could restrain my impatience. i stood at the bows with my glass at my eye directed constantly at the spot where the station was to be found. as the sun then was, objects close in under the land were not distinctly discernible, but as my glass every now and then swept the horizon on either side, the sails of a fleet of canoes came into view. the instrument almost dropped from my hand. we were too late. the attack had been made and the victors were sailing away with their captives. my first impulse was to give chase, and to attempt their recovery. i did not consider how powerless we were even should our new allies remain faithful. for some time i could not bring myself to tell my fears to mr bent; but it was necessary to alter our course if we were to pursue the enemy. at length, therefore, it became necessary for me to tell him what i had seen. he took the telescope, and after a severe scrutiny of the horizon in every direction, and especially of the island, he asked, in a more cheerful voice than might have been expected: "can you not assign some other cause for the flight of the foe? look again." i did so; and now, the sun having come round a little, i saw close in with the missionary station a large ship at anchor. she might be the _golden crown_, come to take me away. i hoped not. my heart again sunk. as we drew nearer i saw that she was much larger--a man-of-war. the station was safe. otherwise she would have been sailing in pursuit of the canoes. with one voice we burst forth in the native tongue with songs of praise and thanksgiving; and now the canoe seemed to glide more swiftly over the glad blue sea. we entered the harbour, where lay a fine english frigate. as we passed her i hailed and inquired if the station was safe. "yes, yes, all right," was the answer. "we came in just in time to prevent mischief." our eagerness to reach home prevented us from stopping to make further inquiries. no sooner did our boat's keel touch the strand than we leaped on shore. even then before leaving the beach the missionary knelt down and offered up a few words of thanksgiving for the mercies vouchsafed us. we reached the house. mary and her companion did not come out to welcome us. voices reached our ears from within. one i thought i recognised. we looked in. mary was doing the honours of the tea-table with some other ladies. there were three naval officers and two gentlemen in black coats. one of the latter turned his face. it was that of my brother john. i had time to greet him while mary was receiving her father and introducing her guests. then came my turn to be received by her. i need not describe that. i was very happy. the whole scene was so different from what i had but a short time before expected, that i was perfectly bewildered. i felt deeply grateful that mary had escaped all the dangers i apprehended, and which had really threatened her. the frigate had appeared off the station just at the very moment that the cannibal chief and his followers were about to land. she brought up with her guns commanding the approach to the town. the captain, suspecting mischief, instantly despatched an armed boat to warn the chief that he would allow no warlike demonstration to be made in his presence, and that if he attempted to land he would blow his canoes to pieces. the warning had had at first very little effect, and the chief, in defiance, leaping on shore with his followers from the largest canoe, left her deserted. the officer in charge of the boat immediately fired the gun in the bows right into her, and almost knocked her to pieces. the interpreter then shouted out, "if the small gun of this little boat will do all this mischief, what would all the great guns of the big ship do?" the argument was irresistible. the chief, leaping on board another canoe, begged that no more damage might be done, and offered to sail away immediately, promising never again to come near the settlement. this he was allowed to do on condition of his returning directly home without committing further damage on the way, and he was compelled to leave two hostages as a guarantee that he would perform his promise. all this was told in a few words, and john now introduced me to his devoted wife; and as i heard of some of the many trials and dangers they had gone through, and how calmly she had endured them, i felt how admirably she was fitted to be the helpmate of a missionary. the captain of the frigate was, i discovered, an old family friend--one who, convinced of the importance of missionary labour, was zealous in aiding and supporting missionaries of the gospel wherever he met them engaged in their master's work. he had found john suffering from hard work and anxiety, and had persuaded him and his wife to take a trip among several of the polynesian groups, to visit as many of the missionary stations as could be reached, in the hopes that he might return home with renewed strength for his work. one of the ladies was his wife's sister, who had come out to assist her in her labours--not the only example of self-devotion to a glorious and thrice blessed cause. the other gentleman in plain clothes was the chaplain of the ship. while conversing with him an idea occurred to me which i took an early opportunity of communicating to john, who highly approved of it, and undertook to broach the subject to mr bent while i mentioned it to mary. it was one which concerned us both very nearly, for it was a proposal to take the opportunity of marrying while a legally authorised person was present to perform the ceremony, with my own brother and our naval friend as witnesses. mary had no objections to offer, and we soon overcame those mr bent suggested. the benefit of the visit of the ship-of-war to the different missionary stations was very great, besides having preserved ours from almost certain destruction. the admirable discipline of the crew had a great influence on the minds of the heathen natives, so different from what they had been accustomed to witness on board many whalers; the perfect order of everything on board the ship, and the mighty power of her guns, awed them still more, and showed them the folly of offending people who had in their possession such instruments of punishment. i will not say that the appearance of any ship of war would do good. unless discipline is strict and no licence is allowed, they might do, as some have done, a great deal of harm. one of the worst of this kind, was that of captain kotzebue, commanding a russian exploring expedition. wherever he went he outraged decency by the licence he allowed his crew, and on his return home malignantly abused the english missionaries whom he found nobly struggling, against innumerable difficulties, to reclaim the hapless natives from the sin and corruption which he had done his utmost to encourage. others, from ignorance or from vicious dispositions, followed his line of abuse, though happily the greater number of their publications have sunk into deserved oblivion, while the glorious result of missionary labour, evident to all who will inquire, proclaims the falsehood of their accusations. to the honour of the british navy be it said that by far the greater number of captains who have visited the isles of the pacific have rendered essential service to the missionary cause while on the spot, and have spoken and written heartily in its praise on their return home. we had very little time to prepare for the wedding as the frigate could not remain long. i employed the interval in getting assistance from the ship's carpenters in building a vessel, and instruction, with the necessary plans for continuing the work after the frigate had gone. i had some knowledge of the art to begin with, so that i knew exactly what information i required. my ambition was to have a fine, serviceable little vessel, and i had every hope of succeeding. i was thoroughly up to rigging and fitting her. the time passed very rapidly, and my wedding-day arrived, and mary became my most loving and devoted wife,--a bright example to those among whom our lot was cast. i have not dwelt on the visit of my brother john, or the enjoyment and benefit i derived from his society. our station was healthy, but the surgeon of the ship recommended his continuing the voyage, and with reluctance i parted from him, hoping, however, to visit him when my schooner should be completed. once more the missionary station was left in its usual quiet state; but, though quiet, no one was idle. there were schools both for adults as well as children,--the males, under the superintendence of mr bent, with native teachers; the women and girls under mary and her friend. classes also assembled during most days in the week for religious instruction. mr bent was also frequently engaged in teaching the young men and boys various mechanical arts: house-building in its various departments, agriculture and gardening, and last, though not least, printing and book-binding. it is wonderful with what rapidity many acquired the art of printing, and many learned to bind books with great neatness and strongly. i meantime, aided by my wife, was making fail progress in the language, so that i was able to talk without difficulty to the men who assisted me in building the vessel. she was at length ready for launching. i proposed calling her the _mary_, but to this my wife would not consent. we had a discussion on the subject round our tea-table during that pleasantest of all meals in most missionary, indeed in most quiet families. the _ark_ was proposed, and then the _olive branch_. the latter was the name decided on. it was made a day of rejoicing and prayer and praise on the occasion of launching the little _olive branch_. formerly one, or perhaps several, human victims would have been offered up to their idols by the then benighted inhabitants. the vessel herself was decked with flags and garlands, and surrounded by high poles, from which gay-coloured banners were flying. a feast was prepared also, at which the chief, who came in state, presided. we had limited the quantity of provisions, or else, according to custom, far more than could have been consumed would have been collected. a large bower or tent of boughs and flowers had been erected for the chief and his principal attendants,--a very elegant, though a rapidly created structure. mary named the vessel as she glided down the ways, and a hymn of thankfulness, combined with a prayer for the safety of all who might ever sail in her, was sung by the children of the school at the same time, the effect being admirable. i was somewhat anxious till i saw the little craft floating safely in the water. we had purposely avoided anything savouring of heathenism, such as breaking a bottle of wine on her bows, taken evidently from the greek custom of pouring out a libation to neptune; nor would we make a mockery of the rite of baptism, by pretending to christen her. living among heathens, it was our duty to be especially circumspect in all our proceedings. the natives are very acute, and are accustomed to make enquiries as to the meaning and origin of everything they see. how unsatisfactory would have been the answer we should have had to give, had we, without consideration or thought, adopted the practice generally followed in england. the missionaries have endeavoured as much as possible to abolish all heathen customs, so that the evil-disposed may have no temptation to return to them. in this they show wisdom. even the sports and pastimes of heathenism, though they may by some be considered harmless in themselves, are generally adverse to the spiritual life of a christian, and therefore they have been discouraged. the missionaries have in consequence been accused of being morose and narrow-minded. far, far different is their real character. as a class, they are zealous, earnest, devoted men, full of life, activity, and energy,--courageous and persevering,--gifted with high and varied attainments, which would enable them to shine among civilised communities, but they have joyfully abandoned home and country, and, in obedience to their lord and master, have gone forth to teach the heathen the unsearchable riches of christ. let those who may fancy that i overpraise these men, read their memoirs, and they will be convinced of the truth of my statements. the native carpenters worked admirably. i had spars, rigging, and a suit of sails ready, supplied me by the frigate, with a compass and such nautical instruments as i required, so the _olive branch_ was soon ready for sea. i proposed in my first experimental trip to pay a visit to vihala, to leave two more native teachers on the island, and then, on my return, to see alea, and to ascertain the progress made by her father and fellow-islanders in religion. mary begged that she might accompany me, and, as her father made no objections, i was too glad of her company to refuse. for several days, however, i first made frequent trips out of the harbour, to exercise my native crew, who, although they had never before been on board a vessel, became efficient hands in a wonderfully short space of time. the reason of this was that they gave their minds thoroughly to their work, and were anxious to learn everything i could teach them. the _olive branch_ was completed to my satisfaction and to that of all who saw her. i was indeed very proud of her, as chiefly the work of my own hands; and yet when i compared the slight difficulties i had had to overcome with the great ones conquered by mr williams at raratonga, when building the _messenger of peace_, i felt sensibly how little cause i had to boast. as mr bent had promised to relieve vihala of his charge as soon as possible, two teachers had been trained for the purpose, and these we now took on board. we had with us a number of axes and knives, and other articles most prized by the natives, both to pay for provisions or whatever we might require, as also to bestow on vihala, hoping that, if he were thus richly endowed, the old king would not refuse longer to give him his daughter. two of the men who had come as heathen enemies now remained as friends, and earnest searchers after truth. the remainder, deeply imbued with the spirit of christianity, had returned to their own island, we hoped to pave the way for a missionary among its still heathen and cannibal inhabitants. thus during the few months since i had left my ship i had seen a way made for the entrance of the gospel into these thickly-inhabited islands. thus it has pleased god to work through human agency among a large proportion of the isles of the pacific; nor has he ever failed to afford, after a time, superabundant encouragement to his faithful labourers. oh that some of the many thousands and thousands of young men and women who read this would consider the noble, the glorious nature of missionary work, and esteem it as a high privilege to be allowed to employ their energies in the cause! how different was our voyage from that which mary, mr bent, and i before took in the same direction! but where were our companions? were we the only ones alive out of the whole party? at all events, we had ample reason to be grateful. the wind was fair, and our passage promised to be as calm and pleasant as we could desire. on getting near enough to the island to distinguish objects on shore, we saw a number of people hurrying down to the beach, from among the trees, while some launched their canoes and paddled off through the opening in the reef towards us. their object was to welcome us, and to pilot the schooner into their harbour. they knew that the schooner was a missionary vessel from her flag, but they had not guessed who was on board. their delight, when they recognised mr bent and mary, was excessive; and so completely did they forget all about the vessel, that had i not kept a good look-out she would have run right on to the reef. on our enquiring for vihala, the answer was, "he is well, and we all christian." the glorious news we found on landing to be true. vihala received us with joy unfeigned, and it was some little time before we could proceed, from the number of people who crowded round us to express their satisfaction at our arrival. great also was ours when, at length moving on, we saw before us a handsome structure, a church erected entirely by the natives, under vihala's superintendence, capable of holding seven or eight hundred persons, and near it a school-house and two neat residences for teachers. "your church is indeed large," observed mr bent, after expressing his admiration of it to vihala. "yes," was the quiet answer; "but all desire to hear the word, and why should any be excluded? the kingdom of heaven is wide enough for all." alas! that any should so mistake the gospel message as to think differently, and to act as if all should be thrust out who do not conform to certain rules and regulations of man's invention, although they with deep repentance trust in the blood of christ alone for salvation. many a once heathen savage will rise up in the day of judgment to condemn those men. would that, for their own sakes, they could even now voyage amid the isles of the pacific, and behold the glorious work wrought by the instrumentality of true christian men of various branches of the one church, and i believe that they would be compelled to acknowledge that an unction from on high is of more avail in saving souls alive than any mere official and external qualification, such as the romish priesthood with its pretended apostolic succession claims. the means are best judged of by the result, and that can be known of all men. "by their works ye shall know them." it was remarkable that, except for the few days mr bent had preached on the islands, none of the inhabitants had heard the truth from a white missionary, and yet the majority of them had cast away their idols, and become nominal christians,--while many of them were really converted. we had a most delightful time on the island. the two new teachers we brought somewhat reconciled the people to the loss of vihala, though their grief was most unmistakable when they were told that he must leave them for a time at all events. again we were on the ocean, and approaching the island where vihala expected to meet his promised bride. he had long been separated from her. he acknowledged that it had been for his good, and he hoped that, with the spiritual benefits he had received while engaged as a teacher, they should the better be able to walk together on their heavenward way, and lead others on to the same happy goal. chapter twenty. a fearful hurricane. but a few years ago, before the power of god's word was felt among the inhabitants of the fair islands of the pacific, to the numerous dangers usually encountered by mariners, that of being attacked and cut off by cannibal savages was to be added throughout its whole extent. now, throughout the eastern portion, the greater number of the islands may be visited, not only without fear, but with the certainty of a friendly reception. there are still some,--like the marquesas and parts of the pomautau group, or low archipelago,--which still remain in the darkness of heathenism; but on the western portion of that mighty ocean, the bright spots on which the gospel shines are the exception to the general rule, and over the widest parts the spirit of evil reigns supreme. it was here that true soldier of christ, the energetic williams, fell; and here, too, mr gordon and his wife and family were lately murdered by the savage inhabitants. it was towards a group of islands in the eastern pacific that the _olive branch_ was now holding its course. we had seen vihala happily united to alea, with the full consent of the old king, and they had devoted themselves for missionary labour wherever they might be required. this was surprising to many, and to the heathen perfectly incomprehensible. it was as astonishing to them as it would be to people in england, if a young noble of high rank were to declare his resolution of going forth as a missionary of the gospel to these heathen lands. yet what undertaking more glorious, what work more pleasing to the lord and master, whom christians of all ranks, rich and poor, profess to serve. we had likewise visited the island of the once cannibal chief, who had heard of the new religion from his countrymen, had confessed its vast superiority to his own, cast away his idols, and gladly received the two teachers we had brought with us. all this had been most cheering and encouraging. we had landed mr bent at the station, and now we hoped shortly again to meet my brother john and his wife, and to convey them, and some other missionaries and their wives, to a general meeting to be held shortly at the central station. we had received on board a variety of stores, and books, and numerous articles to distribute among the various stations at which we were to touch. indeed, it was highly satisfactory to me to find how useful my little _olive branch_ could be made. hitherto the little vessel had not encountered a single storm. it was like the rest we might suppose the ocean enjoyed after the subsidence of the waters when the ark rested on ararat,--not a calm, though; for gentle breezes filled our sails, and rippled over the blue surface of the sea with glittering wavelets, laughing joyously in the sunbeams. a lovely island hove in sight, with blue mountains, and rocks, and sparkling waterfalls, and green shrubs, and pastures, and graceful palm-trees, and yellow sands; and we sailed in through an opening in the never absent reef, and dropped our anchor in a sheltered and beautiful harbour, and numbers of canoes surrounded us. but we had no boarding nettings up, no guns loaded, no pistols in our belts, no cutlasses and pikes ready at hand; for the gospel ruled here. the canoes were filled with well-clothed, intelligent natives. not an oath was heard, not a man showed an angry temper, and not one who could not read the word of god, and understood it too, and could give a clear reason for the hope that was in him, and who was not probably, even in secular matters, far better educated than the larger portion of the watermen of any port in england, or other long-civilised country in the world. provisions of various sorts had been brought in the canoes; but when i enquired for john harvey, and announced that i was his brother, and that my wife was the daughter of mr bent, not an approach to payment would any one receive. when we landed they lifted us up in their arms, and carried us thus to the mission house, where our appearance was a pleasant surprise to our sister-in-law, who had not been made aware of our arrival. my brother was away, but every hour expected back. i had looked upon mr bent's station as a model of neatness; this was larger, and superior in many respects; nor was it inferior in respect to spiritual things. the church, built entirely of stone, was a large and handsome building, and the most conspicuous object from the sea. running parallel with the shore were two rows, facing each other, of neat cottages, many of stone, with verandahs round them, and gardens both in front and in the rear. between them was a broad hard road, with two rows of trees, and a stream of sparkling water led through the centre, fed by a waterfall which came foaming down the side of a rocky hill at a little distance inland. several streets of equal width had been commenced at right angles with the main street, and on the same plan, and new houses were in course of erection in several directions. here it was evident, indeed, was the commencement of a large town. the cottages were all very fair copies of the mission-house, though on a smaller scale. those of some of the chiefs, however, were of good size, and were arranged so that they could enjoy all the privacy of domestic life. and why, it may be asked, was this congregation of natives in one place? what could be the attraction? my love and admiration of john suggested the answer, and i was right: the power of god's word put forth through his faithful servant. the inhabitants of this town had been collected by concern for their soul's welfare, and the belief that the nearer they were to the preacher the more that welfare would be cared for. they displayed a wisdom which is foolishness to the world, and is, alas! too often neglected by those at home, by those who profess to be seeking after the food which perisheth not. i write this, as well as other comparisons i have made, not to find fault with my countrymen at home, but that (should my journal ever be read by any of them) i may excite in them a holy emulation with these so late savage heathens, that they may examine themselves, and ascertain whether they are using all the means in their power to attain to holiness of life and conversation, and without which their spiritual life will too probably languish. i found my sister-in-law actively engaged from morning till night in her household duties, and in affording instruction of every description to native women of all ages. she declared with perfect sincerity her belief that she was one of the happiest of her sex. she retained the most perfect health, though her figure was slight and delicate, and she had been most gently and tenderly nurtured. not only that, but she had been what is called highly educated, and was not a stranger to the gay and brilliant assemblies of "civilised" life. it was not that she knew no other lot, and therefore esteemed her present one the best; but she had weighed it with many others she did know, and found it immeasurably superior. she knew from experience that worldly rank hides many a heavy or vacant heart where god is not acknowledged, that wealth cannot give peace of mind, and that gaiety and dissipation most assuredly quench spiritual life. she had found, too, that even a decent church-attending style of existence may be unprofitable to the soul, and as certain to lead to spiritual death. my sister-in-law was not entirely alone. there were two other stations on the island, which was large, and the missionaries and their wives enjoyed frequent intercourse, thus encouraging and supporting each other. indeed, i have as a rule found the stations the most prosperous both spiritually and physically where two missionary families have been living together, or where they are near enough to meet frequently. a missionary's wife has to attend to her household duties, often not slightly onerous when she has children requiring instruction. then she has the female schools to look after, adult classes to receive at her own house, to afford advice to all who ask it, to call on the sick and to administer medicine, and to visit often from house to house. she must correspond with friends at home; she has her private devotions, and must take time for reading and self-examination, or she will find that she can ill perform her other duties. i do not believe that i have overstated the amount of work i have known my sister-in-law and other missionaries' wives perform. indeed, my own wife was in the habit of getting through not less daily, for weeks together. although the greater number of the inhabitants of the island had become christians in name, there was still a large district the powerful chief of which remained a stubborn heathen. he seemed to hate the gospel with a deadly hatred, and threatened to club any of his subjects who should venture to lotu. notwithstanding this, several who had heard the truth, either directly or through their friends, had secretly escaped to christian villages. many of these persons had become really converted, and were of course longing to induce their relatives and friends to become christians likewise. such was the state of things when the _olive branch_ arrived at the island. a more beautiful picture could scarcely be found than that presented by the calm bay on which our little vessel floated, with her mission-flag flying,--the glittering sand, the tall cocoa-nut and bread-fruit trees, the wild rocks and fantastic-shaped hills, the green fields, the foaming waterfalls and shining streams, and the rows of neat habitations, the church and school-houses,--all showing that the gospel had indeed here found an entrance, and made it doubly beautiful in our sight. we had been some hours on shore when we saw the natives hurrying out of their cottages and assembling in the chief street, and the cry arose that the missionary was coming. i was scarcely prepared for the warm and affectionate greeting with which they welcomed him. there was no adulation and nothing cringing in their manner; but it was evident that they knew him from experience as a sincere and loving friend. great as was our mutual satisfaction at again meeting, so multifarious were his duties that we had but little time for private conversation. i was able, however, to ascertain that john's heart was in his work, and that he infinitely preferred being a missionary in the south-seas to holding the highest secular office at home. the sabbath came. it was a day of toil to the preachers and teachers, and yet a day of refreshing to them as it was to hundreds of others, who collected from all quarters to worship the true god, and to hear his word expounded. many came with their wives and little ones, bringing their provisions, to spend the day of rest in obtaining spiritual food for their souls' welfare. the service over, numbers collected round my brother and the native teachers, and almost the whole interval between the services was devoted to affording advice and consolation to these seekers after life eternal. but the faith of the young christian community in the especial providence of god was sorely to be tried. all things were prepared for our departure, and we were about going on board the _olive branch_, when the somewhat threatening appearance of the weather made me resolve not to sail before the following morning. i was convinced shortly that a gale of more or less strength was coming on, and leaving mary at the mission house, i went on board to secure the vessel and make all things snug. scarcely had i got out a second anchor and two fresh warps than dark clouds were seen rushing across the sky, the wind howled among the hills and trees, lightning flashed brightly, and the thunder roared and rattled fearfully. i was in hopes, however, that the vessel would, notwithstanding, ride in safety, when it struck me that the sea outside was roaring louder than usual, and in an instant a huge roller appeared rushing with fearful violence into the harbour, while before i could look round i found the vessel lifted up, cables and anchors dragging, and warps giving way, and on we drove helplessly towards the shore. my crew held on to the bulwarks with affrighted looks, for we could expect nothing else than that our little vessel would be dashed to pieces, and if so, that we ourselves should be swept out of the harbour by the receding wave. another dread seized me, that the roller might sweep up to the mission house and overwhelm those so dear to me. this feeling made me forget all fear for my own life, or for those with me. as i gazed landward, i saw the devastation the hurricane was already committing. several cottages were in view. now the wind lifted the roof of one and bore it in shattered fragments to a distance. now the walls of another trembled and fell; tall trees were bending and breaking, or being torn up by the roots and laid prostrate; house after house was thus destroyed; whole groves of trees, as it seemed to me, fell to the ground; darkness appeared to be coming down like a thick mantle to add to the horrors of the scene. on drove our little vessel; the rocks against which i expected to be dashed appeared; these were covered, and over them we were carried by the raging tide, above even the sands, and lifted high up on to a soft bank amid brushwood stern first, where she hung while the waters rushed back leaving her uninjured on the shore. we were mercifully preserved from the sudden death we expected, and were grateful; but yet, though not cast down, knowing all would be for the best, i felt most anxious to assure myself of the safety of my dear wife and her companions. we had come on shore, as far as i could judge, half a mile or more from the mission house, a distance which it would be not only difficult but extremely dangerous to traverse while the storm was raging and tall trees were being hurled about like straws. one of my crew--a true christian man--volunteered to accompany me. the _olive branch_ had already been made snug aloft, so when i had seen her securely shored up, trusting and believing that no second roller would come to move her, i set off, leaving the rest of the people on board to attend to her. my companion and i provided ourselves each with a stout pole. i led the way, he to help me should i fall, and i promising to turn back should he cry out. the noise of the tempest prevented our having anything like conversation with each other, indeed it was only when we shouted at the very top of our voices that they could be heard. the darkness had increased, and as i began to move on i felt that the attempt was almost beyond my power; still the incentive was so great that i resolved to persevere. i prayed for strength and protection. in my own arm i knew that i could not trust. there were no stars to guide me, and the flashes of lightning sadly confused and dazzled my eyes, so that it was only by keeping as near as possible to the shore that i could hope to keep in the proper direction. this way was longer, however, and very rough where rocks covered the ground, and i dreaded a return of the roller, when we might have been swept helplessly away. the dangers to be encountered by keeping inland were equally great. we might be struck by lightning, crushed by falling trees, or losing our way, fall into some gully or chasm. feeling the ground before us with our poles, my companion and i began our hazardous march, i desired him to keep as close behind me as he could, and to shout frequently to assure me that he was following. the tempest increased in fury, the rain came down in torrents, causing such floods as in some places almost to sweep us off our feet. we had made good some five or six hundred yards, when i thought that we might make faster progress on the higher ground, where the water would not be so great an impediment to our progress. i knew also that we should be able to steer our course more or less directly by feeling the direction the water was flowing, so that we might always regain the sea by following down the streams. accordingly we attempted gradually to gain the higher ground, but as we ascended, we felt the wind blowing with greater force, and were again nearly carried off our legs by it. i had to exert all the energies of my mind not to become totally bewildered. over rough rocks we climbed, and fallen trunks of trees, and through the beds of streams, down which the fierce waters now rushed foaming and roaring with fearful force, and across swamps and marshes, till at last we reached a grove of tall trees. we could discover no way round it, so i resolved to push through it by a path in which we found ourselves. the trees were bending and writhing, and the loud crashes we heard told us that every instant some were hurled to the ground. now one fell directly before me, and impeded my progress. i climbed over it, my companion followed, and we continued our course, guided as before by the way the rain beat on our heads and the waters flowed past our feet. again the thunder rolled loudly and the lightning flashed with startling vividness, casting a horrid glare over the whole scene, now darting amid the lofty boughs, and then snake-like running with loud hisses along the ground. how utterly helpless and insignificant i felt amid the war of the elements. still onward we must advance. how much farther i could not tell. my companion's frequent shout cheered me. perhaps trusting to the aid of another made me more careless, for neglecting for an instant to keep my stick feeling the ground before me, i stumbled forward, and found myself floundering in a foaming stream. my cry prevented my companion from falling likewise. descending more cautiously he rushed into the flood after me, and seizing me by the jacket just as i was being borne down, assisted me to regain my feet, and helped me across, the water being scarcely up to our middles. in another instant i should have been carried helplessly down the stream beyond my depth. we struggled out, i scarcely know how, and pushed on. again, i took the lead. we were passing through a second grove of bread-fruit trees. another tall tree fell directly before me. i climbed over it. crash succeeded crash. i prayed for preservation from the fate which might any moment overtake me. i began to hope that we were approaching the station. still we were not out of the wood. i was working my way on when it occurred to me that my companion had not sung out to me for a longer time than usual. i called to him. there was no answer. eager as i was to push on, i could not desert him. i turned back. again and again i called. there was no answer. i reached a fallen tree. was it the one i had climbed over, or was it one which had fallen after i had passed? i felt along it. my foot struck against a soft substance. i stooped down. there lay a human form--quite still though--the hand i lifted fell powerless. my companion was dead. "one shall be taken and the other left." god in his good providence had thought fit to spare me. my companion was trusting wholly in christ's blood. i could not mourn him as one without hope. it was no time to delay. once again i was straining all my energies to find and follow the right way. it appeared to me that far more than double the time had passed which i had believed would suffice to reach the station. i almost ran against the gable end of a house the greater part of which was in ruins. i heard a loud moan. it was repeated. i hunted about till i came on a native crouching down and endeavouring to find shelter under part of the building yet standing. i asked him if he would guide me to the mission house. my voice roused him, and he said he would gladly do so. he sprang to his feet, and led me on by the hand. "here it is!" he exclaimed; but, alas, it was roofless and deserted. ------------------------------------------------------------------------ note . in the course of this volume the author, it will be observed, has transcribed much from the actual reports of missionaries, and from the journals of naval officers who have visited the south-seas. even in the connecting thread of narrative, and in descriptive scenes such as this of the storm, the writer has stated nothing for which he has not ample authority in published works. in a most interesting book, "gems from the coral islands," by the reverend william gill, volume two, chapter , an account is given of the fearful hurricane of , which devastated the island of raratonga. dr bourne, son of the reverend r bourne, one of the founders of the tahitian mission, the friend and associate of williams, thus writes concerning the illustrations which accompany our letterpress, proofs of which he had seen: "the engravings represent the tropical aspect of the vegetation with great correctness. many are not aware of the grandeur of the mountain scenery in some of the islands. dr darwin, who was with captain fitzroy's expedition, says of tahiti: `until i actually visited this island, and tried to penetrate its mountain fastnesses, i could never understand the statement made by ellis, in his "polynesian researches," that after the great battles of former times the defeated party took refuge in the mountains, where it was impossible to follow them.' mr darwin then describes the rugged ravines and forest-clad precipices, wilder than anything he had witnessed in the south american andes or cordilleras." raiatea, eimeo, and others in the society group, are composed of vast and abrupt mountain ranges, rising almost abruptly from the sea, and having very little habitable ground, but all covered with the densest vegetation. the most stupendous volcanoes in the world are those of the sandwich islands, compared with which etna and vesuvius are mere hillocks. chapter twenty one. the ruined village. for an instant the horror of finding the house in ruins, and being unable to discover my wife and the dear ones with her, almost overcame me. i should have sunk to the ground exhausted, had not the native supported me. "trust in jehovah, friend," he remarked, quietly. "he knows what is best for us all: your wife and our good missionary are in his hands." "how long have you been a christian?" i could not help asking. "two years," was the answer. "before that i was a gross idolater and cannibal; there was no wickedness i did not do. but, praised be the lord jesus christ, i was, through the teaching of the holy spirit, brought out of darkness into the light of his glorious truth." i felt rebuked, and grasping my staff once more, braced myself up to continue my search. the native accompanied me. "they may have escaped to the mountains," he observed. "we will go there. i can find the path even in the dark, and there is a cavern not far up, where they may have taken shelter. once, when we were devil's people, we dreaded to enter it, thinking it the abode of evil spirits; now that we are god's people, we know that god is everywhere, and have no fear." again i felt how the remark of this babe in christ, this late savage heathen, would rebuke many of those in our own dear england who, even in this professedly enlightened nineteenth century, yet tremble at the thoughts of ghosts, witches, and other similar phantoms of their foolish imaginations. it appeared to me that the hurricane was subsiding; but still our progress was slow and painful. it was, however, an advantage having a beaten path, though that in many places was cut up by the water, and in others, trees and roofs of cottages had been blown across it. i found that we were ascending,--higher and higher up the mountain we got. lofty rocks appeared on every side,--the lightning seemed to be more vivid,--the crash of the thunder, as it reverberated in rattling peals amid the cliffs, was even louder than before. i remembered my companion's remark, and felt no fear. "there is the cavern," he said, at length. i hurried in through a narrow opening, following closely at his heels. a light was shining at the farther end: it was from a fire, round which a number of persons were collected. on the opposite side, with the light shining full on his countenance, stood my brother john. a book was in his hand,--the book of books undoubtedly. his eyes were turned toward heaven: he was praying for the safety of all those exposed to the fury of the tempest. my own name was mentioned. i advanced, and knelt down by the side of my own mary. "god hears prayer," i whispered. "he has preserved me." she soon lay in my arms, weeping tears of joy. i now learned that no sooner had the signs of the coming tempest appeared than several of the principal natives came to the mission-house, and advised john to remove his family, with his books, and such articles as the water might spoil, to a place of safety, offering to assist him. of this kindness he gladly availed himself; but the journey was not performed without great danger and difficulty, as the tempest broke before they had proceeded far, and the wind and floods impeded their progress. mary suffered most, from her anxiety for me. now we praised god together joyfully for the preservation he had awarded us. it was daylight before we were able again to set forward to return to my brother's now desolate home. still we could rejoice, and be thankful that none of those most dear to us had been lost. we hoped that the poor natives might have escaped as well; but we had not descended far through the lower ground before we found one crushed by a fallen tree, and another drowned in a water-hole, into which he had apparently stumbled. the lightning had struck a third whose blackened corpse we found beneath a tall tree stripped of its branches. these were beyond human help. "grant that they died in the lord," observed the missionary, as we noted the spots where they lay, that we might send and bury them. the numbers wandering houseless and without food most claimed our sympathy. our worst apprehensions were realised. in the late neat and pretty village not a cottage retained its roof, and by far the greater number lay levelled with the ground, some mere heaps of ruin, while of others not a remnant was to be seen, the whole building having been carried off by the floods or wind. of the church only part of the walls remained standing; and even the heavier timbers of the roof lay scattered about in every direction. this destruction naturally deeply affected the missionary. "still i pray that the faith and trust of the people will not be found wanting under this trial," he murmured as we passed on. the school-houses were much in the same condition; but happily the printing-office, a strong stone building, had escaped any serious damage, as had its valuable contents. here not only was printing carried on, but the bibles and other books were stored, as were the machines for binding, a work performed very neatly by the natives. this circumstance again raised my brother's spirits: "while the book of god remains, we have nought to fear." it was sad to see the natives collecting from all points to which they had fled to escape the flood and storm, as they first caught sight of their ruined habitations. "the village must be rebuilt on christian principles," said my brother with a smile; and going among the people, he called them around him, and advised them to lose no time in collecting food and rebuilding their houses, urging those without young children or unmarried to assist those with families, or the sick and aged, before attending to their own wants. the reply was most satisfactory, and all agreed to follow his advice. we now repaired to the mission-house, and, clearing out the rubbish from within the angle formed by two walls, were soon able to obtain some shelter and privacy for the ladies and children. it was melancholy work hunting about for the furniture, crockery, and other articles, among the ruins. however, we obtained a sufficient number of things to furnish our make-shift abode, though it was long before we could get the bedding sufficiently dry to be of any use. the flour and many other articles of food, were spoilt, or had disappeared; but we raked up sufficient for the present wants of the household; and as we assembled round a table once more together, we returned our grateful thanks to heaven that we were still preserved to each other. among the ruins a chest of axes, and some saws, and other carpenters' tools was found, and these my brother distributed among the chiefs and other principal people, that they might the better be able to rebuild their abodes. when assembled to receive these valuable gifts, their answer was: "we accept them with thanks, on one condition,--that we may first be allowed to rebuild our missionary's abode." they would take no denial; and forthwith forming themselves into gangs, some set to work to clear away the ruins, while others went off to cut fresh uprights and rafters to replace those that were broken. it was gratifying, as being so purely spontaneous, and showing the high estimation in which they held their missionary for his work's sake. thus, aided by zealous friends, the work proceeded rapidly. i meantime hastened back to my vessel, taking with me some natives to aid in launching her. on our way we came unexpectedly on the spot where lay the body of my poor companion who had been crushed to death. we buried the remains not far off on the hill-side, while i offered some prayers and a short exhortation for the benefit of those present. as i went over the ground again i was more than ever surprised that i had been able to accomplish the journey on such a night, and deeply thankful that i had been preserved from the numberless dangers i had encountered. on reaching the _olive branch_, i found that my mate had been making most judicious preparations for getting her off. he had formed a strong cradle, with rollers under her keel and posts ahead, to which to secure some strong tackles. by hauling on these tackles he hoped to get her off several feet every day. "slow and steady wins the race, you know, sir," he observed. his hopes of success were not without foundation. day after day we toiled on, aided by the indefatigable natives, who gave every evidence that they were working from pure christian love. "you have brought us the blessings of the gospel,--ought not we, who highly estimate its blessings, labour to enable you in your ship to carry it to others?" said the chief of the party, when i was one day thanking him for the energetic way in which he and his people were working. their satisfaction when the _olive branch_ at length floated securely in the harbour was nearly equal to mine. little time as there was to spare before the meeting would take place, at which my brother wished to be present, he was anxious to see the people housed before he would leave them. they meantime were working most heroically, and i was surprised to see the rapid way in which they put up their houses, and set to work to replant the fields of taro and other roots, which had been destroyed by the flood. at length we were ready to continue our voyage. it had been intended that our wives should accompany us; but as, in consequence of the delay, john's absence would be shorter than had been expected, it was thought better that they should remain and restore order to the establishment. as we were about to go the chief men of the island sent to beg that we would receive certain gifts which they had stored up to increase the funds devoted to sending missionaries to the other islands of the pacific yet lying in heathen darkness. "had it not been for the storm, they would have been far greater," they observed; "but, though we are feeling a want just now of this world's goods, we are rich in gospel blessings; nor can we make our present condition an excuse for denying those blessed privileges to brethren in other lands, for whom our lord died as well as for us." surely, i thought, these remarks, were they known at home, would put to shame too many who are ready to make any slight decrease of income an excuse for not assisting the cause of the gospel either among the ignorant around them or in other countries. since i went among these so late heathen savages, i have often had to think with grief and shame of the very low standard of christian excellence considered requisite by many at home who profess, and probably have a wish, to be religious. often and often i have wished that i could paint to them in their true and vivid colours the self-denying, laborious lives of the devoted missionaries, and the humble, zealous, faithful, truth-searching behaviour of the converts. with a fair wind we sailed, praying that god would protect our dear ones, and bring us back to them in safety. we took up several missionaries who were going to the conference, and who had been waiting for the _olive branch_, and also some native teachers, who were destined to act as pioneers in islands where the light of the gospel had not yet penetrated. without any adventure especially worthy of notice we reached the head station, where a considerable number of missionaries were collected awaiting our arrival. all had more or less felt the storm at their respective stations, but few with the violence that we had. the discussions which took place at the meeting were most important and interesting, and encouraging to all to persevere in the work; but i must not now report them. although only in a certain sense a looker-on, i felt greatly refreshed, and my spiritual life renewed by the exhortations delivered and the prayers engaged in. i had the privilege of attending all the meetings. several had taken place, when the subject of the new stations to be occupied was brought forward. john was named to fill one of them. the inhabitants were looked upon as among the fiercest of the savages of the pacific; the climate was far from salubrious. but john did not hesitate a moment; on the contrary, his countenance was radiant with satisfaction. it was an important post, and it was believed that a large accession might be made to the kingdom of christ by the establishment of a mission there. "wherever my overseer and brethren consider our holy cause can most be advantaged by my presence, there i am ready to go," answered my brother, after the offer had been made him. the ground had already been broken by native teachers, who had earnestly petitioned for an english missionary. our passage to my brother's station was somewhat circuitous, as we had to leave several missionaries at their posts, to carry stores and books to old stations, and to leave native teachers at new ones. we had brought with us the missionary who was to succeed john, whom i was directed to carry on to his new station. we were received on our return to my brother's home with unmistakable signs of pleasure by the natives, who collected to welcome him. i expected, however, that when he came to announce to his wife the proposed change, that it would be a sad damper to her happiness; but she simply observed: "wherever you are called to go, dear husband, it will be my joy to go also. how much better am i off than the wife of a soldier serving in the army of some earthly monarch. she may not accompany him to the war; if he falls wounded, she may not be near to tend him; if he is slain, no reward is of value to him. where, too, is her assurance that they will be reunited? where my husband goes i may go,--if he is ill, i may watch over him,--if spirits and strength fail, i may support him. when death separates us, i know that we shall be reunited; and i know, too, that a glorious crown, the prize of his high calling, will assuredly be his, and that that crown i shall share with him, and full draughts of joy unspeakable for ever and ever." these words were spoken in so low and gentle a voice by my dear sister-in-law, that a stranger would scarcely have understood the firm faith and high resolve they indicated. the packing up occupied but little time. john's household goods were few, nor did his library fill many boxes. "but you will sell your cattle and poultry?" i observed. "i do not consider them mine," he answered. "i look upon them as belonging to the society, and as necessary to my successor. a missionary should have as few worldly incumbrances as possible to draw him away from his work. he should labour solely for the lord, and to the lord leave the care of his wife and little ones. a missionary sent out by a society should feel secure that they would provide for his worldly wants while he can work, would support him in his old age, and care at his death for his widow and children." thus with perfect faith my noble brother went forth in the gospel's glorious cause to conquer souls for christ's kingdom. the grief of the people among whom he had ministered since his arrival in the pacific, when they heard that he was to leave them, was excessive. at first they threatened to put a restraint upon him, and not to let him go. "would you then selfishly deprive others of the blessings you enjoy?" he asked. "would you, who know the gospel, keep back the instrument which brought it to you from presenting it to others? no, no; surely you, dear friends, have not thus learned christ." "go, go; our prayers will ever be lifted up for your safety and success." chapter twenty two. martyred for the truth. scarcely a native in the settlement who was not present to bid farewell to their beloved missionary, and amid tears and prayers, he embarked on board the _olive branch_. my wife accompanied me, and though the little vessel was much crowded, we had a very happy party. the weather was fine, and as we had numerous places to touch at, we were not more than twelve days without obtaining fresh provisions. formerly, when the islands of the pacific were little known, crews starving or suffering from scurvy must often have passed just out of sight of land, where they might have obtained an ample supply of fresh provisions; but now, very much through the instrumentality of the missionaries of the gospel, scarcely an island remains unknown, and entirely through their instrumentality the greater number may now be visited, not only without fear, but the voyager is certain to receive a christian welcome on their shores. an instance came under my notice where the natives did not only return good for good, but good for evil. the master and crew of a large english ship had grossly misbehaved themselves and ill-treated the people of an island. scarcely had they sailed when a gale sprung up, and their ship was driven on shore and lost. the cargo and other property in the ship was taken possession of by the natives, who considered that they had a right to it. on the captain, however, claiming it through the missionary, the chiefs met and decided that it should be given up, which it was forthwith without a word of complaint. here the brown christian set an example to the white man, virtually a heathen. the new post to which my brother was appointed was on a lovely island, fertile in the extreme, and thickly populated. indeed it might have been said of it, "that only man was vile." no natives appeared on the shore to welcome him, but after a time the teachers came off in their canoe, and gave us accounts which were far from cheering. chiefs who had appeared friendly had turned against them, and some had prohibited their people from listening to the word of god, or attending school or chapel. i suggested to my brother that under the circumstances it might be wiser not to land. "what, because the enemy begins the fight shall the soldier desert his standard?" he asked, with a look of surprise. "no, david, you would not counsel such conduct." i could say nothing. the teachers were of opinion that he would be treated with indifference rather than actual hostility, at first, by the great mass of the people, and that his life at all events would be perfectly safe. they mentioned one chief who appeared to be more friendly disposed towards christianity than the rest, and to him accordingly, we at once went to pay our court. the chief looked like a perfect savage, with his hair long and frizzed out, his eyes rolling wildly, and with scarcely any clothing on his dusky body. still he received us politely, and not without a certain dignity, and promised if the missionary now remained he would be answerable to me for him, should i again visit the island. the man was still a heathen, and i felt very unwilling to put any confidence in his promises. it was too evident to me that he wished for a missionary for the sake of axes and saws, and other articles he expected to obtain, rather than for any spiritual benefit he hoped to derive from his presence. i had, however, no alternative, than to land my dear brother with his wife and little ones, and household goods. my only consolation was that i was able with my crew to assist in putting up a house for him, many of the parts of which we had brought with us. the teachers were good carpenters, and had already, with the aid of some natives whom they had instructed, prepared some stout uprights and beams and planks. notwithstanding this, the rapidity with which we got up the house, dug up a garden and fenced it round, caused great astonishment among the people. before we left, my brother had already begun a school-room, to serve also as a chapel till a larger edifice could be erected, while he received inquirers at his own house. my sister-in-law had also two female classes of adults and children, to whom she imparted such religious instruction as they would receive, and some of the arts of civilised life, while round the station resembled a busy hive, all the natives who had professed christianity being actively employed as sawyers or in some other mechanical work. his aim at this early stage of the mission was to show the natives the advantages the christians possessed over the heathens, and thus to make them look with favour on christianity. he never failed while they were thus engaged to impart so much religious instruction as they could receive. everything appeared now to be going on favourably. when i remarked that i now had reasonable hopes that he would succeed-- "who can doubt it?" was his answer. "if i do not my successor will. the gospel will most assuredly cover the earth as the waters cover the sea. god has said it." one of the saddest moments of my life was that when i parted from my devoted brother as he stood on the beach while i returned for the last time to my vessel. yet i asked myself more than once, why should i grieve? why should i be anxious? he is engaged in the noblest cause in which the energies of a human being can be employed--gaining subjects for the redeemer's kingdom. still i was his brother, and as such i could not contemplate without fear the dangers to which he was exposed. i was now to return direct to mr bent's station, where i proposed refitting the _olive branch_ to be ready for any work she might be called on to perform. we found that great progress had been made at the station, both spiritual and material. there were many new converts, and several excellent little houses built, surrounded by neat gardens and fields. it had not been done without cost, and it was too evident to mary and me that her father's health and strength were failing. she spoke to him, and suggested a change of scene. "here i have been planted by the lord of the vineyard, and here let me, if he so wills it, wither and fall, dear one," he answered. it was too evident to us that his body was withering, but not so his spirit--that was expanding more and more, ripening for heaven. it seemed to burn with a deep and unextinguishable love for the conversion of all the islanders among whom he had so long laboured--not those of his own group only, but for the inhabitants of all the isles of the pacific, "ay," he would finish, as if there had been a shortcoming of his love for the souls of his fellow-men, "of the whole heathen world. may they all come to know thee, o lord, and accept thy great salvation." still his more constant prayers were for his own people. gradually he sunk--evidently entering into the rest prepared for those who love christ--his joy increased, his end was peace. thus has many a missionary died, and who would not change all the world can give to be assured of such a death. mary felt her father's death severely, but yet as one who mourned with assured hope of a joyous resurrection. my brother had earnestly petitioned to have another missionary or a native teacher of superior attainments sent him, and while i was debating what course to pursue, i received directions to carry the teacher vihala and his wife to him, and to visit many other stations on my way. vihala and alea were delighted to see us again, but when they heard of mr bent's death they shed tears of unfeigned sorrow at the thought that they should see his face no more. they both had advanced greatly in christian knowledge, and vihala appeared to me equal to the taking entire charge of a station, however large. he was delighted to hear that he was to join my brother, and made all his preparations with alacrity. as i was preparing to sail, a ship hove in sight. she was from england direct, and brought letters for me and john. i opened mine with trembling hands. all were well at home; but they contained news and of importance too. a distant relative had died and left a considerable fortune to my father's second son, but in the case of his death it was to belong to the next, and so on. it could only descend to the children of the brother who had possessed it for five years. thus john was to be the first possessor. it at once occurred to me, would it prove a snare to him? would it induce him to abandon his high and holy calling? would the man of property be unwilling to remain the humble missionary? still i thought i knew what john would do. i felt that i was wronging him by having any doubts on the subject. the delay was providential, for a gale sprung up as we were weighing anchor, and again dropping it, we remained safely in port till the storm had subsided. we had several places to call at, and baffling winds still more prolonged our voyage. at last we anchored in the beautiful bay opposite my brother's station. i looked out anxiously expecting him to come off to us. i was then about to land with mary, thinking to take him and his family by surprise, when a canoe appeared with one of the native teachers on board. his first words were, "i am the only one left alive." my heart sunk within me. i put mary again on board and went on shore. on the way the teacher told me the sad tale. at first the natives in the district had been friendly, but instigated by the heathen chiefs, they had, after a time, refused provisions or assistance. even some who had professed christianity were afraid to come openly to receive instruction. a little band was faithful, and many came at night to hear the word of god, and brought food, or the mission family might have been starved. still my brother persevered, and not without effect. fresh converts were made. children were allowed to come to the girls' school, and when it was discovered what useful arts they learned there in addition to reading and writing, even some chiefs became desirous of sending their daughters for instruction. this unexpected progress, made, in spite of opposition, by the missionaries, exasperated the heathen chiefs still further, and a plot was formed to cut off all the christian teachers. their safety was, however, watched over by their converts, and all attempts defeated. treachery was next attempted, and one of the most savage of the heathen chiefs pretended to be desirous of hearing the truth. he sent to my brother, begging him to come to him. he was urged not to go. "what, and run the risk of allowing a soul to be left in satan's power which may be rescued!" was his answer. he went, accompanied by a teacher and two christian natives. they were unarmed. day after day passed, and no tidings came of them. at last the bodies of all four were found. they had been barbarously murdered; but whether or not they had reached the old chiefs residence could not be ascertained. he sent a message expressing his regret that the missionary had not come to him. my sister-in-law was supported in a way the holy spirit can alone support a person in distress. her longing desire was to meet him in heaven, and to prepare their two boys to follow in his footsteps. notwithstanding all that had occurred, vihala undauntedly resolved to remain. "if i fall, it is in god's cause, and to advance his glory," was his only remark. having done all i could, with a heavy heart i quitted the station with my sister-in-law and her children, and returned to head-quarters, where i had the satisfaction of presenting the _olive branch_ for the service of the mission. i persuaded my sister-in-law to accompany mary and me to england, where i have devoted a certain portion of the fortune of which i so painfully became possessed to her support and the education of her children, and at mary's urgent request, another, what the world would consider a no inconsiderable portion, to the support of missions. we live in a humble way, but are far more happy than we should be did we spend our wealth on ourselves. our nephews, too, are amply rewarding us, and will, i trust, prove efficient soldiers in that glorious army which goes forth under the banner of the cross to fight against idolatry, ignorance, vice, and all the foes satan can array against the truth as it is in christ jesus. the end. the cruise of the dainty, rovings in the pacific, by william h g kingston. ________________________________________________________________________ another book of great adventure, this time in the pacific, where, at the time, many of the islanders were, with good reason, ill-disposed towards europeans, having been tricked so often in various unpleasant ways, even to the point where they would be invited on board to do some bartering, only to be battened below hatches, and then sailed off to peru to be used as slaves. our adventurers encounter hostility in places, but on the whole their worst enemies are the weather, and also ill-intentioned crews of vessels such as those described above. a short book, but a good read or listen, and you'll enjoy it. ________________________________________________________________________ the cruise of the dainty, rovings in the pacific, by william h g kingston. chapter one. "never was bothered with a more thorough calm!" exclaimed my brother harry, not for the first time that morning, as he and i, in spite of the sweltering heat, paced the deck of our tight little schooner the _dainty_, then floating motionless on the smooth bosom of the broad pacific. the empty sails hung idly from the yards. the dog-vanes imitated their example. not the tiniest wavelet disturbed the shining surface of the ocean, not a cloud dimmed the intense blue of the sky, from which the sun glared forth with a power that made the pitch in the seams of the deck bubble up and stick to the soles of our feet, and though it might have failed to cook a beefsteak in a satisfactory manner, was rapidly drying some strings of fish hung up in the rigging. the white men of the crew were gathered forward, in such shade as they could find, employed under the superintendence of tom platt, our mate, in manufacturing mats, sinnet, rope yarns, or in knotting and splicing; the dark-skinned natives, of whom we had several on board similarly engaged, were mostly on the other side of the deck, apparently indifferent as to whether they were in the shade or sunshine. even my brother, the commander of the _dainty_, was too impatient to think much about the broiling we were undergoing, as we walked from the taffrail to a short distance before the mainmast, where we invariably turned to face back again; while during the intervals in our conversation, from an old habit, he whistled vehemently for a breeze, not that in consequence he really expected it to come. as we walked with our faces forward i was amused by watching old tom, who, marline-spike in hand, was stropping a block, now inspecting the work of one man, now that of another, and then giving his attention to a lad, seated on the spars stowed under the long-boat, engaged in splicing an eye to the end of a rope. "is this all right, mr platt?" asked the lad, handing the rope to the mate, who, squirting a mouthful of tobacco juice over the bulwarks, turned it round and round to examine it critically. "ay, t'will do, dick--wants scraping a bit; let's see how you'll serve it," answered old tom, giving back the rope. after taking a few more turns my brother stopped. "do you think, platt, that, we shall be long delayed by this provoking calm?" he asked. "can't say, cap'en. known such to last for the better part of a week in these latitudes," answered the mate, coming a few steps aft. "maybe, though, we'll get a breeze to-morrow, maybe not." "we are not likely to get it yet, at all events, from the look of the sky," said harry. "we'll rig the awning and persuade mary and fanny to come on deck. they'll be better here than in the close cabin." just as he spoke nat amiel, his young brother-in-law, appeared at the companion-hatch. "wanted to see if you were asleep, as we have been below all the morning," he exclaimed. "well, i declare, it is hot, though it's baking enough in the cabin to satisfy a salamander." "we'll soon have some more shade, and then ask the ladies to come on deck and enjoy it," i answered. "in the meantime hand up a couple of the folding-chairs, and i'll place some gratings for them to put their feet on." nat dived into the cabin, and the mate calling the men aft we quickly had an awning rigged to cover the after-part of the deck. harry then went below to bring up his wife and her sister. they were by this time pretty well accustomed to a sea life, as three weeks had passed since we left brisbane in queensland. my brother harry, who had been a lieutenant in the navy, had about four years before come out to settle in the colony, being engaged at the time to miss mary amiel, the eldest daughter of an english clergyman. agricultural pursuits had not been much to his taste, and he had therefore settled himself in brisbane for the purpose of carrying on a mercantile business. he had made a very fair commencement, and had returned about a year before the time i am speaking of to marry his intended. on his arrival he found that mr amiel had died, and that his family, consisting of another daughter and a son, were left in very poor circumstances. prompted by his generous feelings, he at once invited fanny and nat to return with him and his bride to the colony. this they gladly agreed to do, and the whole party forthwith took a passage on board an emigrant ship, which after a prosperous voyage reached the colony. i had from my earliest days wished to go to sea, and my mother having consented, as i could not obtain a nomination for the _britannia_, i got a berth as a midshipman on board a trader bound for china. i was unfortunate in my ship and my captain. this gave me a dislike not so much to the sea as to the merchant service, and on my return from my first voyage, finding that my brother, to whom i was much attached, had gone back to queensland, i got leave from my mother, after representing to her the sort of life i had been leading, to go and join him, she being certain that he would be very glad to receive me. as i had made the best use of my opportunities of becoming a seaman during my first voyage, i had no difficulty in obtaining a berth on board a ship bound to queensland, called the _eclipse_, commanded by captain archer, and i was thus able to work my passage out free of expense. on this occasion also i made good use of my time, by adding considerably to my knowledge of seamanship, and by studying navigation. though i was before the mast, as i had my own sextant and books the officers allowed me to take observations with them and to keep the ship's reckoning, i had thus a right, with the experience i had had, to consider myself a fair seaman. the _eclipse_ had been four days at sea, when the third mate summoned me to accompany him into the forehold to get up some casks of provisions. while searching for those he wanted, i heard a sound as if some one was gasping for breath, and then a low moan. i told the mate. "what can that be, sir?" i asked. "it comes from forward." "take the lantern, and see if there is any one there," he answered. i made my way to the spot whence i fancied the sounds proceeded, and lowering my lantern into a small hole, i saw the figure of a boy crouching down, with his head resting against a cask. he made no movement, and his eyes appeared to be closed. "there's some one here, sir," i cried out. "he seems to be very far gone." the mate quickly joined me. "a young stowaway!" he exclaimed. "we must have him on deck at once, or it will be beyond the doctor's skill to bring him round. i have known more than one lad lose his life in this way; and i shall get blamed for not having examined the hold before we left port." saying this he lifted the lad in his arms while i held the lantern, and forthwith carried him on deck. the low groans the boy uttered showed us that he was still alive, but he was pale as death and in a wretched condition. he was dressed like a respectable lad, but his face and clothes were covered with dirt. "the captain will be in a great taking when he finds this out," said the mate; "still more so if the young fellow dies. go aft, ned, and call the doctor; maybe he'll be able to bring him round." i hurried aft, and soon found the surgeon, who was in his dispensary. when i told him what he was wanted for, he at once, bringing some medicine with him, hurried forward. "this will do him good," he said, pouring some liquid down the lad's throat. "i don't think, mr simmons, that you need be anxious about him." the young stowaway almost immediately opened his eyes and stared about him. the doctor then ordered the cook to get some broth ready, while two of the women passengers brought some warm water and washed the poor lad's face and hands. the broth, which he eagerly swallowed, revived him still more, and the doctor considered that he had sufficiently recovered to be conveyed to the sick bay, the women offering to stay by his side and to give him medicine and food as he might require them. "if he is carefully tended he may come round," said the doctor; "but had he remained another hour in the hold i feel pretty sure that he would have lost his life." having been the means of discovering the young stowaway, i felt a certain amount of interest in him, and, whenever i could, went in to see how he was getting on. the next day he had so far recovered as to be able to speak without difficulty. he told me that his name was richard tilston, though he was generally called dick by his friends; that he had had a great longing for going to sea; and that, as his father would not let him, he had run off from school, and found his way down to the docks. hearing that our ship was to haul out into the stream early the next day, he waited until late in the evening, when he stole on board, and had, without being discovered, got down into the hold. he had brought a bottle of water and some biscuits, together with a couple of sausages. supposing that the ship would at once put to sea, he had not placed himself on an allowance, and in less than three days had exhausted all his provisions and water. as the sea was smooth he fancied that we were still in the river, and was therefore afraid to creep out, until he became too ill and weak to do so. from the tone of his voice and the way he expressed himself i suspected that he was a young gentleman, but i did not like to ask questions, and waited to hear what account he would give of himself. he was, however, too ill to say much, and was in a great fright at hearing that the captain would be very angry with him for having stowed himself away. i tried to reassure him by saying i did not believe that the captain was as yet made acquainted with his being on board, and, as far as i could judge, he was a good-natured man, and would probably not say much to him. in spite of all the doctor's care and the nursing he received from the two kind women who had taken him in charge, it was considerably more than a week before he was able to get up and move about the deck. when his clothes had been cleaned and he himself had been well washed, he looked a very respectable lad. at last, one day, captain archer saw him, and inquired who he was. the third mate had to confess all about the matter, and the captain then sent for dick, and in an angry tone asked what had induced him to come on board. "i wanted to go to sea, sir, and didn't know any other way of managing it," answered dick. "you took a very bad way, and nearly lost your life in carrying out your foolish notion," said the captain. "you have been pretty severely punished by what you have gone through, or i should have given you a sound flogging; as it is, i intend to let you off, but you will understand you must make yourself useful on board and try to pay for your passage; i can have no idlers, remember, and you will get thrashed if you do not work. i will speak to the mates about you, and they'll see that you have something to do." poor dick, looking very much ashamed of himself, returned forward. the mates took care that he should have something to do, and the men also, for dick was at everybody's beck and call, and had to do all sorts of dirty and disagreeable work. when there was no other work for him he was employed by the cook to sweep out the caboose and clean the pots and pans. he now and then got his back up, when he received a rope's-ending for his pains. i did the best i could for him, but often could not save him from ill-treatment, and at last, in the bitterness of his soul, he complained that he was leading a regular dog's life, and that he heartily wished he had not come to sea. "i won't stand it any longer," he exclaimed. "i'll jump overboard and drown myself." "don't even talk of doing so wicked and foolish a thing," i said. "you wished to become a sailor, now that you have the opportunity of learning your duty you do nothing but grumble and complain. you must take the rough and the smooth together. i wasn't over well off on my first voyage, though my mother had paid a premium to the owners and i was on the quarterdeck, but i saw while i remained on board that there was no use complaining, so i took things as they were, and by keeping my eyes open and my wits awake became in a short time a fair seaman." poor dick said that he would try to follow my advice, but he, notwithstanding, would answer when spoken to, and consequently i was unable to save him from ill-treatment, as he had brought it down upon himself. during a heavy gale we encountered, when near the latitude of the cape, one of the so-called midshipmen fell overboard and was drowned. the captain knowing that i could take an observation, and hearing that i was able to keep accounts and would be useful to him, invited me to take the poor fellow's berth. this, though it gave me a good deal of work, i was very glad to do, and i thus saw much less than before of dick. as i was well treated i soon regained my old affection for a sea life, and had half determined to return home in the ship should my brother not especially press me to remain. when, however, we arrived at brisbane, and harry told me of his contemplated trip, and that he should be very glad of my assistance, i kept to my former intention of remaining with him. i therefore wished captain archer and his ship, the _eclipse_, good-bye, and took up my quarters with harry and his family. i liked mary and her sister, whom i had not before seen, very much, and i was glad that harry had not taken them into the bush, for they did not appear at all suited to the rough style of life they would have had to lead there, for they were both very pretty and elegant, and had never been accustomed to hard work, though they now did their best to make themselves useful in the house, and were never idle. their brother, nat, was a capital little fellow--as merry as a cricket and never out of temper, even when his face and hands were bitten all over by mosquitoes, or when the pugnacious insects were buzzing round us in thousands, and that is a trial to the sweetest of tempers. we used to have music and reading in the evenings, and very pleasant evenings they were--indeed, we lived much as we should have done in the old country. altogether, i congratulated myself that i had decided on stopping out. my brother was, however, somewhat anxious about the state of business. "you see, ned, there is not, i fear, much to be done at present," he said. "i have, therefore, thought of making the trip i spoke to you about. a number of vessels sail from sydney and other places to collect cargoes of palm-oil and sandal-wood, and some few go in search of pearls. they do not all trade honestly with the natives, and several have suffered in consequence, their crews having been attacked and murdered; but i hope, by trading honestly and by being always on my guard against surprise, to make a profitable venture. i have an especial reason for wishing to sail at once, as the day before your arrival i received information from an old shipmate of mine, tom platt, of the existence of a small group of islands, among which pearls of large size are obtained by the natives in unusual abundance. tom, who has been out in these seas for some years on board whalers and other craft, sailed a few months ago in a small schooner, the _zebra_, from sydney. both master and crew were rough, lawless fellows, and tom told me that he often wished himself clear of them, but they touched at no place where he could venture to land till they reached the islands i speak of. here the master, for his own purposes, at first behaved better to the natives than he was accustomed to do, as he wanted to obtain some pigs, cocoanuts, and other provisions. they consequently, without hesitation, came on board in considerable numbers. many of them were observed to wear necklaces of white beads, which the captain supposed to be made of glass, and to have been obtained from some previous trader. on examining, however, one of the strings of beads, what was his surprise to find that they were pearls! being a cunning fellow, he kept his discovery to himself till he had obtained all he could induce the natives to part with, when, though he fancied that he had made his fortune, he formed the design of kidnapping as many people as his schooner would hold, as an effectual way of preventing other traders from having any friendly intercourse with the islanders and discovering his secret, and thereby spoiling his market. tom platt was the only person among the crew who suspected what the white beads really were, and he managed, unknown to the captain, to obtain a necklace, which he hid in his pocket. the very evening before the natives were to have been seized a heavy gale sprang up, and the schooner was driven out to sea. before many days had gone by she was cast away on an uninhabited island, when all hands, with the exception of tom platt, were lost. he supported existence on shell-fish and a few birds he knocked down, while a small cask of water washed ashore saved him from dying of thirst. just as it was exhausted, he was taken off by a vessel bound for this place. i met him, looking very ill and wretched, wandering about the street the very day he landed. we recognised each other, and i took him to my house, where he became so much worse that, had it not been for the careful way he was nursed, i believe he would have died. he seemed to think so himself, and was very grateful. while i was sitting with him one day, having a yarn of old times, he gave me an account of the pearl islands, and assured me that he could find them again, having carefully noted the distance the schooner had run to the reef on which she was wrecked, as also its position on the chart. he then showed me the necklace, of which he had not spoken to any one. his narrative first put our proposed venture into my head. when i told him of my idea he at once agreed to accompanying me, saying that he should be content with any wages i could afford to give him. though a first-rate seaman, he cannot be much of a navigator, so that had you, ned, not come out i should have been obliged to get another mate; and now that you have come, we will forthwith commence our preparations." "the first thing to be done is to find a suitable craft," i said. "i have had my eye on one--a schooner, the _dainty_, of a hundred and twenty tons, built for a fruit-trader, which was brought out here from england by a settler only a month ago," he answered. "then let us go at once and have a look at her, and, if she is in good condition, secure her," i exclaimed; for, after the account harry had given me, i had become very eager to undertake the expedition. we started forthwith. the _dainty_ was even more suited for our object than we had expected. she had well fitted up cabins, like those of a yacht, with a hold large enough for all the cargo and stores we might wish to stow--was well-found and in capital condition; so harry at once made an offer for her, which being accepted, the _dainty_ became his. in the evening harry said what he had done. "you do not intend to leave me behind, i hope," exclaimed mary. "or me either," cried miss fanny amiel. "what should we poor girls do all alone by ourselves in this little bakehouse?" "you must let me go as cabin-boy," said nat. "i'll make myself tremendously useful." "i'll talk it over with mary," answered harry, who looked not at all ill pleased at the thoughts of having his wife to accompany him of her own free will. the result of the talk was that the next morning it was settled that we were all to go, the house and business being left in charge of a trustworthy old clerk, mr simon humby, who had accompanied harry when he came out the first time from england. we were very busy for the next few days in making preparations for the voyage--the ladies in the house assisted by nat, and harry, and i in refitting the schooner--purchasing provisions, stores, and articles for bartering with the natives. we procured also four small brass guns, with some muskets, pistols, boarding-pikes, and cutlasses. "we shall not, i hope, have to use them," said harry. "but, now especially that we are to have ladies on board, we must be well prepared for defence should we be attacked." it was easy enough to prepare the vessel for sea, but harry expected to find some difficulty in securing an efficient crew. he of course at once applied to tom platt. "i'll see about that, sir," he answered. "you mustn't be too particular as to what sort of chaps they may be, provided they are good seamen--for as to their characters, i'm not likely to be able to say much." "pick up the best you can find," said harry. "they'll probably behave well enough, if kept under strict discipline." tom was as good as his word. in the course of a few days he had engaged ten hands--a strong crew for a vessel of the _dainty's_ size--six englishmen, a new zealander, a sandwich islander, and two blacks, natives of tanna, an island of the new hebrides group. tom confessed that he had more confidence in the probable good conduct of the pacific islanders than he had in that of the white men, who, however, when they came on board, looked more decent fellows than i had expected. just as the schooner was ready for sea, harry and i were one evening leaving the quay, when i saw a lad in ragged clothes, who, on catching sight of me, tried to hide himself behind a stack of planks lately landed. in spite of his forlorn and dirty condition, i recognised him as the young stowaway who had come out with me on board the _eclipse_. "hillo, dick tilston, can that be you?" i exclaimed. "come here. what have you been about?" on being called, he approached, looking very sheepish. "now, don't be scolding at me," he said, taking my hand, which i held out to him. "you know how i was treated aboard the _eclipse_. i couldn't stand it any longer, so when she was about to sail i slipped ashore, and hid away till she had gone. i've since been knocking about, unable to get any work, for no one will engage me without a character, as they guess that i'm a runaway, and take me for a young thief. i've sold my clothes and everything i had for food, and have got only these rags to cover me." i knew that what dick said was true. i asked him if he still wished to be a sailor, or would rather go up the country and seek for employment, which i was sure he would be able to obtain with my brother's recommendation. "i would rather be a sailor than anything else, if i could serve under a good captain," he answered. "well, then, stop a moment, and i'll speak to my brother," i said; and i ran after harry. i told him in a few words about dick. "well, he may come with us," he said. "but he must try to make himself useful, and not fancy that he is a young gentleman to do what he likes." i ran back to dick. the poor fellow was delighted, and burst into tears. "i own, ned, i've had nothing to eat all day in this land of plenty, for i could not bring myself to beg, and nobody offered me anything," he exclaimed, scarcely able for shame to get out his words. i fortunately had a shilling in my pocket. "here, dick, go and get something to eat," i said, giving it to him. i thought that he would rather have some food first, before he came to talk with harry. "then come up to my brother's house--you can easily find it--and i will speak to him in the meantime." dick promised to come. while we walked home i told my brother more about dick. "it is very clear that the first thing we must do for him is to give him an outfit, or he'll not be presentable on board, and then i hope, from gratitude, that he will behave well," he observed. on our way we stopped at an outfitter's, and harry gave an order to the storekeeper to supply whatever i might select for dick. as we walked on, he told me what things he wished me to get. soon after we reached home dick presented himself at the door, looking somewhat brighter than he did when i first saw him, but rather ashamed of himself and unwilling to come in. harry, however, came and had a few words with him, and seemed satisfied that he might be made useful on board the schooner. as we had no place to put him up in the house, he told me to get a lodging for him for the night, and to see that he had plenty of food. "i say, ned," he added, "just give him a hint to take a bath and get his hair cut before he puts on his clean clothes." accordingly, telling dick to come with me, i took him to the outfitter's. we soon got the necessary clothing for him, and then left him at a lodging with a person who knew my brother. that evening was to be the last on shore for many a long day. mary and her sister were in high spirits at the thoughts of their trip, for which they had got everything ready. the next morning dick presented himself so changed for the better in appearance, that harry scarcely knew him. he looked a fine, intelligent sailor lad, and at once began to make himself useful in carrying down our things to the boat: most of our heavier luggage had been sent on board the previous evening. mr humby came off in a shore boat. while our own boat was being hoisted in, my brother gave his last directions. "i'll do my best, mr harry, and i pray that you may have a successful voyage, and when you return find all things going on well," he said, as he shook hands with us all. the anchor was then hove up, and sail being made, we stood out of the harbour, while mr humby returned on shore, waving his last adieus. the first part of our voyage was uneventful. we had fine weather, a fair wind, and a smooth sea, and the ladies soon got accustomed to their life on board, declaring that it was even more pleasant than they had expected, though they should like occasionally to get sight of some of the beautiful islands of the pacific, of which they had so often heard. we left new caledonia and the loyalty islands on our port side, then steered to the north between the new hebrides and the fiji islands, at neither of which my brother wished to touch. day after day we sailed on without sighting land, and at last emily exclaimed, "what has become of the islands we have heard so much about? i thought we should not pass a day without seeing several of them. they appear on the chart to be very close together, like the constellations in the sky." "but if you will measure off on the chart the distances they are apart, you will easily understand how it is we have sailed so far without seeing them," said harry. the very next day, as fanny was looking over the starboard side, harry pointed out to her several blue hillocks rising out of the ocean, which he told her were the northern islands of fiji, the habitation of a dark-skinned race, once the most notorious cannibals in the pacific. "i am very glad to keep away from them, then," answered fanny, "for i shouldn't at all like to run the risk of being captured and eaten." "not much chance of that," said harry. "the larger number of them have given up their bad habits, and promise to become as civilised as any of the people in these seas." "still, i would rather not go near their shores," said fanny. she little thought at the time that there were many other islands in every direction, the inhabitants of which were quite as savage as those of fiji had been. from the first, tom platt had taken a fancy to dick, who had hitherto behaved himself remarkably well. "we'll make a seaman of the lad, if he only sticks to it," he said to me. "the rope's-endings, as he tells me he used to get aboard the _eclipse_, did him a world of good, though he didn't think so." i always treated dick in a friendly way, though he was before the mast, and i was glad to find that he did not presume on this, but willingly did whatever he was ordered. tom had had a hammock slung for dick near his berth away from the men, whose conversation, he said, was not likely to do him any good. our life on board was very regular; tom and i kept watch and watch, the crew being divided between us, while harry, as captain, was on deck at all hours whenever he thought it necessary. chapter two. the calm which i described at the commencement of my narrative had continued for many hours, and when the sun sank beneath the horizon there was not the slightest sign of a coming breeze. it was my first watch, and before harry went below he charged me to keep a careful look-out, and to call him should there be any sign of a change of weather. the schooner still floated motionless on the water; scarcely a sound was heard, except the cheeping of the main boom, and the low voices of the men forward, as they passed the watch spinning their oft-told yarns to each other. i slowly paced the deck, enjoying the comparative coolness of the night, after the intense heat of the day. the stars in the southern hemisphere were shining brilliantly overhead, reflected in the mirror-like ocean. the watch at length were silent, and had apparently dropped off to sleep, though i could see the figure of the man on the look-out as he paced up and down or leaned over the bulwarks. suddenly, the stillness was broken by a dull splash. i started; it seemed to me as if some one had fallen overboard, but it was only one of the monsters of the deep poking its snout for an instant above the surface, and when i looked over the side it had disappeared. occasionally i heard similar sounds at various distances. i had some difficulty in keeping myself awake, though by continuing my walk i was able to do so; but i was not sorry when the old mate turned out, without being called, to relieve me. "we have not got a breeze yet," i observed as he came on deck. "no, master ned, and we shan't get one during my watch either; and maybe not when the sun is up again," he answered. tom was right. when i came on deck the next morning the sea was as calm as before. though it appeared impossible that we could have moved our position, i was greatly surprised, on looking away to the westward, to see what i at first took to be the masts of a vessel rising above the horizon. i pointed them out to my brother who had just come on deck. he told me to go aloft with a telescope and examine them more minutely. i then discovered that they were trees growing on a small island, apparently cocoanuts, or palms of some sort. beyond, to the south and west, were several islands of greater elevation, some blue and indistinct, but others appeared to be covered with trees like the nearer one, while between us and them extended from north to south a line of white surf distinctly marked on the blue ocean. on reporting to harry what i had seen, he said that the surf showed the existence of a barrier reef surrounding the islands. "we may find a passage through it, but sometimes these reefs extend for miles without an opening through them. a strong current must be setting from the eastward towards it, or we should not have been drawn so far during the night, for certainly there was no appearance of an island in that direction at sundown." we soon had convincing proof that harry was right in his conjecture. there could be no doubt that a current was setting us towards the land, for the trees gradually rose higher and higher above the water, and at length we could see them from the deck, while the white line of surf breaking on the reef became more and more distinct. at the same time a slowly moving, at first scarcely perceptible swell, which fanny called the breathing of the ocean, passed ever and anon under the vessel, lifting her so gently that the sails remained as motionless as before. it was difficult indeed to discover that there was any movement in the mirror-like surface of the deep, and yet we could feel the deck rise and fall under our feet. the awning was rigged, and mary and fanny were seated in their easy-chairs under it, mary reading aloud while her sister worked. nat, who had placed himself near them, cross-legged on a grating, to listen, with a marline-spike and a piece of rope, was practising the art of splicing, in which he had made fair progress. "i say, ned, i wish you would show me how to work a turk's head," he exclaimed. i went to him and did as he asked me. this made mary stop reading; and fanny, looking out towards the island, remarked, "how near we are getting. i am so glad, for i want to see a real coral island, and that of course is one. i suppose we shall anchor when we get close to it, and be able to go on shore." harry, who overheard her, made no reply, but looked unusually grave, and told me to bring the chart from below. spreading it out on the companion-hatch, we again, for the third or fourth time, gave a careful look at it. "i cannot understand the set of this current," he said. "it probably sweeps round the island. but we are being carried much closer than i like to be in so perfect a calm. if we get a breeze it will be all right, but--" just then the sails gave several loud flaps, as if some one had shaken them out, and the schooner rolled now to one side, now to the other. her head had moved so as to bring the swell abeam. once having begun, she went on making the same unpleasant movements. it was evident that the swell had increased. "is there no way to stop her from doing that?" asked mary. "not till the wind fills her sails," answered harry. "i hope, however, that we shall get a breeze before long." harry did not say this in a very cheerful tone. he soon afterwards beckoned tom platt to him, and i saw them talking earnestly together for some minutes. i joined them. they were discussing the probable set of the current, which was at present sweeping us at the rate of at least three knots an hour towards the reef. "we might keep her off it, at all events, until a breeze springs up," remarked tom. "we'll have the boats out, then, and do our best," said my brother, and he gave the order "out boats." we carried two boats on the davits, but as they were too light to be of much service, we hoisted out the long-boat, which was stowed amidships. we also lowered one of the gigs. the two boats were at once made fast to the tow-line. the men gave way, and the schooner's head was kept off from the threatening reef, against which the sea was breaking with tremendous force. the men bent to their oars, for they knew the danger as well as we did. we all watched the reef with anxious eyes. should the vessel be driven against it, we should, in a few seconds, we well knew, be dashed to pieces; and, though we might escape in the boats before that catastrophe occurred, we should be left to make a long voyage before we could reach any civilised people. all around us were islands, most of them, we had reason to fear, inhabited by treacherous and blood-thirsty savages. we, of course, did not express our anxiety to the ladies, who, however, i thought, began to suspect that the vessel was in danger, although they said nothing. the men had been pulling fully an hour against the current, and yet, as i looked at the reef, i could not help acknowledging to myself that the vessel was nearer than at first. the swell, at the same time, began to increase, and we could now hear the roar of the breakers as they dashed against the wall of coral which interrupted their progress. "we'll send the other boat ahead, platt," said my brother. "ay, ay, sir," answered tom; and he and i with the two remaining men lowered her, and, jumping in, joined our shipmates in towing, leaving only my brother with dick and nat to take charge of the vessel. he now ordered us to pull across the current, in the hopes of thus in time getting out of it. we all pulled away with a will, making the schooner move faster through the water than she had done for many hours. "we must manage it somehow," shouted tom to the other boats. "give way, lads--give way. we shall soon be clear of the current." it was of little use urging the men, as they were already straining every nerve. my brother walked the deck, stopping every now and then, casting his eyes frequently around the horizon in the hopes of discovering signs of a coming breeze. then he would look towards the reef, but there was nothing encouraging to be seen in that direction. still tom shouted every now and then, "pull away, lads--pull away!" "we are pulling, mate, as hard as we can," answered the men from the other boats. if we had any doubts of it before it was now clear enough that an unusually strong current was setting us towards the reef, even faster than we could pull away from it. whenever the men showed any signs of relaxing their efforts harry came to the bows and cheered them on, leaving dick to steer. it was somewhat trying work for all of us, for the hot sun was beating down on our heads, the perspiration streaming from every pore; but our lives depended upon our exertions, and pull we must to the last moment. i heard some of the men talking of going alongside the schooner and asking the captain for a glass of grog apiece. "don't be thinking of that, lads," cried tom. "it would be so much precious time lost. we can pull well enough if we have the will. the grog would not give you any real strength, and you'd be as thirsty as before a few minutes afterwards. can't one of you strike up a tune, and see if that don't help us along." there was no response to this appeal, so tom himself at once began shouting a no very melodious ditty. first one man joined in, then another and another, until the whole of the boats' crews were singing at the top of their voices. it appeared to me that the vessel was moving somewhat faster than before through the water, but looking towards the wall of foam that seemed no further off. still we knew that our efforts were of use, as we thus considerably delayed the destruction which awaited our vessel should she once get within the power of the breakers. hour after hour passed by. the swell had increased, and, combined with the current, made our task still more difficult, but harry had too much at stake to let any consideration for our fatigue induce him to allow us to rest for a moment. "pull on, lads, pull on," he shouted. "we shall have the breeze before long, and we'll not let the schooner be cast away." the roar of the breakers sounded in our ears between each dip of the oars. i looked round, but no sign of a breeze could i discover. my heart sank within me as i thought of how harry must be _feeling_ with the dear ones under his charge in so great a peril. as i again looked towards the reef it seemed that, since we could not tow the vessel off, no power could save her. i knew that the depth of water close up to these coral reefs is generally so great that there would not be a possibility of anchoring, nor did i see any opening through which we could pass and get into smooth water. at last harry shouted out, "mr platt, in the second gig, come alongside and help trim sails." we at once obeyed him. "what do you think we shall get out of that, platt," he asked, pointing to a small cloud which was seen rising above the horizon. "a stiffish breeze, to my mind, and i hope we shall get it before long," answered tom. we at once trimmed sails, and while we were so employed i saw several cats'-paws playing over the surface. the sails filled. "let the boats come alongside, and we'll hoist them in before the breeze catches us," cried harry. "we shall do now, without their help, i hope." this was speedily done, but scarcely had we secured the larger boat, the first gig having already been hoisted on board, than the wind filling our canvas, the vessel heeled over almost to her gunwale. but the danger was not past, we had still that fearful wall of surf under our lee. it would be no easy matter to beat off it. the awning had been quickly unrigged, and the schooner, with as much canvas as she could bear, was tearing through the fast rising seas. we stood on, still nearing the reef. old tom went to the helm. the wind increasing, the vessel heeled over before it, but it would not do to shorten sail. the men were at their stations. "we'll go about, platt, and see if she'll do better on the other tack," said harry. "helm's a lee!" about she came, but scarcely had she gathered way when a more furious blast than before laid her over. i looked aloft--the top masts were bending like willow wands. i feared every instant that they would go, but it was not a moment to shorten sail. presently the wind headed us, and we had once more to go about. we now stood on almost parallel with the reef, tom watching for every slight variation of the wind to edge the schooner off it. all this time, though the current no longer carried us towards the reef, the heavy swell rolling in threatened to set us on it. night was approaching. it would add greatly to the danger of our position. the ladies had hitherto remained on deck, fully aware of our peril, but showing no signs of fear. harry, who from the moment the gale sprang up had stood holding on to the weather backstay, now watching the canvas, now the fast rising seas, urged them and nat to go below. "i will summon you, if necessary," he said, in a calm tone. "but we will hope for the best. remain in the cabin, and keep your cloaks and hats ready to put on." they went without remonstrance. i helped them down the companion-ladder. "is there much danger, do you think, ned?" asked mary. "harry seems unusually grave." "we must, as he says, hope for the best," i answered, though i myself knew that the danger was imminent. should a spar go or the gale increase, there would be but scant time, before the schooner would be among the breakers, to get into the boats; and even should we escape in them, would they live in that stormy sea? i saw mary and fanny kneel down at the sofa as i left the cabin, and mary drawing nat to her side. "their prayers will help us," i thought, as i sprang on deck. the wind was increasing, the foam-topped seas rolled in quick succession towards us, the sky to windward looked threatening in the extreme; that terrible wall of foam loomed higher through the gloom of night. still, as long as the schooner's head could be kept turned away from the reef, we might hope to claw off from it. the chart had shown us that a reef existed, but its form was indistinctly marked. hitherto we had found it running in a direct line, north and south, but it might suddenly trend to the east, and if so, without a moment's warning, we might be upon it. harry, knowing this, had stationed two of the men with the sharpest sight forward, to look out for breakers ahead, that should they be seen, we might go about and have a chance of escaping them; but, owing to the heavy sea rolling in, there was a great risk of the schooner missing stays, and should she do so, our fate would be sealed: there, would be no time to get the boats out before she would be among the breakers. harry now told me to go forward to assist the other men on the look-out. "we'll not go about, if we can help it," he said. "the water is deep close up to the reef, and a miss is as good as a mile." not a word was spoken; the crew were at their stations ready to execute the orders they might receive. the increased roar of the ceaseless breakers showed me that we were nearer than hitherto, though the vessel was tearing along through the seas at her fastest speed, taking the water over the bows in dense showers which often prevented me from seeing ahead. "shall we never get to the end of this terrible reef?" i said to myself. just then i saw close on the starboard bow the snowy wall of surf. "luff! luff all you can!" i shouted out, my cry being echoed by the men. the next moment we appeared to be in the very midst of the seething waters, which fell foaming down on our deck. i gave up all for lost, but again the schooner dashed on and we were free. the reef was yet, however, on our starboard side, but as i peered through the darkness i observed a gap in the wall of foam. i ran aft to harry. he had seen it. "we must venture through," he said. "square away the fore-yard. ease off the main-sheet; up with the helm." his orders were obeyed, while he hurried aft to direct tom how to steer. the hissing breakers rose on either hand not twenty fathoms from the vessel; the seas roared up astern; now a huge billow lifted us, and then down we glided into comparatively smooth water. "stand by to shorten sail!" shouted harry. "port the helm!" "port it is," cried tom. the headsails were handed, the schooner was rounded to, the anchor let go, and she rode in safety inside the reef. harry, with a light heart, sprang below to assure his wife and her sister that the danger was past. we could but dimly make out the low shore on the other side of the lagoon; but what was the character of the island, or whether or not it was inhabited, we could not tell. the wind was still blowing with great force, the breakers dashing with terrific roars against the reef outside of us, so that at any moment we might be driven from our anchor. we both of us therefore intended to stay on deck during the remainder of the night, to be ready should any accident occur. we, however, went down to supper, for which we were very ready, as we had eaten nothing since the commencement of the gale. very pleasant the cabin looked after the gloomy deck, with mary and fanny seated at the table, and the swinging lamp shedding a bright light around. it was difficult to believe that not many minutes before there was a fearful prospect of our vessel being dashed to pieces on the rocks. we could, however, remain below but a very short time, and had again to hurry on deck. "i'm afraid she's dragging her anchor, sir," said tom, who was getting a lead line ready to ascertain whether this was the case. the lead was dropped to the bottom, the line ran out slowly, showing that his surmise was correct. more cable was paid out in the hope of bringing her up. we looked anxiously astern, fearing that she might strike on some mass of coral between us and the shore. at length, to our great relief, the line hung up and down, showing that the anchor was holding. the night passed slowly on. seldom have i more anxiously wished for the return of day. chapter three. daylight showed us that the reef, through an opening in which we had passed, was many miles in circumference, and that it surrounded several islands of various sizes and heights, with cocoanut, pandanus, and a few other trees and shrubs growing on them. they were not, as we had at first supposed, lagoon islands. harry said that he believed them to be the summits of the hills of a submerged island, of which the reef marked the outer edge. we inspected the nearest through our glasses, but could not discover any signs of inhabitants, not a hut, not a canoe on the beach, not a wreath of smoke ascending beyond the trees. in the distance, as if floating on the calm surface of the water, appeared, blue and indistinct, the other islands of the group, one of the most northern of which we had seen on the previous day. the gale had ceased, though the breakers still dashed furiously on the outer side of the reef, but scarcely a ripple disturbed the placid expanse of the lagoon. "oh, how beautiful!" exclaimed fanny, as she and mary came on deck. "i should so like to take a stroll through that shady grove on the soft turf which carpets the ground." "do let us go, harry," said mary; "you are not obliged to sail immediately." nat also begged that he might go. "while the swell rolls in through the passage with this light breeze we cannot safely attempt to get out, and so, as you wish it, we will pay a visit to the nearest island," answered harry. "but i warn you that you may be disappointed." as soon as we had breakfasted the two gigs were lowered. harry took the two ladies in one, and i had charge of the other, having with me nat and dick tilston. just as we were about to shove off i asked tom to hand me down harry's fowling-piece, on the chance of getting a shot at some birds. "may as well have a musket, too," he said, giving me one with some ammunition. "there may be no people ashore, or if there are they may be friendly, but it's as well to be prepared for t'other in these parts." tom seldom indulged in so long a speech. it showed that he was somewhat anxious about our going on shore on an unknown island. we gave way, eager to step on shore, my boat soon catching up harry's. as we approached the beach we found that the surf washing over the outer reef set upon it in a way which would have made landing there disagreeable, so we pulled a short distance round to the lee side, where we discovered a little bay, or indentation in the coral rock, large enough to admit both the boats, i getting in first was in readiness to hand mary and fanny on shore. "why, what has become of the soft green turf we saw?" exclaimed fanny, looking along under the trees. "perhaps we shall find it further on," remarked mary. "i am afraid not," said harry; "but we will go on through the shady groves and try to reach it." it was no easy matter to do this, for although there was grass, it grew in wiry patches out of the coral rock, in some places so thickly that we were compelled to wind in and out among them to make any progress. no flowers nor fruits were to be seen, except some cocoanuts high up above our heads, while the sun came down between the scanty foliage with no less force than on the water. still our curiosity tempted us to proceed, but everywhere was the same wiry grass which we had taken at a distance for soft turf. at length we came to an open space, raised but slightly above the level of the sea. it was tenanted by innumerable aquatic birds--gannets, sooty terns, beautiful tropic and frigate birds, the nests of the latter constructed of rough sticks covering the boughs of the surrounding trees. while the gannets, whose eggs had been deposited on the ground without nests refused to move as we approached-- only exhibiting their alarm or displeasure by loud croaks, and allowing us to catch hold of them without resistance--the frigate birds, more wary, rose from their perches, inflating their blood-red pouches to the size of large cocoanuts, as they ascended high up in the air above our heads, or flew off to sea; others circled round us screeching wildly and flapping their wings. the discordant noise, the heat, the disagreeable smell, and the roughness of the ground, made the ladies unwilling to proceed further, and they proposed returning slowly to the boats; but dick, nat, and i, with jack lizard, one of the men, pushed forward in spite of all obstacles, as i was anxious to explore more of the island. "do not be long away," shouted harry; "we may have a breeze shortly, and must get aboard." "ay, ay!" i answered, as we hurried on, expecting to be able to get to the other side of the island and to turn back and overtake them before they reached the boats. the ground rose slightly as we advanced, showing that the island had been upheaved, since first formed by its minute architects, owing to some volcanic convulsion far down in the depths of the ocean. masses of coral worn by time lay scattered about, amid which grew shrubs and tangled creepers, with here and there a few taller trees; but as the shrubs were not of a thorny species we pushed through them or leaped over them, dick and nat coming down on their noses more than once in our progress. seeing a knoll, or rather a mass of coral, thrown up higher than the rest ahead i made for it, hoping to get from thence a more extensive view than we could from where we were. we soon climbed to the summit, which was high enough to enable us to look over the surrounding trees. "hillo, what are those dots out there?" exclaimed nat, pointing towards the eastern end of the nearest island, which we had seen from the schooner. "dots, do you call them, young gentleman?" said lizard; "to my mind they are canoes, well-nigh a score of them; and they are making way over the water at a pretty fast rate, too, towards us." i had not brought a telescope, but shading my eyes with my hands the better to examine the objects i was satisfied that lizard was right, and that they were canoes. at first i did not suppose that they, or rather the people in them, had any hostile intentions; but suddenly the idea occurred to me that they had discovered the schooner, and were coming with the design of cutting her off. should such be the case, it was important to warn my brother without delay, that we might return on board and prepare for the defence of the vessel. "more nor likely, mr ned," answered lizard when i asked him his opinion. "as the mate was a saying afore we came away, you can never trust those black fellows." "come on, boys, then," i cried. "we must make good use of our legs, or the canoes will be up to us before we can reach the boats." we set off, keeping close together that we might help each other in case of any of us being hurt by falling. first dick came down, and then nat had two tumbles, both scratching their hands and knees; but, the moment they were on their feet, on they came again. i got an ugly fall, which would have been much worse if lizard had not caught me, and, as it was, i cut one of my knees and hands on the sharp coral. at length we had to stop and take breath, for, having not only to run, but often to leap from rock to rock, it was very exhausting work. "are we going the right way?" asked nat, looking round. it was well he asked the question, for, on climbing a short way up a tree, i discovered that we had been keeping too much to the right, and should have arrived at the east instead of at the south side of the island, where we had landed. correcting our mistake, we again went on, and i was very thankful when we came to the level part inhabited by the colony of birds. we dashed through them, crushing many an egg, as well as several hapless young ones, regardless of the screechings of the old birds and the furious pecks they gave at our legs. i looked out ahead, but could see nothing of harry and the ladies. we shouted, thinking that they might not be far off; but, receiving no answer, i hoped that they had already embarked. at last i caught sight of harry, with mary and fanny seated near him, both with their sketch-books before them. at that moment a gun was fired from the schooner. "why, what's the matter?" exclaimed harry. scarcely had he asked the question than another gun was fired. "old tom thinks there's danger somewhere, and wants us aboard again." i was unwilling to alarm mary and fanny, so, instead of shouting out, i waited till i could get up to my brother, when i told him quietly what we had seen. "the sooner we are aboard the better, for the canoes appear to be coming on at a great rate," i added. "no doubt about it," he answered; and, telling the ladies to shut up their books, he hurried with them towards the boats, bidding lizard and dick to run on ahead and order the men to be in readiness to shove off. we were not long in reaching the boats, and we prepared to return in the order we had left the schooner, i having dick and nat with me. harry's boat got off first, and his crew gave way with a will; mine followed at some little distance. just as we opened the eastern point of the island i got sight of the fleet of canoes coming round it, and steering directly for the schooner. old tom saw us coming, yet he fired again, probably in the hopes of scaring the natives and preventing them from attacking us; but this did not appear to have any effect on them, perhaps because they were ignorant of the power of firearms. fast as we were pulling they came along faster, and it seemed doubtful if we should reach the schooner before they were up to us. as yet they were some way to the eastward, so that the course on which they were approaching the schooner formed an angle of about thirty degrees with that on which we were steering; thus, a shot fired from her, might hit them without the risk of injuring us. we had come away with only three hands in the boat besides dick. i made him take the stroke-oar, that i might assist him, while i placed nat at the helm. i now told nat to edge up slightly to the eastward, so that we might keep between harry's boat and the savages. though we bent to our oars, the canoes were gaining on us. it was just possible that their intentions were friendly, but it would be folly to trust to them. how i wished for a breeze, that the schooner might get under weigh and come to our assistance! there was, however, not a breath of wind to fill her sails, so that we must, i saw, depend on our own exertions. old tom did not again fire, probably because he considered that, unless he could hit one of the canoes, the savages would fancy that the shot would do them no harm. the canoes were now so near that i could distinguish their character. though small compared with those of fiji and tonga, the leading ones were double, with a platform in the centre, on which stood a number of men gesticulating violently, and flourishing spears and clubs, while others sat on either side working broad-bladed paddles almost upright at a rapid rate. i could have picked off some of the warriors, but was unwilling to commence hostilities. i looked round, and was thankful to see that harry's boat was getting near the schooner. in a few minutes he and his companions would be on board. before then, however, my boat would be on a line with the canoes, and a shot fired from the vessel might strike her. just as this idea occurred to me there came a flash and a loud report, and as i looked astern to see the effect produced by the shot, i saw that the canoes were thrown into considerable confusion. the leading one had been struck, and the platform knocked to pieces. the warriors were tumbling overboard, while the other canoes, coming up, were running into the wreck and into each other. whether any one had been killed i could not see. dick and the rest of my crew shouted as they saw what had happened. "give way, lads, give way," i cried out. "we may get on board now and defend the vessel, if the savages venture to attack us." we had got almost up to the schooner, and harry had put the ladies on board her before the savages had recovered from their alarm, the warriors and crew of the wreck having got on board the other canoes. notwithstanding the effect of tom's shot, they seemed bent on attacking us, and once more came paddling on. "we must show the savages that we are not afraid of them," cried harry, turning his boat's head towards the canoes, and standing up with a musket in his hand. he had obtained two from the vessel. i imitated his example, and all hands raised a loud, ringing cheer, which no sooner did the savages hear than they ceased paddling, and when we, firing our muskets, dashed forward, they fairly turned tail, or rather backing away, went off in all directions. a few more musket shots fired over their heads increased their speed. "i told you, mr ned, that you'd find the small arms of use," said tom, when we got on board. "they ain't accustomed to big guns, and don't know what a round shot can do." "it was your round shot, however, which stopped them when they were nearly up with us; and i hope that they won't forget the lesson they have learned to-day," i answered. i need not say that mary and fanny looked very thankful when they saw us safe on board. we anxiously watched the savages, for we could not be certain of their intentions. they might rally and renew the attack, if not in the daytime, during the night, when we should be unable to see them till they were close upon us. our hope therefore was that the wind would again spring up, and that we should be able to get to sea before darkness set in. in vain, however, we waited for a breeze. the canoes meantime had disappeared behind the nearest island; but we could not ascertain whether they had gone on to the further-off islands or were still in our neighbourhood. in the latter case they might come suddenly upon us, and it would be necessary to keep a very watchful look-out to avoid being taken by surprise. i volunteered to go on shore and ascertain where they were, by making my way through the wood across the island, till i reached some point whence i could obtain a view over the water on the north side; but harry would not allow me to run the risk, for had i been discovered i should in all probability have been put to death. he, however, took one of the boats, and surveyed the whole of the channel through which we should have to pass to get to sea, that, should a breeze spring up during the night, we might get out without fear of running on the reef. by the time he returned on board evening was drawing on. he had directed tom to fire a gun as a signal should the canoes appear, but not one was seen before it became so dark that we could scarcely distinguish the outline even of the nearest island. mary and fanny having recovered from their alarm, for they had naturally been much frightened, were seated in the well-lighted cabin, with nat, at tea, when harry and i joined them. we had left old tom and dick in charge of the watch on deck, consisting of tom tubb the new zealander, and jacky pott the sandwich islander, with two other men. the guns were loaded, the muskets arranged against the companion-hatch, and the cable was hove short, so that we might speedily trip the anchor and make sail should the wished-for breeze spring up. we almost forgot, as we were enjoying our comfortable meal in our cozy cabin, that not far off were hordes of howling savages; that we had to find our way between coral reefs, and might have storms and other unknown dangers to encounter. tea over, after singing a few airs to the accompaniment of her guitar, fanny took up her work, while mary as usual began to read. i then went on deck. "any chance of a breeze soon?" i asked. "not a breath of wind as yet, sir," answered old tom; "and i don't think we shall get it till the morning. i only hope when it does come that we shan't have more of it than we want. i'd advise the ladies not to sit up till we are out at sea, for if they do they'll get but little sleep to-night." i went below and told them what tom said. harry agreed that he was right; and when they retired to their cabins he and i returned on deck. we neither of us felt inclined to turn in. perhaps we were as anxious as if we had been certain that the savages would attack us. the hours, as they always do on such occasions, went slowly by; and at last, unable longer to keep my eyes open, i got a cloak from below, and rolling myself up in it lay down on deck. how long i had slept i could not tell, when i heard tom exclaim-- "i see them, sir." "you are right; so do i," answered harry. "turn the hands up." i was on my feet in an instant, and looking towards the eastern end of the island distinctly made out a number of dark objects on the surface of the water approaching the schooner. the men came tumbling up on deck. "silence!" cried harry, in a low voice; "crouch down so as not to show yourselves. as the savages hope to surprise us, we must surprise them. ned, run down and tell mary and fanny that we may have to fire the guns, but that they must not be alarmed, as we are sure to beat off the savages." i quickly executed my commission, and sprang again on deck. the canoes did not appear to me to have got nearer. the savages were, perhaps, holding a consultation. as i was looking at them, i felt a breath of air on my right cheek. it was from the eastward. again it came stronger. it was the most favourable wind we could have. "loose the headsails--man the windlass," cried harry. "i shall be thankful if we can avoid injuring more of the ignorant savages." the anchor was quickly hove up--the headsails and then the mainsail set, and the schooner glided on towards the passage through the reef. as her broadside was turned towards the canoes we could fire all our guns at them, should it be necessary. almost immediately afterwards the moon rose, showing us clearly their position, and, what was of more consequence, enabling us with less difficulty to see our way through the passage. the canoes now came paddling on, the savages probably fearing that we should escape them. "we must not let them attack us in the channel," said harry, and he reluctantly gave tom the order to fire. our guns were discharged in quick succession, and the next instant we saw the canoes paddling away in the utmost confusion; but it was too dark to ascertain what injury had been inflicted. we had soon to haul aft the sheets, and to devote all our attention to the navigation of our vessel--old tom going forward to look out for dangers, and harry standing aft to direct the helmsman and conn the vessel, while the crew were at their stations; i standing by the main-sheet with others to flatten it aft or ease it off as might be necessary. now and then i took a look astern to ascertain if the canoes were following us, but could only just make them out, showing that the savages had had enough of it, though they might have annoyed us greatly had they boldly attacked us while we were standing through the passage. in a short time the outer part of the reef was passed, and the breeze freshening we were gliding swiftly over the moonlit sea. chapter four. when morning broke, the reef-encircled islands could be indistinctly seen over the port-quarter rising out of the sparkling ocean. the wind being against us we expected to have a long beat before we could reach our destination; but harry resolved to persevere, hoping that we might get a favourable breeze at last. things on board went on as usual. after i had had my sleep out in the forenoon i gave dick a lesson in navigation, which i had done regularly every day of late since i discovered that he was anxious to learn. "i am most grateful to you, mr ned," he said. "if i can fit myself to be an officer i shall not be ashamed to return home, which i should have had i gained no more knowledge than i should have done under ordinary circumstances, as a ship's boy." "much depends on the way you work, and whether you keep to your good resolutions," i observed. "but i say, dick, you have never told me anything about yourself; though from the first i saw that you had had a good education." "to tell you the truth, my father is a merchant in london, and my mother moves in good society," he answered, speaking rapidly. "she was very fond of me, and i do not think that if i had been with her i could have run away; but i went off from school, where i was not happy, quite forgetting how miserable it would make her when she heard that i was missing. the thought of that has preyed on my mind more than anything else. i wrote to her, however, when i reached brisbane, and paid the postage with the last shilling i had, so that she knows now that i am alive, though i did not like to tell her how miserable i was. i only asked her and my father to forgive me, and promised to return home when i had made my fortune, for i just then fancied if i could escape from the ship that i should be able to do that. i soon found when i did get on shore that i was miserably mistaken, and if it had not been for you i believe that i should have died. i am sure that none of my own brothers, of whom i have five older than i am, could have treated me more kindly. i have three sisters also, and when i look at mrs morton and miss fanny they remind me of them, and i think of my folly in leaving them all and running the chance of never seeing them again." after dick had made this confession i felt more than ever inclined to befriend him. when i told harry, he said that he would consider what was right to be done. "i think it best, however, that dick should remain in his present position for a time," he added. "he is learning the details of seamanship from old tom and the rudiments of navigation from you, and as he does not mix much with the crew he will gain no harm from them." we were standing on that evening close hauled to the south-east when, just as the sun went down, dark clouds began to gather to windward. "we'll shorten sail at once," said harry. "it may not come on to blow, but it looks like it and we cannot be too cautious." he issued the order to tom, and we soon had the schooner under snug canvas. it was fortunate that she was. not ten minutes afterwards, just as harry had gone below, a squall struck her. "luff! luff!" shouted tom, but before jack lizard, who was at the helm, could do so, over the schooner heeled, till the water rushed through the scuppers high up her deck. lower and lower she went, until i thought she was going to capsize. harry sprang up from below. tom had rushed forward, and with the hands stationed there let fly the jib-sheets, and was hauling down the forestay-sail--the foresail had been stowed. suddenly she rose, and i heard a loud crack, like the report of a musket fired close to my ear. "we've sprung the mainmast, i fear," exclaimed harry, and he called the men aft to lower the mainsail, while he and i sprang to the peak and throat halliards to let them go. on examining the mast we found that it was so badly sprung that it would be impossible again to set sail on it without the risk of carrying it away. it seemed a wonder that it had not gone altogether. "we must bear up for samoa," said harry. "it is very provoking, but there is no place nearer where we can hope to obtain a fresh spar." accordingly the headsails were again hoisted, the fore-topsail was set, and the helm being put up, away we ran before the wind on a course for upalu, the centre island of the group, in which apia, the chief port, is situated. the wind increased, and we soon had to close-reef the fore-topsail, the only sail we could carry; then down came the rain in huge drops, or rather in sheets which wetted us as thoroughly as if we had jumped overboard, and so deluged the deck that had it not run out at the scuppers as the vessel rolled from side to side the water would have been up to our ankles in a few minutes. what with the pattering of the rain, the howling of the wind and the dashing of the sea, we could scarcely hear each other's voices. though we had no sail set on the mainmast, and had secured it with spars lashed round the injured part, and additional stays, i frequently, as the schooner pitched into the fast rising seas, expected to see it carried away altogether. old tom, who seemed to have the same fear, told us to look out and stand from under, in case it should go, but the difficulty was to know in what direction it would fall, should it come down. on we ran day after day, the gale apparently following us, though harry said that as storms were generally circular we should in time run out of it. each time, however, that i turned out to keep my watch, there we were, running on; the seas leaping and hissing and foaming around us; the dark clouds flying overhead; the vessel rolling and pitching in the same uncomfortable fashion as before. harry did his best to keep up the spirits of his wife and fanny, who behaved like heroines, though they agreed that they little expected to meet with such weather in the pacific. "it is as well to get it over, and we may hope to have finer for the rest of the voyage," answered harry, to console them. we had other dangers to encounter, of which he did not speak. although the sea we were traversing was pretty well known by this time, there might be small islands or coral reefs improperly placed on the chart, or not laid down at all, and at any moment during the darkness of night, or even in the daytime, we might come upon one, when in an instant the vessel would have been dashed to pieces, and all on board must have perished. we had, therefore, to keep the sharpest possible look-out, for a moment's want of vigilance might cause our destruction. once i saw the sea leaping and foaming high up above the surrounding water away on the starboard hand. i pointed out the spot to tom. "the end of a reef," he observed. "if we'd been a little more to the nor'ard we should likely enough have been on it, but a miss is as good as a mile. we may be thankful to have escaped." he afterwards told me that we passed another reef to the northward while i was below, how many we escaped during the night we could not tell. thus some of the dangers to be encountered by those navigating among coral islands will be understood. at length, one morning when i came on deck to keep my watch, i saw the stars shining brightly overhead--the wind had fallen, the sea was going down, and the schooner, with her squaresail rigged out, was running gaily along. at noon we took an observation, when we found that we were less than a hundred miles from the port of apia, which we therefore expected to reach the next day, unless the wind should fail us. we were more fortunate than we expected. early the next morning the land was seen over the port bow rising in a succession of ridges to a moderate height above the sea. we had made an excellent landfall, for the harbour of apia was almost directly ahead. before we reached it, a large whaleboat came off and put an englishman on board, who introduced himself as the chief pilot of the place. he carried us through a somewhat intricate passage between coral rocks to a safe anchorage not far from the shore. we were surprised to see several tastefully-built houses among trees, a large church, stores, and other buildings, besides a number of whitewashed cottages, many of which, the pilot told us, were inhabited by natives who have learned the art of building and the use of lime from the missionaries. through their instrumentality also, although but a few years ago the people inhabiting different parts of the island were constantly fighting with each other, warfare has entirely ceased, and all have become christians by profession, many of them adorning the gospel by their lives and conversation, while others have gone forth to carry its blessings to the still benighted heathen in the western islands of the pacific. i must be brief in my account of the events which occurred during our stay at apia. on going on shore we were received with great kindness by several of the english and american residents, who invited harry and his wife and her sister to take up their abode at their houses, but they preferred sleeping on board the schooner. we were fortunate in finding a mast from a vessel wrecked on the coast, which by cutting down slightly could be made to replace the mainmast we had sprung. we had been in harbour a couple of days when a fine-looking young chief came on board, prompted by curiosity to see the vessel so unlike the whalers which generally visit the port. he was unpicturesquely dressed in shirt and trousers and we should not have taken him to be a chief, except from his handsome figure, unless he had introduced himself as toa, the nephew of the great chief maleatoa. he spoke english well, and seemed very intelligent. on being introduced to mary and fanny, he made a bow which would have become a french courtier, and appeared wonderfully struck by them. he soon drew me aside and inquired who they were. when i told him that one was married to my brother, and the other was her sister, he appeared suddenly lost in thought, but said nothing at the time. we asked him into the cabin, as we were just going to sit down to dinner. he behaved in all respects like a polished gentleman, narrowly watching us, and imitating the way he saw us eat. he told us a great deal about his country, the progress it had made during the last few years since the inhabitants had become christians and wars had ceased; the roads that had been constructed, the houses built, the fields cultivated, and horses and cattle introduced. he described their astonishment on first seeing a large animal, a mule, which they supposed to be an enormous dog, and accordingly gave it an appropriate name. in return for the civility we had shown him on board, he invited me to accompany him on a sporting expedition into the interior. "i will show you how we catch pigeons and kill wild hogs," he said. harry gave me leave to go, and i asked if dick might accompany me, as i knew he would like it. my brother consented. on going on shore early the next morning we found the chief and several companions waiting for us. each person carried a tame pigeon on his arm secured by a string, as also a bamboo thirty or forty feet long with a small net at the end of it. several attendants accompanied us carrying guns and ammunition. "we shall depend upon the provisions we find in the woods for our support," said toa to me. "we can easily obtain all we require." we proceeded for about four hours amid tangled bushes, across marshes, and up the slippery sides of hills, till we arrived at a district with here and there open spots, but generally covered with brushwood. the attendants set to work to clear away a large circle by cutting down the brushwood; we then retired to a spot which had been previously fixed on, where a camp was formed, and some, arbours which would shelter us for the night erected. some of our people had in the meantime collected some wild bread-fruit, dug up some wild yams, and brought down some cocoanuts, which gave us an ample repast. formerly the chiefs would have indulged in drinking kava, but that custom had been abandoned. having satisfied our hunger we returned to our ambushes round the ring. each sportsman, if so he could be called, now stuck a stick with a cross-piece on it into the ground for his pigeon, which was secured by a string forty yards in length, to perch on. after remaining a short time quiet toa gave the signal, and the birds were simultaneously thrown into the air, when they flew up and commenced, as they had been taught, wheeling round and round. in a short time a number of wild pigeons seeing them from a distance, and supposing from their movements that they were hovering over their food, came from all directions to join them. i was much surprised at the dexterity with which as the wild birds circled among the decoy pigeons the sportsmen, rapidly raising their nets, captured them. the moment a bird was caught the net was again raised and another captured in the same manner. toa in this way caught a dozen in as many minutes. dick and i tried our skill, but we only knocked against the tame birds. it was a long time before i managed to catch even one; dick was still less successful. it seemed at first very easy, but then it must be remembered that the rods were upwards of thirty feet long, and that the birds flew very rapidly. "formerly," said toa to us, "large parties of young men used to go out for a month together, but we have now other occupation for our time, and only now and then engage in the sport." "this is a funny sort of fishing in the air," said dick. "i call it birding," i answered. "very right," observed toa; "i will show you how we fish some day." we caught several dozen pigeons during the morning. the afternoon was to be devoted to hog-shooting, at a spot a short distance off. we were divided into two parties--dick and i accompanied toa, while another young chief, who had arrived with a number of ugly-looking dogs, led another party. after going some distance we arrived at a spot where the pigs had been rooting about, and away went the curs in chase. before long their shrill yelping bark told us that the herd was found, and following the sound we discovered the chief and a companion tying the legs of a young boar, which had been caught by running it down with some of the dogs. the barking increased as we went on. presently toa cried out, "take care; get behind the trees all of you," and we saw an enormous wild boar which the dogs had been keeping at bay. the chief advanced running from tree to tree with great rapidity, that he might get near enough to the animal to shoot it without injuring the dogs. at length the boar caught sight of him and charged. toa fired, and apparently missed, and the brute came rushing towards me. i aimed at his fore-shoulder, hoping, if i did not kill him outright, to stop his career. in another moment he would have been into my side, for i had no time to reload, when, just as he was near me, i made a spring and caught the bough of a tree, which i could not under other circumstances have reached, and my feet struck his back as he dashed under them. toa had now reloaded, but before he could fire the boar again charged; he, however, nimbly sprang behind a tree, and the brute rushed past, giving me an opportunity to recover my rifle. he now caught sight of dick, at whom he made a dash. dick not attempting to fire, nimbly sprang up a young tree. on seeing its enemy thus escaping, the boar made a dash at the tree, and attacked it with its tusks, biting at it with the greatest fury, till toa, approaching, settled it with a ball through its head. in this way, in a short time, we killed four large hogs, each weighing at least five hundredweight. thus it will be seen that the sport, if exciting, was not wanting in danger, and i must own that i was very glad when it was over, and we had all escaped without wounds. we had a luxurious supper on boar's flesh and wild pigeons, and roots and fruits of various descriptions, all of which had been collected in the woods, showing the abundance of food to be obtained in that favoured region. after supper, toa invited me to walk out with him away from the rest, when he confided to me his deep admiration for fanny amiel, and inquired whether i thought she would consent to remain at samoa and become his wife. i did not answer at once, as i was unwilling to offend him, and yet was certain that she would not consent to any such proposal. i replied that english ladies preferred marrying their own countrymen, and then not until they were certain of their good qualities and had been long acquainted. i undertook, however, to mention the subject to my brother, but observed that i could not venture to say anything about it to the lady herself, who would be much pained at having to refuse him. he seemed somewhat downcast at my reply, but soon recovered his spirits, and we returned to the camp to prepare for sleep. as, with the exception of wild boars, there are no savage animals in samoa, and the people of different tribes no longer tried to surprise and murder each other, no sentries were placed, and every one laid down to rest in perfect security. next morning we returned to apia. the tide was high as we went down to the harbour, at which time, when there is a swell, the breakers burst with considerable force over the reefs outside. we found a number of boys and girls swimming off, some with boards, others without them, and others paddling in paopaos, or little canoes. on reaching the reef, where the waves curled up and broke into foam, the swimmers threw themselves forward with a jump, just as the sea took them, and away they glided in the midst of the white foam, shouting and yelling at the top of their voices. the chief took us off in his canoe to see the fun. when the breaker had spent itself the swimmers were left in smooth water, on which all turned again towards the sea, breasting the smaller waves, and quietly sinking down again as the larger and stronger ones passed over, or frequently dashing boldly through them. "they will keep at that sport till the tide falls and the reef is left bare," observed our friend toa, as we pulled on board the schooner. "when i was a lad i was very fond of it, and could beat most of my companions, keeping longer at it and going out farther than any of them." he had brought, i should have said, a number of pigeons and some of the wild boar's flesh as a present to harry, and which was very acceptable on board. the ladies were on deck when we got alongside, and i was much afraid that toa might say something to fanny which would annoy her, before i had time to tell my brother that he might give her due warning. the young chief, however, stood in a modest manner without advancing, till mary went up to him to thank him for his present. i in the meantime managed to tell harry what the chief had said to me. "i am sorry for this, but we must manage to get him on shore again as politely as possible, and i will not tell her of his proposal before he has gone." our attention, however, was just then attracted by seeing a vessel standing in for the harbour; she approached within a mile or so, when the wind fell. she had a signal flying for a pilot, and the men who brought us in went out to her. toa, who had an eye to business, wishing to be on board early to see what trading could be done, said that he should go out, and invited me to accompany him in his large canoe. as we got near the vessel we found three of her boats towing ahead. on boarding her the captain said he must get in at once, as she was leaking terribly, and was besides short of provisions and water. toa, on this, offered to bring out provisions; and the pilot told him that it was dangerous, without a leading breeze, to attempt entering the harbour, especially as the tide was falling. the brig was, i found, the _caesar_, an american vessel, bound from california to sydney, and had come to apia for the reasons the captain stated. "if you won't take her in, i will by myself," he exclaimed. "where's the difficulty? the boats can tow her, as there isn't a breath of wind to stop her way." "but you cannot tell how the tide will set you, and i advise you to let the boats tow you off," answered the pilot. the skipper, however, was obstinate, and was, i suspect, pot-valiant. he ordered the boats to continue pulling ahead, while he went to the helm himself. the pilot on this, again warning him that he was risking the safety of the vessel, stepped into his boat and pulled for the harbour. toa, however, believing that he could leave at any moment in his canoe, remained on board, and i, of course, had to stay with him. all apparently went well for some minutes, till, just as we were at the entrance, the tide caught the vessel; the after-part struck heavily; she heeled broadside on to the reef, and the next moment, with a tremendous roar, a breaker burst over us. all was confusion on board; shrieks and cries arose from the passengers, the men swearing as they rolled and slipped about. the skipper, however, recovered in a moment his self-possession, and swore he would shoot the first man that attempted to leave the vessel; but as he had no gun or revolver in his hand, no one appeared to care for the threat. one of the crew, a new zealander, indeed, immediately jumped overboard, when the captain threw a marline-spike at his head, but, sinking, he avoided it, and managed to reach the smooth water inside the reef, where the pilot had in the meantime anchored his boat prepared to assist those who might be able to reach her. other boats were coming off from the shore, those which had been towing, as well as the chiefs canoe, had been cut adrift directly the vessel struck, and pulled away, or they would have been swamped in an instant. it will be understood that owing to the heavy breakers it was impossible to get off from the vessel on the sea side, and that our only hope of safety was to pass through the foaming surf on the reef, till we reached smooth water in the inside. the vessel, lightly built, was already breaking up, and her bottom planks were appearing, floating up to the surface, while the water rushed freely in and out of her. there was therefore no time to be lost. toa at once proposed to the skipper to tie a rope to a plank, and to swim with it to the boats inside the reef, so that the passengers and those unable to help themselves might be passed along it, and their lives saved. the rope was speedily got up. "i will go with you," i said to toa. "come along," he answered, and taking my hand he jumped with me into the foaming surf. the first great roller curled high above our heads, and broke with a terrific roar. as it did so we let go the plank and sank down, keeping our eyes turned upwards to watch when it had passed. quickly returning to the surface, we again clutched the plank and shoved it before us. we had twice to perform the same operation before we reached the smooth water. i wanted to return, but toa advised me to remain, as i was not accustomed to the water as he was. he quickly again made his way along the rope to the deck of the vessel. the next moment he appeared again, holding a young lady with one arm, while he dragged himself along the rope with the other, but he twice had to descend to avoid the rollers. the young lady seemed more dead than alive when he placed her in the boat, but she quickly recovered, while he, not in the slightest degree exhausted, dashed off again on board the vessel, and brought another girl in the same way through the surf. a third time he went, and on this occasion he encountered a young man, a gentleman apparently, who was endeavouring to make his way by himself along the rope. he was clutching the rope desperately, when a roller going over him tore him away from his hold. toa, seeing what had happened, dashed after him, and seizing him brought him back to the rope. again toa had to dive twice with the almost senseless stranger, whom he at length placed, greatly exhausted, in the boat. the young ladies had quickly recovered, so that i was able to pay attention to the last comer, and with the assistance of the old pilot and two other men we brought him to. "the sooner we get ashore with these people the better, and let them have a change of duds," said the old pilot. "but i do not like leaving, while there are any people remaining on board." "oh, pray wait," said one of the young ladies. "there is a poor woman and her child and several other people, besides the captain and crew, who, i suppose, do not require so much help." by this time, seeing the possibility of getting alongside the ill-fated vessel in a boat, two put off from the shore, manned by stout fellows. the first succeeded in getting alongside and bringing away a number of the passengers, but the next was less successful. the brig gave a tremendous roll, and striking the boat, capsized her in a moment, and the whole of the people were scattered about in the raging surf. they were, however, all picked up in various ways by the boats, but one poor woman had her child washed from her arms. it was being rapidly carried away by the receding sea, when toa, who was on board the brig, sprang after it and catching it in one arm, held its head above the surf while he swam forward with the other. thus the little fellow was borne along by his preserver. now the brave chief rose to the summit of a foaming sea, now he sank down into the trough, again to rise with the boy still grasped in his powerful hand. in a short time he placed him in the arms of his almost frantic mother. loud cheers burst from all the spectators as they witnessed the gallant act, which few, indeed, would have been able to accomplish. shortly after the last person had been taken from the brig she broke into a thousand fragments, which, with her cargo, soon, for a mile or more on either side, strewed the beach. i felt much interested in the stranger whom toa had saved, and as he required to be attended to more than any one else, i invited him at once to come on board the _dainty_, where i was sure harry would be glad to receive him till he was better able than at present to go on shore. the ladies who had friends preferred at once going on shore to the house of one of the english residents. the pilot, therefore, pulled up alongside the schooner. harry, on hearing the account i gave him, immediately begged the stranger to come on board. he signified his gratitude, but was scarcely able to speak. as harry and i helped him along the deck, we called old tom and dick to come and assist us; and with their help we carried him below. i saw dick looking at him with wondering eyes. at last he exclaimed-- "who are you? are you charles tilston?" "yes," answered the stranger, gazing at dick's countenance; "and you are my brother dick, whom i have come to look for." "yes, i am dick," was the answer. "oh, charlie, i should never have forgiven myself if you had lost your life, for it was i, from what you tell me, who brought you out here." "you will have plenty of time to talk about this by-and-by," said harry. "let me advise you at once to go to bed." charles tilston acknowledged the wisdom of this advice, and harry and old tom assisting to get off his clothes put him into my berth, when having swallowed some warm broth he fell fast asleep. dick begged that he might be allowed to remain and watch over him, promising not to speak again till he saw that his brother was sufficiently recovered to enter into conversation. as harry thought a doctor should see our guest he sent me on shore to procure the services of one who had a short time before landed from a whaler. while i was waiting for him toa landed, and was received with loud acclamations by all the people, the account of his having so gallantly saved the child being the theme of conversation. as harry was now only waiting for a breeze to sail, thinking that i might not see toa again, i bade him farewell, and thanked him for having saved my life. "i must come and see you to-morrow morning," he said. "you will not sail till then, as there will be no wind to carry you out. and now, my friend, i have a favour to ask, i must beg you to tell the fair pearl of the ocean that her figure has ever been present before my eyes, that her voice has rung in my ear, that my thoughts have been occupied with her, and her alone, ever since i saw her." "i will not fail to deliver your message," i answered. "but i must remind you of what my brother said, and you must not be disappointed should she decline your offer." i flattered myself that i had made a very diplomatic reply, but the young chief did not look at all satisfied as i wished him good-bye. i returned on board with the doctor, who prescribed for charles tilston, and said he had little doubt that he would soon come round. i did not fail to give fanny the chiefs message. she and mary laughed heartily. "i must not tamper with his affections," she said, "but i cannot possibly encourage him, and i think that when he comes on board again it will be better for me not to appear." mary and i agreed with her, and it was settled that she should remain in the cabin when toa paid his farewell visit. in former years had a chief conceived a similar fancy he would probably have attempted to carry off the lady by force, but this was not likely to occur under present circumstances. harry, however, thought it prudent to keep a strong watch at night on deck. it was my middle watch, and as i was looking out across the harbour i thought i saw a fleet of canoes passing at some distance from where we lay; still, as i felt sure that toa would not use any violence, this did not make me anxious. the canoes soon disappeared, but after some time i fancied that i again saw them hovering in the distance. presently i heard a voice, which sounded softly as it came over the water, singing in the samoan language. what was the meaning of the words i could not tell, but it struck me that they were those of a love ditty, and that toa had taken this method of expressing the feelings of his heart. as fanny was probably fast asleep in her cabin, it would be entirely thrown away upon her, and i had no intention of calling her up to listen to the serenade. i determined, however, to call harry should the canoes approach nearer; but the song ceased, and they disappeared in the darkness. i told old tom, who relieved me. "there's no harm in that sort of thing," he observed. "if the young chief takes to singing he will not dream of doing anything worse. maybe he'll not break his heart after all, though he may think of miss fanny for many a long day to come." in the morning the doctor came off again, and pronounced charles tilston very much better. he was able, indeed, to get up and breakfast with us in the cabin. he expressed his gratitude to harry for the attention he had paid him, and especially for the care he had taken of dick. he then told us, that on receiving dick's letter he had immediately set out, by his father's desire, to bring him home. wishing to take the shortest route, he had come over to america, and crossed the continent to san francisco; he there found the _caesar_ on the point of sailing, and had accordingly taken a passage in her. "i scarcely expected to reach sydney," he said. "the skipper was drunk the greatest part of every day, and sometimes for days together. it was a mercy that we got even as far as samoa; and had we not been wrecked, i had intended to leave the brig, and proceed by some other vessel. now that i have found my young brother i do not like to quit him again, but i am unwilling to deprive you of his services." "it will give me much pleasure if you will remain on board then," said harry. charles tilston, greatly to my satisfaction, at once accepted the invitation; for i had taken a great fancy to him, and was unwilling also to lose dick. harry arranged with him to go on shore to purchase some clothing and other necessaries at the store, in case his own portmanteau should not be recovered. the natives had, in the meantime, been collecting the goods thrown upon the beach from the wrecked vessel, not one of which was stolen, and bringing them into the town. we at once went to the place where they were stowed, and among them charles tilston discovered his own portmanteau, which he said professed to be waterproof. on opening it, he found that no wet had got in. it being delivered to him on a small payment for salvage, we returned with it on board. all that morning the calm continued, but in the afternoon, a breeze springing up, the pilot came off, and agreed to take us out. just as the sails were loosed, before we hove up the anchor, toa came alongside in his canoe. as was agreed on, fanny remained below, but mary came on deck to receive him, and to thank him for his kindness to me, but she said nothing about her sister. "and i am also most grateful to you for saving my life," said charles tilston. "had it not been for you i am fully convinced that i should have been drowned, and i beg you to accept a few articles--all i have to offer--as a remembrance of me." on this he put into his hand a handsome clasp knife, adding some gold pieces, with which the chief seemed highly pleased. i saw him continually looking towards the companion-hatch, as if he expected fanny to appear, but he waited in vain. at last, harry had to remind him that we were on the point of getting under weigh, and that it would be better for him to take his leave before we hove up the anchor. he was evidently trying to say something, but his tongue seemed to cling to the roof of his mouth; and heaving a sigh he stepped into his canoe and cast off. the anchor was immediately run up to the bows, and the sails filling, as there was a leading breeze, we ran swiftly out of the harbour. i saw the young chief standing up in his canoe, and waving to us his last farewells. not till we were well outside did fanny venture on deck. "take care," said mary laughing; "he may still come after us." however, he did not move his paddle, and we were soon out at sea, steering with a fair breeze to the eastward. chapter five. we had now a continuance of fine weather, and day after day sailed over the calm ocean, the surface just rippled by a gentle breeze, generally so much in our favour that we were able to rig out our big square sail, and to carry a topmast studding-sail. though it was near the line the heat was not very oppressive, unless when the wind fell altogether, and then it was hot. though i speak of the ocean being calm, there was always a perceptible swell, more perceptible when we were on the weather-side of a coral reef, against which the swell, finding an impediment to its progress, could be seen dashing with tremendous force, rising high in the air in masses of foam. we had before received a warning to keep at a respectful distance from such reefs whenever we could; but sometimes, unable to help ourselves, we were compelled to pass unpleasantly near. night and day we kept a vigilant look-out. sometimes, indeed, at night harry thought it prudent to heave to, rather than attempt running on when the chart showed us that coral banks abounded ahead. in the daytime, when the sun shone, those even some way below the surface could be seen by the look-out aloft at a considerable distance, from the darker colour of the water to that of the surrounding ocean. though it was very delightful to have the society of mary and fanny, yet at other times, when danger threatened, their presence greatly increased harry's anxieties, and i suspect that he often on these occasions wished that he had left them on shore. mary, however, always expressed her satisfaction at being with him. "just think how i should have felt all the time that you were away," she said one day. "i should have been picturing you attacked by savages, or tossed about by storms, or thrown upon a coral reef, or undergoing all sorts of other misfortunes, till i got you safe back again; and i am very sure that you would not have taken as much care of yourself as you now do for my sake. so, whenever you go to sea, remember that i intend to accompany you." we found charles tilston a very great addition to our society. he was well-informed, and full of life and spirits, right-minded, and earnest. he was very grateful also to harry and me for the way we had treated dick. he was so pleased at the account we gave of queensland, that he proposed remaining and settling there with dick as his companion. we were now approaching that part of the pacific in which tom platt had assured us we should find the islands round which pearl oysters abounded; but, as he could not give us the exact longitude and latitude, we expected to have to search some time before we found them. he believed it, however, to be two or three days sail to the northward of the island on which he had been cast away, and which was laid down accurately on the chart, and for that island we accordingly steered. on our course there we sighted a large lagoon island, and, as we approached the north-west end, a number of canoes came off from the shore. while at some distance the natives on board them were heard singing; as they drew near the clamour increased. now and then they interrupted their singing by giving way to loud shouts of laughter and violent gesticulations, as if they had been a party of madmen. their canoes were small, being only fifteen feet long, and generally containing three persons. each canoe was furnished with an outrigger, as also with a projecting point, both over the bows and stern, to enable them to get on board out of the water. they were formed of strips of cocoanut-wood neatly sewn together. when they got within a short distance of the schooner they ceased paddling, and no signs we could make would induce them to come alongside. to calm their fears, we offered them various articles. on this one canoe paddled briskly up, near enough to have the things thrown into her; then away she went, and another approached. after this, apparently to show their gratitude, they began a monotonous song. this made us all laugh, when they stopped and grinned in return; but although they seemed inclined to be friendly, they would not trust themselves near us. harry, however, thought that they might possibly not object to our landing on their island. a boat was accordingly lowered, and charles tilston, dick, and i, with tom tubb, jacky pott, and lizard, went in her. we carried several articles for barter, hoping, as we observed a large grove of trees on the shore, to obtain some cocoanuts. the moment the natives saw the boat, however, they paddled away and returned to the shore. as we approached the beach they assembled, shaking their spears, dancing, shouting, and making signs to us to keep off. when we retired a short distance they calmed down, but when we again approached they resumed their former behaviour, thus giving us to understand that, though they wished to be friendly, they did not desire a closer acquaintanceship. when we once more retired, they followed us in their canoes, but without exhibiting any hostility. we found that tom tubb, the new zealander, could make himself clearly understood, and we desired him to say that we wanted some cocoanuts; but they replied that they had only a sufficient number for themselves, and could not part with them. on our holding up various articles they cautiously approached, and presented us with some curious fish-hooks, matting, adzes made from the shell of the tridachna and ground very sharp, as also with numerous pearl shells. we came to the conclusion that they had some good reason to mistrust white men; indeed, we afterwards discovered that such was the case. the articles they valued most were buttons, pieces of iron, bottles, and cloth. we tried to obtain some of their spears and clubs, but with these they would not part. as we rowed away we saw them waving green boughs, a universal sign of good-will among the pacific islanders. their clothing consisted of the maro, a cloth worn round the waist; the chiefs having also a mantle of matting over their shoulders, while some wore feathers in their hair. none of the females appeared; no doubt they had all been hidden as they saw us approaching. their huts were constructed of long poles, bent so as to form a succession of arches, the ends of the poles being stuck in the ground, and the whole covered over with pandanus or palm leaves. they were evidently a very primitive race of people, and charlie observed that if one missionary could gain their confidence he would be able to make much progress among them. their island consisted of a coral reef of irregular shape, with a lagoon in the centre, in which were numerous knolls of various sizes rising four or five feet above the surface. the island itself, indeed, looked like a collection of islets, though in reality united by the reef, which was just a wash at half-tide, so that the inhabitants could have free communication with each other. we hoped to be more successful in obtaining cocoanuts and other vegetable productions at the next island at which we might touch. we made it the following day, but here also we were disappointed. it was a perfect lagoon island, consisting of a circle of land of a light clay colour, the lagoon of a beautiful blue tint. the highest ground was not more than twelve feet above the level of the sea, and we calculated that it was about six hundred feet wide to its lagoon. the shrubs were not numerous, seldom more than twelve to fifteen feet high. amid them rose conspicuously cocoanut-palms, and pandanus. there was but one narrow entrance into the lagoon; but, from the surf breaking on either side of it, harry considered that it would be dangerous to attempt passing through. we already knew that, however beautiful a coral island looks at a distance, the landing on it is very disappointing. in order to obtain cocoanuts we pulled for the shore on the lee side, where it seemed possible to land. as we approached the beach, however, we saw a large number of natives collected, and as we drew near they began shouting, gesticulating, and brandishing their long spears and clubs, making violent motions to us to retire. we had a white flag, which we waved, hoping they would understand that it was an emblem of peace, but they took no notice of it, and still threatened to attack us should we attempt to land. we therefore kept off at a respectful distance, and directed tom tubb, who could generally make himself understood, to address them. he singled out the chief, and told him that we were friends of the natives, and that we came simply to traffic. the chief merely shouted and gesticulated as fiercely as before, making signs to us to be off, evidently not wishing to have any intercourse with strangers. this enraged the new zealander, who, standing up in the bow of the canoe, became as much excited as the chief, brandishing the boat-hook as a spear, and making as if he would throw it at him. thus they continued for some time, till i thought it prudent to desire tom to cease, but he showed no inclination to do this, evidently taking pleasure in exciting the chief to the greatest pitch of fury. the rest of the natives becoming as enraged as their leader, presently began to assail us with pieces of coral, the only missiles they possessed. to avoid them we pulled away as rapidly as we could: indeed, as it was, several lumps of coral struck the boat. here again was another proof that the natives had cause to dread an intercourse with white men. the wind heading us we were compelled to make a tack to the eastward, when we sighted another lagoon island, on which, near the entrance, we saw a flag waving in the air, and near it a number of natives, all more or less dressed in shirts and trousers of various colours. they had no arms in their hands; and as we approached the entrance of the lagoon in a boat they came down to welcome us in a most friendly way. we were not long in discovering the cause, a native neatly dressed in shirt, trousers, and jacket, with a hat on his head, approaching, introduced himself as a native teacher. he could speak a few words of english; and, with the aid of tom tubb, we managed to carry on a conversation. he had been only two years on the island. when he first landed the people were as savage as those we had last visited. the whole had now become christians, and partly civilised. anxious as he was to instruct them in the truths of christianity, he was also desirous of improving their social condition. all the women were dressed in cotton gowns, the men as i have described; while their huts were of a superior construction to those on any of the neighbouring islands. the missionary assured us also that many of the people could read, and some could even write. we agreed that should we have the misfortune to be wrecked, how thankful we should be to find that we had been thrown on an island inhabited by these christian people, instead of such savages as those we had before met with. they supplied us with as many cocoanuts as they could spare. the missionary was instructing them how to make cocoanut oil, that they might be able to purchase with it such articles as they required, i may here remark that there are now very many islands which can rarely be visited by english missionaries, where native teachers have been the means of producing similar results. the next day we fell in with another similar island, in which a native teacher had a short time before landed. he had not been there more than a month or two when a vessel was wrecked which had some time before carried off several of the natives, and, undoubtedly, the only one of her crew who reached the shore would have been put to death had it not been for his interference. he not only saved the man's life, but endeavoured to instruct him in the truths of religion. for this, however, the fellow was far from grateful, for by his conduct he did much to impede the efforts of the teacher. the latter, when we went on shore, entreated us to take the man, who called himself sam pest, away with us. harry, for the sake of the teacher, undertook to do this, if pest was willing to go. when the question was put to him, he said that he had no objection, provided we would land him at some other island where he might do as he pleased. harry would make no promise as to where he would land him, notwithstanding which the man came willingly on board; and we bade farewell to the missionary and his flock. sam pest had been knocking about the pacific for the last twenty years he told me, sometimes on board whalers, at others serving in smaller craft, frequently living on shore among the heathen natives. he was, i found, a regular beachcomber--a name generally given to the vagabond white men who are scattered about in numbers among the islands of the pacific, to the great detriment of the natives, as by the bad example they set them they interfere much with the proceedings of the missionaries. pest was not so bad, perhaps, as many; he had frank manners, was certainly no hypocrite, for he was not at all ashamed of the life he had led. he had served on board vessels engaged in carrying off natives to work in the mines of peru, and he gave me many accounts of the atrocious ways in which they had been kidnapped. sometimes the poor islanders were enticed on board under the pretence of trading, others were carried off by force. on several occasions when canoes had come alongside, the men were dragged out of them, and the canoes sunk. in some instances whole islands had been depopulated, when, from the smallness of their number, the inhabitants were unable to defend themselves against the attacks of the kidnappers. i believe there is some soft part of the human heart, if it can be got at. by the way i talked to sam pest, and by occasionally giving him some tobacco, he seemed to take a liking to me. when i pointed out to him the evil of his ways, he acknowledged that he wished he were a better man, and if i would help him, he would try to him over a new leaf. i cannot say that i thought this very likely, from the way i heard him talking to the men. we had now commenced our search for the pearl islands, as tom platt asserted we must be close to them. he said that he was certain he should know them again if he could once get sight of them. now we stood to the northward, now tacked in one direction, now in another, now ran before the wind, carefully marking down our track on the chart, so that we might know what ground we had gone over. "this reminds me of the long time the missionary williams was searching for the island of barotonga before he discovered it," observed charles tilston. "he, however, went not to seek wealth for himself, but to carry a pearl of great price to the benighted inhabitants. how i should like to have a vessel and to cruise over the ocean with the same object in view, dropping missionaries here and there as it was found possible to land them." "such is being done now," i observed. "i heard a good deal about it at brisbane, and how the bishop of new zealand in his little schooner makes long voyages for that purpose. there are also two or three other vessels employed by different societies with the same object in view." "i must make inquiries about them," answered charles tilston, and he seemed lost in thought. as we had been four days cruising about without coming in sight of the wished-for islands, at last harry began to fear that old tom had made some unaccountable mistake. he again and again cross-questioned him on the subject. the mate was, however, positive that he was right, and that we should see the islands if we looked long enough for them. "they may be rather more to the eastward or northward than i fancied, but hereabouts i have no doubt we shall find them," he said in a positive tone. we accordingly extended our search, keeping always a sharp look-out from the mast-head. old tom frequently went up himself, spy-glass in hand, to sweep the horizon. at length, about noon on the sixth day, while he was aloft he raised a cheerful shout-- "land, land! away to the eastward; it is the island we are looking for!" as we had a fresh southerly breeze, the schooner was at once headed up in the direction he indicated. in a short time we could make out the land from the deck, which greatly resembled the other islands we had passed, looking like a fleet of vessels at anchor close together. as we stood on we could distinguish several smaller islands lying off the large one, which was the most thickly covered with trees. on getting still nearer we perceived a channel of clear water, along which we hoped to proceed to an anchorage off the larger island of which tom had told us, and as he had marked it well on his former visit he undertook to pilot the schooner to it. of course we took the usual precautions of heaving the lead and having a man at the mast-head, and one at each yardarm, while tom himself stood forward, his hand shading his eyes. the dangers were fewer than we expected, and with infinite satisfaction we at length brought up in a secure harbour. as we approached it a number of canoes similar to those i have before described, each carrying three men, came off to us. the natives appeared inclined to be friendly, for some were singing a song of welcome, and others waving green branches. summoning tom tubb and jacky pott to act as interpreters, we let the natives understand that we could only admit a dozen on board at a time, and that they must come unarmed. to this they made no objection, but seemed at once perfectly at their ease. from the curiosity they exhibited, they were evidently not accustomed to the sight of vessels in their harbour. they told the new zealander that they had seen on some time before, which confirmed the account the mate had given of his visit. when told that we came to buy pearls, they appeared in no way surprised, and at once agreed to supply us with as many as we wished for, as also with mother-of-pearl shells; the latter, though bulky, were well worth carrying, as there was at the time much demand for them in the market. my brother at once arranged the price we were to pay, with which the natives seemed perfectly satisfied: they also promised to bring us off a supply of cocoanuts. as soon as these arrangements were made, they paddled off to spread the good news among their fellow-islanders, and to collect the pearls already won from the bottom of the sea, of which they gave us to understand they had a good store. before evening the first party returned, bringing a larger number of pearls than we expected. few of them, however, were particularly fine, but on an average they were of good value, which encouraged us to hope that we should be well paid for our voyage. notwithstanding the friendly behaviour of the natives, harry considered it prudent to keep a vigilant watch during the hours of darkness. he told the natives that he should not expect to see them till the next morning. the night passed away without any cause for alarm. at daylight the next morning every canoe in the island appeared to be afloat; some brought off pearls, as well as mother-of-pearl shells and cocoanuts, and others were seen paddling out to the water between the reefs where the oyster-beds existed. we carried on a brisk trade for a couple of hours or more. the natives selected the knives and hatchets and other articles they required, and handed over the pearls in exchange. as one party had disposed of their pearls, they were told they must get into their canoes and leave the side of the vessel, while others took their places. thus there was no confusion, and all went on amicably. the trading over for the morning, as soon as we had breakfasted, charles tilston and i, with dick and two men, pulled off to watch the natives diving for the oyster-shells. about thirty canoes were floating over different spots, each having one diver on board. he had a large net basket fastened round his waist, and, as far as we could see, he was furnished with no other means for obtaining oysters. standing up in his canoe he drew a deep breath, then, holding his nostrils with one hand, down he dived, and remained below the water for a couple of minutes. on his return his bag was seen to be full of oysters. he had, it appeared, wrenched them off by main force with his hands. the water was so clear that he could see the oysters without difficulty, as he could also the approach of a shark or any other dangerous fish. he remained diving at intervals till his canoe was filled, when she returned to the shore with her freight. i found that the divers select that period of the day for carrying on their operations when the direct rays of the sun illumine the depths of the ocean. on making inquiries through tom tubb i found that, notwithstanding the number of sharks which infest those seas, very few of the natives lose their lives from them, as they are always on the watch for the creatures, and know how to elude them with wonderful skill and courage. every day brought us a fresh supply of pearls, and when we found that it began to fall off we produced some fresh articles to tempt them: gaily-coloured handkerchiefs and cloth, nails, scissors, hammers, gimlets, and similar things. all this time we had not gone on shore. the people were gentle and well behaved on board, but they were heathens and savages, so that it was impossible to tell how they might conduct themselves should they find that we were in their power. chapter six. we had now obtained a fair amount of cargo, and i would have returned to brisbane well satisfied with our voyage; but harry, being anxious to get as many pearls as could be procured, resolved to wait on as long as they came in freely and he had goods to pay for them. trading was just over for the day, when, looking towards the entrance to the harbour, i saw the topsails of a brigantine appearing over a point to the westward, but as the point was covered with trees, the masts of the schooner could not have been seen from her deck. her appearance showed us that the island was not so completely unknown as tom had supposed. i immediately told harry, who at once proposed sending a boat to assist in piloting her in, and pointing out a good anchorage should she be a stranger. tom offered to go, and i agreed to accompany him. as we got round the point, we saw that the brigantine was shortening sail, and before we were up to her she had dropped her anchor in mid channel, as if she were not aware of the existence of a harbour, or at all events had no intention of entering it. she was tolerably secure where she lay, and had the advantage of being able to get out again with less difficulty than if she had come into the harbour. we, however, went alongside. she was a rakish-looking craft, and there appeared to be a good many men on board. as we went up her side we saw a swarthy fellow with big whiskers standing to receive us. "hulloa, i did not know any other vessel was in here," he said, as we gained the deck. "where have you come from? what are you about?" "we hail from brisbane; we are engaged in trading with the natives," i answered. "and may i ask you in return where you come from, and what is the object of your voyage?" "we come from callao, and are engaged as you are," he answered. i did not like the tone of his voice or manner, and thought it useless asking any further questions. as i looked round the deck it struck me that the people i saw were as ruffianly a crew as i had ever set eyes on, and that the sooner we took our leave the better. i therefore merely observed that on seeing his vessel coming up the channel, supposing that he intended to enter the harbour we had pulled out to offer him our assistance, but that as he did not require it we would wish him good evening. "i don't like the looks of those chaps," observed tom, as we pulled away. "they're after no good." "i do not suppose that they will interfere with us," i remarked. "i'm not so sure of that," said tom. "they'll interfere with the natives and spoil our trade; at all events it would be as well to keep a watch on them, and the sooner we are out of their reach the better." old tom was not generally an alarmist; but i did not fancy that even out in the pacific, in the middle of the nineteenth century, any crew could be found who would venture to commit an act of violence on an english trader when they would be so surely discovered and brought to justice. still, i fancied that harry, who was always prudent, would take all necessary precautions. on hearing the account we gave of the trader he, however, to my surprise, laughed at my apprehensions. "she may not be altogether honest, and i daresay her crew would not scruple to ill-treat the natives; but they will not venture to interfere with us, or to misbehave themselves while we are here to watch them," he observed. he, however, afterwards, having had a conversation with old tom, instead of the usual anchor watch at sunset, ordered half the crew to remain on deck, the guns to be loaded, and the small arms placed in readiness for instant use. sam pest was in the first watch, and as i walked the deck i spoke to him as i frequently did. "i have been hearing about the strange craft which came in this evening, sir," he said, "and from what they say i think it's more than likely she's the one i was aboard of some time ago. strange pranks she played. her skipper was a regular rough one, never minded what he did, and thought no more of a man's life than that of a dog. i mind what happened once when we were away to the westward after sandal-wood, where the black men of one island are always at war with those of another, and when one side gains the victory never fail to kill and eat their enemies. we had gone to one island where the natives were friendly, and had got them to cut down and bring aboard a good quantity of the wood. when they had cut down all that was to be found in that part of the island, and we had shipped the best part of it, the skipper told them to bring off the remainder in their canoes and he would pay them handsomely. no sooner were they on board than he invited them down into the hold to receive their payment, when he had the hatches clapped on over them, and casting their canoes adrift made sail. he then told them that he was going to take them to another island where there was plenty of sandal-wood, and that when they had cut it down for him and shipped it he would take them back to their own country. this quieted them, though it seemed strange that they should have believed him. in three or four days we got to the island he spoke of, when about half the crew well armed landed with the black fellows, and soon set them to work on the sandal-wood trees, which were some way from the coast. we were on the watch all the time to prevent them or ourselves being attacked by the natives, who kept at a distance, for they dreaded our firearms, as we had shot three or four of them for coming too near. we made our prisoners carry the sandal-wood on their shoulders down to the harbour, when our boats took it on board. we went on in this fashion till we had got a full cargo, notwithstanding which the skipper said he must have the remainder of the wood cut down, and ordered our prisoners to go and fetch it. as they knew the way they trudged on as they had done for several days past. as soon as they were out of sight the skipper told us to give them the slip and return to the boats. on getting aboard he ordered the anchor to be hove up, and sail made, and stood out of the harbour. just then we saw the sandal-wood cutters come rushing back waving and shouting to us. "`you must shout louder for me to hear you,' cried the skipper. `i cannot stop for you.' "presently we saw a whole army of natives with spears and clubs come rushing out of the wood. they soon overtook the runaways, every one of whom was struck down or speared through before they reached the beach. "that's an easy way of paying our debts," says the skipper, and that was the only remark he made about the unfortunate wretches who were killed; and as the people in those islands are all cannibals i have no doubt were eaten by the next day. "this will give you, sir, some notion of the sort of man the skipper was, and if the same man commands the brigantine out there, it's just as well to be on our guard against him." when i went below to get some supper i told harry what sam had said. "i cannot take more precautions than we are now doing," he answered; "and as soon as we get a breeze to carry us out of the harbour, we'll put as wide a distance as we can between him and ourselves." it appeared after all, when morning came, that our precautions were unnecessary, not a canoe nor a boat was seen in the harbour; indeed, harry said that even supposing the crew of the brigantine were the greatest ruffians afloat it was very improbable that they would venture to attack us. only a few canoes came alongside bringing pearls or oyster-shells. the natives said that if we would wait for a few days they would procure a further supply from some beds at the other end of the island. harry, however, determined to sail as soon as possible. we now only waited for a fair wind, without which it would have been dangerous to attempt the passage between the reefs. breakfast was just over when a boat was seen pulling towards us; she evidently belonged to the brigantine. the guns had been secured, the small arms placed out of sight, and the awning having been rigged, mary and fanny were on deck seated with their work in their hands. presently the boat came alongside, and the skipper whom we had seen the previous evening stepped on deck. harry received him politely, and begged to know the cause to which he was indebted for a visit from him. "just come to learn what you are about, here," answered the skipper in a gruff tone. "i am captain samuel myers. my vessel is the _wasp_, now belonging to callao." "i am happy to see you, captain myers; but i thought that my brother, who visited you yesterday evening, had told you that we were on a trading voyage, and about to return immediately to brisbane." "what have you been trading in?" asked captain myers. "i should not have thought there was much to be got in these islands." harry frankly told him, adding, "we have, i believe, obtained all the pearls the natives had collected." "where those came from, others may be got," observed the skipper. "i know a trick or two to make the natives work for me; and i should be obliged to you, captain, if you'd show me some of those you have got, that i may see whether they are worth having." harry, not liking to refuse, as it would have shown want of confidence in his visitor, told me to bring up one of the cases, as also some specimens of the oyster-shells. i did not think it necessary to select the finest. when captain myers saw them his eyes glittered. "i did not think there were such pearls to be got in these parts," he observed. "have you many of them, captain?" "enough to satisfy me," answered harry. "indeed, as i said before, i do not think there are many more to be procured at present." "we shall see about that," remarked captain myers, glancing his eyes round the deck. they fell, i observed, on the guns, and he evidently noted each man of our crew, who had come up to have a talk with the strangers alongside. harry had not invited any of the latter on board, and i guessed had no intention of doing so. captain myers waited, as if expecting to be asked below to take something, as is usual when one skipper visits another; but harry, who did not like his appearance more than i had done, apologised by saying that, as the cabin was devoted to the use of the ladies, he could not invite strangers into it; but not wishing altogether to be inhospitable, he ordered the steward to bring up some wine and spirits and biscuits, which were placed in a tray on the companion-hatch. our visitor, without ceremony, poured out for himself half a tumbler of rum, to which he added a very small quantity of water. "i like a nip neat at this time of the morning," he observed, as he gulped it down. "it sets a fellow up. well, as you have got ladies aboard, i won't trouble you with my company any longer," he added, taking another look round the deck. "good morning to you," and without more ado he stepped back into his boat. i saw him surveying the schooner as he pulled away. as soon as he was gone, sam pest came aft. "he's the very chap i thought he was, and as neat a villain as ever lived," he said. "i knew him at a glance, but i do not know if he knew me. if he did, he did not show it; but that's just like him, for he is as cunning as need be, and, depend on it, will be up to some trick or other if he thinks he can play it to his own advantage." i repeated to harry what sam pest had said. "he must be very cunning to play us a trick while we are on our guard," observed harry. we noticed that the brigantine's boat pulled for the shore, her skipper having apparently no fear of the natives. we were now waiting anxiously for a breeze to get out of the harbour, but not a breath of wind stirred its smooth surface. as we were not likely to be able to sail at all events till the evening, when there might be a breeze, some of the men asked leave to go on shore; but harry, suspecting their object was to have a talk with the boat's crew of the brigantine, refused, and told tom platt to find work for them on board. captain myers did not pay us another visit during the day, but we saw his boat pulling back to the brigantine in the afternoon. what he had been about on shore we could not tell, but no more natives came alongside with pearls or oyster-shells, though we saw several canoes paddling out as if about to proceed to the _wasp_. "if i was your brother i'd keep a look-out for any trick captain myers may be inclined to play," said sam pest to me. "he may think that the shortest way of getting a cargo of pearls will be to rob this here schooner, and send her to the bottom." "you don't mean really to say that you think he is capable of so black a deed," i said. "i tell you there's nothing he would stick at," answered sam in a positive tone. "i ain't very particular myself, but i've seen him do things, besides the one i told you of, which made my blood curdle, and heartily wish i was clear of him. i have seen him heave shot into canoes, and sink them alongside the vessel, just to get rid of the natives; and another time when we had some aboard who were somewhat obstreperous when shut up in the hold, he shot them down as if they had been a parcel of rats, and threw some overboard with life still in them. if he does not meddle with us, he'll treat the natives in this place in a way which will make them turn against all white men. for you see they cannot distinguish one from the other; and we shall find it unpleasant, to say the best of it, to remain here." i heartily thanked sam for the warning, and assured him that my brother would not forget his good intentions, even though captain myers might not act as he thought possible. of course i repeated what sam had told me to harry, when the ladies were not within hearing, for it might have made them unnecessarily anxious. although my brother was inclined as before to laugh at the idea of captain myers attacking us, he took the same precautions as on the previous night. tom platt and i had the first watch, with dick tilston, tubbs the new zealander, and three other men; a couple of hands, besides the officer, would have been sufficient on an ordinary anchor watch. we kept a look-out, by tom's advice, not only in the direction of the brigantine, but also towards the shore. "you cannot tell what dodge those chaps may be up to," he observed. "they may come in their own boats, or just as likely aboard a number of canoes, to make us fancy that they are only a party of natives coming off to trade." harry and charles tilston, with the rest of the men, had gone below, but did not intend to take off their clothes, so that they might be ready to spring on deck at a moment's notice. with all the precautions we had taken i cannot say that i felt particularly anxious; indeed, i must own that i should not have been very sorry if captain myers had made an attempt to overpower us. i continued walking the deck, talking to dick, and occasionally exchanging a word or two with old tom. the night was calm, and the bright stars shining down from the clear sky were reflected as in a mirror on the surface of the harbour. the only sound heard was the low dash of the sea on the distant reefs, and occasionally some indistinct noise from the shore. my watch was nearly over, and i felt that if my head was on the pillow i should in a moment be fast asleep. suddenly, as i stopped in my walk, i fancied i heard the splash of oars, but so far off that i could not be certain. i listened, leaning over the bulwarks, with my hand to my ear. again i heard the sound, more distinctly than before, but though i peered into the darkness i could see nothing. i went across the deck to tell tom, but he had not heard the sound. "it may be one of the _wasp's_ boats, but that's no reason why she's coming here," he answered. "however, we'll be on the watch for her, and take precious good care that she does not come alongside for the purpose of doing us harm." after this i listened, but could hear no sound, and at length fancied that i must have been mistaken. it was just on the point of striking eight bells, and i was leaning over the bulwarks, when i thought i saw two objects through the gloom. i kept my eyes fixed on them. dick was close to me. "look out, and tell me if you see anything," i whispered to him. "yes; two boats, and i fancy there's another astern," he answered. "you're right," i said. "run and tell the captain, and rouse up the men for'ard; they're not coming at this time of night with any good intentions." the men were prepared, and every one was on deck in less than a minute, with cutlasses at their sides, pikes in their hands, and the guns cast loose, ready for firing. three boats now came in sight. the moment harry saw them, he shouted at the top of his voice, "keep off, or we fire and sink you." instead of dashing on, as they might have done, the crews of the boats ceased pulling: the threat had had a good effect. they were near enough even now to enable us to send a shot among them; but unless they had given stronger evidence of their intentions of attacking us than they had done, harry was unwilling to fire. still it was a critical time; and from the number of men on board the brigantine, we knew that they might possibly overpower us; at the same time, if our men behaved with courage, it was more probable that we should beat them off. still, it might not be done without bloodshed, if they attacked us with resolution. we had the guns in readiness pointed at them to fire, should they again approach. harry again shouted-- "we know what you are about; if you come on it will be at your own peril." no answer was given; still the boats remained on the same spot without advancing. "let us give them a shot or two, sir," shouted tom at the top of his voice. "it will show them we are in earnest." scarcely had he spoken when the dark objects receded, becoming less and less distinct, till they disappeared in the darkness. tom very seldom indulged in a chuckle, but he did so on this occasion. "i thought as how it would have a good effect," he observed. "they expected to take us by surprise, and had no stomach for fighting. maybe their skipper wanted them to come on, for he is ready for anything, but the men would not. it's my opinion they are cowards at heart, though boasting knaves when there's no danger." "what you say, mr platt, is very true," i heard sam pest remark. "well done, platt," said harry. "your words had a good effect. i don't think they'll trouble us again to-night." "we must not be too sure, sir, of that," said tom. "perhaps the skipper will think that towards morning we shall not be keeping so bright a look-out, and may try to steal alongside to surprise us; but he'll find himself mistaken." as i was very sleepy i went below and lay down, but heard old tom say that he should remain on deck till daylight. next morning harry told me that the boats had appeared, but being hailed to keep off, they had not come nearer, and that he had not thought it necessary to call up all hands as he had done before. being in the neighbourhood of a pirate, as she was nothing else, was very disagreeable, to say the least of it. indeed, she in a manner blockaded us, for we could not venture to tow the schooner out to sea lest her boats might attack us in some critical position. still harry determined that should we get a leading breeze to sail past her, taking the opportunity of doing so while her boats were away. we saw them passing to the eastward, apparently going to compel the natives to dive for oysters. the calm continued the greater part of that day; but although towards the evening a breeze sprang up, it was too light and not sufficiently favourable to enable us to run out of the harbour. we therefore had to pass another anxious night. the ladies were not by this time entirely ignorant of what had occurred, but harry made as light of it as possible; saying that the fellows would not really venture to annoy us, however willing they might be to get possession of our pearls if they could do so without fighting. the third night began; about the middle of the first watch the breeze increased so much, that harry, who had come on deck, consulted with tom whether we should get the schooner under weigh, and run past the brigantine in the dark. "if there was a lighthouse at the end of the reef, and we had a pilot aboard, i would not mind trying it, sir," said tom. "but you see it would be an awkward job if we were to run ashore; besides, it's just possible that the _wasp's_ boats may be on the look-out for us, and hope to catch us napping this time, though they were wrong before." harry said he felt pretty sure of the channel, but the last objection was of more importance, and he determined therefore to wait till daylight. it was settled, accordingly, that as soon as the _wasp's_ boats were seen going in the direction of the oyster-beds, we were to heave up the anchor, and make sail. at the same time, as there might be hands enough left on board the brigantine to attack us, we were to have the guns loaded, and be prepared to defend ourselves if necessary. the remainder of the night passed quietly away; we were thankful to find in the morning a steady and favourable breeze still blowing, which would enable us to run out of the harbour and pass the brigantine without making a tack. we had just breakfasted, when we saw three boats cross the mouth of the harbour, and, after pulling in to the shore and waiting for some time, continue their course, accompanied by a number of canoes, to the oyster-beds. as soon as they were out of sight, we hove up the anchor and made sail, as had been arranged. getting outside, we saw the brigantine lying directly in our course. "with so many of her crew away, her skipper will not attempt to interfere with us," said harry. we were under all plain sail, and, as there was a good breeze, we ran quickly through the water as before, with men on the look-out forward, and the lead kept going. we could almost have thrown a biscuit aboard the brigantine as we passed her. besides the captain, there were very few men on her deck. "good day, captain myers," said harry. "we'll report your whereabouts at sydney. have you any message there?" i need not repeat the answer the skipper gave. it was such as might have been expected from so thorough a ruffian. the next moment, stooping down, he lifted up a musket and presented it at us. "if you fire so will i," i shouted; but before i could pull my trigger a bullet whistled past my ear. providentially no one was hit. my bullet also flew wide of its mark; indeed, i was too much hurried to take aim. "don't fire again," cried harry. "the man must be mad." probably no other musket was at hand, as the captain of the _wasp_ did not again fire. in a short time we were out of range, and we had too much to do in attending to the navigation of the schooner to think just then much about the matter. from the number of rocks close to which we passed, i was thankful that we had not attempted to run out during the dark. at length we were in the open ocean, and, with a fair breeze, we steered to the westward. chapter seven. the breeze fell before we had entirely lost sight of the pearl islands, and, indeed, from aloft i could still make out the masts of the brigantine as she lay at anchor. it crossed my mind that captain myers might even now follow us; but i saw no indication of the vessel getting under weigh; still, daring ruffian as he appeared to be, he might be tempted to try and possess himself of the rich freight we carried. i did not mention the idea which had occurred to me to harry, as there would be no use in doing so, for we were carrying all the sail we could set on the schooner, but our progress was very slow, and there was a possibility of our being becalmed again during the night. as we could see the brigantine, we also must still be visible from her mast-head, and myers was probably keeping a watch on our movements. should we be becalmed before sundown, it was possible that he might make another attempt in his boats to capture us, hoping to catch us off our guard. "he shall not do that, at all events," i thought to myself. "i will not say anything to harry unless we are becalmed, and then i will tell him the idea which has occurred to me." our progress was so slow that i fancied there must be a current setting against us, but of this i was uncertain. the currents which set in various directions between the islands of the pacific are among the dangers which voyagers in those seas have to encounter. i asked tom what he thought about the matter. "there may be a current," he said, "but if there is one it is not of much strength. you see we are moving but slowly through the water. we'll heave the log presently, and you'll find that we are not going more than two knots, if as much as that." tom was right; with his practised eye he could always tell in smooth water how fast the vessel was moving. we now went slower and slower, till at length the canvas hung down from the yards emptied of wind, and we had no longer steerage way on the vessel. evening was drawing on, and we might expect to remain becalmed all night. we had, however, we supposed, plenty of sea room, and had no apprehension of being drifted on any unseen coral reef; i thought, however, that it was time to tell harry of my apprehensions. "the same thing occurred to me," he answered. "however, i do not really suppose that the fellow myers, ruffian as he is, will make the attempt after having found us before so wide-awake. had we been unarmed the case would have been different, as he would have been glad enough to possess himself of our cargo, if he could have done so without the certainty of getting some hard blows. however, we will be on the watch as before, and ready to give his boats a warm reception if they attempt to molest us." we enjoyed our usual pleasant evening meal, and afterwards had music, reading, and lively conversation till bed-time. the mate, meanwhile, kept watch, while i occasionally slipped up on deck to see if there was any prospect of a breeze springing up. "not an air in all the heavens," answered old tom. "it is better than having a westerly gale to drive us back towards the islands. maybe we shall get a breeze before the morning, and slip along merrily on our course." "i hope so," i said. "the captain wishes you to keep a bright look-out to the eastward, in case our buccaneering friends may be coming to pay us a visit." "trust me for that," said tom. "i have not forgotten them, and the last words the captain spoke to that fellow myers will make him more than ever eager to prevent our getting to sydney. i don't mean to say that he will take us, or that he has a chance of taking us, but he is very likely to try it." after the ladies had retired to their cabins, harry came on deck. "i have told them not to be alarmed if they hear us firing, for i am determined should the pirates make their appearance to stand on no terms with them, but, if i can, to send their boats to the bottom before they get up alongside." "a very right way, too, of treating them, sir," observed tom. "if we can sink their boats it might be the saving of the lives of many of the poor islanders, for, depend on it, when they have got all the pearl shells they can, they will be carrying off as many of the people as the brigantine can hold. i have seen something of the way those sort of fellows behave, and sam pest has been telling me more about it." the watch on deck were all awake, and the men below had been warned that they must be ready to spring up at a moment's notice; the guns were loaded, and our other weapons were placed handy, ready for use. as old tom observed, "if they do not come, there's no harm done; and if they do, why they'll pretty soon find out that they've had their pull for nothing." as tom had been awake the whole of the first watch, harry told him to go below, observing that he and i would keep a look-out. "no, thank you, sir," answered tom; "i will get my sleep by-and-by; i'd like to be ready in case the pirates should follow us." "you, ned, had better then go below, as you cannot do without sleep, and you can be called if you are wanted." i was just about to do as he advised me, when old tom, pointing to the eastward, towards which our starboard broadside was turned, exclaimed, "as sure as i'm an englishman there come the boats, and i can make out three of them pulling abreast; we shall see them more clearly presently." the watch below, which had lately turned in, were soon roused up, and i called charlie tilston, as he had begged me to do. "we will have the port guns over to the starboard side, and give the fellows a salute which will show that we are not to be caught napping," said harry. "all ready, there?" he took charge of one gun, tom of another, lizard of the third, and i of the last. we waited till the boats had got as far as we could judge within range, and then fired together, aiming as carefully as we could. we then immediately reloaded, to be ready for them should they make a dash at us. whether or not we had hit either of the boats we could not be certain, they still appeared to be coming on. just then harry exclaimed-- "trim sails; here's the breeze." the helm was put up, the fore-topsail blew out, the mainsail filled. "ease off the main-sheet," cried harry, and the schooner began to glide once more through the water. we watched the boats now right astern; they still kept following us, hoping not to let their prey escape them. we had two ports in the stern, through which our guns could be fired. harry had them dragged over for that purpose, and we at once began to blaze away at our pursuers. for some time we could see them still following us, showing that they had hitherto escaped our shot. the breeze was freshening, the schooner ran faster and faster through the water. "hurrah! they have given it up," i shouted, as i saw them pulling round. "one more parting shot," cried old tom, and before harry could stop him he fired. "that was not a miss, at all events," he cried out. almost immediately afterwards we could distinguish only two boats-- evidence that one of them had been sunk. in a short time we had completely lost sight of them, and all fear of pursuit was over. we had reason to be thankful that we had avoided a fight, for, desperate as the fellows were, many of us might have been wounded, if not killed, even though we had driven them back; the alternative of their succeeding was too dreadful to contemplate. harry at once hastened below to assure mary and fanny that all danger was over. i now turned in, and though i went to sleep in a moment i kept dreaming all the time that the pirates were boarding us, that we were fighting desperately; sometimes captain myers was on deck flourishing a cutlass, singing, "i'm afloat, i'm afloat," and the "rover is free," at others, with his cut-throat companions, he was struggling in the water while old tom was pelting them with marline-spikes. i was very thankful when i went on deck to find the schooner running on with a fair breeze, and no land anywhere in sight. mary and fanny, though they had been naturally very anxious, soon recovered their spirits, and everything went on as pleasantly as could be desired, charles tilston was well-informed, and made himself very agreeable, and though he had no intention of becoming a sailor, he soon learned how to take an observation, and could work it out as well as harry himself. he was always ready also to pull and haul and be as useful as he could. he spent a portion of every day in giving dick instruction in mathematics and other subjects in which his brother was somewhat deficient, and he also kindly offered to help me with my studies. as harry wished to obtain samples of such produce as the islands afforded, he had settled to visit those which were at no great distance from our course to the westward. the first island we sighted after leaving the pearl islands was of considerable size, with a lagoon in the centre. we observed at the south-east end a broad entrance, through which it appeared we might pass without difficulty into the lagoon. near one side was a village, and the whole island appeared thickly covered with cocoanut and other trees. as from this it seemed probable that we might obtain some palm-oil, the schooner was hove to, and charlie tilston and i, with tom tubb and three other men, pulled for the shore. as we approached we saw a number of natives rushing down to the beach, all fully armed; but they were not so savage in appearance as those who had prevented us from landing on the islands we had before visited. they shouted and gesticulated, however, making signs that we must not attempt to set foot on shore. we, however, still pulled on, and as we got closer, tom tubb hailed them, and desired to know why they were so inhospitable. they answered-- "we know why you have come. not long ago a vessel appeared and carried off a number of our people, and you will try to do the same; but we will prevent you." our interpreter tried to explain that our object was simply to trade honestly; that if they had any cocoanut oil, we would give them a fair price for it. "we will not trust you," was the answer. "go away! go away!" as we saw several of the people clothed in shirts, and some even in trousers, we had no doubt that a missionary was among them, though we could not distinguish him from the rest. it was, however, evident that they had been visited by a kidnapping vessel, and some of their people, probably christians, had been carried off into slavery. finding, notwithstanding all our protestations that we were honest traders, that the natives would not allow us to land, charlie and i agreed that it would be folly to attempt doing so, and therefore returned to the vessel. soon after this we came off another island totally different to any we had before visited, being formed of corals that had been uplifted to the height of upwards of two hundred feet, and surrounded by cliffs worn into caverns. as no natives appeared, harry did not wish to lose time by landing. the islands of the pacific present a great variety of forms, although the larger number are either partly or entirely surrounded by coral reefs. these reefs, however, vary in construction; some are called encircling reefs, when they appear at a distance from the shore, and a lagoon intervenes; others are called fringing reefs, which are joined to the land, and extend out from it without any lagoon. others are denominated lagoon islands, when the reef itself, raised above the surface of the ocean, forms the land generally in a circular shape, and surrounds a lake or lagoon, which has sometimes a passage to the sea, and at others is completely closed. then there are atoll islands; these rise within a large encircling reef, which is seldom perfect, having passages here and there through it. sometimes there are elevations on the reef itself, forming islands; but frequently the reef is a wash with the sea. besides these, there are the great barrier reefs which extend along the larger part of the eastern coast of australia, part of new guinea, and new caledonia. some of these are several hundred miles in extent. these countless reefs are all formed by the coral insect. the difference of their appearance is owing to various causes: some by the subsidence of the land; others by its elevation through volcanic agency. the encircling reefs have been produced by the subsidence of the land; they were originally fringing reefs, having been attached to the coastline of the country or islands. as the land sank, the insects went on building one generation above another; but they can only work in a certain depth of water--below which they die; thus a wall has been built up on the foundations formed by the original workers, who constructed a fringing reef. after a time, the last architects have died, storms have thrown up pieces of coral shells and other debris on the top of the wall, birds have brought seeds of plants, the ocean has washed cocoanuts and other palm seeds on to the top: thus vegetation has been commenced, and finally groves of trees and shrubs have grown up. the barrier reefs have been formed in the same way. where no vegetation appears, the has probably sunk as rapidly as the creatures have built, and the sea has continued to wash over it. other groups have been formed by the violent elevation of the land when the barrier reef has been broken into and wide gaps have appeared. the last island we visited, surrounded by high cliffs, must have been formed by the sudden upheaval of the earth beneath it, so that the whole mass of coral was lifted above water. such has been the origin of a considerable number of islands. the most beautiful and picturesque, like tahiti and others in that group, owe their present shape to the subsidence to the earth, they being merely the summits of mountain ranges, probably of some vast continent, of which the lower land has been submerged. the gaps or openings in the encircling reefs are always found opposite to a river or stream. the coral insect can only build in pure salt water; the fresh water running out from the river has, therefore, prevented its upward progress; thus a gap in the wall has been formed serving as a safe entrance to the inner lagoon. knowing these facts, it was easy to decide to which class the islands and reefs we passed belonged. there was always, therefore, matter of interest before us. volcanic action has been the agent of many of the islands to the westward, where several still active volcanoes exist. many of those in that direction are clothed with the richest vegetation. they are inhabited by dark-skinned races; still the most savage among those of the pacific, such as the new hebrides, santa cruz, solomon islands, and new ireland, to the eastward of new guinea. they produce the finest sandal-wood, and harry determined to visit some of them, in order to obtain a supply before returning home. he had, however, settled to call first, as i have said, at the islands, where he hoped to be able to purchase palm-oil. the first we reached after this was very similar to those already described. the natives, as we appeared, came off to the schooner in their canoes, and invited us to enter a secure harbour into which they offered to pilot her. several of those who boarded us were dressed in shirts, and one of them spoke a sufficient amount of english to make himself understood. he said that two native missionaries were settled on the island, and that all the inhabitants were christians. they had also, he added, a good quantity of palm-oil, of which they would be glad to dispose. harry, therefore, without hesitation, accepted their invitation, and we brought up within the outer reef, at no great distance from the shore. none of the people now cared for the trinkets and other trumpery which they formerly so greatly sought for, but desired to have cotton goods, axes, knives, carpenters tools, fish-hooks, cooking utensils, and other things required by a civilised community. they also asked for paper, pens and ink, and copybooks. we had, unfortunately, no bibles or other books in their language, or we might have disposed of a good number, so eager were they to procure them. they all behaved, when on board, in a quiet and sedate manner, though they were evidently merry fellows, for we saw them laughing and joking among themselves. their huts were larger and better built than any we had lately seen, and those we visited were remarkably clean and tidy; yet one of the missionaries whose acquaintance we had made, and who could speak a little english, told us that the people a few years ago were as savage as any of those in that part of the pacific. we bought a dozen casks of palm-oil at a fair price, calculating the value of the goods we gave in return. the people said if we would come back they would have a further quantity with which to supply us. we warned them about the _wasp_, and gave them a minute description of her, so that should she appear they might avoid being entrapped. they replied that they had heard of such vessels cruising about to carry off the natives, but that none had visited their island, and that they had therefore doubted of their existence. they thanked us much for warning them, and promised to be on their guard. we advised them to be cautious how they went on board any vessels before being acquainted with their character. the next island off which we called was also inhabited by christian natives, who supplied us with six casks of oil. i have not space more minutely to describe the islands we touched at. wherever missionaries were established, there the people were more or less civilised, industrious, and happy. they had not ventured to lay aside their weapons altogether, as they might be required to defend themselves against the nefarious proceedings of lawless white men; but as soon as they found that we came to trade honestly with them, they put them by, and mixed among us without the slightest sign of fear, not even attempting to keep their women out of our sight. when mary and fanny landed, the latter gathered round them, expressing their wonder at their dresses and fair complexions, we felt indeed that we were among friends who could be thoroughly trusted. having obtained as much palm-oil as we required, we now steered to the south-west for vavau, one of the friendly islands, of which the civilised king george is the ruler. we made it early in the morning, and, the wind being fair and the harbour easy of access, without waiting for a pilot we stood on, having two small islands on the eastern side, and a larger one to the westward. vavau appeared of uniform height. at first we did not see many signs of fertility or cultivation; the cliffs rose abruptly from the sea without a fringing reef; but the water had worn the coral rocks, which stand out from the shore, into the shape of huge mushrooms on their stalks. when once we were inside, however, signs of the most industrious cultivation showed themselves. the country was covered with woods, looking like one vast garden, while from every village came the sound of the mallet, used by the women in beating out the native cloth. at a wharf not far off were several large double canoes taking in cargoes for another port; beyond could be seen a number of comfortable-looking houses. numerous huts of smaller dimensions peeped out from among the trees, while at some distance apart were buildings of considerable size, which we afterwards found to be churches. altogether we felt that we had come to a civilised country. soon after we had dropped anchor, an old native gentleman came off in a large canoe, and introduced himself as the viceroy of vavau, and begged to know the object of our visit. harry replied that he had come to refit the schooner, but should be happy to trade if we could procure any of the articles we required. the old chief said that the people would be ready to receive money as payment for any of their produce, that they had cotton, and palm-oil, and beche-de-mer, cocoanuts, native cloth, and various other articles, and that they could supply us with an abundance of hogs and goats, and vegetables of all sorts at a cheap rate. we were received, as we had been at samoa, by the white inhabitants in a very kind way, but as harry was anxious to refit the schooner as soon as possible, the two ladies, under the escort of charlie tilston, could alone be much on shore. we, however, managed to see something of the country--the roads in course of construction in all directions across it, the cotton plantations and well-cultivated gardens, and many other signs of the industry of the people. the greatest novelty was the manufacture of the native cloth, or tapa, formed out of the bark of the paper-mulberry tree. the natives universally wear it for clothing, and as it cannot stand any amount of wet and is easily spoiled, there is a constant demand for it. it is manufactured entirely by the women. the young tree is first cut down and the bark is stripped off; it is then steeped in water for a couple of days, when the inner is separated from the coarse outer rind. this is then beaten by a mallet, resembling a square razor strop with small furrows on the under side, till it becomes almost as thin as silver paper, and of course is greatly increased in size. even then it is scarcely a foot wide, but the edges are overlapped and stuck together with arrowroot melted in water; it is then again beaten till all the parts are completely joined. pieces are thus made of many yards in length. a mucilaginous dye is then used, both to colour the cloth, and further to strengthen it, until large bales are formed of a single piece, from which portions are cut off as required for use. some of those we saw were fifty yards long and four yards wide. when thus formed, it is called tapa or taba, a name by which it is generally known among all the islands of the pacific. it is afterwards beautifully coloured, sometimes by a stamp, at others by painting it by hand, when it is known as gnatu. a coarser kind, worn by the common people, is made from the bark of the bread-fruit tree. a number of canoes came alongside, bringing turkeys, fowls, eggs, and a variety of fruits and vegetables, among which were pine-apples, bananas, yams, sweet potatoes, cabbages, and onions. besides cotton, the natives produce tobacco for their own use, and probably, before long, cotton manufactures will supersede the tapa. although the former will be more useful, it has not the elegance of the native cloth. we visited a chapel built in the native style; it was upwards of a hundred feet long by forty-five wide, and nearly thirty high. it had a high-pitched roof, with curved ends, and two rows of columns, each three of the lower column supported a short beam, from which sprang a second series bearing the ridge-pole. these, as well as the horizontal beam, were beautifully ornamented with cocoanut plait, so arranged as to give the appearance of grecian mouldings, of infinite variety and delicate gradations of colour--black, with the different shades of red and yellow, being those employed. altogether the effect was very artistic and pleasing. the tongans are said to be the best canoe builders and navigators in the pacific. one of the chiefs exhibited, with some pride, a large double canoe, which consisted in the first place of a canoe a hundred feet in length, and half a dozen or more in width; the second canoe was composed of a tree hollowed out for the sake of buoyancy like the canoe, but was, in reality, merely an outrigger. the large canoe was formed of planks lashed together with cocoanut plait; beams were then laid between the two, on which was erected a house for the stowage of provisions; above this rose a platform surrounded by a railing, forming the deck of the vessel. it had been built by tongans in the fijis, where suitable timber could alone be procured. these vessels, frail and unwieldy as they appear, are navigated in the face of the trade wind between two and three hundred miles, the tongans making voyages to fiji and also to samoa. we were told that six years are required to build one. the sail, formed of matting, is triangular, spread on a long yard. the vessel is never tacked, but the sail is lowered, shifted over, and again hoisted when beating to windward. we made the acquaintance of a young chief--greatly resembling our samoan friend toa--who offered to show us some interesting caverns which exist along the coast. the distance was too great for the ladies to venture, as we had to perform the voyage in a small canoe, and should be away the whole day; but harry told charlie and dick tilston, nat and me, that we might go. we started at daylight in two canoes, with an ample supply of provisions on board, nat and i accompanying the young chief alea. he could speak a little english, and gave us an interesting legend connected with one of the caves. years ago, a chief had rebelled against the king of the country, when, being defeated, he and his family were condemned to death. he had a very beautiful daughter, who had a lover belonging to another family. having gained intelligence of the intention of the king to exterminate the family of his beloved, he hastened to her, and managed, without being discovered, to carry her on board a small canoe which he had in waiting. she asked how he could possibly hope to escape by such means from the vengeance of the king, who would destroy him as well as herself. he told her not to fear--that he had a place of concealment, where, notwithstanding the most vigilant search which could be made for her, she would never be discovered. they paddled away till they reached a cliff which rose out of the water. "i see no cavern in which i can be concealed," she said. "fear not; i will conduct you to one, notwithstanding," he answered, and, taking her hand, desired her to leap overboard. trusting him to the full, she obeyed; and, both diving, they swam for some distance, till they rose in the centre of a large cavern with rocks, free of water, on one side of which there was sufficient space to rest. here he told her that she might remain secure, and that he would bring her food every night, till he could make arrangements for their escape to fiji. he had discovered the cavern, he said, not long before, when diving for a turtle. he was unable to fulfil his promise till he came, one night, and told her that a large double canoe, with friends of his, was waiting outside. they were soon on board, and arrived safely in fiji, where they remained till the death of the king enabled them to return to vavau. from this legend byron draws a romantic account of neuha's cave in his poem of "the island." as our friend had not described the first cave to which he took us, we were surprised and delighted with it. the mouth was of considerable width, sufficient to admit two or three boats abreast. once inside, the water was fully five fathoms deep. we here found ourselves amid columns and stalactites hanging from the high-domed roof, resembling gothic arches. the bright sunlight streamed down through the wonderfully clear water, and was reflected up from the sparkling stones and coral at the bottom, with a beautiful series of light tints, and shades of delicate blue and green, over every part of the walls and vaulted roof. we agreed that it was the fit abode of the most charming of sea-nymphs and mermaids; indeed, we almost expected to see some of the fair ladies seated among the rocks, combing their hair. at the further end there was an arched passage, sloping upwards till it reached an opening in the roof above. some of our companions landed, and made their way up it, now appearing, now disappearing among the rocks, the effect in their progress being singularly picturesque and scenic. on their return, after visiting another smaller cave, we made sail for neuha's cavern. on arriving at the spot, we in vain looked for any sign of the entrance, till the chief pointed out to us two poles placed crosswise, which, he said, marked it. "now, which of you would like to accompany me into the cavern?" he asked. "you must be prepared for a long dive." neither charlie nor dick tilston were willing to venture, on hearing how long they would have to hold their breath. at last i agreed to go, the chief undertaking to keep hold of my hand, and to conduct me in safety. on looking down, with our backs to the sun, we could see a darker patch than usual among the coral-covered rocks, some eight feet below the surface: this was the entrance. we had brought a long line, which was secured to one of the canoes. a follower of the chief's, taking the end, jumped overboard. by watching him carefully we saw him disappear in the midst of the dark patch. he was absent for about ten minutes, and he said that he had made the line secure in the inside of the cavern. after he had rested a little while, the chief asked me if i was ready, when, he and his follower taking me by the arm, we dived downwards, the chief keeping the end of the line in his hand to guide us. i held my breath and struck out with my feet, but my companions had some difficulty in keeping me down sufficiently to avoid scraping my back against the sharp points which project from the roof of the passage. as the whole distance was thirty feet, i was so much exhausted by the time i reached the surface inside the cavern that i could not at first admire its wonders. my companions helped me to a ledge of a rock just visible in the dusk, where we stopped to rest ourselves. the subdued light within the cave was derived entirely from the reflection through the mouth of the submerged passage, and i was at first afraid that i should scarcely be repaid the exertion i had made and the risk run. suddenly, however, the chief leaped into the water, and began swimming about, when the phosphorescent light produced by his movements was more beautiful and brilliant than anything of the sort i had ever seen. wherever he went he was followed by a stream of liquid fire. when both the natives were in the water, the light was sensibly increased, so that i obtained some notion of the size of the cavern. it was, however, at the best, a somewhat dreary place of captivity, and the poor girl who inhabited it must have passed many an anxious hour, uncertain whether her lover would be able to return and bring her her daily allowance of food and water, and help her finally to escape. i owned that, having once performed the feat, i did not feel that i should be inclined to pay the cave a second visit. i therefore, as i sat on the rock and pictured to myself how the lovely neuha had passed her time, took in every visible object; then, feeling rested, told the chief that i was ready to return to the outer world. i own that i had some slight apprehension of encountering a shark on the way; but i felt tolerably satisfied that my companions would send it to the rightabout, if they did not kill the monster. "now i'm ready," i said. the natives then, seizing my arms as before, dived with me almost to the bottom, and, while holding my breath, i felt myself carried along, this time escaping the roof. with infinite satisfaction i saw the bright sunlight overhead. we rose to the surface close to the canoe, and i was hauled on board, pretty well done, however, to receive the congratulations of my friends. the account i gave did not tempt them to make the experiment. after landing on some rocks to discuss the viands we had brought, we pulled back the way we had come, and late in the evening got on board the schooner. chapter eight. we were now bound on a cruise among the islands of melanesia, inhabited by a dark-skinned race, differing very greatly from the people we had previously visited. we hoped, however, to obtain a supply of sandal-wood, and to establish friendly relations at different spots, so that the schooner might return for another cargo, and bring back any natives who might be willing to engage as labourers in queensland. had time allowed, we should have been glad to touch at fiji, the inhabitants of which were by that time no longer to be dreaded--many, with their old king, thakombau, once a cannibal, having been converted to christianity, and partially civilised--but harry was anxious to conclude the voyage, which had already been longer than he had at first intended. we had been some days at sea when we came in sight of cherry island, rising some three hundred feet above the surface of the ocean, and thickly covered with vegetation, but only two miles and a half in circumference. it appeared truly a little gem in the midst of the world of waters. as there were no dangers off it, we were able to stand close enough in to observe the fine sandy beach extending round it for a considerable distance. along the shore we saw no canoes, but a number of natives appeared, waving green branches--emblems of peace. as we watched them through our telescopes, we saw that they were of the polynesian, or brown race--fine-looking fellows, unlike the papuans, who inhabit the islands we were about to visit. as it was not likely that they could supply us with either cocoanut oil or sandal-wood, we did not communicate with them, but continued our course westward. the first island we made after leaving cherry island, was varikoro, one of the santa cruz group, but, as we were bound northward, we did not heave to till we came off the small island of lom-lom, where we saw a number of canoes paddling towards us. the natives who manned them wore rings in their ears and noses. though their object was to trade, as they brought off only a few bows and arrows, and a fruit in appearance and taste resembling an apple, we soon concluded our transactions with them. thence standing on, and passing several other islands, the next day but one we reached that of nukapu, which has a melancholy interest, as it was here that the excellent bishop patteson lost his life. the island itself appeared to be about a couple of miles in circumference, and is surrounded by a coral reef, extending, on its south-west side, as far as a mile and a half from the shore, but in other places much nearer. the island was covered with a dense bush, growing down to within a few feet of the water's edge. as we were not aware at the time of the treacherous character of the natives, while the schooner was hove to, charlie and i, with four men as a crew, pulled off in the gig, hoping to open up an intercourse with them. we were well armed with muskets, pistols, and boarding-pikes, in case we should be attacked. on approaching the reef, we saw a number of canoes floating in the lagoon, each containing three men. we found, however, that we could not get over the reef, but we saw the people on the beach waving green branches, inviting us to come on shore. we accordingly pulled in, believing that we should meet with a friendly reception. as, however, we got near, the savages commenced yelling and dancing in a curious fashion. "they wish to do us honour, i suppose," said charlie. "it will be wise, however, not to trust them too much." we pulled on till we got to within a hundred yards of the beach. "look out; they mean mischief!" i shouted; and scarcely were the words out of my mouth when a flight of arrows came whistling towards us, though, fortunately, they fell short of our boat. in vain we tried to make the natives understand that our object was peaceable, by waving white handkerchiefs, and holding up our hands without exhibiting our weapons. this only made them yell and dance more furiously than before. we might have shot down a number of the natives, but we did not for a moment think of doing that, and therefore at once returned to the schooner. we now continued our course until, towards evening, we came in sight of a lofty mountain, rising in a conical form out of the ocean. on turning our glasses towards its summit, we could see dense volumes of smoke and flame issuing forth, and as it lay in our course, and the wind was fair, we passed close to it. when darkness came on, the whole summit of the mountain appeared to be a mass of fire. harry summoned mary and fanny, who had gone below, on deck to enjoy the magnificent spectacle. now flames would shoot forth, rising high in the air; and then the incandescent lava, flowing over the edge of the crater, would come rushing down the slope of the mountain, finally to disappear in the sea. then again all was tolerably quiet. now we heard a loud rumbling noise, and presently the lava bubbled up once more, to plunge as before down the mountain-side. "i'm very glad we are no nearer," observed nat. "suppose we were to be driven by a gale of wind against it, we should run the double chance of being burnt up by the lava or drowned among the breakers." "we'll take good care to keep away from it, then," said harry, laughing. the following day we came off the island of santa cruz, the largest of the group. when even several miles from the shore, a number of canoes approached us, each generally containing three people, all of whom showed an anxiety to trade. we stood into a small harbour, where we brought up, when immediately more than a hundred canoes came around us, loaded with mats, bows and arrows, and cocoanuts, which the islanders willingly gave for bottles, pipes and tobacco, and for articles of clothing. whenever a shirt or a pair of trousers were to be had, the islanders immediately slipped them on, not always as they were intended to be worn, several putting the hind part before. they were an ugly race--their skins nearly black, and their foreheads low and receding, with high cheekbones and broad faces, their noses flat and mouths large, while their heads were like black, curly mops. i cannot exactly say that they were dressed, their only garment being a sort of apron, fastened by a string tightly round the waist; but they wore tortoise-shell rings hanging from their ears down to their shoulders, and one large ring through the nose, which gave a most hideous expression to their countenances. some had on necklaces of human teeth, and armlets of shells. their habitations were low, small, and dirty huts of a circular form, roofed with the leaf of the cocoanut tree, and destitute of every description of furniture. they were altogether the most ugly and diminutive race we had hitherto met with. as usual, harry would only allow a dozen on board at a time, while a strict watch was kept on all their movements, but as far as we could judge, they had no treacherous intentions. as evening approached, we made them understand that we wished to be left in quiet, though it was somewhat difficult, without giving them offence, to get them into their canoes. they then paddled on shore, promising the next day to return with the sort of wood we required, of which we showed them a specimen. we, of course, kept a strict watch during the night, and were ready at any moment to defend ourselves; but not a single canoe was seen floating on the surface of the harbour; we therefore supposed that the natives had retired to their huts to sleep. next day a chief came off, the distinguishing mark of his rank being a breastplate of white shells, about nine inches in diameter. he brought with him several large bundles of sandal-wood, and promised, if we would come again some time afterwards, to procure for us as much as we required. savage as these people were, they seemed willing enough to trade, and there is no reason to doubt that the blessings of christianity might be introduced among them. such is the task undertaken by the melanesian mission, about which charlie tilston often talked to me. we soon after this came off sugar-loaf, or mota island, which is the head-quarters of the melanesian mission; and, as harry thought the missionaries would be glad of an opportunity of sending letters by us, he ordered a boat to be got ready to go on shore, while the schooner was hove to. i went in her, with charlie and dick, jack lizard, tom tubb, jackie potts, and sam pest. on approaching the beach, we found it was rocky and rugged, while so heavy a surf was seething on it, that we were afraid to attempt landing; we therefore pulled round, hoping to reach a part where we might get on shore without danger. rounding a point, we lost sight of the schooner, and after going some distance, succeeded in finding a sheltered nook, into which we ran the boat. leaving dick in charge of her, charlie and i proceeded on foot in search of the missionaries' houses. the walk was a much longer one than we had expected, but we at last found them, and were courteously received. they expressed themselves very grateful for the attention harry had shown them, and immediately set to work to write letters, while their wives prepared some refreshments for us. they also insisted upon sending some down to the boat. we in the mean time walked out to a spot whence we expected to see the schooner, but when we got there, great was our dismay at not being able to discover her. a dark cloud, sending down a deluge of rain, was sweeping over the ocean, driven evidently by a heavy squall. "we shall see her when it has passed over," observed charlie; "for she will then stand back should she have been driven away from the land." "i trust so," i said. "harry is always cautious, and would have shortened sail in time; otherwise the squall has strength enough to capsize her or whip the masts overboard." "you should not allow such a fancy to enter your head," he observed, wishing to comfort me, as i felt fearfully anxious. we kept watching the spot where the schooner ought to have been, entirely forgetting the repast prepared for us. the cloud seemed to increase in size, the rain grew thicker and thicker. "if the schooner is still afloat, she must be in the very midst of it," i at length observed, with a groan. "of course she is," said charlie, "and running before it. she could not possibly beat back in the teeth of such a squall. we shall see her when it has passed." when we looked back landward, we saw, however, that the sun was already sinking below the tree-crowned heights, and in that latitude darkness comes on almost immediately after the sun has gone down. still, we could not tear ourselves from the spot. we were standing thus when we heard a voice saying, "i have been searching for you, my friends, for a long time, and could not conceive where you had gone." charlie explained the cause of our anxiety, for i was too much agitated to speak. "trust in god's mercy, my friends," said the missionary. "we must hope that your vessel has not suffered material damage, though you do not see her. if she has been dismasted, which is possible, you would scarcely discern her at the distance she must be off by this time. her captain must undoubtedly have perceived the squall coming, and would be prepared to encounter it." all he could say, however, did not relieve my anxiety. he waited with us till the gloom of evening, stealing over the eastern ocean, made us abandon all hope of discerning the vessel. we then returned with him to his house, where we were thankful to take the refreshment his wife had prepared. we hurried it over, as we wished to get back as soon as possible to the boat. "i have sent to say that you are delayed," remarked the missionary, "and i must urge you not to attempt to put to sea till the morning. you would very probably miss your vessel in the dark, whereas she is sure to stand back to look for you at daylight. i must advise you to wait till then. have your boat hauled on shore, and let your people come up here to pass the night, as this elevated position is more healthy than on the lower ground; and i will take care that an efficient guard is placed to protect her." this advice was so good that we were fain to accept it. we therefore returned with the missionary to his house, while he despatched a new zealander, who spoke english, to bring up dick and the men. having a guide, they were much less time reaching the station than we had been, and soon arrived. of course, dick was very much grieved to hear of our anxiety about the schooner. the missionaries and their wives did their best to draw our thoughts away from our friends, by describing the progress of the work they had undertaken. their object was, they told us, to collect young and intelligent natives from the different islands, and to endeavour to instruct them in the truths of christianity. when their education was completed, if they exhibited a right missionary spirit, they were sent back to diffuse the truths of christianity among their fellow-islanders. it was deeply interesting to see a number of natives brought from among the most savage races, gentle and civilised, and apparently imbued with true christian principles. they were all clothed in shirts and trousers, and looked as different as possible to the savages we had met with, though of the same race, and a few years ago were exactly like them. we sat up for some time, hoping against hope that we might hear a gun fired from the schooner, as a signal to us that she was in the offing. several times we looked out over the ocean, now sleeping in calm repose, but no sign of the schooner could be discovered. at last the missionary advised us to take some rest. he had a guest-room in which, he said, beds were prepared for charlie, dick, and me, while some shake-downs of leaves and grass were made up in an outhouse for the crew of our boat. i kept continually starting up, fancying that i heard a gun fire. again when i slept i pictured to myself vividly the schooner struck by the squall, and going down beneath the surface. as soon as morning broke we were all on foot, and hurried to the look-out place, whence we earnestly hoped that we might see the schooner; but not a sail was in sight above the distant horizon. the christian converts were gathered for prayer, and we joined them, though unable to understand what was said. when our early breakfast was over, i again hurried out to look for the schooner. still, as far as eye could reach, there was no appearance of her. i felt that, as i was in command of the boat, i must decide what was to be done, though i wished to consult my companions and have their opinion. i proposed that we should, without loss of time, proceed in the boat to some of the neighbouring islands to search for her, believing it possible that she had been compelled to take shelter in one of their harbours. i told charlie what i thought of doing. "dick and i will be ready to accompany you, whatever you may decide," he answered. "then let us go at once," i said. "we have a sail in the boat, and, though the distance between the islands is considerable, we may cross in a few hours from one to the other." when we told the missionary what we intended to do, he strongly urged us to remain with him for a day or two, in the hope that the schooner might in the mean time return. "the vessel may be on one side of the island, and you may be passing on the other and thus miss her," he observed. i thanked him very much, but still told him that i was too anxious to commence our search to delay a moment longer than necessary. as the schooner carried another gig, my brother was certain to send on shore, should we miss each other, to inquire for us, and we agreed to return should we fail to find him. "if you insist on going, i must beg you to allow me to supply you with provisions and water," said our kind friend, "and i must advise you to be very cautious in attempting to land on any of the islands. you must remember that they are inhabited by treacherous races, on whom no dependence can be placed. it will be better to endure hunger and thirst than to run the risk of being clubbed, should you land among hostile natives." i again thanked him heartily for his kindness, and assured him that we would be as cautious as necessary. bidding him and his companion and their wives farewell, we went down to the boat, accompanied by a number of natives carrying the provisions with which we had been furnished. our boat was launched, and we put to sea. chapter nine. we had what might prove a long and dangerous voyage before us, while we were almost overwhelmed with the anxiety we felt about the fate of the schooner. we could see the first island we intended to visit just rising out of the water, blue and indistinct, and as it was calm we had to depend upon our oars to reach it, but we hoped before long to get a favourable breeze which would send us on our way. the sun struck down on our heads with intense force, but we were too anxious to think about it. i proposed that we should relieve each other at the oars, so that we might continue pulling, if necessary, all day. jack lizard, potts, and tubb declared that they would not allow us to do that. "if you like to change places now and again with dick, and his brother takes a turn with the oar, it is all very well; but we are born to it, as it were, and it makes no difference to us if we pull on all day," said jack. fortunately, after we had pulled a couple of hours and the island of mota was fading in the distance, a breeze sprang up, and we were able to stand on under sail. at length, towards evening, we got near the shore, and seeing a number of natives on the beach, we hoped that we might obtain information from them as to what had become of the schooner; for, had she been driven past the island, they must have seen her. "we take care," said tubb, the new zealander. "i not like dere looks; dey not friends." the people had hitherto been quiet enough, and i had observed no signs of hostility; no sooner, however, did we approach the shore than they assumed a warlike attitude, dancing and gesticulating in the wildest manner, while they yelled and brandished their weapons as a sign to us that we were to come no nearer. as it would have been madness to have attempted landing in the face of such hostile demonstrations, we put the boat partly round, and pulled on parallel with the shore, but at a respectful distance. as we did so, we saw the natives running along the beach, every now and then making threatening gestures as a warning to us not to land. "they may be savages," observed charlie; "but they cannot be called treacherous ones, or they would have allowed us to land and afterwards murdered us." we continued along the coast, hoping to come to the mouth of some harbour in which we might find the missing schooner. no harbour appeared, and everywhere, whenever we stood in closer than before to the beach, the natives, gathering in numbers, ordered us to keep off. we had now no choice but to remain at sea during the night, for we could not hope to reach the next island within several hours. we therefore stood away from inhospitable island, as we called it. fortunately the weather remained fine, and the coolness of the night was pleasanter than the heat of day. a distant volcano, which threw up a continuous column of flame, enabled us to steer a direct course, and, as the breeze was very light, we did not expect to reach aurora island, which we intended next to visit, till morning. jack lizard and i took it by turns to steer, for i was rather afraid of trusting charlie dick tilston, lest a sudden squall might strike the boat and send us over. our minds were too much occupied with the thoughts of the schooner, or rather of those on board her, to enable us to talk on any other subject charlie tilston every now and then tried to get up a lively conversation, but found that he could not succeed. all night long we glided smoothly on. "i hope that we shall be treated in a more hospitable way by the inhabitants of the next island we visit," he observed. "we cannot be very certain about that, sir," observed sam pest. "i have been up and down these islands, and i have seen the way white men have treated the blacks. no wonder they ain't friendly, for there's not a village scarcely where some of the natives have not been carried off, while others have been fired on and the people killed. we must make them understand that we come as friends, or we shall have no chance of getting anything out of them." by daylight we were close up to aurora island. the inhabitants had seen our boat approaching, and had gathered on the beach to receive us. they probably thought that our vessel was not far off, round a point to the westward. "come, i think we have a chance of a friendly intercourse with these people," observed charlie; "and if you like, i will land and try to have a talk with them by signs. neither tubb nor potts seem to understand their language better than we do." although the natives waved no green boughs, and kept a short distance back on some high ground above the beach, yet, as their women and children were with them, and as they made no hostile demonstrations, we concluded that we might safely land. we therefore ran the boat on to the beach, and charlie, stepping out, moved a few paces from them, and sat down on a rock. in a short time six or seven persons came down to where he was sitting, apparently inclined to hold a palaver, sam pest all the time watching them narrowly. "take care, sir," he shouted, "or they'll play you some foul trick." the next instant he added, "jump up! run for your life down to the boat!" as he spoke i seized a musket, and old sam took up another and presented it at the natives, to cover charlie and enable him to get back to the boat. just as he sprang up, i saw a young native in the act of lifting a club as if about to strike him; but the suddenness with which charlie started up and retreated to the boat prevented the savage from dealing the intended blow. charlie springing on board, we shoved off, and lay on our oars at a safe distance from the beach. this was a bad commencement, and there seemed but little chance of our obtaining any information from them. when the natives saw our guns pointed at them, they quickly retreated, and though we did not fire, and made signs to them to return, nothing would induce them to trust themselves near us. "i am afraid, from what sam says, that we can expect no better reception wherever we go. but we must not complain of the poor natives," observed charlie; "they are thorough savages, it is true, but would probably have received white men with gladness, if the white men had from the first treated them properly, and tried to win their regard." "that may be so," i remarked. "but we must not forget how the far less savage inhabitants of the friendly islands treated the shipmates of mariner, and would, it is said, have treated captain cook and his companions, if they had had the opportunity. their conduct, in some instances, is owing to debased human nature, rather than to a spirit of revenge, though undoubtedly in many the white men have been the aggressors." finding that we were not likely to establish a friendly intercourse with the natives, or to gain any information about the schooner, we pulled away from the beach, and steered before the wind for another island which we saw to the westward. although our hearts were full of anxiety, and our thoughts were occupied with the task in which we were engaged, we could not help admiring the beauty of the islands amid which we were sailing. we found the water very deep round the beach, from which the hills rose abruptly, clothed with a dense vegetation. cocoanut trees grew in the greatest profusion, not only on the shores, but frequently up the sides of the hills, and were seen in clusters at the bottom of the valleys running inland. there were also many other fine timber trees, while graceful ferns and flowering shrubs formed a dense undergrowth over all the uncultivated parts of the country. the water was so transparent that we could see the fish swimming about as we looked over the side of the boat. we had, fortunately, some hooks and lines, and as nearly anything served for bait, we were able to catch as many as we could possibly eat. the difficulty was to cook them, as we could not venture to land on any spot where there were natives. our fear also was that we might run short of water; thus, although in the midst of abundance, we might perish of thirst, or by the hands of the savages. "we must manage to land somewhere," cried dick. "perhaps if we were to pull in to the shore towards evening, we might escape detection, and have time to cook our fish and find water before the natives are down upon us." "although there may be some risk, i do not see what else we can do," said charlie. "we must, however, keep a strict watch while we are cooking our food, and not attempt to sleep on shore. we shall probably be able to obtain some cocoanuts in addition to the water, so that we may keep at sea, without the necessity of landing again, for several days." as this plan seemed feasible, we determined to adopt it. "the island out there, for which we are steering, is of considerable size, and there must surely be some parts uninhabited," observed charlie. "i hope so," i said. "as there are a good many missionaries scattered about, we may drop upon some island where one is established; and, if so, we shall be better off than we should if we landed at an uninhabited part; besides which, we may possibly gain tidings of the schooner." the breeze was light, but yet sufficient to enable us to run on under sail. we had miscalculated the distance to the island, for, the hills being high, it appeared nearer than it really was. we were still some way off the shore when the sun set; the wind also fell, and we had to lower the sail and take to our oars. this, however, was the best thing we could do, as we had less chance of being seen, should there be any people on the shore. the moon rose as we neared the land, and gave us sufficient light to distinguish objects, so that we might pick out a place into which we could run the boat. seeing no fires or lights, we began to hope that we should not meet with natives; we therefore pulled in, placing tubb ahead to look out for rocks. the part we first made appeared too rugged to allow us to venture on; we therefore rowed along the shore for some way, till a small sandy bay, just suited to our purpose, appeared. we accordingly steered in for it, keeping, as before, a careful look-out ahead. the ground rose abruptly almost immediately beyond the beach, on which no surf was breaking; but i fancied that i heard a rushing sound of water falling probably over the cliffs close at hand, though a thick grove of tall trees concealed it from our sight. "we could not have discovered a better place," said charlie, in a cheerful tone. "we may here remain securely till morning, and get some sleep without being cramped up in the boat. i should not be surprised either if those are cocoanut trees, and, if so, we may get a good supply." we now rowed into the bay, tom tubb feeling the way with the boat-hook, so that we might not run the risk of staving in the bows of the boat. at length our keel grated on the smooth sand, and jumping out, we quickly hauled up the boat. tubb and sam pest then went on, the latter carrying a musket, to survey the neighbourhood, and to ascertain if there was any path by which an enemy might come suddenly down and surprise us; they were also to look out for water. we meantime collected driftwood and dry branches from under the trees to make a fire. we placed a pile some way up the beach close to the grove of trees, so that the flames might be concealed by the overhanging cliffs and hills on either side, and thus, although there might be natives in the neighbourhood, we might escape being seen. we had got our wood ready to light when sam and his companion came back. "there's only one part, away to the left, where anybody, unless they've got wings, can come down," said sam. "we must keep a look-out on it, and we shall have time, if many of the savages appear, to get the boat into the water and shove off before they can reach us. one of us had better keep guard there, and we shall be safe enough." they had also discovered a waterfall, which came down over the rock at an easily accessible spot, where we could fill the kettle we had brought with us. we accordingly spitted the fish which we had caught in the morning, though already they were not as fresh as we should have liked, and put on the kettle to boil, to make some tea which the missionary had given us. following sam's advice, we at once placed jack lizard on the look-out at the spot he had mentioned; we then cooked and ate our supper, and sent tubb to relieve jack. this done, we spread the boat's sail on the oars and boat-hook, to make an awning under which we could sleep; the sand was hot and dry enough so that we required no other bedding. it was arranged that we should relieve each other every two hours, and thus all might get a good spell of sleep. had it not been for our anxiety about the schooner, we should have enjoyed our adventure. we had scarcely given a thought about ourselves, or what we should do, should we not find her. our only idea had been to return to mota; but from that island we were already at a considerable distance, and bad weather might come on before we could reach it. a few years before this, however, we should have been in much greater peril, for there would have been no place for which we could steer with any certainty of meeting with a friendly reception. it was sad to think that generation after generation had passed away, during which these beautiful islands had been inhabited by savages, to whom no one had carried the light of the gospel; and that, even now, only on a few isolated spots were missionaries established, few of whom, owing to the numerous difficulties in their way, had made much progress. as we had all been awake during the previous night, scarcely had we thrown ourselves on the sand than most of us were fast asleep. it appeared to me that i had scarcely closed my eyes when i was summoned by charlie to keep my watch. although i might have excused myself, as being in charge of the boat, i did not wish to do that. he told me that he had heard no sounds to indicate that any savages were in the neighbourhood. i took the musket which he handed me, and kept pacing up and down on the top of a bare mound, beyond which the ground sloped upwards towards the interior, as far as i could make out in the darkness. i thought it prudent, however, to cast my eye towards the other side of the bay, for it seemed to me that there was a way along under the cliffs at low water. it was arranged that should the sentry see any one coming, he was to shout to the rest of the party, who were to launch the boat, while he made the best of his way to join them. this might appear a very timid proceeding, but, considering the savage character of the natives, it was the only safe mode of showing them that we had no hostile intentions. we might thus also the better be able to gain their friendship. day broke while i was still on watch, and i could now distinguish the nature of the country. it was thickly wooded in all directions, with hills, or mountains, indeed, rising to a considerable elevation; and i was thankful, on looking at the grove, to see that the trees were loaded with cocoanuts. however, i would not quit my post till i was relieved, as it was far more important to keep a look-out now than it was during the night. looking towards our camp, i saw charlie on his feet, arousing the rest, and dick soon joined me. i, of course, charged him to keep a vigilant look-out, but on no account to fire, even although the natives might appear with arms in their hands, and make threatening gestures when they saw him. when i got back to the camp, charlie proposed that we should push off and catch some fresh fish for breakfast, as the remainder of those we brought with us were no longer fit to eat. the boat accordingly shoved off with the four men and charlie, while i remained on shore with the other musket in my hand, that i might be ready to assist dick if necessary. much sooner than i expected, the boat returned with a sufficient number of mullet and bream to afford us food for the whole day. as we were all very hungry and i had made up the fire, we quickly cooked them, and i was just about to send jack lizard to relieve dick, when the latter shouted-- "here come some people; but there are only three or four fellows, and i cannot make out exactly who they are." i quickly joined him, when i saw four men coming down the valley. three of them were undoubtedly savages, but the fourth had some clothing on, and was taller and bigger than the others. he carried a huge knotted club in one hand, and a spear in the other. the rest of the men were also armed with spears. the first, from his dress and ornaments, was apparently a chief, but i was puzzled at his general appearance. on his getting nearer, though his skin was brown enough, i observed that it was very much lighter than that of his companions. dick and i stood with the butts of our muskets on the ground, while we shook our handkerchiefs with our other hands. as the strangers got nearer, to my surprise the apparent chief shouted out-- "hilloa! who are you? what brings you here?" "we came in to get water and fresh provisions," i answered. "and now i'd ask who you are." "why, as to that, i'm prime minister, high priest, and doctor extraordinary to the king of this 'ere country," answered the man, who i now saw had been a white man, though certainly i could not call him so now. "very glad to meet you, friend; for some of the people in these parts are not very hospitable to strangers, and we have found it difficult to land to cook our food and stretch our legs, without the risk of being knocked on the head." "couldn't say, if i had not been with them, but what my people here might have treated you in the same way," answered the stranger, "howsomedever, i will come and have a palaver with you, and hear the news, for i have not set eyes on any white chaps for i don't know how long." of course we told our new friend that we should be glad of his company, and he, followed by the blacks, went with us towards the boat. "you don't happen to have any liquor aboard?" he asked. "it is a mighty long time since i have tasted a drop." i was obliged to confess that we had no spirits, though we had still some of the tea the missionaries had given us. he looked much disappointed, and made a remark about the missionaries which i need not repeat. they were evidently not in his good graces. he and his companions had seated themselves before the fire, when we gave them some tea sweetened with sugar, which seemed to their taste. they also condescended to eat the remainder of our fish, though the white man told us they were precious badly cooked. i saw sam pest looking at him while he was eating. at last sam, seating himself by his side, said-- "well, dan hogan, you seem to have forgotten me." "no, i haven't, now you speak, though i do not know what i might have done if you had not opened your lips." though the two were old shipmates, they did not even shake hands, but sat eagerly talking together for some time, regardless of the rest of us. i could scarcely make out what they said. sam, at last getting up, came towards me, and said-- "this 'ere old shipmate of mine has given me some news which you will be glad to hear for one thing, though not for another. the schooner has got safe into port, and is not far off from this." "safe!" i exclaimed, my heart bounding with joy, and i shouted the news to charlie and the rest. "safe into port, but i did not say she was safe," said sam. "in the first place, from what he tells me, she's carried away her mainmast, and seeing that she cannot put to sea, some of his black friends have made a plot to get hold of her, and if they do, they'll not leave any of those aboard alive. the captain, i know, keeps a sharp look-out; but they're cunning rascals, and will try, if they can, to circumvent him." "how far off is she? how soon can we get there?" i asked eagerly. i could feel my heart beating as i spoke. "he says about thirty miles, more or less, round the coast, though it is little more than a quarter of that distance across country." "then couldn't we go over land, and warn my brother?" i asked anxiously. "why, bless you, we should be knocked on the head by the first black fellows we might meet," answered sam. "our only chance is to go round by water, and i hope we may get there before any mischief is done." "then we have not a moment to lose," i exclaimed. "but we must ask your friend to exert himself, and try to save them. perhaps, when they hear that we are engaged in honest trading, they may be induced to abandon their design." i spoke to hogan, who, however, shook his head, as if he thought the attempt would be useless, though he promised to do what he could. "you will understand, friend, that we shall be happy to reward you for any service you can render us, and you must point out to the natives that, should they commit any act of violence, they will be sure before long to be punished. british men-of-war are about to cruise in these parts for that very purpose, though, perhaps, the natives have never seen or heard of them as yet." hogan looked greatly astonished at hearing this, and exhibited some alarm himself. he promised, however, to tell the people, though he tried to persuade us that he could not be answerable for what they might do. as every moment might be of importance, i wished him good-bye, and ordered the men to launch the boat. i observed that sam parted from his old shipmate in a remarkably cold manner, as before, not even shaking hands with him. we immediately shoved off, hogan and his companions standing on the beach, and watching us as we pulled out of the little bay, and soon afterwards i saw them going back by the way they had come. hogan, i should have said, had minutely described the harbour in which the schooner lay, so that i had no fear about finding the place, if we could reach it before dark. chapter ten. nearly two hours of daylight had already gone by, and as there was at present a perfect calm, we should have to depend on our oars alone. i explained to the men that it was a matter of life and death to arrive as soon as possible. "never fear, mr ned," answered jack lizard. "we'll make the boat fly along as fast as our oars can send her." as dick had a sharp pair of eyes, i stationed him in the bows to look out for rocks; for, of course, to shorten the distance, we had to keep close to the land, or, rather, just outside the breakers, which, as we advanced, we found dashing on the shore. as we had had a good breakfast, we did not stop to dine, but charlie handed round a mug of water, that the men might moisten their lips. as i sat in the stern-sheets holding the yoke-lines, i felt as if i was steering in a race; and so it was--a race against the machinations of the treacherous savages; but i trusted that we should win, and be in time to warn harry of their evil intentions. i was pleased with the way the men behaved, evidently exerting their strength to the utmost, and even old sam did not utter a complaint. as we pulled on, i eagerly looked out for each point or headland, hoping that it might be the one beyond which we should find the harbour. everywhere the country was covered with trees. sometimes there were cliffs, and at others the land rose in bold slopes almost from the water's edge; but nowhere did we see any coral reefs. this was owing, charlie said, to the existence of a volcano, which we observed somewhere in the interior, sending forth clouds of smoke and ashes, occasionally bright flames darting up, though scarcely visible in the sunlight. the lava, he said, rolled down into the sea, and so heated the water that it prevented the existence of the coral insects. here and there were small sandy bays, in which canoes were drawn up. on observing them, i feared that some might come off and interfere with us. however, our boat was so small an object, and being without a sail, the natives probably scarcely observed her as we glided rapidly by. perhaps they might have taken her for some marine monster, or other fish which had just risen above the surface. occasionally we had to cross a broad bay, when we were, in consequence, at a considerable distance from the land; but i took care to examine it carefully, so as to be sure that the harbour we were searching for was not within it. night was drawing on. we had been pulling, we calculated, for not less than seven hours, and must have been going at the rate of four knots an hour. charlie thought that there might have been a current against us, or, perhaps, we had scarcely made good the four knots as i supposed, or else that the distance was greater than hogan had told us. as yet, however, we had seen no indication of an opening. a tree-covered point was before us; we steered for it. "perhaps we shall find the harbour on the other side," said charlie. the men had not lately been pulling as fast as in the early part of the day; and no wonder, for their arms were becoming weary with their exertions. still they went on. "never fear, sir," cried jack lizard. "we've got some go in us yet. cheer up, lads, cheer up; let us give way with a will again." the point was rounded when we saw what charlie and i felt nearly sure was the entrance to the harbour. we were already steering for it when we made out half a dozen canoes, which had just rounded the opposite point, and soon came paddling towards us. they might have had no unfriendly intentions; but, at all events, we were anxious not to encounter them. as we pulled on, we became perfectly convinced, by the appearance of the land, that we had discovered the harbour we were in search of. the canoes were coming up with us, and it seemed doubtful whether we should get into the harbour before them. our men, though they had previously appeared too much fatigued to pull longer, redoubled their efforts, and point after point was passed, when at length i was gladdened by the sight of the schooner at anchor. i raised a shout of joy. "hurrah, hurrah! there she is!" i exclaimed. "and there are the canoes!" cried jack lizard. "but we'll be alongside her before they're up with us." harry, who was on deck, saw us coming, and presently mary and fanny came up, and nat, and waved to us. we were quickly on board, and rapidly exchanging accounts with each other. harry had been as anxious about us as we had been about him, for, as he could not tell whether we had put off from mota before squall came on, he feared that we might have been exposed to its fury. the canoes, seeing us safe on board, turned aside and paddled for the shore. whether or not they had had any intention of attacking the boat, this showed us that they believed the schooner was able to defend us. harry said that he had been compelled to be very strict with them, although he had hitherto remained on good terms. he had held to his rule of allowing only a few men to come on board at a time, and he had made these leave their arms in the canoes, while, as soon as evening drew on, he compelled all on board to return to the shore. when i told him of the warning hogan had given us, he replied that he had brought the natives into such good order that he did not think they would attempt any act of treachery. "that is just what sam was afraid of," i observed. "their object, by pretending to be quiet and friendly, is to throw us off our guard. however, now that the schooner's crew is strengthened by our arrival, perhaps they'll abandon their designs." he told me that he had been arranging with a chief for leave to cut down a tree from which to make a mainmast. "it will take some time," he continued, "but it must be done, and as the natives cannot cut down the tree, we must manage to do it ourselves. it did occur to me that, while we were thus engaged, they might think it a favourable opportunity to attack us, unless we are on our guard." "from what hogan told sam, we were much afraid that they might attempt to cut you off even before our arrival," i observed. "the old sailor had, by some means or other, gained intelligence of their designs, although he acknowledged that he was very uncertain whether he should be able to put you on your guard in time to save you." "one thing is positive, that we cannot leave this harbour till we have obtained a mast. and we must have it, therefore, at all risks," said harry. "i advise that we should get hold of a chief, or some other person of influence, and keep him as a hostage on board, while our people are working on shore," said charlie tilston. "the wildest savages know what that means, and will not venture to attack us while we have a chief in our power." "a capital idea!" said harry; "but the question is, how are we to bell the cat, or rather, get hold of a chief?" "i will go on shore with sam pest, and try to induce one of them to come off," said charlie. "it would be useless to take either the new zealander or the sandwich island man, as neither of them speak a word of the language of these people, but sam can make himself understood." harry thought that there was much risk in the undertaking, but sam, when told of the plan, was ready enough to go, and i begged that i might accompany charlie, as i did not like the idea of his going alone. we were all to be well armed, and to be on the watch to prevent any savage from getting behind us--this, should they have any treacherous intentions, they were sure to attempt doing. charlie proposed carrying a few articles to present to the chief, with the promise of others, in exchange for provisions and such things as we should require, if he would come to receive them. this was considered more politic than carrying on the trading first, and promising the presents afterwards, as the chief might doubt whether they would be delivered. from what we gleaned from sam, they had more than once before been tricked by white men, who had come into their harbour, and were therefore likely to be suspicious of our intentions. as soon as the plan was arranged, charlie and i, with sam, jack lizard, and two other men, shoved off and pulled for the shore. as we approached, we found a number of savages armed with clubs, collected on the beach. we pulled slowly, looking out for one who, from the ornaments he wore, and his general appearance, might prove to be a chief. "that's the fellow we want," said charlie, pointing out a man who wore an ornamented head-dress and breastplate, with a necklace and rings round his arms. we waved, and made signs to him to approach, and we steered the boat directly towards where he stood. charlie then held up several articles he had brought. the chief seemed to understand our object, and ordering his people to stand back, he advanced without hesitation. we accordingly ran in the boat; charlie and sam stepped on shore, while jack lizard and i sat with our muskets in our hands, ready to cover them should they be attacked. charlie then presented first one article and then another, and sam tried to explain, as far as his knowledge of the language would allow him, our object to the chief, who seemed highly pleased, and stepping back, exhibited the gifts he had received to his attendants. sam then gave him to understand that we had many more of the same description on board. at first, i was afraid that he would not consent to accompany us; but at length his cupidity overcame his fears, and sam, advising him to come lest others should obtain the goods we had to dispose of, he stepped into the boat. as it was evident that she could not well carry more than one person besides ourselves, sam made signs to the others that we could not take them on board, and at once pulled away from the beach. this showed the savages that we had not come for the purpose of kidnapping them. the chief, however, looked somewhat nervous, and i was afraid might, after all, jump overboard, and swim back to the shore. i told charlie, therefore, to try and occupy his attention by showing him some of the other articles which we had brought. what interested him most was a telescope, through which, having adjusted the focus, we made him look at his friends. he almost let it drop in his astonishment at seeing them so near, and had not charlie held it, it would have fallen overboard. he looked through it again and again, each time expressing by signs his wonder, and of course utterly unable to comprehend how the objects he saw through it were brought so near. i was very glad when we got him safe alongside. stepping on deck, he gazed about him with almost as much astonishment as he had exhibited when looking through the telescope. harry stood ready to receive him, and told sam to say how happy he was to have him come on board. we then showed him some of the articles which we had brought for trading, and gave him to understand that a certain number of them should be his, as soon as the mast was ready. sam also was told to explain to him that till then he must remain on board, and that, should his countrymen offer any violence to our people, he would be the sufferer. he seemed to understand this perfectly well. the difficulty, however, was to let the natives know why we had carried him off, as we could not allow him to return to tell them so. the only way of accomplishing our object was to bring off one or two more natives, who might convey any message he desired to send. after some persuasion, we induced him to go down to a spare space in the hold, when some food likely to suit his taste was placed before him, and the mate and dick sat down to eat with him. as soon as they were thus engaged, charlie and i shoved off, and pulled for the shore. at first the natives, though they had been eager to accompany their chief, seemed unwilling to embark; but at last we persuaded two to trust themselves with us. on pulling back we amused them as we had the chief, and as soon as they got on board we conducted them down below. we placed some food before them, and when their meal was over, we got sam to try and explain to them that we intended to keep their chief as a hostage, while our people were on shore cutting down the tree; that he would be well treated, and ample payment made to him. they seemed to understand this clearly, and after they had had a conversation with the chief, we told them that we would convey them back to the shore. they appeared to be in no way dissatisfied with the arrangement, and willingly got into the boat, leaving their chief on board. "please, sir, we must keep a sharp look-out on that chap," observed sam, "or maybe he'll jump overboard and swim ashore." "he'll lose the goods we promised him if he does," said harry. "but he does not think so; for he knows the schooner cannot get away, and he expects to take her some dark night, then to get hold of everything on board." "we will not stand on any ceremony with him, then, but keep him safely under hatches till we get the mast aboard," said harry. we at once landed the two natives, who explained to the rest our object in keeping the chief. this did not appear to surprise them, nor did they show any unfriendly feeling towards us, but continued to bring down fresh provisions, till we gave them to understand that we had as much as we wanted. as there was no time to be lost, the carpenter, and men to assist him, at once went on shore to cut down the tree. charlie and i accompanied them to superintend the operation. notwithstanding the pacific behaviour of the natives, we considered it prudent to go well armed, and to keep a vigilant watch all the time on their movements. as the tree we required was not a large one, it was quickly cut down, and the branches and bark being chopped off, we commenced dragging it towards the water. none of the natives, however, offered to assist us. we had got to within about a hundred yards of the beach, when we saw a number of natives collecting on either side, with clubs and spears in their hands; and at the same time we observed, to our dismay, a fleet of canoes paddling towards the schooner. we had too much reason to fear that a simultaneous attack was to be made on us and her. providentially, our boat, which lay hauled up on the beach, had not been touched, and we determined therefore to make a rush for her, and to try and reach the schooner before the canoes could get alongside, as, if once on board, we might hope to defend her against any number of assailants. "whatever we do, let us keep together," cried charlie. presenting our muskets at the natives, we ordered them to keep back, and while he and i retreated with our faces towards them, the men rushed on to launch the boat. still the savages well knew that after we had discharged our pieces we should be defenceless. they hesitated, however, no one wishing to be shot, and we were able to get the boat off and to leap into her. still it seemed very doubtful whether we could gain the schooner before the canoes. scarcely, however, had we shoved off from the shore, when i caught sight of a white sail appearing over the point which formed the southern entrance to the harbour, and almost immediately afterwards a large vessel appeared, steering directly for it. the natives saw her; her appearance evidently disconcerted them, for, instead of continuing their course towards the schooner, they paddled away for the shore. the breeze being fair, the stranger came rapidly on, and, shortening sail, brought up a short distance outside where the _dainty_ lay. harry immediately sent me alongside to tell her captain what had occurred. i found that she was a whaler, which had put in for fresh provisions and water. as she carried four guns and a numerous crew, the captain said that he had no fear of the natives; besides which, he well knew how to deal them, though he confessed that he might have been deceived had we not warned him of their treacherous conduct. the first thing to be done was to get off the spar intended for our mast. he accordingly sent a couple of boats well armed to assist us, and lent us his carpenters, who quickly shaped it as it was required. our captive chief, on being told of the meditated attack of his countrymen, looked very much alarmed, believing that we should in consequence put him to death. we gave him to understand that we had no intention of doing so, and that, as we had obtained the spar, we would pay him and send him on shore, hoping that he would induce his countrymen to behave in a friendly way to white men in future. this, as far as we could understand, he promised faithfully to do. landing him on the beach, we shook hands, and let him go his way with the goods he had obtained. next morning, he and a number of his people appeared, loaded with provisions of all sorts, and before the day was over the whaler obtained as much as she required. the natives kept at a respectful distance during the time her boats crews were filling the casks with water. with the assistance of the captain of the whaler we got our mast stepped and rigged, and both vessels sailed together. we heard nothing more during our stay of hogan, or what had become of him. probably he fell a victim to the jealousy of the natives--a common fate of so many white men who have abandoned themselves to a savage life. parting from the whaler, we made the best of our way to sydney, where harry immediately gave information to the authorities of the piratical cruise of the _wasp_. having disposed of our cargo, we returned to brisbane, where we found that everything had been going on in a satisfactory manner. charles tilston, instead of going home, resolved to settle there, and, as i had long suspected would be the case, made an offer to fanny amiel, who accepted him. dick and i, with old tom platt and jack lizard, made several successful trips in the _dainty_; but our sisters-in-law agreed that interesting as had been their voyage, they did not wish ever to make another. i need not say the adventures we met with have often since served us as subjects of conversation, and i hope that we were all grateful for our preservation from the many dangers we encountered. i must confess, before i conclude, that i was induced to write the narrative of our voyage, not merely to amuse my readers, but to interest them in the dark-skinned inhabitants of the almost countless beautiful islands spread over the pacific, and to induce them to give their warm support to the missionary efforts now making to convey the blessed light of the gospel to those savage races so long plunged in the utter darkness of heathenism. a wonderful work has already been accomplished. thousands and tens of thousands of the pacific islanders have become civilised and enlightened; but much--very much--remains to be done, and i would remind my readers that they should consider it a privilege to help with their subscriptions to send men forth who are willing to engage in the noble and glorious undertaking. the end. note: project gutenberg also has an html version of this file which includes the original illustrations. see -h.htm or -h.zip: (http://www.gutenberg.org/files/ / -h/ -h.htm) or (http://www.gutenberg.org/files/ / -h.zip) the house under the sea a romance by max pemberton author of kronstadt, the phantom army, etc. illustrated new york d. appleton and company copyright, by max pemberton all rights reserved published september, [illustration: "shall we go, or stay?"] contents i.--in which jasper begg makes known the purpose of his voyage to the pacific ocean, and how it came about that he commissioned the steam-ship southern cross through philips, westbury, and co. ii.--we go ashore and learn strange things iii.--in which jasper begg makes up his mind what to do iv.--we go aboard, but return again v.--strange sights ashore, and what we saw of them vi.--jasper begg meets his old mistress, and is watched vii.--in which help comes from the last quarter we had expected it viii.--the bird's nest in the hills ix.--we look out for the southern cross x.--we are surely caged on ken's island xi.--lights under the sea xii.--the dancing madness xiii.--the storm xiv.--a white pool--and afterwards xv.--an interlude, during which we read in ruth bellenden's diary again xvi.--rosamunda and the iron doors xvii.--in which jasper begg enters the house under the sea xviii.--chance opens a gate for jasper begg, and he passes through xix.--which shows that a man who thinks of big things sometimes forgets the little ones xx.--the first attack is made by czerny's men xxi.--which brings in the day and what befell therein xxii.--the beginning of the sixty hours xxiii.--the end of the sixty hours xxiv.--the second attack on czerny's house xxv.--in which the sun-time comes again list of illustrations "shall we go or stay?" like dancers at a stage play. a picturesque old figure standing there. she looked at me with her big, questioning eyes. we were all sitting at the supper table. the drawing-room is a cave whose walls are of jewels. "if there is a sound at the door, fire that gun." another man fell with a loud cry. the house under the sea chapter i in which jasper begg makes known the purpose of his voyage to the pacific ocean, and how it came about that he commissioned the steam-ship southern cross through philips, westbury, and co. many gentlemen have asked me to write the story of ken's island, and in so far as my ability goes, that i will now do. a plain seaman by profession, one who has had no more education than a kentish grammar school can give him, i, jasper begg, find it very hard to bring to other people's eyes the wonderful things i have seen or to make all this great matter clear as it should be clear for a right understanding. but what i know of it, i will here set down; and i do not doubt that the newspapers and the writers will do the rest. now, it was upon the third day of may in the year , at four bells in the first dog watch, that harry doe, our boatswain, first sighted land upon our port-bow, and so made known to me that our voyage was done. we were fifty-three days out from southampton then; and for fifty-three days not a man among the crew of the southern cross had known our proper destination, or why his skipper, jasper begg, had shipped him to sail for the pacific ocean. a pleasure voyage, the papers said; and some remembered that i had been in and out of private yachts ever since i ran away from school and booked with skipper higg, who sailed lord kanton's schooner from the solent; but others asked themselves what pleasure took a yacht's skipper beyond the suez, and how it came about that a poor man like jasper begg found the money to commission a -ton tramp through philips, westbury, and co., and to deal liberally with any shipmate who had a fancy for the trip. these questions i meant to answer in my own time. a hint here and there of a lady in whose interest the voyage was undertaken kept the crew quiet, if it did not please its curiosity. mister jacob, my first officer, and peter bligh (who came to me because he said i was the only man who kept him away from the drink) guessed something if they knew little. they had both served under me in ruth bellenden's yacht; neither had forgotten that ruth bellenden's husband sailed eastward for the wedding trip. if they put their heads together and said that ruth bellenden's affairs and the steam-ship southern cross were not to be far apart at the end of it, i don't blame them. it was my business to hold my tongue until the land was sighted, and so much i did for ruth bellenden's sake. well, it was the third day of may, at four bells in the first dog watch, when harry doe, the boatswain, sighted land on the port-bow, and came abaft with the other hands to hear what i had got to say to him. mr. jacob was in his bunk then, he being about to take the first watch, and peter bligh, who walked the bridge, had rung down for half-speed by the time i came out with my glass for the first view of the distant island. we were then, i must tell you at a rough reckoning, in longitude east of greenwich, by about north; and my first thought was that we might have sighted the ganges group, as many a ship sailing from 'frisco to japan; but when i had looked at the land a little while, and especially at a low spur of rocks to the northward, i knew that this was truly the ken archipelago, and that our voyage was done. "lads," i said, "yonder is your port. good weather and good luck, and we'll put about for home before three days have passed." now, they set up a great cheer at this; and peter bligh, whose years go to fat, wiped his brow like a man who has got rid of a great load and is very pleased to have done with it. "thank you for that," said he. "i hope i do my duty in all weathers, mr. begg, but this sunshine do wear a man sadly. will you stop her, sir, or shall we go dead slow?" "dead slow, if you please, mister pugh," said i; "the chart gives two thousand fathoms about the reef. we should have water enough, and water is a good thing, as i believe you know." "when there's nothing else, i can manage to make shift with it--and feel a better man, sir," he added, as an after-thought. but i was already busy with my glass and that was not the hour for light talk. yonder upon the port-bow a group of islands shaped on our horizon as shadows upon a glassy sea. i could espy a considerable cliff-land rising to the southward, and north of that the rocky spur of which i have made mention. the sun was setting behind us in a sky of orange and crimson, and it was wonderful to see the playful lights now giving veins of gold to the dark mass of the higher rocks, or washing over the shadows as a running water of flame. i have seen many beautiful sights upon the sea, in storm or tempest, god's weather or the devil's; but i shall never forget that sunset which brought me to ken's island on as strange an errand as ever commissioned a ship. the deep blue of the sky, the vastness of the horizon, the setting sun, the island's shaping out of the deep: these, and the curiosity which kept the glass ever at my eye, made an hour which a man might fear to tell of. true, i have sighted many a strange land in my time and have put up my glass for many an unknown shore; but yonder lay the home of ruth bellenden, and to-morrow's sun would tell me how it fared with her. i had sailed from england to learn as much. now, mr. jacob, the first officer, had come up to the bridge while i was searching the shore for an anchorage, and he, who always was a prudent man, spoke up at once for laying to and leaving our business, whatever it was, until the morning. "you'll lose the light in ten minutes, and yon's a port i do not like the look of," said he. "better go about, sir. reefs don't get out of the way, even for a lady." "mister jacob," said i, for, little man that he was, he had a big wit in his own way, "the lady would be very glad to get out of the way of the reef, i'm thinking. however, that's for the morning. here's peter bligh as pleased as any school-boy at the sight of land. tell him that he isn't going ashore to-night, and he'll thank you nicely. eh, peter, are you, too, of jacob's mind? is it sea or shore, a glass in my cabin or what the natives will sell you in the log-cabins over yonder?" peter bligh shut up his glass with a snap. "i know the liquor, mr. begg," said he; "as the night is good to me, i'm of mister jacob's way of thinking. a sound bed and a clear head, and a fair wind for the morning--you'll see little of any woman, black or white, on yonder rock to-night." jacob--his little eyes twinkling, as they always did at his own jokes--muttered the old proverb about choosing a wife by candle-light; but before any one could hear him a beacon shone out across the sea from some reef behind the main island i had noticed, and all eyes were turned anxiously to that. it was a queer place, truly, to set up a light, and i don't wonder that the men remarked it. "an odd kind of a lantern to help poor mariners," said mister jacob, sagely. "being kind to it, sir, i should say that it's not more than a mile too much to the northward." "lay your course by that, and a miracle won't carry you by the reef," added peter bligh, sagaciously; "in my country, which is partly ireland, sir, we put up notice-boards for the boys that ride bicycles: 'this hill is dangerous.' faith, in ould oireland, they put 'em up at the bottom of the hills, which is useful entirely." some of the crew, grouped about the ladder's foot, laughed at this; others began to mutter among themselves as though the beacon troubled them, and they did not like it. a seaman's the most superstitious creature that walks the earth or sails on the sea, as all the world knows. i could see the curiosity, which had followed my men from southampton, was coming to a head here about twelve thousand miles from home. "lads," cried i, quick to take the point up, "mister bligh says that an irishman built yon light, and he knows, being a bit of a one himself. we're not going in by it, anyway, so you can ask questions to-morrow. there's a hundred pounds to be divided among you for your good behaviour outward, and there'll be another hundred when we make calshot light. to-night we'll find good sea-room, and leave their beacon to the lumber-heads that put it up. i thank you, lads, for honest work in an honest ship. ask the purser for an extra tot of grog, and say the skipper told you to." they gave a hearty "aye, aye, sir," to this, and without more ado we put the ship about and went dead slow against a stiff tide setting east by north-east. for my part, i reckoned this the time to tell my officers what my intentions were, and when i had called them into the cabin, leaving our "fourth"--a mere lad, but a good one--upon the bridge, i ordered joe, the steward, to set the decanters upon the table. mister jacob, as usual, put on his glasses (which he always did in room or cabin, just as though he would read a book), but peter bligh sat with his cap between his knees and as foolish an expression upon his face as i have ever seen. "now, gentlemen," i said, "no good talking in this world was ever done upon a dusty table, so we'll have a glass round and then to business. mr. bligh, i'm sure, will make no objection to that." "faith, and i know when to obey my superior officer, captain. a glass round, and after that----" "peter, peter," said i, "'tis the 'after that' which sends many a good hulk to the bottom." "not meaning to apply the term to peter bligh, but by way of what the landsmen call 'silime,'" said mister jacob. "'simile' you mean, mister jacob. well, it's all the same, and neither here nor there in the matter of a letter. the fact is, gentlemen, i wish you to know why i have sailed this ship to ken's archipelago, and under what circumstances i shall sail her home again." they pricked up their ears at this, peter turning his cap nervously in his hands and mister jacob being busy with his glasses as he loves to be. "yes," i went on, "you have behaved like true shipmates and spoken never a word which a man might not fairly speak. and now it's my duty to be open with you. well, to cut it short, my lads, i've sailed to the pacific because my mistress, ruth bellenden, asked me." they had known as much, i imagine, from the start; but while mister jacob pretended to be very much surprised, honest peter raised his glass and drank to mistress ruth's good health. "god bless her," he said, "and may the day come when i ship along o' such a one again. aye, you would have come out for her sake, captain--no other, i'm sure!" "she being ruth bellenden no longer, but the wife of a gentleman with a name none but a foreigner can spell," added mister jacob; and then he went on: "well, you surprise me very much, captain--very much indeed. matrimony is a choppy sea and queer things swim in it. but this--this i had not looked to hear." i knew that this was only mister jacob's way, and continued my story. "it was a promise to her upon her wedding day. ten thousand pounds she left with her lawyers for this very purpose. 'my husband has strange ideas; i may not share them,' were her words to me. 'if his yacht should not be at the islands when i wish to visit europe again, i should like you to find me a vessel in its place. i trust you, jasper begg,' she said; 'you will sail for ken's archipelago twelve months from today, and you will come to my house there, as you used to do in the old time, for orders. perhaps i shall send you home again, perhaps i may like to have a yacht of my own once more. who knows? i am quite alone in the world,' she said, laughing, 'though my brother is alive. and the pacific ocean is a long way from london--oh, such a long way,' she said, or something of that sort." "aye, and right, too. a derned long way she meant, i don't doubt, if what was in her mind came out," puts in peter at this. "mr. bligh," said i, "be pleased to hold your tongue until your opinion is asked. what i am telling you is a confidence which you two, and no others, share with me. to-morrow, as soon as daylight, i shall row ashore and ask to see mme. czerny, as i suppose i must call little ruth now. if she says, 'go home again,' very well, home we go with good wages in our pockets. if she says 'stay,' there's not a man on board this ship that will not stay willingly--she being married to a foreigner, which all the world knows is not the same as being married to an englishman----" "to say nothing of an irishman," said peter bligh, whose mother was from dublin and whose father was named sometimes for a man of rotherhithe and at other times put down to any country which it suited peter to boast about. "edmond czerny was a hungarian," said i, "and he played the fiddle wonderful. what mad idea took him for a honeymoon to ken's island, the lord only knows. they say he was many years in america. i know nothing about him, save that he had a civil tongue and manners to catch a young girl's fancy. she was only twenty-two when she married him, mister jacob." "old enough to know better--quite old enough to know better. not that i would say anything against ruth bellenden, not a word. it's the woman's part to play the capers, sir, and we poor mortal men to be took by them. howsomever, since there was a fiddle in it, i've nothing more to say." we laughed at mister jacob's notion, and peter bligh said what it was in my heart to say: "saving that if ruth bellenden needs a friend, she'll find twenty-six aboard this ship, to say nothing of the cook's boy and the dog. you've a nice mind, mister jacob, but you've a deal to larn when it comes to women. my poor old father, who hailed from shoreham----" "it was newport yesterday, peter." "aye, so it were--so it were. but, newport or shoreham, he'd a precious good notion of the sex, and what he said i'll stand by. 'get 'em on their feet to the music,' says he, 'and you can lead 'em anywheres.' 'tis gospel truth that, mister jacob." "but a man had better mind his steps," said i. "for my part, i shouldn't be surprised if ruth bellenden's husband gave us the cold shoulder to-morrow and sent us about our business. however, the sea's free to all men, lads, and the morn will show. by your leave we'll have a bit of supper and after that turn in. we shall want all our wits about us when daylight comes." they agreed to this, and without further parley we went on deck and heard what the lad "dolly" venn had to tell us. it was full dark now and the islands were hidden from our view. the beacon shone with a steady white glare which, under the circumstances, was almost uncanny. i asked the lad if he had sighted any ships in towards the land or if signals had been made. he answered me that no ship had passed in or out nor any rocket been fired. "and i do believe, sir," he said, "that we shall find the harbour on the far sight of yonder height." "the morning will show us, lad," said i; "go down to your supper, for i mean to take this watch myself." they left me on the bridge. the wind had fallen until it was scarce above a moan in the shrouds. i stood watching the beacon as a man who watches the window light of one who has been dear to him. chapter ii we go ashore and learn strange things i have told how it came about that i sailed for ken's island, and now i shall tell what happened when i went ashore to find ruth bellenden. we put off from the ship at six bells in the morning watch. dolly venn, who was rated as fourth officer, was with me in the launch, and harry doe, the boatswain, at the tiller. i left mister jacob on the bridge, and gave him my orders to stand in-shore as near as might be, and to look for my coming at sunset--no later. "whatever passes," said i, "the night will find me on board again. i trust to bring you good news, mister jacob--the best news." "which would be that we were to 'bout ship and home again," says he; and that i did not contradict. now, we were to the westward of the island when we put off, and neither my glass nor the others showed any good landing there. as the launch drew in towards the cliffs i began to get the lie of the place more clearly; and especially of what i call the mainland, which was wonderfully fresh and green in the sunlight and seemed to have some of the tropic luxuriance of more southern islands. about four miles long, i judged it to be, from the high black rock to which it rose at the southward point, to the low dog's-nosed reef which defended it to the north. trees i could see, palms and that kind, and ripe green grasses on a stretch of real down-like land; but the cliffs themselves were steep and unpromising, and the closer we drew the less i liked the look of it. "dolly, my lad," i said at last, "you were the wise one, after all. yon's no shore for an honest man; he being made like a man and not like an eagle. let's try the starboard tack and see what luck will send us." we headed the launch almost due south, and began to round the headland. the men were elated, they didn't know at what; dolly venn had a boy's delight in the difficulty. "an ugly shore, sir," he said, pleased at my compliment. "a very ugly shore. it would be a bad night which found a ship in these parts and no better light than the fool's beacon we saw yesterday." "as true as the parson's word," said i, "but, ugly or beautiful, i'll be up on those heights before twelve o'clock if i have to swim ashore. and speaking of that," said i, "there are men up yonder, or i'm a dutchman!" well, he clapped his glass to his eye and searched the green grass land as i had done; but the light was overstrong and the cliff quickly shut the view from us, so that we found ourselves presently in the loom of vast black rocks, with the tide running like a whirlpool, and a great sword-fish reef a mile from the shore, perhaps, to catch any fool that didn't want sea room. i took the tiller myself from this point, and standing well out i brought the launch round gingerly enough, but the water was deep and good once we were on the lee side; and no sooner did we head north again than i espied the cove and knew where ruth bellenden had gone ashore. "it's there, lad," said i, "yonder, where the sand sparkles. there'll be a way up the cliff and good anchorage. no one but an irishman would buy an island without a harbour; you tell mr. bligh that when we go aboard again." "mr. bligh says he's only irish on the mother's side, sir; that's what makes him bighearted towards the women. he'll be dying to come ashore if there are any petticoats hereabouts." "they haven't much use for that same garment on the pacific islands," said i. "peter can marry cheap here, if it's the milliners' bills he's minding--but i doubt, lad, from the look of it, whether we'll find a jewel in this port. it's a wild-looking place, to be sure it is." indeed, and it was. viewed from the eastward sea, i call ken's island the most fearsome place i have come across in all my fifteen years afloat. vast cliffs, black and green and crystal, rose up sheer from the water in precipices for all the world like mighty steps. by here and there, as the ground sloped away to the northward, there were forests of teak (at least, i judged them to be that), pretty woods with every kind of palm, green valleys and grassy pastures. the sands of the cove were white as snow, and shone like so many precious stones pounded up to make a sea beach. on the north side only was there barrenness-- for that seemed but a tongue of low land and black rock thrust straight out into the sea. but elsewhere it was a spectacle to impress a man; and i began, perhaps, to admit that edmond czerny had more than a crank's whim in his mind when he took little ruth bellenden to such a shore for her honeymoon. he had a fancy for wild places, said i, and this was the very spot for him. but miss ruth, who had always been one for the towns and cities and the bright things of life--what did she think of it? i should learn that, if she were ashore yonder. now, we put straight in to the cove where the silver sand was, and no sooner was i ashore than i espied a rickety wooden ladder rising almost straight up to the cliff's head, which hereabouts was no more than sixty feet high. neither man nor beast was on the beach, nor did i make out any sign of human habitation whatever. it was just a little sandy bay, lone and desolate; but directly i slipped out of the launch i discovered footprints leading to the ladder's foot, and i knew that men had gone up before me, that very morning it must be, seeing that the tide had ebbed and the sand was still wet. at another time i might have asked myself why nobody came out to meet us, and why there was no lookout for the island to hail a strange ship in the offing; but i was too eager to go ashore, and, for that matter, had my feet on the sand almost before the launch grounded. "do you, dolly, come up with me," said i; "the others will stand by to anchor until we come down again. if it's not in an hour, lads, go back and get your dinners; but look for me at sunset anyway, for i've no mind to sleep ashore, and that you may be sure of." they took the orders and pushed the launch off. dolly and i ran up the crazy ladder and found ourselves at the cliff's head, but no better off in the matter of seeing than we had been before. true, the launch looked far down, like a toy ship in a big basin of blue water; we could distinguish the sword-fish reef, as the lad called it, and other reefs to the east and north, but the place we stood on was shut in by a black wood of teak and blue ebony, and, save for the rustling of the great leaves, we couldn't hear a sound. as for the path through the plantation, that was covered with long, rank grass, and some pit or other--i don't know what it was--gave a pungent, heavy odour which didn't suit a seaman's lungs. i was set against the place from the first--didn't like it, and told the lad as much. "dolly," said i, "the sooner we have a ship's planking under our feet again the better for our constitutions. if there's a house in this locality, the ladder is the road to it, unless one of peter bligh's countrymen built it. put your best foot foremost, my lad. we'll dine early if we don't lunch late." with this i struck the path through the wood and went straight on, not listening to the lad's chatter nor making any myself. the shade was welcome enough; there were pretty places for those that had eyes to see them--waterfalls splashing down from the moss-grown rocks above; little pools, dark and wonderfully blue; here and there a bit of green, which might have been the lawn of a country house. but of dwelling or of people i saw nothing, and to what the boy fancied that he saw i paid no heed. "you're dreaming it, young gentleman," said i, "for look now, who should be afraid of two unarmed seamen, and why should any honest man be ashamed to show his face? if there are men peeping behind the trees, well, let them peep, and good luck go with them. it doesn't trouble me, and i don't suppose it will take your appetite away. you aren't afraid of them, surely?" it was an unkind thing to have said, and the lad rightly turned upon me. "why, sir," cried he, "i would never be afraid while i was with you." "proudly put, my boy, and a compliment i won't forget. what sort of men did you say that they were?" "one was old, with a goat's beard. he wore ragged breeches and a seaman's blouse. i saw him directly we entered the wood. the others were up in the hills above the waterfall. they carried rifles." "come, come, dolly," exclaimed i. "put them in prussian blue at once, and fly the german ensign. rifles in a place like this--and two unarmed strangers against them! why should the rogues hide their beautiful faces? if they would know all about us, what's to prevent them? do we look like highwaymen or honest fellows? be sure, my lad, that the young lady i am going to see wouldn't have any blacklegs about her house. ruth bellenden's too clever for that. she'd send them about their business quick enough, as she's sent many a one when i was the skipper of her yacht. did they tell you that, dolly--that your skipper used to sail the smartest schooner-yacht that ever flew the ensign----" the boy looked up at me and admitted frankly that he knew something. "they said the young lady owned the manhattan, sir. i never asked much about it. the men were fond of her, i believe." "adored her, lad. she was the daughter of rupert bellenden, who made a mint of money by building the western american railroad, and afterwards in the steel way. he was drowned at sea when the elbe went down. his son got the business, but the daughter took the house and fortune--at least, the best part of it. she was always a rare one for the sea, and owned a biggish boat in her father's time. when he died she bought the manhattan, more's the pity, for it carried her to mediterranean ports, and there she took up with the fiddler. he was a chevalier or something, and could look a woman through and through. what money he had was made, the lord knows where, not out of fiddling, i'll be bound, for his was no music to set the tongue lilting. he'd been in the pacific a while, they say, and was a jack-of-all-trades in america. that's how he came across these islands, you may imagine--slap in the sea-way to yokohama as they are. there's been many a good ship ashore on ken's island, lad, believe me, and there'll be many another. 'tis no likely place to bring a young wife to, and none but a madman would have done it." i told him all this just in a natural way, as one man speaking to another of something which troubled his mind. not that he made much of it--how should he?--for there were a hundred things to look at, and his eyes were here and there and everywhere; now up at the great black rocks above us; now peering into a deep gorge, over which a little wooden bridge carried us, just for all the world like a scaffold thrown from tree to tree of the wood. it was a rare picture, i admit, and when we came out of the thicket at last and saw the lower island spread before us like a chart, with its fields of crimson flowers, its waterfalls, its bits of pasture, and its blue seas beyond, a man might well have stood to tell himself that nature never made a fairer place. for my part, i began to believe again that edmond czerny knew what he was about when he built a house for miss ruth on such a spot; and i was just about to tell the lad as much when a man came running up the path and, hailing us in a loud voice, asked us where the devil we were going to--or something not more civil. and, at this, i brought to and looked him up and down and answered him as a seaman should. "to the devil yourself," said i; "what's that to do with you, and what may your name happen to be?" he was a big man, dressed in blue serge, with a peak cap and a seaman's blouse. he had a long brown beard and a pock-marked face, and he carried a spy-glass under his arm. he had come up from the grassy valley below--and there i first saw the roof of a low bungalow, and the gardens about it. that was ruth's home, i said, and this fellow was one of czerny's yacht hands. "not so fast, not so fast," cried he; "do you know that this is private land, and you've no business ashore here?" "why," says i, "haven't we come ashore to see you, my beauty, and doesn't the spectacle reward us? 'bout ship," says i, "and have done with it. my business is with your mistress, whom i knew before your brother was hanged at 'frisco." he swore a big oath at this, and, i do believe, was half of the mind to try which was the better man; but when he had looked down at the gardens of the bungalow, and a white figure was plainly to be seen there, he seemed to think better of it, and changed his tone entirely. "avast," cries he, with a bit of a laugh, "you're one of the right sort, and no mistaking that! and where would you be from, and what would you be wanting here?" he asks, grown civil as a bagman with a bit of ribbon to sell. "shipmate," says i, "if i'm one of the right sort, my port's southampton and my flag's the ensign. take me down to mme. czerny, whom i see among the flower-beds yonder, and you shall know enough about me in five minutes to bring the tears to your beautiful eyes. and come," says i, chaffing him, "are there any girls in this bit of a paradise? if so," says i, "i should call 'em lucky when i look at you." well, he took it sourly enough, but i could see he was mighty curious to hear more about me, and as we went down a winding path to the bungalow in the valley he put many questions to me, and i tried to answer them civilly. like all seamen he had no silent wits of his own, and every word he thought, that he must speak. "the guv'nor's not here," he said; "gone to 'frisco. lucky for you, for he don't like strangers. aye," he goes on, "he's a wonderful man for his own way; to be sure he is. you'll be aboard and away before sunset, or you might see him. take my advice and put about. the shore's unwholesome," says he. "by the looks of you," says i, "you've nothing more than jaundice, and that i can put up with. as for your guv'nor, i remember him well when he and i did the light fandango together in european ports. he was always a wonder with the fiddle. my mistress could lead him like a pug-dog. i don't doubt she's a bit of a hand at it still." now, this set him thinking, and he put two and two together, i suppose, and knew pretty well who i was. "you'll be jasper begg that sailed the lady's yacht manhattan?" says he. "well, i've heard of you often, and from her own lips. she'll be pleased to see you, right enough--though what the guv'nor might say is another matter. you see," he went on, "this same island is a paradise, sure as thunder; but it's lonely for women-kind, and your mistress, she don't take to it kindly. not that she's complaining, or anything of that sort. a lady who has rings for her fingers and bells for her toes, and all real precious, same as any duchess might wear, she don't complain long. why, my guv'nor could make his very teeth out of diamonds and not miss 'em, come to that! but his missus is always plaguing him to take her to europe, and that game. as if he don't want a wife in his own home, and not in another man's, which is sense, mister begg, though it is spoke by a plain seaman." i said, "aye, aye," and held my tongue, knowing that he would go on with it. we were almost down at the house now, and the cliffs stood like a great cloud of solid rock, above which a loom of smoke was floating. dolly walked at my heels like a patient dog. my own feelings are not for me to tell. i was going to see ruth bellenden again. why, she was there in yonder garden, and nothing between us but this great hulking yellow boy, who took to buttonholing me as a parson buttonholes his churchwarden when he wants a new grate in his drawing-room. "now," says he, standing before me as one who had half a mind to block the road, "you be advised by me, mister begg, and cut this job short. don't you be listening to a woman's parley, for it's all nonsense. i've done wrong to let you ashore, perhaps--perhaps i haven't; but, ashore or afloat, it's my business to see that the guv'nor's orders is carried out, and carried out they will be, one man or twenty agen 'em. do you take a plain word or do you not, mister begg?" "i take whatever's going, and don't trouble about the sugar," says i; and then, putting him aside, i lifted the latch of the garden gate, and went in and saw miss ruth. chapter iii in which jasper begg makes up his mind what to do now, she was sitting in the garden, in a kind of arbour built of leaves, and near by her was her relative, the rats'-tailed old lady we used to call aunt rachel. the pair didn't see me as i passed in, but a chinese servant gave "good-day" to the yellow man we'd picked up coming down; and, at that, miss ruth--for so i call her, not being able to get mme. czerny into my head--miss ruth, i say, stood up, and, the colour tumbling into her cheeks like the tide into an empty pool, she stood for all the world as though she were struck dumb and unable to say a word to any man. i, meanwhile, fingered my hat and looked foolish; for it was an odd kind of job to have come twelve thousand miles upon, and what to say to her with the hulking seaman at my elbow, the lord forgive me if i knew. "miss ruth," says i at last, "i'm here according to orders, and the ship's here, and we're waiting for you to go aboard----" well, she seemed to hear me like one who did not catch the meaning of it. i saw her put her hand to her throat as though something were choking her, and the old lady, the one we called aunt rachel, cried, "god bless me," two or three times together. but the yellow man was the next to speak, and he crossed right over to our miss ruth's side, and talked in her ear in a voice you could have heard up at the hills. "you'll not be going aboard to-day, lady. why, what would the master have to say, he coming home from foreign parts and you not ashore to meet him? you didn't say nothing about any ship, not as i can remember, and mighty pleased the guv'nor will be when he knows about it. shall i tell this party he'd better be getting aboard again, eh, ma'am? don't you think as he'd better be getting aboard again?" he shouted this out for all the world like a man hailing from one ship to another. i don't know what put it into my head, but i knew from that moment that my mistress was afraid, aye, deadly afraid, as it is given few to fear in this life. not that she spoke of it, or showed it by any sign a stranger might have understood; but there was a look in her eyes which was clear to me; "and by my last word," said i to myself, "i'll know the truth this day, though there be one or a hundred yellow boys!" none the less, i held my tongue as a wise man should, and what i said was spoken to the party with the beard. "you've a nice soft voice for a nightingale, that you have," says i; "if you'd let yourself out for a fog-horn to the scilly isles, you'd go near to make your fortune! is the young lady deaf that you want to bawl like a harbour-master? easy, my man," says i, "you'll hurt your beautiful throat." well, he turned round savage enough, but my mistress, who had stood all the while like a statue, spoke now for the first time, and holding out both her hands to me, she cried: "oh, captain begg, captain begg, is it you at last, to walk right here like this? i can't believe it," she said; "i really can't believe it!" "why, that's so," said i, catching her american accent, which was the prettiest thing you ever heard; "i'm on the way to 'frisco, and i put in here according to my promise. my ship's out yonder, miss ruth, and there's some aboard that knows you--peter bligh and mister jacob; and this one, this is little dolly venn," said i, presenting him, "though he'll grow bigger by-and-bye." with this i pushed the boy forward, and he, all silly and blushing as sailors will be when they see a pretty woman above their station--he took her hand and heaved it like a pump-handle; while old aunt rachel, the funny old woman in the glasses, she began to talk a lot of nonsense about seamen, as she always did, and for a minute or two we might have been a party of friends met at a street corner. "i'm glad to find you well, captain begg," said she. "such a dangerous life, too, the mariner's. i always pity you poor fellows when you climb the rattlesnakes on winter's nights." "ratlins, you mean, ma'am," said i, "though for that matter, a syllable or two don't count either way. and i hope you're not poorly, ma'am, on this queer shore." "i like the island," says she, solemn and stiff-like; "my dear nephew is an eccentric, but we must take our bread as we find it on this earth, mister begg, and thankful for it too. poor ruth, now, she is dreadfully distressed and unhappy; but i tell her it will all come right in the end. let her be patient a little while and she will have her own way. she wants for nothing here--she has every comfort. if her husband chooses such a home for her, she must submit. it is our duty to submit to our husbands, captain, as the catechism teaches us." "aye, when you've got 'em," thought i, but i nodded my head to the old lady, and turned to my mistress, who was now speaking to me. "you'll lunch here; why, yes, captain--you mustn't find us inhospitable, even if you leave us at once. mr. denton, will you please to tell them that captain begg lunches with me--as soon as possible?" she turned to the yellow man to give him the order; but there was no mistaking the look which passed between them, saying on her side: "allow me to do this," on his, "you will suffer for it afterwards." but he went up to the veranda of the house right enough, and while he was bawling to the cook, i spoke the first plain word to mme. czerny. "mistress," i said, "the ship's there--shall we go or stay?" i had meant it to be the plain truth between us; on her part the confession whether she needed me or did not; on mine the will to serve her whatever might happen to me. to my dying day, i shall never forget her answer. "go," she said, so low that it was little more than a whisper, "but, oh, for god's sake, jasper begg, come back to me again." i nodded my head and turned the talk. the man denton, the one with the yellow beard (rated as kess denton on the island), was back at my side almost before she had finished. the old lady began to talk about "curling-spikes" and "blue saint peters," and how much the anchor weighed, and all that sort of blarney which she thought ship-shape and suited to a poor sailor-man's understanding. i told her a story of a shark that swallowed a missionary and his hymn-book, and always swam round our ship at service times afterwards--and that kept her thinking a bit. as for little dolly venn, he couldn't keep his eyes off miss ruth--and i didn't wonder, for mine went that way pretty often. aye, she had changed, too, in those twelve months that had passed since last i saw her, the prettiest bride that ever held out a finger for a ring in the big church at nice. her cheeks were all fallen away and flushed with a colour which was cruelly unhealthy to see. the big blue eyes, which i used to see full of laughter and a young girl's life, were ringed round with black, and pitiful when they looked at you. the hair parted above the forehead, as it always was, and brought down in curls above her little ears, didn't seem to me so full of golden threads as it used to be. but it was good to hear her plucky talk, there at the dinner-table, when she chattered away like some sweet-singing bird, and dolly couldn't turn away his eyes, and the yellow boy stood, sour and savage, behind her chair, and threw out hints for me to sheer off which might have moved the bass rock. not that he need have troubled himself, for i had made up my mind already what to do; and no sooner was the food stowed away than i up and spoke about the need of getting on again, and such like. and with that i said "good-bye" to mistress ruth and "good-bye" to the old woman, and had a shot left in my locker for the yellow boy, which i don't doubt pleased him mightily. "good luck to you," says i; "if you'd a wisp of your hair, i'd put it in my locket and think of you sometimes. when you want anything from london you just shout across the sea and we'll be hearing you. deadman's horn is nothing to you," said i; "you'd scare a ship out of the sea, if you wasn't gentle to her." mind you, i said all this as much to put him off as anything else, for i'd been careful enough to blab no word about the southern cross being miss ruth's very own ship, nor about her orders that we should call at ken's island; and i knew that when a man's angry at what you say to him he doesn't think much of two and two making four, but as often as not makes them eight or ten. may-be, said i, he'll make it out that i'm on a tramp bound for 'frisco and have touched here on the way--and certainly he won't look for my coming back again once he sees our smoke on the sky-line. nor was i wrong. my mistress was to tell me that much before twelve hours had passed. and so it was that i said "good-bye" to her, she standing at the garden-gate with a brave smile upon her pretty face, and the yellow man behind her like a savage dog that is afraid to bite, but has all the mind to. at the valley's head i turned about, and she was still there, looking up wistfully to the hills we trod. thrice i waved my hand to her, and thrice she answered, and then together, the lad and i, we entered the dark wood and saw her no more. "your best leg forward, lad," said i to him, "and mum's the word. there's work to do on the ship, and work ashore for a woman's sake. are you game for that, dolly--are you game, my boy?" well, he didn't answer me. some one up in the black gorge above fired a rifle just as i spoke; and the bullet came singing down like a bird on the wing. not a soul could i see, not a sound could i hear when the rolling echoes had passed away. it was just the silence of the thicket and of the great precipices which headed it--a silence which might freeze a man's heart because the danger which threatened him was hidden. "crouch low to the rocks, lad, and go easy," cried i, when my wits came back again; "that's a tongue it doesn't do to quarrel with. the dirty skunks--to fire on unarmed men! but we'll return it, dolly; as i live i'll fire a dozen for every one they send us." "return it, sir," says he; "but aren't you going aboard?" "aye," says i, "and coming back again like drift on an open sea. now let me see you skip across that bridge, and no mistake about it." he darted across the chasm's bridge like a chamois. i followed him quick and clumsy. if my heart was in my mouth--well, let that pass. not for my own sake did i fear mortal man that day, but for the sake of a woman whose very life i believed to be in danger. chapter iv we go aboard, but return again we made the ship safely when twenty minutes were passed, and ten minutes later, mister jacob and peter bligh were in my cabin with me. "lads," i said, for it was not a day when a man picked his talk; "lads," said i, "this ship goes full steam ahead for 'frisco, and you'll be wanting to know the reason why. well, that's right and proper. let me tell you that she's steaming to 'frisco because it's the shortest way to ken's island." they looked queer at this, but my manner kept them silent. every man aboard the southern cross had heard the gun fired up in the hills, and every one knew that dolly venn and the skipper had raced for their lives to the water's edge. "what next?" they asked; and i meant to tell them. "yes," said i, "the shortest way to ken's island, and no mistake about it. for what does a man do when he sees some one in a house and the front door's slammed in his face? why, he goes to the back door certainly, and for choice when the night's dark and the blinds are down. that's what i'm going to do this night, lads, for the sake of a bit of a girl you and i would sail far to serve." they said, "aye, aye," and drew their chairs closer. the men had been piped down to dinner, but peter bligh forgot his, and that was extraordinary peculiar in him. mister jacob took snuff as though it were chocolate powder, and the whole of a man spoke from his little eyes. "listen," said i, beginning to tell them what you know already, "here have we sailed twelve thousand miles at ruth bellenden's order, and how does she receive us? why, with a nod she might give a neighbour going by in the street----" "they not being on speaking terms except in church," put in peter bligh. "or she wishing him to get on with his business," said mister jacob, "and not to gossip when there was work to do." "be that as it may," i ran on, "the facts are as plain to me as eight bells for noon. ruth bellenden's married to a foreigner who's next door to a madman. why, look at it--what was the only word she had the time or the chance to say? 'for god's sake, come back, jasper begg,' says she. and what am i going to do upon that, gentlemen? why, i'm going back, so help me heaven, this very night to learn her trouble." "and to bring her aboard where she could tell it on a fair course, so to speak. you'll do that, sir?" "the night will show what i shall do, mister jacob. was there ever such a story? a man to marry the best creature that ever put on a pretty bonnet, and to carry her to a god-forsaken shore like this! and to ill-treat her there! aye, that's it. if ever a woman's eyes spoke to me of hard treatment, it was ruth bellenden's this morning. she's some trouble, lads, some dreadful trouble. she doesn't even speak of it to me. the yellow boy i've made mention of stood by her all the time. we talked like two that pass by on the ocean. who'll gainsay that it was an unnatural thing? no mortal man can, with reason!" "aye, there's precious little reason in it, by what i make out, captain. you'll know more when the young lady's aboard here----" "and the yellow boy's head has a bump on the top of it, like the knob what used to hang down from my mother's chandelay--but that's idle talking. what time do you put her about to go ashore, sir?" i was glad to see them coming to it like this, and i fell to the plan without further parley. "a fair question and a fair answer," said i; "this ship goes about at eight bells, peter. to mister jacob here i trust the safety of the good fellows who go ashore with me. if we can bring the mistress aboard to-night, well and good, we've done the best day's work we ever set our hands to. if not, that work must rest until tomorrow night, or the night after or the night after that. eight days from now if it happens that nothing is heard from the land and no news of us, well, the course is plain. in that case it will be full steam ahead to 'frisco, and from there a cable to kenrick bellenden, and the plain intimation that his sister has pretty bad need of him on ken's island." "and of an american warship, if one is forthcoming." "it may be, mister jacob; it may be that, though the devils ashore there are the only ones that could tell you that. but you're a man of understanding, and your part will be done. i rely upon you as between shipmates." he took a pinch of snuff, and flapping his coat-tails (for he was always rigged out in the naval officer way) he answered what i wished. "as between shipmates, i will do my duty," said he. "i knew it; i've known it from the beginning," said i. "what's left when you've done is the shore part, and that's not so easy. peter bligh's coming, and i couldn't well leave dolly on board. give me our hulking carpenter, seth barker, and i'll lighten the ship no more. we're short-handed as it is. and, besides, if four won't serve, then forty would be no better. what we can do yonder, wits, and not revolvers, must bring about. but i'll not go with sugar-sticks, you take my word for it, and any man that points a gun at me will wish he'd gone shooting sheep." "aye, aye, to that," cried peter, who was ever a man for a fight; "the shooting first and the civil words after. that's sense and no blarney. when my poor father was tried at swansea, his native place, for hitting an excise man with a ham----" "mr. bligh," cried i, "'tis not with hams you'll be hitting folks yonder, take my word for it. this job may find us on a child's errand or it may find us doing men's work. eight bells on the first watch will tell the whole of the story. until that time i shall hold my tongue about it, but i don't go ashore as i go to a picnic, and i don't make a boast about what i may presently cry out about." well, they were both of my way of thinking, and when we'd talked a little more about it, and i'd opened the arm-chest and looked over the few guns and pistols we'd got there, and we'd called the lad dolly down and promised him that he should come with us, and the men had been given to understand that the skipper was to go ashore by-and-bye on an important business, peter and the others went to their dinner and i took my turn on the bridge. the swell was running strongly then, and the wind blew fresh from the north-east. we'd lost all sight of the island, and spoke but one ship, a small mail steamer from santa cruz bound for the yellow sea, which signalled us "all well" at six bells in the afternoon watch. from that time i went dead slow and began to bring the southern cross about. the work was begun that very hour, i always say. now, i've told all this, short and brief, and with no talk of my own about it. the thing had come so sudden, i knew so little of ruth bellenden's trouble or of what had befallen her on the island, that i was like a man in the dark groping blindly, yet set on hearing the truth. as for the crew, well, you may be sure that dolly venn had put his side of the story about, and when they knew that my mistress was ashore there and in some danger, i believe they'd have put me in irons if i'd so much as spoken of going back. risky it was, so much i won't deny; but who wouldn't risk more than his own paltry skin to save a woman in trouble, and she, so to speak, a shipmate? there was not a man aboard, stake my life, who wouldn't have gone to the land willingly for ruth bellenden's sake though he'd been told, sure and certain, that ken's island must be his grave. and we'd always the ship, mind you, and the knowledge that she would go to 'frisco to get us help. a fool's hope, i say now. for how could we know that the southern cross would be at the bottom of the sea, a thousand fathoms down, before the week was run? we couldn't know it; yet that was what happened, and that is why no help came to us. we had put the ship about at six bells in the afternoon watch, but it was eight bells in the second dog (the night being too clear for my liking and a full moon showing bright in the sky) that we sighted ken's island for the second time, and for the second time prepared to go ashore. the longboat was ready by this time, her barrels full of water and her lockers full of biscuit. such arms as we were to carry were partly stowed in water-proof sheeting--the rifles, and the cartridges for them; but the revolvers we carried, and a good sheffield knife a man, which we weren't going to cut potatoes with. for the rest, i made them put in a few stout blankets, and more rations than might have served for such a trip. "good beginnings make good endings," said i; "what we haven't need of, lads, we can carry aboard again. the longboat's back won't ache, be sure of it." all this, i say, was done when the moon showed us the island like a great barren rock rising up sheer from the sea. and when it was done, mister jacob called my attention to something which in the hurry of shore-going i might never have seen at all or thought about. it was nothing less than this--that their fool's beacon was out to-night, and all the sea about it as black as ink. whoever set up the light, then, did not use it for a seaman's benefit, but for his own whim. i reckoned up the situation at a glance, and even at that early stage i began to know the terrible meaning of it. "mister jacob," said i, "those that keep that beacon are either fools or knaves." "or both, sir," said he. "which one is the own brother to the other. aye, captain, 'tis lucky ye've the parish lantern, as my poor father used to say when----" but peter bligh never finished it that night. the words were still in his mouth when a rocket shot up over the sea and bursting in a cloud of gold-blue sparks, cast a weird, cold light upon rock and reef and all that troubled sea. and as the rocket fell our big carpenter, seth barker, standing aft by the hatch, cries out, "ship ashore! ship ashore, by----!" chapter v strange sights ashore, and what we saw of them now, when seth barker cried out that a ship was ashore on the dangerous reefs to the northward of the main island, it is not necessary to tell you what we, a crew of british seamen, were called upon to do. the words were scarcely spoken before i had given the order, "stand by the boats," and sent every man to his station. excited the hands were, that i will not deny; excited and willing enough to tell you about it if you'd asked them; but no man among them opened his lips, and while they stood there, anxious and ready, i had my glass to my eye and tried to make out the steamer and what had befallen her. nor was mister jacob behind me, but he and peter bligh at my side, we soon knew the truth and made up our minds about it. "there's a ship on the reef, sure enough, and by the cut of her she's the santa cruz we spoke this afternoon," said mr. jacob, and added, "a dangerous shore, sir, a dangerous shore." "but full of kind-hearted people that fire their guns at poor shipwrecked mariners," put in peter bligh. i wouldn't believe him at first, but there was no denying it, awful truth that it was, when a few minutes had passed. "good god," cried i, "it can't be so, peter, and yet that's a rifle's tongue, or i've lost my hearing." well, we all stood together and listened as men listen for some poor creature's death-cry, or the sounds which come in the stillness of the night to affright and unnerve us. sure enough, you couldn't have counted ten before the report of guns was heard distinctly above the distant roar of breakers; while flashes of crimson light, playing about the reef, seemed to tell the whole story without another word from me. "those devils ashore are shooting the crew," cried i; "did man ever hear such bloody work? i'll have a reckoning for this, if it takes me twenty years. lower away the boats, lads; i'm going to dance to that music." they swung the two longboats out on the davits, and the port crew were in their seats, when mister jacob touched my arm and questioned my order--a thing i haven't known him to do twice in ten years. "beg pardon, sir," said he, "but there's no boat that will help the santa cruz to-night." "and why, mister jacob--why do you say that?" "because she's gone where neither you nor i wish to go yet awhile, mister begg." i stood as though he had shot me, and clapping my glass to my eye i took another look towards the northern reef and the ship that was stranded there. but no ship was to be seen. she had disappeared in a twinkling; the sea had swallowed her up. and over the water, as an eerie wail, lasting and doleful, came the death-cries of those who perished with her. "god rest their poor souls and punish them that sent them there," said peter bligh fervently; but mister jacob was still full of his prudent talk. "we're four miles out, and the moon will be gone in ten minutes, sir. you couldn't make the reef if you tried, and if you could, you'd find none living. this sea would best the biggest boat that ever a ship carried--it will blow harder in an hour, and what then? we've friends of our own to serve, and the door that providence opens we've no right to shut. i say nothing against humanity, captain begg, but i wouldn't hunt the dead in the water when i could help the living ashore." i saw his point in a moment, and had nothing to say against it. no small boat could have lived in the reefs about the northern end of the island with the sea that was running that night. if the devils who fired down upon the poor fellows of the santa cruz were still watching like vultures for human meat, fair argument said, the main island would be free of them for us to go ashore as we pleased. a better opportunity might not be found for a score of months. i never blame myself, least of all now, when i know ruth bellenden's story, that i listened that night to the clearheaded wisdom of anthony jacob. "you're right, as always, mister jacob. i've no call to take these good fellows on a fool's errand. and it's going to blow hard, as you say. we'll take in one of the boats, and those that are for the shore will make haste to get aboard the other." this i said to him, but to the men i put it in a few seaman's words. "lads," i said, "no boat that southampton ever built could swim in yonder tide where it makes between the reefs. we'd like to help shipmates, but the chance is not ours. there's another little shipmate ashore there that needs our help pretty badly. i'm going in for her sake, and there's not a man of you that will not do his duty by the ship when i'm gone. aye, you'll stand by mister jacob, lads, i may tell him that?" they gave me a rousing cheer, which was a pretty foolish thing to have done, and it took all my voice to silence them. lucky for us, there was a cloud over the moon now, and darkness like a black vapour upon the sea. not a lamp burned on the southern cross; not a cabin window but had its curtain. what glow came from her funnel was not more than a hazy red light over the waters; and when five of us (for we took harry doe to stand by ashore) stepped into the longboat, and set her head due west for the land, we lost the steamer in five minutes--and, god knows, we were never to see her again on the high seas or off. now, i have said that the wind had begun to blow fresh since sunset, and at two bells in the first watch, the time we left the ship, the sea ran high, and it was not oversafe even in the longboat to be cruising for a shore we knew so little about. i have always accounted it more good luck than good seamanship which brought us to the cove at last, and set us all, wet but cheerful, on the dry, white sand about the ladder's foot. there was shelter in the bay both for man and ship, and when we'd dragged the longboat up on the beach we gave harry doe his orders and left him to his duty. "if there's danger fire your gun," said i--"once, if you wish to call us; twice, if you think we should stand off. but you won't do that unless things are at the worst, and i'm hoping for the best, when you won't do it at all." he answered, "aye, aye," in a whisper which was like a bear's growl; and we four, peter bligh, seth barker, and the lad dolly, besides myself, climbed the ladder like cats and stood at the cliff's head. to say that our hearts were in our mouths would not be strict truth, for i never feared any man, beast, or devil yet; and i wasn't going to begin that night--nor were the others more ready, that i will answer for them. but remembering the things we had seen on the reef, the words which ruth bellenden had spoken to me, and that which happened to the lad and myself last time we came ashore; remembering this, it's not to be wondered at that our hearts beat a bit quicker, and that our hands went now and again to the pistols we carried. for, just think of it--there we were at nine o'clock of a dark night, in a thick wood, with the trees making ghosts about us, and the path as narrow as a ship's plank, and no knowledge who walked the woods with us, nor any true reckoning of our circumstance. what man wouldn't have held his tongue at such a time, or argued with himself that it might end badly, and he never see the sun again? not jasper begg, as i bear witness. now, i put myself at the head of our fellows and, the better to find the track, i went down on my hands and my knees like a four-footed thing, and signalling to those behind with a bosun's whistle, i led them well enough through the wood to the wicker-basket bridge; and would have gone on from there straight down to the house but for something which happened at the clearing of the thicket, just as i stood up to bid the men go over. startling it was, to be sure, and enough to give any man a turn; nor did i wonder that peter bligh should have cried out as he did when first he clapped eyes upon it. "holy mother of music," says he, "'tis the angels singing, or i'm a dirty nigger!" "hold your tongue," says i, in a whisper; "are you afraid of two young women, then?" "of three," says he, "which being odd is lucky. when my poor father----" "to hell with your father," says i; "hold your tongue and wait." he lay low at this, and the rest of us gaped, open-mouthed, as though we were staring at a fairy-book. there, before us, coming down from the black rocks above, leaping from step to step of the stone, were three young girls; but, aye, the queerest sort that ever tantalized a man with their prettiness. you may well ask, the night being inky dark, how we managed to see them at all; but let me tell you that they carried good rosin torches in their hands, and the wild light, all gold and crimson against the rocks, shone as bright as a ship's flare and as far. never have i seen such a thing, i say, and never shall. there were the three of them, like young deer on a bleak hillside, singing and laughing and leaping down, and, what's more, speaking to each other in an odd lingo, with here a word of french and there a word of german, and after that something that was beyond me and foreign to my understanding. "god be good to me--saw man ever such a sight? and the dress of 'em, the dress of 'em," whispers peter bligh. but i clapped my hand upon his mouth and stopped him that time. "the dress is all right," said i; "what i'm wondering is how three of that sort came in such a place as this. and well born too, well born, or i don't know the meaning of the term!" they were pretty creatures and their dress was like the rest of them. short skirts all looped and filled with flowers, toggery above cut out of some white skin, with caps to match and their hair falling in big ramping curls about it--they were for all the world like the dancers you see at a stage play and just as active. and to hear their voices, sweet and musical, floating from ravine to ravine like a choir singing in a place of echoes, aye that was something you might not soon forget. but what they were doing in such a place, or how they came there, the lord above alone knew, and not a plain seaman like jasper begg. [illustration: like dancers at a stage play.] "what are they saying, peter--what do you make of it?" i asked him, under my breath. "'tis the french lingo," says he, foolish-like, "and if it's not that, 'tis the german--leastwise no christian man that i know of could distinguish between 'em." "peter," says i, "that's what you learn in the asylum. 'tis no more the french lingo than your own. why, hearken to it." well, he listened, and soon we heard a pretty echo from the valley, for they'd gone down towards the gardens now; and one word repeated often had as nice a touch of music as i remember hearing. it was just this: "rosamunda--munda--munda," and you can't think how fresh the young voice sounded in that lonely place, or what a chill it gave a man when he remembered the devils over at the reef and what they'd done to the crew of the santa cruz. i do believe to this day that our fellows imagined they'd seen nothing more nor less than an apparition out of the black rocks above them; and it wasn't until i'd spoken to them in good honest english that i got them to go on again. "flesh or spirit, that's not a lot to whiten a man's gills," cried i; "why, thunder, peter bligh, you're big enough to put 'em all in your pocket, and soft enough they'd lie when they got there. do you mean to tell me," i asked him, "that four hale and strong men are to be frightened out of their wits by three pretty girls?--and you a religious man, too, peter! why, i'm ashamed of you, that i am, lads, right down ashamed of you!" they plucked up at this, and peter he made haste to excuse himself. "if they was christian men with knives in their hands," says he, "i'd put up a bit of a prayer, and trust to the lord to shoot 'em; but them three's agen all reason, at this time of night in such a lone place." "go on with you, peter," chimes in dolly venn; "three ripping little girls, and don't i wish they'd ask me in to tea! why, look, they're down by the house now, and somebody with them, though whether it's a man or a woman i really don't pretend to say." "i'm derned if i don't think it's a lion," says seth barker, asking my pardon for the liberty. we all stood still at this, for we were on the hillside just above the house now; and down on the fair grass-way below us we espied the three little girls with their torches still burning, and they as deep in talk with a stranger as a man might have been with his own mother. a more remarkable human being than the one these little ladies had happened upon i don't look to see again the world around. man or lion--god forgive me if i know what to call him. he'd hair enough, shaggy hair curling about his shoulders, to have stuffed a feather bed. his dress was half man's, half woman's. he'd a tattered petticoat about his legs, a seaman's blouse for his body, and a lady's shawl above that upon his shoulders--his legs were bare as a barked tree, and what boots he had should have been in the rag-shop. more wonderful still was it to see the manner of the young ladies towards him--for i shall always call them that--they petted him and fondled him, and one put a mock crown of roses on his head. then, with that pretty song of theirs, "rosamunda--munda--munda," they all ran off together towards the northern shore and left us in the darkness, as surprised a party of men as you'll readily meet with. "well," says peter bligh, and he was the first among us to speak, "yon's a nice shipmate to speak on a quiet road. so help me thunder, but i wouldn't pass round the tin for him in a beauty show, no, not much! did ye see the hair of him, captain--did ye see the hair?" "and the girls kissing him as though he were apollo," cries dolly venn, who, i don't doubt, would have done the kissing willingly himself. but i hushed their talk, and without more ado i went straight down to ruth bellenden's house. all the strange things we'd seen and heard, the uncanny sights, the firing on the reef, the wild man ashore, the little girls from the hills--all these, i say, began to tell me my mistress's story as a written book might never have done. "she's need of me," i said, "sore need; and by god's help i'll bring her out of this place before to-morrow's sun." for how should i know what long days must pass before i was to leave ken's island again? chapter vi jasper begg meets his old mistress, and is watched i had made up my mind to take every proper precaution before going up to the house where my mistress lived; and with caution in my head i left seth barker, the carpenter, up on the hill path, while i set peter bligh at the gate of the garden, and posted dolly venn round at the northern side, where the men who had looted the santa cruz might be looked for with any others that i had no knowledge of. when this was done, and they understood that they were to fire a gun if the need arose, i opened the wicket-gate and crept up the grass path for all the world like an ill-visaged fellow who had no true business there. not a sound could i hear in all that place; not a dog barked, nor a human voice spoke. even the wind came fitful and gusty about the sheltered house; and so quiet was it between the squalls that my own footfall almost could scare me. for, you see, a whisper spoken at the wrong time might have undone all--a clumsy step have cost us more than a man cared to count. we were but four, and, for all i know, there might have been four hundred on ken's island. you don't wonder therefore, if i asked myself at times whether to-morrow's sun would find us living or what our misfortune might spell for one i had come so far to serve. it was very dark in the garden, as i have told you, but two of the windows in the house were lighted up and two golden rings of light thrown out upon the soft grass i trod. i stood a long time debating which window to knock open--for it was a fearful lottery, i must say--and when i'd turned it over and over in my head, and now made out that it was this window and now plumped for the other, i took up a pebble at last and cast it upon the pane nearest to the door--for that seemed to me the more likely room, and i'd nothing else but common sense to guide me. you may judge of my feelings when no notice was taken of my signal except by a dog, which began to yap like a pup and to make such a scare that i thought every window and every door must be opened that very instant and as many men out on top of me. i said, surely, that it was all up with jasper begg that journey; but odd to tell it, the dog gave over at last, and no one showed himself, neither was there any whistle from my company; and i was just making ready to throw another stone when the second light was turned out all of a sudden and, the long window being opened, ruth bellenden--or, to be more correct, mme. czerny--herself came out into the garden, and stood looking round about as though she knew that i was there and had been waiting for me. when at last she saw me she didn't speak or make any sign, but going about to the house again she held the window open for me, and i passed into the dark room with her, and there held her hand in mine, i do believe as though i would never let it go again. "jasper," says she, in a whisper that was pretty as the south wind in springtime; "jasper begg, how could it be any one else! oh, we must light a candle, jasper begg," says she, "or we shall lose ourselves in the dark." "miss ruth," said i, "light or dark, i'm here according to my orders, and the ship's here, and as i said to you before the yellow boy to-day, we're waiting for our mistress to go aboard." she had her back to me when i said this, and was busy enough drawing the curtains and lighting the lamp again. the light showed me that she wore a rich black gown with fluffy stuff over it, and a bit of a sparkle in the way of diamonds like a band across her parted hair. the face was deceiving, now lighted up by one of the old smiles, now hard set as one who had suffered much for her years. but there was nothing over-womanish in her talk, and we two thrashed it out there, just the same as if ken's island wasn't full of devils, and the lives of me and my men worth what a spin of the coin might buy them at. "you mustn't call me miss ruth," says she, when she turned from the lamp and tidied up her writing on the table; "of course you know that, jasper begg. and you at my wedding, too--is it really not more than twelve long months ago?" a sigh passed her lips, such a sigh as tells a woman's story better than all the books; and in that moment the new look came upon her face, the look i had seen when the yellow man changed words with her in the morning. "it's thirteen months three weeks since you went up with mr. czerny to the cathedral at nice," was my next word; "the days go slow on this out-of-the-way shore, i'll be bound--until our friends come, miss ruth, until we're sure they haven't forgotten us." i had a meaning in this, and be sure she took it. not that she answered me out and away as i wished; for she put on the pretty air of wife and mistress who wouldn't tell any of her husband's secrets. "why, yes," she said, very slowly, "the days are long and the nights longer, and, of course, my husband is much away from here." i nodded my head and drew the chair she'd offered me close to the table. on her part she was looking at the clock as though she wished that the hands of it might stand still. i read it that we hadn't much time to lose, and what we had was no time for fair words. "miss ruth," says i, without more parley, "from what i've seen to-night i don't doubt that any honest man would be glad to get as far as he could from ken's island and its people at the first opportunity. you'll pardon what a plain seaman is going to say, and count him none the less a friend for saying it. when you left money in the banker's hands to commission a ship and bring her to this port, your words to me were, 'i may have need of you.' miss ruth, you have need of me--i should be no more than a fool if i couldn't see that. you have sore need of me, and if you won't say so for yourself, i take leave to say it for you." she raised a hand as though she would not hear me--but i was on a clear course now, and i held to it in spite of her. "yes," i said, "you've need of your friends to-night, and it's a lucky wind that brought them to this shore. what has passed, miss ruth, in these months you speak of, it's not for me to ask or inquire. i have eyes in my head, and they show me what i would give my fortune not to see. you're unhappy here, miss ruth--you're not treated well." i waited for her to speak; but not a word would she say. white she was, as a flower from her own garden, and once or twice she shivered as though the cold had struck her. i was just going on to speak again, when what should happen but that her little head went down on the table and she began to sob as though her heart would break. "oh, jasper begg, how i have suffered, how i have suffered!" said she, between her sobs; and what could i do, what could any man do who would kiss the ground a woman walks upon but has no right or title to? why, hold his tongue, of course, though it hurt him cruelly to do any such thing. "miss ruth," said i, very foolish, "please don't think of that now. i'm here to help you, the ship's here, we're waiting for you to go aboard." she dried her tears and tried to look up at me with a smile. "oh, i'm just a child, just a child again, jasper," cries she; "a year ago i thought myself a woman, but that's all passed. and i shall never go away on your ship, jasper begg--never, never. i shall die on ken's island as so many have died." i stood up at this and pointed to the clock. "little friend," i said, "if you'll put a cloak about your shoulders and leave this house with me i'll have you safe aboard the southern cross in twenty minutes by that clock, as god is my witness." it was no boast--for that i could have done as any seaman knows; and you may well imagine that i stood as a man struck dumb when i had her answer. "why, yes," she said, "you could put me on board your boat, captain jasper, if every step i took was not watched; if every crag had not its sentinel; if there were not a hundred to say 'go back--go back to your home.' oh, how can you know, how can you guess the things i fear and dread in this awful place? you, perhaps, because the ship is waiting will be allowed to return to it again. but i, never, never again to my life's end." a terrible look crossed her face as she said this, and with one swift movement she opened a drawer in the locker where she did her writing, and took from it a little book which she thrust, like a packet, into my hands. "read," she said, with startling earnestness, "read that when you are at sea again. i never thought that any other eyes but mine would see it; but you, jasper, you shall read it. it will tell you what i myself could never tell. read it as you sail away from here, and then say how you will come back to help the woman who needs your help so sorely." i thrust the book into my pocket, but was not to be put off like that. "read it i will, every line," said i; "but you don't suppose that jasper begg is about to sail away and leave you in this plight, miss ruth! he'd be a pretty sort of englishman to do that, and it's not in his constitution, i do assure you!" she laughed at my earnestness, but recollecting how we stood and what had befallen since sunset, she would hear no more of it. "you don't understand; oh, you don't understand!" she cried, very earnestly; "there's danger here, danger even now while you and i are talking. those who have gone out to the wreck will be coming home again; they must not find you in this house, jasper begg, must not, must not! for my sake, go as you came. tell all that thought of me how i thank them. some day, perhaps, you will learn how to help me. i am grateful to you, jasper--you know that i am grateful." she held out both her hands to me, and they lay in mine, and i was trying to speak a real word from my heart to her when there came a low, shrill whistle from the garden-gate, and i knew that peter bligh had seen something and was calling me. "miss ruth," says i, "that's old peter bligh and his danger signal. there'll be some one about, little friend, or he wouldn't do it." well, she never said a word. i saw a shadow cross her face, and believed she was about to faint. nor will any one be surprised at that when i say that the door behind us had been opened while we talked, and there stood kess denton, the yellow man, watching us like a hound that would bite presently. chapter vii in which help comes from the last quarter we had expected it now, no sooner did i see the yellow man than my mind was fully made up, and i determined what harbour to make for. "if you're there, my lad," said i to myself, "the others are not far behind you. you've seen me come in, and it's your intention to prevent me going out again. to be caught like a rat in a trap won't serve ruth bellenden, and it won't serve me. i'm for the open, kess denton," said i, "and no long while about it, either." this i said, but i didn't mean to play the startled kitten, and without any token of surprise or such-like i turned round to miss ruth and gave her "good-evening." "i'm sorry you're not coming aboard, mme. czerny," says i; "we weigh in an hour, and it will be a month or more before i call in again. but you sha'n't wait long for the news if i can help it; and as for your brother, mr. kenrick, i'll trust to hear from him at 'frisco and to tell you what he thinks on my return. good-night, madame," said i, "and the best of health and prosperity." i held out my hand, and she shook it like one who didn't know what she was doing. the yellow man came a step nearer and said, "halloa, my hearty." i nodded my head to him and he put his hand on my shoulder. poor fool, he thought i was a child, perhaps, and to be treated as one; but i have learnt a thing or two about taking care of myself in japan, and you couldn't have counted two before i had his arm twisted under mine, and he gave a yell that must have been heard up in the hills. "if you cry out like that, you'll ruin your beautiful voice," said i; "hasn't any one ever asked you to sing hymns in a choir? well, i'm surprised. good-night, my boy; i shall be coming back for your picture before many days have passed." upon this, i stepped towards the door, and thought that i had done with him; but no sooner was i out in the garden than something went singing by my ear, and upon that a second dose with two reports which echoed in the hills like rolling thunder. no written music vas necessary to tell me the kind of tune it was, and i swung round on my heel and gripped the man by the throat almost before the echoes of the shot had died away. "kess denton," said i, "if you will have it, you shall!" and with that i wrenched the pistol from his grasp and struck him a blow over the head that sent him down without a word. "one," said i, to myself, "one that helped to make little ruth bellenden suffer;" and with that i set off running and never looked to the right of me nor to the left until i saw peter bligh at the gate and heard his honest voice. "is it you--is it you yourself, mr. begg? thank god for that!" cries he, and it was no longer in a whisper; "there's men in the hills, and seth barker whistling fit to crack his lips. is the young lady coming aboard, sir? no?--well, i'm not surprised, neither, though this shore do seem a queerish sort of place----" i cut him short, and dolly venn running round from his place in the garden i asked him for his news. the thing now was to find a road to the sea. what could be done for ruth bellenden that night was over and passed. our chance lay on the deck of the southern cross, and after that at 'frisco. "what have you seen, dolly venn--be quick, lad, for we can't linger?" was my question to him so soon as he was within hail. he answered me by pointing to the trees which border the garden on the eastward side. "the wood is full of armed men, sir. two of them nearly trod upon me while i was lying there. they carry rifles, and seem to be germans--i couldn't be sure of that, sir." "germans or chimpanzees, we're going by them this night. where's seth barker--why doesn't he come down? does he think we can pass by the hill-road?--the wooden block! call him, one of you." they were about to do this when seth barker himself came panting down the hillpath, and, what was more remarkable, he carried an uncouth sort of bludgeon in his hand. i could see that there had been a bit of a rough and tumble on the way, but it wasn't the time for particulars. "come aboard, sir," says he, breathing heavy; "the gangway's blocked, but i give one of 'em a bit of a knock with his own shillelagh, and that's all right." "is there any more up there?" i asked quickly. "may be a dozen, may be more. they're up on the heights looking for you to go up, captain." "aye," said i, "pleasant company, no doubt. well, we must strike eastward somehow, lads, and the sooner the better. we'll hold to the valley a bit and see where that leads us. do you, seth barker, keep that bit of a shillelagh ready, and, if any one asks you a question, don't you wait to answer it." now, i had resolved to try and get down to the sea by the valley road and, once upon the shore, to signal harry doe, if possible, and, if not him, then the ship herself as a last resource. any road seemed to me better than this trap of a house with armed men all about it and a pistol bullet ready for any stranger that lingered. "aboard the ship," said i, "we'll show them a clean pair of heels to 'frisco and, after that, ask the american government what it can do for ruth bellenden and for her husband." we were four against a hundred, perhaps, and desperate men against us. if we got out of the scrape with our skins, we should be as lucky a lot as ever sailed the northern pacific ocean. but should we--could we? why, it was a thousand to one against it! i said this when we plunged into the wood; and yet i will bear witness that i got more excitement than anything else out of that venture, and i don't believe the others got less. there we were, the four of us, trampling through the brushwood, crushing down the bushes, now lying low, now up a-running--and not a man that wouldn't have gone through it twice for ruth bellenden's sake. if so be that the night was to cost us our lives, well, crying wouldn't help it--and those that were against us were flesh and blood, all said and done, and no spirits to scare a man. to that i set it down that we went on headlong and desperate. as for the thicket itself, it was full of men--i could see their figures between the trees. we must have passed twenty of them in the darkness before one came out, plump on our path and cried out to us to halt. "hold, hold," shouts he; "is it you, bob williams?" "it's bob williams, right enough," says i, and with that i gave him one between the eyes, and down he went like a felled ox. the man who was with him, stumbling up against seth barker, had a touch of the shillelagh which was like a rock falling upon a fly. he just gave one shuddering groan and fell backwards, clutching the branches. little dolly venn laughed aloud in his excitement, elbowed peter bligh who gave a real irish "hurrugh"; but the darkness had swallowed it all up in a minute, and we were on again, heading for the shore like those that run a race for their very lives. "do you see any road, peter bligh?" asked i, for my breath was coming short now; "do you see any road, man?" "the devil a one, sir, and me weighing fourteen stone!" "you'll weigh less when we get down, peter." "and drink more, the saints be praised!" "was that a rifle-shot or a stone from the hills?" i asked them a moment later. dolly venn answered me this time. "a rifle-shot, captain. they'll be shooting one another, then--it's ripping, ripping!" "look out, lad, or it'll be dripping!" cried i; "don't you see there's water ahead?" i cried the warning to him and stood stock-still upon the borders of as black a pool as i remember to have seen in any country. the road had carried us to the foot of the hills, almost to the chasm which the wicker-bridge spanned; and we could make out that same bridge far above us like a black rope in the twilight. the water itself was covered with some clinging plants, and full of winding, ugly snakes which caused the whole pool to shine with a kind of uncanny light; while an overpowering odour, deadly and stifling, steamed up from it, and threatened to choke a man. what was worse than this was a close thicket bordering the pond on three sides, so that we must either swim for it or turn back the way we came. the latter course was not to be thought of. already i could hear footsteps, and boughs snapping and breaking not many yards from where we stood. to cross the pond might have struck the bravest man alive with terror. i'd have sooner forfeited my life time over than have touched one of those slimy snakes i could see wriggling over the leaves to the bottom of the still water. what else to do i had no more notion than the dead. "it's the end, jasper begg," said i to myself, "the end of you and your venture." but of ruth bellenden i wouldn't think. how could i, when i knew the folks that were abroad on ken's island? i will just ask any traveller to stand with me where i stood that night and to say if these words are overmuch for the plight, or if i have spoken of it with moderation. a night as black as ink, mind you; my company in the heart of a wood with big teak trees all round us, and cliffs on our right hand towering up to the sky like mountains. before us a pool of inky water, all worming with odd lights and lines of blue fire, like flakes of phosphorus on a bath, and alive with the hissing of hundreds of snakes. upon our left hand a scrubby thicket and a marsh beneath it, i make sure; czerny's devils, who had shot the poor folks on the santa cruz, at our heels, and we but four against the lot of them. would any man, i ask, have believed that he could walk into such a trap and get out of it unharmed? if so, it wasn't jasper begg, nor peter bligh, nor little dolly venn, nor seth barker with the bludgeon in his hand. they'd as good as given it up when we came to the pool and stood there like hunting men that have lost all hope. "done, by all that's holy!" says peter bligh, drawing back from the pond as from some horrid pit. "snakes i have seen, nateral and unnateral, but them yonder give me the creeps----" "creeps or no creeps, the others will be up here in five minutes, and what are you going to do then, peter bligh, what then?" asks i, for as i'm a living man i didn't know which way to turn from it. seth barker was the one that answered me. "i'm going to knock some nails in, by your leave," says he, and with that he stood very still and bade us listen. the whole wood was full of the sound of "halloaing" now. far and wide i heard question and answer, and a lingering yodle such as the swiss boys make on the mountains. it couldn't be many minutes, i said, before the first man was out on our trail; and there i was right, for one of them came leaping out of the wood straight into peter bligh's arms before i'd spoken another word. poor devil--it was the last good-night for him in this world--for peter passes him on, so to speak, and he went headlong into the pond without any one knowing how he got there. a more awful end i hope i may never hear of, and yet, god knows, he brought it on himself. as for peter bligh, the shock set him sobbing like a woman. it was all my work to get him on again. "no fault of ours," said i; "we're here for a woman's sake, and if there's man's work to do, we'll do it, lads. take my advice and you'll turn straight back and run for it. better a tap on the head than a cry in yonder pool." they replied fearsomely--the strain was telling upon them badly. that much i learnt from their husky voices and the way they kept close to me, as though i could protect them. seth barker, especially, big man that he was, began to mutter to himself in the wildest manner possible; while little dolly burst into whistling from time to time in a way that made me crazy. "that's right, lad," cried i, "tell them you're here, and ask after the health of their womenfolk. you've done with this world, i see, and made it straight for the next. if you've a match in your pocket, strike it to keep up their spirits." well, he stopped short, and i was ashamed of myself a minute after for speaking so to a mere lad whose life was before him and who'd every right to be afraid. "come," said i, more kindly, "keep close to me, dolly, and if you don't know where i am, why, put out your hand and touch me. i've been in worse scrapes than this, my boy, and i'll lead you out of it somehow. after all, we've ship over yonder and mister jacob isn't done with yet. keep up your heart, then, and put your best leg forward." now, this was spoken to put courage into him--not that i believed what i said, but because he and the others counted upon me, and my own feelings had to go under somehow. for the matter of that, it looked all lombard street to a china orange against us when we took the woodland path again; and so i believe it would have been but for something which came upon us like a thunder-flash, and changed all our despair to a desperate hope. and to this something peter bligh was the first to call our attention. "is it fireflies or lanterns?" cries he all at once, bringing out the words like a pump might have done; "yonder on the hillside, shipmates--is it fireflies or lanterns?" i stood to look, and while i stood seth barker named the thing. "it's lanterns," cries he; "lanterns, sure and certain, captain." "and the three ripping little girls carrying them," puts in dolly venn. "'tis no woman ever born that would hunt down four poor sailor-men," cries peter bligh. "to say nothing of the he-lion they was a-fondling of"--from seth barker. "lads," said i, in my turn, "this is the unlooked for, and i, for one, don't mean to pass it by. i'm going to ask those young ladies for a short road to the hills--and not lose any time about it either." they all said "aye, aye," and we ran forward together. the halloaing in the wood was closing in about us now; you could hear voices wherever you turned an ear. as for the lanterns, they darted from bush to bush like glow-worms on a summer's night, so that i made certain they would dodge us after all. my heart was low down enough, be sure of it, when i lost view of those guiding stars altogether, and found myself face to face with the last figure i might have asked for if you'd given me the choice of a hundred. for what should happen but that the weird being, whom seth barker had called the "he-lion," the old fellow in petticoats, whom the little girls made such a fuss of, he, i say, appeared of a sudden right in the path before us, and, holding up a lantern warningly, he hailed us with a word which told us that he was our friend--the very last i would have named for that in all the island. "jasper begg," cried he, in a voice that i'd have known for a frenchman's anywhere, "follow clair-de-lune--follow--follow!" he turned to the bushes behind him, and, seeming to dive between them, we found him, when we followed, flat on his stomach, the lantern out, and he running like a dog up a winding path before him. he was leading us to the heights, i said; and when i remembered the great bare peaks and steeple-like rocks, upstanding black and gloomy under the starry sky, i began to believe that this wild man was right and that in the hills our safety lay. but of that we had yet to learn, and for all we knew to the contrary it might have been a trap. chapter viii the bird's nest in the hills there had been a great sound of "halloaing" and firing in the woods when we raced through them for our lives; but it was all still and cold on the mountain-side, and you could hear even a stone falling or the drip of water as it oozed from the black rocks to the silent pools below. what light there was came down through the craggy gorge; and it was not until we had climbed up and up for a good half-hour or more that we began to hear the sea-breeze whistling among the higher peaks like wild music which the spirits might have made. as for the path itself, it was oftentimes but a ledge against the wall of some sheer height; and none, i think, but seamen could have followed it, surely. even i remembered where i was, and feared to look down sometimes; but danger bridges many a perilous road, and what with the silence and the fresh breezes and the thought that we might live through the night, after all, i believe i could have hugged the wild old man who led us upward so unflinchingly. i say that he went on unflinchingly, and surely no goat could have climbed quicker than he did. now standing over an abyss which made you silly to look down into; now pulling himself up by bush or branch; at other times scrambling over loose shale as though he had neither hands nor knees to cut, he might well have scared the coolest who had met him without warning on such a road. as for the four men he had saved from the devils in the thickets below, i don't believe there was one of them who didn't trust him from the first. the sea is a sure school for knowing men and their humours. if this old frenchman chose to put a petticoat about his legs, and to wear a lion's mane down his back, we liked him all the better for that. what we had seen of the young girls' behaviour towards him made up for that which we did not know about him. he must have had a tender place somewhere in his heart, or three young women wouldn't fondle him like a dog. like a ship out of the night had he crossed our path; and his port must be our port, since we knew no other. that's why, i say, we followed him over the dangerous road like children follow a master. he was leading us to some good haven--i had no doubt of it. the thing that remained to tell was, had we the strength and the breath to reach it? you may imagine that it was no light thing to run such a race as we had run, and to be asked to climb a mountain on the top of it. for my part, i was so dead tired that every step up the hillside was like a knife in my side; and as for peter bligh, i wonder he didn't go rolling down to the rocks, so hard did he breathe and so heavy he was. but men will do wonders to save their necks, and that is how it is that we went up and still up, through the black ravine, to the blue peaks above. aye, a fearsome place we had come to now, with terrible gorges, and wild shapes of rocks, like dead men's faces leering out of the darkness. the wind howled with a human voice, the desolation of all the earth seemed here. and yet the old man must push on--up, up, as though he would touch the very sky. "the lord be good to me," cried peter bligh, at last; "i can go no farther if it's a million a mile! oh, mister begg, for the love of god, clap a rope about the wild man's legs." i pushed him on over a sloping peak of shale, and told him to hold his tongue. "will you lie in the pool, then? where's your courage, man? another hundred yards and you shall stop to breathe. there's the old lion himself waiting for us, and a big bill of thanks he has against us, to be sure." i said no more, but climbed the steep to the frenchman's side, and found him waiting on the bank of that which seemed to be a great cup-like hole, black and bottomless and the last place you'd have picked for a camp on all the hillside. dolly venn was already there, and seth barker, lying on the stones and panting like a great dog. old clair-de-lune alone was fresh and ready, and able in his broken english to tell us what he wished. "messieurs," he said, "speak not long but go down. i myself am shipmate too. ah, messieurs, you do wise to follow me. down there no dog bark. i show you the ladder, and all be well. to-morrow you speak your ship--go home. for me, never again--i die here with the children, messieurs; none shall come for old clair-de-lune, none, never at no time--but you, you i save for the shipmates' sake----" it was odd talk, but no time to argue about it. i saw a ladder thrust up out of the pit, and when the old man went down i followed without hesitation. a lantern lighted in the darkness showed me a hollow nest feet deep, perhaps, and carpeted over with big brown leaves and rugs spread out; and in one corner that which was not unlike a bed. moreover, there was a little stove in the place and upon one side an awning stretched against the rain; while cooking pots and pans and other little things made it plain at a glance that this was the man's own refuge in the mountains, and that here, at least, some part of his life was spent. no further witness to his honesty could be asked for. he had brought us to his own home. it was time to speak of thanks. "what you've done for us neither me nor mine will ever forget," said i, warmly. "here's a seaman's hand and a seaman's thanks. should the day come when we can do a like turn to you, be sure i'll be glad to hear of it; and if it came that you had the mind to go aboard with us--aye, and the young ladies, too--why, you'll find no one more willing than jasper begg." we shook hands, and he set the lantern down upon the floor. peter bligh was lying on his back now, crying to a calendar of saints to help him; seth barker breathed like a winded horse; little dolly venn stood against the wall of the pit with his head upon his arm, like a runner after a race; the old frenchman drew the ladder down and made all snug as a ship is made for the night. "no one come here," he said, "no one find the way. you sleep, and to-morrow you signal ship to go down where i show. for me and mine, not so. this is my home; i am stranger in my own country. no one remember clair-de-lune. twelve years i live here--five times i sleep the dreadful sleep which the island make--five times i live where others die. why go home, messieurs, if you not have any? i not go; but you, you hasten because of the sleep." we all pricked up our ears at this curious saying, and dolly venn, he whipped out a question before i could--indeed, he spoke the french tongue very prettily; and for about five minutes the two of them went at it hammer and tongs like two old women at charring. "what does he mean by sleep-time, lad?" i asked in between their argument. "why shouldn't a man sleep on ken's island? what nonsense will he talk next?" i'd forgotten that the old man spoke english too, but he turned upon me quickly to remind me of the fact. "no nonsense, monsieur, as many a one has found--no nonsense at all, but very dreadful thing. three, four time by the year it come; three, four time it go. all men sleep if they not go away--you sleep if you not go away. ah, the good god send you to the ship before that day." he did his best to put it clearly, but he might as well have talked chinese. dolly, who understood his lingo, made a brave attempt, but did not get much farther. "he says that this island is called by the japanese the island of sleep. two or three times every year there comes up from the marshes a poisonous fog which sends you into a trance from which you don't recover, sometimes for months. it can't be true, sir, and yet that's what he says." "true or untrue, dolly," said i, in a low voice, "we'll not give it the chance. it's a fairy tale, of course, though it doesn't sound very pretty when you hear it." "nor is that music any more to my liking," exclaimed peter bligh, at this point, meaning that we should listen to a couple of gunshots fired, not in the woods far down below us, but somewhere, as it seemed, on the sea-beach we had failed to make. "that would be harry doe warning us," cried i. "and meaning that it was dangerous for us to go down." "he'll have put off and saved the longboat, anyway. we'll hail him at dawn, and see where the ship is." they heard me in silence. the tempest roaring in the peaks above that weird, wild place; our knowledge of the men on the island below; the old frenchman's strange talk--no wonder that our eyes were wide open and sleep far from them. dawn, indeed, we waited for as those who are passing through the terrible night. i think sometimes that, if we had known what was in store for us, we should have prayed to god that we might not see the day. chapter ix we look out for the southern cross the wind blew a hurricane all that night, and was still a full gale when dawn broke. to say that no man among us slept is to put down a very obvious thing. the roaring of the breakers on the reefs below us, the showers of stones which the heights rained down, the dreadful noises like wild human voices in the hills, drove sleep far from any man's eyes. and more than that, there was the ship to think of. what had become of the ship? where did she lie? when should we see her again? aye, how often we asked each other that question when the blast thundered and the lightning seemed to open the very heavens, and the spindrift was blown clean over the heights to fall like a salt spray upon our faces. was it well with the ship or ill? mister jacob we knew to be a good seaman, none better. with him the decision lay to run for the open water or to risk everything for our sakes. if he made up his mind that the safety of the southern cross demanded sea-room he would take it, and let to-morrow look after itself. but i was anxious, none the less; for, if the ship were gone, "god help us on ken's island," i said. now, the old frenchman was the first to be moving when the day came, and no sooner did all the higher peaks show us a glimmer of the dawn-light--very beautiful and awesome to look upon--than he set up the ladder and began to show us the way to the mountain-top. "you make signal; you fetch ship. sailormen go down where landman afraid. little boat come in; shipmate go out. old clair-de-lune he know. ah, messieurs, the wind is very dreadful to-day--what you call harriken. other day, all quite easy plan--but this day not so, great water, all white--no go, no man." it was queer talk, and we might have laughed at him if we'd have forgotten that he saved our lives last night and was waiting to save them again this morning. but you don't laugh at a friend, talk as he may, and for that matter we were all too excited to think of any such thing, and we made haste to scramble up out of the pit and to follow him to the heights where the truth should be known--the best of it or the worst. for the path or its dangerous places we cared nothing now. the rocks, upstanding all about us, shut in the view as some great basin cut in the mountain's heart. you could see the black sky above and the bottomless chasms below--but of the water nothing. imagine, then, how we raced for the summit: now up on our feet, now on all-fours like dogs; now calling, man to man, to hasten; now saying that haste wouldn't help us. and no wonder--no wonder our hearts beat high and our hands were unsteady, for beyond the basin we should find the sea, and the view might show us life or death. old clair-de-lune was the first to be up, but i was close upon his heels, and dolly venn not far behind me. who spoke the first word i don't rightly recollect; but i hadn't been on the heights more than ten seconds when i knew why it was spoken, and what the true meaning of it might be. the ship was gone! all the eyes in the wide world could not have found her on that angry sea below us, or anywhere on the black and looming horizon beyond. the night had taken her. the ship was gone. hope as we might, speak up as we might, tell each other this story or tell each other that--the one sure fact remained that the southern cross had steamed away from ken's island and left us to our fates. "he'll be running for sea-room, and come in when the gale falls," said peter bligh, when we had stood all together a little while, as crestfallen a lot as the pacific ocean could show that day; "trust mister jacob to be cautious--he's a scotchman, and would think first of the ship. a precious lot of good his wages would do him if the ship were down in sixty fathoms and he inside her!" "that's true," cried dolly venn, "though your poor old father didn't say it, mister bligh. the ship's gone, but she'll come back again." and then to me he said, very earnestly, "oh, she must come back, captain." "aye, lad," said i, "let her ride out the gale, and she'll put back right enough. mister jacob isn't the one to desert friends. he'll have learned from harry doe how it stands with us, and he'll just say, ''bout ship'; that's what mr. jacob will say. i've no fear of it at all. i'm only wondering what sort of shore-play is to keep us amused until we sight the ship again." well, they looked doleful enough; but not a man among them complained. 'tis that way with seamen all the world over. put them face to face with death and some will laugh, and some will curse, and some talk nonsense; but never a man wears his heart upon his sleeve or tells you that he's afraid. and so it was that morning. they understood, i do believe, as well as i did, what the consequences of the gale might be. they were no fools, to imagine that a man could get from ken's island to san francisco in any cockleshell the beach might show him. but none of them talked about it; none charged me with it; they just put their hands in their pockets like brave fellows who had made up their minds already to a very bad job; and be sure i was not the one to give a different turn to it. the ship had gone; the lord only knew when she would come back again. it was not for me to be crying like a child for that which neither i nor any man could make good. "well," said i, "the ship's gone, sure enough, and hard words won't bring her back again. what mister jacob can do for his friends, that, i know, will be done. we must leave it to him and look after ourselves far as this place is concerned. you won't forget that the crew downstairs will be ready enough to ask after our health and spirits if we give them a look in, and my word is for lying-to here until night comes or the ship is sighted. it must be a matter of hours, anyway. the gale's abating; a landsman would know as much as that." they said, "aye, aye," to it, and peter bligh put in a word of his humour. "the ship's gone, sure enough," said he; "but that's more than you can say for my appetite! bear or dog, i'm not particular, captain; but a good steak of something would come handy, and the sooner the better. 'twere enough to bring tears to a man's eyes to think of all the good grub that's gone aboard with harry doe. aye, 'tis a wonderful thing is hunger, and the gift of the lord along with good roast beef and pork sausages. may-be you find yourself a bit peckish, captain?" i answered "yes," though that was far from the truth, for what with watching through the night and thinking about the ship and little ruth bellenden's loneliness in this place of mystery, and far worse than mystery, i'd forgotten all about meal-times, and never once had asked myself where breakfast was to come from. but now the long faces of my shipmates brought me to a remembrance of it, and when little dolly venn cried, "oh, captain, i am so hungry!" i began to realize what a parlous plight we were in and what a roundabout road we must tread to get out of it. lucky for us, the old frenchman, who had stood all this time like a statue gazing out over the desolate sea, now bobbed up again, good samaritan that he was, and catching master dolly's complaint, he spoke of breakfast on his own account. "ah! you hungry, you thirst, messieurs; sailor-man always like that. your ship gone? never mind, he shall come back again, to-day, to-morrow, one, two, three day--pray god it be not longer, shipmate, pray god!" [illustration: a picturesque old figure standing there.] i thought him a fine, picturesque old figure, standing there on the headland with his long hair streaming in the wind like a woman's, and his brawny arms outstretched as though he would call the ship back to us from the lonely ocean. truth to tell, the place was one to fill any man with awe. far as the eye could see, the great waste was white with the foam of its breaking seas; the headland itself stood up a thousand feet like some mighty fortress commanding all the deep. far below us were the green valleys of the island, the woods we had raced through last night; pastures with little white houses dotted about on them; the bungalow itself wherein ruth bellenden lived. no picture from the gallery of a high tower could have been more beautiful than that strange land with the wild reefs lying about it and the rollers cascading over them, and the black glens above which we stood, and the great circle of the water like some measureless basin which the whole earth bounded. i did not wonder that old clair-de-lune was silent when he looked down upon a scene so grand. it seemed a crime to speak of food and drink in such a place; and yet it was of these that peter bligh must go on talking. "we'll do the prayin', shipmate, if you'll do the cookin'," cried he, hopefully; "as for that--you speak like a wise man. 'tis wonderful easy to pray on a full stomach! there isn't a hunger or a thirst this side of 'frisco which i would not pray out of this same island if you'll be pleased to bring 'em along. weigh anchor, my man," says he, "and we'll pipe down to dinner." well, the old man laughed at his manner of putting it, and, without further ado, we all went down to the bird's nest in the hollow, and there we lighted a fire in the shelter of the pit, and old clair-de-lune going away in search of rations, he returned presently with victuals enough to feed a missionary, and more than that, as pretty a trio to serve them as any seaman could hope for. for what should happen but that the three young girls we'd seen yesterday in the woods came romping up the hill together; and one bringing a great can for the coffee, and another a basket of luscious fruit, and a third some new-made bread and biscuit--they ran down the ladder to us and began to talk in their pretty language, and now and then in english which did not need much understanding. "i am rosamunda," says one. and the second, she says: "i am sylvia--sylvia--sylvia." and the third, she chimes in with: "i am celestine, and i have brought you bread." and they all stood together, shy and natural, looking now at one, now at another of us; but most often, i thought, at little dolly venn, who had a way of making them understand which an older man might have envied. "and wonderful pretty names, too, young ladies, though a seaman doesn't often hear the likes of 'em," cries peter bligh, gallant enough, as all irishmen are. "they're all pollies in our parts, and it do come easier to the tongue and more convenient if you know many of 'em. whereby did you hitch up names like those?" asks he; "which, askin' your pardon, seem to me to be took out of a picture-book." they giggled at this; but old clair-de-lune, who was mighty proud of them, and justly, answered peter bligh as though the question were serious. "monsieur, in my own country i am artiste; i play the drama, the comedy, the tragedy. clair-de-lune they call me at the theatre. to the daughters of my master i give the artiste's name--why not? better the good name than the bad name! it was long year ago, shipmate; the belle ile was wrecked on these reef; the maitre is drowned, but i and the young ladies are save. we come, we go, none interfere. the governor is angry, we hide in the hill; the governor laugh, we go down to the valley. when the sleep-time comes, we go to the house under the sea: you shall find him a dangerous time, but we hide far down. none frighten clair-de-lune; they frighten of him. he become the father according to his best." it was touching, i must say, to hear this old man's broken story; and prettier still to see the affectionate eyes with which these little girls watched every movement of one to whom, i am sure, they were beholden for all that they got out of ken's island. for the rest, the tale was plain enough. the father had been wrecked and drowned on the sword-fish reef; the servant had saved the children and himself from the ship, and his own natural cleverness had done the rest. no one interfered with him, he said; and this was true. i verily believe that the devils in the valley below believed that he and the children with him were nothing more or less than spirits. i say his story was plain, and yet there was something in it which was greek to me. he had named a house under the sea, and what that meant, or how any man could build such a house, lay beyond my understanding. i should have asked a question about it there and then, and have sought light on the matter if it hadn't been that the food was already cooked, and, the others being mighty anxious, we sat down to steaming coffee and broiled kid's flesh and good bread and sweet fruit, and i was very willing to keep my curiosity. once, it is true, the young girl who called herself "rosamunda" came and sat by my side and wished to talk to me; but, prettily as she spoke our tongue, her measure of it was limited, and we did not get very far, in spite of good intentions. "do you like the island, do you like living here?" i asked her. she answered me with a doubting shake of her pretty head. "in the sun-months, yes, i like it; but not in the sleep-time. you will go away before the sleep-time, monsieur?" "really, young lady," said i, "it seems to me that it depends upon mister jacob and the ship. but, supposing i cannot go away--what then? how does the sleep-time concern me?" "you must not stay," she said, quickly; "for us it is different; we--we live in the house under the sea, but no stranger may live there--the governor would not permit it. on the island all things sleep. if you do not go to the house under the sea--ah, monsieur, but you will sail away, you will sail in your ship." she put it very childishly, the same cock-and-bull story that the old frenchman had been at last night. what to make of it, i knew no more than the dead. here we seemed to be on as fair an island as the whole pacific might show you; and yet these odd folk could talk of sun-months and sleep-time, and other stuff which might have been written in a fairy-book. do you wonder that i laughed at them and treated it as any sane man, not given to fables, would have done? "sleep-time or sun-time, i'll be away before then, please god, mademoiselle," said i; "do not fear for jasper begg, who was always fond of his bed and won't grumble overmuch, be it sleep or waking. for the rest, we'll take our chance, as others must do here, i fancy. mme. czerny, for instance--do you know mme. czerny, young lady?" she nodded her head and said that she did. "yes, yes, we know mme. czerny; she is the governor's wife. i think she is unhappy, monsieur captain. in the sun-months i see her, but in the sleep-time she lives in the house under the sea, and no one knows. you are her friend, perhaps; you would know that she is unhappy?" i knew it well enough; but i wished to lead this little talker on, and so i said i did not. "unhappy, young lady! why should she be unhappy?" i asked it naturally, as though i was very surprised; but you could not deceive mlle. rosamunda. a more artful little witch never played at fairies in a wood. "if she is not unhappy, why have you come here, monsieur captain? you come to help her--oh, i know! and you say that you do not." "perhaps so, young lady; perhaps i do--that i will tell you by-and-bye. but i am curious about the governor. what sort of a man is he, and where does he happen to be at this particular moment? i'm sure you could say something nice about him if you tried." [illustration: she looked at me with her big, questioning eyes.] she looked at me with her big, questioning eyes, as though the question were but half understood. presently she said: "you laugh at me. m. czerny has gone away to the world. of course he would go. he has gone in the ship. what shall i tell you about him? that he is kind, cruel; that we love him, hate him? every one knows that; every one has told you. he is the governor and we are his people who must obey: when he comes back he will ask you to obey him too, and you must say 'yes.' that will be at the sleep-time: eight, nine, ten days. but why do you ask, monsieur captain? has not mme. czerny said it because you are her friend? i know that you tease me. sailors love to tease little girls, and you are no better than the other ones." she cast down her eyes at this, and looked for all the world the taking little coquette that she was. her odd speech told me something, enough at least to put a hundred questions into my head and as many useless answers. the governor was away. the island alternately hated and feared him. the sleep-time, whatever it was, might be looked for in ten days' time. we must be away and on board the ship by then or something dreadful would happen to us. ruth bellenden's unhappiness was known even to these little girls, and they surmised, as the others had surmised, that we were on shore to help her. for the rest, the men on ken's island, i imagined, would hunt us night and day until we were taken. nor was i mistaken in that. we'd scarcely finished our meal when there was the sound of a gunshot far down in the valley, and, old clair-de-lune jumping up at the report, we were all on our feet in an instant to speak of the danger. "halloa, popguns," cries peter bligh, in his irish way; "what for now would any man be firing popguns at this time of the morning?" "it's to ask after your health, peter," said i, when we'd listened awhile, "what else should a man be firing after, unless he takes you for a rabbit? will you run down and thank him kindly?" he hitched up his breeches and pulled out his briar-pipe. "if this is track-running, take down my number. i'm through with it, gentlemen, being not so young as i was." a gunshot, fired out at sea, cut short his talk. old clair-de-lune, nipping up the ladder, bade us follow him, while to the girls he cried, "_allez-vous en!_" all our quiet talk and content were gone in an instant. i never answered little dolly venn when he asked me, "do you think there's danger, sir?" but, running up the hill after the frenchman, i helped him to carry the ladder we'd dragged out of the pit, for i knew he'd need of it. "what is it, clair-de-lune? why are they firing?" i asked him, as he ran. "governor home," was his answer--"governor home. great danger, _capitaine_." chapter x we are surely caged on ken's island we ran up the hill, i say, as men who raced for their lives. the little girls, snatching up their bags and baskets, exchanged a quick word with clair-de-lune and then hurried off towards the bungalow. our own path lay over difficult rocks and steep slopes and chasms fearful to see. of these our leader made nothing, and we went on, up and up, until at last the road carried us right round the highest peak, on whose very walls we walked like chamois on a mountain crag. it was here, on a narrow ledge high above the sea, that the frenchman stopped for the first time. "shipmates," said he, when he had got his breath, "journey done, all finish, you safe here, you rest. i go down to see governor; but come back again, come back again, messieurs, with bread and meat." well, i don't think one of us had the voice to answer him. the place itself--the ledge above the sea and the little low, cramped cave behind it--occupied all our thoughts. here, in truth, a man might lie safely enough--yet in what a situation. the very door of the house opened upon an abyss a thousand feet above the rocks below. we had the sea before our eyes, the sea beneath us, the sea for our distant horizon. day and night the breakers thundered on the sword-fish reef; the wind moaned in the mighty eaves of those tremendous crags. we were like men placed suddenly on a steeple's side and left there to live or fall, as fortune went. i tell you this, plain and straightforwardly, because five days passed on that awful ledge, and, except for one day, there is nothing but a seaman's talk of question and answer and idle hope to set down on these pages. if every hour of the day found one of us with eyes which yearned for our lost ship, with hearts grown heavy in waiting and disappointment--that was his affair, and of no concern to others. be sure we didn't confess, one to the other, the thought in our heads or the future we must live through. we had come to ken's island to help little ruth bellenden, and this fearful plight was the result of it--ship gone, the island full of devils that would have cut our throats for nothing and thought themselves well paid--no knowledge, not the smallest, of any way of escape--food short and likely to be shorter. friends we had, true friends. night and morning clair-de-lune and the little girls found their way up to us with bread and meat and the news that was passing. it was on the fifth day that they came no more, and i, at least, knew that they would never come again. "lads," i said, "one of two things has happened. either they've been watched and followed, or the time of which they made mention has come. i trust the old frenchman as i would trust my own brother. he knows how it will fare with five men left on a lonely rock without food or drink. if he doesn't come up here today, it's because he daren't come or because he's ordered elsewhere." they turned it over in their minds, and dolly venn spoke next. "last night in my watch i heard a bell ringing, sir. at first i thought it was fancy--the sea beating on the rocks or the wind moaning in the hills; but i got the ladder and went down the hill, and then i heard it distinctly, and saw lights burning brightly on the reef far out to the north. there were boats passing, i'm sure, and what was so wonderful that i didn't like to speak about it, the whole of the sea about the reef shone yellow as though a great lantern were burning far down below its heart. i could make out the figures of men walking on the rocks, and when the moon shone the figures disappeared as though they went straight down into the solid rock. you may not believe it, captain, but i'm quite sure of what i say, and if clair-de-lune does not come to-night, i ask you to go down the hillside with me and to see for yourself." now, the lad spoke in a kind of wonder-dream, and knowing how far from his true nature such a thing was, it did not surprise me that the others listened to him with that ready ear which seamen are quick to lend to any fairy tale. superstitious they were, or sailors they never would have been; and here was the very stuff to set them all ears, like children about a bogey. nor will i deny that dolly venn's tale was marvellous enough to make a fable. had it been told to me under any other circumstances, my reply would have been: "dolly, my lad, since when have you taken to sleep-walking?" but i said nothing of the kind, for i had that in my pocket which told me it was true; and what i knew i deemed it right that the others should know also. "when a man sees something which strikes him as extraordinary," said i, "he must first ask himself if it is nature or otherwise. there are lots of things in this world beyond our experience, but true for all that. ken's island may be rated as one of them. the old frenchman speaks of a sleep-time and a sun-time. lads, i do believe he tells the truth. if you ask me why--well, the why is here, in these papers ruth bellenden gave me five days ago." i took the packet from my pocket, and turned the pages of them again as i had turned them--aye, fifty times--in the days which had passed. thumbed and dirty as they were (for a seaman's pocket isn't lined with silk); thumbed and dirty, i say, and crumpled out of shape, they were the first bit of ruth bellenden's writing that ever i called my own, and precious to me beyond any book. "yes," i went on, "this is the story of ken's island, and ruth bellenden wrote it. ten months almost from this day she landed here. what has passed between edmond czerny and her in that time god alone knows! she isn't one to make complaint, be sure of it. she has suffered much, as a good woman always must suffer when she is linked to a bad man. if these papers do not say so plainly, they say it by implication. and, concerning that, i'll ask you a question. what is edmond czerny here for? the answer's in a word. he is here for the money he gets out of the wreckage of ships!" it was no great surprise to them, i venture, though surprise i meant it to be. they had guessed something the night we came ashore, and seamen aren't as stupid as some take them for. nevertheless, they picked up their ears at my words, and peter bligh, filling his pipe, slowly, said, after a bit: "yes, it wouldn't be for parlour games, captain!" the others were too curious to put in their word, and so i went on: "he's here for wreckage and the money it brings him. i'll leave it to you to say what's done to those that sailed the ships. there are words in this paper which make a man's blood run cold. if they are to be repeated, they shall be spoken where edmond czerny can hear them, and those that judge him. what we are concerned about at this moment is ken's island and its story. you've heard the old frenchman, clair-de-lune, speak of sleep-time and sun-time. as god is in heaven, he spoke the truth!" they none of them answered me. down below us the sea shimmered in the morning light. we sat on a ledge a thousand feet above it, and, save for the lapping waves on the reef, not a sound of life, not even a bird on the wing, came nigh us. you could have heard a pin drop when i went on. "sleep-time and sun-time, is it fable or truth? ruth bellenden says its truth. i'll read you her words----" peter bligh said, "ah," and struck a match. seth barker, the carpenter, sat for all the world like a child, with his great mouth wide open and his eyes full of wonder. dolly venn was curled up at my feet like a dog. i opened the papers and began to read to them: "on the th of august, three weeks after the ship brought us to ken's island, i was awakened at four o'clock in the morning by an alarm-bell ringing somewhere in the island. the old servant, she whom they called 'mother meg,' came into my room in great haste to tell me to get up. when i was dressed my husband entered and laughingly said that we must go on board the yacht at once. i was perplexed and a little cross about it; but when we were rowed out to the ship, i found that all the white people were leaving the island in boats and being rowed to those rocks which lie upon the northward side. edmond tells me that there are dangerous seasons in this beautiful place, when the whole island is unfit for human habitation and all must leave it, sometimes for a week, sometimes for a month." i put the paper down and turned another page of it. "that, you see," said i, "is written on the th of august, before she knew the true story or what the dangerous time might mean. passing on, i find another entry on september st, and that makes it clearer: "there is here a wonderful place they call 'the house under the sea.' it is built for those who cannot escape the sleep-time otherwise. i am to go there when my husband sails for europe. i have asked to accompany him and am refused. there are less delicate ways of reminding a woman that she has lost her liberty. "november th.--i have again asked edmond to permit me to accompany him to london. he answers that he has his reasons. there is a way of speaking to a woman she can never forget. my husband spoke in that way this morning. "december th.--i know edmond's secret, and he knows that i know it! shall i tell it to the winds and the waves? who else will listen? let me ask of myself courage. i can neither think nor act to-night. "december th.--christmas day! i am alone. a year ago--but what shall it profit to remember a year ago? i am in a prison-house beneath the sea, and the waves beat against my windows with their moaning cry, 'never, never again--never again!' at night, when the tide has fallen, i open my window and send a message to the sea. will any hear it? i dare not hope. "january st.--my husband has returned from his cruise. he is to go to europe to see after my affairs. will he tell them, i wonder, that ruth bellenden is dead? "january th.--the sleep-time has now lasted for nine weeks. they tell me that vapours rise up from the land and lie above it like a cloud. some think they come from the great poppies which grow in the marshy fields of the lowlands; others say from the dark pools in the gorges of the hills. however it may be, those that remain on the island fall into a trance while the vapour is there. a strange thing! some never wake from it; some lose their senses; the negroes alone seem able to live through it. the vapours arise quite suddenly; we ring the alarm-bell to send the people to the ships. "january th.--we returned to the island to-day. how blind and selfish some people are! i do believe that aunt rachel is content to live on this dreadful place. she is infatuated with edmond. 'i am anchored securely in a home: she says. 'the house under the sea is a young man's romantic fancy.' the rest is meaningless to her--a man's whim. 'i cannot dissipate my fortune on ken's island.' aunt rachel was always a miser. "february d.--this morning edmond came to me for that which he calls 'an understanding.' his affection distresses me. oh, it might all be so different if i would but say 'yes.' and what prevents me--the voices i have heard on the reef; or is it because i know--i know? "february th.--i am on the island again and the sun is shining. what i have suffered none shall ever know. i prefer edmond czerny's anger to his love. we understand each other now. "february st.--my message to the sea remains unanswered. will it be forever? "march d.--if jasper begg should come to me, how would they receive him? how could he help me? i do not know--and yet my woman's heart says 'come!' "april th.--there has been a short recurrence of the sleep-time. a ship struck upon the reef, and the crew rowed ashore to the island. i saw them last night in the moonlight, from my windows. they fell one by one at the border of the wood and slept. you could count their bodies in the clear white light. i tried to shut the sight from my eyes, but it followed me to my bed-room! "may d.--i whispered my message to the sea again, but am alone--god knows how much alone!" i folded up the paper and looked at the others. peter bligh's pipe had gone out and lay idle in his hand. dolly venn was still curled at my feet. seth barker i do not believe had budged an inch the whole time i was reading. the story gripped them like a vice--and who shall wonder at that? for, mark you, it might yet be our story. "peter," said i, "you have heard what mme. czerny says, and you know now as much as i do. i am waiting for your notion." he picked up his pipe and began to fill it again. "captain," says he, "what notions can i have which wouldn't be in any sane head? this island's a death-trap, and the sooner we're off it the better for our healths. what's happened to the ship, the lord only knows! at a guess i would say that an accident's overtook her. why should a man leave his shipmates if it isn't by an accident? mister jacob is not the one to go psalm-singing when he knows we're short of victuals and cooped up here like rats in a trap! not he, as i'm a living man! then an accident's overtook him; he doesn't come, because he can't come, which, as my old father used to say, was the best of reasons. putting two and two together, i should speak for sailing away without him, which is plain reason anyway." "we walking on the sea, the likes of which the parson talks about?" chimed in seth barker. "if you haven't got a boat," says dolly venn, "i don't see how you are to make one out of seaweed! perhaps mister jacob will come back tomorrow." "and perhaps we sha'n't be hungry before that same time!" added peter bligh; "aye, that's it, captain, where's the dinner to come from?" i thought upon it a minute, and then i said to them: "if dolly venn heard a bell ringing last night that's the danger-bell of which miss ruth speaks. we cannot go down to the island, for doesn't she say it's death to be caught there? we cannot stop up here or we shall die of hunger. if there's a man among you that can point to a middle course, i shall be glad to hear him. we have got to do something, lads, that's sure!" they stared at me wonderingly; none of them could answer it. we were between the devil and the deep sea, and in our hearts i think we began to say that if the ship did not come before many hours had passed, four of her crew, at least, would cease to care whether she came or stopped. chapter xi lights under the sea the day fell powerfully hot, with scarce a breath of wind and a pacific sun beating fiercely on the barren rocks. what shelter was to be had we got in the low cave behind the platform; but our eyes were rarely turned away from the sea, and many a time we asked each other what kept clair-de-lune or why the ship was missing. that the old man had some good reason i made certain from the beginning; but the ship was a greater matter. either she was powerless to help us or mister jacob had mistaken his orders. i knew not what to think. it was enough to be trapped there on that bit of a rock and to tell each other that, sleep-time or sun-time, we should be dead men if no help came to us. "belike the frenchman's took with the fog and is doing a bit of a doze on his own account," said peter bligh, gloomily, towards three bells in the afternoon watch--and little enough that wasn't gloomy he'd spoken that day. "well, sleep won't fill my canteen anyway! i could manage a rump-steak, thank you, captain, and not particular about the onions!" they laughed at his notion of it, and seth barker sympathetically pegged his belt up one. i was more sorry for little dolly venn than any of them, though his pluck was wonderful to see. "are you hungry, dolly, lad?" i asked him, by-and-bye. foolish question that it was, he answered me with a boy's bright laugh and something which could make light of it: "it's good for the constitution to fast, sir," he said, bravely; "our curate used to tell us so when i went to church. we shall all be saints--and mr. peter will have a halo if this goes on long enough!" now, peter bligh didn't take to that notion at all, and he called out, savagely: "to blazes with your halos! is it christianity to rob an honest man of his victuals? give me a round of top-side and leave me out of the stained-glass window! i'm not taking any, lad--my features isn't regular, as my poor----" "peter, peter," said i, bringing him to, "so it's top-side to-day? it was duck and green peas yesterday, peter; but it won't be that to-night, not by a long way!" "if we sit on this rock long enough," chimed in seth barker, who was over-patient for his size, "some on us will be done like a rasher. i wouldn't make any complaint, captain; but i take leave to say it isn't wisdom." i had meant to say as much myself, but peter bligh was in before me, and so i let him speak. "fog or no fog," cries he, "i'm for the shore presently, and that's sure and certain. it ain't no handsome vulture that i'm going to feed anyway! i don't doubt that you'll come with me, captain. why, you could play 'god save the king' on me and hear every note! i'm a toonful drum, that's what i am----" "be what you like, but don't ask us to dance to your music," said i, perhaps a little nettled; "as for going down, of course we shall, peter. do you suppose i'm the one to die up here like a rat in a trap? not so, i do assure you. give me twilight and a clear road, and i'll show you the way quick enough!" i could see that they were pleased, and dolly venn spoke up for them. "you won't go alone, sir?" asked he. "indeed, and i shall, dolly, and come back the same way. don't you fear for me, my lad," said i; "i've been in a fog before in my life, and out of it, too, though i never loved them overmuch. if there's danger down below, one man has eyes enough to see it. it would be a mortal waste and pity that four should pay what one can give. but i won't forget that you are hungry, and if there's roast duck about, peter bligh shall have a wing, i promise him." well, they all sat up at this; and peter bligh, very solemnly crossing his fingers after the italian fashion, swore, as seamen will, that we'd all go together, good luck or bad, the devil or the deep sea. seth barker was no less determined upon it; and as for dolly venn, i believe he'd have cried like a child if he'd been left behind. in the end i gave way to them, and it was agreed that we should all set out together, for better or worse, when the right time came. "your way, lads, not mine," said i; and pleased, too, at their affection. "as you wish it, so shall it be; and that being agreed upon i'll trouble peter bligh for his tobacco, for mine's low. we'll dine this night, fog or no fog. 'twould want to be something sulphurous, i'm thinking, to put peter off his grub. aye, peter, isn't that so? what would you say now to an irish stew with a bit of bacon in it, and a glass of whisky to wash it down? would fogs turn you back?" "no, nor saint patrick himself, with a shillelagh in his hand. i'm mortal empty, captain; and no man's more willing to leave this same bird's nest though he had all the sulphur out of vesuvius on his diagram! we'll go down at sunset, by your leave, and god send us safely back again!" the others echoed my "amen," and for an hour or more we all sat dozing in the heat of the angry day. once, i think towards seven bells of the watch, dolly venn pointed out the funnels of a steamer on the northern horizon; but the loom of the smoke was soon lost, and from that time until six o'clock of the afternoon i do not think twenty words were to be heard on the rock. we were just waiting, waiting, like weary men who have a big work to do and are anxious to do it; and no sooner had the sun gone down and a fresh breeze of night begun to blow, than we jumped to our feet and told each other that the time had come. "do you, peter, take the ladder and let seth barker steady the end of it," said i. "the road's tricky enough, and precious little dinner you'll get at the bottom of a thousand-foot chasm! if there's men on the island, we shall know that soon enough. they cannot do more than murder us, and murder has merits when starvation's set against it. come on, my lads," said i, "and keep a weather-eye open." this i said, and willingly they heard me; no gladder party ever went down a hillside than we four, whom hunger drove on and thirst made brave. dangerous places, which we should have crossed with wary feet at any other time, now found us reckless and hasty. we bridged the chasms with the ladder, and slid down it as though it had been a rope. the bird's nest, where five days ago we'd first found shelter from the islanders, detained us now no longer than would suffice for thirsty men to bathe their faces and their hands in the brook which gushed out from the hillside, and to drink a draught which they remembered to their dying day. aye, refreshing it was, more than words can tell, and such strength it gave us that, if there had been a hundred men on the mountain path; i do believe our steps would still have been set for the bungalow. for we were about to learn the truth. curiosity is a good wind, even when you're hungry. now, there was a place on the headland, three hundred feet above the valley, perhaps, whereat the hill path turned and, for the first time, the island was plainly to be seen. here at this place we stopped all together and began to spy out the woods through which we had raced for our lives six days ago. the sun had but just set then, and, short as the twilight is in these parts, there was enough of it for us to make a good observation and to be sure of many things. what i think struck us all at the first was the absence of any fog such as we had heard about both from the frenchman and ruth bellenden's diary. a bluish vapour, it is true, appeared to steam up from the woods and to loom in hazy clouds above the lower marshland. but of fog in the proper sense there was not a trace; and although i began to find the air a little heavy to breathe, and a curious stupidness, for which i could not altogether account, troubled my head, nevertheless i made sure that the story of sleep-time was, in the main, a piece of nonsense and that we should soon prove it to be so. nor were the others behind me in this. "it is no fog i see which would slow me down a knot!" said peter bligh, when the island came into view; "to think that a man should go without his dinner for yon peat smoke! surely, captain, they are simple in these parts and easy at the bogeys. 'twill be roast duck, after all--and, may-be, the sage thrown in!" this was all well said, but dolly venn, quicker with his eyes, remarked a stranger fact. "there's no one about, sir, that i can see," said he, wisely, "and no lights in the houses either. i wonder where all the people are? it's curious that we shouldn't see some one." he put it as a kind of question; but before i could answer him seth barker chimed in with his deep voice, and pointed towards the distant reef: "they've lit up the sea, that's what they've done," said he. "by thunder, they have!" cries peter bligh, in his astonishment; "and generous about it, too. saw any one such a thing as that?" he indicated the distant reef, which seemed, as i bear witness, ablaze with lights. and not only the reef, mark you, but the sea about it, a cable's length, it may be, to the north and the south, shone like a pool of fire, yellow and golden, and sometimes with a rare and beautiful green light when the darkness deepened. such a spectacle i shall never see again if i sail a thousand ships! that luscious green of the rolling seas, the spindrift tossed in crystals of light, foam running on the rocks, but foam like the water of jewels, a dazzling radiance--aye, a very carpet of quivering gold. of this had they made the northern channel. how it was done, what cleverness worked it, it needed greater brains than mine to say. i was for all the world like a man struck dumb with the beauty of something which pleases and awes him in the same breath. "lights under the sea, and people living there! it's enough to make a man doubt his senses," said i. "and yet the thing's true, lads: we're sane men and waking; it isn't a story-book. you can prove it for yourselves." "aye, and men going in and out like landsmen to their houses," cried peter, almost breathless; "it's a fearsome sight, captain, a fearsome sight, upon my word." the rest of us said nothing. we were just a little frightened group that stared open-mouthed upon a seeming miracle. if we regarded the things we saw with a seaman's reverence, let no one make complaint of that. the spectacle was one to awe any man; nor might we forget that those who appeared to live below the sea lived there, as ruth bellenden had told us, because the island was a death-trap. we were in the trap and none to show us the road out. "peter," said i, suddenly, for i wished to turn their thoughts away from it, "are you forgetting it's dinner-time?" "i clean forgot, captain, by all that's holy," said he. "and not feeling very hungry, either," exclaims dolly venn, who had begun to cough in the steaming vapour, which we laughed at. i was anxious about the lad already, and it didn't comfort me to hear seth barker breathing like an ox and telling me that it should be clearer in the valley. i said, "yes, it might be," and all together we began to march again. a sharp walk carried us from the hill path through the tangle of bushes into the woods wherefrom danger first had come to us. the night had set in by this time and a clear moon was showing in the sky. rare and beautiful, i must say, that moonlight was, shimmering through the hazy blue vapour and coming down almost as a carpet of violet between the broad green leaves. no scene that i have witnessed upon the stage of a theatre was more pleasing to my eyes than that silent forest with its lawns of grass and its patches of wonderful, fantastic light, and its strange silence, and the loneliness of which it seemed to speak. so awesome was it that i do not wonder we went a considerable way in silence. we were afraid, perhaps, to tell each other what we thought. when peter bligh cried out at last, we started at the sound of his voice as though a stranger hailed us. "yonder," cried he, in a voice grown deep and husky; "yonder, captain, what do you make of that? is it living men or dead, or do my eyes deceive me?" i stopped short at his words and the others halted with me. we were in a deep glen by this time; and all the surrounding woodland was shut from our sight. great trees spread their branches like a canopy above us; the grass was soft and downy to the feet; the bewitching violet light gave unnatural yet wonderful colours to the flowery bushes about us. no fairy glen could have showed a heart more wonderful; and yet, i say, we four stood on the borders of it, with white faces and blinking eyes, and thoughts which none would change even with his own brother. why did he do it, you ask? ah, i'll tell you why. there were three men sleeping in the glen, and the face of one was plainly to be seen. he lay upon his back, his hands clenched, his limbs stiff, his eyes wide open as though some fearsome apparition had come to him and was not to be passed by. of the others, one had dropped face downward and lay huddled up at the tree's foot; but the third was in a natural attitude and i do believe that he was dead. for a long time we stood there watching them--for he whose eyes were to be seen uttered every now and then a dismal cry in his sleep, and the second began to talk like a man in a delirium. spanish he spoke, and that is a tongue i do not understand. but the words told of agony if ever words did, and i turned away from the scene at last as a man who couldn't bear to hear them. "they're sleeping," said i, "and little good to wake them, if miss ruth speaks true. come on, lads--the shore's our road and short's the time to get there." peter bligh reeled dizzily in his walk and began to talk incoherently--a thing i had never heard him do before in all his life. "they're sleeping, aye, and what's the waking to be? is it the madhouse or the ground? she spoke of the madhouse, and who'll deny, with reason? there was air for a man in the heights and no parlour plants. i walked forty miles to cardiff fair and didn't dance like this. take bread when you've no meat, and, by thunder, i'll fill your glasses." well, he gabbled on so, and not one of us gave him a hearing. i had my arm linked in dolly venn's, for he was weak and hysterical, and i feared he'd go under. seth barker, a strong man always, crashed through the underwood like an elephant stampeding. the woods, i said, could show us no more awesome sight than we had happed upon in the hollow; but there i was wrong, for we hadn't tracked a quarter of a mile when we stumbled suddenly upon the gardens of the bungalow, and there, lying all together, were five young girls i judged to be natives, for they had the shape of pacific islanders, and, seen in that strange light, were as handsome and taking as european women. asleep they were, you couldn't doubt it; but, unlike the white men, they lay so still that they might have been dead, while nothing but their smiling faces told of life and breathing. they, at least, did not appear to suffer, and that was something for our consolation. "look yonder, dolly lad, and 'tell me what you see," said i, though, truth to tell, every word spoken was like a knife through my chest; "three young women sleeping as though they were in their own beds. isn't that a sight to keep a man up? if they can go through with it, why not we--great men that have the sea's good health in them? bear up, my boy, well find a haven presently." i didn't believe it, that goes without saying, nor, for that matter, did he. but wild horses wouldn't have dragged the truth from him. he was always a rare plucky one, was little dolly venn, and he behaved as such that night. "better leave me? sir," he said; "i'm dead weight in the boat. do you go to the beach, and perhaps the ship will come back. you've been very kind to me, mister begg, so kind, and now it's 'good-bye,' just 'good-bye' and a long good-night." "aye," said i, "and a sharp appetite for breakfast in the morning. did you ever hear that i was a bit of a strong man, dolly? well, you see, i can pick you up as though you were a feather, and now that i have got you into my arms i'm going to carry you--why, where do you think?--into ruth bellenden's house, of course." he said nothing, but lay in my arms like a child. peter bligh had fallen headlong by the gate of the bungalow, and seth barker was about raving. i had trouble to make him understand my words; but he took them at last and did as i told him. "open that door--with the bludgeon if you can't do it otherwise. but open it, man, open it!" he drew himself up erect and dealt a blow upon the door which might have brought down a factory chimney. i ran into the house with dolly venn in my arms, and as i ran i called to barker, for god's sake, to help mister bligh. there would be no one in the house, i said, and nothing to be got by whispers. we ran a race with death, and for the moment had turned the corner before him. "get mister bligh to the house and bar up the door after you. the fog will fill it in five minutes, and what then? do you hear me, seth barker--do you hear me?" i asked the question plainly enough; but it was not seth barker who replied to it. you shall judge of my feelings when a bright light flashed suddenly in my face and a pleasant voice, coming out of nowhere, said, quite civilly: "the door, by all means, if you have any; regard for your lives or mine!" chapter xii the dancing madness it was a great surprise to me that here should have been one of edmond czerny's men left in the bungalow; and when i heard his voice i stood for a full minute, uncertain whether to go on or to draw back. the light of the lamp was very bright; i had dolly venn in my arms, remember, and it was all seth barker's work to bring in mister bligh, so that no one will wonder at my hesitation, or the questions i put to myself as to how many men were in the house with the stranger, or what business kept him there when the island was a death-trap. these questions, however, the man answered for himself before many minutes had passed; and, moreover, a seaman's instinct seemed to tell me that he was a friend. "walk right in here," he cried, opening a door behind him and showing me a room i had not entered when i visited mme. czerny. "walk right in and don't gather daisies on the way. you've been on a pleasure cruise in the fog, i suppose--well, that's a sailor all the time--just all the time." he opened the door, i say, upon this, and when we had followed him into the room he shut it as quickly. it was not a very large apartment, but i noticed at once that the windows were blocked and curtained, and that half the space was lumbered up with great machines which seemed made up of glass bowls and jars; while a flame of gas was roaring out of an iron tube, and a current of delicious fresh air blowing upon our faces. whatever we were in for, whether friendship or the other thing, a man could breathe here, and that was something to be thankful for. "we were caught in the woods and ran for it," said i, thinking in time to make my explanations; "it may have been a fool's errand, but it has brought us to a wise man's door. you know what the lad's trouble is, or you wouldn't be in this house, sir. i'll thank you for any kindness to him." he turned a pleasant face towards me and bade me lay dolly on the sofa near the flaming burner. peter bligh was sitting on a chair, swearing, i fear, as much as he was coughing. seth barker, who had the lungs of a bull, looked as though he had found good grass. the fog wasn't made, i do believe, which would harm him. as for the doctor himself, he seemed like a perplexed man who has time for one smile and no more. "the lad will be all right in five minutes," said he, seriously; "there is air enough here, we being five men, for," he appeared to pause, and then he added, "for just three days. after that--why, yes, we'll begin to think after that." i did not know what to say to him, nor, i am sure, did the others. dolly venn had already opened his eyes and lay back, white and bloodless, on the sofa. a hissing sound of escaping gas was in the room. i breathed so freely that a sense of excitement, almost of intoxication, came upon me. the doctor moved about quietly and methodically, now looking to his burners, now at the machines. five minutes came and went before he put another question. "what kept you from the shelter?" he asked, at last. i knew then that he believed us to be edmond czerny's men; and i made up my mind instantly what to do. "prudence kept us, doctor," said i (for doctor plainly he was); "prudence, the same sense that turns a fly from a spider's web. it is fair that you should know the story. we haven't come to ken's island because we are edmond czerny's friends; nor will he call us that. ask mme. czerny the next time you meet her, and she'll tell you what brought us here. you are acting well towards us and confidence is your due, so i say that the day when edmond czerny finds us on this shore will be a bad one for him or a bad one for us, as the case may be. let it begin with that, and afterwards we shall sail in open water." i said all this just naturally, not wishing him to think that i feared edmond czerny nor was willing to hoist false colours. enemy or friend, i meant to be honest with him. it was some surprise to me, i must say, when he went on quietly with his work, moving from place to place, now at the gas-burner, now at his machine, just for all the world as though this visitation had not disturbed him. when he spoke it was to ask a question about miss ruth. "mme. czerny," said he, quietly; "there is a mme. czerny, then?" now, if he had struck me with his hand i could not have been more surprised at his ignorance. just think of it--here was a man left behind on ken's island when all the riffraff there had fled to some shelter on the sea; a man working quietly, i was sure, to discover what he could of the gases which poisoned us; a man in mistress ruth's own house who did not even know her name. nothing more wonderful had i heard that night. and the way he put the question, raising his eyebrows a little, and looking up over his long, white apron! "not heard of mme. czerny!" cried i, in astonishment, "not heard of her--why, what shore do you hail from, then? don't you know that she's his wife, doctor--his wife?" he turned to his bottles and went on arranging them. he was speaking and acting now at the same time. "i came ashore with prince czerny when he landed here three days ago. he did not speak of his wife. there are others in america who would be interested in the news--young ladies, i think." he paused for a little while, and then he said quietly: "you would be friends of the princess's, no doubt?" "princess be jiggered," said i; "that is to say, god forgive me, for i love miss ruth better than my own sister. he's no more a prince than you are, though that's a liberty, seeing that i don't know your name, doctor. he's just edmond czerny, a hungarian musician, who caught a young girl's fancy in the south, and is making her suffer for it here in the pacific. why, just think of it. a young american girl----" he stopped me abruptly, swinging round on his heel and showing the first spark of animation he had as yet been guilty of. "an american girl?" cried he. "as true as the gospels, an american girl. she was the daughter of rupert bellenden, who made his money on the western american railroad. if you remember the elbe going down, you won't ask what became of him. his son, kenrick bellenden, is in america now. i'd give my fortune, doctor, to let him know how it fares with his sister on this cursed shore. that's why my own ship sails for 'frisco this day--at least, i hope and believe so, for otherwise she's at the bottom of the sea." i told the story with some heat, for amazement is the enemy of a slow tongue; but my excitement was not shared by him, and for some minutes afterwards he stood like a man in a reverie. "you came in your own ship!" he exclaimed next. "why, yes, you would not have walked. did mme. czerny ask you here?" "it was a promise to her," said i. "she left the money with her lawyers for me to bring a ship to ken's island twelve months after her marriage. that promise i kept, doctor, and here i am and here are my shipmates, and god knows what is to be the end of it and the end of us!" he agreed to that with one of those expressive nods which spared him a deal of talk. by-and-bye, without referring to the matter any more, he turned suddenly to peter bligh and exclaimed: "halloa, my man, and what's the matter with you?" now, peter bligh sat up as stiff as a board and answered directly. "hunger, doctor, that's the matter with me! if you'll add thirst to it, you've about named my complaint." "fog out of your lungs, eh?" "be sure and it is. i could dance at a fair and not be particular about the women. put me alongside a beef-steak and you shall see some love-making. aye, doctor, i'll never get my bread as a living skeleton, the saints be good to me, my hold's too big for that!" it was like mister bligh, and amused the stranger very much. just as if to answer peter, the doctor crossed the room and opened a big cupboard by the window, which i saw to be full of victuals. "i forget to eat, myself, when the instruments hustle me," said he, thoughtfully; "that's a bad habit, anyway. suppose you display your energy by setting supper. there are tinned things here and eggs, i believe. you'll find firewood and fresh meat in the kitchen yonder. here's something to keep the fog out of your lungs while you get it." [illustation: we were all sitting at the supper-table.] he tossed a respirator across the table, and peter bligh was away to the kitchen before you could count two. it was a relief to have something to do, and right quickly our fellows did it. we were all (except little dolly venn, who wanted his strength yet) sitting at the supper table when half an hour had passed and eating like men who had fasted for a month. to-morrow troubled the seamen but little. it did not trouble peter bligh or seth barker that night, i witness. a strange scene, you will admit, and one not readily banished from the memory. for my part, i see that room, i see that picture many a time in the night watches on my ship or in the dreaming moments of a seaman's day. the great machines of glass and brass rise up again about me as they rose that night. i watch the face of the american doctor, sharp and clear-cut and boyish, with the one black curl across the forehead. i see peter bligh bent double over the table, little dolly venn's eyes looking up bravely at me as he tries to tell us that all is well with him. the same curious sensations of doubt and uncertainty come again to plague me. what escape was there from that place? what escape from the island? who was to help us in our plight? who was to befriend little ruth bellenden now? would the ship ever come back? was she above or below the sea? would the sleep-time endure long, and should we live through it? ah! that was the thing to ask them. more especially to ask this clever man, whose work i made sure it was to answer the question. "we thank you, doctor," i said to him, at one time; "we owe our lives to you this night. we sha'n't forget that, be sure of it." "i'll never eat a full meal again but i'll remember the name of doctor--doctor--which reminds me that i don't know your name, sir," added peter bligh, clumsily. the doctor smiled at his humour. "dr. duncan gray, if it's anything to remember. ask for duncan gray, of chicago, and one man in a thousand will tell you that he makes it his business to write about poisons, not knowing anything of them. why, yes, poison brought me here and poison will move me on again; at least i begin to imagine it. poison, you see, holds the aces." "it's a fearsome place, truly," said i, "and wonderful that europe knows so little about it. i've seen ken's island on the charts any time these fifteen years, but never a whisper have i heard of sleep-time or sun-time or any other death-talk such as i've heard these last three days. you'll be here, doctor, no doubt, to ascertain the truth of it? if my common sense did not tell me as much, the machinery would. it's a great thing to be a man of your kind, and i'd give much if my education had led me that way. but i was only at a country grammar school, and what i couldn't get in at one end the master never could at the other. aye, i'd give much to know what you know this night!" he smiled a little queerly at the compliment, i thought, and turned it off with a word. "i begin to know how little i know, and that's a good start," said he. "possibly ken's island will make that little less. the master of ken's island is generously sending me to nature's university. i think that i understand why he permitted me to come here. why, yes, it was smart, and the man who first set curiosity going about prince czerny in chicago is well out of prince czerny's way. i must reckon all this up, captain--captain----" "jasper begg," said i, "at one time master of ruth bellenden's yacht, the manhattan." "and peter bligh, his mate, who is a christian man when the victuals are right." seth barker said nothing, but i named him and spoke about dolly venn. we five, i think, began to know each other better from that time, and to fall together as comrades in a common misfortune. parlous as our plight was, we had food and drink and tobacco for our pipes afterwards; and a seaman needs little more than that to make him happy. indeed, we should have passed the night well enough, forgetting all that had gone before and must come after, but for a weird reminder at the hour of midnight, which compelled us to recollect our strange situation and all that it betided. comfortable we were, i say, for dr. gray had found fine berths for us all: dolly on the sofa, his skipper in an arm-chair, peter bligh and seth barker on rugs by the window, and he himself in a hammock slung across the kitchen door. we had said "good-night" to one another and were settling off to sleep, when there came a weird, wild calf from the grounds without; and so dismal was it and so like the cries of men in agony that we all sprang to our feet and stood, with every faculty waking, to listen to the horrible outcry. for a moment no man moved, so full of terror were those sounds; but the doctor, coming first to his senses, strode towards the window and pulled the heavy curtain back from it. then, in the dazzling light, that wonderful gold-blue light which hovered in mist-clouds about the gardens of the bungalow, i saw a spectacle which froze my very blood. twenty men and women, perhaps, some of them europeans, some natives, some dressed in seamen's dress, some in rags, some quite naked, were dancing a wild, fantastic, maddening dance which no foaming dervish could have surpassed, aye, or imitated, in his cruellest moments. whirling round and round, extending their arms to the sky, sometimes casting themselves headlong on the ground, biting the earth with savage lips, tearing their flesh with knives, one or two falling stone-dead before our very eyes, these poor people in their delirium cried like animals, and filled the whole woods with their melancholic wailing. for ten minutes, it may be, the fit endured; then one by one they sank to the earth in the most fearful contortions of limb and face and body, and, a great silence coming upon the house, we saw them there in that cold, clear light, outposts of the death which ken's island harboured. we saw the thing, we knew its dreadful truth, yet many minutes passed before one among us opened his lip. the spell was still on us--a spell of dread and fear i pray that few men may know. "the laughing fever," exclaimed the doctor, at last, letting the curtain fall back with trembling hand. "yes, i have heard of that somewhere." and then he said, pointing to the lamp upon the table: "three days, my friends, three days between us and that!" chapter xiii the storm you have been informed that dr. gray promised us three days' security in the bungalow, and i will now tell you how it came about that we quitted the house next morning, and set out anew upon the strangest errand of them all. there's an old saying among seamen that the higher the storm the deeper the sleep, and this, may-be, is true, if you speak of a ship and of an english crew upon her. it takes something more than a capful of wind to blow sleep from a sailor's eyes; and though you were to tell him that the judgment was for to-morrow, i do believe he would take his four hours off all the same. but at ken's island things went differently; and two, at least, of our party knew little sleep that night. again and again i turned on my bed to see dr. gray busy before his furnace and to hear peter bligh snoring as though he'd crack the window-glass. nevertheless, sleep came to me slowly, and when i slept i dreamed of the island and all the strange things which had happened there since first we set foot upon it. many sounds and shapes were present in my dream, and the sweet figure of ruth bellenden with them all. i saw her brave and patient in the gardens of the bungalow; the words which she had spoken, "for god's sake come back to me!" troubled my ears like the music of the sea. sometimes, as dreams will, the picture was but a vague shadow, and would send me hither and thither, now to the high seas and an english port, again to the island and the bay wherein i first landed. i remember, more than all, a dream which carried me to the water's edge, with my hand in hers, and showed me a great storm and inky clouds looming above the reef and the lightning playing vividly, and a tide rising so swiftly that it threatened to engulf us and flood the very land on which we stood. and then i awoke, and the dawn-light was in the room and dr. gray himself stood watching by the window. "yes," he said, as though answering some remark of mine, "we shall have a storm--and soon." "you do not say so!" cried i; "why, that's my dream! i must have heard the thunder in my sleep." he drew the curtain back to show me the angry sky, which gave promise of thunder and of a hurricane to follow; the air of the room seemed heavy as that of a prison-house. in the gardens outside a shimmer of yellow light reminded me of a london fog as once i breathed it by temple bar. no longer could you distinguish the trees or the bushes or even the mass of the woods beyond the gate. from time to time the loom of the cloud would lift, and a beam of sunlight strike through it, revealing a golden path and a bewitching vision of grass and roses all drooping in the heat. then the ray was lost again, and the yellow vapour steamed up anew. "a storm undoubtedly," said the doctor, at last, "and a bad one, too. we should learn something from this, captain. why, yes, it looks easy--after the storm the wind." "and the wind will clear ken's island of fog," cried i. "ah, of course, it will. we shall breathe just now and go about like sane men. i am younger for hearing it, doctor." he said, "yes, it was good news," and then put some sticks into the grate and began to make a fire. the others still slept heavily. little dolly venn muttered in his sleep a name i thought i had heard before, and, truth to tell, it was something like "rosamunda." the doctor himself was as busy as a housemaid. "yes," he continued, presently, "we should be pretty well through with the sleep-time, and after that, waking. does anything occur to you?" i sat up in the chair and looked at him closely. his own manner of speech was catching. "why, yes," said i, "something does occur. for one thing, we may have company." he lit a match and watched the wood blazing up the chimney. a bit of fire is always a cheerful thing, and it did me good to see it that morning. "czerny has more than a hundred men," said he, after some reflection. "we are four and one, which makes five; five exactly." now, this was the first time he had confessed to anything which might let a man know where his sympathies lay. friend or enemy, yesterday taught me nothing about him. i learnt afterwards that he had once known kenrick bellenden in philadelphia. i think he was glad to have four comrades with him on ken's island. "if you mean thereby, doctor, that you'd join us," was my reply, "you couldn't tell me better news. you know why i came here and you know why i stay. it may mean much to mme. czerny to have such a friend as you. what can be done by five men on this cursed shore shall be done, i swear; but i am glad that you are with us--very glad." i really meant it, and spoke from my heart: but he was not a demonstrative man, and he rarely answered one directly as one might have wished. on this occasion, i remember, he went about his work for a little while before he spoke again; and it was not until the coffee was boiling on the hob that he came across to me and, seating himself on the arm of my chair, asked, abruptly: "do you know what fool's errand brought me to this place?" "i have imagined it," said i. "you wanted to know the truth about the sleep-time." he laughed that queer little laugh which expressed so much when you heard it. "no," said he, "i do not care a dime either way! i just came along to advertise myself. ken's island and its secrets are my newspaper. when i go back to new york people will say, 'that's the specialist, duncan gray, who wrote about narcotics and their uses.' they'll come and see me because the newspapers tell them to. we advertise or die, nowadays, captain, and the man who gets a foothold up above must take some risks. i took them when i shipped with edmond czerny." it was an honest story, and i liked the man the better for it. no word of mine intervened before he went on with it. "luck put me in the way of the thing," he continued, the mood being on him now and my silence helping him; "i met czerny's skipper in 'frisco, and he was a talker. there's nothing more dangerous than a loose tongue. the man said that his master was the second human being to set foot on ken's archipelago. i knew that it was not true. a hundred years ago jacob hoyt, a dutchman, was marooned on this place and lived to tell the story of it. the record lies in the library at washington; i've read it." he said this with a low chuckle, like a man in possession of a secret which might be of great value to him. i did not see the point of it at the time, but i saw it later, as you shall hear. "yes," he rattled on, "edmond czerny holds a full hand, but i may yet draw fours. he's a clever man, too, and a deep one. we'll see who's the deeper, and we will begin soon, captain begg--very soon. the sleep-time's through, i guess, and this means waking." now, this was spoken of the storm without, and a heavy clap of thunder, breaking at that moment, pointed his words as nothing else could have done. i had many questions yet to ask him, such as how it was that he persuaded czerny to take him aboard (though a man who knew so much would have been a dangerous customer to leave behind), but the rolling sounds awoke the others, and peter bligh, jumping up half asleep, asked if any one knocked. "i thought it was the devil with the hot water--and bedad it is!" cries he. "is the house struck, or am i dreaming it, doctor? it's a fearsome sound, truly." peter meant it as a bit of his humour, i do believe; but little he knew how near the truth his guess was. the storm, which had threatened us since dawn, now burst with a splendour i have never seen surpassed. a very sheet of raging fire opened up the livid sky. the crashing thunder shook the timbers of the house until you might have thought that the very roof was coming in. in the gardens themselves, leaping into your view and passing out of it again as a picture shuttered by light, great trees were split and broken, the woods fired, the gravel driven up in a shower of pelting hail. i have seen storms in my life a-many, but never one so loud and so angry as the storm of that ebbing sleep-time. there were moments when a whirlwind of terrible sounds seemed to envelop us, and the very heavens might have been rolling asunder. we said that the bungalow could not stand, and we were right. now, this was a bad prophecy; but the fulfilment came more swiftly and more surely than any of us had looked for. indeed, dolly venn was scarce upon his feet, and the sleep hardly out of seth barker's eyes, when the room in which we stood was all filled by a scathing flame of crimson light, and, a whirlwind of fire sweeping about us, it seemed to wither and burn everything in its path and to scorch our very limbs as it passed them by. to this there succeeded an overpowering stench of sulphur, and ripping sounds as of wood bursting in splinters, and beams falling, and the crackling of timber burning. not a man among us, i make sure, but knew full well the meaning of those signals or what they called him to do. the bungalow was struck; life lay in the fog without, in the death-fog we had twice escaped. "she's burning--she's burning, by----!" cried seth barker, running wildly for the door; and to his voice was added that of duncan gray, who roared: "my lead, my lead--stand back, for your lives!" he threw a muffler round his neck and ran out from the stricken bungalow. the whole westward wing of the house was now alight. great clouds of crimson flame wrestled with the looming fog above us; they illumined all the garden about as with the light of ten thousand fiery lamps. suffocating smoke, burning breezes, floating sparks, leaping tongues of flame drove us on. cries you heard, one naming the heights for a haven, another clamouring for the beach, one answering with an oath, another, it may be, with a prayer; but no man keeping his wits or shaping a true course. what would have happened but for the holding fog and the sulphurous air we breathed, i make no pretence to say; but nature stopped us at last, and, panting and exhausted, we came to a halt in the woods, and asked each other in the name of reason what we should do next. "the sea!" cries peter bligh, forgetting his courage (a rare thing for him to do); "show me the sea or i'm a dead man!" to whom seth barker answers: "if there's breath, it's on the hills; we'll surely die here." and little dolly, he said: "i cannot run another step, sir; i'm beat--dead beat!" for my part i had no word for them; it remained for doctor gray to lead again. "i will show you the road," cried he, "if you will take it." "and why not?" i asked him. "why not, doctor?" "because," he answered, very slowly, "it's the road to edmond czerny's house." chapter xiv a white pool--and afterwards we must have been a third of a mile from the shore when the doctor spoke, and three hundred yards, perhaps, from the pool in the glens. it is true that the storm seemed to clear the air; but not as we had expected, nor as fair argument led us to hope. wind there was, hot and burning on the face; but it brought no cool breath in its path, and did but roll up the fog in banks of grey and dirty cloud. while at one minute you would see the wood, green and grassy, as in the evening light, at another you could scarce distinguish your neighbour or mark his steps. to me, it appeared that the island dealt out life and death on either hand; first making a man leap with joy because he could breathe again; then sending him gasping to the earth with all his senses reeling and his brain on fire. any shelter, i said, would be paradise to men in the bond of that death-grip. sleep itself, the island's sleep, could have been no worse than the agony we suffered. "doctor," i cried, as i ran panting up to him, "edmond czerny's house or another--show us the way, here and now! we cannot fare worse; you know that. lead on and we follow, wherever it is." the others said, "aye, aye, lead on and we follow." desperation was their lot now; the madman's haste, the driven man's hope. there, in that fearful hollow, lives were ebbing away like the sea on a shallow beach. they fought for air, for breath, for light, for life. i can see peter bligh to this day as he staggers to his feet and cries, wildly: "the mouth of blazes would be a sunday parlour to this! lead on, doctor, i am dying here!" so he spoke; and, the others lurching up again, we began to race through the wood to a place where the fog lay lighter and the mists had left. wonderful sights met our eyes--aye, more wonderful than any words of mine could picture for you. in the air above flocks of birds wheeled dizzily as though the very sky was on fire. round and round, round and round, they darkened the heaven like some great wheel revolving; while, ever and anon, a beautiful creature would close its wings and swoop to death upon the dewy grass. other animals, terrified cattle, wild dogs, creatures from the heights and creatures from the valleys, all huddled together in their fear, raised doleful cries which no ear could shut out. the trees themselves were burnt and blackened by the storm, the glens as dark as night, the heaven above one canopy of fiery cloud and stagnant vapour. now, i knew no more than the dead what duncan gray meant when he said that he would lead us to czerny's house. a boat i felt sure he did not possess, or he would have spoken of it; nor did he mean that we should swim, for no man could have lived in the surf about the reefs. his steps, moreover, were not carrying him towards the beach, but to that vile pool in the ravine wherein a man had died on the night we came to ken's island. this pool i saw again as we ran on towards the headland; and so still and quiet it seemed, such a pretty lake among the hills, that no man would have guessed the terror below its waters or named the secret of it. nevertheless, it recalled to me our first night's work, and how little we could hope from any man in czerny's house; and this i had in my mind when the doctor halted at last before the mouth of an open pit at the very foot of the giant headland. he was blown with running, and the sweat dropped from his forehead like water. the place itself was the most awesome i have ever entered. on either hand, so close to us that the arms outstretched could have touched them, were two mighty walls, which towered up as though to the very sky beyond the vapour. a black pit lay before us; the fog and the burning wind in the woods we had left. silence was here--the awful silence of night and solitude. no eye could fathom the depths or search the heights. what lay beyond, i might not say. the doctor had led us to this wilderness, and he must speak. "see here," he cried, mopping the sweat from his face and rolling up his shirt-sleeves, like a man who has good work to do, "the road's down yonder, and we need a light to strike it. give me your hand, one of you, while i fetch up the lantern. a dutchman didn't write of ken's island for nothing. i guess he knew we were coming his way." he stretched out a hand to me with the words, and i held it surely while he bent over the pit and groped for the lantern he spoke of. "three days ago," said he, "i ran a picnic here all to myself. it is as well to find new lodgings if the old don't suit. i left my lantern behind me, and this it is, i reckon." he pulled up from the depths a gauze lantern such as miners use, and, lighting it, he showed us the heart of the pit. it was a deep hole, feet down, perhaps, and strewn with rubbish and fragments of the iron rocks. but what was worth more to us, aye, than a barrel of gold, was the sweet, fresh air which came to us through a tunnel's mouth as by a siphon from the open sea herself; and, blowing freshly on our faces, sent us quickly down towards it with glad cries and the spirits of men who have broken a prison gate. "the sea, the sea, by all that's holy!" cries peter bligh. "oh, doctor, i breathe, i breathe, as i am a christian man, i breathe!" we tumbled down into the pit headlong and sat there for many minutes wondering if, indeed, the death were passed or if we must face it again in the minutes to come. there before us, once we had passed the tunnel's mouth, stood a vast, domed hall which, i declare, men might have cut and not nature in the depths of that strange cavern. open to the day through great apertures high up in the face of the cliff, a soft glow like the light which comes through the windows of a church streamed upon the rocky floor and showed us the wonders of that awesome place. room upon room, we saw, cave upon cave; some round like the mosques a turk can build, others lofty and grand as any cathedral; some pretty as women's dens, all decked with jewels and ornament of jasper and walls of the blackest jet. these things i saw; these rooms i passed through. a magician might have conjured them up; and yet he was no magician, but only duncan gray, the man i knew for the first time yesterday, but already called a comrade. "doctor," i said, "it is a house of miracles, truly! but where to now--aye, that's the question; where to?" he sat upon a stone, and we grouped ourselves about him. peter bligh took out a pipe from his pocket and was not forbidden to light it. there was a distant sound in the cave like that of water rushing, and once another sound to which i could give no meaning. the doctor himself was still thinking deeply, as though hazarding a guess as to our position. "boys," he said, "i'll tell you the whole story. this place was discovered by hoyt, a dutchman. if czerny had read his book, he would know of it; but he hasn't. i took the trouble to walk in because i thought it might be useful when he turned nasty. it is going to be that, as you can see. follow through to the end of it, and you are in czerny's house. will you go there or hold back? it's for you to say." i filled my pipe, as peter had done, and, breathing free for the first time for some hours, i tried to speak up for the others. "a sailor's head tells me that there is a road from here to the reef; is that true?" asked i at last; "is it true, doctor?" he put on his glasses and looked at me with those queer, clever eyes of his. i believe to this day that our dilemma almost pleased him. "a sailor's head guesses right first time," was his answer. "there is a road under the sea from here to czerny's doorstep. i'm waiting to know if it's on or back. you know the risks and are not children. say that you turn it up and we'll all go back together, or stay here as wisdom dictates. but it's for you to speak----" we answered him all together, though peter bligh was the first he heard. "the lodgings here being free and no charge for extras," said peter, sagely. and dolly venn, he said: "we are five, at any rate. i don't suppose they would murder us. after all, edmond czerny is a gentleman." "who shoots the poor sailormen that's wrecked on his shore;" put in seth barker, doggedly. "he'd be of the upper classes, no doubt;" added peter bligh; "he'll see that we don't sleep in damp sheets! aye, 'tis the devil of a man, surely!" doctor gray heard them patiently--more patiently than i did--and then went on again: "if you stop here, you starve; if you go on--well, you take your luck. should the fog lift up yonder, you'll be having czerny back again. it's a rule-of-three sum, gentlemen. for my part, i say 'go on and take your luck,' but i won't speak for you unless you are willing." "none more willing," cried i, coming to a resolution on the spot. "forward let it be, and luck go with us. we'd be fools to die like rats in a trap when there's light and food not a mile away. and cowards, too, boys--cowards!" i added. the others said: "aye, aye, we're no cowards!" and all being of one mind we set out together through that home of wonders. edmond czerny's house we sought, and thither this iron road would carry us. a path more beautiful no man has trodden. from this time the great, church-like grottos gave place to lower roofs and often black-dark openings. by here and there we dived into tunnels wondrously cut by some forgotten river of fire in the ages long ago, and, emerging again, we entered a wilderness of ravines wherefrom even the sky was to be seen and the cliffs towering majestically above us. then, at last, we left the daylight altogether, and going downward as to the heart of the earth i knew that the land lay behind us and that the sea flowed above our heads. reader of a plain seaman's story, can you come with me on such a journey as i and four stout hearts made on that unforgotten day? can you picture, as i picture now, that dark and lonesome cavern, with the sea beating upon its roof and the air coming salt and humid to the tongue, and the echo of distant breakers in your ears, and always the night and the doubt of it? can you follow me from grotto to grotto and labyrinth to labyrinth, stumbling often by the way, catching at the lantern's dancing rays, calling one to the other, "all's well--lead on"? aye, i doubt that you can. these things must be seen with a man's own eyes, heard with his own ears, to be understood and made real to him. to me that scene lives as though yesterday had brought it. i see the doctor with his impatient step. i see peter bligh stumbling after him. i hear little dolly venn's manly voice; i help seth barker over the rocks. and these four stand side by side with me on the white pool's edge. the danger comes again. the fear, the loathing, are unforgotten. i speak of fear and loathing and of dread white pool, and you will ask me why and how we came thereto. and so i say that the water lay, may-be, a third of a mile from the land, in a clear, transparent basin of some quartz or mica, or other shining mineral, so that it gave out crystal lights even to the darkness, and the arched grotto which held it was all aglow, as though with hidden fires. a silent pool it was, we said, and our path seemed to end upon its brink; but even as we stood asking for a road, all the still water began to heave and foam, and, a great creature rising up from the depths, the lantern showed us a monster devil-fish, and we fell back one upon the other with affrighted cries. nor let any man charge us with that. a situation more perilous i have never been in, and never shall. the fish's terrible suckers searching all the rocks, the frightful eye of the brute, the rushing water, the half-light worse than darkness, might well have driven back a stronger man than i. and upon the top of that was the thought that by such lay the road to safety. we must pass the grotto, or perish of starvation. now, the first fright of this encounter was done with in a minute or two, and when it was plain to us that the devil-fish was stuck in the pool which some tide of the sea fed, perhaps, and that his suckers could not reach the higher part of the rock, we began to speak of it rationally, and to plan a way of going over. i was for emptying our revolvers into the fish straight away; but the doctor would have none of it, fearing the report, and, remembering what he had read in the dutchman's book, he came out with another notion. "hoyt went over the rocks," said he, calmly, while we still drew back from the pool affrighted, our hearts in our boots i make sure, and not one of us that did not begin to think of the fog again when he saw the devil-fish struggling to be free. "it's not a sweet road, but better than none at all. keep behind me, boys, and mind you don't slip or you'll find something worse than sharks. now for it, and luck go with us." with this he began to clamber round the edge of the pool, but so high up that it did not seem possible for the fish to touch him. there was good foothold on the jagged hunks of rock, and a man might have gone across safely enough but for the thought of that which was below him. for my part, i say that my eyes followed him as you may follow a walker on a tight-wire. one false step would send him flying down to a death i would not name, and that false step he appeared to make. my god! i see it all so clearly now. the slip, the frantic clutch at the rocks, the great tentacle which shot out and gripped his leg, and then the flash of my own revolver fired five times at the terrible eyes below me. there were loud cries in the cave, the wild shouts of terrified men, the smoke of pistols, the foaming and splashing of water, all the signs of panic which may follow a fellow-creature about to die. that the devil-fish had caught the doctor with one of his tentacles you could not doubt; that he would drag him down into that horrid stomach, i myself surely believed. never was a fight for life a more awful thing to see. on the one hand a brave man gripping the rocks with hands and foot until the crags cut his very flesh; on the other that ghoul-like horror seeking to wind other claws about its prey and to drag it towards its gaping mouth. what miracle could save him, god alone knew; and yet he was saved. a swift act of his own, brave and wonderful, struck the sucker from the limb and set him free. aye, what a mind to think of it! what other man, i ask, would have let go his hold of the rocks when hold meant so much to him and that fish swam below? nevertheless, the doctor did so. i see it now--the quick turn--the knife drawn from its sheath--the severed tentacle cut clean as a cork, the devil-fish itself drawing back to the depths of the crimson pool. and then once more i am asking the doctor if he is hurt; and he is answering me, cheerily, "not much, captain, not much," and we four are following after him as white as women, i do believe, our nerves unstrung, our hearts quaking as we crossed the dreadful pit. well, we went over well enough, shirk it as we might. the bullets which sent the devil-fish to the bottom sent him there to die, for all i knew. the pool itself was red with blood by this time, and the waters settling down again. i could see nothing of the fish as i crossed over; and seth barker, who came last and, like a true seaman, had forgotten his fear already, swung the lantern down to the water's edge, but discovered nothing. the doctor himself, excited as you might expect, and limping with his hurt, simply said, "well over, lads, well over"; and then, taking the lantern from seth barker's hands, he would not wait to answer our curiosity, but pushed on through the tunnel. "it's not every man who has a back-door with a watch-dog like that," said he, as he went; "edmond czerny, may-be, does not know his luck; i'll tell him of it when we're through. it won't be a long while now, boys, and i'm glad of it. my foot informs me it's there, and i shall have to leave a card on it just now." "then the sooner you let us look at it the better, doctor," said i. "aye, but you were nearly gone. my heart was in my throat all the time you stood there." "which is no place for a man's heart to be," said he, brightly; "especially at the door of edmond czerny's house." he stood a moment and bade me listen. we were in an open place of the tunnel then, and a ray of light striking down from some lamp above us revealed an iron ladder and a wooden trap above it. the sea i could hear beating loudly upon the reef; but with the sea's voice came others, and they were human. "yes," said the doctor, quietly, "we are in the house all right, and god knows when we shall get out of it again!" and then, with a cry of pain, he fell fainting at my feet. chapter xv an interlude, during which we read in ruth bellenden's diary again * * the editor has thought it well to give at this point the above extract from ruth bellenden's diary, as permitting some insight into the events which transpired on ken's island after jasper begg's discovery and edmond czerny's return. may th.--my message to the sea has been heard. jasper begg is on ken's island. all that this means to me, all that it may mean, i dare not think. a great burden seems lifted from my shoulders. i have found a friend and he is near me. may th.--i have seen jasper to-night, and he has gone away again. he is not changed, i think. it is the same honest, english face, the same cheery english voice. i have always said that jasper is one of the handsomest englishmen i have ever seen. and just as on my own yacht, so here on ken's island, the true english gentleman speaks to me. for jasper is that above all things, one of nature's gentlemen, whom the rough world will never disguise nor the sea life change. he would be thirty-five years of age now, i remember, but he has not lost his boyish face, and there is the same shy reticence which he never could conquer. he has come here according to his promise. a ship lies in the offing, and he would have me go to it. how little he knows of my true condition in this dreadful place. how may a woman go when a hundred watch her every hour? may th.--clair-de-lune, the frenchman, came to the bungalow very early this morning to tell me of certain things which happened on the island last night. it seems that jasper is still here, and that the storm has driven away his ship. i do not know whether to be sorry or glad. he cannot help me--he cannot!--and yet a friend is here. i take new courage at that. if a woman can aid a brave man to win her liberty, i am that woman and jasper is the man. yesterday i was alone; but to-day i am alone no longer, and a friend is at my side, and he has heard me. his ship will come back, i say. it is an ecstasy to dream like this! may th.--i have spent four anxious days--more anxious, i think, than any in my life. the ship has not returned, and jasper begg is still a fugitive in the hills. there are three of his companions with him, and we send them food every day. what will be the end of it all? i am more closely watched than ever since this was known. i fear the worst for my friends, and yet i am powerless to help them. may th (later).--my husband, who has now returned from san francisco, knows that jasper is here and speaks of it. i fear these moods of confidence and kindness. "your friend has come," edmond says; "but why am i not to know of it? why is he frightened of me? why does he skulk like a thief? let him show himself at this house and state his business; i shall not eat him!" edmond, i believe, has moments when he tries to persuade himself that he is a good man. they are dangerous moments, if all a man's better instincts are dead and forgotten. may th.--clair-de-lune, edmond tells me, has been sent to the lower reef. i do not ask him why. it was he who helped my friends in the hills. is it all real or did i dream it? jasper begg, the one man who befriended me, left to die as so many have been left on this unpitying shore! it cannot be--it cannot be! all that i had hoped and planned must be forgotten now. and yet there were those who remembered ruth bellenden and came here for love of her, as she will remember them, for love's sake. [illustration: the drawing-room is a cave whose walls are of jewels.] may th.--the alarm bell rang on the island last night and we left in great haste for the shelter. the dreadful mists were already rising fast when i went down through the woods to the beach. the people fled wildly to the lower reef. it is not three months since the sleep-time, and its renewal was unlooked for. to-night i do not think of my own safety, but of those we are leaving on the heights. what is to become of jasper, my friend--who will help him? i think of jasper before any other now. does he, i wonder, so think of me? may th (later).--the house under the sea is built inside the reef which ties about a mile away on the northern side of the island. there can be nothing like it in the world. hundreds of years ago, perhaps, this lonely rock, rising out of the water, was the mouth of some great volcano. to-day it is the door of our house, and when you enter it you find that the rocks below have been hollowed out by nature in a manner so wonderful that a great house lies there with stone-cold rooms and immense corridors and pits seeming to go to the heart of the world. none but a man with my husband's romantic craving would have discovered such a place, or built himself therein a house so wonderful. for imagine a suite of rooms above which the tides surge--rooms lighted by tunnels in the solid rock and covered over with strongest glasses which the sea cannot break. imagine countless electric lamps lighting this labyrinth until it seems sometimes like a fairy palace. say that your drawing-room is a cave, whose walls are of jewels and whose floor is of jasper. night and day you hear the sea, the moaning winds, the breaking billows. it is another world here, like to nothing that any man has seen or ever will see. the people of a city could live in this place and yet leave room for others. my own rooms are the first you come to; lofty as a church, dim as one, yet furnished with all that a woman could desire. yes, indeed, all i can desire. in my dressing-room are gowns from dousé's and hats from alphonsine's, jewels from the rue de la paix, furs from canada--all there to call back my life of two short years ago, that laughing life of paris and the cities when i was free, and all the world my own, and only my girlhood to regret! now i remember it all as one bright day in years of gathering night. everything that i want, my husband says, shall be mine. i ask for liberty, but that is denied to me. it is too late to speak of promises or to believe. if i would condone it all; if i would but say to edmond, "yes, your life shall be my life, your secrets shall be mine; go, get riches, i will never ask you how." if i would say to him, "i will shut out from my memory all that i have seen on this island; i will forget the agony of those who have died here; i will never hear again the cries of drowning people, will never see hands outstretched above the waves, or the dead that come in on the dreadful tides; i will forget all this, and say, 'i love you, i believe in you'"--ah, how soon would liberty be won! but i am dumb; i cannot answer. i shall die on ken's island, saying, "god help those who perish here!" may th.--three days have passed in the shelter, and clair-de-lune, who comes to me every day, brings no good news of jasper. "he is on the heights," he says; "if food were there he might live through the sleep-time." my husband knows that he is there, but does not speak of it. yesterday, about sunset, i went up to the gallery on the reef, where the island is visible, and i saw the fog lying about it like a pall. it is an agony to know that those dear to you are suffering, perhaps dying, there! i cannot hide my eyes from others; they read my story truly. "your friends will be clever if they come to ken's island again," my husband says. i do not answer him. i shall never answer him again. may th.--there was a terrible storm on the island last night, and we all went up to the gallery to see the lightning play about the heights and run in rivulets of fire through the dark clouds above the woods. a weird spectacle, but one i shall never forget. the very sky seemed to burn at times. we could distinguish the heart of the thicket clearly, and poor people running madly to and fro there as though vainly seeking a shelter from the fire. they tell me to-day that the bungalow is burnt; i do not know whether to be sorry or glad. i am thinking of my friends. i am thinking of jasper, thinking of him always. may th.--i learn that there was a stranger left behind in the bungalow, a doctor gray, of san francisco. he landed with edmond last week, and is here for scientific reasons. my husband says that he does not like him; but allowed him, nevertheless, to come. he was in the bungalow making experiments when the lightning struck the house and destroyed it. it is feared that he must have perished in the fire. my husband tells me this to-night and is pleased to say it. but what of jasper, my friend; what of him? may th.--i was passing through the great hall of the house to-night, going to my bed-room, when something happened which made my very heart stand still. i thought that i heard a sound in the shadows, and imagining it to be one of the servants, i asked, "who is there?" no one answered me; and, becoming frightened, i was about to run on, when a hand touched my own, and, turning round quickly, i found myself face to face with jasper himself, and knew that he had come to save me! chapter xvi rosamunda and the iron doors we had no notion that the doctor had come by any serious hurt, and when he fell in a dead faint we stood as men struck by an unseen hand. light we still had, for the rolling lantern continued to burn; but the wits of us, save the wits of one, were completely gone, and three sillier fellows never gaped about an ailing man. dolly venn alone--trained ashore to aid the wounded--kept his head through the trouble and made use of his learning. the half of a minute was not to be counted before he had bared an ugly wound and showed us, not only a sucker still adhering to the crimson flesh, but a great, gaping cut which the doctor's own knife had made when he severed the fish's tentacle. "you, seth barker, hold up that lantern," says he to the carpenter, as bold as brass and as ready as a crack physician at a guinea a peep; "give me some linen, one of you--and please be quick about it. i'll trouble you for a knife, mister peter, and a slice of your shirt, if you don't mind!" now, he had only to say this and i do believe that all four of us began to tear up our linen and to make ourselves as naked as adam when they discharged him from eden; but peter bligh, he was first with it, and he had out his clasp-knife and cut a length of his belfast shift before you could say "jack robinson." "'tis unlikely that i'll match it in these parts, and i've worn it to my mother's memory," says he while he did it; "but 'tis yours, dolly, lad, and welcome. and what now?" asks he. "be quiet, mister peter," says dolly, sharply; "that's what next. be quiet and nurse the doctor's leg, and do please keep that lantern steady." well, big men as we were, we kept quiet for the asking, as ignorance always will when skill is at the helm. very prettily, i must say, and very neatly did dolly begin to bind the wound, and to cut the suckers from their hold. the rest of us stood about and looked on and made believe we were very useful. it was an odd thing to tell ourselves that a man, who had been hale and hearty five minutes before, might now be going out on the floor of that hovel. i knew little of duncan gray, but what little i did know i liked beyond the ordinary; and every time that dolly took a twist on his bandage or fingered the wound with the tenderness of a woman, i said, "well done, lad, well done; we'll save him yet." and this the boy himself believed. "it's only a cut," said he, "and if there's no poison, he'll be well enough in a week. but he won't be able to stand, that's certain. i'd give ten pounds for an antiseptic, i really would!" i knew what he meant all right; but the others didn't, and peter bligh, he must come in with his foolishness. "they're mortal rare in these parts," said he; "i've come across many things in the pacific, but anyskeptics isn't one of 'em. may-be he'll not need 'em, dolly. we was twenty-four men down on the ohio with yellow-jack, and not an ounce of anyskeptics did i swallow! and here i am, hale and hearty, as you'll admit." "and talking loud," said seth barker, "talking very loud, gentlemen!" it was wisdom, upon my word, for not one of us, i swear (until seth barker spoke), had remembered where we were or what was like to come afterwards. voices we had heard, human voices above us, when first we entered the cellar; and now, when the warning was uttered, we stood dumb for some minutes and heard them again. "douse the glim--douse it," cries peter, in a big whisper; "they're coming down, or i'm a dutchman!" he turned the lantern and blew it out as he spoke. the rest of us crouched down and held our breath. for ten seconds, perhaps, we heard the deep, rough voices of men in the rooms above us. then the trap-door opened suddenly, and a beam of light fell upon the pavement not five yards from where we stood. at the same moment a shaggy head peered through the aperture, and a man cast a quick glance downward to the cellar. "no," said the man, as though speaking to some one behind him, "it's been took, as i told you." to which the other voice answered: "well more blarmed fool you for not corking good rum when you see it!" they closed the trap upon the words, and we breathed once more. the lesson they had taught us could not be forgotten. we were sobered men when we lighted the lantern with one of seth barker's matches, and turned it again on the doctor's face. "in whispers, if you please," said i, "as few as you like. we are in a tight place, my lads, and talk won't get us out of it. it's the doctor first and ourselves afterwards, remember." dr. gray, truly, was a little better by this time, and sitting up like a dazed man, he looked first at dolly venn and then at his foot, and last of all at the strange place in which he lay. "why, yes," he exclaimed at last, "i remember; a cut and a fool who walked on it. it serves me right, and the end is better than the beginning." "the lad did it," said i; "he was always a wonder with linen and the scissors, was dolly venn." "to say nothing of a square foot of my shirt," put in peter bligh, obstinately. "'tis worth while getting a bit of a cut, doctor, just to see dolly venn sew it up again." the doctor laughed with us, for he knew a seaman's manner and the light talk which follows even the gravest mishap aboard a ship. that our men meant well towards him he could not doubt; and his next duty was to tell us as much. "you are good fellows," said he, "and i'm much obliged to you, master dolly. if you will put your hand inside my coat, you will find a brandy-flask there, and i'll drink your health. don't worry your heads about me, but think of yourselves. one of you, remember, must go and see czerny now; i think it had better be you, captain." i said yes, i would go willingly; and added, "when the right time comes." the time was not yet, i knew--when men walked above our heads and were waking. but when it came i would not hold back for my shipmates' sake. we had a few biscuits among us, which prudent men had put in their pockets after last night's meal; and, my own flask being full of water, we sat down in the darkness of the cellar and made such a meal as we could. minute by minute now it became more plain to me that i must do as duncan gray said, and go up to find czerny himself. food we had none, save the few biscuits in our hands; salt was the water in the crimson pool behind us. beyond that were the caverns and the fog. it was just all or nothing; the plain challenge to the master of this place, "give us shelter and food" or the sleep which knows no waking. do you wonder that i made up my mind to risk all on a journey which, were it for life or death, would carry us, at last, beyond the doubt and uncertainty? we passed the afternoon sleeping and dozing, as tired men might. voices we heard from time to time; the moan of the sea was always with us--a strange, wild song, long-drawn and rolling, as though the water played above our very heads in the gentle sport of a pacific calm. at a dwelling more remarkable than the one we were about to enter no man has knocked or will knock in all the years to come. we were like human animals which burrow in a rocky bank a mile from any land. there were mysteries and wonders above, i made sure; and there was always the doubt, such doubt as comes to men who go to a merciless enemy and say, "give us bread." now, i left my comrades at ten o'clock that night, when all sounds had died away above and the voice of the sea growing angrier told me that my steps would not be heard. "i shall go to czerny, lads," said i, at the moment of leaving them, "and he will hear the story. i'll do my best for good shipmates, trust me; and if i do not come back--well, you'll know that i cannot. good night, old comrades. we've sailed many a sea together and we'll sail many another yet, god willing." they all cried "aye, aye, sir!" and pressed my hand with that affection i knew they bore me. little dolly venn, indeed, pleaded hard to accompany me; but it seemed plain that, if life were to be risked, one alone should risk it; and, putting him off kindly, i mounted the ladder and raised the trap. i was in edmond czerny's house, and i was alone. * * * now, i had opened the trap, half believing i might find myself in some room, perhaps in the kitchen of the house. men would be there, i said, and czerny's watch-dogs ready with their questions. but this was not a true picture; and while there were arc lamps everywhere, the place was not a room at all, but a circular cavern, with rude apertures in the wall and curtains hung across in lieu of doors. this was not a little perplexing, as you will see; and my path was not made more straight when i heard voices in some room near by, but could not locate them nor tell which of the doors to avoid. for a long time i stood, uncertain how to act. in the end i put my head round the first curtain at a venture, and drew it back as quickly. there were men in that place, half-naked men, grouped about the door of a furnace whose red light flashed dazzlingly upon walls and ceiling and gave its tenants the aspect of crimson devils. what the furnace meant or why it was built, i was soon to learn; for presently one of the men gave an order, and upon this an engine started, and a whirr of fans and the sucking of a distant pump answered to the signal. "air," said i to myself; "they are pumping air from above." the men had not seen me, so quick was i, and so soft with the leather curtain; and going tiptoe across the cave i stumbled at hazard upon a door i had not observed before. it was nothing more than a big and jagged opening in the rock, but it showed me a flight of stairs beyond it, and twinkling lamps beyond that again. this, i said, must surely be the road to the sea, for the stairs led upward, and czerny, as common sense put it, would occupy the higher rooms. so i did not hesitate any more about it, but treading the stairway with a cat's foot i went straight on, and presently struck so fine a corridor that at any other time i might well have spent an hour in wonder. lamps were here--scores of them, in wrought-iron chandeliers. doors you saw with almost every step you took--aye, and more than doors--for there were figures in the light and shadow; men passing to and fro; glimpses of open rooms and tables spread for cards, and bottles by them; and wild men of all countries, some sleeping, some quarrelling, some singing, some busy in kitchen and workshop. by here and there, these men met me in the corridor, and i drew back into the dark places and let them go by. they did not remark my presence, or if they did, made nothing of it. after all, i was a seaman, dressed as other seamen were. why should they notice me when there were a hundred such in czerny's house? i began to see that a man might go with less risk because of their numbers than if they had been but a handful. "i shall find czerny, after all," said i to myself, "and have it out with him. when he has spoken it will be time enough to ask, what next?" it was a little consoling to say this, and i went on with more confidence. passing down the whole length of the corridor, i reached a pair of iron doors at last, and found them fast shut and bolted against me. there was no branch road that i could make out, nor any indication of the way in which i must open the doors. a man cannot walk through sheer iron for the asking, nor blow it open with a wish; and there i stood in the passage like a messenger who has struck upon an empty house, but is not willing to leave it. see czerny that night i must, even if it came to declaring myself to the rogues who occupied the rooms near by, and whose voices i could still hear. i had no mind to knock at the door; and, truth to tell, such a thing never came into my head, so full it was of other schemes. indeed, i was just telling myself that it was neck or nothing, when what should happen but that the great iron door swung open, and the little french girl, rosamunda, herself stepped out. staggered at the sight of me, as well she might be (for the electric lamp will hide no face), she just piped one pretty little cry and then fell to saying: "oh, captain begg, captain begg, what do you want in this house?" "my dear," says i, speaking to her with a seaman's liberty, "i want a good many things, as most sailors do in this world. what's behind that door, now, and where may you have come from? tell me as much, and you'll be doing me a bigger kindness than you think." she didn't reply to this at once, but asked a question, as little girls will when they are thinking of somebody. "where are the others?" cried she; "why do you come alone? where is the little one, mister--mister----" "dolly venn," said i; "ah, that's the boy! well, he's all right, my dear, and if he'd known that we were meeting, he'd have sent his love. you'll find him down yonder, in the cellar beyond the engine-house. show me the way to mister czerny's door, and we'll soon have him out of there. he's come a long way, and it's all for the pleasure of seeing you--of course it is." the talk pleased her, but giving her no time to think about it, i went on: "mister czerny, now, he would be living by here, i suppose?" she said, "yes, yes." his rooms were through the great hall which lay beyond the doors; but she looked so startled at the idea of my going there, and she listened so plainly for the sound of any voices, that i read up her apprehensions at a glance and saw that she did not wish me to go on because she was afraid. "where is your old friend, the frenchman?" i asked her on an impulse; "what part of this queer house does he sling his hammock in?" she changed colour at this, and plainly showed her trouble. "oh, mister begg," says she, "clair-de-lune has been punished for helping you on ken's island. he is not allowed to leave his room now. mister czerny is very angry, and will not see him. how can you think of coming here--oh, how can you do it?" "it's easy enough," said i, lightly, "if you don't miss the turning and go straight on. never fear for me, young lady; i shall pull through all right; and when i do your friend goes with me, be sure of it. i won't forget old clair-de-lune, not i! now, just show me the road to the governor's door, and then run away and tell dolly venn. he'll be precious glad to see you, as true as scripture." well, she stood for a little while, hesitating about it, and then she said, as though she had just remembered it: "benno regnarte is the guard, but he has gone away to have his supper. i borrowed the key and came through. if you go in, he will not question you. the governor may be on his yacht, or he may be in his room. i do not know. how foolish it all is--how foolish, captain begg! they may never let you go away again!" "being so fond of my company," cried i, gaily. "well, we'll see about it, my dear. just you run off to dolly venn and leave me to do the rest. sailors get out where other people stick, you know. we'll have a try, for the luck's sake." i held her little hand in mine for a minute and gave it a hearty squeeze. she was the picture of prettiness in a print gown and a big spanish shawl wrapped about her baby face. that she was truly alarmed, and rightly so, i knew well; but what could i do? it was czerny or the pit. i chose czerny. now, she had opened the iron door for me to pass by, and without another word to her i crossed the threshold and stood in czerny's very dwelling-house. thereafter, i was in a vast hall, in a beautiful place for all the world like a temple; with a gallery running round about it, and lamps swinging from the gallery, and an organ built high up in a niche above the far end, and doors of teak giving off all round, and a great oak fire-place such as you see in english houses; and all round the dome of this wonderful room great brass-bound windows, upon which the sea thundered and the foam sprayed. softly lighted, carpeted with mats of rare straw, furnished as any mansion of the rich, it seemed to me, i do confess, a very wonder of the earth that such a place should lie beneath the breakers of the pacific ocean. and yet there it was before my eyes, and i could hear the sea-song high above me, and the lamps shone upon my face; and, as though to tell me truly that here my journey ended, whom should i espy at the door of one of the rooms but little ruth bellenden herself, the woman i had crossed the world to serve. chapter xvii in which jasper begg enters the house under the sea i drew back into a patch of shadow and waited for her to come up to me. others might be with her and the moment inopportune for our encounter. she walked with slow steps. care had written its story upon her sweet face. i saw that she was alone, and i put out my hand and touched her upon the arm. "miss ruth," said i, so soft that i wonder she heard me--"miss ruth, it's jasper begg. don't you know me?" she turned swiftly, but did not cry out. one wild look she cast about the half, with one swift glance she made sure of every door, and then, and only then, she answered me. "jasper, jasper! is it really jasper begg?" she cried, with a look of joy and gratitude i never shall forget. now, she had asked a woman's natural question; but i shall always say that there never were wits quicker than ruth bellenden's; and hardly were the useless words out of her mouth than she drew back to the room she had left; and when i had entered it after her she closed the door and listened a little while for any sounds. when none came to trouble her she advanced a step, and so we two stood face to face at last, in as pretty a place as all london, or all europe for that matter, could show you. let me try to picture that scene for you as it comes to me when i write of it and seek to bring it back to my memory. a trim, well-kept cabin, such i call her room--a boudoir the french would name it--all hung round with pale rose silk, and above that again an artist's pictures upon a wall of cream. little tables stood everywhere and women's knick-knacks upon them; there were deep chairs which invited you to sit, covered in silks and satins, and cushioned so that a big man might be afraid of them. upon the mantel-shelf a clock from paris swung a jewelled pendulum, and candlesticks matched it on either side. a secretaire, littered over with papers and bright with silver ornaments, had its back to the seaward wall; a round window, cut in the rock above it, stood hidden by curtains of the richest brocade. the carpet, i said, was from turkey; the mats from persia. in the grate the wood-fire glowed warmingly. ruth bellenden herself, the mistress of the room, capped the whole, and she was gowned in white, with rubies and diamonds strung about her stately neck, and all that air of proud command i had admired so much in the days bygone. aye, such a scene, believe me, as a grand london drawing-room might show you any night of london's months you care to name, and yet so different from that. and i, a plain sailor, found myself thrust forward there to my confusion, yet feeling, despite it all, that the woman i spoke to was woman at heart, as i was man. a few days ago i had come to her to say, "you have need of me." to-night it was her lot to answer me with my own words. "jasper," she said, her hand still on the switch of the lamp, "what miracle brings you to this place?" "no miracle, miss ruth," said i, "but a plain road, and five men's necessity. we were dying on ken's island and we found a path under the sea. it was starvation one way, surrender the other; i am here to tell mr. czerny everything and to trust my life to him." now, she heard me almost with angry surprise; and coming forward into the light she stood before me with clasped hands and heated face. "no," she said, and her "no" was a thing for a man to hear. "no, no; you shall never tell my husband that. and, oh, jasper!" she cried upon it, "how ill you look--how changed!" "my looks don't tell the truth," said i, not wishing to speak of myself; "i am up and down like a barometer in the tropics. the plain fact is, miss ruth, that the ship's gone, clean gone! i gave mister jacob the sure order to stand by us for three days, and that he didn't do. it means, then, that he couldn't. i greatly fear some accident has overtaken him; but he'll come back yet as i'm a living man!" she heard me like one dazed: her eyes were everywhere about the room, as though seeking something she could not find. presently she opened the door with great caution, and was gone a minute or more. when she returned she had a flask of spirits and some biscuits in her hand, and this time, i noticed, she locked the door after her. "edmond is sleeping; they have sent aunt rachel to tokio," she almost whispered; "benno, our servant, is to be trusted. i heard that you were starving in the hills; but how could i help--how could i, jasper? it was madness for you to come here, and yet i am glad--so glad! and oh," she says, "we'll find a way; we'll find a way yet, jasper!" i poured some brandy from the flask, for i had need of it, and gulped it down at a draught. her vivacity was always a thing to charm a man; as a girl she had the laughter and the spirits of ten. "what shall we do, jasper?" she kept on saying, "what shall we do next? oh, to think that it's you, to think that it is jasper begg in this strange house!" she kept crying; "and no way out of it, no safety anywhere! jasper, what shall we do--what shall we do next?" "we shall tell your husband, miss ruth," said i, "and leave the last word with him. why, think of it, five men cast adrift on his shore, and they to starve. is he devil or man that he refuses them food and drink? i'll not believe it until i hear it. the lowest in humanity would never do such a thing! aye, you are judging him beyond ordinary when you believe it. so much i make bold to say!" i turned to the fire, and began to warm my fingers at it, while she, for her part, drew up one of the silk-covered chairs, and sat with her pretty head resting in a tired way between her little hands. all our talk up to this time had been broken fragments; but this i judged the time for a just explanation, and she was not less willing. "jasper," says she of a sudden, "have you read what i wrote in the book?" "to the last line," said i. "and, reading it, you will ask edmond to help you?" "miss ruth," said i, "how shall one man judge another? ships come to this shore, and are wrecked on it. now and then, perchance, there is foul play among the hands. are you sure that your husband has any part in it--are you sure he's as bad as you think him?" well, instead of answering me, she stood up suddenly and let her dress fall by the shoulder-knots. i saw the white flesh beneath bruised and wealed, as though a whip had cut it, and i knew that this was her witness to her story. what was in my heart at such a sight i would have no man know; but my fingers closed about the pistol i carried, and my tongue would speak no word. "why do you compel me to speak?" she went on, meanwhile. "am i to tell of all the things i have seen and suffered on this dreadful place in the year--can it be only that?--the long, weary year i have lived here? do you believe, jasper, that a man can fill his house with gold as this is filled--this wild house so far from the world--and fill it honestly? shall i say, 'yes, i have misjudged him,' the man who has shot my servant here in this room and left me with the dead? shall i say that he is a good man because sometimes, when he has ceased to kill and torture those who serve him, he acts as other men? oh, i could win much if i could say that; i could win, perhaps, all that a woman desires. but i shall never speak--never; i shall live as i am living until i am old, when nothing matters!" it was a very bitter and a very surprising thing for me to hear her speak in this way. trouble i knew she must have suffered on ken's island; but this was a story beyond all imagination. and what could i say to her, what comfort give her--i, a rough-hearted sailor, who, nevertheless, would have cut off my own right hand if that could have served her? indeed, to be truthful, i had nothing to say, and there we were for many minutes, she upon one side of the fire and i upon the other, as two that gazed into the reddening embers and would have found some old page of our life therein recorded. "miss ruth," said i at last, and i think she knew what i meant, "i would have given much not to have heard this thing to-night; but as it is spoken--if it were twenty times as bad for me and those with me--i am glad we came to ken's island. the rest you will anticipate and there is no need for me to talk about it. the day that sees me sail away will find a cabin-passenger aboard my ship. her name i will not mention, for it is known to you. aye, by all a man's promise she shall sail with me or i will never tread a ship's deck again." it was earnestly meant, and that, i am sure, miss ruth knew, for she put her hand upon mine, and, though she made no mention of what i had said, there was a look in her eyes which i was glad to see there. her next question surprised me altogether. "jasper," she asked, with something of a smile, "do you remember when i was married?" "remember it!" cried i; and i am sure she must have seen the blood rush up to my face. "why, of course, i remember it! how should a man forget a thing like that?" "yes," she went on, and neither looked at the other now, "i was a girl then, and all the world was my playground. every day was a flower to pick; the night was music and laughter. how i used to people the world my hopes created--such romantic figures they were, such nonsense! when edmond czerny met me at nice, i think he understood me. oh, the castles we built in the air, the romantic heights we scaled, the passionate folly with which we deceived ourselves! 'the world is for you and i,' he said, 'in each other's hearts'; and i, jasper, believed him, just because i had not learnt to be a woman. his own story fascinated me; i cannot tell how much. he had been in all countries; he knew many cities; he could talk as no man i had ever met. perhaps, if he had not been so clever, it would have been different. all the other men i knew, all except one, perhaps----!" "there was one, then," said i, and my meaning she could not mistake. but she turned her face from me and would not name the man. "yes," she went on, without noticing it, "there was one; but i was a child and did not understand. the others did not interest me. their king was a cook; their temple the casino. and then edmond spoke of his island home; i was to be the mistress of it, and we were to be apart from all the world there. i did not ask him, as others might have asked him, 'what has your life been? why do you love me?' i was glad to escape from it all, that little world of chatter and unreality, and i said, 'i will be your wife.' we left europe together and went first to san francisco. life was still in a garden of roses. if i would awake sometimes to ask myself a question, i could not answer it. i was the child of romance, but my world was empty. then one day we came to ken's island, and i saw all its wonders, and i said, 'yes, we will visit here every year and dream that it is our kingdom.' i did not know the truth; what woman would have guessed it?" "you learnt it, miss ruth, nevertheless," said i, for her story was just what i myself had imagined it to be. "you were not long on ken's island before you knew the truth." "a month," she said, quietly. "i was a month here, and then a ship was wrecked. my husband went out with the others; and from the terrace before my windows i saw--ah, god! what did i not see? then edmond returned and was angry with the servant who had permitted me to see. he shot him in this room before my face. he knew that his secret was mine, he knew that i would not share it. the leaves of the rose had fallen. ah! jasper, what weeks of terror, of greed, of tears--and now you--you in this house to end it all!" i sat for a long while preoccupied with my own thoughts and quite unable to speak to her. all that she had told me was no surprise, no new thing; but i believe it brought home to me for the first time the danger of my presence in that house, and all that discovery meant to the four shipmates who waited for me down below in the cavern. for if this man czerny--a madman, as i always say--had shot down a servant before this gentle girl, what would he do to me and the others, sworn enemies of his, who could hang him in any city where they might find him; who could, with one word, give his dastardly secret to the world; who could, with a cry, destroy this treasure-house, rock-built though it might be? what hope of mercy had we from such a man? and i was sitting there, it might be, within twenty paces of the room in which he slept; miss ruth's hand lay in my own. what hope for her or for me, i ask again? will you wonder that i said, "none; just none! a thousand times none"! the island itself might well be a mercy beside such a hell as this. "miss ruth," said i, coming to myself at last, "how little i thought when you went up to the great cathedral in nice a short year ago that such a sunny day would end so badly! it is one of the world's lotteries; just that and nothing more. edmond czerny is no sane man, as his acts prove. some day you will blot it all out of your life as a page torn and forgotten. that your husband loved you in nice, i do believe; and so much being true, he may come to reason again, and reason would give you liberty. if not, there are others who will try--while they live. he must be a rich man, a very rich man, must edmond czerny. god alone knows why he should sink to such an employment as this." "he has sunk to it," she said, quickly, "because gold is fed by the love of gold. oh, yes, he is a rich man, richer than you and i can understand. and yet even my own little fortune must be cast upon the pile. a month ago he compelled me to sign a paper which gives up to him everything i have in the world. he has no more use for me, jasper; none at all! he has sent my only living relative away from me. when you go back to england they will tell you that i am dead. and it will be true--true; oh, i know that it will be true." she had come to a very low state, i make sure, to utter such a word as this, and it was a sorry thing for me to hear. to console her when i myself was in a parlous plight was just as though one drowning man should hold out his hand to another. to-morrow i myself might be flung into that very ocean whose breakers i could hear rolling over the glass of the curtained windows. and what of little ruth then? that question i did not answer. words were on my lips--such words as a driven man may speak--when there came to us from the sea without the boom of a distant gun, and, miss ruth springing to her feet, i heard a great bell clang in the house and the rush of men and the pattering of steps; and together, the woman i loved and i, we stood with beating hearts and white faces, and told each other that a ship was on the rocks and that edmond czerny's devils were loose. chapter xviii chance opens a gate for jasper begg, and he passes through the devils were out; never once did i doubt it. the alarm bell ringing loudly in the corridor, the tramp of feet as of an army marching, the cry of man to man proclaimed the fact beyond any cavil. if the clang of arms and the loud word of command had found me unwilling to believe that sailors must die that night on the reef to the southward side, the voice of edmond czerny himself, crying by the very door behind which i stood, would have answered the question for good and all. for czerny i heard, i would have staked my life on it--czerny, whom last i had seen at nice on the morning of his marriage. "to the work, to the work!" i heard him shouting; "let steinvertz come to me. there is a ship on the caskets--a ship, do you hear?" his voice was hoarse and high-pitched, like the voice of a man half mad with delirium. those that answered him spoke in terms not less measured. had a pack of wild hounds been slipped suddenly to its prey, no howls more terrifying could have been heard than those which echoed in that house of mystery. and then, upon the top of the clamour, as though to mark the meaning of it, came silence, a silence so awesome that i could hear myself breathing. "they've left the house, then," i said to miss ruth in a whisper; "that's something to be glad about!" she passed the remark by and, seating herself in a chair, she buried her face in her hands. i could hear her muttering "god help them--god help them!" and i knew that she spoke of those dying out on the dangerous reef. for the time being she seemed to have forgotten my presence; but, after a spell, she looked up suddenly and answered the question. "yes," she said; "my husband will be on the yacht. he has not the courage to be anywhere else. you and i are quite alone now, jasper." my fingers closed tight about my seaman's cap, and i went to the door and unlocked it. strong and clear in my head, and not to be denied, was something which seemed to set my brain on fire. "my god," i said, "what does it mean?" was it chance or madness that i should pass it by? "there would be men below at the furnaces and others standing to guard," i put it to her; "how many in all do you make out that a man might chance to meet if he went below just now, miss ruth?" she became very calm at the words, i thought, and stood up that she might take my words more readily. "jasper!" she exclaimed, "what are you going to do, jasper?" "god knows," said i. "tell me how many men there are in this house." she stood and thought about it. the flushed face told the story of her hopes. neither of us would speak all that came leaping to our tongues. "there would be five, i think, in the engine-house and six for the guards," she said, and i could almost see her counting them; "the lower gate is the second in the corridor. there is a ladder there, and--oh, jasper, what do you mean?" she asked again. "mean?" said i; "why this: that it is time my shipmates shared your hospitality. aye, we'll bring them along," says i, "seth barker and the others. and then," says i, coming quite close to her, "the luck being with us, we'll shut the doors. do you say there are two of them?" she said that there were two; one for the men, a small gate on the reef; the other for czerny--they called it the great gate. "and, oh," she cried, while her very gladness seemed to thrill me through--"oh, if you could, if you could, jasper--!" "whether i can or no the night will prove," said i, more quietly than before. "one thing is sure, miss ruth, that i am going to try. it's worth the trying, indeed it is. do you find your own room and know nothing at all about it. the work below is men's work, and there are men, thank god, to do it." you say that it was a boast; aye, perhaps it was that, yet what a boast! for think of it. here at the very moment when it appeared that our lives were at czerny's mercy, at this very moment when we must look to his cruel hand for succour or sleep in the death-pit of the island, there comes this message from the sea and the devils go out. there is not a sound in the house, and i know that my comrades are waiting for my word. i have three brave men behind me; the peril fires my blood so that, man or devil against me, i care nothing for either. was it a boast for a man to stake all on a throw at such an hour? not so, truly, but just what any english seaman would have done, saying, "all or nothing, the day or the night," as chance should decide for him. now, my hand was upon the key when i told little ruth that it was men's work, and without waiting to hear her wise displeasure i opened the door and stepped out into the silent hall. one man alone kept watch there, and he was in the shadows, so that i could not see his face or tell if he were armed. i knew that this man was the first between me and my liberty, and without a moment's hesitation i crossed the hall; and aware of all the risks i took, understanding that a word of mine might bring the guard down from the sea, i clapped a pistol to the sentry's head and let him know my pleasure. "open that gate, benno regnarte!" said i. he was a short man, burly, with curly hair, and not an unpleasant face. so quick had i come upon him, so strange, perhaps, he thought it that i named him at hazard, that he fell back against the iron and stood there gaping like one who had seen a bogey in the dark. never, i believe, in all this world was a seaman so frightened. he could not speak or utter a sound, or even raise his hand. he just stood there like a shivering fool. "benno regnarte, open that gate!" i repeated, seeing that i had the name all right; "i'll give you half a minute." the threat brought him to his senses. without a word, a sign, a sound, he opened the iron doors and waited for me to go through. "now," said i, "give me those keys and march on. and by the heaven above me, if you open your lips far enough for a fly to go in, i'll shoot you dead where you stand!" he gave me the keys with a hand that trembled so that he nearly dropped them. in spite of my injunction he mumbled something, and i was not unwilling to hear it. "i am the friend of mme. czerny," said he, cringingly; "trust me, signor, for god's sake trust me!" "when you earn the trust," said i, grimly; "now march, and remember!" i let him go through, and then locked the iron doors behind me. miss ruth, at least, must be protected from the rogues below. the lamps in the corridor were still burning, and, by here and there, i thought that i saw figures in the shadows. but no man hailed me, and when i came to the great dormitory which, at first passing, was full of seamen, i found the door of it open and no more than six or seven men still about its tables. if they heard me come up they suspected nothing. i shall always say that the brightest idea of that night was the one which came to me while i stood by the open door and counted the devils that czerny had left to guard his house. for what should i do, upon the oddest impulse, but put my hand round the door very quietly and, closing it without noise, turn the key first in the lock and then in my pocket. "six," said i to the man before me; "and you make seven. how many more in this place now, benno regnarte?" he held up his hands and began to count. "in the engine-room one, two, three," he said; "upon the ladder hereby two; at the great door two more. seven men altogether, signor. your party will be more than that?" i laughed at his notion, and, seeing that the man still shivered with fear and was not to be counted, i went straight ahead to the greater work i had to do. already the alarm was raised in the room behind me, and men were beating with their fists upon the iron door. it was ten to one that their cries must be heard and one of the sentinels called from the sea; but, miracle if you will, or greed of plunder if that is the better term, none came; none answered that heavy knocking. and i--why, i was at the cavern's head by that time, and, opening the trap, i had spoken to my shipmates. "up you come, every one of you--up for your lives!" cried i. "do you, seth barker, lift the doctor, and let peter bligh follow after. there's no time to lose, lads--no time at all." i took them by surprise, be sure of it. that opening trap, the light flashing down upon them, the message when they had begun to despair of any message, the call to action--aye, how they leaped up to answer me with ready words! "to god be the glory!" cries peter bligh, and i can hear him now. "to god be the glory! 'it was the captain's voice,' says i, before ever you spake a word." "and oh, aren't we sick of it--just sick of it!" chimes in dolly venn as he climbs the ladder like a cat and stands willingly at my side. i pressed his hand, and showed him the revolver i carried. "whip it out, lad, whip it out," said i; "we've work to do to-night for ourselves and another. oh, i count on you all, dolly, as i never counted before!" he would have said something to this, i make sure, but the others came through the trap while i spoke, and four more astonished men never stood in a cavern to ask, "what next?" "the ladder to the reef side," said i, putting their surprise by and turning to the italian in whose hands our lives might lie; "can men hold the top of it, or is it best taken by the sea?" he answered me with a dramatic gesture and a face which spoke his warning. "at the rockside it is straight; they shoot you from the top, captain. no man go up there from this place. they fire guns, make noise." "and the report will call the others," said i. "so be it; but we'll close that door, anyway." it was greek to the others, and they gaped at the words. from the room which i had locked loud shouts were to be heard and heavy blows upon the iron panels. that such cries would call men from the sea presently, i knew well. we had but a few minutes in which to act, and they were precious beyond all words. the gate must be shut though a hundred lay concealed in the rooms of mystery about us. on our part we staked all on chance; we threw the glove blindly to fortune. and, remember, i alone knew anything of that house in which we stood; that house, above which the sea ever rolled her crested breakers and lifted her eerie chantry. my shipmates were but astonished strangers, not willing to go back, yet half afraid of that which lay before them. the bright lights in the caverns, the dark doors opening into darkness, and upon these the great corridor, so vast, so gloomy, so mysterious, were to them new pictures in a wonderland the like to which they had never seen before and will never see again. "what place is this, and where is the best parlour?" asks peter bligh, his clumsy head blundering to a question even at such a time. "'tis laid out for a small and early, and crowns to be broken," says he. "have you took it furnished, or are there neighbours, sir? 'tis a queer house entirely." i cut him short and turned to the doctor. "what news of the foot, sir?" i asked him; "how are you feeling now?" he replied light-heartedly enough, wishful, i could see, to make light of it. "like a man who has bought a wooden leg and prefers the old one," said he; asking at the same time, "what's the course, captain, and why do we follow it?" "the course," said i, "is to mme. czerny's boudoir, and a good couch to lie upon. do you two get on as fast as you can and leave us to the parley. it's coming, sure enough, and lame men won't help the argument. we'll need your help by-and-bye, doctor, when the heads are broken." i made the guess at hazard, little knowing how near the truth it was to prove. we were almost at the head of the first stairway by this time, and the uproar in the corridor might have awakened the seven sleepers. impossible, i said, that such a warning should not bring in men from the sea, sentinels who would ask by whose hand the key had been turned; but the danger lay behind us in the shadows where we had not looked for it. aye, the three in the engine-house, how came i to forget them? they were atop of us before the doctor was out of hearing, and a great hulking german, his face smeared with soot and a bar of iron in his hands, caught me by the shoulder and swung me round almost before i had done speaking. "who, in thunder, are you?" asks he. it was a question which had to be answered. now, i had picked up a wrinkle or two about "rough-and-tumbles" in the years i traded to yokohama, and though my heart was in my mouth and it was plain to me that this was the crisis of the night, when a single unlucky stroke or misspoken word might undo all that chance had done for us, i nevertheless kept my wits about me, and letting the man turn me round as he willed i presently caught his arm between both of mine and almost broke the bone of it. upon which he lifted up a cry you might have heard at the sword-fish reef, and writhing down i struck him with all my force and he fell insensible. "seven and one makes eight," said i, and a man might forgive himself for boasting at such a time; for, mark you, but two were left to deal with, and while one was making for little dolly venn, peter bligh had the throat of the other in such a grip that his friends might well have said, "god help him!" "hold him, peter, hold him!" cried i, my blood fired and my tongue set loose; but there was no need to be anxious for mister bligh, i do assure you. "he'll need new teeth to-morrow, and plenty of 'em!" says he, shaking the man as a dog shakes a rat. "aye, go on, captain, the fun's beginning here." i waited to hear no more, but ran at the man who closed with little dolly venn. "dolly's is the need," said i; though in that i was mistaken, as you shall see presently. and i do declare it was a picture to watch that bit of a lad dancing round a hulking dutchman, and hitting the wind out of him as though he had been a cushion. grunt? the lubber grunted like a pig, and every time he stopped for want of breath in come master dolly again with a lightning one which shook him like a thunder-bolt. no "set-to" that i have seen in all my life ever pleased me half as much; and what with crying and laughing by turns, and singing out "bravo, dolly!" and dancing round the pair of them, the sweat ran off me like rain, and i, and not little dolly venn, might have been doing for the dutchman in the shadows of that corridor. in the end, believe me, this foreign bully turned tail and ran like a whipped cur. it was all i could do to keep the lad from his heels. "next time, dolly," cried i, holding him back roughly, "next time, lad; we have better work to do, much better work to do. here's peter needing a box for his goods--and a pretty big one, too. is it over, peter? will he be talking any more?" i asked mister bligh. he answered me by pointing to a figure on the floor beside him, stark and motionless and very still. peter had played his part, indeed; i knew that the gate of czerny's house was open. "all together, lads," said i, leading them on now with a light heart; "all together and out of the shadows, if you please. we've another gate to close, and then--as god's above me, i do believe we have bested edmond czerny this night!" it was something to say, a thought to thrill a man, and yet i would not dwell upon it, remembering all that lay between us and miss ruth's freedom--all that must be done in the doubtful hours before us. "the iron ladder by which the men come in," i asked of the italian, suddenly, "where is that, regnarte?" now, this man had been very frightened during the brawl at the stairs-head; but, seeing the stuff we were made of, and being willing all along to join with us (for i learned afterwards that he nursed a private spite against czerny), he replied to me very readily: "the ladder is the second door, captain; yet why, since no man can go up? i tell you that two hold it, and they have guns. you cannot go, captain! what good the key when men have guns?" "we'll see about that," said i. and cocking my pistol i strode to the door he indicated. it was an iron door, opening inward to a small apartment cut out of the solid rock. for a while i could see nothing when i entered the little cavern--it laid bare; but, becoming used to the dim light presently, i took a few steps forward, and looking up i saw a rocky chimney and an orifice far up and the stars glimmering in the grey-blue sky above me. this, then, was the second gate to czerny's house, i said; the seagate by which his men passed in. here, as yonder where miss ruth's apartment lay, the reef lifted itself above the highest tides; here was the gate we must shut if the night were to be won. and who would dare it with armed men on the threshold, and a ladder for foothold, and the knowledge on our part that one word of the truth would dig a grave for recompense? and yet it had to be dared; a man must go up that night for a woman's sake. well, i took off my boots at the ladder's foot, and thrusting my pistol into my waist-belt i spoke a warning word to peter bligh. "this," said i, taking from regnarte the key i needed, "this opens the iron doors you will meet down yonder. if misfortune happens to me, go straight through and take my place. hold the rooms as long as you can and let your judgment do the rest. belike mister jacob will come back with the ship. i wish to god i could think so!" i added. he nodded his head, and but half understanding what i was about he watched me anxiously when i put my naked foot with wary step on the ladder and began to go up. i saw him for a moment, a comrade's figure in the dim light of the cavern, and then thinking only of my purpose, and of what it would mean to one who waited for me, i clenched my teeth and began my journey. below me were the little cave and the glimmer of a distant lamp, shipmates crying "god speed!" the hidden house, the mystery; above me that dark funnel of the rock and the sky, which seemed to beckon me upward to freedom and the sea. if danger lay there i could not espy it nor detect its presence. not a sound came from the open trap, no figures were to be seen, no spoken voice to be heard. the moaning waves upon the iron reef, the echo of gunshots in the silence of the night, alone spoke of life and being and the open sea without. and i went up like a cat, rung by rung, my hand hot upon the iron, the thought in my head that madness sent me and that i might never see another day. no man appeared at the orifice, i say; the gate might have been unguarded for any sentinel i could espy. nevertheless, i knew that the italian spoke the truth, and that his reckoning was good. edmond czerny was no fool to leave a sea-gate open to all the world. somewhere on the foothold of the rocks men were lurking, i made sure. that they heard nothing of their friends' outcry in the corridor below, that they did not answer it, was a thing i had not, at the first, understood; but it became plain when the chimney i climbed shut out every sound but that of the breaking seas, and gave intervals of silence so great that a man might have heard a ticking watch. no, truly, it was no wonder that they had not gone down nor heard that loud alarm, for they hungered for the wreck; for pillage and plunder, and all the gruesome sights ken's island that night could show them; and this hunger kept them at the water's edge, hounds kennelled when others were free, unwilling idlers on a harvest day. god knows, they paid a price for that when the good time came. now, at the ladder's head, everything was as i had seen it in the mind's picture; and even before i made the top fresh spray would shower upon my face, while the sea sounded as though its waves were breaking almost at my very ears. unchallenged and, for all i could make out, unwatched, i grew bolder step by step, until at last i touched the topmost rung; and, looking over, i saw the white crests of the breakers and the pinnacles of the reef and the distant island under its loom of gold-blue fog. halted there, with one hand swung free and my good pistol ready, i peered intently into the night--a sentinel watching sentinels, a spy upon those that should have spied. and standing so i saw the men, and they saw me; and quickened to the act by the sudden danger, i swung over the first half of the trap which shut the chimney in, and made ready to close the second with all the deftness i could command. there were two men at the sea's edge, and they did not hear me, i believe, until the first door of that trap was down. perchance, even then, they thought that a comrade played a jest upon them, and that this was all in the night's work, for one of them coming up leisurely peered into the hole and put a question to me in the german tongue. this man, my heart beating like a piston, and my nerves all strung up, i struck down with the butt-end of my pistol, and, as god is my witness, i swung over the trap and shot the bolts and locked the great padlock before the other could move hand or foot. for the foreigner fell, without a cry, headlong into the sea which played at his very feet. "shut--shut, by thunder!" cried i to those below, and gladder words a seaman never spoke to comrades waiting for him. "one gate more and the night is ours, lads!" they heard me in astonishment. remember how new this place of mystery was to them; how little i had told them of that which i do. if they followed me like the brave men that they were, set it down to the affection they bore me, and the belief that i led them on no child's errand. so much must have occurred to them as we gained the upper house and shut the iron doors behind us. the way lay to the sea again, the road most dear to the heart of every sailor. let the main gate of czerny's house be closed and all was won, indeed. aye, and you shall stand with me as, mounting a broad stairway beyond miss ruth's own door, i found myself out upon a great plateau of rock, and beheld the silent ocean spread out like a silver carpet before my grateful eyes, and knew that the house was ours--that house the like to which no man has built or will build during the ages. chapter xix which shows that a man who thinks of big things sometimes forgets the little ones i was the first to be out on the rock, but peter bligh was close upon my heels, and, wonderful to tell, the italian almost as quick as any of us. to what gate of the sea the staircase was carrying me i knew no more than the others. the time was gone by when anything in czerny's house could surprise me; and when at the stairs' head we found that which looked for all the world like a great port-hole with a swing door of steel to shut it, i climbed through it without hesitation, and so stood in god's fresh air for the first time for nearly three days. that this was the main gate to the sea i had all along surmised, and now proved surely. no sooner was i through the door than all the world seemed to spread out again before my eyes--the distant island, the shimmering sea, the blue sky shut to us through such long hours. the rock itself, where we gained foothold, lifted itself clear and dry above the breakers at my feet. there were steps leading down to the water's edge, a still pool wherein boats were warped, other crags of the reef defying the tides; these and the silence of the night everywhere; but of men i saw nothing. the bloody fight we had anticipated, blow for blow, and ringing alarm, the struggle for foothold on the rock, the challenge to czerny's men--such things did not befall. we stood unchallenged on the plateau, and we stood alone. i said that it was a miracle, and yet the lord knows it was no miracle at all. let me try and describe this place for you that you may understand our situation more clearly, and how it befell that such a simple circumstance brought about such a strange turn of fortune. we had come up from the heart of the reef, as you know, and the staircase led out to a gate of steel opening in the face of a rocky crag, which stood well above the level even of the storm-seas. a lower plateau (unwashed by the sea) stood below the gate, and other crags jutted out of the sea and showed windows to the western sun. i made a bit of a map of the land and water thereby to keep it in my memory: and such as it is it will enable any one easily to get the position truly. if one places himself at the main gate of this house of wonders and puts czerny's crew by the sword-fish reef, all will be plain to him. the island lay perhaps a mile to the southward; and nearer to us, at a cable's length as i reckoned it, a group of rocky pinnacles in the open sea marked the door we had shut and the ladder by which czerny's men went in to shelter. but the oddest thing of all was this, that the main gate to this house of wonders should be left unguarded at an hour so critical. dark as it was, with only the soft grey light of a summer's night shimmering on sea and land, nevertheless the mere fact that we had passed unchallenged told me that we were alone. for why should two men let three pass up and raise no alarm when alarm might mean so much? could they not have struck us down as we came out, one by one, firing their guns to call comrades from the sea, and bringing a hundred more atop of us to end our chances there and then? of course they could; and yet it was not done. no man hailed us; we had the breaking seas at our feet, the fresh air in our lungs, the spindrift wet upon our faces. and who was the more surprised, i at finding the gate unguarded or my comrades to discover that there was such a gate at all, the lord only knows. like three who stumbled upon a precipice we halted there at the sea's edge, and looked at one another to ask if such great good fortune could, indeed, be ours. i have told you before that the italian was at our heels when we gained the rock, and it was to him now that i addressed my question. "you said there were two at the gate, regnarte. where are they, then, and what keeps them?" he cracked his bony fingers many times, and began to gabble away vociferously in his own language--a tongue i like the sound of, but which no right-minded man should talk. when he came to some calmness and to a sane man's speech, he pointed to the pinnacles of the lesser gate and began to make the truth clear to me. "you come lucky, sir, you come lucky, true! hafmitz gone yonder; he and mate, too; he go to see why other men cry out!" i saw it like a flash. the alarm had been given at the other end of the reef, and the two that should have guarded this, had put out in their boat to see what the matter was. if a man had wished to believe that providence guided him that night, he could not have found a circumstance to help him farther on the road. i make no pretence to be what folks call a religious man, doing my duty without the hymn-books; but i believe, and always shall believe, that there was something more than mere chance on our way in all that venture, and so i set it down here once and for all. the fingers of the white man's god pointed the road for us; and we took it, fair or crooked let it prove to be. "luck! luck's no word for it, my lads," said i. "if a man told such a thing ashore, who'd believe him? and yet it's true--true, as your own eyes tell you." they had not found their tongues yet and none of them uttered a syllable. the wonders they had seen: that house of mystery lying like a palace of the story-books far down below the rolling pacific; the surprise of it all; the picture of lights and rooms and of a woman's face; and now this plateau of rock with breakers at their feet and the island mists for their horizon; and, in the far distance, away upon the sword-fish reef, sights and sounds which quickened every pulse--who shall blame them if they could answer me never a word? they simply halted there and gazed spellbound across the shimmering water. i alone knew how far we stood from the end where safety lay. now, peter bligh was the first to give up his star-gazing; and, shaking himself like a great dog, he turned to me with a word of that common sense which he can speak sometimes. "'tis a miracle, truly, and a couple of doors to it," cried he, like one thinking keenly. "nevertheless, i make bold to say that if they have a key to yonder hatch we are undone entirely, captain." i sat upon a crag of the rock and tried to think of it all. czerny's men would return in an hour, or two at the most, and the truth would be out. they would come--the seamen to the lesser gate, the others to this door of steel by which we sat--and, finding that knocking did not open, they would take such measures as they thought fit to blast the doors. a gun well fired might do as much if gun could be trained upon the reef. once let them inside and it needed no clever tongue to say how it would fare with us or with those we sought to protect. no man, i said, would live to tell that story, or to carry the history of edmond czerny's life to a distant city. all that lay between us and life was this door of steel shutting like a port-hole in the solid rock. and could we hold it against, it might be one, it might be three hundred men? that was a question the night must answer. "regnarte," i said, upon an impulse, "you have guns in this house?" he held up his fingers and opened them many times to express a great number. "one, two, three hundred guns," said he. "excellency has them all; but here one gun much bigger than that. you seamen, you shall know how to fire him, captain. excellency say that no man take the gate while that gun there. ah! the leg on the other boot now!" now he cracked his fingers all the time he said this, and shook his keys and danced about the plateau like a madman. for a while i could make neither head nor tail of what he meant; but presently he turned as though he would go down to the cabins again, and, standing upon the very threshold of the staircase, he showed me what i had never seen or should have looked for in twenty years--the barrel of a quick-firing gun and the steel turret which defended it. "'tis a pom-pom, or i'm a heathen nigger!" cries peter bligh, half mad at the sight of it. "a pom-pom, and a shield about it. the glory to saint patrick that shows me the wonder!" and dolly venn, catching hold of my hand in like excitement, he says: "oh, mr. begg, oh, what luck, what luck at last!" i crossed the plateau and saw the thing with my own eyes. it was a modern krupp quick-firing gun, well kept, well fitted, well placed behind a shield of steel which might defend those who worked it against a hundred. those who set it upon the rock so set it that not only the near sea but the second gate could be covered by its fire. it would sweep the water with a hail of lead, and leave unseen those that did the work. and the irony of it was chiefly this, that edmond czerny, seeking to defend the door of his house against all the world, now shut it upon himself. "yes," said i, at last, and i spoke almost like a man drunk with excitement; "give me shell for that, and we'll hold the gate against five hundred!" the hope of it set every nerve in my body twitching; sweat, i say, began to roll down my face like rain. "you have a magazine in this place," i continued, turning upon the italian in a way that surprised him; "you have arms in this house and shot for that gun. where are they, man, where are they?" he stood stock-still with fright, and stammered out a broken reply. "excellency has the key, captain--i show you! don't be angry, captain!" he turned to enter the house again, and i followed him, as eager a man as ever hunted for that which might take a fellow-creature's life. "do you, peter and dolly, keep a watch here," said i, indicating the place, "while i go below with this man. we must hold the gate, lads, hold it with our lives! if the two yonder come back, be sure you close their mouths. you understand, peter--close their mouths!" "aye, i understand, captain!" said he, very quietly. "they'll not sing hymns when i've done with them!" i followed the italian down the stairs, and we made for the great hall again. many lights were burning there, and the figures of women passed in and out of the splendid rooms. at the far corner, opposite miss ruth's own apartment, the italian came to a halt and began to gabble again. "excellency live here, sir," said he; "the gun-room--you go right through to him; but excellency, he have the key. me only doorman. i speak true, sir!" i opened the door of the room he indicated, and feeling upon the wall switched on a lamp. it was the palace of a place, with great book-racks all round it, and arm-chairs as long as beds in every corner, and instruments and tables and pretty ornaments enough to furnish a mansion; but for none of these things had i eyes that night. yonder, at the end of the room, a curtain opened above a door of iron; and through that door i saw at a glance the way to the gun-room lay. ah, how my head tried to grapple with the trouble! the keys--where lay the keys? what chance or miracle would show me those? was the key on czerny's person or here in one of the drawers about? how much would i have paid to have been told that truly! but how to open it! now the italian watched me with curious eyes as i went up to the door and drew the curtain back from it. a quick glance round the room did not show me what common sense was seeking--an iron safe in which czerny's keys might lie. that he would keep the key of the armoury in the room, unless it were on his person, i had no doubt; and argument began to tell me that, after all, a safe might not be necessary. if alarm came it would come from the sea; or from the lower doors, which were locked against his devil's crew. i began to say that the keys would be in a drawer or bureau, and i was going to ransack every piece of furniture, when--and this seemed beyond all reason--i saw something shining bright upon a little table in the corner, and crossing the room i picked up the very thing for which a man might have offered the half of his fortune. "heaven above!" said i, "if this is it--if this is it----" and why should it not have been? news of the wreck had come to the house like a sudden alarm leaping up in the night; the keys, which i held with greedy fingers, might they not have been in czerny's hands when the bell clanged loudly through the startled corridors? i saw him, forgetful in his very greed, serving out rifles to his willing men, running up at hazard to be sure of the truth, leaving behind him that which might open his house to the world forever. and in my hand the fruit of his alarm was lying. ah, heaven! it was the truth, and the door opened at my touch, and arms for a hundred men glittered in the dim light about me. chapter xx the first attack is made by czerny's men we carried the shot to the stairs' head, each man working as though his own life were the price of willing labour. if miss ruth had tidings of the great good fortune the night had sent to us, she would neither stay our hands with questions nor wait for idle answers. for a moment i saw her, a figure to haunt a man, looking out from the door of her own room; but a long hour passed before i changed a word with her or knew if that which we had done would win her consent. now, indeed, was ruth bellenden at the parting of the ways, and of all in czerny's house her lot must have been the hardest to bear. she had blotted the page of her old life that night and it never would be rewritten. none the less, a woman's courage could show me a bright face and all that girlish gentleness which was her truest charm. never once would she speak of her own trouble, but always lightly of ours; so that we three--little ruth, dr. gray, and jasper begg--might have been friends met upon any common adventure, and not at the crisis of that desperate endeavour. and so i think it will befall in all the perilous days, that what is written in the story-books about loud exclamations and pale faces and all the rest of it is the property of the story-teller, and that in plain truth you find none of these things, but just silent actors and simple talk, and no more noise of the difficulty than the common day will bring. this, at least, is my memory of that never-to-be-forgotten night. to-morrow might give us life or death--a grave beneath the seas or mastership of that house of mystery; though of this no word passed between us, but briefly we gave each other the news and asked it in return. "captain," says the doctor, he being the first to speak, "they tell me you've struck a gun-store. is it true or false?" i told him that it was true, and making light of it--for i did not wish miss ruth to be upset before there was good reason--i named another thing. "yes," said i, "we shall defend ourselves if there's need, and give a good account, i hope. for the rest, we'll take it as we find it. i am trusting that mister czerny will listen to common sense and not risk bloodshed. if he does, the blame be on his own head, for i shall do my best to make it easy for him." "i know you will--i know you will, jasper," says little ruth, closing her hand upon mine, and not caring much what the doctor thought of it, i'll be bound; "we can do no more than our duty, each of us. mine is very hard, but i shall not turn from it--never, while i know that duty says, 'go on!'" "that i'm sure you won't, miss ruth," was my answer to her; "if ever duty justified man or woman it justifies you and i this night. let us begin with that and all the rest is easy. what we are doing is done as much for the sake of our fellow-men as for ourselves. we work for a good end--to let the world know what ken's island harbours and to keep our fellow-men from such a place. accomplish that much, and right and humanity owe us something, though it's not for me to speak of it, nor is this the time. my business is to hold this house against the devils who are pillaging the ship yonder. the sea-gate i can take care of, miss ruth. it's what's below in the pit that i fear." she listened with a curiosity which drank in every word and yet was not satiated. nevertheless, i believe but half of my story was plain to her. and who blames her for that? was not it enough for such a bit of a girl to say, "my friends are with me. i trust them. they will win my liberty." the arguments were for the men--for mister gray and me, who sought a road in the darkness, but could not find one. "two doors to this house, captain," says the doctor, after a little while, "and one of them shut. so much i understand. are you sure that the cavern below is empty, or do you still count men in it?" "'tis just neither way," said i, "and that's the worst of it, doctor. the sea's to be held while the shell lasts and perhaps afterwards; but if there are men down below, why, then it's another matter. i'm staking all on a throw. what more can i do?" he leaned back upon the sofa and appeared to think of it. presently he said: "captain, a man doesn't shoot with his foot, does he?" and then, not waiting for me to answer, he goes on: "why, no; he shoots with his hand. just you plant me in the passage and give me a gun. i'll keep the door for you--by jove, i will!" now, i saw that this promise frightened miss ruth more than she would say, for it was the first time that it occurred to her that men might come out of the pit. but she was just the one to turn it with a laugh, and crying, "what folly! what folly!" she called out at the same time for little rosamunda, and began to think of that which i had clean forgotten. "jasper," says she, "you will never make a general--never, never! why, where's your commissariat? would you starve your crew and think nothing of it? oh, we shall feed mister bligh, and then it will be easy," says she, prettily. i made no objection to this, for it was evident that she wished to conceal her fears from us; but i knew that the doctor was wise, and before i left him there was a rifle at his side and twenty rounds to go with it. [illustration: "if there is any sound at the door, fire that gun."] "if there's any sound at the door of the corridor--as much as a scratch," said i, "fire that gun. i shall be with you before the smoke's lifted, and you will need me, doctor--indeed, you will!" i left him upon this and went up, more anxious than i would have confessed, to my shipmates at the gate. i found them standing together in the moonlight, which shone clear and golden upon a gentle sea, and gave points of fire to the rocky headlands of ken's island. so still it was, such a scene of wonder and of beauty, that but for the words which greeted me, and the dark figures peering across the water, and something very terrible on the distant reef, i might have believed myself keeping a lonely watch in the glory of a summer's night. that delusion the east denied. i knew the truth even before mister bligh named it. "they've fired the ship, captain--fired the ship!" says he, with just anger. "aye, heaven do to them as they've done to those poor creatures! did man ever hear of such a villainy--to fire a good ship in her misfortune? it would be a sin against an honest rope to hang such a crew as that!" i stepped forward to the water's edge that i might see the thing more clearly. looming up upon that fair horizon were wreathing clouds of smoke and crimson flames, and in the heart of it all the outline of the ship these fiends had doomed. no picture ever painted could present that woful scene or describe its magnificence as we saw it from the watch-tower of the reef. it was, indeed, as though the very heavens were on fire, while the sea all about the burning hull shone like a pool of molten gold in which strange shapes moved and the shadows of living things were to be seen. now licking the quivering masts, now blown aside in tongue-shaped jets, the lambent flame spurted from every crack and crevice, leaped up from every port-hole of that splendid steamer. i saw that her minutes were numbered, and i said that before the dawn broke she would sink, a mass of embers, into the hissing breakers. "good lord, mister bligh!" cried i, the seaman's habit coming to me at the dreadful spectacle, "was ever such a thing heard of? and the poor people aboard--what of them now? what haven may they look for?" "they've put the men ashore, sir," said dolly venn, hardly able to speak for his anxiety. "i saw two boat-loads go across to the bay while mister bligh was piling the ammunition. they've sent them to die on the island. and we so helpless that we must just look on like schoolgirls. oh! i'd give all i've got to be over yonder with a hundred bluejackets at my elbow. think of it, sir! just a hundred, and cutlasses in their hands." "aye," said i, "and a tree for every rogue that rows a boat yonder. well, my lad, thinking's no good this night, nor can you get the bluejackets by whistling. we haven't all served our time in a queen's ship, dolly, and we're just plain seamen; but we'll try and speak a word to edmond czerny by-and-bye, or i'll never speak another. now, help me with your young eyes, will you, and tell me if that's a ship's gig yonder, or if it isn't----" he said that it was a ship's gig, and he pointed out that which i had not seen before--a steam yacht lying off to the east of us and waiting for some of her crew to go aboard. edmond czerny would be on deck there, i thought, watching the hounds he had sent to the work; and if that spectacle of death and destruction did not gratify him, then nothing would in all the world. and surely such a sight even he had not beheld in all his years. that shimmering molten sea, the island catching the reflected lights and making its own pictures of them; the distant forests, whose trees lifted fiery branches and leaves of flame; the mist-clouds raining blood and gold, the burning steamer, the great arena of fire-flecked sea and the small-boats swimming upon it--what more of delight or devilry could ken's island give this vulture of the deep? so much the night would show us as providence willed and good hearts might determine. now, i have told you that little dolly venn had served in the naval reserve and knew more of gunnery than the most of us. to this, i bear witness, we owed much that night. "you've got a skipper's part, dolly, lad," said i, "and yon gig begins the trouble, if my eyes don't deceive me. why, she's coming in here, lad, straight to this very door, just as fast as oars can bring her. and there's more to follow--a fleet of them, as any lubber could tell you." "'tis like a fête and gala on the old stinking liffey," says peter bligh, peering with me across the busy sea. "a dozen boats, and every one of them full. i'd give something to see mister jacob to-night; indeed, and i would, captain. we are over few for such an 'out and home' as this." it was rare to see peter bligh serious, but he had the right to be that night, and i was the last to blame him. consider our situation and ask what others would have felt, placed as we were--four willing men upon a bit of craggy rock rising sheer out of a thousand fathom sea, and commanded to hold the gate for our lives and for another life more precious against all the riff-raff that ken's island could send against us. out on the shimmering sea i counted twelve boats with my own eyes, and knew that every one of them was full of cut-throats. in the half of an hour or sooner that devil's crew would knock at our gate and demand to come in. whatever way we answered them, however clever we might be, was it reason to suppose that we could hold the rock against such odds, hold it until help came when help was so distant? i say that it was not. by all the chances, by every right reason, we should have been cut down where we stood, and our bodies swimming in the sea before the sun shone again on ken's island and its mysteries. and if this truth was present in my mind, how should it be absent from the minds of the others? brave faces they showed me, bright words they spoke; but i knew what these concealed. we stood together for a woman's sake; we knew what the price might be and made no complaint of it. "we are over few, peter," said i, "but over few is better than many when the heart is right. just you drink up that grog and put yourself where there is not so much of your precious body in the moonlight. it will be dolly's place at the gun, and mine to help him. there is this in my mind, peter, that we've no right to shoot fellow-creatures unless they call upon us so to do. when the gig comes up i'll give them a fair challenge before the volley's fired. after that it's up and at them, for miss ruth's sake. you will not forget, peter, that if we can hold this place until help comes, belike we'll carry miss ruth to europe and shut down this devil's den forever. if that's not work good enough to put heart into a man, i don't know what is. aye, my lads," said i to them all, "tell yourselves that you are here and acting for the sake of one who did you many a kindness in the old time; and mind you shoot straight," says i, "and don't go wasting honest lead when there's carrion waiting for it." they answered "aye, aye!" and dolly, leaping up to the gun, began to give his orders just for all the world as though he skippered the ship and i was but a passenger. "we'll put regnarte in front," says he, "so that we can keep an eye on him. let peter hail them from where he's standing now; the rock covers him, captain, and the shield will take care of you and me. and oh?" says he, "i do wish it would begin--for my fingers are just itching!" "let them itch, lad, let them itch," was my answer; "here's the gig by the point, and they won't trouble you with that complaint long. do you, peter, give them a hail when i cry, 'now!' if they stop, well and good; if they come on--why, you won't be asking them to walk right in!" says i. he took my meaning and set to work like the brave man that he was. very deliberately and carefully i saw him slip out of his coat and fold it up neatly at his feet. he had a rifle in his hand and a pile of ammunition on the floor, and now he opened his remington and began to fill it. for my part, i stood by the gun's shield, and from that place, covered by a ring of steel, i looked out across the awaking sea. impatience, doubt, hope, fear--these i forgot in the minutes which passed while the gig crept slowly across that silver pool. the silence was so great that a man might almost breathe it. slow, to be sure, she was; and every man who has waited at a post of danger knows what it means to see a strange sail creeping up to you foot by foot, and to be asking yourself a dozen times over whether she be friend or enemy, a welcome consort or a rogue disguised. but there is an end to all things, even to the minutes of such suspense; and i bear witness that i never heard sweeter music than the ringing hail which mister bligh sent across the still sea to the eight men in the gig, and to any other his message might concern. "ahoy!" cries he, "and what may you be wanting, my hearties, and what flag do you sail under?" now, if ever a hail out of the night surprised eight men, this was the occasion and this the scene of it. they had come back from the pillaged ship believing that the sea-gate of the house stood open to them and that friends held it in all security. and here upon the threshold a strange voice hails them; they are asked a question which turns every ear towards the rock, sends every man's hand to the gun beside him. instantly, their own vile deeds accusing them, they cry, "discovery!" they tell each other, i make sure, that czerny's house is in the possession of strangers. they are stark mad with curiosity, and unable for a spell to say a word to us. they would not speak a word, i say; their oars were still, their boat drifted lazily to the drowsy tide. if they peered with all their eyes a the rock from which the voice came, but little consolation had they of the spectacle. the shadows spoke no truth, the gate hid the unknown; they could read no message there. neither willing to go back nor to advance, they sat gaping in the boat. how could they know what anxious ears and itching hands waited for their reply? a voice at last, crying harshly across the ripple of the water, broke the spell and set every tongue free again. aye, it was good to hear them speak. "bob williams," cries the voice. "what ho! my ancient! i guess that's you, bob williams." "and i guess it isn't," roars peter bligh, half mad, like a true irishman, at the thought of a fight. "it isn't bob williams, and be derned to you! are you going ashore to ken's island or will you swim awhile? it's good water for bathing," says he, "and no charge for the machine. aye," says he, "by the look of you cold water would not hurt your skins." well, they had nothing to say to this; but we could hear them parleying among themselves. and presently; another longboat pulling up to them, the two together drifted in the open and then, without a word, began to row away to the lesser reef, whose gate i had shut not an hour ago. this i saw with very great alarm; for it came to me in an instant that if they could force the trap--and there were enough of them to do that, seeing that they had rifles in their hands--the whole of the lower rooms would swarm with their fellows presently, and i did not doubt that the house would be taken. "dolly," cried i, appealing to the lad, when, the lord knows, my own head should have been the one to lead, "dolly," cried i, "they'll force the gate--and what then, dolly----?" he had leapt up when the ship moved off, and now, drawing me back, with nervous fingers he began to show me what a man-of-war had taught him. "no, sir, no," says he, wildly, "no, it's not that. help me and i'll tell you--and oh, mister begg, don't you see that this gun was put here to cover that very place?" says he. well, i had seen it, though in the stress of recent events it had slipped my memory; and yet it would have been as plain as the nose on the face to any gunner, even to the youngest. for if czerny must hold his house against the world, how should he hold it with one door of two open to the sea? that devilish gun, swung there on a peak of the rock, could sweep the waters, turn where you might. it was going to sweep the lesser gate to-night. "round with her and quick about it," cries dolly venn, and never a gladder cry have i heard him utter. "they're coming ashore, captain. they are on the rock already." i stood up to make sure of it, and saw four men leap from the gig to the rock which it was life or death for us to hold. and to dolly i said: "let go, lad; let go, in heaven's name!" he stood to the gun; and clear above all other sounds of the night the sharp reports rang out. that peaceful, sleeping sea awoke to an hour the like to which ken's island will never know again. we cast the glove to edmond czerny and powder spake our message. henceforth it was his day or ours, life or death, the gallows or the sea. there were four men upon the rock when the gun began to spurt its vomit of shot across the sea, and two of them fell almost with the first report. i saw a third dragging himself across the crags and pressing a hand madly against every stone as though to quench some burning flame; a fourth crouched down and began to cry to his fellows in the boats for mercy's sake to put in for him; but before they could lift a hand or ship an oar the fire was among them; and skimming the waves for a moment, then carrying beyond them, it caught them as a hail of burning steel at last and shut their lips forever. aye, how shall i tell you of it truly--the worming, tortured men, the gaping wounds they showed, the madness which sent them headlong into the sea, the sagging boat dipping beneath them, the despair, the terror, when death came like a whirlwind? these things i shut from my eyes; i would not see them. the sharp reports, the words of agony, the oaths, the ferocious threats--they came and went as a storm upon the wind. and afterwards when silence fell, and i beheld the silver sea, the island wreathed in mists, ships' boats in the distance like dots upon the water, the ebbing flames where the steamer burned, the woods wherein honest seamen suffered in the death-trance from which but few would waken, i turned to my comrades and, hand linked in hand, i said, "well done!" chapter xxi which brings in the day and what befell therein it was just after dawn that miss ruth came up from her room below and found me at my lonely post on the plateau of the watch-tower rock. dolly venn was fast asleep by that time, and peter bligh and the carpenter no less willing for a spell of rest. i had sent them to their beds when it was plain to me that, whatever might come after, the night had nothing more in store for us; and though heavy with sleep myself i put it by for duty's sake. now, i was watching all alone, my rifle between my knees and my eyes upon the breaking skies, when i heard a quick step behind me, and, turning round, i saw miss ruth herself, and felt her gentle hand upon my shoulder. "i couldn't sleep, jasper," said she, a little sadly i thought. "you are not angry with me for being here, jasper?" it blew cold with the dawn, and i was glad to see that she had wrapped her head in a warm white woollen shawl--for these little things stick in a man's memory--and that her dress was such as a woman might wear in that bleak place. she had dark rings about her eyes--which i have always said could look at you as the eyes of no other woman in all the world; and i began to think how odd it was that we two, whom fortune had cast out to this lonely rock together, should have said so little to each other, spoken such rare words since the ship put me ashore at the gate of her island home. "miss ruth," said i, "it's small wonder what you tell me. this night is never to be forgotten by you and i, surely. sometimes, even now, i think that i am dreaming it all. why, look at it. not two months ago i was in london hiring a ship from philips, westbury, and co. you, i believed, were away in the pacific, where all things beautiful should be. i saw you, miss ruth, in an island home, happy and contented, as it was the wish of us all that you should be. there were never lighter hearts on a quarterdeck than those which set out to do your bidding. 'it's miss ruth's fancy,' we told ourselves, 'that her friends should bring a message from the west, and be ready to serve her if she has the mind to employ them.' what other need could we think of? be sure no whisper of this devil's house or of yonder island where honest men will die to-day was heard by any man among us. we came to do your bidding as you had asked us. it was for you to say 'go' or 'stay.' we never thought what the truth would be--even now it seems to me a horrid nightmare which a man remembers when he is waking." she drew a little closer to me, and stood gazing wistfully across the westward seas, beyond which lay home and liberty. perchance her thoughts were away to the pretty town of nice, where she had given her love to the man who had betrayed her, and had dreamed, as young girls will, of all that marriage and afterwards might mean to her. "if it were only that, jasper," she said, slowly, "just a dream and nothing more! but we know that it is not. ah, think, if these things mean so much to you, what they have meant to me. i came away from europe believing that heaven would open at my feet. i said that a good man loved me, and i gave myself heart and soul to him. just a silly little girl i was, who never asked questions, and trusted--yes, trusted all who said they loved her. and then the truth, and a weary woman to hear it! from little things which i would not see, it came speaking to me in greater things which i dare not pass by, until i knew--knew the best and the worst of it! and all my castles came tumbling down, and the picture was shut out, and i thought it was forever. the message i spoke to the sea would never be answered, or would be answered when i no longer lived to hear it spoken. do you blame a woman's weakness? was i wrong to believe that you would forget the promise?" "i never forgot it, miss ruth," was my answer, "never for a moment. 'may-be,' said i to peter bligh, 'she'll laugh when i go ashore; may-be--but it is a thousand to one against that--she'll have need of me.' when i saw ken's island looming off my port-bow, why i said, 'it's just such a picture of a place as a rich man would pitch upon for an island home. it's a garden land,' said i, 'a sunny haven in this good pacific sea.' judge how far i was from the truth, miss ruth, how little i knew of this prison-house that, god helping me, shall stand open to the world before many days have come and gone." she was silent for a spell, for her eyes were searching the distant island, and she seemed to be scanning its fog-bound heights and misty valleys as though to read that secret of the night of which i hoped no man had told her. "the ship that came ashore last night, jasper?" she asked, of a sudden. "what have they done to the ship?" i put my hand upon her arm and led her forward to the sea's edge, whence we could espy both the sword-fish reef and the ashes of her bungalow at the island's heart. the day had broken by this time, quick and beautiful as ever in the pacific ocean. sunny waves rolled up to our very feet. there were glittering caps of rock gleaming above the island of death. czerny's yacht lay, the picture of a ship, eastward in the offing. the longboats, twelve of them, and each loaded with its devil's crew, drifted round and round the master's ship; but never a man that went aboard from them. "the ship," said i, "is where many a good ship has gone before: a thousand fathoms down by yonder cruel reef. as for those that sailed her, they live or die on ken's island, mistress. last night in my watch i heard them crying like wild beasts that hunger drives. those who do not sleep to-day herd together on yonder beach. i counted nine of them not half an hour since." she tried to see with me, looking across the water; and presently she said: "there are men there and women, too--oh, jasper, think of it, women!" "ah!" said i, "i have been thinking of it for an hour or more, ever since i first made a signal to them. so much comes of being a seaman, who can speak to folks when others are dumb. if they read my message aright, they'll not stay on ken's island to sleep, be sure of it; but i doubt that they'll dare it, miss ruth. poor souls; their need is sore, indeed!" "and our own, jasper," says she, "is our own less? you are brave men, and you have all a woman's trust and gratitude; but, jasper, when my husband comes, what will you say to him? they are a hundred and we are but five, shut up in this prison of the sea! we may live here forever and no help come to us. we may even die here, jasper. there are things i will not either name or think of. but, oh, jasper," says she, "if we could save those poor people!" it was always thus with her--nine thoughts for others and not the half of one for herself. what she meant by the things she would not name or speak of, i could hardly guess; but it was in my head that she meant to indicate the corridors below and that unknown danger which iron doors shut down. i had been a clearer-headed man that morning if i could have put away from me my doubt of what the depths were hiding from us. but i hid it from her always. a truce of self-deception shut out the question as one we neither cared to hear nor answer. "miss ruth," said i, speaking very slowly, "those people have a boat, for you can see it on yon sands. let them find the courage to float it, and it is even possible that dolly venn and i can do the rest. we should be thirteen men then, and glad of the number. i won't hide it from you that we are a pitiful handful to face such a horde as lingers yonder. why, think of it. your husband keeps them off the yacht, that's clear to a child's eye. what harbour, then, is open to them? the island--yes, there's that! they can go and sleep the death-sleep on the island, as many an honest man before them. but they will have something to say to czerny first if i know anything of their quality! our plight is bad enough; but i wouldn't be in your husband's shoes to-day for all the money in london city. we may pull through--there would be rasher promises than that; but edmond czerny will never see a white man's town again--no, not if he lives a hundred years!" "it would be justice, god's justice," said she, very slowly; "there is that in the world always, jasper. whatever may be in store for me, i should like to think that i had done my duty as you are doing yours." "we won't talk of that;" said i; "the day is dark, but the sunshine follows after. some day, in some home across the sea, we'll tell each other how we held ken's island against a hundred. it may be that, dear friend; god knows, it may be that!" * * * it was five o'clock in the morning by my watch when i signalled for the second time to the people on the beach, and half-past five when first they answered me. until that time i had not wished to awake dolly venn or mister bligh; but now when it began to come to me that i might, indeed, save these poor driven folks and add to the garrison which held the house, sleep was banished from my eyes and i had the strength and heart of ten. no longer could i doubt that my signals were seen and read by some sailor on that distant shore. driven out, as they must have been, by the awful fogs which loomed over ken's island, gasping for their lives at the water's edge, who shall blame their hesitation or exclaim upon that delay? over the sea they beheld a white flag waving. was it the flag which friend or foe had raised? there, from that craggy rock, help was offered them. could they believe such good fortune, those who seemed to have but minutes to live? well, dolly venn came up to me, and peter bligh, half awake from sleep; and all standing together (seth barker keeping watch below) i told them how we stood and pointed out that which might follow after. "there'll be no attack from czerny's men with the light," said i; "for so much is plain reason. if there's murder done out yonder, look for it on czerny's yacht when his friends would go aboard. why, see, lads, there are a hundred and twenty men, at the lowest reckoning, drifting yonder in open boats. who's to feed them, who's to house them? they can go ashore on ken's island and dance to the sleep-music; but they are not the sort to do that, from what we've seen of them! no, they'll have it out with edmond czerny; they'll want to know the reason why! and let the wind blow more than a capful," said i, "and by the lord above me not a man among them will see to-morrow's sun! does that put heart into you, peter, or does it not? there are folks to save over there, peter bligh," says i, "and we'll save them yet!" his reply was an earnest "god grant it!" and from that moment the sleep left his eyes, and standing by my side, as he had stood many a day on the bridge of the southern cross, he began to read the signals and to interpret them aloud as the old-time duty prompted him. "eight men and a woman, and one long-boat," says he; "sickness among them and no arms. 'tis to know if they shall put off now or wait for the dark. you'll be answering that, captain." "let them come, let them come," said i; "how's the dark to help them? will they live a day in the fogs we know of? and what sort of a port is ken's island in the sleep-time for any christian man? if czerny murders them on the high seas, so much the more against him when his day comes. let them come, peter, and the lord help them, poor wretches!" i was using my arms with every word, and trying to make my meaning clear to the poor folks on the beach. so far they had been content to answer me with questions; but now, all at once, they ceased to signal, and a black object riding above the surf told me that they had risked all and were afloat, be the danger what it might. at the same moment a sharp cry from dolly venn turned my eyes to czerny's yacht; and i saw his devils rowing their boats for the open water of the bay, and i knew that murder was in their minds, and that the hour had come when every veil was to be cast aside and their purpose declared against all humanity. "clear the gun and stand by," was my order to the others; "we'll give them something to take home with them, and it sha'n't be pippins! can you range them, dolly, or must you wait? there's no time to lose, my lad, if honest lives are to be saved this day." he went to work without a word, charging his magazine and training the gun eastwards towards the advancing boats. if he did not fire at once, it was because he doubted his range; and here was his difficulty, that by sweeping round to the east and coming at the refugees upon a new course, czerny's lot might yet cheat us and do the infernal work they intended. indeed, the poor people in the longboat were just racing for their lives; and whether we could help them or whether they must perish time alone would show. yard by yard, painfully, laboriously, they pushed towards the rock; yard by yard the devil's crew were bearing down upon them. and still dolly kept his shot; the gun had nothing to say to them. no crueller sight you could plan or imagine. it was as though we were permitting poor driven people to be slaughtered before our very eyes. "fire, dolly, lad!" cried i, at last--"fire, for pity's sake! will you see them die before our very eyes?" his fingers trembled upon the gun. he had all the heart to do it; but still he would not fire. "i can't," says he, half mad at his confession; "the gun won't do it--it's cruel, captain--cruel to see it--they're half a mile out of range. and the others dropping their oars. look at that. a man's down, and another is trying to take his place----" it was true as i live. from some cause or other, i could only surmise, the longboat lay drifting with the tide and one of czerny's boats, far ahead of its fellows, was almost atop of her. "they're done!" cries peter bligh, with an oath, "done entirely. god rest their souls. they'll never make the rock----" we believed it surely. the refugees were done; the pirates had unsheathed their knives for the butcher's work. i saw no human help could save them; and saying it a voice from the open door behind me gave the lie to peter bligh, and named a miracle. "'tis the others that need your prayers, mister bligh--czerny's lot are sinking sure----" i looked round and found seth barker at my elbow. his orders had been to watch the gate of the corridor below. i asked him what brought him there, and he told me something which sent my heart into my mouth. "there's knocking down below and strange voices, sir. no danger, says mister gray, but a fact you should know of. belike they'll pass on, sir, and please god they'll leave the engine for their own sakes." "does mister gray say that?" asked i. "does he fear for the engine?" "if it stops, we're all dead men for want of breath, the doctor says." "then it sha'n't stop," said i, "for here's a man that will open the trap if two or twenty stand below." he had quickened my pulse with his tale, for the truth of it i could not deny; and it seemed to me that danger began to close in upon us, turn where we might, and that the outcome must be the worst, the very worst a man could picture. if i had any satisfaction, any consolation of that wearing hour, it was the sight i beheld out there upon the hither sea, where czerny's boat drifted upon its prey--yet so drifted that a child might have said, "she's done with; she's sinking." "flushed, by all that's wonderful," cries peter bligh, with a tremendous oath; "aye, down to oblivion, and an honest man's curse go with you. the rogue's done, my lads; she's done for, certain." we stood close together and watched the scene with burning eyes. dolly venn chattered away about a shot that must have struck the boat last night and burst her seams. i cared nothing for the reasons, but took the facts as the sea showed them to me. be the cause what it might, those who would have dealt out death to the refugees were going down to eternity now, their arms in their hands, their mad desire still to be read in every gesture. when the truth came swift upon them, when the seas began to break right in across their beam, then, i say, they leaped up mad with fear, and then only forgot their prey. for think what that must have meant to them, the very boat sinking beneath them; their comrades far away; the waves lapping their feet; the sure knowledge that they must die, every man of them within hail of those very woods wherein so many had perished for their pleasure. aye, it came upon them swiftly enough, and the good boat, making a brave effort to battle with the swell, went down headlong anon, and the cries of twelve drowning men echoed even in the distant island's hills. that which had been a placid sea with two ships' boats was still a placid sea though but one boat swam there. i beheld horrible faces looking upward through the blinding spindrift; i saw arms thrust out above the foam-flecked waters; i witnessed all that fearful struggle for life and air and the sun's bright light; and then, aye, then the scene changed awfully, and silence came upon all, and the sun was still shining, and the untroubled deep lapped gently at our feet. * * * the twelve had perished; but the nine were saved. stand awe-struck as we might, seeing the hand of god in this deliverance, the truth of it remained to put new heart into us and to hide that scene from our eyes. there, pursued no longer, was the island boat. glad voices hailed us, wan figures stood up to clasp our hands; we lifted a woman to the rocks; we ran hither, thither, for help and comfort for them. but nine in all, they were our human salvage, our prize, our treasure of honest lives. and we had snatched them from the brigand crew, and henceforth they would stand with us, shoulder to shoulder, until the day were won or lost and ken's island gave up its mysteries, or gathered us for that last great sleep-time from which there is no waking. chapter xxii the beginning of the sixty hours it was near about midday on a saturday that we saved the poor folks from the island, and not long after midnight on the monday that our troubles came to a head. i like to call these the "sixty hours"; and as what i have to write of them is written, as it were, from watch to watch, so swiftly did things happen, i will try to make a diary of it that you may follow me more closely. _saturday, may th. at midday._ there are nine people rescued from the ship, and one of these a girl, isabel, the daughter of captain nepeen, of the american navy. her father is with her, a tall, stately man, very quiet and orderly, and quite ready to take a man's duty in the house. of the others, the most part are american seamen, for this was an ocean-going steamer, silver bell, trading from american ports to yokohama. all are very astonished at the things they have seen and heard both in this house and upon ken's island; but they are too ill to take much part in them, and the young lady lies still in a dead trance. doctor gray says that he will save her; but another man, knowing less, might think that she was dead. _the same day. at four o'clock._ they waked me from sleep at this hour to tell me that the men in the caverns below were beating upon the iron doors of the corridor, and appeared likely to force their way up to our part of the house. captain nepeen brought the news himself, and had a long talk with me. i found him a cultured man, and one who got a grip of things sooner than i had expected. "mr. begg," he said, "it is plain that we have fallen into the hands of a very great scoundrel. i cannot imagine what kind of intellect has made use of this extraordinary place, but i can very plainly divine the purpose. it is for you and me to answer to civilization and justice. we must begin at once, captain begg, without any loss of time," says he. i answered him a little sharply, perhaps, being not over-pleased that he should make so light of my own part in the matter. "sir," said i, "what a seaman can do i have done already, or you would not be here to speak of it. let that go by. the news that you bring won't wait for civilities. it must be plain to you that if we are to stand a siege in this house, we must hold every gate of it. there are men in the galleries below; heaven knows how many of them. i would name that first and let the rest come after." he was put about at this, and made haste to express a gratitude i had not looked for. his naval training prompted him to habits of authority. i could see that he was itching to be up and acting, and i knew that he needn't wait long for that. "indeed," says he, warmly, "we owe our lives to you, as many a good seaman will owe it in the days to come. i should have spoken of that first. the wonders of this place drive other thoughts from a man's head. we were half dead when we saw your signal, captain. what has become of my fellow-passengers and the rest of the crew, god alone knows. they put us ashore on the island after the ship was taken last night, and nine of us, as you see, are here to tell the story. i have heard the tradition of ken's island from the japanese, but i never believed a word of it before yesterday. now i know that it is true. my fellow-passengers are there, dead or dying, and at sundown i am certainly going ashore to do what i can for them." "you are a brave man, captain nepeen," said i, "a very brave man. where you go i follow. we cannot leave poor seamen to perish, cost us what it may. yet i would not hide it from you that it is a big business, and that the man who goes to ken's island to-night may never return. we are now fourteen in this house, and our first duty is to leave it safe for those who trust us. with your help, captain nepeen, we'll answer the scum down below," said i. he assented very heartily and began to speak of the arms that we had and of the manner of employing them. his fellows, i learned, were bivouacked in the great hall, and these he waked first while i was getting the sleep out of my eyes and asking myself, "what next?" the room in which i lay was czerny's own room; and now in the daylight the sea played cool and green upon the arched windows and showed to me such sights on the rocks without as i had never dreamed of in the darker hours. what genius had pitched upon such a house under the waves? i asked. what spirit of evil breathed upon this dreadful place? what craving for solitude sent this master-mind here to the bed of the pacific ocean, where it could spy upon these uncanny secrets, watching the still green water, face to face with devilish shapes butting upon the glass, the friend of the horrid creatures which slimed upon the windows and crawled to their rocky haunts, or fought claw to claw in the sight of their enemy, man? desperate as the plight was, i must stand a minute before the crystal panes and watch that changing spectacle of the sea's own wonders. the very water was so near that i thought i had but to stretch out a hand to touch it. the weird, wild things that crept over the rocks, surely they would enter this room presently! and czerny could live here, cheek by jowl with these fearsome mysteries! again i say that man knows little of his fellow-man, of his better nature or his worse. _the same day. at five o'clock._ we open the lower doors and go down into the galleries. seven men are with me and each carries a musket. the quest is not so much for those shut down in the pit as for the life which they may send up to us. doctor gray has put it in a word, and it is true. the great engine, which draws the air from the sea's brink and drives it out in life-giving currents through the corridors of czerny's house, that engine alone stands between us and eternity this day. if those below have kept that engine going until this time, it is for their own safety's sake. rob them of food and drink, and what security have we that they will continue at the task? and yet, the deed be my witness, it was a perilous journey. no man in our company could say surely how many of czerny's crew he would find in the black labyrinth we must face. no man could speak of the hidden mysteries lurking in passage or cavern, far from the sea-gate and the sun's light. we were going into the unknown; and we went with timorous steps, each asking himself, "shall i live to see the day again?" each saying to the other, "stand close!" now, the knocking had ceased when we opened the gates, and we stood for a little while peering down into that corridor, which i have named already as the backbone of the lower house. lighted it was, the lamps still burning, its barred doors shut, its branching passages suggesting a hive of rocky nests which might harbour an army of desperadoes. no sound came up to us from below save the sound of the engine throbbing, throbbing, as it fanned a breath of life and drove it upwards to us fresh and sweet upon our faces. whoever lurked in that abyss feared to show himself or to cry a truce. we were hedged about by black mystery, and, rifle in hand, we set out to learn the truth. there were lamps in the corridor, but in the passages branching from it no light save that which streamed down, green and silvery, from the windows which shut the still sea out. oftentimes the seven with me would draw all close together, awed by the fantastic spectacle these glimpses of the sea's heart showed to them. at other times the nearer alarm would set them quaking, and crying "hist!" they would listen for steps in the silence or other sounds than that of the engine's pulse and the whirring fans. the very stillness, i think, made them afraid. the horrors of the windows--above all, that horror of the nameless fish--could frighten a man as no spectre of god's earth above. if i had accustomed myself in part to these new sensations, if czerny's house seemed to me rather a refuge than a terror, none the less there were moments when my step halted and my eyes were glued upon the sights i saw. for here it would be a monstrous shark lying still in a glassy pool; or there a very army of ferocious crabs, their eyes outstanding, their claws crushing prey, their great shells shaped like fungi of the deep; or going on a little way again i stopped before a giant porthole and discovered a devil-fish and his nest in the deep and said that nothing like to it had been heard or told of. here lies a great basin scooped out of the coral rock, and the green water is focused in it until it looks like a prism, and everywhere, in nook and crevice, the deadly tentacles, the frightful eyes of these unnameable creatures seem to twist and stare, and threaten us. such fish we counted, hundreds of them, at the windows of the second cavern we entered; and, drawing back from it affrighted, we went on like men who fear to speak of that which they have seen. "a madman's house; it could not be anything else," says captain nepeen, as pale as any ghost; "unless i had seen it with my own eyes, mr. begg, no story that ever was written would make me believe it. and yet it is true, as heaven is above us, it is true." "no doubt of that," said i, "a madman's house, captain, and madmen to people it. but of that we'll speak by-and-bye; for the shadows may listen. keep your gun ready; there will be others about besides ourselves. here's the first of them--stone-dead, by the lord!" they all came to a stand at my words, and saw that which my eyes discovered for them--the figure of a dead man, lying full and plain to be seen in the lamp's glare, and so fallen that no one might ask you how he had died. "one," said i, "and that which killed him left behind! he's been struck down as he ran. there's the knife that did it, lads!" a young seaman among us shuddered when he saw the knife still sticking in the dead man's side. the rest of us drew the body out of the light and went on again with wary steps. we were near the great dormitory at this time, the door of which i myself had locked; but it was open now and the lock broken. lamps still burned in that vast room; food lay still upon its tables; but the story of it was to be read at every step. chests overturned, chairs smashed, a litter of clothes upon the floor, broken bottles, an empty pistol, great marks upon the door where iron had indented it, bore witness to the struggle for light and freedom. the prisoners had fled, but life was the price of liberty. i took one swift glance round this broken prison, and then led my comrades out of it. "the birds have flown and one of them is winged," said i. "there are five more to take, and the shadows hide them! come on, my lads, or they'll say that eight were scared by five, and that's no tale to tell of honest seamen!" i spoke up to encourage them, for, truth to tell, the dark and the mystery were playing strange tricks with my nerves. as we penetrated deeper into that labyrinth i could start at every shadow and see a figure in every cranny. the men that the dark patches harboured, where were they? their eyes might be watching every step we took, their pistols covering our bodies as we hurried on to the depths. and yet no sound was heard, the great engine throbbed always; the cool, sweet air blew fresh upon our faces. now, the first voice spoke at the head of the engine-room stairs, from an open cavern which no lamp illumined. i had just called out to captain nepeen to follow me to the engine-room, and was bidding the others wait at the stairs-head, when a shot came flashing out of the darkness, and in the flame of the gun's light i saw a great hulking figure, and recognised it instantly. it was that of kess denton, the yellow man, whom i had left senseless at the door of ruth bellenden's bungalow more than twenty days ago. a giant figure, the head bandaged, the arms and chest naked, a rifle gripped in both hands, this phantom of the darkness showed itself for an instant and then vanished with an echoing laugh which mocked and angered us. at the same moment the young seaman who had shuddered before the dead, fell headlong in the passage, and with one loud cry gave up his life. and this was the first man who died for little ruth bellenden's sake. we swung about on our heels as the report rang out and fired a blazing volley into the darkness of the cavern. what other men lingered there, how many of the driven ghouls who haunted the labyrinth received that hail of lead, i shall never know nor care to ask. groans answered our shots; there were cries of pain, the curses of the wounded, the derisive laughter of those that escaped. but little by little the sounds died away, echoing in other and distant galleries, or coming to us as whispered voices, speaking from places remote, and leaving to us at last a silence utter and profound. we were masters of the bout and the engine was ours. "captain nepeen," said i, "do you and three others go back to the stairs-head and hold it until i come. if they are afraid to face us here, they'll never face us at all. why, look at it. seven men out in the light, as fair a target as a woman might ask for, and they show us their heels. go back and hold the gate, and i and those with me will answer for the engine. time afterwards to hunt the vermin out." he took my order unwillingly, i could see. a greater devil for a fight than that smooth-faced american sailor i shall never meet in all my days. keen as a hound after quarry, he would have hunted out the vermin, i do believe, if the path had led down to the mouth of hades itself. "you will not go alone, captain," cried he, "that's plain madness." "i take two to my call," said i, "and leave you the rest." "but what--aren't you afraid, man?" "afraid! of whom?" said i. "of an old man--but that's too far ahead. i'll speak of it when i come up, captain. perhaps it's only my own idea. but it's good enough to go on with." he had still something to say, and, looking first into the black cavern, which we had filled with shot, and then down the stairs towards the engine-room, he went on presently: "you take a big risk and i hope you'll get out of it. how many do you expect to find below? "one," said i, quickly, "and he a friend. it's a strange story, captain, and wonderful, too. but it will wait." i was at the door of the engine-room before he could answer me, and pulling back the leather curtain i put my own idea to the proof. just as forty hours ago, so now that gloomy cavern shimmered with the crimson light which the giant furnaces cast upon its rocky roof. now, as then, leather-clad figures moved before its molten fires. there were the mighty boilers, the pumping engine, the throbbing cylinders, the shining cranks; but the man who staggered towards me in the white light, the man who uttered a glad cry of recognition, the man who fell at last at my feet, imploring me for the love of mercy to bring him food and drink, that man was no enemy. he was clair-de-lune, the old frenchman, and i had but to look at him twice to see that he was the neighbour of death. "clair-de-lune, old comrade!" i cried, "you! we owe our lives to _you_, then! by thunder, you shame us all!" he was pale as death; the sweat ran in streams down upon his naked breast; his words came like a torrent when he tried to tell me all. "three days in prison, and no man come to me," he said, pathetically; "then i hear your voice. i say it is captain begg. i am glad, monsieur, because it is a friend. i break the door of my prison and would come up to you; but no, there is no one in the house; all gone. i say that my friends die if i do not serve them. there are lads with me; but they are honest. ah, captain begg, food and drink, for the love of christ!" he fainted in thy arms, and i carried him from the place. again, in all providence, i and those dear to me had been saved by the fidelity of one of the oddest of god's creatures. _the same day. at eight o'clock._ i have begun to believe that the italian is right, and that czerny left no more than eight men in the lower house. no attack has been made upon the americans we put in charge of the engine, nor is there any news of those mutineers who fled from us this morning, save that which comes from two of them, very pitiful creatures, broken-down and starving, who have surrendered their arms and begged for food. the others, they say, will come in presently, when the big man, whom they call kess denton, will let them. they protest that their comrades are but four, and two of them wounded grievously. i no longer feel any anxiety about that which is below, and i have told miss ruth as much. she has now been two hours with captain nepeen. her way of life draws her sympathetically towards that brave and gentle man. it must be so. the world has put a great gulf between the simple seaman and those whom fortune shelters at her heart. a plain sailor has his duty to do; the world would laugh at him if he forgot it because the years have taught him to worship a woman's step and to seek that goal of life to which her hand may lead him. _an hour later._ we are to go ashore with the dark to see if we can save any of the refugees marooned on the island. it is a desperate chance and may cost good men's lives. i do not forbid it, for i have lived and suffered on ken's island myself. if there are living men there now--it may be women, too--held in that trance of death from which they must awake to madness or never wake again, the commonest instinct of pity says to me, "go." i have consulted doctor gray, and he is doubtful of the venture. "mind what you are doing, i beg of you," he says. "are there not women to save in this house?" miss ruth overhears him and draws me aside, and, putting her hand upon my arm winningly, she lifts her pretty face to mine and says, "jasper, you will save them!" i am going ashore, and captain nepeen goes with me. _at ten o'clock._ we put off a boat at ten o'clock and rowed straight for the open beach. it was a gloriously clear night, with a heaven of blazing stars and a sea like flowing silver. the ship's boats made so many black shapes, like ocean drift in the pools of light; and czerny's yacht, speaking of that dread presence, lay as an evil omen in the anchorage to the northward. ken's island itself was uplifted like some mountain of the sea, snowcapped in its dazzling peaks, harbouring its wayward forests and lovely glens and fresh meadows which the moon's light frosted. and over all was that thin veil of the fog, a steaming blue vapour flecked with the richest hues; now drifting in clouds of changing tints, now spreading into fantastic creations and phantom cities, pillars of translucent yellow flame, banks of darker cloud as though a storm were gathering. sounds of the night came to us from that dismal island; we heard the lowing of the kine, the sea-bird's hoot, ever and anon the terrible human cry which spoke of a soul in agony. and with these were mingled grimmer sounds, like very music of the storm: the echo of distant gunshots fired by czerny's men at the anchored yacht which refused them harbourage. there were four with me in the boat, and captain nepeen was one of them. i had set peter bligh at the tiller, and seth barker and an american seaman to pull the oars. we spoke rare words, for even a whisper would carry across that night-bound sea. there were rifles in our hands; good hope at our hearts. perchance, even yet, we should awake some fellow-creature from the nameless sleep in the woods whose beauty veiled the living death. now, i say that czerny's men were firing rifle-shots at the anchored schooner, and that sound was a true chantey for our ears. what eyes would they have for us when their salvation lay aboard the yacht? we were nothing to them; the ship was all. and, be sure, we did not go unwatched or helpless. behind us, at the gate we had left, our gun showed its barrel like the fang of a slipped hound. cunning hands were there, brave fellows who followed us in their hearts, while we crossed the basin swiftly and drew near the terrible shore. if we had seen the sun for the last time, then so be it, we said. it is not a seaman's way to cry at danger. his word is "must," and in a sure purpose lies his salvation. we made the island at the westward end that we might have a clear sheet of water between czerny's boats and our own; and we so set our course that our gun could sweep the intervening seas if any eye detected us. the land was low-lying towards the west and marshy; yet, strange to be told, the fog lay light upon it. it had been planned between us that captain nepeen and i should go ashore while the others held the boat. we carried revolvers in our hands, but no other arms. the death-fog was our true defence; and against that each man wore the respirator that duncan gray had made for him. sleep might be our lot, but it would come upon us slowly. "it will be straight for the woods, captain," said i, "and all our heart go with us. your friends, who were put ashore last night, will never stray far from the beach, believe me. we'll search the foreshore and leave the rest to chance. as for going under, we sha'n't think of that. it would never do to begin by being afraid of it." he answered readily enough that he had never thought of such a thing. "where you lead, there i follow, captain begg," said he. "i shall not be far behind you, rely upon it." "and me not far from the shore when it's 'bout ship and home again," chimes in peter bligh. "god go with you, captain, for you are a brave man entirely!" i laughed at their notion of it, and went a little way up the beach. the respirator about my mouth, charged with some chemical substance i did not know the use of, permitted me to breathe at first with some ease. and what was more extraordinary was this, that while in the woods the fog had seemed to suffocate me, here it was exhilarating; bracing a man's steps so that he seemed to walk on air; exalting him so that his mind was on fire and his head full of the wildest notions. no coward that ever lived would have known a moment's fear under the stimulation of that clear blue vapour. i bear witness, and there are others to bear witness with me, that a whole world of strange figures and wonderful places opened up to our eyes when we began to push ashore and to leave the sandy beach behind us. and that was but the beginning of it, for more fearful things were to follow after. i will try to describe for you both the place and the scene, that you may realize my sensation, and follow me truly in this, my third journey to ken's island. imagine, if you can, an undulating stretch of lush grass and pasture-land, a glorious meadow flooded with the clear, cold light; arched over with a heaven of stars; bordered about by heavy woods; dipping to the sea on two sides and extending shimmering sands to the breaking swell on the third. say that a hot blue fog quivers in the air above this meadow-land, and is breathed in at every breath you take. conceive a mind so played upon by this vapour that the meadows and the woods beyond the meadows are gradually lost to view, and a wonder-world quickly takes their place. do this, and you may follow me more surely to a phantom city of majestic temples hewn out of a golden rock and lifting upward until they seem to touch the very skies; you may peer with me into abysses so profound that no eye can fathom their jewelled depths; you may pass up before walls built wholly of gems most precious; you may sleep in woods beneath trees silvered over with light; search countless valleys rich in unknown flowers. and the city is peopled with an unnumbered multitude of moving figures, the sensuous figures of young girls all glittering in gold and jewels; the shapes of an army of giants in blackest armour; and there are animals that no eye has seen before, and beasts more terrible than the brain can conceive. say, too, that this deadly vapour of the island so stimulates the faculties that earth no longer binds a man nor heaven imprisons him. say that he can rise above the spheres to unknown worlds, can, span the seas, and bridge the mountains. depict him, as it were, throwing off his human shape and seeing the abodes of men so far below him, so puny, so infinitely small that he begins to realize eternity. cast him down from these visions suddenly and in their place set up black woods and the utter darkness of nature impenetrable. let the exaltation leave him, the sights fade utterly, the dismal abyss of the nether world close him in. awake him from these again and let him reel up and stagger on and believe that he is sinking down to the eternal sleep. such sensations ken's island will give him until at last he shall fall; and lying trance-bound for the rain to beat upon his face, or the sun to scorch him, or the moon to look down upon his dreams, he shall lie and know that the world is there, and that nevermore may he have part or lot in it. i have set down this account of my own experiences on the island that you may compare it with the books of others who have since visited this wonderful place; but i would not have you think that i, and the brave man who stood at my side, forgot that human errand which put us ashore in those dismal swamps; or hung back to speak of our own sensations while others might need us so sorely. if we passed from delirium to sanity, from the height of hysterical imagination to the depths of despair and gloom, none the less the faculty of action remained, the impulse which cried, "straight on," and left us willing still to dare the worst if thereby a fellow-creature might be saved. burning as our brains were, heavy the limbs, we could still push on across the meadows, search with our eyes for those poor people we had come out to save. how long this power of action would remain to us, what supreme misfortune would end our journey at last, throwing us, it might be, to the grass, there to sleep and end it all, we would not so much as consider. good men were perishing on ken's island, and every instinct said, "you, jasper begg, and you, james nepeen, hold out a hand to them." "do you see anything, captain?" i asked my companion again and again; "we should be near them now. do you hear any sound?" he answered me, gasping for his breath: "not a whisper." "yonder," i would go on, "yonder by the little wood; they landed there. can you get as far, captain?" "i'll try, by heaven!" said he, between his teeth. "they'll not be far from the wood," said i, "that's common sense. shut your eyes to all the things you see and don't think about it. it's an awful place, captain. no living man can picture its fellow." i waited for him to come up to me, and so placed myself that his eyes, i hoped, might turn seaward and not up towards the woods where such weird sights were to be seen. for this place, the angle of the great pasture-land where it met the forest, was occupied by sleeping cattle, white, and still, and frigid, so that all the scene, glimmering in the moonlight, might have been cut out of some great block of marble; and cows and sheep, and trees and hills, all chiselled by the hand of death. that a living thing should be speaking and moving there seemed almost an outrage upon the marvellous beauty of that field of sleep. the imagination reeled before this all-conquering trance, this glory of nature spellbound. it were as though a man must throw himself to the earth, do what he would, and surrender to the spell of it. and that, perchance, we had done, and the end had been there and then, but for a woman's cry, rising so dolefully in the woods that every impulse was awakened by it and all our resolutions retaken. "did you hear that?" i cried to him, wildly; "a woman's voice, and near by, too! you'll not turn back now, captain nepeen!" "not for a fortune!" said he, bravely; "it would be gertrude dolling, the purser's sister; we cannot leave her!" the desire was like a draught of wine to him. he had been near falling, i make sure, but now, steadying himself for an instant upon my arm, he set off running at all his speed, and i at his heels, we crossed the intervening grass and were in the wood. there we found the purser's sister, stumbling blindly to and fro, like a woman robbed of sight, while children were clinging to her dress and crying pitifully because she did not heed them. it was an odd scene, and many must come and go before i forget it. dark as the wood might be by day, the moonlight seemed to fill every glade of it, showing us the gnarled trunks and the flowering bushes, the silent pools and the grassy dells. and in the midst of this sylvan rest, remote from men, a lonely thicket of the great pacific ocean, was this figure of civilization, a young girl decked out in white, with a pretty hat that paris might have sent her, and little children, in their sailors' clothes, clinging trustingly, as children will in confidence to a woman's protecting hand. no surprise was it to me then, nor is it a surprise now, that the girl neither saw nor heard us. the trance had gripped her surely; the first delirium of exaltation had robbed her of sight and sense and even knowledge of the children. that doleful wailing song of hers was the first chant of madness. her steps were undirected, now carrying her to the wood's heart, now away from it a little way towards the sea's beach. my order, twice given, that she should stand and wait for us was never answered; i do not even think that she felt my hand upon her shoulder. but she fell at last, limp and shuddering, into my arms, and i picked her up and turned towards the sea. "the children to you, and straight ahead," said i to the captain; "run for your life, and for the lives of these little ones. it will be something to save them, captain." he answered me with a word that was almost a groan; but stooped to his task, nevertheless. he knew that it was a race for their lives and ours. i had the burden in my arms, i say, and no feather's weight was less to me in the hope of my salvation and of those we strove for. the way lay straight down, through a ravine of the low cliffs to the beach we had left and the good boat awaiting us there. nothing, it seemed, but a craven will could stand henceforth between us and god's fresh air that night. and yet how wrong that reckoning was! there were a dozen of czerny's men halloaing wildly on the cliff-side when we came out of the wood; and almost before we had marked them, they were after us headlong like devils mad in wine. now these men, as we learned afterwards, driven by hunger and thirst to the point of raving, had come ashore that very evening; it may be to rifle the stores on the island; it may be in that spirit of sheer madness which sometimes drives a seaman on. twenty in all when they landed, there were eight asleep already when we encountered them; and lying on the cliff's side, some with arms and heads overhanging, some shuddering in the fearful sleep, one at least bolt upright against the rock with his arms outstretched as though he were crucified, they dotted that dell like figures upon a battle-field. the rest of them, a sturdy twelve, fired by the dancing madness, brandishing their knives, uttering the most awful imprecations, ran on the cliff's head above us, and seemed to be making straight for the cove where our boat lay. and that is why we said that the race was for life or death. there are moments in his life when a man must decide "aye" or "nay" without checking his step to do so. as things stood, the outlook could not have been blacker while we ran through the ravine to the water's edge. behind, in the wood, lay the dancing death; before us these madmen with their gleaming knives, their unearthly yells, their reeling gait and fearful gesticulations. we had to choose between them, the sleep in the lonely glen, or the race downward to the shore; and we chose the latter, believing, i think, that the end must be the same, turn where we would. "keep your course, keep your course!" i cried to the captain as we ran on. "hold to it, for your life--it's our only chance!" he set one of the children on the sand, and, bidding the little one run on ahead, he drew his revolver and stood shoulder to shoulder with me. "a straight barrel and mark your men," cried he, very quietly; "it's a cool head that wins this game. we have ten shots and the butts will do for two. you will make that twelve if you add it up, captain." his coolness surprised me, but it was not to be wondered at. never from the first had i heard this man utter one word which complained of our situation or of its difficulty. to captain james nepeen a tight corner was a pleasure-ground; and now with these yelling devils all round him, and the vapour steaming in the woods behind, and the sea shimmering like a haven that would beckon us to salvation, he could yet wear that cynical smile of his, and go with lighter step, and bear himself like the true seaman that he was. of all that i have ever sailed with i would name him first as a true comrade in peril or adversity. to his skill i owed my life that night. "one," said he, suddenly, when a great head showed itself on the cliff above us and was instantly drawn back. so quick had he been, so wild did the aim appear, that when a body rolled presently down the grassy bank and lay stark before us i could not believe that a bullet had done its work. "one," cried he again, triumphantly--"and one from twelve leaves eleven. ha, that's your bird, captain, and a big one!" [illustration: another man fell with a loud cry.] i had pulled my trigger, prompted by his example, and another man from the cliff above lifted his arms and fell with a loud cry. and this was the astonishing thing, that though we two were caged in a ravine like rats in a trap, and had shot two of the devils stone-dead, no answering shot was fired from above, no rifle levelled at us. "no arms," cries the captain, presently; "and most of them half drunk. we're going through this, mister begg, right through, i assure you!" well, i began to believe it; nevertheless, there were men on the shore before us, halloaing madmen, with clasp-knives in their hands and murder in their faces. clear in the moonlight you could see them; the still air sent up their horrid imprecations. those men we must pass, i said, if we would reach the boat. and we passed them. it seems a miracle even when i write of it. now, we had halted at the foot of the ravine and were just prepared to go headlong for the six, believing, it may be, that one at least of us must fall, when they fired a shot, not from the gun at the watch-tower gate, but from czerny's own yacht away in the offing; and coming plump down upon the sand, not a cable's length from our own boat, a shell burst with a thunderous explosion, and scattering in fragments of steel, it scared the mutineers as no rifle could have done. roaring out like stricken bulls, cursing their master in all tongues, they began to storm the cliff-side nimbly and to run for the shelter of the woods; but some fell and rolled backward to the sand, some turned on their own knives and lay dead at the gully's foot; while those who gained the summit stood all together, and wailing their doleful song they yelled defiance at czerny's ship. but we--we made the boat; and falling half-dead in it, we thrust it from the beach and heard our comrades' voices again. chapter xxiii the end of the sixty hours _the same night. off ken's island. half-past twelve o'clock._ we have not returned to the watch-tower rock, nor can we bring ourselves to that while there is any hope left to us of helping those whom czerny marooned on the dangerous shore. our gig drifts lazily in a pool of the whitest moonlight. we can still make out the ship's boats lying about czerny's yacht, and the angry crews which man them. from the beach itself rises up the mutineers' wail of agony, like a wild beast's cry, at one time loud and ferocious, then dying away in a long-drawn cry, which haunts the ear. ever and anon, as the mood takes them, the gunners on czerny's yacht let fly at us with their erring shells; but they smite the air or hurt the water, or drop the bounding fire on the shimmering spread of sand beyond us. perhaps it is that this employment occupies the minds of the longboats' crews and keeps them from reckoning with the master who has befooled them. they, at least, are at the crisis of their peril. afloat there on a gentle swell they must know that any hour may bring a changing wind and a breaking sea, and a shore rockbound and unattainable. they are playing with chance, and chance will turn upon them presently. let them make for the island where the laughing woods say "come!" and the heralds of sleep will touch them upon the foreheads, and raving, dreaming, they will fall at last, just victims of the island visions. say that their brute intelligences do not yet understand this; but hunger and thirst will teach them ere the dawn, and then reckoning must come! all this i foresaw as we let the boat drift by the sandy bays, and spake, one to another, of to-morrow and that which it must bring. whatever our own misfortune might be, that of czerny's men was worse a hundredfold. for the moment it amused them to see the shells plunging and hissing in the sea about us; for the moment the desire to be quit of us made them forget how it stood with them and what must come after. but the reckoning would be sure. let a capful of wind come scudding across that glassy sea, and all the riches in the world would not buy edmond czerny's life of these sea-wolves who sought it. "they'll stand by until they know the worst, and then nothing will hold them," i said to my comrades. "if they think they can get aboard the yacht, they'll do so and make for some safe port. if not, they'll try to rush the house. assume that they are driven hard enough and no gun will keep them off. let ten or twenty go down, the rest will come in. i am thinking that we should get back to the house, lads, and not leave it to younger heads. we've done what we could here, and it's plainly useless to go on with it!" they were all with me in this, none more so than captain nepeen, who, up to this time, had been for the shore and the friends who might be found there. "at least we have made every prudent effort; and there are others to think of," said he. "if they had a gunner worth a groat, we should not be where we are, captain. you must allow something to chance and a lucky shot. they may get home even yet. i will not ask you what that would mean, for you are a seaman and you know." his words, i think, recalled us to the danger. no hope of rescue rewarded our eyes when we scanned the black woods and the lonely fore-shore of the forbidden land. dark and terrible in the moonlight, like some mighty beacon of evil rising up above that sleeping sea, it seemed to say to us, "go, turn back; remember those who count upon you." and we pulled from it reluctantly out into the broad sea, and breathed a full breath as we left its vapours and its fetid shores. three shots were fired at us while we crossed the open channel, and one fell so close that we could see the cleavage of the water and feel the silver spray upon our heated faces. this quickened our oars, you may be sure, and set our course true and straight for the house, whose iron gate stood up like a fortress of the deep and opened its rocky shelter to us. clair-de-lune was there, too, halted and motionless by the sea's brink; dolly venn stood at his side; and once i thought that i saw miss ruth herself peering across the lapping wavelets and watching us with a woman's anxious eyes. nor did we go unobserved by those who had so much to gain if mischance should befall us in that last endeavour. like pirates' junks, slipping from a sheltered creek, the devils in the longboats espied us in the moonlight and began to row towards us and to hail us with those wild shouts which yesterday we had heard even in the house under the sea. yet, i witness, they did not affright us. we knew that sure eyes watched them from the reef; no lads' playing at the length of a watchdog's chain, kept more surely from the dog's teeth than those night-birds from the gun's range. shots they fired--wild, reckless shots, skimming the water, peppering the sky, whistling in the clear air above us. but the boats drew no nearer, and it seemed that we must touch our haven unharmed, when the american seaman, stretching out his arms in a gesture fearful to think of, and ceasing to row with horrid suddenness, fell backward without any word and lay, a dying man, before us. they had shot him through the heart; and he was the second who fell for ruth bellenden's sake. _sunday morning. five o'clock._ i have known little sleep for the last thirty hours, nor can i sleep at the crisis of our misfortunes. it is a still grey morning, with heavy cloud in the east, and lapping rhythmical waves beating upon the windows of the house as though anon a gale must blow and all this torrid silence be swept away. i cannot conceal it from myself what a gale would mean to us; how it must scatter the open boats, drifting there at the mercy of a pacific sea; how, perchance, it might even lift the fog from ken's island and show us sunny fields and sylvan woods, a harbourage of delight to which all might flock with leaping hearts. and yet, says reason, if it so befall that you yourselves may go ashore to yonder island, what logic shall keep czerny's men from the same good anchorage? they are as twenty to one against you. if there are houses there, and stores for the sun-time, who will shut them to this horde of desperadoes? aye, the head reels to think of it; the hours pass slowly; to-morrow we shall know. now, i have thought of all this, and yet there are other things in my mind, and they jostle one with the other, the sweet and the bitter, the good and the bad, until it seems to me that i no longer get at the heart of it, but am as a man drifting without a chart, set free on some unknown sea whose very channels i may not fathom. three hours ago when i came ashore and lifted the dead man out, and sent the sleeping girl to shelter, ruth bellenden's hand was the first to touch my own, her word the first my ear would catch. so clear it was, such music to a man to hear that girlish voice asking of his welfare as a thing most dear to her, that all the night vanished at the words, and ken's island was lost to my sight, and only the memory of the olden time and of my life's great hope remained to me. "jasper!" she said, "it was not you--oh, jasper, it was not you, then!" i stepped from the boat, and, taking her hand in mine, i drew her a little nearer to me; then, fearful of myself, i let go her hand again and told her the simple truth. "miss ruth," said i, "it is yon poor fellow. i will not say 'thank god!' for what right have i to serve you before him? he did his duty; help me to do mine." she turned away and gazed out over the sea to the yacht still thundering its cannon and ploughing with its wasted shot the unoffending sea. deep thoughts were in her mind, i make sure, a torture of doubt, and hope, and trepidation. and i--i watched her as though all my will was in her keeping, and there, on the lonely rock, was the heart of the world i would have lived and died in. "you cannot forbid me to be glad, jasper," she said, presently; "you have given me the right. i saw you on the shore. oh! my heart went with you, and i think that i counted the minutes, and i said, 'he will never come; he is sleeping.' and then i said, 'it is jasper's voice.' i saw you stand up in the boat and afterwards there were the shadows. jasper, there cannot be shadows always; the sun must shine sometimes." she held my hand again and touched it with her cheek. i think that i forgot all the place about, the sea and the men, the distant shore and the island's shape, the still night and the dawn to come; and knowing nothing save that ruth, little ruth, was by my side, i went into dreamland and said, "it shall be forever." _monday. at six o'clock._ i cannot sleep and i have come to keep watch on the rock. old clair-de-lune is with me, but silence is in the house below, where some sleep and some are seeking sleep. of all who can discuss our future bravely, none speaks better sense than this simple old man; and if he rebukes my own confidence he rebukes it justly. i ask him when the sleep-time will pass and the sun-time come. he shakes his head, he will not prophesy. "god forbid that it should pass," says he. "they will go ashore to the island, and we--we perish," says he. "pray that it shall not be, captain. we have food for three week--month; but what come after? you pick up by ship, you say. but not so. when your ship come here the devils set trap, and all is wreck and burn and steal! they take your ship and you perish, you starve. ah, monsieur, pray that the sun-time do not come." i lay back upon the rock and thought of it. this old man, surety, was right. let the fog drift from ken's island, the woods awake, life stir again, and how stood we--where was our benefit? "it is a fearful position," said i, "and heaven alone knows what the end of it will be. that something has happened to mister jacob and my ship i can no longer doubt, clair-de-lune. the southern cross is on the rocks, be sure of it, and good men with her. take it that they are picked up and set on the american coast. what then? who finds the money for another steamer? it is not to be thought of: we must dismiss it from our minds. you say that we have food for three weeks, and the condensers down below will give us water. but it won't be three weeks before we are in or out of it, my friend. if we are starving, others are starving--those out yonder by czerny's yacht. he'll give them food to-day; but how long will they drift like cattle for the rain to beat on? your sense will tell you that they won't drift long, but will be asking questions and wanting their answers. aye, clair-de-lune, we'll listen with all our ears when that begins!" he had a glass with him and he began to scan the yacht very closely and the ship's boats about it. i had not noticed that there was an unusual stir in the anchorage, but he remarked it now and drew his own conclusions. "they give rogue man arms and cutlass, captain; he go overboard too. i see them pass from boat to boat. ah, there he is, the bread and the biscuit. they get breakfast and then come here, captain. what else you look for? they not lie there all the days. they too much devil for that. we few and little; they big and strong. why shall they not take the house? some die, but other mans remain. czerny he say to them, 'great much price if you kill the english captain.' he know that all his money is locked up down here. why shall he not come, captain?" i could not tell him why. my own glasses showed me the things he made mention of and others beside. arms, i saw, were being passed down from the yacht to the small boats clustered about it. there was no sunlight to glisten upon the bright barrels of the rifles, but i could distinguish them nevertheless; and cutlasses were handed from boat to boat--a good fifty of them i counted, and there were more to come. what the meaning of it was a child might have told you. truce prevailed between master and man in their common desire of possession. the last great attack was to be made upon us--the rock to be rushed. even a woman would have divined as much. "clair-de-lune," said i, "the end is coming at last; and it won't be very long. we're dealing with a remarkable man, and it is not to be supposed that he'll sail away and leave us here without one good blow for it. aye, it's a great mind altogether, and there's the plain truth. who else but the cleverest would have thought of this place, and come here like a human vulture to feed upon ships and men? there have been many edmond czernys in the world; but this man i name chief among them, and others will name him also. we set ourselves against a hand in a million; stiff backs we need to wrestle with that; but we'll do it, old comrade, we'll see it through yet!" it was a wild boast, yet, god knows, a well meant one. perhaps, if he had pushed me to the confession, i would have told him that i was far from believing my own prophecies, and that, in truth, i realized, as he did, the perilous hazard of our position and all that defeat might mean to us. just as he knew, so did i know that before the night came down dead men might lie on the rocks about me and be engulfed in that sea which beat so gently upon the lonely shore; that living men from the boats yonder would swarm in the galleries below, and women's cries be heard, and something follow which even i dare not contemplate. the dreadful truth, perhaps, kept our tongues away from it; we talked of other things, of czerny and his house, and of what we would do if the best should befall. "he wonderful man," old clair-de-lune went on, standing, like some old neptune of the sea, bolt upright on the pinnacle of rock; "wonderful man, and none like him! thirteen year ago he first find this place, and thirteen year he wreck the ships. i know, for there was a day when he tell me much and i listen. he say, 'make great fortune and no trouble to earn him. if sailor man drown, more fool he.' all the years back, hundreds of years, ships perish on ken's island. czerny he hear the story in japan, and he come to see the place for himself. they say he once sleep through the fog and mad afterwards. he no longer have right or wrong or care about the world. he come to ken's island and grow rich. then his engineers find this rock. once, long time ago, it have been part of the island, captain. the--what you say?--volocano, he shoot fire into the sea; but that was before the peoples. czerny, he go down into the rock and he discover great cavern and little cavern, and he say, 'i live here in the sleep-time.' plenty of money make fine house. he shut out the sea wherever he would come in; he build great windows in the rock; his _mécanicien_, he put up engine and draw air from the skies. long year czerny live here alone. then one day come madame--ah, captain, i was sorry when i saw madame come! 'she will suffer here,' i said; she have suffered much already. czerny is not as other men. if madame say to him, 'you good man; you and i live here always,' then she have everything, she go where she will, she become the master. but i say when i see her, 'no, never she will not say that. she good woman.' and then i fear for her, captain; i fear greatly. i did not know she have the english friend who will save her." he turned to me wistfully, and i read in his eyes of that deep affection which little ruth bellenden has never failed to win from all who know and learn to love her. _monday. at three o'clock._ we held a council of war in the great hall at this hour, and came upon a plan to meet the supreme attack which must be made upon us tonight. we are all of one mind, that czerny will seek to rush the house under cover of the darkness, and in this the sunless day must help him. we cannot look for any moon or brightness of the stars which shall aid our eyes when the sun has set. it will be a dark night, cloudy and, perhaps, tempestuous. if the storm should break and nature be our ally, then the worst is done with already and the end is sure. but we have no right to hope for that. we must face the situation like thinking men, prepared for any eventuality. now, i had slept a little at the height of the day, and the first news that they brought to me when i waked was of the surrender of the two that remained in the caverns below, and of the fidelity of the other four of czerny's men who already had joined us. so far as i can make out there may be but one living man in the lower story of the house, and for him and his goodwill we care nothing. the rest of the crowd we fought, seeing, perhaps, that fortune goes with us so far, will themselves stand on fortune's side and serve us faithfully. that much, at least, i put to my fellows as we sat round the table in the hall and made those plans which reason dictated. "they'll serve," said i, "as long as we are on the winning side. we'll put them in the engine room, where they'll keep the fires going for their own sakes. if they so much as look false, then shoot them down. it is in my mind, captain nepeen," said i, "that we'll have need of such a man as you, and three good fellows with you, at the lesser gate. you should find cover on the rocks while we hold the near sea for you. if czerny gets a foothold there and beats that door in, i need not tell you how it will go with us. for the rest, i leave two men at the stairs-head and two in this hall to be at miss ruth's call. peter bligh and dolly venn go up with me to work the gun. if they rush it--well, twenty there won't keep them back with rifles. but i count upon the coward's part, and i say that a man will think twice about dying for such as czerny and his ambitions. let that be in all your minds, and remember--for god's sake remember--what you are fighting for." "for women's honour and good men's lives," said captain nepeen, quietly. "yes; that's the stake, gentlemen. i don't think we need say any more to nerve our arms and clear our eyes. we fight for all that is most dear to honest men. if we fail, let us at least fail like true seamen who answer 'here' when duty has called." _at six o'clock._ we all dined together at this time in the large dining-room near by miss ruth's boudoir. an odder contrast than that between this fine room below and the still, desolate sea above, no mind could imagine. for, on the one hand, were the insignia of civilization--luxury, display, the splendid apartment, the well-dressed women, the table decked out with fine linen and silver, the windows showing the sea-depths and all their wondrous quivering life; on the other hand, the black shapes of night and death, the menace of the boats, the anchored yacht, the darkening skies, the looming island. we sat down fourteen souls, that might have met in some great country house, and there have gathered in friendship and frivolity. never in all my life had i seen miss ruth so full of vivacity or girlish charm. her laughter was like the music of bells; the jest, the kindly word was for every man; and yet sometimes i, at her side, could look deep into those grey-blue eyes to read a truer story there. and in the babble of the talk she would whisper some treasured word to me, or touch my hand with her own, or say, "jasper, it must be well, it must be well with us!" of that which lay above in the darkening east, no man spoke or appeared to think. there was ruby wine in our glasses; the little french girls capered about us like nymphs from the sea; we spoke of the old time, of sunny days in the blue mediterranean, of wilder days off the english shores, of our homes so distant and our hopes so high; but never once of the night or that which must befall. _monday. at eleven o'clock._ we have now been at our stations for two hours and nothing has transpired. i have clair-de-lune with me at the great sea-gate, and dolly venn and seth barker are at the gun. the night is so dark that the best trained eye can distinguish little either on sea or land. ken's island itself is now but a blur of black on a cloud-veiled horizon. we have shut off every light in the house itself; the reef runs no longer beneath the sea like a vein of golden light, nor do the windows cast aureoles upon the sleeping water. what breeze there is comes in hot gusts like breath from heated waters. we cannot see czerny's yacht nor espy any of his boats near or afar; but we crouch together in the shelter of the rocks, and there is water near to our hand, and food if we seek it, and the ammunition piled, and the barrels of the rifles outstanding, and the figures with their unspoken thoughts, their hopes, their fears of the dreadful dawn that must be. whence out of the night shall the danger come? shall it come leaping and brandishing knives, a veiled army springing up from the shadows, or shall it come by stealth, boat by boat, now upon this quarter, now upon that, outposts seeking to flank us, deadly shots fired we know not where? i cannot tell you. the comrades at my side ask again and again, "do you see anything, captain?" i answer, "nothing!" it is the truth. _monday. at midnight._ we are still upon the rock and the shadows engulf us. the lad at my side, sick with waiting, has curled himself up upon a bed of stone and is half asleep; seth barker leans against a crag like some figure hewn out of granite; old clair-de-lune is all hunched up as a bundle. nevertheless, masterly eyes scan the lapping waters. will the night never speak to us? will the day bring waiting? ah, no! not that! a shot rings out clear on the still night air; a flash of fire leaps across the sea. we spring to our feet; we cry, "ready!" the sixty hours are over and the end is near! chapter xxiv the second attack on czerny's house the shot was fired and answered at the lower gate. we had looked for that; for that we had been waiting during the watching hours. they would attack the lesser reef, we said, and our own good men, standing sentinels, would flash the news of it to us, and the gun would do the rest. dark as it was, the blackest hour the island had given us, nevertheless by daylight we had trained our barrels upon the reef, and now took aim in all confidence. twice we whistled shrilly to warn our men; twice we heard their answering voices. then the gun belched forth its hail of shot and the challenge was thrown down. "give it to them, dolly!" i cried, my brain afire at the call of action; "for every honest seaman's sake, give it to them, lad! we'll tell of this to-morrow--aye, dolly, we'll tell a great story yet!" he answered me with a boy's glad cry; i do believe it was like a game to him. "pass here, pass here!" he kept crying; "we have them every time! in with the shot, seth--in with it! don't keep them waiting! oh, captain, what a night!" the others said nothing; even peter bligh's tongue was still in that surpassing moment. the doubt of it defied words. we knew nothing, nor could we do aught but leave our fortune to the darkness of the night. the rogues who fell, the rogues who stood, the boats that came on, the boats that withdrew, of these we were ignorant. all was hidden from our eyes; the veil of the night cloaked from us the work we had done. if men cried in agony, if groans mocked angry boasts, if we heard the splashing of the oars, the hoarse command, the vile blasphemy, the rest was in imagination's keeping. the outposts of czerny's crew, we said, had tried to rush the gate where our own men watched; but our own were behind the steel doors now and the gun's hail swept the barren rock. the dawn would show us the harvest we had reaped. now, the volleys rolled their thunder right away to the hills of ken's island, and the whistling of the bullets was like the singing of unseen birds above our heads; there were oases of red flame in the waste of blackness; we heard oaths and cries, commands roared hoarsely across the water, voices triumphant and voices that were stilled; and then came the first great silence. whatever had befallen on the rock, those who sought to force the lesser gate were, for the moment, driven back. even little dolly, mad at the gun like one whom no reason could restrain, heard me at last and obeyed my command. "cease firing, lad!" roared i, "cease firing! would you shoot the sea? yonder's the captain's whistle. it means that the danger's nearer. aye, stand by, lads," i said, "and look out for it." we swung the gun round so that it faced the basin before us, and, rifles ready, we peered again in the lowering darkness. about me now i could hear the deep breathing of my comrades and see their crouching figures and say that every nerve was tautened, every faculty awakened. shielded by the night, those hidden boats were creeping up to us foot by foot. whatever had been done at the lesser gate had been done as a ruse, i did not doubt. czerny's goal was the greater door we held so desperately, his desire the full possession, the mastery of the house wherein lay life and treasure and lasting security. i counted twenty, no man speaking, and then i raised my voice. dimly, in the shadows, i made out the shape of a longboat drifting to the brink; and to dolly i said: "let go--in god's name, let go, lad!" he stood to the gun with a cry of defiance and blazed into the darkness. the drifting boat lurched and sagged and turned her beam to the seas. i could distinguish the faces of men, ferocious and threatening, as they peered upward to the rock; i saw other boats looming over the dark water; i heard the ringing command, "in at them! to hell with them!" and then, i think, for many minutes together i fired wildly at the figures before me, swung round now to this side, now to that; was unconscious of the bullets splintering the rock or of the lead shower pouring on us. the battle raged; we were at the heart of it. what should a man remember then but those who counted upon him? now, you have imagined this picture, and you seem to stand with me upon that split of rock, that defiant crag in the great pacific ocean, with the darkness of heaven above and the darkness of the sea below, with the belching guns and the spitting rifles, the yells of agony and the crouching figures, the hearts beating high and the sweating faces; and just as the outcome was hidden from me and i knew not from minute to minute whether it were life or death to us, so will you share the meaning of that suspense and all the terror of it. from every side now the rain of shot was poured in upon us, the unceasing torrent came; above, below, ringing upon the iron shield, scattering deadly fragments, ploughing the waters, it fell like a wave impotent, a broken sea whose spindrift even could not harm us. for a good ring of steel fenced us about; we held the turret, and we laughed at the madness below. "round with the gun!" i would cry, again and again; "round with her, dolly. let them have it everywhere. no favours this night, my lad; full measure and overflowing--let them have it, for miss ruth's sake!" his joyous "aye, aye, sir!" was a thing to hear. no sailor of the old time, black with powder, mad on a slippery deck, fought, i swear, as we four in that shelter of the turret. clear as in the sun's day were the waves about us while the crimson flame leaped out. crouched all together, the sweat upon our foreheads, smoke in our eyes, the wild delight of it quickening us, we blazed at the enemy unseen; we said that right was with us. there were, as far as i could make out, six boats set to the attack upon the great gate, and seventy or eighty men manning them. acting together on such a plan as a master-mind had laid down for them, they tried to rush the rock from four points of the compass, trusting, it may be, that one boat, at least, would land its crew upon the plateau. and in this they were successful. pour shot upon them as we might, search every quarter with the flying shells, nevertheless one boat touched the rock in spite of us, one crew leaped up in frenzy towards the turret. so sudden it was, so unlooked for, that great demoniacal figures seemed upon us even while we said that the seas were clear. whirling their knives, yelling one to the other, some slipping on the slimy weed, others, more sure in foothold, making for the turret's height, the mutineers fell upon us like a hurricane and so beat us down that my heart sank away from me, and i said that the house was lost and little ruth bellenden their prey at last. "stand by the gun--by the gun to the last, if you love your life!" i cried to dolly venn. "do you, peter, old comrade, follow me; i am going to clear the rock. you will help me to do that, peter?" "help you, captain! aye," roared he, "if it was the ould divil himself in a travelling caravan, i'd help you!" he swung his rifle by the barrel as he spoke the words and, bringing it down crash, he cleaved the skull of a great ruffian whose face was already glowering down from the turret's rim. nothing, i swear, in all that night was more wonderful than the _sang-froid_ of this great irishman (as he would call himself in fighting moods) or the merry words which he could find for us even then in the very crisis of it, when hope seemed gone and the worst upon us. for peter knew well what i was about when i leapt from the turret and charged down upon the mutineers. a dozen men, perchance, had gained foothold on the rock. we must drive them back, he said, stand face to face with them, let the odds be what they might. "god strengthen my arm this hour and show me the bald places!" cries he, leaping to the ground and whirling his musket like a demon. seth barker, do not doubt, was on his heels--trust the carpenter to be where danger was! i could hear him grunting even above that awful din. he fought like ten, and wherever he swung his musket there he left death behind him. so follow us as we leap from the turret, and hurl ourselves upon that astonished crew. black as the place was, tremulous the light, nevertheless the cabined space, the open plateau, was our salvation. i saw figures before me; faces seemed to look into my own; and as a battle-axe of old time, so my rifle's butt would fall upon them. heaven knows i had the strength of three and i used it with three's agility, now shooting them down, now hitting wildly, thrust here, thrust there, bullets singing about my ears, haunting cries everywhere. aye, how they went under! what music it was, those crashing blows upon head and breast, the loud report, the gurgling death-rattle, the body thrown into the sea, the pitiful screams for mercy! and yet the greater wonder, perhaps, that we lived to tell of it. twelve against three; yet a craven twelve, remember, who feared to die and yet must fight to live! and to nerve our arms a woman's honour, and to guide us aright, the watchword: "home!" i fought my way to the water's edge, and then turned round to see what the others were doing. there were two upon peter bligh at that moment, but one fell headlong as i took a step towards them; and the other's driving-knife fell on empty air, and the man himself, struck full between the eyes, rolled dead into the lapping sea. "well done, peter, well done!" i cried, wildly; and then, as though it were an answer to my boasts, something fell upon my shoulder like a great weight dropped from above, and i went down headlong upon the rock. turning as i fell, i clutched a human throat, and, closing my fingers upon it, he and i, the man out of the darkness and the fool who had forgotten his eyes, went reeling over and over like wild beasts that seek a hold and would tear and bite when the moment comes. aye, how i held him, how near his eyes seemed to mine, what gasping sounds he uttered, how his feet fought for foothold on the rock, how his hand felt for the knife at his girdle! and i had him always, had him surely; and seeking to force himself upward, the slippery rock gave him no foothold, and he slipped at last from my very fingers, and some great fish, hidden from me, drew him down to the water and i saw the waves close above his mouth. henceforth there were but three men left at the gate of czerny's house. they were three who, even at that time, could thank god because the peril was turned. * * * we beat the twelve off, as i have told you, and for an hour at least no fresh attack was made on the rock. the sharpest eye now could not detect boats in the darkness; the sharpest ear could not distinguish the muffled splash of oars. we lay all together in the turret, and very methodically, as seamen will, we stanched our wounds and asked, "what next?" that we had some hurt of such an affray goes without saying. my own shoulder was bruised and aching; the blood still trickled down peter bligh's honest face from the knife-wound that had gashed his forehead; seth barker pressed his hand to a jagged side and said that it was nothing. but for these scratches we cared little, and when our comrades hailed us from the lesser gate, their "all's well!" made us glad men indeed. in spite of it all, one of us, at least, i witness, could tell himself, "it is possible--by heaven, it is possible--that we shall see the day!" that we had beaten off the first attack was not to be doubted. wherever the mutineers had gone to, they no longer rowed in the loom of the gate. and yet i knew that the time must be short; day would not serve them nor the morning light. the dark must decide it. "they will come again, peter, and it will be before the dawn," said i, when one thing and another had been mentioned and no word of their misfortune. "it's beyond expectation to suppose anything else. if this house is to be taken, they must take it in the dark. and more than that, lads," said i, "it was a foolish thing for us to go among them as we did and to fight it out down yonder. we are safer in the turret--safer, by a long way!" "i thought so all the time, sir," answered dolly venn, wisely. "they can never get below if you cover the door; and i can keep the sea. it's lucky czerny loopholed this place, anyway. if ever i meet him i shall quote poetry: 'he nursed the pinion which impelled the steel.' it would about make him mad, captain!" "aye," says peter bligh, "poetry is well enough, as my poor old father used to say; but poetry never reefed a to'gallon sail in a hurricane and isn't going to begin this night. it's thick heads you need, lad, and good, sound sense inside of 'em! as for what the captain says, i do hold it, truly. but, lord! i'm like a boy at a fair when the crowns are cracking, and angels themselves wouldn't keep me back!" "you'd affright them, mister bligh," puts in, seth barker, "you'd affright them--asking your pardon--with your landgwich!" "what!" cries peter, as though in amazement; "did i say things that oughtn't to be said? well, you surprise me, barker, you do surprise me!" well, i was glad to hear them talk like this, for jest is better than the coward's "if"; and men who can face death with a laugh will win life before your craven any day. but for the prone figures on the rock, looking up with their sightless eyes, or huddled in cleft and cranny--but for them, i say, and distant voices on the sea, and the black shape of ken's island, we four might have been merry comrades in a ship's cabin, smoking a pipe in the morning watch and looking gladly for dawn and a welcome shore. that this content could long endure was, beyond all question, impossible. nevertheless, when next we started up and gripped our rifles and cried "stand by!" it was not any alarm from the sea that brought us to our feet, but a sudden shout from the house below, a rifle-shot echoing in the depths, a woman's voice, and then a man's rejoinder, a figure appearing without any warning at the stairs-head, the figure of a huge man, vast and hulking, with long yellow hair, and fists clenched and arms outstretched--a man who took one scared look round him and then leaped wildly into the sea. now this, you may imagine, was the most surprising event of all that eventful night. so quickly did it come upon us, so little did we look for it, that when kess denton, the yellow man, stood at the open gate and uttered a loud and piercing yell of defiance, not one among us could lift a rifle, not one thought of plan or action. there the fellow was, laughing like a maniac. why he came, whence he came, no man could tell. but he leaped into the seas and the night engulfed him, and only his mocking laugh told us that he lived. "kess denton!" cried i, my head dazed and my words coming in a torrent; "kess denton. then there's mischief below, lads--mischief, i swear!" clair-de-lune answered me--old clair-de-lune, standing in a blaze of light; for they had switched on the lamps below, and the vein of the reef stood out suddenly like some silver monster breathing on the surface of the sea. clair-de-lune answered me, i say, and his words were the most terrible i had heard since first i came to ken's island. "the water is in!" he cried, "the water is in the house!" i saw it as in a flash. this man we had neglected to hunt from the caverns below, striking at us in the supreme moment, had opened trap or window and let the sea pour in the labyrinth below. the water was flooding czerny's house. "now!" i cried, "you don't mean that clair-de-lune? then what of the engine-room? how will it fare with captain nepeen?" doctor gray stood behind the old frenchman, and, limping up to my side, he leaned against the rock and began to speak of it very coolly. "the water is in," he said, "but it will not flood the higher rooms, for they are above sea-level. we are saving what provisions we can, and the men below are all right. as for nepeen, we must get him off in a boat somehow. it is the water i am thinking of, captain; what are we going to do for water?" i sat upon the rock at his side and buried my face in my hands. all that terrible day seemed to culminate in this overwhelming misfortune. driven on the one hand by the sea, on the other by these devils of the darkness, doomed, it might be, to hunger and thirst on that desolate rock, four good comrades cut off from us by the sea's intervening, the very shadows full of dangers, what hope had we, what hope of that brave promise spoken to little ruth but three short hours ago? "doctor," i said at last, "if we are not at the bottom of it now, we never shall be. but we are men, and we will act as men should. let the women stand together in the great hall until the sea drives them out. if water is our need, i am ashore to ken's island to-morrow to get it. as for nepeen, we have a boat and we have hands to man it; we'll fetch captain nepeen, doctor," said i. he nodded his head and appeared to be thinking deeply. old clair-de-lune was the next to utter a sensible thing. "the man flood the house," said he, "but no sure he get to ship. if he drown, czerny know nothing. i say turn out the lamp--wait!" "as true a word as the night has spoken," said i; "if kess denton does not reach the boats, they won't hear the story. we'll keep it close enough, lads, and captain nepeen will learn it soon enough. do you whistle, dolly, and get an answer. i hope to god it is all well with them still." he whistled across the sea, and after a long minute of waiting a distant voice cried, "all's well!" for the hour at least our comrades were safe. should we say the same of them when daylight came? * * * the dark fell with greater intensity as the dawn drew near. i thought that it typified our own black hour, when it seemed that fate had nothing left for us but a grave beneath the seas, or the eternal sleep on the island shore. * * * another hour passed, and the dawn was nearer. i did not know then (though i know now) what kept czerny's crew in the shadows, or why we heard nothing of them. once, indeed, in the far distance where the yacht lay anchored, gunshots were fired, and were answered from some boat lying southward by the island; but no other message of the night was vouchsafed to us, no other omen to be heard. in the gloom of the darkened house women watched, men kept the vigil and prayed for the day. would the light never come; would that breaking east never speed its joyous day? ah! who could tell? who, in the agony of waiting, ever thinks aright or draws the truthful picture? there was no new attack, i say, nor any sure news from the caverns below. from time to time men went to the stairs-head and watched the seas washing green and slimy in the corridors, or spoke of them beating upon the very steps of the great hall and threatening to rise up and up until they engulfed us all and conquered even the citadel we held. nevertheless, iron gates held them back. not vainly had czerny's master-mind foreseen such a misfortune as this. those tremendous doors which divided the upper house from its fellow were stronger than any sluice-gates, more sure against the water's advance. we held the upper house; it was ours while we could breathe in it or find life's sustenance there. now, i saw little ruth in the hour of dawn and she stood with us for a little while at the open gate and there spoke so brightly of to-morrow, so lightly of this hour, that she helped us to forget, and made men of us once more. "they will not come again to-night, jasper," she said; "i feel, i know it! why should they wait? something has happened, and something spells 'good luck.' oh, yes, i have felt that for the last hour. things must be worse before they mend, and they are mending now. the gale will come at dawn and we shall all go ashore, you and i together, jasper!" "miss ruth," said i, "that would be the happiest day in all my life. you bring the dawn always, wherever you go, the good sunlight and god's blue sky! it has been day for me while i heard your voice and said that i might serve you!" she would not answer me; but, as though to give my words their meaning, we had watched but a little while longer on the rock when suddenly out of the east the grey light winged over to us, and, spreading its wonder-rays upon the seas, it rolled the black veil back and showed us height and valley, sea and land, the white-capped breakers and the dim heaven beyond them. many a dawn have i watched and waited for on the heart of the desolate sea, but never one which carried to me such a message as then it spake, the joy of action and release, the tight of life and hope, the clarion call, uplifting, awakening! for i knew that in day our salvation lay, and that the terrible night was forever passed; and every faculty being quickened, the mind alert, the eyes no longer veiled, i stretched out my arms to the sun and said, "thank god!" * * * it was day, and the fresh sea answered its appeal. coming quickly as day will in the great pacific, we had scarce seen that great rim of the east lift itself above the sparkling water when all the scene was opened to us, the picture of ships and water and wave-washed reef made clear as in some scene of stageland. as with one tongue, realizing a mighty truth, we cried, "the ship is gone; the ship has sailed!" it was true, all true. where at sundown there had been a yacht anchored in the offing, now at daybreak no yacht was to be seen. darkness, which had been the ally of czerny's men, had helped the man himself to flee from them to an unknown haven where their vengeance should not reach him. by night had he fled, and by day would he mock his creatures. drifting there in the open boats, the rising seas beginning to wash in upon them, hunger and thirst their portion, the rebels were at no pains to hide their secret from us. we knew that they had been called back by these overwhelming tidings of the master-trick, and we asked what heart the rogues would have now to sell their lives for the man who betrayed them? would they not look to us for the satisfaction the chief rogue denied to them? we, as they, were left helpless in that woful place. before us, as before them, lay the peril of hunger and of thirst, the death-sleep or the greater mercy. and who should ask them to accept it without a last supreme attempt, a final assault, which should mend all or end all? driven to the last point, to the last point would they go to grasp that foothold of the seas and to drive us from the rock whereon life might yet be had. "lads," i said, "the story is there as the man has written it. we have no quarrel with yon poor devils nor they with us; but they will find one. we cannot help them; they cannot help us. we'll wait for the end--just wait for it." i spoke with a confidence which time did not justify. just as the dawn had put new life into us, so it had steeled the hearts of this derelict crew and nerved it for any desperate act. for long we watched the rogues rowing hither, thither; now in the island's shadows, now coming towards us, but never once raising a rifle or uttering a threat. in the end they came all together, waving a sail upon a pole; and while they appeared to row for the lesser gate they accompanied the act with soft words and a protest of their honesty. "'tis after a truce they are," says peter bligh, presently, "and that's a poor thing, any-way. my poor father used to say, 'knock 'em on the head first and sign the papers afterwards.' he was a kind-hearted gentleman, and did a lot of good in the world!" "he must have done, peter," said i; "he must have done a power of good, hearing the little you say about him. 'tis a pity the old gentleman isn't here this day to preach his kindness to yonder rogues. they look in need of a friendly hand; indeed, they do." well, the laugh was turned on peter; but, as a matter of fact, he spoke sense, and i understood as well as he did the risk of parley with the wreckers, even though they did not seem to have any fight left in them--a fact which old clair-de-lune was the first to observe. "they not fire gun this morning," says the old man. "all starve hungry. czerny gone. what for they fight? they no stomach left." "meaning they've no heart in them," puts in doctor gray, at his side. "aye, that's true, and a bit of human nature, too. you cannot fight every day any more than you can make love every day. it comes and goes like a fever. they had their square meal last night, and they are not taking any this morning. i should not be afraid of them if i were you, captain." "i never was," said i, bluntly; "i never was, doctor. there's not enough on my conscience for that. but i do believe you speak truly. making love is more in their line this watch. ask dolly venn there. from what i saw between him and little rosamunda down below, lie's an authority on that point. eh, dolly, lad," said i to him, "you could make love every day, couldn't you?" the lad flushed all over his face at the charge, and peter bligh, he said something about "love one another" being in the bible, "which must mean many of 'em, and not one in particular," says he. and what with the laugh and the jest, and the new confidence which the sight of those poor driven devils put into us, we came all together to the sea's edge, and, scarcely cocking a rifle at them, we hailed the longboats and got their story. "ahoy, there! and what port d'you think you're making for?" cries peter bligh, in a voice that might have split the waters. they replied to him, standing up in the boat and stretching out their sunburnt, hairy arms to us: "water!--water, mate, for the love of god!" "and how do you know," cries peter back to them, "how do you know that we've water for ourselves?" "why, barebones saw to that," says one of them, no doubt meaning czerny thereby; "barebones saw to that, though precious little of it the lubber drank!" "he's off, is barebones," says another; "oh, trust barebones! bones-and-biscuits puts to sea last night, 'cause he's a duty to perform in 'frisco, he 'as. trust bones-and-biscuits to turn up righteous when the trumpet blows!" and another, said he: "i wish i had his black head under my boot this minute! my mouth's all sand and my throat is stuck! aye, mates," says he, "you'll moisten my poor tongue--same as is wrote in the scriptures!" there were other entreaties; some of them spoke to us in french, the most part in german. of the boats that were left, two had rowed away for the lesser gate, but five drifted about our rock and drew so close that we could have tossed a biscuit to them. never have i seen a crowd of faces more repulsive or jowls so repellent. iron-limbed men, fat germans, sleek frenchmen, greeks, niggers, some armed with rifles, some with fearsome knives, they squatted all together in the open boats and roared together for pity and release. then, for the first time, i was able to see how cruelly czerny's gun had dealt with them in the darkness of the night. it was horrible to see the bloody limbs, the open wounds, the matted hair, the gaping faces of these creatures of a desperado's mad ambition. the boats themselves were splintered and hacked as though heavy hatches had beaten them. i could wonder no longer that they called the truce; and yet, knowing why they called it, what was i to do? let them set foot on the plateau, and we, but a handful at the best, might be swept into the sea like flies from a wall. i say that i was at my wits' end. every merciful instinct urged me to give them water; every prudent voice cried, "beat them off." "if there's fight in that lot, i'm as black as yonder nigger!" said peter bligh, when he looked at them a little while, very contemptuously. "not a kick to-day among the lot of them, by jericho! but you cannot give them water, captain," he goes on, "for you've little to give." clair-de-lune, thinking deeper, was, nevertheless, for a stem refusal. "keep them off, captain, that's my advice," says he. "they very desperate, dangerous men. they drink water, then cut throat. make ear deaf and say cistern all empty. they think you die, and they wait, but come aboard--no, by thunder!" now, i knew that this was reason, and when doctor gray and captain nepeen added their words to the frenchman's i stepped down to the water's edge and made my answer. "i'll give you water willingly, men, if you'll show me where it is to be found," said i; "but we cannot give what we haven't got, and that's common sense! we're dry here, and if it's bad luck for one it's bad luck for all. the glass says rain," i went on; "we'll wait for it together and have done with all this nonsense." they heard me to the end; but ignorant, perhaps, of my meaning they continued to whine, "water, water," and when i must repeat that we had no water, one of them, leaping up in the boat, fired his rifle point-blank at captain nepeen, who fell without a word stone-dead at my side. "great god!" said i, "they've shot the captain dead." the suddenness of it was awful; just a gun flashing, a gasping cry, an honest man leaping up and falling lifeless. and then something that would never move or speak again. the crews themselves, i do believe, were as dazed by it as we were. they could have shot us, i witness, where we stood, every man of us, but, in god's mercy, they never thought of that; and turning on their own man, they tore the rifle from his hand and, striking him down with a musket, they sent him headlong into the sea. "witness we've no part in it!" they roared. "jake bilbow did it, and he was always a bad 'un! you won't charge fifty with one man's deed! to hell with the arms, mate--we've no need of 'em!" well, we heard them in amazement. not a man had moved among us; the body was untouched at our feet. from the boats themselves ruffians were casting their rifles pell-mell into the sea. never at the wildest hazard would i have named this for the end of it. they cast their rifles into the sea and rowed unarmed about us. to the end of it, i think, they feared the gun with a fear that was nameless and lasting, nor did they know that the turret was empty--how should they? it was a swift change; to me it seemed as though the day had conjured up this wonder. none the less, the perplexity of it remained, nor could i choose a course even under these new circumstances. of water i had none to give; our own circumstances, indeed, were little better than that of these unhappy creatures in the boats about me. the sea flooded the house below us; the great engine no longer throbbed; our women were huddled together at the stairs-head, seeking air and light; the fogs loom heavy on ken's island; no ship's sail brought hope to our horizon. what should i say, then, to the mutineers, how answer them? i could but protest: "we are as you; we must face it together." * * * now, i have told you that both the greater and the lesser gates of czerny's house were hewn in the pinnacles of rock rising up above the highest tides, and offering there a foothold and an anchorage; but you must not think that these were the only caps of the reef which thrust themselves out to the sea. for there were others, rounded domes of tide-washed rock, treacherous ledges, little craggy steeples, sloping shelves, which low water gave up to the sun and where a man might walk dry-shod. to such strange places the longboats turned when we would have none of them. convinced, may-be, that our own case was no better than theirs, the men, in desperation, and cramped with long confinement in the boats, now pushed their bows into the swirling waters; and following each other, as sheep will follow a leader, they climbed out upon the barren rocks and lay there in a state of dejection defying words. nor had we any heart to turn upon them and drive them off. little did the new day we desired so ardently bring to us. the sky, gloomy above the blackening, angry seas, was like a mock upon our bravest hopes. let a few hours pass and the night would come again. this was but an interlude in which man could ask of man, "what next?" we feared to speak to the women lest they should know the truth. the men crawled upon the sea-washed rocks, i say, and there the judgment of god came upon them. so awful was the scene my eyes were soon to behold that i take up my pen with hesitation even now to write of it; and as i write some figure of the shadows comes before me and seems to say, "you cannot speak of it! it is of the past, forgotten!" and, certainly, if i could make it clear to you how czerny's men were forever driven off from the gate of the house that czerny built, if i could make it clear to you and leave the thing untold, that would i do right gladly. but the end was not of my seeking; in all honesty i can say that if it had been in my power i would have helped those wretched creatures, have dealt out pity to them and carried them to the shore; but it was written otherwise; a higher power decreed it; we could but stand, trembling and helpless, before that enthralling justice. they climbed on the rocks, forty or fifty of them, may-be, and lying in all attitudes, some stretched out full length, some with their arms in the flowing tide, some huddled close as though for warmth, they appeared to surrender themselves to the inevitable and to accept the worst; when, rising up out of the near sea, the first octopus showed himself, and a great tentacle, sliding over the rock, drew one of the mutineers screaming to the depths. thereafter, in an instant, the whole terror was upon them. leaping up together, they uttered piercing cries, turned upon each other in their agony, hurled themselves into the sea, to reach the boats again. god! how few of them touched the befriending prows! the whole water about the reef was now alive with the devilish creatures; a hundred arms, crushing, sucking, swept the unsheltered rocks and drew the victims down. so near were they, some of them, that i could see their staring eyes and distorted limbs as, in the fishes' embracing grip, they were drawn under to the gaping mouths or pressed close to that jellied mass which must devour them. the sea itself heaved and splashed as though to be the moving witness of that horrible attack; foam rushed up to our feet; a blinding spray was in the air; eyes protruded even in the green water; great shapes wormed and twisted, rending one another, covering the whole reef with their filthy slime, sending blinding fountains to the highest pinnacles, or sinking down when their prey was taken to the depths where no eye could follow them. what sounds of pain, what resounding screams, rent the air in those fearful minutes! i draw the veil upon it. for all the gold that the sea washes to-day in czerny's house, i could not look upon such a picture again. for death can be a gentle thing; but there is a death no man may speak of. * * * at twelve o'clock the clouds broke and the rain began to fall upon a rising sea. the vapours still lay thick upon ken's island, but the wind was driving them, and they rolled away in misty clouds westward to the dark horizon. i went below to little ruth, and in broken words i told her all my story. "little ruth, the night is passed, the day is breaking! ah, little ruth!" she fell into my arms, sobbing. the sleep-time was past, indeed; the hour of our deliverance at hand. chapter xxv in which the sun-time comes again i have told you the story of ken's island, but there are some things you will need to know, and of these i will now make mention. let me speak of them in order as they befell. and first i should record that we found the body of edmond czerny, cold and dead, by that pool in the woods where so many have slept the dreadful sleep. clair-de-lune stumbled upon it as we went joyously through the sunny thickets and, halting abruptly, his startled cry drew me to the place. and then i saw the thing, and knew that between him and me the secret lay, and that here was god's justice written in words no man might mistake. for a long time we rested there, looking down upon that grim figure in its bed of leaves, and watching the open eyes seeking that bright heaven whose warmth they never would feel again. as in life, so in death, the handsome face carried the brand of the evil done, and spoke of the ungoverned passions which had wrecked so wonderful a genius. there have been few such men as edmond czerny since the world began; there will be few while the world endures. greatly daring, a man of boundless ambitions, the moral nature obliterated, the greed of money becoming, in the end, like some burning disease, this man, i said, might have achieved much if the will had bent to humanity's laws. and now he had reaped as he sowed. the cloak that covered him was the cloak of the hungarian regiment whose code of honour drove him out of europe. the diamond ring upon the finger was the very ring that little ruth had given him on their wedding-day. the agony he had suffered was such as many a good seaman had endured since the wreckers came to ken's island. and now the story was told: the man was dead. "it must have been last night," i said, at length, to clair-de-lune. "his own men put him ashore and seized the ship. fortune has strange chances, but who would have named such a chance as this? the rogues turned upon him at last, you can't doubt it. and he died in his sleep--a merciful death." the old man shook his head very solemnly. "i know not," said he, slowly; "remember how rare that the island give mercy! we will not ask how he died, captain. i see some-thing, but i forget it. let us leave him to the night." he began to cover the body with branches and boughs; and anon, marking the place, that we might return to it to-morrow, we went on again through the woods, as men in a reverie. our schemes and plans, our hopes and fears, the terrible hours, the unforgotten days, aye, if we could have seen that the end of them would have been this!--the gift of a verdurous island, and the ripe green pastures, and the woods awakening and all the glory of the sun-time reborn! for so the shadow was lifted from us that for a little while our eyes could not see the light; and, unbelieving, we asked, "is this the truth?" * * * i did not tell little ruth the story of the woods; but there were whispered words and looks aside, and she was clever enough to understand them. before the day was out i think she knew; but she would not speak of it, nor would i. for why should we call false sorrow upon that bright hour? was not the world before us, the awakening glory of ken's island at our feet? just as in the dark days all nature had withered and bent before the death-giving vapours, so now did nature answer the sun's appeal; and every freshet bubbling over, every wood alive with the music of the birds, the meadows green and golden, the hills all capped with their summer glory, she proclaimed the reign of nature's god. no sight more splendid ever greeted the eyes of shipwrecked men or welcomed them to a generous shore. hand-in-hand with little ruth i passed from thicket to thicket of the woods, and seemed to stand in paradise itself! and she--ah, who shall read a woman's thoughts at such an hour as that! let me be content to see her as she was; her face grown girlish in that great release, her eyes sparkling in a new joy of being, her step so light that no blade of grass could have been bruised thereby. let me hear her voice again while she lifts her face to mine and asks me that question which even now i hear sometimes: "jasper, jasper! is it real? how can i believe it, jasper? shall we see our home again--you and i? oh, tell me that it is true, jasper--say it often, often, or i shall forget!" we were in a high place of the woods just then, and we stood to look down upon the lower valley where the rocks showed their rare green mosses, and every crag lifted strange flowers to the sun, and little rivulets ran down with bubbling sounds. away on the open veldt the doll-like houses were to be seen, and the ashes of her bungalow. and there, i say, all the scene enchanting me, and the memory of the bygone days blotted from my mind, and no future to be thought of but that which should give me forever the right to befriend this little figure of my dreams, i said: "it is true, little ruth--god knows how true--that a man loves you with all his heart, and he has loved you all through these weary months. just a simple fellow he is, with no fine ways and small knowledge of the world; but he waits for you to tell him that you will lift him up and make him worthy----" she silenced me with a quick, glad cry, and, winding both her arms about my neck, she hid her face from me. "my friend! jasper, dear jasper, you shall not say that! ah, were you so blind that you have not known it from the first?" her words were like the echo of some sweet music in my ears. little ruth, my beloved, had called me "friend." to my life's end would i claim that name most precious. * * * we were picked up by the american war-ship hatteras ten days after the sleep-time passed. i left the island as i found it--its secrets hidden, its mysteries unfathomed. what vapour rises up there--whether it be, as doctor gray would have it, from the bog of decaying vegetation, which breathes fever to the south; whether it be this marsh fog steaming up when the plants die down; or whether it be a subtler cloud given out by the very earth itself--this question, i say, let the learned dispute. i have done with it forever; and never, to my life's end, shall i see its heights and its valleys again. the world calls me; i go to my home. ruth, little ruth, whom i have loved, is at my side. for us it shall be sun-time always; the night and the dreadful sleep are no more. the little savage, by captain marryat. ________________________________________________________________________ captain frederick marryat was born july , and died august . he retired from the british navy in in order to devote himself to writing. in the following years he wrote books, many of which are among the very best of english literature, and some of which are still in print. marryat had an extraordinary gift for the invention of episodes in his stories. he says somewhere that when he sat down for the day's work, he never knew what he was going to write. he certainly was a literary genius. "the little savage" was published in , the twenty-sixth book to flow from marryat's pen. it was completed after his death by a member of his family. it is intended for children, and its religious overtones are in contrast to marryat's other works. he was far from irreligious, but this book is definitely in a different style. this e-book was transcribed in by nick hodson, and was reformatted in , and again in . ________________________________________________________________________ the little savage, by captain frederick marryat. chapter one. i am about to write a very curious history, as the reader will agree with me when he has read this book. we have more than one narrative of people being cast away upon desolate islands, and being left to their own resources, and no works are perhaps read with more interest; but i believe i am the first instance of a boy being left alone upon an uninhabited island. such was, however, the case; and now i shall tell my own story. my first recollections are, that i was in company with a man upon this island, and that we walked often along the sea-shore. it was rocky and difficult to climb in many parts, and the man used to drag or pull me over the dangerous places. he was very unkind to me, which may appear strange, as i was the only companion that he had; but he was of a morose and gloomy disposition. he would sit down squatted in the corner of our cabin, and sometimes not speak for hours,--or he would remain the whole day looking out at the sea, as if watching for something, but what i never could tell; for if i spoke, he would not reply; and if near to him, i was sure to receive a cuff or a heavy blow. i should imagine that i was about five years old at the time that i first recollect clearly what passed. i may have been younger. i may as well here state what i gathered from him at different times, relative to our being left upon this desolate spot. it was with difficulty that i did so; for, generally speaking, he would throw a stone at me if i asked questions, that is, if i repeatedly asked them after he had refused to answer. it was on one occasion, when he was lying sick, that i gained the information, and that only by refusing to attend him or bring him food and water. he would be very angry, and say, that when he got well again, he would make me smart for it; but i cared not, for i was then getting strong, whilst he was getting weaker every day, and i had no love for him, for he had never shown any to me, but always treated me with great severity. he told me, that about twelve years before (not that i knew what he meant by a year, for i had never heard the term used by him), an english ship (i did not know what a ship was) had been swamped near the island in a heavy gale, and that seven men and one woman had been saved, and all the other people lost. that the ship had been broken into pieces, and that they had saved nothing--that they had picked up among the rocks pieces of the wood with which it had been made, and had built the cabin in which we lived. that one had died after another, and had been buried (what death or burial meant, i had no idea at the time); and that i had been born on the island--(how was i born? thought i); that most of them had died before i was two years old; and that then, he and my mother were the only two left besides me. my mother had died a few months afterwards. i was obliged to ask him many questions to understand all this; indeed, i did not understand it till long afterwards, although i had an idea of what he would say. had i been left with any other person, i should, of course, by conversation, have learned much; but he never would converse, still less explain. he called me, boy, and i called him, master. his inveterate silence was the occasion of my language being composed of very few words; for, except to order me to do this or that, to procure what was required, he never would converse. he did, however, mutter to himself, and talk in his sleep, and i used to lie awake and listen, that i might gain information; not at first, but when i grew older. he used to cry out in his sleep constantly: "a judgment, a judgment on me for my sins, my heavy sins! god be merciful!" but what judgement, or what sin was, or what was god, i did not then know, although i mused on words repeated so often. i will now describe the island, and the way in which we lived. the island was very small, perhaps not three miles round; it was of rock, and there was no beach nor landing-place, the sea washing its sides with deep water. it was, as i afterwards discovered, one of the group of islands, to which the peruvians despatch vessels every year to collect the guano, or refuse of the sea-birds which resort to the islands; but the one on which we were was small, and detached some distance from the others, on which the guano was found in great profusion; so that hitherto it had been neglected, and no vessel had ever come near it. indeed, the other islands were not to be seen from it except on a very clear day, when they appeared like a cloud or mist on the horizon. the shores of the island were, moreover, so precipitous, that there was no landing-place, and the eternal wash of the ocean would have made it almost impossible for a vessel to have taken off a cargo. such was the island upon which i found myself in company with this man. our cabin was built of ship-plank and timber, under the shelter of a cliff, about fifty yards from the water; there was a flat of about thirty yards square in front of it, and from the cliff there trickled down a rill of water, which fell into a hole dug out to collect it, and then found its way over the flat to the rocks beneath. the cabin itself was large, and capable of holding many more people than had ever lived in it; but it was not too large, as we had to secure in it our provisions for many months. there were several bed-places level with the floor, which were rendered soft enough to lie on, by being filled with the feathers of birds. furniture there was none, except two or three old axes, blunted with long use, a tin pannikin, a mess kid, and some rude vessels to hold water, cut out of wood. on the summit of the island, there was a forest of underwood, and the bushes extended some distance down the ravines which led from the summit to the shore. one of my most arduous tasks was to climb these ravines and collect wood, but fortunately a fire was not often required. the climate was warm all the year round, and there seldom was a fall of rain; when it did fall, it was generally expended on the summit of the island, and did not reach us. at a certain period of the year, the birds came to the island in numberless quantities to breed, and their chief resort was some tolerably level ground--indeed, in many places, it was quite level with the accumulation of guano--which ground was divided from the spot where our cabin was built by a deep ravine. on this spot, which might perhaps contain about twenty acres or more, the sea-birds would sit upon their eggs, not four inches apart from each other, and the whole surface of this twenty acres would be completely covered with them. there they would remain, from the time of the laying of the eggs, until the young ones were able to leave the nests and fly away with them. at the season when the birds were on the island, all was gaiety, bustle; and noise, but after their departure it was quiet and solitude. i used to long for their arrival, and was delighted with the animation which gladdened the island, the male birds diving in every direction after fish, wheeling and soaring in the air, and uttering loud cries, which were responded to by their mates on the nests. but it was also our harvest time; we seldom touched the old birds, as they were not in flesh, but as soon as the young ones were within a few days of leaving the nests, we were then busy enough. in spite of the screaming and the flapping of their wings in our faces, and the darting their beaks at our eyes, of the old birds, as we robbed them of their progeny, we collected hundreds every day, and bore as heavy a load as we could carry across the ravine to the platform in front of our cabin, where we busied ourselves in skinning them, splitting them, and hanging them out to dry in the sun. the air of the island was so pure that no putrefaction ever took place, and during the last fortnight of the birds coming on the island, we had collected a sufficiency for our support until their return on the following year. as soon as they were quite dry they were packed up in a corner of the cabin for use. these birds were, it may be said, the only produce of the island, with the exception of fish, and the eggs taken at the time of their first making their nests. fish were to be taken in large quantities. it was sufficient to put a line over the rocks, and it had hardly time to go down a fathom before anything at the end of it was seized. indeed, our means of taking them were as simple as their voracity was great. our lines were composed of the sinews of the legs of the man-of-war birds, as i afterwards heard them named; and, as these were only about a foot long, it required a great many of them knotted together to make a line. at the end of the line was a bait fixed over a strong fish-bone, which was fastened to the line by the middle; a half-hitch of the line round one end kept the bone on a parallel with the line until the bait was seized, when the line being tautened, the half-hitch slipped off and the bone remained crossways in the gullet of the fish, which was drawn up by it. simple as this contrivance was, it answered as well as the best hook, of which i had never seen one at that time. the fish were so strong and large, that, when i was young, the man would not allow me to attempt to catch them, lest they should pull me into the water; but, as i grew bigger i could master them. such was our food from one year's end to the other; we had no variety, except when occasionally we broiled the dried birds or the fish upon the embers, instead of eating them dried by the sun. our raiment, such as it was, we were also indebted to the feathered tribe for. the birds were skinned with the feathers on, and their skins sewn together with sinews, and a fish-bone by way of a needle. these garments were not very durable, but the climate was so fine that we did not suffer from the cold at any season of the year. i used to make myself a new dress every year when the birds came; but by the time that they returned, i had little left of my last year's suit, the fragments of which might be found among the rocky and steep parts of the ravine where we used to collect firing. living such a life, with so few wants, and those periodically and easily supplied, hardly varied from one year's end to another, it may easily be imagined that i had but few ideas. i might have had more, if my companion had not been of such a taciturn and morose habit; as it was, i looked at the wide ocean, and the sky, and the sun, moon, and stars, wondering, puzzled, afraid to ask questions, and ending all by sleeping away a large portion of my existence. we had no tools except the old ones, which were useless--no employment of any kind. there was a book, and i asked what it was for and what it was, but i got no answer. it remained upon the shelf, for if i looked at it i was ordered away, and at last i regarded it with a sort of fear, as if it were a kind of incomprehensible animal. the day was passed in idleness and almost silence; perhaps not a dozen sentences were exchanged in the twenty-four hours; my companion always the same, brooding over something which appeared ever to occupy his thoughts, and angry if roused up from his reverie. chapter two. the reader must understand that the foregoing remarks are to be considered as referring to my position and amount of knowledge when i was seven or eight years old. my master, as i called him, was a short square-built man, about sixty years of age, as i afterwards estimated from recollection and comparison. his hair fell down his back in thick clusters and was still of a dark colour, and his beard was full two feet long and very bushy; indeed, he was covered with hair, wherever his person was exposed. he was, i should say, very powerful had he had occasion to exert his strength, but with the exception of the time at which we collected the birds, and occasionally going up the ravine to bring down faggots of wood, he seldom moved out of the cabin, unless it was to bathe. there was a pool of salt-water of about twenty yards square, near the sea, but separated from it by a low ridge of rocks, over which the waves only beat when the sea was rough and the wind on that side of the island. every morning almost we went down to bathe in that pool, as it was secure from the sharks, which were very numerous. i could swim like a fish as early as i can recollect, but whether i was taught, or learned myself, i cannot tell. thus was my life passed away; my duties were trifling; i had little or nothing to employ myself about, for i had no means of employment. i seldom heard the human voice, and became as taciturn as my companion. my amusements were equally confined--looking down into the depths of the ocean, as i lay over the rocky wall which girted the major portion of the island, and watching the motions of the finny tribes below, wondering at the stars, during the night season, eating, and sleeping. thus did i pass away an existence without pleasure and without pain. as for what my thoughts were i can hardly say, my knowledge and my ideas were too confined for me to have any food for thought. i was little better than a beast of the field, who lies down on the pasture after he is filled. there was one great source of interest, however, which was to listen to the sleeping talk of my companion, and i always looked forward to the time when the night fell and we repaired to our beds. i would lie awake for hours, listening to his ejaculations and murmured speech, trying in vain to find out some meaning in what he would say--but i gained little; he talked of "that woman"--appearing to be constantly with other men, and muttering about something he had hidden away. one night, when the moon was shining bright, he sat up in his bed, which, as i have before said, was on the floor of the cabin, and throwing aside the feathers upon which he had been lying, scratched the mould away below them and lifted up a piece of board. after a minute he replaced everything, and lay down again. he evidently was sleeping during the whole time. here, at last, was something to feed my thoughts with. i had heard him say in his sleep that he had hidden something--this must be the hiding-place. what was it? perhaps i ought here to observe that my feelings towards this man were those of positive dislike, if not hatred; i never had received one kind word or deed from him, that i could recollect. harsh and unfeeling towards me, evidently looking upon me with ill-will, and only suffering me because i saved him some trouble, and perhaps because he wished to have a living thing for his companion, his feelings towards me were reciprocated by mine towards him. what age i was at the time my mother died, i know not, but i had some faint recollection of one who treated me with kindness and caresses, and these recollections became more forcible in my dreams, when i saw a figure very different from that of my companion (a female figure) hanging over me or leading me by the hand. how i used to try to continue those dreams, by closing my eyes again after i had woke up! and yet i knew not that they had been brought about by the dim recollection of my infancy; i knew not that the figure that appeared to me was the shadow of my mother; but i loved the dreams because i was treated kindly in them. but a change took place by the hand of providence. one day, after we had just laid in our yearly provision of sea-birds, i was busy arranging the skins of the old birds, on the flat rock, for my annual garment, which was joined together something like a sack, with holes for the head and arms to pass through; when, as i looked to seaward, i saw a large white object on the water. "look, master," said i, pointing towards it. "a ship, a ship!" cried my companion. "oh," thought i, "that is a ship; i recollect that he said they came here in a ship." i kept my eyes on her, and she rounded to. "is she alive?" inquired i. "you're a fool," said the man; "come and help me to pile up this wood, that we may make a signal to her. go and fetch some water and throw on it, that there may be plenty of smoke. thank god, i may leave this cursed hole at last!" i hardly understood him, but i went for the water and brought it in the mess kid. "i want more wood yet," said he. "her head is this way, and she will come nearer." "then she is alive," said i. "away, fool!" said he, giving me a cuff on the head; "get some more water and throw on the wood." he then went into the cabin to strike a light, which he obtained by a piece of iron and flint, with some fine dry moss for tinder. while he was so employed, my eyes were fixed on the vessel, wondering what it could be. it moved through the water, turned this way and that. "it must be alive," thought i; "is it a fish or a bird?" as i watched the vessel, the sun was going down, and there was not more than an hour's daylight. the wind was very light and variable, which accounted for the vessel so often altering her course. my companion came out with his hands full of smoking tinder, and putting it under the wood, was busy blowing it into a flame. the wood was soon set fire to, and the smoke ascended several feet into the air. "they'll see that," said he. "what then, it has eyes? it must be alive. does it mind the wind?" inquired i, having no answer to my first remark, "for look there, the little clouds are coming up fast," and i pointed to the horizon, where some small clouds were rising up, and which were, as i knew from experience and constantly watching the sky, a sign of a short but violent gale, or tornado, of which we usually had one, if not two, at this season of the year. "yes; confound it," replied my companion, grinding his teeth, "it will blow her off! that's my luck." in the meantime, the smoke ascended in the air and the vessel approached nearer and nearer, until she was within, i suppose, two miles of the island, and then it fell quite calm. my companion threw more water on to increase the smoke, and the vessel now hauling up her courses, i perceived that there were people on board, and while i was arranging my ideas as to what the vessel might be, my companion cried out--"they see us, they see us! there's hope now. confound it, i've been here long enough. hurrah for old england!" and he commenced dancing and capering about like a madman. at last he said: "look out, and see if she sends a boat, while i go into the cabin." "what's a boat?" said i. "out, you fool! tell me if you see anything." "yes, i do see something," replied i. "look at the squall coming along the water, it will be here very soon; and see how thick the clouds are getting up: we shall have as much wind and rain as we had the time before last, when the birds came." "confound it," replied he, "i wish they'd lower a boat, at all events;" and so saying, he went into the cabin, and i perceived that he was busy at his bed-place. my eyes were still fixed upon the squall, as i watched it advancing at a furious speed on the surface of the water; at first it was a deep black line on the horizon, but as it approached the vessel, changed to white; the surface of the water was still smooth. the clouds were not more than ten degrees above the horizon, although they were thick and opaque but at this season of the year, these tornados, as i may call them, visited us; sometimes we had one, sometimes more, and it was only when these gusts came on that we had any rain below. on board of the vessel--i speak now from my after knowledge--they did not appear to be aware of the danger the sails were all set and flapping against the masts. at last, i perceived a small object close to the vessel; this i presumed was the boat which my companion looked for. it was like a young vessel close to the old one, but i said nothing, as i was watching and wondering what effect the rising wind would have upon her; for the observations of my companion had made me feel that it was important. after a time, i perceived that the white sails were disappearing, and that the forms of men were very busy, and moving on board, and the boat went back to the side of the vessel. the fact is, they had not perceived the squall until it was too late, for in another moment almost, i saw that the vessel bowed down to the fury of the gale, and after that, the mist was so great that i couldn't see her any more. "is she sending a boat, boy?" cried my companion. "i can't see her," replied i; "for she is hidden by the wind." as i said this, the tornado reached to where we stood, and threw me off my legs to the entrance of the cabin; and with the wind came down a torrent of rain, which drenched us, and the clouds covered the whole of the firmament, which became dark; the lightning darted in every direction, with peals of thunder which were deafening. i crawled into the cabin, into which the rain beat in great fury and flowed out again in a small river. my companion sat near me, lowering and silent. for two hours, the tornado lasted without interruption; the sun had set, and the darkness was opaque. it was impossible to move against the force of the wind and the deluge of water which descended. speak we did not, but shut our eyes against the lightning, and held our fingers to our ears to deaden the noise of the thunder, which burst upon us in the most awful manner. my companion groaned at intervals, whether from fear, i know not; i had no fear, for i did not know the danger, or that there was a god to judge the earth. gradually the fury of the gale abated, the rain was only heavy at intervals, and we could now hear the beating of the waves, as they dashed against the rocks beneath us. the sky also cleared up a little, and we could dimly discern the white foam of the breakers. i crawled out of the cabin, and stood upon the platform in front, straining my eyes to see the vessel: a flash of lightning for a second revealed her to me; she was dismasted, rolling in the awful breakers, which bore her down upon the high rocks not a quarter of a mile from her. "there it is," exclaimed i, as the disappearance of the lightning left me in darkness, more opaque than ever. "she's done for," growled my companion, who, i was not till then aware, stood by my side. "no hopes this time, confound it!" then he continued for some time to curse and swear awfully, as i afterwards discovered, for i did not then know what was cursing and swearing. "there she is again," said i, as another flash of lightning revealed the position of the vessel. "yes, and she won't be there long; in five minutes she'll be dashed to atoms and every soul perish." "what are souls?" inquired i. my companion gave me no reply. "i will go down to the rocks," said i, "and see what goes on." "what," said he, "and share their fate?" chapter three. i left him, and commenced a careful descent of the precipices by which we were surrounded, but, before i had gone fifty paces, another flash of lightning was followed up by a loud shriek, which arrested my steps. where the noise came from i could not tell, but i heard my companion calling to me to come back. i obeyed him, and found him standing where i had left him. "you called me, master?" "yes, i did; take my hand and lead me to the cabin." i obeyed him, wondering why he asked me so to do. he gained his bed-place, and threw himself down on it. "bring the kid full of water," said he--"quick!" i brought it, and he bathed his head and face. after a time, he threw himself back upon the bed-place, and groaned heavily. "o god! it's all over with me," said he at last. "i shall live and die in this cursed hole." "what's the matter, master?" said i. he gave me no answer, but lay groaning and occasionally cursing. after a time, he was still, and then i went out again. the tornado was now over, and the stars were to be seen here and there, but still the wind was strong and the wild clouds flew fast. the shores of the island were one mass of foam, which was dashed high in the air and fell upon the black rocks. i looked for the vessel, and could see nothing--the day was evidently dawning, and i sat down and waited its coming. my companion was apparently asleep, for he lay without motion or noise. that some misfortune had happened, i was convinced, but what i knew not, and i passed a long time in conjecture, dividing my thoughts between him and the vessel. at last the daylight appeared--the weather was moderating fast, although the waves still beat furiously against the rocky shore. i could see nothing of the vessel, and i descended the path, now slippery and insecure from the heavy fall of rain, and went as near to the edge of the rocks as the breaking billows would permit. i walked along, occasionally drenched by the spray, until i arrived where i had last seen the vessel. the waves were dashing and tossing about, as if in sport, fragments of timber, casks, and spars; but that was all i could see, except a mast and rigging, which lay alongside of the rocks, sometimes appearing above them on the summit of the waves, then descending far out of my sight, for i dared not venture near enough to the edge to look over. "then the vessel is dashed to pieces, as my companion said," thought i. "i wonder how she was made." i remained about an hour on the rocks, and then turned back to the cabin. i found my companion awake, and groaning heavily. "there is no ship," said i, "nothing but pieces of wood floating about." "i know that," replied he; "but what do i care now?" "i thought by your making a smoke, that you did care." "yes, i did then, but now i am blind, i shall never see a ship or anything else again. god help me! i shall die and rot on this cursed island." "blind, what is blind?" inquired i. "the lightning has burned out my eyes, and i can see nothing--i cannot help myself--i cannot walk about--cannot do anything, and i suppose you will leave me here to die like a dog." "can't you see me?" "no, all is dark, dark as night, and will be as long as i live." and he turned on his bed-place and groaned. "i had hope, i lived in hope--it has kept me alive for many weary years, but now hope is gone, and i care not if i die to-morrow." and then he started up and turned his face towards me, and i saw that there was no light in his eyes. "bring me some more water, do you hear?" said he angrily. "be quick, or i'll make you." but i now fully comprehended his condition and how powerless he was. my feelings, as i have before said, were anything but cordial towards him, and this renewed violence and threatening manner had its effect. i was now, i suppose, about twelve or thirteen years old--strong and active. i had more than once felt inclined to rebel, and measure my strength against his. irritated, therefore, at his angry language, i replied-- "go for the water yourself." "ah!" sighed he, after a pause of some seconds, "that i might have expected. but let me once get you into my hands, i'll make you remember it." "i care not if i were in your hands," replied i; "i am as strong as you." for i had thought so many a day, and meant to prove it. "indeed! well, come here, and let us try." "no, no," replied i, "i'm not such a fool as you say i am--not that i'm afraid of you; for i shall have an axe in my hand always ready, and you will not find another." "i wish that i had tossed you over the cliffs when you were a child," said he, bitterly, "instead of nursing you and bringing you up." "then why have you not been kind to me? as far back as i can remember you have always treated me ill; you have made me work for you; and yet never even spoken kindly to me. i have wanted to know things, and you have never answered my questions, but called me a fool, and told me to hold my tongue. you have made me hate you; and you have often told me how you hated me--you know you have." "it's true, quite true," replied he, as if talking to himself. "i have done all that he says, and i have hated him. but i have had cause. come here, boy." "no;" replied i, "do you come here. you have been master, and i have been boy, long enough. now i am master and you are boy, and you shall find it so." having said this, i walked out of the cabin and left him. he cried out, "don't leave me;" but i heeded him not, and sat down at the edge of the flat ledge of the rock before the cabin. looking at the white dancing waves, and deep in my own thoughts, i considered a long while how i should behave towards him. i did not wish him to die, as i knew he must if i left him. he could not obtain water from the rill without a great chance of falling over the cliff. in fact, i was now fully aware of his helpless state; to prove it to myself, i rose and shut my own eyes; tried if i could venture to move on such dangerous ground, and i felt sure that i could not. he was then in my power; he could do nothing; he must trust to me for almost everything. i had said, let what would follow, i would be master and he boy; but that could not be, as i must still attend upon him, or he would die. at last the thought came suddenly upon me--i will be master, nevertheless, for now he shall answer me all my questions, tell me all he knows, or he shall starve. he is in my power. he shall now do what i have ever tried to make him do, and he has ever refused. having thus arranged my plans, i returned to the cabin, and said to him: "hear what i say--i will be kind to you, and not leave you to starve, if you will do what i ask." "and what is that?" replied he. "for a long while i have asked you many questions, and you have refused to answer them. instead of telling me what i would know, you have beaten me or thrown stones at me, called me names, and threatened me. i now give you your choice--either you shall promise to answer every question that i put to you, or you may live how you can, for i shall leave you to help yourself. if you do as i wish, i will do all i can to help you, but if you will not, thank yourself for what may happen. recollect, i am master now; so take your choice." "well," replied he, slowly, "it's a judgment upon me, and i must agree to it. i will do what you wish." "well, then, to begin," said i, "i have often asked you what your name was, and what was mine. i must call you something, and master i will not, for i am master now. what is your name?" he groaned, ground his teeth, and then said, "edward jackson." "edward jackson! very well; and my name?" "no, i cannot bear the name. i cannot say it," replied he angrily. "it it so," replied i. "then i leave you." "will you bring me some water for my eyes? they burn," said he. "no, i will not, nor anything else, unless you tell me my name." "frank henniker--and curses on it!" "frank henniker. well, now you shall have the water." i went out, filled a kid, and put it by his side. "there is the water, jackson; if you want anything, call me. i shall be outside." "i have gained the mastery," thought i,--"it will be my turn now. he don't like to answer, but he shall, or he shall starve. why does he feel so angry at my name? henniker! what is the meaning of henniker, i wonder? i will make him tell me. yes, he shall tell me everything." i may here observe, that as for pity and compassion, i did not know such feelings. i had been so ill-treated, that i only felt that might was right; and this right i determined upon exercising to the utmost. i felt an inconceivable pleasure at the idea of my being the master, and he the boy. i felt the love of power, the pride of superiority. i then revolved in my mind the daily task which i would set him before he should receive his daily sustenance. he should talk now as much as i pleased, for i was the master. i had been treated as a slave, and i was now fully prepared to play the tyrant. mercy and compassion i knew not. i had never seen them called forth, and i felt them not. i sat down on the flat rock for some time, and then it occurred to me that i would turn the course of the water which fell into the hole at the edge of the cliff; so that if he crawled there, he would not be able to obtain any. i did so, and emptied the hole. the water was now only to be obtained by climbing up, and it was out of his power to obtain a drop. food, of course, he could obtain, as the dried birds were all piled up at the farther end of the cabin, and i could not well remove them; but what was food without water? i was turning in my mind what should be the first question put to him; and i had decided that i would have a full and particular account of how the vessel had been wrecked on the island, and who were my father and mother, and why i was named henniker--when i was roused by hearing jackson (as i shall in future call him) crying out, "boy, boy!" "boy, indeed," thought i--"no longer boy," and i gave no reply. again he called, and at last he cried out "henniker," but i had been ruffled by his calling me boy, and i would not answer him. at last he fairly screamed my name, and then was silent. after a moment, i perceived that he crawled out of his bed-place, and feeling by the sides of the cabin, contrived on his hands and knees to crawl in the direction of the hole into which the water had previously been received; and i smiled at what i knew would be his disappointment when he arrived there. he did so at last: put his hand to feel the edge of the hole, and then down into it to feel for the water; and when he found that there was none, he cursed bitterly, and i laughed at his vexation. he then felt all the way down where the water had fallen, and found that the course of it had been stopped, and he dared not attempt anything further. he dashed his clenched hand against the rock. "oh! that i had him in this grasp--if it were but for one moment. i would not care if i died the next." "i do not doubt you," replied i to him, above; "but you have not got me in your hands, and you will not. go in to bed directly--quick," cried i, throwing a piece of rock at him, which hit him on the head. "crawl back as fast as you can, you fool, or i'll send another at your head directly. i'll tame you, as you used to say to me." the blow on the head appeared to have confused him; but after a time he crawled back to his bed-place, and threw himself down with a heavy groan. chapter four. i then went down to the water's edge to see if i could find anything from the wreck, for the water was smooth, and no longer washed over the rocks of the island. except fragments of wood, i perceived nothing until i arrived at the pool where we were accustomed to bathe; and i found that the sea had thrown into it two articles of large dimensions-- one was a cask of the size of a puncheon, which lay in about a foot of water farthest from the seaward; and the other was a seaman's chest. what these things were i did not then know, and i wish the reader to recollect that a great portion of this narrative is compiled from after knowledge. the cask was firm in the sand, and i could not move it. the chest was floating; i hauled it on the rocks without difficulty, and then proceeded to open it. it was some time before i could discover how, for i had never seen a lock or a hinge in my life; but at last, finding that the lid was the only portion of the chest which yielded, i contrived, with a piece of rock, to break it open. i found in it a quantity of seamen's clothes, upon which i put no value; but some of the articles i immediately comprehended the use of, and they filled me with delight. there were two new tin pannikins, and those would hold water. there were three empty wine-bottles, a hammer, a chisel, gimlet, and some other tools, also three or four fishing-lines many fathoms long. but what pleased me most were two knives, one shutting up, with a lanyard sheath to wear round the waist; and the other an american long knife, in a sheath, which is usually worn by them in the belt. now, three or four years back, jackson had the remains of a clasp knife--that is, there was about an inch of the blade remaining--and this, as may be supposed, he valued very much; indeed, miserable as the article was, in our destitute state it was invaluable. this knife he had laid on the rock when fishing, and it had been dragged into the sea as his line ran out; and he was for many days inconsolable for its loss. we had used it for cutting open the birds when we skinned them, and, indeed, this remains of a knife had been always in request. since the loss of it, we had had hard work to get the skins off the birds; i therefore well knew the value of these knives, which i immediately secured. the remainder of the articles in the chest, which was quite full, i laid upon the rocks, with the clothes, to dry; of most of them i did not know the use, and consequently did not prize them at the time. it was not until afterwards, when i had taken them to my companion, that i learned their value. i may as well here observe, that amongst these articles were two books, and from the positive commands of my companion, not to touch the book in the cabin, i looked upon them with a degree of awe, and hesitated upon taking them in my hand; but, at last, i put them out to dry on the rocks, with the rest of the contents of the chest. i felt the knives, the blades were sharp; i put the lanyard of the clasp knife round my neck; the sheath knife, which was a formidable weapon, i made fast round my waist, with a piece of the fishing-lines, which i cut off; and i then turned my steps towards the cabin, as night was coming on, though the moon was high in the heavens, and shining brightly. on my return, i found jackson in his bed-place; he heard me come in, and asked me in a quiet tone, whether i would bring him some water. i answered-- "no, that i would not, for what he had said about me, and what he would do if he got me into his power. i'll tame you," cried i. "i'm master now, as you shall find." "you may be," replied he, quickly, "but still that is no reason why you should not let me have some water. did i ever prevent you from having water?" "you never had to fetch it for me," i rejoined, "or you would not have taken the trouble. what trouble would you take for me, if i were blind now and not you? i should become of no use to you, and you would leave me to die. you only let me live that you might make me work for you, and beat me cruelly. it's my turn now--you're the boy, and i'm the master." the reader must remember that i did not know the meaning of the word "boy;" my idea of it was, that it was in opposition to "master," and boy, with me, had the same idea as the word "slave." "be it so," replied he, calmly. "i shall not want water long." there was a quietness about jackson which made me suspect him, and the consequence was, that, although i turned into my bed-place, which was on the ground at the side of the cabin opposite to his, i did not feel inclined to go to sleep, but remained awake, thinking of what had passed. it was towards morning when i heard him move; my face being turned that way, i had no occasion to stir to watch his motions. he crept very softly out of his bed-place towards me, listening, and advancing on his knees, not more than a foot every ten seconds. "you want me in your grasp," thought i; "come along," and i drew my american knife from its sheath, without noise, and awaited his approach, smiling at the surprise he would meet with. i allowed him to come right up to me; he felt the side of my bed, and then passed his right hand over to seize me. i caught his right hand with my left, and passing the knife across his wrist, more than half divided it from his arm. he gave a shriek of surprise and pain, and fell back. "he has a knife," exclaimed he, with surprise, holding his severed wrist with the other hand. "yes, he has a knife, and more than one," replied i; "and you see that he knows how to use it. will you come again? or will you believe that i am master?" "if you have any charity or mercy, kill me at once," said he, as he sat up in the moonlight, in the centre of the floor of the cabin. "charity and mercy," said i, "what are they? i never heard of them." "alas! no," replied he, "i have showed none--it's a judgment on me--a judgment on me for my many sins; lord, forgive me! first my eyes, now my right hand useless. what next, o lord of heaven?" "why, your other hand next," replied i, "if you try it again." jackson made no reply. he attempted to crawl back to his bed, but, faint with loss of blood, he dropped senseless on the floor of the cabin. i looked at him, and, satisfied that he would make no more attempts upon me, i turned away, and fell fast asleep. in about two hours i awoke, and looking round, perceived him lying on the floor, where he had fallen the night before. i went to him and examined him-- was he asleep; or was he dead? he lay in a pool of blood. i felt him, and he was quite warm. it was a ghastly cut on his wrist, and i thought, if he is dead, he will never tell me what i want to know. i knew that he bound up cuts to stop the blood. i took some feathers from the bed, and put a handful on the wound. after i had done it, i bound his wrist up with a piece of fishing-line i had taken to secure the sheath knife round my waist, and then i went for some water. i poured some down his throat; this revived him, and he opened his eyes. "where am i?" said he, faintly. "where are you?--why, in the cabin," said i. "give me some more water." i did so, for i did not wish to kill him. i wanted him to live, and to be in my power. after drinking the water, he roused himself, and crawled back to his bed-place. i left him then, and went down to bathe. the reader may exclaim--what a horrid tyrant this boy is--why, he is as bad as his companion. exactly--i was so; but let the reader reflect that i was made so by education. from the time that i could first remember, i had been tyrannised over; cuffed, kicked, abused, and ill-treated. i had never known kindness. most truly was the question put by me, "charity and mercy--what are they?" i never heard of them. an american indian has kind feelings--he is hospitable and generous-- yet, educated to inflict, and receive, the severest tortures to, and from, his enemies, he does the first with the most savage and vindictive feelings, and submits to the latter with indifference and stoicism. he has, indeed, the kindlier feelings of his nature exercised; still, this changes him not. he has been from earliest infancy brought up to cruelty, and he cannot feel that it is wrong. now, my position was worse. i had never seen the softer feelings of our nature called into play; i knew nothing but tyranny and oppression, hatred and vengeance. it was therefore, not surprising that when my turn came, i did to others as i had been done by. jackson had no excuse for his treatment of me, whereas i had every excuse for retaliation. he did know better, i did not. i followed the ways of the world in the petty microcosm in which i had been placed. i knew not of mercy, of forgiveness, charity, or good-will. i knew not that there was a god; i only knew that might was right, and the most pleasurable sensation which i felt was that of anxiety for vengeance, combined with the consciousness of power. after i had bathed, i again examined the chest and its contents. i looked at the books without touching them. "i must know what these mean," thought i, "and i will know." my thirst for knowledge was certainly most remarkable, in a boy of my age; i presume for the simple reason, that we want most what we cannot obtain; and jackson having invariably refused to enlighten me on any subject, i became most anxious and impatient to satisfy the longing which increased with my growth. chapter five. for three days did jackson lie on his bed; i supplied him with water, but he did not eat anything. he groaned heavily at times, and talked much to himself, and i heard him ask forgiveness of god, and pardon for his sins. i noted this down for an explanation. on the third day, he said to me: "henniker, i am very ill. i have a fever coming on, from the wound you have given me. i do not say that i did not deserve it, for i did, and i know that i have treated you ill; and that you must hate me; but the question is, do you wish me to die?" "no," replied i, "i want you to live, and answer all my questions, and you shall do so." "i will do so," replied he. "i have done wrong, and i will make amends. do you understand me? i mean to say, that i have been very cruel to you, and now i will do all you wish, and answer every question you may put to me, as well as i can." "that is what i want," replied i. "i know it is, but my wound is festering, and must be washed and dressed. the feathers make it worse. will you do this for me?" i thought a little, and recollected that he was still in my power, as he could not obtain water. i replied, "yes, i will." "the cord hurts it, you must take it off." i fetched the kid of water, and untied the cord, and took away the feathers, which had matted together with the flow of blood, and then i washed the wound carefully. looking into the wound, my desire of information induced me to say, "what are these little white cords which are cut through?" "they are the sinews and tendons," replied he, "by which we are enabled to move our hands and fingers; now these are cut through, i shall not have the use of my hand again." "stop a moment," said i, rising up, "i have just thought of something." i ran down to the point where the chest lay, took a shirt from the rock, and brought it back with me, and tearing it into strips, i bandaged the wound. "where did you get that linen?" said jackson. i told him. "and you got the knife there, too," said he, with a sigh. i replied in the affirmative. as soon as i had finished, he told me he was much easier, and said: "i thank you." "what is, i thank you?" replied i. "it means that i am grateful for what you have done." "and what is grateful?" inquired i again. "you never said those words to me before." "alas, no," replied he, "it had been better if i had. i mean that i feel kindly towards you, for having bound up my wound, and would do any thing for you if i had the power. it means, that if i had my eyesight, as i had a week ago, and was master, as i then was, that i would not kick nor beat you, but be kind to you. do you understand me?" "yes," replied i, "i think i do; and if you tell me all i want to know, i shall believe you." "that i will as soon as i am well enough; but now i am too ill--you must wait a day or two, till the fever has left me." satisfied with jackson's promise, i tended him carefully, and washed and dressed his wound for the two following days. he said that he felt himself much better, and his language to me was so kind and conciliatory, that i hardly knew what to make of it; but this is certain, that it had a good effect upon me, and gradually the hatred and ill-will that i bore to him wore off, and i found myself handling him tenderly, and anxious not to give him more pain than was necessary, yet without being aware that i was prompted by better feelings. it was on the third morning that he said-- "i can talk to you now; what do you want to know?" "i want to know the whole story of how we came to this island, who my father and mother were, and why you said that you hated me and my name?" "that," said jackson, after a silence of a few minutes, "will take some time. i could soon tell it you, if it were not for the last question,-- why i hated your name? but the history of your father is so mixed up with mine, that i cannot well tell one without the other. i may as well begin with my own history, and that will be telling you both." "then tell it me," replied i, "and do not tell me what is not true." "no; i will tell you exactly what it was," replied jackson; "you may as well know it as not.--your father and i were both born in england, which you know is your country by birth, and you also know that the language we talk is english." "i did not know it. tell me something about england before you say any more." i will not trouble the reader with jackson's description of england, or the many questions which i put to him. it was night-fall before he had finished answering, and before i was satisfied with the information imparted. i believe that he was very glad to hold his tongue, for he complained of being tired, and i dressed his wound and wetted the bandage with cold water for him before he went to sleep. i can hardly describe to the reader the effect which this uninterrupted flow of language had upon me; i was excited in a very strange way, and for many nights after could not sleep for hours. i may say here, i did not understand a great proportion of the meaning of the words used by jackson; but i gathered it from the context, as i could not always be interrupting him. it is astonishing how fast ideas breed ideas, and how a word, the meaning of which i did not understand when it was first used, became by repetition clear and intelligible; not that i always put the right construction on it; but if i did not find it answer when used at another time to my former interpretation of it, i would then ask and obtain an explanation. this did not, however, occur very often. as for this first night, i was positively almost drunk with words, and remained nearly the whole of it arranging and fixing the new ideas that i had acquired. my feelings towards jackson also were changed--that is, i no longer felt hatred or ill-will against him. these were swallowed up in the pleasure which he had afforded me, and i looked upon him as a treasure beyond all price,--not but that many old feelings towards him returned at intervals, for they were not so easily disposed of; but still i would not for the world have lost him until i had obtained from him all possible knowledge; and if his wound did not look well when i removed the bandage, i was much more distressed than he was. indeed, there was every prospect of our ultimately being friends, from our mutual dependence on each other. it was useless on his part, in his present destitute condition, to nourish feelings of animosity against one on whose good offices he was now so wholly dependent, or on my part, against one who was creating for me, i may say, new worlds for imagination and thought to dwell on. on the following morning. jackson narrated in substance (as near as i can recollect) as follows:-- "i was not intended for a sailor. i was taught at a good school, and when i was ten years old, i was put into a house of business as a clerk, where i remained at the desk all day long, copying into ledgers and day-books, in fact, writing what was required of me. this house was connected with the south american trade." "where is south america?" said i. "you had better let me tell my story," replied jackson, "and after i have done, you can ask any questions you like; but if you stop me, it will take a week to finish it; yesterday we lost the whole day." "that's very true," replied i, "then i will do so." "there were two other clerks in the counting-house--the head clerk, whose name was manvers, and your father, who was in the counting-house but a few months before me. our master, whose name was evelyn, was very particular with both your father and myself, scanning our work daily, and finding fault when we deserved it. this occasioned a rivalry between us, which made us both very active, and i received praise quite as often as he did. on sunday, mr evelyn used to ask your father and me to spend the day. we went to church in the forenoon and dined with him. he had a daughter a little younger than we were. she was your mother. both of us, as we grew up, were very attentive to her, and anxious to be in her good graces. i cannot say which was preferred at first, but i rather think that if anything, i was the favourite during the first two years of our being acquainted with her. i was more lively and a better companion than your father, who was inclined to be grave and thoughtful. we had been about four years in the counting-house, when my mother died--my father had been dead some time before i went into it--and at her death i found my share of her property to amount to about , pounds. but i was not yet twenty-one years of age. i could not receive it for another year. mr evelyn, who had till then every reason to be satisfied with my conduct, used to joke with me, and say that as soon as i was of age, he would allow me, if i chose it, to put the money in the business, and thus obtain a small share in it--and such was my intention, and i looked forward to bright prospects and the hope of one day being married to your mother; and i have no doubt but such would have been the case, had i still conducted myself properly. but, before i was of age, i made some very bad acquaintances, and soon ran into expenses which i could not afford, and the worst was, that i contracted a habit of sitting up late at night, and drinking to excess, which i never have since got over, which proved my ruin then, and has proved my ruin through life. this little fortune of mine not only gave me consequence, but was the cause of my thinking very highly of myself. i now was more particular in my attentions to miss evelyn, and was graciously received by her father; neither had i any reason to complain of my treatment from the young lady. as for your father, he was quite thrown into the back-ground. he had no property nor hope of any, except what he might hereafter secure by his diligence and good conduct; and the attention i received from mr evelyn, and also the head clerk, who had an idea that i was to be a partner and consequently would become his superior, made him very melancholy and unhappy, for i believe that then he was quite as much in love with miss evelyn as i was myself; and i must tell you, that my love for her was unbounded, and she well deserved it. but all these happy prospects were overthrown by my own folly. as soon as it was known that i had property left to me, i was surrounded by many others who requested to be introduced to me, and my evenings were passed in what i considered very good company, but which proved the very reverse. by degrees i took to gambling, and after a time, lost more money than i could afford to pay. this caused me to have recourse to a jew, who advanced me loans at a large interest to be repaid at my coming of age. trying to win back my money, i at last found myself indebted to the jew for the sum of nearly , pounds. the more that i became involved, the more reckless i became. mr evelyn perceived that i kept late hours, and looked haggard, as i well might; indeed, my position had now become very awkward. mr evelyn knew well the sum that had been left me, and how was i to account to him for the deficiency, if he proposed that i should put it into the business? i should be ruined in his opinion, and he never, i was convinced, would intrust the happiness of his daughter to a young man who had been guilty of such irregularities. at the same time, my love for her nearly amounted to adoration. never was there a more miserable being than i was for the last six months previous to my coming of age; and to drown my misery i plunged into every excess, and seldom, if ever, went to bed but in a state of intoxication. scheme after scheme did i propose to enable me to conceal my fault; but i could hit upon nothing. the time approached; i was within a few days of coming of age, when mr evelyn sent for me and then spoke to me seriously, saying, that out of regard to the memory of my father, with whom he had been very intimate, he was willing to allow me to embark my little capital in the business, and that he hoped that by my good conduct and application i might soon become a useful partner. i stammered some reply, which surprised him; and he asked me to be more explicit. i stated that i considered my capital too small to be of much use in such a business as his, and that i preferred trying some quick method of doubling it; that as soon as i had so done i would accept his offer with gratitude. `as you please,' replied he coolly; `but take care, that in risking all, you do not lose all. of course, you are your own master,' and so saying, he left me, apparently much displeased and mortified. but circumstances occurred, which exposed the whole affair. when in company with my evening companions, i stated my intentions of trying my fortune in the east indies, not seriously, but talking at random. this came to the ears of the jew of whom i had borrowed the money; he thought that i intended to leave the kingdom, without taking up my bonds, and immediately repaired to mr evelyn's counting-house, to communicate with the head clerk, and ascertain if the report was correct, stating also the sums i was indebted to him. the head clerk informed mr evelyn, and on the day upon which i became twenty-one years of age, he sent for me into his private room, and, after some remonstrances, to which i replied very haughtily, it ended in my being dismissed. the fact was, that mr evelyn had, since his last interview with me, made inquiries, and finding out i had been living a very riotous life, he had determined upon my leaving his service. as soon as my first burst of indignation was over, i felt what i had lost; my attachment to miss evelyn was stronger than ever, and i bitterly deplored my folly; but after a time, as usual, i had recourse to the bottle, and to drowning my cares in intemperance. i tried very hard to obtain an interview with miss evelyn previous to my quitting the house, but this mr evelyn would not permit, and a few days after, sent his daughter away, to reside, for a time, with a relation in the country. i embarked my capital in the wine-trade, and, could i have restrained myself from drinking, should have been successful, and in a short time might have doubled my property, as i stated to mr evelyn; but now i had become an irreclaimable drunkard; and when that is the case, all hope is over. my affairs soon became deranged, and, at the request of my partner, they were wound up, and i found myself with my capital of , pounds reduced to , pounds. with this i resolved to try my fortune in shipping; i procured a share in a brig, and sailed in her myself. after a time, i was sufficiently expert to take the command of her, and might have succeeded, had not my habit of drinking been so confirmed. when at ceylon, i fell sick, and was left behind. the brig was lost, and as i had forgotten to insure my portion of her, i was ruined. i struggled long, but in vain--intemperance was my curse, my bane, the millstone at my neck, which dragged me down: i had education, talents, and energy, and at one time, capital; but all were useless; and thus did i sink down, from captain of a vessel to mate, from mate to second mate, until i at last found myself a drunken sailor before the mast. such is my general history; to-morrow i will let you know how, and in what way, your father and i met again, and what occurred, up to this present time." but i was too much bewildered and confused with what he had told me, to allow him to proceed, as he proposed. "no, no," replied i. "i now recollect all you have said, although i do not understand. you must first answer my questions, as to the meaning of words i never heard of before. i cannot understand what money is, what gaming is, and a great many more things you have talked about, but i recollect, and can repeat every word that you have said. to-morrow, i will recall it all over, and you shall tell me what i cannot make out; after that you can go on again." "very well," replied he, "i don't care how long it takes me to answer your questions, for i am not very anxious to tell all about your father and myself." chapter six. i can hardly describe to the reader the effect which these conversations with jackson had upon me at first. if a prisoner were removed from a dark cell, and all at once introduced into a garden full of fruit and flowers, which he never before had an idea were in existence, he could not have been more filled with wonder, surprise, and pleasure. all was novelty and excitement, but at the same time, to a great degree, above my comprehension. i had neither language nor ideas to meet it, and yet i did, to a certain degree, comprehend. i saw not clearly, but sometimes as through a mist, at others through a dark fog, and i could discern little. every day, however, my increased knowledge of language and terms gave me an increased knowledge of ideas. i gained more by context than i did by any other means, and as i was by degrees enlightened, so my thirst for information and knowledge became every day more insatiable. that much that i considered i understood was erroneous, is certain, for mine was a knowledge, as yet, of theory only. i could imagine to myself, as far as the explanation i received, what such an object might be, and, having made up my ideas on the matter, i was content; further knowledge would, however, incline me to think, and occasionally to decide, that the idea i had formed was incorrect, and i would alter it. thus did i flounder about in a sea of uncertainty, but still of exciting interest. if any one who has been educated, and has used his eyes in a civilised country, reads an account of people and things hitherto unknown to him, he can, from the description and from his own general knowledge, form a very correct idea of what the country contains. but then he has used his eyes--he has seen those objects between which the parallel or the difference has been pointed out. now i had not that advantage. i had seen nothing but the sea, rocks, and sea-birds, and had but one companion. here was my great difficulty, which, i may say, was never surmounted, until i had visited and mixed with civilisation and men. the difficulty, however, only increased my ardour. i was naturally of an ingenious mind, i had a remarkable memory, and every increase of knowledge was to me a source of delight. in fact, i had now something to live for--before i had not; and i verily believe, that if jackson had been by any chance removed from me at this particular time, i should soon have become a lunatic, from the sudden drying up of the well which supplied my inordinate thirst for knowledge. some days passed before i asked jackson to continue his narrative, during which we lived in great harmony. whether it was that he was deceiving me, and commanding his temper till he had an opportunity of revenge, or whether it was that his forlorn and helpless condition had softened him down, i could not say; but he appeared gradually to be forming an attachment to me; i was, however, on my guard at all times. his wounded wrist had now healed up, but his hand was quite useless, as all the tendons had been severed. i had therefore less to fear from him than before. at my request that he would continue his history, jackson related as follows:-- "after sailing in vessel after vessel, and generally dismissed after the voyage for my failing of intemperance, i embarked on board a ship bound to chili, and after having been on the coast for nearly a year, we were about to proceed home with a cargo, when we anchored at valdivia, previous to our homeward voyage, as we had some few articles to ship at that port. we were again ready for sea, when we heard, from the captain, that he had agreed to take two passengers, a gentleman and his wife, who wished to proceed to england. the cabin was cleared out, and every preparation made to receive them on board, and in the evening the boat was sent on shore for the luggage. i went in the boat, as i thought it likely that the gentleman would give the boat's crew something to drink; nor was i wrong--he gave us four dollars, which we spent immediately in one of the ventas, and were all more or less intoxicated. it had been arranged that the luggage should first be carried on board, and after that, we were to return for the passengers, as we were to sail early in the morning. we pulled off with the luggage, but on our arrival on board, i was so drunk, that the captain would not allow me to return in the boat, and i knew nothing of what had passed until i was roused up the next morning to assist in getting the ship under weigh. we had been under weigh two or three hours, and were clearing the land fast, when the gentleman passenger came on deck; i was then coiling down a rope on the quarter-deck, and as he passed by me, i looked at him, and i recognised him immediately as your father. years had passed--from a stripling he had grown a man; but his face was not to be mistaken. there he was, apparently a gentleman of property and consideration; and i, what was i? a drunken sailor. all i hoped was, that he would not recognise me. shortly afterwards he went down again, and returned escorting his wife on deck. again i took a furtive curious glance, and perceived at once that she was that miss evelyn, whom i had once so loved, and by my folly had lost. this was madness. as they stood on the deck, enjoying the cool sea breeze, for the weather was delightfully fine, the captain came up and joined them. i was so confused at my discovery, that i knew not what i was about, and i presume was doing something very awkwardly; for the captain said to me--`jackson, what are you about, you drunken hound? i suppose you are not sober yet.' at the mention of my name, your father and mother looked at me, and as i lifted up my head to reply to the captain, they eyed me earnestly, and then spoke to each other in a low tone; after which they interrogated the captain. i could not hear what they said, but i was certain they were talking about me, and that they had suspected, if they had not recognised me. i was ready to sink to the deck, and, at the same time, i felt a hatred of your father enter my heart, of which, during his life, i never could divest myself. it was as i supposed; your father had recognised me, and the following morning he came up to me as i was leaning over the gunwale amid ships, and addressed me,--`jackson,' said he, `i am sorry to find you in this situation. you must have been very unfortunate to have become so reduced. if you will confide your history to me, perhaps i may, when we arrive in england, be able to assist you, and it really will give me great pleasure.' i cannot say that i replied very cordially. `mr henniker,' said i, `you have been fortunate, by all appearances, and can therefore afford compassion to those who have not been so; but, sir, in our positions, i feel as if pity was in reality a sort of triumph, and an offer of assistance an insult. i am content with my present position, and will at all events not change it by your interference. i earn my bread honestly. you can do no more. times may change yet. it's a long road that has no turning to it. i wish you a good morning.' so saying, i turned from him, and walked away forward, with my heart full of bitterness and anger. from that hour he never spoke to me or noticed me again; but the captain was more severe upon me, and i ascribed his severity most unjustly to your father. we were about to go round cape horn, when the gale from the s.e. came on, which ended in the loss of the vessel. for several days we strove up against it, but at last the vessel, which was old, leaked so much from straining, that we were obliged to bear up and run before it, which we did for several days, the wind and sea continuing without intermission. at last we found ourselves among these islands, and were compelled occasionally to haul to the wind to clear them. this made her leak more and more, until at last she became water logged, and we were forced to abandon her in haste, during the night, having no time to take anything with us; we left three men on board, who were down below. by the mercy of heaven we ran the boat into the opening below, which was the only spot where we could have landed. i think i had better stop now, as i have a good deal to tell you yet." "do then," replied i; "and now i think of it, i will bring up the chest and all the things which were in it, and you shall tell me what they are." i went down and returned with the clothes and linen. there were eight pair of trousers, nine shirts, besides the one i had torn up to bandage his wounds with, two pair of blue trousers, and two jackets, four white duck frocks, some shoes, and stockings. jackson felt them one by one with his hands, and told me what they were, and how worn. "why don't you wear some of them?" inquired i. "if you will give me leave, i will," replied he. "let me have a duck frock and a pair of trousers." i handed the articles to him, and then went back for the rest, which i had left on the rocks. when i returned, with my arms full, i found that he had put them on, and his other clothes were beside him. "i feel more like a christian now," said he. "a christian," said i, "what is that?" "i will tell you by-and-bye. it is what i have not been for a long, long while," replied he. "now, what have you brought this time?" "here," said i, "what is this?" "this is a roll of duck, to make into frocks and trousers," replied he. "that is bees'-wax." he then explained to me all the tools, sailing-needles, fish-hooks, and fishing-lines, some sheets of writing-paper, and two pens, i had brought up with me. "all these are very valuable," said he, after a pause, "and would have added much to our comfort, if i had not been blind." "there are more things yet," said i; "i will go and fetch them." this time i replaced the remaining articles, and brought up the chest. it was a heavy load to carry up the rocks, and i was out of breath when i arrived and set it down on the cabin floor. "now i have the whole of them," said i. "now, what is this?" "that is a spy-glass--but, alas! i am blind--but i will show you how to use it, at all events." "here are two books," said i. "give them to me," said he, "and let me feel them. this one is a bible, i am quite sure by its shape, and the other is, i think, a prayer-book." "what is a bible, and what is a prayer-book?" replied i. "the bible is the word of god, and the prayer-book teaches us how to pray to him." "but who is god? i have often heard you say, `o god!' and `god damn'-- but who is he?" "i will tell you to-night, before we go to sleep," replied jackson, gravely. "very well, i shall remind you. i have found a little box inside the chest, and it is full of all manner of little things--strings and sinews." "let me feel them." i put a bundle into his hand. "these are needles and thread for making and mending clothes--they will be useful by-and-bye." at last the whole contents of the chest were overhauled and explained. i could not well comprehend the glass bottles, or how they were made, but i put them, with the pannikins, and everything else, very carefully into the chest again, and hauled the chest to the further end of the cabin, out of the way. before we went to bed that night, jackson had to explain to me who god was, but as it was only the commencement of several conversations on the subject, i shall not at present trouble the reader with what passed between us. jackson appeared to be very melancholy after the conversation we had had on religious matters, and was frequently agitated and muttering to himself. chapter seven. i did not on the following day ask him to resume his narrative relative to my father and mother, as i perceived that he avoided it, and i already had so far changed, as to have consideration for his feelings. another point had now taken possession of my mind, which was, whether it were possible to learn to read those books which i had found in the chest, and this was the first question that i put to jackson when we arose on that morning. "how is it possible?" replied he. "am i not blind--how can i teach you?" "is there no way?" replied i, mournfully. "let me think.--yes, perhaps there is a way--at all events we will try. you know which book i told you was the prayer-book?" "oh yes! the small, thin one." "yes--fetch it here. now," said he, when i put it into his hand, "tell me; is there a straight line down the middle of the page of the book, so that the words and letters are on both sides of it?" "yes, there is," replied i; "in every page, as you call it, there is a black line down the middle, and words and letters (i suppose they are) on both sides." "and among the letters there are some larger than others, especially at the side nearest to the margin." "i don't know what margin is." "i mean here," replied he, pointing to the margin of the page. "yes, there are." "well then, i will open the book as near as i can guess at the morning service, and you tell me if you can find any part of the writing which appears to begin with a large round letter, like--what shall i say?--the bottom of a pannikin." "there is one on this leaf, quite round." "very well--now get me a small piece of stick, and make a point to it." i did so, and jackson swept away a small place on the floor of the cabin. "now," said he, "there are many other prayers which begin with a round o, as the letter is called; so i must first ascertain if this one is the one i require. if it is, i know it by heart, and by that shall be able to teach you all the letters of the alphabet." "what's an alphabet?" "the alphabet is the number of letters invented to enable us to read and write. there are twenty-six of them. now look, frank; is the next letter to o the shape of this?" and he drew with the pointed stick the letter u on the ground. "yes, it is," replied i. "and the next is like this," continued he, drawing the letter r, after he had smoothed the ground and effaced the u. "yes," replied i. "well then, to make sure, i had better go on, our is one word, and then there is a little space between; and next you come to an f." "yes," replied i, looking at what he had drawn, and comparing it with the letter in the book. "then i believe that we are all right, but to make sure, we will go on for a little longer." jackson then completed the word "father," and "which art," that followed it, and then he was satisfied. "now," said he, "out of that prayer i can teach you all the letters, and if you pay attention, you will learn to read." the whole morning was passed in my telling him the different letters, and i very soon knew them all. during the day, the lord's prayer was gone through, and as i learnt the words as well as the letters, i could repeat it before night; i read it over to him twenty or thirty times, spelling every word, letter by letter, until i was perfect. this was my first lesson. "why is it called the lord's prayer?" said i. "because, when our lord jesus christ was asked by his followers in what way they ought to address god, he gave them this prayer to repeat, as being the most proper that they could use." "but who was jesus christ?" "he was the son of god, as i told you yesterday, and at the same time equal with god." "how could he be equal with god, if, as you said yesterday, god sent him down to be killed?" "it was with his own consent that he suffered death: but all this is a mystery which you cannot understand at present." "what's a mystery?" "that which you cannot understand." "do you understand it yourself?" "no, i do not; i only know that such is the fact; but it is above not only mine, but all men's comprehension. but i tell you honestly, that on these points, i am but a bad teacher; i have paid little attention to them during my life, and as far as religion is concerned, i can only give you the outlines, for i know no more." "but i thought you said that people were to be punished or rewarded when they died, according as they had lived a bad or good life; and that to live a good life, people must be religious, and obey god's commands." "i did tell you so, and i told you the truth; but i did not tell you that i had led a bad life, as i have done, and that i have neglected to pay obedience to god's word and command." "then you will be punished when you die, will you not?" "alas! i fear so, child," replied jackson, putting his hands up to his forehead and hiding his face. "but there is still time," continued he, after a pause; and "o god of mercy!" exclaimed he, "how shall i escape?" i was about to continue the conversation, but jackson requested that i would leave him alone for a time. i went out and sat on the rock, watching the stars. "and those," he says, "were all made by god." "and god made everything," thought i, "and god lives up beyond those stars." i thought for a long while, and was much perplexed. i had never heard anything of god till the night before, and what jackson had told me was just enough to make me more anxious and curious; but he evidently did not like to talk on the subject. i tried, after a time, if i could repeat the lord's prayer, and i found that i could, so i knelt down on the rock, and looking up to a bright star, as if i would imagine it was god, i repeated the lord's prayer to it, and then i rose up and went to bed. this was the first time that i had ever prayed. i had learnt so much from jackson, latterly, that i could hardly retain what i had learnt; at all events, i had a very confused recollection in my brain, and my thoughts turned from one subject to another, till there was, for a time, a perfect chaos; by degrees things unravelled themselves, and my ideas became more clear; but still i laboured under that half-comprehension of things which, in my position, was unavoidable. but now my mind was occupied with one leading object and wish, which was to learn to read. i thought no more of jackson's history and the account he might give me of my father and mother, and was as willing as he was that it should be deferred for a time. what i required now was to be able to read the books, and to this object my whole mind and attention were given. three or four hours in the earlier portion of the day, and the same time in the latter, were dedicated to this pursuit, and my attention never tired or flagged. in the course of, i think, about six weeks, i could read, without hesitation, almost any portion of the bible or prayer-book. i required no more teaching from jackson, who now became an attentive hearer, as i read to him every morning and evening a portion of the gospel or liturgy. but i cannot say that i understood many portions which i read, and the questions which i put to jackson puzzled him not a little, and very often he acknowledged that he could not answer them. as i afterwards discovered, this arose from his own imperfect knowledge of the nature of the christian religion, which, according to his statement to me, might be considered to have been comprised in the following sentence: "if you do good on earth, you will go to heaven and be happy; if you do ill, you will go to hell and be tormented. christ came down from heaven to teach us what to do, and how to follow his example; and all that we read in the bible we must believe." this may be considered as the creed imparted to me at that time. i believe that jackson, like many others, knew no better, and candidly told me what he himself had been taught to believe. but the season for the return of the birds arrived, and our stock of provender was getting low. i was therefore soon obliged to leave my books, and work hard for jackson and myself. as soon as the young birds were old enough, i set to my task. and now i found how valuable were the knives which i had obtained from the seaman's chest; indeed, in many points i could work much faster. by tying the neck and sleeves of a duck frock, i made a bag, which enabled me to carry the birds more conveniently, and in greater quantities at a time; and with the knives i could skin and prepare a bird in one quarter of the time. with my fishing-lines also, i could hang up more to dry at one time, so that, though without assistance, i had more birds cured in the same time than when jackson and i were both employed in the labour. the whole affair, however, occupied me from morning to evening for more than three weeks, by which time the major portion of my provender was piled up at the back of the cabin. i did not, however, lose what i had gained in reading, as jackson would not let me go away in the morning, or retire to my bed in the evening, without my reading to him a portion of the bible: indeed he appeared to be quite uncomfortable if i did not do so. at last, the work was ended, and then i felt a strong desire return to hear that portion of jackson's history connected with my father and mother, and i told him so. he did not appear to be, pleased with my communication, or at all willing to proceed; but as i pressed him hard and showed some symptoms of resolution and rebellion, he reluctantly resumed his narrative. chapter eight. "i wish you to understand," said he, "that my unwillingness to go on with my history proceeds from my being obliged to make known to you the hatred that subsisted between your father and me; but if you will recollect, that we both had, in our early days, been striving to gain the same object--i mean your mother--and also that he had taken, as it were, what i considered to have been my place, in other points--that he had been successful in life, and i had been unfortunate, you must not then be surprised at my hating him as i did." "i understand nothing about your feelings," replied i; "and why he injured you by marrying my mother, i cannot see." "why, i loved her." "well, suppose you did, i don't know what love is, and therefore cannot understand it, so tell me the story." "well then, when i left off, i told you that we had ventured to land upon this island, by running the boat into the bathing-pond; but in so doing, the boat was beaten to pieces, and was of no use afterwards. we landed, eight persons in all; that is, the captain, your father, the carpenter, mate, and three seamen, besides your mother. we had literally nothing in the boat except three axes, two kids, and the two pannikins, which we have indeed now; but as for provisions, or even water, we had none of either. our first object, therefore, was to search the island to obtain water, and this we soon found at the rill which now runs down by the side of the cabin. it was very fortunate for us that we arrived exactly at the time that the birds had come on the island and had just laid their eggs; if not, we must have perished with hunger, for we had not a fish hook with us, or even a fathom of line. "we collected a quantity of eggs, and made a good meal, although we devoured them raw. while we were running about, or rather climbing about, over the rocks; to find out what chance of subsistence we might have on the island, the captain and your father remained with your mother, who sat down in a sheltered spot near to the bathing-pool. on our return in the evening, the captain called us all together, that he might speak to us; and he said, that if we would do well, we must all act in concert; that it also would be necessary that one should have the command and control of the others; that without such was the case, nothing would go on well;--and he asked us if we did not consider that what he said was true. we all agreed, although i, for one, felt little inclination to do so; but as all the rest said so, i raised no objections. the captain then told us that, as we were all of one opinion, the next point was to decide as to who should have the command; he said, that if it had been on ship-board, he of course would have taken it himself, but now we were on shore, he thought that mr henniker was a much more competent person than he was, and he therefore proposed that the command should be given to him, and he, for one, would willingly be under his orders. to this proposal, the carpenter and mate immediately agreed, and at last two of the seamen. i was left alone, but i resisted, saying, that i was not going to be ordered about by a landsman, and that if i were to obey orders, it must be from a thorough-bred seaman. the other two sailors were of my way of thinking, i was sure, although they had given their consent, and i hoped that they would join me, which they appeared very much inclined to do. your father spoke very coolly, modestly, and prudently. he pointed out that he had no wish to take the command, and that he would cheerfully serve under the captain of the vessel, if it would be more satisfactory to all parties that such should be the case. but the captain and the others were positive, saying that they would not have their choice disputed by such a drunken vagabond as i was, and that if i did not like to remain with them, i might go to any part of the island that i chose. this conference ended by my getting in a passion, and saying that i would not be under your father's orders; and i was seizing one of the axes to go off with it, when the captain caught my arm and wrested it from me, stating that the axe was his property, and then telling me that i was welcome to go where i pleased. "i left them, therefore, and went away by myself to where the birds were hatching, as i wished to secure a supply of eggs. when the night closed in, i lay down upon the guano, and felt no cold; for the gale was now over, and the weather was very mild. "the next morning, when i awoke, i found that the sun had been up some time. i looked for the rest of my companions whom i had quitted, and perceived that they were all busily at work. the sea was quite calm; and, when the vessel went down after we left, many articles had floated, and had been washed to the island. some of the men were busy collecting spars and planks, which were near the rocks, and pushing them along with the boat-hooks to the direction of the bathing-pond, where they hauled them over the ridge, and secured them. your father and mother, with the carpenter, were on this ledge where we now are, having selected it as a proper place for building a shelter, and were apparently very busy. the captain and one of the seamen were carrying up what spars and timber could be collected to where your father was standing with the carpenter. all appeared to be active, and working into each other's hands; and i confess that, as i looked on, i envied them, and wished that i had been along with them; but i could not bear the idea of obeying any orders given by your father; and this alone prevented my joining them, and making my excuses for what i had done and said the previous night. i therefore swallowed some more bird's eggs raw, and sat down in the sun, looking at them as they worked. "i soon perceived that the carpenter had commenced operations. the frame of this cabin was, with the assistance of your father, before it was noon, quite complete and put up; and then they all went down to the bathing-place, where the boat was lying with her bottom beaten out. they commenced taking her to pieces and saving all the nails; the other men carried up the portions of the boat as they were ripped off, to where the frame of the cabin had been raised. i saw your mother go up with a load in her hand, which i believed to be the nails taken from the boat. in a couple of hours the boat was in pieces and carried up, and then your father and most of the men went up to assist the carpenter. i hardly need tell what they did, as you have the cabin before you. the roof, you see, is mostly built out of the timbers of the boat; and the lower part out of heavier wood; and a very good job they made of it. before the morning closed in, one of the sides of the cabin was finished; and i saw them light a fire with the chips that had been cut off with the axes, and they then dressed the eggs and birds which they had collected the first day. "there was one thing which i had quite forgotten when i mutinied and left my companions, which was, the necessity of water to drink; and i now perceived that they had taken possession of the spot where the only water had as yet been found. i was suffering very much from thirst towards the close of the day, and i set off up the ravine to ascertain if there was none to be found in that direction. before night i succeeded in finding some, as you know, for you have often drunk from the spring when you have gone up for firewood. this gave me great encouragement, for i was afraid that the want of water would have driven me to submission. by way of bravado, i tore off; and cut with my knife, as many boughs of the underwood on the ravine as i well could carry, and the next morning i built a sort of wigwam for myself on the guano, to show them that i had a house over my head as well as they had; but i built it further up to the edge of the cliff, above the guano plain, so that i need not have any communication with those who i knew would come for eggs and birds for their daily sustenance. "before the night of the following day set in, the cabin was quite finished. "the weather became warmer every day, and i found it very fatiguing to have to climb the ravine two or three times a day to procure a drink of water, for i had nothing to hold water in, and i thought that it would be better that i should take up my quarters in the ravine, and build myself a wigwam among the brushwood close to the water, instead of having to make so many journeys for so necessary an article. i knew that i could carry eggs in my hat and pocket-handkerchief sufficient for two or three days at one trip; so i determined that i would do so; and the next morning i went up the ravine, loaded with eggs, to take up my residence there. in a day or two i had built my hut of boughs, and made it very comfortable. i returned for a fresh supply of eggs on the third day, with a basket i had constructed out of young boughs, and which enabled me to carry a whole week's sustenance. then i felt quite satisfied, and made up my mind that i would live as a hermit during my sojourn on the island, however long it might be; for i preferred anything to obeying the orders of one whom i detested as i did your father. "it soon was evident, however, how well they had done in selecting your father as their leader. they had fancied that the birds would remain on the island, and that thus they would always be able to procure a supply. your father, who had lived so long in chili, knew better, and that in a few weeks they would quit their nesting-place. he pointed this out to them, showing them what a mercy it was that they had been cast away just at this time, and how necessary it was to make a provision for the year. but this they could not imagine that it was possible to do without salt to cure the birds with; but he knew how beef was preserved without salt on the continent, and showed them how to dry the birds in the sun. while therefore i was up in the ravine, they were busy collecting and drying them in large quantities, and before the time of the birds leaving they had laid up a sufficient supply. it was he also that invented the fishing-lines out of the sinews of the legs of the birds, and your mother who knotted them together. at first, they caught fish with some hooks made of nails, but your father showed them the way to take them without a hook, as you have learnt from me, and which he had been shown by some of the indians on the continent. "owing to your father, they were well prepared when the birds flew away with their young ones, while i was destitute. previous to the flight, i had fared but badly, for the eggs contained the young birds half formed, and latterly so completely formed that i could not eat them; and as i had no fire, and did not understand drying them, i had no alternative but eating the young birds raw, which was anything but pleasant. i consoled myself, however, with the idea that your father and mother and the rest were faring just as badly as myself, and i looked forward to the time when the birds would begin to lay eggs again, when i resolved to hoard up a much larger supply while they were fresh. but my schemes were all put an end to, for in two days, after a great deal of noise and flying about in circles, all the birds, young and old, took wing, and left me without any means of future subsistence. "this was a horrid discovery, and i was put to my wits' ends. i wandered over the guano place, and, after the third day of their departure, was glad to pick up even a dead bird with which to appease my hunger. at the same time, i wondered how my former companions got on, for i considered that they must be as badly off as i was. i watched them from behind the rocks, but i could perceive no signs of uneasiness. there was your mother sitting quietly on the level by the cabin, and your father or the captain talking with her. i perceived, however, that two of the party were employed fishing off the rocks, and i wondered where they got their fishing-lines; and at last i concluded that it was by catching fish that they supported themselves. this, however, did not help me--i was starving, and starvation will bring down the pride of any man. on the fifth day, i walked down to the rocks, to where one of the seamen was fishing, and having greeted him, i told him that i was starving, and asked for something to eat. "`i cannot help you,' replied he; `i have no power to give anything away; it is more than i dare do. you must apply to mr henniker, who is the governor now. what a foolish fellow you were to mutiny, as you did; see what it has brought you to.' "`why,' replied i, `if it were not for fishing, you would not be better off than i am.' "`oh yes we should be; but we have to thank him for that--without him, i grant, we should not have been. we have plenty of provisions, although we fish to help them out.' "this puzzled me amazingly, but there was no help for it. i could starve no longer, so up i went to the level where your father was standing with the captain, and in a swaggering sort of tone, said that i had come back, and wanted to join my comrades. the captain looked at me and referred me to your father, who said that he would consult with the rest when they came to dinner, as without their permission he could do nothing; and then they both turned away. in the meantime i was ravenous with hunger, and was made more so by perceiving that two large fish were slowly baking on the embers of the fire, and that your mother was watching them. however, there was no help for it, and i sat down at some little distance, anxiously waiting for the return of the rest of the party, when my fate would be decided. my pride was now brought down so low, that i could have submitted to any terms which might have been dictated. in about two hours they were all assembled to dinner, and i remained envying every morsel that they ate, until the repast was finished; when, after some consultation, i was ordered to approach-- which i did--and your father addressed me: `jackson, you deserted us, when you might have been very useful, and when our labour was severe; now that we have worked hard, and made ourselves tolerably comfortable, you request to join us, and partake with us of the fruits of our labour and foresight. you have provided nothing, we have--the consequence is, that we are in comparative plenty, while you are starving. now i have taken the opinion of my companions, and they are all agreed, that as you have not assisted when you were wanted, should we now allow you to join us, you will have to work more than the others to make up an equivalent. it is therefore proposed that you shall join us on one condition, which is, that during the year, till the birds again visit the island, it will be your task to go up to the ravine every day, and procure the firewood which is required. if you choose to accept these terms, you are permitted to join, always supposing that to all the other rules and regulations which we have laid down for our guidance, you will be subject as well as we are. these are our terms, and you may decide as you think proper.' i hardly need say, that i gladly accepted them, and was still more glad when the remnants of the dinner were placed before me: i was nearly choked, i devoured with such haste until my appetite was appeased. "when this was done, i thought over the conditions which i had accepted, and my blood boiled at the idea that i was to be in a manner the slave to the rest, as i should have to work hard every day. i forgot that it was but justice, and that i was only earning my share of the year's provisions, which i had not assisted to collect. my heart was still more bitter against your father, and i vowed vengeance if ever i had an opportunity; but there was no help for it. every day i went up with a piece of cord and an axe, cut a large fagot of wood, and brought it down to the cabin. it was hard work, and occupied me from breakfast to dinner-time, and i had no time to lose if i wanted to be back for dinner. the captain always examined the fagot, and ascertained that i had brought down a sufficient supply for the day's consumption." chapter nine. "a year passed away, during which i was thus employed. at last, the birds made their appearance, and after we had laid up our annual provision, i was freed from my task, and had only to share the labour with others. it was now a great source of speculation how long we were likely to remain on the island; every day did we anxiously look out for a vessel, but we could see none, or if seen, they were too far off from the island to permit us to make signals to them. at last we began to give up all hope, and, as hope was abandoned, a settled gloom was perceptible on most of our faces. i believe that others would have now mutinied as well as myself, if they had known what to mutiny about. your father and mother were the life and soul of the party, inventing amusements, or narrating a touching story in the evenings, so as to beguile the weary time. great respect was paid to your mother, which she certainly deserved; i seldom approached her; she had taken a decided dislike to me, arising, i presume, from my behaviour towards her husband; for now that i was again on a footing with the others, i was as insolent to him as i dared to be, without incurring the penalty attached to insubordination, and i opposed him as much as i could in every proposal that he brought forward--but your father kept his temper, although i lost mine but too often. the first incident which occurred of any consequence, was the loss of two of the men, who had, with your father's permission, taken a week's provisions, with the intention of making a tour round the island, and ascertaining whether any valuable information could be brought back: they were the carpenter and one of the seamen. it appears, that during their return, as they were crossing the highest ridge, they, feeling very thirsty, and not finding water, attempted to refresh themselves by eating some berries which they found on a plant. these berries proved to be strong poison, and they returned very ill. after languishing a few days, they both died. "this was an event which roused us up, and broke the monotony of our life; but it was one which was not very agreeable to dwell upon, and yet, at the same time, i felt rather pleasure than annoyance at it--i felt that i was of more consequence, and many other thoughts entered my mind which i shall not now dwell upon. we buried them in the guano, under the first high rock, where, indeed, the others were all subsequently buried. three more months passed away, when the other seaman was missing. after a search, his trousers were found at the edge of the rock. he had evidently been bathing in the sea, for the day on which he was missed, the water was as smooth as glass. whether he had seen something floating, which he wished to bring to land, or whether he had ventured for his own amusement, for he was an excellent swimmer, could never be ascertained--any more than whether he had sunk with the cramp,--or had been taken down by a shark. he never appeared again, and his real fate is a mystery to this day, and must ever remain so. thus were we reduced to four men--your father, the captain, the mate, and me. but you must be tired--i will stop now, and tell you the remainder some other time." although i was not tired, yet, as jackson appeared to be so, i made no objections to his proposal, and we both went to sleep. while i had read the bible to jackson, i had often been puzzled by numbers being mentioned, and never could understand what was meant; that is, i could form no idea of the quantity represented by seventy or sixty, or whatever it might be. jackson's answer was, "oh! it means a great many; i'll explain to you by-and-bye, but we have nothing to count with, and as i am blind, i must have something in my hand to teach you." i recollected that at the bathing-pool there were a great many small shells on the rocks, about the size of a pea; there were live fish in them, and they appeared to crawl on the rocks. i collected a great quantity of these, and brought them up to the cabin, and requested jackson would teach me to count. this he did, until he came to a thousand, which he said was sufficient. for many days i continued to count up to a hundred, until i was quite perfect, and then jackson taught me addition and subtraction to a certain degree, by making me add and take away from the shells, and count the accumulation, or the remainder. at last, i could remember what i had gained by manipulation, if i may use the term; but further i could not go, although addition had, to a degree, made me master of multiplication, and subtraction gave me a good idea of division. this was a new delight to me, and occupied me for three or four weeks. at last i had, as i thought, learned all that he could teach me in his blind state, and i threw away the shells, and sighed for something more. of a sudden it occurred to me, that i had never looked into the book which still lay upon the shelf in the cabin, and i saw no reason now that i should not; so i mentioned it to jackson, and asked him why i might not have that book? "to be sure you may," replied he; "but you never asked for it, and i quite forgot it." "but when i asked you before, you were so particular that i should not open it. what was your reason then?" jackson replied--"i had no reason except that i then disliked you, and i thought that looking into the book would give you pleasure. it belonged to that poor fellow that was drowned; he had left it in the stern-sheets of the boat when we were at valdivia, and had forgotten it, and we found it there when we landed on the island. take it down, it will amuse you." i took down the book, and opened it. it was, if i recollect right, called "mayor's natural history." at all events, it was a natural history of beasts and birds, with a plate representing each, and a description annexed. it would be impossible for me to convey to the reader my astonishment and delight. i had never seen a picture or drawing in my life. i did not know that such things existed. i was in an ecstasy of delight as i turned over the pages, hardly taking sufficient time to see one object before i hastened on to another. for two or three hours did i thus turn over leaves, without settling upon any one animal; at last my pulse beat more regularly, and i commenced with the lion. but now what a source of amusement, and what a multitude of questions had to be answered by my companion. he had to tell me all about the countries in which the animals were found; and the description of the animals, with the anecdotes, were a source of much conversation; and, what was more, the fore-grounds and back-grounds of the landscapes with which the animals were surrounded produced new ideas. there was a palm-tree, which i explained to jackson, and inquired about it. this led to more inquiries. the lion himself occupied him and me for a whole afternoon, and it was getting dark when i lay down, with my new treasure by my side. i had read of the lion in the scriptures, and now i recalled all the passages; and before i slept i thought of the bear which destroyed the children who had mocked elisha the prophet, and i determined that the first animal i would read about the next morning should be the bear. i think that this book lasted me nearly two months, during which time, except reading a portion every night and morning to jackson, the bible and prayer-book were neglected. some times i thought that the book could not be true; but when i came to the birds, i found those which frequented the island so correctly described, that i had no longer any doubt on the subject. perhaps what interested me most were the plates in which the barn-door fowls and the peacock were described, as in the back-ground of the first were a cottage and figures, representing the rural scenery of england, my own country; and in the second there was a splendid mansion, and a carriage and four horses driving up to the door. in short, it is impossible to convey to the reader the new ideas which i received from these slight efforts of the draftsman to give effect to his drawing. the engraving was also a matter of much wonder, and required a great deal of explanation from jackson. this book became my treasure, and it was not till i had read it through and through, so as almost to know it by heart, that at length i returned to my bible. all this time i had never asked jackson to go on with his narrative; but now that my curiosity was appeased, i made the request. he appeared, as before, very unwilling; but i was pertinacious, and he was worried into it. "there were but four of us left and your mother, and the mate was in a very bad state of health; he fretted very much, poor fellow, for he had left a young wife in england, and what he appeared to fear most was, that she would be married again before he could get home. it ended in a confirmed liver complaint, which carried him off nine months afterwards; and thus was one more of our companions disposed of. he died very quietly, and gave me his sleeve-buttons and watch to deliver to his wife, if ever i should escape from the island. i fear there is little chance of her ever receiving them." "where are they?" said i, recollecting how i had seen him lift up the board under his bed-place. "i have them safe," replied jackson, "and it necessary, will tell you where to find them." this reply satisfied me, and i allowed him to proceed. "we buried him in the guano, by the side of the two others, and now we were but three. it was at this time that your mother was confined and you were born; that is, about three months after the death of the mate. we had just finished laying in our stock of birds for the year when she was taken ill, sooner than was expected, and it was supposed that was occasioned by over-exertion at the time. however, she got up very well without any medical assistance, and your father was much pleased at having a son, for he had been married five years without any prospect of a family. i ought to observe, that the loss of our companions, one after another, had had the effect of bringing those that remained much closer together; i was treated with more kindness by both your father and mother, and the captain, and i returned it as well as my feelings would permit me, for i could not altogether get rid of my animosity to your father. however, we became much more confidential, that is certain, and i was now treated as an equal. "six months passed away and you had become a thriving child, when a melancholy occurrence--" here jackson covered up his face with his hands and remained for some time silent. "go on," said i, "jackson; i know that they all died somehow or another." "very true," replied he, recovering himself. "well, your father disappeared. he had gone to the rocks to fish, and when i was sent to bring him home to dinner, he was nowhere to be found. it was supposed that a larger fish than usual had been fast to his line, and that he had been jerked off the rocks into the water, and the sharks had taken him. it was a dreadful affair," continued jackson, again covering his face. "i think," replied i, "that any man in his senses would have allowed the fish to have taken the line rather than have been dragged into the water. i don't think that the supposed manner of his death is at all satisfactory." "perhaps not," replied jackson; "his foot may have slipped, who knows? we only could guess; the line was gone as well as he, which made us think what i said. still we searched everywhere, but without hope; and our search--that is, the captain's and mine, for your poor mother remained with you in her arms distracted--was the cause of another disaster--no less than the death of the captain. they say misfortunes never come single, and surely this was an instance of the truth of the proverb." "how did he die?" replied i, gravely; for somehow or other i felt doubts as to the truth of what he was saying. jackson did not reply till after a pause, when he said-- "he was out with me up the ravine collecting firewood, and he fell over the high cliff. he was so injured that he died in half an hour." "what did you do?" "what did i do--what could i do but go back and break the news to your mother, who was distracted when she heard it; for the captain was her friend, and she could not bear me." "well, go on, pray," said i. "i did all that i could to make your mother comfortable, as there how were but her, you; and i, left on the island. you were then about three years old; but your mother always hated me, and appeared now to hate me more and more. she never recovered the loss of your father, to whom she was devotedly attached; she pined away, and after six months she died, leaving you and me only on the island. now you know the whole history, and pray do not ask me any more about it." chapter ten. jackson threw himself back in his bed-place and was silent. so was i, for i was recalling all that he had told me, and my doubts were raised as to the truth of it. i did not like his hurrying over the latter portion of his narrative in the way which he had done. what he had said about my mother was not satisfactory. i had for some time been gradually drawing towards him, not only showing, but feeling, for him a great increase of good-will; but suspicion had entered my mind, and i now began to feel my former animosity towards him renewed. a night's sleep, however, and more reflection, induced me to think that possibly i was judging him too harshly, and as i could not afford to quarrel with him, our intercourse remained as amicable as before, particularly as he become more and more amiable towards me, and did everything in his power to interest and amuse me. i was one day reading to him the account of a monkey, given in the book of natural history, in which it is said that that animal is fond of spirits and will intoxicate itself, and jackson was telling me many anecdotes of monkeys on board of the vessel he had sailed in, when it occurred to me that i had never thought of mentioning to him, or of ascertaining the contents of the cask which had been thrown into the bathing-pool with the seaman's chest, and i did so then to jackson, wondering at its contents and how they were to be got at. jackson entered into the question warmly, explaining to me how and where to bore holes with a gimlet, and making two spiles for me to stop the holes with. as soon as he had done so, curiosity induced me to go down to the pool where the cask had been lying so long in about a foot and half water. by jackson's directions i took a pannikin with me, that i might bring him a specimen of the contents of the cask, if they should prove not to be water. i soon bored the hole above and below, following jackson's directions, and the liquor, which poured out in a small stream into the pannikin, was of a brown colour and very strong in odour, so strong, indeed, as to make me reel as i walked back to the rocks with the pannikin full of it. i then sat down, and after a time tasted it. i thought i had swallowed fire, for i had taken a good mouthful of it. "this cannot be what jackson called spirits," said i. "no one can drink this--what can it be?" although i had not swallowed more than a table-spoonful of it, yet, combined with the fumes of the liquor which i had inhaled when drawing it off into the pannikin, the effect was to make my head swim, and i lay down on the rock and shut my eyes to recover myself. it ended in my falling asleep for many hours, for it was not much after noon when i went to the cask, and it was near sunset when i awoke, with an intense pain, in my head. it was some time before i could recollect where i was, or what had passed, but the pannikin full of liquor by my side first reminded me; and then perceiving how late it was, and how long i must have slept, i rose up, and taking the pannikin in my hand, i hastened to return to the cabin. as i approached, i heard the voice of jackson, whose hearing, since his blindness, i had observed, had become peculiarly acute. "is that you, frank?" "yes," replied i. "and what has kept you so long?--how you have frightened me. god forgive me, but i thought that i was to be left and abandoned to starvation." "why should you have thought that?" replied i. "because i thought that some way or another you must have been killed, and then i must have died, of course. i never was so frightened in my life, the idea of dying here all alone--it was terrible." it occurred to me at the time, that the alarm was all for himself, for he did not say a word about how sorry he should have been at any accident happening to me, but i made no remark, simply stating what had occurred, and my conviction that the contents of the cask were not drinkable. "have you brought any with you?" inquired he, sharply. "yes, here it is," said i, giving him the pannikin. he smelt it, and raised it to his lips--took about a wine-glass full of it, and then draw his breath. "this is delightful," said he; "the best of old rum, i never tasted so good. how big did you say that the cask was?" i described it as well as i could. "indeed, then it must be a whole puncheon--that will last a long while." "but do you mean to say that you really like to drink that stuff?" inquired i. "do i like to drink it? yes, it is good for men, but it's death to little boys. it will kill you. don't you get fond of it. now promise me that you will never drink a drop of it. you must not get fond of it, or some sad accident will happen to you." "i don't think you need fear my drinking it," replied i. "i have had one taste, as i told you, and it nearly burnt my mouth. i shan't touch it again." "that's right," replied jackson, taking another quantity into his mouth. "you are not old enough for it; by-and-bye, when you are as old as i am, you may drink it, then it will do you good. now, i'll go to bed, it's time for bed. bring the pannikin after me and put it by my side. take care you don't spill any of it." jackson crawled to his bed and i followed him with the pannikin, and put it by his side, as he requested, and i returned to my own resting-place, without, however, having the least inclination to sleep, having slept so long during the day. at first jackson was quiet, but i heard him occasionally applying to the pannikin, which held, i should say, about three half-pints of liquor. at last he commenced singing a sea-song; i was much surprised, as i had never heard him sing before; but i was also much pleased, as it was the first time that i had ever heard anything like melody, for he had a good voice and sang in good tune. as soon as he had finished, i begged him to go on. "ah!" replied he, with a gay tone i had never heard from him before. "you like songs, do you? my little chap? well, i'll give you plenty of them. 'tis a long while since i have sung, but it's a `poor heart that never rejoiceth.' the time was when no one in company could sing a song as i could, and so i can again, now that i have something to cheer my heart. yes, here's another for you. i shall rouse them all out by-and-bye, as i get the grog in--no fear of that--you find the stuff, and i'll find songs." i was surprised at first at this unusual mirth; but recollecting what jackson had told me about his intemperance, i presumed that this mirth which it produced was the cause why he indulged so much in it; and i felt less inclined to blame him. at all events, i was much pleased with the songs that he sang to me one after another for three or four hours, when his voice became thick, and, after some muttering and swearing, he was quite silent, and soon afterwards snored loudly. i remained awake some time longer, and then i also sank into forgetfulness. when i awoke the next morning, i found jackson still fast asleep. i waited for him for our morning meal; but, as he did not wake, i took mine by myself, and then i walked out to the rock, where i usually sat, and looked round the horizon to see if there was anything in sight. the spy-glass, from having been in sea-water, was of no use, and i did not know what to do with it; nor could jackson instruct me. after i had been out about an hour i returned, and found jackson still snoring, and i determined to wake him up. i pushed him for some time without success; but, at last, he opened his eyes, and said: "my watch already?" "no;" said i; "but you have slept so long, that i have waked you up." he paused, as if he did not know my voice, and then said: "but i can't see anything; how's this?" "why, don't you know that you're blind, jackson?" replied i, with amazement. "yes, yes; i recollect now. is there anything in the pannikin?" "not a drop," replied i; "why, you must have drunk it all." "yes, i recollect now. get me some water my good boy; for i am dying with thirst." i went for the water; he drank the whole pannikin, and asked for more. "won't you have something to eat?" said i. "eat? oh no; i can't eat anything. give me drink;" and he held out his hand for the pannikin. i perceived how it trembled and shook, and i observed it to him. "yes;" replied he, "that's always the case after a carouse, and i had a good one last night--the first for many a year. but there's plenty more of it. i wish you would get me a little more now, frank, just to steady me; just about two or three mouthfuls, no more; that is, no more till night time. did i make much noise last night?" "you sang several songs," replied i, "with which i was much amused." "i'm glad that you liked them. i used to be considered a good singer in my day; indeed, if i had not been such good company, as they term it, i had not become so fond of drinking. just go and fetch me about half an inch high of the pannikin, my good fellow, that's all i want now." i went down to the cask, drew off the quantity that he requested, and brought it to him. he drank it off; and, in a few moments, appeared to be quite himself again. he then asked for some thing to eat, and commenced telling me a variety of stories relative to what he termed jolly parties in his former days; so that the day passed very agreeably. as the night closed in, he said: "now, frank, i know you want to hear some more songs; so go down and bring me up a full pannikin, and i will sing you plenty." i complied with his request, for i was anxious to be again amused as i was the night before. the consequence was, that this night was, in the early portion of it, but a repetition of the previous one. jackson took the precaution to get into his bed-place before he commenced drinking; and, as soon as he had taken his second dose, he asked me what sort of songs i liked. my reply naturally was, that i had never heard any one sing but him, and therefore could not say. "what did i sing to you last night?" said he. i replied as well as i could. "ah," said he, "they were all sea-songs; but now i will give you something better." after a little thought, he commenced singing a very beautiful and plaintive one, and certainly much better than he had sung the night before; for he now was sober. the consequence was, that i was still more delighted; and, at my request, he sang several others; but at last his speech became rapid and thick, and he would not sing any more, using some very coarse expressions to me when i asked him. for a time he was silent, and i thought that he was going to sleep, and i was reflecting upon the various effects which the liquor appeared to have upon him, when i heard him talking and muttering, and i listened. "never mind how i got them," said he; "quite as honestly as other people, old moshes. there they are, do you choose to buy them?" then there was a pause, after which he commenced: "they're as pure diamonds as ever came out of a mine. i know that, so none of your lies, you old jew. where did i come by them? that's no concern of yours. the question is, will you give me the price, or will you not? well, then, i'm off. no, i won't come back, you old thief." here he swore terribly, and then was silent. after a while he recommenced-- "who can ever prove that they were henniker's diamonds?" i started up at the mention of my father's name; i rested with my hands on the floor of the cabin, breathless as to what would come next. "no, no," continued jackson, "he's dead, and food for fishes--dead men tell no tales--and she's dead, and the captain's dead, all dead--yes, all;" and he gave a bitter groan and was silent. the day was breaking, and i could just see him as he lay; but he said no more, and appeared to breathe heavily. as the sun rose, i got out of my bed-place; and, now that it was broad day light, i looked at jackson. he was lying on his back; his brow was covered with large drops of perspiration, and his hands were clenched together. although asleep, he appeared, by the convulsive twitching of the muscles of his face, to be suffering and in great agony. occasionally he groaned deeply, and his lips appeared to move, but no sound proceeded from them. i perceived that the pannikin of liquor was not finished, one third at least having been left. chapter eleven. i then went out of the cabin and took my usual seat, and began to reflect upon what i had heard. he had talked about diamonds; now i knew what diamonds were, so far as they were of great value, for i had read of them in the bible, and jackson had explained the value of precious stones to me, and had told me of diamonds of very great value indeed. then he said that they were henniker's diamonds--he must have meant my father, that was positive. and that no one could prove they were his-- this implied that jackson had no right to them; indeed how could he have? and then i recalled to mind his having a secret hiding-place under his bed, where i presumed the diamonds were deposited. i then turned over in my mind what he had told me relative to the death of my father, the captain, and my mother, how confused he was, and how glad he was to get rid of the subject, and how unsatisfactory i thought his account was at the time. after much cogitation, i made up my mind that jackson had not told me the truth, and that there was a mystery yet to be explained but how was i to get at it? there was but one way. the liquor made him talk. i would supply him with liquor, and by degrees, i would get the truth out of him. at the same time i would not allow him to suppose that he had said anything to commit himself, or that i had any suspicions. how naturally do we fall into treachery and deceit, from the evil in our own hearts, without any assistance or example from the world. how could i have learnt deceit? isolated as i had been, must it not have been innate? i returned to the cabin, and woke jackson without much difficulty, since he had not drunk so much as on the previous night. "how are you this morning?" said i. "not very well, i have had some bad dreams." "well, you sang me some beautiful songs," replied i. "yes, i recollect," said he; "but i fell asleep at last." "yes, you refused to sing any more, and went off in a loud snore." jackson got out of his bed-place, and i gave him his meal. we talked during the whole day about singing, and i hummed the air which had pleased me most. "you have got the air pretty correct," said he; "you must have an ear for music. have you ever tried to sing?" "no, never; you know i have not." "you might have tried when i was not with you. try now. i will sing a tune, and then do you repeat it after me." he did so, and i repeated it. "very good," said he. "let's try the compass of your voice." he ran up the gamut, and i followed him. "i think you can go higher than i can," said he; "however, you go quite high enough, so now i'll give you a singing lesson." thus were we occupied at intervals during the whole day, for jackson would not allow me to try my voice too much at first. as the evening fell, he again asked me to fetch some liquor, and as i had three quart wine-bottles, as i before mentioned, which i had found in the chest, i took them down to fill, as it would save me many trips, and be more convenient in every respect. i brought them up full, and jackson stopped them up with some of the rags which i had torn to bind round his wrist, and put them all three in his bed-place. "that will be a much better arrangement," said he, "as now i can pour out the liquor into the pannikin as i want it; besides, i mean to take a little water with it in future. it's not quite so good with water, but it lasts longer, and one don't go to sleep so soon. well, i little thought that i should have such a comfort sent me after all my sufferings. i don't so much care now about staying here. go and fetch some water in the pannikin." that night was a repetition of the first. jackson sang till he was intoxicated, and then fell fast asleep, not talking or saying a word, and i was disappointed, for i remained awake to catch anything he might say. it would be tedious to repeat what took place for about a month;-- suffice it to say, it was very rarely, during that time, that jackson said anything in his sleep, or drunken state, and what he did say, i could make nothing of. he continued in the `daytime' to give me lessons in singing, and i could now sing several songs very correctly. at night he returned to his usual habit, and was more or less intoxicated before the night was over. i perceived, however, that this excess had a great effect upon his constitution, and that he had become very pale and haggard. impatient as i felt to find out the truth, i concealed my feelings towards him (which had certainly very much changed again since the discovery i had made and the suspicions i had formed), and i remained on the best of terms with him, resolving to wait patiently. he had spoken once, and therefore i argued that he would speak again; nor was i wrong in my calculations. one night, after he had finished his usual allowance of liquor, and had composed himself for sleep, i observed that he was unusually restless, changing his position in his bed-place every few minutes, and, at last, he muttered, "captain james. well, what of captain james, eh?" a thought struck me that he might reply to a question. "how did he die?" said i, in a low clear voice. "die?" replied jackson, "he fell down the cliff. yes, he did. you can't say i killed him. no--never put my finger on him." after that he was silent for some time, and then he recommenced. "she always said that i destroyed them both, but i did not--only one-- yes, one, i grant--but i hated him--no, not for his diamonds--no, no--if you said his wife indeed--love and hate." "then you killed him for love of his wife, and hate of himself?" "yes, i did. who are you that have guessed that? who are you? i'll have your life." as he said this, he started up in his bed-place, awakened by his dream, and probably by my voice, which he had replied to. "who spoke?" said he. "frank henniker, did you speak?" i made no reply, but pretended to be sound asleep, as he still sat up, as if watching me. i feigned a snore. "it could not have been him," muttered jackson, "he's quite fast. mercy, what a dream!" he then sank down in his bed-place, and i heard the gurgling noise which told me that he had put the bottle of liquor to his mouth, and was drinking out of it. from the time that the gurgling lasted, he must have taken a great deal. at last, all was quiet again. "so i have discovered it at last," said i, as my blood boiled at what i had heard. "he did murder my father. shall i kill him while he sleeps?" was the first thought that came into my troubled mind. "no, i won't do that. what then, shall i tax him with it when he is awake, and then kill him?" but i thought, that, as he was blind, and unable to defend himself, it would be cowardly, and i could not do that. what then was i to do? and as i cooled down, i thought of the words of the bible, that we were to return good for evil; for jackson, of whom, when i read it, i asked why we were told to do so, had explained it to me, and afterwards when i came to the part which said, "vengeance is mine, saith the lord," he had told me that there was punishment for the wicked hereafter, and that was the reason why we were not to obey the jewish law of "an eye for an eye, and a tooth for a tooth," which i had referred to. this portion of the bible he had well explained, and certain it is that it prevented my raising my hand against him that night. still, i remained in a state of great excitement; i felt that it would be impossible for me to be any longer on good terms with him, and i revolved the question in my mind, till, at last, worn out by excitement, i fell fast asleep. a short time before daylight, i started up at what i thought was a faint cry, but i listened, and hearing nothing more, i again fell asleep, and it was broad daylight when i arose; my first thoughts were naturally of jackson, and i looked at where he lay, but he was no longer there--his bed-place was empty. i was astonished, and after a moment's thought, i recollected the cry i had heard in the night, and i ran out of the cabin and looked around me; but i could see nothing of him. i then went to the edge of the flat rock upon which the cabin was built and looked over it; it was about thirty feet from this rock to the one below, and nearly perpendicular. i thought that he must have gone out in the night, when intoxicated with liquor, and have fallen down the precipice; but i did not see him as i peered over. "he must have gone for water," thought i, and i ran to the corner of the rock, where the precipice was much deeper, and looking over, i perceived him lying down below without motion or apparent life. i had, then, judged rightly. i sat down by the side of the pool of water quite overpowered; last night i had been planning how i should destroy him, and now he lay dead before me without my being guilty of the crime. "vengeance is mine, saith the lord," were the words that first escaped my lips; and i remained many minutes in deep thought. at last it occurred to me that he might not yet be dead; i ran down the cliff, and, clambering over the rocks, arrived breathless at the spot where jackson lay. he groaned heavily as i stood by him. "jackson," said i, kneeling down by him, "are you much hurt?" for all my feelings of animosity had vanished when i perceived his unhappy condition. his lips moved, but he did not utter any sound. at last he said, in a low voice, "water." i hastened back as fast as i could to the cabin, got a pannikin half full of water, and poured a little rum in it out of the bottle. this journey and my return to him occupied some ten minutes. i put it to his lips, and he seemed to revive. he was a dreadful object to look at. the blood from a cut on his head had poured over his face and beard, which were clotted with gore. how to remove him to the cabin i knew not. it would be hardly possible for me to carry him over the broken rocks which i had climbed to arrive at where he lay; and there was no other way but what was longer, and just as difficult. by degrees he appeared to recover; i gave him more of the contents of the pannikin, and at last he could speak, although with great pain and difficulty. as he did so he put his hand to his side. he was indeed a ghastly object, with his sightless eyeballs, his livid lips, and his face and beard matted with blood. "do you think you could get to the cabin, if i helped you?" said i. "i shall never get there--let me die where i am," said he. "but the cut on your head is not very deep," replied i. "no, i don't feel it;--but--my side--i bleed inwardly--i am--broken to pieces," said he, pausing and gasping between each word. i looked at his side, and perceived that it was already black and much swollen. i offered him more drink, which he took eagerly, and i then returned for a further supply. i filled two of the wine-bottles with water and a small drop of spirits as before, and went back to where he lay. i found him more recovered, and i had hopes that he might still do well, and i told him so. "no, no," replied he; "i have but a few hours to live--i feel that. let me die here, and die in peace." he then sank into a sort of stupor, occasioned, i presume, by what i had given him to drink, and remained quite quiet, and breathing heavily. i sat by him waiting till he should rouse up again; for more than an hour i was in a very confused state of mind, as may well be imagined, after what had passed in the night. chapter twelve. what i most thought of was obtaining from him, now that he was dying, the full truth as to the deaths of my father and mother. jackson remained so long in this state of stupor, i feared that he would die before i could interrogate him; but this, as it proved, was not to be the case. i waited another hour, very impatiently i must acknowledge, and then i went to him and asked him how he felt. he replied immediately, and without that difficulty which he appeared before to have experienced. "i am better now--the inward bleeding has stopped; but still i cannot live--my side is broken in, i do not think there is a rib that is not fractured into pieces, and my spine is injured, for i cannot move or feel my legs; but i may live many hours yet, and i thank god for his mercy in allowing me so much time--short indeed to make reparation for so bad a life; but still nothing is impossible with god." "well, then," replied i, "if you can speak, i wish you would tell me the truth relative to my father's death, and also about the death of others--as for my father, i know that you murdered him--for you said so last night in your sleep." after a pause, jackson replied--"i am glad that i did, and that you have told me so--i wished to make a full confession even to you; for confession is a proof of repentance. i know that you must hate me, and will hate my memory, and i cannot be surprised at it; but look at me now, frank, and ask your own heart whether i am not more an object of pity than of hatred. `vengeance is mine, saith the lord!' and has not his vengeance fallen upon me even in this world? look at me; here i am, separated from the world that i loved so much, with no chance of ever joining it--possessed of wealth which would but a few months ago have made me happy--now blind, crushed to pieces by an avenging god, in whose presence i must shortly appear to answer for all my wickedness--all my expectations overthrown, all my hopes destroyed, and all my accumulated sins procuring me nothing, but, it may be, eternal condemnation. i ask you again, am i not an object of pity and commiseration?" i could but assent to this, and he proceeded. "i will now tell you the truth. i did tell the truth up to the time of your father and mother's embarkation on board of the brig, up to when the gale of wind came on which occasioned eventually the loss of the ship. now give me a little drink. "the vessel was so tossed by the storm, and the waves broke over her so continually, that the between-decks were full of water, and as the hatches were kept down, the heat was most oppressive. when it was not my watch, i remained below, and looked out for another berth to sleep in. before the cabin bulkheads on the starboard side, the captain had fitted up a sort of sail-room to contain the spare sails in case we should require them. it was about eight feet square, and the sails were piled up in it, so as to reach within two feet of the deck overhead; though the lower ones were wetted with the water, above they were dry, and i took this berth on the top of the sails as my sleeping-place. now the state-room in which your father and mother slept was on the other side of the cabin bulkhead, and the straining and rolling of the vessel had opened the chinks between the planks, so that i could see a great deal of what was done in the state-room, and could hear every word almost that was spoken by them. i was not aware of this when i selected this place as my berth, but i found it out on the first night, the light of the candle shining through the chinks into the darkness by which i was surrounded outside. of course, it is when a man is alone with his wife that he talks on confidential subjects; that i knew well, and hoped by listening to be able to make some discovery;--what, i had no idea of; but, with the bad feelings which stimulated me, i determined not to lose an opportunity. it was not till about a week after i had selected this berth, that i made any discovery. i had had the watch from six to eight o'clock, and had gone to bed early. about nine o'clock your father came into the state-room. your mother was already in bed. as your father undressed, your mother said, `does not that belt worry you a great deal, my dear?' "`no,' replied your father, `i am used to it now; it did when i first put it on, but now i have had it on four days, i do not feel it. i shall keep it on as long as this weather lasts; there is no saying what may happen, and it will not do to be looking for the belt at a moment's warning.' "`do you think then that we are in danger?' "`no, not particularly so, but the storm is very fierce, and the vessel is old and weak. we may have fine weather in a day or two, or we may not; at all events, when property of value is at stake, and that property not my own, i should feel myself very culpable, if i did not take every precaution.' "`well--i wish we were safe home again, my dear, and that my father had his diamonds, but we are in the hands of god.' "`yes, i must trust to him,' replied your father. "this circumstance induced me to look through one of the chinks of the bulkhead, so that i could see your father, and i perceived that he was unbuckling a belt which was round his body, and which no doubt contained the diamonds referred to. it was of soft leather, and about eight inches wide, sewed lengthways and breadthways in small squares, in which, i presumed the diamonds were deposited. after a time your mother spoke again. "`i really think, henniker, that i ought to wear the belt.' "`why so, my dear?' "`because it might be the means of my preservation in case of accident. suppose, now, we were obliged to abandon the vessel and take to the boats; a husband, in his hurry, might forget his wife, but he would not forget his diamonds. if i wore the belt, you would be certain to put me in the boat.' "`that observation of yours would have force with some husbands, and some wives,' retorted your father; `but as i have a firm belief in the scriptures, it does not affect me. what do the proverbs say? "the price of a virtuous woman is far above rubies;" and a good ruby is worth even more in the market than a diamond of the same size.' "`well, i must comfort myself with that idea,' replied your mother, laughing. "`supposing we be thrown upon some out-of-the-way place,' said your father, `i shall then commit the belt to your charge. it might soon be discovered on my person, whereas, on yours, it would stand every chance of being long concealed. i say this because, even in a desert, it would be dangerous to have it known by unscrupulous and unprincipled men that any one had so much wealth about him.' "`well,' replied your mother, `that is also comfortable for me to hear, for you will not leave me behind, because i shall be necessary to conceal your treasure.' "`yes,' replied your father, laughing, `there is another chance for you, you see.' "your father then extinguished the light, and the conversation was not renewed; but i had heard enough. your father carried a great treasure about his person--wealth, i took it for granted, that if i once could obtain, and return to england, would save me from my present position. my avarice was hereby excited, and thus another passion equally powerful, and equally inciting to evil deeds, was added to the hate which i already had imbibed for your father. but i must leave off now." jackson drank a little more, and then remained quiet, and as i had no food that day, i took the opportunity of returning to the cabin, with the promise that i would be back very soon. in half an hour i returned, bringing with me the bible and prayer-book, as i thought that he would ask me to read to him after he had made his confession. i found him breathing heavily, and apparently asleep, so i did not wake him. as i looked at him, and recalled to mind his words, "am not i an object of pity?" i confessed that he was, and then i asked myself the question, can you forgive him who was the murderer of your father? after some reflection, i thought that i could. was he not already punished? had not the murder been already avenged? it was not possible to retain animosity against one so stricken, so broken to pieces, and my heart smote me when i looked at his disabled hand, and felt that i, boy as i was, had had a share in his marring. at last, he spoke. "are you there, frank?" "yes," replied i. "i have had a little sleep," said he. "do you feel easier?" inquired i, kindly. "yes, i feel my side more numbed, and so it will remain, till mortification takes place. but let me finish my confession, i wish to relieve my mind; not that i shall die to-night, or perhaps to-morrow, but still, i wish it over. come nearer to me, that i may speak in a lower voice, and then i shall be able to speak longer." i did so, and he proceeded. "you know how we were cast upon this island, and how i behaved at first. when i afterwards took my place with the others, my evil thoughts gradually quitted me, and i gave, up all idea of any injury to your father. but this did not last long. the deaths of so many, and at last the captain, your father, and your mother being the only ones left on the island besides myself, once more excited my cupidity. i thought again of the belt of diamonds, and by what means i should gain possession of it; and the devil suggested to me the murders of the captain and of your father. i had ascertained that your father no longer carried the belt on his person when we all used to bathe at the bathing-pool; it was, therefore, as your father had proposed, in your mother's keeping. having once made up my mind, i watched every opportunity to put my intentions into execution. it was the custom for one of us to fish every morning, as your mother would not eat the dried birds, if fish could be procured, and i considered that the only chance i had of executing my horrible wish was when your father went to fish off the rocks. we usually did so off the ledge of rocks which divide the bathing-pool from the sea, but i found out another place, where more fish, and of a better quality, were to be taken, which is off the high wall of rocks just below. you know where i mean, i have often sent you to fish there, but i never could go myself since your father's death. your father took his lines there, and was hauling in a large fish, when i, who had concealed myself close to where he stood, watched the opportunity as he looked over the rock to see if the fish was clear of the water, to come behind him and throw him off into the sea. he could not swim, i knew, and after waiting a minute or two, i looked over and saw his body, just as it sank, after his last struggles. i then hastened away, and my guilty conscience induced me to ascend the ravine, and collect a faggot of firewood to bring home, that no suspicions might be entertained; but my so doing was the very cause of suspicion, as you will afterwards perceive. i returned with the wood, and the captain observed, when i came up to the cabin:-- "`why, it's something new for you to collect wood out of your turn, jackson. wonders will never cease.' "`the fact is, that i am becoming very amiable,' replied i, hardly knowing what to say, and afraid to look either of them in the face, for your mother, with you on her lap, was standing close by. "`has my husband caught any fish, do you know, jackson?' said your mother, `for it is high time that he came home.' "`how can i tell?' replied i. `i have been up the ravine for wood.' "`but you were down on the rock two hours ago,' replied your mother, `for captain james saw you coming away.' "`that i certainly did,' replied the captain. `had he caught any fish when you were with him?' "they must have perceived my confusion when i said, `yes, i was on the rocks, but i never went near henniker, that i'll swear.' "`you must have been near him, even when i saw you,' replied the captain. "`i never looked at him, if i was,' replied i. "`well then, one of us had better go down and see what he is about,' said the captain. `shall i leave jackson with you?' "`yes, yes,' replied your mother, much agitated, `for i have my forebodings; better leave him here.' "the captain hastened down to the rocks, and in a quarter of an hour returned very much heated, saying, `he is not there!' "`not there?' replied i, getting up, for i had seated myself in silence on the rock during the captain's absence: `that's very odd.' "`it is,' replied the captain. `jackson, go and try if you see anything of him, while i attend to mrs henniker.' "your mother, on the captain's return, had bowed her head down to her knees, and covered her face with her hands. i was glad of an excuse to be away, for my heart smote me as i witnessed her condition. "i remained away half an hour, and then returned, saying, that i could see nothing of your father. "your mother was in the cabin, and the captain went in to her, while i remained outside with all the feelings of cain upon my brow. "that was a dreadful day for all parties--no food was taken. your mother and the captain remained in the cabin, and i dared not, as usual, go into my own bed-place. i lay all night upon the rocks--sleep i could not; every moment i saw your father's body sinking, as i had seen it in the morning. the next morning, the captain came out to me. he was very grave and stern, but he could not accuse me, whatever his suspicions might have been. it was a week before i saw your mother again, for i dared not intrude into her presence; but, finding there was no accusation against me, i recovered my spirits, and returned to the cabin, and things went on as before." chapter thirteen. "one thing, however, was evident, that your mother had an aversion--i may say a horror--of me, which she could not conceal. she said nothing, but she never could look at me; and to any question i put, would seldom make reply. strange to say, this treatment of hers produced quite a different effect from what might have been anticipated, and i felt my former love for her revive. her shrinking from me made me more familiar towards her, and increased her disgust. i assumed a jocose air with her, and at times captain james considered it his duty to interfere and check me. he was a very powerful man, and in a contest would have proved my master; this i knew, and this knowledge compelled me to be more respectful to your mother in his presence, but when his back was turned i became so disgustingly familiar, that at last your mother requested that whether fishing or collecting wood, instead of going out by turns we should both go, and leave her alone. this i could not well refuse, as captain james would in all probability have used force if i had not consented, but my hatred to him was in consequence most unbounded. however, an event took place which relieved me from the subjection which i was under, and left me alone with you and your mother. now i must rest a little. wait another hour, and you shall know the rest." it was now late in the evening, but there was a bright moon which shone overhead, and the broad light and shadow made the rocks around us appear peculiarly wild and rugged. they towered up one above the other till they met the dark blue of the sky, in which the stars twinkled but faintly, while the moon sailed through the ether, without a cloud to obscure her radiance. and in this majestic scenery were found but two living beings--a poor boy and a mangled wretch--a murderer--soon to breathe his last, and be summoned before an offended god. as i remained motionless by his side, i felt, as i looked up, a sensation of awe, but not of fear; i thought to myself--"and god made all this and all the world besides, and me and him. the bible said so;" and my speculation then was as to what god must be, for although i had read the bible, i had but a confused idea, and had it been asked me, as it was to the man in the chariot by philip, "understandest thou what thou readest?" i most certainly should have answered, no. i remained for nearly two hours in this reverie, and at last fell asleep with my back against the rock. i was, however, wakened up by jackson's voice, when he asked in a low tone for water. "there it is," said i, handing it to him. "have you called long?" "no," replied he, "i asked but once." "i have been asleep," said i. as soon as he had drunk, he said--"i will finish now; my side begins to burn." he then proceeded--"it was about four months after your father's death, that captain james and i went together to the ravine to collect firewood. we passed under the wall of rock, which you know so well, and went through the gap, as we call it, when captain james left the water-course and walked along the edge of the wall. i followed him: we both of us had our pieces of rope in our hands with which we tied the faggots. of a sudden his foot slipped, and he rolled down to the edge of the rock, but catching hold of a small bush which had fixed its roots in the rocks, he saved himself when his body was hanging half over the precipice. "`give me the end of your rope,' said he to me, perfectly collected, although in such danger. "`yes,' replied i, and i intended so to do, as i perceived that, if i refused, he could still have saved himself by the bush to which he clung. "but the bush began to loosen and give way, and captain james perceiving it cried out-- "`quick, quick, the bush is giving way!' "this assertion of his determined me not to give him the rope. i pretended to be in a great hurry to do so, but entangled it about my legs, and then appeared occupied in clearing it, when he cried again-- "`quick!'--and hardly had he said the word when the root of the bush snapped, and down he fell below. "i heard the crash as he came to the rock beneath. see the judgment of god--am i not now precisely in his position, lying battered and crushed as he was? after a time i went down to where he lay, and found him expiring. he had just strength to say `god forgive you,' and then he died. it was murder, for i could have saved him and would not, and yet he prayed to god to forgive me. how much happier should i have felt if he had not said that. his `god forgive you' rang in my ears for months afterwards. i returned to the cabin, and with a bold air stated to your mother what had happened, for i felt i could say, this time, i did not do the deed. she burst out into frantic exclamations, accusing me of being not only his murderer but the murderer of her husband. i tried all i could do to appease her, but in vain. for many weeks she was in a state of melancholy and despondency, that made me fear for her life; but she had you still to bestow her affections upon, and for your sake she lived. i soon made this discovery. she was now wholly in my power, but i was awed by her looks even, for a time. at last i became bolder, and spoke to her of our becoming man and wife; she turned from me with abhorrence. i then resorted to other means. i prevented her from obtaining food; she would have starved with pleasure, but she could not bear to see you suffer. i will not detail my cruelty and barbarity towards her; suffice to say it was such that she pined away, and about six months after the death of the captain she died, exhorting me not to injure you, but if ever i had an opportunity, to take you to your grandfather. i could not refuse this demand, made by a woman whom i as certainly killed by slow means as i had your father by a more sudden death. i buried her in the guano, by the side of the others. after her death my life was a torture to me for a long while. i dared not kill you, but i hated you. i had only one consolation, one hope, which occasionally gave me satisfaction; the consolation, if so it could be called, was, that i had possession of the diamonds; the hope--that i should one day see england again. you see me now--are they not all avenged?" i could not but feel the truth of jackson's last sentence. they were indeed avenged. after a short pause, he said to me-- "now, frank, i feel that the mortification in my side is making great progress, and, in a short time, i shall be in too great pain to talk to you. i have made a full confession of my crimes; it is all the reparation i can make to you. now, can you forgive me? for i shall die very miserable if you do not. just look at me. can you feel resentment against one in my wretched state? recollect that you pray to be forgiven as you forgive others. give me your answer." "i think--yes, i feel that i can forgive you, jackson," replied i. "i shall soon be left alone on this island, and i am sure i should be much more miserable than i shall be, if i do not forgive you. i do forgive you." "thanks; you are a good boy, and may god bless you. is it not nearly daylight?" "yes, it is. i shall soon be able to read the bible or prayer-book to you. i have them both here." "the pain is too severe, and becomes worse every minute. i shall not be able to listen to you now; but i shall have some moments of quiet before i die; and then--" jackson groaned heavily, and ceased speaking. for many hours he appeared to suffer much agony, which he vented in low groans; the perspiration hung on his forehead in large beads, and his breathing became laborious. the sun rose and had nearly set again before jackson spoke; at last he asked for some drink. "it is over now," said he, faintly. "the pain is subsiding, and death is near at hand. you may read to me now; but, first, while i think of it, let me tell you where you will find your father's property." "i know," replied i; "in your bed-place under the board. i saw you remove it when you did not see me." "true. i have no more to say; it will all be over soon. read the burial service over me after i am dead; and now, while still above, read me what you think i shall like best; for i cannot collect myself sufficiently to tell you what is most proper. indeed i hardly know. but i can pray at times. read on." i did so, and came upon the parable of the prodigal son. "that suits me," said jackson. "now let me pray. pray for me, frank." "i don't know how," replied i; "you never taught me." "alas, no!" jackson was then silent. i saw his pale lips move for some time. i turned away for a few moments; when i came back to him, he was no more! his jaw had fallen; and this being the first time that i had ever faced death, i looked upon the corpse with horror and dismay. after a few minutes i left the body, and sat down on a rock at some distance from it, for i was somewhat afraid to be near to it. on this rock i remained till the sun was sinking below the horizon; when, alarmed at the idea of being there when it was dark, i took up my books and hastened back to the cabin. i was giddy from excitement, and not having tasted food for many hours. as soon as i had eaten, i lay down in my bed-place, intending to reflect upon what i was to do, now that i was alone; but i was in a few moments fast asleep, and did not wake until the sun was high. i arose much refreshed, and, seeing my bible and prayer-book close to my bed-place, i recollected my promise to jackson that i would read the burial service over his body. i found the place in the prayer-book, for i had read it more than once before; and, having just looked over it, i went with my book to where the body lay. it presented a yet more hideous spectacle than it had the night before. i read the service and closed the book. "what can i do?" thought i. "i cannot bury him in the guano. it will be impossible to carry the body over these rocks." indeed, if it had been possible, i do not think i could have touched it. i was afraid of it. at last i determined that i would cover it up with the fragments of rocks which lay about in all directions, and i did so. this occupied me about two hours, and then, carrying the bottles with me, i gladly hastened away from the spot, with a resolution never to revisit it. i felt quite a relief when i was once more in the cabin. i was alone, it was true, but i was no longer in contact with the dead. i could not collect my thoughts or analyse my feelings during the remainder of the day. i sat with my head resting on my hand, in the attitude of one thinking; but at the same time my mind was vacant. i once more lay down to sleep, and the following morning i found myself invigorated, and capable of acting as well as thinking. i had a weight upon my spirits which i could not at first account for; but it arose from the feeling that i was now alone, without a soul to speak to or communicate with; my lips must now be closed till i again fell in with some of my fellow-creatures--and was that likely? we had seen some of them perish not far from us, and that was all, during a period of many years. chapter fourteen. i was now, by jackson's account, nearly fourteen years old. during fourteen years but one vessel had been seen by us. it might be fourteen more, or double that time might elapse, before i should again fall in with any of my fellow-creatures. as these thoughts saddened me, i felt how much i would have sacrificed if jackson had remained alive, were it only for his company; i would have forgiven him anything. i even then felt as if, in the murderer of my father, i had lost a friend. that day i was so unsettled i could not do anything; i tried to read, but i could not; i tried to eat, but my appetite was gone. i sat looking at the ocean as it rolled wave after wave, sometimes wondering whether it would ever bring a fellow-creature to join me; at others i sat, and for hours, in perfect vacuity of thought. the evening closed in, it was dark, and i still remained seated where i was. at last i returned to my bed, almost broken-hearted; but fortunately i was soon asleep, and my sorrows were forgotten. another morning was gladdened with a brilliant sun, the dark blue ocean was scarcely ruffled by the breeze that swept over it, and i felt my spirits much revived, and my appetite returned. after taking a meal, i remembered what jackson had told me about the belt with the diamonds, and i went up to his bed-place, and turning out the birds' skins and feathers, i raked up the gravel, which was not more than two inches deep, and came to the board. i lifted it up, and found underneath a hole, about a foot deep, full of various articles. there were the watch and sleeve-buttons of the mate, some dollars wrapped in old rags, a tobacco-box, an old pipe, a brooch with hair forming initials, some letters which were signed j. evelyn, and which i perceived were from my grandfather, and probably taken by jackson after my mother's death. i say letters, because they were such, as i afterwards found out, but i had not then ever seen a letter, and my first attempt to decipher written hand was useless, although i did manage to make out the signature. there was in the tobacco-box a plain gold wedding-ring, probably my mother's; and there was also a lock of long dark hair, which i presumed was hers also. there were three or four specimens of what i afterwards found out to be gold and silver ores, a silver pencil-case, and a pair of small gold ear-rings. at the bottom of the hole was the belt; it was of soft leather, and i could feel a hard substance in it sewed in every square, which of course i presumed were the diamonds, but i did not cut one of the divisions open to see what was in them. it had on the upper part of it, in very plain writing, "the property of mr j. evelyn, , minories, london." i examined all these articles one after another, and having satisfied my curiosity, i replaced them in the hole for a future survey. i covered the hole with the board, and put back the gravel and the feathers into the bed-place. this occupied me about two hours, and then i again took my former position on the rocks, and remained in a state of listless inactivity of body and mind the remainder of that day. this state of prostration lasted for many days--i may say for weeks, before it was altogether removed. i could find no pleasure in my books, which were taken up, and after a few moments laid aside. it was now within a month of the time that the birds should come to the island. i was in no want of them for sustenance; there were plenty left, but i almost loathed the sight of food. the reader may inquire how it was that i knew the exact time of the arrival of the birds? i reply that the only reckoning ever kept by jackson and me was the arrival of the full moons, and we also made a mark on the rock every time that the moon was at the full. thirteen moons were the quantity which we reckoned from the time of the birds appearing on the island one year, until their re-appearance the next; and twelve moons had now passed. at length, tired with everything, tired of myself; and i may say, almost tired of life, i one day took it into my head that i would take some provisions with me and a bottle to hold water, and go up the ravine, and cut firewood which should last me a long while; and that i would remain up there for several days, for i hated the sight of the cabin and of all that was near to it. the next day i acted upon this resolution, and slinging my dry provisions on my shoulder, i set off for the ravine. in an hour i had gained it; but not being in a hurry to cut wood, i resolved upon climbing higher up, to see if i could reach the opposite side of the island; that is, at least, get over the brow of the hill, to have a good view of it. i continued to climb until i had gained a smooth grassy spot, which was clear of brushwood; and as i sat down to rest myself, i observed some blue flowers which i had never seen before; indeed i did not know that there was a flower on the island. as i afterwards discovered, they were one of the varieties of gentianellas. i looked at them, admired them, and felt quite an affection for them; they were very pretty, and they were, as well as myself, alone. jackson, when i was pointing out the english cottages in the landscapes of mayor's natural history, had told me a great deal about gardening in england, and how wild flowers and trees were transplanted and improved by culture; how roses and other plants were nailed up the walls as i had observed in the engraving, and how they were watered and kept; and as i sat down looking at the flower, the thought occurred to me, why should i not take it with me, and keep it for myself? i can water it and take care of it. i resolved that i would do so, for i already looked upon the plant as a treasure. i took it up carefully with my american knife, leaving sufficient mould about the roots, and then i proceeded to ascend the hill; but before i had gone another hundred yards, i found at least a dozen more of these plants in flower, all finer than the one i had dug up, and three or four others very different from these, which were also quite new to me. i was puzzled what to do; i put down the plants i had dug up and continued my ascent, not having made up my mind. after half an hour's climbing, i gained the summit, and could perceive the ocean on the other side, and the other half of the island lying beneath me. it was very grand from the height i stood on, but i observed little difference between one side of the island and the other; all was rugged barren rock as on my side, with the exception of the portion close to me; this had brushwood in the ravine, which appeared to be a sort of cleft through the island. all was silent and solitary; not a bird was to be seen, and nothing that had life could i discover. i was about to return, when i thought i might as well go down the ravine facing me for a little way, and see what there was in it. i did so, and discovered some other plants that i had not seen on my side of the island. there were also some fern trees, and some twining plants running up them, and i thought to myself, why, these plants are what i saw in the picture of the english cottages, or very like them. i wonder if they would run up my cabin? and then all at once the idea came to me that i would plant some of them round the cabin, and that i would make a garden of flowers, and have plants of my own. the reader can hardly imagine the pleasure that this idea gave me; i sat down to ruminate upon it, and felt quite happy for the time. i now recollected, however, that the cabin was built on the rock, and that plants would only grow in the earth. at first this idea chilled me, as it seemed to destroy all my schemes, but i resolved that i would bring some earth to the rock, and make my garden in that way. i at first thought of the guano, but jackson had told me that it was only used in small proportions to enrich the soil, and would kill plants if used by itself. after an hour's consideration, during which i called to mind all that jackson had told me on the subject, i made up my mind i would return to the cabin, and on my return ascertain how low down the ravine i could obtain earth for my garden; i would then carry the earth to the cabin, make a soil ready for the plants and flowers, and then, when all was ready, i would go up the ravine, collect what i could, and make my garden. i did so. i found that i could get soil about one-third of the way up the ravine, a quarter of a mile below where the brushwood grew; and having ascertained that, i returned to the cabin, threw down my provisions which were to have lasted me a week, and as it was late, i decided that i would not commence operations until the following day. i took out of the chest a duck frock, and tying up the sleeves and collar, so as to form a bag of the body of the frock, i set off the next morning to begin my task. that day i contrived to carry to the cabin ten or twelve bags of mould, which i put round it in a border about four feet wide and about a foot deep. it occupied me a whole week to obtain the quantity of earth necessary to make the bed on each side of the cabin; it was hard work, but it made me cheerful and happy to what i had been before. i found that the best cure for melancholy and solitude was employment, so i thus obtained valuable knowledge as well as the making of my garden. when i had finished carrying the mould, i started off for the ravine with two bags to hold the plants which i might collect, and after a day's toil, i returned with my bags full of small shrubs, besides a bundle of creepers to plant against the sides of the cabin. the following day was occupied in planting everything i had procured. i was sorry to see that the leaves and flowers hung down, but i watered them all before i went to bed. the next morning i was delighted to perceive that they had all recovered and were looking quite fresh. but my garden was not full enough to please me, and i once more went up the ravine, selecting other plants which had no flowers on them, and one or two other shrubs, which i had not before observed. when these were planted and watered, my garden looked very gay and full of plants, and then i discovered the mould came down for want of support at the edges; i therefore went and picked up pieces of rock of sufficient size to make a border and hold up the mould, and now all was complete, and i had nothing to do but to go on watering them daily. this i did, and recollecting what jackson had said about the guano, i got a bag of it, and put some to each plant. the good effect of this was soon observable, and before the birds came, my garden was in a very flourishing condition. i cannot express to the reader the pleasure i derived from this little garden. i knew every plant and every shrub, talked to them as if they were companions, while i watered and tended them, which i did every night and morning, and their rapid growth was my delight. i no longer felt my solitude so irksome as i had done. i had something to look after, to interest me, and to love; they were alive as well as i was; they grew, and threw out leaves and flowers; they were grateful for the care i bestowed upon them, and became my companions and friends. i before mentioned that during the latter portion of the time i was with jackson, he had taught me to sing several songs. feeling tired, in my solitude, of not hearing the human voice, i found myself at first humming over, and afterwards singing aloud, the various airs i had collected from him. this afforded me much pleasure, and i used to sing half the day. i had no one to listen to me, it is true; but as my fondness for my garden increased, i used to sit down and sing to the flowers and shrubs, and fancy that they listened to me. but my stock of songs was not very large, and at last i had repeated them so often that i became tired of the words. it occurred to me that the prayer-book had the psalms of david at the end of it, set to music. i got the book, and as far as the airs that i knew would suit, i sang them all; never were psalms, probably, sung to such tunes before, but it amused me, and there was no want of variety of language. every three or four days i would go up the ravine, and search carefully for any new flower or shrub which i had not yet planted in my garden, and when i found one, as i often did, it was a source of great delight. chapter fifteen. at last the birds came, and i procured some of their eggs, which were a very agreeable change, after living so long upon dried meat. my want of occupation occasioned me also to employ some of my time in fishing, which i seldom had done while jackson was alive; and this created a variety in my food, to which, for a long while, i had been a stranger. jackson did not care for fish, as to cook it we were obliged to go up the ravine for wood, and he did not like the trouble. when the birds came, i had recourse to my book on natural history, to read over again the accounts of the man-of-war birds, gannets, and other birds mentioned in it; and there was a vignette of a chinaman with tame cormorants on a pole, and in the letter-press an account of how they were trained and employed to catch fish for their masters. this gave me the idea that i would have some birds tame, as companions, and, if possible, teach them to catch fish for me; but i knew that i must wait till the young birds were fit to be taken from the nest. i now resolved that during the time the birds were mating, i would go to the ravine and remain there several days, to collect bundles of firewood. the firewood was chiefly cut from a sort of low bush, like the sallow or willow, fit for making baskets, indeed fit for anything better than firewood; however, there were some bushes which were of a harder texture, and which burnt well. it was jackson who told me that the former were called willow and used for making baskets, and he also showed me how to tie the faggots up by twisting the sallows together. they were not, however, what jackson said they were--from after knowledge, i should say that they were a species of oleander, or something of the kind. having roasted several dozen of eggs quite hard, by way of provision, i set off one morning, and went to the ravine. as jackson had said before, you had to walk under a wall of rock thirty feet high, and then pass through a water-course to get up to the ravine, which increased the distance to where the shrubs grew, at least half a mile. it was over this wall that the captain fell and was killed, because jackson would not assist him. i gained the thicket where the bushes grew, and for three days i worked very hard, and had cut down and tied about fifty large faggots, when i thought that i had collected enough to last me for a long while; but i had still to carry them down, and this was a heavy task, as i could not carry more than one at a time. it occurred to me that if i threw my faggots over the wall opposite to where they had been cut down, i should save myself nearly a mile of carriage, as otherwise i had to walk all the way to the water-course which divided the wall of rock, and then walk back again. indeed, where i cut down the wood was not more than a quarter of a mile from the bathing-pool, and all down hill. i was delighted at this idea, which i wondered had never occurred to jackson, and i commenced putting it into execution. the top of the wall of rock was slippery from the constant trickling of the water over the surface, but this was only in some places. i carried my faggots down one by one, and threw them over, being careful not to lose my footing in so doing. i had carried all but three or four, and had become careless, when, on heaving one over, my heels were thrown up, and before i could recover myself i slid down the remainder of the ledge and was precipitated down below, a distance of more than thirty feet. i must have remained there many hours insensible, but at last i recovered and found myself lying on the faggots which i had thrown down. it was my falling on the faggots, instead of the hard rock, which had saved my life. i rose as soon as i could collect my scattered senses. i felt very sore and very much shaken, and the blood was running out of my mouth, but there were no bones broken. i was, however, too ill to attempt anything more that day. i walked home at a very slow pace and went to bed. a sound sleep restored me, and in a day or two i was quite recovered. i watered my plants, which i found drooping, as if they had grieved at my being so long away from them, and then i returned to where my faggots had been left; and to lighten my labour i resolved to carry them down to the bathing-pool and stack them up there on the rocks near to it. i mention this for reasons that the reader will comprehend by-and-bye. this occupied me two days, for i was not inclined, after my fall, to work hard; and very glad was i when the labour was over. the young birds were now hatched, but i had to wait four or five weeks before they were fit to be taken. i began again to find solitude tedious. the flowers in my garden had all bloomed and withered, and there was not so much to interest me. i recommenced reading the bible, and the narratives in the old and new testaments again afforded me pleasure. i hardly need say to the reader that i read the bible as i would have read any other book--for amusement, and not for instruction. i had learnt little from jackson--indeed, as regards the true nature of the christian religion, i may say, nothing at all. i do not believe that he knew anything about it himself. it is true that the precepts in the new testament struck me, and that i was more interested about our saviour than anybody else; but i could not comprehend him, or his mission. in short, i read in darkness; and i may say that i almost knew the bible by heart without understanding it.--how could i? how many thousands are there who do the same, without having an excuse to offer for their blindness! at last the time for taking the birds arrived, and i had then sufficient employment to keep me from being melancholy. i collected quite as many as we had done when jackson and i had to be provided for; and with my new knives my labour was comparatively easy. as soon as i had completed my provision, i went back to take the young birds which already i had selected and left for that purpose. it was high time, for i found that when i went to take them they were ready to fly. however, after a good battle with the old birds (for i had taken six young ones--two from each nest, which arrayed a force of six old ones against me, who fought very valiantly in defence of their offspring), i succeeded in carrying them off, but followed by the old birds, who now screamed and darted close to me as they came pursuing me to the cabin. as soon as i got safe back, i took the young birds into the cabin, tying each of them by the leg with a piece of fishing-line, and the other end of the line i fastened to some pieces of rock which i had collected ready on the platform outside of the cabin. the old birds continued to persecute me till it was dark, and then they went away, and i, tired with my day's labour, was not sorry to go to sleep. when i woke up the next morning, i found the old birds on the platform, in company with the young ones, i presume trying to persuade them to fly away with them; but the lines on their legs prevented that. they did not leave at my approach for some little while; at last they all took wing, and went off to sea; but in the course of a few minutes they returned with some small fish in their mouths, with which they fed their young ones. they continued to do this for the two following days, when there was a general break up, announcing the departure of the main body, which, after much soaring and wheeling in the air, flew off in a northerly direction. the six parent birds, who were with their young ones at the cabin, appeared for some time very uneasy, flying round and round and screaming wildly; at last they soared in the air with loud shrieks, and flew away after the main body, which was still in sight-- their love for their young overpowered by their instinctive habits. i was not sorry when they were gone, as i wanted to have my new family all to myself. i went down to the rocks and caught a fish, which was large enough to supply them for three or four days. i fed them with the inside of the fish, and they ate it very heartily. for several days they appeared very uneasy; but gradually they settled, and not only appeared to know me, but to welcome my coming, which was to me a source of great pleasure. i now neglected my flowers for the birds, which were the more animated of the two; and i sat down for hours on the platform with my six companions, who i must own were not over-lively and intelligent, but they were alive, and had eyes. they seldom roused up, unless i brought them fish, of which they had a supply four times a day, and then they would stand on their legs and open their beaks far apart, each waiting for its share. they were a great happiness to me, and i watched their gradual increase of plumage and of size, which was very rapid. i gave them all names out of my natural history book. one was lion, then tiger, panther, bear, horse, and jackass (at the time that i named them, the last would have been very appropriate to them all); and as i always called them by their names as i fed them, i soon found, to my great joy, that they knew them well enough. this delighted me. i read my books to them by way of amusement; i sang my songs to them; i talked to them; i would even narrate the various histories out of the bible to them, such as that of joseph and his brethren, etcetera; and the stolid air with which the communications were received made me almost imagine they were listened to. after a time, i took the line off the legs of two of them, with the precaution of first cutting their wings, and these two became much more lively, following me into the cabin, and generally staying there during the night. as i found that no attempt was made to escape, i let them all loose, after having cut their wings, and they all behaved equally well with the two first to which i had given their liberty. the perfect obedience and good behaviour of my new companions again gave me leisure that was not altogether desirable, as it left a vacuum to fill up. but i returned to my garden. i could do no more at present but water my plants and look at the increased daily growth of the climbers, as they now boldly ascended the sides of the cabin; but i thought it was high time to go up into the ravine and about the island, to see if i could not add to my collection. one morning i set off up the ravine. i was not successful, so i contented myself with carrying, by the long road, those faggots which i had left behind me on the day when i fell over the precipice. this labour i finished, and then returned to the cabin, where i was met by my birds with half-extended wings and open mouths, as if they were very glad to see me, and very hungry into the bargain. i ought to observe that my birds appeared now to separate into pairs, male and female, as their difference of plumage denoted. lion and horse were always side by side, as were jackass and bear, and tiger and panther. i now fed them one by one, calling them by name, to which they immediately responded, and if any one came who was not called, it was switched for its trouble. the next morning i set off on another voyage of discovery after plants, and this time i resolved upon trying what i could find among the crevices of the rocks, for i had seen at a distance what appeared to me to be a very pretty flower on the ledge of one of the clefts. i did not go up the ravine this time, but commenced climbing the rocks behind where the cabin was built. it was hard work, but i was not easily discouraged, and after a couple of hours, i arrived at a level which i had in view when i commenced my labour, and here i was amply rewarded; for i found several plants quite new to me, and a variety of ferns, which i thought very beautiful, although they had no flowers. the scene, from where i stood, was awful and beautiful. i looked down upon the rocks below, and the cabin, which appeared very small, and i thought that i could see my birds like dots upon the platform. it was a bright day and smooth water, and i could clearly distinguish the other islands in the distance, and i thought that i saw something like a white speck close to them--perhaps it was a vessel. this made me melancholy, and i could not help asking myself whether i was to remain all my life upon the island, alone, or if there were any chance of my ever being taken off it. as i looked down upon the cabin, i was surprised at the steepness of the rocks which i had climbed, and felt alarmed, as if i never should be able to get back again. but these thoughts were soon chased away. i turned from the seaward, and looked inland. i found that on one side of me there was a chasm between the rocks, the bottom of which was so far down that i could not see it; and on the other side the rock rose up as straight as a wall. my attention was soon diverted by discovering another plant, and i now commenced my task of digging them all up. i obtained, with the ferns, about twenty new varieties, which i made up in a bundle ready for carrying down slung round my neck; for i knew that i should require both hands to descend with. then i sat down to rest myself a little before i commenced my return, and after i had been seated a few minutes, i thought i would sing a song by way of amusement. chapter sixteen. i have before said that, tired of repeating the words of the songs which jackson had taught me, i had taken those of psalms in metre, at the end of the prayer-book, by way of variety; and, as far as metre went, they answered very well, although people would have been surprised to have heard psalms sung to such quick and varied measure. the psalm i chose this time was the first--"how blest is he who ne'er consents;" and i began accordingly; but when i came to the end of the line, to my astonishment i heard a plaintive voice, at a distance, repeat after me "con-sents." i looked round. i thought i must have been deceived, so i continued--"by ill advice to walk." this time i could not be mistaken--"to walk," was repeated by the same voice as plainly as possible. i stopped singing, lost in wonder. "there must be somebody on the island as well as myself," thought i; for i never had heard an echo before, except when it thundered, and such echoes i had put down as a portion of the thunder. "who's there?" cried i. "who's there?" replied the voice. "it's me!" "it's me!" was the answer. i did not know what to make of it. i cried out again and again, and again and again i heard what i said repeated, but no answer to my questions. i thought i was insulted by somebody, and yet, when i listened, the voice that spoke came from the face of the rock on the other side of the chasm, and no one could be there without my seeing them. this made me think that i was mistaken, and that there could not be anybody, but still i could not solve the mystery. at last i became frightened, and as the sun was now setting, i determined to get back to the cabin. i did so, and went down much faster than i had gone up, for as it grew dark i became the more alarmed. the only thing that reassured me was the softness and plaintiveness of the voice--not like jackson's, but as of some one who would not think of injuring me. although i was, generally speaking, quiet and content with my isolated position, yet it was only when i was employed or amused with my favourites. at times, i could not find anything to do, and was overcome by weariness. i would then throw away my books, and remain for hours thinking upon the probability of my ever again seeing a fellow-creature; and a fit of melancholy would come over me, which would last many days. i was in one of these moods, when it occurred to me, that although i had seen the other side of the island from the summit, i had not gone down to the beach to explore it; and i resolved that i would do so, making a trip of three or four days. when my knives had become blunt, jackson had told me how to sharpen them by rubbing the blades upon a hard flat piece of rock wetted with water. this i had found to answer very well, and i now determined i would try and sharpen one of the old axes in the same way, so as to make it serviceable, for i was very much afraid of breaking my knives in cutting down the brushwood, and i knew how much more rapidly it could be done with an axe. i picked out a large stone, suitable for the purpose, and with a kid of water at hand, i set-to to sharpen the axe. it was a long job, but in a day or two i had succeeded admirably, and the axe was in good order. i then thought how i could leave my birds for so many days, as they would require food. at last i considered that if i caught two large fish and cut them up, they would be sufficient for their sustenance. i did so, and, provided with a packet of dried birds for food, tied up in a duck frock, with my natural history book for amusement, a pannikin to get water in, my axe on my shoulder, and my knives by my side--i first kissed all the birds, and told them to remain quiet and good till i came back--i set off on a bright clear morning on my tour of examination. in a couple of hours i had gained the summit of the island, and prepared for my descent, by sitting down and eating my dinner. i observed that, as before, the water on the other side of the island was quite smooth, compared to what it was on the side where i resided. it was, in fact, from the prevailing winds during the year, the lee side of the island. having rested myself sufficiently, i commenced my descent, which i accomplished in little less time than it took me to ascend from the other side. as i neared the rocks by the shore, i thought i perceived something occasionally moving about on them. i was not mistaken, for as i came closer, i found that there were several large animals lying on the rocks, and occasionally dropping into the sea close to them. the sight of anything living was to me of great interest. i determined to get nearer, and ascertain what animals they were. at last, by creeping along from rock to rock, i arrived to within forty yards of them. i recollected some animals of the same shape in my book of natural history, which, fortunately, i had with me in the duck frock, and sitting down behind the rock, i pulled it out, and turned over the pages until i came to a print which exactly answered to their appearance. it was the seal. having satisfied myself on that point, i read the history of the animal, and found that it was easily tamed, and very affectionate when taken young, and also might be easily killed by a blow on the nose. these, at least, were for me the two most important pieces of information. it occurred to me that it would be very pleasant to have a young seal for a playmate (for the gannets, after all, were not very intelligent), and i resolved to obtain one if i could. i put down my duck frock with my provisions behind the rock, and taking my axe in my hand, i cautiously advanced to where the animals lay. there were about twenty of them all together on one rock, but they were all large, and seemed to be about five or six feet long. i could not see a small one anywhere, so i walked in behind the rocks further to the right, towards another rock, where i saw another batch of them lying. as i neared them, i saw by herself, a seal with a young one by her side, not more than two feet long. this was what i wanted. they lay at some distance from the water, upon a low rock. i watched them for some time, and was much amused at the prattling which passed between the old and the young one. i thought that to obtain the young one, i must of course kill the old one, for i perceived that it had large teeth. i considered it advisable to get between them and the water, that they might not escape me, and i contrived so to do, before i made my appearance. as soon as the old one perceived me running to them, it gave a shrill cry, and then floundered towards the water; as we came close together, it showed its teeth, and rose upon its flappers to defend itself and its young one, which kept close to its side; but a blow on its nose with the axe rendered it motionless, and apparently dead. delighted with my success, i seized hold of the young one and took it in my arms, and was carrying it away, when i found myself confronted with the male seal, which, alarmed by the cry of the female, had come to her assistance. it was much larger than the female, with more shaggy hair about the neck and shoulders, and apparently very fierce. i could not pass it, as it was in-shore of me, and i had just time to drop the young seal, and leap behind a rock on one side, with my axe all ready. the animal reared itself on the rock to pass over to me, when i saluted it with a blow on the head, which staggered it. i had lost my presence of mind by the creature coming upon me so unexpectedly, and my blow was not well aimed; but before it could recover the first blow, another on its nose tumbled it over, to all appearance lifeless. i then hastened to gain the other side of the rock, where i had left the young seal, and found that it had crept to its mother's body, and was fondling it. i took it in my arms, and retreated to where i had left my duck frock, and throwing everything else out, i put the animal in, and tied up the end, so that it could not escape. i then sat down to recover myself from the excitement occasioned by this first engagement i had ever been in, quite delighted with my newly-acquired treasure. i then thought what i should do. it was now within an hour of dark, and was too late to return to the other side of the island, or i would have done so, as i was anxious to get my seal home. at last i decided that i would go farther from the beach, and take up my quarters for the night. i collected my provision, and with my seal under my arm, i walked away about one hundred yards from the water's edge, and took up a position under a large rock; here i ate my supper, and then untied the line which closed up the frock, and had a parting look at my little friend before i went to sleep. he had struggled a good deal at first, but was now quiet, although he occasionally made attempts to bite me. i coaxed him and fondled him a good deal, and then put him into his bag again, and made him secure, which appeared to annoy him very much, as he was not half as quiet in a bag as he was when i held him in my lap. i then took my book to read over again the history of the seal, and i found that their skins were valuable, and also that they gave a great deal of oil; but i had no use for oil, though i thought that their skins might be very comfortable in my bed-place. i shut my book and lay down to sleep, but i could not obtain any till near daylight, i had been so excited, and was so anxious about my treasure. the sun shining in my eyes woke me up; i found my seal was lying very quiet, i touched him to see that he was not dead; and the cry that he gave assured me to the contrary. i then walked back to where i had left the bodies of the parents. i found on examination that they were both dead, and also that their furs were very beautiful, and i resolved that i would have their skins. but here was a difficulty. if i took off the skins, i could not carry them with me, and i was anxious to get the young one home, lest it should die of hunger; so i decided that i would first take home the young one, give it food and warm it, and then return and skin the old ones. i therefore made my breakfast, and leaving the remainder of my provision in a cleft in the rock, that i might not have the trouble of bringing it again, i set off on my return, and used such diligence that i was back at the cabin by noon. i found my birds all well, and apparently quite satisfied with the provision that i had left them, for they were most of them asleep, and those that were awake did not notice my arrival. "ah," thought i, "you only like me for what i give you; next time i go away i will leave you hungry, and then, when you see me come back, you will all flutter your wings with gladness." i was puzzled where to put my seal so as to keep him safe: at last i decided upon opening the seaman's chest and putting him in that. i did so, and gave him a piece of fish which the birds had not eaten. the little creature devoured it eagerly, and i took my lines and went down to catch some fish for a further supply. in half an hour i returned with two large fish, and i then took the seal out of the chest and fed him again. he ate very heartily; and i was glad to perceive that he appeared much tamer already. i threw some of the insides of the fish to the birds, who were now become of very inferior interest to me. having fed my animals, i then thought of myself, and, as i took my meal, i arranged that the next morning i would go over to the other side of the island, skin the two seals, and spread out the skins on the rocks to dry, and would leave them there till i had a better opportunity of bringing them to the cabin; at present i could not be away from my new acquaintance, which i wished to make tame and fond of me. having fed him again in the morning, i put down the lid of the chest, and then started for the lee side of the island. chapter seventeen. i arrived early, skinned both the seals, and dragged the skins up from the water side, though with difficulty, especially that of the large one, to the rock where i had taken up my quarters the night before. here i spread them out to dry, putting large pieces of rock upon the edges, that they might not be blown away. it was nearly dusk when i had finished, but i set off, and an hour after dark arrived at the cabin; for now that i knew my way so well, i got over the ground twice as fast as i did before. i crawled into my bed-place in the dark, and slept soundly after my fatigue. i awoke the next morning with the plaintive cry of my seal in the chest, and i hastened to get some fish to feed him with. i took him out and fed him; and was astonished how tame the little animal had become already. he remained very quietly with me after he had been fed, nestling close to my side, as if i had been his mother, and even making a half attempt to follow me when i left him. my birds appeared very dull and stupid, and i observed also that they were very dirty, and always rushed to the kid when it was full of water, trying to get into it. this made me think that they required bathing in salt-water, and i took one down to the bathing-pool, with a long line to its leg, and put it in. the manner in which the poor creature floundered, and dipped and washed itself, for several minutes, proved my supposition correct; so, after allowing it half an hour for its recreation, i took it back, and went down with the others until they had all indulged in the luxury of a bath; and from that time, as i took them down almost every day, it was astonishing how much brighter and sleeker their plumage became. i remained a week in the cabin, taming my seal, who now was quite fond of me; and one night, as i was going to bed, he crawled into my bed-place, and from that time he was my bedfellow. at the end of a week i went over to the other side of the island, and contrived to carry up the two skins to the summit. it was a hard day's work. the day afterwards i conveyed them to the cabin, and, as they were quite dry, i put them into my bed-place to lie down upon, as i did not like the smell of the bird's feathers, although i had so long been accustomed to them. and now, what with my seal, my birds, and my garden, and the occupation they gave me, the time passed quickly away, until, by my reckoning, it was nearly the period for the birds to come again. i observed, as the time drew near, that my birds were uneasy. they had paired, as i mentioned before, and when their plumage was complete, it was evident that they had paired male and female, as i had supposed. they had not been tethered for a long while, and appeared to me now very much inclined to fly, especially the male birds. at first i thought that i would cut all their wings, as i was fearful that they would join the other birds on their arrival, but observing that they were so fond of their mates, i resolved to cut the wing of the females only, as i did not think that the male birds would leave them. i did so, and took my chance; for, since i had the seal for a companion, i did not care so much for the birds as before. at last the birds came, and took possession of the guano-ground as usual, and i went for fresh eggs; at the same time i found that my females were scratching, as if they would make their nests, and a few days afterwards they began to lay. i then thought that as soon as they had young ones they would wish to go away, so i took the eggs that were laid, to prevent them; but i found that as fast as i took away the eggs they laid more, and this they did for nearly two months, supplying me with fresh eggs long after the wild birds had hatched, and left the island. the male birds, at the time that the females first laid their eggs, tried their wings in short flights in circles; and then flew away out to sea. i thought that they were gone; but i was deceived, for they returned in about a quarter of an hour, each with a fish in its beak, which they laid down before their mates. i was much pleased at this, and i resolved that in future they should supply their own food, which they did; and not their own food only, but enough for the seal and me also, when the weather was fine; but when it was rough, they could not obtain any, and then i was obliged to feed them. the way i obtained from them the extra supply of fish was, that when they first went out, i seized, on their return the fish which they brought; and as often as i did this, they would go for more, until the females were fed. but i had one difficulty to contend with, which was, that at the time the birds could not obtain fish, which was when the weather was rough, i could not neither, as they would not take the bait. after some cogitation, i decided that i would divide a portion of the bathing-pool farthest from the shore, by a wall of loose rock which the water could flow through, but which the fish could not get out of, and that i would catch fish in the fine weather to feed the seal and the birds when the weather was rough and bad. as soon as i had finished curing my stock of provisions and got it safely housed in the cabin, i set to work to make this wall, which did not take me a very long while, as the water was not more than two feet deep, and the pool about ten yards across. as soon as it was finished, i went out every day, when it was fine, and caught as many fish as i thought i might require, and put them into this portion of the bathing-pool. i found the plan answer well, as the fish lived; but i had great difficulty in getting them out when i wanted them; for they would not take the bait. as my birds were no longer a trouble to me, but rather, on the contrary, a profit, i devoted my whole time to my seal. i required a name for him, and reading in the book of natural history that a certain lion was called nero, i thought it a very good name for a seal, and bestowed it on him accordingly, although what nero meant i had no idea of. the animal was now so tame that he would cry if ever i left him, and would follow me as far as he could down the rocks; but there was one part of the path leading to the bathing-pool, which was too difficult for him, and there he would remain crying till i came back. i had more than once taken him down to the bathing-pool to wash him, and he was much pleased when i did. i now resolved that i would clear the path of the rocks, that he might be able to follow me down the whole way, for he had grown so much that i found him too heavy to carry. it occupied me a week before i could roll away and remove the smaller rocks, and knock off others with the axe; but i finished it at last, and was pleased to find that the animal followed me right down and plunged into the water. he had not been down since i had made the wall of rock to keep the fish in, and as soon as he was in, he dived and came out with one of the fish, which he brought to land. "so now," thought i, "i shall know how to get the fish when i want them--i shall bring you down, nero." i may as well here observe that nero very soon obeyed orders as faithfully as a dog. i had a little switch, and when he did wrong, i would give him a slight tap on the nose. he would shake his head, show his teeth, and growl, and then come fondly to me. as he used to follow me every day down to the pool, i had to break him of going after the fish when i did not want them taken, and this i accomplished. no one who had not witnessed it, could imagine the affection and docility of this animal, and the love i had for him. he was my companion and playmate during the day, and my bedfellow at night. we were inseparable. it was at the latter portion of the second year of my solitude that a circumstance occurred, that i must now relate. nero had gone down to the pool with me, and i was standing fishing off the rocks, when he came out of the pool and plunged into the sea, playing all sorts of gambols, and whistling with delight. i did not think anything about it. he plunged and disappeared for a few minutes, and then would come up again close to where my line was; but he disturbed the fish, and i could not catch any. to drive him further off, i pelted him with pieces of rock, one of which hit him very hard, and he dived down. after a time i pulled up my line, and whistling to him to return, although i did not see him, i went away to the cabin, fully expecting that he would soon follow me, for now he could walk (after his fashion) from the cabin to the pool as he pleased. this was early in the morning, and i busied myself with my garden, which was now in great luxuriance, for i had dressed it with guano; but observing about noon that he had not returned, i became uneasy, and went down to the pool to look for him. he was not there, and i looked on the sea, but could not perceive him anywhere. i called and whistled, but it was of no use, and i grew very much alarmed at the idea that my treasure had deserted me. "it could not be because i threw the pieces of rock at him," thought i; "he would not leave me for that." i remained for two or three hours, watching for him, but it was all in vain; there was no seal--no nero. my heart sank at the idea of the animal having deserted me, and for the first time in my life, as far as i can recollect, i burst into a flood of tears. for the first time in my life, i may say, i felt truly miserable--my whole heart and affections were set upon this animal, the companion and friend of my solitude, and i felt as if existence were a burden without him. after a while, i retraced my steps to the cabin; but i was miserable, more so than i can express. i could not rest quiet. two hours before sunset, i went down again to the rocks, and called till i was hoarse. it was all in vain; night closed in, and again i returned to the cabin, and threw myself down in my bed-place in utter despair. "i thought he loved me," said i to myself, "loved me as i loved him; i would not have left him in that way." and my tears burst out anew at the idea that i never should see my poor nero again. the reader may think that my grief was inordinate and unwarrantable; but let him put himself in my position--a lad of sixteen, alone on a desolate island, with only one companion--true, he was an animal, and could not speak, but he was affectionate; he replied to all my caresses; he was my only companion and friend, the only object--that i loved or cared about. he was intelligent, and i thought loved me as much as i loved him; and now he had deserted me, and i had nothing else that i cared about or that cared for me. my tears flowed for more than an hour, till at last i was wearied and fell asleep. chapter eighteen. it was early in the morning, and yet dark, when i felt something touch me. i started up--a low cry of pleasure told me at once it was nero, who was by my side. yes, it was nero, who had come back, having climbed up again the steep path to the cabin, to return to his master. need i say that i was overjoyed, that i hugged him as if he had been a human being, that i wept over him, and that in a few minutes afterwards we were asleep together in the same bed-place? such was the fact, and never was there in my after-life so great a transition from grief to joy. "oh! now, if you had left me,"--said i to him, the next morning, when i got up; "you naughty seal, to frighten me and make me so unhappy as you did!" nero appeared quite as happy as i was at our re-union, and was more affectionate than ever. i must now pass over many months in very few words; just stating to the reader what my position was at the end of three years, during which i was alone upon the island. i had now arrived at the age of near seventeen, and was tall and strong for my years. i had left off wearing my dress of the skins of birds, having substituted one of the seaman's shirts, which i had found in the chest. this, however, was the whole of my costume, and although, had it been longer it would have been more correct, still, as i had no other companion but nero, it was not necessary to be so very particular, as if i had been in society. during these three years, i think i had read the bible and prayer-book, and my natural history book, at least five or six times quite through, and possessing a retentive memory, could almost repeat them by heart; but still i read the bible as a sealed book, for i did not understand it, having had no one to instruct me, nor any grace bestowed upon me. i read for amusement, and nothing more. my garden was now in a most flourishing condition, the climbing plants had overrun the cabin, so as to completely cover the whole of the roof and every portion of it, and they hung in festoons on each side of the doorway. many of the plants which i had taken up small, when i moved them, had proved to be trees, and were now waving to the breeze, high above the cabin roof; and everything that i had planted, from continual watering and guano, had grown most luxuriantly. in fact, my cabin was so covered and sheltered, that its original form had totally disappeared; it now looked like an arbour in a clump of trees, and from the rocks by the bathing-pool it had a very picturesque appearance. i had, of course, several times gone up the ravine, and now that my axe had become useful, i had gradually accumulated a large stock of wood down by the bathing-pool, more than i could use for a long while, as i seldom lighted a fire; but the cutting it was employment, and employment was to me a great source of happiness. i had been several times to the other side of the island, and had had more encounters with the seals, of which i killed many, for i found their skins very comfortable and useful in the cabin. i had collected about three dozen of the finest skins, which were more than i required, but i had taken them for the same reason that i had collected the firewood, for the sake of employment; and in this instance, i may add, for the sake of the excitement which the combats with the seals afforded me. i have not narrated any of these conflicts, as i thought that they might weary the reader; i must, however, state what occurred on one occasion, as although ludicrous, it nearly cost me my life. i had attacked a large male seal, with a splendid fur, for i always looked out for the best-skinned animals. he was lying on a rock close to the water, and i had gone into the water to cut him off and prevent his escape by plunging in as he would otherwise have done; but as i aimed the usual blow at his nose, my foot slipped on the wet rock, and i missed the animal, and at the same time fell down on the rock with the axe in my hand. the animal, which was a male of the largest size, seized hold of my shirt (which i then wore) with his teeth, and plunging with me into the sea, dived down into the deep water. it was fortunate that he had seized my shirt instead of my body, and also that i could swim well. he carried me along with him--the shirt, for a few seconds, drawn over my head, when, disembarrassing myself of the garment, by slipping my head and arms out, i left it in his possession, and regained the surface of the water, almost suffocated. it was fortunate that i did not wear sleeve-buttons; had i had them, i could not have disengaged myself, and must have perished. i climbed the rock again, and turning round, i perceived the seal on the surface, shaking the shirt in great wrath. this was a sad discomfiture, as i lost not only my shirt but my axe, which i dropped when i was dragged into the water; nothing was saved except my knife, which i carried by a lanyard round my neck. why i mention this circumstance particularly, is, that having felt great inconvenience for want of sleeve-buttons to hold the wristbands of my shirt together, i had thought of making use of those of the mate, which the reader may recollect had been given with his watch into jackson's care, to take home to his wife; but on second consideration i thought it very possible i might lose them, and decided that the property was in trust, and that i had no right to risk it. this correct feeling on my part, therefore, was probably the saving of my life. i have only now to mention my birds, and of them i can merely say that they went on as before; they bathed constantly, at the right season they laid eggs, the male birds caught fish and brought them to the cabin, and they were just as stupid and uninteresting as they were at first; however, they never left me, nor indeed showed any intention to leave me, after the first season of the birds returning to the island. they were useful but not very ornamental, and not at all interesting to one who had such an intelligent companion as nero. having new brought up my history, in a few words, until the time referred to, i come to the narrative of what occurred to produce a change in my condition. i have said that in the chest there was a spy-glass, but it had been wetted with salt-water, and was useless. jackson had tried to show me how to use it, and had shown me correctly, but the glasses were dimmed by the wet and subsequent evaporation from heat. i had taken out all the glasses and cleaned them, except the field-glass, as it is called; but that being composed of two glasses, the water had penetrated between them, and it still remained so dull that nothing could be distinguished through it, at the time that jackson was showing me how to use the instrument; it was therefore put on one side as useless. a year afterwards i took it out, from curiosity, and then i discovered that the moisture between the two glasses had been quite dried up, and that i could see very clearly through it, and after a little practice i could use it as well as anybody else. still i seldom did use it, as my eyesight was particularly keen, and i did not require it; and as for any vessel coming off the island, i had gradually given up all thoughts of it. it was one evening when the weather was very rough and the sea much agitated, that i thought i saw something unusual on the water, about four miles distant. i supposed at first it might be a spermaceti whale, for numbers used to play round the island at certain seasons, and i used to watch their blowing and their gambols, if i may use the term, and jackson, often told me long stories about the whale-fisheries; but a ray of the setting sun made the object appear white, and i ran for the glass, and made out that it was a boat or a very small vessel, with a sail out, and running before the gale right down to the island. i watched it till it was dark with much interest, and with thoughts of various kinds chasing each other; and then i began to consider what was best to do. i knew that in an hour the moon would rise, and as the sky was not cloudy, although the wind and sea were high, i should probably be able to see it again. "but they never can get on shore on this side of the island," thought i, "with so much sea. yes they might, if they ran for the bathing-pool." after thinking awhile, i decided that i would go down to the bathing-pool, and place lighted fagots on the rocks on each side of the entrance, as this would show them where to run for, and how to get in. i waited a little longer, and then taking my spy-glass and some tinder with me, i went down to the pool, carried two fagots to the rocks on each side, and having set them on fire and taken up others to replace them as soon as they were burnt out, i sat down with my spy-glass to see if i could make out where the boat might be. as the moon rose, i descried her now within a mile of the island, and her head directed towards the beacon lights made by the burning fagots. i threw another fagot on each, and went down for a further supply. the gale had increased, and the spray now dashed over the rocks to where the fagots were burning, and threatened to extinguish them, but i put on more wood and kept up a fierce blaze. in a quarter of an hour i could distinguish the boat; it was now close to the island, perhaps three hundred yards distant, steering not directly for the lights, but more along shore. the fact was that they had hauled up, not knowing how they could land until they had observed the two lights clear of each other, and then they understood why they had been made; and a moment afterwards they bore up right for the entrance to the bathing-pool, and came rushing on before the rolling seas. i still trembled for them, as i knew that if the sea receded at the time that they came to the ledge of rocks at the entrance, the boat would be dashed to pieces, although their lives might be saved; but fortunately for them, it was not so--on the contrary, they came in borne upon a huge wave which carried them clear over the ledge, right up to the wall of rock which i had made across the pool, and then the boat grounded. "hurrah! well done, that," said a voice from the boat. "lower away the sail, my lads; all's right." the sail was lowered down, and then, by the light of the fire, i discovered that there were several people in the boat. i had been too much excited to say anything, indeed, i did not know what to say. i only felt that i was no more alone, and the reader may imagine my joy and delight. chapter nineteen. as soon as the sail was lowered, the men leaped over the sides of the boat into the water, and waded to the rocks. "who are you?" said one of the men, addressing me, "and how many of you are there here?" "there is no one on the island but myself," replied i; "but i'm so glad that you have come." "are you? then perhaps you'll tell us how to get something to eat, my hearty?" replied he. "oh yes, wait a little, and i'll bring you plenty," replied i. "well, then, look smart, that's a beauty, for we are hungry enough to eat you, if you can find us nothing better." i was about to go up to the cabin for some birds, when another man called out:-- "i say--can you get us any water?" "oh yes, plenty," replied i. "well then, i say, jim, hand us the pail out of the boat." the one addressed did so, and the man put it into my hands, saying, "bring us that pail, boy, will you?" i hastened up to the cabin, filled the pail full of water, and then went for a quantity of dried birds, with which i hastened down again to the bathing-pool. i found the men had not been idle; they had taken some fagots off the stack and made a large fire under the rocks, and were then busy making a sort of tent with the boat's sails. "here's the water, and here's some birds," said i, as i came up to them. "birds! what birds?" said the man who had first spoken to me, and appeared to have control over the rest. he took one up and examined it by the light of the fire, exclaiming, "queer eating, i expect." "why, you didn't expect a regular hotel when you landed, did you, mate?" said one of the men. "no, if i had, i would have called for a glass of grog," replied he. "i suspect i might call a long while before i get any one to bring me one here." as i knew that jackson called the rum by the name of grog, i said, "there's plenty of grog, if you want any." "is there, my hearty,--where?" "why, in that cask that's in the water on the other side of your little ship," replied i. "i can draw you some directly." "what! in that cask? grog floating about in salt-water, that's too bad. come here all of you. you're in earnest, boy--no joking i hope, or you may repent it." "i'm not joking," said i--"there it is." the man, followed by all the rest excepting one of the party, waded into the water, and went to the cask of rum. "take care," said i, "the spiles are in." "so i see--never fear, my hearty--come now all of us." so saying, the whole of them laid hold of the cask by the chains, and lifting it up, they carried it clean out of the water, and placed it on the rocks by the side of the pool. "hand us the little kid out of the boat, jim," said the man; "we'll soon see if it's the right stuff." he took out the spiles, drew off some of the liquor, and tasting it, swore it was excellent. it was then handed round, and all the men took some. "we're in luck to-night; we're fallen upon our legs," said the first man. "i say, jim, put them dried chickens into the pitch-kettle along with some taters out of the bag--they'll make a good mess; and then with this cask of grog to go to, we shan't do badly." "i say, old fellow," said he, turning to me, "you're a regular trump. who left you on shore to get all ready for us?" "i was born here," replied i. "born here! well, we'll hear all about that to-morrow--just now, we'll make up for lost time, for we've had nothing to eat or drink since wednesday morning. look alive, my lads! get up the hurricane-house. jim, put the pail of water into the kettle, and send the islander here for another pailful, for grog." the pail was handed to me, and i soon returned with it full; and, as i did not see that they had a pannikin, i brought one down and gave it to them. "you're a fine boy," said the mate (as i afterwards found out that he was). "and now, i say, where do you hold out? have you a hut or a cave to live in?" "yes," replied i; "i have a cabin, but it is not large enough for all of you." "no, no! we don't want to go there--we are very well where we are, alongside of the cask of rum; but you see, my lad, we have a woman here." "a woman!" said i; "i never saw a woman. where is she?" "there she is, sitting by the fire." i looked round, and perceived that there was one of the party wrapped up in a blanket, and with a wide straw hat on the head, which completely concealed the form from me. the fact is, that the woman looked like a bundle, and remained by the fire quite as inanimate. at my saying that i never saw a woman, the man burst into a loud laugh. "why, did you not say that you were born on this island, boy?" said the mate at last. "were you born without a mother?" "i cannot recollect my mother--she died when i was very young; and therefore i said that i had never seen a woman." "well, that's explained; but you see, my lad--this is not only a woman, but a very particular sort of a woman; and it will not do for her to remain here after we have had our supper--for after supper, the men may take a drop too much, and not behave themselves; so i asked you about your cabin, that you might take her there to sleep. can you do that?" "yes," replied i; "i will take her there if she wishes to go." "that's all right then; she'll be better there than here, at all events. i say, boy, where did you leave your trousers?" "i never wear any." "well then, if you have any, i advise you to put them on, for you are quite old enough to be breeched." i remained with them while the supper was cooking, asking all manner of questions, which caused great mirth. the pitch-kettle, which was a large iron pot on three short legs, surprised me a good deal; i had never seen such a thing before, or anything put on the fire. i asked what it was, and what it was made of. the potatoes also astonished me, as i had never yet seen an edible root. "why, where have you been all your life?" said one of the men. "on this island," replied i, very naively. i waded into the water to examine the boat as well as i could by the light of the fire, but i could see little, and was obliged to defer my examination till the next day. before the supper was cooked and eaten, i did, however, gain the following information. that they were a portion of the crew of a whaler, which had struck on a reef of rocks about seventy miles off, and that they had been obliged to leave her immediately, as she fell on her broadside a few minutes afterwards; that they had left in two boats, but did not know what had become of the other boat, which parted company during the night. the captain and six men were in the other boat, and the mate with six men in the one which had just landed--besides the lady. "what's a lady?" said i. "i mean the woman who sits there; her husband was killed by some of the people of the sandwich isles, and she was going home to england. we have a consort, another whaler, who was to have taken our cargo of oil on board, and to have gone to england with that and her own cargo, and the missionary's wife was to have been sent home in her." "what's a missionary?" inquired i. "well, i don't exactly know; but he is a preacher who goes out to teach the savages." by this time the supper was cooked, and the odour from the pitch-kettle was more savoury than anything that i had ever yet smelt. the kettle was lifted off the fire, the contents of it poured into a kid, and after they had given a portion in the small kid to the woman, who still remained huddled up in the blanket by the fire, they all sat round the large kid, and commenced their supper. "come, boy, and join us," said the mate, "you can't have had your supper; and as you've found one for us, it's hard but you should share it with us." i was not sorry to do as he told me, and i must say that i never enjoyed a repast so much in my life. "i say, boy, have you a good stock of them dried chickens of yours?" said the mate. "yes, i have a great many, but not enough to last long for so many people." "well, but we can get more, can't we?" "no!" replied i, "not until the birds come again, and that will not be for these next five moons?" "five moons! what do you mean?" "i mean, five full moons must come, one after another." "oh, i understand; why then we must not remain on the island." "no," replied i, "we must all go, or we shall starve; i am so glad that you are come, and the sooner you go the better. will you take nero with you?" "who is nero?" "nero--my seal--he's very tame." "well, we'll see about it; at all events," said he, turning to the other men, "we must decide upon something, and that quickly, for we shall starve if we remain here any time." it appeared, that they had left the whaler in such a hurry, that they had only had time to throw into the boat two breakers of water, four empty breakers to fill with salt-water for ballast to the boat, and the iron pitch-kettle, with a large sack of potatoes. as soon as supper was finished, they went to the cask for the rum, and then the mate said to me:-- "now i'll go and speak to the woman, and you shall take her to sleep in your cabin." during the whole of this time, the woman, as the mate called her, had never spoken a word. she had taken her supper, and eaten it in silence, still remaining by the fire, huddled up in the blanket. on the mate speaking to her, she rose up, and i then perceived that she was much taller than i thought she could have been; but her panama hat still concealed her face altogether. "now then, my lad," said the mate, "show the lady where she is to sleep, and then you can join us again if you like." "will you come with me?" said i, walking away. the woman followed me up the path. when we arrived at the platform opposite the cabin, i recollected nero, whom i had ordered to stay there till my return. "you won't be afraid of the seal," said i, "will you? he is very good-natured. nero, come here." it was rather dark as nero came shuffling up, and i went forward to coax him, for he snarled a little at seeing a stranger. "have you no light at hand?" said my companion, speaking for the first time, in a very soft yet clear voice. "no, i have not, but i will get some tinder, and make a fire with one of the fagots, and then you will be able to see." "do so, then, my good lad," replied she. i thought her voice very pleasing. i soon lighted the fagot and enabled her to see nero (who was now quite quiet), and also the interior of the cabin. she examined the cabin and the bed-places, and then said: "where do you sleep?" i replied by showing her my bed-place. "and this," said i, pointing to the one opposite, "was jackson's, and you can sleep in that. nero sleeps with me. here are plenty of seal-skins to keep you warm, if you are cold. are your clothes wet?" "no, they are quite dry now," replied she; "if you will get me some seal-skins, i will lie down on them, for i am very tired." i spread five or six skins one on the other, in jackson's bed-place, and then i went out and threw another fagot on the fire, that we might have more light. "do you want anything else?" said i. "nothing, i thank you. are you going to bed now?" "i was meaning to go down again to the men, but now i think of it, i do not like to leave you alone with nero, as he might bite you. are you afraid of him?" "no, i'm not much afraid, but still i have no wish to be bitten, and i am not used to sleep with such animals, as you are." "well then, i'll tell you how we'll manage it. i will take some skins outside, and sleep there. nero will not leave me, and then you won't be afraid. the weather is clearing up fast, and there's very little wind to what there was besides, it will be daylight in three or four hours." "as you please," was the reply. accordingly, i took some seal-skins out on the platform, and spreading them, i lay down upon them, wishing her good night, and nero soon joined me, and we were both fast asleep in a few minutes. chapter twenty. nero, who was an early riser, woke me up at daybreak, or i should have slept much longer; for i had been tired out with the fatigue and excitement of the night before. as soon as i was up, i looked into the cabin, and found the woman was fast asleep; her straw hat was off, but she had lain down in her clothes. her black hair was hanging about her shoulders. having only seen jackson with his bushy beard, i had been somewhat surprised when i first saw the men on their landing so comparatively clear of hair on their face; my astonishment at the clear white skin of a woman--and in this instance, it was peculiarly white and pallid--was very great. i also perceived how much more delicate her features were than those of the men; her teeth, too, were very white, and jackson's were discoloured and bad; i longed to see her eyes, but they were closed. any other difference i could not perceive, as she had drawn the blanket close up to her chin. "this is then a woman;" said i to myself: "yes, and it's very like what i used to see in my dreams." i looked a little longer, and then, hearing nero coming into the cabin behind me, and afraid that she would awake, i made a hasty retreat. i remained at this part of the cabin considering what i should do. i thought i would light a fire, and go down for a fish to broil on the embers for her breakfast, so i called nero to come down with me. on arriving at the pool, i found all the seamen fast asleep under the tent they had made with the boat's sails; and they appeared to be much the same as jackson used to be after he had got drunk the night before; i presumed, therefore, that such was their state, and was not far wrong. nero went into the pool and brought out a fish, as i ordered him, and i then walked to the boat to examine it. this took me half an hour, and i was sorry that none of the men were awake, that so i might ask any questions i wished. i examined the pitch-kettle, and the boat's sails, and the breakers. breakers are small casks, holding about six to seven gallons of water, and are very handy for boats. i remained about an hour, and then went back to the cabin, carrying a fagot on my shoulder, nero following with the fish in his mouth. we were met by the woman, who came out of the cabin; she no longer had the blanket round her, for it was a beautiful bright morning, and very warm. "nero is bringing you your breakfast," said i, "so you ought to like him." "i dare say i shall, if we are to be companions in future," replied she. "do you want anything?" said i. "yes, a little water, if you can get me some." i filled the kid from the spring, put it down by her, and then took out the inside of the fish, and fed the birds, who were crowding round me. the woman washed her face and hands, braided up her hair, and then sat down on the rock. in the mean time, i had lighted my fagot, cleaned the fish, and waited till the wood was burnt to ashes before i put the fish on the fire. having then nothing to do, i thought that reading would amuse the woman, and i went in for the bible. "shall i read to you?" said i. "yes," replied she with some astonishment in her looks. i read to her the history of joseph and his brethren, which was my favourite story in the bible. "who taught you to read?" said she, as i shut the book, and put the fish on the embers. "jackson," said i. "he was a good man, was he not?" replied she. i shook my head. "no, not very good," said i, at last. "if you knew all about him, you would say the same; but he taught me to read." "how long have you been on this island?" said she. "i was born on it, but my father and mother are both dead, and jackson died three years ago--since that i have been quite alone, only nero with me." she then asked me a great many more questions, and i gave her a short narration of what had passed, and what jackson had told me; i also informed her how it was i procured food, and how we must soon leave the island, now that we were so many, or the food would not last out till the birds came again. by this time the fish was cooked, and i took it off the fire and put it into the kid, and we sat down to breakfast; in an hour or so we had become very sociable. i must, however, now stop a little to describe her. what the men had told me was quite true. she had lost her husband, and was intending to proceed to england. her name was reichardt, for her husband was a german, or of german family. she was, as i have since ascertained, about thirty-seven years old, and very tall and elegant; she must have been very handsome when she was younger, but she had suffered much hardship in following her husband as she had done, through all the vicissitudes of his travels. her face was oval; eyes black and large; and her hair black as the raven's wing; her features were small and regular; her teeth white and good; but her complexion was very pallid, and not a vestige of colour on her cheeks. as i have since thought, it was more like a marble statue than anything i can compare her to. there was a degree of severity in her countenance when she did not smile, and it was seldom that she did. i certainly looked upon her with more awe than regard, for some time after i became acquainted with her; and yet her voice was soft and pleasant, and her manners very amiable; but it must be remembered i had never before seen a woman. after breakfast was over, i proposed going down to where the seamen lay, to see if they were awake; but i told her i thought that they would not be. "i will go with you, as i left a basket with some things of mine in the boat, and it will be as well to bring them up at once." we therefore set off together, i having ordered nero to stay in the cabin. on our arrival at the pool, we found the men still fast asleep; and by her directions i went into the water to the boat, and brought out a basket and a small bundle which she pointed out. "shall i wake them?" said i. "no, no," replied she; "so long as they sleep, they will be doing no harm. but," said she, "we may as well take some potatoes up with us; fill both these handkerchiefs," continued she, taking two out of the bundle. i did so, and she took one and i the other, and we returned to the cabin. "are these all the birds that you have for food?" said she, looking at the pile in the cabin. "yes," replied i. "but what are we to do with the potatoes?" "we can roast them by the fire if we like," said she; "but at present we had better take them into the cabin. did you plant all these flowers and creepers which grow over the cabin?" "yes," replied i. "i was alone and had nothing to do, so i thought i would make a garden." "they are very pretty. now that i am back, you can go down to the men if you please, and tell them, when they wake up, that i wish to have the smallest of the boat's sails, to make a screen of. tell the mate--he is the most civil." "i will," said i. "is there anything else?" "yes, bring up a few more potatoes; they will let you take them if you say that i told you." "shall i take nero with me?" "yes, i do not want his company, for i am a little afraid of him." i called nero, who came after me, and went down to the pool, when i found that the men had all woke up, and were very busy, some lighting a fire, some washing potatoes, and some trying to catch the fish in the pool. "oh, here he is. come, boy, what have you got for our breakfast? we've been trying to catch some of these fish, but they're as quick as eels." "nero will soon catch you what you want," replied i. "here, nero, in." nero plunged in, and soon brought out a fish, and i then sent him in for another. "thanks, lad," said the mate, "that will be enough for our breakfast. that seal of yours is a handy fellow, and well trained." while the other men were getting breakfast, one of them went up to nero, i believe with the intention of making friends with him, but nero rejected his advances, and showed his sharp teeth, snapping at him several times. the man became angry, and caught up a piece of rock to throw at the seal. he aimed at the animal's nose, and narrowly missed hitting it. had he done so, he would probably have killed it. this made me very angry, and i told the man not to do so again; upon this, he caught up another, and was about to throw it, when i seized him by the collar with my left hand, and with my right drawing my american knife, i threatened to stab him with it, if he attacked the beast. the man started back, and in so doing, fell over a piece of rock, on his back. this quarrel brought the mate to us, along with two or three of the men. my knife was still lifted up, when the mate said: "come, my hearty, no knives, we don't allow them. that's not english. put it up; no one shall hurt the beast, i promise you. bob, you fool, why couldn't you leave the animal alone? you forget you are among savages here." at this, the other men burst out into a laugh. "yes," observed one; "i can swear, when i get back, that the natives of this island are savages, who eat raw flesh, have seals for playmates, and don't wear clothes enough for common decency?" this made them laugh more, and the man who had attacked nero, and who had got upon his legs again, joined with the others; so all was again good humour. the men sat down to their breakfast, while i examined the boat again, and afterwards asked many questions, with which they were much amused, every now and then observing, "well, he is a savage!" after they had breakfasted, i made nero catch another fish, and sent him up to the cabin with it, as i was afraid that the man might do him an injury, and then told the mate that the woman had desired me to bring up some potatoes. "take them," said he; "but you have nothing to carry them up with. here, fill the pail, and i will go to the cabin with you." "she told me that i was to ask you for a small boat's sail, to hang up as a screen." "well, she shall have the boat's mizen. we don't want it. i'll carry it up." the mate threw the sail and yard over his shoulder, and followed me up to the cabin. on our arrival, we found the missionary's wife sitting on the platform, nero lying not far from her, with the fish beside him. the mate took off his hat, and saluted my new companion, saying, that he hoped she was comfortable last night. "yes," replied she, "as much so as i could expect; but i turned this good lad out of his cabin, which i do not wish to do again, and therefore i requested the sail for a screen. now, john gough, what do you intend to do?" continued she. the mate replied, "i came up here to see what quantity of provision the lad might have. by his account, it will not last more than a month, and it will take some time before we can reach where we are likely to fall in with any vessel. stay here we cannot, for we shall only eat the provision and lose time; therefore the sooner we are off the better." "if you take all the provision, of course you will take the lad with you?" replied she. "of course we will." "and my chest, and my seal?" inquired i. "yes, your chest, certainly; but as for your seal, i do not know what to say to that--he will be starved in the boat, and if you give him his liberty, he will do well enough." "what you say is very true," replied the woman. "i am afraid, boy, that you will have to part with your friend. it will be better for both of you." i made no reply; for it cut me to the heart to think of parting with nero; but still i had sense enough to perceive that what they said was right. the mate then went into the cabin, and examined the heap of dried birds which i had collected, and having made his calculation, said that there were sufficient for three weeks, but not more. "and when do you think of leaving this island?" inquired the woman. "the day after to-morrow, if i can persuade the men, madam," replied he; "but you know they are not very easy to manage, and very thoughtless, especially now that they have so unexpectedly fallen in with liquor." "that i admit," replied she; "but as they will probably take the liquor in the boat, that will not make so great a difference." "i shall go down and speak to them, now they're all sober," replied the mate, "and will let you know in the evening; or to-morrow morning perhaps, will be better." the mate then saluted her, by touching his hat, and left us. chapter twenty one. there was one thing which had made a great impression on me in the conversation with the men in the morning. they called me a savage, and said that i had not sufficient clothes on; and as i observed that they were all dressed in jackets and trousers, which covered them from head to foot, i took it for granted that my shirt, which was all that i wore, was not a sufficient clothing. this had never occurred to me before, nor can the reader be surprised at it. i had been like our first parents in eden--naked but not ashamed; but now that i had suddenly come in contact with my fellow-men, i felt as if something were amiss. the consequence was, that i went to the chest and got out a pair of white trousers, and put them on. i thought them very uncomfortable and very unnecessary articles; but others--wore them, and i felt that i must do so also. they were rather long for me, but i rolled up the bottoms of the legs, as i observed that the seamen did, and then came out on the platform, where the missionary's wife was still seated, looking out upon the waves as they lashed the rocks. she immediately observed the addition that i had made to my dress, and said-- "that is a great improvement. now you look like other people. what is your name? you have not told me." when i had answered the question, i said to her-- "i have brought up more of the potatoes, as you call them; what am i to do with them?" "first tell me, have you any spot that you know about the island where there is mould--that is, earth, like you have in your garden--where we can plant them?" "yes," replied i, "there is some up there;" and i pointed to one-third up the ravine. "i brought all this earth from there, and there is plenty of it; but what is the good of planting them?" "because," said she, "one of the potatoes planted will, in a very short time, grow, and then it will produce perhaps thirty or forty potatoes at its roots as large as these; they are excellent things for food, and where there is nothing else to be had, may be the means of preserving life." "well, that may be," replied i, "and if we were going to remain on the island, it would be well to plant them; but as we are going away the day after to-morrow, what's the use of it? i know that they are very nice, for i had some for supper last night." "but are we only to think of ourselves in this world, and not of others?" replied she, "suppose, two or three years hence, another boat were to be cast away on this island, and not find, as we have, you here, with provisions ready for them, they would starve miserably; whereas, if we plant these potatoes, they may find plenty of food and be saved. only think how glad your father and mother would have been to have found potatoes on the island when they were thrown on it. we must not live only for ourselves, but we must think and try to do good to others--that is the duty of a christian." "i think you are very right," replied i, "and a very kind person too. if you wish it, i will go and plant the potatoes this day. how am i to plant them?" "they have a shovel in the boat," said she, "for i saw them throwing the water out with it. go down and get it, and then i will go with you and show you." i went down and the mate gave me the shovel, which i carried up to her. i found her cutting the potatoes into pieces, and she showed me how she cut them, leaving an eye in each piece, and explained the reason for it. i was soon very busy cutting away alongside of her, and before long the pail of potatoes was all ready to be planted. we then walked to the ravine, and she showed me how to use the shovel, and i made the holes. before noon we had planted all that we had cut, but we had still the two handkerchiefs full that we had at first brought up with us. we returned to the cabin, and i prepared the fish for dinner. after it was on the embers, she wished to have the screen put up beside her bed-place. "go down to the mate," said she, "and ask him for the hammer and three or four nails. i know they have them in the boat." "i may as well take them down some birds for their dinner," replied i, "for, they will want them." "yes, do so; and then come back to me as soon as you can." the mate gave me the hammer, an article i had never seen before, and five or six nails, with which i returned to the cabin, and nailed up the sail as a screen. "now you will be able to sleep in your own bed-place to-night," said she. i made no reply; but i could not imagine why i could not have done so the night before, for i had only gone out of the cabin that she might not be frightened by nero being so close to her. after we had eaten our dinner, she said to me-- "how could you contrive to live on this island, if you had no dried birds?" "how?" replied i; "why very badly. i might catch fish; but there are times in the year when you can catch no fish, they won't take bait, neither will they when the weather is rough. besides, i have only two lines, and i might lose them both--then what would become of me? i should starve." "well, then, you see under all circumstances, it was just as well to plant the potatoes, for other people may come here and be in your position." "yes, that is true, but we shall not be here long now, and you don't know how glad i am to go. i want to see all the things that i have read about in my books. i want to go to england and look for somebody; but you don't know all that i know; some day i will tell you all-- everything. i am so tired of living here by myself--nothing to say--no one to talk to--no one to care for, except nero, and he can't speak. i can't bear the idea of parting with him, though." "would you rather stay on the island with nero, than go away without him?" "no," replied i; "go i must, but still i do not like to part with him. he is the only friend that i ever had, that i can remember." "when you have lived longer, and mixed more with the world, my poor boy, you will then find how many sacrifices you will be obliged to make, much more serious than parting with an animal that you are attached to. i suppose you expect to be very happy if ever you get back to england?" "of course i do; why should i not be?" replied i; "i shall be always happy." the missionary's wife shook her head. "i fear not. indeed, i think if you live long enough, you will acknowledge that the happiest of your days were passed on this barren rock." "jackson said otherwise," replied i. "he was always grieving at being on the island, and not able to get back to england; and he told me so many stories about england, and what is done there and what a beautiful place it is, that i'm sure i shall like it better than being here, even if i had somebody with me." "well, you are in the hands of god, and you must put your trust in him. he will do with you as he thinks best for you--that you know, as you read your bible." "no, i didn't know that," replied i. "god lives beyond the stars, a long way off." "is that all you have gained by reading your bible?" inquired she, looking me in the face. "no, not all," replied i; "but i do not understand a great deal that i read; i want some one to tell me. i am so glad you came with the men in the boat, for i never saw a woman before. i used to see somebody in my dreams, and now i know it was a woman. it was my mother; but i have not seen her for a long while now, and i have nobody but nero." "my poor boy, you have a father in heaven." "yes," replied i; "i know he is in heaven, and so is my mother; for jackson said that they were both very good." "i mean your heavenly father, god. do you not say in the lord's prayer, `our father which art in heaven?' you must love him." i was about to reply, when john gough, the mate, came up, and told my companion, that he had been speaking to the men, and they had agreed that the day after the next they would, if the weather permitted, leave the island; that they had examined the boat, and found it required very little repair, and that all would be ready the next day. "i hope that they will not overload the boat," said she. "i fear that they will, but i must do all i can to prevent it. the cask of rum was rather an unfortunate discovery, and we had been better without it. leave it they will not, so we must put out of the boat all that we can possibly do without, for we shall be nine of us, and that will be plenty of weight with the addition of the cask." "you promised to take my chest, you remember," said i. "yes, i will do so if i possibly can; but recollect, i may not be able to keep my promise; for now that they have the liquor, the men do not obey me as they did before, ma'am," said the mate. "perhaps he had better take the best of his clothes in a bundle, in case they should refuse to take in the chest; and i must say, that, loaded as the boat will be, they will be much to blame if they do not refuse, for the boat is but small for stowage, and there's all the provisions to put in her, which will take up a deal of room." "that is very true," replied the woman. "it will be better to leave the chest here, for i do not think that the boat will hold it. you must not mind your chest, my good boy, it is of no great value." "they take my rum and all my birds, and they ought to take both me and my chest." "not if it takes up too much room," replied the woman. "you cannot expect it. the wishes of one person must give way to the wishes of many." "why, they would have starved if it had not been for me," replied i, angrily. "that's very true, boy," replied the mate; "but you have to learn yet, that might is right; and recollect that what you did this morning has not made you any great favourite with them." "what was that?" inquired my companion. "only that he nearly drove his knife through one of the men, that's all," replied the mate; "english sailors ar'n't fond of knives." he then touched his hat, and went down again to the pool, desiring me to follow him with a kid for our share of the supper. i did so, and on my return she asked me why i had drawn my knife upon the seaman, and i narrated how it occurred. she pointed out to me the impropriety of what i had done, asking me whether the bible did not tell us we were to forgive injuries. "yes," replied i; "but is it not injuries to ourselves? i did forgive jackson; but this was to prevent his hurting another." "another! why you talk of nero as if the animal was a rational being, and his life of as much consequence as that of a fellow-creature. i do not mean to say but that the man was very wrong, and that you must have felt angry if an animal you were so fond of had been killed; but there is a great difference between the life of an animal and that of a fellow-creature. the animal dies, and there is an end of it; but a man has an immortal soul, which never perishes, and nothing can excuse your taking the life of a man, except in self-defence. does not the commandment say, `thou shalt not kill?'" she then talked to me a long while upon the subject, and fully made me understand that i had been very wrong, and i confessed that i had been so. chapter twenty two. i now resolved to speak to her relative to the belt which contained the diamonds; and i was first obliged to narrate to her in a few words what jackson had told me. she heard me with great interest, now and then asking a question. when i had told her all, i said-- "now, as they talk of not taking my chest, what shall i do? shall i wear the belt myself, or shall i put it in the bundle? or will you wear it for me, as my mother would have done, if she had been alive?" she did not reply for some time, at last she said, as if talking to herself, and not to me-- "how unsearchable are thy ways, o god!" indeed, although i did not feel it at the time, i have afterwards thought, and she told me herself, how great her surprise was at finding in the unshorn little savage, thus living alone upon a desolate rock, a lad of good birth, and although he did not know it, with a fortune in his charge, which would, in all probability, be ultimately his own. this is certain, that the interest she felt towards me increased every hour, as by degrees i disclosed my history. "well," replied she, "if you will trust me, i will take charge of your belt. to-morrow we will select out of the chest what will be best to take with you, and then we will arrange as you wish." after about an hour's more conversation, she went into the cabin, and retired behind the screen which had been fixed up, telling me that she did not mind nero, and that i might go to bed when i pleased. as i was not much inclined to go down to the seamen, i followed her advice and went to bed; but i could not sleep for a long time from the noise which the men made, who were carousing at the bathing-pool. the idea of parting with nero also lay heavy upon my heart, though the woman had almost satisfied me that as soon as i was gone, the animal would resume its natural habits, and care nothing for me. i was up the next morning early, and went down with nero to obtain the fish which we required. i left some on the rocks for the seamen's breakfast (for they were all sound asleep), and then returned to the cabin, and prepared for our own. mrs reichardt, as i shall now call her, soon came out to me, and when breakfast was over, proposed that we should plant the remainder of the potatoes, before we packed up the things in the chest. as soon as they were all cut, we set off to the ravine, and had finished our task before noon, at which time there were but few of the seamen stirring, they had remained up so long the night before, drinking. the mate was one of those who were on their legs, and he asked me if i thought we should have smooth water to launch the boat on the following day. i replied in the affirmative, and went with mrs reichardt to the cabin, and putting down the shovel, i hauled my chest out on the platform to select what articles i should take. while we were thus employed, and talking at times, the men came up for the dried birds to take down ready for putting them in the boat on the following day, and in two trips they had cleared out the whole of them. "have you used all the potatoes you brought up?" said one of the men; "for we shall be short of provisions." mrs reichardt replied that we had none left. "well then," said the man, "the mate says you had better bring down that brute of yours to catch the rest of the fish in the pond, that we may cook them before we start, as they will make two days' meals at least." "very well," replied i; "i will come down directly." i did so, and nero, in a quarter of an hour, had landed all the fish, and i then returned with him to the cabin. mrs r had selected the best of the clothes, and made them up in a tight bundle, which she sewed up with strong thread. my books she had left out, as well as the spy-glass, and the tools i had, as they might be useful. i asked her whether i should carry them down to the bathing-pool, but she replied that on the morning when we embarked would be quite time enough. i then went to the hole under jackson's bed-place, and brought out the belt and the few articles that were with it. mrs r, after having examined them, said that she would take care of them all; the watch and other trinkets she put in her basket; the belt she took to the bed-place, and secreted it. she appeared very silent and thoughtful, and on my asking her whether i should not take down the shovel, and the pail, and hammer, she replied, "no, leave all till we are ready to go to the boat. it will be time enough." shortly afterwards, the mate brought us up some of the fish which they had cooked for supper, and when we had eaten it we went to bed. "this is the last night we shall sleep together, nero," said i, kissing my favourite, and the thought brought tears into my eyes. "but it can't be helped." i was, however, soon fast asleep, with my arm round the animal. when i went out the next morning, i found that the weather was beautifully fine, the water smooth, and only rippled by a light breeze. as mrs r had not yet made her appearance, i went down to the bathing-pool, where i found all the men up and in full activity. the boat had been emptied out, the oars, masts, and sails, were on the rocks; and the men were turning the bows to the seaward in readiness for launching her over the ledge of rocks. the dried birds lay in a heap by the side of the cask of rum, and the fish which had been baked were in the large kid. the six breakers were also piled up together, and the mate and some of the men were disputing as to how many of them should be filled with water. the mate wanted them all filled; the men said that three would be sufficient, as the boat would be so loaded. at last the mate gained his point, and the men each took a breaker, and went up to the cabin for the water. i went with them to fill the breakers, and also to see that they did no mischief, for they appeared very unruly and out of temper; and i was afraid that they would hurt nero, who was at the cabin, if i was not there to prevent them; but with the exception of examining the cabin, and forcing themselves in upon mrs reichardt, they did nothing. when the breakers were full, which took at least half an hour, they did indeed try to catch the birds, and would have wrung their necks, but the males flew away, and the females i put into the bed-place that was screened off in the cabin, and near which mrs reichardt was sitting. they all appeared to have a great awe and respect for this woman, and a look from her was more effectual than were any words of the mate. "we don't want you," said one of the men, as they went down to the bathing-pool with the breakers on their shoulders. "why don't you keep up with the lady? you're quite a lady's man, now you've white trousers on." the others who followed him laughed at this latter remark. "i'm of no use up there, at present," said i; "and i may be down below." the men set down the breakers on the rocks by the pool, and then, under the directions of the mate, prepared to launch the boat over the ledge. the masts of the boat were placed athwartships, under her keel, for her to run upon, and being now quite empty, she was very light. she was what they call a whale-boat, fitted for the whale-fishery, pointed at both ends, and steered by an oar; she was not very large, but held seven people comfortably, and she was remarkably well fitted with sails and masts, having two lugs and a mizen. as soon as they were all ready, the men went to the side of the boat, and in a minute she was launched into the sea without injury. the mate said to me, as they brought her broadside to the ledge: "now, my lad, we don't want you any more; you may go up to the cabin till we are ready, and then we will send for you and the lady." "oh! but i can be of use here," replied i; "and i am of none up there." the mate did not reply, and the men then went to the rum-cask, and rolled it towards the boat; and when they had it on the ledge, they parbuckled it, as they term it, into the boat with a whale-line that they happened to have, and which was of great length. after the cask of rum was got in amidships (and it took up a great deal of space, reaching from one gunwale to the other, and standing high above the thwarts), they went for the breakers of water, which they put in, three before and three behind the cask, upon the floor of the boat. "she will be too heavy," said one of the men, "with so much water." "we can easily get rid of it," replied the mate. "if you had said she would be too heavy with so much liquor on board, you had better explained the matter; however, you must have your own ways, i suppose." the next articles that they brought to stow away were the provisions. the kid of fish was put amidships on the breakers, and the dried bird; which they carried down in their arms, were packed up neatly in the stern-sheets. they were soon up to the gunwale, and the mate said: "you had better stow away forward now--there will be little room for the lady as it is." "no, no, stow them all aft," replied one of the men, in a surly tone; "the lady must sit where she can. she's no better than we." "shall this go in?" said i, pointing to the coil of whale-line, and addressing the mate. "no, no; we must leave that," replied one of the men in the boat; "we shall be wedged enough as it is; and i say, jim, throw that old saw and the bag of nails out of the boat--we can have no use for them." the masts were then stepped, and the rigging set up to the gunnel of the boat, the yards and sails handed in, and hooked on the halyards ready for hoisting. in fact the boat was now all ready for starting; they had only the iron kettle and two or three other articles to put in. "shall we have the mizen?" inquired one of the men, pointing to the mast, which lay on the rocks. "no, she steers quite as well without it," replied the mate. "we'll leave it. and now, lad; hand the oars in." they were brought to the boat, but owing to the puncheon of rum in the centre, they could not lie flat, and after a good deal of arguing and disputing, four oars and a boat-hook were lashed to the gunnel outside, and the rest were left on the rocks. at this time there was some consultation between the mate and some of the men--the mate being evidently opposed by the others. i could not hear what it was about, but the mate appeared very angry and very much annoyed. at last he dashed his hat down on the rocks in a great passion, saying: "no good will come of it. mark my words. no good ever did or ever will. be it so, you are too many for me; but i tell you again, no good will come of it." the mate then sat down on the rocks by himself, and put his head down on his knees, covering it with his hands. the man with whom he had been disputing went to the others in the boat, and spoke to them in a low tone, looking round at me, to ascertain if i was within hearing. after a minute or two they all separated, and then one of them said to me--"now, my lad, we're all ready. go up to the cabin and bring down your bundle and her basket, and tell the lady we are waiting for her." "there's the shovel," said i, "and the boat's sail--must i bring them down?" "oh, yes, bring them down, and also two or three seal-skins for the lady to sit upon." off i went on my errand, for i was delighted with the idea of leaving the island, and my patience had been almost exhausted at the time they had taken in the stowage of the boat. as i hastened up the path, i heard loud contention, and the mate's voice speaking very angrily, and i stopped for a short time to listen, but the noise ceased, and i went on again. i found nero on the platform, and i stopped a minute to caress him. "good-bye, my poor nero, we shall never see one another again," said i. "you must go back to the sea, and catch fish for yourself;" and the tears started in my eyes as i gave the animal a farewell kiss. i then went into the cabin, where i found mrs reichardt sitting very quietly. "they are all ready," said i, "and have sent me up for you; but i am to bring down the boat's sail and some seal-skins for you to sit upon. i can carry both if you can carry my bundle. have you put the belt on?" "yes," replied she, "i am quite ready. i will carry the bundle, and the books and spy-glass, as well as my basket; but we must pack them close," added she, "and roll the sail up round the yard, or you will not be able to carry it." we took the sail down, and got it ready for carrying, and i rolled up the two best seal-skins, and tied them with a piece of fishing-line, and then we were all ready. i shouldered my burden, and mrs reichardt took the other articles, as proposed, and we left the cabin to go down the path to the bathing-pool. "good-bye, nero--good-bye, birds--good-bye, cabin--and good-bye, garden," said i, as i went along the platform; and having so done, and ordered nero back with a tremulous voice, i turned my head in the direction of the bathing-pool. i stared and then screamed, dropping my burden, as i lifted up my hands in amazement-- "look!" cried i to my companion. "look!" repeated i, breathless. she did look, and saw as i did--the boat under all sail, half a mile from the pool, staggering under a fresh breeze, which carried her away at the rate of seven or eight miles an hour. they had left us--they had deserted us. i cried out, like a madman, "stop! stop! stop!" and then, seeing how useless it was, i dashed myself on the rock, and for a minute or two was insensible. "oh!" groaned i, at last, as i came to my senses. "frank henniker," said a sweet firm voice. i opened my eyes, and saw mrs reichardt standing by me. "it is the will of heaven, and you must submit to it patiently," continued she. "but so cruel, so treacherous!" replied i, looking at the fast-receding boat. "i grant, most cruel, and most treacherous; but we must leave them to the judgment of god. what can they expect from him in the way of mercy when they have shown none? i tell you candidly, that i think we are better in our present forlorn state upon this rock, than if in that boat. they have taken with them the seeds of discord, of recklessness, and intemperance, in an attempt which requires the greatest prudence, calmness, and unanimity, and i fear there is little chance of their ever being rescued from their dangerous position. it is my opinion, and i thought so when i first knew they had found the cask, that liquor would prove their ruin, and i say again, that boat will never arrive at its destination, and they will all perish miserably. it has pleased god that they should leave us here, and depend upon it, it has been so decided for the best." "but," replied i, looking again at the boat, "i was tired of being here--i was so anxious to get off--and now to be left! and they have taken all our provisions, everything, even the fish in the pool. we shall starve." "i hope not," replied she, "and i think not; but we must exert ourselves, and trust to heaven." but i could not heed her--my heart was bursting. i sobbed, as i sat with my hands covering up my face. "all gone;" cried i. "no one left but you and i." "yes," replied she, "one more." "who?" cried i, looking up. "god!--who is with us always." chapter twenty three. i heard what she said, but my head was too confused to weigh the words. i remained silent, where i was. a few seconds elapsed, and she spoke again: "frank henniker, rise, and listen to me." "we shall starve," muttered i. as i said this, one of the male birds returned from the sea with a large fish, of which mrs reichardt took possession, as she had seen me do, and the gannet flew away again to obtain more. immediately afterwards, the other two birds returned with fish, which were in the like way secured by my companion. "see how unjust and ungrateful you are," observed she. "here are the birds feeding us, as the ravens did elijah in the wilderness, at the very time that you are doubting the goodness and mercy of god. there is a meal for us provided already." "my head! my head!" exclaimed i, "it is bursting, and there is a heavy weight rolling in it--i cannot see anything." and such was the fact: the excitement had brought on a determination of blood to the head, and my senses were rapidly departing. mrs reichardt knelt by my side, and perceiving that what i had said was the case, went into the cabin and brought out a cloth, which she wetted with water from the spring, and laid across my forehead and temples. i remained motionless and nearly senseless for half an hour, during which, she continued to apply fresh cold water to the cloth, and by degrees i recovered from my stupor. in the mean time, the weather being so fine and the water smooth, the gannets continued to return with the fish they caught, almost all of which were taken from them by my companion, until she had collected more than a dozen fish, from half a pound to a pound weight, which she put away, so that the birds and seal might not devour them. i was still in a half-dozing state, when the breathing and cold nose of nero touched my cheek, and the murmurings of my favourite roused me up, and i opened my eyes. "i am better now," said i, to mrs reichardt. "how kind you have been." "yes, you are better; but still, you must remain quiet. do you think that you could walk to your bed-place?" "i'll try," replied i, and with her assistance i rose up; but, when i afterwards gained my feet, i should have fallen if she had not supported me; but, assisted by her, i gained my bed and sank down again. she raised my head higher, and then applied the linen cloth and cold water as before. "try now," said she, "if you cannot go to sleep. when you awake again, i will have some dinner ready for you." i thanked her and shut my eyes. nero crawled to my bed-place, and with my hand upon his head, i fell asleep, and remained so till near sunset, when i awoke with very little pain in my head, and much refreshed. i found mrs reichardt by my side. "you are better now," said she. "can you eat any dinner? i must make friends with nero, for he has been disputing my right to come near your bedside, and his teeth are rather formidable. however, i gave him the inside of the fish when i cleaned them, and we are better friends already. there is your dinner." mrs reichardt placed before me some of the fish, broiled on the embers, and i ate very heartily. "it is very kind of you," said i, "to be working for me, when i ought to be working for you--but you must not do it again." "only my share of the work when you are well," replied she; "but my share i always shall do. i cannot be idle, and i am strong enough to do a great deal; but we will talk about that to-morrow morning. you will be quite well by that time, i hope." "oh! i feel well now," replied i, "only i am very weak." "you must put your trust in god, my poor boy. do you ever pray to him?" "yes, i try a little sometimes--but i don't know how. jackson never taught me that." "then i will. shall i pray now for both of us?" "will god hear you? what was it that you said just before i forgot everything this morning?" "i told you that there was another here besides ourselves, a good and gracious god, who is always with us and always ready to come to our assistance if we call upon him." "you told me god lived beyond the stars." "my poor boy, as if he were a god who was afar off and did not attend to our prayers! such is not the case. he is with us always in spirit, listening to all our prayers, and reading every secret thought of our hearts." i was silent for some time, thinking upon what she had told me; at last i said--"then pray to him." mrs reichardt knelt down and prayed in a clear and fervent voice, without hesitation or stop. she prayed for protection and support in our desolate condition, that we might be supplied with all things needful for our sustenance, and have a happy deliverance from our present position. she prayed that we might be contented and resigned until it should please him to rescue us--that we might put our whole trust and confidence in him, and submit without murmuring to whatever might be his will. she prayed for health and strength, for an increase of faith and gratitude towards him for all his mercies. she thanked him for our having been preserved by being left on the desolate rock, instead of having left it in the boat with the seamen. (this surprised me.) and then she prayed for me, entreating that she might be the humble instrument of leading me to my heavenly father, and that he would be pleased to pour down upon me his holy spirit, so that i might by faith in christ, be accepted, and become a child of god and an inheritor of eternal bliss. there was something so novel to me and so beautiful in her fervency of prayer, that the tears came into my eyes, and about a minute after she had finished, i said-- "i now recollect, at least, i think i do--for the memory of it is very confused--that my mother used to kneel down by me and pray just as you have done. oh, how i wish i had a mother!" "my child," replied she, "promise me that you will be a good and obedient son, and i will be a mother to you." "will you? oh! how kind of you. yes, i will be all you wish; i will work for you day and night if it is necessary. i will do everything, if you will but be my mother." "i will do my duty to you as a mother most strictly," replied she; "so that is agreed upon. now, you had better go to sleep, if you can." "but i must first ask you a question. why did you thank god for the seamen having left us here, instead of taking us with them?" "because the boat was overloaded as it was; because the men, having liquor, would become careless and desperate, and submit to no control; and therefore i think there is little or no chance of their ever arriving anywhere safe, but that they will perish miserably in some way or another. this, i consider, is the probability, unless the almighty in his mercy, should be pleased to come to their assistance, and allow them to fall in with some vessel soon after their departure." "do you think, then, that god prevented our going with them on purpose that we might not share their fate?" "i do! god regulates everything. had it been better for us that we should have gone, he would have permitted it; but he willed it otherwise, and we must bow to his will with a full faith, that he orders everything for the best." "and you say that god will give us all that we ask for in our prayers?" "yes, if we pray fervently and in faith, and ask it in the name of jesus christ; that is, he will grant all we pray for that is good for us, but not what is not good for us; but when we ask anything, we do not know that we are asking what is proper or not--but he does. we may ask what would be hurtful to us, and then, in his love for us, he denies it. for instance, suppose you had been accustomed to pray, you must have prayed god that he would permit you to leave this island in the boat, as you are so anxious to go away; but supposing that boat is lost, as i imagine it will be, surely it would have been a kindness in god, who knew that it would be lost, not to grant your prayer. is it not so?" "yes, i see now, thank you; now i will go to sleep--good night." chapter twenty four. i awoke the next morning quite recovered from my illness of the day before, and was out of the cabin before mrs reichardt, who still remained behind the screen which she had put up after i had gone to sleep. it was a beautiful morning, the water was smooth, and merely rippled with a light breeze, and the sun shone bright. i felt well and happy. i lighted a fire to broil the fish for breakfast, as there was a sufficiency left, and then got my fishing-lines ready to catch some larger fish to re-inhabit my pond at the bathing-pool. mrs reichardt came out of the cabin and found me playing with nero. "good morning, dear mother," said i, for i felt most kindly towards her. "good morning, my dear boy," replied she. "are you quite well?" "quite well; and i have got my lines all ready; for i have been thinking that until the birds come, we must live on fish altogether, and we can only take them in fine weather like this; so we must not lose such a day." "certainly not. as soon as we have breakfasted, we will go down and fish. i can fish very well, i am used to it. we must both work now; but first go for your bible, that we may read a little." i did so, and after she had read a chapter, she prayed, and i knelt by her side; then we breakfasted, and as soon as we had breakfasted, we set off to the bathing-pool. "do you know if they left anything behind them, frank?" "yes," replied i, "they left some oars, i believe, and a long line, and we have the shovel and the hammer, and the boat's small sail, up at the cabin." "well, we shall see very soon," replied she, as we went down the path. when we arrived at the bathing-pool, the first thing that met my eyes made me leap with joy. "oh! mother! mother! they've left the iron pot; i did so long for it; and as i lay awake this morning, i thought that if i prayed for anything, it would be for the iron pot. i was tired of dried birds, and they ate so different when they were boiled up in the pot with potatoes." "i am equally glad, frank, for i do not like victuals uncooked; but now let us first see what else they have thrown out of the boat." "why, they have put on shore three of the little casks of water," said i; "they took them all on board." "they have so, i suppose, because the boat was too heavy, and they would not part with the liquor. foolish men, they will now not have more than six days' water, and will suffer dreadfully." we then looked round the rocks and found that they had left the iron kettle, three breakers, five oars, and a harpoon and staffs; a gang-board, a whale-line of fathoms, an old saw, a bag of broad-headed nails, and two large pieces of sheet-iron. "that saw may be very useful to us," said mrs reichardt, "especially as you have files in your chests. indeed, if we want them, we may convert one half of the saw into knives." "into knives! how?" "i will show you; and these pieces of sheet-iron i could use again. you see the sheet-iron was put on to repair any hole which might be made in the boat, and they have thrown it out, as well as the hammer and nails. i wonder at john gough permitting it." "i heard them quarrelling with him as i came out yesterday to fetch you down; they would not mind what he said." "no, or we should not have been left here," replied she; "john gough was too good a man to have allowed it, if he could have prevented it. that sheet-iron will be very useful. do you know what for? to broil fish on, or anything else. we must turn up the corners with the hammer. but now we must lose no more time, but fish all day long, and not think of eating till supper-time." accordingly we threw out our lines, and the fish taking the bait freely, we soon hauled in more than a dozen large fish, which i put into the bathing-pool. "what use can we make of that long line which they have left?" "a good many; but the best use we can make of it, is to turn it into fishing-lines, when we require new ones." "but how can we do that, it is so thick and heavy?" "yes, but i will show you how to unlay it, and then make it up again. recollect, frank, that i have been the wife of a missionary, and have followed my husband wherever he went; sometimes we have been well off, sometimes as badly off as you and i are now--for a missionary has to go through great dangers, and great hardships, as you would acknowledge if you ever heard my life, or rather that of my husband." "won't you tell it to me?" "yes, perhaps i will, some day or another; but what i wish to point out to you now is, that being his wife, and sharing his danger and privation, i have been often obliged to work hard and to obtain my living as i could. in england, women do little except in the house, but a missionary's wife is obliged to work with the men, and as a man very often, and therefore learns to do many things of which women in general are ignorant. you understand now?" "oh yes. i have thought already that you appear to know more than jackson did." "i should think not; but jackson was not fond of work i expect, and i am. and now, frank, you little thought that when you so tardily went to work the other day to plant potatoes for the benefit of any one that might hereafter come to the island, that you were planting for yourself, and would reap the benefit of your own kind act; for if you had not assisted, of course i could not have done it by myself: so true it is, that even in this world you are very often rewarded for a good action." "but are not you always?" "no, my child, you must not expect that; but if not rewarded in this world, you will be rewarded in the next." "i don't understand that." "i suppose that you hardly can, but i will explain all that to you, if god spare my life; but it must be at a more seasonable time." we continued fishing till late in the afternoon, by which time had taken twenty-eight large fish, about seven to nine pounds weight; mrs reichardt then proposed that we should leave off, as we had already provision for a fortnight. i hauled out one more fish, which she took with her to cook for our supper, and having coiled up my lines, i then commenced, as she had told me to do, carrying up the articles left by the boat's crew at the bathing-pool. the first thing i seized upon was the coveted iron kettle; i was quite overjoyed at the possession of this article, and i had good reason to be. in my other hand i carried the saw and the bag of nails. as soon as i had deposited them at the cabin, i went down again, and before supper was ready i had brought up everything except the three breakers of water, which i left where they were, as we did not want them for present use, whatever we might hereafter. we were both rather tired, and were glad to go to bed after we had taken our supper. chapter twenty five. when we met the following morning, my mother, as i shall in future call her, said to me, "this will be a busy day, frank, for we have a great many arrangements to make in the cabin, so that we may be comfortable. in future the cabin must be kept much more clean and tidy than it is; but that is my business more than yours. let us get our breakfasts, and then we will begin." "i don't know what you want me to do," replied i; "but i will do it if i can, as soon as you tell me." "my dear boy, a woman requires a portion of the cabin to herself, as it is not the custom for women to live altogether with men. now, what i wish is, that the hinder part of the cabin, where you used to stow away your dried birds, should be made over to me. we have oars with which we can make a division, and then nail up seal-skins, so that i may have that part of the cabin to myself. now, do you understand what i want?" "yes, but the oars are longer than the cabin is wide," observed i. "how shall we manage it?" "we have the old saw, and that will do well enough to cut them off, without its being sharpened." "i never saw one used," replied i, "and i don't understand it." "i will soon show you. first, we must measure the width of the cabin. i shall not take away more than one-third of it." my mother went into the cabin, and i followed her. with a piece of fishing-line, she took the width of the cabin, and then the height up to the rafters for the door-posts. we then went out, and with the saw, which she showed me how to use, and which astonished me very much, when i perceived its effects, the oars were cut up to the proper length. gimlets i had already from the sea-chest, and nails and hammer we had just obtained from the boat; so that before the forenoon was over, the framework was all ready for nailing on the seal-skins. the bag of broad-headed short nails, which had been thrown on the rocks, were excellent for this purpose, and as i had plenty of skins, the cabin was soon divided off, with a skin between the door-jambs hanging down loose, so that any one might enter. i went inside after it was complete. "but," said i, "you have no light to see what you are about." "not yet, but i soon will have," replied my mother. "bring the saw here, frank. observe, you must cut through the side of the cabin here, a square hole of this size; three of the planks cut through will be sufficient. begin here." i did as she directed me, and in the course of half an hour, i had cut out of the south side of the cabin a window about two feet square, which admitted plenty of light. "but won't it make it cold at night?" said i. "we will prevent that," replied she, and she took out a piece of white linen, and with some broad-headed nails, she nailed it up, so as to prevent the air from coming in, although there was still plenty of light. "there," said she, "that is but a coarse job, which i will mend by-and-bye; but it will do for the present." "well, it is very nice and comfortable now," said i, looking round it. "now what shall i bring in?" "nothing for the bed but seal-skins," said she. "i do not like the feathers. the seal-skins are stiff at present, but i think we may be able to soften them by-and-bye. now, frank, your chest had better come in here, as it is of no use where it is, and we will make a storeroom of it, to hold all our valuables." "what, the diamonds?" replied i. "my dear boy, we have articles to put into the chest, which, in our present position, are more valuable to us than all the diamonds in the world. tell me now, yourself, what do you prefer and set most value upon, your belt of diamonds, or the iron kettle?" "the iron kettle, to be sure," replied i. "exactly so; and there are many things in our possession as valuable as the iron kettle, as you will hereafter acknowledge. now do you go and get ready some fire for us, and i will finish here by myself nero keep out, sir--you are never to come into this cabin." i went with nero for a fish, and when i returned. i determined that i would use the iron kettle. i put it on with water and boiled the fish, and i thought that it ate better than broiled on the embers, which made it too dry. as we sat at our meal, i said, "dear mother, what are we to do next?" "to-morrow morning we will put the cabin into better order, and put away all our things, instead of leaving them about the platform in this way. then i will carefully look over all that we have got, and put them away in the chest. i have not yet seen the contents of the chest." the next day it was very cloudy and rough weather, blowing fresh. after breakfast we set to work. we cleared out the floor of the cabin, which was strewed with all manner of things, for jackson and i had not been very particular. the whale-line was coiled up and put into one corner and everything else was brought in and a place round for it. "we must contrive some shelves," said my mother, "that we may put things on them, or else we never can be tidy; and we have not one except that which holds the books. i think we can manage it. we have, two oars left besides the boat's yard; we will nail them along the side of the cabin, about a foot or more from it, and then we will cut some of the boat's sail, and nail the canvass from the side of the cabin to the oars, and that will make a sort of shelf which will hold our things." i brought in the oars; they were measured and cut off and nailed up. the canvass was then stretched from the side of the cabin to the oar, and nailed with the broad-headed nails, and made two capital shelves on each side of the cabin, running from one end to the other. "there," said my mother, "that is a good job. now we will examine the chest and put everything away and in its place." my mother took out all the clothes, and folded them up. when she found the roll of duck which was at the bottom, she said-- "i am glad to find this, as i can make a dress for myself much better for this island than this black stuff dress which i now wear, and which i will put by to wear, in case we should be taken off the island some of these days; for i must dress like other people when i am again among them. the clothes are sufficient to last you for a long while; but i shall only alter two shirts and two pair of trousers to your present size, as you will grow very fast. how old do you think you are now?" i replied, "about sixteen years old, or perhaps more." "i should think that was about your age." having examined and folded up every article of clothing in the chest, the tools, spy-glass, etcetera, were put by me on the shelves, and then we examined the box containing the thread, needles, fish-hooks, and other articles, such as buttons, etcetera. "these are valuable," said she; "i have some of my own to put along with them. go and fetch my basket; i have not yet had time to look into it since i left the ship." "what is there in it?" "except brushes and combs, i can hardly say. when i travelled about, i always carried my basket, containing those things most requisite for daily use, and in the basket i put everything that i wished to preserve, till i had an opportunity to put it away. when i embarked on board of the whaler, i brought my basket on my arm as usual; but except opening it for my brushes and combs or scissors, i have not examined it for months." "what are brushes and combs and scissors?" "that i will show you," replied she, opening the lid of the basket. "these are the brushes and combs for cleaning the hair, and these are scissors. now we will take everything out." the basket did indeed appear to contain a wonderful quantity of things, almost all new to me. there were two brushes, twelve combs, three pair of scissors, a penknife, a little bottle of ink, some pens, a woman's thimble, a piece of wax, a case of needles, thread and silk, a piece of india ink, and a camel's hair brush, sealing-wax, sticking plaster, a box of pills, some tape and bobbin, paper of pins, a magnifying-glass, silver pencil-case, some money in a purse, black shoe-ribbon, and many other articles which i have forgotten. all i know is, that i never was so much interested ever after at any show as i was with the contents of this basket, all of which were explained to me by my mother, as to their uses, and how they were made. there were several little papers at the bottom of the basket, which she said were seeds of plants, which she had collected to take to england with her, and that we would plant them here. as she shook the dust out of the basket after it was empty, two or three white things tumbled out, which she asked me to pick up and give to her. "i don't know how they came here," said she, "but three of them are orange-pips, which we will sow to-morrow, and the other is a pea, but of what kind i know not; we will sow that also--but i fear it will not come up, as it appears to me to be one of the peas served out to the sailors on board ship, and will be too old to grow. we can but try. now we will put into the chest, with the other things that you have, what we do not want for present use, and then i can drive a nail into the side of my bedroom and hang my basket on it." "but," said i, "this round glass--what is that for?" "put it on one side," replied she, "and to-morrow, if it is fine, i will show you the use of it; but there are some things we have forgotten, which are your belt and the other articles you gave me to take for you when you thought we were to leave the island. they are in the bed-place opposite to yours." i brought them, and she put away the mate's watch and sleeve-buttons, and the other trinkets, etcetera, saying that she would examine the letters and papers at another time. the belt was examined, counting how many of the squares had stones in them, and then, with her scissors, she cut open one of the squares, and took out a white glittering thing like glass, as it appeared to me, and looked at it carefully. "i am no great judge of these things," said she, "but still i have picked up some little knowledge. this belt, if it contain all stones like this, must be of considerable value; now i must get out my needle and thread and sew it up again." she did, and put the belt away with the other articles in the chest. "and now," said she, "we have done a good day's work, and it is time to have something to eat." chapter twenty six. i must say that i was much better pleased with the appearance of the cabin, it was so neat and clean to what it had been, and everything was out of the way. the next day was a calm and clear day, and we went down to fish. we were fortunate, and procured almost as many as we had done at the previous fishing--they were all put in the bathing-pool as before. when we went up to the cabin, as soon as the fish was put on the fire, under the direction of my mother, i turned up the sides of one of the pieces of sheet-iron, so as to make a sort of dish. the other piece i did the same to, only not so high at the sides, as one piece was kept for baking the fish on and the other as a dish to put our dinner upon when cooked. that day we had been too busy with fishing to think of anything else, but on the following i recollected the magnifying-glass, and brought it to her. she first showed me the power it had to magnify, with which i was much amused for a time, and she explained as well as she could to me the cause of its having that power: but i could not well understand her: i was more pleased with the effect than cognisant of the cause. afterwards she sent me to the cabin for some of the dried moss which i used for tinder, and placing the glass so as to concentrate the rays of the sun, to my astonishment i saw the tinder caught fire. it was amazement more than astonishment, and i looked up to see where the fire came from. my mother explained to me, and i, to a certain degree, comprehended; but i was too anxious to have the glass in my own hands and try experiments. i lighted the tinder again--then i burnt my hand--then i singed one of the gannet's heads, and lastly, perceiving that nero was fast asleep in the sun, i obtained the focus on his cold nose. he started up with a growl, which made me retreat, and i was perfectly satisfied with the result of my experiments. from that time, the fire was, when the sun shone, invariably lighted by the burning-glass, and very useful did i find it. as it was so portable, i always carried it with me, and when i had nothing to do, i magnified, or set fire, according to the humour of the moment. although i have not mentioned it, not a morning rose, but before breakfast, i read the scriptures to my mother. "there's so much in that book which i cannot understand," said i, one morning. "i suspect that, living as you have, alone on this island, and having seen nothing of the world," replied my mother, "that there are not many books that you would understand." "but i understand all that is said in the beast and bird book," replied i. "perhaps you may, or think you do; but, frank, you must not class the bible with other books. the other books are the works of man; but the bible is the word of god. there are many portions of that book which the cleverest men, who have devoted their lives to its study, cannot understand, and which never will be understood as long as this world endures. in many parts the bible is a sealed book." "but will it never be understood then by anybody?" "there is quite as much of the bible as is necessary for men to follow its precepts, and this is so clear that anybody may understand it--it contains all that is necessary for salvation; but there are passages, the true meaning of which we cannot explain, and which god, for his own purposes, will not permit us to do. but if we do not know them now, we shall probably hereafter, when we have left this world, and our intellects more nearly approach god's." "well, i don't understand why we should not understand it." "frank," replied she, "look at that flower just in bloom. do you understand how it is that that plant keeps alive--grows every year-- every year throws out a large blue flower? why should it do so? why should the flower always be blue? and whence comes that beautiful colour? can you tell me? you see, you know that it does do so. but can you tell me what makes it do so?" "no." "look at that bird. you know it is hatched from an egg. how is it that the inside of an egg is changed into bird? how is that the bird is covered with feathers, and has the power to fly? can you explain to me yourself? you can walk about just as you please--you have the power of reasoning, and thinking, and of acting; but by what means is it that you possess that power? can you tell? you know that is so, but you know no more. you can't tell why, or how, or what causes produce these effects--can you?" "no." "well, then, if you are surrounded by all manner of things, living and dead, and see every day things which you cannot explain, or understand, why should you be surprised that, as god has not let you know by what means these effects are produced, that in his written word he should also keep from you that which for good purposes you are not permitted to know. everything here is by god's will, and that must be sufficient for us. now do you understand?" "yes, i see now what you mean, but i never thought about these things before. tell me some more about the bible." "not now. some day i will give you a history of the bible, and then you will understand the nature of the book, and why it was written; but not at present. suppose, as we have nothing particular to do, you tell me all you know about yourself from jackson, and all that happened while you lived with him. i have heard only part, and i should like to know all." "very well," replied i. "i will tell you everything, but it will take a long while." "we shall have plenty of time to spare, my dear boy, i fear, before we leave this place; so never mind time--tell me everything." i commenced my narrative, but i was interrupted. "have you never been able to call your own mother to your memory?" said she. "i think i can now, since i have seen you; but i could not before. i now can recollect a person dressed like you, kneeling down and praying by my side; and i said before, the figure has appeared in my dreams, and much oftener since you have been here." "and your father?" "i have not the slightest remembrance of him, or anybody else except my mother." i then proceeded, and continued my narrative until it was time to go to bed; but as i was very circumstantial, and was often interrupted by questions, i had not told a quarter of what i had to say. chapter twenty seven. mrs reichardt had promised to give me a history of the bible; and one day, when the weather kept us both at home, she thus commenced her narrative:-- "the bible is a history of god's doings for the salvation of man. it commences with the fall of man by disobedience, and ends with the sacrifice made for his reinstatement. as by one man, adam, sin came into the world, so by one man, jesus christ, was sin and death overcome. if you will refer to the third chapter of genesis, at the very commencement of the bible, you will find that at the same time that adam receives his punishment, a promise is made by the lord, that the head of the serpent shall hereafter be bruised. the whole of the bible, from the very commencement, is an announcement of the coming of christ; so that as soon as the fault had been committed, the almighty, in his mercy, had provided a remedy. nothing is unknown or unforeseen by god. "recollect, frank, that the bible contains the history of god's doings, but it does not often tell is why such things were done. it must be sufficient for us to know that such was the will of god; when he thinks proper, he allows us to understand his ways; but to our limited capacities, most of his doings are inscrutable. but are we to suppose that, because we, in our foolishness, cannot comprehend his reasons, that therefore they must be cavilled at? do you understand me, frank?" "yes," replied i; "i do pretty well." "as i pointed out to you the other day, you see the blade of grass grow, and you see it flower, but how it does so you know not. if then you are surrounded all your life with innumerable things which you see but cannot comprehend--when all nature is a mystery to you--even yourself-- how can you expect to understand the dealings of god in other things? when, therefore, you read the bible, you must read it with faith." "what is faith? i don't quite understand, mother." "frank, i have often told you of many things that are in england, where you one day hope to go. now, if, when you arrive in england, you find that everything that i have told you is quite true, you will be satisfied that i am worthy of belief." "yes." "well, suppose some one were to tell you something relative to any other country, which you could not understand, and you came to me and asked me if such were the case, would you, having found that i told you truth with regard to england, believe that what you had been told of this other country was true, if i positively asserted that it was so?" "of course i should, mother." "well, then, frank, that would be faith; a belief in things not only not seen, but which you cannot understand. but, to go on, i mention this because some people are so presumptuous as to ask the why and the wherefore of god's doings, and attempt to argue upon their justice, forgetting that the little reason they have is the gift of god, and that they must be endowed with intellect equal to the almighty, to enable them to know and perceive that which he decides upon. but if god has not permitted us to understand all his ways, still, wherever we can trace the finger of god, we can always perceive that everything is directed by an all-wise and beneficent hand; and that, although the causes appear simple, the effects produced are extraordinary and wonderful. we shall observe this as we talk over the history of the jews, in the bible. but, i repeat, that we must study the whole of the bible with faith, and not be continually asking ourselves, `why was this done?' if you will turn to the ninth chapter of the epistle to the romans, you will see what the apostle paul says on the subject: `nay but, o man, who art thou that repliest against god?' shall the thing formed say to him that formed it, `why hast thou made me thus?' do you now understand in what spirit the bible should be read?" "yes, i do. we must read it as the word of god, and believe all that we read in it." "exactly. now we will proceed. after adam's fall, the earth became so wicked that god destroyed it, leaving but noah and his family to re-people it; and as soon as this was done, the almighty prepared for his original intention for the future salvation of men. he selected abraham, who was a good man, and who had faith, to be the father of a nation chosen for his own people--that was the jewish nation. he told him that his seed should multiply as the stars in the heavens, and that all the nations of the earth should be blessed in him; that is, that from his descendants should christ be born, who should be the salvation of men. abraham's great grandchildren were brought into egypt, to live apart in the land of goshen. you have read the history of joseph and his brethren?" "oh yes; i know that well." "well, the almighty wished the jews should be a nation apart from others, and for that purpose he brought them into egypt. but observe, frank, by what simple and natural causes this was effected. it was by a dream of joseph's, which, when he told them of it, irritated his brothers against him; they sold him as a slave, and he was sent into egypt. there, having explained the dream of pharaoh, he was made a ruler over egypt, and saved that country from the famine which was in every other land. his brothers come down to buy corn, and he recognises them. he sends for his father and all the family, and establishes them in the land of goshen, as shepherds, apart from the egyptians. here they multiplied fast; but after joseph's elevation they were cruelly treated by the egyptians, who became afraid of their rapid increase, and eventually the kings of egypt gave orders that all the male children of the jews should be destroyed. it was at this time, when they were so oppressed and cruelly treated by the egyptians, that god interfered and sent for moses. moses, like all the rest of the jews, knew nothing of the true god, and was difficult to persuade; and it was only by miracles that he was convinced." "why did god keep the jews apart from the egyptians, and have them thrown in bondage?" "because he wished to prepare them to become his own peculiar people. by their being descended from abraham, and having never intermarried with other nations, they had become a pure race; by being in bondage and severely treated, they had suffered and become united as a people. they knew no gods, but those worshipped by the egyptians, and these gods it was now the intention of the almighty to confound, and prove to the jews as worthless. at the same time he worked with his own nation in mystery, for when moses asked him what god he was to tell his people that he was, the almighty only replied by these words--`i am:' having no name like all the false gods worshipped by the egyptians. he was now about to prove, by his wonderful miracles, the difference between himself and the false gods." "what are miracles?" "a miracle is doing that which man has no power of doing, proving that the party who does it is superior to man; for instance--to restore a dead man to life is a miracle, as none but god, or those empowered by god, could do so. miracles were necessary, therefore, to prove to the jews that the almighty was the true god, and were resorted to by him in this instance, as well as in the coming of our saviour, when it was also necessary to prove that he was the son of god. when the almighty sent moses to pharaoh to demand that the israelites should have permission to sacrifice in the desert, he purposely hardened the heart of pharaoh that he might refuse the request." "but why did he so?" "because he wanted to prove to the israelites that he was the only true god; and had pharaoh consented to their going away, there would have been no opportunity of performing those miracles by which the israelites were to be delivered, and by which they were to acknowledge him as their god." mrs reichardt often renewed this conversation, till i became acquainted with scriptural history. chapter twenty eight. the following morning, i went with nero to take a couple of fish out of the pool. as soon as nero had caught them, he went into the other part of the bathing-pool to amuse himself, while i cleaned the fish, which i generally did before i went up to the cabin, giving him the heads and insides for his share, if i did not require any portion for the birds. nero was full of play that morning, and when i threw the heads to him, as he frolicked in the water, he brought them out to the rocks; but instead of eating them, as usual, he laid them at my feet. i threw them in several times, and he continued to bring them out, and my mother, coming down to me, was watching him. "i think," said she, "you must teach nero to fetch and carry like a dog--try. instead of the heads, throw in this piece of wood;" which she now broke off the boat-hook staff. i did so, and nero brought it out, as he had done the heads of the fish. i patted and coaxed the animal, and tried him again several times with success. "now," said my mother, "you must accustom him to certain words when you send him for anything. always say, `fetch it, nero!' and point with your finger." "why am i to do that, mother?" i asked. "because the object to be gained is, not that the animal should fetch out what you throw in, but what you send it to bring out which you have not thrown in. do you understand?" "yes," replied i. "you mean, if there were anything floating near on the sea, i should send him for it." "exactly. then nero would be of some use." "i will soon teach him," replied i; "to-morrow i will send him into the sea after the piece of spar. i've no fear that he will go away now." "i was thinking last night, frank, whether they had taken the pail with them in the boat." "the pail," said i; "i know where it is, but i quite forgot it. we left it up the ravine the last day we planted the potatoes." "we did so, now i recollect. i will go for it while you get the breakfast ready." we had now been for many weeks on a fish diet and i must confess that i was tired of it, which was not the case when i lived upon the dried birds during the whole of the year. why so i cannot tell; but i was soon to learn to relish fish, if i could obtain them. it was not often that the wind blew direct on the shore, but coming from the northward and eastward, it was in a slanting direction; but occasionally, and chiefly about the time of the equinoxes, the gales came on very heavy from the eastward, and then the wash of the seas upon the rocky coast was tremendous. such was the case about this time. a fierce gale of wind from the eastward raised a sea which threw the surf and spray high over the loftiest of the rocks, and the violence of the wind bore the spray far inland. the gale had come on in the evening, and my mother and i, when we rose in the morning, were standing on the platform before the cabin, admiring the grandeur of the scene, but without the least idea that it was to be productive of so much misery to ourselves. my mother pointed out to me some passages in the psalms and old testament bearing strongly upon the scene before us; after a time i called nero, and went down with him to take fish out of the pool for our day's consumption. at that time we had a large supply in the pool--more than ever, i should say. when i arrived at the pool, i found the waves several feet in height rolling in over the ledges, and the pool one mass of foam, the water in it being at least two or three feet higher than usual; still it never occurred to me that there was any mischief done, until i had sent nero in for the fish, and found that, after floundering and diving for some time, he did not bring out one. my mind misgave me; and i ordered him in again. he remained some time and then returned without a fish, and i was then satisfied that from the rolling in of the waves, and the unusual quantity of the water in the pool, the whole of the fish had escaped, and that we were now without any provisions or means of subsistence, until the weather should settle, and enable us to catch some more. aghast at the discovery, i ran up to the cabin, and called to my mother, who was in her bedroom. "oh, mother, all the fish have got out of the pool, and we have nothing to eat. i told you we should be starved." "take time, frank, and take breath," replied she, "and then tell me what has happened to cause this alarm and dismay, that you appear to be in." i explained to her what had happened, and that nero could not find one fish. "i fear that what you say must be correct," replied she; "but we must put our trust in god. it is his will, and whatever he wills must be right." i cannot say i was christian enough at the time to acknowledge the truth of her reply, and i answered, "if god is as good and as gracious as you say, will he allow us to starve? does he know that we are starving?" continued i. "does he know, frank?" replied my mother. "what does the bible say-- that not a sparrow falls to the ground without his knowledge; and of how much more worth are you than many sparrows? shame upon you, frank!" i was abashed, but not satisfied; i therefore replied quietly, "we have nothing to eat, mother." "granted that we have lost all our fish, frank, still we are not yet starving; the weather may moderate to-morrow, and we may catch some more, or even if it should not till the day afterwards, we can bear to be two days without food. let us hope for the best and put our trust in god--let us pray to him and ask him for his assistance. he can rebuke these stormy waters--he can always find means of helping those who put confidence in him, and will send us aid when all hope appears gone. pray, frank, as i will do fervently, and believing that your prayer is heard--pray with faith, and your prayer will be answered." "it is not always so," replied i; "you have told me of many people who have died of starvation." "i grant it, and for all-wise purposes they were permitted so to do; but the almighty had reasons for permitting it, unknown to us, but which you may depend upon it, were good. we cannot fathom his decrees. he may even now decide that such is to be our fate; but if so, depend upon it, frank, all is right, and what appears to you now as cruel and neglectful of you, would, if the future could be looked into by us, prove to have been an act of mercy." "do you think, then, that we shall starve?" "i do not--i have too much faith in god's mercy, and i do not think that he would have preserved our lives by preventing the men from taking us into the boat if we were now to starve. god is not inconsistent; and i feel assured that, forlorn as our present position appears to be, and tried as our faith in him may be, we shall still be preserved, and live to be monuments of his gracious love and kindness." these words of my mother and the implicit confidence which she appeared to have, much revived me. "well," said i, "i hope you are right, my dear mother; and now i think of it," continued i, brightening up at the idea, "if the worst come to the worst, we can eat the birds; i don't care much for them now, and if i did, you should not starve, mother." "i believe you would not hesitate to sacrifice the birds, frank; but a greater sacrifice may be demanded of you." "what?" inquired i; and then after a little thought i said, "you don't mean nero, mother?" "to tell the truth, i did mean nero, frank; for the birds will not be a support for more than a day or two." "i never could kill nero, mother," replied i, gloomily; and walking away into the cabin, i sat down very melancholy at the idea of my favourite being sacrificed; to me it appeared quite horrible, and my mother having referred to it, made her fall very much in my good opinion. alas! i was indeed young and foolish, and little thought what a change would take place in my feelings. as for the birds, as i really did not care for them, i resolved to kill two of them for our day's meal, and returning to the platform i had laid hold of the two that were there and had seized both by the neck, when my mother asked me what i was going to do. "kill them, and put them in the pot for our dinner," replied i. "nay, frank! you are too hasty. let us make some little sacrifice, even for the poor birds. we surely can fast one day without very great suffering. to-morrow will be time enough." i dropped the birds from my hand, tacitly consenting to her proposal. it was not, however, for the sake of the birds that i did so, but because one day's respite for the birds would be a day's respite for nero. "come," said my mother, "let us go into the cabin and get some work. i will alter some of the clothes for you. what will you do?" "i don't know," replied i, "but i will do whatever you tell me." "well, then, i perceive that the two fishing-lines are much worn, and they may break very soon, and then we shall be without the means of taking fish, even if the weather is fine; so now we will cut off some of the whale-line, and when it is unravelled, i will show you how to lay it up again into fishing-line; and, perhaps, instead of altering the clothes, i had better help you, as fishing-lines are now of more consequence to us than anything else." this was an arrangement which i gladly consented to. in a short time the whale-line was unravelled, and my mother showed me how to lay it up in three yarns, so as to make a stout fishing-line. she assisted, and the time passed away more rapidly than i had expected it would. "you are very clever, mother," said i. "no, my child, i am not, but i certainly do know many things which women in general are not acquainted with; but the reason of this is, i have lived a life of wandering, and occasional hardships. often left to our own resources, when my husband and i were among strangers, we found the necessity of learning to do many things for ourselves, which those who have money usually employ others to do for them; but i have been in situations where even money was of no use, and had to trust entirely to myself. i have, therefore, always made it a rule to learn everything that i could; and as i have passed much of my life in sailing over the deep waters, i obtained much useful knowledge from the seamen, and this of laying up fishing-lines is one of the arts which they communicated to me. now, you see, i reap the advantage of it." "yes," replied i; "and so do i. how lucky it was that you came to this island." "lucky for me, do you mean, frank?" "no, mother! i mean how lucky for me." "i trust that i have been sent here to be useful, frank, and with that feeling i cheerfully submit to the will of god. he has sent me that i may be useful to you, i do not doubt; and if by my means you are drawn towards him, and, eventually, become one of his children, i shall have fulfilled my mission." "i do not understand you quite, mother." "no, you cannot as yet; but everything in season," replied she, slowly musing. "`first the blade, then the ear, and then the full corn in the ear.'" "mother," said i, "i should like to hear the whole story of your life. you know i have told you all that i know about myself. now, suppose you tell me your history, and that of your husband. you did say that perhaps one day you would. do you recollect?" "yes, i do recollect that i did make a sort of promise, frank, and i promise you now that some day i will fulfil it; but i am not sure that you will understand or profit by the history now, so much as you may by-and-bye." "well, but mother, you can tell me the story twice, and i shall be glad to hear it again; so tell it to me now, to amuse me, and by-and-bye, that i may profit by it." my mother smiled, which she very seldom did, and said-- "well, frank, as i know you would at any time give up your dinner to listen to a story, and as you will have no dinner to-day, i think it is but fair that i should consent to your wish. who shall i begin with-- with my husband or with myself?" "pray begin with your own history," replied i. chapter twenty nine. "i am the daughter of a parish clerk in a small market-town near the southern coast of england, within a few miles of a large seaport." "what is a parish clerk?" i asked, interrupting my mother at the commencement of her promised narrative. "a parish clerk," she replied, "is a man who is employed in the parish or place to which he belongs, to fulfil certain humble duties in connection with the church or place of worship where the people meet together to worship god." "what does he do there?" i inquired. "he gives out the psalms that are to be sung, leads the congregation in making their responses to the minister appointed to perform the services of the church; has the custody of the registry of births, deaths, and burials of the inhabitants, and the care of the church monuments, and of other property belonging to the building. in some places he also fulfils the duties of bell-ringer and grave-digger; that is to say, by ringing a large bell at the top of the church, he summons the people to their devotions, during their lives, and digs a hole in consecrated ground, surrounding the sacred building, to receive their bodies when dead." i mused on this strange combination of offices, and entertained a notion of the importance of such a functionary, which i afterwards found was completely at variance with the real state of the case. "my father," she resumed, "not only fulfilled all these duties, but contrived to perform the functions of schoolmaster to the parish children." "what are parish children?" i asked eagerly. "i know what children are, as jackson represented to me that i was the child of my father and mother--but what makes children parish children?" "they are the children of the poor," mrs reichardt replied, "who, not being able to afford them instruction, willingly allow them to be taught at the expense of the people of the parish generally." i thought this a praiseworthy arrangement. i knew nothing of poor's-rates, and the system of giving relief to the poor of the parish, so long used in england, afterwards explained to me; but the kindness and wisdom of this plan of instruction became evident to my understanding. i was proceeding to ask other questions, when my mother stopped them by saying, that if i expected her to get through her story, i must let her proceed without further interruption; for many things would be mentioned by her, which demanded explanation, for one so completely unaware of their existence as myself, and that it would be impossible to make me thoroughly acquainted with such things within any reasonable time; the proper explanations she promised should follow. she then proceeded. "my father, it may be thought, had enough on his hands; but in an obscure country town, it is not unusual for one man to unite the occupations of several, and this was particularly the case with my father, who, in addition to the offices i have enumerated, was the best cattle-doctor and bone-setter within ten miles, and often earned his bread at different kinds of farmer's work; such as thatching, hedging, ditching, and the like. nevertheless, he found time to read his bible, and bring up his only daughter religiously. this daughter was myself." "what had become of your mother?" i asked, as i thought it strange mrs reichardt should only mention one parent. "she had died very soon after my birth," she answered, "and i was left at first to the care of a poor woman, who nursed me; as soon, however, as i could run about, and had exhibited some signs of intelligence, my father began to get so partial to me, that he very reluctantly allowed me to go out of his sight. he took great pains in teaching me what he knew; and though the extent of his acquirements was by no means great, it was sufficient to lay a good foundation, and establish a desire for more comprehensive information, which i sought every available means to obtain. "i remember that at a very early age, i exhibited an extraordinary curiosity for a child, constantly asking questions, not only of my father, but of all his friends and visitors; and, as they seemed to consider me a quick and lively child, they took pleasure in satisfying my inquisitive spirit. in this way i gained a great deal of knowledge, and, by observation of what passed around me, a great deal more. "it soon became a source of pride and gratification with my father, to ask me to read the bible to him. this naturally led to a good many inquiries on my part, and numerous explanations on his. in course of time, i became familiar with all the sacred writings, and knew their spirit and meaning much better than many persons who were more than double my age. "my fondness for such studies, and consequent reputation, attracted the attention of dr brightwell, the clergyman of our parish, who had the kindness to let me share the instructions of his children, and still further advanced my education, and still more increased my natural predilection for religious information. by the time i was thirteen, i became quite a prodigy in christian learning, and was often sent for to the parsonage, to astonish the great people of the neighbourhood, by the facility with which i answered the most puzzling questions that were put to me, respecting the great mysteries of christianity." chapter thirty. "it was about this time that i first became acquainted with an orphan boy, an inmate of the workhouse, who had been left to the care of the parish, by the sudden death of his parents, a german clockmaker and his wife, from a malignant fever which had visited the neighbourhood, and taken off a considerable portion of the labouring population. i had been sent on errands from my father to the master of the workhouse, a severe, sullen man, of whom i had a great dread, and i noticed this child, in consequence of his pale and melancholy countenance, and apparently miserable condition. i observed that no one took any notice of him; and that he was allowed to wander about the great straggling workhouse, among the insane, the idiotic, and the imbecile, without the slightest attention being paid to his going and coming; in short, he lived the wretched life of a workhouse boy. "i see that you are eager to ask what is a workhouse boy," said my mother, "so i will anticipate your question. there is, in the various parishes of the country to which we both belong, a building expressly set apart for the accommodation and support of the destitute and disabled poor. it usually contains inmates of all ages, from the infant just born to the very aged, whose infirmities show them to be on the verge of the grave. they are all known to be in a state of helpless poverty, and quite unable to earn a subsistence for themselves. in this building they are clothed and fed; the younger provided with instruction necessary to put them in the way of earning a livelihood; the elders of the community enjoying the consolations of religion, accorded to them by the regular visits of the chaplain." "i suppose," i here observed, "that the people who lived there were deeply impressed with their good fortune in finding such an asylum?" "as far as i could ever ascertain," mrs reichardt replied, "it was exactly the reverse. it was always thought so degrading to enter a workhouse, that the industrious labourer would endure any and every privation rather than live there. an honest hard-working man must be sorely driven indeed, to seek such a shelter in his distress." "that seems strange," i observed. "why should he object to receive what he so much stands in need of?" "when he thus comes upon the funds of the parish," answered my mother, "he becomes what is called a pauper, and among the english peasantry of the better sort, there is the greatest possible aversion to be ranked with this degraded class. consequently, the inmates of the workhouses are either those whose infirmities prevent their earning a subsistence, or the idle and the dissolute, who feel none of the honest prejudices of self-dependence, and care only to live from day to day on the coarse and meagre fare afforded them by the charity of their wealthier and more industrious fellow-creatures. "the case of this poor boy i thought very pitiable. i found out that his name was heinrich reichardt. he could speak no language but his own and therefore his wants remained unknown, and his feelings unregarded. he had been brought up with a certain sense of comfort and decency, which was cruelly outraged by the position in which he found himself placed by the sudden death of his parents. i observed that he was often in tears; and his fair features and light hair contrasted remarkably with the squalid faces and matted locks of his companions. his wretchedness never failed to make a deep impression on me. "i brought him little presents, and strove to express my sympathy for his sufferings. he seemed, at first, more surprised than grateful; but i shortly discovered that my attentions gave him unusual pleasure, and he looked upon my visits as his only solace and gratification. "even at this period, i exercised considerable influence over my father, and i managed to interest him in the case of the poor foreign boy to such an extent, that he was induced to take him out of the workhouse, and find him a home under his own roof. he was at first reluctant to burthen himself with the bringing up of a child, who, from his foreign language and habits, could be of little use to him in his avocations; but i promised to teach him english, and all other learning of which he stood most in need, and assured my father, that in a prodigious short time i would make him a much abler assistant than he was likely to find among the boys of the town. "my father's desire to please me, rather than any faith he reposed in my assertions, led him to allow me to do as i pleased in this affair. i lost no time, therefore, in beginning my course of instruction, and in a few weeks ascertained that i had an apt pupil, who was determined to proceed with his education as fast as circumstances would admit. we were soon able to express our ideas to each other, and in a few months read together the book out of which i had received so many invaluable lessons. "in a short time i became not less proud of, than partial to, my pupil. i took him through the same studies which i had pursued under the auspices of our clergyman, and was secretly pleased to find, not only that he was singularly quick in imbibing my instructions, but displayed a strong natural taste for those investigations towards which i had shown so marked a bias. "day after day have we sat together discoursing of the great events recorded in holy writ: going over every chapter of its marvellous records, page by page, till the whole were so firmly fixed upon our minds, that we had no necessity during our conversations for referring to the sacred book. we found examples we held up to ourselves for imitation;--we found incidents we regarded as promises of divine protection; we found consolation and comfort, as well as exhortation and advice; and, moreover, we found a sort of instruction that led us to select for ourselves duties that apparently tended to bring us nearer to the great being, whose goodness we had so diligently studied. "my father seemed as much pleased with my successful teaching, as he had been with my successful learning; and when young reichardt turned out a remarkably handy and intelligent lad, to whose assistance in some of his avocations he could have recourse with perfect confidence in his cleverness and discretion, he grew extremely partial to him. dr brightwell also proved his friend, and in a few years, the condition of the friendless workhouse boy was so changed, he could not have been taken for the same person. "he was a boy of a very grateful spirit, and always regarded me with the devotion of a most thankful heart. often would he contrast the wretchedness of his previous condition with the happiness he now enjoyed, and express in the warmest terms his obligations to me for the important service i had rendered him in rescuing him from the abject misery of the workhouse. under these circumstances, it is not extraordinary that we should learn to regard each other with the liveliest feelings of affection, and while we were still children,-- endured all the transports and torments which make up the existence of more experienced lovers." "i do not like interrupting you," i here observed, "but i certainly should like to know what is meant by the word lovers?" "i can scarcely explain it to you satisfactorily at present," said mrs reichardt, with a smile; "but i have no doubt, before many years have passed over your head--always provided that you escape from this island--you will understand it without requiring any explanation. but i must now leave my story, as many things of much consequence to our future welfare now demand my careful attention." i could not then ascertain from her what was meant by the word whose meaning i had asked. it had very much excited my curiosity; but she left me to attend to her domestic duties, of which she was extremely regardful, and i had no opportunity at that time of eliciting from her the explanation i desired. chapter thirty one. it is impossible for me to overrate the value of mrs reichardt's assistance. indeed had it not been for her, circumstanced as i was at this particular period, i should in all probability have perished. her exhortations saved me from despair, when our position seemed to have grown quite desperate. but example did more, even, than precept. her ingenuity in devising expedients; her activity in putting them in force; her unfailing cheerfulness under disappointment, and christian resignation under privation, produced the best results. i was enabled to bear up against the ill effects of our crippled resources, consequent upon the ill conduct of the sailors of the whaler, and the failure of our fish-pond. she manufactured strong lines for deep-sea fishing, and having discovered a shelf of rock, little more than two feet above the sea, to which with a good deal of difficulty i could descend, i took my stand one day on the rock with my lines baited with a piece of one of my feathered favourites, whom dire necessity had at last forced me to destroy. i waited with all the patience of a veteran angler. i knew the water to be very deep, and it lay in a sheltered nook or corner of the rocks about ten feet across; i allowed the line to drop some three or four yards, and not having any float, could only tell i had a bite by feeling a pull at the line, which was wound round my arm. after some time having been passed in this way, my attention was withdrawn from the line, and given to the narrative i had so lately heard; that is to say, though my eyes were still fixed upon the line, i had completely given up my thoughts to the story of the poor german boy, who had been snatched from poverty by the interference of the parish clerk's daughter; and i contrived to speculate on what i should have done under such circumstances, imagining all sorts of extravagances in which i should have indulged, to testify my gratitude to so amiable and benevolent a friend. a singular course of ideal scenes followed each other in quick succession in my mind--as i fancied myself the hero of a similar adventure. i regarded my imaginary benefactress with feelings of such intensity as i had never before experienced; and it seemed that i was to her the exciting object of sentiments of a like nature, the knowledge of which awoke in our hearts the most agreeable sensations. i was rudely disturbed out of this day-dream by finding myself suddenly plunged into the deep water beneath me. the shock was so startling, that some seconds elapsed before i could comprehend my situation; and then it became clear that i must have hooked a fish, that had not only succeeded in pulling me off my balance, but the line by which he was held being round my arm, cutting painfully into the flesh, threatened drowning by keeping me under water. with great difficulty i managed to rise to the surface, and loosened the windings of the line from my limb; then, anxious to retain possession of what from its force must have been a fish well worth some trouble in catching, i held on with both hands, and pulled with all my strength. at first, by main force i was drawn through the water; then, when i found the strain slacken, i drew in the line. this manoeuvre was repeated several times, till i succeeded in obtaining a view of what i had caught; or, more properly speaking, of what had caught me. it was merely a glimpse; for the fish, which was a very large one, getting a sight of me within a few yards of him, made some desperate plunges, and again darted off, dragging me along with him, sometimes under the water, and sometimes on the surface. his body was nearly round, and about seven or eight feet long--rather a formidable antagonist for close quarters; nevertheless, i was most eager to get at him, the more so, when i ascertained that his resistance was evidently decreasing. i continued to approach, and at last got near enough to plunge my knife up to the haft in his head, which at once put an end to the struggle. but now another difficulty presented itself. in the ardour of the chase i had been drawn nearly a mile from the island, and i found it impossible to carry back the produce of my sport, exhausted as i was by the efforts i had made in capturing him. i knew i could not swim with such a burthen for the most inconsiderable portion of the distance. my fish therefore must be abandoned. here was a bountiful supply of food, as soon as placed within reach, rendered totally unavailable. i thought of mrs reichardt. i thought how gratified she would have been, could i have brought to her such an excellent addition to our scanty stock of food. then i thought of her steadfast reliance upon providence, and what valuable lessons of piety and wisdom she would read me, if she found me depressed by my disappointment. chapter thirty two. as soon as i could disconnect my tackle from the dead fish, i turned my face homewards, and struck out manfully for the shore; luckily i did not observe any sharks. i landed safely without further adventure, and immediately sought my kind friend and companion, whom i found, as usual, industriously employed in endeavouring to secure me additional comforts. if she were not engaged in ordinary woman's work,--making, mending, cleaning, or improving, in our habitation, she was sure to be found doing something in the immediate neighbourhood, which, though less feminine, showed no less forethought, prudence, and sagacity. our garden had prospered wonderfully under her hands. the ground seemed now stocked with various kinds of vegetation, of which i neither knew the value nor the proper mode of cultivation; and we seemed about to be surrounded with shrubs and plants--many of very pleasing appearance-- that must in a short time entirely change the aspect of the place. she heard my adventure with a good deal of interest, only remonstrating with me upon my want of caution, and dwelling upon the fatal consequences that must have ensued to herself, had i been drowned or disabled by falling from the rock, or devoured by the sharks. "you may consider yourself, my dear son," she observed, with serious earnestness, "to have been under the divine care. nothing can be clearer than that a wise and kind providence is continually watching over his creatures when placed in unusual or perilous circumstances. he occasionally affords them manifestations of his favour, to encourage them when engaged in good works. this shows the comprehensive eye of the master of many workmen, who overlooks the labours of his more industrious servants, and indicates to them his regard for their welfare and appreciation of their labours." "but surely," i interposed, "if i had been under the superintendence of the providence of which you speak, i should not have been obliged to abandon so capital a fish, when i had endured such trouble to capture it, and when its possession was so necessary to our comfort, nay, even to our existence." "the very abandonment of so unwieldy a creature," she replied, "is unanswerable evidence of a divine interposition in your favour; for had you persisted in your intention of carrying it to the shore, there is but little doubt that its weight would have overpowered you, and that you would have been drowned; and then what would have become of me? a woman left in this desolate spot to her own resources, must soon be forced to give up the struggle for existence, from want of physical strength. nevertheless, there are numerous instances on record, of women having surmounted hardships which few men could endure. supported by our heavenly father, who is so powerful a protector of the weak, and friend of the helpless, the weakest of our weak sex may triumph over the most intolerable sufferings. i, however, am not over confident of being so supported, and therefore, i think it would be but showing a proper consideration for your fellow exile, to act in every emergency with as much circumspection and prudence as possible." i promised that for the future i would run no such risks, and added many professions of regard for her safety. they had the desired effect; i pretended to think no more of my disappointment, nevertheless, i found myself constantly dwelling on the size of my lost fish, and lamenting my being obliged to abandon him to his more voracious brethren of the deep. these thoughts so filled my mind, that at night i continued to dream over again the whole incident, beginning with my patient angling from the rock, and concluding with my disconsolate swim to shore--and pursued my scaly antagonist quite as determinedly in my sleep as i had done in the deep waters. i rose early, after having passed so disturbed a night, and soon made my way to the usual haunt of nero, whom i discovered in the sea near the rocks making all sorts of strange tumblings and divings, apparently after some dark object that was floating in the water. i called him away, to examine what it was that had so attracted his attention, and my surprise may be imagined when i made out the huge form of my enemy of the preceding day. my shouts and exclamations of joy soon brought mrs reichardt to the scene, and when she discovered the shape of this prodigious fish, her surprise seemed scarcely less than my own. how to land him was our first consideration; and after some debate on the ways and means, i got a rope and leaped into the water with it, fastened a noose round his gills, and then swimming back and climbing the rock, we jointly tried to pull him up on to the shore. we hauled and tugged with all our force for a considerable time, but to very little effect; he was too heavy to pull up perpendicularly. at last we managed to drag him to a low piece of rock, and there i divided him into several pieces, which mrs reichardt carried away to dry and preserve in some way that she said would make the fish capital eating all the year round. it was very palatable when dressed by her, and as she changed the manner of cooking several times, i never got tired of it. by its flavour, as far as i could judge from subsequent knowledge, the creature was something of the sturgeon kind of fish; but its proper name i never could learn; nor was i ever able to catch another, therefore, i must presume that it was a stranger in those seas. nevertheless, he proved most acceptable to us both, for we should have fared but ill for some time, had it not been for his providential capture. it was one afternoon, when we had been enjoying a capital meal at the expense of our great friend, that i led the subject to mrs reichardt's adventures, subsequently to where she broke off in the story of herself and the poor german boy; and though not without considerable reluctance, i induced her to proceed with her narrative. chapter thirty three. "our good minister dr brightwell," she commenced, "was a man of considerable scholastic attainments, and he delighted in making a display of them. at one time he had been master of an extensive grammar school, and now he employed a good deal of his leisure in teaching those boys and girls of the town, who indicated the possession of anything like talent. the overseers used to talk jestingly to my father, of the doctor teaching ploughboys greek and latin; and wenches, whose chief employment was stone-picking in the fields, geography and the use of the globes. even the churchwardens shook their heads, and privately thought the rector a little out of his seven senses, for wasting his learning upon such unprofitable scholars. nevertheless, he continued his self-imposed task, without meeting any reward beyond the satisfaction of his own conscience. it was not till he added to his pupils myself and young reichardt, he felt he was doing his duty with some prospect of advantage. "the spirit of emulation roused both of us to make extraordinary efforts to second our worthy master's endeavours: and this did not, as is usually the case, proceed from rivalry--it arose entirely from a desire of the one to stand well in the estimation of the other. in this way we learned the french and latin languages, geography, and the usual branches of a superior education: but our bias was more particularly for religions knowledge, and our preceptor encouraged this, till we were almost as good theologians as himself. "while this information was being carefully arranged and digested, there sprung up in our hearts so deep a devotion for each other, that we were miserable when absent, and enjoyed no gratification so much as being in each other's society. we knew not then the full power and meaning of this preference, but as we changed from boy and girlhood to adult life, our feelings developed themselves into that attachment between the sexes, which from time immemorial has received the name of love." "i think i know what that means, now," said i, as my day-dream, which was so rudely disturbed by my fall into the sea, occurred to me. "it would be strange if you did," she replied, "considering that it is quite impossible you should have become acquainted with it." "yes, i am certain i understand it very well," i rejoined, more confidently, and then added, not without some embarrassment, "if i were placed in the position of heinrich reichardt, i am quite sure i should feel towards any young female who was so kind to me, the deepest regard and affection. i should like to be constantly near her, and should always desire that she should like me better than any one else." "that is quite as good an explanation of the matter, as i could expect from you," she observed, smiling. "but to return to my story. our mutual attachment attracted general attention, and was the subject of much observation. but we had no enemies: and when we were met strolling together in the shady lanes, gathering wild flowers, or wandering through the woods in search of wild strawberries, no one thought it necessary to make any remark if we had our arms round each other's waist. my father, if he heard anything about it, did not interfere. young reichardt had made himself so useful to him, and showed himself so remarkably clever in everything he undertook, that the old man loved him as his own son. "it was a settled thing between us, that we were to become man and wife, as soon as we should be permitted. and many were our plans and schemes for the future. heinrich considered himself to be in the position of jacob, who served such a long and patient apprenticeship for rachel; and though he confessed he should not like to wait so long for his wife as the patriarch had been made to do, he acknowledged he would rather serve my father to the full period, than give up all hope of possessing me. "this happy state of things was, however, suddenly put an end to, by dr brightwell one day sending for my father. it was a long time before he came back, and when he did, he looked unusually grave and reserved. in an hour or so, he communicated to me the result of his long interview with the rector. the doctor had resolved to send young reichardt to a distant place, where many learned men lived together in colleges, for the purpose of farther advancing his education, and fitting him for a religious teacher, to which vocation he had long expressed a desire to devote himself. the idea of separation seemed very terrible, but i at last got reconciled to it, in the belief that it would be greatly for heinrich's advantage, and we parted at last with many tears, many protestations, some fears, but a great many more hopes. "for some days after he had left me, everything seemed so strange, every one seemed so dull, every place seemed so desolate, that i felt as if i had been transported into some dismal scene, where i knew no one, and where there was no one likely to care about me in the slightest degree. my father went about his avocations in a different spirit to what he had so long been used to exhibit; it was evident he missed heinrich as much as i did, and the villagers stared whenever i passed them, as though my ever going about without heinrich was something which they had never anticipated. "in course of time, however, to all appearance, everything and every one went on in their daily course, as though no heinrich had ever been heard of. my father would sometimes, when overpressed by business, refer to the able assistant he had lost, and now and then i heard a conjecture hazarded by some one or other of his most confidential friends, as to what young reichardt was doing with himself. my conjectures, and my references to him, were far from being so occasional; there was scarce an hour of the day i did not think of him; but, believing that i should please him most by endeavouring to improve as much as possible during his absence, i did not give myself up to idle reflections respecting the past, or anticipations, equally idle, respecting the future. "my great delight was in hearing from him. at first, his letters expressed only his feelings for me; then he dwelt more largely on his own exertions for preparing himself for the profession he desired to adopt; and after a time, his correspondence was almost entirely composed of expositions of his views of a religious life, and dissertations on various points of doctrine. he evidently was growing more enthusiastic in religion, and less regardful of our attachment. "yet i entertained no apprehensions or misgivings. i did not think it necessary to consider myself slighted because the thoughts of my future husband were evidently raised more and more above me; the knowledge of this only made me more anxious to raise myself more and more towards the elevation to which his thoughts were so intently directed. "things went on in this way for two or three years. i never saw him all this time; i heard from him but seldom. he excused his limited correspondence on the plea that his studies left him no time for writing. i never blamed him for this apparent neglect--indeed i rather encouraged it, for my exhortations were always that he should address his time and energies towards the attainment of the object i knew him to have so much at heart--his becoming a minister of our lord's gospel. "one day my father came home from the rectory with a troubled countenance. dr brightwell was very indignant because heinrich had joined a religious community that dissented from the articles of the church of england. the doctor had offered to get him employment in the church, if he would give up his new connections: but the more earnest character of his new faith exerted so much influence over his enthusiastic nature, that he willingly abandoned his bright prospects to become a more humble labourer in a less productive vineyard. "my father, as the clerk of the parish, seemed to think himself bound to share in the indignation of his pastor for this desertion, and heinrich was severely condemned by him for displaying such ingratitude to his benefactor: i was commanded to think no more of him. "this, however, was not so easy a matter, although our correspondence appeared to have entirely ceased. i knew not where to address a letter to him, and was quite unaware of what his future career was now to be." chapter thirty four. "time passed on. with all, except myself, heinrich reichardt appeared to be forgotten; in the opinion of all, except myself, he had forgotten our house, and all the friends he had once made there. our good rector had been removed by death from the post he had so ably filled; and my father being incapacitated by age and infirmity from attending his duties in the church, had his place filled by another. he had saved sufficient to live upon, and had built himself a small cottage at the end of the village, where we lived together in perfect peace, if not in perfect happiness. "i had long grown up to womanhood, and having some abilities, had been employed as one of the teachers of the girls' school, of which i had raised myself to be mistress. i conducted myself so as to win the respect of the chief parochial officers, from more than one of whom i received proposals of marriage: but i never could reconcile myself to the idea of becoming the wife of any man but the long-absent heinrich, and the new clerk and the overseer were fain to be content with my grateful rejection of their proposals. "i determined to wait patiently till i could learn from heinrich's own lips that he had abandoned his early friend. i could never get myself to believe in the possibility of his unfaithfulness; and the remembrances of our mutual studies in the book of truth seemed always to suggest the impossibility of his acting so completely at variance with the impressions he had thence received. "i was aware that if i had mentioned my hopes of his one day coming to claim me, i should be laughed at by every one who knew anything of our story--so i said nothing, but continued the more devotedly in my heart to cherish that faith which had so long afforded me support against the overwhelming evidence of prolonged silence and neglect. "there was a congregation of dissenters in the town, and i had been once or twice prevailed on to join their devotions. one day i heard that proceedings of extraordinary interest would take place at the meeting-house. a minister of great reputation had accepted the situation of missionary to preach the gospel to the heathen, and he was visiting the different congregations that lay in his route to the seaport whence he was to embark to the sandwich islands. he was expected to address a discourse to the dissenters of our parish, and i was induced to go and hear him. "the meeting-house was very much crowded, but i contrived to get a seat within a short distance of the speakers, and waited with much interest to behold the man, who, like some of the first preachers, had chosen the perilous task of endeavouring to convert a nation of savage idolaters to the faith of the true christ. "after a short delay he appeared on a raised platform, and was introduced to this congregation by their minister. i heard nothing of this introduction, though it seemed a long one; i saw nothing of the speaker, though his was a figure which always attracted an attentive audience. i saw only the stranger. in those pale, grave, and serious features then presented to me, i recognised heinrich reichardt." "he had come back to you at last," i exclaimed; "i thought he would. after all you had done for the poor german boy, it was impossible that he should grow up to manhood and forget you." "you shall hear," she replied. "for some time my heart beat wildly, and i thought i should be obliged to leave the place, my sensations became so overpowering; but the fear of disturbing the congregation, and of attracting attention towards myself, had such influence over me, that i managed to retain sufficient control over my feelings to remain quiet. nevertheless my eyes were upon heinrich, and my whole heart and soul were exclusively engrossed by him while he continued before me. "presently he began to speak. as i have just said, i paid no attention to the preliminary proceedings. i know nothing of the manner in which he was introduced to his audience; but when he became the speaker, every word fell upon my ear with a distinctness that seemed quite marvellous to me. "and how could it be otherwise? his tall figure, his melancholy yet expressive features, his earnest manner, and clear and sonorous voice, invested him with all the power and dignity of an apostle, and when with these attributes were joined those associations of the past with which he was so intimately connected, it is impossible to exaggerate the influence he exercised over me. "he began with a fervent blessing on all who had sought the sanctity of that roof, and his hearers, impressed with the thrilling earnestness of his delivery, became at once hushed into a kind of awe-struck attention. they knelt down, and bowed their heads in prayer. "i appeared to have no power to follow the general example, but remained the only sitter in the entire congregation, with my eyes, nay, all my senses, fixed, riveted upon the preacher. this, of course, attracted his attention. i saw him look towards me with surprise, then he started, his voice hesitated for a moment, but he almost immediately continued his benediction, and, as it seemed to me, with a voice tremulous with emotion. "then followed a discourse on the object of the preacher in presenting himself there. he described the wonderful goodness of the creator in continually raising up the most humble instruments of his will to perform the most important offices; in illustration of which he referred to the numerous instances in the old and new testaments, where god's preference in this way is so clearly manifested. "he then stated that a case had arisen for divine interposition, equal in necessity to any which had occurred since the first commencement of christianity. he explained that there were nations still existing in a distant portion of the globe in a state of the wildest barbarism. ignorant savages were they, with many cruel and idolatrous customs, who were cannibals and murderers, and given up to the worst vices of the heathen. their abject and pitiable state, he told us, the lord god had witnessed with divine commiseration, and had determined that the light of christian love should shine upon their darkness, and that almighty wisdom should dissipate their besotted ignorance. "`but who,' he asked, `was to be the ambassador from so stupendous a power to these barbarous states? who would venture to be a messenger of peace and comfort to a cruel and savage nation? was there no man,' he again asked, `great enough and bold enough to undertake a mission of such vast importance, attended by such terrible risks? "`the almighty ruler seeks not for his ministers among the great and bold,' he added, `as it is written, "he hath put down the mighty from their seats, and hath exalted the humble and meek." and it will be peculiarly so on this occasion, for the exaltation is from the humblest origin; so humble it is scarcely possible to imagine so miserable a beginning, in the end attaining distinction so honourable. "`imagine, if you can, my brethren,' he said, `in the building set apart in your town for the reception of your destitute poor, a child parentless, friendless, and moneyless, condemned, as it seemed, to perpetual raggedness and intolerable suffering. a ministering angel, under the direction of the supreme goodness, took that child by the hand and led it out of the pauper walls that inclosed it, and under its auspices the child grew and flourished, and learned all that was excellent in faith and admirable in practice. "`it was ordained that he should lose sight of his angelic teacher. a dire necessity compelled him to withdraw from that pure and gracious influence. he had to learn in a different school, and prepare himself for heavier tasks. manhood, with all its severe responsibilities, came upon him. he sought first to render himself competent for some holy undertaking, before he could consider himself worthy again to claim that notice which had made him what he was. earnestly he strove for the divine assistance and encouragement; and as his qualifications increased, his estimate of the worthiness necessary for the object he had in view, became more and more exalted. "`at last,' he continued, `it became known to him that a missionary was required to explain to the savage people to whom i have already alluded, the principles of christianity. he was appointed to this sacred trust; and he then determined, before he left this country for the distant one of his ministry, to present himself before that beneficent being who had poured out before him so abundant a measure of christian virtue; that they might be joined together in the same great vocation, and support each other in the same important trust.' "i heard enough," continued mrs reichardt. "all was explained, and i was fully satisfied. the discourse proceeded to identify the speaker with the poor boy who had been preserved for such onerous duties. then came an appeal to the congregation for their prayers, and such assistance as they could afford, to advance so holy a work as the conversion of the heathen. "i was in such a tumult of pleasant feelings, that i retained but a confused recollection of the subsequent events. i only remember that as i was walking home from the meeting, i heard footsteps quickly following; in a few minutes more the voice that had so lately filled my heart to overflowing with happiness, again addressed me. i was too much excited to remain unconcerned on suddenly discovering that heinrich was so near, and i fell fainting into his arms. "i was carried into a neighbouring cottage, but in a short time was enabled to proceed home. in a week afterwards we were married: a few days more sufficed for the preparations that were required for my destination, and then we proceeded to the port, and embarked on board the ship that was to take us over many thousand miles of sea, to the wild, unknown country that was to be the scene of our mission." chapter thirty five. mrs reichardt was obliged to break off her narrative, where it concluded at the end of the last chapter. as i have said, her household duties being very numerous, and requiring a great deal of attention, took up nearly the whole of her time. the garden now presented a most agreeable appearance, possessing several different kinds of vegetables, and various plants that had been raised from seed. we had succeeded in raising several young orange-trees from the pips she had brought in her basket: and they promised to supply us with plenty of their luscious fruit. even the peas we thought so dry and useless had germinated, and provided us with a welcome addition to our table. i shall never forget the first day she added to our scanty meal of dried fish a dish of smoking potatoes fresh out of the moist earth. after enjoying sufficiently my wonder at their appearance, and delight at their agreeable taste, she informed me of their first introduction into europe, and their gradual diffusion over the more civilised portions of the globe. i speak of europe now, because i had learned from my companion, not only a good deal of geography, but had obtained some insight into several other branches of knowledge. in particular, she had told me much interesting information about england, much more than i had learnt from jackson; dwelling upon its leading features, and the most remarkable portions of its history; and i must acknowledge that i felt a secret pride in belonging to so great a country. i considered that i belonged to it, for my father and mother were english, and though i might be called the little savage, and be fixed to an obscure island in the great ocean, i felt that my real home was in this great country my mother talked about so glowingly, and that my chief object ought to be to return into the hands of my grandfather, the belt that had in so singular a manner come into my possession. i often thought of this great england whose glory had been so widely spread and so durably established, and longed for some means of leaving our present abode, and going in search of its time-honoured shores. but i asked myself how was this desirable object to be effected? we had no means of transporting ourselves from the prison into which we had been accidentally cast. we had nothing resembling a boat on the island, and we had no tools for making one; and even had we been put in possession of such a treasure, we had no means of launching it. the rocky character of the coast made the placing of a boat on the water almost impossible. the expectation of a vessel appearing off the island appeared quite as unreasonable. we had seen no ships for a long time, and those we had observed, were a great deal too far off to heed our signals. we had no help for it, but to trust to providence and bear our present evil patiently. nevertheless, i took my glass and swept the sea far and wide in search of a ship, but failed to discover anything but a spermaceti whale blowing in the distance, or a shoal of porpoises tumbling over each other nearer the shore, or a colony of seals basking in the sun on the rocks nearest the sea. my disappointment was shared by nero, who seemed to regard my vexation with a sympathising glance, and even the gannets turned their dull stupid gaze upon me, with an expression as if they deeply commiserated my distress. i had for a long time employed myself in making a shelving descent to the sea, on the most secure part of the rock, intending that it should be a landing-place for a boat, in case any ship should come near enough to send one to our rescue. it was a work of great labour, and hatchet and spade equally suffered in my endeavours to effect my object; but at last i contrived to take advantage of a natural fracture in the rock, and a subsequent fall of the cliff, to make a rude kind of inclined plane, rather too steep and too rough for bad climbers, but extremely convenient for my mother and me, whenever we should be prepared to embark for our distant home. my thoughts were now often directed to the possibility of making on the island some kind of boat that would hold ourselves and sufficient provisions for a voyage to the nearest of the larger islands. i spoke to mrs reichardt on the subject, but she dwelt upon the impossibility, without either proper tools, or the slightest knowledge of boat-building, of producing a vessel to which we could trust ourselves with any confidence, neither of us knowing anything about its management in the open sea; and then she spoke of the dangers a small boat would meet with, if the water should be rough, or if we should not be able to make the island in any reasonable time. yet i was not daunted by difficulties, nor dissuaded by discouraging representations. i thought at first of fastening all the loose timber together that had drifted against the rocks, as much in the shape of a boat as i could get it; but on looking over my stock of nails, i found they fell very far short of the proper quantity; consequently that mode of effecting my purpose was abandoned. i then thought of felling a tree and hollowing it out by charring the timber. as yet i had discovered nothing on the island but shrubs. i was quite certain that no tree grew near enough to the sea to be available, and if i should succeed in cutting down a large one and fashioning it as i desired, i had no means of transport. i might possibly make a boat capable of carrying all i wanted to put into it, but as i could neither move the water up to the boat, nor the boat down to the water, for all the service i wanted of it, even if the island contained a tree large enough, i might just as well leave it untouched. still i would not altogether abandon my favourite project. i thought of the willows that grew on the island, and fancied i could make a framework by twisting them strongly together, and stretching seal-skins over them. i laboured at this for several weeks, exercising all my ingenuity and no slight stock of patience, to create an object with which i was but imperfectly acquainted. i did succeed at last in putting together something in a remote degree resembling the boat that brought part of the whaler's crew to the island and had taken them away, but it was not a quarter the size and was so light that i could carry it without much difficulty to the landing i had constructed on the cliff. when i came to try its capabilities, i found it terribly lopsided--it soon began to leak, and in fact it exhibited so many faults, that i was forced to drag it again on shore, and take it to pieces. i called in mrs reichardt to my assistance, and though at first she seemed averse to the experiment, she gave me a great deal of information respecting the structure of small boats, and the method of waterproofing leather and other fabrics. i attended carefully to all she said, and commenced rebuilding with more pretensions to art. i now made a strong framework, tolerably sharp at each end, and as nearly as possible resembling a keel at the bottom. i covered this on both sides with pieces of strong cloth saturated with grease from the carcases of birds, and then covered the whole with well-dried seal-skins, which i had made impervious to wet. the inside of the boat nearest the water i neatly covered with pieces of dry bark, over which i fixed some boards, which had floated to the island from wrecked ships. finally i put in some benches to sit on, and then fancied i had done everything that was necessary. i soon got her into the fishing-pool, and was delighted to find that she floated capitally--but i still had a great deal to do. i had made neither oars to propel her through the water, nor sail to carry her through the waves, when rowing was impossible. i remembered the whaler's spare oars and mizen, but they were too large; nevertheless, they served me as models to work upon, and in time i made a rough pair of paddles or oars, which, though rudely fashioned, i hoped would answer the purpose pretty well. the next difficulty was how to use the oars, and i made many awkward attempts before i ascertained the proper method of proceeding. again my companion, on whom nothing which had once passed before her eyes had passed in vain, showed me how the boat should be managed. in a short time i could row about the pool with sufficient dexterity to turn the boat in any direction i required, and i then took nero as a passenger, and he seemed to enjoy the new gratification with a praiseworthy decorum; till, when i was trying to turn the boat round, the movement caused him to attempt to shift his quarters, which he did with so little attention to the build of our vessel, that in one moment she was capsized, and in the next we were swimming about in the pool with our vessel bottom upwards. as she was so light, i soon righted her, and found that she had received no injury, and appeared to be perfectly water-tight. chapter thirty six. i could not prevail upon mrs reichardt to embark in my craft, the fate of my first passenger, which she had witnessed from the shore, had deterred her from attempting a voyage under such unpromising circumstances. as soon as i had dried my clothes, i was for making another experiment, and one too of a more hazardous nature. i would not be parted from nero, but i made him lie at the bottom of the boat, where i could have him under strict control. with him i also took my little flock of gannets, who perched themselves round me, gazing about them with an air of such singular stupidity as they were being propelled through the water, that i could not help bursting out laughing. "indeed," said mrs reichardt, "such a boat's crew and such a boat had never been seen in those seas before. a young savage as captain, a tame seal as boatswain, and a flock of gannets as sailors, certainly made up as curious a set of adventurers as ever floated upon the wide ocean." i was not the least remarkable of the strange group, for i had nothing on but a pair of duck trousers, patched in several places; and my hair, which had grown very long, hung in black wavy masses to my shoulders. my skin was tanned by the sun to a light brown, very different from the complexion of mrs reichardt, which had ever been remarkable for its paleness. indeed she told me i should find some difficulty in establishing my claim to the title of european, but none at all to that of little savage, which she often playfully called me. nevertheless, in this trim, and with these companions, i passed out of the fishing-pool into the sea, with the intention of rowing round the island. mrs reichardt waved her hand as i departed on my voyage, having exhorted me to be very careful, as long as i was in hearing; she then turned away, as i thought, to return to the hut. the day was remarkably fine. there was not so much as a cloud on the horizon, and scarcely a ripple on the water: therefore, everything seemed to favour my project, for if there had been anything of a breeze, the beating of the waves against the rock would have been a great obstacle to my pursuing my voyage with either comfort or safety. the water too was so clear, that although it was of great depth, i could distinguish the shells that lay on the sand, and observe various kinds of fish, some of most curious shape, that rushed rapidly beneath the boat as it was urged along. i was delighted with the motion, and with the agreeable appearance of the different novelties that met my gaze. the light boat glided almost imperceptibly through the water at every stroke of the oar. nero lay as still as if his former lesson had taught him the necessity of remaining motionless; and the gannets now and then expressed their satisfaction by a shrill cry or a rapid fluttering of their wings. in this way, we passed on without any adventure, till i found it necessary for me to row some distance out to sea, to round a projecting rock that stood like a mighty wall before me. i pulled accordingly, and then had a better opportunity of seeing the island than i had ever obtained. i recognised all the favourite places--the ravine, the wood, the hut covered with beautiful creepers, and the garden, full of flowers, looked very agreeable to the eye: but every part seemed to look pleasant, except the great savage rocks which inclosed the island on every side: but even these i thought had an air of grandeur that gave additional effect to the scene. much to my surprise, i recognised mrs reichardt walking rapidly towards a part of the shore, near which i should be obliged to pass. from this i saw that she was intent on watching me from point to point, to know the worst, if any accident should befall me, and be at hand should there be a necessity for rendering assistance. i shouted to her, and she waved her hand in reply. on rounding the headland, my astonishment was extreme on finding my little bark in the midst of a shoal of enormous sharks. if i came in contact with one of them, i was lost, for the frail boat would certainly be upset, and as jackson had assured me, if ever i allowed these monsters to come near enough, one snap of their jaws, and there would be an end of the little savage. i thought of the warning of mrs reichardt, and was inclined to think i had better have taken her advice, and remained in the fishing-pool; nevertheless, i went on as quietly and deliberately as possible, exercising all my skill to keep clear of my unexpected enemies. it was not till i had got into the middle of the shoal, that the sharks seemed to be aware there was anything unusual in their neighbourhood; but as soon as they were fully aware of the presence of an intruder, they exhibited the most extraordinary excitement, rushing together in groups, with such rapid motion, that the water became so agitated, i was obliged to exercise all my skill to keep the boat steady on her course. they dived, and rushed to and fro, and jostled each other, as i thought, in anything but an amicable spirit; still, however, keeping at a respectful distance from the boat, for which i was extremely thankful. i urged her on with all my strength, for the purpose of getting away from such unpleasant neighbours; but they were not to be so easily disposed of. they came swimming after the boat, then when within a few yards dived, and in a moment they were before it, as if to bar any further progress. i however pushed on, and they disappeared, but immediately afterwards rose on all sides of me. they were evidently getting more confidence; a fact i ascertained with no slight apprehension, for they began to approach nearer, and their gambols threatened every minute to overwhelm my poor craft, that, light as a cork, bounced up and down the agitated waves, as if quite as much alarmed for our safety as ourselves. the captain was not the only one who began to fear evil; the gannets were very restless, and it was only by strong admonitions i could prevail on nero to retain his recumbent attitude at my feet; their instinct warned them of approaching danger, and i felt the comfortable assurance that my own rashness had brought me into my present critical position, and that if the menaced destruction did arrive, there was no sort of assistance at hand on which i could rely. every moment the sharks became more violent in their demonstrations, and more bold in their approaches, and i could scarcely keep the boat going, or prevent the water rushing over her sides. the gannets having shown themselves for some minutes uneasy, had at last flown away to the neighbouring rock, and nero began to growl and snap, as though meditating a forcible release from his prostrate position, to see what mischief was brewing. as i was coaxing him to be quiet, i felt a tremendous blow given to the boat, evidently from beneath, and she rose into the air several yards, scattering nero and myself, and the oars, in different directions. the noise we made in falling, appeared for the instant to have scattered the creatures, for i had struck out for the rock and nearly reached it before a shark made its appearance. just then i saw a large monster rushing towards me. i thought all was over. he turned to open his great jaws, and in another instant i should have been devoured. at that critical period i saw a second object dart in between me and the shark, and attack the latter fiercely. it was nero, and it was the last i ever saw of my faithful friend. his timely interposition enabled me to reach a ledge in the cliff, where i was in perfect safety, hanging by some strong seaweed, although my feet nearly touched the water, and i could retain my position only with the greatest difficulty. the whole shoal were presently around me. they at first paid their attentions to the boat and the oars, which they buffeted about till they were driven close to the rock, at a little distance from the place where i had found temporary safety. they left these things unharmed as soon as they caught sight of me, and then their eagerness and violence returned with tenfold fury. they darted towards me in a body, and i was obliged to lift my legs, or i should have had them snapped off by one or other of the twenty gaping jaws that were thrust over each other, in their eagerness to make a mouthful of my limbs. this game was carried on for some minutes of horrible anxiety to me. i fancied that my struggles had loosened the seaweed, and that in a few minutes it must give way, and i should then be fought for and torn to pieces by the ravenous crew beneath. i shouted with all the strength of my lungs to scare them away; but as if they were as well aware that i could not escape them as i was myself, they merely left off their violent efforts to reach my projecting legs, and forming a semicircle round me, watched with upturned eyes, that seemed to possess a fiendish expression that fascinated and bewildered me, the snapping of the frail hold that supported me upon the rock. in my despair i prayed heartily, but it was rather to commend my soul to my maker, than with any prospect of being rescued from so imminent and horrible a peril. the eyes of the ravenous monsters below seemed to mock my devotion. i felt the roots of the seaweed giving way: the slightest struggle on my part would, i knew, only hasten my dissolution, and i resigned myself to my fate. in this awful moment i heard a voice calling out my name. it was mrs reichardt on the cliff high above me. i answered with all the eagerness of despair. then there came a heavy splash into the water, and i heard her implore me to endeavour to make for a small shrub that grew in a hollow of the rock, at a very short distance from the tuft of seaweed that had become so serviceable. i looked down. the sharks had all disappeared; i knew, however, that they would shortly return, and lost not a moment in making an effort to better my position in the manner i had been directed. mrs reichardt had thrown a heavy stone into the water among the sharks, the loud splash of which had driven them away. before they again made their appearance, i had caught a firm hold of the twig, and flung myself up into a position of perfect safety. "thank god he's safe!" i heard mrs reichardt exclaim. the sharks did return; but when they found their anticipated prey had escaped, they swam lazily out to sea. "are you much hurt, frank henniker?" she presently cried out to me. "i have not a scratch," i replied. "then thank god for your deliverance," she added. i did thank god, and mrs reichardt joined with me in prayer, and a more fervent thanksgiving than was ours, it is scarcely possible to imagine. chapter thirty seven. i had several times pressed mrs reichardt for the conclusion of her story, but she had always seemed reluctant to resume the subject. it was evidently full of painful incidents, and she shrunk from dwelling upon them. at last, one evening we were sitting together, she working with her needle and i employed upon a net she had taught me how to manufacture, and i again led the conversation to the narrative my companion had left unfinished. she sighed heavily and looked distressed. "it is but natural you should expect this of me, my son," she said; "but you little know the suffering caused by my recalling the melancholy events that i have to detail. however, i have led you to expect the entire relation, and, therefore, i will endeavour to realise your anticipations." i assured her i was ready to wait, whenever it might be agreeable for her to narrate the termination of her interesting history. "it will never be agreeable to me," she replied mournfully; "indeed i would forget it if i could; but that is impossible. the struggle may as well be made now, as at any time. i will therefore commence by informing you, that during our long voyage to the sandwich islands, i found ample opportunity for studying the disposition of my husband. he was much changed since he first left me, but his was still the same grateful nature, full of truth and purity, that had won me towards him when a child. a holy enthusiasm seemed now to exalt him above ordinary humanity. i could scarcely ever get him to talk upon any but religious subjects, and those he treated in so earnest and exalted a manner, that it was impossible to avoid being carried away with his eloquence. "he seemed to feel the greatness of his destination, as though it had raised him to an equality with the adventurous saints, who established the banner of christ among the pagan nations of europe. he was fond of dilating upon the importance of his mission, and of dwelling on the favour that had been vouchsafed him, in causing him to be selected for so high and responsible a duty. "it was evident that he would rather have been sent to associate with the barbarous people whom he expected to make his converts, than have been raised to the richest bishopric in england. and yet, with this exultation, there was a spirit of deep melancholy pervading his countenance, as well as his discourses, that seemed to imply a sense of danger. the nimbus of the saint in his eyes, was associated with the crown of martyrdom. he seemed to look forward to a fatal termination of his ministry, as the most natural and proper conclusion of his labours. "his conversation often filled me with dread. his intimations of danger seemed at first very shocking, but, at last, i got more familiar with these terrible suggestions, and regarded them as the distempered fancies of an over-worked mind. "in this way our long voyage passed, and we arrived at last at our place of destination. when we had disembarked, the scene that presented itself to me was so strange, that i could almost believe i had passed into a new world. the most luxurious vegetation, of a character i had never seen before--the curious buildings--the singular forms of the natives, and their peculiar costume--excited my wonder to an intense degree. "my husband applied himself diligently to learn the language of the people, whilst i as intently studied their habits and customs. we both made rapid progress. "as soon as i could make myself understood, i endeavoured to make friends with the women, particularly with the wives of the great men, and although i was at first the object of more curiosity than regard, i persisted in my endeavours, and succeeded in establishing with many a good understanding. "i found them ignorant of everything that in civilised countries is considered knowledge--their minds being enveloped in the most deplorable darkness--the only semblance of religion in use amongst them being a brutal and absurd idolatry. "i often tried to lead them to the consideration of more humanising truths, for the purpose of preparing the way for the inculcation of the great mysteries of our holy religion; but the greater portion of my hearers were incompetent to understand what i seemed so desirous of teaching, and my making them comprehend the principles of christianity, appeared to be a hopeless task. "yet i continued my pious labours, without allowing my exertions to flag--making myself useful to them and their families in every way i could--attending them when sick--giving them presents when well--and showing them every kindness likely to make a favourable impression on their savage natures. in this way i proceeded doing good, till i found an opportunity of being of service to a young girl, about twelve years of age, who was a younger sister of one of the wives of a great chief. she had sprained her ankle, and was in great pain, when i applied the proper remedies and gave her speedy relief. hooloo, for that was her name, from that moment became warmly attached to me; and finding her of an affectionate and ingenuous disposition, i became extremely desirous of improving upon the good impression i had made. "at the same time my husband sought, by his knowledge of the mechanical arts, and some acquaintance with medicine, to recommend himself to the men. he also met with much difficulty at first, in making his information properly appreciated. he sought to increase their comforts--to introduce agricultural implements of a more useful description, and to lead then generally towards the conveniences and decencies of civilisation. he built himself a house and planted a garden, and cultivated some land, in which he showed the superior advantages of what he knew, to what they practised. they seemed to marvel much, but continued to go on in their own way. "he also went amongst them as a physician, and having acquired considerable knowledge of medicine and simple surgery, he was enabled to work some cures in fevers and spear-wounds, that in course of time made for him so great a reputation, that many of the leading chiefs sent for him, when anything ailed then or their families, and they were so well satisfied with what he did for them, that he began to be looked upon as one who was to be treated with particular respect and honour by all classes of the natives, from the highest to the lowest. "on one occasion the king required his services. he was suffering from a sort of colic, for which the native doctors could give him no relief. my husband administered some medicines, and stayed with his majesty until they had the desired effect, and the result being a complete recovery, seemed so astonishing to all the members of his sandwich majesty's court, that the doctor was required to administer the same medicine to every one, from the queen to the humblest of her attendants, though all were apparently in good health. he managed to satisfy then with a small portion only of the mixture, which he was quite certain could do them no harm: and they professed to be wonderfully the better for it." chapter thirty eight. "his reputation had now grown so great, that whatever he required was readily granted. he first desired to have some children sent him, to learn those things which had enabled him to do so much good, and this having been readily sanctioned, we opened a school for girls and boys, in which we taught the first elements of a civilised education. "finding we made fair progress in this way, we commenced developing our real object,--the inculcation of christian sentiments. this meeting with no opposition, and reichardt having established a powerful influence over the entire community, he next proceeded with the parents, and earnestly strove to induce them to embrace the profession of christianity. "his labours were not entirely unproductive. there began to prevail amongst the islanders, a disposition to hear the wondrous discourses of this stranger, and he was employed, day after day, in explaining to large and attentive audiences, the history of the christian world, and the observances and doctrine of that faith which had been cemented by the blood of the redeemer. the new and startling subjects of his discourse, as well as the impressive character of his eloquence, frequently deeply moved his hearers; and at his revelations they would often burst forth into piercing shouts and loud expressions of amazement. "in truth it was a moving scene. the noble figure of the missionary, with his fine features lighted up with the fire of holy enthusiasm, surrounded by a crowd of dusky savages, armed with spears and war-clubs, and partly clothed with feathers, in their features showing traces of unusual excitement, and every now and then joining in a wild chorus, expressive of their wonder, could not have been witnessed by any christian, without emotion. "but when the ceremony of baptism was first performed before them, their amazement was increased a thousand-fold. the first member of our flock was hooloo, whom i had instructed so far in the principles of our faith, and i had acquired such an influence over her mind, that she readily consented to abandon her idolatrous customs and become a christian. "after a suitable address to the natives, who had assembled in some thousands to witness the spectacle, in which he explained to them the motive and object of baptism, my husband assisted the girl down a sloping green bank which led to a beautiful stream, and walked with her into the water till he was up to his waist, then, after offering up a long and fervent prayer that this first victory over the false worship of the devil might be the forerunner of the entire extirpation of idolatry from the land, he, plunging her into the water, baptised her in the name of the father, the son, and the holy ghost. "all the people were awed to silence while the ceremony proceeded; but when it was over, they burst forth into a loud cry, and came down to meet the new christian and my husband as they came out of the water, and waved over them boughs of trees, and danced and shouted as though in an ecstasy. "we however had not proceeded to this extent without exciting considerable opposition; our disrespect towards their idols had given great offence to those who were identified with the superstitions of the people, and flourished according as these were supported. complaints were made too of our teaching a new religion, in opposition to the gods they and their fathers had worshipped, and a powerful party was got together for the purpose of pursuing us to destruction. "my husband was summoned before a council of the great chiefs, to hear the accusations that had been brought against him: and the old idolaters got up and abused him, and threatened him with the punishment of their monstrous gods, for telling lies to the people, and deceiving them with forged tales and strange customs. "they sought all they could, to move the judges against him, by painting the terrible fate that would befall them if they failed to kill the white stranger, who had insulted their gods; and they predicted hosts of calamities that were to happen, in consequence of their having allowed the teller of lies to work so much mischief against them. "my husband then being called upon for his defence, first declared to the judges the attributes of the deity he worshipped: that he created the vast heavens, the stars, the mountains, the rivers, and the sea; his voice spoke in the thunder, and his eye flashed in the lightning. he then dwelt on his goodness to man, especially to the sandwich islanders, whom he had created for the purpose of enjoying the fine country around them and of beholding the beauty of the heavens where he dwelt. then he referred to the gods they had worshipped, and asked how they were made, and what such senseless things could do for them; commenting on their inability to serve them in any way, or do them any harm; and went on to speak of the benefits he had been able to confer upon them, through the influence of the all-powerful god he worshipped; and asked them if he had ever done them anything but good. lastly, he promised them innumerable benefits, if they would leave their useless gods, and turn to the only god who had the power to serve them. "it is impossible for me to do justice to the animated manner in which he delivered this discourse. it produced great effect upon the majority of his hearers; but there was a powerful minority it still more strongly influenced against him; and they continued to interrupt him with terrible outcries. "most of the leading chiefs were against his suffering any harm. they bore in mind the advantages he had conferred, by his skill in medicine, and superior wisdom in various other things, which the people would lose were he put to death. they also remembered the hope he held out of future benefits, which of course they could not expect, if they offered him any violence. "the result was, that my husband was suffered to go harmless from the meeting, to the great disappointment of his enemies, who could scarcely be kept from laying violent hands upon him. the danger he had escaped, unfortunately, did not render him more prudent. far from it. he believed that he was a chosen instrument of the most high, to win these savages from the depths of idolatry and paganism; and continued, on every occasion that presented itself, to endeavour to win souls to god. "the school increased, several of the parents suffered themselves to be baptised, and there was a regular observance of the lord's day amongst those who belonged to our little flock. even many of the islanders, although they did not become christians, attended our religious services, and spoke well of us. "we brought up the young people to be able to teach their brethren and sisters; and hoped to be able to establish missions in other parts of the island, to which we sometimes made excursions; preaching the inestimable blessings of the gospel to the islanders, and exhorting them to abandon their dark customs and heathen follies. i was not far behind my husband in this good work, and acquired as much influence among the women, as he exercised over the men: indeed we were generally looked upon as holy people, who deserved to be treated with veneration and respect." chapter thirty nine. "things went on in this flourishing way for several years; my husband, deeply impressed with the responsibility of his position, as a chosen servant of god, devoted himself so entirely to the great work he had undertaken, that he often seemed to overlook the claims upon his attention of her he had chosen as his partner in his struggle against the powers of darkness. sometimes i did not see him for several days; and often when we were together he was so abstracted he did not seem aware i was present. whenever i could get him to speak of himself, he would dilate on the unspeakable felicity that he felt in drawing nearer to the end of his work. i affected not to know to what he alluded; but i always felt that he was referring to the impression he entertained of his own speedy dissolution, which he had taken up when he first embraced this mission. "i tried to get rid of my misgivings, by recalling the dangers and difficulties we had triumphantly passed, and referring to the encouraging state of things that existed at the present time; nevertheless, i could not prevent a sinking of the heart whenever i heard him venture upon the subject; and when he was absent from me, i often experienced an agony of anxiety till his return. i saw, however, no real cause of apprehension, and endeavoured to persuade myself none existed; and very probably i should have succeeded, had not my husband so frequently indulged in references to our separation. "alas," she exclaimed, mournfully, "he was better informed than i was of the proximity of that celestial home, for which he had been so long and zealously preparing himself. he, doubtless, had his intimation from on high, that his translation to the realms of bliss was no remote consequence of his undertaking the mission he had accepted; and he had familiarised his mind to it as a daily duty, and by his constant references had sought to prepare me for the catastrophe he knew to be inevitable." here mrs reichardt became so sensibly affected, that it was some time before she could proceed with her narrative. she, however, did so at last; yet i could see by the tears that traced each other down her wan cheeks, how much her soul was moved by the terrible details into which she was obliged to enter. "in the midst of our success," she presently resumed, "when we had established a congregation, had baptised hundreds of men, women, and children; had completed a regular place of worship and an extensive school-house, both of which were fully and regularly attended, some european vessel paid us a short visit, soon after which, that dreadful scourge the small-pox broke out amongst the people. both children and adults were seized and as soon as one died, a dozen were attacked. "soon the greatest alarm pervaded the natives my husband was implored to stop the pestilence, which power they felt convinced he had in his hands. he did all that was possible for him to do, but that unfortunately was very little. his recommendation of remedial measures was rarely attended with the desired results. death was very busy. the people died in scores, and the survivors, excited by the vindictive men who had formerly sought his death for disparaging their gods began not only to fall off rapidly in their regard and reverence for my husband; but murmurs first, and execrations afterwards, and violent menaces subsequently, attended him whenever he appeared. "he preached to them resignation to the divine will; but resignation was not a savage virtue. he was indefatigable in his attentions to the sick; but those of whom he was most careful seemed the speediest to die. the popular feeling against him increased every hour; he appeared, however, to defy his fate--walking unconcernedly amongst crowds of infuriated savages brandishing heavy clubs, and threatening him with the points of their sharp spears; but his eye never blinked, and his cheek never blanched, and he walked on his way inwardly praising god, careless of the evil passions that raged around him. "it was on a sabbath morn--our service had far advanced; we could boast of but a limited congregation, for many had died, some had fled from the pestilence into the interior; others had avoided the place in consequence of the threats of their countrymen. a few children, and two or three women, were all their teacher had to address. "we were engaged in singing a psalm, when a furious crowd, mad with rage, as it seemed, screaming and yelling in the most frightful manner, and brandishing their weapons as though about to attack an enemy, burst into our little chapel, and seized my husband in the midst of his devotions. "i rushed forward to protect him from the numerous weapons that were aimed at his life, but was dragged back by the hair of my head, and with infuriate cries and gestures, that made them look like demons broke loose from hell, they fell upon him with their clubs and spears. "reichardt made no resistance, he merely clasped his hands the more firmly, and looked up to heaven the more devoutly, as he continued the psalm he had commenced before they entered. this did not delay his fate. "they beat out his brains so close to me, that i was covered with his blood; and i believe i should have shared the same fate, had i not fainted with terror at the horrible scene of which i was a forced spectator. "i learned afterwards that some powerful chief interfered, and i was carried away more dead than alive; in which state i long remained. as soon as i became sufficiently strong to be moved, i took advantage of a whaler calling at the island, homeward bound, to beg a passage. the captain heard my lamentable story, took me on board as soon as he could, and showed a seaman's sympathy for my sufferings. "i was to have returned to england with him, but off this place we encountered a terrible storm, in which we were obliged to take to the boats, as the only chance of saving our lives. what became of him i know not, as the two boats parted company soon after leaving the wreck. i trust he managed to reach the land in safety, and is now in his own country, enjoying all the comforts that can make life covetable. "what became of that part of the crew that brought me here in the other boat, led by the fires you had lighted, i am in doubt. but i think on quitting the island, crowded as their boat was, and in the state of its crew, it was scarcely possible for them to have made the distant island for which they steered." chapter forty. mrs reichardt's story made a sensible impression on me. i no longer wondered at the pallor of her countenance, or the air of melancholy that at first seemed so remarkable; she had suffered most severely, and her sufferings were too recent not to have left their effects upon her frame. i thought a good deal about her narrative, and wondered much that men could be got to leave their comfortable homes, and travel thousands and thousands of miles across the fathomless seas, with the hope of converting a nation of treacherous savages, by whom they were sure to be slaughtered at the first outbreak of ill-feeling. i could not but admire the character of reichardt--in all his actions he had exhibited a marked nobility of nature. he would not present himself before the woman who had the strongest claims upon his gratitude, till he had obtained a position and a reputation that should, in his opinion, make him worthy of her; and though he had a presentiment of the fate that would overtake him, he fulfilled his duties as a missionary with a holy enthusiasm that made him regard his approaching martyrdom as the greatest of all earthly distinctions. i felt regret that i had not known such a man. i knew how much i had lost in having missed such an example. my having heard this story, led me into much private communing with myself respecting religion. i could consider myself little better than a savage, like the brutal sandwich islanders; my conduct to jackson had been only in a degree less inhuman than that these idolaters had shown to their teacher when he was in their power. i fancied at the time that i served him right, for his villainous conduct to my father, and brutal conduct to me: but god having punished him for his misdeeds, i felt satisfied i had no business to put him to greater torment as satisfaction for my own private injuries. i fancied god might have been angry with me, and had kept me on the island as a punishment for my offences; and i had some conversation with mrs reichardt on this point. "nothing," she observed, "can excuse your ill-feeling towards jackson; he was a bad man, without a doubt, and he deserved condign punishment for his usage of your parents; but the divine founder of our religion has urged us to return good for evil." "yes," i answered readily, "but i should have suffered as bad as my father and mother, had i not prevented his doing me mischief." "you do not know that you were to suffer," she replied. "jackson, without such terrible punishment as he brought upon himself, might eventually have become contrite, and have restored you to your friends as well as enabled you to obtain your grandfather's property. god frequently performs marvellous things with such humble instruments; for he hath said, `there is more joy in heaven over one sinner that repenteth, than over ninety-nine just men.'" "surely, this is raising the wicked man over the good," i cried. "not at all," she replied. "the repentant is one gained from the ranks of the great enemy--it is as one that was lost and is found again--it is a soul added to the blessed. therefore the joy in heaven is abundant at such a conversion. the just are the natural heirs of heaven--their rights are acknowledged without dispute--their claim is at once recognised and allowed, and they receive their portion of eternal joy as a matter of course, without there being any necessity for exciting those demonstrations of satisfaction which hail the advent of a sinner saved." "i don't think such a villain as jackson would ever go to heaven," i observed. "`judge not, lest ye be judged,'" she answered; "that is a text that cannot be too often impressed upon persons anxious to condemn to eternal torment all those they believe to be worse than themselves. it is great presumption in us poor creatures of clay, to anticipate the proceedings of the infinite wisdom. let us leave the high prerogative of judgment to the almighty power, by whom only it is exercised, and in our opinions of even the worst of our fellow-creatures, let us exercise a comprehensive charity, mingled with a prayer that even at the eleventh hour, they may have turned from the evil of their ways, and embraced the prospect of salvation, which the mercy of their creator has held out to them." in this and similar conversations, mrs reichardt would endeavour to plant in my mind the soundest views of religion; and she spoke so well, and so convincingly, that i had little trouble in understanding her meaning, or in retaining it after it had been uttered. it was not, as i have before stated, to religion only that she led my thoughts, although that certainly was the most frequent subject of our conversation. she sought to instruct me in the various branches of knowledge into which she had acquired some insight, and in this way i picked up as much information respecting grammar, geography, astronomy, writing, arithmetic, history, and morals, as i should have gained had i been at a school, instead of being forced to remain on a desolate island. i need not say that i still desired to leave it. i had long been tired of the place, notwithstanding that, from our united exertions, we enjoyed many comforts which we could not have hoped for. our hut we had metamorphosed into something mrs reichardt styled a rustic cottage, which, covered as it was with flowers and creepers, really looked very pretty; and the garden added greatly to its pleasant appearance: for near the house we had transplanted everything that bore a flower that could be found in the island, and had planted some shrubs, that, having been carefully nurtured, made rapid growth, and screened the hut from the wind. i had built a sort of outhouse for storing potatoes and firewood, and a fowl-house for the gannets, which were now a numerous flock; and had planted a fence round the garden, so that, as mrs reichardt said, we looked as if we had selected a dwelling in our own beloved england, in the heart of a rural district, instead of our being circumscribed in a little island thousands of miles across the wide seas, from the home of which we were so fond of talking. although my companion always spoke warmly of the land of her birth, and evidently would have been glad to return to it, she never grieved over her hard fate in being, as it were, a prisoner on a rock, out of reach of friends and kindred; indeed, she used to chide me for being impatient of my detention, and insensible of the blessings i enjoyed. "what temptations are we not free from here?" she would say. "we see nothing of the world; we cannot be contaminated with its vices, or suffer from its follies. the hideous wars--the terrible revolutions-- the dreadful visitations of famine and pestilence--are completely unknown to us. robbery, and murder, and fraud, and the thousand other phases of human wickedness, we altogether escape. there was a time, when men, for the purpose of leading holy lives, abandoned the fair cities in which they had lived in the enjoyment of every luxury, and sought a cave in some distant desert, where, in the lair of some wild beast, with a stone for a pillow, a handful of herbs for a meal, and a cup of water for beverage, they lived out the remnant of their days in a constant succession of mortifications, prayers, and penitence. "how different," she added, "is our own state. we are as far removed from the sinfulness of the world, as any hermit of the desert, whilst we have the enjoyment of comforts to which they were strangers." "but probably," i observed, "these men were penitents, and went into the desert as much to punish their bodies for the transgressions of the flesh, as to acquire by solitary communion, a better knowledge of the spirit than they were likely to obtain in their old haunts." "some were penitents, no doubt," she answered, "but they, having obtained by their sanctity an extraordinary reputation, induced others, whose lives had been blameless, to follow their example, and in time the desert became colonised with recluses, who rivalled each other in the intensity of their devotions and the extent of their privations." "would it not have been more commendable," i asked, "if these men had remained in the community to which they belonged, withstanding temptation, and employed in labour that was creditable to themselves, and useful to their country?" "no doubt it would,"--she replied; "but religion has unfortunately, too often been the result of impulse rather than conviction; and at the period to which we are referring, it was thought that sinful human nature could only gain the attributes of saintship by neglecting its social duties, and punishing its humanity in the severest manner. even in more recent times, and at the present day, in catholic countries, it is customary for individuals of both sexes, to abandon the world of which they might render themselves ornaments, and shut themselves up in buildings constructed expressly to receive them, where they continue to go through a course of devotions and privations till death puts an end to their voluntary imprisonment. "in this modified instance of seclusion," she added, "there are features very different from our own case. we are not forced to impoverish our blood with insufficient diet, or mortify our flesh with various forms of punishment. we do not neglect the worship of god. we offer up daily thanks for his loving care of us, and sing his praises in continual hymns; and instead of wasting the hours of the day in unmeaning penances, we fill up our time in employments that add to our health, comfort, and happiness; and that enable us the better to appreciate the goodness of that power who is so mindful of our welfare." "have you no wish, then, to leave this island?" i inquired. "i should gladly avail myself of the first opportunity that presented itself, for getting safely to england," she replied. "but i would wait patiently the proper time. it is not only useless repining at our prolonged stay here, but it looks like an ungrateful doubting of the power of god to remove us. be assured that he has not preserved us so long, and through so many dangers, to abandon us when we most require his interposition in our favour." i endeavoured to gather consolation from such representations: but perhaps young people are not so easily reconciled to what they do not like, as are their elders; for i cannot say i succeeded in becoming satisfied with my position. chapter forty one. the perils of my first voyage had deterred me from making a similar experiment; but i recovered my boat, and having further strengthened it, fitted it with what could either be turned into a well or locker: i used to row out a little distance when the sea was free from sharks and fish. but my grand effort in this direction, was the completion of a net, which, assisted by mrs reichardt, i managed to manufacture. by this time, she had gained sufficient confidence to accompany me in my fishing excursions; she would even take the oars whilst i threw out the net, and assisted me in dragging it into the boat. the first time we got such a haul, that i was afraid of the safety of our little craft. the locker was full, and numbers of great fish, as i flung them out of the net, were flapping and leaping about the bottom of the boat. it began to sink lower in the water than was agreeable to either of us, and i found it absolutely necessary to throw back into the sea the greater portion of our catch. we then rowed carefully to land, rejoicing that we had at our command the means of obtaining an abundant supply of food whenever we desired it. mrs reichardt was with me also in our land excursions. together we had explored every part of the island; our chief object was plants for enriching our garden; and, often as we had been in search of novelties, we invariably brought home additions to our collection; and my companion having acquired some knowledge of botany, would explain to me the names, characters, and qualities of the different species; which made our journeys peculiarly interesting. our appearance often caused considerable amusement to each other; for our respective costumes must have been extremely curious in the eyes of a stranger. neither wore shoes or stockings--these things we did not possess, and could not procure; we wore leggings and sandals of seal-skin to protect us from the thorns and plants of the cacti tribe, among which we were obliged to force our way. my companion wore a conical cap of seal-skin, and protected her complexion from the sun by a rude attempt at an umbrella i had made for her. she had on, on these occasions, a pair of coarse cloth trousers, as her own dress would have been torn to pieces before she had got half a mile through the bush; these were surmounted by a tight spencer she had herself manufactured out of a man's waistcoat, and a dimity petticoat, which buttoned up to her throat, and was fastened in the same way at the wrists. my head was covered with a broad-brimmed hat, made of dry grass, which i had myself plaited. i wore a sailor's jacket, much the worse for wear, patched with seal-skin, over a pair of duck trousers, similarly repaired. although our expeditions were perfectly harmless, we did not go without weapons. at the instigation of my companion, i had made myself a good stout bow and plenty of arrows, and had exercised myself so frequently at aiming at a mark, as to have acquired very considerable skill in the use of them. i had now several arrows of hard wood tipped with sharp fish-bones, and some with iron nails, in a kind of pouch behind me; in its sheath before me was my american knife, which i used for taking the plants from the ground. i had a basket made of the long grass of the island, slung around me, which served to contain our treasures; and i carried my bow in my hand. my companion, in addition to her umbrella, bore only a long staff, and a small basket tied round her waist, that usually contained a little refreshment; for she would say there was no knowing what might occur to delay our return, and therefore it was better to take our meal with us. and not the least agreeable portion of the day's labour was our repast; for we would seat ourselves in some quiet corner, surrounded by flowers, and shaded by the brushwood from the sun, and there eat our dried fish or pick our birds, and roast our potatoes by means of a fire of dried sticks, and wash down our simple dinner with a flask of pure water--the most refreshing portion of our banquet. i had, as i have just stated, attained a singular degree of skill in the use of the bow and arrow, which, as we had no firearms, was often of important service in procuring food on land. i had made another use of my skill--an application of it which afforded me a vast deal of satisfaction. my old enemies the sharks used still to frequent a certain portion of the coast, in great numbers, and as soon as i became master of my weapon, i would stand as near to the edge of the rock as was safe, and singling out my victim, aim at his upper fin, which i often found had the effect of ridding the place of that fellow. i bore such an intense hatred to these creatures for the fright they had put me into during my memorable voyage of discovery, and for the slaughter of my beloved nero, that i determined to wage incessant war against them, as long as i could manufacture an arrow, or a single shark remained on the coast. as we had so often traversed the island without accident, we dreamt not of danger. we had never met with any kind of animals, except our old friends the seals, who kept near the sea. of birds, the gannets were generally the sole frequenters of the island; but we had seen, at rare intervals, birds of a totally different character, some of which i had shot. indeed, during our excursions, i was always on the look-out for any stranger of the feathered race, that i might exercise my skill upon him. if he proved eatable, he was sure to be very welcome; and even if he could not be cooked, he afforded me some entertainment, in hearing from mrs reichardt his name and habits. we had discovered a natural hollow which lay so low that it was quite hid till we came close to it, when we had to descend a steep declivity covered with shrubs. at the bottom was a soil evidently very productive, for we found trees growing there to a considerable height, that were in marked contrast to the shrubby plants that grew in other parts of the island. we called this spot the happy valley, and it became a favourite resting-place. i remember on one of these occasions, we had made our dinner after having been several hours employed in seeking for plants, of which we had procured a good supply, and the remains of our meal lay under a great tree, beneath the spreading branches of which we had been resting ourselves. it was quite on the other side of the island, within about a quarter of a mile of the sea. abundance of curious plants grew about the place, and mrs reichardt had wandered to a little distance to examine all within view. i was peering into the trees and shrubs around to discover a newcomer. i had wandered in an opposite direction to that taken by my companion, and was creeping round a clump of shrubs about twenty yards off, in which i detected a chirping noise, when i heard a loud scream. i turned sharply round and beheld mrs reichardt, evidently in an agony of terror, running towards me with prodigious swiftness. she had dropped her umbrella and her staff, her cap had fallen from her head, and her long hair, disarranged by her sudden flight, streamed behind her shoulders. at first i did not see anything which could have caused this terrible alarm; but in a few seconds i heard a crushing among a thicket of shrubs from which she was running, as if some heavy weight was being forced through them; and presently there issued a most extraordinary monster. it came forward at a quick pace, its head erect above ten feet, its jaws wide open, from the midst of which there issued a forked tongue which darted in and out with inconceivable rapidity. its body was very long, and thick as an ordinary tree; it was covered over with bright shining scales that seemed to have different colours, and was propelled along the ground in folds of various sizes, with a length of tail of several yards behind. its eyes were very bright and fierce. its appearance certainly accounted for my companion's alarm. "fly!" she cried in accents of intense terror, as she rushed towards me, "fly, or you are lost!" she then gave a hurried glance behind her, and seeing the formidable monster in full chase, she just had power to reach the spot to which i had advanced, and sunk, overpowered with terror, fainting at my feet. my first movement was to step across her body for the purpose of disputing the passage of the monster; and in an erect posture, with my bow drawn tight as i could pull it, i waited a few seconds till i could secure a good aim, for i knew everything depended on my steadiness and resolution. on came my prodigious antagonist, making a terrible hissing as he approached, his eyes flashing, his jaws expanded as if he intended to swallow me at a mouthful, and the enormous folds of his huge body passing like wheels over the ground,--crushing the thick plants that came in their way like grass. i must acknowledge that in my heart i felt a strange sinking sensation, but i remembered that our only chance of escape lay in giving the monster a mortal wound, and the imminence of the danger seemed to afford me the resolution i required. he was close behind, and in a direct line with the tree under which we had dined, and i was about twenty yards from it. directly his head darted round and in front of the tree, making a good mark, i let fly the arrow direct, as i thought, for his eye, hoping, by penetrating his brain, to settle him at once. but as he moved his head at that moment, the arrow went into his open jaws, one of which it penetrated, and going deep into the tree behind, pinned his head close to the bark. as soon as the huge creature found himself hurt, he wound his enormous body round the trunk, and with his desperate exertions, swayed the great tree backwards and forwards, as i would have done one of its smallest branches. fearful that he would liberate himself before i could save my senseless companion, as quick as possible i discharged all my arrows into his body, which took effect in various places. his exertions then became so terrible, that i hastily snatched up mrs reichardt in my arms, and with a fright that seemed to give me supernatural strength, i ran as fast as i could the shortest way to our hut. fortunately, before i had gone half a mile, my companion came to her senses, and was able to continue her flight. we got home at last, half dead with fatigue and fright; nevertheless the first thing we did was to barricade all the entrances. we left loop-holes to reconnoitre; and there we sat for hours after our arrival, waiting the monster's approach in fear and trembling. we did not go to sleep that night. we did not, either of us, go out the next day. the next night one watched while the other slept. the second day my courage had so far returned, i wanted to go and look after the constant subject of our conversation. but mrs reichardt dissuaded me. she told me it was an enormous python, or serpent of the boa species, that are common in the northern coast of america. probably it had been brought to the island on a drifted tree, and being so prodigious a reptile, the wounds it had received were not likely to do it much harm, and it would be no doubt lurking about, ready to pounce upon either of us directly we appeared. on the third day, nothing having occurred to increase our alarm, i determined to know the worst; so i got by stealth out of the house, and, armed with a fresh bow, a good supply of arrows, a hatchet slung at my side, and my american knife--with my mind made up for another conflict if necessary--i crept stealthily along, with my eyes awake to the slightest motion, and my ears open to the slightest sound, till i approached the scene of my late unequal struggle. i must own i began to draw my breath rather rapidly, and my heart beat more quickly, as i came near the place where i had left my terrible enemy. to my extreme surprise the python had disappeared. there was the tree still standing, though its foliage and branches strewed the ground, and a great portion of its bark was ground to powder. at the base of the trunk was a pool of blood, mingled with fragments of bark, broken arrows, leaves, and mould. the reptile had escaped. but where was he? not altogether without anxiety i began to look for traces of his retreat; and they were easily found. with my arrow ready for immediate flight, i followed a stream of blood that was still visible on the grass, and led from the tree, accompanied by unmistakeable marks of the great serpent's progress, in a direct line to the sea. there it disappeared. when i discovered this, i breathed again. there was no doubt if the monster survived the conflict, he was hundreds of miles away, and was not likely to return to a place where he had received so rough a welcome. it may readily be believed i lost no time in taking the agreeable news to my companion. chapter forty two. i had become tired of looking out for a ship. though day after day, and week after week, i made the most careful scrutiny with my glass, as i have said, it brought no result. i sometimes fancied i saw a vessel appearing in the line of the horizon, and i would pile up fagots and light them, and throw on water to make them smoke, as jackson had done; but all without avail. either my vision had deceived me, or my signals had not been observed, or the ship's course did not lay in the direction of the island. we had had storms, too, on several occasions, but no wreck had been left on our coast. i began to think we were doomed to live out our lives on this rock, and frequently found myself striving very manfully to be resigned to my fate, and for a few days i would cheerfully endeavour to make the best of it. but the increasing desire i felt to get to england, that i might seek out my grandfather, and put him in possession of his diamonds, always prevented this state of things enduring very long. i had obtained from mrs reichardt an idea of the value of these stones, and of the importance of their restoration to my relative, and i had often thought of the satisfaction i should enjoy in presenting myself before him, as the restorer of such valuable property, which, no doubt, had long since been given up as lost. but latterly, i thought less of these things; the chance of leaving the island seemed so remote, and the prospect of ever seeing my grandfather so very distant, that i had ceased to take any interest in the contents of the belt. the diamonds seemed to become as valueless as they were useless; a handful of wheat would have been much more desirable. it was now some time since i had seen the belt, or inquired about it. thus we lived without any incident occurring worth relating--when one day the appearance of the atmosphere indicated a storm, and a very violent hurricane, attended with peals of thunder and lurid flashes of lightning, lasted during the whole of the day and evening. the wind tore up the trees by the roots, blew down our outhouses, made terrible havoc in our garden, and threatened to tumble our hut over our heads. we could not think of going to our beds whilst such a tempest was raging around us, so we sat up, listening to the creaking of the boards, and anticipating every moment that the whole fabric would be blown to pieces. fortunately, the bark with which i had covered the roof, in a great measure protected us from the rain, which came down in torrents; but every part was not equally impervious, and our discomfort was increased by seeing the water drip through, and form pools on the floor. the thunder still continued at intervals, and was sometimes so loud as to have a most startling effect upon us. my companion knelt down and said her prayers with great fervour, and i joined in them with scarcely less devotion. indeed it was an awful night, and our position, though under shelter, was not without danger. the incessant flashes of lightning seemed to play round our edifice, as if determined to set it in a blaze; and the dreadful peals of thunder that followed, rolled over our heads, as if about to burst upon the creaking boards that shut us from its fury. i fancied once or twice that i heard during the storm, bursts of sound quite different in character from the peals of thunder. they were not so loud, and did not reverberate so much; they seemed to come nearer, and then the difference in sound became very perceptible. "great god!" exclaimed mrs reichardt, starting up from her kneeling posture, "that is a gun from some ship." the wind seemed less boisterous for a few seconds, and the thunder ceased. we listened breathlessly for the loud boom we had just heard, but it was not repeated. in a moment afterwards our ears were startled by the most terrifying combination of screams, shrieks, cries, and wailings, i had ever heard. my blood seemed chilled in my veins. "a ship has just struck," whispered my companion, scarcely above her breath. "the lord have mercy on the crew!" she sunk on her knees again in prayer, as if for the poor souls who were struggling in the jaws of death. the wind still howled, and the thunder still roared; but in the fiercest war of the elements, i fancied i could every now and then hear the piercing shrieks sent up to heaven for assistance. i thought once or twice of venturing out, but i remembered the safety of my companion was so completely bound up with my own, that i could not reconcile myself to leaving her; and i was also well aware, that till the terrible fury of the tempest abated, it was impossible for me to be of the slightest service to the people of the wrecked ship, even could i remain unharmed exposed to the violence of the weather. i, however, awaited with much impatience and intense anxiety till the storm had in some measure spent itself; but this did not occur till sunrise the next morning. the wind fell, the thunder and lightning ceased, the rain was evidently diminishing, and the brightness of the coming day began to burst through the darkest night that had ever visited the island. mrs reichardt would not be left behind; it was possible she might be useful, and taking with her a small basket of such things as she imagined might be required, she accompanied me to the rocks nearest the sea. on arriving there, the most extraordinary scene presented itself. the sea was strewed with spars, masts, chests, boats stove in or otherwise injured, casks, empty hencoops, and innumerable pieces of floating wreck, that were continually dashed against the rocks, or were washed ashore, wherever an opening for the sea presented itself. at a little distance lay the remains of a fine ship, her masts gone by the board, her decks open, in fact a complete wreck, over which the sea had but lately been making a clean sweep, carrying overboard everything that could not resist its fury. i could see nothing resembling a human being, though both myself and my companion looked carefully round, in the hope of discovering some poor creature that might need assistance. it appeared, however, as if the people of the ship had taken to their boats, which had been swamped, and most probably all who had ventured into them had been devoured by the sharks. had the crew remained on board, they would in all probability have been saved; as the vessel had been thrown almost high and dry. as soon as we had satisfied ourselves that no sharks were in the neighbourhood, i launched my little boat, and each taking an oar, we pulled in the direction of the wreck, which we reached in a few minutes. she had heeled over after striking, and the water was quite smooth under her lee. i contrived to climb into the main chains, and from thence on board, and was soon afterwards diligently exploring the ship. i penetrated every place into which i could effect an entrance, marvelling much at the variety of things. i beheld. there seemed such an abundance of everything, and of things, too, quite new to me, that i was bewildered by their novelty and variety. having discovered a coil of new rope, i hauled it on deck, and soon made fast my little boat to the ship. then i made a hasty rope ladder, which i threw over, and mrs reichardt was in a very few minutes standing by my side. her knowledge was necessary to inform me of the uses of the several strange things i saw, and to select for our own use what was most desirable. she being well acquainted with the interior of a ship, and having explained to me its numerous conveniences, i could not but admire the ingenuity of man, in creating such stupendous machines. the ship having much water in the hold, i was forced to dive into the armoury. it was the first time i had seen such things, and i handled the muskets and pistols with a vast deal of curiosity; as my companion explained to me how they were loaded and fired, i at once saw their advantage over the bow and arrow, and was selecting two or three to carry away, when i hesitated on being assured they would be perfectly useless without ammunition. i might have remained content with my own savage weapons, that had already served me so well, had not mrs reichardt, in the course of our survey, discovered several tin canisters of powder perfectly uninjured, with abundance of shot and bullets, of which i quickly took possession. from other parts of the vessel we selected bags of grain, barrels of flour, and provisions of various kinds; wearing apparel, boxes of tools, with numerous bottles and jars, of the contents of which i was perfectly unacquainted, though their discovery gave great gratification to my companion. what most excited my wonder, were various kinds of agricultural implements that we found in the hold, and in a short time i was made aware of the proper employment of spades, harrows, ploughs, thrashing-machines, and many other things, of the existence of which i had never before dreamt. we found also quantities of various kinds of seeds and roots, and some sort of twigs growing in pots, which mrs reichardt particularly begged me not to leave behind, as they would be of the greatest use to us; and, she added, that from various signs, she believed that the ship had been an emigrant vessel going out with settlers, but to what place she could not say. we made no ceremony in breaking open lockers and chests, and everywhere discovered a variety of things, which, could we transfer to our island, would add greatly to our comfort; but how they were to be got ashore, was a puzzle which neither of us seemed capable of solving. our little boat would only contain a few of the lighter articles; and as many of these as we could conveniently put together were shortly stowed in her. with this cargo we were about returning, when my companion called my attention to a noise that seemed to come from a distant corner of the vessel, and she laughed and exhibited so much satisfaction, that i believed we were close upon some discovery far more important than any we had yet hit upon. we continued to make our way to what seemed to me a very out of the way part of the vessel, led in a great measure by the noises that proceeded from thence. it was so dark here, that we were obliged to get a light, and my companion having procured a ship's lantern, and lighted it by means of a tinder-box, led me to a place where i could discern several animals, most of which were evidently dead. she, however, ascertained that there were two young calves, three or four sheep, and as many young pigs, still giving very noisy evidence of their existence. she searched about and found some food for them, which they ate with great avidity. the larger animals she told me were cows and horses; but they had fallen down, and gave no signs of life. my companion and myself then entered into a long debate as to how we were to remove the living animals from the dead; and she dwelt very eloquently upon the great advantages that would accrue to us, if we could succeed in transporting to the island the survivors. after giving them a good feed, seeing we could not remove them at present, we descended safely to our boat and gained the shore without any accident. then having housed our treasures, we were for putting together a raft of the various planks and barrels that were knocking against the rocks; but as i knew this would take a good deal of time, i thought i would inspect the ship's boats, which, bottom upwards, were drifting about within a few yards of us. to our great satisfaction, one i ascertained to be but little injured, and having forced her ashore, with our united exertions we turned her over. in an hour we had made her water-tight, had picked up her oars, and were pulling merrily for the wreck. chapter forty three. had the cows or horses been alive, they must have been left behind, for we could not have removed them; but the smaller animals were with comparatively little difficulty got on deck, and they descended with me into the boat. we added a few things that lay handy, and in a few minutes were laughingly driving our four-footed treasures on shore, to the extreme astonishment of the gannets, which seemed as though they would never cease to flap their wings, as their new associates were driven by them. in the same way we removed the most portable of the agricultural implements, bed and bedding, cots and hammocks, furniture, the framework of a house, preserved provisions of all kinds, a medicine-chest, boxes of books, crates of china and glass, all sorts of useful tools, and domestic utensils; in short, in the course of the next two or three weeks, by repeated journeys, we filled every available place we could find with what we had managed to rescue. then came another terrible storm that lasted two days, after which the wreck having been broken up, was scattered in every direction. i however managed to secure the driftwood, tubs, spars, and chests, which were all got on shore, and proved of the greatest service to me some time afterwards. numerous as our acquisitions had been in this way, both of us had been infinitely better pleased had we been able to rescue some of the ill-fated crew, to whom they had once belonged. but not one of them could have escaped, and only one body was cast on shore, which was that of a young woman, who lay with her face to the ground, and her wet clothes clinging round her. we turned her carefully over, and i beheld a face that seemed to me wonderfully fair and beautiful. she had escaped the sharks, and had been dead several hours--most probably she had been cast on shore by the waves, soon after the ship struck, for she had escaped also the rocks, which, had she been dashed against, would have left fearful signs of their contact on her delicate frame. the sight of her corpse gave me many melancholy thoughts. i thought of the delight she might have caused both of us, had she been saved. what a pleasant companion she might have proved. indeed, as i looked on her pale cold features, i fancied that she might have reconciled me to ending my existence on the island--ay, even to the abandonment of my favourite scheme of seeking my grandfather to give him back his diamonds. we took her up with as much pity and affection as if she were our nearest and dearest relative, and carried her home, and placed her on mrs reichardt's bed; and then i laid some planks together, in the shape of what mrs reichardt called a coffin--and i dug her a deep grave in the guano. and all the while i found myself crying as i had never cried before, and my heart seemed weary and faint. in solemn silence we carried her to her grave, and read over her the funeral service out of the prayer-book, kneeling and praying for this nameless creature, whom we had never seen alive, as though she had been our companion for many years; both of us shedding tears, for her hapless fate, as if we had lost a beloved sister. and when we had filled up her grave and departed, we went home, and passed the most miserable day we had ever had to endure since we had first been cast upon the island. i had now numerous occupations that kept me actively employed. still i could not for a long time help recalling to mind that pale face that looked so piteously upon me when i first beheld it; and then i would leave off my work, and give myself up to my melancholy thoughts till my attention was called off by some appeal from my companion. i made a kind of monument over the place where she was buried, and planted there the finest flowers we had; and i never passed the spot without a prayer, as if i were approaching holy ground. i must not forget to add, that a few days after the wreck, we were agreeably surprised by visitors that, though unexpected, were extremely welcome. i had noticed strange birds wandering about in various parts of the island. on their coming under the notice of my companion, they were immediately recognised as fowls and ducks, that had no doubt escaped from the ship. we might now, therefore, constitute ourselves a little colony, of which mrs reichardt and myself were the immediate governors, the settlers being a mingled community of calves, sheep, pigs, and poultry, that lived on excellent terms with each other; the quadrupeds having permission to roam where they pleased, and the bipeds being kept within a certain distance of the government house. the old hut had suffered so much from the storm that i determined on building another in a better position, and had recourse to the framework of the house i had taken from the wreck. i had some difficulty in putting the several parts together, but at last succeeded, and a small, but most commodious dwelling was the result. near it i laid out a new garden, wherein i planted all the orange-trees we had reared, as well as many of the seeds and roots we had brought from the wreck. a little beyond i inclosed a paddock, wherein i planted the twigs we had found in pots, which proved to be fruit-trees. when i had done this, i thought of my agricultural implements, and very much desired to make use of a handy plough that was amongst them, when i learned the advantages that might arise from it. at first i yoked myself to the plough, and mrs reichardt held it: this proved such hard and awkward work, that i kept projecting all sorts of plans for lessening the labour--the best was that of yoking our calves, and making them pull instead of myself. this was more easily thought of than done. the animals did not prove very apt pupils, but in course of time, with a good deal of patience, and some manoeuvring, i succeeded in making them perform the work they were expected to do. thus, in building, gardening, planting, and farming, the time flew by quickly, and in the course of the next year the aspect of the place had become quite changed. the guano that enriched the soil made every kind of vegetation thrive with an almost marvellous rapidity and luxuriance. we had a comfortable house, up which a vine was creeping in one place, and a young pear-tree in another. we were supplied with the choicest oranges, and had apples of several kinds. we had abundance of furniture, and an inexhaustible stock of provisions. we had a most gorgeous show of flowers, of many different species; our new kitchen-garden was full of useful vegetables--young fruit-trees were yielding their produce wherever they had been planted--the poultry had more than doubled their number--the calves were taking upon themselves the full dignity of the state of cow and bull--the ewes had numerous lambs--and the pigs had not only grown into excellent pork, but had already produced more than one litter, that would be found equally desirable when provisions ran scarce. we had two growing crops, of different kinds of grain, and a large pasture-field fenced round. the little savage, at seventeen, had been transformed into a farmer, and the cultivation of the farm and the care of the live stock soon left him no time for indulging in vain longings to leave the island, or useless regrets for the fair creature who, even in death, i had regarded as its greatest ornament. two years later, still greater improvements, and still greater additions became visible. we were establishing a dairy farm on a small scale, and as our herds and flocks, as well as the pigs and poultry, increased rapidly, we promised in a few years to be the most thriving farmers that had ever lived in that part of the world by the cultivation of the land. chapter forty four. although my first experimental voyage had proved so hazardous, now that i was better provided for meeting its perils, i became anxious to make another attempt to circumnavigate the island. the boat that had belonged to the wrecked ship, from the frequent trips i had made in her to and from the shore, i could manage as well as if i had been rowing boats all my life. with the assistance of mrs reichardt, who pulled an oar almost as well as myself, we could get her along in very good style, even when heavily laden, and our labours together had taken from her all that timidity which had deterred her from trusting herself with me, when i first ventured from the island. i was, however, very differently circumstanced now, to what i was then. instead of a frail cockle-shell, that threatened to be capsized by every billow that approached it, and that would scarcely hold two persons comfortably, i was master of a well-built ship's boat, that would hold half a dozen with ease, and except in very rough weather, was as safe as any place ashore. i had repaired the slight damage its timbers had received, and had made an awning to protect us when rowing, from the heat of the sun; i had also raised a sail, which would relieve us of a good deal of labour. when everything was prepared, i urged mrs reichardt to accompany me in a voyage round the island; an excursion i hoped would turn out equally pleasant and profitable. i found her very averse to trusting herself farther from shore than was absolutely necessary. she raised all kinds of objections--prominent among which were my want of seamanship for managing a boat in the open sea; the danger that might arise from a sudden squall coming on; her fear of our getting amongst a shoal of sharks, and the risk we ran of driving against a projecting rock; but i overruled them all. i showed her, by taking little trips out to sea, that i could manage the boat either with the sail or the oars, and assured her that by keeping close to the island, we could run ashore before danger could reach us; and that nothing could be easier than our keeping out of the reach of both rocks and sharks. i do not think i quite convinced her that her fears were groundless; but my repeated entreaties, the fineness of the weather, and her dislike to be again left on the island, whilst i was risking my life at sea, prevailed, and she promised to join me in this second experiment. her forethought, however, was here as fully demonstrated as on other occasions, for she did not suffer the boat to leave the shore till she had provided for any accident that might prevent our return the anticipated time. a finer day for such a voyage we could not have selected. the sky was without a cloud, and there was just wind enough for the purpose i wanted, without any apprehensions of this being increased. i got up the awning, and spread the sail, and handing mrs reichardt to her appointed seat, we bid farewell to our four-footed and two-footed friends ashore, that were gazing at us as if they knew they were parting from their only protectors. i then pushed the boat off, the wind caught the sail, and she glided rapidly through the deep water. i let her proceed in this way about a quarter of mile from the island, and then tacked; the boat, obedient to the position of the sail, altered her course, and we proceeded at about the same rate, for a considerable distance. mrs reichardt, notwithstanding her previous fears, could not help feeling the exhilarating effect of this adventurous voyage. we were floating, safely and gracefully, upon the billows, with nothing but sea and sky in every direction but one, where the rugged shores of our island home gave a bold, yet menacing feature to the view. my heart seemed to expand with the majestic prospect before me. never had mariner, when discovering some prodigious continent, felt a greater degree of exultation than i experienced when directing my little vessel over the immense wilderness of waters that spread out before me, till it joined the line of the horizon. i sat down by the side of mrs reichardt, and allowed the boat to proceed on its course, either as if it required no directing hand, or that its present direction was so agreeable, i felt no inclination to alter it. "i can easily imagine," said i, "the enthusiasm of such men as columbus, whose discovery of america you were relating to me the other day. the vocation of these early navigators was a glorious one, and, when they had tracked their way over so many thousand miles of pathless water, and found themselves in strange seas, expecting the appearance of land, hitherto unknown to the civilised world, they must have felt the importance of their mission as discoverers." "no doubt, frank," she replied; "and probably, it was this that supported the great man you have just named, in the severe trials he was obliged to endure, on the very eve of the discovery that was to render his name famous to all generations. he had endured intolerable hardships, the ship had been so long without sight of land, that no one thought it worth while to look out for it, and he expected that his crew would mutiny, and insist on returning. at this critical period of his existence, first one indication of land, and then another, made itself manifest; the curiosity of the disheartened sailors became excited; hope revived in the breast of their immortal captain; a man was now induced to ascend the main-top, and his joyful cry of land woke up the slumbering spirit of the crew. in this way, a new world was first presented to the attention of the inhabitants of the old." "it appears to me very unjust," i observed, "that so important a discovery should have become known to us, not by the name of its original discoverer, but by that of a subsequent visitor to its shores." "undoubtedly," said mrs reichardt, "it is apparently unfair that americus vespucius should obtain an honour which christopher columbus alone had deserved. but of the fame which is the natural right of him whose courage and enterprise procured this unrivalled acquisition, no one can deprive him. his gigantic discovery may always be known as america, but the world acknowledges its obligation to columbus, and knows little beyond the name of his rival." "were the immediate results of so large an addition to geographical knowledge, as beneficial to the entire human race as they ought to have been?" "i do not think they were. the vast continent then thrown open to the advance of civilisation, may be divided into two portions,--the south and the north. the former was inhabited by a harmless effeminate race, who enjoyed many of the refinements of civilisation; their knowledge of the arts, for instance, as shown to us in the ruins of their cities, was considerable; they possessed extensive buildings in a bold and ornate style of architecture; they made a lavish use of the precious metals, of which the land was extremely rich, and they wore dresses which showed a certain perfection in the manufacture of textile fabrics, and no slight degree of taste and art in their formation. "the spaniards, who were led to this part of the continent by a desire to enrich themselves with the gold which the earliest discoverers had found in the new country in considerable quantities, invaded the territories of this peaceful people, and, by their superior knowledge of warlike weapons, and the ignorance of the intentions of their invaders that prevailed amongst the natives of all ranks, by a series of massacres, they were enabled, though comparatively but a small force, to obtain possession of the vast empire that had been established there from time immemorial, and turn it into a spanish colony. "the blood of this harmless race flowed like water; their great incas or emperors were deposed and murdered, their splendid temples plundered of their riches, their nobles and priests tortured to make them change their faith, and the great mass of the people became slaves to their more warlike conquerors. it was in this way the gold of mexico and peru enriched the treasury of spain; but every ingot had the curse of blood upon it, and from that time the spanish power, then at its height, began to decline in europe, till it sunk in the scale of nations among the least important. the colonies revolted from the mother country, and became independent states; but the curse that followed the infamous appropriation of the country, seems to cling to the descendants of the first criminals, and neither government nor people prospers; and it is evident that all these independent states must in time be absorbed by a great republic, that has sprung up by peaceable means, as it were at their side, whilst they were content to be colonies." "to what republic do you allude?" "you may remember that i told you that the entire continent was divided into south and north." "exactly." "the history of the southern portion i have rapidly sketched for you, that of the northern you will find of a totally different character." "pray let me hear it." "when north america was first discovered, it was found to be inhabited by a race of savages, divided into several tribes. they had no manufactures; they had no knowledge of art or science; they lived in the impenetrable woods in huts, having no pretension to architecture; they went almost entirely naked, were extremely warlike, and fond of hunting, and were known to devour the enemies they killed in battle. "to this barbarous race came a few adventurous men across the stormy atlantic, from the distant island of england--" "ah, england!" i exclaimed, "that is the country of my parents--that is the home of my grandfather; let me hear anything you have to say about england." mrs reichardt smiled at my animation, but proceeded without making any comment upon what i had said. "england possessed at this period many adventurous spirits, who were ready to dare every danger to obtain for their country a share in the honours which other lands had assumed through the enterprise of their navigators. by such men different portions of the northern continent of america were discovered; the fame of these new lands, their wonderful productiveness and admirable climate, soon spread amongst their countrymen, and from time to time various ships left the english ports with small bands of adventurers, who made what were termed settlements in the country of these savages--not by mercilessly massacring them as the spaniards had done in the south, and then plundering them of all they possessed, but by purchasing certain districts or pieces of land from the original occupants, which they peacefully cultivated; as their numbers increased, they multiplied their habitations, and obtained by barter of the savages fresh accessions of territory." "the english showed themselves a much more humane people than the spaniards," i observed. "but did they never come into collision with the wild natives of the country?" "frequently," mrs reichardt replied; "but in some measure this was unavoidable. as new settlers from england landed in the country, they required more land; but the savages were now not inclined to barter; they had become jealous of the strangers, and were desirous of driving them back to their ships before they became too numerous. acts of hostility were committed by the savages upon the settlers, which were often marked by great brutality: this exasperated the latter, who joined in a warlike association, and notwithstanding their numbers and daring, drove them further and further from their neighbourhood, till either by conquest, treaties, or purchase, the englishmen or their descendants obtained the greater portion of north america." "do they still hold possession of it?" i asked. "up to a recent date, the whole of this vast acquisition was a colony in obedience to the government of england; but a dispute having arisen between the mother country and the colony, a struggle took place, which ended in the hatter throwing off all subjection to the laws of england. the extensive provinces joined together in a union of equal privileges and powers, which has since gone by the name of the government of the united states of north america. this is the great republic to which i just now alluded, that is gradually absorbing the minor southern states into its union, and threatens at no very distant date to spread the english language and the english race over the whole continent of america." "has england then completely lost the country she colonised?" i inquired, feeling more and more interested in the subject. "no, a great portion still remains in her possession," she replied. "the people preserved their allegiance when their neighbours thought proper to rise in revolt, and are now in a state of great prosperity, governed by the laws of england, and supported by her power. the english possessions in north america form an extensive district. it is, however, but an inconsiderable fraction of the vast countries still remaining under the dominion of england. her territories lie in every quarter of the globe; indeed the sun never sets upon this immense empire--an empire with which the conquests of alexander, and of caesar, or the most formidable state that existed in ancient times, cannot for a moment be compared; and when we bear in mind that in all these various climates, and in all these far-distant shores, the flag of our country affords the same protection to the colonist as he would enjoy in his own land, we may entertain some idea of the vast power that government possesses which can make itself respected at so many opposite points from the source whence it emanates." i was so much interested in this description, that i had neglected to notice the rate at which the boat was driving through the water. i now rose with great alacrity to shift the sail, as we had got several miles from the island, and if i did not take care we might be blown out of sight of land. i lost no time in putting her on another tack, but we had not proceeded far in this direction when i found the wind lull, and presently the sail drooped to the mast, and there was a dead calm. it became necessary now to take to our oars, and we were presently pulling with all our strength in the direction of land. this went on for some time till we were both tired, and i was surprised at the little progress we had made. we lay on our oars and took some refreshment, and then pulled with additional vigour; but i began to suspect that we were receding from the land instead of approaching it, and called mrs reichardt's attention to the fact of the island diminishing in size, notwithstanding the length of time we had been pulling towards it. "ah, frank," she said, in a melancholy tone of voice, "i have for some time entertained suspicions that all our strength was being expended in vain. it is very clear that we have got into a current that is every moment taking us further out to sea, and if a breeze does not soon spring up, we shall lose sight of the island, and then heaven only knows what will become of us." i shook out the sail, in hopes of its catching sufficient wind to lead us out of the current, but not a breath of air was stirring. we did not possess such a thing as a compass; our provisions were only calculated for a pleasure trip--we had only one small jar of water, and a flask of spirit, a few biscuits, two large cakes, a chicken, and some dried fish. the land was rapidly receding; i could only mark its position with respect to the sun, that now was pouring its burning rays upon our little bark. if it had not been for the awning, we could not have endured it; the heat was so oppressive. we had been obliged to give over rowing, as much from the fatigue it occasioned as from the hopelessness of our labour. we now sat with sinking hearts watching the fast-retreating land. it had become a point--it diminished to a speck, and as it disappeared from our anxious sight, the sun set in all his glory, and we were drifting at the mercy of the current we knew not where, with nothing but sky and sea all around us. chapter forty five. vainly i stretched my eyes around the illimitable field of ocean, in hope of discerning some indication of that power whose ships i had been told traversed every sea; but nothing like a vessel was in sight--the mighty waters stretched out like an endless desert on every side. there was no sign of man in all this vast space, except our little boat; and in comparison with this space, how insignificant were the two helpless human beings who sat silent and motionless in that boat awaiting their destiny. the stars came out with marvellous brilliancy. i fancied that i had never seen them appear so bright; but probably the gloominess of my thoughts made them look brighter by contrast. i seemed the centre of a glorious system of worlds revolving above me with a calm and tranquil beauty, that appeared to reproach me for giving way to despair in a scene so lovely. the great mass of water, scarcely moved by a ripple, now appeared lit up with countless fires, and a purplish haze, like a low flame, was visible in every direction. i directed the attention of my companion to this strange appearance. notwithstanding the intensity of her anxiety, she immediately entered into an explanation of the phenomenon, and attributed it to a peculiarly phosphoric state of the sea, caused by myriads of creatures which possess the quality of the glowworm, and rising to the surface of the water, made the latter seem as though enveloped in flame. i sat a long time watching the singular appearances that presented themselves whenever i dashed down the oar. it looked as though i was beating fire instead of water, and flame seemed to come from the oar with the drops that fell from it into the sea. in this way hours passed by: we were still floating with the current; the moon and stars were now coldly shining over our heads; the ocean around us was still gleaming with phosphoric fires, when mrs reichardt advised me to take some nourishment, and then endeavour to go to sleep, saying she would keep watch and apprise me if anything happened of which it might be advantageous to avail ourselves. the only thing i desired was the appearance of a vessel, or the setting in of a breeze, of which at present not a sign existed. i felt disinclined either to eat or to drink: but i proposed that my companion should make a meal and then go to sleep, as it was much more proper that i should keep watch than herself. the fact was, we were both anxious that the other should be the first to diminish our little stock of food; but as neither would be induced to do this, it was decided that our provisions should be divided into certain portions, which were only to be taken at sunrise and sunset, and that we should during the night relieve each other every three hours in keeping watch, that if we saw land, or a ship, or the wind should spring up, we might consult immediately as to our course. i only succeeded in inducing her to lie down at the bottom of the boat, to obtain a little sleep, previously to her taking my place, that i might so rest myself. she first said her usual prayers for the evening, in which i joined, and in a few minutes i was glad to hear by her regular breathing, that she was obtaining that repose of which i was certain she stood greatly in need. i was now the sole observer of the stupendous spectacle that spread out around and above me; the most sublime feature in this imposing scene appeared to be the silence which reigned supreme over all. the heavens were as mute as the sea. it looked as if the earth had been engulfed by a second deluge, and all living nature had perished utterly from the face of it. i felt a deep feeling of melancholy stealing over me, and could not forbear reproaching myself for embarking in this hazardous enterprise, and risking a life that i was bound to preserve. what could become of us both i knew not; but i was sensible that if we were not speedily picked up, or made some friendly shore, there existed but little hopes of our surviving many days. i made up my mind, that the island we should never see again; and though i had been so anxious for so many years to quit it, now that fate had separated us for ever, i could not console myself for the loss of a home endeared to me by so many recollections. but my great grief was the loss of my grandfather's diamonds. he had now no chance of having them restored to him. if they were found, they would become the property of the discoverer; and he would never know how his daughter perished on a rock, and how his grandson was swallowed up by the waters of the great deep. and then i thought of that glorious england i had so long hoped to see, and my heart sunk within me as i gazed out upon the boundless prospect. there was not a voice to murmur consolation, not a hand to offer me assistance. was i never to see those white cliffs which had been so often described to me, that i could call them to mind as clearly as if they stood in all their pride and beauty before my eyes? how often had i dreamed of approaching the hallowed shores of england-- how often had i heard the cheerful voices of her people welcoming the little savage to his natural home--how often had i been embraced by my aged grandfather, and received into the happy circle of his friends, with the respect and affection due to his heir. i had dreamed happy dreams, and seen blissful visions; and the result was starvation in an open boat on the illimitable ocean. mrs reichardt still slept, and i would not wake her. as long as she was insensible to the dangers of her position, she must exist in comparative happiness; to disturb her was to bring her back to a sense of danger and misery, and the recollection that my folly had brought her to this hopeless state. i noticed that a small cloud was making its appearance in the horizon, and almost at the same instant i observed it, i felt a breeze that was just sufficient to flap the sail against the mast. in a few minutes the cloud had greatly increased, and the wind filled the sail. i fancied it blew in a direction contrary to the current; but in the belief that it did so, i soon got the boat round, and to my great joy she was presently scudding before the wind at a rate that was sensibly increasing. but the cloud presently began to envelop the heavens, and a thick darkness spread itself like a veil in every direction. the wind blew very fresh, and strained the mast to which the sail had been fixed; and now i began to entertain a new fear: some sudden gust might take the sail and capsize us, or tear it from its fastenings. i would gladly have taken in the sail, but i considered it as rather a hazardous experiment. mrs reichardt lay in a position that prevented my getting at it without disturbing her, or running the risk of tipping the boat over, when it would be sure to fill immediately, and sink with us both. though we could both swim, i felt assured that if we were once in the water, there would remain very little chance of our protracting our lives beyond a few hours. the boat, therefore, continued to run before the wind at a rapid rate, the slight mast creaking, and the sail stretching so tight, i expected every minute that we should be upset. at this moment mrs reichardt awoke, and her quick eye immediately took in the full extent of our danger. "we shall be lost," she said, hurriedly, "if we do not take in that sail!" i was fully aware of this, but she had seen more of a sailor's perils than i had, and knew better how to meet them. she offered to assist me in taking in the sail, and directing me to be very careful, we proceeded, with the assistance of the awning, to the mast, and after a good deal of labour, and at some risk of being blown into the sea, we succeeded in furling the sail, and unshipping the mast. we were now in quite as much danger from another cause--the surface of the sea, which had been so smooth during the calm, was now so violently agitated by the wind, that the boat kept ascending one great billow only to descend into the trough of another. we often went down almost perpendicularly, and the height seemed every moment increasing; and every time we went thus plunging headlong into the boiling waters, i thought we should be engulfed never to rise; nevertheless, the next minute, up we ascended on the crest of some more fearful wave than any we had hitherto encountered, and down again we plunged in the dark unfathomable abyss that, walled in by foaming mountains of water, appeared yawning to close over us for ever. it was almost entirely dark; we could see only the white foam of the wave over which we were about to pass: save this, it was black below and black above, and impenetrable darkness all around. mrs reichardt sat close to me with her hand in mine--she uttered no exclamations of feminine terror--she was more awe-struck than frightened. i believe that she was fully satisfied her last hour had come, for i could hear her murmuring a prayer in which she commended her soul to her creator. i cannot say that i was in any great degree alarmed--the rapid up-and-down motion of the boat gave me a sensation of pleasure i had never before experienced. to say the truth, i should have greatly enjoyed being thus at the mercy of the winds and waves, in the midst of a black and stormy night on the trackless ocean, had it not been for my constant thoughts of my companion, and my bitter self-reproaches for having led her into so terrible a danger. i was now, however, called from these reflections, by the necessity of active employment. the boat i found shipped water at every plunge, and if speedy means were not taken to keep the water under, there was little doubt that she would soon fill and go down. i therefore seized the iron kettle we had brought with us to cook our dinner, and began rapidly baling out the water, which was already over our ankles. we continued to ship water, sometimes more and sometimes less; and mrs reichardt, actuated no doubt by the same motives as myself, with a tin pan now assisted me in getting rid of the treacherous element. by our united exertions we kept the water under, and hoped to be able to get rid of the whole of it. about this time it began to rain very heavily, and although the awning protected our heads, so much fell into the boat, that notwithstanding our labours, we continued to sit in a pool. we were, however, glad to find that as the rain fell, the wind abated and as the latter subsided, the sea became less violent, and we shipped less water. i was now able by my own exertions to keep the boat tolerably dry, and mrs reichardt, ever provident, spread out all the empty vessels she had brought with her to catch the rain; for as she said, we did not know how valuable that water might become in a short time. the rain continued to pour down in a perfect torrent for several hours; at the end of which the sky gradually cleared. the sea, though still rough, presented none of those mountainous waves that a short time before had threatened to annihilate us at every descent, and there was just sufficient breeze to waft us along at a brisk rate with the assistance of our sail. mrs reichardt helped me in putting up the mast, and directly we began to feel the breeze, she insisted on my taking some refreshment. it was vitally necessary to both, for our labours had been heavy for several hours. we therefore ate sparingly of our provisions, and washed down our meal with a pannikin of water mingled with a little spirit. chapter forty six. the morning dawned upon a boundless expanse of sea. the first object that presented itself to my sight was an enormous whale spouting water, about a quarter of a mile distant from me; then i observed another, then a third, and subsequently, several more: they presented a singular and picturesque appearance, as one or other of these vast animals was continually throwing up a column of water that caught the rays of the sun, and looked very beautiful in the distance. i looked in vain for land; i looked equally in vain for a ship; there was nothing visible but this shoal of whales, and mrs reichardt endeavoured to cheer me by describing the importance of the whale-fishery to england, and the perils which the men meet with who pursue the fish for the purpose of wounding them with an iron instrument called a harpoon. i felt much interest in these details; and my companion went into the whole history of a whaling expedition, describing the first discovery of the huge fish from the ship; the pursuit in the boats, and the harpooning of the whale; its struggles after having been wounded; its being towed to the ship's side; the subsequent manufacture of oil from the blubber of the animal, and the preparation of whalebone. in attending to this discourse, i completely, forgot that i was being tossed about in the open sea, i knew not where; and where i might be in a short time it would be proved i was equally ignorant: perhaps i should be a corpse floating on the surface of the ocean, waiting for a tomb till a shark came that way; perhaps i should be suffering the torments of hunger and thirst; perhaps cast lifeless upon a rock, where my bleached bones would remain the only monument which would then declare that there once existed in these latitudes, such a being as the little savage. where now could be the island i, though long so anxious to quit, now was a thousand times more desirous of beholding? i felt that nothing could be more agreeable to me than a glimpse of that wild rocky coast that had so often appeared to me the walls of an intolerable prison. i strained my eyes in vain in every direction; the line of the horizon stretched out uninterrupted by a single break of any kind all around. where could we be? i often asked myself; but except that we were on the wide ocean, neither myself nor my companion had the slightest idea of our geographical position. we must have been blown a considerable distance during the storm: much further than the current had taken us from the island. i calculated that we must have passed it by many a mile, if we had continued the same course; but the wind had shifted several times, and it might be that we were not so very long a sail from it, could we gain the slightest knowledge of the direction in which it was to be found. but this was hopeless. i felt assured that we must abandon all idea of seeing it again. in the midst of these painful reflections, my companion directed my attention to an object at a very considerable distance, and intimated her impression that it was a ship. luckily, i had brought my glass with me, and soon was anxiously directing it to the required point. it was a ship: but at so great a distance that it was impossible, as mrs reichardt said, for any person on board to distinguish our boat. i would have sailed in that direction, but the wind was contrary: i had, therefore, no alternative but to wait till the ship should approach near enough to make us out; and i passed several hours of the deepest anxiety in watching the course of the distant vessel. she increased in size, so that i could observe that she was a large ship by the unassisted eye; but as we were running before the wind in a totally different direction, there seemed very little chance of our communicating, unless she altered her course. mrs reichardt mentioned that signals were made by vessels at a distance to attract each other's attention, and described the various ways in which they communicated the wishes of their respective captains. the only signal i had been in the habit of making was burning quantities of wood on the shore and pouring water on it to make it smoke--this was impossible in our boat. my companion at last suggested that i should tie a tablecloth to the mast; its peculiar whiteness might attract attention. the sail was presently taken in, and the tablecloth spread in its place; but, unfortunately, it soon afterwards came on a dead calm--the breeze died away, and the cloth hung in long folds against the mast. no notice whatever was taken of us. we now took to our oars and pulled in the direction of the ship; but after several hours' hard rowing, our strength had so suffered from our previous fatigues, that we seemed to have made very little distance. in a short time the sun set, and we watched the object of all our hopes with most anxious eyes, till night set in and hid her from our sight. shortly afterwards a light breeze again sprung up; with renewed hope we gave our sail to the wind, but it bore us in a contrary direction, and when morning dawned we saw no more of the ship. the wind had now again shifted, and bore us briskly along. but where? i had fallen asleep during the preceding night, wearied out with labour and anxiety, and i did not wake till long after daybreak. mrs reichardt would not disturb me. in sleep i was insensible to the miseries and dangers of my position. she could not bring herself to disturb a repose that was at once so necessary to mind and body; and i fell into a sweet dream of a new home in that dear england i had prayed so often to see; and bright faces smiled upon me, and voices welcomed me, full of tenderness and affection. i fancied that in one of those faces i recognised my mother, of whose love i had so early been deprived, and that it was paler than all the others, but infinitely more tender and affectionate: then the countenance seemed to grow paler and paler, till it took upon itself the likeness of the fair creature i had buried in the guano, and i thought she embraced me, and her arms were cold as stone, and she pressed her lips to mine, and they gave a chill to my blood that made me shake as with an ague. suddenly i beheld jackson with his sightless orbs groping towards me with a knife in his hand, muttering imprecations, and he caught hold of me, and we had a desperate struggle, and he plunged a long knife into my chest, with a loud laugh of derision and malice; and as i felt the blade enter my flesh, i gave a start and jumped up, and alarmed mrs reichardt by the wild cry with which i awoke. how strongly was that dream impressed upon my mind; and the features of the different persons who figured in it--how distinctly they were brought before me! my poor mother was as fresh in my recollection as though i had seen her but yesterday, and the sweetness of her looks as she approached me--how i now tried to recall them, and feasted on their memory as though it were a lost blessing. then the nameless corpse that had been washed from the wreck, how strange it seemed, that after this lapse of time she should appear to me in a dream, as though we had been long attached to each other, and her affections had been through life entirely my own. poor girl! perhaps even now some devoted lover mourns her loss; or hopes at no distant date to be able to join her in the new colony, to attain which a cruel destiny had forced her from his arms. little does he dream of her nameless grave under the guano. little does he dream that the only colony in which he is likely to join her, is that settlement in the great desert of oblivion, over which death has remained governor from the birth of the world. but the most unpleasant part of the vision was the appearance of jackson; and it was a long time before i could bring myself to believe that i had not beheld his well-known features--that i had not been stabbed by him, and that i was not suffering from the mortal wound he had inflicted. i however at last shook off the delusion, and to mrs reichardt's anxious inquiries replied only that i had had a disagreeable dream. in a short time i began to doubt whether the waking was more pleasant than the dreaming--the vast ocean still spread itself before me like a mighty winding-sheet, the fair sky, beautiful as it appeared in the rays of the morning sun, i could only regard as a pall--and our little bark was the coffin in which two helpless human beings, though still existing, were waiting interment. "has god abandoned us?" i asked my companion; "or has he forgotten that two of his creatures are in the deepest peril of their lives, from which he alone can save them?" "hush! frank henniker," exclaimed mrs reichardt, solemnly; "this is impious. god never abandons those who are worthy of his protection. he will either save them at his own appointed time--or if he think it more desirable, will snatch them from a scene where so many dangers surround them, and place them where there prevails eternal tranquillity and everlasting bliss. "we should rather rejoice," she added, with increasing seriousness, "that we are thought worthy of being so early taken from a world in which we have met with so many troubles." "but to die in this way," i observed gloomily; "to be left to linger out days of terrible torture, without a hope of relief--i cannot reconcile myself to it." "we must die sooner or later," she said, "and there are many diseases which are fatal after protracted suffering of the most agonising description. these we have been spared. the wretch who lingers in torment, visited by some loathsome disorder, would envy us, could he see the comparatively easy manner in which we are suffered to leave existence. "but i do not myself see the hopelessness of our case," she added. "it is not yet impossible that we may be picked up by a ship, or discover some friendly shore whence we might obtain a passage for england." "i see no prospect of this," said i; "we are apparently out of the track of ships, and if it should be our chance to discover one, the people on board are not likely to observe us. i wish i had never left the island." mrs reichardt never reproached me--never so much as reminded me that it was my own fault. she merely added, "it was the will of god." we ate and drank our small rations--my companion always blessing the meal, and offering a thanksgiving for being permitted to enjoy it. i noticed what was left. we had been extremely economical, yet there was barely enough for another day. we determined still further to reduce the trifling portion we allowed ourselves that we might increase our chance of escape. chapter forty seven. five days and nights had we been drifting at the mercy of the winds and waves; all our small stock of food had been devoured--though we had hoarded every crumb, as the miser hoards his gold. even the rain-water, as well as the water we had brought with us, we had drained to the last drop. the weather continually alternated from a dead calm to a light breeze: the wind frequently shifted, but i had no strength left to attend to the sail--the boat was abandoned to its own guidance, or rather to that of the wind. when becalmed, we lay still; when the breeze sprung up, we pursued our course till the sail no longer felt its influence. five long days and nights--days of intolerable suffering, nights of inexpressible horror. from sunrise to sunset i strained my eyes along the line of the horizon, but nothing but sky and wave ever met my gaze. when it became dark, excited by the deep anxiety i had endured throughout the day, i could not sleep. i fancied i beheld through the darkness monstrous forms mocking and gibbering, and high above them all was reared the head of the enormous python i had combated in the happy valley. and he opened his tremendous jaws, as though to swallow me, and displayed fold upon fold of his immense form, as if to involve and crush the boat in its mighty involutions. i was always glad when the day dawned, or if the night happened to be fair and starlight; for the spectres vanished when the sun shone, and the tranquil beauty of the stars calmed my soul. i was famishing for want of food--but i suffered most from want of water, for the heat during the day was tremendous, and i became so frantic from thirst, that nothing but the exhortations of mrs reichardt would have prevented me from dashing myself into the sea, and drinking my fill of the salt-water that looked so tempting and refreshing. my companion sought to encourage me to hope, long after all hope had vanished--then she preached resignation to the divine will, and in her own nature gave a practical commentary on her text. i perceived that her voice was getting more and more faint--and that she was becoming hourly more feeble. she was not able to move from her seat, and at last asked me to assist her to lie down at the bottom of the boat. then i noticed that she prayed fervently, and i could often distinguish my name in these petitions to the throne of grace. i felt a strange sensation in my head, and my tongue became in my mouth as a dry stick--from this i was relieved by chewing the sleeve of my shirt; but my head grew worse. my eyes too were affected in a strange manner. i continually fancied that i saw ships sailing about at a little distance from me, and i strove to attract their attention by calling to them. my voice was weak, and i could create only a kind of half-stifled cry. then i thought i beheld land: fair forests and green pastures spread before me--bright flowers and refreshing fruits grew all around--and i called to my companion to make haste, for we were running ashore and should presently be pulling the clustering grapes and should lay ourselves down among the odorous flowers. mrs reichardt opened her eyes and gazed at me with a more painful interest. she knew i was haunted by the chimeras created by famine and thirst; but she seemed to have lost all power of speech. she motioned me to join her in prayer; i, however, was too much occupied with the prospect of landing, and paid no attention to her signs. presently the bright landscape faded away, and i beheld nothing but the wide expanse of water, the circle of which appeared to expand and spread into the sky, and the sky seemed lost and broken up in the water, and for a few minutes they were mixed together in the wildest and strangest confusion. subsequently to this i must have dropped asleep, for after a while i found myself huddled up in a corner of the boat, and must have fallen there from my seat. i stared about me for some time unconscious where i was. the bright sun still shone over my head; the everlasting sea still rolled beneath my feet. i looked to the bottom of the boat, and met the upturned gaze of my fellow voyager. the pale face had grown paler, and the expression of the painful eye had become less intelligent. i thought she was as i had seen her in my dream when she changed from her own likeness to that of the poor drowned girl we buried in the guano. i turned away my gaze--the sight was too painful to look upon. i felt assured that she was dying, and that in a very short space of time, that faithful and affectionate nature i must part from for ever. i thought i would make a last effort--though faint and trembling, burning with fever, and feeling deadly sick, i managed by the support of the awning to crawl to the mast, and embracing it with one arm, i raised the glass with the other hand, and looked carefully about. my hand was very unsteady and my eyes seemed dim. i could discern nothing but water. i should have sunk in despair to the bottom of the boat, had i not been attracted at the moment by a singular appearance in the sky. a cloud was approaching, of a shape and appearance i had never observed before. i raised the glass again, and after observing this cloud for some time with great attention, i felt assured that what i considered to be long lines of vapour was an immense flock of birds. this discovery interested me--i forgot the intensity of my sufferings in observing the motions of this apparently endless flock. as the first file approached, i looked again, to see if i could make out what they were. god of heaven! they were gannets. i crawled back to my companion as rapidly as my feeble limbs would allow, to inform her of the discovery i had made. alas! i found that i was unheeded. i could not believe that her fine spirit had fled: no, she moved her hand; but the dull spiritless gaze seemed to warn me that her dissolution was fast approaching. i looked for the spirit-flask, and found a few drops were still left there; i poured these into her mouth, and watched the result with the deepest anxiety i had ever known since the day of my birth. in a few minutes i found that she breathed more regularly and distinctly--presently her eyes lost that fixedness which had made them so painful to look upon. then she recognised me, and took hold of my hand, regarding me with the sweet smile with which i was so familiar. as soon as i found that consciousness had returned, i told her of the great flock of gannets that were evidently wending their way to their customary resting-place, and the hope i entertained that if they could be kept in sight, and the wind remained in the same quarter, the boat might be led by them to the place where they laid their eggs. she listened to me with attention, and evidently understood what i said. her lips moved, and i thought she was returning thanks to god-- accepting the flight of the birds as a manifest proof that he was still watching over us. in a few minutes she seemed so much better that she could sit up. i noticed her for some time watching the gannets that now approached in one vast cloud that threatened to shut us out from the sky--she then turned her gaze in an opposite direction, and with a smile of exultation that lit up her wan face as with a glory, stretched her arm out, pointing her hand to a distant portion of the sea. my gaze quickly followed hers, and i fancied i discovered a break in the line of the horizon; but it did not look like a ship. i pointed the glass in that direction, and felt the joyful assurance that we were within sight of land. this additional discovery gave me increased strength or rather hope now dawning upon us, gave me an impulse i had not felt before. i in my turn became the consoler. i encouraged mrs reichardt, with all the arguments of which i was master, to think that we should soon be in safety. she smiled, and something like animation again appeared in her pale features. if i could save her, i felt i should be blessed beyond measure. such an object was worth striving for; and i did strive. i know not how it was that i gained strength to do what i did on that day; but i felt that i was supported from on high, and as the speck of land that she had first discovered gradually enlarged itself as we approached it, my exertions to secure a speedy rescue for my companion from the jaws of death, continued to increase. the breeze remained fair, and we scudded along at a spanking rate, the gannets keeping us company all the way--evidently bound to the same shore. i kept talking to mrs reichardt, and endeavouring to raise her spirits with the most cheering description of what we should do when we got ashore; for god would be sure to direct us to some place where we might without difficulty recover our strength. hitherto she had not spoken; but as soon as we began to distinguish the features of the shore we were approaching, she unclosed her lips, and again the same triumphant smile played around them. "frank henniker, do you know that rock?" "no!--yes!--can it be possible? o what a gracious providence has been watching over us!" it was a rock of a remarkable shape that stood a short distance from the fishing-pool. it could not be otherwise, the gannets had led us to their old haunts. we were approaching our island. i looked at my companion--she was praying. i immediately joined with her in thanksgiving for the signal mercy that had been vouchsafed to us, and in little more than an hour had the priceless satisfaction of carrying her from the shore to the cottage, and then we carefully nursed ourselves till we recovered the effects of this dreadful cruise. chapter forty eight. my numerous pursuits, as i stated in a preceding chapter, obliging me to constant occupation, kept me from useless repining about my destiny, in being obliged to live so many years on this far-distant corner of the earth. i had long ceased to look for passing ships--i scarcely ever thought about them, and had given up all speculations about my grandfather's reception of me. i rarely went out to sea, except to fish, and never cared to trouble myself about anything beyond the limited space which had become my inheritance. the reader, then, may judge of my surprise when, one sultry day, i had been busily engaged for several hours cutting down a field of wheat, mrs reichardt came running to me with the astounding news that there was a ship off the island, and a boat full of people had just left her and were rowing towards the rocks. i hastily took the glass she had brought with her, and as soon as i could get to a convenient position, threw myself on the ground on the rock, and reconnoitred through the glass the appearance of the newcomers. i soon noticed that a part were well armed, which was not the case with the rest, for they were pinioned in such a manner that they could scarcely move hand or foot. we concealed ourselves by lying our lengths on the grass. as the boat approached, i could discern that the unarmed party belonged to a superior class of men, while many of the others had countenances that did not prepossess me at all in their favour. we lay hid in the long grass, from which we could command a view of our approaching visitors. "i think i understand this," whispered mrs reichardt. "there is mischief here." "had i not better run home and get arms?" i asked. "no," she replied, "you had better not. if we are able to do any good, we must do it by stratagem. let us watch their movements, and act with great caution." my companion's advice was, i saw, the wisest that could be pursued; and therefore we remained in our hiding-places, narrowly observing our visitors as they approached. they entered the fishing-pool, and i could then distinctly not only see, but hear them. to my extreme surprise, one of the first men who jumped out of the boat was john gough, who had brought mrs reichardt to the island. he looked older, but i recognised him in a moment, and so did my companion. her admonitory "hush!" kept me from betraying the place of our concealment--so great was my astonishment, having long believed him and all his lawless associates to have been lost at sea. he was well armed, and evidently possessed some authority; nevertheless, i thought i could detect an air of concern in his features, as he offered to help one of the captives out of the boat. the latter, however, regarded him with an air of disdain, and, though his hands were tied behind him, leaped ashore without assistance. he was a man of commanding stature, with a well-bronzed face, and a look of great energy of character. he wore a band of gold lace round his cap, and had on duck trousers, and a blue jacket and waistcoat. "come, captain!" exclaimed john gough, "i bear you no malice. though you have been rather hard upon us, we won't leave you to starve." "he's a deuced deal better off than he desarves to be," cried a man from the boat, whom i at once recognised as the fellow on whom i had drawn my knife for hurting nero. "if we had made him walk the plank, as i proposed, i'm blowed if it wouldn't have been much more to the purpose than putting him on this here island, with lots o' prog, and everything calkilated to make him and his domineering officers comfortable for the rest of their days." "hold your tongue, you mutineering rascal," exclaimed the captain, angrily; "a rope's end at the yard-arm will be your deserts before long." "thank ye kindly, captain," replied the fellow, touching his hat in mockery. "but you must be pleased to remember i ain't caught yet; and we means to have many a jolly cruise in your ship, and get no end o' treasure, before i shall think o' my latter end; and then i means to die like a christian, and repent o' my sins, and make a much more edifying example than i should exhibit dangling at the end of a rope." the men laughed, the captain muttered something about "pirates and mutineers," but the rest of the officers wisely held their tongues. i now noticed an elderly man of very respectable appearance, who was not pinioned like the rest. his hair was quite white, his complexion very pale, and he looked like one oppressed with deep sorrow and anxiety. he rose from his seat in the boat, and was assisted out by john gough. "i'm very sorry that we are obliged to leave you here, mr evelyn," said gough, "but you see sir, we have no alternative. we couldn't keep you with us, for many reasons; and therefore we have been obliged to make you a sharer in the fate of our officers." "and werry painful this is to our feelings, sir, you may believe," said another of the mutineers, mockingly. "i'm quite moloncholy as i thinks on it." the men again laughed; but the person so addressed walked to the side of the captain without making any observation. the other captives also left the boat in silence. they were eight in all, but four of them were evidently common seamen by their dress--the others were officers. all were well-made strong men. "what a precious pretty colony you'll make, my hearties!" exclaimed one of the mutineers, jeeringly, as he helped to land a cask, and some other packages, that they had brought with them. "it's a thousand pities you ain't got no female associates, that you might marry, and settle, and bring up respectable families." "talking of women," cried the one who had first spoken, "i wonder what became of the one we left here so cleverly when we was wrecked at this here place six years ago." john gough looked uneasy at this inquiry, as if the recollection was not agreeable to him. "and the little savage," continued the fellow, "what was a-going to send his knife into my ribs for summat or other--i forget what. they must have died long ago, i ain't no doubt, as we unfortnitely left 'em nothin' to live upon." "no doubt they died hand in hand, like the babes in the wood," said another. i still observed john gough; he seemed distressed at the turn the conversation had taken. "now, mates," he said, hurriedly, "let us return to the ship. we have done what we came to do." "i votes as we shall go and see arter the missionary's woman and the little savage," cried the fourth. "i should like, somehow, to see whether they be living or not, and a stroll ashore won't do any on us any harm." "i shall remain here till you return," said john gough; and he threw himself on the grass with his back towards me, and only a few yards from the place in which we were concealed. the rest, after making fast the boat, started off on an exploring expedition, in the direction of the old hut. chapter forty nine. the captives were grouped together, some sitting, and some standing. not one of them looked dejected at his fate; though i could see by their movements that they were impatient of the bonds that tied them. my attention was most frequently directed to the old gentleman who had been addressed as mr evelyn. notwithstanding the grief expressed in his countenance, it possessed an air of benevolence and kindness of heart that even his settled melancholy did not conceal. i could not understand why, but i felt a deeper interest for this person than for any of the others--a sort of yearning towards him, mingled with a desire to protect him from the malice of his enemies. almost as soon as they were gone, john gough beckoned to mr evelyn to sit down by his side. possibly this was done to prevent his assisting his companions to regain their liberty, as he, not being pinioned like the rest, might easily have done, and they might have overpowered their guard before his companions could come to his assistance. but gough was well armed, and the rest being without weapons of any kind, it was scarcely probable that they would have risked their lives on so desperate an attempt. mr evelyn came and quietly sat himself down in the place indicated. i observed him with increasing interest, and, singular to relate, the more i gazed on his venerable face, the more strongly i felt assured that i had seen it before. this of course was impossible; nevertheless, the fancy took possession of me, and i experienced a strange sensation of pleasure as i watched the changes his features underwent. "john gough, i am sorry to see you mixed up in this miserable business," said he, mildly addressing his companion. the other did not answer, and as his back was turned towards me, i could not observe the effect the observation had upon him. "the men who have left us, i know to be bad men," continued the speaker; "i expect nothing but wickedness from them. but you, i am aware, have been better brought up. your responsibility therefore becomes the greater in assisting them in their villainy." "you had better not let them hear you, mr evelyn," replied gough, at last, in something like a surly tone; "i would not answer for the consequences." "those i do not fear," the other answered. "the results of this transaction can make very little difference to a man on the verge of the grave, who has outlived all his relatives, and has nothing left to fall back upon but the memory of his misfortunes: but to one in the prime of life like yourself, who can boast of friends and relatives who feel an interest in your good name, these results must be serious indeed. what must be the feelings of your respectable father when he learns that you have joined a gang of pirates; how intense must be the grief of your amiable mother when she hears that you have paid the penalty that must sooner or later overtake you for embracing so lawless a life." "come, mr evelyn," exclaimed gough, though with a tremulousness in his voice that betrayed the state of his feelings, "you have no right to preach to me. i have done as much as i could for you all. the men would have made short work with you if i had not interposed, and pointed out to them this uninhabited island." "where it seems you left a poor woman to be starved to death," continued mr evelyn. "it was no fault of mine," replied the man; "i did all i could to prevent it." "it would have been more manly if you had remained with her on this rock, and left your cowardly associates to take their selfish course. but you are weak and irresolute, john gough; too easily persuaded into evil, too slow to follow the impulses of good. the murder of that poor woman is as much your deed as if you had blown her brains out before you abandoned her. indeed i do not know but what the latter would have been the less criminal." john gough made no answer. i do not think, however, his mind was quite easy under this accusation, for he seemed restless, and kept playing with his pistols, with his eyes cast down. "your complicity in this mutiny, too, john gough, is equally inexcusable," continued mr evelyn. "it was your duty to have stood by captain manvers and his officers; by which you would have earned their eternal gratitude, and a handsome provision from the owners of the vessel." "it's no use talking of these things now, mr evelyn," said gough, hurriedly. "i have taken my course. it is too late to turn back. would to god," he added, dashing his hand violently against his brow, "i had had nothing to do with it." "it is never too late, john gough, to do good," here cried out mrs reichardt, as she rose from her place of concealment, as much to my surprise as that of all who could observe her. but nothing could equal the astonishment of gough when he first caught sight of her features--he sprang to his feet, leaving his pistols on the ground, and clasping his hands together, exclaimed, "thank god, she is safe!" "yes," she replied, approaching him and taking his hand kindly. "by an interposition of providence you are saved from the guilt of one murder. in the name of that god who has so signally preserved you against yourself, i command you to abandon your present wicked designs." the man hesitated, but it seemed as if he could not take his gaze from her face, and it was evident that her presence exerted an extraordinary influence over him. in the mean time i had made my appearance on the scene, not less to the astonishment of the lookers-on; and my first act was to take possession of the pair of pistols that gough had left on the ground; my next to hurry to the group of captives, who had been regarding us, in a state as it were of perfect bewilderment, and with my american knife to cut their bonds. "i will do whatever you think proper," said john gough. "believe me, i have been reluctantly led into this, and joined the mutiny knowing that i should have been murdered if i did not." "you must endeavour to make what amends are in your power," continued mrs reichardt, "by assisting your officers in recovering possession of the ship." "i will gladly assist in whatever they may think feasible," said the man. "but we must first secure the desperate fellows who have just left us; and as we are but poorly provided with weapons, that of itself will be a service of no slight danger. to get possession of the ship i am afraid will be still more hazardous; but you shall find me in the front of every danger." here captain manvers and the others came up to where john gough and mrs reichardt were conversing; he heard gough's last speech, and he was going to say something, when i interposed by stating that there was no time now for explanations, for in a few minutes the fellows who had gone to the hut would return, and the only way to prepare for them was for the whole party to go to our house, to which mrs reichardt would lead them, where they would find plenty of arms and ammunition. in the meantime i would keep watch, and observe their motions, and by firing one of the pistols would signal to them if i was in any danger. lastly, i recommended that the oars should be removed from the boat, to prevent the mutineers making their escape to the ship. my appearance and discourse attracted general attention. i particularly noticed that mr evelyn started as soon as he caught sight of me, and appeared to observe me with singular carefulness; but that, no doubt, arose from my unexpected address, and the strange way in which i had presented myself before him. the captain approving of my proposal, the whole party, after taking away the boat's oars, moved off rapidly in the direction of the house. i again concealed myself in the grass, and waited the return of the mutineers. they did not remain away long. i could hear them approaching, for they laughed and shouted as they went along, loud enough to be heard at a considerable distance. when they began to descend the rocks, they passed so close to me, that i could hear every word that was spoken. "well, flesh is grass, as the parson says," said jack, "they must have died sooner or later, if we hadn't parted company with so little ceremony. but, hallo! my eyes and limbs! where's john gough? where's the captain? where's all on 'em?" it is impossible to express the astonishment of the men on reaching the spot where they had so lately left their prisoners, and discovering that not a trace of them was to be seen. at first they imagined that they had escaped in the boat, but as soon as they saw that the boat was safe, they gave up that idea. then they fancied john gough had taken the prisoners to stroll a little distance inland, and they began to shout as loud as their lungs would permit them. receiving no response, they uttered many strange ejaculations, which i could not then understand, but which i have since learned were profane oaths; and seemed at a loss what to do, whether to wander about the island in search of them, or return to their ship. only one chanced to be for the former, and the others overruled him, not thinking it was worth their while to take so much trouble as to go rambling about in a strange place. they seemed bent on taking to the boat, when one of them suggested they might get into a scrape if they returned without their companion. they finally resolved on sitting down and waiting his return. presently, one complained he was very sleepy, as he had been too busy mutineering to turn into his hammock the previous night, and the others acknowledged they also felt an equal want of rest from the same cause. each began to yawn. they laid themselves at their full length along the grass, and in a short time i could hear by their snoring, as jackson used to do, that they were asleep. i now crept stealthily towards them on my hands and knees, and they were in such a profound sleep, that i had no difficulty whatever in removing the pistols from their belts. i had just succeeded in this, when i beheld the captain, and john gough, and mr evelyn, and all the rest of them, well armed with guns and pistols, approaching the place where we were. in a few minutes afterwards the mutineers were made prisoners, without their having an opportunity of making the slightest resistance. i was much complimented by the captain for the dexterity with which i had disarmed them; but while i was in conversation with him, it is impossible to express the surprise i felt, on seeing mr evelyn suddenly rush towards me from the side of mrs reichardt, with whom he had been talking, and embracing me with the most moving demonstrations of affection, claim me as his grandson. the mystery was soon explained. mr evelyn had met so many losses in business as a merchant, that he took the opportunity of a son of his old clerk--who had become a captain of a fine ship, employed in the south american trade--being about to proceed on a trading voyage to that part of the world, to sail in his vessel with a consignment of goods for the south american market. he had also another object, which was to inquire after the fate of his long-lost daughter and son-in-law, of whom he had received no certain intelligence, since the latter took ship with the diamonds he had purchased to return home. the vessel in which they sailed had never been heard of since; and mr evelyn had long given up all hopes of seeing either of them again, or the valuable property with which they had been intrusted. on their going to the house, he had asked mrs reichardt my name, stating that i so strongly resembled a very dear friend of his he believed had perished many years ago, that he felt quite an interest in me. the answer he received led to a series of the most earnest inquiries, and mrs reichardt satisfied him on every point, showed him all the property that had formerly been in the possession of mrs henniker and her husband; related jackson's story, and convinced him, that though he had lost the daughter for whom he had mourned so long, her representative existed in the little savage, who was saving him from the fate for which he had been preserved by the mutineers. i have only to add, that i had the happiness of restoring to my grandfather the diamonds i had obtained from jackson, which were no doubt very welcome to him, for they not only restored him to affluence, but made him one of the richest merchants upon change. i was also instrumental in obtaining for the captain the command of his ship, and of restoring discipline amongst the crew. the ringleaders of the mutiny were thrown into irons, and taken home for trial; this resulted in one or two of them being hanged by way of example, and these happened to be the men who so barbarously deserted mrs reichardt. she accompanied me to england in captain manvers' vessel; for when he heard of the obligations i owed her, my grandfather decided that she should remain with us as long as she lived. we however did not leave the island, until we had shown my grandfather, the captain, and his officers, what we had effected during our stay, and every one was surprised that we could have produced a flourishing farm upon a barren rock. i did not fail to show the places where i had had my fight with the python, and where i had been pursued by the sharks, and my narrative of both incidents seemed to astonish my hearers exceedingly. i must not forget to add, that the day before our departure, john gough came to me privately, and requested my good offices with the captain, that he might be left on the island. he had become a very different character to what he had previously been; and as there could be no question that the repentance he assumed was sincere, i said all i could for him. my recommendation was successful, and i transferred to john gough all my farm, farming stock, and agricultural implements; moreover, promised to send him whatever he might further require to make his position comfortable. he expressed great gratitude, but desired nothing; only that his family might know that he was well off, and was not likely to return. perhaps john gough did not like the risk he ran of being tried for mutiny, or was averse to sailing with his former comrades: but whatever was the cause of his resolution, it is certain that he remained behind when the ship left the island, and may be there to this hour for all i know to the contrary. we made a quick voyage to england, and as my readers will be no doubt glad to hear, the little savage landed safely at plymouth, and was soon cordially welcomed to his grandfather's house in london. finis. ben hadden; or, do right, whatever comes of it, by w.h.g. kingston. ________________________________________________________________________ this small book, starts ben off as the son of a fisherman on the east coast of england. the father is a pious christian, and brings ben up to be one too. unfortunately various accidents befall the family, and they fall on hard times. ben, in rescuing some children from a runaway horse, is injured, but is befriended by lieutenant charlton, who is able to arrange so that things go better for ben's mother. ben and charlton go to sea, where ben has it in mind to find his long-lost brother ned. many accidents befall ned, culminating in a shipwreck in the pacific. eventually he is rescued, and, not long after, finds his brother ned. they come home together, and set up a new life in support of their mother. throughout, ben's morale is upheld by his christian belief. we are told a great deal about the progress of missionaries among the pacific islands. rather definitely a victorian book, but a good read. ________________________________________________________________________ ben hadden, by w.h.g. kingston. chapter one. ben's home. on the east coast of england, there is a small hamlet surrounded by high sand-hills, with scarcely a blade of grass or even a low shrub to be seen in its neighbourhood. the only vegetable productions, indeed, which can flourish in that light soil, are the pale green rushes, whose roots serve to bind the sand together, and to prevent the high easterly winds, so constantly blowing on that coast, affecting it as much as they would otherwise do. even in spite of the opposition of the rushes, several deserted huts have been almost entirely covered up by the drifting sand. see note . the population of the village consists of seafaring people and their families. the men form the crews of the numerous vessels employed in the herring fisheries which belong to the various fishing-places on the coast. nowhere along the shores of england are finer sea-boats or more hardy crews to be found. most of the herring vessels are luggers, from thirty to forty tons burden, and entirely decked over. each carries from eight to ten men. they are divided below into compartments, or tanks: in one compartment, salt is stowed; into another, the herrings, as soon as caught, are thrown; in a third they are salted, and are then packed away in lockers, on either side of the vessel, till she is full. she is then steered for the shore to the point nearest to a railway, or where there is a market. each vessel has several long nets: the upper part of the net floats close to the surface of the water, buoyed up by bladders; the lower part is kept down by small bits of lead, and one end is moored to the bottom by a heavy weight. the fish, as they swim in large shoals, strike against the net as against a wall, and are caught in the meshes. herring fishing is carried on at night, when the fish cannot see the nets. when a vessel or boat has cast out her nets, she hangs on to the lee [see note ] end of them till the morning. besides these large herring luggers, many open boats are used; and great numbers of other boats from the coasts of scotland and the north of england resort to these seas in the herring season. there is yet another class of vessels which frequent this coast. they are the deep-sea fishing smacks--cutters measuring from thirty to fifty tons, each carrying about ten men. their nets differ much from those used by the luggers and boats. they fish with trawls, and so are called _trawlers_. a trawl is a net with a deep bag fastened to a long beam, which long beam has a three-cornered iron at each end. this beam is dragged along at the bottom of the sea, and stirs up the turbot, bream, plaice, soles, and other flat-fish which lie there; when they swim into the bag and are caught. these trawlers fish in the north sea, sometimes a hundred and a hundred and fifty miles away from england, off the texel. other fishing grounds are from twelve to twenty miles off the british coast. at times, more than a hundred vessels are together, forming a large fleet. one of the oldest and wisest of the captains is chosen as their head man, and is called the admiral of the fleet. they have, of course, many rules and laws to govern them. when they fish far from the land, they remain out six weeks, or more; and do not once, all that time, go into port. there are, however, steamers employed, which run to and fro to carry them food and fresh-water, also to take ice to them. with this ice the fish are packed, as soon as caught, in large baskets. the steamers then collect the fish from the different fishing-vessels, and carry it to london, or to the nearest port where there is a railway station. this account will give an idea of the many thousand people employed as fishermen on the eastern coasts of our country. in summer, while the weather is fine, their calling is pleasant and healthy; but when storms arise the hardships and perils are very great, and many of the men every year lose their lives, leaving widows and orphans behind them. there was belonging to sandhills, the little hamlet about which i have spoken, as fine and bold a set of fishermen as any to be found on the british coast. there were from fifteen to twenty families. the largest family was that of old john hadden. he had eight sons and several daughters: three of his sons were away at sea--two of these were on board men-of-war, and the third was on board a trading-vessel; four followed his calling as fishermen, and formed part of the crew of the lugger of which he was master; the youngest, the eighth--little ben as he was always called, the son of his old age--was as yet too young to go regularly to sea. he, however, went with his father and brothers in the summer season, when fine weather was looked for, and he would not probably be exposed to hardships too severe for his tender years. the fishermen of that coast were long known as rough and careless men, thinking nothing of religion, and utterly ignorant of religious truth. it used to be said of them, that as a rule they lived hard and died hard, caring for nobody, and nobody caring for them. this was too true of many, but not of all. it was not true of john hadden. his outside was rough enough, and very much so in winter, when he had on his high fishing-boots, broad-flapped sou'-wester, thick woollen comforter, guernsey frock, with a red flannel shirt above it, and a pea-coat over all. but he had an honest, tender, true, god-loving, and god-fearing heart. as he had been brought up, so he brought up his children in "the way they should go," trusting "that when they were old they would not depart from it." john hadden was able to do what many of his friends could not; he could read, having learned early in life. not that he read very well, but well enough to study the book of books so as to understand what it teaches. there are many, alas! who _can_ read it far more easily than could john hadden, but do _not_. how many have the bible, but do not even look into it, treating it as though it were of less value than any common book! how many would rather read light foolish books than the "holy scriptures," though they "are able to make us wise unto salvation, through faith which is in christ jesus!" what does that verse mean? that if we read and study the scriptures, with faith in christ jesus, they will show us how we may, without fail, gain more joy, happiness, wealth, and glory than words can tell; not such as will pass away in a few short years, but such as will last for ever and ever. john hadden prized the bible as the only light which could point out to him the way of eternal life. he read and read, and, more than all, he prayed as he read, till he understood the bible well, and was able to shape his own course by it, and to point out to his sons how they might shape theirs. when he took up the bible he humbly prayed, "lord, teach me that i may read and understand thy holy word aright." these words, and the spirit of these words, he taught his children. john hadden and his family neglected no means or opportunities of knowing more about the bible, or of obtaining instruction. he did not say, as some do, "i can read, and i can pray; and so why should i go away from my own home and own fireside to listen to another man?" john hadden was a real christian, and therefore he was a humble christian. the place of public worship was far off, and the road was rough; but john, with his wife and children, never failed when he was on shore, unless hindered by sickness, to go there on the sunday to hear the word of god read and explained, and to pray with other christian people. when john and the boys were at sea, mrs hadden and the other children went, and she used to say she dearly loved to do so, because then she could pray with others to the good lord, and say, "that it may please thee to preserve all that travel by land or by water." john often also said that when he was away on the ocean, he always felt happy as the hour of public service came round, because he knew that his wife and children, and other christian friends, would be praying for him and his companions at sea. among the precepts which john hadden found in his bible was this: "remember that thou keep holy the sabbath-day. six days shalt thou labour, and do all that thou hast to do; but the seventh day is the sabbath of the lord thy god. in it thou shalt do no manner of work." now john hadden was a plain man, and he understood things plainly. when, early in life, he first understood this commandment, he determined that he would keep it; and so, while others cast out their nets on saturday night, as usual, john always kept his in. if he could, he ran into harbour, and worshipped god with his fellow-men on shore; if not, he and his sons and the rest of his crew united in prayer: he also read to them from the holy scriptures, and often besides from some religious book likely to feed their souls with spiritual food. john hadden had acted in this way for years. the masters of other boats had tried in vain to make him give up this practice. they told him he would be ruined; that he had a large family to bring up; that it was foolish, and not required; that such commandments wore for shore-going people, and not for poor fishermen. but john's answer was always the same: "i'll tell you what, mates: god says, `do no work on the sabbath'--don't fish, that means; and i'm very certain that what he says is right. so it is not right to fish more than six days in the week. what i tell you, mates, and what i tell my boys, is this: `_do right whatever comes of it_.'" ------------------------------------------------------------------------ note . this plant is the round-headed rush, or _juncus conglomeratus_ of naturalists, and is cultivated with great care, especially on the banks of the sea, in holland, to prevent the water from washing away the earth; for the roots of these rushes strike very deep in the ground, and mat together near the surface so as to form a hold on the loose soil. these rushes do not grow so strong in england as in the richer soil of holland. note . sailors call the side on which the wind strikes, the weather or windward side, and the opposite to it the lee side. a net is cast out to windward, and the vessel drops slowly down from it till it is all out, when she remains at the lee end. sometimes the nets are left with only a buoy to mark their position, and the vessel goes to a distance to cast out others. chapter two. ben's father and his motto. it would be well if all, of high or low degree, landsmen and sailors, gentle and simple, kept to old john hadden's rule. how much misery and suffering would be saved! how much remorse of conscience! how much grief and shame! how much better would satan, that great foe of man, be kept at a distance! that is just the reason he whispers, whenever he can get an opening, "do wrong that good may come of it," or, "do a little wrong, just a little, and no harm will come of it;" or again, "commit a small sin; god will not see it, or if he does, god will not care for it." that is just what satan has been saying over and over again since he first tempted and deceived eve in the garden of paradise. he spoke then from envy, to drive our first parents out of an earthly paradise; he in like manner lies now to us, to hinder us from getting into the heavenly paradise, prepared for those who love and obey god. john hadden knew this full well, and so he would allow no departure from that rule; he would have it stuck to closely. he was for ever saying to his sons, "do right at all times, my lads; it is not your business to think of what will happen afterwards. god will take care of that; he will guide you better than you can guide yourselves. if you act as i say, no real evil will befall you. you may fancy that what happens is an evil just for the time; but, depend on it, what seems an evil will turn out for your good in the end." a stranger, visiting in the neighbourhood, once walked over to sandhills. he had a talk with john hadden, who happened to be on shore. he soon found that john was a bible-reading man, and that he obeyed the law of the gospel. "and so you have followed this plan of yours for some time, and have found it answer?" said the stranger. "yes, sir," said john, "i have followed it since i was a young man, and now i am an old one. i never have fished on a sunday, and i hope that i never shall. look at me, sir. am i more feeble, am i thinner, am i more sickly than my neighbours? am i less able to work?" "no, indeed you are not," answered the stranger; "you are the stoutest and one of the most able-bodied men i have seen in the place." "am i poorer? is my cottage less comfortable? are my children worse educated? are they inferior in health, strength, or activity to the children of others in the hamlet?" asked john, warming with the subject. "no, my friend," answered the stranger; "your sons are the finest young fellows in the place, and the best brought up, as i hear from all sides, while your cottage is the neatest and most comfortable." "that it is; that's what i say to my brother fishermen," exclaimed john hadden, warmly. "now, sir, i will tell you more than this. instead of being a poorer man for not fishing on a sunday i know that i am a richer one, and i can prove it. god knows what is best for us; so in his love he gave us the sabbath, that we might rest, and that our souls might turn to him and be glad. while others have been toiling all the year round, day after day, wearing out their bodies, and dulling and saddening, so to speak, their souls, i have rested one day out of seven, and on that day my strength and my spirits have been renewed. i have not grown old so fast as they have. then again, if i had been toiling and working for the bread which perisheth, and made my sons toil and work with me, how could i have fed my soul and their souls with that bread which will make us live for ever? instead of being steady, honest, hard-working, god-fearing young men, a credit to me, and respected by all who know them, they would have been careless, idle, and vicious. neighbours often say to me, `how is it, john hadden, that your sons are good steady young men, and do as you tell them?'--then i say, `it is just this, because i bring them up in the fear and admonition of the lord. the bible tells me how to bring up my children, and i do it. if you brought up your children as the bible tells you to do, your children would make you as happy as mine do me.' "but, sir, i was speaking about fishing on a sunday. now look here, sir; there is another reason why i have an advantage over those who fish every day in the week: my nets will last longer than theirs, and at the end of a couple of years are worth one-third more. while their nets have always been wet,--for they have not had time to mend them properly,--i have had mine brought on shore on saturday morning, spread out all day in the sun, mended in the evening, and left to dry all the next day. the wear and tear of the boats and the boats' gear also have been saved. so you see that those who break god's commandments for the sake of gain do not find it all profit. there is an old saying, sir, that `the devil's wages slip through the fingers.' whose wages are those gained by working on the sabbath but his? a man fancies that he has got them safe in the palm of his hand, and when he wants to spend them, they are gone. at the end of the year,--i have said it, and i know it,--by following god's commandments, simply because he has commanded, i have been a richer man than those who disobeyed them; and i know surely that i have been a stronger, a more healthy, a happier, and a more contented one. "again, sir, look here; many say they can't work on from the beginning to the end of the fishing season without drink: no more they can, maybe, but rest is better far than drink; and if they would take the sabbath-day's rest they might save the cost of the week's drink, and that's more by a long way than the sabbath-day's toil gives them. so, as i say, when we obey god we do the best thing for ourselves, even in this life; and that to my mind shows what a merciful and loving god he is. he does not want to make us suffer pain or grief, he wants to make us happy; and so all his laws are such that if we would obey them, we should be happy. it is because men do not obey them that they are unhappy. there, sir, that's my belief. i'm an old man now; but i thought so when i was a young one, and every year since i have had good cause to think the same." "you speak nothing but the truth, my friend," observed the gentleman; "i will tell others what you have said to me, and how you have acted, and i will try to persuade them to follow your example." "my example, sir!" said john hadden gravely. "say rather, sir, the same example i try to follow." "you are right, my friend," said the gentleman, wringing the fisherman's rough hand and walking thoughtfully away. some time after this, john hadden was sitting with his spy-glass resting across his knees, at the top of the highest sand-hill near the village. a strong gale from the north-east, which would not let any of the fishing-boats put to sea, was blowing. it was at the time of the year when the larger fishing-vessels are laid up. john had more than once put his glass to his eye; he now kept it there, and made a crutch of his left arm to hold it up. while thus employed, he was joined by one of his sons. "if he don't take care he'll be on the bank as sure as my name is john hadden," he cried out, pointing to a large ship which had stood in from the offing (that is, from the sea far off), and was trying to work to the northward. a slant of wind which would allow the stranger (see note ) to lay well up along shore, had tempted him to stand in closer than he should have done. old hadden and his son watched the strange vessel for some time with great interest. still he stood blindly on. "there, i feared that it would be so!" exclaimed john; "and if help don't go to them before high water, not a soul of all on board will escape." too true: the fine ship lay fast, her broadside struck again and again by the heavy seas, which came rolling in from the eastward. "jem, we must go to her!" exclaimed john hadden suddenly. "call your brothers, lad; it won't do to let these poor fellows perish for want of help." scarcely two minutes passed after this, before john hadden and his five sons--for ben also went--were launching their yawl through the surf which broke on the sandy beach. a few of the people of the village nearest the water came running down to see the boat off, but john had not time to tell his wife and daughters of what he was going to do. he would fain have given them a parting kiss, but time was precious. he sent up a lad, though, to his home. "tell them," he said, "we are doing our duty; we shall be cared for." away through the foaming sea the brave men pulled their stout boat. the spray flew over her, and speedily wetted them through, but for that they cared nothing. the seas, however, sometimes broke on board, and little ben was kept hard at work, baling out the water. "she is well out at the end of the spit, lads," observed old hadden; "we may get close enough for them to heave a rope on board us, if she hangs together, and i don't see that there is much doubt about her doing that." they pulled on for some time, without any one again speaking. "she will hang very well together," observed john; "but, oh! more's the pity, they seem to be lowering one of their boats, instead of waiting for our coming, as if they could reach the shore in her." such was indeed the case. a small boat was lowered, and several people were seen to leap into her. she shoved off, but a current, of which the strangers could not have known, swept the boat towards the breakers. in another instant she was rolled right over, and all in her must have perished. still the haddens, thinking that others might be left on board, pulled on lustily to give them help. as they rowed out more to sea, they saw another boat making her way towards the wreck. she had come from a hamlet a short distance to the north of sandhills, from which place the wreck had been seen as well as from the haddens' village. though she had not left the shore till after the haddens' boat had put off, she had the wind more in her favour, so it seemed likely that she would reach the wreck as soon as they could. when more than one boat is launched to go to a wreck, there is always a rivalry among the boatmen of the coast to try who will be the first on board, and if anything had been wanting to make the young haddens toil harder than they had been doing, this would have made them. still, the gale blew so strong that they could scarcely make any way against the wind, and all they could do at times was to keep the boat with her head to the sea to prevent her from being swamped (or filled with water). yet on they went. they believed that they might be able to save some of their fellow-creatures from death, and that thought was enough to make them run all risks. the last squall had been stronger than any others. soon after it had passed over, john hadden took a steady look to windward. "my boys," said he, "the gale is breaking. by the time we get up to the wreck, it will be calm enough to allow us to climb on board. it is to be hoped that her crew will stick by the vessel. no! what folly! they have launched another boat, and she will meet, i fear, with the fate of the first." he was silent for some minutes, while he looked now and again towards the wreck. "i feared so!" he cried at last; "they are lost, every one of them; no man could swim through that boiling surf." nearly another half-hour passed after this before the two boats got up to the wreck. the gale had by this time very much abated, and, the tide having turned, the sea had gone down. the boats pulled under the lee of the wrecked vessel, which held well together, and had her crew stayed on board, they might have been saved. not a person was to be seen on deck. the fishermen shouted loudly; no one came. it seemed certain that all must have perished. without help from the ship it was at first difficult to get on board, except at great risk. however, after waiting some time longer, the boats were able to run alongside, and the crews reached her deck. they searched the ship through; not a human being was found on board. a fire, however, was burning in the cabin grate, and before it sat a cat, quietly licking her paws. (a fact.) instinct had guided her better than man's sense, of which he is often so proud. the haddens, with the men of the other boat, began, without loss of time, to search through the ship. she was a foreigner. it was clear that those who had left her were in great fear, and had thought only of saving their lives. many articles of value lay scattered about in the cabins. john hadden and his sons were on deck; the rest were below. "hurrah!--a prize! a prize!" cried one of the men of the other boat. "a box of gold!" "hush!" cried one of his companions. "don't talk of it, man. if no one else sees it, we may have it all to ourselves." at that moment john hadden entered the cabin. his eye fell on the box, as the men were trying to hide it; he looked at what was in it. "friends, this property is not ours," he remarked, in a calm, firm voice; "we shall get a fair reward if we succeed in saving it. i hope, if we stay by the ship, that we may get her off, at the top of the next flood, by lightening her a little. what say you? will you stay by my lads and me, and do the job?" the other men, however, had set their hearts on getting the box of gold. have it they would, and they made all sorts of excuses to get away from the ship, that they might take it with them. john hadden was a man who not only would not do wrong himself, but would stop others, if he could, from doing it. "mates," he said, "i do not want to quarrel with you, or with any other men; but the goods on board this ship must remain just as we found them. i am sure that my own lads will bear me out in what i say: none of us will touch them." "oh, we always have heard that you were a very strict man, mr hadden, and now we find it true enough!" replied one of the men, with a sneer. "no," said john hadden quietly; "i only say, `do right, whatever comes of it.' if we take the goods on board this ship, we should be doing wrong. and others doing so, won't make wrong right. that's all." "well, well; we don't want to quarrel. we wished you to share; but if you won't, you won't, and neither will get it," answered the other; "so, mr hadden, let's say no more about it." john, honest and true himself, did not think that any trick was going to be played him. the other men joined him and his sons, with seeming goodwill, in getting out warps, and in heaving overboard some of the cargo. thus they worked on till night stopped them. there was a promise of a fine night; and so, making fast their boats under the lee of the wreck, they prepared to spend the time on board till the return of day. of course, they had to keep a watch on deck. the first watch was kept by the haddens; the morning watch by the people of the other boat. when john hadden and his sons awoke in the morning, and came on deck, the other boat was gone, and so was the box of gold, which had been left in the cabin. daylight returning, a white speck was seen away to the northward. john hadden, as he looked through the glass, knew that it was the boat of those who had been with him. there were some sand-banks, and a narrow passage through them, by which a long distance might be saved. at certain tides this passage was dangerous, even in fine weather. "the foolish fellows are making for the gut!" exclaimed john hadden. "i would not try to go through it for any sum." just then some clouds were seen driven across the sky by a squall; the wind struck the boat. "she's lost! she's lost!" cried john hadden, in a tone of pity. over went the boat; nor she, nor her crew, nor the box of gold were ever seen again. the ship was soon got afloat, and was brought by john hadden and his brave sons into harbour. they gained a large sum for saving the ship. "i told you," said john to his sons, "do right, whatever comes of it. this time, much good has come to us; so it generally will. if it does not, never mind; we don't see the good--that's all. god knows best what is best. still do right." ------------------------------------------------------------------------ note . when the name and character of a vessel met at sea are not known, it is spoken of by sailors as `a stranger'; of a stranger they say _he_, but a known vessel is named _she_. chapter three. a ship in distress. as yet the sun seemed always to have shone on little ben. he had a good fond mother to look after him at home, and a kind father who set him a good example, taught him well, fed him well, and never took him to sea in bad weather, or let him suffer any hardships which could be helped. seldom could a merrier, happier fellow than ben then was be found. dark days, however, were coming for him, of which he little thought. thankful, indeed, should we be that our ever-kind god does not allow us to know beforehand what we may be called on to suffer. the summer passed away, the winter returned, and the large luggers being once more laid up in harbour, john hadden and his sons went home to spend their christmas. it was a very happy one. nearly all the family were together; two sons had returned from sea, a daughter had come home for a visit from service, and many a pleasant evening they spent as they sat over the cottage fire, while the sailors recounted the adventures they had met with in their voyages to distant lands. the fishermen had also their tales to tell, and many an old story was recalled to mind and recounted by john and his eldest sons, or a neighbour who had stepped in to see them. john, too, would read to his family, not only on a sunday evening, but on every evening in the week, when he was at home, from the book of books. "i can't see why people should fancy, as many do, that they need read the bible only on one day in the week. it was surely given us to be our guide not only for sundays, but for every day. there is no business in life in which it won't tell us how to act whenever we may have any doubts about the matter," said john one evening, after he had been reading the scriptures; and then he continued, "in every page the bible says, `do right, whatever comes of it,' and that is the very thing we ought to be reminded of, day after day, for it is the very thing we are too apt to forget." john not only read the bible, but he profited by what he read, and so did his children; and that is the reason why they were a happy, united, and prosperous family. some time after christmas, john hadden had gone out by himself on the sea-shore, with his constant companion, his spy-glass, under his arm. he walked up and down, and his mind dwelt on many of the scenes and events of his past life; he thought of the many dangers he had gone through, and of how often he had been mercifully preserved. "people do say that the life of a fisherman is a very dangerous one," he thought to himself. "they are right. how many of those i have known have lost theirs! not a year that i can call to mind but some friend or other has been drowned. such may be my end. god is merciful; he knows what is best. he will not call me away, except for some good purpose." continuing his walk, hadden's mind grew more and more serious, almost melancholy; yet it must not be said that his mind was one of a gloomy turn; no man was generally more cheerful. the day, however, had an effect on his spirits. the clouds gathered thickly in the sky, and hung low down; the wind moaned as it came across the dull, leaden-looking ocean, and found its way among the sand-hills, making the tall rushes bend before it. sheets of cold mist came rolling in every now and then towards the land; and, though they swept by, they were quickly succeeded by others, till they grew denser and denser, and a regular heavy wetting mist settled down over the face of the land and the water. john hadden was about to turn his steps homeward, when one of his sons came to remind him that it was time to return home to tea. just then a heavy squall burst on the land from the eastward, and the clouds and mist breaking away left a clear space all the way to the horizon. "i'll come, bill, i'll come, my boy," he answered, lifting, however, his glass to his eye, to take another last look over the troubled waters before he went in for the evening. just then he caught sight of a stranger in the offing, where, outside the sand-banks, a high sea was running. he looked earnestly through his glass for half a minute. "there is a large ship," he said to his son, "driving on towards the banks, and totally dismasted. unless there is a pilot aboard who knows his way through the passage, he'll be on the bank to a certainty, and then, with such a night as we shall have presently, heaven have mercy on the unfortunate people! even if the wreck should hang together till the morning, they will be washed overboard and be lost. though we missed saving the people from the wreck last year, through their own folly, we must not be dispirited. perhaps we may be able to save these. bill, go and find your brothers, and tell them that there's a ship will be on shore directly, and that we must do something to help. say nothing, though, to your mother, boy." bill hastened away, and old john still watched the ship. as he had foreseen, the stranger very soon drove on to a dangerous part of the sand-banks, and the sea before long was evidently making a clean breach over the deck. in a short time all the young haddens, and several other men, came down on the beach, bringing old john's rough-weather coat and boots, which he put on while they were getting ready to launch the boat. little ben came with his brothers. old john put his hand on the boy's shoulder, and looked earnestly into his face. "no, ben, i'll not take thee, my child, to-day," said he; "it's over-rough work we are going on; i couldn't even tell thy mother of it; so go home, and take care of her." little ben pleaded hard to be taken, but he pleaded in vain. "no, lad, no, i cannot take you," repeated the father. "go home now, go home. it may be late before we return. perhaps we shall be out all night, so mother will want you at home to keep her company. read to her, lad, out of the bible; and, i say, ben, if thy father never comes back, remember that his last words to thee were--_trust to god_. _do right, whatever comes of it_." old john hadden then joined the young men and the rest of the boat's crew, and their united strength soon launched her, with all her gear on board, into the water; and as they all leaped in, each man seizing an oar, they quickly had her through the surf, which had begun to roll in somewhat heavily. little ben stood on the top of a sand-hill, and watched them as they pulled away out to sea. his eye anxiously followed the boat as she grew less and less distinct, till she was lost to sight among the breaking seas, which leaped upwards around the sand-banks. for a time he could clearly see the wreck towards which they were directing their course. then the shades of evening increasing, and a thick mass of mist gathering round her, she also was lost to sight. ben, as his father had desired him, went home, and having reported that he had seen the boat get well off, sat himself down by the side of his mother, who was working with her needle before the fire, and taking the big bible on his knees, he began to read to her out of its sacred pages. his father's mark was at the thirteenth chapter of saint luke's gospel, and he read: "there were present at that season some that told him of the galileans, whose blood pilate had mingled with their sacrifices. and jesus answering said unto them, suppose ye that these galileans _were_ sinners above all the galileans, because they suffered such things? i tell you, nay: but, except ye repent, ye shall all likewise perish. or those eighteen, upon whom the tower in siloam fell, and slew them, think ye that they were sinners above all men that dwelt in jerusalem? i tell you, nay: but, except ye repent, ye shall all likewise perish." "father was saying that to me the other day, mother," remarked little ben. "he told me that he had known many god-fearing men to lose their lives, and many bad ones live on and remain still in their wickedness." "yes, my boy; god knows best when a servant of his has lived long enough. he calls us when he wants us," replied mrs hadden; adding, "it matters little to a christian when or how he is taken from earth. the great thing of all is to know that we are christians, not in name only, but in truth. and to be a christian is to believe on and love the dear saviour, who has done so much for us; and so to be born again of god's holy spirit, as the lord jesus christ himself has told us: `for, except a man be born again, he cannot see the kingdom of god.'" ben read on to his mother till she told him that it was time for him to go to bed. he repeated his prayers, and then he went up and lay down in the room which he and his brothers usually occupied; but he was the only one there. every now and then he awoke, expecting to hear them coming in; but he only heard the rain dashing against the lattice window, and the wind howling and whistling dismally. a heavy gale was blowing right on shore. every now and then there was a flash of vivid lightning, and a loud crash of thunder rattling away across the sky. ben tried again to go to sleep, but he could not. he was certain that his poor mother could not be sleeping. he crept down to her room, where a light was burning. her head had not pressed her pillow; she was on her knees, with her face bent down to the bed, and her hands clasped together. noiselessly ben stole back to his attic. "i can pray too, and join my prayers to mother's," he said to himself. he prayed for his father and brothers exposed in their open boat to that fierce storm near those terrific breakers, which rolled in over the sand-bank where the ship had struck. he fully understood all the dangers to which they were exposed. "god knows best what to do--god's will be done," he repeated as he rose from his knees. daylight came at last. ben got up, and, slipping on his clothes, he ran out to the sand-hills, whence he could obtain a clear view over the sea. he well knew the spot where the ship had struck. she was not there, nor was there any sign of the boat. he could not bring himself to go back to his poor mother with this account, so he went down to the beach. the shore was strewed with bits of the wreck, showing the fearful character of the gale which had blown all night, and was still blowing. hour after hour passed by; but no boat neared the shore. his mother came to look for him, and with trembling voice called him in; yet she lingered, watching anxiously with haggard eyes the foaming ocean. at length night returned. neighbours looked in, but they could give her no comfort. the boat might have run into port, but it was not likely. sadly that second night passed away. the morning brought no gleam of hope. mrs hadden's lot has been that of many fishermen's and sailors' wives. chapter four. a sorrowful home and a new friend. as day after day passed away, mrs hadden ceased to hope. neither john hadden nor any of his companions were ever again heard of. there could be no doubt that they had been lost in their gallant attempt to carry succour to their fellow-creatures on the wreck. mrs hadden was a widow and little ben was fatherless. "whom the lord loveth he chasteneth," repeated the bereaved woman over and over to herself. "oh, may he in his mercy give me strength to bear the lot he has thought fit in his wisdom to prepare for me, and make it profitable to my soul." she had many trials to bear. her husband and sons, those able to support her, were gone; and some time passed before she could gather strength to arouse herself to consider what she could do for the sustenance of little ben and herself. he was willing and eager to work, though he could not hope to gain much as yet. he soon had also another besides his mother and himself to work for. one of his sisters at service fell ill, and had to come home and be nursed; and, poor girl, it made her feel worse to know that she was thus trespassing on her mother's scanty means; though little ben did his best to cheer her up, telling her that it was just a double pleasure to have two to work for besides himself, instead of only one. he did his best certainly, though that was but little. his mother entreated him not to go out in the fishing-boats, for she dreaded (and that was but natural) that the same fate which had befallen his father and brothers might overtake him. he, however, bought, on credit, fish caught by others, and all the fishermen were ready to trust him. he carried them for sale to the houses of the neighbouring gentry and farmers. sometimes, with his basket at his back, he got a lift in a cart to the nearest town, where, in the summer season, he was able to obtain a better price than he usually asked of his regular country customers. people who had once dealt with him were always ready to deal again. they found that they could without fail trust him. he could always tell the day, and almost the very hour, the fish he had to sell had been caught, and his customers found from experience that he never deceived them. at the first, when in a frank manner he told them the exact time the fish had been landed, some were inclined to laugh, and others to be angry, fancying that he was practising on their credulity; but the more generous soon saw, from the honest blush which rose on his cheeks when he assured them that he was simply saying what he knew to be the case, that he was really speaking the truth. he thus gained many friends, and even bargain-loving housekeepers ceased to try and beat him down. his price was always moderate, and the profit he made was, after all, but a small remuneration for the toil he went through. to be up early, to be on his feet all day, and often unable to reach home till late in the evening, was now little ben's fate. he did not complain; far from it. he rejoiced that he was thus able to assist his widowed mother. john hadden had saved but little money. his boat and his nets composed the principal part of his worldly wealth, besides the cottage he lived in. the boat was gone; and the nets, without the hands which used them, could gain nothing. mrs hadden was therefore advised to sell them, with the portions of the boat-gear which had remained on shore. the times, however, were bad, she was told, and the things were sold very much under their real value. she was still thankful for what she received, and she resolved to live as frugally as possible, that her humble means might the longer hold out. her daughter was a heavy expense to her. poor susan grew worse and worse; yet she still lingered on, utterly helpless to look at, yet not helpless in reality, for she was supported by faith in the lord jesus christ. she was perfectly happy, as far as she herself was concerned; her only regret being that she deprived her mother of part of the scanty means she so much required for herself. at length, full of hope and joy, she died. little ben wept bitterly for the loss of his sister: he had never for one moment thought of the money spent on her. the bereaved mother mourned more silently. mrs hadden was yet to be further tried. a letter one day reached her from a stranger. it told her that her only surviving son, besides ben, had been cast away in the far off pacific ocean, and, with many others, murdered or held captive by savages. the writer, thomas barlow, said that he and ned were great friends, and that they had agreed, should any misfortune happen to either, the survivor should write home, and give an account of what had occurred. barlow wrote, in fulfilment of his promise, addressing his letter to john hadden: all the hope he could give was that ned might have escaped with his life, as some white men had been known from time to time to be living among those savages; but the opinion was that all their shipmates had been murdered. the writer added that he, with six other men only of all the crew, had made their escape in the longboat of the wrecked vessel, and, after suffering great hardships, had been picked up at sea by a ship bound for sydney, new south wales. "poor ned! poor ned!" exclaimed little ben, crying bitterly; "he must not be lost! i'll go and look for him, mother. if he is alive, i'll find him, and bring him back to you." "oh no! no, ben! don't you go away from me," cried the poor widow. "i should indeed be forlorn if i was to lose you. yet, ned! ned! poor ned! where can you be--among savages, or killed? you wouldn't find him, ben; they would only treat you in the same way, and i should lose you, ben. it cannot be: oh, don't--don't think of it, ben!" and the poor widow at length found some relief to her feelings in a flood of tears. it was seldom that she gave way in this manner; but the announcement of ned's too probable fate, and the thought of losing ben, completely overcame her. the idea, however, that he would go to sea and find his brother had entered little ben's head, and, moreover, that they together would bring back wealth sufficient to support their mother in comfort. that idea was not very easily driven away. day after day it occurred to him. his difficulty was to persuade his mother to let him go. he did not understand as clearly as an older person might have done, that he could not go away without making her very unhappy. he argued that he should be away only a short time, and that then he should come back so rich, and be able to take such good care of her, that she would gain ample amends for the pain she might suffer by parting with him for a season. poor fellow! he little knew the dangers and hardships he would have to encounter in a sailor's life. ben's mind was full of his plans, and they served at all events to beguile many a weary mile, as he trudged on through the country, contentedly as usual, selling his fish. one day, however, when walking along the streets of the town, he met with an accident. a horse, dragging a cart, took fright and was dashing along the road, near the sea, towards a group of little children whose nursemaids were standing chatting to each other, not thinking much about their young charges. the women, startled at hearing the horse coming, were so frightened that they knew not what to do. they snatched up one child after the other, running here and there, and leaving several of the little creatures, unconscious of their danger, in the very way of the maddened animal. ben saw the peril in which the children were placed, and, throwing down his basket of fish, he sprang forward and caught the reins, which were hanging over the shafts. he had not strength to stop the horse, though he turned it aside, while he still hung on to the reins; he was at the same time dragged down, and the wheel passed over his side and one of his legs. the horse, thus turned from his course, dashed against some railings, and was stopped. the children were saved. a gentleman looking out of a window saw the accident, and the gallant way in which little ben had behaved. he rushed out of the house, took him in, placed him on a sofa, and sent for a surgeon. his leg was not broken, but some of his ribs were. the gentleman said that ben should remain at his house till he was cured. he also at once sent off to mrs hadden to inform her of the accident, and to assure her that her son was well taken care of. immediately she received the sad news, she set off to see ben. she could not bear the thought of letting him remain with strangers, however kind they might prove. it was almost midnight when she arrived. ben's friend received her kindly, and her heart was comforted when she found that her son was going on so well. the gentleman told her that he was lieutenant charlton, of the navy, and again assured her that he would take good care of the boy. satisfied that ben's new friend would keep his word, she returned home the next day. in less than six weeks ben was almost himself again. lieutenant charlton nursed the poor boy as if he had been his own son, and showed how much pleased he was with him. ben spoke frankly to him, told him of his past life, hopes, and wishes. "well, my boy, i will take you to sea with me when next i go, and that will be, i hope, before long," said the lieutenant to him one day. "i should like to go, sir, very much indeed, but mother says that she cannot part with me," answered ben. "i will speak to your mother, and explain to her how seamen in the british navy are now treated," said the lieutenant. "she, i daresay, believes that they are no more cared for than they used to be at one time; whereas, the truth is that they are better looked after than many people on shore, and certainly much better than the seamen in the merchant service." "it is not ill-treatment either she or i fear, sir," said ben. "i'd go anywhere with you, sir; but mother cannot bear the thought of parting with me--that's the truth of it, sir." "i'll speak to her about the matter, and perhaps she may see things in a different light," said lieutenant charlton. "perhaps i may be able to find a home for her while you are away, and then she will be content to let you go, knowing that you are well provided for." ben thanked the lieutenant very much. he made up his mind, however, that, unless his mother was perfectly ready to let him go to sea, nothing should persuade him to quit her. he had not forgotten his father's last words, "do right, whatever comes of it." "the bible says, `honour thy father and thy mother,'" said ben to himself. "i should not be honouring my mother if i was to disobey her wishes, even though i was to become an officer, and see all the world, and come back with my pockets full of gold. no, no! lieutenant charlton is very kind and very good--that i am sure of; but, poor dear mother, i'll not leave her, unless she bids me, in god's name, go and prosper." ben was now sufficiently recovered to return home. he went back in a cart provided for him by the good lieutenant, who had also during his confinement not been unmindful of his mother. ben found that some ladies had called on her, saying that they were the parents of the children who had been saved by ben's bravery and presence of mind, and they insisted, as the least they could do, on supplying all her wants during his absence. they also promised further aid when they had learned how they could best bestow it. indeed, mrs hadden had been much better off of late than she had been for a long time before. "i think, mother, that we should say, besides `do right, whatever comes of it,' `whatever happens is for the best,' even though it looks to us like a great misfortune. i thought that i was very unfortunate when i got knocked down and had my ribs broken, and yet you see how much good has come out of it. you have been well looked after, and i have gained more friends than i might otherwise have found during all my life." "yes, ben," answered mrs hadden, "yes. god orders all for the best, there's no doubt about that; but his ways are not our ways, and we cannot always see how that which happens is to work for our good as clearly as we now see how your broken ribs which you speak of have brought me many comforts i should not otherwise have enjoyed. your father, ben, would have said what i do; and i often think, now that he is in heaven enjoying perfect happiness, how he blesses god that he was born a poor humble fisherman, with the grace and the religious privileges he enjoyed, instead of some rich man, whose heart might have remained unchanged, or instead of one who might have put his faith in the pope of rome, or in that wicked impostor we were reading about, mahomet. ah, ben, we often are not thankful enough for all the religious advantages we enjoy, and, above all, that we have so fully and freely the gospel placed before us." chapter five. a turn in ben's history. little ben had now sufficiently recovered to follow his former business, for though not as strong as before his accident, he calculated on getting an occasional lift in a cart, so as to make his rounds with less difficulty. the first day he went down to the beach when the boats came in, he was welcomed with a friendly smile from all the fishermen. they had heard how he had saved the little children from being run over by the horse and cart. first one brought him a couple of fine fish, saying, "that's for you, ben. don't talk of payment this time." then another did the same thing, and another, and another, till his basket was so full that he could scarcely carry it. he thanked the kind fishermen all very much, and said that he was sure he did not deserve that from them; but they replied that they were better judges than he was of that matter, and that they only wished they could afford to fill his basket in the same manner every morning. this was very pleasant to ben's feelings, and he got so good a price for the fish, which were very fine, that he was ever afterwards able to pay ready money for all he bought. day after day ben went his rounds; but, though he generally got a fair price for the fish he sold, he could scarcely gain sufficient to procure food and clothing for himself and his mother, and firing and lights, and to pay the taxes with which even they were charged. sometimes he did not sell all the fish he had bought, and, as fish will not keep long, he and his mother had to eat them themselves, or to sell them to other poor people at a low rate. then he wore out a good many pairs of shoes, as well as other clothes, as he had to be out in all weathers; for those who wanted a dish of fish for dinner would not have been satisfied had he waited till the next morning to bring it to them on account of a storm of rain or snow. mrs hadden had thought of taking to sell fish herself, to relieve ben somewhat, but he urged her not to make the attempt. she was not strong, and, although a fisherman's wife, had been unaccustomed to out-door work. she had been in service during her younger days as a nurse, where she enjoyed every comfort she could desire. when she married, though no man's cottage was better kept than john hadden's, and no children were better cared for and brought up, she could not help him in the way the wives of most of the fishermen were expected to do. "but then," as john remarked, when some of his friends warned him that he was a lout to marry a fine lady and a useless person, "she is a god-fearing, pious woman, and she'll do her best in whatever i wish her to do." so she did, and till the day of his death john never had reason to regret his choice. "god will show us what ought to be done, and give the strength to do it, if i ought to go out and sell fish to obtain our daily food," said mrs hadden, after she had one day been talking over the subject with ben. "yes, mother, there is no doubt but that god will show us what ought to be done," he answered. "but the minister was telling us on sunday that god brings about what he wishes to take place through human means, and does not work what we call miracles; so i think that, if he hasn't given you the strength of body to carry about a basket of fish through the country, he does not wish you so to employ yourself." the discussion was cut short by the appearance of lieutenant charlton, who had ridden up to the door of the cottage. ben ran out to welcome him and to hold his horse, but he said, "no, we must get somebody else to take care of the animal while you and i have a talk with your mother over matters." ben easily found a lad to lead his kind friend's horse up and down on the sand, and then he accompanied the lieutenant into the cottage. "i have a great deal to say to you, mrs hadden, and so i hope that you will hear me patiently," said the lieutenant, sitting down in the chair john hadden used to occupy. "first, i must tell you that i am going away to sea. i have a mother who is a great invalid, and requires the constant attendance of a sensible, good-tempered christian woman who can read to her, and talk and amuse her. i know no person so well qualified for the post as you are. my sister, who lives with her, thinks so likewise, and will be most thankful to have your assistance. in this way, if you will accept our offer, you yourself will be well provided for. now, with regard to little ben. selling fish is a very respectable occupation, but not a very profitable one, i suspect, from what i can hear, and i think that your son is fitted for something better. to be sure, he may some day become a full-grown fishmonger, but that can only be some years hence; and, from what he has told me, i find that he has a strong wish to go to sea, though, unless you were comfortably provided for, nothing would tempt him to leave you. now you see my plan: you shall take care of my mother, and i will take care of your son. what do you say to it?" "that i am most grateful to you for your kindness, sir," answered the widow in a trembling voice; "thus much i can say at once; but i am sure that you will excuse me for not giving a decided answer immediately. i should wish to lay the matter before god in prayer, and ben and i will go over to-morrow morning to give you our reply, if you can kindly wait so long. i wish to do what is right; but ah, sir, it is a hard thing to have to part from my only boy, after having lost so many!" "though my time is short before i must join my ship, of which i am first lieutenant, and i am much hurried, i will gladly wait till to-morrow morning, that you may decide for the best," answered the lieutenant. "i shall not be, i hope, less your friend, though you may differ in opinion with me and decline my offer." the kind officer, however, before he took his departure, told mrs hadden, in case she should give ben leave to accompany him, what preparations she should make for him, saying that all expenses would be borne by the friends who wished to serve her. he assured her that ben would be well treated, and would probably find many good men on board ship, who would support him in doing right, though he would of course find many who would do their utmost to lead him astray; that, if he continued as he had begun, he would certainly be made a petty officer, and very likely, if he wished it, a warrant-officer, when he would be able to retire on a comfortable pension, and at all events, in case of being wounded, he would have greenwich hospital to fall back on. mrs hadden and little ben thought and talked and prayed over the subject after the lieutenant was gone, and the result was that his offer was accepted. instead of leaping for joy, as ben thought he should do if this conclusion were come to, he threw his arms round his mother's neck, exclaiming, "oh, mother, mother, how can i be so cruel and hard-hearted as to think of leaving you! i'll stay with you, and work for you as before, if you wish it, indeed i will. i would rather stay-- i shall be very happy at home with you." mrs hadden knew that these feelings were very natural, and, believing that it was to ben's advantage that he should go to sea with so kind an officer as lieutenant charlton, she would not allow her resolution to be shaken, though her mother's heart was saying all the time, "let him give it up, and stay at home with you." children often but little understand how much parents give up for what they, at all events, believe will benefit those children. the lieutenant had desired mrs hadden to let him know as soon as she had decided, as, should ben not go with him, he should take some other boy in his place. in spite of all she could do, tears blotted the paper as she wrote her humble thanks accepting his offer. the lieutenant remarked it, observing, "poor woman! i suppose it must be a trial to her to part with her boy--i did not think much of that." "indeed it must be, my son," said mrs charlton, his mother, who overheard him: "i found it very hard to part with you--though i did so because i thought it was right." "you did, mother, i am sure, and providentially i fell into good hands, and have every reason to be thankful that i went to sea," said the lieutenant. "i trust that mrs hadden will hear little ben say the same when he comes back from sea," said mrs charlton. "i pray that i may be able to do my duty towards the boy, and watch carefully over him," said the lieutenant. "depend on it, god will aid you. he always does those who trust in him and desire to serve him," answered mrs charlton. "tell the boy also, should he at any time appear anxious about his mother, that i also will do my best to take care of her." mrs hadden had indeed reason to say, "truly god careth for the fatherless and widows who put their trust in him." ben's outfitting operations now went on briskly. some kind ladies sent a piece of strong calico to make him some shirts, and from morning to night mrs hadden's busy fingers were plying her needle till they were finished. other friends supplied his different wants, and he was soon quite ready to accompany lieutenant charlton. the day to leave home came. the worst part of the business was parting from his mother; yet, great as was the pain, it was not so great as might have been expected. people when conscious of doing right are saved much grief and suffering; especially, if they trust in god, they know that he can and will deliver them out of all their troubles. "i shall come back, mother, to you; i know i shall. god will take care of me; i will try and do right, and serve him faithfully; and perhaps, mother, i may bring back ned with me," said ben to his mother, who had taken up her abode with mrs charlton. these were his last words to her as he again and again embraced her, and then, tearing himself away, he ran after the lieutenant, who was walking rapidly down the street towards the inn from which the coach started that was to convey them to portsmouth. ben felt as if he had reached a new world even as he travelled along the road, much more so when he entered london itself, where mr charlton went to the house of a relation. ben was shown into the kitchen, and handed over to the care of the page. he found that, at the very outset of his career, he was to meet with temptation to do wrong. after the late dinner, the page came down with two rich-looking dishes untouched, and took them into a little room, where he had invited ben to meet him. "be quick, let us eat them up," he said, "all but a small part of each; the housekeeper will never find it out, and i can tell cook how much i heard people praising them." "no; unless the housekeeper or cook gives it to us, i will touch nothing," answered ben stoutly. "nonsense! wherever did you learn such stuff?" exclaimed the page in surprise. "why, we think nothing of that sort of thing; what harm can come of it?" "i don't see that that has anything to do with the matter," said ben. "i've been taught always to do right, whatever comes of it; and 'tis doing very far from right to take what doesn't belong to one; it is doing very wrong--it is stealing." "i never should have thought that," said the page; "i wouldn't steal sixpence from no one, that i wouldn't! but just taking something out of a dish of good things that comes down from the parlour is altogether different." "now i don't see any difference at all," said ben, more earnestly than before; "the long and the short of the matter is, that it's wrong, and we mustn't do wrong even if we fancy good is to come out of it. just the contrary: we must do right, whatever we think may come out of it. god says, `_do right_.' he'll take care of the rest." the page did not utter another word, and ben had the satisfaction of seeing him take the dishes into the housekeeper's room. this was a great encouragement to him. "if i can persuade one person to do right in what he thinks a trifle, i may persuade others; and, at all events, i will go on, with god's help, doing so whenever i have an opportunity," said ben to himself. "that is right, i know." the page was not at all the less friendly after this, but he treated ben with much more respect, and ben was very sorry to part with him. nearly his last words to him were, "never mind what you have been accustomed to think or to do, but just remember to do right at all times. jesus christ, who came on earth to save us, and to teach us how to live and act in the world, has left us an example that we should walk in his steps. and if we were always to ask ourselves what he would have done if he had been put in our place, and do accordingly, that will be the right thing for us." ben spoke so naturally and so earnestly, that the page didn't think it anything like canting; but he answered, "i'll try and do what you say, ben, and when you're away at sea perhaps you'll remember me, and ask god to show me what's right. he's more likely to listen to you than to me." "oh no, no! don't suppose that for a moment!" exclaimed ben. "he's ready to hear all who call upon him faithfully. he's very kind, and loving, and gentle. he waits to be gracious. we should never get better if we waited to get better of ourselves. we must go to him just as we are, trusting in the lord jesus christ to wash away our sins; that will do it--nothing else." little ben had an advantage over a very large number of people, educated and rich, as well as poor and humble. he had been all his life accustomed to read the bible, and so he knew more about god and his will, and could talk more rightly about him, than those who do not read god's word can possibly do. he went daily to the fountain, and kept his pitcher full of the water of life. they who seldom or never go, must have their pitchers empty. chapter six. life on shipboard. mr charlton had been appointed as first lieutenant of the ajax, a thirty-six gun frigate, fitting-out for the pacific station. on his arrival at portsmouth, he at once repaired on board, taking ben with him. as they pulled up the harbour in a shore boat towards the frigate, which lay lashed alongside a hulk, ben was astonished at the number of ships he saw, and the vast size of many of them. it seemed to him as if the wind could never affect such monstrous constructions, even to move them along through the water; and as to the sea tossing them about as it did the boats to which he was accustomed, that seemed impossible. several of them carried a hundred huge iron guns, and others even a larger number. he saw many more on the stocks in the dockyard, and others moored up the harbour, and he thought to himself, "now, if people of different nations would but live at peace with each other, and try to do each other all the good in the world they can, instead of as much harm as possible, and employ their time in building merchant vessels and other works for the advantage of their fellow-creatures, how very much better it would be!"--many wise and good men think as did little ben, and yet they have to acknowledge that, while nations continue wickedly ambitious, and jealous of each other's wealth and power, it is the duty of governments to be armed and prepared to resist aggression. ben felt very much astonished, and almost frightened, when he found himself on board the frigate, at the din and bustle which was going forward, and the seeming confusion--the shrill whistle of the boatswain, and the hoarse shouting of his mates, as yards were swayed up, and coils of rope and stores of all sorts were hoisted on board. ben could not understand one-half that he heard, so many strange expressions were used--indeed, there seemed to be a complete babel of tongues, with, unhappily, much swearing and abuse. ben thought that the work would have gone on much more satisfactorily without it. he observed, after a time, that which appeared confusion was in reality order. each gang of men was working under a petty officer, who received his orders from superior officers, of whom there were three or four stationed in different parts of the ship; and they, again, were all under the command of the officer in charge. each man attended only to his own business, and, let all the petty officers bawl as loud as they might, he was deaf to the voice of every one of them except to that of the officer placed over him. as ben was left standing by himself alone, he had an opportunity of making observations on what was going forward. he would have naturally formed a very unfavourable opinion of a man-of-war, had he seen her only thus in all the hurry of fitting-out. he was beginning to think that he was forgotten, when a boy of about his own age, neatly dressed in white trousers, and shirt with a broad worked collar, came up to him, and said-- "the first lieutenant wants you: come with me." ben was very glad to move. "what's your name?" asked the boy. ben told him. "mine is tom martin," said his companion; "i'm the boatswain's son. mr charlton says i'm to look after you, and tell you what you want to know. but you've been to sea before, haven't you?" "only in fishing-boats," answered ben; "and i shall be much obliged to you for telling me what i ought to know." "as to that, you'll soon pick it up; for you don't look like one of those chaps who come aboard with the hay-seed still in their hair," said tom. "here we are at the gun-room door." mr charlton's voice and eye were as kind as ever, though he spoke in rather a stiffer manner than was his custom on shore. he told ben that he had had his name entered on the ship's books, and that the boatswain would look after him, and give him instruction with his own son; besides this, that he was to be one of the boys employed in attending on the gun-room officers, which was an advantage, as it would give him plenty to do, and some little pay besides. "you may go forward now," said mr charlton. "the gun-room steward will tell you what to do when he comes on board. and remember, martin, i shall depend on you to show hadden everything he ought to know, and all about the ship." "ay, ay, sir," said tom, pulling a lock of his hair, as of course he held his hat in his hand. then he gave ben a nudge, to signify that he was to come away with him. "you are a lucky chap to have the first lieutenant for your friend," observed tom, as they went forward. "yes, he's a kind, good gentleman as ever lived," answered ben warmly. "that may be; but what i mean is, if you keep wide awake, and try to win his favour, you'll have a comfortable time of it, and get a good rating before the ship is paid off," observed tom. ben, resolved as he was to keep to his principles, and to be ready to own them on all fit occasions, looked at his companion, and said, "i know, martin, there's one thing i have to do, and that is, to do right whatever comes of it. if i do right, i need have no fear but that, in the long-run, i shall please the first lieutenant and all the officers; at any rate, i shall please god, and that's of more consequence than anything else." "oh, i see what sort of a chap you are!" observed tom. "well, don't go and talk like that to others--they mayn't take it as i do; for my part, i don't mind it." and tom put on a very self-pleased, patronising air. "i don't see that i have said anything out of the way," remarked ben. "it stands to reason that to do right is the only way to please god, and that to please god is the wisest thing to do, as he gives us everything we have; and of course he will give more to those who try to please him than to those who do not. there are many other reasons, but that is one, is it not?" "yes, i suppose so; but i haven't thought much about such things," said tom. "then do think about them. i know that it is a good thing to do," said ben. "i'll try," whispered tom. it must not be supposed that ben and tom often talked together like this at first. there was too much bustle going forward for anything of the sort; they, as well as everybody in the ship, were kept hard at work from sunrise to sunset, and they were both so sleepy at night, when they turned into their hammocks, that they instantly fell fast asleep. ben had thus an opportunity of observing the whole process of fitting-out a ship. first he saw the huge, heavy guns hoisted on board, by means of tackles, with as much ease as an angler draws a big fish out of the water; then they were mounted on their carriages, and secured along the sides. tackles, he learned, are formed by reeving ropes several times backwards and forwards through blocks. then the topmasts and yards were got on board, swayed up, and crossed. next, stores of all sorts were brought alongside--anchors, and chain-cables, and coils of rope, and round shot, and sails, and canvas, and paint, and tools for the various departments, and muskets, and cutlasses, and pistols, and bullets. no powder, however, came; and ben learned that that would not be brought on board till the ship was out at spithead. this rule was made because of accidents which had occurred formerly, ships having been blown up in the harbour, and been not only themselves destroyed, but caused the destruction of others, and the lives of very many people. ben, however, saw the place where it was to be kept--a room lined with iron, with two doors. between the doors was a sort of anteroom, and the outer door had an iron grating in it. there were means of flooding the magazine, in case of the ship catching fire. last of all, the provisions and water were got on board--casks of beef and pork, and flour, and groceries, and spirits; and there were candles, and clothing, and (more necessary than most other things) water came alongside in lighters, and was pumped up into large iron tanks at the bottom of the ship. these tanks were large enough to allow a person to get into them to clean them out. they were in the inside coated with lime, and ben was told that the water was kept in them fresh and pure for years. the tools and stores were under the charge of three different warrant-officers--the gunner, the boatswain, and the carpenter. the first had everything connected with the guns, the shot, and powder; the boatswain had charge of all the ropes, sails, anchors, and cables; and the last of all, the woodwork, and spars, and pumps. the provisions and clothing were under charge of the purser, who was an officer of superior rank, living with the lieutenants and surgeon. there was another officer, called the master, who also ranked with the lieutenants. he had charge of the navigation of the ship. when the ship was completely fitted out, a body of soldiers called marines, under the command of a lieutenant, came on board. there was also one cabin full of young gentlemen, called midshipmen, their ages varying from thirteen up to five or six-and-twenty; with them, however, were the captain's and purser's clerks, and master's assistants, and assistant surgeons. they had two or three boys to attend on them. ben was very glad that he was not selected for the duty, as the young gentlemen were frequently somewhat thoughtless in the way they treated the boys. above all the rest was the captain, who was answerable to no one on board; but he was bound by certain laws laid down for his guidance, and, if he broke any of them, would have to explain the reason to the government at home, administered by the board of admiralty. ben soon understood that all these people could not live together in harmony, nor the ship be properly managed, without prompt and exact obedience to all laws and orders. the captain must obey the laws--the articles of war, as they are called--and the rules and regulations of the service, and all the officers and men the orders issued by those above them. one of the last things done was to bend the sails, that is, to stretch them out on the yards; and the men were then exercised in furling them, which means, rolling them up; in again loosing them; and in reefing, that is, reducing their size by rolling up only a portion of each sail. at length, the ship being ready for sea, she sailed out to spithead. as ben, who was on the forecastle with tom martin, saw her gliding through the water for the first time, like a stately swan, he felt very proud of belonging to her, though he was nearly the youngest boy on board, and of the least consequence. "so i am," he said to himself, recollecting this; "but still, though i am but small, i can do as well as i am able whatever i am set to do; that, at all events, will be doing right." ben thought rightly that no one is too young or too insignificant to do his best in whatever he is set to do, never mind what that doing may be. the powder was received on board, and until it was stowed carefully away in the magazine, all lights were extinguished. if people were as careful to avoid sin and its consequences as sailors are to avoid blowing up their ship, how different would be the world from what it is! yet how far more sad are the consequences of sin! a few more stores and provisions came off; so did the captain. blue peter was hoisted [see note ]; all visitors were ordered out of the ship; despatches and letters for many distant places she was expected to visit were received; the anchor was hove up to the merry sound of the fife as the seamen tramped round and round the capstan, and, her canvas being spread to the wind, she glided majestically onward, her voyage now fairly commenced. the wind was fair, and the frigate quickly ran down channel, and took her departure from the lizard, one of the south-western points of england. she had a wide extent of ocean before her to traverse, and many weeks would pass before land would be again sighted. still, the master, with the aid of the compass, his sextant, and chronometer, was able to steer his course with as much certainty as if land had been all the time in sight. martin told ben, jokingly, that the object of the sextant was to shoot the stars and the sun; but ben found that it was to measure the height of the sun above the horizon, and the distance of certain stars from each other. the chronometer, he learned, was a large watch made to keep exact time, so that the time in london was known wherever the ship went. ben saw another instrument, a reel with a long line and a triangular piece of board at the end of it. the line was divided into twelve or more parts; the end with the board attached was thrown overboard, and, as the line ran out, a seaman held up a little sand-glass shaped like an hour-glass. by it the number of knots or divisions run out were easily measured, and the number of miles the ship sailed over in one hour was ascertained, and the distance made good each day calculated. ben looked at the compass with the greatest respect, and was much pleased when mr martin, the boatswain, could take him and tom aft to explain its use to them, and to show them how the ship was steered. as they were not officers, they could not go when they liked to that part of the ship, only when they were sent to perform some piece of duty. ben seldom exchanged a word with mr charlton, who, however, never failed when he passed to give him a kind glance of the eye, to show him that he was not forgotten. this made him feel happy and contented. people of all ages feel thus when they know that a kind friend is looking after them. how much more, then, should christians feel happy and contented when they know that their father in heaven, the kindest of friends, and at the same time the most powerful, who never slumbers nor sleeps, is ever watching over them to guard them from all evil; and that if he allows what the world calls a misfortune to overtake them, it is for their real good. ben soon learned all about a ship, for, having been from his childhood on the water, things were not so strange to him as they are to a boy who had come from some inland place with, as tom said, the hay-seed in his hair. he was as active and intelligent and daring as any of the boys in the ship, not only of his own size, but of those much bigger and older. though also he had his duties in the gun-room to attend to, he learned to go aloft, and to furl and reef sails, and to knot and splice, and to perform many other tasks required of sailors. he made many friends, too, among the best men and the petty officers, for he was always obliging and ready to serve any one he could in a lawful way; but any one who had asked ben to do what he knew to be wrong would have found him very far from obliging. day after day the frigate sailed on over a smooth ocean, it being scarcely necessary to alter a sail, but the crew were not idle; the ship had to be got into perfect order below, and there was much painting, and cleaning, and scrubbing; then the men were exercised in reefing and furling sails, and going through all the operations necessary to bring the ship to an anchor. though no gale threatened, topgallant masts and their yards were sent down on deck, and everything was made snug, so that they might quickly make the proper preparations when one should come on. the men were also daily exercised at the guns. to each gun a particular crew was attached, who cast it loose, went through all the movements of loading and firing over and over again, and then once more secured it. sometimes powder was fired, and, whenever there was a calm, an empty cask with a target on it was towed off some way from the ship, and shot were fired at it. on several occasions, in the middle of the night perhaps, that dreadful sound of the fire-bell was heard, and then the men sprang into their clothes--each man going to his proper station; the fire-buckets were filled, the pumps manned, and all stood ready to obey the orders of their officers to meet the danger. "very well, my men; you were quickly at your stations," cried the captain. "pipe down." the men then returned to their hammocks. really there was no fire, but they were summoned to their posts that, in case a fire should take place, they might be cool and collected, and know exactly what to do. this was very different from "calling wolf," because a sailor _must_ obey whatever signal is made to him or order given by his superior, without stopping to consider why it is issued. when the drum beats to quarters, he must fly to his station, though he knows perfectly well that no enemy is near. one day ben and tom, with the gunner, the purser's steward, and the sergeant of marines, were seated in the boatswain's cabin to enjoy what he called a little social and religious conversation. all the party were above the average in intelligence. this was shown by their having risen from their original position. various subjects had been discussed. "to my mind, as i have often said, a ship is just like a little world," observed mr martin, who had some clear notions on many matters. "every man in it has his duty to do, and if he doesn't do it, not only he, but others, suffer. it is not his business to be saying, why am i to do this? why am i to do that? it's the law in the articles of war, or the rules and regulations of the service; that's enough. if you join the service, you must obey those rules. it's your business, though, to learn what they are. now, that's just the same when a man becomes a christian. he mustn't do what he would like to do according to the natural man; but he must learn christ's laws, and try and obey them. just see how the men on board a man-of-war are practised and exercised in all sorts of ways to make them good seamen. here they are, from morning till night, exercising at the guns, shortening sail, reefing topsails, drilling with the small-arms, mustering at divisions, going to quarters, and fifty other things; and though sometimes they don't like the work, it's all for their good and the good of the service, and to enable them to support the honour and glory of our country. just in the same way, i've often thought, god manages us human creatures. we are sent into the world to fit us to become his subjects; we are exercised and practised in all sorts of ways, and, though we often think the way very hard, we may be sure that it is for our good, and, what is more, to fit us to support his honour and glory." "i never saw the matter in that light before," observed mr thomson, the gunner. "i've often thought how there came to be so much pain and sorrow in the world, and how so many things go wrong in it." "why, look ye here, thomson, just for this cause, because men don't obey god's laws," exclaimed mr martin. "adam and eve broke them first, and their children have been breaking them ever since. sin did it all. what would become of us aboard here, if the ship, however well-built she might be, was badly fitted out at first, and if we all were constantly neglecting our duty and disobeying orders? why, we should pretty soon run her ashore, or founder, or blow her up, or, if we met an enemy, have to haul down our flag." the sergeant and purser's steward, who were both serious-minded men, though not much enlightened, agreed heartily with mr martin; and ben learned many an important lesson from listening from time to time to their conversation. their example had also a very good effect on the ship's company generally; there was far less swearing and quarrelling and bad conversation than in many ships; for even the best of men-of-war are very far from what they should be. in course of time three or four of the men met together regularly for prayer, reading the scriptures, and mutual instruction; and by degrees others joined them. as they were very anxious to have a place where they could meet free from interruption, mr martin allowed them the use of his storeroom, which, though the spot was dark and close, they considered a great privilege. he also occasionally united with them, and came oftener and oftener, until he always was present unless prevented by his duty. ben gladly accompanied him, and he also took tom with him; who, however, did not appear to value the advantage, for he was generally found fast asleep in a corner at the end of the meeting. altogether the ajax was a happy ship. on one important point the widow's prayers for her son were heard, and ben was kept out of the temptations and the influence of bad example to which poor sailor boys are so often exposed. ------------------------------------------------------------------------ note . a blue flag so called; it gives notice that the ship is about to sail. chapter seven. among the icebergs. ben found the weather growing hotter and hotter as the ship approached the line, which mr martin told him was not really a line, but only a circle supposed to be drawn round the widest part of the globe, and where the sun at noon appears directly overhead. still no one was much the worse for the heat; and gradually, as the ship sailed farther south, the weather became cooler and cooler, till it was as cold as it is in the winter in england; and ben learned that the frigate was approaching the southern pole. she was then to sail round--not the pole, but a vast headland called cape horn; and on the other side, that is to say, to the west of it, to enter the wide pacific ocean. ben had shown so much intelligence, and had made himself so generally useful, that mr charlton had placed him in a watch, that he might learn to do his duty by night as well as by day. scarcely had the ship's head been turned to the west than heavy weather came on. the seas rolled in vast watery heights one after the other in quick succession, so that no sooner had the frigate risen to the foaming summit of one high wave, than she sank down into the other, surrounded by dark, watery precipices, which looked as if they must break on board and overwhelm her. ben, as he stood on the deck of the big ship of which he had become so proud, and watched the succession of the mountainous seas on every side, felt how insignificant she was, how helpless were all on board, unless trusting in the protection of god. now she would slowly climb up the top of a huge sea; there she would remain, other seas following and seeming to chase the one on which she rode; then down again she would glide into the valley, once more to rise to the crest of another sea. if the spectacle was grand and awful in the daytime, much more so was it at night, when the ship went rushing on into darkness, no one knowing what she was to encounter ahead. the danger was not only imaginary, but real, for she was already in the latitude of icebergs, which, at that season of the year, float far away north from their original positions. the captain had charged all on deck to keep a very sharp look-out, and mr charlton had said to ben, "you have as bright a pair of eyes as anybody on board. keep them wide open, and if you see anything like a glimmer of light through the darkness, and feel the cold greater than before, sing out sharply, there will be an iceberg ahead." ben resolved to do as he was told, but he did not think it likely that a little fellow like himself could be of much use. he would naturally have been very much alarmed had he been by himself in such a position, but he saw every one round him cool and collected, and he therefore felt free from fear. the four hours of his watch had nearly expired. he had been all the time peering into the darkness, thinking more than once that he saw what he had been told to look out for. mr martin and three or four of the best men in the ship were on the forecastle with him, all likewise looking out. suddenly he saw what appeared like a huge sheet shaken before him by invisible hands, and a chill struck his cheek. this was what he was to look for. he sang out lustily, "an iceberg ahead--right ahead!" "starboard the helm!" sang out a voice from aft; and at those words the sheets and traces were flattened aft, while every man on deck flew to his post. in another instant the stout ship would have been a helpless wreck, foundering under the base of a huge iceberg. there was no space to spare. foaming, roaring seas were seen dashing against its sides as the toiling frigate ploughed her way past it, near enough, mr martin said, to heave a biscuit on it. some minutes passed before any one breathed freely; the danger had been so great and terrible that it was difficult to believe that it had passed away. "you deserve well of us, ben; and, depend on it, the captain and mr charlton are not likely to overlook what you have done," said mr martin. "though i had my eyes wide open, i did not see the berg till some seconds after you had sung out; and in a touch-and-go matter, a few seconds makes all the difference whether a ship is saved or lost." there was great danger as the ship sailed on, with the seas on her side, of their breaking on board, and she was therefore once more kept away before the wind. the watch was called, and ben turned in. all those now on deck kept their eyes very wide open, watching for another iceberg, which it was likely they might meet with. ben in his hammock slept soundly; he had prayed, and commended himself and all with him to his heavenly father's protection. "if the ship should sink, i may awake and find myself with him; but why should i fear? he will, i know, receive me graciously, and i shall meet my dear father and brothers with him." and with such thoughts the christian sailor boy dropped asleep. for several days the ship ran on, the captain hauling up gradually to the north as the weather moderated. her course was then somewhat easterly, and after some time a report ran through the ship that land might any hour be seen on the starboard bow; that is to say, on the right side. it was said that, on such occasions, the person who first discovered land often received the reward of a sovereign, or half a sovereign; and when ben heard this, he became very anxious to obtain it. he had been the first to see the iceberg, why should he not be the first to see land? he was afraid, however, that his chance was small, as he had his duties in the gun-room to attend to, and he could seldom get away long enough at a time to go to the masthead. still he determined to try. one thing struck him as very wonderful, that, after sailing on so many weeks, and not having once seen land, the officer should be able to tell the exact spot at which they should arrive, and the time within a few hours. the place for which the frigate was bound is called valparaiso, in the republic of chili. she was, after leaving it, to go in search of the admiral on the station, and then to proceed on her voyage across the pacific ocean. mr martin told ben and tom that the pacific is full of groups of islands, some of them of considerable size, with lofty mountains on them; others composed of coral, many of them measuring not a mile from one end to the other, and raised but a few feet above the surface of the ocean. "ah, among so many, what chance shall i have of finding ned?" sighed ben. "why, as to chance, my boy, about as much chance as finding a needle in a bundle of hay," answered mr martin. "but i thought, ben, you knew better than to talk of chance. if your brother is alive,--and you shouldn't count too much upon that,--if it's god's will that you should find him, you will; but, if not, though we should visit fifty islands,-- and i daresay we shall see more than that number,--you won't." "i know, i know. i don't mean chance. not a sparrow falls to the ground but god sees it; but i mean that, among so many islands, it is less likely that the frigate should visit the one where ned may be." "as i said before, if god means you to find your brother, even though there were ten times as many islands as there are, and the ship was only to visit twenty of them, or ten, or five of them, or only one for that matter, you will find him. all you have to do is to trust in god that he'll do what is best." "yes, i know that," said ben. "father always used to say, `do right, whatever comes of it.' god will take care that good will come out of it in the end." chapter eight. do right, whatever comes of it. "land! land!" shouted little ben, from the foretop-masthead; for he had been out of his hammock and aloft before break of day, that he might have the best opportunity of seeing land if it was to be seen. "yes, yes, that must be the land; those are tops of mountains covered with snow, just what mr martin told me might be seen before sunrise. land! land! away on the starboard bow!" he shouted more loudly. the officer of the watch heard him, and was soon, with his telescope slung over his shoulder, ascending the rigging. ben pointed out the direction in which he saw the snow-capped peaks. "you have a sharp pair of eyes, boy hadden," observed the officer, who was looking through his glass; "those are the andes or cordilleras, sure enough, though seventy miles off at least--it may be many more than that." ben thought that he must indeed have a sharp pair of eyes, if he could see an object seventy miles off; yet he found that the officer was correct. all the men aloft now saw the mountains, and very soon they could be perceived by those on deck. shortly after the sun rose, however, thin and light mists ascended, and veiled them from view. still the ship sailed on with a fair breeze, hour after hour, and no land appeared. ben began to fancy that he must have been mistaken. he was somewhat surprised, therefore, when he was sent for into the captain's cabin. "i find that you were the first to see land this morning, boy hadden," said the captain in a kind tone. "there is no great merit in that, but after a long passage it might be of much consequence, and i wish to reward you. you, however, rendered me a far greater service when you discovered the iceberg rounding cape horn. i shall not forget that. in the meantime i present you with a sovereign, to show you that i approve of your conduct on that and other occasions." ben, thanking the captain, left the cabin, highly pleased at the praise he had received, and very glad also to get the sovereign; not that he might spend it on himself, but that he might send it home to his mother; and he had some notion that he could do so by some means or other, but how, he could not tell. he would consult mr martin. "oh, it was to get that gold sovereign which made you so eager about going aloft of late," observed tom, who was somewhat jealous of his companion. "yes. i wanted it to send to my mother," answered ben quietly. "but she can't want it. i never send my mother anything, nor does father, that i know of," exclaimed tom. "much better, ben, to spend it like a man ashore. we could have rare fun with it, depend on that." "my mother is a widow, and that is one reason why she should want the money, though yours doesn't," said ben. "then, though i came to sea in the hope of finding ned, i also came that i might get money to take care of mother in her old age; so i think it right to send her the first sovereign i have got, and i hope that it will be followed by many more." "you are always talking about doing right in this thing and that; but how do you know what is right?" exclaimed tom, vexed at the idea that he should not benefit, as he thought he ought to do, by the gift his messmate had received. "how can you ask that?" said ben. "haven't we got the bible to show us in the first place, and if we can't make up our minds clearly on the matter from it, which, i allow, is possible, then cannot we pray to be guided aright? and does not god promise that he will hear our prayers, and send the holy spirit to guide us?" "yes, i know all that," answered tom, turning away. in truth, tom ought to have known it as well as ben, for his father had frequently told him the same; but, though he had heard, the words had passed from one ear out at the other: he had not taken them in. early in the day the master had stated the hour at which the coast-line of south america would be seen; for the mountains ben had discovered are several miles inland, and are many thousand feet high--indeed, the range of the andes is one of the highest in the world. it now appeared at the hour the master said it would, standing up rocky and broken, from the very margin of the ocean. as the frigate drew nearer, the land looked very dry and barren, and utterly unworthy of the name it bears. "if you were to see it in winter, just after the rains are over, you would speak very differently of it," observed mr martin, who had been there before. "never judge of things, and, above all, of countries, at first sight. at the right time this country looks as green and fresh and beautiful a country as you need ever wish to see." in the afternoon the frigate anchored in the bay of valparaiso, which is lined by lofty hills, underneath one of which, and climbing up the sides, the town is built. ben was very anxious to go on shore, that he might inquire among all the sailors he could meet if any of them had heard anything of his brother ned. mr charlton knew this, and arranged that he might have the opportunity of carrying out his plans as far as possible. whenever a boat left for the shore, ben was therefore allowed to go in her. soon after their arrival, a boat in which ben went was sent from the frigate under command of a midshipman, who had some commission to perform in the town. on leaving the boat, the midshipman said, "two of you will remain as boat-keepers; the rest may step on shore, but are not to stray out of sight of the boat. remember, these are the captain's orders." "ay, ay, sir," was the answer; but no sooner had the midshipman disappeared up the street, than the men all jumped on shore to look out for a grog-shop. not one was to be seen, and on that account the place had been selected by the captain for the landing of the boat's crew. in vain they searched. "now, ben hadden, here's a job for you," said the coxswain of the boat, when they had come back and sat down in rather a sulky mood. "just you scud up the street, and bring us down a couple of bottles of arguardiente. you are certain to find some place where they sell it, and there's five shillings for yourself. i know you want money to send to your mother; tom told me so. very right in you. come, be sharp about it, there's a good lad." "thank you, brown," said ben, not moving from his seat; "but you forget that mr manners said it was the captain's orders no one should go out of sight of the boat. even if you were to offer me five pounds for mother, i couldn't go--" "oh, nonsense, boy!" answered brown; "it isn't the money you care about, i know, but do it just to oblige us." "no, no, brown. i have been taught always to do right, whatever comes of it, and never to do wrong, even if it seems as if no harm would come of it," said ben firmly. "all right, i daresay, boy; but surely there's no harm in getting some grog in this hot weather," argued brown. "it's against orders, it's against the regulations, it's disobedience," returned ben. "we were ordered not to go out of sight of the boat, and unless we do the arguardiente cannot be got." "oh, this is all shilly-shallying humbug!" exclaimed brown angrily. "come, a couple of you, with me, and we'll have the liquor, and be back in a jiffy." "remember, brown, if you do, and i am asked, i'll speak the truth, i'll warn you," said ben undauntedly. "and i'll break your head, if you do!" exclaimed brown, springing out of the boat, followed by two of the other men, while the rest soon scattered themselves about the quay, leaving ben sitting in the boat. he, at all events, determined not to move, though the proper boat-keepers deserted their post. he sat on for some time, watching people passing on shore: blacks, and brown men, the aboriginal natives of the country, and white people descended from spaniards, in their varied and picturesque costumes; and two or three processions passed, of priests, in white and purple dresses, and some in gold and scarlet, with banners of the virgin mary and saints, and crucifixes, and images, and bells tinkling, and men and boys chanting and swinging about incense, just as ben had read used to be done in heathen days, but quite different to the custom of protestant england. some of the priests were going to visit the sick and dying, and others were on their way to attend funerals; indeed, there seemed to be a good deal of commotion on shore among the ecclesiastics. ben could not, however, exactly tell what it all meant. a considerable time thus passed, and he wished that his shipmates would return to the boat, lest mr manners should come down before them. the boat had begun to move about a good deal lately, and ben, on looking round, discovered that a heavy sea was rolling into the harbour. directly after this she struck with a loud noise against the stone pier. ben sprang to his feet, and with the boat-hook did his best to fend off the boat, shouting at the same time to the crew to come to his assistance; but they were too much occupied with what was going forward on shore to listen to him. still he continued to exert himself to the uttermost, for he saw that, if he did not do so, the boat would be dashed to pieces. again and again he shouted, till he was almost worn out with his labours. he might at any moment have jumped on shore, and left the boat to her fate; but he never thought of doing so. while he was thus engaged, he heard his name called, and, looking up, he saw the good-natured face of mr manners, who was watching him from the quay above. "why, boy hadden, how comes it that you are left in the boat alone?" he asked. "where are the rest?" "there, sir," said ben, pointing to where a few were to be seen. the midshipman ran towards them, shouting out at the same time. they came, at length, very unwillingly. "see, you have allowed the boat to be almost stove in!" exclaimed the generally quiet young midshipman. "jump in, now, and keep her off. where are the rest?" the men, after getting into the boat, were silent for some time. the midshipman repeated the question. "just round the end of that street," said one of the men. "shall i go and call them, sir? what keeps them, i don't know." "no," answered the midshipman firmly. "we will pull off a short distance, and wait for them. if they do not come down immediately, i will go on board without them." the officer was just about to utter the words, "give way!" when the missing men were seen hurrying down, with uneven steps, towards the quay. the boat put in, and took them on board. their countenances were flushed, and their manner wild; but they did not venture to speak much. the midshipman saw that they were endeavouring to conceal something, as they took their seats. "heave those bottles overboard!" he exclaimed suddenly, when they had got a little way from the quay. the men hesitated. "not till they are empty," cried one. "not till we have had what is in them," exclaimed another, putting a bottle to his lips. the midshipman, a spirited lad, sprang from his seat, and, passing the intervening men, with a boat-stretcher which he had seized dashed the bottle from the man's lips ere a drop could have been drunk. this so exasperated the already tipsy sailor, that he flung himself on the young officer, and, seizing him in his arms, threw him overboard. ben, though not in time to prevent this, jumped from the boat, holding on by one of the tiller-ropes, and grasped his young officer by the collar. "haul us in, mates!" he cried. "you won't surely add murder to what that man has done!" even the worst men were somewhat sobered when they saw what had happened, and the other man who had the bottle to his lips stopped drinking; and, fearful of consequences to themselves, they began to haul the officer and ben together on board. "quick! quick, mates! or it will be too late!" cried the coxswain, who had remained on the quay, though he had been guilty of letting the other men go. a dark object was seen in the water. it darted towards them. "a shark! a shark!" was the cry. ben quickly sprang into the boat; but barely was mr manners hauled on board than a flash of white appeared, a huge mouth opened and closed again with a loud snap, and a shark darted away, disappointed of its prey. even the most drunken of the men were sobered, and the bottles of spirit they had procured at so much risk were thrown overboard. the midshipman quickly recovered. "they are all gone, sir," said the coxswain in a humble tone. "the men hope that you won't say anything about what has happened." "i would gladly avoid doing so, so far as i am myself concerned, although, no thanks to dick nolan, i am a living man, instead of a dead one in the body of a shark; but discipline must be maintained. i should be neglecting my duty if i did not report those who disobeyed orders. i shall speak of you in no vindictive spirit, and it will not be my fault if the man who threw me into the water receives the punishment which is justly his due: that punishment would be nothing short of death-- remember that, my men! i have been taught by a book, which i wish that you all would read, to forgive my enemies and those who injure me; and therefore i will, for the sake of our loving saviour, endeavour to save nolan's life." the men hung down their heads. this was a very different style of address from what they were accustomed to. no one expected it; even ben, who had frequently been with mr manners, did not. the most hardened felt ashamed of themselves; they were certain that the young officer would not injure them if he could help it, but they also knew that he must report them. at length the boat reached the ship, and mr manners went into the cabin to give an account of the mission on which he had been sent on shore. ben felt very anxious for the boat's crew; and the culprits, especially, felt very anxious for themselves. ben forgot all about himself, and he did not suppose that he was likely to gain credit for the part he had acted. he was therefore very much surprised when he was sent for into the cabin. "i find, hadden, that you have behaved admirably on two occasions to-day, once in staying by the boat when the proper boat-keepers had left her, and preventing her from being stove in; and secondly, in jumping into the sea and saving mr manners when he fell overboard. i wish you to know how highly i approve of your conduct, and will consider how i can best reward you." ben was highly pleased at hearing this. he kept pulling away at the front lock of his hair, and thanking the captain, till he was told that he might leave the cabin. seamen generally know what has taken place among each other, even when the officers do not. tom soon heard all that had occurred, and told his father. it was reported the next day that the captain proposed flogging three of the men who had been on shore with mr manners. then it was known that several of the boat's crew were down with a severe fever, and it was reported that the captain knew that there was a fever on shore, and that therefore he had not given leave to the men to go as they had been accustomed to do. nolan, who had thrown mr manners overboard, was the very worst of them. it was said that he was talking very frantically, and accusing himself of the deed. in this dreadful state he continued raving for two days, when he was silent from exhaustion, and died. the captain, hoping to prevent the spread of the fever among the crew, put to sea. many more, however, were taken ill, of whom several died, and were buried at sea. one day, mr martin called ben and tom into his cabin. "now, boys, i just want to point out to you what you must remember to the end of your days; that is, the terrible effects of disobedience. those poor fellows whose corpses we have lowered overboard, i daresay, thought that they were doing no great harm when they ran off to the grog-shop. they knew, of course, that they were disobeying the orders of mr manners, the midshipman in command of the boat; but they said to themselves, `oh, he is only a midshipman, no harm can come of it. we shall be back before he is, and he need know nothing about the matter.' they forgot that the midshipman was acting under the orders of the captain, and the captain under those of the government of our country, and that governments and authorities were instituted by god for the well-being and happiness of the community. they thought that they were committing a little sin, but they were in reality guilty of a great crime. see the result. one of them nearly committed murder, and if he had lived, and the captain had been informed of what he had done, he would have been hung. i know all about it, though the crew think i don't. then they catch the fever, bring it aboard, some of them lose their own lives, and they risk the lives of all the ship's company. just in the same way people go on in the world. god has given us orders what we are to do, and what we are not to do. how do we act? we neglect to do what he has commanded us to do, and do the very things he has told us not to do, saying all the time to ourselves, `it is only a little sin, it is only a slight disobedience; so slight, god won't notice it; no harm can come of it.' that is one of satan's most cunning and most successful devices for destroying the souls of men. he tried it with adam and eve, and has tried it on all their descendants ever since, and will try it as long as he `goes about like a roaring lion, seeking whom he may devour.' oh, boys, remember that `not a sparrow falls to the ground' but god sees it, and that he therefore knows all that you do; and that, though a sin may appear a trifle in your sight, it is not a trifle in god's sight, for he abhors all sin. `he cannot look on iniquity.'" tom looked very grave when his father spoke, and felt very serious. ben clearly understood and remembered the important lesson given him, and prayed silently that he might always make use of it when, temptation should come in his way. he was very happy, and he knew it, in being in a ship with such good men as mr charlton and mr martin, to whom he now found that he might add mr manners. these men, though only a few among many, had a great effect on the mass, and helped to leaven in some degree the whole ship's company. ben himself produced a good effect not only on tom, but among the other boys of the ship, and even with many of the men, though he was not aware of it, and would not have talked about it if he had been. in consequence of the fever, the frigate did not go back to valparaiso, but stood away to the northward, looking in at other ports along the coast where any british merchantmen were to be found. it is thus england protects her commerce, by showing the inhabitants of the various ports in the world to which her merchants trade, that she has the power to punish those who may venture to ill-treat them; her consuls and any other authorities are supported; and any seamen or other british subjects who misbehave themselves on board english ships can be brought to punishment. if british subjects break the laws of the country in which they are residing, they are left to be punished according to those laws. it is, however, the duty of the consul, supported by the authority of the captain of a man-of-war, to see that they are not punished except justly, according to those laws. callao, the port of lima, the capital of peru, was the last place on the west of america at which the frigate touched. she anchored in a large bay, guarded by forts, and opposite the modern town of callao, which stands near the beach. upwards of a hundred years ago a fearful earthquake occurred, which shook lima to the ground; and a huge wave rolling in towards the shore at the same time, overwhelmed the old town of callao, and destroyed the greater part, if not the whole, of the inhabitants. peru was taken by the spaniards three hundred years ago from the native indians, who lived happily under their own princes and chiefs. the latter were treated with the greatest cruelty and injustice by their conquerors, and compelled to work in the silver and copper mines which exist along the whole range of the andes. the spaniards were, in their turn, dispossessed of the government of the country by the descendants of the early settlers, who were assisted by the natives and the people descended from natives and spaniard. unhappily, the roman catholic religion is established throughout the whole of chili and peru, for the history of the two countries is nearly the same; and the people have the characteristics which are to be found wherever that religion prevails. the great mass are ignorant and superstitious; their priests, of whom there are great numbers, grossly impose on their credulity. the mines, as from the first, are worked by the natives, who are, however, from their delicate constitutions, so unfitted for that sort of labour that they have rapidly decreased in numbers. the consequence is, that many of the mines have been closed for want of hands to work them. while the ajax lay at callao, captain bertram heard that, shortly before, an expedition of a dozen or more vessels had been fitted out to entrap and carry off the natives of the various islands of the pacific, for the purpose of making them work in the mines of peru. what mattered it to these wretches whether the islanders they proposed to enslave were christians and civilised, or cannibal savages? they would have preferred the former as more likely to be docile under the treatment to which they proposed to subject them. at first captain bertram would scarcely believe that people professing to be civilised and christians could be guilty of an act of such atrocious barbarity. he remembered, however, who these chilians are; that in their dispositions and education they differ in no way from spaniards, and that the spanish have been to the last the most active agents in the african slave-trade. those who know the high state of civilisation of which the natives of eastern polynesia are capable, and the remarkable fitness of their minds for receiving the truths of the gospel, will naturally feel unmitigated horror at the thought of their being made the victims of so abominable a scheme. this was especially the feeling of mr charlton when he heard the account, and he resolved to use every exertion to capture the slavers, and to bring their crews to justice. chapter nine. adventures among the islands. the ajax had remained at callao in order that captain bertram might obtain more information respecting the slaving expedition of which he had received notice. all he could learn, however, was that a dozen or more vessels had sailed, fully armed, with stores for a long cruise, and a larger quantity of rice and other provisions than could be required by their crews. where they had gone no one could tell. probably the islands they were to attack were left to the choice of their commanders. on putting to sea, the ajax steered to the westward. as the frigate approached the numerous groups of islands which lay in her course, it became necessary to keep a very bright look-out, by day as well as by night. the first group consisted of low coral islands, which rise but a few feet above the water. ben was anxious to make himself useful as before, and was continually at the masthead, when his watch was over, looking out for land. one day, when he was as usual aloft, turning his eyes round in every direction, he saw right ahead what seemed to be a grove of trees rising directly out of the water. he reported what he saw. sail was immediately shortened, and the lead hove, and, as the ship sailed on, the lead was again frequently hove. "it is the minerva coral island," ben heard the captain observe to mr charlton, after he and the master had been looking over the chart. as the ship rose and fell with the swell of the ocean, the trees were now seen and now again lost sight of alternately for some time; this had a very curious effect. as the frigate drew near, a white sandy beach was seen, and, higher up, a belt of land of a light clay colour, on which grew a few shrubs not more than fifteen feet high, above which towered the pandanus, cocoa-nut, and palms. the whole island was about ten miles long, and a mile and a half wide, the centre part being occupied by a lagoon, or lake, of smooth deeply blue water, thus leaving a belt of land not more than six hundred feet across. this lagoon had no opening or entrance to it, but ben heard that the lagoons of most of the coral islands have a communication with the sea, so that boats and canoes can enter. outside the island, at some little distance, rose a second or outer reef, over which the sea flowed at high water. this served in heavy gales, when the waves rolled in furious to break their force, and to protect the shore over which they might otherwise have swept, carrying away the trees and shrubs which made it a fit habitation for man. mr martin gave ben and tom an account of the way these coral islands are formed. "coral, you will understands is made by very small sea insects, who form it for their habitation," he observed. "god has given them the instinct to build in certain ways and places, just, as if they knew what they were about, and that they were building up an island fit to be inhabited by human beings. they seem to choose the tops of rocks from one hundred to two hundred fathoms below the surface, for the foundation of their structure. they have toiled on for ages, placing storey upon storey, till the surface has been reached, when they have been compelled to cease; for out of the water, whence they draw their materials--their bricks and mortar, so to speak--they can do nothing. the outer edge breaks the force of the sea, but not altogether. enough strength is exerted during storms to tear off the outer edge of the coral, and to throw it on the top of the wall. seaweed and driftwood and dead fish are next thrown up on it, which, when they decay, form soil. birds next come and rest on the island, and further enrich the soil. they bring seeds of grass and small shrubs at first, and afterwards of larger trees, which take root and spring up, and in their turn, when they decay, form more earth to nourish a larger species of trees, such as the tall palms, and cocoa-nut, and pandanus, which we have seen growing on them. the sandy beach is formed of the broken coral and shells, ground small by the constant action of the waves. i have heard that the lagoons are often very deep, so that the island is exactly like a circular wall built up from the bottom of the sea, or rather from a rock far down in it." mr martin promised the boys that he would tell them more about other islands which they were likely to visit another time. he had also with him some most interesting accounts of the progress which the missionaries had made among the heathen in those seas, which he promised also to give them. people were seen on the shore, though no habitations were visible, and captain bertram wished to communicate with them. while the frigate was hove to, to leeward of the island, two boats were sent on shore under mr charlton's command. ben went in one of them. a native of tahiti, called tatai, had been shipped at callao to act as interpreter, as without one very little intercourse could have been held with the natives. ben had told him all about ned, and how he hoped to find him on one of the islands they expected to visit tatai said that he must not be too sanguine, as it was very like looking for a pearl in a bed of oysters, though there were great numbers of white men scattered about among the islands, and even living among the most savage natives. he promised, however, to make inquiries, and to help on his object as far as he had the power. the boats had to coast along for some time before an entrance through the reef could be found. the sea dashed against the reef, and, curling over, fell back in a shower of spray. a boat striking it would have been instantly overwhelmed or dashed to pieces. the passage between the two walls of water which thus rose up on either side of the entrance was very narrow. it seemed indeed that the boats could not pass through without the oars touching the rocks. mr charlton, however, considered that the passage was practicable, so also did tatai. mr charlton led, and as his boat was cautiously feeling its way, a smooth roller majestically approached the shore. "give way, lads," he cried. the boat glided on, the water broke with a thundering roar on the reef; but the boat, like an arrow, had shot through and was floating safely within the reef. the other boat immediately followed. the natives from the shore had been watching these proceedings, and now gathered in considerable numbers on the beach. they were all armed with spears, and showed an evident dislike to holding intercourse with the white people. they nourished their spears, pointed them towards the boats, and made significant gestures for the intruders to depart. still, as it was important to speak to the poor savages, mr charlton pulled towards a ledge of rocks which ran out from the shore, and with a basket full of presents, landed, accompanied by tatai. the people ran towards him, threatening with their spears as before. he advanced as if to meet them, put down the presents, and then retreated. an old man, who wore a short petticoat of leaves fastened round his waist, and a pandanus leaf hung from his neck as a sign that he was a chief, was in front. he stopped, picked up the handkerchiefs, knives, and trinkets which formed the offering made to him, and, having handed them to his followers, rushed on, gesticulating furiously, towards the english officer. tatai shouted out that the visitors came as friends, but the only reply he got was, "go away, go away! we do not want you," spoken in the native tongue. this was not encouraging. mr charlton, however, was not to be defeated. pulling off to a little distance from the shore, he consulted with tatai. "if we land without arms and offer them food, that will show that we wish to be friends," he said. tatai agreed to this, and offered to accompany the lieutenant, provided the boat kept near enough to render them assistance if required. again the boat pulled in, and mr charlton told ben that he might land with him, as the savages would see by a boy being of the party that no treachery could be intended. again the boat touched the beach, at a spot where she could easily be shoved off, and, having deposited his sword and pistols and rifle in the boat, mr charlton with his two companions proceeded towards a group of natives who had been watching their proceedings. the natives, instead of coming towards them, seemed to be holding a consultation together. mr charlton and his companions, seeing this, sat down, and, taking the provisions out of the basket ben carried, commenced eating. after a short time, placing the food on a flat rock, and retiring to a little distance, they made signs to the natives to come and eat. the natives now without hesitation came down, led by their old chief, who took the lion's share of the food, which he seemed to enjoy very much. when the old man had finished eating, tatai addressed him. he no longer said, "go away," but listened attentively. the interpreter told him that the english had come to his island as friends; that their only object was to do him good; that they had heard that certain wicked people in vessels had visited some of the islands in their seas, and carried off the natives to make slaves of them; and that, as the english did not like having people made slaves, they were seeking for those bad men to punish them. the old chief listened attentively to all that was said, and then made a long speech, which tatai translated. he remarked that everything he had heard was very good; that two suspicious-looking vessels had appeared off the coast not long before; that several boat-loads of armed men had attempted to land; but that, a gale springing up at that moment, they could not effect their purpose, and that the vessels were compelled to bear away. mr charlton, on this, showed the british flag, and told them that, while they behaved well, under that flag they would ever find protection. the old chief seemed clearly to comprehend what was said. a new light had burst on him. "how is it that your friends are so great and powerful, while i am so poor and miserable?" he asked of tatai. "because my friends worship the great and powerful god, who has given them a book which makes those who study it wise, while you worship your wretched gods, who are no gods, and cannot help you or make you wise, or do you any good," answered the interpreter promptly. "then i should like to learn about your god," said the old chief. tatai, in reply, promised that he would try and send some one who would teach them more about the white man's god, and what he desired them to do, and teach them how to pray to him. mr charlton was much pleased with what tatai had said, and promised that he would also try to have either a native or english missionary sent to them. he then made more presents to the old chief, made further inquiries about the vessels of the supposed man-stealers, and, after a friendly farewell to the old chief and his companions, pulled back to the ship. thus a visit which threatened to prove disastrous, by judicious management gave promise of being productive of great good to the islanders. after this, the ajax visited several other islands, searching for the man-stealers. some were inhabited, others had the remains of huts, altars, and temples, and had been deserted; and on others no signs of human beings could be discovered. chapter ten. tells about mission work. mr martin had, as it may be remembered, promised to give ben and his son an account of the introduction of christianity among the islands of the pacific. one day, during a calm, when the ship floated idly on the ocean, her sails scarcely even flapping against the masts, tom, on going below, declared that it was too hot to read or think or sleep, and that he did not know what he should do with himself. "it is not too hot to prevent you from listening though, master tom," said his father, who did not like to see any one idle from any excuse. "call ben hadden, and i'll tell you and him something which will interest you, or ought to do so, at all events." ben soon came, and the boatswain told him and tom to sit down just outside his cabin, where there was more air than inside. "now listen, youngsters; i'm not going to throw my breath away on unwilling ears," he began. "i am listening, sir," said ben. "so am i, father," said tom, "but i can't promise to keep awake if the yarn is a long one." "don't let me catch you with more than one eye shut at a time, or i'll be down on you," answered the boatswain. "as i was saying, now listen. you've heard of captain cook, the great navigator, who sailed over and across these seas in every direction, and found out many islands not before known to civilised men. his business was to try and discover new lands, and to do any good he could to the inhabitants, by leaving them seeds and plants and animals; but there was nothing in his directions that i know of about teaching them religion. there would not have been time for him to do much, even if he had had any such instructions, unless he had carried out missionaries with him; but in those days missionaries to heathen lands were not so much as thought of in england. you have heard how cook was killed by the savages of the sandwich islands, who have now become the most civilised of all the people of these seas. the descriptions he and his companions gave of the islanders made some christian people at home think that, if missionaries were sent to them, they might be persuaded to become christians. the london missionary society had just been formed--that was as far back as . the first of their many noble enterprises was to send out twenty-nine missionaries in the ship duff, commanded by captain wilson. the greater number settled at tahiti, where they were well received by the natives; while others went to tongatabu, and two of them attempted to commence a mission at saint christina, one of the marquesas. the latter mission was, however, soon afterwards abandoned, and has never since been resumed; and unhappily, as the french have taken possession of the group, there is not much probability of an english protestant mission being established there, whatever the french protestants may do. "at tahiti many years passed before any fruits of the missionaries' labours were perceived, not indeed till , when some praying natives were discovered, and a church was formed. from that time, however, christianity spread rapidly, and the converted natives were eager to go forth themselves as missionaries, not only to neighbouring islands, such as the paumotre, the austral, and hervey groups, but to raratonga and samoa, and, still farther, to the new hebrides, loyalty islands, and new caledonia and penryn islands. "the climate of those islands in the western pacific, near the equator, is nearly as hurtful to the constitutions of the inhabitants of the eastern part of that ocean as to europeans, and very many native missionaries have fallen martyrs in the cause of the gospel. in some instances the english missionaries were the first to land, and afterwards to employ native agency; in others, the natives were first sent to a heathen island, and the more highly-educated white men followed, to complete the work commenced by their dark-skinned brethren. in many instances the missionaries had long to wait before they saw the fruit of their labours; in others, the natives at once gladly accepted the glorious tidings of salvation. in very few have missions been ultimately abandoned in consequence of the hostility of the natives in the eastern pacific; the marquesas is the chief exception. in the western pacific the natives have been much more hostile to the missionaries. this has arisen in consequence of the treatment they have often received from the crews of whale-ships, and from sandal-wood traders. these men have been known to carry off natives from one island, to make them cut sandal-wood on another inhabited by their mortal foes, and after their task has been accomplished the traders have left the poor wretches there to be butchered, and often eaten, by their enemies, to save themselves the trouble of taking them back and paying them their stipulated reward. "the history of the establishment of christianity on many of these islands is very interesting. the way in which it was introduced into raratonga, the largest of the hervey group, is so in particular. some natives of that island had been carried away in a whale-ship, and left at aitutaki. among them was the niece of the principal chief of the island. at aitutaki, the great missionary williams saw them, and, accompanied by them, after a long search, discovered their island. this was in . the unfriendly reception he met with from the savage natives, however, made it impossible for him to remain. had it not been, indeed, for the exertions of tapaeru, the niece of the chief, who had been carried away, the native teachers who went on shore would have been murdered. they returned on board; but papehia, one of their number, as the ship was about to sail away, volunteered to return. tying a book containing a part of the scriptures in a handkerchief on his head, and clothed in a shirt and trousers only, this true servant of christ swam back, full of faith, to the rocks, on which stood several of the savages, brandishing their spears. his heart did not falter; he swam on bravely. he had true faith. he followed your rule, ben; he was determined to do right, whatever was to come of it. he knew that it was right to carry the gospel to these poor savages; he would succeed, or perish in the attempt. tapaeru from the first protected him, and obtained for him the support of her relations. this enabled him to speak openly to the people, who soon became eager to listen to the wonderful things he had to narrate. still, he had much opposition to contend with. tinomana, a powerful chief, was the first man of influence to give up his idols. "another native teacher afterwards joined papehia; and in two years and a half, under the superintendence of these two native teachers,-- themselves born heathens, and brought up in the darkness of idolatry, till called into the marvellous light of the gospel,--the whole of the population of that large island became professedly christian. it was here that, soon after this, mr williams built his vessel, the messenger of peace, in which he sailed over so large a part of the pacific. there are now numerous churches, schools, and a training college, from which many native missionaries have gone forth to preach the gospel in far distant islands. "the conversion of the inhabitants of the sandwich islands was still more extraordinary. from the time that captain cook was killed on their shores, they had been looked on as among the most savage of the people of the pacific. the sandwich islands, the largest of which is hawaii, were ruled by a chief of great talent, who had made himself king of the whole group, and was called tamehameha the first. he had entreated captain vancouver, who visited his territories in , to send him christian missionaries. no attention, however, was paid to this request. his son rihoriho, who became king in , seeing the utter folly of the religion of his ancestors, without being even urged to do so by foreigners, of his own accord threw off the gods of his people, burnt the idols and their temples, and upset the priesthood, and the whole system connected with it. in this extraordinary proceeding he was supported by the high priest himself, who acknowledged, when appealed to, that the gods they had hitherto worshipped were of no power, and that there was but one god in heaven, the same whom the white men worshipped. "it was at this juncture that a band of missionaries arrived from the united states, sent out by the american board of missions. they were cordially welcomed by the king, most of his chiefs, and the people. schools were established, churches built, and in a few years the whole of the people became nominally christians, many of them really so; and civilisation advanced with rapid strides. among no people, probably, has it made so much progress in so short a time. still, i believe that among the society islands, at raratonga, and other islands of the hervey group, true christianity more extensively prevails. "the people of savage island, who were said to be among the fiercest and most barbarous of the natives of polynesia, were converted much in the same way as those of raratonga, and they are now simple-minded christians, earnest, quiet, and well-behaved. "in the large island of tongatabu, and its adjacent islands, great disappointment was encountered by the first missionaries, who were ultimately driven away. in , the wesleyan missionary society sent missionaries there, and by their means the king, george, and the whole population have professed christianity. the two societies together have laboured in the beautiful islands of samoa, to the north; and there also christianity has been generally established. "wonderful, also, is the change which has been brought about in a few years in fiji, a large and beautiful group of islands lying to the west of tonga. the inhabitants are nearly black, and a very fine and intelligent race of men; but they were even more addicted to cannibalism than the new zealanders, and their customs were of the most revolting and cruel description. thackombau, the greatest chief among them, was also a fierce cannibal. fully aware of the character of the people, a band of wesleyan missionaries landed on their shores, and by great perseverance have succeeded in bringing over a large number of the population to a knowledge of the truth, including the king himself and all his family; while the practice of cannibalism is almost, if not completely, extirpated. "the numerous groups of islands to the north of new zealand are known as melanesia. the presbyterian and london missionary societies have for a considerable time been at work in some of these islands. it was on one of them (erromanga) that williams met his death, and that mr murray and some native missionaries were murdered, while many have died of fever. they have, however, not laboured in vain, and the inhabitants of more than one island have abandoned idol-worship. to these groups, also, the church of england, established in new zealand, has turned its attention, under the direction of the bishop of new zealand, who made several voyages among them. bishop pattison, with the title of bishop of melanesia, has been especially appointed to superintend the work of evangelisation connected with them. a vessel called the southern cross makes a cruise twice a year among them. in the spring, she collects young men from all the islands and carries them to new zealand, where they receive instruction in a college established for that purpose. as they can no more stand the cold climate of new zealand in the winter than europeans can stand the heat of their summer, in the autumn the southern cross carries them back to their own islands, where they instruct their countrymen in the religious knowledge and the arts they have learned during their absence. the french have sent roman catholic missionaries to several of these groups. they have taken possession of tahiti; and have established colonies there, on the coast of new guinea, and in the marquesas. at tahiti, the english protestant missionaries were for a time prohibited from preaching, and compelled to leave the island. the greater number of the people, supported by the queen, remained firm to their protestant principles; and at length a french evangelical society sent out protestant pastors, and the people have now perfect religious liberty, though they remain subject to france. "notwithstanding the large number of islands in which christianity has been firmly established, it is calculated that there are two hundred and fifty inhabited islands still sunk in the darkness of idolatry and savageism, so that there remains a very large amount of work to be done. there, i have given you a short account of missionary work in the pacific. another day i will get a chart, and show you the places i have spoken about. i will then tell you more respecting them. you will like especially to hear of savage island, or niue, which i understand we are to visit, to inquire about some natives who, it is reported, have been carried away by the chilian slavers." ben thanked mr martin very much for the information he had given him and tom, and begged that he would give them a further account of savage island, as he had kindly offered to do. chapter eleven. more explorations and adventures. shortly after the events mentioned in a former chapter, the ajax came in sight of a cluster of mountains, rising, it seemed, directly out of the sea, to the height of four thousand feet. it was the island of raratonga, of which mr martin had told ben. it is surrounded by a curious barrier-reef of solid block coral, thirty-five miles in circumference, and from a quarter of a mile to half a mile broad. at high water it is completely covered to a depth of four or six feet, but at low water it is almost bare. this vast reef prevents the sea from breaking against the island. outside the reef there is no anchorage ground, as no cable could fathom the depth. inside, the water is smooth and beautifully clear, but no ship of any size can pass through the reef. there are several passages for canoes and boats, and one for a vessel of forty-five tons. this is, however, a very great advantage to the inhabitants in a social point of view, as it prevents the establishment of a seaport town in their island, while, at the same time, they can enjoy intercourse with the rest of the world. this was the very island of which mr williams had heard, and which he so long looked for before he found it. here the missionary papehia landed alone, trusting in jehovah, among its then savage inhabitants. it was here the great missionary williams spent many months, and built single-handed the schooner--the messenger of peace mentioned before--in which he crossed over so many thousand miles of the pacific ocean, to carry the glad tidings of great joy to many of the numerous islands scattered over it. it was here that a fierce chief, tinomana, became a humble, lowly-minded christian, and died strong in the faith. this is the island, the inhabitants of which were among the fiercest of all the isles of the pacific, and are now among the most consistent and truest christians. it has sent out more missionaries than any other to convert the heathen of the isles of the pacific. it contains a training college for missionaries, with numerous churches and schools. the houses of the inhabitants are well-built, neat, and clean; and it is hardly too much to say that, in the same space, and among an equal number of people living together in any part of the world, a larger proportion of true and consistent christians will not be found. as soon as the frigate hove to, near the land, several canoes came off to welcome the well-known flag. the natives were decently dressed in shirts and trousers, with straw hats; and their manner was particularly quiet and at the same time cheerful. they offered to bring off any provisions which might be required; but the captain wished himself to go on shore, and said that he could then purchase what he wanted. two whalers were at the time standing off and on the land, while their boats were on shore. ben was glad to find that three boats from the frigate were going on shore, to one of which he belonged. a native pilot in his boat led the way, the captain's gig following; but, as the wind was light and the tide high, there was no difficulty in passing through the barrier, and, once inside, the boats were in smooth water. the officer on landing was met by a respectable-looking native, who announced himself as the salesman of the station, putting out his right hand, and saying, "_ria-ora-na_!" (blessings on you.) the officers were then conducted to the market-house, where there were stores of bananas, yams, pumpkins, potatoes, cocoa-nuts, fowls, and various other articles. the purser of the frigate then stated the quantity of provisions he required. the salesman informed him of the current price, a calculation was made, the money was paid, and the salesman undertook to engage native boats, in which everything was taken off in excellent condition. the captain first visited the mission establishment. it consisted of a centre building, and a great number of small houses. these were the residences of the married students; every single student had a room to himself. nearly two hundred students have been educated at the college. a very important part of the establishment is the printing-press, which supplies with a number of valuable works, not only raratonga, but numerous other islands of the pacific where the dialect of the inhabitants is understood. the students also consist, not only of natives of the hervey islands, but young men from far distant places. in each village there are schools and churches and native pastors. children also are brought from other islands to the chief school, under the english missionary, to receive instruction. thus from this once savage country the true light now shines forth over a wide circle of the pacific--that light brought to those shores by the once heathen papehia! when the boats got back to the frigate, ben found that the captain of one of the whalers, the grand turk, was on board. captain judson--that was his name--was well-known to mr martin, who had once sailed with him. he was waiting to see captain bertram, to prefer some request or other. he was evidently a rough style of man, and was complaining much of the way he had been treated the day before, which was sunday. "two boats were sent on shore, but none of the people were to be seen," said captain judson. "there were a number of neat, whitewashed houses in rows, some way from the beach, and near them three larger buildings. one had a tower. after waiting for some time, people came streaming out of the door of the building with the tower, all neatly dressed in cottons or native cloths. "`why, they look just as if they were coming out of church,' said one of my men, who had never been out in these parts before, and thought all the people were savages and cannibals. after some time, a white gentleman appeared in a black dress. `and there comes the parson, i do declare!' he added. "the first mate, who had charge of the party, on this went up to the gentleman, and told him what we had come for. "`i am very glad to hear it,' said the gentleman. `i have no doubt that to-morrow morning the people will bring you all you require.' "`to-morrow won't do--we want the things to-day; we must be off again this evening,' said the mate, in an angry tone, for of course he was vexed. "`i will tell the people what you say; but they have been taught to remember the sabbath-day to keep it holy, and i do not think that they will supply you, unless you are starving, or have scurvy for want of vegetables, and then i am certain that they will give you all you require,' answered the missionary, who then spoke to several of the people; and a young native came forward, and in very good english told the mate that he was the interpreter, and would be glad to attend him. the mate thought that he could manage him, and was very much surprised to find that no trading could be allowed that day. "`but our people may go on shore and amuse themselves?' said the mate. "`no,' answered the young native. `too often the crews of whalers have come on shore, and have set a bad example to our people, who think a great deal about white men. we allow no strangers to wander about our island on the sabbath.' "`then your people will come off to us, as they do at other islands!' said the mate. "`no, no, no,' answered the young native, with a grave look. `such things were, but they were very bad; we have learned better now.' "on hearing this, the mate came away, abusing the missionaries for having taught the natives such things. it is fair to say, however, that, as he was leaving the beach to come on board, a number of natives appeared with baskets of cooked vegetables and fruits, enough for the dinner of the whole crew. all the families near had given up some from their own store. i was in a hurry to be off, and sent on shore in the evening, offering to pay double for what we wanted; but the people were still obstinate. "`to-morrow morning we will trade gladly,' was the answer. "from every cottage came the sound of prayer, or voices singing hymns or psalms. certainly these people, little better than savages as they are, do keep the sunday very strictly. i never saw it kept like that elsewhere. some people who care about those things might say that they put us to shame. "the next morning, when we stood in at daybreak, the vessel was soon surrounded by canoes, full of all the provisions we wanted; and we were told that, if we required, men would be ready to help us fill our water-casks. still, i don't like to be put out as we have been, and i shall go when next we want fresh provisions to one of the islands where things are carried on in the old-fashioned way." captain judson had come on board to get some lime-juice, the best thing to prevent scurvy. he said that he had bought a good supply of what was called lime-juice; but, when the surgeon examined it, which he did when, in spite of the men using it, the scurvy appeared among them, he found that it was some common acid, of no use whatever. how horribly wicked were the manufacturers who could thus, in their greed for grain, knowingly destroy the health and lives of seamen who depended on their useless mixtures for preserving them from one of the most terrible maladies to which those who make long voyages are subject! whether or not the owners of the grand turk had paid less for this mixture than they would have done for good lime-juice is difficult to say; but it might certainly have cost the whole crew their lives, and it certainly cost them the loss of some hundreds of pounds while the ship was sailing away to procure vegetables, with a third of her crew on the sick-list, instead of catching whales. captain judson obtained the lime-juice for which he had come; indeed, the ajax had brought out a quantity on purpose to supply ships which might require it. he then took his departure, and, whatever he might have thought, the rest of the crew continued to grumble greatly at not having been allowed to go on shore and amuse themselves, as they called it, and expressed a hope that it was the last missionary island they should touch at in their voyage. the captain of the other whaler afterwards came on board. he was a wiser man than captain judson. he said that he made a point of visiting those islands where missionaries were established, as he was certain that he could then trust the people, whereas among the heathen islands he lived always in dread of having his boats' crews cut off, as had happened to many others to his knowledge. on leaving raratonga, the ajax bore away for savage island, or niue. captain cook describes the inhabitants as among the most savage of those he encountered. as his boat drew near to the shore, they rushed down towards him with the ferocity of wild boars to drive him away. in consequence of the behaviour of the natives, he gave it the name of savage island. subsequent visitors, for many years after that, fully confirmed the account he gave of the people. the ajax came off the island about five days after leaving raratonga. the two islands are about of an equal size, but in other respects are very unlike each other, as the highest part of savage island is not more than a hundred feet above the level of the sea. instead of the savages captain cook encountered, and those who, as late as , would have been on the coast, several canoes, with well-dressed, quiet-looking natives, came off to the ship. they all wore sad countenances, for they had indeed a tale of woe to tell. captain bertram inquired what had happened to them. "sad, sad," answered the interpreter. "early one morning a strange ship appeared off the coast. we thought nothing of that, as many have come and gone and brought missionaries to us, and others have called for vegetables and other produce, for which they have paid. this one had no flag to tell us whence she came, or what was her object in coming. as soon as we had finished our usual morning prayer, several canoes put off with fruits and vegetables to take to the strangers, and to learn what else they required. among those who went off were some of our leading men, the lawmakers and law-enforcers of our island. there were thirty or more church members, a deacon, and many candidates, most of them among our most promising young men. they were at once welcomed on board, and treated with great attention. suddenly the white crew rushed in among them with clubs, knocked down all on deck, and then they fired their guns at those attempting to escape in their canoes. several of the people in them were shot or drowned when the canoes were destroyed. the people in most of the canoes were so astonished that they did not even attempt to escape. instantly they were ordered on board the strange ship, which continued firing at the retreating canoes. three only of these got away, and one of them conveyed the corpse of simeon, a church member, shot through the head. the stranger, finding that no other canoes would go off from this part of our island, sailed away, with our fathers and brothers, and our other christian friends, on board. our hearts were bowed down with grief; but we prayed earnestly that we might forgive our enemies, and that god, in his great mercy, would change their hearts. (a fact.) we would not curse them, we would not pray that god would wreak his vengeance on their heads; for are we not told that, as we forgive our enemies, so alone can we ask god to forgive us?" the slaver, it appeared, had sailed along the coast, the natives being decoyed on board wherever met with, and then she had gone off to other islands to pursue the same nefarious system. captain bertram went on shore to make further inquiries. he found that all the inhabitants had professed christianity, and that, though not so advanced as the natives of raratonga, who have been so much longer tinder instruction, they were making fair progress in christian, as well as in secular, knowledge and civilisation. as no time was to be lost, the ajax again sailed in pursuit of the slaver. she first stood across to samoa, in the direction of which the slaver had been seen to steer. she looked in at several of the ports of that fine group of islands, and here also gained information of the transactions of the slavers, for several had appeared, and succeeded in kidnapping many natives. it was supposed that some of these slave-ships had sailed to the north-east, purposing to visit the groups of islands lying on either side of the equator. many islands were touched at, and inquiries made. a sharp look-out too was kept, for all were eager, from the captain to the youngest boy on board, to catch the miscreants who were outraging all laws, human and divine, in thus carrying off the innocent natives into slavery. chapter twelve. the frigate in danger. one day, a sail was sighted, becalmed. the frigate carried the breeze up to her. at first it was hoped that she was a slaver. she proved, however, to be a whaler, the grand turk, whose captain had come on board the ajax off raratonga. as captain bertram wished to make inquiries of captain judson respecting the slavers, he invited him on board. the captain of the whaler seemed very much out of spirits. before he went away, mr martin had a long talk with him, and inquired what was the matter. "why, martin, i am afraid that i have been a very sinful and foolish man," he answered. "you shall hear what has occurred. you know how i used to abuse the missionaries, and say that they spoilt all the people they got among, and that i would never visit another missionary island if i could help it. wishing to get more vegetables, we made for an island known to be heathen. we anchored in a sheltered bay, where i knew that the people would give us all we wanted for a mere song. we had soon plenty of natives on board, men and women. they danced and sang, and drank as much rum as our men would give them. i need not describe the scenes which took place. i must confess, what i now see to be the truth, that we have no business to call ourselves christians, or civilised people, while we allow such things to occur. yet they were not worse than have been carried on at many islands, ever since our whalers came to these seas. "the next day a quantity of provisions were brought down to the beach, and, thinking the people so inclined to be friendly, i let a number of our men go on shore. i was in my cabin when i heard a shot. i ran on deck, and saw our men running towards the boats. now and then they stopped and fired at a large band of natives, who were following them with clubs and spears. another body of natives were rushing down on one side to try and cut off our men, and great numbers of others were launching canoes in all directions. i had very little hope that our men would escape, but to help them i had an anchor and cable carried out astern, by hauling on which we brought our broadside to bear on the boats. our guns were then fired at the second party of natives of which i have spoken. this stopped them, or the whole of our men would have been cut off. we could not go to their assistance, as we had to remain on board to defend the ship from the canoes, which were now coming towards her. two of our men had been killed before our eyes; the greater number were shoving off the boats. they had just got them afloat, when the savages, gaining courage, charged them. two more of our poor fellows were knocked on the head. the rest jumped into the boats and pulled off from the beach. they had no time to fire. the canoes made chase after them. all we could do was to fire at the canoes with our big guns and muskets as they came on, hotly chasing the boats till they got alongside. the men climbed up the sides by the ropes we hove to them. we had barely time to hoist in the boats when the savages in vast numbers came round us, uttering the most fearful shrieks and cries. while some of my men kept them off with lances, and by firing down on them, others hove up the anchor and went aloft to loose sails. there was fortunately a fresh breeze off shore; our topsails filled, and we stood out of the bay, while the savages kept close round us, hoping, no doubt, that we should strike on a reef and become their easy prey. we had to fly here and there to keep them from gaining the deck, for as soon as one was driven back another took his place. not till we were well outside the reef did they give up the attempt to take the ship. not only had we lost the four men killed on the beach, but two others had been cut off in the boats, and several of those who got on board were badly wounded. i suspect that the savages had from the first intended to take the ship, for i could not make out that our men had given them any special cause of quarrel. i was thankful when we were well free of them, and i must confess to you, martin, that you were right when you advised me to visit a christian island instead of a heathen one. i cannot get over the loss of those poor fellows. it has been a severe lesson to me, and i am, i believe, a wiser man." "i am very sorry for the loss of your people, mr judson, and yet god will rule the event for your good if you continue to see it in the light you now do," observed mr martin. "the example which our so-called christian seamen have set to the natives of these islands has been fearful. their behaviour has created one of the chief difficulties to the progress of the gospel with which the missionaries have had to contend. it is, humanly speaking, surprising that they have made any progress at all. were it not indeed that god's hand has been in the work through the agency of the holy spirit, it is impossible that they could have succeeded." captain judson did not, perhaps, clearly comprehend the meaning of all mr martin said; but he thanked him cordially for his remarks, and returned on board his ship with several religious and other books for his crew, and among them a bible, which he confessed that he had not before got on board. "what!" exclaimed ben, when he heard this from mr martin; "a ship go to sea without a bible! how can the people get on? how can they do their duty? i am afraid they must forget to say their prayers." "you are right, ben," observed mr martin; "there are very many ships that go to sea without bibles, and the crews very often forget their duty to god and man. in my younger days, indeed, there were very few which took bibles, and the exception was to find one. a praying, bible-reading captain and ship's company was a thing almost unknown." ben, who had carefully preserved his bible, prized it sincerely, and read it every day, was surprised to hear this. there were a good many men also on board the ajax who had bibles, and read them frequently. sometimes some of the other boys had laughed at ben when they found him reading his bible, but he did not mind them, and went on reading steadily as before. the account of the cruel way in which the natives had been kidnapped by the peruvian slavers made everybody on board the ajax eager to catch some of them. night and day bright eyes were ever on the watch in different parts of the ship. this was especially necessary in those seas, where rocks and reefs abound; and though they are far better known than in lord anson's days, yet there are many parts but imperfectly explored. wherever the ship touched, ben made his usual anxious inquiries for ned. he, as before, frequently heard of englishmen living with the savages; but they did not answer to the description of his brother. still he had hopes that he should find him. ben remembered his father's advice, and acted up to it: "do right, whatever comes of it." by so doing he had gained the favour of his captain and all the officers of the ship. everybody said, "ben hadden is a trustworthy fellow; whatever he undertakes to do he does with all his heart, as well as he possibly can." ben had consequently plenty to do; but then he reaped the reward of his doing. sailors are often paid in a glass of grog for any work they do, and they are satisfied; but it was generally known that ben had a widowed mother, to whom he wished to send home money; and therefore ben was always paid in coin, and no one grudged it to him, knowing how well it would be employed. a sailor's life is often a very rough one; but when people are thrown together for a cruise of four years, as were the crew of the ajax, provided always they have a good captain and judicious officers, they wonderfully rub the rough edges off each other, and a kind and brotherly feeling springs up among them, which often lasts to the end of their lives. such was the feeling which existed among the officers and ship's company of the ajax. the officers treated the men with kindness and consideration, and the men obeyed their officers with alacrity. hitherto, the pacific appeared deserving of the name bestowed on it. for many months the ajax had experienced only fine weather. undoubtedly, gales had blown, and heavy rains had fallen, during that period; but the ship had sailed across to the west, while they occurred on the eastern part; and afterwards, when she went back towards the american coast, the rains fell and the gales blew on the west. this was, however, not always to be so. one morning, when ben went on deck to keep his watch, he found the sails hanging down against the masts, and the sea without the slightest ripple to break its mirror-like surface. every now and then, however, it seemed slowly to rise like the bosom of some huge monster breathing in its sleep, and a smooth low wave heaved up under the ship's keel, and glided slowly away, to be followed at long intervals by other waves of the same character. as they passed, the ship rolled from side to side, or pitched gently into the water, and the sails, hitherto so motionless, flapped loudly against the masts with a sound like that of musketry. the heat was very great; the seamen, overcome by it, went about their various duties with much less than their usual alacrity. the smoke curled slowly up from the galley-funnel, wreathing itself in festoons about the fore-rigging, where it hung, unable, it seemed, to rise higher. eight bells struck in the forenoon watch, the boatswain's whistle piped to dinner, and the mess-men were seen lazily moving along the deck, with their kids, to the galley-fire, to receive their portions of dinner from the black cook, who, with face shining doubly from the heat which none but a black cook or a german sugar-baker could have endured, was busily employed in serving it out to them. the smell of the good boiled beef or pork--very different from what our sailors once had--seemed to give them appetites, for they hastened back with the smoking viands to their mess-tables slung from the deck above. here the men sat in rows, with their brightly-polished mess utensils before them, and soon gave proof that the heat had had no serious effect on their health. it is usual to send all the men below at dinner-time, except those absolutely required to steer and look out, unless the weather is bad, and it is probable that any sudden change may be required to be made in the sails. most of the officers on this occasion were on deck, slowly walking up and down in the shadow of the sails. ben and tom were at their mess-table, laughing and talking and enjoying themselves as boys do in an ordinarily happy ship. "this is jolly!" observed tom. "i like a calm, there's so little to do; and it's fair that the sails should have a holiday now and then. they must get tired of sending us along, month after month, as they have to do." "i do not think they get much rest, after all, even now," said ben. "listen how they are flapping against the masts! if they had to do much of that sort of thing, they would soon wear themselves out. what a loud noise they make!" "oh yes; but that is only now and then, you see, just to show us that they have not gone to sleep as the wind has done, and are ready for use when we want them," remarked tom, who had always a ready answer for any observation made by ben; too ready sometimes, for he thus turned aside many a piece of good advice which his friend gave him. "at all events, the ship can't be getting into any mischief while she is floating all alone out here, away from the land," he added. "if i was the captain, i would turn in and go to sleep till the wind begins to blow again." tom did not know how little sleep the captain of a large ship, with the lives of some hundred men confided to him, ventures to take. captain bertram was on deck, walking with mr charlton. he stopped, and earnestly looked towards the north-east his keen eye had detected a peculiar colour in the water extending across the horizon in that direction. he pointed it out to mr charlton. "what does it seem to you like!" he asked. "a coral reef, sir. if so, we have been drifting towards it; i should otherwise have seen it in the morning," answered the first lieutenant. "i will, however, go aloft, and make sure what it is." in spite of the intense heat, mr charlton climbed up to the masthead. he carefully scanned the horizon in every direction, and then speedily returned on deck. "we are nearer to the reef than i had supposed, sir," he said. "we may keep the boats ahead, and somewhat hinder the ship driving so rapidly towards it; but it is evident that a strong current sets in that direction. had it been at night, we should have struck before we could have seen it." "pipe the hands on deck, then, mr charlton," answered the captain calmly. "if towing is to serve us, there is no time to be lost." mr martin was sent for, and his shrill whistle soon brought the whole of the crew tumbling up from below, the landsmen and idlers only remaining to stow away the mess things. the boats were soon lowered and manned, and sent ahead. the hot sun shone down on the men in the boats as they toiled away to keep the ship's head off the reef. it seemed, however, that they rowed to little purpose; for the undulations appeared at shorter intervals, and seemed to send the frigate towards the threatening rocks, on which a surf, not at first perceived, now began to break, forming a white streak across the horizon. the sails were brailed up, but not furled, in order that they might again be at once set, should a breeze spring up to fill them. mr charlton stood on the forecastle, directing the boats how to pull. every now and then he cast an anxious eye astern towards the breakers, which continued to rise higher and higher. a cast of the deep-sea lead was taken, but no bottom was found. to anchor was, therefore, impossible. everybody on board saw the fearful danger in which the frigate was placed. one thing only, it seemed, could save her--a breeze from the direction towards which she was drifting. all eyes, not otherwise employed, were glancing anxiously round the horizon, looking out for the wished-for breeze. ben and tom were as active as usual. they remained on board, as only the strongest men were sent into the boats; it was trying even for men. they continued rowing, and, encouraged by their officers, as hard as they had ever before rowed. suddenly, without a moment's warning, the captain ordered them to return on board. "hoist in the boats!" he shouted. "be smart now, my lads!" as the boats were being hoisted in, the spoon-drift began to fly across the surface of the hitherto calm ocean, hissing along like sand on the desert. the hitherto smooth undulations now quickly broke up into small waves, increasing rapidly in size and length, with crests of foam crowning their summits. directly the boats were secured, the captain shouted, "hands shorten sail!" the men with alacrity sprang into the rigging and lay out on the yard. the three topsails were closely reefed; all the other square sails were furled. there was a gravity in the look of the captain and officers which, showed that they considered the position in which the ship was placed very dangerous. dark clouds now came rushing across the sky, increasing in numbers and density. even before the men were off the yards, the hurricane struck the frigate. over she heeled to it, till it seemed as if she would not rise again; but the spars were sound, the ropes good. gradually she again righted, and, though still heeling over very much, answered her helm, and tore furiously through the foaming and loudly-roaring seas. the captain stood at the binnacle, now anxiously casting his eye along the reef, now at the sails, then at the compass in the binnacle, and once more giving a glance to windward. the ship's company were at their stations ready to obey any order that their officers might issue. four of the best men were at the wheel, others were on the look-out forward. not a word was spoken. the wind increased rather than lessened after it first broke on the frigate. had it been a point more from the eastward, it would have driven her to speedy destruction. as it was, it enabled her to lie a course parallel to the reef; but, notwithstanding this, the leeway she made, caused by the heavy sea and the fury of the gale, continued to drive her towards it, and the most experienced even now dreaded that she would be unable to weather the reef. the hurricane blew fiercer and fiercer. the frigate heeled over till her lee ports were buried in the foaming, hissing caldron of boiling waters through which she forced her way. it was with difficulty the people could keep their feet. the captain climbed up into the weather mizzen rigging, and there he stood holding on to a shroud, conning the ship, as calm to all appearance as if he had been beating up plymouth sound. the men at the helm kept their eyes alternately on him and on the sails, ready to obey the slightest sign he might make. although the topsails were close reefed, they seemed to bend the spars and masts as they tugged and strained to be free; mr martin, the boatswain, kept his eye anxiously on them. now was the time to prove whether the spars were sound, and, if they were sound, whether the rigging had been properly set up, and if that also was sound throughout. a ship, like a human being, is best tried in adversity; it is not in smooth seas and with gentle breezes that her qualities can be proved, any more than the nature of a man can be ascertained if all goes smoothly and easily with him. therefore, let no one venture to put confidence in himself, till he has been tossed about by the storms of life, and by that time he will have learned that he is weak and frail under all circumstances, unless sustained by the power of the holy spirit, who is alone able to keep him from falling. ben and tom had crept up to near where mr martin was standing. he saw them exchanging looks with each other. "there'll be a watery grave for all on board if the spars go," observed mr gimblet. "still, it's a satisfaction to believe that they are as sound sticks as ever grew." "it's just providential that we set up our rigging only t'other day. if this gale had caught us with it as it was before that time, we might have cried good-bye to our spars, sound as they are," said mr martin. "even now, i wish that the wind would come a point or two more on our quarter; we make great leeway, there's no doubt about that." ben and tom overheard these remarks of the two warrant-officers. ben fully understood the danger the ship was in, and that before an hour or so was over he and all on board might be in a watery grave; for he saw how impossible it would be for the stoutest ship to hold together if she once struck on the reef to leeward, the fearful character of which had now become more distinct than ever. the sea broke against it with terrific force, rising high up in a wall of water, and then fell curling back on the side from which it came. not the strongest swimmer could exist for a minute among those breakers. far away ahead it seemed to extend in one long unbroken line. the hearts of many on board began to sink; not with unmanly fear, but life was sweet; they had many loved ones in their far distant homes, and they could not but see that long before the frigate could reach the distant point she must drift on the reef. by the loss of one of her sails she would be sent there within a very few minutes. ben and tom, young as they were, could not fail clearly to comprehend their danger. ben did not tremble; he did not give way to tears, or to any weak fears, but he turned his heart to god. to him the young lad prayed that he would protect his mother: he tried to think of what he had done wrong, that he might earnestly repent; and then he threw himself on the love and mercy of jesus. "on thee, o lord jesus, on thee, in thee i trust," he kept saying. all this time, however, his attention was awake; his eyes were open, and his ears ready to receive any order that might be given. such is the state of mind, such the way in which many a christian sailor has met death. on, on, flew the frigate. it was indeed a time of intense anxiety to all on board. the officers were collected near the captain. a short consultation was held. some of the men thought that they were going to put the ship about, under the belief that she would lie up taller on the other tack. should she miss stays, however, and of that there was the greatest danger, her almost instant destruction would be the consequence. no; the captain would not make the attempt. he would trust to a change of wind. should it come ahead, then there would be time enough to go about; if not, it would be best to stand on. they were in god's hands, not their own. mr charlton and the second lieutenant were seen going aloft, with their telescopes at their backs. eagerly they scanned the line of breakers. it seemed sometimes as if no human being could hold on up there on the mast, with the hurricane raging so furiously around. the evening was drawing on. should darkness be down on them before they were clear of the reef, what hope of escape could they have? the eyes of the crew were now directed to their two officers aloft. their lives seemed to depend on the result of their investigations. at length they were seen to be descending. all watched them eagerly as they reached the deck. their countenances, it was thought, wore a more cheerful aspect than before. the wind had not lessened, nor was there the slightest indication of a change. the men, as has been said, were at their stations, and no one moved. there they would be found to the last, till the ship should strike. there, too, should all christian men be found when the last final shaking of the world takes place; there should they be when death overtakes them--doing their duty in that station of life to which god has called them. still the men, as they stood, could hold communication with each other, and it soon became known that mr charlton had seen an opening some way ahead, through which he believed the ship would pass. to corroborate the truth of this report, he and the master were seen again ascending the rigging. the eyes of both the officers were fixed ahead, or rather over the port-bow. all were now again silent, looking at the captain, and ready to spring at a moment to obey the orders he might give; the second lieutenant and mr martin were forward. mr charlton made a signal to the captain. "up with the helm!--square away the yards!" he shouted. the order was rapidly executed, and the frigate's head turned towards the dreaded reef; but between the walls of foam an opening of clear water was seen, amply wide to allow her to pass. almost in an instant, it seemed, she was flying by the danger on an even keel, the breakers sending the spray in heavy showers over her decks. the after-sails were furled: on she flew steadily before the gale. night came on. there might be other reefs ahead; but the captain and his officers and crew had done all that men could do, and they put their trust in god, who had already brought them safely through so many dangers, that he would protect them. chapter thirteen. ben is shipwrecked. the gale drove the ajax considerably out of her intended course, and it was some time before she could again haul up to the eastward. it was not without a providential purpose that she was driven in that direction. three days passed by after the gale had gone down, and just as she had sighted a small island, said to be uninhabited, the look-out at the masthead hailed the deck: "a sail on the lee-bow--five miles away!" he shouted. several of the officers went at once aloft, to have a look at the stranger. she was not a large vessel, that was certain; she might be one of the slavers. she must be overhauled at all events; all sail was accordingly made on the frigate. the stranger seemed not to have much wind where she lay; the frigate therefore came rapidly up with her. she was soon seen to be a schooner, and pronounced to have a spanish look about her. the frigate brought the breeze along with her, and as soon as the schooner felt it, she too made all sail, close-hauled, with an evident intention of escaping. this left little doubt of her character. she was a fast-looking craft, but the ajax was also noted for her speed, and few on board doubted that the schooner would be overtaken. everybody was eager to come up with her. what a satisfaction it would be to release the poor savage islanders, and many others of whom they had heard! the schooner made every effort to escape, and, at last, kept away, finding how fast her pursuer was on a wind, and endeavoured to run back towards the island, her crew probably expecting to be able to escape among the reefs which surrounded it. fortunately, the island having been well surveyed, a good chart of it existed on board. captain bertram was able to stand close in after her without fear. the ajax came quickly up after the schooner before the wind. "try her with a shot, mr charlton," said the captain; "but fire high, to injure no one on board." mr sponge, the gunner, with alacrity fired one of the bow chasers. the shot was admirably aimed, and the schooner's maintopmast fell over her side. the frigate's crew uttered a shout of satisfaction. the slaver, for so she was, did not wait for another, but instantly hauled down her flag. it was that of chili. the schooner was forthwith hove up in the wind. this done, two boats were seen to leave her side. captain bertram, on this, hove the frigate to, and ordered two boats to be manned and to bring the fugitives back, while two others pulled on board the schooner. ben was in one of the latter, with the interpreter. the crew gave way with a will, for they were eager to get on board. no one was to be seen on deck as they climbed up the sides, but tatai's hail was at once answered by shouts from below. the hatches were quickly knocked off, and a number of men and women came rushing up, showing, by evident signs, their joy at being liberated. their first impulse, however, was to fall down on their knees on the deck, and return thanks to jehovah for having freed them from the barbarians by whom they had been captured. they knew, from having several times before seen the british flag, that they would be kindly treated. they described through tatai, in pathetic language, the way that they had been treated after having been captured. they had been ordered not to pray aloud, or to sing, and, when off the farther end of this island, to their grief they heard the voices of several of their countrymen, who had come on board. in vain they shouted to warn them. some at length heard them, and endeavoured to escape. many sprang overboard into the sea in the hope of swimming on shore, when the inhuman wretches fired on them and killed several; others were knocked down, and, being recaptured, were forced below to join their poor countrymen. this treatment was more than even the patient islanders could stand. by violent efforts, with the aid of a piece of timber they found below, they forced off the hatch and rushed on deck. some of them threw themselves into the water in the hopes of swimming on shore, though now far from it. at length, the slaver sailed away from the spot, with her cargo of victims to be offered up at the shrine of mammon; or, in other words, to be destroyed in the silver mines of peru. even then, did these till lately savages curse their oppressors? no; even as they sailed away, torn from home and country, wives and children, to die in a foreign land--when they all knelt down at the usual hour to offer up prayer and praise to the god of love and mercy, who had brought them out of darkness into his marvellous light, they did not omit to pray for their cruel oppressors, that their hearts might be converted, and that they might turn to their maker and live. meantime, the boats of the frigate which had gone in chase of the slaver's overtook them, and brought them on board the ajax. their guilt was so evident, that captain bertram had no doubt about the propriety of detaining them as prisoners. it was necessary, therefore, to send a prize crew to take charge of the schooner. she was called the andorina (the swallow). mr owen, the third lieutenant of the frigate, was directed to take charge of the prize, to land the natives at the islands from which they had been taken, and then to follow the frigate to callao. mr manners was to go as his mate. ben and tom hoped that they would be among those chosen to form her crew, as boys would certainly be required. ben wished it, because he should thus be able to make more inquiries for ned at the places they might touch at, and he made bold to tell his wish to mr martin, who suggested it to mr charlton. the two boys were therefore delighted when their names were called out to go on board the prize. they quickly mustered with the rest of the prize crew, with their bags ready. the captain addressed them kindly before they left the frigate, urged them to maintain discipline, to obey mr owen and mr manners, and hoped that he should have a good report of them all when they rejoined the frigate. all arrangements being made, the frigate stood to the eastward with the slaver's crew on board, while the schooner made sail for samoa, tonga, and savage islands. the new crew of the schooner had a long voyage before them, but they were in good spirits; they had an abundance of provisions, having been well supplied by the frigate, in addition to what the schooner had before, and they were engaged in a just and humane cause. it was pleasant to observe the gentle, kind manners of the liberated natives. they were courteous and polite to each other, and they seemed evidently anxious to conform to all the rules and regulations formed for their management. one of them, who had lived some time in the house of a missionary, spoke a little english, and he was thus able to act as interpreter. although the crew of the slaver had taken away and thrown overboard one or two bibles and some other small books, which had been found in the girdles of the captives, they were very far from being deprived of all spiritual comfort, for they could nearly all repeat large portions of the scripture by heart, many of them entire chapters. they would happily pass many hours of each day repeating these to each other, singing hymns, and offering up prayers. two or three among them, who were elders of their respective churches, also occasionally addressed and exhorted the rest; indeed, it was a pity that their language was not understood by the white men, who might undoubtedly have learned many an important truth from them. mr manners, who was, as has been said, a very sincere christian, took great interest in their proceedings, and got the young native who spoke english, and who was called marco, to explain what was said. ben frequently stood by and listened, and then began to pick up a knowledge of the language. thus several days passed by very pleasantly on board the schooner. it has been remarked that this world is a very good and beautiful world, but it is the people who live in it that are bad. in this case the schooner was a very ordinary vessel, and had till lately been filled with very bad people, and a great deal of misery and suffering had existed on board her. now she was manned with god-fearing and religious people, and so her whole character was changed, and prayers and songs of praise ascended daily from her decks. the weather, however, was far from satisfactory. the stormy season had set in, and rains and gales of wind might be expected. mr owen proved himself a good and careful officer, and, assisted by mr manners, was constantly on the watch for the dangers which might befall them. the wind had hitherto been light and contrary, and the schooner had made but little progress. the weather now again became threatening, and caused considerably anxiety to the young officers. it was evident from the look of the sky, and the sudden way in which the sea got up, that another gale was coming on; not so violent, perhaps, as the former, but still requiring every possible preparation to be made for it. the boats and spars, and everything on deck, were doubly secured; the hatches and skylights were fastened down; the topmasts were struck; the lighter sails furled, and storm sails set; and in a short time the schooner was in a state to encounter the expected gale. it came on more gradually than the former one: at first in heavy squalls, and then more and more violently. the sea got up at the same time, and the vessel heeled over to the furious blast mr owen and mr manners consulted together what course to steer: the schooner could just lie her proper course, and on that course there were no dangers which could not be seen in time, and avoided, as far as they knew. on the other hand, should the gale increase still more, as there was every prospect of its doing, it would be necessary to put her before the wind, as it would be dangerous, if not indeed impossible, to keep her close-hauled as she then was. should she run for any distance before the gale, she would be carried into a part of the ocean studded thickly with islets. once among the archipelago, it might be impossible to avoid being dashed on the rock-bound shore of one of them. here, then, was sufficient cause for anxiety to the young officers. as long as possible, the schooner was kept on a wind, plunging through the seas. their only other resource was to heave-to; but there was danger in that where neither spars nor rigging could be trusted. the seas came breaking over her bows, and sweeping her decks. another huge billow, larger and more foam-covered than any of its predecessors, was seen ahead. "up with the helm, lower the peak, ease away the main-sheet, square away the maintopsail!" cried mr owen, with rapid utterance. the crew quickly obeyed his orders. the effect of these orders was to take the pressure off the after-part of the vessel, and round her head flew from the wind and the coming sea. it struck her, however, and from the way it swept along her side, tearing away part of her bulwarks, and doing other damage as it came on board, it was evident that it would have caused far greater disaster had her bow encountered its full force. on she now flew before the hurricane, for such it was rather than a common gale. there was no choice now as to heaving-to. the officers scanned the chart with anxious eyes. they saw, with regret they could scarcely conceal, that, unless the gale should cease, no skill of theirs could save the schooner from destruction, or unless, guided by an unseen power, she should thread her way amid the labyrinth of islets and reefs ahead of her. night was coming on. there was no moon. the dark clouds shut out all light from the stars. on flew the schooner. the unfortunate islanders were invited to come on deck, that, should the vessel strike suddenly, they might have some chance of escaping by swimming on shore. the danger was explained to them through marco. "we are in the hands of jehovah," was the answer. "he will do with us what he sees best." through the pitchy darkness the vessel rushed on. more than once the quick ears of the seamen detected, they thought, the well-known sound of breakers; but each time the sound died away to leeward: the vessel must have passed at a distance from them. hour after hour thus passed by. how all on board longed for daylight! yet daylight would only enable them to see the threatening danger, scarcely to avoid it. once more the sound of breakers was heard. this time it was ahead. in vain, with straining eyeballs, the seamen looked into the darkness to discover, if they could, whether the breakers were on the starboard or port bow. all held their breath. the stoutest hearts might then have quailed. the foretopsail was alone set; to have lowered that would have caused the vessel to be pooped, and so more speedily to have sealed her fate. on she flew to destruction. the dreaded crash came. she quivered from stem to stern. both the masts went by the board, carrying several of the seamen with them, as well as the young commander. another sea came hissing on astern, threatening to dash the vessel to pieces; but no! it lifted her up, and bore her on its summit far along over the reef. mr manners found himself at that awful moment in command of the schooner. he ordered the well to be sounded. it was not necessary; for the water, it was soon evident, was rushing in through numerous large rents made by the sharp coral. still the vessel drove on, now among rocks, now in clear water. she was, however, rapidly filling. "out boats!" was the cry. fortunately these had escaped injury. again, however, the schooner was exposed to the fury of the sea, which came sweeping round through a passage in the reef. at that moment a sudden panic seized the crew. ben felt himself grasped by the arm, and dragged into one of the boats which had just been lowered. five men only were in her. either intentionally or by accident, the painter was let go, and the boat drifted rapidly away from the sinking vessel. the men searched for the oars, which they supposed to be in the boat; only one was to be found. to return to the schooner was therefore impossible. their only prospect of safety was to get the boat before the wind with the oar. this was done, and farther and farther away she drifted from the vessel. the men said but little. they regretted being driven away from the schooner without receiving more on board; and ben heard, with sorrow, that there was but little chance of any of their shipmates being saved. their own prospects also were gloomy enough. they had no water, no provisions, on board, and one oar alone to guide the boat. one of the most dreadful fates which seamen have sometimes to endure seemed in store for them--to be out on the wide ocean, exposed to the heat of the sun by day and chills by night, without a drop of water to cool their burning thirst. the poor fellows knew too well that this might be their lot; but still they were thankful that they had hitherto escaped the destruction which had overtaken so many of their shipmates. two or three of the men at a time were employed in baling out the boat, while one steered as well as he could before the seas. again the sound of breakers was heard: it was right ahead. "it is all up with us!" cried one of the men. "god be merciful to us!" cried another. scarcely had they spoken, when the boat was lifted on the foaming summit of a sea, the crest of which nearly filled her with water, and down she came with a crash on the rocks, which dashed her to pieces. ben clung to one of the fragments. the despairing shrieks of his shipmates sounded in his ears, and he felt himself borne onward into smoother water. he clung tightly to the shattered plank, and thought that he saw trees rising before him. it was not fancy. the dawn had broken, and he was drifting along the shore. he could swim well, and felt sure that he could reach it. a few vigorous strokes, and his feet touched the firm sand. he waded up, and sank exhausted on the dry ground. the sun was shining brightly on his head before the shipwrecked lad awoke. he sat up, and, as he recovered his senses, he looked round, hoping to see his companions; but no one was visible. he rose to his feet, and shouted out their names. no reply came to him. he ran along the beach, calling to them; and then discovered that he was on a small island. his voice could, he fancied, have reached from one end to the other. with a sad heart, he found that he was alone--the only human being, as far as he knew, saved from the wreck. chapter fourteen. on a desert island. poor ben was very melancholy at the feeling that he was alone on that desert island; still, he was thankful that his own life had been preserved. "god surely would not have taken me out of the sea to let me die here by inches of hunger and thirst," he said to himself. "i will trust in god, as i have always done." as he said this, he put his hand in the bosom of his shirt. there was safe the little testament which his mother had given him, and which he had been reading before the gale sprang up. he spread it out open on the sand, that the leaves might dry. "he has spared me this; he has other good things in store for me," he whispered to himself. he also spread out his clothes, which very quickly dried. ben had lost his cap, so, while his testament and clothes were drying, he sat down and began making another out of some broad leaves which grew close at hand. while thus employed, and thinking over what he should do, he recollected that he had not prayed, nor thanked god for preserving him; so, having put on his clothes, he knelt down in the thin shadow of a tall palm, and prayed as he had never prayed before. after doing this, he felt greatly supported; yet his condition was indeed a forlorn one. he rose from his knees, and looked around. he felt thirsty, but not very hungry--sufficiently so, however, to remind him that he must look out for food. he was not aware of the difficulties of procuring it, so that his mind was not troubled on that score. his first idea was to survey the island, so as to learn to a certainty whether any of his shipmates might have been cast on it. he found a piece of timber on the sand, which served him for a walking-stick, and, supported by it, he set off to walk round the island. he first climbed up to the top of a rock near him, from which, between the trees, he could look across the island, and he thought that it could be little more than half a mile wide. how long it was he could not so well judge. he walked on and on, looking about for signs of fresh-water, for he knew that he must not drink that of the sea. he could find none. he became more and more thirsty; his tongue was parched, and his throat dry: still he would not give up. he dragged his weary feet along, helped by his stick. some rocky mounds, scarcely to be called hills, appeared in the distance, and he hoped that water might be found near them. this gave him fresh strength to drag himself along. the mounds were not so high even as he had fancied, and were much nearer. again he was disappointed. he paced round and round them; all was stony and dry. ben was very nearly giving way to despair, when he espied, scarcely fifty yards off, a group of tall trees with large round fruit hanging from them. at once he knew them to be cocoa-nuts, and he went on, eager to quench his thirst with the pure milk they contained. yet, weak as he was, how could he climb up to the top of those trees? he had often seen the natives do it with a band round their waists. if he were strong, he might do it in the same way, could he but find the band; but, in his weak state, that was impossible. again he was doomed to disappointment, he feared, and was about to pursue his exploring tour, when he saw, not far off, a nut on the ground. he ran eagerly and picked it up. it had been blown off during the recent gale. after stripping off the husk, he soon broke in the end; and, though he spilt a little, there was sufficient milk in it to quench his now burning thirst. he then more slowly ate pieces of the fruit, which he cut out with his knife. here was one means of supporting life, and ben's elastic spirits again rose. at his age the thoughts of the future did not press heavily on him. he had, too, `a conscience void of offence towards god': not that he did not feel and know himself to be a sinner; but he felt himself to be a pardoned one, as a sincere believer in christ. that was the secret of his light-heartedness. still he had a longing for pure water. he knew, too, that he could the better cook any fish he might obtain if he could find it. how was he to light a fire, however? just before the gale came on, the cook had sent him below to get his tin-box of matches, and after the cook had taken one out, ben had put it into his pocket. there it was, and, the lid fitting tightly down, the matches were uninjured. "i must cherish them carefully, however," he thought; "when they are gone, i shall be unable to light a fire." he looked about and found several other cocoa-nuts, which he collected, and piled up where he could again find them. much refreshed, ben continued his walk. at last he saw the end of the island. for a quarter of a mile or more it was low and barren, hard rock washed apparently by the sea; so he turned round and went back by the other shore. the island was, altogether, nearly two miles long; but there were not many cocoa-nut trees on it,--nor much soil indeed, which was the reason probably that it was not inhabited. he might now exclaim, though sadly, "i am monarch of all i survey;" but he would rather have been the meanest subject of a small kingdom, with civilised companions, than a king and all alone on that nearly barren reef. still he had no fear of starving; shell-fish he saw on the rocks in abundance. during the calm, too, some of the natives had been fishing over the side of the vessel, and he also had got some hooks and a long line. these he had put into his pockets. he might, he hoped, find some roots, and thus be able to vary his diet. as the sun rose, the horizon became very clear, and he thought that he could distinguish land in one direction; it was at all events a long way off, and it was so faint that it might be only a cloud just rising above the horizon. he should be able to judge better after watching it for a day or two. as ben walked on, his eye was continually roving about for signs of water. how gladly would he have welcomed the sight of even a little mossy pool, or some moisture in the crevice of a rock! he did not despair. he had hitherto only explored the shore; water might rise in the interior, and be lost in the sand before it reached the beach. "one thing i ought to have before night," he said,--for he had got into the way of talking aloud,--"that is, shelter. i must build myself a hut;" and so he set to work. there were canes, and bushes, and broad leaves of the pandanus and other trees in abundance. he did not require a very spacious mansion; still he wanted one high enough to sit in. he worked on till he was tired and hungry. he had left his cocoa-nuts some way off, and had to go for them. he brought as many as he could carry back to his hut. knocking a hole in the end of one of them, and carefully scraping out the fruit after he had drunk the milk, he waded into the water, and cut some mussels off the rocks. his cocoa-nut he filled with salt-water. coming back, he lighted a fire in a hole a little way from his hut. would he put his cocoa-nut on it? no; he was too wise for that; but he made some stones red-hot, and kept tumbling them into the water till the mussels were sufficiently cooked. others he toasted before the fire, but he liked the boiled ones best. he thus made a tolerably substantial meal. to keep in his fire, he built up a wall of stones round it, and put on a quantity of green sticks, which would burn slowly, hoping in that way to save the expenditure of another match. "i will finish my hut, and then i will go and have another hunt for water," he said to himself, as he began working again. he had placed his hut against a tree, with the opening turned away from the wind. there were plenty of dry leaves about, which he collected for his bed. he did not require furniture; that he would make by and by. while hunting in his pockets for the matches, he found a number of thin flat seeds. he recollected having saved them from a fruit of the gourd species, which had been used on board the schooner. he carefully dried them and put them by, remembering that such things grow very rapidly. "there will be no harm sowing them; if i do not use them, others will. i am thankful i found them," he thought. once more he set out to look for water. the exertion he had gone through, and the heat, made the milk of the cocoa-nut insufficient for quenching his thirst. the ground was rough; but he eagerly clambered over it, backwards and forwards, hoping thus to find a spring if one existed. the sun was sinking low, when he thought that the trees and shrubs, in a hollow he saw some way before him, looked greener and more luxuriant than those in other places. "water makes leaves and grass green," he said to himself; "i hope so, for i don't think that i could live many more hours without water, not through another day in this hot sun. oh dear! oh dear! how very, very thirsty i am! what would i give if there should be water there, even though i should only get one good drink of it! ay, but i shall want it another day--for many days, or months, perhaps, as long as i live on this island. i don't think that god will have put only a little there. if there is any, there will be a good supply for me, more than this cocoa-nut full, i am certain." he had brought a cocoa-nut shell with him to fill with water, that he might take some back to his hut. ben almost shouted for joy when he found a spring of pure water bubbling up from under a big rock. it ran a little way between rocks, and then lost itself in a sandy bed. he scooped a hole in the ground, into which he put his cocoa-nut shell, which quickly filled with water. how sweet and pure it tasted! he felt that he could never take enough. at last, however, his thirst was quenched, so he filled his cocoa-nut shell, and directed his steps to the sea-shore; but he had not gone far before he was tempted to put the shell to his lips. he soon drained it, and then he went back for more. his great fear was that he should not again find the spring. he marked the spot with the greatest care, and noted each tree and mound as he took his way towards the beach. night was coming on, as it does in those latitudes, very rapidly; and ben had to hurry on for fear of not finding his hut, and at the same time to be very cautious not to spill the water out of his cocoa-nut. oh that people would be as eager for the water of life, as little ben was for the spring in that desert island, and would be tempted to return to it again and again to drink afresh of its pure source! ben was thankful when he saw the glow from his fire, which continued smouldering gently. without it he might have passed his hut. he could not manage by its light to read more than a few verses from his testament; but even those few gave him comfort and hope. with a heart truly grateful for the mercies bestowed on him, he knelt down and offered up his simple prayer to god. the last thing he did was to make up his fire afresh, and then he crept into his hut and in a few moments was fast asleep. the sun had risen before ben awoke. he felt that he had a great deal to do. he could not tell how long he might have to remain on the island. it might be not only for months, but for years. much depended on his own sense and energy whether he would retain his health, or indeed life itself. he began the day with prayer and reading the testament. he knew that that was the best way at all events to save himself from turning into a savage. he then made his breakfast off cocoa-nut and shell-fish. "i must catch some fish, however," he said to himself, as he finished the last clam; "this food will not do to live on always. i may find some roots and berries, and perhaps turtles' eggs. i heard some wild-fowl cry last evening; i may find their eggs too, and trap them or some other birds, or get a turtle itself. the first thing i'll now do is to carry my hut nearer to the water, instead of having to bring the water all this way to the hut. that won't take long. i can carry the whole of it in two journeys, and quickly put it up. i must take the fire after it. that will keep in for many hours, i see, with the help of this rotten wood. if i go working on in these clothes, i shall soon wear them out. i must see what i can do to make others out of the bark of the paper-mulberry, as the natives do; i thought i saw some of those trees yesterday. i daresay i shall not succeed at first, but there is nothing like trying. there is a piece of open ground near the spring which will just do for the gourd-seeds. i'll sow them therein forthwith. the fruit is very wholesome, i know; and the dried gourds will furnish me with basins and pots and pans in abundance." ben put all his plans into execution in a methodical, regular way. he became, indeed, perfectly happy, and almost contented with his lot, except when he thought of his mother and ned--poor ned, still undiscovered, living among savages, or on a desert island, like himself. his own fate made him hope more than ever that ned had escaped. now and then the course of his plans was interrupted by something else which occurred to him to do. one idea was to erect a beacon at each end of the island, to attract the attention of those on board any passing vessel. he had nothing of which to make a flag, so a flagstaff would have been of no use. it then struck him that a cross would be more remarkable than anything else, and he devoted a part of each day to the work. it was a very heavy task. he chose a tree towards the end of the island, where he proposed erecting the first cross. he had only a stout pocket-knife, but he could employ fire, and that only required constant watching. a large sharp stone helped him. when he had thus felled the tree, he had to cut off the branches, and to drag it to the end of the island. with great labour he partly burned, and partly cut, a deep notch, into which he fixed the cross-beam, securing it with wedges. he had observed a cleft in the rock: in this he placed the butt-end, and gradually raised it with far more ease than he could otherwise have done. some large stones placed round it kept it secure. the other cross was erected much in the same manner. his fishing was very successful, and he was soon able to catch an ample supply for his daily food. he found, too, some roots which were perfectly wholesome. when cultivated by the natives, they formed one of their chief articles of food. he was not disappointed in finding, after a time, some turtles' and sea-fowls' eggs; indeed, he had an abundance of nutritious food, gained, however, by his own exertions and perseverance. it might have been possible for a person to have died of starvation on the island, simply on account of not looking for the means of subsistence which it afforded. ben not only collected for present use, but preserved what he could for the future, knowing that at certain seasons the turtle and wild-fowl would cease to lay eggs, that the fish might leave the coast, or that stormy weather might prevent his catching them; that the cocoa-nuts would dry up, as might the roots, and that the wild-fowl might become more wary. he was thus never idle, from morning till night; and though, of course, he thought very often of home and ned, and of how he should get away, yet he never was unhappy or out of spirits. he was as fond as ever of saying, "do right, whatever comes of it, and trust in god." chapter fifteen. escape: and the end of ben's history. ben had recollected the day of the week on which, he was cast on the island. by means of a stick which he notched regularly, a plan he had often heard of being adopted under similar circumstances, he kept an exact note of the days as they passed. sunday he made a day of rest. it was not, however, a day of weariness. he read much more than usual of his testament, and, recollecting the way the natives had repeated portions of it, he set to work to commit some of its chapters to memory. this he found a delightful occupation. when doing so, he spent many hours walking up and down on the smooth sea sand, with shoeless feet, looking out every now and then on the blue ocean, and thinking what a beautiful world it is we inhabit, and how grievous that man should mar it by his evil temper and wicked deeds. then he would occasionally sing all the hymns he knew at the top of his voice, from very joyfulness of heart. in the week-days, when at work, he would repeat over what he had learned on the sundays. thus five months, by his calculation, passed away. one monday forenoon, as he was going out to the end of a reef to fish, on looking in the direction where he had frequently seen what he supposed to be land, he saw an object moving over the water. it was not white, like the sail of a vessel. it must, then, be the mat-sail of a large double canoe. thinking no more of his fishing, he ran up to the highest rocky hill in the neighbourhood to watch its progress. it was drawing nearer the island, and yet apparently not steering directly for it, rather, as it were, to pass at some distance. "i wonder what sort of people are on board," he thought. "perhaps savages--cannibals. then it will be much better if they do not come here. if they are christian natives, then i shall be very glad to go with them, as they of course are on their way to some civilised island where ships are likely to call." the wind was light, the canoe moved slowly, and ben's anxiety increased. at last it seemed clear that the canoe would not come nearer to the island. he heaved a deep sigh, and sat silent and sad for some time. then he recollected that he was going to fish. he got up, and again worked his way towards the end of the reef. he cast in his line, and had hooked a fish, when, just as he landed it, on looking up for an instant, he saw the canoe gliding towards the island. it was steering for the point on which stood the cross, there could be no doubt about that. he watched it eagerly, anxious to ascertain who was on board. if they were savages, should he hide himself, and trust to their going away again? "yet even if they are savages, they will not hurt me," he said to himself. "they will see at once that i cannot do them any harm. i will run and meet them, and welcome them. that will be the best way, i am sure. i will take a branch in my hand, and wave it as the natives do, to show that i wish to be friendly with them." saying this, ben drew up the fish he had hooked,--a fine large one,-- retreated along the reef over the rocks, cut a branch, and ran along the beach as fast as his legs could carry him towards cross point. he got there before the canoe, for the wind was light. he could see a number of people on it as it drew nearer. were they savages? they were all clothed. yes, and some of them were dressed as english sailors. there was a glitter of gold-lace on the coat of one of them. in the bow stood a young sailor lad. gradually the faces began to grow distinct. how his heart leaped with joy! there were tom martin and mr manners, and several of the prize crew he had long thought in their ocean graves, and there were also a good number of the natives, busy in lowering the huge mat-sail of the canoe. they were the very men who had been on board the schooner. ben was at first almost beside himself with delight. he waved his hands and shouted wildly; then he ran down and showed them the best place for bringing the canoe to shore. the natives cried out to him, but neither tom martin nor any of the english seamen seemed to know him. "i wonder what that little savage wants," he heard tom say to one of the men. "he looks to me as if he was out of his senses." "no, i am not, tom martin, i can assure you," cried ben, running up to him and putting out his hand; "only very, very glad to see you again, and to find that you are all alive." "well, indeed, i am also glad to find you were not drowned, ben," answered tom, wringing his shipmate's hand till it seemed as if he would wring it off. "i felt certain that you were drowned, and was very sorry for you, that i was!" "he speaks truth, ben," observed jem stokes, a seaman who had always stood tom's friend. "the lad took so ill when he thought that you were lost, that we thought he would have slipped his cable altogether; but mr manners spoke to him, as he did to all of us, and told him that if you had left this world you had gone to a better." jem's remarks were cut short by mr manners, who had now come on shore. ben was not aware, till he observed the surprised look with which his officer regarded him, of the odd figure he cut. he then recollected that he wore a suit of his own home-made clothes: a hat of leaves, in shape between an extinguisher and an umbrella; a cape of mulberry-tree cloth, and a kilt of the same, reaching down to his knees. with shoes he had learned to dispense, that he might have a good pair to go away in. he had worn them, however, on sunday mornings, when he had put them on, with the rest of his best suit. ben explained to mr manners why he was dressed in that curious fashion, and the young officer highly approved of his reasons, and complimented him on his ingenuity in their manufacture. the whole party then collected round him while he gave a brief account of the way he had been preserved, and how he had managed to subsist during his sojourn on the island. he, in return, was informed how his friends had escaped. the schooner, from having no cargo in her, did not sink as soon as was expected, but drove on to another reef, where she stuck fast. the gale falling soon after, those on board had time to construct a raft, on which, with the aid of one of the boats, they reached an island which they had seen five or six miles off. they were able to save a small quantity of provisions; but the larger portion, being under water, could not be got at. the island was of considerable size, and, thanks to the knowledge possessed by the natives, they had not experienced much difficulty in procuring food. the schooner soon broke up, so that very little more was got out of her, and only a few articles of value were washed ashore. mr manners at once proposed building a vessel; but the carpenter's mate, who had come in the schooner as carpenter, had been lost when the vessel went on the rocks, and none of the other men knew anything of ship-building. the natives, on hearing the wish of the english officer, offered to construct a large double canoe, three or four professional canoe-builders being among them. they were far more ingenious than the civilised englishmen. their tools they made out of stones, and flints, and shells; the fibre of trees served them instead of nails; their sails were made out of dried grass. it was a work, however, of great labour; night and day they toiled at it. at length, aided by the englishmen, it was completed. they had preserved and stored all the food they could collect and spare for their voyage; but their great difficulty was to carry enough water. the water on the island was bad, and they had not sufficient receptacles for it. still, they hoped to reach some island where they might replenish their stock; but that was very uncertain. "indeed, the possibility--or, i may say, the probability--of our running short of water is the greatest cause of anxiety i have for our dangerous voyage. if that was over, i should have fewer cares on my mind," observed mr manners. "then, sir, i think that i can certainly relieve you of that care," answered ben. "there is a spring of excellent water in the middle of the island, and near it i planted, on the second day of my arrival, some gourd-seeds. the plants grew up very fast, and the fruit has now become of great size, and is perfectly ripe. each of them would, i should think, when dried, hold a large quantity of water; and i am sure that the pulp is very good and wholesome, for i have felt much better since i lived on it. besides, i have already dried a number of the outsides, so that we may judge how they hold water." "that is indeed providential, ben," observed mr manners. "god, i believe, never allows anything to be done without an object; and it seems very clear that you were thrown on this island, not only that your own life might be saved, but that you might be the means of preserving all our lives. had it not been for you, we should not have known that there exists water on the island; and we certainly should not have had the means of carrying it away. let us at once examine the gourds, that we may see what can be done." mr manners now called marco, and begged him to set off at once with ben, and examine the gourds, with a few of the other natives, while the rest dispersed on the island to collect roots, cocoa-nuts, and, indeed, any other food that they could find. ben could not help feeling proud at the commendation which mr manners bestowed on his hut and its internal arrangements; still more so on his plantation of gourds. the little seeds which he had brought to shore in his jacket-pocket had now become large plants, producing gourds twice the size of a man's head. as he had wisely planted them at a distance from each other, they had all grown to their full size. marco selected thirty, at least, each of which would hold several quarts of water; while their pulp was a welcome addition to the food of those who had been for so long living on the produce of the sea, and roots, and cocoa-nuts. three days were spent in drying the gourds and in filling them, and in replenishing the other receptacles on board the canoe with the pure water from ben's fountain. one or two defects in the canoe were also made good, and a considerable addition to their supply of provisions was taken on board. ben took a last look at the hut he had so long inhabited, and the garden he had cultivated with so much care, with a feeling almost of regret, knowing that he was to part from them for ever. before leaving them, however, he planted a number of ripe seeds, and repaired his hut, in case any other person might be cast on shore on the island. the crosses were also repaired. "we had not intended landing on the island till we saw them," observed mr manners. "when our eyes caught sight of them, we knew that some christian person must be, or must have been, on the island; and, though eager to proceed on our voyage, we at once resolved to touch at the place. i pray that, before long, the time may come for the cross to be erected on every island throughout the wide pacific, not as the symbol of nominal christianity, of a religion of forms and ceremonies, but as the sign of a true and living faith, of a spiritual worship acceptable to god." the last remarks, though spoken aloud, were made by mr manners rather to himself than to those near him. all preparations having been made, the whole party, with ben hadden, embarked on board the canoe. she was paddled out into the open sea, the wind was fair, the sail was hoisted, and ben soon saw his island home sink beneath the horizon. the difficulties in the navigation of the voyage just commenced were very great. mr manners had saved only a boat's compass; he had no quadrant and no chart. he calculated that they were about sixteen hundred miles at least from samoa, for which group he shaped his course. they expected to meet with several islands on the way, but though the inhabitants of some of them had been converted to christianity, those of others were still sunk in heathen darkness and barbarism. it would be necessary for them, therefore, to be very careful on which they landed. in the one case, they would be sure of a friendly reception; in the other they would be attacked, and probably murdered, if not on their guard. ben hoped that at all events they might touch at several islands, that he might have more opportunities of making inquiries about ned. he found that strict discipline was maintained on board the canoe. all on board were divided into watches, taking regularly their turns of duty. morning and evening there were prayers, led by mr manners in english and by marco in his own language. the day was begun by all joining in a hymn, then the scriptures were read and commented on by the respective readers. ben was very glad to find that tom took a great interest in their services, and spoke on religious subjects in a tone that he had never before done. "why, you see, ben," said tom, "on that awful night of the wreck i thought that we were all going to be drowned, and when, after all, we got on shore, i felt how merciful and kind god had been to save such a wicked fellow as i was, instead of you, who was so much more fit to go to him. i was still very sorry for you, for your mother's sake, and i knew father would be very sorry when he heard of it. i do not suppose that those thoughts would have lasted very long; i am afraid not: but then, mr manners spoke to me so kindly, that i felt what an ungrateful wretch i should be if i didn't give my heart to so good and merciful a god; and from that day to this i have been trying to do so. it is not very easy, even among the few of our poor fellows remaining; but mr manners says that i must pray for grace, and not trust to my own strength, and that then, if i am sincere and not a hypocrite to myself, that i should have every confidence of being supported and protected. it is that thought, ben, which gives me so much comfort. otherwise i should be very unhappy, and not at all sure that i should not be a castaway after all." "that is just the same thought that has made me always happy," remarked ben. "i know that god never casts out any who go to him through christ, and trust to him completely, and not to themselves, while they try to love and serve him as much as they can, though that is very little after all i can't tell you, though, tom, how glad i am to hear you speak so, and i am sure that your father will be still more glad, if we ever find the ship again, which i hope we may do." "that's the very thing i am afraid of," said tom. "i shall be very glad indeed to see my father again; but when i get back among the other boys, and into old ways again, i shall be apt to do just as before, and to talk nonsense and play all my old tricks. i say, ben, if we ever do get back, you must help me! won't you, there's a good fellow?" of course ben promised tom that he would help him as much as he could, though he reminded him also that he must depend on himself in one sense, though not on his own strength, for that effectual strength he could alone obtain through the aid of the holy spirit. the wind was light, and the sea calm, and the canoe glided smoothly over the water. she was of a curious construction, being in reality two canoes connected by a very strong platform. the mast was a triangle, which supported a mat-sail spread on a long yard. the vessel had not to go about; but, as the stem and stern were alike, she sailed equally well both ways. at each end there were long oars, which served as rudders; but in calms she was impelled by paddles, and could thus also be moved at a considerable rate. nobody on board was idle. in calm weather every one was employed in paddling or steering. mr manners took his turn with the rest. if there was a sea,--that is to say, if it was rough,--ben and tom, with the assistance of two or three others, had enough to do to bale out the water. a constant look-out was also necessary, to avoid any reefs or low islands in their course. ben was very happy. he had been so long without talking, that it was a satisfaction to him once more to use his tongue, though still greater to hear other people talk, especially mr manners and tom, when they spoke on subjects in which he was interested. as for his own tongue, when once set going, he found no little difficulty in again stopping it. the weather continued so calm, that it was impossible to say to what extent the voyage might be prolonged: it was necessary, therefore, to use the greatest economy in the consumption of water and their scanty supply of provisions. a small allowance of food and water was served out to each person three times a day; but no one grumbled, for all saw the necessity of the arrangement. six days had passed by since the canoe had left ben hadden's island, as mr manners called it, when land was sighted ahead, or rather, the trees which grew on it, for their tops were first seen. it was an island extending for three or four miles across the horizon. no one on board knew anything about the island, but they hoped that they might there obtain a fresh supply of water and provisions, and, should it be inhabited by christians, that they might gain some information as to their direct course for samoa. accordingly they steered for an opening which appeared in the barrier-reef. on getting through it, other rocks were seen ahead, and mr manners was afraid, should he stand on, of injuring the canoe. the sail was lowered, and they were about to paddle off again in order to search for a safe landing-place, when a man was seen on the shore beckoning them. first he pointed to the right hand, by which they knew that they were to sail in that direction; then he beckoned directly to himself, afterwards to the left, and so on. by following his directions, they reached the beach in safety. he was a wild-looking person dressed in a leaf hat, something like the one ben had made for himself, with a seaman's tattered jacket, and a kilt of native cloth. his feet and legs were bare, his hair was long, and hung down over his shoulders, while in his hand he carried a heavy club, which he grasped tightly, as if he considered it likely to prove a friend in need. notwithstanding his wild appearance, it was easy to perceive by the colour of his skin, sunburnt as it was, that he was not a native. he seemed very much surprised at seeing white men on board the canoe, for he did not appear to have discovered that till they were on the point of landing. he did not, however, address them, but spoke to the natives in a language which they understood. marco inquired of him whether there were other inhabitants on the island, and whether they were christians. he said that there were a great many; that they were not _lota_, that is christians, but that they were a very good sort of people. they had sent him on to the end of the reef to pilot in the canoe, he said, and they themselves would soon come to welcome the strangers. he had scarcely spoken before a large number of wild, nearly naked savages came out from among the trees. they were armed with spears and clubs, had long matted hair like a black thatch over their heads, and were altogether a very forbidding, unattractive set of beings. still, from what they said to marco and the other natives, and by their actions, they appeared to be friendlily disposed towards their visitors. it was near evening, and they signified that, if the visitors would remain overnight, they would the next day bring all the provisions required, and plenty of calabashes of pure water, which they stated was to be obtained in the middle of the island. mr manners thanked them, and said that he would remain till the next day. the natives then invited them to come and sleep on shore; but this mr manners declined, as he preferred sleeping on board the canoe. to allow more room on board, he said that he would not object to some of his people building huts of boughs for themselves on the beach, but urged them on no account to go to a distance from it. the natives, however, to show their good intentions, brought down to the beach a supply of taro and other roots and fruits, likewise as much fresh-water as their visitors would require. they seemed, as mr manners thought, rather disappointed that no one would accompany them away from the shore. they stood by while the provisions were being cooked, rather astonished at the proceeding; still greater was their surprise when the natives sung a hymn and offered up a prayer before they began to eat. what it could all mean of course they could not tell, but they probably had an idea that it was some sort of incantation, for they were seen to draw back for some distance, and not till the hymn was finished did they return, when they stood looking on as before. ben and tom, with two of the english seamen, were allowed to go on shore that they might draw the white man, if possible, into conversation, if he could speak english. he had hitherto kept aloof from the strangers, and even stood behind his native companions while the hymn was being sung. when the natives had finished singing, ben stood up and said the short grace which his father had been accustomed to repeat before meals. the white man, who at that time was standing a little way apart from his companions while ben was speaking, drew nearer to him, and seemed to be listening attentively. "i say, old fellow, come and have something to eat," said one of the seamen, holding out a bit of taro at the end of his knife. the white man looked wistfully towards the strangers; then he cast a glance at the scowling, savage-looking natives who were watching him, and, shaking his head, again drew farther back from them. there he sat without speaking, and each time either ben or tom, or the other two seamen, addressed him, he shook his head, as if either he did not understand, or, at all events, did not wish to hold any communication with them. while the party who purposed sleeping on the shore were putting up their huts, and collecting leaves for their beds, the natives and the white man, as before, stood watching them, but made no offer of assistance. the christian visitors again sang a hymn, as the sun set and darkness came on. then commending themselves to the protection of heaven, they crept into their huts, and lay down to sleep. ben and his shipmates, finding that the natives and their white associate had gone away, soon after followed their example; one of the seamen promising to sleep with one eye open, so as to be on the watch, though it was the opinion of all that the natives were a quiet sort of people, who would do them no harm. there was no moon; but the sky was clear, and the bright stars which glittered forth from it in countless numbers, in that pure atmosphere, afforded sufficient light to enable objects to be visible at a little distance. ben had slept for some time, he fancied, when he was awakened by feeling a hand placed on his arm. "hist, youngster! don't lie sleeping there," whispered a voice in his ear. "rouse up the other englishmen. get on board the canoe, and be off, or you'll all be murdered. never mind the natives with you. if you wake them up, there'll be a noise, and the people of the place will be down on them. don't speak above a whisper, whatever you do. the people are not far off, and i found it a hard job to steal away." ben at once comprehended that some danger was threatened. he sat up, and saw the stranger white man standing over him. "leave our christian friends! no, we will never do that," he answered. "i will go and arouse them, while you can awake my shipmates; and, whoever you are, you must come with us." "well, well, i'll do as you wish," answered the white man; "only be sharp, and tell the people to creep along over the ground, so as not to be seen at a distance. we must climb into the canoe, and shove off without any noise, or they will be down on us before we can get clear of the reefs." without wasting more time on words, ben crept off to where marco was sleeping; he had fortunately noted the place. awaking him, he told him of the warning he had received, and marco quickly aroused the rest of his party. it was with difficulty that the seamen could be prevented from speaking when called; in a couple of minutes, however, the whole party were creeping down towards the canoe, which lay afloat alongside some rocks running into the water. they were all quickly on board, followed by the young englishman--for such it was supposed the white man was, by his language. "shove off, sir!" he whispered to mr manners, who had only then been aroused. "no time to lose. i will go to the helm." the advice was instantly followed; the warps were cast off, the paddles got out, and the canoe began slowly to glide out from among the rocks. scarcely, however, had she begun to move than loud shouts were heard, and large numbers of the savage natives were seen rushing down from among the trees to the beach. when they found that the canoe had moved from the rocks, they yelled and shouted more fiercely than ever. "give way, lads! give way!" cried the stranger; "there is a narrow place where they may catch us if we are not smart." neither the english seamen nor the natives required any urging, but paddled away as hard as they could. they saw the savages indeed, their figures standing out against the sky, as they hurried along over the rocks, shouting, and leaping, and brandishing their spears. before the canoe had got far, a shower of spears and darts fell among the party on board; but, thrown from a distance, not much injury was done, and they were only stimulated to increased exertion. alone, they could not, in the dark, have found their way out through the passage in the reefs; the young man, however, seemed confident that he knew the right course to steer. not a word was spoken; each man paddled as hard as he could. gradually the rocks were left behind, and the last passage between the reefs was seen; beyond was the open sea. the shouts and shrieks of the savages became fainter and fainter. they either had not had time to launch their canoes, or were afraid to attack the large double canoe in them. in a short time mr manners and his companions were in safety. once more a course was steered for samoa. all were thankful for their narrow and providential escape, and did not fail to express their gratitude to the young englishman who had been the means of preserving their lives. he, however, seemed unwilling to talk on the subject. "nothing particular, sir, to thank me for," he answered. "less said about it the better, according to my notion." it was fortunate that they had economised their small stock of water and provisions, as they had been unable to replenish them at the island from which they had just escaped. it was necessary to be even still more careful than before, because it might be some time before they could reach any other island where they could obtain what they required. most of the english seamen were loud in their threats of vengeance against the savages, for their treacherous conduct. "if we ever reach the old ajax, we would like to get her to go back and blow the fellows to pieces," said one. "no, no; that is not the way to treat them," observed marco, when he understood what was said. "the way to treat them will be to send a missionary to teach them better things. with god's aid, that will we do as soon as we reach our own island, or can let our brethren at raratonga know of their condition." "yes, you do speak like a real christian, marco," answered the seaman who had thoughtlessly made the proposal. "that's the right way, to be sure: i didn't mean that i would really wish to kill the poor savages, for of course they don't know better." the next morning the wind was fair, the sea smooth, and the canoe glided swiftly over the waters. the work of the day was commenced, as usual, with a hymn and a prayer, and then the scriptures were read. the young stranger stood aloof, disinclined, as it seemed, to join in the service. at length, mr manners invited him to join in the prayer he was about to offer up with his own men in english. "thank ye, sir," answered the stranger, giving the usual seaman's pull at his hair, when addressing an officer. "it's so long since i have prayed, that i have forgotten how." "that is a sad thing, my lad," answered mr manners, "the sooner, then, you begin the better. did you ever learn how to read your bible?" "once, sir, long ago; but i have forgotten all about that too, i am afraid," answered the stranger. "for better than three years i haven't spoken a word of english. i don't think i could read, even if i was to try ever so much." "we will see about that after we have had prayers," said mr manners in a kind tone. "there is a lad here who never, i believe, misses reading the bible every day of his life, if he can avoid it. he will help me to teach you; won't you, ben?" "yes, sir, very gladly," said ben hadden, who was appealed to. after prayers, and when mr manners had offered up thanks for the preservation of himself and his companions from the hands of the treacherous savages, ben brought out his well-worn testament, which was somewhat the worse for the wetting it had got in salt-water, and, at a sign from mr manners, he went up to the stranger, and offered to read to him. mr manners told him to select the parable of the prodigal son, and several other portions of scripture likely to interest a person whose mind had long been dormant to spiritual matters. the young man was evidently very much interested. suddenly he interrupted ben by remarking-- "that's just such a book as i once had. i remember it well. my father gave it to me just before i went to sea. i lost it, though, and have never looked into another since." "my father gave this to me, and i've kept it carefully ever since. i wouldn't lose it for worlds," said ben. "look here: he wrote my name in it with his own hand. see: `benjamin hadden'--though i was always called in our parts, little ben hadden." "you ben hadden!" exclaimed the stranger in a husky voice. "did you ever hear speak of your brother ned?" "yes indeed," cried ben eagerly; "i came out to these parts to look for him. can you tell me anything about him?" "well, i should think so," answered the stranger in the same husky voice as before; "though, to be sure, i cannot tell you much in his favour. what should you say if i was to tell you that i am ned hadden?" "you my brother ned!" exclaimed ben, in a half-disappointed and doubting tone of voice. "you wouldn't deceive me, surely. i have long and long wished to find him. but are you indeed my brother ned? oh, tell me! tell me!" "yes, i am ned hadden--or was, there is no doubt about that; but i have become such a savage sort of chap, that i don't know very well what i am now." ben seized ned's hand, and burst into tears. his brother was so different from what he had expected to find him--so rough and savage-looking almost, and ignorant; yet he was thankful that he had found him. afterwards, when he thought the matter over, he saw that he had still greater reason to be thankful that he had found him, for ned's own sake: the more savage and ignorant he was, the more important that he should be instructed in the truths of the gospel. from that moment forward that was ben's daily, hourly task. he wished the voyage to be prolonged, that he might have his brother more to himself, to read to him, and teach him the truth. mr manners took great pleasure in helping him in his pious task, and it was easy to see that ned profited greatly by their instruction. his first inquiries had been for his family. he was much affected by hearing of the death of his father and brothers. that very event seemed to soften his heart, and make him willing to listen attentively to what mr manners and ben said to him. he confessed that, when the canoe was seen approaching the island, he had consented to assist the natives in decoying her in, with the intention of destroying all on board; but that, on hearing the hymn sung, and, more than all, on listening to ben's grace, the words of which sounded familiar to his ears, recollecting his early principles, he resolved to save the visitors, whom he also knew to be his countrymen. all this came out but slowly, as his mind expanded under the instruction he was receiving. he had been so long among savages and heathens that he had imbibed many of their notions and principles; instead of improving them, he had nearly sunk to their level. such has unhappily been the case with numerous european and american sailors, who have either been wrecked or have deserted their ships, and have lived long among the once savage inhabitants of the islands of the pacific. many of them have proved, by their evil influence and example, sad hindrances to the efforts of the missionaries in spreading among the natives the truths of the gospel. for several days the canoe glided slowly on. though strongly built, her form was not equal to those constructed by the tonga islanders, noted for their speed among the surrounding groups of islands. mr manners had begun to grow very anxious with regard to their provisions and water. before he could hope to reach their final destination, it would be absolutely necessary to touch at some island where they might replenish their stock, both of one and the other. the weather, too, had shown signs of changing; and the sea, hitherto so calm, began to tumble and toss the canoe about in a way which strained her greatly, and made it necessary for a number of those on board to be continually baling. as the sea increased more and more, it was necessary to do this night and day without ceasing. all on board were accordingly looking out anxiously for some island where they might find shelter till the stormy weather was over. for two days the wind had been increasing, and when night came on it was already blowing a heavy gale. the sail was lowered, and the canoe drove before it, kept by the rudder and paddles from broaching to. the night became very dark; on drove the canoe; breakers were heard not far off, and most of those on board believed that their last hour was come. presently the canoe was among the breakers, and the sea swept over her deck. her crew with difficulty held on. in another moment she struck, and it seemed certain that she would be dashed to atoms. still she floated, and the water became less broken. she drove on; her bow struck violently on a sandy beach, and tall trees rose before the eyes of those on board. they rushed forward, and as the wave receded they scrambled upwards till they reached the dry sand. how could they tell, though, that they were not to meet with the fate from which they had a few days before escaped? the lives of all were mercifully preserved, but it seemed too likely that their canoe had suffered some material injury from the blows she had received. a few, not without risk, ventured again on board, and succeeded in landing most of their scanty supply of provisions and water. a fire was then, after some time, lighted, round which they collected to dry their drenched garments. they were all too anxious to sleep. soon after daybreak, some persons were seen approaching in the distance. "good news, my friends," exclaimed marco, who was watching them; "they wear the dress of christians; they are clothed and in their right mind." a party of natives now came up, and cordially welcomed the shipwrecked strangers. some hurried back to bring water and provisions, others examined the canoe, which it was pretty evident was not in a condition again to go to sea. marco found that he could very easily understand them; so could also ned hadden. they said that they had themselves been scarcely a year before untaught savages, but that a large ship came to their shores, and that those in her treated them kindly, and that a missionary was sent who had taught them the new way; that they found it very good, and that their great wish was to act in accordance with the precepts of christianity. the missionary, who had come from raratonga, was living not far off, and would soon be with them. mr manners, on hearing this account, and calculating the position of the island, had little doubt that this was the island visited by the ajax, the natives of which had at first given so hostile a reception to those who had landed on their shores, but had finally been won over by kindness. this opinion was confirmed when the missionary, a very intelligent tahitian, arrived. he said that the people had welcomed him from the first, and that all of them, young and old, seemed anxious to learn the truth. mr manners was satisfied from all he saw and heard that a genuine change had taken place among the people. he found that, though tolerably industrious, and improving in that respect also, they did not produce as yet much more food than they required for their own support. he was therefore unwilling to remain longer among them than was necessary. all his efforts, however, to get the canoe repaired were useless, as some of her principal beams were broken, and it became necessary to pull her to pieces and to rebuild her. he hoped, however, that, before that could be done, the island would be visited by the missionary vessel, which would either carry him and his people off, or through which he might inform captain bertram where he was. in the meantime, that they might not be a burden to the inhabitants, he advised marco to offer the services of his people to assist in cultivating the ground, while he and his seamen set to work to erect more comfortable huts than any which he had seen on the island. marco did not refuse to labour with his hands, but he was also actively employed in assisting the missionary in preaching to and teaching the people. in this he was helped by several of his companions. schools, both for adults and children, were also formed, and visible progress was made. three months fled rapidly by, when one day a native came running up to mr manners' hut, to tell him that a vessel was approaching the island. he at once went, accompanied by most of his men, to the highest spot in the neighbourhood, whence he could have a good look-out over the sea. his heart leaped for joy, for the ship, there could be little doubt of it, was the ajax herself. the seamen one and all were agreed that she was their own ship. she hove to, a boat came on shore, and mr martin and his crew were cordially welcomed by their shipmates. the loss of the schooner, in consequence of her non-arrival, had been supposed probable, and the ajax was now on a cruise to ascertain her fate, and to rescue any of the survivors of those who had been on board. after doing this, she was to return to callao, where the admiral in the pacific then was. it is not necessary to describe the reception mr manners and his people met with on board their ship. mr martin was thankful to get back his son, and more so when he discovered the great change which had taken place in him. ned was at once rated on the books of the ajax as one of her crew. he had greatly improved since he had been discovered, and, with ben constantly at his side, assisted also by mr manners, he continued to progress in christian knowledge, as well as to improve in conduct and manners. captain bertram offered to receive marco and his fellow-islanders on board. two begged to remain where they were; the rest accepted his offer, marco begging that he, with two others who had volunteered to accompany him, might be landed on the island on which ned hadden had so long resided. this captain bertram undertook to do, hoping that the appearance of a ship-of-war might awe the natives, and induce them to treat the missionaries with due respect. this plan was carried out, and ned, who went on shore first, succeeded in extracting a promise from their chief that he would protect them. after landing the natives at their respective islands, the ajax returned to callao. there she remained till her term of service had expired, and she once more made sail for old england. amply was ben hadden repaid for all the dangers he had gone through when he was able to present his long-lost brother ned to their widowed mother, not only rescued from the power of the savages, but from the dominion of sin and satan. and now there is not much more to tell about ben hadden. the experience he had had of a seafaring life confirmed his original desire to be a sailor; and the favour he had won, by his good conduct, in the regards of the captain and officers of the ajax, was of great advantage to him, and led to his promotion in the service. when last we heard of him, ben was what is called a warrant-officer, on board an admiral's ship--that admiral being his first patron and captain. as long as his mother lived, ben had the happiness of doing very much for her comfort, and also in assisting his older brother ned in obtaining a good situation on shore; for he had had enough of the sea and savages, he said. so mrs hadden, though she remembered with a feeling of sadness the loss of her husband and other sons, yet felt and thankfully acknowledged that her god and saviour had been very good to her in sparing those two--ned and ben; both of whom heartily adopted, and lived according to, their father's favourite motto: "do right, whatever comes of it; and trust in god." the end. the secret of the island, by w.h.g. kingston (translation from jules verne). ________________________________________________________________________ this book is a translation from the french original by jules verne. in fact several of kingston's significant contributions to english literature have been translations, "the swiss family robinson" being one such. this book is a sequel to "twenty thousand leagues under the sea". a party of british adventurers, who had been ballooning, but whose trip had ended by being cast away on a pacific island, have various setbacks due to both pirates and convicts who had escaped from jails in mainland australasia. they realise that at times there appears to be some kind of entity that is looking after them. this entity proves to be none other than captain nemo whom the reader is expected to have met before with his submarine "nautilus" in " , leagues". captain nemo has been living in a huge cave inside the very volcanic island, where he is surrounded with immense wealth. but he is nearing the end of his life. we are present at his end. but what happens after that is of great interest. the book is not very long and is profusely illustrated. it makes a very good audiobook of seven hours duration. ________________________________________________________________________ the secret of the island, by w.h.g. kingston (translation from jules verne). introduction. _the secret of the island_ was another of the series of _voyages extraordinaires_ which ran through a famous paris magazine for younger readers, the _magasin illustre_. it formed the third and completing part of the mysterious island set of tales of adventure. we may count it, taken separately, as next to _robinson crusoe_ and possibly _treasure island_, the best read and the best appreciated book in all that large group of island-tales and sea-stories to which it belongs. it gained its vogue immediately in france, great britain, and overseas besides being translated, with more or less despatch, into other european tongues. m. jules verne must indeed have gained enough by it and its two connective tales to have acquired an island of his own. the present book was translated into english by the late w.h.g. kingston; and is printed in everyman's library by special exclusive arrangement with messrs. sampson low, marston & co., ltd., . the list of tales and romances by jules verne includes the following:-- five weeks in a balloon, ; a journey to the centre of the earth, translated by j.v., ; tr. f.a. malleson, ; twenty thousand leagues under the sea, ; tr. h. frith, ; from the earth to the moon, and a trip round it, tr. q. mercier and e.g. king, ; the english at the north pole, ; meridiana: adventures of three english and three russians, ; dr ox's experiment and other stories, ; a floating city, ; the blockade runners, ; around the world in eighty days; tr. g.m. towle and n. d'anvers, , ; tr. h. frith, ; the fur country, or seventy degrees north latitude, tr. n. d'anvers, ; tr. h. frith, ; the mysterious island, tr. w.h.g. kingston, ; the survivors of the _chancellor_: diary of j.r. kazallon, tr. e. frewer, ; martin paz, tr. e. frewer, ; field of ice, ; child of the cavern, tr. w.h.g. kingston, ; michael strogoff, tr. w.h.g. kingston, ; a voyage round the world, ; hector servadac, tr. e. frewer, ; dick sands, the boy captain, tr. e. frewer, ; celebrated travels and travellers: the great navigators of the eighteenth century, tr. dora leigh, n. d'anvers, etc., - ; tribulations of a chinaman, tr. e. frewer, ; the begum's fortune, tr. w.h.g. kingston, ; the steam house, tr. a.d. kingston, ; the giant raft, w.j. gordon, ; godfrey morgan, s ; the green ray, tr. m. de hauteville, ; the vanished diamond, ; the archipelago on fire, ; mathias sandorf, ; keraban the inflexible, ; the lottery ticket, ; clipper of the clouds, ; the flight to france, or memoirs of a dragoon, ; north against south: story of the american civil war, ; adrift in the pacific, ; cesar cacabel, ; the purchase of the north pole, ; a family without a name, ; mistress branican, ; claudius bombarnac, ; foundling mick, ; clovis dardentor, ; for the flag, tr. mrs c. hoey, ; an antarctic mystery, . jules verne's works are published in an authorised and illustrated edition by messrs. sampson low, marston & co., ltd. chapter one. lost or saved--ayrton summoned--important discussion--it is not the duncan--suspicious vessel--precautions to be taken--the ship approaches--a cannon-shot--the brig anchors in sight of the island-- night comes on. it was now two years and a half since the castaways from the balloon had been thrown on lincoln island, and during that period there had been no communication between them and their fellow-creatures. once the reporter had attempted to communicate with the inhabited world by confiding to a bird a letter which contained the secret of their situation, but that was a chance on which it was impossible to reckon seriously. ayrton, alone, under the circumstances which have been related, had come to join the little colony. now, suddenly, on this day, the th of october, other men had unexpectedly appeared in sight of the island, on that deserted sea! there could be no doubt about it! a vessel was there! but would she pass on, or would she put into port? in a few hours the colonists would definitely know what to expect. cyrus harding and herbert having immediately called gideon spilett, pencroft, and neb into the dining-room of granite house, told them what had happened. pencroft, seizing the telescope, rapidly swept the horizon, and stopping on the indicated point, that is to say, on that which had made the almost imperceptible spot on the photographic negative-- "i'm blessed but it is really a vessel!" he exclaimed, in a voice which did not express any great amount of satisfaction. "is she coming here?" asked gideon spilett. "impossible to say anything yet," answered pencroft, "for her rigging alone is above the horizon, and not a bit of her hull can be seen." "what is to be done?" asked the lad. "wait," replied harding. and for a considerable time the settlers remained silent, given up to all the thoughts, all the emotions, all the fears, all the hopes, which were aroused by this incident--the most important which had occurred since their arrival in lincoln island. certainly, the colonists were not in the situation of castaways abandoned on a sterile islet, constantly contending against a cruel nature for their miserable existence, and incessantly tormented by the longing to return to inhabited countries. pencroft and neb, especially, who felt themselves at once so happy and so rich, would not have left their island without regret. they were accustomed, besides, to this new life in the midst of the domain which their intelligence had as it were civilised. but at any rate this ship brought news from the world, perhaps even from their native land. it was bringing fellow-creatures to them, and it may be conceived how deeply their hearts were moved at the sight! from time to time pencroft took the glass and rested himself at the window. from thence he very attentively examined the vessel, which was at a distance of twenty miles to the east. the colonists had as yet, therefore, no means of signalising their presence. a flag would not have been perceived; a gun would not have been heard; a fire would not have been visible. however, it was certain that the island, overtopped by mount franklin, could not have escaped the notice of the vessel's look-out. but why was this ship coming there? was it simple chance which brought it to that part of the pacific, where the maps mentioned no land except tabor islet, which itself was out of the route usually followed by vessels from the polynesian archipelagos, from new zealand, and from the american coast? to this question, which each one asked himself, a reply was suddenly made by herbert. "can it be the _duncan_?" he cried. the _duncan_, as has been said, was lord glenarvan's yacht, which had left ayrton on the islet, and which was to return there some day to fetch him. now, the islet was not so far-distant from lincoln island, but that a vessel, standing for the one, could pass in sight of the other. a hundred and fifty miles only separated them in longitude, and seventy in latitude. "we must tell ayrton," said gideon spilett, "and send for him immediately. he alone can say if it is the _duncan_." this was the opinion of all, and the reporter, going to the telegraphic apparatus which placed the corral in communication with granite house, sent this telegram:--"come with all possible speed." in a few minutes the bell sounded. "i am coming," replied ayrton. then the settlers continued to watch the vessel. "if it is the _duncan_," said herbert, "ayrton will recognise her without difficulty, since he sailed on board her for some time." "and if he recognises her," added pencroft, "it will agitate him exceedingly!" "yes," answered cyrus harding; "but now ayrton is worthy to return on board the _duncan_, and pray heaven that it is indeed lord glenarvan's yacht, for i should be suspicious of any other vessel. these are ill-famed seas, and i have always feared a visit from malay pirates to our island." "we could defend it," cried herbert. "no doubt, my boy," answered the engineer smiling, "but it would be better not to have to defend it." "a useless observation," said spilett. "lincoln island is unknown to navigators, since it is not marked even on the most recent maps. do you not think, cyrus, that that is a sufficient motive for a ship, finding herself unexpectedly in sight of new land, to try and visit rather than avoid it?" "certainly," replied pencroft. "i think so too," added the engineer. "it may even be said that it is the duty of a captain to come and survey any land or island not yet known, and lincoln island is in this position." "well," said pencroft, "suppose this vessel comes and anchors there a few cables-lengths from our island, what shall we do?" this sudden question remained at first without any reply. but cyrus harding, after some moments' thought, replied in the calm tone which was usual to him-- "what we shall do, my friends? what we ought to do is this:--we will communicate with the ship, we will take our passage on board her, and we will leave our island, after having taken possession of it in the name of the united states. then we will return with any who may wish to follow us to colonise it definitely, and endow the american republic with a useful station in this part of the pacific ocean!" "hurrah!" exclaimed pencroft, "and that will be no small present which we shall make to our country! the colonisation is already almost finished; names are given to every part of the island; there is a natural port, fresh water, roads, a telegraph, a dockyard, and manufactories; and there will be nothing to be done but to inscribe lincoln island on the maps!" "but if any one seizes it in our absence?" observed gideon spilett. "hang it!" cried the sailor. "i would rather remain all alone to guard it: and trust to pencroft, they shouldn't steal it from him, like a watch from the pocket of a swell!" for an hour it was impossible to say with any certainty whether the vessel was or was not standing towards lincoln island. she was nearer, but in what direction was she sailing? this pencroft could not determine. however, as the wind was blowing from the north-east, in all probability the vessel was sailing on the starboard tack. besides, the wind was favourable for bringing her towards the island, and, the sea being calm, she would not be afraid to approach although the shallows were not marked on the chart. towards four o'clock--an hour after he had been sent for--ayrton arrived at granite house. he entered the dining-room, saying-- "at your service, gentlemen." cyrus harding gave him his hand, as was his custom to do, and, leading him to the window-- "ayrton," said he, "we have begged you to come here for an important reason. a ship is in sight of the island." ayrton at first paled slightly, and for a moment his eyes became dim; then, leaning out of the window, he surveyed the horizon, but could see nothing. "take this telescope," said spilett, "and look carefully, ayrton, for it is possible that this ship may be the _duncan_ come to these seas for the purpose of taking you home again." "the _duncan_!" murmured ayrton. "already?" this last word escaped ayrton's lips as if involuntarily, and his head drooped upon his hands. did not twelve years' solitude on a desert island appear to him a sufficient expiation? did not the penitent yet feel himself pardoned, either in his own eyes or in the eyes of others? "no," said he, "no! it cannot be the _duncan_!" "look, ayrton," then said the engineer, "for it is necessary that we should know beforehand what to expect." ayrton took the glass and pointed it in the direction indicated. during some minutes he examined the horizon without moving, without uttering a word. then-- "it is indeed a vessel," said he, "but i do not think she is the _duncan_." "why do you not think so?" asked gideon spilett. "because the _duncan_ is a steam-yacht, and i cannot perceive any trace of smoke either above or near that vessel." "perhaps she is simply sailing," observed pencroft. "the wind is favourable for the direction which she appears to be taking, and she may be anxious to economise her coal, being so far from land." "it is possible that you may be right, mr pencroft," answered ayrton, "and that the vessel has extinguished her fires. we must wait until she is nearer, and then we shall soon know what to expect." so saying, ayrton sat down in a corner of the room and remained silent. the colonists again discussed the strange ship, but ayrton took no part in the conversation. all were in such a mood that they found it impossible to continue their work. gideon spilett and pencroft were particularly nervous, going, coming, not able to remain still in one place. herbert felt more curiosity. neb alone maintained his usual calm manner. was not his country that where his master was? as to the engineer, he remained plunged in deep thought, and in his heart feared rather than desired the arrival of the ship. in the meanwhile, the vessel was a little nearer the island. with the aid of the glass, it was ascertained that she was a brig, and not one of those malay proas, which are generally used by the pirates of the pacific. it was, therefore, reasonable to believe that the engineer's apprehensions would not be justified, and that the presence of this vessel in the vicinity of the island was fraught with no danger. pencroft, after a minute examination, was able positively to affirm that the vessel was rigged as a brig, and that she was standing obliquely towards the coast, on the starboard tack, under her topsails and topgallant-sails. this was confirmed by ayrton. but by continuing in this direction she must soon disappear behind claw cape, as the wind was from the south-west, and to watch her it would be then necessary to ascend the heights of washington bay, near port balloon--a provoking circumstance, for it was already five o'clock in the evening, and the twilight would soon make any observation extremely difficult. "what shall we do when night comes on?" asked gideon spilett. "shall we light a fire, so as to signal our presence, on the coast?" this was a serious question, and yet, although the engineer still retained some of his presentiments, it was answered in the affirmative. during the night the ship might disappear and leave for ever, and, this ship gone, would another ever return to the waters of lincoln island? who could foresee what the future would then have in store for the colonists? "yes," said the reporter, "we ought to make known to that vessel, whoever she may be, that the island is inhabited. to neglect the opportunity which is offered to us might be to create everlasting regrets." it was, therefore, decided that neb and pencroft should go to port balloon, and that there, at nightfall, they should light an immense fire, the blaze of which would necessarily attract the attention of the brig. but at the moment when neb and the sailor were preparing to leave granite house, the vessel suddenly altered her course, and stood directly for union bay. the brig was a good sailer, for she approached rapidly. neb and pencroft put off their departure, therefore, and the glass was put into ayrton's hands, that he might ascertain for certain whether the ship was or was not the _duncan_. the scotch yacht was also rigged as a brig. the question was, whether a chimney could be discerned between the two masts of the vessel, which was now at a distance of only five miles. the horizon was still very clear. the examination was easy, and ayrton soon let the glass fall again, saying-- "it is not the _duncan_! it could not be her!" pencroft again brought the brig within the range of the telescope, and could see that she was of between three and four hundred tons burden, wonderfully narrow, well-masted, admirably built, and must be a very rapid sailer. but to what nation did she belong? that was difficult to say. "and yet," added the sailor, "a flag is floating from her peak, but i cannot distinguish the colours of it." "in half an hour we shall be certain about that," answered the reporter. "besides, it is very evident that the intention of the captain of this ship is to land, and, consequently, if not to-day, to-morrow at the latest, we shall make his acquaintance." "never mind!" said pencroft. "it is best to know whom we have to deal with, and i shall not be sorry to recognise that fellow's colours!" and, while thus speaking, the sailor never left the glass. the day began to fade, and with the day the breeze fell also. the brig's ensign hung in folds, and it became more and more difficult to observe it. "it is not the american flag," said pencroft from time to time, "nor the english, the red of which could be easily seen, nor the french or german colours, nor the white flag of russia, nor the yellow of spain. one would say it was all one colour. let's see: in these seas, what do we generally meet with? the chilian flag?--but that is tri-colour. brazilian?--it is green. japanese?--it is yellow and black, whilst this--" at that moment the breeze blew out the unknown flag. ayrton, seizing the telescope which the sailor had put down, put it to his eye, and in a hoarse voice-- "the black flag!" he exclaimed. and indeed the sombre bunting was floating from the mast of the brig, and they had now good reason for considering her to be a suspicious vessel! had the engineer, then, been right in his presentiments? was this a pirate vessel? did she scour the pacific, competing with the malay proas which still infest it? for what had she come to look at the shores of lincoln island? was it to them an unknown island, ready to become a magazine for stolen cargoes? had she come to find on the coast a sheltered port for the winter months? was the settler's honest domain destined to be transformed into an infamous refuge--the headquarters of the piracy of the pacific? all these ideas instinctively presented themselves to the colonists' imaginations. there was no doubt, besides, of the signification which must be attached to the colour of the hoisted flag. it was that of pirates! it was that which the _duncan_ would have carried, had the convicts succeeded in their criminal design! no time was lost before discussing it. "my friends," said cyrus harding, "perhaps this vessel only wishes to survey the coast of the island. perhaps her crew will not land. there is a chance of it. however that may be, we ought to do everything we can to hide our presence here. the windmill on prospect heights is too easily seen. let ayrton and neb go and take down the sails. we must also conceal the windows of granite house with thick branches. all the fires must be extinguished, so that nothing may betray the presence of men on the island." "and our vessel?" said herbert. "oh," answered pencroft, "she is sheltered in port balloon, and i defy any of those rascals there to find her!" the engineer's orders were immediately executed. neb and ayrton ascended the plateau, and took the necessary precautions to conceal any indication of a settlement. whilst they were thus occupied, their companions went to the border of jacamar wood, and brought back a large quantity of branches and creepers, which would at some distance appear as natural foliage, and thus disguise the windows in the granite cliff. at the same time, the ammunition and guns were placed ready so as to be at hand in case of an unexpected attack. when all these precautions had been taken-- "my friends," said harding, and his voice betrayed some emotion, "if these wretches endeavour to seize lincoln island, we shall defend it-- shall we not?" "yes, cyrus," replied the reporter, "and if necessary we will die to defend it!" the engineer extended his hand to his companions, who pressed it warmly. ayrton alone remained in his corner, not joining the colonists. perhaps he, the former convict, still felt himself unworthy to do so! cyrus harding understood what was passing in ayrton's mind, and going to him-- "and you, ayrton," he asked, "what will you do?" "my duty," answered ayrton. he then took up his station near the window and gazed through the foliage. it was now half-past seven. the sun had disappeared twenty minutes ago behind granite house. consequently the eastern horizon was becoming gradually obscured. in the meanwhile the brig continued to advance towards union bay. she was now not more than two miles off, and exactly opposite the plateau of prospect heights, for after having tacked off claw cape, she had drifted towards the north in the current of the rising tide. one might have said that at this distance she had already entered the vast bay, for a straight line drawn from claw cape to cape mandible would have rested on her starboard quarter. was the brig about to penetrate far into the bay? that was the first question. when once in the bay, would she anchor there? that was the second. would she not content herself with only surveying the coast, and stand out to sea again without landing her crew? they would know this in an hour. the colonists could do nothing but wait. cyrus harding had not seen the suspected vessel hoist the black flag without deep anxiety. was it not a direct menace against the work which he and his companions had till now conducted so successfully? had these pirates--for the sailors of the brig could be nothing else--already visited the island, since on approaching it they had hoisted their colours. had they formerly invaded it, so that certain unaccountable peculiarities might be explained in this way? did there exist in the as yet unexplored parts some accomplice ready to enter into communication with them? to all these questions which he mentally asked himself, harding knew not what to reply; but he felt that the safety of the colony could not but be seriously threatened by the arrival of the brig. however, he and his companions were determined to fight to the last gasp. it would have been very important to know if the pirates were numerous and better armed than the colonists. but how was this information to be obtained? night fell. the new moon had disappeared. profound darkness enveloped the island and the sea. no light could pierce through the heavy piles of clouds on the horizon. the wind had died away completely with the twilight. not a leaf rustled on the trees, not a ripple murmured on the shore. nothing could be seen of the ship, all her lights being extinguished, and if she was still in sight of the island, her whereabouts could not be discovered. "well! who knows?" said pencroft. "perhaps that cursed craft will stand off during the night, and we shall see nothing of her at daybreak." as if in reply to the sailor's observation, a bright light flashed in the darkness, and a cannon-shot was heard. the vessel was still there and had guns on board. six seconds elapsed between the flash and the report. therefore the brig was about a mile and a quarter from the coast. at the same time, the chains were heard rattling through the hawse-holes. the vessel had just anchored in sight of granite house! chapter two. discussions--presentiments--ayrton's proposal--it is accepted--ayrton and pencroft on grant islet--convicts from norfolk island--ayrton's heroic attempt--his return--six against fifty. there was no longer any doubt as to the pirates' intentions. they had dropped anchor at a short distance from the island, and it was evident that the next day by means of their boats they purposed to land on the beach! cyrus harding and his companions were ready to act, but, determined though they were, they must not forget to be prudent. perhaps their presence might still be concealed in the event of the pirates contenting themselves with landing on the shore without examining the interior of the island. it might be, indeed, that their only intention was to obtain fresh water from the mercy, and it was not impossible that the bridge, thrown across a mile and a half from the mouth, and the manufactory at the chimneys might escape their notice. but why was that flag hoisted at the brig's peak? what was that shot fired for? pure bravado doubtless, unless it was a sign of the act of taking possession. harding knew now that the vessel was well-armed. and what had the colonists of lincoln island to reply to the pirates' guns? a few muskets only. "however," observed cyrus harding, "here we are in an impregnable position. the enemy cannot discover the mouth of the outlet, now that it is hidden under reeds and grass, and consequently it would be impossible for them to penetrate into granite house." "but our plantations, our poultry-yard, our corral, all, everything!" exclaimed pencroft, stamping his foot. "they may spoil everything, destroy everything in a few hours!" "everything, pencroft," answered harding, "and we have no means of preventing them." "are they numerous? that is the question," said the reporter. "if they are not more than a dozen, we shall be able to stop them, but forty, fifty, more perhaps!" "captain harding," then said ayrton, advancing towards the engineer, "will you give me leave." "for what, my friend?" "to go to that vessel to find out the strength of her crew." "but ayrton--" answered the engineer, hesitating, "you will risk your life--" "why not, sir?" "that is more than your duty." "i have more than my duty to do," replied ayrton. "will you go to the ship in the boat?" asked gideon spilett. "no, sir, but i will swim. a boat would be seen where a man may glide between wind and water." "do you know that the brig is a mile and a quarter from the shore?" said herbert. "i am a good swimmer, mr herbert." "i tell you it is risking your life," said the engineer. "that is no matter," answered ayrton. "captain harding, i ask this as a favour. perhaps it will be a means of raising me in my own eyes!" "go, ayrton," replied the engineer, who felt sure that a refusal would have deeply wounded the former convict, now become an honest man. "i will accompany you," said pencroft. "you mistrust me!" said ayrton quickly. then more humbly,-- "alas!" "no! no!" exclaimed harding with animation, "no, ayrton, pencroft does not mistrust you. you interpret his words wrongly." "indeed," returned the sailor, "i only propose to accompany ayrton as far as the islet. it may be, although it is scarcely possible, that one of these villains has landed, and in that case two men will not be too many to hinder him from giving the alarm. i will wait for ayrton on the islet, and he shall go alone to the vessel, since he has proposed to do so." these things agreed to, ayrton made preparations for his departure. his plan was bold, but it might succeed, thanks to the darkness of the night. once arrived at the vessel's side, ayrton, holding onto the main-chains, might reconnoitre the number and perhaps overhear the intentions of the pirates. ayrton and pencroft, followed by their companions, descended to the beach. ayrton undressed and rubbed himself with grease, so as to suffer less from the temperature of the water, which was still cold. he might, indeed, be obliged to remain in it for several hours. pencroft and neb, during this time, had gone to fetch the boat, moored a few hundred feet higher up, on the bank of the mercy, and by the time they returned, ayrton was ready to start. a coat was thrown over his shoulders, and the settlers all came round him to press his hand. ayrton then shoved off with pencroft in the boat. it was half-past ten in the evening when the two adventurers disappeared in the darkness. their companions returned to wait at the chimneys. the channel was easily traversed, and the boat touched the opposite shore of the islet. this was not done without precaution, for fear lest the pirates might be roaming about there. but after a careful survey, it was evident that the islet was deserted. ayrton then, followed by pencroft, crossed it with a rapid step, scaring the birds nestled in the holes of the rocks; then, without hesitating, he plunged into the sea, and swam noiselessly in the direction of the ship, in which a few lights had recently appeared, showing her exact situation. as to pencroft, he crouched down in a cleft of the rock, and awaited the return of his companion. in the meanwhile, ayrton, swimming with a vigorous stroke, glided through the sheet of water without producing the slightest ripple. his head just emerged above it and his eyes were fixed on the dark hull of the brig, from which the lights were reflected in the water. he thought only of the duty which he had promised to accomplish, and nothing of the danger which he ran, not only on board the ship, but in the sea, often frequented by sharks. the current bore him along and he rapidly receded from the shore. half an hour afterwards, ayrton, without having been either seen or heard, arrived at the ship and caught hold of the main-chains. he took breath, then, hoisting himself up, he managed to reach the extremity of the cutwater. there were drying several pairs of sailors' trousers. he put on a pair. then settling himself firmly, he listened. they were not sleeping on board the brig. on the contrary, they were talking, singing, laughing. and these were the sentences, accompanied with oaths, which principally struck ayrton:-- "our brig is a famous acquisition." "she sails well, and merits her name of the _speedy_." "she would show all the navy of norfolk a clean pair of heels." "hurrah for her captain!" "hurrah for bob harvey!" what ayrton felt when he overheard this fragment of conversation may be understood when it is known that in this bob harvey he recognised one of his old australian companions, a daring sailor, who had continued his criminal career. bob harvey had seized, on the shores of norfolk island, this brig, which was loaded with arms, ammunition, utensils, and tools of all sorts, destined for one of the sandwich islands. all his gang had gone on board, and pirates after having been convicts, these wretches, more ferocious than the malays themselves, scoured the pacific, destroying vessels, and massacring their crews. the convicts spoke loudly, they recounted their deeds, drinking deeply at the same time, and this is what ayrton gathered. the actual crew of the _speedy_ was composed solely of english prisoners, escaped from norfolk island. here it may be well to explain what this island was. in degrees minutes south latitude, and degrees minutes east longitude, to the east of australia, is found a little island, six miles in circumference, overlooked by mount pitt, which rises to a height of feet above the level of the sea. this is norfolk island, once the seat of an establishment in which were lodged the most intractable convicts from the english penitentiaries. they numbered , under an iron discipline, threatened with terrible punishments, and were guarded by soldiers, and employed under the orders of the governor. it would be difficult to imagine a collection of greater ruffians. sometimes,--although very rarely,--notwithstanding the extreme surveillance of which they were the object, many managed to escape, and seizing vessels which they surprised, they infested the polynesian archipelagos. [note. norfolk island has long since been abandoned as a penal settlement.] thus had bob harvey and his companions done. thus had ayrton formerly wished to do. bob harvey had seized the brig _speedy_, anchored in sight of norfolk island; the crew had been massacred; and for a year this ship had scoured the pacific, under the command of harvey, now a pirate, and well-known to ayrton! the convicts were, for the most part, assembled under the poop; but a few, stretched on the deck, were talking loudly. the conversation still continued amidst shouts and libations. ayrton learned that chance alone had brought the _speedy_ in sight of lincoln island: bob harvey had never yet set foot on it; but, as cyrus harding had conjectured, finding this unknown land in his course, its position being marked on no chart, he had formed the project of visiting it, and, if he found it suitable, of making it the brig's headquarters. as to the black flag hoisted at the _speedy's_ peak, and the gun which had been fired, in imitation of men-of-war when they lower their colours, it was pure piratical bravado. it was in no way a signal, and no communication yet existed between the convicts and lincoln island. the settlers' domain was now menaced with terrible danger. evidently the island, with its water, its harbour, its resources of all kinds so increased in value by the colonists, and the concealment afforded by granite house, could not but be convenient for the convicts; in their hands it would become an excellent place of refuge, and, being unknown, it would assure them, for a long time perhaps, impunity and security. evidently, also, the lives of the settlers would not be respected, and bob harvey and his accomplices' first care would be to massacre them without mercy. harding and his companions had, therefore, not even the choice of flying and hiding themselves in the island, since the convicts intended to reside there, and since, in the event of the _speedy_ departing on an expedition, it was probable that some of the crew would remain on shore, so as to settle themselves there. therefore, it would be necessary to fight, to destroy every one of these scoundrels, unworthy of pity, and against whom any means would be right. so thought ayrton, and he well knew that cyrus harding would be of his way of thinking. but was resistance and, in the last place, victory possible? that would depend on the equipment of the brig, and the number of men which she carried. this ayrton resolved to learn at any cost, and as an hour after his arrival the vociferations had begun to die away, and as a large number of the convicts were already buried in a drunken sleep, ayrton did not hesitate to venture onto the _speedy's_ deck, which the extinguished lanterns now left in total darkness. he hoisted himself onto the cutwater, and by the bowsprit arrived at the forecastle. then, gliding among the convicts stretched here and there, he made the round of the ship, and found that the _speedy_ carried four guns, which would throw shot of from eight to ten pounds in weight. he found also, on touching them, that these guns were breech-loaders. they were, therefore, of modern make, easily used, and of terrible effect. as to the men lying on the deck, they were about ten in number, but it was to be supposed that more were sleeping down below. besides, by listening to them, ayrton had understood that there were fifty on board. that was a large number for the six settlers of lincoln island to contend with! but now, thanks to ayrton's devotion, cyrus harding would not be surprised, he would know the strength of his adversaries, and would make his arrangements accordingly. there was nothing more for ayrton to do but to return, and render to his companions an account of the mission with which he had charged himself, and he prepared to regain the bows of the brig, so that he might let himself down into the water. but to this man, whose wish was, as he had said, to do more than his duty, there came an heroic thought. this was to sacrifice his own life, but save the island and the colonists. cyrus harding evidently could not resist fifty ruffians, all well-armed, who, either by penetrating by main force into granite house, or by starving out the besieged, could obtain from them what they wanted. and then he thought of his preservers--those who had made him again a man, and an honest man, those to whom he owed all--murdered without pity, their works destroyed, their island turned into a pirates' den! he said to himself that he, ayrton, was the principal cause of so many disasters, since his old companion, bob harvey, had but realised his own plans, and a feeling of horror took possession of him. then he was seized with an irresistible desire to blow up the brig, and with her, all whom she had on board. he would perish in the explosion, but he would have done his duty. ayrton did not hesitate. to reach the powder-room, which is always situated in the after-part of a vessel, was easy. there would be no want of powder in a vessel which followed such a trade, and a spark would be enough to destroy it in an instant. ayrton stole carefully along the between-decks, strewn with numerous sleepers, overcome more by drunkenness than sleep. a lantern was lighted at the foot of the mainmast, round which was hung a gun-rack, furnished with weapons of all sorts. ayrton took a revolver from the rack, and assured himself that it was loaded and primed. nothing more was needed to accomplish the work of destruction. he then glided towards the stern, so as to arrive under the brig's poop at the powder-magazine. it was difficult to proceed along the dimly-lighted deck without stumbling over some half-sleeping convict, who retorted by oaths and kicks. ayrton was, therefore, more than once obliged to halt. but at last he arrived at the partition dividing the after-cabin, and found the door opening into the magazine itself. ayrton, compelled to force it open, set to work. it was a difficult operation to perform without noise, for he had to break a padlock. but under his vigorous hand, the padlock broke, and the door was open. at that moment a hand was laid on ayrton's shoulder. "what are you doing here?" asked a tall man, in a harsh voice, who, standing in the shadow, quickly threw the light of a lantern on ayrton's face. ayrton drew back. in the rapid flash of the lantern, he had recognised his former accomplice, bob harvey, who could not have known him, as he must have thought ayrton long since dead. "what are you doing here?" again said bob harvey, seizing ayrton by the waistband. but ayrton, without replying, wrenched himself from his grasp and attempted to rush into the magazine. a shot fired into the midst of the powder-casks, and all would be over! "help, lads!" shouted bob harvey. at his shout two or three pirates awoke, jumped up, and, rushing on ayrton, endeavoured to throw him down. he soon extricated himself from their grasp. he fired his revolver, and two of the convicts fell; but a blow from a knife which he could not ward off made a gash in his shoulder. ayrton perceived that he could no longer hope to carry out his project. bob harvey had reclosed the door of the powder-magazine, and a movement on the deck indicated a general awakening of the pirates. ayrton must reserve himself to fight at the side of cyrus harding. there was nothing for him but flight! but was flight still possible? it was doubtful, yet ayrton resolved to dare everything in order to rejoin his companions. four barrels of the revolver were still undischarged. two were fired-- one, aimed at bob harvey, did not wound him, or at any rate only slightly; and ayrton, profiting by the momentary retreat of his adversaries, rushed towards the companion-ladder to gain the deck. passing before the lantern, he smashed it with a blow from the butt of his revolver. a profound darkness ensued, which favoured his flight. two or three pirates, awakened by the noise, were descending the ladder at the same moment. a fifth shot from ayrton laid one low, and the others drew back, not understanding what was going on. ayrton was on deck in two bounds, and three seconds later, having discharged his last barrel in the face of a pirate who was about to seize him by the throat, he leapt over the bulwarks into the sea. ayrton had not made six strokes before shots were splashing around him like hail. what were pencroft's feelings, sheltered under a rock on the islet! what were those of harding, the reporter, herbert, and neb, crouched in the chimneys, when they heard the reports on board the brig! they rushed out onto the beach, and, their guns shouldered, they stood ready to repel any attack. they had no doubt about it themselves! ayrton, surprised by the pirates, had been murdered, and, perhaps, the wretches would profit by the night to make a descent on the island! half an hour was passed in terrible anxiety. the firing had ceased, and yet neither ayrton nor pencroft had reappeared. was the islet invaded? ought they not to fly to the help of ayrton and pencroft? but how? the tide being high at that time, rendered the channel impassable. the boat was not there! we may imagine the horrible anxiety which took possession of harding and his companions! at last, towards half-past twelve, a boat, carrying two men, touched the beach. it was ayrton, slightly wounded in the shoulder, and pencroft, safe and sound, whom their friends received with open arms. all immediately took refuge in the chimneys. there ayrton recounted all that had passed, even to his plan for blowing up the brig, which he had attempted to put into execution. all hands were extended to ayrton, who did not conceal from them that their situation was serious. the pirates had been alarmed. they knew that lincoln island was inhabited. they would land upon it in numbers and well-armed. they would respect nothing. should the settlers fall into their hands, they must expect no mercy! "well, we shall know how to die!" said the reporter. "let us go in and watch," answered the engineer. "have we any chance of escape, captain?" asked the sailor. "yes, pencroft." "hum! six against fifty!" "yes! six! without counting--" "who?" asked pencroft. cyrus did not reply, but pointed upwards. chapter three. the mist rises--the engineer's preparations--three posts--ayrton and pencroft--the first boat--two other boats--on the islet--six convicts land--the brig weighs anchor--the speedy's guns--a desperate situation-- unexpected catastrophe. the night passed without incident. the colonists were on the _qui vive_, and did not leave their post at the chimneys. the pirates, on their side, did not appear to have made any attempt to land. since the last shots fired at ayrton not a report, not even a sound, had betrayed the presence of the brig in the neighbourhood of the island. it might have been fancied that she had weighed anchor, thinking that she had to deal with her match, and had left the coast. but it was no such thing, and when day began to dawn the settlers could see a confused mass through the morning mist. it was the _speedy_. "these, my friends," said the engineer, "are the arrangements which appear to me best to make before the fog completely clears away. it hides us from the eyes of the pirates, and we can act without attracting their attention. the most important thing is, that the convicts should believe that the inhabitants of the island are numerous, and consequently capable of resisting them. i therefore propose that we divide into three parties, the first of which shall be posted at the chimneys, the second at the mouth of the mercy. as to the third, i think it would be best to place it on the islet, so as to prevent, or at all events delay, any attempt at landing. we have the use of two rifles and four muskets. each of us will be armed, and, as we are amply provided with powder and shot, we need not spare our fire. we have nothing to fear from the muskets, nor even from the guns of the brig. what can they do against these rocks? and, as we shall not fire from the windows of granite house, the pirates will not think of causing irreparable damage by throwing shell against it. what is to be feared is, the necessity of meeting hand-to-hand, since the convicts have numbers on their side. we must, therefore, try to prevent them from landing, but without discovering ourselves. therefore, do not economise the ammunition. fire often, but with a sure aim. we have each eight or ten enemies to kill, and they must be killed!" cyrus harding had clearly represented their situation, although he spoke in the calmest voice, as if it was a question of directing a piece of work, and not ordering a battle. his companions approved these arrangements without even uttering a word. there was nothing more to be done but for each to take his place before the fog should be completely dissipated. neb and pencroft immediately ascended to granite house and brought back a sufficient quantity of ammunition. gideon spilett and ayrton, both very good marksmen, were armed with the two rifles, which carried nearly a mile. the four other muskets were divided amongst harding, neb, pencroft, and herbert. the posts were arranged in the following manner:-- cyrus harding and herbert remained in ambush at the chimneys, thus commanding the shore to the foot of granite house. gideon spilett and neb crouched among the rocks at the mouth of the mercy, from which the drawbridges had been raised, so as to prevent any one from crossing in a boat or landing on the opposite shore. as to ayrton and pencroft, they shoved off in the boat, and prepared to cross the channel and to take up two separate stations on the islet. in this way, shots being fired from four different points at once, the convicts would be led to believe that the island was both largely peopled and strongly defended. in the event of a landing being effected without their having been able to prevent it, and also if they saw that they were on the point of being cut off by the brig's boat, ayrton and pencroft were to return in their boat to the shore and proceed towards the threatened spot. before starting to occupy their posts, the colonists for the last time wrung each other's hands. pencroft succeeded in controlling himself sufficiently to suppress his emotion when he embraced herbert, his boy! and then they separated. in a few moments harding and herbert on one side, the reporter and neb on the other, had disappeared behind the rocks, and five minutes later ayrton and pencroft, having without difficulty crossed the channel, disembarked on the islet and concealed themselves in the clefts of its eastern shore. none of them could have been seen, for they themselves could scarcely distinguish the brig in the fog. it was half-past six in the morning. soon the fog began to clear away, and the topmasts of the brig issued from the vapour. for some minutes great masses rolled over the surface of the sea, then a breeze sprang up, which rapidly dispelled the mist. the _speedy_ now appeared in full view, with a spring on her cable, her head to the north, presenting her larboard side to the island. just as harding had calculated, she was not more than a mile and a quarter from the coast. the sinister black flag floated from the peak. the engineer, with his telescope, could see that the four guns on board were pointed at the island. they were evidently ready to fire at a moment's notice. in the meanwhile the _speedy_ remained silent. about thirty pirates could be seen moving on the deck. a few were on the poop; two others posted in the shrouds, and armed with spy-glasses, were attentively surveying the island. certainly, bob harvey and his crew would not be able easily to give an account of what had happened during the night on board the brig. had this half-naked man, who had forced the door of the powder-magazine, and with whom they had struggled, who had six times discharged his revolver at them, who had killed one and wounded two others, escaped their shot? had he been able to swim to shore? whence did he come? what had been his object? had his design really been to blow up the brig, as bob harvey had thought? all this must be confused enough to the convicts' minds. but what they could no longer doubt was that the unknown island before which the _speedy_ had cast anchor was inhabited, and that there was, perhaps, a numerous colony ready to defend it. and yet no one was to be seen, neither on the shore, nor on the heights. the beach appeared to be absolutely deserted. at any rate, there was no trace of dwellings. had the inhabitants fled into the interior? thus probably the pirate captain reasoned, and doubtless, like a prudent man, he wished to reconnoitre the locality before he allowed his men to venture there. during an hour and a half, no indication of attack or landing could be observed on board the brig. evidently bob harvey was hesitating. even with his strongest telescopes he could not have perceived one of the settlers crouched among the rocks. it was not even probable that his attention had been awakened by the screen of green branches and creepers hiding the windows of granite house, and showing rather conspicuously on the bare rock. indeed, how could he imagine that a dwelling was hollowed out, at that height, in the solid granite. from claw cape to the mandible capes, in all the extent of union bay, there was nothing to lead him to suppose that the island was or could be inhabited. at eight o'clock, however, the colonists observed a movement on board the _speedy_. a boat was lowered, and seven men jumped into her. they were armed with muskets: one took the yoke-lines, four others the oars, and the two others, kneeling in the bows, ready to fire, reconnoitred the island. their object was no doubt to make an examination but not to land, for in the latter case they would have come in larger numbers. the pirates from their look-out could have seen that the coast was sheltered by an islet, separated from it by a channel half a mile in width. however, it was soon evident to cyrus harding, on observing the direction followed by the boat, that they would not attempt to penetrate into the channel, but would land on the islet. pencroft and ayrton, each hidden in a narrow cleft of the rock, saw them coming directly towards them, and waited till they were within range. the boat advanced with extreme caution. the oars only dipped into the water at long intervals. it could now be seen that one of the convicts held a lead-line in his hand, and that he wished to fathom the depth of the channel hollowed out by the current of the mercy. this showed that it was bob harvey's intention to bring his brig as near as possible to the coast. about thirty pirates, scattered in the rigging, followed every movement of the boat, and took the bearings of certain landmarks which would allow them to approach without danger. the boat was not more than two cables-lengths off the islet when she stopped. the man at the tiller stood up and looked for the best place at which to land. at that moment two shots were heard. smoke curled up from among the rocks of the islet. the man at the helm and the man with the lead-line fell backwards into the boat. ayrton's and pencraft's balls had struck them both at the same moment. almost immediately a louder report was heard, a cloud of smoke issued from the brig's side, and a ball, striking the summit of the rock which sheltered ayrton and pencroft, made it fly in splinters, but the two marksmen remained unhurt. horrible imprecations burst from the boat, which immediately continued its way. the man who had been at the tiller was replaced by one of his comrades, and the oars were rapidly plunged into the water. however, instead of returning on board as might have been expected, the boat coasted along the islet, so as to round its southern point. the pirates pulled vigorously at their oars that they might get out of range of the bullets. they advanced to within five cables-lengths of that part of the shore terminated by flotsam point, and after having rounded it in a semicircular line, still protected by the brig's guns, they proceeded towards the mouth of the mercy. their evident intention was to penetrate into the channel, and cut off the colonists posted on the islet, in such a way, that whatever their number might be, being placed between the fire from the boat and the fire from the brig, they would find themselves in a very disadvantageous position. a quarter of an hour passed whilst the boat advanced in this direction. absolute silence, perfect calm reigned in the air and on the water. pencroft and ayrton, although they knew they ran the risk of being cut off, had not left their post, both that they did not wish to show themselves as yet to their assailants, and expose themselves to the _speedy's_ guns, and that they relied on neb and gideon spilett, watching at the mouth of the river, and on cyrus harding and herbert, in ambush among the rocks at the chimneys. twenty minutes after the first shots were fired, the boat was less than two cables-lengths off the mercy. as the tide was beginning to rise with its accustomed violence, caused by the narrowness of the straits, the pirates were drawn towards the river, and it was only by dint of hard rowing that they were able to keep in the middle of the channel. but, as they were passing within good range of the mouth of the mercy, two balls saluted them, and two more of their number were laid in the bottom of the boat. neb and spilett had not missed their aim. the brig immediately sent a second ball on the post betrayed by the smoke, but without any other result than that of splintering the rock. the boat now contained only three able men. carried on by the current, it shot through the channel with the rapidity of an arrow, passed before harding and herbert, who, not thinking it within range, withheld their fire, then, rounding the northern point of the islet with the two remaining oars, they pulled towards the brig. hitherto the settlers had nothing to complain of. their adversaries had certainly had the worst of it. the latter already counted four men seriously wounded if not dead; they, on the contrary, unwounded, had not missed a shot. if the pirates continued to attack them in this way, if they renewed their attempt to land by means of a boat, they could be destroyed one by one. it was now seen how advantageous the engineer's arrangements had been. the pirates would think that they had to deal with numerous and well-armed adversaries, whom they could not easily get the better of. half an hour passed before the boat, having to pull against the current, could get alongside the _speedy_. frightful cries were heard when they returned on board with the wounded, and two or three guns were fired with no result. but now about a dozen other convicts, maddened with rage, and possibly by the effect of the evening's potations, threw themselves into the boat. a second boat was also lowered, in which eight men took their places, and whilst the first pulled straight for the islet, to dislodge the colonists from thence, the second manoeuvred so as to force the entrance of the mercy. the situation was evidently becoming very dangerous for pencroft and ayrton, and they saw that they must regain the mainland. however, they waited till the first boat was within range, when two well-directed balls threw its crew into disorder. then, pencroft and ayrton, abandoning their posts, under fire from the dozen muskets, ran across the islet at full speed, jumped into their boat, crossed the channel at the moment the second boat reached the southern end, and ran to hide themselves in the chimneys. they had scarcely rejoined cyrus harding and herbert, before the islet was overrun with pirates in every direction. almost at the same moment, fresh reports resounded from the mercy station, to which the second boat was rapidly approaching. two, out of the eight men who manned her, were mortally wounded by gideon spilett and neb, and the boat herself, carried irresistibly onto the reefs, was stove in at the mouth of the mercy. but the six survivors, holding their muskets above their heads to preserve them from contact with the water, managed to land on the right bank of the river. then, finding they were exposed to the fire of the ambush there, they fled in the direction of flotsam point, out of range of the balls. the actual situation was this: on the islet were a dozen convicts, of whom some were no doubt wounded, but who had still a boat at their disposal; on the island were six, but who could not by any possibility reach granite house, as they could not cross the river, all the bridges being raised. "hallo," exclaimed pencroft as he rushed into the chimneys, "hallo, captain! what do you think of it, now?" "i think," answered the engineer, "that the combat will now take a new form, for it cannot be supposed that the convicts will be so foolish as to remain in a position so unfavourable for them!" "they won't cross the channel," said the sailor. "ayrton and mr spilett's rifles are there to prevent them. you know that they carry more than a mile!" "no doubt," replied herbert; "but what can two rifles do against the brig's guns?" "well, the brig isn't in the channel yet, i fancy!" said pencroft. "but suppose she does come there?" said harding. "that's impossible, for she would risk running aground and being lost!" "it is possible," said ayrton. "the convicts might profit by the high tide to enter the channel, with the risk of grounding at low tide, it is true; but then, under the fire from her guns, our posts would be no longer tenable." "confound them!" exclaimed pencroft. "it really seems as if the blackguards were preparing to weigh anchor." "perhaps we shall be obliged to take refuge in granite house!" observed herbert. "we must wait!" answered cyrus harding. "but mr spilett and neb?" said pencroft. "they will know when it is best to rejoin us. be ready, ayrton. it is yours and spilett's rifles which must speak now." it was only too true. the _speedy_ was beginning to weigh her anchor, and her intention was evidently to approach the islet. the tide would be rising for an hour and a half, and the ebb current being already weakened, it would be easy for the brig to advance. but as to entering the channel, pencroft, contrary to ayrton's opinion, could not believe that she would dare to attempt it. in the meanwhile, the pirates who occupied the islet had gradually advanced to the opposite shore, and were now only separated from the mainland by the channel. being armed with muskets alone, they could do no harm to the settlers, in ambush at the chimneys and the mouth of the mercy; but, not knowing the latter to be supplied with long range rifles, they on their side did not believe themselves to be exposed. quite uncovered, therefore, they surveyed the islet, and examined the shore. their illusion was of short duration. ayrton's and gideon spilett's rifles then spoke, and no doubt imparted some very disagreeable intelligence to two of the convicts, for they fell backwards. then there was a general helter-skelter. the ten others, not even stopping to pick up their dead or wounded companions, fled to the other side of the islet, tumbled into the boat which had brought them, and pulled away with all their strength. "eight less!" exclaimed pencroft. "really, one would have thought that mr spilett and ayrton had given the word to fire together!" "gentlemen," said ayrton, as he reloaded his gun, "this is becoming more serious. the brig is making sail!" "the anchor is weighed!" exclaimed pencroft. "yes; and she is already moving." in fact, they could distinctly hear the creaking of the windlass. the _speedy_ was at first held by her anchor; then, when that had been raised, she began to drift towards the shore. the wind was blowing from the sea; the jib and the fore-topsail were hoisted, and the vessel gradually approached the island. from the two posts of the mercy and the chimneys they watched her without giving a sign of life; but not without some emotion. what could be more terrible for the colonists than to be exposed, at a short distance, to the brig's guns, without being able to reply with any effect? how could they then prevent the pirates from landing? cyrus harding felt this strongly, and he asked himself what it would be possible to do. before long, he would be called upon for his determination. but what was it to be? to shut themselves up in granite house, to be besieged there, to remain there for weeks, for months even, since they had an abundance of provisions? so far good! but after that? the pirates would not the less be masters of the island, which they would ravage at their pleasure, and in time they would end by having their revenge on the prisoners in granite house. however, one chance yet remained; it was that bob harvey, after all, would not venture his ship into the channel, and that he would keep outside the islet. he would be still separated from the coast by half a mile, and at that distance his shot could not be very destructive. "never!" repeated pencroft, "bob harvey will never, if he is a good seaman, enter that channel! he knows well that it would risk the brig, if the sea got up ever so little! and what would become of him without his vessel?" in the meanwhile the brig approached the islet, and it could be seen that she was endeavouring to make the lower end. the breeze was light, and as the current had then lost much of its force, bob harvey had absolute command over his vessel. the route previously followed by the boats had allowed her to reconnoitre the channel, and she boldly entered it. the pirate's design was now only too evident: he wished to bring her broadside to bear on the chimneys and from there to reply with shell and ball to the shot which had till then decimated her crew. soon the _speedy_ reached the point of the islet; she rounded it with ease; the mainsail was braced up, and the brig hugging the wind, stood across the mouth of the mercy. "the scoundrels! they are coming!" said pencroft. at that moment, cyrus harding, ayrton, the sailor, and herbert, were rejoined by neb and gideon spilett. the reporter and his companion had judged it best to abandon the post at the mercy, from which they could do nothing against the ship, and they had acted wisely. it was better that the colonists should be together at the moment when they were about to engage in a decisive action. gideon spilett and neb had arrived by dodging behind the rocks, though not without attracting a shower of bullets, which had not, however, reached them. "spilett! neb!" cried the engineer, "you are not wounded?" "no," answered the reporter; "a few bruises only from the ricochet! but that cursed brig has entered the channel!" "yes," replied pencroft, "and in ten minutes she will have anchored before granite house!" "have you formed any plan, cyrus?" asked the reporter. "we must take refuge in granite house whilst there is still time, and the convicts cannot see us." "that is my opinion, too," replied gideon spilett; "but once shut up--" "we must be guided by circumstances," said the engineer. "let us be off, then, and make haste!" said the reporter. "would you not wish, captain, that ayrton and i should remain here?" asked the sailor. "what would be the use of that, pencroft?" replied harding. "no. we will not separate!" there was not a moment to be lost. the colonists left the chimneys. a bend of the cliff prevented them from being seen by those in the brig; but two or three reports, and the crash of bullets on the rock, told them that the _speedy_ was at no great distance. to spring into the lift, hoist themselves up to the door of granite house, where top and jup had been shut up since the evening before, to rush into the large room, was the work of a minute only. it was quite time, for the settlers, through the branches, could see the _speedy_, surrounded with smoke, gliding up the channel. the firing was incessant, and shot from the four guns struck blindly, both on the mercy post, although it was not occupied, and on the chimneys. the rocks were splintered, and cheers accompanied each discharge. however, they were hoping that granite house would be spared, thanks to harding's precaution of concealing the windows, when a shot, piercing the door, penetrated into the passage. "we are discovered!" exclaimed pencroft. the colonists had not, perhaps, been seen; but it was certain that bob harvey had thought proper to send a ball through the suspected foliage which concealed that part of the cliff. soon he redoubled his attack, when another ball having torn away the leafy screen, disclosed a gaping aperture in the granite. the colonists' situation was desperate. their retreat was discovered. they could not oppose any obstacle to these missiles, nor protect the stone, which flew in splinters around them. there was nothing to be done but to take refuge in the upper passage of granite house, and leave their dwelling to be devastated, when a deep roar was heard, followed by frightful cries! cyrus harding and his companions rushed to one of the windows-- the brig, irresistibly raised on a sort of water-spout, had just split in two, and in less than ten seconds she was swallowed up with all her criminal crew! chapter four. the colonists on the beach--ayrton and pencroft work amid the wreck-- conversation during breakfast--pencroft's arguments--minute examination of the brig's hull--the powder-magazine untouched--new riches--the last of the wreck--a broken piece of cylinder. "she has blown up!" cried herbert. "yes! blown up, just as if ayrton had set fire to the powder!" returned pencroft, throwing himself into the lift together with neb and the lad. "but what has happened?" asked gideon spilett, quite stunned by this unexpected catastrophe. "oh! this time, we shall know," answered the engineer quickly. "what shall we know?--" "later! later! come, spilett. the main point is that these pirates have been exterminated!" and cyrus harding, hurrying away the reporter and ayrton, joined pencroft, neb, and herbert on the beach. nothing could be seen of the brig, not even her masts. after having been raised by the water-spout, she had fallen on her side, and had sunk in that position, doubtless in consequence of some enormous leak. but as in that place the channel was not more than twenty feet in depth, it was certain that the sides of the submerged brig would reappear at low-water. a few things from the wreck floated on the surface of the water. a raft could be seen consisting of spare spars, coops of poultry with their occupants still living, boxes and barrels, which gradually came to the surface, after having escaped through the hatchways, but no pieces of the wreck appeared, neither planks from the deck, nor timber from the hull,--which rendered the sudden disappearance of the _speedy_ perfectly inexplicable. however, the two masts, which had been broken and escaped from the shrouds and stays, came up, with their sails, some furled and the others spread. but it was not necessary to wait for the tide to bring up these riches, and ayrton and pencroft, jumped into the boat with the intention of towing the pieces of wreck either to the beach or to the islet. but just as they were shoving off an observation from gideon spilett arrested them. "what about those six convicts who disembarked on the right bank of the mercy?" said he. in fact, it would not do to forget that the six men whose boat had gone to pieces on the rocks, had landed at flotsam point. they looked in that direction. none of the fugitives were visible. it was probable that, having seen their vessel engulfed in the channel, they had fled into the interior of the island. "we will deal with them later," said harding. "as they are armed, they will still be dangerous; but as it is six against six, the chances are equal. to the most pressing business first." ayrton and pencroft pulled vigorously towards the wreck. the sea was calm and the tide very high, as there had been a new moon but two days before. a whole hour at least would elapse before the hull of the brig could emerge from the water of the channel. ayrton and pencroft were able to fasten the masts and spars by means of ropes, the ends of which were carried to the beach. there, by the united efforts of the settlers the pieces of wreck were hauled up. then the boat picked up all that was floating, coops, barrels, and boxes, which were immediately carried to the chimneys. several bodies floated also. amongst them, ayrton recognised that of bob harvey, which he pointed out to his companion, saying with some emotion-- "that is what i have been, pencroft." "but what you are no longer, brave ayrton!" returned the sailor warmly. it was singular enough that so few bodies floated. only five or six were counted, which were already being carried by the current towards the open sea. very probably the convicts had not had time to escape, and the ship lying over on her side, the greater number of them had remained below. now the current, by carrying the bodies of these miserable men out to sea, would spare the colonists the sad task of burying them in some corner of their island. for two hours, cyrus harding and his companions were solely occupied in hauling up the spars onto the sand, and then in spreading the sails, which were perfectly uninjured, to dry. they spoke little, for they were absorbed in their work, but what thoughts occupied their minds! the possession of this brig, or rather all that she contained, was a perfect mine of wealth. in fact, a ship is like a little world in miniature, and the stores of the colony would be increased by a large number of useful articles. it would be, on a large scale, equivalent to the chest found at flotsam point. "and besides," thought pencroft, "why should it be impossible to refloat the brig? if she has only a leak, that may be stopped up; a vessel from three to four hundred tons, why she is a regular ship compared to our _bonadventure_! and we could go a long distance in her! we could go anywhere we liked! captain harding, ayrton and i must examine her! she would be well worth the trouble!" in fact, if the brig was still fit to navigate, the colonists' chances of returning to their native land was singularly increased. but, to decide this important question, it was necessary to wait until the tide was quite low, so that every part of the brig's hull might be examined. when their treasures had been safely conveyed on shore, harding and his companions agreed to devote some minutes to breakfast. they were almost famished: fortunately, the larder was not far off, and neb was noted for being an expeditious cook. they breakfasted, therefore, near the chimneys, and during their repast, as may be supposed, nothing was talked of but the unexpected event which had so miraculously saved the colony. "miraculous is the word," repeated pencroft, "for it must be acknowledged that those rascals blew up just at the right moment! granite house was beginning to be uncomfortable as a habitation!" "and can you guess, pencroft," asked the reporter, "how it happened, or what can have occasioned the explosion?" "oh! mr spilett, nothing is more simple," answered pencroft. "a convict vessel is not disciplined like a man-of-war! convicts are not sailors. of course the powder-magazine was open, and as they were firing incessantly, some careless or clumsy fellow just blew up the vessel!" "captain harding," said herbert, "what astonishes me is that the explosion has not produced more effect. the report was not loud, and besides there are so few planks and timbers torn out. it seems as if the ship had rather foundered than blown up." "does that astonish you, my boy?" asked the engineer. "yes, captain." "and it astonishes me also herbert," replied he, "but when we visit the hull of the brig, we shall no doubt find the explanation of the matter." "why, captain," said pencroft, "you don't suppose that the _speedy_ simply foundered like a ship which has struck on a rock?" "why not," observed neb, "if there are rocks in the channel?" "nonsense, neb," answered pencroft, "you did not look at the right moment. an instant before she sank, the brig, as i saw perfectly well, rose on an enormous wave, and fell back on her larboard side. now, if she had only struck, she would have sunk quietly and gone to the bottom like an honest vessel." "it was just because she was not an honest vessel!" returned neb. "well, we shall soon see, pencroft," said the engineer. "we shall soon see," rejoined the sailor, "but i would wager my head there are no rocks in the channel. look here, captain, to speak candidly, do you mean to say that there is anything marvellous in the occurrence?" cyrus harding did not answer. "at any rate," said gideon spilett, "whether rock or explosion, you will agree, pencroft, that it occurred just in the nick of time!" "yes! yes!" replied the sailor, "but that is not the question. i ask captain harding if he sees anything supernatural in all this." "i cannot say, pencroft," said the engineer. "that is all the answer i can make." a reply which did not satisfy pencroft at all. he stuck to "an explosion," and did not wish to give it up. he would never consent to admit that in that channel, with its fine sandy bed, just like the beach, which he had often crossed at low-water, there could be an unknown rock. and besides, at the time the brig foundered, it was high-water, that is to say, there was enough water to carry the vessel clear over any rocks which would not be uncovered at low tide. therefore, there could not have been a collision. therefore, the vessel had not struck. therefore, she had blown up. and it must be confessed that the sailor's arguments were not without reason. towards half-past one, the colonists embarked in the boat to visit the wreck. it was to be regretted that the brig's two boats had not been saved; but one, as has been said, had gone to pieces at the mouth of the mercy, and was absolutely useless; the other had disappeared when the brig went down, and had not again been seen, having doubtless been crushed. the hull of the _speedy_ was just beginning to issue from the water. the brig was lying right over on her side, for her masts being broken, pressed down by the weight of the ballast displaced by the shock, the keel was visible along her whole length. she had been regularly turned over by the inexplicable but frightful submarine action, which had been at the same time manifested by an enormous water-spout. the settlers rowed round the hull, and, in proportion as the tide went down, they could ascertain, if not the cause which had occasioned the catastrophe, at least the effect produced. towards the bows, on both sides of the keel, seven or eight feet from the beginning of the stem, the sides of the brig were frightfully torn. over a length of at least twenty feet there opened two large leaks, which it would be impossible to stop up. not only had the copper sheathing and the planks disappeared, reduced, no doubt, to powder, but also the ribs, the iron bolts, and tree-nails which united them. from the entire length of the hull to the stern the false keel had been separated with unaccountable violence, and the keel itself, torn from the carline in several places, was split in all its length. "i've a notion!" exclaimed pencroft, "that this vessel will be difficult to get afloat again." "it will be impossible," said ayrton. "at any rate," observed gideon spilett to the sailor, "the explosion, if there has been one, has produced singular effects! it has split the lower part of the hull, instead of blowing up the deck and topsides! these great rents appear rather to have been made by a rock than by the explosion of a powder-magazine." "there is not a rock in the channel!" answered the sailor. "i will admit anything you like, except the rock." "let us try to penetrate into the interior of the brig," said the engineer; "perhaps we shall then know what to think of the cause of her destruction." this was the best thing to be done, and it was agreed, besides, to take an inventory of all the treasures on board, and to arrange for their preservation. access to the interior of the brig was now easy. the tide was still going down, and the deck was practicable. the ballast, composed of heavy masses of iron, had broken through in several places. the noise of the sea could be heard as it rushed out at the holes in the hull. cyrus harding and his companions, hatchets in hand, advanced along the shattered deck. cases of all sorts encumbered it, and, as they had been but a very short time in the water, their contents were perhaps uninjured. they then busied themselves in placing all this cargo in safety. the water would not return for several hours, and these hours must be employed in the most profitable way. ayrton and pencroft had, at the entrance made in the hull, discovered tackle, which would serve to hoist up the barrels and chests. the boat received them and transported them to the shore. they took the articles as they came, intending to sort them afterwards. at any rate, the settlers saw at once, with extreme satisfaction, that the brig possessed a very varied cargo--an assortment of all sorts of articles, utensils, manufactured goods, and tools--such as the ships which make the great coasting-trade of polynesia are usually laden with. it was probable that they would find a little of everything, and they agreed that it was exactly what was necessary for the colony of lincoln island. however--and cyrus harding observed it in silent astonishment--not only, as has been said, had the hull of the brig enormously suffered from the shock, whatever it was, that had occasioned the catastrophe, but the interior arrangements had been destroyed, especially towards the bows. partitions and staunchions were smashed, as if some tremendous shell had burst in the interior of the brig. the colonists could easily go fore and aft, after having removed the cases as they were extricated. they were not heavy bales, which would have been difficult to remove, but simple packages, of which the stowage, besides, was no longer recognisable. the colonists then reached the stern of the brig--the part formerly surmounted by the poop. it was there that, following ayrton's directions, they must look for the powder-magazine. cyrus harding thought that it had not exploded; that it was possible some barrels might be saved, and that the powder, which is usually enclosed in metal coverings, might not have suffered from contact with the water. this, in fact, was just what had happened. they extricated from amongst a large number of shot twenty barrels, the insides of which were lined with copper. pencroft was convinced by the evidence of his own eyes that the destruction of the _speedy_ could not be attributed to an explosion. that part of the hull in which the magazine was situated was, moreover, that which had suffered least. "it may be so," said the obstinate sailor; "but as to a rock, there is not one in the channel!" "then, how did it happen?" asked herbert. "i don't know," answered pencroft, "captain harding doesn't know, and nobody knows or ever will know!" several hours had passed during these researches, and the tide began to flow. work must be suspended for the present. there was no fear of the brig being carried away by the sea, for she was already fixed as firmly as if moored by her anchors. they could therefore, without inconvenience, wait until the next day to resume operations; but, as to the vessel herself, she was doomed, and it would be best to hasten to save the remains of her hull, as she would not be long in disappearing in the quicksands of the channel. it was now five o'clock in the evening. it had been a hard day's work for the men. they ate with good appetite, and, notwithstanding their fatigue, they could not resist, after dinner, their desire of inspecting the cases which composed the cargo of the _speedy_. most of them contained clothes, which, as may be believed, were well received. there were enough to clothe a whole colony--linen for every one's use, shoes for every one's feet. "we are too rich!" exclaimed pencroft. "but what are we going to do with all this?" and every moment burst forth the hurrahs of the delighted sailor when he caught sight of the barrels of gunpowder, fire-arms and side-arms, balls of cotton, implements of husbandry, carpenter's, joiner's, and blacksmith's tools, and boxes of all kinds of seeds, not in the least injured by their short sojourn in the water. ah, two years before, how these things would have been prized! and now, even although the industrious colonists had provided themselves with tools, these treasures would find their use. there was no want of space in the store-rooms of granite house, but that daytime would not allow them to stow away the whole. it would not do also to forget that the six survivors of the _speedy's_ crew had landed on the island, for they were in all probability scoundrels of the deepest dye, and it was necessary that the colonists should be on their guard against them. although the bridges over the mercy were raised, the convicts would not be stopped by a river or a stream, and, rendered desperate, these wretches would be capable of anything. they would see later what plan it would be best to follow; but in the meantime it was necessary to mount guard over cases and packages heaped up near the chimneys, and thus the settlers employed themselves in turn during the night. the morning came, however, without the convicts having attempted any attack. master jup and top, on guard at the foot of granite house, would have quickly given the alarm. the three following days--the th, th, and st of october--were employed in saving everything of value, or of any use whatever, either from the cargo or rigging of the brig. at low tide they overhauled the hold--at high tide they stowed away the rescued articles. a great part of the copper sheathing had been torn from the hull, which every day sank lower. but before the sand had swallowed the heavy things which had fallen through the bottom, ayrton and pencroft, diving to the bed of the channel, recovered the chains and anchors of the brig, the iron of her ballast, and even four guns, which, floated by means of empty casks, were brought to shore. it may be seen that the arsenal of the colony had gained by the wreck, as well as the store-rooms of granite house. pencroft, always enthusiastic in his projects, already spoke of constructing a battery to command the channel and the mouth of the river. with four guns, he engaged to prevent any fleet, "however powerful it might be," from venturing into the waters of lincoln island! in the meantime, when nothing remained of the brig but a useless hulk, bad weather came on, which soon finished her. cyrus harding had intended to blow her up, so as to collect the remains on the shore, but a strong gale from the north-east and a heavy sea compelled him to economise his powder. in fact, on the night of the rd, the hull entirely broke up, and some of the wreck was cast up on the beach. as to the papers on board, it is useless to say that, although he carefully searched the lockers of the poop, harding did not discover any trace of them. the pirates had evidently destroyed everything that concerned either the captain or the owners of the _speedy_, and, as the name of her port was not painted on her counter, there was nothing which would tell them her nationality. however, by the shape of her boats ayrton and pencroft believed that the brig was of english build. a week after the catastrophe--or, rather, after the fortunate, though inexplicable, event to which the colony owed its preservation--nothing more could be seen of the vessel, even at low tide. the wreck had disappeared, and granite house was enriched by nearly all it had contained. however, the mystery which enveloped its strange destruction would doubtless never have been cleared away if, on the th of november, neb, strolling on the beach, had not found a piece of a thick iron cylinder, bearing traces of explosion. the edges of this cylinder were twisted and broken, as if they had been subjected to the action of some explosive substance. neb brought this piece of metal to his master, who was then occupied with his companions in the workshop of the chimneys. cyrus harding examined the cylinder attentively, then, turning to pencroft-- "you persist, my friend," said he, "in maintaining that the _speedy_ was not lost in consequence of a collision?" "yes, captain," answered the sailor. "you know as well as i do that there are no rocks in the channel." "but suppose she had run against this piece of iron?" said the engineer, showing the broken cylinder. "what, that bit of pipe!" exclaimed pencroft in a tone of perfect incredulity. "my friends," resumed harding, "you remember that before she foundered the brig rose on the summit of a regular water-spout?" "yes, captain," replied herbert. "well, would you like to know what occasioned that water-spout? it was this," said the engineer, holding up the broken tube. "that?" returned pencroft. "yes! this cylinder is all that remains of a torpedo!" "a torpedo!" exclaimed the engineer's companions. "and who put the torpedo there?" demanded pencroft, who did not like to yield. "all that i can tell you is, that it was not i," answered cyrus harding; "but it was there, and you have been able to judge of its incomparable power!" chapter five. the engineer's declaration--pencroft's grand hypothesis--an aerial battery--the four cannons--the surviving convicts--ayrton's hesitation-- cyrus harding's generous sentiments--pencroft's regret. so, then, all was explained by the submarine explosion of this torpedo. cyrus harding could not be mistaken, as, during the war of the union, he had had occasion to try these terrible engines of destruction. it was under the action of this cylinder, charged with some explosive substance, nitro-glycerine, picrate, or some other material of the same nature, that the water of the channel had been raised like a dome, the bottom of the brig crushed in, and she had sunk instantly, the damage done to her hull being so considerable that it was impossible to refloat her. the _speedy_ had not been able to withstand a torpedo that would have destroyed an ironclad as easily as a fishing-boat! yes! all was explained, everything--except the presence of the torpedo in the waters of the channel! "my friends, then," said cyrus harding, "we can no longer be in doubt as to the presence of a mysterious being, a castaway like us, perhaps, abandoned on our island, and i say this in order that ayrton may be acquainted with all the strange events which have occurred during these two years. who this beneficent stranger is, whose intervention has, so fortunately for us, been manifested on many occasions, i cannot imagine. what his object can be in acting thus, in concealing himself after rendering us so many services, i cannot understand. but his services are not the less real, and are of such a nature that only a man possessed of prodigious power, could render them. ayrton is indebted to him as much as we are, for, if it was the stranger who saved me from the waves after the fall from the balloon, evidently it was he who wrote the document, who placed the bottle in the channel, and who has made known to us the situation of our companion. i will add that it was he who guided that chest, provided with everything we wanted, and stranded it on flotsam point; that it was he who lighted that fire on the heights of the island, which permitted you to land; that it was he who fired that bullet found in the body of the peccary; that it was he who immersed that torpedo in the channel, which destroyed the brig; in a word, that all those inexplicable events, for which we could not assign a reason, are due to this mysterious being. therefore, whoever he may be, whether shipwrecked, or exiled on our island, we shall be ungrateful, if we think ourselves freed from gratitude towards him. we have contracted a debt, and i hope that we shall one day pay it." "you are right in speaking thus, my dear cyrus," replied gideon spilett. "yes, there is an almost all-powerful being, hidden in some part of the island, and whose influence has been singularly useful to our colony. i will add that the unknown appears to possess means of action which border on the supernatural if, in the events of practical life, the supernatural were recognisable. is it he who is in secret communication with us by the well in granite house, and has he thus a knowledge of all our plans? was it he who threw us that bottle, when the vessel made her first cruise? was it he who threw top out of the lake, and killed the dugong? was it he, who as everything leads us to believe, saved you from the waves, and that under circumstances in which any one else would not have been able to act? if it was he, he possesses a power which renders him master of the elements." the reporter's reasoning was just, and every one felt it to be so. "yes," rejoined cyrus harding, "if the intervention of a human being is not more questionable for us, i agree that he has at his disposal means of action beyond those possessed by humanity. there is a mystery still, but if we discover the man, the mystery will be discovered also. the question, then, is, ought we to respect the _incognito_ of this generous being, or ought we to do everything to find him out? what is your opinion on the matter?" "my opinion," said pencroft, "is that, whoever he may be, he is a brave man, and he has my esteem!" "be it so," answered harding, "but that is not an answer, pencroft." "master," then said neb, "my idea is, that we may search as long as we like for this gentleman whom you are talking about, but that we shall not discover him till he pleases." "that's not bad, what you say, neb," observed pencroft. "i am of neb's opinion," said gideon spilett, "but that is no reason for not attempting the adventure. whether we find this mysterious being or not, we shall at least have fulfilled our duty towards him." "and you, my boy, give us your opinion," said the engineer, turning to herbert. "oh," cried herbert, his countenance full of animation, "how i should like to thank him, he who saved you first, and who has now saved us!" "of course, my boy," replied pencroft, "so would i and all of us. i am not inquisitive, but i would give one of my eyes to see this individual face to face! it seems to me that he must be handsome, tall, strong, with a splendid beard, radiant hair, and that he must be seated on the clouds, a great ball in his hands!" "but, pencroft," answered spilett, "you are describing a picture of the creator." "possibly, mr spilett," replied the sailor, "but that is how i imagine him!" "and you, ayrton?" asked the engineer. "captain harding," replied ayrton, "i can give you no better advice in this matter. whatever you do will be best, when you wish me to join you in your researches, i am ready to follow you." "i thank you, ayrton," answered cyrus harding, "but i should like a more direct answer to the question i put to you. you are our companion; you have already endangered your life several times for us, and you, as well as the rest, ought to be consulted in the matter of any important decision. speak, therefore." "captain harding," replied ayrton, "i think that we ought to do everything to discover this unknown benefactor. perhaps he is alone. perhaps he is suffering. perhaps he has a life to be renewed. i, too, as you said, have a debt of gratitude to pay him. it was he, it could be only he who must have come to tabor island, who found there the wretch you knew, and who made known to you that there was an unfortunate man there to be saved! therefore it is, thanks to him, that i have become a man again. no, i will never forget him!" "that is settled, then," said cyrus harding. "we will begin our researches as soon as possible. we will not leave a corner of the island unexplored. we will search into its most secret recesses, and will hope that our unknown friend will pardon us in consideration of our intentions!" for several days the colonists were actively employed in haymaking and harvest. before putting their project of exploring the yet unknown parts of the island into execution, they wished to get all possible work finished. it was also the time for collecting the various vegetables from the tabor island plants. all was stowed away, and happily there was no want of room in granite house, in which they might have housed all the treasures of the island. the products of the colony were there, methodically arranged, and in a safe place, as may be believed, sheltered as much from animals as from man. there was no fear of damp in the middle of that thick mass of granite. many natural excavations situated in the upper passage were enlarged either by pick-axe or mine, and granite house thus became a general warehouse, containing all the provisions, arms, tools, and spare utensils--in a word, all the stores of the colony. as to the guns obtained from the brig, they were pretty pieces of ordnance, which, at pencroft's entreaty, were hoisted by means of tackle and pulleys, right up into granite house; embrasures were made between the windows, and the shining muzzles of the guns could soon be seen through the granite cliff. from this height they commanded all union bay. it was like a little gibraltar, and any vessel anchored off the islet would inevitably be exposed to the fire of this aerial battery. "captain," said pencroft one day, it was the th of november, "now that our fortifications are finished, it would be a good thing if we tried the range of our guns." "do you think that is useful?" asked the engineer. "it is more than useful, it is necessary! without that how are we to know to what distance we can send one of those pretty shot with which we are provided?" "try them, pencroft," replied the engineer. "however, i think that in making the experiment, we ought to employ, not the ordinary powder, the supply of which, i think, should remain untouched, but the pyroxile which will never fail us." "can the cannon support the shock of the pyroxile?" asked the reporter, who was not less anxious than pencroft to try the artillery of granite house. "i believe so. however," added the engineer, "we will be prudent." the engineer was right in thinking that the guns were of excellent make. made of forged steel, and breech-loaders, they ought consequently to be able to bear a considerable charge, and also have an enormous range. in fact, as regards practical effect, the transit described by the ball ought to be as extended as possible, and this tension could only be obtained under the condition that the projectile should be impelled with a very great initial velocity. "now," said harding to his companions, "the initial velocity is in proportion to the quantity of powder used. in the fabrication of these pieces, everything depends on employing a metal with the highest possible power of resistance, and steel is incontestably that metal of all others which resists the best. i have, therefore, reason to believe that our guns will bear without risk the expansion of the pyroxile gas, and will give excellent results." "we shall be a great deal more certain of that when we have tried them!" answered pencroft. it is unnecessary to say that the four cannons were in perfect order. since they had been taken from the water, the sailor had bestowed great care upon them. how many hours he had spent, in rubbing, greasing, and polishing them, and in cleaning the mechanism! and now the pieces were as brilliant as if they had been on board a frigate of the united states' navy. on this day, therefore, in presence of all the members of the colony, including master jup and top, the four cannon were successively tried. they were charged with pyroxile, taking into consideration its explosive power, which, as has been said, is four times that of ordinary powder: the projectile to be fired was cylindro-conic. pencroft, holding the end of the quick-match, stood ready to fire. at harding's signal, he fired. the shot, passing over the islet, fell into the sea at a distance which could not be calculated with exactitude. the second gun was pointed at the rocks at the end of flotsam point, and the shot, striking a sharp rock nearly three miles from granite house, made it fly into splinters. it was herbert who had pointed this gun and fired it, and very proud he was of his first shot. pencroft only was prouder than he! such a shot, the honour of which belonged to his dear boy. the third shot, aimed this time at the downs forming the upper side of union bay, struck the sand at a distance of four miles, then having ricocheted, was lost in the sea in a cloud of spray. for the fourth piece cyrus harding slightly increased the charge, so as to try its extreme range. then, all standing aside for fear of its bursting, the match was lighted by means of a long cord. a tremendous report was heard, but the piece had held good, and the colonists rushing to the windows, saw the shot graze the rocks of mandible cape, nearly five miles from granite house, and disappear in shark gulf. "well, captain," exclaimed pencroft, whose cheers might have rivalled the reports themselves, "what do you say of our battery? all the pirates in the pacific have only to present themselves before granite house! not one can land there now without our permission!" "believe me, pencroft," replied the engineer, "it would be better not to have to make the experiment." "well," said the sailor, "what ought to be done with regard to those six villains who are roaming about the island? are we to leave them to overrun our forests, our fields, our plantations. these pirates are regular jaguars, and it seems to me we ought not to hesitate to treat them as such! what do you think, ayrton?" added pencroft, turning to his companion. ayrton hesitated at first to reply, and cyrus harding regretted that pencroft had so thoughtlessly put this question. and he was much moved when ayrton replied in a humble tone-- "i have been one of those jaguars, mr pencroft. i have no right to speak." and with a slow step he walked away. pencroft understood. "what a brute i am!" he exclaimed. "poor ayrton! he has as much right to speak here as any one!" "yes," said gideon spilett, "but his reserve does him honour, and it is right to respect the feeling which he has about his sad past." "certainly, mr spilett," answered the sailor, "and there is no fear of my doing so again. i would rather bite my tongue off than cause ayrton any pain! but to return to the question. it seems to me that these ruffians have no right to any pity, and that we ought to rid the island of them as soon as possible." "is that your opinion, pencroft?" asked the engineer. "quite my opinion." "and before hunting them mercilessly, you would not wait until they had committed some fresh act of hostility against us?" "isn't what they have done already enough?" asked pencroft, who did not understand these scruples. "they may adopt other sentiments!" said harding, "and perhaps repent." "they repent!" exclaimed the sailor, shrugging his shoulders. "pencroft, think of ayrton!" said herbert, taking the sailor's hand. "he became an honest man again!" pencroft looked at his companions one after the other. he had never thought of his proposal being met with any objection. his rough nature could not allow that they ought to come to terms with the rascals who had landed on the island with bob harvey's accomplices, the murderers of the crew of the _speedy_; and he looked upon them as wild beasts which ought to be destroyed without delay and without remorse. "come!" said he. "everybody is against me! you wish to be generous to those villains! very well; i hope we mayn't repent it!" "what danger shall we run," said herbert, "if we take care to be always on our guard!" "hum!" observed the reporter, who had not given any decided opinion. "they are six and well-armed. if they each lay hid in a corner, and each fired at one of us, they would soon be masters of the colony!" "why have they not done so?" said herbert. "no doubt because it was not their interest to do it. besides, we are six also." "well, well!" replied pencroft, whom no reasoning could have convinced. "let us leave these good people to do what they like, and don't think anything more about them!" "come, pencroft," said neb, "don't make yourself out so bad as all that! suppose one of these unfortunate men were here before you, within good range of your gun, you would not fire." "i would fire on him as i would on a mad dog, neb," replied pencroft coldly. "pencroft," said the engineer, "you have always shown much deference to my advice; will you, in this matter, yield to me?" "i will do as you please, captain harding," answered the sailor, who was not at all convinced. "very well, wait, and we will not attack them unless we are attacked first." thus their behaviour towards the pirates was agreed upon, although pencroft augured nothing good from it. they were not to attack them, but were to be on their guard. after all, the island was large and fertile. if any sentiment of honesty yet remained in the bottom of their hearts, these wretches might perhaps be reclaimed. was it not their interest in the situation in which they found themselves to begin a new life? at any rate, for humanity's sake alone, it would be right to wait. the colonists would no longer, as before, be able to go and come without fear. hitherto they had only wild beasts to guard against, and now six convicts of the worst description, perhaps, were roaming over their island. it was serious, certainly, and to less brave men, it would have been security lost! no matter! at present, the colonists had reason on their side against pencroft. would they be right in the future? that remained to be seen. chapter six. expeditions planned--ayrton at the corral--visit to port balloon-- pencroft's observations on board the bonadventure--despatch sent to the corral--no reply from ayrton--departure the next day--the reason why the wire did not work--a report. however, the chief business of the colonists was to make that complete exploration of the island which had been decided upon, and which would have two objects: to discover the mysterious being whose existence was now indisputable, and at the same time to find out what had become of the pirates, what retreat they had chosen, what sort of life they were leading, and what was to be feared from them. cyrus harding wished to set out without delay; but as the expedition would be of some days' duration, it appeared best to load the cart with different materials and tools in order to facilitate the organisation of the encampments. one of the onagers, however, having hurt its leg, could not be harnessed at present, and a few days' rest was necessary. the departure was, therefore, put off for a week, until the th of november. the month of november in this latitude corresponds to the month of may in the northern zones. it was, therefore, the fine season. the sun was entering the tropic of capricorn, and gave the longest days in the year. the time was, therefore, very favourable for the projected expedition, which, if it did not accomplish its principal object, would at any rate be fruitful in discoveries, especially of natural productions, since harding proposed to explore those dense forests of the far west, which stretched to the extremity of the serpentine peninsula. during the nine days which preceded their departure, it was agreed that the work on prospect heights should be finished off. moreover, it was necessary for ayrton to return to the corral, where the domesticated animals required his care. it was decided that he should spend two days there, and return to granite house after having liberally supplied the stables. as he was about to start, harding asked him if he would not like one of them to accompany him, observing that the island was less safe than formerly. ayrton replied that this was unnecessary, as he was enough for the work, and that besides he apprehended no danger. if anything occurred at the corral, or in the neighbourhood, he could instantly warn the colonists by sending a telegram to granite house. ayrton departed at dawn on the th, taking the cart drawn by one onager, and two hours after, the electric wire announced that he had found all in order at the corral. during these two days harding busied himself in executing a project which would completely guard granite house against any surprise. it was necessary to completely conceal the opening of the old outlet, which was already walled up and partly hidden under grass and plants, at the southern angle of lake grant. nothing was easier, since if the level of the lake was raised two or three feet, the opening would be quite beneath it. now, to raise this level they had only to establish a dam at the two openings made by the lake, and by which were fed creek glycerine and falls river. the colonists worked with a will, and the two dams, which besides did not exceed eight feet in width by three in height, were rapidly erected by means of well-cemented blocks of stone. this work finished, it would have been impossible to guess that at that part of the lake, there existed a subterranean passage through which the overflow of the lake formerly escaped. of course the little stream which fed the reservoir of granite house and worked the lift had been carefully preserved, and the water could not fail. the lift once raised, this sure and comfortable retreat would be safe from any surprise. this work had been so quickly done, that pencroft, gideon spilett, and herbert found time to make an expedition to port balloon. the sailor was very anxious to know if the little creek in which the _bonadventure_ was moored, had been visited by the convicts. "these gentlemen," he observed, "landed on the south coast, and if they followed the shore, it is to be feared that they may have discovered the little harbour, and in that case, i wouldn't give half-a-dollar for our _bonadventure_." pencroft's apprehensions were not without foundation, and a visit to port balloon appeared to be very desirable. the sailor and his companions set off on the th of november, after dinner, well-armed. pencroft, ostentatiously slipping two bullets into each barrel of his rifle, shook his head in a way which betokened nothing good to any one who approached too near to him, whether "man or beast," as he said. gideon spilett and herbert also took their guns, and about three o'clock all three left granite house. neb accompanied them to the turn of the mercy, and after they had crossed, he raised the bridge. it was agreed that a gun-shot should announce the colonists' return, and that at the signal neb should return and re-establish the communication between the two banks of the river. the little band advanced directly along the road which led to the southern coast of the island. this was only a distance of three miles and a half, but gideon spilett and his companions took two hours to traverse it. they examined all the border of the road, the thick forest, as well as tabor marsh. they found no trace of the fugitives who, no doubt, not having yet discovered the number of the colonists, or the means of defence which they had at their disposal, had gained the less accessible parts of the island. arrived at port balloon, pencroft saw with extreme satisfaction that the _bonadventure_ was tranquilly floating in the narrow creek. however, port balloon was so well hidden amongst high rocks that it could scarcely be discovered either from the land or the sea. "come," said pencroft, "the blackguards have not been there yet. long grass suits reptiles best, and evidently we shall find them in the far west." "and it's very lucky, for if they had found the _bonadventure_," added herbert, "they would have gone off in her, and we should have been prevented from returning to tabor island." "indeed," remarked the reporter, "it will be important to take a document there which will make known the situation of lincoln island, and ayrton's new residence, in case the scotch yacht returns to fetch him." "well, the _bonadventure_ is always there, mr spilett," answered the sailor. "she and her crew are ready to start at a moment's notice!" "i think, pencroft, that that is a thing to be done after our exploration of the island is finished. it is possible after all that the stranger, if we manage to find him, may know as much about tabor island as about lincoln island. do not forget that he is certainly the author of the document, and he may, perhaps, know how far we may count on the return of the yacht!" "but!" exclaimed pencroft, "who in the world can he be? the fellow knows us and we know nothing about him! if he is a simple castaway, why should he conceal himself? we are honest men, i suppose, and the society of honest men isn't unpleasant to any one. did he come here voluntarily? can he leave the island if he likes? is he here still? will he remain any longer?" chatting thus, pencroft, gideon spilett, and herbert got on board and looked about the deck of the _bonadventure_. all at once, the sailor having examined the bitts to which the cable of the anchor was secured-- "hallo," he cried, "this is queer!" "what is the matter, pencroft?" asked the reporter. "the matter is, that it was not i who made this knot!" and pencroft showed a rope which fastened the cable to the bitt itself. "what, it was not you?" asked gideon spilett. "no! i can swear to it. this is a reef knot, and i always make a running bowline." "you must be mistaken, pencroft." "i am not mistaken!" declared the sailor. "my hand does it so naturally, and one's hand is never mistaken!" "then can the convicts have been on board?" asked herbert. "i know nothing about that," answered pencroft, "but what is certain, is that some one has weighed the _bonadventure's_ anchor and dropped it again! and look here, here is another proof! the cable of the anchor has been run out, and its service is no longer at the hawse-hole. i repeat that some one has been using our vessel!" "but if the convicts had used her, they would have pillaged her, or rather gone off with her." "gone off! where to--to tabor island?" replied pencroft. "do you think they would risk themselves in a boat of such small tonnage?" "we must, besides, be sure that they know of the islet," rejoined the reporter. "however that may be," said the sailor, "as sure as my name is bonadventure pencroft, of the vineyard, our _bonadventure_ has sailed without us!" the sailor was so positive that neither gideon spilett nor herbert could dispute his statement. it was evident that the vessel had been moved, more or less, since pencroft had brought her to port balloon. as to the sailor, he had not the slightest doubt that the anchor had been raised and then dropped again. now, what was the use of these two manoeuvres, unless the vessel had been employed in some expedition? "but how was it we did not see the _bonadventure_ pass in sight of the island?" observed the reporter, who was anxious to bring forward every possible objection. "why, mr spilett," replied the sailor, "they would only have to start in the night with a good breeze, and they would be out of sight of the island in two hours." "well," resumed gideon spilett, "i ask again, what object could the convicts have had in using the _bonadventure_, and why, after they had made use of her, should they have brought her back to port?" "why, mr spilett," replied the sailor, "we must put that among the unaccountable things, and not think anything more about it. the chief thing is that the _bonadventure_ was there, and she is there now. only, unfortunately, if the convicts take her a second time, we shall very likely not find her again in her place!" "then, pencroft," said herbert, "would it not be wisest to bring the _bonadventure_ off to granite house?" "yes and no," answered pencroft, "or rather no. the mouth of the mercy is a bad place for a vessel, and the sea is heavy there." "but by hauling her up on the sand, to the foot of the chimneys?" "perhaps yes," replied pencroft. "at any rate, since we must leave granite house for a long expedition, i think the _bonadventure_ will be safer here during our absence, and we shall do best to leave her here until the island is rid of these blackguards." "that is exactly my opinion," said the reporter. "at any rate in the event of bad weather, she will not be exposed here as she would be at the mouth of the mercy." "but suppose the convicts pay her another visit," said herbert. "well, my boy," replied pencroft, "not finding her here, they would not be long in finding her on the sands of granite house, and, during our absence, nothing could hinder them from seizing her! i agree, therefore, with mr spilett, that she must be left in port balloon. but, if on our return we have not rid the island of those rascals, it will be prudent to bring our boat to granite house, until the time when we need not fear any unpleasant visits." "that's settled. let us be off," said the reporter. pencroft, herbert, and gideon spilett, on their return to granite house, told the engineer all that had passed, and the latter approved of their arrangements both for the present and the future. he also promised the sailor that he would study that part of the channel situated between the islet and the coast; so as to ascertain if it would not be possible to make an artificial harbour there by means of dams. in this way, the _bonadventure_ would be always within reach, under the eyes of the colonists, and if necessary, under lock and key. that evening a telegram was sent to ayrton, requesting him to bring from the corral a couple of goats, which neb wished to acclimatise to the plateau. singularly enough, ayrton did not acknowledge the receipt of the despatch, as he was accustomed to do. this could not but astonish the engineer. but it might be that ayrton was not at that moment in the corral, or even that he was on his way back to granite house. in fact, two days had already passed since his departure, and it had been decided that on the evening of the th or at the latest the morning of the th, he should return. the colonists waited, therefore, for ayrton to appear on prospect heights. neb and herbert even watched at the bridge so as to be ready to lower it the moment their companion presented himself. but up to ten in the evening, there were no signs of ayrton. it was, therefore, judged best to send a fresh despatch, requiring an immediate reply. the bell of the telegraph at granite house remained mute. the colonists' uneasiness was great. what had happened? was ayrton no longer at the corral, or if he was still there, had he no longer control over his movements? could they go to the corral in this dark night? they consulted. some wished to go, the others to remain. "but," said herbert, "perhaps some accident had happened to the telegraphic apparatus, so that it works no longer?" "that may be," said the reporter. "wait till to-morrow," replied cyrus harding. "it is possible, indeed, that ayrton has not received our despatch, or even that we have not received his." they waited, of course not without some anxiety. at dawn of day, the th of november, harding again sent the electric current along the wire and received no reply. he tried again: the same result. "off to the corral," said he. "and well-armed!" added pencroft. it was immediately decided that granite house should not be left alone and that neb should remain there. after having accompanied his friends to creek glycerine, he raised the bridge; and waiting behind a tree he watched for the return of either his companions or ayrton. in the event of the pirates presenting themselves and attempting to force the passage, he was to endeavour to stop them by firing on them, and as a last resource he was to take refuge in granite house, where, the lift once raised, he would be in safety. cyrus harding, gideon spilett, herbert, and pencroft were to repair to the corral, and if they did not find ayrton, search the neighbouring woods. at six o'clock in the morning, the engineer and his three companions had passed creek glycerine, and neb posted himself behind a small mound crowned by several dragoniners on the left bank of the stream. the colonists, after leaving the plateau of prospect heights, immediately took the road to the corral. they shouldered their guns, ready to fire on the smallest hostile demonstration. the two rifles and the two guns had been loaded with ball. the wood was thick on each side of the road and might easily have concealed the convicts, who owing to their weapons would have been really formidable. the colonists walked rapidly and in silence. top preceded them, sometimes running on the road, sometimes taking a ramble into the wood, but always quiet and not appearing to fear anything unusual. and they could be sure that the faithful dog would not allow them to be surprised, but would bark at the least appearance of danger. cyrus harding and his companions followed beside the road the wire which connected the corral with granite house. after walking for nearly two miles, they had not as yet discovered any explanation of the difficulty. the posts were in good order, the wire regularly expended. however, at that moment the engineer observed that the wire appeared to be slack, and on arriving at post number , herbert, who was in advance stopped, exclaiming-- "the wire is broken!" his companions hurried forward and arrived at the spot where the lad was standing. the post was rooted up and lying across the path. the unexpected explanation of the difficulty was here, and it was evident that the despatches from granite house had not been received at the corral, nor those from the corral at granite house. "it wasn't the wind that blew down this post," observed pencroft. "no," replied gideon spilett. "the earth has been dug up round its foot, and it has been torn up by the hand of man." "besides, the wire is broken," added herbert, showing that the wire had been snapped. "is the fracture recent?" asked harding. "yes," answered herbert, "it has certainly been done quite lately." "to the corral! to the corral!" exclaimed the sailor. the colonists were now half way between granite house and the corral, having still two miles and a half to go. they pressed forward with redoubled speed. indeed, it was to be feared that some serious accident had occurred in the corral. no doubt, ayrton might have sent a telegram which had not arrived, but this was not the reason why his companions were so uneasy, for, a more unaccountable circumstance, ayrton, who had promised to return the evening before, had not reappeared. in short, it was not without a motive that all communication had been stopped between the corral and granite house, and who but the convicts could have any interest in interrupting this communication? the settlers hastened on, their hearts oppressed with anxiety. they were sincerely attached to their new companion. were they to find him struck down by the hands of those of whom he was formerly the leader? soon they arrived at the place where the road led along the side of a little stream which flowed from the red creek and watered the meadows of the corral. they then moderated their pace so that they should not be out of breath at the moment when a struggle might be necessary. their guns were in their hands ready cocked. the forest was watched on every side. top uttered sullen groans which were rather ominous. at last the palisade appeared through the trees. no trace of any damage could be seen. the gate was shut as usual. deep silence reigned in the corral. neither the accustomed bleating of the sheep nor ayrton's voice could be heard. "let us enter," said cyrus harding. and the engineer advanced, whilst his companions, keeping watch about twenty paces behind him, were ready to fire at a moment's notice. harding raised the inner latch of the gate and was about to push it back, when top barked loudly. a report sounded and was responded to by a cry of pain. herbert, struck by a bullet, lay stretched on the ground. chapter seven. the reporter and pencroft in the corral--herbert's wound--the sailor's despair--consultation between the reporter and the engineer--mode of treatment--hope not abandoned--how is neb to be warned--a sure and faithful messenger--neb's reply. at herbert's cry pencroft, letting his gun fall, rushed towards him. "they have killed him!" he cried. "my boy! they have killed him!" cyrus harding and gideon spilett ran to herbert. the reporter listened to ascertain if the poor lad's heart was still beating. "he lives," said he; "but he must be carried--" "to granite house? that is impossible!" replied the engineer. "into the corral, then!" said pencroft. "in a moment," said harding. and he ran round the left corner of the palisade. there he found a convict who, aiming at him, sent a ball through his hat. in a few seconds, before he had even time to fire his second barrel, he fell, struck to the heart by harding's dagger, more sure even than his gun. during this time, gideon spilett and the sailor hoisted themselves over the palisade, leapt into the enclosure, threw down the props which supported the inner door, ran into the empty house, and soon poor herbert was lying on ayrton's bed. in a few moments, harding was by his side. on seeing herbert senseless, the sailor's grief was terrible. he sobbed, he cried, he tried to beat his head against the wall. neither the engineer nor the reporter could calm him. they themselves were choked with emotion. they could not speak. however, they knew that it depended on them to rescue from death the poor boy who was suffering beneath their eyes. gideon spilett had not passed through the many incidents by which his life had been chequered without acquiring some slight knowledge of medicine. he knew a little of everything, and several times he had been obliged to attend to wounds produced either by a sword-bayonet or shot. assisted by cyrus harding, he proceeded to render the aid herbert required. the reporter was immediately struck by the complete stupor in which herbert lay, a stupor owing either to the haemorrhage, or to the shock, the ball having struck a bone with sufficient force to produce a violent concussion. herbert was deadly pale, and his pulse so feeble that spilett only felt it beat at long intervals, as if it was on the point of stopping. these symptoms were very serious. herbert's chest was laid bare, and the blood having been staunched with handkerchiefs, it was bathed with cold water. the contusion, or rather the contused wound appeared,--an oval below the chest between the third and fourth ribs. it was there that herbert had been hit by the bullet. cyrus harding and gideon spilett then turned the poor boy over; as they did so, he uttered a moan so feeble that they almost thought it was his last sigh. herbert's back was covered with blood from another contused wound, by which the ball had immediately escaped. "god be praised!" said the reporter, "the ball is not in the body, and we shall not have to extract it." "but the heart?" asked harding. "the heart has not been touched; if it had been, herbert would be dead!" "dead!" exclaimed pencroft, with a groan. the sailor had only heard the last words uttered by the reporter. "no, pencroft," replied cyrus harding, "no! he is not dead. his pulse still beats. he has even uttered a moan. but for your boy's sake, calm yourself. we have need of all our self-possession. do not make us lose it, my friend." pencroft was silent, but a reaction set in, and great tears rolled down his cheeks. in the meanwhile, gideon spilett endeavoured to collect his ideas, and proceed methodically. after his examination he had no doubt that the ball, entering in front, between the seventh and eighth ribs, had issued behind between the third and fourth. but what mischief had the ball committed in its passage? what important organs had been reached? a professional surgeon would have had difficulty in determining this at once, and still more so the reporter. however, he knew one thing, this was that he would have to prevent the inflammatory strangulation of the injured parts, then to contend with the local inflammation and fever which would result from the wound, perhaps mortal! now, what stiptics, what antiphlogistics ought to be employed? by what means could inflammation be prevented? at any rate, the most important thing was that the two wounds should be dressed without delay. it did not appear necessary to gideon spilett that a fresh flow of blood should be caused by bathing them in tepid water, and compressing their lips. the haemorrhage had been very abundant, and herbert was already too much enfeebled by the loss of blood. the reporter, therefore, thought it best to simply bathe the two wounds with cold water. herbert was placed on his left side, and was maintained in that position. "he must not be moved," said gideon spilett. "he is in the most favourable position for the wounds in his back and chest to suppurate easily, and absolute rest is necessary." "what! can't we carry him to granite house?" asked pencroft. "no, pencroft," replied the reporter. "i'll pay the villains off!" cried the sailor, shaking his fist in a menacing manner. "pencroft!" said cyrus harding. gideon spilett had resumed his examination of the wounded boy. herbert was still so frightfully pale that the reporter felt anxious. "cyrus," said he, "i am not a surgeon. i am in terrible perplexity. you must aid me with your advice, your experience!" "take courage, my friend," answered the engineer, pressing the reporter's hand. "judge coolly. think only of this: herbert must be saved!" these words restored to gideon spilett that self-possession which he had lost in a moment of discouragement on feeling his great responsibility. he seated himself close to the bed. cyrus harding stood near. pencroft had torn up his shirt, and was mechanically making lint. spilett then explained to cyrus harding that he thought he ought first of all to stop the haemorrhage, but not close the two wounds, or cause their immediate cicatrisation, for there had been internal perforation, and the suppuration must not be allowed to accumulate in the chest. harding approved entirely, and it was decided that the two wounds should be dressed without attempting to close them by immediate coaptation. and now, did the colonists possess an efficacious agent to act against the inflammation which might occur? yes. they had one, for nature had generously lavished it. they had cold water, that is to say, the most powerful sedative that can be employed against inflammation of wounds, the most efficacious therapeutic agent in grave cases, and the one which is now adopted by all physicians. cold water has, moreover, the advantage of leaving the wound in absolute rest, and preserving it from all premature dressing, a considerable advantage, since it has been found by experience that contact with the air is dangerous during the first days. gideon spilett and cyrus harding reasoned thus with their simple good sense, and they acted as the best surgeon would have done. compresses of linen were applied to poor herbert's two wounds, and were kept constantly wet with cold water. the sailor had at first lighted a fire in the hut, which was not wanting in things necessary for life. maple sugar, medicinal plants, the same which the lad had gathered on the banks of lake grant, enabled them to make some refreshing drinks, which they gave him without his taking any notice of it. his fever was extremely high, and all that day and night passed without his becoming conscious. herbert's life hung on a thread, and this thread might break at any moment. the next day, the th of november, the hopes of harding and his companions slightly revived. herbert had come out of his long stupor. he opened his eyes, he recognised cyrus harding, the reporter, and pencroft. he uttered two or three words. he did not know what had happened. they told him, and spilett begged him to remain perfectly still, telling him that his life was not in danger, and that his wounds would heal in a few days. however, herbert scarcely suffered at all, and the cold water with which they were constantly bathed, prevented any inflammation of the wounds. the suppuration was established in a regular way, the fever did not increase, and it might now be hoped that this terrible wound would not involve any catastrophe. pencroft felt the swelling of his heart gradually subside. he was like a sister of mercy, like a mother by the bed of her child. herbert dozed again, but his sleep appeared more natural. "tell me again that you hope, mr spilett," said pencroft. "tell me again that you will save herbert!" "yes, we will save him!" replied the reporter. "the wound is serious, and, perhaps, even the ball has traversed the lungs, but the perforation of this organ is not fatal." "god bless you!" answered pencroft. as may be believed, during the four-and-twenty hours they had been in the corral, the colonists had no other thought than that of nursing herbert. they did not think either of the danger which threatened them should the convicts return, or of the precautions to be taken for the future. but on this day, whilst pencroft watched by the sick-bed, cyrus harding and the reporter consulted as to what it would be best to do. first of all they examined the corral. there was not a trace of ayrton. had the unhappy man been dragged away by his former accomplices? had he resisted, and been overcome in the struggle? this last supposition was only too probable. gideon spilett, at the moment he scaled the palisade, had clearly seen some one of the convicts running along the southern spur of mount franklin, towards whom top had sprung. it was one of those whose object had been so completely defeated by the rocks at the mouth of the mercy. besides, the one killed by harding, and whose body was found outside the enclosure, of course belonged to bob harvey's crew. as to the corral, it had not suffered any damage. the gates were closed, and the animals had not been able to disperse in the forest. nor could they see traces of any struggle, any devastation, either in the hut, or in the palisade. the ammunition only, with which ayrton had been supplied, had disappeared with him. "the unhappy man has been surprised," said harding, "and as he was a man to defend himself, he must have been overpowered." "yes, that is to be feared!" said the reporter. "then, doubtless, the convicts installed themselves in the corral where they found plenty of everything, and only fled when they saw us coming. it is very evident, too, that at this moment ayrton, whether living or dead, is not here!" "we shall have to beat the forest," said the engineer, "and rid the island of these wretches. pencroft's presentiments were not mistaken, when he wished to hunt them as wild beasts. that would have spared us all these misfortunes!" "yes," answered the reporter, "but now we have the right to be merciless!" "at any rate," said the engineer, "we are obliged to wait some time, and to remain at the corral until we can carry herbert without danger to granite house." "but neb?" asked the reporter. "neb is in safety." "but if, uneasy at our absence, he would venture to come?" "he must not come!" returned cyrus harding quickly. "he would be murdered on the road!" "it is very probable, however, that he will attempt to rejoin us!" "ah, if the telegraph still acted, he might be warned! but that is impossible now! as to leaving pencroft and herbert here alone, we could not do it! well, i will go alone to granite house." "no, no! cyrus," answered the reporter, "you must not expose yourself! your courage would be of no avail. the villains are evidently watching the corral, they are hidden in the thick woods which surround it, and if you go we shall soon have to regret two misfortunes instead of one!" "but neb?" repeated the engineer. "it is now four-and-twenty hours since he has had any news of us! he will be sure to come!" "and as he will be less on his guard than we should be ourselves," added spilett, "he will be killed!" "is there really no way of warning him?" whilst the engineer thought, his eyes fell on top, who, going backwards and forwards, seemed to say-- "am not i here?" "top!" exclaimed cyrus harding. the animal sprang at his master's call. "yes, top will go," said the reporter, who had understood the engineer. "top can go where we cannot! he will carry to granite house the news of the corral, and he will bring back to us that from granite house!" "quick!" said harding. "quick!" spilett rapidly tore a leaf from his notebook, and wrote these words:-- "herbert wounded. we are at the corral. be on your guard. do not leave granite house. have the convicts appeared in the neighbourhood? reply by top." this laconic note contained all that neb ought to know, and at the same time asked all the colonists wished to know. it was folded and fastened to top's collar in a conspicuous position. "top, my dog," said the engineer, caressing the animal, "neb, top! neb! go, go!" top bounded at these words. he understood, he knew what was expected of him. the road to the corral was familiar to him. in less than an hour he could clear it, and it might be hoped that where neither cyrus harding nor the reporter could have ventured without danger, top, running amongst the grass or in the wood, would pass unperceived. the engineer went to the gate of the corral and opened it. "neb, top! neb!" repeated the engineer, again pointing in the direction of granite house. top sprang forwards, and almost immediately disappeared. "he will get there!" said the reporter. "yes, and he will come back, the faithful animal!" "what o'clock is it?" asked gideon spilett. "ten." "in an hour he may be here. we will watch for his return." the gate of the corral was closed. the engineer and the reporter re-entered the house. herbert was still in a sleep. pencroft kept the compresser always wet. spilett, seeing there was nothing he could do at that moment, busied himself in preparing some nourishment, whilst attentively watching that part of the enclosure against the hill, at which an attack might be expected. the settlers awaited top's return with much anxiety. a little before eleven o'clock, cyrus harding and the reporter, rifle in hand, were behind the gate, ready to open it at the first bark of their dog. they did not doubt that if top had arrived safely at granite house, neb would have sent him back immediately. they had both been there for about ten minutes, when a report was heard, followed by repeated barks. the engineer opened the gate, and seeing smoke a hundred feet off in the wood, he fired in that direction. almost immediately top bounded into the corral, and the gate was quickly shut. "top, top!" exclaimed the engineer, taking the dog's great honest head between his hands. a note was fastened to his neck, and cyrus harding read these words, traced in neb's large writing:-- "no pirates in the neighbourhood of granite house. i will not stir. poor mr herbert!" chapter eight. the convicts in the neighbourhood of the corral--provisional establishment--continuation of the treatment of herbert--pencroft's first rejoicings--conversation on past events--what the future has in reserve--cyrus harding's ideas on this subject. so the convicts were still there, watching the corral, and determined to kill the settlers one after the other. there was nothing to be done but to treat them as wild beasts. but great precautions must be taken, for just now the wretches had the advantage on their side, seeing, and not being seen, being able to surprise by the suddenness of their attack, yet not to be surprised themselves. harding made arrangements, therefore, for living in the corral, of which the provisions would last for a tolerable length of time. ayrton's house had been provided with all that was necessary for existence, and the convicts, scared by the arrival of the settlers, had not had time to pillage it. it was probable, as gideon spilett observed, that things had occurred as follows:--the six convicts, disembarking on the island, had followed the southern shore, and after having traversed the double shore of the serpentine peninsula, not being inclined to venture into the far west woods, they had reached the mouth of falls river. from this point, by following the right bank of the watercourse, they would arrive at the spurs of mount franklin, among which they would naturally seek a retreat, and they could not have been long in discovering the corral, then uninhabited. there they had regularly installed themselves, awaiting the moment to put their abominable schemes into execution. ayrton's arrival had surprised them, but they had managed to overpower the unfortunate man, and--the rest may be easily imagined! now, the convicts,--reduced to five, it is true, but well-armed,--were roaming the woods, and to venture there was to expose themselves to their attacks, which could be neither guarded against nor prevented. "wait! there is nothing else to be done!" repeated cyrus harding. "when herbert is cured, we can organise a general battue of the island, and have satisfaction of these convicts. that will be the object of our grand expedition at the same time--" "as the search for our mysterious protector," added gideon spilett, finishing the engineer's sentence. "ah, it must be acknowledged, my dear cyrus, that this time his protection was wanting at the very moment when it was most necessary to us!" "who knows?" replied the engineer. "what do you mean?" asked the reporter. "that we are not at the end of our trouble yet, my dear spilett, and that his powerful invention may, perhaps, have another opportunity of exercising itself. but that is not the question now. herbert's life before everything." this was the colonists' saddest thought. several days passed, and the poor boy's state was happily no worse. cold water, always kept at a suitable temperature, had completely prevented the inflammation of the wounds. it even seemed to the reporter that this water, being slightly sulphurous,--which was explained by the neighbourhood of the volcano,-- had a more direct action on the healing. the suppuration was much less abundant, and--thanks to the incessant care by which he was surrounded!--herbert returned to life, and his fever abated. he was besides subjected to a severe diet, and consequently his weakness was and would be extreme; but there was no want of refreshing drinks, and absolute rest was of the greatest benefit to him. cyrus harding, gideon spilett, and pencroft had become very skilful in dressing the lad's wounds. all the linen in the house had been sacrificed. herbert's wounds, covered with compresses and lint, were pressed neither too much nor too little, so as to cause their cicatrisation without determining on inflammatory reaction. the reporter used extreme care in the dressing, knowing well the importance of it, and repeating to his companions that which most surgeons willingly admit, that it is perhaps rarer to see a dressing well done than an operation well performed. in ten days, on the nd of november, herbert was considerably better. he had begun to take some nourishment. the colour was returning to his cheeks, and his bright eyes smiled at his nurses. he talked a little, notwithstanding pencraft's efforts, who talked incessantly to prevent him from beginning to speak, and told him the most improbable stories. herbert had questioned him on the subject of ayrton, whom he was astonished not to see near him, thinking that he was at the corral. but the sailor, not wishing to distress herbert, contented himself by replying that ayrton had rejoined neb, so as to defend granite house. "humph!" said pencroft, "these pirates! they are gentlemen who have no right to any consideration! and the captain wanted to win them by kindness! i'll send them some kindness, but in the shape of a good bullet!" "and have they not been seen again?" asked herbert. "no, my boy," answered the sailor, "but we shall find them, and when you are cured we shall see if the cowards, who strike us from behind, will dare to meet us face to face!" "i am still very weak, my poor pencroft!" "well! your strength will return gradually! what's a ball through the chest? nothing but a joke! i've seen many, and i don't think much of them!" at last things appeared to be going on well, and if no complication occurred, herbert's recovery might be regarded as certain. but what would have been the condition of the colonists if his state had been aggravated,--if, for example, the ball had remained in his body, if his arm or his leg had had to be amputated? "no," said spilett more than once, "i have never thought of such a contingency without shuddering!" "and yet, if it had been necessary to operate," said harding one day to him, "you would not have hesitated?" "no, cyrus!" said gideon spilett, "but thank god that we have been spared this complication!" as in so many other conjectures, the colonists had appealed to the logic of that simple good sense of which they had made use so often, and once more, thanks to their general knowledge, it had succeeded! but might not a time come when all their science would be at fault? they were alone on the island. now, men in all states of society are necessary to each other. cyrus harding knew this well, and sometimes he asked himself if some circumstance might not occur which they would be powerless to surmount. it appeared to him besides, that he and his companions, till then so fortunate, had entered into an unlucky period. during the three years and a half which had elapsed since their escape from richmond, it might be said that they had had everything their own way. the island had abundantly supplied them with minerals, vegetables, animals, and as nature had constantly loaded them, their science had known how to take advantage of what she offered them. the well-being of the colony was therefore complete. moreover, in certain occurrences an inexplicable influence had come to their aid! ... but all that could only be for a time. in short, cyrus harding believed that fortune had turned against them. in fact, the convicts' ship had appeared in the waters of the island, and if the pirates had been, so to speak, miraculously destroyed, six of them, at least, had escaped the catastrophe. they had disembarked on the island, and it was almost impossible to get at the five who survived. ayrton had no doubt been murdered by these wretches, who possessed fire-arms, and at the first use that they had made of them, herbert had fallen, wounded almost mortally. were these the first blows aimed by adverse fortune at the colonists? this was often asked by harding. this was often repeated by the reporter; and it appeared to him also that the intervention, so strange, yet so efficacious, which till then had served them so well, had now failed them. had this mysterious being, whatever he was, whose existence could not be denied, abandoned the island? had he in his turn succumbed? no reply was possible to these questions. but it must not be imagined that because harding and his companion spoke of these things, they were men to despair. far from that. they looked their situation in the face, they analysed the chances, they prepared themselves for any event, they stood firm and straight before the future, and if adversity was at last to strike them, it would find in them men prepared to struggle against it. chapter nine. no news of neb--a proposal from pencroft and the reporter, which is not accepted--several sorties by gideon spilett--a rag of cloth--a message-- hasty departure--arrival on the plateau of prospect heights. the convalescence of the young invalid was regularly progressing. one thing only was now to be desired, that his state would allow him to be brought to granite house. however well built and supplied the corral house was, it could not be so comfortable as the healthy granite dwelling. besides, it did not offer the same security, and its tenants, notwithstanding their watchfulness, were here always in fear of some shot from the convicts. there, on the contrary, in the middle of that impregnable and inaccessible cliff, they would have nothing to fear, and any attack on their persons would certainly fail. they therefore waited impatiently for the moment when herbert might be moved without danger from his wound, and they were determined to make this move, although the communication through jacamar wood was very difficult. they had no news from neb, but were not uneasy on that account. the courageous negro, well intrenched in the depths of granite house, would not allow himself to be surprised. top had not been sent again to him, as it appeared useless to expose the faithful dog to some shot which might deprive the settlers of their most useful auxiliary. they waited, therefore, although they were anxious to be reunited at granite house. it pained the engineer to see his forces divided, for it gave great advantage to the pirates. since ayrton's disappearance they were only four against five, for herbert could not yet be counted, and this was not the least care of the brave boy, who well understood the trouble of which he was the cause. the question of knowing how, in their condition, they were to act against the pirates, was thoroughly discussed on the th of november by cyrus harding, gideon spilett, and pencroft, at a moment when herbert was asleep and could not hear them. "my friends," said the reporter, after they had talked of neb and of the impossibility of communicating with him, "i think, like you, that to venture on the road to the corral would be to risk receiving a gun-shot without being able to return it. but do you not think that the best thing to be done now is to openly give chase to these wretches?" "that is just what i was thinking," answered pencroft. "i believe we're not fellows to be afraid of a bullet, and as for me, if captain harding approves, i'm ready to dash into the forest! why, hang it, one man is equal to another!" "but is he equal to five?" asked the engineer. "i will join pencroft," said the reporter, "and both of us, well-armed and accompanied by top--" "my dear spilett, and you, pencroft," answered harding, "let us reason coolly. if the convicts were hid in one spot of the island, if we knew that spot, and had only to dislodge them, i would undertake a direct attack; but is there not occasion to fear, on the contrary, that they are sure to fire the first shot." "well, captain," cried pencroft, "a bullet does not always reach its mark." "that which struck herbert did not miss, pencroft," replied the engineer. "besides, observe that if both of you left the corral i should remain here alone to defend it. do you imagine that the convicts will not see you leave it, that they will not allow you to enter the forest, and that they will not attack it during your absence, knowing that there is no one here but a wounded boy and a man?" "you are right, captain," replied pencroft, his chest swelling with sullen anger. "you are right; they will do all they can to retake the corral, which they know to be well stored; and alone you could not hold it against them." "oh, if we were only at granite house!" "if we were at granite house," answered the engineer, "the case would be very different. there i should not be afraid to leave herbert with one, whilst the other three went to search the forests of the island. but we are at the corral, and it is best to stay here until we can leave it together." cyrus harding's reasoning was unanswerable, and his companions understood it well. "if only ayrton was still one of us!" said gideon spilett. "poor fellow! his return to social life will have been but of short duration." "if he is dead," added pencroft, in a peculiar tone. "do you hope, then, pencroft, that the villains have spared him?" asked gideon spilett. "yes, if they had any interest in doing so." "what! you suppose that ayrton, finding his old companions, forgetting all that he owes us--" "who knows?" answered the sailor, who did not hazard this shameful supposition without hesitating. "pencroft," said harding, taking the sailor's arm, "that is a wicked idea of yours, and you will distress me much if you persist in speaking thus. i will answer for ayrton's fidelity." "and i also," added the reporter quickly. "yes, yes, captain, i was wrong," replied pencroft; "it was a wicked idea indeed that i had, and nothing justifies it. but what can i do? i'm not in my senses. this imprisonment in the corral wearies me horribly, and i have never felt so excited as i do now." "be patient, pencroft," replied the engineer. "how long will it be, my dear spilett, before you think herbert may be carried to granite house?" "that is difficult to say, cyrus," answered the reporter, "for any imprudence might involve terrible consequences. but his convalescence is progressing, and if he continues to gain strength, in eight days from now--well, we shall see." eight days! that would put off the return to granite house until the first days of december. at this time two months of spring had already passed. the weather was fine, and the heat began to be great. the forests of the island were in full leaf, and the time was approaching when the usual crops ought to be gathered. the return to the plateau of prospect heights would, therefore, be followed by extensive agricultural labours, interrupted only by the projected expedition through the island. it can, therefore, be well understood how injurious this seclusion in the corral must be to the colonists. but if they were compelled to bow before necessity, they did not do so without impatience. once or twice the reporter ventured out into the road and made the tour of the palisade. top accompanied him, and gideon spilett, his gun cocked, was ready for any emergency. he met with no misadventure and found no suspicious traces. his dog would have warned him of any danger, and, as top did not bark, it might be concluded that there was nothing to fear at that moment at least, and that the convicts were occupied in another part of the island. however, on his second sortie, on the th of november, gideon spilett, who had ventured a quarter of a mile into the wood, towards the south of the mountains, remarked that top scented something. the dog had no longer his unconcerned manner; he went backwards and forwards, ferreting amongst the grass and bushes as if his smell had revealed some suspicious object to him. gideon spilett followed top, encouraged him, excited him by his voice, whilst keeping a sharp look-out, his gun ready to fire, and sheltering himself behind the trees. it was not probable that top scented the presence of man, for in that case, he would have announced it by half-uttered, sullen, angry barks. now, as he did not growl, it was because danger was neither near nor approaching. nearly five minutes passed thus, top rummaging, the reporter following him prudently, when, all at once, the dog rushed towards a thick bush, and drew out a rag. it was a piece of cloth, stained and torn, which spilett immediately brought back to the corral. there it was examined by the colonists, who found that it was a fragment of ayrton's waistcoat, a piece of that felt, manufactured solely by the granite house factory. "you see, pencroft," observed harding, "there has been resistance on the part of the unfortunate ayrton. the convicts have dragged him away in spite of himself! do you still doubt his honesty?" "no, captain," answered the sailor, "and i repented of my suspicion a long time ago! but it seems to me that something may be learned from the incident." "what is that?" asked the reporter. "it is that ayrton was not killed at the corral! that they dragged him away living, since he has resisted. therefore, perhaps, he is still living!" "perhaps, indeed," replied the engineer, who remained thoughtful. this was a hope, to which ayrton's companions could still hold. indeed, they had before believed that, surprised in the corral, ayrton had fallen by a bullet, as herbert had fallen. but if the convicts had not killed him at first, if they had brought him living to another part of the island, might it not be admitted that he was still their prisoner? perhaps, even, one of them had found in ayrton his old australian companion ben joyce, the chief of the escaped convicts. and who knows but that they had conceived the impossible hope of bringing back ayrton to themselves? he would have been very useful to them, if they had been able to make him turn traitor! this incident was, therefore, favourably interpreted at the corral, and it no longer appeared impossible that they should find ayrton again. on his side, if he was only a prisoner, ayrton would no doubt do all he could to escape from the hands of the villains, and this would be a powerful aid to the settlers! "at any rate," observed gideon spilett, "if happily ayrton did manage to escape, he would go directly to granite house, for he could not know of the attempt of assassination of which herbert has been a victim, and consequently would never think of our being imprisoned in the corral!" "oh! i wish that he was there, at granite house!" cried pencroft, "and that we were there, too! for, although the rascals can do nothing to our house, they may plunder the plateau, our plantations, our poultry-yard!" pencroft had become a thorough farmer, heartily attached to his crops. but it must be said that herbert was more anxious than any to return to granite house, for he knew how much the presence of the settlers was needed there. and it was he who was keeping them at the corral! therefore, one idea occupied his mind--to leave the corral, and when! he believed he could bear removal to granite house. he was sure his strength would return more quickly in his room, with the air and sight of the sea! several times he pressed gideon spilett, but the latter, fearing, with good reason, that herbert's wounds, half healed, might reopen on the way, did not give the order to start. however, something occurred which compelled cyrus harding and his two friends to yield to the lad's wish, and god alone knew that this determination might cause them grief and remorse. it was the th of november, seven o'clock in the evening. the three settlers were talking in herbert's room, when they heard top utter quick barks. harding, pencroft, and spilett seized their guns and ran out of the house. top, at the foot of the palisade, was jumping, barking, but it was with pleasure, not anger. "some one is coming." "yes." "it is not an enemy!" "neb, perhaps?" "or ayrton?" these words had hardly been exchanged between the engineer and his two companions when a body leapt over the palisade and fell on the ground inside the corral. it was tup, master jup in person, to whom top immediately gave a most cordial reception. "jup!" exclaimed pencroft. "neb has sent him to us," said the reporter. "then," replied the engineer, "he must have some note on him." pencroft rushed up to the orang. certainly if neb had any important matter to communicate to his master he could not employ a more sure or more rapid messenger, who could pass where neither the colonists could, nor even top himself. cyrus harding was not mistaken. at jup's neck hung a small bag, and in this bag was found a little note traced by neb's hand. the despair of harding and his companions may be imagined when they read these words:-- "friday, six o'clock in the morning. "plateau invaded by convicts. "neb." they gazed at each other without uttering a word, then they re-entered the house. what were they to do? the convicts on prospect heights! that was disaster, devastation, ruin. herbert, on seeing the engineer, the reporter, and pencroft re-enter, guessed that their situation was aggravated, and when he saw jup, he no longer doubted that some misfortune menaced granite house. "captain harding," said he, "i must go; i can bear the journey. i must go." gideon spilett approached herbert; then, having looked at him-- "let us go, then!" said he. the question was quickly decided whether herbert should be carried on a litter or in the cart which had brought ayrton to the corral. the motion of the litter would have been more easy for the wounded lad, but it would have necessitated two bearers, that is to say, there would have been two guns less for defence if an attack was made on the road. would they not, on the contrary, by employing the cart leave every arm free? was it impossible to place the mattress on which herbert was lying in it, and to advance with so much care than any jolt should be avoided? it could be done. the cart was brought. pencroft harnessed the onaga. cyrus harding and the reporter raised herbert's mattress and placed it on the bottom of the cart. the weather was fine. the sun's bright rays glanced through the trees. "are the guns ready?" asked cyrus harding. they were. the engineer and pencroft, each armed with a double-barrelled gun, and gideon spilett carrying his rifle, had nothing to do but start. "are you comfortable, herbert?" asked the engineer. "ah, captain," replied the lad, "don't be uneasy, i shall not die on the road!" whilst speaking thus, it could be seen that the poor boy had called up all his energy, and by the energy of a powerful will had collected his failing strength. the engineer felt his heart sink painfully. he still hesitated to give the signal for departure; but that would have driven herbert to despair--killed him perhaps. "forward!" said harding. the gate of the corral was opened. jup and top, who knew when to be silent, ran in advance. the cart came out, the gate was reclosed, and the onaga, led by pencroft, advanced at a slow pace. certainly, it would have been safer to have taken a different road than that which led straight from the corral to granite house, but the cart would have met with great difficulties in moving under the trees. it was necessary, therefore, to follow this way, although it was well-known to the convicts. cyrus harding and gideon spilett walked one on each side of the cart, ready to answer to any attack. however, it was not probable that the convicts would have yet left the plateau of prospect heights. neb's note had evidently been written and sent as soon as the convicts had shown themselves there. now, this note was dated six o'clock in the morning, and the active orang, accustomed to come frequently to the corral, had taken scarcely three quarters of an hour to cross the five miles which separated it from granite house. they would, therefore, be safe at that time, and if there was any occasion for firing, it would probably not be until they were in the neighbourhood of granite house. however, the colonists kept a strict watch. top and jup, the latter armed with his club, sometimes in front, sometimes beating the wood at the sides of the road, signalised no danger. the cart advanced slowly under pencroft's guidance. it had left the corral at half-past seven. an hour after four out of the five miles had been cleared, without any incident having occurred. the road was as deserted as all that part of the jacamar wood which lay between the mercy and the lake. there was no occasion for any warning. the wood appeared as deserted as on the day when the colonists first landed on the island. they approached the plateau. another mile and they would see the bridge over creek glycerine. cyrus harding expected to find it in its place; supposing that the convicts; would have crossed it, and that, after having passed one of the streams which enclosed the plateau, they would have taken the precaution to lower it again, so as to keep open a retreat. at length an opening in the trees allowed the sea-horizon to be seen. but the cart continued its progress, for not one of its defenders thought of abandoning it. at that moment pencroft stopped the onaga, and in a hoarse voice-- "oh! the villains!" he exclaimed. and he pointed to a thick smoke rising from the mill, the sheds, and the buildings at the poultry-yard. a man was moving about in the midst of the smoke. it was neb. his companions uttered a shout. he heard, and ran to meet them. the convicts had left the plateau nearly half-an-hour before, having devastated it! "and mr herbert?" asked neb. gideon spilett returned to the cart. herbert had lost consciousness! chapter ten. herbert carried to granite house--neb relates all that has happened-- harding's visit to the plateau--ruin and devastation--the colonists baffled by herbert's illness--willow bark--a deadly fever--top barks again! of the convicts, the dangers which menaced granite house, the ruins with which the plateau was covered, the colonists thought no longer. herbert's critical state outweighed all other considerations. would the removal prove fatal to him by causing some internal injury? the reporter could not affirm it, but he and his companions almost despaired of the result. the cart was brought to the bend of the river. there some branches, disposed as a litter, received the mattress on which lay the unconscious herbert. ten minutes after, cyrus harding, spilett, and pencroft were at the foot of the cliff, leaving neb to take the cart onto the plateau of prospect heights. the lift was put in motion, and herbert was soon stretched on his bed in granite house. what cares were lavished on him to bring him back to life! he smiled for a moment on finding himself in his room, but could scarcely even murmur a few words, so great was his weakness. gideon spilett examined his wounds. he feared to find them reopened, having been imperfectly healed. there was nothing of the sort. from whence, then, came this prostration? why was herbert so much worse? the lad then fell into a kind of feverish sleep, and the reporter and pencroft remained near the bed. during this time, harding told neb all that had happened at the corral, and neb recounted to his master the events of which the plateau had just been the theatre. it was only during the preceding night that the convicts had appeared on the edge of the forest, at the approaches to creek glycerine. neb, who was watching near the poultry-yard, had not hesitated to fire at one of the pirates, who was about to cross the stream; but in the darkness he could not tell whether the man had been hit or not. at any rate, it was not enough to frighten away the band, and neb had only just time to get up to granite house, where at least he was in safety. but what was he to do there? how prevent the devastations with which the convicts threatened the plateau? had neb any means by which to warn his master? and, besides, in what situation were the inhabitants of the corral themselves? cyrus harding and his companions had left on the th of november, and it was now the th. it was, therefore, nineteen days since neb had had other news than that brought by top--disastrous news: ayrton disappeared, herbert severely wounded, the engineer, reporter, and sailor, as it were, imprisoned in the corral! what was he to do? asked poor neb. personally he had nothing to fear, for the convicts could not reach him in granite house. but the buildings, the plantations, all their arrangements at the mercy of the pirates! would it not be best to let cyrus harding judge of what he ought to do, and to warn him, at least, of the danger which threatened him? neb then thought of employing jup, and confiding a note to him. he knew the orang's great intelligence, which had been often put to the proof. jup understood the word corral, which had been frequently pronounced before him, and it may be remembered, too, that he had often driven the cart thither in company with pencroft. day had not yet dawned. the active orang would know how to pass unperceived through the woods, of which the convicts, besides, would think he was a native. neb did not hesitate. he wrote the note, he tied it to jup's neck, he brought the ape to the door of granite house, from which he let down a long cord to the ground; then, several times, he repeated these words-- "jup, jup! corral, corral!" the creature understood, seized the cord, glided rapidly down to the beach, and disappeared in the darkness without the convicts' attention having been in the least excited. "you did well, neb," said harding; "but perhaps in not warning us you would have done still better!" and, in speaking thus, cyrus harding thought of herbert, whose recovery the removal had so seriously checked. neb ended his account. the convicts had not appeared at all on the beach. not knowing the number of the island's inhabitants, they might suppose that granite house was defended by a large party. they must have remembered that during the attack by the brig numerous shot had been fired both from the lower and upper rocks, and no doubt they did not wish to expose themselves. but the plateau of prospect heights was open to them, and not covered by the fire of granite house. they gave themselves up, therefore, to their instinct of destruction,--plundering, burning, devastating everything,--and only retiring half an hour before the arrival of the colonists, whom they believed still confined in the corral. on their retreat, neb hurried out. he climbed the plateau at the risk of being perceived and fired at, tried to extinguish the fire which was consuming the buildings of the poultry-yard, and had struggled, though in vain, against it until the cart appeared at the edge of the wood. such had been these serious events. the presence of the convicts constituted a permanent source of danger to the settlers in lincoln island, until then so happy, and who might now expect still greater misfortunes. spilett remained in granite house with herbert and pencroft, while cyrus harding, accompanied by neb, proceeded to judge for himself of the extent of the disaster. it was fortunate that the convicts had not advanced to the foot of granite house. the workshop at the chimneys would in that case not have escaped destruction. but after all, this evil would have been more easily reparable than the ruins accumulated on the plateau of prospect heights. harding and neb proceeded towards the mercy, and ascended its left bank without meeting with any trace of the convicts; nor on the other side of the river, in the depths of the wood, could they perceive any suspicious indications. besides, it might be supposed that in all probability either the convicts knew of the return of the settlers to granite house, by having seen them pass on the road from the corral, or, after the devastation of the plateau, they had penetrated into jacamar wood, following the course of the mercy, and were thus ignorant of their return. in the former case, they must have returned towards the corral, now without defenders, and which contained valuable stores. in the latter, they must have regained their encampment, and would wait an opportunity to recommence the attack. it was, therefore, possible to prevent them, but any enterprise to clear the island was now rendered difficult by reason of herbert's condition. indeed, their whole force would have been barely sufficient to cope with the convicts, and just now no one could leave granite house. the engineer and neb arrived on the plateau. desolation reigned everywhere. the fields had been trampled over; the ears of wheat, which were nearly full grown, lay on the ground. the other plantations had not suffered less. the kitchen-garden was destroyed. happily, granite house possessed a store of seed which would enable them to repair these misfortunes. as to the wall and buildings of the poultry-yard and the onagas' stable, the fire had destroyed all. a few terrified creatures roamed over the plateau. the birds, which during the fire had taken refuge on the waters of the lake, had already returned to their accustomed spot, and were dabbling on the banks. everything would have to be reconstructed. cyrus harding's face, which was paler than usual, expressed an internal anger which he commanded with difficulty, but he did not utter a word. once more he looked at his devastated fields, and at the smoke which still rose from the ruins, then he returned to granite house. the following days were the saddest of any that the colonists had passed on the island! herbert's weakness visibly increased. it appeared that a more serious malady, the consequence of the profound physiological disturbance he had gone through, threatened to declare itself, and gideon spilett feared such an aggravation of his condition that he would be powerless to fight against it! in fact, herbert remained in an almost continuous state of drowsiness, and symptoms of delirium began to manifest themselves. refreshing drinks were the only remedies at the colonists' disposal. the fever was not as yet very high, but it soon appeared that it would probably recur at regular intervals. gideon spilett first recognised this on the th of december. the poor boy, whose fingers, nose, and ears had become extremely pale, was at first seized with slight shiverings, horripilations, and tremblings. his pulse was weak and irregular, his skin dry, his thirst intense. to this soon succeeded a hot fit; his face became flushed; his skin reddened; his pulse quick; then a profuse perspiration broke out, after which the fever seemed to diminish. the attack had lasted nearly five hours. gideon spilett had not left herbert, who, it was only too certain was now seized by an intermittent fever, and this fever must, be cured at any cost before it should assume a more serious aspect. "and in order to cure it," said spilett to cyrus harding, "we need a febrifuge." "a febrifuge," answered the engineer. "we have neither peruvian bark, nor sulphate of quinine?" "no," said gideon spilett, "but there are willows on the border of the lake, and the bark of the willow might, perhaps, prove to be a substitute for quinine." "let us try it without losing a moment," replied cyrus harding. the bark of the willow has, indeed, been justly considered as a succedaneum for peruvian bark, as has also that of the horse-chestnut-tree, the leaf of the holly, the snake-root, etcetera. it was evidently necessary to make trial of this substance, although not so valuable as peruvian bark, and to employ it in its natural state, since they had no means for extracting its essence. cyrus harding went himself to cut from the trunk of a species of black willow, a few pieces of bark; he brought them back to granite house, and reduced them to a powder, which was administered that same evening to herbert. the night passed without any important change. herbert was somewhat delirious, but the fever did not reappear in the night, and did not return either during the following day. pencroft again began to hope. gideon spilett said nothing. it might be that the fever was not quotidian, but tertian, and that it would return next day. therefore, he awaited the next day with the greatest anxiety. it might have been remarked besides that during this period herbert remained utterly prostrate, his head weak and giddy. another symptom alarmed the reporter to the highest degree. herbert's liver became congested, and soon a more intense delirium showed that his brain was also affected. gideon spilett was overwhelmed by this new complication. he took the engineer aside. "it is a malignant fever," said he. "a malignant fever!" cried harding. "you are mistaken, spilett. a malignant fever does not declare itself spontaneously; its germ must previously have existed." "i am not mistaken," replied the reporter. "herbert no doubt contracted the germ of this fever in the marshes of the island. he has already had one attack; should a second come on and should we not be able to prevent a third, he is lost." "but the willow bark?" "that is insufficient," answered the reporter; "and the third attack of a malignant fever, which is not arrested by means of quinine, is always fatal." fortunately, pencroft heard nothing of this conversation or he would have gone mad. it may be imagined what anxiety the engineer and the reporter suffered during the day of the th of december and the following night. towards the middle of the day the second attack came on. the crisis was terrible. herbert felt himself sinking. he stretched his arms towards cyrus harding, towards spilett, towards pencroft. he was so young to die! the scene was heartrending. they were obliged to send pencroft away. the fit lasted five hours. it was evident that herbert could not survive a third. the night was frightful. in his delirium herbert uttered words which went to the hearts of his companions. he struggled with the convicts, he called to ayrton, he poured forth entreaties to that mysterious being,--that powerful unknown protector,--whose image was stamped upon his mind; then he again fell into a deep exhaustion which completely prostrated him. several times gideon spilett thought that the poor boy was dead. the next day, the th of december, was but a succession of the fainting fits. herbert's thin hands clutched the sheets. they had administered further doses of pounded bark, but the reporter expected no result from it. "if before to-morrow morning we have not given him a more energetic febrifuge," said the reporter, "herbert will be dead." night arrived--the last night, it was too much to be feared, of the good, brave, intelligent boy, so far in advance of his years, and who was loved by all as their own child. the only remedy which existed against this terrible malignant fever, the only specific which could overcome it, was not to be found in lincoln island. during the night of the th of december, herbert was seized by a more violent delirium. his liver was fearfully congested, his brain affected, and already it was impossible for him to recognise any one. would he live until the next day, until that third attack which must infallibly carry him off? it was not probable. his strength was exhausted, and in the intervals of fever he lay as one dead. towards three o'clock in the morning herbert uttered a piercing cry. he seemed to be torn by a supreme convulsion. neb, who was near him, terrified, ran into the next room where his companions were watching. top, at that moment, barked in a strange manner. all rushed in immediately and managed to restrain the dying boy, who was endeavouring to throw himself out of his bed, whilst spilett, taking his arm, felt his pulse gradually quicken. it was five in the morning. the rays of the rising sun began to shine in at the windows of granite house. it promised to be a fine day, and this day was to be poor herbert's last! a ray glanced on the table placed near the bed. suddenly pencroft, uttering a cry, pointed to the table. on it lay a little oblong box, of which the cover bore these words:-- "sulphate of quinine." chapter eleven. inexplicable mystery--herbert's convalescence--the parts of the island to be explored--preparations for departure--first day--night--second day--kauries--a couple of cassowaries--footprints in the forest--arrival at reptile point. gideon spilett took the box and opened it. it contained nearly two hundred grains of a white powder, a few particles of which he carried to his lips. the extreme bitterness of the substance precluded all doubt; it was certainly the precious extract of quinine, that pre-eminent antifebrile. this powder must be administered to herbert without delay. how it came there might be discussed later. "some coffee!" said spilett. in a few moments neb brought a cup of the warm infusion. gideon spilett threw into it about eighteen grains of quinine, and they succeeded in making herbert drink the mixture. there was still time, for the third attack of the malignant fever had not yet shown itself. how they longed to be able to add that it would not return! besides, it must be remarked, the hopes of all had now revived. the mysterious influence had been again exerted, and in a critical moment, when they had despaired of it. in a few hours herbert was much calmer. the colonists could now discuss this incident. the intervention of the stranger was more evident than ever. but how had he been able to penetrate during the night into granite house? it was inexplicable, and, in truth, the proceedings of the genius of the island were not less mysterious than was that genius himself. during this day the sulphate of quinine was administered to herbert every three hours. the next day some improvement in herbert's condition was apparent. certainly, he was not out of danger, intermittent fevers being subject to frequent and dangerous relapses, but the most assiduous care was bestowed on him. and besides, the specific was at hand; nor, doubtless, was he who had brought it far-distant! and the hearts of all were animated by returning hope. this hope was not disappointed. ten days after, on the th of december, herbert's convalescence commenced. he was still weak, and strict diet had been imposed upon him, but no access of fever supervened. and then, the poor boy submitted with such docility to all the prescriptions ordered him! he longed so to get well! pencroft was as a man who has been drawn up from the bottom of an abyss. fits of joy approaching to delirium seized him. when the time for the third attack had passed by, he nearly suffocated the reporter in his embrace. since then, he always called him dr spilett. the real doctor, however, remained undiscovered. "we will find him!" repeated the sailor. certainly, this man, whoever he was, might expect a somewhat too energetic embrace from the worthy pencroft! the month of december ended, and with it the year , during which the colonists of lincoln island had of late been so severely tried. they commenced the year with magnificent weather, great heat, and a tropical temperature, delightfully cooled by the sea-breeze. herbert's recovery progressed, and from his bed, placed near one of the windows of granite house, he could inhale the fresh air, charged with ozone, which could not fail to restore his health. his appetite returned, and what numberless delicate, savoury little dishes neb prepared for him! "it is enough to make one wish to have a fever oneself!" said pencroft. during all this time, the convicts did not once appear in the vicinity of granite house. there was no news of ayrton, and though the engineer and herbert still had some hopes of finding him again, their companions did not doubt but that the unfortunate man had perished. however, this uncertainty could not last, and when once the lad should have recovered, the expedition, the result of which must be so important, would be undertaken. but they would have to wait a month, perhaps, for all the strength of the colony must be put into requisition to obtain satisfaction from the convicts. however, herbert's convalescence progressed rapidly. the congestion of the liver had disappeared, and his wounds might be considered completely healed. during the month of january, important work was done on the plateau of prospect heights; but it consisted solely in saving as much as was possible from the devastated crops, either of corn or vegetables. the grain and the plants were gathered, so as to provide a new harvest for the approaching half-season. with regard to rebuilding the poultry-yard, wall, or stables, cyrus harding preferred to wait. whilst he and his companions were in pursuit of the convicts, the latter might very probably pay another visit to the plateau, and it would be useless to give them an opportunity of recommencing their work of destruction. when the island should be cleared of these miscreants, they would set about rebuilding. the young convalescent began to get up in the second week of january, at first for one hour a day, then two, then three. his strength visibly returned, so vigorous was his constitution. he was now eighteen years of age. he was tall, and promised to become a man of noble and commanding presence. from this time his recovery, while still requiring care,--and dr spilett was very strict,--made rapid; progress. towards the end of the month, herbert was already walking about on prospect heights, and the beach. he derived, from several sea-baths, which he took in company with pencroft and neb, the greatest possible benefit. cyrus harding thought he might now settle the day for their departure, for which the th of february was fixed. the nights, very clear at this time of year, would be favourable to the researches they intended to make all over the island. the necessary preparations for this exploration were now commenced, and were important, for the colonists had sworn not to return to granite house until their twofold object had been achieved; on the one hand, to exterminate the convicts, and rescue ayrton, if he was still living; on the other, to discover who it was that presided so effectually over the fortunes of the colony. of lincoln island, the settlers knew thoroughly all the eastern coast from claw cape to the mandible capes, the extensive tadorn marsh, the neighbourhood of lake grant, jacamar wood, between the road to the corral and the mercy, the courses of the mercy and red creek, and lastly, the spurs of mount franklin, among which the corral had been established. they had explored, though only in an imperfect manner, the vast shore of washington bay from claw cape to reptile end, the woody and marshy border of the west coast, and the interminable downs, ending at the open mouth of shark gulf. but they had in no way surveyed the woods which covered the serpentine peninsula, all to the right of the mercy, the left bank of falls river, and the wilderness of spurs and valleys which supported three quarters of the base of mount franklin, to the east, the north, and the west, and where doubtless many secret retreats existed. consequently, many millions of acres of the island had still escaped their investigations. it was, therefore, decided that the expedition should be carried through the far west, so as to include all that region situated on the right of the mercy. it might, perhaps, be better worth while to go direct to the corral, where it might be supposed that the convicts had again taken refuge, either to pillage or to establish themselves there. but either the devastation of the corral would have been an accomplished fact by this time, and it would be too late to prevent it; or it had been the convicts' interest to intrench themselves there, and there would be still time to go and turn them out on their return. therefore, after some discussion, the first plan was adhered to, and the settlers resolved to proceed through the wood to reptile end. they would make their way with their hatchets, and thus lay the first draft of a road which would place granite house in communication with the end of the peninsula for a length of from sixteen to seventeen miles. the cart was in good condition. the onagas, well rested, could go a long journey. provisions, camp effects, a portable stove, and various utensils were packed in the cart, as also weapons and ammunition, carefully chosen from the now complete arsenal of granite house. but it was necessary to remember that the convicts were, perhaps, roaming about the woods, and that in the midst of these thick forests a shot might quickly be fired and received. it was therefore resolved that the little band of settlers should remain together and not separate under any pretext whatever. it was also decided that no one should remain at granite house. top and jup themselves were to accompany the expedition; the inaccessible dwelling needed no guard. the th of february, eve of the departure, was sunday. it was consecrated entirely to repose, and thanksgivings addressed by the colonists to the creator. a place in the cart was reserved for herbert, who, though thoroughly convalescent, was still a little weak. the next morning, at daybreak, cyrus harding took the necessary measures to protect granite house from any invasion. the ladders, which were formerly used for the ascent, were brought to the chimneys and buried deep in the sand, so that they might be available on the return of the colonists, for the machinery of the lift had been taken to pieces, and nothing of the apparatus remained. pencroft stayed the last in granite house in order to finish this work, and he then lowered himself down by means of a double rope held below, and which, when once hauled down, left no communication between the upper landing and the beach. the weather was magnificent. "we shall have a warm day of it," said the reporter, laughing. "pooh! dr spilett," answered pencroft, "we shall walk under the shade of the trees and shan't even see the sun!" "forward!" said the engineer. the cart was waiting on the beach before the chimneys. the reporter made herbert take his place in it during the first hours at least of the journey, and the lad was obliged to submit to his doctor's orders. neb placed himself at the onagas' heads. cyrus harding, the reporter, and the sailor, walked in front. top bounded joyfully along. herbert offered a seat in his vehicle to jup, who accepted it without ceremony. the moment for departure had arrived, and the little band set out. the cart first turned the angle of the mouth of the mercy, then, having ascended the left bank for a mile, crossed the bridge, at the other side of which commenced the road to port balloon and there the explorers, leaving this road on their left, entered the cover of the immense woods which formed the region of the far west. for the first two miles the widely-scattered trees allowed the cart to pass with ease; from time to time it became necessary to cut away a few creepers and bushes, but no serious obstacle impeded the progress of the colonists. the thick foliage of the trees threw a grateful shade on the ground. deodars, douglas-firs, casuarinas, banksias, gum-trees, dragon-trees, and other well-known species, succeeded each other far as the eye could reach. the feathered tribes of the island were all represented--tetras, jacamars, pheasants, lories, as well as the chattering cockatoos, parrots, and paroquets. agouties, kangaroos, and capybaras fled swiftly at their approach; and all this reminded the settlers of the first excursions they had made on their arrival at the island. "nevertheless," observed cyrus harding, "i notice that these creatures, both birds and quadrupeds, are more timid than formerly. these woods have, therefore, been recently traversed by the convicts, and we shall certainly find some traces of them." and, in fact, in several places they could distinguish traces, more or less recent, of the passage of a band of men--here branches broken off the trees, perhaps to mark out the way; there the ashes of a fire, and footprints in clayey spots; but nothing which appeared to belong to a settled encampment. the engineer had recommended his companions to refrain from hunting. the reports of the fire-arms might give the alarm to the convicts, who were, perhaps, roaming through the forest. moreover, the hunters would necessarily ramble some distance from the cart, which it was dangerous to leave unguarded. in the after-part of the day, when about six miles from granite house, their progress became much more difficult. in order to make their way through some thickets, they were obliged to cut down trees. before entering such places harding was, careful to send in top and jup, who faithfully accomplished their commission, and when the dog and orang returned without giving any warning, there was evidently nothing to fear, either from convicts or wild beasts, two varieties of the animal kingdom, whose ferocious instincts placed them on the same level. on the evening of the first day the colonists encamped about nine miles from granite house, on the border of a little stream falling into the mercy, and of the existence of which they had till then been ignorant; it evidently, however, belonged to the hydrographical system to which the soil owed its astonishing fertility. the settlers made a hearty meal, for their appetites were sharpened, and measures were then taken that the night might be passed in safety. if the engineer had had only to deal with wild beasts, jaguars, or others, he would have simply lighted fires all round his camp, which would have sufficed for its defence; but the convicts would be rather attracted than terrified by the flames, and it was, therefore, better to be surrounded by the profound darkness of night. the watch was, however, carefully organised. two of the settlers were to watch together, and every two hours it was agreed that they should be relieved by their comrades. and so, notwithstanding his wish to the contrary, herbert was exempted from guard, pencroft and gideon spilett in one party, the engineer and neb in another, mounted guard in turns over the camp. the night, however, was but of few hours. the darkness was due rather to the thickness of the foliage than to the disappearance of the sun. the silence was scarcely disturbed by the howling of jaguars and the chattering of the monkeys, the latter appearing to particularly irritate master jup. the night passed without incident, and on the next day, the th of february, the journey through the forest, rather tedious than difficult, was continued. this day they could not accomplish more than six miles, for every moment they were obliged to cut a road with their hatchets. like true settlers, the colonists spared the largest and most beautiful trees, which would besides have cost immense labour to fell, and the small ones only were sacrificed, but the result was that the road took a very winding direction, and lengthened itself by numerous _detours_. during the day herbert discovered several new specimens not before met with in the island, such as the tree-fern, with its leaves spread out like the waters of a fountain, locust-trees, on the long pods of which the onagas browsed greedily, and which supplied a sweet pulp of excellent flavour. there, too, the colonists again found groups of magnificent kauries, their cylindrical trunks, crowned with a cone of verdure, rising to a height of two hundred feet. these were the tree-kings of new zealand, as celebrated as the cedars of lebanon. as to the fauna, there was no addition to those species already known to the hunters. nevertheless, they saw, though unable to get near them, a couple of those large birds peculiar to australia, a sort of cassowary, called emu, five feet in height, and with brown plumage, which belong to the tribe of waders. top darted after them as fast as his four legs could carry him, but the emus distanced him with ease, so prodigious was their speed. as to the traces left by the convicts, a few more were discovered. some footprints found near an apparently recently-extinguished fire were attentively examined by the settlers. by measuring them one after the other, according to their length and breadth, the marks of five men's feet were easily distinguished. the five convicts had evidently camped on this spot; but,--and this was the object of so minute an examination,--a sixth foot-print could not be discovered, which in that case would have been that of ayrton. "ayrton was not with them!" said herbert. "no," answered pencroft, "and if he was not with them, it was because the wretches had already murdered him! but then these rascals have not a den to which they may be tracked like tigers!" "no," replied the reporter; "it is more probable that they wander at random, and it is their interest to rove about until the time when they will be masters of the island!" "the masters of the island!" exclaimed the sailor; "the masters of the island!" he repeated, and his voice was choked, as if his throat was seized in an iron grasp. then in a calmer tone, "do you know, captain harding," said he, "what the ball is which i have rammed into my gun?" "no, pencroft!" "it is the ball that went through herbert's chest, and i promise you it won't miss its mark!" but this just retaliation would not bring ayrton back to life, and from the examination of the footprints left in the ground, they must, alas! conclude that all hopes of ever seeing him again must be abandoned. that evening they encamped fourteen miles from granite house, and cyrus harding calculated that they could not be more than five miles from reptile point. and, indeed, the next day the extremity of the peninsula was reached, and the whole length of the forest had been traversed; but there was nothing to indicate the retreat in which the convicts had taken refuge, nor that, no less secret, which sheltered the mysterious unknown. chapter twelve. exploration of the serpentine peninsula--encampment at the mouth of falls river--gideon spilett and pencroft reconnoitre--their return-- forward, all!--an open door--a lighted window--by the light of the moon! the next day, the th of february, was devoted to the exploration of all that wooded region forming the shore from reptile end to falls river. the colonists were able to search this forest thoroughly, for, as it was comprised between the two shores of the serpentine peninsula, it was only from three to four miles in breadth. the trees, both by their height and their thick foliage, bore witness to the vegetative power of the soil, more astonishing here than in any other part of the island. one might have said that a corner from the virgin forests of america or africa had been transported into this temperate zone. this led them to conclude that the superb vegetation found a heat in this soil, damp in its upper layer, but warmed in the interior by volcanic fires, which could not belong to a temperate climate. the most frequently-occurring trees were kauries and eucalypti of gigantic dimensions. but the colonists' object was not simply to admire the magnificent vegetation. they knew already that in this respect lincoln island would have been worthy to take the first rank in the canary group, to which the first name given was that of the happy isles. now, alas! their island no longer belonged to them entirely; others had taken possession of it, miscreants polluted its shores, and they must be destroyed to the last man. no traces were found on the western coast, although they were carefully sought for. no more footprints, no more broken branches, no more deserted camps. "this does not surprise me," said cyrus harding to his companions. "the convicts first landed on the island in the neighbourhood of flotsam point, and they immediately plunged into the far west forests, after crossing tadorn marsh. they then followed almost the same route that we took on leaving granite house. this explains the traces we found in the wood. but, arriving on the shore, the convicts saw at once that they would discover no suitable retreat there, and it was then that, going northwards again, they came upon the corral." "where they have perhaps returned," said pencroft. "i do not think so," answered the engineer, "for they would naturally suppose that our researches would be in that direction. the corral is only a store-house to them, and not a definitive encampment." "i am of cyrus' opinion," said the reporter, "and i think that it is among the spurs of mount franklin that the convicts will have made their lair." "then, captain, straight to the corral!" cried pencroft. "we must finish them off, and till now we have only lost time!" "no, my friend," replied the engineer; "you forget that we have a reason for wishing to know if the forests of the far west do not contain some habitation. our exploration has a double object, pencroft. if, on the one hand, we have to chastise crime, we have, on the other, an act of gratitude to perform." "that was well said, captain," replied the sailor; "but, all the same, it is my opinion that we shall not find that gentleman until he pleases." and truly pencroft only expressed the opinion of all. it was probable that the stranger's retreat was not less mysterious than was he himself. that evening the cart halted at the mouth of falls river. the camp was organised as usual, and the customary precautions were taken for the night. herbert, become again the healthy and vigorous lad he was before his illness, derived great benefit from this life in the open air, between the sea-breezes and the vivifying air from the forests. his place was no longer in the cart, but at the head of the troop. the next day, the th of february, the colonists, leaving the shore, where, beyond the mouth, basalts of every shape were so picturesquely piled up, ascended the river by its left bank. the road had been already partially cleared in their former excursions made from the corral to the west coast. the settlers were now about six miles from mount franklin. the engineer's plan was this:--to minutely survey the valley forming the bed of the river, and to cautiously approach the neighbourhood of the corral; if the corral was occupied, to seize it by force; if it was not, to intrench themselves there and make it the centre of the operations which had for their object the exploration of mount franklin. this plan was unanimously approved by the colonists, for they were impatient to regain entire possession of their island. they made their way along the narrow valley separating two of the largest spurs of mount franklin. the trees, crowded on the river's bank, became rare on the upper slopes of the mountain. the ground was hilly and rough, very suitable for ambushes, and over which they did not venture without extreme precaution. top and jup skirmished on the flanks, springing right and left through the thick brushwood, and emulating each other in intelligence and activity. but nothing showed that the banks of the stream had been recently frequented--nothing announced either the presence or the proximity of the convicts. towards five in the evening the cart stopped nearly feet from the palisade. a semicircular screen of trees still hid it. it was necessary to reconnoitre the corral, in order to ascertain if it was occupied. to go there openly, in broad daylight, when the convicts were probably in ambush, would be to expose themselves, as poor herbert had done, to the fire-arms of the ruffians. it was better, then, to wait until night came on. however, gideon spilett wished without further delay to reconnoitre the approaches to the corral, and pencroft, who was quite out of patience, volunteered to accompany him. "no, my friends," said the engineer, "wait till night. i will not allow one of you to expose himself in open day." "but, captain," answered the sailor, little disposed to obey. "i beg you, pencroft," said the engineer. "very well!" replied the sailor, who vented his anger in another way, by bestowing on the convicts the worst names in his maritime vocabulary. the colonists remained, therefore, near the cart, and carefully watched the neighbouring parts of the forest. three hours passed thus. the wind had fallen, and absolute silence reigned under the great trees. the snapping of the smallest twig, a footstep on the dry leaves, the gliding of a body amongst the grass, would have been heard without difficulty. all was quiet. besides, top, lying on the grass, his head stretched out on his paws, gave no signs of uneasiness. at eight o'clock the day appeared far enough advanced for the reconnaissance to be made under favourable conditions. gideon spilett declared himself ready to set out accompanied by pencroft. cyrus harding consented. top and jup were to remain with the engineer, herbert, and neb, for a bark or a cry at a wrong moment would give the alarm. "do not be imprudent," said harding to the reporter and pencroft; "you have not to gain possession of the corral, but only to find out whether it is occupied or not." "all right," answered pencroft. and the two departed. under the trees, thanks to the thickness of their foliage, the obscurity rendered any object invisible beyond a radius of from thirty to forty feet. the reporter and pencroft, halting at any suspicious sound, advanced with great caution. they walked a little distance apart from each other so as to offer a less mark for a shot. and, to tell the truth, they expected every moment to hear a report. five minutes after leaving the cart, gideon spilett and pencroft arrived at the edge of the wood before the clearing beyond which rose the palisade. they stopped. a few straggling beams still fell on the field clear of trees. thirty feet distant was the gate of the corral, which appeared to be closed. this thirty feet, which it was necessary to cross from the border of the wood to the palisade, constituted the dangerous zone, to coin a term: in fact, one or more bullets fired from behind the palisade might knock over any one who ventured onto this zone. gideon spilett and the sailor were not men to draw back, but they knew that any imprudence on their part, of which they would be the first victims, would fall afterwards on their companions. if they themselves were killed, what would become of harding, neb, and herbert? but pencroft, excited at feeling himself so near the corral where he supposed the convicts had taken refuge, was about to press forward, when the reporter held him back with a grasp of iron. "in a few minutes it will be quite dark," whispered spilett in the sailor's ear; "then will be the time to act." pencroft, convulsively clasping the butt-end of his gun, restrained his eagerness, and waited, swearing to himself. soon the last of the twilight faded away. darkness, which seemed as if it issued from the dense forest, covered the clearing. mount franklin rose like an enormous screen before the western horizon, and night spread rapidly over all, as it does in regions of low latitudes. now was the time. the reporter and pencroft, since posting themselves on the edge of the wood, had not once lost sight of the palisade. the corral appeared to be absolutely deserted. the top of the palisade formed a line, a little darker than the surrounding shadow, and nothing disturbed its distinctness. nevertheless, if the convicts were there, they must have posted one of their number to guard against any surprise. spilett grasped his companion's hand, and both crept towards the corral, their guns ready to fire. they reached the gate without the darkness being illuminated by a single ray of light. pencroft tried to push open the gate, which, as the reporter and he had supposed, was closed. however, the sailor was able to ascertain that the outer bars had not been put up. it might, then, be concluded that the convicts were there in the corral, and that very probably they had fastened the gate in such a way that it could not be forced open. gideon spilett and pencroft listened. not a sound could be heard inside the palisade. the musmons and the goats, sleeping no doubt in their huts, in no way disturbed the calm of night. the reporter and the sailor hearing nothing, asked themselves whether they had not better scale the palisades and penetrate into the corral. this would have been contrary to cyrus harding's instructions. it is true that the enterprise might succeed, but it might also fail. now, if the convicts were suspecting nothing, if they knew nothing of the expedition against them, if, lastly, there now existed a chance of surprising them, ought this chance to be lost by inconsiderately attempting to cross the palisade? this was not the reporter's opinion. he thought it better to wait until all the settlers were collected together before attempting to penetrate into the corral. one thing was certain, that it was possible to reach the palisade without being seen, and also that it did not appear to be guarded. this point settled, there was nothing to be done but to return to the cart, where they would consult. pencroft probably agreed with this decision, for he followed the reporter without making any objection when the latter turned back to the wood. in a few minutes the engineer was made acquainted with the state of affairs. "well," said he, after a little thought, "i now have reason to believe that the convicts are not in the corral." "we shall soon know," said pencroft, "when we have scaled the palisade." "to the corral, my friends!" said cyrus harding. "shall we leave the cart in the wood?" asked neb. "no," replied the engineer, "it is our waggon of ammunition and provisions, and, if necessary, it would serve as an intrenchment." "forward, then!" said gideon spilett. the cart emerged from the wood and began to roll noiselessly towards the palisade. the darkness was now profound, the silence as complete as when pencroft and the reporter crept over the ground. the thick grass completely muffled their footsteps. the colonists held themselves ready to fire. jup, at pencroft's orders, kept behind. neb led top in a leash, to prevent him from bounding forward. the clearing soon came in sight. it was deserted. without hesitating, the little band moved towards the palisade. in a short space of time the dangerous zone was passed. not a shot had been fired. when the cart reached the palisade, it stopped. neb remained at the onagas' heads to hold them. the engineer, the reporter, herbert, and pencroft, proceeded to the door, in order to ascertain if it was barricaded inside. it was open! "what do you say now?" asked the engineer, turning to the sailor and spilett. both were stupefied. "i can swear," said pencroft, "that this gate was shut just now!" the colonists now hesitated. were the convicts in the corral when pencroft and the reporter made their reconnaissance? it could not be doubted, as the gate then closed could only have been opened by them. were they still there, or had one of their number just gone out? all these questions presented themselves simultaneously to the minds of the colonists, but how could they be answered? at that moment, herbert, who had advanced a few steps into the enclosure, drew back hurriedly, and seized harding's hand. "what's the matter?" asked the engineer. "alight!" "in the house?" "yes!" all five advanced and indeed, through the window fronting them, they saw glimmering a feeble light. cyrus harding made up his mind rapidly. "it is our only chance," said he to his companions, "of finding the convicts collected in this house, suspecting nothing! they are in our power! forward!" the colonists crossed through the enclosure, holding their guns ready in their hands. the cart had been left outside under the charge of jup and top, who had been prudently tied to it. cyrus harding, pencroft, and gideon spilett on one side, herbert and neb on the other, going along by the palisade, surveyed the absolutely dark and deserted corral. in a few moments they were near the closed door of the house. harding signed to his companions not to stir, and approached the window, then feebly lighted by the inner light. he gazed into the apartment. on the table burned a lantern. near the table was the bed formerly used by ayrton. on the bed lay the body of a man. suddenly cyrus harding drew back, and in a hoarse voice-- "ayrton!" he exclaimed. immediately the door was forced rather than opened, and the colonists rushed into the room. ayrton appeared to be asleep. his countenance showed that he had long and cruelly suffered. on his wrists and ankles could be seen great bruises. harding bent over him. "ayrton!" cried the engineer, seizing the arm of the man whom he had just found again under such unexpected circumstances. at this exclamation ayrton opened his eyes, and, gazing at harding, then at the others-- "you!" he cried, "you?" "ayrton! ayrton!" repeated harding. "where am i?" "in the house in the corral!" "alone?" "yes!" "but they will come back!" cried ayrton. "defend yourselves! defend yourselves!" and he fell back exhausted. "spilett," exclaimed the engineer, "we may be attacked at any moment. bring the cart into the corral. then barricade the door, and all come back here." pencroft, neb, and the reporter hastened to execute the engineer's orders. there was not a moment to be lost. perhaps even now the cart was in the hands of the convicts! in a moment the reporter and his two companions had crossed the corral and reached the gate of the palisade behind which top was heard growling sullenly. the engineer, leaving ayrton for an instant, came out ready to fire. herbert was at his side. both surveyed the crest of the spur overlooking the corral. if the convicts were lying in ambush there, they might knock the settlers over one after the other. at that moment the moon appeared in the east, above the black curtain of the forest, and a white sheet of light spread over the interior of the enclosure. the corral, with its clumps of trees, the little stream which watered it, and its wide carpet of grass, was suddenly illuminated. from the side of the mountain, the house and a part of the palisade stood out white in the moonlight. on the opposite side towards the door, the enclosure remained dark. a black mass soon appeared. this was the cart entering the circle of light, and cyrus harding could hear the noise made by the door, as his companions shut it and fastened the interior bars. but, at that moment, top, breaking loose, began to bark furiously and rush to the back of the corral, to the right of the house. "be ready to fire, my friends!" cried harding. the colonists raised their pieces and waited the moment to fire. top still barked, and jup, running towards the dog, uttered shrill cries. the colonists followed him, and reached the borders of the little stream, shaded by large trees. and there, in the bright moonlight, what did they see? five corpses, stretched on the bank! they were those of the convicts who, four months previously, had landed on lincoln island! chapter thirteen. ayrton's story--plans of his former accomplices--their installation in the corral--the avenging justice of lincoln island--the bonadventure-- researches around mount franklin--the upper valleys--a subterranean volcano--pencroft's opinion--at the bottom of the crater--return. how had it happened? who had killed the convicts? was it ayrton? no, for a moment before he was dreading their return. but ayrton was now in a profound stupor, from which it was no longer possible to rouse him. after uttering those few words he had again become unconscious, and had fallen back motionless on the bed. the colonists, a prey to a thousand confused thoughts, under the influence of violent excitement, waited all night, without leaving ayrton's house, or returning to the spot where lay the bodies of the convicts. it was very probable that ayrton would not be able to throw any light on the circumstances under which the bodies had been found, since he himself was not aware that he was in the corral. but at any rate he would be in a position to give an account of what had taken place before this terrible execution. the next day ayrton awoke from his torpor, and his companions cordially manifested all the joy they felt, on seeing him again, almost safe and sound, after a hundred and four days' separation. ayrton then in a few words recounted what had happened, or at least as much as he knew. the day after his arrival at the corral, on the th of last november, at nightfall, he was surprised by the convicts, who had scaled the palisade. they bound and gagged him; then he was led to a dark cavern, at the foot of mount franklin, where the convicts had taken refuge. his death had been decided upon, and the next day the convicts were about to kill him, when one of them recognised him, and called him by the name which he bore in australia. the wretches had no scruples as to murdering ayrton! they spared ben joyce! but from that moment ayrton was exposed to the importunities of his former accomplices. they wished him to join them again, and relied upon his aid to enable them to gain possession of granite house, to penetrate into that hitherto inaccessible dwelling, and to become masters of the island, after murdering the colonists! ayrton remained firm. the once convict, now repentant and pardoned, would rather die than betray his companions. ayrton--bound, gagged, and closely watched--lived in this cave for four months. nevertheless the convicts had discovered the corral a short time after their arrival in the island, and since then they had subsisted on ayrton's stores, but did not live at the corral. on the th of november, two of the villains, surprised by the colonists' arrival, fired at herbert, and one of them returned, boasting of having killed one of the inhabitants of the island; but he returned alone. his companion, as is known, fell by cyrus harding's dagger. ayrton's anxiety and despair may be imagined when he learnt the news of herbert's death. the settlers were now only four, and, as it seemed, at the mercy of the convicts. after this event, and during all the time that the colonists, detained by herbert's illness, remained in the corral, the pirates did not leave their cavern, and even after they had pillaged the plateau of prospect heights, they did not think it prudent to abandon it. the ill-treatment inflicted on ayrton was now redoubled. his hands and feet still bore the bloody marks of the cords which bound him day and night. every moment he expected to be put to death, nor did it appear possible that he could escape. matters remained thus until the third week of february. the convicts, still watching for a favourable opportunity, rarely quitted their retreat, and only made a few hunting excursions, either to the interior of the island, or the south coast. ayrton had no further news of his friends, and relinquished all hope of ever seeing them again. at last, the unfortunate man, weakened by ill-treatment, fell into a prostration so profound that sight and hearing failed him. from that moment, that is to say, since the last two days, he could give no information whatever of what had occurred. "but, captain harding," he added, "since i was imprisoned in that cavern, how is it that i find myself in the corral?" "how is it that the convicts are lying yonder dead, in the middle of the enclosure?" answered the engineer. "dead!" cried ayrton, half rising from his bed, notwithstanding his weakness. his companions supported him. he wished to get up, and with their assistance he did so. they then proceeded together towards the little stream. it was now broad daylight. there, on the bank, in the position in which they had been stricken by death in its most instantaneous form, lay the corpses of the five convicts! ayrton was astounded. harding and his companions looked at him without uttering a word. on a sign from the engineer, neb and pencroft examined the bodies, already stiffened by the cold. they bore no apparent trace of any wound. only, after carefully examining them, pencroft found on the forehead of one, on the chest of another, on the back of this one, on the shoulder of that, a little red spot, a sort of scarcely visible bruise, the cause of which it was impossible to conjecture. "it is there that they have been struck!" said cyrus harding. "but with what weapon?" cried the reporter. "a weapon, lightning-like in its effects, and of which we have not the secret!" "and who has struck the blow?" asked pencroft. "the avenging power of the island," replied harding, "he who brought you here, ayrton, whose influence has once more manifested itself, who does for us all that which we cannot do for ourselves, and who, his will accomplished, conceals himself from us." "let us make search for him, then!" exclaimed pencroft. "yes, we will search for him," answered harding; "but we shall not discover this powerful being who performs such wonders, until he pleases to call us to him!" this invisible protection, which rendered their own action unavailing, both irritated and piqued the engineer. the relative inferiority which it proved was of a nature to wound a haughty spirit. a generosity evinced in such a manner as to elude all tokens of gratitude, implied a sort of disdain for those on whom the obligation was conferred, which in cyrus harding's eyes marred, in some degree, the worth of the benefit. "let us search," he resumed, "and god grant that we may some day be permitted to prove to this haughty protector that he has not to deal with ungrateful people! what would i not give could we repay him, by rendering him in our turn, although at the price of our lives, some signal service!" from this day, the thoughts of the inhabitants of lincoln island were solely occupied with the intended search. everything incited them to discover the answer to this enigma, an answer which could only be the name of a man endowed with a truly inexplicable, and in some degree superhuman power. in a few minutes, the settlers re-entered the house, where their influence soon restored to ayrton his moral and physical energy. neb and pencroft carried the corpses of the convicts into the forest, some distance from the corral, and buried them deep in the ground. ayrton was then made acquainted with the facts which had occurred during his seclusion. he learnt herbert's adventures, and through what various trials the colonists had passed. as to the settlers, they had despaired of ever seeing ayrton again, and had been convinced that the convicts had ruthlessly murdered him. "and now," said cyrus harding, as he ended his recital, "a duty remains for us to perform. half of our task is accomplished, but although the convicts are no longer to be feared, it is not owing to ourselves that we are once more masters of the island." "well!" answered gideon spilett, "let us search all this labyrinth of the spurs of mount franklin. we will not leave a hollow, not a hole unexplored! ah! if ever a reporter found himself face to face with a mystery, it is i who now speak to you, my friends!" "and we will not return to granite house until we have found our benefactor," said herbert. "yes," said the engineer, "we will do all that it is humanly possible to do, but i repeat we shall not find him until he himself permits us." "shall we stay at the corral?" asked pencroft. "we shall stay here," answered harding. "provisions are abundant, and we are here in the very centre of the circle we have to explore. besides, if necessary, the cart will take us rapidly to granite house." "good!" answered the sailor. "only i have a remark to make." "what is it?" "here is the fine season getting on, and we must not forget that we have a voyage to make." "a voyage?" said gideon spilett. "yes, to tabor island," answered pencroft. "it is necessary to carry a notice there to point out the position of our island and say that ayrton is here in case the scotch yacht should come to take him off. who knows if it is not already too late?" "but, pencroft," asked ayrton, "how do you intend to make this voyage?" "in the _bonadventure_." "the _bonadventure_!" exclaimed ayrton. "she no longer exists." "my _bonadventure_ exists no longer!" shouted pencroft, bounding from his seat. "no," answered ayrton. "the convicts discovered her in her little harbour only eight days ago, they put to sea in her, and--" "and?" said pencroft, his heart beating. "and not having bob harvey to steer her, they ran on the rocks, and the vessel went to pieces." "oh, the villains, the cut-throats, the infamous scoundrels!" exclaimed pencroft. "pencroft," said herbert, taking the sailor's hand, "we will build another _bonadventure_--a larger one. we have all the iron-work--all the rigging of the brig at our disposal." "but do you know," returned pencroft, "that it will take at least five or six months to build a vessel of from thirty to forty tons?" "we can take our time," said the reporter, "and we must give up the voyage to tabor island for this year." "oh, my _bonadventure_! my poor _bonadventure_!" cried pencroft, almost broken-hearted at the destruction of the vessel of which he was so proud. the loss of the _bonadventure_ was certainly a thing to be lamented by the colonists, and it was agreed that this loss should be repaired as soon as possible. this settled, they now occupied themselves with bringing their researches to bear on the most secret parts of the island. the exploration was commenced at daybreak on the th of february, and lasted an entire week. the base of the mountain, with its spurs and their numberless ramifications, formed a labyrinth of valleys and elevations. it was evident that there, in the depths of these narrow gorges, perhaps even in the interior of mount franklin itself, was the proper place to pursue their researches. no part of the island could have been more suitable to conceal a dwelling whose occupant wished to remain unknown. but so irregular was the formation of the valleys that cyrus harding was obliged to conduct the exploration in a strictly methodical manner. the colonists first visited the valley opening to the south of the volcano, and which first received the waters of falls river. there ayrton showed them the cavern where the convicts had taken refuge, and in which he had been imprisoned until his removal to the corral. this cavern was just as ayrton had left it. they found there a considerable quantity of ammunition and provisions, conveyed thither by the convicts in order to form a reserve. the whole of the valley bordering on the cave, shaded by fir and other trees, was thoroughly explored, and on turning the point of the south-western spur, the colonists entered a narrower gorge similar to the picturesque columns of basalt on the coast. here the trees were fewer. stones took the place of grass. goats and musmons gambolled among the rocks. here began the barren part of the island. it could already be seen that, of the numerous valleys branching off at the base of mount franklin, three only were wooded and rich in pasturage like that of the corral, which bordered on the west on the falls river valley, and on the east on the red creek valley. these two streams, which lower down became rivers by the absorption of several tributaries, were formed by all the springs of the mountain and thus caused the fertility of its southern part. as to the mercy, it was more directly fed from ample springs concealed under the cover of jacamar wood, and it was by springs of this nature, spreading in a thousand streamlets, that the soil of the serpentine peninsula was watered. now, of these three well-watered valleys, either might have served as a retreat to some solitary who would have found there everything necessary for life. but the settlers had already explored them, and in no part had they discovered the presence of man. was it then in the depths of those barren gorges, in the midst of the piles of rock, in the rugged northern ravines, among the streams of lava, that this dwelling and its occupant would be found? the northern part of mount franklin was at its base composed solely of two valleys, wide, not very deep, without any appearance of vegetation, strewn with masses of rock, paved with lava, and varied with great blocks of mineral. this region required a long and careful exploration. it contained a thousand cavities, comfortless no doubt, but perfectly concealed and difficult of access. the colonists even visited dark tunnels, dating from the volcanic period, still black from the passage of the fire, and penetrated into the depths of the mountain. they traversed these sombre galleries, waving lighted torches; they examined the smallest excavations; they sounded the shallowest depths, but all was dark and silent. it did not appear that the foot of man had ever before trodden these ancient passages, or that his arm had ever displaced one of these blocks, which remained as the volcano had cast them up above the waters, at the time of the submersion of the island. however, although these passages appeared to be absolutely deserted, and the obscurity was complete, cyrus harding was obliged to confess that absolute silence did not reign there. on arriving at the end of one of these gloomy caverns, extending several hundred feet into the interior of the mountain, he was surprised to hear a deep rumbling noise, increased in intensity by the sonorousness of the rocks. gideon spilett, who accompanied him, also heard these distant mutterings, which indicated a revivification of the subterranean fires. several times both listened, and they agreed that some chemical process was taking place in the bowels of the earth. "then the volcano is not totally extinct?" said the reporter. "it is possible that since our exploration of the crater," replied cyrus harding, "some change has occurred. any volcano, although considered extinct, may evidently again burst forth." "but if an eruption of mount franklin occurred," asked spilett, "would there not be some danger to lincoln island?" "i do not think so," answered the reporter. "the crater--that is to say, the safety-valve, exists, and the overflow of smoke and lava would escape, as it did formerly, by its customary outlet." "unless the lava opened a new way for itself towards the fertile parts of the island!" "and why, my dear spilett," answered cyrus harding, "should it not follow the road naturally traced out for it?" "well, volcanoes are capricious," returned the reporter. "notice," answered the engineer, "that the inclination of mount franklin favours the flow of water towards the valleys which we are exploring just now. to turn aside this flow, an earthquake would be necessary to change the mountain's centre of gravity." "but an earthquake is always to be feared at these times," observed gideon spilett. "always," replied the engineer, "especially when the subterranean forces begin to awake, as they risk meeting with some obstruction, after a long rest. thus, my dear spilett, an eruption would be a serious thing for us, and it would be better that the volcano should not have the slightest desire to wake up. but we could not prevent it, could we? at any rate, even if it should occur, i do not think prospect heights would be seriously threatened. between them and the mountain, the ground is considerably depressed, and if the lava should ever take a course towards the lake, it would be cast on the downs and the neighbouring parts of shark gulf." "we have not yet seen any smoke at the top of the mountain, to indicate an approaching eruption," said gideon spilett. "no," answered harding, "not a vapour escapes from the crater, for it was only yesterday that i attentively surveyed the summit. but it is probable that at the lower part of the chimney, time may have accumulated rocks, cinders, hardened lava, and that this valve of which i spoke, may at any time become overcharged. but at the first serious effort, every obstacle will disappear, and you may be certain, my dear spilett, that neither the island, which is the boiler, nor the volcano, which is the chimney, will burst under the pressure of gas. nevertheless, i repeat, it would be better that there should not be an eruption." "and yet we are not mistaken," remarked the reporter. "mutterings can be distinctly heard in the very bowels of the volcano!" "you are right," said the engineer, again listening attentively. "there can be no doubt of it. a commotion is going on there, of which we can neither estimate the importance nor the ultimate result." cyrus harding and spilett, on coming out, rejoined their companions, to whom they made known the state of affairs. "very well!" cried pencroft, "the volcano wants to play his pranks! let him try, if he likes! he will find his master!" "who?" asked neb. "our good genius, neb, our good genius, who will shut his mouth for him, if he so much as pretends to open it!" as may be seen, the sailor's confidence in the tutelary deity of his island was absolute, and, certainly, the occult power, manifested until now in so many inexplicable ways, appeared to be unlimited; but also it knew how to escape the colonists' most minute researches, for, in spite of all their efforts, in spite of the more than zeal,--the obstinacy,-- with which they carried on their exploration, the retreat of the mysterious being could not be discovered. from the th to the th of february the circle of investigation was extended to all the northern region of lincoln island, whose most secret nooks were explored. the colonists even went the length of tapping every rock. the search was extended to the extreme verge of the mountain. it was explored thus to the very summit of the truncated cone terminating the first row of rocks, then to the upper ridge of the enormous hat, at the bottom of which opened the crater. they did more; they visited the gulf, now extinct, but in whose depths the rumbling could be distinctly heard. however, no sign of smoke or vapour, no heating of the rock, indicated an approaching eruption. but neither there, nor in any other part of mount franklin, did the colonists find any traces of him of whom they were in search. their investigations were then directed to the downs. they carefully examined the high lava-cliffs of shark gulf from the base to the crest, although it was extremely difficult to reach even the level of the gulf. no one!--nothing! in short, in these two words was summed up so much fatigue uselessly expended, so much energy producing no result, that somewhat of anger mingled with the discomfiture of cyrus harding and his companions. it was now time to think of returning, for these researches could not be prolonged indefinitely. the colonists were certainly right in believing that the mysterious being did not reside on the surface of the island, and the wildest fancies haunted their excited imaginations. pencroft and neb, particularly, were not contented with the mystery, but allowed their imaginations to wander into the domain of the supernatural. on the th of february the colonists re-entered granite house, and by means of the double cord, carried by an arrow to the threshold of the door, they re-established communication between their habitation and the ground. a month later they commemorated, on the th of march, the third anniversary of their arrival on lincoln island. chapter fourteen. three years have passed--the new vessel--what is agreed on--prosperity of the colony--the dockyard--cold of the southern hemisphere--washing linen--mount franklin. three years had passed away since the escape of the prisoners from richmond, and how often during those three years had they spoken of their country, always present in their thoughts! they had no doubt that the civil war was at an end, and to them it appeared impossible that the just cause of the north had not triumphed. but what had been the incidents of this terrible war? how much blood had it not cost? how many of their friends must have fallen in the struggle? they often spoke of these things, without as yet being able to foresee the day when they would be permitted once more to see their country. to return thither, were it but for a few days, to renew the social link with the inhabited world, to establish a communication between their native land and their island, then to pass the longest, perhaps the best, portion of their existence in this colony founded by them, and which would then be dependent of their country, was this a dream impossible to realise? there were only two ways of accomplishing it--either a ship must appear off lincoln island, or the colonists must themselves build a vessel strong enough to sail to the nearest land. "unless," said pencroft, "our good genius himself provides us with the means of returning to our country." and, really, had any one told pencroft and neb that a ship of tons was waiting for them in shark gulf or at port balloon, they would not even have made a gesture of surprise. in their state of mind nothing appeared improbable. but cyrus harding, less confident, advised them to confine themselves to fact, and more especially so with regard to the building of a vessel--a really urgent work, since it was for the purpose of depositing, as soon as possible, at tabor island a document indicating ayrton's new residence. as the _bonadventure_ no longer existed, six months at least would be required for the construction of a new vessel. now winter was approaching, and the voyage could not be made before the following spring. "we have time to get everything ready for the fine season," remarked the engineer, who was consulting with pencroft about these matters. "i think, therefore, my friend, that since we have to rebuild our vessel it will be best to give her larger dimensions. the arrival of the scotch yacht at tabor island is very uncertain. it may even be that, having arrived several months ago, she has again sailed after having vainly searched for some trace of ayrton. will it not then be best to build a ship which, if necessary, could take us either to the polynesian archipelago or to new zealand? what do you think?" "i think, captain," answered the sailor; "i think that you are as capable of building a large vessel as a small one. neither the wood nor the tools are wanting. it is only a question of time." "and how many months would be required to build a vessel of from to tons?" asked harding. "seven or eight months at least," replied pencroft. "but it must not be forgotten that winter is drawing near, and that in severe frost wood is difficult to work. we must calculate on several weeks' delay, and if our vessel is ready by next november we may think ourselves very lucky." "well," replied cyrus harding, "that will be exactly the most favourable time for undertaking a voyage of any importance, either to tabor island or to a more distant land." "so it will, captain," answered the sailor. "make out your plans then; the workmen are ready, and i imagine that ayrton can lend us a good helping hand." the colonists, having been consulted, approved the engineer's plan, and it was, indeed, the best thing to be done. it is true that the construction of a ship of from two to three hundred tons would be great labour, but the colonists had confidence in themselves, justified by their previous success. cyrus harding then busied himself in drawing the plan of the vessel and making the model. during this time his companions employed themselves in felling and carting trees to furnish the ribs, timbers, and planks. the forest of the far west supplied the best oaks and elms. they took advantage of the opening already made on their last excursion to form a practicable road, which they named the far west road, and the trees were carried to the chimneys, where the dockyard was established. as to the road in question, the choice of trees had rendered its direction somewhat capricious, but that at the same time facilitated the access to a large part of the serpentine peninsula. it was important that the trees should be quickly felled and cut up, for they could not be used while yet green, and some time was necessary to allow them to get seasoned. the carpenters, therefore, worked vigorously during the month of april, which was troubled only by a few equinoctial gales of some violence. master jup aided them dexterously, either by climbing to the top of a tree to fasten the ropes or by lending his stout shoulders to carry the lopped trunks. all this timber was piled up under a large shed, built near the chimneys, and there awaited the time for use. the month of april was tolerably fine, as october often is in the northern zone. at the same time other work was actively continued, and soon all trace of devastation disappeared from the plateau of prospect heights. the mill was rebuilt, and new buildings rose in the poultry-yard. it had appeared necessary to enlarge their dimensions, for the feathered population had increased considerably. the stable now contained five onagas, four of which were well broken, and allowed themselves to be either driven or ridden, and a little colt. the colony now possessed a plough, to which the onagas were yoked like regular yorkshire or kentucky oxen. the colonists divided their work, and their arms never tired. then who could have enjoyed better health than these workers, and what good humour enlivened the evenings in granite house as they formed a thousand plans for the future! as a matter of course ayrton shared the common lot in every respect, and there was no longer any talk of his going to live at the corral. nevertheless he was still sad and reserved, and joined more in the work than in the pleasures of his companions. but he was a valuable workman at need--strong, skilful, ingenious, intelligent. he was esteemed and loved by all, and he could not be ignorant of it. in the meanwhile the corral was not abandoned. every other day one of the settlers, driving the cart or mounted on an onaga, went to look after the flock of musmons and goats and bring back the supply of milk required by neb. these excursions at the same time afforded opportunities for hunting. therefore herbert and gideon spilett, with top in front, traversed more often than their companions the road to the corral, and with the capital guns which they carried, capybaras, agouties, kangaroos, and wild pigs for large game, ducks, tetras, grouse, jacamars, and snipe for small, were never wanting in the house. the produce of the warren, of the oyster-bed, several turtles which were taken, excellent salmon which came up the mercy, vegetables from the plateau, wild fruit from the forest, were riches upon riches, and neb, the head cook, could scarcely by himself store them away. the telegraphic wire between the corral and granite house had of course been repaired, and it was worked whenever one or other of the settlers was at the corral and found it necessary to spend the night there. besides, the island was safe now and no attacks were to be feared, at any rate from men. however, that which had happened might happen again. a descent of pirates, or even of escaped convicts, was always to be feared. it was possible that companions or accomplices of bob harvey had been in the secret of his plans, and might be tempted to imitate him. the colonists, therefore, were careful to observe the sea around the island, and every day their telescope swept the horizon enclosed by the union and washington bays. when they went to the corral they examined the sea to the west with no less attention, and by climbing the spur their gaze extended over a large section of the western horizon. nothing suspicious was discerned, but still it was necessary for them to be on their guard. the engineer one evening imparted to his friends a plan which he had conceived for fortifying the corral. it appeared prudent to him to heighten the palisade and to flank it with a sort of block-house, which, if necessary, the settlers could hold against the enemy. granite house might, by its very position, be considered impregnable; therefore the corral with its buildings, its stores, and the animals it contained, would always be the object of pirates, whoever they were, who might land on the island, and should the colonists be obliged to shut themselves up there they ought also to be able to defend themselves without any disadvantage. this was a project which might be left for consideration, and they were, besides, obliged to put off its execution until the next spring. about the th of may the keel of the new vessel lay along the dockyard, and soon the stem and stern-post, mortised at each of its extremities, rose almost perpendicularly. the keel, of good oak, measured feet in length, this allowing a width of five-and-twenty feet to the midship beam. but this was all the carpenters could do before the arrival of the frosts and bad weather. during the following week they fixed the first of the stern timbers, but were then obliged to suspend work. during the last days of the month the weather was extremely bad. the wind blew from the east, sometimes with the violence of a tempest. the engineer was somewhat uneasy on account of the dockyard sheds--which, besides, he could not have established in any other place near to granite house--for the islet only imperfectly sheltered the shore from the fury of the open sea, and in great storms the waves beat against the very foot of the granite cliff. but, very fortunately, these fears were not realised. the wind shifted to the south-east, and there the beach of granite house was completely covered by flotsam point. pencroft and ayrton, the most zealous workmen at the new vessel, pursued their labour as long as they could. they were not men to mind the wind tearing at their hair, nor the rain wetting them to the skin, and a blow from a hammer is worth just as much in bad as in fine weather. but when a severe frost succeeded this wet period, the wood, its fibres acquiring the hardness of iron, became extremely difficult to work, and about the th of june ship-building was obliged to be entirely discontinued. cyrus harding and his companions had not omitted to observe how severe was the temperature during the winters of lincoln island. the cold was comparable to that experienced in the states of new england, situated at almost the same distance from the equator. in the northern hemisphere, or at any rate in the part occupied by british america and the north of the united states, this phenomenon is explained by the flat conformation of the territories bordering on the pole, and on which there is no intumescence of the soil to oppose any obstacle to the north winds; here, in lincoln island, this explanation would not suffice. "it has even been observed," remarked harding one day to his companions, "that in equal latitudes the islands and coast regions are less tried by the cold than inland countries. i have often heard it asserted that the winters of lombardy, for example, are not less rigorous than those of scotland, which results from the sea restoring during the winter the heat which it received during the summer. islands are, therefore, in a better situation for benefiting by this restitution." "but then, captain harding," asked herbert, "why does lincoln island appear to escape the common law?" "that is difficult to explain," answered the engineer. "however, i should be disposed to conjecture that this peculiarity results from the situation of the island in the southern hemisphere, which, as you know, my boy, is colder than the northern hemisphere." "yes," said herbert, "and icebergs are met with in lower latitudes in the south than in the north of the pacific." "that is true," remarked pencroft, "and when i have been serving on board whalers i have seen icebergs off cape horn." "the severe cold experienced in lincoln island," said gideon spilett, "may then perhaps be explained by the presence of floes or icebergs comparatively near to lincoln island." "your opinion is very admissible indeed, my dear spilett," answered cyrus harding, "and it is evidently to the proximity of icebergs that we owe our rigorous winters. i would draw your attention also to an entirely physical cause, which renders the southern colder than the northern hemisphere. in fact, since the sun is nearer to this hemisphere during the summer, it is necessarily more distant during the winter. this explains then the excess of temperature in the two seasons, for, if we find the winters very cold in lincoln island, we must not forget that the summers here, on the contrary, are very hot." "but why, if you please, captain," asked pencroft, knitting his brows, "why should our hemisphere, as you say, be so badly divided? it isn't just, that!" "friend pencroft," answered the engineer, laughing, "whether just or not, we must submit to it, and here lies the reason for this peculiarity. the earth does not describe a circle round the sun, but an ellipse, as it must by the laws of rational mechanics. now, the earth occupies one of the centres of the ellipse, and consequently, at the time of its transfer, it is further from the sun, that is to say, at its apogee, and at another time nearer, that is to say, at its perigee. now it happens that it is during the winter of the southern countries that it is at its most distant point from the sun, and consequently, in a situation for those regions to feel the greatest cold. nothing can be done to prevent that, and men, pencroft, however learned they may be, can never change anything of the cosmographical order established by god himself." "and yet," added pencroft, persisting, "the world is very learned. what a big book, captain, might be made with all that is known!" "and what a much bigger book still with all that is not known!" answered harding. at last, for one reason or another, the month of june brought the cold with its accustomed intensity, and the settlers were often confined to granite house. ah! how wearisome this imprisonment was to them, and more particularly to gideon spilett. "look here," said he to neb one day, "i would give you by notarial deed all the estates which will come to me some day, if you were a good-enough fellow to go, no matter where, and subscribe to some newspaper for me! decidedly the thing that is most essential to my happiness is the knowing every morning what has happened the day before in other places than this!" neb began to laugh. "'pon my word," he replied, "the only thing i think about is my daily work!" the truth was that indoors as well as out there was no want of work. the colony of lincoln island was now at its highest point of prosperity, achieved by three years of continued hard work. the destruction of the brig had been a new source of riches. without speaking of the complete rig which would serve for the vessel now on the stocks, utensils and tools of all sorts, weapons and ammunition, clothes and instruments, were now piled in the store-rooms of granite house. it had not even been necessary to resort again to the manufacture of the coarse felt materials. though the colonists had suffered from cold during their first winter, the bad season might now come without their having any reason to dread its severity. linen was plentiful also, and besides, they kept it with extreme care. from chloride of sodium, which is nothing else than sea salt, cyrus harding easily extracted the soda and chlorine. the soda, which it was easy to change into carbonate of soda, and the chlorine, of which he made chloride of lime, were employed for various domestic purposes, and especially in bleaching linen. besides, they did not wash more than four times a year, as was done by families in the olden time, and it may be added, that pencroft and gideon spilett, whilst waiting for the postman to bring him his newspaper, distinguished themselves as washermen. so passed the winter months, june, july, and august. they were very severe, and the average observations of the thermometer did not give more than eight degrees of fahrenheit. it was therefore lower in temperature than the preceding winter. but then, what splendid fires blazed continually on the hearths of granite house, the smoke marking the granite wall with long, zebra-like streaks! fuel was not spared, as it grew naturally a few steps from them. besides, the chips of the wood destined for the construction of the ship enabled them to economise the coal, which required more trouble to transport. men and animals were all well. master jup was a little chilly, it must be confessed. this was perhaps his only weakness, and it was necessary to make him a well-wadded dressing-gown. but what a servant he was, clever, zealous, indefatigable, not indiscreet, not talkative, and he might have been with reason proposed as a model for all his biped brothers in the old and the new world! "as for that," said pencroft, "when one has four hands at one's service, of course one's work ought to be done so much the better!" and indeed the intelligent creature did it well. during the seven months which had passed since the last researches made round the mountain, and during the month of september, which brought back fine weather, nothing was heard of the genius of the island. his power was not manifested in any way. it is true that it would have been inutile, for no incident occurred to put the colonists to any painful trial. cyrus harding even observed that if by chance the communication between the unknown and the tenants of granite house had ever been established through the granite, and if top's instinct had as it were felt it, there was no further sign of it during this period. the dog's growling had entirely ceased, as well as the uneasiness of the orang. the two friends--for they were so--no longer prowled round the opening of the inner well, nor did they bark or whine in that singular way which from the first the engineer had noticed. but could he be sure that this was all that was to be said about this enigma, and that he should never arrive at a solution? could he be certain that some conjuncture would not occur which would bring the mysterious personage on the scene? who could tell what the future might have in reserve? at last the winter was ended, but an event, the consequences of which might be serious, occurred in the first days of the returning spring. on the th of september, cyrus harding, having observed the crater, saw smoke curling round the summit of the mountain, its first vapours rising in the air. chapter fifteen. the awakening of the volcano--the fine season--continuation of work--the evening of the th of october--a telegram--a question--an answer-- departure for the corral--the notice--the additional wire--the basalt coast--at high tide--at low tide--the cavern--a dazzling light. the colonists, warned by the engineer, left their work and gazed in silence at the summit of mount franklin. the volcano had awoke, and the vapour had penetrated the mineral layer heaped up at the bottom of the crater. but would the subterranean fires provoke any violent eruption? this was an event which could not be foreseen. however, even while admitting the possibility of an eruption, it was not probable that the whole of lincoln island would suffer from it. the flow of volcanic matter is not always disastrous, and the island had already undergone this trial, as was shown by the streams of lava hardened on the northern slopes of the mountain. besides, from the shape of the crater--the opening broken in the upper edge--the matter would be thrown to the side opposite the fertile regions of the island. however, the past did not necessarily answer for the future. often, at the summit of volcanoes, the old craters close and new ones open. this has occurred in the two hemispheres--at etna, popocatepetl, at orizaba-- and on the eve of an eruption there is everything to be feared. in fact, an earthquake--a phenomenon which often accompanies volcanic eruptions--is enough to change the interior arrangement of a mountain, and to open new outlets for the burning lava. cyrus harding explained these things to his companions, and, without exaggerating the state of things, he told them all the pros and cons. after all they could not prevent it. it did not appear likely that granite house would be threatened unless the ground was shaken by an earthquake. but the corral would be in great danger should a new crater open in the southern side of mount franklin. from that day the smoke never disappeared from the top of the mountain, and it could even be perceived that it increased in height and thickness, without any flame mingling in its heavy volumes. the phenomenon was still concentrated in the lower part of the central crater. however, with the fine days work had been continued. the building of the vessel was hastened as much as possible, and, by means of the waterfall on the shore, cyrus harding managed to establish an hydraulic saw-mill, which rapidly cut up the trunks of trees into planks and joists. the mechanism of this apparatus was as simple as those used in the rustic saw-mills of norway. a first horizontal movement to move the piece of wood, a second vertical movement to move the saw--this was all that was wanted; and the engineer succeeded by means of a wheel, two cylinders, and pulleys properly arranged. towards the end of the month of september the skeleton of the vessel, which was to be rigged as a schooner, lay in the dockyard. the ribs were almost entirely completed, and, all the timbers having been sustained by a provisional band, the shape of the vessel could already be seen. this schooner, sharp in the bows, very slender in the after-part, would evidently be suitable for a long voyage, if wanted; but laying the planking would still take a considerable time. very fortunately, the iron-work of the pirate brig had been saved after the explosion. from the planks and injured ribs pencroft and ayrton had extracted the bolts and a large quantity of copper nails. it was so much work saved for the smiths, but the carpenters had much to do. ship-building was interrupted for a week for the harvest, the haymaking, and the gathering in of the different crops on the plateau. this work finished, every moment was devoted to finishing the schooner. when night came the workmen were really quite exhausted. so as not to lose any time they had changed the hours for their meals; they dined at twelve o'clock, and only had their supper when daylight failed them. they then ascended to granite house, when they were always ready to go to bed. sometimes, however, when the conversation bore on some interesting subject the hour for sleep was delayed for a time. the colonists then spoke of the future, and talked willingly of the changes which a voyage in the schooner to inhabited lands would make in their situation. but always, in the midst of these plans, prevailed the thought of a subsequent return to lincoln island. never would they abandon this colony, founded with so much labour and with such success, and to which a communication with america would afford a fresh impetus. pencroft and neb especially hoped to end their days there. "herbert," said the sailor, "you will never abandon lincoln island?" "never, pencroft, and especially if you make up your mind to stay there." "that was made up long ago, my boy," answered pencroft. "i shall expect you. you will bring me your wife and children, and i shall make jolly little chaps of your youngsters!" "that's agreed," replied herbert, laughing and blushing at the same time. "and you, captain harding," resumed pencroft enthusiastically, "you will be still the governor of the island! ah! how many inhabitants could it support? ten thousand at least!" they talked in this way, allowing pencroft to run on, and at last the reporter actually started a newspaper--the _new lincoln herald_! so is man's heart. the desire to perform a work which will endure, which will survive him, is the origin of his superiority over all other living creatures here below. it is this which has established his dominion, and this it is which justifies it, over all the world. after that, who knows if jup and top had not themselves their little dream of the future. ayrton silently said to himself that he would like to see lord glenarvan again and show himself to all restored. one evening, on the th of october, the conversation was prolonged later than usual. it was nine o'clock. already, long badly-concealed yawns gave warning of the hour of rest, and pencroft was proceeding towards his bed, when the electric bell, placed in the dining-room, suddenly rang. all were there, cyrus harding, gideon spilett, herbert, ayrton, pencroft, neb. therefore none of the colonists were at the corral. cyrus harding rose. his companions stared at each other, scarcely believing their ears. "what does that mean?" cried neb. "was it the devil who rang it?" no one answered. "the weather is stormy," observed herbert. "might not its influence of electricity--" herbert did not finish his phrase. the engineer, towards whom all eyes were turned, shook his head negatively. "we must wait," said gideon spilett. "if it is a signal, whoever it may be who has made it, he will renew it." "but who do you think it is?" cried neb. "who?" answered pencroft, "but he--" the sailor's sentence was cut short by a new tinkle of the bell. harding went to the apparatus, and sent this question to the corral:-- "what do you want?" a few moments later the needle, moving on the alphabetic dial, gave this reply to the tenants of granite house:-- "come to the corral immediately." "at last!" exclaimed harding. yes! at last! the mystery was about to be unveiled. the colonists' fatigue had disappeared before the tremendous interest which was about to urge them to the corral, and all wish for rest had ceased. without having uttered a word, in a few moments they had left granite house, and were standing on the beach. jup and top alone were left behind. they could do without them. the night was black. the new moon had disappeared at the same time as the sun. as herbert had observed great stormy clouds formed a lowering and heavy vault, preventing any star rays. a few lightning-flashes, reflections from a distant storm, illuminated the horizon. it was possible that a few hours later the thunder would roll over the island itself. the night was very threatening. but however deep the darkness was, it would not prevent them from finding the familiar road to the corral. they ascended the left bank of the mercy, reached the plateau, passed the bridge over creek glycerine, and advanced through the forest. they walked at a good pace, a prey to the liveliest emotions. there was no doubt but that they were now going to learn the long-searched-for answer to the enigma, the name of that mysterious being, so deeply concerned in their life, so generous in his influence, so powerful in his action! must not this stranger have indeed mingled with their existence, have known the smallest details, have heard all that was said in granite house, to have been able always to act in the very nick of time? every one, wrapped up in his own reflections, pressed forward. under the arch of trees the darkness was such that the edge of the road even could not be seen. not a sound in the forest. both animals and birds, influenced by the heaviness of the atmosphere, remained motionless and silent. not a breath disturbed the leaves. the footsteps of the colonists alone resounded on the hardened ground. during the first quarter of an hour the silence was only interrupted by this remark from pencroft:-- "we ought to have brought a torch." and by this reply from the engineer:-- "we shall find one at the corral." harding and his companions had left granite house at twelve minutes past nine. at forty-seven minutes past nine they had traversed three out of the five miles which separated the mouth of the mercy from the corral. at that moment sheets of lightning spread over the island and illumined the dark trees. the flashes dazzled and almost blinded them. evidently the storm would not be long in bursting forth. the flashes gradually became brighter and more rapid. distant thunder growled in the sky. the atmosphere was stifling. the colonists proceeded as if they were urged onwards by some irresistible force. at ten o'clock a vivid flash showed them the palisade, and as they reached the gate the storm burst forth with tremendous fury. in a minute the corral was crossed, and harding stood before the hut. probably the house was occupied by the stranger, since it was from thence that the telegram had been sent. however, no light shone through the window. the engineer knocked at the door. no answer. cyrus harding opened the door, and the settlers entered the room, which was perfectly dark. a light was struck by neb, and in a few moments the lantern was lighted and the light thrown into every corner of the room. there was no one there. everything was in the state in which it had been left. "have we been deceived by an illusion?" murmured cyrus harding. no! that was not possible! the telegram had clearly said-- "come to the corral immediately." they approached the table specially devoted to the use of the wire. everything was in order--the pile and the box containing it, as well as all the apparatus. "who came here the last time?" asked the engineer. "i did, captain," answered ayrton. "and that was--" "four days ago." "ah! a note!" cried herbert, pointing to a paper lying on the table. on this paper were written these words in english:-- "follow the new wire." "forward!" cried harding, who understood that the despatch had not been sent from the corral, but from the mysterious retreat, communicating directly with granite house by means of a supplementary wire joined to the old one. neb took the lighted lantern, and all left the corral. the storm then burst forth with tremendous violence. the interval between each lightning-flash and each thunder-clap diminished rapidly. the summit of the volcano, with its plume of vapour, could be seen by occasional flashes. there was no telegraphic communication in any part of the corral between the house and the palisade; but the engineer, running straight to the first post, saw by the light of a flash a new wire hanging from the isolater to the ground. "there it is!" said he. this wire lay along the ground, and was surrounded with an isolating substance like a submarine cable, so as to assure the free transmission of the current. it appeared to pass through the wood and the southern spurs of the mountain, and consequently it ran towards the west. "follow it!" said cyrus harding. and the settlers immediately pressed forward, guided by the wire. the thunder continued to roar with such violence that not a word could be heard. however, there was no occasion for speaking, but to get forward as fast as possible. cyrus harding and his companions then climbed the spur rising between the corral valley and that of falls river, which they crossed at its narrowest part. the wire, sometimes stretched over the lower branches of the trees, sometimes lying on the ground, guided them surely. the engineer had supposed that the wire would perhaps stop at the bottom of the valley, and that the stranger's retreat would be there. nothing of the sort. they were obliged to ascend the south-western spur, and re-descend on that arid plateau terminated by the strangely-wild basalt cliff. from time to time one of the colonists stooped down and felt for the wire with his hands; but there was now no doubt that the wire was running directly towards the sea. there, to a certainty, in the depths of those rocks, was the dwelling so long sought for in vain. the sky was literally on fire. flash succeeded flash. several struck the summit of the volcano in the midst of the thick smoke. it appeared there as if the mountain was vomiting flame. at a few minutes to eleven the colonists arrived on the high cliff overlooking the ocean to the west. the wind had risen. the surf roared feet below. harding calculated that they had gone a mile and a half from the coral. at this point the wire entered among the rocks, following the steep side of a narrow ravine. the settlers followed it at the risk of occasioning a fall of the slightly-balanced rocks, and being dashed into the sea. the descent was extremely perilous, but they did not think of the danger; they were no longer masters of themselves, and an irresistible attraction drew them towards this mysterious place as the magnet draws iron. thus they almost unconsciously descended this ravine, which even in broad daylight would have been considered impracticable. the stones rolled and sparkled like fiery balls when they crossed through the gleams of light. harding was first--ayrton last. on they went, step by step. now they slid over the slippery rock; then they struggled to their feet and scrambled on. at last the wire touched the rocks on the beach. the colonists had reached the bottom of the basalt cliff. there appeared a narrow ridge, running horizontally and parallel with the sea. the settlers followed the wire along it. they had not gone a hundred paces when the ridge by a moderate incline sloped down to the level of the sea. the engineer seized the wire and found that it disappeared beneath the waves. his companions were stupefied. a cry of disappointment, almost a cry of despair, escaped them! must they then plunge beneath the water and seek there for some submarine cavern? in their excited state they would not have hesitated to do it. the engineer stopped them. he led his companions to a hollow in the rocks, and there-- "we must wait," said he. "the tide is high. at low-water the way will be open." "but what can make you think--" asked pencroft. "he would not have called us if the means had been wanting to enable us to reach him!" cyrus harding spoke in a tone of such thorough conviction that no objection was raised. his remark, besides, was logical. it was quite possible that an opening, practicable at low-water, though hidden now by the high tide, opened at the foot of the cliff. there was some time to wait. the colonists remained silently crouching in a deep hollow. rain now began to fall in torrents. the thunder was re-echoed among the rocks with a grand sonorousness. the colonists' emotion was great. a thousand strange and extraordinary ideas crossed their brains, and they expected some grand and superhuman apparition, which alone could come up to the notion they had formed of the mysterious genius of the island. at midnight, harding, carrying the lantern, descended to the beach to reconnoitre. the engineer was not mistaken. the beginning of an immense excavation could be seen under the water. there the wire, bending at a right angle, entered the yawning gulf. cyrus harding returned to his companions, and said simply-- "in an hour the opening will be practicable." "it is there, then?" said pencroft. "did you doubt it?" returned harding. "but this cavern must be filled with water to a certain height," observed herbert. "either the cavern will be completely dry," replied harding, "and in that case we can traverse it on foot, or it will not be dry, and some means of transport will be put at our disposal." an hour passed. all climbed down through the rain to the level of the sea. there was now eight feet of the opening above the water. it was like the arch of a bridge, under which rushed the foaming water. leaning forward, the engineer saw a black object floating on the water. he drew it towards him. it was a boat, moored to some interior projection of the cave. this boat was iron-plated. two oars lay at the bottom. "jump in!" said harding. in a moment the settlers were in the boat. neb and ayrton took the oars, pencroft the rudder. cyrus harding in the bows, with the lantern, lighted the way. the elliptical roof, under which the boat at first passed, suddenly rose; but the darkness was too deep, and the light of the lantern too slight, for either the extent, length, height, or depth of the cave to be ascertained. solemn silence reigned in this basaltic cavern. not a sound could penetrate into it, even the thunder peals could not pierce its thick sides. such immense caves exist in various parts of the world, natural crypts dating from the geological epoch of the globe. some are filled by the sea; others contain entire lakes in their sides. such is fingal's cave, in the island of staffa, one of the hebrides; such are the caves of morgat, in the bay of douarucuez, in brittany, the caves of bonifacier, in corsica, those of lyse-fjord, in norway; such are the immense mammoth caverns in kentucky, feet in height, and more than twenty miles in length! in many parts of the globe, nature has excavated these caverns, and preserved them for the admiration of man. did the cavern which the settlers were now exploring extend to the centre of the island? for a quarter of an hour the boat had been advancing, making _detours_, indicated to pencroft by the engineer in short sentences, when all at once-- "more to the right!" he commanded. the boat, altering its course, came up alongside the right wall. the engineer wished to see if the wire still ran along the side. the wire was there fastened to the rock. "forward!" said harding. and the two oars, plunging into the dark waters, urged the boat onwards. on they went for another quarter of an hour, and a distance of half-a-mile must have been cleared from the mouth of the cave, when harding's voice was again heard. "stop!" said he. the boat stopped, and the colonists perceived a bright light illuminating the vast cavern, so deeply excavated in the bowels of the island, of which nothing had ever led them to suspect the existence. at a height of a hundred feet rose the vaulted roof, supported on basalt shafts. irregular arches, strange mouldings, appeared on the columns erected by nature in thousands from the first epochs of the formation of the globe. the basalt pillars, fitted one into the other, measured from forty to fifty feet in height, and the water, calm in spite of the tumult outside, washing their base. the brilliant focus of light, pointed out by the engineer, touched every point of rock, and flooded the walls with light. by reflection the water reproduced the brilliant sparkles, so that the boat appeared to be floating between two glittering zones. they could not be mistaken in the nature of the irradiation thrown from the centre light, whose clear rays broke all the angles, all the projections of the cavern. this light proceeded from an electric source, and its white colour betrayed its origin. it was the sun of this cave, and it filled it entirely. at a sign from cyrus harding the oars again plunged into the water, causing a regular shower of gems, and the boat was urged forward towards the light, which was now not more than half a cable's length distant. at this place the breadth of the sheet of water measured nearly feet, and beyond the dazzling centre could be seen an enormous basaltic wall, blocking up any issue on that side. the cavern widened here considerably, the sea forming a little lake. but the roof, the side walls, the end cliff, all the prisms, all the peaks, were flooded with the electric fluid, so that the brilliancy belonged to them, and as if the light issued from them. in the centre of the lake a long cigar-shaped object floated on the surface of the water, silent, motionless. the brilliancy which issued from it escaped from its sides as from two kilns heated to a white heat. this apparatus, similar in shape to an enormous whale, was about feet long, and rose about ten or twelve above the water. the boat slowly approached it. cyrus harding stood up in the bows. he gazed, a prey to violent excitement. then, all at once, seizing the reporter's arm-- "it is he! it can only be he!" he cried, "he!--" then, falling back on the seat, he murmured a name which gideon spilett alone could hear. the reporter evidently knew this name, for it had a wonderful effect upon him, and he answered in a hoarse voice-- "he! an outlawed man!" "he!" said harding. at the engineer's command the boat approached this singular floating apparatus. the boat touched the left side, from which escaped a ray of light through a thick glass. harding and his companions mounted on the platform. an open hatchway was there. all darted down the opening. at the bottom of the ladder was a deck, lighted by electricity. at the end of this deck was a door, which harding opened. a richly-ornamented room, quickly traversed by the colonists, was joined to a library, over which a luminous ceiling shed a flood of light. at the end of the library a large door, also shut, was opened by the engineer. an immense saloon--a sort of museum, in which were heaped up, with all the treasures of the mineral world, works of art, marvels of industry-- appeared before the eyes of the colonists, who almost thought themselves suddenly transported into a land of enchantment. stretched on a rich sofa they saw a man, who did not appear to notice their presence. then harding raised his voice, and to the extreme surprise of his companions, he uttered these words-- "captain nemo, you asked for us! we are here." chapter sixteen. captain nemo--his first words--the history of the recluse--his adventures--his sentiments--his comrades--submarine life--alone--the last refuge of the nautilus in lincoln island--the mysterious genius of the island. at these words the reclining figure rose, and the electric light fell upon his countenance; a magnificent head, the forehead high, the glance commanding, beard white, hair abundant and falling over the shoulders. his hand rested upon the cushion of the divan from which he had just risen. he appeared perfectly calm. it was evident that his strength had been gradually undermined by illness, but his voice seemed yet powerful, as he said in english, and in a tone which evinced extreme surprise-- "sir, i have no name." "nevertheless, i know you!" replied cyrus harding. captain nemo fixed his penetrating gaze upon the engineer as though he were about to annihilate him. then, falling back amid the pillows of the divan-- "after all, what matters now?" he murmured; "i am dying!" cyrus harding drew near the captain, and gideon spilett took his hand-- it was of a feverish heat. ayrton, pencroft, herbert, and neb, stood respectfully apart in an angle of the magnificent saloon, whose atmosphere was saturated with the electric fluid. meanwhile captain nemo withdrew his hand, and motioned the engineer and the reporter to be seated. all regarded him with profound emotion. before them they beheld that being whom they had styled the "genius of the island," the powerful protector whose intervention, in so many circumstances, had been so efficacious, the benefactor to whom they owed such a debt of gratitude! their eyes beheld a man only, and a man at the point of death, where pencroft and neb had expected to find an almost supernatural being! but how happened it that cyrus harding had recognised captain nemo? why had the latter so suddenly risen on hearing this name uttered, a name which he had believed known to none? the captain had resumed his position on the divan, and leaning on his arm, he regarded the engineer, seated near him. "you know the name i formerly bore, sir?" he asked. "i do," answered cyrus harding, "and also that of this wonderful submarine vessel--" "the _nautilus_?" said the captain, with a faint smile. "the _nautilus_!" "but do you--do you know who i am?" "i do." "it is nevertheless many years since i have held any communication with the inhabited world; three long years have i passed in the depths of the sea, the only place where i have found liberty! who then can have betrayed my secret?" "a man who was bound to you by no tie, captain nemo, and who, consequently, cannot be accused of treachery." "the frenchman who was cast on board my vessel by chance sixteen years since?" "the same." "he and his two companions did not then perish in the maelstrom, in the midst of which the _nautilus_ was struggling." "they escaped, and a book has appeared under the title of _twenty thousand leagues under the sea_, which contains your history." "the history of a few months only of my life!" interrupted the captain impetuously. "it is true," answered cyrus harding, "but a few months of that strange life have sufficed to make you known--" "as a great criminal, doubtless!" said captain nemo, a haughty smile curling his lips. "yes, a rebel, perhaps an outlaw against humanity!" the engineer was silent. "well, sir?" "it is not for me to judge you, captain nemo," answered cyrus harding, "at any rate as regards your past life. i am, with the rest of the world, ignorant of the motives which induced you to adopt this strange mode of existence, and i cannot judge of effects without knowing their causes; but what i _do_ know is, that a beneficent hand has constantly protected us since our arrival on lincoln island, that we all owe our lives to a good, generous, and powerful being, and that this being so powerful, good and generous, captain nemo, is yourself!" "it is i," answered the captain simply. the engineer and reporter rose. their companions had drawn near, and the gratitude with which their hearts were charged was about to express itself in their gestures and words. captain nemo stopped them by a sign, and in a voice which betrayed more emotion than he doubtless intended to show. "wait till you have heard all," he said. [see note .] and the captain, in a few concise sentences, ran over the events of his life. his narrative was short, yet he was obliged to summon up his whole remaining energy to arrive at the end. he was evidently contending against extreme weakness. several times cyrus harding entreated him to repose for a while, but he shook his head as a man to whom the morrow may never come, and when the reporter offered his assistance-- "it is useless," he said; "my hours are numbered." captain nemo was an indian, the prince dakkar, son of a rajah of the then independent territory of bundelkund. his father sent him, when ten years of age, to europe, in order that he might receive an education in all respects complete, and in the hopes that by his talents and knowledge he might one day take a leading part in raising his long degraded and heathen country to a level with the nations of europe. from the age of ten years to that of thirty prince dakkar, endowed by nature with her richest gifts of intellect, accumulated knowledge of every kind, and in science, literature, and art his researches were extensive and profound. he travelled over the whole of europe. his rank and fortune caused him to be everywhere sought after; but the pleasures of the world had for him no attractions. though young and possessed of every personal advantage, he was ever grave--sombre even--devoured by an unquenchable thirst for knowledge, and cherishing in the recesses of his heart the hope that he might become a great and powerful ruler of a free and enlightened people. still, for long the love of science triumphed over all other feelings. he became an artist deeply impressed by the marvels of art, a philosopher to whom no one of the higher sciences was unknown, a statesman versed in the policy of european courts. to the eyes of those who observed him superficially he might have passed for one of those cosmopolitans, curious of knowledge, but disdaining action; one of those opulent travellers, haughty and cynical, who move incessantly from place to place, and are of no country. this artist, this philosopher, this man was, however, still cherishing the hope instilled into him from his earliest days. prince dakkar returned to bundelkund in the year . he married a noble indian lady, who was imbued with an ambition not less ardent than that by which he was inspired. two children were born to them, whom they tenderly loved. but domestic happiness did not prevent him from seeking to carry out the object at which he aimed. he waited an opportunity. at length, as he vainly fancied, it presented itself. instigated by princes equally ambitious and less sagacious and more unscrupulous than he was, the people of india were persuaded that they might successfully rise against their english rulers, who had brought them out of a state of anarchy and constant warfare and misery, and had established peace and prosperity in their country. their ignorance and gross superstition made them the facile tools of their designing chiefs. in the great sepoy revolt broke out. prince dakkar, under the belief that he should thereby have the opportunity of attaining the object of his long-cherished ambition, was easily drawn into it. he forthwith devoted his talents and wealth to the service of this cause. he aided it in person; he fought in the front ranks; he risked his life equally with the humblest of the wretched and misguided fanatics; he was ten times wounded in twenty engagements, seeking death but finding it not, when at length the sanguinary rebels were utterly defeated, and the atrocious mutiny was brought to an end. never before had the british power in india been exposed to such danger, and if, as they had hoped, the sepoys had received assistance from without, the influence and supremacy in asia of the united kingdom would have been a thing of the past. the name of prince dakkar was at that time well-known. he had fought openly and without concealment. a price was set upon his head, but he managed to escape from his pursuers. civilisation never recedes; the law of necessity ever forces it onwards. the sepoys were vanquished, and the land of the rajahs of old fell again under the rule of england. prince dakkar, unable to find that death he courted, returned to the mountain fastnesses of bundelkund. there, alone in the world, overcome by disappointment at the destruction of all his vain hopes, a prey to profound disgust for all human beings, filled with hatred of the civilised world, he realised the wreck of his fortune, assembled some score of his most faithful companions, and one day disappeared, leaving no trace behind. where, then, did he seek that liberty denied him upon the inhabited earth? under the waves, in the depths of the ocean, where none could follow. the warrior became the man of science. upon a deserted island of the pacific he established his dockyard, and there a submarine vessel was constructed from his designs. by methods which will at some future day be revealed he had rendered subservient the illimitable forces of electricity, which, extracted from inexhaustible sources, was employed for all the requirements of his floating equipage, as a moving, lighting, and heating agent. the sea, with its countless treasures, its myriads of fish, its numberless wrecks, its enormous mammalia, and not only all that nature supplied, but also all that man had lost in its depths, sufficed for every want of the prince and his crew--and thus was his most ardent desire accomplished, never again to hold communication with the earth. he named his submarine vessel the _nautilus_, called himself simply captain nemo, and disappeared beneath the seas. during many years this strange being visited every ocean, from pole to pole. outcast of the inhabited earth in these unknown worlds he gathered incalculable treasures. the millions lost in the bay of vigo, in , by the galleons of spain, furnished him with a mine of inexhaustible riches which he devoted always, anonymously, in favour of those nations who fought for the independence of their country. [see note .] for long, however, he had held no communication with his fellow-creatures, when, during the night of the th of november, , three men were cast on board his vessel. they were a french professor, his servant, and a canadian fisherman. these three men had been hurled overboard by a collision which had taken place between the _nautilus_ and the united states frigate _abraham lincoln_, which had chased her. captain nemo learnt from this professor that the _nautilus_, taken now for a gigantic mammal of the whale species, now for a submarine vessel carrying a crew of pirates, was sought for in every sea. he might have returned these three men to the ocean, from whence chance had brought them in contact with his mysterious existence. instead of doing this he kept them prisoners, and during seven months they were enabled to behold all the wonders of a voyage of twenty thousand leagues under the sea. one day, the nd of june, , these three men, who knew nothing of the past history of captain nemo, succeeded in escaping in one of the _nautilus's_ boats. but as at this time the _nautilus_ was drawn into the vortex of the maelstrom, off the coast of norway, the captain naturally believed that the fugitives, engulfed in that frightful whirlpool, found their death at the bottom of the abyss. he was ignorant that the frenchman and his two companions had been miraculously cast on shore, that the fishermen of the loffoden islands had rendered them assistance, and that the professor, on his return to france, had published that work in which seven months of the strange and eventful navigation of the _nautilus_ were narrated and exposed to the curiosity of the public. for a long time after this, captain nemo continued to live thus, traversing every sea. but one by one his companions died, and found their last resting-place in their cemetery of coral, in the bed of the pacific. at last captain nemo remained the solitary survivor of all those who had taken refuge with him in the depths of the ocean. he was now sixty years of age. although alone, he succeeded in navigating the _nautilus_ towards one of those submarine caverns which had sometimes served him as a harbour. one of these ports was hollowed beneath lincoln island, and at this moment furnished an asylum to the _nautilus_. the captain had now remained there six years, navigating the ocean no longer, but awaiting death, and that moment when he should rejoin his former companions, when by chance he observed the descent of the balloon which carried the prisoners of the confederates. clad in his diving-dress he was walking beneath the water at a few cables' length from the shore of the island, when the engineer had been thrown into the sea. moved by a feeling of compassion the captain saved cyrus harding. his first impulse was to fly from the vicinity of the five castaways; but his harbour of refuge was closed, for in consequence of an elevation of the basalt, produced by the influence of volcanic action, he could no longer pass through the entrance of the vault. though there was sufficient depth of water to allow a light craft to pass the bar, there was not enough for the _nautilus_, whose draught of water was considerable. captain nemo was compelled, therefore, to remain. he observed these men thrown without resources upon a desert island, but had no wish to be himself discovered by them. by degrees he became interested in their efforts when he saw them honest, energetic, and bound to each other by the ties of friendship. as if despite his wishes, he penetrated all the secrets of their existence. by means of the diving-dress he could easily reach the well in the interior of granite house, and climbing by the projections of rock to its upper orifice he heard the colonists as they recounted the past, and studied the present and future. he learnt from them the tremendous conflict of america with america itself, for the abolition of slavery. yes, these men were worthy to reconcile captain nemo with that humanity which they represented so nobly in the island. captain nemo had saved cyrus harding. it was he also who had brought back the dog to the chimneys, who rescued top from the waters of the lake, who caused to fall at flotsam point the case containing so many things useful to the colonists, who conveyed the canoe back into the stream of the mercy, who cast the cord from the top of granite house at the time of the attack by the baboons, who made known the presence of ayrton upon tabor island, by means of the document enclosed in the bottle, who caused the explosion of the brig by the shock of a torpedo placed at the bottom of the canal, who saved herbert from a certain death by bringing the sulphate of quinine; and finally, it was he who had killed the convicts with the electric balls, of which he possessed the secret, and which he employed in the chase of submarine creatures. thus were explained so many apparently supernatural occurrences, and which all proved the generosity and power of the captain. nevertheless, this noble misanthrope longed to benefit his _proteges_ still further. there yet remained much useful advice to give them, and, his heart being softened by the approach of death, he invited, as we are aware, the colonists of granite house to visit the _nautilus_, by means of a wire which connected it with the corral. possibly he would not have done this had he been aware that cyrus harding was sufficiently acquainted with his history to address him by the name of nemo. the captain concluded the narrative of his life. cyrus harding then spoke; he recalled all the incidents which had exercised so beneficent an influence upon the colony, and in the names of his companions and himself thanked the generous being to whom they owed so much. but captain nemo paid little attention; his mind appeared to be absorbed by one idea, and without taking the proffered hand of the engineer-- "now, sir," said he, "now that you know my history, your judgment!" in saying this, the captain evidently alluded to an important incident witnessed by the three strangers thrown on board his vessel, and which the french professor had related in his work, causing a profound and terrible sensation. some days previous to the flight of the professor and his two companions, the _nautilus_, being chased by a frigate in the north of the atlantic, had hurled herself as a ram upon this frigate, and sunk her without mercy. cyrus harding understood the captain's allusion, and was silent. "it was an enemy's frigate," exclaimed captain nemo, transformed for an instant into the prince dakkar, "an enemy's frigate! it was she who attacked me--i was in a narrow and shallow bay--the frigate barred my way--and i sank her!" a few moments of silence ensued; then the captain demanded-- "what think you of my life, gentlemen?" cyrus harding extended his hand to the ci-devant prince and replied gravely, "sir, your error was in supposing that the past can be resuscitated, and in contending against inevitable progress. it is one of those errors which some admire, others blame; which god alone can judge. he who is mistaken in an action which he sincerely believes to be right may be an enemy, but retains our esteem. your error is one that we may admire, and your name has nothing to fear from the judgment of history, which does not condemn heroic folly, but its results." the old man's breast swelled with emotion, and raising his hand to heaven-- "was i wrong, or in the right?" he murmured. cyrus harding replied, "all great actions return to god, from whom they are derived. captain nemo, we, whom you have succoured, shall ever mourn your loss." herbert, who had drawn near the captain, fell on his knees and kissed his hand. a tear glistened in the eyes of the dying man. "my child," he said, "may god bless you!" ------------------------------------------------------------------------ note . the history of captain nemo has, in fact, been published under the title of _twenty thousand leagues under the sea_. here, therefore, will apply the observation already made as to the adventures of ayrton with regard to the discrepancy of dates. readers should therefore refer to the note already published on this point. note . this refers to the insurrection of the candiotes, who were, in fact largely assisted by captain nemo. chapter seventeen. last moments of captain nemo--wishes of the dying man--a parting gift to his friends of a day--captain nemo's coffin--advice to the colonists-- the supreme moment--at the bottom of the sea. day had returned. no ray of light penetrated into the profundity of the cavern. it being high-water, the entrance was closed by the sea. but the artificial light, which escaped in long streams from the skylights of the _nautilus_, was as vivid as before, and the sheet of water shone around the floating vessel. an extreme exhaustion now overcame captain nemo, who had fallen back upon the divan. it was useless to contemplate removing him to granite house, for he had expressed his wish to remain in the midst of those marvels of the _nautilus_ which millions could not have purchased, and to await there for that death which was swiftly approaching. during a long interval of prostration, which rendered him almost unconscious, cyrus harding and gideon spilett attentively observed the condition of the dying man. it was apparent that his strength was gradually diminishing. that frame, once so robust, was now but the fragile tenement of a departing soul. all of life was concentrated in the heart and head. the engineer and reporter consulted in whispers. was it possible to render any aid to the dying man? might his life, if not saved, be prolonged for some days? he himself had said that no remedy could avail, and he awaited with tranquillity that death which had for him no terrors. "we can do nothing," said gideon spilett. "but of what is he dying?" asked pencroft. "life is simply fading out," replied the reporter. "nevertheless," said the sailor, "if we moved him into the open air, and the light of the sun, he might perhaps recover." "no, pencroft," answered the engineer, "it is useless to attempt it. besides, captain nemo would never consent to leave his vessel. he has lived for a dozen years on board the _nautilus_, and on board the _nautilus_ he desires to die." without doubt captain nemo heard cyrus harding's reply, for he raised himself slightly, and in a voice more feeble, but always intelligible-- "you are right, sir," he said. "i shall die here--it is my wish; and therefore i have a request to make of you." cyrus harding and his companions had drawn near the divan, and now arranged the cushions in such a manner as to better support the dying man. they saw his eyes wander over all the marvels of this saloon, lighted by the electric rays which fell from the arabesques of the luminous ceiling. he surveyed, one after the other, the pictures hanging from the splendid tapestries of the partitions, the _chef-d'oeuvres_ of the italian, flemish, french, and spanish masters; the statues of marble and bronze on their pedestals; the magnificent organ, leaning against the after-partition; the aquarium, in which bloomed the most wonderful productions of the sea--marine plants, zoophytes, chaplets of pearls of inestimable value; and, finally, his eyes rested on this device, inscribed over the pediment of the museum--the motto of the _nautilus_-- "_mobilis in mobile_." his glance seemed to rest fondly for the last time on these masterpieces of art and of nature, to which he had limited his horizon during a sojourn of so many years in the abysses of the seas. cyrus harding respected the captain's silence, and waited till he should speak. after some minutes, during which, doubtless, he passed in review his whole life, captain nemo turned to the colonists and said-- "you consider yourselves, gentlemen, under some obligations to me?" "captain, believe us that we would give our lives to prolong yours." "promise, then," continued captain nemo, "to carry out my last wishes, and i shall be repaid for all i have done for you." "we promise," said cyrus harding. and by this promise he bound both himself and his companions. "gentlemen," resumed the captain, "to-morrow i shall be dead." herbert was about to utter an exclamation, but a sign from the captain arrested him. "to-morrow i shall die, and i desire no other tomb than the _nautilus_. it is my grave! all my friends repose in the depths of the ocean; their resting-place shall be mine." these words were received with profound silence. "pay attention to my wishes," he continued. "the _nautilus_ is imprisoned in this grotto, the entrance of which is blocked up; but, although egress is impossible, the vessel may at least sink in the abyss, and there bury my remains." the colonists listened reverently to the words of the dying man. "to-morrow, after my death, mr harding," continued the captain, "yourself and companions will leave the _nautilus_, for all the treasures it contains must perish with me. one token alone will remain with you of prince dakkar, with whose history you are now acquainted. that coffer yonder contains diamonds of the value of many millions, most of them mementoes of the time when, husband and father, i thought happiness possible for me, and a collection of pearls gathered by my friends and myself in the depths of the ocean. of this treasure, at a future day, you may make good use. in the hands of such men as yourself and your comrades, captain harding, money will never be a source of danger. from on high i shall still participate in your enterprises, and i fear not but that they will prosper." after a few moments' repose, necessitated by his extreme weakness, captain nemo continued-- "to-morrow you will take the coffer, you will leave the saloon, of which you will close the door; then you will ascend onto the deck of the _nautilus_, and you will lower the main-hatch so as entirely to close the vessel." "it shall be done, captain," answered cyrus harding. "good. you will then embark in the canoe which brought you hither; but, before leaving the _nautilus_, go to the stern and there open two large stop-cocks which you will find upon the water-line. the water will penetrate into the reservoirs, and the _nautilus_ will gradually sink beneath the water to repose at the bottom of the abyss." and, comprehending a gesture of cyrus harding, the captain added-- "fear nothing! you will but bury a corpse!" neither cyrus harding nor his companions ventured to offer any observation to captain nemo. he had expressed his last wishes, and they had nothing to do but to conform to them. "i have your promise, gentlemen?" added captain nemo. "you have, captain," replied the engineer. the captain thanked the colonists by a sign, and requested them to leave him for some hours. gideon spilett wished to remain near him, in the event of a crisis coming on, but the dying man refused, saying, "i shall live until to-morrow, sir." all left the saloon, passed through the library and the dining-room, and arrived forward, in the machine-room, where the electrical apparatus was established, which supplied not only heat and light but the mechanical power of the _nautilus_. the _nautilus_ was a masterpiece, containing masterpieces within itself, and the engineer was struck with astonishment. the colonists mounted the platform, which rose seven or eight feet above the water. there they beheld a thick glass lenticular covering, which protected a kind of large eye, from which flashed forth light. behind this eye was apparently a cabin containing the wheels of the rudder, and in which was stationed the helmsman, when he navigated the _nautilus_ over the bed of the ocean, which the electric rays would evidently light up to a considerable distance. cyrus harding and his companions remained for a time silent, for they were vividly impressed by what they had just seen and heard, and their hearts were deeply touched by the thought that he whose arm had so often aided them, the protector whom they had known but a few hours, was at the point of death. whatever might be the judgment pronounced by posterity upon the events of this, so to speak, extra-human existence, the character of prince dakkar would ever remain as one of those whose memory time can never efface. "what a man!" said pencroft. "is it possible that he can have lived at the bottom of the sea? and it seems to me that perhaps he has not found peace there any more than elsewhere." "the _nautilus_," observed ayrton, "might have enabled us to leave lincoln island and reach some inhabited country." "good heavens!" exclaimed pencroft, "i for one would never risk myself in such a craft. to sail on the seas, good; but under the seas, never!" "i believe, pencroft," answered the reporter, "that the navigation of a submarine vessel such as the _nautilus_ ought to be very easy, and that we should soon become accustomed to it. there would be no storms, no lee-shore to fear. at some feet beneath the surface the waters of the ocean are as calm as those of a lake." "that may be," replied the sailor, "but i prefer a gale of wind on board a well-found craft. a vessel is built to sail on the sea, and not beneath it." "my friends," said the engineer, "it is useless, at any rate as regards the _nautilus_, to discuss the question of submarine vessels. the _nautilus_ is not ours, and we have not the right to dispose of it. moreover, we could in no case avail ourselves of it. independently of the fact that it would be impossible to get it out of this cavern, whose entrance is now closed by the uprising of the basaltic rocks, captain nemo's wish is that it shall be buried with him. his wish is our law, and we will fulfil it." after a somewhat prolonged conversation, cyrus harding and his companions again descended to the interior of the _nautilus_. there they took some refreshment and returned to the saloon. captain nemo had somewhat rallied from the prostration which had overcome him, and his eyes shone with their wonted fire. a faint smile even curled his lips. the colonists drew around him. "gentlemen," said the captain, "you are brave and honest men. you have devoted yourselves to the common weal. often have i observed your conduct. i have esteemed you--i esteem you still! your hand, mr harding!" cyrus harding gave his hand to the captain, who clasped it affectionately. "it is well!" he murmured. he resumed-- "but enough of myself. i have to speak concerning yourselves, and this lincoln island, upon which you have taken refuge. you desire to leave it?" "to return, captain!" answered pencroft quickly. "to return, pencroft?" said the captain, with a smile. "i know, it is true, your love for this island. you have helped to make it what it now is, and it seems to you a paradise!" "our project, captain," interposed cyrus harding, "is to annex it to the united states, and to establish for our shipping a port so fortunately situated in this part of the pacific." "your thoughts are with your country, gentlemen," continued the captain; "your toils are for her prosperity and glory. you are right. one's native land!--there should one live! there die! and i! i die far from all i loved!" "you have some last wish to transmit," said the engineer with emotion, "some souvenir to send to those friends you have left in the mountains of india?" "no, captain harding; no friends remain to me! i am the last of my race, and to all whom i have known i have long been as are the dead.-- but to return to yourselves. solitude, isolation, are painful things, and beyond human endurance. i die of having thought it possible to live alone! you should, therefore, dare all in the attempt to leave lincoln island, and see once more the land of your birth. i am aware that those wretches have destroyed the vessel you had built." "we propose to construct a vessel," said gideon spilett, "sufficiently large to convey us to the nearest land; but if we should succeed, sooner or later we shall return to lincoln island. we are attached to it by too many recollections ever to forget it." "it is here that we have known captain nemo," said cyrus harding. "it is here only that we can make our home!" added herbert. "and here shall i sleep the sleep of eternity, if--" replied the captain. he paused for a moment, and, instead of completing the sentence, said simply-- "mr harding, i wish to speak with you--alone!" the engineer's companions, respecting the wish of the dying man, retired. cyrus harding remained but a few minutes alone with captain nemo, and soon recalled his companions; but he said nothing to them of the private matters which the dying man had confided to him. gideon spilett now watched the captain with extreme care. it was evident that he was no longer sustained by his moral energy, which had lost the power of reaction against his physical weakness. the day closed without change. the colonists did not quit the _nautilus_ for a moment. night arrived, although it was impossible to distinguish it from day in the cavern. captain nemo suffered no pain, but he was visibly sinking. his noble features, paled by the approach of death, were perfectly calm. inaudible words escaped at intervals from his lips, bearing upon various incidents of his chequered career. life was evidently ebbing slowly, and his extremities were already cold. once or twice more he spoke to the colonists who stood around him, and smiled on them with that last smile which continues after death. at length, shortly after midnight, captain nemo by a supreme effort succeeded in folding his arms across his breast, as if wishing in that attitude to compose himself for death. by one o'clock his glance alone showed signs of life. a dying light gleamed in those eyes once so brilliant. then, murmuring the words, "god and my country!" he quietly expired. cyrus harding, bending low, closed the eyes of him who had once been the prince dakkar, and was now not even captain nemo. herbert and pencroft sobbed aloud. tears fell from ayrton's eyes. neb was on his knees by the reporter's side, motionless as a statue. then cyrus harding, extending his hand over the forehead of the dead, said solemnly-- "may his soul be with god! let us pray!" some hours later the colonists fulfilled the promise made to the captain by carrying out his dying wishes. cyrus harding and his companions quitted the _nautilus_, taking with them the only memento left them by their benefactor, that coffer which contained wealth amounting to millions. the marvellous saloon, still flooded with light, had been carefully closed. the iron door leading on deck was then securely fastened in such a manner as to prevent even a drop of water from penetrating to the interior of the _nautilus_. the colonists then descended into the canoe, which was moored to the side of the submarine vessel. the canoe was now brought round to the stern. there, at the water-line, were two large stop-cocks, communicating with the reservoirs employed in the submersion of the vessel. the stop-cocks were opened, the reservoirs filled, and the _nautilus_, slowly sinking, disappeared beneath the surface of the lake. but the colonists were yet able to follow its descent through the waves. the powerful light it gave forth lighted up the translucent water, while the cavern became gradually obscure. at length this vast effusion of electric light faded away, and soon after the _nautilus_, now the tomb of captain nemo, reposed in its ocean bed. chapter eighteen. reflections of the colonists--their labours of reconstruction resumed-- the st of january --a cloud over the summit of the volcano--first warnings of an eruption--ayrton and cyrus harding at the corral-- exploration of the dakkar grotto--what captain nemo had confided to the engineer. at break of day the colonists regained in silence the entrance of the cavern, to which they gave the name of "dakkar grotto," in memory of captain nemo. it was now low-water, and they passed without difficulty under the arcade, washed on the right by the sea. the canoe was left here, carefully protected from the waves. as an excess of precaution, pencroft, neb, and ayrton drew it up on a little beach which bordered one of the sides of the grotto, in a spot where it could run no risk of harm. the storm had ceased during the night. the last low mutterings of the thunder died away in the west. rain fell no longer, but the sky was yet obscured by clouds. on the whole, this month of october, the first of the southern spring, was not ushered in by satisfactory tokens, and the wind had a tendency to shift from one point of the compass to another, which rendered it impossible to count upon settled weather. cyrus harding and his companions, on leaving dakkar grotto, had taken the road to the corral. on their way neb and herbert were careful to preserve the wire which had been laid down by the captain between the corral and the grotto, and which might at a future time be of service. the colonists spoke but little on the road. the various incidents of the night of the th october had left a profound impression on their minds. the unknown being whose influence had so effectually protected them, the man whom their imagination had endowed with supernatural powers, captain nemo, was no more. his _nautilus_ and he were buried in the depths of the abyss. to each one of them their existence seemed even more isolated than before. they had been accustomed to count upon the intervention of that power which existed no longer, and gideon spilett, and even cyrus harding, could not escape this impression. thus they maintained a profound silence during their journey to the corral. towards nine in the morning the colonists arrived at granite house. it had been agreed that the construction of the vessel should be actively pushed forward, and cyrus harding more than ever devoted his time and labour to this object. it was impossible to divine what future lay before them. evidently the advantage to the colonists would be great of having at their disposal a substantial vessel, capable of keeping the sea even in heavy weather, and large enough to attempt, in case of need, a voyage of some duration. even if, when their vessel should be completed, the colonists should not resolve to leave lincoln island as yet, in order to gain either one of the polynesian archipelagos of the pacific or the shores of new zealand, they might at least, sooner or later, proceed to tabor island, to leave there the notice relating to ayrton. this was a precaution rendered indispensable by the possibility of the scotch yacht reappearing in those seas, and it was of the highest importance that nothing should be neglected on this point. the works were then resumed. cyrus harding, pencroft, and ayrton, assisted by neb, gideon spilett, and herbert, except when unavoidably called off by other necessary occupations, worked without cessation. it was important that the new vessel should be ready in five months--that is to say, by the beginning of march--if they wished to visit tabor island before the equinoctial gales rendered the voyage impracticable. therefore the carpenters lost not a moment. moreover, it was unnecessary to manufacture rigging, that of the _speedy_ having been saved entire, so that the hull only of the vessel needed to be constructed. the end of the year found them occupied by these important labours, to the exclusion of almost all others. at the expiration of two months and a half the ribs had been set up and the first planks adjusted. it was already evident that the plans made by cyrus harding were admirable, and that the vessel would behave well at sea. pencroft brought to the task a devouring energy, and scrupled not to grumble when one or the other abandoned the carpenter's axe for the gun of the hunter. it was nevertheless necessary to keep up the stores of granite house, in view of the approaching winter. but this did not satisfy pencroft. the brave honest sailor was not content when the workmen were not at the dockyard. when this happened he grumbled vigorously, and, by way of venting his feelings, did the work of six men. the weather was very unfavourable during the whole of the summer season. for some days the heat was overpowering, and the atmosphere, saturated with electricity, was only cleared by violent storms. it was rarely that the distant growling of the thunder could not be heard, like a low but incessant murmur, such as is produced in the equatorial regions of the globe. the st of january, , was signalised by a storm of extreme violence, and the thunder burst several times over the island. large trees were struck by the electric fluid and shattered, and among others one of those gigantic micocouliers which shaded the poultry-yard at the southern extremity of the lake. had this meteor any relation to the phenomena going on in the bowels of the earth? was there any connection between the commotion of the atmosphere and that of the interior of the earth? cyrus harding was inclined to think that such was the case, for the development of these storms was attended by the renewal of volcanic symptoms. it was on the rd of january that herbert, having ascended at daybreak to the plateau of prospect heights to harness one of the onagas, perceived an enormous hat-shaped cloud rolling from the summit of the volcano. herbert immediately apprised the colonists, who at once joined him in watching the summit of mount franklin. "ah!" exclaimed pencroft, "those are not vapours this time! it seems to me that the giant is not content with breathing; he must smoke!" this figure of speech employed by the sailor exactly expressed the changes going on at the mouth of the volcano. already for three months had the crater emitted vapours more or less dense, but which were as yet produced only by an internal ebullition of mineral substances. but now the vapours were replaced by a thick smoke, rising in the form of a greyish column, more than three hundred feet in width at its base, and which spread like an immense mushroom to a height of from seven to eight hundred feet above the summit of the mountain. "the fire is in the chimney," observed gideon spilett. "and we can't put it out!" replied herbert. "the volcano ought to be swept," observed neb, who spoke as if perfectly serious. "well said, neb!" cried pencroft, with a shout of laughter; "and you'll undertake the job, no doubt?" cyrus harding attentively observed the dense smoke emitted by mount franklin, and even listened, as if expecting to hear some distant muttering. then, turning towards his companions, from whom he had gone somewhat apart, he said-- "the truth is, my friends, we must not conceal from ourselves that an important change is going forward. the volcanic substances are no longer in a state of ebullition, they have caught fire, and we are undoubtedly menaced by an approaching eruption." "well, captain," said pencroft, "we shall witness the eruption; and if it is a good one, we'll applaud it. i don't see that we need concern ourselves further about the matter." "it may be so," replied cyrus harding, "for the ancient track of the lava is still open; and thanks to this, the crater has hitherto overflowed towards the north. and yet--" "and yet, as we can derive no advantage from an eruption, it might be better it should not take place," said the reporter. "who knows?" answered the sailor. "perhaps there may be some valuable substance in this volcano, which it will spout forth, and which we may turn to good account!" cyrus harding shook his head with the air of a man who augured no good from the phenomenon whose developments had been so sudden. he did not regard so lightly as pencroft the results of an eruption. if the lava, in consequence of the position of the crater, did not directly menace the wooded and cultivated parts of the island, other complications might present themselves. in fact, eruptions are not unfrequently accompanied by earthquakes; and an island of the nature of lincoln island formed of substances so varied, basalt on one side, granite on the other, lava on the north, rich soil on the south, substances which consequently could not be firmly attached to each other, would be exposed to the risk of disintegration. although, therefore, the spreading of the volcanic matter might not constitute a serious danger, any movement of the terrestrial structure which should shake the island might entail the gravest consequences. "it seems to me," said ayrton, who had reclined so as to place his ear to the ground, "it seems to me that i can hear a dull, rumbling sound, like that of a wagon loaded with bars of iron." the colonists listened with the greatest attention, and were convinced that ayrton was not mistaken. the rumbling was mingled with a subterranean roar, which formed a sort of _rinforzando_, and died slowly away, as if some violent storm had passed through the profundities of the globe. but no explosion, properly so termed, could be heard. it might therefore be concluded that the vapours and smoke found a free passage through the central shaft; and that the safety-valve being sufficiently large, no convulsion would be produced, no explosion was to be apprehended. "well, then!" said pencroft, "are we not going back to work? let mount franklin smoke, groan, bellow, or spout forth fire and flame as much as it pleases, that is no reason why we should be idle! come, ayrton, neb, herbert, captain harding, mr spilett, every one of us must turn to at our work to-day! we are going to place the keelson, and a dozen pair of hands would not be too many. before two months i want our new _bonadventure_--for we shall keep the old name, shall we not?--to float on the waters of port balloon! therefore there is not an hour to lose!" all the colonists, their services thus requisitioned by pencroft, descended to the dockyard, and proceeded to place the keelson, a thick mass of wood which forms the lower portion of a ship and unites firmly the timbers of the hull. it was an arduous undertaking, in which all took part. they continued their labours during the whole of this day, the rd of january, without thinking further of the volcano, which could not, besides, be seen from the shore of granite house. but once or twice, large shadows, veiling the sun, which described its diurnal arc through an extremely clear sky, indicated that a thick cloud of smoke passed between its disc and the island. the wind, blowing on the shore, carried all these vapours to the westward. cyrus harding and gideon spilett remarked these sombre appearances, and from time to time discussed the evident progress of the volcanic phenomena, but their work went on without interruption. it was, besides, of the first importance from every point of view, that the vessel should be finished with the least possible delay. in presence of the eventualities which might arise, the safety of the colonists would be to a great extent secured by their ship. who could tell that it might not prove some day their only refuge? in the evening, after supper, cyrus harding, gideon spilett, and herbert, again ascended the plateau of prospect heights. it was already dark, and the obscurity would permit them to ascertain if flames or incandescent matter thrown up by the volcano were mingled with the vapour and smoke accumulated at the mouth of the crater. "the crater is on fire!" said herbert, who, more active than his companions, first reached the plateau. mount franklin, distant about six miles, now appeared like a gigantic torch, around the summit of which turned fuliginous flames. so much smoke, and possibly scoriae and cinders were mingled with them, that their light gleamed but faintly amid the gloom of the night. but a kind of lurid brilliancy spread over the island, against which stood out confusedly the wooded masses of the heights. immense whirlwinds of vapour obscured the sky, through which glimmered a few stars. "the change is rapid!" said the engineer. "that is not surprising," answered the reporter. "the re-awakening of the volcano already dates back some time. you may remember, cyrus, that the first vapours appeared about the time we searched the sides of the mountain to discover captain nemo's retreat. it was, if i mistake not, about the th of october." "yes," replied herbert, "two months and a half ago!" "the subterranean fires have therefore been smouldering for ten weeks," resumed gideon spilett, "and it is not to be wondered at that they now break out with such violence!" "do not you feel a certain vibration of the soil?" asked cyrus harding. "yes," replied gideon spilett, "but there is a great difference between that and an earthquake." "i do not affirm that we are menaced with an earthquake," answered cyrus harding, "may god preserve us from that! no; these vibrations are due to the effervescence of the central fire. the crust of the earth is simply the shell of a boiler, and you know that such a shell, under the pressure of steam, vibrates like a sonorous plate. it is this effect which is being produced at this moment." "what magnificent flames!" exclaimed herbert. at this instant a kind of bouquet of flames shot forth from the crater, the brilliancy of which was visible even through the vapours. thousands of luminous sheets and barbed tongues of fire were cast in various directions. some, extending beyond the dome of smoke, dissipated it, leaving behind an incandescent powder. this was accompanied by successive explosions, resembling the discharge of a battery of mitrailleuses. cyrus harding, the reporter, and herbert, after spending an hour on the plateau of prospect heights, again descended to the beach, and returned to granite house. the engineer was thoughtful and preoccupied, so much so, indeed, that gideon spilett inquired if he apprehended any immediate danger, of which the eruption might directly or indirectly be the cause. "yes, and no," answered cyrus harding. "nevertheless," continued the reporter, "would not the greatest misfortune which could happen to us be an earthquake which would overturn the island? now, i do not suppose that this is to be feared, since the vapours and lava have found a free outlet." "true," replied cyrus harding, "and i do not fear an earthquake in the sense in which the term is commonly applied to convulsions of the soil provoked by the expansion of subterranean gases. but other causes may produce great disasters." "how so, my dear cyrus?" "i am not certain. i must consider. i must visit the mountain. in a few days i shall learn more on this point." gideon spilett said no more, and soon, in spite of the explosions of the volcano, whose intensity increased, and which were repeated by the echoes of the island, the inhabitants of granite house were sleeping soundly. three days passed by--the th, th, and th of january. the construction of the vessel was diligently continued, and without offering further explanations the engineer pushed forward the work with all his energy. mount franklin was now hooded by a sombre cloud of sinister aspect, and, amid the flames, vomited forth incandescent rocks, some of which fell back into the crater itself. this caused pencroft, who would only look at the matter in the light of a joke, to exclaim-- "ah! the giant is playing at cup and ball; he is a conjuror." in fact, the substances thrown up fell back again into the abyss, and it did not seem that the lava, though swollen by the internal pressure, had yet risen to the orifice of the crater. at any rate, the opening on the north-east, which was partly visible, poured out no torrent upon the northern slope of the mountain. nevertheless, however pressing was the construction of the vessel, other duties demanded the presence of the colonists on various portions of the island. before everything it was necessary to go to the corral, where the flocks of musmons and goats were enclosed, and replenish the provision of forage for those animals. it was accordingly arranged that ayrton should proceed thither the next day, the th of january; and as he was sufficient for the task, to which he was accustomed, pencroft and the rest were somewhat surprised on hearing the engineer say to ayrton-- "as you are going to-morrow to the corral i will accompany you." "but, captain harding," exclaimed the sailor, "our working days will not be many, and if you go also we shall be two pair of hands short!" "we shall return to-morrow," replied cyrus harding, "but it is necessary that i should go to the corral. i must learn how the eruption is progressing." "the eruption! always the eruption!" answered pencroft, with an air of discontent. "an important thing, truly, this eruption! i trouble myself very little about it." whatever might be the sailor's opinion, the expedition projected by the engineer was settled for the next day. herbert wished to accompany cyrus harding, but he would not vex pencroft by his absence. the next day, at dawn, cyrus harding and ayrton, mounting the cart drawn by two onagas, took the road to the corral and set off at a round trot. above the forest were passing large clouds, to which the crater of mount franklin incessantly added fuliginous matter. these clouds, which rolled heavily in the air, were evidently composed of heterogeneous substances. it was not alone from the volcano that they derived their strange opacity and weight. scorias, in a state of dust, like powdered pumice-stone, and greyish ashes as small as the finest feculae, were held in suspension in the midst of their thick folds. these ashes are so fine that they have been observed in the air for whole months. after the eruption of in iceland for upwards of a year the atmosphere was thus charged with volcanic dust through which the rays of the sun were only with difficulty discernible. but more often this pulverised matter falls, and this happened on the present occasion. cyrus harding and ayrton had scarcely reached the corral when a sort of black snow like fine gunpowder fell, and instantly changed the appearance of the soil. trees, meadows, all disappeared beneath a covering several inches in depth. but, very fortunately, the wind blew from the north-east, and the greater part of the cloud dissolved itself over the sea. "this is very singular, captain harding," said ayrton. "it is very serious," replied the engineer. "this powdered pumice-stone, all this mineral dust, proves how grave is the convulsion going forward in the lower depths of the volcano." "but can nothing be done?" "nothing, except to note the progress of the phenomenon. do you, therefore, ayrton, occupy yourself with the necessary work at the corral. in the meantime i will ascend just beyond the source of red creek and examine the condition of the mountain upon its northern aspect. then--" "well, captain harding?" "then we will pay a visit to dakkar grotto. i wish to inspect it. at any rate i will come back for you in two hours." ayrton then proceeded to enter the corral, and, while waiting the engineer's return, busied himself with the musmons and goats, which seemed to feel a certain uneasiness in presence of these first signs of an eruption. meanwhile cyrus harding ascended the crest of the eastern spur, passed red creek, and arrived at the spot where he and his companions had discovered a sulphureous spring at the time of their first exploration. how changed was everything! instead of a single column of smoke he counted thirteen, forced through the soil as if violently propelled by some piston. it was evident that the crust of the earth was subjected in this part of the globe to a frightful pressure. the atmosphere was saturated with gases and carbonic acid, mingled with aqueous vapours. cyrus harding felt the volcanic tufa with which the plain was strewn, and which were but pulverised cinders hardened into solid blocks by time, tremble beneath him, but he could discover no traces of fresh lava. the engineer became more assured of this when he observed all the northern part of mount franklin. pillars of smoke and flame escaped from the crater; a hail of scorias fell on the ground; but no current of lava burst from the mouth of the volcano, which proved that the volcanic matter had not yet attained the level of the superior orifice of the central shaft. "but i would prefer that it were so," said cyrus harding to himself. "at any rate, i should then know that the lava had followed its accustomed track. who can say that they may not take a new course? but the danger does not consist in that! captain nemo foresaw it clearly! no, the danger does not lie there!" cyrus harding advanced towards the enormous causeway whose prolongation enclosed the narrow shark gulf. he could now sufficiently examine on this side the ancient channels of the lava. there was no doubt in his mind that the most recent eruption had occurred at a far-distant epoch. he then returned by the same way, listening attentively to the subterranean mutterings which rolled like long-continued thunder, interrupted by deafening explosions. at nine in the morning he reached the corral. ayrton awaited him. "the animals are cared for, captain harding," said ayrton. "good, ayrton." "they seem uneasy, captain harding." "yes, instinct speaks through them, and instinct is never deceived." "are you ready?" "take a lamp, ayrton," answered the engineer; "we will start at once." ayrton did as desired. the onagas, unharnessed, roamed in the corral. the gate was secured on the outside, and cyrus harding, preceding ayrton, took the narrow path which led westward to the shore. the soil they walked upon was choked with the pulverised matter fallen from the cloud. no quadruped appeared in the woods. even the birds had fled. sometimes a passing breeze raised the covering of ashes, and the two colonists, enveloped in a whirlwind of dust, lost sight of each other. they were then careful to cover their eyes and mouths with handkerchiefs, for they ran the risk of being blinded and suffocated. it was impossible for cyrus harding and ayrton, with these impediments, to make rapid progress. moreover, the atmosphere was close, as if the oxygen had been partly burnt up, and had become unfit for respiration. at every hundred paces they were obliged to stop to take breath. it was therefore past ten o'clock when the engineer and his companion reached the crest of the enormous mass of rocks of basalt and porphyry which composed the north-west coast of the island. ayrton and cyrus harding commenced the descent of this abrupt declivity, following almost step for step the difficult path which, during that stormy night, had led them to dakkar grotto. in open day the descent was less perilous, and, besides, the bed of ashes which covered the polished surface of the rock enabled them to make their footing more secure. the ridge at the end of the shore, about forty feet in height, was soon reached. cyrus harding recollected that this elevation gradually sloped towards the level of the sea. although the tide was at present low, no beach could be seen, and the waves, thickened by the volcanic dust, beat upon the basaltic rocks. cyrus harding and ayrton found without difficulty the entrance to dakkar grotto, and paused for a moment at the last rock before it. "the iron boat should be there," said the engineer. "it is here, captain harding," replied ayrton, drawing towards him the fragile craft, which was protected by the arch of a vault. "on board, ayrton!" the two colonists stepped into the boat. a slight undulation of the waves carried it farther under the low arch of the crypt, and there ayrton, with the aid of flint and steel, lighted the lamp. he then took the oars, and the lamp having been placed in the bow of the boat, so that its rays fell before them, cyrus harding took the helm and steered through the shades of the grotto. the _nautilus_ was there no longer to illuminate the cavern with its electric light. possibly it might not yet be extinguished, but no ray escaped from the depths of the abyss in which reposed all that was mortal of captain nemo. the light afforded by the lamp, although feeble, nevertheless enabled the engineer to advance slowly, following the wall of the cavern. a deathlike silence reigned under the vaulted roof, or at least in the anterior portion, for soon cyrus harding distinctly heard the rumbling which proceeded from the bowels of the mountain. "that comes from the volcano," he said. besides these sounds, the presence of chemical combinations was soon betrayed by their powerful odour, and the engineer and his companion were almost suffocated by sulphureous vapours. "this is what captain nemo feared," murmured cyrus harding, changing countenance. "we must go to the end, notwithstanding." "forward!" replied ayrton, bending to his oars and directing the boat towards the head of the cavern. twenty-five minutes after entering the mouth of the grotto the boat reached the extreme end. cyrus harding then, standing up, cast the light of the lamp upon the walls of the cavern which separated it from the central shaft of the volcano. what was the thickness of this wall? it might be ten feet or a hundred feet--it was impossible to say. but the subterranean sounds were too perceptible to allow of the supposition that it was of any great thickness. the engineer, after having explored the wall at a certain height horizontally, fastened the lamp to the end of an oar, and again surveyed the basaltic wall at a greater elevation. there, through scarcely visible clefts and joinings, escaped a pungent vapour, which infected the atmosphere of the cavern. the wall was broken by large cracks, some of which extended to within two or three feet of the water's edge. cyrus harding thought for a brief space. then he said in a low voice-- "yes! the captain was right! the danger lies there, and a terrible danger!" ayrton said not a word, but, upon a sign from cyrus harding, resumed the oars, and half an hour later the engineer and he reached the entrance of dakkar grotto. chapter nineteen. cyrus harding gives an account of his exploration--the construction of the ship pushed forward--a last visit to the corral--the battle between fire and water--all that remains of the island--it is decided to launch the vessel--the night of the th of march. the next day, the th of january, after a day and night passed at the corral, where they left all in order, cyrus harding and ayrton arrived at granite house. the engineer immediately called his companions together, and informed them of the imminent danger which threatened lincoln island, and from which no human power could deliver them. "my friends," he said, and his voice betrayed the depth of his emotion, "our island is not among those which will endure while this earth endures. it is doomed to more or less speedy destruction, the cause of which it bears within itself, and from which nothing can save it." the colonists looked at each other, then at the engineer. they did not clearly comprehend him. "explain yourself, cyrus!" said gideon spilett. "i will do so," replied cyrus harding, "or rather i will simply afford you the explanation which, during our few minutes of private conversation, was given me by captain nemo." "captain nemo!" exclaimed the colonists. "yes, and it was the last service he desired to render us before his death!" "the last service!" exclaimed pencroft, "the last service! you will see that though he is dead he will render us others yet!" "but what did the captain say?" inquired the reporter. "i will tell you, my friends," said the engineer. "lincoln island does not resemble the other islands of the pacific, and a fact of which captain nemo has made me cognisant must sooner or later bring about the subversion of its foundation." "nonsense! lincoln island, it can't be!" cried pencroft, who, in spite of the respect he felt for cyrus harding, could not prevent a gesture of incredulity. "listen, pencroft," resumed the engineer, "i will tell you what captain nemo communicated to me, and which i myself confirmed yesterday, during the exploration of dakkar grotto. this cavern stretches under the island as far as the volcano, and is only separated from its central shaft by the wall which terminates it. now, this wall is seamed with fissures and clefts which already allow the sulphureous gases generated in the interior of the volcano to escape." "well?" said pencroft, his brow suddenly contracting. "well, then, i saw that these fissures widen under the internal pressure from within, that the wall of basalt is gradually giving way, and that after a longer or shorter period it will afford a passage to the waters of the lake which fill the cavern." "good!" replied pencroft, with an attempt at pleasantry. "the sea will extinguish the volcano, and there will be an end of the matter!" "not so!" said cyrus harding, "should a day arrive when the sea, rushing through the wall of the cavern, penetrates by the central shaft into the interior of the island to the boiling lava, lincoln island will that day be blown into the air--just as would happen to the island of sicily were the mediterranean to precipitate itself into mount etna." the colonists made no answer to these significant words of the engineer. they now understood the danger by which they were menaced. it may be added that cyrus harding had in no way exaggerated the danger to be apprehended. many persons have formed an idea that it would be possible to extinguish volcanoes, which are almost always situated on the shores of a sea or lake, by opening a passage for the admission of the water. but they are not aware that this would be to incur the risk of blowing up a portion of the globe, like a boiler whose steam is suddenly expanded by intense heat. the water, rushing into a cavity whose temperature might be estimated at thousands of degrees, would be converted into steam with a sudden energy which no enclosure could resist. it was not therefore doubtful that the island, menaced by a frightful and approaching convulsion, would endure only so long as the wall of dakkar grotto itself should endure. it was not even a question of months, nor of weeks; but of days, it might be of hours. the first sentiment which the colonists felt was that of profound sorrow. they thought not so much of the peril which menaced themselves personally, but of the destruction of the island which had sheltered them, which they had cultivated, which they loved so well, and had hoped to render so flourishing. so much effort ineffectually expended, so much labour lost. pencroft could not prevent a large tear from rolling down his cheek, nor did he attempt to conceal it. some further conversation now took place. the chances yet in favour of the colonists were discussed; but finally it was agreed that there was not an hour to be lost, that the building and fitting of the vessel should be pushed forward with their utmost energy, and that this was the sole chance of safety for the inhabitants of lincoln island. all hands, therefore, set to work on the vessel. what could it now avail to sow, to reap, to hunt, to increase the stores of granite house? the contents of the store-house and outbuildings contained more than sufficient to provide the ship for a voyage, however long might be its duration. but it was imperative that the ship should be ready to receive them before the inevitable catastrophe should arrive. their labours were now carried on with feverish ardour. by the rd of january the vessel was half-decked over. up to this time no change had taken place in the summit of the volcano. vapour and smoke mingled with flames and incandescent stones were thrown up from the crater. but during the night of the rd, in consequence of the lava attaining the level of the first stratum of the volcano, the hat-shaped cone which formed over the latter disappeared. a frightful sound was heard. the colonists at first thought the island was rent asunder, and rushed out of granite house. this occurred about two o'clock in the morning. the sky appeared on fire. the superior cone, a mass of rock a thousand feet in height, and weighing thousands of millions of pounds, had been thrown down upon the island, making it tremble to its foundation. fortunately, this cone inclined to the north, and had fallen upon the plain of sand and tufa stretching between the volcano and the sea. the aperture of the crater being thus enlarged projected towards the sky a glare so intense that by the simple effect of reflection the atmosphere appeared red-hot. at the same time a torrent of lava, bursting from the new summit, poured out in long cascades, like water escaping from a vase too full, and a thousand tongues of fire crept over the sides of the volcano. "the corral! the corral!" exclaimed ayrton. it was, in fact, towards the corral that the lava was rushing, as the new crater faced the east, and consequently the fertile portions of the island, the springs of red creek and jacamar wood, were menaced with instant destruction. at ayrton's cry the colonists rushed to the onagas' stables. the cart was at once harnessed. all were possessed by the same thought--to hasten to the corral and set at liberty the animals it enclosed. before three in the morning they arrived at the corral. the cries of the terrified musmons and goats indicated the alarm which possessed them. already a torrent of burning matter and liquefied minerals fell from the side of the mountain upon the meadows as far as the side of the palisade. the gate was burst open by ayrton, and the animals, bewildered with terror, fled in all directions. an hour afterwards the boiling lava filled the corral, converting into vapour the water of the little rivulet which ran through it, burning up the house like dry grass, and leaving not even a post of the palisade to mark the spot where the corral once stood. to contend against this disaster would have been folly--nay, madness. in presence of nature's grand convulsions man is powerless. it was now daylight--the th of january. cyrus harding and his companions, before returning to granite house, desired to ascertain the probable direction this inundation of lava was about to take. the soil sloped gradually from mount franklin to the east coast, and it was to be feared that, in spite of the thick jacamar wood, the torrent would reach the plateau of prospect heights. "the lake will cover us," said gideon spilett. "i hope so!" was cyrus harding's only reply. the colonists were desirous of reaching the plain upon which the superior cone of mount franklin had fallen, but the lava arrested their progress. it had followed, on one side, the valley of red creek, and on the other that of falls river, evaporating those watercourses in its passage. there was no possibility of crossing the torrent of lava; on the contrary, the colonists were obliged to retreat before it. the volcano, without its crown, was no longer recognisable, terminated as it was by a sort of flat table which replaced the ancient crater. from two openings in its southern and eastern sides an unceasing flow of lava poured forth, thus forming two distinct streams. above the new crater a cloud of smoke and ashes, mingled with those of the atmosphere, massed over the island. loud peals of thunder broke, and could scarcely be distinguished from the rumblings of the mountain, whose mouth vomited forth ignited rocks, which, hurled to more than a thousand feet, burst in the air like shells. flashes of lightning rivalled in intensity the volcano's eruption. towards seven in the morning the position was no longer tenable by the colonists, who accordingly took shelter in the borders of jacamar wood. not only did the projectiles begin to rain around them, but the lava, overflowing the bed of red creek, threatened to cut off the road to the corral. the nearest rows of trees caught fire, and their sap, suddenly transformed into vapour, caused them to explode with loud reports, whilst others, less moist, remained unhurt in the midst of the inundation. the colonists had again taken the road to the corral. they proceeded but slowly, frequently looking back; but, in consequence of the inclination of the soil, the lava gained rapidly in the east, and as its lower waves became solidified, others at boiling heat covered them immediately. meanwhile, the principal stream of red creek valley became more and more menacing. all this portion of the forest was on fire, and enormous wreaths of smoke rolled over the trees, whose trunks were already consumed by the lava. the colonists halted near the lake, about half a mile from the mouth of red creek. a question of life or death was now to be decided. cyrus harding, accustomed to the consideration of important crises, and aware that he was addressing men capable of hearing the truth, whatever it might be, then said-- "either the lake will arrest the progress of the lava, and a part of the island will be preserved from utter destruction, or the stream will overrun the forests of the far west, and not a tree or plant will remain on the surface of the soil. we shall have no prospect but that of starvation upon these barren rocks--a death which will probably be anticipated by the explosion of the island." "in that case," replied pencroft, folding his arms and stamping his foot, "what's the use of working any longer on the vessel?" "pencroft," answered cyrus harding, "we must do our duty to the last!" at this instant the river of lava, after having broken a passage through the noble trees it devoured in its course, reached the borders of the lake. at this point there was an elevation of the soil which, had it been greater, might have sufficed to arrest the torrent. "to work!" cried cyrus harding. the engineer's thought was at once understood. it might be possible to dam, as it were, the torrent, and thus compel it to pour itself into the lake. the colonists hastened to the dockyard. they returned with shovels, picks, axes, and by means of banking the earth with the aid of fallen trees they succeeded in a few hours in raising an embankment three feet high and some hundreds of paces in length. it seemed to them, when they had finished, as if they had scarcely been working more than a few minutes. it was not a moment too soon. the liquefied substances soon after reached the bottom of the barrier. the stream of lava swelled like a river about to overflow its banks, and threatened to demolish the sole obstacle which could prevent it from overrunning the whole far west. but the dam held firm, and after a moment of terrible suspense the torrent precipitated itself into grant lake from a height of twenty feet. the colonists, without moving or uttering a word, breathlessly regarded this strife of the two elements. what a spectacle was this conflict between water and fire! what pen could describe the marvellous horror of this scene--what pencil could depict it? the water hissed as it evaporated by contact with the boiling lava. the vapour whirled in the air to an immeasurable height, as if the valves of an immense boiler had been suddenly opened. but, however considerable might be the volume of water contained in the lake, it must eventually be absorbed, because it was not replenished, whilst the stream of lava, fed from an inexhaustible source, rolled on without ceasing new waves of incandescent matter. the first waves of lava which fell in the lake immediately solidified, and accumulated so as speedily to emerge from it. upon their surface fell other waves, which in their turn became stone, but a step nearer the centre of the lake. in this manner was formed a pier which threatened to gradually fill up the lake, which could not overflow, the water displaced by the lava being evaporated. the hissing of the water rent the air with a deafening sound, and the vapour, blown by the wind, fell in rain upon the sea. the pier became longer and longer, and the blocks of lava piled themselves one on another. where formerly stretched the calm waters of the lake now appeared an enormous mass of smoking rocks, as if an upheaving of the soil had formed immense shoals. imagine the waters of the lake aroused by a hurricane, then suddenly solidified by an intense frost, and some conception may be formed of the aspect of the lake three hours after the irruption of this irresistible torrent of lava. this time water would be vanquished by fire. nevertheless it was a fortunate circumstance for the colonists that the effusion of lava should have been in the direction of lake grant. they had before them some days' respite. the plateau of prospect heights, granite house, and the dockyard were for the moment preserved. and these few days it was necessary to employ them in planking, carefully caulking the vessel, and launching her. the colonists would then take refuge on board the vessel, content to rig her after she should be afloat on the waters. with the danger of an explosion which threatened to destroy the island there could be no security on shore. the walls of granite house, once so sure a retreat, might at any moment fall in upon them. during the six following days, from the th to the th of january, the colonists accomplished as much of the construction of their vessel as twenty men could have done. they hardly allowed themselves a moment's repose, and the glare of the flames which shot from the crater enabled them to work night and day. the flow of lava continued, but perhaps less abundantly. this was fortunate, for lake grant was almost entirely choked up, and if more lava should accumulate it would inevitably spread over the plateau of prospect heights, and thence upon the beach. but if the island was thus partially protected on this side, it was not so with the western part. in fact, the second stream of lava, which had followed the valley of falls river, a valley of great extent, the land on both sides of the creek being flat, met with no obstacle. the burning liquid had then spread through the forest of the far west. at this period of the year, when the trees were dried up by a tropical heat, the forest caught fire instantaneously, in such a manner that the conflagration extended itself both by the trunks of the trees and by their higher branches, whose interlacement favoured its progress. it even appeared that the current of flame spread more rapidly among the summits of the trees than the current of lava at their bases. thus it happened that the wild animals, jaguars, wild boars, cabybaras, koulas, and game of every kind, mad with terror, had fled to the banks of the mercy and to the tadorn marsh, beyond the road to port balloon. but the colonists were too much occupied with their task to pay any attention to even the most formidable of these animals. they had abandoned granite house, and would not even take shelter at the chimneys, but encamped under a tent, near the mouth of the mercy. each day cyrus harding and gideon spilett ascended the plateau of prospect heights. sometimes herbert accompanied them, but never pencroft, who could not bear to look upon the prospect of the island now so utterly devastated. it was, in truth, a heartrending spectacle. all the wooded part of the island was now completely bare. one single clump of green trees raised their heads at the extremity of serpentine peninsula. here and there were a few grotesque blackened and branchless stumps. the site of the devastated forest was even more barren than tadorn marsh. the irruption of the lava had been complete. where formerly sprang up that charming verdure, the soil was now nothing but a savage mass of volcanic tufa. in the valleys of the falls and mercy rivers no drop of water now flowed towards the sea, and should lake grant be entirely dried up, the colonists would have no means of quenching their thirst. but, fortunately, the lava had spared the southern corner of the lake, containing all that remained of the drinkable water of the island. towards the north-west stood out the rugged and well-defined outlines of the sides of the volcano, like a gigantic claw hovering over the island. what a sad and fearful sight, and how painful to the colonists, who, from a fertile domain covered with forests, irrigated by watercourses, and enriched by the produce of their toils, found themselves, as it were, transported to a desolate rock, upon which, but for their reserves of provisions, they could not even gather the means of subsistence! "it is enough to break one's heart!" said gideon spilett, one day. "yes, spilett," answered the engineer. "may god grant us the time to complete this vessel, now our sole refuge!" "do not you think, cyrus, that the violence of the eruption has somewhat lessened? the volcano still vomits forth lava, but somewhat less abundantly, if i mistake not." "it matters little," answered cyrus harding. "the fire is still burning in the interior of the mountain, and the sea may break in at any moment. we are in the condition of passengers whose ship is devoured by a conflagration which they cannot extinguish, and who know that sooner or later the flames must reach the powder-magazine. to work, spilett, to work, and let us not lose an hour!" during eight days more, that is to say until the th of february, the lava continued to flow, but the eruption was confined within the previous limits. cyrus harding feared above all lest the liquefied matter should overflow the shore, for in that event the dockyard could not escape. moreover, about this time the colonists felt in the frame of the island vibrations which alarmed them to the highest degree. it was the th of february. yet another month must elapse before the vessel would be ready for sea. would the island hold together till then? the intention of pencroft and cyrus harding was to launch the vessel as soon as the hull should be complete. the deck, the upper-works, the interior woodwork and the rigging, might be finished afterwards, but the essential point was that the colonists should have an assured refuge away from the island. perhaps it might be even better to conduct the vessel to port balloon, that is to say, as far as possible from the centre of eruption, for at the mouth of the mercy, between the islet and the wall of granite, it would run the risk of being crushed in the event of any convulsion. all the exertions of the voyagers were therefore concentrated upon the completion of the hull. thus the rd of march arrived, and they might calculate upon launching the vessel in ten days. hope revived in the hearts of the colonists, who had, in this fourth year of their sojourn on lincoln island, suffered so many trials. even pencroft lost in some measure the sombre taciturnity occasioned by the devastation and ruin of his domain. his hopes, it is true, were concentrated upon his vessel. "we shall finish it," he said to the engineer, "we shall finish it, captain, and it is time, for the season is advancing and the equinox will soon be here. well, if necessary, we must put in to tabor island to spend the winter. but think of tabor island after lincoln island. ah, how unfortunate! who could have believed it possible?" "let us get on," was the engineer's invariable reply. and they worked away without losing a moment. "master," asked neb, a few days later, "do you think all this could have happened if captain nemo had been still alive?" "certainly, neb," answered cyrus harding. "i, for one, don't believe it!" whispered pencroft to neb. "nor i!" answered neb seriously. during the first week of march appearances again became menacing. thousands of threads like glass, formed of fluid lava, fell like rain upon the island. the crater was again boiling with lava which overflowed the back of the volcano. the torrent flowed along the surface of the hardened tufa, and destroyed the few meagre skeletons of trees which had withstood the first eruption. the stream flowing this time towards the south-west shore of lake grant, stretched beyond creek glycerine, and invaded the plateau of prospect heights. this last blow to the work of the colonists was terrible. the mill, the buildings of the inner court, the stables, were all destroyed. the affrighted poultry fled in all directions. top and jup showed signs of the greatest alarm, as if their instinct warned them of an impending catastrophe. a large number of the animals of the island had perished in the first eruption. those which survived found no refuge but tadorn marsh, save a few to which the plateau of prospect heights afforded an asylum. but even this last retreat was now closed to them, and the lava-torrent, flowing over the edge of the granite wall, began to pour down upon the beach its cataracts of fire. the sublime horror of this spectacle passed all description. during the night it could only be compared to a niagara of molten fluid, with its incandescent vapours above and its boiling masses below. the colonists were driven to their last entrenchment, and although the upper seams of the vessel were not yet caulked, they decided to launch her at once. pencroft and ayrton therefore set about the necessary preparations for the launch, which was to take place the morning of the next day, the th of march. but, during the night of the th an enormous column of vapour escaping from the crater rose with frightful explosions to a height of more than three thousand feet. the wall of dakkar grotto had evidently given way under the pressure of the gases, and the sea, rushing through the central shaft into the igneous gulf, was at once converted into vapour. but the crater could not afford a sufficient outlet for this vapour. an explosion, which might have been heard at a distance of a hundred miles, shook the air. fragments of mountains fell into the pacific, and, in a few minutes, the ocean rolled over the spot where lincoln island once stood. chapter twenty. an isolated rock in the pacific--the last refuge of the colonists of lincoln island--death their only prospect--unexpected succour--why and how it arrives--a last kindness--an island on terra firma--the tomb of captain prince dakkar nemo. an isolated rock, thirty feet in length, twenty in breadth, scarcely ten from the water's edge, such was the only solid point which the waves of the pacific had not engulfed. it was all that remained of the structure of granite house! the wall had fallen headlong and been then shattered to fragments, and a few of the rocks of the large room were piled one above another to form this point. all around had disappeared in the abyss; the inferior cone of mount franklin, rent asunder by the explosion; the lava jaws of shark gulf, the plateau of prospect heights, safety islet, the granite rocks of port balloon, the basalts of dakkar grotto, the long serpentine peninsula, so distant nevertheless from the centre of the eruption. all that could now be seen of lincoln island was the narrow rock which now served as a refuge to the six colonists and their dog top. the animals had also perished in the catastrophe; the birds, as well as those representing the fauna of the island--all either crushed or drowned, and the unfortunate jup himself had, alas! found his death in some crevice of the soil. if cyrus harding, gideon spilett, herbert, pencroft, neb, and ayrton had survived, it was because, assembled under their tent, they had been hurled into the sea at the instant when the fragments of the island rained down on every side. when they reached the surface they could only perceive, at half a cable's length, this mass of rocks, towards which they swam and on which they found footing. on this barren rock they had now existed for nine days. a few provisions taken from the magazine of granite house before the catastrophe, a little fresh water from the rain which had fallen in a hollow of the rock, was all that the unfortunate colonists possessed. their last hope, the vessel, had been shattered to pieces. they had no means of quitting the reef; no fire, nor any means of obtaining it. it seemed that they must inevitably perish. this day, the th of march, there remained only provisions for two days, although they limited their consumption to the bare necessaries of life. all their science and intelligence could avail them nothing in their present position. they were in the hand of god. cyrus harding was calm, gideon spilett more nervous, and pencroft, a prey to sullen anger, walked to and fro on the rock. herbert did not for a moment quit the engineer's side as if demanding from him that assistance he had no power to give. neb and ayrton were resigned to their fate. "ah, what a misfortune! what a misfortune!" often repeated pencroft. "if we had but a walnut-shell to take us to tabor island! but we have nothing, nothing!" "captain nemo did right to die," said neb. during the five ensuing days cyrus harding and his unfortunate companions husbanded their provisions with the most extreme care, eating only what would prevent them from succumbing to starvation. their weakness was extreme. herbert and neb began to show symptoms of delirium. under these circumstances was it possible for them to retain even the shadow of a hope? no! what was their sole remaining chance? that a vessel should appear in sight off the rock? but they knew only too well from experience that no ships ever visited this part of the pacific. could they calculate that, by a truly providential coincidence, the scotch yacht would arrive precisely at this time in search of ayrton at tabor island? it was scarcely probable; and, besides, supposing she should come there, as the colonists had not been able to deposit a notice pointing out ayrton's change of abode, the commander of the yacht, after having explored tabor island without result, would again set sail and return to lower latitudes. no! no hope of being saved could be retained, and a horrible death, death from hunger and thirst, awaited them upon this rock. already they were stretched on the rock, inanimate, and no longer conscious of what passed around them. ayrton alone, by a supreme effort, from time to time raised his head, and cast a despairing glance over the desert ocean. but on the morning of the th of march ayrton's arms were extended towards a point in the horizon; he raised himself, at first on his knees, then upright, and his hand seemed to make a signal. a sail was in sight off the rock. she was evidently not without an object. the reef was the mark for which she was making in a direct line, under all steam, and the unfortunate colonists might have made her out some hours before if they had had the strength to watch the horizon. "the _duncan_!" murmured ayrton--and fell back without sign of life. when cyrus harding and his companions recovered consciousness, thanks to the attention lavished upon them, they found themselves in the cabin of a steamer, without being able to comprehend how they had escaped death. a word from ayrton explained everything. "the _duncan_!" he murmured. "the _duncan_!" exclaimed cyrus harding. and raising his hand to heaven, he said, "oh! almighty god! mercifully hast thou preserved us!" it was, in fact, the _duncan_, lord glenarvan's yacht, now commanded by robert, son of captain grant, who had been despatched to tabor island to find ayrton, and bring him back to his native land after twelve years of expiation. the colonists were not only saved, but already on the way to their native country. "captain grant," asked cyrus harding, "who can have suggested to you the idea, after having left tabor island, where you did not find ayrton, of coming a hundred miles farther north-east?" "captain harding," replied robert grant, "it was in order to find, not only ayrton, but yourself and your companions." "my companions and myself?" "doubtless, at lincoln island." "at lincoln island!" exclaimed in a breath gideon spilett, herbert, neb, and pencroft, in the highest degree astonished. "how could you be aware of the existence of lincoln island?" inquired cyrus harding, "it is not even named in the charts." "i knew of it from a document left by you on tabor island," answered robert grant. "a document?" cried gideon spilett. "without doubt, and here it is," answered robert grant, producing a paper which indicated the longitude and latitude of lincoln island, "the present residence of ayrton and five american colonists." "it is captain nemo!" cried cyrus harding, after having read the notice, and recognised that the handwriting was similar to that of the paper found at the corral. "ah!" said pencroft, "it was then he who took our _bonadventure_ and hazarded himself alone to go to tabor island!" "in order to leave this notice," added herbert. "i was then right in saying," exclaimed the sailor, "that even after his death the captain would render us a last service." "my friends," said cyrus harding, in a voice of the profoundest emotion, "may the god of mercy have had pity on the soul of captain nemo, our benefactor!" the colonists uncovered themselves at these last words of cyrus harding, and murmured the name of captain nemo. then ayrton, approaching the engineer, said simply, "where should this coffer be deposited?" it was the coffer which ayrton had saved at the risk of his life, at the very instant that the island had been engulfed, and which he now faithfully handed to the engineer. "ayrton! ayrton!" said cyrus harding, deeply touched. then, addressing robert grant, "sir," he added, "you left behind you a criminal; you find in his place a man who has become honest by penitence, and whose hand i am proud to clasp in mine." robert grant was now made acquainted with the strange history of captain nemo and the colonists of lincoln island. then, observations being taken of what remained of this shoal, which must henceforward figure on the charts of the pacific, the order was given to make all sail. a few weeks afterwards the colonists landed in america, and found their country once more at peace after the terrible conflict in which right and justice had triumphed. of the treasures contained in the coffer left by captain nemo to the colonists of lincoln island, the larger portion was employed in the purchase of a vast territory in the state of iowa. one pearl alone, the finest, was reserved from the treasure and sent to lady glenarvan in the name of the castaways restored to their country by the _duncan_. there, upon this domain, the colonists invited to labour, that is to say, to wealth and happiness, all those to whom they had hoped to offer the hospitality of lincoln island. there was founded a vast colony to which they gave the name of that island sunk beneath the waters of the pacific. a river was there called the mercy, a mountain took the name of mount franklin, a small lake was named lake grant, and the forests became the forests of the far west. it might have been an island on terra firma. there, under the intelligent hands of the engineer and his companions, everything prospered. not one of the former colonists of lincoln island was absent, for they had sworn to live always together. neb was with his master; ayrton was there ready to sacrifice himself for all; pencroft was more a farmer than he had even been a sailor; herbert, who completed his studies under the superintendence of cyrus harding; and gideon spilett, who founded the _new lincoln herald_, the best-informed journal in the world. there cyrus harding and his companions received at intervals visits from lord and lady glenarvan, captain john mangles and his wife, the sister of robert grant, robert grant himself, major mcnab, and all those who had taken part in the history both of captain grant and captain nemo. there, to conclude, all were happy, united in the present as they had been in the past; but never could they forget that island upon which they had arrived poor and friendless, that island which, during four years, had supplied all their wants, and of which there remained but a fragment of granite washed by the waves of the pacific, the tomb of him who had borne the name of captain nemo. finis. proofreading team the international adventure library three owls edition the white waterfall an adventure story by james francis dwyer to l.g.d. and g.m.d. "that's the way to heaven, that's the way to heaven, that's the way to heaven out of black fernando's hell." preface it is perhaps inadvisable to mix fact with fiction, but, it appears, some reference to certain portions of "the white waterfall" that might strain the belief of the average reader will not be out of place. in the wonderful islands of the pacific many things happen that seem improbable to the minds of those who dwell close to the heart of civilization. the mysterious isle of tears is not altogether a dream. there are several islands in polynesia that have been looked upon from time immemorial as islands of the dead. these places are shunned by the islanders, and the centuries have invested them with the same atmosphere of brooding mystery that professor herndon and his party felt when they landed upon the silent isle where the wizards of the centipede performed their weird rites without interference from the outside world. nor is the vermilion pit created out of thin air. the savage has used many startling methods to separate the born warrior from the coward, and the author has seen a place just as wonderful as the pit, where the young men of the tribe were tested in the same manner as that related in this story. the cunning savage has always thought it inadvisable to pick his fighting men till their courage had been thoroughly tested, and in dull days of peace the headmen of the tribes racked their brains to discover nerve-shaking ordeals to try the daring of the growing youth. the safety of the tribe depended upon the valour of the fighting line, and it would have been an inexcusable blunder to put the nervous ones in the front rank. the strange stone structures similar to the one upon which holman and verslun narrowly escaped being offered up as sacrifices to the centipede are to be found in many islands of the pacific at the present day. in the tongan, caroline, and cook groups these peculiar stone ruins remain as evidence of the existence of an ancient people of superior intelligence to the islanders of to-day. as to the meaning or use of these structures we are entirely in the dark. the natives of these groups know nothing concerning them, and the polynesian builder in that dark past was too busy clubbing and eating his neighbour to write histories. scientists are in doubt, as in the case of the great ruins at metalanim, whether they were built as sacrificial altars or as monuments to ambitious chiefs, and there are no records to enlighten us. but these relics are convincing proofs that the islands have been inhabited for many hundreds of years, and we are left to conjecture regarding the origin and history of the people. the dance of the centipede, which holman and verslun witnessed in the long gallery, can be seen to-day by any tourist who leaves the beaten paths. every missionary to the islands can tell of "devil dances" that take place in secluded groves, and in which, to his great disgust, his converts often take part. it takes time to turn the savage from his old beliefs. although the south seas constitute the last fortress of romance, and a mention of the coral atolls immediately conjures up a vision of palms and rice-white beaches, the sensitive person senses the dark and bloody past when the wizard men were the rulers, and death stalked in the palm groves. j.f.d. new york, march, . [illustration] contents chapter i. the song of the maori ii. the professor's daughters iii. a knife from the dark iv. the storm v. i make a promise vi. the isle of tears vii. the pit viii. the ledge of death ix. into the valley of echoes x. a midnight alarm xi. kaipi performs a service xii. the devil dancers xiii. tombs of silence xiv. back to the camp xv. a day of skirmishing xvi. the stone table xvii. beneath the centipede xviii. barbara's messenger xix. leith scores xx. the black kindergarten xxi. together again xxii. the white waterfall xxiii. the wizard's seat xxiv. the way to heaven the white waterfall [illustration] [illustration] chapter i the song of the maori there is a tongan proverb which tells us that only fools and children lie awake during hours that could be devoted to slumber, and it is a wise proverb when you judge it from a polynesian standpoint. no special preparations are required for slumber in the last haunts of romance, and as one does not lose caste by dozing in public, the south sea dweller sees no reason for remaining awake when he could be peacefully sleeping. the shade of a palm tree furnishes an ideal resting place, and if a dog fight occurs in the grass-grown street, he becomes a box-seat spectator without moving from his couch. levuka, the second largest town in the fijis, was dozing on the afternoon of december , , and i decided to follow the example set by the inhabitants. the thermometer in the shack at the end of the wharf registered degrees, but the picturesque little town, with its white and vermilion-tinted houses, looked restful and cool. the hot, still atmosphere weighed down upon the pacific, ironing out the wind ruffles till the ocean resembled a plain of glass, in which the union company's steamer _navua_, from auckland, appeared to be stuck fast, as if the glassy sea had suddenly hardened around her black hull. a thin strip of shadow huddled close to a pile of pearl shell at the end of the wharf, and i doubled myself up and attempted to sleep. but hardwood planks don't make an ideal resting place. besides, the rays of sun followed the strip of shadow around the pile, and each time i slipped into a doze i would be pricked into wakefulness. at last, maddened by the biting rays, i collected half a dozen copra bags, splintered a piece of _kauri_ pine, and after rigging up one bag as an awning, i spread the others on the planks and fell asleep. but another disturbing element awakened me from a short slumber. from the sea end of the deserted wharf came a big, greasy maori and a fuzzy-headed fijian, and their words went out into the silence like sound projectiles. the maori had such a high-pitched voice that i thought, as i rolled over restlessly, he would only have to raise it a little to make them hear him up in sydney, eighteen hundred miles away. it was one of those voices that fairly cavort over big distances, and i buried my head in the shell as the pair came closer. it was useless to attempt to shut out that voice. i stuffed a piece of bag into the ear that wasn't jammed against the pearl shell, but the noise of that fool talking fairly sizzled in my brain. finally i gave up all hopes of trying to sleep till the pair had left the wharf, and i lay upon my back as they came slowly up the sun-bitten structure. it was only when i gave up all thoughts of sleep that i recognized that the maori was talking english. up to that moment i thought the pair were arguing in some unfamiliar tongue, but suddenly their conversation gripped me, and i strained my ears to listen. "there's the white waterfall," chanted the maori. "yes, the white waterfall," repeated the fijian. "an' you go along sixty paces." "to the right?" questioned the fijian. "no! to the left, you fool!" screamed his companion. "all right, you go to the left," muttered the rebuked one. "an' that's the way to heaven!" cried the maori. "the way to heaven," echoed the fijian; then the two lifted up their voices and chanted: "that's the way to heaven, that's the way to heaven, that's the way to heaven out of black fernando's hell." the incident stirred my curiosity. if i had only heard the words of the chant i would not have puzzled my brain to determine their meaning, but it was the manner in which the maori instructed his friend as to the direction in which one must walk from the white waterfall that made me interested. i turned the words over in my mind as i watched them saunter slowly toward me. black fernando's hell and the white waterfall were places that i had never heard of. i thought of all the missionary hymns that i had ever listened to afloat and ashore, but the lines that the pair had chanted were not familiar. the two walked on in silence for a few minutes after they had lifted up their voices in the chant, then the maori began to cross-question his companion concerning the information he had just given him. "how many paces?" he asked. "sixty," answered the fijian. "to the right, isn't it?" "yes, to the right," stammered the learner. "you fool nigger!" screamed the instructor. "it is to the left, pig! do you hear me? you must go to the left from the white waterfall! oh, you blinded fool! you make me sick! sing it now with me!" the fijian, who was apparently afraid of the bully, hurried to obey the order, and i wondered as i listened. "sixty paces to the left," squeaked the fijian. "sixty paces to the left," roared the maori. "now together!" "that's the way to heaven, that's the way to heaven, that's the way to heaven out of----" i was the cause of the interruption. i lifted myself into a sitting position, and the movement disturbed the heap of shell. part of the pile rattled down upon the planks of the wharf, and the maori and his pupil stopped singing and stared at me as if they were much surprised at finding any one within hearing distance. the wharf had appeared deserted, and i gave them a start by crawling from underneath the awning i had made from the copra bag. the maori wore a dirty khaki coat, with a pair of trousers reaching to his knees, while the fijian, instead of being short-rigged in shirt and sulu, sported a full suit of duck. "good afternoon, boss," said the maori, trying to wipe the look of surprise from his face with a grin. "mighty hot afternoon, isn't it, boss?" "it is," i answered. "if i knew where that white waterfall is i'd go and stand under it for a few minutes." the small fijian gave a little gurgle of surprise and looked up at his big teacher, who regarded me with eyes of wonder. "what white waterfall, boss?" he asked blandly. "the one you were singing about," i cried. the maori smiled sweetly. "we weren't singing about a white waterfall, boss," he spluttered. "i just guess you were asleep an' dreamed something." that didn't improve my temper. i had an edge on the fellow on account of the high-powered voice he owned, so when he suggested that i had been dreaming, i climbed to my feet so that i could make my words more impressive when i started to tell him my opinion of his bluff. the action startled the fijian. he had an idea that i was going to use the piece of _kauri_ pine upon his head, so he gave a yell and started full speed up the wharf toward the town. the maori stood his ground for a minute, then he made a face to express his contempt for me and bolted after his mate. i stared at his bare legs walloping the planks, and feeling certain that i had lost all chance of finding out where the white waterfall and black fernando's hell were situated, i found a new shadow patch and lay down again. i fell asleep and dreamed that i was chasing those two islanders in an endeavour to find out the meaning of their mysterious chant, but just as i had overtaken the pair, some one gripped my arm and shook me gently. when i opened my eyes i looked up into the face of a good-looking young fellow of about two and twenty years, who was smiling broadly as if he thought it a great joke to wake a man out of a sound sleep on a hot afternoon. "are you jack verslun?" he asked. i nodded. it was too warm to use words recklessly. "pierre the rat sent me after you," he continued. "why?" i asked. "i have a berth for you," he answered. "i'm from _the waif_. the mate died on the run down from sydney, and captain newmarch sent me ashore to hunt up some one for his perch. do you want it?" "where are you bound?" i asked. "manihiki group." "what for?" "science expedition under the direction of professor herndon of san francisco." i sat up and looked across the stretch of water at _the waif_, and the young fellow waited patiently. i knew the yacht. an english baronet had brought the vessel out from cowes to brisbane, but he had made the pace too hot in the colonies. out in fortitude valley one night the keeper of a saloon fired a bullet into his aristocratic head, and _the waif_ was auctioned. she had taken a hand in a number of games after that. a fast yacht is a handy vessel south of the line, and some queer tales were told about the boat that had once shown her heels to the crackerjacks in the solent. but i couldn't afford to be particular at that moment. levuka isn't the spot where a man can pick and choose, so i wiped the shell grit from my drill suit and told myself that i had better accept the berth instead of waiting in expectation of something better turning up. pierre the rat, who ran "the rathole," where penniless seamen and beachcombers lodged, was my creditor, and when pierre was very solicitous in obtaining employment for one of his boarders, it was a mighty good intimation that the boarder's credit had reached highwater mark. "well," i said, climbing to my feet, "i might as well take it. i thought i had enough of the islands, but as this has turned up i'm your man. say," i added, "did you ever read pilgrim's progress'?" the young fellow looked at me and grinned. "yes, i did," he answered. "do you remember much of it?" i asked. "not much," he replied. "is there anything in it about a white waterfall that is on the way to heaven out of black fernando's hell?" i questioned. the youngster put his head on one side and looked as if he was turning things over in his mental storehouse, then he gave me a quick, shrewd glance and burst out laughing. "well?" i growled. "what's the grin for?" "what has bunyan got to do with my business?" he asked. "i came to sign you up for a mate's job on _the waif_, and i am in a hurry." "yes, i know," i grumbled, "but i thought you might have heard something of a white waterfall. i'm not sure that it is mentioned in 'pilgrim's progress,' but it seems to taste of bunyan." "p'raps so," said the youngster, "but bunyan isn't in our line at present. captain newmarch told me to hurry back to the yacht, as he wants to get away by sunset, so if you're ready we'll make a start. my name is holman, will holman." we walked up the quiet street together and i began to like will holman. one couldn't help but like him. he had the frank, open ways of a boy, but the cut of his jaw and the manner in which he minted his words led you to believe that he would give a man's account of himself if any one pushed him up against a wall. while he made some purchases in the little stores, i went up to the broken-down shanty where pierre the rat ran his house of refuge, and, after i had collected my few belongings, i went back to the wharf, where a boat from _the waif_ was waiting to take us aboard the yacht. it was when i was climbing into the boat that i got a surprise. one of the two natives at the oars was the little fijian who had been the pupil of the maori, but he didn't bat an eyelash when i stared at him. "what's up?" asked holman. "do you know toni?" "he's one of the brace that were singing that song about the white waterfall," i growled. the fijian let out a volley of indignant denials, and holman laughed. "you might be mistaken," he said. "toni came ashore with me about two hours ago, but i don't think he left the boat." "i'm not mistaken," i said, as the fijian kept on protesting that he had never moved from the boat, "but it doesn't matter much. let it go." we were about a quarter of a mile from the shore when a man raced down from the town, ran along to the sea end of the wharf and waved his arms as if he was signalling us. holman turned and looked at him. "i wonder who it is?" he muttered. "perhaps it is somebody with your board bill, verslun." i started to laugh, then i stopped suddenly. the man on the wharf was shouting to us, and when my ears caught a word i recognized him. it was the big maori who had been instructing the fijian earlier in the afternoon. i told holman, and he looked at toni, but toni's face was blank. for some reason or other he wished to ignore his instructor who was screaming on the end of the wharf. "he must be mad," muttered holman. "the darned fool thinks we--listen!" a land breeze brought the last line of the chant to our ears as we neared _the waif_, and the words seemed to stir me curiously as they swirled around us. i had a desire to memorize the chant, and even after we had got out of range of the high-powered voice of the singer i found myself murmuring over and over again the words: "that's the way to heaven out of black fernando's hell." [illustration] chapter ii the professor's daughters in the old days, when slave-carrying was a game followed by gentlemen with nerve, the officer with the best nose on board the man-o'-war that overhauled a suspected slave carrier was always sent aboard to make an examination. it was his business to sniff at the air in the hold in an endeavour to distinguish the "slave smell." no matter how the wily slaver disinfected the place, the odour of caged niggers remained, and a long-nosed investigator could always detect it. now the trouble odour on board a ship is the same as the slave smell. an experienced investigator can detect it immediately, and when i climbed over the low bulwarks of _the waif_ i got a whiff. i couldn't tell exactly where it was, but i knew that dame trouble was aboard the craft. it's a sort of sixth sense with a sailorman to be able to detect a stormy atmosphere, and i felt that the yacht wasn't the place that the dove of peace would choose as a permanent abode. i don't know how the information came to me. it seemed to filter in through the pores of my skin, but it was information that i felt sure was correct. captain newmarch was a bilious englishman with a thin, scrawny beard. he endeavoured to make one word do the work of two--or three if they were very short words--and working up a conversation with him was as tough a job as one could lay hold of. sometimes a word came to the tip of his tongue, felt the atmosphere, as you might say, then slid back into his throat with a little protesting gurgle, and after a ten minutes' conversation with him, those little gurgles from the strangled words made me look upon him as a sort of morgue for murdered sentences. professor herndon, the head of the expedition, was on the deck when the captain and i came up out of the cabin, and herndon was everything the comic papers show in the make-up of science professors, with a little bit extra for good luck. he was sixty inches of nerves, wrinkles, and whiskers, with special adornments in the shape of a blue smoking cap, and a pair of spectacles with specially ground lenses of an enormous thickness. newmarch grunted something which the professor and i took to be an introduction, and he put a skinny hand into mine. "you have been a long while in the islands?" he squeaked. "longer than i care to say," i replied. "have you been around the spot we are making for?" he asked. "i was on penrhyn island for three months," i answered. "i was helping a german scientist who was studying the family habits of turtles." i made a foolish break by admitting that i possessed any knowledge of polynesia. the professor had left his home at sunny sausalito, on the shores of san francisco bay, in search of that kind of stuff, and before i could do a conversational backstep he had pushed me against the side of the galley and was deluging me with questions, the answers to which he entered in shorthand in a notebook that was bulkier than a dutchman's bible. the old spectacled ancient could fire more queries in three minutes than any human gatling that ever gripped a brief, and i looked around for relief. and the wonder is that the relief came. i forgot the professor and his anxiety concerning the "temba-temba" devil dance when my eyes happened to catch sight of the vision that was approaching from the companionway. a boat carrying a science expedition to one of the loneliest groups in the pacific was not the place where one would expect to find the handsomest girl in all the world, and my tongue refused to mould my words. the girl was tall, of graceful build, and possessed of a quiet beauty that had a most peculiar effect upon me. only that afternoon, as i lay in the shadow of the pile of pearl shell on levuka wharf, i had thought of crossing to auckland and shipping up to 'frisco so that i could hear good women laugh and talk as i had heard them in my dreams during the years i had spent around the islands, and now the woman of my dreams was in front of me. but i was afraid of her. when she came toward me i thought of the years i had wasted down in that lonely quarter where ambition is strangled by lassitude bred in tropical sunshine, and the ghost of the man i might have been banged me fair between the two eyes. "my daughter, miss edith herndon," squeaked the professor, and when i put out my big hand to take her little one i thought i'd fall down on the deck on account of the niagara of blood that seemed to rush to my brain. it's funny how all the little imperfections in your dress and manner rise up suddenly and bang you hard on the bump of observation when you find yourself in front of some one whose good opinion you want to earn. i felt it so the moment i stood before the girl in the cream serge suit. my drill outfit, that i had thought rather clean when i brushed the shell grit from it after my sleep on the wharf, looked as black as the devil's tail when she appeared. my hands appeared to be several degrees larger than the prize hams that come out of kansas, and my tongue, as if it recognized the stupidity of the remarks i attempted to make, started to play fool stunts as if it wanted to go down my throat and choke me to death. the girl guessed the sort of predicament i was in at that moment. god only knows how many months had passed since i had spoken to a woman like her. not that good women are lacking in the islands, but because they were on a different plane to me. i had been belting native crews on trading schooners between the carolines and the marquesas, and when ashore i had little opportunity for speaking to a woman of the type of edith herndon. and she understood the feeling that held me tongue-tied. to make me feel at my ease she started to tell of everything that had happened from the moment that _the waif_ had cleared sydney heads, and the time she spent in that recital was as precious to me as the two-minute interval between rounds is to a prize-fighter who has been knocked silly the moment before the round ends. i had shaken the dizziness out of my head when she finished, and i had obtained control over my tongue. "you must tell us a lot about the south seas," she cried. "you have been down here such a long time that you must have many interesting things to relate. captain newmarch will not talk, and mr. leith refuses to see anything picturesque in the sights he has seen during his wanderings." "who is mr. leith?" i asked. "he is father's partner in this expedition," she said quietly. "he has lived down here for many years, but he will not tell us much. and barbara is anxious to know everything she can." "barbara?" i stammered. "then--then there is another lady aboard?" "oh, yes! my sister," cried the girl. "i think i hear her coming now." there was no question about the latter part of her remark. a burst of laughter that was more infectious than influenza came from the companion-stairs, and immediately in its wake came a girl who made me think, as i compared her to miss edith, of a beautiful yacht alongside a stately liner. barbara herndon was sunshine personified. laughter went with her wherever she went, and a pair of tongans, polishing brasses, immediately put their molars on view, as if they had understood what caused the smiles upon her pretty face as she came toward us. "oh, you are the new mate?" she cried, as i was introduced. "mr. holman was just telling me about you. he said that you repeated a chapter of 'pilgrim's progress' every time you woke up after a sleep." i blushed as i made a mental resolve that i would punch the head of that youngster when i had a suitable opportunity, and in between my stammering explanations i made notes on the differences between the two girls. edith was as stately as juno, with a face that was so sweet and restful that a glance at it was better than an opiate for a man whose nerves were all out of tune. she had that kind of repose that you see sometimes on the face of an oriental statue, the repose that comes to women who have met great trials or for whom great trials are waiting. barbara was altogether different. she found the world rather an amusing place, and it seemed as if she took it for granted that her sister was capable of shouldering the cares of the family, leaving her free to smile at all the amusing incidents she found in the course of the day. it appeared to me that i was an amusing incident to her at that moment. she returned to the fool story that holman had told, and i couldn't sidestep her questions. "but it is true that you were quoting bunyan on the wharf when mr. holman found you, isn't it?" she asked mischievously. "no, it isn't true," i spluttered. "i only asked mr. holman a question to see if he was familiar with 'pilgrim's progress'." "why did you ask him that?" she quizzed. "i'm sure he looks a perfectly respectable young man." miss edith was smiling, but she took pity upon me at last and endeavoured to rescue me from my tormentor. "oh, barbara!" she cried reprovingly, "mr. verslun will think you are very inquisitive. you must not pry into his private affairs." "but it is nothing private," i gurgled. "i simply asked mr. holman a question in an endeavour to find out what a maori and a fijian were talking about." "oh, it is something mysterious!" cried the younger girl. "i knew it! i knew it! we are getting into the region of mystery at last! oh, mr. verslun, you are a perfect treasure! it has been a nasty, dull, old trip from the moment we left sydney harbour, and you are the first person to bring a little colour into the voyage." she was so worked up at the thought of hearing something wonderfully mysterious and romantic that i started to make a long yarn out of that incident on the wharf just for her benefit. miss edith was interested too, but i was convinced, as i polished up the points of the little tale and endeavoured to pull in a thrill, that the elder sister was deriving her pleasure from watching the face of the younger one, and not from my story. "it pleases barbara," she cried, when i had told how toni had denied all knowledge of his friend, and how the maori had sent the farewell chant after the boat. "she thinks she will see and hear wonderful things before we get back to civilization." "i hope she will," i said, and little did i dream that the wish i expressed at that moment should come true in such a remarkable manner before we had returned. "and you don't know what they meant by their song about the white waterfall and black fernando's hell?" murmured barbara. "no, i don't," i replied. "the maori ran away when i attempted to cross-examine him, and toni denies all knowledge of the duet on the wharf." "oh, we must ask him again!" she cried. "there he is near the wheel. i'll go and bring him!" she raced madly after the fijian and hauled him before us in triumph. i was more convinced than ever that it was toni who had blundered over his lesson on the wharf, but toni denied the charge more vehemently than he did on the boat. he asserted in reply to barbara herndon's questions, that he could not sing a note, that he was absolutely ignorant of white waterfalls, and the only hell he knew was the one spoken of by the missionary in lower george street, sydney; and the girl sighed as she gave up the effort. "it seemed such a nice mystery to unravel," she murmured, "but if toni persists in saying that he knows nothing of the white waterfall the investigation falls to the ground." the fijian was backing away with renewed protestations when a head came round the corner of the galley, and a voice that was deeper than the caves of atiu fired a question at us. "what about the white waterfall?" "oh, mr. leith," cried miss barbara, "we have just been investigating a mystery. mr. verslun discovered it this afternoon in levuka. but you haven't met mr. verslun yet, have you?" "i haven't," growled the owner of the voice. "mr. verslun, this is mr. leith, who is father's partner," said miss barbara. "he knows a lot about the islands, but he refuses to tell any of his experiences." i looked at the man who stood in front of me, and a curious thing flashed through my mind. i was reminded at that moment of a story i had read of a man charged with an attempt upon the life of a prince. the would-be murderer informed the judge that a terrible hate of the princeling had gripped him the moment he put eyes on him, and he had made the attempt upon his life before he had managed to control the unexplainable surge of hate. i understood the emotion that had gripped that unfortunate as i stood face to face with leith. a feeling of revulsion gripped me, and i experienced a peculiar squalmy sensation as i took his hand. it was unexplainable. perhaps some ancestor of mine had unsatisfactory dealings with a man of the same unusual type in a faraway past, and the transmitted hate had suddenly sprung into the conscious area. i do know that you can keep a secretary-bird away from snakes till it grows old, but the first reptile it sees it immediately starts out to beat him up. i had the inherited hate that makes the secretary-bird rush madly at a snake that may be the first of its species that it has ever seen, and i guess that leith had no love to spare for me from the moment he took my hand. he was a huge brute, fully six feet tall, and he was the possessor of two of the strongest-looking hands i had ever seen. they were claws, that's what they were. the great fingers were slightly crooked, as if waiting, like the tentacles of an octopus, for something to get in their grip. the body was heavy, and, in a manner that i cannot explain, it made me think of animals that lived and died in long past ages. the big brute looked so capable of making an inexcusable attack that one's primitive instincts warned one to keep in a state of readiness for the onslaught that seemed imminent. but it was the face that was specially unattractive. it was a sallow, flat face, and the strange eyes did nothing to lighten it. they were dead, lustreless eyes. they had a coldness in them that reminded me of the icicle eyes of the crocodile, and, curiously, i associated that reptile's notions of fair warfare with leith as i looked at him. that sullen face, with the eyes that would never brighten at a tale of daring, or dim from a story of pathos, belonged to a man who would imitate crocodile tactics by lying quiet till his prey was within striking distance. "what is all this about the white waterfall?" he repeated, after the crooked fingers had dropped my hand. "oh, it's something that happened to mr. verslun," replied miss barbara. "where?" asked leith. "on the wharf over there," i answered coldly, nodding toward the structure as i spoke. "it's really nothing important though, and i related it solely for miss herndon's amusement." "but toni?" he growled, turning toward the two girls. "oh, toni puts forward an alibi," laughed the youngest sister. "he asserts that he was in the boat when the incident happened and he persists in saying that he knows nothing about the matter." leith again turned toward me, and his brows straightened as he looked me in the eyes. "can't you tell the story over again?" he asked. "i'd rather not," i said, somewhat rudely. "i'm tired of it. it was really only a small happening that i am afraid i expanded a little in an endeavour to thrill miss herndon, and the story is now her personal property." "but the bare facts?" he growled. "there are no bare facts," i replied. "i covered them with fiction, and i think miss herndon is going to copyright the whole." he took the remark as a direct refusal on my part to give him an outline of the affair to satisfy his curiosity, and i felt elated at noting the sudden glint of anger that appeared in the lustreless eyes. the two girls stood silent for a moment while leith and i surveyed each other without speaking, then a tahitian boy broke the awkward silence by informing me that the captain wished to see me in the cabin, and i hurriedly excused myself to the sisters and went below. [illustration] chapter iii a knife from the dark it was after nine o'clock that evening before i again saw young holman, and by that time levuka was far behind. we had taken advantage of a stiff breeze that had sprung up about sunset, and _the waif_ was plunging through a moon-washed ocean, sending furrows of foam from her forefoot while the wind snored through her canvas. i forgot the happenings of the day as i felt the quivering vessel that seemed to thrill with the ecstasy of life as she flung herself at the watery wastes ahead. the tremor in her boards seemed to crawl into my body and warm me like wine, and i felt inclined to bless holman instead of punching his head as i had thought of doing during the baiting i received from miss barbara herndon. the youngster had saved me from days and nights of weary monotony in sleepy levuka, and i welcomed him gladly as he joined me on the poop. "say, you made a hit with the ladies!" he cried. "your fame as a story-teller is set upon a solid foundation. and i don't suppose you are inclined to thank me for giving you the opportunity to tell of the wonderful things that happened while you slumbered on the wharf?" "drop it," i growled; "i've had enough of the joke. by the way, what position do you hold in the expedition?" the boy laughed. "i hold none," he cried, "but i'm trying to make myself useful to the professor so that he'll invite me to come ashore with him. the professor and his daughters, with leith and half a dozen natives, comprise the full strength of the expedition, and i'm trying hard for an invitation to the field of wonders." "but what are you doing aboard?" i asked. "my uncle owns _the waif_," answered the young fellow, "and he thought this trip would be a nice cheap holiday for me. i wanted to take a run to the states, but that would have cost him money, so i allowed myself to be forced aboard the yacht. but, gee! i'm mighty glad i came now." i glanced at his face as we turned in our walk, but he moved his head away quickly. "so it has been pleasant?" i said. "pleasant?" he cried. "why it has been a little foretaste of heaven. say, i like you, and i know you like her by the manner in which you explained everything to her. don't you think she's a jolly nice girl?" "who?" "why, miss barbara herndon," he cried. "oh!" i gurgled. "you took me by surprise, and i hardly knew--well, i didn't know what had made the trip so pleasant." he put out his hand, and i gripped it warmly. there was something clean and good about the youngster. when he glanced up at me as i took his hand, i looked into a face that was as open as the day--a face that possessed all the passionate purity of youth, and my grip was sincere. one didn't ask for credentials in dealing with will holman. "i liked you from the start," he said, "but i wanted the opinion of the girls. that's why i put miss barbara up to the game of firing questions at you about that silly business on the wharf." "and did i pass muster?" i queried. "sure you did!" he cried enthusiastically. "miss barbara herndon says that you are true blue, and miss edith--" he stopped and looked at a patch of shadow near the galley. "some one is hiding there," he whispered. "i saw him sneak into it." "nonsense!" i growled. "the moon and something else are affecting your brain." "but i'm sure of it," he gasped. he sprang for the spot as he finished speaking, but he found nothing. he returned to my side shaking his head as if only half convinced about the matter. "some one was listening to us talking, but whoever it was he managed to slip away while we were arguing the question." "well, he didn't learn much," i said. "it was probably one of the islanders, and you've scared the life out of him now." holman gripped my arm as i turned away, and he put a question in a tense whisper. "what do you think of leith?" he asked. somehow the question did not surprise me, but i was not in a hurry to give my opinion of the, professor's partner. "i have only spoken a few words to him," i countered cautiously. "but your impression?" stammered the youngster. "don't you think--well, of course you haven't got the lay of things yet." i smiled at the guilelessness of the boy who was making a confidant of a stranger. "what's wrong with leith?" i asked. "what are you hinting at?" holman glanced at the tongan at the wheel, then at the shadow patch that had disturbed his nerves a few moments before. "he's the devil!" he whispered. i felt inclined to laugh. leith was certainly not a person that one would take to the moment an introduction was given, but the manner in which the young fellow had imparted his opinion was amusing. but it was evident that i had not guessed wrong when i divined trouble the moment i came over the side of the yacht. holman caught my coat with his left hand as we turned, and he spoke excitedly. "do you know what we're after?" he queried hoarsely. "it's a scientific expedition," i replied. "that's what you and captain newmarch told me, and i have not questioned any one else." "but do you know the particular line we are after?" "no," i replied. "well, we're after skulls. leith has told the professor about some ancient boneyard that he knows of, and he's dragging old herndon down there." "i cannot see the crime now," i said. "i've gone after skulls before to-day. i brought a hundred of them up to vavau for a german scientist last year. he was taking them home to european museums to prove that the polynesians of ten centuries back had bigger brains than the niggers of to-day." "yes, i know that," gurgled holman; "but leith--oh, damn it! i can't get you to understand! he pulled the professor into this deal, and the old man is as green as grass. herndon supplied the money and all that, and he's that much of a silly old doodlebug that this fellow is buncoing him out of his good gold." "yes," i muttered; "and what do his daughters say?" "say?" cried the youngster. "they can say nothing that will do any good when they are talking to a madman. he sees fame coming down the pike, and he's blind to all the tricks of that devil. it's a fact, verslun! leith is after the old man's cash--and after edith herndon as well." i stood and looked at the youngster. his boyish face was aflame with indignation, and any suspicions i had regarding his good intentions were swept away immediately. "after edith herndon?" i repeated slowly. "yes!" he gasped. "oh, i knew you didn't like the big, sallow brute. miss barbara told me how you turned him down cold when he wanted you to repeat that yarn to satisfy his curiosity. he's a bad egg, do you hear? he's out for trouble, and we're going to run into it head on before we finish the trip. only for the girls i would have stayed ashore at levuka." "and the captain?" i questioned. "we don't know about him," he snapped. "he's leith's captain. i mean leith put him in his job when the professor chartered the yacht. anyhow, he doesn't say enough to let any one know which side of the fence he is on. he has only learned to say yes and no, and he is mighty particular about the number of times he will use those words." i laughed at the bitterness the youngster threw into his speech. it is good to be young. one can love and hate with some intensity, and it appeared to me that holman had found marks for both adoration and hatred on the yacht that was slipping into the mysterious islands of the south sea. "you mustn't look at the black side of things," i said. "leith's face is not a likable one, i will admit, but a lot of good fellows have ugly dials. it seems that the professor wants skulls, and it appears that leith knows of a spot where he can gather up the oldest specimens in polynesia. there's nothing wrong about that. as to miss herndon, she struck me as being a young lady who was well able to look after herself." "that's all right," stammered the youngster. "perhaps i said too much, but i had to speak to you." "and i'm mighty glad you did!" i cried. he gripped my hand and turned away, leaving me to my own reflections. it was a wonderful night. the silvery sea through which _the waif_ drove a path with plunging forefoot awoke strange dreams and fancies within my brain. all the mystery of the tropic night welled up around me, and my soul seemed to have suddenly awakened to the beauty of life. the veil of morbid pessimism that came before my eyes during the weary days i had spent upon the beach at levuka was torn aside, and a wave of gladness entered my being. i felt that the voyage would be an eventful one to me, and i tramped the poop with a light step. occasionally the sallow features of leith persisted in rising before my mental vision to blot out the dream face that was continually before me, but i resolutely put the professor's partner from my mind and fed myself upon the visions bred by the splendour of the night. holman had left me about an hour when i happened to glance at the patch of shadow that had attracted his attention while he was talking to me. i stopped and watched it intently. some one had crawled into the velvety strip and was lying perfectly still. "who is there?" i asked. there was no answer. the strip of shadow broadened and narrowed as _the waif_ plunged, but i could discern nothing. outside the captain and myself, the crew of _the waif_, together with the six men that were with the professor's party, were all natives, and i wondered as i watched the shadow why one should be crawling around as if afraid of being seen. it was possible that he was attempting to thieve something from the galley, and it was also possible that he was spying, as holman had suggested. i picked up a small iron pin and tossed it at the spot where i felt sure the islander was hiding. i didn't throw the pin with any force, although the yell that came out of the shadow would convince an onlooker that i had thrown it with murderous intent. i sprang forward while the shriek of pain was still vibrating in the air, but the native was determined to have revenge for the rap from the iron pin. a knife flashed in the moonlight, and i staggered as the blade touched my forehead like a tongue of flame. a dark figure dashed along the deck toward the forecastle, and brushing the blood from my eyes i started in pursuit. at the head of the companion-stairs i collided heavily with newmarch, who had just rushed up from the cabin, and the force of the shock nearly threw him off his feet. "confound it!" he cried. "what's the matter with you?" "one of the kanakas nearly cut my eye out!" i roared. "he flung a knife at me and ducked for the f'c'stle." i left him standing in angry astonishment and rushed forward. i stood at the top of the ladder and listened. the only noises that came up were the shrill snores of the islanders, but the blood that streamed down my face made me forget prudence, and i scrambled down into the stuffy quarters, where the odour of natives was overwhelming. a swinging lamp dimly illuminated the place, and i snatched it from its hook and swung it over the face of the naked occupant of the first bunk. a glance convinced me that his sleep was genuine. his mouth was wide open as he snored, and the native who feigns sleep hasn't enough sense to make his imitation more real by opening his mouth. the man in the next bunk, a muscular kanaka, had his face turned away from me, and in spite of his prolonged snore my suspicions were aroused. i thrust my hand beneath the single blanket that covered him, and was immediately convinced that i had discovered the culprit. the blanket was cold. "here, you scoundrel!" i yelled, dropping the lamp and poking him roughly in the ribs. "what the devil do you mean by trying to knife me?" he opened his big eyes and stared at me stupidly, while the occupants of the other bunks, who were aroused by my shout, sat up and rubbed their eyes. "why did you throw that knife?" i screamed. "i no throw knife," he muttered. "me sleep, very tired." the pain of my wound maddened me, and i seized him roughly and dragged him toward the ladder with the intention of bringing him before the bilious captain. i had grasped a rung to haul myself up when a heavy boot came down on my fingers and the voice of the captain screamed an objection. "stop that business!" he shrieked. "but this devil tried to knife me!" i protested. "let him go!" yelled newmarch. "do you hear me? let him go this instant!" i let go my grip of the kanaka, who immediately dived for his bunk and curled himself up as if he had no further interest in the proceedings. the captain was beside me then, and his quick breathing betrayed his excitement. as i lifted the lamp back to its place the light fell upon his thin features; their pallor surprised me as much as his words. "too many wonderful things happen to you!" he stammered. "why--what do you mean?" i queried. "never mind!" he snapped. "if you start a rough house on board this boat i'll stop you before you get well under way." i was too astounded to reply. the blood upon my face and hands was plain evidence of the wound i had received, and the captain's indifference left me breathless. without another word he turned and scrambled up on deck, and i followed. once out of earshot of the listening crew i determined to make another effort to show him that my conduct was justified. "that devil was sneaking in the shadow of the galley all the evening," i cried. "i attempted to stir him out and he jerked the knife at me." he stopped in front of me, made one of his conversational feints by opening his mouth and shutting it again, then dived hastily for the companion, leaving me to search for sympathy in the moonlit night. i remembered as i endeavoured to staunch the wound, the question which i had put to holman concerning the captain only an hour before, and i smiled grimly as i bound my handkerchief about my forehead. captain newmarch of _the waif_ hadn't risen in my estimation since the moment i made the inquiry. [illustration] chapter iv the storm holman glanced inquiringly at the piece of sticking plaster above my right eye when he met me on the deck the morning after the knife incident, and i grinned sheepishly. "you were right about that patch of shadow last night," i remarked. "how?" he queried. "this came from it," i replied, touching the plaster with my finger as i spoke. the boy whistled and looked around cautiously. "you'll be getting wise in a day or two," he murmured. "she said you would when i told her this morning about our conversation of last night." i laughed, and he turned suddenly toward me. "do you think we'll put in anywhere in the samoan group?" "i don't think so," i replied. "why?" holman came closer. "if we do i'm going to get the girls ashore and keep them there," he muttered. "i don't care what you think of the proposition. this trip is going to be a tough one, and i'm certain there is some deviltry afoot." i tried to laugh at the serious face upon the youngster, but the conviction which he threw into his words choked my mirth. whether it was the little brush with the kanaka or the gloomy forebodings of the boy i couldn't tell, but i felt a trifle anxious after my first night aboard _the waif_. "but there is nothing to be gained by running away if we do put in to a port," i growled. "how is that?" stammered holman. "well, if leith is an admirer of edith herndon, as you say," i argued, "and if the captain is in league with leith, the yacht wouldn't leave till the girls came aboard. besides, the professor wouldn't go on without them." "i don't know about the professor," grunted holman. "that old doodlebug only thinks of the silly specimens that he is going to collect down here. if he had any love for his daughters he wouldn't have brought them along." "but you told me they insisted on coming." "so they did!" he retorted savagely. "but they knew that the poor old fool was in the hands of a scoundrel and they wouldn't let him go alone. they think they can protect him from that devil, and it nearly makes me cry to hear them say so." miss edith herndon and her sister came up on deck at that moment, and if i was impressed by the calm sweetness of the elder girl's face on the previous afternoon, the strength and beauty of it as i saw it in the fresh morning sunlight made my heart pound violently against my ribs. the prettiness of miss barbara made the quiet dignity of the elder sister more noticeable, and that apparent strength of character made me doubt holman's contention that she would be unable to help the scientist if leith's motives were discovered to be criminal. it was barbara's keen eyes that detected my plaster, and i squirmed as i saw the light of curiosity in her eyes. "oh, tell us how it happened!" she cried. "please make it a night attack upon the yacht, mr. verslun! i heard a wild cry just after i retired and i felt sure that war canoes had surrounded us. they always surround the ill-fated ship, don't they?" she continued merrily. "and the ship is always ill-fated in all the really thrilling sea stories i have read!" leith came sauntering aft as she fired her questions at me, and he stood near miss edith with his dull eyes fixed upon me as i answered. "i'm afraid i cannot feed your imagination to-day," i replied. "i tripped over a coil of rope, and the deck sprang up and bumped me." i glanced at leith as i spoke, and i fancied i detected a glint of amusement in the lustreless eyes that were turned in my direction. whether it was caused by my hastily constructed lie or by the girl's inquiries i could not tell, but my dislike for the clumsy giant made me suspicious about his knowledge of the incident of the preceding evening, and i felt certain that he was smiling at my fib. as if he wished to do something which would convince me of his ignorance of the happening, he hastily changed the subject. "the captain thinks we are in for a spell of bad weather, mr. verslun," he drawled; "are you of the same opinion?" "if signs go for anything we are," i replied. "we are running into a zone of trouble." he walked away without further speech, and the two girls went below in response to a message from their father. the professor was slightly indisposed, and he demanded that his daughters remain with him in the cabin. the selfishness of the scientist irritated holman exceedingly, and he made bitter comments about him during the hour or two he kept me company. "i never yet met one of those scientific gazaboos who didn't think he was something more than mortal," he growled. "i try to keep on good terms with the old bone measurer, but his vanity nearly turns me sick. do you know what he told me yesterday?" "what?" i asked, amused at the youngster's annoyance. "said that he might mention my name in the report of the expedition that he would send to some old research society in the states. when i didn't show any signs of elation he got offended, so i guess i'm cut out of the history." he went grumbling down into the cabin, and i watched the ocean. the barometer was low, and out of the west a pack of fat black clouds swarmed up from the horizon, stacking themselves one upon another till they resembled a huge pile of rounded boulders which a sudden puff of wind might bring toppling down upon us. the faint scouting puffs of air--"the devil's breath" of the poetical polynesians--whined through the stays, but the small waves that tried to rise in expectation were clouted back by the heavy, oppressive atmosphere that ironed out the ocean till one's imagination pictured it waiting for the word like a strained runner on his mark. it burst at last. three violent blasts ripped over us like projectiles, and the "song of the dead men" was twanged upon the straining ropes. _the waif_ stopped for an instant, as if debating whether she would run or cower before the onslaught, then she dipped her nose into the mad lather that rose around her and plunged forward. that jump seemed to be a challenge to the storm. it burst upon us in all its fury, and the yacht became a tiny seesaw upon the murderous himalayas that rose around us. great chunks of green water came hurtling over the rail, thundering down upon us till _the waif_ was buried in a boiling turmoil from which she would leap and shake herself, only to be pulled down again when the next sea fell upon us. when she sprang out of the lather, those devilish, snarling, snaky waves sprang after her, slapping at her flanks, tearing and biting at her like a pack of wolves. there's an awful likeness to a wolf pack about storm waves. when you see them all foam-lathered stretching out like a pack in full cry, or watch them leaping up as if they were trying to see whether the unfortunate ship had been torn down by one of their band, you begin to credit them with some sort of intelligence. _the waif_ was no poppycock yacht, built to dodge about the solent and run for cowes if the wind blew a capful. she had been built to hold her own with the hardest slamming seas that ever chased a shattered hull, and it was lucky for us that she was. the storm that came screeching after us from way across the coral sea was one of those high-powered freak disturbances that juggle with lumps of water like a vaudeville performer juggling with cheap crockery. it took the tops off those rollers and pelted them at us, and the wind seemed to yell in triumph when the yacht was buried in the whirlpools in which she dived headlong. all through the night we raced before it, and through the following day _the waif_ never paused for an instant in her mad race to the eastward. the kanakas became demoralized with fear, and i forgot the trouble hanging over the heads of the girls and their father as i helped newmarch drag the crew from their bunks to cut away the wreckage of the vessel. i saw a new side of the captain during those hours. a very devil of energy took hold of him with the coming of the storm, and he became a human dynamo. he pounded the frightened crew unmercifully, dragging the screaming islanders back to their work by the hair of their heads, and heaping upon them curses that were strange and blood-curdling. that he was a good sailorman i had little doubt. he handled _the waif_ with skill and patience, while the crew, with rolling eyes and quivering lips, were so terrorized by his wrath that they fled to do his bidding. i had been wondering since the moment when he had ordered me to let go my grip of the kanaka in the f'c'stle, if he was afraid that any disagreement between me and the knife-thrower would start trouble with the crew, but from the way he hazed the niggers during the storm i was convinced that it was not through any fear of them that he ordered me to leave my assailant alone. the conviction did not increase my love for him. as i viewed the happening he was inclined to shield the big brute who threw the knife simply because the offence did not appear to be one that merited punishment, and this view was not pleasing to my nerves. it was on the second day of the storm that a little incident happened which is worth mentioning. toni, the small fijian who had chanted the song of black fernando's hell, was caught by a huge wave and pounded hard against the cabin. the mad turmoil of water swept his nearly lifeless form into the scuppers, but before another comber could snatch him overboard, i managed to reach his side and drag him into safety. i forgot the incident in the whirl of happenings that followed, but the fijian had a longer memory. late that afternoon he was holding the wheel with soma, the big kanaka who had jerked the knife at me, and as i stopped to peer at the binnacle he beckoned me toward him. "that was me that sing," he shrieked, as i put down my head. "i tell damn big lie you an' miss herndon." "why?" i asked, amused at the peculiar manner in which he tried to express his gratitude for the rescue of the morning. "big jacky tell me not say anything," he screamed. "he tell it to me one big secret all that talk about waterfall. tell me not to tell any one. you know why?" i glanced at soma and found that he was straining his ears to catch the words the other was shrieking, and as i was more than suspicious of him, i promptly closed the conversation. "i'll see you in the morning," i roared. the fijian nodded and i fought my way forward, wondering as i clung to the rigging what the pupil of the maori had to tell me about the song. the wind had ceased somewhat on the morning of the third day, but the snaky rollers were still racing after the flying yacht. a watery sun peeped out from between the driving cloud masses, the rays glinting through the heads of the waves that curled menacingly as the battered yacht drove through them. newmarch hailed me from the poop when i came on deck, and there was a peculiar look upon his scrawny features as he addressed me. "do you know that nigger you rescued?" he asked. "toni?" "yes." "what about him?" "you did your heroic stunt for nothing," he remarked. "the fool can't be found, so i guess he went overboard in the night." the news came as a shock to me. toni's last question that he had put as he clung to the wheel with soma had flashed through my mind several times through the night. he had asked it in a manner that insinuated that i might be interested in the reasons why big jacky, his companion on the wharf at levuka, wished the whereabouts of the white waterfall to remain a secret, and now his disappearance blocked my inquiries. i felt annoyed with myself for not listening to what the fijian had to say at the moment he confessed that he had lied, and then the face of the listening soma came up before my mental eye. soma was a person that i was beginning to cordially dislike. i turned to newmarch and fired a question at him. "do you think he was helped overboard?" "why, no," he said slowly. "why do you think that?" "oh, nothing," i replied. "i thought his narrow escape of the morning would have made him careful." it was a few hours after this conversation that i had my first chance of speaking to edith herndon since the moment we had run into the disturbance. the girl poked her head out of the companionway, and i hastened to assist her out on deck. it was her first sight of the damage which the storm had done to the yacht, and she gave a cry of alarm as she looked at the splintered spars and the cordage that cracked in the wind like the whips of invisible devils. "oh, mr. verslun, we are a wreck!" she cried. "not quite," i said, gripping her arm to steady her as _the waif_ took a header. "we've weathered the worst of it and we're still sound. the storm centre has slipped away to the north, and we can count ourselves out of the ruction for the present." her shapely hand clutched my wet oilskins as the yacht plunged from the back of an enormous swell, and i was so busy noting the beauty of the hand that i had no eye for the sallow face that peeped from the companion. leith's bass voice rose above the noise of the waves, and there was an angry note in it. "this isn't a nice place for you, miss edith!" he cried. the girl half turned her head, looked at him for a second, then without any intimation that she had heard what he said, she turned again toward me and started to cross-examine me upon the amount of damage we had sustained. i thought that the white, shapely hand tightened its grip upon my wet sleeve at the moment leith's bass voice came booming to our ears, and i blessed the big brute's interference for the thrill which i derived from the pressure of her fingers upon the greasy coat. but leith was not to be denied. the cold stare, instead of driving him back into the cabin, only roused his temper. very cautiously he climbed along the heaving deck to the point where we were standing, and, clutching a rope, he swayed backward and forward immediately behind us. "miss edith!" he called. the girl turned her head sharply. "well?" she cried. "this isn't a proper place for you!" roared leith. "one of those seas is liable to come aboard at any moment, and you might be washed away before any one could assist you." edith herndon's lips showed the slightest trace of a smile. "you had better be careful too, mr. leith," she retorted. "mr. verslun is holding on to me in case one of those old gray rollers should make a sudden leap, but you have no one to hold on to you." a frown passed over leith's face like a cloud shadow across a yellow plain. he slackened his grip on the rope and lurched toward us. "you must go below at once!" he screamed, addressing the girl. "your father is too ill to look after you at this moment, so the duty is mine. there is danger here, and i order you below!" he touched her shoulder with his big fingers that resembled talons, but the girl made a quick side movement and slipped from his grip. "do not touch me!" she cried fiercely. "how dare you put your hand on me!" but leith's temper was up at that moment, and he was angry enough for anything. he made a spring for the girl's hand, and i thrust my shoulder forward to bump him off. _the waif_ nearly stood on her end at that instant, and her acrobatic feat combined with the push flung leith off his feet and sent him rolling ludicrously along the deck. miss herndon gave a little cry of alarm and sprang for the companion-stairs, down which she disappeared without taking a glance at the brute on the wet planks. leith picked himself up, gripped a loose backstay with his left hand and swung himself toward me, striking out viciously with his free right hand when he came within hitting distance. the blow landed on my shoulder, and i returned the compliment with an uppercut that jerked him from his swing rope and sent him stumbling backward against the rail. the fall stunned him for a few moments and he rolled about in the wash; then soma, the kanaka who jerked the knife at me, rushed from the galley door and dragged him to his feet. the native steered him to the companionway, where he stood for a moment glaring at me as if undecided whether to continue the fight or beat a retreat, but the wild plunging of the yacht convinced him that the spot was not one where he figured to advantage, so he stumbled below. i looked around and saw holman clinging to the rigging, his boyish face wearing an expression of extreme pleasure. "you're getting wise," he cried, as he scrambled toward me; "but don't think you've walloped him. he'll come back at you when he has a better opportunity of beating you up." [illustration] chapter v i make a promise the morning following the unpleasant incident with leith broke clear and sunny. the pacific, as if tired after its mad pranks of the preceding three days, was a shimmering stretch of placid blue water, and the shattered spars and loose cordage of _the waif_ were the only reminders of the terrific storm that had swept us before it. captain newmarch set all hands at work to repair the damage, and before midday we were bowling along under as much canvas as we could spread. the storm being directly from the southwest had not carried us from our course, and newmarch chuckled when he had taken an observation. "we'll strike it in the morning," he growled. "what? penrose island?" i asked. "no, the isle of tears," he answered sharply. "the isle of tears?" i repeated. "that's what i said," he remarked sourly. "and now you know as much as i know. it was kept a little secret by the orders of my employers, but we are so close to the spot now that i don't think it will matter if i let the cat out of the bag." "and is it there that the professor will conduct his search?" i asked. "you had better ask that question of professor herndon," he replied. "i know nothing about what they'll do ashore." he left the poop before i had time to put another question to him, and as i walked up and down i turned over in my mind the tiny morsel of information i had received. the captain's secrecy was peculiar, to say the least, and as i reasoned that professor herndon knew absolutely nothing of the islands, it was quite evident that the orders prohibiting newmarch from making known the exact destination of the yacht had come from leith. it was not the first time i had heard of the isle of tears. strange stories floated across the pacific concerning the little islet east of the suvaroff group, and out of the reticule of the mind i attempted to drag these stories and piece them together during the minutes that passed after newmarch had given me the information. they were not pleasant stories as i remembered them at that moment. the island had a "past." the mention of it brought hazy recollections to natives--recollections that were too misty to put into words, but which the untutored mind connected with happenings that were anything but pleasant. and i recalled a night at "tonga pete's" place on the rue de rivoli at papeete, when a sailor from a copra schooner in the bay, who had been marooned upon the island by captain "bully" hayes, told a wild, weird story of unexplainable happenings that he had witnessed during the two days and two nights he had spent ashore. holman came hurrying upon deck as i was endeavouring to remember all the story that the sailor had told, and the youngster immediately rushed me with the news. "the captain has just told me," i said. "well, leith has just given the information out in the cabin," he cried. "they must have decided to give it out at the same moment." "but the professor?" i asked. "surely he knew. do you mean to say that he was ignorant of the fact that it was the isle of tears and not penrose island that we were making for?" holman laughed at my question. "you haven't spoken much to him, verslun. he couldn't remember the name of a place three minutes. he only knows that there are archaeological treasures on this island we are going to, and he doesn't care two cents about its name. leith has told him some tall stories about the camp, judging by the way the old man's eyes shine when he mentions it. yesterday he read me leith's description of stone _hamungas_ and things that are supposed to have been built before julius caesar invaded britain, and he's pop-eyed with joy as he thinks how he'll yank fame by the tail when he gets on the ground and snapshots the affairs. gee! i'm glad i haven't got a kink for digging up relics and dodging about places that went to smash thousands of years ago. a vice like that is more expensive than the poker habit." "well, newmarch says we'll strike it early in the morning," i said, "and then we'll see whether your suspicions are correct." "i'm infernally afraid they are," snapped the youngster. "i wouldn't care ten cents about the brute only that the girls are aboard. i felt sorry when i saw him climb to his feet yesterday. if you hit him again hit him with something that will crack his skull. he's a devil, verslun, and before we are much older we will find it out." i laughed at his gloomy forebodings, and as miss barbara herndon came on deck at that moment he raced away and left me to my own meditations. my thoughts were mixed. i had pleasant and unpleasant ones. if leith was the scoundrel that holman suspected, the two girls were in danger, and now as we neared the island where they would leave the yacht to accompany their father, the clutch of fear was upon me. on _the waif_ i felt that i had some little power, but on land, more especially on the lonely island toward which we were heading, that feeling of protectorship which the sailorman has for his passengers would be lost. if leith knew the island, and it was evident that he had visited it before, any villainy that he contemplated would be held in check till he was ashore and in command of the expedition and i would be powerless. i recognized that holman's fears were without solid foundation. they were transmitted through barbara herndon, but i also recognized that the elder sister would hardly support the statements unless she had good grounds for her anxiety. her woman's intuition had branded leith's motives in bringing the professor into the islands as bad, and the sallow-faced giant could not erase the impression. the actual reason for trickery was a matter of speculation. professor herndon was wealthy; it was his money that had fitted out the expedition, but how leith expected to benefit himself by treachery was more than i could tell. still, try as i would to fight off the impressions that holman's tongue had fixed within my mind, i was unable to alter the opinion i had formed of the man the moment i met him. there was an atmosphere about the yacht that was unexplainable. try as i could to find legitimate grounds for fears i could not. the professor was a scientist who wished to study certain things the whereabouts of which were known to leith. apparently the professor was satisfied with the bargain he had made. leith, as the two girls had informed holman, had called upon their father at the langham hotel in wynyard square, sydney, and, after fascinating the old man with his stories, had presented his credentials and made a bargain with him which resulted in the chartering of the yacht. his former life was a mystery that he guarded jealously from the probes which the girls had skilfully endeavoured to use. it was clear that he had spent many years in the islands, but that fact is not one that is generally put forward as a recommendation of good character. the south sea holds a large percentage of the nimble people who manage to be in another spot when dame justice throws her lariat. the law of the fringe has made curiosity a criminal offence, and a new name covers more than charity. i had had little chance of speaking to edith herndon since the moment i came aboard, but i determined, after i had looked at the matter from every side, that i would ask her point blank if i could be of any assistance. leith's face was the only prop he put forward as a support to his claims of respectability, and his face betrayed him. my chance came early that evening. a big tropical moon rose out of asia and spread a silvery wash upon the ocean. professor herndon and his eldest daughter were leaning over the rail, but the moment i joined them the old man informed us that he had to see to his scientific outfit so that everything would be in readiness for the landing on the following morning, and he hurried off and left us together. the girl did not speak for a few minutes, and i made no attempt to break the silence. somehow i felt that her intuition had already told her that i wished to speak about the happenings of the morrow, and her opening remark proved that my surmise was correct. "you will stay with the yacht, i suppose?" she questioned. "i cannot say," i replied. "captain newmarch hasn't spoken to me about the matter. does your father intend to go far inland?" "father has just told me that the actual distance is not great, but the travelling is very hard. it seems that it is only a few miles to the spot where mr. leith says that father can see all the sights and obtain all the specimens he desires, but those few miles will take us four days to travel. there are all kinds of obstacles in the way." "and you are not afraid?" i stammered. "you do not dislike the idea of going?" she lifted her head and looked me in the face, the big amber eyes shining softly in the moonlight. "i dread it," she said quietly. "it is foolish to say so, but--" she stopped speaking and turned her face away from me. in the little silence that followed i heard the _plop plop_ of the waves against the side of the yacht. a native chanted a samoan love song in the fo'c'stle, but that and the soft whine of the pulleys were the only sounds that disturbed the night. we seemed such a long way from civilization at that minute, and a great pity for the girl's plight gave me sufficient courage to make a proffer of my services. "miss herndon," i spluttered, "if i could do anything to help you, please tell me. i might help you if you wish. tell me what you think is best." "if you stay with the yacht you can do nothing," she murmured. "then you want me to go?" i cried. "you would like me to go with----" "father and barbara and me," she said softly. "mr. holman is coming, and if you could come too--" "i can!" i cried. "i will go with the party if you say so." "but if captain newmarch orders you to stay with the yacht?" "he can order away," i spluttered. "i am going where leith is going, that is as long as leith accompanies you and your father." something moved on the top of the galley as i put my resolution into words, and i sprang up quickly. the moon made every inch of the yacht as bright as day, yet i was not quick enough in my rush. a tin pan, knocked down by the eavesdropper, rolled across the deck, but the spy had fled. "some one was listening to us," i explained as i returned to the girl's side. "i am sorry then that i asked you to accompany us," she murmured. "i am dragging you into our troubles, mr. verslun, and it is not right." "hush!" i cried. "your troubles are mine just because you are a woman out on the very fringe of the earth where you can get no one else to help you bear them. you see i can claim a right in this spot. this is the jumping off place of the world down here, and an offer of assistance must not be refused." she stood in front of me, a tall, splendid figure, the moonlight silvering the piled masses of hair and giving one the impression that her head was surrounded by a shining halo. suddenly she put out her hand and took mine. "i accept your offer gladly," she said softly. "you are very, very kind, mr. verslun. it may be, as you say, the jumping off place of the world down here at the very outposts of civilization, but the power that protects one in the crowded cities is surely here as well. good-night, friend." it was an hour after the time when miss herndon went below that i asked the captain's permission to go along with the expedition. he plucked his scrawny beard with a nervous hand as he stood staring at me. "what the devil do you want to go for?" he asked. "for the fun of the thing." "i don't know," he muttered. "i'll see leith." he turned away and i walked for'ard. the beauty of the night was extraordinary. the yacht seemed to be veneered with a soft luminous paint that gave us the appearance of a ghostly ship skimming over a ghostly ocean. at the top of the fo'c'stle ladder i found a native stretched full length and sobbing mightily. he walloped his head against the planks when i endeavoured to get him upon his feet, and the sobs shook his frame. "what's the matter?" i asked. "toni! toni! toni!" he wailed. "toni he gone. toni, my brother, all same come from suva, now him dead." "i'm sorry, but it can't be helped," i said. "he should have been more careful." the native lifted himself from the deck and glanced around fearfully. satisfied that there were no listeners he dried his eyes and crawled upon his knees to the spot where i was standing. "he not washed overboard," he whispered. "soma stick one knife in him, then he tip him over. me see him, very much afraid." "when?" i asked. "night afore last," he gasped. "captain see him do it. very bad thing. toni, my brother, all same work one time suva." holman joined me when i relieved the captain late in the night; i told the youngster what i knew about the disappearance of toni. "who knifed him?" he asked. "the big kanaka who pulled leith out of the scuppers when he fell yesterday." "holy smoke!" cried the boy. "i'd like to get the strength of things on board this boat. why, that big nigger is going to be the guide of the expedition on shore." "who says so?" "leith pointed him out to the professor this afternoon," answered holman. "i was talking to the old scientist at the time." i whistled softly. if soma was a henchman of leith's it was clear to me why the captain had shielded him the night he jerked the knife at me when i dropped the pin upon his woolly head, but why toni had been put away was a mystery. "is it any good of attempting to convince the professor?" i asked. "not a bit," snapped holman. "the girls have been imploring him to turn back this last three days while we were stuck in the cabin, but he won't listen to them. he's a maniac, that's what he is. he doesn't know what those two women are suffering through his darned foolishness, and if he did know it wouldn't trouble him. if you want the real extract of selfishness you must make a puncture in a scientific guy with a hobby, and you can get as much as you want." "well, i'm going along to see what happens," i said. "if leith refuses to accept me i'm going just the same." holman gripped my hand--gripped it fiercely, then he left me hurriedly. i tramped backward and forward as _the waif_ sailed steadily through the waves of glittering mercury. a few days before, when i was an occupant of "the rathole" in levuka, life seemed to be empty and cold, but a wonderful change had come in those few days. although i had not spoken to edith herndon more than half a dozen times, it appeared to me that it was those few short conversations that had chased the loneliness and morbid thoughts from my mind. her very presence stimulated me in a manner that i could not express, and as i stared out across the moon-whitened ocean i started nervously at the thought which had sprung suddenly into my brain. it was an insane thought, and i tried to laugh it away. edith herndon was as far above me as the moon was above the waves that were silvered by her beams. i pictured myself lying like a beachcomber upon the pile of pearl shell when the strange chant of the maori and the dead toni concerning "the way to heaven out of black fernando's hell" had come to my ears, and i blessed the new influence which had come into my life. "my way to heaven lies in this direction," i soliloquized, and the quivering yacht went bounding on as i allowed wild dreams to race unchecked through my brain. [illustration] chapter vi the isle of tears a sleepy samoan in the main cross-trees screamed a message to the deck while the pink flush of the tropical dawn was still in the sky, and _the waif_ plunged through the water toward the island. one after the other the members of the expedition came on deck. leith stumbled up when newmarch shouted down the information, and the big brute watched the tiny spot that came gradually nearer; the professor danced up like an adventurous boy, and he gurgled ecstatically as he peeped over the rail; while the two girls came up arm in arm and looked in silence across the dawn-reddened waters. holman's gaze travelled from the island to leith and back again to the island as if he was trying to trace a criminal connection between the two. as the yacht drew closer a strange silence seemed to fall upon the vessel. the professor's gurgles of joy died away slowly, and none of the others seemed inclined to break the stillness. the crew and the half dozen islanders that leith had brought to carry provisions and specimens were also silent. they were grouped for'ard, but not a murmur came from them as _the waif_ crept slowly ahead, feeling her way cautiously into the little bay on the north side of the island which leith had suggested to newmarch as a good anchorage. the peculiar stories that had gone abroad concerning the isle of tears were responsible for most of the wide-eyed looks of wonder which the imaginative polynesians directed upon the shore; the strange predicament in which they were placed tied the tongues of the two girls; the professor was thinking of the archaeological treasures, while thoughts that one could only guess at prevented leith and holman from speaking. the island had a strange, wild beauty that seemed to throttle speech. the underlying coral reefs were of colours that ran from pure white to gorgeous crimson, and the effect upon the water above them was wonderful to behold. _the waif_ seemed to make her way over a floor of beautiful parquetry which mother nature had been constructing for centuries. chameleon-tinted seaweeds stretched upward, waving backward and forward like the hair of sea nymphs hidden in the crevices of the multi-coloured rocks. the vegetation on the shore was weird and wondrous. the trees immediately near the edge of the bay were covered with riotous lianas that looped themselves like pythons from limb to limb, and from whose green masses blazing red flowers appeared at intervals like watchful eyes. scarlet hibiscus and perfumed frangipanni were everywhere, while climbing jasmine tried to cover up the black basalt rocks in the foreground as if to hide everything that was ugly from the eyes of the visitor. the sweet, intoxicating odours came out to us in greeting, yet the place seemed to inspire us with a feeling of awe and mystery that became more oppressive as the yacht moved lazily across the bay. i glanced at edith herndon at the moment the anchor plunged down into the bed of coral, and the look of perplexed wonder upon her face startled me. "it looks a nice place, yet it feels an awful spot," she murmured. "all those snaky creepers with their coloured flowers seem to be hiding something." i understood her feelings regarding the place. that look of weird expectancy, common to places that are cloaked with a tremendous silence, had gripped the two girls, and the yacht seemed homelike when they compared it to the shore. "oh, edith," cried the younger sister, "i wish father wouldn't go!" "so do i, dear," murmured the elder girl, "but it is useless to attempt to persuade him to give up the quest." "but i hate the place!" cried miss barbara. "don't you?" "oh, no," stammered edith, bravely attempting to cheer the spirits of the younger girl. "you will not be lonely, barbara. mr. holman and father and i will be with you, and perhaps mr. verslun will be in our company." newmarch approached at the instant and squeaked out an answer to the request i had made the previous evening. "i asked mr. leith if you could go with him," he said, "but he doesn't think you would be of any use. he has all the help he requires, so you had better stay on the yacht." there was a slight grin on his thin face as he imparted the information, and his merriment tickled me. i had made up my mind without waiting for leith's decision, and i was more pleased than annoyed at knowing that my presence was not desired with the party that went inland. the anchor had hardly touched the bottom before leith started to transship the provisions that were required for the trip across the island. the sight of land seemed to stir the sallow-faced giant out of the lethargy that had gripped him on the way down from levuka. he suddenly discovered that the mantle of authority was upon his shoulders, and he bullied the island boys as they lowered the stores. holman was right when he stated that soma was the man that leith had picked as first assistant. the big kanaka was placed in charge of the other five carriers, and he immediately imitated leith by shrieking out orders and strutting about in a manner that was ludicrous. professor herndon was bubbling over with excitement. the stories which leith had fed to him continuously concerning the remains of an extinct civilization had worked him up to a pitch that bordered on insanity, and it was pitiful to watch him as he made endless notes in the bulky notebook. "i shall be known throughout the world inside three months," he whispered to leith. "in less than that," drawled the giant. "yes, you're right!" snapped the dream-fed scientist. "if everything is as you say our task will be an easy one. are you ready edith? barbara, come along!" he climbed down the ladder with a haste that was nearly his undoing, as he let go his grip before the boat was directly beneath him. holman saved him from a ducking, but his solar topee, which had a distinctly scientific look, was soaked in salt water before it could be rescued. captain newmarch stood by with a look of unconcern upon his thin face as the two girls went over the side, and he gave an unintelligible grunt as leith followed. within two hours after _the waif_ had cast anchor the two boats containing the stores and the ill-assorted explorers were making for a small promontory that stretched out like a green tongue into the sparkling waters of the bay. once on shore, leith put soma and the carriers in the lead, holman and the two girls next, with himself and the professor bringing up the rear, and in that order they moved across the little strip of white sand that glittered like diamond dust. the heavy green foliage came out to meet them, dropped over them like a veil, and left us staring at the riotous creeper masses with the brilliant flower eyes that appeared to be watching _the waif_. newmarch gave a peculiar chuckle as he turned toward me when the party had disappeared. "now, mr. verslun," he cried, "we have plenty work to keep us busy for the week or so we will be here. get about it the moment the boats return, and keep the men on the jump." i nodded, and he went below without another word, leaving me still staring at the spot where the explorers had dived into the leafy wall. the strange loneliness of the place seemed to clutch me hard at that moment, and i mentally abused myself for not making a stronger protest against the whole affair. but i knew as i damned my own inactivity that protest would have been useless as far as the professor was concerned, and the filial affection of the two girls would not allow the old ancient to wander off alone. i had planned to allow the party a few hours' start before i made any attempt to follow, feeling certain that i would be able to find the track, and, moreover, i wished to catch up to the expedition at a point where leith would have no chance of verifying the story i would tell to account for my presence. the big brute would probably think i was lying when i told him that newmarch had sent me after him, but the professor's desire to push on would probably prevent him from making an effort to check my story by sending a runner back to the boat. and luck was with me at that moment. as i racked my brain in the construction of a suitable excuse to account for my appearance, my eyes fell upon the professor's camera that had been overlooked in the hurry of departure, and i sprang upon it joyfully and hid it till the time had elapsed. knowing the importance which the old scientist attached to the photographs which he intended to take, i knew that he, at least, would reason that the captain had acted wisely in sending me in pursuit with the instrument, and i trusted that his gratitude would move him to get leith's permission to allow me to remain with the expedition. the party had been gone some six hours when i slipped over the side into the dory. newmarch was below, and only one of the crew was on deck. i seized the oars and struck out for the shore, but i had hardly covered twenty paces when the captain rushed to the rail, took one glance at me, and then dashed toward the companion-stairs. i sensed the motive in that mad dash for the cabin, and i pulled madly. thoughts of edith herndon thronged my brain, and i drove the dory toward the promontory with every ounce of strength i possessed. to return to the yacht while she was in the eerie jungle-growth under leith's protection would be worse than death, and i didn't pause for an instant when the captain's squeaky voice hailed me. "come back at once!" he shouted. "are you coming?" i bent my back to the oars and pulled with every muscle strained. the perspiration half blinded me, but one glance upward convinced me that i had sensed the captain's motive when i saw him rush from the side. he was standing on the poop, taking deliberate aim at me with a winchester rifle that he had taken from the rack in his own cabin. it seemed an age before he fired. the bullet missed the side of the boat by about three inches, and i shrieked my defiance. the devil had my nerves on edge, but the green tongue of land was close, and i pulled as never man pulled before. a bullet lodged in the stern of the boat, another splintered the end of an oar, and then the rifleman's nerves must have got the better of him. the succeeding shots fell wide, and i whooped like a madman as i drove the boat on to the green tongue of land. springing out hastily i made a dash across the white strip of sand, and dived into the moist creeper growth. i lay there panting, watching the yacht to see what newmarch would do. it was impossible for him to leave the yacht to follow me, but i guessed that he would make an attempt to communicate with leith. and i guessed rightly. i had not been five minutes in the bushes when a boat put off for the shore. it contained three of the crew, two tannese and the fijian that i had found mourning the death of toni, his "all same brother who had worked with him at suva." they pulled for the spot where i had left the dory, and here the fijian sprang out, while the others proceeded to tow the dory back to _the waif_. i surmised that toni's "all same brother" had been sent to carry a message to leith, and i lay in the bushes waiting as he raced toward me. cautiously he clawed his way through the undergrowth, and when he was certain that the creepers had completely veiled him from the eyes of watchers on the yacht he picked up a small flat stone from the ground, drew a yachting knife from his belt and crouching on his heels started to sharpen the blade. as he rubbed industriously he sang a weird tune in his native tongue, rounding off each verse with five words in english that explained his industry. the words were: "now i'll kill you, soma," and the chant was a poem of consolation to the spirit of the dead toni, assuring it that the hour of vengeance was at hand, and that soma would go to the great unknown the moment he got within reach of the yachting knife. i poked my head from my hiding place, and the fijian turned quickly. "i think the captain told soma to kill your brother," i said softly. "if the captain didn't tell him, leith did, kaipi." kaipi stopped sharpening the blade and fixed his big eyes upon me. "i not to speak to you," he said. "kapitani tell me not to. i go catch up leith, give him one piece of paper the kapitani gave me." "but soma?" i asked. "i kill soma when chance comes," muttered kaipi. "well, we're of the same mind, kaipi," i said pleasantly. "soma is no friend of mine and i'll help you as much as i can if you turn over the note which the captain gave you and do just what i tell you. otherwise, kaipi, i have a revolver, and a knife is no match for a revolver." the fijian considered the matter for a few moments, his dreamy eyes watching me the while. at that moment duty was forgotten in the thirst for vengeance upon soma, and the debate with his conscience was of short duration. he pulled a note from the folds of his pareo and tossed it to me with a short laugh. "me not care about that," he grinned. "me catch soma, that's all." the note was exceedingly brief. it read: "the mate is following you,--newmarch." kaipi had returned to the job of sharpening his knife in which i had interrupted him, and at intervals he assured the dead toni that vengeance was only a matter of a few hours. as far as i was concerned the captain could not have chosen a better messenger. "kaipi," i said, tearing the note into small pieces, "you have been sent to help me find leith and the professor. see, i have the professor's picture maker. he forgot it this morning, and the captain sent you and me to take it to him. do you understand?" the fijian grinned, tried the edge of his knife blade with the ball of his thumb, then sprang to his feet. "and don't be in too great a hurry to fix soma," i cautioned. "toni's spirit can wait a few days till you get a suitable opportunity. now, we'll strike the trail." kaipi grinned again, put his sharpened knife into his belt and plunged into the dense undergrowth. the snaky, moist lianas made progress next to impossible. they clung around our legs like live things, and i damned the professor's idiotic craving for notoriety as we waded through the clammy creepers in search of the trail made by the party. the prickly rope-like vines seemed to be in league with the devil who was leading the aged scientist and his daughters into dangers that made my brain dizzy as i attempted to dissect the possibilities which imagination put forward. at last we found the traces of soma's handiwork with an axe, and guided by these signs we hurried forward. the ground rose gradually toward the centre of the island, where columns of basalt loomed like the towers of feudal castles against the pure venetian blue of the tropical sky. but the sky was visible only for moments that were far removed from each other. the crawling vines that overran the trees made an impenetrable barrier against the sunlight, and most of the time we were stumbling along in a mysterious twilight that increased my nervous agony. masses of rock of volcanic origin were thickly strewn around, and anything like fast travelling was impossible. the sun dropped slowly toward the west, and we had great difficulty in holding to the path. the axe marks and the branches broken by the carriers were really the only signs that we had to go by, but the eyes of the fijian were exceedingly sharp in detecting the slightest evidence left by the party. we passed the spot where they had lunched, and increased our speed in an endeavour to overtake them before nightfall. the silence and unexplainable mystery of the place made me anxious to catch up with them before the darkness came down, while hunger and revenge made kaipi move at a speed that was most unusual. darkness came down like a suffocating blanket, and we halted. "no go farther," muttered kaipi. "better make fire and sleep. catch um to-morrow." i sat down while the fijian gathered a pile of rotten wood, but before he could set fire to the heap i was on my feet clawing my way into the darkness in front. from somewhere out of the inky night came the voice of edith herndon lifted up in a little italian melody that i had heard her singing the night we left levuka. it seemed to me that she suspected my near presence, and that she was singing to guide me to the spot where the party had camped. five minutes afterward kaipi and i stumbled into the circle of light round the fire, and leith sprang to his feet with a growl of rage. "what's this?" he cried. "who the devil gave you permission to come here?" "the captain sent me," i replied, looking straight at the giant as i fired the lie at him. "the carriers forgot professor herndon's camera, and captain newmarch sent kaipi and me after you." leith's mutterings were drowned by the scientist's cries of joy as he took the camera from my hand, and the big brute had time to recover himself before the professor had stopped chattering. i guessed that he reasoned that it would be bad policy to show that he was angry at my arrival, while the camera partly convinced him that i had told the truth. his surprise and the professor's evident pleasure made me think it an opportune moment to put forward a request to stay with the party, and i put my wish into words. "captain newmarch said that kaipi and i might go along if you and professor herndon had no objections," i lied. "he thought we would prove useful." leith scowled angrily, but the professor gave an immediate assent to the request. his short-sightedness prevented him from noticing the frown which passed over the face of his partner, but the sour look fled immediately the two girls expressed a desire to keep me in the party. "oh, please let mr. verslun come," cried miss barbara. "it will make it ever so much more pleasant." "i was thinking of the stock of food," growled leith, as if attempting to explain his evident displeasure. "i'll go on half measure and let mr. verslun have the other half," laughed holman. "and he can have some of mine," cried miss barbara. "and mine," murmured edith. leith grinned as he noted the feeling of the party. it would not be diplomatic to go against the wishes of all, and he knew it. with a wave of his hand he ordered kaipi to the fire where soma and the other five islanders were sitting, and nodded his head as an intimation that i could stay. "by the way," he growled, as i fell upon the plate of tinned salmon which edith herndon handed to me, "who was doing the shooting this afternoon?" "i was," i replied. "i fired my revolver half a dozen times when we got off the trail and couldn't find our way back to it. i thought on account of the way that the path wound in and out that your party might be near the spot where we were bushed." he made no further comment and i breathed a sigh of relief. unless newmarch sent a second messenger to make sure that the news of my desertion would reach leith, i felt that i was safe. [illustration] chapter vii the pit we were under way early on the morning after i joined the party. leith had the camp astir by daybreak, and after a hasty breakfast we trailed off behind soma and the carriers, heading directly toward the basalt towers that rose up in the middle of the island. i for one was not sorry that we were making an early start. all through the night i lay awake expecting another member of the crew to rush into camp with a message from newmarch to leith, and when we started on the trail, i took particular care to lag behind the procession for the first few hours so that i would be in a position to intercept any diligent runner from _the waif_. i took the first opportunity of telling holman of the manner in which the bilious englishman had hastened my departure with the winchester, and the youngster's face wore a perplexed expression. "that precious captain is leith's partner in villainy," he cried, "but our hands are tied. the professor is simply crazy with delight over the things that the brute is going to guide him to, and all our suspicions don't amount to much when you put them together. you see we've got nothing definite to go on at present. all we can do is to watch and wait, and be ready to act when the moment comes. soma and his five mates are leith's pets, you can bet your life on that, but we have one ally in your friend kaipi." the path of the preceding day was smooth compared to the ground we climbed over that morning. there was no trail as far as we could see. soma, who was in the lead, found his way by occasional marks that could only be visible to the eye of a native. barbara herndon remarked on one occasion that there was danger of our getting lost, but leith grinned at the remark. "soma has been here more than once," he replied. "what he doesn't know about this place isn't worth knowing." the path continued to ascend, but the thick tropical growth did not lessen during the tramp of the morning. leith walked with the professor, who appeared to be in a state of joy bordering upon hysteria, while holman and i in the rear tried to assist the two girls over the roughest sections of the road. i thought as we scrambled through impenetrable scrub and crawled over rocky piles that it was the strangest expedition that had ever set forth. if leith was the wicked devil that we suspected him to be, four persons were risking their lives to gratify the whim of a half-crazy scientist who was dying for notoriety. he would not be turned aside from his pursuit of the specimens which leith had told him of; his daughters would not desert him, and their resolve had brought holman and myself. we were blind automatons that the fame-seeking archaeologist was dragging at his heels. he did not consider the sufferings of the two girls; least of all did he think that holman or myself was doing anything to safeguard his life or property. he was blind to everything but the natural curiosities around him, and he made frequent entries in the notebook that was to be his crutch to olympus. leith did not allow me to remain long in the rear. he called me up to the front, and very politely asked me to help in hustling along the carriers who were inclined to dawdle as the way grew rougher, and, although i would much rather have had the task of helping the two girls, i had to accept the position without demur. leith was in charge, and holman and i were only intruders who had on standing, and whose food was paid for by the professor. we halted at midday in an ugly-looking spot far up the shoulder of the mountain that we were climbing, and through a break in the trees we caught a glimpse of the pacific. the ocean seemed directly beneath us, and yet, as edith herndon expressed it, we seemed to be a thousand leagues away from it. [illustration: "we halted at midday in an ugly-looking spot far up the shoulder of the mountain."] "this horrible silence makes me long for the clean sound of the waves," she whispered, as i rolled a stone over to make her a seat. "this stillness stops one from speaking. do you know that barbara and i haven't spoken a word during the last hour? we simply hadn't the courage to make the effort." under the watchful eye of leith i endeavoured to cheer her up, while inwardly i cursed the prattling old professor who chattered of the honours he expected as the rewards of his discoveries. the affair was enough to bring tears to the eyes of a man with a heart of stone. "i'm just thinking we should have stopped this business before it got this far," muttered holman, as he reached closer to get a light for his cigarette. "what should we have done?" i asked. "i don't know," he growled. "we should have done something though. pity we didn't lose leith overboard with your friend toni." "what's wrong now? has anything happened?" "no, nothing has happened," he replied. "i wish something would. this silence is beginning to put my nerves on edge, but i'm afraid to yell out for fear that i might wake something that has been dead for centuries. does it strike you that way?" "very much." "well, it's the same with the girls," muttered holman. "the stillness of the place has brought their ordinary conversational tone down to a whisper." leith lurched across and interrupted our conversation. "get the boys going, mr. verslun," he said. "we want to cross the vermilion pit while the light is good, and it is hard going from here on." we started forward up the boulder-strewn slope, and with each step the difficulties of the ascent became greater. i took an axe and helped soma chop a path which would make it easier for the two sisters, but no matter what amount of trouble we took, they found it a difficult matter to follow. once, goaded into fury by leith's attempts to hurry the girls when holman was assisting them over a particularly rough stretch, i turned upon the old scientist who was puffing along with the natives in the lead. the half-insane ancient heard my outburst to the end, staring at me through the thick lenses of his glasses as if i was some new kind of a bug whose appearance he wished to implant firmly within his mind. "science calls for sacrifices," he squeaked. "if my daughters are heroines who wish to share my hardships in the pursuit of information that will be of great benefit to the world, i fail to see what it has to do with you, sir!" "but they have no interest in your silly discoveries," i cried. "they are doing this infernal tramp to look after you. do you hear?" "confound you, sir!" he screamed. "mind your own business and don't interfere with mine!" i choked down my wrath as leith came crashing through from the rear, and the old egoist, flushed and ruffled, dropped back to meet him, evidently convinced of my insanity through my inability to appreciate his efforts to prove that the skulls of long-dead polynesians possessed peculiar formations they were foreign to the islanders of the present day. it was about four o'clock in the afternoon when we began to draw near the vermilion pit which leith had mentioned when he had urged haste at the midday luncheon. the surroundings became more strange and mysterious with each step we took. the basalt peaks that we had noticed from the deck of _the waif_ were now quite close to us, and they seemed to move in upon us from both sides. the trees and lianas became less numerous, and the black rocks came toward us in a sinister manner that conjured up thoughts of a dead something toward which the encircling ridges were guiding us like the arms of a corral. the place was fear-inspiring. it had the unearthly appearance that made the imaginative minds of the ancients people the silent woods with devils and dryads. the soft moaning of the pacific was barred out by the leafy barriers, and we walked in a silence that was tremendous. the ticking of our watches sounded to our strained ears like the blows of a hammer, and once, when the professor sneezed mightily, miss barbara gave a scream of fear before she realized what had caused the noise. the ascent became still more difficult. the natives puffed under their loads, and holman rushed angrily to the front and demanded a halt on behalf of the girls struggling in the rear. during the few minutes that leith grudgingly allowed them in which to recover their breath, the youngster hurried up to the spot where i was busy fixing the loads of the natives, and in a nervous whisper he asked my opinion of the route. "where the dickens are we going?" he cried. "this is the most eerie-looking patch of country that i have ever seen in my life." "leith said that we had to reach the vermilion pit before the sun went down," i replied. "i guess it is somewhere at the end of this staircase that we are trying to climb." "oh, gee!" cried the boy. "say, this game has got those two girls scared to death. there's something wrong with the place, verslun. my skin feels it. the island looks as if it has been left too long by itself, and i'm beginning to think that all those rocks and trees are watching us and wondering what we want here." that was how it felt to me from the moment i had left _the waif_, and i had tried vainly to overcome the feeling. the island seemed to resent the appearance of human beings. it possessed a personality through being too long by itself. it had wrapped itself round a dead past, and we were filled with the awe which suddenly strikes the unimaginative globe trotter who wanders into the cool recesses of a hindu temple. and i was of the same opinion as holman regarding the trees and rocks. traders in the lonely spots of the pacific have gone insane through becoming convinced that the mountains and the trees were watching their movements, and the trees and rocks upon the isle of tears struck me as possessing a watchfulness that smacked of the supernatural. i thought of the story which the sailor told in the café chantant at papeete just then, and i was inclined to give it more credence than i had at the moment he narrated it. but i tried to rally holman so that he would cheer up edith herndon and her sister. "you're like an old woman," i growled. "go back to the girls and make them laugh over some funny stories instead of getting nightmares about the scenery. why, this place reminds me of a real pretty bit of scenery near my home town in maine." of course i lied when i said that. you couldn't find any scenery like that outside the tropics. that place was queer; there wasn't the slightest doubt about that. i recalled as i stumbled along how a trader at metalanim in the caroline islands had swam out to our schooner when we were down there the previous year, and how the poor devil had told old hergoff, the captain, that a chatak tree at the back of his hut had begun to make faces at him, and i began to understand the complaint that had gripped that trader as i climbed along by the side of the puffing islanders. he had been jammed up too close against a personality. when a place has been too long by itself, as holman had remarked, it cultivates a strength that tries the nerves of an explorer, more especially if it is situated near the equator. places like papua, the caroline islands, parts of borneo, and the never never country in inland australia seem to possess a fist that attempts to push you off when you endeavour to bring the atmosphere of civilization into a silence that has been unbroken for centuries. holman went back to the sisters, and we moved slowly forward. the basalt rocks came closer, showing plainly through the breaks in the lianas that grew less thickly on the higher slopes. the creepers fell away slowly, as if they had done the work they were required to do, and before we realized it we were walking between two natural walls of rock about eighteen feet high, above which the sky looked like a strip of blue paper that rested upon the marvellously even tops of the barriers. the professor was gurgling joyfully as we tramped through that miniature cañon. he was bumping up against new wonders at every footstep, and he stumbled continuously as he endeavoured to jot down his impressions in the fat notebook. the professor felt nothing mysterious about the place. he had the bullet-proof skin of your cold analyst who yearns eternally for facts. "wonderful geological formation!" he chattered. "my friend professor hanlaw of oakland would enjoy a glimpse of this spot. a geologist could spend a lifetime here." leith's sallow face was disturbed by a grin as he listened to the old science-crazed ancient disbursing information regarding the formation of the rock. it troubled me little at that moment whether feldspar and augite were the two largest components, and i knew that holman and the two girls were not interested. we knew that the place was ugly and sinister, but feldspar and augite didn't give it that look. the height of the walls increased as we advanced. we were in a narrow roadway scarcely more than twelve feet across, while on each side rose the nearly perpendicular rocks that blocked our view of the country immediately beyond. the ground beneath our feet was covered with small bits of lava from the crevices of which the moist flabby leaves of the nupu plant stuck up like fat green fingers. as we stared ahead we noted that the road seemed to dip suddenly as if the highest point of the island was reached at that spot, and the prospects of a walk upon a down grade were cheering after the stiff climbs. as we neared the place, soma, who was walking about ten paces in front of the carriers, slackened speed, and the islanders dropped back till leith and the professor led the procession. leith halted and beckoned to the two girls and holman, who were some distance in the rear. "hurry up!" he cried. "you'll get the sight of your lives in a few moments." "what is it?" gurgled the professor. leith grinned as the scientist dipped his lead pencil into his open mouth so that he would be able to dab down first impressions the moment he turned his thick lenses upon the wonders. "you'll see in a moment," replied the big brute, as he walked slowly forward, and just as he spoke, we did see. a ridge of bright vermilion came up suddenly about one hundred feet from the point where the road seemed to dip, and we walked forward wondering what lay between the spot where the track ended and the bright barrier of rock that appeared to rise higher as we approached the end of the trail. we seemed to sense the approach of something that chilled and yet attracted. the place possessed a devilish fascination. it seemed to repel with its very uncanniness, and yet i was aware that i was imitating holman in thrusting forward my head in an endeavour to see what filled the space that was hidden from our eyes. the desire was soon satisfied. fifteen paces brought us to a point that left the strange curiosity naked to our eyes. the vermilion walls, thirty yards in front of us, formed part of the sides of an enormous circular crater, and we stood spellbound as we pulled up within a few feet of the ledge and looked into the fearsome depths beneath. "ladies and gentlemen," drawled leith, looking around at us with the air of a cheap showman springing a novelty upon a gaping mob, "you are on the edge of the vermilion pit, the greatest wonder between penang and the paumotus." [illustration] chapter viii the ledge of death i suppose that leith was not far wrong when he gave that place the credit of being the most wonderful spot in polynesia. none of us felt inclined to contradict him as we stood near the lip of the crater and gazed into it. the thing appalled us. it looked as if some fiend had bored it between those barriers of black rock as a trap for man and beast. the entire inner walls, probably from the action of intense heat upon a peculiar kind of rock, were of a bright vermilion near the top, gradually changing into darker shades as the eye followed them deeper and deeper till the outline was lost in the depths of the mighty cauldron. the inky clouds, which seemed to heave like black masses of cotton wool far down in the abyss, left the imagination to perform acrobatic feats as it attempted to picture the possible depths that lay below. the thing was weird, terrible, fear-inspiring. it looked like a mighty crucible in which infernal things might have been manufactured in the days when the world was taking shape. the rays of the westering sun beat upon the sides directly opposite our point of observation, and the colours seemed to leap from the rock. it glowed in a manner that was indescribable. sudden flashes came from it as if the vermilion mass was studded with blazing carbuncles, but the fascinating beauty of the part that was exposed to the rays was in violent contrast to the cold depths where the mind pictured a body falling through leagues of space. for about five minutes no one spoke. the awful suddenness with which the thing had appeared in our path throttled conversation. an inner self connected the pit with the singular feeling of depression which had gripped us the moment we landed upon the island, and we stood breathless, wondering stupidly how we had sensed the vermilion-lined horror into which the path led. it was the professor who broke the silence. the momentary awe which he experienced when the strange freak of nature sprang up before his eyes was dispelled by the vanity which prompted him to air his knowledge concerning the cause of the vivid colours which seemed to radiate from the walls. he prattled upon the effect of heat upon minerals till he made us dizzy, and holman broke in upon his chatter with a question that he fired point blank at leith. "but what did we climb up here for?" asked the youngster. "did we come for the view alone?" leith grinned as he surveyed the questioner. "no, we didn't come for the view," he answered. "it happens to be on the way to our destination." holman looked around at the basalt walls that hemmed us in on both sides, and then glanced at the pit in front. "but we can go no farther," he said. leith's smile spread across his ugly flat face. "you are too young to know everything," he sneered. the youngster's eyes opened as he looked again at the circular pit with its brilliantly tinted sides. the answer perplexed him, and he waited anxiously for an explanation. "but how can we?" he asked. leith stood for a moment before replying, then he moved closer to the edge of the crater and pointed down. "the road is directly beneath you," he remarked. "if you come closer to the edge you can see it." holman glanced at me in amazement, and moved by the one impulse we stepped toward the ledge. the rim of the vast pit, at the point where leith was standing, was composed of porphyry of a dark-green shade, and as we neared the edge we noticed that this had been worn to that peculiar velvety smoothness that one notices on the pillars of indian temples, where the sweaty hands of millions of worshippers have helped in the polishing process through unnumbered centuries. leith noticed that our glances were directed upon the peculiar polished portion of the rim, and his grin broadened. "you won't be the first to go over on to the track below," he drawled. "if i had a dollar for every man who slipped over here since the world began i wouldn't bother with specimens for american and european museums. see, the ledge is directly beneath, and it leads away to the right." we stretched out our necks and looked, and i tried to thrust back the exclamation that came to my lips. directly beneath the polished part of the rim, and about four feet below it, was a ledge barely three feet wide, and this narrow path wound away to the right and disappeared through a cavernous opening in the brightly tinted walls of the crater. the ledge was bare and unprotected, polished to the same velvety smoothness as the spot on the rim near which we stood, and when one looked at it and then let his eyes glance over the infernal depths that were immediately beneath, the brain reeled with thoughts of the danger to which a climber would be exposed while making his way along it to the cavern in the wall. holman took a great breath of air and turned savagely upon leith. "what sort of a fool game are you up to?" he cried. "what do you mean?" leith's lower jaw came forward menacingly. "you had better hold your tongue!" he roared. "if you don't i'll--i'll----" he stopped and glared at the young fellow, a murderous expression creeping over his sallow face. the half-voiced objection to the route had stirred all the sleeping devil in him, and the big stubby fingers crooked as if certain they would be called upon to grip holman's throat. "you'll do what?" asked the youngster coolly. "i'll bundle you back to the yacht!" screamed the giant. "you've been allowed to come on this trip through the good nature of professor herndon, but you mustn't think you have any voice in the direction of affairs." holman did not reply. the dangers of the path over which it was evident that leith intended to take us dazed him, and he looked at me as if asking confirmation of his opinions. "but the young ladies?" i inquired, looking at leith. "do you expect them to go down on to that path?" "i don't expect the young ladies to do anything against their inclinations," he answered blandly. "they have come with the expedition through no urging from me. regarding the ledge, there is absolutely no danger, and it is the only path by which we can reach the interior of the island. soma, go over the rim and show them." edith and barbara herndon, with their father, moved up closer to the edge as the grinning kanaka stepped forward to obey leith's order. he walked quickly to the polished porphyry slab, moved cautiously to the extreme rim, then, turning his back on the crater, he dropped upon his hands and knees and lowered himself down till only his grinning face appeared above the top. we crept closer and watched him walk along the ledge toward the cavern, apparently unaffected by thoughts of the death which a slip of his foot would bring upon him. returning to the spot beneath the polished slipping-off place he put his muscular hands into two clefts in the slab above and drew himself up on to the solid earth. "no danger," he cried. "all boys go over here before they could call themselves men. that long, long time ago." the professor grabbed his notebook as he heard the explanation, and he immediately proceeded to deluge the kanaka with questions. "what was that?" he squeaked. "you say all the boys had to climb over there?" "that's so," grinned soma. "this place make 'em test. young boy go over this quick he make plenty good fighting man. feller go over slow he no good." the professor's pencil moved quicker than the pen of a court stenographer. the kanaka's remark had brought him much copy, and the dangers of the path were forgotten as he jotted down the information. "and they went over here?" he cried, his eyes wide open as he gazed at the edge of the crater. "right over here," grinned soma. "see rock mighty slippery here. all boys' hands and feet do that. polish it mighty fine." "but surely this test is not carried on at the present time?" cried the scientist. "when was this wonderful custom in force?" "about the time that christopher columbus was paddling to america," replied leith. "there are no natives on the isle of tears now. soma is speaking of a time when these islands were inhabited." the professor gurgled like a drowning mule. "this is a most interesting morsel of information," he murmured. "hand me my camera, barbara; i wish to take a snapshot of the place." the delay irritated leith, but he kept his temper in check while the professor fussed and focussed to get a good view of the spot. "the old fool should be in a padded cell," growled holman. "he's so busy digesting that tale that he's not thinking of the dangers of this path. i'm going to speak to him aside." "i hope you have better luck than i had," i whispered. "i bullied him as we were climbing the slope, and i believe he complained of me to leith. he sees a mental picture of himself with bay leaves on his brow, and he wouldn't consider the nerves of twenty daughters." i was right in my prophecy. when holman approached the old maniac he ruffled up like an angry porcupine, and he screeched out his opinion concerning people who would not mind their own business. "you're the second person who has kindly informed me what i should do," he exclaimed. "and who are you, sir? you have no standing with this expedition! this is a scientific exploration party, but it seems to me that a number of busy-bodies have pushed their way into it. i shall ask mr. leith if he cannot stop this interference!" leith listened till the professor had finished speaking, then he turned savagely upon holman. "i've given you one chance," he roared, "and you don't seem to profit by it. now i'm not going to speak again! if i have to tell you to keep your finger out of this pie on another occasion, you'll go back to the yacht, and you'll go back without provisions, do you understand?" the youngster was not lacking in courage, and he stood up boldly as the bully screamed out his threats. "i won't go back," he said quietly. "at least i won't go back alone." leith's big fingers crooked ominously as he glared at holman, but edith herndon prevented the conflict that was imminent. "mr. holman is only concerned about our safety," she cried, stepping in front of the youngster. "he thinks that the path is dangerous for women, and it is on that account he protests." leith recovered his temper with an effort. "it is not dangerous," he drawled. "we will put a strong rope under the arms of each so that it will be impossible for an accident to happen. soma will go first with one of the other boys, and they will guide every one into the opening. once through there the path leads into a valley in the centre of the island, and the road is perfectly safe." edith herndon looked at her sister as soma unwound the strong manilla rope which he had carried from the yacht, and they exchanged glances that showed clearly the terror in which they viewed the journey across the ledge. leith frowned as he glanced toward the pit. the colours were fading from the brilliant sides as the sun sank lower, and the inky clouds that seemed to heave far down in its mysterious depths fought their way slowly upward as the invading sunbeams were driven out. it became more terrifying as each moment passed. leith seemed to recognize this, and he turned upon the professor. "if we don't get down in half an hour we will have to postpone it till the morning," he exclaimed. "i didn't look for a hitch like this. i tell you that there is not the slightest danger, and the young ladies will be just as safe upon that ledge as they are up here." the professor turned to the two girls as he closed his camera. the mad hunger for notoriety evidently blinded him to the dangers which would have been perceptible at any other time, and holman's remarks had not improved his temper. "come, come, edith!" he entreated. "we must get along. you hear what mr. leith says? there is no danger. a rope will be put around your waist, and an accident will be impossible." the younger girl took a glance at the terrifying abyss and shrank back to edith's side. "wait till the morning," she whispered. "what is that?" asked the professor. "barbara wants you to wait till the morning," replied edith. "i think it will be better. this light doesn't make the place look attractive." leith moved his big hands in a manner that showed he was willing to wait till the following day, and barbara herndon gave a little gasp of relief. soma coiled the rope that he had laid out in expectation of an immediate descent, and the whole party moved back about thirty yards from the obstacle in our path. as i analyzed my own feelings, on turning my back upon the spot, i felt that barbara herndon was not alone in desiring to make the trip when the wholesome sunbeams were pouring into the shadowy cauldron. [illustration] chapter ix into the valley of echoes holman and i had sat up late discussing the vermilion-lined crater on the night we halted upon its brink, and it was leith's voice that roused us in the morning. he showed no signs of resentment over the difference with holman on the preceding afternoon, and he attempted to joke with barbara herndon as we made a hasty breakfast. "i hope you slept well?" he grinned. "i didn't," she replied. "i had dreams of that place, and they were perfectly horrid dreams." "well, dreams don't amount to much," he replied, "and this sunshine will soon make you forget them." the sunshine, or probably the night's rest, had a wonderful effect upon the nerves of the younger girl, and she viewed the crater with much more composure than on the previous afternoon. soma had the rope in readiness when we approached the edge, and together with another carrier he slipped down upon the slippery pathway, and, with head above the rim, grinned an invitation to the party to follow his example. "now who goes first?" asked leith. i had settled that matter with holman as we sat smoking the night before, and i stepped forward while the youngster gripped the rope with kaipi and the other four carriers. we had decided that i should go down to the ledge to assist the two girls to the cavern, while he should stay above ground to make certain that no hitch would occur while they were being lowered. that place wasn't so bad when you turned your back upon it. after the rope had been adjusted i crawled back carefully till my toes hung over the edge, then thrusting my hands into the two small crevices in the rock i slipped over, feeling at the same time that peculiar sensation in the pit of the stomach that one gets when an elevator drops about six floors at a fast gait. i was perfectly satisfied that a critical examiner, reasoning on soma's theory of courage, would not have marked me down as a great fighter by witnessing the careful manner in which i made the descent. i didn't attempt to look at the gulf beneath me either. not that one could be ignorant of its existence. every inch of skin seemed to be yelling out the information to my brain, but i kept my chin up, and tried to ignore the black depths which chilled me whenever i allowed the mental photographs of the place to rise up before my vision. the professor followed me over the edge, and was guided by soma to the opening in the cavern. leith came next, and when he landed upon the smooth path he stood directly underneath the slipping off spot with the evident intention of remaining there to assist the two girls when they were lowered down. the post was one that holman had assigned to me as we talked the matter over on the previous evening, and the moment leith showed no inclination to leave the spot, i started toward him from the mouth of the cavern, where i had stepped to allow the professor to pass me by. the big bully immediately noticed my movement, and he waved his hand as a signal for me to go back. "but i'm coming," i snapped. "what for?" "for the fun of the thing," i shouted, and at that moment i forgot the pit in my anxiety to reach the spot before edith herndon was lowered over. "go back at once!" roared leith. "i will see to the safety of the ladies." i was close to him at that moment, and i returned his angry glare. "i'm going to do that," i cried, "if the devil himself ordered me out of the way." leith looked like the devil at that moment. his sallow face seemed to heave as if a disturbed emotional centre was immediately beneath the flabby cheeks, and he cursed in an undertone as edith herndon slipped from the edge and swung for a moment above the ledge before she managed to get her footing. leith attempted to take her arm as her feet touched the unprotected path, but the girl, though unnerved by the ordeal, shook off his big claw, and with her hands clasping mine i led her across the short but dangerous ledge of rock that led to the opening in the wall. i felt strong enough to fight a dozen devils like leith at that moment. the trusting manner in which the dear girl had given her hands into mine conferred upon me a strength which the crusader of old felt surging through his body when his consecrated sword blade was delivered into his hands. i returned in time to render the same help to miss barbara herndon, while leith still remained upon the path, his manner suggesting that he had discovered something humorous in the situation. holman followed miss barbara, and then came the islanders, who scrambled over the ledge with that utter disregard for safety noticeable in the actions of the unimaginative savage. holman's face seemed to have altered during the preceding thirty minutes. the ready smile, which i had first noticed when he awakened me on the wharf at levuka, was gone, and a set, defiant look had taken its place. the happenings of the day before, or the possible forebodings concerning the immediate future, had changed him from a boy to a man. soma stood at the mouth of the cavern as we passed through, and he grinned at the professor. the kanaka had discovered that the professor placed a monetary value upon his information regarding the long-dead past, and he was ready to contribute to the contents of the fat notebook whenever the opportunity occurred. "all good people in this party," he cried. "that's mighty plain." the professor dived for his lead pencil. he had a scent for copy that a new york reporter would have envied. "how is that, soma?" he spluttered. "wizard men say so," grinned the kanaka. "wizard men tell much truth." "but what did the wizard men say?" "they say that only the bad boys can slip," answered soma. "no good men either. big hole just for bad people. that what witch doctors say long, long time ago. they call it ledge of death." the professor's pencil raced madly across the paper, and holman looked back at the black depths with a grim smile upon his clean-cut features. "i suppose there have been exceptions," he remarked quietly. "there are exceptions to every rule, and i suppose an occasional bad egg escaped a fall into this abyss in spite of the wizard men's prophecy." leith looked up quickly, and he flushed angrily when he found that the young fellow's eyes were upon him. barbara herndon gave a little hysterical laugh, and the professor stopped writing and looked around inquiringly as if he was in doubt whether he had missed something of importance. "what is it?" he inquired. "i didn't hear." "it was nothing," replied leith, in his slow, drawling voice. "holman suggested that the word of the wizard men might not be infallible, and lest we have some one who ran the gauntlet under false colours we had better move on so as to keep the exception out of danger." the cavern, into which we passed from the slippery ledge, did not lead into the interior of the mountain as one would be inclined to think after viewing it from the top of the crater. we had hardly traversed it for more than sixty yards when we were once again in the bright sunlight, in what appeared to be a deep, wide valley in the centre of the island. the basalt cliffs surrounded the place on every side, and although we had great doubts regarding leith's veracity, we felt inclined to accept his word that the path by which we had come was the only one by which we could reach the spot where we stood. the circles of black rocks above the tops of the highest trees, though indescribably beautiful, were strangely repellent in their weird conformation. they struck us as the walls of a prison from which the only way to liberty lay across the path in the crater. the trees--ebony, chatak, dakua, and sandalwood--grew here in greater numbers than we had met them on the first day, while the lawyer-vines and thorny creepers rivalled the devilish meshes that had held us back as we climbed the slope to the vermilion pit. like green serpents they covered the treetops, and as we struck forward in the same order as we had marched on the first day the solemnity of the place was more apparent than ever. it appeared that nature, for some reason of her own, had made the place difficult of access, and that our invasion was something that the trees and vines protested against. but in spite of the strange melancholy of the place, the two girls were in much better spirits than they had been on the previous day. the successful passage over the ledge had brought about a reaction, and a remark of holman's caused barbara herndon to laugh with all the spontaneity that was noticeable upon _the waif_. the effect of that ripple of laughter was startling. the sound rebounded from the rocky cliffs, cannoned against the barriers opposite, and then bounced backward and forward till the whole atmosphere of the valley seemed alive with the laughter of sprites. for quite five minutes we stood listening, then the silence chased the last faint echoes out across the cliffs, and we breathed again. "it is the valley of echoes," said leith. "the cliffs throw back the sound in a marvellous manner." "i'll not laugh again, not in this spot," murmured barbara herndon. "those noises chilled my blood." in spite of a blazing sun we found the air unpleasantly cool in the shaded spots as we struggled slowly through the undergrowth. the moist flabbiness of uncommon tropical plants startled us whenever the leaves brushed against our faces and hands, while the constant popping of the green pods of the nupu, the sounds resembling nothing so much as the groans of a person in extreme pain, did not have a cheering effect upon the party. the professor was the only one who seemed to be actually enjoying himself, and even his joy was tempered by a malignant fate. while endeavouring to dot down some information tendered him by soma, he had tripped upon a vine that was in wait for such an opportunity, and he skinned his nose badly upon a projecting rock. but rocks or vines would not dampen the professor's ardour. he saw himself upon a pedestal that he would build out of the polynesian lore and the relics which he would collect. with spartan fortitude he would not allow the expedition to halt for one moment while the injured nose was being attended to, and he took up the interrupted matter with soma before the blood had been staunched. kaipi worked himself close to me just before midday, and, with one eye upon soma and the other five carriers, whispered a message. "soma much friend of big man." "how do you know?" i questioned. "talk to him out back of camp last night," he murmured. "me make believe sleep, me watch. i think i kill him to-day." "kaipi," i whispered, "if you wait a little while i promise you that you'll have your revenge for toni's death. you watch soma and the others, and when the time comes you can give him all he deserves. if you stuck a knife into him here leith would shoot you." kaipi nodded his head and trudged forward as soma came sidling toward us. the fijian's desire to get revenge for his "all same brother's death" was something that might be to our advantage later on, and i looked upon kaipi as a staunch ally in the event of trouble. we ate our midday meal in the sombre silence and again plunged forward. the appearance of gayety which barbara herndon had tried to assume after we had left the vermilion pit had passed away, and once again there was the look of pathetic helplessness upon the faces of the two girls. during the luncheon holman and i endeavoured to make conversation, but the thoughts of both were upon their surroundings, and they answered questions with an effort. the prison-like appearance of the valley, and the utter absence of sound, both of bird and insect life, had a depressing effect upon their nerves. holman's face showed that the mental sufferings of the two sisters had worked him into a decidedly unfriendly state of mind toward the professor and the big brute who was leading the old scientist on the mad hunt, and another quarrel was barely averted during the early afternoon. leith suggested that edith herndon should walk beside him so that he might assist her over the rough parts of the way, and in the conversation that ensued the youngster asserted that the girl was in better company when she was walking with her sister and himself. leith's voice rose to a roar as he made another threat regarding what he would do if the youngster did not hold his tongue, but holman was defiant, and an immediate conflict was only averted by the tact of edith herndon. the afternoon closed in with us still tramping on. the blood-red sun slipped hurriedly toward the basalt barriers that encircled the valley, and as i glanced at the cliffs the picture of the creepy ledge, that was our only way back to the outer world, was continually in my mind. the knowledge that the velvety polish upon the block of porphyry was brought there by the hands of thousands who had once peopled the island or visited it from the adjacent groups was not provocative of mirth, and i knew that the feeling that they were journeying in a place that had been of special veneration in long past centuries was producing a depressing effect upon the two girls. as the tropical twilight fell upon the valley we came to one of the strange stone structures that are to be found in the tongan and cook groups, and which have puzzled explorers who have sought in vain to find a reason for their construction or an explanation of the methods by which a savage people lifted the huge blocks of rock into position. the one that suddenly appeared before us was situated on a small slope that was free from trees and creepers, and as it stood there, black and massive, one could fancy it part of the ruins of karnak instead of a relic left by a people that were much below the intelligence of those who raised the wonders in the land of the nile. the four supporting piers of stone were about four feet square and fully fifteen feet in height, while the immense flat rock that was laid upon them was more than twelve feet in length and breadth, with a six-foot thickness. it was moss-grown and gray, but the supporting pillars had not deviated one inch from the perpendicular, although the weight upon them was tremendous. the bed of coral rock on which they rested had proved a reliable foundation, and the singular structure had scoffed at time. the professor started a lengthy discourse on sacrificial altars the moment we halted, ranging from stonehenge to toluca in search of comparisons, but we were too tired to give it much attention. holman remarked in a whisper that soma could probably outpoint the professor if it came to an array of facts concerning the probable uses of the gigantic table, and when i glanced at the kanaka, as he stopped to listen to the scientist's discourse, i felt inclined to agree with the scoffer. soma had an intelligence that lifted him above his class, and i was convinced that many of the professor's surmises caused him secret merriment. [illustration] chapter x a midnight alarm i think that professor herndon was the only person in the company who was quite contented with the day's doings on that evening when we camped near the table of stone. the polished slide and the ledge along which we had passed to the cavern stirred his imagination concerning the wonders that were before him, and he convinced himself that he had the god of his ambition by the heel. the fat notebook was made the repository of countless surmises regarding the period at which the ledge was in active use as a test for courage, and the stone structure that loomed up immediately beside the camp was tagged with countless suppositions regarding its uses and its probable date of construction. soma gathered in some easily earned shillings by raking his mind in search of traditions and retailing them to the scientist by the light of the fire. he made magazine prices for tales that he spun from his fertile brain, and the professor could hardly write fast enough in the excitement brought about by the discovery of so much historical knowledge. "it is wonderful!" he cried, pausing for a moment to polish the thick lenses of his glasses upon the end of his silk coat. "the chance of enlightening the world upon this subject is one that i would not have missed for a million dollars." "the dollars for me," murmured holman. "i don't think the old world cares three cents about anything that happened a thousand years ago in this patch." the professor adjusted his glasses and turned them upon the doubter for the space of three minutes, but holman was blissfully ignorant of the look which the angry archaeologist favoured him with. the youngster was watching the firelight upon the face of miss barbara herndon, and his thoughts were probably in a dream-fed future instead of a dismal past. leith sat silent and gloomy, his head pillowed against the trunk of a maupei tree, his face in the shadow of his hat, which he had pulled down over his forehead. the supper had been eaten with little conversation, the professor being the only one who showed conversational powers of any note. with the notebook already partly filled he felt certain of a niche in the pantheon of fame, and he could not resist a desire to prattle childishly about the sensation which his discoveries would cause. it's a terrible thing for a man to get the applause craving in its worst form. it is liable to make him do things which no craving for treasure would allow him to do, no matter how badly he desired the tempting gold. the girls retired early, and soon afterward leith wrapped himself up in a blanket and lay down at the foot of the tree. the professor at last became tired of firing questions at the wonderfully well-informed soma, and the kanaka, finding that the market for legends was not as good as it was in the early part of the night, retreated to the other fire, where kaipi and the fire carriers were slumbering. the heavy silence that comes in the night to the outposts of the world fell upon the place like a cold hand at that moment. a moon that appeared to have a pellicle across it, like the film upon a dead man's eye, peeped over the barrier of black rocks--peeped over as if it wondered what we were doing in that god-forgotten quarter. sudden puffs of wind rustled the leaves of the maupei and fled hurriedly, and from somewhere in the coral rocks one of those red-striped lizards that are sometimes found in the rocky parts of the carolines sent his unearthly _shik-shuck_ into the stillness, where one fancied it a little projectile of sound crushed in its efforts to pierce the tremendous silence of the night. one's imagination pictured the places where there were lights and music, the tinkle of glasses, and the laughter of men and women, and the wilderness suffered in the comparison. coral atolls with waving palm trees are delightful spots when one reads of them when seated in a comfortable armchair in a snug library, but the real island comes down heavily upon the nerve-centres when night falls upon the spot. then the fringe dweller feels that he is an outcast from the warm places of the world where men and women meet in social intercourse. holman, who had been staring in silence at the fire for some twenty minutes, turned toward me after the professor had retired. "sleepy?" asked the youngster. "worse than that," i muttered. "let's turn in." the "turning in" was an easy performance. we lay down on the pile of leaves which the carriers had scraped together, pulled a rug over us, and in spite of the surroundings i was soon fast asleep. it was holman's fist that disturbed my slumber. it came with some force against my short rib, and i sat upright. the moonlight made it possible to see across the valley, while every object around the camp was clearly outlined. holman was sitting up on his leafy bed, and i put a question breathlessly as i jerked myself upright. "what's up?" "didn't he say that this place was uninhabited?" asked the youngster. "yes," i answered. "why?" "well, some one has just pushed his head and shoulders up above that stone table," whispered holman. "he put his head up, looked across at us for about five minutes, then dodged quickly back." "you weren't dreaming?" "dreaming? rot! i haven't closed my eyes since we retired!" i threw off the rug and looked around. leith lay under the maupei tree in the same position as we had seen him in at the moment i lay down. near him the professor snored dismally, probably dreaming dreams of the greatness that would be thrust upon him in the near future. no sounds came from the tent that sheltered the two girls, but a combination of curious nasal sounds rose from the spot where the natives were sleeping around their fire. "it might be one of the niggers," whispered holman. "let us see." we stole silently across the intervening space, and, crouching in the shadows, counted the sleepers. there were seven. the prowler that holman had seen upon the top of the stone structure was evidently an outsider, and the knowledge brought no pleasant feelings. leith had assured the professor on several occasions that the island was uninhabited, yet it was quite possible that natives from the adjoining groups had visited it during the period that elapsed since his last visit. yet we felt that it was no stray visitor from another island that had peeped over the top of the massive table, and it was with a suspicious eye upon the sleeping leith that we crept quietly over the coral rocks toward the tremendous stone piers of the structure that rose like a monster gateway against the gray sky. the atmosphere of that place was indescribable. we seemed to be in the midst of relics that were older than the pyramids. the temple of luxor may seem impressive by moonlight, but the knowledge we possess of thebes in its glory somewhat modifies the awe which we would feel if we knew nothing of the people who had raised the great monuments in the city of amen-ra. and holman and i knew nothing of the dead race that erected the mighty stone table on the cleared slope, which by its construction gave evidence of a knowledge of mechanics of which the present-day polynesian is entirely ignorant. i recalled the nan-tauch ruins and the tombs of the mysterious chan-te-leur kings ola-sipa and ola-sopa in the carolines, the _tolmas_ and the _langis_ of the marshall and gilbert groups, and i wished the professor anything but pleasant dreams. the place seemed waiting for the return of its dead. the scenery possessed that singular expectancy that compels one to turn around every few moments to convince one's self that an unfriendly watcher is not immediately in the rear. still keeping in the shadows, we circled the camp till we were in front of the stone table, but just when i took a step into the moonlight space before it, holman grasped my arm and drew me back. "look!" he gurgled. "look! there he is again!" all doubts concerning the youngster's previous observations were swept away at that moment. a head and shoulders rose suddenly above the black line of the immense flat stone, remained there for the space of three minutes, then dropped back so that we could not see it from the position in which we stood. "take the two front pillars!" whispered holman. "i'll watch the two back ones. come on!" we dashed across the open space, the youngster rushing to the rear, while i ran to the front columns. it was impossible for any one to descend unless we saw him, and with nerves on a tension we walked around the huge supports and watched anxiously for the midnight watcher to descend. we must have remained on guard for twenty minutes or more, but there was no sign of the spy. around us the massive structure cast a patch of velvety shadow, but not the slightest sound came from above. holman tired of the inactivity, and stepped across to where i was standing. "i'm going to climb that chestnut tree and see if the beggar is still there," he murmured. "you stop here till i take an observation." he darted across to the big pacific chestnut and climbed hurriedly, while i walked round and round the square pillars and strained my ears for the slightest sound that would give a hint that the person on the roof of the mysterious table was preparing to descend. a low whistle from holman pierced the silence, and i answered. "come up here," he cried softly. "he's given us the slip." i climbed the tree to the branch where the young fellow sat awaiting me. from his position he had a clear view of the top of the big table, and as i reached him i looked through an opening in the thick leaves. the top of the stone was empty! "do you think he slipped down while i was climbing the tree?" asked holman. "i'm certain he didn't," i answered. "it would have been impossible." we stared at the stone in silence. the top was covered with short moss that had gathered there through the centuries, and instead of being flat as we had surmised there was a noticeable slope, so that the part that was directly behind the camp was fully two feet higher than the rear. this was the only peculiarity in its construction, and although we sat in silence, staring at its moss-covered surface, we were utterly unable to put forward the slightest supposition that would account for the disappearance of the watcher. the incident was an extraordinary one. the man could not have dropped from the table before we reached the supporting piers, and we were equally certain that he had not slipped down the pillars while we stood guard beneath. "i'm going up there," muttered holman. "we can get the rope from the camp. come along! i'd like a look at that place at closer quarters." we climbed hastily down the tree, crept cautiously back to the camp and took the stout rope which we had used in reaching the ledge of death. the camp was quiet. the curious nasal sounds produced by the natives, together with the rather high-toned snore of professor herndon, were the only sounds that came through the still night. holman flung one end of the rope over a projecting corner of the flat slab, twisted one half of it round and round the pillar to make occasional grips which we could use in the ascent, then clutching the hanging end he worked himself slowly up. i followed him, only to find the upper surface of the table as bare of any signs of life as we had previously noted from our perch in the chestnut tree. the tough moss upon the stone was fully four inches long, and covered the slab completely. in vain we stamped around looking for a possible hiding place. the massive block didn't offer a cranny that a lizard could hide in, and with an unsolved mystery upon our hands we descended to the ground. "what do you make of it?" asked holman. i shook my head. the enigma baffled me. our suspicions regarding the honesty of leith made the strange appearance of the figure on the table of stone more perplexing than it would have been under ordinary circumstances. leith had asserted that the island was uninhabited, yet we were not inclined to rush to him with the news of the discovery. we felt that it was another of the small discoveries that made us pile up suspicions against the big bully at the head of the party. we had no proof of the midnight visitor, and the story of his sudden disappearance while we watched below would only provoke an unbelieving grin from leith, and an idiotic laugh from the foolish old professor. "better keep it to ourselves," growled holman. "for the present at any rate," i remarked. "if leith knows that there are others upon the island, and if those others are friendly to him, it will only make him more careful of his actions if we tell what we have seen to-night." arriving at this decision we came back to the camp and crawled quietly under the rug, where we watched the mystical monument till the flaming tropical dawn lit up the valley. [illustration] chapter xi kaipi performs a service the professor used a roll of films in snap-shotting the stone table while we were breaking camp. he photographed it from every point of the compass, and made a magnificent effort to dislocate his collarbone by falling from a tree up which holman had urged him to climb so that he could get a view of the upper surface. in his mad pursuit of antiquities the professor forgot that tree climbing was an accomplishment that he had never mastered properly in the days of his youth, and our departure was somewhat delayed by the shock which he received from the fall. the camera fell upon the pile of leaves which leith had used as a mattress, and it escaped with abrasions that were microscopical compared to those received by the professor, who glared angrily at holman as edith herndon attended to his injuries. "i thought you could climb," murmured the youngster. "'pon my word i did. i wouldn't have urged you to get up there if i didn't think you could hang to a limb." "i am acquainted with a number of persons who would look well hanging to a limb," retorted the professor, as he rubbed his ankles. "same here," said holman, unperturbed by the sharp retort. "when i think over their actions, professor, i wonder how they escaped being suspended from such places. especially when you consider that trees are plentiful." we made slow progress during the morning. the professor's accident robbed him of a lot of the nimbleness which had been noticeable during the two preceding days, and the other members of the expedition had to move at a pace that would suit his stiff limbs. "i'm unlucky," whispered holman, as he sat beside me at the midday halt. "i tried to show him how he could get a good snapshot, and now he's as poisonous as a red-necked cobra just because he was silly enough to skin his shins." we crossed the lowest part of the valley during the early afternoon, and commenced to ascend gradually toward the black walls on the far side. leith had remarked at the lunch table that we would probably reach our destination on the following morning, and the information brought a thrill of expectation in spite of the suspicions we entertained. the undefined dread had upset our nerves, and i think the two girls, as well as holman and myself, were looking forward anxiously to the arrival at the objective point so that our suspicions could be either verified or abandoned. leith was more affable than usual on that afternoon, and he held forth in such a gloomy fashion upon the wonders that were within reach that the professor almost forgot his injuries and his animus against holman as he listened to the description. "it is my opinion that the island was the burial ground of the chiefs of the nearby groups," remarked leith. "there is every indication that the people who were buried here were not ordinary people, as you will see when you view the wonders that will meet your eyes to-morrow." the professor beamed through his thick glasses, and, forgetting his injuries, gave a little jump in negotiating an obstruction, but the look of agony which passed across his face proved that his injured limb objected to useless gambols. "we may be wrong after all," muttered holman, after he had listened to leith's description of the wonders of the tombs of the long-dead members of polynesian royal families. "i hate to be suspicious of a fellow, and i'll be glad if he proves genuine in the end." "so will i," i remarked. "if he measures up all right i'll be half inclined to apologize before i go back to take a gruelling from captain newmarch." it was kaipi who stampeded the small ray of charity that had pierced the cluster of suspicions we had collected. the little fijian performed the trick about seven o'clock in the evening, and it was done in a most effective manner. when we had made camp, leith had sent soma on ahead with the ostensible purpose of locating the easiest route to the base of the cliffs, and an hour afterward kaipi managed to attract my attention, and he indicated by signs that he had information to impart. i seized a chance to help him with the small tent which sheltered the two sisters, and as we tugged at the knots he slipped a small piece of paper into my hand. "what is it?" i asked. "soma drop it," he explained nervously. "i follow him just little way think get good chance kill him, but no chance come. he drop little piece of paper from his belt; me pick 'em up. i no know what it say; you read." i crammed the note into my pocket as leith approached, but at the first opportunity i dived into a thicket of leaves and opened it with nervous fingers. it was brief, exceedingly brief, but no number of words could have produced the same cold chill of dread which took possession of me as i glanced over the scrawl upon the paper. the note read: "five babies for kindergarten. arrange everything. meet at the long gallery." i stumbled out on the clearing in a half stupor. the arrival of the long-expected confirmation of our suspicions had the same effect upon me as a blow from a sandbag. leith was apparently everything that holman and the girls had suspected him of being, and as i looked around at the nearly impenetrable jungle growth upon which the night had come down with that appalling swiftness of the tropics, i understood the helpless condition in which we were placed. soma and the other five carriers were evidently tools of the big bully; the person or persons to whom the note was addressed would also stand behind him in a fray, and against this little army there was holman, kaipi, the two sisters, and myself. the professor's insane craving for a sight of the antiquities would probably make him a partisan of the big brute till his devilish tricks were laid sufficiently bare to allow the childish mind of the scientist to see through them. the situation was pitiful to contemplate, and sick with terror at thoughts of the fate of the two girls, i found holman and pulled him out of the circle of light thrown by the fire which kaipi was tending. "what is it?" he asked. "i've got proof!" i cried. "soma dropped a note that leith sent him off with when we halted. kaipi found it and brought it to me." i recited the few words that were now pounding madly through my brain, but the mere recitation would not satisfy holman. he wanted to see the words--to stare at them, so that his eyes might confirm the information which his ears had gathered, and together we dived deeper into the creepers till it was safe for him to light a match by which he could view the scrawl. "my god!" he cried hoarsely. "he's a devil, verslun! we're fools! infernal fools! do you hear me? i'll shoot the brute now!" he flung aside my hands and made a dash toward the fire, plunging through the creepers with a strength born of the sudden flame of temper which had come with the confirmation of leith's duplicity. the boy's love for barbara herndon made him a madman as he raced madly to obtain vengeance from the brute who had led us into the trap. like two maniacs we rushed into the light of the fire, but only the two girls and the professor were seated round it. leith was not in sight. "where is he?" gasped holman. the professor looked up in mild astonishment. "who?" he asked. "leith!" cried the boy. "where has he gone?" "mr. leith has gone forward to help soma," squeaked the professor. "it will be moonlight, so he took the opportunity of making certain about the direction we were to go in the morning. he said he would not be back before daylight." holman mastered his anger, and i beckoned the professor to one side. it was necessary to make an attempt to convince the foolish old scientist that we were in the hands of a scoundrel, and i determined to place the note and our suspicions before him. i told hurriedly of the appearance of the figure upon the stone table on the previous evening, but before i had time to tell of the note, the doddering old imbecile interrupted. "what's that?" he cried. "some one else upon the island? well, they can't steal the honour of the discoveries. i have first claim upon everything we find upon the place. mr. leith and i made that arrangement before we left sydney. besides, it is mr. leith's island, and if other scientists are here-- "oh, confound it! who said they were scientists?" roared holman. "it's bad luck for us that they are not. scientists are harmless, but these are natives or something worse." "leith will fix 'em!" cried the professor, ignoring the youngster's comment on the inoffensive nature of men of his type. "leith will put them off the place--" "stop chattering and read that!" i interrupted. "your precious friend sent this ahead by soma. he dropped it and we got hold of it." holman struck a match and held it over the scrap of paper while the scientist stared at it through his thick glasses. "well?" he queried. "what has this nonsense to do with me?" "the five babies," snapped holman. "five babies?" repeated the professor. "i know nothing about babies!" his small head wagged backward and forward as he made the statement, and his evident inability to see that the reference concerned us irritated the youngster beyond measure. "you're the biggest baby of the five!" he roared. "you're a madman! come away, verslun; it's no use arguing with him!" the professor gave an indignant snort, straightened his small body, as if he contemplated an attack upon the youngster, then dashed madly back to the fire, where we watched him bobbing his head up and down as he spoke to the two girls. his confidence in the rascal who was possibly luring him to his death was pitiful to see, and we recognized at that moment that it would be useless to waste any further arguments with him. "we've got to get out of this scrape by our own efforts," muttered holman. "the girls won't leave him, worse luck. if they would i'd turn tail this minute and make an attempt to fight our way back to the yacht." "and i doubt if you will find a haven there," i remarked. "that bilious captain was in a great hurry to send word to leith that i had got safely by his farewell bombardment. we're in for it, old man, and we might as well realize the fact right now." "you're not sorry i found you on that pile of pearl shell?" "sorry?" i cried. "i'm glad, man--i'm infernally glad." holman gripped my hand, and then we crawled through the bushes toward the spot where soma and leith had started off on their supposed work of exploration. "what can we do?" i asked. "wait round here and pot him when he is coming back," said the youngster cheerfully. "but we should let the girls know something, shouldn't we? that old fool will tell them a garbled account that will frighten them out of their wits. one of us had better go and try to quiet their fears." "you go then," i remarked. "i'll wait here till you come back." holman crept quietly toward the campfire, and i waited in the undergrowth. the moon was rising in the east and a soft gray light wiped out the intense blackness that had come upon the place after the short twilight. the tops of the cliffs toward which we were journeying were tipped by a brilliant thread of silver as the moon peeped above their ramparts, and i crept deeper into the shadows as the full glory of the glowing orb turned the night into day. i had waited some thirty minutes for holman when i noticed a movement beneath a small bush some fifteen paces to my right. i watched the spot without moving, and presently a dark figure crept out of the shelter and moved cautiously toward the camp. convinced that the visitor was soma, i pulled out my revolver and waited, wondering as i watched what he intended to do. the black figure came closer. he paused to listen to the sounds that came from the fire, and as he lifted his head the moonlight fell across his face, and i put the revolver back in my pocket. "kaipi," i murmured. the fijian crept quietly to the spot where i was hiding. "i come for you," he muttered. "why?" "funny things much," he gurgled. "light on mountain, no see from here. me watch it, think it something bad. come, i'll show you." holman returned at that moment and i explained what kaipi had just told me. "the devil!" muttered the youngster. "the note said that he would meet them at the long gallery. see, the light is not visible from our camp, and the brute never thought that one of us would be far enough from the camp to notice it. if it's a signal we might be able to reach the spot and see what is actually going on. if we leave things till to-morrow i'm afraid we'll be too late." "but the girls?" i cried. "we'll get back," he replied. "i told them how everything is, verslun, and they're not afraid. edith has an automatic pistol that she brought from the yacht, and she'll use it if she is forced to. come on!" we followed kaipi into the shadows, the fijian picking his way with wonderful instinct through the clumps. at about half a mile from the camp he stopped and pointed to the cliffs. "me see light flash way over there," he whispered. "you wait and see." we crouched down and waited. the minutes passed slowly, but the black barrier away to the east gave no sign of life. "i think kaipi must have sighted a star," muttered holman. "there is nothing--" he broke off abruptly and gripped my arm. high up in the basalt barrier, at a spot about three quarters of a mile from where we were crouched, a tiny flame suddenly appeared, blazed for an instant, then died away again. three times it flared up and as quickly died away, but at the third disappearance holman and i, with the vengeance-seeking kaipi, were struggling through the network of damp vegetation toward the spot from which the signal had come. [illustration] chapter xii the devil dancers the snaky vines seemed to us to be leagued with leith as we tried to force our way to the spot where the tiny flash of light had appeared amongst the rocks. the lawyer-vines gripped our ankles and flung us upon our faces scores of times, but we scrambled to our feet and rushed on. kaipi had made the discovery at an opportune moment. now that we were certain that leith contemplated treachery, the wait through the long night would have maddened us. we wanted to meet him quickly, and instinct told us that the appointment place mentioned in the note was identical with the spot to which we were fighting our way. we were bruised and bleeding when we reached the foot of the black cliffs whose perpendicular walls towered above us. we were almost certain that the light had been flashed from a point immediately above the spot where we came face to face with the barrier, but the scaling of the black barricade was a proposition that seemed incapable of solution as we rushed along the base. "this is the spot," gasped holman. "this big tree cluster was just to the right of the place where the light was flashed." "that's so," i remarked, "but how are we to get up to the point where the signal came from?" we raced madly up and down the front of the strange black wall, hunting eagerly for a place that offered the slightest foothold by which we could climb to the terraces that we could see far above, but the search was a futile one. the tremendous mountain of ebony rock appeared to have been driven up out of the earth during some volcanic disturbance, and as we stumbled blindly along we thought it would be easier to scale the outside wall of a new york skyscraper than the slippery sides of the obstruction in our path. it was holman who found a key to the situation. the big clump of maupei, or pacific chestnut, that we had taken as a landmark when we were running through the moonlit night, grew close to the barrier, and the limbs of several of the trees scraped the sides of the basalt columns as the faint night breeze moved them backward and forward. "there's a ledge up there," whispered the youngster. "look! it's about fifty feet from the ground. if we could climb a tree we might be able to reach it from one of the limbs." he had hardly outlined the proposition before we were swarming up the trunk, holman in the lead by right of discovery, and the nimble kaipi in the rear. higher and higher the youngster climbed into the thick green foliage. he reached the topmost branches, and selecting one that led toward the rocky wall, he straddled it and worked his way slowly forward. kaipi and i clung to the fork of the limb and waited, and as i watched holman the wisdom of our actions was assailed by a cold doubt. we had left the two girls entirely unprotected, and if leith reached the camp before we returned, and heard from the chattering professor the story of the finding of the scrap of paper, it would be reasonable to suppose that he would consider the moment had arrived for the perpetration of any deviltry he had planned. but holman's actions interrupted my mental criticism of the wisdom of our plans. the youngster had reached the extreme end of the limb, and he was clawing madly at the rock to obtain a footing. he succeeded after a five minutes' struggle, and he sent a breathless whisper back to our perch. "there's a ledge here," he murmured. "i think we can climb up from it. hurry along, and i'll give you a hand." i needed a hand when i reached the end of that leafy seesaw. i was much heavier than the boy, and the limb could hardly support my weight when i neared the end. holman reached out his hand at a moment when i thought that a drop through the air would be my reward for attempting aerial exhibitions, and the next moment i was beside him on a little projection that barely gave us a footing. "it's easy climbing just above us," whispered holman. "wait till we get kaipi." the fijian came along the limb with the agility of a trapeze artist, and when he reached the ledge we stared up at the dizzy heights that rose above our little resting place. small jutting projections, like gargoyles, stuck out from the wall, and we looked at them hungrily. "if we had only brought the rope!" cried the boy. "say, verslun, put your face against the rock and i'll climb on to your shoulders." i did so, and the youngster climbed up cautiously. for a long time he stood there, peering around in an effort to discover a path by which we could go upward and onward, but at last he stepped off, and i looked up to find him clinging to the wall like a huge beetle. a pack of fat clouds that had harried the moon during the earlier part of the evening now closed in upon her, and we were in complete darkness. the threshing limb of the maupei tree that was within a yard or two of the spot where kaipi and i stood waiting disappeared in the night, and the scratching of holman's shoes high above our heads came down to us through the intense silence and proved that he was holding his position with difficulty. a small piece of shale hit me on the shoulder after a long wait, and i turned my face upward. "verslun!" breathed the strained voice of the youngster. "are you there?" "well?" i asked. "h'sh!" he murmured. "we are right near the spot, verslun. if kaipi climbs up on your shoulders to this place i think the two of us could pull you up. are you willing?" "come on, kaipi," i whispered, and the fijian climbed nimbly upon me and moved up into the void above. "now, verslun," muttered holman. "reach up till we get a grip of your wrists. are you ready? well, try hard, man! think of those two helpless girls and dig your toes in!" i didn't need any reminder concerning the position of the two sisters as i stood on tiptoe and scratched with my fingers at the crumbling ledge upon which holman and the fijian crouched. the predicament of edith herndon, and not fears for my own safety, made me scratch madly for a foothold as i swung above the shelf i left. kaipi and holman tugged till every muscle in my arms shrieked out against the way they were being handled. but i was going up. i "chinned" the crumbling layer of rock upon which my fingers had a perilous grip, laid my chest across the shelf and wriggled into safety. "that's good," whispered holman. "don't puff so hard, man! we're too close to take any chances." i got upon my hands and knees and followed him along the narrow pathway. over a thousand obstructions we crawled like three rock snakes, till finally the boy halted and turned toward me. "see the streak of light through that split in the rock?" he whispered. "look in front of you! well, they're inside." the split in the rock to which holman had pointed was a perpendicular crevice about four feet in length, but possessing only a width of six inches. it separated two rock masses that were fully eighteen inches thick, and as we wriggled noiselessly toward it we saw that it gave us a glimpse of the interior of a huge cavern, the part of which that was just inside our point of observation being illuminated by a swinging ship's lamp which hung by a rope that dropped from the vaulted dome. the lamp swung directly in front of the crevice through which we peered breathlessly, and for a few seconds it was the only object that was visible. gradually our eyes became accustomed to the light, and we found that a pair of brown legs were moving slowly along the floor past our spyhole. a body, gorgeously decorated in mats of green and crimson parrot feathers, followed the legs, and then came a head that was hidden behind a mask of sennet daubed thickly with coral lime and ochre till it appeared a ghastly nightmare. the horror moved upon its stomach, and, viewing it as we did through the narrow cranny, it appeared as if the film of a biograph was being slowly dragged before our eyes. another pair of legs followed the masked head, another body, and another mask that was even more fear-inspiring than the first. and the procession continued. three, four, five, and six--each succeeding one being arrayed in a mask of more ghastly appearance than those which had preceded him. the sixth was followed by the first, who had wriggled clear around the circle of light thrown by the lamp, and in perfect silence the infernal snaky circle moved backward round and round, the faint light shining on bare legs, on bodies from which the parrot mats were thrust aside by the contortions, and upon the masks that were weirdly fantastic and mephistophelian. they had circled the floor about ten times when holman tugged my coat and i wriggled back from the crevice. "what's up?" my lips were dry as i put the question. "kaipi." "where is he?" "cleared out. those human serpents scared him. go softly, man! we must get him before he attempts to go down that cliff or he'll break his thick head." we caught up to the deserter on the ledge to which holman and the fijian had dragged me a short time before, and the youngster abused the frightened native as he endeavoured to turn him back. "no, no!" shrieked the fijian. "me no see dance like that. me die if i stay." "why?" i asked. "it is 'tivo'--death dance," gasped kaipi. "wizard men dance it. something going happen, damn bad." "but they can't get you," cried holman, "come back and watch them. soma and leith will be there directly, and you'll get your revenge." but kaipi would have nothing more of the performance in the rocky chamber. the repulsive masks and the backward wriggling of the six upon the floor had upset his fighting stomach for the time being, and we could not induce him to return. "well, you wait here," ordered holman. "we're going back, but we'll return in a few hours and pick you up. don't move from this ledge." kaipi would promise anything if he was not forced to witness the performance, and we left him huddled up in the darkness, and returned to the spyhole in the wall. the "tivo," as the fijian called it, was still in progress. without noise, the six half-nude figures were describing circles upon the smooth floor. the silence and the serpentlike motions had a peculiar hypnotic effect upon us, and in a sort of dreamlike trance we watched them wriggle by the narrow aperture to which we pressed our faces. with each circle more of the brown, sweat-polished bodies showed beneath the twisted mats. the pace was beginning to tell upon them now. slower and slower they moved past the crevice, till at last all movement ceased, and, apparently lifeless, they lay face downward upon the floor. i thought of the two girls at the lonely camp as we sat watching, and i knew well that holman's thoughts were turned in the same direction. we had seen nothing of leith, but an intuition that would not be put aside connected leith with the strange ceremony that was in progress within the cavern, and we were chained to the spot. i have no idea how long the six figures remained motionless upon the floor. it may have been an hour, it may have been two. the mystery of the performance we were witnessing seemed to drag us into a world where minutes and hours did not exist. we were dumfounded by the confirmation of our suspicions and the peculiarly devilish exhibition, and i shook off the lethargy with an effort as holman prodded me with his finger and pointed at a spot beyond the body of the dancer who lay immediately in front of the spyhole. looking in the direction holman pointed i saw that another light was approaching through the gloom of the cavern. it bobbed toward us slowly, a tiny pin point that came nearer and nearer as the bearer walked in the direction of the six. the distance it was away from the dancers, which was evident from the time that elapsed from the moment we saw it till it was close up, convinced us that the cavern was of an enormous length, and the words "long gallery" in the note which soma had dropped came up before my mind. there was no doubt that the cave was the meeting spot which leith had mentioned, and as i felt holman's body stiffen as he shouldered against me for a share of the peephole, i knew that he believed that the treacherous brute was one of the three that were approaching behind the bobbing lamp. the bodies of the dancers, or at least the parts that we could see, became tense and rigid. a soft hiss went round the circle, and once again the wriggling movement started. but this time the six went forward instead of backward. they broke out of the circular formation, and in a long glistening line moved up the cavern toward the three approaching. the lamp halted, then it was raised high in the air as the crawling half dozen approached, and holman gave a curious little gurgle as the light fell upon the three newcomers. wrapped in parrot feathers and a white mask, the lamp bearer stood revealed as soma. immediately behind him was a tall white man in the same outlandish garb, while the last of the three, barearmed and barelegged, and wearing an immense headdress of plumes, was leith! the snaky six circled the three at a respectful distance, then, again breaking into a single file formation, they turned toward the end of the cave nearest our spyhole, and behind the length of creeping bodies, soma, the tall white who had only one eye, and leith came slowly. holman's breath came faster as the procession approached. the exhibition chilled us. there was a devilish suggestiveness in the proceeding. in some indescribable manner it brought up mental pictures that were nauseating, and it required something of an effort to watch the performance. the mystery of the silent night, the thoughts of the danger which threatened the two girls, and the glimpses of the astounding performance within the cavern brought a dazed mental condition that made us doubt our sanity. i felt holman's hand reach out across my shoulder as the procession moved down upon us, and instinctively i understood the movement. the cold barrel of a revolver had slipped by my face, and i gripped his wrist and forced the hand downward. the manner in which soma and the one-eyed man walked in front of the big brute made it impossible to shoot with telling effect, and leith was the person we desired to kill at that moment. the others seemed to be but creatures of his will, and he stood up in our minds as a devil whose existence was a menace to everything that was pure and clean. the three newcomers moved to the side of the cavern, so that nothing except their bare feet were visible, and backward and forward in front of those feet moved the human serpents with a regularity that was stupefying. in an unbroken line they would move forward, flatten themselves upon the floor, then, with a unanimity that was remarkable, they would wriggle backward, to repeat the same movement over again. holman pulled me away at last, and we retired to a point that made it possible for us to converse in low whispers without being heard. "what will we do?" he gasped. "i can't stay there any longer! i want to get inside to the devil! i don't want to shoot him; i want to throttle him with my two hands!" "but the entrance to the cavern is from somewhere on the other side of the hill," i remonstrated, as the young fellow raved about our helplessness. "we must get there!" "don't lose your head about it," i remarked. "keep cool and we'll win out in the long run." it was useless to speak of patience to that boy at the moment. he clawed desperately at the slippery wall in an endeavour to find a path that would lead us to the opening on the other side by which leith had made his entry, but the attempt appeared to be madness. a dozen times the youngster scrambled up rough portions that offered a slight footing, but each time he slipped back bruised and battered. he would listen to no arguments. the desire to get to the mouth of the cavern, and kill leith before the morning, had produced an insanity, and we crawled and climbed along the face of those basalt cliffs in a manner that chilled my spinal marrow. holman possessed the courage of a maniac. his imagination was blinded to the dangers that lay alongside the crumbling shelves of rock, and i scrambled behind him wondering dimly what would happen to edith and her sister if an unkind fate flung us from the ledge into the darkness from which the soft croon of the chestnut clumps came up like a warning against our foolhardiness. holman paused at the end of a wearisome climb, and he drew himself upright. at that moment the cloud-harried moon dragged herself from beneath the pack, and the young fellow gave a cry of joy. "we can do it from here, verslun," he cried. "i see a path to the top. come along, man!" "what about kaipi?" i gasped. "we'll never find our way back here." "let him sit there," he snorted. "hurry or the moon will be under the clouds before we cross the cliff." [illustration] chapter xiii tombs of silence for my own part i found no great liking for the moonlight. up to that moment i had followed blindly in the tracks of holman, nerved somewhat by the thought that the trail he passed over would carry me. the dangers were hidden by the darkness, and my imagination was too stunned by the happenings of the night to make any endeavour to torture my nerves by picturing them. but the reappearance of the moon brought an opportunity to my eyes, and i wondered if we could negotiate the goat track which the youngster was scrambling over. i turned my face to the wall and crawled timorously in the rear. higher and higher we went with bleeding fingers and knees, but at last holman reached the top, and i dragged myself up beside him. "get up!" he cried savagely. "we must kill the devil before morning." we got to our feet and started to run toward what we knew to be the direction of the cavern. the ground sloped gradually, and we reasoned that it would continue to fall away till we reached the mouth of the cavern by which leith had entered from the far side. for once we had a clear run. at that height there was little vegetation, and at a mad gait we sped across a bare stretch where the only obstacles were lumps of rock that were scattered around in great profusion. "if--if we could find the place and block the devil and all his gang inside," gasped holman. "that's too good a thing to entertain," i spluttered. "we might, verslun! we might!" he cried. "i've got a feeling that we've been picked to put that devil out of existence. that's why i'm taking a chance in leaving the girls back there at the camp. i believe i'm going to kill him, but whether it is to-night or some other time i don't know." "the sooner the better," i stammered. "from what kaipi said about that dance, something out of the way is going to happen, and i've got a hunch that the something will happen to us." holman remained silent, and we raced on, moving down the slope at an angle that we judged would bring us somewhere near the entrance. at moments my brain assured me that it was a mad proceeding, but something of the certainty with which the youngster looked upon himself as the fate-appointed destroyer of leith came to me as i raced beside him, and i put aside the fears for edith herndon's safety that besieged me as i ran. the last doubt about leith's treachery had been chased away by the dance we had witnessed, and i felt assured that the man was a monster, a vile thing, who, for some purpose that i could not allow myself to ponder over, had brought the foolish old scientist and his daughters into a place of terrors. treachery had been apparent from the start. it was only the confidence of the old antiquarian that had blinded our eyes to a score of incidents that should have convinced us that the brute had some ulterior motive in view. during that mad race through the night the big sallow-faced giant appeared to us as a devil, a fiend that was connected with some sort of horrible practices that had continued to exist in this remote islet long after all trace of such things had been lost in those islands that were visited by traders and missionaries. kaipi connected the dance with death, and the same conclusion had come to us before we had heard the words of the frightened fijian. holman slackened speed, and we dodged through a mass of boulders that we judged were in a direct line with the crevice through which we had witnessed the happenings in the cave. "we should be near the place if there is an entrance to it on this side," he muttered. "this pile of rocks looks from--oh, gee! here's a path!" it was a path, sure enough. it wound in and out among the rocks, a narrow beaten trail, singularly white against the black surroundings. holman stopped and took up a handful of the dust. "they coat it with coral lime to make it plain in the darkness," he growled. "come on, verslun, the wriggly batch must be straight ahead." i pulled the army colt from my pocket and ran softly abreast of the youngster. the corrosive terror of the earlier part of the evening had fled then, and my nerves had taken up a sort of dare-devil attitude toward all happenings that the future might hold in store. besides, the more i thought of leith, the greater his villainy appeared to be, and to save edith herndon from the slightest contact with the ugly ruffian was a task that would give the greatest coward in the world the courage of a warrior. the white path wound in and out of the boulders, which became thicker as we advanced, and suddenly it dived through a dark passage into the side of the hill. we felt that we were at the mouth of the burrow by which leith and his dancers had entered, and we moved into the shadow to reconnoitre. leith had informed the professor that he would not return to the camp till the following morning, so the chances were that the treacherous scoundrel was still assisting at the ceremonies that we had witnessed. "shall we go in?" whispered holman. "as you like," i answered. he moved toward the mouth of the burrow, then stopped and turned toward me. "what time is it?" "it's ten minutes of midnight," i replied. "we've got six hours," he whispered. "come along, we'll chance it." very cautiously we moved into the darkness of the passageway, feeling our way along the walls that were cold and damp from the moisture which had soaked through from the crown of the cliff. the place was not more than five feet wide, and as i walked along on one side of the wall, holman, feeling his way along the other, could touch me whenever he wished to ascertain my position. our shoes made no sound upon the floor of the corridor. it was covered deep with fine dust, upon which we walked noiselessly. an occasional bat fluttered past us, but outside the flapping of the wings not a sound disturbed the stillness of the place. the silence of the outside was intensified a hundredfold. in the open, one heard the crooning of the trees as the soft winds from the pacific played with their heavy foliage, but in the natural passage through which we crawled in search of leith the air felt as if it had not been disturbed for centuries. it was heavy and thick, possessing a faint odour that seemed to rise from the dust beneath our feet. we had walked about one hundred yards along the corridor when it widened suddenly. the walls that we were following turned off at right angles, and from the moonlight which filtered through a dozen small fissures high up above our heads we saw that we had entered a cavern of vast proportions. we sensed its vastness. the few streaks of moonlight that stabbed the darkness were like so many guide-posts that enabled us to make a mental calculation of the height and extent of the place. we stopped and moved together instinctively. holman put his mouth close to my ear. "what do you make of it?" he asked. "it might be a cavern leading into the one that runs out to the face of the cliff," i replied. "but how are we to cross it?" "i can't tell you. i'm afraid if we leave this opening that we'll get lost." it was rather plain that we would. the surrounding walls were as black as the opening by which we had entered the place, and we stood with quick-beating hearts staring out across the place through which the bars of moonlight appeared like silver skewers. one of these skewers fell upon a ledge of stone some few yards in front of the spot where we were standing, and holman stepped toward it. "stay where you are," he said. "if i get lost i'll whistle softly and you can signal back to me." he moved away and i was left standing in the opening. a bat banged heavily against my face, and the odour from the dusty floor irritated my nostrils so that i had difficulty in restraining myself from sneezing. it was about twenty minutes before holman returned. he whistled ever so softly, and when i replied he came toward me hurriedly. "just walk out to that spot of moonlight," he whispered. "i'll keep guard on the door. feel around there and tell me what you think of it." i did as he directed. i walked forward to the spot and felt around with my hands. my fingers came in contact with round, smooth objects that filled every available inch of a stone table in front of me, and with a feeling of revulsion i hurried back to the mouth of the corridor. holman gripped my arm and put a question. "gave you a shock, eh?" "why, they're skulls!" i breathed hoarsely. "yes, hundreds of 'em," he said. "the place is chock full of them. this island must have been the burying ground of all the adjoining groups, and it's the atmosphere of the place that keeps the niggers away from it. leith has been wise to that. the present generation of islanders know nothing of the things that happened here hundreds of years back, but they've got an inborn horror of the place, and they keep away." "well, what are we to do?" "wait here." "but if he doesn't come this way?" "he must," he answered. "it's the only way out, i think. we can't go across this wilderness, so it's safer to await developments here." we hadn't long to wait. from a point directly opposite our position, and at a distance that we judged to be two hundred yards away, a bobbing light broke into the wall of darkness and moved directly toward us. holman gripped my arm and pulled me forward to the stone tables upon which the skulls were laid, and side by side we crouched and waited. it was the ship's lantern that soma had carried in front of leith that was now moving upon us. its yellow light showed the parrot-feather mat and headdress of the big kanaka, while the hum of voices, which drifted across the vast space of the cavern, informed us that the dancers who had assisted at the ceremony were returning with leith and the one-eyed white man. holman's breath came hot upon my cheek. there was no necessity for speech. i knew that he intended to seize the first opportunity to attack, and that opportunity was at hand. behind the bobbing lamp that was approaching us by an irregular trail, as if soma was winding in and out amidst stone supports similar to the one that sheltered us, was the brute who held us in his grip, and after the events we had witnessed it seemed impossible to reconcile his actions with anything that smacked of decency or honesty. [illustration: "behind the bobbing lamp was the brute who held us in his grip."] i attempted to drop on my knees at that minute, but the moment was disastrous to the ambush which we had planned. as i moved my hand forward i dislodged a skull that was evidently resting upon a shelf somewhat higher than the one before us. with a noise that appeared terrific in that place, the object crashed down upon the stone, and the bobbing lantern halted about fifteen paces in front of us. leith broke the silence that followed. "what was that?" he asked. "a bat," answered soma. "i don't think so," droned leith. "lift up the light." soma raised the lantern high above his head, and as he did so holman fired. the echoes were terrific. high in the vaulted roof of the place echoes answered each other with the sharp reports of maxims, and the thick air shivered. leith's voice roared an order. "put out the light!" soma immediately crashed the lantern upon the ground, and i heard holman groan. "i missed him!" he whispered. "move along a little, verslun; they've got a line on our position." we didn't move a minute too soon. half a dozen shots broke out from the spot where the light of the lantern had been suddenly quenched, and we fired twice and shifted ground the moment we pulled the triggers. but the opposition guessed the direction of our sidestep. a bullet lifted my hat into the darkness, and, as i scrambled away, a hand touched my thigh and was immediately taken away. i felt holman's body on the other side, and then, clubbing the big colt, i drove it down through the darkness at a point that my imagination suggested would be the most likely place to find the head of the stranger whose hand touched my thigh. the blow missed, and as i made a kangaroo-like jump sideways, a spurt of flame blazed out within a yard of my face. i fired immediately, and the soft _plop_ of a body settling into the dry dust upon the floor convinced me that i had settled one of our enemies. for about ten minutes after that there was no more firing. my skin, more than my ears, brought to my brain the information that there were others somewhere in the thick darkness, but the little air tremors that came to me were so faint that it was impossible to tell in which direction they were. i had lost all trace of holman. with extreme caution i crawled toward what i thought to be the spot where i had left him, but my groping fingers found only the fragments of bone that covered the dusty floor of the charnel house. i sat in the dust and endeavoured to make my addled brains direct me as to the best course to pursue. the silence led me to infer that leith and his party, who were evidently familiar with the cave, were making for the passage by which we had entered the place, and a cold chill passed over me as my imagination pictured leith, one eye, and the oily dancers waiting for holman and me in the narrow corridor. to escape from the place immediately was our only chance, and with a courage born of terror conjured up by the thoughts of imprisonment in that place of skulls, i started to crawl rapidly into the dark. i had not proceeded half a dozen yards when my hand touched a bare leg, and i drew back hastily. with madly pounding heart i crouched in the dust, waiting for an attack, but as i waited i convinced myself that the leg had not been drawn back when my fingers encountered it. with my right hand clubbing my revolver, i reached my left out cautiously, and once again my fingers came in contact with the bare limb. the fear left me at that moment. i was back at the spot where i had fired at an unseen foe some fifteen minutes before, and the body near me was the victim of my lucky bullet. carefully i felt the dead man. he wore a large feather cloak and a tall headdress, and i concluded that he was one of the wriggling brutes whose performance we had watched in the cave. in the dust, beside the body, my fingers found his revolver, and the fact that he had been armed at the moment his party came unexpectedly upon us was more proof, if proof were needed, that leith's tactics were anything but straightforward. securing the revolver, i started to crawl away, but a sudden inspiration came to me. i stripped the parrot-feather mat and the headdress from the corpse and donned them over my own clothing. in the darkness recognition was made through the fingers, and as there were eight enemies in the cavern and only one friend, i considered that the danger i ran of receiving a bullet from holman was more than counterbalanced by the protection that the dancer's costume would give me if i ran against the groping hands of leith or his gang. after a wearisome crawl i touched the wall of the cavern, and standing upright i debated for a moment whether i should move to the right or the left. i had no definite idea as to the position of the opening through which we had entered the place, and i dreaded the weary circuit of the cavern which i would be compelled to make if i turned in the wrong direction. it was possible that the corridor was within a few yards of me, and if i turned away from it i might get lost in other passages leading to the long gallery where the dance of death had taken place. i decided to move to the right, and with one hand upon the cold wall i stumbled forward. if holman was still a prisoner, edith herndon and her sister were entirely unprotected, and my tormenting imagination made me throw prudence to the winds. i had to reach the camp before leith or any of his evil bodyguard arrived, and, becoming reckless of the terrors of the dark, i ran blindly in my desperate desire to find the path into the open air. i cannoned into a man who was standing with his back to the wall of the cave, and before i could lift my arm his fingers had gripped my throat. for a second we struggled, then he released his grip and murmured some words in a dialect that i did not understand. his hand had touched the parrot-feather mat that i had drawn about my shoulders, and he was convinced that i was one of his own companions. still holding my shoulder he pushed me a pace or two forward, and instinctively i knew that i was in the corridor. the faintest tremor disturbed the heavy air, and a wild surge of joy rushed through my being. the place of skulls had brought a terror upon me that swept away my reason, but the knowledge that i was on the way to the open, where i could fill my lungs with god's pure air, acted as a powerful restorative. as my guide's fingers slipped from my shoulder, i stood still and listened. his heavy breathing was distinctly audible, and with a prayer to providence to guide my right hand, i brought the butt of the heavy revolver down through the darkness. it must have caught him squarely upon the crown, for he dropped without a groan. "holman!" i shrieked. "where are you, holman? the passage is here! this way, quick!" a revolver cracked within two feet of me, and the bullet ripped through the tall headdress. i crouched quickly and ran along the corridor. there was no answering cry from holman, and although it was possible that he would not disclose his whereabouts by replying to my yell, i decided that i could do little to help him in the impenetrable darkness. besides, edith herndon and her sister were in danger, and the dawn was coming rapidly. throwing off the parrot-feather mat, which had served me to such good purpose, i raced headlong toward the opening. a few bats, returning early to their sleeping quarters, banged against my face, but the way was otherwise clear, and with a cry of joy i rushed through the mouth of the passage into the calm, clear night. [illustration] chapter xiv back to the camp the path, with its coating of coral lime, stretched before me, and i fled along it. the moon had disappeared behind the hills, but the limed track was quite distinct. my watch had stopped, but i judged that there was still a good two hours before the dawn, and i ran as i had never run in my life. i recognized what sort of feeling i possessed for edith herndon as i raced through the lonely night, and i reproached myself bitterly for leaving the camp. i became convinced that leith had set out for the resting place of the professor and his two daughters after placing guards at the inner opening of the corridor to see that holman and i did not escape from the cavern, and i realized the terror which the two girls would experience when the big brute reached the camp. "the devil!" i muttered. "the fiendish brute!" a chuckle came from a boulder beside the track, and holman's cheery voice set my pulses beating. "you frightened the dickens out of me, verslun," he cried. "i thought you were one of the evil legion. gee! i'm glad to see you." "how did you get out?" i gasped as we rushed on together. "i thought i left you in the cavern." "it was a good job you didn't," he retorted. "there was a husky nigger at the outside entrance of the passage, and he gave me the fight of my life. get off this track; they might be after us at any moment." "do you think that leith has made for the camp?" i asked. "i suppose he has. we must move as fast as we can, verslun. if he reaches there before us we'll deserve any fate that will come to us. we shouldn't have left them." the utterance of the conviction that had come to both of us brought a silence, and we rushed across the boulder-strewn ground that we had crossed earlier in the night. we felt certain that leith knew of a surer and safer path back to the camp, but it was useless for us to hunt for a new trail at that moment. we would have to find our way down the nearly perpendicular wall up which we had climbed after leaving the crevice through which we had viewed the death dance, and, to me at least, the recollections of that path brought feelings that were by no means pleasant. but leith was making toward the camp, and the horrible thoughts aroused by the spectacle which we had witnessed in the early night muzzled the thrills which the dangers of the climb sent through our bodies. the dance had terrified the fijian by arousing thoughts of the deeds that would happen in its wake, and kaipi's terror became a gauge for us to measure its dread significance. we reached the cliffs and ran up and down the ledge in a vain search for the spot where we had clawed our way to the top. not that we thought the finding of the place would solve the problem of the descent. it was hard to conceive of a more difficult way than the one by which we had come, and as if he had suddenly come to the conclusion that any other path would be preferable, holman dropped upon his knees and lowered himself upon a ledge that was immediately below. "come on, verslun!" he cried, in a choked voice that was altogether different from his cheery tones. "if there is no path we must roll down. there's the first flush of the dawn!" i looked toward the east and groaned. the faint grayish tint unnerved me. although it was possible that leith had already reached the camp, still we had promised the two girls that we would return by daylight, and although we had a hazy notion as to what we would do when we did reach their side, the longing to get there made us oblivious of danger. i swung down on to the crumbling foothold that supported holman, and breathlessly we began to scramble toward the valley. it was a mad climb. holman exhibited a temerity that bordered on insanity. with reckless daring he scrambled down upon dangerous niches that jutted out upon the face of the cliff, and my repeated warnings fell upon deaf ears. a task that would have appeared impossible when viewed in daylight, lost half of its terrors because we only vaguely apprehended the dangers that threatened us when a layer of shale crumbled beneath our feet. our descent became a wild toboggan. slipping and sliding, clutching wildly at every little projection that would decrease the speed at which we were travelling, we rolled with bruised and bleeding bodies on to a small platform, and lay half stunned for a moment, as a thousand pieces of rock, dislodged by our bodies, bounced past us into the valley. holman picked himself up and looked around. the pink flush had deepened in the east, and nearby objects were discernible. "by all the gods! we are back on the ledge near the crevice!" he cried. "come along and we'll hunt for kaipi." it was wonderful how we had pulled up in our slide near the place where we had witnessed the performance that prompted us to make the ascent. but there was no mistake about the spot. as we crawled along the platform we found that we had landed not more than twenty feet from the crevice through which we had witnessed the blood-curdling "tivo," and we hurried toward the spot where we had left the fijian, whose nerves had been upset by the glimpse he had had of the strange antics of the dancers. but kaipi was not at the spot where we had left him. whether his fears had increased to such an extent that they had forced him to leave the place, or whether he had come to the conclusion that we had returned to the camp by some other route, we could not determine; so wasting no time on useless conjecture we hurried toward the big maupei tree up which we had climbed to reach the ledge. but holman's hurry proved disastrous. he had escaped the dangers of the cliff descent to meet an accident when he had sufficient light to see what he was about. in reaching for the limb of the tree that threshed against the cliff, he lost his footing, and before i could grip him he went crashing through the foliage to the ground, some fifty feet below! i thought that i was an hour descending that tree, but i could not have been more than three minutes if my skinned legs could be relied upon as evidence of speed. i found holman in a thorny tangle, and as i dragged him into the open he groaned loudly and endeavoured to get upon his feet. "are you hurt?" i questioned. "no, no!" he cried. "i'm not hurt, verslun. get me on my feet, man. quick! for the love of god, quick!" i gripped his shoulders and he managed to stand upright. the dawn came with tropic suddenness at that moment, and i saw that he was bleeding from a nasty wound above the right temple, while he limped painfully as i helped him across a small cleared patch near the tree. "i've hurt my leg," he cried, "but i'm going to get to the camp. if i fall, verslun, i want you to lend me a hand. promise to help me, will you? she--miss barbara, you know, old man. she is everything to me. give me a hand if i tumble down." "i promise," i answered, and he wrung my hand as we started off through the clawing, scratching vines that tripped us up as we tried to fight our way forward. if we had thought on the night before that the quarter mile of country that lay between the camp and the rocky wall was a difficult stretch to negotiate, we were more than doubly certain of its impenetrable character now that daylight had come. how we had ever managed to get through it in the darkness was a mystery that we tried to solve as we attempted to make our way back. the place was a mad riot of thorny undergrowth, laced and bound with vines that were as strong as wire hawsers. the lianas appeared human to us; they lassoed our legs and flung us sprawling upon our faces whenever we tried to quicken our speed. thorns of a strange fishhook variety drove their barbed points into us, and each yard of the tortuous path that we cut through the devilish vines was marked by a scrap of our clothing, which the tormenting thorns seemed to wave aloft as an emblem of victory. "he'll beat us!" gasped holman. "i'm all in, verslun; that fall has finished me." "keep at it!" i said. "we must be near the camp by now." "we've walked three miles," muttered holman. "we've lost our way." "no, we haven't!" i cried. "we've struck a bad patch, but we'll get there soon." the youngster clenched his teeth and endeavoured to forget the agony of his leg, but the effort taxed his courage. "we'll do it," i said. "don't let the brute beat us." "i--i won't!" he stammered. "if it was anything but my leg! verslun!" he fell on his face, and i helped him up, but once again he collapsed. the injured limb made it impossible for him to stand or even crawl. "you get ahead," he cried hoarsely. "leave me, verslun! leave me here!" "but i'd never find you again," i protested. "yes, you would! i'll crawl out after a few hours' rest. run to the camp, and shoot--shoot the devil the moment you put your eyes on him!" i took a quick glance at the matted walls of the green creepers that hedged us in on all sides. holman was in the last stages of exhaustion, and i reasoned quickly. if i left him in the middle of the thorny tangle that encompassed us, it would be utterly impossible for me to find him again, and he would probably perish from thirst. if i rushed away i would be leaving him to certain death, and although our prospects of leaving the island alive did not look too bright at that moment, i considered that i would be making his demise a certainty by leaving him in the maze. i stopped, gripped him round the waist, and with a great effort managed to lift him upon my shoulder. holman's actions did not help me as i struggled beneath him. he kicked like a madman when he understood what i intended to do, but i held him in spite of his protests. "leave me here!" he screamed. "go ahead by yourself, verslun! what's the use of taking me?" "you're coming, so you can stop kicking," i muttered. "take your fingers out of my eyes." but holman's struggles ceased then, and his head fell backward. the pain of his leg had made the plucky youngster swoon away, and with a prayer upon my lips i sprang again at the bulwark of vicious creepers. i have a very vague recollection of the remainder of that trip. in my subconscious mind i have memories of an insane struggle with a jungle that was alive, of a fight with thorny creepers that pursued us. i became convinced that those vines were alive, because the same thorns that we had passed hours before rose up again in our path and waved the scraps of bloody clothing that they had torn from holman and myself. at last, half insane with anxiety for the safety of the girls and our own struggles, we staggered blindly into the patch of cleared land upon which the camp had been pitched on the previous evening. it was impossible to mistake the site. the embers of the big fire were still smoking and we stared with sweat-blinded eyes at the place where the girls' tent had been standing when we rushed off with kaipi to investigate the light in the hills. but there was no trace of the girls or the professor. leith had got ahead of us, and the big brute had rushed the crazy scientist and his two daughters toward the hills that stood up black and defiant above the sea of green vegetation. [illustration] chapter xv a day of skirmishing we lay for a few moments upon the soft grass, then holman crawled on hand and knees to the little spring of cold water and bathed the wound upon his temple and his injured leg. the water revived him, and after a brief rest he got to his feet and stared at the festooned trees that surrounded the spot. "i'm ready, verslun," he muttered. "which way did they go?" i pointed to the marks made in the soft ground by the shoes of the two girls, and holman limped forward. "but we can't follow this fashion," i protested. "why not?" "we'll be shot down before we get within half a mile of them. leith cannot know that we have escaped from the cavern or he would have left some one here to interview us." "well, we can't do any high-class tracking in this country," said the youngster grimly. "if we stray six feet from the trail we are lost. we had better trust to fortune and go ahead." it was impossible to do anything else. the route by which the carriers had marched from the camping ground was perfectly clear while we followed their footsteps, but if we diverged ever so slightly the thick veils of verdure hid the path from our eyes. to follow the party we would have to hold to the trail and take the chances of an ambush which leith would certainly prepare for us the moment he knew we had escaped from the cavern of skulls. it would be easy for him to set his one-eyed white partner to shoot us down as we staggered along the trail which soma or one of the carriers had blazed with an axe. "they cannot have more than three hours' start of us," cried holman. "give me your arm, verslun. now let us move as fast as we can." "but this is puerile," i protested. "we'll be running our heads into the noose." "i don't care if we do. i want to get near leith." "but we'll never get near by running after him in this fashion. if we could find some way to get in front of him and wait." "but what will happen to the girls?" "will our death prevent it?" i snapped. "if we rush after him in the open we'll throw our chances away." i am a sailor, absolutely ignorant of jungle knowledge, but i had sense enough to know that leith would not leave his rear exposed for a moment after he had received word from the cave. i tried to recall stories of extraordinary trailing feats as we stumbled forward, but i became convinced that all the marvellous performances i had ever read of had been accomplished under conditions that were altogether different from those that confronted us upon the isle of tears. an open piece of country would have been a sight of joy to our eyes that were weary of the everlasting mesh of green which encompassed us like the tentacles of a malignant fate. the green, sweaty leaves, the fat, bloated pods, and the lengths of pythonesque runners produced a mental nausea. the vegetation appeared to us to be vicious. its very luxuriance produced that fear of the wild which grips one in tropical countries but which is never felt in lands situated in the temperate zones. we had not covered a hundred yards of the path when holman pounced upon a strip of white bark that waved to us from the thorn of a lawyer-vine crossing the track. a few pencilled words covered the smooth side of the strip, and we absorbed them in a single glance. "'we're prisoners now,' muttered holman, reading the few words in a whisper. 'the brute has declared himself. barbara.'" the boy turned to me, his face all blood-smeared and haggard, and for a moment we stared at the strip of bark. there had been no doubt in our minds concerning leith's intentions from the time that kaipi brought us the message which soma had dropped, but the knowledge that the brute had declared himself to the professor and the two girls brought us a most horrible feeling. in my own case i had never experienced such a sensation. the strange rites connected with the "tivo" in the long cave had laid a foundation upon which my imagination piled skyscrapers of horror. if i could have fixed my mind upon a definite fate that would be theirs if they were not rescued from the big brute's clutches, i would have found relief, but my inability to do that left me a victim to thoughts that were enough to deprive one of his reason. we looked upon the island as the ceremonial place for rites that were stamped out in the groups where the missionary had pushed himself, and the message from barbara herndon became a mental piledriver to ram home a thousand doubts that had obtained a footing in our minds. "come on!" cried holman. "if we don't catch up with him i'll go mad!" he turned to hurry along the narrow path, but out of the silence behind us came a shout that caused us to dive promptly into the bushes. the whoop came from the direction of the camping ground, and we had hardly crouched in the undergrowth when a nude native crashed through the vines and raced past our hiding place. he was followed by two more, the three running at top speed, heads forward, and their chests heaving in a manner that suggested they had come some distance. in the glimpse we caught of them as they dashed past we came to the conclusion that they were three of the "tivo" dancers, and as we watched their bare brown backs disappear in the creepers we observed something which our position on the previous evening had prevented us from seeing. the backs of the three were tattooed, not with the common line tattooing, but with short scars that ran down the spine, making a ridged representation of a centipede, and as they passed i remembered that the professor, when taking a photograph of the stone table on the previous morning, had commented on the same peculiar pattern which he had discovered upon one of the huge supporting pillars. "they've come to tell leith that we have escaped," whispered holman. "and they'll be on our trail the moment they give him the news." "all right, we'll be ready for them. how much ammunition have you? "three cartridges," i replied. "and i have four. we must make those seven--look out! there's another beggar coming!" we dropped quickly out of sight and peered through the leaves. holman was right. some one else was coming along the path, but the newcomer was exercising much more prudence than the three dancers. judging by the little intervals of silence that followed the slight noises made by the breaking of twigs, he was investigating each yard of the way. a woolly head at last appeared through the network, and our nerves relaxed at the big brown eyes that rolled fearfully. the timorous stranger was kaipi! the fijian was shaking with fear when we dragged him into the bushes. in halting words he told the story of his experiences of the night, and holman and i listened. kaipi had waited upon the ledge till a few hours before the dawn, and then he had made for the camp. with much better luck than we had struck, he reached there before daylight, but fearful of the happenings which would follow in the wake of the devil dance, he had taken up a post of observation in a neighbouring tree and awaited events. leith, according to the fijian, had arrived at dawn, accompanied by soma and the one-eyed white man, and the big brute had immediately interviewed the professor. kaipi's actions, as he mimicked the elderly scientist, convinced us that the interview was not pleasant to the archaeologist, and it was evident that it was at that moment leith had declared himself as barbara herndon stated in her note. "he kick up plentee big row," explained kaipi. "he kick porter men an' make damn big noise outside missee tent. they come out speakee him, he slap big missee in face, drive 'em off." holman was crashing through the bushes before kaipi had finished his recital, and i followed him, with the excited fijian bringing up the rear. leith was rushing the professor and his daughters toward the black hills and we had to do something immediately. for over an hour we stumbled along the track, making no effort to keep under cover in case leith should have prepared an ambush. it was useless to argue with holman, and my own feelings were such that i preferred to take the risks of the route which soma's axe had cut, to the delays which the task of forcing our own passage through the labyrinth would bring upon us. prudence was thrust into the background by the intense hate we entertained for the devil who had entrapped us. it was near midday when our pursuit met with an interruption. a revolver cracked in a clump of wild ginger directly in front, and we took cover immediately. the bullet had whizzed close to holman's head, and as we lay panting in the ribbon-grass we congratulated ourselves on the fact that we had been met with a single shot instead of a volley. we had taken a big chance and had come off lucky. it was impossible for leith's party to be very far ahead, and as we watched the ginger clump we wondered how we could circumvent the sharpshooter. after about five minutes of absolute quiet kaipi turned his head and pointed to the rear, and holman and i listened intently. the fijian's sharper ears had detected slight sounds behind us, and as we strained the silence we came to the conclusion that the enemy had stealthily worked their way around us, and were now creeping like snakes through the maze with the hope that they would take us unawares. we started to worm our way to the right, and our hatred of the infernal island, where we were reduced to the condition of burrowing moles, increased. our eyes were practically useless. we had to depend upon hearing alone, and when a white man pits his ears against those of a native he finds that he has been suffering from partial deafness without being aware of the fact. a dozen times we shifted ground on a signal from kaipi, whose head was continually to the earth, and that game of hide and seek drove us frantic. leith was hurrying toward the hills while we were crawling backward and forward through the undergrowth to escape a few natives who pursued their tactics with a persistency that was maddening. the fact that the pursuers had the advantage put a raw edge upon our tempers, and after an hour spent upon hands and knees holman resolutely refused to shift his ground in response to kaipi's signals. i was just as tired of the wormlike attitude that we were compelled to adopt, and i waited beside holman while the fijian slipped away through the creepers after warning us by many eloquent signals that one of the search party was creeping toward us. holman had a "let-'em-all-come" expression upon his face that would have been amusing at any other time, and kneeling with our backs to each other we endeavoured to peer through the leafage to get a glimpse of the foe. we remained like that for about ten minutes; then our attention was attracted to a point about eighteen inches to the right. the dry leaves were pushed quietly aside, but instead of a head appearing, as we expected, a bare brown leg was thrust through the creepers and remained stationary. the leg fascinated us. kaipi had moved in the opposite direction, and we were certain that the limb belonged to one of our enemies. the naked savage was worming his way upon his stomach, and the position immediately brought to our minds a picture of the scene in the long gallery. when it came to a game of this sort we would be hopelessly outclassed by a batch that, through assiduous training, slipped along with the ease of serpents. holman held his revolver in readiness and watched the leg. it was difficult to judge the position of the native's body, and the scarcity of ammunition made us hesitate before firing a shot. the leg was pushed farther out of the leafy tangle, and as it came toward him a change passed over holman's face. he handed his revolver to me, crouched on his thighs and sprang! there was something primitive about the action, something which caused my heart to throb as i watched him take the pantherlike spring. on the previous evening the youngster had expressed a desire to throttle leith, and the same desire had gripped him when he watched the leg come through the vines. the devilishness of the batch made shooting a tame way of obtaining revenge, and i possessed the same itchiness of the fingers which had prompted holman to take the wild leap. there was a joy in throttling such a brute, and i delighted in the grit of the boy. the affair was dramatic in its swift and silent ending. the native, taken entirely unawares, had no chance against the angry antagonist who had landed upon his back. a faint gurgle proved to me that holman's fingers had found the neck of the other, and in an incredible short time the struggle was over. we parted the bushes and examined the body. it was one of the three nude natives that had rushed by us on the trail a few hours before, and he clasped in his right hand a long knife of new zealand greenstone that had been inlaid with gold in an intricate design. we had never seen such a weapon. the crude knives that i had seen throughout the islands were not to be compared to the wonderfully polished blade that had been intended to free either holman or myself from all earthly cares, while the metalwork showed a craftmanship that made one wonder how many centuries had elapsed since the polynesian artist who had fashioned the weapon had been laid in the cavern of skulls. the sinnet work and the parquetry of split bamboo, which comprise the highest handicraft of the present-day islander, could hardly be classed with the exceedingly beautiful work upon the blade. holman turned up the end of the haft, pointed to a delicate design of a centipede, and then looked down at the back of the savage upon the ground. the similarity of the two designs was immediately apparent, but while the one on the greenstone had been executed by an artist, the figure upon the back of the dancer was a crude example of scar-tattooing that required some imagination to puzzle out what object it was supposed to represent. as we glanced at each other the significance of the serpentlike dance, the marks upon the bodies of the dancers and on the knife and stone table, was plainly evident. the island was sacred to the centipede, and in some way leith had made himself a chief wizard amongst the few savages who still performed the rites which had once made the isle of tears a place of particular importance to the surrounding groups. holman took the long greenstone knife, and we crept quietly away in the direction taken by kaipi. we had one enemy less upon the island. not counting the carriers, we reckoned that the active opposition comprised leith, soma, the one-eyed white man, and either two or three of the "tivo" dancers, and these made a formidable batch. the dancers were huge natives, possessing all the characteristics of the tongans, while leith, soma, and the one-eyed white man possessed more than ordinary strength. "we must try to find the path," whispered holman. "this delay will give leith a chance to get to the hills." but the finding of the path was no easy matter. so that we would be well out of the sphere of the companions of the man who carried the greenstone blade, we worked our way for about one hundred yards through the leafy maze before attempting to search for it, and that search proved a long and tiresome one. it is impossible to describe the network of wanton vegetation through which we struggled during the hot afternoon. every kind of shrub and tree was woven into an ungodly tangle by the crawling, leaping vines that shut out the sky and made it impossible to see a person standing only a few feet away. we stayed our appetites with wild guavas and yams, and moved slowly forward in the direction that we surmised that leith was moving in. our inability to find the path left us the only alternative of pushing on toward the hills in the hope that we would intercept the party before it reached the caverns which made the basalt cliffs a secure hiding place. once the arch villain reached the caves it would be a difficult matter to locate him, and we damned the crazy brain of the professor as we thought of the lonely position of the isle of tears. if the captain of _the waif_ was in league with leith it would be absolutely impossible to obtain help to rescue the girls and their father, and we would be marooned upon the island for an indefinite period. it was within a few minutes of sunset when our despondency was suddenly swept away. the silence of the jungle was disturbed by a shrill voice that protested loudly against something which the owner was called upon to do, and our hearts punched our ribs with mighty blows as we crawled forward. the voice belonged to professor clinton herndon of california. [illustration] chapter xvi the stone table our feelings can hardly be described as we crept closer to the spot from which the scientist's angry protest had gone up through the silence like a thin wire. the loneliness of that day had been appalling. i know that edith herndon's quiet face was continually before my mental vision, while holman's actions convinced me that he was suffering acutely. if we were certain that leith intended to do no wrong to the party, the fact that he was within speaking distance of the two girls was particularly distressing after the knowledge we had gained in the night. with extreme caution we wormed our way forward, the professor's piping voice acting as a verbal signpost in helping us to locate the spot where he was engaged in holding the argument. we were close enough to hear his words, and our nerves were on the highest tension as he shrieked a defiance against some person near. we had only one thought as to who that person could be. the professor was piling charges of treachery upon the head of a listener, and there was only one head on the isle of tears that contained enough villainy to make the charges possible! "i will not sign the papers!" cried the scientist. "i want my liberty, sir! you are a scoundrel! where are my daughters?" holman, creeping a few inches in front, had drawn his revolver. the blood pounded madly; through my brain. we were within a few yards of leith, and even as we moved snakily forward, the heavy bass voice of the scoundrel came to our ears. "you stupid old fool!" he growled. "you can demand all day and all night if it does you any good. do you know who i am?" "i know you are a ruffian!" snapped the professor. "i know you are a rogue who has no respect for his word and honour. i know you are a coward who insults women!" "go on," mocked leith. "i've been a fool!" cried the old man. "i was blinded to everything through my love of science. now i know that you lied. i know you brought me here to rob me and insult my daughters." the sun had set, and the twilight made it difficult for us to locate the two men. but we were close. when leith spoke again, his voice sounded so near that i started involuntarily, while holman, resting upon one hand, parted the branches with the barrel of the revolver which he gripped in the other. "but you will admit when all is over that i have shown you some wonderful things," sneered leith. the professor was silent a moment, as if endeavouring to fathom the meaning of the words, and we moved a few inches closer in the little interval. "how?" asked the scientist. holman's hand that gripped the revolver remained motionless. through a rift in the leafy curtain i caught a glimpse of a bulk that was within a yard of our hiding place, and i knew that the youngster was waiting for the brute to speak to make certain that he was covering the right man. the silence was nerve-destroying. "why," said leith, speaking slowly and distinctly, "you are in the hands of the wizards of the centipede. i am their head, and if you are not extremely lucky you will make a sacrifice to--" something fell upon my head with tremendous force at that moment, but as the blow descended holman fired, and even as i fought to escape the grip of the strong fingers that twined themselves around my neck, i realized with a great wave of happiness that the bulk in front of me had pitched forward when the shot had shattered the silence. in a wild bedlam of oaths and shouts we fought and struggled. the "tivo" dancers had followed upon our track through the long afternoon, and the time that we had lost in locating leith had given them an opportunity to come up with us. in the gloom we threshed backward and forward, but our efforts to escape were vain. the one-eyed white man appeared mysteriously out of the shadows to help the huge natives, and in three minutes holman and i were tied hand and foot and stretched out near the unfortunate professor, who, with bound limbs, was sitting up in the centre of the grassy clearing where leith and he had been exchanging personalities. there were no signs of the girls, and i wondered, as my brain recovered from the effects of the blow, what had happened to them. holman's voice put a question that roused me from my half stupor. "did i kill him?" cried the young fellow. "tell me!" the question was answered by a stream of blasphemy that came from leith himself. the big ruffian had fallen into a bunch of ribbon-grass, but now, with the assistance of one eye, he got to his feet and staggered toward us. from the actions of his white partner, i surmised that holman's bullet had struck him in the left shoulder, and the surmise proved true. the attack of the dancers had jerked the youngster's arm, and the wound was twelve inches above the point that holman had aimed at. with one eye and the three dancers holding him upon his feet, and the blood dripping from the wound, he kicked us furiously, howling unspeakable imprecations as he drove his heavy boots against our ribs. we had met the real leith at last. the devilishness that we had sensed behind the lustreless eyes blazed forth in full fury, and to me, familiar as i was with all the weird and wonderful curse phraseology used by the skippers and mates of the island boats, his anathemas impressed me as being the most blood curdling oaths that had ever come to my ears. the man was a devil at that minute. his tremendous strength made the restraining efforts of the other four useless, and we were in danger of being kicked to death if a merciful interruption had not stopped him. the horrified professor, who was sitting upright during the exhibition of brutality, lifted up his voice in protest, and his shrill denunciations brought a cry out of the surrounding gloom. "father! father! where are you, father?" it was edith herndon's voice, and the note of agony in the words maddened me. i drove my teeth into leith's left leg as he stood quiet for a second near my head, and the brute used the sole of his right boot to loosen my grip. there were no gentle ways about the devil. as edith's cry was repeated, he had administered a farewell kick to holman and me, and shouted an order in the same strange dialect which the dancer had used in addressing me in the cavern of the skulls when the robe of parrot feathers had saved my life. the three natives immediately gripped us by the heels and we were dragged off into the bushes. it seemed to me that edith herndon's cry was repeated again and again as the natives dragged me at a jog trot through the undergrowth. there was untold anguish in the cry. it was plain that leith had taken the unfortunate old professor some distance from his daughters so that they could not listen to the conversation, and the scientist's high-pitched protests against our maltreatment had caused the terror-stricken girls to think that leith was ill-using their father. i imagined that the big ruffian had rushed us away from the spot lest the two women would escape from soma and run to the assistance of their father, but i know that we were thankful that the interruption put an end to the football tactics in which the infuriated devil was indulging. but we had escaped from the frying pan to find ourselves in the flames. the three dancers felt that the fates had given them a chance to avenge their friend, and they took full advantage of the opportunity. so that each would have a proper share in the burden, they placed us side by side, strapped our ankles together, and then, passing a rope through the straps, the three laid hold of it and set off through the night, towing us behind with an absolute disregard for our feelings. they entered into the fun of the thing. no norwegian peasant ever towed home a yule log with a greater exhibition of joy than those savages displayed as they hauled us through the thickets. they had a contempt for open places. they chose the most intricate paths they could find, and if a tough liana gripped holman or me around the throat, the fiends found great fun in straining upon the rope till the wire-like creepers gave way. we suffered unbearable torture. hour after hour we were jerked over the ground. our clothes were stripped from our backs, our faces were torn and bloody from the thorns, and our tormented flesh protested through every nerve against the treatment. once holman put a question in a hoarse whisper. "where are they taking us?" he asked. "god knows," i gasped. "it's my fault, verslun." "why?" i groaned. "i missed him! i missed him! i----" his voice died away in a choking sob, and i imagine he swooned away. as we were being towed by the legs, i guessed that holman was suffering excruciating pain from the limb that he had injured by the fall from the maupei tree, and the lapse into unconsciousness came as a blessed relief. to me the rush through the jungle seemed a superlative nightmare. my mind played tricks with me. i thought that the three black forms, leaping along in front, were a trinity of devils who were ordered to torture me for my stupidity in allowing edith herndon and her sister to leave the yacht. every creeper became a whip wielded by a mocking phantom, and i am forced to confess that i have a vivid recollection of crying to heaven for pardon for my criminal negligence. every horror that the happenings of the previous forty-eight hours had germinated within my brain sprang into lusty being as my mind trembled upon the abyss of insanity, and edith herndon was the person that the legion of horrors threatened. i came to my proper senses to find that our towing trinity had called a halt. holman was repeating a question over and over again, and i endeavoured to moisten my dry throat so that i could answer. "where are we?" he groaned. "where are we? are you dead, verslun? open your eyes and take a look around; my peepers are bunged up." i managed to open my eyes, but i could see nothing but the encompassing jungle. for a few minutes i thought that we were alone. then i made out the three figures crouched in front of us upon the grass. their heads were turned away from us, and they were facing the east, where the faint luminous glow of the rising moon was just beginning to appear in the sky. the three were motionless. they were squatting upon their hams, and their attitude seemed uncanny when i compared it with the mad film of action which my mental machinery had recorded during the preceding hours. they had stopped for some purpose, but that purpose i could not determine. "are they there?" asked holman. "yes," i murmured. "what are they doing?" "sitting in a line staring at the hills." the youngster gave a grunt, turned his head till he managed to wipe the mud and blood from his eyes upon my shoulder, then he peered at the silent three. their motionless forms fascinated him. it was hard to connect them with the three bounding devils who had brought us on a gallop that was more painful than the bareback ride which the polish nobleman gave to the intriguing mazeppa. "what do you make of it?" he whispered. "they're resting perhaps." "not them! they look as if they're hatching some new villainy." minute after minute crept by, but the three remained inactive. they took no notice of our whispered conversation. no hindu yogis ever sat meditating with the absolute immovability of the three, and as our wounds stiffened under the cold night air, we became foolishly angry at the wait. if we had to meet death, it would please us to get it over as soon as possible. "if i could have one more fling at them." groaned holman. "by all that's holy, verslun, i feel that i could fight a million if these ropes were off me." he endeavoured to get his face down to the bandages on my wrists, but we had been strapped in such a manner that it was impossible to reach any of the ropes with our teeth, so we lay quiet and reviewed the legion of tormenting thoughts that marched through our minds. the jungle, like the three natives, seemed to be waiting for a happening. the silence was more horrible than the thunder of an earthquake. it seemed to well out from the silent three, till we longed with a great longing for some terrific and prolonged noise to shiver it and send battalions of echoes to chase it into the hills. the moon peered above the black cliffs, and the surroundings became more distinct. we were on the edge of a clearing, and there was something vaguely familiar about the trees that our cramped position allowed us to see. we felt certain that we had passed this place on our journey from the yacht, and each minute that passed strengthened the conviction. "seems to me that i've seen that tree before," muttered holman. "i hold the same impression," i said. "and those rocks," remarked the youngster. "why, we're going back to _the waif!_" the three natives rose together at that moment and gripped the rope. we gave a joint groan of agony as our stiffened limbs were jerked forward, and as we were pulled from the fringe of reed-like grass our exact whereabouts were made known to us. standing up against the moon, the rim of the orb showing just above the massive top, was the great stone table that holman and i had climbed two nights before! [illustration] chapter xvii beneath the centipede the natives moved at a slow walk across the clearing, and for this little indulgence we were exceedingly thankful. there was no grass covering upon the bed of coral rock in the middle of which the singular structure stood, and our bleeding bodies could have hardly stood a swift gallop across the prickly surface. as it was we were immensely glad when the trinity halted in front of the edifice. "say," murmured holman, "do you remember what the professor said about this place the other night when he was speaking about sacrificial altars?" i groaned as an intimation that the subject was not a pleasant one, but holman wanted to make public admission that he had exhibited gross ignorance in ridiculing the professor's assertions. "i thought he was handing it out too strong, verslun," he murmured, "but it strikes me now that he had the right dope about this infernal thing. i believe they're going to settle us." i groaned again. holman's airy manner of discussing our predicament annoyed me. i hated the professor for making the remarks about sacrificial stones when he drew comparisons between the table and aztec altars, because i now thought that the very fear planted within my brain would carry a thought suggestion to the three devils who had us prisoners. under ordinary circumstances i am not deficient in physical courage, but our position in front of the strange monument on the isle of tears left me with the valour of a jack-rabbit. the terror generated by the surroundings bit into my system like an acid. "what i'm wondering at," continued holman, "is about that guy that we saw on the top of the place. how he got away was a mystery." "it was," i replied. i didn't feel disposed to trust myself to make a longer comment at that moment. "well, they're going to start operations," said the youngster. "we're going to the top, verslun." it was plain that we were. two of the natives had shinned up one of the pillars by means of small notches in one corner, and now the other cut the bands that tied us together, promptly attached holman's feet to the rope his comrades lowered, and signalled that all was ready by clapping his hands. the youngster was quickly jerked upward, and in a few minutes i was beside him on the moss-grown sloping surface of the immense stone. the three dancers were evidently impressed with the importance of the work they had in hand. their movements on the stone became more dignified and solemn. they moved around us in a manner that would have provoked laughter at any other time, and we watched eagerly for developments. with much care they placed us side by side on the upper part of the stone, but holman's feet were turned to my head, and as we were placed crosswise upon the inclined surface, my body was a few inches lower than his. that we were to be sacrificed appeared to be a certainty at that moment, but the method by which we were to be sent into eternity puzzled us. not one of the three had a weapon. the surface of the stone was as bare as it was upon the night that we had investigated it, and we began to think that death by starvation and thirst would probably be our fate. but thoughts of such an ending were soon put aside. two of the savages slipped from the stone while the other dropped upon his stomach and hid his face. that something was going to happen we felt certain, but we could not discover the slightest clue that would guide our puzzled wits to a solution. we expected death, but we could not guess in what manner the job was to be performed. "looks as if something is coming, verslun," cried holman. "i was a fool to miss him, old man, but i guess--oh, gee!" the final exclamation was caused by a happening immediately beside us. a section of the moss-grown stone, about eight feet long and eighteen inches in width, started to rise slowly, and when our astonished eyes fell upon it we knew that we had the solution of the strange appearance of the figure upon the table on the night we camped in its shadow. holman had seen this movable slab rise above the top of the table, but it had returned to its groove before we had climbed the tree, and it had fitted so closely into its moss-grown bed that we had been unable to detect a crevice in the moonlight. we had been on the verge of a discovery, but as we recalled the incident, lying there helpless, we were doubtful if it would have saved us from the fate we expected. the note which soma had dropped gave full confirmation to all our suspicions concerning leith, yet we had been unable to hold our own against him. one end of the slab remained stationary after it had risen a few inches from its bed, but the other end, which was nearest us, went up and up, pushed by some screwjack arrangement that lifted it with slow, jerky movements till it was nearly upright. the moonlight fell upon the under surface that was turned toward us, and we understood the manner in which leith's friends had arranged for us to make our exit from this world. the bottom of the stone slab had been carved into a perfect representation of a centipede, and as the slab remained stationary just before it reached the perpendicular, i began to dive into my mental reticule for the scraps of prayers that had been caught and held through a rather checkered career in places where the efficacy of prayer was looked upon with a cold eye. the prostrate savage rose slowly when the movements of the slab had ceased, and very tenderly he rolled holman and me over the bed from which the stone had been lifted. he pushed our bodies against the wooden post that, fitting into a sliding groove on the body of the stone centipede, had lifted the thing upright, and to make certain that we would be in the exact centre of the depression when the stone came back to its proper resting place, he strapped us carefully to the support with pieces of ramie fibre, so that we could not move an inch. with faces turned upward we stared at the carved figure above us, and the insecure tenure we had upon life at that moment was impressed upon our minds by the extreme caution which the officiating wizard exercised in keeping his own body clear of the slab lest his brethren, who were evidently operating the clumsy mechanism from some place nearby, should let the stone centipede return to his home without giving him proper warning. at last he finished the business to his satisfaction and stepped backward. my imagination made the thing above me tremble as i looked at it with eyes of fear. the part of my body that spanned the depression became numb, and i breathed with difficulty. holman broke the silence. "good-bye, verslun," he said cheerfully. "it's mighty tough to go out like this, but it's the fortune of war." i endeavoured to answer him, but the words, as if afraid of the horror that loomed above me, refused to come out of my throat. the fiendish manner in which we were to be killed unmanned me. the slab paralyzed thought, and it seemed to me that only the inmost kernel of my being, a very pin-point of the refined essence of life, was throbbing within my body. the officiating wizard stepped around us for a final survey. he glanced keenly at the position of our bodies, and, evidently satisfied that the centipede had every opportunity to make a good job, he flung himself down upon his face and started to murmur softly in the strange dialect which leith had spoken when addressing the three earlier in the night, and which the dancer had used in the cavern of skulls. i remember that i tried during those few minutes to catch a word or two of the queer tongue, and curiously enough, in that moment of extreme peril, i endeavoured to connect it with some of the dialects i had heard during my long stay in the islands. the soft muttering seemed to be a thread connecting us with life itself, and i dreaded the moment it would cease. i do not know how long the chant continued. it rose and fell, a soft rhythmic murmur, and i prayed that it would never end. my ears sucked it in as if it was a life line to which my soul was clinging, and i dimly understood my eagerness to catch the sounds. my ability to do so seemed to be wanted as proof to convince my half-paralyzed body that i was still alive. the low chant ended with a little throaty cry, and i shut my eyes tight to save myself the final moment of agony which the falling of the stone would bring. for an instant there was absolute silence, then some one gripped me by the legs and pulled madly. the ramie fibre held my body to the supporting post of the centipede, and i heard holman give a muttered order. a knife sawed the cords, a pair of hands gripped my heels and flung me forward, and as i fell clear of the groove the stone horror crashed back into its bed with a jolt that shook the huge table! i opened my eyes to see kaipi looking at the face of the dancer he had stabbed in the back as the brute was muttering his prayer! "oh hell!" said the fijian. "me thought him soma. me made mistake! me going kill soma, he kill toni, toni all same my brother, work long time with me at suva!" "hurry up and cut these ropes," cried holman. "there are two more of those devils and they'll be back before we get the cramp out of our muscles." kaipi sprang to obey, but when our bonds were cut away, we found that we could not get to our feet. legs and arms were completely numbed, and the many abrasions that we had come by during the towing process to which we had been subjected made kaipi's efforts to restore circulation by rubbing a species of torture that would surely have earned the commendation of torquemada if it had been brought under his notice. "narrow squeak, verslun," remarked holman, as he endeavoured to get to his knees. "i wonder where those two other devils went to work the machinery." "they must be close," i whispered. "drag us over to the edge, kaipi. they'll surely come up to see how the job was done or to see what is delaying their pal." kaipi helped us over to the edge of the table, and while he was doing so he related briefly how he came to be on hand at the opportune moment. our little expedition to the stone table had passed the fijian soon after the trinity had taken us in tow, and kaipi's eyes had mistaken the biggest of the three natives for soma. revenge for toni's death being the one motive that inspired him, he had followed the procession, watched from the bushes till the other two dancers had left soma's double with us on the top of the table, and had then climbed quietly up and knifed the officiating wizard while that person was exhorting the stone centipede to make a good job of holman and me. the matter of our rescue had been an afterthought. strictly speaking, he deserved no great amount of praise for dragging us out of danger, as he frankly admitted that he was waiting for a good chance to attack the person who resembled soma, without having any particular worry whether the stone slab would descend before the opportunity arrived. "never mind, kaipi," said holman, peering cautiously over the edge of the table, "i'm satisfied that you were handy at the moment without considering whether you came to help us or for some other purpose." "toni all the same brother to me," muttered the fijian, dimly understanding the meaning of the remark; "me kill soma pretty damn soon." "quite so," murmured holman. "we'll give our consent to that operation, but keep quiet for the present till our two friends come back to see how neatly the old centipede fixed us." we remained silent, but not inactive. as we waited for the missing pair we rubbed our limbs carefully, and at the end of ten minutes we began to feel alive. our revolvers had been lost from our pockets during the mad rush through the night--leith had been too intent on kicking us to order his guard to search us for arms--and now we had nothing but our bare hands with which to do combat with a pair of dancers. but we thought we could do a lot with bare hands when we glanced at the spot where the stone centipede had crashed back to its bed, a vision of that devilish carving standing above one in the moonlight was enough to stimulate a person to herculean tasks when he understood that failure would bring him again under its ghastly shadow. for about twenty minutes we waited patiently. kaipi had asserted that the two savages had slipped into the jungle growth after they had left the table, and it was evident that they had gone to some underground passage that connected with one of the pillars of the altar, through which the crude mechanism for lifting the stone slab had been operated. with one eye always to the dramatic, the wizards of the long ago had built the altar so that the common worshippers surrounding the place on days when the centipede was called upon to mash some unfortunate victim could not see how the slab was lifted, and would thus put the uplifting of the thing down to supernatural agency. it was the tribal houdin who laid the foundation of many a strange belief amongst savage races. "must be waiting for him to come to them," said holman. "we'll give them a few minutes longer." it was kaipi's sharp eyes that made the discovery. the pair came cautiously out of the bushes immediately underneath the tree which holman and i had climbed to obtain a view of the surface of the table two nights before, and they crossed the clearing with hesitating steps. they evidently expected the officiating wizard to announce in sporting phraseology that the centipede had won the engagement with one swift blow to the body, and when no news was forthcoming they were puzzled. they confabbed in the centre of the clearing, and then hailed the table in the strange tongue. receiving no answer, they again debated with much vigour, and, finally taking their courage in their hands, they came forward with quickened steps. we crept close to the edge, careful not to peer over while the pair were climbing up. as far as i was aware we had no plans made for their reception. holman and i had no weapons, neither had the two dancers; kaipi had the ugly short-bladed knife with which he had dispatched soma's double. the puffing of the climbing pair came to us. they came near and nearer. a black arm came up over the edge of the table and clawed at the moss-grown stone, but while holman and i reached forward with the intention of gripping the climber by the throat, kaipi upset our plans by driving the blade of the knife into the back of the huge paw that was endeavouring to get a grip! a tremendous howl of pain came from the owner of the hand, the pinioned member was torn from beneath the blade, and as we pushed our heads over the edge, the top climber fell backward, swept his companion from the pillar, and the pair struck the coral rock beneath the table with a thud that was suggestive of broken bones. the native with the skewered hand picked himself up and dashed toward the trees, but the other remained at the foot of the pillar, and his position led us to believe that his neck had been broken by the fall. "my knife!" cried kaipi. "he knocked my knife down!" the fijian swung himself over the edge, and with monkey-like agility slipped down the pillar. he shouted up to us that he thought that the man on the ground was dead, but having found his precious knife, he proceeded to set all doubts upon the matter at rest. "soma better dodge that little fire eater," muttered holman. "i thought him a coward last night, but it looks as if he's a fighter when once he gets started." as we were unable to slip down the stone pillar in the same manner as the natives, we found the piece of rope by which the three dancers had hauled us up to the top, and making it secure upon a stone projection we lowered ourselves to the ground. "now," said holman, "we must make a new start, and if we get beat in this round we deserve all that the big fiend who has brought all this trouble about can do to us. kaipi, you're a friend of mine for all time. shake hands." the grinning fijian shook hands with both of us, and we moved toward the trees, heading in the direction of the spot where leith had kicked us so vigorously a few hours before. [illustration] chapter xviii barbara's messenger we had a healthy respect for the deviltry of leith and his friends as we turned our backs upon the lonely throne of the centipede, but the cry of "father" which edith herndon had uttered was still ringing in our ears, and we were anxious to get within hitting distance of the big, treacherous ruffian. a mental review of the engagements made us feel rather light-hearted as we pushed through the tangle. if there were only six native dancers upon the island at the opening of the conflict in the cavern of skulls, we had reduced that number to one, while the bullet in leith's shoulder would depreciate his fighting ability for some time. outside the carriers, who, as far as we knew, were neutral in the matter, we had as opponents, leith, one eye, soma, and the dancer whose hand had been punctured by kaipi, and the knowledge that we were more evenly matched brought us some consolation. but the fact that edith and barbara herndon were in the power of the scoundrel brought thoughts that cast a damper upon the little scrap of joy we derived from reckoning up the casualties of the enemy. the passion which leith displayed after receiving holman's bullet made us run forward like madmen each time we recalled the diabolical frenzy that he exhibited. we could not think of a good plan to circumvent the brute. the jungle hampered and maddened us, and although we knew that we had gone about our work in a blundering fashion, the circumstances were such that we could not improve our strategy in the future. we plunged on till nearly midnight, then holman called a halt. "we must sleep," he said. "one can watch while the other two get some rest." kaipi, who declared that he was never less inclined for slumber, agreed to take first watch, and holman and i flung ourselves down upon the grass. we had had no slumber on the previous night, and the incidents in which we had taken part had left us exhausted. it was daybreak before kaipi awakened us, and the face of the fijian informed us that something had alarmed him. he was stretched full length on the ground, listening as only a native can listen, and we waited for his report. we had much respect for kaipi's hearing after checking the signals he made concerning the approaching "tivo" dancer on the previous afternoon. "what is it?" asked holman. "some one go by, much hurry," murmured the fijian. we crouched in the bushes and listened. it was hardly likely that leith had changed his route, and the only person that we knew to be in our neighbourhood was the dancer. "if we could get hold of him we might use the third degree on him to guide us to the spot that leith is making for," said holman. "we'll be outgeneralled completely if he gets into those caverns on the hills. if he has provisions he can snap his fingers at a regiment." i agreed with him on that point. the valley inside the basalt cliffs, and which, as far as we could judge, could only be entered by the slippery pathway in the vermilion pit, was about the finest natural hiding place in the world. without taking the caves into consideration, the luxurious vegetation in the cup between the hills made the finding of a person a matter of extreme luck. it was a marvellous maze that nature seemed to have constructed especially for the diabolical work in which leith was engaged. kaipi's ear was still to the ground, and the anxious look upon his face convinced us that some one was close. "coming back again," breathed the islander. "one man, walk slow." our own ears acquainted us of the approach at that moment. the sound of crackling twigs was quite close, and we waited breathlessly, eying the green curtain through which we expected the unknown to thrust himself. a black head bobbed through the leaves, and holman planted a fist between the newcomer's eyes before the head could be withdrawn. the morning visitor dropped to the ground, and the three of us promptly fell upon him, the bloodthirsty kaipi having to be restrained by main force from giving another exhibition of neat knifework. "who is it?" asked holman. "get back, kaipi, and let me see." we dragged the panting prisoner into the light, but instead of the escaped dancer, we found that we had trapped one of the five carriers, a big raretongan named maru, who was possessed of enormous strength. holman's punch had been no light one, and it was a few seconds before the mists had cleared from the raretongan's brain; then his big brown eyes lit up with a smile of gladness, and he nodded to holman. "me want you," he said. "quite so," muttered holman, "but i got you first." maru smiled the smile of the man who has a card up his sleeve, and he fumbled in the folds of his sulu till he found what he wanted. with a dramatic flourish he drew from the cloth a small emerald ring that belonged to barbara herndon, and he smiled childishly as he saw the look of astonishment upon holman's face as he snatched the trinket. "why--who--how the devil did you get this?" he asked. "little missee give me," replied maru, still convulsed with the humour which his childish mind found in the situation. "she tell me come alonga you." holman poured out a torrent of questions which the smiling messenger endeavoured to answer to the best of his ability. in pigeon english he informed us that he had deserted leith's camp about midnight; that the big ruffian had turned abruptly from the direction he was moving in at the time we caught up with him, and that holman's bullet had caused him serious inconvenience. the two girls and the professor were in charge of soma and the one-eyed white man, who, we now learned, was deaf and dumb. it was while one eye was on guard that barbara herndon had been able to bribe the raretongan to throw the strength of his muscles upon our side of the argument. holman, with lover-like longing for anything owned by the lady of his choice, attempted to put the emerald ring in his pocket, but maru objected strongly. the smile fled from his face, and his broken english nearly strangled him in his efforts to pour out enough of it to acquaint holman of the nature of the agreement which he had entered into with barbara herndon. "me only show you ring, that's all!" he cried. "you look, know little missee send me, ring mine all time. you give back." "you had better give it back to him," i cautioned. "he has got the idea into his head, and it will take a lot of arguing to convince him that miss barbara didn't give it to him to keep." "but she didn't!" cried holman. "why would she give him a ring? she just gave him a loan of it to let him see that she had sent him to us." "my ring all time," protested maru. "that my pay fight mighty good for you." "give it up to him," i advised. "he's only an overgrown child, and he has set his mind on it." "but, verslun, i know she wouldn't do that!" protested the lover. "barbara sent me this as----" "oh, i know," i cried, "but we want fighters now, and maru is a pretty athletic person." "me damn good fighter!" cried the raretongan. "me plentee good fighter if me get ring." holman gave up the trinket with a snort of disgust, and a few minutes afterward, when we were tramping along, i made it my business to drop back beside maru and advise him to keep the ring out of the youngster's sight till we had rescued miss barbara. if the native had displayed his reward it was highly probable that the lovesick holman, with nerves on the raw edge from want of sleep and worry, would have pounced upon the mighty maru and endeavoured to obtain possession of what he fondly thought was a token of affection from his beloved. but the arrival of the messenger was worth more than the emerald ring to us at that moment. he had more woodcraft than kaipi, who had spent most of his time upon the ocean, and his information regarding the direction in which leith was now heading saved us many weary hours of marching. yams and guavas, with wild passion fruit, made a breakfast and dinner as we clawed our way in pursuit. at midday we judged that we were hot upon the trail, unless leith had changed his course, but the black cliffs were close to us at that moment, and the recollections of the gloomy caverns made us silent as we pushed through the matted jungle. we could see no trace of the path which leith would be compelled to cut to enable the two girls to get through, and we heard no sounds. a lone parrakeet startled us with its harsh cry as it rose from a maupei tree, and the bird even seemed to recognize that it had committed a breach in sending its unmusical cry out upon the awful quiet of the place. kaipi climbed a tall tree in the vain hope of catching sight of leith's party as it crossed the small cleared spaces in the middle of the impenetrable growth, but nothing except the green plain of bushy tops and parasitical creepers was visible. as we waited beneath the tree the "ticking" of a wood bug sounded like hammer blows in the tremendous quietude, while the bursting of a pod reminded one of the beginning of a fourth of july celebration. we had lost all trace of leith, and now, immediately in front, rose the cliffs, and we saw a menace on their dark, forbidding front. the base of the hills presented the same nearly perpendicular formation that we had met when endeavouring to reach the long gallery, and we held a council to decide on what would be the best course to pursue. maru was confident that leith was heading for this particular point at the moment that barbara's bribe caused the raretongan to desert, and it was reasonable to think that the ruffian had retired to some hiding place to nurse his wound and decide upon the fate of the professor and his two daughters. from the scraps of conversation which we had overheard before holman interrupted the argument between leith and the scientist, we thought it probable that the old man would visit the centipede upon the big table if he did not sign the papers that leith required, while we shuddered at the probable fate of the two girls unless providence directed us as to the manner in which we could effect a rescue. "we must divide," said holman. "i'll take kaipi and go north, you take maru and go in the opposite direction. if you find the trail, camp near it and send maru on the run back to us. i'll do the same if i strike the spoor of the big devil." it was about two o'clock, as nearly as we could judge, when we separated. we agreed to keep as close as possible to the rocky wall so that a messenger from one would have less difficulty in locating the other, and maru and i found, before we had gone a hundred yards, that the nearer we could get to the cliff the quicker we could get along. the lianas found it difficult to get a grip upon the rocks, and we could worm our way without much trouble. we had travelled about three quarters of a mile when the native dropped upon his knees and i immediately followed his example. the ordinary polynesian is not to be compared with the australian black fellow or the american indian in his knowledge of the forest, but maru was an exception. his sight and hearing were abnormally keen, and he examined the grass carefully. "one man go by here pretty short time ago," he whispered. "native?" i asked. "no, him wear shoes." the raretongan crawled forward on his knees, his face close to the grass. the tracks upon the soft grass showed that the person was moving in the direction we were going, and for about twenty yards we followed cautiously. leith, the one-eyed white man, and the professor were the only three men on the isle of tears, outside holman and myself, who would be wearing shoes. it was hard to think that the professor or leith would be alone at that moment, so i concluded, as we crawled along in the shadow of the cliff, that the tracks were made by one eye. maru suddenly sprang to his feet and stood listening. i listened too. into the awful silence came a tremendous rumbling that increased each second till i pictured it as a cancer of noise growing with appalling rapidity within the encompassing stillness. "what is it?" i gasped. "why it's----" i understood at that moment, and i sprang toward the jungle, but the big hand of the raretongan gripped my shoulder and dragged me close to the cliff beneath an overhanging ledge. "stay here!" he yelled, raising his voice above the tumult that seemed to be coming out of the heavens. "keep close much!" the noise was deafening. the black cliff seemed to rock behind us, and as maru pulled me down on my knees five hundred tons of rock shot from the heights and flattened ten square yards of the packed shrubs immediately in front of us! "now!" screamed maru, as the dust swept in under the ledge and nearly choked us; "we get away quick, plenty dust, they can't see!" the dirt and small rocks had rolled back upon us till we stood ankle deep, but the native's advice was good. hugging the wall of the cliff, we ran back on our tracks till we had passed the area devastated by the landslide; then we sprang into the bushes and peered up at the cliff. high above the cloud of dust that was still rising from the ground, and leaning forward so that he could view the extent of the avalanche, was the one-eyed white man! "maru," i whispered, "go back and get holman. i'll wait here till you come." [illustration] chapter xix leith scores the one-eyed man stood for a long time contemplating his handiwork. from his point of observation he watched the pile of rocks and the surrounding bushes, and the absence of movement convinced him that the job had been well done. he commenced to make facial contortions as an outlet for the mirth he was generating inside, and at intervals he managed to produce a peculiar noise that reminded one of the bubbling of a camel. i began to think that one eye, besides being deaf and dumb, was suffering from a shortage of gray matter inside his ugly-shaped head. he strutted up and down, and narrowly escaped toppling over the ledge through attempting a cake dance as a grand finale to the insane actions prompted by the successful manner in which he had engineered the landslide. the afternoon had lengthened out before maru returned with holman and kaipi, and we hurriedly considered the best course to pursue. one eye had been with leith when maru deserted, so it was obvious that we were not far from the ruffian's hiding place. "if we could catch this lunatic on the cliff?" muttered holman. "gee! we could tickle him with kaipi's old knife blade till he ran us right into the haunt." "he's deaf," i said; "there's a good chance of roping him in if we could scale the cliff." "me climb!" said maru. "him not hear. me climb all alonga track, drop down, breakem him neck." "no, don't break his neck!" growled holman. "we want him as a guide. do you understand? he knows where leith is hiding, and if we could get hold of him it would be clear sailing." maru borrowed kaipi's knife, nodded confidently as we adjured him to use caution, and then slipped back along the track so that he could climb to the level of the one-eyed person's perch before attempting to creep upon him. we sat down to await developments. the witless one was evidently a lookout, and it was advisable to wait and see the success of maru's expedition before we attempted to move. it was a long wait. maru didn't intend to take any chances by closing in hurriedly, and it was nearly two hours after his departure before we saw his head rise above a boulder high up over the spot where one eye was keeping his vigil. it was evidently not the first time that the native had stalked a human being, and his fine tactics, which should have called forth praise, severely tried the small amount of patience that we possessed. holman cursed softly beneath his breath as maru sat for ten minutes at a time studying the route before attempting to move from a sheltering rock, and my own nails burrowed into the palms of my hands as i watched. the raretongan was a genius in his own particular line, and i think he took more than ordinary precautions so that his success would prove to holman that barbara herndon had not overpaid him when she presented him with the emerald ring as a reward for his desertion from leith. maru had no idea of the sentimental view of the matter which the youngster took; and he thought that holman's objections against the bargain were caused by the thought that no services could be rendered that would be half as valuable as the trinket. the unsentimental savage could not imagine that the unstrung lover wanted the ring as a keepsake of the girl who had won his heart on board _the waif_. "caesar's ghost! why doesn't he hurry?" cried holman. "that madman looks as if he's going to change his camping ground!" it looked as if the witless one was really going to move, and maru had still some fifty yards to cover before he would be directly above the other's head. our nerves were in such a state that we felt inclined to scream out to the patient stalker. if we could grab the scout we could probably induce him by gentle persuasion to act as guide, but if he escaped us, we pictured ourselves stumbling over precipices and through dark caverns with the same lack of results as had marked our trip to the place of skulls. maru was decreasing the distance by inches. slowly, very slowly, with all the serpentlike cunning of the savage, he advanced till he was almost above the spot where the other stood taking a survey of the jungle. but it was a farewell glance for one eye. if leith had placed him there to keep watch till he had reached a safe position, the watcher evidently considered that the time was up. he hopped to another ledge with the agility of a goat, and holman groaned. maru noticed the retreat, and quickened his movements. dropping cautiously from ledge to ledge he crept upon the other with the swiftness of a leopard creeping upon its prey. one eye's deafness left him at the mercy of the shadow in his rear. swiftly taking cover whenever the white man's head moved to the right or the left, the native decreased the distance, and we rose to our knees. then maru sprang. his muscular right arm went round the neck of the white, and we were rushing toward the cliff without waiting to see the outcome of the struggle. the raretongan's strength was immense, and we knew that the other could not break the strangle hold that had been put upon him. we were more afraid that one eye would be choked into insensibility before we reached the post. the big native was sitting astride his captive when we gained the ledge, and the prisoner was blinking his one good eye as he stared up at him. we dropped down beside him and took a look at the sun-tanned face. he exhibited no fear, and the weak, watery eye showed no glint of intelligence. it was plain that his brain was slightly deranged. holman jerked him into a sitting position, and with signs and gestures we endeavoured to explain what we wanted him to do. neither of us understood the deaf and dumb alphabet, but the alphabet was hardly necessary. with much pantomimic action we described leith, the professor, and the two girls, and kaipi enjoyed himself immensely by waving his knife in front of one eye's face to signify the fate that awaited him if he did not immediately guide us to the spot. the fijian was so proud of the blade that he could hardly be prevented from burying an inch of the steel in the prisoner's body. one eye, although obviously half-witted, saw that kaipi was only looking for an excuse to send him to a more undesirable place than the isle of tears, and he made eager signs that he would act as our guide. holman relieved him of the revolver and cartridges he had in his pockets, strapped his arms behind him, and with maru's hand clutching the collar of his coat, we signalled to him to step forward and step lively if he wished to delay his journey to the other world till his soul was in a better condition. the sun was close to the high ridges in the west, and we wished to close with leith before nightfall. one eye taxed our climbing powers in the next ten minutes. with the agility of a chamois he scurried along the narrow ledges, and several times maru was forced to check his speed so that we could keep pace with him. holman's face showed the joy he felt at receiving another opportunity to retrieve the blunders we had made in our two previous attacks. now we had reduced the big villain's fighting bodyguard to two persons, soma and the dancer, and if he had not impressed the carriers, we outnumbered him. but leith was on his own ground, and we had already discovered that the isle of tears made an ideal retreat for an outlaw. the nearly impassable jungle, surrounded by the cliffs that were tunnelled with tremendous caverns, made a hiding place in which a few men could defy an army. one eye moved along the side of the cliff for about five hundred yards, then turned into a small cañon hardly thirty feet wide, the bottom of which was about twenty yards above the valley from which we had climbed. our intuition told us that we were near the retreat, and we halted the hurrying guide, and in the shelter of a boulder explained to him with more signs and gestures that we wished to proceed with extreme caution. the end of the gulch that was not more than a stone's throw from the face of the cliff was already dark with the shadows of the hills, and as we suspected that the opening to leith's refuge was close, we wished to make no unnecessary noise in approaching it. using the scattered rocks as covering, we advanced slowly, but before we reached the end the sun had disappeared, and the absence of twilight, noticeable in that latitude, compelled us to crawl along in a darkness that made it impossible to discern any object that was more than three feet distant. holman was on one side of one eye while maru guarded him on the other side, and as the bottom of the gorge made it impossible for more than three to move abreast, kaipi and i crawled in the rear. we were at one eye's mercy at that moment, but the idiot appeared to be much impressed by the manner in which we had pictured the sure and sudden fate that would fall upon him if we suspected him of treachery. the mystery of the place gripped us as we went forward. high above us the stars looked as if they were floating sequins in a sea of dark blue. but the stars were blotted out suddenly, and i drew holman's attention to the fact. the youngster got to his feet and groped around in the gloom, while we halted till he made an investigation. it was impossible to see the face of the half-witted guide to gain any information from his gestures. holman stooped and whispered his finding to us. "we're in a covered passageway," he murmured. "i can just touch the roof by standing on tiptoe. as we're in the place we might as well walk instead of crawling; we'll get to the end quicker." maru dragged one eye to his feet, and we pushed on. the air of the place was much sweeter than the atmosphere of the cavern of skulls. the floor, instead of being covered with thick dust as we had found it in the former place, was one of clean, smooth rock, and the walls were perfectly dry. i had gripped one eye's left arm while holman was making the examination of the passage, and we had not proceeded more than twenty yards when he intimated that he wished to turn to the right. we allowed him to do so, and for fully twenty minutes he followed a zigzag course that left us completely nonplussed as to the way we had come. we could hardly count the number of the turnings. first to the right, then to the left, then back again toward the mouth of the place, he trotted forward with nothing to guide him, yet when we checked him at certain corners to find out if there was an angle in the path, we found that he was right in every instance. "he's counting the number of paces he takes between the turnings," muttered holman. "no man, unless he had the eyes of a cat, could find his way along this passage. keep a grip on him or we'll never see daylight again." we guessed that we had walked for over half a mile when the guide stopped abruptly. in the dark we endeavoured to find out what had pulled him up short, but we tried in vain. a prick from kaipi's knife blade would not make him budge an inch, and we clustered together and racked our brains to find the solution. "p'raps we're up against something," whispered holman, "feel if there's anything in front, verslun." i walked forward a pace and groped in the blackness. my fingers touched solid rock. it hemmed us in on all sides. one eye had walked us to the end of the passage, and we had come up against a blind wall. i whispered the news to holman, and he swore softly. maru's fingers tightened on the collar of the prisoner till his breath came in short gasps. kaipi moved around to the side of the prisoner, but i pushed him roughly back. the fijian's desire to use his knife on all occasions was somewhat irritating. "what'll we do?" asked holman. "get back," i answered. "he's either fooled us or he's lost his way." holman gripped one eye by the neck and shook him roughly. the youngster's temper was up, and it looked as if we had wasted the hours we had spent in capturing the idiot alive, and the time lost in following behind him through the cañon and the crooked passage. and time was precious when we thought of the agony which edith and barbara herndon were suffering. in his temper holman forgot that the prisoner was deaf, and he shouted a question at him. "what the devil is wrong?" he screamed. "damn you, will--" maru interrupted with a cry of astonishment. the wall at the end of the passage appeared to slide away, and, standing directly in front of us, his big frame outlined against a fire of brushwood that blazed behind him, was leith! holman gave a yell of rage and sprang forward, and leith turned and sped into the gloom. in his astonishment at finding himself confronted by the enemy when the stone door had rolled aside, holman had forgotten that he had a revolver in his possession, and leith had passed the brushwood fire before i yelled out to the youngster to shoot. holman fired immediately, and leith staggered. for a moment we thought that he was down, but he picked himself up and ran on. i snatched a blazing pine limb from the fire as i rushed by, and with the light flickering upon the walls of the place, we sped madly after the flying figure that was barely discernible when the blazing branch flung a splinter of light into the gloom. holman emptied the revolver, but the pounding of leith's feet that came back to us proved that he was still running. maru and kaipi were hallooing far behind, but holman and i ran side by side, our minds unable to think of anything but the capture of the human tiger in front. we were gaining on him. we could hear his laboured breathing, and i remembered with a thrill of satisfaction the wound that he had received the night before. it was only a question of time when we would have our fingers on his throat. "keep it up!" gasped holman. "we've got him, verslun! we've got him!" it looked like it. the red glow from the torch enabled us to catch an occasional glimpse of shoes moving up and down at such a rate that the limbs to which they were attached always remained outside the area that was faintly illuminated. the momentary view of the footgear, together with the maddening _plop plop_ it made upon the rock, raised an insane idea within my brain that we were chasing a pair of bewitched shoes that were enticing us into the very heart of the mountain. the scanty diet and the happenings of the two preceding days had left me light-headed. the race was unreal. i had an idea that the shoes would run on forever, and that every yard they covered took me farther away from edith herndon. the flame of the pine branch went out, and we were left in utter darkness. but the sound of the flying feet still came back to us. at times we were so near that holman thrust out his hands as he ran, and cursed softly as the sounds seemed to draw away from him. "i'll have you yet!" he cried. "i'll choke you, you devil!" a chuckle came out of the darkness and at that instant i made a discovery. leith was not alone. keeping time with the clatter of the shoes was a softer tattoo that told me that a barefooted runner was racing beside the man we were pursuing. holman made the discovery at the same moment. "soma," he breathed, and he ran faster. from some place that seemed to be leagues in the rear came the shouts of maru and kaipi, but their yells died away, and we were convinced that they had given up the chase. the _plop plop_ of the shoes ceased suddenly, and we slackened speed. our brains suggested that leith had stopped abruptly on the chance of doubling back before we could pull up, and a sweat of terror broke out upon us. if he doubled successfully he would reach the stone door through which we had got the first glimpse of him. "he's turned!" cried holman. "we'll get him, verslun! after the--o god! _look out_!" holman's warning came too late. the rocky floor over which we had been running, dropped away from us. i pitched forward after the youngster into a gulf of darkness, landed on my shoulder upon a mass of volcanic ash, and clutching vainly at the stuff, i rolled at tremendous speed down into the bowels of the earth. from far above us came the sounds of uncontrolled merriment--the high-pitched shrieks of a native rising above the deep bass laughter of leith. [illustration] chapter xx the black kindergarten i thought we were a thousand years rolling down that slope of smothering ash. it was a quicksand that melted beneath us. we drove our arms into it, but the stuff slipped away like fine wood ash, and we went on and on. i knew holman was in front of me. occasionally a curse directed at leith managed to slip out when his mouth was not filled with the smothering dust. once i shouted at him, and he answered the cry with a groan that told me how the happening had affected him. the arch ruffian had checkmated us for the third time inside three days. we struck the bottom at last, and, like moles, we clawed our way out of the pile of soft, feathery stuff that came streaming down upon us like a river, and for some minutes we were busy wiping the fluffy ash from mouth and eyes and ears. it clung to us like down, and with each breath we drew it into our lungs till we coughed and sneezed from the irritation it produced. struggling forward, knee-deep in the fine, dry powder, we reached a spot that was practically clear, and for five minutes we were busy endeavouring to relieve our tortured lungs. "how far did we roll?" asked holman. "about half a mile," i replied. "but straight, verslun! what do you think?" "over a hundred yards; i'm certain of that." "well, i'm going to climb back." "you can't do it!" i gasped. "that stuff is like quicksand." "all the same i'm going to make a try." we stumbled back to the gigantic ash pile, and shoulder to shoulder we made a rush at the immense mountain down which we had rolled. we couldn't see it, but we felt it rise around us like a flood as our legs sank deeper. it came up to our waists--to our armpits, choking and smothering us. coming down we had rolled lightly over its surface, now our legs bored into it like rods, and we struggled vainly to move. the pile was like a high snowdrift into which we sank deeper and deeper the more we struggled, and, worn out with our efforts, we fought our way clear of the smothering ash and made an attempt to review the situation. "he's beat us," groaned holman. "he just trotted ahead of us till he had us on the verge of the thing, and then he side-stepped. o god! what asses we have been!" "we did our best," i said. "our best?" repeated holman. "and the man who tells you that he did his best as an excuse for failure should be shot, verslun." "we couldn't tell that this infernal trench was in front," i grumbled. "then we shouldn't have chased him like a brace of madmen. i wonder if maru and kaipi came near it?" "we might call out, perhaps they'd hear." holman yelled the names of the two natives into the gloom above us, but his yells only started a million echoes rolling through the tremendous fissure in which we were prisoners. "they turned back," said holman. "they had sense enough to stay with one eye; we hadn't." it was no use arguing with the youngster. he denounced our stupidity till his tongue was too dry to utter the charges his half-crazed brain made against us. to divert his thoughts i proposed that we make an attempt to explore the place, and without making any choice regarding direction we moved into the inky darkness. "we'll take it in turns to lead," said holman gruffly. "then if one of us topples over a precipice the other has a chance to save himself. i'll take first try at it, and if i find that i have pushed my foot into a hole i'll yell out a warning." i agreed, and we moved forward slowly. the chances of ever finding our way out of that place seemed small at that moment. leith had put us in a spot where we would not be likely to trouble him for some time, and with bitterness in our hearts we staggered along in the dark, alternately damning the treachery of the ruffian and our own stupidity. we had tried to exercise caution, but when we reviewed our actions, it seemed, as holman had remarked, that we had used the judgment of children. "why didn't we wait at the door of that place till the brute came out?" he asked. i had no answer to give to the question, and after an interval of silence he fired others at me. "why did you let go of one eye? why didn't we examine the cavern near the fire before chasing him? the girls might have been somewhere near the fire! do you think they were?" "i don't think so," i answered, trying to soothe him. "i think leith was the only person at the fire. he picked soma up just before we reached the gulf." "but where are they? where has the devil put them?" "god alone knows!" i cried. "here, it's my turn to take the lead." in silence we went stumbling on into the appalling blackness. we could not see the dim outlines of each other when we stood only a few inches apart. the darkness of the cavern of skulls had been relieved by the silver skewers of moonlight, but in the night that rolled around us there was not a single gleam of light. we had no matches. everything that was in our pockets had been jolted out during the mad jaunt to the stone table, and now the revolver and cartridges which we had taken from one eye had been lost by holman during the slide down the mountain of volcanic ash that brought us to the bottom of the underground prison. we plodded on for about an hour, then stopped simultaneously. at first i thought that the horror of the situation had affected my brain, but the fact that holman had stopped abruptly at the same moment as i did choked back the cold fear that had rushed upon me. i was not insane! holman was listening too! i seemed to feel that the tiny thread of sound which had set my pulses beating madly had also keyed him up to the highest tension. after a minute of intense silence he put a question. "did you hear anything?" "did you?" i stammered. "are we mad, verslun?" he asked hoarsely. "i thought--" he stopped and moved close to me. i heard his quick breathing as he groped to find me. "verslun, did you hear?" he whispered, gripping my arm. "i heard her speak." "i thought i did," i breathed. "perhaps--perhaps it was an echo." for a few minutes we stood, our ears searching for the sound that had disturbed us. we seemed afraid to call out--afraid to quench the little spark of hope which had suddenly flared up in the despair that filled our breasts. we knew that our ears had lied, and we tried to lengthen the thrill by remaining perfectly silent. the sound came again, and holman sent a wild cry into the night that hemmed us in. we were not insane! the spark of hope blazed as we rushed headlong forward. the silvery voice of barbara herndon had come to us again through the terrible gloom! [illustration] chapter xxi together again it is impossible to set down any statement that will enable the reader to form a mental picture of the meeting which took place in that spot of eternal night. hands groped for hands in the darkness, and sobs and cries and words of comfort went out into the silence. edith and barbara herndon wept, the professor shrieked out denunciations of leith, and holman and i were nearly choked by the lumps that rose in our throats. explanations came in broken sentences. the professor's anger prevented him from giving the story in detail, and the girls were not in a condition to give a lucid account of their sufferings since the night we had left them to investigate the light in the hills. we gathered from the hysterical utterances, however, that leith had rushed them to the hills on hearing from the escaped dancer that we had dodged the fate he intended for us when he had dispatched us to the table of the centipede. the reduction in his bodyguard caused him to make immediately for the secret retreat, and as he considered it inadvisable to press his argument with the professor and edith at that moment, he had lowered his three prisoners into the devil chamber into which we had accidentally fallen. "this is the place you mentioned to me the night you left the camp," said the professor. "we mentioned?" repeated holman in amazement. "we didn't know the place existed till we rolled into it!" "but you read it out of the note that soma dropped," cried the scientist. "don't you remember where he threatened to put the five babies?" "the black kindergarten!" i stammered. "the black kindergarten," said the old man. "that is what the inhuman brute called the place when he lowered us into it. we are to stay here till i sign papers that will give him possession of my property, and till--till edith consents to marry him!" he flung the words out into the stillness, and for a few minutes no one spoke. the horror of the situation had the same effect upon me as a blow from a sandbag. three days before, we were in possession of leith's letter to the one-eyed man, in which he had remarked that we would be occupants of the place of eternal night, and yet we had not been able to avert the fate which the brute had in store for us in case the professor and edith herndon refused to consider his villainous proposals. the professor's money and the girl's hand! the words made me physically sick, and i sat down upon the floor of the place till the dizziness had passed from my brain. "and food?" holman put the question, but the words seemed to come to me from a great distance. "he told us he would lower it to us once a day till we--till we came to our senses," said edith herndon quietly. "we received our first supply some hours ago." she tried to speak bravely, but the little catch in her voice belied the courageous front which she endeavoured to assume under cover of the darkness. barbara was silent, except for an occasional sob which she was unable to stifle, while the professor poured forth his story of leith's deception when he first met him in sydney, and where the big scoundrel had poured into the ears of the laurel-hungry scientist the tales of skulls and ruins which he would find upon the isle of tears. the skulls and ruins were there, but it looked as if we would add our own skeletons to the crumbling bones of the long-dead polynesians, the peculiarities of whose whitened brain cases were to supply the subject matter of the learned treatise that was to bring fame to the archaeologist. it was an indescribably mournful reunion. we could not see each other, and when silence fell upon us i had a horrible sensation that the choking, depressing darkness of the place was wafting edith herndon away from me. i longed to find and clasp the hand that had taken mine the night on board _the waif_ when i made an offer of my services. the professor had explained that the opening through which they had been lowered was immediately above their heads. they had not moved from the spot lest they would not be able to find it again to obtain the food which leith had promised to send till they saw fit to accede to his proposals, and when holman suggested moving forward upon a tour of investigation the old man combated the idea vigorously. "we will lose ourselves, and we will never be able to find our way back here to get the food," he cried. "but we will never get out by remaining here," said holman. "if he has made the acceptance of those proposals the only grounds upon which he will grant you your liberty, i don't see that it will serve any good to remain here taking the food he throws down." "that's true," murmured edith, and i blessed her mentally for the calm way in which she had uttered the words. the surrounding darkness had no terrors for her in comparison to the fate that awaited her above. the manner in which she spoke of the sallow-faced rogue convinced me that the proposals that had been made since the time that leith had shone out in his true colours had produced a terror which she endeavoured to hide from her father and sister. but the dark terrified the professor. although he viewed leith's proposals with the greatest abhorrence, the hole above his head appeared to him to be the only path back to the outer world, and he was afraid to stray. "there might be another way out of the place," said holman. "can verslun and i make the attempt and leave you three here?" "no, no!" cried barbara. "please stay here with us!" "i think it will be better if we remain together," said edith. "if you and mr. verslun did discover an opening it would be exceedingly difficult to find your way back here, and if you got out of this place you might not be able to reach the opening through which we were lowered. perhaps the way to it is known only to leith." edith's argument was sound. our finding them in that black cavern was purely an accident, and it was hardly probable that holman and myself would be able to find our way back to the spot if we went off on a tour of investigation. personally i had no desire to leave the girls. leith's deviltry had so impressed me that i considered him capable of anything, and if he thought we were out of the way, i had no doubt that he would take immediate steps to break down the courage of the professor and his daughters by means that were familiar to him. i could well understand that edith herndon's love for her father would compel her to sacrifice herself if she saw the aged professor in front of the great stone centipede, and that might happen at any moment now that leith considered that he had disposed of all active opposition. for hours we debated the matter, and finally the professor was won over. he agreed to move forward on an inspection tour of the vast subterranean place the moment the next supply of food came from above, and we waited anxiously. during the wait holman and i made short trips into the darkness, but we were careful that we did not get out of the hearing of the two girls, who called at intervals so that we would be able to find our way back. the place was awe-inspiring. its size could only be guessed at. stones that were flung in a certain direction where the floor sloped gradually downward could be heard rolling for many minutes after they left our hands. we guessed that it was early morning when we heard from leith. a blazing torch illuminated a round hole about seventy feet above our heads, and holman and i immediately remained quiet so that the big scoundrel would be in ignorance of the reunion. there was no possibility of the torchlight making our presence known. it would take a score of torches to enable him to see us. leith thrust his head over the edge of the hole while soma held the torch, and, with a coarse laugh, the ruffian inquired if his victims had changed their minds. "no, we have not," replied the professor, his thin, quavering voice sounding strangely weak after the deep-throated bellow of the bully on top. "well, you'll change it soon," cried leith. "i'll leave you down there for another day or two, and then i'll get you up to do some stunts. mind you, i mean a proper marriage with miss edith, professor! _the waif_ will run us up to the german missionary station while you take charge here for your affectionate son-in-law." i opened my mouth to fling an answer at the taunting scoundrel, but holman surmised my intention and begged me to hold my tongue. "they'll get no food if you cry out!" he whispered. "don't speak to him, man!" the professor made no answer to the offensive remark, and after a few minutes' silence leith drew back, and soma started to lower a bundle of food into the dark prison. "that rope might prove useful," whispered holman. "feel around and see if you can get hold of it before he pulls it up." the light of the torch which leith held only illuminated about six feet of the rope as the native passed it into the prison, so holman and i, standing directly under the opening, felt around in the darkness as the bundle of food came toward the ground. "i have it!" murmured holman. "wait till he unhooks the bundle." we let the rope run through our hands till the package of food touched the rock floor. the line had a small hook upon the end, and the moment soma felt that the parcel had reached the bottom of the place, he dexterously unhooked it with a slight jerk and started to haul in. "now!" whispered the youngster. "a big pull! we might bring the nigger through the hole!" we went very close to performing the feat. the jolt took the native unawares; he fell forward on his knees and barely saved himself from dropping into the opening. the rope came toward us with a run, but as we pulled furiously it stopped with a sudden jerk, and we knew that the other end was tied to some projection on the surface. leith laughed derisively, and the laugh maddened holman. he clutched the rope and started to climb rapidly upward. i couldn't see him, but i felt his shoes as he wriggled away into the darkness above me, and i held my breath, i gripped the rope and kept it taut so that leith and soma might not discover the ruse. but leith had more cunning than we credited him with. after a futile pull at the rope he thrust the pine torch through the hole, and as it dropped into the cavern it illuminated the figure of holman, who was then about fifteen feet from the floor. "cut the rope!" roared the ruffian. "quick, soma! cut the rope and break the ---- fool's neck!" holman, realizing that it was impossible to reach the top, saved himself a nasty fall by sliding down the rope while the native slashed at it, but he had not touched the floor when the ninety feet of strong manilla came whirling down through the darkness. and the rope was not the only gift we received. angry at discovering that we had escaped death in our plunge into the place, leith poured forth a stream of blasphemy that outdid the effort he had made when kicking holman and me on the afternoon the youngster had wounded him. he cursed us till the shocked professor dragged his two daughters away out of hearing, and there we found the three when we had gathered up the rope and the food. "we might as well make a try to explore the place," said holman. "the scoundrel says that he will not send down any more food till you accept his proposals." "then we'll never get any," said edith herndon quietly. "i pray that god will show us the way out of this place." [illustration] chapter xxii the white waterfall we found the rope exceedingly useful now that we had decided to explore the place in search of a way out. it was reasonable to think that the floor of the cavern would contain innumerable fissures into which we might fall, and to guard against this we decided to make a life line out of the thirty yards of manilla we had luckily obtained. allowing about five yards of rope between each two persons, i tied it in turn around the waist of holman, barbara, the professor, edith, and myself, and being thus prepared against a precipice in our path, holman took the lead and we followed in single file as the tightening of the rope informed each one that the immediate leader was a safe distance in front. "is there any choice of direction?" asked holman, pausing after he had taken half a dozen steps. "i don't think so," i said. "unless some one has an intuition regarding the path to liberty." "please let me pick the route," murmured edith. "i am stretching out my arm, mr. holman; will you come here to me and feel the direction i am pointing in?" we clustered round the girl, each one feeling her outstretched arm and then turning quickly toward the point indicated. i was glad that no one could see my own face at that moment. it was pathetic to think of any one choosing a route in that abyss of horror, and the trouble which the girl took to make sure that holman would move off in the direction she pointed brought tears to my eyes. "i--i might be silly in thinking it," she stammered, "but i believe--oh, please, mr. holman, try and walk in the direction i pointed in!" "i certainly will try," said the youngster. "if i go wrong, you put me right, will you? i believe somehow that we're going to find a way out. i don't know the right path to it, but i've got a premonition we'll find it. now we're off again." we moved forward with anxious footsteps. imagination furrowed the floor of that place with bottomless crevices, and the cold hand of fear gripped our hearts. it required a mental effort to move one foot past the other, and whenever one of the girls stumbled, her little cry of alarm brought untold agony to holman and myself as we took a grip of the rope and braced ourselves against the happening which our excited minds expected any moment. we were walking hand in hand with dread--a dread that became greater when we thought that a false step of ours might drag to death the two women that we loved. on, and on, and on, we bored into the horrible night. with blind footsteps we walked fearfully through the stygian waves that rolled around us. the place seemed to be of enormous size, and in the dead silence that surrounded us our footsteps woke clattering echoes that appeared to mock our efforts to escape. the air in places had a strange odour that reminded us of camphor. this peculiar smell seemed to be in certain stratas of the atmosphere through which we passed, and whenever our passage through these scented layers was unduly prolonged, we experienced a sensation that i can only liken to the near approach of seasickness. it made the girls sick and faint, but they walked on without complaining. we struck the wall of the place after we had been walking for a period that we judged to be about three hours, and we decided to rest for a while. we sat close together upon the cold floor and endeavoured to cheer each other's spirits by constantly asserting that the air of the place made it reasonable to suppose that there must be some other entrance besides the hole through which leith had lowered the three, and the fissure through which holman and i had rolled down the gigantic ash pile. and the assertions seemed logical. the two entrances that we knew of opened into leith's retreat, and it was hard to think that the air supply of the enormous cavern in which we were wandering could come through those two openings. we combatted our fears with this argument as we ate a morsel of the food we had received that morning, and feeling that he who has the biggest stock of hope has the biggest grip upon life, we endeavoured to make light of our misfortunes as we stumbled on again after a short rest. but that impenetrable night produced a depression that we could not shake off. imagination sprang ahead of the moment and pictured our final struggles. we fought with the nightmares that entered our minds, and conversation languished. we couldn't speak while the mental canvases were being rapidly coloured with scenes depicting our end in the darkness and the silence, where a grim fate would even deny one a last look at a dearly loved face. a silence came upon us that had the same effect as intense cold. each in his own frozen husk of despair plodded forward with the idea that the others were so engrossed in their own thoughts that they were not inclined to answer when addressed. the darkness so completely isolated each person that after some hours of silence it required a tremendous effort to thoroughly convince the mind that one was walking with living people and not with phantoms. it was after one of these intervals of silence that barbara herndon made a discovery that chilled our blood. she made some commonplace remark to her sister and received no reply. she repeated the observation, but it brought no comment. the happening seemed to drag the rest of us from the strange torpor, and we stopped. we sensed that barbara herndon was feeling her way toward her sister, and presently the younger girl gave a shriek of alarm that stirred a million echoes in that place of terror. "edith!" she shrieked. "edith! edith! where are you?" holman and i clawed fiercely upon the rope, moving toward each other in an effort to find a quick solution for the mystery. we collided violently as we reached the spot where the rope had circled edith herndon's waist, and we stood, stunned and speechless, as we fingered the cord. in some manner, probably severed by a knifelike projection of rock, the loop which i had knotted around her body had been cut through, and the rope had fallen unnoticed from the waist of the weary girl! "great god!" i cried. "where did we lose her? what way did we come?" the questions were ridiculous. the numbing influence of the place had made us walk for an hour or so in complete silence, and it was impossible to say when she had lost her position in the line. and now, as we moved round and round, endeavouring to peer into the blackness, we lost all sense of direction. each had a different notion about the way we had come. while we were moving forward, our combined efforts to walk straight ahead made it impossible for one to turn and go in an opposite direction, but in the few moments of our excitement as we turned and twisted in clawing for the loop where edith had been tied, we became bewildered. we didn't know in which direction to turn in searching for the lost one! "what'll we do?" cried the professor. "do something! quick! find her! find her!" i took a great breath and yelled her name into the darkness. the sound thundered through the place like the noise made by a freight train. again and again i screamed it, and the million devils in the place shrieked the name in mockery. i exhausted myself in my mad efforts to send my voice to her ears. holman gripped my arm when i had worked myself into an insane frenzy, and he begged me to be quiet. "barbara thought she heard an answer," he cried. "listen! there it is again!" it was edith! her voice came to us like a thread of silver, and with no thought of the bottomless crevices that might be in our path, we charged blindly toward the spot from which her cry had come. it seemed ages before we met her. the sounds puzzled us, but at last we gripped her hands, and the professor and barbara, hysterical with joy, sobbed their thanks into the gloom. "i don't know how the rope became undone," cried edith. "i didn't find out that i had become separated from the rest of you till i attempted to draw your attention to the waterfall." "to the what?" i questioned. "to the waterfall," repeated the girl. "did you pass it? it is a beautiful little waterfall, and the water flows over a white limestone rock that makes it sparkle like so many fireflies in the dark." i cannot explain what happened to me at that moment. some veil within my mind was torn away by the few words that the girl had uttered. i was back upon levuka wharf, lying under the copra bag where holman had found me, and for a moment i could not speak as the subconscious mind flung a score of half-forgotten incidents into my conscious area. _"it is the white waterfall!"_ i yelled. "it is the white waterfall that the maori sang of on the wharf at levuka! he was warning toni, and toni was killed by soma because he knew! it is the way out! we're saved! we're saved! it is on the road to heaven out of black fernando's hell!" [illustration] chapter xxiii the wizards' seat as we stumbled toward the spot from which came the sounds of running water, the incidents of the preceding ten days seemed to be dropping into their places within my brain like the pieces of a picture puzzle that has suddenly become plain to the eye of the child who is putting it together. i understood! my brain seemed bursting within my skull. it appeared to me that god, in his own way, had made me a blind instrument to do his work. the big maori on the wharf at levuka knew of the hell upon the isle of tears. the maori had warned toni, the little fijian, but fear of what might happen to any one possessing the knowledge had made toni deny that he was the companion of the maori when he was questioned before and after he had reached _the waif_. in a burst of confidence he had confessed the truth to me on the afternoon after i had saved him from being washed overboard, but the confession had been made in the presence of soma, and, as kaipi asserted, it had cost toni his life. leith, alias black fernando, had ordered the big kanaka to put the possessor of such important information out of the way. i repeated over and over again the words which the maori had addressed to his woolly headed pupil on that hot day at levuka. they raced madly round in my mind, as if exultant because i had found the reason why they persisted in storing themselves in the cells of my brain. the soul within me had known that the knowledge would be wanted! "how many paces?" asked the professor. "sixty!" i roared; and then, seized with temporary insanity, i chanted the song of the maori at the top of my voice: "sixty paces to the left, sixty paces to the left, that's the way to heaven, that's the way to heaven, that's the way to heaven out of black fernando's hell." "and here's the waterfall!" cried holman, "go easy now! it must be flowing into some hole, and we don't want to fall into an abyss just as verslun has discovered the way out." we advanced cautiously toward the spot where, as edith had said, the water sparkled like fireflies in the darkness. it was an eerie place. we knew that the water was there by the sound it made flowing over the rocks, but, except for the tiny sparks of phosphorescent light that seemed to fly out from it, we could not see it. the spectacle thrilled us. a million sparks of light seemed to rise from the bed of feldspar over which the water leaped, and the peculiar quality of the rock gave to it the weird brilliancy which held us spellbound as we advanced with extreme caution. it wasn't white by any means, but in those inky depths it would not require a great effort of the imagination to call it white. the faint luminous flashes were the only particles of light that we had seen since leith had thrown the half-extinguished torch into the hole that morning, and we could hardly turn our eyes from the novelty. the water fell into an opening in the rocky floor, and gurgled away into depths that made us shiver as the distant tinkle came up to us as we crept forward on hands and knees. we were all thirsty at that moment, but we wished to put the directions of the maori to an immediate test, and we were satisfied to let our longing for a cool drink stay with us till we could prove whether the strangely luminous waterfall before us was the one about which the two natives chanted the strange song. "they said to the left, didn't they?" asked holman. "yes," i answered. i hardly recognized my own voice as i jerked out the word. i couldn't see the faces of the girls, but i understood what skyscrapers of hope they had built upon the announcement i had made when edith had told of her discovery. now, as we moved around the hole in the floor, i understood what a tremendous shock it would be to them if we discovered that there was no connection between the falling water and the chant. "i suppose the left side will be the one upon our left hand when facing the fall?" said holman. "i suppose so," i stammered. "let us move up close to the side of the water." we edged along till we could touch the flashing stream that dropped from some point high up in the immense roof of the place, and then we started to step the distance, the professor chattering along behind us, while the two girls brought up the rear. holman chanted the numbers aloud, and a cold sweat broke out upon me as he counted. a fear of my own sanity came upon me. i thought that this connection between the song and the luminous water might have been suggested by a brain that had suddenly lost its balance under the torture of the preceding three days. "fifty-six! fifty-seven! fifty-eight!----" it was holman's voice, but to my reeling brain the sound came from the roof and thundered in my ears like a brazen bell. "fifty-nine! _sixty_!" we stopped together, and the suppressed sobs of barbara herndon were the only sounds that broke the little stillness that followed. there was no way out! the darkness, so it seemed to us, was thicker than ever! "nothing doing," muttered holman. "i counted right, didn't i?" "i think so," i answered huskily. "sixty paces exactly, and here's the wall alongside us." my fingers groped along the moist rock. i felt stunned. now that the test had been made it seemed insanity to connect a chant that i heard at levuka with a waterfall in a cavern on the isle of tears. but why had toni been killed? why had leith exhibited such curiosity about the song when he heard me relating the incident to the two sisters on board the yacht? my fingers came to a crevice in the wall as the question presented a bold front to the doubt that had gripped me. the fissure was some four feet wide, and my exclamation made holman put a question. "what is it?" he asked. "nothing," i answered. wrecked hopes had made me cautious. still i felt certain that i had remembered those words for some purpose. i recalled how they had puzzled me on that hot day, and how i had questioned holman concerning "pilgrim's progress" when he had roused me from my sleep. "well, if there's nothing here i'm going back to get a drink," said holman. "hold on!" i stammered, as i uncoiled the piece of spare rope from my shoulders; "i want you a minute. there's a split in this rock, and i'm going to explore it. take the end of this rope and hang on." "hadn't i better go with you?" he asked. "not this trip," i answered. "i've just got a feeling that i'd like to see where it leads to. hold tight!" i stepped cautiously into the narrow passage and immediately found that it narrowed to such an extent that i had to turn sideways to squeeze through. the floor sloped upward, and as the rock was damp and slippery, i dropped upon my knees so that i could climb more rapidly. the place seemed a narrow chute. my knees were skinned from the rough bottom, but i scratched desperately to obtain a footing. hope was still alive. the maori had said that the road to heaven was sixty paces from the white waterfall, and if an all-seeing providence had guided edith to the waterfall, it was surely decreed that we would make our escape from the clutches of the devil who had us at his mercy. "we will surely escape," i muttered, as i scratched and clawed in an effort to drag myself up the slippery path. "we will escape! i know it! we will escape! i know--" the muttered words died upon my lips. the crevice turned and then broadened suddenly, and a blinding flash of light forced me to fling myself face downward upon the rock. for a moment i lay there, wondering stupidly whether something had happened to my eyes or whether i had come suddenly into the light of day. i had seen light--the light of what? slowly i lifted my head, and the truth came to me with stunning force. it was god's own sunlight that i had seen! the chute ended within three paces of the spot where i lay, and immediately opposite the opening through which i looked was a patch of vermilion rock that blazed gloriously as the rays of the afternoon sun struck full upon it. i knew that rock! it had thrilled me as i looked at it on the afternoon when leith had introduced us to the greatest natural wonder of the pacific. i was at the end of a passage that opened into the vermilion pit! from where i lay i could not see the top of the crater. when the passage had suddenly broadened, the roof came down upon it, so that the opening through which i looked at the opposite side of the great pit was about ten feet wide but not more than two feet in height. an overhanging lip of rock prevented me from looking up, but i understood that i was lower than the slippery ledge of death that we had crossed to reach the valley of echoes. it seemed years since we had crossed that path, yet it was less than a week. i thought of the others waiting in the darkness, and i turned and slid down the chute up which i had scrambled. the path to liberty was not yet plain, but there was fresh air and sunlight at the top of the chute, and one could see the faces of those they loved. bumping and bounding over the jagged rocks i went at a terrific speed to the bottom of the slide, and, scrambling through the opening, i shouted the news to the four who waited there. "it opens into the vermilion pit!" i gasped. "i can't see how we can climb out, but there's hope--there's hope!" i was foolish in making the last statement, but the sight of the glorious sunbeams, striking down into the abyss, had made me blind to the difficulties that were yet to be faced! and the maori's chant must surely be true! now that it had brought us to the light, i could not but believe that it would bring us to liberty. the slippery chute brought a suggestion from holman. he advised that the two girls and the professor remain at the bottom while he and i took one end of the rope to the top so that we could haul them up the wet track that i had scaled with difficulty. "we won't be five minutes!" i cried. "stay where you are till we signal." i didn't think, as holman and i crawled to the top of that place, what an eventful five minutes that would be. but the big things of life are crammed into minutes, and time was bringing the most thrilling one of our lives toward us as we scrambled up the chute. our adventures upon the isle of tears were to have a climax that fitted them. holman stopped as i had done and thrust his face down upon the rock as his eyes caught a glimpse of the glittering wall of the crater that came suddenly into view. the rays of the sun blazing down upon the stained sides of the mysterious pit made the veins of colour appear like brilliant snakes. the patch that was framed by the walls of the opening through which we gazed was a wild riot of scintillating, blinding colours that dazzled our eyes as we stared at them. for a minute holman breathed hungrily of the hot air, then he attempted to discover our exact position in the crater. "we must be somewhere near the top," he declared. "don't you remember that the colour of the walls darkened rapidly below the ledge of death?" "i remember," i answered. "we must be nearly on a level with the ledge." "if we could look out from under this projecting piece of rock," muttered the youngster. "it's risky." "i'll make a try, verslun. hold my legs. i'm going to hang out of this burrow and take a peep around to get our bearings." i gripped his legs, and turning upon his back he pushed himself slowly out over the edge of the passage till he was able to look up in front of the piece of rock that projected like the peak of a cap above the opening. clinging to this peak with his two hands, the upper part of his body being out over the abyss, he stared upward, and as i watched his face i noticed the look of joy and amazement that spread across it. "what is it, holman?" i cried. "are we saved? tell me!" he slid hurriedly back to safety and pounded the rock above his head with his bare fists. "do you know what this is?" he yelled. "do you know?" i tried to utter the words that came to my tongue, but i could not. i could see the joy in the youngster's eyes, but i was afraid to speak. "it is the ledge of death!" he shouted. "there is only six inches of rock above us!" "then we're saved!" i cried. "sure! if you put the rope around me i can crawl up on it, and once there i can haul up the others. do you know what soma told the professor about the bad men falling into this infernal pit?" i nodded my head. i was unable to speak at that moment. "well, the wizards of the centipede fixed that! don't you see? this was their seat! they leaned out of this place as i leaned out just now, and they gripped the ankles of any poor devil they had a grouch against. it was devilish----" i put my hand across his mouth and he became instantly mute. we held our breath and listened intently. from above us came the faint sound of footsteps and a cold perspiration broke out upon us. some one was walking slowly along the ledge of death! the sounds ceased when the unknown was immediately above our heads, and a guilty look came upon holman's face. the man on the ledge had probably heard the youngster's voice, and he was puzzled to know where the sounds had come from. we sat without moving a muscle. the silence convinced us that the unknown was listening. we knew that he hadn't climbed from the ledge to the top of the crater. the scratching of his shoes against the rock would have come to our ears. he was waiting--waiting to discover from what direction the voice had come that caused him to pause and listen. the minutes passed like slow-dragging years. the man above wore shoes and the two men who wore shoes, outside our own party, were leith and the one-eyed man. somehow we felt that maru and kaipi had settled with one eye, so there was only one person on the isle of tears who could possibly be listening. ten minutes passed, then holman pointed to his own legs. i understood the sign and gripped his ankles. my head was bursting with the terror inspired by the thought that our escape might be cut off after the miraculous manner in which the way out had been shown to us. without noise, yet with incredible swiftness, the youngster turned upon his back and wriggled forward till his head and shoulders were again out over the pit. his body was tense, every muscle showing as he stiffened himself. into my mind flashed a picture of the bloodthirsty wizards of the centipede stretching out in exactly the same manner centuries before a white man sailed into the pacific! the silence seemed to sap my strength. i watched holman with eyes that were half-blinded by the perspiration that rolled down my forehead. there was no movement upon the ledge, and the fingers of the youngster were reaching slowly--slowly upward. it was a yell of horror that shattered the awful quiet--a yell that went up through the hot air like the shriek of a lost soul. it swirled around and around like a lariat of brass. it was a terrible yell. it wrenched my inmost being till the very spirit seemed to go out of me for an instant, and i returned to consciousness to find myself struggling to hold holman from being dragged into the depths below. it was the youngster's voice that seemed to bring me back to a knowledge of the surroundings. in an instant's pause in the torrent of blasphemy his words came to me clear and distinct. "hold me tight, verslun!" he cried. "hold me tight, man! _i have him!_" [illustration: "hold me tight, verslun!" he cried. "hold me tight, man! _i have him!_"] i shut my eyes to escape the fascination of the depths, and i gripped holman's ankles till my nails burrowed into his flesh. i felt his body heave with a tremendous effort, then another yell, shorter but more terrifying than the first, told me that the struggle was over. i dragged holman back to safety, and, stretched side by side upon the rock, we listened. down in the pit--miles, leagues away, something was falling! the youngster pulled himself together after the silence had settled upon the place like a film. "let's tie the rope and get the girls up here," he said quietly, "in a while--in a little while--i can crawl on to the ledge and pull them up with a rope." [illustration] chapter xxiv the way to heaven with quick-beating pulses we fixed the rope and shouted directions down the slippery passage to the girls and the professor, and inside of ten minutes they were beside us, looking out with frightened eyes at the coloured wall of the opposite side of the pit. the faces of edith and barbara looked pale and careworn, but they smiled bravely when holman assured them that we were within a yard of the path by which we had crossed to the valley of echoes. "be brave," he said cheerfully. "you'll be on your way back to the shore before many hours have passed by. there is no--no danger now." i do not know if the two girls understood the meaning of his words, but they asked no questions. somehow i think that they knew what had happened. those two terrible cries must have reached their ears as they waited at the foot of the chute that led to the wizards' seat, but if they had any doubts concerning their origin, they refrained from seeking information. but the professor knew. a melancholy that had tied his tongue all through the long day in the black kindergarten left him as he came to the sunlight, and he became light-hearted and merry. he felt that he had been relieved of his load of nightmares, and the dangers of the climb to the rocky shelf above our heads did not trouble him in the least. it was holman who performed the heroic work on the late afternoon of that eventful day. with the rope tied around his waist, he pushed himself out as he had done twice before during the preceding hour, then, gripping the edge of the shelf, dragged himself forward. for a moment, as he swung over the depths, it looked as if he would be unable to drag himself up, and we clung on to the rope and watched him with frightened eyes. but youth and courage won the day. slowly, inch by inch, he lifted himself, the lips of the two girls moving in dumb prayer; then we lost sight of him as he drew his legs up on to the ledge, and we knew that we were safe! the youngster secured the rope to a projection on the shelf above, and the professor, nervous but game, was the next to make the perilous journey. it was blood-curdling to watch the old man swaying over the depths while holman, lying flat upon his stomach, gripped him beneath the arms and dragged the poor old scientist to safety. barbara went next, and when the rope was lowered once more i secured it around edith's waist. i held her in my arms as i pushed her body forward to holman's strong hands that waited just below the ledge, and for one brief instant her lips came close to mine, and with a mad, wild love that had been born in danger, where there was no time for words, i stooped and kissed her. and even in that moment of extreme peril a faint smile swept over her face as she looked up into mine, and i knew that she understood. it was nearly sunset when we moved away from the top of the vermilion pit, but we had not gone ten paces when we stopped. a yell came out of the place, then another and another, and holman and i rushed back to the edge. down beneath us, on the slippery ledge of death, two natives were locked in a death grip, and a single glance told us that they were maru and soma. the raretongan had chased leith's brown lieutenant on to the path, and now they were struggling like demons in the mad endeavour to thrust each other into the depths. "quick!" cried holman. "the rope!" he slipped the line around his waist as the pair moved to the edge. maru was dragging the big savage with a strength that was surprising, but it was a certainty that if soma went over the edge the raretongan would keep him company. holman slipped down upon the ledge, but before he could reach them a dusty, bleeding figure stumbled through the entrance to the cavern, a knife flashed in the sunlight, and maru was drawn back into safety as soma released his grip. the newcomer was kaipi! "he kill toni!" he cried. "toni all same brother to me. toni work with me long time suva." toni, the pupil of the maori, who had instructed him on levuka wharf as to the way out of black fernando's hell, had been avenged at last. it was a happy reunion we held upon the edge of the pit. edith and barbara bound up the wounds of the two faithful natives, and the muscular raretongan was so touched with their tender ministrations that he foraged in his tattered sulu, and with tears of gratitude in his big brown eyes he handed back to barbara the emerald ring with which she had caused him to desert from leith's service. "me want no pay from you!" he cried. "me work for you all same nothing!" we learned that the one-eyed white man and the last of the wizards of the centipede had been dispatched by maru and kaipi, and we also received the news that the four carriers had bolted back to the yacht. the latter piece of information somewhat dampened our spirits. we felt that leith and newmarch were friends, and we wondered what the silent, thin-faced captain would do when he heard the story of black fernando's discomfiture. on account of kaipi's weak state we camped that evening on the same spot that we had occupied on the second night upon the isle of tears, and at daybreak next morning we set out for the little bay. we were all happy. the professor was as pleased as a boy on his vacation, and he had returned again to his task of taking notes. the two girls were radiant; kaipi was joyful because the murdered toni had been revenged, and maru was in the seventh heaven of delight because barbara had informed him that he could go to san francisco with the party as a reward for his devotion. as for holman and myself, we forgot the loneliness of the place in our joy. the same trees peered at us, the same cablelike vines gripped our legs, and the same weird rock masses blocked our paths, but love was in our hearts, and morbid thoughts were chased away. on the afternoon of the second day from the pit we reached the shore of the little bay, but _the waif_ was not there. newmarch had evidently discovered that leith had not been quite successful in the carrying out of his plans, and fearful of his own share in the business, he had bolted with the yacht. the south sea breeds piratical thoughts, and from our own knowledge of the captain we guessed that in his particular case those thoughts would be easily generated. "he thinks he'll save his own skin by clearing out," said holman, "but i'm satisfied that dame justice is an expert with the lariat. if he's not in jail before three months are out, my name is not will holman." it was the missionary schooner _messenger of light_ that saw our beacon upon the island on the fourth day after we had reached the spot where we had landed from _the waif_. the beautiful white vessel hove to outside the entrance to the little bay, a boat came ashore, and twenty minutes after they had first sighted our signal we were on the way to wellington, new zealand. "and the 'frisco boats call there," murmured barbara, "joy! joy! joy!" the moon was whitening the sleeping pacific when edith and i stood looking over the taffrail as the _messenger of light_ swept on her course. from nearby came the voice of professor herndon relating his experiences to a missionary who was returning from the marquesas. a soft island melody was wafted from the fo'c'stle, and the night was alive with all the witchery of the tropics. "edith," i whispered, as i took her hand, "i am a common sailorman, but if you could love me i--i--" i stopped in confusion, and as she had done on a former occasion, she came to the rescue of my stammering tongue. "you are a big, true man," she murmured. "if you had not come with us we should not have returned from that awful place. god let you listen to that song of the white waterfall so that we might be saved." some minutes afterward she released herself from my arms. "let us find will and barbara," she said softly. "we will share each other's happiness." and as i followed her across the poop, a tremendous surge of joy rose up and filled my heart. the whole world was clean and good, and in my glorious exultation i whispered a prayer for the soul of john leith, alias black fernando. the end [illustration: cover art] [frontispiece: amid the cheers of the band of britishers the ensign was broken at the masthead. see page ] the nameless island a story of some modern robinson crusoes by percy f. westerman _author of "the young cavalier," etc._ london c. arthur pearson ltd. henrietta street _second impression_ stories of adventure. _uniform with this volume_ each volume contains eight full-page illustrations by a well-known artist the boys of the otter patrol. a tale of the boy scouts. by e. le breton-martin. kiddie of the camp. a scouting story of the western prairies. by robert leighton. otters to the rescue. a sequel to "the boys of the otter patrol." by e. le breton-martin. the clue of the ivory claw. by f. haydn dimmock. 'midst arctic perils. by p. f. westerman. the phantom battleship. by rupert chesterton. kiddie the scout. a sequel to "kiddie of the camp." by robert leighton. the lost trooper. a tale of the great north-west. by f. haydn dimmock. the brigand of the air. by christopher beck. contents chapter i. the hurricane ii. aground iii. abandoned iv. the landing v. the camp vi. the animal that wouldn't be rescued vii. the emblem of empire viii. "a sail!" ix. unwelcome visitors x. strange allies xi. the frustrated sacrifice xii. at bay xiii. ellerton to the rescue xiv. routing the savages xv. a knife-thrust in the dark xvi. the gale xvii. back to the island xviii. a surprise for the invaders xix. the prisoner's escape xx. the enemy is cornered xxi. the buccaneers' cave xxii. the treasure chamber xxiii. "a sail! a sail!" xxiv. a false and a real alarm xxv. the great invasion xxvi. a great disaster xxvii. the last stand xxviii. the rescue list of illustrations amid the cheers of the band of britishers the ensign was broken at the masthead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _frontispiece_ ellerton was only just in time. another dazzling flash enabled him to see the helpless form of the crippled seaman andy, finding the bull close to his heels, gripped a rope and swung himself into a position of comparative safety the chief's canoe was paddled slowly towards the shore crash! fair in the centre of the lightly built fifty-feet hull struck the sharp stem "a sail! a sail!" he exclaimed breathlessly a huge turtle had crawled across the beach and ... had set the alarm bell ringing with fierce shouts the savages tore down the path straight for the barricade the nameless island chapter i the hurricane the _san martin_, a single-screw cargo steamer of tons, was on her way from realejo to tahiti. built on the clyde twenty years back, this peruvian-owned tramp was no longer in her prime. since passing out of the hands of her british owners, neglect had lessened her speed, while the addition of various deck-houses, to suit the requirements of the south american firm under whose house-flag she sailed, had not increased her steadiness. captain antonio perez, who was in command, was a short, thick-set man of almost pure spanish descent, swarthy, greasy, and vain--combining all the characteristics, good, bad, and indifferent, of the south american skipper. as part owner of the _san martin_ he was glad of the opportunity of adding to the vessel's earnings, so he had willingly agreed to take five passengers as far as tahiti. the five passengers were mr. mckay, his son andrew, terence donaghue, fanshaw ellerton, and quexo; but before relating the circumstances in which they found themselves on board the _san martin_, it will be necessary to introduce them to our readers. mr. mckay, a tall, erect queenslander, of scottish descent, had, through the death of a near relative, migrated from australia to one of the central american republics in order to test the possibilities of an estate which had been left him, before putting it into the market. andrew mckay, or andy, as he was called, was a well-set-up young fellow of nineteen, broad-shouldered and straight-limbed, with a fine head surmounted by a crop of auburn hair. terence donaghue, the son of an irish canadian, was about andy's age, and was on a visit to the mckays. he was impulsive both in manner and speech, high-spirited, and good-natured. fanshaw ellerton, a lad of sixteen, was supposed to be serving his apprenticeship on board the _tophet_, a barque of tons, of the port of liverpool. he was in reality a deserter--but in circumstances beyond his control. taking advantage of general leave being granted to the crew of the _tophet_, ellerton had gone "up-country," and, before he actually realised it, he found himself besieged in mr. mckay's ranch of san eugenio. one of those revolutions that occur in many of the south central american states had broken out, and the rebels, thinking that mr. mckay's house and estate would prove an easy and profitable prize, promptly attempted to take and plunder san eugenio. in spite of a vigorous defence, it seemed as if numbers would gain the day, till quexo, a mulatto lad on the ranch, contrived to steal through the rebels' lines and bring timely aid, but not before mr. mckay had been severely wounded. but, so far as his central american affairs were concerned, mr. mckay was practically ruined, and he took steps to return to queensland with the least possible delay. andy, of course, was to accompany him, while terence arranged to go as far as tahiti, whence he could take steamer to honolulu and on to victoria, british columbia. "never mind, old chap," exclaimed andy, when ellerton made the startling yet not altogether unexpected discovery that the _tophet_ had sailed without him. "we've stuck together through thick and thin these last few days, and it seems as if we have been chums for years. i know the governor will be only too glad to have you with us, and no doubt you can pick up your ship at sydney." nor did mr. mckay forget quexo's devotion; and, to the mulatto's great delight, he was engaged as servant at the--to him--princely salary of five dollars a month. a fever-stricken coast was no place for a wounded man, hence mr. mckay's anxiety to sail as soon as possible; and since ten days or more would elapse before one of the regular line of steamers left for honolulu, passages were booked on the peruvian tramp steamer _san martin_. * * * * * "what a scratch crew!" remarked terence, pointing at the swarm of olive-featured peruvians who were scrubbing down decks with the aid of the ship's hose. "but even they have one advantage over most of the crews of the mercantile marine," replied ellerton. "they are all of one nationality. take the _tophet's_ crew--there are only eight british seamen before the mast; the rest are germans, finns, and swedes." "that is a crying scandal," interrupted mr. mckay, who was resting in a deck-chair a few feet from the head of the poop-ladder. "england, the principal carrier of the world, has to rely upon foreigners to man her merchant ships. and the reason is not far to seek," he added. the _san martin_ was in the doldrums. not a ripple disturbed the surface of the ocean, save the white wake of the steamer as she pounded along at a steady nine knots. overhead the sun shone fiercely in a cloudless sky. "how deep is it here?" asked terence, leaning over the rail. "do you know, ellerton?" asked mr. mckay. "no, sir; i had no opportunity of examining a chart." "it's approximately three thousand fathoms. between the galapagos and the marquesas is a vast sunken plateau. sunlight never penetrates these great depths; probably all is dark beyond two hundred fathoms." "and are there fish or marine animals in the bed of the ocean?" "no one knows. possibly there are some marine animals capable of withstanding the enormous pressure, for it may be taken for granted that at three thousand fathoms the pressure per square inch is about three tons." "is it always calm in the doldrums?" continued terence, for he had never before "crossed the line." "often for weeks at a stretch. what's your experience of these, ellerton?" "three weeks with the canvas hanging straight down from the yards. if you threw anything overboard it would be alongside for days. i can assure you, terence, that i am jolly glad we're on board a steamer." "how did you get out of it?" continued the young canadian, eager for further information. "by one of the frequent and sudden hurricanes that spring up in the belt of the calms; but even that was looked upon as a slice of luck." thus the days passed. conversation was the chief means of passing the time, although the lads derived considerable amusement from their efforts to teach quexo english. reading was out of the question, for the ship's library consisted of only a few spanish books of little interest to mr. mckay and andy, while to terence and ellerton they were unfathomable. on the evening of the fourth day there was an ominous change in the weather. the sun, setting between high-banked, ill-defined clouds, gave out bright copper-coloured rays that betokened much wind at no distant date; while from the south-east a long, heavy swell, although far from land, gave further indications of change. "how is the glass, captain?" asked mr. mckay, as captain perez emerged from the companion and began to make his way for'ard to the bridge. the captain shrugged his shoulders. "low, señor. i like it not." "what an admission," exclaimed mr. mckay, as the officer mounted the ladder. "fancy a british skipper replying like that! here, andy, you are not shaky on the pins like i am; just present my compliments to captain perez and ask him to tell you how the barometer stands. i'm rather curious on that point." "you appear to have a good knowledge of seamanship, sir," remarked ellerton, as young mckay made his way to the bridge. "well, i must confess i have," admitted mr. mckay. "years ago i spent some months on a pearl-fisher in torres strait; but that's a long story. some day, perhaps, i'll tell you more about it." "seven hundred and forty millimetres--a fall of twenty-two millimetres in eight hours," announced andy, reading the figures from a slip of paper, on which he had noted the captain's reply. "by jove!" exclaimed mr. mckay. "that's equivalent to a trifle over . inches. we're in for something, especially with that deck cargo," as he pointed to the towering baulks of mahogany which were stowed amidships. "are they doing anything for'ard?" he continued. "the men are placing additional lashings over the hatchways." "pity they didn't man the derrick and heave some of that stuff overboard," replied mr. mckay, eyeing the timber with concern. "however, it will be dark in another quarter of an hour, so we had better turn in and get some sleep while we are able." it was shortly after midnight when ellerton awoke, conscious that something was amiss. he had slept through severe gales in the old _tophet_ when she was scudding under close-reefed canvas before the wind or lying hove-to in a hurricane in magellan straits; but there was something in the peculiar motion of the _san martin_ that roused his seaman's instincts. it was blowing. he could hear the nerve-racking clank of the engines as the propeller raced in the air, and the corresponding jar as the ship's stern was engulfed in the following seas. that was a mere nothing; it was the excessive heel and slow recovery of the vessel which told him that things were not as they should be. hastily dressing, he was about to leave the cabin when a hollow groan caught his ear. it was pitch dark, for the electric lights had failed, and the after part of the ship was in a state of absolute blackness. "what's up, terence?" terence was like the sufferer on the channel mail boat. he was past the stage when he was afraid he might die, and was entering into the stage when he was afraid he might not. ellerton had suffered the agonies of sea-sickness before, so, knowing that the unhappy victim would prefer to suffer in solitude, he went outside. in the alley-way he collided with the second mate, who, clad in dripping oilskins, was returning from his watch on deck. ere the two could disengage, a heavy list sent them both rolling against one of the starboard cabins, and, at the same time, andy, who, unable to sleep, was on the point of making his way over to ellerton's berth, stepped upon the writhing forms and promptly joined them on the floor of the alley-way. a number of choice expressions in english and spanish, drowned by the thunder of the "combers" on deck, arose from the struggling trio, till at length ellerton disentangled himself and succeeded in pulling his chum from under the form of the second mate. "isn't it awful, this gale?" gasped andy, whose right eye was rapidly closing from the effects of an accidental knock from the peruvian's sea-boot. "yes, it's a bit thick," replied ellerton, whose knuckles were bleeding through coming into contact with the brass tread of the cabin door. "but let's follow this chap up and get him to let us have a candle; then we can see what we are doing." as he spoke, a vivid flash of lightning revealed the peruvian, still in his wet oilskins, stretched at full length on his bunk, his head buried in the blankets. he was in a state of absolute funk! a swinging candlestick was affixed to the bulkhead, and ellerton was soon able to procure a light. andy glanced at the barometer. the mercury stood at millimetres ( . in.)--a fall of nearly an inch since six o'clock on the previous evening. "can't we go on deck?" asked andy, as the _san martin_ slowly recovered from a dangerous list. "it's rotten being cooped up here." "you would stand a jolly good chance of being swept overboard," replied ellerton. "everything is battened down, and we can only get out by the sliding hatch communicating with the----" his words were interrupted by a succession of heavy thuds, plainly audible above the roar of the wind and waves, while the shouts of the frantic seamen showed that something had broken adrift. taking advantage of the lift of the vessel as she threw her stern clear of a mountainous sea, ellerton opened the steel sliding doorway sufficiently wide for the two chums to gain the poop. staggering along the slippery, heaving deck, they reached the lee side of the deck-house, where, gripping the stout iron stanchion-rail, they awaited the next flash of lightning. they had not long to wait. a brilliant, prolonged succession of flashes dazzled their eyes, the electric fluid playing on the wet planks and foam-swept waist of the plunging vessel. the reason for the commotion was now apparent. one of the mainmast derricks had broken adrift, and, charging from side to side like a gigantic flail, had smashed the rail, crushed two steel ventilator-cowls, and utterly demolished two boats in the davits. the crew, trying to secure the plunging mass of metal, were working with mad desperation, frequently up to their waists in water. two of the unfortunate men, crushed by the sweep of the derrick, had been hurled over the side, while another, his leg bent under him, lay helpless in the lee-scuppers, with only a few inches of broken bulwarks to prevent him from sharing the fate of his comrades. "stand by, andy!" shouted ellerton. "take a couple of turns round this bollard," and throwing the end of a coil of signal-halliards to his friend, he made the other end fast round his waist and jumped down the poop-ladder. he was only just in time. another dazzling flash enabled him to see the helpless form of the crippled seaman, and as he wound his arms round the man's waist in an iron grip, a seething cataract of foam swept the deck. [illustration: ellerton was only just in time. another dazzling flash enabled him to see the helpless form of the crippled seaman] the ship, stunned by the force of the gigantic billow, listed till her deck took an angle of degrees, or more. to the young apprentice, held only by a single turn of the thin signal-halliard, it seemed as if the ship were already taking her downward plunge, for all round him surged the torrent of solid water, his position rendered doubly horrible by the intense blackness of the night. still he held on like grim death to the disabled seaman, the thin rope cutting into his breastbone like a steel wire. his feet were unable to find a hold; the last fragment of the bulwarks had vanished, and only the rope held him and his burden from a prolonged death in the surging ocean. quivering like an aspen leaf, the stricken vessel slowly resumed an even keel, and then began the correspondingly sickening list to windward. another flash revealed the charging derrick whirling over his head; then, as he felt the rope slacken and himself slipping across the deck, his hand managed to grasp the foot of the poop-ladder. almost breathless by his exertions, and half suffocated through being so long under water, ellerton retained sufficient presence of mind to clamber up the ladder, andy assisting his burden by steadily and strongly hauling on the rope; then, as the _san martin_ once more began her sickening roll to leeward, he sank exhausted to the deck, safe under the lee of the deck-house, with the peruvian still in his grip. that last tremendous breaker had been the means of saving the ship, though at the time it had threatened to end her career. the dangerous deck-load of mahogany baulks had been wrenched from its securing lashings, and had been swept overboard; while the disabled derrick, coming into contact with the donkey-engine, had snapped off short. at the same time the waves had swept four more of the crew to their last account, and the remainder, exhausted and disheartened by their misfortunes, had gained the shelter of the fo'c'sle. securing themselves by the rope, andy and ellerton--the latter having passed a bight round the now conscious and groaning seaman--hung on with desperation. from their comparatively sheltered position they could gain occasional glimpses of the bridge, where captain perez, the first mate, and a couple of seamen stood braving the elements, their sou'-westers just visible above the top of the canvas storm-dodgers. at one moment, silhouetted against the glare of the lightning, their heads could be seen against a background of wind-torn clouds; at another the vessel would be so deep in the trough of the waves that the crests ahead appeared to rise high above the rigid figures on their lofty, swaying perch. "will it hold?" shouted andy above the hiss of the foam and the howling of the wind, as a few tons of water struck the weather side of the deck-house. "i think so," replied ellerton. "it would have gone before this if not." "then let's put the man inside. we can then go below and get the steward or some of the crew to look after him." accordingly they dragged the groaning seaman into the deck-house, and, wedging him up with cushions to prevent him from playing the part of neptune's shuttlecock, they left him. seizing their opportunity, the two friends contrived to gain the saloon, where they found mr. mckay, who had succeeded in procuring and lighting a pair of cabin-lamps. "thick, isn't it?" remarked andy's father. then: "what have you fellows been up to?" for both were wet to the skin, while andy's eye was black and green, and ellerton's forehead was bleeding from a superficial cut. "oh, nothing much," replied ellerton modestly. "we were caught in the tail end of a comber. the deck cargo's gone, though." "that's good news," replied mr. mckay. "though i fancy the worst is yet to come. i suppose captain perez is steering to the south'ard to try and avoid the main path of the hurricane?" "i haven't had the chance of looking at the compass," replied ellerton. "but i must go for'ard and get help for the poor fellow in the deck-house." "what fellow is that?" asked mr. mckay of his son as the apprentice disappeared along the darkened alley-way. while andy was relating with whole-hearted praise the story of his companion's bravery, ellerton was feeling his way along the narrow, heaving passage that communicated with the fore part of the ship. at length he came to the engine-room hatchway. down below he could see the mass of complicated machinery throbbing in the yellow glimmer of the oil lamps, while the hot atmosphere was filled with a horrible odour of steam and burning oil. here, at any rate, the men were doing their duty right manfully, for he could see the engineers, gripping the shiny rails as they leant over the swaying, vibrating engines, calmly oiling the bearings of the plunging rods and cranks. the "chief," his eyes fixed upon the indicators, was alertly awaiting the frequently recurring clank which denoted that the propeller was racing. for a few moments ellerton stood there fascinated, the spectacle of an engine-room in a vessel in a storm was new to the lad, whose experience of the sea was confined to a sailing barque. suddenly above the monotonous clank of the piston-rods came a hideous grinding sound. the cylinders began to give out vast columns of steam, as the engines ran at terrifying speed. through the vapour ellerton could discern the "chief," galvanised into extraordinary alertness, make a rush for a valve, while his assistants, shouting and gesticulating, dashed hither and thither amid the confined spaces between the quivering machinery. the main shaft had broken, and the _san martin_ was helpless in the teeth of the hurricane. chapter ii aground for a brief instant ellerton hesitated; ought he to return to his friends or make his way for'ard? the _san martin_, losing steerage way, was rolling horribly in the trough of the sea; any instant she might turn turtle. there was a rush of terrified firemen from the grim inferno of the stokeholds; the engineers, having taken necessary precautions against an explosion of the boilers, hastened to follow their example, scrambling in a struggling mass between the narrow opening of the partially closed hatchway. clearly ellerton had no means of gaining the deck in the rear of that human press; so lurching and staggering along the alley-way he made his way aft, where he met mr. mckay, who, assisted by andy, was about to go on deck. terence, looking a picture of utter misery in the yellow light of the saloon, and quexo, his olive skin ashy grey with fear, had already joined the others. "come on, hoppy," shouted andy cheerfully. "give me a hand with the governor. terence, you had better stay here." carefully watching their chance, the two lads managed to help mr. mckay to the shelter of the poop deck-house, and they were about to return for donaghue and the mulatto when they encountered captain perez and the first mate. both were in a state bordering on frenzy, the captain rolling his eyes and calling for the protection of a thousand saints, while the mate was mumbling mechanically the last compass course, "sur oeste, cuarto oeste" (s.w. by w.). the cowardly officers had deserted their posts! in an instant fanshaw ellerton saw his chance--and took it. "stop him, andy!" he shouted, setting the example by throwing himself upon the peruvian skipper. the man did not resist; he seemed incapable of doing anything. "don't bother about the other," hissed the apprentice. "make this chap come with us to the bridge. i'll be the skipper and he'll be the figurehead." the two chums dragged the captain across the heaving deck, up the swaying monkey-ladder, and gained the lofty bridge. ellerton glanced to windward. his seamanship, poor though it was, began to assert itself. the wind was going down slightly, but, veering to the nor'ard, was causing a horrible jumble of cross-seas--not so lofty as the mountainous waves a few hours ago, but infinitely more trying. the _san martin_, swept on bow, quarter, and broadside, rolled and pitched, the white cascades pouring from her storm-washed decks; yet ellerton realised that she possessed a considerable amount of buoyancy by the way she shook herself clear of the tons of water that poured across her. the wheel was deserted. the steersman, finding that his officers had fled and that the vessel carried no way, had followed his superior's example. cowering under the lee of the funnel casing were about twelve of the crew, including the bo'sun and quartermaster. "tell the captain," yelled ellerton to his chum, "to order those men to set the storm staysail, if they value their hides." andy interpreted the order, which the captain, gaining a faint suspicion of confidence, communicated to the bo'sun. the bare chance of saving their lives urged the men into action. unharmed, they succeeded in gaining the fo'c'sle, and in less than ten minutes the stiff canvas was straining on the forestay. gathering way, the _san martin_, no longer rolling, pounded sluggishly through the foam-flecked sea. ellerton would not risk setting any canvas aft; he was content to let the vessel drive. "ask him whether we have plenty of sea room--whether there is any danger of running ashore during the next hour or so?" andy put the question. "no, señor; there is plenty of sea room." that was enough. the apprentice cared not what course he steered, so long as he kept the waves well on the quarter. when the hurricane was over they could carry on till they fell in with some passing vessel and got a tow into port. "that's right. tell him to take his watch below," continued the apprentice. "and you might get hold of some oilskins, andy." obediently the skipper left the bridge, and, steeling himself for a long trick at the helm, ellerton grasped the spokes of the wheel with firm hands. at length the day broke, and with it a regular deluge of rain, pouring from an unbroken mass of scudding, deep blue clouds. the rain beat down the vicious crests, but the sea still ran "mountains high." about noon mr. mckay expressed his intention of joining ellerton on the bridge, and assisted by his son he left the shelter of the poop. from the foot of the poop-ladder to that of the bridge a life-line had been rigged to give the protection that the shattered bulwarks no longer afforded. when midway between the two ladders, a roll of the vessel caused mr. mckay to lurch heavily towards the rope. his wounded limb proved unequal to the strain, and falling heavily upon the main rope his weight broke the lashings that held it to the ring-bolt. before andy could save him, mr. mckay had crashed against the main hatchway. "hurt?" asked andy anxiously. "i'm afraid so," replied his father, manfully suppressing a groan. "my leg is broken." by dint of considerable exertion the sufferer was taken back to the saloon, and the ship's surgeon, who had been routed out of his cabin, pronounced the injury to be a double fracture. ellerton, his whole attention fixed upon keeping the vessel on her course, had neither observed nor heard the noise of the accident, and great was his concern when andy mounted the bridge and informed him of the catastrophe. "i think i can leave the command," he remarked. "no doubt that yellow-skinned johnny has recovered his nerve by now." five minutes later captain antonio perez gained the bridge. he had lost his suave, self-confident manner, and his general appearance showed a change for the better in his moral and physical condition. yet, without a word of thanks to the english lad who had saved the situation, he called up two of the seamen, and placed them at the wheel. "he might have been a bit civil over the business," remarked andy. "poor brute! i dare say he feels his position pretty acutely. i only hope he won't break down in a hurry," replied ellerton. for the next two days the _san martin_ fled before the storm, the trysail keeping her steady and checking any tendency to broach-to. the wind had increased to almost its former violence on the evening of the first day, but the vessel was then close on the outer edge of the storm-path. mr. mckay, who was suffering considerably, bore his injuries gamely, while terence, who had recovered from his bout of sea-sickness, began to take a new interest in life. quexo, however, still lay on the floor of the stateroom, refusing to eat or drink, and groaning dismally at intervals. "i reckon he's sorry he followed the americanos across the wide river that tastes of salt," said terence, quoting the nicaraguan way of speaking of the sea. "even i can feel sorry for him." "that's a good sign," remarked andy. "yesterday you hadn't the pluck to feel sorry for yourself." on the morning of the fourth day of the storm the wind piped down considerably, and the peruvian captain ordered the fore and aft canvas to be set. the engine-room staff also began to take steps to attempt the temporary repairing of the shafting, and had already removed a considerable portion of the plating of the tunnel. as yet the sky was completely overcast. at noon the officers, sextant in hand, waited in vain for an opportunity of "shooting the sun." where the ship was, no one on board knew, though it was agreed that she was driven several miles to the south'ard of her proper course. the weather began to improve as night drew on. the setting sun was just visible in a patch of purple sky, showing that fine weather might be expected from that quarter. the glass, too, was rising; not rapidly, but gradually and surely. "now for a good night's rest," exclaimed andy, for throughout the gale the lads had turned in "all standing." but andy was doomed to be disappointed, for at four bells in the middle watch ( a.m.) a sudden crash roused the sleepers from their berths. the _san martin_ was hard and fast aground. chapter iii abandoned hastily assuring the helpless mr. mckay that they would soon return and tell him how things really stood, the three lads rushed on deck. it needed no seaman's instinct to tell that the _san martin_ was doomed. scudding before the lessening gale, she had been lifted on the crest of a huge roller and dropped fairly on the rocks. her forward part, trembling under the tremendous blows of the waves, was hard and fast aground, while her after part, lifting to the heave of the ocean, assisted, like a gigantic lever, in the destruction of her bows. above the roar of the waves, the howling of the wind, and the shattering of iron plates, arose the frantic shouts of the crew. already demoralised by their trying experiences in the gale, the last vestiges of discipline had vanished. in the darkness, for now no favouring lightning flash came to throw a light upon the scene, the peruvian crew rushed madly for the boats, fighting, cursing, entreating, and imploring the saints. for'ard a succession of rapid cracks, as the trysail, having burst its sheets, was flogging itself to ribbons, added to the din, till the foremast, buckling close to the deck, crashed over the side. "come on," shouted andy, and even then his voice sounded faint in the midst of the terrifying uproar, "let's get the pater on deck." ellerton shook his head. "better stop where he is. what chance do you think these fellows will have?" and he pointed to the struggling mass of frenzied seamen as they clambered into the boats. already the cutter, still in the davits, was crowded, the men striving to swing her clear with oars and stretchers, while others were scrambling up the boat ladders. round swung the foremost davit. the men who had already climbed into her began to lower away the boat-falls. a sudden lurch sent the cutter, already at a dangerous angle, crashing into the ship's side. the lower block of the foremost fall became disentangled, and, amidst a chorus of shrieks, the boat swung stern in the air, shooting its human freight into the surging waters. the next instant a huge wave dashed the swaying cutter into matchwood, the wind drowning the death shouts of a score of hapless victims. heedless of the fate of their comrades, the remainder of the crew made a headlong rush for one of the quarter boats. being more to lee'ard, for the _san martin_ had struck with the wind on her starboard quarter, this boat seemed to stand little chance. ellerton could hear the captain's voice, urging the men to swing the boat clear. the apprentice sprang towards the falls. "you are not going to throw away your life, are you?" shouted andy, grasping him by the shoulder. "no; but i'm going to give those fellows a chance. stand by that rope, take a turn round that cleat, and lower when i give the word." the last of the peruvian seamen had scrambled into the boat. not one of these cared who was left; all that they knew was that a few remained to man the falls, but in the darkness they were unaware that it was the british lads who stayed to help them. "lower!" yelled ellerton. swiftly the ropes ran through the blocks. the crest of a wave received the frail boat, and, more by luck than by good management, the seamen contrived to disengage the falls. then the oars splashed, and the next instant the boat was lost to sight in the darkness. for a brief instant the chums stood in silence, grasping one of the now burdenless davits. they were alone--a crippled man, three lads, and a native boy--upon an abandoned vessel that threatened every moment to part amidships. where they were they had no possible knowledge. the ship was aground, but whether on an isolated rock, or, what was more than likely, upon the edge of an encircling reef, they knew not. they must wait till daylight--if they were fated to see the dawn of another day--but they were determined that the anxious period of waiting should not be passed in idleness. returning to the cabin where mr. mckay was lying in suspense, awaiting news of their hazardous position, the lads briefly explained what had happened during their absence on deck. "we must hope for the best," observed the invalid. "and, after that, we stand a better chance than those in the boat. even if those poor fellows escape being dashed to death upon a rock-bound shore, or being engulfed in the waves, they'll have a terrible time. no water or provisions, no compass--a thousand tortures before they reach land or are picked up by a passing craft." "i think the seas are getting less heavy," said andy. "is it because the tide is falling?" "the tide may have something to do with it," replied mr. mckay; "though the rise and fall is barely four feet." "our stern seems to be settling," said ellerton. "the ship doesn't appear quite so lively." "that may be because the water is pouring into the after-hold," remarked andy. "in that case the vessel is settling on the bottom; otherwise she would sink. that's another point in our favour, and it often happens that there is deep water close to the reef," said the apprentice. "but let's to work. terence, you know where the steward's pantry is. take a lamp and fetch up as much stuff as you can carry. andy, will you please take quexo with you and bring up a couple of barricoes of water?" while they were thus engaged, ellerton collected five lifebelts, one of which he proceeded to fasten round mr. mckay's body. "we may want them, sir; but, on the other hand, we may not. in any case, if there is an island under our lee we had better wear these, especially if we have to land through the surf." "i fancy i shall have some difficulty in getting through the surf," replied mr. mckay with a grim smile. "never fear, sir; we'll pull you through," was the determined assurance. presently andy and the mulatto returned, having found and secured a supply of the precious fluid. "the fore-hold and the engine-room are flooded," reported the former, "and i think there's a hole on the starboard quarter. but i believe there's some of the crew up for'ard--i heard them groaning." "let's go and see," replied ellerton, buckling on a lifebelt and picking up a lantern. "be careful, lads," cautioned mr. mckay. "trust us," answered andy, likewise putting on a belt. "we need not wait for terence." "why, it's not half so rough," he continued as they gained the deck, which had settled to a list of less than ten degrees, and no longer lifted as the rollers swept past. "see, very few of the waves break over the ship." "it's a bad job those cowardly beggars pushed off," replied ellerton. "they would have done better to have waited. but listen!" above the moaning of the wind came the unmistakable sound of a groan. "it's down there," exclaimed andy, pointing to a battened-down hatchway. "there's no harm in opening it now," replied his companion, casting off the lashings and unbolting the heavy iron slide. "now, then, down you go." andy, holding the lantern well behind his head, slowly descended, but at two steps from the bottom of the ladder his feet encountered water. at the same time a deafening bellow echoed in the confined space. "great snakes!" he exclaimed, "it's an ox!" "poor brute, it's nearly drowned, and half starved into the bargain. and here is a pen full of sheep. i wonder where they keep the fodder?" "here's some pressed hay," announced andy after a short examination. "and i don't think the salt water has touched it." "throw some down in that corner," continued his companion, pointing to a part of the flat that the sea, by reason of the ship's list, had not reached. "we'll let the brutes loose; they can't do much damage." "now set to, lads," exclaimed mr. mckay, when they returned to the saloon, and found terence with a regular store of provisions--the loot of the steward's pantry. "make a good meal, for our future movements are uncertain." "it will be light in another hour," remarked andy. "and the sea's going down," chimed in the apprentice. "and our spirits are rising," added terence. "you speak for yourself, terry, my boy," replied andy, laughing. "your spirits were low enough a few days ago." all hands set to with a will, for even quexo had recovered his former appetite. "this storm has lasted longer than usual," remarked mr. mckay. "it was of more than ordinary severity. still, i've known similar instances, and within three hours of the height of the hurricane the wind has died away to a flat calm." "then we shall be able to take to the boat almost immediately after daylight." "is there one left?" "two. i think one is stove in, but the other seems sound." "a long voyage in an open boat on the ocean is no light matter," replied mr. mckay. "if we were in the latitude of the trades the task would be easier; but here we are, i imagine, in a zone of calms alternating with violent hurricanes. the best thing we can do is to land on the island--if we are near one, as i firmly believe is the case--and bring ashore as many of the ship's stores as we can. then, if not sighted by any passing craft, we can set to work and deck in one of the boats, provision her, and shape a course for the nearest trading station. by the time the boat is ready i trust i shall be firmer on my feet." "do you hear that, quexo?" asked andy. "you may be ashore in a few hours." quexo grinned approvingly. he had had enough of the sea. "don't build up his hopes too high," continued mr. mckay. "even if the weather continues fine, it may be days before we can effect a landing." "why?" "because after these hurricanes, although the open sea is comparatively calm, a heavy ground swell sets in on shore. a boat would certainly be capsized, unless there happens to be a shelter formed by a barrier reef of coral. but now, up on deck. it will be daylight in less than ten minutes." eagerly the lads ran up the companion, and what a sight met their gaze as the tropical day quickly mastered the long hours of darkness! the _san martin_ lay on the outer edge of a long, level reef of coral, against which the surf still hammered, throwing up clouds of white spray. less than fifty yards from the port quarter was a gap in the barrier, giving entrance to the lagoon. the doomed ship had missed the opening by half her own length. she lay with her bows pointed diagonally towards the reef. her funnel and foremast had gone by the board, while she showed unmistakable signs of breaking in two, for her bow and stern had "sagged" till amidships her port side was flush with the water, while, correspondingly, her starboard side, owing to the ship's list, was but five feet higher. but it was neither the ship nor the reef that attracted the castaways' attention. barely a quarter of a mile away was an island, rugged and precipitous, the highest point towering a thousand feet above the level of the ocean. in several places the ground sloped towards the sea, the valley being thickly covered with luxuriant foliage, while for a distance of nearly a mile was a strand of dazzling whiteness, upon which the sheltered waters of the lagoon lapped as gently as the ripples of a mill pond in a summer's breeze. elsewhere, so far as could be seen, the rocks rose sheer from the sea. "any sign of the boat?" asked andy. "no; but i'll get a glass," replied ellerton, and swarming up the stanchion of the bridge--for the ladder had been swept away--he gained the chart-house. from his elevated position he swept the shore with the telescope, but no trace of the boat was to be seen. neither, so far as he could judge, was the island inhabited. on rejoining his comrades, the young apprentice next directed his attention to the two remaining boats. one, a gig, was, as he had surmised, stove in, three of the planks being shattered. for the time being she was useless, though, he reflected, she might be patched up at some future date. the other, a -ft. cutter, was still secured to the boat-booms, and was practically uninjured. her size and weight would, he knew, be a severe drawback when the time came to hoist her outboard. "i vote we bring your pater up on deck, andy," said he. "we must have him out of the saloon sooner or later. the sooner the better, i think, because he can, if we place him on a pile of cushions close to the break of the poop, direct operations." it was a long and tedious task. mr. mckay was no featherweight, and his injured limb had to be carefully handled. moreover, the companion ladder was steep and narrow. at length ellerton solved the difficulty by procuring one of the men's mess tables, nailing a strut to one end, against which the victim steadied himself by his sound leg while he was stretched at full length on the board. on this improvised sleigh four pairs of strong arms dragged the patient up the steep stairway and on to the poop deck. "what do you think of that, sir?" asked ellerton, pointing to the island of refuge. "isn't it superb?" "it is," assented mr. mckay. "i hope we'll find it so, for we will have to throw ourselves upon its hospitality for a few weeks." "do you know its name, sir?" continued the apprentice. "no; has it one?" was the astonished reply. "the nameless island," announced ellerton. "now, lads, three cheers for the nameless island!" chapter iv the landing this burst of high spirits showed how light-hearted the castaways were in the face of difficulties, for what lay before them and how they were to reach the island required all their powers of thought and action. "how do you propose to get the cutter over the side?" asked mr. mckay. "by means of one of the derricks," replied ellerton promptly. "quite so; but where is the power required to turn the winches to come from? we've no steam at our command, you know, and these winches are not adapted to manual power." the apprentice's face clouded; he thought for a few minutes, then-- "we can top one of the derricks and rig up a tackle, sir." "good!" replied mr. mckay. "but what is the weight of the boat?" "ours on the _tophet_ weighed twelve hundredweight; this one is about the same size." "then rig a gun tackle, and the four of you will manage the job, i think." accordingly two large double blocks were obtained and the rope rove ready for use. one of the blocks was secured to the cud of the derrick, which was then hoisted to an angle of about forty-five degrees. this took time, but at length everything was ready for the crucial test. "now, all together!" the three lads and the mulatto tailed on to the rope. the blocks squeaked as the strain began to tell; the cutter began to lift, then--crash! flat on their backs fell the four lads; high in the air jerked the disengaged lower block. the slings to which it had been fastened had snapped. slowly the victims regained their feet, andy rubbing a tender portion of his anatomy, terence gasping for breath, for andy's head had well-nigh winded him. ellerton was clapping his hands to a rapidly rising bump on the back of his head, while quexo, whose skull was as hard as iron, was hopping all over the deck, rubbing his shins, that had saved the apprentice's head at the mulatto's expense. "try again, boys!" shouted andy. "everything on board this blessed craft seems rotten!" a new span was placed in position, and the tackle again manned, and this time their efforts were crowned with success. the cutter rose slowly in the air, till it hung fire five feet above the shattered bulwarks. "belay, there! man the guy-rope!" the derrick swung outboard, till the cutter was poised above the water and well clear of the sloping sides of the hull. "lower away handsomely." slowly the boat dipped, till at length she rode, sheltered under the lee of her stranded parent, upon the bosom of the ocean. "capital!" exclaimed mr. mckay, as his son swarmed down the rope, disengaged the tackle, and allowed the cutter a generous length of painter. then the work of loading her was begun. it was decided that for the first trip nothing more than was absolutely necessary for immediate use was to be taken, until it was settled where their camp was to be fixed, and whether the island had any inhabitants. "a small barrico of water will be sufficient, though i am certain there are springs amongst those trees," said ellerton. his sense of responsibility was hourly increasing. "a barrel of flour, some tinned goods, canvas and rope for a tent." "not forgetting hatchets, knives, and firearms," added mr. mckay. "firearms?" "aye; one never knows how the natives--if there be natives on the island--will greet us. most of the pacific islanders are fairly peaceable, thanks to missionary enterprise and the fear of a visit from a warship; yet cannibalism still exists. i have known instances of the crews of small 'pearlers' being treacherously surprised, killed, and eaten. so get hold of the arms; you'll probably find the key of the captain's cabin in the chart-house; if not, burst open the door." ellerton departed upon his errand, and presently returned with the news that there was no trace of the key. "here is a sextant and a bundle of charts, however," he added. "they are bound to be useful, although i cannot understand the meaning of the depths on the chart." "they are in 'brazas,' equal to about five and a half english feet. but, as you say, the charts will be of extreme importance to us." "come on, terence, let's burgle the captain's cabin," exclaimed ellerton, laying hold of a hatchet. soon the sound of blows was heard, followed by the splintering of wood, and the two lads returned literally armed to the teeth. each had a couple of rifles slung across his back; terence carried half a dozen revolvers in his arms and a sheath-knife between his teeth, while ellerton staggered beneath the weight of several belts of ball cartridges and a box of revolver ammunition. "there's more to come; the place is like a regular armoury," explained terence. "that's somewhat unusual," replied mr. mckay. "most captains keep firearms of a kind in their cabins. i strongly suspect that those arms were to be sold to some south american insurgents. they are much too good for bartering with the south sea islanders. nevertheless, i'm right glad we have been able to arm ourselves thoroughly, as i expected we should have to be content with a couple of pistols between the lot of us." the work of loading the boat proceeded briskly, till the strictly limited quantity of gear was carefully stowed under the thwarts. then came the question, how were they going to transport the crippled mr. mckay to the shore? "hoist me over by the derrick, of course," replied he. "a couple of rope spans round the plank and their bights slipped over the hook of the lower block, and the trick's done." ellerton and terence thereupon slipped down a rope into the boat and carefully guided the swaying mess table and its helpless burden on to a couple of the after thwarts. this done, they were joined by andy and quexo, and, shipping the heavy ash oars, they pulled clear of the ship. the first fifty yards meant hard and careful rowing, for directly they were beyond the shelter of the stranded vessel they felt the full force of the rollers as they dashed against the coral reef, barely a boat's length to lee'ard. once, indeed, it seemed as if the cutter were bound to be swept upon the rocks; but by dint of the utmost exertions of her crew, the boat surely and slowly drew away from the influence of the rollers. "my word, that was a narrow squeak!" exclaimed andy, wiping his face, from which the perspiration ran freely. "i thought we were going to be capsized that time." "it doesn't say much for the chances of those poor fellows last night," replied ellerton. "they must have dropped smack on top of the reef." "we'll soon find out," said mr. mckay. "you see, they were immediately to lee'ard of the ship, and it was high water at the time. if they survived, we'll find them ashore right enough." "but i saw no sign of the boat when i looked through the glass." "that may be because there is a creek or cove that is invisible from the ship. being directly to wind'ard, we are bound to find either the men or the remains of the boat." "the ship is sitting up well," remarked andy, for, the tide having dropped nearly six feet--it had been abnormally high by reason of the terrific wind--they could see the top of one of her propeller blades. "do you think she'll stay there?" "it certainly doesn't seem as if she is likely to slip off into deep water, but we cannot say for certain. the first fine day there's little or no swell we'll sound all round her. now, give way, lads." the rowers resumed their oars, and the boat, passing through the narrow gap in the reef, gained the shelter of the lagoon. "fine, isn't it?" exclaimed terence enthusiastically, as he rested on his oar and gazed into the clear depths of the tranquil water. "won't we be able to have some bathes?" "you'll have to be careful if you do," remarked mr. mckay. "there are bound to be sharks about." he did not think it advisable to call the lads' attention to a commotion in the water a few hundred yards in front of the boat. from his inclined position he could see ahead, while the rowers had their backs turned in that direction. his keen eyes had detected the sinister dorsal fin of not one, but many sharks, all cutting towards one spot. there could be but little doubt of the fate of the peruvian seamen. the noise of the approaching oars disturbed the huge monsters, and they darted off to the shelter of the rock-strewn floor of the lagoon. unaware of the tragedy, the lads urged the boat almost over the fatal spot, and five minutes later the cutter's forefoot grounded on the sandy beach. "terence, i want you and quexo to stay in the boat," said ellerton, after the survivors had, by a common impulse, knelt down and returned thanks to divine providence for their escape. "keep her stern from slewing round, so that we can push off in a hurry. andy and i are going to explore." and, buckling on a revolver and an ammunition belt, and grasping a rifle in his hand, ellerton took a flying leap over the bows and alighted on the sand. the lads found themselves on the shore of a small bay, its extremities bounded by two towering cliffs, that rose sheer from the lagoon. that to the left was not less than five hundred feet in height, while the other was but slightly lower. midway between these impassable boundaries the land sloped abruptly to the beach, and was thickly covered with cocoanut palms. "keep your weather eye lifting, andy," cautioned ellerton, who had taken the precaution of charging both the magazine of his rifle and the chambers of his revolver. it was an unnecessary warning, for andy was an infinitely better scout than his companion; still, it showed that ellerton was fast adopting the manner of life required in a wild and unsettled country. skirting the edge of the wood, the lads kept a vigilant look-out for any traces of human agency, but nothing was visible. presently they came to a small stream, which, trickling down the steep hillside, was lost in the sand. "there'll be no lack of fresh water," exclaimed andy thankfully, for he knew the value of that precious fluid. "but, i say, isn't everything quiet?" for, save the babbling of the brook and the distant roar of the breakers on the reef, there was an unaccustomed silence. not a bird sang in the groves, not an animal rustled the thick undergrowth. "i think we may take it for granted that the island is uninhabited--at least, this part," said andy, as they completed their walk along the shores of the bay. "otherwise, there's almost sure to be a beaten track to the shore." "it doesn't promise much for the boat's crew," answered ellerton. then, with an exclamation of surprise, he shouted: "look! what's that?" lying on the sand a few feet from the water's edge was a mournful relic of the unfortunate boat, her back-board bearing the words _san martin_. a little farther they found an oar. "there were two boats, remember," said ellerton. "and one we know was capsized." "i vote we explore the next bay," exclaimed andy. "there's no suitable clearing here for a camp, and felling trees takes time; so let's get back to the boat." "well?" asked mr. mckay on their return. "we must push off and land on the other side of the cliff," said his son. "there may be a better site for our tent. it's too steep and densely wooded here." "any signs of the crew?" "only part of their boat." "i feared as much," replied mr. mckay. * * * * * "this looks more promising," exclaimed andy enthusiastically, as the boat slowly rounded the northernmost of the two cliffs. here the land sloped less abruptly towards the lagoon, while in places there were terraces almost bare of trees. in the background towered a range of mountains whose rugged sides gave the appearance of being unclimbable, while on either hand of the bay rose lofty cliffs. the beach, too, was better adapted for landing purposes than where they had first touched, consisting of sand interspersed by ledges of rocks jutting seawards, thus forming convenient natural jetties. "this will do admirably," said ellerton, pointing to a narrow cove betwixt the ledges. "there's sand at its head, so there's no fear of the boat being damaged." chapter v the camp slowly the cutter was backed in till its sternpost stuck on the smooth, even bottom. the castaways could not have chosen a better harbour. on either hand the rocks, smooth and flat-topped, allowed a boat to be moored alongside without danger of being left high and dry at low water, while the ledge shelved so gradually that it was possible to bring the boat's gunwale level with the natural pier at any state of the tide. "i think we had better make a tour of exploration as we did before," said andy. "not that i think this part of the island is inhabited any more than yonder bay." "say, andy," exclaimed terence, "isn't it about time i had a spell ashore?" "all right, terence," replied ellerton. "you go with andy and take quexo; i'll stay with mr. mckay." "thanks, hoppy," replied terence, and without further ado he jumped ashore. "here, take this rope and make her stern fast before you go," said ellerton. "and you, andy, stand by with the painter." "where shall i make fast to?" asked terence. "this rock is as smooth as a table." "see if there's a lump of rock on the other side." terence crossed the landing-place, holding the rope's-end in his hand. suddenly he shouted: "come here, you fellows! here's a boat!" there was a rush to where terence stood, while even mr. mckay raised himself on his elbow, eager to hear the news. lying bottom upwards on the sandy shore was the ill-fated boat in which the last of the crew attempted to reach the shore. her bows were considerably damaged, while amidships a portion of her keel and both garboards had been stove in, leaving a jagged hole nearly two feet in diameter. four or five oars lay on the shore within a few feet of the boat, but there were no signs of the hapless crew; the sand above high-water mark was innocent of footprints. "they are drowned, sure enough," said andy sadly. alas! though they did not know it, the fate of the crew was far more terrible. holed on the outer reef, the boat, rapidly filling, had been swept into the lagoon, where the waves, though high, were not so terrific as outside the coral barrier. well it was that the watchers on the wreck heard not the awful shrieks as the sharks fought for and seized their helpless prey. ellerton returned to the cutter to inform mr. mckay of their discovery, while the others set off to explore. in less than an hour they were back, and reported that there were no signs of human habitation, although the shore was strewn with the remains of the first boat that left the wreck, including most of the oars, gratings, also a quantity of timber, presumably from the shattered decks of the _san martin_. "but we've found a fine place to pitch the tent," continued andy. "you see the second terrace? well, at the extreme right is a steep ravine. the other two sides are enclosed by a wall of rock, while on this side there is a natural path, although you can't distinguish it from where we are." "that sounds all right," said his father. "but how are we to get the gear up there--including the useless lump of animated clay in the shape of myself?" "i hadn't thought of that," replied andy. "we must find a more convenient spot at first," continued mr. mckay. "then, when we have landed all the gear from the ship that we can possibly manage to move, we can devise some means of setting up a more substantial dwelling on the terrace you mention. now, if you will please carry me ashore, you can proceed to unload the boat." in spite of the adaptable jetty, the work of getting mr. mckay--crippled as he was--on shore was no easy task. the patient bore the discomfort gamely, uttering a heartfelt sigh of relief as the lads set the improvised stretcher down in the shade of a thin grove of cocoanut palms. "how far away is the stream--i think you mentioned there was a stream in the bay?" asked ellerton. "less than a hundred yards away. it's very clean, but not so full as the one we found," replied andy. "then let's set up the tent. this place will do for a day or two at least." the chosen site consisted of soft springy turf, sloping very gradually towards the lagoon. in the background was a wall of rock, about forty feet in height, forming the limit of the next terrace, while on either hand the trees served as an efficient screen from all winds save those blowing from the sea. by the aid of their axes the lads felled five young palms, and soon stripped them of their heads. four of the trunks were then lashed in pairs, and set up with guy-ropes at a distance of about fifteen feet apart, and one end of the fifth pole was placed over the crutch formed by one of the pairs. this done, ellerton swarmed up the other pair of poles and fastened a small pulley to the extremity of one of them. a rope was passed through the block, one end being lashed to the lower part of the fifth pole that rested on the ground. "haul away, lads!" he shouted. and the pole, lifted into a horizontal position, was quickly placed between, thus forming the ridge of the tent. one of the fore and aft sails was then thrown over the ridge pole and its end pegged down; while to make doubly sure, the lads piled stones and sand upon the ends of the canvas. filling in the back and front of the tent with portions of another sail took an hour's steady work, and the dwelling was then pronounced ready for occupation. the box of ammunition, the rifles, bread cask, and water-beakers were neatly stowed against the afterpart of their dwelling, till, on mr. mckay's suggestion, a low barricade was erected close to the flap of the tent. then pieces of canvas were cut and laid down to serve as beds, the cripple having the use of the cushions that had been brought ashore. "i don't see why we should sleep on the hard ground," remarked terence. "of course, we have been used to it, but, after sleeping in a comfortable bunk, we are bound to feel the difference. so let us cut a number of small trees and fasten the strips of canvas to them like a stretcher." this was accordingly done, the beds being raised from the ground by means of two stout planks lashed to short uprights driven firmly into the earth. "there we are, all in a row," exclaimed terence, as they surveyed the result of their labour with evident satisfaction. "now, quexo," said andy, "go down to the beach and gather as much driftwood as you can carry. and, hoppy, you start opening that tin of beef there, and i'll slice up the bread. but----" "what?" exclaimed terence and ellerton. "we are a set of donkeys! we haven't brought a pot or a kettle ashore with us." "boil the water in the beef-tin," said ellerton. "spoil the coffee," objected andy. "either that or nothing. but how about a light? has anyone any matches?" more disappointment. terence suggested using the object glass of the telescope as a burning glass, but the sun was low in the heavens; andy was for sprinkling some powder on a heap of dry leaves and firing it by means of a blank cartridge; while ellerton vaguely remembered that fire might be obtained by rubbing two pieces of dry wood together. "have you ever tried to make a blaze that way?" asked mr. mckay. "i don't think you would succeed. savages can do the trick, i know, but i've never seen a white man obtain fire by that means. i would have suggested flint and steel. we have plenty of steel, only, unfortunately, flints are as scarce as diamonds on this island, i fancy. however, now you have exhausted your brains over the problem, allow me to assist you. andy, put your hand in the inside pocket of my coat and you'll find my metal match-box. "now you are satisfied," he continued, as his son produced the required article. "the fact of the matter is, you were all in such a hurry to get ashore that you never gave a thought to the things most urgently required. lucky for you, my lad, you've a father to think for you. now will you please empty that case of biscuits? i am afraid some spray splashed over it, and in time the salt will make the biscuits soft." andy did as he was requested, but a moment later he uttered an exclamation of surprise, for on opening the lid he discovered a kettle, saucepan, and coffee-pot, knives, forks, and spoons, while wedged in between the metal articles were bottles containing salt, pepper, vinegar, and several useful drugs in tabloid form. "i say, pater, you are----" "merely one who has learnt by experience the value of forethought. while you were busy on deck i sent quexo to gather these things and stow them in a box." suddenly the conversation was interrupted by a series of shrieks. the lads seized their rifles and rushed to meet the mulatto, whose face was livid with fear. "a caiman is after me, señor," he shouted in his native tongue. "nonsense," replied andy; then turning to his companions he explained that the mulatto had declared that an alligator had run after him. "it's impossible," he added. "however, we'll see what's frightened him." on emerging from the edge of the wood that had obstructed their view of that part of the bay where quexo had been to gather dry sticks, the lads burst into a roar of laughter. sedately waddling over the sand was a huge turtle. "follow me, hoppy," exclaimed andy. "get between him and the sea; we can't afford to lose this chance." finding its retreat cut off, the turtle began to throw up showers of sand with its flippers, but andy rushed it, and, seizing one of the creature's horny limbs, strove to capsize the reptile. the task was beyond him; even with the aid of his two chums he could not raise the shell-clad creature from the sand. "get hold of an oar and one of the empty tubs," he exclaimed breathlessly. "you go, terence. hoppy and i will prevent the turtle getting away." presently terence returned with the desired article, and using the oar as a lever the three lads succeeded in turning the turtle on its back, when andy, with a dexterous sweep of his knife, cut the animal's throat. "hurrah! turtle steak to-morrow, pater!" he shouted on their return to the camp. quexo gathered up the firewood that he had dropped in his flight, and as darkness set in, a roaring fire was kindled, and a gorgeous supper eaten. then, ere the last dying embers had ceased to glow, terence, who had volunteered to keep the first two hours' watch, shouldered his rifle and took up his position in the shelter of the neighbouring palm-trees. chapter vi the animal that wouldn't be rescued no unusual incident marked the castaways' first night on the island. guard was relieved with the utmost regularity, while the weary watches were spent in gazing at the exterior of the tent and listening to the regular breathing of its four inmates. at length the day broke, and the camp became the scene of activity. breakfast over, there was a rush to the boat; quexo, however, remaining with the injured mr. mckay. the weather showed every indication of remaining fine, a light south-easterly breeze--a part of the regular trade-wind--blowing off shore, while not a cloud was visible in the dark blue sky. "we must make two trips to-day," observed andy, as they pushed off from the little natural dock. "yesterday the clouds kept the sun's rays from us, but to-day we will not be able to work during midday." "honestly, i don't feel like work," remarked terence, stifling a yawn. "i suppose there is some excuse for you, seeing you did two turns of sentry-go last night," replied his friend. "still, this is an exceptional time, and we must set to work with a will. can we get over the reef, do you think, hoppy?" "we had better stick to the channel," replied ellerton. "you see, we don't know the actual depth, and there is a slight swell on. we'll board on the port quarter, so as to get between the ship and the reef." the lads plied their oars steadily yet without undue exertion, and in less than half an hour from the time of leaving the shore they ran alongside the stranded _san martin_. ellerton's first care on boarding the wreck was to supply fresh water and food to the animals. to get them safely ashore was a difficult problem, for the ox was an unwieldy brute to ship aboard the cutter, while it was equally risky to let it swim ashore on account of the presence of numerous sharks. the sheep could be trussed up and laid upon the bottom boards. andy and terence at once made for the provision-room, and returned laden with flour, salt beef, tinned goods, and some small chests of pressed tea. these articles they placed on deck close to the entry port and proceeded to procure more. ellerton, having attended to the live stock, made a thorough exploration of the after cabins and staggered on deck looking like a second-hand wardrobe dealer, for he realised the necessity of having a good supply of clothing. then a huge pile of bedding, including waterproof sheets, blankets, and pillows, was added to the already large collection of plunder. "i think this lot will be sufficient for one trip," remarked andy. "we may as well take the rest of the navigating instruments," replied ellerton, "and, what is also necessary, the carpenter's chest." "capital," replied his chum. "that will, of course, come in handy; but won't we require it on board?" "there are enough tools for work both ashore and on board," said ellerton. "i've seen to that. but i should like to get the animals off." "the ox?" "if possible. otherwise we must kill it and bring the carcase ashore piecemeal." andy thought for some moments. he, too, realised the danger of the animal being devoured by sharks. dead or alive, the ox would be far more useful to the castaways. "how are we going to get the brute on deck?" asked terence. this was a poser, for with the fall of the foremast the derricks for working the fore-hold had also been carried away. "we must rig up a pair of sheer-legs," observed ellerton. "well? how are we to pass a sling round the brute's body?" "that's as easy as pie; the beast is quiet enough." "then you take the job on, hoppy; i'd rather not. so let's look sharp with the sheer-legs; there's plenty of tackle to hoist the creature with." the work of making the early preparations proceeded without a hitch, then ellerton commenced his particular part of the operations. by the aid of a lantern which he hung from the deck-beams, the apprentice descended once more to the partially submerged hold. holding a stout canvas sling, with a rope ready to haul tight the moment the lifting gear was in position, ellerton climbed over the partition of the stall. the animal, now refreshed by its food and drink, had lost its docile manner, and eyed the intruder with no friendly spirit. possibly it thought the youth was one of the brutal peruvian cattle-drivers. if so, there was some excuse for its action, for lowering its head the brute tossed the apprentice right over the wooden partition, landing him squarely in the midst of the startled sheep in the adjacent pen. "aren't you nearly ready?" asked a voice from above. ellerton sat up. he was beginning to feel pain in more than one part of his anatomy. the task of tackling an apparently inoffensive ox was not going to be quite so easy as he imagined. "come and bear a hand," he replied. "the brute is getting vicious." andy thereupon descended into the semi-gloom of the hold. "be careful," continued the apprentice. "he nearly bumped my head against the deck-beams; as it was, i had a flight through space." "then i'm not going to pass a sling round him," said andy. "we'll lasso him just behind the horns." this was done, but then came the difficulty: how were they to release the animal from the stall and drag it to the hatchway? "look here," explained andy, "i'll take this end of the line on deck, wind it on to the tackle, and heave taut. then we'll unship this ladder and you can unfasten the front of the stall." "then what happens to me?" objected ellerton. "oh, you can make a bolt to the fore end of the hold and stay there till terence and i haul the brute on deck. then we'll re-ship the ladder and you can get out." ellerton had his doubts, but he followed his companion's counsel. directly there was a strain on the lasso, he threw open the door of the stall and rushed for the shelter of the sheep-pen. bellowing lustily, and contesting every inch of the way, the animal was slowly dragged towards the hatch, to the accompaniment of a lusty "heave-ho!" from the two youths on deck. terence watched the operation with considerable misgiving, expecting every moment to see the rope part and to find himself confronted by the infuriated brute. slowly the animal was forced across the floor of the hold, then its ponderous carcase rose, kicking and plunging, in the air. as the animal appeared above the coaming, the light of day revealed--not a mild ox, but an unusually sturdy specimen of an andalusian bull! "belay there, and lower away the after guy!" shouted andy, "or he'll drop down the hatch again when we let go." terence hastened to obey; but, allowing the sheers to incline too far forward, the infuriated animal's legs touched the deck. instantly the brute made a wild rush, the lassoo parted like pack thread, and the next moment terence and andy were flying for their lives, while ellerton, a prisoner in the hold, heard the thunder of the animal's hoofs and its triumphant bellowing as it revelled in its new-found freedom. andy made a desperate rush aft, but finding the bull close to his heels, gripped a rope hanging from the boat booms, and swung himself into a position of comparative safety upon one of the narrow timbers, his upward flight being assisted a little too well by the obliging animal. [illustration: andy, finding the bull close to his heels, gripped a rope and swung himself into a position of comparative safety] never did matador execute a more rapid leap over the barrier than did andy on this occasion. terence, finding that he was not pursued, took a more leisurely step, and hoisted himself into the main shrouds, where he would be quite safe from any further onslaught of the animal. for a while the bull eyed the fugitives with undisguised disappointment, then spying the heap of bedding and clothing on the deck, it lowered its head and rushed headlong to the attack. both lads watched the proceedings, powerless to prevent the catastrophe, and indulging in vain regrets that their firearms were not available, as beds, blankets, and suits of useful clothing were tossed overboard. at length a heavy blanket became impaled upon the brute's horns, the folds falling over its eyes. in vain the bull strove to toss aside the fabric; then, rushing along the deck, it collided with ventilators, hatchways, and other obstacles, each obstruction increasing its anger. wheeling suddenly, the bull darted through the entry port and vanished over the ship's side. "oh, the boat! the boat will be smashed to firewood," shouted andy, sliding down from his perch. terence had joined him, and, heedless of ellerton's voice shouting to be released from his prison, the two lads rushed to the side of the vessel. the animal had fallen upon one of the thwarts of the boat, breaking it completely in half, and was lying on the bottom-boards plunging wildly. one kick in a vital place and the boat would be holed. "there's enough damage done already," muttered andy. "it's the only way," and running aft he returned in a moment with a loaded rifle. "how are you going to manage it?" asked terence. "you'll do almost as much damage to the boat with the bullet----" "shut up!" growled andy, and, snapping the safety catch of the weapon, he swung himself without further delay into the stern sheets of the cutter. the bull tried to rise, but in vain. its head reared itself slightly above the gunwale; the rifle cracked. "there's fresh beef at least, terence. throw hoppy the tail end of a rope and get him out of that hole." then, as ellerton appeared, blinking in the strong sunshine, andy continued: "throw those things into the boat, and look sharp. we've wasted enough time and precious cargo this morning--all for the sake of that brute." during the time the boat was being rowed shoreward, andy--usually so genial and even-tempered--preserved an almost sullen silence; while ellerton, annoyed at having failed to bring the bull ashore alive, was also ill at ease. nor did the latter guess the cause of his friend's glumness till some days later, when he observed andy repairing a rent in one of his garments. even a graze from an infuriated bull is likely to cause discomfort, he thought, though there is no reason why others should suffer for it. chapter vii the emblem of empire "you've been a long time," remarked mr. mckay, as the three youths made their appearance. "yes," admitted terence, "i'm afraid we have; but we must blame hoppy's bull." "hoppy's bull?" asked mr. mckay. "yes, the ox turned out to be a bull--and a tough customer he was," replied terence, who then proceeded to give mr. mckay a graphic description of how they had tried to unload the bull from the wreck. "and how do you feel to-day?" asked ellerton. "considerably better," replied the injured man. "you've been moved," declared andy, pointing to some marks in the grass. "i plead guilty," replied his father with a smile. "quexo dragged my couch out in the sunshine. i wanted to take an observation at midday. just hand me that chart. i've pricked our position. here it is. reduced to english degrees the latitude is ° ' " s. and the longitude ° ' " w. of greenwich. as i suspected, we are on the fringe of the low archipelago, well away from the great circle route between panama and new zealand, and equally remote from the regular tracks between the sandwich islands and cape horn. that means that unless a whaler or stray trading vessel puts in here, or that we make the cutter seaworthy enough for a thousand-mile voyage, our stay here is likely to be indefinitely prolonged." "i'm sure i don't mind," observed andy. "nor i, if only my people knew we were safe," added terence, and ellerton expressed himself in a similar manner. "isn't the heat oppressive?" said andy. "it's like an oven here." "yes," assented his father. "i can see we've made a mistake in choosing this spot. it's splendidly sheltered--too much so--for what with the rocks behind us and the palm groves on either side, the air cannot circulate. we must find a more open spot on the next terrace." "there's no reason why we shouldn't have two camps--one for stormy weather and the other for the dry season," replied andy. "once we've finished with the wreck we can set to and build a more substantial home. but what do you say? hadn't we better unload the boat?" "i'm game," replied ellerton. "what did you bring ashore?" asked mr. mckay. "mostly provisions, bedding, and clothing, though that beastly bull tossed a lot of stuff overboard. we've also brought the rest of the navigation instruments." "are you making another trip to-day?" "i hope so," replied ellerton. "i shall not be satisfied till those poor sheep are safely ashore. by the by, andy, you might tell quexo to build a fence between the rock and the edge of this terrace. it won't take long, and it will inclose enough pasture land to feed the sheep for some time to come." "i'll tell him directly we've had lunch; but come on, unloading the boat will take all our spare time before lunch, and we mustn't work too hard in this broiling sun." by the time the cutter's cargo was brought up to the camp quexo had prepared the meal. this over, the inhabitants of the nameless island indulged in a siesta till the sun was sufficiently low in the heavens to enable them to resume work. "don't forget to bring some lamps ashore," said mr. mckay, as the three lads prepared to set off to the wreck. "and a bundle of signal flags, while you are about it." this time the salvage operations were uninterrupted. the sheep, securely trussed up, were placed in the boat, while the bunting, lamps, a portable galley, and a set of blacksmith's tools, including a bellows and anvil, were also lowered into the cutter without mishap. "let's get the hatch off and see what is in the forehold," suggested ellerton. the hold was full of water, as the lads had expected, but a hasty examination showed that the part of the cargo nearest the opening was composed of several sheets of galvanised corrugated iron. "this is fortunate," exclaimed andy. "we'll be able to knock up a decent house. but what's that i can see for'ard?" "looks like farming implements," suggested terence. "you are wrong," replied andy. "i know; it's what the americans term a runabout." "a what?" asked ellerton. "a runabout--otherwise a motor-car." "fancy a motor-car on the nameless island!" exclaimed terence, and the lads burst into a fit of hearty laughter at the incongruous idea. "we'll have it ashore in time," observed andy. "it will come in useful." "how?" "never mind how. i have an idea, and, all being well, i'll fix it up to a good purpose." "suppose we try and find the bill of lading and the charter-party; they will give us some idea of the nature of the cargo." a search revealed the required documents, but, being in spanish, the apprentice could make no meaning to the text. "snakes!" ejaculated andy. "there's enough to set us up as universal providers! woollen and cotton goods, boots and leggings, hardware of american manufacture, nine cases of rifles--for some blooming insurgents more than likely-- , rounds of ammunition, and--hullo, this looks dangerous!--two tons of dynamite; building and railroad materials, agricultural implements, and one petrol-driven runabout, consigned to monsieur georges lacroix, grand bassin, tahiti. well, i'm afraid monsieur georges lacroix will have to wait for his motor-car!" "by jove, we are lucky!" ejaculated ellerton. "that is, provided we get the stuff ashore." "we'll do it," replied his chum resolutely. "only give us time and good weather, and we'll leave precious little on the _san martin_, i can assure you." "time to be off," exclaimed terence. "it will be dark in an hour." so, thrusting the documents into his belt, andy dropped over the side, and received the rest of the articles that the lads had collected. then, well laden, the boat returned to the shore. "we've much to be thankful for," exclaimed mr. mckay, after he had perused the ship's papers. "there is, i think, no need for anxiety as to our future. you brought the signal flags, i hope?" "yes," replied ellerton, "and a couple of peruvian ensigns." "good! i'm going to make up a union jack. there are two reasons for doing so. the first is that it can be used as a means of attracting passing vessels; the second, and more important to my mind, is that it signifies that the island becomes part of the british empire. i've been going into the question pretty deeply. you may be aware that the low archipelago belongs to france. these islands consists of a number of flat coral islands, hence their name. now, as this island is lofty and of volcanic origin, i cannot see that it can be classed as belonging to the low archipelago, even though it is not far distant from that group. neither does it appear to have been inhabited, so we may be pretty safe in claiming it. terence, there's a pencil and paper close to your elbow; will you please sketch a plan of a union jack?" terence did so, but the result was not to mr. mckay's satisfaction. "you try, andy." nor was andy's attempt any more satisfactory, so ellerton was put to the test. "shame on you, lads!" exclaimed mr. mckay reproachfully. "three members of the good old british empire, and unable to draw its national ensign correctly. here, hand me that pencil." "now do you see," he continued, after he had explained the various minute particulars of the flag. "there's a broad white diagonal above the two portions of st. patrick's cross next to the pole, and a broad white diagonal below the two portions farthest from the pole. if the flag is hoisted in any manner but the correct the ensign becomes a signal of distress. often in bygone days hostile ships have attempted to sail under british colours, and in nine cases out of ten their ignorance of its peculiarities has led to their undoing. however, we'll postpone the cutting out till the rest of the boat's cargo is brought up." "how is quexo getting on?" asked ellerton. "he's been away the whole afternoon. i guess your fence is nearly completed by now." "then i'll go and see how he is progressing," remarked the apprentice. the mulatto had indeed made rapid strides, for only a few feet more remained to be done, so ellerton returned to the boat to liberate the sheep. ere nightfall the pen was tenanted by a score of animals, frisking with enjoyment at finding themselves once more in pasture. that evening three large lamps contributed to the comfort of the tent. the lads, tired out with their exertions, were "taking things easy," lamenting the fact that there was no literature to beguile the time. mr. mckay, having been raised to a sitting position, called for the bunting. laboriously he threaded a needle and commenced his lengthy task. "one moment, sir," exclaimed ellerton. "wouldn't a sewing machine be better?" "a what? bless the lad! where's a machine to be had?" "on board, sir. i noticed a couple in the fo'c'sle. you see, a seaman has to make his own duds." "very well, i'll put off the job till to-morrow, if you'll remember to bring one of the things ashore." "any need to keep watch to-night, pater?" asked andy. "i think it would be advisable till we've explored the island. not that i anticipate any interference, but forewarned is forearmed." mr. mckay's words proved to be correct. nothing occurred to disturb the camp during the second night ashore. "do you think that terence and you can manage by yourselves?" asked mr. mckay during breakfast. "i think so," replied ellerton. "then andy can take quexo and make an exploration of the interior. i particularly want him to reach the summit of the hill, so as to find out if there are other islands in the vicinity." "you understand, andy?" continued his father. "keep a sharp look-out for signs of past or present inhabitants, any animals you may come across--there may be a few pigs--and, above all, note the general extent of the island and the position of its neighbours, if visible. don't overburden yourselves; a revolver and twenty rounds apiece, a water-bottle, and some provisions will be quite enough to carry. rest on the summit of the hill during the heat of the day, and get back here well before sunset." having seen the explorers on their way, ellerton and donaghue pushed off the cutter and rowed to the wreck. it was again an ideal morning, and without the faintest hitch the boat was made fast alongside the battered hull of the _san martin_. "i've a mind to try and patch up that gig," remarked ellerton, gazing at the battered boat. "take too much time," was terence's reply. "no, i mean to fasten some painted canvas over the hole and nail some copper sheathing outside the canvas to protect it. it won't be a long job, so meanwhile you might clear all the light gear out of the cabins and saloon." two hours sufficed to effect the temporary repairs, and the gig on being launched let in very little water. ellerton was overjoyed with his success. "we'll take a double load ashore, terence," he exclaimed. "we may as well make a start by clearing the for'ard hold." so saying, ellerton began to strip off his clothing. he was an expert swimmer and diver, and these qualifications stood him in good stead. taking a strong hook attached to a rope in his hand, he dived from the coaming of the hatchway. the top of the stacks of galvanised iron was but a few feet below the surface, and in a few seconds the hook was affixed to the wire rope that held the plates together. then, regaining the deck, the apprentice assisted his companion in hauling their booty out of the hold. six times the operation was repeated, till the deck resembled a "tin" city in the western plains of arizona. "it takes it out of you," remarked ellerton. "i wish we could get rid of the water in the hold; though i'm afraid the vessel's too badly strained to be able to patch up her sides." "even then we would have a bother to get rid of the water," replied terence. "still, we've done very well up to now." "there's all that railway line material underneath the iron sheeting; that will want some shifting." "we'll do it some time, but now we'll get off home." it seemed natural for the lads to talk of the camp as "home," for already they were becoming attached to the free, yet none the less comfortable, manner of living. "wait while i get the sewing machine from the fo'c'sle. but you may as well come, too, and we'll take both of them." with this, ellerton, accompanied by terence, made his way for'ard. in the gloom of the stuffy fo'c'sle, the sight of which forcibly reminded him of his quarters on the _tophet_, ellerton found the required articles. "hullo, here's a find!" he exclaimed, holding up a concertina. "sling the blessed thing overboard," replied terence laughing. "if you take it ashore it's bound to make trouble in the camp." "it may come in handy." ellerton looked upon everything as being likely "to come in handy." he would have overstocked the island with useless things in the hope that they might be of use at some distant date. in this case, did he but know it, the concertina was fated to play a most useful part. "all right, then," assented terence good-humouredly. "to look at us now one would think we were going to run old women's sewing meetings and popular saturday night concerts." with the gig in tow, the lads returned to the shore, putting off the unloading of their boat till the evening, though they brought the sewing machines with them to the tent. "now i can get on," exclaimed mr. mckay. "it's slow work lying here and unable to do a decent bit of hard work." lunch, followed by the customary siesta, occupied the rest of the afternoon. by the aid of a telescope andy and quexo had been seen on the summit of the hill, and their descent followed till an intervening spur hid them from sight. mr. mckay calculated that they would be home within a couple of hours. "you might cut down a suitable palm tree--one about forty feet in height--terence," he added. "i should like to have the flag flying on their return." the tree was easily felled, and a small block, with signal halliards rove, was fastened to its smaller end. this done, a hole was dug to receive the pole, and by the aid of a pair of guys the flagstaff was erected and set up in quite a professional style. about five in the afternoon andy and the mulatto returned. they reported that from the summit of the hill the island appeared to be nearly circular, without any noticeable bays that might serve as boat harbours. the reef extended completely around the island, approaching it closely on the southern side, while there were three well-defined entrances besides the one they already knew about. andy reckoned that the extreme length of the island was about seven miles, its breadth barely a mile less. there were no other islands visible, but as the sea was hazy away on the north-west it was possible that land might lie in that direction. "then, assuming the altitude to be one thousand feet, your horizon would be approximately forty-two miles off," remarked mr. mckay. "well, in that case we are not likely to be troubled by our neighbours, for the nearest island cannot be less than fifty miles away. did you find any signs of the island having been inhabited?" "yes," replied andy, "we found this," and opening a leather sling case he produced a pistol. it was a quaint specimen of a flint-lock weapon, its large-bore barrel eaten with rust and its silver-mounted walnut stock pitted and rotted by exposure. "i don't think the gentleman who dropped this article is in a fit state to call upon us," observed mr. mckay. "nevertheless, it shows that we are not the first civilised people to set foot on the island. what is the interior like?" "there are distinct signs of a volcano about. the top of the hill is most certainly an extinct volcano, while the base is honeycombed with fissures like the volcano of monotombo. otherwise the island is well wooded." "you've done well," commented mr. mckay. "now it's nearly sunset, so there will be just time to hoist the union jack." "finished it, then, pater?" "rather! now, andy, you hoist the emblem of empire!" amid the cheers of the band of britishers the ensign was broken at the masthead. for a few minutes it fluttered idly in the breeze, then, as the sun sank beneath the horizon, the jack was slowly lowered. they had asserted the king's authority over the island to which they had now given the name of mckay's island. chapter viii "a sail!" for the next five months things went smoothly at mckay's island. taking every advantage of the remaining period of the dry season, the lads worked hard. almost everything of value was removed from the wreck. the heavy lengths of railway lines were safely transported to the shore; the motor-car, its mechanism not altogether useless, was stored under a canvas canopy on the lower terrace. the ship's dynamos were removed, as well as the lighter portion of the main propelling machinery, while the remaining derricks, practically the whole of the wire rigging, and all the woodwork that could be taken away, had found a safe storage-place on mckay's island. most of the dynamite had been cautiously conveyed ashore and placed in some of the numerous caves at a safe distance from the camp. the remainder of the explosive had been judiciously used--under andy's direction, for his experiences at san eugenio had not been thrown away--in demolishing those portions of the wreck that prevented easy access to the precious cargo. only the bare hull of the _san martin_ now remained. no doubt the first on-shore hurricane would sweep away every vestige of the ill-fated vessel, but the castaways were satisfied with the knowledge that nothing of value remained on board. nor had the work ashore been delayed. already a substantial three-roomed building of galvanised iron reared itself proudly upon the second terrace. its furniture--the best that the state-rooms and cabins of the _san martin_ could provide--would have made many a stay-at-home englishman green with envy. the lads had contrived to lay a double set of rails from the shore up the steep path to the lower terrace. then, by means of a steel hawser attached to two sets of trucks, they were able to draw the bulk of their goods to the higher level with little difficulty. the mode of locomotion, thanks to andy's ready skill, was comparatively simple. at first terence wished to utilise the motor of the "runabout"; but to this proposal andy objected, having another purpose in view for the undelivered consignment for monsieur georges lacroix. included in the rolling stock were several iron tip waggons, of the kind generally in use in mining districts. two of these andy attached to each of his "trains." those on the upper level he filled with earth, till the weight, being greater than the other set of waggons, caused the former to descend the incline, and at the same time raise the trucks filled with cargo from the beach. this plan acted very well, but the labour in filling the trucks with soil was tedious; so andy conceived the brilliant idea of trapping some of the water from the little stream, and conveying it by means of a length of iron pipe supported on trestles into the empty tip waggons. from that moment the "mckay's island express" was in full working order, and the task of hauling the salved cargo up the terrace became a matter of comparative ease. those five months had worked wonders in mr. mckay. though weak on his feet, he was able to walk, and showed promise of soon throwing off all ill-effects of his double misfortune. as a natural result of his prolonged convalescence he had grown stout. this was a source of worry to him, and he longed to be able to get about again as usual. amongst their many undertakings, the lads found time to make use of the remains of the disabled gig. realising that the work of replacing the garboards and keel would not repay the amount of labour expended on the work, they cut the boat in two, and built transoms to each of the sound ends. thus they possessed two light craft, each about ten feet in length, and easy to haul up and down the beach. when occasion served, they could also bolt the two transoms together, and thus form one boat, resembling the original gig with a slice of her 'midship section missing. the craft proved of great service while the cutter was under reconstruction. this was a big task, for not only had the lads given her a fairly deep keel, to make her more seaworthy, but a cabin, water-tight well, and decked fo'c'sle were added. the rig was altered to that of a yawl, while andy hoped at an early date to instal the motor in her. hitherto his difficulties lay in the fact that the motor was not water cooled, nor was it adapted to consume kerosene. they had a plentiful supply of that fuel, but of petrol they had none. nevertheless, andy had firm faith in his capabilities, and trusted to overcome these difficulties all right. in this craft the hopes of the inhabitants of mckay's island were centred. although happy in their little domain, for plenty of work had proved the greatest factor to their well-being, they yearned at times for the society of their fellow-men and civilisation. directly the rainy season was over the little party meant to try their fate upon the broad pacific. it was to be a risky voyage, but others had done similar passages under worse conditions. blythe, of h.m.s. _bounty_, for instance, did he not successfully accomplish a voyage of miles in an open boat in forty-one days? the advent of the rainy season was heralded by a hurricane of terrific force. giving but little warning, the storm swept over the island, uprooting trees and turning the tiny rivulets into foaming torrents. the usually placid surface of the lagoon became a seething cauldron, huge breakers sweeping completely over the reef and lashing themselves upon the rock-strewn beach. well it was that the lads had hauled their craft above the reach of those breakers, for on the morning following the commencement of the storm not a vestige of the hull of the _san martin_ was to be seen. fortunately the house was solidly constructed. the hail pelted on the iron roof, the windows rattled and the doors shook to such an extent that it became necessary to barricade them, while almost incessantly the lightning flashed and the thunder rolled in deafening peals. while the rains lasted there was very little outside work done. welcome as were the showers at first, they soon became monotonous. it was too hot to wear oilskins, the ground was too soft to walk on without sinking ankle deep in mire, so that the castaways were thrown upon their own resources to pass the time as well as they were able within doors. lack of books had been their greatest discomfort, even the study of the spanish charts and treatises on navigation became a pleasure; paper and writing materials they possessed, and mr. mckay systematically wrote up his diary. but the task that gave the lads the greatest pleasure and amusement was their efforts to teach quexo english. the mulatto was a willing though difficult pupil, and was doubly handicapped by being unable to write even his own language. nevertheless, before the rainy season was over, quexo could understand most of what was said to him, and was able to reply in weird sentences and phrases that often set the lads laughing. at length the "off season"--as terence termed it--passed, its departure being marked by almost as severe a hurricane as the one that preceded it. then for three days and nights a thick mist overspread the island. the air resembled that of a hothouse, without the least suspicion of a breeze. on the morning of the fourth day the sun shone in an unclouded sky, the mud disappeared as if by the touch of a magic wand, and the inhabitants of mckay's island awoke to their life of outdoor activity. "i think we will do well to postpone the time of our departure for another month," remarked mr. mckay. "we shall then have more chance of a wind, and the zone of the trades will extend farther north by then. we shall have plenty to see, too, in a month." "i want to get the motor fixed up," observed andy. "i think my plan for making a water-jacket will succeed, and installing the engine and tuning it up will take quite a week." "if you succeed the motor will prove invaluable, especially if we lose the benefit of the trades," replied his father. andy was hard at work making a propeller. this he did by means of two sheets of steel plating riveted to an iron boss; for, in order to prevent the boat from being unduly kept back while under sail alone, he had decided to have but two blades, which when at rest were up and down, in line with the boat's stern-post. terence, who was also of an engineering turn of mind, had embarked upon a somewhat ambitious programme. he meant to use the dynamo for lighting purposes. "but," objected ellerton, "what's the use? we are leaving the island shortly." "possibly; but i am looking beyond then, hoppy. provided i could be sure of a passage to 'frisco occasionally i would not mind settling down here. no doubt i am indulging in wild day-dreams, but still, my plans may mature, and there's a living to be made out of the island. but to deal with present events; the dynamo will be of great service to us, as we can recharge those accumulators we brought ashore. then andy will be able to use electrical ignition for his motor instead of the slower and more uncertain lamp ignition." "quite so, terence," assented andy. "so carry on, my boy." thus encouraged, terence, assisted by ellerton and quexo, dug a deep trench close to the brink of the lower terrace, the side of which he lined with thick planks from the wreck. next a water-wheel, twelve feet in diameter, was constructed, the paddle floats being cut from the iron plates obtained from the same source. a portion of the ship's piston rods formed the axle of the wheel, a grooved drum being attached to take the driving belt of the dynamo. at length came the critical test of terence's work. the stream, once more diverted, was conducted into the trench, and as the last barrier to its progress was removed the water rushed through its new channel. then, with a cascade of silver splashing from its floats, the wheel began to gather way, and was soon spinning merrily. "that's all very fine," exclaimed andy, who had left his work to view the opening ceremony of the mckay island power company. "but how are you going to stop the wheel? it will soon wear its axle out at that rate; and, besides, we can't have that noise day and night." "never thought of that!" replied terence. "we must make a hatch to trap the water when we don't require the power." two days later the dynamo was in full working order. the lads were highly delighted, and suggested several schemes for making use of the electric current. then came andy's triumph. after many difficulties and failures he succeeded in duly installing the motor in the yawl, and on a trial trip inside the lagoon the boat behaved magnificently under power. "we'll have a trip round the island to-morrow," he exclaimed, as the craft was moored for the night. "let's turn in early so as to make a start immediately after sunrise." the morning dawned bright and calm, with no wind. "it will mean running under power," observed andy, as the lads, laden with provisions and tins of kerosene, wended their way to the shore. "i mean to----" he stopped, his eyes fixed seaward. his companions followed his gaze, and simultaneously there was a shout of: "a sail!" chapter ix unwelcome visitors "great scott! it's a native canoe," declared mr. mckay. "and she's heading straight for the island!" the craft was some little distance from the entrance to the reef, her huge brown sail hanging idly from its yard, while the crew vigorously plied their paddles as they made the water fly from her sharp prow. "trouble in store?" queried andy. "it's well to be prepared," replied his father. "i know these natives of old. sometimes they are quiet and inoffensive, at another time they are bold and war-like, or, what is worse, extremely treacherous." "then we must arm ourselves?" "assuredly. quexo, bring my glass." the mulatto darted off, and presently reappeared, bringing a glass of lime-juice. "not that, you ass!" exclaimed mr. mckay, laughing. "glass--telescope--see?" and he raised his hands to imitate the operation of using a telescope. "i'll have the drink, anyhow." once more quexo ran to the house, this time bringing back the required instrument. "there are at least forty natives," said mr. mckay, after a lengthy examination of the oncoming craft. "they may be armed. if so, their weapons are lying on the bottom of the canoe. but unless i am very much mistaken, there's a white man aboard." "a prisoner? let me have a look, pater!" in his eagerness andy almost snatched the telescope from his parent's hand. "a queer set of customers," he exclaimed; "but i don't think the white man is a captive, for he's talking to a fellow with his hair frizzed up a foot above his head." "we've seen enough for the time being," rejoined mr. mckay quietly, "so we'll return to the house and serve out the arms. at the rate they are travelling, the canoe will be here in ten minutes." "they won't injure the boat?" asked andy anxiously, for the yawl was almost like a child to him. "not when they see us with rifles in our hands. whatever you do, don't let them have reason to think we want to fight, and, above all, don't show any signs of fear." the party quickly strapped on their ammunition belts and revolver holsters, then, grasping their rifles, they hastened down to the beach. the canoe had by this time entered the lagoon, and its occupants had perceived the house and the other buildings, for they had ceased paddling, and were gazing in wonder towards the shore. nor did the appearance of five armed men serve to set their minds at rest. "hullo, there!" shouted mr. mckay. "hullo, there!" was the reply. "what's your game?" "what's yours?" replied mr. mckay. "all square, governor. can we land?" "provided you keep your people in order," replied mr. mckay, then turning to his companions he exclaimed: "by jove! i know that fellow; he's no good, i'm afraid." "you know him?" "yes, i met him on a pearl-fisher in torres strait twenty odd years ago. he hasn't changed much in appearance, and i'm afraid his manners haven't. still, i'll not claim acquaintanceship with him at present." the paddles were resumed, and the canoe glided quietly to the shore. the natives, for the most part stark naked, began to tumble over the side, some grasping enormous clubs studded with sharks' teeth, and others long triple-barbed spears. "tell those fellows to throw those weapons back into the canoe," shouted mr. mckay sternly. "otherwise we'll not permit them to land." the white man spoke a few words to the turban-haired native, who in turn uttered an order to his men. instantly the weapons were thrown into the canoe with a loud clatter, and the natives, wading ashore, secured their boat and proceeded to squat in a semicircle. "my name's blight--jimmy blight," exclaimed the stranger. mr. mckay merely nodded his head in reply. he could not bring himself to say the words "pleased to see you," for the simple reason that he was not. jimmy blight had had a chequered career. he was a man of about fifty years of age, some five feet eight inches in height, and of medium build. years of exposure to a tropical sun had not left any trace upon his face, for his complexion was a chalky white. he had a bristling, dark moustache; cut high over the lips, a scanty crop of dark hair, a thin, straight nose, rather deep-set eyes that were continually shifting in expression, while his hands, the broad nails of which were bitten to the quick, showed little trace of hard work. when mr. mckay first met him he was mate of a pearling vessel, and already he bore a bad reputation as a hard drinker and a card-sharper, while it was well known that his tyranny had more than once caused bloodshed amongst the kanaka crew of the vessel. by his white associates he was commonly known as "chinese pork"--in other words, something very unpleasant. "well, what can i do for you?" asked mr. mckay bluntly. "the island's free, i guess?" replied blight, with a leer that ill-concealed his natural aggressiveness. "so long as you behave yourself; but should one of those men touch so much as a copper nail, we'll send you to the right about in double quick time. understand?" "yes, boss. but how about a drink? you seem fixed up pretty comfortable here." "you can have as much water as you want at the stream. beyond that, i'm afraid we cannot provide you." "humph! must take pot-luck, i suppose. say, are you traders?" mr. mckay did not think it advisable to answer. "what's your business, might i ask?" he inquired. "it's a long story, boss. you see my mates here"--indicating the group of squatting natives--"belong to the island of ahii, which lies seventy miles nor'west of here. in fact, i was very comfortable along of 'em, but might is right in these parts, i'll allow." "chinese pork" paused to allow the weight of this sentence to take effect, but mr. mckay betrayed no sign. "so a few days ago a tribe of natives from teku came and drove us out. there was a fight, you bet, but our fellows got the worst of it. so we hooked it, and took canoe to ni atong, which is less than twenty miles s.e. of ahii. ni atong's all very well, only it ain't big enough, so we're trying to find a larger island to settle upon. there's close on a couple of hundred natives, and ten large canoes at ni atong. strikes me this place 'ud suit, 'specially with white gents like yourselves for company like." "i'm afraid you must give up all idea of bringing your friends here, mr. blight, or yourself either." "say, why?" "because we cannot permit it." "look here, boss," replied blight with an impudent swagger. "how do you think you'll stop two hundred natives if they set their minds on landing here? even i couldn't stop 'em." "let them try," replied mr. mckay. "now, mr. blight, i cannot refuse you hospitality. food will be sent down to you; then, when your men have rested sufficiently, i must ask you to leave this island." and turning on his heel, mr. mckay began to make his way back to the house, the lads following him closely. before he had taken a dozen steps the ex-pearler ran after him. "see here, boss; i don't mean to give offence--no offence meant--but you'll allow it's hard on a chap to be done out of his own crib by a pack o' niggers. and then you can't deny you've treated me off-handish, specially as you're the first white man i've seen these two years. so let's come to terms. i see you're well armed. why not come back to ahii with us, and make those chaps from teku clear off back to their own island? then the ahii people won't want to trouble you. see?" "i'll consider the matter," replied mr. mckay. "by the by, do you ever go to tahiti?" "not often, boss. i was there two years ago. when i've got a cargo of copra ready i send it by a native boat. why do you ask?" "i merely wanted to know, mr. blight. but now i must be off. i'll send the provisions along shortly, and will give you a definite reply to your proposal in a few hours. it seems to me that the easiest way out of the mess is to accept the fellow's advice," remarked mr. mckay as they entered their house. "we certainly don't want to try conclusions with a horde of savages on this island. no doubt we could beat them off, but in any case there is a considerable amount of risk. if i can get blight to give me a guarantee--though i don't place much reliance on his word--backed by the chief's assurance that his men will not trespass upon the island, i think we can very well help them." "do you think there will be much of a struggle?" asked ellerton. "between whom?" "the natives of ahii and the natives who took possession of their island." "no; our presence will soon turn the scale, though we may not even have to use our firearms. you can rely upon it that i'll do my best to prevent bloodshed. are you willing to go, lads? if you have objections don't hesitate to say so." "i haven't," said ellerton. "nor i," added the others. "very well, then. quexo, take this keg of flour down to the beach, and tell that white man that his people can gather as much taro and cocoanuts as they want, so long as they don't cross to this side of the stream. you understand? do you think we might spare blight a lamb, andy?" "i think so, pater. we've twenty at least." "then tell quexo to take one down when he comes back. now, boys, if we are going on this trip, we had better make preparations. we ought to start by sunrise at least, if we want to reach ahii before dark." "but are we going straight to ahii?" "no, by jove! i forgot that for the moment. of course, it will be much better to spend the night off ni atong--i suppose there's a lagoon--and proceed to ahii on the following morning." "well, quexo," said andy, on the mulatto's return, "what did the white man say?" "he say: 'come here you number one size blackamoor. what your massa name is?' an' i say: 'i no number one size blackamoor; i no niggah, sah; an' my massa name me no give, massa he tell you his name if you ask.'" "that's a smart reply, quexo," replied mr. mckay, laughing. "there's nothing like keeping your master's counsel and your own. now take that carcase down to the beach. ellerton, you might take a stroll along the edge of the cliff and, without attracting undue attention, keep an eye on the rascals. i don't want them straggling across the stream." thus bidden, ellerton walked cautiously to the edge of the first terrace, then laying his rifle on the ground, stretched himself into a comfortable position so that he could see without being seen, and hear without being heard. most of the natives had dispersed, and were busily engaged in seeking taro and cocoanuts, although they kept strictly within the bounds laid down by mr. mckay. blight, the chief, and a couple of natives had killed the lamb and were roasting it by the aboriginal method of caking it with clay and placing it in the red-hot embers of a fire. although the white man cast several curious glances at the cliff, above which the roof of the house was just visible, he refrained from setting foot upon the path that led to mr. mckay's settlement. late in the afternoon mr. mckay went down to the beach and informed blight that he had decided to lend his aid, at the same time stipulating that the natives must promise not to molest the inhabitants of mckay's island. the remainder of the yawl's stores were then carried aboard, andy and ellerton volunteering to keep watch on the boat while mr. mckay, terence, and quexo took turns in patrolling the edge of the terrace. a tent, some blankets, and a few luxuries in the way of provisions were then sent down to the ex-pearler, while the natives prepared to sleep under the shelter of the palm trees and bushes. "if you see or hear anything of a suspicious nature, andy," cautioned mr. mckay, "here is a signal rocket. don't use it except in circumstances that warrant our interference. you have plenty of ammunition?" "seventy rounds of rifle ammunition and fifty revolver cartridges each. you'll see that another box of ammunition comes off in the morning." "aye, aye," replied his father. "now i think everything is ready to make an early start, so you had better be off." then, having bade the rest of the party good night, andy and his trusty companion descended to the beach, passed between knots of curious natives, and embarked in the yawl's tender. five minutes later they were on board, and the ammunition stowed away within easy reach. the lads had made an excellent job in converting the ship's cutter. from the awning-covered well a short ladder led to the cabin. here four roomy folding bunks, a swing table, plenty of lockers and racks had been fitted, while the linoleum-covered floor, the red baize curtains, and the polished brass lamp imparted an air of comfort. overhead a skylight served to admit both fresh air and light. in the fo'c'sle, to which access could be obtained either by sliding doors between it and the cabin, or through a hatch on deck, were the sails, spare ropes, anchor cable, and a small stove constructed from one of the galleys of the _san martin_. the motor had been installed under the floor of the well, while on the afterside of the cabin bulkhead was fixed a boat's compass, illuminated by means of the cabin lamp, so that the steersman could keep a course with comfort, whether by day or night. "now, hoppy, i'll take the first watch," remarked andy, as the sun sank beneath the lofty peak of mckay's island. "i'll turn you out at two in the morning, and then you can carry on till daybreak, if that will suit you." "righto!" replied ellerton. and turning in upon his bunk he was soon fast asleep, lulled by the slight motion of the little craft as she rose and fell to the gentle heave of the lagoon. chapter x strange allies "turn out, hoppy!" ellerton was awake in an instant, but forgetting that the cabin of a small craft does not possess unlimited headroom, he sat up and brought his head violently in contact with the deck beams. "what's up?" he exclaimed, grasping his revolver. "anything wrong?" "no," replied andy. "only it's two o'clock, and your watch." "goodness! i feel as if i've only been asleep five minutes." "sorry for you, then, old chap, for you've got to keep awake five hours." so saying, andy slid into his bunk, and within a minute his regular breathing showed that he was asleep. ellerton took up his position under the shelter of the dew-sodden awning. everything was quiet, save for the occasional splash of a fish as it played upon the surface of the placid water, and the ever-present rumble of the breakers upon the distant reef. shorewards the outline of the island was dimly visible against the loom of the starlit sky, while a light from the seaward window of the house and the dull red gleam of the dying embers of the fire the natives had kindled were the only sign of human occupation. yet, ellerton reflected, the bush might be alive with savages, awaiting the opportunity to fall upon the settlement, murder his friends, and possess themselves of the valuable stores. perhaps the story of the seizure of ahii and the flight of the inhabitants to ni atong was a myth, invented by that rogue blight for the purpose of luring the castaways into a false position. there could be no doubt about it, ellerton's nerves were "jumpy." perhaps it was that the suddenness of coming into contact with human beings other than his comrades had acted upon his nerves. ellerton realised that he was entering into a new phase of his existence. he regretted it, for, beyond his natural anxiety concerning his parents, he had grown to love the isolated life on mckay's island. then, should blight's story prove to be correct, ellerton felt sure that mr. mckay's action was the only course permissible. the little colony was to fight for its existence, and the more remote the scene of hostilities the better chance they had of securing the sole proprietorship of the island. hist! a succession of faint sounds like those of a man stealthily swimming caused ellerton to sit bolt upright, grasp his rifle, and peer intently through the darkness. there was no mistake about it. it was some object heading directly for the yawl, its track being marked by a faint blur of phosphorescence. visions of bloodthirsty savages, swimming, knife in mouth, to surprise the crew of the little craft, filled ellerton with alarm. he raised his rifle, released the safety catch, and took aim at the mysterious intruder. "andy," he whispered, but his friend was too deep in slumber to be awakened by a whisper. "i'll wait till he's close alongside," muttered ellerton, fingering the trigger. at that moment there was a perceptible jar alongside the boat, followed by a prolonged grating sound, as if a piece of sandpaper were slowly drawn over a rough surface. then, with a swirl and a succession of phosphorescent splashes, the object vanished. the sound had roused andy. "what's up?" he exclaimed, springing into the cockpit. both lads looked over the side. deep beneath the surface they saw a huge luminous shape slowly gliding away. "my word!" whispered andy. "can't you see what it is? it's a shark." "i thought it was some natives swimming off to us." "never fear. they'll never attempt such a thing with a sentry like that brute," replied andy as he re-entered the cabin. slowly the weary hours passed, till the sun rose in a sky of misty grey, and the inhabitants of mckay's island, both black and white, bestirred themselves into activity. "not much wind, boss," was chinese pork's salutation as mr. mckay and his companions arrived at the beach, whither andy had rowed in the tender. "there'll be some before long," replied mr. mckay. "it usually springs up about an hour after sunrise." "it'll mean a long pull if it doesn't," rejoined blight. "shall i lend you four or five hands to work the sweeps?" "i'll not trouble you, thanks. it's your men who will find it hard work, i fancy." "say, why? you just see them use those paddles. they'll keep it up for hours at a stretch. your craft'll be the tail end of this 'ere procession, i guess." "we shall see," replied mr. mckay quietly, for he had no desire to enlighten the ex-pearler upon the subject of the motor. "say, boss?" "well?" "that's a rum packet," said blight, indicating with a jerk of his thumb the boat the lads had made from the wreck of the gig. "i bet you never bought her at hilo?" mr. mckay did not reply. he quite realised that the ex-pearler was trying to pump him, while, on the other hand, he was equally determined to conceal the fact that he and his companions were on the island through shipwreck. although mr. mckay hated deception, he wished to convey the impression that they settled here by choice, yet blight's question showed that he kept his eyes open. "are you ready to start?" demanded mr. mckay. "there's a wind springing up from the south-east'ard." "as soon as you like. but can you lend me a revolver, cap'n? i've got a bloomin' martini, but i've run out o' cartridges months and months ago." "here you are, and here are fifty cartridges. i'll make you a present of the pistol," replied mr. mckay, though he realised that he was playing into the man's hands. then, without waiting to receive the ex-pearler's thanks, he stepped into the boat and was rowed off to the yawl. "good morning, ellerton," he exclaimed. "all quiet, i suppose? well, let's get the canvas on her." already the natives were hauling their canoe down the beach, and by the time the yawl had set her sails the splash of a score of paddles showed that they had lost no time in embarking. "up with your helm, andy; check the jib sheets." then, as the little craft drew clear of the land, the freshening breeze caused her to heel and glide through the ruffled water of the lagoon. by the time they had gained the passage through the reef the yawl was ahead of the canoe. "glorious!" ejaculated andy. "see, they're setting their sail. it will be a good race, after all." half a dozen bronzed natives were setting the raking mast and bending the yard with its enormous sail of cocoa fibre. then, as the sail rose swiftly in the air, the breeze filled the mat-like canvas. the crew took in their paddles and watched the yawl with curious eyes. "we are gaining on her, i think," remarked andy. "yes; we must shorten sail," replied mr. mckay. "but i want particularly to note the respective speeds of the two craft. i should think that, under sail and aided by her paddles, that canoe could overhaul us under sail alone. yes," he continued, after a few moments' careful observation. "i think i've seen enough in case of future developments, so we'll strike the topsail." under reduced canvas the yawl kept the canoe at a regular distance from her, neither gaining nor allowing the latter to overhaul her. quexo, fearing an attack of sea-sickness, had retired to the seclusion of a berth in the fo'c'sle, while ellerton and terence, who had kept the last portion of the previous night's watch, followed his example, though from other motives. andy was steering. his father, who had given him the course, was below preparing a meal. the wind held steadily all the forenoon, and by eleven o'clock the summit of mckay's island had dipped beneath the horizon. it was not without feelings of regret that andy saw it disappear. he, too, realised that they were embarked upon a hazardous mission, and that possibly great sacrifice would have to be made ere they returned to their island home. at midday the wind died away to a flat calm, the yawl rolling sluggishly in the oily swell, with her boom swaying violently from side to side, and threatening dire disaster to the heads of any of the crew that incautiously came within its reach. the canoe, similarly situated, did not hesitate to lower the sail, and paddle close alongside. "this is a bit rotten, cap'n," shouted blight. "shall i give you a tow?" "no thanks, don't trouble about us," replied mr. mckay. "you can paddle on ahead, and we'll follow when the breeze springs up. if we can't fetch ni atong before dark you might get those fellows to light a fire on the beach, so that we can come up to the anchorage." "righto, boss! ta-ta!" there was a peculiar glint in the man's eye. he fancied that the superior speed of the canoe under paddles was an asset in his favour for the events he had already planned. the chief gave the word, the blades dipped, and, gathering way, the canoe soon gained a rapid pace. the long-drawn song of the paddlers gradually died away as the distance increased, and an hour later the canoe was lost to sight. "now, andy, we'll start the motor, and creep up within a couple of miles of ni atong. they will think we have picked up a breeze." "why don't you want to let that chap blight know we've a motor?" "frankly, andy, i don't trust him. if he plays a straight game, well and good; but, should he act treacherously--and i have every reason to believe he will, judging by his past career--we must keep a trump card up our sleeves. that's why i wanted to make sure of the respective speeds of the two craft, for you may be certain that, since the chief is in her, yonder canoe is the largest and swiftest they possess. under power we can easily outstrip her, i have no doubt." no sooner had the motor started than terence and ellerton appeared. "hullo! where's the wind?" asked the latter. "and where's the canoe? added donaghue. "hull down," replied andy. "they've gone on ahead to give us a house-warming. now, you fellows, get yourselves something to eat, and then give us a spell. i'll let you have the course. keep your weather eye lifting, and look out for a breeze. it may come down suddenly." "you bet i will," assented ellerton. "how far are we from ni atong?" "about twenty miles. directly the island hoves in sight call us." at about four in the afternoon terence, who had climbed the main-mast and had taken up a perch upon the diminutive cross-trees, reported land ahead. mr. mckay and andy were instantly warned, and, a breeze springing up, the motor was shut off. half an hour later the heads of a patch of palm trees were visible from the deck. "that's ni atong, right enough," commented mr. mckay, as bit by bit the land appeared to rise above the horizon. "blight told me that the entrance to the lagoon is easily picked out." ni atong resolved itself into a low, regularly outlined island barely two miles in length. its surface was covered with dense scrub and a few cocoanut palms, the soil being apparently loose and sandy. so far as could be seen, a coral reef extended round the island at a distance of half a mile from the shore, the rocks in places protruding above water to a height of nearly three feet. "there's another island showing up on our port bow, sir," announced ellerton. "then that's ahii. it's a lofty island something like ours, judging by the appearance of that mountain. however, we'll hear and see more of it later on. now, andy, we are approaching the reef. do you climb aloft and con the boat in through the channel." this is the only practical method of entering an unbeaconed lagoon, for owing to the sudden increase in depth, a lead line is of little use. on the other hand, the extreme clearness of the water makes it possible for a man aloft to detect instantly any rocks or shoals that lurk beneath the surface. for the space of five minutes it was an anxious time. on either hand the breakers thrashed themselves in masses of milk-white foam upon the glistening coral reef, while ahead a narrow patch of undulating, yet unbroken water showed the presence of the only available channel into the shelter of the lagoon. "starboard--bear away--starboard again--port, steady!" under the light breeze the yawl was in danger of dropping to leeward upon the merciless rocks. one moment her stern was lifted high in the air, the rudder consequently being useless. the next she threw her streaming bows above the following wave, then, shaving the edge of the reef by a bare five yards, the little vessel glided into the quiet waters of the anchorage. the crew now had time to look about them. drawn up on the sandy beach were seven large canoes, similar to that which had paid an unwelcome visit to mckay's island, while others, only slightly smaller in size, were hauled up beneath the shelter of the bushes, their lofty carved prows alone being visible. the beach was lined with natives, numbering at least men, besides a host of women and children. the men were of medium stature, muscular, and well built. in colour they resembled that of quexo, being considerably lighter than the natives of new guinea. many of them bore scars, possibly self-inflicted or the result of inter-tribal wars. "stand by to let go!" shouted andy to terence and ellerton. then, as the yawl shot up into the wind, he followed up with: "let go!" with a roar and rattle of chain the anchor plunged to the bottom of the lagoon, and as the crew prepared to lower and stow the sails, mr. mckay waved his arm towards the crowded shore. "well, lads," he exclaimed, "what do you think of our allies?" chapter xi the frustrated sacrifice "a rum-looking crowd," observed terence. "they look as if they could do a lot of damage, though." "yes," replied mr. mckay, "i am sure of it. these fellows often fight for fighting's sake, and a pretty spectacle they make of it at times. i've seen them at it before." "what, these natives?" "no, the inhabitants of new guinea. they are strongly associated, however, not only in manners and customs, but in language. i must polish up my polynesian lingo, though after acquiring a smattering of spanish i'm afraid i've become very rusty. come, now, hurry up and snug down, and we'll go ashore." "armed, of course?" "yes, certainly. take your revolvers only. i don't think we need fear anything at present. if there's to be trouble it will be after the natives have made the best use of us." accordingly the little crew worked with a will; then, directly the canvas was stowed and a second anchor laid out, the whole party went ashore. they were received with great show of goodwill, the natives crowding round them with shouts of welcome, while the ceremony of rubbing noses was duly performed. several of the women advanced bearing long garlands, and, to the undisguised bashfulness of the three lads, placed the flowing chains round the necks of their visitors. quexo, however, was denied that honour. he was a coloured man, and therefore, in the eyes of the natives, of no consequence. "you made a quick passage, boss, after all," observed blight. "aye, we picked up with a breeze," replied mr. mckay, though he did not offer to explain when the breeze was encountered. "they've prepared a feast for you," continued the ex-pearler. "so let's put our best foot foremost." at a short distance from the shore was a large clearing, temporary huts made of branches and leaves of palm trees being erected in a vast double circle. here a number of natives were busy baking pigs and fowls, while there was an abundance of yams and cocoanuts. "they are very improvident with their supplies," remarked andy. "they evidently seem as if they are certain of returning to the land of plenty." "yes," replied his father, who had taken an early opportunity of examining the roasted pigs to make sure they were pigs. "we may as well set-to and enjoy their hospitality; now, keep close together and see that your pistols are easy to draw." the chiefs, each distinguishable by his huge mop of greased and frizzed hair, had squatted in a semicircle, and no sooner had the guests seated themselves than there was a terrific scramble on the part of the native chiefs to help themselves. "we must forget for the moment that we are civilised and follow their example," remarked mr. mckay, seizing a bit of pork in his fingers. his companions did likewise, and notwithstanding the absence of knives and forks they managed to eat and enjoy their share of the feast. this done, there was a war-dance performed by the young men of the tribe, the warriors brandishing their clubs with such energy that it seemed wonderful that no one was hurt. the natives did not appear to use their heavy clubs for the purpose of knocking their imaginary adversaries over the head; instead, they utilised the upward swing of their arms, lunging with the weapon on its upward stroke. andy particularly noticed this, and remarked it to his father. "yes," was the reply. "it's a favourite 'knock-out' blow with these fellows. i've seen them at it in actual combat. the idea is to get underneath their antagonist's guard, and strike him on the chin with the upward sweep of the club, and knock him senseless. afterwards the winning side secure those who are only stunned and----" "and what?" "eat them!" at length the display came to an end, and the guests prepared to return on board. mr. mckay had attempted to converse with some of the chiefs, but the result was a failure. he therefore told blight to inform the chief that an early start was to be made on the morrow. the news was received with redoubled shouts of delight, and the entire population escorted the white men to the beach. nor did they stop there, for men, women, and children rushed headlong into the sea, and formed a huge bodyguard of swimmers till the yawl was reached. all round the boat the water was black with the heads and arms of the swimmers, for these natives of the pacific islands take to the water often before they can walk. splashing and shouting loud enough to scare every shark within a mile, they swam round and round the yawl, none offering to climb aboard, till at a shout from one of the chiefs they turned and swam rapidly to the shore. "we must set watches to-night, i suppose?" asked andy. "certainly! although these people are supposed to be our friends, we must imagine ourselves in hostile waters. i remember once that a small schooner put into niihau. the natives came off to barter, and appeared to be extremely friendly. during the night about a couple of hundred swam off to the schooner and took her crew entirely by surprise. we found the charred remains of her timbers about a month afterwards, but not a trace of her unfortunate crew. they had been made into 'big pig.'" "what's that?" asked ellerton. "otherwise killed, roasted, and eaten." "then what happened?" "the usual. gunboat, landing party, etc. the village was shelled and burnt, and the island afterwards annexed to the empire. so, you see, we must exercise due caution, although i don't want to upset your nerves." it must have been shortly after midnight when the crew was awakened by a warning shout from terence. turning out of their comfortable bunks, the others rushed from the cabin, armed in anticipation of a sudden and treacherous attack. a low rumbling greeted their ears, the sound apparently coming from the shore. for more than a minute the mysterious sound continued, then it suddenly ceased. "what is it?" asked donald. "i'm afraid i cannot tell you," replied his father. "it's rather like the sound of a submarine explosion; probably a volcanic eruption." again the noise was repeated, yet no agitation of the placid water took place. the natives did not appear to be disturbed, for no commotion due to human agency could be heard from the island. this time the rumbling continued for quite five minutes, dying away in a succession of long-drawn tremors. then all was quiet. "i can't make it out," remarked mr. mckay. "whatever it is it seems to be accepted by the natives without a protest. to-morrow i'll inquire." the party remained on deck for nearly an hour, but as the mysterious noise was not repeated, they at length retired to the cabin, leaving terence to continue the remainder of his watch. just after sunrise ellerton called mr. mckay's attention to something on the beach. seizing his glasses, the elder man brought them to bear upon the spot, and the next moment he exclaimed: "come on, lads, get your arms and row ashore as hard as you can." without waiting for an explanation, the three lads jumped into the boat, mr. mckay taking his place in the stern sheets. "don't look ahead; keep your eyes on the boat and pull," said mr. mckay quietly, yet there was a grim, determined expression on his face that betokened trouble ahead. the moment the little craft touched the beach the lads jumped out, and led by mr. mckay, they made their way at top speed along the sandy shore. fifty yards from where they landed was the chief's canoe, which had been hauled up on shore since the previous night. at regular intervals betwixt its lofty prow and the water were six dark objects lying on the sand. the lads gave a gasp of horror, for lashed firmly to bamboo poles were six natives. their fellows were preparing to launch the canoe over their bodies. "stop that!" shouted mr. mckay sternly, holding up his hand to arrest the progress of the heavy craft, which was quivering under the grasp of fifty stalwart blacks. the natives hesitated, glaring at the interrupters of their ceremony, while some of the chiefs made signs for the interfering strangers to stand aside. "where's blight?" shouted mr. mckay, as he opened the cut-off of the magazine of his rifle. "here i am, boss," replied that individual, coolly sauntering forward. "tell them to knock off this horrible business." "let 'em carry on, boss," was the reply, almost apologetic. "you see, they ain't got no prisoners, and the chief's canoe must be launched in this 'ere way, else it's bad luck. so they picked on some of their least wanted pals. bless me, you'll soon get used to it. i did years ago." "you can tell them from me that the moment that canoe moves we'll open fire. you might also explain that if our wishes are not carried out, we'll go back to our own island, and those rascals can stay here to starve. now be quick, and let them know we mean business. cover these tow-headed rogues," he continued to his companions. "if i give the word, let fly continuous volleys till the rest of the rascals bolt." evidently the chiefs knew the power of the white men's rifles, for they stepped back a few paces. some of their followers grasped their clubs and spears, and courageously awaited their leaders' orders. jimmy blight spoke rapidly. at first his words seemed to enrage the chiefs, but finally they expostulated. "what do they say?" "they are willing to let the brutes free if you promise that your power'll keep off the--the--you know what i mean, boss, the----" "evil eye?"' suggested mr. mckay. "aye, that's it." "you can tell them that there's nothing to fear on that score. let them know that six men alive are worth something, and that six squashed to a pulp will do them no earthly good." once again blight turned to the half-pacified chiefs, a rapid exchange of words followed, and in the end the latter signed to their people to free the captives from their terrible position. "that's over, thank god!" ejaculated mr. mckay with intense fervour. "tell the chiefs i'm going to make them a present," and putting his rifle to his shoulder he fired six shots in the air in rapid succession. astonishment held the natives spell-bound; they had never before seen a magazine rifle discharged. the sharp "crack" of the weapon, its smokelessness, and the peculiar screech of the nickel bullets filled them with awe, and with great hesitation they accepted the six empty cartridge-cases as an exchange for the release of the intended victims. "they've given you a tally, boss," observed blight. "they call you 'the wonder that breathes fire.'" "i hope they will bear it in mind then," replied mr. mckay. "now let them proceed with the launching operations. when all is ready we will set sail. by the by, what was that noise we heard last night?" he inquired, turning to the ex-pearler. "noise! what noise, boss?" "a kind of prolonged roar of distant thunder. twice it occurred." "oh! i know what you mean. we don't take no notice of it in these parts. it's the 'barking sands.' see yon hills?"--pointing to a ridge of sand dunes about sixty feet in height. "the stuff's slippery like, and often it rolls down, and makes a row. there's a sight of other islands about here like it." half-an-hour later a flotilla of nine canoes, crowded with armed natives, paddled slowly towards the entrance of the lagoon. as they passed the white men's craft, their paddles rose in the air to the accompaniment of a sonorous salute. then, as the dripping anchor rose clear of the water, the breeze filled the sails of the yawl, and she, too, started to play her part in the hazardous enterprise. another five hours would decide whether ahii would fall into the hands of its former possessors, and, what was still more important, the fate of the little band from mckay's island. chapter xii at bay once clear of the reef, the canoes ceased paddling, and the brown cocoa-fibre sails were hoisted. the yawl, by reason of her superior spread of canvas, soon forged ahead till, drawing in line with the largest canoe, in which were blight and the head man of the tribe, the speed was regulated so as to keep within hailing distance of the ex-pearler. mr. mckay had already been given a rough chart of the island of ahii. like their own island and ni atong, ahii was surrounded by a reef, only that on the eastern side the rocky barrier practically touched the shore. there were four large passages through the reef, two on the southern side--which they were approaching--one on the western, and the fourth on the northern. the summit of ahii was clearly visible from ni atong, and as the flotilla neared the island its peculiarities could be gradually discerned. it was considerably larger than mckay's island, and composed chiefly of a dark brown rock, its flat portions covered with verdure. the general outline resembled a saddle, the higher of the two peaks being over two thousand feet above the sea. but in place of the glistening sands of mckay's island there was a beach of black sand, apparently the ground-up deposit of lava, for from the lower of the two peaks a thin cloud of smoke was emitted, showing that ahii was still an active volcano. at the western termination of the beach was perceived the entrance to a small creek, while beyond this opening low, dark-coloured cliffs rose sheer from the sea. the approach of the invaders was observed long before the flotilla reached the entrance of the lagoon, and by the aid of their telescopes and field-glasses the crew of the yawl saw that the beach was lined with warriors, armed with formidable beak-headed clubs, long spears and oblong shields, the natives being bedecked with barbaric finery and plentifully bedaubed with paint and ochre. "that's their boat harbour," shouted blight, pointing to the creek. "their canoes are drawn up on the banks about half-a-mile up the river. the village is on the port side. shall i tell our men to push right in and burn their blessed canoes?" "no," replied mr. mckay. "i don't want unnecessary violence; besides, if their canoes are destroyed, how can they leave the island? let our boats remain about two hundred yards from shore. you will then stand in the chief's canoe and tell the natives to clear out. say that we give them till midday. otherwise we must open fire on them." "then you don't want these fellows to have a set-to?" "no! no bloodshed unless it cannot possibly be avoided. now carry on and we'll be ready to open fire to cover your retreat if they give trouble." blight could not but obey. the chief's canoe was paddled slowly towards the shore, the natives regarding the late inhabitants of ahii with contemptuous gestures not unmingled with curiosity. they expected a mad rush, a fierce conflict on the shore, and an easy victory; but the apparently timorous approach of a solitary canoe mystified them. [illustration: the chief's canoe was paddled slowly towards the shore] the ex-pearler stood up and shouted to the hostile chiefs. whether he gave mr. mckay's message in a conciliatory manner the australian was not in a position to ascertain. more than likely, blight, with a white man's contempt for "niggers," put his own construction upon the request, for before he had spoken half-a-dozen sentences there was a blood-curdling yell, and a shower of stones was hurled at the canoe. the crew paddled out of range, while their companions, with loud counter-shouts of defiance, urged their boat to the attack, till by dint of much hand-waving mr. mckay kept them temporarily in check. "they've asked us to come ashore and be made into 'big pig,'" shouted blight. "shall we let our men loose?" "not here," replied mr. mckay. "paddle along the shore and we'll make a landing as far from the village as possible. that will give the enemy a chance to clear out if they get the worst of it." headed by the yawl, the little fleet kept parallel with the shore, a crowd of about two thousand armed savages keeping pace with the invaders, yelling, dancing, brandishing their weapons, and hurling the direst insults of which the natives were capable at their apparently inferior enemies. "it must be a sharp lesson, lads," observed mr. mckay. "what wouldn't i give for a maxim or an automatic colt. ellerton, you take the helm and keep the boat just so, no nearer to shore." the flotilla was now abreast of that part of the beach that was terminated by the cliffs. here the flat shore consisted of a wedge-shaped piece of ground, so narrow that the enemy was unable to take due advantage of its superiority in numbers. the rapid fire of four magazine rifles would play havoc with the dense serried ranks of bronzed and painted warriors, but still mr. mckay refrained from making the first advance. "let them fight it out between themselves," he shouted to blight, who, however eager he was to send the natives to the fight, did not show any strong inclination to lead them. "we'll open fire if our fellows get the worst of it." it was plainly impossible to keep the invaders in hand. with a roar of defiance that momentarily drowned the yells of their more numerous adversaries, the natives urged their canoes towards the shore. then, as craft after craft grounded upon the beach, their crews dropped paddles, grasped their clubs and spears, and plunged waist deep into the water. it was a veritable struggle between a host of bronzed paladins. clubs met with a loud and ponderous clang, spears met shields or else found a softer billet, while those of the defenders of the island who could not gain the van hurled enormous stones over the heads of their foremost ranks at their vindictive foes. above the shouts of the combatants could be heard the shrieks of the desperately wounded. several received serious wounds on both sides, yet save in extreme cases, they bore their hurts bravely, returning to the fray with the utmost determination, till failing strength caused them to drop, still fighting so long as they could wield a club or thrust with a spear. twice the rightful inhabitants of ahii gained a footing on the shore, and twice were they swept back by the weight of numbers, for as fast as one of the defenders fell, another filled his place, while on the other hand the invaders had no reserves. true, there were the white men, but it was impossible to wield a rifle without serious consequence to friend as well as foe. "how these fellows fight!" exclaimed andy. "they simply won't give way; they'll be exterminated." "it's fighting for fighting's sake," replied his father. "we must chip in or we'll find ourselves opposed to the whole island without a native to help us. luff her up, ellerton. that's right; now keep her as she is." the yawl moved slowly in the opposite direction to her previous course, though still parallel with the shore. by this means the scene of the actual struggle was passed and only the serried rearguard of the defenders was abeam. "now, lads, aim low!" the four rifles opened a rapid fire. it seemed like butchery, yet, as mr. mckay had said, there was no alternative. twenty human beings cannot stop a modern rifle-bullet fired at one hundred yards' range. the defence seemed to melt away, and with redoubled shouts of triumph the friendly natives started in pursuit of the fugitives, knocking over the head all who were overtaken. "if those fellows won't keep in hand, they will be in danger of being cut off," exclaimed mr. mckay. "we must follow our friends up. ellerton, you stay on board, and keep our craft underway." hurriedly the two mckays, terence, and quexo jumped into the tender, rowed ashore, and followed the ghastly trail of the victorious natives. it was a hazardous undertaking, for some of the fugitives had fled inland instead of following their main body in their retreat upon the village. at any moment these might rally and fall upon the little band of white men, the dense scrub being favourable for such tactics. there was no sign of jimmy blight. he had not accompanied the natives in their first attack, although he was known to have been in the chief's canoe, nor had he made his appearance when the white party landed. "keep a bright look-out, lads," cautioned mr. mckay. "have your revolvers ready. they are more serviceable than rifles here." at almost every yard of the way lay natives either dead or grievously wounded. many of the latter were bold enough to attempt to rise and threaten the white men. so far as possible, the wounded were ignored, greatly to their surprise, for a savage rarely gives and never expects quarter. once or twice, however, a warrior would spring to his feet after the white men had passed, and with his remaining energy throw his club or spear at his enemies. in that case it became necessary to silence the desperate native for ever. suddenly from the shelter of a dense belt of scrub three powerful blacks dashed upon quexo, who had strayed a few yards behind the rest of the party. the mulatto raised his revolver and fired, and a huge native sprang a good three feet in the air and tumbled on his face. but ere quexo could repeat his shot a triple-barbed spear pierced his shoulder. he fell, the weapon still embedded in his flesh. the man who had thrown the lance drew a stone knife, and threw himself upon the prostrate mulatto, while the third native raised his club to complete the business. with admirable presence of mind quexo shot the man with the club, who in his fall completely covered the hapless mulatto. alarmed by the first shot, mr. mckay and the two lads ran to the aid of their companion, but ere they emerged from the bush a third shot rang out, and the savage who had hurled the spear at the mulatto fell shot through the head. then as andy rushed to the spot where quexo lay, jimmy blight stepped from the cover of a group of palm trees. "not a bad shot, eh, boss?" he exclaimed, as he thrust fresh cartridges into his revolver. "you'd best get your young fellow on board as quick as you can, i reckon." quexo was groaning dismally, now the actual struggle was over. the triple spear-head had made a ghastly wound in his shoulder, for in his fall the haft had broken off short. mr. mckay managed to extract it skilfully. in the midst of their misfortunes the roar of the combatants came nearer and nearer. the enemy had rallied; the savages were driving back their attackers. already men were streaming by, flying for their lives. "guess we'd best hook it," exclaimed blight. "bear a hand, andy," said his father, as he pointed to his helpless servant. "don't be a fool, boss!" shouted the ex-pearler, who was already beginning to retire. "he's about done for, and we'll be the same if we stop. come along!" "not i," replied mr. mckay sturdily. "you go if you want to. come on, andy, move him across to yonder thicket. we'll make a last stand here if it comes to the worst." something in mr. mckay's reply must have appealed to the better nature of this low-down specimen of the white race, for, turning swiftly on his heel, he returned. kneeling beside the unconscious man he helped himself to his bandolier, revolver, and rifle. without another word the four men lifted quexo to the shelter of the trees, and quietly and resolutely made ready to receive the horde of triumphant savages. chapter xiii ellerton to the rescue already the last of the fugitives had passed, rushing blindly for the shelter of their canoes, and the foremost of their pursuers were emerging from the clearing. mr. mckay, cool in the time of extreme peril, calculated that only about a hundred of their allies remained alive, while, making due allowance for the tremendous execution, there were at least a thousand bloodthirsty foes. four against a thousand! "don't fire yet!" he whispered. the main body of the savages crossed the clearing at breakneck rate, and disappeared in the direction of the beach, but others came at a more leisurely pace, examining those of the fugitives who had fallen. those who showed signs of life were bound hand and foot, for what purpose the white men had no doubt whatever. presently the keen eye of one of the savages caught a glimpse of one of the rifle barrels. the man was evidently a chief, for, in addition to his coat of paint, he wore a short cloak of feathers. without a moment's hesitation the savage uttered a loud shout and ran straight in the direction of the white men, followed, at a distance of about twenty paces, by some fifty yelling natives. "you take that fellow, blight!" exclaimed mr. mckay quietly. blight raised his rifle to his shoulder, took a sight in the centre of the chief's broad chest, and pressed the trigger. "missed, by smoke!" he cried, for the man came on steadily. it was the work of a few seconds to open and close the bolt of the rifle, and in that time the chief still ran on; but before blight could discharge his weapon a second time, the native's knees appeared to give way, and he pitched headlong on his face. all four men were firing fast into the hostile press. the rush was stopped, although some of the savages came near enough to hurl their spears, several of which stuck in the trunks of the palm trees behind which the little band took shelter. many of the attackers fled for safety, others did not deign to run, but retired slowly, brandishing their weapons at their enemies as they did so. some paid for their rashness, for it was a case of fighting for existence, and every native put out of action told. "the beggars are going to corral us," exclaimed blight. "see, they are running round to our left." a couple of volleys drove the natives back still farther, yet without attempting to take cover they continued their tactics of trying to cut off their enemies' retreat. the south sea islanders rarely resort to strategy in actual fighting. they may, indeed, take steps to surround their enemies, and then charge fearlessly to close quarters. the white men were even now surrounded, for the advanced body, having failed to prevent the embarkation of the discomfited invaders, had been attracted by the sound of the firing and had completed the hostile cordon. in the lull that ensued, mr. mckay contrived to place a temporary bandage over quexo's shoulder. the mulatto was still unconscious, but showed no symptoms of having been poisoned by the spear thrust. "i wonder what hoppy is doing?" remarked terence, after moistening his parched lips with a draught from his water-bottle. "i guess he's in a terrible stew." "he may manage to make our friends attempt another attack. if so, we can bolt for the shore; though i'm not going to put much faith in that," replied mr. mckay. "they've had too much of a licking, i fancy." "pity you didn't let us burn those blessed canoes, boss; these black rascals will be able to follow our craft now." "yes, i admit i erred on the side of mercy, mr. blight," was the reply. "it's my fault, and i must take the blame." "that comes o' being so mighty particular," retorted the ex-pearler bluntly. "if we come out o' this i guess your opinion of a nigger will have an almighty change. now, stand by, for here they come." "don't be taken alive, lads," continued mr. mckay, and the next instant the rifle-fire reopened. upon the dense masses of natives every shot told, yet having only one rifle for each front the fire was not sufficiently extended to keep the advancing enemy at bay. the air was filled with shouts and shrieks, while stones and spears flew in deadly showers. once the magazines were empty there was no time to recharge. the heated rifles were flung aside and the revolvers were brought into use. the four men shot rapidly and well, the heavy lead bullets stopping the headlong rush far more effectively than did the nickel rifle ammunition. once again the attack failed, the savages drawing off and leaving at least fifty of their number dead or wounded on the field. not one of the enemy had got within twenty yards of the death-dealing weapons of the white men. "now, boss," gasped blight, as he bound a discoloured silk handkerchief round a spear-scratch on his left wrist. "shall we make a bolt for it? we can fight our way to the shore." mr. mckay pointed to the still unconscious quexo. "put a bullet through his head. he won't feel it. why should we chuck away our chance for a wounded nigger?" "look here, mr. blight, i've told you before you can go if you want to. here are two revolvers you can take; there's a good chance now, so go, and good luck to you! i must stay here--what do you say, lads?" terence and andy grimly signified their intention of remaining with their stricken comrade. blight saw there was a chance, but, in his opinion, far from a good one. although the spot the little band had chosen for their stand was within a hundred yards of the sea, to return to where the canoes had landed their armed contents was at least a quarter of a mile distant. then, again, directly he left cover and began to run, a hundred natives would join in the pursuit. even could he manage to fight his way through the ring and outstrip his pursuers, there was a long swim in front of him. good swimmer though he was, blight recognised that he was decidedly inferior in speed to the amphibious natives. "i see it's no go, boss," he exclaimed. "so let's stick at it to the end. come on, you black fiends!" he added, shaking his fist at the dark masses of warriors, as they prepared to renew the attack. "don't waste a single shot," cautioned mr. mckay. "here's the main attack, so direct a combined fire in that direction, till they get within fifty yards. then each man must look to his front and do his best." the words were scarcely spoken ere the fierce yells of the savages redoubled, and the rush began. scorning to take advantage of the slightest bit of cover, they raced furiously, leaping over the low scrub that would have stopped a civilised race. then the rattle of the rifle-fire rose above the shouts of the natives. scores were hit, some falling on the spot, others running several yards ere their strength failed, while many of the wounded, in their mad thirst for vengeance, staggered after their comrades in an endeavour to launch themselves upon the white men. no longer was there need to raise rifle to shoulder. firing from the hip, the little knot of desperate men emptied their magazines into the throng of natives, then, casting aside their rifles, as before, they grasped their revolvers, hardly daring to hope to check the headlong rush. suddenly to an accompaniment of a peculiar screech, a trail of thin smoke flashed earthwards from the sky. then, with a terrific report, an explosion took place right in the middle of the surging pack of savages, and ere the cloud of dense, suffocating smoke cleared away, the natives fled in all directions. some, indeed, were so terrified that they fell flat on their faces, clapping their hands to their ears to shut out the echoes of the thunderous report. those who were on the remote side of the encircling body of natives, though far from the scene of the explosion, were also seized with panic, and the whole crowd, save those who had been hit or were too dazed to move, fled helter-skelter for the village. for a full minute none of the white men spoke. terence and andy looked with utter amazement at the retreating foes; mr. mckay and blight, more hardened in peril, seized the opportunity to thrust fresh clips of cartridges into their magazines. "guess a gunboat's been dropping a shell," observed blight, who was the first to break the long-drawn silence. "you are wrong," replied mr. mckay quietly. "a shell would never throw out a cloud of smoke like that; it's not the colour of lyddite either." "then what is it? who fired it?" "young ellerton," was the astonishing reply. mr. mckay was correct in his surmise. ellerton, on seeing his companions start in support of their coloured allies, was not altogether at his ease. he kept tacking the yawl, so as to be within easy distance of the landing-place in case of a hasty retreat on the part of the invaders. gradually the sounds of the running fight died away; but no report of firearms served to show that the white men had got in touch with their foes. seen from seaward the scrub seemed almost so thick as to be impassable. mr. mckay and his companions were literally swallowed up in the trackless waste that lay beyond the low range of cliffs. ellerton looked around at the canoes. beyond a man left in each as a boat-keeper they were deserted. blight had vanished; when and where the young englishman knew not. suddenly the distant report of a revolver burst upon his ears. he knew it to be a pistol shot, for it had not the short, sharp crack of a rifle. that meant foes at close quarters. then came two other reports in quick succession, followed by a prolonged silence. the firing reassured him. he realised that his friends were not with their savage allies, and that they were, in consequence, between the village and the beach. rightly enough he guessed that they were dealing with a party of stragglers, the noise of only three shots and the absence of rifle-fire showed that the conflict was brief and decisive. the youth tacked once more, and steered eastward along the beach. again the long silence filled him with a nameless anxiety. he regretted the evil day when blight and the natives came to mckay's island; but in the circumstances nothing else could be done. they had put their hand to the plough; there was no turning back. then, gradually but surely, came the sound of the natives still engaged in conflict, unaccompanied by the report of firearms. there was no mistaking it. their allies were being driven back; but where were the white men? nearer and nearer came the sounds of the retreating natives and their pursuers, till the foremost of the fugitives gained the shore. jumping into their canoes they pushed off, panic-stricken and utterly fatigued. then came the main body, a sorry remnant at most, grimly fighting their foes at almost every step. waist deep in water they fought, till the survivors contrived to escape in their boats. two canoes were left unmanned, their solitary occupants paddling laboriously out of the reach of their foes. nor did the pursuit cease at the water's edge, for several of the enemy dashed boldly into the waves and swam after the retreating craft. one of the latter was, indeed, overtaken, and a desperate struggle ensued between the rival natives, till the crew of another canoe, seeing their companions' plight, returned and saved them from being wiped out. then the flotilla moved well out into the lagoon, and took up a position beyond the yawl, the natives, many of them badly wounded, being too exhausted to paddle another stroke. ellerton was now confronted with a real peril. his friends, if alive, were cut off; he was unable to gather any tidings from the natives, who replied to his gestures by grunts and meaningless exclamations. just then came the rattle of musketry. at all events, mr. mckay and his party were still in a position to offer resistance, but against what odds? just then the wind, hitherto light, died utterly away. ellerton knew nothing about the motor, and he himself was now in a position of peril. unable to move, save by using a sweep, which was hard work, he was at the mercy of the savages, who, lining the shore, had realised his predicament, and were preparing to swim off and carry the yawl by storm. ellerton had plenty of rifles and revolvers, but even then he could not hope to keep the mob of foes at bay. seizing a rifle, he sprang upon the cabin-top and opened fire. it was a fairly long range--some six hundred yards--but ellerton gauged the distance to a nicety; with the correct elevation, missing a man in that throng was about an impossibility. a commotion showed that the shot had taken effect. another with equally good result! ellerton again felt the lust of battle. suddenly, in the midst of his cool and deliberate firing, a blow from the boom nearly knocked the youth overboard. the breeze had again sprung up. recovering himself by grasping the main shrouds, ellerton laid his rifle on the deck and jumped into the cockpit. he meant to steer along the coast towards the village, and, if possible, aid his friends by a long, dropping fire. his progress was slow, the wind being still light, and ere the yawl had travelled a hundred yards the firing on shore died away. what did it mean? he thought. were his companions at length overwhelmed by dint of numbers? if so he would take revenge; he would cruise up and down the shore and blaze away so long as a savage remained on the beach, or a cartridge remained on board. and after? he gave but a brief thought to that--a solitary existence on a boat far from the little island he regarded as his home--but the thought filled him with the rage of despair. steering by means of the tiller between his knees, ellerton headed diagonally towards the shore, at the same time charging the magazines of half-a-dozen rifles. while thus engaged, to his astonishment and delight the sound of firing was resumed, the scene of action being nearly abreast of where the yawl was steering. he immediately hove-to, and again ascending the cabin-top, looked ashore. the scrub and several small groves of cocoanut palms prevented him from seeing the combatants, and on this account he refrained from opening a dropping fire, for fear of harming his friends. he was in a helpless state of perplexity till all at once a thought struck him which gave him new-born hope. the night he and andy kept watch on board, in the lagoon of mckay's island, they had taken some rockets to use should they require assistance. these rockets were of the ordinary sea-pattern, making a loud explosion by means of a small charge of gun-cotton. hurriedly ellerton fixed one of the rockets so that it would assume a curved flight instead of soaring upwards, then turning the vessel's course till the direction of the projectile would be as near as possible towards the scene of action, he discharged the novel weapon. * * * * * "that was a lucky thought of yours, ellerton, my boy," exclaimed mr. mckay, when the little party was safely on board. "they scooted like rabbits. but, by jove! it was a narrow squeak." chapter xiv routing the savages there was not the slightest doubt about it. the expedition had failed disastrously. quexo was badly wounded, the white men all more or less exhausted, while barely forty utterly demoralised natives were cowering in their canoes. "well, we can't stay here," remarked mr. mckay, after the mulatto's hurts had been dressed and the wounded man placed on one of the bunks. "they will be starting in pursuit, i'm thinking, and so, mr. blight, will you tell those black rascals to man two of their canoes and destroy the others? by that means we may be able to get the survivors back to ni atong." mr. mckay's opinion of the ex-pearler was undergoing a change. no doubt the man was a bit of a scoundrel, he thought, but he was older and possibly more of a reformed character than in the old days in torres strait. he had certainly fought well and had impressed the lads as a resolute and cautious combatant. "i'll tell 'em, boss," he replied. "but, by snakes, it's a bad look-out." "it is," assented mr. mckay, as he prepared to go below and bind up a slight wound on his shoulder. "your friends will have to be content with ni atong for a while, i'm thinking." andy was also in the cabin, where he was attending to a surface wound on his forehead--the legacy of one of the savages' showers of stones--so only terence and ellerton remained on deck with the ex-pearler. "couldn't the boss bring over the rest of your pals and settle our score with those niggers?" "what pals?"' asked terence, taken aback by the suddenness of the question. "why, the other chaps on your island." "there are none," replied terence. barely had the words escaped him, when he realised that he had made an admission. he had revealed the comparative weakness of the defences of mckay's island. "oh! is that so?" was the rejoinder. blight said no more on the subject, for the yawl was now within hailing distance of the forlorn flotilla. the natives accepted their white companion's orders without demur. the two most serviceable canoes were brought up with their full complement, and the rest were scuttled till they floated awash--useless to friend or foe. then with a light breeze the three craft--the yawl leading the forlorn procession--headed for the opening in the reef. jimmy blight was thinking. he was not of a thinking nature, but scheming and plotting were the only intellectual subjects in which he excelled. in fact, he was a past master in the art of intrigue. he briefly summed up the situation and enlarged upon it. his house and store at ahii were in the hands of a hostile race of savages. his wealth of copra and other valuable native products had vanished. had his black friends been able to regain possession of ahii, he would not have hesitated to incite them to fall treacherously upon the white men from mckay's island, and the doubtless valuable stores of that place would be his. now, with fewer than forty of his savage friends at his command, the risk was too great--at least at present. no, he must wait his time, return to ni atong, and endeavour to find an opportunity of surprising and slaying the handful of whites. if only he dared! with a fully charged revolver he might make a sudden attack---- this wicked scheming was suddenly interrupted by a shout from one of the canoes. the keen-eyed savages had detected an ominous movement ashore. their enemies were launching their canoes in pursuit of their discomfited adversaries. "say, boss!" exclaimed the ex-pearler, as mr. mckay emerged from the little cabin. "what's to be done now? there ain't no wind, in a manner o' speaking, and those reptiles'll overhaul us hand over fist." mr. mckay did not reply at first, but anxiously scanned the shore with his glasses. "there are seven canoes," he announced. "three for us to tackle and two for each canoe. 'tis long odds, but i reckon we'll come out on top." "why not get aboard the canoes, and let this 'ere packet go?" asked blight. "there'll be more chance with the blacks using their paddles. it'll be a flat calm in a minute or so." "no," replied mr. mckay. "we'll fight it out as we are, though we've had quite enough for one day." the crews of the two friendly canoes were still lying on their paddles, realising that their only hope was in remaining by the white man's boat. their indifference had vanished, and weapons were brandished in a way that showed a grim determination to fight to the death. "tell them to paddle for all they are worth," exclaimed mr. mckay. "what for?" demanded blight, his old aggressive manner beginning to return. "what's the use? let's keep together, i vote." "i mean to," replied mr. mckay coolly. "now do as i tell you." sullenly the ex-pearler obeyed, and the natives, plying their paddles to the accompaniment of a mournful chant, soon increased the distance between them and the almost becalmed yawl. "now, andy, start the motor." great was blight's astonishment as the engine began to purr, and the little craft shot through the water at a good eight knots. he had never seen an internal combustion engine before. although motor-driven craft are common amongst the pearling and trading fleets in the pacific, he had left the fishing-grounds some years before the first motor had made its appearance. nor was the wonder of the crews of the friendly canoes any the less. to them the white man's boat, vomiting clouds of vapour from the exhaust and producing a series of rapid explosions, was nothing more or less than a fiery-dragon. "we are going the pace too much," remarked andy, for the yawl was easily outdistancing the canoes, whose crews were showing signs of physical distress. "yes, we must stand by them," replied his father. "see, our pursuers are gaining; you are quite sure the motor is thoroughly tuned up, i hope?" "running like clockwork," was andy's enthusiastic reply. "good! now, lads, it's revolvers for this business. get the canvas off her, then. keep well under cover; i'm going to ram the leading canoe." the sails were quickly stowed, and the bowsprit run in. the five men, revolvers in hand, kept in the cockpit so as to be sheltered by the raised roof of the cabin. "now, ellerton, how's your nerve?" "perfectly fit." "then put your helm over when i give the word and strike yonder canoe square amidships." the pursuers had trailed out in a long, straggling line, a couple of hundred yards separating the foremost from the second. on they came, fearlessly. ellerton could see the foam flying from the sharp prow, the muscular backs of the straining oarsmen, and hear the steady yet rapid thud of the paddles. now he could discern the whites of the eyes of the fierce-looking warriors who were gathering in her lofty bows. "make due allowance for the way she carries," cautioned mr. mckay. "now, hard over!" the youth at the helm put all his strength against the tiller. the yawl rolled outward as she turned, then recovering herself rushed straight for her gigantic antagonist. with a yell of defiance the savages let fly a shower of arrows and stones. the masts and deck were literally bristling with darts, while the stones rolled like hail upon the planks. under the protection of the cabin-top the white men escaped the deadly volley, but ellerton, gripping the tiller with a vice-like grip, felt a hot, stinging pain in his left arm. then, crash! fair in the centre of the lightly-built fifty-feet hull struck the sharp stem. there was a terrific splintering of wood and the gurgling sound of inrushing water, while at the same time the fore part of the yawl was crowded with a score of black fiends. [illustration: crash! fair in the centre of the lightly built fifty-feet hull struck the sharp stem] then the revolvers barked, and the living mob of savages melted away, and the next instant the yawl was ploughing her way over the shattered remains of the war-canoe. "hurrah!" shouted the crew. "now for the next!" but the second canoe, profiting by her consort's misfortunes, turned and paddled rapidly back, to obtain the support of the third. with a difference of barely one knot in speed the advantage of the motor-driven vessel was lost, so the crew had to be content to keep out of range of the arrows and pour in volleys from the rifles. it was a stern lesson, but one that was absolutely necessary, for the remaining canoes turned tail and paddled hurriedly for the shore. the sharp and short conflict was ended by the return of the two friendly canoes, whose crews, with true savage instinct, completed the work of destruction by spearing every man whose head remained above water. "capitally done, ellerton!" exclaimed mr. mckay. "you--why, what's the matter with the lad?" the lad's face had turned a ghastly greyish hue, and only andy's prompt action saved him from falling upon the grating of the cockpit. "look! he's hit!" said andy, pointing to ellerton's left arm, which had hitherto been concealed. in a trice mr. mckay cut away the wounded youth's shirt-sleeve. the arrow had gone through the fleshy part of his forearm, the barb projecting quite a couple of inches. "hold his arm as firmly as you can," said mr. mckay. then, grasping the haft of the missile, he dexterously snapped it in two. in spite of his care and skill, the slight motion caused the lad to utter a groan; but the worst was still to come. lubricating the broken shaft with some cocoanut oil, mr. mckay told andy and terence to hold ellerton's arm tightly, so as to compress the veins and arteries, and consequently numb the limb. then with a rapid and deliberate motion he laid hold of the barbed end and drew the fragment of the missile through the wound. with a low moan ellerton fainted. "couldn't be better," remarked mr. mckay. "now, lads, take him into the cabin, and start the stove as fast as you can. i'm afraid the arrow is poisoned." andy and terence lifted their comrade upon one of the bunks opposite to that on which quexo was peacefully slumbering. mr. mckay had given the mulatto a strong sleeping draught; he now took up a rifle, and, withdrawing the cleaning rod, snapped it close to the "worm." "you might take the helm, blight," he remarked. "you know the course? i shall be busy for half an hour or so." blight nodded. left alone, he gave a glimpse at the compass, put the tiller up till the vessel lay on her proper course, and motioned to the two canoes to follow. then he resumed his meditations. everything seemed in his favour. half a dozen revolvers, thrown down after the fight, were within hand's reach. in the cabin were two wounded persons and three totally unsuspecting unarmed men. and close by were the two canoes containing his coloured associates. what could be easier? chapter xv a knife-thrust in the dark more than once blight bent over the array of death-dealing weapons, but on each occasion his nerve failed him. accustomed as he was to deal swiftly with the natives, never hesitating to shoot down any black creature that thwarted him, he shrank from tackling his intended victims. not from feelings of compunction did he pause; he was a coward at heart, and the thought of a possible failure filled him with a horrible dread. so, nervously sawing at the tiller, he gnawed his lower lip and formed fresh plans for evil. meanwhile mr. mckay, unconscious of his peril, proceeded with his preparations. he deeply regretted the fact that the case of surgical instruments salved from the _san martin_ was at that moment--like the dutchman's anchor--left at home, or rather on mckay's island. in the final hurry of embarkation that important item had been overlooked. grasping the glowing portion of the cleaning rod, mr. mckay approached the unconscious lad. once more telling the other two lads to hold the patient's arm firmly, he inserted the red-hot metal into the wound. it was the work of a few seconds, but the operation of cauterising the wound was accomplished. time alone would tell whether this rude surgery was a success or not. an hour later the low-lying island of ni atong was in sight, and just before sunset the yawl and her two native consorts entered the lagoon. it was a pitiful home-coming. the miserable remnant of the fleet of canoes told the tale, and already the beach was lined with a crowd of wailing women and crying children, with a sprinkling of old men, whose services had been dispensed with on the fatal expedition. the latter had good cause for being cast down. in many of the pacific islands old age is looked upon as a useless qualification, and, failing a crowd of prisoners to serve as sacrifices and to appease the warriors' appetites, it was their aged and infirm fellow-tribesmen who were doomed to die to keep the angry gods good-tempered. "coming ashore, boss?" asked blight, as if he did not care one way or the other. "i can give you a shakedown in my hut." "i'm afraid we cannot manage it," was the reply. "you see, with our two patients it is out of the question." "well, well! maybe it will be best, 'specially as them natives are going to have a bit of a bust-up to-night. you mayn't like it, though i'm used to it. when do you set sail for your own island?" "to-morrow at dawn." "oh!" mr. mckay looked up sharply. there was a strange sound about that "oh!" the ex-pearler realised that the exclamation was a weak expression of regret, and hastened to explain. "i thought as how you would be wanting fresh water, 'specially for your two young chaps. make a day of it, and have a spell ashore. one more day won't make no difference like." "possibly not," assented mr. mckay. "then there are yams and plantains. they'll be rare good for feverish fellows. you're welcome, you know." "i'll see what the others say. so now, blight, my son can row you ashore." "this is a present, isn't it, boss?" asked blight, pointing to the revolver that he had used to such good purpose at ahii. "certainly, i gave it you," was the reply. "thanks!" blight picked up the weapon and thrust it with assumed carelessness into his belt; then, bidding the crew of the yawl good night, he stepped into the dinghy. hardly had the sun set, than the wearied crew retired to the cabin for rest and refreshment. ellerton was awake, feverish, and at intervals in great pain. quexo still slumbered. andy and terence were sleepily nodding their heads in an almost vain endeavour to keep awake. mr. mckay, though utterly done up, announced his intention of keeping watch on deck the moment he had finished supper. just as the moon rose, a blood-curdling roar came from the island. instantly the two mckays and terence rushed on deck. fires gleamed in the centre of the wretched village, and around the flames danced a hundred natives, yelling, screaming, and invoking their idols. "what are they up to, pater?" asked andy, as his father scanned the shore with a pair of night-glasses. "let me have a look when you've finished." "you had better not," was the reply. "take my word for it." the lads understood. they were fairly well acquainted with the hideous orgies that are practised on these islands. "and to think we helped those villains," remarked andy. "well," admitted his father, "it was, as i said before, the only course open to us. now, i think all danger is past. they are not strong enough to attempt to seize our island, so we can go back with easy minds." "i hope so," returned his son. "but my word, it's cost us something!" "i can't understand that chap blight," said terence. "he seemed mighty curious to know how many of us lived on the island." "you told him?" "yes! i let the cat out of the bag, i fear." "you did?" replied mi. mckay gravely. "i'm sorry; but perhaps there's no harm done. however, we'll set sail to-morrow morning in any case. i, for one, will not be sorry to say good-bye to mr. blight. now, lads, you must turn in. i'll be all right here; and to-morrow, all being well, i'll make up arrears of sleep." left to himself, mr. mckay sat in the cockpit and watched the orgies ashore till the fires died out and the sounds of the worshippers ceased. half-an-hour later he appeared, to all intents and purposes, to be lying in the stern sheets fast asleep. at about three in the morning the moon, now high in the heavens, threw her beams upon a strange drama. swimming with eel-like swiftness and silence towards the unguarded yawl came three men. two were natives, the third a white man, and each had a glittering knife betwixt his teeth. grasping the boat's stern, blight (for it was he) listened intently. then, hearing only the sounds of deep slumber arising from the cabin, he cautiously placed his foot over the bobstay, and with slow and stealthy movement hoisted himself clear of the water. having made sure that the deck was deserted, he climbed softly upon the fo'c'sle and proceeded to unfasten his revolver, which he had secured to the top of his head by means of a strip of cocoa fibre. presently he was joined by one of the natives, and at a short interval by the second. creeping towards the open skylight the miscreant listened once more. the loud ticking of the cabin chronometer and the deep, regular breathing of the sleepers, alone broke the stillness. suddenly blight perceived mr. mckay's form lying with his head buried in his arm upon one of the seats of the cockpit. this was awkward. he raised his revolver, then reflected that ere he could reach the cabin after firing the fatal shot the occupants would be aroused. sprawling full length upon the cabin-top, blight watched the slumbering victim with considerable misgivings, till realising that mr. mckay was sound asleep, he raised himself upon his elbow, and beckoned to the two natives. uplifting his knife, blight made an imaginary thrust, then pointed meaningly towards the sleeper. just then a shark glided past the boat at barely an oar's length. rising to the surface it turned on its back and snapped at some floating object. the sharp, almost metallic snap of those powerful jaws filled the would-be murderer with alarm. he realised that the sleeper might awake, and also that his own retreat was cut off. the sweat poured in torrents from his brow and ran down his chalky cheeks. but the sleeping man stirred not. reassured, blight again signed to the natives. knife in hand the two glided along the narrow waterways, dropping noiselessly into the cockpit, and crept towards their unsuspecting prey. blight, revolver in hand, followed, stopping by the side of the cabin bulkhead, ready to dive into the cabin and complete the murderous business the moment the fatal blow was struck. like panthers the two natives launched themselves upon their victim, their knives flashed in the moonlight; the next instant they were buried to the hilt in the body of the sleeper. ere the weapons could be withdrawn, two shots rang out in quick succession. one of the natives fell face foremost across the coaming of the cockpit, the other gave a spring and plunged lifeless into the sea. then, before blight could realise the sudden turn of affairs, he felt the contact of the muzzle of a smoking revolver against his temple. "hands up, blight!" exclaimed mr. mckay resolutely. the would-be murderer's weapon fell from his nerveless grasp and immediately his hands were raised high above his head. the noise of the firing had aroused the sleeping inmates of the cabin, and andy, terence, and even ellerton rushed through the narrow doorway into the well. "get hold of a few pieces of lashing and secure the rascal," said mr. mckay calmly. "you are not hurt?" asked his son anxiously. "hurt? not a bit of it. no thanks to this beauty, though. see!" and, still keeping the weapon at the would-be assassin's head, he pointed to the made-up figure of himself, in which the hilts of the two knives glittered in the moonlight. andy and terence lost no time in securing the ankles of the prisoner. then ordering him to lower his hands, the lads deftly lashed his elbows together behind his back. "so, mr. james blight, alias 'chinese pork,' i find your delightful character has undergone little change during the last twenty years. one would have thought that your unpleasant experiences in connection with the _sea belle_----" "what d'ye mean?" gasped the prisoner, his eyes rolling heavily in his terror. "i beg you not to interrupt. a connection with the _sea belle_ would have taught anyone but an utter villain or a fool a lifelong lesson. i will pass over those minor affairs at boni harbour and fortescue strait, though by mentioning them you can realise that i know a good deal of your former career. what you've been doing since is of little consequence, though i'll wager that your existence will not bear investigation. now, to complete your record, you've been caught in the act of attempting to treacherously slay your white--well, i won't say friends. thanks to a merciful providence, your schemes were thwarted. i am now going to keep you in custody till i can hand you over to justice at brisbane, where you will have a fair trial and be allowed to answer to a number of various crimes." mr. mckay paused to note the effect of his accusation, then he continued: "i am going to keep you a close prisoner in the fo'c'sle till we return to our island. you will then be kept in confinement ashore till such time as we are able to reach some island under the control of a recognised british governor. have you anything to say?" the ex-pearler maintained a sullen silence, and, without offering any resistance, he was carried into the fo'c'sle and locked in, there to meditate on the fate in store for him. "ellerton, go back to your bunk. you ought not to be here," exclaimed mr. mckay. "but i feel all right again," replied the youth. "probably you do, but with your arm in that state absolute rest is essential. so go. andy, we've had enough of this island, so let's clap on all sail and shape a course for home." in the moonlight the entrance through the reef was plainly visible. there was a favourable breeze, so that the yawl could lay on her course without having to tack. as the anchor rose, a long-drawn chorus of shouts of rage came from the beach, and a swarm of arrows, all of which fell short, hurtled through the air. "so much for our native allies," observed mr. mckay. "they are all in the swim in this business. no matter, they can do us no harm." to the accompaniment of a farewell shout of anger from the baffled inhabitants of ni atong, the yawl glided swiftly across the moonlit sea. chapter xvi the gale throughout the night the stiff little craft gallantly breasted the waves, making a much better passage than she had done on her outward voyage, and at sunrise the highest peak of mckay's island appeared above the horizon. but with the rising of the sun the wind increased in force, and an hour later it was blowing half a gale, and dead astern. trembling on the crest of a huge wave, then sliding with a sickening sensation down the green slope into the trough, the little craft held on her course, steered by andy's sinewy arm. mr. mckay, unable to keep his eyes open, lay deep in slumber upon one of the bunks. ellerton, propped up by cushions, was kept awake by the motion of the boat, every lurch causing his wound to pain horribly. "another couple of hours will find us home, hoppy, old man," exclaimed terence cheerily, as he entered the cabin. "but it does blow." "so i should think," replied ellerton. "but how is she behaving?" "like a cork; we've only had the tail end of a couple of seas aboard. well, cheer up! make yourself at home and wish you were," and with this pleasantry terence returned to keep andy company. each time the yawl breasted the summit of a wave, the peak of mckay's island could be seen rearing its head above the waste of storm-tossed waters. each time it did so it appeared to be getting nearer. andy knew that there was danger ahead, but he forebore to mention the fact to his chum. the "back-wash" from the terrible reef, with its accompaniment of a tumble of dangerous cross-seas, had to be encountered, and the risky passage through the coral barrier made at all costs. for half-an-hour more the seas, though high, were comparatively regular, but at the expiration of that time the dinghy, which was being towed astern, was filled by a vicious comber. the dead weight of the water-logged craft caused the stout painter to snap like pack-thread, and the next instant the tender was lost to view in the turmoil of foaming water. "can't we go back for her?" shouted terence, for the howling of the wind made ordinary conversation inaudible. "impossible!" replied his chum. "she would be swamped before we hauled to the wind. besides, the dinghy's done for." "it's a rotten look-out. we shall miss her." "yes," assented andy. "but it can't be helped. look here, terence, now we are going through a patch of broken water. i can see it a mile or so ahead. we may have a few seas on board, so lash yourself to this cleat and stand by with the bucket. you may have to bale for all you're worth." terence closed the cabin-doors. fortunately they were close-fitting and comparatively watertight; but, on the other hand, the cockpit was not a self-emptying one. whatever quantity of water broke over had to be baled out. "we'll have one of those cans of kerosene out of that locker," continued andy. "going to start the motor?" "no; to throw oil on the sea. kerosene's not very heavy, but it's all we have. now, stand by, here it comes." only a mile now separated the yawl from the entrance to the lagoon of mckay's island, but every yard of that mile was beset with dangers. andy gripped the tiller, and braced himself for the ordeal. he had been the chief workman in the task of converting the boat into her present form, and now his handiwork was to be put to the test. a faulty piece of wood, a defective screw, an unsound rope--and their lives would have to answer for it. with a dull roar a white-crested wave broke over the fore-deck, burying the little yawl as far as the mainmast; then ere she could recover herself another comber came like a cataract over the lee quarter. well it was that both lads had taken the precaution of lashing themselves on, otherwise they might have been swept clean out of the well. andy, wellnigh breathless--for he had been hit in the side by the tiller as the boat attempted to broach to--retained sufficient presence of mind to thrust the helm up and enable the craft to meet the next following wave stern on. "bale!" he shouted. "bale for your life!" and seizing the kerosene can that was floating from side to side of the cockpit, he splayed a quantity of oil over each quarter. terence, who was thrown in every direction as far as his tether would allow, struggled manfully with the bucket, but could hardly cope with the frequent showers of spray that literally played over the boat from every point of the compass. the helmsman noticed, with feelings of deepest concern, that the yawl had made considerable headway since entering the zone of broken water, and it would be touch-and-go whether they could avoid being carried on to the lee side of the coral reef. it was now nearly high tide, and the cruel ridges were covered, although in the trough of the heavier waves the jagged lines of glistening coral showed themselves above the smother of foam. andy tried his best to keep the boat's head towards the channel, but in vain. she had lost ground, and was driving straight for the reef. one chance alone remained. he must put the yawl about and endeavour to claw-off the treacherous reef. like a top the little craft responded to the shift of the helm. for a few brief seconds the reefed head-sail slatted violently in the howling wind; then, to the accompaniment of another tremendous sea, the yawl staggered on her fresh course. andy's idea was to sail round to the lee side of the island and cruise about in the shelter of the reef till the gale moderated; but a few moments sufficed to show him that the spread of canvas--already as much as the vessel could carry--was not sufficient to take her to windward. she was drifting broadside on to the reef. "quick, terry!" he shouted. "tell them to stand by and make a rush directly you open the cabin door. the yawl's done for. she'll be smashed to splinters in five minutes." mr. mckay received the appalling intelligence fairly calmly. he at once proceeded to fasten a lifebelt round ellerton's practically helpless form, and then did a like service to quexo. nor did he forget the prisoner, blight. but, on sliding back the fo'c'sle hatch, he found the man lying senseless on the floor. either he had fainted through sheer fright, or he had been stunned by being thrown against one of the lockers, and bound hand and foot, had been unable to help himself. blight was no feather-weight, but in spite of the plunging and rolling of the doomed craft, mr. mckay gripped him with one hand and dragged his senseless body into the cabin. then, cutting his bonds, he completed his work of mercy by lashing the sole remaining lifebelt round the body of his would-be murderer. "you've nothing to put on," gasped ellerton. "true; but i have my strength," was the reply, as mr. mckay stealthily girded on a leather belt in which hung a formidable sheath-knife. it was not the thought of being cast on the waters that troubled him. death, should it come, would be swift and merciful. but should they survive the dangers of the reef there was the probability of far greater peril. though he forbore to mention the fact to ellerton, mr. mckay thought of the sharks, and with a fervent unspoken prayer to save them from these creatures, he stood ready for the cabin door to be opened. meanwhile terence and andy had cut themselves free from their lashings. twenty yards away the reef showed its teeth as if waiting for its prey. then with a noise like the rattle of musketry, which drowned the thunder of the breakers, the staysail burst asunder, and the yawl, in spite of the helmsman's efforts, flew up into the wind. down in the trough of a murderous sea she sank. a rapid glance astern showed the glistening reef towering several feet above the little craft, the white foam pouring down the honeycombed ridges as if the rock were baring itself to strike a harder blow. "the door!" gasped andy, as a gigantic roller bore down upon the reef. terence unfastened the cabin door, and as mr. mckay appeared, holding ellerton and quexo in his powerful grip, the yawl seemed to stand on end. then, borne on the breast of the roller, the little craft was tossed like a cork right over the rocks, her keel scraping the lee side of the reef by barely a yard! the next instant the vessel was rolling sluggishly in the sullen swell within the lagoon, with two feet of water in her cabin, yet still afloat and in comparative safety. "don't wait to bale out!" shouted andy. "you take the helm, pater. run her up into the wind and we'll anchor." the ground swell inside the lagoon was too great to allow the yawl to run alongside the usual jetty. they would have to wait till low tide, when the reef would be sufficiently exposed to serve as a breakwater. quickly andy and terence made their way for'ard to let go the anchor. when within a couple of hundred yards of the beach the yawl was again put head to wind, and with a splash the anchor plunged to the bottom of the lagoon. but just as andy was checking the out-rushing cable, a sudden blow from the staysail caught him unawares, and the next instant he was struggling in the sea. the waves carried the lad clear of the vessel, and in spite of his utmost efforts he was unable to regain the boat. his father hurled a coil of rope, but the line, being wet, became entangled and fell short. andy saw that it was impossible to swim back, so with a cheery wave of his arm he pointed towards the surf-beaten shore, and immediately struck out for land. for an instant mr. mckay intended to plunge into the sea and accompany his son on his perilous swim, till the thought of the possibility of blight recovering his senses occurred to him. with ellerton and quexo disabled, the margin of safety was not sufficient when only terence remained to guard the prisoner. both lads were surprised to see mr. mckay rush into the flooded cabin and return with a rifle and a belt of ammunition. "don't alarm him," said andy's father hurriedly. "but there may be sharks about." placing the rifle on the fo'c'sle of the heaving vessel, mr. mckay watched the progress of the swimmer with the greatest concern, at the same time keeping a sharp look-out for the expected appearance of the dreaded dorsal fin of one of the tigers of the deep. steadily andy swam shorewards, keeping up a slow yet powerful side stroke. now he was in the grip of the ground swell. once his feet touched bottom, but ere he could obtain a firm footing the "undertow" swept him backwards. the next instant he was lost to sight in a white-capped roller. the wave broke, then receded, but to the alarm of the anxious watchers there were no signs of the swimmer. quickly the wide expanse of sand uncovered; then, just as another breaker was preparing to launch itself upon the beach, andy sprang to his feet. knee-deep in water he rushed up the shelving shore, and managed to grasp a ledge of rock ere he was again overwhelmed by the mighty torrent. fortunately he was able to retain his grasp, and directly the rock uncovered he ran beyond the reach of the waves and sank exhausted on the beach. "he'll be all right in a minute," said mr. mckay with a sigh of relief. "now, ellerton, you had better stay here while we get rid of the water; the bunks must be saturated. come on, terence, we've been through a great deal, and now, thank god, we are safely home; but all the same, we've plenty of work to do." thus exhorted, terence assisted mr. mckay to lower and stow the mainsail and secure the fragment of the head sail that had caused so much mischief. this done, they plied buckets and balers till the level of the water they had shipped sank well beneath the floor-boards of the cabin. the yawl was no longer sluggish, but rose buoyantly as each roller passed under her. "this is the second gale from this quarter," remarked mr. mckay, as they were partaking of a hastily cooked meal. "it's taught me a lesson. had our boat been in her usual dock she would have been dashed to pieces. at the first opportunity we'll lay down a heavy set of moorings and keep her afloat. here, thanks to the reef, the seas can never be really dangerous, though on shore they break heavily." "when shall we be able to land, do you think?" asked terence, for the short, sharp motion of the boat as she pitched at her cable was beginning to prove distressing, both to him and quexo. "in a matter of three hours andy will be able to launch the other tender. we will then lay out another anchor, so as to make doubly sure, and get ashore. is andy still on the beach?" terence went out of the cabin, and on returning reported that his chum was ascending the cliff path. "now we'll secure this fellow blight once more. i see he's coming round," continued mr. mckay. placing the prisoner again in the fo'c'sle he did not attempt to secure his arms and legs. he merely tied the man's thumbs with a piece of strong but fine cord, so that his arms were kept behind his back. unless he attempted to struggle, the prisoner would feel but slight inconvenience, while this method was a perfect means of keeping him in a state of utter helplessness. shortly after this was done mr. mckay went on deck "to have a look round." gazing landward, he saw andy standing on the edge of the lower terrace, striving to attract his attention by means of a handkerchief tied to a stick. "there's andy calling me up in the morse code," said mr. mckay. "i wonder what's up? terence, will you please hand me over that signalling flag from the for'ard port locker?" andy, though not an expert signaller, knew the morse system fairly well. slowly he transmitted the startling message: "_the house has been broken into!_" chapter xvii back to the island without hesitation mr. mckay replied: "do not go to the house. remain on beach till you can launch boat." andy gave the a.f., showing that he understood the signal, and descending to the shore proceeded to divest himself of most of his sodden clothing. "there's something amiss ashore, lads," explained mr. mckay. "andy's just informed me that the house has been broken into. of course, it may be another unfortunate party of shipwrecked mariners, or a hurried visit of the crew of a passing ship. all i hope is that there are no natives on the island." "i wonder if any remained after the canoe left," remarked ellerton. "quite possible. i never thought of that, by jove! they might have slipped away in the night in order to steal all they could lay their hands upon. in that case there are only a few. we may be able to hunt them out without much trouble. still, i'm sorry it's happened." from the cabin mr. mckay produced his pair of marine glasses. after a prolonged examination he exclaimed: "yes, the door is ajar. i feel certain i closed it when i left." "we'll soon see what's amiss," said terence. "see, the reef is uncovering and the wind is dropping." "yes, it is," assented mr. mckay. "andy will be able to put off in the boat in less than an hour. ellerton, i think you had better remain on board." "why, sir?" "because of your arm." "i'll take care of it. besides, i can use a revolver with my sound limb if necessary." "very well, then; only don't blame me if anything goes wrong. quexo must stay in any case. there's no need to worry about blight." in less than the predicted time andy succeeded in rowing the small boat safely through the rapidly subsiding swell. directly he came alongside, mr. mckay and the two lads slipped on board, and with no greater inconvenience than a thorough drenching--to which they were now perfectly accustomed--the party landed at the natural quay at the foot of the path leading up to the house. everything appeared quiet. a hasty glance at the two storehouses on the lower terrace revealed the astonishing discovery that nothing had been disturbed. "strange," exclaimed mr. mckay. "one would have thought that these would be the first places to be ransacked. now, carefully, lads! keep your firearms ready." cautiously they scaled the cliff path and gained the terrace on which the house stood. still no signs of human beings, except that the door was half open. mr. mckay knocked quietly, then, pushing open the door, he entered. a strange sight met his gaze. everything movable had been upset or pushed out of place; the floor of the living-room was littered with bedding and the fragments of earthenware vessels. "the brutes!" ejaculated mr. mckay savagely. "they've capsized everything out of sheer mischief. i hope i'll be able to lay my hands on them." the lads, not without feeling of mysterious awe at the scene of wanton desolation, crossed the floor of the room and entered the sleeping quarters. here the state of confusion was, if possible, greater than in the outer apartment; but a clue to the mystery was afforded by the discovery of the dead body of a sheep, its head wedged in between the bars of a chair. "why," exclaimed andy, "the sheep have broken out of their pasture! "yes," replied his father. "they managed to find their way into the house, though how i cannot imagine. something must have frightened them and there was a mad stampede. this poor brute contrived to get his head jammed in the chair, and in his struggles he broke his neck. we've had a rare fright, but, after all, there's nothing of consequence that cannot be set right." "hadn't we better get quexo ashore before it gets dark?" "certainly, and blight as well. i think the best place we can put him is in the small store. he'll be all right for one night, though i'm sorry to keep him bound." "the treacherous reptile deserves no consideration." "my dear andy, we are not nicaraguan revolutionaries. so long as he remains our prisoner we ought to treat him with the same amount of consideration that any other british criminal receives while awaiting trial. to-morrow we must find a place better suited for his reception." "there's the farthermost cave, the one beyond those where we've stowed the dynamite," observed andy. "there's not much in it at present; we can build a partition over the opening and make a door." "yes, it will be far more comfortable than his quarters in ni atong. we'll make a start to-morrow." accordingly mr. mckay and his son put off in the dinghy--which, by the way, was the larger though more awkwardly-shaped part of the _san martin's_ gig--and transferred quexo to the shore. the poor fellow was in a bad state, though his wound showed no signs of complications. ellerton had had his hurts attended to as soon as the house was set in order. beyond the inflammation caused by the searing-iron, his wound gave no reason for undue anxiety. "now then, out you come," ordered mr. mckay sternly, as andy and he, armed in case of emergency, returned to the yawl. blight obeyed. indeed, there was no option. his face was a picture of utter cowardice and terror. "you ain't going to shoot me?" he whined. "no!" replied mr. mckay. "i've already told you what i intend to do with you. so long as you behave yourself you'll be treated properly--far better than you deserve." with that the would-be assassin took his place in the boat, mr. mckay seated beside him with a revolver in his hand, while andy rowed. on arriving at the shore the captive's eyes were bandaged, and, still secured by his thumbs, he was led up to the first terrace and placed in the storehouse. mr. mckay then severed the cord that bound him, the door was locked, and the rogue left to his own reflections. the following day was an exceptionally busy one. ellerton, being unable to do any hard work, was dispatched into the grove to "round up" the sheep, while the three sound members of the establishment, after having conveyed the prisoner his food and water, set off for the cave that was to be prepared for his quarters. it was situated on the extreme end of the upper terrace, where the level stretch of ground tapered away till it ended in the sheer face of a high precipice. outside the mouth of the cave was a belt of grass land about ten yards in width, the cliff falling to a depth of about seventy feet, while above the cave the rocks, too smooth to afford a foothold, towered to nearly a hundred feet. the cave was quite fifty feet in depth, and averaged ten feet in width, while its height in places was over twenty feet. its entrance, however, was barely four feet wide and six in height. "there won't be much light for the poor beggar when once we've inclosed the entrance," remarked andy. "that is so," replied his father. "i really don't see why we couldn't inclose a strip of land between the two cliffs, and let him have the run of it." "how inclose it?" "i think we can spare enough of the galvanised iron sheeting to make an unclimbable fence. each sheet is ten feet in height, is it not?" "certainly not less." "then we'll make a start. although we cannot possibly hope to complete the work to-day, we may reasonably expect to finish it to-morrow afternoon." the soil proved to be fairly soft, so that it was necessary to sink the base of the iron sheets at least two feet into the ground. strong timber uprights with cross-braces of railway iron served to make the fence secure, a doorway being left to afford means of communication with the prisoner's quarters. "i think we have taken every possible precaution," remarked mr. mckay, after the fence was completed and the bedding and the other necessary articles for the ex-pearler's use had been placed in the cave. "of course, this business entails a considerable amount of extra work, for besides the feeding arrangements we must make a thorough examination of the fence every day." "why? he cannot possibly pull it down, and i'm sure he will not be able to scale the wall." "there are at least two ways he might manage to escape. he could either burrow under the fence, or he might manage to spring from the top of a pile of furniture on to the upper edge of the wall. if we make a point of examining both sides of the fence twice a day, we shall be able to detect any sign of a tunnel; while it is unlikely that an effort to scale the wall will meet with any success, for the edge of the iron sheets is sharp enough to cut through his hands should he make a leap at it. i'll talk to him pretty straight and let him know what to expect if he does manage to escape, though, at the same time, it will be an anxious business for us while he's at large--if he's fool enough to try it." that evening blight was conducted to his new quarters, duly cautioned as to his behaviour, and safely locked up; and from that day the "prison yard," as terence termed it, was carefully examined night and morning. it was, as mr. mckay predicted, a severe strain on their time, for to guard against a surprise it was necessary that two people, armed in case of emergency, should make a visit to the prisoner twice daily. at the first opportunity a strong set of moorings was laid down off the little stone quay, sufficiently clear of the shore to be out of the range of breaking rollers. here the yawl was to make her future berth, the dinghy being kept on the beach well beyond the reach of the tide. it was proposed to make a trip at an early date to the marquesas, there to hand over the criminal into the charge of the british consular agent. the planning of this voyage necessitated much thought, for mr. mckay was loath to abandon the island entirely. on the one hand he did not like to let andy and ellerton make the voyage with the prisoner; on the other, he did not like to leave terence and quexo, and, perhaps, andy, alone on the island. "i have been wondering," he remarked, "whether my brother and your five cousins would care to join us. there are boundless possibilities in the place, and i don't think they would mind a change. once we have a few more members of the little colony, we can spare a few months to visit our respective homes. ellerton, i know, would be pleased to see england again. and you, terence, would you not like to return to 'our lady of the snows'?" "rather!" replied ellerton. "i should be awfully glad to see my people again; but, i must admit, i haven't had enough of mckay's island. i should like to spend a great deal of my life here." "and i, too," added terence. "gently, lads, gently!" replied mr. mckay. "you must remember that, although the island can be made self-supporting--for there's tons of copra to be had, and i have no doubt that the bed of the lagoon is covered with pearl oysters--the idea of living here is not altogether favourable. it wouldn't be good for us to have only each other's company for long. i'll not deny that this open-air, free-and-easy life is splendid from a physical point of view, but isolation tends to destroy one's mental powers." "then you advise me to get away from the island as soon as i can, and never return to it?" "not at all. you misunderstood me, ellerton. the island is as much yours as it is mine, or terence's. what i meant to imply was that once we can open up communication with the regular ports of call, so that we can leave whenever we wish to, the better it will be for all of us. but once abandon the island it becomes the property of the next comer. to put the matter briefly, i intend to sit tight here; but should any of you go away for, say, even three or four years, you will be welcome to return and secure your part of the commonwealth--such as it is." finally it was decided that blight should be kept on the island for the present, and that ellerton and andy should attempt to navigate the yawl to the society islands, communicate with their friends at home, and also write to the agent at fiji requesting that a british gunboat be dispatched to ratify the annexation of mckay's island. they could then return and await events. a week or more passed. preparations for the voyage were pushed forward, and at length everything was ready for the lads' adventurous expedition. "now, lads, turn in early, for you may not get a good night's rest for some days," observed mr. mckay, on the evening prior to the day fixed for their departure. the advice was acted upon, but ellerton could not sleep. the night was sultry, not a breath of wind rustled the leaves of the palm-trees. mosquitoes buzzed in and out of the room, while without the glow of the fire-flies betokened a spell of fine weather. uneasily the lad tossed from side to side on his bed. a stray mosquito managed to pass the meshes of the mosquito-net, and settled down to business, his object of attack being the lad's nose. ellerton knew that rest could only be obtained by killing the insect, so sitting up he began his plan of campaign. suddenly his ear caught the sound of the long-drawn shriek of a concertina, followed by a chorus of shouts and exclamations of surprise. in an instant he was out of bed. "wake up! wake up!" he shouted, shaking the heavy sleepers with unsparing hand. "the savages are upon us!" chapter xviii a surprise for the invaders hastily throwing on portions of their clothing and seizing their rifles and revolvers, which, by a general custom, were in variably kept loaded, the four white men prepared to dash out of the house. "don't show a light on any account," cautioned mr. mckay. "we must let the storehouses go and hold this terrace." it was a complete surprise. the natives, who had wrested ahii from its former owners, had followed up their success in driving off the invaders by paying a return visit to ni atong. the population of that island had either been killed or reserved for a more lingering death, and from one of the latter their captors learnt of the existence of mckay's island and its wealth of metal goods so prized by the south sea islanders. accordingly ten large canoes set out on an expedition to raid the white men's dwelling. arriving within sight of the peak of the island, they kept in the offing till night, then with torches blazing aloft they found the passage into the lagoon, and, paddling rapidly, landed on the beach below the settlement. thereupon three hundred powerful savages, armed with club, bow, spear, and knife, and bearing torches, began the ascent of the path that led to the three terraces. the lower storehouse was their first discovery. quickly finding that no white men were within, the host of warriors resumed their advance. some, however, tempted by the various articles stored in the building, began to help themselves. then it was that a savage laid hold of the concertina that ellerton had brought from the wreck and had hitherto been left neglected in the store. the native was examining his prize in the torchlight, when, happening to come into collision with another plunderer, the concertina gave out a startling screech as if to atone for its days of idleness. dropping the musical instrument of torture like a live coal, the savage rushed from the building, his yells of terror being taken up by his companions. this diversion was the cause of alarming ellerton, and consequently saving the inhabitants of mckay's island from a massacre. "aim low, lads!" shouted mr. mckay. "let 'em have it!" the conflict was short and sharp. although many of the attackers got within throwing distance, not a single native succeeded in gaining the top of the steep and narrow path. they fled hurriedly to the shore, where they rallied to await the dawn. "anyone hurt?" inquired mr. mckay. there was a general reply in the negative, though in the heat of the firing there had been several narrow escapes, for the ground was bristling with spears and littered with stones, which, had they struck anyone, would have caused serious if not fatal wounds. in the excitement ellerton had forgotten his crippled arm, and had used a rifle equally as well as his comrades; but the exertion had caused the blood to flow afresh. "rotten luck, i call it," he grumbled as andy readjusted the bandage. "you must load at least a dozen revolvers for me. thank goodness it's my left arm." "it's a fair surprise," remarked mr. mckay. "we've our work cut out to drive them off. won't they play old harry with the storehouse--and the yawl." "oh!" exclaimed andy in dismay, at the thought of his particular treasure being in the hands of the savages. "whatever can be done to save it?" "nothing, i'm afraid," replied his father. "perhaps if the mischief is not already done and the vessel holed, we can keep them off with a long range fire, though i can hold out no strong hopes in that direction. the plain truth is, that we are in a tight corner, and we must make the best of it." for some minutes the defenders kept silence, listening to the subdued sounds of their foes. "look here," said mr. mckay, "it's no use sitting here and doing nothing. terence, will you go back to the house and bring three or four spades? we'll dig a shelter trench along the edge of the cliff so as to be able to command the path without unduly exposing ourselves to the rascals. andy, you had better go with him and bring some more rifles and some ammunition." upon the lads' return, the little band set to work to throw up their defences, and barely had the work been completed ere the day broke. "there are not so many of them after all," remarked andy, when the full strength of the attacking party was revealed. "we had greater odds at ahii." "and a worse position," added his father. "we can hold out here, i fancy, but we cannot prevent the damage to our stores and gear. see, they've begun again." numbers of the savages were engaged in looting the store, while others, to andy's great disgust especially, had paddled off to where the yawl lay at her moorings. "now," exclaimed andy, setting the backsight of his rifle. "eight hundred yards!" "that's about the range," assented his father, and four rifles opened fire upon the daring natives, ellerton contriving to rest the barrel of his weapon upon the ridge of the earthwork, so as to avoid using his damaged arm. the bullets all fell close to the yawl, several of the natives being hit; but possibly in their hour of triumph the savages scorned the white men's weapons. casting off the moorings, they leisurely towed the yawl out towards the reef and plundered her. great was the defenders' rage to see the blacks hacking at the rigging, sails, and cordage, throwing the contents of the cabin-lockers into the bottom of their canoe, and wrenching the metal cleats, hinges, and shroud-plates from her hull. this done, a powerful savage stove a hole in the craft, and slowly sinking by the stern, she at length plunged to the bottom of the lagoon. "it's hard lines, andy," exclaimed his father as he paused to recharge his magazine. "but i'm afraid we shall have to make greater sacrifices before this affair is over." "we seem to have horrible bad luck," replied andy savagely. "first at ahii, and now here." "remember we were saved by the merciful intervention of one above," added mr. mckay. "and if it please him, we'll come out of this in safety. we've had a lot to be thankful for." "i know, but all the same it's hard lines. take that, you brute!" andy added, pressing the trigger. it was a splendid shot. a group of natives had begun to batter the yawl's tender to splinters. they were a good four hundred yards away, but andy's shot struck a tall savage, clad in a gorgeous cloak of white and red feathers, fairly between the shoulder-blades. andy had laid aside his rifle immediately after discharging it, and had snatched up a pair of field-glasses. the effect of the chief's death--for a chief he evidently was--caused the wreckers to abandon their task, and they fled to join their fellows under the shelter of the lowermost cliff. "they are preparing for another rush," observed terence. "yes. i wish we had a maxim or two," replied andy. "that would stop them." "i have an idea," exclaimed ellerton. "i can best be spared, so i'll run over to the caves and bring back a few sticks of dynamite and some detonators." "good! good!" replied mr. mckay. "you're a wonder, hoppy. mind how you come back, and don't stumble, or we won't be able to find even your fragments." ellerton set off on his self-imposed mission, and presently returned with about fourteen pounds of dynamite and half a dozen time-fuses. "what do you propose to do?" asked terence. "make a bomb and roll it over the cliff?" "no!" replied the youth. "we can load up one of those trucks, set the time-fuse, and turn the thing adrift." "it will mean good-bye to our storehouse," observed mr. mckay. "but that cannot be helped, so let's to work; they'll be rushing us in a few minutes." at the top of the cable-railway stood three empty trucks. in ordinary circumstances these would be filled with water, and their increased weight would cause them to descend and, at the same time, bring up the loaded trucks from the shore or the storehouse. half-way down the line, and almost abreast of the building, were three other trucks, waiting to be loaded should occasion require. around these trucks, which were invisible from the upper terrace, were most of the savages, who were massing for the attack at the base of the second terrace. "you are quite sure you can unshackle the thing easily?" asked mr. mckay. "if there's a hitch we shall be the ones to be blown to smithereens." "i'll make sure of it," replied ellerton, and securing the lowermost of the three trucks to the second one by means of a piece of rope, he unfastened the proper connecting shackles. then placing the explosive in the truck he asked mr. mckay to take the time. "it's set for four minutes," he announced. "half-a-minute will be quite enough, so at three and a half minutes from the time the fuse is lit i'll cut the rope and off she'll go." "stand back, you fellows! if it goes wrong we need not all be blown sky-high. are you ready? stand by!" the fuse began to hiss and splutter. ellerton, knife in hand, kept his eyes fixed on mr. mckay, who, standing fifty yards off, held his watch before him. "precious long three and a half minutes," thought the lad. it was not a pleasant task standing within two yards of a highly-charged explosive. more than once he felt tempted to cut the rope and let the truck go. "time?" he shouted huskily, for his heart seemed literally in his throat. "no, not yet," replied mr. mckay. realising the strain on the plucky youth, he began to walk slowly in the direction of the truck. "stand back, sir!" mr. mckay stopped and slowly raised his hand. "stand by! let go!" one swift sweep of the sharp blade and the cord was severed. slowly the truck began to gather way, then moving with increased speed it plunged on its headlong course. ten seconds later--before the fuse had time to complete its work--the descending truck crashed into the stationary ones. there was a deafening roar, a cloud of dust, in which was mingled a number of heavy, shapeless objects, and then an ominous silence, broken only by the crash of some fragments of wood and metal hurled high in the air by the explosive. rushing to the edge of the cliff the four defenders gazed upon the result of their stratagem. where the trucks had stood gaped a pit six feet in depth, for one of the peculiarities of dynamite is that it shows its power mainly where it meets resistance. of the storehouse scarce a vestige remained, while the double line of rails had been uprooted for a distance of nearly twenty yards. the havoc wrought amongst the savages was appalling. so many were killed that had the white men so wished it they could have fallen upon the survivors and exterminated them; but such was not their intention. "we must act with prudence or we shall be left with fifty wounded savages on our hands," said mr. mckay. "those who are unhurt will take to their canoes, and leave the others to their fate, and that won't do!" "how can we stop them taking to their canoes?" asked andy. "by taking advantage of their cowed condition and disarming them. come, let's to work." fearlessly the four defenders descended the path to the lower terrace. "we'll begin with those fellows first!" exclaimed mr. mckay, pointing to a group of natives cowering, with their hands over their eyes, against a spur of the cliff. "stand by with your revolvers in case they resist." there was no resistance. passively the savages allowed mr. mckay to remove their weapons, which had fallen from their nerveless grasp. seizing one man firmly but gently, mr. mckay dragged him from his companions. the native's face bore a strong resemblance to that of a sheep led to the slaughtering-block; no doubt he thought he was to be slain. escorted by the three lads the prisoner was taken to the fringe of the cocoa-nut grove, where mr. mckay presented him with a branch of a palm--the almost universal emblem of peace. at this the native began to see a chance of having his life spared, and mr. mckay, pointing to the canoes and then to the wounded savages, made signs to the man that they desired their crippled enemies to be placed in the native craft. this experiment was tried upon some of the other unharmed savages, with equally good results, and quickly recovering their senses the natives set to work with a will. one powerful-looking savage, however, refused to deliver up his club, but instead made a sudden rush at mr. mckay with the evident intention of knocking him over the head. mr. mckay had discarded his rifle, and his revolver was in the side pocket of his pyjama coat. coolly his hand sought his pocket, and without attempting to withdraw the weapon he discharged it at his assailant, who was barely five yards off. the heavy bullet, striking the man full in the chest, laid him dead on the ground, while the other savages, awestruck at the sight of one of their number being killed by no visible agency, were again thrown into a state of panic. at length all the wounded were distributed between five of the canoes. then mr. mckay made signs for the rest of the natives to embark, keeping the other five canoes on the beach, and within an hour of the explosion the sorry remnant of the invaders was paddling back towards the island of ahii. chapter xix the prisoner's escape "do you think they will ever return?" asked terence. "i think they have had enough," replied mr. mckay. "they've had a lesson." "and so have we," added ellerton, dolefully regarding the fragments of the storehouse and the shattered line of rails. "and our boat; how shall we be able to leave the island now?" asked andy. "perhaps the damage done to that is not so great as we imagine. with the help of these canoes we may be able to raise her. but we'll go into that question later. at present i feel as if i could enjoy a good square meal." so back to the dwelling-house they went, where quexo, who had been quaking all the time, was reassured. "don't you think we could rig up an electric alarm?" said terence during the progress of the meal. "there's plenty of insulated copper wire in the small store." "it would be as well," replied mr. mckay. "we might have a return visit; though, as i said before, i don't anticipate one." "but some natives from another island might try and surprise us," said andy. "news travels quickly, and perhaps we might again be favoured with the unwelcome attentions of these savage gentry." "and i tell you what," continued terence, waxing enthusiastic, for electrical engineering was his strong point, "we brought one of the _san martin's_ searchlights ashore. i'll try and fix it up and connect it with the dynamo." "we'll see what's to be done. but now, how about blight? it's time we paid him a visit." "i guess he's been wondering what the dust-up was about," remarked andy, as he prepared the prisoner's daily ration. andy and terence were deputed to visit the prisoner, and, armed as usual and carrying a supply of food and water, they set off for the fenced-in dwelling. from the elevation of the upper terrace they could see the distant dark brown sails of the canoes, for the wind was light and their progress had been slow. "they'll have a nice yarn to pitch into their friends when they return," observed terence. "they stood a good chance of pitching into us," replied andy grimly. "the rascals!" for his mind was still sore on the subject of the scuttled yawl. on arriving at the fence andy put down his load, and producing a key unlocked the door. the space without the cave was deserted. "strange," muttered andy. "blight is generally anxious for his food." carefully relocking the door, the lads made their way to the mouth of the cave. here, too, silence reigned. "blight! where are you?" there was no answer. andy repeated the call, but without result. "is he asleep, or is he dead?" asked terence, and gripping their pistols the two lads entered the cave. contrasted with the brilliant sunshine without, the apartment seemed plunged into utter darkness, but by degrees the lads' eyes grew accustomed to the gloom. "be careful," whispered andy. "perhaps he's up to some of his tricks." "you locked the door in the fence?" "yes." "then let us explore the cave thoroughly." this they did, penetrating into the cavern and examining every recess as they advanced, till the daylight which filtered in was insufficient to allow them to continue their search. "where's his lamp? i know the pater let him have one." "i saw it on a ledge close to the entrance. have you any matches?" andy had; matches were becoming scarce on mckay's island, and whenever possible a burning glass was used for obtaining fire. being, in this case, without his magnifying glass, andy had to use one of the precious hoard of matches that he kept in a watertight gun-metal case, and lighting the lamp the two explorers resumed their search. "he's gone right enough," exclaimed terence, as they "drew blank." "but where? and how?" "goodness only knows. let's run back and tell the others." mr. mckay was greatly upset at the news, and seizing a light rifle he strode off towards the prisoner's quarters, accompanied by the three lads. "did you leave the door open?" he inquired, as they came in sight of the fence. "yes," replied andy. "i was in a hurry to tell you, and what does it matter now that the man has escaped?" "for all we know he might have been lying concealed within the fence the whole time you were looking for him, and finding the door unlocked after you left he coolly walked out. andy, i'm surprised at such carelessness." it was seldom that mr. mckay was annoyed with his son, but the apparent laxity was enough to justify his displeasure. with blight roaming about the island, the existence of the others would be a continual round of anxiety. the man was no ordinary criminal. he was versed in all the wiles of the savage life, possessed of considerable strength, skill, and reliance, and was not above resorting to treachery and murder to gain his ends. a careful examination of the outside of the fence revealed no signs of a burrow under the iron sheeting, but close to the part of the wall that touched the cliff there were unmistakable signs of a man's feet. "there you are! he did not escape by the door after all, andy," remarked his father. "see, these two footprints close together show us that he jumped, and, what is more, jumped skilfully, for there are no traces of his heels. we'll find out how he scaled the fence by examining the other side." entering the door, the gaolers found that blight had cut a number of niches in the rock and had thus managed to climb to the top of the fence. the cutting of these footholds must have taken a considerable time, and in spite of the daily examination of the ground for any sign of a tunnel, the niches had escaped observation. "you see how he hoodwinked us," said mr. mckay, pointing to the little heap of dried grass and mud. "he dug out those footholds and filled them up with grass and clay, so that they presented the same appearance as the rest of the cliff. now, lads, we must find him, and the sooner the better." accordingly they returned to the house, where terence was told off to remain on guard with quexo in the event of the escaped prisoner breaking in and securing arms. the mulatto, though far from having recovered from his injuries, was strong enough to use a pistol, so the two could hold the dwelling-house against a surprise. having supplied themselves with enough provisions for the day, the two mckays and ellerton set out on the trail of the fugitive. mr. mckay and his son took rifles and revolvers and also an axe to "blaze" the palm-trees, while ellerton, by reason of his damaged arm, carried a revolver only in addition to his canvas knapsack containing his share of provisions. tracking was a new experience to the english lad, and he could not help wondering at the keenness displayed by father and son as they followed the scantiest trail. andy would walk with considerable speed for a hundred yards, his eyes fixed upon the ground; while mr. mckay would follow at his heels, at the same time keeping a sharp look-out on all sides in order to guard against a sudden attack. then the order would be reversed, mr. mckay following the trail, and his son acting as a cover to his father. for nearly a mile the track was fairly well-defined, though ellerton had to confess that he would have failed to notice it. the fugitive had skirted the base of the cliff, then plunging into the palm grove, he had gone by a round-about way towards the left; and was evidently heading for the thickly-wooded belt of land surrounding the base of the highest peak of the island. then the pursuers met with an unexpected rebuff. the trail led up to a broad tract of barren country, the surface of the land consisting of rocky mounds covered with a deposit of lava--the result of volcanic action many years previously. "this kind of stuff extends right up to the base of the peak," said andy. "we had a rough scramble when quexo and i climbed the mountain. i know what it's like. there are hundreds of rifts where a man might hide himself." "he's covered his tracks," announced mr. mckay. "see, he's gone in that direction, then back again and off in entirely the opposite way." "and the trail is getting very much fainter," added andy. "it's my belief that he's lying low within a few yards of us," continued his father. "it's an admirable hiding-place, but it's certain that he must have food, so he's bound to make for the cocoanuts and bread-fruit trees sooner or later. that's why he's doubled on his tracks." "we must double on our tracks before long," replied andy. "that is, if we don't want to spend a night in this wilderness." "that's what i intend to do," said his father in a low voice. "i want you two to go back to the house. make plenty of noise, and grumble at having been unsuccessful. i'm going to remain here." "alone?" queried andy. "hist! don't speak so loud. yes, alone. you don't imagine i'm afraid to tackle an unarmed man, do you? now, listen to what i have to say. it will be dark in an hour or so, but the moon will rise at nine o'clock. make your way here at sunrise to-morrow, and i'll warrant you'll find me safe enough--and not alone, i hope." andy knew that it was no good arguing, and the two lads set off towards their home. the blazed track was followed without difficulty, and just as the sun set they emerged from the forest and gained the terrace on which the house stood. "where's mr. mckay?" asked terence. "left behind." "left behind? what for? has anything gone wrong?" "i hope not. he insisted, so there was no help for it. we've to rejoin him at sunrise to-morrow," replied andy. all that night the lads did not attempt to sleep. filled with anxiety, they listened intently for the sound of a rifle shot. the air was perfectly still, and though the strained nerves of the watchers caused them to hear a variety of imaginary sounds, no reassuring report of firearms broke the echoes of the palm-groves. "look here," exclaimed ellerton, after hours of weary vigil, "the moon's up quite enough to allow us to find our way; so let's make a start." andy shook his head. "you ought to know the pater well enough by this time, hoppy. it's rotten hanging about here, i admit, but it's part of the game. so let's make the best of it." chapter xx the enemy is cornered mr. mckay, left to himself, prepared for his all-night watch. his hiding-place consisted of a crevice which commanded a view of the route his companions had taken. standing upright he could also see over the rock in which he was concealed, though prudence urged him not to show his head above the gaunt stone walls of his lair. he rested himself on a convenient ledge, and waited, with his rifle across his knee. then, as the sun set and intense darkness brooded over the land, he braced himself for his task. instinct told him that the fugitive would skulk in the rocks till the moon rose; then in all probability he would prowl for food. more than once mr. mckay fancied he heard the crunching of a boot upon the pumice stone. twice he grasped his rifle, as a dark shadow seemed to loom up against the darkness. "imagination," he remarked to himself. "what is the matter with my nerves?" but a finger pressed upon his wrist showed him that his pulse was beating regularly. then came a sound that could not possibly be mistaken--a smothered sneeze. blight was within a few yards of mr. mckay, but in which direction the latter was unable to decide. then came the scuffling of feet. the fugitive was scuffling blindly across the rock. at any instant he might pitch into the crevice right into the arms of his pursuer. nearer and nearer he came, cursing under his breath as his feet came in contact with the ruts and sharp corners of the rocks. mr. mckay could even hear the laboured breathing of his quarry. realising the danger of making his way over the pitfalls, blight sat down, muttering angrily at being baulked, at the same time abusing the moon for its tardy appearance. mr. mckay waited, rifle in hand, feeling almost pleased. he pictured the fugitive's consternation when the moonlight revealed his tracker covering him at ten paces. it was the old animal instinct, the joy of the chase, whether hunter and hunted be human beings or mere beasts of the field. above the tops of the distant palm-trees a pale yellow light dawned in the eastern sky. stronger and stronger it grew, till the golden disc of the queen of night appeared, the brilliant light throwing the rocks into strong relief. the escaped prisoner, now that his path seemed clear, prepared to make his journey towards the trees once more, and obviously fearing no danger, he scrambled over a flat-topped boulder. barely had he stood erect when mr. mckay, rifle to shoulder, shouted: "the game's up once more. throw up your hands!" so great was blight's surprise that he stood stock still, with mouth agape, staring at the silhouetted form of his enemy; then, recovering himself, rushed wildly towards mr. mckay, shrieking: "you'll never take me alive, bad luck to you!" it was the act of a madman. ere he could cover the intervening apace, mr. mckay could have shot him dead on the spot. but the australian was loath to be the rascal's executioner; the business seemed to him to be mere butchery. turning down the muzzle of his rifle, the solitary tracker aimed the weapon at his enemy's feet. this action had a most restraining effect upon the rogue. he would welcome a swift and almost painless death, but to be deliberately crippled, secured at leisure, and dragged back to his prison, did not appeal to him. he turned swiftly and, dodging from side to side as he ran, he sped rapidly across the rocks. mr. mckay fired, but the shot went wide. he could have perforated the man's body between the shoulders with the greatest ease, but a pot-shot in the moonlight at a pair of swiftly-moving legs afforded plenty of opportunities of missing. the fugitive uttered a yell of defiance, and sped onwards. another fifty yards and he would be lost to sight in the midst of a labyrinth of fantastically-shaped rocks. mr. mckay did not attempt to fire a second shot. the success of his long vigil depended upon keeping the chase in view. laying his rifle on the ground and making sure that the flap of his pistol-holster was loose, he vaulted upon the rock and set off in pursuit. although "hard as nails" and sound of wind, mr. mckay forgot for the time being that the result of his accident on board the _san martin_ had left him somewhat weak in his lower limbs. with elbows pressed close to his sides he ran, but ere forty yards were covered he found himself lurching dangerously. setting his jaw firmly, he persevered, keeping his eyes fixed upon the form of the fugitive, yet he was forced to confess that he was losing ground. blight was now within twenty yards of the sheltering rocks. dare the pursuer use his revolver and stop this headlong flight? the odds were too great, for with the exertion of running his aim would be erratic. no, he must continue to run and trust to chance that his quarry might be cornered somewhere. suddenly blight stumbled, kicking up a cloud of pumice dust that looked silvery in the moonlight. two yards he traversed ere he fell headlong in the soft lava, and before he could stagger to his feet his pursuer was almost within arm's length. "give in, you idiot," shouted mr. mckay, drawing his revolver. for answer blight laughed, and, bending low as he ran, he doubled away to the right, where the ground sloped downwards towards a line of irregularly-shaped cliffs. he was crippled. he had twisted his ankle, and everything was in mr. mckay's favour. unwilling to close with the desperate fugitive, mr. mckay prepared to maim him with a bullet through his leg; but even as he levelled the weapon, blight disappeared from sight with a shriek of terror. instinctively mr. mckay threw himself flat on his back, digging his heels into the soft yielding dust; but surely and gradually he found himself slipping towards the mouth of a gaping abyss. the very ground on which he was sprawling was moving. he could hear the rustle of the sand and small stones as they dropped over the ledge into the apparently fathomless chasm. desperately mr. mckay plunged his arms into the sliding sand; but his efforts were unavailing. he was being launched towards the yawning gulf, the horrors of which seemed worse in the moonlight. just as he was on the point of slipping over the edge--his heels were already over the abyss--his hand, buried arm's length in the pumice, came in contact with a piece of hard rock. would it hold? he wondered. slowly his outstretched arm began to change from a vertical to an almost horizontal position as his body still continued its downward motion. the rock afforded but a slender hold: either the fabric might become loosened, or his hand might be unable to keep up the strain, and then----? mr. mckay ceased to struggle. he could feel the sand slipping from under him, streaming past like a solid cataract. so long as he kept quiet he was comparatively safe, but directly he commenced to find a foothold, his peril increased threefold. yet he knew that every moment his grip upon the small pinnacle that stood between him and instant death was gradually becoming weaker. in those awful moments of peril he could hear the laboured breathing of his enemy, coming apparently from a great depth beneath his feet. blight, then, was still alive, but his gasping breaths sounded ominous. at length, regaining his self-possession, mr. mckay put forth a final effort in an endeavour to draw his feet clear of the awful chasm. inch by inch he worked himself upwards, against the increasing torrent of sand, when suddenly the rocky ledge was wrenched from its base, and the next instant he was swept into the gulf. amidst a shower of dust and stones he felt himself hurtling through the pitch dark air, then everything became a blank. * * * * * the first rays of the rising sun filtering through the narrow neck of the inverted funnel-shaped chasm strove to disperse the darkness. stretched upon the thick carpet of powdered pumice were two motionless figures, partially covered with the flow of dust that trickled from the open air like the sand of a gigantic hour-glass. the head and shoulders of one of the victims were pillowed upon the body of the other, who lay, with arms outstretched, gazing upwards with sightless eyes at the narrow slit of sky that was visible between the lips of the abyss. blight had gone to his last account. slowly opening his eyes, mr. mckay blinked stupidly at nothingness for a few seconds, then stretched out his arms. it was the action of a man awakening from slumber. he felt no pain; he had no idea of where he was, or of what had occurred. with the intention of going to sleep again he turned his head on its ghastly pillow, but on drawing up his arms to compose himself, his head came in contact with the cold face of his companion in misfortune. the touch acted like an electric shock. in an instant the details of the tragedy flashed across his mind. he stumbled to his feet, but overcome by weakness, he sank once more upon the dust-covered floor. how long had he been in this hideous deathtrap? he wondered. was it a night, or many days and nights? had his comrades searched in vain and had they abandoned their quest and left him to his fate? for quite half-an-hour mr. mckay sat and thought, striving to collect his mental and physical powers. he went over the events leading up to the final tragedy--the ambush, the pursuit, blight's disappearance, and his own terrible ordeal on the sliding sand. then he reflected that his trail would be fairly well-defined, and that help must be forthcoming. his watch was still going, so that he knew that it was only the morning following his night's vigil. overhead a dazzling ray of sunlight shone obliquely through the opening, illuminating the shaft-like sides of his prison, but so dead black was the colour of the rock that hardly any light was reflected to the bottom of the pit. he could, in fact, just see his own hands and the grey features of his ill-fated companion. mr. mckay groped about the floor. at first his fingers encountered nothing but dust. he plunged his arm up to the elbow in the soft yielding deposit; but nothing solid met his touch. fearing that he might be lying on a ledge overhanging a pit of fathomless depth, mr. mckay extended his field of exploration, making wide sweeps with his arms. presently his fingers encountered a metal object. it was his revolver. "at least," he thought, "i can signal for aid." but on second thoughts he hesitated. then he remembered his box of matches. fumbling in his pocket he found the little case, and eagerly, like a miser counting his gold, he passed the little sticks one by one through his fingers. ten--ten priceless matches. he struck one. for the moment his eyes were dazzled by the yellow fire, but ere it burnt out he made sure of two things. he was not lying on the edge of another precipice; that was reassuring. his second discovery was disconcerting. his trusty revolver was choked with fine dust, and had he discharged it he would have assuredly been injured by the bursting of the barrel. the match flickered out, and to the imprisoned man the darkness seemed denser than ever. it pressed upon him like a real substance, till he felt tempted to shout in his distress. by degrees he grew calmer, and staggering to his feet he moved his limbs with extreme caution. to his satisfaction they were still sound, though he was beginning to feel stiff and bruised from head to foot. the light of a second match showed that blight was indeed beyond all human aid, so, placing his handkerchief over the face of the corpse, mr. mckay retired a few steps till a third match became necessary. he found himself within a few feet of one of the walls of his prison. the stone, divided by volcanic agency, was almost vertical at the point, though at others it receded so that the base of the abyss was several yards beyond the perpendicular height of the shaft. close to him was a deep crack in the wall, known by mountaineers as a "chimney." it might be possible to scale the rock, he thought, but the knowledge that the edge of the shaft was "rotten" compelled mr. mckay to abandon that attempt. he must wait; yet, unwilling to remain idle, he resolved to sacrifice four more of his precious matches in exploring the immediate vicinity of the chasm. keeping close to the wall, mr. mckay proceeded with the utmost caution, till he reached a yawning cavern that descended abruptly. for a moment he hesitated, fearing the presence of carbonic acid gas, but on holding the lighted match close to the ground the flame burnt clear and bright. to his surprise mr. mckay found his hand resting on the butt of a musket. the weapon was lying on the hard, rocky floor of the cave, for here no dust had penetrated. another match revealed the fact that the firearm was of an ancient pattern, the combined flint and matchlock being of not later date than the end of the seventeenth century. "by george! this is a find!" exclaimed mr. mckay. for the time being he forgot his surroundings, interest being centred in this relic of bygone days. then, unwilling to risk using his remaining stock of matches, yet mentally resolving to explore this part of the cavern at the earliest favourable opportunity, he retraced his steps to that part of the chasm that lay beneath the narrow shaft. here he sat down and waited, hoping for the speedy arrival of andy and ellerton. chapter xxi the buccaneers' cave it could not have been more than a couple of hours after mr. mckay returned to consciousness that the two lads emerged from the forest and gazed wonderingly upon the rock-strewn plain. not knowing the course of events, they had left terence and quexo to guard the dwelling-house against a possible attack. "steady, hoppy!" cautioned andy, as ellerton was about to rush towards the spot where they had left mr. mckay on the previous evening. "i don't like the look of things. suppose that rogue has got the upper hand? you would be potted to a cert if you rushed into the open in that reckless style. you work round to the right and i'll go by the left." accordingly the lads, taking advantage of every bit of cover, advanced with the utmost caution towards the little rift in the dark rock where mr. mckay had made his ambush. there was his rifle, lying on the ground, with no sign of an empty cartridge to show that the weapon had been discharged. andy removed the magazine and found that the cartridges were still intact. "i can't understand it," he exclaimed. "the pater was evidently in a hurry, for, you see, the rifle was not placed against a rock, but was thrown down on the ground. he's too careful, in ordinary circumstances, to do a thing like that." "well, where is he? if blight had managed to get the better of him he would have taken away the rifle." "he may have chased him right across this island. come on, it's no use wasting time here; let's try and pick up the trail." andy leapt upon the flat top of the rock and assisted his chum to follow his example. both took it for granted that there was no further need for concealment. from where they stood the ground had the appearance of a broad belt of flat rock, divided in all directions by narrow crevices, most of which could be jumped across with the greatest ease, while ahead was the first of a series of cliffs, which incircled the base of the peak of the island. "look!" exclaimed ellerton, pointing to a little heap of brown canvas which was lying on the rock about thirty feet away. "there's your father's haversack." the lad was right, for mr. mckay had discarded the article as he commenced the pursuit of the fugitive. from this spot the mingled tracks of the hunter and the hunted were easily traced, by reason of the deposit of lava dust, which grew thicker as the lads advanced. suddenly they came to an abrupt halt. almost at their feet began the treacherous slope, ending in the horrible fissure which had been the cause of blight's death and mr. mckay's disaster. although the still sliding dust and sand had almost hidden the traces of mr. mckay's desperate struggle to save himself from the yawning pit, there remained sufficient evidences of the disappearance of the fugitive and his pursuer. the faces of both lads grew pale. andy was about to rush towards the brink of the abyss when ellerton's detaining hand was laid upon his shoulder. "it's nothing more or less than a trap," said he. "you'll----" the sentence remained unfinished, for from the depths of the chasm a hollow voice that the lads hardly recognised as mr. mckay's repeated the warning: "stand back, lads!" "are you all right, sir?" shouted ellerton. "yes, but you cannot get to my aid without a rope. hurry back to the house, and bring all hands with you. a lantern will also be useful. be as quick as you can, for it's pretty doleful down here." "all right, sir, we'll make haste; but stand by!" and as a parting gift ellerton dexterously threw mr. mckay's haversack, still containing an ample supply of food, into the pit. andy, however, hesitated. "are you sure you are all right, dad?" "ay, my boy. why do you ask?" "because your voice sounds so strange. i suppose it's the rocks that affect it. how far did you fall?" "i hardly know; about thirty feet, i expect; luckily the ground's soft." "seen anything of blight?" "dead!" replied mr. mckay. with the utmost despatch ellerton and andy returned to the house, where, having told the others all they knew about the accident, they collected a couple of coils of rope, some lanterns, two strong crowbars, a hammer, and, at ellerton's suggestion, two six-inch pulleys. the four lads--for even quexo insisted on coming, though he was still in a weak state of health--set off for the scene of the disaster, andy and terence carrying the bulk of the appliances, while ellerton and the mulatto took only what they could place in their belts. cheering up the prisoner with a lusty shout of encouragement, the rescuers proceeded to drive the crowbars into a convenient crevice in the rocks, so that one was about ten feet nearer to the chasm than the other. from the base of the outside bar to the top of the inner one, ellerton lashed a piece of rope, then making sure that the "crows" would bear any strain that was likely to be put upon them, he attached a pulley to the base of the innermost. through the block was rove one of the coils of rope, one end of which he tied round his waist. then, taking the lighted lantern in his hand, he walked cautiously towards the brink of the pit, the others paying out the rope as he went. before he had gone a distance of five yards the pumice dust began to slide away from under his feet, causing him to sit down on the slope, while the avalanche nearly blinded mr. mckay as he was looking upwards for the expected relief. "come back, hoppy!" shouted andy. "remember your arm." "i do," replied ellerton with a laugh. "it's giving me good cause to remember it, but i mean to make the best of it. you fellows can do more good by hauling on that rope than i can, so slack away." terence and andy accordingly "slacked away," and ellerton slid another yard or so towards the brink. he was then able to lower the lantern to mr. mckay, and at the same time he made the discovery that the shaft was too rugged to allow a man to be hauled up by a rope without serious danger of the rope being chafed through by the sharp projections. he explained the situation to mr. mckay, who fully realised the force of his remarks. "never mind, we'll manage it right enough," concluded ellerton cheerily, and giving the word he was hauled back to where his companions stood. "we must have one of those trees down," he said, pointing to the distant palms. accordingly the lads set off for the forest, where without much difficulty a stout trunk, thirty feet in length, was felled. the work of transporting it to the brink of the pit was a more tedious business, and an hour elapsed ere they succeeded in slinging the timber across the yawning gulf, where it rested with about ten feet imbedded in the soft lava on either side of the hole. "now you can do this part of the work better than i," said ellerton to andy. "lash this block to the centre of the trunk, and reeve a rope through it." this andy managed to do. he also lashed a smaller piece of timber at a distance of about four feet below the tree-trunk, so as to form a platform to enable mr. mckay to obtain a clear spring when hauled up as far as the pulley would permit. "all ready, pater?" asked the son. "wait a moment, andy. could you manage to come down here, do you think?" "i'll try. i say, you fellows, i'm going down, so pay out the rope." andy swung himself from the main beam upon the lower piece of timber, and, summoning up his courage, launched himself off from the swaying perch. slowly he descended, spinning round on the straining rope like a joint on a meat-jack, while at almost every second his shoulders or hips came into contact with the jagged walls of the shaft. to avoid the dust he kept his head bent downwards, and as he did so he saw the glimmer of the lantern from beneath. "thirty feet, do you call it?" he asked, as his feet touched the floor of the pit, and his father grasped his hand. "it's sixty at the very least." "i don't think so," was the reply. "you see, looking down from a height the distance always appears greater. had the floor been hard rock, i should have been killed or at least seriously injured. but to change the subject, look here." mr. mckay had, during the long interval of waiting since ellerton had lowered the lantern, made another tour of exploration, and now he led the way towards the tunnel where he had found an old musket. he had made a strange discovery. at no very distant date a long cavern of varying height and breadth existed here. where its entrance was mr. mckay had not found out; but a volcanic disturbance had caused a mighty fissure to divide the original cave in two, as an examination of the strata proved conclusively. casting off the rope from around his waist, andy followed his father into the tunnel-like cavern, stooping as he did so, for its mouth was barely five feet in height. at ten paces from its mouth the passage turned almost at right angles to its former direction, and expanded into a broad and lofty chamber. almost covering the width of the four sides was a range of arm-racks filled with old-time weapons. the candle-light flashed upon the bright barrels of musket and pistol, and glittered on the steel of bayonet, cutlass, sword, and pike, for so dry was the atmosphere that a couple of centuries had not left any appreciable trace on the metal. "great scott! how did these get here?" asked andy, after he had recovered from his astonishment. "it's the armoury of some long-forgotten buccaneer," replied his father. "i've had plenty of time to look round since you first sent me the lantern, and none of these weapons are later than the earlier part of the eighteenth century, or the last part of the seventeenth. see, these muskets have vauban locks, a combination of flint and matchlock. these kinds of muskets were used at the battles of steenkirke and landen. you can also see that all these bayonets are the plug variety, that is to say they were plugged into the barrel of the musket, thus temporarily converting it from a firearm to a pike. these are evidently the original bayonets used in the reign of james ii., so that we can fix the period at which they were stored here to within a few years, since the socket type were introduced early in the reign of william iii." in this strain mr. mckay continued, forgetful of time and place, till ellerton's voice was heard shouting to know of anything was amiss. "we had better retrace our footsteps," observed mr. mckay, "or the others will be getting alarmed. when we've found an easier way of descending into this pit--for i do not want another fall like that, i can assure you--we'll make a thorough exploration of the place." accordingly father and son made their way back towards the shaft, but as they turned the bend of the passage they found themselves confronted by terence and ellerton, each of whom carried a lantern. "hullo! how did you descend?" asked andy, who was very astonished at seeing his friends down there. "i lowered terence, and then let myself down," replied ellerton. "then, how in the name of goodness, do you expect to get back?" demanded andy. "quexo cannot haul us up." "by the same means as i came down," replied the young sailor calmly. "it's easy enough with a bos'un's chair." "then all i can say is that i hope you lashed the pulley on securely," rejoined andy with evident concern. "if that goes wrong, we're trapped." "don't worry," replied ellerton, somewhat ruffled at the slur cast upon his work. "come, come," observed mr. mckay good-humouredly. "don't quarrel. now we are here we might as well continue our exploration." once more the armoury was inspected, the lads showing the greatest interest in the weapons, snapping the flints in order to see the sparks fly from the steel. "be careful, some of these muskets may be loaded," cautioned mr. mckay. "always make it a practice to point a weapon away from anybody when fooling about like that." hardly had he spoken, when a tremendous explosion shook the cave, the noise being intensified by the confined space, and terence sat on the floor rubbing his shoulder, while a smoking musket lay by his side. "you're a young ass," observed andy. "are you hurt?" "didn't know it was loaded," replied the youth, still clapping his hand to his shoulder. "that's what they all say after an accident has occurred," said mr. mckay. "by some means or the other the musket was stored without the charge being drawn. however, thank goodness it's no worse, though the concussion might have brought the roof down on our heads." presently ellerton, who had wandered behind one of the arms-racks that stood about three feet from the wall, exclaimed: "here's another passage." "hold on, then," cautioned mr. mckay. "wait till i come. there might be a pitfall." carefully examining the floor of the tunnel, the explorers advanced about ten yards, when further progress was prevented by a door covered with flat iron bars. "h'm!" ejaculated mr. mckay. "what have we here?" terence was dispatched to bring a dagger and a pike from the armoury, but on further thoughts mr. mckay forbade the lads to tamper with the door. "then we are done for the time being," remarked andy. "shall we go back for our axes?" "a crowbar would be the thing," replied ellerton. "but we want the two we brought." "probably it's as well we haven't got them," added mr. mckay. "to tell the truth, i have my suspicions of that door, so we'll defer the opening of it till a more convenient time." reluctantly the lads retraced their steps to the open chasm, where blight's body lay. "we must bury him as soon as possible," said mr. mckay. "there's no place here, so we must haul the body to the surface, and dig a grave in the soft earth." "there's no soil nearer than the edge of the palm-forest," observed andy. "i know, but it cannot be helped." "isn't there a rift or a hole in the floor where we could bury him?" asked ellerton. "after all, where does it matter, so long as he receives christian burial?" "we may as well look," assented mr. mckay, and taking one of the lanterns he commenced to explore that side of the chasm which lay opposite to the tunnel leading to the buccaneers' armoury. the first ten or twelve paces were knee deep in the pumice dust, but on approaching the wall of the abyss the floor was fairly hard, being protected from falling dirt and sand by the overhang of the shaft. on reaching the stone face of the rift the explorers followed its general direction without discovering any crack or crevice likely to suit their purpose, till they stumbled upon another tunnel-like shaft, similar and almost opposite to the one they had already traversed. this tunnel was about six feet in height and four in width, and ran in a slightly upward direction. evidently it was at one time a continuation of the other passage. "let's see where this leads to," exclaimed ellerton, full of curiosity and enthusiasm. "i believe it leads to the open air." "i think not," replied mr. mckay, pointing to the smooth, even steps in the floor of the tunnel. "see, the floor is as dry as a bone, and covered with a thick deposit of dust. if this tunnel is open, the tropical rains would have washed the dust away." "then where does it lead to?" continued ellerton. "those arms must have been brought in by some means." "we'll carry on and see who's right." it was a long walk. up and up ran the tunnel, turning slightly to the right, yet maintaining a uniform height and breadth throughout its entire length. "this passage has been hewn out," announced mr. mckay. "hasn't the other?" asked andy. "only in parts. the armoury is a natural cave. perhaps there was a smaller tunnel here before, and the people who discovered it enlarged it. it's about time we came to the end." "now who's right, sir?" exclaimed ellerton triumphantly, as the pale gleam of daylight was visible from a curve of the tunnel. "not this child," replied mr. mckay, without the faintest trace of chagrin. in fact, he was glad to know he was in the wrong, for he did not relish the task of tackling the shaft and the treacherous, dust-covered slope at its edge. a few sparse bushes masked the mouth of the tunnel, and upon these being thrust aside, the adventurers found themselves at the foot of the lowermost range of cliffs and within a hundred yards of the abyss which had been the cause of their presence in the tunnel. standing close to where the crowbars were driven into the rock was quexo, looking the picture of misery, for he was perfectly convinced in his own mind that all his companions had met with disaster. "quexo!" shouted andy. "quexo! here we are!" the mulatto's joy was curious to behold. he danced, swung his sound arm over his head, and cut fantastic capers, the tears running down his cheeks the while as he blurted out unintelligible sentences in mingled english and spanish. "well, we're safe once more, thanks to providence," exclaimed mr. mckay. all the explorers looked rather disreputable, but mr. mckay in particular was little better than a walking scarecrow. his clothes were in rags, his face clotted with dried blood and dust, while, now the excitement was over, he once more began to feel stiff and bruised from head to foot. "by jove, we've forgotten what we went to look for!" exclaimed andy. "yes," replied mr. mckay. "we must bring the poor fellow's body up after all." "by the tunnel?" "no, by the shaft." "then here goes," said ellerton quietly, and drawing up one of the ropes he fastened it round his waist. lantern in hand he slid down the sand, and getting astride the tree-trunk, edged his way along till he reached the swaying piece of timber. the next minute he was lowering himself into the abyss. "he's a plucky chap," commented mr. mckay as they awaited ellerton's signal. "and with an arm like that," added terence admiringly. "he really seems to make light of it." the watchers had not long to wait. "haul away!" shouted ellerton, and heaving slowly on the rope they brought the body of the unfortunate blight to the surface, where the young seaman soon rejoined the others. between them they bore the corpse across the rocky plain to the edge of the palm-forest, where they dug a shallow grave with their axes. here the body of the ex-pearler was laid to rest, mr. mckay recited a few prayers, and the earth was heaped over the corpse, a pile of heavy stones being placed over the grave to mark the spot. this depressing task completed, they hastened homewards to enjoy a welcome meal and a still more desired rest. for the next two or three weeks all hands were too busy to think of making a further exploration of the buccaneers' cave. the damage wrought by the savages required a considerable amount of patience and hard work to set to rights. a new storehouse had to be constructed, and the various stores that had not been totally destroyed were collected and placed once more under cover. terence had, with considerable ingenuity, contrived to erect an electric alarm, so that the moment a foot was placed upon the lowermost path leading up to the house, a bell would ring in the sleeping quarters. he also succeeded in rigging up the searchlight salved from the wreck, and after many failures the apparatus worked to perfection. thereafter every night its great beam was directed skywards, the international signal, "n.g." (want immediate assistance), being flashed in the hope of attracting the attention of any vessel within seventy miles of the island. the little party was now completely isolated from the rest of the world. before the destruction of the yawl they had the means of making even a fairly long passage, but now this was denied them, for it would be utter madness to attempt to go to sea in one of the captured canoes. so, realising that the sooner they were in possession of a seaworthy craft the better it would be for them, the inhabitants of mckay's island debated whether it would be advisable to construct a new decked craft, convert one of the canoes into a cabin boat, or to salvage the wreck of the yawl and patch her up sufficiently to enable them to reach tahiti. even with the appliances at their command, mr. mckay reckoned that it would take a twelvemonth to make a boat large enough for their requirements. as regards reconstructing one of the canoes, he came to the conclusion that the work might be done, but the canoe being without a keel would be a bad craft in a sea-way; while her light construction would not allow a keel to be fixed without a grave risk of straining the vessel in the first breeze she encountered. finally, it was decided that the captured canoes should be utilised to attempt the salvage of the yawl, and on the first fine day the actual work was put in hand. by means of rollers and a powerful jack, three of the canoes were launched and taken to the scene of the savages' wanton act. the wrecked boat could be clearly discerned lying on the sandy bed of the lagoon in six fathoms of water, with a slight list to starboard. anchoring two of the native craft close to the sunken yawl, ellerton and andy contrived to pass the bight of a chain under her bows, the ends of the chain being made fast to two stout cables. a similar device was employed to engage the stern of the wreck, although the fact that her keel was imbedded in the sand added to the difficulty of the task. two massive trunks of palm-trees were then placed across the gunwales of both canoes, converting them into a kind of pontoon. these preparations being completed, all that was at present necessary was to wait till dead low water. all hands knew that it would be a tedious job, for the rise of the tide was but five feet at springs and only two feet at neaps, so what work had to be done must be performed during the spring tides. at dead low water all the slack of the four hawsers was taken in, and once more came a tedious wait for the rising tide. gradually the strain on the ropes increased, till the timbers groaned under the weight of the sunken boat and the canoes sank lower in the water. "hurrah! she's lifting!" shouted ellerton, and allowing sufficient time for the yawl to be lifted clear of the bottom, mr. mckay and his assistants began to haul on an anchor cable which had been previously laid towards the shore. slowly the ungainly pontoon with its heavy burden began to move shorewards, when suddenly the bows of the canoes rose high in the air, throwing their occupants on their backs. one of the hawsers had slipped, and the work of six long hours was wasted. "hard lines!" exclaimed terence dolefully. "it is, i admit," replied ellerton cheerfully. "still, we must not expect to have everything our own way. try, try, try again, as the old saw says." "we can do no more to-day," said mr. mckay. "we'll leave the canoes moored to the yawl, however. that will save time to-morrow." "i think, if you don't mind, sir, we'll try and slip the sling under her again," said ellerton. "you see, if we do that there won't be so much chance of the canoes drifting and consequently slipping the other sling." "quite so," replied mr. mckay. "it may save us some hours of hard work." so directly the water cleared, for the settling of the wrecked boat had churned up the sand till she was practically invisible, the chain sling was again placed in position. this time this part of the business was done more satisfactorily, as the yawl was resting on a hummock of shell and sand amidships, so that above five feet of the after part of her keel was clear of the bed of the lagoon. "i hope it doesn't come on to blow to-night," remarked ellerton, as the party rowed ashore. "if it does, then good-bye to the yawl." "the glass is steady," replied mr. mckay. "if it should pipe up, we must slip the slings and let the canoes take their chance." that afternoon ellerton and andy were busy preparing additional slings, for the former was resolved not to have a repetition of the morning's failure if it could be avoided. just before low water on the following morning, the salvage party set out for the wreck. as mr. mckay had predicted, the weather was fine, there being no swell to speak of within the lagoon, though as usual the breakers were lashing themselves into milk-white foam upon the outer fringe of the reef. once more the slings were hove tight, and as the tide rose, the wrecked craft was again lifted from her ocean bed. directly the yawl was "lively," as ellerton expressed it, two more slings were passed underneath her keel so as to make doubly sure of her being swung properly. chapter xxii the treasure chamber at high water the wrecked craft was moved for a distance of nearly a hundred yards towards the shore ere she grounded. this completed the day's work, and on the following morning at low tide the "slack" was again taken in so as to enable the rising tide again to lift the yawl clear of the bottom. this time, owing to the bed of the lagoon shoaling more rapidly, only twenty yards were gained. "it will be a tiring and tedious job, i can see," said terence. "how are we to manage when the hull is brought close in shore?" "we'll have to be content to move her a few feet at a time," replied ellerton. "it's slow work, i admit, but we are making very satisfactory progress." with the arrival of the neap tides, the work came to a standstill, the rise of water being insufficient to justify the time and labour spent on it; so the slings were cast off and buoyed, and the canoes brought into the little natural harbour, where they would be safe from all but an exceptional on-shore gale. during the interval, the lads utilised several spare lengths of rails, and spiking them into rough sleepers, formed a temporary hauling-up slip. two of the wagons were dismantled, and the axles and wheels attached to a cradle, while a winch was firmly bolted to a secure foundation on the shore at twenty yards above high-water mark. the rails were to be laid down at low water as far seaward as possible, and the sleepers sunk by means of heavy stones. andy hoped to avail himself of a high spring tide to float the yawl right over the cradle, then, casting off the lashings that supported her, they could haul the wreck up by means of the winch and effect the repairs at their leisure. unfortunately, with the return of the spring tides a strong on-shore breeze sprang up and continued with unremitting freshness for over a week, so that the members of the salvage party were compelled temporarily to abandon their enterprise. "never say die," exclaimed mr. mckay encouragingly. "another fortnight and i hope we shall be able to resume the work. in the meantime, lads, what do you say to a kind of picnic?" "a picnic?" asked ellerton. "where to?" "i am thinking of paying another visit to the buccaneers' cave. i'm very curious to know what is on the other side of that iron-bound door, and i've no doubt you are equally so." "hurrah!" shouted the lads in chorus. "when shall we start?" "in an hour," replied mr. mckay promptly. "bursting open the door will be a tough job," remarked andy. "how do you propose to do it?" "i hope to manage it by means of an explosive," replied his father. "dynamite?" "no, there's too much risk in carting a few sticks of that stuff through a tunnel a hundred yards in length or more. one slip and it would mean sudden death to the lot of us. i want a couple of fuses, however, so while we are getting ready you can run up to the magazine and obtain them." while andy was away on his errand, mr. mckay opened a few cartridges and extracted the cordite. "this stuff is safe enough with reasonable precautions," he remarked to ellerton, who was watching mr. mckay with no little fear. "so long as it is not under compression cordite can be lit without the faintest danger. in the open air it merely fizzles like a damp squib." "couldn't we smash the door with an axe?" asked ellerton. "we could, but i prefer not to. in the first place there's not much room to wield an axe; in the second, as i mentioned before, i have my suspicions regarding that door." "what suspicions, sir?" "wait and see!" replied mr. mckay with a laugh. on the arrival of andy with the fuses, the little party set out for the cave, each member carrying part of the equipment. on gaining the summit of the hill overlooking the house, mr. mckay scanned the horizon with his glasses to satisfy himself that no canoes were approaching the island, then, having reassured himself on that point, he gave the word to step out briskly. "i don't want to spend a night away from the house in case anything happens," he explained. "but do you expect another crowd of savages?" "i didn't expect the last lot," he replied grimly, "but they came all the same." the journey through the forest and across the rock-strewn plain was performed without incident, and within a couple of hours after leaving the house the party drew up at the mouth of the tunnel. here each member lit a lantern, and in a comparatively bright light the passage of the tunnel commenced. quexo, however, remained in the open air. nothing could prevail upon him to descend into the bowels of the earth. once or twice someone stumbled, terence falling heavily and barking his shins, while mr. mckay's head came in contact with the roof much too often for his liking; but in high spirits the explorers crossed the floor of the abyss, traversed the second tunnel, and gained the armoury. here they rested ere commencing the final stage of their journey underground. at length the explorers came face to face with the mysterious iron-bound door. in spite of themselves they felt a strange sensation as they gazed upon the relic of bygone days. what lay behind it? what secret did it guard so well? "stand back a bit, lads, and hand me another lantern," said mr. mckay. dropping on his knees, he carefully examined the floor and the iron-shod threshold of the door, probing the narrow slit with his knife. this done, he turned his attention to the walk and the crown of the arch next to the woodwork, tapping the stone with the blade of his knife with the greatest caution. the others looked on with interest not unmingled with curiosity and awe. at length, apparently satisfied with the examination, mr. mckay rose. "i want you to bore a hole here," said he to andy, pointing out a place in the door barely two inches from the floor. andy, armed with a ratchet-brace, began his task, and the subdued silence of the underground passage was broken only by the rattle of the pawl and the sharp burr of the bit as it wormed its way steadily through the stout oaken plank. "it's hot work," exclaimed andy, who in order to use the brace in that most inconvenient place was obliged to lie full length on the floor. "i know, but keep it up," replied mr. mckay, who, grasping a crowbar, was standing astride his son's feet. "stand a bit farther back," he continued, addressing ellerton and terence. the two lads instantly obeyed, though they wondered at mr. mckay's alert and expectant attitude. suddenly, like the tongue of an enormous serpent, a double-pronged barb of steel flashed dully in the candle-light, passing completely across the passage and about three feet above and over andy's prostrate body. in an instant mr. mckay's powerful arm brought the crowbar upward in a resistless sweep, and with one blow severed the dreadful device of death. the lads, pale with the excitement and horror of the incident, could only utter an exclamation of astonishment while andy hurriedly backed away from the well-guarded door. "pleasant, isn't it?" remarked mr. mckay in a cool matter-of-fact tone, as if such incidents were of an everyday occurrence. "i had my suspicions, as i said more than once before. that device was cunningly contrived to salute marauders in a very forcible manner. had either of us been standing in front of the door we should have been transfixed in a jiffy. now, carry on, andy. i don't think there's anything more to be feared on this side of the door, at any rate." but andy was not equal to the task. the risky experience had, to use his own words, completely knocked the stuffing out of him. "let's quit; the game's not worth the candle," said terence. "rather not!" replied mr. mckay, resolutely. "there's something worth securing behind that door, or the former owners would not have taken such elaborate and crafty steps to guard it. here, ellerton, stand by with the crowbar in case of accidents, and i'll finish boring the hole." so saying, mr. mckay took up a position similar to that formerly occupied by his son and plied the brace vigorously. ere the bit had sunk another quarter of an inch there came a dull metallic sound from the remote side of the door. "what's that?" gasped andy breathlessly. "another surprise for trespassers," replied his father without ceasing in his work. "i've released another secret spring, i suppose. however, we are on the right side of the door this time." having bored the hole sufficiently deep for his purpose mr. mckay proceeded to insert the cordite, ramming it tightly home with the end of the crowbar. the rest of the explosive he laid close to the base of the door, covering it with stones and pieces of rock brought from the floor of the chasm. "now let's go back to the other tunnel," he continued, after the detonator and the fuse had been inserted and the latter fired. "there's no hurry; the explosion will not take place for five minutes." as the moments sped, the lads awaited in breathless silence the sound of the detonation. presently a dull rumble echoed through the rocky passage, followed by a blast of air mingled with the acrid fumes of the cordite. "not so fast! not so fast!" cautioned mr. mckay, as the lads began to run towards the hitherto baffling barrier. "some of the rock may be dislodged." as it was, they were obliged to wait some considerable time, as the atmosphere in the tunnel was so vile that it was impossible to breathe with comfort. then as the mist gradually cleared, the dull yellow glare of the lanterns revealed a mass of shattered woodwork where the door had stood; while a foot beyond was a barrier of steel rods, which, serving the purpose of a portcullis, had fallen from above. "that's what we heard fall," observed mr. mckay. "the idea was, i suppose, that any unauthorised person who escaped the lance-thrust on this side of the door would, on opening it, be impaled by the weapons concealed in the roof. now to settle with this obstruction." a few powerful strokes with an axe shattered enough bars to enable mr. mckay to squeeze through, and, followed by his eager companions, he entered the mysterious cavern. at first there was little to attract the attention of the explorers. the cave was of irregular form, being about fifty feet in length, thirty in breadth, and varying in height from twenty-five to six feet. on the floor were six wooden chests, ordinary in appearance and apparently of simple construction; they would have easily been mistaken for seamen's chests placed in a lumber-room. striding up to the nearest one, mr. mckay raised the lid. there was no creaking of rusty hinges, no glitter of gold and jewels to dazzle the eyes. the chest was empty! "well, this is a sorry trick to have played on one another after so much trouble," commented he with a forced laugh. he was visibly disappointed, and his discouragement was shared by his companions. "no doubt this has been the hiding-place of some great hoard," he continued. "but the buccaneering rascals have evidently removed their booty. i've drawn a blank, so you, ellerton, try your hand." the second chest was opened with equal ease, but to the unbounded delight of the whole party the coffer was two-thirds filled with yellow metal ingots, which flashed dully in the light of the lanterns. "gold!" was the chorus of exclamation. "gold it is," added mr. mckay. "but a deal of good it will do us in our present state! however, let's continue the examination." the remaining four coffers gave more trouble, the lids being secured by stout iron screws. two were filled with gold and silver ornaments, cups, vases, and plates--the plunder, doubtless, of many a rich city of spain's colonies on the shores of the pacific. the remaining two were laden with virgin gold. "well, lads," exclaimed mr. mckay, when the last coffer had been forced to disclose its contents, "once we get this stuff safely to a civilised country we shall be rich beyond our wildest imagination. we'll share and share alike, of course." "what is the value of the treasure?" asked ellerton in an awestruck voice, for the sudden avalanche of untold wealth had wellnigh upset him. "goodness only knows! there's enough to enable you to go through life without doing another stroke of work. that is, of course, when you are home in england once more. but, my lad, don't look upon it in that light. take my word for it that idleness is a curse, and the wealth, if used solely to promote idleness, would serve a better purpose if it lay a thousand fathoms deep on the bed of the ocean." "if ever i take my share back to my home, i trust i'll use it to a good purpose," said ellerton. "i trust so, too," added mr. mckay. "now, let us see if there's anything else of interest here. i am anxious to examine these murderous devices. ah!" mr. mckay pointed in the direction of the shattered door. on either side, but separated from the entrance tunnel by a massive wall composed of the solid rock, was a narrow and lofty passage, both running parallel with the tunnel. lantern in hand, mr. mckay stooped down and entered the right-hand recess, and to his surprise he found no fewer than six steel lances, each accompanied by a tightly coiled spring, while a seventh had uncoiled itself, the spiral spring stretching from wall to wall. "great heavens!" he exclaimed with thankfulness. "we've had a fortunate escape. each of these fiendish contrivances is set to launch itself into the tunnel on the outside of the door. the one we released is the nearest." "then we must have passed them?" asked andy. "yes, and by the intervention of providence they failed to act. watch!" and touching a slender steel rod that passed from the front of one of the springs to the floor, mr. mckay gave it a sharp upward jerk. instantly the hidden coil released itself, and the dread weapon disappeared through the rock which separated the cave-like recess from the tunnel. "the whole contrivance, though deadly, is comparatively simple," explained mr. mckay. "underneath the floors of both chambers are a number of levers. the weight of a person treading in the tunnel would cause the lever to move a rod, which in turn releases a finely set trigger which controls the springs. owing to years of idleness the levers failed to act, and only andy's continuous exertions as he lay on the ground in front of the door caused one of the springs to be released. i bargained for one, but not a dozen or more, by jove!" "a dozen?" echoed terence. "aye, a dozen at least. we'll find six or seven more on the other side of the tunnel." one by one the remaining springs were released, and on entering the left-hand cavity a similar state of things was revealed. "i don't think we need fear these any longer," continued mr. mckay, as the sound of the releasing of the last spring vibrated in the confined space. "now the question is, what is to be done with the stuff?" and he indicated the coffers with a wave of his hand. "leave it here," suggested andy. "i would but for one reason. if we are taken off the island by a passing ship, the captain would not feel inclined to waste time while we were bringing these chests from here to the shore, for, of course, we could not reveal the nature of their contents. no; i propose to cart the whole of the treasure back to the house, stow it away in small boxes that are convenient to handle, and bury the boxes a few feet under the floor." each member of the party thereupon filled his haversack with as much gold as it would hold, until the stout canvas straps cut into the shoulders of the wearers; and thus laden they retraced their steps, arriving on the surface in a breathless and exhausted condition. here the loads were redistributed, and making better progress, the wearied adventurers arrived at their dwelling just as the sun dipped beyond the lofty peak of the island. chapter xxiii "a sail! a sail!" twice daily on each of the succeeding days mr. mckay and his companions paid a hurried visit to the treasure-cave, and at the end of that time the bulk of the buccaneers' spoil was safely hidden in the spot chosen for its reception. then, with the return of the spring tides, the work of salving the yawl was resumed. slowly, yet without a hitch, the sunken craft was moved towards the cradle which awaited its burden, till the falling off of the tides found the yawl within ten yards of low-water mark. "i have been thinking, pater," observed andy one day, as they were preparing to revisit the cave. "thinking what, my boy?" "why, every journey we make to the cavern we perform practically empty-handed. would it not be well to carry a supply of provisions with us and store them in the cave? you see, if those savages should return we might be glad of a retreat." "quite true, though i sincerely hope we shall not be put to such straits. however, we'll take a few barrels of provisions and some rifles and ammunition as well." "and water?" "ay, but that's the rub. water is heavy to carry about, and as far as i can see there's no spring or brook within a mile of the entrance to the cave." "i wonder if there's water to be found above the cliffs in which lies the mouth of the tunnel. i noticed several small streams when i climbed the mountain, though, of course, i didn't ascend on that side. i think i'll explore that slope as soon as possible." "why not to-day? ellerton and you can do so while we are making our midday trip back to the house." accordingly, instead of ascending the tunnel with mr. mckay and terence, the two chums clambered up the face of the cliff. at the top they found that the land sloped steeply towards the peak, the ground being thickly covered with stunted bushes and occasional clumps of palms. "look here, hoppy," remarked andy, as they sat down to recover their breadth after their fatiguing climb. "it's all very well living on an island when everything goes well, but we can't say that it is now. perhaps it's a useless fear, but i fear that there's always the possibility of those savage brutes coming back here in overwhelming numbers and wiping us out. that does not tend to make things comfortable, although it may tend to liven things up." "but they had such a terrible smashing last time," replied ellerton. "true! but didn't we give them a good licking when they pursued us in their canoes? that didn't prevent them repeating their unwelcome attentions." "i hope you don't mean to show the white feather, andy?" "not i. if there's a dust-up, i'll do my best; but, at the same time, i shan't be sorry to get the yawl repaired and say good-bye to the island. the treasure can wait till we charter a steamer to fetch it." "well, the savages haven't returned, so we can still make the best of things," replied ellerton cheerfully. "but we must be moving or we'll find no water." the two lads had not gone fifty yards ere they came across a small stream. andy bent down, and raising some of the water in the palm of his hand applied it to his lips. "fresh as one could wish," he pronounced. "good! now we'll follow its course and see if it approaches the mouth of the cave." the rivulet, for it was nothing more, wended its way in an almost semicircular direction, till, at about two hundred yards from where the lads had struck it, it emptied itself into a rift in the rocks, the splash of its fall echoing dimly from apparently unfathomable depths. "look! we are not very far from that part of the cliff that overhangs the mouth of the cave," exclaimed ellerton. "what is to prevent us from digging a shallow trench and conducting the water right to the entrance to the tunnel?" "it's fairly hard rock," objected andy, "it will be no end of a task cutting a new watercourse." "then we can use some of the cast-iron pipes we brought ashore," continued the young seaman, determined not to be overcome by early difficulties. "there are more than enough to cover this distance, and by damming the stream we can----" "yes, that's all very well, but if we are compelled to beat a retreat to the cave the savages will find the pipes and so discover our hiding-place." "i'm afraid that will make but little difference. the trail from the house up the mouth of the tunnel is so well defined that a blind man might follow it. why, whatever is the matter with you, andy? you seem to throw cold water on every suggestion that is made. you are not always like that. are you ill?" "i believe i am," replied andy. "at least, i do not feel quite up to the mark." "then let's get back," said ellerton, and assisting his chum over the rough ground the pair returned to the mouth of the tunnel just as the others were emerging. "any luck?" asked mr. mckay cheerfully; then realising that his son looked ill, he exclaimed: "what have you been doing, andy?" "i don't know, father. i feel absolutely rotten." they managed to get him back to the house, his teeth chattering with the cold; but before night he was in a high fever. his father administered liberal doses of quinine, of which there was a plentiful supply; but, in spite of this remedy, the lad's illness increased, and before morning he was in a delirium, raving about the sunken yawl and the savages. more than once he attempted to leave his bed and seize a rifle, and it required the united efforts of mr. mckay, ellerton, and terence to hold him down. it was an anxious time. mr. mckay had had experience of this kind of malady, and knew that should the patient leave his bed and take cold, he must die. for forty-eight hours mr. mckay, the two lads, and quexo kept ceaseless watch, the mulatto being particularly attentive in his duties; but at length the feverish state was succeeded by a profuse sweat, and mr. mckay knew that for the present the dreaded disaster was averted. during the lengthy period of convalescence, someone had to be within call of the patient, but the others resumed their outdoor occupation. most of the traces of the last visit of the savages had been removed; the cliff-path leading up from the shore had been fortified by the erection of a loop-holed palisade, so as to command the approach by rifle-fire; while the remainder of the treasure had been brought from the cave to the house, and the former was well provisioned in case of emergency. ellerton also found time to carry out his project of conducting fresh water into the cave. by the aid of terence and quexo he contrived to lay a line of pipes from the stream down the slope to the edge of the cliff overhanging the entrance, whence a tiny cascade fell over the rocks within a few feet of the tunnel. later on, at mr. mckay's suggestion, the line of iron pipes was continued down the face of the cliff, though concealed by the bushes, and carried a few yards into the tunnel. for most of that distance the pipes were covered by the thick dust, till sufficiently far from the entrance to enable the occupants to defend the end of the aqueduct if necessary. the water, on escaping, ran down the incline, till absorbed by the pumice dust, although by degrees it cut for itself a channel close to the sides of the tunnel. thus a plentiful supply of the precious liquid was assured, and at the same time no inconvenience was caused by the waste turning the floor of the passage into a swamp. the rainy season was shortly due, and unable, on account of andy's weakness, to complete the salvage of the yawl, since every available hand was necessary, the wrecked boat was again rafted farther out into the lagoon and allowed to sink to the bottom, so as to lie in safety during the on-shore gales. one morning ellerton set out as usual to attend to the sheep, which were in a thriving state, having so increased in numbers that new pasture grounds had to be provided for them. it was then blowing strongly from the north-east and almost dead on shore. happening to glance seaward, he was surprised to see a topsail schooner, under close-reefed canvas, running past the island. for a moment or so he remained gazing with astonishment at the unwonted sight: then, recovering himself, he ran as hard as he could to the house. "a sail! a sail!" he exclaimed breathlessly. [illustration: "a sail! a sail!" he exclaimed breathlessly] everyone, including andy, ran out of the house, and, as ellerton had announced, there was the schooner now abreast of the entrance of the lagoon, but still keeping on her course to the south-west. "bring out the signal-book and the flags," ordered mr. mckay. "and you, quexo, make a fire." ellerton soon returned with the bunting, and the union jack was hoisted to the masthead. the mulatto procured some dry wood from the store, and set it in a blaze. when well alight, he piled a quantity of damp leaves upon the fire, causing a thick smoke. unfortunately the strong wind prevented the vapour from rising, the smoke drifting over the ground in thick, suffocating columns, but to the castaways' great joy the vessel hoisted her ensign. it was the french tricolour. "hurrah!" shouted mr. mckay. "now lads, hand me n and c." the next instant the n and c flags, signifying in the international code, "_want assistance_" were fluttering from the mast. through the telescope the inhabitants of mckay's island could see the oilskin-clad figure of the french skipper, his neatly-trimmed moustache and imperial as correct as if he were on the boulevards of paris, rushing hither and thither, and giving his orders with much waving of his arms. then, as a string of flags ran up to her main truck, the schooner was hove-to. "_d.c.--are coming to your assistance_," read mr. mckay, referring to his signal-book. "by jove! that won't do, the boat will be swamped," for already some of the crew were manning the falls. "sharp there," he continued, "'_e.y.--do not attempt to land in your boat_.' that will stop them; but there's no denying that they are plucky fellows." in obedience to the signal, the crew of the french schooner gave up their attempt, and a lengthy interchange of signals was kept up, the frenchman promising to report the presence of the castaways at the first port she touched; then, with a farewell dip of her ensign, she flung about, and half an hour later she was lost in the haze. "that's a load off our minds," remarked mr. mckay. "we can reasonably expect help in a month at the very outside." "unless she is blown out of her course, for a gale is freshening," replied ellerton. "nevertheless, the chances are greatly in our favour, though at the same time we must not cease our efforts to work out our salvation. this gale will doubtless mark the end of the rainy season, so we can hope to renew our efforts to salve the yawl within the next few days." but, contrary to mr. mckay's expectations, the weather continued bad for nearly a month and, although a sharp look-out was kept by day and the searchlights flashed nightly, no vessel appeared in sight. alternate hopes and fears did not tend to improve the spirits of the castaways, and ere the fine weather set in their condition was bordering on acute depression, in spite of their individual efforts to the contrary. at length, after a long spell of rainy weather, the sun burst forth in all its splendour, the wind went away, and the island appeared under a totally different aspect from that which it had shown during the last six months. with the return of the dry season, the spirits of the castaways likewise rose, and energetically they resumed their outdoor labours. the submerged yawl was, so far as they could see, little the worse for its prolonged rest on the bed of the lagoon, and by dint of hard and painstaking work she was moved nearer to the shore than she had been since the disastrous day when she had been scuttled by the natives. "it will be new moon to-morrow at about ten o'clock," announced mr. mckay. "consequently there will be a fairly high tide at noon, so we can reasonably hope for sufficient water to float the yawl to the cradle. everything is ready, i suppose?" "yes, sir," replied ellerton. "i finished rigging the tackle this morning, and the cradle is properly ballasted." "good! then we'll make the attempt to-morrow." chapter xxiv a false and a real alarm before daybreak everyone was up and eager for the fray, and directly breakfast was over they sallied down to the shore. it was still pitch dark, but the time of dead low water made it absolutely necessary that operations should commence ere the sun rose. by the light of several lanterns the slack of the hawsers was taken in and the two canoes pinned down so far as the united efforts of all hands would permit. nothing more could be done till the rising of the tide. the cradle, its ends marked by long poles to indicate its position at high water, was already run out so far as the lines of the slipway extended, a rope being fastened to it from the windlass ashore. anxiously the little group of workers watched the tide rise slowly, inch by inch, up the temporary tide gauge. sometimes it paused as a "false ebb" in the offing stayed its progress, till at length it crept within a few inches of its predicted height. "there's enough water now, i fancy," announced ellerton, "so heave away. gently does it!" it was an anxious time. slowly the two canoes were warped shore wards, guided by a pair of ropes abeam so as to insure the wrecked boat being deposited evenly on the cradle. already the two outer poles of the cradle were passed, when a slight shock told the salvors that the yawl's forefoot had touched the cradle. "avast there!" shouted ellerton to terence and quexo, who were hauling on the shore. "there's not enough water," exclaimed andy, with dismay written on his face. "ten minutes yet before high water," announced mr. mckay. "will she do it, i wonder?" for answer ellerton slipped off his clothes and plunged over the side of the canoe. mr. mckay and andy could follow his movements as he descended with slow yet powerful strokes, till he disappeared from view beneath the submerged craft. half a minute later he reappeared, and swam alongside the canoe, into which he was assisted by the eager spectators. "she'll do it," he announced, when he had recovered his breath. "we are a bit out in our reckoning; her keel is touching the side of the cradle." five minutes later the yawl was lying immediately over the slipway, the slings were cast off, and slowly she settled upon the carriage prepared for her reception. the canoes were warped clear, and all that remained to be done was to man the winch and heave the cradle above high-water mark. in spite of the broiling sun, the work of winding the winch was begun, for the delighted lads would not be persuaded to delay the operation till the cool of the day. foot by foot the cradle came home, till the huge barnacle-covered hull began to appear above the water. "what a state she's in," exclaimed andy, as the lads rested from their labours, for they were thoroughly played out. "there's a week's scraping in front of us before we can do anything else." "hadn't we better see about baling her out?" asked terence. "directly she ceases to be water-borne the pressure of the water will burst her seams." "no fear of that," replied mr. mckay. "the water will find its way out of the hole that the natives made in her." "i guess the motor is pretty rusty," continued terence. "it may not be," andy replied. "you see, i kept it smothered in grease, and unless those brutes smashed it, it ought to be capable of being repaired. but i am awfully anxious to see, so what do you say to another turn at the winch?" once more the lads resumed their work of hauling up the cradle, till nearly the whole of the streaming, weed-covered hull--a forlorn waif from the sea--was visible. "another five yards, lads," exclaimed ellerton cheerfully. "now, put more beef into it." as he spoke, there was a warning shout from mr. mckay, but the warning came too late. ere the lads could realise the extent of their misfortune the cradle collapsed and the hull of the yawl crashed over on her side. with a horrible rending of the shattered timbers, the enormous mass pitched fairly on a jagged rock; the next instant the object of so many months' tedious toil lay on its broadside, hopelessly damaged. for quite a minute all hands gazed in speechless grief upon the scene of calamity. to have the fruits of victory snatched from their lips seemed almost more than they could realise, till by degrees the extent of their misfortune began to assert itself. "is she really done for?" said andy, his voice barely raised above a whisper. "yes, her back's broken," replied his father. "she will never float again." "then, by george!" announced andy, speaking in a tone that surprised his companions by its resolution, "i won't be done. i begin to build another craft to-morrow. come on, pater, let's get something to eat, and after that we'll set out the plans for our new craft. buck up, hoppy, it's no use crying over spilt milk." inspired by their companion's cheerfulness, the lads turned their backs upon the scene of their ill-favoured labours and set off towards the house. they now felt specially anxious to devote their energies to the new task that lay before them, and already their late misfortune was being regarded as a thing of the past. "without wishing to discourage you, andy," began mr. mckay, after the meal was over, "i think we had better give up all idea of building another craft. i've been going carefully into this matter, and i'll tell you why i form this conclusion. you see there's no timber growing on this island that can be used, and our own stock is insufficient even if we make use of the planks of the wrecked yawl. so i think the best thing we can do is to convert one of the canoes----" "but i thought we had already decided that they are unsuitable and unseaworthy?" "quite so. as they are at present i should hesitate to make a long voyage in one of them, although the natives frequently travel great distances in this type of craft. so i think if we give the smallest canoe--for that one seems the handiest--a good keelson, bolt a false keel into it, and provide her with some stout timbers and stringers, she'll answer our purpose. we can use most of the deck planks of the yawl to deck-in the canoe. her sails and most of her gear will come in handy." "it would certainly save a lot of work," replied andy, for in calmer moments the size of his proposed task had begun to assert itself. "then let's make a start," added ellerton. "there's no time like the present, so i vote we begin to dismantle the remains of the yawl, examine and overhaul her canvas, and remove the ballast." "i haven't measured the smallest canoe," remarked andy. "what's her length, do you think?" "about twenty-eight feet in length, nine in breadth, and two feet draught, though with the addition of a false keel and ballast she will draw at least four feet." accordingly all hands set to work with a will, and ere nightfall the shattered hull of the yawl was a mere shell, the gear being stowed away in the lower storehouse. "to-morrow we'll make a start with the canoe," said ellerton, as they prepared to retire for the night. "there are plenty of pieces of timber to shore her up, and wedges can easily be made. before the end of the week we ought to have her keel and keelson bolted on." "then sleep well on it," added mr. mckay, "for there's much to be done." the inhabitants of mckay's island had already made their customary signal with the searchlight, the power had been switched off, and the canvas hood placed over the instrument for the purpose of protecting it from the night dews. this routine was always the last ere the day's work ended. mr. mckay was about to close the door of the dwelling-house when a rapid and prolonged ringing of the electric alarm bell broke upon the stillness of the night. instantly there was a rush for the arms-rack where the rifles were kept ready for immediate use, and, securing their weapons, the whole party made for the open, terence, according to a prearranged plan, running to the powerhouse to switch on the current, while the others took up their position at the palisade commanding the cliff-path. the night was pitch dark; a light breeze ruffled the palm trees, but beyond that all was still. peering into the darkness the defenders waited, finger on trigger, to open fire on the first appearance of the foe. then the alarm bell began to ring again. "there's someone climbing the path," whispered ellerton, when the din had died away. "i wish terence would hurry up with the searchlight; we could then see who the intruders are. there it is again," as the clanging of the bell commenced for the third time. in his natural anxiety and haste, terence fumbled over his task, but at length the carbons fused and the giant beam of the searchlight threw its dazzling rays seaward. then, trained by donaghue's guiding hand, it swept the lower terraces and the beach, but neither hostile canvas nor lurking bloodthirsty warriors came within its blinding glare. "there's someone moving down there," exclaimed andy, pointing towards the foot of the steep path. "see! to the right of that great boulder." "hanged if i can," muttered ellerton. nevertheless he took aim with his rifle at the spot indicated by his chum. "it's only the shadows thrown by the moving beam," said mr. mckay. "terence, keep the light steady for a moment, will you?" the now stationary ray revealed the fact that some moving object was creeping cautiously over the rock-strewn beach immediately at the end of the path. "there's someone down there," whispered ellerton, and almost as he spoke the alarm bell resumed its shrill warning. "i'm going down to see who or what it is," announced mr. mckay, leaning his rifle against the stockade and drawing a revolver. accompanied by andy, ellerton and quexo, he descended the steep and rugged path. all at once mr. mckay burst into a hearty laugh, his companions joining in as soon as they perceived the cause of his mirth. a huge turtle had crawled across the beach and was digging a hole in the sand with its flippers. this had set the alarm bell ringing. [illustration: a huge turtle had crawled across the beach and had set the alarm bell ringing] as the larder needed filling, the turtle was dispatched and dragged up to the house. it was late in the forenoon of the next day ere the inmates turned out of their beds, for the previous night's diversion had deprived them of a fair share of their accustomed sleep. "buck up and fill the kettle, quexo," shouted andy "i'm right hungry." the mulatto, taking a can in his hand, set out for the stream, but hardly had he stepped outside the door when he returned with consternation written all over his face. "massa! massa!" he gasped. "canoes! heap, plenty, much, great canoes!" chapter xxv the great invasion quexo's warning was only too true. less than a mile from the reef the sea was dotted with the brown mat sails of a large fleet of native craft all heading for the island. "forty canoes at least, by jove!" ejaculated mr. mckay. "and taking twenty men to each--a low average--that means there are eight hundred of the wretches making straight for us." "it's long odds," replied ellerton grimly, "but we'll do our best, and perhaps we may find a means of driving them off." "i should have thought the last little surprise would have settled them. we must give them credit for their persistence. there's one thing to our advantage, though; it's a day attack, and we are more or less prepared for it. but what are they up to now?" the advancing canoes had now reached the entrance to the lagoon, and, with marvellous precision, their sails were lowered, and the crews took to their paddles. then, instead of heading straight for the beach, the whole flotilla turned its course parallel with the shore. "that's bad," remarked mr. mckay, pausing in the act of dragging a box of ammunition from the house to the stockade. "they have learnt a lesson, and now they mean to take us on the flank or in the rear. come on, lads, there's no time to be lost. we must follow them and see if we can prevent them landing." fortunately the savages' idea of strategy was not very advanced. instead of keeping one section of their fleet for the purpose of making a feint or a frontal attack while the other canoes skirted the island, the whole of the boats kept together. loaded with ammunition-belts and carrying their rifles, the little band of defenders toiled up the path leading to the interior till they reached the summit of the cliffs overlooking the house. then, bearing away to the left, they hastened to keep pace with their savage invaders. through the palm-groves, fighting their way between patches of thick, prickly scrub, mr. mckay and his companions continued their wearisome march, till, from the summit of the ridge that separated their bay from the one where they had first landed, they saw that the hostile canoes had gained considerably. the usually calm waters of the lagoon were broken into thousands of ripples by the swift-moving craft, while the cliffs re-echoed to the regular beats of their paddles. yet, without attempting to land on that part of the shore, the savages continued their roundabout voyage. "it's no use going any farther," gasped mr. mckay breathlessly. "we are only tiring ourselves out to no purpose. a hundred well-armed men would be powerless to prevent them landing." "then what's to be done?" "we must return to the house and make every possible use of the few hours that as yet remain to us. i quite admit i have been guilty of a serious error of omission. while paying great attention to our seaward defences, we have entirely neglected the landward approach." on return to the terrace on which stood the dwelling-house and the power-station, the already wearied defenders immediately set to work to fortify the approach from the interior of the island. sixty yards from the house began the narrow defile that afforded a road between the settlement and the treasure cave. on either side the cliffs towered to nearly one hundred feet, so that once the savages took possession of those heights the terrace could not be held. "i suppose we cannot launch one of the canoes, provision her, and make a dash for safety?" asked terence. "it's too risky," replied mr. mckay. "if seen, we should be overhauled in less than half-an-hour. no, we must stick to this place and hold it to the last, so let's set to at once." with the energy of despair all hands worked with feverish desperation, their loaded rifles lying within easy reach, while every moment they expected to hear the savage shouts of their bloodthirsty foes. across the foot of the defile they dug a shallow trench, lining the inner side with boxes, crates, and other articles so as to form a barricade. it was a feeble defence at the most, but with five skilled riflemen armed with modern rifles behind it, the breastwork might serve its purpose. to guard against a shower of missiles from the summit of the adjacent cliffs, a lean-to roof of stout planks was hastily constructed, earth being thrown upon it to deaden the shock of heavy stones, while the remaining boxes of ammunition were brought up so that the supply was ready to hand. "look here, quexo," said mr. mckay, "go to the stockade at the top of the cliff-path, and keep watch. don't move, whatever happens, till we call you, even if you hear us firing; but if you see any signs of the savages landing on the beach, fire your rifle. you understand?" "yas, massa," replied the mulatto, and snatching up his rifle he ran to his appointed post as quickly as his legs could carry him. "we mustn't forget water and provisions, ellerton," said mr. mckay. "they must be brought ready to hand, for if the fighting is prolonged we will have no time to go to the house for food and drink." "i'll bring some biscuits and water," replied ellerton. "i remember how dry i was during the last attack. but, do you know, sir, i begin to feel quite hopeful, now our defences are completed." "it's certainly improved the situation, hoppy," replied mr. mckay. "but we've a tough job in front of us. eight or nine hundred savages, each eager for a fight and keen on plundering us. we must not be over-confident. but now cut off and get the provisions and water." ellerton quickly performed his task, and, having placed the water and biscuits in the spot indicated by mr. mckay, he observed: "it's a pity we can't use some of that dynamite again." "we cannot make the trucks run up hill, and, besides, there are no rails, if that's what you mean." "no, sir, i know that," was the reply, "but i thought that if we could place a few tins of the stuff on those rocks we could easily manage to put a bullet through them at two hundred yards." "by all means we'll try it," said mr. mckay heartily. "as i've often said, you're a brick." accordingly ellerton ran to the cave where the explosive was stored, and returned at a walking pace with nearly forty pounds of the dangerous compound. "don't use all of it," said mr. mckay. "here, take these three tins; they'll be a better mark for us." into each of the metal boxes ellerton placed about ten pounds of the explosive, adding a few handfuls of iron, nails, and bits of scrap metal. then, climbing over the breastwork, he was handed the rough-and-ready bombs. thus laden he cautiously made his way up the rough defile till he reached a spot about two hundred yards from the defenders' position. here a mass of fallen rock, the highest part ten feet in height, formed a suitable site for his operations, and without mishap the tin canisters were placed in such a position that they could readily be seen above the heads of any number of savages likely to come between them and the defences. meanwhile mr. mckay was busily engaged in preparing a number of hand-bombs, charging several small tins with explosive mixed with nails, and lashing a short length of thin rope securely to each completed missile. "i'm going to place these things here," said he, pointing to a small cleft in the cliff. "be careful not to knock them, or we shall punish ourselves." "how are you going to throw them?" asked ellerton, who had meanwhile returned from his expedition. "if they fall too close they will do us harm, and i don't think they can be thrown more than the length of a cricket-pitch." "by this," replied mr. mckay, holding up a short stick with a notch cut in one end. "i lay the rope along the stick and jam its end between the palm of my hand and the wood. by swinging the stick a greatly increased power is obtained; at the right moment the cord is released and the bomb flies off at a tangent." "i see," replied ellerton, and although he had great faith in mr. mckay, he found himself wondering what the result would be did the missile not fly off at the correct tangent. slowly the hours dragged, for, all the preparations for the defence being completed, the tedious and nerve-racking ordeal of waiting for the fray told more upon the energies of the defenders than would the actual fight. the sun was sinking low ere the alert watchers detected the distant shouts of the savages. "they've found the trail leading to the cave, i fancy," remarked mr. mckay. "they'll be here before dark, unless i'm much mistaken. terence, you had better start the dynamo and see that the searchlight is ready for use. tell quexo to come here and take your place. you must take sole charge of the seaward side of our defences. now, listen: whatever you do, don't train the searchlight this way till i discharge my rifle. keep the rays playing on the shore, and occasionally flash the beam skywards. it may bring us aid. when you hear the shot, slew the projector round and direct the beam straight up the defile. you quite understand?" "yes, sir," replied terence. "you can rely upon me." "i feel sure of it," was the quiet reply, as the lad set off on his responsible and single-handed task. "it will soon be dark," said ellerton. "that will be all the better for us, for these brutes won't find their way so easily." "i don't think the darkness will stop them, provided they are not afraid of it. these savages can find their way by night like cats. hullo, quexo, tired, eh?" "no, massa, not berry tired. one eye he go sleep, den oder eye he go sleep." "quexo means to go to sleep with one eye open," said andy. "we ought to take a leaf from his book." "yes, we'll feel the want of sleep as much as anything," replied his father. "once the attack opens there will be little respite. it wouldn't be a bad idea if you three were to snatch a few moments' rest. i'll wake you up in time, never fear." this advice was acted upon, andy, ellerton, and quexo stretching themselves out on the ground at the foot of the barricade, and in a few minutes, in spite of their risky position, the lads were sleeping soundly. night had now fallen, and the ghostly white beams of the searchlight swept the shore, the noise of the distant surf mingling with the subdued fizzing of the carbons as terence diligently attended to the working of the projector. the far-off shouts of the savages had now ceased. probably the invaders, satisfied with the success of their unopposed landing, were awaiting the dawn ere they commenced their attack. silence, when intent upon a hand-to-hand conflict, was a stranger to them, and for this mr. mckay was thankful, since few things are more trying than the expectation of a sudden onslaught by an unseen and unheard foe. notwithstanding this peculiarity on the part of the invaders, mr. mckay did not for one moment relax his vigilance. rifle in hand he stood, rarely altering his position, and gazed stedfastly in the direction of the defile, his ears alert for the faintest footfall or shout that might denote the approach of the bloodthirsty savages. although the defenders were cut off from their carefully prepared retreat in the treasure cave, another shelter yet remained. the cavern where blight had been kept a prisoner had been since used as a temporary storehouse for several casks of provisions. as a last resource it could be held, possibly for a month. but if the natives took the island and showed no disposition to leave, after having plundered the white man's possessions, even that refuge would be a means of only prolonging the sufferings of the defenders. hopeful as he generally was, mr. mckay fully realised that he and his companions were in a very tight fix, and unless the skill and resource of civilisation could overcome the superior numbers and reckless courage of the savages, nothing short of a timely rescue would save the defenders from death. then mr. mckay found himself counting the number of days which had elapsed since the french schooner had exchanged signals with the island. even allowing for light winds and calms she would have had time to reach some port, and, should the captain keep his word, a gunboat or at least a trading vessel might be on her way to the rescue. mr. mckay's thoughts were interrupted by a loud chorus of savage shouts at no great distance, then came the confused noise of scuffling feet tearing down the defile. "up with you," he shouted. but the warning was unnecessary, for the three lads, awakened by the noise, were already standing to their arms. "it's the sheep!" exclaimed ellerton. "the savages have frightened them, and they are running this way for shelter," said andy. "that means that the natives will soon be at their heels." the terrified sheep continued their flight till they found their advance checked by the barricade, and in a confused, struggling mass they herded into the corner formed by the breastwork and the adjoining cliff, their loud baa-ing adding to the confusion. then upon the brow of the rise at the end of the defile appeared a multitude of lights, and with fierce shouts the savages tore down the rough inclined path straight for the barricade. [illustration: with fierce shouts the savages tore down the path straight for the barricade] chapter xxvi a great disaster the natives had furnished themselves with torches made from the branches of resinous trees, and in the ruddy flare the painted bodies of the warriors made an easy mark. "three hundred yards," said mr. mckay, setting up the backsight of his rifle. "fire rapidly, but aim low. we may check the rush before they come to close quarters." the sharp reports of the rifles echoed along the rocky walls of the defile, and a series of loud shrieks told that the fire had not been in vain. yet the onward rush was apparently unchecked, for though several of the torches were extinguished, the savages still rushed to the attack. "where's the searchlight?" muttered mr. mckay, as he thrust a fresh clip of cartridges into his magazine. at that moment the giant beam swung majestically round and fixed itself upon the gorge. under the powerful rays the scene of horror was thrown into high relief. the upper part of the defile was literally choked with human beings. a few of the foremost warriors, drawing clear of the press, had managed to evade the death-dealing volleys, and with brandished clubs and spears were rushing upon the barricade. this much the defenders saw as the first flash of the searchlight was thrown upon the scene. the next instant the shouts of triumph and pain gave place to cries of terror. the blinding rays, coming apparently from out of the earth, were far more to be feared than the bullets. to the savage mind it was magic--black magic. the warlike mob seemed to melt away. some of the warriors, throwing down their weapons, rushed from the scene of action with their arms pressed tightly across their eyes as if to shut out the penetrating beams; others dropped where they stood, grovelling in the dust and uttering cries, while in the space of five minutes the defile was deserted, save by the dead and wounded and a few of the natives, whose terror seemed to have rooted them to the earth. "that's spotted them!" exclaimed andy, as he threw down his over-heated rifle. "i hope it will scare them right off the island." "it has worked wonders," assented mr. mckay. "but be careful, some of those men are not dead, i feel sure. bring down every man you see moving." rifle on shoulder the lads waited. they quite realised the danger of allowing the natives to lurk in the defile, and as each cautiously moving body could be seen, as a terrified warrior slowly recovered from his panic, a carefully aimed shot caused him to fall. "we are comparatively secure till daylight," said mr. mckay. "they've had another lesson. andy, you might relieve terence at the searchlight. keep it fixed on the defile, though at intervals you might direct it seawards. quexo, i want you to carry up as many pails of water as you can to blight's cave. ellerton, you're feeling fit, i hope? will you keep a look-out, i am going to have forty winks." it was an exaggerated "forty winks." mr. mckay, dead beat with his exertions, slept like a log till daybreak, terence keeping him company. ellerton had meanwhile climbed over the stockade and succeeded in bringing back several of the terrified sheep, which throughout the night had been huddled together in helpless terror. beyond an occasional shot as a few of the wretched natives attempted to wriggle out of the death-trap, the rest of the night had passed without further disturbance; but the dawn revealed a different state of affairs. the discomfited savages were evidently built of stern stuff, for as soon as it was light, undaunted by their defeat in the hours of darkness, they took possession of the summit of the cliff overlooking the defenders' lines. standing on the very edge of the precipice, like bronzed statues, several of the chiefs surveyed the scene beneath them, till, having taken in all that they wanted, they withdrew to the main body of warriors. instantly the fierce shouts of the savages rent the air, and a shower of stones and throwing-spears was hurled upon the white men's defences. the missiles rattled on the iron roof of the house and upon the top of the shelter over the searchlight; but the defenders, safe within the covered-in barricade, were secure from the furious hail, though unable to reply by a single shot. several of the sheep were transfixed by spears, each casualty being greeted with a hoarse roar of delight from the attackers. terence, however, who had returned to his post at the seaward side of the terrace, saw the possibility of the searchlight being damaged by stones, and, regardless of the danger, he rushed from his shelter to place a screen of planks over the partially exposed instrument. his appearance was the signal for a redoubled discharge of missiles, but coolly he continued his task. "get back to cover!" shouted mr. mckay. at that moment a stone caught the lad in the side, and staggering a few paces he fell. a yell of triumph greeted the success of the savages; but without a moment's hesitation ellerton rushed through the danger zone. unscathed he gained his friend's side, and to his relief found that the missile had merely winded him. fortunately terence had the presence of mind to stagger to the remote side of the searchlight hut, where the two lads were protected from the hailstorm of stones. "are you fit for a dash?" asked ellerton after a while. "yes," replied terence, "i'm ready now." seizing their rifles, the two friends rushed at top speed across the open ground and gained the shelter of the palisade guarding the cliff-path. here they were, so to speak, on the wrong side of the fence, and had there been any savages on the shore their position would have been critical in the extreme. as it was, they were able to keep up a constant fire upon the natives on the cliff; but their foes seemed totally indifferent to the rifles, though man after man was observed to fall. the savages had not been idle. realising that the buildings and the barricade at the end of the defile were proof against stones and spears, they rolled an enormous stone to the edge of the cliff with the intention of dropping it upon the roofed-in stockade. "look out!" shouted ellerton. "there's a rock about to fall on your heads!" taking advantage of the warning shout, mr. mckay, quexo, and andy crossed the covered way to the opposite side of the defile. not a moment too soon. in spite of a couple of successful shots by ellerton, who managed to bowl over one of the most active of the savages who were engaged in rolling the ponderous rock, the mass of stone rushed down the slope and shot clear of the cliff. the next instant it crashed through the frail roof of the barricade, and, in addition, smashed a huge gap in the wall of packing-cases and chests. "a near shave," ejaculated mr. mckay. "if they keep that game up we shall soon be without a roof to our heads." emboldened by their success, a considerable number of the savages worked their way round to the head of the gorge with the intention of charging the shattered defences, the remaining natives still keeping up a telling discharge from the brink of the cliff. "i must rush it," said ellerton hurriedly, as he grasped the state of affairs. "keep a good look-out along the shore, terence. if i fall, don't attempt a rescue; there are not enough of us to throw ourselves away like that." bending low, the lad ran across the danger zone once more, and although several spears fell close to him, he gained the side of his companions in safety. seen by day, the advance of the savages had an even more fearful appearance than the night attack. brandishing their weapons and uttering awful yells, they rushed down the gorge, with one object in view. they meant to come to hand-grips with the stubborn defenders of the barricade. "now, andy," remarked mr. mckay quietly, "reserve your fire till the thickest of the press passes yonder rock, then aim carefully at that canister. go on firing, you," he added to the other two lads. the execution caused by the three rifles amongst that solid pack of howling savages was great. no body of white men would have faced it, but undaunted the warriors swept on. andy, finger on trigger, watched the advance till the critical moment; but his arm was not so firm as it ought to have been, and the bullet struck the rock a foot to the left of the tin of explosives. "miss, by jove!" he exclaimed savagely as he jerked open the breach and ejected the empty cylinder. ere he could again take aim, mr. mckay's rifle spoke. there was a blinding glare, followed by a deafening report, and the close ranks of the savages seemed to be swept aside as if by a gigantic flail. not only did the dynamite charge scatter death amongst the natives, but the concussion brought down huge masses of rock from the cliffs, their fall adding to the terror and confusion of the attackers. "that's fifty of them at the very least," exclaimed andy. "a few more coups like that, and we'll wipe them all out." "it will teach them caution, i'm afraid," was his father's reply. "but we've done very well up to the present. how's terence?" "he was only slightly hurt," replied ellerton. "no sign of any canoes?" "no, sir." "thank heaven for that," replied mr. mckay fervently. "the explosion also sent off the other canisters," observed andy. "shall we place some others in the gorge when it is dark?" "i don't think they will attempt that way again," replied mr. mckay. "they've had a rare fright, both by day and night." "i noticed a crowd of them on the cliffs immediately above the cave where the rest of the dynamite is stored," paid ellerton. "if we can use the stuff to no better purpose, why not set a time-fuse, and give them another surprise?" "it might be done, but there's a great risk to be run by whoever lights the fuse." "i'm willing to do it," said ellerton resolutely. "i can creep along the base of the cliff so as to be out of sight." "then do it, my boy. now's the time to act, before they have got over their last reverse." without a moment's delay, ellerton dashed across the spear-encumbered ground and gained the shelter of the overhanging cliffs. then waving his hands to his companions, he disappeared from view. there was a lull in the fighting. the defenders, anxiously awaiting their comrade's return, lay idle within their defences, while the natives were content to hurl an occasional spear or stone upon the roofs of the buildings to show that they were still determined to continue the attack. "i hope ellerton's all right," exclaimed andy uneasily. "he's been gone quite long enough." "i cannot help thinking the same," replied his father. they waited another five minutes, then quexo announced his intention of going to search for massa el'ton. "be careful, then, quexo," said andy. "remember mr. ellerton may have lit the fuse--set fire to great bang-up," he added, noting that the mulatto looked puzzled over the word "fuse." "all right, massa andy. quexo he mind take care ob self an' massa el'ton." another five minutes passed in breathless suspense. what had happened? ellerton had only to cover a distance of about four hundred yards both ways. allowing for the rugged nature of the ground, and the necessity for caution, he ought to have returned several minutes ago. perhaps he had stumbled and was lying helpless within a few feet of the heavily charged mine. suddenly two revolver shots rang out in quick succession, and quexo's voice was heard shouting for aid. "stay here, andy," exclaimed his father hurriedly, and grasping his revolver he ran towards the scene of action, the report of another shot greeting his ears as he went. on rounding a spur of the cliff, a strange sight met his gaze. from the summit of the cliff dangled a long rope of cocoa-fibre. half-way from the ground was a native, evidently badly wounded, grasping the swaying rope with one hand while the other was pressed against his side. on the ground at about twelve feet from the end of the rope lay four bodies in a heap, and on arriving at the spot mr. mckay discovered to his consternation that two of the motionless forms were those of his companions. quexo lay uppermost, a jagged spear-head buried deep in his back. one hurried glance revealed the sad truth that the faithful mulatto was dead. under him were the bodies of two natives, both shot through the chest, while underneath the ghastly pile was ellerton. as mr. mckay stooped over the lad, a spear whizzed close to his ear and sank deeply in the ground. it was a stern warning, and mr. mckay took advantage of it. lifting ellerton's body, he bore it to the shelter of the cliffs, then as the rope began to tremble violently he stepped out a pace, revolver in hand. he fired, and two bodies came hurtling through space, striking the ground with a heavy thud. a lucky shot had severed the rope as cleanly as if by a knife. there was no time to be lost. at any moment the mine might be sprung. hoisting ellerton's body on his shoulder like a sack of flour, mr. mckay began his retreat, stepping over the rough ground with giant strides, till the shelter of the cliffs came to an end. here he transferred his burden to his arms, and, protecting it as well as he was able with his own body, he dashed across the open. unscathed he reached the roofed-in stockade, and breathlessly he deposited the body of his comrade upon the ground. "dead?" asked andy anxiously. "no, only stunned. it's a bad business." "and quexo?" "he's gone, poor fellow!" "oh!" andy gasped, as if something had struck him; but the blow was a mental not a physical injury. "how----" his words were interrupted by a roar that seemed to shake the island to its very foundations. the cliffs trembled, dislodging masses of loose rock, while a blast of air swept over the terrace like a tornado. the mine had exploded! chapter xxvii the last stand the explosion, though terrific, had not the desired effect. ellerton had succeeded in lighting the fuse, and was on his way back, when the natives lowered a rope from the cliffs. no doubt they had observed him on his way to the cave as he rather thoughtlessly showed himself in crossing the base of the projecting spur. cunningly two of the savages lowered themselves on to a ledge within twenty feet of the ground, and on ellerton's return they hurled a stone with unerring aim, bringing him senseless to the ground. eager to secure his body, the two assailants descended the remaining distance, and were stooping over the prostrate youth when quexo appeared on the scene. a couple of well-directed shots settled their accounts; but the mulatto, in rushing to ellerton's assistance, failed to notice that the edge of the cliff above him swarmed with natives. even as he bent over the bodies of ellerton and his assailants, a spear thrown with terrible force struck him in the back. hardly knowing what hurt him, the mulatto sprang to his feet, and with his dying strength discharged his revolver at one of the blacks who was descending the rope, ere he fell across the bodies of the victims of his first two shots. this episode had caused the crowd of savages, who had previously been congregating immediately above the mine, to rush to that part of the cliff nearest to the scene of the tragedy, and thus the actual explosion did not inflict very great damage upon the invaders. nevertheless the moral result was a good service to the sore-pressed white men, for the savages refrained from renewing the attack, and withdrew to the shelter of the palm-groves. the approach of night also prolonged the mutual cessation of hostilities, for the natives dreaded the great flashing beams of light more than anything else. terence, in spite of himself, fell asleep several times beside the searchlight, while andy, weary-eyed and stricken with grief, was kept awake solely by his devotion to his wounded comrade. fortunately ellerton's injuries were not so bad as mr. mckay had at first supposed. the missile had struck him a glancing blow, and although reducing him to insensibility, was more of the nature of a cut than a contusion. there had been a copious flow of blood which relieved the pressure on the scalp that a bruise would have otherwise caused. before midnight ellerton had recovered sufficiently to relate the circumstances of the affair so far as he knew, although he was ignorant of the actual ambush. neither did mr. mckay think fit to tell him at present of quexo's death in his heroic and successful attempt to save his master from mutilation. * * * * * with the return of daylight the savages renewed the attack. large stones, brought to the brink of the cliff by their stupendous efforts, came crashing down upon the frail defences, till only a small section of the barricade midway between the walls of the defile remained intact. here mr. mckay and terence kept up a continuous but apparently ineffectual fire, while ellerton, still weak and showing signs of light-headedness, did his best with a revolver. andy, nearly done up for want of rest, resumed his solitary vigil at the cliff path, occasionally adding to the fusillade whenever a group of natives appeared at the edge of the cliff to hurl another of the weighty missiles. with parched lips and swollen eyes the weary little band continued the unequal combat, almost unable to raise their rifles to their aching shoulders, till, to add to their misfortunes, andy perceived ten large canoes rounding the south-eastern promontory of the island. the natives had at length grasped the importance of a simultaneous rear and frontal attack. "we must retreat to blight's cave," exclaimed mr. mckay, when his son had shouted the disheartening intelligence. "let us hope the explosion has not closed up the entrance. pull yourself together, hoppy! we've got to make a rush for it." "i'm going to stay here--i'm quite comfortable where i am," replied ellerton with astonishing determination. "but you can't, man; you'll be cut to pieces in less than a minute." but ellerton refused to move. his comrades looked at each other anxiously. in ordinary circumstances it would have been no easy task to compel the lad to get up and walk, and with a few hundred savages hanging round, the difficulties were increased tenfold. "i'll risk it," muttered mr. mckay. "it's either kill or cure." and raising his voice he said: "hoppy, old man, quexo is missing. he went to look for you and has not returned." "what?" exclaimed ellerton wildly. "quexo missing? i'll go and look for him." "we are all going," replied mr. mckay. "take your rifle and keep with us." the savages saw the white men deserting the shelter of the barricade, and with shouts of triumph they redoubled the hail of missiles, while numbers of them rushed to the head of the defile and thence straight for the abandoned defences. edging cautiously along the base of the cliff, the forlorn little band continued its retreat till ellerton, who was leading, came across the body of the faithful mulatto. for a moment he gazed at the ghastly scene with drawn face and staring eyes; then, his scattered wits returning, he burst into tears. "good!" exclaimed mr. mckay to his son. "that's saved his reason. but here they come." already the leading pursuers were appearing on the edge of the cliff-path, while others, rushing down the gorge, had scrambled over the debris of the barricade, and with brandished clubs and spears were charging down upon their white foes. "pick him up, hoppy; we must not leave him to those fiends," shouted andy. assisted by terence, ellerton raised the body of the mulatto on his back, and, covered by mr. mckay and andy, continued the retreat. as they reached the scene of the great explosion, they found that masses of dislodged boulders extended almost to the edge of the lower cliff. slowly ellerton and terence bore their burden over the rough, rock-strewn ground, the savages meanwhile gaining upon them rapidly. "keep going at any cost," shouted mr. mckay. "gain the door of the fence, and look out for us. andy, we must make a stand here." "all right, pater," replied his son as he took cover behind a convenient mass of stones. the two rifles opened a furious fire upon the advancing natives. not a shot was thrown away, and although stones and spears whizzed over their heads or shattered themselves against the sheltering rock, father and son continued to blaze away coolly, and deliberately. the savages, now more or less contemptuously familiar with the white men's weapons, hesitated to close in upon the dauntless twain, and, shouting to their fellows to hasten to help them to wipe out the white men, they contented themselves with rushing to the right and left in the hope of surrounding their foes. "stop that chap!" yelled andy, pointing to a crafty warrior, who was creeping on all fours up the rocks on mr. mckay's left. barely two inches of the man's head were visible above the sheltering boulder, but those two inches were sufficient. mr. mckay's rifle cracked, and the savage bounded a good three feet in the air to fall upon his face upon the ground. "they're safe!" shouted mr. mckay, giving a rapid glance in the direction of the iron fence. "now, bolt for it!" springing over the remainder of the intervening boulders, father and son ran for shelter. for a brief instant the natives failed to understand that their foes were again in retreat; then, to the accompaniment of a flight of spears, they launched themselves over the latest line of defence and pressed home the pursuit. rifle in hand, terence and ellerton stood by the open door to aid their comrades' retreat; another five yards, then comparative safely. suddenly andy stumbled and fell headlong on the ground, his rifle flying from his grasp; the next instant half-a-dozen natives were upon him. without a moment's hesitation, mr. mckay faced about, and, drawing his revolver, fired. at the first report one of the pursuers fell; but the hammer of the weapon clicked harmlessly as mr. mckay attempted to bring down a second. the weapon was empty. throwing the now useless weapon straight into the face of one of the savages, mr. mckay stooped to pick up his rifle, a spear just grazing his shoulder as he did so. with the strength and fury of a berserker, he gripped the rifle by the barrel, and wielding it like a ponderous flail he smote right and left. at one moment the brass-bound butt crashed with a terrific lunge full in the tattooed face of a native; at the next it descended with relentless force upon the skull of another. then ellerton's rifle cracked and terence's revolver added to the din. the blacks seemed to melt away; and ere the main body of the pursuers could join in the struggle, the white men were safe within the stockade. "don't trouble about the door," shouted mr. mckay, as terence was about to close and barricade the iron-lined aperture. breathlessly the harried fugitives entered the cave, and, holding their rifles ready for instant use, awaited the arrival of their triumphant foes. the door of the fence standing tantalisingly open served a better purpose than if it had been closed and barred. had it been secured, the savages would soon have battered it in by sheer weight of numbers; but even in the heat of the pursuit the natives paused and looked askance at the mute invitation to enter. fears of some other snare, more terrible than those they had already experienced, held them in a spell-bound grip. the temporary check gave the defenders a chance of much-needed rest. "now, lads," exclaimed mr. mckay, "we are safe enough for the present. a thousand of the wretches couldn't rush us in this place. but keep your eyes open, and let rip at the first chap who shows his head inside the door." there was a touch of irony in mr. mckay's advice. want of sleep threatened to become a more dangerous foe than the savages themselves, and the lads were almost falling asleep as they awaited the next assault. all at once mr. mckay raised his rifle and fired. a gaudily-decked warrior had so far overcome his fears and doubts as to peer cautiously into the inclosure. his curiosity led to his undoing, for, without knowing what struck him, he slid quietly to the ground with a bullet through his brain. but the spell was broken, and with a hideous clamour the natives poured in through the doorway. many fell dead or wounded, while others tripped over their prostrate bodies; but by sheer weight of numbers the fence was overthrown, and over the removed obstruction rushed the bloodthirsty mob. seeing that it was impossible to check the flowing tide of warriors as they sped over the broad expanse, the defenders hurriedly retired into the farthermost recesses of the cave. here they were able to command the narrow entrance, and with a rapid magazine fire they simply mowed down every savage who showed himself at the mouth of the cave. at last, disheartened by the obvious impossibility of rushing the desperate band of white men, the warriors retired, and silence reigned save for the moans of the wounded who littered the floor of the cavern. worn out as they were, the four defenders, as soon as possible, scooped out a shallow trench for the reception of the body of quexo, who had been killed, and silently the earth was heaped over the still form of this their faithful servant and devoted comrade. "now turn in for a spell," said mr. mckay, as the last offices were performed. "i'll take the first watch. i think i can keep awake for another couple of hours." vainly protesting, the lads obeyed and were soon asleep. shouldering his rifle, mr. mckay walked as far as the overthrown fence, whence he could command a view of the house. swarming in and out of the building were the natives bearing away everything of value, while others were demolishing the searchlight, which they evidently regarded as an evil spirit, whose powers were harmless by day. the work of plunder continued till nothing was left of the dwelling but the bare walls and roof, and presently the building burst into flames. hoping against hope, mr. mckay watched with impotent rage the wanton destruction of the result of so many months of patient toil and energy. would the natives be content with their success, and re-embark with their booty? already several of them, laden with spoil, were descending the cliff-path to their canoes; were the white men to be left unmolested? without thinking of the sore straits to which they would be reduced by the loss of their home with most of their stores, mr. mckay waited and watched. the possibility of a fresh lease of life, even under such adverse conditions, was infinitely preferable to having to fight desperately to the last. but his hopes were doomed to failure. a strong body of savages began to ascend the slope leading to the cave, and, to his consternation, the watcher perceived that many of them were bearing bundles of sticks and grass. it was to be a struggle not only against the spears and clubs of the natives, but against fire and smoke, and mr. mckay realised that the choice of the defenders lay between a fight to the death in the open or being stifled in the recesses of the cave. chapter xxviii the rescue returning to the cave, mr. mckay awoke the lads and hurriedly explained the nature of the threatened attack. "we must quit this shelter and keep in the open as long as we possibly can," said he. "a long-range fire may keep them at bay. only as a last resource must we return to the cave." barely had the defenders left the cavern than they were assailed from above by a shower of stones and spears. several of the savages had taken up a position on the summit of the cliff overhanging the mouth of the white men's retreat, so as to make the advance of the main body easier. thrown into confusion by this unlooked-for attack, the four defenders fled headlong for the cave they had just left, narrowly escaping the falling missiles. then, finding that the jutting rocks protected them so long as they kept close to the base of the cliff, the wearied men plucked up courage, and opened fire upon the dense masses of the natives as they advanced rapidly with their burdens. many of the savages fell, but others immediately took up their loads, and working from cover to cover with admirable cunning the natives came within throwing distance of their spears. the rifle-fire, hot as it was, was unable to stop the fan-like formation of the crafty warriors, and, assailed by stones and spears, the defenders were once more compelled to retire to the cave. repeated repulses had taught the natives caution, and without risking themselves by appearing in front of the death-dealing tunnel, they thrust their bundles of wood and grass into the mouth of the cave by means of long poles. then a torch was flung upon the heap of inflammable material, and the next instant it burst into flames. "throw some water on it," grasped terence, as the heat began to take effect. "useless," replied mr. mckay. "it would only cause more smoke," and lifting a case of ammunition he rushed towards the blazing pile. "lie down!" he ordered sharply, as he regained his comrades. crouched in the remotest part of the cave, they awaited the explosion. then with a roar, followed by a series of minor reports, the cartridges exploded, filling the cave with pungent fumes. as the last detonation ended, mr. mckay leapt to his feet, and, revolver in hand, dashed through the scattered and still burning embers. his companions followed his example, and gained the open. even as they drank in the deliciously cool air they were compelled to resume the unequal combat, though the savages, alarmed by the explosion and the sudden appearance of their foes, gave back in terror. edging along the base of the cliff, for the darts and stones still descended, regardless of friend or foe, the defenders blazed away at their enemies, till the latter recovered from their fright and returned to the attack. not till they were in grave danger of being cut off did mr. mckay and his companions return to the cave once more to endure the torments of the smoke-laden atmosphere. this time the savages did not leave them in peace. with poised weapons the wily warriors waited on either side of the entrance, while others descended from the terrace and procured fresh fuel. splashing their faces with water, and fanning the noxious fumes with portions of their clothes, the defenders strove to cool their parched and heated bodies, realising that another half-hour would doubtless see the end of the unequal struggle. "i'm not going to be smoked out like a rat in a hole," exclaimed ellerton. "i'll make a dash for it and die in the open." "it's the only way," replied mr. mckay. "if we are to die we must die like britons, fighting to the last." hardly had the forlorn party made this desperate decision, when a sharp ear-splitting explosion, followed almost immediately by another, was heard without the cave. yells of terror and noisy surprise arose, and the savages fled right and left. for a moment the defenders were unable to grasp the meaning of the interruption, till andy shouted: "hurrah! a rescue!" and overcome by mental and bodily strain, he fell on the floor in a swoon. terence and ellerton were about to rush to the mouth of the cave, but mr. mckay restrained them. "lie down!" he exclaimed. "they're firing with shell, and we shall be blown to atoms if we go outside." it was, to a certain extent, unfortunate that the inhabitants of mckay's island were unable to observe the means by which they were so opportunely rescued from what appeared to be a terrible and remorseless fate. while the preparations for the smoking-out of the still-resisting white men were in progress, h.m.s. _blazer_ was steaming straight for the island. unnoticed by the natives, she gained the entrance to the lagoon, the leadsmen in the chains, and the decks cleared for action. the alert commander had already observed the smouldering ruins of what was obviously at no remote time a civilised settlement, and the shouts of the desperate savages told him that resistance was still being made. h.m.s. _blazer_ was but a third-class cruiser, mainly engaged in surveying duties in the pacific. her armament consisted of two . -inch guns, one mounted fore and aft, six twelve-pounders, and ten maxims, and these were amply sufficient for the work in hand. rounding to in seven fathoms, and less than three hundred yards from the scene of the desperate encounter, the _blazer_ opened fire. her commander had noted the actual locality of the defenders' retreat, and carefully avoiding the spot for fear of harming friend as well as foe, he had a couple of shells planted in the fringe of the attacking natives. those two shells were sufficient. madly the survivors fled along the terrace in the direction of the defile leading to the ulterior, and as they ran they were subjected to a raking fire by the quick-firers and maxims, till only a small remnant gained the shelter of the palm-groves. "man and arm boats!" came the order. but ere the landing-party gained the shore, not a living savage was to be seen. panic-stricken they fled to the far side of the island, where they embarked in their canoes. "we're too late, it seems," remarked the lieutenant in charge, as he gazed upon the devastated scene. "those brutes were running from up yonder, sir," observed a petty-officer, pointing towards the upper terrace. "maybe there's someone up there among the rocks." "party, fall in!" ordered the officer, and giving the word to march, he led the way over the open ground, which was littered by the victims of the _blazer's_ fire. "strike me; wot's this?" ejaculated the petty-officer, as four battered specimens of humanity appeared above the crest of a rise of ground and floundered painfully towards their rescuers, who gave them a hearty cheer. "we were certainly in the nick of time," remarked commander bulwark, as, five hours later, mr. mckay and the three lads were seated in the _blazer's_ wardroom. "we received a telegraphic message from tahiti while we were lying off suva, to the effect that a french trader reported that she had communicated with british castaways; but was unable, owing to the high seas that were running, to render assistance. so we came at full speed, and, i am glad to say, with fortunate results. we are leaving here to-morrow for sydney. i suppose you don't object to being landed there?" "by no means," replied mr. mckay. "i think we've had enough of the island to last us a lifetime." in a few words mr. mckay told the commander of the finding of the treasure, and how it was hidden under the floor of the house. "treasure, eh? well, you're lucky in more than one way. there are plenty of islands in the pacific where treasure is supposed to be hidden. we usually regard these stories as a myth, but you've evidently proved that such things do exist. let me congratulate you once again. i'll send ashore at once." before nightfall the treasure chests were conveyed safely on board the cruiser. the bluejackets also placed a pile of stones over the grave of the brave mulatto, a simple inscription setting forth his name and the manner of his death; while for the benefit of possible future castaways, a paper giving particulars of the stores deposited in the treasure cave was placed in an air-tight case and lashed to a post in a conspicuous position on the shore. shortly after daybreak on the following day mr. mckay and the three lads watched from the poop of the _blazer_ the rapidly receding land which for so many months had been their home; and in silence they stood gazing with wistful eyes till the summit of the peak of mckay's island sank beneath the horizon. the end _the mayflower press, plymouth, england_. william brendon & son, ltd. the scout library stories of adventure. _in cloth covers. price s. d. net. postage d. extra._ the young cavalier. by percy f. westerman. "one of the best stories of the english civil war we have met, and mr. gordon browne's fine pictures enrich it unspeakably."--_pall mall gazette_. the quest of the veiled king. by rupert chesterton. "a really good yarn which will be appreciated by every scout and by many a boy who belongs to no patrol."--_morning post_. frank flower. the boy war correspondent. by a. b. cooper. "boy scouts should thoroughly enjoy this story, for the principles on which young flower always acts are thoroughly sound, and, though no offensive morals are drawn, the advantage of straight conduct is made obvious."--_academy_. gildersley's tenderfoot. by robert leighton. "a rattling good story of adventure in the wild west which boys will thoroughly enjoy."--_bookman_. sons of the sea. by christopher beck. "mr. beck tells a story of the sea scouts and shows how handy these young people may become.... written in a manly, healthy style, and may be recommended to the attention of every boy."--_the field_. the above books may be ordered through your bookseller, or will be sent post free on receipt of the price named with postage added from a. f. sowter, publisher, "the scout" offices, maiden lane, london, w.c. attractive nature books by owen jones and marcus woodward authors of "a gamekeeper's note book" illustrated. crown vo, cloth. price s. d. each net; postage d. extra. also in picture paper wrappers. price s. d. each net; postage d. extra. woodcraft "packed from end to end with observations and instructions which turn the country-side and its small inhabitants from a series of perplexing puzzles into a vast book which every intelligent person can read for himself."--_the globe_. "a book which would make a delightful present for any country child."--_country life_. "boys will certainly like this book."--_manchester guardian_. "a truly delightful companion for the rambler and woodman."--_pall mall gazette_. "a charming book on woodcraft."--_school guardian_. going about the country with your eyes open "a delightfully varied volume dealing with topics full of interest and also of instruction to those who knock about the country."--_morning post_. "these well-known collaborators once more show that they have the knack of imparting information in the most charming fashion ... no better book could be put into the hands of a boy."--_evening standard_. "an excellent book for boys with a love of the country, and, for the matter of that, for those who have passed the years of boyhood but have retained their interest in wild nature."--_birmingham post_. "a capital book of all kinds of outdoor lore and practice."--_times_. also by marcus woodward in cloth boards, fully illustrated. price / net; postage d. extra. in nature's ways a book for all young lovers of natural history. being an introduction to gilbert white's immortal "natural history of selborne." illustrated by j. a. shepherd. with preface by wilfrid mark webb, secretary of the selborne society. this volume contains full-page illustrations on art paper in addition to the drawings in the text. "this is a 'white's selborne' for the young; giving passages from the original under different headings and, side by side, some talk about the bird or beast referred to; with plenty of illustrations by mr. j. a. shepherd, full of his usual vitality."--_times_. "we think this volume cannot fail to interest and instruct the young."--_field_. "white's 'history of selborne' is here amplified and explained for young readers. mr. woodward has that gift of humour without which all writing on nature is a weariness unto the flesh for young readers, and for many readers who are no longer young. mr. j. a. shepherd's illustrations catch the spirit of the letterpress, and are of a piece with the work that has made his reputation as an artist."--_literary world_. _may be had of all booksellers or will be sent direct on receipt of published price and postage from_ c. arthur pearson ltd., henrietta street, london, w.c. . the scouts' book of heroes with a three-colour frontispiece by sir robert baden-powell and eight full-page illustrations. the chief scout also contributes a foreword. demy vo. cloth. with attractive wrapper in colours. price s. net. (postage d. extra.) "the part that scouts--past and present--played in the war is a source of unbounded pride to many boys; and these will be delighted with 'the scouts' book of heroes.' the chief scout himself, sir robert baden-powell, in a 'foreword,' points out that the war-work of the scouts--and jack cornwell, piper laidlaw, lieutenant gates, lieutenant haine, major toye, private cruikshank, lieutenant manson craig, lieutenant-colonel dimmer, captain mckean, lieutenant donald dean, lieutenant hallowes, all of them v.c.'s, were also all of them scouts--'was not the result of military training, or of drill. it was the outcome of the spirit that gives the essential self-discipline and dare to do.' ... there is a breaking strain to discipline that is applied, there is none to _esprit de corps_. it is the spirit that tells, the spirit which it is the aim of scout training to inculcate. 'and the book is full of the spirit.'"--_westminster gazette_. "this story of scout heroes is a noble record which should fire the scout of to-day to 'play up and play the game!'"--_church times_. "a truly noble volume is 'the scouts' book of heroes', with a preface by the chief scout, sir robert baden-powell, k.c.b. here is told the stirring story of many a boy scout who has grown up to serve his country, and offer it, too, the last sacrifice. the scout v.c.'s are here, with boy cornwell, who was one of their number, and the many who have won other high honours--the list fills nearly pages. but the book is not a mere enumeration of scout achievements; it is full of stories of heroism and devotion to duty, and has abundant illustrations bringing to life its stirring themes."--_the universe_. "no more satisfactory gift-book for a scout can be imagined than this admirably compiled story of scout heroes of the army. it is a fine record to put before the boys of the empire, and we trust the book will have multitudes of young readers."--_pall mall gazette_. "these grand true stories of boy scouts who became soldiers, and won glory or death, will make every reader proud of his uniform."--_christian world_. c. arthur pearson, ltd., henrietta street, london, w.c. . books by the chief scout sir robert baden-powell, k.c.b. scouting for boys. a handbook for instruction in good citizenship. th edition. the official handbook of the boy scouts. _price s. net, paper; s. net, cloth (postage d. extra)._ the wolf cub's handbook the official handbook for the training of boys from - , leading up to the time when they can become full scouts. _paper wrapper, price s. d. net; cloth boards, price s. d., net (postage d. extra)._ girl guiding the official handbook for the girl guides. _ th edition. paper wrapper, price s. d. net (postage d. extra); cloth boards_ _ s. d. net (postage d. extra)._ my adventures as a spy extra crown vo, cloth gilt, with coloured frontispiece, four half-tone illustrations, and other sketches by the author. _price s. d. net (postage d. extra)._ scouting games a splendid collection of outdoor and indoor games specially compiled for boy scouts. th edition. price s. d. net, paper wrapper (postage d. extra). s. d. net in cloth boards (postage d. extra). "no one who, as a schoolboy, has read a word of fenimore cooper or ballantyne, nobody who feels the fascination of a good detective story, or who understands a little of the pleasures of woodcraft, could fail to be attracted by these games, or, for that matter, by the playing of the games themselves."--_spectator_. yarns for boy scouts told round the camp fire nd edition. "there is no gift book that could be put into the hands of a schoolboy more valuable than this fascinating volume, and if you asked the boy's opinion he would probably add, 'no book that he liked better.'"--_spectator_. young knights of the empire their code and further scout yarns. "the ten laws of scouts and sir robert's exposition of them make a most lucid and telling code of behaviour; and very good, too, are his tales of travel, chapters on sea-scouting, backwoodsmen, &c., all illustrated by the author himself."--_times_. boy scouts beyond the seas "my world tour." illustrated by the author. "describes in brightest and most concise fashion his recent tour of inspection amongst the boy scouts.... every boy will read it with avidity and pronounce it 'jolly good.'"--_graphic_. _the above books, price s. each in pictorial wrapper, or s. each in cloth boards (postage d. extra)._ the cub book. the book for the boys. _price d. net (post free d.)_ marksmanship for boys the red feather and how to win it. _price d. net (post free d.)._ _write for illustrated list of books for boy scouts to_ a. f. sowter, publisher, "the scout" offices, maiden lane, london, w.c. . transcriber's note: the following typographical errors have been corrected: in page "he was was an alien, he was supported by the guns of alien warships,..." 'was was' corrected to 'was'. in page "i liked the end of that yarn no better than the begining." 'begining' amended to 'beginning'. the works of robert louis stevenson swanston edition volume xvii _of this swanston edition in twenty-five volumes of the works of robert louis stevenson two thousand and sixty copies have been printed, of which only two thousand copies are for sale._ _this is no._ .......... [illustration: sketch map of the beach of falesÁ and neighbouring country] the works of robert louis stevenson volume seventeen london: published by chatto and windus: in association with cassell and company limited: william heinemann: and longmans green and company mdccccxii all rights reserved contents a footnote to history eight years of trouble in samoa chapter page i. the elements of discord: native ii. the elements of discord: foreign iii. the sorrows of laupepa ( _to september_ ) iv. brandeis (_september_ _to august_ ) v. the battle of matautu (_september_ ) vi. last exploits of becker (_september--november_ ) vii. the samoan camps (_november_ ) viii. affairs of laulii and fangalii (_november--december_ ) ix. "furor consularis" (_december_ _to march_ ) x. the hurricane (_march_ ) xi. laupepa and mataafa ( - ) island nights' entertainments the beach of falesá: i. a south sea bridal ii. the ban iii. the missionary iv. devil-work v. night in the bush the bottle imp the isle of voices a footnote to history eight years of trouble in samoa preface an affair which might be deemed worthy of a note of a few lines in any general history has been here expanded to the size of a volume or large pamphlet. the smallness of the scale, and the singularity of the manners and events and many of the characters, considered, it is hoped that, in spite of its outlandish subject, the sketch may find readers. it has been a task of difficulty. speed was essential, or it might come too late to be of any service to a distracted country. truth, in the midst of conflicting rumours and in the dearth of printed material, was often hard to ascertain, and since most of those engaged were of my personal acquaintance, it was often more than delicate to express. i must certainly have erred often and much; it is not for want of trouble taken nor of an impartial temper. and if my plain speaking shall cost me any of the friends that i still count, i shall be sorry, but i need not be ashamed. in one particular the spelling of samoan words has been altered; and the characteristic nasal _n_ of the language written throughout _ng_ instead of _g_. thus i put pango-pango, instead of pago-pago; the sound being that of soft _ng_ in english, as in _singer_, not as in _finger_. r.l.s. vailima, upolu, samoa. eight years of trouble in samoa chapter i the elements of discord: native the story i have to tell is still going on as i write; the characters are alive and active; it is a piece of contemporary history in the most exact sense. and yet, for all its actuality and the part played in it by mails and telegraphs and iron war-ships, the ideas and the manners of the native actors date back before the roman empire. they are christians, church-goers, singers of hymns at family worship, hardy cricketers; their books are printed in london by spottiswoode, trübner, or the tract society; but in most other points they are the contemporaries of our tattooed ancestors who drove their chariots on the wrong side of the roman wall. we have passed the feudal system; they are not yet clear of the patriarchal. we are in the thick of the age of finance; they are in a period of communism. and this makes them hard to understand. to us, with our feudal ideas, samoa has the first appearance of a land of despotism. an elaborate courtliness marks the race alone among polynesians; terms of ceremony fly thick as oaths on board a ship; commoners my-lord each other when they meet--and urchins as they play marbles. and for the real noble a whole private dialect is set apart. the common names for an axe, for blood, for bamboo, a bamboo knife, a pig, food, entrails, and an oven are taboo in his presence, as the common names for a bug and for many offices and members of the body are taboo in the drawing-rooms of english ladies. special words are set apart for his leg, his face, his hair, his belly, his eyelids, his son, his daughter, his wife, his wife's pregnancy, his wife's adultery, adultery with his wife, his dwelling, his spear, his comb, his sleep, his dreams, his anger, the mutual anger of several chiefs, his food, his pleasure in eating, the food and eating of his pigeons, his ulcers, his cough, his sickness, his recovery, his death, his being carried on a bier, the exhumation of his bones, and his skull after death. to address these demigods is quite a branch of knowledge, and he who goes to visit a high chief does well to make sure of the competence of his interpreter. to complete the picture, the same word signifies the watching of a virgin and the warding of a chief; and the same word means to cherish a chief and to fondle a favourite child. men like us, full of memories of feudalism, hear of a man so addressed, so flattered, and we leap at once to the conclusion that he is hereditary and absolute. hereditary he is; born of a great family, he must always be a man of mark; but yet his office is elective and (in a weak sense) is held on good behaviour. compare the case of a highland chief: born one of the great ones of his clan, he was sometimes appointed its chief officer and conventional father; was loved, and respected, and served, and fed, and died for implicitly, if he gave loyalty a chance; and yet if he sufficiently outraged clan sentiment, was liable to deposition. as to authority, the parallel is not so close. doubtless the samoan chief, if he be popular, wields a great influence; but it is limited. important matters are debated in a fono, or native parliament, with its feasting and parade, its endless speeches and polite genealogical allusions. debated, i say--not decided; for even a small minority will often strike a clan or a province impotent. in the midst of these ineffective councils the chief sits usually silent: a kind of a gagged audience for village orators. and the deliverance of the fono seems (for the moment) to be final. the absolute chiefs of tahiti and hawaii were addressed as plain john and thomas; the chiefs of samoa are surfeited with lip-honour, but the seat and extent of their actual authority is hard to find. it is so in the members of the state, and worse in the belly. the idea of a sovereign pervades the air; the name we have; the thing we are not so sure of. and the process of election to the chief power is a mystery. certain provinces have in their gift certain high titles, or _names_, as they are called. these can only be attributed to the descendants of particular lines. once granted, each _name_ conveys at once the principality (whatever that be worth) of the province which bestows it, and counts as one suffrage towards the general sovereignty of samoa. to be indubitable king, they say, or some of them say,--i find few in perfect harmony,--a man should resume five of these names in his own person. but the case is purely hypothetical; local jealousy forbids its occurrence. there are rival provinces, far more concerned in the prosecution of their rivalry than in the choice of a right man for king. if one of these shall have bestowed its name on competitor a, it will be the signal and the sufficient reason for the other to bestow its name on competitor b or c. the majority of savaii and that of aana are thus in perennial opposition. nor is this all. in , laupepa, the present king, held the three names of malietoa, natoaitele, and tamasoalii; tamasese held that of tuiaana; and mataafa that of tuiatua. laupepa had thus a majority of suffrages; he held perhaps as high a proportion as can be hoped in these distracted islands; and he counted among the number the preponderant name of malietoa. here, if ever, was an election. here, if a king were at all possible, was the king. and yet the natives were not satisfied. laupepa was crowned, march th; and next month, the provinces of aana and atua met in joint parliament, and elected their own two princes, tamasese and mataafa, to an alternate monarchy, tamasese taking the first trick of two years. war was imminent, when the consuls interfered, and any war were preferable to the terms of the peace which they procured. by the lackawanna treaty, laupepa was confirmed king, and tamasese set by his side in the nondescript office of vice-king. the compromise was not, i am told, without precedent; but it lacked all appearance of success. to the constitution of samoa, which was already all wheels and no horses, the consuls had added a fifth wheel. in addition to the old conundrum, "who is the king?" they had supplied a new one, "what is the vice-king?" two royal lines; some cloudy idea of alternation between the two; an electorate in which the vote of each province is immediately effectual, as regards itself, so that every candidate who attains one _name_ becomes a perpetual and dangerous competitor for the other four: such are a few of the more trenchant absurdities. many argue that the whole idea of sovereignty is modern and imported; but it seems impossible that anything so foolish should have been suddenly devised, and the constitution bears on its front the marks of dotage. but the king, once elected and nominated, what does he become? it may be said he remains precisely as he was. election to one of the five names is significant; it brings not only dignity but power, and the holder is secure, from that moment, of a certain following in war. but i cannot find that the further step of election to the kingship implies anything worth mention. the successful candidate is now the _tupu o samoa_--much good may it do him! he can so sign himself on proclamations, which it does not follow that any one will heed. he can summon parliaments; it does not follow they will assemble. if he be too flagrantly disobeyed, he can go to war. but so he could before, when he was only the chief of certain provinces. his own provinces will support him, the provinces of his rivals will take the field upon the other part; just as before. in so far as he is the holder of any of the five _names_, in short, he is a man to be reckoned with; in so far as he is king of samoa, i cannot find but what the president of a college debating society is a far more formidable officer. and unfortunately, although the credit side of the account proves thus imaginary, the debit side is actual and heavy. for he is now set up to be the mark of consuls; he will be badgered to raise taxes, to make roads, to punish crime, to quell rebellion: and how he is to do it is not asked. if i am in the least right in my presentation of this obscure matter, no one need be surprised to hear that the land is full of war and rumours of war. scarce a year goes by but what some province is in arms, or sits sulky and menacing, holding parliaments, disregarding the king's proclamations and planting food in the bush, the first step of military preparation. the religious sentiment of the people is indeed for peace at any price; no pastor can bear arms; and even the layman who does so is denied the sacraments. in the last war the college of malua, where the picked youth are prepared for the ministry, lost but a single student; the rest, in the bosom of a bleeding country, and deaf to the voices of vanity and honour, peacefully pursued their studies. but if the church looks askance on war, the warrior in no extremity of need or passion forgets his consideration for the church. the houses and gardens of her ministers stand safe in the midst of armies; a way is reserved for themselves along the beach, where they may be seen in their white kilts and jackets openly passing the lines, while not a hundred yards behind the skirmishers will be exchanging the useless volleys of barbaric warfare. women are also respected; they are not fired upon; and they are suffered to pass between the hostile camps, exchanging gossip, spreading rumour, and divulging to either army the secret councils of the other. this is plainly no savage war; it has all the punctilio of the barbarian, and all his parade; feasts precede battles, fine dresses and songs decorate and enliven the field; and the young soldier comes to camp burning (on the one hand) to distinguish himself by acts of valour, and (on the other) to display his acquaintance with field etiquette. thus after mataafa became involved in hostilities against the germans, and had another code to observe beside his own, he was always asking his white advisers if "things were done correctly." let us try to be as wise as mataafa, and to conceive that etiquette and morals differ in one country and another. we shall be the less surprised to find samoan war defaced with some unpalatable customs. the childish destruction of fruit-trees in an enemy's country cripples the resources of samoa; and the habit of head-hunting not only revolts foreigners, but has begun to exercise the minds of the natives themselves. soon after the german heads were taken, mr. carne, wesleyan missionary, had occasion to visit mataafa's camp, and spoke of the practice with abhorrence. "misi kane," said one chief, "we have just been puzzling ourselves to guess where that custom came from. but, misi, is it not so that when david killed goliath, he cut off his head and carried it before the king?" with the civil life of the inhabitants we have far less to do; and yet even here a word of preparation is inevitable. they are easy, merry, and pleasure-loving; the gayest, though by far from either the most capable or the most beautiful of polynesians. fine dress is a passion, and makes a samoan festival a thing of beauty. song is almost ceaseless. the boatman sings at the oar, the family at evening worship, the girls at night in the guest-house, sometimes the workman at his toil. no occasion is too small for the poets and musicians; a death, a visit, the day's news, the day's pleasantry, will be set to rhyme and harmony. even half-grown girls, the occasion arising, fashion words and train choruses of children for its celebration. song, as with all pacific islanders, goes hand in hand with the dance, and both shade into the drama. some of the performances are indecent and ugly, some only dull; others are pretty, funny, and attractive. games are popular. cricket-matches, where a hundred played upon a side, endured at times for weeks, and ate up the country like the presence of an army. fishing, the daily bath, flirtation; courtship, which is gone upon by proxy; conversation, which is largely political; and the delights of public oratory, fill in the long hours. but the special delight of the samoan is the _malanga_. when people form a party and go from village to village, junketing and gossiping, they are said to go on a _malanga_. their songs have announced their approach ere they arrive; the guest-house is prepared for their reception; the virgins of the village attend to prepare the kava bowl and entertain them with the dance; time flies in the enjoyment of every pleasure which an islander conceives; and when the _malanga_ sets forth, the same welcome and the same joys expect them beyond the next cape, where the nearest village nestles in its grove of palms. to the visitors it is all golden; for the hosts, it has another side. in one or two words of the language the fact peeps slyly out. the same word (_afemoeina_) expresses "a long call" and "to come as a calamity"; the same word (_lesolosolou_) signifies "to have no intermission of pain" and "to have no cessation, as in the arrival of visitors"; and _soua_, used of epidemics, bears the sense of being overcome as with "fire, flood, or visitors." but the gem of the dictionary is the verb _alovao_, which illustrates its pages like a humorous woodcut. it is used in the sense of "to avoid visitors," but it means literally "hide in the wood." so, by the sure hand of popular speech, we have the picture of the house deserted, the _malanga_ disappointed, and the host that should have been quaking in the bush. we are thus brought to the beginning of a series of traits of manners, highly curious in themselves, and essential to an understanding of the war. in samoa authority sits on the one hand entranced; on the other, property stands bound in the midst of chartered marauders. what property exists is vested in the family, not in the individual; and of the loose communism in which a family dwells, the dictionary may yet again help us to some idea. i find a string of verbs with the following senses: to deal leniently with, as in helping oneself from a family plantation; to give away without consulting other members of the family; to go to strangers for help instead of to relatives; to take from relatives without permission; to steal from relatives; to have plantations robbed by relatives. the ideal of conduct in the family, and some of its depravations, appear here very plainly. the man who (in a native word of praise) is _mata-ainga_, a race-regarder, has his hand always open to his kindred; the man who is not (in a native term of contempt) _noa_, knows always where to turn in any pinch of want or extremity of laziness. beggary within the family--and by the less self-respecting, without it--has thus grown into a custom and a scourge, and the dictionary teems with evidence of its abuse. special words signify the begging of food, of uncooked food, of fish, of pigs, of pigs for travellers, of pigs for stock, of taro, of taro-tops, of taro-tops for planting, of tools, of flyhooks, of implements for netting pigeons, and of mats. it is true the beggar was supposed in time to make a return, somewhat as by the roman contract of _mutuum_. but the obligation was only moral; it could not be, or was not, enforced; as a matter of fact, it was disregarded. the language had recently to borrow from the tahitians a word for debt; while by a significant excidence, it possessed a native expression for the failure to pay--"to omit to make a return for property begged." conceive now the position of the householder besieged by harpies, and all defence denied him by the laws of honour. the sacramental gesture of refusal, his last and single resource, was supposed to signify "my house is destitute." until that point was reached, in other words, the conduct prescribed for a samoan was to give and to continue giving. but it does not appear he was at all expected to give with a good grace. the dictionary is well stocked with expressions standing ready, like missiles, to be discharged upon the locusts--"troop of shamefaced ones," "you draw in your head like a tern," "you make your voice small like a whistle-pipe," "you beg like one delirious"; and the verb _pongitai_, "to look cross," is equipped with the pregnant rider, "as at the sight of beggars." this insolence of beggars and the weakness of proprietors can only be illustrated by examples. we have a girl in our service to whom we had given some finery, that she might wait at table, and (at her own request) some warm clothing against the cold mornings of the bush. she went on a visit to her family, and returned in an old tablecloth, her whole wardrobe having been divided out among relatives in the course of twenty-four hours. a pastor in the province of atua, being a handy, busy man, bought a boat for a hundred dollars, fifty of which he paid down. presently after, relatives came to him upon a visit and took a fancy to his new possession. "we have long been wanting a boat," said they. "give us this one." so, when the visit was done, they departed in the boat. the pastor, meanwhile, travelled into savaii the best way he could, sold a parcel of land, and begged mats among his other relatives, to pay the remainder of the price of the boat which was no longer his. you might think this was enough; but some months later, the harpies, having broken a thwart, brought back the boat to be repaired and repainted by the original owner. such customs, it might be argued, being double-edged, will ultimately right themselves. but it is otherwise in practice. such folk as the pastor's harpy relatives will generally have a boat, and will never have paid for it; such men as the pastor may have sometimes paid for a boat, but they will never have one. it is there as it is with us at home: the measure of the abuse of either system is the blackness of the individual heart. the same man, who would drive his poor relatives from his own door in england, would besiege in samoa the doors of the rich; and the essence of the dishonesty in either case is to pursue one's own advantage and to be indifferent to the losses of one's neighbour. but the particular drawback of the polynesian system is to depress and stagger industry. to work more is there only to be more pillaged; to save is impossible. the family has then made a good day of it when all are filled and nothing remains over for the crew of free-booters; and the injustice of the system begins to be recognised even in samoa. one native is said to have amassed a certain fortune; two clever lads have individually expressed to us their discontent with a system which taxes industry to pamper idleness; and i hear that in one village of savaii a law has been passed forbidding gifts under the penalty of a sharp fine. under this economic regimen, the unpopularity of taxes, which strike all at the same time, which expose the industrious to a perfect siege of mendicancy, and the lazy to be actually condemned to a day's labour, may be imagined without words. it is more important to note the concurrent relaxation of all sense of property. from applying for help to kinsmen who are scarce permitted to refuse, it is but a step to taking from them (in the dictionary phrase) "without permission"; from that to theft at large is but a hair's-breadth. chapter ii the elements of discord: foreign the huge majority of samoans, like other god-fearing folk in other countries, are perfectly content with their own manners. and upon one condition, it is plain they might enjoy themselves far beyond the average of man. seated in islands very rich in food, the idleness of the many idle would scarce matter; and the provinces might continue to bestow their names among rival pretenders, and fall into war and enjoy that a while, and drop into peace and enjoy that, in a manner highly to be envied. but the condition--that they should be let alone--is now no longer possible. more than a hundred years ago, and following closely on the heels of cook, an irregular invasion of adventurers began to swarm about the isles of the pacific. the seven sleepers of polynesia stand, still but half aroused, in the midst of the century of competition. and the island races, comparable to a shopful of crockery launched upon the stream of time, now fall to make their desperate voyage among pots of brass and adamant. apia, the port and mart, is the seat of the political sickness of samoa. at the foot of a peaked, woody mountain, the coast makes a deep indent, roughly semicircular. in front the barrier reef is broken by the fresh water of the streams; if the swell be from the north, it enters almost without diminution; and the war-ships roll dizzily at their moorings, and along the fringing coral which follows the configuration of the beach, the surf breaks with a continuous uproar. in wild weather, as the world knows, the roads are untenable. along the whole shore, which is everywhere green and level and overlooked by inland mountain-tops, the town lies drawn out in strings and clusters. the western horn is mulinuu, the eastern, matautu; and from one to the other of these extremes, i ask the reader to walk. he will find more of the history of samoa spread before his eyes in that excursion, than has yet been collected in the blue-books or the white-books of the world. mulinuu (where the walk is to begin) is a flat, wind-swept promontory, planted with palms, backed against a swamp of mangroves, and occupied by a rather miserable village. the reader is informed that this is the proper residence of the samoan kings; he will be the more surprised to observe a board set up, and to read that this historic village is the property of the german firm. but these boards, which are among the commonest features of the landscape, may be rather taken to imply that the claim has been disputed. a little farther east he skirts the stores, offices, and barracks of the firm itself. thence he will pass through matafele, the one really town-like portion of this long string of villages, by german bars and stores and the german consulate; and reach the catholic mission and cathedral standing by the mouth of a small river. the bridge which crosses here (bridge of mulivai) is a frontier; behind is matafele; beyond, apia proper; behind, germans are supreme; beyond, with but few exceptions, all is anglo-saxon. here the reader will go forward past the stores of mr. moors (american) and messrs. macarthur (english); past the english mission, the office of the english newspaper, the english church, and the old american consulate, till he reaches the mouth of a larger river, the vaisingano. beyond, in matautu, his way takes him in the shade of many trees and by scattered dwellings, and presently brings him beside a great range of offices, the place and the monument of a german who fought the german firm during his life. his house (now he is dead) remains pointed like a discharged cannon at the citadel of his old enemies. fitly enough, it is at present leased and occupied by englishmen. a little farther, and the reader gains the eastern flanking angle of the bay, where stands the pilot-house and signal-post, and whence he can see, on the line of the main coast of the island, the british and the new american consulates. the course of his walk will have been enlivened by a considerable to and fro of pleasure and business. he will have encountered many varieties of whites,--sailors, merchants, clerks, priests, protestant missionaries in their pith helmets, and the nondescript hangers-on of any island beach. and the sailors are sometimes in considerable force; but not the residents. he will think at times there are more signboards than men to own them. it may chance it is a full day in the harbour; he will then have seen all manner of ships, from men-of-war and deep-sea packets to the labour vessels of the german firm and the cockboat island schooner; and if he be of an arithmetical turn, he may calculate that there are more whites afloat in apia bay than whites ashore in the whole archipelago. on the other hand, he will have encountered all ranks of natives, chiefs and pastors in their scrupulous white clothes; perhaps the king himself, attended by guards in uniform; smiling policemen with their pewter stars; girls, women, crowds of cheerful children. and he will have asked himself with some surprise where these reside. here and there, in the back yards of european establishments, he may have had a glimpse of a native house elbowed in a corner; but since he left mulinuu, none on the beach where islanders prefer to live, scarce one on the line of street. the handful of whites have everything; the natives walk in a foreign town. a year ago, on a knoll behind a bar-room, he might have observed a native house guarded by sentries and flown over by the standard of samoa. he would then have been told it was the seat of government, driven (as i have to relate) over the mulivai and from beyond the german town into the anglo-saxon. to-day, he will learn it has been carted back again to its old quarters. and he will think it significant that the king of the islands should be thus shuttled to and fro in his chief city at the nod of aliens. and then he will observe a feature more significant still: a house with some concourse of affairs, policemen and idlers hanging by, a man at a bank-counter overhauling manifests, perhaps a trial proceeding in the front verandah, or perhaps the council breaking up in knots after a stormy sitting. and he will remember that he is in the _eleele sa_, the "forbidden soil," or neutral territory of the treaties; that the magistrate whom he has just seen trying native criminals is no officer of the native king's; and that this, the only port and place of business in the kingdom, collects and administers its own revenue for its own behoof by the hands of white councillors and under the supervision of white consuls. let him go further afield. he will find the roads almost everywhere to cease or to be made impassable by native pig-fences, bridges to be quite unknown, and houses of the whites to become at once a rare exception. set aside the german plantations, and the frontier is sharp. at the boundary of the _eleele sa_, europe ends, samoa begins. here, then, is a singular state of affairs: all the money, luxury, and business of the kingdom centred in one place; that place excepted from the native government and administered by whites for whites; and the whites themselves holding it not in common but in hostile camps, so that it lies between them like a bone between two dogs, each growling, each clutching his own end. should apia ever choose a coat of arms, i have a motto ready: "enter rumour painted full of tongues." the majority of the natives do extremely little; the majority of the whites are merchants with some four mails in the month, shopkeepers with some ten or twenty customers a day, and gossip is the common resource of all. the town hums to the day's news, and the bars are crowded with amateur politicians. some are office-seekers, and earwig king and consul, and compass the fall of officials, with an eye to salary. some are humorists, delighted with the pleasure of faction for itself. "i never saw so good a place as this apia," said one of these; "you can be in a new conspiracy every day!" many, on the other hand, are sincerely concerned for the future of the country. the quarters are so close and the scale is so small, that perhaps not any one can be trusted always to preserve his temper. every one tells everything he knows; that is our country sickness. nearly every one has been betrayed at times, and told a trifle more; the way our sickness takes the predisposed. and the news flies, and the tongues wag, and fists are shaken. pot boil and caldron bubble! within the memory of man, the white people of apia lay in the worst squalor of degradation. they are now unspeakably improved, both men and women. to-day they must be called a more than fairly respectable population, and a much more than fairly intelligent. the whole would probably not fill the ranks of even an english half-battalion, yet there are a surprising number above the average in sense, knowledge, and manners. the trouble (for samoa) is that they are all here after a livelihood. some are sharp practitioners, some are famous (justly or not) for foul play in business. tales fly. one merchant warns you against his neighbour; the neighbour on the first occasion is found to return the compliment: each with a good circumstantial story to the proof. there is so much copra in the islands, and no more; a man's share of it is his share of bread; and commerce, like politics, is here narrowed to a focus, shows its ugly side, and becomes as personal as fisticuffs. close at their elbows, in all this contention, stands the native looking on. like a child, his true analogue, he observes, apprehends, misapprehends, and is usually silent. as in a child, a considerable intemperance of speech is accompanied by some power of secrecy. news he publishes; his thoughts have often to be dug for. he looks on at the rude career of the dollar-hunt, and wonders. he sees these men rolling in a luxury beyond the ambition of native kings; he hears them accused by each other of the meanest trickery; he knows some of them to be guilty; and what is he to think? he is strongly conscious of his own position as the common milk-cow; and what is he to do? "surely these white men on the beach are not great chiefs?" is a common question, perhaps asked with some design of flattering the person questioned. and one, stung by the last incident into an unusual flow of english, remarked to me: "i begin to be weary of white men on the beach." but the true centre of trouble, the head of the boil of which samoa languishes, is the german firm. from the conditions of business, a great island house must ever be an inheritance of care; and it chances that the greatest still afoot has its chief seat in apia bay, and has sunk the main part of its capital in the island of upolu. when its founder, john cæsar godeffroy, went bankrupt over russian paper and westphalian iron, his most considerable asset was found to be the south sea business. this passed (i understand) through the hands of baring brothers in london, and is now run by a company rejoicing in the gargantuan name of the _deutsche handels und plantagen gesellschaft für süd-see inseln zu hamburg_. this piece of literature is (in practice) shortened to the d.h. and p.g., the old firm, the german firm, the firm, and (among humorists) the long handle firm. even from the deck of an approaching ship, the island is seen to bear its signature--zones of cultivation showing in a more vivid tint of green on the dark vest of forest. the total area in use is near ten thousand acres. hedges of fragrant lime enclose, broad avenues intersect them. you shall walk for hours in parks of palm-tree alleys, regular, like soldiers on parade; in the recesses of the hills you may stumble on a mill-house, toiling and trembling there, fathoms deep in superincumbent forest. on the carpet of clean sward, troops of horses and herds of handsome cattle may be seen to browse; and to one accustomed to the rough luxuriance of the tropics, the appearance is of fairyland. the managers, many of them german sea-captains, are enthusiastic in their new employment. experiment is continually afoot: coffee and cacao, both of excellent quality, are among the more recent outputs; and from one plantation quantities of pineapples are sent at a particular season to the sydney markets. a hundred and fifty thousand pounds of english money, perhaps two hundred thousand, lie sunk in these magnificent estates. in estimating the expense of maintenance quite a fleet of ships must be remembered, and a strong staff of captains, supercargoes, overseers, and clerks. these last mess together at a liberal board; the wages are high, and the staff is inspired with a strong and pleasing sentiment of loyalty to their employers. seven or eight hundred imported men and women toil for the company on contracts of three or of five years, and at a hypothetical wage of a few dollars in the month. i am now on a burning question: the labour traffic; and i shall ask permission in this place only to touch it with the tongs. suffice it to say that in queensland, fiji, new caledonia, and hawaii it has been either suppressed or placed under close public supervision. in samoa, where it still flourishes, there is no regulation of which the public receives any evidence; and the dirty linen of the firm, if there be any dirty, and if it be ever washed at all, is washed in private. this is unfortunate, if germans would believe it. but they have no idea of publicity, keep their business to themselves, rather affect to "move in a mysterious way," and are naturally incensed by criticisms, which they consider hypocritical, from men who would import "labour" for themselves, if they could afford it, and would probably maltreat them if they dared. it is said the whip is very busy on some of the plantations; it is said that punitive extra-labour, by which the thrall's term of service is extended, has grown to be an abuse; and it is complained that, even where that term is out, much irregularity occurs in the repatriation of the discharged. to all this i can say nothing, good or bad. a certain number of the thralls, many of them wild negritos from the west, have taken to the bush, harbour there in a state partly bestial, or creep into the back quarters of the town to do a day's stealthy labour under the nose of their proprietors. twelve were arrested one morning in my own boys' kitchen. farther in the bush, huts, small patches of cultivation, and smoking ovens, have been found by hunters. there are still three runaways in the woods of tutuila, whither they escaped upon a raft. and the samoans regard these dark-skinned rangers with extreme alarm; the fourth refugee in tutuila was shot down (as i was told in that island) while carrying off the virgin of a village; and tales of cannibalism run round the country, and the natives shudder about the evening fire. for the samoans are not cannibals, do not seem to remember when they were, and regard the practice with a disfavour equal to our own. the firm is gulliver among the lilliputs; and it must not be forgotten, that while the small, independent traders are fighting for their own hand, and inflamed with the usual jealousy against corporations, the germans are inspired with a sense of the greatness of their affairs and interests. the thought of the money sunk, the sight of these costly and beautiful plantations, menaced yearly by the returning forest, and the responsibility of administering with one hand so many conjunct fortunes, might well nerve the manager of such a company for desperate and questionable deeds. upon this scale, commercial sharpness has an air of patriotism; and i can imagine the man, so far from higgling over the scourge for a few solomon islanders, prepared to oppress rival firms, overthrow inconvenient monarchs, and let loose the dogs of war. whatever he may decide, he will not want for backing. every clerk will be eager to be up and strike a blow; and most germans in the group, whatever they may babble of the firm over the walnuts and the wine, will rally round the national concern at the approach of difficulty. they are so few--i am ashamed to give their number, it were to challenge contradiction--they are so few, and the amount of national capital buried at their feet is so vast, that we must not wonder if they seem oppressed with greatness and the sense of empire. other whites take part in our brabbles, while temper holds out, with a certain schoolboy entertainment. in the germans alone, no trace of humour is to be observed, and their solemnity is accompanied by a touchiness often beyond belief. patriotism flies in arms about a hen; and if you comment upon the colour of a dutch umbrella, you have cast a stone against the german emperor. i give one instance, typical although extreme. one who had returned from tutuila on the mail cutter complained of the vermin with which she is infested. he was suddenly and sharply brought to a stand. the ship of which he spoke, he was reminded, was a german ship. john cæsar godeffroy himself had never visited the islands; his sons and nephews came, indeed, but scarcely to reap laurels; and the mainspring and headpiece of this great concern, until death took him, was a certain remarkable man of the name of theodor weber. he was of an artful and commanding character; in the smallest thing or the greatest, without fear or scruple; equally able to affect, equally ready to adopt, the most engaging politeness or the most imperious airs of domination. it was he who did most damage to rival traders; it was he who most harried the samoans; and yet i never met any one, white or native, who did not respect his memory. all felt it was a gallant battle, and the man a great fighter; and now when he is dead, and the war seems to have gone against him, many can scarce remember, without a kind of regret, how much devotion and audacity have been spent in vain. his name still lives in the songs of samoa. one, that i have heard, tells of _misi ueba_ and a biscuit-box--the suggesting incident being long since forgotten. another sings plaintively how all things, land and food and property, pass progressively, as by a law of nature, into the hands of _misi ueba_, and soon nothing will be left for samoans. this is an epitaph the man would have enjoyed. at one period of his career, weber combined the offices of director of the firm and consul for the city of hamburg. no question but he then drove very hard. germans admit that the combination was unfortunate; and it was a german who procured its overthrow. captain zembsch superseded him with an imperial appointment, one still remembered in samoa as "the gentleman who acted justly." there was no house to be found, and the new consul must take up his quarters at first under the same roof with weber. on several questions, in which the firm was vitally interested, zembsch embraced the contrary opinion. riding one day with an englishman in vailele plantation, he was startled by a burst of screaming, leaped from the saddle, ran round a house, and found an overseer beating one of the thralls. he punished the overseer, and, being a kindly and perhaps not a very diplomatic man, talked high of what he felt and what he might consider it his duty to forbid or to enforce. the firm began to look askance at such a consul; and worse was behind. a number of deeds being brought to the consulate for registration, zembsch detected certain transfers of land in which the date, the boundaries, the measure, and the consideration were all blank. he refused them with an indignation which he does not seem to have been able to keep to himself; and, whether or not by his fault, some of these unfortunate documents became public. it was plain that the relations between the two flanks of the german invasion, the diplomatic and the commercial, were strained to bursting. but weber was a man ill to conquer. zembsch was recalled; and from that time forth, whether through influence at home, or by the solicitations of weber on the spot, the german consulate has shown itself very apt to play the game of the german firm. that game, we may say, was twofold,--the first part even praiseworthy, the second at least natural. on the one part, they desired an efficient native administration, to open up the country and punish crime; they wished, on the other, to extend their own provinces and to curtail the dealings of their rivals. in the first, they had the jealous and diffident sympathy of all whites; in the second, they had all whites banded together against them for their lives and livelihoods. it was thus a game of _beggar my neighbour_ between a large merchant and some small ones. had it so remained, it would still have been a cut-throat quarrel. but when the consulate appeared to be concerned, when the war-ships of the german empire were thought to fetch and carry for the firm, the rage of the independent traders broke beyond restraint. and, largely from the national touchiness and the intemperate speech of german clerks, this scramble among dollar-hunters assumed the appearance of an inter-racial war. the firm, with the indomitable weber at its head and the consulate at its back--there has been the chief enemy at samoa. no english reader can fail to be reminded of john company; and if the germans appear to have been not so successful, we can only wonder that our own blunders and brutalities were less severely punished. even on the field of samoa, though german faults and aggressions make up the burthen of my story, they have been nowise alone. three nations were engaged in this infinitesimal affray, and not one appears with credit. they figure but as the three ruffians of the elder playwrights. the united states have the cleanest hands, and even theirs are not immaculate. it was an ambiguous business when a private american adventurer was landed with his pieces of artillery from an american war-ship, and became prime minister to the king. it is true (even if he were ever really supported) that he was soon dropped and had soon sold himself for money to the german firm. i will leave it to the reader whether this trait dignifies or not the wretched story. and the end of it spattered the credit alike of england and the states, when this man (the premier of a friendly sovereign) was kidnapped and deported, on the requisition of an american consul, by the captain of an english war-ship. i shall have to tell, as i proceed, of villages shelled on very trifling grounds by germans; the like has been done of late years, though in a better quarrel, by ourselves of england. i shall have to tell how the germans landed and shed blood at fangalii; it was only in that we british had our own misconceived little massacre at mulinuu. i shall have to tell how the germans bludgeoned malietoa with a sudden call for money; it was something of the suddenest that sir arthur gordon himself, smarting under a sensible public affront, made and enforced a somewhat similar demand. chapter iii the sorrows of laupepa, to you ride in a german plantation and see no bush, no soul stirring; only acres of empty sward, miles of cocoa-nut alley: a desert of food. in the eyes of the samoan the place has the attraction of a park for the holiday schoolboy, of a granary for mice. we must add the yet more lively allurement of a haunted house, for over these empty and silent miles there broods the fear of the negrito cannibal. for the samoan besides, there is something barbaric, unhandsome, and absurd in the idea of thus growing food only to send it from the land and sell it. a man at home who should turn all yorkshire into one wheatfield, and annually burn his harvest on the altar of mumbo-jumbo, might impress ourselves not much otherwise. and the firm which does these things is quite extraneous, a wen that might be excised to-morrow without loss but to itself; few natives drawing from it so much as day's wages; and the rest beholding in it only the occupier of their acres. the nearest villages have suffered most; they see over the hedge the lands of their ancestors waving with useless cocoa-palms; and the sales were often questionable, and must still more often appear so to regretful natives, spinning and improving yarns about the evening lamp. at the worst, then, to help oneself from the plantation will seem to a samoan very like orchard-breaking to the british schoolboy; at the best, it will be thought a gallant robin-hoodish readjustment of a public wrong. and there is more behind. not only is theft from the plantations regarded rather as a lark and peccadillo, the idea of theft in itself is not very clearly present to these communists; and as to the punishment of crime in general, a great gulf of opinion divides the natives from ourselves. indigenous punishments were short and sharp. death, deportation by the primitive method of setting the criminal to sea in a canoe, fines, and in samoa itself the penalty of publicly biting a hot, ill-smelling root, comparable to a rough forfeit in a children's game--these are approved. the offender is killed, or punished and forgiven. we, on the other hand, harbour malice for a period of years: continuous shame attaches to the criminal; even when he is doing his best--even when he is submitting to the worst form of torture, regular work--he is to stand aside from life and from his family in dreadful isolation. these ideas most polynesians have accepted in appearance, as they accept other ideas of the whites; in practice, they reduce it to a farce. i have heard the french resident in the marquesas in talk with the french gaoler of tai-o-hae: "_eh bien, où sont vos prisonnières?--je crois, mon commandant, qu'elles sont allées quelque part faire une visite_." and the ladies would be welcome. this is to take the most savage of polynesians; take some of the most civilised. in honolulu, convicts labour on the highways in piebald clothing, gruesome and ridiculous; and it is a common sight to see the family of such an one troop out, about the dinner hour, wreathed with flowers and in their holiday best, to picnic with their kinsman on the public wayside. the application of these outlandish penalties, in fact, transfers the sympathy to the offender. remember, besides, that the clan system, and that imperfect idea of justice which is its worst feature, are still lively in samoa; that it is held the duty of a judge to favour kinsmen, of a king to protect his vassals; and the difficulty of getting a plantation thief first caught, then convicted, and last of all punished, will appear. during the early 'eighties, the germans looked upon this system with growing irritation. they might see their convict thrust in gaol by the front door; they could never tell how soon he was enfranchised by the back; and they need not be the least surprised if they met him, a few days after, enjoying the delights of a _malanga_. it was a banded conspiracy, from the king and the vice-king downward, to evade the law and deprive the germans of their profits. in , accordingly, the consul, dr. stuebel, extorted a convention on the subject, in terms of which samoans convicted of offences against german subjects were to be confined in a private gaol belonging to the german firm. to dr. stuebel it seemed simple enough: the offenders were to be effectually punished, the sufferers partially indemnified. to the samoans, the thing appeared no less simple, but quite different: "malietoa was selling samoans to misi ueba." what else could be expected? here was a private corporation engaged in making money; to it was delegated, upon a question of profit and loss, one of the functions of the samoan crown; and those who make anomalies must look for comments. public feeling ran unanimous and high. prisoners who escaped from the private gaol were not recaptured or not returned, and malietoa hastened to build a new prison of his own, whither he conveyed, or pretended to convey, the fugitives. in october a trenchant state paper issued from the german consulate. twenty prisoners, the consul wrote, had now been at large for eight months from weber's prison. it was pretended they had since then completed their term of punishment elsewhere. dr. stuebel did not seek to conceal his incredulity; but he took ground beyond; he declared the point irrelevant. the law was to be enforced. the men were condemned to a certain period in weber's prison; they had run away; they must now be brought back and (whatever had become of them in the interval) work out the sentence. doubtless dr. stuebel's demands were substantially just; but doubtless also they bore from the outside a great appearance of harshness; and when the king submitted, the murmurs of the people increased. but weber was not yet content. the law had to be enforced; property, or at least the property of the firm, must be respected. and during an absence of the consul's, he seems to have drawn up with his own hand, and certainly first showed to the king, in his own house, a new convention. weber here and weber there. as an able man, he was perhaps in the right to prepare and propose conventions. as the head of a trading company, he seems far out of his part to be communicating state papers to a sovereign. the administration of justice was the colour, and i am willing to believe the purpose, of the new paper; but its effect was to depose the existing government. a council of two germans and two samoans were to be invested with the right to make laws and impose taxes as might be "desirable for the common interest of the samoan government and the german residents." the provisions of this council the king and vice-king were to sign blindfold. and by a last hardship, the germans, who received all the benefit, reserved a right to recede from the agreement on six months' notice; the samoans, who suffered all the loss, were bound by it in perpetuity. i can never believe that my friend dr. stuebel had a hand in drafting these proposals; i am only surprised he should have been a party to enforcing them, perhaps the chief error in these islands of a man who has made few. and they were enforced with a rigour that seems injudicious. the samoans (according to their own account) were denied a copy of the document; they were certainly rated and threatened; their deliberation was treated as contumacy; two german war-ships lay in port, and it was hinted that these would shortly intervene. succeed in frightening a child, and he takes refuge in duplicity. "malietoa," one of the chiefs had written, "we know well we are in bondage to the great governments." it was now thought one tyrant might be better than three, and any one preferable to germany. on the th november , accordingly, laupepa, tamasese, and forty-eight high chiefs met in secret, and the supremacy of samoa was secretly offered to great britain for the second time in history. laupepa and tamasese still figured as king and vice-king in the eyes of dr. stuebel; in their own, they had secretly abdicated, were become private persons, and might do what they pleased without binding or dishonouring their country. on the morrow, accordingly, they did public humiliation in the dust before the consulate, and five days later signed the convention. the last was done, it is claimed, upon an impulse. the humiliation, which it appeared to the samoans so great a thing to offer, to the practical mind of dr. stuebel seemed a trifle to receive; and the pressure was continued and increased. laupepa and tamasese were both heavy, well-meaning, inconclusive men. laupepa, educated for the ministry, still bears some marks of it in character and appearance; tamasese was in private of an amorous and sentimental turn, but no one would have guessed it from his solemn and dull countenance. impossible to conceive two less dashing champions for a threatened race; and there is no doubt they were reduced to the extremity of muddlement and childish fear. it was drawing towards night on the th, when this luckless pair and a chief of the name of tuiatafu, set out for the german consulate, still minded to temporise. as they went, they discussed their case with agitation. they could see the lights of the german war-ships as they walked--an eloquent reminder. and it was then that tamasese proposed to sign the convention. "it will give us peace for the day," said laupepa, "and afterwards great britain must decide."--"better fight germany than that!" cried tuiatafu, speaking words of wisdom, and departed in anger. but the two others proceeded on their fatal errand; signed the convention, writing themselves king and vice-king, as they now believed themselves to be no longer; and with childish perfidy took part in a scene of "reconciliation" at the german consulate. malietoa supposed himself betrayed by tamasese. consul churchward states with precision that the document was sold by a scribe for thirty-six dollars. twelve days later at least, november nd, the text of the address to great britain came into the hands of dr. stuebel. the germans may have been wrong before; they were now in the right to be angry. they had been publicly, solemnly, and elaborately fooled; the treaty and the reconciliation were both fraudulent, with the broad, farcical fraudulency of children and barbarians. this history is much from the outside; it is the digested report of eye-witnesses; it can be rarely corrected from state papers; and as to what consuls felt and thought, or what instructions they acted under, i must still be silent or proceed by guess. it is my guess that stuebel now decided malietoa laupepa to be a man impossible to trust and unworthy to be dealt with. and it is certain that the business of his deposition was put in hand at once. the position of weber, with his knowledge of things native, his prestige, and his enterprising intellect, must have always made him influential with the consul: at this juncture he was indispensable. here was the deed to be done; here the man of action. "mr. weber rested not," says laupepa. it was "like the old days of his own consulate," writes churchward. his messengers filled the isle; his house was thronged with chiefs and orators; he sat close over his loom, delightedly weaving the future. there was one thing requisite to the intrigue,--a native pretender; and the very man, you would have said, stood waiting: mataafa, titular of atua, descended from both the royal lines, late joint king with tamasese, fobbed off with nothing in the time of the lackawanna treaty, probably mortified by the circumstance, a chief with a strong following, and in character and capacity high above the native average. yet when weber's spiriting was done, and the curtain rose on the set scene of the coronation, mataafa was absent, and tamasese stood in his place. malietoa was to be deposed for a piece of solemn and offensive trickery, and the man selected to replace him was his sole partner and accomplice in the act. for so strange a choice, good ground must have existed; but it remains conjectural: some supposing mataafa scratched as too independent; others that tamasese had indeed betrayed laupepa, and his new advancement was the price of his treachery. so these two chiefs began to change places like the scales of a balance, one down, the other up. tamasese raised his flag (jan. th, ) in leulumoenga, chief place of his own province of aana, usurped the style of king, and began to collect and arm a force. weber, by the admission of stuebel, was in the market supplying him with weapons; so were the americans; so, but for our salutary british law, would have been the british; for wherever there is a sound of battle, there will the traders be gathered together selling arms. a little longer, and we find tamasese visited and addressed as king and majesty by a german commodore. meanwhile, for the unhappy malietoa, the road led downward. he was refused a bodyguard. he was turned out of mulinuu, the seat of his royalty, on a land claim of weber's, fled across the mulivai, and "had the coolness" (german expression) to hoist his flag in apia. he was asked "in the most polite manner," says the same account--"in the most delicate manner in the world," a reader of marryat might be tempted to amend the phrase,--to strike his flag in his own capital; and on his "refusal to accede to this request," dr. stuebel appeared himself with ten men and an officer from the cruiser _albatross_; a sailor climbed into the tree and brought down the flag of samoa, which was carefully folded, and sent, "in the most polite manner," to its owner. the consuls of england and the states were there (the excellent gentlemen!) to protest. last, and yet more explicit, the german commodore who visited the be-titled tamasese, addressed the king--we may surely say the late king--as "the high chief malietoa." had he no party, then? at that time, it is probable, he might have called some five-sevenths of samoa to his standard. and yet he sat there, helpless monarch, like a fowl trussed for roasting. the blame lies with himself, because he was a helpless creature; it lies also with england and the states. their agents on the spot preached peace (where there was no peace, and no pretence of it) with eloquence and iteration. secretary bayard seems to have felt a call to join personally in the solemn farce, and was at the expense of a telegram in which he assured the sinking monarch it was "for the higher interests of samoa" he should do nothing. there was no man better at doing that; the advice came straight home, and was devoutly followed. and to be just to the great powers, something was done in europe; a conference was called, it was agreed to send commissioners to samoa, and the decks had to be hastily cleared against their visit. dr. stuebel had attached the municipality of apia and hoisted the german war-flag over mulinuu; the american consul (in a sudden access of good service) had flown the stars and stripes over samoan colours; on either side these steps were solemnly retracted. the germans expressly disowned tamasese; and the islands fell into a period of suspense, of some twelve months' duration, during which the seat of the history was transferred to other countries and escapes my purview. here on the spot, i select three incidents: the arrival on the scene of a new actor, the visit of the hawaiian embassy, and the riot on the emperor's birthday. the rest shall be silence; only it must be borne in view that tamasese all the while continued to strengthen himself in leulumoenga, and laupepa sat inactive listening to the song of consuls. _captain brandeis_. the new actor was brandeis, a bavarian captain of artillery, of a romantic and adventurous character. he had served with credit in war; but soon wearied of garrison life, resigned his battery, came to the states, found employment as a civil engineer, visited cuba, took a sub-contract on the panama canal, caught the fever, and came (for the sake of the sea voyage) to australia. he had that natural love for the tropics which lies so often latent in persons of a northern birth; difficulty and danger attracted him; and when he was picked out for secret duty, to be the hand of germany in samoa, there is no doubt but he accepted the post with exhilaration. it is doubtful if a better choice could have been made. he had courage, integrity, ideas of his own, and loved the employment, the people, and the place. yet there was a fly in the ointment. the double error of unnecessary stealth and of the immixture of a trading company in political affairs, has vitiated, and in the end defeated, much german policy. and brandeis was introduced to the islands as a clerk, and sent down to leulumoenga (where he was soon drilling the troops and fortifying the position of the rebel king) as an agent of the german firm. what this mystification cost in the end i shall tell in another place; and even in the beginning, it deceived no one. brandeis is a man of notable personal appearance; he looks the part allotted him; and the military clerk was soon the centre of observation and rumour. malietoa wrote and complained of his presence to becker, who had succeeded dr. stuebel in the consulate. becker replied, "i have nothing to do with the gentleman brandeis. be it well known that the gentleman brandeis has no appointment in a military character, but resides peaceably assisting the government of leulumoenga in their work, for brandeis is a quiet, sensible gentleman." and then he promised to send the vice-consul to "get information of the captain's doings": surely supererogation of deceit. _the hawaiian embassy_. the prime minister of the hawaiian kingdom was, at this period, an adventurer of the name of gibson. he claimed, on the strength of a romantic story, to be the heir of a great english house. he had played a part in a revolt in java, had languished in dutch fetters, and had risen to be a trusted agent of brigham young, the utah president. it was in this character of a mormon emissary that he first came to the islands of hawaii, where he collected a large sum of money for the church of the latter day saints. at a given moment, he dropped his saintship and appeared as a christian and the owner of a part of the island of lanai. the steps of the transformation are obscure; they seem, at least, to have been ill-received at salt lake; and there is evidence to the effect that he was followed to the islands by mormon assassins. his first attempt on politics was made under the auspices of what is called the missionary party, and the canvass conducted largely (it is said with tears) on the platform at prayer-meetings. it resulted in defeat. without any decency of delay he changed his colours, abjured the errors of reform, and, with the support of the catholics, rose to the chief power. in a very brief interval he had thus run through the gamut of religions in the south seas. it does not appear that he was any more particular in politics, but he was careful to consult the character and prejudices of the late king, kalakaua. that amiable, far from unaccomplished, but too convivial sovereign, had a continued use for money: gibson was observant to keep him well supplied. kalakaua (one of the most theoretical of men) was filled with visionary schemes for the protection and development of the polynesian race: gibson fell in step with him; it is even thought he may have shared in his illusions. the king and minister at least conceived between them a scheme of island confederation--the most obvious fault of which was that it came too late--and armed and fitted out the cruiser _kaimiloa_, nest-egg of the future navy of hawaii. samoa, the most important group still independent, and one immediately threatened with aggression, was chosen for the scene of action. the hon. john e. bush, a half-caste hawaiian, sailed (december ) for apia as minister-plenipotentiary, accompanied by a secretary of legation, henry f. poor; and as soon as she was ready for sea, the war-ship followed in support. the expedition was futile in its course, almost tragic in result. the _kaimiloa_ was from the first a scene of disaster and dilapidation: the stores were sold; the crew revolted; for a great part of a night she was in the hands of mutineers, and the secretary lay bound upon the deck. the mission, installing itself at first with extravagance in matautu, was helped at last out of the island by the advances of a private citizen. and they returned from dreams of polynesian independence to find their own city in the hands of a clique of white shopkeepers, and the great gibson once again in gaol. yet the farce had not been quite without effect. it had encouraged the natives for the moment, and it seems to have ruffled permanently the temper of the germans. so might a fly irritate cæsar. the arrival of a mission from hawaii would scarce affect the composure of the courts of europe. but in the eyes of polynesians the little kingdom occupies a place apart. it is there alone that men of their race enjoy most of the advantages and all the pomp of independence; news of hawaii and descriptions of honolulu are grateful topics in all parts of the south seas; and there is no better introduction than a photograph in which the bearer shall be represented in company with kalakaua. laupepa was, besides, sunk to the point at which an unfortunate begins to clutch at straws, and he received the mission with delight. letters were exchanged between him and kalakaua; a deed of confederation was signed, th february , and the signature celebrated in the new house of the hawaiian embassy with some original ceremonies. malietoa laupepa came, attended by his ministry, several hundred chiefs, two guards, and six policemen. always decent, he withdrew at an early hour; by those that remained, all decency appears to have been forgotten; high chiefs were seen to dance; and day found the house carpeted with slumbering grandees, who must be roused, doctored with coffee, and sent home. as a first chapter in the history of polynesian confederation, it was hardly cheering, and laupepa remarked to one of the embassy, with equal dignity and sense: "if you have come here to teach my people to drink, i wish you had stayed away." the germans looked on from the first with natural irritation that a power of the powerlessness of hawaii should thus profit by its undeniable footing in the family of nations, and send embassies, and make believe to have a navy, and bark and snap at the heels of the great german empire. but becker could not prevent the hunted laupepa from taking refuge in any hole that offered, and he could afford to smile at the fantastic orgie in the embassy. it was another matter when the hawaiians approached the intractable mataafa, sitting still in his atua government like achilles in his tent, helping neither side, and (as the germans suspected) keeping the eggs warm for himself. when the _kaimiloa_ steamed out of apia on this visit, the german war-ship _adler_ followed at her heels; and mataafa was no sooner set down with the embassy than he was summoned and ordered on board by two german officers. the step is one of those triumphs of temper which can only be admired. mataafa is entertaining the plenipotentiary of a sovereign power in treaty with his own king, and the captain of a german corvette orders him to quit his guests. but there was worse to come. i gather that tamasese was at the time in the sulks. he had doubtless been promised prompt aid and a prompt success; he had seen himself surreptitiously helped, privately ordered about, and publicly disowned; and he was still the king of nothing more than his own province, and already the second in command of captain brandeis. with the adhesion of some part of his native cabinet, and behind the back of his white minister, he found means to communicate with the hawaiians. a passage on the _kaimiloa_, a pension, and a home in honolulu were the bribes proposed; and he seems to have been tempted. a day was set for a secret interview. poor, the hawaiian secretary, and j. d. strong, an american painter attached to the embassy in the surprising quality of "government artist," landed with a samoan boat's-crew in aana; and while the secretary hid himself, according to agreement, in the outlying home of an english settler, the artist (ostensibly bent on photography) entered the headquarters of the rebel king. it was a great day in leulumoenga; three hundred recruits had come in, a feast was cooking; and the photographer, in view of the native love of being photographed, was made entirely welcome. but beneath the friendly surface all were on the alert. the secret had leaked out: weber beheld his plans threatened in the root; brandeis trembled for the possession of his slave and sovereign; and the german vice-consul, mr. sonnenschein, had been sent or summoned to the scene of danger. it was after dark, prayers had been said and the hymns sung through all the village, and strong and the german sat together on the mats in the house of tamasese, when the events began. strong speaks german freely, a fact which he had not disclosed, and he was scarce more amused than embarrassed to be able to follow all the evening the dissension and the changing counsels of his neighbours. first the king himself was missing, and there was a false alarm that he had escaped and was already closeted with poor. next came certain intelligence that some of the ministry had run the blockade, and were on their way to the house of the english settler. thereupon, in spite of some protests from tamasese, who tried to defend the independence of his cabinet, brandeis gathered a posse of warriors, marched out of the village, brought back the fugitives, and clapped them in the corrugated iron shanty which served as gaol. along with these he seems to have seized billy coe, interpreter to the hawaiians; and poor, seeing his conspiracy public, burst with his boat's-crew into the town, made his way to the house of the native prime minister, and demanded coe's release. brandeis hastened to the spot, with strong at his heels; and the two principals being both incensed, and strong seriously alarmed for his friend's safety, there began among them a scene of great intemperance. at one point, when strong suddenly disclosed his acquaintance with german, it attained a high style of comedy; at another, when a pistol was most foolishly drawn, it bordered on drama; and it may be said to have ended in a mixed genus, when poor was finally packed into the corrugated iron gaol along with the forfeited ministers. meanwhile the captain of his boat, siteoni, of whom i shall have to tell again, had cleverly withdrawn the boat's-crew at an early stage of the quarrel. among the population beyond tamasese's marches, he collected a body of armed men, returned before dawn to leulumoenga, demolished the corrugated iron gaol, and liberated the hawaiian secretary and the rump of the rebel cabinet. no opposition was shown; and doubtless the rescue was connived at by brandeis, who had gained his point. poor had the face to complain the next day to becker; but to compete with becker in effrontery was labour lost. "you have been repeatedly warned, mr. poor, not to expose yourself among these savages," said he. not long after, the presence of the _kaimiloa_ was made a _casus belli_ by the germans; and the rough-and-tumble embassy withdrew, on borrowed money, to find their own government in hot water to the neck. * * * * * _the emperor's birthday_. it is possible, and it is alleged, that the germans entered into the conference with hope. but it is certain they were resolved to remain prepared for either fate. and i take the liberty of believing that laupepa was not forgiven his duplicity; that, during this interval, he stood marked like a tree for felling; and that his conduct was daily scrutinised for further pretexts of offence. on the evening of the emperor's birthday, march nd, , certain germans were congregated in a public bar. the season and the place considered, it is scarce cynical to assume they had been drinking; nor, so much being granted, can it be thought exorbitant to suppose them possibly in fault for the squabble that took place. a squabble, i say; but i am willing to call it a riot. and this was the new fault of laupepa; this it is that was described by a german commodore as "the trampling upon by malietoa of the german emperor." i pass the rhetoric by to examine the point of liability. four natives were brought to trial for this horrid fact: not before a native judge, but before the german magistrate of the tripartite municipality of apia. one was acquitted, one condemned for theft, and two for assault. on appeal, not to malietoa, but to the three consuls, the case was by a majority of two to one returned to the magistrate and (as far as i can learn) was then allowed to drop. consul becker himself laid the chief blame on one of the policemen of the municipality, a half-white of the name of scanlon. him he sought to have discharged, but was again baffled by his brother consuls. where, in all this, are we to find a corner of responsibility for the king of samoa? scanlon, the alleged author of the outrage, was a half-white; as becker was to learn to his cost, he claimed to be an american subject; and he was not even in the king's employment. apia, the scene of the outrage, was outside the king's jurisdiction by treaty; by the choice of germany, he was not so much as allowed to fly his flag there. and the denial of justice (if justice were denied) rested with the consuls of britain and the states. but when a dog is to be beaten, any stick will serve. in the meanwhile, on the proposition of mr. bayard, the washington conference on samoan affairs was adjourned till autumn, so that "the ministers of germany and great britain might submit the protocols to their respective governments." "you propose that the conference is to adjourn and not to be broken up?" asked sir lionel west. "to adjourn for the reasons stated," replied bayard. this was on july th; and, twenty-nine days later, by wednesday the th of august, germany had practically seized samoa. for this flagrant breach of faith one excuse is openly alleged; another whispered. it is openly alleged that bayard had shown himself impracticable; it is whispered that the hawaiian embassy was an expression of american intrigue, and that the germans only did as they were done by. the sufficiency of these excuses may be left to the discretion of the reader. but, however excused, the breach of faith was public and express; it must have been deliberately predetermined; and it was resented in the states as a deliberate insult. by the middle of august there were five sail of german war-ships in apia bay: the _bismarck_, of tons displacement; the _carola_, the _sophie_, and the _olga_, all considerable ships; and the beautiful _adler_, which lies there to this day, kanted on her beam, dismantled, scarlet with rust, the day showing through her ribs. they waited inactive, as a burglar waits till the patrol goes by. and on the rd, when the mail had left for sydney, when the eyes of the world were withdrawn, and samoa plunged again for a period of weeks into her original island-obscurity, becker opened his guns. the policy was too cunning to seem dignified; it gave to conduct which would otherwise have seemed bold and even brutally straightforward, the appearance of a timid ambuscade; and helped to shake men's reliance on the word of germany. on the day named, an ultimatum reached malietoa at afenga, whither he had retired months before to avoid friction. a fine of one thousand dollars and an _ifo_, or public humiliation, were demanded for the affair of the emperor's birthday. twelve thousand dollars were to be "paid quickly" for thefts from german plantations in the course of the last four years. "it is my opinion that there is nothing just or correct in samoa while you are at the head of the government," concluded becker. "i shall be at afenga in the morning of to-morrow, wednesday, at a.m." the blow fell on laupepa (in his own expression) "out of the bush"; the dilatory fellow had seen things hang over so long, he had perhaps begun to suppose they might hang over for ever; and here was ruin at the door. he rode at once to apia, and summoned his chiefs. the council lasted all night long. many voices were for defiance. but laupepa had grown inured to a policy of procrastination; and the answer ultimately drawn only begged for delay till saturday, the th. so soon as it was signed, the king took horse and fled in the early morning to afenga; the council hastily dispersed; and only three chiefs, selu, seumanu, and le mamea, remained by the government building, tremulously expectant of the result. by seven the letter was received. by . becker arrived in person, inquired for laupepa, was evasively answered, and declared war on the spot. before eight, the germans (seven hundred men and six guns) came ashore and seized and hoisted german colours on the government building. the three chiefs had made good haste to escape; but a considerable booty was made of government papers, fire-arms, and some seventeen thousand cartridges. then followed a scene which long rankled in the minds of the white inhabitants, when the german marines raided the town in search of malietoa, burst into private houses, and were accused (i am willing to believe on slender grounds) of violence to private persons. on the morrow, the th, one of the german war-ships, which had been despatched to leulumoenga over night re-entered the bay, flying the tamasese colours at the fore. the new king was given a royal salute of twenty-one guns, marched through the town by the commodore and a german guard of honour, and established on mulinuu with two or three hundred warriors. becker announced his recognition to the other consuls. these replied by proclaiming malietoa, and in the usual mealy-mouthed manner advised samoans to do nothing. on the th martial law was declared; and on the st september the german squadron dispersed about the group, bearing along with them the proclamations of the new king. tamasese was now a great man, to have five iron war-ships for his post-runners. but the moment was critical. the revolution had to be explained, the chiefs persuaded to assemble at a fono summoned for the th; and the ships carried not only a store of printed documents, but a squad of tamasese orators upon their round. such was the german _coup d'état_. they had declared war with a squadron of five ships upon a single man; that man, late king of the group, was in hiding on the mountains; and their own nominee, backed by german guns and bayonets, sat in his stead in mulinuu. one of the first acts of malietoa, on fleeing to the bush, was to send for mataafa twice: "i am alone in the bush; if you do not come quickly you will find me bound." it is to be understood the men were near kinsmen, and had (if they had nothing else) a common jealousy. at the urgent cry, mataafa set forth from falefá, and came to mulinuu to tamasese. "what is this that you and the german commodore have decided on doing?" he inquired. "i am going to obey the german consul," replied tamasese, "whose wish it is that i should be the king and that all samoa should assemble here." "do not pursue in wrath against malietoa," said mataafa; "but try to bring about a compromise, and form a united government." "very well," said tamasese, "leave it to me, and i will try." from mulinuu, mataafa went on board the _bismarck_, and was graciously received. "probably," said the commodore, "we shall bring about a reconciliation of all samoa through you"; and then asked his visitor if he bore any affection to malietoa. "yes," said mataafa. "and to tamasese?" "to him also; and if you desire the weal of samoa, you will allow either him or me to bring about a reconciliation." "if it were my will," said the commodore, "i would do as you say. but i have no will in the matter. i have instructions from the kaiser, and i cannot go back again from what i have been sent to do." "i thought you would be commended," said mataafa, "if you brought about the weal of samoa." "i will tell you," said the commodore. "all shall go quietly. but there is one thing that must be done: malietoa must be deposed. i will do nothing to him beyond; he will only be kept on board for a couple of months and be well treated, just as we germans did to the french chief [napoleon iii.] some time ago, whom we kept a while and cared for well." becker was no less explicit: war, he told sewall, should not cease till the germans had custody of malietoa and tamasese should be recognised. meantime, in the malietoa provinces, a profound impression was received. people trooped to their fugitive sovereign in the bush. many natives in apia brought their treasures, and stored them in the houses of white friends. the tamasese orators were sometimes ill received. over in savaii, they found the village of satupaitea deserted, save for a few lads at cricket. these they harangued, and were rewarded with ironical applause; and the proclamation, as soon as they had departed, was torn down. for this offence the village was ultimately burned by german sailors, in a very decent and orderly style, on the rd september. this was the dinner-bell of the fono on the th. the threat conveyed in the terms of the summons--"if any government district does not quickly obey this direction, i will make war on that government district"--was thus commented on and reinforced. and the meeting was in consequence well attended by chiefs of all parties. they found themselves unarmed among the armed warriors of tamasese and the marines of the german squadron, and under the guns of five strong ships. brandeis rose; it was his first open appearance, the german firm signing its revolutionary work. his words were few and uncompromising: "great are my thanks that the chiefs and heads of families of the whole of samoa are assembled here this day. it is strictly forbidden that any discussion should take place as to whether it is good or not that tamasese is king of samoa, whether at this fono or at any future fono. i place for your signature the following: _'we inform all the people of samoa of what follows_: ( ) _the government of samoa has been assumed by king tuiaana tamasese_. ( ) _by order of the king, it was directed that a fono should take place to-day, composed of the chiefs and heads of families, and we have obeyed the summons. we have signed our names under this, th september ._'" needs must under all these guns; and the paper was signed, but not without open sullenness. the bearing of mataafa in particular was long remembered against him by the germans. "do you not see the king?" said the commodore reprovingly. "his father was no king," was the bold answer. a bolder still has been printed, but this is mataafa's own recollection of the passage. on the next day, the chiefs were all ordered back to shake hands with tamasese. again they obeyed; but again their attitude was menacing, and some, it is said, audibly murmured as they gave their hands. it is time to follow the poor sheet of paper (literal meaning of _laupepa_), who was now to be blown so broadly over the face of earth. as soon as news reached him of the declaration of war, he fled from afenga to tanungamanono, a hamlet in the bush, about a mile and a half behind apia, where he lurked some days. on the th, selu, his secretary, despatched to the american consul an anxious appeal, his majesty's "cry and prayer" in behalf of "this weak people." by august th, the germans had word of his lurking-place, surrounded the hamlet under cloud of night, and in the early morning burst with a force of sailors on the houses. the people fled on all sides, and were fired upon. one boy was shot in the hand, the first blood of the war. but the king was nowhere to be found; he had wandered farther, over the woody mountains, the backbone of the land, towards siumu and safata. here, in a safe place, he built himself a town in the forest, where he received a continual stream of visitors and messengers. day after day the german blue-jackets were employed in the hopeless enterprise of beating the forests for the fugitive; day after day they were suffered to pass unhurt under the guns of ambushed samoans; day after day they returned, exhausted and disappointed, to apia. seumanu tafa, high chief of apia, was known to be in the forest with the king; his wife, fatuila, was seized, imprisoned in the german hospital, and when it was thought her spirit was sufficiently reduced, brought up for cross-examination. the wise lady confined herself in answer to a single word. "is your husband near apia?" "yes." "is he far from apia?" "yes." "is he with the king?" "yes." "are he and the king in different places?" "yes." whereupon the witness was discharged. about the th of september, laupepa was secretly in apia at the american consulate with two companions. the german pickets were close set and visited by a strong patrol; and on his return, his party was observed and hailed and fired on by a sentry. they ran away on all fours in the dark, and so doing plumped upon another sentry, whom laupepa grappled and flung in a ditch; for the sheet of paper, although infirm of character, is, like most samoans, of an able body. the second sentry (like the first) fired after his assailants at random in the dark; and the two shots awoke the curiosity of apia. on the afternoon of the th, the day of the hand-shakings, suatele, a high chief, despatched two boys across the island with a letter. they were most of the night upon the road; it was near three in the morning before the sentries in the camp of malietoa beheld their lantern drawing near out of the wood; but the king was at once awakened. the news was decisive and the letter peremptory; if malietoa did not give himself up before ten on the morrow, he was told that great sorrows must befall his country. i have not been able to draw laupepa as a hero; but he is a man of certain virtues, which the germans had now given him an occasion to display. without hesitation he sacrificed himself, penned his touching farewell to samoa, and making more expedition than the messengers, passed early behind apia to the banks of the vaisingano. as he passed, he detached a messenger to mataafa at the catholic mission. mataafa followed by the same road, and the pair met at the river-side and went and sat together in a house. all present were in tears. "do not let us weep," said the talking man, lauati. "we have no cause for shame. we do not yield to tamasese, but to the invincible strangers." the departing king bequeathed the care of his country to mataafa; and when the latter sought to console him with the commodore's promises, he shook his head, and declared his assurance that he was going to a life of exile, and perhaps to death. about two o'clock the meeting broke up; mataafa returned to the catholic mission by the back of the town; and malietoa proceeded by the beach road to the german naval hospital, where he was received (as he owns, with perfect civility) by brandeis. about three, becker brought him forth again. as they went to the wharf, the people wept and clung to their departing monarch. a boat carried him on board the _bismarck_, and he vanished from his countrymen. yet it was long rumoured that he still lay in the harbour; and so late as october th, a boy, who had been paddling round the _carola_, professed to have seen and spoken with him. here again the needless mystery affected by the germans bitterly disserved them. the uncertainty which thus hung over laupepa's fate, kept his name continually in men's mouths. the words of his farewell rang in their ears: "to all samoa: on account of my great love to my country and my great affection to all samoa, this is the reason that i deliver up my body to the german government. that government may do as they wish to me. the reason of this is, because i do not desire that the blood of samoa shall be spilt for me again. but i do not know what is my offence which has caused their anger to me and to my country." and then, apostrophising the different provinces: "tuamasanga, farewell! manono and family, farewell! so, also, salafai, tutuila, aana, and atua, farewell! if we do not again see one another in this world, pray that we may be again together above." so the sheep departed with the halo of a saint, and men thought of him as of some king arthur snatched into avilion. on board the _bismarck_, the commodore shook hands with him, told him he was to be "taken away from all the chiefs with whom he had been accustomed," and had him taken to the wardroom under guard. the next day he was sent to sea in the _adler_. there went with him his brother moli, one meisake, and one alualu, half-caste german, to interpret. he was respectfully used; he dined in the stern with the officers, but the boys dined "near where the fire was." they came to a "newly-formed place" in australia, where the _albatross_ was lying, and a british ship, which he knew to be a man-of-war "because the officers were nicely dressed and wore epaulettes." here he was transhipped, "in a boat with a screen," which he supposed was to conceal him from the british ship; and on board the _albatross_ was sent below and told he must stay there till they had sailed. later, however, he was allowed to come on deck, where he found they had rigged a screen (perhaps an awning) under which he walked, looking at "the newly-formed settlement," and admiring a big house "where he was sure the governor lived." from australia, they sailed some time, and reached an anchorage where a consul-general came on board, and where laupepa was only allowed on deck at night. he could then see the lights of a town with wharves; he supposes cape town. off the cameroons they anchored or lay-to, far at sea, and sent a boat ashore to see (he supposes) that there was no british man-of-war. it was the next morning before the boat returned, when the _albatross_ stood in and came to anchor near another german ship. here alualu came to him on deck and told him this was the place. "that is an astonishing thing," said he. "i thought i was to go to germany, i do not know what this means; i do not know what will be the end of it; my heart is troubled." whereupon alualu burst into tears. a little after, laupepa was called below to the captain and the governor. the last addressed him: "this is my own place, a good place, a warm place. my house is not yet finished, but when it is, you shall live in one of my rooms until i can make a house for you." then he was taken ashore and brought to a tall, iron house. "this house is regulated," said the governor; "there is no fire allowed to burn in it." in one part of this house, weapons of the government were hung up; there was a passage, and on the other side of the passage, fifty criminals were chained together, two and two, by the ankles. the windows were out of reach; and there was only one door, which was opened at six in the morning and shut again at six at night. all day he had his liberty, went to the baptist mission, and walked about viewing the negroes, who were "like the sand on the seashore" for number. at six they were called into the house and shut in for the night without beds or lights. "although they gave me no light," said he, with a smile, "i could see i was in a prison." good food was given him: biscuits, "tea made with warm water," beef, etc.; all excellent. once, in their walks, they spied a breadfruit tree bearing in the garden of an english merchant, ran back to the prison to get a shilling, and came and offered to purchase. "i am not going to sell breadfruit to you people," said the merchant; "come and take what you like." here malietoa interrupted himself to say it was the only tree bearing in the cameroons. "the governor had none, or he would have given it to me." on the passage from the cameroons to germany, he had great delight to see the cliffs of england. he saw "the rocks shining in the sun, and three hours later was surprised to find them sunk in the heavens." he saw also wharves and immense buildings; perhaps dover and its castle. in hamburg, after breakfast, mr. weber, who had now finally "ceased from troubling" samoa, came on board, and carried him ashore "suitably" in a steam launch to "a large house of the government," where he stayed till noon. at noon weber told him he was going to "the place where ships are anchored that go to samoa," and led him to "a very magnificent house, with carriages inside and a wonderful roof of glass"; to wit, the railway station. they were benighted on the train, and then went in "something with a house, drawn by horses, which had windows and many decks"; plainly an omnibus. here (at bremen or bremerhaven, i believe) they stayed some while in "a house of five hundred rooms"; then were got on board the _nürnberg_ (as they understood) for samoa, anchored in england on a sunday, were joined _en route_ by the famous dr. knappe, passed through "a narrow passage where they went very slow and which was just like a river," and beheld with exhilarated curiosity that red sea of which they had learned so much in their bibles. at last, "at the hour when the fires burn red," they came to a place where was a german man-of-war. laupepa was called, with one of the boys, on deck, when he found a german officer awaiting him, and a steam launch alongside, and was told he must now leave his brother and go elsewhere. "i cannot go like this," he cried. "you must let me see my brother and the other old men"--a term of courtesy. knappe, who seems always to have been good-natured, revised his orders, and consented not only to an interview, but to allow moli to continue to accompany the king. so these two were carried to the man-of-war, and sailed many a day, still supposing themselves bound for samoa; and lo! she came to a country the like of which they had never dreamed of, and cast anchor in the great lagoon of jaluit; and upon that narrow land the exiles were set on shore. this was the part of his captivity on which he looked back with the most bitterness. it was the last, for one thing, and he was worn down with the long suspense, and terror, and deception. he could not bear the brackish water; and though "the germans were still good to him, and gave him beef and biscuit and tea," he suffered from the lack of vegetable food. such is the narrative of this simple exile. i have not sought to correct it by extraneous testimony. it is not so much the facts that are historical, as the man's attitude. no one could hear this tale as he originally told it in my hearing--i think none can read it as here condensed and unadorned--without admiring the fairness and simplicity of the samoan; and wondering at the want of heart--or want of humour--in so many successive civilised germans, that they should have continued to surround this infant with the secrecy of state. chapter iv brandeis _september_ ' _to august_ ' so tamasese was on the throne, and brandeis behind it; and i have now to deal with their brief and luckless reign. that it was the reign of brandeis needs not to be argued: the policy is throughout that of an able, over-hasty white, with eyes and ideas. but it should be borne in mind that he had a double task, and must first lead his sovereign, before he could begin to drive their common subjects. meanwhile, he himself was exposed (if all tales be true) to much dictation and interference, and to some "cumbrous aid," from the consulate and the firm. and to one of these aids, the suppression of the municipality, i am inclined to attribute his ultimate failure. the white enemies of the new regimen were of two classes. in the first stood moors and the employés of macarthur, the two chief rivals of the firm, who saw with jealousy a clerk (or a so-called clerk) of their competitors advanced to the chief power. the second class, that of the officials, numbered at first exactly one. wilson, the english acting consul, is understood to have held strict orders to help germany. commander leary, of the _adams_, the american captain, when he arrived, on the th october, and for some time after, seemed devoted to the german interest, and spent his days with a german officer, captain von widersheim, who was deservedly beloved by all who knew him. there remains the american consul-general, harold marsh sewall, a young man of high spirit and a generous disposition. he had obeyed the orders of his government with a grudge; and looked back on his past action with regret almost to be called repentance. from the moment of the declaration of war against laupepa, we find him standing forth in bold, consistent, and sometimes rather captious opposition, stirring up his government at home with clear and forcible despatches, and on the spot grasping at every opportunity to thrust a stick into the german wheels. for some while, he and moors fought their difficult battle in conjunction; in the course of which, first one, and then the other, paid a visit home to reason with the authorities at washington; and during the consul's absence, there was found an american clerk in apia, william blacklock, to perform the duties of the office with remarkable ability and courage. the three names just brought together, sewall, moors, and blacklock, make the head and front of the opposition; if tamasese fell, if brandeis was driven forth, if the treaty of berlin was signed, theirs is the blame or the credit. to understand the feelings of self-reproach and bitterness with which sewall took the field, the reader must see laupepa's letter of farewell to the consuls of england and america. it is singular that this far from brilliant or dignified monarch, writing in the forest, in heaviness of spirit and under pressure for time, should have left behind him not only one, but two remarkable and most effective documents. the farewell to his people was touching; the farewell to the consuls, for a man of the character of sewall, must have cut like a whip. "when the chief tamasese and others first moved the present troubles," he wrote, "it was my wish to punish them and put an end to the rebellion; but i yielded to the advice of the british and american consuls. assistance and protection was repeatedly promised to me and my government, if i abstained from bringing war upon my country. relying upon these promises, i did not put down the rebellion. now i find that war has been made upon me by the emperor of germany, and tamasese has been proclaimed king of samoa. i desire to remind you of the promises so frequently made by your government, and trust that you will so far redeem them as to cause the lives and liberties of my chiefs and people to be respected." sewall's immediate adversary was, of course, becker. i have formed an opinion of this gentleman, largely from his printed despatches, which i am at a loss to put in words. astute, ingenious, capable, at moments almost witty with a kind of glacial wit in action, he displayed in the course of this affair every description of capacity but that which is alone useful and which springs from a knowledge of men's natures. it chanced that one of sewall's early moves played into his hands, and he was swift to seize and to improve the advantage. the neutral territory and the tripartite municipality of apia were eyesores to the german consulate and brandeis. by landing tamasese's two or three hundred warriors at mulinuu, as becker himself owns, they had infringed the treaties, and sewall entered protest twice. there were two ways of escaping this dilemma: one was to withdraw the warriors; the other, by some hocus-pocus, to abrogate the neutrality. and the second had subsidiary advantages: it would restore the taxes of the richest district in the islands to the samoan king; and it would enable them to substitute over the royal seat the flag of germany for the new flag of tamasese. it is true (and it was the subject of much remark) that these two could hardly be distinguished by the naked eye; but their effects were different. to seat the puppet king on german land and under german colours, so that any rebellion was constructive war on germany, was a trick apparently invented by becker, and which we shall find was repeated and persevered in till the end. otto martin was at this time magistrate in the municipality. the post was held in turn by the three nationalities; martin had served far beyond his term, and should have been succeeded months before by an american. to make the change it was necessary to hold a meeting of the municipal board, consisting of the three consuls, each backed by an assessor. and for some time these meetings had been evaded or refused by the german consul. as long as it was agreed to continue martin, becker had attended regularly; as soon as sewall indicated a wish for his removal, becker tacitly suspended the municipality by refusing to appear. this policy was now the more necessary; for if the whole existence of the municipality were a check on the freedom of the new government, it was plainly less so when the power to enforce and punish lay in german hands. for some while back the malietoa flag had been flown on the municipal building: becker denies this; i am sorry; my information obliges me to suppose he is in error. sewall, with post-mortem loyalty to the past, insisted that this flag should be continued. and becker immediately made his point. he declared, justly enough, that the proposal was hostile, and argued that it was impossible he should attend a meeting under a flag with which his sovereign was at war. upon one occasion of urgency, he was invited to meet the two other consuls at the british consulate; even this he refused; and for four months the municipality slumbered, martin still in office. in the month of october, in consequence, the british and american ratepayers announced they would refuse to pay. becker doubtless rubbed his hands. on saturday, the th, the chief tamaseu, a malietoa man of substance and good character, was arrested on a charge of theft believed to be vexatious, and cast by martin into the municipal prison. he sent to moors, who was his tenant and owed him money at the time, for bail. moors applied to sewall, ranking consul. after some search, martin was found and refused to consider bail before the monday morning. whereupon sewall demanded the keys from the gaoler, accepted moors's verbal recognisances, and set tamaseu free. things were now at a deadlock; and becker astonished every one by agreeing to a meeting on the th. it seems he knew what to expect. writing on the th at least, he prophesies that the meeting will be held in vain, that the municipality must lapse, and the government of tamasese step in. on the th, sewall left his consulate in time, and walked some part of the way to the place of meeting in company with wilson, the english pro-consul. but he had forgotten a paper, and in an evil hour returned for it alone. wilson arrived without him, and becker broke up the meeting for want of a quorum. there was some unedifying disputation as to whether he had waited ten or twenty minutes, whether he had been officially or unofficially informed by wilson that sewall was on the way, whether the statement had been made to himself or to weber[ ] in answer to a question, and whether he had heard wilson's answer or only weber's question: all otiose; if he heard the question, he was bound to have waited for the answer; if he heard it not, he should have put it himself; and it was the manifest truth that he rejoiced in his occasion. "sir," he wrote to sewall, "i have the honour to inform you that, to my regret, i am obliged to consider the municipal government to be provisionally in abeyance since you have withdrawn your consent to the continuation of mr. martin in his position as magistrate, and since you have refused to take part in the meeting of the municipal board agreed to for the purpose of electing a magistrate. the government of the town and district of the municipality rests, as long as the municipality is in abeyance, with the samoan government. the samoan government has taken over the administration, and has applied to the commander of the imperial german squadron for assistance in the preservation of good order." this letter was not delivered until p.m. by three, sailors had been landed. already german colours flew over tamasese's headquarters at mulinuu, and german guards had occupied the hospital, the german consulate, and the municipal gaol and courthouse, where they stood to arms under the flag of tamasese. the same day sewall wrote to protest. receiving no reply, he issued on the morrow a proclamation bidding all americans look to himself alone. on the th, he wrote again to becker, and on the th received this genial reply: "sir, your high favour of the th of this month, i give myself the honour of acknowledging. at the same time i acknowledge the receipt of your high favour of the th october in reply to my communication of the same date, which contained the information of the suspension of the arrangements for the municipal government." there the correspondence ceased. and on the th january came the last step of this irritating intrigue when tamasese appointed a judge--and the judge proved to be martin. thus was the adventure of the castle municipal achieved by sir becker the chivalrous. the taxes of apia, the gaol, the police, all passed into the hands of tamasese-brandeis; a german was secured upon the bench; and the german flag might wave over her puppet unquestioned. but there is a law of human nature which diplomatists should be taught at school, and it seems they are not; that men can tolerate bare injustice, but not the combination of injustice and subterfuge. hence the chequered career of the thimble-rigger. had the municipality been seized by open force, there might have been complaint, it would not have aroused the same lasting grudge. this grudge was an ill gift to bring to brandeis, who had trouble enough in front of him without. he was an alien, he was supported by the guns of alien war-ships, and he had come to do an alien's work, highly needful for samoa, but essentially unpopular with all samoans. the law to be enforced, causes of dispute between white and brown to be eliminated, taxes to be raised, a central power created, the country opened up, the native race taught industry: all these were detestable to the natives, and to all of these he must set his hand. the more i learn of his brief term of rule, the more i learn to admire him, and to wish we had his like. in the face of bitter native opposition, he got some roads accomplished. he set up beacons. the taxes he enforced with necessary vigour. by the th of january, aua and fangatonga, districts in tutuila, having made a difficulty, brandeis is down at the island in a schooner, with the _adler_ at his heels, seizes the chief maunga, fines the recalcitrant districts in three hundred dollars for expenses, and orders all to be in by april th, which if it is not, "not one thing will be done," he proclaimed, "but war declared against you, and the principal chiefs taken to a distant island." he forbade mortgages of copra, a frequent source of trickery and quarrel; and to clear off those already contracted, passed a severe but salutary law. each individual or family was first to pay off its own obligation; that settled, the free man was to pay for the indebted village, the free village for the indebted province, and one island for another. samoa, he declared, should be free of debt within a year. had he given it three years, and gone more gently, i believe it might have been accomplished. to make it the more possible, he sought to interdict the natives from buying cotton stuffs and to oblige them to dress (at least for the time) in their own tapa. he laid the beginnings of a royal territorial army. the first draft was in his hands drilling. but it was not so much on drill that he depended; it was his hope to kindle in these men an _esprit de corps_, which should weaken the old local jealousies and bonds, and found a central or national party in the islands. looking far before, and with a wisdom beyond that of many merchants, he had condemned the single dependence placed on copra for the national livelihood. his recruits, even as they drilled, were taught to plant cacao. each, his term of active service finished, should return to his own land and plant and cultivate a stipulated area. thus, as the young men continued to pass through the army, habits of discipline and industry, a central sentiment, the principles of the new culture, and actual gardens of cacao, should be concurrently spread over the face of the islands. tamasese received, including his household expenses, dollars a year; brandeis, . all such disproportions are regrettable, but this is not extreme: we have seen horses of a different colour since then. and the tamaseseites, with true samoan ostentation, offered to increase the salary of their white premier: an offer he had the wisdom and good feeling to refuse. a european chief of police received twelve hundred. there were eight head judges, one to each province, and appeal lay from the district judge to the provincial, thence to mulinuu. from all salaries (i gather) a small monthly guarantee was withheld. the army was to cost from three to four thousand, apia (many whites refusing to pay taxes since the suppression of the municipality) might cost three thousand more: sir becker's high feat of arms coming expensive (it will be noticed) even in money. the whole outlay was estimated at twenty-seven thousand; and the revenue forty thousand: a sum samoa is well able to pay. such were the arrangements and some of the ideas of this strong, ardent, and sanguine man. of criticisms upon his conduct, beyond the general consent that he was rather harsh and in too great a hurry, few are articulate. the native paper of complaints was particularly childish. out of twenty-three counts, the first two refer to the private character of brandeis and tamasese. three complain that samoan officials were kept in the dark as to the finances; one, of the tapa law; one, of the direct appointment of chiefs by tamasese-brandeis, the sort of mistake into which europeans in the south seas fall so readily; one, of the enforced labour of chiefs; one, of the taxes; and one, of the roads. this i may give in full from the very lame translation in the american white book. "the roads that were made were called the government roads; they were six fathoms wide. their making caused much damage to samoa's lands and what was planted on it. the samoans cried on account of their lands, which were taken high-handedly and abused. they again cried on account of the loss of what they had planted, which was now thrown away in a high-handed way, without any regard being shown or question asked of the owner of the land, or any compensation offered for the damage done. this was different with foreigners' land; in their case permission was first asked to make the roads; the foreigners were paid for any destruction made." the sting of this count was, i fancy, in the last clause. no less than six articles complain of the administration of the law; and i believe that was never satisfactory. brandeis told me himself he was never yet satisfied with any native judge. and men say (and it seems to fit in well with his hasty and eager character) that he would legislate by word of mouth; sometimes forget what he had said; and, on the same question arising in another province, decide it perhaps otherwise. i gather, on the whole, our artillery captain was not great in law. two articles refer to a matter i must deal with more at length, and rather from the point of view of the white residents. the common charge against brandeis was that of favouring the german firm. coming as he did, this was inevitable. weber had bought steinberger with hard cash; that was matter of history. the present government he did not even require to buy, having founded it by his intrigues, and introduced the premier to samoa through the doors of his own office. and the effect of the initial blunder was kept alive by the chatter of the clerks in bar-rooms, boasting themselves of the new government and prophesying annihilation to all rivals. the time of raising a tax is the harvest of the merchants; it is the time when copra will be made, and must be sold; and the intention of the german firm, first in the time of steinberger, and again in april and may, , with brandeis, was to seize and handle the whole operation. their chief rivals were the messrs. macarthur; and it seems beyond question that provincial governors more than once issued orders forbidding samoans to take money from "the new zealand firm." these, when they were brought to his notice, brandeis disowned, and he is entitled to be heard. no man can live long in samoa and not have his honesty impugned. but the accusations against brandeis's veracity are both few and obscure. i believe he was as straight as his sword. the governors doubtless issued these orders, but there were plenty besides brandeis to suggest them. every wandering clerk from the firm's office, every plantation manager, would be dinning the same story in the native ear. and here again the initial blunder hung about the neck of brandeis, a ton's weight. the natives, as well as the whites, had seen their premier masquerading on a stool in the office; in the eyes of the natives, as well as in those of the whites, he must always have retained the mark of servitude from that ill-judged passage; and they would be inclined to look behind and above him, to the great house of _misi ueba_. the government was like a vista of puppets. people did not trouble with tamasese, if they got speech with brandeis; in the same way, they might not always trouble to ask brandeis, if they had a hint direct from _misi ueba_. in only one case, though it seems to have had many developments, do i find the premier personally committed. the macarthurs claimed the copra of fasitotai on a district mortgage of three hundred dollars. the german firm accepted a mortgage of the whole province of aana, claimed the copra of fasitotai as that of a part of aana, and were supported by the government. here brandeis was false to his own principle, that personal and village debts should come before provincial. but the case occurred before the promulgation of the law, and was, as a matter of fact, the cause of it; so the most we can say is that he changed his mind, and changed it for the better. if the history of his government be considered--how it originated in an intrigue between the firm and the consulate, and was (for the firm's sake alone) supported by the consulate with foreign bayonets--the existence of the least doubt on the man's action must seem marvellous. we should have looked to find him playing openly and wholly into their hands; that he did not, implies great independence and much secret friction; and i believe (if the truth were known) the firm would be found to have been disgusted with the stubbornness of its intended tool, and brandeis often impatient of the demands of his creators. but i may seem to exaggerate the degree of white opposition. and it is true that before fate overtook the brandeis government, it appeared to enjoy the fruits of victory in apia; and one dissident, the unconquerable moors, stood out alone to refuse his taxes. but the victory was in appearance only; the opposition was latent; it found vent in talk, and thus reacted on the natives; upon the least excuse, it was ready to flame forth again. and this is the more singular because some were far from out of sympathy with the native policy pursued. when i met captain brandeis, he was amazed at my attitude. "whom did you find in apia to tell you so much good of me?" he asked. i named one of my informants. "he?" he cried. "if he thought all that, why did he not help me?" i told him as well as i was able. the man was a merchant. he beheld in the government of brandeis a government created by and for the firm who were his rivals. if brandeis were minded to deal fairly, where was the probability that he would be allowed? if brandeis insisted and were strong enough to prevail, what guarantee that, as soon as the government were fairly accepted, brandeis might not be removed? here was the attitude of the hour; and i am glad to find it clearly set forth in a despatch of sewall's, june th, , when he commends the law against mortgages, and goes on: "whether the author of this law will carry out the good intentions which he professes--whether he will be allowed to do so, if he desires, against the opposition of those who placed him in power and protect him in the possession of it--may well be doubted." brandeis had come to apia in the firm's livery. even while he promised neutrality in commerce, the clerks were prating a different story in the bar-rooms; and the late high feat of the knight-errant, becker, had killed all confidence in germans at the root. by these three impolicies, the german adventure in samoa was defeated. i imply that the handful of whites were the true obstacle, not the thousands of malcontent samoans; for had the whites frankly accepted brandeis, the path of germany was clear, and the end of their policy, however troublesome might be its course, was obvious. but this is not to say that the natives were content. in a sense, indeed, their opposition was continuous. there will always be opposition in samoa when taxes are imposed; and the deportation of malietoa stuck in men's throats. tuiatua mataafa refused to act under the new government from the beginning, and tamasese usurped his place and title. as early as february, i find him signing himself "tuiaana _tuiatua_ tamasese," the first step on a dangerous path. asi, like mataafa, disclaimed his chiefship and declared himself a private person; but he was more rudely dealt with. german sailors surrounded his house in the night, burst in, and dragged the women out of the mosquito nets--an offence against samoan manners. no asi was to be found; but at last they were shown his fishing-lights on the reef, rowed out, took him as he was, and carried him on board a man-of-war, where he was detained some while between-decks. at last, january th, after a farewell interview over the ship's side with his wife, he was discharged into a ketch, and along with two other chiefs, maunga and tuiletu-funga, deported to the marshalls. the blow struck fear upon all sides. le mamea (a very able chief) was secretly among the malcontents. his family and followers murmured at his weakness; but he continued, throughout the duration of the government, to serve brandeis with trembling. a circus coming to apia, he seized at the pretext for escape, and asked leave to accept an engagement in the company. "i will not allow you to make a monkey of yourself," said brandeis; and the phrase had a success throughout the islands, pungent expressions being so much admired by the natives that they cannot refrain from repeating them, even when they have been levelled at themselves. the assumption of the atua _name_ spread discontent in that province; many chiefs from thence were convicted of disaffection, and condemned to labour with their hands upon the roads--a great shock to the samoan sense of the becoming, which was rendered the more sensible by the death of one of the number at his task. mataafa was involved in the same trouble. his disaffected speech at a meeting of atua chiefs was betrayed by the girls that made the kava, and the man of the future was called to apia on safe-conduct, but, after an interview, suffered to return to his lair. the peculiarly tender treatment of mataafa must be explained by his relationship to tamasese. laupepa was of malietoa blood. the hereditary retainers of the tupua would see him exiled even with some complacency. but mataafa was tupua himself; and tupua men would probably have murmured, and would perhaps have mutinied, had he been harshly dealt with. the native opposition, i say, was in a sense continuous. and it kept continuously growing. the sphere of brandeis was limited to mulinuu and the north central quarters of upolu--practically what is shown upon the map opposite. there the taxes were expanded; in the out-districts, men paid their money and saw no return. here the eye and hand of the dictator were ready to correct the scales of justice; in the out-districts, all things lay at the mercy of the native magistrates, and their oppressions increased with the course of time and the experience of impunity. in the spring of the year, a very intelligent observer had occasion to visit many places in the island of savaii. "our lives are not worth living," was the burthen of the popular complaint. "we are groaning under the oppression of these men. we would rather die than continue to endure it." on his return to apia, he made haste to communicate his impressions to brandeis. brandeis replied in an epigram: "where there has been anarchy in a country, there must be oppression for a time." but unfortunately the terms of the epigram may be reversed; and personal supervision would have been more in season than wit. the same observer who conveyed to him this warning thinks that, if brandeis had himself visited the districts and inquired into complaints, the blow might yet have been averted and the government saved. at last, upon a certain unconstitutional act of tamasese, the discontent took life and fire. the act was of his own conception; the dull dog was ambitious. brandeis declares he would not be dissuaded; perhaps his adviser did not seriously try, perhaps did not dream that in that welter of contradictions, the samoan constitution, any one point would be considered sacred. i have told how tamasese assumed the title of tuiatua. in august a year after his installation, he took a more formidable step and assumed that of malietoa. this name, as i have said, is of peculiar honour; it had been given to, it had never been taken from, the exiled laupepa; those in whose grant it lay, stood punctilious upon their rights; and tamasese, as the representative of their natural opponents, the tupua line, was the last who should have had it. and there was yet more, though i almost despair to make it thinkable by europeans. certain old mats are handed down, and set huge store by; they may be compared to coats of arms or heirlooms among ourselves; and to the horror of more than one-half of samoa, tamasese, the head of the tupua, began collecting malietoa mats. it was felt that the cup was full, and men began to prepare secretly for rebellion. the history of the month of august is unknown to whites; it passed altogether in the covert of the woods or in the stealthy councils of samoans. one ominous sign was to be noted; arms and ammunition began to be purchased or inquired about; and the more wary traders ordered fresh consignments of material of war. but the rest was silence; the government slept in security; and brandeis was summoned at last from a public dinner, to find rebellion organised, the woods behind apia full of insurgents, and a plan prepared, and in the very article of execution, to surprise and seize mulinuu. the timely discovery averted all; and the leaders hastily withdrew towards the south side of the island, leaving in the bush a rear-guard under a young man of the name of saifaleupolu. according to some accounts, it scarce numbered forty; the leader was no great chief, but a handsome, industrious lad who seems to have been much beloved. and upon this obstacle brandeis fell. it is the man's fault to be too impatient of results; his public intention to free samoa of all debt within the year, depicts him; and instead of continuing to temporise and let his enemies weary and disperse, he judged it politic to strike a blow. he struck it, with what seemed to be success, and the sound of it roused samoa to rebellion. about two in the morning of august st, apia was wakened by men marching. day came, and brandeis and his war-party were already long disappeared in the woods. all morning belated tamaseseites were still to be seen running with their guns. all morning shots were listened for in vain; but over the top of the forest, far up the mountain, smoke was for some time observed to hang. about ten a dead man was carried in, lashed under a pole like a dead pig, his rosary (for he was a catholic) hanging nearly to the ground. next came a young fellow wounded, sitting in a rope swung from a pole; two fellows bearing him, two running behind for a relief. at last about eleven, three or four heavy volleys and a great shouting were heard from the bush town tanungamanono; the affair was over, the victorious force, on the march back, was there celebrating its victory by the way. presently after, it marched through apia, five or six hundred strong, in tolerable order and strutting with the ludicrous assumption of the triumphant islander. women who had been buying bread ran and gave them loaves. at the tail end came brandeis himself, smoking a cigar, deadly pale, and with perhaps an increase of his usual nervous manner. one spoke to him by the way. he expressed his sorrow the action had been forced on him. "poor people, it's all the worse for them!" he said. "it'll have to be done another way now." and it was supposed by his hearer that he referred to intervention from the german war-ships. he meant, he said, to put a stop to head-hunting; his men had taken two that day, he added, but he had not suffered them to bring them in, and they had been left in tanungamanono. thither my informant rode, was attracted by the sound of wailing, and saw in a house the two heads washed and combed, and the sister of one of the dead lamenting in the island fashion and kissing the cold face. soon after, a small grave was dug, the heads were buried in a beef box, and the pastor read the service. the body of saifaleupolu himself was recovered unmutilated, brought down from the forest, and buried behind apia. the same afternoon, the men of vaimaunga were ordered to report in mulinuu, where tamasese's flag was half-masted for the death of a chief in the skirmish. vaimaunga is that district of taumasanga which includes the bay and the foothills behind apia; and both province and district are strong malietoa. not one man, it is said, obeyed the summons. night came, and the town lay in unusual silence; no one abroad; the blinds down around the native houses, the men within sleeping on their arms; the old women keeping watch in pairs. and in the course of the two following days all vaimaunga was gone into the bush, the very gaoler setting free his prisoners and joining them in their escape. hear the words of the chiefs in the rd article of their complaint: "some of the chiefs fled to the bush from fear of being reported, fear of german men-of-war, constantly being accused, etc., and brandeis commanded that they were to be shot on sight. this act was carried out by brandeis on the st day of august, . after this we evaded these laws; we could not stand them; our patience was worn out with the constant wickedness of tamasese and brandeis. we were tired out and could stand no longer the acts of these two men." so through an ill-timed skirmish, two severed heads, and a dead body, the rule of brandeis came to a sudden end. we shall see him a while longer fighting for existence in a losing battle; but his government--take it for all in all, the most promising that has ever been in these unlucky islands--was from that hour a piece of history. footnote: [ ] brother and successor of theodor. chapter v the battle of matautu _september_ the revolution had all the character of a popular movement. many of the high chiefs were detained in mulinuu; the commons trooped to the bush under inferior leaders. a camp was chosen near faleula, threatening mulinuu, well placed for the arrival of recruits and close to a german plantation from which the force could be subsisted. manono came, all tuamasanga, much of savaii, and part of aana, tamasese's own government and titular seat. both sides were arming. it was a brave day for the trader, though not so brave as some that followed, when a single cartridge is said to have been sold for twelve cents currency--between nine and ten cents gold. yet even among the traders a strong party feeling reigned, and it was the common practice to ask a purchaser upon which side he meant to fight. on september th, brandeis published a letter: "to the chiefs of tuamasanga, manono, and faasaleleanga in the bush: chiefs, by authority of his majesty tamasese, the king of samoa, i make known to you all that the german man-of-war is about to go together with a samoan fleet for the purpose of burning manono. after this island is all burnt, 'tis good if the people return to manono and live quiet. to the people of faasaleleanga i say, return to your houses and stop there. the same to those belonging to tuamasanga. if you obey this instruction, then you will all be forgiven; if you do not obey, then all your villages will be burnt like manono. these instructions are made in truth in the sight of god in the heaven." the same morning, accordingly, the _adler_ steamed out of the bay with a force of tamasese warriors and some native boats in tow, the samoan fleet in question. manono was shelled; the tamasese warriors, under the conduct of a manono traitor, who paid before many days the forfeit of his blood, landed and did some damage, but were driven away by the sight of a force returning from the mainland; no one was hurt, for the women and children, who alone remained on the island, found a refuge in the bush; and the _adler_ and her acolytes returned the same evening. the letter had been energetic; the performance fell below the programme. the demonstration annoyed and yet re-assured the insurgents, and it fully disclosed to the germans a new enemy. captain von widersheim had been relieved. his successor, captain fritze, was an officer of a different stamp. i have nothing to say of him but good; he seems to have obeyed the consul's requisitions with secret distaste; his despatches were of admirable candour; but his habits were retired, he spoke little english, and was far indeed from inheriting von widersheim's close relations with commander leary. it is believed by germans that the american officer resented what he took to be neglect. i mention this, not because i believe it to depict commander leary, but because it is typical of a prevailing infirmity among germans in samoa. touchy themselves, they read all history in the light of personal affronts and tiffs; and i find this weakness indicated by the big thumb of bismarck, when he places "sensitiveness to small disrespects--_empfindlichkeit ueber mangel an respect_," among the causes of the wild career of knappe. whatever the cause, at least, the natives had no sooner taken arms than leary appeared with violence upon that side. as early as the rd, he had sent an obscure but menacing despatch to brandeis. on the th, he fell on fritze in the matter of the manono bombardment. "the revolutionists," he wrote, "had an armed force in the field within a few miles of this harbour, when the vessels under your command transported the tamasese troops to a neighbouring island with the avowed intention of making war on the isolated homes of the women and children of the enemy. being the only other representative of a naval power now present in this harbour, for the sake of humanity i hereby respectfully and solemnly protest in the name of the united states of america and of the civilised world in general against the use of a national war-vessel for such services as were yesterday rendered by the german corvette _adler_." fritze's reply, to the effect that he is under the orders of the consul and has no right of choice, reads even humble; perhaps he was not himself vain of the exploit, perhaps not prepared to see it thus described in words. from that moment leary was in the front of the row. his name is diagnostic, but it was not required; on every step of his subsequent action in samoa irishman is writ large; over all his doings a malign spirit of humour presided. no malice was too small for him, if it were only funny. when night signals were made from mulinuu, he would sit on his own poop and confound them with gratuitous rockets. he was at the pains to write a letter and address it to "the high chief tamasese"--a device as old at least as the wars of robert bruce--in order to bother the officials of the german post-office, in whose hands he persisted in leaving it, although the address was death to them and the distribution of letters in samoa formed no part of their profession. his great masterwork of pleasantry, the scanlon affair, must be narrated in its place. and he was no less bold than comical. the _adams_ was not supposed to be a match for the _adler_; there was no glory to be gained in beating her; and yet i have heard naval officers maintain she might have proved a dangerous antagonist in narrow waters and at short range. doubtless leary thought so. he was continually daring fritze to come on; and already, in a despatch of the th, i find becker complaining of his language in the hearing of german officials, and how he had declared that, on the _adler_ again interfering, he would interfere himself, "if he went to the bottom for it--_und wenn sein schiff dabei zu grunde ginge_." here is the style of opposition which has the merit of being frank, not that of being agreeable. becker was annoying, leary infuriating; there is no doubt that the tempers in the german consulate were highly ulcerated; and if war between the two countries did not follow, we must set down the praise to the forbearance of the german navy. this is not the last time that i shall have to salute the merits of that service. the defeat and death of saifaleupolu and the burning of manono had thus passed off without the least advantage to tamasese. but he still held the significant position of mulinuu, and brandeis was strenuous to make it good. the whole peninsula was surrounded with a breastwork; across the isthmus it was six feet high and strengthened with a ditch; and the beach was staked against landing. weber's land claim--the same that now broods over the village in the form of a signboard--then appeared in a more military guise; the german flag was hoisted, and german sailors manned the breastwork at the isthmus--"to protect german property" and its trifling parenthesis, the king of samoa. much vigilance reigned and, in the island fashion, much wild firing. and in spite of all, desertion was for a long time daily. the detained high chiefs would go to the beach on the pretext of a natural occasion, plunge in the sea, and swimming across a broad, shallow bay of the lagoon, join the rebels on the faleula side. whole bodies of warriors, sometimes hundreds strong, departed with their arms and ammunition. on the th of september, for instance, the day after leary's letter, too and mataia left with their contingents, and the whole aana people returned home in a body to hold a parliament. ten days later, it is true, a part of them returned to their duty; but another part branched off by the way and carried their services, and tamasese's dear-bought guns, to faleula. on the th there was a defection of a different kind, but yet sensible. the high chief seumanu had been still detained in mulinuu under anxious observation. his people murmured at his absence, threatened to "take away his name," and had already attempted a rescue. the adventure was now taken in hand by his wife faatulia, a woman of much sense and spirit and a strong partisan; and by her contrivance, seumanu gave his guardians the slip and rejoined his clan at faleula. this process of winnowing was of course counterbalanced by another of recruitment. but the harshness of european and military rule had made brandeis detested and tamasese unpopular with many; and the force on mulinuu is thought to have done little more than hold its own. mataafa sympathisers set it down at about two or three thousand. i have no estimate from the other side; but becker admits they were not strong enough to keep the field in the open. the political significance of mulinuu was great, but in a military sense the position had defects. if it was difficult to carry, it was easy to blockade: and to be hemmed in on that narrow finger of land were an inglorious posture for the monarch of samoa. the peninsula, besides, was scant of food and destitute of water. pressed by these considerations, brandeis extended his lines till he had occupied the whole foreshore of apia bay and the opposite point, matautu. his men were thus drawn out along some three nautical miles of irregular beach, everywhere with their backs to the sea, and without means of communication or mutual support except by water. the extension led to fresh sorrows. the tamasese men quartered themselves in the houses of the absent men of the vaimaunga. disputes arose with english and americans. leary interposed in a loud voice of menace. it was said the firm profited by the confusion to buttress up imperfect land claims; i am sure the other whites would not be far behind the firm. properties were fenced in, fences and houses were torn down, scuffles ensued. the german example at mulinuu was followed with laughable unanimity; wherever an englishman or an american conceived himself to have a claim, he set up the emblem of his country; and the beach twinkled with the flags of nations. all this, it will be observed, was going forward in that neutral territory, sanctified by treaty against the presence of armed samoans. the insurgents themselves looked on in wonder: on the th, trembling to transgress against the great powers, they had written for a delimitation of the _eleele sa_; and becker, in conversation with the british consul, replied that he recognised none. so long as tamasese held the ground, this was expedient. but suppose tamasese worsted, it might prove awkward for the stores, mills, and offices of a great german firm, thus bared of shelter by the act of their own consul. on the morning of the th september, just ten days after the death of saifaleupolu, mataafa, under the name of malietoa to'oa mataafa, was crowned king at faleula. on the th he wrote to the british and american consuls: "gentlemen, i write this letter to you two very humbly and entreatingly, on account of this difficulty that has come before me. i desire to know from you two gentlemen the truth where the boundaries of the neutral territory are. you will observe that i am now at vaimoso [a step nearer the enemy], and i have stopped here until i knew what you say regarding the neutral territory. i wish to know where i can go, and where the forbidden ground is, for i do not wish to go on any neutral territory, or on any foreigner's property. i do not want to offend any of the great powers. another thing i would like. would it be possible for you three consuls to make tamasese remove from german property? for i am in awe of going on german land." he must have received a reply embodying becker's renunciation of the principle, at once; for he broke camp the same day, and marched eastward through the bush behind apia. brandeis, expecting attack, sought to improve his indefensible position. he reformed his centre by the simple expedient of suppressing it. apia was evacuated. the two flanks, mulinuu and matautu, were still held and fortified, mulinuu (as i have said) to the isthmus, matautu on a line from the bayside to the little river fuisá. the centre was represented by the trajectory of a boat across the bay from one flank to another, and was held (we may say) by the german war-ship. mataafa decided (i am assured) to make a feint on matautu, induce brandeis to deplete mulinuu in support, and then fall upon and carry that. and there is no doubt in my mind that such a plan was bruited abroad, for nothing but a belief in it could explain the behaviour of brandeis on the th. that it was seriously entertained by mataafa i stoutly disbelieve; the german flag and sailors forbidding the enterprise in mulinuu. so that we may call this false intelligence the beginning and the end of mataafa's strategy. the whites who sympathised with the revolt were uneasy and impatient. they will still tell you, though the dates are there to show them wrong, that mataafa, even after his coronation, delayed extremely: a proof of how long two days may seem to last when men anticipate events. on the evening of the th, while the new king was already on the march, one of these walked into matautu. the moon was bright. by the way he observed the native houses dark and silent; the men had been about a fortnight in the bush, but now the women and children were gone also; at which he wondered. on the sea-beach, in the camp of the tamaseses, the solitude was near as great; he saw three or four men smoking before the british consulate, perhaps a dozen in all; the rest were behind in the bush upon their line of forts. about the midst he sat down, and here a woman drew near to him. the moon shone in her face, and he knew her for a householder near by, and a partisan of mataafa's. she looked about her as she came, and asked him, trembling, what he did in the camp of tamasese. he was there after news, he told her. she took him by the hand. "you must not stay here, you will get killed," she said. "the bush is full of our people, the others are watching them, fighting may begin at any moment, and we are both here too long." so they set off together; and she told him by the way that she had came to the hostile camp with a present of bananas, so that the tamasese men might spare her house. by the vaisingano they met an old man, a woman, and a child; and these also she warned and turned back. such is the strange part played by women among the scenes of samoan warfare, such were the liberties then permitted to the whites, that these two could pass the lines, talk together in tamasese's camp on the eve of an engagement, and pass forth again bearing intelligence, like privileged spies. and before a few hours the white man was in direct communication with the opposing general. the next morning he was accosted "about breakfast-time" by two natives who stood leaning against the pickets of a public-house, where the siumu road strikes in at right angles to the main street of apia. they told him battle was imminent, and begged him to pass a little way inland and speak with mataafa. the road is at this point broad and fairly good, running between thick groves of cocoa-palm and breadfruit. a few hundred yards along this the white man passed a picket of four armed warriors, with red handkerchiefs and their faces blackened in the form of a full beard, the mataafa rallying signs for the day; a little farther on, some fifty; farther still, a hundred; and at last a quarter of a mile of them sitting by the wayside armed and blacked. near by, in the verandah of a house on a knoll, he found mataafa seated in white clothes, a winchester across his knees. his men, he said, were still arriving from behind, and there was a turning movement in operation beyond the fuisá, so that the tamaseses should be assailed at the same moment from the south and east. and this is another indication that the attack on matautu was the true attack; had any design on mulinuu been in the wind, not even a samoan general would have detached these troops upon the other side. while they still spoke, five tamasese women were brought in with their hands bound; they had been stealing "our" bananas. all morning the town was strangely deserted, the very children gone. a sense of expectation reigned, and sympathy for the attack was expressed publicly. some men with unblacked faces came to moors's store for biscuit. a native woman, who was there marketing, inquired after the news, and, hearing that the battle was now near at hand, "give them two more tins," said she; "and don't put them down to my husband--he would growl; put them down to me." between twelve and one, two white men walked toward matautu, finding as they went no sign of war until they had passed the vaisingano and come to the corner of a by-path leading to the bush. here were four blackened warriors on guard,--the extreme left wing of the mataafa force, where it touched the waters of the bay. thence the line (which the white men followed) stretched inland among bush and marsh, facing the forts of the tamaseses. the warriors lay as yet inactive behind trees; but all the young boys and harlots of apia toiled in the front upon a trench, digging with knives and cocoa-shells; and a continuous stream of children brought them water. the young sappers worked crouching; from the outside only an occasional head, or a hand emptying a shell of earth, was visible; and their enemies looked on inert from the line of the opposing forts. the lists were not yet prepared, the tournament was not yet open; and the attacking force was suffered to throw up works under the silent guns of the defence. but there is an end even to the delay of islanders. as the white men stood and looked, the tamasese line thundered into a volley; it was answered; the crowd of silent workers broke forth in laughter and cheers; and the battle had begun. thenceforward, all day and most of the next night, volley followed volley; and pounds of lead and pounds sterling of money continued to be blown into the air without cessation and almost without result. colonel de coetlogon, an old soldier, described the noise as deafening. the harbour was all struck with shots; a man was knocked over on the german war-ship; half apia was under fire; and a house was pierced beyond the mulivai. all along the two lines of breastwork, the entrenched enemies exchanged this hail of balls; and away on the east of the battle the fusillade was maintained, with equal spirit, across the narrow barrier of the fuisá. the whole rear of the tamaseses was enfiladed by this flank fire; and i have seen a house there, by the river brink, that was riddled with bullets like a piece of worm-eaten wreck-wood. at this point of the field befell a trait of samoan warfare worth recording. taiese (brother to siteoni already mentioned) shot a tamasese man. he saw him fall, and, inflamed with the lust of glory, passed the river single-handed in that storm of missiles to secure the head. on the farther bank, as was but natural, he fell himself; he who had gone to take a trophy remained to afford one; and the mataafas, who had looked on exulting in the prospect of a triumph, saw themselves exposed instead to a disgrace. then rose one vingi, passed the deadly water, swung the body of taiese on his back, and returned unscathed to his own side, the head saved, the corpse filled with useless bullets. at this rate of practice, the ammunition soon began to run low, and from an early hour of the afternoon, the malietoa stores were visited by customers in search of more. an elderly man came leaping and cheering, his gun in one hand, a basket of three heads in the other. a fellow came shot through the forearm. "it doesn't hurt now," he said, as he bought his cartridges; "but it will hurt to-morrow, and i want to fight while i can." a third followed, a mere boy, with the end of his nose shot off: "have you any painkiller? give it me quick, so that i can get back to fight." on either side, there was the same delight in sound and smoke and schoolboy cheering, the same unsophisticated ardour of battle; and the misdirected skirmish proceeded with a din, and was illustrated with traits of bravery that would have fitted a waterloo or a sedan. i have said how little i regard the alleged plan of battle. at least it was now all gone to water. the whole forces of mataafa had leaked out, man by man, village by village, on the so-called false attack. they were all pounding for their lives on the front and the left flank of matautu. about half-past three they enveloped the right flank also. the defenders were driven back along the beach road as far as the pilot station at the turn of the land. from this also they were dislodged, stubbornly fighting. one, it is told, retreated to his middle in the lagoon; stood there, loading and firing, till he fell; and his body was found on the morrow pierced with four mortal wounds. the tamasese force was now enveloped on three sides; it was besides almost cut off from the sea; and across its whole rear and only way of retreat a fire of hostile bullets crossed from east and west, in the midst of which men were surprised to observe the birds continuing to sing, and a cow grazed all afternoon unhurt. doubtless here was the defence in a poor way; but then the attack was in irons. for the mataafas about the pilot house could scarcely advance beyond without coming under the fire of their own men from the other side of the fuisá; and there was not enough organisation, perhaps not enough authority, to divert or to arrest that fire. the progress of the fight along the beach road was visible from mulinuu, and brandeis despatched ten boats of reinforcements. they crossed the harbour, paused for a while beside the _adler_--it is supposed for ammunition--and drew near the matautu shore. the mataafa men lay close among the shore-side bushes, expecting their arrival; when a silly lad, in mere lightness of heart, fired a shot in the air. my native friend, mrs. mary hamilton, ran out of her house and gave the culprit a good shaking: an episode in the midst of battle as incongruous as the grazing cow. but his sillier comrades followed his example; a harmless volley warned the boats what they might expect; and they drew back and passed outside the reef for the passage of the fuisá. here they came under the fire of the right wing of the mataafas on the river-bank. the beach, raked east and west, appeared to them no place to land on. and they hung off in the deep water of the lagoon inside the barrier reef, feebly fusillading the pilot house. between four and five, the fabeata regiment (or folk of that village) on the mataafa left, which had been under arms all day, fell to be withdrawn for rest and food; the siumu regiment, which should have relieved it, was not ready or not notified in time; and the tamaseses, gallantly profiting by the mismanagement, recovered the most of the ground in their proper right. it was not for long. they lost it again, yard by yard and from house to house, till the pilot station was once more in the hands of the mataafas. this is the last definite incident in the battle. the vicissitudes along the line of the entrenchments remain concealed from us under the cover of the forest. some part of the tamasese position there appears to have been carried, but what part, or at what hour, or whether the advantage was maintained, i have never learned. night and rain, but not silence, closed upon the field. the trenches were deep in mud; but the younger folk wrecked the houses in the neighbourhood, carried the roofs to the front, and lay under them, men and women together, through a long night of furious squalls and furious and useless volleys. meanwhile the older folk trailed back into apia in the rain; they talked as they went of who had fallen and what heads had been taken upon either side--they seemed to know by name the losses upon both; and drenched with wet and broken with excitement and fatigue, they crawled into the verandahs of the town to eat and sleep. the morrow broke grey and drizzly, but as so often happens in the islands, cleared up into a glorious day. during the night, the majority of the defenders had taken advantage of the rain and darkness and stolen from their forts unobserved. the rallying sign of the tamaseses had been a white handkerchief. with the dawn, the de coetlogons from the english consulate beheld the ground strewn with these badges discarded; and close by the house, a belated turncoat was still changing white for red. matautu was lost; tamasese was confined to mulinuu; and by nine o'clock two mataafa villages paraded the streets of apia, taking possession. the cost of this respectable success in ammunition must have been enormous; in life it was but small. some compute forty killed on either side, others forty on both, three or four being women and one a white man, master of a schooner from fiji. nor was the number even of the wounded at all proportionate to the surprising din and fury of the affair while it lasted. chapter vi last exploits of becker _september--november_ brandeis had held all day by mulinuu, expecting the reported real attack. he woke on the th to find himself cut off on that unwatered promontory, and the mataafa villagers parading apia. the same day fritze received a letter from mataafa summoning him to withdraw his party from the isthmus; and fritze, as if in answer, drew in his ship into the small harbour close to mulinuu, and trained his port battery to assist in the defence. from a step so decisive, it might be thought the german plans were unaffected by the disastrous issue of the battle. i conceive nothing would be further from the truth. here was tamasese penned on mulinuu with his troops; apia, from which alone these could be subsisted, in the hands of the enemy; a battle imminent, in which the german vessel must apparently take part with men and battery, and the buildings of the german firm were apparently destined to be the first target of fire. unless becker re-established that which he had so lately and so artfully thrown down--the neutral territory--the firm would have to suffer. if he re-established it, tamasese must retire from mulinuu. if becker saved his goose, he lost his cabbage. nothing so well depicts the man's effrontery as that he should have conceived the design of saving both,--of re-establishing only so much of the neutral territory as should hamper mataafa, and leaving in abeyance all that could incommode tamasese. by drawing the boundary where he now proposed, across the isthmus, he protected the firm, drove back the mataafas out of almost all that they had conquered, and, so far from disturbing tamasese, actually fortified him in his old position. the real story of the negotiations that followed we shall perhaps never learn. but so much is plain: that while becker was thus outwardly straining decency in the interest of tamasese, he was privately intriguing, or pretending to intrigue, with mataafa. in his despatch of the th, he had given an extended criticism of that chieftain, whom he depicts as very dark and artful; and while admitting that his assumption of the name of malietoa might raise him up followers, predicted that he could not make an orderly government or support himself long in sole power "without very energetic foreign help." of what help was the consul thinking? there was no helper in the field but germany. on the th he had an interview with the victor; told him that tamasese's was the only government recognised by germany, and that he must continue to recognise it till he received "other instructions from his government, whom he was now advising of the late events"; refused, accordingly, to withdraw the guard from the isthmus; and desired mataafa, "until the arrival of these fresh instructions," to refrain from an attack on mulinuu. one thing of two: either this language is extremely perfidious, or becker was preparing to change sides. the same detachment appears in his despatch of october th. he computes the losses of the german firm with an easy cheerfulness. if tamasese get up again _(gelingt die wiederherstellung der regierung tamasese's)_, tamasese will have to pay. if not, then mataafa. this is not the language of a partisan. the tone of indifference, the easy implication that the case of tamasese was already desperate, the hopes held secretly forth to mataafa and secretly reported to his government at home, trenchantly contrast with his external conduct. at this very time he was feeding tamasese; he had german sailors mounting guard on tamasese's battlements; the german war-ship lay close in, whether to help or to destroy. if he meant to drop the cause of tamasese, he had him in a corner, helpless, and could stifle him without a sob. if he meant to rat, it was to be with every condition of safety and every circumstance of infamy. was it conceivable, then, that he meant it? speaking with a gentleman who was in the confidence of dr. knappe: "was it not a pity," i asked, "that knappe did not stick to becker's policy of supporting mataafa?" "you are quite wrong there; that was not knappe's doing," was the reply. "becker had changed his mind before knappe came." why, then, had he changed it? this excellent, if ignominious, idea once entertained, why was it let drop? it is to be remembered there was another german in the field, brandeis, who had a respect, or rather, perhaps, an affection, for tamasese, and who thought his own honour and that of his country engaged in the support of that government which they had provoked and founded. becker described the captain to laupepa as "a quiet, sensible gentleman." if any word came to his ears of the intended manoeuvre, brandeis would certainly show himself very sensible of the affront; but becker might have been tempted to withdraw his former epithet of quiet. some such passage, some such threatened change of front at the consulate, opposed with outcry, would explain what seems otherwise inexplicable, the bitter, indignant, almost hostile tone of a subsequent letter from brandeis to knappe--"brandeis's inflammatory letter," bismarck calls it--the proximate cause of the german landing and reverse at fangalii. but whether the advances of becker were sincere or not--whether he meditated treachery against the old king or was practising treachery upon the new, and the choice is between one or other--no doubt but he contrived to gain his points with mataafa, prevailing on him to change his camp for the better protection of the german plantations, and persuading him (long before he could persuade his brother consuls) to accept that miraculous new neutral territory of his, with a piece cut out for the immediate needs of tamasese. during the rest of september, tamasese continued to decline. on the th one village and half of another deserted him; on the nd two more. on the st the mataafas burned his town of leulumoenga, his own splendid house flaming with the rest; and there are few things of which a native thinks more, or has more reason to think well, than of a fine samoan house. tamasese women and children were marched up the same day from atua, and handed over with their sleeping-mats to mulinuu: a most unwelcome addition to a party already suffering from want. by the th, they were being watered from the _adler_. on the th the manono fleet of sixteen large boats, fortified and rendered unmanageable with tons of firewood, passed to windward to intercept supplies from atua. by the th the hungry garrison flocked in great numbers to draw rations at the german firm. on the th the same business was repeated with a different issue. mataafas crowded to look on; words were exchanged, blows followed; sticks, stones, and bottles were caught up; the detested brandeis, at great risk, threw himself between the lines and expostulated with the mataafas--his only personal appearance in the wars, if this could be called war. the same afternoon, the tamasese boats got in with provisions, having passed to seaward of the lumbering manono fleet; and from that day on, whether from a high degree of enterprise on the one side or a great lack of capacity on the other, supplies were maintained from the sea with regularity. thus the spectacle of battle, or at least of riot, at the doors of the german firm was not repeated. but the memory must have hung heavy on the hearts, not of the germans only, but of all apia. the samoans are a gentle race, gentler than any in europe; we are often enough reminded of the circumstance, not always by their friends. but a mob is a mob, and a drunken mob is a drunken mob, and a drunken mob with weapons in its hands is a drunken mob with weapons in its hands, all the world over: elementary propositions, which some of us upon these islands might do worse than get by rote, but which must have been evident enough to becker. and i am amazed by the man's constancy, that, even while blows were going at the door of that german firm which he was in samoa to protect, he should have stuck to his demands. ten days before, blacklock had offered to recognise the old territory, including mulinuu, and becker had refused, and still in the midst of these "alarums and excursions," he continued to refuse it. on october nd, anchored in apia bay h.b.m.s. _calliope_, captain kane, carrying the flag of rear-admiral fairfax, and the gunboat _lizard_, lieutenant-commander pelly. it was rumoured the admiral had come to recognise the government of tamasese, i believe in error. and at least the day for that was quite gone by; and he arrived not to salute the king's accession, but to arbitrate on his remains. a conference of the consuls and commanders met on board the _calliope_, october th, fritze alone being absent, although twice invited: the affair touched politics, his consul was to be there; and even if he came to the meeting (so he explained to fairfax) he would have no voice in its deliberations. the parties were plainly marked out: blacklock and leary maintaining their offer of the old neutral territory, and probably willing to expand or to contract it to any conceivable extent, so long as mulinuu was still included; knappe offered (if the others liked) to include "the whole eastern end of the island," but quite fixed upon the one point that mulinuu should be left out; the english willing to meet either view, and singly desirous that apia should be neutralised. the conclusion was foregone. becker held a trump card in the consent of mataafa; blacklock and leary stood alone, spoke with an ill grace, and could not long hold out. becker had his way; and the neutral boundary was chosen just where he desired: across the isthmus, the firm within, mulinuu without. he did not long enjoy the fruits of victory. on the th, three days after the meeting, one of the scanlons (well-known and intelligent half-castes) came to blacklock with a complaint. the scanlon house stood on the hither side of the tamasese breastwork, just inside the newly accepted territory, and within easy range of the firm. armed men, to the number of a hundred, had issued from mulinuu, had "taken charge" of the house, had pointed a gun at scanlon's head, and had twice "threatened to kill" his pigs. i hear elsewhere of some effects (_gegenstände_) removed. at the best a very pale atrocity, though we shall find the word employed. germans declare besides that scanlon was no american subject; they declare the point had been decided by court-martial in ; that blacklock had the decision in the consular archives; and that this was his reason for handing the affair to leary. it is not necessary to suppose so. it is plain he thought little of the business; thought indeed nothing of it; except in so far as armed men had entered the neutral territory from mulinuu; and it was on this ground alone, and the implied breach of becker's engagement at the conference, that he invited leary's attention to the tale. the impish ingenuity of the commander perceived in it huge possibilities of mischief. he took up the scanlon outrage, the atrocity of the threatened pigs; and with that poor instrument--i am sure, to his own wonder--drove tamasese out of mulinuu. it was "an intrigue," becker complains. to be sure it was; but who was becker to be complaining of intrigue? on the th leary laid before fritze the following conundrum "as the natives of mulinuu appear to be under the protection of the imperial german naval guard belonging to the vessel under your command, i have the honour to request you to inform me whether or not they are under such protection? amicable relations," pursued the humorist, "amicable relations exist between the government of the united states and his imperial german majesty's government, but we do not recognise tamasese's government, and i am desirous of locating the responsibility for violations of american rights." becker and fritze lost no time in explanation or denial, but went straight to the root of the matter and sought to buy off scanlon. becker declares that every reparation was offered. scanlon takes a pride to recapitulate the leases and the situations he refused, and the long interviews in which he was tempted and plied with drink by becker or beckmann of the firm. no doubt, in short, that he was offered reparation in reason and out of reason, and, being thoroughly primed, refused it all. meantime some answer must be made to leary; and fritze repeated on the th his oft-repeated assurances that he was not authorised to deal with politics. the same day leary retorted: "the question is not one of diplomacy nor of politics. it is strictly one of military jurisdiction and responsibility. under the shadow of the german fort at mulinuu," continued the hyperbolical commander, "atrocities have been committed.... and i again have the honour respectfully to request to be informed whether or not the armed natives at mulinuu are under the protection of the imperial german naval guard belonging to the vessel under your command." to this no answer was vouchsafed till the th, and then in the old terms; and meanwhile, on the th, leary got into his gaiters--the sure sign, as was both said and sung aboard his vessel, of some desperate or some amusing service--and was set ashore at the scanlons' house. of this he took possession at the head of an old woman and a mop, and was seen from the tamasese breastwork directing operations and plainly preparing to install himself there in a military posture. so much he meant to be understood; so much he meant to carry out, and an armed party from the _adams_ was to have garrisoned on the morrow the scene of the atrocity. but there is no doubt he managed to convey more. no doubt he was a master in the art of loose speaking, and could always manage to be overheard when he wanted; and by this, or some other equally unofficial means, he spread the rumour that on the morrow he was to bombard. the proposed post, from its position, and from leary's well-established character as an artist in mischief, must have been regarded by the germans with uneasiness. in the bombardment we can scarce suppose them to have believed. but tamasese must have both believed and trembled. the prestige of the european powers was still unbroken. no native would then have dreamed of defying these colossal ships, worked by mysterious powers, and laden with outlandish instruments of death. none would have dreamed of resisting those strange but quite unrealised great powers, understood (with difficulty) to be larger than tonga and samoa put together, and known to be prolific of prints, knives, hard biscuit, picture-books, and other luxuries, as well as of overbearing men and inconsistent orders. laupepa had fallen in ill-blood with one of them; his only idea of defence had been to throw himself in the arms of another; his name, his rank, and his great following had not been able to preserve him; and he had vanished from the eyes of men--as the samoan thinks of it, beyond the sky. asi, maunga, tuiletu-funga, had followed him in that new path of doom. we have seen how carefully mataafa still walked, how he dared not set foot on the neutral territory till assured it was no longer sacred, how he withdrew from it again as soon as its sacredness had been restored, and at the bare word of a consul (however gilded with ambiguous promises) paused in his course of victory and left his rival unassailed in mulinuu. and now it was the rival's turn. hitherto happy in the continued support of one of the white powers, he now found himself--or thought himself--threatened with war by no less than two others. tamasese boats as they passed matautu were in the habit of firing on the shore, as like as not without particular aim, and more in high spirits than hostility. one of these shots pierced the house of a british subject near the consulate; the consul reported to admiral fairfax; and, on the morning of the th, the admiral despatched captain kane of the _calliope_ to mulinuu. brandeis met the messenger with voluble excuses and engagements for the future. he was told his explanations were satisfactory so far as they went, but that the admiral's message was to tamasese, the _de facto_ king. brandeis, not very well assured of his puppet's courage, attempted in vain to excuse him from appearing. no _de facto_ king, no message, he was told: produce your _de facto_ king. and tamasese had at last to be produced. to him kane delivered his errand: that the _lizard_ was to remain for the protection of british subjects; that a signalman was to be stationed at the consulate; that, on any further firing from boats, the signalman was to notify the _lizard_ and she to fire one gun, on which all boats must lower sail and come alongside for examination and the detection of the guilty; and that, "in the event of the boats not obeying the gun, the admiral would not be responsible for the consequences." it was listened to by brandeis and tamasese "with the greatest attention." brandeis, when it was done, desired his thanks to the admiral for the moderate terms of his message, and, as kane went to his boat, repeated the expression of his gratitude as though he meant it, declaring his own hands would be thus strengthened for the maintenance of discipline. but i have yet to learn of any gratitude on the part of tamasese. consider the case of the poor owlish man hearing for the first time our diplomatic commonplaces. the admiral would not be answerable for the consequences. think of it! a devil of a position for a _de facto_ king. and here, the same afternoon, was leary in the scanlon house, mopping it out for unknown designs by the hands of an old woman, and proffering strange threats of bloodshed. scanlon and his pigs, the admiral and his gun, leary and his bombardment,--what a kettle of fish! i dwell on the effect on tamasese. whatever the faults of becker, he was not timid; he had already braved so much for mulinuu that i cannot but think he might have continued to hold up his head even after the outrage of the pigs, and that the weakness now shown originated with the king. late in the night, blacklock was wakened to receive a despatch addressed to leary. "you have asked that i and my government go away from mulinuu, because you pretend a man who lives near mulinuu and who is under your protection, has been threatened by my soldiers. as your excellency has forbidden the man to accept any satisfaction, and as i do not wish to make war against the united states, i shall remove my government from mulinuu to another place." it was signed by tamasese, but i think more heads than his had wagged over the direct and able letter. on the morning of the th, accordingly, mulinuu the much defended lay desert. tamasese and brandeis had slipped to sea in a schooner; their troops had followed them in boats; the german sailors and their war-flag had returned on board the _adler;_ and only the german merchant flag blew there for weber's land-claim. mulinuu, for which becker had intrigued so long and so often, for which he had overthrown the municipality, for which he had abrogated and refused and invented successive schemes of neutral territory, was now no more to the germans than a very unattractive, barren peninsula and a very much disputed land-claim of mr. weber's. it will scarcely be believed that the tale of the scanlon outrages was not yet finished. leary had gained his point, but scanlon had lost his compensation. and it was months later, and this time in the shape of a threat of bombardment in black and white, that tamasese heard the last of the absurd affair. scanlon had both his fun and his money, and leary's practical joke was brought to an artistic end. becker sought and missed an instant revenge. mataafa, a devout catholic, was in the habit of walking every morning to mass from his camp at vaiala beyond matautu to the mission at the mulivai. he was sometimes escorted by as many as six guards in uniform, who displayed their proficiency in drill by perpetually shifting arms as they marched. himself, meanwhile, paced in front, bareheaded and barefoot, a staff in his hand, in the customary chief's dress of white kilt, shirt, and jacket, and with a conspicuous rosary about his neck. tall but not heavy, with eager eyes and a marked appearance of courage and capacity, mataafa makes an admirable figure in the eyes of europeans; to those of his countrymen, he may seem not always to preserve that quiescence of manner which is thought becoming in the great. on the morning of october th he reached the mission before day with two attendants, heard mass, had coffee with the fathers, and left again in safety. the smallness of his following we may suppose to have been reported. he was scarce gone, at least, before becker had armed men at the mission gate and came in person seeking him. the failure of this attempt doubtless still further exasperated the consul, and he began to deal as in an enemy's country. he had marines from the _adler_ to stand sentry over the consulate and parade the streets by threes and fours. the bridge of the vaisingano, which cuts in half the english and american quarters, he closed by proclamation and advertised for tenders to demolish it. on the th leary and pelly landed carpenters and repaired it in his teeth. leary, besides, had marines under arms, ready to land them if it should be necessary to protect the work. but becker looked on without interference, perhaps glad enough to have the bridge repaired; for even becker may not always have offended intentionally. such was now the distracted posture of the little town: all government extinct, the german consul patrolling it with armed men and issuing proclamations like a ruler, the two other powers defying his commands, and at least one of them prepared to use force in the defiance. close on its skirts sat the warriors of mataafa, perhaps four thousand strong, highly incensed against the germans, having all to gain in the seizure of the town and firm, and, like an army in a fairy tale, restrained by the air-drawn boundary of the neutral ground. i have had occasion to refer to the strange appearance in these islands of an american adventurer with a battery of cannon. the adventurer was long since gone, but his guns remained, and one of them was now to make fresh history. it had been cast overboard by brandeis on the outer reef in the course of this retreat; and word of it coming to the ears of the mataafas, they thought it natural that they should serve themselves the heirs of tamasese. on the rd a manono boat of the kind called _taumualua_ dropped down the coast from mataafa's camp, called in broad day at the german quarter of the town for guides, and proceeded to the reef. here, diving with a rope, they got the gun aboard; and the night being then come, returned by the same route in the shallow water along shore, singing a boat-song. it will be seen with what childlike reliance they had accepted the neutrality of apia bay; they came for the gun without concealment, laboriously dived for it in broad day under the eyes of the town and shipping, and returned with it, singing as they went. on grevsmühl's wharf, a light showed them a crowd of german blue-jackets clustered, and a hail was heard. "stop the singing so that we may hear what is said," said one of the chiefs in the _taumualua_. the song ceased; the hail was heard again, "_au mai le fana_--bring the gun"; and the natives report themselves to have replied in the affirmative, and declare that they had begun to back the boat. it is perhaps not needful to believe them. a volley at least was fired from the wharf, at about fifty yards' range and with a very ill direction, one bullet whistling over pelly's head on board the _lizard_. the natives jumped overboard; and swimming under the lee of the _taumualua_ (where they escaped a second volley) dragged her towards the east. as soon as they were out of range and past the mulivai, the german border, they got on board and (again singing--though perhaps a different song) continued their return along the english and american shore. off matautu they were hailed from the seaward by one of the _adler's_ boats, which had been suddenly despatched on the sound of the firing or had stood ready all evening to secure the gun. the hail was in german; the samoans knew not what it meant, but took the precaution to jump overboard and swim for land. two volleys and some dropping shot were poured upon them in the water; but they dived, scattered, and came to land unhurt in different quarters of matautu. the volleys, fired inshore, raked the highway, a british house was again pierced by numerous bullets, and these sudden sounds of war scattered consternation through the town. two british subjects, hetherington-carruthers, a solicitor, and maben, a land-surveyor--the first being in particular a man well versed in the native mind and language--hastened at once to their consul; assured him the mataafas would be roused to fury by this onslaught in the neutral zone, that the german quarter would be certainly attacked, and the rest of the town and white inhabitants exposed to a peril very difficult of estimation; and prevailed upon him to intrust them with a mission to the king. by the time they reached headquarters, the warriors were already taking post round matafele, and the agitation of mataafa himself was betrayed in the fact that he spoke with the deputation standing and gun in hand: a breach of high-chief dignity perhaps unparalleled. the usual result, however, followed: the whites persuaded the samoan; and the attack was countermanded, to the benefit of all concerned, and not least of mataafa. to the benefit of all, i say; for i do not think the germans were that evening in a posture to resist; the liquor-cellars of the firm must have fallen into the power of the insurgents; and i will repeat my formula that a mob is a mob, a drunken mob is a drunken mob, and a drunken mob with weapons in its hands is a drunken mob with weapons in its hands, all the world over. in the opinion of some, then, the town had narrowly escaped destruction, or at least the miseries of a drunken sack. to the knowledge of all, the air of the neutral territory had once more whistled with bullets. and it was clear the incident must have diplomatic consequences. leary and pelly both protested to fritze. leary announced he should report the affair to his government "as a gross violation of the principles of international law, and as a breach of the neutrality." "i positively decline the protest," replied fritze, "and cannot fail to express my astonishment at the tone of your last letter." this was trenchant. it may be said, however, that leary was already out of court; that, after the night signals and the scanlon incident, and so many other acts of practical if humorous hostility, his position as a neutral was no better than a doubtful jest. the case with pelly was entirely different; and with pelly, fritze was less well inspired. in his first note, he was on the old guard; announced that he had acted on the requisition of his consul, who was alone responsible on "the legal side"; and declined accordingly to discuss "whether the lives of british subjects were in danger, and to what extent armed intervention was necessary." pelly replied judiciously that he had nothing to do with political matters, being only responsible for the safety of her majesty's ships under his command and for the lives and property of british subjects; that he had considered his protest a purely naval one; and as the matter stood could only report the case to the admiral on the station. "i have the honour," replied fritze, "to refuse to entertain the protest concerning the safety of her britannic majesty's ship _lizard_ as being a naval matter. the safety of her majesty's ship _lizard_ was never in the least endangered. this was guaranteed by the disciplined fire of a few shots under the direction of two officers." this offensive note, in view of fritze's careful and honest bearing among so many other complications, may be attributed to some misunderstanding. his small knowledge of english perhaps failed him. but i cannot pass it by without remarking how far too much it is the custom of german officials to fall into this style. it may be witty, i am sure it is not wise. it may be sometimes necessary to offend for a definite object, it can never be diplomatic to offend gratuitously. becker was more explicit, although scarce less curt. and his defence may be divided into two statements: first, that the _taumualua_ was proceeding to land with a hostile purpose on mulinuu; second, that the shots complained of were fired by the samoans. the second may be dismissed with a laugh. human nature has laws. and no men hitherto discovered, on being suddenly challenged from the sea, would have turned their backs upon the challenger and poured volleys on the friendly shore. the first is not extremely credible, but merits examination. the story of the recovered gun seems straightforward; it is supported by much testimony, the diving operations on the reef seem to have been watched from shore with curiosity; it is hard to suppose that it does not roughly represent the fact. and yet if any part of it be true, the whole of becker's explanation falls to the ground. a boat which had skirted the whole eastern coast of mulinuu, and was already opposite a wharf in matafele, and still going west, might have been guilty on a thousand points--there was one on which she was necessarily innocent; she was necessarily innocent of proceeding on mulinuu. or suppose the diving operations, and the native testimony, and pelly's chart of the boat's course, and the boat itself, to be all stages of some epidemic hallucination or steps in a conspiracy--suppose even a second _taumualua_ to have entered apia bay after nightfall, and to have been fired upon from grevsmühl's wharf in the full career of hostilities against mulinuu--suppose all this, and becker is not helped. at the time of the first fire, the boat was off grevsmühl's wharf. at the time of the second (and that is the one complained of) she was off carruthers's wharf in matautu. was she still proceeding on mulinuu? i trow not. the danger to german property was no longer imminent, the shots had been fired upon a very trifling provocation, the spirit implied was that of designed disregard to the neutrality. such was the impression here on the spot; such in plain terms the statement of count hatzfeldt to lord salisbury at home: that the neutrality of apia was only "to prevent the natives from fighting," not the germans; and that whatever becker might have promised at the conference, he could not "restrict german war-vessels in their freedom of action." there was nothing to surprise in this discovery; and had events been guided at the same time with a steady and discreet hand, it might have passed with less observation. but the policy of becker was felt to be not only reckless, it was felt to be absurd also. sudden nocturnal onfalls upon native boats could lead, it was felt, to no good end whether of peace or war; they could but exasperate; they might prove, in a moment, and when least expected, ruinous. to those who knew how nearly it had come to fighting, and who considered the probable result, the future looked ominous. and fear was mingled with annoyance in the minds of the anglo-saxon colony. on the th, a public meeting appealed to the british and american consuls. at half-past seven in the evening guards were landed at the consulates. on the morrow they were each fortified with sand-bags; and the subjects informed by proclamation that these asylums stood open to them on any alarm, and at any hour of the day or night. the social bond in apia was dissolved. the consuls, like barons of old, dwelt each in his armed citadel. the rank and file of the white nationalities dared each other, and sometimes fell to on the street like rival clansmen. and the little town, not by any fault of the inhabitants, rather by the act of becker, had fallen back in civilisation about a thousand years. there falls one more incident to be narrated, and then i can close with this ungracious chapter. i have mentioned the name of the new english consul. it is already familiar to english readers; for the gentleman who was fated to undergo some strange experiences in apia was the same de coetlogon who covered hicks's flank at the time of the disaster in the desert, and bade farewell to gordon in khartoum before the investment. the colonel was abrupt and testy; mrs. de coetlogon was too exclusive for society like that of apia; but whatever their superficial disabilities, it is strange they should have left, in such an odour of unpopularity, a place where they set so shining an example of the sterling virtues. the colonel was perhaps no diplomatist; he was certainly no lawyer; but he discharged the duties of his office with the constancy and courage of an old soldier, and these were found sufficient. he and his wife had no ambition to be the leaders of society; the consulate was in their time no house of feasting; but they made of it that house of mourning to which the preacher tells us it is better we should go. at an early date after the battle of matautu, it was opened as a hospital for the wounded. the english and americans subscribed what was required for its support. pelly of the _lizard_ strained every nerve to help, and set up tents on the lawn to be a shelter for the patients. the doctors of the english and american ships, and in particular dr. oakley of the _lizard_, showed themselves indefatigable. but it was on the de coetlogons that the distress fell. for nearly half a year, their lawn, their verandah, sometimes their rooms, were cumbered with the sick and dying, their ears were filled with the complaints of suffering humanity, their time was too short for the multiplicity of pitiful duties. in mrs. de coetlogon, and her helper, miss taylor, the merit of this endurance was perhaps to be looked for; in a man of the colonel's temper, himself painfully suffering, it was viewed with more surprise, if with no more admiration. doubtless all had their reward in a sense of duty done; doubtless, also, as the days passed, in the spectacle of many traits of gratitude and patience, and in the success that waited on their efforts. out of a hundred cases treated, only five died. they were all well-behaved, though full of childish wiles. one old gentleman, a high chief, was seized with alarming symptoms of belly-ache whenever mrs. de coetlogon went her rounds at night: he was after brandy. others were insatiable for morphine or opium. a chief woman had her foot amputated under chloroform. "let me see my foot! why does it not hurt?" she cried. "it hurt so badly before i went to sleep." siteoni, whose name has been already mentioned, had his shoulder-blade excised, lay the longest of any, perhaps behaved the worst, and was on all these grounds the favourite. at times he was furiously irritable, and would rail upon his family and rise in bed until he swooned with pain. once on the balcony he was thought to be dying, his family keeping round his mat, his father exhorting him to be prepared, when mrs. de coetlogon brought him round again with brandy and smelling-salts. after discharge, he returned upon a visit of gratitude; and it was observed, that instead of coming straight to the door, he went and stood long under his umbrella on that spot of ground where his mat had been stretched and he had endured pain so many months. similar visits were the rule, i believe without exception; and the grateful patients loaded mrs. de coetlogon with gifts which (had that been possible in polynesia) she would willingly have declined, for they were often of value to the givers. the tissue of my story is one of rapacity, intrigue, and the triumphs of temper; the hospital at the consulate stands out almost alone as an episode of human beauty, and i dwell on it with satisfaction. but it was not regarded at the time with universal favour; and even to-day its institution is thought by many to have been impolitic. it was opened, it stood open, for the wounded of either party. as a matter of fact it was never used but by the mataafas, and the tamaseses were cared for exclusively by german doctors. in the progressive decivilisation of the town, these duties of humanity became thus a ground of quarrel. when the mataafa hurt were first brought together after the battle of matautu, and some more or less amateur surgeons were dressing wounds on a green by the wayside, one from the german consulate went by in the road. "why don't you let the dogs die?" he asked. "go to hell," was the rejoinder. such were the amenities of apia. but becker reserved for himself the extreme expression of this spirit. on november th hostilities began again between the samoan armies, and an inconclusive skirmish sent a fresh crop of wounded to the de coetlogons. next door to the consulate, some native houses and a chapel (now ruinous) stood on a green. chapel and houses were certainly samoan, but the ground was under a land-claim of the german firm; and de coetlogon wrote to becker requesting permission (in case it should prove necessary) to use these structures for his wounded. before an answer came, the hospital was startled by the appearance of a case of gangrene, and the patient was hastily removed into the chapel. a rebel laid on german ground--here was an atrocity! the day before his own relief, november th, becker ordered the man's instant removal. by his aggressive carriage and singular mixture of violence and cunning, he had already largely brought about the fall of brandeis, and forced into an attitude of hostility the whole non-german population of the islands. now, in his last hour of office, by this wanton buffet to his english colleague, he prepared a continuance of evil days for his successor. if the object of diplomacy be the organisation of failure in the midst of hate, he was a great diplomatist. and amongst a certain party on the beach he is still named as the ideal consul. chapter vii the samoan camps _november_ when brandeis and tamasese fled by night from mulinuu, they carried their wandering government some six miles to windward, to a position above lotoanuu. for some three miles to the eastward of apia, the shores of upolu are low and the ground rises with a gentle acclivity, much of which waves with german plantations. a barrier reef encloses a lagoon passable for boats: and the traveller skims there, on smooth, many-tinted shallows, between the wall of the breakers on the one hand, and on the other a succession of palm-tree capes and cheerful beach-side villages. beyond the great plantation of vailele, the character of the coast is changed. the barrier reef abruptly ceases, the surf beats direct upon the shore; and the mountains and untenanted forest of the interior descend sheer into the sea. the first mountain promontory is letongo. the bay beyond is called laulii, and became the headquarters of mataafa. and on the next projection, on steep, intricate ground, veiled in forest and cut up by gorges and defiles, tamasese fortified his lines. this greenwood citadel, which proved impregnable by samoan arms, may be regarded as his front; the sea covered his right; and his rear extended along the coast as far as saluafata, and thus commanded and drew upon a rich country, including the plain of falefá. he was left in peace from th october till november th. but his adversary is not wholly to be blamed for this delay, which depended upon island etiquette. his savaii contingent had not yet come in, and to have moved again without waiting for them would have been surely to offend, perhaps to lose them. with the month of november they began to arrive: on the nd twenty boats, on the rd twenty-nine, on the th seventeen. on the th the position mataafa had so long occupied on the skirts of apia was deserted; all that day and night his force kept streaming eastward to laulii; and on the th the siege of lotoanuu was opened with a brisk skirmish. each side built forts, facing across the gorge of a brook. an endless fusillade and shouting maintained the spirit of the warriors; and at night, even if the firing slackened, the pickets continued to exchange from either side volleys of songs and pungent pleasantries. nearer hostilities were rendered difficult by the nature of the ground, where men must thread dense bush and clamber on the face of precipices. apia was near enough; a man, if he had a dollar or two, could walk in before a battle and array himself in silk or velvet. casualties were not common; there was nothing to cast gloom upon the camps, and no more danger than was required to give a spice to the perpetual firing. for the young warriors it was a period of admirable enjoyment. but the anxiety of mataafa must have been great and growing. his force was now considerable. it was scarce likely he should ever have more. that he should be long able to supply them with ammunition seemed incredible; at the rates then or soon after current, hundreds of pounds sterling might be easily blown into the air by the skirmishers in the course of a few days. and in the meanwhile, on the mountain opposite, his outnumbered adversary held his ground unshaken. by this time the partisanship of the whites was unconcealed. americans supplied mataafa with ammunition; english and americans openly subscribed together and sent boat-loads of provisions to his camp. one such boat started from apia on a day of rain; it was pulled by six oars, three being paid by moors, three by the macarthurs; moors himself and a clerk of the macarthurs' were in charge; and the load included not only beef and biscuit, but three or four thousand rounds of ammunition. they came ashore in laulii, and carried the gift to mataafa. while they were yet in his house a bullet passed overhead; and out of his door they could see the tamasese pickets on the opposite hill. thence they made their way to the left flank of the mataafa position next the sea. a tamasese barricade was visible across the stream. it rained, but the warriors crowded in their shanties, squatted in the mud, and maintained an excited conversation. balls flew; either faction, both happy as lords, spotting for the other in chance shots, and missing. one point is characteristic of that war; experts in native feeling doubt if it will characterise the next. the two white visitors passed without and between the lines to a rocky point upon the beach. the person of moors was well known; the purpose of their coming to laulii must have been already bruited abroad; yet they were not fired upon. from the point they spied a crow's nest, or hanging fortification, higher up; and, judging it was a good position for a general view, obtained a guide. he led them up a steep side of the mountain, where they must climb by roots and tufts of grass; and coming to an open hill-top with some scattered trees, bade them wait, let him draw the fire, and then be swift to follow. perhaps a dozen balls whistled about him ere he had crossed the dangerous passage and dropped on the farther side into the crow's-nest; the white men, briskly following, escaped unhurt. the crow's-nest was built like a bartizan on the precipitous front of the position. across the ravine, perhaps at five hundred yards, heads were to be seen popping up and down in a fort of tamesese's. on both sides the same enthusiasm without council, the same senseless vigilance, reigned. some took aim; some blazed before them at a venture. now--when a head showed on the other side--one would take a crack at it, remarking that it would never do to "miss a chance." now they would all fire a volley and bob down; a return volley rang across the ravine, and was punctually answered: harmless as lawn-tennis. the whites expostulated in vain. the warriors, drunken with noise, made answer by a fresh general discharge and bade their visitors run while it was time. upon their return to headquarters, men were covering the front with sheets of coral limestone, two balls having passed through the house in the interval. mataafa sat within, over his kava bowl, unmoved. the picture is of a piece throughout: excellent courage, super-excellent folly, a war of school-children; expensive guns and cartridges used like squibs or catherine-wheels on guy fawkes's day. on the th mataafa changed his attack. tamasese's front was seemingly impregnable. something must be tried upon his rear. there was his bread-basket; a small success in that direction would immediately curtail his resources; and it might be possible with energy to roll up his line along the beach and take the citadel in reverse. the scheme was carried out as might be expected from these childish soldiers. mataafa, always uneasy about apia, clung with a portion of his force to laulii; and thus, had the foe been enterprising, exposed himself to disaster. the expedition fell successfully enough on saluafata and drove out the tamaseses with a loss of four heads; but so far from improving the advantage, yielded immediately to the weakness of the samoan warrior, and ranged farther east through unarmed populations, bursting with shouts and blackened faces into villages terrified or admiring, making spoil of pigs, burning houses, and destroying gardens. the tamasese had at first evacuated several beach towns in succession, and were still in retreat on lotoanuu; finding themselves unpursued, they reoccupied them one after another, and re-established their lines to the very borders of saluafata. night fell; mataafa had taken saluafata, tamasese had lost it; and that was all. but the day came near to have a different and very singular issue. the village was not long in the hands of the mataafas, when a schooner, flying german colours, put into the bay and was immediately surrounded by their boats. it chanced that brandeis was on board. word of it had gone abroad, and the boats as they approached demanded him with threats. the late premier, alone, entirely unarmed, and a prey to natural and painful feelings, concealed himself below. the captain of the schooner remained on deck, pointed to the german colours, and defied approaching boats. again the prestige of a great power triumphed; the samoans fell back before the bunting; the schooner worked out of the bay; brandeis escaped. he himself apprehended the worst if he fell into samoan hands; it is my diffident impression that his life would have been safe. on the nd, a new german war-ship, the _eber_, of tragic memory, came to apia from the gilberts, where she had been disarming turbulent islands. the rest of that day and all night she loaded stores from the firm, and on the morrow reached saluafata bay. thanks to the misconduct of the mataafas, the most of the foreshore was still in the hands of the tamaseses; and they were thus able to receive from the _eber_ both the stores and weapons. the weapons had been sold long since to tarawa, apaiang, and pleasant island; places unheard of by the general reader, where obscure inhabitants paid for these instruments of death in money or in labour, misused them as it was known they would be misused, and had been disarmed by force. the _eber_ had brought back the guns to a german counter, whence many must have been originally sold; and was here engaged, like a shopboy, in their distribution to fresh purchasers. such is the vicious circle of the traffic in weapons of war. another aid of a more metaphysical nature was ministered by the _eber_ to tamasese, in the shape of uncountable german flags. the full history of this epidemic of bunting falls to be told in the next chapter. but the fact has to be chronicled here, for i believe it was to these flags that we owe the visit of the _adams_, and my next and best authentic glance into a native camp. the _adams_ arrived in saluafata on the th. on the morrow leary and moors landed at the village. it was still occupied by mataafas, mostly from manono and savaii, few in number, high in spirit. the tamasese pickets were meanwhile within musket range; there was maintained a steady sputtering of shots; and yet a party of tamasese women were here on a visit to the women of manono, with whom they sat talking and smoking, under the fire of their own relatives. it was reported that leary took part in a council of war, and promised to join with his broadside in the next attack. it is certain he did nothing of the sort: equally certain that, in tamasese circles, he was firmly credited with having done so. and this heightens the extraordinary character of what i have now to tell. prudence and delicacy alike ought to have forbid the camp of tamasese to the feet of either leary or moors. moors was the original--there was a time when he had been the only--opponent of the puppet king. leary had driven him from the seat of government; it was but a week or two since he had threatened to bombard him in his present refuge. both were in close and daily council with his adversary, and it was no secret that moors was supplying the latter with food. they were partisans; it lacked but a hair that they should be called belligerents; it were idle to try to deny they were the most dangerous of spies. and yet these two now sailed across the bay and landed inside the tamasese lines at salelesi. on the very beach they had another glimpse of the artlessness of samoan war. hitherto the tamasese fleet, being hardy and unencumbered, had made a fool of the huge floating forts upon the other side; and here they were toiling, not to produce another boat on their own pattern in which they had always enjoyed the advantage, but to make a new one the type of their enemies', of which they had now proved the uselessness for months. it came on to rain as the americans landed; and though none offered to oppose their coming ashore, none invited them to take shelter. they were nowise abashed, entered a house unbidden, and were made welcome with obvious reserve. the rain clearing off, they set forth westward, deeper into the heart of the enemies' position. three or four young men ran some way before them, doubtless to give warning; and leary, with his indomitable taste for mischief, kept inquiring as he went after "the high chief" tamasese. the line of the beach was one continuous breastwork; some thirty odd iron cannon of all sizes and patterns stood mounted in embrasures; plenty grape and canister lay ready; and at every hundred yards or so the german flag was flying. the numbers of the guns and flags i give as i received them, though they test my faith. at the house of brandeis--a little, weatherboard house, crammed at the time with natives, men, women, and squalling children--leary and moors again asked for "the high chief," and were again assured that he was farther on. a little beyond, the road ran in one place somewhat inland, the two americans had gone down to the line of the beach to continue their inspection of the breastwork, when brandeis himself, in his shirt-sleeves and accompanied by several german officers, passed them by the line of the road. the two parties saluted in silence. beyond eva point there was an observable change for the worse in the reception of the americans; some whom they met began to mutter at moors; and the adventurers, with tardy but commendable prudence, desisted from their search after the high chief, and began to retrace their steps. on the return, suatele and some chiefs were drinking kava in a "big house," and called them in to join--their only invitation. but the night was closing, the rain had begun again: they stayed but for civility, and returned on board the _adams_, wet and hungry, and i believe delighted with their expedition. it was perhaps the last as it was certainly one of the most extreme examples of that divinity which once hedged the white in samoa. the feeling was already different in the camp of mataafa, where the safety of a german loiterer had been a matter of extreme concern. ten days later, three commissioners, an englishman, an american, and a german, approached a post of mataafas, were challenged by an old man with a gun, and mentioned in answer what they were. "_ifea siamani?_ which is the german?" cried the old gentleman, dancing, and with his finger on the trigger; and the commissioners stood somewhile in a very anxious posture, till they were released by the opportune arrival of a chief. it was november the th when leary and moors completed their absurd excursion; in about three weeks an event was to befall which changed at once, and probably for ever, the relations of the natives and the whites. by the th tamasese had collected seventeen hundred men in the trenches before saluafata, thinking to attack next day. but the mataafas evacuated the place in the night. at half-past five on the morning of the th a signal-gun was fired in the trenches at laulii, and the tamasese citadel was assaulted and defended with a fury new among samoans. when the battle ended on the following day, one or more outworks remained in the possession of mataafa. another had been taken and lost as many as four times. carried originally by a mixed force from savaii and tuamasanga, the victors, instead of completing fresh defences or pursuing their advantage, fell to eat and smoke and celebrate their victory with impromptu songs. in this humour a rally of the tamaseses smote them, drove them out pell-mell, and tumbled them into the ravine, where many broke their heads and legs. again the work was taken, again lost. ammunition failed the belligerents; and they fought hand to hand in the contested fort with axes, clubs, and clubbed rifles. the sustained ardour of the engagement surprised even those who were engaged; and the butcher's bill was counted extraordinary by samoans. on december st the women of either side collected the headless bodies of the dead, each easily identified by the name tattooed on his forearm. mataafa is thought to have lost sixty killed; and the de coetlogons' hospital received three women and forty men. the casualties on the tamasese side cannot be accepted, but they were presumably much less. chapter viii affairs of laulii and fangalii _november--december_ for becker i have not been able to conceal my distaste, for he seems to me both false and foolish. but of his successor, the unfortunately famous dr. knappe, we may think as of a good enough fellow driven distraught. fond of samoa and the samoans, he thought to bring peace and enjoy popularity among the islanders; of a genial, amiable, and sanguine temper, he made no doubt but he could repair the breach with the english consul. hope told a flattering tale. he awoke to find himself exchanging defiances with de coetlogon, beaten in the field by mataafa, surrounded on the spot by general exasperation, and disowned from home by his own government. the history of his administration leaves on the mind of the student a sentiment of pity scarcely mingled. on blacklock he did not call, and, in view of leary's attitude, may be excused. but the english consul was in a different category. england, weary of the name of samoa, and desirous only to see peace established, was prepared to wink hard during the process and to welcome the result of any german settlement. it was an unpardonable fault in becker to have kicked and buffeted his ready-made allies into a state of jealousy, anger, and suspicion. knappe set himself at once to efface these impressions, and the english officials rejoiced for the moment in the change. between knappe and de coetlogon there seems to have been mutual sympathy; and, in considering the steps by which they were led at last into an attitude of mutual defiance, it must be remembered that both the men were sick,--knappe from time to time prostrated with that formidable complaint, new guinea fever, and de coetlogon throughout his whole stay in the islands continually ailing. tamasese was still to be recognised, and, if possible, supported: such was the german policy. two days after his arrival, accordingly, knappe addressed to mataafa a threatening despatch. the german plantation was suffering from the proximity of his "war-party." he must withdraw from laulii at once, and, whithersoever he went, he must approach no german property nor so much as any village where there was a german trader. by five o'clock on the morrow, if he were not gone, knappe would turn upon him "the attention of the man-of-war" and inflict a fine. the same evening, november th, knappe went on board the _adler_, which began to get up steam. three months before, such direct intervention on the part of germany would have passed almost without protest; but the hour was now gone by. becker's conduct, equally timid and rash, equally inconclusive and offensive, had forced the other nations into a strong feeling of common interest with mataafa. even had the german demands been moderate, de coetlogon could not have forgotten the night of the _taumualua_, nor how mataafa had relinquished, at his request, the attack upon the german quarter. blacklock, with his driver of a captain at his elbow, was not likely to lag behind. and mataafa having communicated knappe's letter, the example of the germans was on all hands exactly followed; the consuls hastened on board their respective war-ships, and these began to get up steam. about midnight, in a pouring rain, pelly communicated to fritze his intention to follow him and protect british interests; and knappe replied that he would come on board the _lizard_ and see de coetlogon personally. it was deep in the small hours, and de coetlogon had been long asleep, when he was wakened to receive his colleague; but he started up with an old soldier's readiness. the conference was long. de coetlogon protested, as he did afterwards in writing, against knappe's claim: the samoans were in a state of war; they had territorial rights; it was monstrous to prevent them from entering one of their own villages because a german trader kept the store; and in case property suffered, a claim for compensation was the proper remedy. knappe argued that this was a question between germans and samoans, in which de coetlogon had nothing to see; and that he must protect german property according to his instructions. to which de coetlogon replied that he was himself in the same attitude to the property of the british; that he understood knappe to be intending hostilities against laulii; that laulii was mortgaged to the macarthurs; that its crops were accordingly british property; and that, while he was ever willing to recognise the territorial rights of the samoans, he must prevent that property from being molested "by any other nation." "but if a german man-of-war does it?" asked knappe.--"we shall prevent it to the best of our ability," replied the colonel. it is to the credit of both men that this trying interview should have been conducted and concluded without heat; but knappe must have returned to the _adler_ with darker anticipations. at sunrise on the morning of the th, the three ships, each loaded with its consul, put to sea. it is hard to exaggerate the peril of the forenoon that followed, as they lay off laulii. nobody desired a collision, save perhaps the reckless leary; but peace and war trembled in the balance; and when the _adler_, at one period, lowered her gun ports, war appeared to preponderate. it proved, however, to be a last--and therefore surely an unwise--extremity. knappe contented himself with visiting the rival kings, and the three ships returned to apia before noon. beyond a doubt, coming after knappe's decisive letter of the day before, this impotent conclusion shook the credit of germany among the natives of both sides; the tamaseses fearing they were deserted, the mataafas (with secret delight) hoping they were feared. and it gave an impetus to that ridiculous business which might have earned for the whole episode the name of the war of flags. british and american flags had been planted the night before, and were seen that morning flying over what they claimed about laulii. british and american passengers, on the way up and down, pointed out from the decks of the war-ships, with generous vagueness, the boundaries of problematical estates. ten days later, the beach of saluafata bay fluttered (as i have told in the last chapter) with the flag of germany. the americans riposted with a claim to tamasese's camp, some small part of which (says knappe) did really belong to "an american nigger." the disease spread, the flags were multiplied, the operations of war became an egg-dance among miniature neutral territories; and though all men took a hand in these proceedings, all men in turn were struck with their absurdity. mullan, leary's successor, warned knappe, in an emphatic despatch, not to squander and discredit the solemnity of that emblem which was all he had to be a defence to his own consulate. and knappe himself, in his despatch of march st, , castigates the practice with much sense. but this was after the tragi-comic culmination had been reached, and the burnt rags of one of these too-frequently mendacious signals gone on a progress to washington, like cæsar's body, arousing indignation where it came. to such results are nations conducted by the patent artifices of a becker. the discussion of the morning, the silent menace and defiance of the voyage to laulii, might have set the best-natured by the ears. but knappe and de coetlogon took their difference in excellent part. on the morrow, november th, they sat down together with blacklock in conference. the english consul introduced his colleagues, who shook hands. if knappe were dead-weighted with the inheritance of becker, blacklock was handicapped by reminiscences of leary; it is the more to the credit of this inexperienced man that he should have maintained in the future so excellent an attitude of firmness and moderation, and that when the crash came, knappe and de coetlogon, not knappe and blacklock, were found to be the protagonists of the drama. the conference was futile. the english and american consuls admitted but one cure of the evils of the time: that the farce of the tamasese monarchy should cease. it was one which the german refused to consider. and the agents separated without reaching any result, save that diplomatic relations had been restored between the states and germany, and that all three were convinced of their fundamental differences. knappe and de coetlogon were still friends; they had disputed and differed and come within a finger's breadth of war, and they were still friends. but an event was at hand which was to separate them for ever. on december th came the _royalist_, captain hand, to relieve the _lizard_. pelly of course had to take his canvas from the consulate hospital; but he had in charge certain awnings belonging to the _royalist_, and with these they made shift to cover the wounded, at that time (after the fight at laulii) more than usually numerous. a lieutenant came to the consulate, and delivered (as i have received it) the following message: "captain hand's compliments, and he says you must get rid of these niggers at once, and he will help you to do it." doubtless the reply was no more civil than the message. the promised "help," at least, followed promptly. a boat's crew landed and the awnings were stripped from the wounded, hand himself standing on the colonel's verandah to direct operations. it were fruitless to discuss this passage from the humanitarian point of view, or from that of formal courtesy. the mind of the new captain was plainly not directed to these objects. but it is understood that he considered the existence of a hospital a source of irritation to germans and a fault in policy. his own rude act proved in the result far more impolitic. the hospital had now been open some two months, and de coetlogon was still on friendly terms with knappe, and he and his wife were engaged to dine with him that day. by the morrow that was practically ended. for the rape of the awnings had two results: one, which was the fault of de coetlogon, not at all of hand, who could not have foreseen it; the other which it was his duty to have seen and prevented. the first was this: the de coetlogons found themselves left with their wounded exposed to the inclemencies of the season; they must all be transported into the house and verandah; in the distress and pressure of this task, the dinner engagement was too long forgotten; and a note of excuse did not reach the german consulate before the table was set, and knappe dressed to receive his visitors. the second consequence was inevitable. captain hand was scarce landed ere it became public (was "_sofort bekannt_," writes knappe) that he and the consul were in opposition. all that had been gained by the demonstration at laulii was thus immediately cast away; de coetlogon's prestige was lessened; and it must be said plainly that hand did less than nothing to restore it. twice indeed he interfered, both times with success; and once, when his own person had been endangered, with vehemence; but during all the strange doings i have to narrate, he remained in close intimacy with the german consulate, and on one occasion may be said to have acted as its marshal. after the worst is over, after bismarck has told knappe that "the protests of his english colleague were grounded," that his own conduct "has not been good," and that in any dispute which may arise he "will find himself in the wrong," knappe can still plead in his defence that captain hand "has always maintained friendly intercourse with the german authorities." singular epitaph for an english sailor. in this complicity on the part of hand we may find the reason--and i had almost said, the excuse--of much that was excessive in the bearing of the unfortunate knappe. on the th december, mataafa received twenty-eight thousand cartridges, brought into the country in salt-beef kegs by the british ship _richmond_. this not only sharpened the animosity between whites; following so closely on the german fizzle at laulii, it raised a convulsion in the camp of tamasese. on the th brandeis addressed to knappe his famous and fatal letter. i may not describe it as a letter of burning words, but it is plainly dictated by a burning heart. tamasese and his chiefs, he announces, are now sick of the business, and ready to make peace with mataafa. they began the war relying upon german help; they now see and say that "_e faaalo siamani i peritania ma america_, that germany is subservient to england and the states." it is grimly given to be understood that the despatch is an ultimatum, and a last chance is being offered for the recreant ally to fulfil her pledge. to make it more plain, the document goes on with a kind of bilious irony: "the two german war-ships now in samoa are here for the protection of german property alone; and when the _olga_ shall have arrived" [she arrived on the morrow] "the german war-ships will continue to do against the insurgents precisely as little as they have done heretofore." plant flags, in fact. here was knappe's opportunity, could he have stooped to seize it. i find it difficult to blame him that he could not. far from being so inglorious as the treachery once contemplated by becker, the acceptance of this ultimatum would have been still in the nature of a disgrace. brandeis's letter, written by a german, was hard to swallow. it would have been hard to accept that solution which knappe had so recently and so peremptorily refused to his brother consuls. and he was tempted, on the other hand, by recent changes. there was no pelly to support de coetlogon, who might now be disregarded. mullan, leary's successor, even if he were not precisely a hand, was at least no leary; and even if mullan should show fight, knappe had now three ships and could defy or sink him without danger. many small circumstances moved him in the same direction. the looting of german plantations continued; the whole force of mataafa was to a large extent subsisted from the crops of vailele; and armed men were to be seen openly plundering bananas, bread-fruit, and cocoa-nuts under the walls of the plantation building. on the night of the th the consulate stable had been broken into and a horse removed. on the th there was a riot in apia between half-castes and sailors from the new ship _olga_, each side claiming that the other was the worse of drink, both (for a wager) justly. the multiplication of flags and little neutral territories had, besides, begun to irritate the samoans. the protests of german settlers had been received uncivilly. on the th the mataafas had again sought to land in saluafata bay, with the manifest intention to attack the tamaseses, or (in other words) "to trespass on german lands, covered, as your excellency knows, with flags." i quote from his requisition to fritze, december th. upon all these considerations, he goes on, it is necessary to bring the fighting to an end. both parties are to be disarmed and returned to their villages--mataafa first. and in case of any attempt upon apia, the roads thither are to be held by a strong landing-party. mataafa was to be disarmed first, perhaps rightly enough in his character of the last insurgent. then was to have come the turn of tamasese; but it does not appear the disarming would have had the same import or have been gone about in the same way. germany was bound to tamasese. no honest man would dream of blaming knappe because he sought to redeem his country's word. the path he chose was doubtless that of honour, so far as honour was still left. but it proved to be the road to ruin. fritze, ranking german officer, is understood to have opposed the measure. his attitude earned him at the time unpopularity among his country-people on the spot, and should now redound to his credit. it is to be hoped he extended his opposition to some of the details. if it were possible to disarm mataafa at all, it must be done rather by prestige than force. a party of blue-jackets landed in samoan bush, and expected to hold against samoans a multiplicity of forest paths, had their work cut out for them. and it was plain they should be landed in the light of day, with a discouraging openness, and even with parade. to sneak ashore by night was to increase the danger of resistance and to minimise the authority of the attack. the thing was a bluff, and it is impossible to bluff with stealth. yet this was what was tried. a landing-party was to leave the _olga_ in apia bay at two in the morning; the landing was to be at four on two parts of the foreshore of vailele. at eight they were to be joined by a second landing-party from the _eber_. by nine the olgas were to be on the crest of letongo mountain, and the ebers to be moving round the promontory by the seaward paths, "with measures of precaution," disarming all whom they encountered. there was to be no firing unless fired upon. at the appointed hour (or perhaps later) on the morning of the th, this unpromising business was put in hand, and there moved off from the _olga_ two boats with some fifty blue-jackets between them, and a _praam_ or punt containing ninety,--the boats and the whole expedition under the command of captain-lieutenant jaeckel, the praam under lieutenant spengler. the men had each forty rounds, one day's provisions, and their flasks filled. in the meanwhile, mataafa sympathisers about apia were on the alert. knappe had informed the consuls that the ships were to put to sea next day for the protection of german property; but the tamaseses had been less discreet. "to-morrow at the hour of seven," they had cried to their adversaries, "you will know of a difficulty, and our guns shall be made good in broken bones." an accident had pointed expectation towards apia. the wife of le mamea washed for the german ships--a perquisite, i suppose, for her husband's unwilling fidelity. she sent a man with linen on board the _adler_, where he was surprised to see le mamea in person, and to be himself ordered instantly on shore. the news spread. if mamea were brought down from lotoanuu, others might have come at the same time. tamasese himself and half his army might perhaps lie concealed on board the german ships. and a watch was accordingly set and warriors collected along the line of the shore. one detachment lay in some rifle-pits by the mouth of the fuisá. they were commanded by seumanu; and with his party, probably as the most contiguous to apia, was the war-correspondent, john klein. of english birth, but naturalised american, this gentleman had been for some time representing the _new york world_ in a very effective manner, always in the front, living in the field with the samoans, and in all vicissitudes of weather, toiling to and fro with his despatches. his wisdom was perhaps not equal to his energy. he made himself conspicuous, going about armed to the teeth in a boat under the stars and stripes; and on one occasion, when he supposed himself fired upon by the tamaseses, had the petulance to empty his revolver in the direction of their camp. by the light of the moon, which was then nearly down, this party observed the _olga's_ two boats and the praam, which they described as "almost sinking with men," the boats keeping well out towards the reef, the praam at the moment apparently heading for the shore. an extreme agitation seems to have reigned in the rifle-pits. what were the new-comers? what was their errand? were they germans or tamaseses? had they a mind to attack? the praam was hailed in samoan and did not answer. it was proposed to fire upon her ere she drew near. and at last, whether on his own suggestion or that of seumanu, klein hailed her in english, and in terms of unnecessary melodrama. "do not try to land here," he cried. "if you do, your blood will be upon your head." spengler, who had never the least intention to touch at the fuisá, put up the head of the praam to her true course and continued to move up the lagoon with an offing of some seventy or eighty yards. along all the irregularities and obstructions of the beach, across the mouth of the vaivasa, and through the startled village of matafangatele, seumanu, klein, and seven or eight others raced to keep up, spreading the alarm and rousing reinforcements as they went. presently a man on horseback made his appearance on the opposite beach of fangalii. klein and the natives distinctly saw him signal with a lantern; which is the more strange, as the horseman (captain hufnagel, plantation manager of vailele) had never a lantern to signal with. the praam kept in. many men in white were seen to stand up, step overboard, and wade to shore. at the same time the eye of panic descried a breastwork of "foreign stone" (brick) upon the beach. samoans are prepared to-day to swear to its existence, i believe conscientiously, although no such thing was ever made or ever intended in that place. the hour is doubtful. "it was the hour when the streak of dawn is seen, the hour known in the warfare of heathen times as the hour of the night attack," says the mataafa official account. a native whom i met on the field declared it was at cock-crow. captain hufnagel, on the other hand, is sure it was long before the day. it was dark at least, and the moon down. darkness made the samoans bold; uncertainty as to the composition and purpose of the landing-party made them desperate. fire was opened on the germans, one of whom was here killed. the germans returned it, and effected a lodgment on the beach; and the skirmish died again to silence. it was at this time, if not earlier, that klein returned to apia. here, then, were spengler and the ninety men of the praam, landed on the beach in no very enviable posture, the woods in front filled with unnumbered enemies, but for the time successful. meanwhile, jaeckel and the boats had gone outside the reef, and were to land on the other side of the vailele promontory, at sunga, by the buildings of the plantation. it was hufnagel's part to go and meet them. his way led straight into the woods and through the midst of the samoans, who had but now ceased firing. he went in the saddle and at a foot's pace, feeling speed and concealment to be equally helpless, and that if he were to fall at all, he had best fall with dignity. not a shot was fired at him; no effort made to arrest him on his errand. as he went, he spoke and even jested with the samoans, and they answered in good part. one fellow was leaping, yelling, and tossing his axe in the air, after the way of an excited islander. "_faimalosi_! go it!" said hufnagel, and the fellow laughed and redoubled his exertions. as soon as the boats entered the lagoon, fire was again opened from the woods. the fifty blue-jackets jumped overboard, hove down the boats to be a shield, and dragged them towards the landing-place. in this way, their rations, and (what was more unfortunate) some of their miserable provision of forty rounds got wetted; but the men came to shore and garrisoned the plantation house without a casualty. meanwhile the sound of the firing from sunga immediately renewed the hostilities at fangalii. the civilians on shore decided that spengler must be at once guided to the house, and haideln, the surveyor, accepted the dangerous errand. like hufnagel, he was suffered to pass without question through the midst of these platonic enemies. he found spengler some way inland on a knoll, disastrously engaged, the woods around him filled with samoans, who were continuously reinforced. in three successive charges, cheering as they ran, the blue-jackets burst through their scattered opponents, and made good their junction with jaeckel. four men only remained upon the field, the other wounded being helped by their comrades or dragging themselves painfully along. the force was now concentrated in the house and its immediate patch of garden. their rear, to the seaward, was unmolested; but on three sides they were beleaguered. on the left, the samoans occupied and fired from some of the plantation offices. in front, a long rising crest of land in the horse-pasture commanded the house, and was lined with the assailants. and on the right, the hedge of the same paddock afforded them a dangerous cover. it was in this place that a samoan sharpshooter was knocked over by jaeckel with his own hand. the fire was maintained by the samoans in the usual wasteful style. the roof was made a sieve; the balls passed clean through the house; lieutenant sieger, as he lay, already dying, on hufnagel's bed, was despatched with a fresh wound. the samoans showed themselves extremely enterprising: pushed their lines forward, ventured beyond cover, and continually threatened to envelop the garden. thrice, at least, it was necessary to repel them by a sally. the men were brought into the house from the rear, the front doors were thrown suddenly open, and the gallant blue-jackets issued cheering: necessary, successful, but extremely costly sorties. neither could these be pushed far. the foes were undaunted; so soon as the sailors advanced at all deep in the horse-pasture, the samoans began to close in upon both flanks; and the sally had to be recalled. to add to the dangers of the german situation, ammunition began to run low; and the cartridge-boxes of the wounded and the dead had been already brought into use before, at about eight o'clock, the _eber_ steamed into the bay. her commander, wallis, threw some shells into letongo, one of which killed five men about their cooking-pot. the samoans began immediately to withdraw; their movements were hastened by a sortie, and the remains of the landing-party brought on board. this was an unfortunate movement; it gave an irremediable air of defeat to what might have been else claimed for a moderate success. the blue-jackets numbered a hundred and forty all told; they were engaged separately and fought under the worst conditions, in the dark and among woods; their position in the house was scarce tenable; they lost in killed and wounded fifty-six,--forty per cent.; and their spirit to the end was above question. whether we think of the poor sailor lads, always so pleasantly behaved in times of peace, or whether we call to mind the behaviour of the two civilians, haideln and hufnagel, we can only regret that brave men should stand to be exposed upon so poor a quarrel, or lives cast away upon an enterprise so hopeless. news of the affair reached apia early, and moors, always curious of these spectacles of war, was immediately in the saddle. near matafangatele he met a manono chief, whom he asked if there were any german dead. "i think there are about thirty of them knocked over," said he. "have you taken their heads?" asked moors. "yes," said the chief. "some foolish people did it, but i have stopped them. we ought not to cut off their heads when they do not cut off ours." he was asked what had been done with the heads. "two have gone to mataafa," he replied, "and one is buried right under where your horse is standing, in a basket wrapped in tapa." this was afterwards dug up, and i am told on native authority that, besides the three heads, two ears were taken. moors next asked the manono man how he came to be going away. "the man-of-war is throwing shells," said he. "when they stopped firing out of the house, we stopped firing also; so it was as well to scatter when the shells began. we could have killed all the white men. i wish they had been tamaseses." this is an _ex parte_ statement, and i give it for such; but the course of the affair, and in particular the adventures of haideln and hufnagel, testify to a surprising lack of animosity against the germans. about the same time or but a little earlier than this conversation, the same spirit was being displayed. hufnagel, with a party of labour, had gone out to bring in the german dead, when he was surprised to be suddenly fired on from the wood. the boys he had with him were not negritos, but polynesians from the gilbert islands; and he suddenly remembered that these might be easily mistaken for a detachment of tamaseses. bidding his boys conceal themselves in a thicket, this brave man walked into the open. so soon as he was recognised, the firing ceased, and the labourers followed him in safety. this is chivalrous war; but there was a side to it less chivalrous. as moors drew nearer to vailele, he began to meet samoans with hats, guns, and even shirts, taken from the german sailors. with one of these who had a hat and a gun he stopped and spoke. the hat was handed up for him to look at; it had the late owner's name on the inside. "where is he?" asked moors. "he is dead; i cut his head off." "you shot him?" "no, somebody else shot him in the hip. when i came, he put up his hands, and cried: 'don't kill me; i am a malietoa man.' i did not believe him, and i cut his head off." "have you any ammunition to fit that gun?" "i do not know." "what has become of the cartridge-belt?" "another fellow grabbed that and the cartridges, and he won't give them to me." a dreadful and silly picture of barbaric war. the words of the german sailor must be regarded as imaginary: how was the poor lad to speak native, or the samoan to understand german? when moors came as far as sunga, the _eber_ was yet in the bay, the smoke of battle still lingered among the trees, which were themselves marked with a thousand bullet-wounds. but the affair was over, the combatants, german and samoan, were all gone, and only a couple of negrito labour boys lurked on the scene. the village of letongo beyond was equally silent; part of it was wrecked by the shells of the _eber_, and still smoked; the inhabitants had fled. on the beach were the native boats, perhaps five thousand dollars' worth, deserted by the mataafas and overlooked by the germans, in their common hurry to escape. still moors held eastward by the sea-paths. it was his hope to get a view from the other side of the promontory, towards laulii. in the way he found a house hidden in the wood and among rocks, where an aged and sick woman was being tended by her elderly daughter. last lingerers in that deserted piece of coast, they seemed indifferent to the events which had thus left them solitary, and, as the daughter said, did not know where mataafa was, nor where tamasese. it is the official samoan pretension that the germans fired first at fangalii. in view of all german and some native testimony, the text of fritze's orders, and the probabilities of the case, no honest mind will believe it for a moment. certainly the samoans fired first. as certainly they were betrayed into the engagement in the agitation of the moment, and it was not till afterwards that they understood what they had done. then, indeed, all samoa drew a breath of wonder and delight. the invincible had fallen; the men of the vaunted war-ships had been met in the field by the braves of mataafa: a superstition was no more. conceive this people steadily as schoolboys; and conceive the elation in any school if the head boy should suddenly arise and drive the rector from the schoolhouse. i have received one instance of the feeling instantly aroused. there lay at the time in the consular hospital an old chief who was a pet of the colonel's. news reached him of the glorious event; he was sick, he thought himself sinking, sent for the colonel, and gave him his gun. "don't let the germans get it," said the old gentleman, and having received a promise, was at peace. chapter ix "furor consularis" _december_ _to march_ knappe, in the _adler,_ with a flag of truce at the fore, was entering laulii bay when the _eber_ brought him the news of the night's reverse. his heart was doubtless wrung for his young countrymen who had been butchered and mutilated in the dark woods, or now lay suffering, and some of them dying, on the ship. and he must have been startled as he recognised his own position. he had gone too far; he had stumbled into war, and, what was worse, into defeat; he had thrown away german lives for less than nothing, and now saw himself condemned either to accept defeat, or to kick and pummel his failure into something like success; either to accept defeat, or take frenzy for a counsellor. yesterday, in cold blood, he had judged it necessary to have the woods to the westward guarded lest the evacuation of laulii should prove only the peril of apia. to-day, in the irritation and alarm of failure, he forgot or despised his previous reasoning, and, though his detachment was beat back to the ships, proceeded with the remainder of his maimed design. the only change he made was to haul down the flag of truce. he had now no wish to meet with mataafa. words were out of season, shells must speak. at this moment an incident befell him which must have been trying to his self-command. the new american ship _nipsic_ entered laulii bay; her commander, mullan, boarded the _adler_ to protest, succeeded in wresting from knappe a period of delay in order that the women might be spared, and sent a lieutenant to mataafa with a warning. the camp was already excited by the news and the trophies of fangalii. already tamasese and lotoanuu seemed secondary objectives to the germans and apia. mullan's message put an end to hesitation. laulii was evacuated. the troops streamed westward by the mountain side, and took up the same day a strong position about tanungamanono and mangiangi, some two miles behind apia, which they threatened with the one hand, while with the other they continued to draw their supplies from the devoted plantations of the german firm. laulii, when it was shelled, was empty. the british flags were, of course, fired upon; and i hear that one of them was struck down, but i think every one must be privately of the mind that it was fired upon and fell, in a place where it had little business to be shown. such was the military epilogue to the ill-judged adventure of fangalii; it was difficult for failure to be more complete. but the other consequences were of a darker colour and brought the whites immediately face to face in a spirit of ill-favoured animosity. knappe was mourning the defeat and death of his country-folk, he was standing aghast over the ruin of his own career, when mullan boarded him. the successor of leary served himself, in that bitter moment, heir to leary's part. and in mullan, knappe saw more even than the successor of leary,--he saw in him the representative of klein. klein had hailed the praam from the rifle-pits; he had there uttered ill-chosen words, unhappily prophetic; it is even likely that he was present at the time of the first fire. to accuse him of the design and conduct of the whole attack was but a step forward; his own vapouring served to corroborate the accusation; and it was not long before the german consulate was in possession of sworn native testimony in support. the worth of native testimony is small, the worth of white testimony not overwhelming; and i am in the painful position of not being able to subscribe either to klein's own account of the affair or to that of his accusers. klein was extremely flurried; his interest as a reporter must have tempted him at first to make the most of his share in the exploit, the immediate peril in which he soon found himself to stand must have at least suggested to him the idea of minimising it; one way and another, he is not a good witness. as for the natives, they were no doubt cross-examined in that hall of terror, the german consulate, where they might be trusted to lie like schoolboys, or (if the reader prefer it) like samoans. by outside white testimony, it remains established for me that klein returned to apia either before or immediately after the first shots. that he ever sought or was ever allowed a share in the command may be denied peremptorily; but it is more than likely that he expressed himself in an excited manner and with a highly inflammatory effect upon his hearers. he was, at least, severely punished. the germans, enraged by his provocative behaviour and what they thought to be his german birth, demanded him to be tried before court-martial; he had to skulk inside the sentries of the american consulate, to be smuggled on board a war-ship, and to be carried almost by stealth out of the island; and what with the agitations of his mind, and the results of a marsh fever contracted in the lines of mataafa, reached honolulu a very proper object of commiseration. nor was klein the only accused: de coetlogon was himself involved. as the boats passed matautu, knappe declares a signal was made from the british consulate. perhaps we should rather read "from its neighbourhood"; since, in the general warding of the coast, the point of matautu could scarce have been neglected. on the other hand, there is no doubt that the samoans, in the anxiety of that night of watching and fighting, crowded to the friendly consul for advice. late in the night, the wounded siteoni, lying on the colonel's verandah, one corner of which had been blinded down that he might sleep, heard the coming and going of bare feet and the voices of eager consultation. and long after, a man who had been discharged from the colonel's employment took upon himself to swear an affidavit as to the nature of the advice then given, and to carry the document to the german consul. it was an act of private revenge; it fell long out of date in the good days of dr. stuebel, and had no result but to discredit the gentleman who volunteered it. colonel de coetlogon had his faults, but they did not touch his honour; his bare word would always outweigh a waggon-load of such denunciations; and he declares his behaviour on that night to have been blameless. the question was besides inquired into on the spot by sir john thurston, and the colonel honourably acquitted. but during the weeks that were now to follow, knappe believed the contrary; he believed not only that moors and others had supplied ammunition and klein commanded in the field, but that de coetlogon had made the signal of attack; that though his blue-jackets had bled and fallen against the arms of samoans, these were supplied, inspired, and marshalled by americans and english. the legend was the more easily believed because it embraced and was founded upon so much truth. germans lay dead, the german wounded groaned in their cots; and the cartridges by which they fell had been sold by an american and brought into the country in a british bottom. had the transaction been entirely mercenary, it would already have been hard to swallow; but it was notoriously not so. british and americans were notoriously the partisans of mataafa. they rejoiced in the result of fangalii, and so far from seeking to conceal their rejoicing, paraded and displayed it. calumny ran high. before the dead were buried, while the wounded yet lay in pain and fever, cowardly accusations of cowardice were levelled at the german blue-jackets. it was said they had broken and run before their enemies, and that they had huddled helpless like sheep in the plantation house. small wonder if they had; small wonder had they been utterly destroyed. but the fact was heroically otherwise; and these dastard calumnies cut to the blood. they are not forgotten; perhaps they will never be forgiven. in the meanwhile, events were pressing towards a still more trenchant opposition. on the th, the three consuls met and parted without agreement, knappe announcing that he had lost men and must take the matter in his own hands to avenge their death. on the st the _olga_ came before matafangatele, ordered the delivery of all arms within the hour, and at the end of that period, none being brought, shelled and burned the village. the shells fell for the most part innocuous; an eyewitness saw children at play beside the flaming houses; not a soul was injured; and the one noteworthy event was the mutilation of captain hamilton's american flag. in one sense an incident too small to be chronicled, in another this was of historic interest and import. these rags of tattered bunting occasioned the display of a new sentiment in the united states; and the republic of the west, hitherto so apathetic and unwieldy, but already stung by german nonchalance, leaped to its feet for the first time at the news of this fresh insult. as though to make the inefficiency of the war-ships more apparent, three shells were thrown inland at mangiangi; they flew high over the mataafa camp, where the natives could "hear them singing" as they flew, and fell behind in the deep romantic valley of the vaisingano. mataafa had been already summoned on board the _adler_; his life promised if he came, declared "in danger" if he came not; and he had declined in silence the unattractive invitation. these fresh hostile acts showed him that the worst had come. he was in strength, his force posted along the whole front of the mountain behind apia, matautu occupied, the siumu road lined up to the houses of the town with warriors passionate for war. the occasion was unique, and there is no doubt that he designed to seize it. the same day of this bombardment, he sent word bidding all english and americans wear a black band upon their arm, so that his men should recognise and spare them. the hint was taken, and the band worn for a continuance of days. to have refused would have been insane; but to consent was unhappily to feed the resentment of the germans by a fresh sign of intelligence with their enemies, and to widen the breach between the races by a fresh and a scarce pardonable mark of their division. the same day again the germans repeated one of their earlier offences by firing on a boat within the harbour. times were changed; they were now at war and in peril, the rigour of military advantage might well be seized by them and pardoned by others; but it so chanced that the bullets flew about the ears of captain hand, and that commander is said to have been insatiable of apologies. the affair, besides, had a deplorable effect on the inhabitants. a black band (they saw) might protect them from the mataafas, not from undiscriminating shots. panic ensued. the war-ships were open to receive the fugitives, and the gentlemen who had made merry over fangalii were seen to thrust each other from the wharves in their eagerness to flee apia. i willingly drop the curtain on the shameful picture. meanwhile, on the german side of the bay, a more manly spirit was exhibited in circumstances of alarming weakness. the plantation managers and overseers had all retreated to matafele, only one (i understand) remaining at his post. the whole german colony was thus collected in one spot, and could count and wonder at its scanty numbers. knappe declares (to my surprise) that the war-ships could not spare him more than fifty men a day. the great extension of the german quarter, he goes on, did not "allow a full occupation of the outer line"; hence they had shrunk into the western end by the firm buildings, and the inhabitants were warned to fall back on this position, in the case of an alert. so that he who had set forth, a day or so before, to disarm the mataafas in the open field, now found his resources scarce adequate to garrison the buildings of the firm. but knappe seemed unteachable by fate. it is probable he thought he had "already waded in so deep, returning were as tedious as go o'er"; it is certain that he continued, on the scene of his defeat and in the midst of his weakness, to bluster and menace like a conqueror. active war, which he lacked the means of attempting, was continually threatened. on the nd he sought the aid of his brother consuls to maintain the neutral territory against mataafa; and at the same time, as though meditating instant deeds of prowess, refused to be bound by it himself. this singular proposition was of course refused: blacklock remarking that he had no fear of the natives, if these were let alone; de coetlogon refusing in the circumstances to recognise any neutral territory at all. in vain knappe amended and baited his proposal with the offer of forty-eight or ninety-six hours' notice, according as his objective should be near or within the boundary of the _eleele sa_. it was rejected; and he learned that he must accept war with all its consequences--and not that which he desired--war with the immunities of peace. this monstrous exigence illustrates the man's frame of mind. it has been still further illuminated in the german white-book by printing alongside of his despatches those of the unimpassioned fritze. on january th the consulate was destroyed by fire. knappe says it was the work of incendiaries, "without doubt"; fritze admits that "everything seems to show" it was an accident. "tamasese's people fit to bear arms," writes knappe, "are certainly for the moment equal to mataafa's," though restrained from battle by the lack of ammunition. "as for tamasese," says fritze of the same date, "he is now but a phantom--_dient er nur als gespenst_. his party, for practical purposes, is no longer large. they pretend ammunition to be lacking, but what they lack most is good-will. captain brandeis, whose influence is now small, declares they can no longer sustain a serious engagement, and is himself in the intention of leaving samoa by the _lübeck_ of the th february." and knappe, in the same despatch, confutes himself and confirms the testimony of his naval colleague, by the admission that "the re-establishment of tamasese's government is, under present circumstances, not to be thought of." plainly, then, he was not so much seeking to deceive others, as he was himself possessed; and we must regard the whole series of his acts and despatches as the agitations of a fever. the british steamer _richmond_ returned to apia, january th. on the last voyage she had brought the ammunition already so frequently referred to; as a matter of fact, she was again bringing contraband of war. it is necessary to be explicit upon this, which served as spark to so great a flame of scandal. knappe was justified in interfering; he would have been worthy of all condemnation if he had neglected, in his posture of semi-investment, a precaution so elementary; and the manner in which he set about attempting it was conciliatory and almost timid. he applied to captain hand, and begged him to accept himself the duty of "controlling" the discharge of the _richmond's_ cargo. hand was unable to move without his consul; and at night an armed boat from the germans boarded, searched, and kept possession of, the suspected ship. the next day, as by an after-thought, war and martial law were proclaimed for the samoan islands, the introduction of contraband of war forbidden, and ships and boats declared liable to search. "all support of the rebels will be punished by martial law," continued the proclamation, "no matter to what nationality the person [_thäter_] may belong." hand, it has been seen, declined to act in the matter of the _richmond_ without the concurrence of his consul; but i have found no evidence that either hand or knappe communicated with de coetlogon, with whom they were both at daggers drawn. first the seizure and next the proclamation seem to have burst on the english consul from a clear sky; and he wrote on the same day, throwing doubt on knappe's authority to declare war. knappe replied on the th that the imperial german government had been at war as a matter of fact since december th, and that it was only for the convenience of the subjects of other states that he had been empowered to make a formal declaration. "from that moment," he added, "martial law prevails in samoa." de coetlogon instantly retorted, declining martial law for british subjects, and announcing a proclamation in that sense. instantly, again, came that astonishing document, knappe's rejoinder, without pause, without reflection--the pens screeching on the paper, the messengers (you would think) running from consulate to consulate: "i have had the honour to receive your excellency's [_hochwohlgeboren_] agreeable communication of to-day. since, on the ground of received instructions, martial law has been declared in samoa, british subjects as well as others fall under its application. i warn you therefore to abstain from such a proclamation as you announce in your letter. it will be such a piece of business as shall make yourself answerable under martial law. besides, your proclamation will be disregarded." de coetlogon of course issued his proclamation at once, knappe retorted with another, and night closed on the first stage of this insane collision. i hear the german consul was on this day prostrated with fever; charity at least must suppose him hardly answerable for his language. early on the st, mr. mansfield gallien, a passing traveller, was seized in his berth on board the _richmond_, and carried, half-dressed, on board a german war-ship. his offence was, in the circumstances and after the proclamation, substantial. he had gone the day before, in the spirit of a tourist to mataafa's camp, had spoken with the king, and had even recommended him an appeal to sir george grey. fritze, i gather, had been long uneasy; this arrest on board a british ship filled the measure. doubtless, as he had written long before, the consul alone was responsible "on the legal side"; but the captain began to ask himself, "what next?"--telegraphed direct home for instructions, "is arrest of foreigners on foreign vessels legal?"--and was ready, at a word from captain hand, to discharge his dangerous prisoner. the word in question (so the story goes) was not without a kind of wit. "i wish you would set that man ashore," hand is reported to have said, indicating gallien; "i wish you would set that man ashore, to save me the trouble." the same day de coetlogon published a proclamation requesting captains to submit to search for contraband of war. on the nd the _samoa times and south sea advertiser_ was suppressed by order of fritze. i have hitherto refrained from mentioning the single paper of our islands, that i might deal with it once for all. it is of course a tiny sheet; but i have often had occasion to wonder at the ability of its articles, and almost always at the decency of its tone. officials may at times be a little roughly, and at times a little captiously, criticised; private persons are habitually respected; and there are many papers in england, and still more in the states, even of leading organs in chief cities, that might envy, and would do well to imitate, the courtesy and discretion of the _samoa times_. yet the editor, cusack, is only an amateur in journalism, and a carpenter by trade. his chief fault is one perhaps inevitable in so small a place--that he seems a little in the leading of a clique; but his interest in the public weal is genuine and generous. one man's meat is another man's poison: anglo-saxons and germans have been differently brought up. to our galled experience the paper appears moderate; to their untried sensations it seems violent. we think a public man fair game; we think it a part of his duty, and i am told he finds it a part of his reward, to be continually canvassed by the press. for the germans, on the other hand, an official wears a certain sacredness; when he is called over the coals, they are shocked, and (if the official be a german) feel that germany itself has been insulted. the _samoa times_ had been long a mountain of offence. brandeis had imported from the colonies another printer of the name of jones, to deprive cusack of the government printing. german sailors had come ashore one day, wild with offended patriotism, to punish the editor with stripes, and the result was delightfully amusing. the champions asked for the english printer. they were shown the wrong man, and the blows intended for cusack had hailed on the shoulders of his rival jones. on the th, cusack had reprinted an article from a san francisco paper; the germans had complained; and de coetlogon, in a moment of weakness, had fined the editor twenty pounds. the judgment was afterwards reversed in fiji; but even at the time it had not satisfied the germans. and so now, on the third day of martial law, the paper was suppressed. here we have another of these international obscurities. to fritze the step seemed natural and obvious; for anglo-saxons it was a hand laid upon the altar; and the month was scarce out before the voice of senator frye announced to his colleagues that free speech had been suppressed in samoa. perhaps we must seek some similar explanation for fritze's short-lived code, published and withdrawn the next day, the rd. fritze himself was in no humour for extremities. he was much in the position of a lieutenant who should perceive his captain urging the ship upon the rocks. it is plain he had lost all confidence in his commanding officer "upon the legal side"; and we find him writing home with anxious candour. he had understood that martial law implied military possession; he was in military possession of nothing but his ship, and shrewdly suspected that his martial jurisdiction should be confined within the same limits. "as a matter of fact," he writes, "we do not occupy the territory, and cannot give foreigners the necessary protection, because mataafa and his people can at any moment forcibly interrupt me in my jurisdiction." yet in the eyes of anglo-saxons the severity of his code appeared burlesque. i give but three of its provisions. the crime of inciting german troops "by any means, as, for instance, informing them of proclamations by the enemy," was punishable with death; that of "publishing or secretly distributing anything, whether printed or written, bearing on the war," with prison or deportation; and that of calling or attending a public meeting, unless permitted, with the same. such were the tender mercies of knappe, lurking in the western end of the german quarter, where mataafa could "at any moment" interrupt his jurisdiction. on the nd (day of the suppression of the _times_) de coetlogon wrote to inquire if hostilities were intended against great britain, which knappe on the same day denied. on the rd de coetlogon sent a complaint of hostile acts, such as the armed and forcible entry of the _richmond_ before the declaration and arrest of gallien. in his reply, dated the th, knappe took occasion to repeat, although now with more self-command, his former threat against de coetlogon. "i am still of the opinion," he writes, "that even foreign consuls are liable to the application of martial law, if they are guilty of offences against the belligerent state." the same day ( th) de coetlogon complained that fletcher, manager for messrs. macarthur, had been summoned by fritze. in answer, knappe had "the honour to inform your excellency that since the declaration of the state of war, british subjects are liable to martial law, and mr. fletcher will be arrested if he does not appear." here, then, was the gauntlet thrown down, and de coetlogon was burning to accept it. fletcher's offence was this. upon the nd a steamer had come in from wellington, specially chartered to bring german despatches to apia. the rumour came along with her from new zealand that in these despatches knappe would find himself rebuked, and fletcher was accused of having "interested himself in the spreading of this rumour." his arrest was actually ordered, when hand succeeded in persuading him to surrender. at the german court, the case was dismissed "_wegen nichtigkeit_"; and the acute stage of these distempers may be said to have ended. blessed are the peacemakers. hand had perhaps averted a collision. what is more certain, he had offered to the world a perfectly original reading of the part of british seaman. hand may have averted a collision, i say; but i am tempted to believe otherwise. i am tempted to believe the threat to arrest fletcher was the last mutter of the declining tempest and a mere sop to knappe's self-respect. i am tempted to believe the rumour in question was substantially correct, and the steamer from wellington had really brought the german consul grounds for hesitation, if not orders to retreat. i believe the unhappy man to have awakened from a dream, and to have read ominous writing on the wall. an enthusiastic popularity surrounded him among the germans. it was natural. consul and colony had passed through an hour of serious peril, and the consul had set the example of undaunted courage. he was entertained at dinner. fritze, who was known to have secretly opposed him, was scorned and avoided. but the clerks of the german firm were one thing, prince bismarck was another; and on a cold review of these events, it is not improbable that knappe may have envied the position of his naval colleague. it is certain, at least, that he set himself to shuffle and capitulate; and when the blow fell, he was able to reply that the martial law business had in the meanwhile come right; that the english and american consular courts stood open for ordinary cases; and that in different conversations with captain hand, "who has always maintained friendly intercourse with the german authorities," it had been repeatedly explained that only the supply of weapons and ammunition, or similar aid and support, was to come under german martial law. was it weapons or ammunition that fletcher had supplied? but it is unfair to criticise these wrigglings of an unfortunate in a false position. in a despatch of the rd, which has not been printed, knappe had told his story: how he had declared war, subjected foreigners to martial law, and been received with a counter-proclamation by the english consul; and how (in an interview with mataafa chiefs at the plantation house of motuotua, of which i cannot find the date) he had demanded the cession of arms and of ringleaders for punishment, and proposed to assume the government of the islands. on february th he received bismarck's answer: "you had no right to take foreigners from the jurisdiction of their consuls. the protest of your english colleague is grounded. in disputes which may arise from this cause you will find yourself in the wrong. the demand formulated by you, as to the assumption of the government of samoa by germany, lay outside of your instructions and of our design. take it immediately back. if your telegram is here rightly understood, i cannot call your conduct good." it must be a hard heart that does not sympathise with knappe in the hour when he received this document. yet it may be said that his troubles were still in the beginning. men had contended against him, and he had not prevailed; he was now to be at war with the elements, and find his name identified with an immense disaster. one more date, however, must be given first. it was on february th that fritze formally announced martial law to be suspended, and himself to have relinquished the control of the police. chapter x the hurricane _march_ the so-called harbour of apia is formed in part by a recess of the coast-line at matautu, in part by the slim peninsula of mulinuu, and in part by the fresh waters of the mulivai and vaisingano. the barrier reef--that singular breakwater that makes so much of the circuit of pacific islands--is carried far to sea at matautu and mulinuu; inside of these two horns it runs sharply landward, and between them it is burst or dissolved by the fresh water. the shape of the enclosed anchorage may be compared to a high-shouldered jar or bottle with a funnel mouth. its sides are almost everywhere of coral; for the reef not only bounds it to seaward and forms the neck and mouth, but skirting about the beach, it forms the bottom also. as in the bottle of commerce, the bottom is re-entrant, and the shore-reef runs prominently forth into the basin and makes a dangerous cape opposite the fairway of the entrance. danger is, therefore, on all hands. the entrance gapes three cables wide at the narrowest, and the formidable surf of the pacific thunders both outside and in. there are days when speech is difficult in the chambers of shore-side houses; days when no boat can land, and when men are broken by stroke of sea against the wharves. as i write these words, three miles in the mountains, and with the land-breeze still blowing from the island summit, the sound of that vexed harbour hums in my ears. such a creek in my native coast of scotland would scarce be dignified with the mark of an anchor in the chart; but in the favoured climate of samoa, and with the mechanical regularity of the winds in the pacific, it forms, for ten or eleven months out of the twelve, a safe if hardly a commodious port. the ill-found island traders ride there with their insufficient moorings the year through, and discharge, and are loaded, without apprehension. of danger, when it comes, the glass gives timely warning; and that any modern war-ship, furnished with the power of steam, should have been lost in apia, belongs not so much to nautical as to political history. the weather throughout all that winter (the turbulent summer of the islands) was unusually fine, and the circumstance had been commented on as providential, when so many samoans were lying on their weapons in the bush. by february it began to break in occasional gales. on february th a german brigantine was driven ashore. on the th the same misfortune befell an american brigantine and a schooner. on both these days, and again on the th march, the men-of-war must steam to their anchors. and it was in this last month, the most dangerous of the twelve, that man's animosities crowded that indentation of the reef with costly, populous, and vulnerable ships. i have shown, perhaps already at too great a length, how violently passion ran upon the spot; how high this series of blunders and mishaps had heated the resentment of the germans against all other nationalities and of all other nationalities against the germans. but there was one country beyond the borders of samoa where the question had aroused a scarce less angry sentiment. the breach of the washington congress, the evidence of sewall before a sub-committee on foreign relations, the proposal to try klein before a military court, and the rags of captain hamilton's flag, had combined to stir the people of the states to an unwonted fervour. germany was for the time the abhorred of nations. germans in america publicly disowned the country of their birth. in honolulu, so near the scene of action, german and american young men fell to blows in the street. in the same city, from no traceable source, and upon no possible authority, there arose a rumour of tragic news to arrive by the next occasion, that the _nipsic_ had opened fire on the _adler_, and the _adler_ had sunk her on the first reply. punctually on the day appointed, the news came; and the two nations, instead of being plunged into war, could only mingle tears over the loss of heroes. by the second week in march three american ships were in apia bay,--the _nipsic_, the _vandalia_, and the _trenton_, carrying the flag of rear-admiral kimberley; three german,--the _adler_, the _eber_, and the _olga_; and one british,--the _calliope_, captain kane. six merchantmen, ranging from twenty-five up to five hundred tons, and a number of small craft, further encumbered the anchorage. its capacity is estimated by captain kane at four large ships; and the latest arrivals, the _vandalia_ and _trenton_, were in consequence excluded, and lay without in the passage. of the seven war-ships, the seaworthiness of two was questionable: the _trenton's_, from an original defect in her construction, often reported, never remedied--her hawse-pipes leading in on the berth-deck; the _eber's_, from an injury to her screw in the blow of february th. in this overcrowding of ships in an open entry of the reef, even the eye of the landsman could spy danger; and captain-lieutenant wallis of the _eber_ openly blamed and lamented, not many hours before the catastrophe, their helpless posture. temper once more triumphed. the army of mataafa still hung imminent behind the town; the german quarter was still daily garrisoned with fifty sailors from the squadron; what was yet more influential, germany and the states, at least in apia bay, were on the brink of war, viewed each other with looks of hatred, and scarce observed the letter of civility. on the day of the admiral's arrival, knappe failed to call on him, and on the morrow called on him while he was on shore. the slight was remarked and resented, and the two squadrons clung more obstinately to their dangerous station. on the th the barometer fell to . in. by p.m. this was the moment when every sail in port should have escaped. kimberley, who flew the only broad pennant, should certainly have led the way: he clung, instead, to his moorings, and the germans doggedly followed his example: semi-belligerents, daring each other and the violence of heaven. kane, less immediately involved, was led in error by the report of residents and a fallacious rise in the glass; he stayed with the others, a misjudgment that was like to cost him dear. all were moored, as is the custom in apia, with two anchors practically east and west, clear hawse to the north, and a kedge astern. topmasts were struck, and the ships made snug. the night closed black, with sheets of rain. by midnight it blew a gale; and by the morning watch, a tempest. through what remained of darkness, the captains impatiently expected day, doubtful if they were dragging, steaming gingerly to their moorings, and afraid to steam too much. day came about six, and presented to those on shore a seizing and terrific spectacle. in the pressure of the squalls the bay was obscured as if by midnight, but between them a great part of it was clearly if darkly visible amid driving mist and rain. the wind blew into the harbour mouth. naval authorities describe it as of hurricane force. it had, however, few or none of the effects on shore suggested by that ominous word, and was successfully withstood by trees and buildings. the agitation of the sea, on the other hand, surpassed experience and description. seas that might have awakened surprise and terror in the midst of the atlantic ranged bodily and (it seemed to observers) almost without diminution into the belly of that flask-shaped harbour; and the war-ships were alternately buried from view in the trough, or seen standing on end against the breast of billows. the _trenton_ at daylight still maintained her position in the neck of the bottle. but five of the remaining ships tossed, already close to the bottom, in a perilous and helpless crowd; threatening ruin to each other as they tossed; threatened with a common and imminent destruction on the reefs. three had been already in collision: the _olga_ was injured in the quarter, the _adler_ had lost her bowsprit; the _nipsic_ had lost her smoke-stack, and was making steam with difficulty, maintaining her fire with barrels of pork, and the smoke and sparks pouring along the level of the deck. for the seventh war-ship the day had come too late; the _eber_ had finished her last cruise; she was to be seen no more save by the eyes of divers. a coral reef is not only an instrument of destruction, but a place of sepulture; the submarine cliff is profoundly undercut, and presents the mouth of a huge antre in which the bodies of men and the hulls of ships are alike hurled down and buried. the _eber_ had dragged anchors with the rest; her injured screw disabled her from steaming vigorously up; and a little before day she had struck the front of the coral, come off, struck again, and gone down stern foremost, oversetting as she went, into the gaping hollow of the reef. of her whole complement of nearly eighty, four souls were cast alive on the beach; and the bodies of the remainder were, by the voluminous outpouring of the flooded streams, scoured at last from the harbour, and strewed naked on the seaboard of the island. five ships were immediately menaced with the same destruction. the _eber_ vanished--the four poor survivors on shore--read a dreadful commentary on their danger; which was swelled out of all proportion by the violence of their own movements as they leaped and fell among the billows. by seven the _nipsic_ was so fortunate as to avoid the reef and beach upon a space of sand; where she was immediately deserted by her crew, with the assistance of samoans, not without loss of life. by about eight it was the turn of the _adler_. she was close down upon the reef; doomed herself, it might yet be possible to save a portion of her crew; and for this end captain fritze placed his reliance on the very hugeness of the seas that threatened him. the moment was watched for with the anxiety of despair, but the coolness of disciplined courage. as she rose on the fatal wave, her moorings were simultaneously slipped; she broached to in rising; and the sea heaved her bodily upward and cast her down with a concussion on the summit of the reef, where she lay on her beam-ends, her back broken, buried in breaching seas, but safe. conceive a table: the _eber_ in the darkness had been smashed against the rim and flung below; the _adler_, cast free in the nick of opportunity, had been thrown upon the top. many were injured in the concussion; many tossed into the water; twenty perished. the survivors crept again on board their ship, as it now lay, and as it still remains, keel to the waves, a monument of the sea's potency. in still weather, under a cloudless sky, in those seasons when that ill-named ocean, the pacific, suffers its vexed shores to rest, she lies high and dry, the spray scarce touching her--the hugest structure of man's hands within a circuit of a thousand miles--tossed up there like a schoolboy's cap upon a shelf; broken like an egg; a thing to dream of. the unfriendly consuls of germany and britain were both that morning in matautu, and both displayed their nobler qualities. de coetlogon, the grim old soldier, collected his family and kneeled with them in an agony of prayer for those exposed. knappe, more fortunate in that he was called to a more active service, must, upon the striking of the _adler_, pass to his own consulate. from this he was divided by the vaisingano, now a raging torrent, impetuously charioting the trunks of trees. a kelpie might have dreaded to attempt the passage; we may conceive this brave but unfortunate and now ruined man to have found a natural joy in the exposure of his life; and twice that day, coming and going, he braved the fury of the river. it was possible, in spite of the darkness of the hurricane and the continual breaching of the seas, to remark human movements on the _adler_; and by the help of samoans, always nobly forward in the work, whether for friend or enemy, knappe sought long to get a line conveyed from shore, and was for long defeated. the shore guard of fifty men stood to their arms the while upon the beach, useless themselves, and a great deterrent of samoan usefulness. it was perhaps impossible that this mistake should be avoided. what more natural, to the mind of a european, than that the mataafas should fall upon the germans in this hour of their disadvantage? but they had no other thought than to assist; and those who now rallied beside knappe braved (as they supposed) in doing so a double danger, from the fury of the sea and the weapons of their enemies. about nine, a quarter-master swam ashore, and reported all the officers and some sixty men alive but in pitiable case; some with broken limbs, others insensible from the drenching of the breakers. later in the forenoon, certain valorous samoans succeeded in reaching the wreck and returning with a line; but it was speedily broken; and all subsequent attempts proved unavailing, the strongest adventurers being cast back again by the bursting seas. thenceforth, all through that day and night, the deafened survivors must continue to endure their martyrdom and one officer died, it was supposed from agony of mind, in his inverted cabin. three ships still hung on the next margin of destruction, steaming desperately to their moorings, dashed helplessly together. the _calliope_ was the nearest in; she had the _vandalia_ close on her port side and a little ahead, the _olga_ close a-starboard, the reef under her heel; and steaming and veering on her cables, the unhappy ship fenced with her three dangers. about a quarter to nine she carried away the _vandalia's_ quarter gallery with her jib-boom; a moment later, the _olga_ had near rammed her from the other side. by nine the _vandalia_ dropped down on her too fast to be avoided, and clapped her stern under the bowsprit of the english ship, the fastenings of which were burst asunder as she rose. to avoid cutting her down, it was necessary for the _calliope_ to stop and even to reverse her engines; and her rudder was at the moment--or it seemed so to the eyes of those on board--within ten feet of the reef. "between the _vandalia_ and the reef" (writes kane, in his excellent report) "it was destruction." to repeat fritze's manoeuvre with the _adler_ was impossible; the _calliope_ was too heavy. the one possibility of escape was to go out. if the engines should stand, if they should have power to drive the ship against wind and sea, if she should answer the helm, if the wheel, rudder, and gear should hold out, and if they were favoured with a clear blink of weather in which to see and avoid the outer reef--there, and there only, were safety. upon this catalogue of "ifs" kane staked his all. he signalled to the engineer for every pound of steam--and at that moment (i am told) much of the machinery was already red-hot. the ship was sheered well to starboard of the _vandalia_, the last remaining cable slipped. for a time--and there was no onlooker so cold-blooded as to offer a guess at its duration--the _calliope_ lay stationary; then gradually drew ahead. the highest speed claimed for her that day is of one sea-mile an hour. the question of times and seasons, throughout all this roaring business, is obscured by a dozen contradictions; i have but chosen what appeared to be the most consistent; but if i am to pay any attention to the time named by admiral kimberley, the _calliope_, in this first stage of her escape, must have taken more than two hours to cover less than four cables. as she thus crept seaward, she buried bow and stern alternately under the billows. in the fairway of the entrance the flagship _trenton_ still held on. her rudder was broken, her wheel carried away; within she was flooded with water from the peccant hawse-pipes; she had just made the signal "fires extinguished," and lay helpless, awaiting the inevitable end. between this melancholy hulk and the external reef kane must find a path. steering within fifty yards of the reef (for which she was actually headed) and her foreyard passing on the other hand over the _trenton's_ quarter as she rolled, the _calliope_ sheered between the rival dangers, came to the wind triumphantly, and was once more pointed for the sea and safety. not often in naval history was there a moment of more sickening peril, and it was dignified by one of those incidents that reconcile the chronicler with his otherwise abhorrent task. from the doomed flagship the americans hailed the success of the english with a cheer. it was led by the old admiral in person, rang out over the storm with holiday vigour, and was answered by the calliopes with an emotion easily conceived. this ship of their kinsfolk was almost the last external object seen from the _calliope_ for hours; immediately after, the mists closed about her till the morrow. she was safe at sea again--_una de multis_--with a damaged foreyard, and a loss of all the ornamental work about her bow and stern, three anchors, one kedge-anchor, fourteen lengths of chain, four boats, the jib-boom, bobstay, and bands and fastenings of the bowsprit. shortly after kane had slipped his cable, captain schoonmaker, despairing of the _vandalia_, succeeded in passing astern of the _olga_, in the hope to beach his ship beside the _nipsic_. at a quarter to eleven her stern took the reef, her hand swung to starboard, and she began to fill and settle. many lives of brave men were sacrificed in the attempt to get a line ashore; the captain, exhausted by his exertions, was swept from deck by a sea; and the rail being soon awash, the survivors took refuge in the tops. out of thirteen that had lain there the day before, there were now but two ships afloat in apia harbour, and one of these was doomed to be the bane of the other. about p.m. the _trenton_ parted one cable, and shortly after a second. it was sought to keep her head to wind with storm-sails and by the ingenious expedient of filling the rigging with seamen; but in the fury of the gale, and in that sea, perturbed alike by the gigantic billows and the volleying discharges of the rivers, the rudderless ship drove down stern foremost into the inner basin; ranging, plunging, and striking like a frightened horse; drifting on destruction for herself and bringing it to others. twice the _olga_ (still well under command) avoided her impact by the skilful use of helm and engines. but about four the vigilance of the germans was deceived, and the ships collided; the _olga_ cutting into the _trenton's_ quarters, first from one side, then from the other, and losing at the same time two of her own cables. captain von ehrhardt instantly slipped the remainder of his moorings, and setting fore and aft canvas, and going full steam ahead, succeeded in beaching his ship in matautu; whither knappe, recalled by this new disaster, had returned. the berth was perhaps the best in the harbour, and von ehrhardt signalled that ship and crew were in security. the _trenton_, guided apparently by an under-tow or eddy from the discharge of the vaisingano, followed in the course of the _nipsic_ and _vandalia_, and skirted south-eastward along the front of the shore reef, which her keel was at times almost touching. hitherto she had brought disaster to her foes; now she was bringing it to friends. she had already proved the ruin of the _olga_, the one ship that had rid out the hurricane in safety; now she beheld across her course the submerged _vandalia_, the tops filled with exhausted seamen. happily the approach of the _trenton_ was gradual, and the time employed to advantage. rockets and lines were thrown into the tops of the friendly wreck; the approach of danger was transformed into a means of safety; and before the ships struck, the men from the _vandalia's_ main and mizzen masts, which went immediately by the board in the collision, were already mustered on the _trenton's_ decks. those from the foremast were next rescued; and the flagship settled gradually into a position alongside her neighbour, against which she beat all night with violence. out of the crew of the _vandalia_ forty-three had perished; of the four hundred and fifty on board the _trenton_, only one. the night of the th was still notable for a howling tempest and extraordinary floods of rain. it was feared the wreck could scarce continue to endure the breaching of the seas; among the germans, the fate of those on board the _adler_ awoke keen anxiety; and knappe, on the beach of matautu, and the other officers of his consulate on that of matafele, watched all night. the morning of the th displayed a scene of devastation rarely equalled: the _adler_ high and dry, the _olga_ and _nipsic_ beached, the _trenton_ partly piled on the _vandalia_ and herself sunk to the gun-deck; no sail afloat; and the beach heaped high with the _débris_ of ships and the wreck of mountain forests. already, before the day, seumanu, the chief of apia, had gallantly ventured forth by boat through the subsiding fury of the seas, and had succeeded in communicating with the admiral; already, or as soon after as the dawn permitted, rescue lines were rigged, and the survivors were with difficulty and danger begun to be brought to shore. and soon the cheerful spirit of the admiral added a new feature to the scene. surrounded as he was by the crews of two wrecked ships, he paraded the band of the _trenton_, and the bay was suddenly enlivened with the strains of "hail columbia." during a great part of the day the work of rescue was continued, with many instances of courage and devotion; and for a long time succeeding, the almost inexhaustible harvest of the beach was to be reaped. in the first employment, the samoans earned the gratitude of friend and foe; in the second, they surprised all by an unexpected virtue, that of honesty. the greatness of the disaster, and the magnitude of the treasure now rolling at their feet, may perhaps have roused in their bosoms an emotion too serious for the rule of greed, or perhaps that greed was for the moment satiated. sails that twelve strong samoans could scarce drag from the water, great guns (one of which was rolled by the sea on the body of a man, the only native slain in all the hurricane), an infinite wealth of rope and wood, of tools and weapons, tossed upon the beach. yet i have never heard that much was stolen; and beyond question, much was very honestly returned. on both accounts, for the saving of life and the restoration of property, the government of the united states showed themselves generous in reward. a fine boat was fitly presented to seumanu; and rings, watches, and money were lavished on all who had assisted. the germans also gave money at the rate (as i receive the tale) of three dollars a head for every german saved. the obligation was in this instance incommensurably deep, those with whom they were at war had saved the german blue-jackets at the venture of their lives; knappe was, besides, far from ungenerous; and i can only explain the niggard figure by supposing it was paid from his own pocket. in one case, at least, it was refused. "i have saved three germans," said the rescuer; "i will make you a present of the three." the crews of the american and german squadrons were now cast, still in a bellicose temper, together on the beach. the discipline of the americans was notoriously loose; the crew of the _nipsic_ had earned a character for lawlessness in other ports; and recourse was had to stringent and indeed extraordinary measures. the town was divided in two camps, to which the different nationalities were confined. kimberley had his quarter sentinelled and patrolled. any seaman disregarding a challenge was to be shot dead; any tavern-keeper who sold spirits to an american sailor was to have his tavern broken and his stock destroyed. many of the publicans were german; and knappe, having narrated these rigorous but necessary dispositions, wonders (grinning to himself over his despatch) how far these americans will go in their assumption of jurisdiction over germans. such as they were, the measures were successful. the incongruous mass of castaways was kept in peace, and at last shipped in peace out of the islands. kane returned to apia on the th, to find the _calliope_ the sole survivor of thirteen sail. he thanked his men, and in particular the engineers, in a speech of unusual feeling and beauty, of which one who was present remarked to another, as they left the ship, "this has been a means of grace." nor did he forget to thank and compliment the admiral; and i cannot deny myself the pleasure of transcribing from kimberley's reply some generous and engaging words. "my dear captain," he wrote, "your kind note received. you went out splendidly, and we all felt from our hearts for you, and our cheers came with sincerity and admiration for the able manner in which you handled your ship. we could not have been gladder if it had been one of our ships, for in a time like that i can truly say with old admiral josiah latnall, 'that blood _is_ thicker than water.'" one more trait will serve to build up the image of this typical sea-officer. a tiny schooner, the _equator_, captain edwin reid, dear to myself from the memories of a six months' cruise, lived out upon the high seas the fury of that tempest which had piled with wrecks the harbour of apia, found a refuge in pango-pango, and arrived at last in the desolated port with a welcome and lucrative cargo of pigs. the admiral was glad to have the pigs; but what most delighted the man's noble and childish soul, was to see once more afloat the colours of his country. thus, in what seemed the very article of war, and within the duration of a single day, the sword-arm of each of the two angry powers was broken; their formidable ships reduced to junk; their disciplined hundreds to a horde of castaways, fed with difficulty, and the fear of whose misconduct marred the sleep of their commanders. both paused aghast; both had time to recognise that not the whole samoan archipelago was worth the loss in men and costly ships already suffered. the so-called hurricane of march th made thus a marking epoch in world-history; directly, and at once, it brought about the congress and treaty of berlin; indirectly, and by a process still continuing, it founded the modern navy of the states. coming years and other historians will declare the influence of that. chapter xi laupepa and mataafa - with the hurricane, the broken war-ships, and the stranded sailors, i am at an end of violence, and my tale flows henceforth among carpet incidents. the blue-jackets on apia beach were still jealously held apart by sentries, when the powers at home were already seeking a peaceable solution. it was agreed, so far as might be, to obliterate two years of blundering; and to resume in , and at berlin, those negotiations which had been so unhappily broken off at washington in . the example thus offered by germany is rare in history; in the career of prince bismarck, so far as i am instructed, it should stand unique. on a review of these two years of blundering, bullying, and failure in a little isle of the pacific, he seems magnanimously to have owned his policy was in the wrong. he left fangalii unexpiated; suffered that house of cards, the tamasese government, to fall by its own frailty and without remark or lamentation; left the samoan question openly and fairly to the conference: and in the meanwhile, to allay the local heats engendered by becker and knappe, he sent to apia that invaluable public servant, dr. stuebel. i should be a dishonest man if i did not bear testimony to the loyalty since shown by germans in samoa. their position was painful; they had talked big in the old days, now they had to sing small. even stuebel returned to the islands under the prejudice of an unfortunate record. to the minds of the samoans his name represented the beginning of their sorrows; and in his first term of office he had unquestionably driven hard. the greater his merit in the surprising success of the second. so long as he stayed, the current of affairs moved smoothly; he left behind him on his departure all men at peace; and whether by fortune, or for the want of that wise hand of guidance, he was scarce gone before the clouds began to gather once more on our horizon. before the first convention, germany and the states hauled down their flags. it was so done again before the second; and germany, by a still more emphatic step of retrogression, returned the exile laupepa to his native shores. for two years the unfortunate man had trembled and suffered in the cameroons, in germany, in the rainy marshalls. when he left (september ) tamasese was king, served by five iron war-ships; his right to rule (like a dogma of the church) was placed outside dispute; the germans were still, as they were called at that last tearful interview in the house by the river, "the invincible strangers"; the thought of resistance, far less the hope of success, had not yet dawned on the samoan mind. he returned (november ) to a changed world. the tupua party was reduced to sue for peace, brandeis was withdrawn, tamasese was dying obscurely of a broken heart; the german flag no longer waved over the capital; and over all the islands one figure stood supreme. during laupepa's absence this man had succeeded him in all his honours and titles, in tenfold more than all his power and popularity. he was the idol of the whole nation but the rump of the tamaseses, and of these he was already the secret admiration. in his position there was but one weak point,--that he had even been tacitly excluded by the germans. becker, indeed, once coquetted with the thought of patronising him; but the project had no sequel, and it stands alone. in every other juncture of history the german attitude has been the same. choose whom you will to be king; when he has failed, choose whom you please to succeed him; when the second fails also, replace the first: upon the one condition, that mataafa be excluded. "_pourvu qu'il sache signer_!"--an official is said to have thus summed up the qualifications necessary in a samoan king. and it was perhaps feared that mataafa could do no more and might not always do so much. but this original diffidence was heightened by late events to something verging upon animosity. fangalii was unavenged: the arms of mataafa were _nondum inexpiatis uncta cruoribus_, still soiled with the unexpiated blood of german sailors; and though the chief was not present in the field, nor could have heard of the affair till it was over, he had reaped from it credit with his countrymen and dislike from the germans. i may not say that trouble was hoped. i must say--if it were not feared, the practice of diplomacy must teach a very hopeful view of human nature. mataafa and laupepa, by the sudden repatriation of the last, found themselves face to face in conditions of exasperating rivalry. the one returned from the dead of exile to find himself replaced and excelled. the other, at the end of a long, anxious, and successful struggle, beheld his only possible competitor resuscitated from the grave. the qualities of both, in this difficult moment, shone out nobly. i feel i seem always less than partial to the lovable laupepa; his virtues are perhaps not those which chiefly please me, and are certainly not royal; but he found on his return an opportunity to display the admirable sweetness of his nature. the two entered into a competition of generosity, for which i can recall no parallel in history, each waiving the throne for himself, each pressing it upon his rival; and they embraced at last a compromise the terms of which seem to have been always obscure and are now disputed. laupepa at least resumed his style of king of samoa; mataafa retained much of the conduct of affairs, and continued to receive much of the attendance and respect befitting royalty; and the two malietoas, with so many causes of disunion, dwelt and met together in the same town like kinsmen. it was so, that i first saw them; so, in a house set about with sentries--for there was still a haunting fear of germany,--that i heard them relate their various experience in the past; heard laupepa tell with touching candour of the sorrows of his exile, and mataafa with mirthful simplicity of his resources and anxieties in the war. the relation was perhaps too beautiful to last; it was perhaps impossible but the titular king should grow at last uneasily conscious of the _maire de palais_ at his side, or the king-maker be at last offended by some shadow of distrust or assumption in his creature. i repeat the words king-maker and creature; it is so that mataafa himself conceives of their relation: surely not without justice; for, had he not contended and prevailed, and been helped by the folly of consuls and the fury of the storm, laupepa must have died in exile. foreigners in these islands know little of the course of native intrigue. partly the samoans cannot explain, partly they will not tell. ask how much a master can follow of the puerile politics in any school; so much and no more we may understand of the events which surround and menace us with their results. the missions may perhaps have been to blame. missionaries are perhaps apt to meddle overmuch outside their discipline; it is a fault which should be judged with mercy; the problem is sometimes so insidiously presented that even a moderate and able man is betrayed beyond his own intention; and the missionary in such a land as samoa is something else besides a minister of mere religion; he represents civilisation, he is condemned to be an organ of reform, he could scarce evade (even if he desired) a certain influence in political affairs. and it is believed, besides, by those who fancy they know, that the effective force of division between mataafa and laupepa came from the natives rather than from whites. before the end of , at least, it began to be rumoured that there was dispeace between the two malietoas; and doubtless this had an unsettling influence throughout the islands. but there was another ingredient of anxiety. the berlin convention had long closed its sittings; the text of the act had been long in our hands; commissioners were announced to right the wrongs of the land question, and two high officials, a chief justice and a president, to guide policy and administer law in samoa. their coming was expected with an impatience, with a childishness of trust, that can hardly be exaggerated. months passed, these angel-deliverers still delayed to arrive, and the impatience of the natives became changed to an ominous irritation. they have had much experience of being deceived, and they began to think they were deceived again. a sudden crop of superstitious stories buzzed about the islands. rivers had come down red; unknown fishes had been taken on the reef and found to be marked with menacing runes; a headless lizard crawled among chiefs in council; the gods of upolu and savaii made war by night, they swam the straits to battle, and, defaced by dreadful wounds, they had besieged the house of a medical missionary. readers will remember the portents in mediæval chronicles, or those in _julius cæsar_ when "fierce fiery warriors fought upon the clouds in ranks and squadrons." and doubtless such fabrications are, in simple societies, a natural expression of discontent; and those who forge, and even those who spread them, work towards a conscious purpose. early in january this period of expectancy was brought to an end by the arrival of conrad cedarcrantz, chief justice of samoa. the event was hailed with acclamation, and there was much about the new official to increase the hopes already entertained. he was seen to be a man of culture and ability; in public, of an excellent presence--in private, of a most engaging cordiality. but there was one point, i scarce know whether to say of his character or policy, which immediately and disastrously affected public feeling in the islands. he had an aversion, part judicial, part perhaps constitutional, to haste; and he announced that, until he should have well satisfied his own mind, he should do nothing; that he would rather delay all than do aught amiss. it was impossible to hear this without academical approval; impossible to hear it without practical alarm. the natives desired to see activity; they desired to see many fair speeches taken on a body of deeds and works of benefit. fired by the event of the war, filled with impossible hopes, they might have welcomed in that hour a ruler of the stamp of brandeis, breathing hurry, perhaps dealing blows. and the chief justice, unconscious of the fleeting opportunity, ripened his opinions deliberately in mulinuu; and had been already the better part of half a year in the islands before he went through the form of opening his court. the curtain had risen; there was no play. a reaction, a chill sense of disappointment, passed about the island; and intrigue, one moment suspended, was resumed. in the berlin act, the three powers recognise, on the threshold, "the independence of the samoan government, and the free right of the natives to elect their chief or king and choose their form of government." true, the text continues that, "in view of the difficulties that surround an election in the present disordered condition of the government," malietoa laupepa shall be recognised as king, "unless the three powers shall by common accord otherwise declare." but perhaps few natives have followed it so far, and even those who have, were possibly all cast abroad again by the next clause: "and his successor shall be duly elected according to the laws and customs of samoa." the right to elect, freely given in one sentence, was suspended in the next, and a line or so further on appeared to be reconveyed by a side-wind. the reason offered for suspension was ludicrously false; in may , when sir edward malet moved the matter in the conference, the election of mataafa was not only certain to have been peaceful, it could not have been opposed; and behind the english puppet it was easy to suspect the hand of germany. no one is more swift to smell trickery than a samoan; and the thought, that, under the long, bland, benevolent sentences of the berlin act, some trickery lay lurking, filled him with the breath of opposition. laupepa seems never to have been a popular king. mataafa, on the other hand, holds an unrivalled position in the eyes of his fellow-countrymen; he was the hero of the war, he had lain with them in the bush, he had borne the heat and burthen of the day; they began to claim that he should enjoy more largely the fruits of victory; his exclusion was believed to be a stroke of german vengeance, his elevation to the kingship was looked for as the fitting crown and copestone of the samoan triumph; and but a little after the coming of the chief justice, an ominous cry for mataafa began to arise in the islands. it is difficult to see what that official could have done but what he did. he was loyal, as in duty bound, to the treaty and to laupepa; and when the orators of the important and unruly islet of manono demanded to his face a change of kings, he had no choice but to refuse them, and (his reproof being unheeded) to suspend the meeting. whether by any neglect of his own or the mere force of circumstance, he failed, however, to secure the sympathy, failed even to gain the confidence, of mataafa. the latter is not without a sense of his own abilities or of the great service he has rendered to his native land. he felt himself neglected; at the very moment when the cry for his elevation rang throughout the group, he thought himself made little of on mulinuu; and he began to weary of his part. in this humour, he was exposed to a temptation which i must try to explain, as best i may be able, to europeans. the bestowal of the great name, malietoa, is in the power of the district of malie, some seven miles to the westward of apia. the most noisy and conspicuous supporters of that party are the inhabitants of manono. hence in the elaborate, allusive oratory of samoa, malie is always referred to by the name of _pule_ (authority) as having the power of the name, and manono by that of _ainga_ (clan, sept, or household) as forming the immediate family of the chief. but these, though so important, are only small communities; and perhaps the chief numerical force of the malietoas inhabits the island of savaii. savaii has no royal name to bestow, all the five being in the gift of different districts of upolu; but she has the weight of numbers, and in these latter days has acquired a certain force by the preponderance in her councils of a single man, the orator lauati. the reader will now understand the peculiar significance of a deputation which should embrace lauati and the orators of both malie and manono, how it would represent all that is most effective on the malietoa side, and all that is most considerable in samoan politics, except the opposite feudal party of the tupua. and in the temptation brought to bear on mataafa, even the tupua was conjoined. tamasese was dead. his followers had conceived a not unnatural aversion to all germans, from which only the loyal brandeis is excepted; and a not unnatural admiration for their late successful adversary. men of his own blood and clan, men whom he had fought in the field, whom he had driven from matautu, who had smitten him back time and again from before the rustic bulwarks of lotoanuu, they approached him hand in hand with their ancestral enemies and concurred in the same prayer. the treaty (they argued) was not carried out. the right to elect their king had been granted them; or if that were denied or suspended, then the right to elect "his successor." they were dissatisfied with laupepa, and claimed, "according to the laws and customs of samoa," duly to appoint another. the orators of malie declared with irritation that their second appointment was alone valid and mataafa the sole malietoa; the whole body of malcontents named him as their choice for king; and they requested him in consequence to leave apia and take up his dwelling in malie, the name-place of malietoa; a step which may be described, to european ears, as placing before the country his candidacy for the crown. i do not know when the proposal was first made. doubtless the disaffection grew slowly, every trifle adding to its force; doubtless there lingered for long a willingness to give the new government a trial. the chief justice at least had been nearly five months in the country, and the president, baron senfft von pilsach, rather more than a month, before the mine was sprung. on may , , the house of mataafa was found empty, he and his chiefs had vanished from apia, and, what was worse, three prisoners, liberated from the gaol, had accompanied them in their secession; two being political offenders, and the third (accused of murder) having been perhaps set free by accident. although the step had been discussed in certain quarters, it took all men by surprise. the inhabitants at large expected instant war. the officials awakened from a dream to recognise the value of that which they had lost. mataafa at vaiala, where he was the pledge of peace, had perhaps not always been deemed worthy of particular attention; mataafa at malie was seen, twelve hours too late, to be an altogether different quantity. with excess of zeal on the other side, the officials trooped to their boats and proceeded almost in a body to malie, where they seem to have employed every artifice of flattery and every resource of eloquence upon the fugitive high chief. these courtesies, perhaps excessive in themselves, had the unpardonable fault of being offered when too late. mataafa showed himself facile on small issues, inflexible on the main; he restored the prisoners, he returned with the consuls to apia on a flying visit; he gave his word that peace should be preserved--a pledge in which perhaps no one believed at the moment, but which he has since nobly redeemed. on the rest he was immovable; he had cast the die, he had declared his candidacy, he had gone to malie. thither, after his visit to apia, he returned again; there he has practically since resided. thus was created in the islands a situation, strange in the beginning, and which, as its inner significance is developed, becomes daily stranger to observe. on the one hand, mataafa sits in malie, assumes a regal state, receives deputations, heads his letters "government of samoa," tacitly treats the king as a co-ordinate; and yet declares himself, and in many ways conducts himself, as a law-abiding citizen. on the other, the white officials in mulinuu stand contemplating the phenomenon with eyes of growing stupefaction; now with symptoms of collapse, now with accesses of violence. for long, even those well versed in island manners and the island character daily expected war, and heard imaginary drums beat in the forest. but for now close upon a year, and against every stress of persuasion and temptation, mataafa has been the bulwark of our peace. apia lay open to be seized, he had the power in his hand, his followers cried to be led on, his enemies marshalled him the same way by impotent examples; and he has never faltered. early in the day, a white man was sent from the government of mulinuu to examine and report upon his actions: i saw the spy on his return; "it was only our rebel that saved us," he said, with a laugh. there is now no honest man in the islands but is well aware of it; none but knows that, if we have enjoyed during the past eleven months the conveniences of peace, it is due to the forbearance of "our rebel." nor does this part of his conduct stand alone. he calls his party at malie the government,--"our government,"--but he pays his taxes to the government at mulinuu. he takes ground like a king; he has steadily and blandly refused to obey all orders as to his own movements or behaviour; but upon requisition he sends offenders to be tried under the chief justice. we have here a problem of conduct, and what seems an image of inconsistency, very hard at the first sight to be solved by any european. plainly mataafa does not act at random. plainly, in the depths of his samoan mind, he regards his attitude as regular and constitutional. it may be unexpected, it may be inauspicious, it may be undesirable; but he thinks it--and perhaps it is--in full accordance with those "laws and customs of samoa" ignorantly invoked by the draughtsmen of the berlin act. the point is worth an effort of comprehension; a man's life may yet depend upon it. let us conceive, in the first place, that there are five separate kingships in samoa, though not always five different kings; and that though one man, by holding the five royal names, might become king _in all parts_ of samoa, there is perhaps no such matter as a kingship of all samoa. he who holds one royal name would be, upon this view, as much a sovereign person as he who should chance to hold the other four; he would have less territory and fewer subjects, but the like independence and an equal royalty. now mataafa, even if all debatable points were decided against him, is still tuiatua, and as such, on this hypothesis, a sovereign prince. in the second place, the draughtsmen of the act, waxing exceeding bold, employed the word "election," and implicitly justified all precedented steps towards the kingship according with the "customs of samoa." i am not asking what was intended by the gentlemen who sat and debated very benignly and, on the whole, wisely in berlin; i am asking what will be understood by a samoan studying their literary work, the berlin act; i am asking what is the result of taking a word out of one state of society, and applying it to another, of which the writers know less than nothing, and no european knows much. several interpreters and several days were employed last september in the fruitless attempt to convey to the mind of laupepa the sense of the word "resignation." what can a samoan gather from the words, _election? election of a king? election of a king according to the laws and customs of samoa_? what are the electoral measures, what is the method of canvassing, likely to be employed by two, three, four, or five, more or less absolute princelings, eager to evince each other? and who is to distinguish such a process from the state of war? in such international--or, i should say, interparochial--differences, the nearest we can come towards understanding is to appreciate the cloud of ambiguity in which all parties grope-- "treading the crude consistence, half on foot, half flying." now, in one part of mataafa's behaviour his purpose is beyond mistake. towards the provisions of the berlin act, his desire to be formally obedient is manifest. the act imposed the tax. he has paid his taxes, although he thus contributes to the ways and means of his immediate rival. the act decreed the supreme court, and he sends his partisans to be tried at mulinuu, although he thus places them (as i shall have occasion to show) in a position far from wholly safe. from this literal conformity, in matters regulated, to the terms of the berlin plenipotentiaries, we may plausibly infer, in regard to the rest, a no less exact observance of the famous and obscure "laws and customs of samoa." but though it may be possible to attain, in the study, to some such adumbration of an understanding, it were plainly unfair to expect it of officials in the hurry of events. our two white officers have accordingly been no more perspicacious than was to be looked for, and i think they have sometimes been less wise. it was not wise in the president to proclaim mataafa and his followers rebels and their estates confiscated. such words are not respectable till they repose on force; on the lips of an angry white man, standing alone on a small promontory, they were both dangerous and absurd; they might have provoked ruin; thanks to the character of mataafa, they only raised a smile and damaged the authority of government. and again it is not wise in the government of mulinuu to have twice attempted to precipitate hostilities, once in savaii, once here in the tuamasanga. the late of the savaii attempt i never heard; it seems to have been stillborn. the other passed under my eyes. a war-party was armed in apia, and despatched across the island against mataafa villages, where it was to seize the women and children. it was absent for some days, engaged in feasting with those whom it went out to fight; and returned at last, innocuous and replete. in this fortunate though undignified ending we may read the fact that the natives on laupepa's side are sometimes more wise than their advisers. indeed, for our last twelve months of miraculous peace under what seem to be two rival kings, the credit is due first of all to mataafa, and second to the half-heartedness, or the forbearance, or both, of the natives in the other camp. the voice of the two whites has ever been for war. they have published at least one incendiary proclamation; they have armed and sent into the field at least one samoan war-party; they have continually besieged captains of war-ships to attack malie, and the captains of the war-ships have religiously refused. thus in the last twelve months our european rulers have drawn a picture of themselves, as bearded like the pard, full of strange oaths, and gesticulating like semaphores; while over against them mataafa reposes smilingly obstinate, and their own retainers surround them, frowningly inert. into the question of motive i refuse to enter; but if we come to war in these islands, and with no fresh occasion, it will be a manufactured war, and one that has been manufactured, against the grain of opinion, by two foreigners. for the last and worst of the mistakes on the laupepa side it would be unfair to blame any but the king himself. capable both of virtuous resolutions and of fits of apathetic obstinacy, his majesty is usually the whip-top of competitive advisers; and his conduct is so unstable as to wear at times an appearance of treachery which would surprise himself if he could see it. take, for example, the experience of lieutenant ulfsparre, late chief of police, and (so to speak) commander of the forces. his men were under orders for a certain hour; he found himself almost alone at the place of muster, and learned the king had sent the soldiery on errands. he sought an audience, explained that he was here to implant discipline, that (with this purpose in view) his men could only receive orders through himself, and if that condition were not agreed to and faithfully observed, he must send in his papers. the king was as usual easily persuaded, the interview passed and ended to the satisfaction of all parties engaged--and the bargain was kept for one day. on the day after, the troops were again dispersed as post-runners, and their commander resigned. with such a sovereign, i repeat, it would be unfair to blame any individual minister for any specific fault. and yet the policy of our two whites against mataafa has appeared uniformly so excessive and implacable, that the blame of the last scandal is laid generally at their doors. it is yet fresh. lauati, towards the end of last year, became deeply concerned about the situation; and by great personal exertions and the charms of oratory brought savaii and manono into agreement upon certain terms of compromise: laupepa still to be king, mataafa to accept a high executive office comparable to that of our own prime minister, and the two governments to coalesce. intractable manono was a party. malie was said to view the proposal with resignation, if not relief. peace was thought secure. the night before the king was to receive lauati, i met one of his company,--the family chief, iina,--and we shook hands over the unexpected issue of our troubles. what no one dreamed was that laupepa would refuse. and he did. he refused undisputed royalty for himself and peace for these unhappy islands; and the two whites on mulinuu rightly or wrongly got the blame of it. but their policy has another and a more awkward side. about the time of the secession to malie, many ugly things were said; i will not repeat that which i hope and believe the speakers did not wholly mean; let it suffice that, if rumour carried to mataafa the language i have heard used in my own house and before my own native servants, he would be highly justified in keeping clear of apia and the whites. one gentleman whose opinion i respect, and am so bold as to hope i may in some points modify, will understand the allusion and appreciate my reserve. about the same time there occurred an incident, upon which i must be more particular. _a_ was a gentleman who had long been an intimate of mataafa's, and had recently (upon account, indeed, of the secession to malie) more or less wholly broken off relations. to him came one whom i shall call _b_ with a dastardly proposition. it may have been _b's_ own, in which case he were the more unpardonable but from the closeness of his intercourse with the chief justice, as well as from the terms used in the interview, men judged otherwise. it was proposed that _a_ should simulate a renewal of the friendship, decoy mataafa to a suitable place, and have him there arrested. what should follow in those days of violent speech was at the least disputable; and the proposal was of course refused. "you do not understand," was the base rejoinder. "_you_ will have no discredit. the germans are to take the blame of the arrest." of course, upon the testimony of a gentleman so depraved, it were unfair to hang a dog; and both the germans and the chief justice must be held innocent. but the chief justice has shown that he can himself be led, by his animosity against mataafa, into questionable acts. certain natives of malie were accused of stealing pigs; the chief justice summoned them through mataafa; several were sent, and along with them a written promise that, if others were required, these also should be forthcoming upon requisition. such as came were duly tried and acquitted; and mataafa's offer was communicated to the chief justice, who made a formal answer, and the same day (in pursuance of his constant design to have malie attacked by war-ships) reported to one of the consuls that his warrant would not run in the country and that certain of the accused had been withheld. at least, this is not fair dealing; and the next instance i have to give is possibly worse. for one blunder the chief justice is only so far responsible, in that he was not present where it seems he should have been, when it was made. he had nothing to do with the silly proscription of the mataafas; he has always disliked the measure; and it occurred to him at last that he might get rid of this dangerous absurdity and at the same time reap a further advantage. let mataafa leave malie for any other district in samoa; it should be construed as an act of submission and the confiscation and proscription instantly recalled. this was certainly well devised; the government escaped from their own false position, and by the same stroke lowered the prestige of their adversaries. but unhappily the chief justice did not put all his eggs in one basket. concurrently with these negotiations he began again to move the captain of one of the war-ships to shell the rebel village; the captain, conceiving the extremity wholly unjustified, not only refused these instances, but more or less publicly complained of their being made; the matter came to the knowledge of the white resident who was at that time playing the part of intermediary with malie; and he, in natural anger and disgust, withdrew from the negotiation. these duplicities, always deplorable when discovered, are never more fatal than with men imperfectly civilised. almost incapable of truth themselves, they cherish a particular score of the same fault in whites. and mataafa is besides an exceptional native. i would scarce dare say of any samoan that he is truthful, though i seem to have encountered the phenomenon; but i must say of mataafa that he seems distinctly and consistently averse to lying. for the affair of the manono prisoners, the chief justice is only again in so far answerable as he was at the moment absent from the seat of his duties; and the blame falls on baron senfft von pilsach, president of the municipal council. there were in manono certain dissidents, loyal to laupepa. being manono people, i daresay they were very annoying to their neighbours; the majority, as they belonged to the same island, were the more impatient; and one fine day fell upon and destroyed the houses and harvests of the dissidents "according to the laws and customs of samoa." the president went down to the unruly island in a war-ship and was landed alone upon the beach. to one so much a stranger to the mansuetude of polynesians, this must have seemed an act of desperation; and the baron's gallantry met with a deserved success. the six ring-leaders, acting in mataafa's interest, had been guilty of a delict; with mataafa's approval, they delivered themselves over to be tried. on friday, september , , they were convicted before a native magistrate and sentenced to six months' imprisonment; or, i should rather say, detention; for it was expressly directed that they were to be used as gentlemen and not as prisoners, that the door was to stand open, and that all their wishes should be gratified. this extraordinary sentence fell upon the accused like a thunderbolt. there is no need to suppose perfidy, where a careless interpreter suffices to explain all; but the six chiefs claim to have understood their coming to apia as an act of submission merely formal, that they came in fact under an implied indemnity, and that the president stood pledged to see them scatheless. already, on their way from the court-house, they were tumultuously surrounded by friends and clansmen, who pressed and cried upon them to escape; lieutenant ulfsparre must order his men to load; and with that the momentary effervescence died away. next day, saturday, th, the chief justice took his departure from the islands--a step never yet explained and (in view of the doings of the day before and the remonstrances of other officials) hard to justify. the president, an amiable and brave young man of singular inexperience, was thus left to face the growing difficulty by himself. the clansmen of the prisoners, to the number of near upon a hundred, lay in vaiusu, a village half way between apia and malie; there they talked big, thence sent menacing messages; the gaol should be broken in the night, they said, and the six martyrs rescued. allowance is to be made for the character of the people of manono, turbulent fellows, boastful of tongue, but of late days not thought to be answerably bold in person. yet the moment was anxious. the government of mulinuu had gained an important moral victory by the surrender and condemnation of the chiefs; and it was needful the victory should be maintained. the guard upon the gaol was accordingly strengthened; a war-party was sent to watch the vaiusu road under asi; and the chiefs of the vaimaunga were notified to arm and assemble their men. it must be supposed the president was doubtful of the loyalty of these assistants. he turned at least to the war-ships, where it seems he was rebuffed; thence he fled into the arms of the wrecker gang, where he was unhappily more successful. the government of washington had presented to the samoan king the wrecks of the _trenton_ and the _vandalia_; an american syndicate had been formed to break them up; an experienced gang was in consequence settled in apia; and the report of submarine explosions had long grown familiar in the ears of residents. from these artificers the president obtained a supply of dynamite, the needful mechanism, and the loan of a mechanic; the gaol was mined, and the manono people in vaiusu were advertised of the fact in a letter signed by laupepa. partly by the indiscretion of the mechanic, who had sought to embolden himself (like lady macbeth) with liquor for his somewhat dreadful task, the story leaked immediately out and raised a very general, or i might say almost universal, reprobation. some blamed the proposed deed because it was barbarous and a foul example to set before a race half barbarous itself; others because it was illegal; others again because, in the face of so weak an enemy, it appeared pitifully pusillanimous; almost all because it tended to precipitate and embitter war. in the midst of the turmoil he had raised, and under the immediate pressure of certain indignant white residents, the baron fell back upon a new expedient, certainly less barbarous, perhaps no more legal; and on monday afternoon, september th, packed his six prisoners on board the cutter _lancashire lass_, and deported them to the neighbouring low-island group of the tokelaus. we watched her put to sea with mingled feelings. anything were better than dynamite, but this was not good. the men had been summoned in the name of law; they had surrendered; the law had uttered its voice; they were under one sentence duly delivered; and now the president, by no right with which we were acquainted, had exchanged it for another. it was perhaps no less fortunate, though it was more pardonable in a stranger, that he had increased the punishment to that which, in the eyes of samoans, ranks next to death,--exile from their native land and friends. and the _lancashire lass_ appeared to carry away with her into the uttermost parts of the sea the honour of the administration and the prestige of the supreme court. the policy of the government towards mataafa has thus been of a piece throughout; always would-be violent, it has been almost always defaced with some appearance of perfidy or unfairness. the policy of mataafa (though extremely bewildering to any white) appears everywhere consistent with itself, and the man's bearing has always been calm. but to represent the fulness of the contrast, it is necessary that i should give some description of the two capitals, or the two camps, and the ways and means of the regular and irregular government. _mulinuu_. mulinuu, the reader may remember, is a narrow finger of land planted in cocoa-palms, which runs forth into the lagoon perhaps three quarters of a mile. to the east is the bay of apia. to the west, there is, first of all, a mangrove swamp, the mangroves excellently green, the mud ink-black, and its face crawled upon by countless insects and black and scarlet crabs. beyond the swamp is a wide and shallow bay of the lagoon, bounded to the west by faleula point. faleula is the next village to malie; so that from the top of some tall palm in malie it should be possible to descry against the eastern heavens the palms of mulinuu. the trade wind sweeps over the low peninsula and cleanses it from the contagion of the swamp. samoans have a quaint phrase in their language; when out of health, they seek exposed places on the shore "to eat the wind," say they; and there can be few better places for such a diet than the point of mulinuu. two european houses stand conspicuous on the harbour side; in europe they would seem poor enough, but they are fine houses for samoa. one is new; it was built the other day under the apologetic title of a government house, to be the residence of baron senfft. the other is historical; it was built by brandeis on a mortgage, and is now occupied by the chief justice on conditions never understood, the rumour going uncontradicted that he sits rent free. i do not say it is true, i say it goes uncontradicted; and there is one peculiarity of our officials in a nutshell,--their remarkable indifference to their own character. from the one house to the other extends a scattering village for the faipule or native parliament men. in the days of tamasese this was a brave place, both his own house and those of the faipule good, and the whole excellently ordered and approached by a sanded way. it is now like a neglected bush-town, and speaks of apathy in all concerned. but the chief scandal of mulinuu is elsewhere. the house of the president stands just to seaward of the isthmus, where the watch is set nightly, and armed men guard the uneasy slumbers of the government. on the landward side there stands a monument to the poor german lads who fell at fangalii, just beyond which the passer-by may chance to observe a little house standing backward from the road. it is such a house as a commoner might use in a bush village; none could dream that it gave shelter even to a family chief; yet this is the palace of malietoa-natoaitele-tamasoalii laupepa, king of samoa. as you sit in his company under this humble shelter, you shall see, between the posts, the new house of the president. his majesty himself beholds it daily, and the tenor of his thoughts may be divined. the fine house of a samoan chief is his appropriate attribute; yet, after seventeen months, the government (well housed themselves) have not yet found--have not yet sought--a roof-tree for their sovereign. and the lodging is typical. i take up the president's financial statement of september , . i find the king's allowance to figure at seventy-five dollars a month; and i find that he is further (though somewhat obscurely) debited with the salaries of either two or three clerks. take the outside figure, and the sum expended on or for his majesty amounts to ninety-five dollars in the month. lieutenant ulfsparre and dr. hagberg (the chief justice's swedish friends) drew in the same period one hundred and forty and one hundred dollars respectively on account of salary alone. and it should be observed that dr. hagberg was employed, or at least paid, from government funds, in the face of his majesty's express and reiterated protest. in another column of the statement, one hundred and seventy-five dollars and seventy-five cents are debited for the chief justice's travelling expenses. i am of the opinion that if his majesty desired (or dared) to take an outing, he would be asked to bear the charge from his allowance. but although i think the chief justice had done more nobly to pay for himself, i am far from denying that his excursions were well meant; he should indeed be praised for having made them; and i leave the charge out of consideration in the following statement. on the one hand salary of chief justice cedarkrantz $ salary of president baron senfft von pilsach (about) salary of lieutenant ulfsparre, chief of police salary of dr. hagberg, private secretary to the chief justice ----- total monthly salary to four whites, one of them paid against his majesty's protest $ on the other hand total monthly payments to and for his majesty the king, including allowance and hire of three clerks, one of these placed under the rubric of extraordinary expenses $ this looks strange enough and mean enough already. but we have ground of comparison in the practice of brandeis. brandeis, white prime minister $ tamasese (about) white chief of police under brandeis, in other words, the king received the second highest allowance on the sheet; and it was a good second, and the third was a bad third. and it must be borne in mind that tamasese himself was pointed and laughed at among natives. judge, then, what is muttered of laupepa, housed in his shanty before the president's doors like lazarus before the doors of dives; receiving not so much of his own taxes as the private secretary of the law officer; and (in actual salary) little more than half as much as his own chief of police. it is known besides that he has protested in vain against the charge for dr. hagberg; it is known that he has himself applied for an advance and been refused. money is certainly a grave subject on mulinuu; but respect costs nothing, and thrifty officials might have judged it wise to make up in extra politeness for what they curtailed of pomp or comfort. one instance may suffice. laupepa appeared last summer on a public occasion; the president was there--and not even the president rose to greet the entrance of the sovereign. since about the same period, besides, the monarch must be described as in a state of sequestration. a white man, an irishman, the true type of all that is most gallant, humorous, and reckless in his country, chose to visit his majesty and give him some excellent advice (to make up his difference with mataafa) couched unhappily in vivid and figurative language. the adviser now sleeps in the pacific, but the evil that he chanced to do lives after him. his majesty was greatly (and i must say justly) offended by the freedom of the expressions used; he appealed to his white advisers; and these, whether from want of thought or by design, issued an ignominious proclamation. intending visitors to the palace must appear before their consuls and justify their business. the majesty of buried samoa was henceforth only to be viewed (like a private collection) under special permit; and was thus at once cut off from the company and opinions of the self-respecting. to retain any dignity in such an abject state would require a man of very different virtues from those claimed by the not unvirtuous laupepa. he is not designed to ride the whirlwind or direct the storm, rather to be the ornament of private life. he is kind, gentle, patient as job, conspicuously well-intentioned, of charming manners; and when he pleases, he has one accomplishment in which he now begins to be alone--i mean that he can pronounce correctly his own beautiful language. the government of brandeis accomplished a good deal and was continually and heroically attempting more. the government of our two whites has confined itself almost wholly to paying and receiving salaries. they have built, indeed, a house for the president; they are believed (if that be a merit) to have bought the local newspaper with government funds; and their rule has been enlivened by a number of scandals, into which i feel with relief that it is unnecessary i should enter. even if the three powers do not remove these gentlemen, their absurd and disastrous government must perish by itself of inanition. native taxes (except perhaps from mataafa, true to his own private policy) have long been beyond hope. and only the other day (may th, ), on the expressed ground that there was no guarantee as to how the funds would be expended, and that the president consistently refused to allow the verification of his cash balances, the municipal council has negatived the proposal to call up further taxes from the whites. all is well that ends even ill, so that it end; and we believe that with the last dollar we shall see the last of the last functionary. now when it is so nearly over, we can afford to smile at this extraordinary passage, though we must still sigh over the occasion lost. * * * * * _malie._ the way to malie lies round the shores of faleula bay and through a succession of pleasant groves and villages. the road, one of the works of brandeis, is now cut up by pig fences. eight times you must leap a barrier of cocoa posts; the take-off and the landing both in a patch of mire planted with big stones, and the stones sometimes reddened with the blood of horses that have gone before. to make these obstacles more annoying, you have sometimes to wait while a black boar clambers sedately over the so-called pig fence. nothing can more thoroughly depict the worst side of the samoan character than these useless barriers which deface their only road. it was one of the first orders issued by the government of mulinuu after the coming of the chief justice, to have the passage cleared. it is the disgrace of mataafa that the thing is not yet done. the village of malie is the scene of prosperity and peace. in a very good account of a visit there, published in the _australasian_, the writer describes it to be fortified; she must have been deceived by the appearance of some pig walls on the shore. there is no fortification, no parade of war. i understand that from one to five hundred fighting men are always within reach; but i have never seen more than five together under arms, and these were the king's guard of honour. a sabbath quiet broods over the well-weeded green, the picketed horses, the troops of pigs, the round or oval native dwellings. of these there are a surprising number, very fine of their sort: yet more are in the building; and in the midst a tall house of assembly, by far the greatest samoan structure now in these islands, stands about half finished and already makes a figure in the landscape. no bustle is to be observed, but the work accomplished testifies to a still activity. the centre-piece of all is the high chief himself, malietoa-tuiatua-tuiaana mataafa, king--or not king--or king-claimant--of samoa. all goes to him, all comes from him. native deputations bring him gifts and are feasted in return. white travellers, to their indescribable irritation, are (on his approach) waved from his path by his armed guards. he summons his dancers by the note of a bugle. he sits nightly at home before a semicircle of talking-men from many quarters of the islands, delivering and hearing those ornate and elegant orations in which the samoan heart delights. about himself and all his surroundings there breathes a striking sense of order, tranquillity, and native plenty. he is of a tall and powerful person, sixty years of age, white-haired and with a white moustache; his eyes bright and quiet; his jaw perceptibly underhung, which gives him something of the expression of a benevolent mastiff; his manners dignified and a thought insinuating, with an air of a catholic prelate. he was never married, and a natural daughter attends upon his guests. long since he made a vow of chastity,--"to live as our lord lived on this earth," and polynesians report with bated breath that he has kept it. on all such points, true to his catholic training, he is inclined to be even rigid. lauati, the pivot of savaii, has recently repudiated his wife and taken a fairer; and when i was last in malie, mataafa (with a strange superiority to his own interests) had but just despatched a reprimand. in his immediate circle, in spite of the smoothness of his ways, he is said to be more respected than beloved; and his influence is the child rather of authority than popularity. no samoan grandee now living need have attempted that which he has accomplished during the last twelve months with unimpaired prestige, not only to withhold his followers from war, but to send them to be judged in the camp of their enemies on mulinuu. and it is a matter of debate whether such a triumph of authority were ever possible before. speaking for myself, i have visited and dwelt in almost every seat of the polynesian race, and have met but one man who gave me a stronger impression of character and parts. about the situation, mataafa expresses himself with unshaken peace. to the chief justice he refers with some bitterness; to laupepa, with a smile, as "my poor brother." for himself, he stands upon the treaty, and expects sooner or later an election in which he shall be raised to the chief power. in the meanwhile, or for an alternative, he would willingly embrace a compromise with laupepa; to which he would probably add one condition, that the joint government should remain seated at malie, a sensible but not inconvenient distance from white intrigues and white officials. one circumstance in my last interview particularly pleased me. the king's chief scribe, esela, is an old employé under tamasese, and the talk ran some while upon the character of brandeis. loyalty in this world is after all not thrown away; brandeis was guilty, in samoan eyes, of many irritating errors, but he stood true to tamasese; in the course of time a sense of this virtue and of his general uprightness has obliterated the memory of his mistakes; and it would have done his heart good if he could have heard his old scribe and his old adversary join in praising him. "yes," concluded mataafa, "i wish we had planteisa back again." _a quelque chose malheur est bon._ so strong is the impression produced by the defects of cedarcrantz and baron senfft, that i believe mataafa far from singular in this opinion, and that the return of the upright brandeis might be even welcome to many. i must add a last touch to the picture of malie and the pretender's life. about four in the morning, the visitor in his house will be awakened by the note of a pipe, blown without, very softly and to a soothing melody. this is mataafa's private luxury to lead on pleasant dreams. we have a bird here in samoa that about the same hour of darkness sings in the bush. the father of mataafa, while he lived, was a great friend and protector to all living creatures, and passed under the by-name of _the king of birds_. it may be it was among the woodland clients of the sire that the son acquired his fancy for this morning music. * * * * * i have now sought to render without extenuation the impressions received: of dignity, plenty, and peace at malie, of bankruptcy and distraction at mulinuu. and i wish i might here bring to an end ungrateful labours. but i am sensible that there remain two points on which it would be improper to be silent. i should be blamed if i did not indicate a practical conclusion; and i should blame myself if i did not do a little justice to that tried company of the land commissioners. the land commission has been in many senses unfortunate. the original german member, a gentleman of the name of eggert, fell early into precarious health; his work was from the first interrupted, he was at last (to the regret of all that knew him) invalided home; and his successor had but just arrived. in like manner, the first american commissioner, henry c. ide, a man of character and intelligence, was recalled (i believe by private affairs) when he was but just settling into the spirit of the work; and though his place was promptly filled by ex-governor ormsbee, a worthy successor, distinguished by strong and vivacious common sense, the break was again sensible. the english commissioner, my friend bazett michael haggard, is thus the only one who has continued at his post since the beginning. and yet, in spite of these unusual changes, the commission has a record perhaps unrivalled among international commissions. it has been unanimous practically from the first until the last; and out of some four hundred cases disposed of, there is but one on which the members were divided. it was the more unfortunate they should have early fallen in a difficulty with the chief justice. the original ground of this is supposed to be a difference of opinion as to the import of the berlin act, on which, as a layman, it would be unbecoming if i were to offer an opinion. but it must always seem as if the chief justice had suffered himself to be irritated beyond the bounds of discretion. it must always seem as if his original attempt to deprive the commissioners of the services of a secretary and the use of a safe were even senseless; and his step in printing and posting a proclamation denying their jurisdiction were equally impolitic and undignified. the dispute had a secondary result worse than itself. the gentleman appointed to be natives' advocate shared the chief justice's opinion, was his close intimate, advised with him almost daily, and drifted at last into an attitude of opposition to his colleagues. he suffered himself besides (being a layman in law) to embrace the interest of his clients with something of the warmth of a partisan. disagreeable scenes occurred in court; the advocate was more than once reproved, he was warned that his consultations with the judge of appeal tended to damage his own character and to lower the credit of the appellate court. having lost some cases on which he set importance, it should seem that he spoke unwisely among natives. a sudden cry of colour prejudice went up; and samoans were heard to assure each other that it was useless to appear before the land commission, which was sworn to support the whites. this deplorable state of affairs was brought to an end by the departure from samoa of the natives' advocate. he was succeeded _pro tempore_ by a young new zealander, e. w. gurr, not much more versed in law than himself, and very much less so in samoan. whether by more skill or better fortune, gurr has been able in the course of a few weeks to recover for the natives several important tracts of land; and the prejudice against the commission seems to be abating as fast as it arose. i should not omit to say that, in the eagerness of the original advocate, there was much that was amiable; nor must i fail to point out how much there was of blindness. fired by the ardour of pursuit, he seems to have regarded his immediate clients as the only natives extant and the epitome and emblem of the samoan race. thus, in the case that was the most exclaimed against as "an injustice to natives," his client, puaauli, was certainly nonsuited. but in that intricate affair who lost the money? the german firm. and who got the land? other natives. to twist such a decision into evidence, either of a prejudice against samoans or a partiality to whites, is to keep one eye shut and have the other bandaged. and lastly, one word as to the future. laupepa and mataafa stand over against each other, rivals with no third competitor. they may be said to hold the great name of malietoa in commission; each has borne the style, each exercised the authority, of a samoan king; one is secure of the small but compact and fervent following of the catholics, the other has the sympathies of a large part of the protestant majority, and upon any sign of catholic aggression would have more. with men so nearly balanced, it may be asked whether a prolonged successful exercise of power be possible for either. in the case of the feeble laupepa, it is certainly not; we have the proof before us. nor do i think we should judge, from what we see to-day, that it would be possible, or would continue to be possible, even for the kingly mataafa. it is always the easier game to be in opposition. the tale of david and saul would infallibly be re-enacted; once more we shall have two kings in the land,--the latent and the patent; and the house of the first will become once more the resort of "every one that is in distress, and every one that is in debt, and every one that is discontented." against such odds it is my fear that mataafa might contend in vain; it is beyond the bounds of my imagination that laupepa should contend at all. foreign ships and bayonets is the cure proposed in mulinuu. and certainly, if people at home desire that money should be thrown away and blood shed in samoa, an effect of a kind, and for the time, may be produced. its nature and prospective durability i will ask readers of this volume to forecast for themselves. there is one way to peace and unity: that laupepa and mataafa should be again conjoined on the best terms procurable. there may be other ways, although i cannot see them; but not even malevolence, not even stupidity, can deny that this is one. it seems, indeed, so obvious, and sure, and easy, that men look about with amazement and suspicion, seeking some hidden motive why it should not be adopted. to laupepa's opposition, as shown in the case of the lauati scheme, no dweller in samoa will give weight, for they know him to be as putty in the hands of his advisers. it may be right, it may be wrong, but we are many of us driven to the conclusion that the stumbling-block is fangalii, and that the memorial of that affair shadows appropriately the house of a king who reigns in right of it. if this be all, it should not trouble us long. germany has shown she can be generous; it now remains for her only to forget a natural but certainly ill-grounded prejudice, and allow to him, who was sole king before the plenipotentiaries assembled, and who would be sole king to-morrow if the berlin act could be rescinded, a fitting share of rule. the future of samoa should lie thus in the hands of a single man, on whom the eyes of europe are already fixed. great concerns press on his attention; the samoan group, in his view, is but as a grain of dust; and the country where he reigns has bled on too many august scenes of victory to remember for ever a blundering skirmish in the plantation of vailele. it is to him--to the sovereign of the wise stuebel and the loyal brandeis,--that i make my appeal. _may_ , . island nights' entertainments to three old shipmates among the islands harry henderson ben hird jack buckland their friend r. l. s. the beach of falesÁ (being the narrative of a south sea trader) the beach of falesÁ chapter i a south sea bridal i saw that island first when it was neither night nor morning. the moon was to the west, setting, but still broad and bright. to the east, and right amidships of the dawn, which was all pink, the day-star sparkled like a diamond. the land breeze blew in our faces, and smelt strong of wild lime and vanilla: other things besides, but these were the most plain; and the chill of it set me sneezing. i should say i had been for years on a low island near the line, living for the most part solitary among natives. here was a fresh experience: even the tongue would be quite strange to me; and the look of these woods and mountains, and the rare smell of them, renewed my blood. the captain blew out the binnacle lamp. "there!" said he, "there goes a bit of smoke, mr. wiltshire, behind the break of the reef. that's falesá, where your station is, the last village to the east; nobody lives to windward--i don't know why. take my glass, and you can make the houses out." i took the glass; and the shores leaped nearer, and i saw the tangle of the woods and the breach of the surf, and the brown roofs and the black insides of houses peeped among the trees. "do you catch a bit of white there to the east'ard?" the captain continued. "that's your house. coral built, stands high, verandah you could walk on three abreast; best station in the south pacific. when old adams saw it, he took and shook me by the hand. 'i've dropped into a soft thing here,' says he. 'so you have,' says i, 'and time too!' poor johnny! i never saw him again but the once, and then he had changed his tune--couldn't get on with the natives, or the whites, or something; and the next time we came round there he was dead and buried. i took and put up a bit of stick to him: 'john adams, _obiit_ eighteen and sixty-eight. go thou and do likewise.' i missed that man. i never could see much harm in johnny." "what did he die of?" i inquired. "some kind of sickness," says the captain. "it appears it took him sudden. seems he got up in the night, and filled up on pain-killer and kennedy's discovery. no go: he was booked beyond kennedy. then he had tried to open a case of gin. no go again: not strong enough. then he must have turned to and run out on the verandah, and capsized over the rail. when they found him, the next day, he was clean crazy--carried on all the time about somebody watering his copra. poor john!" "was it thought to be the island?" i asked. "well, it was thought to be the island, or the trouble, or something," he replied. "i never could hear but what it was a healthy place. our last man, vigours, never turned a hair. he left because of the beach--said he was afraid of black jack and case and whistling jimmie, who was still alive at the time, but got drowned soon afterward when drunk. as for old captain randall, he's been here any time since eighteen-forty, forty-five. i never could see much harm in billy, nor much change. seems as if he might live to be old kafoozleum. no, i guess it's healthy." "there's a boat coming now," said i. "she's right in the pass; looks to be a sixteen-foot whale; two white men in the stern-sheets." "that's the boat that drowned whistling jimmie!" cried the captain; "let's see the glass. yes, that's case, sure enough, and the darkie. they've got a gallows bad reputation, but you know what a place the beach is for talking. my belief, that whistling jimmie was the worst of the trouble; and he's gone to glory, you see. what'll you bet they ain't after gin? lay you five to two they take six cases." when these two traders came aboard i was pleased with the looks of them at once, or, rather, with the looks of both, and the speech of one. i was sick for white neighbours after my four years at the line, which i always counted years of prison; getting tabooed, and going down to the speak house to see and get it taken off; buying gin and going on a break, and then repenting; sitting in the house at night with the lamp for company; or walking on the beach and wondering what kind of a fool to call myself for being where i was. there were no other whites upon my island, and when i sailed to the next, rough customers made the most of the society. now to see these two when they came aboard was a pleasure. one was a negro, to be sure; but they were both rigged out smart in striped pyjamas and straw hats, and case would have passed muster in a city. he was yellow and smallish, had a hawk's nose to his face, pale eyes, and his beard trimmed with scissors. no man knew his country, beyond he was of english speech; and it was clear he came of a good family and was splendidly educated. he was accomplished too; played the accordion first-rate; and give him a piece of string or a cork or a pack of cards, and he could show you tricks equal to any professional. he could speak, when he chose, fit for a drawing-room; and when he chose he could blaspheme worse than a yankee boatswain, and talk smart to sicken a kanaka. the way he thought would pay best at the moment, that was case's way, and it always seemed to come natural, and like as if he was born to it. he had the courage of a lion and the cunning of a rat; and if he's not in hell to-day, there's no such place. i know but one good point to the man: that he was fond of his wife, and kind to her. she was a samoa woman, and dyed her hair red, samoa style; and when he came to die (as i have to tell of) they found one strange thing--that he had made a will, like a christian, and the widow got the lot: all his, they said, and all black jack's, and the most of billy randall's in the bargain, for it was case that kept the books. so she went off home in the schooner _manu'a_, and does the lady to this day in her own place. but of all this on that first morning i knew no more than a fly. case used me like a gentleman and like a friend, made me welcome to falesá, and put his services at my disposal, which was the more helpful from my ignorance of the native. all the better part of the day we sat drinking better acquaintance in the cabin, and i never heard a man talk more to the point. there was no smarter trader, and none dodgier, in the islands. i thought falesá seemed to be the right kind of a place; and the more i drank the lighter my heart. our last trader had fled the place at half an hour's notice, taking a chance passage in a labour ship from up west. the captain, when he came, had found the station closed, the keys left with the native pastor, and a letter from the runaway, confessing he was fairly frightened of his life. since then the firm had not been represented, and of course there was no cargo. the wind, besides, was fair, the captain hoped he could make his next island by dawn, with a good tide, and the business of landing my trade was gone about lively. there was no call for me to fool with it, case said; nobody would touch my things, every one was honest in falesá, only about chickens or an odd knife or an odd stick of tobacco; and the best i could do was to sit quiet till the vessel left, then come straight to his house, see old captain randall, the father of the beach, take pot-luck, and go home to sleep when it got dark. so it was high noon, and the schooner was under way, before i set my foot on shore at falesá. i had a glass or two on board; i was just off a long cruise, and the ground heaved under me like a ship's deck. the world was like all new painted; my foot went along to music; falesá might have been fiddler's green, if there is such a place, and more's the pity if there isn't! it was good to foot the grass, to look aloft at the green mountains, to see the men with their green wreaths and the women in their bright dresses, red and blue. on we went, in the strong sun and the cool shadow, liking both; and all the children in the town came trotting after with their shaven heads and their brown bodies, and raising a thin kind of a cheer in our wake, like crowing poultry. "by the by," says case, "we must get you a wife." "that's so," said i; "i had forgotten." there was a crowd of girls about us, and i pulled myself up and looked among them like a bashaw. they were all dressed out for the sake of the ship being in; and the women of falesá are a handsome lot to see. if they have a fault, they are a trifle broad in the beam; and i was just thinking so when case touched me. "that's pretty," says he. i saw one coming on the other side alone. she had been fishing; all she wore was a chemise, and it was wetted through. she was young and very slender for an island maid, with a long face, a high forehead, and a shy, strange, blindish look, between a cat's and a baby's. "who's she?" said i. "she'll do." "that's uma," said case, and he called her up and spoke to her in the native. i didn't know what he said; but when he was in the midst she looked up at me quick and timid, like a child dodging a blow, then down again, and presently smiled. she had a wide mouth, the lips and the chin cut like any statue's; and the smile came out for a moment and was gone. then she stood with her head bent, and heard case to an end, spoke back in the pretty polynesian voice, looking him full in the face, heard him again in answer, and then with an obeisance started off. i had just a share of the bow, but never another shot of her eye, and there was no more word of smiling. "i guess it's all right," said case. "i guess you can have her. i'll make it square with the old lady. you can have your pick of the lot for a plug of tobacco," he added, sneering. i suppose it was the smile stuck in my memory, for i spoke back sharp. "she doesn't look that sort," i cried. "i don't know that she is," said case. "i believe she's as right as the mail. keeps to herself, don't go round with the gang, and that. o no, don't you misunderstand me--uma's on the square." he spoke eager, i thought, and that surprised and pleased me. "indeed," he went on, "i shouldn't make so sure of getting her, only she cottoned to the cut of your jib. all you have to do is to keep dark and let me work the mother my own way; and i'll bring the girl round to the captain's for the marriage." i didn't care for the word marriage, and i said so. "o, there's nothing to hurt in the marriage," says he. "black jack's the chaplain." by this time we had come in view of the house of these three white men; for a negro is counted a white man, and so is a chinese! a strange idea, but common in the islands. it was a board house with a strip of rickety verandah. the store was to the front, with a counter, scales, and the poorest possible display of trade: a case or two of tinned meats, a barrel of hard bread, a few bolts of cotton stuff, not to be compared with mine; the only thing well represented being the contraband, firearms and liquor. "if these are my only rivals," thinks i, "i should do well in falesá." indeed, there was only the one way they could touch me, and that was with the guns and drink. in the back room was old captain randall, squatting on the floor native fashion, fat and pale, naked to the waist, grey as a badger, and his eyes set with drink. his body was covered with grey hair and crawled over by flies; one was in the corner of his eye--he never heeded; and the mosquitoes hummed about the man like bees. any clean-minded man would have had the creature out at once and buried him; and to see him, and think he was seventy, and remember he had once commanded a ship, and come ashore in his smart togs, and talked big in bars and consulates, and sat in club verandahs, turned me sick and sober. he tried to get up when i came in, but that was hopeless; so he reached me a hand instead, and stumbled out some salutation. "papa's[ ] pretty full this morning," observed case. "we've had an epidemic here; and captain randall takes gin for a prophylactic--don't you, papa?" "never took such a thing in my life!" cried the captain indignantly. "take gin for my health's sake, mr. wha's-ever-your-name--'s a precautionary measure." "that's all right, papa," said case. "but you'll have to brace up. there's going to be a marriage--mr. wiltshire here is going to get spliced." the old man asked to whom. "to uma," said case. "uma!" cried the captain. "wha's he want uma for? 's he come here for his health, anyway? wha' 'n hell 's he want uma for?" "dry up, papa," said case. "'tain't you that's to marry her. i guess you're not her godfather and godmother. i guess mr. wiltshire's going to please himself." with that he made an excuse to me that he must move about the marriage, and left me alone with the poor wretch that was his partner and (to speak truth) his gull. trade and station belonged both to randall; case and the negro were parasites; they crawled and fed upon him like the flies, he none the wiser. indeed, i have no harm to say of billy randall beyond the fact that my gorge rose at him, and the time i now passed in his company was like a nightmare. the room was stifling hot and full of flies; for the house was dirty and low and small, and stood in a bad place, behind the village, in the borders of the bush, and sheltered from the trade. the three men's beds were on the floor, and a litter of pans and dishes. there was no standing furniture; randall, when he was violent, tearing it to laths. there i sat and had a meal which was served us by case's wife; and there i was entertained all day by that remains of man, his tongue stumbling among low old jokes and long old stories, and his own wheezy laughter always ready, so that he had no sense of my depression. he was nipping gin all the while. sometimes he fell asleep, and awoke again, whimpering and shivering, and every now and again he would ask me why i wanted to marry uma. "my friend," i was telling myself all day, "you must not come to be an old gentleman like this." it might be four in the afternoon, perhaps, when the back door was thrust slowly open, and a strange old native woman crawled into the house almost on her belly. she was swathed in black stuff to her heels; her hair was grey in swatches; her face was tattooed, which was not the practice in that island; her eyes big and bright and crazy. these she fixed upon me with a rapt expression that i saw to be part acting. she said no plain words, but smacked and mumbled with her lips, and hummed aloud, like a child over its christmas pudding. she came straight across the house, heading for me, and, as soon as she was alongside, caught up my hand and purred and crooned over it like a great cat. from this she slipped into a kind of song. "who the devil's this?" cried i, for the thing startled me. "it's fa'avao," says randall; and i saw he had hitched along the floor into the farthest corner. "you ain't afraid of her?" i cried. "me 'fraid!" cried the captain. "my dear friend, i defy her! i don't let her put her foot in here, only i suppose 's different to-day, for the marriage. 's uma's mother." "well, suppose it is; what's she carrying on about?" i asked, more irritated, perhaps more frightened, than i cared to show; and the captain told me she was making up a quantity of poetry in my praise because i was to marry uma. "all right, old lady," says i, with rather a failure of a laugh, "anything to oblige. but when you're done with my hand, you might let me know." she did as though she understood; the song rose into a cry, and stopped; the woman crouched out of the house the same way that she came in, and must have plunged straight into the bush, for when i followed her to the door she had already vanished. "these are rum manners," said i. "'s a rum crowd," said the captain, and, to my surprise, he made the sign of the cross on his bare bosom. "hillo!" says i, "are you a papist?" he repudiated the idea with contempt. "hard-shell baptis'," said he. "but, my dear friend, the papists got some good ideas too; and tha' 's one of 'em. you take my advice, and whenever you come across uma or fa'avao or vigours, or any of that crowd, you take a leaf out o' the priests, and do what i do. savvy," says he, repeated the sign, and winked his dim eye at me. "no, _sir!_" he broke out again, "no papists here!" and for a long time entertained me with his religious opinions. i must have been taken with uma from the first, or i should certainly have fled from that house, and got into the clean air, and the clean sea, or some convenient river--though, it's true, i was committed to case; and, besides, i could never have held my head up in that island if i had run from a girl upon my wedding-night. the sun was down, the sky all on fire, and the lamp had been some time lighted, when case came back with uma and the negro. she was dressed and scented; her kilt was of fine tapa, looking richer in the folds than any silk; her bust, which was of the colour of dark honey, she wore bare only for some half a dozen necklaces of seeds and flowers; and behind her ears and in her hair she had the scarlet flowers of the hibiscus. she showed the best bearing for a bride conceivable, serious and still; and i thought shame to stand up with her in that mean house and before that grinning negro. i thought shame, i say; for the mountebank was dressed with a big paper collar, the book he made believe to read from was an odd volume of a novel, and the words of his service not fit to be set down. my conscience smote me when we joined hands; and when she got her certificate i was tempted to throw up the bargain and confess. here is the document. it was case that wrote it, signatures and all, in a leaf out of the ledger:-- this is to certify that uma, daughter of fa'avao of falesá, island of ----, is illegally married to mr. john wiltshire for one week, and mr. john wiltshire is at liberty to send her to hell when he pleases. john blackamoar, chaplain to the hulks. extracted from the register by william t. randall, master mariner. a nice paper to put in a girl's hand and see her hide away like gold. a man might easily feel cheap for less. but it was the practice in these parts, and (as i told myself) not the least the fault of us white men, but of the missionaries. if they had let the natives be, i had never needed this deception, but taken all the wives i wished, and left them when i pleased, with a clear conscience. the more ashamed i was, the more hurry i was in to be gone; and our desires thus jumping together, i made the less remark of a change in the traders. case had been all eagerness to keep me; now, as though he had attained a purpose, he seemed all eagerness to have me go. uma, he said, could show me to my house, and the three bade us farewell indoors. the night was nearly come; the village smelt of trees and flowers and the sea and breadfruit-cooking; there came a fine roll of sea from the reef, and from a distance, among the woods and houses, many pretty sounds of men and children. it did me good to breathe free air; it did me good to be done with the captain and see, instead, the creature at my side. i felt for all the world as though she were some girl at home in the old country, and, forgetting myself for the minute, took her hand to walk with. her fingers nestled into mine, i heard her breathe deep and quick, and all at once she caught my hand to her face and pressed it there. "you good!" she cried, and ran ahead of me, and stopped and looked back and smiled, and ran ahead of me again, thus guiding me through the edge of the bush, and by a quiet way to my own house. the truth is, case had done the courting for me in style--told her i was mad to have her, and cared nothing for the consequence; and the poor soul, knowing that which i was still ignorant of, believed it, every word, and had her head nigh turned with vanity and gratitude. now, of all this i had no guess; i was one of those most opposed to any nonsense about native women, having seen so many whites eaten up by their wives' relatives, and made fools of in the bargain; and i told myself i must make a stand at once, and bring her to her bearings. but she looked so quaint and pretty as she ran away and then awaited me, and the thing was done so like a child or a kind dog, that the best i could do was just to follow her whenever she went on, to listen for the fall of her bare feet, and to watch in the dusk for the shining of her body. and there was another thought came in my head. she played kitten with me now when we were alone; but in the house she had carried it the way a countess might, so proud and humble. and what with her dress--for all there was so little of it, and that native enough--what with her fine tapa and fine scents, and her red flowers and seeds, that were quite as bright as jewels, only larger--it came over me she was a kind of countess really, dressed to hear great singers at a concert, and no even mate for a poor trader like myself. she was the first in the house; and while i was still without i saw a match flash and the lamplight kindle in the windows. the station was a wonderful fine place, coral built, with quite a wide verandah, and the main room high and wide. my chests and cases had been piled in, and made rather of a mess; and there, in the thick of the confusion, stood uma by the table, awaiting me. her shadow went all the way up behind her into the hollow of the iron roof; she stood against it bright, the lamplight shining on her skin. i stopped in the door, and she looked at me, not speaking, with eyes that were eager and yet daunted; then she touched herself on the bosom. "me--your wifie," she said. it had never taken me like that before; but the want of her took and shook all through me, like the wind in the luff of a sail. i could not speak if i had wanted; and if i could, i would not. i was ashamed to be so much moved about a native, ashamed of the marriage too, and the certificate she had treasured in her kilt; and i turned aside and made believe to rummage among my cases. the first thing i lighted on was a case of gin, the only one that i had brought; and, partly for the girl's sake, and partly for horror of the recollections of old randall, took a sudden resolve. i prised the lid off. one by one i drew the bottles with a pocket corkscrew, and sent uma out to pour the stuff from the verandah. she came back after the last, and looked at me puzzled like. "no good," said i, for i was now a little better master of my tongue. "man he drink, he no good." she agreed with this, but kept considering. "why you bring him?" she asked presently. "suppose you no want drink, you no bring him, i think." "that's all right," said i. "one time i want drink too much; now no want. you see, i no savvy i get one little wifie. suppose i drink gin, my little wifie he 'fraid." to speak to her kindly was about more than i was fit for; i had made my vow i would never let on to weakness with a native, and i had nothing for it but to stop. she stood looking gravely down at me where i sat by the open case. "i think you good man," she said. and suddenly she had fallen before me on the floor. "i belong you all-e-same pig!" she cried. footnote: [ ] please pronounce _pappa_ throughout. chapter ii the ban i came on the verandah just before the sun rose on the morrow. my house was the last on the east; there was a cape of woods and cliffs behind that hid the sunrise. to the west, a swift cold river ran down, and beyond was the green of the village, dotted with cocoa-palms and breadfruits and houses. the shutters were some of them down and some open; i saw the mosquito bars still stretched, with shadows of people new-awakened sitting up inside; and all over the green others were stalking silent, wrapped in their many-coloured sleeping clothes like bedouins in bible pictures. it was mortal still and solemn and chilly, and the light of the dawn on the lagoon was like the shining of a fire. but the thing that troubled me was nearer hand. some dozen young men and children made a piece of a half-circle, flanking my house: the river divided them, some were on the near side, some on the far, and one on a boulder in the midst; and they all sat silent, wrapped in their sheets, and stared at me and my house as straight as pointer dogs. i thought it strange as i went out. when i had bathed and come back again, and found them all there, and two or three more along with them, i thought it stranger still. what could they see to gaze at in my house, i wondered, and went in. but the thought of these starers stuck in my mind, and presently i came out again. the sun was now up, but it was still behind the cape of woods. say a quarter of an hour had come and gone. the crowd was greatly increased, the far bank of the river was lined for quite a way--perhaps thirty grown folk, and of children twice as many, some standing, some squatted on the ground, and all staring at my house. i have seen a house in the south sea village thus surrounded, but then a trader was thrashing his wife inside, and she singing out. here was nothing: the stove was alight, the smoke going up in a christian manner; all was shipshape and bristol fashion. to be sure, there was a stranger come, but they had a chance to see that stranger yesterday, and took it quiet enough. what ailed them now? i leaned my arms on the rail and stared back. devil a wink they had in them! now and then i could see the children chatter, but they spoke so low not even the hum of their speaking came my length. the rest were like graven images: they stared at me, dumb and sorrowful, with their bright eyes; and it came upon me things would look not much different if i were on the platform of the gallows, and these good folk had come to see me hanged. i felt i was getting daunted, and began to be afraid i looked it, which would never do. up i stood, made believe to stretch myself, came down the verandah stair, and strolled towards the river. there went a short buzz from one to the other, like what you hear in theatres when the curtain goes up; and some of the nearest gave back the matter of a pace. i saw a girl lay one hand on a young man and make a gesture upward with the other; at the same time she said something in the native with a gasping voice. three little boys sat beside my path, where i must pass within three feet of them. wrapped in their sheets, with their shaved heads and bits of top-knots, and queer faces, they looked like figures on a chimney-piece. a while they sat their ground, solemn as judges. i came up hand over fist, doing my five knots, like a man that meant business; and i thought i saw a sort of a wink and gulp in the three faces. then one jumped up (he was the farthest off) and ran for his mammy. the other two, trying to follow suit, got foul, came to ground together bawling, wriggled right out of their sheets mother-naked, and in a moment there were all three of them scampering for their lives and singing out like pigs. the natives, who would never let a joke slip, even at a burial, laughed and let up, as short as a dog's bark. they say it scares a man to be alone. no such thing. what scares him in the dark or the high bush is that he can't make sure, and there might be an army at his elbow. what scares him worst is to be right in the midst of a crowd, and have no guess of what they're driving at. when that laugh stopped, i stopped too. the boys had not yet made their offing, they were still on the full stretch going the one way, when i had already gone about ship and was sheering off the other. like a fool i had come out, doing my five knots; like a fool i went back again. it must have been the funniest thing to see, and, what knocked me silly, this time no one laughed; only one old woman gave a kind of pious moan, the way you have heard dissenters in their chapels at the sermon. "i never saw such fools of kanakas as your people here," i said once to uma, glancing out of the window at the starers. "savvy nothing," says uma, with a kind of disgusted air that she was good at. and that was all the talk we had upon the matter, for i was put out, and uma took the thing so much as a matter of course that i was fairly ashamed. all day, off and on, now fewer and now more, the fools sat about the west end of my house and across the river, waiting for the show, whatever that was--fire to come down from heaven, i suppose, and consume me, bones and baggage. but by evening, like real islanders, they had wearied of the business, and got away, and had a dance instead in the big house of the village, where i heard them singing and clapping hands till, maybe, ten at night, and the next day it seemed they had forgotten i existed. if fire had come down from heaven or the earth opened and swallowed me, there would have been nobody to see the sport or take the lesson, or whatever you like to call it. but i was to find that they hadn't forgot either, and kept an eye lifting for phenomena over my way. i was hard at it both these days getting my trade in order and taking stock of what vigours had left. this was a job that made me pretty sick, and kept me from thinking on much else. ben had taken stock the trip before--i knew i could trust ben--but it was plain somebody had been making free in the meantime. i found i was out by what might easily cover six months' salary and profit, and i could have kicked myself all round the village to have been such a blamed ass, sitting boozing with that case instead of attending to my own affairs and taking stock. however, there's no use crying over spilt milk. it was done now, and couldn't be undone. all i could do was to get what was left of it, and my new stuff (my own choice) in order, to go round and get after the rats and cockroaches, and to fix up that store regular sydney style. a fine show i made of it; and the third morning when i had lit my pipe and stood in the doorway and looked in, and turned and looked far up the mountain and saw the cocoa-nuts waving and posted up the tons of copra, and over the village green and saw the island dandies and reckoned up the yards of print they wanted for their kilts and dresses, i felt as if i was in the right place to make a fortune, and go home again and start a public-house. there was i, sitting in that verandah, in as handsome a piece of scenery as you could find, a splendid sun, and a fine, fresh, healthy trade that stirred up a man's blood like sea-bathing; and the whole thing was clean gone from me, and i was dreaming england, which is, after all, a nasty, cold, muddy hole, with not enough light to see to read by; and dreaming the looks of my public, by a cant of a broad high-road like an avenue, and with the sign on a green tree. so much for the morning; but the day passed and the devil any one looked near me, and from all i knew of natives in other islands i thought this strange. people laughed a little at our firm and their fine stations, and at this station of falesá in particular; all the copra in the district wouldn't pay for it (i had heard them say) in fifty years, which i supposed was an exaggeration. but when the day went, and no business came at all, i began to get downhearted; and, about three in the afternoon, i went out for a stroll to cheer me up. on the green i saw a white man coming with a cassock on, by which and by the face of him i knew he was a priest. he was a good-natured old soul to look at, gone a little grizzled, and so dirty you could have written with him on a piece of paper. "good day, sir," said i. he answered me eagerly in native. "don't you speak any english?" said i. "french," says he. "well," said i, "i'm sorry, but i can't do anything there." he tried me a while in the french, and then again in native, which he seemed to think was the best chance. i made out he was after more than passing the time of day with me, but had something to communicate, and i listened the harder. i heard the names of adams and case and of randall--randall the oftenest--and the word "poison," or something like it, and a native word that he said very often. i went home, repeating it to myself. "what does fussy-ocky mean?" i asked of uma, for that was as near as i could come to it. "make dead," said she. "the devil it does!" says i. "did you ever hear that case had poisoned johnny adams?" "every man he savvy that," says uma, scornful-like. "give him white sand--bad sand. he got the bottle still. suppose he give you gin, you no take him." now i had heard much the same sort of story in other islands, and the same white powder always to the front, which made me think the less of it. for all that, i went over to randall's place to see what i could pick up, and found case on the doorstep, cleaning a gun. "good shooting here?" says i. "a ," says he. "the bush is full of all kinds of birds. i wish copra was as plenty," says he--i thought, slyly--"but there don't seem anything doing." i could see black jack in the store, serving a customer. "that looks like business, though," said i. "that's the first sale we've made in three weeks," said he. "you don't tell me?" says i. "three weeks? well, well." "if you don't believe me," he cries, a little hot, "you can go and look at the copra-house. it's half empty to this blessed hour." "i shouldn't be much the better for that, you see," says i. "for all i can tell, it might have been whole empty yesterday." "that's so," says he, with a bit of a laugh. "by the by," i said, "what sort of a party is that priest? seems rather a friendly sort." at this case laughed right out loud. "ah!" says he, "i see what ails you now. galuchet's been at you." _father galoshes_ was the name he went by most, but case always gave it the french quirk, which was another reason we had for thinking him above the common. "yes, i have seen him," i says. "i made out he didn't think much of your captain randall." "that he don't!" says case. "it was the trouble about poor adams. the last day, when he lay dying, there was young buncombe round. ever met buncombe?" i told him no. "he's a cure, is buncombe!" laughs case. "well, buncombe took it in his head that, as there was no other clergyman about, bar kanaka pastors, we ought to call in father galuchet, and have the old man administered and take the sacrament. it was all the same to me, you may suppose; but i said i thought adams was the fellow to consult. he was jawing away about watered copra and a sight of foolery. 'look here,' i said, 'you're pretty sick. would you like to see galoshes?' he sat right up on his elbow. 'get the priest,' says he, 'get the priest; don't let me die here like a dog!' he spoke kind of fierce and eager, but sensible enough. there was nothing to say against that, so we sent and asked galuchet if he would come. you bet he would. he jumped in his dirty linen at the thought of it. but we had reckoned without papa. he's a hard-shell baptist, is papa; no papists need apply. and he took and locked the door. buncombe told him he was bigoted, and i thought he would have had a fit. 'bigoted!' he says. 'me bigoted? have i lived to hear it from a jackanapes like you?' and he made for buncombe, and i had to hold them apart; and there was adams in the middle, gone luny again, and carrying on about copra like a born fool. it was good as the play, and i was about knocked out of time with laughing, when all of a sudden adams sat up, clapped his hands to his chest, and went into horrors. he died hard, did john adams," says case, with a kind of a sudden sternness. "and what became of the priest?" i asked. "the priest?" says case. "o! he was hammering on the door outside, and crying on the natives to come and beat it in, and singing out it was a soul he wished to save, and that. he was in a rare taking, was the priest. but what would you have? johnny had slipped his cable: no more johnny in the market; and the administration racket clean played out. next thing, word came to randall the priest was praying upon johnny's grave. papa was pretty full, and got a club, and lit out straight for the place, and there was galoshes on his knees, and a lot of natives looking on. you wouldn't think papa cared that much about anything, unless it was liquor; but he and the priest stuck to it two hours, slanging each other in native, and every time galoshes tried to kneel down papa went for him with the club. there never were such larks in falesá. the end of it was that captain randall was knocked over with some kind of a fit or stroke, and the priest got in his goods after all. but he was the angriest priest you ever heard of, and complained to the chiefs about the outrage, as he called it. that was no account, for our chiefs are protestant here; and, anyway, he had been making trouble about the drum for morning school, and they were glad to give him a wipe. now he swears old randall gave adams poison or something, and when the two meet they grin at each other like baboons." he told the story as natural as could be, and like a man that enjoyed the fun; though, now i come to think of it after so long, it seems rather a sickening yarn. however, case never set up to be soft, only to be square and hearty, and a man all round; and, to tell the truth, he puzzled me entirely. i went home and asked uma if she were a popey, which i had made out to be the native word for catholics. "_e le ai!_" says she. she always used the native when she meant "no" more than usually strong, and, indeed, there's more of it. "no good popey," she added. then i asked her about adams and the priest, and she told me much the same yarn in her own way. so that i was left not much further on, but inclined, upon the whole, to think the bottom of the matter was the row about the sacrament, and the poisoning only talk. the next day was a sunday, when there was no business to be looked for. uma asked me in the morning if i was going to "pray"; i told her she bet not, and she stopped home herself with no more words. i thought this seemed unlike a native, and a native woman, and a woman that had new clothes to show off; however, it suited me to the ground, and i made the less of it. the queer thing was that i came next door to going to church after all, a thing i'm little likely to forget. i had turned out for a stroll, and heard the hymn tune up. you know how it is. if you hear folk singing, it seems to draw you: and pretty soon i found myself alongside the church. it was a little, long, low place, coral built, rounded off at both ends like a whale-boat, a big native roof on the top of it, windows without sashes and doorways without doors. i stuck my head into one of the windows, and the sight was so new to me--for things went quite different in the islands i was acquainted with--that i stayed and looked on. the congregation sat on the floor on mats, the women on one side, the men on the other, all rigged out to kill--the women with dresses and trade hats, the men in white jackets and shirts. the hymn was over; the pastor, a big buck kanaka, was in the pulpit, preaching for his life; and by the way he wagged his hand, and worked his voice, and made his points, and seemed to argue with the folk, i made out he was a gun at the business. well, he looked up suddenly and caught my eye, and i give you my word he staggered in the pulpit; his eyes bulged out of his head, his hand rose and pointed at me like as if against his will, and the sermon stopped right there. it isn't a fine thing to say for yourself, but i ran away; and if the same kind of a shock was given me, i should run away again to-morrow. to see that palavering kanaka struck all of a heap at the mere sight of me gave me a feeling as if the bottom had dropped out of the world. i went right home, and stayed there, and said nothing. you might think i would tell uma, but that was against my system. you might have thought i would have gone over and consulted case; but the truth was i was ashamed to speak of such a thing, i thought every one would blurt out laughing in my face. so i held my tongue, and thought all the more; and the more i thought, the less i liked the business. by monday night i got it clearly in my head i must be tabooed. a new store to stand open two days in a village and not a man or woman come to see the trade was past believing. "uma," said i, "i think i am tabooed." "i think so," said she. i thought a while whether i should ask her more, but it's a bad idea to set natives up with any notion of consulting them, so i went to case. it was dark, and he was sitting alone, as he did mostly, smoking on the stairs. "case," said i, "here's a queer thing. i'm tabooed." "o, fudge!" says he "'tain't the practice in these islands." "that may be, or it mayn't," said i. "it's the practice where i was before. you can bet i know what it's like; and i tell it you for a fact, i'm tabooed." "well," said he, "what have you been doing?" "that's what i want to find out," said i. "o, you can't be," said he; "it ain't possible. however, i'll tell you what i'll do. just to put your mind at rest, i'll go round and find out for sure. just you waltz in and talk to papa." "thank you," i said, "i'd rather stay right out here on the verandah. your house is so close." "i'll call papa out here, then," says he. "my dear fellow," i says, "i wish you wouldn't. the fact is, i don't take to mr. randall." case laughed, took a lantern from the store, and set out into the village. he was gone perhaps a quarter of an hour, and he looked mighty serious when he came back. "well," said he, clapping down the lantern on the verandah steps. "i would never have believed it. i don't know where the impudence of these kanakas'll go next; they seem to have lost all idea of respect for whites. what we want is a man-of-war--a german, if we could--they know how to manage kanakas." "i _am_ tabooed, then?" i cried. "something of the sort," said he. "it's the worst thing of the kind i've heard of yet. but i'll stand by you, wiltshire, man to man. you come round here to-morrow about nine, and we'll have it out with the chiefs. they're afraid of me, or they used to be; but their heads are so big by now, i don't know what to think. understand me, wiltshire; i don't count this your quarrel," he went on, with a great deal of resolution, "i count it all of our quarrel, i count it the white man's quarrel, and i'll stand to it through thick and thin, and there's my hand on it." "have you found out what's the reason?" i asked. "not yet," said case. "but we'll fix them down to-morrow." altogether i was pretty well pleased with his attitude, and almost more the next day, when we met to go before the chiefs, to see him so stern and resolved. the chiefs awaited us in one of their big oval houses, which was marked out to us from a long way off by the crowd about the eaves, a hundred strong if there was one--men, women, and children. many of the men were on their way to work and wore green wreaths, and it put me in thoughts of the st of may at home. this crowd opened and buzzed about the pair of us as we went in, with a sudden angry animation. five chiefs were there; four mighty stately men, the fifth old and puckered. they sat on mats in their white kilts and jackets; they had fans in their hands, like fine ladies; and two of the younger ones wore catholic medals, which gave me matter of reflection. our place was set, and the mats laid for us over against these grandees, on the near side of the house; the midst was empty; the crowd, close at our backs, murmured, and craned, and jostled to look on, and the shadows of them tossed in front of us on the clean pebbles of the floor. i was just a hair put out by the excitement of the commons, but the quiet, civil appearance of the chiefs reassured me, all the more when their spokesman began and made a long speech in a low tone of voice, sometimes waving his hand towards case, sometimes towards me, and sometimes knocking with his knuckles on the mat. one thing was clear: there was no sign of anger in the chiefs. "what's he been saying?" i asked, when he had done. "o, just that they're glad to see you, and they understand by me you wish to make some kind of complaint, and you're to fire away, and they'll do the square thing." "it took a precious long time to say that," said i. "o, the rest was sawder and _bonjour_ and that," said case. "you know what kanakas are." "well, they don't get much _bonjour_ out of me," said i. "you tell them who i am. i'm a white man, and a british subject, and no end of a big chief at home; and i've come here to do them good, and bring them civilisation; and no sooner have i got my trade sorted out than they go and taboo me, and no one dare come near my place! tell them i don't mean to fly in the face of anything legal; and if what they want's a present, i'll do what's fair. i don't blame any man looking out for himself, tell them, for that's human nature; but if they think they're going to come any of their native ideas over me, they'll find themselves mistaken. and tell them plain that i demand the reason of this treatment as a white man and a british subject." that was my speech. i know how to deal with kanakas: give them plain sense and fair dealing, and--i'll do them that much justice--they knuckle under every time. they haven't any real government or any real law, that's what you've got to knock into their heads; and even if they had, it would be a good joke if it was to apply to a white man. it would be a strange thing if we came all this way and couldn't do what we pleased. the mere idea has always put my monkey up, and i rapped my speech out pretty big. then case translated it--or made believe to, rather--and the first chief replied, and then a second, and a third, all in the same style, easy and genteel, but solemn underneath. once a question was put to case, and he answered it, and all hands (both chiefs and commons) laughed out aloud, and looked at me. last of all, the puckered old fellow and the big young chief that spoke first started in to put case through a kind of catechism. sometimes i made out that case was trying to fence and they stuck to him like hounds, and the sweat ran down his face, which was no very pleasant sight to me, and at some of his answers the crowd moaned and murmured, which was a worse hearing. it's a cruel shame i knew no native, for (as i now believe) they were asking case about my marriage, and he must have had a tough job of it to clear his feet. but leave case alone; he had the brains to run a parliament. "well, is that all?" i asked, when a pause came. "come along," says he, mopping his face; "i'll tell you outside." "do you mean they won't take the taboo off?" i cried. "it's something queer," said he. "i'll tell you outside. better come away." "i won't take it at their hands," cried i. "i ain't that kind of a man. you don't find me turn my back on a parcel of kanakas." "you'd better," said case. he looked at me with a signal in his eye; and the five chiefs looked at me civilly enough, but kind of pointed; and the people looked at me, and craned and jostled. i remembered the folks that watched my house, and how the pastor had jumped in his pulpit at the bare sight of me; and the whole business seemed so out of the way that i rose and followed case. the crowd opened again to let us through, but wider than before, the children on the skirts running and singing out, and as we two white men walked away they all stood and watched us. "and now," said i, "what is all this about?" "the truth is, i can't rightly make it out myself. they have a down on you," says case. "taboo a man because they have a down on him!" i cried. "i never heard the like." "it's worse than that, you see," said case. "you ain't tabooed--i told you that couldn't be. the people won't go near you, wiltshire, and there's where it is." "they won't go near me? what do you mean by that? why won't they go near me?" i cried. case hesitated. "seems they're frightened," says he in a low voice. i stopped dead short. "frightened?" i repeated. "are you gone crazy, case? what are they frightened of?" "i wish i could make out," case answered, shaking his head. "appears like one of their tomfool superstitions. that's what i don't cotton to," he said. "it's like the business about vigours." "i'd like to know what you mean by that, and i'll trouble you to tell me," says i. "well, you know, vigours lit out and left all standing," said he. "it was some superstition business--i never got the hang of it; but it began to look bad before the end." "i've heard a different story about that," said i, "and i had better tell you so. i heard he ran away because of you." "o! well, i suppose he was ashamed to tell the truth," says case; "i guess he thought it silly. and it's a fact that i packed him off. 'what would you do, old man?' says he.--'get,' says i, 'and not think twice about it.' i was the gladdest kind of man to see him clear away. it ain't my notion to turn my back on a mate when he's in a tight place, but there was that much trouble in the village that i couldn't see where it might likely end. i was a fool to be so much about with vigours. they cast it up to me to-day. didn't you hear maea--that's the young chief, the big one--ripping out about 'vika'? that was him they were after. they don't seem to forget it, somehow." "this is all very well," said i, "but it don't tell me what's wrong; it don't tell me what they're afraid of--what their idea is." "well, i wish i knew," said case. "i can't say fairer than that." "you might have asked, i think," says i. "and so i did," says he. "but you must have seen for yourself, unless you're blind, that the asking got the other way. i'll go as far as i dare for another white man; but when i find i'm in the scrape myself, i think first of my own bacon. the loss of me is i'm too good-natured. and i'll take the freedom of telling you you show a queer kind of gratitude to a man who's got into all this mess along of your affairs." "there's a thing i am thinking of," said i. "you were a fool to be so much about with vigours. one comfort, you haven't been much about with me. i notice you've never been inside my house. own up now; you had word of this before?" "it's a fact i haven't been," said he. "it was an oversight, and i am sorry for it, wiltshire. but about coming now, i'll be quite plain." "you mean you won't?" i asked. "awfully sorry, old man, but that's the size of it," says case. "in short, you're afraid?" says i. "in short, i'm afraid," says he. "and i'm still to be tabooed for nothing?" i asked. "i tell you you're not tabooed," said he. "the kanakas won't go near you, that's all. and who's to make 'em? we traders have a lot of gall, i must say; we make these poor kanakas take back their laws, and take up their taboos, and that whenever it happens to suit us. but you don't mean to say you expect a law-obliging people to deal in your store whether they want to or not? you don't mean to tell me you've got the gall for that? and if you had, it would be a queer thing to propose to me. i would just like to point out to you, wiltshire, that i'm a trader myself." "i don't think i would talk of gall if i was you," said i. "here's about what it comes to, as well as i can make out: none of the people are to trade with me, and they're all to trade with you. you're to have the copra, and i'm to go to the devil and shake myself. and i don't know any native, and you're the only man here worth mention that speaks english, and you have the gall to up and hint to me my life's in danger, and all you've got to tell me is you don't know why!" "well, it _is_ all i have to tell you," said he. "i don't know--i wish i did." "and so you turn your back and leave me to myself. is that the position?" says i. "if you like to put it nasty," says he. "i don't put it so. i say merely, 'i'm going to keep clear of you; or, if i don't, i'll get in danger for myself.'" "well," says i, "you're a nice kind of a white man!" "o, i understand; you're riled," said he. "i would be, myself. i can make excuses." "all right," i said, "go and make excuses somewhere else. here's my way, there's yours!" with that we parted, and i went straight home, in a hot temper, and found uma trying on a lot of trade goods like a baby. "here," i said, "you quit that foolery! here's a pretty mess to have made, as if i wasn't bothered enough anyway! and i thought i told you to get dinner!" and then i believe i gave her a bit of the rough side of my tongue, as she deserved. she stood up at once, like a sentry to his officer; for i must say she was always well brought up, and had a great respect for whites. "and now," says i, "you belong round here, you're bound to understand this. what am i tabooed for, anyway? or, if i ain't tabooed, what makes the folks afraid of me?" she stood and looked at me with eyes like saucers. "you no savvy?" she gasps at last. "no," said i. "how would you expect me to? we don't have any such craziness where i come from." "ese no tell you?" she asked again. (_ese_ was the name the natives had for case; it may mean foreign, or extraordinary; or it might mean a mummy apple; but most like it was only his own name misheard and put in a kanaka spelling.) "not much," said i. "damn ese!" she cried. you might think it funny to hear this kanaka girl come out with a big swear. no such thing. there was no swearing in her--no, nor anger; she was beyond anger, and meant the word simple and serious. she stood there straight as she said it. i cannot justly say that i ever saw a woman look like that before or after, and it struck me mum. then she made a kind of an obeisance, but it was the proudest kind, and threw her hands out open. "i 'shamed," she said. "i think you savvy. ese he tell me you savvy, he tell me you no mind, tell me you love me too much. taboo belong me," she said, touching herself on the bosom, as she had done upon our wedding-night. "now i go 'way, taboo he go 'way too. then you get too much copra. you like more better, i think. _tofâ, alii_," says she in the native--"farewell, chief!" "hold on!" i cried. "don't be in such a hurry." she looked at me sidelong with a smile. "you see you get copra," she said, the same as you might offer candies to a child. "uma," said i, "hear reason. i didn't know, and that's a fact; and case seems to have played it pretty mean upon the pair of us. but i do know now, and i don't mind; i love you too much. you no go 'way, you no leave me, i too much sorry." "you no love me," she cried, "you talk me bad words!" and she threw herself in a corner of the floor, and began to cry. well, i'm no scholar, but i wasn't born yesterday, and i thought the worst of that trouble was over. however, there she lay--her back turned, her face to the wall--and shook with sobbing like a little child, so that her feet jumped with it. it's strange how it hits a man when he's in love; for there's no use mincing things--kanaka and all, i was in love with her, or just as good. i tried to take her hand, but she would none of that. "uma," i said, "there's no sense in carrying on like this. i want you stop here, i want my little wifie, i tell you true." "no tell me true," she sobbed. "all right," says i, "i'll wait till you're through with this." and i sat right down beside her on the floor, and set to smooth her hair with my hand. at first she wriggled away when i touched her; then she seemed to notice me no more; then her sobs grew gradually less, and presently stopped; and the next thing i knew, she raised her face to mine. "you tell me true? you like me stop?" she asked. "uma," i said, "i would rather have you than all the copra in the south seas," which was a very big expression, and the strangest thing was that i meant it. she threw her arms about me, sprang close up, and pressed her face to mine in the island way of kissing, so that i was all wetted with her tears, and my heart went out to her wholly. i never had anything so near me as this little brown bit of a girl. many things went together, and all helped to turn my head. she was pretty enough to eat; it seemed she was my only friend in that queer place; i was ashamed that i had spoken rough to her: and she was a woman, and my wife, and a kind of a baby besides that i was sorry for; and the salt of her tears was in my mouth. and i forgot case and the natives; and i forgot that i knew nothing of the story, or only remembered it to banish the remembrance; and i forgot that i was to get no copra, and so could make no livelihood; and i forgot my employers, and the strange kind of service i was doing them, when i preferred my fancy to their business; and i forgot even that uma was no true wife of mine, but just a maid beguiled, and that in a pretty shabby style. but that is to look too far on. i will come to that part of it next. it was late before we thought of getting dinner. the stove was out, and gone stone-cold; but we fired up after a while, and cooked each a dish, helping and hindering each other, and making a play of it like children. i was so greedy of her nearness that i sat down to dinner with my lass upon my knee, made sure of her with one hand, and ate with the other. ay, and more than that. she was the worst cook, i suppose, god made; the things she set her hand to, it would have sickened an honest horse to eat of; yet i made my meal that day on uma's cookery, and can never call to mind to have been better pleased. i didn't pretend to myself, and i didn't pretend to her. i saw that i was clean gone; and if she was to make a fool of me, she must. and i suppose it was this that set her talking, for now she made sure that we were friends. a lot she told me, sitting in my lap and eating my dish, as i ate hers, from foolery--a lot about herself and her mother and case, all which would be very tedious, and fill sheets if i set it down in beach de mar, but which i must give a hint of in plain english, and one thing about myself, which had a very big effect on my concerns, as you are soon to hear. it seems she was born in one of the line islands; had been only two or three years in these parts, where she had come with a white man, who was married to her mother and then died; and only the one year in falesá. before that they had been a good deal on the move, trekking about after the white man, who was one of those rolling stones that keep going round after a soft job. they talk about looking for gold at the end of a rainbow; if a man wants an employment that'll last him till he dies, let him start out on the soft-job hunt. there's meat and drink in it too, and beer and skittles, for you never hear of them starving, and rarely see them sober; and as for steady sport, cock-fighting isn't in the same county with it. anyway, this beachcomber carried the woman and her daughter all over the shop, but mostly to out-of-the-way islands, where there were no police, and he thought, perhaps, the soft job hung out. i've my own view of this old party; but i was just as glad he had kept uma clear of apia and papeete and these flash towns. at last he struck fale-alii on this island, got some trade--the lord knows how!--muddled it all away in the usual style, and died worth next to nothing, bar a bit of land at falesá that he had got for a bad debt, which was what put it in the minds of the mother and daughter to come there and live. it seems case encouraged them all he could, and helped to get their house built. he was very kind those days, and gave uma trade, and there is no doubt he had his eye on her from the beginning. however, they had scarce settled, when up turned a young man, a native, and wanted to marry her. he was a small chief, and had some fine mats and old songs in his family, and was "very pretty," uma said; and, altogether, it was an extraordinary match for a penniless girl and an out-islander. at the first word of this i got downright sick with jealousy. "and you mean to say you would have married him?" i cried. "_ioe_, yes," said she. "i like too much!" "well!" i said. "and suppose i had come round after?" "i like you more better now," said she. "but, suppose i marry ioane, i one good wife. i no common kanaka. good girl!" says she. well, i had to be pleased with that; but i promise you i didn't care about the business one little bit. and i liked the end of that yarn no better than the beginning. for it seems this proposal of marriage was the start of all the trouble. it seems, before that, uma and her mother had been looked down upon, of course, for kinless folk and out-islanders, but nothing to hurt; and, even when ioane came forward, there was less trouble at first than might have been looked for. and then, all of a sudden, about six months before my coming, ioane backed out and left that part of the island, and from that day to this uma and her mother had found themselves alone. none called at their house, none spoke to them on the roads. if they went to church, the other women drew their mats away and left them in a clear place by themselves. it was a regular excommunication, like what you read of in the middle ages, and the cause or sense of it beyond guessing. it was some _tala pepelo_, uma said, some lie, some calumny; and all she knew of it was that the girls who had been jealous of her luck with ioane used to twit her with his desertion, and cry out, when they met her alone in the woods, that she would never be married. "they tell me no man he marry me. he too much 'fraid," she said. the only soul that came about them after this desertion was master case. even he was chary of showing himself, and turned up mostly by night; and pretty soon he began to table his cards and make up to uma. i was still sore about ioane, and when case turned up in the same line of business i cut up downright rough. "well," i said, sneering, "and i suppose you thought case 'very pretty' and 'liked too much'?" "now you talk silly," said she. "white man, he come here, i marry him all-e-same kanaka; very well, then he marry me all-e-same white woman. suppose he no marry, he go 'way, woman he stop. all-e-same thief, empty hand, tonga-heart--no can love! now you come marry me. you big heart--you no 'shamed island-girl. that thing i love you for too much. i proud." i don't know that ever i felt sicker all the days of my life. i laid down my fork, and i put away "the island-girl"; i didn't seem somehow to have any use for either, and i went and walked up and down in the house, and uma followed me with her eyes, for she was troubled, and small wonder! but troubled was no word for it with me. i so wanted, and so feared, to make a clean breast of the sweep that i had been. and just then there came a sound of singing out of the sea; it sprang up suddenly clear and near, as the boat turned the headland, and uma, running to the window, cried out it was "misi" come upon his rounds. i thought it was a strange thing i should be glad to have a missionary; but, if it was strange, it was still true. "uma," said i, "you stop here in this room, and don't budge a foot out of it till i come back." chapter iii the missionary as i came out on the verandah, the mission-boat was shooting for the mouth of the river. she was a long whale-boat painted white; a bit of an awning astern; a native pastor crouched on the wedge of the poop, steering; some four-and-twenty paddles flashing and dipping, true to the boat-song; and the missionary under the awning, in his white clothes, reading in a book, and set him up! it was pretty to see and hear; there's no smarter sight in the islands than a missionary boat with a good crew and a good pipe to them; and i considered it for half a minute, with a bit of envy perhaps, and then strolled down towards the river. from the opposite side there was another man aiming for the same place, but he ran and got there first. it was case; doubtless his idea was to keep me apart from the missionary, who might serve me as interpreter; but my mind was upon other things. i was thinking how he had jockeyed us about the marriage, and tried his hand on uma before, and at the sight of him rage flew into my nostrils. "get out of that, you low swindling thief!" i cried. "what's that you say?" says he. i gave him the word again, and rammed it down with a good oath. "and if ever i catch you within six fathoms of my house," i cried, "i'll clap a bullet in your measly carcase." "you must do as you like about your house," said he, "where i told you i have no thought of going; but this is a public place." "it's a place where i have private business," said i. "i have no idea of a hound like you eavesdropping, and i give you notice to clear out." "i don't take it, though," says case. "i'll show you, then," said i. "we'll have to see about that," said he. he was quick with his hands, but he had neither the height nor the weight, being a flimsy creature alongside a man like me, and, besides, i was blazing to that height of wrath that i could have bit into a chisel. i gave him first the one and then the other, so that i could hear his head rattle and crack, and he went down straight. "have you had enough?" cried i. but he only looked up white and blank, and the blood spread upon his face like wine upon a napkin. "have you had enough?" i cried again. "speak up, and don't lie malingering there, or i'll take my feet to you." he sat up at that, and held his head--by the look of him you could see it was spinning--and the blood poured on his pyjamas. "i've had enough for this time," says he, and he got up staggering, and went off by the way that he had come. the boat was close in; i saw the missionary had laid his book to one side, and i smiled to myself. "he'll know i'm a man, anyway," thinks i. this was the first time, in all my years in the pacific, i had ever exchanged two words with any missionary, let alone asked one for a favour. i didn't like the lot--no trader does; they look down upon us, and make no concealment; and, besides, they're partly kanakaised, and suck up with natives instead of with other white men like themselves. i had on a rig of clean striped pyjamas--for, of course, i had dressed decent to go before the chiefs; but when i saw the missionary step out of this boat in the regular uniform, white duck clothes, pith helmet, white shirt and tie, and yellow boots to his feet, i could have bunged stones at him. as he came nearer, queering me pretty curious (because of the fight, i suppose), i saw he looked mortal sick, for the truth was he had a fever on, and had just had a chill in the boat. "mr. tarleton, i believe?" says i, for i had got his name. "and you, i suppose, are the new trader?" says he. "i want to tell you first that i don't hold with missions," i went on, "and that i think you and the likes of you do a sight of harm, filling up the natives with old wives' tales and bumptiousness." "you are perfectly entitled to your opinions," says he, looking a bit ugly, "but i have no call to hear them." "it so happens that you've got to hear them," i said. "i'm no missionary, nor missionary lover; i'm no kanaka, nor favourer of kanakas--i'm just a trader; i'm just a common, low-down, god-damned white man and british subject, the sort you would like to wipe your boots on. i hope that's plain!" "yes, my man," said he. "it's more plain than creditable. when you are sober, you'll be sorry for this." he tried to pass on, but i stopped him with my hand. the kanakas were beginning to growl. guess they didn't like my tone, for i spoke to that man as free as i would to you. "now, you can't say i've deceived you," said i, "and i can go on. i want a service--i want two services, in fact--and, if you care to give me them, i'll perhaps take more stock in what you call your christianity." he was silent for a moment. then he smiled. "you are rather a strange sort of man," says he. "i'm the sort of man god made me," says i. "i don't set up to be a gentleman," i said. "i am not quite so sure," said he. "and what can i do for you, mr.----?" "wiltshire," i says, "though i'm mostly called welsher; but wiltshire is the way it's spelt, if the people on the beach could only get their tongues about it. and what do i want? well, i'll tell you the first thing. i'm what you call a sinner--what i call a sweep--and i want you to help me make it up to a person i've deceived." he turned and spoke to his crew in the native. "and now i am at your service," said he, "but only for the time my crew are dining. i must be much farther down the coast before night. i was delayed at papa-malulu till this morning, and i have an engagement in fale-alii to-morrow night." i led the way to my house in silence, and rather pleased with myself for the way i had managed the talk, for i like a man to keep his self-respect. "i was sorry to see you fighting," says he. "o, that's part of the yarn i want to tell you," i said. "that's service number two. after you've heard it you'll let me know whether you're sorry or not." we walked right in through the store, and i was surprised to find uma had cleared away the dinner things. this was so unlike her ways that i saw she had done it out of gratitude, and liked her the better. she and mr. tarleton called each other by name, and he was very civil to her seemingly. but i thought little of that; they can always find civility for a kanaka, it's us white men they lord it over. besides, i didn't want much tarleton just then. i was going to do my pitch. "uma," said i, "give us your marriage certificate." she looked put out. "come," said i, "you can trust me. hand it up." she had it about her person, as usual; i believe she thought it was a pass to heaven, and if she died without having it handy she would go to hell. i couldn't see where she put it the first time, i couldn't see now where she took it from; it seemed to jump into her hand like that blavatsky business in the papers. but it's the same way with all island women, and i guess they're taught it when young. "now," said i, with the certificate in my hand, "i was married to this girl by black jack the negro. the certificate was wrote by case, and it's a dandy piece of literature, i promise you. since then i've found that there's a kind of cry in the place against this wife of mine, and so long as i keep her i cannot trade. now, what would any man do in my place, if he was a man?" i said. "the first thing he would do is this, i guess." and i took and tore up the certificate and bunged the pieces on the floor. "_aué_!"[ ] cried uma, and began to clap her hands; but i caught one of them in mine. "and the second thing that he would do," said i, "if he was what i would call a man and you would call a man, mr. tarleton, is to bring the girl right before you or any other missionary, and to up and say: 'i was wrong married to this wife of mine, but i think a heap of her, and now i want to be married to her right.' fire away, mr. tarleton. and i guess you'd better do it in native; it'll please the old lady," i said, giving her the proper name of a man's wife upon the spot. so we had in two of the crew for to witness, and were spliced in our own house; and the parson prayed a good bit, i must say--but not so long as some--and shook hands with the pair of us. "mr. wiltshire," he says, when he had made out the lines and packed off the witnesses, "i have to thank you for a very lively pleasure. i have rarely performed the marriage ceremony with more grateful emotions." that was what you would call talking. he was going on, besides, with more of it, and i was ready for as much taffy as he had in stock, for i felt good. but uma had been taken up with something half through the marriage, and cut straight in. "how your hand he get hurt?" she asked. "you ask case's head, old lady," says i. she jumped with joy, and sang out. "you haven't made much of a christian of this one," says i to mr. tarleton. "we didn't think her one of our worst," says he, "when she was at fale-alii; and if uma bears malice i shall be tempted to fancy she has good cause." "well, there we are at service number two," said i. "i want to tell you our yarn, and see if you can let a little daylight in." "is it long?" he asked. "yes," i cried; "it's a goodish bit of a yarn!" "well, i'll give you all the time i can spare," says he, looking at his watch. "but i must tell you fairly, i haven't eaten since five this morning, and, unless you can let me have something, i am not likely to eat again before seven or eight to-night." "by god, we'll give you dinner!" i cried. i was a little caught up at my swearing, just when all was going straight; and so was the missionary, i suppose, but he made believe to look out of the window, and thanked us. so we ran him up a bit of a meal. i was bound to let the old lady have a hand in it, to show off, so i deputised her to brew the tea. i don't think i ever met such tea as she turned out. but that was not the worst, for she got round with the salt-box, which she considered an extra european touch, and turned my stew into sea-water. altogether, mr. tarleton had a devil of a dinner of it; but he had plenty entertainment by the way, for all the while that we were cooking, and afterwards, when he was making believe to eat, i kept posting him up on master case and the beach of falesá, and he putting questions that showed he was following close. "well," said he at last, "i am afraid you have a dangerous enemy. this man case is very clever, and seems really wicked. i must tell you i have had my eye on him for nearly a year, and have rather had the worst of our encounters. about the time when the last representative of your firm ran so suddenly away, i had a letter from namu, the native pastor, begging me to come to falesá at my earliest convenience, as his flock were all 'adopting catholic practices.' i had great confidence in namu; i fear it only shows how easily we are deceived. no one could hear him preach and not be persuaded he was a man of extraordinary parts. all our islanders easily acquire a kind of eloquence, and can roll out and illustrate, with a great deal of vigour and fancy, second-hand sermons; but namu's sermons are his own, and i cannot deny that i have found them means of grace. moreover, he has a keen curiosity in secular things, does not fear work, is clever at carpentering, and has made himself so much respected among the neighbouring pastors that we call him, in a jest which is half serious, the bishop of the east. in short, i was proud of the man; all the more puzzled by his letter, and took an occasion to come this way. the morning before my arrival, vigours had been sent on board the _lion_, and namu was perfectly at his ease, apparently ashamed of his letter, and quite unwilling to explain it. this, of course, i could not allow, and he ended by confessing that he had been much concerned to find his people using the sign of the cross, but since he had learned the explanation his mind was satisfied. for vigours had the evil eye, a common thing in a country of europe called italy, where men were often struck dead by that kind of devil, and it appeared the sign of the cross was a charm against its power. "'and i explain it, misi,' said namu, 'in this way: the country in europe is a popey country, and the devil of the evil eye may be a catholic devil, or, at least, used to catholic ways. so then i reasoned thus: if this sign of the cross were used in a popey manner it would be sinful, but when it is used only to protect men from a devil, which is a thing harmless in itself, the sign too must be, as a bottle is neither good nor bad, harmless. for the sign is neither good nor bad. but if the bottle be full of gin, the gin is bad; and if the sign be made in idolatry bad, so is the idolatry.' and, very like a native pastor, he had a text apposite about the casting out of devils. "'and who has been telling you about the evil eye?' i asked. "he admitted it was case. now, i am afraid you will think me very narrow, mr. wiltshire, but i must tell you i was displeased, and cannot think a trader at all a good man to advise or have an influence upon my pastors. and, besides, there had been some flying talk in the country of old adams and his being poisoned, to which i had paid no great heed; but it came back to me at the moment. "'and is this case a man of a sanctified life?' i asked. "he admitted he was not; for, though he did not drink, he was profligate with women, and had no religion. "'then,' said i, 'i think the less you have to do with him the better.' "but it is not easy to have the last word with a man like namu. he was ready in a moment with an illustration. 'misi,' said he, 'you have told me there were wise men, not pastors, not even holy, who knew many things useful to be taught--about trees, for instance, and beasts, and to print books, and about the stones that are burned to make knives of. such men teach you in your college, and you learn from them, but take care not to learn to be unholy. misi, case is my college.' "i knew not what to say. mr. vigours had evidently been driven out of falesá by the machinations of case, and with something not very unlike the collusion of my pastor. i called to mind it was namu who had reassured me about adams and traced the rumour to the ill-will of the priest. and i saw i must inform myself more thoroughly from an impartial source. there is an old rascal of a chief here, faiaso, whom i daresay you saw to-day at the council; he has been all his life turbulent and sly, a great fomenter of rebellions, and a thorn in the side of the mission and the island. for all that he is very shrewd, and, except in politics or about his own misdemeanours, a teller of the truth. i went to his house, told him what i had heard, and besought him to be frank. i do not think i had ever a more painful interview. perhaps you will understand me, mr. wiltshire, if i tell you that i am perfectly serious in these old wives' tales with which you reproached me, and as anxious to do well for these islands as you can be to please and to protect your pretty wife. and you are to remember that i thought namu a paragon, and was proud of the man as one of the first ripe fruits of the mission. and now i was informed that he had fallen in a sort of dependence upon case. the beginning of it was not corrupt; it began, doubtless, in fear and respect, produced by trickery and pretence; but i was shocked to find that another element had been lately added, that namu helped himself in the store, and was believed to be deep in case's debt. whatever the trader said, that namu believed with trembling. he was not alone in this; many in the village lived in a similar subjection; but namu's case was the most influential, it was through namu case had wrought most evil; and with a certain following among the chiefs, and the pastor in his pocket, the man was as good as master of the village. you know something of vigours and adams, but perhaps you have never heard of old underhill, adams' predecessor. he was a quiet, mild old fellow, i remember, and we were told he had died suddenly: white men die very suddenly in falesá. the truth, as i now heard it, made my blood run cold. it seems he was struck with a general palsy, all of him dead but one eye, which he continually winked. word was started that the helpless old man was now a devil, and this vile fellow case worked upon the natives' fears, which he professed to share, and pretended he durst not go into the house alone. at last a grave was dug, and the living body buried at the far end of the village. namu, my pastor, whom i had helped to educate, offered up a prayer at the hateful scene. "i felt myself in a very difficult position. perhaps it was my duty to have denounced namu and had him deposed. perhaps i think so now, but at the time it seemed less clear. he had a great influence, it might prove greater than mine. the natives are prone to superstition; perhaps by stirring them up i might but ingrain and spread these dangerous fancies. and namu besides, apart from this novel and accursed influence, was a good pastor, an able man, and spiritually minded. where should i look for a better? how was i to find as good? at that moment, with namu's failure fresh in my view, the work of my life appeared a mockery; hope was dead in me. i would rather repair such tools as i had than go abroad in quest of others that must certainly prove worse; and a scandal is, at the best, a thing to be avoided when humanly possible. right or wrong, then, i determined on a quiet course. all that night i denounced and reasoned with the erring pastor, twitted him with his ignorance and want of faith, twitted him with his wretched attitude, making clean the outside of the cup and platter, callously helping at a murder, childishly flying in excitement about a few childish, unnecessary, and inconvenient gestures; and long before day i had him on his knees and bathed in the tears of what seemed a genuine repentance. on sunday i took the pulpit in the morning, and preached from first kings, nineteenth, on the fire, the earthquake, and the voice, distinguishing the true spiritual power, and referring with such plainness as i dared to recent events in falesá. the effect produced was great, and it was much increased when namu rose in his turn and confessed that he had been wanting in faith and conduct, and was convinced of sin. so far, then, all was well; but there was one unfortunate circumstance. it was nearing the time of our 'may' in the island, when the native contributions to the missions are received; it fell in my duty to make a notification on the subject, and this gave my enemy his chance, by which he was not slow to profit. "news of the whole proceedings must have been carried to case as soon as church was over, and the same afternoon he made an occasion to meet me in the midst of the village. he came up with so much intentness and animosity that i felt it would be damaging to avoid him. "'so,' says he, in native, 'here is the holy man. he has been preaching against me, but that was not in his heart. he has been preaching upon the love of god; but that was not in his heart, it was between his teeth. will you know what was in his heart?' cries he. 'i will show it you!' and, making a snatch at my head he made believe to pluck out a dollar, and held it in the air. "there went that rumour through the crowd with which polynesians receive a prodigy. as for myself, i stood amazed. the thing was a common conjuring trick which i have seen performed at home a score of times; but how was i to convince the villagers of that? i wished i had learned legerdemain instead of hebrew, that i might have paid the fellow out with his own coin. but there i was; i could not stand there silent, and the best i could find to say was weak. "'i will trouble you not to lay hands on me again,' said i. "'i have no such thought,' said he, 'nor will i deprive you of your dollar. here it is,' he said, and flung it at my feet. i am told it lay where it fell three days." "i must say it was well played," said i. "o! he is clever," said mr. tarleton, "and you can now see for yourself how dangerous. he was a party to the horrid death of the paralytic; he is accused of poisoning adams; he drove vigours out of the place by lies that might have led to murder; and there is no question but he has now made up his mind to rid himself of you. how he means to try we have no guess; only be sure it's something new. there is no end to his readiness and invention." "he gives himself a sight of trouble," says i. "and after all, what for?" "why, how many tons of copra may they make in this district?" asked the missionary. "i daresay as much as sixty tons," says i. "and what is the profit to the local trader?" he asked. "you may call it three pounds," said i. "then you can reckon for yourself how much he does it for," said mr. tarleton. "but the more important thing is to defeat him. it is clear he spread some report against uma, in order to isolate and have his wicked will of her. failing of that, and seeing a new rival come upon the scene, he used her in a different way. now, the first point to find out is about namu. uma, when people began to leave you and your mother alone, what did namu do?" "stop away all-e-same," says uma. "i fear the dog has returned to his vomit," said mr. tarleton. "and now what am i to do for you? i will speak to namu, i will warn him he is observed; it will be strange if he allow anything to go on amiss when he is put upon his guard. at the same time, this precaution may fail, and then you must turn elsewhere. you have two people at hand to whom you might apply. there is, first of all, the priest, who might protect you by the catholic interest; they are a wretchedly small body, but they count two chiefs. and then there is old faiaso. ah! if it had been some years ago you would have needed no one else; but his influence is much reduced; it has gone into maea's hands, and maea, i fear, is one of case's jackals. in fine, if the worst comes to the worst, you must send up or come yourself to fale-alii, and, though i am not due at this end of the island for a month, i will just see what can be done." so mr. tarleton said farewell; and half an hour later the crew were singing and the paddles flashing in the missionary boat. footnote: [ ] alas! chapter iv devil-work near a month went by without much doing. the same night of our marriage galoshes called round, and made himself mighty civil, and got into a habit of dropping in about dark and smoking his pipe with the family. he could talk to uma, of course, and started to teach me native and french at the same time. he was a kind old buffer, though the dirtiest you would wish to see, and he muddled me up with foreign languages worse than the tower of babel. that was one employment we had, and it made me feel less lonesome; but there was no profit in the thing, for though the priest came and sat and yarned, none of his folks could be enticed into my store; and if it hadn't been for the other occupation i struck out there wouldn't have been a pound of copra in the house. this was the idea: fa'avao (uma's mother) had a score of bearing trees. of course we could get no labour, being all as good as tabooed, and the two women and i turned to and made copra with our own hands. it was copra to make your mouth water when it was done--i never understood how much the natives cheated me till i had made that four hundred pounds of my own hand--and it weighed so light i felt inclined to take and water it myself. when we were at the job a good many kanakas used to put in the best of the day looking on, and once that nigger turned up. he stood back with the natives and laughed and did the big don and the funny dog till i began to get riled. "here, you nigger!" says i. "i don't address myself to you, sah," says the nigger. "only speak to gen'le'um." "i know," says i, "but it happens i was addressing myself to you, mr. black jack. and all i want to know is just this: did you see case's figure-head about a week ago?" "no, sah," says he. "that's all right, then," says i; "for i'll show you the own brother to it, only black, in the inside of about two minutes." and i began to walk towards him, quite slow, and my hands down; only there was trouble in my eye, if anybody took the pains to look. "you're a low, obstropulous fellow, sah," says he. "you bet!" says i. by that time he thought i was about as near as convenient, and lit out so it would have done your heart good to see him travel. and that was all i saw of that precious gang until what i am about to tell you. it was one of my chief employments these days to go pot-hunting in the woods, which i found (as case had told me) very rich in game. i have spoken of the cape which shut up the village and my station from the east. a path went about the end of it, and led into the next bay. a strong wind blew here daily, and as the line of the barrier reef stopped at the end of the cape, a heavy surf ran on the shores of the bay. a little cliffy hill cut the valley in two parts, and stood close on the beach; and at high water the sea broke right on the face of it, so that all passage was stopped. woody mountains hemmed the place all round; the barrier to the east was particularly steep and leafy, the lower parts of it, along the sea, falling in sheer black cliffs streaked with cinnabar; the upper part lumpy with the tops of the great trees. some of the trees were bright green, and some red, and the sand of the beach as black as your shoes. many birds hovered round the bay, some of them snow-white; and the flying-fox (or vampire) flew there in broad daylight, gnashing its teeth. for a long while i came as far as this shooting, and went no farther. there was no sign of any path beyond, and the cocoa-palms in the front of the foot of the valley were the last this way. for the whole "eye" of the island, as natives call the windward end, lay desert. from falesá round about to papa-malulu, there was neither house, nor man, nor planted fruit-tree; and the reef being mostly absent, and the shores bluff, the sea beat direct among crags, and there was scarce a landing-place. i should tell you that after i began to go in the woods, although no one offered to come near my store, i found people willing enough to pass the time of day with me where nobody could see them; and as i had begun to pick up native, and most of them had a word or two of english, i began to hold little odds and ends of conversation, not to much purpose to be sure, but they took off the worst of the feeling, for it's a miserable thing to be made a leper of. it chanced one day towards the end of the month, that i was sitting in this bay in the edge of the bush, looking east, with a kanaka. i had given him a fill of tobacco, and we were making out to talk as best we could; indeed, he had more english than most. i asked him if there was no road going eastward. "one time one road," said he. "now he dead." "nobody he go there?" i asked. "no good," said he. "too much devil he stop there." "oho!" says i, "got-um plenty devil, that bush?" "man devil, woman devil; too much devil," said my friend. "stop there all-e-time. man he go there, no come back." i thought if this fellow was so well posted on devils and spoke of them so free, which is not common, i had better fish for a little information about myself and uma. "you think me one devil?" i asked. "no think devil," said he soothingly. "think all-e-same fool." "uma, she devil?" i asked again. "no, no; no devil. devil stop bush," said the young man. i was looking in front of me across the bay, and i saw the hanging front of the woods pushed suddenly open, and case, with a gun in his hand, step forth into the sunshine on the black beach. he was got up in light pyjamas, near white, his gun sparkled, he looked mighty conspicuous; and the land-crabs scuttled from all round him to their holes. "hullo, my friend!" says i, "you no talk all-e-same true. ese he go, he come back." "ese no all-e-same; ese _tiapolo_," says my friend; and, with a "good-bye," slunk off among the trees. i watched case all round the beach, where the tide was low; and let him pass me on the homeward way to falesá. he was in deep thought, and the birds seemed to know it, trotting quite near him on the sand, or wheeling and calling in his ears. when he passed me i could see by the working of his lips that he was talking to himself, and, what pleased me mightily, he had still my trade mark on his brow. i tell you the plain truth: i had a mind to give him a gunful in his ugly mug, but i thought better of it. all this time, and all the time i was following home, i kept repeating that native word, which i remembered by "polly, put the kettle on and make us all some tea," tea-a-pollo. "uma," says i, when i got back, "what does _tiapolo_ mean?" "devil," says she. "i thought _aitu_ was the word for that," i said. "_aitu_ 'nother kind of devil," said she; "stop bush, eat kanaka. tiapolo big chief devil, stop home; all-e-same christian devil." "well then," said i, "i'm no farther forward. how can case be tiapolo?" "no all-e-same," said she. "ese belong tiapolo; tiapolo too much like; ese all-e-same his son. suppose ese he wish something, tiapolo he make him." "that's mighty convenient for ese," says i. "and what kind of things does he make for him?" well, out came a rigmarole of all sorts of stories, many of which (like the dollar he took from mr. tarleton's head) were plain enough to me, but others i could make nothing of; and the thing that most surprised the kanakas was what surprised me least--namely, that he would go in the desert among all the _aitus_. some of the boldest, however, had accompanied him, and had heard him speak with the dead and give them orders, and, safe in his protection, had returned unscathed. some said he had a church there, where he worshipped tiapolo, and tiapolo appeared to him; others swore that there was no sorcery at all, that he performed his miracles by the power of prayer, and the church was no church, but a prison, in which he had confined a dangerous _aitu_. namu had been in the bush with him once, and returned glorifying god for these wonders. altogether, i began to have a glimmer of the man's position, and the means by which he had acquired it, and, though i saw he was a tough nut to crack, i was noways cast down. "very well," said i, "i'll have a look at master case's place of worship myself, and we'll see about the glorifying." at this uma fell in a terrible taking; if i went in the high bush i should never return; none could go there but by the protection of tiapolo. "i'll chance it on god's," said i. "i'm a good sort of fellow, uma, as fellows go, and i guess god'll con me through." she was silent for a while. "i think," said she, mighty solemn--and then, presently--"victoreea, he big chief?" "you bet!" said i. "he like you too much?" she asked again. i told her, with a grin, i believed the old lady was rather partial to me. "all right," said she. "victoreea he big chief, like you too much. no can help you here in falesá; no can do--too far off. maea he small chief--stop here. suppose he like you--make you all right. all-e-same god and tiapolo. god he big chief--got too much work. tiapolo he small chief--he like too much make-see, work very hard." "i'll have to hand you over to mr. tarleton," said i. "your theology's out of its bearings, uma." however, we stuck to this business all the evening, and, with the stories she told me of the desert and its dangers, she came near frightening herself into a fit. i don't remember half a quarter of them, of course, for i paid little heed; but two come back to me kind of clear. about six miles up the coast there is a sheltered cove they call _fanga-anaana_--"the haven full of caves." i've seen it from the sea myself, as near as i could get my boys to venture in; and it's a little strip of yellow sand. black cliffs overhang it, full of the black mouths of caves; great trees overhang the cliffs, and dangle-down lianas; and in one place, about the middle, a big brook pours over in a cascade. well, there was a boat going by here, with six young men of falesá, "all very pretty," uma said, which was the loss of them. it blew strong, there was a heavy head sea, and by the time they opened fanga-anaana, and saw the white cascade and the shady beach, they were all tired and thirsty, and their water had run out. one proposed to land and get a drink, and, being reckless fellows, they were all of the same mind except the youngest. lotu was his name; he was a very good young gentleman, and very wise; and he held out that they were crazy, telling them the place was given over to spirits and devils and the dead, and there were no living folk nearer than six miles the one way, and maybe twelve the other. but they laughed at his words, and, being five to one, pulled in, beached the boat, and landed. it was a wonderful pleasant place, lotu said, and the water excellent. they walked round the beach, but could see nowhere any way to mount the cliffs, which made them easier in their mind; and at last they sat down to make a meal on the food they had brought with them. they were scarce set, when there came out of the mouth of one of the black caves six of the most beautiful ladies ever seen: they had flowers in their hair, and the most beautiful breasts, and necklaces of scarlet seeds; and began to jest with these young gentlemen, and the young gentlemen to jest back with them, all but lotu. as for lotu, he saw there could be no living woman in such a place, and ran, and flung himself in the bottom of the boat, and covered his face, and prayed. all the time the business lasted lotu made one clean break of prayer, and that was all he knew of it, until his friends came back, and made him sit up, and they put to sea again out of the bay, which was now quite deserted, and no word of the six ladies. but, what frightened lotu most, not one of the five remembered anything of what had passed, but they were all like drunken men, and sang and laughed in the boat, and skylarked. the wind freshened and came squally, and the sea rose extraordinary high; it was such weather as any man in the islands would have turned his back to and fled home to falesá; but these five were like crazy folk, and cracked on all sail and drove their boat into the seas. lotu went to the bailing, none of the others thought to help him, but sang and skylarked and carried on, and spoke singular things beyond a man's comprehension, and laughed out loud when they said them. so the rest of the day lotu bailed for his life in the bottom of the boat, and was all drenched with sweat and cold sea-water; and none heeded him. against all expectation, they came safe in a dreadful tempest to papa-malulu, where the palms were singing out, and the cocoa-nuts flying like cannon-balls about the village green; and the same night the five young gentlemen sickened, and spoke never a reasonable word until they died. "and do you mean to tell me you can swallow a yarn like that?" i asked. she told me the thing was well known, and with handsome young men alone it was even common; but this was the only case where five had been slain the same day and in a company by the love of the women-devils; and it had made a great stir in the island, and she would be crazy if she doubted. "well, anyway," says i, "you needn't be frightened about me. i've no use for the women-devils. you're all the women i want, and all the devil too, old lady." to this she answered there were other sorts, and she had seen one with her own eyes. she had gone one day alone to the next bay, and, perhaps, got too near the margin of the bad place. the boughs of the high bush overshadowed her from the cant of the hill, but she herself was outside on a flat place, very stony, and growing full of young mummy-apples four and five feet high. it was a dark day in the rainy season, and now there came squalls that tore off the leaves and sent them flying, and now it was all still as in a house. it was in one of these still times that a whole gang of birds and flying foxes came pegging out of the bush like creatures frightened. presently after she heard a rustle nearer hand, and saw, coming out of the margin of the trees, among the mummy-apples, the appearance of a lean grey old boar. it seemed to think as it came, like a person; and all of a sudden, as she looked at it coming, she was aware it was no boar, but a thing that was a man with a man's thoughts. at that she ran, and the pig after her, and as the pig ran it holla'd aloud, so that the place rang with it. "i wish i had been there with my gun," said i. "i guess that pig would have holla'd so as to surprise himself." but she told me a gun was of no use with the like of these, which were the spirits of the dead. well, this kind of talk put in the evening, which was the best of it; but of course it didn't change my notion, and the next day, with my gun and a good knife, i set off upon a voyage of discovery. i made, as near as i could, for the place where i had seen case come out; for if it was true he had some kind of establishment in the bush i reckoned i should find a path. the beginning of the desert was marked off by a wall to call it so, for it was more of a long mound of stones. they say it reaches right across the island, but how they know it is another question, for i doubt if anyone has made the journey in a hundred years, the natives sticking chiefly to the sea, and their little colonies along the coast, and that part being mortal high and steep and full of cliffs. up to the west side of the wall the ground has been cleared, and there are cocoa-palms and mummy-apples and guavas, and lots of sensitive. just across, the bush begins outright; high bush at that, trees going up like the masts of ships, and ropes of liana hanging down like a ship's rigging, and nasty orchids growing in the forks like funguses. the ground where there was no underwood looked to be a heap of boulders. i saw many green pigeons which i might have shot, only i was there with a different idea. a number of butterflies flopped up and down along the ground like dead leaves; sometimes i would hear a bird calling, sometimes the wind overhead, and always the sea along the coast. but the queerness of the place it's more difficult to tell of, unless to one who has been alone in the high bush himself. the brightest kind of a day it is always dim down there. a man can see to the end of nothing; whichever way he looks the wood shuts up, one bough folding with another like the fingers of your hand; and whenever he listens he hears always something new--men talking, children laughing, the strokes of an axe a far way ahead of him, and sometimes a sort of a quick, stealthy scurry near at hand that makes him jump and look to his weapons. it's all very well for him to tell himself that he's alone, bar trees and birds; he can't make out to believe it; whichever way he turns the whole place seems to be alive and looking on. don't think it was uma's yarns that put me out; i don't value native talk a fourpenny-piece; it's a thing that's natural in the bush, and that's the end of it. as i got near the top of the hill, for the ground of the wood goes up in this place steep as a ladder, the wind began to sound straight on, and the leaves to toss and switch open and let in the sun. this suited me better; it was the same noise all the time, and nothing to startle. well, i had got to a place where there was an underwood of what they call wild cocoa-nut--mighty pretty with its scarlet fruit--when there came a sound of singing in the wind that i thought i had never heard the like of. it was all very fine to tell myself it was the branches; i knew better. it was all very fine to tell myself it was a bird; i knew never a bird that sang like that. it rose and swelled, and died away and swelled again; and now i thought it was like someone weeping, only prettier; and now i thought it was like harps; and there was one thing i made sure of, it was a sight too sweet to be wholesome in a place like that. you may laugh if you like; but i declare i called to mind the six young ladies that came, with their scarlet necklaces, out of the cave at fanga-anaana, and wondered if they sang like that. we laugh at the natives and their superstitions; but see how many traders take them up, splendidly educated white men that have been book-keepers (some of them) and clerks in the old country. it's my belief a superstition grows up in a place like the different kind of weeds; and as i stood there and listened to that wailing i twittered in my shoes. you may call me a coward to be frightened; i thought myself brave enough to go on ahead. but i went mighty carefully, with my gun cocked, spying all about me like a hunter, fully expecting to see a handsome young woman sitting somewhere in the bush, and fully determined (if i did) to try her with a charge of duck-shot. and sure enough, i had not gone far when i met with a queer thing. the wind came on the top of the wood in a strong puff, the leaves in front of me burst open, and i saw for a second something hanging in a tree. it was gone in a wink, the puff blowing by and the leaves closing. i tell you the truth: i had made up my mind to see an _aitu_; and if the thing had looked like a pig or a woman, it wouldn't have given me the same turn. the trouble was that it seemed kind of square, and the idea of a square thing that was alive and sang knocked me sick and silly. i must have stood quite a while; and i made pretty certain it was right out of the same tree that the singing came. then i began to come to myself a bit. "well," says i, "if this is really so, if this is a place where there are square things that sing, i'm gone up anyway. let's have my fun for my money." but i thought i might as well take the off-chance of a prayer being any good; so i plumped on my knees and prayed out loud; and all the time i was praying the strange sounds came out of the tree, and went up and down, and changed, for all the world like music, only you could see it wasn't human--there was nothing there that you could whistle. as soon as i had made an end in proper style, i laid down my gun, stuck my knife between my teeth, walked right up to that tree, and began to climb. i tell you my heart was like ice. but presently, as i went up, i caught another glimpse of the thing, and that relieved me, for i thought it seemed like a box; and when i had got right up to it i near fell out of the tree with laughing. a box it was, sure enough, and a candle-box at that, with the brand upon the side of it; and it had banjo-strings stretched so as to sound when the wind blew. i believe they call the thing a tyrolean[ ] harp, whatever that may mean. "well, mr. case," said i, "you've frightened me once, but i defy you to frighten me again," i says, and slipped down the tree, and set out again to find my enemy's head office, which i guessed would not be far away. the undergrowth was thick in this part; i couldn't see before my nose, and must burst my way through by main force and ply the knife as i went, slicing the cords of the lianas and slashing down whole trees at a blow. i call them trees for the bigness, but in truth they were just big weeds, and sappy to cut through like carrot. from all this crowd and kind of vegetation, i was just thinking to myself, the place might have once been cleared, when i came on my nose over a pile of stones, and saw in a moment it was some kind of a work of man. the lord knows when it was made or when deserted, for this part of the island has lain undisturbed since long before the whites came. a few steps beyond i hit into the path i had been always looking for. it was narrow, but well beaten, and i saw that case had plenty of disciples. it seems, indeed, it was a piece of fashionable boldness to venture up here with the trader, and a young man scarce reckoned himself grown till he had got his breech tattooed, for one thing, and seen case's devils for another. this is mighty like kanakas; but, if you look at it another way, it's mighty like white folks too. a bit along the path i was brought to a clear stand, and had to rub my eyes. there was a wall in front of me, the path passing it by a gap; it was tumble-down, and plainly very old, but built of big stones very well laid; and there is no native alive to-day upon that island that could dream of such a piece of building. along all the top of it was a line of queer figures, idols or scarecrows, or what not. they had carved and painted faces, ugly to view, their eyes and teeth were of shell, their hair and their bright clothes blew in the wind, and some of them worked with the tugging. there are islands up west where they make these kind of figures till to-day; but if ever they were made in this island, the practice and the very recollection of it are now long forgotten. and the singular thing was that all these bogies were as fresh as toys out of a shop. then it came in my mind that case had let out to me the first day that he was a good forger of island curiosities, a thing by which so many traders turn an honest penny. and with that i saw the whole business, and how this display served the man a double purpose, first of all, to season his curiosities, and then to frighten those that came to visit him. but i should tell you (what made the thing more curious) that all the time the tyrolean harps were harping round me in the trees, and even while i looked, a green-and-yellow bird (that, i suppose, was building) began to tear the hair off the head of one of the figures. a little farther on i found the best curiosity of the museum. the first i saw of it was a longish mound of earth with a twist to it. digging off the earth with my hands, i found underneath tarpaulin stretched on boards, so that this was plainly the roof of a cellar. it stood right on the top of the hill, and the entrance was on the far side, between two rocks, like the entrance to a cave. i went as far in as the bend, and, looking round the corner, saw a shining face. it was big and ugly, like a pantomime mask, and the brightness of it waxed and dwindled, and at times it smoked. "oho!" says i, "luminous paint!" and i must say i rather admired the man's ingenuity. with a box of tools and a few mighty simple contrivances he had made out to have a devil of a temple. any poor kanaka brought up here in the dark, with the harps whining all round him, and shown that smoking face in the bottom of a hole, would make no kind of doubt but he had seen and heard enough devils for a lifetime. it's easy to find out what kanakas think. just go back to yourself any way round from ten to fifteen years old, and there's an average kanaka. there are some pious, just as there are pious boys; and the most of them, like the boys again, are middling honest, and yet think it rather larks to steal, and are easy scared, and rather like to be so. i remember a boy i was at school with at home who played the case business. he didn't know anything, that boy; he couldn't do anything; he had no luminous paint and no tyrolean harps; he just boldly said he was a sorcerer, and frightened us out of our boots, and we loved it. and then it came in my mind how the master had once flogged that boy, and the surprise we were all in to see the sorcerer catch it and bum like anybody else. thinks i to myself, "i must find some way of fixing it so for master case." and the next moment i had my idea. i went back by the path, which, when once you had found it, was quite plain and easy walking; and when i stepped out on the black sands, who should i see but master case himself! i cocked my gun and held it handy, and we marched up and passed without a word, each keeping the tail of his eye on the other; and no sooner had we passed than we each wheeled round like fellows drilling, and stood face to face. we had each taken the same notion in his head, you see, that the other fellow might give him the load of his gun in the stern. "you've shot nothing," says case. "i'm not on the shoot to-day," said i. "well, the devil go with you for me," says he. "the same to you," says i. but we stuck just the way we were; no fear of either of us moving. case laughed. "we can't stop here all day, though," said he. "don't let me detain you," says i. he laughed again. "look here, wiltshire, do you think me a fool?" he asked. "more of a knave, if you want to know," says i. "well, do you think it would better me to shoot you here, on this open beach?" said he. "because i don't. folks come fishing every day. there may be a score of them up the valley now, making copra; there might be half a dozen on the hill behind you, after pigeons; they might be watching us this minute, and i shouldn't wonder. i give you my word i don't want to shoot you. why should i? you don't hinder me any. you haven't got one pound of copra but what you made with your own hands, like a negro slave. you're vegetating--that's what i call it--and i don't care where you vegetate, nor yet how long. give me your word you don't mean to shoot me, and i'll give you a lead and walk away." "well," said i, "you're frank and pleasant, ain't you? and i'll be the same. i don't mean to shoot you to-day. why should i? this business is beginning; it ain't done yet, mr. case. i've given you one turn already; i can see the marks of my knuckles on your head to this blooming hour, and i've more cooking for you. i'm not a paralee, like underhill. my name ain't adams, and it ain't vigours; and i mean to show you that you've met your match." "this is a silly way to talk," said he. "this is not the talk to make me move on with." "all right," said i, "stay where you are. i ain't in any hurry, and you know it. i can put in a day on this beach and never mind. i ain't got any copra to bother with. i ain't got any luminous paint to see to." i was sorry i said that last, but it whipped out before i knew. i could see it took the wind out of his sails, and he stood and stared at me with his brow drawn up. then i suppose he made up his mind he must get to the bottom of this. "i take you at your word," says he, and turned his back and walked right into the devil's bush. i let him go, of course, for i had passed my word. but i watched him as long as he was in sight, and after he was gone lit out for cover as lively as you would want to see, and went the rest of the way home under the bush, for i didn't trust him sixpence-worth. one thing i saw, i had been ass enough to give him warning, and that which i meant to do i must do at once. you would think i had had about enough excitement for one morning, but there was another turn waiting me. as soon as i got far enough round the cape to see my house i made out there were strangers there; a little farther, and no doubt about it. there was a couple of armed sentinels squatting at my door. i could only suppose the trouble about uma must have come to a head, and the station been seized. for aught i could think, uma was taken up already, and these armed men were waiting to do the like with me. however, as i came nearer, which i did at top speed, i saw there was a third native sitting on the verandah like a guest, and uma was talking with him like a hostess. nearer still i made out it was the big young chief, maea, and that he was smiling away and smoking. and what was he smoking? none of your european cigarettes fit for a cat, not even the genuine big, knock-me-down native article that a fellow can really put in the time with if his pipe is broke--but a cigar, and one of my mexicans at that, that i could swear to. at sight of this my heart started beating, and i took a wild hope in my head that the trouble was over, and maea had come round. uma pointed me out to him as i came up, and he met me at the head of my own stairs like a thorough gentleman. "vilivili," said he, which was the best they could make of my name, "i pleased." there is no doubt when an island chief wants to be civil he can do it. i saw the way things were from the word-go. there was no call for uma to say to me: "he no 'fraid ese now, come bring copra." i tell you i shook hands with that kanaka like as if he was the best white man in europe. the fact was, case and he had got after the same girl; or maea suspected it, and concluded to make hay of the trader on the chance. he had dressed himself up, got a couple of his retainers cleaned and armed to kind of make the thing more public, and, just waiting till case was clear of the village, came round to put the whole of his business my way. he was rich as well as powerful. i suppose that man was worth fifty thousand nuts per annum. i gave him the price of the beach and a quarter cent better, and as for credit, i would have advanced him the inside of the store and the fittings besides, i was so pleased to see him. i must say he bought like a gentleman: rice and tins and biscuits enough for a week's feast, and stuffs by the bolt. he was agreeable besides; he had plenty fun to him; and we cracked jests together, mostly through the interpreter, because he had mighty little english, and my native was still off colour. one thing i made out: he could never really have thought much harm of uma; he could never have been really frightened, and must just have made believe from dodginess, and because he thought case had a strong pull in the village and could help him on. this set me thinking that both he and i were in a tightish place. what he had done was to fly in the face of the whole village, and the thing might cost him his authority. more than that, after my talk with case on the beach, i thought it might very well cost me my life. case had as good as said he would pot me if ever i got any copra; he would come home to find the best business in the village had changed hands; and the best thing i thought i could do was to get in first with the potting. "see here, uma," says i, "tell him i'm sorry i made him wait, but i was up looking at case's tiapolo store in the bush." "he want savvy if you no 'fraid?" translated uma. i laughed out. "not much!" says i. "tell him the place is a blooming toy-shop! tell him in england we give these things to the kids to play with." "he want savvy if you hear devil sing?" she asked next. "look here," i said, "i can't do it now because i've got no banjo-strings in stock; but the next time the ship comes round i'll have one of these same contraptions right here in my verandah, and he can see for himself how much devil there is to it. tell him, as soon as i can get the strings i'll make one for his picaninnies. the name of the concern is a tyrolean harp; and you can tell him the name means in english that nobody but dam-fools give a cent for it." this time he was so pleased he had to try his english again: "you talk true?" says he. "rather!" said i. "talk all-e-same bible.--bring out a bible here, uma, if you've got such a thing, and i'll kiss it. or, i'll tell you what's better still," says i, taking a header, "ask him if he's afraid to go up there himself by day." it appeared he wasn't; he could venture as far as that by day and in company. "that's the ticket, then!" said i. "tell him the man's a fraud and the place foolishness, and if he'll go up there to-morrow he'll see all that's left of it. but tell him this, uma, and mind he understands it: if he gets talking, it's bound to come to case, and i'm a dead man! i'm playing his game, tell him, and if he says one word my blood will be at his door and be the damnation of him here and after." she told him, and he shook hands with me up to the hilt, and says he: "no talk. go up to-mollow. you my friend?" "no, sir," says i, "no such foolishness.--i've come here to trade, tell him, and not to make friends. but as to case, i'll send that man to glory!" so off maea went, pretty well pleased, as i could see. footnote: [ ] Æolian. chapter v night in the bush well, i was committed now; tiapolo had to be smashed up before next day, and my hands were pretty full, not only with preparations, but with argument. my house was like a mechanics' debating society: uma was so made up that i shouldn't go into the bush by night, or that, if i did, i was never to come back again. you know her style of arguing: you've had a specimen about queen victoria and the devil; and i leave you to fancy if i was tired of it before dark. at last i had a good idea. what was the use of casting my pearls before her? i thought; some of her own chopped hay would be likelier to do the business. "i'll tell you what, then," said i. "you fish out your bible, and i'll take that up along with me. that'll make me right." she swore a bible was no use. "that's just your kanaka ignorance," said i. "bring the bible out." she brought it, and i turned to the title-page, where i thought there would likely be some english, and so there was. "there!" said i. "look at that! '_london: printed for the british and foreign bible society, blackfriars_,' and the date, which i can't read, owing to its being in these x's. there's no devil in hell can look near the bible society, blackfriars. why, you silly!" i said, "how do you suppose we get along with our own _aitus_ at home? all bible society!" "i think you no got any," said she. "white man, he tell me you no got." "sounds likely, don't it?" i asked. "why would these islands all be chock full of them and none in europe?" "well, you no got bread-fruit," said she. i could have torn my hair. "now, look here, old lady," said i, "you dry up, for i'm tired of you. i'll take the bible, which'll put me as straight as the mail, and that's the last word i've got to say." the night fell extraordinary dark, clouds coming up with sundown and overspreading all; not a star showed; there was only an end of a moon, and that not due before the small hours. round the village, what with the lights and the fires in the open houses, and the torches of many fishers moving on the reef, it kept as gay as an illumination; but the sea and the mountains and woods were all clean gone. i suppose it might be eight o'clock when i took the road, laden like a donkey. first there was that bible, a book as big as your head, which i had let myself in for by my own tomfoolery. then there was my gun, and knife, and lantern, and patent matches, all necessary. and then there was the real plant of the affair in hand, a mortal weight of gunpowder, a pair of dynamite fishing bombs, and two or three pieces of slow match that i had hauled out of the tin cases and spliced together the best way i could; for the match was only trade stuff, and a man would be crazy that trusted it. altogether, you see, i had the materials of a pretty good blow-up! expense was nothing to me; i wanted that thing done right. as long as i was in the open, and had the lamp in my house to steer by, i did well. but when i got to the path, it fell so dark i could make no headway, walking into trees and swearing there, like a man looking for the matches in his bedroom. i knew it was risky to light up, for my lantern would be visible all the way to the point of the cape, and as no one went there after dark, it would be talked about, and come to case's ears. but what was i to do? i had either to give the business over and lose caste with maea, or light up, take my chance, and get through the thing the smartest i was able. as long as i was on the path i walked hard, but when i came to the black beach i had to run. for the tide was now nearly flowed; and to get through with my powder dry between the surf and the steep hill, took all the quickness i possessed. as it was, even, the wash caught me to the knees, and i came near falling on a stone. all this time the hurry i was in, and the free air and smell of the sea, kept my spirits lively; but when i was once in the bush and began to climb the path i took it easier. the fearsomeness of the wood had been a good bit rubbed off for me by master case's banjo-strings and graven images, yet i thought it was a dreary walk, and guessed, when the disciples went up there, they must be badly scared. the light of the lantern, striking among all these trunks and forked branches and twisted rope-ends of lianas, made the whole place, or all that you could see of it, a kind of a puzzle of turning shadows. they came to meet you, solid and quick like giants, and then span off and vanished; they hove up over your head like clubs, and flew away into the night like birds. the floor of the bush glimmered with dead wood, the way the match-box used to shine after you had struck a lucifer. big, cold drops fell on me from the branches overhead like sweat. there was no wind to mention; only a little icy breath of a land-breeze that stirred nothing; and the harps were silent. the first landfall i made was when i got through the bush of wild cocoa-nuts, and came in view of the bogies on the wall. mighty queer they looked by the shining of the lantern, with their painted faces and shell eyes, and their clothes and their hair hanging. one after another i pulled them all up and piled them in a bundle on the cellar roof, so as they might go to glory with the rest. then i chose a place behind one of the big stones at the entrance, buried my powder and the two shells, and arranged my match along the passage. and then i had a look at the smoking head, just for good-bye. it was doing fine. "cheer up," says i. "you're booked." it was my first idea to light up and be getting homeward; for the darkness and the glimmer of the dead wood and the shadows of the lantern made me lonely. but i knew where one of the harps hung; it seemed a pity it shouldn't go with the rest; and at the same time i couldn't help letting on to myself that i was mortal tired of my employment, and would like best to be at home and have the door shut. i stepped out of the cellar and argued it fore and back. there was a sound of the sea far down below me on the coast; nearer hand not a leaf stirred; i might have been the only living creature this side of cape horn. well, as i stood there thinking, it seemed the bush woke and became full of little noises. little noises they were, and nothing to hurt--a bit of a crackle, a bit of a rush--but the breath jumped right out of me and my throat went as dry as a biscuit. it wasn't case i was afraid of, which would have been common-sense; i never thought of case; what took me, as sharp as the colic, was the old wives' tales, the devil-women and the man-pigs. it was the toss of a penny whether i should run: but i got a purchase on myself, and stepped out, and held up the lantern (like a fool) and looked all round. in the direction of the village and the path there was nothing to be seen; but when i turned inland it's a wonder to me i didn't drop. there, coming right up out of the desert and the bad bush--there, sure enough, was a devil-woman, just as the way i had figured she would look. i saw the light shine on her bare arms and her bright eyes, and there went out of me a yell so big that i thought it was my death. "ah! no sing out!" says the devil-woman, in a kind of a high whisper. "why you talk big voice? put out light! ese he come." "my god almighty, uma, is that you?" says i. "_ioe_,"[ ] says she. "i come quick. ese here soon." "you come alone?" i asked. "you no 'fraid?" "ah, too much 'fraid!" she whispered, clutching me. "i think die." "well," says i, with a kind of a weak grin, "i'm not the one to laugh at you, mrs. wiltshire, for i'm about the worst scared man in the south pacific myself." she told me in two words what brought her. i was scarce gone, it seems, when fa'avao came in, and the old woman had met black jack running as hard as he was fit from our house to case's. uma neither spoke nor stopped, but lit right out to come and warn me. she was so close at my heels that the lantern was her guide across the beach, and afterwards, by the glimmer of it in the trees, she got her line up hill. it was only when i had got to the top or was in the cellar that she wandered lord knows where! and lost a sight of precious time, afraid to call out lest case was at the heels of her, and falling in the bush, so that she was all knocked and bruised. that must have been when she got too far to the southward, and how she came to take me in the flank at last and frighten me beyond what i've got the words to tell of. well, anything was better than a devil-woman, but i thought her yarn serious enough. black jack had no call to be about my house, unless he was set there to watch; and it looked to me as if my tomfool word about the paint, and perhaps some chatter of maea's had got us all in a clove hitch. one thing was clear: uma and i were here for the night; we daren't try to go home before day, and even then it would be safer to strike round up the mountain and come in by the back of the village, or we might walk into an ambuscade. it was plain, too, that the mine should be sprung immediately, or case might be in time to stop it. i marched into the tunnel, uma keeping tight hold of me, opened my lantern, and lit the match. the first length of it burned like a spill of paper, and i stood stupid, watching it burn, and thinking we were going aloft with tiapolo, which was none of my views. the second took to a better rate, though faster than i cared about; and at that i got my wits again, hauled uma clear of the passage, blew out and dropped the lantern, and the pair of us groped our way into the bush until i thought it might be safe, and lay down together by a tree. "old lady," i said, "i won't forget this night. you're a trump, and that's what's wrong with you." she humped herself close up to me. she had run out the way she was, with nothing on her but her kilt; and she was all wet with the dews and the sea on the black beach, and shook straight on with cold and the terror of the dark and the devils. "too much 'fraid," was all she said. the far side of case's hill goes down near as steep as a precipice into the next valley. we were on the very edge of it, and i could see the dead wood shine and hear the sea sound far below. i didn't care about the position, which left me no retreat, but i was afraid to change. then i saw i had made a worse mistake about the lantern, which i should have left lighted, so that i could have had a crack at case when he stepped into the shine of it. and even if i hadn't had the wit to do that, it seemed a senseless thing to leave the good lantern to blow up with the graven images. the thing belonged to me, after all, and was worth money, and might come in handy. if i could have trusted the match, i might have run in still and rescued it. but who was going to trust the match? you know what trade is. the stuff was good enough for kanakas to go fishing with, where they've got to look lively anyway, and the most they risk is only to have their hand blown off. but for any one that wanted to fool around a blow-up like mine that match was rubbish. altogether, the best i could do was to lie still, see my shot-gun handy, and wait for the explosion. but it was a solemn kind of a business. the blackness of the night was like solid; the only thing you could see was the nasty bogy glimmer of the dead wood, and that showed you nothing but itself; and as for sounds, i stretched my ears till i thought i could have heard the match burn in the tunnel, and that bush was as silent as a coffin. now and then there was a bit of a crack; but whether it was near or far, whether it was case stubbing his toes within a few yards of me, or a tree breaking miles away, i knew no more than the babe unborn. and then, all of a sudden, vesuvius went off. it was a long time coming; but when it came (though i say it that shouldn't) no man could ask to see a better. at first it was just a son of a gun of a row, and a spout of fire, and the wood lighted up so that you could see to read. and then the trouble began. uma and i were half buried under a wagonful of earth, and glad it was no worse, for one of the rocks at the entrance of the tunnel was fired clean into the air, fell within a couple of fathoms of where we lay, and bounded over the edge of the hill, and went pounding down into the next valley. i saw i had rather under-calculated our distance, or overdone the dynamite and powder, which you please. and presently i saw i had made another slip. the noise of the thing began to die off, shaking the island; the dazzle was over; and yet the night didn't come back the way i expected. for the whole wood was scattered with red coals and brands from the explosion; they were all round me on the flat; some had fallen below in the valley, and some stuck and flared in the tree-tops. i had no fear of fire, for these forests are too wet to kindle. but the trouble was that the place was all lit up--not very bright, but good enough to get a shot by; and the way the coals were scattered, it was just as likely case might have the advantage as myself. i looked all round for his white face, you may be sure; but there was not a sign of him. as for uma, the life seemed to have been knocked right out of her by the bang and blaze of it. there was one bad point in my game. one of the blessed graven images had come down all afire, hair and clothes and body, not four yards away from me. i cast a mighty noticing glance all round; there was still no case, and i made up my mind i must get rid of that burning stick before he came, or i should be shot there like a dog. it was my first idea to have crawled, and then i thought speed was the main thing, and stood half up to make a rush. the same moment from somewhere between me and the sea there came a flash and a report, and a rifle bullet screeched in my ear. i swung straight round and up with my gun, but the brute had a winchester, and before i could as much as see him his second shot knocked me over like a nine-pin. i seemed to fly in the air, then came down by the run and lay half a minute, silly; and then i found my hands empty, and my gun had flown over my head as i fell. it makes a man mighty wide awake to be in the kind of box that i was in. i scarcely knew where i was hurt, or whether i was hurt or not, but turned right over on my face to crawl after my weapon. unless you have tried to get about with a smashed leg you don't know what pain is, and i let out a howl like a bullock's. this was the unluckiest noise that ever i made in my life. up to then uma had stuck to her tree like a sensible woman, knowing she would be only in the way; but as soon as she heard me sing out she ran forward. the winchester cracked again and down she went. i had sat up, leg and all, to stop her; but when i saw her tumble i clapped down again where i was, lay still, and felt the handle of my knife. i had been scurried and put out before. no more of that for me. he had knocked over my girl, i had got to fix him for it; and i lay there and gritted my teeth, and footed up the chances. my leg was broke, my gun was gone. case had still ten shots in his winchester. it looked a kind of hopeless business. but i never despaired nor thought upon despairing: that man had got to go. for a goodish bit not one of us let on. then i heard case begin to move nearer in the bush, but mighty careful. the image had burned out; there were only a few coals left here and there, and the wood was main dark, but had a kind of a low glow in it like a fire on its last legs. it was by this that i made out case's head looking at me over a big tuft of ferns, and at the same time the brute saw me and shouldered his winchester. i lay quite still, and as good as looked into the barrel: it was my last chance, but i thought my heart would have come right out of its bearings. then he fired. lucky for me it was no shot-gun, for the bullet struck within an inch of me and knocked the dirt in my eyes. just you try and see if you can lie quiet, and let a man take a sitting shot at you and miss you by a hair. but i did, and lucky too. a while case stood with the winchester at the port-arms; then he gave a little laugh to himself and stepped round the ferns. "laugh!" thought i. "if you had the wit of a louse you would be praying!" i was all as taut as a ship's hawser or the spring of a watch, and as soon as he came within reach of me i had him by the ankle, plucked the feet right out from under him, laid him out, and was upon the top of him, broken leg and all, before he breathed. his winchester had gone the same road as my shot-gun; it was nothing to me--i defied him now. i'm a pretty strong man anyway, but i never knew what strength was till i got hold of case. he was knocked out of time by the rattle he came down with, and threw up his hands together, more like a frightened woman, so that i caught both of them with my left. this wakened him up, and he fastened his teeth in my forearm like a weasel. much i cared. my leg gave me all the pain i had any use for, and i drew my knife and got it in the place. "now," said i, "i've got you; and you're gone up, and a good job too! do you feel the point of that? that's for underhill! and there's for adams! and now here's for uma, and that's going to knock your blooming soul right out of you!" with that i gave him the cold steel for all i was worth. his body kicked under me like a spring sofa; he gave a dreadful kind of a long moan, and lay still. "i wonder if you're dead? i hope so!" i thought, for my head was swimming. but i wasn't going to take chances; i had his own example too close before me for that; and i tried to draw the knife out to give it him again. the blood came over my hands, i remember, hot as tea; and with that i fainted clean away, and fell with my head on the man's mouth. when i came to myself it was pitch dark; the cinders had burned out; there was nothing to be seen but the shine of the dead wood, and i couldn't remember where i was nor why i was in such pain, nor what i was all wetted with. then it came back, and the first thing i attended to was to give him the knife again a half a dozen times up to the handle. i believe he was dead already, but it did him no harm, and did me good. "i bet you're dead now," i said, and then i called to uma. nothing answered, and i made a move to go and grope for her, fouled my broken leg, and fainted again. when i came to myself the second time the clouds had all cleared away, except a few that sailed there, white as cotton. the moon was up--a tropic moon. the moon at home turns a wood black, but even this old butt end of a one showed up that forest as green as by day. the night birds--or, rather, they're a kind of early morning bird--sang out with their long, falling notes like nightingales. and i could see the dead man, that i was still half resting on, looking right up into the sky with his open eyes, no paler than when he was alive; and a little way off uma tumbled on her side. i got over to her the best way i was able, and when i got there she was broad awake, and crying and sobbing to herself with no more noise than an insect. it appears she was afraid to cry out loud, because of the _aitus_. altogether she was not much hurt, but scared beyond belief; she had come to her senses a long while ago, cried out to me, heard nothing in reply, made out we were both dead, and had lain there ever since, afraid to budge a finger. the ball had ploughed up her shoulder and she had lost a main quantity of blood; but i soon had that tied up the way it ought to be with the tail of my shirt and a scarf i had on, got her head on my sound knee and my back against a trunk, and settled down to wait for morning. uma was for neither use nor ornament, and could only clutch hold of me and shake and cry. i don't suppose there was ever anybody worse scared, and, to do her justice, she had had a lively night of it. as for me, i was in a good bit of pain and fever, but not so bad when i sat still; and every time i looked over to case i could have sung and whistled. talk about meat and drink! to see that man lying there dead as a herring filled me full. the night birds stopped after a while; and then the light began to change, the east came orange, the whole wood began to whirr with singing like a musical box, and there was the broad day. i didn't expect maea for a long while yet; and indeed i thought there was an off-chance he might go back on the whole idea and not come at all. i was the better pleased when, about an hour after daylight, i heard sticks smashing and a lot of kanakas laughing and singing out to keep their courage up. uma sat up quite brisk at the first word of it; and presently we saw a party come stringing out of the path, maea in front, and behind him a white man in a pith helmet. it was mr. tarleton, who had turned up late last night in falesá, having left his boat and walked the last stage with a lantern. they buried case upon the field of glory, right in the hole where he had kept the smoking head. i waited till the thing was done; and mr. tarleton prayed, which i thought tomfoolery, but i'm bound to say he gave a pretty sick view of the dear departed's prospects, and seemed to have his own ideas of hell. i had it out with him afterwards, told him he had scamped his duty, and what he had ought to have done was to up like a man and tell the kanakas plainly case was damned, and a good riddance; but i never could get him to see it my way. then they made me a litter of poles and carried me down to the station. mr. tarleton set my leg, and made a regular missionary splice of it, so that i limp to this day. that done, he took down my evidence, and uma's, and maea's, wrote it all out fine, and had us sign it; and then he got the chiefs and marched over to papa randall's to seize case's papers. all they found was a bit of a diary, kept for a good many years, and all about the price of copra, and chickens being stolen, and that; and the books of the business and the will i told you of in the beginning, by both of which the whole thing (stock, lock, and barrel) appeared to belong to the samoa woman. it was i that bought her out at a mighty reasonable figure, for she was in a hurry to get home. as for randall and the black, they had to tramp; got into some kind of a station on the papa-malulu side; did very bad business, for the truth is neither of the pair was fit for it, and lived mostly on fish, which was the means of randall's death. it seems there was a nice shoal in one day, and papa went after them with the dynamite; either the match burned too fast, or papa was full, or both, but the shell went off (in the usual way) before he threw it, and where was papa's hand? well, there's nothing to hurt in that; the islands up north are all full of one-handed men, like the parties in the "arabian nights"; but either randall was too old, or he drank too much, and the short and the long of it was that he died. pretty soon after, the nigger was turned out of the island for stealing from white men, and went off to the west, where he found men of his own colour, in case he liked that, and the men of his own colour took and ate him at some kind of a corroborree, and i'm sure i hope he was to their fancy! so there was i, left alone in my glory at falesá; and when the schooner came round i filled her up, and gave her a deck-cargo half as high as the house. i must say mr. tarleton did the right thing by us; but he took a meanish kind of a revenge. "now, mr. wiltshire," said he, "i've put you all square with everybody here. it wasn't difficult to do, case being gone; but i have done it, and given my pledge besides that you will deal fairly with the natives. i must ask you to keep my word." well, so i did. i used to be bothered about my balances, but i reasoned it out this way: we all have queerish balances, and the natives all know it, and water their copra in a proportion so that it's fair all round; but the truth is, it did use to bother me, and, though i did well in falesá, i was half glad when the firm moved me on to another station, where i was under no kind of a pledge and could look my balances in the face. as for the old lady, you know her as well as i do. she's only the one fault. if you don't keep your eye lifting she would give away the roof off the station. well, it seems it's natural in kanakas. she's turned a powerful big woman now, and could throw a london bobby over her shoulder. but that's natural in kanakas too, and there's no manner of doubt that she's an a wife. mr. tarleton's gone home, his trick being over. he was the best missionary i ever struck, and now, it seems, he's parsonising down somerset way. well, that's best for him; he'll have no kanakas there to get luny over. my public-house? not a bit of it, nor ever likely. i'm stuck here, i fancy. i don't like to leave the kids, you see: and--there's no use talking--they're better here than what they would be in a white man's country, though ben took the eldest up to auckland, where he's being schooled with the best. but what bothers me is the girls. they're only half-castes, of course; i know that as well as you do, and there's nobody thinks less of half-castes than i do; but they're mine, and about all i've got. i can't reconcile my mind to their taking up with kanakas, and i'd like to know where i'm to find the whites? footnote: [ ] yes. the bottle imp _note_ _any student of that very unliterary product, the english drama of the early part of the century, will here recognise the name and the root idea of a piece once rendered popular by the redoubtable o. smith. the root idea is there, and identical, and yet i hope i have made it a new thing. and the fact that the tale has been designed and written for a polynesian audience may lend it some extraneous interest nearer home._ _r. l. s._ the bottle imp there was a man of the island of hawaii, whom i shall call keawe; for the truth is, he still lives, and his name must be kept secret; but the place of his birth was not far from honaunau, where the bones of keawe the great lie hidden in a cave. this man was poor, brave, and active; he could read and write like a schoolmaster; he was a first-rate mariner besides, sailed for some time in the island steamers, and steered a whaleboat on the hamakua coast. at length it came in keawe's mind to have a sight of the great world and foreign cities, and he shipped on a vessel bound to san francisco. this is a fine town, with a fine harbour, and rich people uncountable; and, in particular, there is one hill which is covered with palaces. upon this hill keawe was one day taking a walk with his pocket full of money, viewing the great houses upon either hand with pleasure. "what fine houses these are!" he was thinking, "and how happy must those people be who dwell in them, and take no care for the morrow!" the thought was in his mind when he came abreast of a house that was smaller than some others, but all finished and beautified like a toy; the steps of that house shone like silver, and the borders of the garden bloomed like garlands, and the windows were bright like diamonds; and keawe stopped and wondered at the excellence of all he saw. so stopping, he was aware of a man that looked forth upon him through a window so clear that keawe could see him as you see a fish in a pool upon the reef. the man was elderly, with a bald head and a black beard; and his face was heavy with sorrow, and he bitterly sighed. and the truth of it is, that as keawe looked in upon the man, and the man looked out upon keawe, each envied the other. all of a sudden the man smiled and nodded, and beckoned keawe to enter, and met him at the door of the house. "this is a fine house of mine," said the man, and bitterly sighed. "would you not care to view the chambers?" so he led keawe all over it, from the cellar to the roof, and there was nothing there that was not perfect of its kind, and keawe was astonished. "truly," said keawe, "this is a beautiful house; if i lived in the like of it i should be laughing all day long. how comes it, then, that you should be sighing?" "there is no reason," said the man, "why you should not have a house in all points similar to this, and finer, if you wish. you have some money, i suppose?" "i have fifty dollars," said keawe; "but a house like this will cost more than fifty dollars." the man made a computation. "i am sorry you have no more," said he, "for it may raise you trouble in the future; but it shall be yours at fifty dollars." "the house?" asked keawe. "no, not the house," replied the man; "but the bottle. for, i must tell you, although i appear to you so rich and fortunate, all my fortune, and this house itself and its garden, came out of a bottle not much bigger than a pint. this is it." and he opened a lockfast place, and took out a round-bellied bottle with a long neck; the glass of it was white like milk, with changing rainbow colours in the grain. withinsides something obscurely moved, like a shadow and a fire. "this is the bottle," said the man; and when keawe laughed, "you do not believe me?" he added. "try, then, for yourself. see if you can break it." so keawe took the bottle up and dashed it on the floor till he was weary; but it jumped on the floor like a child's ball, and was not injured. "this is a strange thing," said keawe. "for by the touch of it, as well as by the look, the bottle should be of glass." "of glass it is," replied the man, sighing more heavily than ever; "but the glass of it was tempered in the flames of hell. an imp lives in it, and that is the shadow we behold there moving; or so i suppose. if any man buy this bottle the imp is at his command; all that he desires--love, fame, money, houses like this house, ay, or a city like this city--all are his at the word uttered. napoleon had this bottle, and by it he grew to be the king of the world; but he sold it at the last, and fell. captain cook had this bottle, and by it he found his way to so many islands; but he, too, sold it, and was slain upon hawaii. for, once it is sold, the power goes and the protection; and unless a man remain content with what he has, ill will befall him." "and yet you talk of selling it yourself?" keawe said. "i have all i wish, and i am growing elderly," replied the man. "there is one thing the imp cannot do--he cannot prolong life; and, it would not be fair to conceal from you, there is a drawback to the bottle; for if a man die before he sells it, he must burn in hell for ever." "to be sure, that is a drawback and no mistake," cried keawe. "i would not meddle with the thing. i can do without a house, thank god; but there is one thing i could not be doing with one particle, and that is to be damned." "dear me, you must not run away with things," returned the man. "all you have to do is to use the power of the imp in moderation, and then sell it to someone else, as i do to you, and finish your life in comfort." "well, i observe two things," said keawe. "all the time you keep sighing like a maid in love, that is one; and, for the other, you sell this bottle very cheap." "i have told you already why i sigh," said the man. "it is because i fear my health is breaking up; and, as you said yourself, to die and go to the devil is a pity for anyone. as for why i sell so cheap, i must explain to you there is a peculiarity about the bottle. long ago, when the devil brought it first upon earth, it was extremely expensive, and was sold first of all to prester john for many millions of dollars; but it cannot be sold at all, unless sold at a loss. if you sell it for as much as you paid for it, back it comes to you again like a homing pigeon. it follows that the price has kept falling in these centuries, and the bottle is now remarkably cheap. i bought it myself from one of my great neighbours on this hill, and the price i paid was only ninety dollars. i could sell it for as high as eighty-nine dollars and ninety-nine cents, but not a penny dearer, or back the thing must come to me. now, about this there are two bothers. first, when you offer a bottle so singular for eighty odd dollars, people suppose you to be jesting. and second--but there is no hurry about that--and i need not go into it. only remember it must be coined money that you sell it for." "how am i to know that this is all true?" asked keawe. "some of it you can try at once," replied the man. "give me your fifty dollars, take the bottle, and wish your fifty dollars back into your pocket. if that does not happen, i pledge you my honour i will cry off the bargain and restore your money." "you are not deceiving me?" said keawe. the man bound himself with a great oath. "well, i will risk that much," said keawe, "for that can do no harm." and he paid over his money to the man, and the man handed him the bottle. "imp of the bottle," said keawe, "i want my fifty dollars back." and sure enough he had scarce said the word before his pocket was as heavy as ever. "to be sure this is a wonderful bottle," said keawe. "and now good-morning to you, my fine fellow, and the devil go with you for me!" said the man. "hold on," said keawe, "i don't want any more of this fun. here, take your bottle back." "you have bought it for less than i paid for it," replied the man, rubbing his hands. "it is yours now; and, for my part, i am only concerned to see the back of you." and with that he rang for his chinese servant, and had keawe shown out of the house. now, when keawe was in the street, with the bottle under his arm, he began to think. "if all is true about this bottle, i may have made a losing bargain," thinks he. "but perhaps the man was only fooling me." the first thing he did was to count his money; the sum was exact--forty-nine dollars american money, and one chili piece. "that looks like the truth," said keawe. "now i will try another part." the streets in that part of the city were as clean as a ship's decks, and though it was noon, there were no passengers. keawe set the bottle in the gutter and walked away. twice he looked back, and there was the milky, round-bellied bottle where he left it. a third time he looked back, and turned a corner; but he had scarce done so, when something knocked upon his elbow, and behold! it was the long neck sticking up; and as for the round belly, it was jammed into the pocket of his pilot-coat. "and that looks like the truth," said keawe. the next thing he did was to buy a corkscrew in a shop, and go apart into a secret place in the fields. and there he tried to draw the cork, but as often as he put the screw in, out it came again, and the cork as whole as ever. "this is some new sort of cork," said keawe, and all at once he began to shake and sweat, for he was afraid of that bottle. on his way back to the port-side he saw a shop where a man sold shells and clubs from the wild islands, old heathen deities, old coined money, pictures from china and japan, and all manner of things that sailors bring in their seachests. and here he had an idea. so he went in and offered the bottle for a hundred dollars. the man of the shop laughed at him at the first, and offered him five; but, indeed, it was a curious bottle--such glass was never blown in any human glass-works, so prettily the colours shone under the milky white, and so strangely the shadow hovered in the midst; so, after he had disputed a while after the manner of his kind, the shopman gave keawe sixty silver dollars for the thing, and set it on a shelf in the midst of his window. "now," said keawe, "i have sold that for sixty which i bought for fifty--or, to say truth, a little less, because one of my dollars was from chili. now i shall know the truth upon another point." so he went back on board his ship, and, when he opened his chest, there was the bottle, and had come more quickly than himself. now keawe had a mate on board whose name was lopaka. "what ails you," said lopaka, "that you stare in your chest?" they were alone in the ship's forecastle, and keawe bound him to secrecy, and told all. "this is a very strange affair," said lopaka; "and i fear you will be in trouble about this bottle. but there is one point very clear--that you are sure of the trouble, and you had better have the profit in the bargain. make up your mind what you want with it; give the order, and if it is done as you desire, i will buy the bottle myself; for i have an idea of my own to get a schooner, and go trading through the islands." "that is not my idea," said keawe; "but to have a beautiful house and garden on the kona coast, where i was born, the sun shining in at the door, flowers in the garden, glass in the windows, pictures on the walls, and toys and fine carpets on the tables, for all the world like the house i was in this day--only a story higher, and with balconies all about like the king's palace; and to live there without care and make merry with my friends and relatives." "well," said lopaka, "let us carry it back with us to hawaii; and if all comes true, as you suppose, i will buy the bottle, as i said, and ask a schooner." upon that they were agreed, and it was not long before the ship returned to honolulu, carrying keawe and lopaka, and the bottle. they were scarce come ashore when they met a friend upon the beach, who began at once to condole with keawe. "i do not know what i am to be condoled about," said keawe. "is it possible you have not heard," said the friend, "your uncle--hat good old man--is dead, and your cousin -- that beautiful boy--was drowned at sea?" keawe was filled with sorrow, and, beginning to weep and to lament, he forgot about the bottle. but lopaka was thinking to himself, and presently, when keawe's grief was a little abated, "i have been thinking," said lopaka. "had not your uncle lands in hawaii, in the district of kaü?" "no," said keawe, "not in kaü; they are on the mountain-side--a little way south of hookena." "these lands will now be yours?" asked lopaka. "and so they will," says keawe, and began again to lament for his relatives. "no," said lopaka, "do not lament at present. i have a thought in my mind. how if this should be the doing of the bottle? for here is the place ready for your house." "if this be so," cried keawe, "it is a very ill way to serve me by killing my relatives. but it may be, indeed; for it was in just such a station that i saw the house with my mind's eye." "the house, however, is not yet built," said lopaka. "no, nor like to be!" said keawe; "for though my uncle has some coffee and ava and bananas, it will not be more than will keep me in comfort; and the rest of that land is the black lava." "let us go to the lawyer," said lopaka; "i have still this idea in my mind." now, when they came to the lawyer's, it appeared keawe's uncle had grown monstrous rich in the last days, and there was a fund of money. "and here is the money for the house!" cried lopaka. "if you are thinking of a new house," said the lawyer, "here is the card of a new architect, of whom they tell me great things." "better and better!" cried lopaka. "here is all made plain for us. let us continue to obey orders." so they went to the architect, and he had drawings of houses on his table. "you want something out of the way," said the architect. "how do you like this?" and he handed a drawing to keawe. now, when keawe set eyes on the drawing, he cried out aloud, for it was the picture of his thought exactly drawn. "i am in for this house," thought he. "little as i like the way it comes to me, i am in for it now, and i may as well take the good along with the evil." so he told the architect all that he wished, and how he would have that house furnished, and about the pictures on the wall and the knick-knacks on the tables; and he asked the man plainly for how much he would undertake the whole affair. the architect put many questions, and took his pen and made a computation; and when he had done he named the very sum that keawe had inherited. lopaka and keawe looked at one another and nodded. "it is quite clear," thought keawe, "that i am to have this house, whether or no. it comes from the devil, and i fear i will get little good by that; and of one thing i am sure, i will make no more wishes as long as i have this bottle. but with the house i am saddled, and i may as well take the good along with the evil." so he made his terms with the architect, and they signed a paper; and keawe and lopaka took ship again and sailed to australia; for it was concluded between them they should not interfere at all, but leave the architect and the bottle imp to build and to adorn that house at their own pleasure. the voyage was a good voyage, only all the time keawe was holding in his breath, for he had sworn he would utter no more wishes, and take no more favours from the devil. the time was up when they got back. the architect told them that the house was ready, and keawe and lopaka took a passage in the _hall_, and went down kona way to view the house, and see if all had been done fitly according to the thought that was in keawe's mind. now, the house stood on the mountain side, visible to ships. above, the forest ran up into the clouds of rain; below, the black lava fell in cliffs, where the kings of old lay buried. a garden bloomed about that house with every hue of flowers; and there was an orchard of papaia on the one hand and an orchard of bread-fruit on the other, and right in front, toward the sea, a ship's mast had been rigged up and bore a flag. as for the house, it was three stories high, with great chambers and broad balconies on each. the windows were of glass, so excellent that it was as clear as water and as bright as day. all manner of furniture adorned the chambers. pictures hung upon the wall in golden frames: pictures of ships, and men fighting, and of the most beautiful women, and of singular places; nowhere in the world are there pictures of so bright a colour as those keawe found hanging in his house. as for the knick-knacks, they were extraordinary fine; chiming clocks and musical boxes, little men with nodding heads, books filled with pictures, weapons of price from all quarters of the world, and the most elegant puzzles to entertain the leisure of a solitary man. and as no one would care to live in such chambers, only to walk through and view them, the balconies were made so broad that a whole town might have lived upon them in delight; and keawe knew not which to prefer, whether the back porch, where you got the land-breeze, and looked upon the orchards and the flowers, or the front balcony, where you could drink the wind of the sea, and look down the steep wall of the mountain and see the _hall_ going by once a week or so between hookena and the hills of pele, or the schooners plying up the coast for wood and ava and bananas. when they had viewed all, keawe and lopaka sat on the porch. "well," asked lopaka, "is it all as you designed?" "words cannot utter it," said keawe. "it is better than i dreamed, and i am sick with satisfaction." "there is but one thing to consider," said lopaka; "all this may be quite natural, and the bottle imp have nothing whatever to say to it. if i were to buy the bottle, and got no schooner after all, i should have put my hand in the fire for nothing. i gave you my word, i know; but yet i think you would not grudge me one more proof." "i have sworn i would take no more favours," said keawe. "i have gone already deep enough." "this is no favour i am thinking of," replied lopaka. "it is only to see the imp himself. there is nothing to be gained by that, and so nothing to be ashamed of; and yet, if i once saw him, i should be sure of the whole matter. so indulge me so far, and let me see the imp; and, after that, here is the money in my hand, and i will buy it." "there is only one thing i am afraid of," said keawe. "the imp may be very ugly to view: and if you once set eyes upon him you might be very undesirous of the bottle." "i am a man of my word," said lopaka. "and here is the money betwixt us." "very well," replied keawe. "i have a curiosity myself.--so come, let us have one look at you, mr. imp." now as soon as that was said the imp looked out of the bottle, and in again, swift as a lizard; and there sat keawe and lopaka turned to stone. the night had quite come, before either found a thought to say or voice to say it with; and then lopaka pushed the money over and took the bottle. "i am a man of my word," said he, "and had need to be so, or i would not touch this bottle with my foot. well, i shall get my schooner and a dollar or two for my pocket; and then i will be rid of this devil as fast as i can. for to tell you the plain truth, the look of him has cast me down." "lopaka," said keawe, "do not you think any worse of me than you can help; i know it is night, and the roads bad, and the pass by the tombs an ill place to go by so late, but i declare since i have seen that little face, i cannot eat or sleep or pray till it is gone from me. i will give you a lantern, and a basket to put the bottle in, and any picture or fine thing in all my house that takes your fancy;--and be gone at once, and go sleep at hookena with nahinu." "keawe," said lopaka, "many a man would take this ill; above all, when i am doing you a turn so friendly as to keep my word and buy the bottle; and for that matter, the night, and the dark, and the way by the tombs, must be all tenfold more dangerous to a man with such a sin upon his conscience, and such a bottle under his arm. but for my part, i am so extremely terrified myself i have not the heart to blame you. here i go then; and i pray god you may be happy in your house, and i fortunate with my schooner, and both get to heaven in the end in spite of the devil and his bottle." so lopaka went down the mountain; and keawe stood in his front balcony, and listened to the clink of the horse's shoes, and watched the lantern go shining down the path, and along the cliff of caves where the old dead are buried; and all the time he trembled and clasped his hands, and prayed for his friend, and gave glory to god that he himself was escaped out of that trouble. but the next day came very brightly, and that new house of his was so delightful to behold that he forgot his terrors. one day followed another, and keawe dwelt there in perpetual joy. he had his place on the back porch; it was there he ate and lived, and read the stories in the honolulu newspapers; but when anyone came by they would go in and view the chambers and the pictures. and the fame of the house went far and wide; it was called _ka-hale-nui_--the great house--in all kona; and sometimes the bright house, for keawe kept a chinaman, who was all day dusting and furbishing; and the glass, and the gilt, and the fine stuffs, and the pictures, shone as bright as the morning. as for keawe himself, he could not walk in the chambers without singing, his heart was so enlarged; and when ships sailed by upon the sea, he would fly his colours on the mast. so time went by, until one day keawe went upon a visit as far as kailua to certain of his friends. there he was well feasted; and left as soon as he could the next morning, and drove hard, for he was impatient to behold his beautiful house; and, besides, the night then coming on was the night in which the dead of old days go abroad in the sides of kona; and having already meddled with the devil, he was the more chary of meeting with the dead. a little beyond honaunau, looking far ahead, he was aware of a woman bathing in the edge of the sea; and she seemed a well-grown girl, but he thought no more of it. then he saw her white shift flutter as she put it on, and then her red holoku; and by the time he came abreast of her she was done with her toilet, and had come up from the sea, and stood by the track side in her red holoku, and she was all freshened with the bath, and her eyes shone and were kind. now keawe no sooner beheld her than he drew rein. "i thought i knew everyone in this country," said he. "how comes it that i do not know you?" "i am kokua, daughter of kiano," said the girl, "and i have just returned from oahu. who are you?" "i will tell you who i am in a little," said keawe, dismounting from his horse, "but not now. for i have a thought in my mind, and if you knew who i was, you might have heard of me, and would not give me a true answer. but tell me, first of all, one thing: are you married?" at this kokua laughed out aloud. "it is you who ask questions," she said. "are you married yourself?" "indeed, kokua, i am not," replied keawe, "and never thought to be until this hour. but here is the plain truth. i have met you here at the roadside, and i saw your eyes, which are like the stars, and my heart went to you as swift as a bird. and so now, if you want none of me, say so, and i will go on to my own place; but if you think me no worse than any other young man, say so, too, and i will turn aside to your father's for the night, and to-morrow i will talk with the good man." kokua said never a word, but she looked at the sea and laughed. "kokua," said keawe, "if you say nothing, i will take that for the good answer; so let us be stepping to your father's door." she went on ahead of him, still without speech; only sometimes she glanced back and glanced away again, and she kept the strings of her hat in her mouth. now, when they had come to the door, kiano came out on his verandah, and cried out and welcomed keawe by name. at that the girl looked over, for the fame of the great house had come to her ears; and, to be sure, it was a great temptation. all that evening they were very merry together; and the girl was as bold as brass under the eyes of her parents, and made a mock of keawe, for she had a quick wit. the next day he had a word with kiano, and found the girl alone. "kokua," said he, "you made a mock of me all the evening; and it is still time to bid me go. i would not tell you who i was, because i have so fine a house, and i feared you would think too much of that house and too little of the man who loves you. now you know all, and if you wish to have seen the last of me, say so at once." "no," said kokua; but this time she did not laugh, nor did keawe ask for more. this was the wooing of keawe; things had gone quickly; but so an arrow goes, and the ball of a rifle swifter still, and yet both may strike the target. things had gone fast, but they had gone far also, and the thought of keawe rang in the maiden's head; she heard his voice in the breach of the surf upon the lava, and for this young man that she had seen but twice she would have left father and mother and her native islands. as for keawe himself, his horse flew up the path of the mountain under the cliff of tombs, and the sound of the hoofs, and the sound of keawe singing to himself for pleasure, echoed in the caverns of the dead. he came to the bright house, and still he was singing. he sat and ate in the broad balcony, and the chinaman wondered at his master, to hear how he sang between the mouthfuls. the sun went down into the sea, and the night came; and keawe walked the balconies by lamplight, high on the mountains, and the voice of his singing startled men on ships. "here am i now upon my high place," he said to himself. "life may be no better; this is the mountain top: and all shelves about me toward the worse. for the first time i will light up the chambers, and bathe in my fine bath with the hot water and the cold, and sleep alone in the bed of my bridal chamber." so the chinaman had word, and he must rise from sleep and light the furnaces; and as he wrought below, beside the boilers, he heard his master singing and rejoicing above him in the lighted chambers. when the water began to be hot the chinaman cried to his master; and keawe went into the bathroom; and the chinaman heard him sing as he filled the marble basin; and heard him sing, and the singing broken, as he undressed; until of a sudden the song ceased. the chinaman listened, and listened; he called up the house to keawe to ask if all were well, and keawe answered him "yes," and bade him go to bed; but there was no more singing in the bright house; and all night long the chinaman heard his master's feet go round and round the balconies without repose. now the truth of it was this: as keawe undressed for his bath, he spied upon his flesh a patch like a patch of lichen on a rock, and it was then that he stopped singing. for he knew the likeness of that patch, and knew that he was fallen in the chinese evil.[ ] now, it is a sad thing for any man to fall into this sickness. and it would be a sad thing for anyone to leave a house so beautiful and so commodious, and depart from all his friends to the north coast of molokai between the mighty cliff and the sea-breakers. but what was that to the case of the man keawe, he who had met his love but yesterday, and won her but that morning, and now saw all his hopes break, in a moment, like a piece of glass? a while he sat upon the edge of the bath; then sprang, with a cry, and ran outside; and to and fro, to and fro, along the balcony, like one despairing. "very willingly could i leave hawaii, the home of my fathers," keawe was thinking. "very lightly could i leave my house, the high-placed, the many-windowed, here upon the mountains. very bravely could i go to molokai, to kalaupapa by the cliffs, to live with the smitten and to sleep there, far from my fathers. but what wrong have i done, what sin lies upon my soul, that i should have encountered kokua coming cool from the sea-water in the evening? kokua, the soul ensnarer! kokua, the light of my life! her may i never wed, her may i look upon no longer, her may i no more handle with my loving hand; and it is for this, it is for you, o kokua! that i pour my lamentations!" now you are to observe what sort of a man keawe was, for he might have dwelt there in the bright house for years, and no one been the wiser of his sickness; but he reckoned nothing of that, if he must lose kokua. and again, he might have wed kokua even as he was; and so many would have done, because they have the souls of pigs; but keawe loved the maid manfully, and he would do her no hurt and bring her in no danger. a little beyond the midst of the night, there came in his mind the recollection of that bottle. he went round to the back porch, and called to memory the day when the devil had looked forth; and at the thought ice ran in his veins. "a dreadful thing is the bottle," thought keawe, "and dreadful is the imp, and it is a dreadful thing to risk the flames of hell. but what other hope have i to cure my sickness or to wed kokua? what!" he thought, "would i beard the devil once, only to get me a house, and not face him again to win kokua?" thereupon he called to mind it was the next day the _hall_ went by on her return to honolulu. "there must i go first," he thought, "and see lopaka. for the best hope that i have now is to find that same bottle i was so pleased to be rid of." never a wink could he sleep; the food stuck in his throat; but he sent a letter to kiano, and, about the time when the steamer would be coming, rode down beside the cliff of the tombs. it rained; his horse went heavily; he looked up at the black mouths of the caves, and he envied the dead that slept there and were done with trouble; and called to mind how he had galloped by the day before, and was astonished. so he came down to hookena, and there was all the country gathered for the steamer as usual. in the shed before the store they sat and jested and passed the news; but there was no matter of speech in keawe's bosom, and he sat in their midst and looked without on the rain falling on the houses, and the surf beating among the rocks, and the sighs arose in his throat. "keawe of the bright house is out of spirits," said one to another. indeed, and so he was, and little wonder. then the _hall_ came, and the whale-boat carried him on board. the after-part of the ship was full of haoles[ ] who had been to visit the volcano, as their custom is; and the midst was crowded with kanakas, and the fore-part with wild bulls from hilo and horses from kaü; but keawe sat apart from all in his sorrow, and watched for the house of kiano. there it sat, low upon the shore in the black rocks, and shaded by the cocoa-palms, and there by the door was a red holoku, no greater than a fly, and going to and fro with a fly's busyness. "ah, queen of my heart," he cried, "i'll venture my dear soul to win you!" soon after, darkness fell, and the cabins were lit up, and the haoles sat and played at the cards and drank whisky as their custom is; but keawe walked the deck all night; and all the next day, as they steamed under the lee of maui or of molokai, he was still pacing to and fro like a wild animal in a menagerie. towards evening they passed diamond head, and came to the pier of honolulu. keawe stepped out among the crowd and began to ask for lopaka. it seemed he had become the owner of a schooner--none better in the islands--and was gone upon an adventure as far as pola-pola or kahiki; so there was no help to be looked for from lopaka. keawe called to mind a friend of his, a lawyer in the town (i must not tell his name), and inquired of him. they said he was grown suddenly rich, and had a fine new house upon waikiki shore; and this put a thought in keawe's head, and he called a hack and drove to the lawyer's house. the house was all brand new, and the trees in the garden no greater than walking-sticks, and the lawyer, when he came, had the air of a man well pleased. "what can i do to serve you?" said the lawyer. "you are a friend of lopaka's," replied keawe, "and lopaka purchased from me a certain piece of goods that i thought you might enable me to trace." the lawyer's face became very dark. "i do not profess to misunderstand you, mr. keawe," said he, "though this is an ugly business to be stirring in. you may be sure i know nothing, but yet i have a guess, and if you would apply in a certain quarter i think you might have news." and he named the name of a man, which, again, i had better not repeat. so it was for days, and keawe went from one to another, finding everywhere new clothes and carriages, and fine new houses, and men everywhere in great contentment, although, to be sure, when he hinted at his business their faces would cloud over. "no doubt i am upon the track," thought keawe. "these new clothes and carriages are all the gifts of the little imp, and these glad faces are the faces of men who have taken their profit and got rid of the accursed thing in safety. when i see pale cheeks and hear sighing, i shall know that i am near the bottle." so it befell at last that he was recommended to a haole in beritania street. when he came to the door, about the hour of the evening meal, there were the usual marks of the new house, and the young garden, and the electric light shining in the windows; but when the owner came, a shock of hope and fear ran through keawe; for here was a young man, white as a corpse, and black about the eyes, the hair shedding from his head, and such a look in his countenance as a man may have when he is waiting for the gallows. "here it is, to be sure," thought keawe, and so with this man he noways veiled his errand. "i am come to buy the bottle," said he. at the word, the young haole of beritania street reeled against the wall. "the bottle!" he gasped. "to buy the bottle!" then he seemed to choke, and seizing keawe by the arm carried him into a room and poured out wine in two glasses. "here is my respects," said keawe, who had been much about with haoles in his time. "yes," he added, "i am come to buy the bottle. what is the price by now?" at that word the young man let his glass slip through his fingers, and looked upon keawe like a ghost. "the price," says he; "the price! you do not know the price?" "it is for that i am asking you," returned keawe. "but why are you so much concerned? is there anything wrong about the price?" "it has dropped a great deal in value since your time, mr. keawe," said the young man, stammering. "well, well, i shall have the less to pay for it," says keawe. "how much did it cost you?" the young man was as white as a sheet. "two cents," said he. "what!" cried keawe, "two cents? why, then, you can only sell it for one. and he who buys it----" the words died upon keawe's tongue; he who bought it could never sell it again, the bottle and the bottle imp must abide with him until he died, and when he died must carry him to the red end of hell. the young man of beritania street fell upon his knees. "for god's sake, buy it!" he cried. "you can have all my fortune in the bargain. i was mad when i bought it at that price. i had embezzled money at my store; i was lost else: i must have gone to gaol." "poor creature," said keawe, "you would risk your soul upon so desperate an adventure, and to avoid the proper punishment of your own disgrace; and you think i could hesitate with love in front of me. give me the bottle and the change which i make sure you have all ready. here is a five-cent piece." it was as keawe supposed; the young man had the change ready in a drawer; the bottle changed hands, and keawe's fingers were no sooner clasped upon the stalk than he had breathed his wish to be a clean man. and, sure enough, when he got home to his room, and stripped himself before a glass, his flesh was whole like an infant's. and here was the strange thing: he had no sooner seen this miracle than his mind was changed within him, and he cared naught for the chinese evil, and little enough for kokua; and had but the one thought, that here he was bound to the bottle imp for time and for eternity, and had no better hope but to be a cinder for ever in the flames of hell. away ahead of him he saw them blaze with his mind's eye, and his soul shrank, and darkness fell upon the light. when keawe came to himself a little, he was aware it was the night when the band played at the hotel. thither he went, because he feared to be alone; and there, among happy faces, walked to and fro, and heard the tunes go up and down, and saw berger beat the measure, and all the while he heard the flames crackle, and saw the red fire burning in the bottomless pit. of a sudden the band played _hiki-ao-ao_; that was a song that he had sung with kokua, and at the strain courage returned to him. "it is done now," he thought, "and once more let me take the good along with the evil." so it befell that he returned to hawaii by the first steamer, and as soon as it could be managed he was wedded to kokua, and carried her up the mountain side to the bright house. now it was so with these two, that when they were together, keawe's heart was stilled; but so soon as he was alone he fell into a brooding horror, and heard the flames crackle, and saw the red fire burn in the bottomless pit. the girl, indeed, had come to him wholly; her heart leapt in her side at sight of him, her hand clung to his; and she was so fashioned from the hair upon her head to the nails upon her toes that none could see her without joy. she was pleasant in her nature. she had the good word always. full of song she was, and went to and fro in the bright house, the brightest thing in its three stories, carolling like the birds. and keawe beheld and heard her with delight, and then must shrink upon one side, and weep and groan to think upon the price that he had paid for her; and then he must dry his eyes, and wash his face, and go and sit with her on the broad balconies, joining in her songs, and, with a sick spirit, answering her smiles. there came a day when her feet began to be heavy and her songs more rare; and now it was not keawe only that would weep apart, but each would sunder from the other and sit in opposite balconies with the whole width of the bright house betwixt. keawe was so sunk in his despair he scarce observed the change, and was only glad he had more hours to sit alone and brood upon his destiny, and was not so frequently condemned to pull a smiling face on a sick heart. but one day, coming softly through the house, he heard the sound of a child sobbing, and there was kokua rolling her face upon the balcony floor, and weeping like the lost. "you do well to weep in this house, kokua," he said. "and yet i would give the head off my body that you (at least) might have been happy." "happy!" she cried. "keawe, when you lived alone in your bright house, you were the word of the island for a happy man; laughter and song were in your mouth, and your face was as bright as the sunrise. then you wedded poor kokua; and the good god knows what is amiss in her--but from that day you have not smiled. o!" she cried, "what ails me? i thought i was pretty, and i knew i loved him. what ails me that i throw this cloud upon my husband?" "poor kokua," said keawe. he sat down by her side, and sought to take her hand; but that she plucked away. "poor kokua!" he said again. "my poor child--my pretty. and i had thought all this while to spare you! well, you shall know all. then, at least, you will pity poor keawe; then you will understand how much he loved you in the past--that he dared hell for your possession--and how much he loves you still (the poor condemned one), that he can yet call up a smile when he beholds you." with that he told her all, even from the beginning. "you have done this for me?" she cried. "ah, well, then what do i care!"--and she clasped and wept upon him. "ah, child!" said keawe, "and yet, when i consider of the fire of hell, i care a good deal!" "never tell me," said she; "no man can be lost because he loved kokua, and no other fault. i tell you, keawe, i shall save you with these hands, or perish in your company. what! you loved me, and gave your soul, and you think i will not die to save you in return?" "ah, my dear! you might die a hundred times, and what difference would that make?" he cried, "except to leave me lonely till the time comes of my damnation?" "you know nothing," said she. "i was educated in a school in honolulu; i am no common girl. and i tell you, i shall save my lover. what is this you say about a cent? but all the world is not american. in england they have a piece they call a farthing, which is about half a cent. ah! sorrow!" she cried, "that makes it scarcely better, for the buyer must be lost, and we shall find none so brave as my keawe! but then, there is france: they have a small coin there which they call a centime, and these go five to the cent, or thereabout. we could not do better. come, keawe, let us go to the french islands; let us go to tahiti as fast as ships can bear us. there we have four centimes, three centimes, two centimes, one centime; four possible sales to come and go on; and two of us to push the bargain. come, my keawe! kiss me, and banish care. kokua will defend you." "gift of god!" he cried. "i cannot think that god will punish me for desiring aught so good! be it as you will, then; take me where you please: i put my life and my salvation in your hands." early the next day kokua was about her preparations. she took keawe's chest that he went with sailoring; and first she put the bottle in a corner; and then packed it with the richest of their clothes and the bravest of the knick-knacks in the house. "for," said she, "we must seem to be rich folks, or who will believe in the bottle?" all the time of her preparation she was as gay as a bird; only when she looked upon keawe the tears would spring in her eye, and she must run and kiss him. as for keawe, a weight was off his soul; now that he had his secret shared, and some hope in front of him, he seemed like a new man, his feet went lightly on the earth, and his breath was good to him again. yet was terror still at his elbow; and ever and again, as the wind blows out a taper, hope died in him, and he saw the flames toss and the red fire burn in hell. it was given out in the country they were gone pleasuring to the states, which was thought a strange thing, and yet not so strange as the truth, if any could have guessed it. so they went to honolulu in the _hall_, and thence in the _umatilla_ to san francisco with a crowd of haoles, and at san francisco took their passage by the mail brigantine, the _tropic bird_, for papeete, the chief place of the french in the south islands. thither they came, after a pleasant voyage, on a fair day of the trade wind, and saw the reef with the surf breaking, and motuiti with its palms, and the schooner riding withinside, and the white houses of the town low down along the shore among green trees, and overhead the mountains and the clouds of tahiti, the wise island. it was judged the most wise to hire a house, which they did accordingly, opposite the british consul's, to make a great parade of money, and themselves conspicuous with carriages and horses. this it was very easy to do, so long as they had the bottle in their possession; for kokua was more bold than keawe, and, whenever she had a mind, called on the imp for twenty or a hundred dollars. at this rate they soon grew to be remarked in the town; and the strangers from hawaii, their riding and their driving, the fine holokus and the rich lace of kokua, became the matter of much talk. they got on well after the first with the tahitian language, which is indeed like to the hawaiian, with a change of certain letters: and as soon as they had any freedom of speech, began to push the bottle. you are to consider it was not an easy subject to introduce; it was not easy to persuade people you were in earnest, when you offered to sell them for four centimes the spring of health and riches inexhaustible. it was necessary besides to explain the dangers of the bottle; and either people disbelieved the whole thing and laughed, or they thought the more of the darker part, became overcast with gravity, and drew away from keawe and kokua, as from persons who had dealings with the devil. so far from gaining ground, these two began to find they were avoided in the town; the children ran away from them screaming, a thing intolerable to kokua; catholics crossed themselves as they went by; and all persons began with one accord to disengage themselves from their advances. depression fell upon their spirits. they would sit at night in their new house, after a day's weariness, and not exchange one word, or the silence would be broken by kokua bursting suddenly into sobs. sometimes they would pray together; sometimes they would have the bottle out upon the floor, and sit all evening watching how the shadow hovered in the midst. at such times they would be afraid to go to rest. it was long ere slumber came to them, and, if either dozed off, it would be to wake and find the other silently weeping in the dark, or, perhaps, to wake alone, the other having fled from the house and the neighbourhood of that bottle, to pace under the bananas in the little garden, or to wander on the beach by moonlight. one night it was so when kokua awoke. keawe was gone. she felt in the bed, and his place was cold. then fear fell upon her, and she sat up in bed. a little moonshine filtered through the shutters. the room was bright, and she could spy that bottle on the floor. outside it blew high, the great trees of the avenue cried aloud, and the fallen leaves rattled in the verandah. in the midst of this kokua was aware of another sound; whether of a beast or of a man she could scarce tell, but it was as sad as death, and cut her to the soul. softly she arose, set the door ajar, and looked forth into the moonlit yard. there, under the bananas, lay keawe, his mouth in the dust, and as he lay he moaned. it was kokua's first thought to run forward and console him; her second potently withheld her. keawe had borne himself before his wife like a brave man; it became her little in the hour of weakness to intrude upon his shame. with the thought she drew back into the house. "heaven!" she thought, "how careless have i been--how weak! it is he, not i, that stands in this eternal peril; it was he, not i, that took the curse upon his soul. it is for my sake, and for the love of a creature of so little worth and such poor help, that he now beholds so close to him the flames of hell--ay, and smells the smoke of it, lying without there in the wind and moonlight. am i so dull of spirit that never till now i have surmised my duty, or have i seen it before and turned aside? but now, at least, i take up my soul in both the hands of my affection; now i say farewell to the white steps of heaven and the waiting faces of my friends. a love for a love, and let mine be equalled with keawe's! a soul for a soul, and be it mine to perish!" she was a deft woman with her hands, and was soon apparelled. she took in her hands the change--the precious centimes they kept ever at their side; for this coin is little used, and they had made provision at a government office. when she was forth in the avenue clouds came on the wind, and the moon was blackened. the town slept, and she knew not whither to turn till she heard one coughing in the shadow of the trees. "old man," said kokua, "what do you here abroad in the cold night?" the old man could scarce express himself for coughing, but she made out that he was old and poor, and a stranger in the island. "will you do me a service?" said kokua. "as one stranger to another, and as an old man to a young woman, will you help a daughter of hawaii?" "ah," said the old man. "so you are the witch from the eight islands, and even my old soul you seek to entangle. but i have heard of you, and defy your wickedness." "sit down here," said kokua, "and let me tell you a tale." and she told him the story of keawe from the beginning to the end. "and now," said she, "i am his wife, whom he bought with his soul's welfare. and what should i do? if i went to him myself and offered to buy it, he would refuse. but if you go, he will sell it eagerly; i will await you here; you will buy it for four centimes, and i will buy it again for three. and the lord strengthen a poor girl!" "if you meant falsely," said the old man, "i think god would strike you dead." "he would!" cried kokua. "be sure he would. i could not be so treacherous--god would not suffer it." "give me the four centimes and await me here," said the old man. now, when kokua stood alone in the street her spirit died. the wind roared in the trees, and it seemed to her the rushing of the flames of hell; the shadows tossed in the light of the street lamp, and they seemed to her the snatching hands of the evil ones. if she had had the strength, she must have run away, and if she had had the breath she must have screamed aloud; but in truth she could do neither, and stood and trembled in the avenue, like an affrighted child. then she saw the old man returning, and he had the bottle in his hand. "i have done your bidding," said he. "i left your husband weeping like a child; to-night he will sleep easy." and he held the bottle forth. "before you give it me," kokua panted, "take the good with the evil--ask to be delivered from your cough." "i am an old man," replied the other, "and too near the gate of the grave to take a favour from the devil.--but what is this? why do you not take the bottle? do you hesitate?" "not hesitate!" cried kokua. "i am only weak. give me a moment. it is my hand resists, my flesh shrinks back from the accursed thing. one moment only!" the old man looked upon kokua kindly. "poor child!" said he, "you fear; your soul misgives you. well, let me keep it. i am old, and can never more be happy in this world, and as for the next--" "give it me!" gasped kokua. "there is your money. do you think i am so base as that? give me the bottle." "god bless you, child," said the old man. kokua concealed the bottle under her holoku, said farewell to the old man, and walked off along the avenue, she cared not whither. for all roads were now the same to her, and led equally to hell. sometimes she walked, and sometimes ran; sometimes she screamed out loud in the night, and sometimes lay by the wayside in the dust and wept. all that she had heard of hell came back to her; she saw the flames blaze, and she smelt the smoke, and her flesh withered on the coals. near day she came to her mind again, and returned to the house. it was even as the old man said--keawe slumbered like a child. kokua stood and gazed upon his face. "now, my husband," said she, "it is your turn to sleep. when you wake it will be your turn to sing and laugh. but for poor kokua, alas! that meant no evil--for poor kokua no more sleep, no more singing, no more delight, whether in earth or heaven." with that she lay down in the bed by his side, and her misery was so extreme that she fell in a deep slumber instantly. late in the morning her husband woke her and gave her the good news. it seemed he was silly with delight, for he paid no heed to her distress, ill though she dissembled it. the words stuck in her mouth, it mattered not; keawe did the speaking. she ate not a bite, but who was to observe it? for keawe cleared the dish. kokua saw and heard him, like some strange thing in a dream; there were times when she forgot or doubted, and put her hands to her brow; to know herself doomed and hear her husband babble seemed so monstrous. all the while keawe was eating and talking, and planning the time of their return, and thanking her for saving him, and fondling her, and calling her the true helper after all. he laughed at the old man that was fool enough to buy that bottle. "a worthy old man he seemed," keawe said. "but no one can judge by appearances. for why did the old reprobate require the bottle?" "my husband," said kokua humbly, "his purpose may have been good." keawe laughed like an angry man. "fiddle-de-dee!" cried keawe. "an old rogue, i tell you, and an old ass to boot. for the bottle was hard enough to sell at four centimes; and at three it will be quite impossible. the margin is not broad enough, the thing begins to smell of scorching--brrr!" said he, and shuddered. "it is true i bought it myself at a cent, when i knew not there were smaller coins. i was a fool for my pains; there will never be found another: and whoever has that bottle now will carry it to the pit." "o my husband!" said kokua. "is it not a terrible thing to save oneself by the eternal ruin of another? it seems to me i could not laugh. i would be humbled. i would be filled with melancholy. i would pray for the poor holder." then keawe, because he felt the truth of what she said, grew the more angry. "heighty-teighty!" cried he. "you may be filled with melancholy if you please. it is not the mind of a good wife. if you thought at all of me you would sit shamed." thereupon he went out, and kokua was alone. what chance had she to sell that bottle at two centimes? none, she perceived. and if she had any there was her husband hurrying her away to a country where there was nothing lower than a cent. and here--on the morrow of her sacrifice--was her husband leaving her and blaming her. she would not even try to profit by what time she had, but sat in the house, and now had the bottle out and viewed it with unutterable fear, and now, with loathing, hid it out of sight. by and by keawe came back, and would have her take a drive. "my husband, i am ill," she said. "i am out of heart. excuse me, i can take no pleasure." then was keawe more wroth than ever. with her, because he thought she was brooding over the case of the old man; and with himself, because he thought she was right, and was ashamed to be so happy. "this is your truth," cried he, "and this your affection! your husband is just saved from eternal ruin, which he encountered for the love of you--and you can take no pleasure! kokua, you have a disloyal heart." he went forth again furious, and wandered in the town all day. he met friends, and drank with them; they hired a carriage and drove into the country, and there drank again. all the time keawe was ill at ease, because he was taking this pastime while his wife was sad, and because he knew in his heart that she was more right than he; and the knowledge made him drink the deeper. now there was an old brutal haole drinking with him, one that had been a boatswain of a whaler, a runaway, a digger in gold mines, a convict in prisons. he had a low mind and a foul mouth; he loved to drink and to see others drunken; and he pressed the glass upon keawe. soon there was no more money in the company. "here you!" says the boatswain, "you are rich, you have been always saying. you have a bottle or some foolishness." "yes," says keawe, "i am rich; i will go back and get some money from my wife, who keeps it." "that's a bad idea, mate," said the boatswain. "never you trust a petticoat with dollars. they're all as false as water; you keep an eye on her." now this word stuck in keawe's mind; for he was muddled with what he had been drinking. "i should not wonder but she was false, indeed," thought he. "why else should she be so cast down at my release? but i will show her i am not the man to be fooled. i will catch her in the act." accordingly, when they were back in town, keawe bade the boatswain wait for him at the corner, by the old calaboose, and went forward up the avenue alone to the door of his house. the night had come again; there was a light within, but never a sound; and keawe crept about the corner, opened the back-door softly, and looked in. there was kokua on the floor, the lamp at her side; before her was a milk-white bottle, with a round belly and a long neck; and as she viewed it, kokua wrung her hands. a long time keawe stood and looked in the doorway. at first he was struck stupid; and then fear fell upon him that the bargain had been made amiss, and the bottle had come back to him as it came at san francisco; and at that his knees were loosened, and the fumes of the wine departed from his head like mists off a river in the morning. and then he had another thought; and it was a strange one, that made his cheeks to burn. "i must make sure of this," thought he. so he closed the door, and went softly round the corner again, and then came noisily in, as though he were but now returned. and, lo! by the time he opened the front door no bottle was to be seen; and kokua sat in a chair and started up like one awakened out of sleep. "i have been drinking all day and making merry," said keawe. "i have been with good companions, and now i only come back for money, and return to drink and carouse with them again." both his face and voice were as stern as judgment, but kokua was too troubled to observe. "you do well to use your own, my husband," said she, and her words trembled. "o, i do well in all things," said keawe, and he went straight to the chest and took out money. but he looked besides in the corner where they kept the bottle, and there was no bottle there. at that the chest heaved upon the floor like a sea-billow, and the house span about him like a wreath of smoke, for he saw he was lost now, and there was no escape. "it is what i feared," he thought. "it is she who has bought it." and then he came to himself a little and rose up; but the sweat streamed on his face as thick as the rain and as cold as the well-water. "kokua," said he, "i said to you to-day what ill became me. now i return to carouse with my jolly companions," and at that he laughed a little quietly. "i will take more pleasure in the cup if you forgive me." she clasped his knees in a moment; she kissed his knees with flowing tears. "o," she cried, "i asked but a kind word!" "let us never one think hardly of the other," said keawe, and was gone out of the house. now, the money that keawe had taken was only some of that store of centime pieces they had laid in at their arrival. it was very sure he had no mind to be drinking. his wife had given her soul for him, now he must give his for hers; no other thought was in the world with him. at the corner, by the old calaboose, there was the boatswain waiting. "my wife has the bottle," said keawe, "and, unless you help me to recover it, there can be no more money and no more liquor to-night." "you do not mean to say you are serious about that bottle?" cried the boatswain. "there is the lamp," said keawe. "do i look as if i was jesting?" "that is so," said the boatswain. "you look as serious as a ghost." "well, then," said keawe, "here are two centimes; you must go to my wife in the house, and offer her these for the bottle, which (if i am not much mistaken) she will give you instantly. bring it to me here, and i will buy it back from you for one; for that is the law with this bottle, that it still must be sold for a less sum. but whatever you do, never breathe a word to her that you have come from me." "mate, i wonder are you making a fool of me?" asked the boatswain. "it will do you no harm if i am," returned keawe. "that is so, mate," said the boatswain. "and if you doubt me," added keawe, "you can try. as soon as you are clear of the house, wish to have your pocket full of money, or a bottle of the best rum, or what you please, and you will see the virtue of the thing." "very well, kanaka," says the boatswain. "i will try; but if you are having your fun out of me, i will take my fun out of you with a belaying-pin." so the whaler-man went off up the avenue; and keawe stood and waited. it was near the same spot where kokua had waited the night before; but keawe was more resolved, and never faltered in his purpose; only his soul was bitter with despair. it seemed a long time he had to wait before he heard a voice singing in the darkness of the avenue. he knew the voice to be the boatswain's; but it was strange how drunken it appeared upon a sudden. next, the man himself came stumbling into the light of the lamp. he had the devil's bottle buttoned in his coat; another bottle was in his hand; and even as he came in view he raised it to his mouth and drank. "you have it," said keawe. "i see that." "hands off!" cried the boatswain, jumping back. "take a step near me and i'll smash your mouth. you thought you could make a cat's-paw of me, did you?" "what do you mean?" cried keawe. "mean?" cried the boatswain. "this is a pretty good bottle, this is; that's what i mean. how i got it for two centimes i can't make out; but i'm sure you shan't have it for one." "you mean you won't sell it?" gasped keawe. "no, _sir!_" cried the boatswain. "but i'll give you a drink of the rum, if you like." "i tell you," said keawe, "the man who has that bottle goes to hell." "i reckon i'm going anyway," returned the sailor; "and this bottle's the best thing to go with i've struck yet. no, sir!" he cried again, "this is my bottle now, and you can go and fish for another." "can this be true?" keawe cried. "for your own sake, i beseech you, sell it me!" "i don't value any of your talk," replied the boatswain. "you thought i was a flat; now you see i'm not; and there's an end. if you won't have a swallow of the rum i'll have one myself. here's your health, and good-night to you!" so off he went down the avenue towards town, and there goes the bottle out of the story. but keawe ran to kokua light as the wind; and great was their joy that night; and great, since then, has been the peace of all their days in the bright house. footnotes: [ ] leprosy. [ ] whites. the isle of voices the isle of voices keola was married with lehua, daughter of kalamake, the wise man of molokai, and he kept his dwelling with the father of his wife. there was no man more cunning than that prophet; he read the stars, he could divine by the bodies of the dead, and by the means of evil creatures: he could go alone into the highest parts of the mountain, into the region of the hobgoblins, and there he would lay snares to entrap the spirits of ancient. for this reason no man was more consulted in all the kingdom of hawaii. prudent people bought, and sold, and married, and laid out their lives by his counsels; and the king had him twice to kona to seek the treasures of kamehameha. neither was any man more feared: of his enemies, some had dwindled in sickness by the virtue of his incantations, and some had been spirited away, the life and the clay both, so that folk looked in vain for so much as a bone of their bodies. it was rumoured that he had the art or the gift of the old heroes. men had seen him at night upon the mountains, stepping from one cliff to the next; they had seen him walking in the high forest, and his head and shoulders were above the trees. this kalamake was a strange man to see. he was come of the best blood in molokai and maui, of a pure descent; and yet he was more white to look upon than any foreigner: his hair the colour of dry grass, and his eyes red and very blind, so that "blind as kalamake, that can see across to-morrow" was a byword in the islands. of all these doings of his father-in-law, keola knew a little by the common repute, a little more he suspected, and the rest he ignored. but there was one thing troubled him. kalamake was a man that spared for nothing, whether to eat or to drink or to wear; and for all he paid in bright new dollars. "bright as kalamake's dollars" was another saying in the eight isles. yet he neither sold, nor planted, nor took hire--only now and then for his sorceries--and there was no source conceivable for so much silver coin. it chanced one day keola's wife was gone upon a visit to kaunakakai, on the lee side of the island, and the men were forth at the sea-fishing. but keola was an idle dog, and he lay in the verandah and watched the surf beat on the shore and the birds fly about the cliff. it was a chief thought with him always--the thought of the bright dollars. when he lay down to bed he would be wondering why they were so many, and when he woke at morn he would be wondering why they were all new; and the thing was never absent from his mind. but this day of all days he made sure in his heart of some discovery. for it seems he had observed the place where kalamake kept his treasure, which was a lockfast desk against the parlour wall, under the print of kamehameha the fifth, and a photograph of queen victoria with her crown; and it seems again that, no later than the night before, he found occasion to look in, and behold! the bag lay there empty. and this was the day of the steamer; he could see her smoke off kalaupapa; and she must soon arrive with a month's goods, tinned salmon and gin, and all manner of rare luxuries for kalamake. "now if he can pay for his goods to-day," keola thought, "i shall know for certain that the man is a warlock, and the dollars come out of the devil's pocket." while he was so thinking, there was his father-in-law behind him, looking vexed. "is that the steamer?" he asked. "yes," said keola. "she has but to call at pelekunu, and then she will be here." "there is no help for it then," returned kalamake, "and i must take you in my confidence, keola, for the lack of anyone better. come here within the house." so they stepped together into the parlour, which was a very fine room, papered and hung with prints, and furnished with a rocking-chair, and a table and a sofa in the european style. there was a shelf of books besides, and a family bible in the midst of the table, and the lockfast writing-desk against the wall; so that anyone could see it was the house of a man of substance. kalamake made keola close the shutters of the windows, while he himself locked all the doors and set open the lid of the desk. from this he brought forth a pair of necklaces, hung with charms and shells, a bundle of dried herbs, and the dried leaves of trees, and a green branch of palm. "what i am about," said he, "is a thing beyond wonder. the men of old were wise; they wrought marvels, and this among the rest; but that was at night, in the dark, under the fit stars and in the desert. the same will i do here in my own house and under the plain eye of day." so saying, he put the bible under the cushion of the sofa so that it was all covered, brought out from the same place a mat of a wonderfully fine texture, and heaped the herbs and leaves on sand in a tin pan. and then he and keola put on the necklaces and took their stand upon the opposite corners of the mat. "the time comes," said the warlock; "be not afraid." with that he set flame to the herbs, and began to mutter and wave the branch of palm. at first the light was dim because of the closed shutters; but the herbs caught strongly afire, and the flames beat upon keola, and the room glowed with the burning: and next the smoke rose and made his head swim and his eyes darken, and the sound of kalamake muttering ran in his ears. and suddenly, to the mat on which they were standing came a snatch or twitch, that seemed to be more swift than lightning. in the same wink the room was gone and the house, the breath all beaten from keola's body. volumes of light rolled upon his eyes and head, and he found himself transported to a beach of the sea, under a strong sun, with a great surf roaring: he and the warlock standing there on the same mat, speechless, gasping and grasping at one another, and passing their hands before their eyes. "what was this?" cried keola, who came to himself the first, because he was the younger. "the pang of it was like death." "it matters not," panted kalamake. "it is now done." "and in the name of god where are we?" cried keola. "that is not the question," replied the sorcerer. "being here, we have matter in our hands, and that we must attend to. go, while i recover my breath, into the borders of the wood, and bring me the leaves of such and such a herb, and such and such a tree, which you will find to grow there plentifully--three handfuls of each. and be speedy. we must be home again before the steamer comes; it would seem strange if we had disappeared." and he sat on the sand and panted. keola went up the beach, which was of shining sand and coral, strewn with singular shells; and he thought in his heart-- "how do i not know this beach? i will come here again and gather shells." in front of him was a line of palms against the sky; not like the palms of the eight islands, but tall and fresh and beautiful, and hanging out withered fans like gold among the green, and he thought in his heart-- "it is strange i should not have found this grove. i will come here again, when it is warm, to sleep." and he thought, "how warm it has grown suddenly!" for it was winter in hawaii, and the day had been chill. and he thought also, "where are the grey mountains? and where is the high cliff with the hanging forest and the wheeling birds?" and the more he considered, the less he might conceive in what quarter of the islands he was fallen. in the border of the grove, where it met the beach, the herb was growing, but the tree farther back. now, as keola went toward the tree, he was aware of a young woman who had nothing on her body but a belt of leaves. "well!" thought keola, "they are not very particular about their dress in this part of the country." and he paused, supposing she would observe him and escape; and, seeing that she still looked before her, stood and hummed aloud. up she leaped at the sound. her face was ashen; she looked this way and that, and her mouth gaped with the terror of her soul. but it was a strange thing that her eyes did not rest upon keola. "good-day," said he. "you need not be so frightened; i will not eat you." and he had scarce opened his mouth before the young woman fled into the bush. "these are strange manners," thought keola. and, not thinking what he did, ran after her. as she ran, the girl kept crying in some speech that was not practised in hawaii, yet some of the words were the same, and he knew she kept calling and warning others. and presently he saw more people running--men, women, and children, one with another, all running and crying like people at a fire. and with that he began to grow afraid himself, and returned to kalamake, bringing the leaves. him he told what he had seen. "you must pay no heed," said kalamake. "all this is like a dream and shadows. all will disappear and be forgotten." "it seemed none saw me," said keola. "and none did," replied the sorcerer. "we walk here in the broad sun invisible by reason of these charms. yet they hear us; and therefore it is well to speak softly, as i do." with that he made a circle round the mat with stones, and in the midst he set the leaves. "it will be your part," said he, "to keep the leaves alight, and feed the fire slowly. while they blaze (which is but for a little moment) i must do my errand; and before the ashes blacken, the same power that brought us carries us away. be ready now with the match; and do you call me in good time, lest the flames burn out and i be left." as soon as the leaves caught, the sorcerer leaped like a deer out of the circle, and began to race along the beach like a hound that has been bathing. as he ran he kept stooping to snatch shells; and it seemed to keola that they glittered as he took them. the leaves blazed with a clear flame that consumed them swiftly; and presently keola had but a handful left, and the sorcerer was far off, running and stooping. "back!" cried keola. "back! the leaves are near done." at that kalamake turned, and if he had run before, now he flew. but fast as he ran, the leaves burned faster. the flame was ready to expire when, with a great leap, he bounded on the mat. the wind of his leaping blew it out; and with that the beach was gone, and the sun and the sea, and they stood once more in the dimness of the shuttered parlour, and were once more shaken and blinded; and on the mat betwixt them lay a pile of shining dollars. keola ran to the shutters; and there was the steamer tossing in the swell close in. the same night kalamake took his son-in-law apart, and gave him five dollars in his hand. "keola," said he, "if you are a wise man (which i am doubtful of) you will think you slept this afternoon on the verandah, and dreamed as you were sleeping. i am a man of few words, and i have for my helpers people of short memories." never a word more said kalamake, nor referred again to that affair. but it ran all the while in keola's head--if he were lazy before he would now do nothing. "why should i work," thought he, "when i have a father-in-law who makes dollars of sea-shells?" presently his share was spent. he spent it all upon fine clothes. and then he was sorry: "for," thought he, "i had done better to have bought a concertina, with which i might have entertained myself all day long." and then he began to grow vexed with kalamake. "this man has the soul of a dog," thought he. "he can gather dollars when he pleases on the beach, and he leaves me to pine for a concertina! let him beware: i am no child, i am as cunning as he, and hold his secret." with that he spoke to his wife lehua, and complained of her father's manners. "i would let my father be," said lehua. "he is a dangerous man to cross." "i care that for him!" cried keola; and snapped his fingers. "i have him by the nose. i can make him do what i please." and he told lehua the story. but she shook her head. "you may do what you like," said she; "but as sure as you thwart my father, you will be no more heard of. think of this person, and that person; think of hua, who was a noble of the house of representatives, and went to honolulu every year; and not a bone or a hair of him was found. remember kamau, and how he wasted to a thread, so that his wife lifted him with one hand. keola, you are a baby in my father's hands; he will take you with his thumb and finger and eat you like a shrimp." now keola was truly afraid of kalamake, but he was vain too; and these words of his wife incensed him. "very well," said he, "if that is what you think of me, i will show how much you are deceived." and he went straight to where his father-in-law was sitting in the parlour. "kalamake," said he, "i want a concertina." "do you indeed?" said kalamake. "yes," said he, "and i may as well tell you plainly, i mean to have it. a man who picks up dollars on the beach can certainly afford a concertina." "i had no idea you had so much spirit," replied the sorcerer. "i thought you were a timid, useless lad, and i cannot describe how much pleased i am to find i was mistaken. now i begin to think i may have found an assistant and successor in my difficult business. a concertina? you shall have the best in honolulu. and to-night, as soon as it is dark, you and i will go and find the money." "shall we return to the beach?" asked keola. "no, no!" replied kalamake; "you must begin to learn more of my secrets. last time i taught you to pick shells; this time i shall teach you to catch fish. are you strong enough to launch pili's boat?" "i think i am," returned keola. "but why should we not take your own, which is afloat already?" "i have a reason which you will understand thoroughly before to-morrow," said kalamake. "pili's boat is the better suited for my purpose. so, if you please, let us meet there as soon as it is dark; and in the meanwhile let us keep our own counsel, for there is no cause to let the family into our business." honey is not more sweet than was the voice of kalamake, and keola could scarce contain his satisfaction. "i might have had my concertina weeks ago," thought he, "and there is nothing needed in this world but a little courage." presently after he espied lehua weeping, and was half in a mind to tell her all was well. "but no," thinks he; "i shall wait till i can show her the concertina; we shall see what the chit will do then. perhaps she will understand in the future that her husband is a man of some intelligence." as soon as it was dark, father and son-in-law launched pili's boat and set the sail. there was a great sea, and it blew strong from the leeward; but the boat was swift and light and dry, and skimmed the waves. the wizard had a lantern, which he lit and held with his finger through the ring; and the two sat in the stern and smoked cigars, of which kalamake had always a provision, and spoke like friends of magic and the great sums of money which they could make by its exercise, and what they should buy first, and what second; and kalamake talked like a father. presently he looked all about, and above him at the stars, and back at the island, which was already three parts sunk under the sea, and he seemed to consider ripely his position. "look!" says he, "there is molokai already far behind us, and maui like a cloud; and by the bearing of these three stars i know i am come where i desire. this part of the sea is called the sea of the dead. it is in this place extraordinarily deep, and the floor is all covered with the bones of men, and in the holes of this part gods and goblins keep their habitation. the flow of the sea is to the north, stronger than a shark can swim, and any man who shall here be thrown out of a ship it bears away like a wild horse into the uttermost ocean. presently he is spent and goes down, and his bones are scattered with the rest, and the gods devour his spirit." fear came on keola at the words, and he looked, and by the light of the stars and the lantern the warlock seemed to change. "what ails you?" cried keola, quick and sharp. "it is not i who am ailing," said the wizard; "but there is one here very sick." with that he changed his grasp upon the lantern, and, behold! as he drew his finger from the ring, the finger stuck and the ring was burst, and his hand was grown to be of the bigness of three. at that sight keola screamed and covered his face. but kalamake held up the lantern. "look rather at my face!" said he--and his head was huge as a barrel; and still he grew and grew as a cloud grows on a mountain, and keola sat before him screaming, and the boat raced on the great seas. "and now," said the wizard, "what do you think about that concertina? and are you sure you would not rather have a flute? no?" says he; "that is well, for i do not like my family to be changeable of purpose. but i begin to think i had better get out of this paltry boat, for my bulk swells to a very unusual degree, and if we are not the more careful, she will presently be swamped." with that he threw his legs over the side. even as he did so, the greatness of the man grew thirty-fold and forty-fold as swift as sight or thinking, so that he stood in the deep seas to the armpits, and his head and shoulders rose like a high isle, and the swell beat and burst upon his bosom, as it beats and breaks against a cliff. the boat ran still to the north, but he reached out his hand, and took the gunwale by the finger and thumb, and broke the side like a biscuit, and keola was spilled into the sea. and the pieces of the boat the sorcerer crushed in the hollow of his hand and flung miles away into the night. "excuse me taking the lantern," said he; "for i have a long wade before me, and the land is far, and the bottom of the sea uneven, and i feel the bones under my toes." and he turned and went off walking with great strides; and as often as keola sank in the trough he could see him no longer; but as often as he was heaved upon the crest, there he was striding and dwindling, and he held the lamp high over his head, and the waves broke white about him as he went. since first the islands were fished out of the sea there was never a man so terrified as this keola. he swam indeed, but he swam as puppies swim when they are cast in to drown, and knew not wherefore. he could but think of the hugeness of the swelling of the warlock, of that face which was as great as a mountain, of those shoulders that were broad as an isle, and of the seas that beat on them in vain. he thought, too, of the concertina, and shame took hold upon him; and of the dead men's bones, and fear shook him. of a sudden he was aware of something dark against the stars that tossed, and a light below, and a brightness of the cloven sea; and he heard speech of men. he cried out aloud and a voice answered; and in a twinkling the bows of a ship hung above him on a wave like a thing balanced, and swooped down. he caught with his two hands in the chains of her, and the next moment was buried in the rushing seas, and the next hauled on board by seamen. they gave him gin and biscuit and dry clothes, and asked him how he came where they found him, and whether the light which they had seen was the lighthouse lae o ka laau. but keola knew white men are like children and only believe their own stories; so about himself he told them what he pleased, and as for the light (which was kalamake's lantern) he vowed he had seen none. this ship was a schooner bound for honolulu and then to trade in the low islands; and by a very good chance for keola she had lost a man off the bowsprit in a squall. it was no use talking. keola durst not stay in the eight islands. word goes so quickly, and all men are so fond to talk and carry news, that if he hid in the north end of kauai or in the south end of kaü, the wizard would have wind of it before a month, and he must perish. so he did what seemed the most prudent, and shipped sailor in the place of the man who had been drowned. in some ways the ship was a good place. the food was extraordinarily rich and plenty, with biscuits and salt beef every day, and pea-soup and puddings made of flour and suet twice a week, so that keola grew fat. the captain also was a good man, and the crew no worse than other whites. the trouble was the mate, who was the most difficult man to please keola had ever met with, and beat and cursed him daily, both for what he did and what he did not. the blows that he dealt were very sore, for he was strong; and the words he used were very unpalatable, for keola was come of a good family and accustomed to respect. and what was the worst of all, whenever keola found a chance to sleep, there was the mate awake and stirring him up with a rope's end. keola saw it would never do; and he made up his mind to run away. they were about a month out from honolulu when they made the land. it was a fine starry night, the sea was smooth as well as the sky fair; it blew a steady trade; and there was the island on their weather bow, a ribbon of palm-trees lying flat along the sea. the captain and the mate looked at it with the night-glass, and named the name of it, and talked of it, beside the wheel where keola was steering. it seemed it was an isle where no traders came. by the captain's way, it was an isle besides where no man dwelt; but the mate thought otherwise. "i don't give a cent for the directory," said he. "i've been past here one night in the schooner _eugenie_; it was just such a night as this; they were fishing with torches, and the beach was thick with lights like a town." "well, well," says the captain, "it's steep-to, that's the great point; and there ain't any outlying dangers by the chart, so we'll just hug the lee side of it.--keep her romping full, don't i tell you!" he cried to keola, who was listening so hard that he forgot to steer. and the mate cursed him, and swore that kanaka was for no use in the world, and if he got started after him with a belaying-pin, it would be a cold day for keola. and so the captain and mate lay down on the house together, and keola was left to himself. "this island will do very well for me," he thought; "if no traders deal there, the mate will never come. and as for kalamake, it is not possible he can ever get as far as this." with that he kept edging the schooner nearer in. he had to do this quietly, for it was the trouble with these white men, and above all with the mate, that you could never be sure of them; they would be all sleeping sound, or else pretending, and if a sail shook they would jump to their feet and fall on you with a rope's end. so keola edged her up little by little, and kept all drawing. and presently the land was close on board, and the sound of the sea on the sides of it grew loud. with that the mate sat up suddenly upon the house. "what are you doing?" he roars. "you'll have the ship ashore!" and he made one bound for keola, and keola made another clean over the rail and plump into the starry sea. when he came up again, the schooner had payed off on her true course, and the mate stood by the wheel himself, and keola heard him cursing. the sea was smooth under the lee of the island; it was warm besides, and keola had his sailor's knife, so he had no fear of sharks. a little way before him the trees stopped; there was a break in the line of the land like the mouth of a harbour; and the tide, which was then flowing, took him up and carried him through. one minute he was without, and the next within: had floated there in a wide shallow water, bright with ten thousand stars, and all about him was the ring of the land, with its string of palm-trees. and he was amazed, because this was a kind of island he had never heard of. the time of keola in that place was in two periods--the period when he was alone, and the period when he was there with the tribe. at first he sought everywhere and found no man; only some houses standing in a hamlet, and the marks of fires. but the ashes of the fires were cold and the rains had washed them away; and the winds had blown, and some of the huts were overthrown. it was here he took his dwelling; and he made a fire drill, and a shell hook, and fished and cooked his fish, and climbed after green cocoa-nuts, the juice of which he drank, for in all the isle there was no water. the days were long to him, and the nights terrifying. he made a lamp of cocoa-shell, and drew the oil of the ripe nuts, and made a wick of fibre; and when evening came he closed up his hut, and lit his lamp, and lay and trembled till morning. many a time he thought in his heart he would have been better in the bottom of the sea, his bones rolling there with the others. all this while he kept by the inside of the island, for the huts were on the shore of the lagoon, and it was there the palms grew best, and the lagoon itself abounded with good fish. and to the outer side he went once only, and he looked but the once at the beach of the ocean, and came away shaking. for the look of it, with its bright sand, and strewn shells, and strong sun and surf, went sore against his inclination. "it cannot be," he thought, "and yet it is very like. and how do i know? these white men, although they pretend to know where they are sailing, must take their chance like other people. so that after all we may have sailed in a circle, and i may be quite near to molokai, and this may be the very beach where my father-in-law gathers his dollars." so after that he was prudent, and kept to the land side. it was perhaps a month later, when the people of the place arrived--the fill of six great boats. they were a fine race of men, and spoke a tongue that sounded very different from the tongue of hawaii, but so many of the words were the same that it was not difficult to understand. the men besides were very courteous, and the women very towardly; and they made keola welcome, and built him a house, and gave him a wife; and, what surprised him the most, he was never sent to work with the young men. and now keola had three periods. first he had a period of being very sad, and then he had a period when he was pretty merry. last of all came the third, when he was the most terrified man in the four oceans. the cause of the first period was the girl he had to wife. he was in doubt about the island, and he might have been in doubt about the speech, of which he had heard so little when he came there with the wizard on the mat. but about his wife there was no mistake conceivable, for she was the same girl that ran from him crying in the wood. so he had sailed all this way, and might as well have stayed in molokai; and had left home and wife and all his friends for no other cause but to escape his enemy, and the place he had come to was that wizard's hunting-ground, and the shore where he walked invisible. it was at this period when he kept the most close to the lagoon side, and, as far as he dared, abode in the cover of his hut. the cause of the second period was talk he heard from his wife and the chief islanders. keola himself said little. he was never so sure of his new friends, for he judged they were too civil to be wholesome, and since he had grown better acquainted with his father-in-law the man had grown more cautious. so he told them nothing of himself, but only his name and descent, and that he came from the eight islands, and what fine islands they were; and about the king's palace in honolulu, and how he was a chief friend of the king and the missionaries. but he put many questions and learned much. the island where he was was called the isle of voices; it belonged to the tribe, but they made their home upon another, three hours' sail to the southward. there they lived and had their permanent houses, and it was a rich island, where were eggs and chickens and pigs, and ships came trading with rum and tobacco. it was there the schooner had gone after keola deserted; there, too, the mate had died, like the fool of a white man as he was. it seems, when the ship came, it was the beginning of the sickly season in that isle; when the fish of the lagoon are poisonous, and all who eat of them swell up and die. the mate was told of it; he saw the boats preparing, because in that season the people leave that island and sail to the isle of voices; but he was a fool of a white man, who would believe no stories but his own, and he caught one of these fish, cooked it and ate it, and swelled up and died, which was good news to keola. as for the isle of voices, it lay solitary the most part of the year; only now and then a boat's crew came for copra, and in the bad season, when the fish at the main isle were poisonous, the tribe dwelt there in a body. it had its name from a marvel, for it seemed the sea-side of it was all beset with invisible devils; day and night you heard them talking one with another in strange tongues; day and night little fires blazed up and were extinguished on the beach; and what was the cause of these doings no man might conceive. keola asked them if it were the same in their own island where they stayed, and they told him no, not there; nor yet in any other of some hundred isles that lay all about them in that sea; but it was a thing peculiar to the isle of voices. they told him also that these fires and voices were ever on the seaside and in the seaward fringes of the wood, and a man might dwell by the lagoon two thousand years (if he could live so long) and never be any way troubled; and even on the sea-side the devils did no harm if let alone. only once a chief had cast a spear at one of the voices, and the same night he fell out of a cocoa-nut palm and was killed. keola thought a good bit with himself. he saw he would be all right when the tribe returned to the main island, and right enough where he was, if he kept by the lagoon, yet he had a mind to make things righter if he could. so he told the high chief he had once been in an isle that was pestered the same way, and the folk had found a means to cure that trouble. "there was a tree growing in the bush there," says he, "and it seems these devils came to get the leaves of it. so the people of the isle cut down the tree wherever it was found, and the devils came no more." they asked what kind of tree this was, and he showed them the tree of which kalamake burned the leaves. they found it hard to believe, yet the idea tickled them. night after night the old men debated it in their councils, but the high chief (though he was a brave man) was afraid of the matter, and reminded them daily of the chief who cast a spear against the voices and was killed, and the thought of that brought all to a stand again. though he could not yet bring about the destruction of the trees, keola was well enough pleased, and began to look about him and take pleasure in his days; and, among other things, he was the kinder to his wife, so that the girl began to love him greatly. one day he came to the hut, and she lay on the ground lamenting. "why," said keola, "what is wrong with you now?" she declared it was nothing. the same night she woke him. the lamp burned very low, but he saw by her face she was in sorrow. "keola," she said, "put your ear to my mouth that i may whisper, for no one must hear us. two days before the boats begin to be got ready, go you to the sea-side of the isle and lie in a thicket. we shall choose that place before-hand, you and i; and hide food; and every night i shall come near by there singing. so when a night comes and you do not hear me, you shall know we are clean gone out of the island, and you may come forth again in safety." the soul of keola died within him. "what is this?" he cried. "i cannot live among devils. i will not be left behind upon this isle. i am dying to leave it." "you will never leave it alive, my poor keola," said the girl; "for to tell you the truth, my people are eaters of men; but this they keep secret. and the reason they will kill you before we leave is because in our island ships come, and donat-kimaran comes and talks for the french, and there is a white trader there in a house with a verandah, and a catechist. o, that is a fine place indeed! the trader has barrels filled with flour; and a french war-ship once came in the lagoon and gave everybody wine and biscuit. ah, my poor keola, i wish i could take you there, for great is my love to you, and it is the finest place in the seas except papeete." so now keola was the most terrified man in the four oceans. he had heard tell of eaters of men in the south islands, and the thing had always been a fear to him; and here it was knocking at his door. he had heard besides, by travellers, of their practices, and how when they are in a mind to eat a man they cherish and fondle him like a mother with a favourite baby. and he saw this must be his own case; and that was why he had been housed, and fed, and wived, and liberated from all work; and why the old men and the chiefs discoursed with him like a person of weight. so he lay on his bed and railed upon his destiny; and the flesh curdled on his bones. the next day the people of the tribe were very civil, as their way was. they were elegant speakers, and they made beautiful poetry, and jested at meals, so that a missionary must have died laughing. it was little enough keola cared for their fine ways; all he saw was the white teeth shining in their mouths, and his gorge rose at the sight; and when they were done eating, he went and lay in the bush like a dead man. the next day it was the same, and then his wife followed him. "keola," she said, "if you do not eat, i tell you plainly you will be killed and cooked to-morrow. some of the old chiefs are murmuring already. they think you are fallen sick and must lose flesh." with that keola got to his feet, and anger burned in him. "it is little i care one way or the other," said he. "i am between the devil and the deep sea. since die i must, let me die the quickest way; and since i must be eaten at the best of it, let me rather be eaten by hobgoblins than by men. farewell," said he, and he left her standing, and walked to the sea-side of that island. it was all bare in the strong sun; there was no sign of man, only the beach was trodden, and all about him as he went the voices talked and whispered, and the little fires sprang up and burned down. all tongues of the earth were spoken there; the french, the dutch, the russian, the tamil, the chinese. whatever land knew sorcery, there were some of its people whispering in keola's ear. that beach was thick as a cried fair, yet no man seen; and as he walked he saw the shells vanish before him, and no man to pick them up. i think the devil would have been afraid to be alone in such a company: but keola was past fear and courted death. when the fires sprang up, he charged for them like a bull. bodiless voices called to and fro; unseen hands poured sand upon the flames; and they were gone from the beach before he reached them. "it is plain kalamake is not here," he thought, "or i must have been killed long since." with that he sat him down in the margin of the wood, for he was tired, and put his chin upon his hands. the business before his eyes continued: the beach babbled with voices, and the fires sprang up and sank, and the shells vanished and were renewed again even while he looked. "it was a by-day when i was here before," he thought, "for it was nothing to this." and his head was dizzy with the thought of these millions and millions of dollars, and all these hundreds and hundreds of persons culling them upon the beach and flying in the air higher and swifter than eagles. "and to think how they have fooled me with their talk of mints," says he, "and that money was made there, when it is clear that all the new coin in all the world is gathered on these sands! but i will know better the next time!" said he. and at last, he knew not very well how or when, sleep fell on keola, and he forgot the island and all his sorrows. early the next day, before the sun was yet up, a bustle woke him. he awoke in fear, for he thought the tribe had caught him napping; but it was no such matter. only, on the beach in front of him, the bodiless voices called and shouted one upon another, and it seemed they all passed and swept beside him up the coast of the island. "what is afoot now?" thinks keola. and it was plain to him it was something beyond ordinary, for the fires were not lighted nor the shells taken, but the bodiless voices kept posting up the beach, and hailing and dying away; and others following, and by the sound of them these wizards should be angry. "it is not me they are angry at," thought keola, "for they pass me close." as when hounds go by, or horses in a race, or city folk coursing to a fire, and all men join and follow after, so it was now with keola; and he knew not what he did, nor why he did it, but there, lo and behold! he was running with the voices. so he turned one point of the island, and this brought him in view of a second; and there he remembered the wizard trees to have been growing by the score together in a wood. from this point there went up a hubbub of men crying not to be described; and by the sound of them, those that he ran with shaped their course for the same quarter. a little nearer, and there began to mingle with the outcry the crash of many axes. and at this a thought came at last into his mind that the high chief had consented; that the men of the tribe had set-to cutting down these trees; that word had gone about the isle from sorcerer to sorcerer, and these were all now assembling to defend their trees. desire of strange things swept him on. he posted with the voices, crossed the beach, and came into the borders of the wood, and stood astonished. one tree had fallen, others were part hewed away. there was the tribe clustered. they were back to back, and bodies lay, and blood flowed among their feet. the hue of fear was on all their faces: their voices went up to heaven shrill as a weasel's cry. have you seen a child when he is all alone and has a wooden sword, and fights, leaping and hewing with the empty air? even so the man-eaters huddled back to back, and heaved up their axes, and laid on, and screamed as they laid on, and behold! no man to contend with them! only here and there keola saw an axe swinging over against them without hands; and time and again a man of the tribe would fall before it, clove in twain or burst asunder, and his soul sped howling. for a while keola looked upon this prodigy like one that dreams, and then fear took him by the midst as sharp as death, that he should behold such doings. even in that same flash the high chief of the clan espied him standing, and pointed and called out his name. thereat the whole tribe saw him also, and their eyes flashed, and their teeth clashed. "i am too long here," thought keola, and ran further out of the wood and down the beach, not caring whither. "keola!" said a voice close by upon the empty sand. "lehua! is that you?" he cried, and gasped, and looked in vain for her; but by the eyesight he was stark alone. "i saw you pass before," the voice answered; "but you would not hear me.--quick! get the leaves and the herbs, and let us free." "you are there with the mat?" he asked. "here, at your side," said she. and he felt her arms about him.--"quick! the leaves and the herbs, before my father can get back!" so keola ran for his life, and fetched the wizard fuel: and lehua guided him back, and set his feet upon the mat, and made the fire. all the time of its burning the sound of the battle towered out of the wood; the wizards and the man-eaters hard at fight; the wizards, the viewless ones, roaring out aloud like bulls upon a mountain, and the men of the tribe replying shrill and savage out of the terror of their souls. and all the time of the burning, keola stood there and listened, and shook, and watched how the unseen hands of lehua poured the leaves. she poured them fast, and the flame burned high, and scorched keola's hands; and she speeded and blew the burning with her breath. the last leaf was eaten, the flame fell, and the shock followed, and there were keola and lehua in the room at home. now, when keola could see his wife at last he was mighty pleased, and he was mighty pleased to be home again in molokai and sit down beside a bowl of poi--for they make no poi on board ships, and there was none in the isle of voices--and he was out of the body with pleasure to be clean escaped out of the hands of the eaters of men. but there was another matter not so clear, and lehua and keola talked of it all night and were troubled. there was kalamake left upon the isle. if, by the blessing of god, he could but stick there, all were well; but should he escape and return to molokai, it would be an ill day for his daughter and her husband. they spoke of his gift of swelling, and whether he could wade that distance in the seas. but keola knew by this time where that island was--and that is to say, in the low or dangerous archipelago. so they fetched the atlas and looked upon the distance in the map, and by what they could make of it, it seemed a far way for an old gentleman to walk. still, it would not do to make too sure of a warlock like kalamake, and they determined at last to take counsel of a white missionary. so the first one that came by, keola told him everything. and the missionary was very sharp on him for taking the second wife in the low island; but for all the rest, he vowed he could make neither head nor tail of it. "however," says he, "if you think this money of your father's ill gotten, my advice to you would be, give some of it to the lepers and some to the missionary fund. and as for this extraordinary rigmarole, you cannot do better than keep it to yourselves." but he warned the police at honolulu that, by all he could make out, kalamake and keola had been coining false money, and it would not be amiss to watch them. keola and lehua took his advice, and gave many dollars to the lepers and the fund. and no doubt the advice must have been good, for from that day to this kalamake has never more been heard of. but whether he was slain in the battle by the trees, or whether he is still kicking his heels upon the isle of voices, who shall say? end of vol. xvii printed by cassell & co., limited, la belle sauvage london, e.c. spanish doubloons by camilla kenyon with frontispiece by louis rogers to l. t. in recognition of her faith in me. contents i an aunt errant ii apollo and some others iii i engage the enemy iv the isle of fortune v the captain's legacy vi the cave with two mouths vii a rabbit's foot viii an excursion and an alarm ix "lassie, lassie . . ." x what crusoe and i found xi miss browne has a vision xii the island queen's freight xiii i bring to light a clue xiv mr. tubbs interrupts xv some secret diplomacy xvi like a chapter from the past xvii from dead hands xviii of which cookie is the hero xix the young person scores xx 'twixt cup and lip xxi the bishop's chest spanish doubloons i an aunt errant never had life seemed more fair and smiling than at the moment when aunt jane's letter descended upon me like a bolt from the blue. the fact is, i was taking a vacation from aunt jane. being an orphan, i was supposed to be under aunt jane's wing, but this was the merest polite fiction, and i am sure that no hen with one chicken worries about it more than i did about aunt jane. i had spent the last three years, since aunt susan died and left aunt jane with all that money and no one to look after her but me, in snatching her from the brink of disaster. her most recent and narrow escape was from a velvet-tongued person of half her years who turned out to be a convict on parole. she had her hand-bag packed for the elopement when i confronted her with this unpleasant fact. when she came to she was bitter instead of grateful, and went about for weeks presenting a spectacle of blighted affections which was too much for the most self-approving conscience. so it ended with my packing her off to new york, where i wrote to her frequently and kindly, urging her not to mind me but to stay as long as she liked. meanwhile i came up to the ranch for a long holiday with bess and the baby, a holiday which had already stretched itself out to thanksgiving, and threatened to last until christmas. people wrote alluringly from town, but what had town to offer compared with a saddle-horse to yourself, and a litter of collie pups to play with, and a baby just learning to walk? i even began to consider ranching as a career, and to picture myself striding over my broad acres in top-boots and corduroys. as to aunt jane, my state of mind was fatuously calm. she was staying with cousins, who live in a suburb and are frightfully respectable. i was sure they numbered no convicts among their acquaintance, or indeed any one from whom aunt jane was likely to require rescuing. and if it came to a retired missionary i was perfectly willing. but the cousins and their respectability are of the passive order, whereas to manage aunt jane demands aggressive and continuous action. hence the bolt from the blue above alluded to. i was swinging tranquilly in the hammock, i remember, when bess brought my letters and then hurried away because the baby had fallen down-stairs. unwarned by the slightest premonitory thrill, i kept aunt jane's letter till the last and skimmed through all the others. i should be thankful, i suppose, that the peace soon to be so rudely shattered was prolonged for those few moments. i recalled afterward, but dimly, as though a gulf of ages yawned between, that i had been quite interested in six pages of prattle about the patterson dance. at last i came to aunt jane. i ripped open the envelope and drew out the letter--a fat one, but then aunt jane's letters are always fat. she says herself that she is of those whose souls flow freely forth in ink but are frozen by the cold eye of an unsympathetic listener. nevertheless, as i spread out the close-filled pages i felt a mild wonder. writing so large, so black, so staggering, so madly underlined, must indicate something above, even aunt jane's usual emotional level. perhaps in sober truth there _was_ a missionary-experiment to "find capital after , or ;" twenty minutes later i staggered into bess's room. "hush!" she said. "don't wake the baby!" "baby or no baby," i whispered savagely, "i've got to have a time-table. i leave for the city tonight to catch the first steamer for panama!" later, while the baby slumbered and i packed experiment to "find period in middle" explained. this was difficult; not that bess is as a general thing obtuse, but because the picture of aunt jane embarking for some wild, lone isle of the pacific as the head of a treasure-seeking expedition was enough to shake the strongest intellect. and yet, amid the welter of ink and eloquence which filled those fateful pages, there was the cold hard fact confronting you. aunt jane was going to look for buried treasure, in company with one violet higglesby-browne, whom she sprung on you without the slightest explanation, as though alluding to the queen of sheba or the siamese twins. by beginning at the end and reading backward--aunt jane's letters are usually most intelligible that way--you managed to piece together some explanation of this miss higglesby-browne and her place in the scheme of things. it was through miss browne, whom she had met at a lecture upon soul-development, that aunt jane had come to realize her claims as an individual upon the cosmos, also to discover that she was by nature a woman of affairs with a talent for directing large enterprises, although _adverse influences_ had hitherto kept her from recognizing her powers. there was a dark significance in these italics, though whether they meant me or the family lawyer i was not sure. miss higglesby-browne, however, had assisted aunt jane to find herself, and as a consequence aunt jane, for the comparatively trifling outlay needful to finance the harding-browne expedition, would shortly be the richer by one-fourth of a vast treasure of spanish doubloons. the knowledge of this hoard was miss higglesby-browne's alone. it had been revealed to her by a dying sailor in a london hospital, whither she had gone on a mission of kindness--you gathered that miss browne was precisely the sort to take advantage when people were helpless and unable to fly from her. why the dying sailor chose to make miss browne the repository of his secret, i don't know--this still remains for me the unsolved mystery. but when the sailor closed his eyes the secret and the map--of course there was a map--had become miss higglesby-browne's. miss browne now had clear before her the road to fortune, but unfortunately it led across the sea and quite out of the route of steamer travel. capital in excess of miss browne's resources was required. london proving cold before its great opportunity, miss browne had shaken off its dust and come to new york, where a mysteriously potent influence had guided her to aunt jane. through miss browne's great organizing abilities, not to speak of those newly brought to light in aunt jane, a party of staunch comrades had been assembled, a steamer engaged to meet them at panama, and it was ho, for the island in the blue pacific main! with this lyrical outburst aunt jane concluded the body of her letter. a small cramped post-script informed me that it was against miss h.-b.'s wishes that she revealed their plans to any one, but that she did want to hear from me before they sailed from panama, where a letter might reach her if i was prompt. however, if it did not she would try not to worry, for miss browne was very psychic, and she felt sure that any strong vibration from me would reach her via miss b., and she was my always loving jane harding. "and of course," i explained to bess as i hurled things into my bags, "if a letter can reach her so can i. at least i must take the chance of it. what those people are up to i don't know--probably they mean to hold her for ransom and murder her outright if it is not forthcoming. or perhaps some of them will marry her and share the spoils with miss higglesby-browne. anyway, i must get to panama in time to save her." "or you might go along to the island," suggested bess. i paused to glare at her. "bess! and let them murder me too?" "or marry you--" cooed bess. one month later i was climbing out of a lumbering hack before the tivoli hotel, which rises square and white and imposing on the low green height above the old spanish city of panama. in spite of the melting tropical heat there was a chill fear at my heart, the fear that aunt jane and her band of treasure-seekers had already departed on their quest. in that case i foresaw that whatever narrow margin of faith my fellow-voyagers on the _city of quito_ had had in me would shrink to nothingness. i had been obliged to be so queer and clam-like about the whole extraordinary rendezvous--for how could i expose aunt jane's madness to the multitude?--that i felt it would take the actual bodily presence of my aunt to convince them that she was not a myth, or at least of the wrong sex for aunts. to have traveled so far in the desperate hope of heading off aunt jane, only to be frustrated and to lose my character besides! it would be a stroke too much from fate, i told myself rebelliously, as i crossed the broad gallery and plunged into the cool dimness of the lobby in the wake of the bellboys who, discerning a helpless prey, had swooped en masse upon my bags. "miss jane harding?" repeated the clerk, and at the cool negation of his tone my heart gave a sickening downward swoop. "miss jane harding and party have left the hotel!" "for--for the island?" i gasped. he raised his eyebrows. "can't say, i'm sure." he gave me an appraising stare. perhaps the woe in my face touched him, for he descended from the eminence of the hotel clerk where he dwelt apart sufficiently to add, "is it important that you should see her?" "i am her niece. i have come all the way from san francisco expecting to join her here." the clerk meditated, his shrewd eyes piercing the very secrets of my soul. "she knew nothing about it," i hastened to add. "i intended it for a surprise." this candor helped my cause. "well," he said, "that explains her not leaving any word. as you are her niece, i suppose it will do no harm to tell you that miss harding and her party embarked this morning on the freighter _rufus smith_, and i think it very likely that the steamer has not left port. if you like i will send a man to the water-front with you and you may be able to go on board and have a talk with your aunt." did i thank him? i have often wondered when i waked up in the night. i have a vision of myself dashing out of the hotel, and then the hack that brought me is bearing me away. bellboys hurled my bags in after me, and i threw them largess recklessly. some arch-bellboy or other potentate had mounted to the seat beside the driver. madly we clattered over cobbled ways. out on the smooth waters of the roadstead lay ships great and small, ships with stripped masts and smokeless funnels, others with faint gray spirals wreathing upward from their stacks. was one of these the _rufus smith_, and would i reach her--or him--before the thin gray feather became a thick black plume? i thought of my aunt at the mercy of these unknown adventurers with whom she had set forth, helpless as a little fat pigeon among hawks, and i felt, desperately, that i must reach her, must save her from them and bring her safe back to shore. how i was to do this at the eleventh hour plus about fifty-seven minutes as at present i hadn't considered. but experience had taught me that once in my clutches aunt jane would offer about as much resistance as a slightly melted wax doll. she gets so soft that you are almost afraid to touch her for fear of leaving dents. so to get there, get there, get there, was the one prayer of my soul. i got there, in a boat hastily commandeered by the hotel clerk's deputy. i suppose he thought me a belated passenger for the rufus smith, for my baggage followed me into the boat. "_pronto_!" he shouted to the native boatman as we put off. "_pronto_!" i urged at intervals, my eyes upon the funnels of the _rufus smith_, where the outpouring smoke was thickening alarmingly. we brought up under the side of the little steamer, and the wide surprised face of a swedish deckhand stared down at us. "let me aboard! i must come aboard!" i cried. other faces appeared, then a rope-ladder. somehow i was mounting it--a dizzy feat to which only the tumult of my emotions made me indifferent. bare brawny arms of sailors clutched at me and drew me to the deck. there at once i was the center of a circle of speechless and astonished persons, all men but one. "well?" demanded a large breezy voice. "what's this mean? what do you want aboard my ship?" i looked up at a red-faced man in a large straw hat. "i want my aunt," i explained. "your aunt?" he roared. "why the devil should you think i've got your aunt?" "you have got her," i replied with firmness. "i don't see her, but she's here somewhere." the captain of the _rufus smith_ shook two large red fists above his head. "another lunatic!" he shouted. "i'd as soon have a white horse and a minister aboard as to go to sea in a floating bedlam!" as the captain's angry thunder died away came the small anxious voice of aunt jane. "what's the matter? oh, please tell me what's the matter!" she was saying as she edged her way into the group. in her severely cut khaki suit she looked like a plump little dumpling that had got into a sausage wrapping by mistake. her eyes, round, pale, blinking a little in the tropical glare, roved over the circle until they lit on me. right where she stood aunt jane petrified. she endeavored to shriek, but achieved instead only a strangled wheeze. her poor little chin dropped until it disappeared altogether in the folds of her plump neck, and she remained speechless, stricken, immobile as a wax figure in an exhibition. "aunt jane," i said, "you must come right back to shore with me." i spoke calmly, for unless you are perfectly calm with aunt jane you fluster her. she replied only by a slight gobbling in her throat, but the other woman spoke in a loud voice, addressed not to me but to the universe in general. "the young person is mad!" it was an unmistakably british intonation. this then was miss violet higglesby-browne, i saw a grim, bony, stocky shape, in a companion costume to my aunt's. around the edges of her cork helmet her short iron-gray hair visibly bristled. she had a massive head, and a seamed and rugged countenance which did its best to live down the humiliation of a ridiculous little nose with no bridge. by what prophetic irony she had been named violet is the secret of those powers which seem to love a laugh at mankind's expense. but what riveted my eyes was the deadly glare with which hers were turned on me. i saw that not only was she as certain of my identity as though she had guided me from my first tottering steps, but that in a flash she had grasped my motives, aims and purposes, and meant once for all to face, out-general and defeat me with great slaughter. so she announced to the company with deliberation, "the young person is mad!" it nettled me extremely. "mad!" i flung back at her. "because i wish to save my poor aunt from such a situation as this? it would be charitable to infer madness in those who have led her into it!" when i reviewed this speech afterward i realized that it was not, under the circumstances, the best calculated to win me friends. "jane!" said miss higglesby-browne in deep and awful tones, "the time has come to prove your strength!" aunt jane proved it by uttering a shrill yelp, and clutching her hair with a reckless disregard of its having originally been that of a total stranger. so severe were her shrieks and struggles that it was with difficulty that she was borne below in the arms of two strong men. i had seen aunt jane in hysterics before--she had them that time about the convict. i was not frightened, but i hurried after her--neck and neck with miss browne. it was fifteen minutes before aunt jane came to, and then she would only moan. i bathed her head, and held her hand, and did all the regulation things, under the baleful eye of miss browne, who steadfastly refused to go away, but sat glaring like a gorgon who sees her prey about to be snatched from her. in the midst of my ministrations i awoke suddenly to a rhythmic heave and throb which pervaded the ship. dropping aunt jane's hand i rushed on deck. there lay the various pieces of my baggage, and in the distance the boat with the two brown rowers was skipping shoreward over the ripples. as for the _rufus smith_, she was under weigh, and heading out of the roadstead for the open sea. i dashed aft to the captain, who stood issuing orders in the voice of an aggrieved fog-horn. "captain!" i cried, "wait; turn around! you must put my aunt and me ashore!" he whirled on me, showing a crimson angry face. "turn around, is it, turn around ?" he shouted. "do you suppose i can loaf about the harbor here a-waitin' on your aunt's fits? you come aboard without me askin'. now you can go along with the rest. this here ship has got her course set for frisco, pickin' up leeward island on the way, and anybody that ain't goin' in that direction is welcome to jump overboard." that is how i happened to go to leeward island. ii apollo and some others the _rufus smith_, tramp freighter, had been chartered to convey the harding-browne expedition to leeward island, which lies about three hundred miles west of panama, and could be picked up by the freighter in her course. she was a little dingy boat with such small accommodation that i can not imagine where the majority of her passengers stowed themselves away. my aunt and miss browne had a stateroom between them the size of a packing-box, and somebody turned out and resigned another to me. i retired there to dress for dinner after several dismal hours spent in attendance on aunt jane, who had passed from great imaginary suffering into the quite genuine anguish of seasickness. in the haste of my departure from san francisco i had not brought a trunk, so the best i was able to produce in the way of a crusher for miss higglesby-browne and her fellow-passengers was a cool little white gown, which would shine at least by contrast with miss browne's severely utilitarian costume. white is becoming to my hair, which narrow-minded persons term red, but which has been known to cause the more discriminating to draw heavily on the dictionary for adjectives. my face is small and heart-shaped, with features strictly for use and not for ornament, but fortunately inconspicuous. as for my eyes, i think tawny quite the nicest word, though aunt jane calls them hazel and i have even heard whispers of green. five minutes after the gong sounded i walked into the cabin. miss browne, captain watkins of the freighter, and half a dozen men were already at the table. i slid unobtrusively into the one vacant place, fortunately remote from the captain, who glared at me savagely, as though still embittered by the recollection of my aunt's fits. "gentlemen," said miss browne in icy tones, "miss virginia harding." two of the men rose, the others stared and ducked. except for miss browne and the captain, i had received on coming aboard only the most blurred impression of my fellow-voyagers. i remembered them merely as a composite of khaki and cork helmets and astounded staring faces. but i felt that as the abetters of miss browne a hostile and sinister atmosphere enveloped them all. being thus in the camp of the enemy, i sat down in silence and devoted myself to my soup. the majority of my companions did likewise--audibly. but presently i heard a voice at my left: "i say, what a jolly good sailor you seem to be--pity your aunt's not!" i looked up and saw apollo sitting beside me. or rather, shall i say a young man who might have walked straight out of an advertisement for a ready-made clothing house, so ideal and impossible was his beauty. he was very tall--i had to tilt my chin quite painfully to look up at him--and from the loose collar of his silk shirt his throat rose like a column. his skin was a beautiful clear pink and white just tinged with tan--like a meringue that has been in the oven for two minutes exactly. he had a straight, chiseled profile and his hair was thick and chestnut and wavy and he had clear sea-gray eyes. to give him at once his full name and titles, he was the honorable cuthbert patrick ruthmore vane, of high staunton manor, kent, england. but as i was ignorant of this, i can truthfully say that his looks stunned me purely on their own merits. outwardly calm, i replied, "yes, its too bad, but then who ever dreamed that aunt jane would go adventuring at her time of life? i thought nobody over the age of thirteen, and then boys, ever went treasure-hunting." "ah, but lads of thirteen couldn't well come such a distance on their own, you know," returned apollo, with the kindest air of making allowance for the female intellect. i hurriedly turned the subject. "i really can't imagine aunt jane on a desert island. you should see her behave on the mere suspicion of a mouse! what will she do if she meets a cannibal and he tries to eat her?" "oh, really, now," argued the paragon earnestly, "i'm quite sure there's no danger of that, don't you know? i believe there are no natives at all on the island, or else quite tame ones, i forget which, and here are four of us chaps, with no end of revolvers and things--shooting-irons, as you call them in america. mr. shaw--sitting opposite miss browne, you know--is rather running things, so if you feel nervous you should talk to him. was with the south polar expedition and all that--knows no end about this sort of thing--wouldn't for a moment think of letting ladies run the risk of being eaten. really i hope you aren't in a funk about the cannibals--especially as with so many missionary johnnies about they are most likely all converted." "it's so comforting to think of it in that light!" i said fervently. at the same time i peeped around apollo for a glimpse of the experienced mr. shaw. i saw a strong-featured, weather-beaten profile, the face of a man somewhere in his thirties, and looking, from this side view at least, not only stern but grim. he was talking quietly to the captain, whose manner toward him was almost civil. i made up my mind at once that the backbone of the party, and inevitably the leader in its projected villainies, whatever they might be, was this rugged-looking mr. shaw. you couldn't fancy him as the misled follower of anybody, even the terrific violet. as it seemed an unpropitious moment for taking counsel with mr. shaw about cannibals, i tried another tack with the beautiful youth at my side. "how did you like panama? i fancy the old town is very picturesque." "oh, rather!" assented mr. vane. "at least, that is what those painter chaps call it--met a couple of 'em at the hotel. beastly little narrow streets and houses in a shocking state and all that. i like to see property kept up, myself." "i am afraid," i said severely, "that you are a philistine!" he blinked a little. "ah--quite so!" he murmured, recovering himself gallantly. "one of those chaps that backed goliath against david, what?" from this conversational impasse we were rescued by the interposition of the gentleman opposite, whose small twinkling eyes had been taking me in with intentness. "i did some flittin' about that little old burg on my own hook," he informed us, "and what i got to say is, it needs wakin' up. yes, sir, a bunch of live ones from the u.s.a. would shake up that little old graveyard so you wouldn't know it. i might have took a hand in it myself, if i hadn't have met up with miss browne and your a'nt. yes, sir, i had a slick little proposition or two up my sleeve. backed by some of the biggest capital in the u.s.a.--in fact, there's a bunch of fellers up there in god's country that's pretty sore on old h.h. for passin' things up this way. kep' the wires hummin' for two-three days, till they seen i wasn't to be switched, and then the old man himself--no use mentionin' names, but i guess you know who i mean--wall street would, quick enough, anyway--the old man himself threatened to put his yacht in commission and come down to find out what sort of little game h. h. was playin' on him. but i done like br'er rabbit--jes lay low. hamilton h. tubbs knows a good thing when he sees it about as quick as the next one--and he knows enough to keep mum about it too!" "none can appreciate more profoundly than myself your ability to maintain that reserve so necessary to the success of this expedition," remarked miss browne weightily from the far end of the table. "it is to be wished that other members of our party, though tenderly esteemed, and never more than now when weakness of body temporarily overpowers strength of soul, had shared your powers of secrecy!" this shaft was aimed quite obviously at me, and as at the moment i could think of nothing in reply short of hurling a plate i sank into a silence which seemed to be contagious, for it spread throughout the table. three or four rough-looking men, of whom one, a certain captain magnus, belonged to our party and the rest to the ship, continued vigorously to hack their way through the meal with clattering knives and forks. of other sounds there was none. such gloom weighed heavily on the genial spirit of mr. tubbs, and he lightened it by rising to propose a toast. "ladies and gentlemen, to her now unfortunately laid low by the pangs of _mal de mer_--our friend and bony dear, miss harding!" this was bewildering, for neither by friend nor foe could aunt jane be called bony. later, in the light of mr. tubbs's passion for classical allusion, i decided to translate it _bona dea_, and consider the family complimented. at the moment i sat stunned, but miss browne, with greater self-possession, majestically inclined her head and said: "in the name of our absent friend, i thank you." in spite of wistful looks from the beautiful youth as we rose from the table, and the allurement of a tropic moon, i remained constant to duty and aunt jane, and immured myself in her stateroom, where i passed an enlivening evening listening to her moans. she showed a faint returning spark of life when i mentioned cuthbert vane, and raised her head to murmur that he was honorable and she understood though not the heir still likely to inherit and perhaps after all providence-- the unspoken end of aunt jane's sentence pursued me into dreams in which an unknown gentleman obligingly broke his neck riding to hounds and left apollo heir to the title and estates. iii i engage the enemy it was fortunate that i slept well in my narrow berth on board the rufus smith, for the next day was one of trial. aunt jane had recovered what mr. tubbs, with deprecating coughs behind his hand, alluded to as her sea-legs, and staggered forth wanly, leaning on the arm of miss higglesby-browne. yes, of miss browne, while i, aunt jane's own niece, trotted meekly in the rear with a cushion. already i had begun to realize how fatally i had underrated the lady of the hyphen, in imagining i had only to come and see and conquer aunt jane. the grim and bony one had made hay while the sun shone--while i was idling in california, and those criminally supine cousins were allowing aunt jane to run about new york at her own wild will. miss higglesby-browne had her own collar and tag on aunt jane now, while she, so complete was her perversion, fairly hugged her slavery and called it freedom. yes, she talked about her emancipation and her soul-force and her individuality, prattling away like a child that has learned its lesson well. "mercy, aunty, what long words!" i cried gaily, sitting down beside her and patting her hand. usually i can do anything with her when i pet her up a bit. but the eye of miss higglesby-browne was on her--and aunt jane actually drew a little away. "really, virginia," she said, feebly endeavoring to rise to the occasion as she knew miss browne would have her rise, "really, while it's very nice to see you and all that, still i hope you realize that i have had a--a deep soul-experience, and that i am no longer to be--trifled with and--and treated as if i were--amusing. i am really at a loss to imagine why you came. i wrote you that i was in the company of _trusted friends_." "friends?" i echoed aggrievedly. "friends are all very well, of course, but when you and i have just each other, aunty, i think it is unkind of you to expect me to stay thousands of miles away from you all by myself." "but it was you who sent me to new york, and insisted on my staying there!" she cried. evidently she had been living over her wrongs. "yes--but how different!" i interrupted hastily. "there were the cousins--of course i have to spare you sometimes to the rest of the family!" aunt jane is strong on family feeling, and frequently reproaches me with my lack of it. but in expecting aunt jane to soften at this i reckoned without miss higglesby-browne. a dart from the cold gray eyes galvanized my aunt into a sudden rigid erectness. "my dear virginia," she said with quavering severity, "let me remind you that there are ties even dearer than those of blood--soul-affinities, you know, and--and, in short, in my dear friend miss higglesby-browne i have met for the first time in my life with a--a sympathetic intelligence that understands me!" so that was violet's line! i surveyed the sympathetic intelligence with a smiling interest. "really, how nice! and of course you feel quite sure that on your side you thoroughly understand--miss higglesby-browne?" miss browne's hair was rather like a clothesbrush in her mildest moods. in her rising wrath it seemed to quiver like a lion's mane. "miss harding," she said, in the chest-tones she reserved for critical moments, "has a nature impossible to deceive, because itself incapable of deception. miss harding and i first met--on this present plane--in an atmosphere unusually favorable to soul-revelation. i knew at once that here was the appointed comrade, while in miss harding there was the immediate recognition of a complementary spiritual force." "it's perfectly true, virginia," exclaimed aunt jane, beginning to cry. "you and susan and everybody have always treated me as if i were a child and didn't know what i wanted, when the fact is i always have known _perfectly well_!" the last words issued in a wail from the depths of her handkerchief. "you mean, i suppose," i exploded, "that what you have always wanted was to go off on this perfectly crazy chase after imaginary treasure!" there, now i had gone and done it. of course it was my red hair. "jane," uttered miss higglesby-browne in deep and awful tones, "do you or do you not realize how strangely prophetic were the warnings i gave you from the first--that if you revealed our plans malignant influences would be brought to bear? be strong, jane--cling to the dynamic thought!" "i'm clinging!" sniffed aunt jane, dabbing away her tears. i never saw any one get so pink about the eyes and nose at the smallest sign of weeping, and yet she is always doing it. "really, virginia," she broke out in a whimper, "it is not kind to say, i suppose, but i would just as soon you hadn't come! just when i was learning to expand my individuality--and then you come and somehow make it seem so much more difficult!" i rose. "very well, aunt jane," i said coldly. "expand all you like. when you get to the bursting point i'll do my best to save the pieces. for the present i suppose i had better leave you to company so much more favorable to your soul development!" and i walked away with my head in the air. it was so much in the air, and the deck of the _rufus smith_ was so unstable, that i fell over a coil of rope and fetched up in the arms of the honorable cuthbert vane. fortunately this occurred around the corner of the deck-house, out of sight of my aunt and miss browne, so the latter was unable to shed the lurid light on the episode which she doubtless would if she had seen it. mr. vane stood the shock well and promptly set me on my feet. "i say!" he exclaimed sympathetically, "not hurt, are you? beastly nuisance, you know, these ropes lying about--regular man-traps, i call 'em." "thanks, i'm quite all right," i said, and as i spoke two large genuine tears welled up into my eyes. i hadn't realized till i felt them smarting on my eyelids how deeply hurt i was at the unnatural behavior of aunt jane. "ah--i'm afraid you are really not quite all right!" returned the honorable cuthbert with profound concern. "tell me what's the matter--please do!" i shook my head. "it's nothing--you couldn't help me. it's just--aunt jane." "your aunt? has she been kicking-up a bit? i thought she looked rather a mild sort." "oh--mild! that's just it--so mild that she has let this awful higglesby-browne person get possession of her body and soul." "oh, i say, aren't you a bit rough on miss browne? thought she was a rather remarkable old party--goes in strong for intellect and all that, you know." "that's just what fooled aunt jane so--but, i thought a man would know better." my feathers were ruffled again. "well, fact is, i'm not so much up in that sort of thing myself," he admitted modestly. "rather took her word for it and all that, you know. there's shaw, though--cleverest chap going, i assure you. i rather fancy miss browne couldn't pull the wool over _his_ eyes much." "she evidently did, though," i said snappishly, "since he's let her rope him in for such a wild goose chase as this!" in my heart i felt convinced that the clever mr. shaw was merely miss browne's partner in imposture. "oh, really, now. miss harding, you don't think it's that--that the thing's all moonshine?" he stared at me in grieved surprise. "why, what else can it be?" i demanded, driven by my wrongs to the cruelty of shattering his illusions. "who ever heard of a pirate's treasure that wasn't moonshine? the moment i had read aunt jane's letter telling of the perfectly absurd business she was setting out on i rushed down by the first boat. of course i meant to take her back with me, to put a stop to all this madness; but i was too late--and you're glad of it, i dare say!" "i can't help being glad, you know," he replied, the color rising to his ingenuous cheeks. "it's so frightfully jolly having you along. only i'm sorry you came against your will. rather fancy you had it in your head that we were a band of cutthroats, eh? well, the fact is i don't know much about the two chaps miss browne picked up, though i suspect they are a very decent sort. that odd fish, captain magnus, now--he was quite miss browne's own find, i assure you. and as to old h. h.--tubbs, you know--miss browne met up with him on the boat coming down. the rum old chap got on her soft side somehow, and first thing she had appointed him secretary and treasurer--as though we were a meeting of something. shaw was quite a bit upset about it. he and i were a week later in arriving--came straight on from england with the supplies, while miss browne fixed things up with the little black-and-tan country that owns the island. i say, miss harding, you're bound to like shaw no end when you know him--he's such a wonderfully clever chap!" i had no wish to blight his faith in the superlative mr. shaw, and said nothing. this evidently pained him, and as we stood leaning on the rail in the shadow of the deck-house, watching the blue water slide by, he continued to sound the praises of his idol. it seemed that as soon as miss browne had beguiled aunt jane into financing her scheme--a feat equivalent to robbing an infant-class scholar of his sunday-school nickel--she had cast about for a worthy leader for the forthcoming harding-browne expedition. all the winds of fame were bearing abroad just then the name of a certain young explorer who had lately added another continent or two to the british empire. linked with his were other names, those of his fellow adventurers, which shone only less brightly than that of their chief. one dugald shaw had been among the great man's most trusted lieutenants, but now, on the organizing of the second expedition, he was left behind in london, only half recovered of a wound received in the antarctic. the hook of a block and tackle had caught him, ripped his forehead open from cheek to temple, and for a time threatened the sight of the eye. slowly, under the care of the london surgeons, he had recovered, and the eye was saved. meanwhile his old companions had taken again the path of glory, and were far on their way back to the ice-fields of the south pole. only dugald shaw was left behind. "and so," the even voice flowed on, "when i ran on to him in london he was feeling fearfully low, i do assure you. a chap of his sort naturally hates to think he's on the shelf. i had known him since i was a little 'un, when we used to go to scotland for our holidays, and he would be home from sea and staying with his cousin at the manse. he'd make us boats and spin all sorts of yarns, and we thought him a bigger man than the admiral of the fleet. "well, old shaw was fancying there was nothing for it but to go back to his place with the p. & o., which seemed a bit flat after what he'd been having, and meant he would never get beyond being the captain of a liner, and not that for a good many years to come, when a cable came from this miss higglesby-brown offering him command of this expedition. as neither of us had ever heard of miss higglesby-browne, we were both a bit floored for a time. but shaw smoked a pipe on it, and then he said, 'old chap, if they'll give me my figure, i'm their man.' and i said, 'quite so, old chap, and i'll go along, too.' "i had to argue quite a bit, but in the end the dear old boy let me come--after wiring the pater and what not. and i do assure you, miss harding, it strikes me as no end of a lark--besides expecting it to put old shaw on his feet and give us hatfuls of money all round." well, it was a plausible story, and i had no doubt, so far as the honorable cuthbert was concerned, an absolutely truthful one. the beautiful youth was manifestly as guileless as a small boy playing pirate with a wooden sword. but as to mr. shaw, who could tell that it hadn't after all been a trumped-up affair between miss browne and him--that his surprise at the message was not assumed to throw dust in the eyes of his young and trusting friend? are even the most valiant adventurers invariably honest? left behind by his companions because of his injury, his chance of an enduring fame cut off, with no prospects but those of an officer on an ocean liner, might he not lend a ready ear to a scheme for plucking a fat and willing pigeon? so great was my faith in aunt jane's gullibility, so dark my distrust of miss browne, that all connected with the enterprise lay under the cloud of my suspicion. the honorable mr. vane i had already so far exculpated as to wonder if he were not in some way being victimized too; but mr. shaw, after even a casual glimpse of him, one couldn't picture as a victim. i felt that he must have gone into the enterprise with his eyes open to its absurdity, and fully aware that the only gold to be won by anybody must come out of the pocket of aunt jane. as these reflections passed through my mind i looked up and saw the subject of them approaching. he lifted his helmet, but met my eyes unsmilingly, with a sort of sober scrutiny. he had the tanned skin of a sailor, and brown hair cropped close and showing a trace of gray. this and a certain dour grim look he had made me at first consider him quite middle-aged, though i knew later that he was not yet thirty-five. as to the grimness, perhaps, i unwillingly conceded, part of it was due to the scar which seamed the right temple to the eyebrow, in a straight livid line. but it was a grim face anyway, strong-jawed, with piercing steel-blue eyes. he was welcomed by mr. vane with a joyous thump on the shoulder-blade. "i say, old man, miss harding has turned out to be the most fearful doubting thomas--thinks the whole scheme quite mad and all that sort of thing. i'm far too great a duffer to convert her, but perhaps you might, don't you know?" mr. shaw looked at me steadily. his eyes were the kind that seem to see all and reveal nothing. i felt a hot spark of defiance rising in my own. "and indeed it is too bad," he said coolly, "that the trip should not be more to miss harding's liking." the rough edges of his scotch burr had been smoothed down by much wandering, but you knew at once on which side of the solway he had seen the light. "it is not a question of my liking," i retorted, trying to preserve an unmoved and lofty demeanor, though my heart was beating rather quickly at finding myself actually crossing swords with the redoubtable adventurer, this man who had often faced death, i could not refuse to believe, as steadily as he was facing me now. "it is not at all a question of my liking or not liking the trip, but of the trip itself being--quite the wildest thing ever heard of out of a story-book." harsher terms had sprung first to my lips, but had somehow failed to get beyond them. "ah--yet the world would be the poorer if certain wild trips had not been taken. i seem to remember one christopher columbus, for instance." by a vivid lightning-flash of wrath i felt that this adventurer was laughing at me a little under his sober exterior--even stirring me up as one does an angry kitten. "yes," i flared out, "but columbus did not inveigle a confiding old lady to go along with him!" of course aunt jane is not, properly speaking, an old lady, but it was much more effective to pose her as one for the moment. it was certainly effective, to judge by the sudden firm setting of his mouth. "lad," he said quietly, "lend a hand below, will you? they are overhauling some of our stuff 'tween decks." he waited until the honorable cuthbert, looking rather dazed, had retired. we stood facing each other, my breath coming rather hurriedly. there was a kind of still force about this mastered anger of the dour scot, like the brooding of black clouds that at any moment may send forth their devastating fire. yet i myself was not endowed with red hair for nothing. "miss harding," he said slowly, "that was a bitter word you said." my head went up. "bitter, perhaps," i flung back, "but is it not true? it is for you to answer." "no, it is not for me to answer, because it is not for you to ask. but since you talk of inveigling, let me give the history of my connection with the expedition. you will understand then that i had nothing to do with organizing it, but was merely engaged to do my best to carry it through to success." "i have already heard a version of the matter from mr. vane." "and you think he is in the conspiracy too?" "certainly not," i replied hastily. "i mean--of course, i know he told me exactly what he believes himself." "yes, you would take the lad's word, of course." this with a slight but significant emphasis of which he was perhaps unconscious. "then i suppose you consider that he was inveigled too?" "i am not required to consider mr. vane's status at all," i replied with dignity. "it is my aunt whom i wish to protect." and suddenly to my dismay my voice grew husky. i had to turn my head aside and blink hard at the sea. i seemed to be encountering fearful and unexpected odds in my endeavor to rescue aunt jane. he stood looking down at me--he was a big man, though of lesser height than the superb cuthbert--in a way i couldn't quite understand. and what i don't understand always makes me uncomfortable. "very well," he said after a pause. "maybe your opportunity will come. it would be a pity indeed if miss harding were to require no protecting and a young lady here with such a good will to it. but if you will take the suggestion of a man of rather broader experience than your own, you will wait until the occasion arises. it is bad generalship, really, to waste your ammunition like this." "i dare say i am not a master of strategy," i cried, furious at myself for my moment of weakness and at him for the softening tone which had crept into his voice. "i am merely--honest. and when i see aunt jane hypnotized--by this violet person--" "and indeed i have seen no reason to think that miss higglesby-browne is not a most excellent lady," interrupted mr. shaw stiffly. "and let me say this, miss harding: here we are all together, whether we wish to be or no, and for six weeks or more on the island we shall see no faces but our own. are we to be divided from the beginning by quarrels? are maybe even the men of us to be set by the ears through the bickering of women?" like the nick of a whip came the certainty that he was thinking of the honorable cuthbert, and that i was the rock on which their david-and-jonathan friendship might split. otherwise i suppose miss higglesby-browne and i might have clawed each other forever without interference from him. "really," i said with--i hope--well-simulated scorn, "since i am quite alone against half a dozen of you, i should think you could count on putting down any rebellion on my part very easily. i repeat, i had no other object in coming along--though i was really _kidnaped_ along--than to look after my aunt. the affairs of the party otherwise--or its personnel---do not interest me at all. as to the treasure, of course i know perfectly well that there isn't any." and i turned my back and looked steadily out to sea. after a moment or two i heard him turn on his heel and go away. it was none too soon, for i had already begun to feel unostentatiously for my handkerchief. any way, i had had the last word-- the rest of my day was lonely, for the beautiful youth, probably by malevolent design, was kept busy between decks. mr. tubbs danced attendance on aunt jane and miss browne, so assiduously that i already began to see some of my worst fears realized. there was nothing for me to do but to retire to my berth and peruse a tattered copy of _huckleberry finn_ which i found in the cabin. at dinner, having the honorable cuthbert at my elbow, it was easier than not to ignore every one else. the small keen eyes of mr. tubbs, under his lofty and polished dome of thought, watched us knowingly. you saw that he was getting ready to assume a bless-you-my-children attitude and even to take credit somehow as match-maker. he related anecdotes, in which, as an emissary of cupid, he played a benevolent and leading role. one detected, too, a grin, ugly and unmirthful, on the unprepossessing countenance of captain magnus. i was indifferent. the man my gaiety was intended for sat at the far end of the table. i had to wipe out the memory of my wet eyes that afternoon. directly dinner was at an end, remorselessly he led the honorable cuthbert away. i retired to huckleberry finn. but a face with a scar running to the eyebrow looked up at me from the pages, and i held colloquies with it in which i said all the brilliant and cutting things which had occurred to me too late. i was thus engaged when a cry rang through the ship: "land ho!" iv the isle of fortune i dropped my book and ran on deck. every one else was already there. i joined the row at the rail, indifferent, for the moment, to the fact that to display so much interest in their ridiculous island involved a descent from my pinnacle. indeed, the chill altitude of pinnacles never agrees with me for long at a time, so that i am obliged to descend at intervals to breathe the air on the common level. the great gleaming orb of the tropic moon was blinding as the sun. away to the faint translucent line of the horizon rolled an infinity of shining sea. straight ahead rose a dark conical mass. it was the mountainous shape of leeward island. everybody was craning to get a clearer view. "hail, isle of fortune!" exclaimed miss browne. i think my aunt would not have been surprised if it had begun to rain doubloons upon the deck. "i bet we don't put it over some on them original argonaut fellers, hey?" cried mr. tubbs. higher and higher across the sky-line cut the dark crest of the island as the freighter steamed valiantly ahead. she had a manner all her own of progressing by a series of headlong lunges, followed by a nerve-racking pause before she found her equilibrium again. but she managed to wallow forward at a good gait, and the island grew clearer momently. sheer and formidable from the sea rose a line of black cliffs, and above them a single peak threw its shadow far across the water. faintly we made out the white line of the breakers foaming at the foot of the cliffs. we coasted slowly along, looking for the mouth of the little bay. meanwhile we had collected our belongings, and stood grouped about the deck, ready for the first thrilling plunge into adventure. my aunt and miss browne had tied huge green veils over their cork helmets, and were clumping about in tremendous hobnailed boots. i could not hope to rival this severely military get-up, but i had a blue linen skirt and a white middy, and trusted that my small stock of similar garments would last out our time on the island. all the luggage i was allowed to take was in a traveling bag and a gunny-sack, obligingly donated by the cook. speaking of cooks, i found we had one of our own along, a coal-black negro with grizzled wool, an unctuous voice, and the manners of an old-school family retainer. so far as i know, his name was cookie. i suppose he had received another once from his sponsors in baptism, but if so, it was buried in oblivion. now a narrow gleaming gap appeared in the wall of cliffs, and the freighter whistled and lay to. there began a bustle at the davits, and shouts of "lower away!" and for the first time it swept over me that we were to be put ashore in boats. simultaneously this fact swept over aunt jane, and i think also over miss browne, for i saw her fling one wild glance around, as though in search of some impossible means of retreat. but she took the blow in a grim silence, while aunt jane burst out in lamentation. she would not, could not go in a boat. she had heard all her life that small boats were most unsafe. a little girl had been drowned in a lake near where she was visiting once through going in a boat. why didn't the captain sail right up to the island as she had expected and put us ashore? even at panama with only a little way to go she had felt it suicidal--here it was not to be thought of. but the preparations for this desperate step went on apace, and no one heeded aunt jane but mr. tubbs, who had hastened to succor beauty in distress, and mingled broken exhortations to courage with hints that if his opinion had been attended to all would be well. then aunt jane clutched at mr. shaw's coat lapel as he went by, and he stopped long enough to explain patiently that vessels of the freighter's size could not enter the bay, and that there really was no danger, and that aunt jane might wait if she liked till the last boat, as it would take several trips to transfer us and our baggage. i supposed of course that this would include me, and stood leaning on the rail, watching the first boat with mr. shaw, captain magnus and the cook, fade to a dark speck on the water, when mr. vane appeared at my elbow. "ready, miss harding? you are to go in the next boat, with me. i asked especially." "oh, thanks!" i cried fervently. he would be much nicer than mr. tubbs to cling to as i went down--indeed, he was so tall that if it were at all a shallow place i might use him as a stepping-stone and survive. i hoped drowning men didn't gurgle very much--meanwhile mr. vane had disappeared over the side, and a sailor was lifting me and setting my reluctant feet on the strands of the ladder. "good-by, auntie !" i cried, as i began the descent. "don't blame yourself too much. everybody has to go some time, you know, and they say drowning's easy." with a stifled cry aunt jane forsook mr. tubbs and flew to the rail. i was already out of reach. "oh, virginia!" she wailed. "oh, my dear child! if it should be the last parting!" "give my jewelry and things to bess's baby!" i found strength to call back. what with the wallowing of the steamer and the natural instability of rope-ladders i seemed a mere atom tossed about in a swaying, reeling universe. _what will aunt jane do_? flashed through my mind, and i wished i had waited to see. then the arms of the honorable mr. vane received me. the strong rowers bent their backs, and the boat shot out over the mile or two of bright water between us and the island. great slow swells lifted us. we dipped with a soothing, cradle-like motion. i forgot to be afraid, in the delight of the warm wind that fanned our cheeks, of the moonbeams that on the crest of every ripple were splintered to a thousand dancing lights. i forgot fear, forgot miss higglesby-browne, forgot the harshness of the scotch character. "oh, glorious, glorious!" i cried to cuthbert vane. "not so dusty, eh?" he came back in their ridiculous english slang. now an american would have said _some little old moon that_! we certainly have our points of superiority. all around the island white charging lines of breakers foamed on ragged half-seen reefs. you saw the flash of foam leaping half the height of the black cliffs. the thunder of the surf was in our ears, now rising to wild clamor, fierce, hungry, menacing, now dying to a vast broken mutter. now our boat felt the lift of the great shoreward rollers, and sprang forward like a living thing. the other boat, empty of all but the rowers and returning from the island to the ship, passed us with a hail. we steered warily away from a wild welter of foam at the end of a long point, and shot beyond it on the heave of a great swell into quiet water. we were in the little bay under the shadow of the frowning cliff's. at the head of the bay, a quarter of a mile away, lay a broad white beach shining under the moon. at the edge of dark woods beyond a fire burned redly. it threw into relief the black moving shapes of men upon the sand. the waters of the cove broke upon the beach in a white lacework of foam. straight for the sand the sailors drove the boat. she struck it with a jar, grinding forward heavily. the men sprang overboard, wading half-way to the waist. and the arms of the honorable cuthbert vane had snatched me up and were bearing me safe and dry to shore. the sailors hauled on the boat, dragging it up the beach, and i saw the scotchman lending them a hand. the hard dry sand was crunching under the heels of mr. vane. i wriggled a little and apollo, who had grown absent-minded apparently, set me down. mr. shaw approached and the two men greeted each other in their offhand british way. as we couldn't well, under the circumstances, maintain a fiction of mutual invisibility, mr. shaw, with a certain obvious hesitation, turned to me. "only lady passenger, eh? hope you're not wet through. cookie's making coffee over yonder." "i say, shaw," cried the beautiful youth enthusiastically, "miss harding's the most ripping sport, you know! not the least nervous about the trip, i assure you." "i was," i announced, moved to defiance by the neighborhood of mr. shaw. "before we started i was so afraid that if you had listened you might have heard my teeth chattering. but i had at least the comforting thought that if i did go to my end it would not be simply in pursuit of sordid gain!" "and indeed that was almost a waste of noble sentiment under the circumstances," answered the dour scot, with the fleeting shadow of an enraging smile. "such disappointingly calm weather as it is! see that miss harding has some coffee, bert." i promised myself, as i went with mr. vane toward the fire, that some day i would find the weapon that would penetrate the scotchman's armor--and would use it mercilessly. cookie, in his white attire, and with his black shining face and ivory teeth gleaming in the ruddy firelight, looked like a converted cannibal--perhaps won from his errors by one of mr. vane's missionary johnnies. he received us with unctuous warmth. "well, now, 'clar to goodness if it ain't the li'le lady! how come you git ashore all dry lak you is? yes, sah, cookie'll git you-all some'n hot immejusly." he wafted me with stately gestures to a seat on an overturned iron kettle, and served my coffee with an air appropriate to mahogany and plate. it was something to see him wait on cuthbert vane. as cookie told me later, in the course of our rapidly developing friendship, "dat young gemmun am sure one ob de quality." to indicate the certainty of cookie's instinct, miss higglesby-browne was never more to him than "dat pusson." and the cold aloofness of his manner toward her, which yet never sank to impertinence, would have done credit to a duke. on the beach mr. shaw, captain magnus and the sailors were toiling, unloading and piling up stores. rather laggingly, apollo joined them. i was glad, for a heavy fatigue was stealing over me. cookie, taking note of my sagging head, brought me somebody's dunnage bag for a pillow. i felt him drawing a tarpaulin over me as i sank into bottomless depths of sleep. i opened my eyes to the dying stars. the moon had set. black shapes of tree and boulder loomed portentous through the ashen dimness that precedes the dawn. i heard men shouting, "here she comes!" "stand by to lend a hand!" in haste i scrambled up and tore for the beach. i must witness the landing of aunt jane. "where are they, where are they?" i demanded, rubbing my sleepy eyes. "why didn't you stay by the fire and have your nap out?" asked mr. shaw, in a tone which seemed to have forgotten for the moment to be frigid--perhaps because i hadn't yet waked up enough to have my quills in good pricking order. "nap? do you think that for all the treasure ever buried by a pirate i would miss the spectacle of aunt jane and miss browne arriving? i expect it to compensate me for all i have suffered on this trip so far." "see what it is, bert," exclaimed the scotchman, "to have a truly gentle and forgiving nature--how it brings its own reward. i'm afraid you and i miss a great deal in life, lad." the beautiful youth pondered this. "i don't know," he replied, "what you say sounds quite fit and proper for the parson, and all that, of course, but i fancy you are a bit out in supposing that miss harding is so forgiving, old man." "i didn't know that _you_ thought so badly of me, too!" i said timidly. i couldn't help it--the temptation was too great. "i? oh, really, now, you can't think that!" through the dusk i saw that he was flushing hotly. "lad," said the scotchman in a suddenly harsh voice, "lend a hand with this rope, will you?" and in the dusk i turned away to hide my triumphant smiles. i had found the weak spot of my foe--as mr. tubbs might have said, i was wise to achilles's heel. and now through the dawn-twilight that lay upon the cove the boat drew near that bore mr. tubbs and his fair charges. i saw the three cork helmets grouped together in the stern. then the foaming fringe of wavelets caught the boat, hurled it forward, seemed all but to engulf it out leaped the sailors. out leaped mr. tubbs, and disappeared at once beneath the waves. shrill and prolonged rose the shrieks of my aunt and miss higglesby-browne. valiantly mr. shaw and cuthbert vane had rushed into the deep. each now appeared staggering up the steep, foam-swept strand under a struggling burden. even after they were safely deposited on the sand. miss browne and my aunt continued to shriek. "save, save mr. tubbs!" implored aunt jane. but mr. tubbs, overlooked by all but this thoughtful friend, had cannily saved himself. he advanced upon us dripping. "a close call!" he sang out cheerfully. "thought one time old nep had got a strangle-hold all right. thinks i, i guess there'll be something doing when wall street gets this news--that old h. h. is food for the finny denizens of the deep!" "such an event, mr. tubbs," pronounced violet, who had recovered her form with surprising swiftness, "might well have sent its vibrations through the financial arteries of the world!" "it would have been most--most shocking!" quavered poor aunt jane with feeling. she was piteously striving to extricate herself from the folds of the green veil. i came to her assistance. the poor plump little woman was trembling from head to foot. "it was a most--unusual experience," she told me as i unwound her. "probably extremely--unifying to the soul-forces and all that, as miss browne says, but for the moment--unsettling. is my helmet on straight, dear? i think it is a little severe for my type of face, don't you? there was a sweet little hat in a fifth avenue shop--simple and yet so chic. i thought it just the thing, but miss browne said no, helmets were always worn--coffee? oh, my dear child, how thankful i shall be!" and aunt jane clung to me as of yore as i led her up the beach. v the captain's legacy when in my tender years i was taken to the matinee, usually the most thrilling feature of the spectacle to me was the scene depicted on the drop-curtain. i know not why only the decorators of drop-curtains are inspired to create landscapes of such strange enchantment, of a beauty which not alone beguiles the senses--i speak from the standpoint of the ten-year-old--but throws wide to fancy the gate of dreams. directly i was seated--in the body--and had had my hat taken off and been told not to wriggle, i vaulted airily over the unconscious audience, over an orchestra engaged in tuning up, and was lost in the marvelous landscape of the drop-curtain. the adventures which i had there put to shame any which the raising of the curtain permitted to be seen upon the stage. i had never hoped to recover in this prosaic world my long-lost paradise of the drop-curtain, but morning revealed it to me here on leeward island. here was the feathery foliage, the gushing springs, the gorgeous flowers of that enchanted land. and here were the soft and intoxicating perfumes that i had imagined in my curtain landscape. leeward island measures roughly four miles across from east to west by three from north to south. the core of the island is the peak, rising to a height of nearly three thousand feet. at its base on three sides lies a plateau, its edges gnawed away by the sea to the underlying rocky skeleton. on the southeastern quarter the peak drops by a series of great precipices straight into the sea. back from the cove stretches a little hollow, its floor rising gently to the level of the plateau. innumerable clear springs which burst from the mountain converge to a limpid stream, which winds through the hollow to fall into the little bay. all the plateau and much of the peak are clothed with woods, a beautiful bright green against the sapphire of sea and sky. high above all other growth wave the feathery tops of the cocoa-palms, which flourish here luxuriantly. you saw them in their thousands, slender and swaying, tossing all together in the light sea-wind their crowns of nodding plumes. the palms were nowhere more abundant than in the hollow by the cove where our camp was made, and their size and the regularity of their order spoke of cultivation. guavas, oranges and lemons grew here, too, and many beautiful banana-palms. the rank forest growth had been so thoroughly cleared out that it had not yet returned, except stealthily in the shape of brilliant-flowered creepers which wound their sinuous way from tree to tree, like fair delilahs striving to overcome arboreal samsons by their wiles. they were rankest beside the stream, which ran at one edge of the hollow under the rise of the plateau. at the side of the clearing toward the stream stood a hut, built of cocoa-palm logs. its roof of palm-thatch had been scattered by storms. nearer the stream on a bench were an old decaying wash-tub and a board. a broken frying-pan and a rusty axe-head lay in the grass. in the hut itself were a rude bedstead, a small table, and a cupboard made of boxes. i was excited at first, and fancied we had come upon the dwelling of a marooned pirate. without taking the trouble to combat this opinion, mr. shaw explained to cuthbert vane that a copra gatherer had once lived here, and that the place must have yielded such a profit that he was only surprised to find it deserted now. behind this cool, unemphatic speech i sensed an ironic zest in the destruction of my pirate. after their thrilling experience of being ferried from the _rufus smith_ to the island, my aunt and miss browne had been easily persuaded to dispose themselves for naps. aunt jane, however, could not be at rest until mr. tubbs had been restored by a cordial which she extracted with much effort from the depths of her hand-bag. he partook with gravity and the rolled up eyes of gratitude, and retired grimacing to comfort himself from a private bottle of his own. the boats of the _rufus smith_ had departed from the island, and our relations with humanity were severed. the thought of our isolation awed and fascinated me as i sat meditatively upon a keg of nails watching the miracle of the tropic dawn. the men were hard at work with bales and boxes, except mr. tubbs, who gave advice. it must have been valuable advice, for he assured everybody that a word from his lips had invariably been enough to make wall street sit up and take notice. but it is a far cry from wall street to leeward island. mr. tubbs, ignored, sought refuge with me at last, and pointed out the beauties of aroarer as she rose from the embrace of neptune. "aroarer borealis, to be accurate," he explained, "but they didn't use parties' surnames much in classic times." the glad cry of breakfast put an end to mr. tubbs's exposition of mythology. so does dull reality clog the feet of dreams that it proved impossible to begin the day by digging up the treasure. camp had to be arranged, for folk must eat and sleep even with the wealth of the indies to be had for the turning of a sod. the cabin was reroofed and set apart as the bower of aunt jane and miss browne. i declined to make a third in this sanctuary. you could tell by looking at her that violet was the sort of person who would inevitably sleep out loud. "hang me up in a tree or anywhere," i insisted, and it ended by my having a tarpaulin shelter rigged up in a group of cocoa-palms. among our earliest discoveries on the island was one regrettable from the point of view of romance, though rich in practical advantages; the woods were the abode of numerous wild pigs. this is not to write a new chapter on the geographical distribution of the pig, for they were of the humdrum domestic variety, and had doubtless appertained to the copra gatherer's establishment. but you should have seen how clean, how seemly, how self-respecting were our leeward island pigs to realize how profoundly the pig of christian lands is a debased and slandered animal. these quadrupeds would have strengthened jean jacques's belief in the primitive virtue of man before civilization debauched him. and i shall always paraphrase the familiar line to read: "when wild in woods the noble porker ran." aunt jane had been dreadfully alarmed by the pigs, and wanted to keep me immured in the cabin o' nights so that i should not be eaten. but nothing less than a bengal tiger would have driven me to such extremity. "though if a pig should eat me," i suggested, "you might mark him to avoid becoming a cannibal at second hand. i should hate to think of you, aunt jane, as the family tomb!" "virginia, you are most unfeeling," said aunt jane, getting pink about the eyelids. "ah, i didn't know you americans went in much for family tombs?" remarked the beautiful youth interestedly. "no, we do our best to keep out of them," i assured him, and he walked off meditatively revolving this. if the beautiful youth had been beautiful on shipboard, in the informal costume he affected on the island he was more splendid still. his white cotton shirt and trousers showed him lithe and lean and muscular. his bared arms and chest were like cream solidified to flesh. instead of his nose peeling like common noses in the hot salt air, every kiss of the sun only gave his skin a warmer, richer glow. with his striped silk sash of red and blue about his waist, and his crown of ambrosial chestnut curls--a development due to the absence of a barber--the honorable cuthbert would certainly have been hailed by the natives, if there had been any, as the island's god. camp was made in the early hours of the day. then came luncheon, prepared with skill by cookie, and eaten from a table of packing-cases laid in the shade. afterward every one, hot and weary, retired for a siesta. it was now the cool as well as the dry season on the island, yet the heat of the sun at midday was terrific. but the temperature brought us neither illness nor even any great degree of lassitude. always around the island blew the faint cooling breath of the sea. no marsh or stagnant water bred insect pests or fever. every day while we were there the men worked hard, and grew lean and sun-browned, and thrived on it. every afternoon with unfailing regularity a light shower fell, but in twenty minutes it was over and the sun shone again, greedily lapping up the moisture that glittered on the leaves. and forever the sea sang a low muttering bass to the faint threnody of the wind in the palms. on this first day we gathered in the cool of the afternoon about our table of packing-boxes for an event which even i, whose role was that of skeptic, found exciting. miss browne was at last to produce her map and reveal the secret of the island. so far, except in general terms, she had imparted it to no one. everybody, in coming along, had been buying a pig in a poke--though to be sure aunt jane had paid for it. the scotchman, cuthbert vane had told me incidentally, had insured himself against loss by demanding a retaining fee beforehand. somehow my opinion, both of his honesty and of his intelligence, had risen since i knew this. as to cuthbert vane, he had come purely in a spirit of adventure, and had paid his own expenses from the start. however, now the great moment was at hand. but before it comes, i will here set down the treasure-story of leeward island, as i gathered it later, a little here and there, and pieced it together into a coherent whole through many dreaming hours. in , the city of lima, in peru, being threatened by the revolutionaries under bolivar and san martin, cautious folk began to take thought for their possessions. to send them out upon the high seas under a foreign flag seemed to offer the best hope of safety, and soon there was more gold afloat on the pacific than at any time since the sailing of the great plate-galleons of the seventeenth century. captain sampson, of the brig _bonny lass_, found himself with a passenger for nowhere in particular in the shape of a certain spanish merchant of great wealth, reputed custodian of the private funds of the bishop of lima. this gentleman brought with him, besides some scanty personal baggage--for he took ship in haste--a great iron-bound chest. four stout sailors of the _bonny lass_ staggered under the weight of it. the _bonny lass_ cruised north along the coast, the passenger desiring to put in at panama in the hope that word might reach him there of quieter times at home. but somewhere off ecuador on a dark and starless night the merchant of lima vanished overboard--"and what could you expect," asked captain sampson in effect, "when a lubber like him would stay on deck in a gale?" strange to say, the merchant's body-servant met the fate of the heedless also. shrugging his shoulders at the carelessness of passengers, captain sampson bore away to leeward island, perhaps from curiosity to see this old refuge of the buccaneers, where the spoils of the sack of guayaquil were said to have been buried. who knows but that he, too, was bent on treasure-seeking? be that as it may, the little brig found her way into the bay on the northeast side of the island, where she anchored. water was needed, and there is refreshment in tropic fruits after a diet of salt horse and hardtack. so all hands had a holiday ashore, where the captain did not disdain to join them. only he went apart, and had other occupation than swarming up the palms for cocoanuts. one fancies, then, a moonless night, a crew sleeping off double grog, generously allowed them by the captain; a boat putting off from the _bonny lass_, in which were captain, mate, and one bill halliwell, able seaman, a man of mighty muscle; and as freight an object large, angular and ponderous, so that the boat lagged heavily beneath the rowers' strokes. later, bill, the simple seaman, grows presumptuous on the strength of this excursion with his betters. it is a word and a blow with the captain of the _bonny lass_, and bill is conveniently disposed of. dead, as well as living, he serves the purpose of the captain, but of that later. away sailed the _bonny lass_, sailing once for all out of the story. as for captain sampson, there is a long gap in his history, hazily filled by the story of his having been lieutenant to benito bonito, and one of the two survivors when bonito's black flag was brought down by the british frigate _espiegle_. but sober history knows nothing of him until he reappears years later, an aged and broken man, in a back street of bristol. here was living a certain hopperdown, who had been boatswain on the _bonny lass_ at the time that she so regrettably lost her passengers overboard. he too had been at leeward island, and may have somewhat wondered and questioned as to the happenings during the brig's brief stay there. he saw and recognized his old skipper hobbling along the bristol quays, and perhaps from pity took the shabby creature home with him. hopperdown dealt in sailors' slops, and had a snug room or two behind the shop. here for a while the former captain sampson dwelt, and after a swift illness here he died. with the hand of death upon him, his grim lips at last gave up their secret. with stiffening fingers he traced a rough map, to refresh hopperdown's memory after the lapse of time since either had seen the wave-beaten cliffs of leeward island. for captain sampson had never been able to return to claim the treasure which he had left to bill halliwell's silent guardianship. somehow he had lost his own vessel, and there would be rumors about, no doubt, which would make it difficult for him to get another. if he had, indeed, sailed with bonito, he had kept his secret from his formidable commander. even as he had dealt with bill halliwell, so might bonito deal by him--or at least the lion's share must be yielded to the pirate captain. and the passion of captain sampson's life had come to be his gold--his hidden hoard on far-off leeward island. it was his, now, all his. the only other who knew its hiding-place, his former mate, had been killed in havana in a tavern brawl. the secret of the bright unattainable treasure was all the captain's own. he dreamed of the doubloons, gloated over them, longed for them with a ceaseless gnawing passion of desire. and in the end he died, in hopperdown's little shop in the narrow bristol by-street. hopperdown, an aging man himself, and in his humble way contented, fell straightway victim to the gold-virus. he sold all he had, and bought passage in a sailing ship for valparaiso, trusting that once so far on the way he would find means to accomplish the rest. but the raging of the fever in his thin old blood brought him to his bed, and the ship sailed without him. before she was midway in the atlantic hopperdown was dead. the old man died in the house of a niece, to whom by way of legacy he left his map. for the satisfaction of his anxious mind, still poring on the treasure, she wrote down what she could grasp of his instructions, and then, being an unimaginative woman, gave the matter little further heed. for years the map lay among other papers in a drawer, and here it was at length discovered by her son, himself a sailor. he learned from her its history, and having been in the pacific, and heard the tales and rumors that cling about leeward island like the everlasting surf of its encompassing seas, this grand-nephew of old hopperdown's, by name david jenkins, became for the rest of his days a follower of the _ignis fatuus_. an untaught, suspicious, grasping man, he rejected, or knew not how to set about, the one course which offered the least hope, which was to trade his secret for the means of profiting by it. ah his restless, hungry life he spent in wandering up and down the seas, ever on the watch for some dimly imagined chance by which he might come at the treasure. and so at last he wandered into the london hospital where he died. and to me the wildest feature of the whole wild tale was that at the last he should have parted with the cherished secret of a lifetime to miss higglesby-browne. in a general way, every one of us knew this history. even i had had an outline of it from cuthbert vane. but so far nobody had seen the map. and now we were to see it; the time that intervened before that great event had already dwindled to minutes, to seconds-- but no; for miss browne arose and began to make a speech. the beginning of it dealt in a large and generalizing manner with comradeship and loyalty, and the necessity of the proper mental attitude in approaching the business we had in hand. i did not listen closely. the truth is, i wanted to see that map. under the spell of the island, i had almost begun to believe in the chest of doubloons. suddenly i awoke with a start to the fact that miss browne was talking about me. yes, i, indubitably, was the young person whose motives in attaching herself to the party were so at variance with the amity and mutual confidence which filled all other breasts. it was i who had sought to deprive the party of the presence, counsel and support of a member lacking whom it would have been but a body without a soul. it was i who had uttered words which were painful and astounding to one conscious of unimpugnable motives. in the days of toil to come, we were reminded, the young person, to wit, myself, would have no share. she would be but skeptic, critic, drone in the busy hive. thus it was obvious that the young person could not with any trace of justice claim part or lot in the treasure. were it not well, then, that the young person be required to make formal and written renunciation of all interest in the golden hoard soon to reward the faith and enterprise of the harding-browne expedition? miss browne requested the sense of the meeting on the matter. under the fire of this arraignment i sat hot-cheeked and incredulous, while a general wave of agitation seemed to stir the drowsy atmosphere. aunt jane was quivering, her round eyes fixed on miss higglesby-browne like a fascinated rabbit's on a serpent. mr. hamilton h. tubbs had pursed his lips to an inaudible whistle, and alternately regarded the summits of the palms and stole swift ferret-glances at the faces of the company. captain magnus had taken a sheath-knife from his belt and was balancing it on one finger, casting about him now and then a furtive, crooked, roving look, to meet which made you feel like a party to some hidden crime. mr. vane had remained for some time in happy unconsciousness of the significance of miss browne's oration. it was something to see it gradually penetrate to his perceptions, vexing the alabaster brow with a faint wrinkle of perplexity, then suffusing his cheeks with agonized and indignant blushes. "oh, i say, really, you know!" hovered in unspoken protest on his tongue. he threw imploring looks at mr. shaw, who alone of all the party sat imperturbable, except for a viciously bitten lip. miss higglesby-browne had drawn a deep breath, preparatory to resuming her verbal ramble, but i sprang to my feet. "miss browne," i said, in tones less coldly calm than i could have wished, "if you have thought it necessary to--to orate at this length merely to tell me that i am to have no share in this ridiculous treasure of yours, you have wasted a great deal of energy. in the first place, i don't believe in your treasure." (which, of course, despite my temporary lapse, i really didn't.) "i think you are--sillier than any grown-up people i ever saw. in the second place, anything you do find you are welcome to keep. do you think i came along with people who didn't want me, and have turned my own aunt against me, for the sake of filthy lucre? did i come intentionally at all, or because i was shanghaied and couldn't help myself? aunt jane!" i demanded, turning to my stricken relative, who was gazing in anguish and doubt from miss browne to me, "haven't you one spark left of family pride--i don't talk of affection any longer--that you sit still and hear me made speeches at in this fashion? have you grown so sordid and grasping that you can think of nothing but this blood-stained pirate gold?" aunt jane burst into tears. "good gracious, virginia," she wailed, "how shocking of you to say such things! i am sure we all got along very pleasantly until you came--and in that dreadfully sudden way. you might at least have been considerate enough to wire beforehand. as to blood-stains, there was a preparation your aunt susan had that got them out beautifully--i remember the time the little boy's nose bled on the drawing-room rug. but i should think just washing the gold would do very well!" it was impossible to feel that these remarks helped greatly to clear the situation. i opened my mouth, but miss browne was beforehand with me. "miss virginia harding has herself admitted that she has no just or equitable claim to participate in the profits of this expedition--i believe i give the gist of your words, miss harding?" "have it your own way," i said, shrugging. "i move, then, mr. secretary"--miss browne inclined her head in a stately manner toward mr. tubbs--"that you offer for miss virginia harding's signature the document prepared by you." "oh, i say!" broke out mr. vane suddenly, "i call this rotten, you know!" "in case of objection by any person," said miss browne loftily, "the matter may be put to a vote. all those in favor say aye!" an irregular fire of ayes followed. mr. tubbs gave his with a cough meant so far as possible to neutralize its effect--with a view to some future turning of the tables. captain magnus responded with a sudden bellow, which caused him to drop the gleaming knife within an inch of aunt jane's toe. mr. shaw said briefly, "i think the distribution of the treasure, if any is recovered, should be that agreed upon by the original members of the party. aye!" aunt jane's assenting voice issued from the depths of her handkerchief, which was rapidly becoming so briny and inadequate that i passed her mine. from cuthbert vane alone there came a steadfast no--and the scotchman put a hand on the boy's shoulder with a smile which was like sudden sunlight in a bleak sky. mr. tubbs then produced a legal-looking document which i took to be the original agreement of the members of the expedition. beneath their signatures he had inscribed a sort of codicil, by which i relinquished all claim on any treasure recovered by the party. mr. tubbs took evident pride in the numerous aforesaids and thereofs and other rolling legal phrases of his composition, and miss browne listened with satisfaction as he read it off, as though each word had been a nail in the coffin of my hopes. i signed the clause in a bold and defiant hand, under the attentive eyes of the company. a sort of sigh went round, as though something of vast moment had been concluded. and indeed it had, for now the way was clear for violet's map. i suppose that with a due regard for my dignity i should have risen and departed. i had been so definitely relegated to the position of outsider that to remain to witness the unveiling of the great mystery seemed indecently intrusive. let it be granted, then, that i ought to have got up with stately grace and gone away. only, i did nothing of the sort. in spite of my exclusion from all its material benefits, i had an amateur's appreciation of that map. i felt that i should gloat over it. perhaps of all those present i alone, free from sordid hopes, would get the true romantic zest and essence of it-- covertly i watched the faces around me. mr. tubbs's eyes had grown bright; he licked his dry lips. his nose, tip-tilted and slightly bulbous, took on a more than usually roseate hue. captain magnus, who was of a restless and jerky habit at the best of times, was like a leashed animal scenting blood. beneath his open shirt you saw the quick rise and fall of his hairy chest. his lips, drawn back wolfishly, displayed yellow, fang-like teeth. under the raw crude greed of the man you seemed to glimpse something indescribably vulpine and ferocious. the face of dugald shaw was controlled, but there was a slight rigidity in its quiet. a pulse beat rapidly in his cheek. all worldly good, all hope of place, power, independence, hung for him on the contents of the small flat package, wrapped in oil-silk, which miss browne was at this moment withdrawing from her pocket. only cuthbert vane, seated next to me, maintained without effort his serenity. for him the whole affair belonged in the category known as sporting, where a gentleman played his stake and accepted with equanimity the issue. as miss browne undid the oil-silk package everybody held his breath, except poor aunt jane, who most inopportunely swallowed a gnat and choked. the dead sailor's legacy consisted of a single sheet of time-stained paper. two-thirds of the sheet was covered by a roughly-drawn sketch in faded ink, giving the outline of the island shores as we had seen them from the _rufus smith_. here was the cove, with the name it bears in the admiralty charts--lantern bay--written in, and a dotted line indicating the channel. north of the bay the shore line was carried for only a little distance. on the south was shown the long tongue of land which protects the anchorage, and which ends in some detached rocks or islets. at a point on the seaward side of the tongue of land, about on a line with the head of the bay, the sketch ended in a swift backward stroke of the pen which gave something the effect of a cross. to all appearance the map was merely to give hopperdown his directions for entering the cove. there was absolutely no mark upon it to show where the treasure had been buried. now for the writing on the sheet below the map. it was in another hand than that which had written _lantern bay_ across the face of the cove, and which, though labored, was precise and clear. this other was an uneven, wavering scrawl: _he sed it is in a cave with mouths near by the grave of bill halliwell wich was cut down for he new to much. he sed you can bring a boat to the cave at the half tide but beware the turn for the pull is strong. he sed to find the grave again look for the stone at the head marked b. h. and a cross bones. in the chist is gold dubloons, a vast lot, also a silver cross wich he sed leve for the grave for he sed bill walks and thats unlucky_. that was all. a fairly clear direction for any friend who had attended the obsequies of bill and knew where to look for the stone marked b. h. and a cross-bones, but to perfect strangers it was vague. a blank look crept into the intent faces about the table. "it--it don't happen to say in more deetail jest precisely where that cave might be looked for?" inquired mr. tubbs hopefully. "in more detail?" repeated miss browne challengingly. "pray, mr. tubbs, what further detail could be required?" "a good deal more, i am afraid," remarked the scotchman grimly. miss browne whirled upon him. in her cold eye a spark had kindled. and suddenly i had a new vision of her. i saw her no longer as the deluder of aunt jane, but as herself the deluded. her belief in the treasure was an obsession. this map was her talisman, her way of escape from an existence which had been drab and dull enough, i dare say. "mr. shaw, we are given not one, but several infallible landmarks. the cave has two mouths, it can be approached by sea, it is in the immediate neighborhood of the grave of william halliwell, which is to be recognized by its headstone. as the area of our search is circumscribed by the narrow limits of this island, i fail to see what further marks of identification can be required." "a grave ninety years old and hidden beneath a tropical jungle is not an easy thing to find, miss browne. as to caves, i doubt but they are numerous. the formation here makes it more than likely. and there'll be more than one with two mouths, i'm thinking." "mr. shaw"--miss browne gave the effect of drawing herself up in line of battle--"i feel that i must give expression to the thought which comes to me at this moment. it is this--that if the members of this party are to be chilled by carping doubts, the wave of enthusiasm which has floated us thus far must inevitably recede, leaving us flotsam on a barren shore. what can one weak woman--pardon, my unfaltering jane!--two women, achieve against the thought of failure firmly held by him to whom, we looked to lead us boldly in our forward dash? mr. shaw, this is no time for crawling earthworm tactics. it is with the bold and sweeping glance of the eagle that we must survey this island, until, the proper point discerned, we swoop with majestic flight upon our predestined goal!" miss browne was somewhat exhausted by this effort, and paused for breath, whereupon mr. tubbs, anxious to retrieve his recent blunder, seized with dexterity this opportunity. "i get you. miss browne, i get you," said mr. tubbs with conviction. "victory ain't within the grasp of any individual that carries a heart like a cold pancake in his bosom. what this party needs is pep, and if them that was calculated on to supply it don't, why there's others which is not given to blowin' their own horn, but which might at a pinch dash forward like arnold--no relation to benedict--among the spears. i may be rather a man or thought than action, ma'am, and at present far from my native heath, which is the financial centers of the country, but if i remember right it was ulysses done the dome-work for the greeks, while certain persons that was depended on sulked in their tents. miss higglesby-browne, you can count--count, i say--on old h. h.!" "i thank you, mr. tubbs, i thank you!" replied miss browne with emotion. as for aunt jane, she gazed upon the noble countenance of mr. tubbs with such ecstatic admiration that her little nose quivered like a guinea-pig's. vi the cave with two mouths obscure as were the directions which hopperdown's niece had taken from his dying lips, one point at least was clear--the treasure-cave opened on the sea. this seemed an immense simplification of the problem, until you discovered that the great wall of cliffs was honeycombed with fissures. the limestone rock of which the island was composed was porous as a sponge. you could stand on the edge of the cliffs and watch the green water slide in and out of unseen caverns at your feet, and hear the sullen thunder of the waves that broke far in under the land. one of the boats which had conveyed us from the _rufus smith_ had been left with us, and in it mr. shaw, with the honorable cuthbert and captain magnus, made a preliminary voyage of discovery. this yielded the information above set down, plus, however, the thrilling and significant fact that a cave seemingly predestined to be the hiding-place of treasure, and moreover a cave with the specified two openings, ran under the point which protected the anchorage on the south, connecting the cove with the sea. although in their survey of the coast the voyagers had covered only a little distance on either side of the entrance to the bay, the discovery of this great double-doored sea-chamber under the point turned all thoughts from further explorations. only the scotchman remained exasperatingly calm and declined to admit that the treasure was as good as found. he refused to be swept off his feet even by mr. tubbs's undertaking to double everybody's money within a year, through the favor of certain financial parties with whom he was intimate. "i'll wait till i see the color of my money before i reckon the interest on it," he remarked. "it's true the cave would be a likely and convenient place for hiding the chest; the question is: wouldn't it be too likely and convenient? sampson would maybe not choose the spot of all others where the first comer who had got wind of the story would be certain to look." miss browne, at this, exchanged darkly significant glances with her two main supporters, and mr. tubbs came to the fore with an offer to clinch matters by discovering the grave of bill halliwell, with its marked stone, on the point above the cave within twenty-four hours. "look for it if you like," replied mr. shaw impatiently. "but don't forget that your tombstone is neither more nor less than such a boulder as there are thousands of on the island, and buried under the tropic growth of ninety years besides." miss browne murmured to aunt jane, in a loud aside, that she well understood now why the eminent explorer had _not_ discovered the south pole, and aunt jane murmured back that to her there had always been something so sacred about a tombstone that she couldn't help wondering if mr. shaw's attitude were really quite reverential. "well, friends," remarked mr. tubbs, "there's them that sees nothin' but the hole in the doughnut, and there's them that see the doughnut that's around the hole. i ain't ashamed to say that old h. h. is in the doughnut class. why, the old man himself used to remark--i guess it ain't news to some here about me bein' on the inside with most of the leadin' financial lights of the country--he used to remark, 'tubbs has it in him to bull the market on a black friday.' ladies, i ain't one that's inclined to boast, but i jest want to warn you not to be _too_ astonished when h. h. makes acquaintance with that tombstone, which i'm willin' to lay he does yet." "well, good luck to you," said the grim scot, "and let me likewise warn all hands not to be too astonished if we find that the treasure is not in the cave. but i'll admit it is as good a place as any for beginning the search, and there will be none gladder than i if it turns out that i was no judge of the workings of captain sampson's mind." the cave which was now the center of our hopes--i say our, because somehow or other i found myself hoping and fearing along with the rest, though carefully concealing it--ran under the point at its farther end. the sea-mouth of the cave was protected from the full swell of the ocean by some huge detached rocks rising a little way offshore, which caught and broke the waves. the distance was about sixty feet from mouth to mouth, and back of this transverse passage a great vaulted chamber stretched far under the land. the walls of the chamber rose sheer to a height of fifteen feet or more, when a broad ledge broke their smoothness. from this ledge opened cracks and fissures under the roof, suggesting in the dim light infinite possibilities in the way of hiding-places. besides these, a wide stretch of sand at the upper end of the chamber, which was bare at low tide, invited exploration. at high water the sea flooded the cavern to its farthest extremity and beat upon the walls. then there was a great surge and roar of waters through the passage from mouth to mouth, and at turn of tide--in hopeful agreement with the legend--the suck and commotion of a whirlpool, almost, as the sea drew back its waves. now and again, it was to prove, even the water-worn pavement between the two archways was left bare, and one could walk dry-shod along the rocks under the high land of the point from the beach to the cave. but this was at the very bottom of the ebb. mostly the lower end of the cave was flooded, and the explorers went back and forth in the boat. a certain drawback to boating in our island waters was the presence of hungry hordes of sharks. you might forget them for a moment and sit happily trailing your fingers overboard, and then a huge moving shadow would darken the water, and you saw the ripple cut by a darting fin and the flash of a livid belly as the monster rolled over, ready for his mouthful. i could not but admire the thoughtfulness of mr. tubbs, who since his submergence on the occasion of arriving had been as delicate about water as a cat, in committing himself to strictly land operations in the search for bill halliwell's tombstone. owing, i suppose, to the stoniness of the soil, the woods upon the point were less dense than elsewhere, and made an agreeable parade ground for mr. tubbs and his two companions--for he was accompanied in these daring explorations with unswerving fidelity by aunt jane and miss higglesby-browne. each of the three carried an umbrella, and they went solemnly in single file, mr. tubbs in the lead to ward off peril in the shape of snakes or jungle beasts. "to think of what that man exposes himself to for our sakes!" aunt jane said to me with emotion. "with no protection but his own bravery in case anything were to spring out!" but nothing ever did spring out but an angry old sow with a litter of piglets, before which the three umbrellas beat a rapid retreat. the routine of life on the island was now established for every one but me, who belonged neither to the land nor sea divisions, but dangled forlornly between them like mahomet's coffin. aunt jane had made a magnanimous effort to attach me to the umbrella contingent, and i had felt almost disposed to accept, in order to witness the resultant delight of miss higglesby-browne. but on second thoughts i declined, even though aunt jane was thus left unguarded to the blandishments of mr. tubbs, preferring, like the little bird in the play, to flock all alone, except when the honorable cuthbert could escape from his toil in the cave. what with the genius of cookie and the fruitfulness of our island, not to speak of supplies from the army and navy stores, we lived like sybarites, there were fish from stream and sea, cocoanuts and bananas and oranges from the trees in the clearing. i had hopes of yams and breadfruit also, but if they grew on leeward none of us had a speaking acquaintance with them. cookie did wonders with the pigs that were shot and brought in to him, though i never could sit down with appetite to a massacred infant served up on a platter, which is just what little pigs look like, "jes' yo' cas' yo' eye on dis yere innahcent," cookie would request, as he placed the suckling before mr. tubbs. "tendah as a new-bo'n babe, he am. jes' lak he been tucked up to sleep by his mammy. sho' now, how yo' got de heart to stick de knife in him, mistah tubbs?" it was significant that mr. tubbs, after occupying for a day or two an undistinguished middle place at the board, had somehow slid into the carver's post at the head of the table. flanking him were the two ladies, so that the land forces formed a solid and imposing phalanx. everybody else had a sense of sitting in outer darkness, particularly i, whom fate had placed opposite captain magnus. since landing on the island, captain magnus had forsworn the effeminacy of forks. loaded to the hilt, his knife would approach his cavernous mouth and disappear in it. yet when it emerged captain magnus was alive. where did it go? this was a question that agitated me daily. the history of captain magnus was obscure. it was certain that he had his captain's papers, though how he had mastered the science of navigation sufficiently to obtain them was a problem. though he held a british navigator's license, he did not appear to be an englishman. none of us ever knew, i think, from what country he originally came. his rough, mumbling, unready speech might have been picked up in any of the seaports of the english-speaking world. his manners smacked of the forecastle, and he was altogether so difficult to classify that i used to toy with the theory that he had murdered the real captain magnus for his papers and was masquerading in his character. the captain, as mr. vane had remarked, was miss browne's own find. before the objections of mr. shaw--evidently a negative influence from the beginning--had caused her to abandon the scheme. miss browne had planned to charter a vessel in new york and sail around the horn to the island. while nursing this project she had formed an extensive acquaintance with persons frequenting the new york water-front, among whom was captain magnus. as i heard her remark, he was the one nautical character whom she found sympathetic, by which i judge that the others were skeptical and rude. being sympathetic, captain magnus found it an easy matter to attach himself to the expedition--or perhaps it was violet who annexed him. i don't know which. mr. vane used to view the remarkable gastronomic feats of captain magnus with the innocent and quite unscornful curiosity of a little boy watching the bears in the zoo. evidently he felt that a horizon hitherto bounded mainly by high staunton manor was being greatly enlarged. i knew now that the honorable cuthbert's father was a baron, and that he was the younger of two sons, and that the elder was an invalid, so that the beautiful youth was quite certain in the long run to be lord grasmere. i had remained stolid under this information, feelingly imparted by aunt jane. i had refused to ask questions about high staunton manor. for already there was a vast amount of superfluous chaperoning being done. i couldn't speak to the b. y.--which is short for beautiful youth--without violet's cold gray eye being trained upon us. and aunt jane grew flustered directly, and i could see her planning an embroidery design of coronets, or whatever is the proper headgear of barons, for my trousseau. mr. tubbs had essayed to be facetious on the matter, but i had coldly quenched him. but mr. shaw was much the worst. my most innocent remark to the beautiful youth appeared to rouse suspicion in his self-constituted guardian. if he did not say in so many words, _beware, dear lad, she's stringing you_! or whatever the english of that is, it was because nobody could so wound the faith in the b. y.'s candid eyes. but to see the fluttering, anxious wing the scotchman tried to spread over that babe of six-feet-two you would have thought me a man-eating tigress. and i laughed, and flaunted my indifference in his sober face, and went away with bitten lips to the hammock they had swung for me among the palms-- the honorable cuthbert had a voice, a big, rich, ringing baritone like floods of golden honey. he had also a ridiculous little ukulele, on which he accompanied himself with a rhythmic strumming. when, like the sudden falling of a curtain, dusky, velvet, star-spangled, the wonderful tropic night came down, we used to build a little fire upon the beach and sit around it. then cuthbert vane would sing. of all his repertory, made up of music-hall ditties, american ragtime, and sweet old half-forgotten ballads, we liked best a certain wild rollicking song, picked up i don't know where, but wonderfully effective on that island where davis, and benito bonito, and many another of the roving gentry--not to mention that less picturesque villain, captain sampson of the _bonny lass_--had resorted between their flings with fortune. oh, who's, who's with me for the free life of a rover? oh, who's, who's with me for to sail the broad seas over? in every port we have gold to fling, and what care we though the end is to swing? sing ho, sing hey, this life's but a day, so live it free as a rover may. oh, who's, who's with me at fortune's call to wander? then, lads, to sea--and ashore with gold to squander! we'll set our course for the spanish main where the great plate-galleons steer for spain. sing ho, sing hey, this life's but a day, then live it free as a rover may. then leave toil and cold to the lubbers that will bear it. the world's fat with gold, and we're the lads to share it. what though swift death is the rover's lot? we've played the game and we'll pay the shot. sing ho, sing hey, this life's but a day, then live it free as a rover may. "sing ho, sing hey!" echoed the audience in a loud discordant roar. cookie over his dishpan flinging it back in a tremendous basso. cookie was the noble youth's only musical rival, and when he had finished his work we would invite him to join us at the fire and regale us with plantation melodies and camp-meeting hymns. the negro's melodious thunder mingled with the murmur of wind and wave like a kindred note, and the strange plaintive rhythm of his artless songs took one back and back, far up the stream of life, until a fire upon a beach seemed one's ancestral hearth and home. i realized that life on leeward island might rapidly become a process of reversion. vii a rabbit's foot it was fortunate that cookie knew nothing of the solitary grave somewhere on the island, with its stone marked with b. h. and a cross-bones, nor that the inhabitant thereof was supposed to walk. if he had, i think the strange spectacle of a lone negro in a small boat rowing lustily for the american continent might soon have been witnessed on the pacific by any eyes that were there to see. and we could ill have spared either boat or cook. yet even though unvexed by this gruesome knowledge, after two or three days i noticed that cookie was ill at ease. as the leisure member of the party, i enjoyed more of cookie's society than the rest. on this occasion while the morning was still in its early freshness he was permitting me to make fudge. but his usual joviality was gone. i saw that he glanced over his shoulder at intervals, muttering darkly to himself. also that a rabbit's foot was slung conspicuously about his neck. having made my fudge and set the pan on a stone in the stream to cool, i was about to retire with a view to conducting a limited exploring expedition of my own. the immunity of the umbrellas and the assurances of mr. shaw--not personally directed to me, of course; the armed truce under which we lived did not permit of that--had convinced me that i had not to dread anything more ferocious than the pigs, and the wildest of them would retire before a stick or stone. besides, i boasted a little automatic, which i carried strapped about my waist in a businesslike manner. mr. vane had almost got me to the point where i could shoot it off without shutting my eyes. thus equipped, i was about to set off into the woods. secretly i had been rehearsing a dramatic scene, with myself in the leading role: _treasure-seekers assembled, including a cold and cynical scot. enter virginia harding. she wears an expression elaborately casual, but there is a light of concealed triumph in her eye_. _aunt jane_: you thoughtless child, where have you been? really, my state of mind about you--etc., etc. _v. h._: only for a stroll, dear aunt. and by the way, in case it's of interest to any one, i might mention that during my walk i fell over a boulder which happened to be marked with the letters b. h. and a cross-bones. _immense commotion and excitement. every gaze turned to v. h. (including that of cynical scot) while on every cheek is the blush of shame at remembering that this is the same young person whom miss higglesby-browne was permitted to cut off by treaty from the ranks of the authorised treasure-seekers_. lured by this pleasing vision i had turned my back on cookie and the camp, when i was arrested by an exclamation: "miss jinny!" i turned to, find cookie gazing after me with an expression which, in the familiar phrase of fiction, i could not interpret, though among its ingredients were doubt and anguish. cookie, too, looked pale. i don't in the least know how he managed it, but that was the impression he conveyed, dusky as he was. "miss jinny, it mos' look lak yo' 'bout to go perambulatin' in dese yere woods?" "i am, cookie," i admitted. the whites of cookie's eyes became alarmingly conspicuous. drawing near in a stealthy manner he whispered: "yo' bettah not, miss jinny!" "better not?" i repeated, staring. he answered with a portentous head-shake. "oh, nonsense, cookie!" i said impatiently, "there's not a thing on the island but the pigs!" "miss jinny," he solemnly replied, "dey's pigs and pigs." "yes, but pigs _is_ pigs, you know," i answered, laughing. i was about to walk on, but once more cookie intervened. "dey's pigs and pigs, chile--live ones and--dead ones. "dead ones? of course--haven't we been eating them?" "yo' won't neveh eat dis yere kind o' dead pig, miss jinny. it's--it's a ha'nt!" the murder was out. cookie leaned against a cocoa-palm and wiped his ebon brow. persistently questioned, he told at last how, today and yesterday, arising in the dim dawn to build his fire before the camp was stirring, he had seen lurking at the edge of the clearing a white four-footed shape. it was a pig, yet not a pig; its ghostly hue, its noiseless movements, divided it from all proper mundane porkers by the dreadful gulf which divides the living from the dead. the first morning cookie, doubtful of his senses, had flung a stone and the spectral thing had vanished like a shadow. on its second appearance, having had a day and a night for meditation, he had known better than to commit such an outrage upon the possessor of ghostly powers, and had resorted to prayer instead. this had answered quite as well, for the phantom pig had dissolved like the morning mists. while the sun blazed, what with his devotions and his rabbit's foot and a cross of twigs nailed to a tree. cookie felt a fair degree of security. but his teeth chattered in his head at the thought of approaching night. meanwhile he could not in conscience permit me to venture forth into the path of this horror, which might, for all we knew, be lurking in the jungle shadows even through the daylight hours. also, though he did not avow this motive, i believe he found my company very reassuring. it is immensely easier to face a ghost in the sustaining presence of other flesh and blood. "cookie," said i sternly, "you've been drinking too much cocoanut-milk and it has gone to your head. what you saw was just a plain ordinary pig." cookie disputed this, citing the pale hue of the apparition as against the fact that all our island pigs were black. "then there happens to be a blond pig among them that we haven't seen," i assured him. but the pig of flesh, cookie reminded me, was a heavy lumbering creature. this shape was silent as a moonbeam. there was also about it a dreadful appearance of stealth and secrecy--cookie's eyes bulged at the recollection. nothing living but a witch's cat could have disappeared from cookie's vision as did the ghostly pig. for a moment i wavered in my determination. what if the island had its wild creatures after all? but neither lynx nor panther nor any other beast of prey is white, except a polar bear, and it would be unusual to meet one on a tropical island. i decided that cookie's pig was after all a pig, though still in the flesh. i thought i remembered having seen quite fair pigs, which would pass for white with a frightened negro in the dim light of dawn. so far only black pigs had been visible, but perhaps the light ones were shyer and kept to the remote parts of the island. i consoled cookie as best i could by promising to cross my fingers if i heard or saw anything suspicious, and struck out into the woods, for all my brave words to cookie, i had no intention of going very far afield. from the shore of the cove i had observed that the ground behind the clearing rose to the summit of a low ridge, perhaps four hundred feet in height, which jutted from the base of the peak. from this ridge i thought i might see something more of the island than the limited environment of lantern bay. as the woods shut out the last glimpse of the white tents in the clearing, as even the familiar sound of the surf died down to a faint, half-imagined whisper mingling with the rustling of the palms overhead, i experienced a certain discomfort, which persons given to harsh and unqualified terms might have called fear. it seemed to me as if a very strong cord at the rear of my belt were jerking me back toward the inglorious safety of camp. fortunately there came to me a vision of the three umbrellas and of mr. tubbs heroically exposing his devoted bosom to non-existent perils, and i resolved that the superior smiles with which i had greeted aunt jane's recital should not rise up to shame me now. i fingered my automatic and marched on up the hill, trying not to gasp when a leaf rustled or a cocoanut dropped in the woods. there was little undergrowth between the crowding trunks of the cocoa-palms. far overhead their fronds mingled in a green thatch, through which a soft light filtered down. here and there the close ranks of the palms were broken by an outcropping of rock, glaring up hot and sunbeaten at a distant patch of the sky. the air of the forest was still and languid, its heat tempered like that of a room with drawn blinds. i gained the summit of the ridge, and stood upon a bare rock platform, scantily sheltered by a few trees, large shrubs rather, with a smooth waxy leaf of vivid green. on the left rose the great mass of the peak. from far above among its crags a beautiful foamy waterfall came hurtling down. before me the ground fell away to the level of the low plateau, or mesa, as we say in california, which made up the greater part of the island. cutting into the green of this was the gleaming curve of a little bay, which in mr. shaw's chart of the island showed slightly larger than our cove. part of it was hidden by the shoulder of the peak, but enough was visible to give a beautiful variety to the picture, which was set in a silver frame of sea. i had not dreamed of getting a view so glorious from the little eminence of the ridge. here was an item of news to take back to camp. having with great originality christened the place lookout, i turned to go. and as i turned i saw a shape vanish into the woods. it was an animal, not a human shape. and it was light-footed and swift and noiseless--and it was white. it had, indeed, every distinguishing trait of cookie's phantom pig. only it was not a pig. my brief shadowy glimpse of it had told me that. i knew what it was not, but what it was i could not, as i stood there rooted, even guess, would it attack me, or should i only die of fright? i wondered if my heart were weak, and hoped it was, so that i should not live to feel the teeth of the unknown thing sink in my flesh. i thought of my revolver and after an infinity of time managed to draw it from the case. my fingers seemed at once nervelessly limp and woodenly rigid. this was not at all the dauntless front with which i had dreamed of meeting danger. i had fancied myself with my automatic making a rather pretty picture as a young amazon--but i had now a dreadful fear that my revolver might spasmodically go off and wound the thing, and then even if it had meditated letting me go it would certainly attack me. nevertheless i clung to my revolver as to my last hope. i began to edge away crab-wise into the wood. like a metronome i said to myself over and over monotonously, _don't run, don't run_! dim legends about the power of the human eye floated through my brain. but how quell the creature with my eye when i could not see it? as for the hopeless expedient of screaming, i hadn't courage for it. i was silent, as i would fain have been invisible. only my dry lips kept muttering soundlessly, _don't run, don't run_! i did not run. instead, i stepped on a smooth surface of rock and slid downhill like a human toboggan until i fetched up against a dead log. i discovered it to be a dead log after a confused interval during which i vaguely believed myself to have been swallowed by an alligator. while the alligator illusion endured i must have lain comatose and immovable. indeed, when my senses began to come back i was still quite inert. i experienced that curious tranquillity which is said to visit those who are actually within the jaws of death. there i lay prone, absolutely at the mercy of the mysterious white prowler of the forest--and i did not care. the whole petty business of living seemed a long way behind me now. languidly at last i opened my eyes. within three yards of me, in the open rock-paved glade where i had fallen, stood the thing. as softly as i had opened my eyes i shut them. i had an annoyed conviction that they were deceiving me--a very unworthy thing for eyes to do that were soon to be closed in death. again i lifted my lids. yes, there it was--only now it had put an ear back and was sniffing at me with a mingling of interest and apprehension.. the strange beast of the jungle was a white bull-terrier. abruptly i sat up. the terrier gave a startled sidewise bound, but paused again and stood regarding me. "here, pup! here, pup! nice, nice doggums!" i said in soothing accents. the dog gave a low whine and stood shivering, eager but afraid. i continued my blandishments. little by little the forlorn creature drew nearer, until i put out a cautious hand and stroked his ears. he dodged affrightedly, but presently crept back again. soon his head was against my knee, and he was devouring my hand with avid caresses. some time, before his abandonment on the island, he had been a well-brought-up and petted animal. months or years of wild life had estranged him from humanity, yet at the human touch the old devotion woke again. the thing now was to lure him back to camp and restore him to the happy service of his gods. i rose and picked up my pistol, which had regained my confidence by not going off when i dropped it. with another alluring, "here, doggums!" i started on my way. he shrank, trembled, hesitated, then was after me with a bound. so we went on through the forest. as we neared the camp the four-footed castaway's diffidence increased. i had to pet and coax. but at last i brought him triumphantly across the rubicon of the little stream, and marched him into camp under the astounded eyes of cookie. at sight of the negro the dog growled softly and crouched against my skirt. cookie stood like an effigy of amazement done in black and white. "fo' de lawd's sake, miss jinny," he burst out at last, "am dat de ghos'-pig?" "it was, cookie, but i changed him into a live dog by crossing my fingers. mind your rabbit's foot. he might eat it, and then very likely we'd have a ghost on our hands again. but i think he'll stay a dog for the present." "yo' go 'long, miss jinny," said cookie valiantly. "yo' think i scared of any ghos' what lower hissel to be a live white mong'ol dog? yere, yo' ki-yi, yo' bettah mek friends with ol' cookie, 'cause he got charge o' de grub. yere's a li'le fat ma'ow bone what mebbe come off'n yo' own grandchile, but yo' ain' goin' to mind dat now yo' is trans formulated dis yere way." and evidently the reincarnated ghost-pig did not. with the midday reunion my hour of distinction arrived. the tale of the ghost-pig was told from the beginning by cookie, with high tributes to my courage in sallying forth in pursuit of the phantom. even those holding other views of the genesis of the white dog were amazed at his presence on the island. in spite of cookie's aspersions, the creature was no mongrel, but a thoroughbred of points. not by any means a dog which some little south american coaster might have abandoned here when it put in for water. the most reasonable hypothesis seemed to be that he had belonged to the copra gatherer, and was for some reason left behind on his master's departure. but who that had loved a dog enough to make it the companion of his solitude would go away and leave it? the thing seemed to me incredible. yet here, otherwise unaccounted for, was the corporeal presence of the dog. i had named the terrier in the first ten minutes of our acquaintance. crusoe was the designation by which he was presented to his new associates. it was good to see how swiftly the habits of civilization returned to him. soon he was getting under foot and courting caresses as eagerly as though all his life he had lived on human bounty, instead of bringing down his own game in royal freedom. yet with all his well-bred geniality there was no wandering of his allegiance. i was his undisputed queen and lady paramount. crusoe, then, became a member of the party in good and regular standing--much more so than his mistress. mr. tubbs compared him not unfavorably with a remarkable animal of his own, for which the new york kennel club had bidden him name his own price, only to be refused with scorn. violet tolerated him. aunt jane called him a dear weenty pettums love. captain magnus kicked him when he thought i was not looking, cuthbert vane chummed with him in frankest comradeship, and mr. shaw softened toward him to an extent which made me mainly murmur _love me, love my dog_--only reversed. not that i _in the least_ wanted to be loved, only you feel it an impertinence in a person who so palpably does not love you to endeavor to engage the affections of your bull-terrier. as to cookie, he magnanimously consented to overlook crusoe's dubious past as a ghost-pig, and fed him so liberally that the terrier's lean and graceful form threatened to assume the contours of a beer-keg. viii an excursion and an alarm as the only person who had yet discovered anything on the island, i was now invested with a certain importance. also, i had a playfellow and companion for future walks, in lieu of cuthbert vane, held down tight to the thankless toil of treasure-hunting by his stem taskmaster. but at the same time i was provided with an annoying, because unanswerable, question which had lodged at the back of my mind like a crumb in the throat: by what strange chance had the copra gatherer gone away and left crusoe on the island? since the discovery of crusoe the former inhabitant of the cabin in the clearing had been much in my thoughts. i had been dissatisfied with him from the beginning, first, because he was not a pirate, and also because he had left behind no relic more fitting than a washtub. not a locket, not a journal, not his own wasted form stretched upon a pallet-- i had expressed these sentiments to cuthbert vane, who replied that in view of the washtub it was certain that the hermit of the island had not been a pirate, as he understood they never washed. i said neither did any orthodox hermit, to which mr. vane rejoined that he probably was not orthodox but a dissenter. he said dissenters were so apt to be peculiar, don't you know? one morning, instead of starting directly after breakfast for the cave, mr. shaw busied himself in front of the supply tent with certain explosives which were to be used in the digging operations later. the neighborhood of these explosives was a great trial to aunt jane, who was constantly expecting them to go off. i rather expected it too, and used to shudder at the thought that if we all went soaring heavenward together we might come down inextricably mixed. then when the rufus smith returned and they tried to sort us out before interment, i might have portions of violet, for instance, attributed to me. in that case i felt that, like bill halliwell, i should walk. having inquired of the honorable cuthbert and found that for an hour or two the boat would not be in requisition, i permitted the beautiful youth to understand that i would not decline an invitation to be rowed about the cove. mr. shaw had left his marine glasses lying about, and i had been doing some exploring with them. under the great cliffs on the north shore of the bay i had seen an object that excited my curiosity. it seemed to be the hull of a small vessel, lying on the narrow strip of rocks and sand under the cliff. now wreckage anywhere fills me with sad and romantic thoughts, but on the shore of a desolate island even a barrel-hoop seems to suffer a sea-change into something rich and strange. i therefore commanded the b. y. to row me over to the spot where the derelict lay. i lay back idly in the stern as the boat skimmed over the smooth water beneath the strokes of my splendid oarsman. more than ever he looked like the island god. every day he grew more brown and brawny, more superb in his physical vigor. but his hands, once so beautiful, were getting rough and hard with toil. there was a great raw bruise on his arm. i exclaimed pityingly. "oh, it's nothing. we get knocked about a bit by the sea in the cave now and then." "you mean you are risking your lives every day for the sake of this legendary treasure that you have no _reasonable_ reason to suppose is there." "perhaps not," he admitted, "but then it's such good fun looking, you know." "that's according to one's idea of fun," i said ironically. "oh, well, a chap can't spend his days on flowery beds of ease, of course. really, i find this story-book kind of thing we're doing is _warm stuff_, as you americans say. and then there's shaw--think of the difference it will make to the dear old chap if we find the gold--buy a ship of his own and snap his fingers at the p. & o." "and you'll go along as cabin-boy or something?" "'fraid not," he said quite simply. "a chap has his bit to do at home, you know." the cliffs on the north shore of the cove were considerably higher than on the other side. the wreck lay close in, driven high upon the narrow shelf of rocks and sand at the base of the sheer ascent. sand had heaped up around her hull and flung itself across her deck like a white winding-sheet. surprisingly, the vessel was a very small one, a little sloop, indeed, much like the fragile pleasure-boats that cluster under the sausalito shore at home. the single mast had been broken off short, and the stump of the bowsprit was visible, like a finger beckoning for rescue from the crawling sand. she was embedded most deeply at the stem, and forward of the sand-heaped cockpit the roof of the small cabin was still clear. "poor forlorn little boat!" i said. "what in the world do you suppose brought such a mite of a thing to this unheard-of spot?" "perhaps she belonged to the copra chap. one man could handle her." "what would he want with her? a small boat like this is better for fishing and rowing about the cove." "perhaps she brought him here from panama, though he couldn't have counted on taking back a very bulky cargo." "then why leave her strewn about on the rocks? and besides"--here the puzzle of crusoe recurred to me and seemed to link itself with this--"then how did he get away himself?" but my oarsman was much more at home on the solid ground of fact than on the uncharted waters of the hypothetical. "don't know, i'm sure," he returned uninterestedly. evidently the hermit had got away, so why concern one's self about the method? i am sure the light brigade must have been made up of cuthbert vanes. "theirs not to reason why, theirs but to do or die--" we rowed in close under the port bow of the sloop, and on the rail i made out a string of faded letters. i began excitedly to spell them out. "i--s--l--oh, _island queen_! you see she did belong here. probably she brought the original porcine adam and eve to the island." "luckily forgot the snake, though!" remarked the honorable bertie with unlooked-for vivacity. for so far aunt jane's trembling anticipations had been unfulfilled by the sight of a single snake, a fact laid by me to the credit of st. patrick and by cookie to that of the pigs. "snakes 'd jes' be oysters on de half shell to dem pigs," declared cookie. as we rowed away from the melancholy little derelict i saw that near by a narrow gully gave access to the top of the cliff, and i resolved that i would avail myself of this path to visit the _island queen_ again. my mind continued to dwell upon the unknown figure of the copra gatherer. perhaps the loss of his sloop had condemned him to weary months or years of solitude upon the island, before the rare glimmer of a sail or the trail of a steamer's smoke upon the horizon gladdened his longing eyes. hadn't he grown very tired of pork, and didn't his soul to this day revolt at a ham sandwich? what would he say if he ever discovered that he might have brought away a harvest of gold instead of copra from the island? last but not least, did not his heart and conscience, if he by chance possessed them, ache horribly at the thought of the forsaken crusoe? suddenly i turned to cuthbert vane. "how do you know, really, that he ever did leave the island?" i demanded. "who--the copra chap? well, why else was the cabin cleared out so carefully--no clothes left about or anything?" "that's true," i acknowledged. the last occupant of the hut had evidently made a very deliberate and orderly business of packing up to go. we drifted about the cove for a while, then steered into the dim murmuring shadow of the treasure-cavern. it was filled with dark-green, lisping water, and a continual resonant whispering in which you seemed to catch half-framed words, and the low ripple of laughter. mr. vane indicated the point at which they had arrived in their exploration among the fissures opening from the ledge. the place held me with its fascination, but we dared not linger long, for as the tide turned one man would have much ado to manage the boat. so we slid through the archway into the bright sunshine of the cove, and headed for the camp. as we neared the beach we saw a figure pacing it. i knew that free stride. it was dugald shaw. and quite unexpectedly my heart began to beat with staccato quickness. dugald shaw, who didn't like me and never looked at me--except just sometimes, when he was perfectly sure i didn't know it. dugald shaw, the silent, unboastful man who had striven and starved and frozen on the dreadful southern ice-fields, who had shared the viking deeds of the heroes--whom just to think of warmed my heart with a safe, cuddled, little-girl feeling that i had never known since i was a child on my father's knee. there he was, waiting for us, and splashing into the foam to help cuthbert beach the boat--he for whom a thousand years ago the skalds would have made a saga-- the b. y. hailed him cheerfully as we sprang out upon the sand. but the scotchman was unsmiling. "make haste after your tools, lad," he ordered. "we'll have fine work now to get inside the cave before the turn." those were his words; his tone and his grim look meant, _so in spite of all my care you are being beguiled by a minx_-- it was his tone that i answered. "oh, don't scold mr. vane!" i implored. "every paradise has its serpent, and as there are no others here i suppose i am it. of course all lady serpents who know their business have red hair. don't blame mr. vane for what was naturally all my fault." not a line of his face changed. indeed, before my most vicious stabs it never did change. though of course it would have been much more civil of him, and far less maddening, to show himself a little bit annoyed. "to be sure it seems unreasonable to blame the lad," he agreed soberly, "but then he happens to be under my authority." "meaning, i suppose, that you would much prefer to blame _me_," i choked. "there's logic, no doubt, in striking at the root of the trouble," he admitted, with an air of calm detachment. "then strike," i said furiously, "strike, why don't you, and not beat about the bush so!" because then he would be quite hopelessly in the wrong, and i could adopt any of several roles--the coldly haughty, the wounded but forgiving, etc., with great enjoyment. but without a change in his glacial manner he quite casually remarked: "it would seem i had struck--home." i walked away wishing the dynamite would go off, even if i had to be mixed with violet till the last trump. fortunately nobody undertook to exercise any guardianship over crusoe, and the little white dog bore me faithful company in my rambles. mostly these were confined to the neighborhood of the cove. i never ventured beyond lookout ridge, but there i went often with crusoe, and we would sit upon a rock and talk to each other about our first encounter there, and the fright he had given me. everybody else had gone, gazed and admired. but the only constant pilgrim, besides myself, was, of all people, captain magnus. soon between us we had worn a path through the woods to the top of the ridge. the captain's unexpected ardor for scenery carried him thither whenever he had half an hour to spare from the work in the cave. needless to say, crusoe and i timed our visits so as not to conflict with his. a less discreet beast than crusoe would long ere this have sampled the captain's calves, for the sailor missed no sly chance to exasperate the animal. but the wise dog contented himself with such manifestations as a lifted lip and twitching ears, for he had his own code of behavior, and was not to be goaded into departing from it. one day, as crusoe and i came down from the ridge, we met captain magnus ascending. i had in my hand a small metal-backed mirror, which i had found, surprisingly, lying in a mossy cleft between the rocks. it was a thing such as a man might carry in his pocket, though on the island it seemed unlikely that any one would do' so. i at once attributed the mirror to captain magnus, for i knew that no one else had been to the ridge for days. i was wondering as i walked along whether by some sublime law of compensation the captain really thought himself beautiful, and sought this retired spot to admire not the view but his own physiognomy. when the captain saw me he stopped full in the path. there was a growth of fern on either side. i approached slowly, and, as he did not move, paused, and held out the mirror. "i think you must have dropped this, captain magnus. i found it on the rocks." for an instant his face changed. his evasive eyes were turned to me searchingly and sharply. he took the glass from my hand and slipped it into his pocket. i made a movement to pass on, then stopped, with a faint dawning of discomfort. for the heavy figure of the captain still blocked the path.. a dark flush had come into the man's face. his yellow teeth showed between his parted lips. his eyes had a swimming brightness. "what's your hurry?" he remarked, with a certain insinuating emphasis. i began to tremble. "i am on my way back to camp, captain magnus. please let me pass." "it won't do no harm if you're a little late. there ain't no one there keepin' tab. ain't you always a-strayin' off with the honorable? i ain't so pretty, but--" "you are impertinent. let me pass." "oh, i'm impert'nent, am i? that means fresh, maybe. i'm a plain man and don't use frills on my langwidge. well, when i meets a little skirt that takes my eyes there ain't no harm in lettin' her know it, is there? maybe the honorable could say it nicer--" with a forward stride he laid a hand upon my arm. i shook him off and stepped back. fear clutched my throat. i had left my revolver in my quarters. oh, the dreadful denseness of these woods, the certainty that no wildest cry of mine could pierce them! and then crusoe, who had been waiting quietly behind me in the path, slipped in between us. every hair on his neck was bristling. the lifted upper lip snarled unmistakably. he gave me a swift glance which said, _shall i spring_? quite suddenly the gorilla blandishments of captain magnus came to an end. "say," he said harshly, "hold back that dog, will you? i don't want to kill the cur." "you had better not," i returned coldly. "i should have to explain how it happened, you know. as it is i shall say nothing. but i shall not forget my revolver again when i go to walk." and crusoe and i went swiftly down the path which the captain no longer disputed. ix "lassie, lassie. . ." two or three days later occurred a painful episode. the small unsuspected germ of it had lain ambushed in a discourse of mr. shaw's, delivered shortly after our arrival on the island, on the multifarious uses of the cocoa-palm. he told how the juice from the unexpanded flower-spathes is drawn off to form a potent toddy, so that where every prospect pleases man may still be vile. cookie, experimentally disposed, set to work. mr. vane, also experimentally, sampled the results of cookie's efforts. the liquor had merely been allowed to ferment, whereas a complicated process is necessary for the manufacture of the true arrack, but enough had been achieved to bring about dire consequences for cuthbert vane, who had found the liquid cool and refreshing, and was skeptical about its potency. aunt jane took the matter very hard, and rebuked the ribald mirth of mr. tubbs. he had to shed tears over a devastating poem called "the drunkard's home," before she would forgive him. cookie made his peace by engaging to vote the prohibition ticket at the next election. my own excuses for the unfortunate were taken in very ill part. my aunt said she had always understood that life in the tropics was very relaxing to the moral fiber, and mine was certainly affected--and besides she wasn't certain that barons wore coronets anyhow. mr. shaw was disturbed over cuthbert, who was not at all bad, only queer and sleepy, and had to be led away to slumber in retirement. also, it was an exceptionally low tide and mr. shaw had counted on taking advantage of it to work in the cave. now cuthbert was laid up-- "you and i will have to manage by ourselves, magnus." "nothing doing--boat got to be patched up--go out there without it and get caught!" growled the captain. "well, lend a hand, then. we can be ready with the boat inside an hour." the captain hesitated queerly. his wandering eyes seemed to be searching in every quarter for something they did not find. at last he mumbled that he thought he felt a touch of the sun, and had decided to lay off for the afternoon and make his way across the island. he said he wanted to shoot water-fowl and that they had all been frightened away from the cove, but that with the glass he had seen them from lookout thickly about the other bay. "very well," said the scotchman coldly. "i suppose you must suit yourself. i can get the boat in shape without help, i dare say." i saw him presently looking in an annoyed and puzzled fashion after the vanishing figure of the sailor. mr. tubbs and the umbrellas soon disappeared into the woods. i believe the search for bill halliwell's tombstone was no longer very actively pursued, and that the trio spent their time ensconced in a snug little nook with hammocks and cushions, where mr. tubbs beguiled the time with reading aloud--aunt jane and violet both being provided with literature--and relating anecdotes of his rise to greatness in the financial centers of the country. i more than suspected mr. tubbs of feeling that such a bird in the hand as aunt jane was worth many doubloons in the bush. but in spite of uneasiness about the future, for the present i rested secure in the certainty that they could not elope from the island, and that there was no one on it with authority to metamorphose aunt jane into mrs. hamilton h. tubbs. the waters of the cove had receded until a fringe of rocks under the high land of the point, usually covered, had been left bare. i had watched the emergence of their black jagged surfaces for some time before it occurred to me that they offered a means of access to the cave. the cave--place of fascination and mystery! here was the opportunity of all others to explore it, unhampered by any one, just crusoe and i alone, in the fashion that left me freest to indulge my dreams. i waited until the scotchman's back was safely turned, because if he saw me setting forth on this excursion he was quite certain to command me to return, and i had no intention of submitting to his dictatorial ways and yet was not sure how i was successfully to defy him. i believed him capable of haling me lack by force, while tears or even swoons left him unmoved. of course he would take the absurd ground that the cave was dangerous, in the face of the glaring fact that a girl who had come to this island solely to protect aunt jane ought certainly to be able to protect herself. besides, what right had he to care if i was drowned, anyhow? but of course i was not going to be. the retreating tide had left deep pools behind, each a little cosmos of fairy seaweeds and tiny scuttling crabs and rich and wonderful forms of life which were strange to me. crusoe and i were very much interested, and lingered a good deal on the way. but at last we reached the great archway, and passed with a suddenness which was like a plunge into cool water from the hot glare of the tropic sunshine into the green shadow of the cavern. at the lower end, between the two arches, a black, water-worn rock paving rang under one's feet. further in under the point the floor of the cave was covered with white sand. all the great shadowy place was murmuring like a vast sea-shell. beyond the southern archway spread the limitless heaving plain of the pacific. near at hand bare black rocks rose from the surges, like skeletons of the land that the sea had devoured. and after a while these walls that supported the cavern roof would be nibbled away, and the roof would fall, and the waves roar victorious over the ruins. i wished i could visit the place in darkness. it would be thrice as mysterious, filled with its hollow whispering echoes, as in the day. i dreamed of it as it might have been when a boat from the _bonny lass_ crept in, and the faint winking eye of a lantern struck a gleam from the dark waters and showed nothing all around but blackness, and more blackness. from the ledge far above my head led off those narrow, teasing crevices in which the three explorers did their unrewarded burrowing. i could see the strands of a rope ladder lying coiled at the edge of the shelf, where it was secured by spikes. the men dragged down the ladder with a boat-hook when they wanted to ascend. i looked about with a hope that perhaps they had left the boat-hook somewhere. i found no boat-hook but instead a spade, which had been driven deep into the sand and left, too firmly imbedded for the tide to bear away. at once a burning hope that i, alone and unassisted, might bring to light the treasure of the bonny lass seethed in my veins. i jerked the spade loose and fell to. i now discovered the great truth that digging for treasure is the most thrilling and absorbing occupation known to man. time ceased to be, and the weight of the damp and close-packed sand seemed, that of feathers. this temporary state of exaltation passed, to be sure, and the sand got very heavy, and my back ached, but still i dug. crusoe watched proceedings interestedly at first, then wandered off on business of his own. presently he returned and began to fuss about and bark. he was a restless little beast, wanting to be always on the move. he came and tugged at my skirt, uttering an uneasy whine. "be quiet, crusoe!" i commanded, threatening him with my spade. the madness of the treasure-lust possessed me. i was panting now, and my hands began to feel like baseball mitts, but still i dug. crusoe had ceased to importune me; vaguely i was aware that he had got tired and run off. i toiled on, pausing now and then for breath. i was leaning on my spade, rather dejectedly considering the modest excavation i had achieved, when i felt a little cool splash at my feet. dropping my spade i whirled around--and a shriek echoed through the cave as i saw pouring into it the dark insidious torrent of the returning tide. how had i forgotten it, that deadly thing, muttering to itself out there, ready to spring back like an unleashed beast? crusoe had warned me--and then he had forsaken me, and i was alone. and yet at first, wild as my terror was, i had no thought but that somehow i could escape. that these waters were for me the very face of death, sure and relentless, terrible and slow, did not at once seize hold upon my heart. frantically i sprang for the entrance on the cove. the floor of the cave was sloping, and the water deepened swiftly as i advanced. soon i was floundering to my knees, and on the instant a great wave rushed in, drenching me to the waist, dazing me with its spray and uproar, and driving me back to the far end of the cave. with a dreadful hollow sucking sound the surge retreated. i staggered again toward the archway that was my only door to life. the water was deeper now, and swiftly came another fierce inrush of the sea that drove me back. between the two archways a terrible current was setting. it poured along with the rush of a mountain river, wild, dark, tumultuous. i had fled to the far end of the cave, but the sea pursued me. swiftly the water climbed--it flung me against the wall, then dragged me back. i clutched at the naked rock with bleeding fingers. again, after a paroxysm during which i had seemed to stand a great way off and listen to my own shrieks, there came to me a moment of calm. i knew that my one tenuous thread of hope lay in launching myself into that wild flood that was tearing through into the cove. i was not a strong swimmer, but a buoyant one. i might find refuge on some half-submerged rock on the shores of the cove--at least i should perish in the open, in the sunlight, not trapped like a desperate rat. and i began to fight my way toward the opening. and then a dreadful vision flashed across my mind, weighed down my feet like lead, choked back even the cry from my frozen lips. sharks! the black cutting fin, the livid belly, the dreadful jaws opening--no, no, better to die here, better the clean embrace of the waters--_if indeed the sharks did not come into the cave_. and then i think i went quite mad. i remember trying to climb up to the ledge which hung beetling fifteen feet above. afterward my poor hands showed how desperately. and i remember that once i slipped and went clear under, and how i choked and strangled in the salt water. for my mouth was always open, screaming, screaming continually. and when i saw the boat fighting its way inch by inch into the cave i was sure that it was a vision, and that only my own wild beseeching of him to save me had made the face of dugald shaw arise before my dying eyes. dugald shaw was still mending the boat on the shore of the cove, and this was a mocking phantom. only the warm human clasp of the arms that drew me into the boat made me believe in him. the boat bobbed quietly in the eddy at the far end of the cave, while a wet, sobbing, choking heap clung to dugald shaw. i clasped him about the neck and would not let him go, for fear that i should find myself alone again, perishing in the dark water. my head was on his breast, and he was pressing back my wet hair with strong and tender hands. what was this he was saying? "my lassie, my little, little lassie!" and no less incredible than this it was to feel his cheek pressed, very gently, against my hair-- after a little my self-control came back to me. i stopped my senseless childish crying, lifted my head and tried to speak. i could only whisper, "you came, you came!" "of course i came!" he said huskily. "there, don't tremble so--you are safe--safe in my arms!" after a while he lifted me into the stern and began to maneuver the boat out of the cave. i suppose at another time i should have realized the peril of it. the fierce flow through the archway all but swamped us, the current threatened to hurl us against the rocks, but i felt no fear. he had come to save me, and he would. all at once the dreadful shadow of the cavern was left behind, and the sunshine immersed my chilled body like a draught of wine. i lay huddled in the stern, my cheek upon my hand, as he rowed swiftly across the cove and drove the boat upon the beach. everybody but captain magnus was assembled there, including crusoe. crusoe it was who had given warning of my danger. like a wise little dog, when i ignored his admonitions he had run home. at first his uneasiness and troubled barking had got no notice. once or twice the scotchman, worried by his fretfulness, had ordered him away. then across his preoccupied mind there flashed a doubt. he laid down his tools and spoke to the animal. instantly crusoe dashed for the rocks, barking and crying with eagerness. but the path was closed, the tide was hurrying in, and crusoe whined pitiably as he crept back and crouched against the man who of course knew better than a little dog what must be done. then mr. shaw understood. he snatched the painter of the boat and dragged it down the beach. he was shoving off as cookie, roused by crusoe's barking, appeared from the seclusion of his afternoon siesta. to him were borne the scotchman's parting words: "virginia harding--in the cave--hot blankets--may be drowning--" "and at dat," said cookie, relating his part in the near-tragedy with unction, "i jes' natchully plumped right down on mah ma'ah bones and wrestled with de lawd in prayah." this unique proceeding on cookie's part necessarily awoke the interest both of the recovered cuthbert vane, just emerging after his prolonged slumbers, and of the trio who had that moment returned from the woods. importuned for an explanation, cookie arose from his devotional posture and put the portentous query: "mistah vane, sah, be dey any propah coffin-wood on dis yere island?" instantly connecting my absence with this terrible question, aunt jane shrieked and fell into the arms of mr. tubbs. i got the story from cuthbert vane, and i must say i was unpleasantly struck by the facility with which my aunt seemed to have fallen into mr. tubbs's embrace--as if with the ease of habit. mr. tubbs, it appeared, had staggered a little under his fair burden, which was not to be wondered at, for aunt jane is of an overflowing style of figure and mr. tubbs more remarkable for brain than brawn. violet, however, had remained admirably calm, and exhorted aunt jane to remember that whatever happened it was all for the best. "poor violet," i commented. "to think that after all it didn't happen!" a slow flush rose to the cheeks of the beautiful youth. he was sitting beside the hammock, where i was supposed to be recuperating. of course it was to please aunt jane that i had to be an invalid, and she had insisted on mounting guard and reading aloud from one of miss browne's books about psycho-evolution or something until cuthbert vane came along and relieved her--and me. "it would have happened, though," said the honorable cuthbert solemnly, "if it hadn't been for old shaw. i can't get over it, vir--miss virginia, that i wasn't on deck myself, you know. here's old dugald been doing the heroic all his life, and now he gets his chance again while i'm sleeping off those bally cocoanuts. it's hard on a chap. i--i wish it had been me." however dubious his grammar, there was no mistaking the look that brightened like the dawn in the depths of his clear eyes. my breath went from me suddenly. "oh," i cried excitedly, "isn't that---yes, i _thought_ it was the dinner gong!" for as if in response to my dire need, the clang of cookie's gong echoed through the island silences. x what crusoe and i found when after those poignant moments in the boat i met dugald shaw in commonplace fashion at the table, a sudden, queer, altogether unprecedented shyness seized me. i sat looking down at my plate with the gaucherie of a silly child. the episode of the afternoon provided mr. tubbs with ammunition for a perfect fusillade of wit. he warned mr. shaw that hereafter he might expect neptune to have a grudge against him for having robbed the sea-god of his beauteous prey. i said i thought most likely it was not neptune that was robbed but sharks, but sharks not being classic, mr. tubbs would have none of them. he said he believed that if mr. shaw had not inopportunely arrived, neptune with his tripod would soon have up-reared upon the wave. "oh--_tripod_, mr. tubbs?" i said inquiringly. "yes, sure," he returned undaunted. "them camera supports is named for it, you know. but of course this gay gink of a sandy had to come buttin' in. too bad the honorable bertie had partook so free. he'd have looked the part all right when it come to rescuin' beauty in distress. but fortune bein' a lady and naturally capricious, she hands the stunt over to old sobersides here." just then old sobersides cut across the flow of mr. tubbs's sprightly conversation and with a certain harshness of tone asked captain magnus if he had had good sport on the other side of the island. captain magnus, as usual, had seemed to feel that time consecrated to eating was wasted in conversation. at this point-blank question he started confusedly, stuttered, and finally explained that though he had taken a rifle he had carried along pistol cartridges, so had come home with an empty bag. at this moment i happened to be looking at cookie, who was setting down a dish before mr. tubbs. the negro started visibly, and rolled his eyes at captain magnus with astonishment depicted in every dusky feature. he said nothing, although wont to take part in our conversation as it suited him, but i saw him shake his great grizzled head in a disturbed and puzzled fashion as he turned away. after this a chill settled on the table. you felt a disturbance in the air, as though wireless currents were crossing and recrossing in general confusion. mr. tubbs began again on the topic of my rescue, and said it was too bad mr. shaw's name wasn't paul, because then we'd be paul and virginia, he, he! my aunt said encouragingly, how true! because they had lived on an island, hadn't they? she had read the book many years ago, and had mostly forgotten it, not having mr. tubbs's marvelous memory, but she believed there was something quite sad about the end, though very sweet. she agreed with mr. tubbs that mr. vane would have looked most picturesque going to the rescue on account of his sash, and it was too bad he had not been able, but never mind, it was most kind of mr. shaw, and she was sure her niece appreciated it though she was afraid she hadn't thanked mr. shaw properly. by this time it was perfectly clear that mr. shaw had been most inconsiderate in dashing out after me in that thoughtless manner. he should have waked cuthbert vane and helped him to array himself becomingly in the sash and then sent for a moving-picture man to go out in another boat and immortalize the touching scene. all this came seething to my lips, but i managed to suppress it. it was only on cuthbert vane's account. as for my aunt and mr. tubbs, i could have bumped their heads together as remorselessly as two cocoanuts. i understood aunt jane, of course. in spite of the honorable cuthbert's recent lapse, her imagination still played about certain little cards which should announce to an envious world my engagement to the honorable cuthbert patrick ruthmore vane, of high staunton manor, kent. so such a _faux pas_ as my rescue from drowning by a penniless scotch seaman couldn't but figure in her mind as a grievance. i stole a glance at the recipient of these sorry thanks. his face was set and--once i should have called it grim, but i knew better now. there was nothing i could say or do. any words of mine would have sounded forced and puerile. what he had done was so far beyond thanks that spoken gratitude belittled it. and yet, suppose he thought that like the rest i had wished another in his place? did he think that--could he, with the memory of my arms about his neck? i only knew that because of the foolish hateful words that had been said, the gulf between us was wider than before. i sat dumb, consumed with misery and hoping that perhaps i might meet his glance and so tell him silently all that words would only mar. but he never looked at me. and then the first bitterness, which had made even cuthbert seem disloyal in wishing himself in his friend's place, passed, and gave way to dreary doubt. cuthbert knew, of course, that he himself would have prized--what to dugald shaw was a matter of indifference. yes, that was it, and the worst that dugald shaw was suffering now was boredom at hearing the affair so everlastingly discussed. so i began talking very fast to mr. vane and we were very gay and he tied his own necktie on crusoe on consideration that he be held hereafter jointly. and--because i saw that dugald shaw was looking now--i smiled lingeringly into the eyes of the beautiful youth and said all right, perhaps we needn't quarrel over our mutual dog, and then skipped off lightsomely, feeling exactly like a scorpion that has been wounding itself with its own sting. as i passed cookie at his dishpan a sudden thought struck me. "cookie," i remarked, "you had a frightfully queer look just now when captain magnus told about having taken the wrong cartridges. what was the matter?" cookie took his hands out of the water and wiped off the suds, casting about stealthy and mysterious glances. then he rolled a dubious eye at me. "what was it, cookie?" i urged. "war am cap'n now?" "down on the beach; he can't possibly hear you." "you won't say nothin' to git cookie in a rumpus?" "cross my heart to die, cookie." "well, den"--cookie spoke in a hoarse whisper--"cap'n say he forgit to take his gun ca'tridges. miss jinny, when he come back, i see him empty his gun ca'tridges out'n his belt and put back his pistol cartridges. so dere now!" i turned from cookie, too surprised to speak. why had captain magnus been at pains to invent a lie about so trivial a matter? i recalled, too, that mr. shaw's question had confused him, that he had hesitated and stammered before answering it. why? was he a bad shot and ashamed of it? had he preferred to say that he had taken the wrong ammunition rather than admit that he could get no bag? that must be the explanation, because there was no other. certainly no imaginable errand but the one assigned could have taken the captain to the other side of the island. several days went by, and still the treasure was unfound. of course, as the unexplored space in the cave contracted, so daily the probability grew stronger that fortune would shed her golden smile upon us before night. nevertheless, it seemed to me that the optimistic spirits of most were beginning to flag a little. only mr. shaw, though banned as a confirmed doubter and pessimist, now by the exercise of will kept the others to their task. it took all cuthbert vane's loyalty, plus an indisposition to be called a slacker, to strive against the temptation to renounce treasure-hunting in favor of roaming with crusoe and me. as for captain magnus, his restlessness was manifest. several times he had suggested blowing the lid off the island with dynamite, as the shortest method of getting at the gold. he was always vanishing on solitary excursions inland. mr. tubbs remarked, scornfully, that a man with a nose for money ought to have smelted out the chest before this, but if his own nasal powers were of that character he did not offer to employ them in the service of the expedition. miss higglesby-browne, however, had taken to retiring to the hut for long private sessions with herself. my aunt reverentially explained their purpose. the hiding-place of the chest being of course known to the universal wisdom, all violet had to do was to put herself in harmony and the knowledge would be hers. the difficulty was that you had first to overcome your mundane consciousness. to accomplish this violet was struggling in the solitude of the hut. meanwhile mr. tubbs sat at the feet of aunt jane, reading aloud from a volume entitled _paeans of passion_, by a celebrated lady lyric poet of our own land. after my meeting with captain magnus in the forest, lookout ridge was barred to me. crusoe and i must do our rambling in other directions. this being so, i bethought me again of the wrecked sloop lying under the cliffs on the north shore of the cove. i remembered that there had seemed to be a way down the cliffs. i resolved to visit the sloop again. the terrible practicality of the beautiful youth made it difficult to indulge in romantic musings in his presence. and to me a derelict brings a keener tang of romance than any other relic of man's multitudinous and futile strivings. the descent of the gully proved an easy matter, and soon i was on the sand beside the derelict. sand had heaped up around her hull, and filled her cockpit level with the rail, and drifted down the companion, stuffing the little cabin nearly to the roof, only the bow rose free from the white smother of sand. whatever wounds there were in her buried sides were hidden. you felt that some wild caprice of the storm had lifted her and set her down here, not too roughly, then whirled away and left her to the sand. crusoe slipped into the narrow space under the roof of the cabin, and i leaned idly down to watch him through a warped seam between the planks. then i found that i was looking, not at crusoe, but into a little dim enclosure like a locker, in which some small object faintly caught the light. with a revived hope of finding relics i got out my knife--a present from cuthbert vane--and set briskly to work widening the seam. i penetrated finally into a small locker or cubby-hole, set in the angle under the roof of the cabin, and, as subsequent investigation showed, so placed as to attract no notice from the casual eye. i ascertained this by lying down and wriggling my head and shoulders into the cabin. in other words, i had happened on a little private depository, in which the owner of the sloop might stow away certain small matters that concerned him intimately. yet the contents of the locker at first seemed trifling. they were an old-fashioned chased silver shoe-buckle, and a brown-covered manuscript book. the book had suffered much from dampness, whether of rains or the wash of the sea. the imitation leather cover was flaking off, and the leaves were stuck together. i seated myself on the cabin roof, extracted a hairpin, and began carefully separating the close-written pages. the first three or four were quite illegible, the ink having run. then the writing became clearer. i made out a word here and there: . . . . directions vague . . . . my grandfather . . . . man a ruffian but . . . . no motive . . . . police of havana . . . . frightful den . . . . grandfather made sure . . . . registry . . . . _bonny lass_ . . . . and at that i gave a small excited shriek which brought crusoe to me in a hurry. what had he to do, the writer of this journal, what had he to do with the _bonny lass_? breathlessly i read on: . . . . thought captain still living but not sure . . . . lost . . . . benito bon . . . . i closed the book. now, while the coast was clear, i must get back to camp. it would take hours, perhaps days, to decipher the journal which had suddenly become of such supreme importance. i must smuggle it unobserved into my own quarters, where i could read at my leisure. as i set out i dropped the silver shoe-buckle into my pocket, smiling to think that it was i who had discovered the first bit of precious metal on the island. yet the book in my hand, i felt instinctively, was of more value than many shoe-buckles. safely in my hammock, with a pillow under which i could slip the book in case of interruption, i resumed the reading. from this point on, although the writing was somewhat faded, it was all, with a little effort, legible. the diary if sampson did live to tell his secret, then any day there may be a sail in the offing. and still i can not find it! oh, if my grandfather had been more worldly wise! if he hadn't been too intent on the eternal welfare of the man he rescued from the havana tavern brawl to question him about his story. a cave on leeward island--near by a stone marked with the letters b. h. and a cross-bones--_i told the captain_, said the poor dying wretch, _we wouldn't have no luck after playing it that low down on bill_! so i presume bill lies under the stone. well, all i have is in this venture. the old farm paid for the _island queen_--or will, if i don't get back in time to prevent foreclosure. all my staid new england relatives think me mad. a copra gatherer! a fine career for a minister's son! think how your father scrimped to send you to college--aunt sarah reproached me. well, when i get home with my spanish doubloons there will be another story to tell. i won't be poor crazy peter then. and helen--oh, how often i wish i had told her everything! it was too much to ask her to trust me blindly as i did. but from the moment i came across the story in grandfather's old, half-forgotten diary--by the way, the diary habit seems to run in the family--a very passion of secrecy has possessed me. if i had told helen, i should have had to dread that even in her sweet sleep she might whisper something to put that ferret, her stepmother, on the scent. oh, helen, trust me, trust me! december . i have a calendar with me, so i am not reduced to notching a stick to keep track of the days. i mark each off carefully in the calendar. if i were to forget to do this, even for a day or two, i believe i should quite lose track. the days are so terribly alike! my predecessor here in the copra-gathering business, old heintz, really left me a very snug establishment. it was odd that i should have run across him at panama that way. i sounded him on the question of treasure. he said placidly that of course the island had been the resort of edward davis and benito bonito and others of the black flag gentry, and he thought it very likely they had left some of their spoils behind them, but though he had done a little investigating as he had time he had come on nothing but a ship's lantern, a large iron kettle, and the golden setting of a bracelet from which the jewels had been removed. he had already disposed of the bracelet. the kettle i found here, and sank in the spring to keep the water clear. (where it still is. v. h.) evidently old heintz knew nothing of the _bonny lass_. this was an immense satisfaction, as it proves that the story can not have been noised about. christmas day! i wonder what they are all doing at home? december . of course the cave under the point is the logical place. i have been unable to find any stone marked b. h. on the ground above it, but i fear that a search after bill's tombstone would be hopeless. although the formation of the island is of the sort to contain numerous caves, still they must be considerably less plentiful than possible tombstones. under circumstances such as those of the mate's story, it seems to me that all the probabilities point to their concealing the chest in the cave with an opening on the bay. it must have been necessary for them to act as quickly as possible, that their absence from the ship might go unnoticed--though i believe the three conspirators had made the crew drunk. then to get the boat, laden with the heavy chest, through the surf to any of the other caves--if the various cracks and fissures i have seen are indeed properly to be called caves--would be stiff work for three men. yes, everything indicates the cavern under the point. the only question is, isn't it indicated too clearly? would a smooth old scoundrel such as this captain sampson must have been have hidden his treasure in the very place certain to be ransacked if the secret ever got out? unless it was deeply buried, which it could have been only at certain stages of the tide, even old heintz would have been apt to come across it in the course of his desultory researches for the riches of the buccaneers. and i am certain placid old heintz did not mislead me. besides, at panama, he was making arrangements to go with some other germans on a small business venture to samoa, which he would not have been likely to do if he had just unearthed a vast fortune in buried treasure. still, i shall explore the cave thoroughly, though with little hope. oh, helen, if i could watch these tropic stars with you to-night! january . i think i am through with the cave under the point--the cavern of the two arches, i have named it. it is a dangerous place to work in alone, and my little skiff has been badly battered several times. but i peered into every crevice in the walls, and sounded the sands with a drill. i suppose i would have made a more thorough job of it if i had not been convinced from the first that the chest was not there. it was not reason that told me so--i know i may well be attributing too much subtlety of mind to captain sampson--but that strange guiding instinct--to put it in its lowest terms--which i know in my heart i must follow if i would succeed. shall i ever forget the feeling that stirred me when first i turned the pages of my grandfather's diary and saw there, in his faded writing, the story of the mate of the _bonny lass_, who died in havana in my grandfather's arms? my grandfather had gone as supercargo in his own ship, and while he did a good stroke of business in havana--trust his shrewd yankee instincts for that--he managed to combine the service of god with that of mammon. many a poor drunken sailor, taking his fling ashore in the bright, treacherous, plague-ridden city, found in him a friend, as did the mate of the _bonny lass_ in his dying hour. oh, if my good grandfather had but made sure from the man's own lips exactly where the treasure lay! it is enough to make one fancy that the unknown bill, who paid for too much knowledge with his life, has his own fashion of guarding the hoard. but i ramble. i was going to say, that from the moment when i learned from my grandfather's diary of the existence of the treasure, i have been driven by an impulse more overmastering than anything i have ever experienced in my life. it was, i believe, what old-fashioned pious folk would call a _leading_. the impetus seemed somehow to come from outside my own organism. all my life i had been irresolute, the sport of circumstances, trifling with this and that, unable to set my face steadfastly toward any goal. yet never, since i have trodden this path, have i looked to right or left. i have defied both human opinion and the obstacles which an unfriendly fate has thrown in my way. all alone, i, a sailor hitherto of pleasure-craft among the bays and islands of the new england coast, put forth in my little sloop for a voyage of three hundred miles on the loneliest wastes of the pacific. all alone, did i say? no, there was benjy the faithful. his head is at my knee as i write. he knows, i think, that his master's mood is sad to-night. oh, helen, if you ever see these lines, will you realize how i have longed for you--how it sometimes seems that my soul must tear itself loose from my body and speed to you across half a world? february . since my last record my time has been well filled. in the _island queen_ i have been surveying the coasts of my domain, sailing as close in as i dared, and taking note of every crevice that might be the mouth of a cave. then, either in the rowboat or by scrambling down the cliffs, i visit the indicated point. it is bitterly hard labor, but it has its compensations. i am growing hale and strong, brown and muscular. aunt sarah won't offer me any more of her miserable decoctions when i go home. heading first toward the north, i am systematically making the rounds of the island, for, after all, how do i know for certain that captain sampson buried his treasure near the east anchorage? for greater security he may have chosen the other side, where there is another bay, i should judge deeper and freer of rocks than this one, though more open to storms. so far i have discovered half a dozen caves, most of them quite small. any one of them seemed such a likely place that at first i was quite hopeful. but i have found nothing. usually, the floor of the cave beneath a few inches of sand is rock. only in the great cave under the point have i found sand to any depth. the formation in some cases is little more than a hardened clay, but to excavate it would require long toil, probably blasting--and i have no explosives. and i go always on the principle that captain sampson and his two assistants had not time for any elaborate work of concealment. most likely they laid the chest in some natural niche. sailors are unskilled in the use of such implements as spades, and besides, the very heart of the undertaking was haste and secrecy. they must have worked at night and between two tides, for few of the caves can be reached except at the ebb. and i take it as certain that the cave must have opened directly on the sea. for three men to transport such a weight and bulk by land would be sheer impossibility. february . to-day a strange, strange thing happened--so strange, so wonderful and glorious that it ought to be recorded in luminous ink. and i owe it all to benjy! little dog, you shall go in a golden collar and eat lamb-chops every day! this morning-- across my absorption in the diary cut the unwelcome clangor of cookie's gong. right on the breathless edge of discovery i was summoned, with my thrilling secret in my breast, to join my unsuspecting companions. i hid the book carefully in my cot. not until the light of to-morrow morning could i return to its perusal. how i was to survive the interval i did not know. but on one point my mind was made up--no one should dream of the existence of the diary until i knew all that it had to impart. xi miss browne has a vision perhaps because of the secret excitement under which i was laboring, i seemed that evening unusually aware of the emotional fluctuations of those about me. violet looked grimmer than ever, so that i judged her struggles with her mundane consciousness to have been exceptionally severe. captain magnus seemed even beyond his wont restless, loose-jointed and wandering-eyed, and performed extraordinary feats of sword-swallowing. mr. shaw was very silent, and his forehead knitted now and then into a reflective frown. as for myself, i had much ado to hide my abstraction, and turned cold from head to foot with alarm when i heard my own voice addressing crusoe as benjy. a faint ripple of surprise passed round the table. "named your dog over again, miss jinny?" inquired mr. tubbs. mr. tubbs had adopted a facetiously paternal manner toward me. i knew in anticipation of the moment when he would invite me to call him uncle ham. "i say, you know," expostulated cuthbert vane, "i thought crusoe rather a nice name. never heard of any chap named benjy that lived on an island." "when i was a little girl, virginia," remarked aunt jane, with the air of immense age and wisdom which she occasionally assumed, "my grandmother--your great-grandmother, of course, my love--would never allow me to name my dolls a second time. she did not approve of changeableness. and i am sure it must be partly due to your great-grandmother's teaching that i always know my own mind directly about everything. she was quite a remarkable woman, and very firm. firmness has been considered a family trait with us. when her husband died--your great-grandfather, you know, dear--she rose above her grief and made him take some very disagreeable medicine to the very last, long after the doctors had given up hope. as some relation or other said, i think your great-aunt susan's father-in-law, anybody else would have allowed poor john harding to die in peace, but trust eliza to be firm to the end." under cover of this bit of family history i tried to rally from my confusion, but i knew my cheeks were burning. looks of deepening surprise greeted the scarlet emblems of discomfiture that i hung out. "by heck, bet there's a feller at home named benjy!" cackled mr. tubbs shrilly, and for once i blessed him. aunt jane turned upon him her round innocent eyes. "oh, no, mr. tubbs," she assured him, "i don't think a single one of them was named benjy!" the laughter which followed this gave me time to get myself in hand again. "crusoe it is and will be," i asserted. "like great-grandmother harding, i don't approve of changeableness. it happens that a girl i know at home has a dog named benjy." which happened fortunately to be true, for otherwise i should have been obliged to invent it. but the girl is a cat, and the dog a miserable little high-bred something, all shivers and no hair. i should never have thought of him in the same breath with crusoe. that evening mr. shaw addressed the gathering at the camp-fire--which we made small and bright, and then sat well away from because of the heat--and in a few words gave it as his opinion that any further search in the cave under the point was useless. (if he had known the strange confirmatory echo which this awoke in my mind!) he proposed that the shore of the island to a reasonable distance on either side of the bay-entrance should be surveyed, with a view to discover whether some other cave did not exist which would answer the description given by the dying hopperdown as well as that first explored. mr. shaw's words were addressed to the ladies, the organizer and financier, respectively, of the expedition, to the very deliberate exclusion of mr. tubbs. but he might as well have made up his mind to recognize the triumvirate. enthroned on a camp-chair sat aunt jane, like a little goddess of the dollar sign, and on one hand mr. tubbs smiled blandly, and on the other violet gloomed. you saw that in secret council mr. shaw's announcement had been foreseen and deliberated upon. mr. tubbs, who understood very well the role of power behind the throne, left it to violet to reply. and miss browne, who carried an invisible rostrum with her wherever she went, now alertly mounted it. "my friends," she began, "those dwelling on a plane where the material is all may fail to grasp the thought which i shall put before you this evening. they may not understand that if a different psychic atmosphere had existed on this island from the first we should not now be gazing into a blank wall of doubt. my friends, this expedition was, so to speak, called from the void by thought. thought it was, as realized in steamships and other ephemeral forms, which bore us thither over rolling seas. how then can it be otherwise than that thought should influence our fortunes--that success should be unable to materialize before a persistent attitude of negation? my friends, you will perceive that there is no break in this sequence of ideas; all is remorseless logic. "in order to withdraw myself from this atmosphere of negation, for these several days past i have sought seclusion. there in silence i have asserted the power of positive over negative thought, gazing meanwhile into the profound depths of the all. my friends, an answer has been vouchsafed us; i have had a vision of that for which we seek. now at last, in a spirit of glad confidence, we may advance. for, my friends, the chest is buried--in sand." with this triumphant announcement miss higglesby-browne sat down. a heavy silence succeeded. it was broken by a murmur from mr. tubbs. "wonderful--that's what i call wonderful! talk about the eloquence of the ancients--i believe, by gum, this is on a par with congressional oratory!" "a vision, miss browne," said mr. shaw gravely, "must be an interesting thing. i have never seen one myself, having no talents that way, but in the little scotch town of dumbiedykes where i was born there was an old lady with a remarkable gift of the second sight. simple folk, not being acquainted with the proper terms to fit the case, called her the wise woman. well, one day my aunt had been to the neighboring town of micklestane, five miles off, and on the way back to dumbiedykes she lost her purse. it had three sovereigns in it--a great sum to my aunt. in her trouble of mind she hurried to the wise woman--a thing to make her pious father turn in his grave. the wise woman--gazed into the all, i suppose, and told my aunt not to fret herself, for she had had a vision of the purse and _it lay somewhere on the food between micklestane and dumbiedykes_. "now, miss browne, i'll take the liberty of drawing a moral from this story to fit the present instance: _where on the road between micklestane and dumbiedykes is the chest_?" though startled at the audacity of mr. shaw, i was unprepared for the spasm of absolute fury that convulsed miss browne's countenance. "mr. shaw," she thundered, "if you intend to draw a parallel between me and an ignorant scotch peasant--!" "not at all," said mr. shaw calmly, "forebye the wise woman was a most respectable person and had a grandson in the kirk. the point is, can you indicate with any degree of exactness the whereabouts of the chest? for there is a good deal of sand on the shores of this island." "oh, but mr. shaw!" interposed aunt jane tremulously. "in the sand--why, i am sure that is such a helpful thought! it shows quite plainly that the chest is not buried in--in a rock, you know." she gave the effect of a person trying to deflect a thunderstorm with a palm-leaf fan. "dynamite---dynamite--blow the lid off the island!" mumbled captain magnus. "if any one has a definite plan to propose," said mr. shaw, "i am very ready to consider it. i have understood myself from the first to be acting under the directions of the ladies who planned this expedition. as a mere matter of honesty to my employers, i should feel bound to spare no effort to find the treasure, even if my own interests were not so vitally concerned. considering its importance to myself, no one can well suppose that i am not doing all in my power to bring the chest to light. tomorrow, if the sea is favorable, it is my intention to set out in the boat to determine the character of such other caves as exist on the island. i'll want you with me, lad, and you too, magnus." captain magnus looked more ill at ease than usual. "did you think o' rowin' the whole way round the dinged chunk o' rock?" he inquired. "certainly not," said mr. shaw with an impatient frown. so the man, in addition to his other unattractive qualities, was turning out a shirk! hitherto, with his strength and feverish if intermittent energy, plus an almost uncanny skill with boats, he had been of value. "certainly not. we are going to make a careful survey of the cliffs, and explore every likely opening as thoroughly as possible. it will be slow work and hard. as to circumnavigating the island, i see no point in it, for i don't believe the chest can have been carried any great distance from the cove." "oh--all right," said captain magnus. mr. tubbs, who had been whispering with aunt jane and miss browne, now with a very made-to-order casualness proposed to the two ladies that they take a stroll on the beach. this meant that the triumvirate were to withdraw for discussion, and amounted to notice that henceforth the counsels of the company would be divided. captain magnus, after an uneasy wriggle or two, said he guessed he'd turn in. cookie's snores were already audible between splashes of the waves on the sands. the scotchman, cuthbert vane and i continued to sit by the dying fire. mr. shaw had got out his pipe and sat silently puffing at it. he might have been sitting in solitude on the topmost crag of the island, so remote seemed that impassive presence. was it possible that ever, except in the sweet madness of a dream, i had been in his arms, pillowed and cherished there, that he had called me _lassie_-- i lifted my eyes to the kind honest gaze of cuthbert vane. it was as faithful as crusoe's and no more embarrassing. a great impulse of affection moved me. i was near putting out a hand to pat his splendid head. oh, how easy, comfortable, and calm would be a life with cuthbert vane! i wasn't thinking about the title now--cuthbert would be quite worth while for himself. for a moment i almost saw with aunt jane's eyes. _fancy trotting him out before the girls_! stole insidiously into my mind. how much more dazzling than a plain scotch sailor-- i turned in bitterness and yearning from the silent figure by the fire. i think in an earlier lifetime i must have been a huntress and loved to pursue the game that fled. xii the island queen's freight i woke next morning with a great thrill of exhilaration. perhaps before the sun went down again i should know the secret of the island. the two divisions of our party, which were designated by me privately the land and sea forces, went their separate ways directly after breakfast, which we ate in the cool of earliest morning, i could retire to the perusal of the journal which i had recovered from the wrecked sloop without fear of interruption. i resumed my reading with the entry of february . this morning, having grown very tired of fish, of which i get plenty every time i go out in the boat by dragging a line behind, i decided to stay ashore and hunt pig. i set out across the base of the point, nearly due south--whereas i had been working along the coast to the north of the cove. on my right the slope of the mountain rose steeply, and as i approached the south shore the rise of the peak became more abrupt, and great jutting crags leaned out over the tree-tops below. i reached the edge of the cliffs and found that on my right hand the mountain dropped in a sheer precipice from hundreds of feet above me straight into the sea. i considered, and made up my mind that by striking back some distance one might by a very rough climb gain the top of the precipice, and so swing around the shoulder of the mountain. i did not feel inclined to attempt it. the cliffs at this point offered no means of descent, and the few yards of sand which the receding tide had left bare at their foot led nowhere. so far i had seen no pig, and i began to think they must all be feeding on the other side of the island. i turned to go back, and at that moment i heard an outcry in the bushes and benjy came tearing out at the heels of a fine young porker. i threw up my gun to fire, but the evolutions of benjy and the pig were such that i was as likely to hit one as the other. the pig, of course, made desperate efforts to escape from the cul-de-sac in which he found himself. his only hope was to get back into the woods on the point. benjy kept him headed off successfully, and i began to edge up, watching my chance for a shot. suddenly the pig came dashing straight toward me--oblivious, i suppose, to everything but the white snapping terror at his heels. taken by surprise, i fired--and missed. the pig shot between my knees, benjy after him. i withstood the shock of the pig, but not of benjy. i fell, clawing wildly, into a matted mass of creepers that covered the ground beside me. i got to my feet quickly, dragging the whole mass of vines up with me. then i saw that they had covered a curiously regular little patch of ground, outlined at intervals with small stones. at one end was a larger stone. the patch was narrow, about six feet long--instantly suggestive of a grave. but swift beyond all process of reason was the certainty that flashed into my mind. i fell on my knees beside the stone at the head and pulled away the torn vine-tendrils. i saw the letters b. h. and an attempt at cross-bones rudely cut into the surface of the stone. i closed my eyes and tried to steady myself. i thought, i am seeing things. _this is the mere projection of the vision which has been in my mind so long_. i opened my eyes, and lo, the fantasy, if fantasy it were, remained. i smote with my fist upon the stone. the stone was solid--it bruised the flesh. and as i saw the blood run, i screamed aloud like a madman, "_it's real, real, real_!" under the stone lay the guardian of the treasure of the _bonny lass_--and his secret was within my grasp. i don't know how long i crouched beside the stone, as drunk with joy as any hasheesh toper with his drug. i roused at last to find benjy at my shoulder, thrusting his cool nose against my feverish cheek. i suppose he didn't understand my ignoring him so, or thought i scorned him for losing out in his race with the pig. yet when i think of what i owe that pig i could swear never to taste pork again. brought back to earth and sanity, i rose and began to consider my surroundings. somewhere close at hand was the mouth of the cave--but where? the cliffs, as i have already said, were too steep for descent. nothing but a fly could have crawled down them. i turned to the craggy face of the mountain. there, surely, must be the entrance to the cave! for hours i clambered among the rocks, risking mangled limbs and sunstroke--and found no cave. i came back at last, wearily, to the grave. there lay the dust of the brain that had known all--and a wild impulse came to me to tear away the earth with my bare hands, to dig deep, deep--and then with listening ear wait for a whispered word. i put the delirious fancy from me and moved away to the edge of the cliffs. looking down, i saw a narrow sloping shelf which dropped from the brink to a distance of ten or twelve feet below, where it met a slight projection of the rock. i had seen it before, of course, but it had carried no significance for my mind. now i stepped down upon the ledge and followed it to its end in the angle of the rock. snugly hidden in the angle was a low doorway leading into blackness. now of course i ought in prudence to have gone back to the hut and got matches and a lantern and a rope before i set foot in the darkness of that unknown place. but what had i to do to-day with prudence--fortune had me by the hand! in i went boldly, benjy at my heels. the passage turned sharply, and for a little way we walked in blackness. then it veered again, and a faint and far-off light seemed to filter its way to us through a web woven of the very stuff of night. the floor sloped a little downward. i felt my way with my feet, and came to a step--another. i was going along a descending passage, cut at its steepest into rough, irregular stairs. with either hand i could touch the walls. all the while the light grew clearer. presently, by another sharp turn, i found myself in a cave, some thirty feet in depth by eighteen across, with an opening on the narrow strip of beach i had seen from the top of the cliffs. the roof is high, with an effect of gothic arches. near the mouth is a tiny spring of ice-cold water, which has worn a clean rock-channel for itself to the sea. otherwise the cave is perfectly dry. the shining white sand of its floor is above the highest watermark on the cliffs outside. there is no doubt in my mind that in the great buccaneering days of the seventeenth century, and probably much later, the place was the haunt of pirates. one fancies that captain sampson of the _bonny lass_ may have known of it before he brought the treasure to the island. there were queer folk to be met with in those days in the western ocean! the cave is cool at blazing midday, and secret, i fancy, even from the sea, because of the droop of great rock-eaves above its mouth. either for the keeping of stores or as a hiding-place for men or treasure it would be admirable. yes, the cave has seen many a fierce, sea-tanned face and tarry pigtail, and echoed to strange oaths and wild sea-songs. men had carved those steps in the passage--thirty-two of them. in the sand of the floor, as i kicked it up with my feet, hoping rather childishly to strike the corner of the chest, i found the hilt and part of the blade of a rusty cutlass, and a chased silver shoe-buckle. i shall take the buckle home to helen--and yet how trivial it will seem, with all else that i have to offer her! nevertheless she will prize it as my gift, and because it comes from the place to which some kind angel led me for her sake. i left the cave and hurried back to the cabin for a spade, walking on air, breaking with snatches of song the terrible stillness of the woods, where one hears only the high fitful sighing of the wind, or the eternal mutter of the sea. as i came out of the hut with the spade over my shoulder i waved my hand to the _island queen_ riding at anchor. "you'll soon be showing a clean pair of heels to leeward, old girl!" i cried. back in the cave, i set to work feverishly, making the light sand fly. i began at the rear of the cavern, reasoning that there the sand would lie at greater depth, also that it would be above the wash of the heaviest storms. at the end of half an hour, at a point close to the angle of the wall my spade struck a hard surface. it lay, i should judge, under about two feet of sand. soon i had laid bare a patch of dark wood which rang under my knuckles almost like iron. a little more, and i had cleared away the sand from the top of a large chest with a convex lid, heavily bound in brass. furiously i flung the sand aside until the chest stood free for half its depth--which is roughly three feet. it has handles at the ends, great hand-wrought loops of metal. i tugged my hardest, but the chest seemed fast in its place as the native rock. i laughed exultantly. the weight meant gold--gold! i had hammer and chisel with me, and with these i forced the massive ancient locks. there were three of them, one for each strip of brass which bound the chest. then i flung up the lid. no glittering treasure dazzled me. i saw only a surface of stained canvas, tucked in carefully around the edges. this i tore off and flung aside--eclipsing poor benjy, who was a most interested spectator of my strange proceedings. still no gleam of gold, merely demure rows of plump brown bags. with both hands i reached for them. oh, to grasp them all! i had to be content with two, because they were so heavy, so blessedly heavy! i spread the square of canvas on the sand, cut the strings from the bags, and poured out--gold, gold! all fair shining golden coins they were, not a paltry silver piece among them! and they made a soft golden music as they fell in a glorious yellow heap. i don't know how long i sat there, playing with my gold, running it through my fingers, clinking the coins together in my palm. benjy came and sniffed at them indifferently, unable to understand his master's preoccupation. he thrust his nose into my face and barked, and said as clearly as with words, _come, hunt pig_! "benjy," i said, "we'll leave the pork alone just now. we have work enough to count our money. we're rich, old boy, rich, rich!" of course, i don't yet know exactly what the value of the treasure is. i have counted the bags in the chest; there are one hundred and forty-eight. each, so far as i have determined, contains one thousand doubloons, which makes a total of one hundred and forty-eight thousand. estimating each coin, for the sake of even figures, at a value of seven dollars--a safe minimum--you get one million, thirty-six thousand dollars. and as many of the coins are ancient, i ought to reap a harvest from collectors. besides the coin, i found, rather surprisingly, laid between the upper layers of bags, a silver crucifix about nine inches long. it is of very quaint old workmanship, and badly tarnished. its money value must be very trifling, compared to the same bulk of golden coins. i think it must have had some special character of sacredness which led to its preservation here. it is strange to find such a relic among a treasure so stained by blood and crime. and now i have to think about moving the gold. first of all i must get the chest itself aboard the _island queen_. this means that i shall have to empty it and leave the gold in the cave, while i get the chest out by sea. when the chest is safely in the cabin of the sloop--where it won't leave much room for benjy and his master, i'm afraid--i will take the bags of coin out by the land entrance. i can't think of risking my precious doubloons in the voyage around the point. of course i should have liked to get to the task to-day, but after the first mad thrill of the great event was over, i found myself as weak and unnerved as a woman. so by a great effort i came away and left my glorious golden hoard. now i dream and gloat, playing with the idea that to-morrow i shall find it all a fantasy. the pleasure of this is, of course, that all the while i _know_ this wildest of all arabian fairy tales to be as real as the most drab and sober fact of my hitherto colorless life. after all, on the way back from the cave benjy brought down a pig. so he is as well pleased with the day as i am. now i am sitting in the doorway of my cabin, writing up my journal, and trying to calm down enough to go to bed. if it were not for the swift fading of daylight, i would go back to the cave for another peep into the chest. but all round the island the sea is moaning with that peculiarly melancholy note that comes with the falling of night. the sea-birds have risen from the cove and gone wheeling off in troops to their nests on the cliffs. somehow a curious dislike, almost fear, of this wild, sea-girt, solitary place has come over me. i long for the sound of human voices, the touch of human hands. i think of the dead man lying there at the door of the cave, its silent guardian for so long. i suppose he brooded once on the thought of the gold as i do--perhaps he has been brooding so these ninety years! i wonder if he is pleased that i, a stranger, have come into possession of his secret hoard at last? oh, helen, turn your heavenly face on me--be my refuge from these shuddering unwholesome thoughts! the gold is for you--for you! surely that must cleanse it of its stains, must loose the clutch of the dead hands that strive to hold it! february . this morning i was early at the cave. yes, there it was, the same wonder-chest that i had dreamed of all night long. it was absurd how the tightness in my breast relaxed. i began at once the work of removing the bags from the chest and stacking them in the corner of the cave. it was a fatiguing job, i had to stoop so. at the bottom of the chest i found a small portfolio of very fine leather containing documents in spanish. they bear an official seal. although i should be interested to know their meaning, i think i shall destroy them. they weaken my feeling of ownership; i suppose there is a slight flavor of lawlessness in my carrying off the gold from the island like this. very likely the little spanish-american state which has some claim to overlordship here would dispute my right to the treasure-trove. i spent so much time unloading the chest and poring over the papers, trying, by means of my ill-remembered latin, to make out the sense of the kindred spanish, that before i was ready to go for my boat the tide was up and pounding on the rocks below the cave. i find that only at certain stages of the tide is the cave approachable by sea. at the turn after high water, for instance, there is such a terrific undertow that it sets up a small maelstrom among the reefs lying off the island. at low tide is the time to come. february . got the chest out of the cave, though it was a difficult job. i don't know of what wood the thing is built--some south american hardwood, i fancy--but it weighs like metal. the heavy brass clampings count for something, of course. luckily there was no sea, and i had a smooth passage around the point, i laughed rather ruefully as i passed the cave of the two arches. to think of the toil i wasted there! i wish benjy had encountered the fateful pig a little sooner. got the chest aboard the _island queen_ and stowed in the cabin. not room left to swing a kitten. contrived an elaborate arrangement of ropes and spikes to keep it in place in a heavy sea. in the afternoon began moving the gold. it's the deuce of a job. february . been hard at it for three days. most of the gold moved. have to think too of provisions and water for the trip. i am making rather a liberal allowance, in case of being blown out of my course by a tropical gale. february . on board the _island queen_. have moved my traps from the hut and am sleeping on the sloop. want to be near the gold. "where the treasure is, there will the heart be also," and in this case the body as well. to-morrow i have only to bring the last of the gold aboard--a trifling matter--and then go out with the ebb. i would have got all the bags on board to-day, but i noticed a worn stretch in the cable holding the sloop and stopped to repair it. i can't have the sloop going on the rocks in case a blow comes up to-night. there are only about a load and a half of bags left in the cave. a queer notion seized me to-day about the crucifix, when i was bringing it from the cave. it seemed to float into my brain--i can't say from what quarter--_that i had better leave the crucifix for bill_. it wasn't more than he had a right to, really--and there is no virtue in a cross-bones to make a man sleep well. of course i put the absurd idea from me, and brought the crucifix aboard along with the rest of the gold. i shall be glad when i know that the vines have again covered that lonely-looking gravestone from sight. i can't help feeling my own glorious good fortune to be somehow an affront to poor unlucky bill. to-morrow one last trip to the cave, and then hey, for home and helen! the diary ended here. i closed the book, and stared with unseeing eyes into the green shadows of the encompassing woods. what happened to the writer of the diary on that last trip to the cave? for he had never left the island. crusoe was here to prove it, as well as the wreck of the island queen. and, in all human probability, under the sand which choked the cabin of the derelict was the long-sought chest of spanish doubloons. but what was the mysterious fate of peter? had he fallen, overboard from the sloop and been drowned? had he returned to the cave--and was he there still? it was all a mystery--but a mystery which i burned to solve. of course i might have solved it, very quickly, merely by communicating the extraordinary knowledge which had come to me to my companions. but for the present at least i meant to keep this astounding secret for my own. somehow or other, by guile or lucky circumstance, i must bring it about that the document i had signed at miss browne's behest was canceled. was i, who all unaided had discovered, or as good as discovered, the vainly-sought-for treasure, to disclose its whereabouts to those who would deny me the smallest claim upon its contents? was i to see all those "fair, shining golden coins," parceled out between miss browne, and mr. tubbs, and captain magnus (the three who loomed large in my indignant thoughts), and not possess a single one myself? or perhaps accept a little stingy present of a few? i really wasn't very covetous about the money, taken just as money; but considered as buried treasure it made my mouth water. then besides, while i kept my secret i had power; everybody's destiny was in my hands. this was a sweet thought. i felt that i should enjoy going about with a deceptive meekness, and taking the severest snubs from miss browne, knowing that at any moment i could blossom forth into the most exalted and thrilling importance. also, not only did i want a share in the treasure myself, but i wanted, if possible, to divide it up on a different basis from the present. i wanted cuthbert vane to have a lot of it--and i should have been much better pleased not to let mr. tubbs or captain magnus have any. i did not crave to enrich violet, and i thought aunt jane had already more money than was good for her. give her another half-million, and mr. tubbs would commit bigamy, if necessary, for her sake. and then there was dugald shaw, who had saved my life, and who seemed to have forgotten it, and that i had ever had my arms about his neck--and who was poor--and brave-- yes, decidedly, i should keep my secret yet while, till i saw how the cards were going to fall. xiii i bring to light a clue my first and all but overpowering impulse was to possess myself of a spade and dash for the wreck of the _island queen_. sober second thought restrained me. merely to get there and back would consume much time, for the descent of the cliffs, and still more the climb up again, was a toilsome affair. also, reflection showed me that to dig through the damp close-packed sand of the cabin would be no trifling task, for i should be hampered by the need of throwing out the excavated sand behind me through the narrow companionway. i could achieve my end, no doubt, by patient burrowing, but it would require much more time than i had at my command before the noon-day sounding of cookie's gong. i must not be seen departing or returning with a spade, but make off with the implement in a stealthy and burglarious manner. above all, i must not risk betraying my secret through impatience. but there was nothing to forbid an immediate pilgrimage to the much-sought gravestone with its sinister symbol. the account in peter's diary of his adventure with the pig placed the grave with such exactness that i had no doubt of finding it easily. that done, i would know very nearly where to look for the cave--and in order to bid defiance to a certain chill sense of reluctance which beset me at the thought of the cave i started out at once, skirting the clearing with much circumspection, for it seemed to me that even the sight of my vanishing back must shout of mystery to cookie droning hymns among his pots and pans. crusoe, of course, came with me, happily unconscious of his own strange relation to our quest. following in the steps of peter, who seemed in an airy and uncomfortable fashion to be bearing me company, i struck across the point, at the base of the rough slope which marks the first rise of the peak. as i neared the sea on the other side great crags began to overhang the path, which was, of course, no path, but merely the line of least resistance through the woods. soon the noise of the sea, of which one was never altogether free on the island, though it reaches the recesses of the forest only as a vast nameless murmur, broke in heightened clamor on my ears. i heard the waves roaring and dashing on rocks far below--and then i stood at the dizzy edge of the plateau looking out over the illimitable gleaming reaches of the sea. somewhere in this angle between the ragged margin of the cliffs and the abrupt rise of the craggy mountainside, according to peter's journal, lay the grave. i began systematically to poke with a stick i carried into every low-growing mass of vines or bushes. because of the comparatively rocky, sterile soil the woods were thinner here, and the undergrowth was greater. only the very definite localization of the grave by the accommodating diarist gave any hope of finding it. and then, quite suddenly, i found it. my proddings had displaced a matted mass of ground-creeper. beneath, looking raw and naked without its leafy covering, was the "curiously regular little patch of ground, outlined at intervals with small stones." panic-stricken beetles scuttled for refuge. a great green slug undulated painfully across his suddenly denuded pasture, a whole small world found itself hurled back to chaos. at the head of the grave lay a large, smoothly-rounded stone. i knelt and brushed away some obstinate vine-tendrils, and the letters "b. h." revealed themselves, cut deeply and irregularly into the sloping face of the stone. below was the half-intelligible symbol of the crossed bones. there was something in the utter loneliness of the place that caught my breath sharply. at once i had the feeling of a marauder. here slept the guardian of the treasure--and yet in defiance of him i meant to have it. so, too, had peter--and i didn't know yet what he had managed to do to peter--but i guessed from his journal that peter had been a slightly morbid person. he had let the wild solitude of the island frighten him. he had indulged foolish fancies about crucifixes. he had in fact let the defenses of his will be undermined ever so little--and then of course there was no telling what they could do to you. with an impatient shiver i got up quickly from my knees. what abominable nonsense i had been talking--was there a miasma about that old grave that affected one? i whistled to crusoe, who was trotting busily about on mysterious intelligence conveyed to him by his nose. he ran to me joyfully, and i stooped and patted his warm vigorous body. "let bill walk, crusoe," i remarked, "let him! he needn't be a dog in the manger about the treasure, anyhow." now came the moment which i had been trying not to think about. i had to find the entrance to the cave, and then go into it or part with my own esteem forever. i went and peered over the cliff. i had an unacknowledged hope that the shelf of which peter had written had been rent off by some cataclysm and that i could not possibly get down to the doorway in the rock. my hope was vain. the ledge was there--not an inviting ledge, nor one on which the unacrobatically inclined would have any impulse to saunter, but a perfectly good ledge, on which i had not the slightest excuse for declining to venture. seventy feet below i saw a narrow strip of sand, from which the tide was receding. it ran along under the great precipice which rose on my right, forming the face of the mountain on the south side. on that strip of sand the old hiding-place of the-pirates opened. i thought i saw the overhanging eaves of rock of which the diary had spoken. there was truly nothing dangerous about the ledge. it was nearly three feet wide, and had an easy downward trend. yet you heard the hungry roar of the surf below, and try as you would not to, caught glimpses of the white swirl of it. i moved cautiously, keeping close to the face of the cliff. crusoe, to my annoyance, sprang down upon the ledge after me. i had a feeling that he must certainly trip me as i picked my way gingerly along. an angle in the rock--a low dark entrance-way--it was all as peter had described it. i peered in--nothing but impenetrable blackness. i took a hesitating step. the passage veered sharply, as the diary had recorded. once around the corner, there would be nothing but darkness anywhere. one would go stumbling on, feeling with feet and hands--hands cold with the dread of what they might be going to touch. for, suddenly portentous and overwhelming, there rose before me the unanswered question of what had become of peter on that last visit to the cave. unanswered--and unanswerable except in one way: by going in to see. but if by any strange chance--where all chances were strange--he were still there, i did not want to see. i did not like to contemplate his possible neighborhood. indeed, he grew enormously more real to me with every instant i stood there, and whereas i had so far thought principally about the treasure, i now began to think with intensity of peter. what ironic stroke of fate had cut him down in the very moment of his triumph? had he ever reached the cave to bring away the last of the doubloons? were they still waiting there unclaimed? had he fallen victim to some extraordinary mischance on the way back to the _island queen_? had a storm come up on that last night, and the weakened cable parted, and the _island queen_ gone on the rocks, drowning peter in the cabin with his gold? then how had crusoe got away, crusoe, who feared the waves so, and would bark at them and then turn tail and run? speaking of crusoe, where was he? i realized that a moment ago he had plunged into the passage. i heard the patter of his feet--a pause. a queer, dismal little whine echoed along the passage. i heard crusoe returning--but before his nose appeared around the angle of the tunnel, his mistress had reached the top of the cliff at a bound and was vanishing at a brisk pace into the woods. with bitterness, as i pursued my way to camp, i realized that i was not a heroine. here was a mystery--it was the business of a heroine to solve it. now that i was safely away from the cave, i began to feel the itch of a torturing curiosity. how, without going into the terrifying place alone, should i find out what was there? should i pretend to have accidentally discovered the grave, lead the party to it, and then--again accidentally--discover the tunnel? this plan had its merits--but i discarded it, for fear that something would be found in the cave to direct attention to the _island queen_. then i reflected that very likely the explorers would work round the island far enough to find the sea-mouth of the cave. this would take matters entirely out of my hands. i should perhaps be enlightened as to the fate of peter and the last remaining bags of doubloons, but might also have to share the secret of the derelict with the rest. and then all my dreams of playing fairy godmother and showering down on certain heads--like coals of fire--torrents of beautiful golden doubloons, would be over. on the whole i could not tell whether i burned with impatience to have the cave discovered, or was cold with the fear of it. and then, so vigorous is the instinct to see one's self in heroic postures, i found i was trying to cheat myself with the pretense that i meant presently to abstract aunt jane's electric torch and returning to the tunnel-mouth plunge in dauntlessly. xiv mr. tubbs interrupts i had determined as an offset to my pusillanimous behavior about the cave to show a dogged industry in the matter of the _island queen_. it would take me a long while to get down through the sand to the chest, but i resolved to accomplish it, and borrowed of cookie, without his knowledge, a large iron spoon which i thought i could wield more easily than a heavy spade. besides, cookie would be less sleuth-like in getting on the trail of his missing property than mr. shaw--though there would be a certain piquancy in having that martinet hale me before him for stealing a spade. but that afternoon i was tired and hot--it really called for a grimmer resolve than mine to shovel sand through the languor of a leeward island afternoon. instead, i slept in my hammock, and dreamed that i was queen of a cannibal island, draped in necklaces made of the doubloons now hidden under the sand in the cabin of the derelict. later, the wailing of cookie was heard in the land, and i had to restore the spoon to free crusoe of the charge of having stolen it. i said i had wanted it to dig with. but of course it occurred to no one that it was the treasure i had expected to dig up with cookie's spoon. it was touching to see the universal faith in the trivial nature of my employments, to know that every one imagined themselves to be seriously occupied, while i was merely a girl--there is no common denominator for the qualifying adjective--who roamed about idly with a dog, and that no one dreamed that we had thus come to be potentially among the richest dogs and girls in these latitudes. a more serious obstacle to my explorations on the _island queen_ presented itself next day. instead of putting to sea, mr. shaw and captain magnus hauled the boat up on the beach and set to work to repair it. the wild work of exploring the coast had left the boat with leaky seams and a damaged gunwale. the preceding day had been filled with hardship and danger--so much so that my heart sank a little at the recountal of it. you saw the little boat threading its way among the reefs, tossed like seaweed by the white teeth of gnawing waves, screamed at by angry gulls whose homes were those clefts and caves which the boat invaded. and all this, poor little boat, on a hopeless quest--for no reward but peril and wounds. captain magnus had a bruised and bleeding wrist, but refused to have it dressed, vaunting his hardihood with a savage pride. cuthbert vane, however, had a sprained thumb which could not be ignored, and on the strength of which he was dismissed from the boat-repairing contingent, and thrown on my hands to entertain. so of course i had to renounce all thoughts of visiting the sloop. i should not have dared to go there anyway, with mr. shaw and the captain able more or less to overlook my motions from the beach, for i was quite morbidly afraid of attracting attention to the derelict. it seemed to me a happy miracle that no one but myself had taken any interest in her, or been inspired to ask by what chance so small a boat had come to be wrecked upon these desolate shores. fortunately in her position in the shadow of the cliff she was inconspicuous, so that she might easily have been taken for the half of a large boat instead of the whole of a small one, or she must before this have drawn the questioning notice of the scotchman. as to the captain, his attention was all set on the effort to discover the cave, and his intelligence was not lively enough to start on an entirely new tack by itself. and the honorable cuthbert viewed derelicts as he viewed the planetary bodies; somehow in the course of nature they happened. so, dissembling my excitements and anxieties, i swung placidly in my hammock, and near by sat the beautiful youth with his thumb carried tenderly in a bandage. in my preoccupied state of mind, to entertain him might have seemed by no means an idle pastime, if he hadn't unexpectedly developed a talkative streak himself. was it merely my being so distrait, or was it quite another reason, that led him to open up so suddenly about his kentish home? strange to say, instead of panting for the title, cuthbert wanted his brother to go on living, though there was something queer about his spine, poor fellow, and the doctors said he couldn't possibly-- of course i was surprised at cuthbert's views, for i had always thought that if there were a title in your family your sentiments toward those who kept you out of it were necessarily murderous, and your tears crocodile when you pretended to weep over their biers. but cuthbert's feelings were so human that i mentally apologized to the nobility. as to high staunton manor, i adored it. it is mostly jacobean, but with an ancient tudor wing, and it has a chapel and a ghost and a secret staircase and a frightfully beautiful and wicked ancestress hanging in the hall--i mean a portrait of her--and quantities of oak paneling quite black with age, and silver that was hidden in the family tombs when cromwell's soldiers came, and a chamber where elizabeth once slept, and other romantic details too numerous to mention. it is all a little bit run down and shabby, for lack of money to keep it up, and of course on that account all the more entrancing. naturally the less money the more aristocracy, for it meant that the family had never descended to marrying coal miners and brewers--which comment is my own, for cuthbert was quite destitute of swank. the present lord grasmere lived up to his position so completely that he had the gout and sat with his foot on a cushion exactly like all the elderly aristocrats you ever heard of, only when i inquired if his lordship cursed his valet and flung plates at the footmen when his foot hurt him his son was much shocked and pained. he did not realize so well as i--from an extensive course of novel-reading--that such is the usual behavior of titled persons. it was delightful, there in the hot stillness of the island, with the palms rustling faintly overhead, to hear of that cool, mossy, ancient place. i asked eager questions--i repeated gloatingly fragments of description--i wondered enviously what it would be like to have anything so old and proud and beautiful in your very blood--when suddenly i realized that, misled by my enthusiasm, cuthbert was saying something which must not be said--that he was about to offer the shelter of that ancient roof to me. to me, whose heart could never nest there, but must be ever on the wing, a wild bird of passage in the track of a ship-- i sat up with a galvanic start. "oh--listen--didn't you hear something?" i desperately broke in. for somehow i must stop him. i didn't want our nice jolly friendship spoiled--and besides, fancy being cooped up on an island with a man you have refused! especially when all the while you'd be wanting so to pet and console him! but with his calm doggedness cuthbert began again--"i was a bit afraid the old place would have seemed too quiet and dull to you--" when the day was saved and my interruption strangely justified by a shrill outcry from the camp. i knew that high falsetto tone. it was the voice of mr. tubbs, but pitched in a key of quite insane excitement. i sprang up and ran, crusoe and the honorable cuthbert at my heels. there in the midst of the camp mr. tubbs stood, the center of a group who were regarding him with astonished looks. mr. shaw and the captain had left their tinkering, cookie his saucepans, and aunt jane and violet had come hurrying from the hut. among us all stood mr. tubbs with folded arms, looking round upon the company with an extraordinary air of complacency and triumph. "what is it, oh, what is it, mr. tubbs?" cried aunt jane, fluttering with the consciousness of her proprietorship. but mr. tubbs glanced at her as indifferently as a sated turkey-buzzard at a morsel which has ceased to tempt him. "mr. tubbs," commanded violet, "speak--explain yourself!" "come, out with it, tubbs," advised mr. shaw. then the lips of mr. tubbs parted, and from them issued this solitary word: "eureka!" "what?" screamed miss higglesby-browne. "_you have found it_?" solemnly mr. tubbs inclined his head. "eureka!" he repeated. "i have found it!" amidst the exclamations, the questions, the general commotion which ensued, i had room for only one thought--that mr. tubbs had somehow discovered the treasure in the cabin of the _island queen_. indeed, i should have shrieked the words aloud, but for a providential dumbness that fell upon me. meanwhile mr. tubbs had unfolded his arms from their napoleonic posture on his bosom long enough to wave his hand for silence. "friends," he began, "it has been known from the start that there was a landmark on this little old island that would give any party discovering the same a line on that chest of money right away. there's been some that was too high up in the exploring business to waste time looking for landmarks. they had ruther do more fancy stunts, where what with surf, and sharks, and bangin' up the boat, they could make a good show of gettin' busy. but old ham tubbs, he don't let on to be a hero. jest a plain man o' business--that's old h. h. consequence is, he leaves the other fellers have the brass band, while he sets out on the q. t. to run a certain little clue to earth. and, ladies and gentlemen, he's run it!" "you have found--you have found the treasure!" shrilled aunt jane. contrary to his bland custom, mr. tubbs frowned at her darkly. "i said i found the _clue_," he corrected. "of course, it's the same thing. ladies and gentlemen, not to appear to be a hot-air artist, i will tell you in a word, that i have located the tombstone of one william halliwell, deceased!" of course. not once had i thought of it. bare, stark, glaring up at the sun, lay the stone carved with the letters and the cross-bones. forgetting in the haste of my departure to replace the vines upon the grave, i had left the stone to shout its secret to the first comer. and that had happened to be mr. tubbs. happened, i say, for i knew that he had not had the slightest notion where to look for the grave of bill halliwell. this running to earth of clues was purely an affair of his own picturesque imagination. i wondered uneasily what he had made of the uprooted vines--but he would lay them to the pigs, no doubt. in the countenance of mr. tubbs, flushed and exultant, there was no suspicion that the secret was not all his own. miss higglesby-browne had been settling her helmet more firmly upon her wiry locks. she had a closed umbrella beneath her arm, and she drew and brandished it like a saber as she took a long stride forward. "mr. tubbs," she commanded, "lead on!" but mr. tubbs did not lead on. he stood quite still, regarding miss browne with a smile of infinite slyness. "oh, no indeed!" he said. "old h. h. wasn't born yesterday. it may have struck you that to possess the sole and exclusive knowledge of the whereabouts of a million or two--ratin' it low--is some considerable of an asset. and it's one i ain't got the least idee of partin' with unless for inducements held out." aunt jane gave a faint shriek. i had been silently debating what my own course should be in the face of this unexpected development. suddenly i saw my way quite clear. i would say nothing. mr. tubbs should reveal his own perfidy. and the curtain should ring down upon the play, leaving mr. tubbs foiled all around, bereft both of the treasure and of aunt jane. oh, how i would enjoy the farce as it was played by the unconscious actors! how i would step in at the end to reward virtue and punish guilt! and how i would point the moral, later, very gently to aunt jane, an aunt jane all penitence and docility! little i dreamed what surprises ensuing acts of the play were to hold for me, or of their astounding contrast with the farce of my joyous imagination. i took no part in the storm that raged round mr. tubbs. it is said that in the heart of the tempest there is calm, and this great truth of natural philosophy mr. tubbs exemplified. his face adorned by a seraphic, buttery smile, he stood unmoved, while miss higglesby-browne uttered cyclonic exhortations and reproaches, while aunt jane sobbed and said, "_oh, mr. tubbs_!" while mr. shaw strove to make himself heard above the din. he did at least succeed in extracting from the traitor a definite statement of terms. these were nothing less than fifty per cent. of the treasure, secured to him by a document signed, sealed and delivered into his own hands. to a suggestion that as he had discovered the all-important tombstone so might some one else, he replied with tranquillity that he thought not, as he had taken precautions against such an eventuality. in other words, as i was later to discover, the wily mr. tubbs had contrived to raise the boulder from its bed and push it over the cliff into the sea, afterward replacing the mass of vines upon the grave. as to the entrance to the tunnel, it was apparent to me that mr. tubbs had not yet discovered it. even if he had, i am certain that he would have been no more heroic than myself about exploring it, though there was no missing peter to haunt his imagination. but with the grave as a starting-point, there could be no question as to the ultimate discovery of the cave. i was so eager myself to see the inside of the cave, and to know whatever it had to reveal of the fate of peter, that i was inclined to wish mr. tubbs success in driving his hard bargain, especially as it would profit him nothing in the end. but this sentiment was exclusively my own. on all hands indignation greeted the rigorous demands of mr. tubbs. with a righteous joy, i saw the fabric of aunt jane's illusions shaken by the rude blast of reality. would it be riven quite in twain? i was dubious, for aunt jane's illusions have a toughness in striking contrast to the uncertain nature of her ideas in general. darker and darker disclosures of mr. tubbs's perfidy would be required. but judging from his present recklessness, they would be forthcoming. for where was the tubbs of yesterday--the honey-tongued, the suave, the anxiously obsequious tubbs? gone, quite gone. instead, here was a tubbs who cocked his helmet rakishly, and leered round upon the company, deaf to the claims of loyalty, the pleas of friendship, the voice of tenderness--aunt jane's. manfully miss higglesby-browne stormed up and down the beach. she demanded of mr. shaw, of cuthbert vane, of captain magnus, each and severally, that mr. tubbs be compelled to disgorge his secret. you saw that she would not have shrunk from a regimen of racks and thumbscrews. but there were no racks or thumbscrews on the island. of course we could have invented various instruments of torture--i felt i could have developed some ingenuity that way myself--but too fatally well mr. tubbs knew the civilized prejudices of those with whom he had to deal. with perfect impunity he could strut about the camp, sure that no weapons worse than words would be brought to bear upon him, that he would not even be turned away from the general board to browse on cocoanuts in solitude. long ago mr. shaw had left the field to violet and with a curt shrug had turned his back and stood looking out over the cove, stroking his chin reflectively. miss browne's eloquence had risen to amazing flights, and she already had mr. tubbs inextricably mixed with. ananias and sapphira, when the scotchman broke in upon her ruthlessly. "friends," he said, "so far as i can see we have been put a good bit ahead by this morning's work. first, we know that the grave which should be our landmark has not been entirely obliterated by the jungle, as i had thought most likely. second, we know that it is on this side of the island, for the reason that this chap tubbs hasn't nerve to go much beyond shouting distance by himself. third, as tubbs has tried this hold-up business i believe we should consider the agreement by which he was to receive a sixteenth share null and void, and decide here and now that he gets nothing whatever. fourth, the boat is now pretty well to rights, and as soon as we have a snack bert and magnus and i will set out, in twice as good heart as before, having had the story that brought us here confirmed for the first time. so tubbs and his tombstone can go to thunder." "i can, can i?" cried mr. tubbs. "say, are you a human iceberg, to talk that cool before a man's own face? say, i'll--" but cuthbert vane broke in. "three rousing cheers, old boy!" he cried to the scotchman enthusiastically. "always did think the chap a frightful bounder, don't you know? we'll stand by old shaw, won't we, magnus?" which comradely outbreak showed the excess of the beautiful youth's emotions, for usually he turned a large cold shoulder on the captain, though managing in some mysterious manner to be perfectly civil all the time. perhaps you have to be born at high staunton manor or its equivalent to possess the art of relegating people to immense distances without seeming to administer even the gentlest shove. but unfortunately the effect of the honorable cuthbert's cordiality was lost, so far as the object of it was concerned, because of the surprising fact, only now remarked by any one, that captain magnus had disappeared. xv some secret diplomacy the evanishment of captain magnus, though quite unlooked for at so critical a moment, was too much in keeping with his eccentric and unsocial ways to arouse much comment. everybody looked about with mild ejaculations of surprise, and then forgot about the matter. whistling a scotch tune, dugald shaw set to work again on the boat. in the face of difficulty or opposition he always grew more brisk and cheerful. i used to wonder whether in the event of a tornado he would not warm into positive geniality. perhaps it would not have needed a tornado, if i had not begun by suspecting him of conspiring against aunt jane's pocket, or if the triumvirate, inspired by mr. tubbs, had not sat in gloomy judgment on his every movement. or if he hadn't been reproached so for saving me from the cave, instead of leaving it to cuthbert vane-- but now under the stimulus of speaking his mind about mr. tubbs the scotchman whistled as he worked, and slapped the noble youth affectionately on the back when he came and got in the way with anxious industry. as i wanted to observe developments--a very necessary thing when you are playing providence--i chose a central position in the shade and pulled out some very smudgy tatting, a sort of penelope's web which there was no prospect of my ever completing, but which served admirably to give me an appearance of occupation at critical moments. mr. tubbs also had sought a shady spot and was fanning himself with his helmet. from time to time he hummed, in a manner determinedly gay. however he might disguise it from himself, this time mr. tubbs had overshot his mark. in the first thrill of his great discovery he had thought the game was in his hands. he had looked for an instant capitulation. the truth was, since our arrival on the island mr. tubbs had felt himself the spoiled child of fortune. aunt jane and miss higglesby-browne were the joint commanders of the expedition, and he commanded them. the scotchman's theoretical rank as leader had involved merely the acceptance of all the responsibility and blame, while authority rested with the petticoat government dominated by the bland and wily tubbs. had mr. tubbs but continued bland and wily, had he taken his fair confederates into his counsels, who knows how fat a share of the treasure they might have voted him. but he had abandoned his safe nook behind the throne, and sought to come out into the open as dictator. _sic semper tyrannis_. so had the mighty fallen. faced with the failure of his _coup d'etat_, mr. tubbs's situation was, to say the least, awkward. he had risked all, and lost it. but he maintained an air of jaunty self-confidence, slightly tinged with irony. it was all very well, he seemed to imply, for us to try to get along without h. h. we would discover the impossibility of it soon enough. aunt jane, drooping, had been led away to the cabin by miss higglesby-browne. you now heard the voice of violet in exhortation, mingled with aunt jane's sobs. i seemed to see that an ear of mr. tubbs was cocked attentively in that direction, he had indeed erred in the very wantonness of triumph, for a single glance would have kept aunt jane loyal and prodigal of excuses for him in the face of any treachery. not even violet could have clapped the lid on the up-welling fount of sentiment in aunt jane's heart. only the cold condemning eye of h. h. himself had congealed that tepid flood. the morning wore on with ever-increasing heat, and as nothing happened i began to find my watchful waiting dull. crusoe, worn out perhaps by some private nocturnal pig-hunt, slept heavily where the drip of the spring over the brim of old heintz's kettle cooled the air. aunt jane's sobs had ceased, and only a low murmur of voices came from the cabin. i began to consider whether it would not be well to take a walk with cuthbert vane and discover the tombstone all over again. i knew nothing, of course, of mr. tubbs's drastic measures with the celebrated landmark. as to cuthbert's interrupted courtship, i depended on the vast excitement of discovering the cave to distract his mind from it. for that was the idea, of course--cuthbert vane and i would explore the cave, and then whenever i liked i could prick the bubble of mr. tubbs's ambitions, without relating the whole strange story of the diary and the _island queen_. i was immensely pleased already by the elimination of mr. tubbs from the number of those who need have a finger in the golden pie. i thought that perhaps with time and patience i might coax events to play still further into my hand. but meanwhile the cave drew me like a magnet. i jealously desired to be the first to see it, to snatch from mr. tubbs the honors of discovery. and i wanted to know about poor peter--and, the doubloons that he had gone back to fetch. but already captain magnus had forsaken the post of duty and departed on an unknown errand. could i ask cuthbert vane to do it, too? and then i smiled a smile that was half proud. i might ask him--but he would refuse me. in cuthbert's simple code, certain things were "done," certain others not. among the nots was to fail in standing by a friend. and just now cuthbert was standing by dugald shaw. therefore nods and becks and wreathed smiles were vain. in cuthbert's quiet, easy-mannered, thick-headed way he could turn his back calmly on the face of love and follow the harsh call of duty even to death. it would not occur to him not to. and he never would suspect himself of being a hero--that would be quite the nicest part of it. and yet i knew poor cuthbert was an exploded superstition, an anachronism, part of a vanishing order of things, and that the ideal which was replacing him was a boiler-plated monster with clock-work heart and brain, named efficiency. and that cuthbert must go, along with his jacobean manor and his family ghost, and the oaks in the park, and everything else that couldn't prove its right to live except by being fine and lovely and full of garnered sweetness of the past-- at this point in my meditations the door of the cabin opened and miss browne came out, looking sternly resolute. aunt jane followed, very pink about the eyes and nose. she threw an anxious fluttering glance at mr. tubbs, who sat up briskly, and in a nervous manner polished with a large bandana that barren zone, his cranium, which looked torrid enough to scorch the very feet of the flies that walked on it. it was clear that on the lips of miss browne there hovered some important announcement, which might well be vital to the fortunes of mr. tubbs. with a commanding gesture miss browne signaled the rest to approach. mr. tubbs bounced up with alacrity. mr. shaw and cuthbert obeyed less promptly, but they obeyed. meanwhile violet waited, looking implacable as fate. "and where is captain magnus?" she demanded, glancing about her. but no one knew what had become of captain magnus. as for myself, i continued to sit in the shade and tat. but i could hear with ease all that was said. "mr. tubbs," began miss browne, "your recent claims have been matter of prolonged consideration between miss harding and myself. we feel--we can not but feel--that there was a harshness in your announcement of them, an apparent concentration on your own interests, ill befitting a member of this expedition. also, that in actual substance, they were excessive. not half, mr. tubbs; oh, no, not half! but one-quarter, miss harding and myself, as the joint heads of the harding-browne expedition, are inclined to think no more than the reward which is your due. we suggest, therefore, a simple way out of the difficulty, mr. dugald shaw was engaged on liberal terms to find the treasure. he has not found the treasure. he has not found the slightest clue to its present whereabouts. mr. tubbs, on the contrary, has found a clue. it is a clue of the first importance. it is equivalent almost to the actual discovery of the chest. therefore let mr. shaw, convinced i am sure by this calm presentation of the matter of the justice of such a course, resign his claim to a fourth share of the treasure in favor of mr. hamilton h. tubbs, and agree to receive instead the former allotment of mr. tubbs, namely, one-sixteenth." having offered this remarkable suggestion, miss browne folded her arms and waited for it to bear fruit. it did--in the enthusiastic response of mr. tubbs. having already played his highest trump and missed the trick, he now found himself with an entirely fresh hand dealt to him by the obliging miss higglesby-browne. the care in his countenance yielded to beaming smiles. "well, well!" he exclaimed. "to think of your takin' old h. h. that literal! o' course, havin' formed my habits in the financial centers of the country, i named a stiff price at first--a stiff price, i won't deny. but that's jest the leetle way of a man used to handlin' large affairs--nothin' else to it, i do assure you. the old man himself used to say, 'there's old h. h.--you'd think he'd eat the paint off a house, he'll show up that graspin' in a deal. and all the time it's jest love of the game. let him know he's goin' to win out, and bless you, old h. h. will swing right round and fair force the profits on the other party. h. h. is slicker than soap to handle, if only you handle him right.' can i say without hard feelin's that jest now h. h. was not handled right? instead o' bein' joshed with, as he looked for, he was took up short, and even them which he might have expected to show confidence"--here mr. tubbs cast a reproachful eye at aunt jane--"run off with the notion that he meant jest what he said. all he'd done for this expedition, his loyalty and faith to same, was forgotten, and he was thought of as a self-seeker and voracious shark!" the pain of these recollections dammed the torrent of mr. tubbs's speech. "oh, mr. tubbs!" breathed aunt jane heart-brokenly, and of course a tear trickled gently down her nose, following the path of many previous tears which had already left their saline traces. mr. tubbs managed in some impossible fashion to roll one eye tenderly at aunt jane, while keeping the other fastened shrewdly on the remainder of his audience. "miss higglesby-browne and miss jane harding," he resumed, "i accept. it would astonish them as has only known h. h. on his financial side to see him agree to a reduction of profits like this without a kick. but i'm a man of impulse, i am. get me on my soft side and a kitten ain't more impulsive than old h. h. and o' course the business of this expedition ain't jest business to me. it's--er--friendship, and--er--sentiment--in short, there's feelin's that is more than worth their weight in gold!" at these significant words the agitation of aunt jane was extreme. was it possible that mr. tubbs was declaring himself in the presence of others--and was a response demanded from herself--would his sensitive nature, so lately wounded by cruel suspicion, interpret her silence as fatal to his hopes? but while she struggled between maiden shyness and the fear of crushing mr. tubbs the conversation had swept on. "mr. shaw," said miss browne, "you have heard mr. tubbs, in the interest of the expedition, liberally consent to reduce his claim by one-half. doubtless, if only in a spirit of emulation, you will attempt to match this conduct by canceling our present agreement and consenting to another crediting you with the former sixteenth share of mr. tubbs." "don't do it, shaw--hold the fort, old boy!" broke in cuthbert vane. "i say, miss browne, this is a bally shame!" miss browne had always treated the prospective lord grasmere with distinguished politeness. even now her air was mild though lofty. "mr. vane, i must beg leave to remind you that the object of this expedition was yet unattained when mr. tubbs, by following clues ignored by others, brought success within our reach. mr. dugald shaw having conspicuously failed--" "failed!" repeated cuthbert, with unprecedented energy. "failed! i say, that's too bad of you, miss browne. wasn't everybody here a lot keener than old shaw about mucking in that silly cave where those johnnies would have had hard work to bury anything unless they were mermaids? didn't the old chap risk his neck a dozen times a day while this christopher columbus stayed high and dry ashore? suppose he did find the tombstone by stubbing his silly toes on it--so far he hasn't found the cave, much less the box of guineas or whatever those foreign chaps call their money. let mr. tubbs go sit on the tombstone if he likes. shaw and i can find the cave quite on our own, can't we, shaw?" "mr. vane," replied the still deferential violet, "as a member of the british aristocracy, it is not to be supposed that you would view financial matters with the same eye as those of us of the middle classes, who, unhappily perhaps for our finer feelings, have been obliged to experience the harsh contacts of common life. your devotion to mr. shaw has a romantic ardor which i can not but admire. but permit us also our enthusiasm for the perspicacity of mr. tubbs, to which we owe the wealth now within our grasp." mr. shaw now spoke for the first time. "miss browne, i do not recognize the justice of your standpoint in this matter. i have done and am still prepared to do my best in this business of the treasure. if mr. tubbs will not give his information except for a bribe, i say--let him keep it. we are no worse off without it than we were before, and you were then confident of success. my intention, ma'am, is to hold you to our original agreement. i shall continue the search for the treasure on the same lines as at present." "one moment," said miss browne haughtily. she had never spoken otherwise than haughtily to mr. shaw since the episode of the wise woman of dumbiedykes. "one moment, jane--and you, mr. tubbs--" she drew them aside, and they moved off out of earshot, where they stood with their backs to us and their heads together. it was my opportunity. violet herself had proposed that the original agreement--the agreement which bound me to ask for no share of the treasure--should be canceled. nothing now was necessary to the ripening of my hopes but to induce dugald shaw to immolate himself. would he do so--on my bare word? there was no time to explain anything--he must trust me. i sprang up and dashed over to the pair who stood looking gloomily out to sea. they turned in surprise and stared down, the two big men, into my flushed up-tilted face. "mr. shaw," i whispered quickly, "you must do as miss browne wishes." in my earnestness i laid a hand upon his arm. he regarded me bewilderedly. "you must--you must!" i urged. "you'll spoil everything if you refuse!" the surprise in his face yielded to a look composed of many elements, but which was mainly hard and bitter. "and still i shall refuse," he said sardonically. "oh, no, no," i implored, "you don't understand! i--oh, if you would only believe that i am your friend!" his face changed subtly. it was still questioning and guarded, but with a softening in it, too. "why don't you believe it?" i whispered unsteadily. "do you forget that i owe you my life?" and at the recollection of that day in the sea-cave the scarlet burned in my cheeks and my head drooped. but i saw how the lines about his mouth relaxed. "surely you must know that i would repay you if i could!" i hurried on. "and not by--treachery." he laughed suddenly. "treachery? no! i think you would always be an open foe." "indeed i would!" i answered with a flash of wrath. then, as i remembered the need of haste, i spoke in an intense quick whisper. "listen--i can't explain, there isn't time. i can only ask you to trust me--to agree to what miss browne wishes. everything--you don't dream how much--depends on it!" for i felt that i would let the treasure lie hidden in the _island queen_ forever rather than that mr. tubbs should, under the original contract, claim a share of it. the doubt had quite left his face. "i do trust you, little virginia," he said gently. "yes, i trust in your honesty, heaven knows, child. but permit me to question your wisdom in desiring to enrich our friend tubbs." "enrich him--enrich _him_! the best i wish him is unlimited gruel in an almshouse somewhere. no! what i want is to get that wretched paper of miss browne's nullified. afterward we can divide things up as we like--" bewilderment, shot with a gleam of half-incredulous understanding, seemed to transfix him. we stood a long moment, our eyes challenging each other, exchanging their countersign of faith and steadfastness. then slowly he held out his hand. i laid mine in it--we stood hand in hand, comrades at last. without more words he turned away and strode over to the council of three. i now became aware of cuthbert vane, whom perplexity had carried far beyond the bounds of speech and imprisoned in a sort of torpor. he was showing faint symptoms of revival, and had got as far as "i say--?" uttered in the tone of one who finds himself moving about in worlds not realized, when the near-by group dissolved and moved rapidly toward us. miss browne, exultant, beaming, was in the van. she set her substantial feet down like a charger pawing the earth. you might almost have said that violet pranced. aunt jane was round-eyed and twittering. mr. tubbs wore a look of suppressed astonishment, almost of perturbation. _what's his game_? was the question in the sophisticated eye of mr. tubbs. but the scotchman had when he chose a perfect poker face. the great game of bluff would have suited him to a nicety. mr. tubbs interrogated that inexpressive countenance in vain. miss browne advanced on cuthbert vane and seized both his hands in an ardent clasp. "mr. vane," she said with solemnity, "i thank you--in the name of this expedition i thank you--for the influence you have exerted upon your friend!" and this seemed to be to the noble youth the most stunning of all the shocks of that eventful morning. now came the matter of drawing up the new agreement. it was a canny scot indeed who, acting on the hint i had just given him, finally settled its terms. in the first place, the previous agreement was declared null and void. in the second, mr. tubbs was to have his fourth only if the treasure were discovered through his direct agency. and it was under this condition and no other that dugald shaw bound himself to relinquish his original claim. virginia harding signed a new renunciatory clause, but it bore only on treasure _discovered by mr. tubbs_. indeed, the entire contract was of force only if mr. tubbs fulfilled his part of it, and fell to pieces if he did not. which was exactly what i wanted. miss browne and mr. tubbs demurred a little at the wording on which mr. shaw insisted, but mr. tubbs's confidence in the infallibility of the tombstone was so great that no real objection was interposed. no difficulty was made of the absence of captain magnus, as his interests were unaffected by the change. space was left for his signature. mine came last of all, as that of a mere interloper and hanger-on. i added it and handed the paper demurely across to violet, who consigned it to an apparently bottomless pocket. copies were to be made after lunch. my demonstrations of joy at this happy issue of my hopes had to be confined to a smile--in which for a startled instant violet had seemed to sense the triumph. it was still on my lips as with a general movement we rose from the table about which we had been grouped during the absorbing business of drawing up the contract. cookie had been clamoring for us to leave, that he might spread the table for lunch. i had opened my mouth to call to him, "all right, cookie!" when a shrill volley of barks from crusoe shattered the stillness of the drowsy air. in the same instant the voice of cookie, raised to a sharp note of alarm, rang through the camp: "_my gawd, what all dis yere mean_?" i turned, to look into the muzzle of a rifle. xvi like a chapter from the past five men had emerged from the woods behind the clearing, so quietly that they were in the center of the camp before crusoe's shrill bark, or the outcry of the cook, warned us of their presence. by that time they had us covered. three of them carried rifles, the other two revolvers. one of these was captain magnus. advancing a step or two before the others he ordered us to throw up our hands. perhaps he meant only the men--but my hands and aunt jane's and miss higglesby-browne's also went up with celerity. he grinned into our astounded faces with a wolfish baring of his yellow teeth. "never guessed i wasn't here jest to do the shovel work, but might have my own little side-show to bring off, hey?" he inquired of no one in particular. "here, slinker, help me truss 'em up." the man addressed thrust his pistol in his belt and came forward, and with his help the hands of the scotchman, cuthbert vane and mr. tubbs were securely tied. they were searched for arms, and the sheath-knives which mr. shaw and cuthbert carried at their belts were taken away. the three prisoners were then ordered to seat themselves in a row on the trunk of a prostrate palm. the whole thing had happened in the strangest silence. except for a feeble moaning from aunt jane, like the bleating of a sheep, which broke forth at intervals, nobody spoke or made a sound. the three riflemen in the background, standing like images with their weapons raised, looked like a well-trained chorus in an opera. and indeed it was all extraordinarily like something on a stage. slinker, for instance. he had a prowling, sidelong fashion of moving about, and enormous yellow mustaches like a viking. surely some artist in the make-up line had invented slinker! and the burly fellow in the background, with the black whiskers--too bad he'd forgotten his earrings--- but i awoke to the horrid reality of it all as captain magnus, smiling his wolfish smile, turned and approached me. "well, boys," he remarked to his followers, who had now lowered their weapons and were standing about at ease, "here's the little pippin i was tellin' of. 'fraid we give her a little scare bustin' in so sudden, so she ain't quite so bright and smilin' as i like to see. its all right, girlie; you'll soon cheer up when you find out you're go'in' to be the little queen o' this camp. things will be all your way now--so long as you treat me right." and the abominable creature thrust forth a hairy paw and deliberately chucked me under the chin. i heard a roar from the log--and coincidently from captain magnus. for with the instant response of an automaton--consciously i had nothing at all to do with it--i had reached up and briskly boxed the captain's ears. furiously he caught my wrist. "ah, you red-headed little devil, you'll pay for this! i ain't pretty, oh, no! i ain't a handsome mooncalf like the honorable; i ain't got a title, nor girly pink cheeks, nor fine gentleman ways. no walks with the likes o' me, no tatey-tates in the woods--oh, no! well, it's goin' to be another story now, girlie. i guess you can learn to like my looks, with a little help from my fist now and then, jest as well as you done the honorable's. i guess it won't be long before i have you crawlin' on your knees to me for a word o' kindness. i guess--" "aw, stow that soft stuff, magnus," advised slinker. "you can do your spoonin' with the gal later on. we're here to git that gold, and don't you forget it. plenty o' time afterwards to spark the wimmen." "that's the talk," chimed in blackbeard. "don't run us on a lee shore for the sake of a skirt. skirts is thicker'n herring in every port, ain't they?" "i got a score to settle with this one," growled magnus sullenly, but his grasp loosened on my arm, and i slipped from him and fled to aunt jane--yes, to aunt jane--and clung to her convulsively. the poor little woman was crying, of course, making a low inarticulate whimper like a frightened child. miss higglesby-browne seemed to have petrified. her skin had a withered look, and a fine network of lines showed on it, suddenly clear, like a tracery on parchment. beyond her i saw the face of dugald shaw, gray with a steely wrath. a gun had been trained anew on him and cuthbert, and the bearer thereof was arguing with them profanely. i suppose the prisoners had threatened outbreak at the spectacle of the chin-chucking. no one had bothered to secure cookie, and he knelt among the pots and pans of his open-air kitchen, pouring forth petitions in a steady stream. blackboard, who seemed a jovial brute, burst into a loud guffaw. "ha, ha! look at old soot-and-cinders gittin' hisself ready for glory!" he approached the negro and aimed at him a kick which cookie, arising with unexpected nimbleness, contrived to dodge. "looky here, darky, git busy dishin' up the grub, will you? i could stand one good feed after the forecastle slops we been livin' on." blackbeard, whom his companions addressed indiscriminately as "captain," or "tony," seemed to exercise a certain authority. he went over to the prisoners on the log and inspected their bonds. "you'll do; can't git loose nohow," he announced. then, with a savage frown, "but no monkey business. first o' that i see, its a dose o' cold lead for youse, savvy?" he turned to us women. "well, chickabiddies, we ain't treated you harsh, i hope? now i don't care about tyin' youse up, in case we can help it, so jest be good girls, and i'll let youse run around loose for a while." but magnus struck in with an oath. "loose? you're turnin' soft, i say. the future mrs. m. there--which i mean to make her if she behaves right--she's a handful, she is. there ain't no low trick she won't play on us if she gets the chance. better tie her up, i say." "magnus," responded tony with severity, "it'd make a person think to hear you talk that you wasn't no gentleman. if you can't keep little red-top in order without you tie her, why, then hand her over to a guy what can. i bet i wouldn't have a speck o' trouble with her--her and me would git along as sweet as two turtle-doves." "you dry up, tony," said magnus, lowering. "i'll look after my own affairs of the heart. anyway, here's them two old hens what have been makin' me sick with their jabber and nonsense all these weeks. ain't i goin' to have a chance to get square?" "here, youse!" struck in slinker, "quit your jawin'! here's a feed we ain't seen the like of in weeks." tony thereupon ordered the women to sit down on the ground in the shade and not move under penalty of "gettin' a wing clipped." we obeyed in silence and looked on while the pirates with wolfish voracity devoured the meal which had been meant for us. they had pocket-flasks with them, and as they attacked them with frequency the talk grew louder and wilder. by degrees it was possible to comprehend the extraordinary disaster which had befallen us, at least in a sketchy outline of which the detail was filled in later. tony, it appeared, was the master of a small power-schooner which had been fitting out in san francisco for a filibustering trip to the mexican coast. his three companions were the crew. none was of the old hearty breed of sailors, but wharf-rats pure and simple, city-dregs whom chance had led to follow the sea. tony, in whom one detected a certain rough force and ability, was an italian, an outlaw specimen of the breed which mans the fishing fleet putting forth from the harbor of san francisco. when and where he and magnus had been friends i do not know. but no sooner had the wisdom of miss browne imparted the great secret to her chance acquaintance of the new york wharves, than he had communicated with his old pal tony. the power-schooner with her unlawful cargo stole out through the gate, made her delivery in the mexican port, took on fresh supplies, and stood away for leeward island. the western anchorage had received and snugly hidden her. captain magnus, meanwhile, by means of a mirror flashed from lookout, had maintained communication with his friends, and even visited them under cover of the supposed shooting expedition. and now, while we had been striving to overcome the recalcitrancy of mr. tubbs, captain magnus had taken a short cut to the same end. you felt that the secret of mr. tubbs would be extracted, if need be, by no delicate methods. but mr. tubbs's character possessed none of that unreasonable obstinacy which would make harsh measures necessary under such conditions. his countenance, as the illuminating conversation of the pirates had proceeded, lost the speckled appearance which had characterized it at the height of his terrors. something like his normal hue returned. he sat up straighter, moistened his dry lips, and looked around upon us, yes, even upon aunt jane and miss higglesby-browne, with whom he had been so lately and so tenderly reconciled, with a sidelong, calculating glance. after the pirates had eaten, the prisoners on the log were covered with a rifle and their hands untied, while cookie, in a lugubrious silence made eloquent by his rolling eyes, passed around among us the remnants of the food. no one can be said to have eaten with appetite except mr. tubbs, who received his portion with wordy gratitude and devoured it with seeming gusto. the pirates, full-fed, with pipes in mouths, were inclined to be affable and jocular. "feeding the animals," as slinker called it, seemed to afford them much agreeable diversion. even magnus had lost in a degree his usual sullenness, and was wreathed in simian smiles. the intense terror and revulsion which he inspired in me kept my unwilling eyes constantly wandering in his direction. yet under all the terror was a bedrock confidence that there was, there must be somehow in the essence of things, an eternal rightness which would keep me safe from captain magnus. and as i looked across at dugald shaw and met for an instant his steady watchful eyes, i managed a swift little smile--a rather wan smile, i dare say, but still a smile. cuthbert vane caught, so to speak, the tail of it, and was electrified. i saw his lips form at mr. shaw's ear the words, _wonderful little sport, by jove_! for some time after our capture by the pirates cuthbert's state had been one of settled incredulity. even when they tied his hands he had continued to contemplate the invaders as illusions. it was, this remarkable episode, altogether a thing without precedent--and what was that but another name for the impossible? and then slowly, by painful degrees--you saw them reflected in his candid face--it grew upon him that it was precisely the impossible, the unprecedented, that was happening. a curious stiffening came over cuthbert vane. for the first time in my knowledge of him he showed the consciousness--instead of only the sub-consciousness--of the difference between norman blood and the ordinary sanguine fluid. his shoulders squared; he lost his habitual easy lounge and sat erect and tall. something stern and aquiline showed through the smooth beauty of his face, so that you thought of effigies of crusading knights stretched on their ancient tombs in high staunton church. he was their true descendant after all, this slow, calm, gentle-mannered cuthbert. it was a young lion that i had been playing with, and the claws were there, strong and terrible in their velvet sheath. captain tony, having finished his pipe, knocked the ashes out against the heel of his boot and put the pipe in his pocket. "well," he said, stretching, "i'd ruther have a nap, but business is business, so let's get down to it. which o' them guys has the line on the stuff, magnus?" "old baldy, here," returned magnus, with a nod at mr. tubbs. "old washtubs i call him generally, ha, ha!" "then looky here, washtubs," said tony, addressing mr. tubbs with sudden sternness, "maybe you could bluff these here soft guys, but we're a different breed o' cats, we are. whatever you know, you'll come through with it and come quick, or it'll be the worse for your hide, see?" mr. tubbs rose from the log with promptness. "captain," he said earnestly, "from long experience in the financial centers of the country, i have got to be a man what understands human nature. the minute i looked at you, i seen it in your eye that there wasn't no use in tryin' to bluff you. what's more, i don't want to. once he gets with a congenial crowd, there ain't a feller anywheres that will do more in the cause o' friendship than old hamilton h. tubbs. and you are a congenial crowd, you boys--gosh, but you do look good to me after the bunch o' stiffs i been playin' up to here! all i ask is, to let me in on it with you, and i'll be glad to put you wise to the best tricks of a sly old fox who ain't ever been caught yet without two holes to his burrow. i won't ask no half, nor no quarter, either, though i jest signed up for that amount with the old girl here. but give me freedom, and a bunch o' live wires like you boys! i've near froze into a plaster figure o' virtue, what with talkin' like a sunday-school class, and sparkin' one old maid, and makin' out like i wouldn't melt butter with the other. so h. h. will ship along of you, mates, and we'll off to the china coast somewheres where the spendin' is good and the police not too nosy, and try how far a trunkful of doubloons will go!" with a choky little gurgle in her throat aunt jane fell limply against me. it was too much. all day long she had been tossed back and forth like a shuttlecock by the battledore of emotion. she had borne the shock of mr. tubbs's sordid greed for gold, his disloyalty to the expedition, his coldness to herself; she had been shaken by the tender stress of the reconciliation, had been captured by pirates, and now suffered the supreme blow of this final revelation of the treachery of tubbs. to hear her romance described as the sparking of an old maid--and by the sparker! from miss higglesby-browne had come a snort of fury, but she said nothing, having apparently no confidence in the effect of oratory on pirates. she did not even exhort aunt jane, but left it to me to sustain my drooping aunt as best i could. as mr. tubbs made his whole-hearted and magnanimous proposal captain tony opened his small black eyes and contemplated him with attention. at the conclusion he appeared to meditate. then he glanced round upon his fellows. "what say, boys? shall we ship old washtubs on the schooner and let him have his fling along with us? eh?" and as captain tony uttered these words the lid of his left eye eclipsed for an instant that intelligent optic. from the pirates came a scattering volley of assents. "all right--hooray for old washtubs--sure, close the deal." "all right, washtubs, the boys are willing. so i guess, though this island is the very lid of the hot place, and when i come again it's going to be with an iceberg in tow to keep the air cooled off, i guess we better be moving toward that chest of doubloons." it was arranged that slinker and a cross-eyed man named horny should remain at the camp on guard. as a measure of precaution cookie, too, was bound, and aunt jane, miss browne and i ordered into the cabin. the three remaining pirates, armed with our spades and picks and dispensing a great deal of jocular profanity, set out for the cave under the guidance of mr. tubbs. thankful as i was for the departure of captain magnus, i underwent torments in the stifling interior of the cabin. aunt jane wept piteously. i had almost a fellow-feeling with miss higglesby-browne when she relapsed from her rigidity for a moment and turning on aunt jane fiercely ordered her to be still. this completed the wreck of aunt jane's universe. its two main props had now fallen, and she was left sitting solitary amid the ruins. she subsided into a lachrymose heap in the corner of the cabin, where i let her remain for the time, it was really such a comfort to have her out of the way. at last i heard a faint moan: "virginia!" i went to her. "yes, auntie?" "virginia," she murmured weakly, "i think i shall not live to leave the island, even if i am not--not executed. in fact, i have a feeling now as though the end were approaching. i have always known that my heart was not strong, even if your aunt susan _did_ call it indigestion. but oh, my dear child, it is not my digestion, it is my heart that has been wounded! to have reposed such confidence in a serpent! to realize that i might have been impaled upon its fangs! oh, my dear, faithful child, what would i have done if you had not clung to me although i permitted serpents to turn me from you! but i am cruelly punished. all i ask is that some day--when you are married and happy, dear--you will remove from this desolate spot the poor remains of her who--of her who--" sobs choked aunt jane's utterance. "jane--" began miss higglesby-browne. "i was speaking to my niece," replied aunt jane with unutterable dignity from her corner. her small features had all but disappeared in her swollen face, and her hair had slipped down at a rakish angle over one eye. but, of course, being aunt jane, she must choose this moment to be queenly. "there, there, auntie," i said soothingly, "of course you are not going to leave your bones on this island. if you did, you know, you and bill halliwell might ha'nt around together--think how cozy! (here aunt jane gave a convulsive shudder.) as to my being married, if you were betting just now on anybody's chances they would have to be captain magnus's, wouldn't they ?" "good gracious, virginia!" shrieked aunt jane faintly. but i went on relentlessly, determined to distract her mind from thoughts of her approaching end. "all things considered, i suppose i really ought to ask you to put my affairs in order when you get back. if i am carried off by the pirates, naturally i shall have to jump overboard at once, though i dislike the idea of drowning, and especially of being eaten by sharks. would you mind putting up a little headstone--it needn't cost much--in the family plot, with just 'virginia' on it? and anything of mine that you don't want yourself i'd like bess to have for the baby, please. ask her when the little duck is old enough to tell her my sad story--" by this time aunt jane was sobbing loudly and waving her little hands about in wild beseeching. "oh, my precious girl, a _headstone_! my love, would i grudge you a _monument_--all white marble--little angels--'from her heart-broken aunt'? oh, why, why are we not safe at home together? why was i lured away to wander about the world with perfect strangers? why--" "jane!" broke in miss browne again in awful tones. but at that moment the door of the cabin opened and the face of slinker peered in. "say," he remarked, "there ain't no sense in you girls stayin' cooped up here that i see. i guess me and horny can stand you off if you try to rush us. come out and cool off a little." the great heat of the day was over and the sun already dropping behind the peak of the island. mr. shaw and cuthbert had been allowed to sit in the shade, and i thought their wrists were not too tightly bound for comfort. cookie had been released, and under the eye of horny was getting supper. crusoe had earlier in the day received a kick in the ribs from captain magnus, fortunately too much occupied with the prisoners to pursue his vengeance further, and had fled precipitately, to my enormous relief. the dog was quite wise enough to know that he would help me best by keeping out of the clutches of our common foe. i hoped he had gone back to his solitary pig-chasing, though i thought i had caught a glimpse of him once at the edge of the wood. but at least he knew better than to venture into the clearing. i tried to pass in a casual manner close to mr. shaw and cuthbert--who looked more of a crusading norman than ever--in hopes of a whispered word, but was impeded by aunt jane, who clung to me tottering. so i led her to a seat and deposited her, with the sympathetic assistance of slinker. "now, now, old girl, cheer up!" he admonished her. "between you and me, old washtubs ain't worth crying over. sooner or later he'd of give you the slip, no matter how tight a rein you kep' on him." as slinker turned away after this effort at consolation he came face to face with miss higglesby-browne. i suppose in the stress of surprising and capturing the camp he had not been struck with her peculiarities. just now, between the indignity of her captive state and the insubordination of aunt jane, miss browne's aspect was considerably grimmer than usual. slinker favored her with a stare, followed by a prolonged whistle. "say," he remarked to me in a confidential undertone, though pitched quite loud enough for miss browne's ears, "is it real? would it have bendable j'ints, now, same as you and me?" miss browne whirled upon him. "'old your tongue, you 'orrid brute!" she shrieked. so, in the twinkling of an eye, miss higglesby-browne, fallen forever from her high estate, was strewn in metaphorical fragments at our feet. i turned away, feeling it time to draw the veil of charity upon the scene. not so slinker. he looked about him carefully on the ground. "lady drop anything?" he inquired solicitously. what might have transpired, had miss higglesby-browne had time to gather breath, i dare not think, but just then there came from the woods the sound of footsteps and voices, and the three pirates and mr. tubbs entered the clearing. a thrill ran through the camp. captors and captives forgot all else but the great, the burning question--had the treasure been discovered? and i am sure that no one was so thrilled as i, although in my mind the question took another form. for now i was going to know what had been waiting for me there in the cave, when i stood yesterday at its black entrance, afraid to go in. xvii from dead hands at the head of the file, captain tony advanced through the clearing, and what with his flowing black beard, his portly form, and a certain dramatic swagger which he possessed, he looked so entirely italian and operatic that you expected to hear him at any moment burst out in a sonorous basso. with a sweeping gesture he flung down upon the table two brown canvas bags, which opened and discharged from gaping mouths a flood of golden coins. his histrionic instinct equal to the high demands of the moment, captain tony stood with folded arms and gazed upon us with a haughty and exultant smile. slinker and the cross-eyed man shouted aloud. they ran and clutched at the coins with a savage greed. "gold, gold--the real stuff! it's the doubloons all right--where's the rest of 'em?" these cries broke from slinker and horny confusedly as the gold slid jingling between their eager fingers. "the rest of 'em is--where they is," pronounced tony oracularly. "somewheres in the sand of the cave, of course. we'll dig 'em up to-morrow morning. "what was the point in not digging 'em all up while you was about it?" demanded slinker, lowering. "what was the good o' digging up jest these here couple o' bag's and quitting?" "because we didn't dig 'em up," responded tony darkly. "because these was all ready and waiting. because all we had to do was to say 'thankee,' to the feller that handed 'em out." "i say," interposed one of the party nervously, "what's the good of that kind of talk? they ain't any sense in hunting trouble, that ever i heard of!" he glanced over his shoulder uneasily. the rest burst out in a guffaw. "chris is scared. he's been a-going along looking behind him ever since. chris will have bad dreams to-night--he'll yell if a owl hoots." but i thought there was a false note in the laughter of more than one. "oh, of course," remarked slinker with indignant irony, "me and horny ain't interested in this at all. we jest stayed bumming round camp here 'cause we was tired. when you're through with this sort of bunk and feel like getting down to business, why jest mention it, and maybe if we ain't got nothing better to do we'll listen to you." "i was jest telling you, wasn't i?" demanded tony. "only that fool chris had to butt in. we got these here bags of doubloons, as i says, without havin' to dig for 'em--oncet we had found the cave, which it's no thanks to old washtubs we ain't looking for it yet. we got these here bags right out of the fists of a skeleton. most of him was under a rock, which had fell from the roof and pinned him down amidships. must of squashed him like a beetle, i guess. but he'd still kep' his hold on the bags." i turned aside, for fear that any one should see how white i was. much too white to be accounted for even by this grisly story. to the rest, these poor bones might indeed bear mute witness to a tragedy, but a tragedy lacking outlines, vague, impersonal, without poignancy. to me, they told with dreadful clearness the last sad chapter of the tale of peter, peter who had made me so intimately his confidante, whose love and hopes and solitary strivings i knew all about. struck down in the moment of his triumph by a great stupid lump of soulless stone, by a blind, relentless mechanism which had been at work from the beginning, timing that rock to fall--just then. not the moment before, not the moment after, out of an eternity of moments, but at that one instant when peter stooped for the last of his brown bags--and then i rejected this, and knew that there was nothing stupid or blind about it--and wondered whether it were instead malicious, and whether all might have been well with peter if he had obeyed the voice that bade him leave the crucifix for bill-- vaguely i heard around me a babble of exclamations and conjectures. murmurs of interest rose even from our captive band. then came slinker's voice, loud with sudden fear: "say, you don't suppose the--the bones would of got away with the rest of the coin somehow, do you?" he demanded. "got away with it?" tony contemptuously thrust aside the possibility. "got away with it how? he sure didn't leave the island with it, did he? would he of dug it up from one place jest to bury it in another? huh! must of wanted to work if he did! now my notion is that this happened to one of the guys that was burying the gold, and that the rest jest left him there for a sort of scarecrow to keep other people out of the cave." "but the gold?" protested slinker. "they wouldn't leave that for a scarecrow, would they?" "maybe not," admitted tony, "but suppose that feller died awful slow, and went on hollering and clutching at the bags? and they couldn't of got that rock off'n him without a block and tackle, or done much to make things easy for him if they had, him being jest a smear, as you may say. well, that cave wouldn't be a pleasant place to stay in, would it? and no one would have the nerve to snatch them bags away to bury 'em, 'cause a dying man, especially when he dies hard, can have an awful grip. so what they done was just to shovel the sand in on the gold they'd stowed away and light out quick. and what we got to do to-morrow is to go there and dig it up." if the ingenuity of this reasoning was more remarkable than its logic, the pirates were not the men to find fault with it. indeed, how many human hopes have been bolstered up with arguments no sounder? desire is the most eloquent of advocates, and the five ruffians had only to listen to its voice to enjoy in anticipation all the fruits of their iniquitous schemes. the sight of the golden coins intoxicated them. they played with the doubloons like children, jingling them in their calloused palms, guessing at weight and value, calculating their equivalent in the joy of living. laughter and oaths resounded. mr. tubbs, with a somewhat anxious air, endeavored to keep himself well to the fore, claiming a share in the triumph with the rest. there was only the thinnest veil of concealment over the pirates' mockery. "old washtubs" was ironically encouraged in his role of boon companion. his air of swaggering recklessness, of elderly dare-deviltry, provoked uproarious amusement. when they sat down to supper mr. tubbs was installed at the head of the table. they hailed him as the discoverer who had made their fortunes. from their talk it was clear that there had been much difficulty about finding the cave, and that for a time mr. tubbs's position had been precarious. finally captain magnus had stumbled upon the entrance. "jest in time," as he grimly reminded mr. tubbs, "to save you a header over the cliff." "ha, ha!" cackled mr. tubbs hysterically, "you boys will have your little joke, eh? knew well enough you couldn't get along without the old man, didn't you? knew you was goin' to need an old financial head to square things in certain quarters--a head what understands how to slip a little coin into the scales o' justice to make 'em tilt the right way. oh, you can't fool the old man, he, he!" while the marauders enjoyed their supper, the women prisoners were bidden to "set down and stay sot," within sweep of captain tony's eye. mr. shaw and cuthbert vane still held the position they had occupied all afternoon, with their backs propped against a palm tree. occasionally they exchanged a whisper, but for the most part were silent, their cork helmets jammed low over their watchful eyes. i was deeply curious to know what mr. shaw had made of the strange story of the skeleton in the cave. he could hardly have accepted captain tony's explanation of it, which displayed, indeed, an imperfect knowledge of the legend of the _bonny lass_. might not the scotchman, by linking this extraordinary discovery with my unexplained request of him this morning, have arrived already at some glimmering of the truth? i hoped so, and longed to impart to him my own sure knowledge that the confident expectations of the freebooters for the morrow were doomed to disappointment. there seemed a measure of comfort in this assurance, for our moment of greatest peril well might be that in which the pirates, with the gold in their possession and on the point of fleeing from the island, recalled the respectable because so truthful maxim that dead men tell no tales. therefore in the postponement of the crucial moment lay our best hope of rescue or escape. on the other hand, i fancied them returning from the cave surly and disappointed, ready to vent their wrath on us. all, except the unspeakable magnus, had shown so far a rough good nature, even amusement at our plight, but you felt the snarl at the corner of the grinning lips. you knew they would be undependable as savages or vicious children, who find pleasure in inflicting pain. and then there was always my own hideous danger as the favored of the wolfish captain-- and i wondered, desperately, if i might buy safety for us all at the price of the secret of the _island queen_, if a promise from the five scoundrels around the table would have more meaning than their wild boasts and shoutings now? and now the night that i unutterably dreaded was upon us. but the pirates still thought of nothing but the gold. they had exhausted their own portable supplies of liquor, and were loud in their denunciations of our bone-dry camp, as they termed it. mr. tubbs enlarged upon the annoyance which mr. shaw's restrictions in this matter had been to him, and regretted that he had long ago exhausted the small amount of spirituous refreshment which he had been able to smuggle in. tony, however, was of another mind. "and a good thing, too," he declared, "that you guys can't booze yourselves blind before morning, or there wouldn't be much gold took out of that there cave to-morrow. once we make port somewheres with that chest of treasure aboard you can pour down enough to irrigate the mojave desert if you like." it was tony, too, who intercepted a tentative movement of captain magnus in my direction, and ordered me into the cabin with my aunt and miss browne. through the walls of the hut we heard loud and eager talk of the morrow and its certain golden harvest as the pirates made their dispositions for the night. then the voices trailed off sleepily and silence succeeded, broken only by the ceaseless murmur of the waves around the island. xviii of which cookie is the hero next morning i came out of the hut in time to see mr. shaw and his companion in duress led forth from the sleeping quarters which they had shared with their captors. they were moored as before to a palm tree, by a rope having a play of two or three feet, and their hands unbound while they made a hasty breakfast under the eye of a watchful sentinel. then their wrists were tied again, not painfully, but with a firmness which made any slipping of their bonds impossible. while the pirates were breakfasting a spirited dispute took place among them as to who should go to the treasure cave and who stay in camp to guard the prisoners. slinker and horny urged with justice that as they had missed all the excitement of the preceding day it was their turn to visit the cave. there not only the probable rapture of exhuming the chest awaited them, but the certain privilege of inspecting "the bones." this ghastly relic seemed to exercise an immense fascination upon their imaginations, a fascination not unmingled with superstitious dread. the right to see the bones, then, slinker and horny passionately claimed. tony supported them, and it ended with chris and captain magnus being told off as our guards for the morning. at this chris raised a feeble lamentation, but he was evidently a person whose objections nobody was accustomed to heed. captain magnus, who might with plausibility have urged claims superior to those of all the rest, assented to the arrangement with a willingness which filled me with boding. i had caught his restless furtive eye fixed gloatingly upon me more than once. i saw that he was aware of my terror, and exulted in it, and took a feline pleasure in playing me, as it were, and letting me realize by slow degrees what his power over me would be when he chose finally to exert it. my best hope for the present, once the merciful or prudent tony was out of sight, lay in this disposition of my tormentor to sit quiescent and anticipate the future. nevertheless, in leaving the cabin i had slipped into my blouse a small penknife which i had found in aunt jane's bag. it was quite new, and i satisfied myself that the blades were keen. my own large sheath-knife and my revolver i had been deprived of at the suggestion of the thoughtful magnus. i had surrendered them unprotestingly, fearful of all things that my possessions might be ransacked and peter's diary, though hidden with much art at the bottom of a bag, be brought to light. for i might yet sell the secret of the island queen at a price which should redeem us all. unobtrusively clutching for comfort at the penknife in my blouse, i watched the departure of the pirates, including my protector tony. they had taken mr. tubbs with them, although he had magnanimously offered to remain behind and help guard the camp. evidently his experience of the previous day had not filled him with confidence in his new friends. it might be quite possible that he intended, if left behind, to turn his coat again and assist us in a break for liberty. if so, he was defeated by the perspicacious tony, who observed that when he found a pal that suited him as well as washtubs he liked to keep him under his own eye. with a spade over his reluctant shoulder, and many a dubious backward glance, mr. tubbs followed the file into the woods. aunt jane had a bad headache, and as nobody objected she had remained in the cabin. miss browne and i had been informed by tony that we might do as we liked so long as we did not attempt to leave the clearing. already violet had betaken herself to a camp-chair in the shade and was reading a work entitled _thoughts on the involute spirality of the immaterial_. except for the prisoners tied to the palm tree, the camp presented superficially a scene of peace. cookie busied himself with a great show of briskness in his kitchen. because of the immense circumspection of his behavior he was being allowed a considerable degree of freedom. he served his new masters apparently as zealously as he had served us, but enveloped in a portentous silence. "yes, sah--no, sah," were the only words which cookie in captivity had been heard to utter. yet from time to time i had caught a glance of dark significance from cookie's rolling eye, and i felt that he was loyal, and that this enforced servitude to the unkempt fraternity of pirates was a degradation which touched him to the quick. i had followed the example of miss higglesby-browne as regards the camp-chair and the book. what the book was i have not the least idea, but i perused it with an appearance of profound abstraction which i hoped might discourage advances on the part of captain magnus. also i made sure that the penknife was within instant reach. meanwhile my ears, and at cautious intervals my eyes, kept me informed of the movements of our guards. for a considerable time the two ruffians, lethargic after an enormous breakfast, lay about idly in the shade and smoked. as i listened to their lazy, fragmentary conversation vast gulfs of mental vacuity seemed to open before me. i wondered whether after all wicked people were just stupid people--and then i thought of aunt jane--who was certainly not wicked-- as the heat increased a voice of lamentation broke from chris. he was dry--dry enough to drink up the condemned ocean. no, he didn't want spring water, which cookie obsequiously tendered him; he wanted a _drink_--wouldn't anybody but a fool nigger know that? there was plenty of the real stuff aboard the schooner, on the other side of the--adjective--island. why had they, with incredible lack of forethought, brought along nothing but their pocket flasks? why hadn't they sent the adjective nigger back for more? where was the bottle or two that had been rooted out last night from the medical stores? empty? every last drop gone down somebody's greedy gullet? the adjectives came thick and fast as chris hurled the bottle into the bay, where it swam bobbingly upon the ripples. captain magnus agreed with the gist of chris's remarks, but deprecated, in a truly philosophical spirit, their unprofitable heat. there wasn't any liquor, so what was the good of making an adjective row? hadn't he endured the equivalent of chris's present sufferings for weeks? he was biding his time, he was. plenty of drink by and by, plenty of all that makes life soft and easy. he bet there wouldn't many hit any higher spots than him. he bet there was one little girl that would be looked on as lucky, in case she was a good little girl and encouraged him to show his natural kindness. and i was favored with a blood-curdling leer from across the camp, of which i had put as much as possible between myself and the object of my dread. but now, like a huge black ganymede, appeared cookie, bearing cups and a large stone crock. "it suhtinly am a fact, mistah chris, sah," said cookie, "dat dey is a mighty unspirituous fluidity 'bout dis yere spring watah. down war i is come from no pussons of de four hund'ed ain't eveh 'customed to partake of such. but the sassiety i has been in lately round dis yere camp ain't of de convivulous ordah; ole cookie had to keep it dark dat he got his li'le drop o' comfort on de side. dis yere's only home-made stuff, sah. 'tain't what i could offah to a gennelmun if so be i is got the makin's of a genuwine old-style julep what is de beverage of de fust fam'lies. but bein' as it is, it am mighty coolin', sah, and it got a li'le kick to it--not much, but jes' 'bout enough to make a gennelmun feel lak he is one." cookie's tones dripped humility and propitiation. he offered the brimming cup cringingly to the pale-eyed, red-nosed chris, who reached for it with alacrity, drank deep, smacked his lips meditatively, and after a moment passed the cup back. "'tain't so worse," he said approvingly. "anyhow, it's _drink_!" magnus suddenly began to laugh. "s'elp me, it's the same dope what laid out the honorable!" he chortled. "here, darky, let's have a swig of it!" cookie complied, joining respectfully in the captain's mirth. "i guess you-all is got stronger haids den dat young gennelmun!" he remarked. "dis yere ole niggah has help hissef mighty freely and dat prohibititionist miss harding ain't eveh found it out. fac' is, it am puffeckly harmless 'cept when de haid is weak." false, false cookie! black brother in perfidy to mr. tubbs! one friend the less to be depended on if a chance for freedom ever came to us! a hot flush of surprise and anger dyed my cheeks, and i felt the indignant pang of faith betrayed. i had been as sure of cookie's devotion as of crusoe's--which reminded me that the little dog had not returned to camp since he fled before the onslaught of the vengeful captain. cookie refilled the pirates' cups, and set the crock beside them on the ground. "in case you gennelmun feels yo'selfs a li'le thursty later on," he remarked. he was retiring, when captain magnus called to him. "blackie, this ain't bad. it's coolin', but thin--a real nice ladylike sort of drink, i should say. suppose you take a swig over to miss jinny there with my compliments--i'm one to always treat a lady generous if she gives me half a chance." obediently cookie hastened for another cup, set it on a tray, and approached me with his old-time ornate manner. i faced him with a withering look, but, unmindful, he bowed, presenting me the cup, and interposing his bulky person between me and the deeply-quaffing pirates. at the same time his voice reached me, pitched in a low and anxious key. "fo' de lawd's sake, miss jinny, spill it out! it am mighty powerful dope--it done fumented twice as long as befo'--it am boun' to give dat trash de blind-staggahs sho'tly!" instantly i understood, and a thrill of relief and of hope inexpressible shot through me. i raised to the troubled black face a glance which i trust was eloquent--it must needs have been to express the thankfulness i felt. cookie responded with a solemn and convulsive wink--and i put the cup to my lips and after a brief parade of drinking passed it back to cookie, spilling the contents on the ground en route. cookie retired with his tray in his most impressive cake-walk fashion, and in passing announced to captain magnus that "miss jinny say she mos' suhtinly am obligated to de gennelmun to' de refreshment of dis yere acidulous beverage." which bare-faced mendacity provoked a loud roar of amusement from the sentinels, who were still sampling the cooling contents of the stone crock. "learning to like what i do already, hey?" guffawed the captain, and he called on chris to drain another cup with him to the lady of his choice. i have believed since that dragging, interminable time which i now lived through, that complete despair, where you rest quite finally on bedrock and have nothing to dread in the way of further tumbles, must be a much happier state than the dreadful one of oscillating between hope and fear. for a leaden-footed eternity, it seemed to me, i oscillated, longing for, yet dreading, the signs that cookie's powerful dope had begun to work upon our guards--for might not the first symptoms be quite different from the anticipated blind staggers? fancy a murderous maniac pair reeling about the clearing, with death-vomiting revolvers and gleaming knives! and then suddenly time, which had dragged so slowly, appeared to gallop, and the morning to be fleeing past, so that every wave that broke upon the beach was the footfalls of the returning pirates. long, long before that thirsty, garrulous pair grew still and torpid their companions must return-- and i saw cookie, his stratagem discovered, dangling from a convenient tree. gradually the rough disjointed talk of the sailors began to languish. covertly watching, i saw that chris's head had begun to droop. his body, propped comfortably against a tree, sagged a little. the hand that held the cup was lifted, stretched out in the direction of the enticing jar, then forgetting its errand fell heavily. after a few spasmodic twitchings of the eyelids and uneasy grunts, chris slumbered. captain magnus was of tougher fiber. but he, too, grew silent and there was a certain meal-sack limpness about his attitude. his dulled eyes stared dreamily. all at once with a jerk he roused himself, turned over, and administered to the sleeping chris a prod with his large boot. "hey, there, wake up! what right you got to be asleep at the switch?" but chris only breathed more heavily. captain magnus himself heaved a tremendous yawn, settled back in greater comfort against his sustaining tree, and closed his eyes. i waited, counting the seconds by the beating of the blood in my ears. in the background cookie hovered apprehensively. plainly he would go on hovering unless loud snores from the pirates gave him assurance. for myself, i sat fingering my penknife, wondering whether i ought to rush over and plunge it into the sleepers' throats. this would be heroic and practical, but unpleasant. if, on the other hand, i merely tried to free the prisoners and captain magnus woke, what then? the palm where they were tied was a dozen yards from me, much nearer to the guards, and within range of even their most languid glance. beyond the prisoners was miss browne, glaring uncomprehendingly over the edge of her book. there was no help in miss browne. i left my seat and stole on feet which seemed to stir every leaf and twig to loud complaint toward the captive pair. tense, motionless, with burning eyes, they waited. there was a movement from captain magnus; he yawned, turned and muttered. i stood stricken, my heart beating with loud thumps against my ribs. but the captain's eyes remained closed. "virginia--quick, virginia!" dugald shaw was stretching out his bound hands to me, and i had dropped on my knees before him and begun to cut at the knotted cords. they were tough strong cords, and i was hacking at them feverishly when something bounded across the clearing and flung itself upon me. crusoe, of course!--and wild with the joy of reunion. i strangled a cry of dismay, and with one hand tried to thrust him off while i cut through the rope with the other. "down, crusoe!" i kept desperately whispering. but crusoe was unused to whispered orders. he kept bounding up on me, intent to fulfil an unachieved ambition of licking my ear. cuthbert vane tried, under his breath, to lure him away. but crusoe's emotions were all for me, and swiftly becoming uncontrollable they burst forth in a volley of shrill yelps. a loud cry answered them. it came from captain magnus, who had scrambled to his feet and was staggering across the clearing. one hand was groping at his belt--it was flourished in the air with the gleam of a knife in it--and staggering and shouting the captain came on. "ah, you would, would you? i'll teach you--but first i settle _him_, the porridge-eatin' scotch swine--" the reeling figure with the knife was right above me. i sprang up, in my hand the little two-inch weapon which was all i had for my defense--and dugald shaw's. there were loud noises in my ears, the shouting of men, and a shrill continuous note which i have since realized came from the lungs of miss higglesby-browne. magnus made a lunge forward--the arm with the knife descended. i caught it--wrenched at it frantically--striving blindly to wield my little penknife, whether or not with deadly intent i don't know to this day. he turned on me savagely, and the penknife was whirled from my hand as he caught my wrist in a terrible clutch. all i remember after that is the terrible steely grip of the captain's arms and a face, flushed, wild-eyed, horrible, that was close to mine and inevitably coming closer, though i fought and tore at it--of hot feverish lips whose touch i knew would scorch me to the soul--and then i was suddenly free, and falling, falling, a long way through darkness. xix the young person scores my first memory is of voices, and after that i was shot swiftly out of a tunnel from an immense distance and opened my eyes upon the same world which i had left at some indefinite period in the past. faces, at first very large, by and by adjusted themselves in a proper perspective and became quite recognizable and familiar. there was aunt jane's, very tearful, and miss higglesby-browne's, very glum, and the honorable cuthbert's, very anxious and a little dazed, and cookie's, very, very black. the face of dugald shaw i did not see, for the quite intelligible reason that i was lying with my head upon his shoulder. as soon as i realized this i sat up suddenly, while every one exclaimed at once, "there, she's quite all right--see how her color is coming back!" people kept aunt jane from flinging herself upon me and soothed her into calm while i found out what had happened. the penknife that i had lost in my struggle with captain magnus had fallen at the scotchman's feet. wrenching himself free of his all but severed bonds he had seized the knife, slashed through the rope that held him to the tree, and flung himself on captain magnus. it was a brief struggle--a fist neatly planted on the ruffian's jaw had ended it, and the captain, half dazed from his potations, went down limply. meanwhile cookie had appeared upon the scene flourishing a kitchen knife, though intending it for no more bloody purpose than the setting free of cuthbert vane. throughout the fray chris slumbered undisturbed, and he and the unconscious magnus were now reposing side by side, until they should awake to find themselves neatly trussed up with cookie's clothes-lines. but my poor brave crusoe dragged a broken leg, from a kick bestowed on him by captain magnus, at whom he had flown valiantly in my defense. so far so good; we had signally defeated our two guards, and the camp was ours. but what about the pirates who were still in the cave and would shortly be returning from it? they were three armed and sturdy ruffians, not to include mr. tubbs, whose habits were strictly non-combative. it would mean a battle to the death. our best hope would be to wait in ambush behind the trees of the clearing--i mean for dugald shaw and cuthbert vane to do it--and shoot down the unsuspecting pirates as they returned. this desperate plan, which so unpleasantly resembled murder, cast gloom on every brow. "it's the women, lad," said the scotchman in a low voice to cuthbert. "it's--it's virginia." and cuthbert heavily assented. seeing myself as the motif of such slaughter shocked my mind suddenly back to clearness. "oh," i cried, "not that! why not surprise them in the cave, and make them stay there? one man could guard the entrance easily--and afterward we could build it up with logs or something." everybody stared. "a remarkably neat scheme," said mr. shaw, "but impossible of application, i'm afraid, because none of us knows where to find the cave." i shook my head. "i know!" there was a lengthy silence. people looked at one another, and their eyes said, _this has been too much for her_! "i _know_," i impatiently repeated. "i can take you straight there. i found the tombstone before mr. tubbs did, and the cave too. come, let's not waste time. we must hurry--they'll be getting back!" amazement, still more than half incredulous, surged round me. then mr. shaw said rapidly: "you're right. of course, if you have found the cave, the best thing we can do is to keep them shut up in it. but we must move fast--perhaps we're too late already. if they have found the chest they may by now be starting for camp with the first load of doubloons." again i shook my head. "they haven't found the gold," i assured him. the astonished faces grew more anxious. "it sho' have told on li'le miss jinny's brain," muttered cookie to himself. "they haven't found the gold," i reiterated with emphasis, "because the gold is not in the cave. don't ask me how i know, because there isn't time to tell you. there was no gold there but the two bags that the pirates brought back last night. the--the skeleton moved it all out." "my lawd!" groaned cookie, staggering backward. "virginia! i had no idea you were superstitious!" quavered aunt jane. "i say, do take some sleeping tablets or something and quiet your nerves!" implored cuthbert with the tenderest solicitude. in my exasperation i stamped my foot. "and while we are arguing here the pirates may be starting back to camp! and then we'll have to kill them and go home and give ourselves up to be hanged! please, please, come with me and let me show you that i know!" i lifted my eyes to the intent face of dugald shaw. "all right," he said tersely. "i think you do know. how and what, we'll find out later." rapidly he made his plan, got together the things needful for its execution, looked to the bonds of the still dazed and drowsy prisoners, posted cookie in their neighborhood with a pair of pistols, and commanded aunt jane to dry her tears and look after miss higglesby-browne, who had dismayed every one by most inopportunely toppling over in a perfectly genuine swoon. then the scotchman, cuthbert vane and i set off through the woods. the men were heavily armed, and i had recovered my own little revolver and restored it to my belt. mr. shaw had seen to this, and had said to me, very quietly: "you know, virginia, if things don't go our way, it may be necessary for you to use it--on yourself." and i nodded assentingly. we went in silence through the green hush of the woods, moving in single file. my place as guide was in the van, but mr. shaw deposed me from it and went ahead himself, while cuthbert vane brought up the rear. no one spoke, even to whisper. i guided dugald shaw, when needful, by a light touch upon the arm. our enterprise was one of utmost danger. at any moment we might hear the steps and voices of the returning pirates. thus fore-warned, we might of course retreat into the woods and let them pass, ourselves unseen. but then, what of those whom we had left in camp? could we leave them undefended to the vengeance of captain magnus? no, if we met the pirates it was their lives or ours--and i recall with incredulity my resolution to imbed five of my six bullets in a pirate before i turned the sixth upon myself. i reflected with satisfaction that five bullets should be a fatal dose to any pirate unless an exceptionally tough one. and i hoped he would not be tough-- but i tell myself with shudders that it was not i, but some extraordinary recrudescence of a primitive self, that indulged these lethal gloatings. no steps but our own, no voices but of birds, broke the stillness of the woods. we moved onward swiftly, and presently the noise of the sea came to us with the sudden loudness that i remembered. i paused, signaled caution to my companions, and crept on. we passed the grave, and i saw that the vines had been torn aside again, and that the tombstone was gone. we came to the brink of the cliff, and i pointed silently downward along the ledge to the angle in which lay the mouth of the cave. my breath came quickly, for at any instant a head might be thrust forth from the opening. already the sun was mounting toward the zenith. the noontide heat and stillness was casting its drowsy spell upon the island. the air seemed thicker, the breeze more languid. and all this meant meal-time--and the thoughts of hungry pirates turning toward camp. my hope was that they were still preoccupied with the fruitless search in the cave. mr. shaw and cuthbert dropped down upon the ledge. though under whispered orders to retreat i could not, but hung over the edge of the cliff, eager and breathless. then with a bound the men were beside me. mr. shaw caught my hand, and we rushed together into the woods. a quake, a roar, a shower of flying rocks. it was over--the dynamite had done its work, whether successfully or not remained to be seen. after a little the scotchman ventured back. he returned to us where we waited in the woods--cuthbert to mount guard over me--with a cleared face. "it's all right," he said. "the entrance is completely blocked. i set the charge six feet inside, but the roof is down clear to the mouth. poor wretches--they have all come pouring out upon the sand--" all three of us went back to the edge of the cliff. seventy feet below, on the narrow strip of sand before the sea-mouth of the cave, we saw the figures of four men, who ran wildly about and sought for a foothold on the sheer face of the cliff. as we stood watching them, with, on my part, at least, unexpected qualms of pity and a cold interior sensation very unlike triumph, they discovered us. then for the first time, i suppose, they understood the nature of their disaster. we could not hear their cries, but we saw arms stretched out to us, fists frantically shaken, hands lifted in prayer. we saw mr. tubbs flop down upon his unaccustomed knees--it was all rather horrible. i drew back, shivering. "it won't be for long, of course," i said uncertainly, "just till the steamer comes--and we'll give them lots to eat--but i suppose they think--they will soon be just a lot more skeletons--" and here i was threatened with a moist anticlimax to my late amazonian mood. why should the frequent and natural phenomena of tears produce such panic in the male breast? at a mere april dewiness about my lashes these two strong men quaked. "don't--don't cry!" implored cuthbert earnestly. "it's been too much for her!" exclaimed the once dour scot in tones of anguish. "hurry, lad--we must find her some water--" "nonsense," i interposed, winking rapidly. "just think of some way to calm those creatures, so that i shan't see them in my dreams, begging and beseeching--" for i had not forgotten the immensity of my debt to tony. so a note was written on a leaf torn from a pocketbook and thrown over the cliff weighted with a stone. the captives swooped upon it. followed then a vivid pantomime by tony, expressive of eased if unrepentant minds, while mr. tubbs, by gestures, indicated that though sadly misunderstood, old h. h. was still our friend and benefactor. it was an attentive group to which on our return to camp i related the circumstances which had made possible our late exploit of imprisoning the pirates in the cave. the tale of my achievements, though recounted with due modesty, seemed to put the finishing touch to the extinction of violet, for she wilted finally and forever, and was henceforth even bullied by aunt jane. the diary of peter was produced, and passed about with awe from hand to hand. yesterday's discovery in the cave had rounded out the history of peter to a melancholy completion. but though we knew the end we guessed in vain at the beginning, at peter's name, at that of the old grandfather whose thrifty piety had brought him to havana and to the acquaintance of the dying mate of the _bonny lass_, at the whereabouts of the old new england farm which had been mortgaged to buy the _island queen_, at the identity of helen, who waited still, perhaps, for the lover who never would return. but even our regrets for peter did not chill the exultation with which we thought of the treasure-chest waiting there under the sand in the cabin of the _island queen_. all afternoon we talked of it. that, for the present, was all we could do. there were the two prisoners in camp to be guarded--and they had presently awakened and made remarks of a strongly personal and unpleasant trend on discovering their situation. there was crusoe invalided, and needing petting, and getting it from everybody on the score of his romantic past as _benjy_ as well as of his present virtues. the broken leg had been cleverly set by dugald--somehow in the late upheaval _miss_ and _mister_ had dropped quite out of our vocabularies--with cuthbert as surgeon's assistant and me holding the chloroform to the patient's nose. there was the fatigue and reaction from excitement which everybody felt, and peter's diary to be read, and golden dreams to be indulged. and there was the delicate question to be discussed, of how the treasure should be divided. "why, it all belongs to virginia, of course," said cuthbert, opening his eyes at the thought of any other view being taken but this obvious one. "nonsense!" i hastily interposed. "my finding the diary was just an accident; i'll take a share of it--no more." here miss browne murmured something half inaudible about "--confined to members of the expedition--" but subsided for lack of encouragement. "i suggest," said dugald, "that our numbers having most fortunately diminished and there being, on the basis of peter's calculations, enough to enrich us all, that we should share and share alike." and this proposal was received with acclamations, as was a second from the same source, devoting a certain percentage of each share to cookie, to whom the news of his good fortune was to come later as a great surprise. as an earnest of our riches, we had the two bags of doubloons which the pirates had recovered from the fleshless fingers of the dead man. they were old worn coins, most of them, many dating from the seventeenth century, and bearing the effigies of successive kings of spain. each disk of rich, yellow peruvian gold, dug from the earth by wretched sweating slaves and bearing the name of a narrow rigid tyrant, had a history, doubtless, more wild and bloody than even that we knew. the merchant of lima and his servant, bill halliwell, and afterward poor peter had died for them. for their sake we had been captives in fear of death, and for their sake now four wretched beings were prisoners in the treasure-cave and two more cursed, fate and their bonds within hearing of our outraged ears. and who knew how much more of crime and blood and violence we should send forth into the world with the long-buried treasure? who knew--and, ah, me, who cared? so riotous was the gold-lust in my veins that i think if i had known the chest to be another pandora's box i should still have cried out to open it. shortly before sundown cuthbert and cookie were despatched by dugald shaw to the cliff above the cave with supplies for the inhumed pirates. these were let down by rope. a note was brought up on the rope, signed by mr. tubbs, and containing strangely jumbled exhortations, prayers and threats. a second descent of the rope elicited another missive, neatly folded and addressed in the same hand to miss jane harding. cuthbert gave this privately to me, but its contents must forever be unknown, for it went, unread, into cookie's fire. i had no mind to find aunt jane, with her umbrella as a parachute, vanishing over the cliffs to seek the arms of a repentant tubbs. the fly in the ointment of our satisfaction, and the one remaining obstacle to our possession of the treasure, was the presence of the two pirates in our midst. they were not nice pirates. they were quite the least choice of the collection. chris, when he was not swearing, wept moistly, and so touched the heart of aunt jane that we lived in fear of her letting him go if she got the opportunity. he told her that he had lost an aunt in his tender youth, of whom she reminded him in the most striking way, and that if this long-mourned relative had lived he felt he should have been a better man and not led away against his higher nature by the chance of falling in with bad companions. aunt jane thought her resemblance to chris's aunt a remarkable coincidence and an opportunity for appealing to his better self which should be improved. she wanted to improve it by untying his hands, because he had sprained his wrist in his childhood and it was sensitive. he had sprained it in rescuing a little companion from drowning, the child of a drunkard who had unfeelingly thrown his offspring down a well. this episode had been an example to chris which had kept him from drinking all his life, until he had fallen into his present rough company. aunt jane took it very hard that the scotchman seemed quite unfeeling about chris's wrist. she said it seemed very strange to her in a man who had so recently known the sorrows of captivity himself. she said she supposed even suffering would not soften some natures. as to magnus, his state of sullen fury made him indifferent even to threats of punishment. he swore with a determination and fluency worthy of a better cause. for myself, i could not endure his neighborhood. it seemed to me i could not live through the days that must intervene before the arrival of the _rufus smith_ in the constant presence of this wretch. more than all, it made dugald and cuthbert unwilling to leave the camp together. there was always the possibility that the two ruffians might find means to free themselves, and, with none but cookie and the women present, to obtain control of the firearms and the camp. for the negro, once the men were free, could not surely be depended on to face them. loyal he was, and valiant in his fashion, but old and with the habit of submission. one did not see him standing up for long before two berserker-mad ruffians. what to do with the pirates continued for a day and a night a knotty problem. it was cuthbert vane who solved it, and with the simplicity of genius. "why not send 'em down to their chums the way we do the eats?" he asked. it seemed at first incredibly fantastic, but the more you thought of it the more practical it grew. it was characteristic of cuthbert not to see it as fantastic. for him the sharp edges of fact were never shaded off into the dim and nebulous. cuthbert, when he saw things at all, saw them steadily and whole. he would let down the writhing, swearing magnus over the cliff as tranquilly as he let down loaves of bread, aware merely of its needing more muscular effort. only he would take immense care not to hurt him. dire outcries greeted the decision. aunt jane wept, and chris wept, and said this never could have happened to him if his aunt had lived. oaths flowed from captain magnus in a turgid stream. nevertheless the twain were led away, firmly bound, and guarded by dugald, cuthbert and the negro. and the remarkable program proposed by cuthbert vane was triumphantly carried out. six prisoners now occupied the old cave of the buccaneers. with the camp freed from the presence of the pirates all need of watchfulness was over. the prisoners in the cave were provided with no implements but spades, whereas dynamite and crowbars would be necessary to force a way through the debris which choked the mouth of the tunnel. a looking over of the ground at the daily feeding time would be enough. to-morrow's sun would see our hopes crowned and all our toil rewarded by the recovery of the treasure from the _island queen_. xx 'twixt cup and lip next morning an event occurred sufficiently astonishing to divert our thoughts from even the all-important topic of the _island queen_. cookie, who had been up on the high land of the point gathering firewood, came rushing back to announce that a steamer had appeared in the offing. all the party dropped their occupations and ran to look. that the _rufus smith_ had returned at an unexpectedly early date was of course the natural explanation of the appearance of a vessel in these lonely seas. but through the glass the new arrival turned out to be not the tubby freighter but a stranger of clean-cut, rakish build, lying low in the water and designed for speed rather than carrying capacity. a mile offshore she lay to, and a boat left her side. wondering and disquieted, we returned to the beach to await her coming. was it another pirate? what possible errand could bring a steamer to this remote, unvisited, all but forgotten little island? had somebody else heard the story of the _bonny lass_ and come after the doubloons, unknowing that we were beforehand with them? if so, must we do battle for our rights? the boat shot in between the points and skimmed swiftly over the rippling surface of the cove, under the rhythmic strokes of half a dozen flashing oars. the rowers wore a trim white uniform, and in the stern a tall figure, likewise white-clad, turned toward us a dark face under a pith helmet. as the oarsmen drove the boat upon the beach the man in the stern sprang agilely ashore. dugald shaw stepped forward, and the stranger approached, doffing his helmet courteously. "you are the american and english party who landed here some weeks ago from the _rufus smith_?" his english was easy and correct, though spoken with a pronounced spanish accent. his dark high-featured face was the face of a spaniard. and his grace was the grace of a spaniard, as he bowed sweepingly and handed mr. shaw a card. "senor don enrique gonzales," said dugald, bowing in his stiff-necked fashion, "i am very happy to meet you. but as you represent his excellency the president of the republic of santa marina i suppose you come on business, senior gonzales?" "precisely. i am enchanted that you apprehend the fact without the tiresomeness of explanations. for business is a cold, usually a disagreeable affair, is it not so? that being the case, let us get it over." "first do us the honor to be seated, senor gonzales." comfortably bestowed in a camp-chair in the shade, the spaniard resumed: "my friend, this island belongs, as of course you are aware, to the republic of which i have the honor to be a citizen. all rights and privileges, such as harvesting the copra crop, are strictly conserved by the republic. all persons desiring such are required to negotiate with the minister of state of the republic. and how much more, when it is a question of treasure--of a very large treasure, senor?" the scotchman's face was dark. "i had understood," he replied, without looking in the direction of miss higglesby-browne, who seemed in the last few moments to have undergone some mysterious shrinking process, "that negotiations in the proper quarter had been undertaken and brought to a successful conclusion--that in short we were here with the express permission of the government of santa marina." this was a challenge which miss browne could not but meet. "i had," she said hoarsely, "i had the assurance of a--a person high in the financial circles of the united states, that through his--his influence with the government of santa marina it would not be necessary--in short, that he could _fix_ the president--i employ his own terms--for a considerable sum, which i--which my friend miss harding gave him." "and the name of this influential person?" inquired the santa marinan, suavely. "hamilton h. tubbs," croaked miss browne. senor gonzales smiled. "i remember the name well, madam. it is that of the pretended holder of a concession from our government, who a few years ago induced a number of american school-teachers and clergymen and other financially innocent persons to invest in imaginary coffee plantations. he had in some doubtful fashion become possessed of a little entirely worthless land, which formed the basis of his transactions. his frauds were discovered while he was in our country, and he was obliged to leave between two days, according to your so picturesque idiom. needless to say his application for permission to visit leeward island for any purpose would instantly have been refused, but as a matter of fact it was never made." in a benumbed silence we met the blow. the riches that had seemed within our grasp would never be ours. we had no claim upon them, for all our toil and peril; no right even to be here upon the island. suddenly i began to laugh; faces wearing various shades of shocked surprise were turned on me. still i laughed. "don't you see," i cried, "how ridiculous it all is? all the time it is we who have been pirates!" the spaniard gave me a smile made brilliant by the gleam of smoldering black eyes and the shine of white teeth. "senorita, with all regret, i must agree." "miss virginia harding," said miss browne with all her old severity, rejuvenated apparently by this opportunity to put me in my place, "would do well to consult her dictionary, before applying opprobrious terms to persons of respectability. a pirate is one who commits robbery upon the high seas. if such a crime lies at the door of any member of this expedition i am unaware of it." "what's in a name?" remarked dugald shaw, shrugging. "we were after other people's property, anyway. i am very sorry about it, senor gonzales, but i would like to ask, if you don't mind telling, how you happened to learn of our being here, so long as it was not through the authentic channels. on general principles, i tried to keep the matter quiet." "we learned in a manner somewhat--what do you say?--curious," returned the spaniard, who, having presented the men with cigars and by permission lighted one himself, was making himself extremely at home and appeared to have no immediate intention of haling us away to captivity in santa marinan dungeons. "but before i go further, kindly tell me whether you have had any--ah--visitors during your stay on the island?" "we have," mr. shaw replied, "very troublesome ones." the spaniard smiled. "then answer your own question. these men, while unloading a contraband cargo in a port of mexico near the southern border, grew too merry in a wineshop, and let it be known where they were bound when again they put to sea. the news, after some delay, found its way to our capital. at once the navy of the republic was despatched to investigate the matter. it is the navy of santa marina, ladies and gentlemen, which at this moment guards the entrance of the bay." and senor gonzales waved an ironic hand in the direction of the little steamer lying off the island, "on the way here i put in at panama, where certain inquiries were satisfactorily answered. there were those in that port who had made a shrewd guess at the destination of the party which had shipped on the _rufus smith_. i then pursued my course to leeward. but admit, my friends, that i have not by my arrival, caused you any material loss. except that i have unfortunately been compelled to present you to yourselves in the character of--as says the young lady--pirates--madam, i speak under correction--i have done you no injury, eh? and that for the simple reason that you have not discovered what you sought, and hence can not be required to surrender it." we looked at one another doubtfully. the ambiguous words of the spaniard, the something humorous and mocking which lay behind his courtly manner, put us quite in the dark. "senor gonzales," replied the scotchman, after a moment's hesitation, "it is true that so far only a negligible amount of what we came to find has rewarded us. but i can not in honesty conceal from you that we know where to look for the rest of it, and that we had certainly expected to leave the island with it in our possession." the dark indolent eyes of our visitor grew suddenly keen. half-veiled by the heavy lashes, they searched the face of dugald shaw. it seemed that what they found in that bold and open countenance satisfied them. his own face cleared again. "i think we speak at cross-purposes, mr. shaw," he said courteously, "and that we may better understand each other, i am going to tell you a little story. at about this season, two years ago, the navy of santa marina, the same which now lies off the island, was making a voyage of inspection along the coast of the republic. it was decided to include leeward in the cruise, as it had been unvisited for a considerable time. i hold no naval rank--indeed, we are not a seafaring people, and the captain of _la golondrina_ is a person from massachusetts, jeremiah bowles by name, but as the representative of his excellency i accompanied _la golondrina_. on our arrival at leeward i came ashore in the boat, and found to my surprise a small sloop at anchor in the cove. about the clearing were the signs of recent habitation, yet i knew that the old german who had had the copra concession here had been gone for some time. there were no personal trifles left in the hut, however, and indeed it was plain that weeks had passed since there had been any one about. no one responded to our shouts and calls. "i turned my attention to the sloop. in the cabin, besides a few clothes, i found something that interested me very much--a large brass-bound chest, of an antique type such as is common enough in my own country. "of course i had heard of the many legends of treasure buried on leeward island. consequently i was somewhat prepared to find in the chest, what in fact i did find there, over a million dollars in old spanish coins. "these coins, which were packed in strong canvas bags, were, as you may fancy, very quickly transferred to the cutter. we did not trouble ourselves with the unwieldy chest, and it remains, i suppose, in the cabin of the sloop, which i observed as we crossed the cove to have been washed up upon the rocks. "as my curiosity was extremely piqued regarding the owner of the sloop, the manner in which he had discovered the treasure, and still more his extraordinary disappearance, i should have wished to make a thorough search of the island. but the season for storms was shortly to begin, and already the weather signs were so threatening that captain bowles was reluctant to remain longer in the neighborhood of the island, which has a bad name for dangerous shoals and reefs. for the same reason it was thought unwise to risk a man or two aboard the sloop to sail her to the mainland. indeed, we ourselves were glad to get safely home with our doubloons in the teeth of a tropical gale." "this is a very interesting story, senor gonzales," said dugald shaw quietly, "and as you say, your visit here deprives us of nothing, but merely saves us further unprofitable labor. we are grateful to you." the spaniard bowed. "you do me too much honor. but as you remark, the story is interesting. it has also the element of mystery. for there remains the question of what became of the owner of the sloop. his final preparations for leaving the island had evidently been made, his possessions removed from the hut, provisions for the voyage brought on board the sloop--and then he had vanished. what had befallen him? did the gold carry with it some deadly influence? one plays, as it were, with this idea, imagining the so melancholy and bloody history of these old doubloons. how, in the first place, had he found them? through chance--by following some authentic clue? and then, in the moment of success, he disappears--pouf!" and senor gonzales disposed of the unknown by blowing him airily from the tips of his fingers. "however, we have the treasure--the main point, is it not? but i have often wondered--" "if you would like to hear the rest of the story," said mr. shaw, "we are in a position to enlighten you. that we are so, is due entirely to this young lady, miss virginia harding." the spaniard rose, and made obeisance profoundly. he resumed his seat, prepared to listen--no longer the government official, but the cordial and interested guest and friend. the story, of course, was a long one. everybody took a hand in the telling, even cookie, who was summoned from his retirement in the kitchen to receive the glory due him as a successful strategist. the journal of peter was produced, and the bags of doubloons handed over to the representative of the little republic. i even offered to resign the silver shoe-buckle which i had found in the secret locker on the island queen, but this excess of honesty received its due reward. "the doubloons being now in the possession of the santa marinan nation, i beg that you will consider as your own the island queen and all it may contain," said don enrique to me with as magnificent an air as though the sand-filled hulk of a wrecked sloop were really a choice gift to bestow on a young woman. plans were discussed for transferring the pirates from the cave to the cutter, for they were to be taken to santa marina to meet whatever punishment was thought fit for their rather indefinite ill-doing. they had not murdered us, they had robbed us of nothing but the provisions they had eaten, they had, after all, as much right on the island as ourselves. yet there remained their high-handed conduct in invading our camp and treating us as prisoners, with the threat of darker possibilities. i fancy that santa marinan justice works mainly by rule of thumb, and that the courts do not embarrass themselves much with precedents. only i hope they did not shoot the picturesque tony against a wall.[*] the power-schooner, manned by a crew from the cutter, was to be taken to santa marina also. senor gonzales remained with us for the day as our guest, and on the next the boats from the cutter took off the pirates from the cave. we did not see them again. through the convenient elasticity of santa marinan procedure, mr. tubbs was herded along with the rest, although he might plausibly, if hypocritically, have pleaded that he had complied with the will of the invaders under duress. aunt jane wept very much, and handed me _paeans of passion_ with the request that she might never see it again. we parted from senor gonzales not without regrets. it was an impressive leave-taking--indeed, senor, gonzales in his least word and gesture was impressive. also, he managed subtly and respectfully to impart to me the knowledge that he shared titian's tastes in the matter of hair. on his departure he made a pretty little speech, full of compliments and floral specimens, and bestowed upon me--as being mine by right, he earnestly protested--the two bags of spanish doubloons. [*]since the above was written, mr. shaw has run across tony on the san francisco water-front. tony tells him that they got off with three months' imprisonment. the american consul interested himself and the schooner was restored to her owners, who were tony's relations and hence did not prosecute. before the discharged prisoners left the republic captain magnus was stabbed over a card game by a native. mr. tubbs married a wealthy half-caste woman, the owner of a fine plantation, but a perfectly genuine mrs. tubbs from peoria turned up later, and the too much married h. h. was obliged to achieve one of his over-night flittings. xxi the bishop's chest w waited nine days for the coming of the _rufus smith_. during that time an episode occurred as a result of which i sat one morning by myself on the rocks beside the sloop, on which such ardent hopes had been centered, only like the derelict itself to be wrecked at last. it was a lonely spot and i wanted to be alone. i felt abused, and sad, and sore. i realized that i was destined to do nothing but harm in this world, and to hurt people i was fond of, and be misunderstood by every one, and to live on--if i wasn't lucky enough to meet with a premature and sudden end--into a sour, lonely, crabbed old age, when i would wish to goodness i had married anybody, and might even finish by applying to a matrimonial agency. as i sat nursing these melancholy thoughts i heard a footstep. i did not look up--for i knew the footstep. i should have known it if it had trodden over my grave. "i take it you are not wanting company, you have come so far out of the way of it," said dugald shaw. still i did not look up. "nobody seemed to want _me_," i remarked sulkily, after a pause. he made no reply, but seated himself upon the rocks. for a little there was silence. "virginia," he said abruptly, "i'm thinking you have hurt the lad." "oh," i burst out, "that is all you think of--the lad, the lad! how about me? don't you suppose it hurt me too?" "no," he made deliberate answer. "i was not sure of that. i thought maybe you liked having men at your feet." "liked it? liked to wound cuthbert--_cuthbert_? oh, if only it had not happened, if we could have gone on being friends! it was all my fault for going with him into the cave. it was after you had buried the skeleton, and i wanted to see poor peter's resting-place. and we spoke of helen, and it was all frightfully melancholy and tender, and all at once he--he said it. and i meant he never should!" in the soreness of my heart i began to weep. "there, lassie, there, don't cry!" he said gently. "the boy didn't speak of it, of course. but i knew how it must be. it has hit him hard, i am afraid." "i suppose," i wept, "you would have had me marry him whether i wanted to or not, just to keep from hurting him." "no," he answered quickly. "i did not say that--i did not say that i would have had you marry him. no, lass, i did not say that." "then why are you scolding me?" i asked in a choked whisper. "scolding you? i was not. it was only that--that i love the lad--and i wish you both so well--i thought perhaps there was some mistake, and--it would not matter about me, if i could see you both happy." "there is a mistake," i said clearly. "it is a great mistake, dugald shaw, that you should come to me and court me--for some one else." there was silence for a while, the kind of silence when you hear your heartbeats. when he spoke his voice was unsteady. "but the boy has everything to offer you--his ancient name, his splendid unstained youth, a heart that is all loyalty. he is strong and brave and beautiful. virginia, why couldn't you love him?" "i could not love him," i replied, very low, "because my love was not mine any more to give. it belongs to--some one else. is his name ancient? i don't know. it is his, and he ennobles it. cuthbert has youth, but youth is only promise. in the man i love i find fulfilment. and he is loyal and brave and honest--i am afraid he isn't beautiful, but i love him the better for his scars--" after that i sat quite still, and i knew it depended on the next half minute whether i went all the days of my life crowned and glorious with happiness, or buried my shame and heartbreak under the waters of the cove. and then dugald shaw took me in his arms. by and by he said huskily: "beloved, i had no right to ask you to share such a life as mine must be--the life of a poor sailor." at this i raised my head from its nestling-place and laughed. "ask me? silly, i asked you! of course you could have refused me, but i depended on your not having the courage." "and indeed that is a charge i'll not allow--that i am so little of a man as to let my courting be done for me. no, no, it was my love compelling you that made you speak the words you did--the love of a selfish man who should have thought only of shielding you from the hardships of such a wandering, homeless life as mine." "well, heaven reward you for your selfishness," i said earnestly. "i am thankful you were not so noble as to let me throw myself at your head in vain. i have been doing it for ever so long, in fact, but it is such a thick scotch head that i dare say i made no impression." "sweet imp! you'll pay for that--oh, virginia, if i had only something to offer you!" "you can offer me something that i want very much, if you will, and at no cost but to your strong right arm." "it is an arm which is at your service for life--but what am i to do with it now? and indeed i think it is very well employed at this moment." "but it must be employed much more strenuously," i remarked, moving a little away, "if you are to get me what i want. before you came, i was meditating possible ways of getting it for myself. i wanted it for a melancholy relic--a sort of mausoleum in which all my hopes were buried. now its purpose is quite different; it is to be my bride's chest and hold the dowry which i shall bring to one dugald shaw." "you mean _the_ chest--the chest that held the spanish doubloons--that lies under the sand in the sloop?" "exactly. and now i shall know whether you are the true prince or not, because he always succeeds in the tasks he undertakes to win the princess." it was low tide, such a tide as had all but lured me to my death in the cave. one could go and come from the beach along the rocks, without climbing the steep path up the cliff. it was not long before dugald was back again with spade and pick. he tore off the shrunken, sun-dried boards from the cabin roof, and fell to work. it was not, after all, a labor of hercules. the cabin was small and the chest large. i watched with the pride of proprietorship the swift ease with which the steel-sinewed arms of the scot made the caked sand fly. then the spade struck something which sent back a dull metallic sound through the muffling sand. i gave a little shriek of excitement. hardly could i have been more thrilled if i had believed the chest still to contain the treasure of which it had been ravished. it was filled to its brass-bound lid with romance, if not with gold. a little more and it lay clear to our view, a convex surface of dark smoky brown, crossed by three massive strips of tarnished brass. dugald dug down until the chest stood free to half its height; then by its handles--i recognized the "great hand-wrought loops of metal," of the diary--we dragged it from its bed, and drew it forth into the cockpit. for a little while we sat before it in happy contemplation. it was indeed for its own sake quite well worth having, that sturdy old chest. even in an antique shop i should have succumbed to it at once; how much more when we had dug it up ourselves from a wrecked sloop on a desert island, and knew all its bloody and delightful history. at length, kneeling before it, i raised with an effort the heavy lid. "empty, of course--no more brown bags. but oh, dugald, had ever a girl such a wonderful bride's chest as this? o--oh!" "what's wrong?" "nothing, only there is a crack in the bottom, running all the way along where it joins the side." "warped a bit, i suppose. no matter, it can be easily repaired--crack? i say, lassie, look here!" under the pressure of dugald's fingers the floor of the chest was swinging upward on an invisible hinge. between it and the true bottom was a space of about three inches in depth. it seemed to be filled with a layer of yellowed cotton-wool. for a long moment we held our breath, gazing at each other with eyes which asked the same question. then dugald lifted a corner of the sheet of cotton and plucked it away. at once all the hues of the rainbow seemed to be flashing and sparkling before us. rubies were there like great drops of the blood that the chest and its treasure had wrung from the hearts of men; sapphires, mirroring the blue of the tropic sky; emeralds, green as the island verdure; pearls, white as the milk of the cocoanuts and softly luminous as the phosphorescent foam which broke on the beach in the darkness. and there were diamonds that caught gleams of all the others' beauty, and then mocked them with a matchless splendor. some of the stones lay loose upon their bed of cotton; others were in massive settings of curious old-time workmanship. every gem was of exceptional size and beauty, the pearls, i knew at once, were the rarest i had ever looked upon. they were strung in a necklace, and had a very beautiful pendant of mingled pearls and diamonds. there were nine heavy bracelets, all jewel-set; twenty-three rings, eight of them for the hand of a man. some of these rings contained the finest of the diamonds, except for three splendid unset stones. there were numbers of elaborate old-fashioned earrings, two rope-like chains of gold adorned with jewels at intervals, and several jeweled lockets. there was a solid gold snuff-box, engraved with a coat of arms and ornamented with seventeen fine emeralds. there were, besides the three diamonds, eighty-two unset stones, among them, wrapped by itself in cotton, a ruby of extraordinary size and luster. and there was a sort of coronet or tiara, sown all over with clear white brilliants. there is the inventory, not entirely complete, of the treasure which we found hidden under the false bottom of the chest, a treasure whose existence none of those who had striven and slain and perished for the sake of the spanish doubloons can have suspected. the secret of it died with the first guardian of the chest, the merchant of lima who went overboard from the _bonny lass_ on that stormy night ninety years ago. now sea and sun and sand had done their work and warped the wood of the chest enough to make us masters of its mystery. and we sat in the sand-heaped cock-pit of the wrecked sloop, playing like children with our sparkling toys. ours? yes, for whether or not there were an infection of piracy in the very air of the island, so that to seize with the high hand, to hold with the iron grasp, seemed the law of life, we decided without a qualm against the surrender of our treasure-trove to its technical owners. technical only; for one felt that, in essence, all talk of ownership by this man or that had long ago become idle. fate had held the treasure in fee to give or to withhold. senor gonzales had had his chance at the chest, and he had missed the secret of the hidden hoard, had left it to lie forgotten under the sand until in some tropic storm it should be engulfed by the waters of the cove. more than this, had he not most specifically made over to me the _island queen_ and all that it contained? this was a title clear enough to satisfy the most exacting formalist. and we were not formalists, nor inclined in any quibbling spirit to question the decrees of fortune. as treasure-hunters, we had been her devotees too long. so after all it was not my scornful skepticism but the high faith of miss higglesby-browne which was justified by the event, and the harding-browne expedition left the island well repaid for its toils and perils. plus the two bags of doubloons, which were added to the spoils, the treasure brought us a sum so goodly that i dare not name it, for fear of the apparition of senor gonzales and the santa marinan navy looming up to demand restitution. like true comrades, we divided share and share alike, and be sure that no one grudged cookie the percentage which each was taxed for his benefit. certain of the rarest; jewels were not sold, but found their way to me as gifts of the expedition severally and collectively. the brightest of the diamonds now shines in my engagement ring. cuthbert, by the way, showed up so splendidly when i explained to him about the engagement--that the responsibility was entirely mine, not dugald's--that i earnestly wished i were twins so that one of me could have married the beautiful youth--which indeed i had wished a little all the time. and now i come to the purpose of this story--for though well concealed it has had one from the beginning. it is to let helen, whoever and wherever she may be, if still of this world, know of the fate of peter, and to tell her that when she asks for them she is to have my most cherished relics of the island, peter's journal and the silver shoe-buckle which he found in the sand of the treasure-cave and was taking home to her. only, she must let me keep crusoe, please. the end kidnapping in the pacific, by whg kingston. ________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________ kidnapping in the pacific, by whg kingston. chapter one. "you want a yarn. you shall have one," said a young friend of mine, a midshipman, who had just returned from a four years' cruise in the pacific. "i am not a good hand at describing what i have seen, but i can narrate better the adventures of others which they have told me:--" we had visited a good many islands in the pacific, engaged in settling the disputes of the natives or trying to settle them, punishing evil doers, supporting the consuls and missionaries, surveying occasionally hitherto unknown harbours, and endeavouring to make the british flag respected among the dark-skinned inhabitants of those regions. i with another midshipman and a boat's crew had landed on a beautiful island of the western pacific to bring off a cargo of cocoa-nuts and breadfruit with which the natives had promised to supply us. two of our men had straggled off against orders into the interior. while waiting for them we saw the signal made for our return. unwilling to leave them behind, we ourselves unwisely started off to look for them. the natives gave us to understand that they were a little way ahead, so we pushed on hoping to come up with them and bring them with us. a considerable time longer than we expected was thus occupied, and when having at length overtaken them we got back to the beach, we found that a strong breeze had set in, and that so heavy a surf was breaking on the shore that it would be extremely dangerous passing through it. still the signal was flying and the order must be obeyed. we shoved off, but had not pulled many strokes before a succession of tremendous rollers came roaring in, turning the boat right over and sending her back almost stove to pieces on the beach. had it not been for the natives who swam to our rescue, we should probably have lost our lives. wet through, and half-drowned, we were dragged on shore. it would have been madness to have again made an effort to get off. all we could do, therefore, was to haul our sorely battered boat out of the reach of the surf and to collect the portion of our cargo washed up on the sands. although it was tolerably hot we felt that we should be more comfortable than we were if we could shift our wet clothes. the garments worn by the natives could assist us but little, seeing that most of them wore only somewhat narrow waist clothes. they made us understand, however, that not far off we should find the house of a white man, who would perhaps afford us accommodation. why he had not yet hitherto made his appearance we could not tell, but we determined to visit him and claim his hospitality. led by the natives, we proceeded some distance along the beach when we came in sight of a hut, larger and more substantially built than the other habitations around. just inside a porch at the entrance of the hut, an old white man, dressed in shirt and trousers, with a broad-brimmed straw hat on his head, was seated in a roughly made easy-chair with his feet resting on the trellis-work before him. a large wooden pipe was in his mouth, from which he was smoking lustily. he seemed scarcely to notice our approach, and when we addressed him he enquired in a gruff voice where we came from and what we wanted. we told him what had happened, and asked him if he could give us shelter, and lend us some garments while our clothes were drying. "as to that, young gentlemen, you shall have a shirt and a pair of duck trousers apiece, and such food as there may happen to be in my store-house," he answered, seeing by our uniforms who we were. "your men shall be looked after also." we were soon seated round his cooking stove inside the house, rigged out in the garments he had provided while our own clothes were hung up to dry. a native girl attended us, obeying with alacrity the old man's commands. we supposed her to be his daughter, and spoke of her as such. "no, you are wrong in that, i have no child," he observed. "she is my wife. that," pointing to a thick stick which rested on a stool near him, "served as my marriage lines, it makes her as sharp and attentive as i can wish, and keeps her in good order." i had suspected from the appearance of the old fellow that he was a ruffian; i had now no doubt that he was a thorough one; and i felt sure that had he dared he would not have scrupled to hand us over to the natives should they by chance demand our lives. a man-of-war in the offing, though she might be driven away for a few days, afforded us perfect security with such a character. at first he was not disposed to be communicative; he kept beating about the bush to ascertain apparently whether we knew anything about him, and had come to call him to account for any misdeeds of which he might have been conscious. when he discovered that we were not even aware that a white man resided on the island, he opened out more freely. i was curious to know something about him, and, concealing the opinion i had formed of his character, tried to induce him to talk of himself; that he was an old sailor i could see at a glance. "you were long at sea, i suppose," i observed. "first and last pretty nigh sixty years," he answered. "i was a small boy when i first ran off from home, and i never lived on shore many weeks together from that time up to within a few years ago. i have served on board every sort of craft afloat, and have seen a good many curious sights, as you may suppose." i resolved not to interrupt him, unless he should get a hitch in his yarn with which a question might help him through, so i let him run on, and, once having begun, he seemed nothing loth to allow his tongue full play. probably he had not had auditors who could understand him for many a long day. "the first craft i shipped aboard was bound for the coast of africa. in those days not a few vessels belonging to liverpool were engaged in one way or another in the slave trade, either in supplying the slavers with goods, and stores, and provisions, or in actually running cargoes of blacks, which though the most profitable was a dangerous business to engage in. "i understood that we were to bring back gold dust and ivory, but instead of that we began to load with negroes, and soon had pretty nigh three hundred stowed away below hatches. we had hoisted the spanish flag, and had a spanish captain, and fresh papers, for it was, i fancy, a hanging matter for an englishman to command a slaver, though a few years back it had been all lawful and shipshape, but things change, you see, and what seems right one day is wrong the other. we had to keep a bright look out for english cruisers, who were on the coast to put a stop to the business. "i heard some curious yarns of the way the slaves are taken. some powerful tribes make it a regular business, and attack their weaker neighbours for no other purpose than to capture them, and then to sell them to the slave dealers. they generally steal on a village at night, surround and set fire to it, and seize all the inhabitants who rush from their huts to escape the flames. parties go out to pick up others wandering in the woods, or travelling from one place to another. the inhabitants of the west coast of africa must have an uncomfortable life of it, i suspect. with our living cargo on board we made sail for south america. "before we were many leagues from the shore, an english man-of-war hove in sight. should we be taken we should not only lose the vessel and our expected profits, but it would go hard with the english part of the crew. all knew that, and were ready to do anything to escape. we made all sail, but for a wonder the british man-of-war was a fast craft, and soon began to overhaul us. our skipper, and most of the officers and crew, swore fearfully at the stranger, and some declared that sooner than be taken they would blow our vessel, with all the niggers on board, as well as the english cruiser, into the air. "i observed the captain and officers talking together, and there was a fierce determination in their looks which showed they meant what they said. i had no fancy to be blown into the air, and was considering what i could do to save myself. "as the cruiser drew near i saw some of our men go below, and presently up they came with a black fellow. they led him aft and lowered him overboard. "`don't be frightened, all you have to do is to swim to yonder ship, and she will pick you up,' said the mate. "i don't fancy the negro understood him, still blacks are as fond of life as other people, and i saw him striking out boldly for the ship. he was seen. the ship hove-to, a boat was lowered, and he was picked up. our people laughed at the success of the plan, for we had increased our distance from the enemy. "evening was coming on. the great thing was to keep ahead of her till darkness would allow us to alter our course without being perceived. "in a short time, as soon as we saw that the boat was hoisted up, another negro was hove overboard. he was a strong swimmer, and struck out boldly. he, too, was seen on board the man-of-war, and by another cruiser of the deep also, a huge shark. the monster made towards him, he swam bravely on for his life, but it was of no avail. before long he disappeared, and i fancied i could hear the shriek he uttered, even at the distance he already was from us. "we should have sacrificed half our cargo rather than be taken as long as there appeared any probability of the man-of-war heaving-to to pick up the unfortunate wretches, but the breeze falling light, we had an advantage over the heavier vessel, and darkness coming on, we at length lost sight of her. we immediately altered our course, knowing that she would do her best to fall in with us in the morning. we escaped her, however, although we lost fifty or sixty blacks on the passage; that was a matter of no consequence, considering that we landed the greater portion and made a large profit by the venture. our success was so satisfactory that it was not long before we were again back on the coast, and as our craft was a remarkably fast one we managed again to escape the british cruisers. "we made altogether eight or ten trips, now and then we narrowly escaped capture, but we were too clever for our enemy, and they were not up to our various dodges. "i had by this time become well accustomed to the work, and, though at first it had gone somewhat against me to see the blacks dying by scores during the middle passage, yet now i saw them hove overboard with as little compunction as if they had been so many sheep. "we had a precious rough crew, about as villainous a set of cut-throats as well could be collected together. it does not do for tender-hearted fellows to sail aboard a slaver. "i had meantime grown into a big stout lad, and could hold my own against any of them. "how it was i don't know, but i should not have liked at that time to have done the things that some of them did. we had a black cook aboard, whether or not sitting before a hot fire had softened his heart, i cannot tell, but he was not as bad as the rest; he had consequently a hard life of it amongst them. one day he was detected by the mate carrying a mess below to some of the sick blacks, they were people of his own tribe, and i suspect relations. the mate swore that he intended to raise a mutiny among them, it may be to let them loose to murder us all. poor sambo declared that he had no thoughts of doing anything of the sort, but that the people were ill, and that he hoped what he gave them would do them good and save their lives. he was a sensible fellow, and must have known that from where we were, about mid-channel, they could never have found their way back again to the coast of africa, and that if they had murdered the crew they themselves must also have perished. the captain and mate would not hear his excuses, and began belabouring him with thick cudgels till they had nearly knocked the breath out of his body. i felt very indignant, for black though he was i had a liking for the man, and determined to speak out. "`i tell you what, ringdon, if you don't belay your jaw-tackles you will be treated in the same way!' exclaimed the captain, turning on me. "`sambo had no bad intentions, i will answer for that,' i cried out. `if any of us were sick and dying we should expect one of our countrymen, if he had the means, to help us, and i don't see that sambo intended to do more than that.' sambo gave me a glance, as much as to say if i have the chance i'll render you a service some day; and, bobbing his head, as the mate made another blow at him, escaped forward. the two then turned on me, and i thought were going to try their cudgels on my head. i stood up boldly and faced them. "`now,' i asked, `what have you got to say to me?' "`look out for squalls, master boas, that's all,' growled the mate. "`you will some day wish that you had kept your opinions to yourself,' said the captain, but neither he nor the mate ventured to strike me. i turned round and walked forward, leaving the two talking together. i was sure by the glances they cast at me that they meant mischief, so i determined to be on my guard. "several days passed away, and things went on much as usual. sambo got many a kick and cuff from the captain and mate when he could not help coming near them, but he kept out of their way as much as he could within the caboose, and cooked our meals without uttering a complaint. "i had heard say that the pitcher which often goes to the well gets broken at last, and i could not help fancying, notwithstanding our long run of success, that such would be the fate of the slaver. "perhaps the owners thought the same, for we had received orders to proceed round the cape to the east coast of africa, where the portuguese slave dealers had agreed to supply us with a cargo--that coast at the time being less watched by the english cruisers. "we were some way off the cape, on our passage eastward, when, while it was blowing hard and a pretty heavy sea was running, i fell from aloft. i had been a good swimmer from my boyhood, and when i came to the surface i struck out for my life, expecting to see the schooner heave to and lower a boat to pick me up. instead of her doing so, what was my horror and dismay to observe that she was standing away from me. i caught sight of the captain and mate on the poop, and by the looks they cast at me i felt sure that they intended to leave me to my fate. i shouted loudly to them, asking if they were going to allow a fellow-creature to perish. again and again i cried out, doing my utmost to keep my head above the foaming seas. "a number of huge albatrosses had been following the vessel, sweeping round and round her, now soaring upwards, now plunging down into the waters to pick up anything which had fallen overboard. you may fancy my dismay when i found that instead of chasing the vessel as before, they were gathering round my head. every moment i expected to see them darting down towards me, and i knew that a blow from one of their sharp beaks would have easily pierced my skull and struck me lifeless in a moment. nearer and nearer they drew. i could distinguish their keen eyes watching me, and had i remained quiet for a moment i felt convinced that they would have dashed at me. i continued, therefore, striking out with my feet and beating the water with my hands, which i lifted up as often as they came near to keep them at bay. still i knew full well that the struggle must soon cease, for i could not possibly much longer exert myself as i was then doing. i had had very little enjoyment in life, but yet i had no wish to go out of it; my hopes of escape, however, were small indeed; the only chance i could see was that the crew, indignant that one of their number should be left to perish, would insist on the captain heaving-to, and would lower a boat to come to my rescue. "further and further the vessel sailed away from me. i was beginning at last to think that i should be left to perish, when a hail reached my ears, and i saw about midway between myself and the vessel, a black head rising above the foaming seas. i shouted in return, and redoubled my efforts to keep the albatrosses at a distance, while i struck out to meet my friend, whom i recognised as sambo the black cook. i found that he was towing after him a spar, which, though it had impeded his progress, would support us both. i was soon up to him. "`neber fear, boas, my son!' he cried out as he assisted me on the spar, `we better here dan in slave ship.' i could not see that exactly, though i thanked him for risking his life to save mine. `risk not so great as you tink,' he answered, `i make out big ship, she steering dis way when i was aloft, and she soon come and pick us up.' "i hoped that he was right, but still it was very likely that we should not be seen; if so he would lose his life as i should mine. i told him i was very sorry that he should do that. "`neber fear, boas,' he answered. `nothing bery sweet in life for me. you saved my head from de blows of the captain and mate, i save your life or die wid you.' "we could not talk much however. on his way he had picked up a couple of pieces of wood, and armed with these we were able to drive the albatrosses off. they are cowardly birds, and when they found that we were living men and not pieces of offal, they left us alone and flew after the schooner. "the time went slowly by, but at last i could distinguish the sail of a ship rising above the horizon. she was standing towards us; of that i felt certain, so did sambo. this enabled us to keep up our spirits. we watched her narrowly, her topsails, then her courses appeared, at length her hull itself came in sight, and we made out that she was a frigate, probably english. i was inclined to curse my fate, for one of the things i dreaded most was having to serve on board a man-of-war. once or twice i felt almost inclined to let go, but sambo laughed at my fears. "`can't be worse off dan on board slaver, and you better live, and den when we have a chance we may run from de ship.' "his arguments prevailed, and once when it seemed to me she was altering her course, i began to fear that after all we might not be seen. however, as it was, she stood directly for us, and passed within a half a cable's length of where we floated on the spar. we shouted together, she immediately hove-to, and a boat being lowered we were picked up and taken on board. she was an english frigate bound out to the east indies. we had not thought of agreeing to any story, and therefore when we were questioned as to the character of the craft ahead of us, we had nothing to do but to tell the truth. i could not help hoping that the schooner would be overtaken, when we should be amply revenged, but before we could get up with her night came on. the next morning she was nowhere to be seen. "i had heard enough about men-of-war to make me expect pretty rough treatment. things, i must own, were not so bad as i thought. i had no choice but to enter as one of her crew. sambo did the same, and was rated as cook's mate. he seemed much happier than before, and told me it was the luckiest thing that ever happened to him in his life. when we got out to bombay, the first place we touched at, i asked him about running from the ship. `don't be a fool, boas,' he answered; `you stay where you are; you only fall from de frying-pan into de fire if you attempt to run.' "i still, however, thought that i would try it some day, but so sharp a look-out was kept whenever we were in port, that i gave it up as hopeless. "four years passed away. we had a few brushes with the chinese and some boat service in looking after pirates, and at length the frigate was ordered home. i had had a taste of the lash more than once for getting drunk, and had been put in irons for insubordination, and had no mind to join another man-of-war if i could help it. "as soon as the frigate was paid off, after i had had a spree on shore, i determined to make my way to liverpool and ship on board another trader. i tried to persuade sambo to accompany me. `no, no, boas, i know when i well off; i serve my time, den bear up for greenwich, get pension and live like a gentlemen to the end of my days. you knock about de world, get kicked and cuffed and die like a dog.' "i felt very angry and parted from him, though i could not help thinking that perhaps he was right. "well, after that i served on board several merchantmen, now sailing to the west indies, now to the east, once in a fruit vessel to the azores, and two or three times up the mediterranean. i was wrecked more than once, and another time the ship i was on board was burnt, and i and three or four others of the crew escaped in one of the boats. i could not help thinking sometimes of what sambo had said to me, but it was too late now, and as i had not saved a farthing and had no pension to fall back on, i was obliged to continue at sea. "i had found my way once more back to liverpool, when the crimps, who had got hold of me, shipped me on board a vessel while i was drunk, and i was hoisted up the side not knowing where i was nor where i was going to till next day, when the pilot having left us, we were standing down the irish channel. i then found that i was on board a large armed brig, the `seagull,' bound out round cape horn to trade along the coast of chili and peru. "i had sailed with a good many hard-fisted skippers and rough shipmates, but the captain and mates and crew of the `seagull' beat them all. the mates had ropes' ends in their hands from morning to night, and to have marling-spikes hove at our heads was nothing uncommon. i had been at sea, however, too long not to know how to hold my own. my fists were always ready, and i kept my sheath-knife pretty sharp as a sign to the others that i would have no tricks played with me. but the boys among us did have a cruel life of it; one of them jumped overboard and drowned himself, and so would another, but the captain had him triced up and gave him two dozen, and swore he should have three the next time he made the attempt. "we had a long passage. i have a notion that the skipper was no great navigator. i have seen tall large-whiskered fellows like him who could talk big on shore prove but sorry seamen after all. "after trying for a couple of weeks to get round cape horn we were driven back, and being short of water, the captain, by the advice of the second mate, who had been there before, determined to run through the straits of magellan. we had been two days without a drop of water on board when we managed to get into a harbour in terra del fuego. we lost no time in going on shore in search of water to pour down our thirsty throats. scarcely had we landed than we caught sight of a party of the strangest-looking black fellows i ever set eyes on. talk of savages, they were indeed savages by their looks and manners--hideous looking little chaps with long black hair and scarcely a stitch of clothing on their bodies. we had muskets in our hands, the use of which they, i suppose, knew, for they behaved in a friendly manner, and when we made them understand that we wanted water, they took us to a pool into which a stream fell coming down from the mountain, where we could fill our casks and roll them back to the boats. as soon as we caught sight of it we rushed forward, and dipping down our heads drank till we were nigh ready to burst. i thought that i had never tasted such water before. had the savages been inclined they might have taken the opportunity of knocking us on the head, but they didn't. after we had loaded the boat, some of us walked on with them to their village, which was not far off. i cannot say much for their style of building. their huts were just a number of sticks run into the ground, and tied at the top in the shape of a sugar-loaf--branches were interwoven between the sticks, and the whole was covered with dry grass. a few bundles of grass scattered about on the ground was their only furniture. these people, as far as you could see the colour of their skin through the dirt, were of a dark, coppery brown. the women were as dark and ill-looking as the men, but they were strong little creatures, and, as well as we could judge, did all the work. "the men had bows and arrows and spears and slings. they had among them a number of little fox-like looking dogs, savage, surly brutes, which barked and yelped as we came near them. they were almost as ugly as their masters, but ugly as they were, they were clever creatures, for we saw them assist to catch fish in a curious fashion. a number of the little brutes swam out to a distance, and then, forming a circle, turned towards the shore, splashing the water and yelping as they came on. they were driving before them a whole shoal of fish towards the net which the fuegeans had spread at the mouth of, a creek. as soon as the fish got into shallow water, where they were kept by the dogs, the savages rushed in with their spears, and stuck them through, or shot them with their arrows. in this way, by the help of the dogs, a number were caught. the dogs also are used to catch birds. this they do while the birds are sleeping, and so noiselessly do they spring upon them, that they can carry off one after the other without disturbing the rest, when they bring them to their masters. useful as they are, the dogs get hardly treated, being constantly cuffed and beaten, and never getting even a mouthful of food thrown to them. they know, however, how to forage for themselves, and will take to the water and catch fish or pounce down upon birds whenever they are hungry. "savage as these people are, they can build canoes for themselves, sometimes of birch bark, and sometimes they hollow out the trunks of trees by fire. they make them in different parts, which they sew together with thongs of raw hide, so that when they wish to shift their quarters, they can carry their canoes overland. "they have got some stones in their country which give out sparks, and they use a dry fungus as tinder, so that they can quickly make a fire. "as to cooking, their only notion is to make a fire, heat some stones, and put their food in among them. "they are about the dirtiest people i ever fell in with; and all the time we were among them we never saw any of them washing themselves. "in summer, when they can get fish and seals, which they catch with their spears, they have plenty of food. in winter, they are often on short commons. we heard it said that when it has been blowing too hard for them to go on the water, and they can catch neither fish nor seals, they are given to eat their old women, who they say can be of no further use, instead of killing their dogs, which they know will be of service to them when the summer again comes round. "while we were on their coast, a whale was stranded near the mouth of the harbour. the news spread, and canoes were seen coming from all directions. in a short time the canoes gathered round the body of the monster, and the little coppery-coloured chaps were soon hard at work cutting off the blubber with their shell knives. the water was shallow between where the whale lay and the shore, and when one of the little fellows had cut off a large piece of blubber, he made a hole in the middle, through which he put his head, and thus brought his cargo to land, generally munching a piece of the raw fat on his way. "the most curious things we saw were masses of stuff growing on the beech trees, of a red colour, something like mushrooms. though this stuff has no taste, the people were very fond of it, and, for my part, i preferred it to raw whale-blubber. "having replenished our stock of water and wood, we made our way westward, sailing only during the day, and keeping the lead going. we were glad, however, to get clear of those high rocky shores, and the snow-storms which frequently came down on us. we kept away from the land for some time, and made it again not far from the town of callao on the coast of peru. "the captain's manner didn't improve during the passage. half his time he was drunk, and he was never on deck but that he was cursing and swearing at the crew, rope-ending every one who came within his reach. i could not help wishing that i had followed sambo's advice and stuck to the navy; though there was flogging enough at times when men would get drunk, still there was something like justice. a man had only to be sober and keep a quiet tongue in his head, and he need have no fear of the cat. on board the `seagull,' a man had reason to think himself fortunate if he escaped without a cracked skull. it was easy to tell what the fate of the brig would be, and i resolved to run from her on the first opportunity. "though we made the land in the forenoon, we were still at a considerable distance from it when the sun went down. we, therefore, after standing on for some time, hove-to, hoping to enter the harbour of callao the next day. when morning broke we could see the snow-capped tops of the cordilleras rising up in the far distance, but still the lower land appeared a long way off. "we had to wait till the sea breeze set in, and it was nearly nightfall before we came to an anchor off callao. "it is the chief port of peru, a short distance from lima, the capital. as the captain expected to get rid of a good part of his cargo, i knew that the brig would remain some time. i, however, didn't wish to lose a moment in getting free of her. as soon as the anchor was dropped, i watched my opportunity for a run. i intended, if possible, to escape in a shore boat, when there would be less chance of being traced. that night, however, only the custom house and health boats came off to us. i had to wait, therefore, the whole of the next day. i could not help fancying that the first mate suspected my intention, and was watching me. i showed myself, therefore, more active and attentive to the work i had to do than usual. "a number of boats during the day came off to us with fresh provisions, especially all sorts of fruits. to throw the mate off his guard, while i saw that he was looking towards me, i bought some fruit; at the same time i tried to make the chilian understand that if he would come again in the evening i would buy more of him. i then began eating some of the fruit and carried the rest below. after this the mate seemed to take no more pains to keep an eye on me. "my friend returned just before sunset. i told him to hand me up some of the fruit, and paid him for it, letting him understand that if he would wait a little, and i liked what he had brought, i would take some more. it rapidly grew dark, and i returned on deck with a melon under my arm, which i pretended was rotten, and intended to have changed. seeing the boat still alongside, holding the melon i slipped down into her, and was followed by the owner, who had been trying to sell more fruit on deck. sitting by him, i began to talk in my fashion, and when no one was looking slipped a dollar into his hand and pointed to the shore. he at once nodded to show that he understood me. we waited, and i pretended to be bargaining about the melon while it grew darker and darker, and then when no one was looking over the side, lay down among the fruit baskets, pulling some of them over me. my friend continued to remain alongside, and i daresay if anyone had enquired for me, he would have handed me back, but as good luck would have it, i was not missed, and at last, he and his men shoved off and began to paddle towards the shore. even then i did not feel safe, for i feared that the mate might miss me and send a boat to overhaul all the shore boats which had visited the brig, and i knew if i fell into the captain's hands, he would clap me into irons and keep me there till we were at sea again. "after we got some distance, the peruvian crew began to pull faster. at length we reached the shore. the master, when we landed, shook my hand, to show that he intended to be my friend, and led me away to his house, which was at some distance from the shore. i made him understand that i did not wish to go back to the ship. he replied that it would be safer for me at once to go into the interior, where the captain would not think of looking for me. i saw the sense of this, and after i had had some supper we set out. i gave my friend another dollar, which pleased him mightily, and i told him by signs that i was ready to work in his garden, or anything of that sort on shore, not that i at any time had a fancy for digging. "we travelled for some hours on muleback, till we reached a farm on the side of a mountain. i found that it belonged to my friend's brother. after matters had been explained to him he received me very kindly, and i was soon at home in his house. i helped him about the place as i had promised, and had a tolerably easy life of it; for though i worked twice as hard as anyone else, that was not much, seeing that the spaniards are not addicted to over-tire themselves. my host had a daughter, though i cannot say much for her beauty, for she had a dark skin, and was short and fat, but she took a fancy to me, and so thinking i could not do better, i offered to splice her. her father, who was glad to get me to assist him, and wished to keep me, consented. "accordingly, we were married in the church they went to. the priest asked me if i was a catholic, and i said i was ready to be anything he liked, on which he replied he would soon make me one. there was a grand festival, and a number of priests and people collected, and they took me in among them and made the sign of the cross upon me, and so i was turned into a catholic. i suppose that i was a very good one, for i used to attend church with my wife and go to confession to the priest, though as i told him all my sins in english, not a word of which he understood, he could not have been much the wiser; but that, i suppose, didn't matter, as he absolved me notwithstanding. i was thus looked upon with great respect by our neighbours, and got on very well with my wife." chapter two. "i had been a good many months in the place when my father-in-law, thinking i was securely moored, began to give me more and more work, which i didn't like. however, i lived on pretty contentedly, but still i had a wish for a sniff of the sea air, and to feel myself once more on the moving ocean; not, to be sure, that i had not felt the ground move under me, for we had had two or three earthquakes, when not a few houses had been thrown down, and the ground tumbled and tossed, and here and there opened, as if ready to swallow us up. "i took french leave of my wife, for i was afraid she would stop me; but when i reached callao i sent word to her by her uncle that i hoped to be back soon, after i had collected no end of dollars to buy her a new dress, and keep the pot boiling. "i hadn't made up my mind what to do when i saw a whaler in the harbour. i thought if she was likely to remain in the pacific for some time, and she wanted hands, i would make a trip in her, on condition that i was to be landed at callao before she returned home. "she was an american, only out a few months, and having lost several hands, the captain was very glad to get me. i hadn't been long on board before i began to wish myself back with my wife. it was much harder work than i expected, especially when we got into the southern ocean among the icebergs. those spermaceti whales, too, are savage monsters, and will often turn on a boat and try to capsize her. "i was pretty well nigh losing my life on one of those occasions as several of my shipmates did theirs. we had chased a big bottle-nose right up to an iceberg, and had stuck two harpoons into his back when he sounded. he was making for the berg, we thought, and if he got under it we should have to cut the lines, and lose him and the harpoons. presently the lines slackened, we hauled in upon them, when suddenly up he came not half a cable's length from us, blowing away with all his might. we dashed on, when round he turned, and with open mouth came towards us. "`back all,' was the cry, but before we could get out of his way he struck the bow of the boat with his nose, sending it up in the air, and jerking several of us overboard. the next moment with his huge jaws he made a grab at the boat. seizing a stretcher i sprang as far as i could out of his way, and struck out for my life. the shrieks of my shipmates and the cracking of the ribs and timbers of the boat sounded in my ears, but i had enough to do to take care of myself, even to turn my head for a moment. i swam on as fast as i could. fortunately for me, the accident had been seen from the ship, and another boat was coming to our assistance. it's a wonder the savage whale didn't attack her, but probably he had had enough of it, while the harpoons in his back must have troubled him not a little. i was soon picked up, and two others were found floating, but the rest of the boat's crew had either sunk or been crunched to death between the whale's jaws. he had been watched from the ship, which made sail in the direction he had taken. in the evening a spout was seen in the distance, the boat shoved off, and before nightfall we had the very whale which had attacked us in the morning, fast alongside with tackles hooked on, and the blanket pieces, as we called the blubber, being hoisted on board. "that trying-out is curious work to those who have never seen it. along the decks were the huge tripods, with fires blazing under them, and the crew standing round begrimed with smoke and oil, putting in the blubber, while others, as soon as the oil was extracted, were filling the casks and stowing them below. all night long the work went on, and there was no stopping till the huge monster had been stripped of his warm coat, and we had bailed the oil out of its big head, which had meantime been made fast to the stern. "`dollars are pleasant things to pick up, but i must find some pleasanter way for gathering them than this,' i said to myself. however, for more than two years i hadn't a chance of returning to callao. when at last the whaler put in there and landed me, i found that an earthquake had occurred, and the ground opened and swallowed up my father-in-law, and my wife with all her family. my wife's uncle, however, had escaped, and he received me very kindly, and more so that, as i had made a good voyage in the whaler, my pockets were full of dollars. they, however, went at last. "one day i was thinking what i should do next, when he told me that several vessels were fitting out in the harbour, to make a cruise among the islands of the pacific, just to pick up some labourers for the mines. `it's pretty hard work up in the mountains there, and most of our native peruvians who used to work in them have died out,' he observed. `there's a merchant in our city who is going to make a grand speculation, and as englishmen have shares in most of the mines, of course he is assisted with english capital, which our country could not supply. now if you like to ship on board one of these vessels, you will find the pay good, the voyage short, and but little risk.' "i thought to myself that i could not do better. i had served too long on board a slaver to think much of the work proposed. there was no difference that i could see between a black skin and a brown skin, and as i had assisted to carry some thousands of black men across to the east coast of america, i did not scruple to undertake to carry as many brown men as could be picked up to the west coast. to be sure, the natives of those bright and sunny islands, unaccustomed to work, might not find it very pleasant to be carried away to labour high up among the rocks and snows of the andes, but that was no business of mine. "i accordingly shipped on board one of several vessels fitted out by the enterprising merchant i spoke of. the `andorinha' carried thirty hands besides the captain and mate, and we had four guns and plenty of small arms. our orders were to proceed direct to the nearest islands, and to carry off as many of the inhabitants as we could get on board, but we were to try stratagem first, and by every means in our power induce them to, visit the ship. as soon as we had collected as many as we were likely to entice on board, we were to put them below and shut down the hatches, and sail away with them. "the plan was simple, and i thought it would succeed. should they object to make the voyage and attempt to regain their liberty, we had our arms, and were to use them, but we were advised not to kill more people than we could help, as each was likely to fetch fifty or sixty dollars on shore. "before sailing, the merchant who had fitted out our vessel came on board with several friends, and the crew being called on deck, he addressed the captain and us, telling us that we were about to engage in an enterprise likely to prove of great value to peru, but all was to be done by fair and honourable means. that we were to visit various islands, and to engage the industrious inhabitants to come and labour in our beautiful country for good wages, where they would also have the benefit of being instructed in the christian faith and become good catholics, to the great advantage of their souls. we were to treat them kindly and gently, and to give them the best of everything, so that they would not fail, by their gratitude, to show how highly they valued the service we should render them. "i could not help grinning when i heard this, knowing the way that matters were really to be managed. the speech was made just to hoodwink the authorities, and for the benefit of the merchant's friends, who, if they were not to profit by the adventure, might have found some fault with the way in which it was really to be carried on. "the `andorinha' was a large vessel, and we calculated that we could stow away five or six hundred people on board her. "seven other vessels being fitted out, we sailed together in company, our first destination being easter island, which lies in latitude degrees south and degrees west, some distance from the coast of chili. "light winds detained us, but at length we made the island, which is high and rocky and about thirty-six miles in circumference. the inhabitants, of the same race as the rest of the eastern pacific, and somewhat less savage than most of them, were living in villages, at peace among themselves. "as soon as our fleet came to an anchor, the boats were lowered and manned, and a strong party of us landed. the inhabitants, not liking our appearance, hid themselves in their houses. we immediately marched to the nearest village, which we surrounded, and entering house after house, dragged off the people, and sent them, with their hands bound behind their backs, to the boats. they did not attempt to resist, for as we had firearms and they had none, it would have been of no use. as soon as the boats were loaded they took them off to the vessel, and then returned for more. we, meantime, kept watching the village, so that no one could escape. having carried off all the inhabitants, men, women, and children--for even the youngest children were of some use to us--we proceeded to the next village. these we treated in the same way, leaving a few old men and women who were not worth carrying off. "before evening we had shipped nearly every human being we found on the island. none escaped us, for they had no mountains to fly to, and no caves or other places where they could hide themselves. we then collected all the pigs, poultry, and such other provisions as we could find, and sent them on board. "before returning to our vessels, we burned down a considerable number of the houses. "we stowed away all our captives on board two of our larger vessels, which at once returned to land them on the coast of chili, while we proceeded on our voyage. "the first land we made was one of the society islands, to the north of tahiti. we could not venture to that island itself, because the french were there, who might have objected to our carrying off the people. for the same reason we avoided the hervey, and other islands to the south, where we knew a number of english missionaries were stationed, and they might have complained of our proceedings, and taken means to put a stop to them. here, however, we hoped to make a good haul, and be away before we were discovered. "the schooner did not bring up, but stood off and on the land under english colours, while a boat was sent on shore to invite the natives on board. i went in her. as soon as we landed, i, with another man, who pretended to be the supercargo, proceeded to the house of the principal chief. it was a large hut, the framework formed of slight poles placed at intervals, bending somewhat inwards, and joined with horizontal poles of the same thickness secured to them, the whole being covered with a neat thatch. we found the chief reclining at his ease on one of several mats which covered the floor, with his wife and other females of the family seated near him. he had thrown aside his robe of native cloth, and was dressed only in his maro or girdle round his waist. we told him that the vessel in the offing was an english trader, and had on board a quantity of goods which were likely to suit him and his people, and we invited him, and as many as he liked to bring with him, to come and inspect them, hinting that the captain was of a generous disposition, and would be glad, at all events, to make them presents to gain their good will. we were in no hurry, we said, for payment, and would call again for the cocoa-nut oil which he might agree to collect for us. he seemed mightily pleased with the proposal, and promised to come off the next morning. we then went to the house of other chiefs and principal people, telling them the same tale. "in our rambles we saw a curious spectacle. having reached another district governed by a different chief, we found him seated on a mat in front of his house, while a number of people were approaching bearing hogs, and fowls, and breadfruit, and other articles of food. among them were three young women, whose bodies were swathed in a prodigious quantity of native cloth made out of the paper mulberry tree. this cloth and the food were being brought as presents to the chief, who had had, we understood, a child just born to him by one of his wives. how the girls could ever have got the cloth round them was a puzzle to me, but my companion, who had been on these islands and acted as interpreter, explained the matter. he said that the cloth being made ready, the girl lies down on the ground and rolls herself over and over, till the whole of the cloth is wound round her. she is then put on her feet, and taking the end over her shoulder, is able to proceed on her way. "the food having been presented, one of the damsels was led forward, when she lay down before the chief, and began to unroll herself, while one of his attendants gathered up the cloth; and thus she kept turning round and round till the whole of the cloth was unwound, and she remained in her own somewhat scanty garments. the next girl went through the same process. "we pretended to be delighted with the cloth, and told the chief that, if he would bring it on board, we would exchange it for all sorts of articles. the news of the rich cargo the vessel contained spread among the people, and large numbers promised to come off to us the following morning. "well content with the way we had managed matters, we returned on board. "the following day we took care to stand in towards the shore in good time, when a number of canoes full of people were seen coming off to the ship. as they arrived alongside we invited them on board, taking care that they brought no arms with them. we had a few things spread out in the hold, and as the people collected on board, the captain asked them to step down below to see them. when there, the pretended supercargo kept them engaged bargaining for the goods while others were arriving. having collected all who could be induced to come on board below, the supercargo slipped up by the fore hatchway, saying that he wished to consult the captain about the price of some of the articles. the vessel, meantime, had been edging off the land. our guns were loaded, and we had all armed ourselves in case the natives might make any resistance. all being ready, we suddenly clapped the hatches down upon our visitors, and had them prisoners. the people in some of the canoes suspecting that their friends were in danger, attempted to climb up the sides to their assistance. we had, therefore, to sink the canoes by throwing cold shot into them. as several other large canoes were approaching which might prove troublesome, we fired our guns at them and knocked them to pieces. this done, we made all sail, and stood away from the island. when the natives below found themselves entrapped, they, as may be supposed, created a considerable uproar, shouting and shrieking, and demanding to be set at liberty. the hatches, however, being fast closed down, they could not force their way out, and as they were without food or water, and the air was pretty close, we knew that they must soon come to their senses, and therefore took no heed of their cries, though it was necessary, of course, to keep watch over them, lest by chance they might make their way out. "when we had run the land out of sight, the fore hatch was partly lifted, and a few at a time were allowed to come on deck. they looked greatly astonished when gazing round to find that their native land was not to be seen. our interpreter then told them that, if they behaved themselves, things would go well with them; but if not, they must expect rough treatment. the first which had come up had their hands lashed behind them, and were sent aft; and the rest, as they appeared on deck, were treated in the same manner. two or three, from the hot air and the struggles they had made, had lost their lives; but that mattered little, considering the number we had secured. "having cleaned and fumigated the hold, they were again sent below, and we stood for another island. "of course the people complained of the way they had been treated; some were weeping, others abusing us, while some refused to take the food we offered them. they were told, however, that if they would not eat they should be flogged, for we were not going to allow them to starve themselves to death. in time we got them into pretty good order. as it would not do for them to give way to despair, they were assured that, after working two or three years in the country to which we were taking them, if they were industrious and behaved themselves, and consented to become good catholics, they would be sent back to their native island much the richer and happier for the trip. i don't know if they believed us; they might possibly have had doubts about the matter. these people had had missionaries among them, and most of them were christians; but the french had sent the missionaries away, and they had become somewhat slack in their religion. now, however, in their trouble they began to pray again, and it was curious to hear them singing, and praying, and repeating parts of the bible which they had learned by heart. our interpreter said it made him somewhat uncomfortable; but the captain laughed at him, and told him that he must not let such notions trouble him, and that at best they were only heretics, and would now have the chance of becoming real christians. "we touched at several other islands in the neighbourhood, from which canoes full of natives came off towards us to learn who we were, and what we wanted. one canoe came alongside with an old chief, who inquired eagerly whether we had a missionary on board, as he was anxiously looking out for one who had promised to come and teach him and his people to be christians. the captain wanted the supercargo to pass as the expected missionary, but he declined, saying he could not bring his conscience to do it. the captain replied that the missionary was sick below, but that if the chief and his followers would come up the side, they should see him in the cabin. "the savages looked very much surprised when they came on deck, to find themselves pinioned and handed down below. two of them before they were secured, attempted to leap overboard. one was caught and the other was shot, their canoe being sunk alongside that she might not drift on shore and tell tales. the people in some of the other canoes which came off further on were more wary, and we had to use a great deal of persuasion to induce them to trust us. at last, we got one canoe full of natives to come near us. as she approached on the port side, we had two of our boats lowered and manned ready on the starboard side. when, after having in vain tried to get the people on deck, the boats pulled round, and though the savages shoved off, we were too quick for them. there was a fierce struggle, two or three men were knocked overboard, but we captured the rest and quickly had them below hatches, while their canoes, as usual, were sent to the bottom. "we were not always so successful. three canoes, one day, were coming off to us, and were nearly up to the schooner, when they took alarm. as the captain did not wish to lose them, he ordered the guns to be fired, which sank two of them, when the boats which were ready pulled away and picked up most of the people, excepting two or three who had been killed by the shot. the third canoe escaped, and we knew after this, there was not much chance of getting any more canoes to come off to us from that island. "from this place we sailed away for several days, till we sighted a large coral island, with a lagoon in the centre, and numerous cocoa-nut trees growing along the shore. we judged from this that it was inhabited. we stood close in on the lee side, till we could distinguish some low huts scattered about under the trees, and a considerable number of natives scampering along the shore. they were a savage-looking people, without a stitch of clothing, except belts round their waists, and bracelets and shells on their arms and legs, their hair, as they ran, streaming in the wind, while they shook their long thin lances at us. as they had no canoes, we could not get them to come off to the vessel. it was therefore necessary for us to land and try and catch some of them. they looked so fierce and determined that we expected they would give us more trouble than the inhabitants of easter island had done. two boats well armed were, however, sent on shore to make the attempt. we were to proceed by fair means and to offer them trinkets, knives, and glasses, and handkerchiefs. if they would not be induced to trust us, we were to surround their village, and catch as many alive as we could. "as we pulled in for the shore, a party of the savages, led by an old chief, came leaping, shouting, and shrieking, and brandishing their spears towards us. the chief was a terrible-looking old fellow, taller than any of the rest, with high cheek bones, his hair and beard of long grey hair plaited and twisted together, hanging from his head and around his mouth like so many rats' tails. his companions imitated his example, and there seemed but little chance of our being able to get hold of any of them by peaceable means. we had our muskets ready to bring them down should they come too near us. we held up the trinkets, and handkerchiefs, and looking-glasses to try to make them understand that we wished to be friendly, but it was of no use; they only shrieked the louder and leapt the higher, and told us to be off, as they did not want us or our goods. however, we remained steady, and they did not venture nearer. "as our object was to catch them alive, dead savages being of no use to us, we persevered. having placed several of the articles on the ground, we quietly retired to a distance, and at last we saw two or three of the younger men approach and take the things up. they seemed well pleased with them, and showed them to the rest. on this, we put some more on the ground and again retired, then three of our men putting their muskets on the ground advanced towards the savages, being well covered by the rest of us, and putting out their hands, we presented at the same time several more articles. by these means we began to gain their confidence. we then made them understand that all we wanted was a few cocoa-nuts, and that every man who brought one should be amply paid. in this way after we had waited quietly on the beach, twenty young fellows were persuaded to put themselves within our reach, and to sit down in a circle near the boats. the old chief all the time kept shouting to them, but they did not appear to heed him. while one party with loaded muskets advanced towards the rest of the natives, we suddenly set upon the lads who had brought us the cocoa-nuts, knocked them over, had their arms pinioned, and they were carried to the boats before even their astonished countrymen could attempt to come to the rescue. at last, led by the old chief, the former made a dash at our men who remained, when several were of necessity shot down, the rest taking to flight, and we shoved off well content with having captured twenty stout young fellows, who were likely to prove serviceable labourers at the mines. "having at length got a full cargo, we returned to easter island, where we landed our captives. there they were to remain under a strong guard till carried away by smaller vessels and landed on different parts of the coast of peru. we meantime sailed for the westward. "during the trip we occasionally fell in with our former consorts, engaged in the same business, and we found that they had succeeded in capturing a number of natives from different islands much in the same way that we had done. some were enticed on board by stratagem, others taken by force. no one engaged in the business was particular as to what means were employed, provided they could succeed in the enterprise. one vessel had taken a whole cargo off one single island, known as high island, the crew having landed and surrounded the villages one after another, shooting down all who resisted. "the wealthy merchant who had fitted out the vessel must have been highly satisfied, as must also the english shareholders who advanced him the money. possibly they may or may not have been fully aware of the means employed to ensure success. "whether these people, accustomed to an easy and luxurious life on their sunny islands, would ultimately prove useful labourers in the dark mines, and be able to carry loads of ore down the steep, rocky sides of the mountains, i am not prepared to say. our business was to catch them--that of the merchant to sell them; while the overseers of the mines had to see to the rest. if they died from hard work that was their look out. "at length we arrived off niue, or savage island, to which captain cook gave that name because the inhabitants were then and for many years afterwards fierce and barbarous in the extreme. missionaries, both native and english, i had heard say, had gone among them, and the people had all become christians and civilised. we could see that a well-made road ran round the island, and at intervals there were white-washed cottages, with gardens full of flowers, and neat churches peeping out among the trees. "`these people,' the captain observed, `if we could get hold of them, were likely to prove mild and submissive, and of far more value than the savages we had taken from some of the other islands.' it was necessary, however, to be cautious, or they might have suspected our intentions. "we hove-to off the island, and the supercargo going on shore inquired for the english missionary. we found that his residence was on the other side, and we therefore judged that this would be a good place to carry on our operations. the supercargo, pretending that he was a friend of the missionary, invited as many as were inclined to come off to the vessel, saying that he had a present for the missionary and a few trifles for the chiefs, and that he should also be glad to trade with them for any articles they might produce. "meantime the other boats were in readiness with arms stowed away out of sight. a large number of canoes at once paddled off to us, some containing ten, others four or five natives each. the people came on board without hesitation, and while the captain kept them amused, showing some cases which he said contained the presents for the missionary and chiefs, bargaining for the few articles they had brought with them, the boats pushed away rapidly for the shore. a large number of people were collected on the beach, but even when they saw the boats coming, not observing any arms in the hands of the men, they were in no way alarmed. their suspicions did not appear to be aroused, even when our men formed on the shore. "keeping our weapons as much as possible concealed, we marched a little way inland, then suddenly wheeling, with a loud shout rushed down upon the natives. they seemed utterly paralysed, and though some few fled, the greater number stared at us as if wondering what we were next going to do. we did not leave them long in doubt, but pressing round them, tripped them over, bound their arms, and in a short time made sixty or more prisoners. they offered little or no resistance, and we soon had all we had caught safely in the boat. as we pulled towards the vessel we saw several canoes making for the shore, but with only two or three people in each, while her guns were playing on a few others which were attempting to escape. we picked up several men who had jumped overboard, and when we got alongside we found that fully a hundred had been secured. altogether we got a hundred and sixty people from that island alone; some were old men, but most of them were young and active. they were all neatly dressed in shirts and trousers, and looked very intelligent indeed; there was not one among them who could not read in his native tongue, and they all said that they were christians. our supercargo told them that so were we, but that we were real ones, while they, having only learned from the missionaries, were heretics. "as they might have proved troublesome, we clapped them all down below, and kept the hatches on them. "wishing to capture more people from the same island, we immediately made sail, and stood along the coast, hoping to entice others on board before the news of what had occurred had spread. we heard our prisoners talking together, and soon they began knocking at the hatches, and under the deck, and on the sides, shrieking to be let out, and entreating us to put them again on shore. two of our men were stationed at the hatchway ready to shoot any who might break out. still the people below continued to make so much noise that the captain and mate became enraged, and, with two other men, went below armed with boats' stretchers, and began to lay about them right and left, to bring the people to order. at last they were quiet, and we hoped that they had learned a lesson they would not forget. in the evening we heard them, instead of shouting and shrieking to be let out, singing hymns and praying. looking down into the hold, there we saw them all kneeling together as if in prayer; then an old man among them got up, and while they sat round him he began to speak to them, and the supercargo, who understood their language, said he was preaching; and when he had finished he stretched out his hands, and prayed to god to bless them. after that they were quiet enough, and during the night gave us no further trouble. "the next morning at daylight we stood in to another part of the coast. we saw several canoes quietly engaged in fishing, and so we guessed that the alarm had not spread thus far. we accordingly stood close in, when several canoes came off to us. the captain, as usual, invited the people on board. some of them spoke english, which the captain did not understand, and i was not inclined to answer them. as they might have been alarmed had they seen armed men at the hatchway, those who had been stationed there were withdrawn. the new arrivals spoke rather loudly to each other; their voices were heard by their countrymen below, who, making a sudden rush at the fore hatch, forced it off and sprang upon deck. "the alarm was given immediately; those who had last come, as well as our captives, began to leap overboard. we all rushed upon them, knocked those we could catch down, and shut close the hatchway. the captain then ordered us to fire on the people in the water swimming for the shore, while the boats were manned and sent in pursuit of the fugitives. two or three were hit, some sank, and only a few succeeded in gaining one of the canoes; the rest were all retaken. in the canoe which escaped was one young man who was shot just as he got into it: his companions, however, managed to paddle off. those who had been retaken were well beaten, and forced down below. "as there was no use remaining longer at savage island, we sailed for samoa. "we avoided the principal harbours, and kept cruising along the coast, picking up several canoes which came off to us. occasionally we went on shore to obtain water and vegetables, always being on our guard lest our business might be suspected, and we ourselves entrapped. at one place where we landed for this purpose, we found the natives under an old warrior chief preparing to attack a neighbouring tribe. `this is just the opportunity for us,' observed our supercargo; `if we help the old chief, we may bargain that we are to have all the prisoners.' the supercargo on this began to talk to the chief about the arms and men we possessed, and to hint that we might possibly be persuaded to assist him in conquering his enemies. the old chief at once took the bait, and promised us anything we might ask if we would assist him. the supercargo replied that our captain would be very moderate in his demands, and that we should be content if we might have all the prisoners. we agreed to come on shore with ten men to help him. the captain, however, had arranged to send all the boats, which were to keep in the rear of the enemy, and, as soon as the battle began, the crews were to land, and carry off as many warriors as they could lay hands on. "early the next morning we landed with our muskets, and found the army drawn up for battle. the warriors were armed with spears and short clubs, and their hair dressed up in the strangest fashion, and stuck full of feathers. they were almost naked, with the exception of kilts round their waists. we kept in the rear, ready to advance when called upon to act, and the warriors marched forward, singing songs and shouting their war-cries. in a short time they came in front of the enemy, who were seen drawn up in a wood. both parties halted and began abusing each other, our friends telling their enemies that they were women, and would soon run away; and warning them that they only came to be killed, if they dared to advance further. after this style of compliment had been exchanged for some time, they rushed towards each other grinning and making faces, when they once more halted, and began throwing their spears. we on this advanced, and fired a volley, which threw them into the greatest confusion. it was evidently totally unexpected, and, before they could recover, our friends rushed in on them, speared some and made others prisoners. we, meantime, were loading, and, having done so, advanced and fired a second volley. the enemy, though brave fellows, began to fly, when our friends dashed in among them, and, with our assistance, a large number were captured. many of those who escaped were seized by the crews of the boats, and at once dragged off. the victory was complete, and the old chief at once handed over to us all the prisoners he had taken. this was an advantage to them, for they would otherwise have been killed. "by this means we collected about forty men, whom we carried at once on board. "`we may as well have some of our friends,' observed the supercargo, and he accordingly returned on shore to invite the old chief, and as many people as he chose to bring off to visit the ship, and receive some presents which he was told we had prepared for him. the chief looked highly pleased, and much to the satisfaction of the supercargo, accepted his polite invitation. "next morning the chief and several people came alongside. the chief said he desired to thank us for the service we had rendered him, and to present us with some cocoa-nut oil and rolls of cloth which would be prepared in a day or two if we would wait for them. "the captain assured him of his friendship, and begged him to accept some presents in return for those he intended to make, and invited him and several of his principal attendants into the cabin to receive them, while his people were asked by the crew to go down forward. no sooner were our guests below than they were seized and lashed hand and foot before they could give the alarm to those who remained on deck. all hands then rushed on deck, and quickly knocked down the greater number of those who were collected there; a few uttering loud cries of terror leapt overboard, while those in the canoes, suspecting that something was wrong, shoved off, and began to paddle away towards the shore. our shot sent after them caused such alarm that several of the canoes returned, others escaped, two or three were knocked to pieces, and some of the people in them drowned. "we considered this a good haul, but we had some difficulty in keeping order between the new comers and their enemies whom we had before captured; by going among them, however, with our clubs, and showing them that we would stand no nonsense, we brought them into order. again making sail, we continued our course along the coast, here and there capturing canoes, and occasionally landing and carrying off a few people, though we were not again so successful as in the case i have described. "in one small canoe we found a portuguese with two samoaians; the latter we put below hatches, but the captain was afraid of detaining the white man, who declined joining us, and allowed him to make the best of his way to shore. "we found two of our consorts cruising off this coast, but in a short time the suspicions of the people on shore were aroused, and we therefore left it and proceeded on to visit certain groups of islands lying or degrees south of the equator. from one of these islands we got nearly a hundred people, and another vessel which followed us captured several more, though most of the natives as soon as a sail hove in sight ran off from the coast. "by various means, from one island or another, we captured fifty or sixty more, till at length with a full cargo we steered eastward to put them on shore, as before, on easter island. "some disagreeable news met us here. we heard that the french authorities at tahiti were very indignant at our having carried off the natives of islands under their protection, and that they had sent out several cruisers to intercept us. one of our vessels, the `mercedes,' had been seized with a hundred and fifty natives on board. the vessel had been condemned and sold, the captain sentenced to five years' penal servitude, and the supercargo to ten. besides her four or five other vessels had been captured and carried into tahiti, where they were detained. one, having been taken without any natives, was allowed to return to callao after she had been compelled to dispose of all her rice and other provisions, so as to make it impossible for her to proceed on her voyage. besides this, the french governor of tahiti had sent to the peruvian government demanding that every native who had been taken from islands under french protection should be delivered up, and heavy damages paid for any who might be missing. however, as these formed but a very small number of the natives captured, the matter in itself was not of much consequence. the fear was that not only the french but the english might send out cruisers and interfere in all directions with our proceedings. the profit, however, and the demand for labour was so great, that in spite of the difficulties to be encountered, the merchant i spoke of resolved to persevere in the undertaking, although it would be necessary to use even greater precautions than before. "this first voyage will give you an idea of two or three others which i made shortly afterwards, when we collected our passengers much in the same way as before, though we took care only to visit islands the least frequented by european vessels, so that our proceedings might be kept as secret as possible. "ill luck, however, at length set against us. some of our vessels were wrecked, the natives rose and murdered the crew of one, the french captured several more, and the peruvian government, compelled to listen to the complaints which were made, interfered, and considerable difficulties were thrown in the way of landing the islanders. the `andorinha,' after her long career of success, was driven on a coral reef, when the captain and supercargo and most of the crew perished. i was washed on shore, more dead than alive. fortunately for me, it was near a village of christian natives, one of whom found me on the beach, and carried me to his hut, and fed and clothed me, and took care of me till i recovered. he knew the character of the vessel, for we had some time before carried off several natives from that very island, but i told him that i was an englishman, and compelled by the spaniards to remain on board. he replied that it mattered not who i was or what i had been about, that i was suffering and in distress, and that his religion taught him to feed and clothe the hungry and naked, and to do good to his enemies--that as long as i chose i might remain, and that if i wished to go i might depart in peace. i was sure he did not believe the account i gave of myself, and i own i did not feel as comfortable as i should have liked. he and his family had prayers and sang hymns morning and evening; and on sunday, as well as on other days in the week, they attended a large chapel, where a native missionary preached. the other people in the village did the same. all this did not suit me, and i determined to get away as soon as i had the chance. no vessel appearing, however, i told my host that i should like to see other parts of his island, and that i would make a trip through it. he replied that i might do as i wished, but that as some of the natives were heathens or `devil's men,' as he called them, they might not treat me well. i answered that i would run the risk of that, and as to their being heathens, that was all the same to me. it only, indeed, made me the more eager to be among them, as i thought i should have greater liberty than with my psalm-singing friends. i accordingly walked away with a stick in my hand, for i had no clothes except those on my back. wherever i went the natives received me kindly, and gave me such food as i wanted. "after travelling some days, i found myself in a village where there was no church and no school, and the people did not trouble themselves much about clothing. i guessed by this that they were heathens. the chief, a young man, invited me to stop with him, and assist him in his battles. i soon showed him that i was a good hand with a musket, and he remarked that before long the time might come when i could use it. he was just then, however, with some of his friends, going to catch pigeons in the woods. we had first a grand kava feast, the drink they make from certain roots, which they first chew in their mouths. each of the young men had several trained pigeons, which are taught to fly round and round in the air at the end of a long string, and to come back to their masters when called. each man had, besides, a small net fixed to the end of a bamboo forty feet in length. on arriving at the wood a large circle was cleared of bush, and a wall of stones built round it. each sportsman had also a small arbour of boughs erected, in which he could sit hidden just outside the wall. in front of him sat his pigeon on a perch stuck in the ground, while by his side rested his net, ready to be raised in a moment. "when all was prepared, the decoy birds were let fly as far as the string, forty or fifty feet in length, would allow them, when they circled round and round, and to and fro, over the open ground. the wild birds, on seeing them, collected from all quarters to learn what they were about. the sportsmen then drew down their birds, when, as soon as the wild birds came near enough, they raised their nets, and seldom failed to capture one of the wild pigeons. in an instant the bird was brought down. bird after bird was caught in the same manner. before commencing the game, stakes were put in, and he who caught the greatest number of pigeons won them. "we remained nearly a month engaged in this sport, spending the morning in bird-catching, and the evening in feasting. i tried my hand at it, but though, after a few days' practice, i managed to catch several birds, i did not succeed as well as the young chiefs. this was more to my interest, for had i beat them, perhaps they might have become jealous of me. "altogether, this sort of life suited me much better than that which i led with the christian natives. they were a hospitable sort of people, and i had as much liberty as i could wish for. "among other curious things i observed while i was among them, was the way they manufactured the cloth with which they make their dresses. they used the bark of the paper mulberry tree. the young tree is first cut down, and the bark stripped off; it is then steeped in water for a couple of days, when the inner bark is separated from the coarse outer bark. this is then beaten until it becomes as thin as silver-paper, and much increased in size. even then it is scarcely a foot wide; but the edges are overlapped, and stuck together with arrow-root melted in water. it is then again beaten till all the parts are completely joined. pieces are thus made of many yards in length, such as i saw during my first visit to these islands. they are afterwards dyed of various colours, red, brown, and yellow, and patterns are put on with a sort of stamp. "though the heathen natives wore very few clothes generally, they at times dressed up in robes formed of the cloth i have described, which has a very handsome appearance. "i might tell you a good deal more about these people. i had made up my mind to remain among them; but people, as you know, don't do always what they intend. such was my case in the present instance, as you shall hear. but pass the grog-bottle. i must wet my whistle before i move along." i was almost sick with listening to the account of the atrocities witnessed if not perpetrated by the old ruffian, our host, and was inclined to stop him, but his tongue once set going that was more than i could do, and so on he went again. chapter three. "one day a brig brought up in the harbour near which i happened to be staying, and the crew came on shore. she belonged to sydney, new south wales, and as they talked to me about that place i was seized with a fancy to go there. fearing that the chief would not let me get away, i told him that i was just going on board to pay my countrymen a visit. i kept below during the remainder of the day, and next morning the brig got under weigh, and stood out of the harbour. she was the `tickler,' engaged in the sandal-wood trade, and had still several places to visit to complete her cargo, which she was obliged to pick up here and there, and often had a hard job to get it. the captain was in no way particular how he managed. i was on board for some months and saw some curious things done. "the wood mostly grows on the western islands, north and south of the line. on one occasion we came off a place where the captain understood it was to be procured from the mountains, some way in the interior. we managed to entice the chief of the district on board by promising him some presents, if he would come and fetch them. as soon as we had got him, the captain told his people that unless they would bring twelve boats' loads of sandal-wood off he would carry him away as a prisoner. the savages exclaimed that the white men were very cruel and unjust, but the captain did not mind that, as they were only savages, do you see; and as they did not wish to lose their chief, they were obliged to comply. the captain told him that it he didn't behave himself and hold his tongue, he would double the quantity. the chief, seeing that the captain was in earnest, ordered his people to go and fetch the wood, when the whole neighbourhood had to turn out and cut it. in the course of two or three days it was brought on board. "having got the wood we sailed away to another place. these savages are content with curious articles in exchange for their wood. instead of money the brig had on board a quantity of small white shells, the teeth of sharks and other animals, as also pigs, cats, and goats. so eager are they to possess these animals that they would sometimes give a ton of sandal-wood for a goat or cat. one day a native came on board with a small quantity of sandal-wood when our shells had run short. the mate offered him some tobacco, which he did not want. he got angry and said he must have a shell, when the mate without more ado pulled out his revolver: it went off, and the native was shot dead. the body was thrown overboard, and the sandal-wood remained with us, though the man's friends wanted payment for it. the captain told the mate he should not have been so careless as to shoot the man, and then thought no more about the matter. "our object, however, being to get sandal-wood, the captain cared little as to the means. the lazy islanders in some places, where it grew abundantly, would not take the trouble of cutting it, so the captain devised a plan for obtaining what he wanted. we visited for this purpose an island where the natives were friendly with the white men, and enticed a number on board. when we had got them the captain told them that he would give them their liberty if they would go on shore at a place to which he would take them, and cut as much sandal-wood as he wanted. back we sailed to the island where the sandal-wood grew. we then took them on shore, and landing with a strong party of armed men, guarded them while they cut the wood, which the inhabitants seemed to object to their doing. they worked well, for they were anxious to go back to their own island. we had to shoot a few of the inhabitants who came too close to us with their spears and clubs, but they were savage black fellows, and terrible cannibals, and so to my mind there was no great harm in shooting them. "the wood was cut and carried down by our natives to the boats. we had now got pretty well as much as the brig would carry, but the captain told them to go back and cut more. they said they were afraid, lest the black fellows should kill them. the captain answered that that was their look out, and that if they wanted their liberty the wood must be cut. when we had got it into the boats we returned to the brig; the captain then ordered the anchor to be hove up, saying that he could not spare time to go back to the island from which the natives had come, and that he had fulfilled his contract by giving them their liberty and leaving them on shore. "as we sailed out of the harbour, we saw some of them running down to the beach, and waving their hands to us, with the black fellows at their heels. they were soon overtaken, and one after the other were knocked over by the clubs of the savages, who, to my belief, ate the whole of them; for the inhabitants of that island were well known, as i have said, to be fearful cannibals. "now, perhaps some people may think that the captain of the `tickler' didn't behave quite straightforward in the matter; but that's no business of mine. what he had to do was to get a shipload of sandal-wood as cheaply as he could, and he did his best to save expense. to be sure, others who came after us might have suffered, because the savages were not very likely to trust them. we ourselves were nearly cut off on one occasion, when visiting a large island called new caledonia. though we had seen a number of natives gathering on the coast, we pulled in without fear, supposing that their clubs and spears could not reach us, and a volley of small arms would soon put them to flight. as we pulled on we heard them shouting to us, and shrieking loudly. they were a jet-black, fine race of fellows. we could see that some of them had long spears in their hands, but others seemed to be unarmed. suddenly, however, down there came upon us a thick shower of stones, wounding two or three of our number, which was immediately followed by a whole flight of spears, when more of us were wounded, while several stuck in the boat. the order was given to pull round; and glad enough we were to get out of their reach. "i afterwards heard that the natives of these islands use a sling, not only for throwing stones, which they can send to a great distance, but for casting their spears, which, as we found, far as they were off, came rattling down upon us in a very unpleasant manner. "one of our men was killed. when at a safe distance we fired two or three volleys in return, and probably killed some of them; but they quickly got under cover. we then once more pulled in, thinking that they had taken to flight; but they were up again in an instant, and the whole shore appeared lined with warriors. we therefore came to the conclusion, that instead of carrying them off as labourers, they were more likely to kill and eat us, should we land on their island. we pulled away and steered for another place, where we expected to find the natives more peaceably disposed or more easily captured. "i afterwards heard that several vessels went there, some of which had the crews of their boats murdered on going on shore, while in two or three cases the vessels themselves were attacked, and every one on board put to death. all i can say is, that whatever people may think of our doings, we were not worse than others. i heard of several things which will prove this. among others, a sandal-wood trader had called at the island of mare, when three young men swam off to her, wishing to trade on their own account. they were bargaining with the captain, who offered to give them less than they wanted for their sandal-wood, which they had piled up on shore, ready to embark. they grew angry, and declared that they would keep their sandal-wood. on this, without more ado, he drew out his revolver and shot two of them dead on the deck; the other leaped overboard, and the captain ordered the crew to fire at him. he had got some distance, when a shot struck him, and he sank. the captain then sent a boat on shore, and brought away the sandal-wood. another captain was on a sandal-wood cruise, when he put in not far from erromanga, where he found the people at war with another tribe some distance round the coast. as abundance of sandal-wood grew on the hills in the distance, he tried to persuade them to bring him a supply down to the beach. they replied that they could not do so then, as they were engaged in war, when he told them that if they would supply him with the wood, he would go and conquer their enemies for them. the people thought this a fine thing, and agreed to the proposal. so the vessel went round the coast, to where the opposing tribe resided. if he had began to fire away at once on them, they would have escaped into the woods, and he probably would not have caught a man. he therefore pretended to be very friendly, and managed to entice a number on board. when he had got them, his crew set upon them, and killed some on deck, and shot others who had leaped overboard and were trying to make their escape. one was taken alive, and another desperately wounded. having thrown the dead bodies overboard, he sailed back with the living prisoner and the other man, who soon died, to his friends. by this time they had the sandal-wood ready, so he made over the living and dead prisoners into their hands, and received the sandal-wood in return. as the people were cannibals, it was easy to guess what they did with their prisoners. "it cannot be said that we did anything worse than this; but, bless you, i might tell you a hundred other things which either we did or i heard of done by sandal-wood traders in those parts. i was not over particular, so didn't mind, but i wanted the voyage to be over, that i might get to sydney, and have a spree on shore. "we got there at last, and our cargo realised a large profit, as the price was known to be up at the time in the china market, for which it was destined. "i hadn't been there long, before i found my pockets pretty well cleaned out of cash, and had to think of what i should do next. "i was sitting one day in a grog shop near the harbour, where i was allowed to run up a score though my last shilling was spent, and i didn't exactly know how i was to pay for it, when somehow or other i lost my senses. i might have been asleep, or i might have been drunk. when i came to myself, i was in the fore peak of a small vessel, and when i went on deck i found that we were out of sight of land. it was not the first time that such a thing had happened to me, and so i was not going to make a fuss about it. i looked round on my new shipmates, who were about as rough a lot as i ever set eyes on; may be i was not very different from them, but we hadn't a looking-glass on board that craft, so, do you see, i was not able to judge. i asked the name of the craft, where we were bound for, and the object of the voyage. "my shipmates laughed. "`where were you raised: you don't look as green as you would wish to make us fancy,' said one without answering my question. "`i was raised in a country where they grow bull-dogs, which are more apt to bite than to bark,' i growled out. `when i ask a question i expect a civil answer. i was at sea, and crossed the line a dozen times while most of you were still sucking pap, and so you will understand that though i don't exactly know how i came to be aboard this craft, you had better not try to pass off your tricks on me.' "i thought this would have made them bowse on the slack of their jaw-tackles, but they were banded together, and fancied they could say what they liked to me. one young fellow only, bill harding was his name, i found stood aloof from them, and cried out that it was a shame to attack an old fellow like me, though i might have got hocussed and shipped on board without knowing it. on that one of them, jos noakes they called him, goes up to bill, and begins blackguarding him. he stood as cool as a cucumber, with a smile on his good-looking face. he was the only one among the lot who was not as ugly as sin. "says bill to jos, `you had better not. i have floored many a man who could beat you with his little finger, and so, jos, to my mind, you will get the worst of it.' "i pulled out my pipe and lighted it, for, d'ye see, there's nothing like a bit of baccy for keeping a man cool, and cool i wanted to be just then. this showed them more than anything else what i was made of. "there bill stood waiting to see what jos would do, while the rest gathered round edging jos on. jos doubled his fists, getting nearer and nearer to bill, and at last made a hit at him. in a moment bill's arms were unfolded, and he struck out and caught jos's ugly face a blow which sent him reeling backwards, till he lay kicking like a turtle on his back. "`sarve you right, jos,' cried out several voices, and now most of the crew seemed to side with bill. "jos had had enough of it, and sneaked below to bathe his jaws in water. "i shook bill by the hand and thanked him, and we were friends ever afterwards. "bill told me that the craft i had so curiously found myself aboard was the `catfish,' and that she was on a voyage round the islands to pick up sandal-wood, cocoa-nut oil, or pearls, which he told me were to be found among some of the low-lying coral islands to the eastward. "`i shall like well enough to go after pearls,' i observed; `for i know their value and the price people on shore will give for them.' "`that made me ship on board the "catfish,"' said bill. `i remember my mother used to wear such things in her hair, and that a small string of them was worth some hundred pounds, and i thought that if i could get a few i should be a rich man, and be able to go back to old england, for i am pretty well sick of this sort of life, though, mate, as you know, when a man is down in the world it's a hard job to get up again.' "`then i suppose, bill, from what you say, you are a gentleman's son, and you have come out to these parts to make your fortune,' i remarked. "`yes, i am well born, and might have been very different from what i am,' he answered with a sigh. `but i came away to sea because i was a wild scamp, and no one could make anything of me at home. however, if i can get hold of a few of those pearls, so as to start fair, i intend to turn over a new leaf, and go back to my friends, provided i can do so with a good coat on my back, and not like the ragged beggar i have been of late. i have got a few articles to trade with, and i shipped on condition that i should do what i liked with them.' "`i'll help you, my lad, as far as i can,' said i, for i had taken a fancy to bill, who might have been all he said of himself. to my notion he was as brave and warm-hearted a fellow as ever stepped. "i have already described the various ways the sandal-wood traders manage to obtain their cargoes. our captain was in no degree more particular than most of them, and played a few odd tricks among the natives to get what he wanted. on one occasion we got a chief on board, and the captain told him that he must make his people cut a dozen boat-loads of sandal-wood, or we would carry him away as a prisoner to sydney. the chief refused, and declared that the wood was not to be got. on this the captain called two or three of his people on board, and then had him triced up and gave him a dozen, and told him that he should have it every morning if the wood was not forthcoming. still the savage held out, and he was heard to tell his people not to bring any. "next morning some of his people came off, when, as they brought no wood, preparations were made to give him another dozen. on seeing this his courage gave way, and he told his people to go back and get the wood. he got his dozen though, for the captain was a man to keep his word on those sort of matters. "two or three boat-loads came off that very evening, and in a couple of days all the captain asked for was supplied. the chief was then set at liberty, and told to go about his business. "the captain observed that he was doing his duty to his owners, and getting a cargo in the cheapest way he could; he seemed, indeed, to pride himself on his cleverness. "as sandal-wood was becoming scarce in most of the islands, we took on board, whenever we had the opportunity, as many casks of cocoa-nut oil as we could collect; but pearls were our chief object, and we continued our voyage till we reached the island i mentioned. "the natives were said to be friendly to white men, and therefore we had no fear of them. they had a few pearls already, which the captain took in exchange for some of the beads, cutlery, looking-glasses, and trinkets we had brought to trade with. he then told the natives that they must go off in their canoes to the reef where the pearl-oysters were to be found, and be quick in bringing him as many as he wanted, threatening them if they were not sharp about it he would carry off their chiefs, cut down their cocoa-nut trees, and leave their wives and children to starve. this made them all alive, though they grumbled a little, and every evening they returned bringing a fair supply of shells. they dared not refuse to work, seeing that they had no muskets; and as their island was perfectly flat, they had no place to fly to and hide themselves, so that by landing a few of our men we could, if we had wished, have burned their huts, cut down their trees, and have carried off as many of them as we wanted. "one day when they had brought fewer shells than usual, the captain sent a party of us on shore, and having caught two of their chiefs, we brought them on board, and kept them in irons, telling them that we should carry them away unless their people would stir themselves. "next day a double quantity was brought on board. the captain seemed mightily pleased. "`now, my boys, this shows what you can do,' he said, in the lingo the savages spoke. `i am going to make a cruise to some other islands not far off, and i shall take your chiefs with me. if, when i come back, you have not got as many pearls as i want,' and he told them the quantity he should require, `up go your chiefs to our yard-arms.' "i don't mean that he said this in as many words, but it was what he wished the people to understand. "the other islands we visited could supply us only with cocoa-nut oil, and though we had a quarrel now and then about it, we generally managed to get what we wanted at the price we chose to give. "on our return we found the supply of shells the captain had ordered. "i thought that he would have allowed the chiefs to go on shore, but he was too deep a hand for that. he had found the plan answer so well that he determined to have some more pearls before sailing, so he pretended that the natives had not brought him enough, and told them that they must go off and collect more. they grumbled, declaring that they would do no such thing, and demanded their chiefs back. "`you shall have them,' he answered, `but they shall swing at our yard-arms first,' and he ordered the ropes to be rove to hang them by. "the chiefs were then brought on deck. they did not look much like chiefs, half-starved and dirty as they were, for they had been kept below during the voyage for fear of their jumping overboard, and making their escape. the natives set up a loud yell when they saw them, and made as if they would attack us, and try to rescue them. on this the captain ordered us to present our muskets, and fire if they approached. bill was the only person who refused to obey, declaring that it was a shame, and that he would sooner let the natives kill us than shoot one of them. the captain, hearing this, threatened to trice him up with the chiefs, and to my mind he meant what he said. the natives, however, thought better of it, and paddled off to try to get more pearls. "`it's lucky for you, bill, that the savages played us no tricks; but i'll not forget you, my lad,' exclaimed the captain, shaking his fist at him. "in a couple of days the natives appeared paddling towards us. they kept, however, at a distance, and one canoe only with three men in her came alongside, bringing a few pearls. they said they had got more, but they had resolved to throw them into the sea unless their chiefs were first delivered up to them. "the captain grinned at this, and replied that they should have one chief, and when the pearls were brought they should have the other. the natives after talking a long time were obliged to comply. the chiefs embraced; they might have suspected that the one who remained would run a great chance of swinging at the yardarm, notwithstanding the captain's promise. at last he told the younger of the two that he might go, thinking, probably, that he was of less consequence than the other. the poor fellow was lowered into the canoe, and away his countrymen paddled to the shore. "i thought that the elder man looked well pleased at the escape of his companion, as he squatted down on deck, resting his head on his hands, though he looked up every now and then at the rope hanging from the yardarm, as if he expected to be dangling from it before long. "the same canoe returned in a couple of hours, bringing a further supply of pearls, while the rest of the natives were seen gathering in the distance. "perhaps the captain thought that if he did not deliver up the chief-- driven to desperation, they might attack the vessel, and that though many might have been killed, we should not have got off scathless. the natives were indeed in great numbers advancing closer and closer. he therefore told the chief he might go. the old man rose, and with the help of his countrymen got into the canoe, which immediately paddled away towards the rest, advancing rapidly to meet him. "the breeze was fair out of the harbour. sails were loosed, the anchor tripped. there was no time to be lost, for some scores of canoes were close up to us. "`give the savages a parting volley to teach them that we are not to be insulted with impunity,' cried the captain. "several shots were fired at the canoes, and two or three of the savages were hit. i cannot say whether all fired, but bill did not. "the brig had gathered way, and we were distancing the canoes, and though the captain ordered another volley to be fired, the shot fell short of them. "`we have managed that pretty cleverly,' he observed, as he walked the deck, rubbing his hands. `i never expected to get so many pearls, and we have not paid dear for them either,' and he chuckled to himself as he turned aft. "i asked bill if he had got as many as he had hoped for. "`no,' he answered. `the skipper kept too sharp a look-out to allow me to trade honestly as i had intended, and i'd sooner not have got a single one, than obtain them in the vile abominable way he has done. i wish that i was clear of the craft, and hope that i may never set eyes on him again.' "i told bill that he was too particular. "`no, no,' he exclaimed. `i am a vile wretch as it is, but i am not sunk so low as to stand by and see such things done without exclaiming against them.' "we had a quick run to the westward, and the captain was congratulating himself on making a prosperous voyage. we had still room, however, for some more sandal-wood, and he took it into his head to visit the place where he had given a couple of dozen to a native chief for refusing to bring off sandal-wood. he was mad, you will allow, to make the attempt. he thought he could catch the chief, and play the trick a second time. "bringing up before the place, and telling us to keep our arms ready for use, and to let no native on board, away he went in the boat with six hands well armed. the natives, instead of running off, came down to the beach quite in a friendly manner, and welcomed him on shore. he thought, i suppose, that they did not know the brig again, or that the chief had forgotten his flogging. "we watched him from the deck, and he and two men advanced up the beach towards the very chief himself, who came down to meet him. "the captain's idea was, i have no doubt, to seize the chief and bring him off. "in another instant we saw one of the men running, and a party with clubs and spears, who had remained hidden behind some rocks, rushing towards the captain. before he could escape, his brains were dashed out, and his companion was struck to the ground. the other man reached the boat with a spear in his back, and was hauled in just before the savages got up to him. the boat shoved off and pulled away towards us, a shower of spears following her. another man was hit, for we saw an oar dropped. the remaining three pulled away for their lives. we, meantime, loosed the sails and got under way; and time it was to do so, for we saw a number of canoes, which had been concealed behind rocks along the shore, darting out towards us. as soon as the boat was alongside, we hauled up the men, one of whom was pretty near dead by that time, cut the cable, let the boat go adrift--we had no time to hoist her up--sheeted home the sails, and stood away from the shore. "we had a narrow escape of it, for though we kept firing at the advancing canoes, they were almost up to us; and it's my belief the savages would have got on board in spite of all we could have done to resist them, for they seemed resolved to have their revenge. as it was, another man was hit, and our deck was covered with spears and darts. "we at last got clear of the land, and the mate, who took command, said he would shape a direct course for sydney, and have nothing more to do with trading. we soon, however, began to suspect that he was but a poor navigator, and bill said he was sure of it. "three or four days afterwards a gale sprung up from the westward. we lost our topmasts, and were driven before it for a week or more. "whether or not the mate was a bad navigator, we had no means of proving, for one night he was washed overboard. bill, who was the only scholar among us, looked at the log; that had not been written up, nor had our course on the chart been pricked off; so there we were, driving before a heavy gale, and not knowing what island might be in our course to bring us up. the brig also had sprung a leak, and we had to turn-to at the pumps. our provisions and water were running short. we were in a bad case. even had we sighted an island, we should have been afraid to go ashore, for we had played so many tricks at different places, that, after what had happened, we thought that we might be treated in the same way as the captain had been. "the gale at length came to an end. still we had to keep the pumps going. our last biscuit was eaten; we had not a drop of water in the casks. bill, who had been studying the chart, told us that if we would keep up our spirits he hoped in another day or two to make an island to the southward, where we had not before touched. that night, however, there came on a dead calm. "when the sun rose the next morning the sea was like glass, with not a sign of a breeze. "when men are starving they will eat anything. we began to stew down our shoes and every bit of leather we could find about the ship. the lockers were searched for biscuit crumbs, or lumps of grease, or anything eatable, till nothing which could keep body and soul together remained. "the men knew that bill and i were friends. i heard them talking together and casting looks at him. he was thin enough, poor fellow, by this time; but the rest of us were thinner still, all bones and sinews. bill and i were on deck together, and i told him to keep by me when i saw the rest of the men coming aft with a glare in their eyes, the meaning of which i well knew. telling bill to keep behind me, i drew my knife, and swore i would kill the first man who advanced. jos noakes came on in front of the rest. he had not forgotten the knock-over bill had given him; still i had little hopes of saving my friend, for when men are desperate they will do anything. jos was close up to me, and though i might have killed him the rest would have set on me; when just then the sails gave a loud flap, and some of the men, looking round, cried out that there was a fresh breeze coming. "`my lads,' cried bill, who, though the moment before he expected nothing but death, was suddenly himself again, `that breeze will take us to the island we were steering for in the course of a few hours. you may eat me if you like, but i don't think you will find your way there without my help.' "the men saw the sense of this, and told him he had nothing to fear. while he and i went to the helm, the rest trimmed sails, and we were soon running at a brisk rate through the water. "fortunately, some small casks of hams which had got stowed away under the sandal-wood were discovered. this satisfied our hunger, though it increased our thirst. the wind, however, brought rain, and we were able to collect enough water to keep us alive. we thought all would go well, in spite of the leak, which made it still necessary to keep the pumps at work. "bill and i had just come on deck at night for our middle watch, when just as he had been telling me that he hoped next morning to make the land, the vessel's keel grated on a coral reef which the look-out had not discovered. on she drove, and i hoped might be forced over it, but the grating, tearing sound which came from below told me that the sharp points were ripping off her planks, and the rest of the crew, springing on deck, cried out that the water was rushing in on every side. we clewed up the sails, and got our only boat ready for launching. "the wind was increasing, and forcing us further and further on the reef. as we could not tell in what direction to pull, we determined to remain till morning, but before the morning arrived the wind increased, and the sea broke over us. the mainmast went by the board, and most of the men cried out that if we did not get the boat in the water we should be lost. "bill and i had gone forward. i heard some loud cries. my shipmates had managed to launch the boat, but the next instant she had been swamped alongside, and they were struggling for their lives in the foaming sea. we clung on to the wreck. the sea was making a complete breach over her, and the after part appeared breaking up. suddenly she swung round, and seemed to me to be slipping off the rock. at that moment a sea took me, striking me on the head, knocking the senses out of me; the next i found myself in the foaming waters, and looking up, the moon bursting forth just then, caught sight of bill making his way up the fore-rigging. i sung out to him to heave me a rope and haul me on board. the vessel appeared to have been brought up by a lower part of the reef, and to be sticking there. bill heard my voice, and unreefing the fore brace, hove it to me just as a sea washed me back towards the wreck. i caught hold of it when pretty nigh exhausted, for though i hadn't had much enjoyment in life, i didn't wish to leave it, and so clung on with all my strength, while bill gradually hauled me up to the fore chains. from thence i made my way into the top, where he and i sat, expecting, however, every moment that the mast would go and carry us overboard. "`are the rest all lost, think you?' asked bill. "`no doubt about it,' said i. `the boat could not have lived a minute in such a sea as there is running. we are better off even here.' "`terrible,' said bill. `and you and i are left alone out of the whole lot.' "`we may thank our stars for that,' said i. `and i say, bill, if we hold out till morning, and it comes on calm, maybe we shall find some of the pearls, and after all it won't be so bad a job for us.' "`don't talk of the pearls,' he answered, with a groan. `i wish that i had never been tempted to try to get them. the captain and the rest have got their deserts, and i would not touch one of them, gained as they were by cruelty and fraud, if they were to be washed up into my hands.' "`i only wish i could catch sight of some of the boxes with the chance of getting them,' said i. `and if you were to do so, bill, i would not trust to your good resolutions.' "`i don't want to talk about the matter,' answered bill, gloomily. `what chance have we of getting away from the wreck? we may be miles off from the shore, for what i know.' "`if the wind goes down, we may build a raft and reach the land, or may be a vessel will pass by and take us off. if not, and it breezes up again, we shall be in a bad case.' "bill groaned again. "`i am not prepared to die,' he exclaimed. `i would give anything to get on shore.' "`you haven't anything to give,' said i. `so you had better make up your mind to brave it out, just as i mean to do. i wish that i could get at some liquor, though; that would keep up our spirits better than anything else.' "bill groaned again. "`i don't want to die like a brute with my senses gone,' he answered. "`as to that, seamen have to go out of the world somehow, and for my part i don't think myself worse than the rest,' i answered; `and with regard to the things done aboard this craft, that was the captain's look out, not mine, nor yours either; so cheer up, bill, don't be down-hearted. daylight will soon return, and then, may be, we shall find ourselves better off than we fancy.' "you see, i kept up my spirits, and tried to keep up bill's; but he got worse and worse, and began raving away so curiously, that i thought he would throw himself into the sea and get drowned. "to prevent this i passed a rope round his body when he didn't see what i was about, and lashed him to the top. "as the night drew on the wind dropped, and at daybreak my eyes were gladdened by the sight of the land about two miles away, while between us and it were numerous small rocks scattered about, by means of which we might make our way, even if we had to swim for it. i remembered, however, the sharks, so i determined to build a raft. poor bill could not help me, so i set to work by myself. i was some time putting one together to carry us both, and then, being very hungry, i thought i would try to get hold of the keg of hams and the cask of water which were stowed forward, and also that i might pick up some of the boxes of pearls. i got the hams and water, but could not find the pearls. "i took some of the food up to bill, but he would only touch the water. "at last i managed to lower him on to the raft, and, afraid that the weather might again change, shoved off to make our voyage to the land. it was slow work, for i had only a long pole and a paddle. if bill had been able to help, we should have got on much faster. at last we came to a small island. i thought to myself i'll leave bill here with some ham and water for food, and go back and have another search for the pearls. bill made no objection; i don't think even then he knew where he was. i got back with less difficulty than i expected. "the tide had now fallen, and the after part of the vessel was clear of water. i cannot tell you how i felt when i caught sight of the boxes where i knew the pearls had been stowed in the captain's cabin. there were a couple of large chests, and in these were several more boxes, with the captain's money, and some other things of value. i thought to myself, if i turn out everything heavy, these boxes will float and serve to preserve my treasures, even should the raft be capsized. i accordingly, having prepared them as i proposed, put in the boxes of pearls, and having lashed them securely, lowered them on to the raft, loading it with a number of other articles, which i thought would be useful. shoving off, i made the best of my way towards the rock where i had left poor bill; it was time i did, for the weather was again, i feared, about to change, and heavy rain was falling. hoping that he might have revived, i expected to see him looking out for me. "while making good way through the water, suddenly i found my raft touch ground. the current striking against it drove it further and further on to the reef. to prevent it capsizing, i had to stand up and press my pole against the bottom. there i stood, the rain coming down faster and faster. i shouted to bill, hoping that he might hear me, and perhaps be able to wade out to my assistance, but no answer came. i might easily have got off by casting the chest and the other articles adrift, but i could not bring myself to do that, not knowing where they and their precious contents might be carried to. at last i thought of mooring the raft, and trying to reach the rock by wading. i had a large axe which would serve as an anchor. i made a rope fast to it, and stuck it securely, as i thought, in a cleft of the coral reef. i then, with the pole in my hand, made my way towards the rock. reaching it at last, not without difficulty, i looked about for bill. what was my dismay not to see him! the provisions and water, and the other things i left with him were there, but he was gone. whether he had fancied i was going to desert him, and had attempted to swim to the mainland, or in his madness had thrown himself into the sea, i could not tell. i climbed to the end of the rock nearest to the shore, shouting at the top of my voice, and still hoping to see him, but not a soul appeared on the beach. i had taken a liking to him, and i felt more unhappy than i had ever felt before, at the thoughts that he was lost. `it cannot be helped,' i said to myself. `i'll go back and tow the chests one by one to the rock, and so get the raft afloat, and in time reach the shore.' at once i went back to the outer end of the rock, and began to wade towards where i had left the raft. the breeze had got up, and there was some sea on. it struck me that the water was deeper than at first. i hadn't made many steps when, looking at the raft, i felt convinced that it was moving. i tried to hurry on, but found myself floundering in the water almost up to my neck, and had to scramble back to the rock to save my life. the raft went faster and faster. i shouted, i shrieked to it to stop; the pearls which would have made my fortune were every instant getting further from my reach. then a wave took it and turned it right over, another struck it and dashed it against a rock, and away floated the pieces with the chests in the direction the current was making. "on getting back to the rock i sat down and cried like a child. i felt as if i was done for. at last i got better and began to hope that the chests might be washed on shore, and that i might secure them after all. "how was i to reach the land? there was the question. i was a bad swimmer, and if i had been a good one the chances were that i should be picked off by a shark. my only remaining hope was that the natives might not be cannibals, and that some of them coming off to fish might see me, and carry me to their island. still perhaps some days might pass before any one might come out so far. i knew therefore that i must husband my provisions to make them last me as long as possible. fortunately the rain had filled some hollows in the rock. i drank as much as i wanted of that, and bailed the remainder into the cask i had left with bill. "the day passed by and no one appeared, and not only that day but several others went by, and i was still on the rock. i had eaten up all the ham and drunk up nearly every drop of water. i had no means of striking a light, and if i had there was no fuel except my pole, and i could not live long on the raw shell fish which stuck to the rock. "my last hour i thought was come. i lay down expecting to die, and soon dropped off into a sort of stupor. i was aroused by hearing voices, and looking up i saw a canoe with three brown girls in her, paddling up to the rock. i just lifted my head and made signs that i was very ill; they understood me, and instead of running away managed together to lift me into their canoe. one poured water down my throat, and another fed me with yam. they had been out fishing, and were returning home. they took me to their father's hut, and fed and nursed me till i recovered. my thoughts were running on the chests with the pearls, but i could hear nothing of them, nor of poor bill either, nor have i from that day to this." chapter four. "i was just well, and thinking what i should do, when a south sea whaler put into a harbour close by for provisions and water. she wanted hands, and i shipped aboard her. she was not long out from sydney, to which port she belonged. "while i served in her i was again nearly lost. we were after a big whale which had already been struck when the creature caught the boat i was in with its flukes, stove in the bows, and turned her right over, while i and the rest of the crew were left struggling in the water. i managed to climb up on the boat's stern, and hailed another boat which was under sail, but so eager were those in her in pursuit of the monster that they did not see for some time what had occurred. the rest of my mates had sunk before she came up, and i was taken on board so exhausted that i could not have hung on many minutes longer. "when the cruise was up the whaler returned to sydney, and i thought that i would stop on shore, and with the money i had saved try what i could do for a living. my cash was gone, however, before i could well look round; my old friends the crimps got most of it. "remembering how i had before been shipped on board a craft without knowing it, i determined that such a trick should not be played me again. perhaps the crimps thought i was too old to be worth much and would not let me run up a score. "i was standing one day on the quay with my hands in my pockets, when the skipper of the last sandal-wood trader i had sailed in came up to me. he knew me and i knew him, and a bigger villain i never set eyes on; still considering that my last shilling was gone, i could not be particular about my acquaintances. "`boas, old ship,' says he. `you know the south sea islands as well as most men. i want a few fellows like you for a cruise which is sure to be profitable, and you will come back in a short time with your pockets lined with gold, and be able to live at your ease, if you have a mind to do so, like a gentleman.' "i asked him to tell me what was the object of the voyage. "`i don't mind telling you the truth. if you were to ask at the custom house you would hear we were starting on a voyage after cocoa-nut oil and sea slugs, but there's poor profit in that compared to what we are really after. we do not call ours a slaving voyage, but our intention is to get as many natives as we can stowed away in our hold, by fair means or foul, and to run them across to brisbane or some other port in queensland. the order we receive from our owner is to visit the different islands, and to persuade as many natives as we can to come and work for the settlers. they want labourers, and will pay good wages, and the natives are only to be engaged for three years, and to be carried back again at the end of that time if they happen to be alive, and wish it, to their own islands.' "i told him that was very like the sort of trade i had been engaged in some years before, when we collected natives and carried them to peru to work in the mines, and how the french didn't approve of our taking the people from their islands, and had captured a number of our vessels. `but,' says i, `as i suppose that there are no mines in queensland, the indians will like australia better than they did peru, and won't die so fast as they did there. but what does the government say to the matter? maybe they'll call it slaving.' "`oh we have got a regular licence from the queensland government,' answered the skipper. `it's all shipshape and lawful, provided we treat the natives kindly, and don't take them unless they wish to go, and make them clearly understand the agreement they enter into.' "`if that's the case, captain squid, i'm your man,' says i. `i am not over particular; but in my old age i have taken a liking to what is lawful and right.' "`very wise too,' says the skipper, giving me a wink. `you will find all our proceedings perfectly lawful, and we run no risk whatever. if the natives get harder worked than they like when they reach queensland, that's no business of ours.' "to make a long story short, i that evening found myself on board the `pickle,' schooner of about eighty tons. she hadn't much room for stowage 'tween decks, but as the passage between queensland and the islands where she was to get the natives was short, and as i supposed only a few at a time would be taken, i had no scruples on that score. at all events, it could not be anything like the middle passage between africa and america. "next morning we were at sea running to the eastward, after which we stood away northward, towards the islands which extend between the line and new caledonia. the people are all blacks, a strong, hardy race, and, as captain squid remarked to me, more likely to be caught, and when caught better able to work than the brown-skinned natives to the eastward, such as we used to take away to labour in the mines in south america. "the first place we came to was the island of tanna, one of the southernmost of the new hebrides. we knew that missionaries were there trying to turn the people into christians--an odd sort of work to my mind for white people to attempt. it would not do, however, to go near where they were. we stood in, therefore, to a part of the island where they were not. having hove-to, we sent a boat on shore to invite the people to come off with palm oil, telling them that we would pay a high price for it. the second mate, who went in command of the boat with the interpreter, was ordered to be very cautious lest the natives should attempt to cut him off. "having delivered his message, he returned to the schooner. to our surprise, in a short time three canoes were seen coming off with a dozen natives in them. they came alongside without fear, and told the interpreter that they were christians, and friends of the white men. the captain invited them on board, and said that he would not only pay them well for their oil, but would, if they chose, take them to a country where they might soon become rich, and return home again in a short time. they replied that they had no desire to leave their native island, and wanted to receive payment for their oil. the captain said they should have it if they would come down below, where he had got a feast ready for them. an old man of the party advised them to remain on deck till they had received the goods they had bargained for. some liquor on this was brought up, and they were asked to take a drop. the old man again advised them not to touch it, and took hold of his oil-jar as if he was about to lower it into his canoe. notwithstanding what the old man said, two or three of them tasted the grog, and then, first one and then another, went down below. the old man cried out to them, and was about to lower his jar into the canoe, when, at a word from the captain, one of our people seized it, while another caught hold of him. the interpreter at the moment appearing, declared that the oil had been bought, and that he had no business to carry it away. by this time half the natives were below. the old man struggled, he was knocked down, and when his companions came to his assistance they were knocked down also. before they could get up again their arms were pinioned, while those who were below were treated in the same way. the captain declared that the savages intended to take the vessel, that he did not believe they were christians, and that in his own defence he was obliged to carry them off. "`you will understand, my lads,' he said to us, `if any questions are asked when we get to brisbane that's the answer we must give.' "the canoes of the savages alongside were sunk, and letting draw the foresail, we stood away along the coast, while the natives were stowed snugly below. the captain seemed highly pleased with this successful commencement of our voyage. "a short way further on, as we saw some natives on the shore, the boat was sent in to speak to them. i went in her. as we approached the beach, two young men were seen swimming off towing a quantity of cocoa-nuts, which they told the interpreter they wished to barter for any goods we had brought. they were invited to come into the boat, but were timid, and replied that we might have the cocoa-nuts, but must hand out in return what we had to give. a few articles were accordingly held up, and they were invited to come and receive them. fearing they might escape us, the moment they came alongside they were seized by the hair of their heads, and hauled into the boat. they cried out, saying that they were sons of a chief, and that, if we would set them free, we might have the cocoa-nuts. the mate laughed at them, and told them if they would quietly come with us we would pay them handsomely. as they began to struggle and tried to leap overboard, we had to hold them down. this being seen from the shore, the people became alarmed, and put on so threatening a manner, that we were afraid of going nearer. having no chance of getting more natives, we returned on board with the two young men, leaving their friends raging and threatening us in vain. "the next place we touched at we were more successful, and got nearly a dozen on board, who seemed well pleased at the thought of seeing the world, and willingly agreed to sign the paper placed before them, though i suspect they knew very little about the meaning of it. they were deadly enemies of those we had first taken. the two tribes had been accustomed to fight and eat each other, but, notwithstanding this, we turned the last comers down below to make friends with the others. "we were standing away from the shore when two or three of the last party happened to hear how the first had been taken, and, becoming alarmed, attempted to leap overboard. our men who had handspikes in their hands hit at them to stop them doing this. the blows, however, being somewhat heavy, two fell dead on the deck, while a third made his escape to the shore. "it was a bad job, for we had hoped to obtain more labourers from the same place. "we got several, however, both men and women, from the island of vate. here the captain had an agent, a clever fellow, who, for a musket and tobacco, was ready to do anything. he persuaded the natives that if they would go on board the schooner, they would be carried to a magnificent country, where, after working for a few moons, they would make their fortunes, and be brought back in safety to their own island. "the natives are almost as black as ebony, but tall and well-formed, wearing a broad wrapper of matting round their waists, and their hair gathered up into a bunch at the top of the head, and ornamented with feathers; while the women wear a curious tail, which hangs down behind them to the calves of their legs. the men also wear bands of shells round their necks and arms, and rings in their ears. "they seemed pretty contented when they came on board. the captain, by the agent's desire, gave each of them a present to send to their friends on shore. "`mind you take good care of them, captain,' said old sneezer, the name we gave the black agent. `be very kind, and bring them back all right.' "`ay, ay, never fear,' answered captain squid, and he winked at the old fellow. `we know how to treat people properly aboard here if they behave themselves.' "you would have supposed by their looks that they were going on a party of pleasure, but they soon changed their note, poor wretches! before long. "we got a good many people from the island of erromanga, where old sneezer was very useful. the natives, i had heard say, had murdered some missionary fellows--williams, and harris, and others--and of course it was but right, the captain observed, that we should punish them, so we need not be in any way particular as to how we got hold of the savages. old sneezer used to go on shore in the boat, and talk to them, and persuade them to come off to us, and in this way we got about thirty or so without much difficulty. he tried to persuade one fellow he found fishing in his canoe off the leeside of the island, and as he said he did not want to leave home, sneezer lugged him into the boat, and then sunk his canoe. he shrieked out, thinking he was going to be killed; but we told him he need not be alarmed, as we were only going to steal him. another black fellow we found on the shore alone, but he would not come either, because he had got a wife and family at home, so sneezer, without more ado, clapped his arms round him, and we hauled him into the boat, telling him that we were only just going to another island near at hand, for a short time, and that he would then have his liberty. "while pulling along the coast of another island in the boat, three men came off to us in a canoe. sneezer told them, as usual, the good luck in store for them. two of them believed him, and agreed to come with us; the third jumped overboard. the mate struck out at him with the boat-hook, hooking him in the cheek, and hauled him on board. `now, my lad, come with us,' says he, `whether you like it or no.' we soon had them on board, and stowed away below. "we had now a full cargo; indeed, we could not well take in any more. the black with a hole in his cheek, and some others, didn't quite like the treatment they received, and the first, making his way on deck, insisted on being put on shore again. he was at once knocked back into the hold again; he tried to get up, followed by others, some of whom had their bows and arrows, which they had been allowed to keep, it being supposed that they could do no harm with them. they began to shoot away, and a general fight took place in the hold, when the captain, thinking the blacks would gain possession of the vessel, ordered us to fire down upon them. the supercargo, who was, i'll allow, a precious villain, afraid that some of them might be killed, and that he should lose part of his cargo, though otherwise not caring for their lives, told us to shoot them in their legs, but not to kill them. it was all dark below, so that we could not see in what direction to fire. some cotton was therefore fastened to the end of a long stick, and lighted; and when this was held down into the hold, we could take aim. three savages were shot, and, being hauled upon deck, were thrown overboard: two who were dead floated quietly away, but the third was alive, and we saw him striking out towards the distant shore; but he soon sank, for either a shark got hold of him or his wound prevented him swimming further. "after this we hove up the anchor, and making sail shaped a course for brisbane. we had to keep a sharp look out after our passengers, and make them fast whenever they came on deck, for fear they should leap overboard and drown themselves. when in sight of land we had a hard job to keep them quiet, and generally found it more convenient to make them stay below. "had the passage been long we should probably have lost a good many of them; but as it was, only three or four died, and we landed the rest in tolerable condition. the captain said that they had all come on board of their own free will; that if they had changed their minds since, that was no fault of his. they were soon engaged by the colonists, who wanted labour at any price. he had no difficulty, in consequence of the favourable report he made, of again getting a licence, and without loss of time we sailed on another cruise. "we had kept more to the eastward than usual, when it came on to blow very hard, and we had to run before the gale out of our course a considerable distance, the captain being very much vexed at this loss of time. the gale had somewhat moderated, but it was still blowing hard when we caught sight of a sail which, as we neared her, proved to be a large double canoe, with twenty or more hands on board. the captain thought she would prove a good prize, as we might sink her and carry off the people, and no one be the wiser. she consisted of two large canoes, so to speak, some way apart, but united by a strong deck placed upon them. through the deck were cut hatches, to enable the people to go below into the canoes, and above the deck was a square house with a platform on the top of it. as we drew near, intending to run her down old sneezer advised us to let her pass, as she belonged to fiji, and as he said the people would give us more trouble than they were worth, as they were savage fellows, and would neither work in their own islands nor in australia, and would very likely murder their masters. we accordingly let them go, and away she flew close hauled on a wind, though the supercargo sighed, as he thought of letting so many fine-looking fellows escape us. the gale ceasing, we hauled up, and stood back for erromanga. "old sneezer was as useful to us as before. on his first visit to the shore he persuaded a dozen natives to come off, by telling them that he had plenty of pigs on board for a feast they were about to hold. very fat pigs they were, according to his account, and plenty of tobacco, so that they might smoke from morning till night to their hearts' content. we took them off in our own boat not to alarm the rest, by having to sink their canoe. when they got on deck they asked for the pigs and tobacco. the only answer they got was finding themselves shoved down below. they shrieked and cried out till the mate went among them with a thick stick and made them quiet. "we were not quite so successful at the next haul. sneezer got off six fellows as he had the former ones; but they heard the others cry out before we had them secured, and tried to escape. three were knocked down in time, but the other three leaped overboard and swam to the shore. the captain sang out for a couple of muskets; one however was not loaded, and the other would not go off, and the men escaped. knowing that we should get no more labourers there, we had to make sail and run to another place. after this we got several quite quietly, and they were induced to put their marks to the paper shown to them, and to believe all that sneezer said. "one day we pulled in to the shore a few miles south of dillon's bay, where the surf ran too heavily to allow us to land, but sneezer caught sight of four men on the shore, and hailing them, said he was their friend, and had plenty of tobacco to give them if they would come off for it. they all swam out to us, when in our eagerness we caught hold of two of them somewhat roughly, perhaps, and hauled them into the boat; the others, taking the alarm, swam back and escaped. "you see in this trade, as in every other, we have our disappointments. "we had heard of the skipper of a trading schooner, who somehow or other got on very well with the erromangians by treating them kindly, i suppose, and paying them what he promised. so says sneezer, `i will tell them captain tom has got a new vessel, and this is her, and that he wishes to see them.' "on this sneezer went on shore, and nearly two dozen natives came off to see their friend captain tom. they were then told that he was in his cabin, when they were easily persuaded to step quietly down below. as may be supposed, we didn't let them come on deck again. what they thought about the matter, or what their friends on shore thought about it, i don't know; perhaps the next time captain tom touched at that port they might not have been inclined to be so friendly with him as before; it's just possible, indeed, that they might have knocked him on the head without inquiring whether or not he had paid them a visit a short time back, and carried off some of their people. "the natives we had last got began moaning and groaning, and cursing their folly, because their chief, who was a christian, had warned them beforehand, and told them that he feared some trick might be played, not liking the looks of the vessel. "in this way, we managed, as before, to complete our cargo, and to land them all, with the exception of a few who died, at brisbane. "we after this made several successful trips, and i should think the colonists must have felt very grateful to us for the free labourers with whom we supplied them. "there were a dozen vessels or more engaged in the same trade, the supercargoes of which mostly managed matters in the same way we did; if they did not they must have had great difficulty in collecting labourers. "the `pickle' had, however, run her course. after we had got most of our cargo on board we were caught in a heavy gale, and had to batten down the hatches to escape going to the bottom. our passengers must have found it tremendously hot, for the gale lasted several days, and all that time we had to keep the hatches on. when it moderated a little, and we went below to inspect our cargo, we found some had broken their arms and others their legs, tumbling about in the hold, while a dozen more were dead or dying. "things were bad enough, but they were to become worse. the gale came on again, and while we thought we were clear of the land the vessel struck on a coral reef. the sea beat over it, and we held on to the rigging, but scarcely was she on the other side, where it was tolerably smooth, than we found the water rushing in through a hole which had been knocked in her bottom. we had just time to get out the boat and jump into her, when down the vessel went, with all those under hatches. "it is said that a good many of the labourers who leave their native islands never get back again; this accident will account for a hundred or more, and of course the authorities in queensland were not answerable for it. "we managed to save our lives, and were picked up by a sydney vessel. "having found the business profitable, i shipped on board another craft engaged to take natives to the fiji islands, where labourers were much wanted. "having touched at several places, we called at the kingsmill islands. here we got a good many natives in one way or another. "we were about making sail, when in the evening a black fellow came alongside in his canoe to sell mats and fowls. we persuaded him, as it was late, to sleep on board. as the wind was pretty fresh, he willingly agreed. next morning he was somewhat surprised to find that the schooner had got under way during the night, and he found himself one of a gang of seventy men and fifteen women, whom we had secured, bound for fiji. the supercargo, to quiet him, told him that we were only going across to another island close by, and would land him there. the others we kept pretty peaceable by similar tricks, though they kept asking somewhat anxiously, when they were to be put on shore. "at last we reached one of the many islands of the fiji group. i had never been there before; but i had heard that the people were terrible cannibals. so they were till the missionaries persuaded the king and his chiefs, and most of his subjects, to give up the practice. a considerable number of white men have of late years settled on several of the islands, and have bought land to grow coffee and other things. they find a difficulty in getting the natives of fiji to work for them, so they have to obtain labourers from other islands, and this was the work our schooner was engaged in. our cargo was quickly distributed among the planters, some taking ten, some twenty, or as many as they could get. "the natives of fiji are black and fine big fellows. they wear their hair frizzled out, and big turbans on the top of all; some of them, indeed, wear great wigs over their own hair, for the larger a man's head is, the more important he thinks himself. this makes them look very tall; indeed, many of the chiefs are very fine men. they also wear ornaments of all sorts, necklaces, and rings, and beads round their legs and arms, and they stick into their ears huge ornaments, while large brooches hang down over their breasts. the common people, however, wear very little clothing at all, and many of the chiefs who have turned christians, dress something after the english fashion, as they fancy; or at all events, cover their bodies with robes of their native cloth. "i found a number of english and frenchmen, and people of all countries settled on the islands, and there are a good lot of grog shops, so that they may be said to have made some progress in imitating civilised people. in some of the wilder parts of the country, however, the natives are still cannibals, and do not scruple to kill and eat any strangers they can catch. not long ago they were addicted to that unpleasant custom, so that any strangers wrecked on their coasts were sure to be eaten. when they could not get strangers they ate each other; sometimes a dozen, and sometimes even twenty slaves, were killed for one great feast. altogether from what i heard of the people, i had no fancy to stop and live among them. "i must say this much for the missionaries, that they have cured them of their worst habit. at some of the villages i visited, where the missionaries have been long established, the people were as quiet and decent, and well-behaved as any i have been amongst; too much, as i must own, to my taste. "they are capital swimmers, and seem as much at home in the water as on land. the women swim as well as the men. at one village i stopped at, where, though they had given up eating human flesh, they did not pretend to be christians, i saw a curious sort of game played by the girls. a stout post was stuck in the water some way from the shore. on the top of it was laid the trunk of a large cocoa-nut tree, the base resting near the shore, and the tip projecting beyond the post over deep water. the fun was for the girls to run up the inclined tree at full speed, and then to leap off from the point and swim back to shore one after the other, as fast as they could go. twenty or thirty girls could play at the game together, and such shouting, and shrieking, and laughing i never heard. "however, as the vessel i had come in, the `thisby,' was returning to australia, i went in her. "we got a few natives from the kingsmill islands, the new hebrides, and other places, and carried them to brisbane. "our skipper having landed them in good condition without difficulty, got another licence to bring back a further cargo of fifty natives--for the government officer didn't think the vessel had room enough to carry more. our captain and supercargo, however, had a different notion on the subject. "we managed to pick them up much as we had done others. of course it was the same to the natives whether they went to queensland or fiji. instead of fifty, by the clever management of our supercargo and interpreter, we got altogether a hundred. the captain said it would never do to return with so many to brisbane, and hearing that there was still a great demand for labour at the fijis, we shaped a course for those islands. the accommodation for our passengers was not altogether such as civilised people would have liked. we had run up a number of shelves round the hold on which they stowed themselves at night. they were all stark naked, and they had no mats to lie on, but we could not of course expect these savages to be over particular. "we had a dead beat to windward for the best part of a month, and by that time our cargo, as may be supposed, hadn't much improved in appearance. "as ill luck would have it, when we arrived off the port we were bound for, what should we see but a man-of-war at anchor. as we were short of provisions and water, we were compelled to run in and make the best of it. before long the captain of the man-of-war came on board, and not only rated our skipper and supercargo for the condition the blacks were in, but declaring that our papers were irregular, which it must be confessed they were, landed the blacks and took possession of the craft. i and the rest of the crew lost our wages, and had to go on shore again and look out for ourselves. "i hadn't been there long before a fine brig came in with only a dozen natives. the owner was on board, and he and the captain had had a quarrel because the latter had refused to receive any passengers who did not come of their own free will, and sign the agreement with a full understanding of the meaning. the captain, who was, i thought, a fool for his pains, had to give up the command, and two or three of the men who were of his opinion, were landed with him. i having no such scruples was glad enough to join her as second mate. most of her crew were either sandwich islanders or tahitians. the owner having got another master who was accustomed to the trade, we sailed to the northward to visit a number of islands lying on either side of the line, intending also to cruise about the new hebrides and solomon islands, where we hoped before long to get a full cargo. "the owner said his vessel would carry three hundred at least, and that number he was determined to obtain. "i have told you before how the vessels engaged in this trade are accustomed to pick up their cargo. our owner was a man for dodges of all sorts, and there was not a device he left untried to obtain men. at one place he pretended that the brig was a sandal-wood trader, and offered to give double the price which had ever been given before, provided it could be brought on board the next day. his hope was that a number of natives would go and cut it, and that each man would come back with the result of his labour. he was not disappointed. the next morning we had a score of canoes alongside. he would only let one man at a time come on deck, and as soon as he appeared he was invited below to receive payment. the first two or three who came received even double what the owner had promised, and were allowed to return to their canoes. this made all the rest eager to come up, and as soon as they had gone below they were gagged and pinioned, and passed into the hold. by this means we got sixty men, even the very last not suspecting the trick that had been played. the first three were also enticed on board, supposing that their companions were receiving even more than they had. we towed the canoes out to sea, where we sank them, and continued our voyage. "when we approached a place where christian natives were to be found, we hoisted a missionary flag, and the interpreter going on shore told the people that one of their dear missionaries was on board, when a number eagerly came off to visit him, and were somewhat surprised when they found themselves handed down into the hold. "this dodge answered so well that we tried it several times, generally with the same success. the owner having heard that a bishop, or a man of that sort, who wears a long gown and preaches, was in the habit of visiting many of the islands, determined to find out where he had most friends, hoping, by a dodge he had thought of, to make a grand haul. he had had a coat and hat made which he said was just like the bishop's, and another for the interpreter. rigged in these they went one day on shore, and began preaching to the natives who collected round in great numbers. what they said i don't know, it must have been something curious, i fancy; but the savages who had never had a visit from the bishop before, though they had heard of him it seemed, were mightily pleased. some wanted to come off at once, but the owner replied that he should be happy to see as many as chose to visit him next morning, and that he had a number of things he should like to give them. "pretty nearly a hundred came alongside the next morning in their canoes; the difficulty, however, was to secure them. at last the interpreter thought of a plan. he told them that the bishop was sick in his cabin and that he could only see three or four at a time; but that there were praying men in another part of the vessel who would be happy afterwards to talk to them. by this means, a few at a time being got below, the greater number were secured. at last the remainder began to grow suspicious, and one of those below shouting out, they made a rush to the side, and leaped overboard. a few were secured, but several made their escape, when the owner ordered us to fire on them. several were hit and sank, but the rest reached the shore, thinking, i have no doubt, that it was an odd way for a bishop to treat them, and vowing that the next time they caught sight of him they would make him sorry for what he had done. "we played a trick like this at several other places, but, as the bishop was known, the interpreter, rigged as a parson, going on shore, told the people that the bishop was ill on board, but would still be very glad to see them if they would come off and pay him a visit. "by this and all sorts of other means we at last got a full cargo of between two and three hundred people. "it seemed to me that we had a pretty large cargo already, but falling in with another vessel belonging to our owner, he took out of her sixty or seventy natives, and sent her to collect more, while we continued our voyage. "among the natives we had received on board were three young fellows from the island of anietium, the most northern of the new hebrides, which i once before had visited to get a cargo of sandal-wood. i remembered making friends with one of the natives, a lad, and having given him several articles, of no great value to myself i must own, though they pleased him mightily. of the three we had now caught, two were perfect young savages, with their hair frizzled out, and sticking up at the top of their heads in a curious fashion, and big ear-rings in their ears, though with no clothing on, except round their waists. the other was clad in shirt and trousers. i saw him looking at me, and presently he put out his hand, and, taking mine, spoke to me in english, and i found that he was the very lad i had before known. he had been to new zealand in the meantime, and had become a sort of missionary to his countrymen. i told him i would do my best to help him while on board. he said he didn't mind labouring, but thought it was his duty to remain at his island to try to make the people christians. the owner only laughed at him, but remarked to me that if he had known he spoke english, he would have let him alone, as he might be telling tales to the authorities. "we were somewhat overcrowded, as may be supposed. it was bad enough for the savages, but worse for a man who had seen something of civilised life. i took my friend food, and let him remain on deck during my watch, as he promised me that he would not leap overboard. "we were delayed by calms, and one day we drifted in close to the island of poru. how the blacks knew where we were i don't know, but somehow or other they found out that we were near the shore, and, without a moment's warning, they managed to lift off the hatches, and up they came swarming on deck, with all sorts of things they had got hold of in their hands. the owner and captain rushed out of the cabin, crying out to the crew to assist them, and drive the savages down below again. i was at the time at the bowsprit end at some work or other, and my missionary friend was in the bows. just as i looked round on hearing the noise, i saw the owner and captain knocked down, and in a moment their heads were almost cut off, and they were hove overboard. the first mate had come up with his revolver, fighting for his life, and shooting the natives as fast as he could right and left. by chance he had shot one of the crew who had gone to his assistance, and the next instant he himself was knocked down, and treated as the captain and owner had been. i had been making my way into the bows to assist them, when my friend maka seized me by the arm, and dragged me down the fore hatchway. "`their blood is up now,' he whispered. `stay quiet till they cool down, and i will save your life.' "i followed his advice, and he stowed me away under a heap of clothes in the foremost bunk. "the native part of the crew didn't join the blacks, but i can't say that they seemed to me to be doing much to help the owner and white men. "a strong breeze had sprung up off the land, which i guessed the vessel was fast leaving. i had been hid away some time, when i felt as if i was suffocating; and unable to bear it longer, i threw off the things above me, and found that the fore peak was filled with smoke. i at once knew that the vessel was on fire. i was nearly dropping back, when i felt a hand seize me, though i could see nothing for the smoke, and i heard maka's voice, saying, `come on deck, i will save your life.' he dragged me up, and i sat down for a moment on the heel of the bowsprit. smoke was coming up through the hatchways, and flames were already bursting out in the after part of the vessel. the blacks, seized with terror, without stopping to get hold of anything to support themselves, were leaping overboard, and striking out for the far-distant land. i never before saw such a sight, three hundred of them in the water together. it seemed to me that they would have very little chance of ever reaching the shore, but their only thought was to get away from the burning ship. "maka had an axe in his hand, he put another into mine, and we set to work to cut away whatever would serve to form a raft. we got hold of several spars and ropes; we had little time to spare, for we expected every moment to have the flames burst out beneath our feet. we at last got our raft overboard. maka had secured some meal and a small keg of water. we had just time to lash ourselves to the raft, when the flames burst out forward, and the ship was on fire fore and aft. "by this time we could just distinguish a dark line in the water, which marked where the blacks were making their way towards the land. "`poor fellows,' said maka. `very few swim so far.' "our case was bad enough, for even with a couple of paddles, which we managed to make while on the raft, out of some spars we had brought for the purpose, we could scarcely hope, with the breeze against us, to reach the shore. our water and provisions would not hold out long, and no vessel was likely to come near us. "it was near evening when the fire broke out. the sun went down, but the flames of the burning vessel lighted up the ocean around us, and then the full moon rose, and seemed to cheer us up a little. "maka talked to me about my soul, for he didn't seem to think that we should have much chance of escaping with our lives; but i begged that he would not put gloomy thoughts into my mind. he sat and talked on; the truth is, however, i couldn't understand what he was talking about, it was all so new to me. "towards morning the vessel burned to the water's edge, and then the sea rushing in, down she went, and we lay floating, with only the light of the moon to cheer us. "when the sun rose i found that we had drifted still further from the land, which was no longer in sight. "it is not pleasant to think of the time i spent on that raft. several days went by, and we consumed all our meal and water. i thought i should die, and at last was more dead than alive. i lay on my back with my eyes shut, and a piece of wood under my head which maka had put there to prevent the water washing over me, while he sat up by my side singing hymns, and keeping up his spirits in a way i could not have supposed possible. "while i thus lay i heard him give a shout, and he helped me to sit up. i saw the land which i didn't suppose we were near, and a canoe with four natives close to us. i suppose they were christians, for instead of knocking us on the head, they took maka and me on board, and welcomed him as a friend, giving us food and treating us very kindly in their village, to which they carried us. we there heard that of all the savages which had been on board the brig, only thirty had reached the shore. it's a wonder that even they managed to do it, considering the distance. the rest had been drowned, or picked off by the sharks. "i had had enough of carrying labourers to work for the planters of queensland or fiji--kidnapping, i fancy you call it; and so i determined to remain where i was. however, as the customs of the christian natives didn't quite suit me, i came away here, where i took a wife and settled, and intend to remain for the rest of my days. i am too old to knock about at sea as i used to do. maka went back in a missionary vessel to his native island to labour on, as he told me, and try and make the people christians. i hope he will succeed if he wishes it, for he is an honest fellow, i'll say that for him." the old fellow thus brought his yarn to a close. i am able to corroborate most of his statements, observed my young friend, for we visited many of the places he speaks of, and from the information we received i am convinced that he in no way overdraws the atrocious practices of many of the sandal-wood traders, or fellows engaged in kidnapping the natives of the pacific islands. the villainous doings of the african slave trade is an old story and known to all, but as far as i can judge they do not surpass those of the kidnappers of the pacific at the present day. in the one case the white men merely received slaves captured by their own countrymen, and conveyed them across to the american coast; but in the pacific we find white men, in some instances, depopulating whole islands, and capturing indiscriminately by fraud or violence, the natives of others, although nominally to labour as free men, yet in reality to be reduced to a condition little superior to real bondage. after i had heard old ringdon's narrative, i felt more anxious than ever to get hold of some of these kidnapping gentlemen. when, three days afterwards, the ship standing in took me and the boat's crew off, and i told the captain what i had heard, he sent to try to induce ringdon to come on board, and give further information which might help us in capturing some of his former acquaintances, but the old fellow was not to be moved. indeed, i suspect that should he have the opportunity, he would be very willing, for a sufficient consideration, to act as agent to any kidnapping skipper who might think fit to employ him. i might mention several naval officers as well as consuls, missionaries, and respectable merchants at sydney, brisbane, and elsewhere, who would acknowledge that the main features of the account i have given are perfectly true, however much they might be inclined to doubt the word in ordinary matters of the old seaman who gave them to me. it should be clearly understood that old ringdon's narrative refers to times gone by. the governments of queensland and the fiji islands, now annexed to england have passed enactments for the prevention of the atrocious proceedings he describes. at the same time, as there are numerous lawless white men living on the heathen islands of the pacific similar in character to ringdon who would be ready to ill-treat the helpless natives if they should have the opportunity, it is important for the cause of humanity that men-of-war should continually cruise among them to preserve order and to punish delinquents. the end. tabby by winston marks illustrated by rudolph palais [transcriber note: this etext was produced from if worlds of science fiction march . extensive research did not uncover any evidence that the u.s. copyright on this publication was renewed.] [sidenote: _tabby was peculiar, of course, but seemed harmless: just a little green fly that couldn't even protect itself from ordinary spiders. so the spiders fed, and grew, and fed, and grew...._] * * * * * april , dear ben: it breaks my heart you didn't sign on for this trip. your replacement, who _calls_ himself an ichthyologist, has only one talent that pertains to fish--he drinks like one. there are nine of us in the expedition, and every one of us is fed up with this joker, cleveland, already. we've only been on the island a week, and he's gone native, complete with beard, bare feet and bone laziness. he slops around the lagoon like a beachcomber and hasn't brought in a decent specimen yet. the island is a bit of paradise, though. wouldn't be hard to let yourself relax under the palms all day instead of collecting blisters and coral gashes out in the bright sun of the atoll. no complaints, however. we aren't killing ourselves, and our little camp is very comfortable. the portable lab is working out fine, and the screened sleeping tent-houses have solved the one big nuisance we've suffered before: _insects_. i think an entomologist would find more to keep him busy here than we will. your ankle should be useable by the time our next supply plane from hawaii takes off. if you apply again at the foundation right now i'm sure sellers and the others will help me get rid of cleveland, and there'll be an open berth here. got to close now. our amphib jets off in an hour for the return trip. hope this note is properly seductive. come to the isles, boy, and live!--cordially, fred * * * * * may , dear ben: now, aren't you sorry you didn't take my advice?!!!! i'm assuming you read the papers, and also, that too tight a censorship hasn't clamped down on this thing yet. maybe i'm assuming too much on the latter. anyhow, here's a detailed version from an actual eyewitness. that's right! i was right there on the beach when the "saucer" landed. only it looked more like a king-size pokerchip. about six feet across and eight inches thick with a little hemispherical dome dead center on top. it hit offshore about seventy-five yards with a splash that sounded like a whale's tail. jenner and i dropped our seine, waded to shore and started running along the beach to get opposite it. cleveland came out of the shade and helped us launch a small boat. we got within twenty feet of the thing when it started moving out, slowly, just fast enough to keep ahead of us. i was in the bow looking right at it when the lid popped open with a sound like a cork coming out of a wine bottle. the little dome had split. sellers quit rowing and we all hit the bottom of the boat. i peeked over the gunwale right away, and it's a good thing. all that came out of the dome was a little cloud of flies, maybe a hundred or so, and the breeze picked them up and blew them over us inshore so fast that cleveland and sellers never did see them. i yelled at them to look, but by then the flies were in mingling with the local varieties of sudden itch, and they figured i was seeing things. cleveland, though, listened with the most interest. it develops that his specialty _is_ entomology. he took this job because he was out of work. don't know how he bluffed his way past the foundation, but here he is, and it looks like he might be useful after all. he was all for going ashore, but sellers and i rowed after the white disk for awhile until it became apparent we couldn't catch it. it's a good thing we didn't. a half hour later, olafsen caught up to it in the power launch. we were watching from shore. it was about a half mile out when ole cut his speed. luckily he was alone. we had yelled at him to pick us up and take us along, but he was too excited to stop. he passed us up, went out there and boom! it wasn't exactly an a-bomb, but the spray hit us a half mile away, and the surface wave swamped us. sellers radioed the whole incident to honolulu right away, and they are sending out a plane with a diver, but we don't think he'll find anything. things really blew! so far we haven't even found any identifiable driftwood from the launch, let alone ole's body or traces of the disk. meanwhile, cleveland has come to believe my story, and he's out prowling around with an insect net. most energy he's shown in weeks. * * * * * may --looks like this letter will be delayed a bit. we are under quarantine. the government plane came this morning. they sent along a diver, two reporters and a navy officer. the diver went down right away, but it's several hundred feet deep out there and slants off fast. this island is the tip of a sunken mountain, and the diver gave up after less than an hour. personally i think a couple of sharks scared him off, but he claims there's so much vegetable ruck down there he couldn't expect to find anything smaller than the launch's motor. cleveland hasn't found anything unusual in his bug net, but everyone is excited here, and you can guess why. when the "saucer" reports stopped cold about a year ago, you'll remember, it made almost as much news for a while as when they were first spotted. now the people out here are speculating that maybe this disc thing came from the same source as the _saucers_, after they had a chance to look us over, study our ecology and return to their base. cleveland is the one who started this trend of thought with his obsession that the flies i reported seeing are an attack on our planet from someone out in space. commander clawson, the navy officer, doesn't know what to think. he won't believe cleveland until he produces a specimen of the "fly-from-mars", but then he turns around and contradicts himself by declaring a temporary quarantine until he gets further orders from honolulu. the reporters are damned nuisances. they're turning out reams of sunday supplement type stuff and pestering the devil out of sparks to let them wire it back, but our radio is now under navy control, too. sure is crowded in the bunk-house with the six additional people, but no one will sleep outside the screen. * * * * * may --cleveland thinks he has his specimen. he went out at dawn this morning and came in before breakfast. he's quit drinking but he hasn't slept in three days now and looks like hell. i thought he was getting his fancy imagination out of the bottle, but the soberer he got the more worried he looked over this "invasion" idea of his. now he claims that his catch is definitely a sample of something new under our particular sun. he hustled it under a glass and started classifying it. it filled the bill for the arthropods, class insecta. it looked to me, in fact, just like a small, ordinary blowfly, except that it has green wings. and i mean _green_, not just a little iridescent color. cleve very gently pulled one wing off and we looked at it under low power. there is more similarity to a leaf than to a wing. in the bug's back is a tiny pocket, a sort of reservoir of the green stuff, and cleve's dissection shows tiny veins running up into the wings. it seems to be a closed system with no connection with the rest of the body except the restraining membrane. cleveland now rests his extraterrestrial origin theory on an idea that the green stuff is chlorophyll. if it is chlorophyll, either cleve is right or else he's discovered a new class of arthropods. in other respects the critter is an ordinary biting and sucking bug with the potentials of about a deerfly for making life miserable. the high-power lens showed no sign of unusual or malignant microscopic life inside or out of the thing. cleve can't say how bad a bite would be, because he doesn't have his entomologist kit with him, and he can't analyze the secretion from the poison gland. the commander has let him radio for a botanist and some micro-analysis equipment. everyone was so pitched up that cleve's findings have been rather anti-climactic. i guess we were giving more credence to the space-invader theory than we thought. but even if cleve has proved it, this fly doesn't look like much to be frightened over. the reporters are clamoring to be let loose, but the quarantine still holds. * * * * * june --by the time the plane with the botanist arrived we were able to gather all the specimens of _tabanidae viridis_ (cleveland's designation) that he wanted. seems like every tenth flying creature you meet is a green "tabby" now. the botanist helped cleve and me set up the bio kit, and he confirmed cleve's guess. the green stuff is chlorophyll. which makes tabby quite a bug. kyser, the youngest reporter, volunteered to let a tabby bite him. it did without too much coaxing. now he has a little, itchy bump on his wrist, and he's happily banging away at his typewriter on a story titled, "i was bitten by the bug from space!" that was hours ago, and we haven't learned anything sinister about the green fly except that it does have a remarkable breeding ability. one thing the reporter accomplished: we can go outside the screened quarters now without wondering about catching space-typhus. * * * * * june --the quarantine was probably a pretty good idea. cleve has turned up some dope on tabby's life cycle that makes us glad all over that we are surrounded by a thousand miles of salt water. tabby's adult life is only a couple of days, but she is viviparous, prolific (some thousand young at a sitting), and her green little microscopic babies combine the best survival features of spores and plankton, minus one: they don't live in salt water. but they do very well almost anyplace else. we have watched them grow on hot rocks, leaves, in the sand and best of all, filtered down a little into the moist earth. they grow incredibly fast with a little sun, so the chlorophyll is biologically justified in the life-cycle. this puzzled us at first, because the adult tabby turns into a blood-sucking little brute. deprived of any organic matter, our bottled specimens die in a short time, in or out of the sunlight, indicating the green stuff doesn't provide them with much if any nourishment after they are full-grown. now we are waiting for a supply of assorted insecticides to find the best controls over the pests. the few things we had on hand worked quite well, but i guess they aren't forgetting our sad experience with ddt a few years back. the tabbies now outnumber all the other insects here, and most outside work has been halted. the little green devils make life miserable outside the tent-houses. we have built another screened shelter to accommodate the latest arrivals. we are getting quite a fleet of amphibian aircraft floating around our lagoon. no one will be allowed to return until we come up with all the answers to the question of controlling our insect invasion. cleveland is trying to convince sellers and the commander that we should get out and send in atomic fire to blow the whole island into the sea. they forwarded his suggestion to the u. n. committee which now has jurisdiction, but they wired back that if the insect is from space, we couldn't stop other discs from landing on the mainlands. our orders are to study the bug and learn all we can. opinion is mixed here. i can't explain the flying disc unless it's extraterrestrial, but why would an invader choose an isolated spot like this to attack? cleve says this is just a "test patch" and probably under surveillance. but why such an innocuous little fly if they mean business? the newsmen are really bored now. they see no doom in the bugs, and since they can't file their stories they take a dim view of the quarantine. they have gotten up an evening fishing derby with the crew members of the planes. have to fish after dusk. the tabbies bite too often as long as the sun is up. cleve has turned into a different man. he is soft-spoken and intense. his hands tremble so much that he is conducting most of his work by verbal directions with the botanist and me to carry them out. when his suggestion about blowing up the atoll was turned down he quit talking except to conduct his work. if things were half as ominous as he makes out we'd be pretty worried. * * * * * june --the spray planes got here and none too soon. we were running out of drinking water. the tabbies got so thick that even at night a man would get stung insane if he went outside the screen. the various sprays all worked well. this evening the air is relatively clear. incidentally, the birds have been having a feast. now the gulls are congregating to help us out like they did the mormons in the cricket plague. the spiders are doing all right for themselves, too. in fact, now that we have sprayed the place the spiders and their confounded webs are the biggest nuisance we have to contend with. they are getting fat and sassy. spin their webs between your legs if you stand still a minute too long. remind me of real estate speculators in a land boom, the little bastardly opportunists. as you might gather, i don't care for brothers arachnidae. they make everyone else nervous, too. strangely, cleveland, the entomologist, gets the worst jolt out of them. he'll stand for minutes at the screen watching them spin their nasty webs and skipping out to de-juice a stray tabby that the spray missed. and he'll mutter to himself and scowl and curse them. it is hard to include them as god's creatures. cleve still isn't giving out with the opinions. he works incessantly and has filled two notebooks full of data. looks to me like our work is almost done. * * * * * august , year of our lord --to whom it will never concern: i can no longer make believe this is addressed to my friend, ben tobin. cleveland has convinced me of the implications of our tragedy here. but somehow it gives me some crazy, necessary ray of hope to keep this journal until the end. i think the real horror of this thing started to penetrate to me about june . our big spray job lasted less than hours, and on that morning i was watching for the planes to come in for a second try at it when i noticed the heavy spider webbing in the upper tree foliage. as i looked a gull dove through the trees, mouth open, eating tabbies. damned if the webs didn't foul his wings. at first he tore at them bravely and it looked like he was trying to swim in thin mud--sort of slow motion. then he headed into a thick patch, slewed around at right angles and did a complete flip. instantly three mammoth spiders the size of my fist pounced out on him and trussed him up before he could tear loose with his feet. his pitiful squawking was what made me feel that horror for the first time. and the scene was repeated more and more often. the planes dusted us with everything they had, and it cut down the tabbies pretty well again, but it didn't touch the spiders, of course. and then our return radio messages started getting very vague. we were transmitting cleve's data hourly as he compiled it, and we had been getting ordinary chatter and speculation from the honolulu operator at the end of our message. that stopped on the sixth of june. since then, we've had only curt acknowledgements of our data and sign-offs. at the same time, we noticed that complete censorship on news of our situation and progress apparently hit all the long-wave radio broadcasts. up to that time the newscasts had been feeding out a dilute and very cautious pablum about our fight against tabby. immediately when we noticed this news blind spot cleve went all to pieces and started drinking again. cleve, sellers and i had the lab tent to ourselves, having moved our bunks in there, so we got a little out of touch with the others. it wasn't the way sellers and i liked it, but none of us liked the trip from lab to living quarters any more, although it was only fifty feet or so. then sparks moved in, too. for the same reason. he said it was getting on his nerves running back and forth to the lab to pick up our outgoing bulletins. so he shifted the generator, radio gear and all over to a corner of the lab and brought in his bunk. by the tenth of june we could see that the spraying was a losing battle. and it finally took the big tragedy to drive home the truth that was all about us already. when the crew got ready to go out to their planes on the eleventh, everyone except the four of us in the lab tent was drafted to help clear webs between the tents and the beach. we could hear them shouting from tent to tent as they made up their work party. we could no longer see across the distance. everywhere outside, vision was obscured by the grayish film of webs on which little droplets caught the tropical sun like a million tiny mirrors. in the shade it was like trying to peer through thin milk, with the vicious, leggy little shadows skittering about restlessly. as usual in the morning, the hum of the tabbies had risen above the normal jungle buzzing, and this morning it was the loudest we'd heard it. well, we heard the first screen door squeak open, and someone let out a whoop as the group moved out with brooms, palm fronds and sticks to snatch a path through the nightmare of spider webs. the other two doors opened and slammed, and we could hear many sounds of deep disgust voiced amid the grunts and thrashings. they must have been almost to the beach when the first scream reached us. cleve had been listening in fascination, and the awful sound tore him loose of his senses. he screamed back. the rest of us had to sit on him to quiet him. then the others outside all began screaming--not words, just shattering screams of pure terror, mixed with roars of pain and anger. soon there was no more anger. just horror. and in a few minutes they died away. * * * * * sellers and sparks and i looked at each other. cleve had vomited and passed out. sparks got out cleve's whiskey, and we spilled half of it trying to get drinks into us. sparks snapped out of it first. he didn't try to talk to us. he just went to his gear, turned on the generator and warmed up the radio. he told honolulu what had happened as we had heard it. when he finished, he keyed over for an acknowledgment. the operator said to hold on for a minute. then he said they would _try_ to dispatch an air task force to get us off, but they couldn't be sure just when. while this was coming in cleve came to his senses and listened. he was deadly calm now, and when honolulu finished he grabbed the mike from sparks, cut in the tx and asked, "are they landing discs on the mainlands?" the operator answered, "sorry, that's classified." "for god's sake," cleve demanded, "if you are ready to write us off you can at least answer our questions. are there any of the green sonsofbitches on the mainland?" there was another little pause, and then, "yes." that was all. sparks ran down the batteries trying to raise them again for more answers, but no response. when the batteries went dead he checked the generator that had kicked off. it was out of gasoline. the drums were on the beach. now we were without lights, power and juice for our other radios. we kept alive the first few days by staying half drunk. then cleve's case of whiskey gave out and we began to get hungry. sparks and sellers set fire to one of our straw-ticking mattresses and used it as a torch to burn their way over to the supply tent about thirty feet away. it worked fairly well. the silky webs flashed into nothing as the flames hit them, but they wouldn't support the fire, and other webs streamed down behind the two. they had to burn another mattress to get back with a few cases of food. then we dug a well under the floor of our tent. hit water within a few feet. but when we cut through the screen floor it cost us sentry duty. we had to have one person awake all night long to stamp on the spiders that slipped in around the edge of the well. through all of this cleveland has been out on his feet. he has just stood and stared out through the screen all day. we had to force him to eat. he didn't snap out of it until this morning. sparks couldn't stand our radio silence any longer, so he talked sellers into helping him make a dash for the gas drums on the beach. they set fire to two mattresses and disappeared into the tunnel of burned webs that tangled and caved in behind them. when they were gone, cleveland suddenly came out of his trance and put a hand on my shoulder. i thought for a moment he was going to jump me, but his eyes were calm. he said, "well, fred, are you convinced now that we've been attacked?" i said, "it makes no sense to me at all. why these little flies?" cleve said, "they couldn't have done better so easily. they studied our ecology well. they saw that our greatest potential enemy was the insect population, and the most vicious part of it was the spider. _tabanidae viridis_ was not sent just to plague us with horsefly bites. tabby was sent to multiply and feed the arachnids. there are durable species in all climates. and if our botanist were still alive he could explain in detail how long our plant life can last under this spider infestation. "look for yourself," he said pointing outside. "not only are the regular pollenizing insects doomed, but the density of those webs will choke out even wind pollinated grains." he stared down our shallow well hole and stamped on a small, black, flat spider that had slithered under the screening. "i suppose you realize the spiders got the others. down here in the tropics the big varieties could do it by working together. sellers and sparks won't return. sounds like they got through all right, but they'll be bitten so badly they won't try to get back." and even as he spoke we heard one of the aircraft engines start up. the sound was muffled as under a bed quilt. cleve said, "i don't blame them. i'd rather die in the sun, too. the beach should be fairly clear of webs. we've got one mattress left. what do you say?" he's standing there now holding the mattress with the ticking sticking out. i don't think one torch will get us through. but it will be worth a try for one more look at the sun. al haines. the little savage by captain marryat this is fairy gold, boy; and 't will prove so. shakespeare introduction there is a reference, in _the life and letters of captain marryat_ by his daughter florence marryat, to "_the little savage_, only two chapters of the second volume of which were written by himself." this sentence may be variously interpreted, but most probably implies that marryat wrote all part i (of the first edition) and two chapters of part ii, that is--as far as the end of chapter xxiv. the remaining pages may be the work of his son frank s. marryat, who _edited_ the first edition, supplying a brief preface to part ii:-- "i cannot publish this last work of my late father without some prefatory remarks, as, in justice to the public, as well as to himself, i should state, that his lamented decease prevented his concluding the second volume." "the present volume has been for some time at press, but the long-protracted illness of the author delayed its publication." _the little savage_ opens well. the picture of a lad, who was born on a desert island--though of english parents--and really deserves to be called a savage, growing up with no other companionship than that of his father's murderer, is boldly conceived and executed with some power. the man jackson is a thoroughly human ruffian, who naturally detests the boy he has so terribly injured, and bullies him brutally. under this treatment frank's animal passions are inevitably aroused, and when the lightning had struck his tyrant blind, he turns upon him with a quiet savagery that is narrated with admirable detachment. this original situation arrests the reader's attention and secures his interest in frank henniker's development towards civilisation and virtue. his experience of absolute solitude after jackson's death serves to bring out his sympathies with animals and flowers; while, on the arrival of mrs reichardt, he proves himself a loyal comrade under kind treatment. it is much to be regretted that marryat did not live to finish his work. r. b. j. _the little savage_ originally appeared in - . marryat, who was born in , died at langham, norfolk, august , . the following is the list of his published works:-- suggestions for the abolition of the present system of impressment in the naval service, ; the naval officer, or scenes and adventures in the life of frank mildmay, ; the king's own, ; newton forster (from the _metropolitan magazine_), ; jacob faithful (from the _metropolitan magazine_), ; peter simple, ; the pacha of many tales, ; midshipman easy (from the _metropolitan magazine_), ; japhet in search of a father (from the _metropolitan magazine_), ; the pirate and the three cutters, ; a code of signals for the use of vessels employed in the merchant service, ; snarleyyow, or the dog fiend, ; a diary in america, with remarks on its institutions, ; the phantom ship, ; poor jack, ; olla podrida (articles from the _metropolitan magazine_), ; joseph rushbrook, or the poacher, ; masterman ready, or the wreck of the _pacific_, ; percival keene, ; narrative of the travels and adventures of monsieur violet in california, sonora, and western texas, ; the settlers in canada, ; the mission, or scenes in africa, ; the privateer's man, ; the children of the new forest, ; the little savage (posthumous), - ; valerie (posthumous), ; life and letters, florence marryat, . the little savage chapter i i am about to write a very curious history, as the reader will agree with me when he has read this book. we have more than one narrative of people being cast away upon desolate islands, and being left to their own resources, and no works are perhaps read with more interest; but i believe i am the first instance of a boy being left alone upon an uninhabited island. such was, however, the case; and now i shall tell my own story. my first recollections are, that i was in company with a man upon this island, and that we walked often along the sea-shore. it was rocky and difficult to climb in many parts, and the man used to drag or pull me over the dangerous places. he was very unkind to me, which may appear strange, as i was the only companion that he had; but he was of a morose and gloomy disposition. he would sit down squatted in the corner of our cabin, and sometimes not speak for hours--or he would remain the whole day looking out at the sea, as if watching for something, but what i never could tell; for if i spoke, he would not reply; and if near to him, i was sure to receive a cuff or a heavy blow. i should imagine that i was about five years old at the time that i first recollect clearly what passed. i may have been younger. i may as well here state what i gathered from him at different times, relative to our being left upon this desolate spot. it was with difficulty that i did so; for, generally speaking, he would throw a stone at me if i asked questions, that is, if i repeatedly asked them after he had refused to answer. it was on one occasion, when he was lying sick, that i gained the information, and that only by refusing to attend him or bring him food and water. he would be very angry, and say, that when he got well again, he would make me smart for it; but i cared not, for i was then getting strong, whilst he was getting weaker every day, and i had no love for him, for he had never shown any to me, but always treated me with great severity. he told me, that about twelve years before (not that i knew what he meant by a year, for i had never heard the term used by him), an english ship (i did not know what a ship was) had been swamped near the island, in a heavy gale, and that seven men and one woman had been saved, and all the other people lost. that the ship had been broken into pieces, and that they had saved nothing--that they had picked up among the rocks pieces of the wood with which it had been made, and had built the cabin in which we lived. that one had died after another, and had been buried (what death or burial meant, i had no idea at the time), and that i had been born on the island; (how was i born? thought i)--that most of them had died before i was two years old; and that then, he and my mother were the only two left besides me. my mother had died a few months afterwards. i was obliged to ask him many questions to understand all this; indeed, i did not understand it till long afterwards, although i had an idea of what he would say. had i been left with any other person, i should, of course, by conversation, have learnt much; but he never would converse, still less explain. he called me, boy, and i called him, master. his inveterate silence was the occasion of my language being composed of very few words; for, except to order me to do this or that, to procure what was required, he never would converse. he did however mutter to himself, and talk in his sleep, and i used to lie awake and listen, that i might gain information; not at first, but when i grew older. he used to cry out in his sleep constantly.--"a judgment, a judgment on me for my sins, my heavy sins--god be merciful!" but what judgment, or what sin was, or what was god, i did not then know, although i mused on words repeated so often. i will now describe the island, and the way in which we lived. the island was very small, perhaps not three miles round; it was of rock, and there was no beach nor landing place, the sea washing its sides with deep water. it was, as i afterwards discovered, one of the group of islands to which the peruvians despatch vessels every year to collect the guano, or refuse of the sea birds which resort to the islands; but the one on which we were was small, and detached some distance from the others, on which the guano was found in great profusion; so that hitherto it had been neglected, and no vessel had ever come near it. indeed, the other islands were not to be seen from it except on a very clear day, when they appeared like a cloud or mist on the horizon. the shores of the island were, moreover, so precipitous, that there was no landing place, and the eternal wash of the ocean would have made it almost impossible for a vessel to have taken off a cargo. such was the island upon which i found myself in company with this man. our cabin was built of ship-plank and timber, under the shelter of a cliff, about fifty yards from the water; there was a flat of about thirty yards square in front of it, and from the cliff there trickled down a rill of water, which fell into a hole dug out to collect it, and then found its way over the flat to the rocks beneath. the cabin itself was large, and capable of holding many more people than had ever lived in it; but it was not too large, as we had to secure in it our provisions for many months. there were several bed-places level with the floor, which were rendered soft enough to lie on, by being filled with the feathers of birds. furniture there was none, except two or three old axes, blunted with long use, a tin pannikin, a mess kid and some rude vessels to hold water, cut out of wood. on the summit of the island there was a forest of underwood, and the bushes extended some distance down the ravines which led from the summit to the shore. one of my most arduous tasks was to climb these ravines and collect wood, but fortunately a fire was not often required. the climate was warm all the year round, and there seldom was a fall of rain; when it did fall, it was generally expended on the summit of the island, and did not reach us. at a certain period of the year, the birds came to the island in numberless quantities to breed, and their chief resort was some tolerably level ground--indeed, in many places, it was quite level with the accumulation of guano--which ground was divided from the spot where our cabin was built by a deep ravine. on this spot, which might perhaps contain about twenty acres or more, the sea birds would sit upon their eggs, not four inches apart from each other, and the whole surface of this twenty acres would be completely covered with them. there they would remain from the time of the laying of the eggs, until the young ones were able to leave the nests and fly away with them. at the season when the birds were on the island, all was gaiety, bustle, and noise, but after their departure it was quiet and solitude. i used to long for their arrival, and was delighted with the animation which gladdened the island, the male birds diving in every direction after fish, wheeling and soaring in the air, and uttering loud cries, which were responded to by their mates on the nests. but it was also our harvest time; we seldom touched the old birds, as they were not in flesh, but as soon as the young ones were within a few days of leaving the nests, we were then busy enough. in spite of the screaming and the flapping of their wings in our faces, and the darting their beaks at our eyes, of the old birds, as we robbed them of their progeny, we collected hundreds every day, and bore as heavy a load as we could carry across the ravine to the platform in front of our cabin, where we busied ourselves in skinning them, splitting them, and hanging them out to dry in the sun. the air of the island was so pure that no putrefaction ever took place, and during the last fortnight of the birds coming on the island, we had collected a sufficiency for our support until their return on the following year. as soon as they were quite dry they were packed up in a corner of the cabin for use. these birds were, it may be said, the only produce of the island, with the exception of fish, and the eggs taken at the time of their first making their nests. fish were to be taken in large quantities. it was sufficient to put a line over the rocks, and it had hardly time to go down a fathom before anything at the end of it was seized. indeed, our means of taking them were as simple as their voracity was great. our lines were composed of the sinews of the legs of the man-of-war birds, as i afterwards heard them named; and, as these were only about a foot long, it required a great many of them knotted together to make a line. at the end of the line was a bait fixed over a strong fish-bone, which was fastened to the line by the middle; a half-hitch of the line round one end kept the bone on a parallel with the line until the bait was seized, when the line being taughtened, the half-hitch slipped off and the bone remained crossways in the gullet of the fish, which was drawn up by it. simple as this contrivance was, it answered as well as the best hook, of which i had never seen one at that time. the fish were so strong and large, that, when i was young, the man would not allow me to attempt to catch them, lest they should pull me into the water; but, as i grew bigger, i could master them. such was our food from one year's end to the other; we had no variety, except when occasionally we broiled the dried birds or the fish upon the embers, instead of eating them dried by the sun. our raiment, such as it was, we were also indebted to the feathered tribe for. the birds were skinned with the feathers on, and their skins sewn together with sinews, and a fish-bone by way of a needle. these garments were not very durable, but the climate was so fine that we did not suffer from the cold at any season of the year. i used to make myself a new dress every year when the birds came; but by the time that they returned, i had little left of my last year's suit, the fragments of which might be found among the rocky and steep parts of the ravine where we used to collect firing. living such a life, with so few wants, and those periodically and easily supplied, hardly varied from one year's end to another, it may easily be imagined that i had but few ideas. i might have had more, if my companion had not been of such a taciturn and morose habit; as it was, i looked at the wide ocean, and the sky, and the sun, moon, and stars, wondering, puzzled, afraid to ask questions, and ending all by sleeping away a large portion of my existence. we had no tools except the old ones, which were useless--no employment of any kind. there was a book, and i asked what it was for and what it was, but i got no answer. it remained upon the shelf, for if i looked at it i was ordered away, and at last i regarded it with a sort of fear, as if it were a kind of incomprehensible animal. the day was passed in idleness and almost silence; perhaps not a dozen sentences were exchanged in the twenty-four hours. my companion always the same, brooding over something which appeared ever to occupy his thoughts, and angry if roused up from his reverie. chapter ii the reader must understand that the foregoing remarks are to be considered as referring to my position and amount of knowledge when i was seven or eight years old. my master, as i called him, was a short square-built man, about sixty years of age, as i afterwards estimated from recollection and comparison. his hair fell down his back in thick clusters and was still of a dark color, and his beard was full two feet long and very bushy; indeed, he was covered with hair, wherever his person was exposed. he was, i should say, very powerful had he had occasion to exert his strength, but with the exception of the time at which we collected the birds, and occasionally going up the ravine to bring down faggots of wood, he seldom moved out of the cabin unless it was to bathe. there was a pool of salt water of about twenty yards square, near the sea, but separated from it by a low ridge of rocks, over which the waves only beat when the sea was rough and the wind on that side of the island. every morning almost we went down to bathe in that pool, as it was secure from the sharks, which were very numerous. i could swim like a fish as early as i can recollect, but whether i was taught, or learnt myself, i cannot tell. thus was my life passed away; my duties were trifling; i had little or nothing to employ myself about, for i had no means of employment. i seldom heard the human voice, and became as taciturn as my companion. my amusements were equally confined--looking down into the depths of the ocean, as i lay over the rocky wall which girded the major portion of the island, and watching the motions of the finny tribes below, wondering at the stars during the night season, eating, and sleeping. thus did i pass away an existence without pleasure and without pain. as for what my thoughts were i can hardly say, my knowledge and my ideas were too confined for me to have any food for thought. i was little better than a beast of the field, that lies down on the pasture after he is filled. there was one great source of interest however, which was, to listen to the sleeping talk of my companion, and i always looked forward to the time when the night fell and we repaired to our beds. i would lie awake for hours, listening to his ejaculations and murmured speech, trying in vain to find out some meaning in what he would say--but i gained little; he talked of "that woman"--appearing to be constantly with other men, and muttering about something he had hidden away. one night, when the moon was shining bright, he sat up in his bed, which, as i have before said, was on the floor of the cabin, and throwing aside the feathers upon which he had been lying, scratched the mould away below them and lifted up a piece of board. after a minute he replaced everything, and lay down again. he evidently was sleeping during the whole time. here, at last, was something to feed my thoughts with. i had heard him say in his sleep that he had hidden something--this must be the hiding place. what was it? perhaps i ought here to observe that my feelings towards this man were those of positive dislike, if not hatred; i never had received one kind word or deed from him, that i could recollect. harsh and unfeeling towards me, evidently looking upon me with ill-will, and only suffering me because i saved him some trouble, and perhaps because he wished to have a living thing for his companion,--his feelings towards me were reciprocated by mine towards him. what age i was at the time my mother died, i know not, but i had some faint recollection of one who treated me with kindness and caresses, and these recollections became more forcible in my dreams, when i saw a figure very different from that of my companion (a female figure) hanging over me or leading me by the hand. how i used to try to continue those dreams, by closing my eyes again after i had woke up! and yet i knew not that they had been brought about by the dim recollection of my infancy; i knew not that the figure that appeared to me was the shadow of my mother; but i loved the dreams because i was treated kindly in them. but a change took place by the hand of providence. one day, after we had just laid in our yearly provision of sea birds, i was busy arranging the skins of the old birds, on the flat rock, for my annual garment, which was joined together something like a sack, with holes for the head and arms to pass through; when, as i looked to seaward, i saw a large white object on the water. "look, master," said i, pointing towards it. "a ship, a ship!" cried my companion. "oh," thought i, "that is a ship; i recollect that he said they came here in a ship." i kept my eyes on her, and she rounded to. "is she alive?" inquired i. "you're a fool," said the man; "come and help me to pile up this wood that we may make a signal to her. go and fetch some water and throw on it, that there may be plenty of smoke. thank god, i may leave this cursed hole at last!" i hardly understood him, but i went for the water and brought it in the mess kid. "i want more wood yet," said he. "her head is this way, and she will come nearer." "then she is alive," said i. "away, fool!" said he, giving me a cuff on the head; "get some more water and throw on the wood." he then went into the cabin to strike a light, which he obtained by a piece of iron and flint, with some fine dry moss for tinder. while he was so employed, my eyes were fixed on the vessel, wondering what it could be. it moved through the water, turned this way and that. "it must be alive," thought i; "is it a fish or a bird?" as i watched the vessel, the sun was going down and there was not more than an hour's daylight. the wind was very light and variable, which accounted for the vessel so often altering her course. my companion came out with his hands full of smoking tinder, and putting it under the wood, was busy blowing it into a flame. the wood was soon set fire to, and the smoke ascended several feet into the air. "they'll see that," said he. "what then, it has eyes? it must be alive. does it mind the wind?" inquired i, having no answer to my first remark, "for look there, the little clouds are coming up fast," and i pointed to the horizon, where some small clouds were rising up and which were, as i knew from experience and constantly watching the sky, a sign of a short but violent gale, or tornado, of which we usually had one, if not two, at this season of the year. "yes; confound it," replied my companion, grinding his teeth, "it will blow her off! that's my luck." in the meantime, the smoke ascended in the air and the vessel approached nearer and nearer, until she was within, i suppose, two miles of the island, and then it fell quite calm. my companion threw more water on to increase the smoke, and the vessel now hauling up her courses, i perceived that there were people on board, and while i was arranging my ideas as to what the vessel might be, my companion cried out--"they see us, they see us! there's hope now. confound it, i've been here long enough. hurrah for old england!" and he commenced dancing and capering about like a madman. at last he said, "look out and see if she sends a boat, while i go into the cabin." "what's a boat?" said i. "out, you fool! tell me if you see anything," "yes, i do see something," replied i. "look at the squall coming along the water, it will be here very soon; and see how thick the clouds are getting up: we shall have as much wind and rain as we had the time before last, when the birds came." "confound it," replied he, "i wish they'd lower a boat, at all events;" and so saying, he went into the cabin, and i perceived that he was busy at his bed-place. my eyes were still fixed upon the squall, as i watched it advancing at a furious speed on the surface of the water; at first it was a deep black line on the horizon, but as it approached the vessel, it changed to white; the surface of the water was still smooth. the clouds were not more than ten degrees above the horizon, although they were thick and opaque--but at this season of the year, these tornadoes, as i may call them, visited us; sometimes we had one, sometimes more, and it was only when these gusts came on that we had any rain below. on board of the vessel--i speak now from my after knowledge--they did not appear to be aware of the danger; the sails were all set and flapping against the masts. at last, i perceived a small object close to the vessel; this i presumed was the boat which my companion looked for. it was like a young vessel close to the old one, but i said nothing; as i was watching and wondering what effect the rising wind would have upon her, for the observations of my companion had made me feel that it was important. after a time, i perceived that the white sails were disappearing, and that the forms of men were very busy, and moving on board, and the boat went back to the side of the vessel. the fact is, they had not perceived the squall until it was too late, for in another moment almost, i saw that the vessel bowed down to the fury of the gale, and after that, the mist was so great that i couldn't see her any more. "is she sending a boat, boy?" cried my companion. "i can't see her," replied i; "for she is hidden by the wind." as i said this, the tornado reached to where we stood, and threw me off my legs to the entrance of the cabin; and with the wind came down a torrent of rain, which drenched us, and the clouds covered the whole of the firmament, which became dark; the lightning darted in every direction, with peals of thunder which were deafening. i crawled into the cabin, into which the rain beat in great fury and flowed out again in a small river. my companion sat near me, lowering and silent. for two hours the tornado lasted without interruption; the sun had set, and the darkness was opaque. it was impossible to move against the force of the wind and the deluge of water which descended. speak, we did not, but shut our eyes against the lightning, and held our fingers to our ears to deaden the noise of the thunder, which burst upon us in the most awful manner. my companion groaned at intervals, whether from fear, i know not; i had no fear, for i did not know the danger, or that there was a god to judge the earth. gradually the fury of the gale abated, the rain was only heavy at intervals, and we could now hear the beating of the waves, as they dashed against the rocks beneath us. the sky also cleared up a little, and we could dimly discern the white foam of the breakers. i crawled out of the cabin, and stood upon the platform in front, straining my eyes to see the vessel. a flash of lightning, for a second, revealed her to me; she was dismasted, rolling in the awful breakers, which bore her down upon the high rocks, not a quarter of a mile from her. "there it is," exclaimed i, as the disappearance of the lightning left me in darkness, more opaque than ever. "she's done for," growled my companion, who, i was not till then aware, stood by my side. "no hopes this time, confound it!" then he continued for some time to curse and swear awfully, as i afterwards discovered, for i did not then know what was cursing and swearing. "there she is again," said i, as another flash of lightning revealed the position of the vessel. "yes, and she won't be there long; in five minutes she'll be dashed to atoms, and every soul perish." "what are souls?" inquired i. my companion gave me no reply. "i will go down to the rocks," said i, "and see what goes on." "go," said he, "and share their fate." chapter iii i left him, and commenced a careful descent of the precipices by which we were surrounded, but, before i had gone fifty paces, another flash of lightning was followed up by a loud shriek, which arrested my steps. where the noise came from, i could not tell, but i heard my companion calling to me to come back. i obeyed him, and found him standing where i had left him. "you called me, master?" "yes, i did; take my hand, and lead me to the cabin." i obeyed him, wondering why he asked me so to do. he gained his bed-place, and threw himself down on it. "bring the kid full of water," said he--"quick!" i brought it, and he bathed his head and face. after a time, he threw himself back upon the bed-place, and groaned heavily. "o god! it's all over with me," said he at last. "i shall live and die in this cursed hole." "what's the matter, master?" said i. he gave me no answer, but lay groaning and occasionally cursing. after a time, he was still, and then i went out again. the tornado was now over, and the stars were to be seen here and there, but still the wind was strong and the wild clouds flew fast. the shores of the island were one mass of foam, which was dashed high in the air and fell upon the black rocks. i looked for the vessel, and could see nothing--the day was evidently dawning, and i sat down and waited its coming. my companion was apparently asleep, for he lay without motion or noise. that some misfortune had happened, i was convinced, but what, i knew not, and i passed a long time in conjecture, dividing my thoughts between him and the vessel. at last the daylight appeared--the weather was moderating fast, although the waves still beat furiously against the rocky shore. i could see nothing of the vessel, and i descended the path, now slippery and insecure from the heavy fall of rain, and went as near to the edge of the rocks as the breaking billows would permit. i walked along, occasionally drenched by the spray, until i arrived where i had last seen the vessel. the waves were dashing and tossing about, as if in sport, fragments of timber, casks, and spars; but that was all i could see, except a mast and rigging, which lay alongside of the rocks, sometimes appearing above them on the summit of the waves, then descending far out of my sight, for i dared not venture near enough to the edge to look over. "then the vessel is dashed to pieces, as my companion said," thought i. "i wonder how she was made." i remained about an hour on the rocks, and then turned back to the cabin. i found my companion awake, and groaning heavily. "there is no ship," said i, "nothing but pieces of wood floating about." "i know that," replied he; "but what do i care now?" "i thought by your making a smoke, that you did care." "yes, i did then, but now i am blind, i shall never see a ship or anything else again. god help me! i shall die and rot on this cursed island." "blind, what is blind?" inquired i. "the lightning has burned out my eyes, and i can see nothing--i cannot help myself--i cannot walk about--i cannot do anything, and i suppose you will leave me here to die like a dog." "can't you see me?" "no, all is dark, dark as night, and will be as long as i live." and he turned on his bed-place and groaned. "i had hope, i lived in hope--it has kept me alive for many weary years, but now hope is gone, and i care not if i die to-morrow." and then he started up and turned his face towards me, and i saw that there was no light in his eyes. "bring me some more water, do you hear?" said he, angrily. "be quick, or i'll make you." but i now fully comprehended his condition, and how powerless he was. my feelings, as i have before said, were anything but cordial towards him, and this renewed violence and threatening manner had its effect. i was now, i suppose, about twelve or thirteen years old--strong and active. i had more than once felt inclined to rebel, and measure my strength against his. irritated, therefore, at his angry language, i replied-- "go for the water yourself." "ah!" sighed he, after a pause of some seconds, "that i might have expected. but let me once get you into my hands, i'll make you remember it." "i care not if i were in your hands," replied i; "i am as strong as you." for i had thought so many a day, and meant to prove it. "indeed! well, come here, and let us try." "no, no," replied i; "i'm not such a fool as you say i am--not that i'm afraid of you; for i shall have an axe in my hand always ready, and you will not find another." "i wish that i had tossed you over the cliffs when you were a child," said he, bitterly, "instead of nursing you and bringing you up." "then why have you not been kind to me? as far back as i can remember you have always treated me ill; you have made me work for you; and yet never even spoken kindly to me. i have wanted to know things, and you have never answered my questions, but called me a fool, and told me to hold my tongue. you have made me hate you, and you have often told me how you hated me--you know you have." "it's true, quite true," replied he, as if talking to himself. "i have done all that he says, and i have hated him. but i have had cause. come here, boy." "no," replied i; "do you come here. you have been master, and i have been boy, long enough. now i am master and you are boy, and you shall find it so." having said this, i walked out of the cabin and left him. he cried out, "don't leave me," but i heeded him not, and sat down at the edge of the fiat ledge of the rock before the cabin. looking at the white dancing waves, and deep in my own thoughts, i considered a long while how i should behave towards him. i did not wish him to die, as i knew he must if i left him. he could not obtain water from the rill without a great chance of falling over the cliff. in fact, i was now fully aware of his helpless state; to prove it to myself, i rose and shut my own eyes; tried if i could venture to move on such dangerous ground, and i felt sure that i could not. he was then in my power; he could do nothing; he must trust to me for almost everything. i had said, let what would follow, i would be master and he boy; but that could not be, as i must still attend upon him, or he would die. at last the thought came suddenly upon me--i will be master, nevertheless, for now he shall answer me all my questions, tell me all he knows, or he shall starve. he is in my power. he shall now do what i have ever tried to make him do, and he has ever refused. having thus arranged my plans, i returned to the cabin, and said to him: "hear what i say--i will be kind to you, and not leave you to starve, if you will do what i ask." "and what is that?" replied he. "for a long while i have asked you many questions, and you have refused to answer them. instead of telling me what i would know, you have beaten or thrown stones at me, called me names, and threatened me. i now give you your choice--either you shall promise to answer every question that i put to you, or you may live how you can, for i shall leave you to help yourself. if you do as i wish, i will do all i can to help you, but if you will not, thank yourself for what may happen. recollect, i am master now; so take your choice." "well," replied he slowly, "it's a judgment upon me, and i must agree to it. i will do what you wish." "well, then, to begin," said i, "i have often asked you what your name was, and what was mine. i must call you something, and master i will not, for i am master now. what is your name?" he groaned, ground his teeth, and then said, "edward jackson." "edward jackson! very well; and my name?" "no, i cannot bear the name. i cannot say it," replied he, angrily. "be it so," replied i. "then i leave you." "will you bring me some water for my eyes? they burn," said he. "no, i will not, nor anything else, unless you tell me my name." "frank henniker--and curses on it." "frank henniker. well, now you shall have the water." i went out, filled a kid, and put it by his side, "there is the water, jackson; if you want anything, call me. i shall be outside." "i have gained the mastery," thought i,--"it will be my turn now. he don't like to answer, but he shall, or he shall starve. why does he feel so angry at my name? henniker! what is the meaning of henniker, i wonder? i will make him tell me. yes, he shall tell me everything." i may here observe, that as for pity and compassion, i did not know such feelings. i had been so ill-treated, that i only felt that might was right; and this right i determined upon exercising to the utmost. i felt an inconceivable pleasure at the idea of my being the master, and he the boy. i felt the love of power, the pride of superiority. i then revolved in my mind the daily task which i would set him, before he should receive his daily sustenance. he should talk now as much as i pleased, for i was the master. i had been treated as a slave, and i was now fully prepared to play the tyrant. mercy and compassion i knew not. i had never seen them called forth, and i felt them not. i sat down on the flat rock for some time, and then it occurred to me that i would turn the course of the water which fell into the hole at the edge of the cliff; so that if he crawled there, he would not be able to obtain any. i did so, and emptied the hole. the water was now only to be obtained by climbing up, and it was out of his power to obtain a drop. food, of course, he could obtain, as the dried birds were all piled up at the farther end of the cabin, and i could not well remove them; but what was food without water? i was turning in my mind what should be the first question to put to him; and i had decided that i would have a full and particular account of how the vessel had been wrecked on the island, and who were my father and mother, and why i was named henniker--when i was roused by hearing jackson (as i shall in future call him) crying out, "boy, boy!" "boy, indeed," thought i--"no longer boy," and i gave no reply. again he called, and at last he cried out, "henniker," but i had been ruffled by his calling me boy, and i would not answer him. at last he fairly screamed my name, and then was silent. after a moment, i perceived that he crawled out of his bed-place, and feeling by the sides of the cabin, contrived on his hands and knees to crawl in the direction of the hole into which the water had previously been received; and i smiled at what i knew would be his disappointment when he arrived there. he did so at last: put his hand to feel the edge of the hole, and then down into it to feel for the water; and when he found that there was none, he cursed bitterly, and i laughed at his vexation. he then felt all the way down where the water had fallen, and found that the course of it had been stopped, and he dared not attempt anything further. he dashed his clenched hand against the rock. "oh! that i had him in this grasp--if it were but for one moment. i would not care if i died the next." "i do not doubt you," replied i to him, above, "but you have not got me in your hands, and you will not. go in to bed directly--quick," cried i, throwing a piece of rock at him, which hit him on the head. "crawl back as fast as you can, you fool, or i'll send another at your head directly. i'll tame you, as you used to say to me." the blow on the head appeared to have confused him; but after a time he crawled back to his bed-place, and threw himself down with a heavy groan. chapter iv i then went down to the water's edge to see if i could find anything from the wreck, for the water was smooth, and no longer washed over the rocks of the island. except fragments of wood, i perceived nothing until i arrived at the pool where we were accustomed to bathe; and i found that the sea had thrown into it two articles of large dimensions--one was a cask of the size of a puncheon, which lay in about a foot of water farthest from the seaward; and the other was a seaman's chest. what these things were i did not then know, and i wish the reader to recollect that a great portion of this narrative is compiled from after knowledge. the cask was firm in the sand, and i could not move it. the chest was floating; i hauled it on the rocks without difficulty, and then proceeded to open it. it was some time before i could discover how, for i had never seen a lock, or a hinge in my life; but at last, finding that the lid was the only portion of the chest which yielded, i contrived, with a piece of rock, to break it open. i found in it a quantity of seamen's clothes, upon which i put no value; but some of the articles i immediately comprehended the use of, and they filled me with delight. there were two new tin pannikins, and those would hold water. there were three empty wine bottles, a hammer, a chisel, gimlet, and some other tools, also three or four fishing-lines many fathoms long. but what pleased me most were two knives, one shutting up, with a lanyard sheath to wear round the waist; and the other an american long knife, in a sheath, which is usually worn by them in the belt. now, three or four years back, jackson had the remains of a clasp knife--that is, there was about an inch of the blade remaining--and this, as may be supposed, he valued very much; indeed, miserable as the article was, in our destitute state it was invaluable. this knife he had laid on the rock when fishing, and it had been dragged into the sea as his line ran out; and he was for many days inconsolable for its loss. we had used it for cutting open the birds when we skinned them, and, indeed this remains of a knife had been always in request. since the loss of it, we had had hard work to get the skins off the birds; i therefore well knew the value of these knives, which i immediately secured. the remainder of the articles in the chest, which was quite full, i laid upon the rocks, with the clothes, to dry; of most of them i did not know the use, and consequently did not prize them at the time. it was not until afterwards, when i had taken them to my companion, that i learned their value. i may as well here observe, that amongst these articles were two books, and, from the positive commands of my companion, not to touch the book in the cabin, i looked upon them with a degree of awe, and hesitated upon taking them in my hand; but, at last, i put them out to dry on the rocks, with the rest of the contents of the chest. i felt the knives, the blades were sharp; i put the lanyard of the clasp knife round my neck; the sheath knife, which was a formidable weapon, i made fast round my waist, with a piece of the fishing lines, which i cut off; and i then turned my steps towards the cabin, as night was coming on, though the moon was high in the heavens, and shining brightly. on my return, i found jackson in his bed-place; he heard me come in, and asked me, in a quiet tone, whether i would bring him some water? i answered, "no, that i would not, for what he had said about me, and what he would do, if he got me into his power. i'll tame you," cried i. "i'm master now, as you shall find." "you may be," replied he, quickly, "but still, that is no reason why you should not let me have some water. did i ever prevent you from having water?" "you never had to fetch it for me," i rejoined, "or you would not have taken the trouble. what trouble would you take for me, if i were blind now, and not you? i should become of no use to you, and you would leave me to die. you only let me live that you might make me work for you, and beat me cruelly. it's my turn now--you're the boy, and i'm the master." the reader must remember that i did not know the meaning of the word "boy"; my idea of it was, that it was in opposition to "master," and boy, with me, had the same idea as the word "slave." "be it so," replied he, calmly. "i shall not want water long." there was a quietness about jackson which made me suspect him, and the consequence was, that although i turned into my bed-place, which was on the ground at the side of the cabin opposite to his, i did not feel inclined to go to sleep, but remained awake, thinking of what had passed. it was towards morning when i heard him move; my face being turned that way, i had no occasion to stir to watch his motions. he crept very softly out of his bed-place towards me, listening, and advancing on his knees, not more than a foot every ten seconds. "you want me in your grasp," thought i, "come along," and i drew my american knife from its sheath, without noise, and awaited his approach, smiling at the surprise he would meet with. i allowed him to come right up to me; he felt the side of my bed, and then passed his right hand over to seize me. i caught his right hand with my left, and passing the knife across his wrist, more than half divided it from his arm. he gave a shriek of surprise and pain, and fell back. "he has a knife," exclaimed he, with surprise, holding his severed wrist with the other hand. "yes, he has a knife, and more than one," replied i, "and you see that he knows how to use it. will you come again? or will you believe that i'm master?" "if you have any charity or mercy, kill me at once," said he, as he sat up in the moonlight, in the centre of the floor of the cabin. "charity and mercy," said i, "what are they? i never heard of them." "alas! no," replied he, "i have shewed none--it's a judgment on me--a judgment on me for my many sins; lord, forgive me! first my eyes, now my right hand useless. what next, o lord of heaven?" "why, your other hand next," replied i, "if you try it again." jackson made no reply. he attempted to crawl back to his bed, but, faint with loss of blood, he dropped senseless on the floor of the cabin. i looked at him, and satisfied that he would make no more attempts upon me, i turned away, and fell fast asleep. in about two hours, i awoke, and looking round, perceived him lying on the floor, where he had fallen the night before. i went to him and examined him--was he asleep, or was he dead? he lay in a pool of blood. i felt him, and he was quite warm. it was a ghastly cut on his wrist, and i thought, if he is dead, he will never tell me what i want to know. i knew that he bound up cuts to stop the blood. i took some feathers from the bed, and put a handful on the wound. after i had done it, i bound his wrist up with a piece of fishing-line i had taken to secure the sheath knife round my waist, and then i went for some water. i poured some down his throat; this revived him, and he opened his eyes. "where am i?" said he faintly. "where are you?--why, in the cabin," said i. "give me some more water." i did so, for i did not wish to kill him. i wanted him to live, and to be in my power. after drinking the water he roused himself, and crawled back to his bed-place. i left him then, and went down to bathe. the reader may exclaim--what a horrid tyrant this boy is--why, he is as bad as his companion. exactly--i was so--but let the reader reflect that i was made so by education. from the time that i could first remember, i had been tyrannised over; cuffed, kicked, abused and ill-treated. i had never known kindness. most truly was the question put by me, "charity and mercy--what are they?" i never heard of them. an american indian has kind feelings--he is hospitable and generous--yet, educated to inflict, and receive, the severest tortures to and from, his enemies, he does the first with the most savage and vindictive feelings, and submits to the latter with indifference and stoicism. he has, indeed, the kindlier feelings of his nature exercised; still, this changes him not. he has been from earliest infancy brought up to cruelty, and he cannot feel that it is wrong. now, my position was worse. i had never seen the softer feelings of our nature called into play; i knew nothing but tyranny and oppression, hatred and vengeance. it was therefore not surprising that, when my turn came, i did to others as i had been done by. jackson had no excuse for his treatment of me, whereas, i had every excuse for retaliation. he did know better, i did not. i followed the ways of the world in the petty microcosm in which i had been placed. i knew not of mercy, of forgiveness, charity, or goodwill. i knew not that there was a god; i only knew that might was right, and the most pleasurable sensation which i felt, was that of anxiety for vengeance, combined with the consciousness of power. after i had bathed, i again examined the chest and its contents. i looked at the books without touching them. "i must know what these mean," thought i, "and i will know." my thirst for knowledge was certainly most remarkable, in a boy of my age; i presume for the simple reason, that we want most what we cannot obtain; and jackson having invariably refused to enlighten me on any subject, i became most anxious and impatient to satisfy the longing which increased with my growth. chapter v for three days did jackson lie on his bed; i supplied him with water, but he did not eat anything. he groaned heavily at times, and talked much to himself, and i heard him ask forgiveness of god, and pardon for his sins. i noted this down for an explanation. on the third day, he said to me, "henniker, i am very ill. i have a fever coming on, from the wound you have given me. i do not say that i did not deserve it, for i did, and i know that i have treated you ill, and that you must hate me, but the question is, do you wish me to die?" "no," replied i; "i want you to live, and answer all my questions, and you shall do so." "i will do so," replied he. "i have done wrong, and i will make amends. do you understand me? i mean to say, that i have been very cruel to you, and now i will do all you wish, and answer every question you may put to me, as well as i can." "that is what i want," replied i. "i know it is, but my wound is festering and must be washed and dressed. the feathers make it worse. will you do this for me?" i thought a little, and recollected that he was still in my power, as he could not obtain water. i replied, "yes, i will." "the cord hurts it, you must take it off." i fetched the kid of water, and untied the cord, and took away the feathers, which had matted together with the flow of blood, and then i washed the wound carefully. looking into the wound, my desire of information induced me to say, "what are these little white cords, which are cut through?" "they are the sinews and tendons," replied he, "by which we are enabled to move our hands and fingers; now these are cut through, i shall not have the use of my hand again." "stop a moment," said i, rising up, "i have just thought of something." i ran down to the point where the chest lay, took a shirt from the rock, and brought it back with me, and tearing it into strips, i bandaged the wound. "where did you get that linen?" said jackson. i told him. "and you got the knife there, too," said he, with a sigh. i replied in the affirmative. as soon as i had finished, he told me he was much easier, and said, "i thank you." "what is i thank you?" replied i. "it means that i am grateful for what you have done." "and what is grateful?" inquired i again. "you never said those words to me before." "alas, no," replied he; "it had been better if i had. i mean that i feel kindly towards you, for having bound up my wound, and would do anything for you if i had the power. it means, that if i had my eyesight, as i had a week ago, and was master, as i then was, that i would not kick nor beat you, but be kind to you. do you understand me?" "yes," replied i, "i think i do; and if you tell me all i want to know i shall believe you." "that i will as soon as i am well enough; but now i am too ill--you must wait a day or two, till the fever has left me." satisfied with jackson's promise, i tended him carefully, and washed and dressed his wound for the two following days. he said that he felt himself much better, and his language to me was so kind and conciliatory, that i hardly knew what to make of it; but this is certain, that it had a good effect upon me, and gradually the hatred and ill-will that i bore to him wore off, and i found myself handling him tenderly, and anxious not to give him more pain than was necessary, yet without being aware that i was prompted by better feelings. it was on the third morning that he said,-- "i can talk to you now; what do you want to know?" "i want to know the whole story of how we came to this island, who my father and mother were, and why you said that you hated me and my name?" "that," said jackson, after a silence of a few minutes, "will take some time. i could soon tell it you if it were not for the last question,--why i hated your name? but the history of your father is so mixed up with mine, that i cannot well tell one without the other. i may as well begin with my own history, and that will be telling you both." "then tell it me," replied i, "and do not tell me what is not true." "no; i will tell you exactly what it was," replied jackson; "you may as well know it as not.--your father and i were both born in england, which you know is your country by birth, and you also know that the language we talk is english." "i did not know it. tell me something about england before you say any more." i will not trouble the reader with jackson's description of england, or the many questions which i put to him. it was night-fall before he had finished answering, and before i was satisfied with the information imparted. i believe that he was very glad to hold his tongue, for he complained of being tired, and i dressed his wound and wetted the bandage with cold water for him before he went to sleep. i can hardly describe to the reader the effect which this uninterrupted flow of language had upon me; i was excited in a very strange way, and for many nights after could not sleep for hours. i may say here, i did not understand a great proportion of the meaning of the words used by jackson; but i gathered it from the context, as i could not always be interrupting him. it is astonishing how fast ideas breed ideas, and how a word, the meaning of which i did not understand when it was first used, became by repetition clear and intelligible; not that i always put the right construction on it, but if i did not find it answer when used at another time to my former interpretation of it, i would then ask and obtain an explanation. this did not however occur very often. as for this first night, i was positively almost drunk with words, and remained nearly the whole of it arranging and fixing the new ideas that i had acquired. my feelings towards jackson also were changed--that is, i no longer felt hatred or ill-will against him. these were swallowed up in the pleasure which he had afforded me, and i looked upon him as a treasure beyond all price,--not but that many old feelings towards him returned at intervals, for they were not so easily disposed of, but still i would not for the world have lost him until i had obtained from him all possible knowledge; and if his wound did not look well when i removed the bandage, i was much more distressed than he was. indeed, there was every prospect of our ultimately being friends, from our mutual dependence on each other. it was useless on his part, in his present destitute condition, to nourish feelings of animosity against one on whose good offices he was now so wholly dependant, or on my part, against one who was creating for me, i may say, new worlds for imagination and thought to dwell on. on the following morning, jackson narrated in substance (as near as i can recollect) as follows:-- "i was not intended for a sailor. i was taught at a good school, and when i was ten years old, i was put into a house of business as a clerk, where i remained at the desk all day long, copying into ledgers and day-books, in fact, writing what was required of me. this house was connected with the south american trade." "where is south america?" said i. "you had better let me tell my story," replied jackson, "and after i have done, you can ask any questions you like, but if you stop me, it will take a week to finish it; yesterday we lost the whole day." "that's very true," replied i, "then i will do so." "there were two other clerks in the counting-house--the head clerk, whose name was manvers, and your father, who was in the counting-house but a few months before me. our master, whose name was evelyn, was very particular with both your father and myself, scanning our work daily, and finding fault when we deserved it. this occasioned a rivalry between us, which made us both very active, and i received praise quite as often as he did. on sunday, mr evelyn used to ask your father and me to spend the day. we went to church in the forenoon and dined with him. he had a daughter a little younger than we were. she was your mother. both of us, as we grew up, were very attentive to her, and anxious to be in her good graces. i cannot say which was preferred at first, but i rather think that if anything i was the favourite, during the first two years of our being acquainted with her. i was more lively and a better companion than your father, who was inclined to be grave and thoughtful. we had been about four years in the counting-house, when my mother died--my father had been dead some time before i went into it--and at her death i found my share of her property to amount to about l . but i was not yet twenty-one years of age. i could not receive it for another year. mr evelyn, who had till then every reason to be satisfied with my conduct, used to joke with me, and say that as soon as i was of age, he would allow me, if i chose it, to put the money in the business, and thus obtain a small share in it--and such was my intention, and i looked forward to bright prospects and the hope of one day being married to your mother, and i have no doubt but such would have been the case, had i still conducted myself properly. but, before i was of age, i made some very bad acquaintances, and soon ran into expenses which i could not afford--and the worst was, that i contracted a habit of sitting up late at night, and drinking to excess, which i never have since got over, which proved my ruin then, and has proved my ruin through life. this little fortune of mine not only gave me consequence, but was the cause of my thinking very highly of myself. i now was more particular in my attentions to miss evelyn, and was graciously received by her father; neither had i any reason to complain of my treatment from the young lady. as for your father, he was quite thrown into the back-ground. he had no property nor hope of any, except what he might hereafter secure by his diligence and good conduct; and the attention i received from mr evelyn, and also the head clerk, who had an idea that i was to be a partner and consequently would become his superior, made him very melancholy and unhappy--for i believe that then he was quite as much in love with miss evelyn as i was myself; and i must tell you, that my love for her was unbounded, and she well deserved it. but all these happy prospects were overthrown by my own folly. as soon as it was known that i had property left to me, i was surrounded by many others who requested to be introduced to me, and my evenings were passed in what i considered very good company, but which proved the very reverse. by degrees i took to gambling, and after a time, lost more money than i could afford to pay. this caused me to have recourse to a jew, who advanced me loans at a large interest to be repaid at my coming of age. trying to win back my money, i at last found myself indebted to the jew for the sum of nearly l . the more that i became involved, the more reckless i became. mr evelyn perceived that i kept late hours, and looked haggard, as i well might; indeed, my position had now become very awkward. mr evelyn knew well the sum that had been left me, and how was i to account to him for the deficiency, if he proposed that i should put it into the business? i should be ruined in his opinion, and he never, i was convinced, would entrust the happiness of his daughter to a young man who had been guilty of such irregularities. at the same time, my love for her nearly amounted to adoration. never was there a more miserable being than i was for the last six months previous to my coming of age, and to drown my misery i plunged into every excess, and seldom, if ever, went to bed but in a state of intoxication. scheme after scheme did i propose to enable me to conceal my fault, but i could hit upon nothing. the time approached; i was within a few days of coming of age, when mr evelyn sent for me and then spoke to me seriously, saying, that out of regard to the memory of my father, with whom he had been very intimate, he was willing to allow me to embark my little capital in the business, and that he hoped that by my good conduct and application i might soon become a useful partner. i stammered some reply which surprised him; and he asked me to be more explicit. i stated that i considered my capital too small to be of much use in such a business as his, and that i preferred trying some quick method of doubling it; that as soon as i had so done i would accept his offer with gratitude. 'as you please,' replied he coolly; 'but take care, that in risking all, you do not lose all. of course, you are your own master,' and so saying, he left me, apparently much displeased and mortified. but circumstances occurred, which exposed the whole affair. when in company with my evening companions, i stated my intentions of trying my fortune in the east indies, not seriously, but talking at random. this came to the ears of the jew of whom i had borrowed the money; he thought that i intended to leave the kingdom without taking up my bonds, and immediately repaired to mr evelyn's counting-house, to communicate with the head clerk, and ascertain if the report was correct, stating also the sums i was indebted to him. the head clerk informed mr evelyn, and on the day upon which i became twenty-one years of age, he sent for me into his private room, and, after some remonstrances, to which i replied very haughtily, it ended in my being dismissed. the fact was, that mr evelyn had, since his last interview with me, made inquiries, and finding out i had been living a very riotous life, he had determined upon my leaving his service. as soon as my first burst of indignation was over, i felt what i had lost; my attachment to miss evelyn was stronger than ever, and i bitterly deplored my folly, but after a time, as usual, i had recourse to the bottle, and to drowning my cares in intemperance. i tried very hard to obtain an interview with miss evelyn previous to my quitting the house, but this mr evelyn would not permit, and a few days after, sent his daughter away, to reside, for a time with a relation in the country. i embarked my capital in the wine trade, and, could i have restrained myself from drinking, should have been successful, and in a short time might have doubled my property, as i stated to mr evelyn; but now, i had become an irreclaimable drunkard, and when that is the case, all hope is over. my affairs soon became deranged, and, at the request of my partner, they were wound up, and i found myself with my capital of l reduced to l . with this, i resolved to try my fortune in shipping; i procured a share in a brig, and sailed in her myself. after a time, i was sufficiently expert to take the command of her, and might have succeeded, had not my habit of drinking been so confirmed. when at ceylon, i fell sick, and was left behind. the brig was lost, and as i had forgotten to insure my portion of her, i was ruined. i struggled long, but in vain--intemperance was my curse, my bane, the millstone at my neck, which dragged me down: i had education, talents, and energy, and at one time, capital, but all were useless; and thus did i sink down, from captain of a vessel to mate, from mate to second mate, until i at last found myself a drunken sailor before the mast. such is my general history; to-morrow, i will let you know how, and in what way, your father and i met again, and what occurred, up to this present time." but i was too much bewildered and confused with what he had told me, to allow him to proceed, as he proposed. "no, no," replied i. "i now recollect all you have said, although i do not understand. you must first answer my questions, as to the meaning of words i never heard of before. i cannot understand what money is, what gaming is, and a great many more things you have talked about, but i recollect, and can repeat every word that you have said. to-morrow, i will recall it all over, and you shall tell me what i cannot make out; after that, you can go on again." "very well," replied he, "i don't care how long it takes me to answer your questions, for i am not very anxious to tell all about your father and myself." chapter vi i can hardly describe to the reader the effect which these conversations with jackson had upon me at first. if a prisoner were removed from a dark cell, and all at once introduced into a garden full of fruit and flowers, which he never before had an idea were in existence, he could not have been more filled with wonder, surprise, and pleasure. all was novelty and excitement, but, at the same time, to a great degree, above my comprehension. i had neither language nor ideas to meet it, and yet, i did, to a certain degree, comprehend. i saw not clearly, but sometimes as through a mist, at others through a dark fog, and i could discern little. every day, however, my increased knowledge of language and terms gave me an increased knowledge of ideas. i gained more by context than i did by any other means, and as i was by degrees enlightened, so my thirst for information and knowledge became every day more insatiable. that much that i considered i understood was erroneous, is certain, for mine was a knowledge, as yet, of theory only. i could imagine to myself, as far as the explanation i received, what such an object might be, and, having made up my ideas on the matter, i was content; further knowledge, would however incline me to think, and occasionally to decide, that the idea i had formed was incorrect, and i would alter it. thus did i flounder about in a sea of uncertainty, but still of exciting interest. if any one who has been educated, and has used his eyes in a civilised country, reads an account of people and things hitherto unknown to him, he can, from the description and from his own general knowledge, form a very correct idea of what the country contains. but then he has used his eyes--he has seen those objects, between which the parallel or the difference has been pointed out. now i had not that advantage. i had seen nothing but the sea, rocks, and sea-birds, and had but one companion. here was my great difficulty, which, i may say, was never surmounted, until i had visited and mixed with civilisation and men. the difficulty, however, only increased my ardour. i was naturally of an ingenious mind, i had a remarkable memory, and every increase of knowledge was to me a source of delight. in fact, i had now something to live for, before i had not; and i verily believe, that if jackson had been by any chance removed from me at this particular time, i should soon have become a lunatic, from the sudden drying up of the well which supplied my inordinate thirst for knowledge. some days passed before i asked jackson to continue his narrative, during which we lived in great harmony. whether it was that he was deceiving me, and commanding his temper till he had an opportunity of revenge, or whether it was that his forlorn and helpless condition had softened him down, i could not say, but he appeared gradually to be forming an attachment to me; i was however on my guard at all times. his wounded wrist had now healed up, but his hand was quite useless, as all the tendons had been severed. i had therefore less to fear from him than before. at my request that he would continue his history, jackson related as follows:-- "after sailing in vessel after vessel, and generally dismissed after the voyage for my failing of intemperance, i embarked on board a ship bound to chili, and after having been on the coast for nearly a year, we were about to proceed home with a cargo, when we anchored at valdivia, previous to our homeward voyage, as we had some few articles to ship at that port. we were again ready for sea, when we heard from the captain, that he had agreed to take two passengers, a gentleman and his wife, who wished to proceed to england. the cabin was cleared out, and every preparation made to receive them on board, and in the evening the boat was sent on shore for the luggage. i went in the boat, as i thought it likely that the gentleman would give the boat's crew something to drink; nor was i wrong--he gave us four dollars, which we spent immediately in one of the ventas, and were all more or less intoxicated. it had been arranged that the luggage should first be carried on board, and after that, we were to return for the passengers, as we were to sail early in the morning. we pulled off with the luggage, but on our arrival on board, i was so drunk, that the captain would not allow me to return in the boat, and i knew nothing of what had passed until i was roused up the next morning to assist in getting the ship under weigh. we had been under weigh two or three hours, and were clearing the land fast, when the gentleman passenger came on neck; i was then coiling down a rope on the quarter-deck, and as he passed by me, i looked at him, and i recognised him immediately as your father. years had passed--from a stripling he had grown a man, but his face was not to be mistaken. there he was, apparently a gentlemen of property and consideration; and i, what was i? a drunken sailor. all i hoped was, that he would not recognise me. shortly afterwards he went down again, and returned escorting his wife on deck. again i took a furtive curious glance, and perceived at once that she was that miss evelyn whom i had once so loved, and by my folly had lost. this was madness. as they stood on the deck enjoying the cool sea breeze, for the weather was delightfully fine, the captain came up and joined them. i was so confused at my discovery, that i knew not what i was about, and i presume was doing something very awkwardly; for the captain said to me--'jackson, what are you about, you drunken hound? i suppose you are not sober yet.' at the mention of my name, your father and mother looked at me, and as i lifted up my head to reply to the captain, they eyed me earnestly, and then spoke to each other in a low tone; after which they interrogated the captain. i could not hear what they said, but i was certain they were talking about me, and that they had suspected, if they had not recognised me. i was ready to sink to the deck, and, at the same time, i felt a hatred of your father enter my heart, of which, during his life, i never could divest myself. it was as i supposed; your father had recognised me, and the following morning he came up to me as i was leaning over the gunwale amidships, and addressed me,--'jackson,' said he, 'i am sorry to find you in this situation. you must have been very unfortunate to have become so reduced. if you will confide your history to me, perhaps i may, when we arrive in england, be able to assist you, and it really will give me great pleasure.' i cannot say that i replied very cordially. 'mr henniker,' said i, 'you have been fortunate by all appearances, and can therefore afford compassion to those who have not been so; but, sir, in our positions, i feel as if pity was in reality a sort of triumph, and an offer of assistance an insult. i am content with my present position, and will at all events not change it by your interference. i earn my bread honestly. you can do no more. times may change yet. it's a long road that has no turning to it. i wish you a good morning.' so saying, i turned from him, and walked away forward, with my heart full of bitterness and anger. from that hour he never spoke to me or noticed me again, but the captain was more severe upon me, and i ascribed his severity most unjustly to your father. we were about to go round cape horn, when the gale from the s.e. came on, which ended in the loss of the vessel. for several days we strove up against it, but at last the vessel, which was old, leaked so much from straining, that we were obliged to bear up and run before it, which we did for several days, the wind and sea continuing without intermission. at last we found ourselves among these islands, and were compelled occasionally to haul to the wind to clear them. this made her leak more and more, until at last she became water logged, and we were forced to abandon her in haste during the night, having no time to take anything with us; we left three men on board, who were down below. by the mercy of heaven we ran the boat into the opening below, which was the only spot where we could have landed. i think i had better stop now, as i have a good deal to tell you yet." "do then," replied i; "and now i think of it, i will bring up the chest and all the things which were in it, and you shall tell me what they are." i went down and returned with the clothes and linen. there were eight pair of trousers, nine shirts, besides the one i had torn up to bandage his wounds with, two pair of blue trousers, and two jackets, four white duck frocks, some shoes, and stockings. jackson felt them one by one with his hands, and told me what they were, and how worn. "why don't you wear some of them?" inquired i. "if you will give me leave, i will," replied he. "let me have a duck frock and a pair of trousers." i handed the articles to him, and then went back for the rest which i had left on the rocks. when i returned, with my arms full, i found that he had put them on, and his other clothes were beside him. "i feel more like a christian now," said he. "a christian," said i, "what is that?" "i will tell you by-and-bye. it is what i have not been for a long, long while," replied he. "now, what have you brought this time?" "here," said i, "what is this?" "this is a roll of duck, to make into frocks and trousers," replied he. "that is bees'-wax." he then explained to me all the tools, sailing-needles, fish-hooks, and fishing-lines, some sheets of writing-paper, and two pens, i had brought up with me. "all these are very valuable," said he, after a pause, "and would have added much to our comfort, if i had not been blind." "there are more things yet," said i; "i will go and fetch them." this time i replaced the remaining articles, and brought up the chest. it was a heavy load to carry up the rocks, and i was out of breath when i arrived and set it down on the cabin-floor. "now, i have the whole of them," said i. "now, what is this?" "that is a spy-glass--but, alas! i am blind--but i will show you how to use it, at all events." "here are two books," said i. "give them to me," said he, "and let me feel them. this one is a bible, i am quite sure by its shape, and the other is, i think, a prayer-book." "what is a bible, and what is a prayer-book?" replied i. "the bible is the word of god, and the prayer-book teaches us how to pray to him." "but who is god? i have often heard you say, 'o god!' and 'god damn'--but who is he?" "i will tell you to-night before we go to sleep," replied jackson, gravely. "very well, i shall remind you. i have found a little box inside the chest, and it is full of all manner of little things--strings and sinews." "let me feel them?" i put a bundle into his hand. "these are needles and thread for making and mending clothes--they will be useful bye-and-bye." at last the whole contents of the chest were overhauled and explained: i could not well comprehend the glass bottles, or how they were made, but i put them with the pannikins, and everything else, very carefully into the chest again, and hauled the chest to the farther end of the cabin, out of the way. before we went to bed that night, jackson had to explain to me who god was, but as it was only the commencement of several conversations on the subject, i shall not at present trouble the reader with what passed between us. jackson appeared to be very melancholy after the conversation we had had on religious matters, and was frequently agitated and muttering to himself. chapter vii i did not on the following day ask him to resume his narrative relative to my father and mother, as i perceived that he avoided it, and i already had so far changed as to have consideration for his feelings. another point had now taken possession of my mind, which was, whether it were possible to learn to read those books which i had found in the chest, and this was the first question that i put to jackson when we arose on that morning. "how is it possible?" replied he. "am i not blind--how can i teach you?" "is there no way?" replied i, mournfully. "let me think.--yes, perhaps there is a way--at all events we will try. you know which book i told you was the prayer-book?" "oh yes! the small, thin one." "yes--fetch it here. now," said he, when i put it into his hand, "tell me; is there a straight line down the middle of the page of the book, so that the words and letters are on both sides of it?" "yes, there is," replied i; "in every page, as you call it, there is a black line down the middle, and words and letters (i suppose they are) on both sides." "and among the letters, there are some larger than others, especially at the side nearest to the margin." "i don't know what margin is." "i mean here," replied he, pointing to the margin of the page. "yes, there are." "well then, i will open the book as near as i can guess at the morning service, and you tell me if you can find any part of the writing which appears to begin with a large round letter, like--what shall i say?--the bottom of a pannikin." "there is one on this leaf, quite round." "very well--now get me a small piece of stick, and make a point to it." i did so, and jackson swept away a small place on the floor of the cabin. "now," said he, "there are many other prayers which begin with a round o, as the letter is called; so i must first ascertain if this one is the one i require. if it is, i know it by heart, and by that shall be able to teach you all the letters of the alphabet." "what's an alphabet?" "the alphabet is the number of letters invented to enable us to read and write. there are twenty-six of them. now look, frank; is the next letter to o the shape of this?" and he drew with the pointed stick the letter u on the ground. "yes, it is," replied i. "and the next is like this," continued he, drawing the letter r, after he had smoothed the ground and effaced the u. "yes," replied i. "well then, to make sure, i had better go on. our is one word, and then there is a little space between; and next you come to an f." "yes," replied i, looking at what he had drawn and comparing it with the letter in the book. "then i believe that we are all right, but to make sure, we will go on for a little longer." jackson then completed the word "father," and "which art," that followed it, and then he was satisfied. "now," said he, "out of that prayer i can teach you all the letters, and if you pay attention, you will learn to read." the whole morning was passed in my telling him the different letters, and i very soon knew them all. during the day, the lord's prayer was gone through, and as i learnt the words as well as the letters, i could repeat it before night; i read it over to him twenty or thirty times, spelling every word, letter by letter, until i was perfect. this was my first lesson. "why is it called the lord's prayer?" said i. "because, when our lord jesus christ was asked by his followers in what way they ought to address god, he gave them this prayer to repeat, as being the most proper that they could use." "but who was jesus christ?" "he was the son of god, as i told you yesterday, and at the same time equal with god." "how could he be equal with god, if, as you said yesterday, god sent him down to be killed?" "it was with his own consent that he suffered death; but all this is a mystery which you cannot understand at present." "what's a mystery?" "that which you cannot understand." "do you understand it yourself?" "no, i do not; i only know that such is the fact, but it is above not only mine, but all men's comprehension. but i tell you honestly that, on these points, i am but a bad teacher; i have paid little attention to them during my life, and as far as religion is concerned, i can only give you the outlines, for i know no more." "but i thought you said, that people were to be punished or rewarded when they died, according as they had lived a bad or good life; and that to live a good life, people must be religious, and obey god's commands." "i did tell you so, and i told you the truth; but i did not tell you that i had led a bad life, as i have done, and that i have neglected to pay obedience to god's word and command." "then you will be punished when you die, will you not?" "alas! i fear so, child," replied jackson, putting his hands up to his forehead and hiding his face. "but there is still time," continued he, after a pause, and "o god of mercy!" exclaimed he, "how shall i escape?" i was about to continue the conversation, but jackson requested that i would leave him alone for a time. i went out and sat on a rock, watching the stars. "and those, he says, were all made by god,"--"and god made everything," thought i, "and god lives up beyond those stars." i thought for a long while, and was much perplexed. i had never heard anything of god till the night before, and what jackson had told me was just enough to make me more anxious and curious; but he evidently did not like to talk on the subject. i tried after a time, if i could repeat the lord's prayer, and i found that i could, so i knelt down on the rock, and looking up to a bright star, as if i would imagine it was god, i repeated the lord's prayer to it, and then i rose up and went to bed. this was the first time that i had ever prayed. i had learnt so much from jackson, latterly, that i could hardly retain what i had learnt; at all events, i had a very confused recollection in my brain, and my thoughts turned from one subject to another, till there was, for a time, a perfect chaos; by degrees things unravelled themselves, and my ideas became more clear; but still i laboured under that half-comprehension of things, which, in my position, was unavoidable. but now my mind was occupied with one leading object and wish, which was to learn to read. i thought no more of jackson's history and the account he might give me of my father and mother, and was as willing as he was that it should be deferred for a time. what i required now was to be able to read the books, and to this object my whole mind and attention were given. three or four hours in the earlier portion of the day, and the same time in the latter, were dedicated to this pursuit, and my attention never tired or flagged. in the course of, i think, about six weeks, i could read, without hesitation, almost any portion of the bible or prayer-book. i required no more teaching from jackson, who now became an attentive hearer, as i read to him every morning and evening a portion of the gospel or liturgy. but i cannot say that i understood many portions which i read, and the questions which i put to jackson puzzled him not a little, and very often he acknowledged that he could not answer them. as i afterwards discovered this arose from his own imperfect knowledge of the nature of the christian religion, which, according to his statement to me, might be considered to have been comprised in the following sentence: "if you do good on earth, you will go to heaven and be happy; if you do ill, you will go to hell and be tormented. christ came down from heaven to teach us what to do, and how to follow his example; and all that we read in the bible we must believe." this may be considered as the creed imparted to me at that time. i believe that jackson, like many others, knew no better, and candidly told me what he himself had been taught to believe. but the season for the return of the birds arrived, and our stock of provender was getting low. i was therefore soon obliged to leave my books, and work hard for jackson and myself. as soon as the young birds were old enough, i set to my task. and now i found how valuable were the knives which i had obtained from the seaman's chest; indeed, in many points i could work much faster. by tying the neck and sleeves of a duck frock, i made a bag, which enabled me to carry the birds more conveniently, and in greater quantities at a time, and with the knives i could skin and prepare a bird in one quarter of the time. with my fishing-lines also, i could hang up more to dry at one time, so that, though without assistance, i had more birds cured in the same time than when jackson and i were both employed in the labour. the whole affair, however, occupied me from morning to evening for more than three weeks, by which time the major portion of my provender was piled up at the back of the cabin. i did not, however, lose what i had gained in reading, as jackson would not let me go away in the morning, or retire to my bed in the evening, without my reading to him a portion of the bible. indeed, he appeared to be uncomfortable if i did not do so. at last, the work was ended, and then i felt a strong desire return to hear that portion of jackson's history connected with my father and mother, and i told him so. he did not appear to be pleased with my communication, or at all willing to proceed, but as i pressed him hard and showed some symptoms of resolution and rebellion, he reluctantly resumed his narrative. chapter viii "i wish you to understand," said he, "that my unwillingness to go on with my history, proceeds from my being obliged to make known to you the hatred that subsisted between your father and me; but if you will recollect, that we both had, in our early days, been striving to gain the same object--i mean your mother--and also that he had taken, as it were, what i considered to have been my place, in other points--that he had been successful in life, and i had been unfortunate, you must not then be surprised at my hating him as i did." "i understand nothing about your feelings," replied i; "and why he injured you by marrying my mother, i cannot see." "why i loved her." "well, suppose you did, i don't know what love is, and therefore cannot understand it, so tell me the story." "well then, when i left off, i told you that we had ventured to land upon this island by running the boat into the bathing-pond, but in so doing, the boat was beaten to pieces, and was of no use afterwards. we landed, eight persons in all--that is, the captain, your father, the carpenter, mate, and three seamen, besides your mother. we had literally nothing in the boat except three axes, two kids, and the two pannikins, which we have indeed now, but as for provisions or even water we had none of either. our first object, therefore, was to search the island to obtain water, and this we soon found at the rill which now runs down by the side of the cabin. it was very fortunate for us that we arrived exactly at the time that the birds had come on the island, and had just laid their eggs; if not, we must have perished with hunger, for we had not a fish-hook with us or even a fathom of line. "we collected a quantity of eggs, and made a good meal, although we devoured them raw. while we were running about, or rather climbing about, over the rocks, to find out what chance of subsistence we might have on the island, the captain and your father remained with your mother, who sat down in a sheltered spot near to the bathing-pool. on our return in the evening, the captain called us all together that he might speak to us, and he said that if we would do well we must all act in concert; that it also would be necessary that one should have the command and control of the others; that without such was the case, nothing would go on well;--and he asked us if we did not consider that what he said was true. we all agreed, although i, for one, felt little inclination to do so, but as all the rest said so, i raised no objections. the captain then told us that as we were all of one opinion, the next point, was to decide as to who should have the command--he said, that if it had been on ship-board, he of course would have taken it himself, but now we were on shore he thought that mr henniker was a much more competent person than he was, and he therefore proposed that the command should be given to him, and he, for one, would willingly be under his orders. to this proposal, the carpenter and mate immediately agreed, and at last two of the seamen. i was left alone, but i resisted, saying, that i was not going to be ordered about by a landsman, and that if i were to obey orders, it must be from a thorough-bred seaman. the other two sailors were of my way of thinking, i was sure, although they had given their consent, and i hoped that they would join me, which they appeared very much inclined to do. your father spoke very coolly, modestly, and prudently. he pointed out that he had no wish to take the command, and that he would cheerfully serve under the captain of the vessel, if it would be more satisfactory to all parties that such should be the case. but the captain and the others were positive, saying that they would not have their choice disputed by such a drunken vagabond as i was, and that if i did not like to remain with them, i might go to any part of the island that i chose. this conference ended by my getting in a passion, and saying that i would not be under your father's orders; and i was seizing one of the axes to go off with it, when the captain caught my arm and wrested it from me, stating that the axe was his property, and then telling me that i was welcome to go where i pleased. "i left them, therefore, and went away by myself to where the birds were hatching, as i wished to secure a supply of eggs. when the night closed in, i lay down upon the guano, and felt no cold, for the gale was now over, and the weather was very mild. "the next morning, when i awoke, i found that the sun had been up some time. i looked for the rest of my companions whom i had quitted, and perceived that they were all busily at work. the sea was quite calm; and, when the vessel went down after we left, many articles had floated, and had been washed to the island. some of the men were busy collecting spars and planks, which were near the rocks, and pushing them along with the boat-hooks to the direction of the bathing pond, where they hauled them over the ridge, and secured them. your father and mother, with the carpenter, were on this ledge where we now are, having selected it as a proper place for building a shelter, and were apparently very busy. the captain and one of the seamen were carrying up what spars and timber could be collected to where your father was standing with the carpenter. all appeared to be active, and working into each others hands; and i confess that, as i looked on, i envied them, and wished that i had been along with them; but i could not bear the idea of obeying any orders given by your father; and this alone prevented my joining them, and making my excuses for what i had done and said the previous night. i therefore swallowed some more birds' eggs raw, and sat down in the sun, looking at them as they worked. "i soon perceived that the carpenter had commenced operations. the frame of this cabin was, with the assistance of your father, before it was noon, quite complete and put up; and then they all went down to the bathing place, where the boat was lying with her bottom beaten out. they commenced taking her to pieces and saving all the nails; the other men carried up the portions of the boat as they were ripped off, to where the frame of the cabin had been raised. i saw your mother go up with a load in her hand, which i believed to be the nails taken from the boat. in a couple of hours the boat was in pieces and carried up, and then your father and most of the men went up to assist the carpenter. i hardly need tell what they did, as you have the cabin before you. the roof, you see, is mostly built out of the timbers of the boat; and the lower part out of heavier wood; and a very good job they made of it. before the morning closed in, one of the sides of the cabin was finished; and i saw them light a fire with the chips that had been cut off with the axes, and they then dressed the eggs and birds which they had collected the first day. "there was one thing which i had quite forgotten when i mutinied and left my companions, which was, the necessity of water to drink; and i now perceived that they had taken possession of the spot where the only water had as yet been found. i was suffering very much from thirst towards the close of the day, and i set off up the ravine to ascertain if there was none to be found in that direction. before night i succeeded in finding some, as you know, for you have often drunk from the spring when you have gone up for firewood. this gave me great encouragement, for i was afraid that the want of water would have driven me to submission. by way of bravado, i tore off, and cut with my knife, as many boughs of the underwood on the ravine as i well could carry, and the next morning i built a sort of wigwam for myself on the guano, to show them that i had a house over my head as well as they had; but i built it farther up to the edge of the cliff, above the guano plain, so that i need not have any communication with those who i knew would come for eggs and birds for their daily sustenance. "before the night of the following day set in, the cabin was quite finished. "the weather became warmer every day, and i found it very fatiguing to have to climb the ravine two or three times a day to procure a drink of water, for i had nothing to hold water in, and i thought that it would be better that i should take up my quarters in the ravine, and build myself a wigwam among the brushwood close to the water, instead of having to make so many journeys for so necessary an article. i knew that i could carry eggs in my hat and pocket-handkerchief sufficient for two or three days at one trip; so i determined that i would do so; and the next morning i went up the ravine, loaded with eggs, to take up my residence there. in a day or two i had built my hut of boughs, and made it very comfortable. i returned for a fresh supply of eggs on the third day, with a basket i had constructed out of young boughs, and which enabled me to carry a whole week's sustenance. then i felt quite satisfied, and made up my mind that i would live as a hermit during my sojourn on the island, however long it might be; for i preferred anything to obeying the orders of one whom i detested as i did your father. "it soon was evident, however, how well they had done in selecting your father as their leader. they had fancied that the birds would remain on the island, and that thus they would always be able to procure a supply. your father, who had lived so long in chili, knew better, and that in a few weeks they would quit their nesting place. he pointed this out to them, showing them what a mercy it was that they had been cast away just at this time, and how necessary it was to make a provision for the year. but this they could not imagine that it was possible to do without salt to cure the birds with; but he knew how beef was preserved without salt on the continent, and showed them how to dry the birds in the sun. while therefore i was up in the ravine, they were busy collecting and drying them in large quantities, and before the time of the birds leaving they had laid up a sufficient supply. it was he also that invented the fishing lines out of the sinews of the legs of the birds, and your mother who knotted them together. at first, they caught fish with some hooks made of nails, but your father showed them the way to take them without a hook, as you have learnt from me, and which he had been shown by some of the indians on the continent. owing to your father, they were well prepared when the birds flew away with their young ones, while i was destitute. previous to the flight, i had fared but badly, for the eggs contained the young birds half formed, and latterly so completely formed that i could not eat them, and as i had no fire and did not understand drying them, i had no alternative but eating the young birds raw, which was anything but pleasant. i consoled myself, however, with the idea that your father and mother and the rest were faring just as badly as myself, and i looked forward to the time when the birds would begin to lay eggs again, when i resolved to hoard up a much larger supply while they were fresh. but my schemes were all put an end to, for in two days, after a great deal of noise and flying about in circles, all the birds, young and old, took wing, and left me without any means of future subsistence. "this was a horrid discovery, and i was put to my wits' ends. i wandered over the guano place, and, after the third day of their departure, was glad to pick up even a dead bird with which to appease my hunger. at the same time, i wondered how my former companions got on, for i considered that they must be as badly off as i was. i watched them from behind the rocks, but i could perceive no signs of uneasiness. there was your mother sitting quietly on the level by the cabin, and your father or the captain talking with her. i perceived, however, that two of the party were employed fishing off the rocks, and i wondered where they got their fishing-lines, and at last i concluded that it was by catching fish that they supported themselves. this, however, did not help me--i was starving, and starvation will bring down the pride of any man. on the fifth day, i walked down to the rocks, to where one of the seamen was fishing, and having greeted him, i told him that i was starving, and asked for something to eat. "'i cannot help you,' replied he; 'i have no power to give anything away; it is more than i dare do. you must apply to mr henniker, who is the governor now. what a foolish fellow you were to mutiny, as you did; see what it has brought you to.' "'why,' replied i, 'if it were not for fishing, you would not be better off than i am.' "'oh yes we should be; but we have to thank him for that--without him, i grant, we should not have been. we have plenty of provisions, although we fish to help them out.' "this puzzled me amazingly, but there was no help for it. i could starve no longer, so up i went to the level where your father was standing with the captain, and in a swaggering sort of tone, said that i had come back, and wanted to join my comrades. the captain looked at me, and referred me to your father, who said that he would consult with the rest when they came to dinner, as without their permission he could do nothing, and then they both turned away. in the meantime i was ravenous with hunger, and was made more so by perceiving that two large fish were slowly baking on the embers of the fire, and that your mother was watching them; however, there was no help for it, and i sat down at some little distance, anxiously waiting for the return of the rest of the party, when my fate would be decided. my pride was now brought down so low that i could have submitted to any terms which might have been dictated. in about two hours they were all assembled to dinner, and i remained envying every morsel that they ate, until the repast was finished; when after some consultation, i was ordered to approach--which i did--and your father addressed me: 'jackson, you deserted us when you might have been very useful, and when our labour was severe; now that we have worked hard, and made ourselves tolerably comfortable, you request to join us, and partake with us of the fruits of our labour and foresight. you have provided nothing, we have--the consequence is that we are in comparative plenty, while you are starving. now i have taken the opinion of my companions, and they are all agreed, that as you have not assisted when you are wanted, should we now allow you to join us, you will have to work more than the others to make up an equivalent. it is therefore proposed that you shall join us on one condition, which is, that during the year till the birds again visit the island, it will be your task to go up to the ravine every day, and procure the firewood which is required. if you choose to accept these terms, you are permitted to join, always supposing that to all the other rules and regulations which we have laid down for our guidance, you will be subject as well as we are. these are our terms, and you may decide as you think proper.' i hardly need say, that i gladly accepted them, and was still more glad when the remnants of the dinner were placed before me; i was nearly choked, i devoured with such haste until my appetite was appeased. "when this was done, i thought over the conditions which i had accepted, and my blood boiled at the idea that i was to be in a manner the slave to the rest, as i should have to work hard every day. i forgot that it was but justice, and that i was only earning my share of the years' provisions, which i had not assisted to collect. my heart was still more bitter against your father, and i vowed vengeance if ever i had an opportunity, but there was no help for it. every day i went up with a piece of cord and an axe, cut a large faggot of wood, and brought it down to the cabin. it was hard work, and occupied me from breakfast to dinner-time, and i had no time to lose if i wanted to be back for dinner. the captain always examined the faggot, and ascertained that i had brought down a sufficient supply for the day's consumption." chapter ix "a year passed away, during which i was thus employed. at last, the birds made their appearance, and after we had laid up our annual provision, i was freed from my task, and had only to share the labour with others. it was now a great source of speculation how long we were likely to remain on the island; every day did we anxiously look out for a vessel, but we could see none, or if seen, they were too far off from the island to permit us to make signals to them. at last we began to give up all hope, and, as hope was abandoned, a settled gloom was perceptible on most of our faces. i believe that others would have now mutinied as well as myself, if they had known what to mutiny about. your father and mother were the life and soul of the party, inventing amusements, or narrating a touching story in the evenings, so as to beguile the weary time; great respect was paid to your mother, which she certainly deserved; i seldom approached her; she had taken a decided dislike to me, arising, i presume, from my behaviour towards her husband, for now that i was again on a footing with the others, i was as insolent to him as i dared to be, without incurring the penalty attached to insubordination, and i opposed him as much as i could in every proposal that he brought forward--but your father kept his temper, although i lost mine but too often. the first incident which occurred of any consequence, was the loss of two of the men, who had, with your father's permission, taken a week's provisions, with the intention of making a tour round the island, and ascertaining whether any valuable information could be brought back; they were the carpenter and one of the seamen. it appears that during their return, as they were crossing the highest ridge, they, feeling very thirsty, and not finding water, attempted to refresh themselves by eating some berries which they found on a plant. these berries proved to be strong poison, and they returned very ill--after languishing a few days, they both died. "this was an event which roused us up, and broke the monotony of our life; but it was one which was not very agreeable to dwell upon, and yet, at the same time, i felt rather pleasure than annoyance at it--i felt that i was of more consequence, and many other thoughts entered my mind which i shall not now dwell upon. we buried them in the guano, under the first high rock, where, indeed, the others were all subsequently buried. three more months passed away, when the other seaman was missing. after a search, his trousers were found at the edge of the rock. he had evidently been bathing in the sea, for the day on which he was missed, the water was as smooth as glass. whether he had seen something floating, which he wished to bring to land, or whether he had ventured for his own amusement, for he was an excellent swimmer, could never be ascertained--any more than whether he had sunk with the cramp, or had been taken down by a shark. he never appeared again, and his real fate is a mystery to this day, and must ever remain so. thus were we reduced to four men--your father, the captain, the mate, and me. but you must be tired--i will stop now, and tell you the remainder some other time." although i was not tired, yet, as jackson appeared to be so, i made no objection to his proposal, and we both went to sleep. while i had read the bible to jackson, i had often been puzzled by numbers being mentioned, and never could understand what was meant, that is, i could form no of the quantity represented by seventy or sixty, or whatever it might be. jackson's answer was, "oh! it means a great many; i'll explain to you bye-and-bye, but we have nothing to count with, and as i am blind, i must have something in my hand to teach you." i recollected that at the bathing pool there were a great many small shells on the rocks, about the size of a pea; there were live fish in them, and they appeared to crawl on the rocks. i collected a great quantity of these, and brought them up to the cabin, and requested jackson would teach me to count. this he did, until he came to a thousand, which he said was sufficient. for many days i continued to count up to a hundred, until i was quite perfect, and then jackson taught me addition and subtraction to a certain degree, by making me add and take away from the shells, and count the accumulation, or the remainder. at last, i could remember what i had gained by manipulation, if i may use the term, but further, i could not go, although addition had, to a degree, made me master of multiplication, and subtraction gave me a good idea of division. this was a new delight to me, and occupied me for three or four weeks. at last i had, as i thought, learned all that he could teach me in his blind state, and i threw away the shells, and sighed for something more. of a sudden it occurred to me, that i had never looked into the book which still lay upon the shelf in the cabin, and i saw no reason now that i should not; so i mentioned it to jackson, and asked him why i might not have that book? "to be sure you may," replied he; "but you never asked for it, and i quite forgot it." "but when i asked you before, you were so particular that i should not open it. what was your reason then?" jackson replied--"i had no reason except that i then disliked you, and i thought that looking into the book would give you pleasure. it belonged to that poor fellow that was drowned; he had left it in the stern-sheets of the boat when we were at valdivia, and had forgotten it, and we found it there when we landed on the island. take it down, it will amuse you." i took down the book, and opened it. it was, if i recollect right, called "mavor's natural history." at all events, it was a natural history of beasts and birds, with a plate representing each, and a description annexed. it would be impossible for me to convey to the reader my astonishment and delight. i had never seen a picture or drawing in my life. i did not know that such things existed. i was in an ecstasy of delight as i turned over the pages, hardly taking sufficient time to see one object before i hastened on to another. for two or three hours did i thus turn over leaves, without settling upon any one animal; at last my pulse beat more regularly, and i commenced with the lion. but now what a source of amusement, and what a multitude of questions had to be answered by my companion. he had to tell me all about the countries in which the animals were found; and the description of the animals, with the anecdotes, were a source of much conversation; and, what was more, the foregrounds and backgrounds of the landscapes with which the animals were surrounded produced new ideas. there was a palm-tree, which i explained to jackson, and inquired about it. this led to more inquiries. the lion himself occupied him and me for a whole afternoon, and it was getting dark when i lay down, with my new treasure by my side. i had read of the lion in the scriptures, and now i recalled all the passages; and before i slept i thought of the bear which destroyed the children who had mocked elisha the prophet, and i determined that the first animal i would read about the next morning should be the bear. i think that this book lasted me nearly two months, during which time, except reading a portion every night and morning to jackson, the bible and prayer-book were neglected. sometimes i thought that the book could not be true; but when i came to the birds, i found those which frequented the island so correctly described, that i had no longer any doubt on the subject. perhaps what interested me most were the plates in which the barn-door fowls and the peacock were described, as in the background of the first were a cottage and figures, representing the rural scenery of england, my own country; and in the second there was a splendid mansion, and a carriage and four horses driving up to the door. in short, it is impossible to convey to the reader the new ideas which i received from these slight efforts of the draftsman to give effect to his drawing. the engraving was also a matter of much wonder, and required a great deal of explanation from jackson. this book became my treasure, and it was not till i had read it through and through, so as almost to know it by heart, that at length i returned to my bible. all this time i had never asked jackson to go on with his narrative; but now that my curiosity was appeased, i made the request. he appeared, as before, very unwilling; but i was pertinacious, and he was worried into it. "there were but four of us left and your mother, and the mate was in a very bad state of health; he fretted very much, poor fellow, for he had left a young wife in england, and what he appeared to fear most was, that she would be married again before he could get home. it ended in a confirmed liver complaint, which carried him off nine months afterwards; and thus was one more of our companions disposed of. he died very quietly, and gave me his sleeve-buttons and watch to deliver to his wife, if ever i should escape from the island. i fear there is little chance of her ever receiving them." "where are they?" said i, recollecting how i had seen him lift up the board under his bed-place. "i have them safe," replied jackson, "and if necessary, will tell you where to find them." this reply satisfied me, and i allowed him to proceed. "we buried him in the guano, by the side of the two others, and now we were but three. it was at this time that your mother was confined and you were born; that is about three months after the death of the mate. we had just finished laying in our stock of birds for the year when she was taken ill, sooner than was expected, and it was supposed that it was occasioned by over-exertion at the time. however, she got up very well without any medical assistance, and your father was much pleased at having a son, for he had been married five years without any prospect of a family. i ought to observe that the loss of our companions, one after another, had had the effect of bringing those that remained much closer together; i was treated with more kindness by both your father and mother, and the captain, and i returned it as well as my feelings would permit me, for i could not altogether get rid of my animosity to your father. however, we became much more confidential, that is certain, and i was now treated as an equal. "six months passed away and you had become a thriving child, when a melancholy occurrence"--here jackson covered up his face with his hands and remained for some time silent. "go on," said i, "jackson, i know that they all died somehow or another." "very true," replied he, recovering himself. "well, your father disappeared. he had gone to the rocks to fish, and when i was sent to bring him home to dinner, he was nowhere to be found. it was supposed that a larger fish than usual had been fast to his line, and that he had been jerked off the rocks into the water and the sharks had taken him. it was a dreadful affair," continued jackson, again covering his face. "i think," replied i, "that any man in his senses would have allowed the fish to have taken the line rather than have been dragged into the water. i don't think that the supposed manner of his death is at all satisfactory." "perhaps not," replied jackson; "his foot may have slipped, who knows? we only could guess; the line was gone as well as he, which made us think what i said. still we searched everywhere, but without hope; and our search--that is the captain's and mine, for your poor mother remained with you in her arms distracted--was the cause of another disaster--no less than the death of the captain. they say misfortunes never come single, and surely this was an instance of the truth of the proverb." "how did he die?" replied i, gravely, for somehow or other i felt doubts as to the truth of what he was saying. jackson did not reply till after a pause, when he said-- "he was out with me up the ravine collecting firewood, and he fell over the high cliff. he was so injured that he died in half an hour." "what did you do?" "what did i do--what could i do but go back and break the news to your mother, who was distracted when she heard it; for the captain was her friend, and she could not bear me." "well go on, pray," said i. "i did all that i could to make your mother comfortable, as there now were but her, you, and i, left on the island. you were then about three years old; but your mother always hated me, and appeared now to hate me more and more. she never recovered the loss of your father to whom she was devotedly attached; she pined away, and after six months she died, leaving you and me only on the island. now you know the whole history, and pray do not ask me any more about it." chapter x jackson threw himself back in his bed-place and was silent. so was i, for i was recalling all that he had told me, and my doubts were raised as to the truth of it. i did not like his hurrying over the latter portion of his narrative in the way which he had done. what he had said about my mother was not satisfactory. i had for some time been gradually drawing towards him, not only shewing, but feeling, for him a great increase of goodwill; but suspicion had entered my mind, and i now began to feel my former animosity towards him renewed. a night's sleep, however, and more reflection, induced me to think that possibly i was judging him too harshly, and as i could not afford to quarrel with him, our intercourse remained as amicable as before, particularly as he became more and more amiable towards me and did everything in his power to interest and amuse me. i was one day reading to him the account of a monkey given in the book of natural history, in which it is said that that animal is fond of spirits and will intoxicate itself, and jackson was telling me many anecdotes of monkeys on board of the vessel he had sailed in, when it occurred to me that i had never thought of mentioning to him or of ascertaining the contents of the cask which had been thrown into the bathing-pool with the seaman's chest, and i did so then to jackson, wondering at its contents and how they were to be got at. jackson entered into the question warmly, explaining to me how and where to bore holes with a gimlet, and making two spiles for me to stop the holes with. as soon as he had done so, curiosity induced me to go down to the pool where the cask had been lying so long, in about a foot-and-half water. by jackson's directions i took a pannikin with me, that i might bring him a specimen of the contents of the cask, if they should prove not to be water. i soon bored the hole above and below, following jackson's directions, and the liquor, which poured out in a small stream into the pannikin, was of a brown colour and very strong in odour, so strong, indeed, as to make me reel as i walked back to the rocks with the pannikin full of it. i then sat down, and after a time tasted it. i thought i had swallowed fire, for i had taken a good mouthful of it. "this cannot be what jackson called spirits," said i. "no one can drink this--what can it be?" although i had not swallowed more than a table-spoonful of it, yet, combined with the fumes of the liquor which i had inhaled when drawing it off into the pannikin, the effect was to make my head swim, and i lay down on the rock and shut my eyes to recover myself. it ended in my falling asleep for many hours, for it was not much after noon when i went to the cask, and it was near sunset when i awoke, with an intense pain in my head. it was some time before i could recollect where i was, or what had passed, but the pannikin full of liquor by my side first reminded me; and then perceiving how late it was, and how long i must have slept, i rose up, and taking the pannikin in my hand, i hastened to return to the cabin. as i approached, i heard the voice of jackson, whose hearing, since his blindness, i had observed, had become peculiarly acute. "is that you, frank?" "yes," replied i. "and what has kept you so long--how you have frightened me. god forgive me, but i thought that i was to be left and abandoned to starvation." "why should you have thought that?" replied i. "because i thought that some way or another you must have been killed, and then i must have died, of course. i never was so frightened in my life, the idea of dying here all alone--it was terrible." it occurred to me at the time that the alarm was all for himself, for he did not say a word about how sorry he should have been at any accident happening to me, but i made no remark, simply stating what had occurred, and my conviction that the contents of the cask were not drinkable. "have you brought any with you?" inquired he, sharply. "yes, here it is," said i, giving him the pannikin. he smelt it, and raised it to his lips--took about a wine-glassful of it, and then drew his breath. "this is delightful," said he; "the best of old rum, i never tasted so good. how big did you say that the cask was?" i described it as well as i could. "indeed, then it must be a whole puncheon--that will last a long while." "but do you mean to say that you really like to drink that stuff?" inquired i. "do i like to drink it? yes, it is good for men, but it's death to little boys. it will kill you. don't you get fond of it. now promise me that you will never drink a drop of it. you must not get fond of it, or some sad accident will happen to you." "i don't think you need fear my drinking it," replied i. "i have had one taste, as i told you, and it nearly burnt my mouth. i shan't touch it again." "that's right," replied jackson, taking another quantity into his mouth. "you are not old enough for it; bye-and-bye, when you are as old as i am, you may drink it, then it will do you good. now, i'll go to bed, it's time for bed. bring the pannikin after me and put it by my side. take care you don't spill any of it." jackson crawled to his bed, and i followed him with the pannikin, and put it by his side, as he requested, and i returned to my own resting-place, without however having the least inclination to sleep, having slept so long during the day. at first jackson was quiet, but i heard him occasionally applying to the pannikin, which held, i should say, about three half-pints of liquor. at last he commenced singing a sea song; i was much surprised, as i had never heard him sing before; but i was also much pleased, as it was the first time that i had ever heard anything like melody, for he had a good voice and sang in good tune. as soon as he had finished, i begged him to go on. "ah!" replied he, with a gay tone i had never heard from him before. "you like songs, do you? my little chap. well, i'll give you plenty of them. 'tis a long while since i have sung, but it's a 'poor heart that never rejoiceth.' the time was when no one in company could sing a song as i could, and so i can again, now that i have something to cheer my heart. yes, here's another for you. i shall rouse them all out by-and-bye, as i get the grog in--no fear of that--you find the stuff, and i'll find songs." i was surprised at first at this unusual mirth; but recollecting what jackson had told me about his intemperance, i presumed that this mirth which it produced was the cause why he indulged so much in it; and i felt less inclined to blame him. at all events, i was much pleased with the songs that he sang to me one after another for three or four hours, when his voice became thick, and, after some muttering and swearing, he was quite silent, and soon afterwards snored loudly. i remained awake some time longer, and then i also sank into forgetfulness. when i awoke the next morning, i found jackson still fast asleep. i waited for him for our morning meal; but, as he did not wake, i took mine by myself, and then i walked out to the rock, where i usually sat, and looked round the horizon to see if there was anything in sight. the spy-glass, from having been in sea water, was of no use, and i did not know what to do with it; nor could jackson instruct me. after i had been out about an hour i returned, and found jackson still snoring, and i determined to wake him up. i pushed him for some time without success; but, at last he opened his eyes, and said: "my watch already?" "no," said i; "but you have slept so long, that i have waked you up." he paused, as if he did not know my voice, and then said: "but i can't see anything; how's this?" "why, don't you know that you're blind, jackson?" replied i, with amazement. "yes, yes; i recollect now. is there anything in the pannikin?" "not a drop," replied i; "why, you must have drunk it all." "yes, i recollect now. get me some water, my good boy; for i am dying with thirst." i went for the water; he drank the whole pannikin, and asked for more. "won't you have something to eat?" said i. "eat? oh no; i can't eat anything. give me drink;" and he held out his hand for the pannikin. i perceived how it trembled and shook, and i observed it to him. "yes," replied he, "that's always the case after a carouse, and i had a good one last night--the first for many a year. but there's plenty more of it. i wish you would get me a little more now, frank, just to steady me; just about two or three mouthfuls, no more; that is, no more till night-time. did i make much noise last night?" "you sang several songs," replied i, "with which i was much amused." "i'm glad that you liked them. i used to be considered a good singer in my day; indeed, if i had not been such good company, as they term it, i had not become so fond of drinking. just go and fetch me about half an inch high of the pannikin, my good fellow, that's all i want now." i went down to the cask, drew of the quantity that he requested, and brought it to him. he drank it off; and, in a few moments, appeared to be quite himself again. he then asked for something to eat, and commenced telling me a variety of stories relative to what he termed jolly parties in his former days; so that the day passed very agreeably. as the night closed in, he said: "now, frank, i know you want to hear some more songs; so go down and bring me up a full pannikin, and i will sing you plenty." i complied with his request, for i was anxious to be again amused as i was the night before. the consequence was that this night was, in the early portion of it, but a repetition of the previous one. jackson took the precaution to get into his bed-place before he commenced drinking; and, as soon as he had taken his second dose, he asked me what sort of songs i liked. my reply naturally was, that i had never heard any one sing but him, and therefore could not say. "what did i sing to you last night?" said he. i replied as well as i could. "ah," said he, "they were all sea songs; but now i will give you something better." after a little thought, he commenced singing a very beautiful and plaintive one, and certainly much better than he had sung the night before; for he now was sober. the consequence was, that i was still more delighted; and, at my request, he sang several others; but at last his speech became rapid and thick, and he would not sing any more, using some very coarse expressions to me when i asked him. for a time he was silent, and i thought that he was going to sleep, and i was reflecting upon the various effects which the liquor appeared to have upon him, when i heard him talking and muttering, and i listened. "never mind how i got them," said he; "quite as honestly as other people, old moshes. there they are, do you choose to buy them?" then there was a pause, after which he commenced: "they're as pure diamonds as ever came out of a mine. i know that, so none of your lies, you old jew. where did i come by them? that's no concern of yours. the question is, will you give me the price, or will you not? well, then, i'm off. no, i won't come back, you old thief." here he swore terribly, and then was silent. after a while he recommenced-- "who can ever prove that they were henniker's diamonds?" i started up at the mention of my father's name; i rested with my hands on the floor of the cabin, breathless as to what would come next. "no, no," continued jackson, "he's dead, and food for fishes--dead men tell no tales--and she's dead, and the captain's dead, all dead--yes, all;" and he gave a bitter groan and was silent. the day was breaking, and i could just see him as he lay; but he said no more, and appeared to breathe heavily. as the sun rose, i got out of my bed-place; and, now that it was broad daylight, i looked at jackson. he was lying on his back; his brow was covered with large drops of perspiration, and his hands were clenched together. although asleep, he appeared, by the convulsive twitching of the muscles of his face, to be suffering and in great agony. occasionally he groaned deeply, and his lips appeared to move, but no sound proceeded from them. i perceived that the pannikin of liquor was not finished, one-third at least having been left. chapter xi i then went out of the cabin and took my usual seat, and began to reflect upon what i had heard. he had talked about diamonds; now i knew what diamonds were, so far as they were of great value, for i had read of them in the bible, and jackson had explained the value of precious stones to me, and had told me of diamonds of very great value indeed. then he said that they were henniker's diamonds--he must have meant my father, that was positive. and that no one could prove they were his--this implied that jackson had no right to them; indeed how could he have? and then i recalled to mind his having a secret hiding place under his bed, where i presumed the diamonds were deposited. i then turned over in my mind what he had told me relative to the death of my father, the captain, and my mother, how confused he was, and how glad he was to get rid of the subject, and how unsatisfactory i thought his account was at the time. after much cogitation, i made up my mind that jackson had not told me the truth, and that there was a mystery yet to be explained; but how was i to get at it? there was but one way. the liquor made him talk. i would supply him with liquor, and by degrees i would get the truth out of him. at the same time i would not allow him to suppose that he had said anything to commit himself, or that i had any suspicions. how naturally do we fall into treachery and deceit, from the evil in our own hearts, without any assistance or example from the world. how could i have learnt deceit? isolated as i had been, must it not have been innate? i returned to the cabin, and woke jackson without much difficulty, since he had not drunk so much as on the previous night. "how are you this morning?" said i. "not very well; i have had some bad dreams." "well you sang me some beautiful songs," replied i. "yes, i recollect," said he; "but i fell asleep at last." "yes, you refused to sing any more, and went off in a loud snore." jackson got out of his bed-place, and i gave him his meal. we talked during the whole day about singing, and i hummed the air which had pleased me most. "you have got the air pretty correct," said he; "you must have an ear for music. have you ever tried to sing?" "no, never; you know i have not." "you might have tried when i was not with you. try now. i will sing a tune, and then do you repeat it after me." he did so, and i repeated it. "very good," said he. "let's try the compass of your voice." he ran up the gamut, and i followed him. "i think you can go higher than i can," said he, "however you go quite high enough, so now i'll give you a singing lesson." thus were we occupied at intervals during the whole day, for jackson would not allow me to try my voice too much at first. as the evening fell, he again asked me to fetch some liquor, and as i had three quart wine bottles, as i before mentioned, which i had found in the chest, i took them down to fill, as it would save me many trips, and be more convenient in every respect. i brought them up full, and jackson stopped them up with some of the rags which i had torn to bind round his wrist, and put them all three in his bed-place. "that will be a much better arrangement," said he, "as now i can pour out the liquor into the pannikin as i want it; besides, i mean to take a little water with it in future. it's not quite so good with water, but it lasts longer, and one don't go to sleep so soon. well, i little thought that i should have such a comfort sent me after all my sufferings. i don't so much care now about staying here. go and fetch some water in the pannikin." that night was a repetition of the first. jackson sang till he was intoxicated, and then fell fast asleep, not talking or saying a word, and i was disappointed, for i remained awake to catch anything he might say. it would be tedious to repeat what took place for about a month;--suffice it to say it was very rarely, during that time, that jackson said anything in his sleep, or drunken state, and what he did say i could make nothing of. he continued, in the daytime, to give me lessons in singing, and i could now sing several songs very correctly. at night, he returned to his usual habit, and was more or less intoxicated before the night was over. i perceived, however, that this excess had a great effect upon his constitution, and that he had become very pale and haggard. impatient as i felt to find out the truth, i concealed my feelings towards him (which had certainly very much changed again since the discovery i had made and the suspicions i had formed) and i remained on the best of terms with him, resolving to wait patiently. he had spoken once, and therefore i argued that he would speak again, nor was i wrong in my calculations. one night, after he had finished his usual allowance of liquor, and had composed himself for sleep, i observed that he was unusually restless, changing his position in his bed-place every few minutes, and, at last, he muttered, "captain james. well, what of captain james, eh?" a thought struck me that he might reply to a question. "how did he die?" said i, in a low clear voice. "die?" replied jackson, "he fell down the cliff. yes, he did. you can't say i killed him. no--never put my finger on him." after that, he was silent for some time, and then he recommenced. "she always said that i destroyed them both, but i did not--only one--yes, one, i grant--but i hated him--no, not for his diamonds--no, no--if you said his wife indeed--love and hate." "then you killed him for love of his wife, and hate of himself?" "yes, i did. who are you that have guessed that? who are you? i'll have your life." as he said this, he started up in his bed-place, awakened by his dream, and probably by my voice, which he had replied to. "who spoke?" said he. "frank henniker, did you speak?" i made no reply, but pretended to be sound asleep, as he still sat up, as if watching me. i feigned a snore. "it could not have been him," muttered jackson, "he's quite fast. mercy, what a dream!" he then sank down in his bed-place, and i heard the gurgling noise which told me that he had put the bottle of liquor to his mouth, and was drinking out of it. from the time that the gurgling lasted, he must have taken a great deal. at last, all was quiet again. "so i have discovered it at last," said i, as my blood boiled at what i had heard. "he did murder my father. shall i kill him while he sleeps?" was the first thought that came into my troubled mind. "no, i won't do that. what then, shall i tax him with it when he is awake, and then kill him?" but i thought, that, as he was blind, and unable to defend himself, it would be cowardly, and i could not do that. what then was i to do? and as i cooled down, i thought of the words of the bible, that we were to return good for evil; for jackson, of whom, when i read it, i asked why we were told to do so, had explained it to me, and afterwards when i came to the part which said, "vengeance is mine, saith the lord," he had told me that there was punishment for the wicked hereafter, and that was the reason why we were not to obey the jewish law of "an eye for an eye, and a tooth for a tooth," which i had referred to. this portion of the bible he had well explained, and certain it is that it prevented my raising my hand against him that night. still, i remained in a state of great excitement; i felt that it would be impossible for me to be any longer on good terms with him, and i revolved the question in my mind, till at last, worn out by excitement, i fell fast asleep. a short time before daylight, i started up at what i thought was a faint cry, but i listened, and hearing nothing more, i again fell asleep, and it was broad daylight when i arose; my first thoughts were naturally of jackson, and i looked at where he lay, but he was no longer there--his bed-place was empty. i was astonished, and after a moment's thought, i recollected the cry i had heard in the night, and i ran out of the cabin and looked around me, but i could see nothing of him. i then went to the edge of the flat rock upon which the cabin was built and looked over it; it was about thirty feet from this rock to the one below, and nearly perpendicular. i thought that he must have gone out in the night, when intoxicated with liquor, and have fallen down the precipice; but i did not see him as i peered over. "he must have gone for water," thought i, and i ran to the corner of the rock, where the precipice was much deeper, and looking over, i perceived him lying down below without motion or apparent life. i had, then, judged rightly. i sat down by the side of the pool of water quite overpowered; last night i had been planning how i should destroy him, and now he lay dead before me without my being guilty of the crime. "vengeance is mine, saith the lord," were the words that first escaped my lips; and i remained many minutes in deep thought. at last it occurred to me that he might not yet be dead; i ran down the cliff, and, clambering over the rocks, arrived breathless at the spot where jackson lay. he groaned heavily as i stood by him. "jackson," said i, kneeling down by him, "are you much hurt?" for all my feelings of animosity had vanished when i perceived his unhappy condition. his lips moved, but he did not utter any sound. at last he said, in a low voice, "water." i hastened back as fast as i could to the cabin, got a pannikin half full of water, and poured a little rum in it out of the bottle. this journey and my return to him occupied some ten minutes. i put it to his lips, and he seemed to revive. he was a dreadful object to look at. the blood from a cut on his head had poured over his face and beard, which were clotted with gore. how to remove him to the cabin i knew not. it would be hardly possible for me to carry him over the broken rocks which i had climbed to arrive at where he lay; and there was no other way but what was longer, and just as difficult. by degrees he appeared to recover; i gave him more of the contents of the pannikin, and at last he could speak, although with great pain and difficulty. as he did so he put his hand to his side. he was indeed a ghastly object, with his sightless eyeballs, his livid lips, and his face and beard matted with blood. "do you think you could get to the cabin, if i helped you?" said i. "i shall never get there--let me die where i am," said he. "but the cut on your head is not very deep," replied i. "no, i don't feel it;--but--my side--i bleed inwardly--i am--broken to pieces," said he, pausing and gasping between each word. i looked at his side, and perceived that it was already black and much swollen. i offered him more drink, which he took eagerly, and i then returned for a further supply. i filled two of the wine-bottles with water and a small drop of spirits as before, and went back to where he lay. i found him more recovered, and i had hopes that he might still do well, and i told him so. "no, no," replied he; "i have but a few hours to live--i feel that. let me die here, and die in peace." he then sank into a sort of stupor, occasioned, i presume, by what i had given him to drink, and remained quite quiet, and breathing heavily. i sat by him waiting till he should rouse up again; for more than an hour i was in a very confused state of mind, as may well be imagined, after what had passed in the night. chapter xii what i most thought of was obtaining from him, now that he was dying, the full truth as to the deaths of my father and mother. jackson remained so long in this state of stupor, i feared that he would die before i could interrogate him; but this, as it proved, was not to be the case. i waited another hour, very impatiently i must acknowledge, and then i went to him and asked him how he felt. he replied immediately, and without that difficulty which he appeared before to have experienced. "i am better now--the inward bleeding has stopped; but still i cannot live--my side is broken in, i do not think there is a rib that is not fractured into pieces, and my spine is injured, for i cannot move or feel my legs; but i may live many hours yet, and i thank god for his mercy in allowing me so much time--short indeed to make reparation for so bad a life, but still nothing is impossible with god." "well, then," replied i, "if you can speak, i wish you would tell me the truth relative to my father's death, and also about the death of others; as for my father i know that you murdered him--for you said so last night in your sleep." after a pause, jackson replied--"i am glad that i did, and that you have told me so--i wished to make a full confession even to you, for confession is a proof of repentance. i know that you must hate me, and will hate my memory, and i cannot be surprised at it; but look at me now, frank, and ask your own heart whether i am not more an object of pity than of hatred. 'vengeance is mine, saith the lord!' and has not his vengeance fallen upon me even in this world? look at me; here i am, separated from the world that i loved so much, with no chance of ever joining it--possessed of wealth which would but a few months ago have made me happy--now blind, crushed to pieces by an avenging god, in whose presence i must shortly appear to answer for all my wickedness--all my expectations overthrown, all my hopes destroyed, and all my accumulated sins procuring me nothing, but, it may be, eternal condemnation. i ask you again, am i not an object of pity and commiseration?" i could but assent to this, and he proceeded. "i will now tell you the truth. i did tell the truth up to the time of your father and mother's embarkation on board of the brig, up to when the gale of wind came on which occasioned eventually the loss of the ship. now give me a little drink. "the vessel was so tossed by the storm, and the waves broke over her so continually, that the between-decks were full of water, and as the hatches were kept down, the heat was most oppressive. when it was not my watch i remained below, and looked out for another berth to sleep in. before the cabin bulkheads on the starboard side, the captain had fitted up a sort of sail-room to contain the spare sails in case we should require them. it was about eight feet square, and the sails were piled up in it, so as to reach within two feet of the deck overhead; though the lower ones were wetted with the water, above they were dry, and i took this berth on the top of the sails as my sleeping place. now the state-room in which your father and mother slept was on the other side of the cabin bulkhead, and the straining and rolling of the vessel had opened the chinks between the planks, so that i could see a great deal of what was done in the state-room, and could hear every word almost that was spoken by them. i was not aware of this when i selected this place as my berth, but i found it out on the first night, the light of the candle shining through the chinks into the darkness by which i was surrounded outside. of course, it is when a man is alone with his wife that he talks on confidential subjects; that i knew well, and hoped by listening to be able to make some discovery;--what, i had no idea of; but, with the bad feelings which stimulated me, i determined not to lose an opportunity. it was not till about a week after i had selected this berth, that i made any discovery. i had had the watch from six to eight o'clock, and had gone to bed early. about nine o'clock your father came into the state-room. your mother was already in bed. as your father undressed, your mother said, 'does not that belt worry you a great deal, my dear?' "'no,' replied your father, 'i am used to it now; it did when i first put it on, but now i have had it on four days, i do not feel it. i shall keep it on as long as this weather lasts; there is no saying what may happen, and it will not do to be looking for the belt at a moment's warning.' "'do you think then that we are in danger?' "'no, not particularly so, but the storm is very fierce, and the vessel is old and weak. we may have fine weather in a day or two, or we may not; at all events, when property of value is at stake, and that property not my own, i should feel myself very culpable, if i did not take every precaution.' "'well--i wish we were safe home again, my dear, and that my father had his diamonds, but we are in the hands of god.' "'yes, i must trust to him,' replied your father. "this circumstance induced me to look through one of the chinks of the bulkhead, so that i could see your father, and i perceived that he was unbuckling a belt which was round his body, and which no doubt contained the diamonds referred to. it was of soft leather, and about eight inches wide, sewed lengthways and breadthways in small squares, in which i presumed the diamonds were deposited. after a time your mother spoke again. "'i really think, henniker, that i ought to wear the belt.' "'why so, my dear?' "'because it might be the means of my preservation in case of accident. suppose now, we were obliged to abandon the vessel and take to the boats; a husband, in his hurry, might forget his wife, but he would not forget his diamonds. if i wore the belt, you would be certain to put me in the boat.' "'that observation of yours would have force with some husbands, and some wives,' retorted your father; 'but as i have a firm belief in the scriptures, it does not affect me. what do the proverbs say? "the price of a virtuous woman is far above rubies;" and a good ruby is worth even more in the market than a diamond of the same size.' "'well, i must comfort myself with that idea,' replied your mother, laughing. "'supposing we be thrown upon some out-of-the-way place,' said your father, 'i shall then commit the belt to your charge. it might soon be discovered on my person, whereas, on yours, it would stand every chance of being long concealed. i say this because, even in a desert, it would be dangerous to have it known by unscrupulous and unprincipled men that anyone had so much wealth about him.' "'well,' replied your mother, 'that is also comfortable for me to hear, for you will not leave me behind, because i shall be necessary to conceal your treasure.' "'yes,' replied your father, laughing, 'there is another chance for you, you see.' "your father then extinguished the light, and the conversation was not renewed; but i had heard enough. your father carried a great treasure about his person--wealth, i took it for granted, that if i once could obtain, and return to england, would save me from my present position. my avarice was hereby excited, and thus another passion equally powerful, and equally inciting to evil deeds, was added to the hate which i already had imbibed for your father. but i must leave off now." jackson drank a little more, and then remained quiet, and as i had had no food that day, i took the opportunity of returning to the cabin, with the promise that i would be back very soon. in half an hour i returned, bringing with me the bible and prayer-book, as i thought that he would ask me to read to him after he had made his confession. i found him breathing heavily, and apparently asleep, so i did not wake him. as i looked at him, and recalled to mind his words, "am not i an object of pity?" i confessed that he was, and then i asked myself the question, can you forgive him who was the murderer of your father? after some reflection, i thought that i could. was he not already punished? had not the murder been already avenged? it was not possible to retain animosity against one so stricken, so broken to pieces, and my heart smote me when i looked at his disabled hand, and felt that i, boy as i was, had had a share in his marring. at last he spoke. "are you there, frank?" "yes," replied i. "i have had a little sleep," said he. "do you feel easier?" inquired i kindly. "yes, i feel my side more numbed, and so it will remain till mortification takes place. but let me finish my confession; i wish to relieve my mind, not that i shall die to-night, or perhaps to-morrow, but still i wish it over. come nearer to me, that i may speak in a lower voice, and then i shall be able to speak longer." i did so, and he proceeded. "you know how we were cast upon this island, and how i behaved at first. when i afterwards took my place with the others, my evil thoughts gradually quitted me, and i gave up all idea of any injury to your father. but this did not last long. the deaths of so many, and at last the captain your father and your mother being the only ones left on the island besides myself, once more excited my cupidity. i thought again of the belt of diamonds, and by what means i should gain possession of it; and the devil suggested to me the murders of the captain and of your father. i had ascertained that your father no longer carried the belt on his person when we all used to bathe at the bathing-pool; it was, therefore, as your father had proposed, in your mother's keeping. having once made up my mind, i watched every opportunity to put my intentions into execution. it was the custom for one of us to fish every morning, as your mother would not eat the dried birds, if fish could be procured, and i considered that the only chance i had of executing my horrible wish was when your father went to fish off the rocks. we usually did so off the ledge of rocks which divide the bathing-pool from the sea, but i found out another place, where more fish, and of a better quality, were to be taken, which is off the high wall of rocks just below. you know where i mean, i have often sent you to fish there, but i never could go myself since your father's death. your father took his lines there, and was hauling in a large fish, when i, who had concealed myself close to where he stood, watched the opportunity as he looked over the rock to see if the fish was clear of the water, to come behind him and throw him off into the sea. he could not swim, i knew, and after waiting a minute or two, i looked over and saw his body, just as it sank, after his last struggles. i then hastened away, and my guilty conscience induced me to ascend the ravine, and collect a faggot of firewood to bring home, that no suspicions might be entertained; but my so doing was the very cause of suspicion, as you will afterwards perceive. i returned with the wood, and the captain observed, when i came up to the cabin: "'why, it's something new for you to collect wood out of your turn, jackson. wonders will never cease.' "'the fact is, that i am becoming very amiable,' replied i, hardly knowing what to say, and afraid to look either of them in the face, for your mother, with you on her lap, was standing close by. "'has my husband caught any fish, do you know, jackson?' said your mother, 'for it is high time that he came home.' "'how can i tell?' replied i. 'i have been up the ravine for wood.' "'but you were down on the rock two hours ago,' replied your mother, 'for captain james saw you coming away.' "'that i certainly did,' replied the captain. 'had he caught any fish when you were with him?' "they must have perceived my confusion when i said, 'yes, i was on the rocks, but i never went near henniker, that i'll swear.' "'you must have been near him, even when i saw you,' replied the captain. "'i never looked at him, if i was,' replied i. "'well, then, one of us had better go down and see what he is about,' said the captain. 'shall i leave jackson with you?' "'yes, yes,' replied your mother, much agitated, 'for i have my forebodings; better leave him here.' "the captain hastened down to the rocks, and in a quarter of an hour returned very much heated, saying, 'he is not there!' "'not there?' replied i, getting up, for i had seated myself in silence on the rock during the captain's absence: 'that's very odd.' "'it is,' replied the captain. 'jackson, go and try if you see anything of him, while i attend to mrs henniker.' "your mother, on the captain's return, had bowed her head down to her knees, and covered her face with her hands. i was glad of an excuse to be away, for my heart smote me as i witnessed her condition. "i remained away half-an-hour, and then returned, saying that i could see nothing of your father. "your mother was in the cabin, and the captain went in to her, while i remained outside with all the feelings of cain upon my brow. "that was a dreadful day for all parties--no food was taken. your mother and the captain remained in the cabin, and i dared not, as usual, go in to my own bed-place. i lay all night upon the rocks--sleep i could not; every moment i saw your father's body sinking, as i had seen it in the morning. the next morning the captain came out to me. he was very grave and stern, but he could not accuse me, whatever his suspicions might have been. it was a week before i saw your mother again, for i dared not intrude into her presence; but, finding there was no accusation against me, i recovered my spirits, and returned to the cabin, and things went on as before." chapter xiii "one thing, however, was evident, that your mother had an aversion--i may say a horror--of me, which she could not conceal. she said nothing, but she never could look at me; and to any question i put, would seldom make reply. strange to say this treatment of hers produced quite a different effect from what might have been anticipated, and i felt my former love for her revive. her shrinking from me made me more familiar towards her, and increased her disgust. i assumed a jocose air with her, and at times captain james considered it his duty to interfere and check me. he was a very powerful man, and in a contest would have proved my master; this i knew, and this knowledge compelled me to be more respectful to your mother in his presence, but when his back was turned i became so disgustingly familiar, that at last your mother requested that whether fishing or collecting wood, instead of going out by turns we should both go, and leave her alone. this i could not well refuse, as captain james would in all probability have used force if i had not consented, but my hatred to him was in consequence most unbounded. however, an event took place which relieved me from the subjection which i was under, and left me alone with you and your mother. now i must rest a little. wait another hour, and you shall know the rest." it was now late in the evening, but there was a bright moon which shone over head, and the broad light and shadow made the rocks around us appear peculiarly wild and rugged. they towered up one above the other till they met the dark blue of the sky in which the stars twinkled but faintly, while the moon sailed through the ether, without a cloud to obscure her radiance. and in this majestic scenery were found but two living beings--a poor boy and a mangled wretch--a murderer--soon to breathe his last, and be summoned before an offended god. as i remained motionless by his side, i felt, as i looked up, a sensation of awe, but not of fear; i thought to myself--"and god made all this and all the world besides, and me and him. the bible said so:" and my speculation then was as to what god must be, for although i had read the bible, i had but a confused idea, and had it been asked me, as it was of the man in the chariot by philip, "understandest thou what thou readest?" i most certainly should have answered, no. i remained for nearly two hours in this reverie, and at last fell asleep with my back against the rock. i was, however, wakened up by jackson's voice, when he asked in a low tone for water. "there it is," said i, handing it to him. "have you called long?" "no," replied he; "i asked but once." "i have been asleep," said i. as soon as he had drunk, he said-- "i will finish now; my side begins to burn." he then proceeded-- "it was about four months after your father's death that captain james and i went together to the ravine to collect firewood. we passed under the wall of rock, which you know so well, and went through the gap, as we call it, when captain james left the water-course and walked along the edge of the wall. i followed him; we both of us had our pieces of rope in our hands with which we tied the faggots. of a sudden his foot slipped, and he rolled down to the edge of the rock, but catching hold of a small bush which had fixed its roots in the rocks, he saved himself when his body was hanging half over the precipice. "'give me the end of your rope,' said he to me, perfectly collected, although in such danger. "'yes,' replied i, and i intended so to do, as i perceived that if i refused he could still have saved himself by the bush to which he clung. "but the bush began to loosen and give way, and captain james perceiving it cried out-- "'quick, quick, the bush is giving way!' "this assertion of his determined me not to give him the rope. i pretended to be in a great hurry to do so, but entangled it about my legs, and then appeared occupied in clearing it, when he cried again-- "'quick!'--and hardly had he said the word when the root of the bush snapped, and down he fell below. "i heard the crash as he came to the rock beneath. see the judgment of god--am i not now precisely in his position, lying battered and crushed as he was? after a time i went down to where he lay, and found him expiring. he had just strength to say 'god forgive you,' and then he died. it was murder, for i could have saved him and would not, and yet he prayed to god to forgive me. how much happier should i have felt if he had not said that. his 'god forgive you' rang in my ears for months afterwards. i returned to the cabin, and with a bold air stated to your mother what had happened, for i felt i could say, this time, i did not do the deed. she burst out into frantic exclamations, accusing me of being not only his murderer but the murderer of her husband. i tried all i could do to appease her, but in vain. for many weeks she was in a state of melancholy and despondency, that made me fear for her life; but she had you still to bestow her affections upon, and for your sake she lived. i soon made this discovery. she was now wholly in my power, but i was awed by her looks even, for a time. at last i became bolder, and spoke to her of our becoming man and wife; she turned from me with abhorrence. i then resorted to other means. i prevented her from obtaining food; she would have starved with pleasure, but she could not bear to see you suffer. i will not detail my cruelty and barbarity towards her; suffice to say, it was such that she pined away, and about six months after the death of the captain she died, exhorting me not to injure you, but if ever i had an opportunity, to take you to your grandfather. i could not refuse this demand, made by a woman whom i as certainly killed by slow means as i had your father by a more sudden death. i buried her in the guano, by the side of the others. after her death my life was a torture to me for a long while. i dared not kill you, but i hated you. i had only one consolation, one hope, which occasionally gave me satisfaction; the consolation, if so it could be called, was--that i had possession of the diamonds; the hope--that i should one day see england again. you see me now--are they not all avenged?" i could not but feel the truth of jackson's last sentence. they were indeed avenged. after a short pause, he said to me-- "now, frank, i feel that the mortification in my side is making great progress, and, in a short time i shall be in too great pain to talk to you. i have made a full confession of my crimes; it is all the reparation i can make to you. now, can you forgive me? for i shall die very miserable if you do not. just look at me. can you feel resentment against one in my wretched state? recollect that you pray to be forgiven as you forgive others. give me your answer." "i think--yes, i feel that i can forgive you, jackson," replied i. "i shall soon be left alone on this island, and i am sure i should be much more miserable than i shall be, if i do not forgive you. i do forgive you." "thanks; you are a good boy, and may god bless you. is it not nearly daylight?" "yes, it is. i shall soon be able to read the bible or prayer-book to you. i have them both here." "the pain is too severe, and becomes worse every minute. i shall not be able to listen to you now; but i shall have some moments of quiet before i die; and then--" jackson groaned heavily, and ceased speaking. for many hours he appeared to suffer much agony, which he vented in low groans; the perspiration hung on his forehead in large beads, and his breathing became laborious. the sun rose and had nearly set again before jackson spoke; at last he asked for some drink. "it is over now," said he faintly. "the pain is subsiding, and death is near at hand. you may read to me now; but, first, while i think of it, let me tell you where you will find your father's property." "i know," replied i; "in your bed-place under the board. i saw you remove it when you did not see me." "true. i have no more to say; it will all be over soon. read the burial service over me after i am dead; and now, while still above, read me what you think i shall like best; for i cannot collect myself sufficiently to tell you what is most proper. indeed i hardly know. but i can pray at times. read on." i did so, and came upon the parable of the prodigal son. "that suits me," said jackson. "now let me pray. pray for me, frank." "i don't know how," replied i; "you never taught me." "alas, no!" jackson was then silent. i saw his pale lips move for some time. i turned away for a few moments; when i came back to him, he was no more! his jaw had fallen; and this being the first time that i had ever faced death, i looked upon the corpse with horror and dismay. after a few minutes i left the body, and sat down on a rock at some distance from it, for i was somewhat afraid to be near to it. on this rock i remained till the sun was sinking below the horizon; when, alarmed at the idea of being there when it was dark, i took up my books and hastened back to the cabin. i was giddy from excitement, and not having tasted food for many hours. as soon as i had eaten, i lay down in my bed-place, intending to reflect upon what i was to do, now that i was alone; but i was in a few moments fast asleep, and did not wake until the sun was high. i arose much refreshed, and, seeing my bible and prayer-book close to my bed-place, i recollected my promise to jackson that i would read the burial service over his body. i found the place in the prayer-book, for i had read it more than once before; and, having just looked over it, i went with my book to where the body lay. it presented a yet more hideous spectacle than it had the night before. i read the service and closed the book. "what can i do?" thought i. "i cannot bury him in the guano. it will be impossible to carry the body over these rocks." indeed, if it had been possible, i do not think i could have touched it. i was afraid of it. at last i determined that i would cover it up with the fragments of rocks which lay about in all directions, and i did so. this occupied me about two hours, and then, carrying the bottles with me, i gladly hastened away from the spot, with a resolution never to revisit it. i felt quite a relief when i was once more in the cabin. i was alone, it was true, but i was no longer in contact with the dead. i could not collect my thoughts or analyse my feelings during the remainder of the day. i sat with my head resting on my hand, in the attitude of one thinking; but at the same time my mind was vacant. i once more lay down to sleep, and the following morning i found myself invigorated, and capable of acting as well as thinking. i had a weight upon my spirits which i could not at first account for; but it arose from the feeling that i was now alone, without a soul to speak to or communicate with; my lips must now be closed till i again fell in with some of my fellow-creatures--and was that likely? we had seen some of them perish not far from us, and that was all, during a period of many years. chapter xiv i was now, by jackson's account, nearly fourteen years old. during fourteen years but one vessel had been seen by us. it might be fourteen more, or double that time might elapse, before i should again fall in with any of my fellow-creatures. as these thoughts saddened me, i felt how much i would have sacrificed if jackson had remained alive, were it only for his company; i would have forgiven him anything. i even then felt as if, in the murderer of my father, i had lost a friend. that day i was so unsettled i could not do anything; i tried to read, but i could not; i tried to eat, but my appetite was gone, i sat looking at the ocean as it rolled wave after wave, sometimes wondering whether it would ever bring a fellow-creature to join me; at others i sat, and for hours, in perfect vacuity of thought. the evening closed in; it was dark, and i still remained seated where i was. at last i returned to my bed, almost brokenhearted; but fortunately i was soon asleep, and my sorrows were forgotten. another morning was gladdened with a brilliant sun, the dark blue ocean was scarcely ruffled by the breeze that swept over it, and i felt my spirits much revived, and my appetite returned. after taking a meal, i remembered what jackson had told me about the belt with the diamonds, and i went up to his bed-place, and turning out the bird's skins and feathers, i raked up the gravel, which was not more than two inches deep, and came to the board. i lifted it up, and found underneath a hole, about a foot deep, full of various articles. there were the watch and sleeve buttons of the mate, some dollars wrapped in old rags, a tobacco-box, an old pipe, a brooch with hair forming initials, some letters which were signed j. evelyn, and which i perceived were from my grandfather, and probably taken by jackson after my mother's death. i say letters, because they were such, as i afterwards found out, but i had not then ever seen a letter, and my first attempt to decipher written hand was useless, although i did manage to make out the signature. there was in the tobacco-box a plain gold wedding-ring, probably my mother's; and there was also a lock of long dark hair, which i presumed was hers also. there were three or four specimens of what i afterwards found out to be gold and silver ores, a silver pencil-case, and a pair of small gold ear-rings. at the bottom of the hole was the belt; it was of soft leather, and i could feel a hard substance in it sewed in every square, which of course i presumed were the diamonds, but i did not cut one of the divisions open to see what was in them. it had on the upper part of it, in very plain writing, "the property of mr j. evelyn, , minories, london." i examined all these articles one after another, and having satisfied my curiosity, i replaced them in the hole for a future survey. i covered the hole with the board, and put back the gravel and the feathers into the bed-place. this occupied me about two hours, and then i again took my former position on the rocks, and remained in a state of listless inactivity of body and mind the remainder of that day. this state of prostration lasted for many days--i may say for weeks, before it was altogether removed. i could find no pleasure in my books, which were taken up, and after a few moments laid aside. it was now within a month of the time that the birds should come to the island. i was in no want of them for sustenance; there were plenty left, but i almost loathed the sight of food. the reader may inquire how it was that i knew the exact time of the arrival of the birds? i reply that the only reckoning ever kept by jackson and me was the arrival of the full moons, and we also made a mark on the rock every time that the moon was at the full. thirteen moons were the quantity which we reckoned from the time of the birds appearing on the island one year, until their re-appearance the next; and twelve moons had now passed. at length, tired with everything, tired of myself, and i may say, almost tired of life, i one day took it into my head that i would take some provisions with me and a bottle to hold water, and go up the ravine, and cut firewood which should last me a long while; and that i would remain up there for several days, for i hated the sight of the cabin and of all that was near to it. the next day i acted upon this resolution, and slinging my dry provisions on my shoulder, i set off for the ravine. in an hour i had gained it; but not being in a hurry to cut wood, i resolved upon climbing higher up, to see if i could reach the opposite side of the island; that is, at least, get over the brow of the hill, to have a good view of it. i continued to climb until i had gained a smooth grassy spot, which was clear of brushwood; and as i sat down to rest myself, i observed some blue flowers which i had never seen before, indeed i did not know that there was a flower on the island. as i afterwards discovered, they were one of the varieties of gentianellas. i looked at them, admired them, and felt quite an affection for them; they were very pretty, and they were, as well as myself, alone. jackson, when i was pointing out the english cottages in the landscapes of "mavor's natural history," had told me a great deal about gardening in england, and how wild flowers and trees were transplanted and improved by culture; how roses and other plants were nailed up the walls, as i had observed in the engravings, and how they were watered and kept; and as i sat down looking at the flower, the thought occurred to me, why should i not take it with me, and keep it for myself? i can water it, and take care of it. i resolved that i would do so, for i already looked upon the plant as a treasure. i took it up carefully with my american knife, leaving sufficient mould about the roots, and then i proceeded to ascend the hill; but before i had gone another hundred yards, i found at least a dozen more of these plants in flower, all finer than the one i had dug up, and three or four others very different from these, which were also quite new to me. i was puzzled what to do; i put down the plants i had dug up and continued my ascent, not having made up my mind. after half-an-hour's climbing, i gained the summit, and could perceive the ocean on the other side, and the other half of the island lying beneath me. it was very grand from the height i stood on, but i observed little difference between one side of the island and the other; all was rugged barren rock as on my side, with the exception of the portion close to me; this had brushwood in the ravine, which appeared to be a sort of cleft through the island. all was silent and solitary; not a bird was to be seen, and nothing that had life could i discover. i was about to return, when i thought i might as well go down the ravine facing me for a little way, and see what there was in it. i did so, and discovered some other plants that i had not seen on my side of the island. there were also some fern trees, and some twining plants running up them, and i thought to myself, why, these plants are what i saw in the picture of the english cottages, or very like them. i wonder if they would run up my cabin? and then all at once the idea came to me that i would plant some of them round the cabin, and that i would make a garden of flowers, and have plants of my own. the reader can hardly imagine the pleasure that this idea gave me; i sat down to ruminate upon it, and felt quite happy for the time. i now recollected, however, that the cabin was built on the rock, and that plants would only grow in the earth. at first this idea chilled me, as it seemed to destroy all my schemes, but i resolved that i would bring some earth to the rock, and make my garden in that way. i at first thought of the guano, but jackson had told me that it was only used in small proportions to enrich the soil, and would kill plants if used by itself. after an hour's consideration, during which i called to mind all that jackson had told me on the subject, i made up my mind i would return to the cabin, and on my return ascertain how low down the ravine i could obtain earth for my garden; i would then carry the earth to the cabin, make a soil ready for the plants and flowers, and then, when all was ready, i would go up the ravine, collect what i could, and make my garden. i did so. i found that i could get soil about one-third of the way up the ravine, a quarter of a mile below where the brushwood grew; and having ascertained that, i returned to the cabin, threw down my provisions which were to have lasted me a week, and as it was late, i decided that i would not commence operations until the following day. i took out of the chest a duck frock, and tying up the sleeves and collar, so as to form a bag of the body of the frock, i set off the next morning to begin my task. that day i contrived to carry to the cabin ten or twelve bags of mould, which i put round it in a border about four feet wide, and about a foot deep. it occupied me a whole week to obtain the quantity of earth necessary to make the bed on each side of the cabin; it was hard work, but it made me cheerful and happy to what i had been before. i found that the best cure for melancholy and solitude was employment, so i thus obtained valuable knowledge as well as the making of my garden. when i had finished carrying the mould, i started off for the ravine with two bags to hold the plants which i might collect, and after a day's toil, i returned with my bags full of small shrubs, besides a bundle of creepers to plant against the sides of the cabin. the following day was occupied in planting everything i had procured. i was sorry to see that the leaves and flowers hung down, but i watered them all before i went to bed. the next morning i was delighted to perceive that they had all recovered and were looking quite fresh. but my garden was not full enough to please me, and i once more went up the ravine, selecting other plants which had no flowers on them, and one or two other shrubs, which i had not before observed. when these were planted and watered, my garden looked very gay and full of plants, and then i discovered the mould came down for want of support at the edges; i therefore went and picked up pieces of rock of sufficient size to make a border and hold up the mould, and now all was complete, and i had nothing to do but to go on watering them daily. this i did, and recollecting what jackson had said about the guano, i got a bag of it, and put some to each plant. the good effect of this was soon observable, and before the birds came, my garden was in a very flourishing condition. i cannot express to the reader the pleasure i derived from this little garden. i knew every plant and every shrub, and talked to them as if they were companions, while i watered and tended them, which i did every night and morning, and their rapid growth was my delight. i no longer felt my solitude so irksome as i had done. i had something to look after, to interest me, and to love; they were alive as well as i was; they grew, and threw out leaves and flowers; they were grateful for the care i bestowed upon them, and became my companions and friends. i mentioned before that during the latter portion of the time i was with jackson, he had taught me to sing several songs. feeling tired, in my solitude, of not hearing the human voice, i found myself at first humming over, and afterwards singing aloud, the various airs i had collected from him. this afforded me much pleasure, and i used to sing half the day. i had no one to listen to me, it is true, but as my fondness for my garden increased, i used to sit down and sing to the flowers and shrubs, and fancy that they listened to me. but my stock of songs was not very large, and at last i had repeated them so often that i became tired of the words. it occurred to me that the prayer-book had the psalms of david at the end of it, set to music. i got the book, and as far as the airs that i knew would suit, i sang them all; never were psalms, probably, sung to such tunes before, but it amused me, and there was no want of variety of language. every three or four days i would go up the ravine, and search carefully for any new flower or shrub which i had not yet planted in my garden, and when i found one, as i often did, it was a source of great delight. chapter xv at last the birds came, and i procured some of their eggs, which were a very agreeable change, after living so long upon dried meat. my want of occupation occasioned me also to employ some of my time in fishing, which i seldom had done while jackson was alive; and this created a variety in my food, to which, for a long while, i had been a stranger. jackson did not care for fish, as to cook it we were obliged to go up the ravine for wood, and he did not like the trouble. when the birds came, i had recourse to my book on natural history, to read over again the accounts of the man-of-war birds, gannets, and other birds mentioned in it; and there was a vignette of a chinaman with tame cormorants on a pole, and in the letter-press an account of how they were trained and employed to catch fish for their masters. this gave me the idea that i would have some birds tame, as companions, and, if possible, teach them to catch fish for me; but i knew that i must wait till the young birds were fit to be taken from the nest. i now resolved that during the time the birds were mating, i would go to the ravine and remain there several days, to collect bundles of firewood. the firewood was chiefly cut from a sort of low bush, like the sallow or willow, fit for making baskets, indeed fit for anything better than firewood; however, there were some bushes which were of a harder texture, and which burnt well. it was jackson who told me that the former were called willow and used for making baskets, and he also shewed me how to tie the faggots up by twisting the sallows together. they were not, however, what jackson said they were--from after knowledge, i should say that they were a species of oleander or something of the kind. having roasted several dozen of eggs quite hard, by way of provision, i set off one morning, and went to the ravine. as jackson had said before, i had to walk under a wall of rock thirty feet high, and then pass through a water-course to get up to the ravine, which increased the distance to where the shrubs grew, at least half a mile. it was over this wall that the captain fell and was killed, because jackson would not assist him. i gained the thicket where the bushes grew, and for three days i worked very hard, and had cut down and tied about fifty large faggots, when i thought that i had collected enough to last me for a long while; but i had still to carry them down, and this was a heavy task, as i could not carry more than one at a time. it occurred to me that if i threw my faggots over the wall opposite to where they had been cut down, i should save myself nearly a mile of carriage, as otherwise i had to walk all the way to the water-course which divided the wall of rock, and then walk back again. indeed, where i cut down the wood was not more than a quarter of a mile from the bathing-pool, and all down hill. i was delighted at this idea, which i wondered had never occurred to jackson, and i commenced putting it into execution. the top of the wall of rock was slippery from the constant trickling of the water over the surface, but this was only in some places. i carried my faggots down one by one, and threw them over, being careful not to lose my footing in so doing. i had carried all but three or four, and had become careless, when, on heaving one over, my heels were thrown up, and before i could recover myself i slid down the remainder of the ledge and was precipitated down below, a distance of more than thirty feet. i must have remained there many hours insensible, but at last i recovered and found myself lying on the faggots which i had thrown down. it was my falling on the faggots, instead of the hard rock, which had saved my life. i rose as soon as i could collect my scattered senses. i felt very sore and very much shaken, and the blood was running out of my mouth, but there were no bones broken. i was, however, too ill to attempt anything more that day. i walked home at a very slow pace and went to bed. a sound sleep restored me, and in a day or two i was quite recovered. i watered my plants, which i found drooping, as if they had grieved at my being so long away from them, and then i returned to where my faggots had been left; and to lighten my labour i resolved to carry them down to the bathing-pool and stack them up there on the rocks near to it. i mention this for reasons that the reader will comprehend bye-and-bye. this occupied me two days, for i was not inclined, after my fall, to work hard; and very glad was i when the labour was over. the young birds were now hatched, but i had to wait four or five weeks before they were fit to be taken. i began again to find solitude tedious. the flowers in my garden had all bloomed and withered, and there was not so much to interest me. i recommenced reading the bible, and the narratives in the old and new testaments again afforded me pleasure. i hardly need say to the reader that i read the bible as i would have read any other book--for amusement, and not for instruction. i had learnt little from jackson--indeed, as regards the true nature of the christian religion, i may say, nothing at all. i do not believe that he knew anything about it himself. it is true that the precepts in the new testament struck me, and that i was more interested about our saviour than anybody else; but i could not comprehend him, or his mission. in short, i read in darkness; and i may say that i almost knew the bible by heart without understanding it.--how could i? how many thousands are there who do the same, without having an excuse to offer for their blindness! at last the time for taking the birds arrived, and i had then sufficient employment to keep me from being melancholy. i collected quite as many as we had done when jackson and i had to be provided for; and with my new knives my labour was comparatively easy. as soon as i had completed my provision, i went back to take the young birds which already i had selected and left for that purpose. it was high time, for i found that when i went to take them they were ready to fly. however, after a good battle with the old birds (for i had taken six young ones--two from each nest, which arrayed a force of six old ones against me, who fought very valiantly in defence of their offspring), i succeeded in carrying them off, but followed by the old birds, who now screamed and darted close to me as they came pursuing me to the cabin. as soon as i got safe back, i took the young birds into the cabin, tying each of them by the leg with a piece of fishing line, and the other end of the line i fastened to some pieces of rock which i had collected ready on the platform outside of the cabin. the old birds continued to persecute me till it was dark, and then they went away, and i, tired with my day's labour, was not sorry to go to sleep. when i woke up the next morning, i found the old birds on the platform, in company with the young ones, i presume trying to persuade them to fly away with them; but the lines on their legs prevented that. they did not leave at my approach for some little while; at last they all took wing, and went off to sea; but in the course of a few minutes they returned with some small fish in their mouths, with which they fed their young ones. they continued to do this for the two following days, when there was a general break up, announcing the departure of the main body, which, after much soaring and wheeling in the air, flew off in a northerly direction. the six parent birds, who were with their young ones at the cabin, appeared for some time very uneasy, flying round and round and screaming wildly; at last they soared in the air with loud shrieks, and flew away after the main body, which was still in sight--their love for their young overpowered by their instinctive habits. i was not sorry when they were gone, as i wanted to have my new family all to myself. i went down to the rocks and caught a fish, which was large enough to supply them for three or four days. i fed them with the inside of the fish, and they ate it very heartily. for several days they appeared very uneasy; but gradually they settled, and not only appeared to know me, but to welcome my coming, which was to me a source of great pleasure. i now neglected my flowers for the birds, which were the more animated of the two; and i sat down for hours on the platform with my six companions, who i must own were not over-lively and intelligent, but they were alive, and had eyes. they seldom roused up, unless i brought them fish, of which they had a supply four times a day, and then they would stand on their legs and open their beaks far apart, each waiting for its share. they were a great happiness to me, and i watched their gradual increase of plumage and of size, which was very rapid. i gave them all names out of my natural history book. one was lion, then tiger, panther, bear, horse, and jackass (at the time that i named them, the last would have been very appropriate to them all); and as i always called them by their names as i fed them, i soon found, to my great joy, that they knew them well enough. this delighted me. i read my books to them by way of amusement; i sang my songs to them; i talked to them; i would even narrate the various histories out of the bible to them, such as that of joseph and his brethren, &c., and the stolid air with which the communications were received made me almost imagine they were listened to. after a time, i took the line off the legs of two of them, with the precaution of first cutting their wings, and these two became much more lively, following me into the cabin and generally staying there during the night. as i found that no attempt was made to escape, i let them all loose, after having cut their wings, and they all behaved equally well with the two first to which i had given their liberty. the perfect obedience and good behaviour of my new companions again gave me leisure that was not altogether desirable, as it left a vacuum to fill up. but i returned to my garden. i could do no more at present but water my plants and look at the increased daily growth of the climbers, as they now boldly ascended the sides of the cabin; but i thought it was high time to go up into the ravine and about the island, to see if i could not add to my collection. one morning i set off up the ravine. i was not successful, so i contented myself with carrying, by the long road, those faggots which i had left behind me on the day when i fell over the precipice. this labour i finished, and then returned to the cabin, where i was met by my birds with half-extended wings and open mouths, as if they were very glad to see me, and very hungry into the bargain. i ought to observe that my birds appeared now to separate into pairs, male and female, as their difference of plumage denoted. lion and horse were always side by side, as were jackass and bear, and tiger and panther. i now fed them one by one, calling them by name, to which they immediately responded, and if anyone came who was not called, it was switched for its trouble. the next morning i set off on another voyage of discovery after plants, and this time i resolved upon trying what i could find among the crevices of the rocks, for i had seen at a distance what appeared to me to be a very pretty flower on the ledge of one of the clefts. i did not go up the ravine this time, but commenced climbing the rocks behind where the cabin was built. it was hard work, but i was not easily discouraged, and after a couple of hours i arrived at a level which i had in view when i commenced my labour, and here i was amply rewarded, for i found several plants quite new to me, and a variety of ferns, which i thought very beautiful, although they had no flowers. the scene, from where i stood, was awful and beautiful. i looked down upon the rocks below, and the cabin, which appeared very small, and i thought that i could see my birds like dots upon the platform. it was a bright day and smooth water, i could clearly distinguish the other islands in the distance, and i thought that i saw something like a white speck close to them--perhaps it was a vessel. this made me melancholy, and i could not help asking myself whether i was to remain all my life upon the island, alone, or if there were any chance of my ever being taken off it. as i looked down upon the cabin, i was surprised at the steepness of the rocks which i had climbed, and felt alarmed, as if i never should be able to get back again. but these thoughts were soon chased away. i turned from the seaward, and looked inland. i found that on one side of me there was a chasm between the rocks, the bottom of which was so far down that i could not see it; and on the other side the rock rose up as straight as a wall. my attention was soon diverted by discovering another plant, and i now commenced my task of digging them all up. i obtained, with the ferns, about twenty new varieties, which i made up in a bundle ready for carrying down slung round my neck, for i knew that i should require both hands to descend with. then i sat down to rest myself a little before i commenced my return, and after i had been seated a few minutes, i thought i would sing a song by way of amusement. chapter xvi i have before said that, tired of repeating the words of the songs which jackson had taught me, i had taken those of psalms in metre, at the end of the prayer-book, by way of variety; and, as far as metre went, they answered very well, although people would have been surprised to have heard psalms sung to such quick and varied measure. the psalm i chose this time was the first--"how blest is he who ne'er consents;" and i began accordingly; but when i came to the end of the line, to my astonishment i heard a plaintive voice, at a distance, repeat after me "con-sents." i looked round. i thought i must have been deceived, so i continued--"by ill advice to walk." this time i could not be mistaken--"to walk" was repeated by the same voice as plainly as possible. i stopped singing, lost in wonder. there must be somebody on the island as well as myself, thought i; for i never had heard an echo before, except when it thundered, and such echoes i had put down as a portion of the thunder. "who's there?" cried i. "who's there?" replied the voice. "it's me!" "it's me!" was the answer. i did not know what to make of it. i cried out again and again, and again and again i heard what i said repeated, but no answer to my questions. i thought i was insulted by somebody, and yet, when i listened, the voice that spoke came from the face of the rock on the other side of the chasm, and no one could be there without my seeing them. this made me think that i was mistaken, and that there could not be anybody, but still i could not solve the mystery. at last i became frightened, and as the sun was now setting, i determined to get back to the cabin. i did so, and went down much faster than i had gone up, for as it grew dark i became the more alarmed. the only thing that re-assured me was the softness and plaintiveness of the voice--not like jackson's, but as of someone who would not think of injuring me. although i was, generally speaking, quiet and content with my isolated position, yet it was only when i was employed or amused with my favourites. at times, i could not find anything to do, and was overcome by weariness. i would then throw away my books, and remain for hours thinking upon the probability of my ever again seeing a fellow creature; and a fit of melancholy would come over me, which would last many days. i was in one of these moods, when it occurred to me, that, although i had seen the other side of the island from the summit, i had not gone down to the beach to explore it; and i resolved that i would do so, making a trip of three or four days. when my knives had become blunt, jackson had told me how to sharpen them, by rubbing the blades upon a hard flat piece of rock, wetted with water. this i had found to answer very well, and i now determined i would try and sharpen one of the old axes in the same way, so as to make it serviceable, for i was very much afraid of breaking my knives in cutting down the brushwood, and i knew how much more rapidly it could be done with an axe. i picked out a large stone, suitable for the purpose, and with a kid of water at hand, i set-to to sharpen the axe. it was a long job, but in a day or two i had succeeded admirably, and the axe was in good order. i then thought how i could leave my birds for so many days, as they would require food. at last, i considered that if i caught two large fish and cut them up, they would be sufficient for their sustenance. i did so, and provided with a packet of dried birds for food, tied up in a duck frock, with my natural history book for amusement, a pannikin to get water in, my axe on my shoulder, and my knives by my side--i first kissed all the birds, and told them to remain quiet and good till i came back--i set off on a bright clear morning on my tour of examination. in a couple of hours i had gained the summit of the island, and prepared for my descent, by sitting down and eating my dinner. i observed that, as before, the water on the other side of the island was quite smooth, compared to what it was on the side where i resided. it was, in fact, from the prevailing winds during the year, the lee side of the island. having rested myself sufficiently, i commenced my descent, which i accomplished in little less time than it took me to ascend from the other side. as i neared the rocks by the shore, i thought i perceived something occasionally moving about on them. i was not mistaken, for as i came closer, i found that there were several large animals lying on the rocks, and occasionally dropping into the sea close to them. the sight of anything living was to me of great interest. i determined to get nearer, and ascertain what animals they were. at last, by creeping along from rock to rock, i arrived to within forty yards of them. i recollected some animals of the same shape in my book of natural history, which, fortunately, i had with me in the duck frock, and sitting down behind the rock, i pulled it out, and turned over the pages until i came to a print which exactly answered to their appearance. it was the seal. having satisfied myself on that point, i read the history of the animal, and found that it was easily tamed, and very affectionate when taken young, and also might be easily killed by a blow on the nose. these, at least, were for me the two most important pieces of information. it occurred to me that it would be very pleasant to have a young seal for a playmate (for the gannets, after all, were not very intelligent), and i resolved to obtain one if i could. i put down my duck frock with my provisions behind the rock, and taking my axe in my hand, i cautiously advanced to where the animals lay. there were about twenty of them all together on one rock, but they were all large, and seemed to be about five or six feet long. i could not see a small one anywhere, so i walked in behind the rocks farther to the right, towards another rock, where i saw another batch of them lying. as i neared them, i saw by herself a seal with a young one by her side, not more than two feet long. this was what i wanted. they lay at some distance from the water, upon a low rock. i watched them for some time, and was much amused at the prattling which passed between the old and the young one. i thought that to obtain the young one, i must of course kill the old one, for i perceived that it had large teeth. i considered it advisable to get between them and the water, that they might not escape me, and i contrived so to do before i made my appearance. as soon as the old one perceived me running to them, it gave a shrill cry, and then floundered towards the water; as we came close together, it showed its teeth, and rose upon its flappers to defend itself and its young one, which kept close to its side; but a blow on its nose with the axe rendered it motionless, and apparently dead. delighted with my success, i seized hold of the young one and took it in my arms, and was carrying it away, when i found myself confronted with the male seal, which, alarmed by the cry of the female, had come to her assistance. it was much larger than the female, with more shaggy hair about the neck and shoulders, and apparently very fierce. i could not pass it, as it was in shore of me, and i had just time to drop the young seal, and leap behind a rock on one side, with my axe all ready. the animal reared itself on the rock to pass over to me, when i saluted it with a blow on the head, which staggered it. i had lost my presence of mind by the creature coming upon me so unexpectedly, and my blow was not well aimed, but before it could recover the first blow, another on its nose tumbled it over, to all appearance lifeless. i then hastened to gain the other side of the rock, where i had left the young seal, and found that it had crept to its mother's body, and was fondling it. i took it in my arms, and retreated to where i had left my duck frock, and throwing everything else out, i put the animal in, and tied up the end, so that it could not escape. i then sat down to recover myself from the excitement occasioned by this first engagement i had ever been in, quite delighted with my newly-acquired treasure. i then thought what i should do. it was now within an hour of dark, and was too late to return to the other side of the island, or i would have done so, as i was anxious to get my seal home. at last i decided that i would go farther from the beach, and take up my quarters for the night. i collected my provision, and with my seal under my arm, i walked away about one hundred yards from the water's edge, and took up a position under a large rock; here i ate my supper, and then untied the line which closed up the frock, and had a parting look at my little friend before i went to sleep. he had struggled a good deal at first, but was now quiet, although he occasionally made attempts to bite me. i coaxed him and fondled him a good deal, and then put him into his bag again, and made him secure, which appeared to annoy him very much, as he was not half as quiet in a bag as he was when i held him in my lap. i then took my book to read over again the history of the seal, and i found that their skins were valuable, and also that they gave a great deal of oil, but i had no use for oil, though i thought that their skins might be very comfortable in my bed-place. i shut my book and lay down to sleep, but i could not obtain any till near daylight, i had been so excited, and was so anxious about my treasure. the sun shining in my eyes woke me up; i found my seal was lying very quiet; i touched him to see that he was not dead, and the cry that he gave assured me to the contrary. i then walked back to where i had left the bodies of the parents. i found on examination that they were both dead, and also that their furs were very beautiful, and i resolved that i would have their skins. but here was a difficulty. if i took off the skins, i could not carry them with me, and i was anxious to get the young one home, lest it should die of hunger, so i decided that i would first take home the young one, give it food and warm it, and then return and skin the old ones. i therefore made my breakfast, and leaving the remainder of my provision in a cleft in the rock, that i might not have the trouble of bringing it again, i set off on my return, and used such diligence that i was back at the cabin by noon. i found my birds all well, and apparently quite satisfied with the provision that i had left them, for they were most of them asleep, and those that were awake did not notice my arrival. "ah," thought i, "you only like me for what i give you; next time i go away i will leave you hungry, and then when you see me come back, you will all flutter your wings with gladness." i was puzzled where to put my seal so as to keep him safe: at last i decided upon opening the seaman's chest and putting him in that. i did so, and gave him a piece of fish which the birds had not eaten. the little creature devoured it eagerly, and i took my lines and went down to catch some fish for a further supply. in half an hour i returned with two large fish, and i then took the seal out of the chest and fed him again. he ate very heartily; and i was glad to perceive that he appeared much tamer already. i threw some of the insides of the fish to the birds, who were now become of very inferior interest to me. having fed my animals, i then thought of myself, and, as i took my meal, i arranged that the next morning i would go over to the other side of the island, skin the two seals, and spread out the skins on the rocks to dry, and would leave them there till i had a better opportunity of bringing them to the cabin; at present i could not be away from my new acquaintance, which i wished to make tame and fond of me. having fed him again in the morning, i put down the lid of the chest, and then started for the lee side of the island. chapter xvii i arrived early, skinned both the seals, and dragged the skins up from the water-side, though with difficulty, especially that of the large one, to the rock where i had taken up my quarters the night before. here i spread them out to dry, putting large pieces of rock upon the edges, that they might not be blown away. it was nearly dusk when i had finished, but i set off, and an hour after dark arrived at the cabin; for now that i knew my way so well, i got over the ground twice as fast as i did before. i crawled into my bed-place in the dark, and slept soundly after my fatigue. i awoke the next morning with the plaintive cry of my seal in the chest, and i hastened to get some fish to feed him with. i took him out and fed him; and was astonished how tame the little animal had become already. he remained very quietly with me after he had been fed, nestling close to my side, as if i had been his mother, and even making a half attempt to follow me when i left him. my birds appeared very dull and stupid, and i observed also that they were very dirty, and always rushed to the kid when it was full of water, trying to get into it. this made me think that they required bathing in salt water, and i took one down to the bathing-pool, with a long line to its leg, and put it in. the manner in which the poor creature floundered, and dipped and washed itself, for several minutes, proved my supposition correct; so, after allowing it half an hour for its recreation, i took it back, and went down with the others until they had all indulged in the luxury of a bath; and from that time, as i took them down almost every day, it was astonishing how much brighter and sleeker their plumage became. i remained a week in the cabin, taming my seal, which now was quite fond of me; and one night, as i was going to bed, he crawled into my bed-place, and from that time he was my bed-fellow. at the end of a week i went over to the other side of the island, and contrived to carry up the two skins to the summit. it was a hard day's work. the day afterwards i conveyed them to the cabin, and, as they were quite dry, i put them into my bed-place to lie down upon, as i did not like the smell of the birds' feathers, although i had so long been accustomed to them. and now, what with my seal, my birds, and my garden, and the occupation they gave me, the time passed quickly away, until, by my reckoning, it was nearly the period for the birds to come again. i observed, as the time drew near, that my birds were uneasy. they had paired, as i mentioned before, and when their plumage was complete, it was evident that they had paired male and female, as i had supposed. they had not been tethered for a long while, and appeared to me now very much inclined to fly, especially the male birds. at first i thought that i would cut all their wings, as i was fearful that they would join the other birds on their arrival, but observing that they were so fond of their mates, i resolved to cut the wing of the females only, as i did not think that the male birds would leave them. i did so, and took my chance; for since i had the seal for a companion, i did not care so much for the birds as before. at last the birds came, and took possession of the guano-ground as usual, and i went for fresh eggs; at the same time i found that my females were scratching, as if they would make their nests, and a few days afterwards they began to lay. i then thought that as soon as they had young ones they would wish to go away, so i took the eggs that were laid, to prevent them, but i found that as fast as i took away the eggs they laid more, and this they did for nearly two months, supplying me with fresh eggs long after the wild birds had hatched, and left the island. the male birds, at the time that the females first laid their eggs, tried their wings in short flights in circles, and then flew away out to sea. i thought that they were gone, but i was deceived, for they returned in about a quarter of an hour, each with a fish in its beak, which they laid down before their mates. i was much pleased at this, and i resolved that in future they should supply their own food, which they did; and not their own food only, but enough for the seal and me also when the weather was fine, but when it was rough, they could not obtain any, and then i was obliged to feed them. the way i obtained from them the extra supply of fish was, that when they first went out, i seized, on their return, the fish which they brought, and as often as i did this they would go for more, until the females were fed. but i had one difficulty to contend with, which was, that at the time the birds could not obtain fish, which was when the weather was rough, i could not either, as they would not take the bait. after some cogitation, i decided that i would divide a portion of the bathing-pool farthest from the shore, by a wall of loose rock which the water could flow through, but which the fish could not get out of, and that i would catch fish in the fine weather to feed the seal and the birds when the weather was rough and bad. as soon as i had finished curing my stock of provisions and got it safely housed in the cabin, i set to work to make this wall, which did not take me a very long while, as the water was not more than two feet deep, and the pool about ten yards across. as soon as it was finished, i went out every day, when it was fine, and caught as many fish as i thought i might require, and put them into this portion of the bathing-pool. i found the plan answer well, as the fish lived, but i had great difficulty in getting them out when i wanted them, for they would not take the bait. as my birds were no longer a trouble to me, but rather, on the contrary, a profit, i devoted my whole time to my seal. i required a name for him, and reading in the book of natural history that a certain lion was called nero, i thought it a very good name for a seal, and bestowed it on him accordingly, although what nero meant i had no idea of. the animal was now so tame that he would cry if ever i left him, and would follow me as far as he could down the rocks, but there was one part of the path leading to the bathing-pool which was too difficult for him, and there he would remain crying till i came back. i had more than once taken him down to the bathing-pool to wash him, and he was much pleased when i did. i now resolved that i would clear the path of the rocks, that he might be able to follow me down the whole way, for he had grown so much that i found him too heavy to carry. it occupied me a week before i could roll away and remove the smaller rocks, and knock off others with the axe, but i finished it at last, and was pleased to find that the animal followed me right down and plunged into the water. he had not been down since i had made the wall of rock to keep the fish in, and as soon as he was in, he dived and came out with one of the fish, which he brought to land. "so now," thought i, "i shall know how to get the fish when i want them--i shall bring you down, nero." i may as well here observe that nero very soon obeyed orders as faithfully as a dog. i had a little switch, and when he did wrong, i would give him a slight tap on the nose. he would shake his head, show his teeth, and growl, and then come fondly to me. as he used to follow me every day down to the pool, i had to break him off going after the fish when i did not want them taken, and this i accomplished. no one who had not witnessed it, could imagine the affection and docility of this animal, and the love i had for him. he was my companion and playmate during the day, and my bedfellow at night. we were inseparable. it was at the latter portion of the second year of my solitude that a circumstance occurred, that i must now relate. nero had gone down to the pool with me, and i was standing fishing off the rocks, when he came out of the pool and plunged into the sea, playing all sorts of gambols, and whistling with delight. i did not think anything about it. he plunged and disappeared for a few minutes, and then would come up again close to where my line was, but he disturbed the fish and i could not catch any. to drive him farther off, i pelted him with pieces of rock, one of which hit him very hard, and he dived down. after a time i pulled up my line, and whistling to him to return, although i did not see him, i went away to the cabin, fully expecting that he would soon follow me, for now he could walk (after his fashion) from the cabin to the pool as he pleased. this was early in the morning, and i busied myself with my garden, which was now in great luxuriance, for i had dressed it with guano; but observing about noon that he had not returned, i became uneasy, and went down to the pool to look for him. he was not there, and i looked on the sea, but could not perceive him anywhere. i called and whistled, but it was of no use, and i grew very much alarmed at the idea that my treasure had deserted me. "it could not be because i threw the pieces of rock at him," thought i; "he would not leave me for that." i remained for two or three hours, watching for him, but it was all in vain; there was no seal--no nero,--my heart sank at the idea of the animal having deserted me, and for the first time in my life, as far as i can recollect, i burst into a flood of tears. for the first time in my life, i may say, i felt truly miserable--my whole heart and affections were set upon this animal, the companion and friend of my solitude, and i felt as if existence were a burden without him. after a while, i retraced my steps to the cabin, but i was miserable, more so than i can express. i could not rest quiet. two hours before sunset, i went down again to the rocks, and called till i was hoarse. it was all in vain; night closed in, and again i returned to the cabin, and threw myself down in my bed-place in utter despair. "i thought he loved me," said i to myself, "loved me as i loved him; i would not have left him in that way." and my tears burst out anew at the idea that i never should see my poor nero again. the reader may think that my grief was inordinate and unwarrantable, but let him put himself in my position--a lad of sixteen, alone on a desolate island, with only one companion--true, he was an animal, and could not speak, but he was affectionate; he replied to all my caresses; he was my only companion and friend, the only object that i loved or cared about. he was intelligent, and i thought loved me as much as i loved him, and now he had deserted me, and i had nothing else that i cared about or that cared for me. my tears flowed for more than an hour, till at last i was wearied and fell asleep. chapter xviii it was early in the morning, and yet dark, when i felt something touch me. i started up--a low cry of pleasure told me at once that it was nero, who was by my side. yes, it was nero, who had come back, having climbed up again the steep path to the cabin, to return to his master. need i say that i was overjoyed, that i hugged him as if he had been a human being, that i wept over him, and that in a few minutes afterwards we were asleep together in the same bed-place. such was the fact, and never was there in my after life, so great a transition from grief to joy. "oh! now, if you had left me,"--said i to him, the next morning, when i got up; "you naughty seal, to frighten me and make me so unhappy as you did!" nero appeared quite as happy as i was at our reunion, and was more affectionate than ever. i must now pass over many months in very few words, just stating to the reader what my position was at the end of three years, during which i was alone upon the island. i had now arrived at the age of near seventeen, and was tall and strong for my years. i had left off wearing my dress of the skins of birds, having substituted one of the seaman's shirts, which i had found in the chest. this, however, was the whole of my costume, and although, had it been longer it would have been more correct, still, as i had no other companion but nero, it was not necessary to be so very particular, as if i had been in society. during these three years, i think i had read the bible and prayer-book, and my natural history book, at least five or six times quite through, and possessing a retentive memory, could almost repeat them by heart; but still i read the bible as a sealed book, for i did not understand it, having had no one to instruct me, nor any grace bestowed upon me. i read for amusement, and nothing more. my garden was now in a most flourishing condition, the climbing plants had overrun the cabin, so as to completely cover the whole of the roof and every portion of it, and they hung in festoons on each side of the door-way. many of the plants which i had taken up small, when i moved them, had proved to be trees, and were now waving to the breeze, high above the cabin roof; and everything that i had planted, from continual watering and guano, had grown most luxuriantly. in fact, my cabin was so covered and sheltered, that its original form had totally disappeared, it now looked like an arbour in a clump of trees, and from the rocks by the bathing-pool it had a very picturesque appearance. i had, of course, several times gone up the ravine, and now that my axe had become useful, i had gradually accumulated a large stock of wood down by the bathing-pool, more than i could use for a long while, as i seldom lighted a fire, but the cutting it was employment, and employment was to me a great source of happiness. i had been several times to the other side of the island, and had had more encounters with the seals, of which i killed many, for i found their skins very comfortable and useful in the cabin. i had collected about three dozen of the finest skins, which were more than i required, but i had taken them for the same reason that i had collected the firewood, for the sake of employment, and in this instance, i may add, for the sake of the excitement which the combats with the seals afforded me. i have not narrated any of these conflicts, as i thought that they might weary the reader, i must, however, state what occurred on one occasion, as although ludicrous, it nearly cost me my life. i had attacked a large male seal, with a splendid fur, for i always looked out for the best skinned animals. he was lying on a rock close to the water, and i had gone into the water to cut him off and prevent his escape by plunging in, as he would otherwise have done; but as i aimed the usual blow at his nose, my foot slipped on the wet rock, and i missed the animal, and at the same time fell down on the rock with the axe in my hand. the animal, which was a male of the largest size, seized hold of my shirt (which i then wore) with his teeth, and, plunging with me into the sea, dived down into the deep water. it was fortunate that he had seized my shirt instead of my body, and also that i could swim well. he carried me along with him--the shirt, for a few seconds, drawn over my head, when, disembarrassing myself of the garment, by slipping my head and arms out, i left it in his possession, and regained the surface of the water, almost suffocated. it was fortunate that i did not wear sleeve-buttons; had i had them, i could not have disengaged myself, and must have perished. i climbed the rock again, and turning round, i perceived the seal on the surface, shaking the shirt in great wrath. this was a sad discomfiture, as i lost not only my shirt but my axe, which i dropped when i was dragged into the water; nothing was saved except my knife, which i carried by a lanyard round my neck. why i mention this circumstance particularly, is, that having felt great inconvenience for want of sleeve-buttons to hold the wristbands of my shirt together, i had thought of making use of those of the mate, which the reader may recollect had been given with his watch into jackson's care, to take home to his wife; but on second consideration i thought it very possible i might lose them, and decided that the property was in trust, and that i had no right to risk it. this correct feeling on my part, therefore, was probably the saving of my life. i have only now to mention my birds, and of them i can merely say that they went on as before; they bathed constantly, at the right season they laid eggs, the male birds caught fish and brought them to the cabin, and they were just as stupid and uninteresting as they were at first; however, they never left me, nor indeed shewed any intention to leave me, after the first season of the birds returning to the island. they were useful but not very ornamental, and not at all interesting to one who had such an intelligent companion as nero. having now brought up my history, in a few words, until the time referred to, i come to the narrative of what occurred to produce a change in my condition. i have said that in the chest there was a spy-glass, but it had been wetted with salt-water, and was useless. jackson had tried to shew me how to use it, and had shewn me correctly, but the glasses were dimmed by the wet and subsequent evaporation from heat. i had taken out all the glasses and cleaned them, except the field-glass as it is called, but that being composed of two glasses, the water had penetrated between them, and it still remained so dull that nothing could be distinguished through it, at the time that jackson was shewing me how to use the instrument; it was therefore put on one side as useless. a year afterwards, i took it out, from curiosity, and then i discovered that the moisture between the two glasses had been quite dried up, and that i could see very clearly through it, and after a little practice i could use it as well as anybody else. still i seldom did use it, as my eyesight was particularly keen, and i did not require it, and as for any vessel coming off the island, i had gradually given up all thoughts of it. it was one evening when the weather was very rough and the sea much agitated, that i thought i saw something unusual on the water, about four miles distant. i supposed at first it might be a spermaceti whale, for numbers used to play round the island at certain seasons, and i used to watch their blowing and their gambols, if i may use the term, and jackson often told me long stories about the whale fisheries; but a ray of the setting sun made the object appear white, and i ran for the glass, and made out that it was a boat or a very small vessel, with a sail out, and running before the gale right down to the island. i watched it till it was dark with much interest, and with thoughts of various kinds chasing each other; and then i began to consider what was best to do. i knew that in an hour the moon would rise, and as the sky was not cloudy, although the wind and sea were high, i should probably be able to see it again. "but they never can get on shore on this side of the island," thought i, "with so much sea. yes they might, if they ran for the bathing-pool." after thinking a while, i decided that i would go down to the bathing-pool, and place lighted faggots on the rocks on each side of the entrance, as this would shew them where to run for, and how to get in. i waited a little longer, and then taking my spy-glass and some tinder with me, i went down to the pool, carried two faggots to the rocks on each side, and having set them on fire and taken up others to replace them as soon as they were burnt out, i sat down with my spy-glass to see if i could make out where the boat might be. as the moon rose, i descried her now within a mile of the island, and her head directed towards the beacon lights made by the burning faggots. i threw another faggot on each and went down for a further supply. the gale had increased, and the spray now dashed over the rocks to where the faggots were burning, and threatened to extinguish them, but i put on more wood and kept up a fierce blaze. in a quarter of an hour i could distinguish the boat; it was now close to the island, perhaps three hundred yards distant, steering not directly for the lights, but more along shore. the fact was that they had hauled up, not knowing how they could land until they had observed the two lights clear of each other, and then they understood why they had been made; and a moment afterwards they bore up right for the entrance to the bathing-pool, and came rushing on before the rolling seas. i still trembled for them, as i knew that if the sea receded at the time that they came to the ledge of rocks at the entrance, the boat would be dashed to pieces, although their lives might be saved, but fortunately for them, it was not so--on the contrary, they came in borne up on a huge wave which carried them clear over the ledge, right up to the wall of rock which i had made across the pool, and then the boat grounded. "hurrah! well done, that," said a voice from the boat. "lower away the sail, my lads; all's right." the sail was lowered down, and then, by the light of the fire, i discovered that there were several people in the boat. i had been too much excited to say anything; indeed, i did not know what to say. i only felt that i was no more alone, and the reader may imagine my joy and delight. chapter xix as soon as the sail was lowered, the men leaped over the sides of the boat into the water, and waded to the rocks. "who are you?" said one of the men, addressing me, "and how many of you are there here?" "there is no one on the island but myself," replied i; "but i'm so glad that you have come." "are you? then perhaps you'll tell us how to get something to eat, my hearty?" replied he. "oh yes, wait a little, and i'll bring you plenty," replied i. "well, then, look smart, that's a beauty, for we are hungry enough to eat you, if you can find us nothing better." i was about to go up to the cabin for some birds, when another man called out-- "i say--can you get us any water?" "oh yes, plenty," replied i. "well then, i say, jim, hand us the pail out of the boat." the one addressed did so, and the man put it into my hands, saying, "bring us that pail, boy, will you?" i hastened up to the cabin, filled the pail full of water, and then went for a quantity of dried birds, with which i hastened down again to the bathing-pool; i found the men had not been idle, they had taken some faggots off the stack and made a large fire under the rocks, and were then busy making a sort of tent with the boat's sails. "here's the water, and here's some birds," said i, as i came up to them. "birds! what birds?" said the man who had first spoken to me, and appeared to have control over the rest. he took one up and examined it by the light of the fire, exclaiming, "queer eating, i expect." "why, you didn't expect a regular hotel when you landed, did you, mate?" said one of the men. "no, if i had, i would have called for a glass of grog," replied he. "i suspect i might call a long while before i get anyone to bring me one here." as i knew that jackson called the rum by the name of grog, i said, "there's plenty of grog, if you want any." "is there, my hearty,--where?" "why, in that cask that's in the water on the other side of your little ship," replied i. "i can draw you some directly." "what! in that cask? grog floating about in salt water, that's too bad. come here all of you--you're in earnest, boy--no joking i hope, or you may repent it." "i'm not joking," said i--"there it is." the man, followed by all the rest, excepting one of the party, waded into the water, and went to the cask of rum. "take care," said i, "the spiles are in." "so i see--never fear, my hearty--come now all of us." so saying, the whole of them laid hold of the cask by the chains, and lifting it up, they carried it clean out of the water, and placed it on the rocks by the side of the pool. "hand us the little kid out of the boat, jim," said the man; "we'll soon see if it's the right stuff." he took out the spiles, drew off some of the liquor, and tasting it, swore it was excellent. it was then handed round, and all the men took some. "we're in luck to-night; we're fallen upon our legs," said the first man. "i say, jim, put them dried chickens into the pitch-kettle along with some taters out of the bag--they'll make a good mess; and then with this cask of grog to go to, we shan't do badly." "i say, old fellow," said he, turning to me, "you're a regular trump. who left you on shore to get all ready for us?" "i was born here," replied i. "born here! well, we'll hear all about that to-morrow--just now, we'll make up for lost time, for we've had nothing to eat or drink since wednesday morning. look alive, my lads! get up the hurricane-house. jim, put the pail of water into the kettle, and send the islander here for another pailful, for grog." the pail was handed to me, and i soon returned with it full, and, as i did not see that they had a pannikin, i brought one down and gave it to them. "you're a fine boy," said the mate; (as i afterwards found out that he was). "and now, i say, where do you hold out? have you a hut or a cave to live in?" "yes," replied i; "i have a cabin, but it is not large enough for all of you." "no, no! we don't want to go there--we are very well where we are, alongside of the cask of rum, but you see, my lad, we have a woman here." "a woman!" said i; "i never saw a woman. where is she?" "there she is, sitting by the fire." i looked round, and perceived that there was one of the party wrapped up in a blanket, and with a wide straw hat on the head, which completely concealed the form from me. the fact is, that the woman looked like a bundle, and remained by the fire quite as inanimate. at my saying that i never saw a woman, the man burst into a loud laugh. "why, did you not say that you were born on the island, boy?" said the mate at last. "were you born without a mother?" "i cannot recollect my mother--she died when i was very young; and therefore i said, that i had never seen a woman." "well, that's explained; but you see, my lad--this is not only a woman, but a very particular sort of a woman; and it will not do for her to remain here after we have had our supper--for after supper, the men may take a drop too much, and not behave themselves; so i asked you about your cabin, that you might take her there to sleep. can you do that?" "yes," replied i; "i will take her there, if she wishes to go." "that's all right then, she'll be better there than here, at all events. i say, boy, where did you leave your trousers?" "i never wear any." "well then, if you have any, i advise you to put them on, for you are quite old enough to be breeched." i remained with them while the supper was cooking, asking all manner of questions, which caused great mirth. the pitch kettle, which was a large iron pot on three short legs, surprised me a good deal, i had never seen such a thing before, or anything put on the fire. i asked what it was, and what it was made of. the potatoes also astonished me, as i had never yet seen an edible root. "why, where have you been all your life?" said one of the men. "on this island," replied i, very naively. i waded into the water to examine the boat as well as i could by the light of the fire, but i could see little, and was obliged to defer my examination till the next day. before the supper was cooked and eaten, i did, however, gain the following information. that they were a portion of the crew of a whaler, which had struck on a reef of rocks about seventy miles off, and that they had been obliged to leave her immediately, as she fell on her broadside a few minutes afterwards; that they had left in two boats, but did not know what had become of the other boat, which parted company during the night. the captain and six men were in the other boat, and the mate with six men in the one which had just landed--besides the lady. "what's a lady?" said i. "i mean the woman who sits there; her husband was killed by some of the people of the sandwich isles, and she was going home to england. we have a consort, another whaler, who was to have taken our cargo of oil on board, and to have gone to england with that and her own cargo, and the missionary's wife was to have been sent home in her." "what's a missionary?" inquired i. "well, i don't exactly know; but he is a preacher who goes out to teach the savages." by this time the supper was cooked, and the odour from the pitch kettle was more savoury than anything that i had ever yet smelt. the kettle was lifted off the fire, the contents of it poured into a kid, and after they had given a portion in the small kid to the woman, who still remained huddled up in the blanket by the fire, they all sat round the large kid, and commenced their supper. "come, boy, and join us," said the mate, "you can't have had your supper; and as you've found one for us, it's hard but you should share it with us." i was not sorry to do as he told me, and i must say that i never enjoyed a repast so much in my life. "i say, boy, have you a good stock of them dried chickens of yours?" said the mate. "yes, i have a great many, but not enough to last long for so many people." "well, but we can get more, can't we?" "no!" replied i, "not until the birds come again, and that will not be for these next five moons." "five moons! what do you mean?" "i mean, five full moons must come, one after another." "oh, i understand; why then we must not remain on the island." "no," replied i, "we must all go, or we shall starve; i am so glad that you are come, and the sooner you go the better. will you take nero with you?" "who is nero?" "nero--my seal--he's very tame." "well, we'll see about it; at all events," said he, turning to the other men, "we must decide upon something, and that quickly, for we shall starve if we remain here any time." it appeared that they had left the whaler in such a hurry, that they had only had time to throw into the boat two breakers of water, four empty breakers to fill with saltwater for ballast to the boat, and the iron pitch kettle, with a large sack of potatoes. as soon as supper was finished, they went to the cask for the rum, and then the mate said to me-- "now i'll go and speak to the woman, and you shall take her to sleep in your cabin." during the whole of this time the woman, as the mate called her, had never spoken a word. she had taken her supper, and eaten it in silence, still remaining by the fire, huddled up in the blanket. on the mate speaking to her, she rose up, and i then perceived that she was much taller than i thought she could have been; but her panama hat still concealed her face altogether. "now then, my lad," said the mate, "shew the lady where she is to sleep, and then you can join us again if you like." "will you come with me?" said i, walking away. the woman followed me up the path. when we arrived at the platform opposite the cabin, i recollected nero, whom i had ordered to stay there till my return. "you won't be afraid of the seal," said i, "will you? he is very good-natured. nero, come here." it was rather dark as nero came shuffling up, and i went forward to coax him, for he snarled a little at seeing a stranger. "have you no light at hand?" said my companion, speaking for the first time in a very soft, yet clear voice. "no, i have not, but i will get some tinder, and make a fire with one of the faggots, and then you will be able to see." "do so, then, my good lad," replied she. i thought her voice very pleasing. i soon lighted the faggot and enabled her to see nero (who was now quite quiet) and also the interior of the cabin. she examined the cabin and the bed-places, and then said, "where do you sleep?" i replied by shewing her my bed-place. "and this," said i, pointing to the one opposite, "was jackson's, and you can sleep in that. nero sleeps with me. here are plenty of seal skins to keep you warm if you are cold. are your clothes wet?" "no, they are quite dry now," replied she; "if you will get me some seal skins, i will lie down on them, for i am very tired." i spread five or six skins one on the other, in jackson's bed-place, and then i went out and threw another faggot on the fire, that we might have more light. "do you want anything else?" said i. "nothing, i thank you. are you going to bed now?" "i was meaning to go down again to the men, but now i think of it, i do not like to leave you alone with nero, as he might bite you. are you afraid of him?" "no, i'm not much afraid, but still i have no wish to be bitten, and i am not used to sleep with such animals, as you are." "well then, i'll tell you how we'll manage it. i will take some skins outside, and sleep there. nero will not leave me, and then you won't be afraid. the weather is clearing up fast, and there's very little wind to what there was--besides, it will be daylight in three or four hours." "as you please," was the reply. accordingly i took some seal skins out on the platform, and spreading them, i lay down upon them, wishing her good-night, and nero soon joined me, and we were both fast asleep in a few minutes. chapter xx nero, who was an early riser, woke me up at day-break, or i should have slept much longer; for i had been tired out with the fatigue and excitement of the night before. as soon as i was up, i looked into the cabin, and found the woman was fast asleep; her straw hat was off, but she had lain down in her clothes. her black hair was hanging about her shoulders. having only seen jackson with his bushy beard, i had been somewhat surprised when i first saw the men on their landing so comparatively clear of hair on their face; my astonishment at the clear white skin of a woman--and in this instance, it was peculiarly white and pallid--was very great. i also perceived how much more delicate her features were than those of the men; her teeth, too, were very white, and jackson's were discoloured and bad; i longed to see her eyes, but they were closed. any other difference i could not perceive, as she had drawn the blanket close up to her chin. "this is then a woman," said i to myself: "yes, and it's very like what i used to see in my dreams." i looked a little longer, and then, hearing nero coming into the cabin behind me, and afraid that she would awake, i made a hasty retreat. i remained at this part of the cabin considering what i should do. i thought i would light a fire, and go down for a fish to broil on the embers for her breakfast, so i called nero to come down with me. on arriving at the pool, i found all the seamen fast asleep under the tent they had made with the boat's sails; and they appeared to be much the same as jackson used to be after he had got drunk the night before; i presumed therefore, that such was their state, and was not far wrong. nero went into the pool and brought out a fish, as i ordered him, and i then walked to the boat to examine it. this took me half an hour, and i was sorry that none of the men were awake, that so i might ask any questions i wished. i examined the pitch-kettle, and the boat's sails, and the breakers. breakers are small casks, holding about six to seven gallons of water, and are very handy for boats. i remained about an hour, and then went back to the cabin, carrying a faggot on my shoulder, nero following with the fish in his mouth. we were met by the woman, who came out of the cabin; she no longer had the blanket round her, for it was a beautiful bright morning, and very warm. "nero is bringing you your breakfast," said i, "so you ought to like him." "i dare say i shall, if we are to be companions in future," replied she. "do you want anything?" said i. "yes, a little water, if you can get me some." i filled the kid from the spring, put it down by her, and then took out the inside of the fish, and fed the birds, who were crowding round me. the woman washed her face and hands, braided up her hair, and then sat down on the rock. in the meantime, i had lighted my faggot, cleaned the fish, and waited till the wood was burnt to ashes before i put the fish on the fire. having then nothing to do, i thought that reading would amuse the woman, and i went in for the bible. "shall i read to you?" said i. "yes," replied she, with some astonishment in her looks. i read to her the history of joseph and his brethren, which was my favourite story in the bible. "who taught you to read?" said she, as i shut the book, and put the fish on the embers. "jackson," said i. "he was a good man, was he not?" replied she. i shook my head. "no, not very good," said i, at last. "if you knew all about him, you would say the same; but he taught me to read." "how long have you been on this island?" said she. "i was born on it, but my father and mother are both dead, and jackson died three years ago--since that i have been quite alone, only nero with me." she then asked me a great many more questions, and i gave her a short narration of what had passed, and what jackson had told me; i also informed her how it was i procured food, and how we must soon leave the island, now that we were so many, or the food would not last out till the birds came again. by this time the fish was cooked, and i took it off the fire and put it into the kid, and we sat down to breakfast; in an hour or so, we had become very sociable. i must however now stop a little to describe her. what the men had told me was quite true. she had lost her husband, and was intending to proceed to england. her name was reichardt, for her husband was a german, or of german family. she was, as i have since ascertained, about thirty-seven years old, and very tall and elegant; she must have been very handsome when she was younger, but she had suffered much hardship in following her husband as she had done, through all the vicissitudes of his travels. her face was oval; eyes black and large; and her hair black as the raven's wing; her features were small and regular; her teeth white and good; but her complexion was very pallid, and not a vestige of colour on her cheeks. as i have since thought, it was more like a marble statue than anything i can compare her to. there was a degree of severity in her countenance when she did not smile, and it was seldom that she did. i certainly looked upon her with more awe than regard, for some time after i became acquainted with her; and yet her voice was soft and pleasant, and her manners very amiable; but it must be remembered i had never before seen a woman. after breakfast was over, i proposed going down to where the seamen lay, to see if they were awake, but i told her i thought that they would not be. "i will go with you, as i left a basket with some things of mine in the boat, and it will be as well to bring them up at once." we therefore set off together, i having ordered nero to stay in the cabin. on our arrival at the pool we found the men still fast asleep; and by her directions i went into the water to the boat, and brought out a basket and a small bundle which she pointed out. "shall i wake them?" said i. "no, no," replied she; "so long as they sleep, they will be doing no harm. but," said she, "we may as well take some potatoes up with us; fill both these handkerchiefs," continued she, taking two out of the bundle. i did so, and she took one and i the other, and we returned to the cabin. "are these all the birds that you have for food?" said she, looking at the pile in the cabin. "yes," replied i. "but what are we to do with the potatoes?" "we can roast them by the fire if we like," said she; "but at present we had better take them into the cabin. did you plant all these flowers and creepers which grow over the cabin?" "yes," replied i. "i was alone and had nothing to do, so i thought i would make a garden." "they are very pretty. now that i am back, you can go down to the men if you please, and tell them, when they wake up, that i wish to have the smallest of the boat's sails, to make a screen of. tell the mate, he is the most civil." "i will," said i. "is there anything else?" "yes, bring up a few more potatoes; they will let you take them if you say that i told you." "shall i take nero with me?" "yes, i do not want his company, for i am a little afraid of him." i called nero, who came after me, and went down to the pool, when i found that the men had all woke up, and were very busy, some lighting a fire, some washing potatoes, and some trying to catch the fish in the pool. "oh, here he is. come, boy, what have you got for our breakfast? we've been trying to catch some of these fish, but they're as quick as eels." "nero will soon catch you what you want," replied i. "here, nero, in." nero plunged in, and soon brought out a fish, and i then sent him in for another. "thanks, lad," said the mate; "that will be enough for our breakfast. that seal of yours is a handy fellow, and well trained." while the other men were getting breakfast, one of them went up to nero, i believe with the intention of making friends with him, but nero rejected his advances, and showed his sharp teeth, snapping at him several times. the man became angry, and caught up a piece of rock to throw at the seal. he aimed at the animal's nose, and narrowly missed hitting it. had he done so, he would probably have killed it. this made me very angry, and i told the man not to do so again; upon this, he caught up another, and was about to throw it, when i seized him by the collar with my left hand, and with my right drawing my american knife, i threatened to stab him with it, if he attacked the beast. the man started back, and in so doing, fell over a piece of rock, on his back. this quarrel brought the mate to us, along with two or three of the men. my knife was still lifted up, when the mate said-- "come, my hearty, no knives, we don't allow them. that's not english. put it up, no one shall hurt the beast, i promise you. bob, you fool, why couldn't you leave the animal alone? you forget you are among savages, here." at this, the other men burst out into a laugh. "yes," observed one; "i can swear, when i get back, that the natives of this island are savages, who eat raw flesh, have seals for playmates, and don't wear clothes enough for common decency." this made them laugh more, and the man who had attacked nero, and who had got upon his legs again, joined with the others; so all was again good-humour. the men sat down to their breakfast, while i examined the boat again, and afterwards asked many questions, with which they were much amused, every now and then observing, "well, he is a savage!" after they had breakfasted, i made nero catch another fish and sent him up to the cabin with it, as i was afraid that the man might do him an injury, and then told the mate that the woman had desired me to bring up some potatoes. "take them," said he; "but you have nothing to carry them up with. here, fill the pail, and i will go to the cabin with you." "she told me that i was to ask you for a small boat's sail, to hang up as a screen." "well, she shall have the boat's mizen. we don't want it. i'll carry it up." the mate threw the sail and yard over his shoulder, and followed me up to the cabin. on our arrival, we found the missionary's wife sitting on the platform, nero lying not far from her, with the fish beside him. the mate took off his hat, and saluted my new companion, saying, "that he hoped she was comfortable last night." "yes," replied she, "as much so as i could expect; but i turned this good lad out of his cabin, which i do not wish to do again, and therefore i requested the sail for a screen. now, john gough, what do you intend to do?" continued she. the mate replied, "i came up here to see what quantity of provisions the lad might have. by his account, it will not last more than a month, and it will take some time before we can reach where we are likely to fall in with any vessel. stay here we cannot, for we shall only eat the provision and lose time, therefore, the sooner we are off the better." "if you take all the provision, of course you will take the lad with you?" replied she. "of course we will." "and my chest, and my seal?" inquired i. "yes, your chest, certainly, but as for your seal, i do not know what to say to that--he will be starved in the boat, and if you give him his liberty, he will do well enough." "what you say is very true," replied the woman. "i am afraid, boy, that you will have to part with your friend. it will be better for both of you." i made no reply, for it cut me to the heart to think of parting with nero; but still i had sense enough to perceive that what they said was right. the mate then went into the cabin, and examined the heap of dried birds which i had collected, and having made his calculation, said that there were sufficient for three weeks, but not more. "and when do you think of leaving this island?" inquired the woman. "the day after to-morrow, if i can persuade the men, madam," replied he; "but you know they are not very easy to manage, and very thoughtless, especially now that they have so unexpectedly fallen in with liquor." "that i admit," replied she; "but as they will probably take the liquor in the boat, that will not make so great a difference." "i shall go down and speak to them now they're all sober," replied the mate, "and will let you know in the evening, or to-morrow morning, perhaps, will be better." the mate then saluted her by touching his hat, and left us. chapter xxi there was one thing which had made a great impression on me in the conversation with the men in the morning. they called me a savage, and said that i had not sufficient clothes on; and as i observed that they were all dressed in jackets and trousers, which covered them from head to foot, i took it for granted that my shirt, which was all that i wore, was not a sufficient clothing. this had never occurred to me before, nor can the reader be surprised at it. i had been like our first parents in eden--naked but not ashamed--but now that i had suddenly come in contact with my fellow-men, i felt as if something were amiss. the consequence was, that i went to the chest and got out a pair of white trousers, and put them on. i thought them very uncomfortable and very unnecessary articles, but others wore them, and i felt that i must do so also. they were rather long for me, but i rolled up the bottoms of the legs, as i observed that the seamen did, and then came out on the platform, where the missionary's wife was still seated, looking out upon the waves as they lashed the rocks. she immediately observed the addition that i had made to my dress, and said, "that is a great improvement. now you look like other people. what is your name? you have not told me." when i had answered the question, i said to her-- "i have brought up more of the potatoes, as you call them; what am i to do with them?" "first tell me, have you any spot that you know about the island where there is mould--that is, earth, like you have in your garden--where we can plant them?" "yes," replied i, "there is some up there," and i pointed to one-third up the ravine. "i brought all this earth from there, and there is plenty of it; but what is the good of planting them?" "because," said she, "one of the potatoes planted will, in a very short time, grow, and then it will produce perhaps thirty or forty potatoes at its roots as large as these; they are excellent things for food, and where there is nothing else to be had, may be the means of preserving life." "well, that may be," replied i, "and if we were going to remain on the island, it would be well to plant them, but as we are going away the day after to-morrow, what's the use of it? i know that they are very nice, for i had some for supper last night." "but are we only to think of ourselves in this world, and not of others?" replied she. "suppose, two or three years hence, another boat were to be cast away on this island, and not find, as we have, you here, with provisions ready for them, they would starve miserably; whereas, if we plant these potatoes, they may find plenty of food and be saved. only think how glad your father and mother would have been to have found potatoes on the island when they were thrown on it. we must not live only for ourselves, but we must think and try to do good to others--that is the duty of a christian." "i think you are very right," replied i, "and a very kind person too. if you wish it i will go and plant the potatoes this day. how am i to plant them?" "they have a shovel in the boat," said she, "for i saw them throwing the water out with it. go down and get it, and then i will go with you and show you." i went down and the mate gave me the shovel, which i carried up to her. i found her cutting the potatoes into pieces, and she showed me how she cut them, leaving an eye in each piece, and explained the reason for it. i was soon very busy cutting away alongside of her, and before long the pail of potatoes was all ready to be planted. we then walked to the ravine, and she showed me how to use the shovel, and i made the holes. before noon we had planted all that we had cut, but we had still the two handkerchiefs full that we had at first brought up with us. we returned to the cabin, and i prepared the fish for dinner. after it was on the embers, she wished to have the screen put up beside her bed-place. "go down to the mate," said she, "and ask him for the hammer and three or four nails. i know they have them in the boat." "i may as well take them down some birds for their dinner," replied i, "for they will want them." "yes, do so; and then come back to me as soon as you can." the mate gave me the hammer, an article i had never seen before, and five or six nails, with which i returned to the cabin, and nailed up the sail as a screen. "now you will be able to sleep in your own bed-place to-night," said she. i made no reply, but i could not imagine why i could not have done so the night before, for i had only gone out of the cabin that she might not be frightened by nero being so close to her. after we had eaten our dinner, she said to me-- "how could you contrive to live on this island, if you had no dried birds?" "how?" replied i; "why, very badly. i might catch fish; but there are times in the year when you can catch no fish, they won't take bait, neither will they when the weather is rough. besides, i have only two lines, and i might lose them both--then what would become of me? i should starve." "well, then, you see under all circumstances, it was just as well to plant the potatoes, for other people may come here and be in your position." "yes, that is true, but we shall not be here long now, and you don't know how glad i am to go. i want to see all the things that i have read about in my books. i want to go to england and look for somebody; but you don't know all that i know; some day i will tell you all--everything. i am so tired of living here by myself--nothing to say--no one to talk to--no one to care for, except nero, and he can't speak. i can't bear the idea of parting with him though." "would you rather stay on the island with nero, than go away without him?" "no," replied i; "go i must, but still i do not like to part with him. he is the only friend that i ever had, that i can remember." "when you have lived longer, and mixed more with the world, my poor boy, you will then find how many sacrifices you will be obliged to make, much more serious than parting with an animal that you are attached to. i suppose you expect to be very happy if ever you get back to england?" "of course i do; why should i not be?" replied i; "i shall be always happy." the missionary's wife shook her head. "i fear not. indeed, i think if you live long enough, you will acknowledge that the happiest of your days were passed on this barren rock." "jackson said otherwise," replied i. "he was always grieving at being on the island, and not able to get back to england, and he told me so many stories about england, and what is done there, and what a beautiful place it is, that i'm sure i shall like it better than being here, even if i had somebody with me." "well, you are in the hands of god, and you must put your trust in him. he will do with you as he thinks best for you--that you know, as you read your bible." "no, i didn't know that," replied i. "god lives beyond the stars, a long way off." "is that all you have gained by reading your bible?" inquired she, looking me in the face. "no, not all," replied i; "but i do not understand a great deal that i read, i want some one to tell me. i am so glad you came with the men in the boat, for i never saw a woman before. i used to see somebody in my dreams, and now i know it was a woman. it was my mother, but i have not seen her for a long while now, and i have nobody but nero." "my poor boy, you have a father in heaven." "yes," replied i; "i know he is in heaven, and so is my mother, for jackson said that they were both very good." "i mean your heavenly father, god. do you not say in the lord's prayer, 'our father which art in heaven.' you must love him." i was about to reply, when john gough, the mate, came up, and told my companion that he had been speaking to the men, and they had agreed that the day after the next they would, if the weather permitted, leave the island; that they had examined the boat, and found it required very little repair, and that all would be ready the next day. "i hope that they will not overload the boat," said she. "i fear that they will, but i must do all i can to prevent it. the cask of rum was rather an unfortunate discovery, and we had been better without it. leave it they will not, so we must put out of the boat all that we can possibly do without, for we shall be nine of us, and that will be plenty of weight with the addition of the cask." "you promised to take my chest, you remember," said i. "yes, i will do so if i possibly can; but recollect, i may not be able to keep my promise--for now that they have the liquor, the men do not obey me as they did before, ma'am," said the mate. "perhaps he had better take the best of his clothes in a bundle, in case they should refuse to take in the chest; and i must say that, loaded as the boat will be, they will be much to blame if they do not refuse, for the boat is but small for stowage, and there's all the provisions to put in her, which will take up a deal of room." "that is very true," replied the woman. "it will be better to leave the chest here, for i do not think that the boat will hold it. you must not mind your chest, my good boy; it is of no great value." "they take my rum and all my birds, and they ought to take both me and my chest." "not if it takes up too much room," replied the woman. "you cannot expect it. the wishes of one person must give way to the wishes of many." "why they would have starved if it had not been for me," replied i, angrily. "that's very true, boy," replied the mate; "but you have to learn yet, that might is right; and recollect that what you did this morning has not made you any great favourite with them." "what was that?" inquired my companion. "only that he nearly drove his knife through one of the men, that's all," replied the mate; "english sailors ar'n't fond of knives." he then touched his hat, and went down again to the pool, desiring me to follow him with a kid for our share of the supper. i did so, and on my return she asked me why i had drawn my knife upon the seaman, and i narrated how it occurred. she pointed out to me the impropriety of what i had done, asking me whether the bible did not tell us we were to forgive injuries. "yes," replied i; "but is it not injuries to ourselves? i did forgive jackson; but this was to prevent his hurting another." "another! why you talk of nero as if the animal was a rational being, and his life of as much consequence as that of a fellow-creature. i do not mean to say but that the man was very wrong, and that you must have felt angry if an animal you were so fond of had been killed; but there is a great difference between the life of an animal and that of a fellow-creature. the animal dies, and there is an end of it; but a man has an immortal soul, which never perishes, and nothing can excuse your taking the life of a man, except in self-defence. does not the commandment say, 'thou shalt not kill?'" she then talked to me a long while upon the subject, and fully made me understand that i had been very wrong, and i confessed that i had been so. chapter xxii i now resolved to speak to her relative to the belt which contained the diamonds; and i was first obliged to narrate to her in a few words what jackson had told me. she heard me with great interest, now and then asking a question. when i had told her all, i said-- "now, as they talk of not taking my chest, what shall i do? shall i wear the belt myself, or shall i put it in the bundle? or will you wear it for me, as my mother would have done, if she had been alive?" she did not reply for some time, at last she said, as if talking to herself, and not to me-- "how unsearchable are thy ways, o god!" indeed, although i did not feel it at the time, i have afterwards thought, and she told me herself, how great her surprise was at finding in the unshorn little savage, thus living alone upon a desolate rock, a lad of good birth, and although he did not know it, with a fortune in his charge, which would, in all probability, be ultimately his own. this is certain, that the interest she felt towards me increased every hour, as by degrees i disclosed my history. "well," replied she, "if you will trust me, i will take charge of your belt. to-morrow we will select out of the chest what will be best to take with you, and then we will arrange as you wish." after about an hour's more conversation, she went into the cabin, and retired behind the screen which had been fixed up, telling me that she did not mind nero, and that i might go to bed when i pleased. as i was not much inclined to go down to the seamen, i followed her advice and went to bed; but i could not sleep for a long time from the noise which the men made, who were carousing at the bathing-pool. the idea of parting with nero also lay heavy upon my heart, though the woman had almost satisfied me that as soon as i was gone, the animal would resume its natural habits, and care nothing for me. i was up the next morning early, and went down with nero to obtain the fish which we required. i left some on the rocks for the seamen's breakfast (for they were all sound asleep), and then returned to the cabin, and prepared for our own. mrs reichardt, as i shall now call her, soon came out to me, and when breakfast was over, proposed that we should plant the remainder of the potatoes before we packed up the things in the chest. as soon as they were all cut, we set off to the ravine, and had finished our task before noon, at which time there were but few of the seamen stirring, they had remained up so long the night before, drinking. the mate was one of those who were on their legs, and he asked me if i thought we should have smooth water to launch the boat on the following day. i replied in the affirmative, and went with mrs reichardt to the cabin, and putting down the shovel, i hauled my chest out on the platform to select what articles i should take. while we were thus employed, and talking at times, the men came up for the dried birds to take down ready for putting them in the boat on the following day, and in two trips they had cleared out the whole of them. "have you used all the potatoes you brought up?" said one of the men; "for we shall be short of provisions." mrs reichardt replied that we had none left. "well then," said the man, "the mate says you had better bring down that brute of yours to catch the rest of the fish in the pond, that we may cook them before we start, as they will make two days' meals at least." "very well," replied i; "i will come down directly." i did so, and nero, in a quarter of an hour, had landed all the fish, and i then returned with him to the cabin. mrs r. had selected the best of the clothes, and made them up in a tight bundle, which she sewed up with strong thread. my books she had left out, as well as the spy-glass, and the tools i had, as they might be useful. i asked her whether i should carry them down to the bathing-pool, but she replied that on the morning when we embarked would be quite time enough. i then went to the hole under jackson's bed-place, and brought out the belt and the few articles that were with it. mrs r., after having examined them, said that she would take care of them all; the watch and other trinkets she put in her basket, the belt she took to the bed-place, and secreted it. she appeared very silent and thoughtful, and on my asking her whether i should not take down the shovel, and the pail, and hammer, she replied, "no, leave all till we are ready to go to the boat. it will be time enough." shortly afterwards, the mate brought us up some of the fish which they had cooked for supper, and when we had eaten it we went to bed. "this is the last night we shall sleep together, nero," said i, kissing my favourite, and the thought brought tears into my eyes. "but it can't be helped." i was however soon fast asleep with my arm round the animal. when i went out the next morning, i found that the weather was beautifully fine, the water smooth, and only rippled by a light breeze. as mrs r. had not yet made her appearance, i went down to the bathing-pool, where i found all the men up and in full activity. the boat had been emptied out, the oars, masts, and sails, were on the rocks and the men were turning the bows to the seaward in readiness for launching her over the ledge of rocks. the dried birds lay in a heap by the side of the cask of rum, and the fish which had been baked were in a large kid. the six breakers were also piled up together, and the mate and some of the men were disputing as to how many of them should be filled with water. the mate wanted them all filled; the men said that three would be sufficient, as the boat would be so loaded. at last the mate gained his point, and the men each took a breaker, and went up to the cabin for the water. i went with them to fill the breakers, and also to see that they did no mischief, for they appeared very unruly and out of temper; and i was afraid that they would hurt nero, who was at the cabin, if i was not there to prevent them; but with the exception of examining the cabin, and forcing themselves in upon mrs reichardt, they did nothing. when the breakers were full, which took at least half an hour, they did indeed try to catch the birds, and would have wrung their necks, but the males flew away, and the females i put into the bed-place that was screened off in the cabin, and near which mrs reichardt was sitting. they all appeared to have a great awe and respect for this woman, and a look from her was more effectual than were any words of the mate. "we don't want you," said one of the men, as they went down to the bathing-pool with the breakers on their shoulders. "why don't you keep up with the lady? you're quite a lady's man, now you've white trousers on." the others who followed him laughed at this latter remark. "i'm of no use up there, at present," said i; "and i may be down below." the men set down the breakers on the rocks by the pool, and then, under the directions of the mate, prepared to launch the boat over the ledge. the masts of the boat were placed athwartships, under her keel, for her to run upon, and being now quite empty, she was very light. she was what they call a whale-boat, fitted for the whale fishery, pointed at both ends, and steered by an oar; she was not very large, but held seven people comfortably, and she was remarkably well fitted with sails and masts, having two lugs and a mizen. as soon as they were all ready, the men went to the side of the boat, and in a minute she was launched into the sea without injury. the mate said to me, as they brought her broadside to the ledge-- "now, my lad, we don't want you any more; you may go up to the cabin till we are ready, and then we will send for you and the lady." "oh! but i can be of use here," replied i; "and i am of none up there." the mate did not reply, and the men then went to the rum cask, and rolled it towards the boat; and when they had it on the ledge, they parbuckled it, as they term it, into the boat with a whale-line that they happened to have, and which was of great length. after the cask of rum was got in amidships, (and it took up a great deal of space, reaching from one gunnel to the other, and standing high above the thwarts) they went for the breakers of water, which they put in, three before and three behind the cask, upon the floor of the boat. "she will be too heavy," said one of the men, "with so much water." "we can easily get rid of it," replied the mate. "if you had said she would be too heavy with so much liquor on board, you had better explained the matter; however, you must have your own ways, i suppose." the next articles that they brought to stow away were the provisions. the kid of fish was put amidships on the breakers, and the dried birds, which they carried down in their arms, were packed up neatly in the stern-sheets. they were soon up to the gunnel, and the mate said, "you had better stow away forward now--there will be little room for the lady as it is." "no, no, stow them all aft," replied one of the men, in a surly tone; "the lady must sit where she can. she's no better than we." "shall this go in?" said i, pointing to the coil of whale-line, and addressing the mate. "no, no; we must leave that," replied one of the men in the boat; "we shall be wedged enough as it is; and i say, jim, throw that old saw and the bag of nails out of the boat--we can have no use for them." the masts were then stepped, and the rigging set up to the gunnel of the boat, the yards and sails handed in, and hooked on the halyards ready for hoisting. in fact the boat was now all ready for starting; they had only the iron kettle and two or three other articles to put in. "shall we have the mizen?" inquired one of the men, pointing to the mast, which lay on the rocks. "no, she steers quite as well without it," replied the mate. "we'll leave it. and now, lads, hand the oars in." they were brought to the boat, but owing to the puncheon of rum in the centre, they could not lie flat, and after a good deal of arguing and disputing, four oars and a boat-hook were lashed to the gunnel outside, and the rest were left on the rocks. at this time there was some consultation between the mate and some of the men--the mate being evidently opposed by the others. i could not hear what it was about, but the mate appeared very angry and very much annoyed. at last he dashed his hat down on the rocks in a great passion, saying, "no good will come of it. mark my words. no good ever did or ever will. be it so, you are too many for me; but i tell you again, no good will come of it." the mate then sat down on the rocks by himself, and put his head down on his knees, covering it with his hands. the man with whom he had been disputing went to the others in the boat, and spoke to them in a low tone, looking round at me, to ascertain if i was within hearing. after a minute or two they all separated, and then one of them said to me-- "now, my lad, we're all ready. go up to the cabin and bring down your bundle and her basket, and tell the lady we are waiting for her." "there's the shovel," said i, "and the boat's sail--must i bring them down?" "oh yes, bring them down, and also two or three sealskins for the lady to sit upon." off i went on my errand, for i was delighted with the idea of leaving the island, and my patience had been almost exhausted at the time they had taken in the stowage of the boat. as i hastened up the path, i heard loud contention, and the mate's voice speaking very angrily, and i stopped for a short time to listen, but the noise ceased, and i went on again. i found nero on the platform, and i stopped a minute to caress him. "good bye, my poor nero, we shall never see one another again," said i. "you must go back to the sea, and catch fish for yourself;" and the tears started in my eyes as i gave the animal a farewell kiss. i then went into the cabin, where i found mrs reichardt sitting very quietly. "they are all ready," said i, "and have sent me up for you but i am to bring down the boat's sail and some seal skins for you to sit upon. i can carry both if you can carry my bundle. have you put the belt on?" "yes," replied she, "i am quite ready. i will carry the bundle, and the books and spy-glass, as well as my basket; but we must pack them close," added she, "and roll the sail up round the yard, or you will not be able to carry it." we took the sail down, and got it ready for carrying, and i rolled up the two best seal skins, and tied them with a piece of fishing line, and then we were all ready. i shouldered my burden, and mrs reichardt took the other articles, as proposed, and we left the cabin to go down the path to the bathing-pool. "good bye, nero--good bye, birds--good bye, cabin--and good bye, garden," said i, as i went along the platform; and having so done, and ordered nero back with a tremulous voice, i turned my head in the direction of the bathing-pool. i stared and then screamed, dropping my burden, as i lifted up my hands in amazement-- "look!" cried i to my companion. "look!" repeated i, breathless. she did look, and saw as i did--the boat under all sail, half a mile from the pool, staggering under a fresh breeze, which carried her away at the rate of seven or eight miles an hour. they had left us--they had deserted us. i cried out, like a madman, "stop! stop! stop!" and then, seeing how useless it was, i dashed myself on the rock, and for a minute or two was insensible. "oh!" groaned i, at last, as i came to my senses. "frank henniker," said a sweet firm voice. i opened my eyes, and saw mrs reichardt standing by me. "it is the will of heaven, and you must submit to it patiently," continued she. "but so cruel, so treacherous!" replied i, looking at the fast-receding boat. "i grant, most cruel, and most treacherous, but we must leave them to the judgment of god. what can they expect from him in the way of mercy when they have shewn none? i tell you candidly, that i think we are better in our present forlorn state upon this rock, than if in that boat. they have taken with them the seeds of discord, of recklessness, and intemperance, in an attempt which requires the greatest prudence, calmness, and unanimity, and i fear there is little chance of their even being rescued from their dangerous position. it is my opinion, and i thought so when i first knew they had found the cask, that liquor would prove their ruin, and i say again, that boat will never arrive at its destination, and they will all perish miserably. it has pleased god that they should leave us here, and depend upon it, it has been so decided for the best." "but," replied i, looking again at the boat, "i was tired of being here--i was so anxious to get off--and now to be left! and they have taken all our provisions, everything, even the fish in the pool. we shall starve." "i hope not," replied she, "and i think not; but we must exert ourselves, and trust to heaven." but i could not heed her--my heart was bursting. i sobbed, as i sat with my hands covering up my face. "all gone!" cried i. "no one left but you and i." "yes," replied she, "one more." "who?" cried i, looking up. "god!--who is with us always." chapter xxiii i heard what she said, but my head was too confused to weigh the words. i remained silent, where i was. a few seconds elapsed, and she spoke again: "frank henniker, rise, and listen to me." "we shall starve," muttered i. as i said this, one of the male birds returned from the sea with a large fish, of which mrs reichardt took possession, as she had seen me do, and the gannet flew away again to obtain more. immediately afterwards, the other two birds returned with fish, which were in a like way secured by my companion. "see how unjust and ungrateful you are," observed she. "here are the birds feeding us, as the ravens did elijah in the wilderness, at the very time that you are doubting the goodness and mercy of god. there is a meal for us provided already." "my head! my head!" exclaimed i, "it is bursting, and there is a heavy weight rolling in it--i cannot see anything." and such was the fact: the excitement had brought on a determination of blood to the head, and my senses were rapidly departing. mrs reichardt knelt by my side, and perceiving that what i had said was the case, went into the cabin and brought out a cloth, which she wetted with water from the spring, and laid across my forehead and temples. i remained motionless and nearly senseless for half an hour, during which she continued to apply fresh cold water to the cloth, and by degrees i recovered from my stupor. in the meantime, the weather being so fine and the water smooth, the gannets continued to return with the fish they caught, almost all of which were taken from them by my companion, until she had collected more than a dozen fish, from half a pound to a pound weight, which she put away, so that the birds and seal might not devour them. i was still in a half dozing state, when the breathing and cold nose of nero touched my cheek, and the murmurings of my favourite roused me up, and i opened my eyes. "i am better now," said i to mrs reichardt. "how kind you have been!" "yes, you are better, but still, you must remain quiet. do you think that you could walk to your bed-place?" "i'll try," replied i, and with her assistance i rose up; but, when i afterwards gained my feet, i should have fallen if she had not supported me; but, assisted by her, i gained my bed and sank down again. she raised my head higher, and then applied the linen cloth and cold water as before. "try now," said she, "if you cannot go to sleep. when you awake again, i will have some dinner ready for you." i thanked her and shut my eyes. nero crawled to my bed-place, and with my hand upon his head, i fell asleep, and remained so till near sunset, when i awoke with very little pain in my head, and much refreshed. i found mrs reichardt by my side. "you are better now," said she. "can you eat any dinner? i must make friends with nero, for he has been disputing my right to come near your bedside, and his teeth are rather formidable. however, i gave him the inside of the fish when i cleaned them, and we are better friends already. there is your dinner." mrs reichardt placed before me some of the fish, broiled on the embers, and i ate very heartily. "it is very kind of you," said i, "to be working for me, when i ought to be working for you--but you must not do it again." "only my share of the work when you are well," replied she; "but my share i always shall do. i cannot be idle, and i am strong enough to do a great deal; but we will talk about that to-morrow morning. you will be quite well by that time, i hope." "oh! i feel well now," replied i, "only i am very weak." "you must put your trust in god, my poor boy. do you ever pray to him?" "yes, i try a little sometimes--but i don't know how. jackson never taught me that." "then i will. shall i pray now for both of us?" "will god hear you? what was it that you said just before i forgot everything this morning?" "i told you that there was another here besides ourselves, a good and gracious god, who is always with us and always ready to come to our assistance if we call upon him." "you told me god lived beyond the stars." "my poor boy, as if he were a god who was afar off and did not attend to our prayers! such is not the case. he is with us always in spirit, listening to all our prayers, and reading every secret thought of our hearts." i was silent for some time, thinking upon what she had told me; at last i said-- "then pray to him." mrs reichardt knelt down and prayed in a clear and fervent voice, without hesitation or stop. she prayed for protection and support in our desolate condition, that we might be supplied with all things needful for our sustenance, and have a happy deliverance from our present position. she prayed that we might be contented and resigned until it should please him to rescue us--that we might put our whole trust and confidence in him, and submit without murmuring to whatever might be his will. she prayed for health and strength, for an increase of faith and gratitude towards him for all his mercies. she thanked him for our having been preserved by being left on the desolate rock, instead of having left it in the boat with the seamen. (this surprised me.) and then she prayed for me, entreating that she might be the humble instrument of leading me to my heavenly father, and that he would be pleased to pour down upon me his holy spirit, so that i might, by faith in christ, be accepted, and become a child of god and an inheritor of eternal bliss. there was something so novel to me and so beautiful in her fervency of prayer, that the tears came into my eyes, and about a minute after she had finished, i said-- "i now recollect, at least, i think i do--for the memory of it is very confused-that my mother used to kneel down by me and pray just as you have done. oh, how i wish i had a mother!" "my child," replied she, "promise me that you will be a good and obedient son, and i will be a mother to you." "will you? oh! how kind of you. yes, i will be all you wish; i will work for you day and night if it is necessary. i will do everything, if you will but be my mother." "i will do my duty to you as a mother most strictly," replied she; "so that is agreed upon. now, you had better go to sleep, if you can." "but i must first ask you a question. why did you thank god for the seamen having left us here, instead of taking us with them?" "because the boat was overloaded as it was; because the men, having liquor, would become careless and desperate, and submit to no control; and therefore i think there is little or no chance of their ever arriving anywhere safe, but that they will perish miserably in some way or another. this, i consider, is the probability, unless the almighty in his mercy should be pleased to come to their assistance, and allow them to fall in with some vessel soon after their departure." "do you think, then, that god prevented our going with them on purpose that we might not share their fate?" "i do! god regulates everything. had it been better for us that we should have gone, he would have permitted it; but he willed it otherwise, and we must bow to his will with a full faith, that he orders everything for the best." "and you say that god will give us all that we ask for in our prayers?" "yes, if we pray fervently and in faith, and ask it in the name of jesus christ; that is, he will grant all we pray for, that is good for us, but not what is not good for us; or when we ask anything, we do not know that we are asking what is proper or not--but he does. we may ask what would be hurtful to us, and then, in his love for us, he denies it. for instance, suppose you had been accustomed to pray, you must have prayed god that he would permit you to leave this island in the boat, as you are so anxious to go away; but supposing that boat is lost, as i imagine it will be, surely it would have been a kindness in god, who knew that it would be lost, not to grant your prayer. is it not so?" "yes, i see now, thank you; now i will go to sleep--good-night." chapter xxiv i awoke the next morning quite recovered from my illness of the day before, and was out of the cabin before mrs reichardt, who still remained behind the screen which she had put up after i had gone to sleep. it was a beautiful morning, the water was smooth, and merely rippled with a light breeze, and the sun shone bright. i felt well and happy. i lighted a fire to broil the fish for breakfast, as there was a sufficiency left, and then got my fishing-lines ready to catch some larger fish to reinhabit my pond at the bathing pool. mrs reichardt came out of the cabin and found me playing with nero. "good morning, dear mother," said i, for i felt most kindly towards her. "good morning, my dear boy," replied she. "are you quite well?" "quite well; and i have got my lines all ready, for i have been thinking that until the birds come, we must live on fish altogether, and we can only take them in fine weather like this; so we must not lose such a day." "certainly not. as soon as we have breakfasted, we will go down and fish. i can fish very well, i am used to it. we must both work now; but first go for your bible, that we may read a little." i did so, and after she had read a chapter she prayed, and i knelt by her side; then we breakfasted, and as soon as we had breakfasted, we set off to the bathing-pool. "do you know if they left anything behind them, frank?" "yes," replied i, "they left some oars, i believe, and a long line and we have the shovel, and the hammer, and the boat's small sail, up at the cabin." "well, we shall see very soon," replied she, as we went down the path. when we arrived at the bathing-pool, the first thing that met my eyes made me leap with joy. "oh! mother! mother! they've left the iron pot; i did so long for it; and as i lay awake this morning, i thought that if i prayed for anything, it would be for the iron pot. i was tired of dried birds, and they ate so different when they were boiled up in the pot with potatoes." "i am equally glad, frank, for i do not like victuals uncooked; but now let us first see what else they have thrown out of the boat." "why they have put on shore three of the little casks of water," said i; "they took them all on board." "they have so, i suppose, because the boat was too heavy, and they would not part with the liquor. foolish men, they will now not have more than six days' water, and will suffer dreadfully." we then looked round the rocks and found that they had left the iron kettle, three breakers, five oars, and a harpoon and staffs; a gang-board, a whale line of fathoms, an old saw, a bag of broad-headed nails, and two large pieces of sheet-iron. "that saw may be very useful to us," said mrs reichardt, "especially as you have files in your chest. indeed, if we want them, we may convert one-half of the saw into knives." "into knives! how?" "i will shew you; and these pieces of sheet-iron i could use again. you see the sheet-iron was put on to repair any hole which might be made in the boat, and they have thrown it out, as well as the hammer and nails. i wonder at john gough permitting it." "i heard them quarrelling with him as i came out yesterday to fetch you down; they would not mind what he said." "no, or we should not have been left here," replied she; "john gough was too good a man to have allowed it, if he could have prevented it. that sheet-iron will be very useful. do you know what for? to broil fish on, or anything else. we must turn up the corners with the hammer. but now we must lose no more time, but fish all day long, and not think of eating till supper time." accordingly we threw out our lines, and the fish taking the bait freely, we soon hauled in more than a dozen large fish, which i put into the bathing-pool. "what use can we make of that long line which they have left?" "a good many; but the best use we can make of it, is to turn it into fishing-lines, when we require new ones." "but how can we do that, it is so thick and heavy?" "yes, but i will show you how to unlay it, and then make it up again. recollect, frank, that i have been the wife of a missionary, and have followed my husband wherever he went; sometimes we have been well off, sometimes as badly off as you and i are now--for a missionary has to go through great dangers, and great hardships, as you would acknowledge if you ever heard my life, or rather that of my husband." "won't you tell it to me?" "yes, perhaps i will, some day or another; but what i wish to point out to you now is, that being his wife, and sharing his danger and privation, i have been often obliged to work hard and to obtain my living as i could. in england, women do little except in the house, but a missionary's wife is obliged to work with the men, and as a man very often, and therefore learns to do many things of which women in general are ignorant. you understand now?" "oh yes. i have thought already that you appear to know more than jackson did." "i should think not; but jackson was not fond of work i expect, and i am. and now, frank, you little thought that when you so tardily went to work the other day to plant potatoes for the benefit of any one that might hereafter come to the island, that you were planting for yourself, and would reap the benefit of your own kind act; for if you had not assisted, of course i could not have done it by myself: so true it is, that even in this world you are very often rewarded for a good action." "but are not you always?" "no, my child, you must not expect that; but if not rewarded in this world, you will be rewarded in the next." "i don't understand that." "i suppose that you hardly can, but i will explain all that to you, if god spare my life; but it must be at a more seasonable time." we continued fishing till late in the afternoon, by which time we had taken twenty-eight large fish, about seven to nine pounds' weight; mrs reichardt then proposed that we should leave off, as we had already provision for a fortnight. i hauled out one more fish, which she took with her to cook for our supper, and having coiled up my lines, i then commenced, as she had told me to do, carrying up the articles left by the boat's crew at the bathing-pool. the first thing i seized upon was the coveted iron kettle; i was quite overjoyed at the possession of this article, and i had good reason to be. in my other hand i carried the saw and the bag of nails. as soon as i had deposited them at the cabin, i went down again, and before supper was ready i had brought up everything except the three breakers of water, which i left where they were, as we did not want them for present use, whatever we might hereafter. we were both rather tired, and were glad to go to bed after we had taken our supper. chapter xxv when we met the following morning, my mother, as i shall in future call her, said to me, "this will be a busy day, frank, for we have a great many arrangements to make in the cabin, so that we may be comfortable. in future the cabin must be kept much more clean and tidy than it is--but that is my business more than yours. let us get our breakfasts, and then we will begin." "i don't know what you want me to do," replied i; "but i will do it if i can, as soon as you tell me." "my dear boy, a woman requires a portion of the cabin to herself, as it is not the custom for women to live altogether with men. now, what i wish is, that the hinder part of the cabin, where you used to stow away your dried birds, should be made over to me. we have oars with which we can make a division, and then nail up seal skins, so that i may have that part of the cabin to myself. now, do you understand what i want?" "yes, but the oars are longer than the cabin is wide," observed i. "how shall we manage it?" "we have the old saw, and that will do well enough to cut them off, without its being sharpened." "i never saw one used," replied i, "and i don't understand it." "i will soon show you. first, we must measure the width of the cabin. i shall not take away more than one third of it." my mother went into the cabin, and i followed her. with a piece of fishing-line, she took the width of the cabin, and then the height up to the rafters for the door posts. we then went out, and with the saw, which she showed me how to use, and which astonished me very much, when i perceived its effects, the oars were cut up to the proper length. gimlets i had already from the sea-chest, and nails and hammer we had just obtained from the boat, so that before the forenoon was over, the framework was all ready for nailing on the seal skins. the bag of broad-headed short nails, which had been thrown on the rocks, were excellent for this purpose, and, as i had plenty of skins, the cabin was soon divided off, with a skin between the door-jambs hanging down loose, so that any one might enter. i went inside after it was complete. "but," said i, "you have no light to see what you are about." "not yet, but i soon will have," replied my mother. "bring the saw here, frank. observe, you must cut through the side of the cabin here, a square hole of this size; three of the planks cut through will be sufficient. begin here." i did as she directed me, and in the course of half an hour, i had cut out of the south side of the cabin a window about two feet square, which admitted plenty of light. "but won't it make it cold at night?" said i. "we will prevent that," replied she, and she took out a piece of white linen, and with some broad-headed nails, she nailed it up, so as to prevent the air from coming in, although there was still plenty of light. "there," said she, "that is but a coarse job, which i will mend bye-and-bye, but it will do for the present." "well, it is very nice and comfortable now," said i, looking round it. "now what shall i bring in?" "nothing for the bed but seal skins," said she. "i do not like the feathers. the seal skins are stiff at present, but i think we may be able to soften them bye-and-bye. now, frank, your chest had better come in here, as it is of no use where it is, and we will make a storeroom of it, to hold all our valuables." "what, the diamonds?" replied i. "my dear boy, we have articles to put into the chest, which, in our present position, are more valuable to us than all the diamonds in the world. tell me now, yourself, what do you prefer and set most value upon, your belt of diamonds, or the iron kettle?" "the iron kettle, to be sure," replied i. "exactly so; and there are many things in our possession as valuable as the iron kettle, as you will hereafter acknowledge. now do you go and get ready some fire for us, and i will finish here by myself. nero, keep out, sir--you are never to come into this cabin." i went with nero for a fish and when i returned, i determined that i would use the iron kettle. i put it on with water and boiled the fish, and i thought that it ate better than broiled on the embers, which made it too dry. as we sat at our meal, i said, "dear mother, what are we to do next?" "to-morrow morning we will put the cabin into better order, and put away all our things instead of leaving them about the platform in this way. then i will carefully look over all that we have got, and put them away in the chest. i have not yet seen the contents of the chest." the next day it was very cloudy and, rough weather, blowing fresh. after breakfast we set to work. we cleared out the floor of the cabin, which was strewed with all manner of things, for jackson and i had not been very particular. the whale line was coiled up and put into one corner, and every thing else was brought in and a place found for it. "we must contrive some shelves," said my mother, "that we may put things on them, or else we never can be tidy; and we have not one except that which holds the books. i think we can manage it. we have two oars left besides the boat's yard; we will nail them along the side of the cabin, about a foot or more from it, and then we will cut some of the boat's sail, and nail the canvas from the side of the cabin to the oars, and that will make a sort of shelf which will hold our things." i brought in the oars, they were measured and cut off and nailed up. the canvas was then stretched from the side of the cabin to the oar, and nailed with the broad-headed nails, and made two capital shelves on each side of the cabin, running from one end to the other. "there," said my mother, "that is a good job. now we will examine the chest and put everything away and in its place." my mother took out all the clothes, and folded them up. when she found the roll of duck which was at the bottom, she said-- "i am glad to find this as i can make a dress for myself much better for this island than this black stuff dress which i now wear, and which i will put by to wear in case we should be taken off the island some of these days, for i must dress like other people when i am again among them. the clothes are sufficient to last you for a long while, but i shall only alter two shirts and two pair of trousers to your present size, as you will grow very fast. how old do you think you are now?" i replied, "about sixteen years old, or perhaps more." "i should think that was about your age." having examined and folded up every article of clothing in the chest, the tools, spyglass, &c., were put by me on the shelves, and then we examined the box containing the thread, needles, fishhooks, and other articles, such as buttons, &c. "these are valuable," said she; "i have some of my own to put along with them. go and fetch my basket, i have not yet had time to look into it since i left the ship." "what is there in it?" "except brushes and combs, i can hardly say. when i travelled about, i always carried my basket, containing those things most requisite for daily use, and in the basket i put everything that i wished to preserve, till i had an opportunity to put it away. when i embarked on board of the whaler, i brought my basket on my arm as usual, but except opening it for my brushes and combs or scissors, i have not examined it for months." "what are brushes and combs and scissors?" "that i will shew you," replied she, opening the lid of the basket. "these are the brushes and combs for cleaning the hair, and these are scissors. now we will take everything out." the basket did indeed appear to contain a wonderful quantity of things, almost all new to me. there were two brushes, twelve combs, three pair of scissors, a penknife, a little bottle of ink, some pens, a woman's thimble, a piece of wax, a case of needles, thread and silk, a piece of india ink, and a camel's-hair brush, sealing-wax, sticking plaster, a box of pills, some tape and bobbin, paper of pins, a magnifying glass, silver pencil case, some money in a purse, black shoe ribbon, and many other articles which i have forgotten. all i know is that i never was so much interested ever after at any show as i was with the contents of this basket, all of which were explained to me by my mother, as to their uses, and how they were made. there were several little papers at the bottom of the basket which she said were seeds of plants, which she had collected to take to england with her, and that we would plant them here. as she shook the dust out of the basket after it was empty, two or three white things tumbled out, which she asked me to pick up and give to her. "i don't know how they came here," said she, "but three of them are orange-pips which we will sow to-morrow, and the other is a pea, but of what kind i know not, we will sow that also--but i fear it will not come up, as it appears to me to be one of the peas served out to the sailors on board ship, and will be too old to grow. we can but try. now we will put into the chest, with the other things that you have, what we do not want for present use, and then i can drive a nail into the side of my bedroom and hang my basket on it." "but," said i, "this round glass--what is that for?" "put it on one side," replied she, "and to-morrow, if it is fine, i will shew you the use of it; but there are some things we have forgotten, which are your belt and the other articles you gave me to take for you when you thought we were to leave the island. they are in the bed-place opposite to yours." i brought them, and she put away the mate's watch and sleeve buttons, and the other trinkets, &c., saying that she would examine the letters and papers at another time. the belt was examined, counting how many of the squares had stones in them, and then, with her scissors, she cut open one of the squares, and took out a white glittering thing like glass as it appeared to me, and looked at it carefully. "i am no great judge of these things," said she, "but still i have picked up some little knowledge. this belt, if it contain all stones like this, must be of considerable value; now i must get out my needle and thread and sew it up again." she did, and put the belt away with the other articles in the chest. "and now," said she, "we have done a good day's work, and it is time to have something to eat." chapter xxvi i must say that i was much better pleased with the appearance of the cabin, it was so neat and clean to what it had been, and everything was out of the way. the next day was a calm and clear day, and we went down to fish. we were fortunate, and procured almost as many as we had done at the previous fishing--they were all put in the bathing pool as before. when we went up to the cabin, as soon as the fish was put on the fire, under the direction of my mother, i turned up the sides of one of the pieces of sheet iron, so as to make a sort of dish. the other piece i did the same to, only not so high at the sides, as one piece was kept for baking the fish on and the other as a dish to put our dinner upon when cooked. that day we had been too busy with fishing to think of anything else, but on the following i recollected the magnifying glass, and brought it to her. she first showed me the power it had to magnify, with which i was much amused for a time, and she explained as well as she could to me the cause of its having that power, but i could not well understand her; i was more pleased with the effect than cognisant of the cause. afterwards she sent me to the cabin for some of the dried moss which i used for tinder, and placing the glass so as to concentrate the rays of the sun, to my astonishment i saw the tinder caught fire. it was amazement more than astonishment, and i looked up to see where the fire came from. my mother explained to me, and i, to a certain degree, comprehended, but i was too anxious to have the glass in my own hands and try experiments. i lighted the tinder again-then i burnt my hand--then i singed one of the gannet's heads, and lastly, perceiving that nero was fast asleep in the sun, i obtained the focus on his cold nose. he started up with a growl, which made me retreat, and i was perfectly satisfied with the result of my experiments. from that time, the fire was, when the sun shone, invariably lighted by the burning-glass, and very useful did i find it. as it was so portable, i always carried it with me, and when i had nothing to do, i magnified, or set fire, according to the humour of the moment. although i have not mentioned it, not a morning rose, but before breakfast, i read the scriptures to my mother. "there's so much in that book which i cannot understand," said i, one morning. "i suspect that, living as you have, alone on this island, and having seen nothing of the world," replied my mother, "that there are not many books that you would understand." "but i understand all that is said in the beast and bird book," replied i. "perhaps you may, or think you do; but, frank, you must not class the bible with other books. the other books are the works of man, but the bible is the word of god. there are many portions of that book which the cleverest men, who have devoted their lives to its study, cannot understand, and which never will be understood as long as this world endures. in many parts the bible is a sealed book." "but will it never be understood then by anybody?" "there is quite as much of the bible as is necessary for men to follow its precepts, and this is so clear that anybody may understand it--it contains all that is necessary for salvation; but there are passages, the true meaning of which we cannot explain, and which god, for his own purposes, will not permit us to. but if we do not know them now, we shall probably hereafter, when we have left this world, and our intellects more nearly approach god's." "well, i don't understand why we should not understand it." "frank," replied she, "look at that flower just in bloom. do you understand how it is that that plant keeps alive--grows every year--every year throws out a large blue flower? why should it do so? why should the flower always be blue? and whence comes that beautiful colour? can you tell me? you see, you know that it does do so; but can you tell me what makes it do so?" "no." "look at that bird. you know it is hatched from an egg. how is it that the inside of an egg is changed into a bird? how is it that the bird is covered with feathers, and has the power to fly? can you explain to me yourself? you can walk about just as you please--you have the power of reasoning, and thinking, and of acting; but by what means is it that you possess that power? can you tell? you know that is so, but you know no more. you can't tell why or how or what causes produce these effects--can you?" "no." "well, then, if you are surrounded by all manner of things, living and dead, and see every day things which you cannot explain, or understand, why should you be surprised that, as god has not let you know by what means these effects are produced, that in his written word he should also keep from you that which for good purposes you are not permitted to know. everything here is by god's will, and that must be sufficient for us. now do you understand?" "yes, i see now what you mean, but i never thought about these things before. tell me some more about the bible." "not now. some day i will give you a history of the bible, and then you will understand the nature of the book, and why it was written; but not at present. suppose, as we have nothing particular to do, you tell me all you know about yourself from jackson, and all that happened while you lived with him. i have heard only part, and i should like to know all." "very well," replied i. "i will tell you everything, but it will take a long while." "we shall have plenty of time to spare, my dear boy, i fear, before we leave this place; so, never mind time--tell me everything." i commenced my narrative, but i was interrupted. "have you never been able to call your own mother to your memory?" said she. "i think i can now, since i have seen you, but i could not before. i now can recollect a person dressed like you, kneeling down and praying by my side; and i said before, the figure has appeared in my dreams, and much oftener since you have been here." "and your father?" "i have not the slightest remembrance of him, or anybody else except my mother." i then proceeded, and continued my narrative until it was time to go to bed; but as i was very circumstantial, and was often interrupted by questions, i had not told a quarter of what i had to say. chapter xxvii mrs reichardt had promised to give me a history of the bible; and one day, when the weather kept us both at home, she thus commenced her narrative:-- "the bible is a history of god's doings for the salvation of man. it commences with the fall of man by disobedience, and ends with the sacrifice made for his reinstatement. as by one man, adam, sin came into the world, so by one man, jesus christ, was sin and death overcome. if you will refer to the third chapter of genesis, at the very commencement of the bible, you will find that at the same time that adam receives his punishment, a promise is made by the lord, that the head of the serpent shall hereafter be bruised. the whole of the bible, from the very commencement, is an announcement of the coming of christ; so that as soon as the fault had been committed, the almighty, in his mercy, had provided a remedy. nothing is unknown or unforeseen by god. "recollect, frank, that the bible contains the history of god's doings, but it does not often tell us why such things were done. it must be sufficient for us to know that such was the will of god; when he thinks proper, he allows us to understand his ways, but to our limited capacities, most of his doings are inscrutable. but, are we to suppose that, because we, in our foolishness, cannot comprehend his reasons, that therefore they must be cavilled at? do you understand me, frank?" "yes," replied i; "i do pretty well." "as i pointed out to you the other day, you see the blade of grass grow, and you see it flower, but how it does so you know not. if then you are surrounded all your life with innumerable things which you see but cannot comprehend--when all nature is a mystery to you--even yourself--how can you expect to understand the dealings of god in other things? when, therefore, you read the bible, you must read it with faith." "what is faith? i don't quite understand, mother." "frank, i have often told you of many things that are in england, where you one day hope to go. now, if when you arrive in england, you find that everything that i have told you is quite true, you will be satisfied that i am worthy of belief." "yes." "well, suppose some one were to tell you something relative to any other country, which you could not understand, and you came to me and asked me if such were the case, would you, having found that i told you truth with regard to england, believe that what you had been told of this other country was true, if i positively asserted that it was so?" "of course i should, mother." "well, then, frank, that would be faith; a belief in things not only not seen, but which you cannot understand. but to go on, i mention this because some people are so presumptuous as to ask the why and the wherefore of god's doings, and attempt to argue upon their justice, forgetting that the little reason they have is the gift of god, and that they must be endowed with intellect equal to the almighty, to enable them to know and perceive that which he decides upon. but if god has not permitted us to understand all his ways, still, wherever we can trace the finger of god, we can always perceive that everything is directed by an all-wise and beneficent hand; and that, although the causes appear simple, the effects produced are extraordinary and wonderful. we shall observe this as we talk over the history of the jews, in the bible. but, i repeat, that we must study the whole of the bible with faith, and not be continually asking ourselves, 'why was this done?' if you will turn to the ninth chapter of the epistle to the romans, you will see what the apostle paul says on the subject: 'nay but, o man, who art thou that repliest against god?' shall the thing formed say to him that formed it, 'why hast thou made me thus?' do you not understand in what spirit the bible should be read?" "yes, i do. we must read it as the word of god, and believe all that we read in it." "exactly;--now we will proceed. after adam's fall, the earth became so wicked that god destroyed it, leaving but noah and his family to re-people it; and as soon as this was done, the almighty prepared for his original intention for the future salvation of men. he selected abraham, who was a good man, and who had faith, to be the father of a nation chosen for his own people--that was the jewish nation. he told him that his seed should multiply as the stars in the heavens, and that all the nations of the earth should be blessed in him; that is, that from his descendants should christ be born, who should be the salvation of men. abraham's great-grandchildren were brought into egypt, to live apart in the land of goshen. you have read the history of joseph and his brethren?" "oh yes; i know that well." "well, the almighty wished the jews should be a nation apart from others, and for that purpose he brought them into egypt. but observe, frank, by what simple and natural causes this was effected. it was by a dream of joseph's, which, when he told them of it, irritated his brothers against him; they sold him as a slave, and he was sent into egypt. there, having explained the dream of pharaoh, he was made a ruler over egypt, and saved that country from the famine which was in every other land. his brothers come down to buy corn, and he recognises them. he sends for his father and all the family, and establishes them in the land of goshen, as shepherds, apart from the egyptians. here they multiplied fast; but after joseph's elevation they were cruelly treated by the egyptians, who became afraid of their rapid increase, and eventually the kings of egypt gave orders that all the male children of the jews should be destroyed. it was at this time, when they were so oppressed and cruelly treated by the egyptians, that god interfered and sent for moses. moses, like all the rest of the jews, knew nothing of the true god, and was difficult to persuade, and it was only by miracles that he was convinced." "why did god keep the jews apart from the egyptians, and have them thrown in bondage?" "because he wished to prepare them to become his own peculiar people. by their being descended from abraham, and having never intermarried with other nations, they had become a pure race; by being in bondage and severely treated, they had suffered and become united as a people. they knew no gods but those worshipped by the egyptians, and these gods it was now the intention of the almighty to confound, and prove to the jews as worthless. at the same time he worked with his own nation in mystery, for when moses asked him what god he was to tell his people that he was, the almighty only replied by these words--_i am_; having no name like all the false gods worshipped by the egyptians. he was now about to prove, by his wonderful miracles, the difference between himself and the false gods." "what are miracles?" "a miracle is doing that which man has no power of doing, proving that the party who does it is superior to man: for instance--to restore a dead man to life is a miracle, as none but god, or those empowered by god could do. miracles were necessary, therefore, to prove to the jews that the almighty was the true god, and were resorted to by him in this instance, as well as in the coming of our saviour, when it was also necessary to prove that he was the son of god. when the almighty sent moses to pharaoh to demand that the israelites should have permission to sacrifice in the desert, he purposely hardened the heart of pharaoh that he might refuse the request." "but why did he so?" "because he wanted to prove to the israelites that he was the only true god and had pharaoh consented to their going away, there would have been no opportunity of performing those miracles by which the israelites were to be delivered, and by which they were to acknowledge him as their god." mrs reichardt often renewed this conversation, till i became acquainted with scriptural history. chapter xxviii the following morning, i went with nero to take a couple of fish out of the pool. as soon as nero had caught them, he went into the other part of the bathing pool to amuse himself, while i cleaned the fish, which i generally did before i went up to the cabin, giving him the heads and insides for his share, if i did not require any portion for the birds. nero was full of play that morning, and when i threw the heads to him, as he frolicked in the water, he brought them out to the rocks, but instead of eating them, as usual, he laid them at my feet. i threw them in several times, and he continued to bring them out, and my mother, coming down to me, was watching him. "i think," said she, "you must teach nero to fetch and carry like a dog--try. instead of the heads, throw in this piece of wood;" which she now broke off the boat-hook staff. i did so, and nero brought it out, as he had done the heads of the fish. i patted and coaxed the animal, and tried him again several times with success. "now," said my mother, "you must accustom him to certain words when you send him for anything. always say, 'fetch it, nero!' and point with your finger." "why am i to do that, mother?" i asked. "because the object to be gained is, not that the animal should fetch out what you throw in, but what you send it to bring out which you have not thrown in. do you understand?" "yes," replied i. "you mean if there were anything floating near on the sea, i should send him for it." "exactly. then nero would be of some use." "i will soon teach him," replied i; "to-morrow i will send him into the sea after the piece of spar. i've no fear that he will go away now." "i was thinking last night, frank, whether they had taken the pail with them in the boat." "the pail," said i; "i know where it is, but i quite forgot it. we left it up the ravine the last day we planted the potatoes." "we did so, now i recollect. i will go for it while you get the breakfast ready." we had now been for many weeks on a fish diet, and i must confess that i was tired of it, which was not the case when i lived upon the dried birds during the whole of the year. why so i cannot tell, but i was soon to learn to relish fish, if i could obtain them. it was not often that the wind blew direct on the shore, but coming from the northward and eastward, it was in a slanting direction, but occasionally, and chiefly about the time of the equinoxes, the gales came on very heavy from the eastward, and then the wash of the seas upon the rocky coast was tremendous. such was the case about this time. a fierce gale of wind from the eastward raised a sea which threw the surf and spray high over the loftiest of the rocks, and the violence of the wind bore the spray far inland. the gale had come on in the evening, and my mother and i, when we rose in the morning, were standing on the platform before the cabin, admiring the grandeur of the scene, but without the least idea that it was to be productive of so much misery to ourselves. my mother pointed out to me some passages in the psalms and old testament bearing strongly upon the scene before us; after a time i called nero, and went down with him to take fish out of the pool for our day's consumption. at that time we had a large supply in the pool--more than ever, i should say. when i arrived at the pool, i found the waves several feet in height rolling in over the ledges, and the pool one mass of foam, the water in it being at least two or three feet higher than usual; still it never occurred to me that there was any mischief done, until i had sent nero in for the fish, and found that, after floundering and diving for some time, he did not bring out one. my mind misgave me, and i ordered him in again. he remained some time and then returned without a fish, and i was then satisfied that from the rolling in of the waves, and the unusual quantity of the water in the pool, the whole of the fish had escaped, and that we were now without any provisions or means of subsistence, until the weather should settle, and enable us to catch some more. aghast at the discovery, i ran up to the cabin, and called to my mother, who was in her bedroom. "oh, mother, all the fish have got out of the pool, and we have nothing to eat. i told you we should be starved." "take time, frank, and take breath," replied she, "and then tell me what has happened, to cause this alarm and dismay, that you appear to be in." i explained to her what had happened, and that nero could not find one fish. "i fear that what you say must be correct," replied she; "but we must put our trust in god. it is his will, and whatever he wills must be right." i cannot say i was christian enough at the time to acknowledge the truth of her reply, and i answered, "if god is as good and as gracious as you say, will he allow us to starve? does he know that we are starving?" continued i. "does he know, frank?" replied my mother; "what does the bible say--that not a sparrow falls to the ground without his knowledge; and of how much more worth are you than many sparrows? shame upon you, frank!" i was abashed but not satisfied, i therefore replied quietly, "we have nothing to eat, mother." "granted that we have lost all our fish, frank, still we are not yet starving; the weather may moderate tomorrow, and we may catch some more, or even if it should not till the day afterwards, we can bear to be two days without food. let us hope for the best and put our trust in god--let us pray to him and ask him for his assistance. he can rebuke these stormy waters--he can always find means of helping those who put confidence in him, and will send us aid when all hope appears gone. pray, frank, as i will do, fervently, and believing that your prayer is heard--pray with faith, and your prayer will be answered." "it is not always so," replied i; "you have told me of many people who have died of starvation." "i grant it, and for all wise purposes they were permitted so to do, but the almighty had reasons for permitting it, unknown to us, but which you may depend upon it, were good. we cannot fathom his decrees. he may even now decide that such is to be our fate; but if so, depend upon it, frank, all is right, and what appears to you now as cruel and neglectful of you, would, if the future could be looked into by us, prove to have been an act of mercy." "do you think, then, that we shall starve?" "i do not--i have too much faith in god's mercy, and i do not think that he would have preserved our lives by preventing the men from taking us into the boat, if we were now to starve. god is not inconsistent; and i feel assured that, forlorn as our present position appears to be, and tried as our faith in him may be, we shall still be preserved, and live to be monuments of his gracious love and kindness." these words of my mother and the implicit confidence which she appeared to have, much revived me. "well," said i, "i hope you are right, my dear mother, and now i think of it," continued i, brightening up at the idea, "if the worst come to the worst, we can eat the birds; i don't care much for them now, and if i did, you should not starve, mother." "i believe you would not hesitate to sacrifice the birds, frank, but a greater sacrifice may be demanded of you." "what?" inquired i; and then after a little thought, i said, "you don't mean nero, mother?" "to tell the truth, i did mean nero, frank, for the birds will not be a support for more than a day or two." "i never could kill nero, mother," replied i gloomily, and walking away into the cabin, i sat down very melancholy at the idea of my favourite being sacrificed; to me it appeared quite horrible, and my mother having referred to it, made her fall very much in my good opinion. alas! i was indeed young and foolish, and little thought what a change would take place in my feelings. as for the birds, as i really did not care for them, i resolved to kill two of them for our day's meal, and returning to the platform i had laid hold of the two that were there and had seized both by the neck, when my mother asked me what i was going to do. "kill them, and put them in the pot for our dinner," replied i. "nay, frank! you are too hasty. let us make some little sacrifice, even for the poor birds. we surely can fast one day without very great suffering. to-morrow will be time enough." i dropped the birds from my hand, tacitly consenting to her proposal. it was not, however, for the sake of the birds that i did so, but because one day's respite for the birds would be a day's respite for nero. "come," said my mother, "let us go into the cabin and get some work. i will alter some of the clothes for you. what will you do?" "i don't know," replied i, "but i will do whatever you tell me." "well, then, i perceive that the two fishing-lines are much worn, and they may break very soon, and then we shall be without the means of taking fish, even if the weather is fine, so now we will cut off some of the whale line, and when it is unravelled, i will show you how to lay it up again into fishing line; and, perhaps, instead of altering the clothes, i had better help you, as fishing-lines are now of more consequence to us than anything else." this was an arrangement which i gladly consented to. in a short time the whale line was unravelled, and my mother showed me how to lay it up in three yarns, so as to make a stout fishing line. she assisted, and the time passed away more rapidly than i had expected it would. "you are very clever, mother," said i. "no, my child, i am not, but i certainly do know many things which women in general are not acquainted with; but the reason of this is, i have lived a life of wandering, and occasional hardships. often left to our own resources, when my husband and i were among strangers, we found the necessity of learning to do many things for ourselves, which those who have money usually employ others to do for them; but i have been in situations where even money was of no use, and had to trust entirely to myself. i have therefore always made it a rule to learn everything that i could; and as i have passed much of my life in sailing over the deep waters, i obtained much useful knowledge from the seamen, and this of laying up fishing lines is one of the arts which they communicated to me. now, you see, i reap the advantage of it." "yes," replied i; "and so do i. how lucky it was that you came to this island!" "lucky for me, do you mean, frank?" "no, mother! i mean how lucky for me." "i trust that i have been sent here to be useful, frank, and with that feeling i cheerfully submit to the will of god. he has sent me that i may be useful to you, i do not doubt; and if by my means you are drawn towards him, and, eventually, become one of his children, i shall have fulfilled my mission." "i do not understand you quite, mother." "no, you cannot as yet, but everything in season," replied she, slowly musing; "'first the blade, then the ear, and then the full corn in the ear.'" "mother," said i, "i should like to hear the whole story of your life. you know i have told you all that i know about myself. now suppose you tell me your history, and that of your husband. you did say that perhaps, one day you would. do you recollect?" "yes, i do recollect that i did make a sort of promise, frank, and i promise you now that some day i will fulfil it; but i am not sure that you will understand or profit by the history now, so much as you may bye-and-bye." "well, but mother, you can tell me the story twice, and i shall be glad to hear it again, so tell it to me now, to amuse me, and bye-and-bye that i may profit by it." my mother smiled, which she very seldom did, and said-- "well, frank, as i know you would at any time give up your dinner to listen to a story, and as you will have no dinner to-day, i think it is but fair that i should consent to your wish. who shall i begin with--with my husband or with myself?" "pray begin with your own history," replied i. chapter xxix "i am the daughter of a parish clerk in a small market town near the southern coast of england, within a few miles of a large seaport." "what is a parish clerk?" i asked, interrupting my mother at the commencement of her promised narrative. "a parish clerk," she replied, "is a man who is employed in the parish or place to which he belongs, to fulfil certain humble duties in connection with the church or place of worship where the people meet together to worship god." "what does he do there?" i inquired. "he gives out the psalms that are to be sung, leads the congregation in making their responses to the minister appointed to perform the services of the church; has the custody of the registry of births, deaths, and burials of the inhabitants, and the care of the church monuments, and of other property belonging to the building. in some places he also fulfils the duties of bell-ringer and grave-digger; that is to say, by ringing a large bell at the top of the church, he summons the people to their devotions, during their lives, and digs a hole in consecrated ground, surrounding the sacred building, to receive their bodies when dead." i mused on this strange combination of offices, and entertained a notion of the importance of such a functionary, which i afterwards found was completely at variance with the real state of the case. "my father," she resumed, "not only fulfilled all these duties, but contrived to perform the functions of schoolmaster to the parish children." "what are parish children?" i asked eagerly. "i know what children are, as jackson represented to me that i was the child of my father and mother, but what makes children, parish children?" "they are the children of the poor," mrs reichardt replied, "who, not being able to afford them instruction, willingly allow them to be taught at the expense of the people of the parish generally." i thought this a praiseworthy arrangement. i knew nothing of poors-rates, and the system of giving relief to the poor of the parish, so long used in england, afterwards explained to me, but the kindness and wisdom of this plan of instruction became evident to my understanding. i was proceeding to ask other questions, when my mother stopped them by saying, that if i expected her to get through her story, i must let her proceed without further interruption; for many things would be mentioned by her which demanded explanation, for one so completely unaware of their existence as myself, and that it would be impossible to make me thoroughly acquainted with such things within any reasonable time; the proper explanations, she promised, should follow. she then proceeded. "my father, it may be thought, had enough on his hands, but in an obscure country town, it is not unusual for one man to unite the occupations of several, and this was particularly the case with my father, who, in addition to the offices i have enumerated, was the best cattle-doctor and bone-setter within ten miles; and often earned his bread at different kinds of farmer's work, such as thatching, hedging, ditching and the like. nevertheless, he found time to read his bible, and bring up his only daughter religiously. this daughter was myself." "what had become of your mother?" i asked, as i thought it strange mrs reichardt should only mention one parent. "she had died very soon after my birth," she answered, "and i was left at first to the care of a poor woman, who nursed me; as soon, however, as i could run about, and had exhibited some signs of intelligence, my father began to get so partial to me, that he very reluctantly allowed me to go out of his sight. he took great pains in teaching me what he knew, and though the extent of his acquirements was by no means great, it was sufficient to lay a good foundation, and establish a desire for more comprehensive information, which i sought every available means to obtain. "i remember that at a very early age i exhibited an extraordinary curiosity for a child; constantly asking questions, not only of my father, but of all his friends and visitors, and, as they seemed to consider me a quick and lively child, they took pleasure in satisfying my inquisitive spirit. in this way i gained a great deal of knowledge, and, by observation of what passed around me, a great deal more. "it soon became a source of pride and gratification with my father, to ask me to read the bible to him. this naturally led to a good many inquiries on my part, and numerous explanations on his. in course of time, i became familiar with all the sacred writings, and knew their spirit and meaning much better than many persons who were more than double my age. "my fondness for such studies, and consequent reputation, attracted the attention of dr brightwell, the clergyman of our parish, who had the kindness to let me share the instructions of his children, and still further advanced my education, and still more increased my natural predilection for religious information. by the time i was thirteen, i became quite a prodigy in christian learning, and was often sent for to the parsonage, to astonish the great people of the neighbourhood, by the facility with which i answered the most puzzling questions that were put to me, respecting the great mysteries of christianity." chapter xxx it was about this time that i first became acquainted with an orphan boy, an inmate of the workhouse, who had been left to the care of the parish by the sudden death of his parents, a german clock-maker and his wife, from a malignant fever which had visited the neighbourhood, and taken off a considerable portion of the labouring population. i had been sent on errands from my father, to the master of the workhouse, a severe, sullen man, of whom i had a great dread, and i noticed this child, in consequence of his pale and melancholy countenance, and apparently miserable condition. i observed that no one took any notice of him; and that he was allowed to wander about the great straggling workhouse, among the insane, the idiotic, and the imbecile, without the slightest attention being paid to his going and coming; in short, he lived the wretched life of a workhouse boy. "i see that you are eager to ask what is a workhouse boy," said my mother, "so i will anticipate your question. there is, in the various parishes of the country to which we both belong, a building expressly set apart for the accommodation and support of the destitute and disabled poor. it usually contains inmates of all ages, from the infant just born, to the very aged, whose infirmities shew them to be on the verge of the grave. they are all known to be in a state of helpless poverty, and quite unable to earn a subsistence for themselves. in this building they are clothed and fed; the younger provided with instruction necessary to put them in the way of earning a livelihood; the elders of the community enjoying the consolations of religion, accorded to them by the regular visits of the chaplain." "i suppose," i here observed, "that the people who lived there, were deeply impressed with their good fortune in finding such an asylum?" "as far as i could ever ascertain," mrs reichardt replied, "it was exactly the reverse. it was always thought so degrading to enter a workhouse, that the industrious labourer would endure any and every privation rather than live there. an honest hard-working man must be sorely driven indeed, to seek such a shelter in his distress." "that seems strange," i observed. "why should he object to receive what he so much stands in need of?" "when he thus comes upon the funds of the parish," answered my mother, "he becomes what is called a pauper, and among the english peasantry of the better sort, there is the greatest possible aversion to be ranked with this degraded class. consequently, the inmates of the workhouses are either those whose infirmities prevent their earning a subsistence, or the idle and the dissolute, who feel none of the honest prejudices of self-dependence, and care only to live from day to day on the coarse and meagre fare afforded them by the charity of their wealthier and more industrious fellow-creatures. "the case of this poor boy i thought very pitiable. i found out that his name was heinrich reichardt. he could speak no language but his own, and therefore his wants remained unknown, and his feelings unregarded. he had been brought up with a certain sense of comfort and decency, which was cruelly outraged by the position in which he found himself placed by the sudden death of his parents. i observed that he was often in tears, and his fair features and light hair contrasted remarkably with the squalid faces and matted locks of his companions. his wretchedness never failed to make a deep impression on me. "i brought him little presents, and strove to express my sympathy for his sufferings. he seemed, at first, more surprised than grateful, but i shortly discovered that my attentions gave him unusual pleasure, and he looked upon my visits as his only solace and gratification. "even at this period i exercised considerable influence over my father, and i managed to interest him in the case of the poor foreign boy to such an extent, that he was induced to take him out of the workhouse, and find him a home under his own roof. he was at first reluctant to burden himself with the bringing up of a child, who, from his foreign language and habits, could be of little use to him in his avocations; but i promised to teach him english, and all other learning of which he stood most in need, and assured my father that in a prodigious short time i would make him a much abler assistant than he was likely to find among the boys of the town. "my father's desire to please me, rather than any faith he reposed in my assertions, led him to allow me to do as i pleased in this affair. i lost no time, therefore, in beginning my course of instruction, and in a few weeks ascertained that i had an apt pupil, who was determined to proceed with his education as fast as circumstances would admit. we were soon able to express our ideas to each other, and in a few months read together the book out of which i had received so many invaluable lessons. "in a short time, i became not less proud of, than partial to, my pupil. i took him through the same studies which i had pursued under the auspices of our clergyman, and was secretly pleased to find, not only that he was singularly quick in imbibing my instructions, but displayed a strong natural taste for those investigations towards which i had shown so marked a bias. "day after day have we sat together discoursing of the great events recorded in holy writ: going over every chapter of its marvellous records, page by page, till the whole was so firmly fixed upon our minds, that we had no necessity during our conversations for referring to the sacred book. we found examples we held up to ourselves for imitation; we found incidents we regarded as promises of divine protection; we found consolation and comfort, as well as exhortation and advice; and, moreover, we found a sort of instruction that led us to select for ourselves duties that apparently tended to bring us nearer to the great being whose goodness we had so diligently studied. "my father seemed as much pleased with my successful teaching, as he had been with my successful learning; and when young reichardt turned out a remarkably handy and intelligent lad, to whose assistance in some of his avocations he could have recourse with perfect confidence in his cleverness and discretion, he grew extremely partial to him. dr brightwell also proved his friend, and in a few years, the condition of the friendless workhouse boy was so changed, he could not have been taken for the same person. "he was a boy of a very grateful spirit, and always regarded me with the devotion of a most thankful heart. often would he contrast the wretchedness of his previous condition, with the happiness he now enjoyed, and express in the warmest terms his obligations to me for the important service i had rendered him in rescuing him from the abject misery of the workhouse. under these circumstances, it is not extraordinary, that we should learn to regard each other with the liveliest feelings of affection, and while we were still children, endured all the transports and torments which make up the existence of more experienced lovers." "i do not like interrupting you," i here observed, "but i certainly should like to know what is meant by the word lovers?" "i can scarcely explain it to you satisfactorily at present," said mrs reichardt, with a smile; "but i have no doubt, before many years have passed over your head--always provided that you escape from this island--you will understand it without requiring any explanation. but i must now leave my story, as many things of much consequence to our future welfare now demand my careful attention." i could not then ascertain from her what was meant by the word whose meaning i had asked. it had very much excited my curiosity, but she left me to attend to her domestic duties, of which she was extremely regardful, and i had no opportunity at that time of eliciting from her the explanation i desired. chapter xxxi it is impossible for me to overrate the value of mrs reichardt's assistance. indeed had it not been for her, circumstanced as i was at this particular period, i should in all probability have perished. her exhortations saved me from despair, when our position seemed to have grown quite desperate. but example did more, even, than precept. her ingenuity in devising expedients, her activity in putting them in force, her unfailing cheerfulness under disappointment, and christian resignation under privation, produced the best results. i was enabled to bear up against the ill effects of our crippled resources, consequent upon the ill conduct of the sailors of the whaler, and the failure of our fish-pond. she manufactured strong lines for deep sea fishing, and having discovered a shelf of rock, little more than two feet above the sea, to which with a good deal of difficulty i could descend, i took my stand one day on the rock with my lines baited with a piece of one of my feathered favourites, whom dire necessity had at last forced me to destroy. i waited with all the patience of a veteran angler. i knew the water to be very deep, and it lay in a sheltered nook or corner of the rocks about ten feet across; i allowed the line to drop some three or four yards, and not having any float, could only tell i had a bite by feeling a pull at the line, which was wound round my arm. after some time having been passed in this way, my attention was withdrawn from the line, and given to the narrative i had so lately heard--that is to say, though my eyes were still fixed upon the line, i had completely given up my thoughts to the story of the poor german boy, who had been snatched from poverty by the interference of the parish clerk's daughter, and i contrived to speculate on what i should have done under such circumstances, imagining all sorts of extravagances in which i should have indulged, to testify my gratitude to so amiable and benevolent a friend. a singular course of ideal scenes followed each other in quick succession in my mind--as i fancied myself the hero of a similar adventure. i regarded my imaginary benefactress with feelings of such intensity as i had never before experienced; and it seemed that i was to her the exciting object of sentiments of a like nature, the knowledge of which awoke in our hearts the most agreeable sensations. i was rudely disturbed out of this day-dream by finding myself suddenly plunged into the deep water beneath me. the shock was so startling, that some seconds elapsed before i could comprehend my situation; and then it became clear that i must have hooked a fish, that had not only succeeded in pulling me off my balance, but the line by which he was held being round my arm, cutting painfully into the flesh, threatened drowning by keeping me under water. with great difficulty i managed to rise to the surface, and loosened the windings of the line from my limb; then, anxious to retain possession of what from its force must have been a fish well worth some trouble in catching, i held on with both hands, and pulled with all my strength. at first, by main force i was drawn through the water; then when i found the strain slacken, i drew in the line. this manoeuvre was repeated several times, till i succeeded in obtaining a view of what i had caught; or, more properly speaking, of what had caught me. it was merely a glimpse; for the fish, which was a very large one, getting a sight of me within a few yards of him, made some desperate plunges, and again darted off, dragging me along with him, sometimes under the water, and sometimes on the surface. his body was nearly round, and about seven or eight feet long--rather a formidable antagonist for close quarters; nevertheless, i was most eager to get at him, the more so, when i ascertained that his resistance was evidently decreasing. i continued to approach, and at last got near enough to plunge my knife up to the haft in his head, which at once put an end to the struggle. but now another difficulty presented itself. in the ardour of the chase i had been drawn nearly a mile from the island, and i found it impossible to carry back the produce of my sport, exhausted as i was by the efforts i had made in capturing him. i knew i could not swim with such a burthen for the most inconsiderable portion of the distance. my fish therefore must be abandoned. here was a bountiful supply of food, as soon as placed within reach, rendered totally unavailable. i thought of mrs reichardt. i thought how gratified she would have been, could i have brought to her such an excellent addition to our scanty stock of food. then i thought of her steadfast reliance upon providence, and what valuable lessons of piety and wisdom she would read me, if she found me depressed by my disappointment. chapter xxxii as soon as i could disconnect my tackle from the dead fish, i turned my face homewards, and struck out manfully for the shore; luckily i did not observe any sharks. i landed safely without further adventure, and immediately sought my kind friend and companion, whom i found, as usual, industriously employed in endeavouring to secure me additional comforts. if she was not engaged in ordinary women's work, making, mending, cleaning, or improving, in our habitation, she was sure to be found doing something in the immediate neighbourhood, which, though less feminine, shewed no less forethought, prudence, and sagacity. our garden had prospered wonderfully under her hands. the ground seemed now stocked with various kinds of vegetation, of which i neither knew the value, nor the proper mode of cultivation; and we seemed about to be surrounded with shrubs and plants--many of very pleasing appearance--that must in a short time entirely change the aspect of the place. she heard my adventure with a good deal of interest, only remonstrating with me upon my want of caution, and dwelling upon the fatal consequences that must have ensued to herself, had i been drowned or disabled by falling from the rock, or devoured by the sharks. "you may consider yourself, my dear son," she observed, with serious earnestness, "to have been under the divine care. nothing can be clearer than that a wise and kind providence is continually watching over his creatures when placed in unusual or perilous circumstances. he occasionally affords them manifestations of his favour, to encourage them when engaged in good works. this shews the comprehensive eye of the master of many workmen, who overlooks the labours of his more industrious servants, and indicates to them his regard for their welfare and appreciation of their labours." "but surely," i interposed, "if i had been under the superintendence of the providence of which you speak, i should not have been obliged to abandon so capital a fish, when i had endured such trouble to capture it, and when its possession was so necessary to our comfort, nay, even to our existence." "the very abandonment of so unwieldy a creature," she replied, "is unanswerable evidence of a divine interposition in your favour; for had you persisted in your intention of carrying it to the shore, there is but little doubt that its weight would have overpowered you, and that you would have been drowned; and then what would have become of me? a woman left in this desolate spot to her own resources, must soon be forced to give up the struggle for existence, from want of physical strength. nevertheless, there are numerous instances on record, of women having surmounted hardships which few men could endure. supported by our heavenly father, who is so powerful a protector of the weak, and friend of the helpless, the weakest of our weak sex may triumph over the most intolerable sufferings. i, however, am not over confident of being so supported, and therefore, i think it would be but shewing a proper consideration for your fellow exile, to act in every emergency with as much circumspection and prudence as possible." i promised that for the future i would run no such risks, and added many professions of regard for her safety. they had the desired effect; i pretended to think no more of my disappointment, nevertheless, i found myself constantly dwelling on the size of my lost fish, and lamenting my being obliged to abandon him to his more voracious brethren of the deep. these thoughts so filled my mind that at night i continued to dream over again the whole incident, beginning with my patient angling from the rock, and concluding with my disconsolate swim to shore--and pursued my scaly antagonist quite as determinedly in my sleep as i had done in the deep waters. i rose early after having passed so disturbed a night, and soon made my way to the usual haunt of nero, whom i discovered in the sea near the rocks making all sorts of strange tumblings and divings, apparently after some dark object that was floating in the water. i called him away, to examine what it was that had so attracted his attention, and my surprise may be imagined when i made out the huge form of my enemy of the preceding day. my shouts and exclamations of joy soon brought mrs reichardt to the scene, and when she discovered the shape of this prodigious fish, her surprise seemed scarcely less than my own. how to land him was our first consideration; and after some debate on the ways and means, i got a rope and leaped into the water with it, fastened a noose round his gills, and then swimming back and climbing the rock; we jointly tried to pull him up on to the shore. we hauled and tugged with all our force for a considerable time, but to very little effect; he was too heavy to pull up perpendicularly. at last we managed to drag him to a low piece of rock, and there i divided him into several pieces, which mrs reichardt carried away to dry and preserve in some way that she said would make the fish capital eating all the year round. it was very palatable when dressed by her, and as she changed the manner of cooking several times, i never got tired of it. by its flavour, as far as i could judge from subsequent knowledge, the creature was something of the sturgeon kind of fish, but its proper name i never could learn; nor was i ever able to catch another, therefore, i must presume that it was a stranger in those seas. nevertheless, he proved most acceptable to us both, for we should have fared but ill for some time, had it not been for his providential capture. it was one afternoon, when we had been enjoying a capital meal at the expense of our great friend, that i led the subject to mrs reichardt's adventures, subsequently to where she broke off in the story of herself and the poor german boy; and though not without considerable reluctance, i induced her to proceed with her narrative. chapter xxxiii "our good minister dr brightwell," she commenced, "was a man of considerable scholastic attainments, and he delighted in making a display of them. at one time, he had been master of an extensive grammar school, and now he employed a good deal of his leisure in teaching those boys and girls of the town, who indicated the possession of anything like talent. the overseers used to talk jestingly to my father of the doctor teaching plough-boys greek and latin; and wenches, whose chief employment was stone-picking in the fields, geography and the use of the globes. even the churchwardens shook their heads, and privately thought the rector a little out of his seven senses for wasting his learning upon such unprofitable scholars. nevertheless, he continued his self-imposed task, without meeting any reward beyond the satisfaction of his own conscience. it was not till he added to his pupils myself and young reichardt, that he felt he was doing his duty with some prospect of advantage. "the spirit of emulation roused both of us to make extraordinary efforts to second our worthy master's endeavours: and this did not, as is usually the case, proceed from rivalry--it arose entirely from a desire of the one to stand well in the estimation of the other. in this way we learned the french and latin languages, geography, and the usual branches of a superior education: but our bias was more particularly for religious knowledge, and our preceptor encouraged this, till we were almost as good theologians as himself. "while this information was being carefully arranged and digested, there sprung up in our hearts so deep a devotion for each other, that we were miserable when absent and enjoyed no gratification so much as being in each other's society. we knew not then the full power and meaning of this preference, but, as we changed from boy and girl-hood to adult life, our feelings developed themselves into that attachment between the sexes, which from time immemorial has received the name of love." "i think i know what that means, now," said i, as my day-dream, which was so rudely disturbed by my fall into the sea occurred to me. "it would be strange if you did," she replied, "considering that it is quite impossible you should have become acquainted with it." "yes, i am certain i understand it very well," i rejoined, more confidently, and then added, not without some embarrassment, "if i were placed in the position of heinrich reichardt, i am quite sure i should feel towards any young female, who was so kind to me, the deepest regard and affection. i should like to be constantly near her, and should always desire that she should like me better than anyone else." "that is quite as good an explanation of the matter, as i could expect from you," she observed, smiling. "but to return to my story. our mutual attachment attracted general attention, and was the subject of much observation. but we had no enemies: and when we were met strolling together in the shady lanes, gathering wild flowers, or wandering through the woods in search of wild strawberries, no one thought it necessary to make any remark if we had our arms round each other's waist. my father, if he heard anything about it, did not interfere. young reichardt had made himself so useful to him, and shewed himself so remarkably clever in everything he undertook, that the old man loved him as his own son. "it was a settled thing between us, that we were to become man and wife, as soon as we should be permitted. and many were our plans and schemes for the future. heinrich considered himself to be in the position of jacob, who served such a long and patient apprenticeship for rachel; and though he confessed he should not like to wait so long for his wife as the patriarch had been made to do, he acknowledged he would rather serve my father to the full period, than give up all hope of possessing me. "this happy state of things was, however, suddenly put an end to, by dr brightwell one day sending for my father. it was a long time before he came back, and when he did, he looked unusually grave and reserved. in an hour or so he communicated to me the result of his long interview with the rector. the doctor had resolved to send young reichardt to a distant place, where many learned men lived together in colleges, for the purpose of further advancing his education, and fitting him for a religious teacher, to which vocation he had long expressed a desire to devote himself. the idea of separation seemed very terrible, but i at last got reconciled to it, in the belief that it would be greatly for heinrich's advantage, and we parted at last with many tears, many protestations, some fears, but a great many more hopes. "for some days after he had left me, everything seemed so strange, every one seemed so dull, every place seemed so desolate, that i felt as if i had been transported into some dismal scene, where i knew no one, and where there was no one likely to care about me in the slightest degree. my father went about his avocations in a different spirit to what he had so long been used to exhibit; it was evident he missed heinrich as much as i did, and the villagers stared whenever i passed them--as though my ever going about without heinrich, was something which they had never anticipated. "in course of time, however, to all appearance, everything and every one went on in their daily course, as though no heinrich had ever been heard of. my father would sometimes, when overpressed by business, refer to the able assistant he had lost, and now and then i heard a conjecture hazarded by some one or other of his most confidential friends, as to what young reichardt was doing with himself. my conjectures, and my references to him, were far from being so occasional; there was scarce an hour of the day i did not think of him; but, believing that i should please him most by endeavouring to improve as much as possible during his absence, i did not give myself up to idle reflections respecting the past, or anticipations, equally idle, respecting the future. "my great delight was in hearing from him. at first, his letters expressed only his feelings for me; then he dwelt more largely on his own exertions for preparing himself for the profession he desired to adopt; and after a time, his correspondence was almost entirely composed of expositions of his views of a religious life, and dissertations on various points of doctrine. he evidently was growing more enthusiastic in religion, and less regardful of our attachment. "yet i entertained no apprehensions or misgivings. i did not think it necessary to consider myself slighted because the thoughts of my future husband were evidently raised more and more above me; the knowledge of this only made me more anxious to raise myself more and more towards the elevation to which his thoughts were so intently directed. "things went on in this way for two or three years. i never saw him all this time; i heard from him but seldom. he excused his limited correspondence on the plea that his studies left him no time for writing. i never blamed him for this apparent neglect--indeed i rather encouraged it, for my exhortations were always that he should address his time and energies towards the attainment of the object i knew him to have so much at heart--his becoming a minister of our lord's gospel. "one day my father came home from the rectory with a troubled countenance. dr brightwell was very indignant because heinrich had joined a religious community that dissented from the articles of the church of england. the doctor had offered to get him employment in the church, if he would give up his new connections: but the more earnest character of his new faith exerted so much influence over his enthusiastic nature, that he willingly abandoned his bright prospects to become a more humble labourer in a less productive vineyard. "my father, as the clerk of the parish, seemed to think himself bound to share in the indignation of his pastor for this desertion, and heinrich was severely condemned by him for displaying such ingratitude to his benefactor: i was commanded to think no more of him. "this, however, was not so easy a matter, although our correspondence appeared to have entirely ceased. i knew not where to address a letter to him and was quite unaware of what his future career was now to be." chapter xxxiv "time passed on. with all, except myself, heinrich reichardt appeared to be forgotten; in the opinion of all, except myself, he had forgotten our house, and all the friends he had once made there. our good rector had been removed by death from the post he had so ably filled; and my father being incapacitated by age and infirmity from attending his duties in the church, had his place filled by another. he had saved sufficient to live upon, and had built himself a small cottage at the end of the village, where we lived together in perfect peace, if not in perfect happiness. "i had long grown up to womanhood, and having some abilities, had been employed as one of the teachers of the girls' school, of which i had raised myself to be mistress. i conducted myself so as to win the respect of the chief parochial officers, from more than one of whom i received proposals of marriage: but i never could reconcile myself to the idea of becoming the wife of any man but the long-absent heinrich, and the new clerk and the overseer were fain to be content with my grateful rejection of their proposals. "i determined to wait patiently till i could learn from heinrich's own lips that he had abandoned his early friend. i could never get myself to believe in the possibility of his unfaithfulness; and the remembrances of our mutual studies in the book of truth seemed always to suggest the impossibility of his acting so completely at variance with the impressions he had thence received. "i was aware that if i had mentioned my hopes of his one day coming to claim me, i should be laughed at by everyone who knew anything of our story--so i said nothing; but continued the more devotedly in my heart to cherish that faith which had so long afforded me support against the overwhelming evidence of prolonged silence and neglect. "there was a congregation of dissenters in the town, and i had been once or twice prevailed on to join their devotions. one day i heard that proceedings of extraordinary interest would take place at the meeting-house. a minister of great reputation had accepted the situation of missionary to preach the gospel to the heathen, and he was visiting the different congregations that lay in his route to the seaport whence he was to embark to the sandwich islands. he was expected to address a discourse to the dissenters of our parish, and i was induced to go and hear him. "the meeting-house was very much crowded, but i contrived to get a seat within a short distance of the speakers, and waited with much interest to behold the man, who, like some of the first preachers, had chosen the perilous task of endeavouring to convert a nation of savage idolaters to the faith of the true christ. "after a short delay he appeared on a raised platform, and was introduced to this congregation by their minister. i heard nothing of this introduction, though it seemed a long one; i saw nothing of the speaker, though his was a figure which always attracted an attentive audience. i saw only the stranger. in those pale, grave, and serious features then presented to me, i recognised heinrich reichardt." "he had come back to you at last," i exclaimed; "i thought he would. after all you had done for the poor german boy, it was impossible that he should grow up to manhood and forget you." "you shall hear," she replied. "for some time my heart beat wildly, and i thought i should be obliged to leave the place, my sensations became so overpowering; but the fear of disturbing the congregation, and of attracting attention towards myself, had such influence over me, that i managed to retain sufficient control over my feelings to remain quiet. nevertheless, my eyes were upon heinrich, and my whole heart and soul were exclusively engrossed by him while he continued before me. "presently he began to speak. as i have just said, i paid no attention to the preliminary proceedings. i know nothing of the manner in which he was introduced to his audience; but when he became the speaker, every word fell upon my ear with a distinctness that seemed quite marvellous to me. "and how could it be otherwise? his tall figure, his melancholy yet expressive features, his earnest manner, and clear and sonorous voice, invested him with all the power and dignity of an apostle, and when with these attributes were joined those associations of the past with which he was so intimately connected, it is impossible to exaggerate the influence he exercised over me. "he began with a fervent blessing on all who had sought the sanctity of that roof, and his hearers, impressed with the thrilling earnestness of his delivery, became at once hushed into a kind of awe-struck attention. they knelt down, and bowed their heads in prayer. "i appeared to have no power to follow the general example, but remained the only sitter in the entire congregation with my eyes, nay, all my senses, fixed, rivetted upon the preacher. this, of course, attracted his attention. i saw him look towards me with surprise, then he started, his voice hesitated for a moment, but he almost immediately continued his benediction, and, as it seemed to me, with a voice tremulous with emotion. "then followed a discourse on the object of the preacher in presenting himself there. he described the wonderful goodness of the creator in continually raising up the most humble instruments of his will to perform the most important offices; in illustration of which he referred to the numerous instances in the old and new testaments, where god's preference in this way is so clearly manifested. "he then stated that 'a case had arisen for divine interposition, equal in necessity to any which had occurred since the first commencement of christianity.' he explained that 'there were nations still existing in a distant portion of the globe in a state of the wildest barbarism. ignorant savages were they, with many cruel and idolatrous customs, who were cannibals and murderers, and given up to the worst vices of the heathen. their abject and pitiable state, he told us, the lord god had witnessed with divine commiseration, and had determined that the light of christian love should shine upon their darkness, and that almighty wisdom should dissipate their besotted ignorance. "'but who' he asked, 'was to be the ambassador from so stupendous a power to these barbarous states? who would venture to be a messenger of peace and comfort to a cruel and savage nation? was there no man,' he again asked, 'great enough and bold enough to undertake a mission of such vast importance, attended by such terrible risks? "'the almighty ruler seeks not for his ministers among the great and bold,' he added, 'as it is written, he hath put down the mighty from their seats, and hath exalted the humble and meek. and it will be peculiarly so on this occasion, for the exaltation is from the humblest origin; so humble it is scarcely possible to imagine so miserable a beginning, in the end attaining distinction so honorable. "'imagine, if you can, my brethren,' he said, 'in the building set apart in your town for the reception of your destitute poor, a child parentless, friendless, and moneyless, condemned, as it seemed, to perpetual raggedness and intolerable suffering. a ministering angel, under the direction of the supreme goodness, took that child by the hand and led it out of the pauper walls that enclosed it, and under its auspices the child grew and flourished, and learned all that was excellent in faith and admirable in practice. "'it was ordained that he should lose sight of his angelic teacher. a dire necessity compelled him to withdraw from that pure and gracious influence. he had to learn in a different school, and prepare himself for heavier tasks. manhood, with all its severe responsibilities, came upon him. he sought first to render himself competent for some holy undertaking, before he could consider himself worthy again to claim that notice which had made him what he was. earnestly he strove for the divine assistance and encouragement; and as his qualifications increased, his estimate of the worthiness necessary for the object he had in view, became more and more exalted. "'at last,' he continued, 'it became known to him that a missionary was required to explain to the savage people to whom i have already alluded, the principles of christianity. he was appointed to this sacred trust: and he then determined, before he left this country for the distant one of his ministry, to present himself before that beneficent being who had poured out before him so abundant a measure of christian virtue; that they might be joined together in the same great vocation, and support each other in the same important trust.' "i heard enough," continued mrs reichardt. "all was explained, and i was fully satisfied. the discourse proceeded to identify the speaker with the poor boy who had been preserved for such onerous duties. then came an appeal to the congregation for their prayers, and such assistance as they could afford, to advance so holy a work as the conversion of the heathen. "i was in such a tumult of pleasant feelings that i retained but a confused recollection of the subsequent events. i only remember that as i was walking home from the meeting, i heard footsteps quickly following; in a few minutes more the voice that had so lately filled my heart to overflowing with happiness, again addressed me. i was too much excited to remain unconcerned on suddenly discovering that heinrich was so near, and i fell fainting into his arms. "i was carried into a neighbouring cottage, but in a short time was enabled to proceed home. in a week afterwards we were married: a few days more sufficed for the preparations that were required for my destination, and then we proceeded to the port, and embarked on board the ship that was to take us over many thousand miles of sea, to the wild, unknown country that was to be the scene of our mission." chapter xxxv mrs reichardt was obliged to break off her narrative, where it concluded at the end of the last chapter. as i have said, her household duties, being very numerous, and requiring a great deal of attention, took up nearly the whole of her time. the garden now presented a most agreeable appearance, possessing several different kinds of vegetables, and various plants that had been raised from seed. we had succeeded in raising several young orange trees from the pips she had brought in her basket; and they promised to supply us with plenty of their luscious fruit. even the peas we thought so dry and useless had germinated, and provided us with a welcome addition to our table. i shall never forget the first day she added to our scanty meal of dried fish a dish of smoking potatoes fresh out of the moist earth. after enjoying sufficiently my wonder at their appearance, and delight at their agreeable taste, she informed me of their first introduction into europe, and their gradual diffusion over the more civilised portions of the globe. i speak of europe now, because i had learned from my companion, not only a good deal of geography, but had obtained some insight into several other branches of knowledge. in particular, she had told me much interesting information about england, much more than i had learned from jackson; dwelling upon its leading features, and the most remarkable portions of its history; and i must acknowledge that i felt a secret pride in belonging to so great a country. i considered that i belonged to it, for my father and mother were english, and though i might be called the little savage, and be fixed to an obscure island in the great ocean, i felt that my real home was in this great country my mother talked about so glowingly, and that my chief object ought to be to return into the hands of my grandfather the belt that had in so singular a manner come into my possession. i often thought of this great england whose glory had been so widely spread and so durably established, and longed for some means of leaving our present abode, and going in search of its time-honoured shores. but i asked myself how was this desirable object to be effected? we had no means of transporting ourselves from the prison into which we had been accidentally cast. we had nothing resembling a boat on the island, and we had no tools for making one; and even had we been put in possession of such a treasure, we had no means of launching it. the rocky character of the coast made the placing of a boat on the water almost impossible. the expectation of a vessel appearing off the island appeared quite as unreasonable. we had seen no ships for a long time, and those we had observed were a great deal too far off to heed our signals. we had no help for it, but to trust to providence and bear our present evil patiently. nevertheless, i took my glass and swept the sea far and wide in search of a ship, but failed to discover anything but a spermaceti whale blowing in the distance, or a shoal of porpoises tumbling over each other nearer the shore, or a colony of seals basking in the sun on the rocks nearest the sea. my disappointment was shared by nero, who seemed to regard my vexation with a sympathising glance, and even the gannets turned their dull stupid gaze upon me, with an expression as if they deeply commiserated my distress. i had for a long time employed myself in making a shelving descent to the sea, on the most secure part of the rock, intending that it should be a landing place for a boat, in case any ship should come near enough to send one to our rescue. it was a work of great labour, and hatchet and spade equally suffered in my endeavours to effect my object; but at last i contrived to take advantage of a natural fracture in the rock, and a subsequent fall of the cliff, to make a rude kind of inclined plane, rather too steep, and too rough for bad climbers, but extremely convenient for my mother and me, whenever we should be prepared to embark for our distant home. my thoughts were now often directed to the possibility of making on the island some kind of boat that would hold ourselves and sufficient provisions for a voyage to the nearest of the larger islands. i spoke to mrs reichardt on the subject, but she dwelt upon the impossibility without either proper tools, or the slightest knowledge of boat-building, of producing a vessel to which we could trust ourselves with any confidence, neither of us knowing anything about its management in the open sea; and then she spoke of the dangers a small boat would meet with, if the water should be rough, or if we should not be able to make the island in any reasonable time. yet i was not daunted by difficulties, nor dissuaded by discouraging representations. i thought at first of fastening all the loose timber together that had drifted against the rocks, as much in the shape of a boat as i could get it, but on looking over my stock of nails, i found they fell very far short of the proper quantity; consequently that mode of effecting my purpose was abandoned. i then thought of felling a tree and hollowing it out by charring the timber. as yet i had discovered nothing on the island but shrubs. i was quite certain that no tree grew near enough to the sea to be available, and if i should succeed in cutting down a large one and fashioning it as i desired, i had no means of transport. i might possibly make a boat capable of carrying all i wanted to put into it, but as i could neither move the water up to the boat, nor the boat down to the water, for all the service i wanted of it, even if the island contained a tree large enough, i might just as well leave it untouched. still i would not altogether abandon my favourite project. i thought of the willows that grew on the island, and fancied i could make a framework by twisting them strongly together, and stretching seal skins over them. i laboured at this for several weeks,--exercising all my ingenuity and no slight stock of patience, to create an object with which i was but imperfectly acquainted. i did succeed at last in putting together something in a remote degree resembling the boat that brought part of the whaler's crew to the island and had taken them away, but it was not a quarter the size, and was so light that i could carry it without much difficulty to the landing i had constructed on the cliff. when i came to try its capabilities, i found it terribly lop-sided--it soon began to leak, and in fact it exhibited so many faults, that i was forced to drag it again on shore, and take it to pieces. i called in mrs reichardt to my assistance, and though at first she seemed averse to the experiment, she gave me a great deal of information respecting the structure of small boats, and the method of waterproofing leather and other fabrics. i attended carefully to all she said, and commenced re-building with more pretensions to art. i now made a strong frame-work, tolerably sharp at each end, and as nearly as possible resembling a keel at the bottom. i covered this on both sides with pieces of strong cloth saturated with grease from the carcases of birds, and then covered the whole with well-dried seal skins, which i had made impervious to wet. the inside of the boat nearest the water i neatly covered with pieces of dry bark, over which i fixed some boards, which had floated to the island from wrecked ships. finally i put in some benches to sit on, and then fancied i had done everything that was necessary. i soon got her into the fishing-pool, and was delighted to find that she floated capitally--but i still had a great deal to do. i had made neither oars to propel her through the water, nor sail to carry her through the waves, when rowing was impossible. i remembered the whaler's spare oars and mizen, but they were too large; nevertheless, they served me as models to work upon, and in time i made a rough pair of paddles or oars, which, though rudely fashioned, i hoped would answer the purpose pretty well. the next difficulty was how to use the oars, and i made many awkward attempts before i ascertained the proper method of proceeding. again my companion, on whom nothing which had once passed before her eyes had passed in vain, shewed me how the boat should be managed. in a short time i could row about the pool with sufficient dexterity to turn the boat in any direction i required, and i then took nero as a passenger, and he seemed to enjoy the new gratification with a praiseworthy decorum; till, when i was trying to turn the boat round, the movement caused him to attempt to shift his quarters, which he did with so little attention to the build of our vessel, that in one moment she was capsized, and in the next we were swimming about in the pool with our vessel bottom upwards. as she was so light, i soon righted her, and found that she had received no injury, and appeared to be perfectly water-tight. chapter xxxvi i could not prevail upon mrs reichardt to embark in my craft, the fate of my first passenger which she had witnessed from the shore, had deterred her from attempting a voyage under such unpromising circumstances. as soon as i had dried my clothes, i was for making another experiment, and one too of a more hazardous nature. i would not be parted from nero, but i made him lie at the bottom of the boat, where i could have him under strict control. with him i also took my little flock of gannets, who perched themselves round me, gazing about them with an air of such singular stupidity as they were being propelled through the water, that i could not help bursting out laughing. "indeed," said mrs reichardt, "such a boat's crew and such a boat has never been seen in those seas before. a young savage as captain, a tame seal as boatswain, and a flock of gannets as sailors, certainly made up as curious a set of adventurers as ever floated upon the wide ocean." i was not the least remarkable of the strange group, for i had nothing on but a pair of duck trousers, patched in several places; and my hair, which had grown very long, hung in black wavy masses to my shoulders. my skin was tanned by the sun to a light brown, very different from the complexion of mrs reichardt, which had ever been remarkable for its paleness. indeed she told me i should find some difficulty in establishing my claim to the title of european, but none at all to that of little savage, which she often playfully called me. nevertheless, in this trim, and with these companions, i passed out of the fishing-pool into the sea, with the intention of rowing round the island. mrs reichardt waved her hand as i departed on my voyage, having exhorted me to be very careful, as long as i was in hearing; she then turned away, as i thought, to return to the hut. the day was remarkably fine. there was not so much as a cloud on the horizon, and scarcely a ripple on the water: therefore, everything seemed to favour my project, for if there had been anything of a breeze, the beating of the waves against the rock would have been a great obstacle to my pursuing my voyage with either comfort or safety. the water too was so clear, that although it was of great depth, i could distinguish the shells that lay on the sand, and observe various kinds of fish, some of most curious shape, that rushed rapidly beneath the boat as it was urged along. i was delighted with the motion, and with the agreeable appearance of the different novelties that met my gaze. the light boat glided almost imperceptibly through the water at every stroke of the oar. nero lay as still as if his former lesson had taught him the necessity of remaining motionless; and the gannets now and then expressed their satisfaction by a shrill cry or a rapid fluttering of their wings. in this way, we passed on without any adventure, till i found it necessary for me to row some distance out to sea, to round a projecting rock that stood like a mighty wall before me. i pulled accordingly, and then had a better opportunity of seeing the island than i had ever obtained. i recognised all the favourite places, the ravine, the wood, the hut covered with beautiful creepers, and the garden, full of flowers, looked very agreeable to the eye: but every part seemed to look pleasant, except the great savage rocks which enclosed the island on every side: but even these i thought had an air of grandeur that gave additional effect to the scene. much to my surprise, i recognised mrs reichardt walking rapidly towards a part of the shore, near which i should be obliged to pass. from this i saw that she was intent on watching me from point to point, to know the worst, if any accident should befall me, and be at hand should there be a necessity for rendering assistance. i shouted to her, and she waved her hand in reply. on rounding the headland, my astonishment was extreme on finding my little bark in the midst of a shoal of enormous sharks. if i came in contact with one of them i was lost, for the frail boat would certainly be upset and as jackson had assured me, if ever i allowed these monsters to come near enough, one snap of their jaws, and there would be an end of the little savage. i thought of the warning of mrs reichardt, and was inclined to think i had better have taken her advice, and remained in the fishing-pool; nevertheless, i went on as quietly and deliberately as possible, exercising all my skill to keep clear of my unexpected enemies. it was not till i had got into the middle of the shoal that the sharks seemed to be aware there was anything unusual in their neighbourhood, but as soon as they were fully aware of the presence of an intruder, they exhibited the most extraordinary excitement, rushing together in groups, with such rapid motion, that the water became so agitated, i was obliged to exercise all my skill to keep the boat steady on her course. they dived, and rushed to and fro, and jostled each other, as i thought, in anything but an amicable spirit; still, however, keeping at a respectful distance from the boat, for which i was extremely thankful. i urged her on with all my strength, for the purpose of getting away from such unpleasant neighbours; but they were not to be so easily disposed of. they came swimming after the boat, then when within a few yards dived, and in a moment they were before it, as if to bar any further progress. i however pushed on, and they disappeared, but immediately afterwards rose on all sides of me. they were evidently getting more confidence; a fact i ascertained with no slight apprehension, for they began to approach nearer, and their gambols threatened every minute to overwhelm my poor craft, that, light as a cork, bounced up and down the agitated waves, as if quite as much alarmed for our safety as ourselves. the captain was not the only one who began to fear evil; the gannets were very restless, and it was only by strong admonitions i could prevail on nero to retain his recumbent attitude at my feet; their instinct warned them of approaching danger, and i felt the comfortable assurance that my own rashness had brought me into my present critical position, and that if the menaced destruction did arrive, there was no sort of assistance at hand on which i could rely. every moment the sharks became more violent in their demonstrations, and more bold in their approaches, and i could scarcely keep the boat going, or prevent the water rushing over her sides. the gannets, having shewn themselves for some minutes uneasy, had at last flown away to the neighbouring rock, and nero began to growl and snap, as though meditating a forcible release from his prostrate position, to see what mischief was brewing. as i was coaxing him to be quiet, i felt a tremendous blow given to the boat, evidently from beneath, and she rose into the air several yards, scattering nero and myself, and the oars, in different directions. the noise we made in falling appeared for the instant to have scattered the creatures, for i had struck out for the rock and nearly reached it before a shark made its appearance. just then i saw a large monster rushing towards me. i thought all was over. he turned to open his great jaws, and in another instant i should have been devoured. at that critical period i saw a second object dart in between me and the shark, and attack the latter fiercely. it was nero, and it was the last i ever saw of my faithful friend. his timely interposition enabled me to reach a ledge in the cliff, where i was in perfect safety, hanging by some strong seaweed, although my feet nearly touched the water, and i could retain my position only with the greatest difficulty. the whole shoal were presently around me. they a first paid their attentions to the boat and the oars, which they buffeted about till they were driven close to the rock, at a little distance from the place where i had found temporary safety. they left these things unharmed as soon as they caught sight of me, and then their eagerness and violence returned with tenfold fury. they darted towards me in a body, and i was obliged to lift my legs, or i should have had them snapped off by one or other of the twenty gaping jaws that were thrust over each other, in their eagerness to make a mouthful of my limbs. this game was carried on for some minutes of horrible anxiety to me. i fancied that my struggles had loosened the seaweed, and that in a few minutes it must give way, and i should then be fought for and torn to pieces by the ravenous crew beneath. i shouted with all the strength of my lungs to scare them away; but as if they were as well aware that i could not escape them as i was myself, they merely left off their violent efforts to reach my projecting legs, and forming a semi-circle round me, watched with upturned eyes, that seemed to possess a fiendish expression that fascinated and bewildered me, the snapping of the frail hold that supported me upon the rock. in my despair i prayed heartily, but it was rather to commend my soul to my maker, than with any prospect of being rescued from so imminent and horrible a peril. the eyes of the ravenous monsters below seemed to mock my devotion. i felt the roots of the seaweed giving way: the slightest struggle on my part would i knew only hasten my dissolution, and i resigned myself to my fate. in this awful moment i heard a voice calling out my name. it was mrs reichardt on the cliff high above me. i answered with all the eagerness of despair. then there came a heavy splash into the water, and i heard her implore me to endeavour to make for a small shrub that grew in a hollow of the rock, at a very short distance from the tuft of seaweed that had become so serviceable. i looked down. the sharks had all disappeared; i knew, however, that they would shortly return, and lost not a moment in making an effort to better my position in the manner i had been directed. mrs reichardt had thrown a heavy stone into the water among the sharks, the loud splash of which had driven them away. before they again made their appearance, i had caught a firm hold of the twig, and flung myself up into a position of perfect safety. "thank god he's safe!" i heard mrs reichardt exclaim. the sharks did return, but when they found their anticipated prey had escaped, they swam lazily out to sea. "are you much hurt, frank henniker?" she presently cried out to me. "i have not a scratch," i replied. "then thank god for your deliverance," she added. i did thank god, and mrs reichardt joined with me in prayer, and a more fervent thanksgiving than was ours, it is scarcely possible to imagine. chapter xxxvii i had several times pressed mrs reichardt for the conclusion of her story, but she had always seemed reluctant to resume the subject. it was evidently full of painful incidents, and she shrunk from dwelling upon them. at last, one evening we were sitting together, she working with her needle and i employed upon a net she had taught me how to manufacture, and i again led the conversation to the narrative my companion had left unfinished. she sighed heavily and looked distressed. "it is but natural you should expect this of me, my son," she said; "but you little know the suffering caused by my recalling the melancholy events that i have to detail. however, i have led you to expect the entire relation, and, therefore, i will endeavour to realise your anticipations." i assured her i was ready to wait, whenever it might be agreeable for her to narrate the termination of her interesting history. "it will never be agreeable to me," she replied mournfully; "indeed i would forget it, if i could; but that is impossible. the struggle may as well be made now, as at any time. i will therefore commence by informing you, that during our long voyage to the sandwich islands, i found ample opportunity for studying the disposition of my husband. he was much changed since he first left me, but his was still the same grateful nature, full of truth and purity, that had won me towards him when a child. a holy enthusiasm seemed now to exalt him above ordinary humanity. i could scarcely ever get him to talk upon any but religious subjects, and those he treated in so earnest and exalted a manner, that it was impossible to avoid being carried away with his eloquence. "he seemed to feel the greatness of his destination, as though it had raised him to an equality with the adventurous saints, who established the banner of christ among the pagan nations of europe. he was fond of dilating upon the importance of his mission, and of dwelling on the favour that had been vouchsafed him, in causing him to be selected for so high and responsible a duty. "it was evident that he would rather have been sent to associate with the barbarous people whom he expected to make his converts, than have been raised to the richest bishopric in england. and yet, with this exultation, there was a spirit of deep melancholy pervading his countenance, as well as his discourses, that seemed to imply a sense of danger. the nimbus of the saint in his eyes was associated with the crown of martyrdom. he seemed to look forward to a fatal termination of his ministry, as the most and proper conclusion of his labours. "his conversation often filled me with dread. his intimations of danger seemed at first very shocking, but, at last, i got more familiar with these terrible suggestions, and regarded them as the distempered fancies of an overworked mind. "in this way our long voyage passed, and we arrived at last at our place of destination. when we had disembarked, the scene that presented itself to me was so strange, that i could almost believe i had passed into a new world. the most luxurious vegetation, of a character i had never seen before--the curious buildings--the singular forms of the natives, and their peculiar costume--excited my wonder to an intense degree. "my husband applied himself diligently to learn the language of the people, whilst i as intently studied their habits and customs. we both made rapid progress. "as soon as i could make myself understood, i endeavoured to make friends with the women, particularly with the wives of the great men, and although i was at first the object of more curiosity than regard, i persisted in my endeavours, and succeeded in establishing with many a good understanding. "i found them ignorant of everything that in civilised countries is considered knowledge--their minds being enveloped in the most deplorable darkness--the only semblance of religion in use amongst them, being a brutal and absurd idolatry. "i often tried to lead them to the consideration of more humanising truths, for the purpose of preparing the way for the inculcation of the great mysteries of our holy religion: but the greater portion of my hearers were incompetent to understand what i seemed so desirous of teaching, and my making them comprehend the principles of christianity appeared to be a hopeless task. "yet i continued my pious labours, without allowing my exertions to flag--making myself useful to them and their families in every way i could--attending them when sick--giving them presents when well--and showing them every kindness likely to make a favourable impression on their savage natures. in this way i proceeded doing good, till i found an opportunity of being of service to a young girl, about twelve years of age, who was a younger sister of one of the wives of a great chief. she had sprained her ankle and was in great pain, when i applied the proper remedies and gave her speedy relief. hooloo, for that was her name, from that moment became warmly attached to me, and finding her of an affectionate and ingenuous disposition, i became extremely desirous of improving upon the good impression i had made. "at the same time my husband sought, by his knowledge of the mechanical arts, and some acquaintance with medicine, to recommend himself to the men. he also met with much difficulty at first, in making his information properly appreciated. he sought to increase their comforts--to introduce agricultural implements of a more useful description, and to lead them generally towards the conveniences and decencies of civilisation. he built himself a house, and planted a garden, and cultivated some land, in which he shewed the superior advantages of what he knew, to what they practised. they seemed to marvel much, but continued to go on in their own way. "he also went amongst them as a physician, and having acquired considerable knowledge of medicine and simple surgery, he was enabled to work some cures in fevers and spear wounds, that in course of time made for him so great a reputation, that many of the leading chiefs sent for him when anything ailed them or their families, and they were so well satisfied with what he did for them, that he began to be looked upon as one who was to be treated with particular respect and honour, by all classes of the natives, from the highest to the lowest. "on one occasion the king required his services. he was suffering from a sort of cholic, for which the native doctors could give him no relief. my husband administered some medicines, and stayed with his majesty until they had the desired effect, and the result being a complete recovery, seemed so astonishing to all the members of his sandwich majesty's court, that the doctor was required to administer the same medicine to every one, from the queen to the humblest of her attendants, though all were apparently in good health. he managed to satisfy them with a small portion only of the mixture, which he was quite certain could do them no harm: and they professed to be wonderfully the better for it." chapter xxxviii "his reputation had now grown so great, that whatever he required was readily granted. he first desired to have some children sent him; to learn those things which had enabled him to do so much good, and this having been readily sanctioned, we opened a school for girls and boys, in which we taught the first elements of a civilised education. "finding we made fair progress in this way, we commenced developing our real object, the inculcation of christian sentiments. this meeting with no opposition, and reichardt having established a powerful influence over the entire community, he next proceeded with the parents, and earnestly strove to induce them to embrace the profession of christianity. "his labours were not entirely unproductive. there began to prevail amongst the islanders, a disposition to hear the wondrous discourses of this stranger, and he was employed, day after day, in explaining to large and attentive audiences, the history of the christian world, and the observances and doctrine of that faith which had been cemented by the blood of the redeemer. the new and startling subjects of his discourse, as well as the impressive character of his eloquence, frequently deeply moved his hearers; and at his revelations they would often burst forth into piercing shouts and loud expressions of amazement. "in truth it was a moving scene. the noble figure of the missionary, with his fine features lighted up with the fire of holy enthusiasm, surrounded by a crowd of dusky savages, armed with spears and war clubs, and partly clothed with feathers, in their features shewing traces of unusual excitement, and every now and then joining in a wild chorus, expressive of their wonder, could not have been witnessed by any christian, without emotion. "but when the ceremony of baptism was first performed before them, their amazement was increased a thousandfold. the first member of our flock was hooloo, whom i had instructed so far, in the principles of our faith, and i had acquired such an influence over her mind, that she readily consented to abandon her idolatrous customs and become a christian. "after a suitable address to the natives, who had assembled in some thousands to witness the spectacle, in which he explained to them the motive and object of baptism, my husband assisted the girl down a sloping green bank which led to a beautiful stream, and walked with her into the water till he was up to his waist; then, after offering up a long and fervent prayer that this first victory over the false worship of the devil, might be the forerunner of the entire extirpation of idolatry from the land, he, plunging her into the water, baptised her in the name of the father, the son, and the holy ghost. "all the people were awed to silence while the ceremony proceeded, but when it was over they burst forth into a loud cry, and came down to meet the new christian and my husband as they came out of the water, and waved over them boughs of trees, and danced and shouted as though in an ecstasy. "we however had not proceeded to this extent, without exciting considerable opposition; our disrespect towards their idols had given great offence to those who were identified with the superstitions of the people, and flourished according as these were supported. complaints were made too of our teaching a new religion, in opposition to the gods they and their fathers had worshipped, and a powerful party was got together for the purpose of pursuing us to destruction. "my husband was summoned before a council of the great chiefs, to hear the accusations that had been brought against him: and the old idolaters got up and abused him, and threatened him with the punishment of their monstrous gods, for telling lies to the people, and deceiving them with forged tales and strange customs. "they sought all they could, to move the judges against him, by painting the terrible fate that would befall them if they failed to kill the white stranger, who had insulted their gods; and they predicted hosts of calamities that were to happen, in consequence of their having allowed the teller of lies to work so much mischief against them. "my husband then being called upon for his defence, first declared to the judges the attributes of the deity he worshipped: that he created the vast heavens, the stars, the mountains, the rivers, and the sea; his voice spoke in the thunder, and his eye flashed in the lightning. he then dwelt on his goodness to man, especially to the sandwich islanders, whom he had created for the purpose of enjoying the fine country around them and of beholding the beauty of the heavens where he dwelt. then he referred to the gods they had worshipped, and asked how they were made, and what such senseless things could do for them; commenting on their inability to serve them, in any way, or do them any harm; and went on to speak of the benefits he had been able to confer upon them, through the influence of the all powerful god he worshipped; and asked them if he had ever done them anything but good. lastly, he promised them innumerable benefits, if they would leave their useless gods, and turn to the only god who had the power to serve them. "it is impossible for me to do justice to the animated manner in which he delivered this discourse. it produced great effect upon the majority of his hearers; but there was a powerful minority it still more strongly influenced against him; and they continued to interrupt him with terrible outcries. "most of the leading chiefs were against his suffering any harm. they bore in mind the advantages he had conferred, by his skill in medicine, and superior wisdom in various other things, which the people would lose were he put to death. they also remembered the hope he held out of future benefits, which of course they could not expect, if they offered him any violence. "the result was, that my husband was suffered to go harmless from the meeting, to the great disappointment of his enemies, who could scarcely be kept from laying violent hands upon him. the danger he had escaped, unfortunately, did not render him more prudent. far from it. he believed that he was a chosen instrument of the most high, to win these savages from the depths of idolatry and paganism; and continued, on every occasion that presented itself, to endeavour to win souls to god. "the school increased, several of the parents suffered themselves to be baptised, and there was a regular observance of the lord's day amongst those who belonged to our little flock. even many of the islanders, although they did not become christians, attended our religious services, and spoke well of us. "we brought up the young people to be able to teach their brethren and sisters; and hoped to be able to establish missions in other parts of the island, to which we sometimes made excursions; preaching the inestimable blessings of the gospel to the islanders, and exhorting them to abandon their dark customs and heathen follies. i was not far behind my husband in this good work, and acquired as much influence among the women as he exercised over the men: indeed we were generally looked upon as holy people, who deserved to be treated with veneration and respect." chapter xxxix "things went on in this flourishing way for several years; my husband, deeply impressed with the responsibility of his position, as a chosen servant of god, devoted himself so entirely to the great work he had undertaken, that he often seemed to overlook the claims upon his attention of her he had chosen as his partner, in his struggle against the powers of darkness. sometimes i did not see him for several days; and often when we were together, he was so abstracted, he did not seem aware i was present. whenever i could get him to speak of himself, he would dilate on the unspeakable felicity that he felt in drawing nearer to the end of his work. i affected not to know to what he alluded; but i always felt that he was referring to the impression he entertained of his own speedy dissolution, which he had taken up when he first embraced this mission. "i tried to get rid of my misgivings by recalling the dangers and difficulties we had triumphantly passed, and referring to the encouraging state of things that existed at the present time; nevertheless, i could not prevent a sinking of the heart, whenever i heard him venture upon the subject; and when he was absent from me, i often experienced an agony of anxiety till his return. i saw, however, no real cause of apprehension, and endeavoured to persuade myself none existed; and very probably i should have succeeded, had not my husband so frequently indulged in references to our separation. "alas," she exclaimed, mournfully, "he was better informed than i was of the proximity of that celestial home, for which he had been so long and zealously preparing himself. he, doubtless, had his intimation from on high, that his translation to the realms of bliss, was no remote consequence of his undertaking the mission he had accepted; and he had familiarised his mind to it as a daily duty, and by his constant references had sought to prepare me for the catastrophe he knew to be inevitable." here mrs reichardt became so sensibly affected, that it was some time before she could proceed with her narrative. she, however, did so at last, yet i could see by the tears that traced each other down her wan cheeks, how much her soul was moved by the terrible details into which she was obliged to enter. "in the midst of our success," she presently resumed, "when we had established a congregation, had baptised hundreds of men, women, and children, had completed a regular place of worship, and an extensive school-house, both of which were fully and regularly attended, some european vessel paid us a short visit, soon after which, that dreadful scourge the small-pox, broke out amongst the people. both children and adults were seized, and as soon as one died a dozen were attacked. "soon the greatest alarm pervaded the natives; my husband was implored to stop the pestilence, which power they felt convinced he had in his hands. he did all that was possible for him to do, but that unfortunately was very little. his recommendation of remedial measures was rarely attended with the desired results. death was very busy. the people died in scores, and the survivors, excited by the vindictive men who had formerly sought his death for disparaging their gods, began not only to fall off rapidly in their regard and reverence for my husband, but murmurs first, and execrations afterwards, and violent menaces subsequently, attended him whenever he appeared. "he preached to them resignation to the divine will; but resignation was not a savage virtue. he was indefatigable in his attentions to the sick; but those of whom he was most careful seemed the speediest to die. the popular feeling against him increased every hour; he appeared, however, to defy his fate--walking unconcernedly amongst crowds of infuriated savages brandishing heavy clubs, and threatening him with the points of their sharp spears; but his eye never blinked, and his cheek never blanched, and he walked on his way inwardly praising god, careless of the evil passions that raged around him. "it was on a sabbath morn--our service had far advanced; we could boast of but a limited congregation, for many had died, some had fled from the pestilence into the interior; others had avoided the place in consequence of the threats of their countrymen. a few children, and two or three women, were all their teacher had to address. "we were engaged in singing a psalm, when a furious crowd, mad with rage, as it seemed, screaming and yelling in the most frightful manner, and brandishing their weapons as though about to attack an enemy, burst into our little chapel, and seized my husband in the midst of his devotions. "i rushed forward to protect him from the numerous weapons that were aimed at his life, but was dragged back by the hair of my head; and with infuriate cries and gestures, that made them look like demons broke loose from hell, they fell upon him with their clubs and spears. "reichardt made no resistance, he merely clasped his hands the more firmly, and looked up to heaven the more devoutly, as he continued the psalm he had commenced before they entered. this did not delay his fate. "they beat out his brains so close to me, that i was covered with his blood, and i believe i should have shared the same fate, had i not fainted with terror at the horrible scene of which i was a forced spectator. "i learned afterwards that some powerful chief interfered, and i was carried away more dead than alive, in which state i long remained. as soon as i became sufficiently strong to be moved, i took advantage of a whaler calling at the island, homeward bound, to beg a passage. the captain heard my lamentable story, took me on board as soon as he could, and shewed a seaman's sympathy for my sufferings. "i was to have returned to england with him, but off this place we encountered a terrible storm, in which we were obliged to take to the boats, as the only chance of saving our lives. what became of him i know not, as the two boats parted company soon after leaving the wreck. i trust he managed to reach the land in safety, and is now in his own country, enjoying all the comforts that can make life covetable. "what became of that part of the crew that brought me here in the other boat, led by the fires you had lighted, i am in doubt. but i think on quitting the island, crowded as their boat was, and in the state of its crew, it was scarcely possible for them to have made the distant island for which they steered." chapter xl mrs reichardt's story made a sensible impression on me. i no longer wondered at the pallor of her countenance, or the air of melancholy that at first seemed so remarkable; she had suffered most severely, and her sufferings were too recent not to have left their effects upon her frame. i thought a good deal about her narrative, and wondered much that men could be got to leave their comfortable homes, and travel thousands and thousands of miles across the fathomless seas, with the hope of converting a nation of treacherous savages, by whom they were sure to be slaughtered at the first outbreak of ill-feeling. i could not but admire the character of reichardt--in all his actions he had exhibited a marked nobility of nature. he would not present himself before the woman who had the strongest claims upon his gratitude, till he had obtained a position and a reputation that should, in his opinion, make him worthy of her; and though he had a presentiment of the fate that would overtake him, he fulfilled his duties as a missionary with a holy enthusiasm that made him regard his approaching martyrdom as the greatest of all earthly distinctions. i felt regret that i had not known such a man. i knew how much i had lost in having missed such an example. my having heard this story led me into much private communing with myself respecting religion. i could consider myself little better than a savage, like the brutal sandwich islanders; my conduct to jackson had been only in a degree less inhuman than that these idolaters had shewn to their teacher when he was in their power. i fancied at the time that i served him right, for his villainous conduct to my father, and brutal conduct to me: but god having punished him for his misdeeds, i felt satisfied i had no business to put him to greater torment as satisfaction for my own private injuries. i fancied god might have been angry with me, and had kept me on the island as a punishment for my offences; and i had some conversation with mrs reichardt on this point. "nothing," she observed, "can excuse your ill-feeling towards jackson; he was a bad man, without a doubt, and he deserved condign punishment for his usage of your parents; but the divine founder of our religion has urged us to return good for evil." "yes," i answered readily, "but i should have suffered as bad as my father and mother, had i not prevented his doing me mischief." "you do not know that you were to suffer," she replied. "jackson, without such terrible punishment as he brought upon himself, might eventually have become contrite, and have restored you to your friends as well as enabled you to obtain your grandfather's property. god frequently performs marvellous things with such humble instruments, for he hath said, 'there is more joy in heaven over one sinner that repenteth, than over ninety-nine just men.'" "surely, this is raising the wicked man over the good," i cried. "not at all," she replied. "the repentant is one gained from the ranks of the great enemy--it is as one that was lost and is found again--it is a soul added to the blessed. therefore the joy in heaven is abundant at such a conversion. the just are the natural heirs of heaven--their rights are acknowledged without dispute--their claim is at once recognised and allowed, and they receive their portion of eternal joy as a matter of course, without there being any necessity for exciting those demonstrations of satisfaction which hail the advent of a sinner saved." "i don't think such a villain as jackson would ever go to heaven," i observed. "'judge not, lest ye be judged,'" she answered; "that is a text that cannot be too often impressed upon persons anxious to condemn to eternal torment all those they believe to be worse than themselves. it is great presumption in us poor creatures of clay, to anticipate the proceedings of the infinite wisdom. let us leave the high prerogative of judgment to the almighty power, by whom only it is exercised, and in our opinions of even the worst of our fellow-creatures, let us exercise a comprehensive charity, mingled with a prayer that even at the eleventh hour, they may have turned from the evil of their ways, and embraced the prospect of salvation, which the mercy of their creator has held out to them." in this and similar conversations, mrs reichardt would endeavour to plant in my mind the soundest views of religion; and she spoke so well, and so convincingly, that i had little trouble in understanding her meaning, or in retaining it after it had been uttered. it was not, as i have before stated, to religion only that she led my thoughts, although that certainly was the most frequent subject of our conversation. she sought to instruct me in the various branches of knowledge into which she had acquired some insight, and in this way i picked up as much information respecting grammar, geography, astronomy, writing, arithmetic, history, and morals, as i should have gained had i been at a school, instead of being forced to remain on a desolate island. i need not say that i still desired to leave it. i had long been tired of the place, notwithstanding that from our united exertions, we enjoyed many comforts which we could not have hoped for. our hut we had metamorphosed into something mrs reichardt styled a rustic cottage, which, covered as it was with flowers and creepers, really looked very pretty; and the garden added greatly to its pleasant appearance: for near the house we had transplanted everything that bore a flower that could be found in the island, and had planted some shrubs, that, having been carefully nurtured made rapid growth, and screened the hut from the wind. i had built a sort of out-house for storing potatoes and firewood, and a fowl-house for the gannets, which were now a numerous flock; and had planted a fence round the garden, so that as mrs reichardt said, we looked as if we had selected a dwelling in our own beloved england, in the heart of a rural district, instead of our being circumscribed in a little island thousands of miles across the wide seas, from the home of which we were so fond of talking. although my companion always spoke warmly of the land of her birth, and evidently would have been glad to return to it, she never grieved over her hard fate in being, as it were, a prisoner on a rock, out of reach of friends and kindred; indeed, she used to chide me for being impatient of my detention, and insensible of the blessings i enjoyed. "what temptations are we not free from here?" she would say. "we see nothing of the world; we cannot be contaminated with its vices, or suffer from its follies. the hideous wars--the terrible revolutions--the dreadful visitations of famine and pestilence--are completely unknown to us. robbery, and murder, and fraud, and the thousand other phases of human wickedness, we altogether escape. there was a time, when men, for the purpose of leading holy lives, abandoned the fair cities in which they had lived in the enjoyment of every luxury, and sought a cave in some distant desert, where, in the lair of some wild beast, with a stone for a pillow, a handful of herbs for a meal, and a cup of water for beveridge, they lived out the remnant of their days in a constant succession of mortifications, prayers, and penitence. "how different," she added, "is our own state. we are as far removed from the sinfulness of the world as any hermit of the desert, whilst we have the enjoyment of comforts to which they were strangers." "but probably," i observed, "these men were penitents, and went into the desert as much to punish their bodies for the transgressions of the flesh, as to acquire by solitary communion, a better knowledge of the spirit than they were likely to obtain in their old haunts." "some were penitents, no doubt," she answered, "but they, having obtained by their sanctity an extraordinary reputation, induced others, whose lives had been blameless, to follow their example, and in time the desert became colonised with recluses, who rivalled each other in the intensity of their devotions and the extent of their privations." "would it not have been more commendable," i asked, "if these men had remained in the community to which they belonged, withstanding temptation, and been employed in labour that was creditable to themselves and useful to their country?" "no doubt it would," she replied; "but religion has, unfortunately, too often been the result of impulse rather than conviction; and at the period to which we are referring, it was thought that sinful human nature could only gain the attributes of saintship by neglecting its social duties, and punishing its humanity in the severest manner. even in more recent times, and at the present day, in catholic countries, it is customary for individuals of both sexes, to abandon the world of which they might render themselves ornaments, and shut themselves up in buildings constructed expressly to receive them, where they continue to go through a course of devotions and privations till death puts an end to their voluntary imprisonment. "in this modified instance of seclusion," she added, "there are features very different from our own case. we are not forced to impoverish our blood with insufficient diet, or mortify our flesh with various forms of punishment. we do not neglect the worship of god. we offer up daily thanks for his loving care of us, and sing his praises in continual hymns: and instead of wasting the hours of the day in unmeaning penances, we fill up our time in employments that add to our health, comfort, and happiness: and that enable us the better to appreciate the goodness of that power who is so mindful of our welfare." "have you no wish then, to leave this island?" i inquired. "i should gladly avail myself of the first opportunity that presented itself for getting safely to england," she replied. "but i would wait patiently the proper time. it is not only useless repining at our prolonged stay here, but it looks like an ungrateful doubting of the power of god to remove us. be assured that he has not preserved us so long, and through so many dangers, to abandon us when we most require his interposition in our favour." i endeavoured to gather consolation from such representations: but perhaps young people are not so easily reconciled to what they do not like, as are their elders, for i cannot say i succeeded in becoming satisfied with my position. chapter xli the perils of my first voyage had deterred me from making a similar experiment; but i recovered my boat, and having further strengthened it, fitted it with what could either be turned into a well or locker: i used to row out a little distance when the sea was free from sharks and fish. but my grand effort in this direction was the completion of a net, which, assisted by mrs reichardt, i managed to manufacture. by this time she had gained sufficient confidence to accompany me in my fishing excursions; she would even take the oars whilst i threw out the net, and assisted me in dragging it into the boat. the first time we got such a haul, that i was afraid of the safety of our little craft. the locker was full, and numbers of great fish, as i flung them out of the net, were flapping and leaping about the bottom of the boat. it began to sink lower in the water than was agreeable to either of us, and i found it absolutely necessary to throw back into the sea the greater portion of our catch. we then rowed carefully to land, rejoicing that we had at our command, the means of obtaining an abundant supply of food whenever we desired it. mrs reichardt was with me also in our land excursions. together we had explored every part of the island; our chief object was plants for enriching our garden, and often as we had been in search of novelties, we invariably brought home additions to our collection; and my companion having acquired some knowledge of botany, would explain to me the names, characters, and qualities of the different species, which made our journeys peculiarly interesting. our appearance often caused considerable amusement to each other; for our respective costumes must have been extremely curious in the eyes of a stranger. neither wore shoes or stockings--these things we did not possess, and could not procure; we wore leggings and sandals of seal skin to protect us from the thorns and plants of the cacti tribe, among which we were obliged to force our way. my companion wore a conical cap of seal skin, and protected her complexion from the sun, by a rude attempt at an umbrella i had made for her. she had on, on these occasions, a pair of coarse cloth trousers, as her own dress would have been torn to pieces before she had got half a mile through the bush; these were surmounted by a tight spencer she had herself manufactured out of a man's waistcoat, and a dimity petticoat, which buttoned up to her throat, and was fastened in the same way at the wrists. my head was covered with a broad-brimmed hat, made of dry grass, which i had myself platted. i wore a sailor's jacket, much the worse for wear, patched with seal skin, over a pair of duck trousers, similarly repaired. although our expeditions were perfectly harmless, we did not go without weapons. at the instigation of my companion, i had made myself a good stout bow and plenty of arrows, and had exercised myself so frequently at aiming at a mark, as to have acquired very considerable skill in the use of them. i had now several arrows of hard wood tipped with sharp fish-bones, and some with iron nails, in a kind of pouch behind me; in its sheath before me was my american knife, which i used for taking the plants from the ground. i had a basket made of the long grass of the island, slung around me, which served to contain our treasures; and i carried my bow in my hand. my companion, in addition to her umbrella, bore only a long staff, and a small basket tied round her waist that usually contained a little refreshment; for she would say there was no knowing what might occur to delay our return, and therefore it was better to take our meal with us. and not the least agreeable portion of the day's labour was our repast; for we would seat ourselves in some quiet corner, surrounded by flowers, and shaded by the brushwood from the sun, and there eat our dried fish or pick our birds, and roast our potatoes by means of a fire of dried sticks, and wash down our simple dinner with a flask of pure water--the most refreshing portion of our banquet. i had, as i have just stated, attained a singular degree of skill in the use of the bow and arrow, which, as we had no fire-arms, was often of important service in procuring food on land. i had made another use of my skill--an application of it which afforded me a vast deal of satisfaction. my old enemies the sharks used still to frequent a certain portion of the coast in great numbers, and as soon as i became master of my weapon, i would stand as near to the edge of the rock as was safe, and singling out my victim, aim at his upper fin, which i often found had the effect of ridding the place of that fellow. i bore such an intense hatred to these creatures, for the fright they had put me into during my memorable voyage of discovery, and for the slaughter of my beloved nero, that i determined to wage incessant war against them, as long as i could manufacture an arrow, or a single shark remained on the coast. as we had so often traversed the island without accident, we dreamt not of danger. we had never met with any kind of animals, except our old friends the seals, who kept near the sea. of birds, the gannets were generally the sole frequenters of the island; but we had seen, at rare intervals, birds of a totally different character, some of which i had shot. indeed, during our excursions, i was always on the look out for any stranger of the feathered race, that i might exercise my skill upon him. if he proved eatable, he was sure to be very welcome; and even if he could not be cooked, he afforded me some entertainment, in hearing from mrs reichardt his name and habits. we had discovered a natural hollow which lay so low that it was quite hid till we came close to it, when we had to descend a steep declivity covered with shrubs. at the bottom was a soil evidently very productive, for we found trees growing there to a considerable height, that were in marked contrast to the shrubby plants that grew in other parts of the island. we called this spot the happy valley, and it became a favourite resting-place. i remember on one of these occasions, we had made our dinner after having been several hours employed in seeking for plants, of which we had procured a good supply, and the remains of our meal lay under a great tree, beneath the spreading branches of which we had been resting ourselves. it was quite on the other side of the island, within about a quarter of a mile from the sea. abundance of curious plants grew about the place, and mrs reichardt had wandered to a little distance to examine all within view. i was peering into the trees and shrubs around to discover a new comer. i had wandered in an opposite direction to that taken by my companion, and was creeping round a clump of shrubs about twenty yards off, in which i detected a chirping noise, when i heard a loud scream. i turned sharply round and beheld mrs reichardt, evidently in an agony of terror, running towards me with prodigious swiftness. she had dropped her umbrella and her staff, her cap had fallen from her head, and her long hair, disarranged by her sudden flight, streamed behind her shoulders. at first i did not see anything which could have caused this terrible alarm, but in a few seconds i heard a crushing among a thicket of shrubs from which she was running, as if some heavy weight was being forced through them; and presently there issued a most extraordinary monster. it came forward at a quick pace, its head erect above ten feet, its jaws wide open, from the midst of which there issued a forked tongue which darted in and out with inconceivable rapidity. its body was very long, and thick as an ordinary tree; it was covered over with bright shining scales that seemed to have different colours, and was propelled along the ground in folds of various sizes, with a length of tail of several yards behind. its eyes were very bright and fierce. its appearance certainly accounted for my companion's alarm. "fly!" she cried in accents of intense terror, as she rushed towards me, "fly, or you are lost!" she then gave a hurried glance behind her, and seeing the formidable monster in full chase, she just had power to reach the spot to which i had advanced, and sunk overpowered with terror, fainting at my feet. my first movement was to step across her body for the purpose of disputing the passage of the monster, and in an erect posture, with my bow drawn tight as i could pull it, i waited a few seconds till i could secure a good aim, for i knew everything depended on my steadiness and resolution. on came my prodigious antagonist, making a terrible hissing as he approached, his eyes flashing, his jaws expanded as if he intended to swallow me at a mouthful, and the enormous folds of his huge body passing like wheels over the ground, crushing the thick plants that came in their way like grass. i must acknowledge that in my heart i felt a strange sinking sensation, but i remembered that our only chance of escape lay in giving the monster a mortal wound, and the imminence of the danger seemed to afford me the resolution i required. he was close behind, and in a direct line with the tree under which we had dined, and i was about twenty yards from it. directly his head darted round and in front of the tree, making a good mark, i let fly the arrow direct, as i thought, for his eye, hoping, by penetrating his brain, to settle him at once. but as he moved his head at that moment, the arrow went into his open jaws, one of which it penetrated, and going deep into the tree behind, pinned his head close to the bark. as soon as the huge creature found himself hurt, he wound his enormous body round the trunk, and with his desperate exertions swayed the great tree backwards and forwards, as i would have done one of its smallest branches. fearful that he would liberate himself before i could save my senseless companion, as quick as possible i discharged all my arrows into his body, which took effect in various places. his exertions then became so terrible that i hastily snatched up mrs reichardt in my arms, and with a fright that seemed to give me supernatural strength, i ran as fast as i could the shortest way to our hut. fortunately, before i had gone half a mile, my companion came to her senses, and was able to continue her flight. we got home at last, half dead with fatigue and fright; nevertheless the first thing we did was to barricade all the entrances. we left loop-holes to reconnoitre; and there we sat for hours after our arrival, waiting the monster's approach in fear and trembling. we did not go to sleep that night. we did not, either of us, go out the next day. the next night one watched while the other slept. the second day my courage had so far returned, i wanted to go and look after the constant subject of our conversation. but mrs reichardt dissuaded me. she told me it was an enormous python, or serpent of the boa species, that are common on the northern coast of america. probably it had been brought to the island on a drifted tree, and being so prodigious a reptile, the wounds it had received were not likely to do it much harm, and it would be no doubt lurking about, ready to pounce upon either of us directly we appeared. on the third day, nothing having occurred to increase our alarm, i determined to know the worst; so i got by stealth out of the house, and armed with a fresh bow, a good supply of arrows, a hatchet slung at my side, and my american knife--with my mind made up for another conflict if necessary--i crept stealthily along, with my eyes awake to the slightest motion, and my ears open to the slightest sound, till i approached the scene of my late unequal struggle. i must own i began to draw my breath rather rapidly, and my heart beat more quickly, as i came near the place where i had left my terrible enemy. to my extreme surprise the python had disappeared. there was a tree still standing, though its foliage and branches strewed the ground, and a great portion of its bark was ground to powder. at the base of the trunk was a pool of blood mingled with fragments of bark, broken arrows, leaves, and mould. the reptile had escaped. but where was he? not altogether without anxiety i began to look for traces of his retreat; and they were easily found. with my arrow ready for immediate flight, i followed a stream of blood that was still visible on the grass, and led from the tree, accompanied by unmistakable marks of the great serpent's progress, in a direct line to the sea. there it disappeared. when i discovered this, i breathed again. there was no doubt if the monster survived the conflict, he was hundreds of miles away, and was not likely to return to a place where he had received so rough a welcome. it may readily be believed i lost no time in taking the agreeable news to my companion. chapter xlii i had become tired of looking out for a ship. though day after day, and week after week, i made the most careful scrutiny with my glass, as i have said, it brought no result. i sometimes fancied i saw a vessel appearing in the line of the horizon, and i would pile up faggots and light them, and throw on water to make them smoke, as jackson had done; but all without avail. either my vision had deceived me, or my signals had not been observed, or the ship's course did not lie in the direction of the island. we had had storms too on several occasions, but no wreck had been left on our coast. i began to think we were doomed to live out our lives on this rock, and frequently found myself striving very manfully to be resigned to my fate, and for a few days i would cheerfully endeavour to make the best of it. but the increasing desire i felt to get to england, that i might seek out my grandfather, and put him in possession of his diamonds, always prevented this state of things enduring very long. i had obtained from mrs reichardt an idea of the value of these stones, and of the importance of their restoration to my relative, and i had often thought of the satisfaction i should enjoy in presenting myself before him, as the restorer of such valuable property, which, no doubt, had long since been given up as lost. but latterly, i thought less of these things; the chance of leaving the island seemed so remote, and the prospect of ever seeing my grandfather so very distant, that i had ceased to take any interest in the contents of the belt. the diamonds seemed to become as valueless as they were useless; a handful of wheat would have been much more desirable. it was now some time since i had seen the belt, or inquired about it. thus we lived without any incident occurring worth relating--when one day the appearance of the atmosphere indicated a storm, and a very violent hurricane, attended with peals of thunder and lurid flashes of lightning, lasted during the whole of the day and evening. the wind tore up the trees by the roots, blew down our outhouses, made terrible havoc in our garden, and threatened to tumble our hut over our heads. we could not think of going to our beds whilst such a tempest was raging around us, so we sat up, listening to the creaking of the boards, and anticipating every moment that the whole fabric would be blown to pieces. fortunately, the bark with which i had covered the roof, in a great measure protected us from the rain, which came down in torrents; but every part was not equally impervious, and our discomfort was increased by seeing the water drip through, and form pools on the floor. the thunder still continued at intervals, and was sometimes so loud as to have a most startling effect upon us. my companion knelt down and said her prayers with great fervour, and i joined in them with scarcely less devotion. indeed it was an awful night, and our position, though under shelter, was not without danger. the incessant flashes of lightning seemed to play round our edifice, as if determined to set it in a blaze; and the dreadful peals of thunder that followed, rolled over our heads, as if about to burst upon the creaking boards that shut us from its fury. i fancied once or twice that i heard during the storm bursts of sound quite different in character from the peals of thunder. they were not so loud, and did not reverberate so much; they seemed to come nearer, and then the difference in sound became very perceptible. "great god!" exclaimed mrs reichardt, starting up from her kneeling posture, "that is a gun from some ship." the wind seemed less boisterous for a few seconds, and the thunder ceased. we listened breathlessly for the loud boom we had just heard, but it was not repeated. in a moment afterwards our ears were startled by the most terrifying combination of screams, shrieks, cries, and wailings i had ever heard. my blood seemed chilled in my veins. "a ship has just struck," whispered my companion, scarcely above her breath. "the lord have mercy on the crew!" she sank on her knees again in prayer, as if for the poor souls who were struggling in the jaws of death. the wind still howled, and the thunder still roared, but in the fiercest war of the elements, i fancied i could every now and then hear the piercing shrieks sent up to heaven for assistance. i thought once or twice of venturing out, but i remembered the safety of my companion was so completely bound up with my own, that i could not reconcile myself to leaving her; and i was also well aware, that till the terrible fury of the tempest abated, it was impossible for me to be of the slightest service to the people of the wrecked ship, even could i remain unharmed exposed to the violence of the weather. i however awaited with much impatience and intense anxiety till the storm had in some measure spent itself; but this did not occur till sunrise the next morning. the wind fell, the thunder and lightning ceased, the rain was evidently diminishing, and the brightness of the coming day began to burst through the darkest night that had ever visited the island. mrs reichardt would not be left behind; it was possible she might be useful, and taking with her a small basket of such things as she imagined might be required, she accompanied me to the rocks nearest the sea. on arriving there, the most extraordinary scene presented itself. the sea was strewed with spars, masts, chests, boats stove in or otherwise injured, casks, empty hen-coops, and innumerable pieces of floating wreck that were continually dashed against the rocks, or were washed ashore, wherever an opening for the sea presented itself. at a little distance lay the remains of a fine ship, her masts gone by the board, her decks open, in fact a complete wreck, over which the sea had but lately been making a clean sweep, carrying overboard everything that could not resist its fury. i could see nothing resembling a human being, though both myself and my companion looked carefully round in the hope of discovering some poor creature, that might need assistance. it appeared, however, as if the people of the ship had taken to their boats, which had been swamped, and most probably all who had ventured into them had been devoured by the sharks. had the crew remained on board, they would in all probability have been saved; as the vessel had been thrown almost high and dry. as soon as we had satisfied ourselves that no sharks were in the neighbourhood, i launched my little boat, and each taking an oar, we pulled in the direction of the wreck, which we reached in a few minutes. she had heeled over after striking, and the water was quite smooth under her lee. i contrived to climb into the main chains, and from thence on board, and was soon afterwards diligently exploring the ship. i penetrated every place into which i could effect an entrance, marvelling much at the variety of things i beheld. there seemed such an abundance of everything, and of things too quite new to me, that i was bewildered by their novelty and variety. having discovered a coil of new rope, i hauled it on deck, and soon made fast my little boat to the ship. then i made a hasty rope ladder which i threw over, and mrs reichardt was in a very few minutes standing by my side. her knowledge was necessary to inform me of the uses of the several strange things i saw, and to select for our own use what was most desirable. she being well acquainted with the interior of a ship, and having explained to me its numerous conveniences, i could not but admire the ingenuity of man, in creating such stupendous machines. the ship having much water in the hold, i was forced to dive into the armoury. it was the first time i had seen such things, and i handled the muskets and pistols with a vast deal of curiosity; as my companion explained to me how they were loaded and fired, i at once saw their advantage over the bow and arrow, and was selecting two or three to carry away, when i hesitated on being assured they would be perfectly useless without ammunition. i might have remained content with my own savage weapons that had already served me so well, had not mrs reichardt, in the course of our survey, discovered several tin canisters of powder perfectly uninjured, with abundance of shot and bullets, of which i quickly took possession. from other parts of the vessel we selected bags of grain, barrels of flour, and provisions of various kinds; wearing apparel, boxes of tools, with numerous bottles and jars, with the contents of which i was perfectly unacquainted, though their discovery gave great gratification to my companion. what most excited my wonder, were various kinds of agricultural implements that we found in the hold, and in a short time i was made aware of the proper employment of spades, harrows, ploughs, thrashing-machines, and many other things, of the existence of which i had never before dreamt. we found also quantities of various kinds of seeds and roots, and some sort of twigs growing in pots, which mrs reichardt particularly begged me not to leave behind, as they would be of the greatest use to us; and she added that, from various signs, she believed that the ship had been an emigrant vessel going out with settlers, but to what place she could not say. we made no ceremony in breaking open lockers and chests, and every where discovered a variety of things, which, could we transfer to our island, would add greatly to our comfort; but how they were to be got ashore, was a puzzle which neither of us seemed capable of solving. our little boat would only contain a few of the lighter articles; and as many of these as we could conveniently put together were shortly stowed in her. with this cargo we were about returning, when my companion called my attention to a noise that seemed to come from a distant corner of the vessel, and she laughed and exhibited so much satisfaction that i believed we were close upon some discovery far more important than any we had yet hit upon. we continued to make our way to what seemed to me a very out of the way part of the vessel, led in a great measure by the noises that proceeded from thence. it was so dark here, that we were obliged to get a light, and my companion having procured a ship's lantern, and lighted it by means of a tinderbox, led me to a place where i could discern several animals, most of which were evidently dead. she however ascertained that there were two young calves, three or four sheep, and as many young pigs, still giving very noisy evidence of their existence. she searched about and found some food for them, which they ate with great avidity. the larger animals she told me were cows and horses; but they had fallen down, and gave no signs of life. my companion and myself then entered into a long debate as to how we were to remove the living animals from the dead; and she dwelt very eloquently upon the great advantages that would accrue to us, if we could succeed in transporting to the island the survivors. after giving them a good feed, seeing we could not remove them at present, we descended safely to our boat and gained the shore without any accident. then having housed our treasures, we were for putting together a raft of the various planks and barrels that were knocking against the rocks, but as i knew this would take a good deal of time, i thought i would inspect the ship's boats, which, bottom upwards, were drifting about within a few yards of us. to our great satisfaction, one i ascertained to be but little injured, and having forced her ashore, with our united exertions we turned her over. in an hour we had made her water-tight, had picked up her oars, and were pulling merrily for the wreck. chapter xliii had the cows or horses been alive, they must have been left behind, for we could not have removed them, but the smaller animals were with comparatively little difficulty got on deck, and they descended with me into the boat. we added a few things that lay handy, and in a few minutes were laughingly driving our four-footed treasures on shore, to the extreme astonishment of the gannets, which seemed as though they would never cease to flap their wings, as their new associates were driven by them. in the same way we removed the most portable of the agricultural implements, bed and bedding, cots, and hammocks, furniture, the framework of a house, preserved provisions of all kinds, a medicine chest, boxes of books, crates of china and glass, all sorts of useful tools, and domestic utensils; in short, in the course of the next two or three weeks, by repeated journeys, we filled every available place we could find with what we had managed to rescue. then came another terrible storm that lasted two days, after which the wreck having been broken up, was scattered in every direction. i however managed to secure the drift wood, tubs, spars, and chests, which were all got on shore, and proved of the greatest service to me some time afterwards. numerous as our acquisitions had been in this way, both of us had been infinitely better pleased had we been able to rescue some of the ill-fated crew, to whom they had once belonged. but not one of them could have escaped, and only one body was cast on shore, which was that of a young woman, who lay with her face to the ground, and her wet clothes clinging round her. we turned her carefully over, and i beheld a face that seemed to me wonderfully fair and beautiful. she had escaped the sharks, and had been dead several hours--most probably she had been cast on shore by the waves soon after the ship struck, for she had escaped also the rocks, which, had she been dashed against, would have left fearful signs of their contact on her delicate frame. the sight of her corpse gave me many melancholy thoughts. i thought of the delight she might have caused both of us, had she been saved. what a pleasant companion she might have proved! indeed, as i looked on her pale cold features, i fancied that she might have reconciled me to ending my existence on the island--ay, even to the abandonment of my favourite scheme of seeking my grandfather to give him back his diamonds. we took her up with as much pity and affection as if she were our nearest and dearest relative, and carried her home and placed her on mrs reichardt's bed; and then i laid some planks together, in the shape of what mrs reichardt called a coffin--and i dug her a deep grave in the guano. and all the while i found myself crying as i had never cried before, and my heart seemed weary and faint. in solemn silence we carried her to her grave, and read over her the funeral service out of the prayer-book, kneeling and praying for this nameless creature, whom we had never seen alive, as though she had been our companion for many years; both of us shedding tears for her hapless fate as if we had lost a beloved sister. and when we had filled up her grave and departed, we went home, and passed the most miserable day we had ever had to endure since we had first been cast upon the island. i had now numerous occupations that kept me actively employed. still i could not for a long time help recalling to mind that pale face that looked so piteously upon me when i first beheld it; and then i would leave off my work, and give myself up to my melancholy thoughts till my attention was called off by some appeal from my companion. i made a kind of monument over the place where she was buried, and planted there the finest flowers we had; and i never passed the spot without a prayer, as if i were approaching holy ground. i must not forget to add, that a few days after the wreck we were agreeably surprised by visitors that, though unexpected, were extremely welcome. i had noticed strange birds wandering about in various parts of the island. on their coming under the notice of my companion, they were immediately recognised as fowls and ducks that had no doubt escaped from the ship. we might now, therefore, constitute ourselves a little colony, of which mrs reichardt and myself were the immediate governors, the settlers being a mingled community of calves, sheep, pigs, and poultry, that lived on excellent terms with each other; the quadrupeds having permission to roam where they pleased, and the bipeds being kept within a certain distance of the government house. the old hut had suffered so much from the storm that i determined on building another in a better position, and had recourse to the framework of the house i had taken from the wreck. i had some difficulty in putting the several parts together, but at last succeeded, and a small, but most commodious dwelling was the result. near it i laid out a new garden, wherein i planted all the orange-trees we had reared, as well as many of the seeds and roots we had brought from the wreck. a little beyond i enclosed a paddock, wherein i planted the twigs we had found in pots, which proved to be fruit trees. when i had done this, i thought of my agricultural implements, and very much desired to make use of a handy plough that was amongst them, when i learned the advantages that might arise from it. at first, i yoked myself to the plough, and mrs reichardt held it: this proved such hard and awkward work that i kept projecting all sorts of plans for lessening the labour--the best was that of yoking our calves, and making them pull instead of myself. this was more easily thought of than done. the animals did not prove very apt pupils, but in course of time, with a good deal of patience, and some manoeuvring, i succeeded in making them perform the work they were expected to do. thus, in building, gardening, planting, and farming, the time flew by quickly, and in the course of the next year the aspect of the place had become quite changed. the guano that enriched the soil made every kind of vegetation thrive with an almost marvellous rapidity and luxuriance. we had a comfortable house, up which a vine was creeping in one place, and a young pear-tree in another. we were supplied with the choicest oranges, and had apples of several kinds. we had abundance of furniture, and an inexhaustible stock of provisions. we had a most gorgeous show of flowers of many different species; our new kitchen garden was full of useful vegetables--young fruit trees were yielding their produce wherever they had been planted--the poultry had more than doubled their number--the calves were taking upon themselves the full dignity of the state of cow and bull--the ewes had numerous lambs--and the pigs had not only grown into excellent pork, but had already produced more than one litter that would be found equally desirable when provisions ran scarce. we had two growing crops, of different kinds of grain, and a large pasture-field fenced round. the little savage, at seventeen, had been transformed into a farmer, and the cultivation of the farm and the care of the live stock soon left him no time for indulging in vain longings to leave the island, or useless regrets for the fair creature who, even in death, i had regarded as its greatest ornament. two years later, still greater improvements, and still greater additions became visible. we were establishing a dairy farm on a small scale, and as our herds and flocks, as well as the pigs and poultry, increased rapidly, we promised in a few years to be the most thriving farmers that had ever lived in that part of the world by the cultivation of the land. chapter xliv although my first experimental voyage had proved so hazardous, now that i was better provided for meeting its perils, i became anxious to make another attempt to circumnavigate the island. the boat that had belonged to the wrecked ship, from the frequent trips i had made in her to and from the shore, i could manage as well as if i had been rowing boats all my life. with the assistance of mrs reichardt, who pulled an oar almost as well as myself, we could get her along in very good style, even when heavily laden, and our labours together had taken from her all that timidity which had deterred her from trusting herself with me, when i first ventured from the island. i was, however, very differently circumstanced now, to what i was then. instead of a frail cockle-shell, that threatened to be capsized by every billow that approached it, and that would scarcely hold two persons comfortably, i was master of a well-built ship's-boat, that would hold half a dozen with ease, and except in very rough weather, was as safe as any place ashore. i had repaired the slight damage its timbers had received, and had made an awning to protect us when rowing from the heat of the sun; i had also raised a sail, which would relieve us of a good deal of labour. when everything was prepared, i urged mrs reichardt to accompany me in a voyage round the island; an excursion i hoped would turn out equally pleasant and profitable. i found her very averse to trusting herself farther from shore than was absolutely necessary. she raised all kinds of objections--prominent among which were my want of seamanship for managing a boat in the open sea; the danger that might arise from a sudden squall coming on; her fear of our getting amongst a shoal of sharks, and the risk we ran of driving against a projecting rock; but i overruled them all. i showed her, by taking little trips out to sea, that i could manage the boat either with the sail or the oars, and assured her that by keeping close to the island, we could run ashore before danger could reach us; and that nothing could be easier than our keeping out of the reach of both rocks and sharks. i do not think i quite convinced her that her fears were groundless, but my repeated entreaties, the fineness of the weather, and her dislike to be again left on the island, whilst i was risking my life at sea, prevailed, and she promised to join me in this second experiment. her forethought, however, was here as fully demonstrated as on other occasions, for she did not suffer the boat to leave the shore till she had provided for any accident that might prevent our return in the anticipated time. a finer day for such a voyage we could not have selected. the sky was without a cloud, and there was just wind enough for the purpose i wanted, without any apprehensions of this being increased. i got up the awning, and spread the sail, and handing mrs reichardt to her appointed seat, we bid farewell to our four-footed and two-footed friends ashore, that were gazing at us as if they knew they were parting from their only protectors. i then pushed the boat off, the wind caught the sail, and she glided rapidly through the deep water. i let her proceed in this way about a quarter of a mile from the island, and then tacked; the boat, obedient to the position of the sail, altered her course, and we proceeded at about the same rate for a considerable distance. mrs reichardt, notwithstanding her previous fears, could not help feeling the exhilarating effect of this adventurous voyage. we were floating, safely and gracefully, upon the billows, with nothing but sea and sky in every direction but one, where the rugged shores of our island home gave a bold, yet menacing feature to the view. my heart seemed to expand with the majestic prospect before me. never had mariner, when discovering some prodigious continent, felt a greater degree of exultation than i experienced, when directing my little vessel over the immense wilderness of waters that spread out before me, till it joined the line of the horizon. i sat down by the side of mrs reichardt, and allowed the boat to proceed on its course, either as if it required no directing hand, or that its present direction was so agreeable, i felt no inclination to alter it. "i can easily imagine," said i, "the enthusiasm of such men as columbus, whose discovery of america you were relating to me the other day. the vocation of these early navigators was a glorious one, and, when they had tracked their way over so many thousand miles of pathless water, and found themselves in strange seas, expecting the appearance of land, hitherto unknown to the civilised world, they must have felt the importance of their mission as discoverers." "no doubt, frank," she replied. "and probably it was this that supported the great man you have just named, in the severe trials he was obliged to endure, on the very eve of the discovery that was to render his name famous to all generations. he had endured intolerable hardships, the ship had been so long without sight of land, that no one thought it worth while to look out for it, and he expected that his crew would mutiny, and insist on returning. at this critical period of his existence, first one indication of land, and then another made itself manifest; the curiosity of the disheartened sailors became excited; hope revived in the breast of their immortal captain; a man was now induced to ascend the main-top, and his joyful cry of land woke up the slumbering spirit of the crew. in this way, a new world was first presented to the attention of the inhabitants of the old." "it appears to me very unjust," i observed, "that so important a discovery should have become known to us, not by the name of its original discoverer, but by that of a subsequent visitor to its shores." "undoubtedly," said mrs reichardt, "it is apparently unfair that americus vespucius should obtain an honour which christopher columbus alone had deserved. but of the fame which is the natural right of him whose courage and enterprise procured this unrivalled acquisition, no one can deprive him. his gigantic discovery may always be known as america, but the world acknowledges its obligation to columbus, and knows little beyond the name of his rival." "were the immediate results of so large an addition to geographical knowledge, as beneficial to the entire human race as they ought to have been?" "i do not think they were. the vast continent then thrown open to the advance of civilisation, may be divided into two portions, the south and the north. the former was inhabited by a harmless effeminate race, who enjoyed many of the refinements of civilisation; their knowledge of the arts, for instance, as shewn to us in the ruins of their cities, was considerable; they possessed extensive buildings in a bold and ornate style of architecture; they made a lavish use of the precious metals, of which the land was extremely rich, and they wore dresses which shewed a certain perfection in the manufacture of textile fabrics, and no slight degree of taste and art in their formation. "the spaniards, who were led to this part of the continent by a desire to enrich themselves with the gold which the earliest discoverers had found in the new country in considerable quantities, invaded the territories of this peaceful people, and, by their superior knowledge of warlike weapons, and the ignorance of the intentions of their invaders that prevailed amongst the natives of all ranks, by a series of massacres, they were enabled, though comparatively but a small force, to obtain possession of the vast empire that had been established there from time immemorial, and turn it into a spanish colony. "the blood of this harmless race flowed like water; their great incas or emperors were deposed and murdered, their splendid temples plundered of their riches, their nobles and priests tortured to make them change their faith, and the great mass of the people became slaves to their more warlike conquerors. it was in this way the gold of mexico and peru enriched the treasury of spain; but every ingot had the curse of blood upon it, and from that time the spanish power, then at its height, began to decline in europe, till it sunk in the scale of nations among the least important. the colonies revolted from the mother country, and became independent states; but the curse that followed the infamous appropriation of the country, seems to cling to the descendants of the first criminals, and neither government nor people prospers; and it is evident that all these independent states must in time be absorbed by a great republic, that has sprung up by peaceable means, as it were at their side, whilst they were content to be colonies." "to what republic do you allude?" "you may remember that i told you that the entire continent was divided into south and north." "exactly." "the history of the southern portion i have rapidly sketched for you, that of the northern you will find of a totally different character." "pray let me hear it." "when north america was first discovered, it was found to be inhabited by a race of savages, divided into several tribes. they had no manufactures; they had no knowledge of art or science; they lived in the impenetrable woods in huts, having no pretension to architecture; they went almost entirely naked, were extremely warlike, and fond of hunting, and were known to devour the enemies they killed in battle. "to this barbarous race came a few adventurous men across the stormy atlantic, from the distant island of england--" "ah, england!" i exclaimed, "that is the country of my parents--that is the home of my grandfather; let me hear anything you have to say about england." mrs reichardt smiled at my animation, but proceeded without making any comment upon what i had said. "england possessed at this period many adventurous spirits, who were ready to dare every danger to obtain for their country a share in the honours which other lands had assumed through the enterprise of their navigators. by such men different portions of the northern continent of america were discovered; the fame of these new lands, their wonderful productiveness and admirable climate, soon spread amongst their countrymen, and from time to time various ships left the english ports with small bands of adventurers, who made what were termed settlements in the country of these savages--not by mercilessly massacring them as the spaniards had done in the south, and then plundering them of all they possessed, but by purchasing certain districts or pieces of land from the original occupants, which they peacefully cultivated; as their numbers increased, they multiplied their habitations, and obtained by barter of the savages fresh accessions of territory." "the english showed themselves a much more humane people than the spaniards," i observed. "but did they never come into collision with the wild natives of the country?" "frequently," mrs reichardt replied, "but in some measure this was unavoidable. as new settlers from england landed in the country, they required more land; but the savages were now not inclined to barter; they had become jealous of the strangers, and were desirous of driving them back to their ships before they became too numerous. acts of hostility were committed by the savages upon the settlers, which were often marked by great brutality: this exasperated the latter, who joined in a warlike association, and notwithstanding their numbers and daring, drove them further and further from their neighbourhood, till either by conquest, treaties, or purchase, the englishmen or their descendants obtained the greater portion of north america." "do they still hold possession of it?" i asked. "up to a recent date, the whole of this vast acquisition was a colony in obedience to the government of england; but a dispute having arisen between the mother country and the colony, a struggle took place, which ended in the latter throwing off all subjection to the laws of england. the extensive provinces joined together in a union of equal privileges and powers, which has since gone by the name of the government of the united states of north america. this is the great republic to which i just now alluded, that is gradually absorbing the minor southern states into its--union, and threatens at no very distant date to spread the english language and the english race over the whole continent of america." "has england then completely lost the country she colonised?" i inquired, feeling more and more interested in the subject. "no, a great portion still remains in her possession," she replied. "the people preserved their allegiance when their neighbours thought proper to rise in revolt, and are now in a state of great prosperity, governed by the laws of england, and supported by her power. the english possessions in north america form an extensive district. it is, however, but an inconsiderable fraction of the vast countries still remaining under the dominion of england. her territories lie in every quarter of the globe; indeed the sun never sets upon this immense empire--an empire with which the conquests of alexander, and of caesar, or the most formidable state that existed in ancient times, cannot for a moment be compared; and when we bear in mind that in all these various climates, and in all these far-distant shores, the flag of our country affords the same protection to the colonist as he would enjoy in his own land, we may entertain some idea of the vast power that government possesses which can make itself respected at so many opposite points from the source whence it emanates." i was so much interested in this description, that i had neglected to notice the rate at which the boat was driving through the water. i now rose with great alacrity to shift the sail, as we had got several miles from the island, and if i did not take care we might be blown out of sight of land. i lost no time in putting her on another tack, but we had not proceeded far in this direction when i found the wind lull, and presently the sail drooped to the mast, and there was a dead calm. it became necessary now to take to our oars, and we were presently pulling with all our strength in the direction of land. this went on for some time till we were both tired, and i was surprised at the little progress we had made. we lay on our oars and took some refreshment, and then pulled with additional vigour; but i began to suspect that we were receding from the land instead of approaching it, and called mrs reichardt's attention to the fact of the island diminishing in size notwithstanding the length of time we had been pulling towards it. "ah, frank," she said, in a melancholy tone of voice, "i have for some time entertained suspicions that all our strength was being expended in vain. it is very clear that we have got into a current that is every moment taking us farther out to sea, and if a breeze does not soon spring up, we shall lose sight of the island, and then, heaven only knows what will become of us." i shook out the sail, in hopes of its catching sufficient wind to lead us out of the current, but not a breath of air was stirring. we did not possess such a thing as a compass; our provisions were only calculated for a pleasure trip--we had only one small jar of water, and a flask of spirit, a few biscuits, two large cakes, a chicken, and some dried fish. the land was rapidly receding; i could only mark its position with respect to the sun that now was pouring its burning rays upon our little bark. if it had not been for the awning we could not have endured it; the heat was so oppressive. we had been obliged to give over rowing, as much from the fatigue it occasioned, as from the hopelessness of our labour. we now sat with sinking hearts watching the fast retreating land. it had become a point--it diminished to a speck, and as it disappeared from our anxious sight, the sun set in all his glory, and we were drifting at the mercy of the current we knew not where, with nothing but sky and sea all around us. chapter xlv vainly i stretched my eyes around the illimitable field of ocean, in hope of discerning some indication of that power whose ships i had been told traversed every sea; but nothing like a vessel was in sight--the mighty waters stretched out like an endless desert on every side. there was no sign of man in all this vast space, except our little boat; and in comparison with this space, how insignificant were the two helpless human beings who sat silent and motionless in that boat awaiting their destiny. the stars came out with marvellous brilliancy. i fancied that i had never seen them appear so bright; but probably the gloominess of my thoughts made them look brighter by contrast. i seemed the centre of a glorious system of worlds revolving above me with a calm and tranquil beauty, that appeared to reproach me for giving way to despair in a scene so lovely. the great mass of water, scarcely moved by a ripple, now appeared lit up with countless fires, and a purplish haze, like a low flame, was visible in every direction. i directed the attention of my companion to this strange appearance. notwithstanding the intensity of her anxiety, she immediately entered into an explanation of the phenomenon, and attributed it to a peculiarly phosphoric state of the sea, caused by myriads of creatures which possess the quality of the glow-worm, and rising to the surface of the water, made the latter seem as though enveloped in flame. i sat a long time watching the singular appearances that presented themselves whenever i dashed down the oar. it looked as though i was beating fire instead of water, and flame seemed to come from the oar with the drops that fell from it into the sea. in this way hours passed by: we were still floating with the current; the moon and stars were now coldly shining over our heads; the ocean around us was still gleaming with phosphoric fires, when mrs reichardt advised me to take some nourishment, and then endeavour to go to sleep, saying she would keep watch and apprise me if anything happened of which it might be advantageous to avail ourselves. the only thing i desired was the appearance of a vessel, or the setting in of a breeze, of which at present not a sign existed. i felt disinclined either to eat or to drink: but i proposed that my companion should make a meal and then go to sleep, as it was much more proper that i should keep watch than herself. the fact was, we were both anxious that the other should be the first to diminish our little stock of food; but as neither would be induced to do this, it was decided that our provisions should be divided into certain portions, which were only to be taken at sunrise and sunset, and that we should during the night relieve each other every three hours in keeping watch, that if we saw land, or a ship, or the wind should spring up, we might consult immediately as to our course. i only succeeded in inducing her to lie down at the bottom of the boat, to obtain a little sleep, previously to her taking my place that i might so rest myself. she first said her usual prayers for the evening, in which i joined, and in a few minutes i was glad to hear by her regular breathing, that she was obtaining that repose of which i was certain she stood greatly in need. i was now the sole observer of the stupendous spectacle that spread out around and above me the most sublime feature in this imposing scene appeared to be the silence which reigned supreme over all. the heavens were as mute as the sea. it looked as if the earth had been engulfed by a second deluge, and all living nature had perished utterly from the face of it. i felt a deep feeling of melancholy stealing over me: and could not forbear reproaching myself for embarking in this hazardous enterprise, and risking a life that i was bound to preserve. what could become of us both i knew not--but i was sensible that if we were not speedily picked up, or made some friendly shore, there existed but little hopes of our surviving many days. i made up my mind that the island we should never see again, and though i had been so anxious for so many years to quit it, now that fate had separated us for ever, i could not console myself for the loss of a home endeared to me by so many recollections. but my great grief was the loss of my grandfather's diamonds. he had now no chance of having them restored to him. if they were found they would become the property of the discoverer; and he would never know how his daughter perished on a rock, and how his grandson was swallowed up by the waters of the great deep. and then i thought of that glorious england i had so long hoped to see, and my heart sunk within me as i gazed out upon the boundless prospect. there was not a voice to murmur consolation, not a hand to offer me assistance. was i never to see those white cliffs which had been so often described to me, that i could call them to mind as clearly as if they stood in all their pride and beauty before my eyes? how often had i dreamed of approaching the hallowed shores of england--how often had i heard the cheerful voices of her people welcoming the little savage to his natural home--how often had i been embraced by my aged grandfather, and received into the happy circle of his friends, with the respect and affection due to his heir. i had dreamed happy dreams, and seen blissful visions; and the result was starvation in an open boat on the illimitable ocean. mrs reichardt still slept, and i would not wake her. as long as she was insensible to the dangers of her position she must exist in comparative happiness; to disturb her was to bring her back to a sense of danger and misery, and the recollection that my folly had brought her to this hopeless state. i noticed that a small cloud was making its appearance in the horizon, and almost at the same instant i observed it, i felt a breeze that was just sufficient to flap the sail against the mast. in a few minutes the cloud had greatly increased, and the wind filled the sail. i fancied it blew in a direction contrary to the current; and in the belief that it did so i soon got the boat round, and to my great joy she was presently scudding before the wind at a rate that was sensibly increasing. but the cloud presently began to envelop the heavens, and a thick darkness spread itself like a veil in every direction. the wind blew very fresh, and strained the mast to which the sail had been fixed; and now i began to entertain a new fear: some sudden gust might take the sail and capsize us, or tear it from its fastenings. i would gladly have taken in the sail, but i considered it as rather a hazardous experiment. mrs reichardt lay in a position that prevented my getting at it without disturbing her, or running the risk of tipping the boat over, when it would be sure to fill immediately, and sink with us both. though we could both swim, i felt assured that if we were once in the water, there would remain very little chance of our protracting our lives beyond a few hours. the boat, therefore, continued to run before the wind at a rapid rate, the slight mast creaking, and the sail stretching so tight, i expected every minute that we should be upset. at this moment mrs reichardt awoke, and her quick eye immediately took in the full extent of her danger. "we shall be lost," she said hurriedly, "if we do not take in that sail!" i was fully aware of this, but she had seen more of a sailor's perils than i had, and knew better how to meet them. she offered to assist me in taking in the sail, and directing me to be very careful, we proceeded, with the assistance of the awning, to the mast, and after a good deal of labour, and at some risk of being blown into the sea, we succeeded in furling the sail, and unshipping the mast. we were now in quite as much danger from another cause--the surface of the sea, which had been so smooth during the calm, was now so violently agitated by the wind, that the boat kept ascending one great billow only to descend into the trough of another. we often went down almost perpendicularly, and the height seemed every moment increasing; and every time we went thus plunging headlong into the boiling waters, i thought we should be engulfed never to rise; nevertheless, the next minute, up we ascended on the crest of some more fearful wave than any we had hitherto encountered, and down again we plunged in the dark unfathomable abyss that, walled in by foaming mountains of water, appeared yawning to close over us for ever. it was almost entirely dark; we could see only the white foam of the wave over which we were about to pass; save this, it was black below and black above, and impenetrable darkness all around. mrs reichardt sat close to me with her hand in mine--she uttered no exclamations of feminine terror--she was more awe-struck than frightened. i believe that she was fully satisfied her last hour had come, for i could hear her murmuring a prayer in which she commended her soul to her creator. i cannot say that i was in any great degree alarmed--the rapid up and down motion of the boat gave me a sensation of pleasure i had never before experienced. to say the truth, i should have greatly enjoyed being thus at the mercy of the winds and waves, in the midst of a black and stormy night on the trackless ocean, had it not been for my constant thoughts of my companion, and my bitter self-reproaches for having led her into so terrible a danger. i was now, however, called from these reflections, by the necessity of active employment. the boat i found shipped water at every plunge, and if speedy means were not taken to keep the water under, there was little doubt that she would soon fill and go down. i therefore seized the iron kettle we had brought with us to cook our dinner, and began rapidly bailing out the water, which was already over our ankles. we continued to ship water, sometimes more and sometimes less; and mrs reichardt, actuated no doubt by the same motives as myself, with a tin pan now assisted me in getting rid of the treacherous element. by our united exertions we kept the water under, and hoped to be able to get rid of the whole of it. about this time it began to rain very heavily, and although the awning protected our heads, so much fell into the boat, that notwithstanding our labours we continued to sit in a pool. we were, however, glad to find that as the rain fell the wind abated, and as the latter subsided, the sea became less violent, and we shipped less water. i was now able by my own exertions to keep the boat tolerably dry, and mrs reichardt, ever provident, spread out all the empty vessels she had brought with her to catch the rain, for as she said, we did not know how valuable that water might become in a short time. the rain continued to pour down in a perfect torrent for several hours; at the end of which the sky gradually cleared. the sea, though still rough, presented none of those mountainous waves that a short time before had threatened to annihilate us at every descent, and there was just sufficient breeze to waft us along at a brisk rate with the assistance of our sail. mrs reichardt helped me in putting up the mast, and directly we began to feel the breeze, she insisted on my taking some refreshment. it was vitally necessary to both, for our labours had been heavy for several hours. we therefore ate sparingly of our provisions, and washed down our meal with a pannikin of water mingled with a little spirit. chapter xlvi the morning dawned upon a boundless expanse of sea. the first object that presented itself to my sight was an enormous whale spouting water about a quarter of a mile distant from me; then i observed another, then a third, and subsequently, several more; they presented a singular and picturesque appearance, as one or other of these vast animals was continually throwing up a column of water that caught the rays of the sun, and looked very beautiful in the distance. i looked in vain for land; i looked equally in vain for a ship; there was nothing visible but this shoal of whales, and mrs reichardt endeavoured to cheer me by describing the importance of the whale fishery to england, and the perils which the men meet with who pursue the fish for the purpose of wounding them with an iron instrument called a harpoon. i felt much interest in these details; and my companion went into the whole history of a whaling expedition, describing the first discovery of the huge fish from the ship; the pursuit in the boats, and the harpooning of the whale; its struggles after having been wounded; its being towed to the ship's side; the subsequent manufacture of oil from the blubber of the animal, and the preparation of whalebone. in attending to this discourse, i completely forgot that i was being tossed about in the open sea, i knew not where; and where i might be in a short time it would be proved i was equally ignorant: perhaps i should be a corpse floating on the surface of the ocean waiting for a tomb till a shark came that way; perhaps i should be suffering the torments of hunger and thirst; perhaps cast lifeless upon a rock, where my bleached bones would remain the only monument which would then declare that there once existed in these latitudes such a being as the little savage. where now could be the island i, though long so anxious to quit, now was a thousand times more desirous of beholding? i felt that nothing could be more agreeable to me than a glimpse of that wild rocky coast that had so often appeared to me the walls of an intolerable prison. i strained my eyes in vain in every direction; the line of the horizon stretched out uninterrupted by a single break of any kind all around. where could we be? i often asked myself; but except that we were on the wide ocean, neither myself nor my companion had the slightest idea of our geographical position. we must have been blown a considerable distance during the storm: much farther than the current had taken us from the island. i calculated that we must have passed it by many a mile if we had continued the same course; but the wind had shifted several times, and it might be that we were not so very long a sail from it, could we gain the slightest knowledge of the direction in which it was to be found. but this was hopeless. i felt assured that we must abandon all idea of seeing it again. in the midst of these painful reflections, my companion directed my attention to an object at a very considerable distance, and intimated her impression that it was a ship. luckily, i had brought my glass with me, and soon was anxiously directing it to the required point. it was a ship: but at so great a distance that it was impossible, as mrs reichardt said, for any person on board to distinguish our boat. i would have sailed in that direction, but the wind was contrary: i had, therefore, no alternative but to wait till the ship should approach near enough to make us out; and i passed several hours of the deepest anxiety in watching the course of the distant vessel. she increased in size, so that i could observe that she was a large ship by the unassisted eye; but as we were running before the wind in a totally different direction, there seemed very little chance of our communicating, unless she altered her course. mrs reichardt mentioned that signals were made by vessels at a distance to attract each other's attention, and described the various ways in which they communicated the wishes of their respective captains. the only signal i had been in the habit of making was burning quantities of wood on the shore and pouring water on it to make it smoke--this was impossible in our boat. my companion at last suggested that i should tie a table-cloth to the mast; its peculiar whiteness might attract attention. the sail was presently taken in, and the table-cloth spread in its place; but, unfortunately, it soon afterwards came on a dead calm--the breeze died away, and the cloth hung in long folds against the mast. no notice whatever was taken of us. we now took to our oars and pulled in the direction of the ship; but after several hours' hard rowing, our strength had so suffered from our previous fatigues, that we seemed to have made very little distance. in a short time the sun set, and we watched the object of all our hopes with most anxious eyes, till night set in and hid her from our sight. shortly afterwards a light breeze again sprung up; with renewed hope we gave our sail to the wind, but it bore us in a contrary direction, and when morning dawned we saw no more of the ship. the wind had now again shifted, and bore us briskly along. but where? i had fallen asleep during the preceding night, wearied out with labour and anxiety, and i did not wake till long after daybreak. mrs reichardt would not disturb me. in sleep i was insensible to the miseries and dangers of my position. she could not bring herself to disturb a repose that was at once so necessary to mind and body; and i fell into a sweet dream of a new home in that dear england i had prayed so often to see; and bright faces smiled upon me, and voices welcomed me, full of tenderness and affection. i fancied that in one of those faces i recognised my mother, of whose love i had so early been deprived, and that it was paler than all the others, but infinitely more tender and affectionate: then the countenance seemed to grow paler and paler, till it took upon itself the likeness of the fair creature i had buried in the guano, and i thought she embraced me, and her arms were cold as stone, and she pressed her lips to mine, and they gave a chill to my blood that made me shake as with an ague. suddenly i beheld jackson with his sightless orbs groping towards me with a knife in his hand, muttering imprecations, and he caught hold of me, and we had a desperate struggle, and he plunged a long knife into my chest, with a loud laugh of derision and malice; and as i felt the blade enter my flesh, i gave a start and jumped up, and alarmed mrs reichardt by the wild cry with which i awoke. how strongly was that dream impressed upon my mind; and the features of the different persons who figured in it--how distinctly they were brought before me! my poor mother was as fresh in my recollection as though i had seen her but yesterday, and the sweetness of her looks as she approached me--how i now tried to recall them, and feasted on their memory as though it were a lost blessing. then the nameless corpse that had been washed from the wreck, how strange it seemed, that after this lapse of time she should appear to me in a dream, as though we had been long attached to each other, and her affections had been through life entirely my own. poor girl! perhaps even now some devoted lover mourns her loss; or hopes at no distant date to be able to join her in the new colony, to attain which a cruel destiny had forced her from his arms. little does he dream of her nameless grave under the guano. little does he dream that the only colony in which he is likely to join her is that settlement in the great desert of oblivion, over which death has remained governor from the birth of the world. but the most unpleasant part of the vision was the appearance of jackson; and it was a long time before i could bring myself to believe that i had not beheld his well known features--that i had not been stabbed by him, and that i was not suffering from the mortal wound he had inflicted. i however at last shook off the delusion, and to mrs reichardt's anxious inquiries replied only that i had had a disagreeable dream. in a short time i began to doubt whether the waking was more pleasant than the dreaming--the vast ocean still spread itself before me like a mighty winding sheet, the fair sky, beautiful as it appeared in the rays of the morning sun, i could only regard as a pall--and our little bark was the coffin in which two helpless human beings, though still existing, were waiting interment. "has god abandoned us?" i asked my companion, "or has he forgotten that two of his creatures are in the deepest peril of their lives, from which he alone can save them?" "hush! frank henniker," exclaimed mrs reichardt solemnly; "this is impious. god never abandons those who are worthy of his protection. he will either save them at his own appointed time--or if he think it more desirable, will snatch them from a scene where so many dangers surround them, and place them where there prevails eternal tranquillity, and everlasting bliss. "we should rather rejoice," she added, with increasing seriousness, "that we are thought worthy of being so early taken from a world in which we have met with so many troubles." "but to die in this way," i observed gloomily; "to be left to linger out days of terrible torture, without a hope of relief--i cannot reconcile myself to it." "we must die sooner or later," she said, "and there are many diseases which are fatal after protracted suffering of the most agonising description. these we have been spared. the wretch who lingers in torment, visited by some loathsome disorder, would envy us, could he see the comparatively easy manner in which we are suffered to leave existence. "but i do not myself see the hopelessness of our case," she added. "it is not yet impossible that we may be picked up by a ship, or discover some friendly shore whence we might obtain a passage for england." "i see no prospect of this," said i; "we are apparently out of the track of ships, and if it should be our chance to discover one, the people on board are not likely to observe us. i wish i had never left the island." mrs reichardt never reproached me--never so much as reminded me that it was my own fault. she merely added, "it was the will of god." we ate and drank our small rations--my companion always blessing the meal, and offering a thanksgiving for being permitted to enjoy it. i noticed what was left. we had been extremely economical, yet there was barely enough for another day. we determined still further to reduce the trifling portion we allowed ourselves, that we might increase our chance of escape. chapter xlvii five days and nights had we been drifting at the mercy of the winds and waves; all our small stock of food had been devoured--though we had hoarded every crumb, as the miser hoards his gold. even the rain water, as well as the water we had brought with us, we had drained to the last drop. the weather continually alternated from a dead calm to a light breeze: the wind frequently shifted, but i had no strength left to attend to the sail--the boat was abandoned to its own guidance, or rather to that of the wind. when becalmed we lay still--when the breeze sprang up we pursued our course till the sail no longer felt its influence. five long days and nights--days of intolerable suffering, nights of inexpressible horror. from sunrise to sunset i strained my eyes along the line of the horizon, but nothing but sky and wave ever met my gaze. when it became dark, excited by the deep anxiety i had endured throughout the day, i could not sleep. i fancied i beheld through the darkness monstrous forms mocking and gibbering, and high above them all was reared the head of the enormous python i had combated in the happy valley. and he opened his tremendous jaws, as though to swallow me, and displayed fold upon fold of his immense form as if to involve and crush the boat in its mighty involutions. i was always glad when the day dawned, or if the night happened to be fair and starlight; for the spectres vanished when the sun shone, and the tranquil beauty of the stars calmed my soul. i was famishing for want of food--but i suffered most from want of water, for the heat during the day was tremendous, and i became so frantic from thirst, that nothing but the exhortations of mrs reichardt would have prevented me from dashing myself into the sea, and drinking my fill of the salt water that looked so tempting and refreshing. my companion sought to encourage me to hope, long after all hope had vanished--then she preached resignation to the divine will, and in her own nature gave a practical commentary on her text. i perceived that her voice was getting more and more faint--and that she was becoming hourly more feeble. she was not able to move from her seat, and at last asked me to assist her to lie down at the bottom of the boat. then i noticed that she prayed fervently, and i could often distinguish my name in these petitions to the throne of grace. i felt a strange sensation in my head, and my tongue became in my mouth as a dry stick--from this i was relieved by chewing the sleeve of my shirt; but my head grew worse. my eyes too were affected in a strange manner. i continually fancied that i saw ships sailing about at a little distance from me, and i strove to attract their attention by calling to them. my voice was weak and i could create only a kind of half stifled cry. then i thought i beheld land: fair forests and green pastures spread before me--bright flowers and refreshing fruits grew all around--and i called to my companion to make haste for we were running ashore and should presently be pulling the clustering grapes and should lay ourselves down among the odorous flowers. mrs reichardt opened her eyes and gazed at me with a more painful interest. she knew i was haunted by the chimeras created by famine and thirst; but she seemed to have lost all power of speech. she motioned me to join her in prayer; i, however, was too much occupied with the prospect of landing, and paid no attention to her signs. presently the bright landscape faded away, and i beheld nothing but the wide expanse of water, the circle of which appeared to expand and spread into the sky, and the sky seemed lost and broken up in the water, and for a few minutes they were mixed together in the wildest and strangest confusion. subsequently to this i must have dropt asleep, for after a while i found myself huddled up in a corner of the boat, and must have fallen there from my seat. i stared about me for some time, unconscious where i was. the bright sun still shone over my head; the everlasting sea still rolled beneath my feet. i looked to the bottom of the boat, and met the upturned gaze of my fellow voyager--the pale face had grown paler, and the expression of the painful eye had become less intelligent. i thought she was as i had seen her in my dream, when she changed from her own likeness to that of the poor drowned girl we buried in the guano. i turned away my gaze--the sight was too painful to look upon. i felt assured that she was dying, and that in a very short space of time, that faithful and affectionate nature i must part from forever. i thought i would make a last effort. though faint and trembling, burning with fever, and feeling deadly sick, i managed by the support of the awning to crawl to the mast, and embracing it with one arm i raised the glass with the other hand, and looked carefully about. my hand was very unsteady and my eyes seemed dim. i could discern nothing but water. i should have sunk in despair to the bottom of the boat, had i not been attracted at the moment by a singular appearance in the sky. a cloud was approaching of a shape and appearance i had never observed before. i raised the glass again, and after observing this cloud for some time with great attention, i felt assured that what i considered to be long lines of vapour was an immense flock of birds. this discovery interested me--i forgot the intensity of my sufferings in observing the motions of this apparently endless flock. as the first file approached, i looked again, to see if i could make out what they were. god of heaven! they were gannets. i crawled back to my companion as rapidly as my feeble limbs would allow, to inform her of the discovery i had made. alas! i found that i was unheeded. i could not believe that her fine spirit had fled; no, she moved her hand; but the dull spiritless gaze seemed to warn me that her dissolution was fast approaching. i looked for the spirit flask, and found a few drops were still left there; i poured these into her mouth, and watched the result with the deepest anxiety i had ever known since the day of my birth. in a few minutes i found that she breathed more regularly and distinctly--presently her eyes lost that fixedness which had made them so painful to look upon. then she recognised me, and took hold of my hand, regarding me with the sweet smile with which i was so familiar. as soon as i found that consciousness had returned, i told her of the great flock of gannets that were evidently wending their way to their customary resting place, and the hope i entertained that if they could be kept in sight, and the wind remained in the same quarter, the boat might be led by them to the place where they laid their eggs. she listened to me with attention, and evidently understood what i said. her lips moved, and i thought she was returning thanks to god--accepting the flight of the birds as a manifest proof that he was still watching over us. in a few minutes she seemed so much better that she could sit up. i noticed her for some time watching the gannets that now approached in one vast cloud that threatened to shut us out from the sky--she then turned her gaze in an opposite direction, and with a smile of exultation that lit up her wan face as with a glory, stretched her arm out, pointing her hand to a distant portion of the sea. my gaze quickly followed hers, and i fancied i discovered a break in the line of the horizon; but it did not look like a ship. i pointed the glass in that direction, and felt the joyful assurance that we were within sight of land. this additional discovery gave me increased strength: or rather hope now dawning upon us, gave me an impulse i had not felt before. i in my turn became the consoler. i encouraged mrs reichardt, with all the arguments of which i was master, to think that we should soon be in safety. she smiled, and something like animation again appeared in her pale features. if i could save her, i felt i should be blessed beyond measure. such an object was worth striving for; and i did strive. i know not how it was that i gained strength to do what i did on that day; but i felt that i was supported from on high, and as the speck of land that she had first discovered gradually enlarged itself as we approached it, my exertions to secure a speedy rescue for my companion from the jaws of death, continued to increase. the breeze remained fair and we scudded along at a spanking rate, the gannets keeping us company all the way--evidently bound to the same shore. i kept talking to mrs reichardt, and endeavouring to raise her spirits with the most cheering description of what we should do when we got ashore, for god would be sure to direct us to some place where we might without difficulty recover our strength. hitherto she had not spoken, but as soon as we began to distinguish the features of the shore we were approaching she unclosed her lips, and again the same triumphant smile played around them. "frank henniker, do you know that rock?" "no!--yes!--can it be possible? o what a gracious providence has been watching over us!" it was a rock of a remarkable shape that stood a short distance from the fishing-pool. it could not be otherwise, the gannets had led us to their old haunts. we were approaching our island. i looked at my companion--she was praying. i immediately joined with her in thanks-giving for the signal mercy that had been vouchsafed to us, and in little more than an hour had the priceless satisfaction of carrying her from the shore to the cottage, and then we carefully nursed ourselves till we recovered the effects of this dreadful cruise. chapter xlviii my numerous pursuits, as i stated in a preceding chapter obliging me to constant occupation, kept me from useless repining about my destiny, in being obliged to live so many years on this far-distant corner of the earth, i had long ceased to look for passing ships--i scarcely ever thought about them, and had given up all speculations about my grandfather's reception of me. i rarely went out to sea, except to fish, and never cared to trouble myself about anything beyond the limited space which had become my inheritance. the reader, then, may judge of my surprise when, one sultry day, i had been busily engaged for several hours cutting down a field of wheat, mrs reichardt came running to me with the astounding news that there was a ship off the island, and a boat full of people had just left her, and were rowing towards the rocks. i hastily took the glass she had brought with her, and as soon as i could get to a convenient position, threw myself on the ground on the rock, and reconnoitred through the glass the appearance of the new comers. i soon noticed that a part were well armed, which was not the case with the rest, for they were pinioned in such a manner that they could scarcely move hand or foot. we concealed ourselves by lying our lengths on the grass. as the boat approached, i could discern that the unarmed party belonged to a superior class of men, while many of the others had countenances that did not prepossess me at all in their favour. we lay hid in the long grass, from which we could command a view of our approaching visitors. "i think i understand this," whispered mrs reichardt. "there is mischief here." "had i not better run home and get arms?" i asked. "no," she replied, "you had better not. if we are able to do any good, we must do it by stratagem. let us watch their movements, and act with great caution." my companion's advice was, i saw, the wisest that could be pursued; and therefore we remained in our hiding places, narrowly observing our visitors as they approached. they entered the fishing-pool, and i could then distinctly not only see but hear them. to my extreme surprise, one of the first men who jumped out of the boat was john gough, who had brought mrs reichardt to the island. he looked older, but i recognised him in a moment, and so did my companion. her admonitory "hush!" kept me from betraying the place of our concealment--so great was my astonishment--having long believed him and all his lawless associates to have been lost at sea. he was well armed, and evidently possessed some authority; nevertheless, i thought i could detect an air of concern in his features, as he offered to help one of the captives out of the boat. the latter, however, regarded him with an air of disdain, and, though his hands were tied behind him, leaped ashore without assistance. he was a man of commanding stature, with a well bronzed face, and a look of great energy of character. he wore a band of gold lace round his cap, and had on duck trousers, and a blue jacket and waistcoat. "come, captain!" exclaimed john gough, "i bear you no malice. though you have been rather hard upon us, we won't leave you to starve." "he's a deuced deal better off than he desarves to be," cried a man from the boat, whom i at once recognised as the fellow on whom i had drawn my knife for hurting nero. "if we had made him walk the plank, as i proposed, i'm blowed if it wouldn't have been much more to the purpose than putting him on this here island, with lots o' prog, and everything calkilated to make him and his domineering officers comfortable for the rest of their days." "hold your tongue, you mutineering rascal," exclaimed the captain angrily. "a rope's end at the yard-arm will be your deserts before long." "thank ye kindly, captain," replied the fellow, touching his hat in mockery. "but you must be pleased to remember i ain't caught yet; and we means to have many a jolly cruise in your ship, and get no end o' treasure, before i shall think o' my latter end; and then i means to die like a christian, and repent o' my sins, and make a much more edifying example than i should exhibit dangling at the end of a rope." the men laughed, the captain muttered something about "pirates and mutineers," but the rest of the officers wisely held their tongues. i now noticed an elderly man of very respectable appearance, who was not pinioned like the rest. his hair was quite white, his complexion very pale, and he looked like one oppressed with deep sorrow and anxiety. he rose from his seat in the boat, and was assisted out by john gough. "i'm very sorry that we are obliged to leave you here, mr evelyn," said gough, "but you see, sir, we have no alternative. we couldn't keep you with us, for many reasons; and therefore we have been obliged to make you a sharer in the fate of our officers." "and werry painful this is to our feelings, sir, you may believe," said another of the mutineers mockingly. "i'm quite moloncholy as i thinks on it." the men again laughed; but the person so addressed walked to the side of the captain without making any observation. the other captives also left the boat in silence. they were eight in all, but four of them were evidently common seamen by their dress--the others were officers. all were well-made, strong men. "what a precious pretty colony you'll make, my hearties!" exclaimed one of the mutineers, jeeringly, as he helped to land a cask, and some other packages, that they had brought with them. "it's a thousand pities you ain't got no female associates, that you might marry, and settle, and bring up respectable families." "talking of women," cried the one who had first spoken, "i wonder what became of the one we left here so cleverly when we was wrecked at this here place six years ago." john gough looked uneasy at this inquiry, as if the recollection was not agreeable to him. "and the little savage," continued the fellow, "what was agoing to send his knife into my ribs for summat or other--i forget what. they must have died long ago, i ain't no doubt, as we unfortnitely left 'em nothin' to live upon." "no doubt they died hand in hand, like the babes in the wood," said another. i still observed john gough; he seemed distressed at the turn the conversation had taken. "now, mates," he said hurriedly, "let us return to the ship. we have done what we came to do." "i votes as we shall go and see arter the missionary's woman and the little savage," cried the fourth. "i should like, somehow, to see whether they be living or not, and a stroll ashore won't do any on us any harm." "i shall remain here till you return," said john gough; and he threw himself on the grass with his back towards me, and only a few yards from the place in which we were concealed. the rest, after making fast the boat, started off on an exploring expedition, in the direction of the old hut. chapter xlix the captives were grouped together, some sitting, and some standing. not one of them looked dejected at his fate; though i could see by their movements that they were impatient of the bonds that tied them. my attention was most frequently directed to the old gentleman who had been addressed as mr evelyn. notwithstanding the grief expressed in his countenance, it possessed an air of benevolence and kindness of heart that even his settled melancholy did not conceal. i could not understand why, but i felt a deeper interest for this person than for any of the others--a sort of yearning towards him, mingled with a desire to protect him from the malice of his enemies. almost as soon as they were gone, john gough beckoned to mr evelyn to sit down by his side. possibly this was done to prevent his assisting his companions to regain their liberty, as he, not being pinioned like the rest, might easily have done, and they might have overpowered their guard before his companions could come to his assistance. but gough was well armed, and the rest being without weapons of any kind, it was scarcely probable that they would have risked their lives in so desperate an attempt. mr evelyn came and quietly sat himself down in the place indicated. i observed him with increasing interest, and singular to relate, the more i gazed on his venerable face, the more strongly i felt assured that i had seen it before. this of course was impossible, nevertheless, the fancy took possession of me, and i experienced a strange sensation of pleasure as i watched the changes his features underwent. "john gough, i am sorry to see you mixed up in this miserable business," said he, mildly addressing his companion. the other did not answer, and as his back was turned towards me i could not observe the effect the observation had upon him. "the men who have left us i know to be bad men," continued the speaker; "i expect nothing but wickedness from them. but you i am aware have been better brought up. your responsibility therefore becomes the greater in assisting them in their villainy." "you had better not let them hear you, mr evelyn," replied gough, at last, in something like a surly tone; "i would not answer for the consequences." "those i do not fear," the other answered. "the results of this transaction can make very little difference to a man on the verge of the grave, who has outlived all his relatives, and has nothing left to fall back upon but the memory of his misfortunes: but to one in the prime of life like yourself, who can boast of friends and relatives who feel an interest in your good name, these results must be serious indeed. what must be the feelings of your respectable father when he learns that you have joined a gang of pirates; how intense must be the grief of your amiable mother when she hears that you have paid the penalty that must sooner or later overtake you for embracing so lawless a life." "come, mr evelyn," exclaimed gough, though with a tremulousness in his voice that betrayed the state of his feelings, "you have no right to preach to me. i have done as much as i could for you all. the men would have made short work with you, if i had not interposed, and pointed out to them this uninhabited island." "where it seems you left a poor woman to be starved to death," continued mr evelyn. "it was no fault of mine," replied the man; "i did all i could to prevent it." "it would have been more manly if you had remained with her on this rock, and left your cowardly associates to take their selfish course. but you are weak and irresolute, john gough; too easily persuaded into evil, too slow to follow the impulses of good. the murder of that poor woman is as much your deed as if you had blown her brains out before you abandoned her. indeed i do not know but what the latter would have been the less criminal." john gough made no answer. i do not think, however, his mind was quite easy under this accusation, for he seemed restless, and kept playing with his pistols, with his eyes cast down. "your complicity in this mutiny, too, john gough, is equally inexcusable," continued mr evelyn. "it was your duty to have stood by captain manvers and his officers, by which you would have earned their eternal gratitude, and a handsome provision from the owners of the vessel." "it's no use talking of these things now, mr evelyn," said gough, hurriedly. "i have taken my course. it is too late to turn back. would to god," he added, dashing his hand violently against his brow, "i had had nothing to do with it." "it is never too late, john gough, to do good," here cried out mrs reichardt, as she rose from her place of concealment, as much to my surprise as that of all who could observe her. but nothing could equal the astonishment of gough when he first caught sight of her features;--he sprang to his feet, leaving his pistols on the ground, and clasping his hands together, exclaimed, "thank god, she is safe!" "yes," she replied, approaching him and taking his hand kindly. "by an interposition of providence, you are saved from the guilt of one murder. in the name of that god who has so signally preserved you against yourself, i command you to abandon your present wicked designs." the man hesitated, but it seemed as if he could not take his gaze from her face, and it was evident that her presence exerted an extraordinary influence over him. in the meantime i had made my appearance on the scene, not less to the astonishment of the lookers-on; and my first act was to take possession of the pair of pistols that gough had left on the ground; my next to hurry to the group of captives, who had been regarding us, in a state as it were of perfect bewilderment, and with my american knife to cut their bonds. "i will do whatever you think proper," said john gough. "believe me i have been reluctantly led into this, and joined the mutiny knowing that i should have been murdered if i did not." "you must endeavour to make what amends are in your power," continued mrs reichardt, "by assisting your officers in recovering possession of the ship." "i will gladly assist in whatever they may think feasible," said the man. "but we must first secure the desperate fellows who have just left us, and as we are but poorly provided with weapons, that of itself will be a service of no slight danger. to get possession of the ship i am afraid will be still more hazardous; but you shall find me in the front of every danger." here captain manvers and the others came up to where john gough and mrs reichardt were conversing; he heard gough's last speech, and he was going to say something, when i interposed by stating that there was no time now for explanations, for in a few minutes the fellows who had gone to the hut would return, and the only way to prepare for them was for the whole party to go to our house, to which mrs reichardt would lead them, where they would find plenty of arms and ammunition. in the meantime i would keep watch, and observe their motions, and by firing one of the pistols would signal to them if i was in any danger. lastly, i recommended that the oars should be removed from the boat, to prevent the mutineers making their escape to the ship. my appearance and discourse attracted general attention. i particularly noticed that mr evelyn started as soon as he caught sight of me, and appeared to observe me with singular carefulness; but that, no doubt, arose from my unexpected address, and the strange way in which i had presented myself before him. the captain approving of my proposal, the whole party, after taking away the boat's oars, moved off rapidly in the direction of the house. i again concealed myself in the grass, and waited the return of the mutineers. they did not remain away long. i could hear them approaching, for they laughed and shouted as they went along loud enough to be heard at a considerable distance. when they began to descend the rocks, they passed so close to me, that i could hear every word that was spoken. "well, flesh is grass, as the parson says," said jack; "they must have died sooner or later, if we hadn't parted company with so little ceremony. but, hallo! my eyes and limbs! where's john gough? where's the captain? where's all on 'em?" it is impossible to express the astonishment of the men on reaching the spot where they had so lately left their prisoners, and discovering that not a trace of them was to be seen. at first they imagined that they had escaped in the boat, but as soon as they saw that the boat was safe, they gave up that idea. then they fancied john gough had taken the prisoners to stroll a little distance inland, and they began to shout as loud as their lungs would permit them. receiving no response, they uttered many strange ejaculations, which i could not then understand, but which i have since learned were profane oaths; and seemed at a loss what to do, whether to wander about the island in search of them, or return to their ship. only one chanced to be for the former, and the others overruled him, not thinking it was worth their while to take so much trouble as to go rambling about in a strange place. they seemed bent on taking to the boat, when one of them suggested they might get into a scrape if they returned without their companion. they finally resolved on sitting down and waiting his return. presently, one complained he was very sleepy, as he had been too busy mutineering to turn into his hammock the previous night, and the others acknowledged they also felt an equal want of rest from the same cause. each began to yawn. they laid themselves at their full length along the grass, and in a short time i could hear by their snoring, as jackson used to do, that they were asleep. i now crept stealthily towards them on my hands and knees, and they were in such a profound sleep, that i had no difficulty whatever in removing the pistols from their belts. i had just succeeded in this, when i beheld the captain, and john gough, and mr evelyn, and all the rest of them, well armed with guns and pistols, approaching the place where we were. in a few minutes afterwards the mutineers were made prisoners, without their having an opportunity of making the slightest resistance. i was much complimented by the captain for the dexterity with which i had disarmed them; but while i was in conversation with him, it is impossible to express the surprise i felt, on seeing mr evelyn suddenly rush towards me from the side of mrs reichardt, with whom he had been talking, and, embracing me with the most moving demonstrations of affection, claim me as his grandson. the mystery was soon explained. mr evelyn had met so many losses in business as a merchant, that he took the opportunity of a son of his old clerk--who had become a captain of a fine ship, employed in the south american trade--being about to proceed on a trading voyage to that part of the world, to sail in his vessel with a consignment of goods for the south american market. he had also another object, which was to inquire after the fate of his long-lost daughter and son-in-law, of whom he had received no certain intelligence, since the latter took ship with the diamonds he had purchased to return home. the vessel in which they sailed had never been heard of since; and mr evelyn had long given up all hopes of seeing either of them again, or the valuable property with which they had been entrusted. on their going to the house, he had asked mrs reichardt my name, stating that i so strongly resembled a very dear friend of his, he believed had perished many years ago, that he felt quite an interest in me. the answer he received led to a series of the most earnest inquiries, and mrs reichardt satisfied him on every point, showed him all the property that had formerly been in the possession of mrs henniker and her husband: related jackson's story, and convinced him, that though he had lost the daughter for whom he had mourned so long, her representative existed in the little savage, who was saving him from the fate for which he had been preserved by the mutineers. i have only to add, that i had the happiness of restoring to my grandfather the diamonds i had obtained from jackson, which were no doubt very welcome to him, for they not only restored him to affluence, but made him one of the richest merchants upon change. i was also instrumental in obtaining for the captain the command of his ship, and of restoring discipline amongst the crew. the ringleaders of the mutiny were thrown into irons, and taken home for trial; this resulted in one or two of them being hanged by way of example, and these happened to be the men who so barbarously deserted mrs reichardt. she accompanied me to england in captain manvers's vessel, for when he heard of the obligations i owed her, my grandfather decided that she should remain with us as long as she lived. we however did not leave the island until we had shown my grandfather, the captain, and his officers, what we had effected during our stay, and every one was surprised that we could have produced a flourishing farm upon a barren rock. i did not fail to show the places where i had had my fight with the python, and where i had been pursued by the sharks, and my narrative of both incidents seemed to astonish my hearers exceedingly. i must not forget to add, that the day before our departure, john gough came to me privately, and requested my good offices with the captain, that he might be left on the island. he had become a very different character to what he had previously been; and as there could be no question that the repentance he assumed was sincere, i said all i could for him. my recommendation was successful, and i transferred to john gough all my farm, farming stock, and agricultural implements; moreover, promised to send him whatever he might further require to make his position comfortable. he expressed great gratitude, but desired nothing; only that his family might know that he was well off, and was not likely to return. perhaps john gough did not like the risk he ran of being tried for mutiny, or was averse to sailing with his former comrades; but whatever was the cause of his resolution, it is certain that he remained behind when the ship left the island, and may be there to this hour for all i know to the contrary. we made a quick voyage to england, and as my readers will no doubt be glad to hear, the little savage landed safely at plymouth, and was soon cordially welcomed to his grandfather's house in london. the end. everyman's library edited by ernest rhys for young people abandoned by jules verne fifty illustrations the publishers of _everyman's library_ will be pleased to send freely to all applicants a list of the published and projected volumes to be comprised under the following twelve headings: travel science fiction theology & philosophy history classical for young people essays oratory poetry & drama biography romance in two styles of binding, cloth, flat back, coloured top, and leather, round corners, gilt top. london: j. m. dent & co. new york: e. p. dutton & co. [illustration: this is fairy gold, boy; and 'twill prove so. shakespeare.] [illustration: abandoned by jules verne _translated from the french_ by w. h. g. kingston london: published by j. m. dent & co and in new york by e. p. dutton & co] introduction the present romance, the second in the mysterious island triad, was originally issued in paris with the title of _l'abandonné_. jules verne's list of stories already ran then to some twenty volumes--a number which has since grown to almost dumasien proportions. _l'abandonné_, like its two companion tales, ran its course as a serial through the _magasin illustré_ of education and recreation, before its issue as a boy's story-book. its success in both forms seems to have established a record in the race for popularity and a circulation in both the french and english fields of current literature. the present book was translated into english by the late w. h. g. kingston; and is printed in everyman's library by special exclusive arrangement with messrs. sampson low, marston & co., ltd. the list of tales and favourite romances by jules verne includes the following:-- five weeks in a balloon, ; a journey to the centre of the earth, translated by j. v., ; tr. f. a. malleson, ; twenty thousand leagues under the sea, ; tr. h. frith, ; from the earth to the moon, and a trip round it, tr. q. mercier and e. g. king, ; the english at the north pole, ; meridiana: adventures of three english and three russians, ; dr. ox's experiment and other stories, ; a floating city, ; the blockade runners, ; around the world in eighty days, tr. g. m. towle and n. d'anvers, , ; tr. h. frith, ; the fur country, or seventy degrees north latitude, tr. n. d'anvers, ; tr h. frith, ; the mysterious island, tr. w. h. g. kingston, ; the survivors of the _chancellor_: diary of j. r. kazallon, tr e. frewer, ; martin paz, tr. e. frewer, ; field of ice, ; child of the cavern, tr. w. h. g. kingston, , michael strogoff, tr. w. h. g. kingston, ; a voyage round the world, ; hector senvadac, tr. e. frewer, ; dick sands, the boy captain, tr. e. frewer, ; celebrated travels and travellers: the great navigators of the eighteenth century, tr. dora leigh, n. d'anvers, etc., - ; tribulations of a chinaman, tr. e. frewer, ; the begum's fortune, tr. w. h. g. kingston, ; the steam house, tr. a. d. kingston, ; the giant raft, w. j. gordon, ; godfrey morgan, ; the green ray, tr. m. de hauteville, ; the vanished diamond, ; the archipelago on fire, ; mathias sandorf, ; kérabân the inflexible, ; the lottery ticket, ; clipper of the clouds, ; the flight to france, or memoirs of a dragoon, ; north against south: story of the american civil war, ; adrift in the pacific, ; cesar cacabel, ; the purchase of the north pole, ; a family without a name, ; mistress branican, ; claudius bombarnac, ; foundling mick, ; clovis dardentor, ; for the flag, tr. mrs. c. hoey, ; an antarctic mystery, . jules verne's works are published in an authorised and illustrated edition by messrs. sampson low, marston & co., ltd. contents chapter i page conversation on the subject of the bullet -- construction of a canoe -- hunting -- at the top of a kauri -- nothing to attest the presence of man -- neb and herbert's prize -- turning a turtle -- the turtle disappears -- cyrus harding's explanation chapter ii first trial of the canoe -- a wreck on the coast -- towing -- flotsam point -- inventory of the case: tools, weapons, instruments, clothes, books, utensils -- what pencroft misses -- the gospel -- a verse from the sacred book chapter iii the start -- the rising tide -- elms and different plants -- the jacamar -- aspect of the forest -- gigantic eucalypti -- the reason they are called "fever trees" -- troops of monkeys -- a waterfall -- the night encampment chapter iv journey to the coast -- troops of monkeys -- a new river -- the reason the tide was not felt -- a woody shore -- reptile promontory -- herbert envies gideon spilett -- explosion of bamboos chapter v proposal to return by the southern shore -- configuration of the coast -- searching for the supposed wreck -- a wreck in the air -- discovery of a small natural port -- at midnight on the banks of the mercy -- the canoe adrift chapter vi pencroft's halloos -- a night in the chimneys -- herbert's arrows -- the captain's project -- an unexpected explanation -- what has happened in granite house -- how a new servant enters the service of the colonists chapter vii plans -- a bridge over the mercy -- mode adopted for making an island of prospect heights -- the drawbridge -- harvest -- the stream -- the poultry-yard -- a pigeon-house -- the two onagas -- the cart -- excursion to port balloon chapter viii linen -- shoes of seal-leather -- manufacture of pyroxyle -- gardening -- fishing -- turtle-eggs -- improvement of master jup -- the corral -- musmon hunt -- new animal and vegetable possessions -- recollections of their native land chapter ix bad weather -- the hydraulic lift -- manufacture of glass-ware -- the bread-tree -- frequent visits to the corral -- increase of the flock -- the reporter's question -- exact position of lincoln island -- pencroft's proposal chapter x boat-building -- second crop of corn -- hunting koalas -- a new plant, more pleasant than useful -- whale in sight -- a harpoon from the vineyard -- cutting up the whale -- use for the bones -- end of the month of may -- pencroft has nothing left to wish for chapter xi winter -- felling wood -- the mill -- pencroft's fixed idea -- the bones -- to what use an albatross may be put -- fuel for the future -- top and jup -- storms -- damage to the poultry-yard -- excursion to the marsh -- cyrus harding alone -- exploring the well chapter xii the rigging of the vessel -- an attack from foxes -- jup wounded -- jup cured -- completion of the boat -- pencroft's triumph -- the _bonadventure's_ trial trip to the south of the island -- an unexpected document chapter xiii departure decided upon -- conjectures -- preparations -- the three passengers -- first night -- second night -- tabor island -- searching the shore -- searching the wood -- no one -- animals -- plants -- a dwelling -- deserted chapter xiv the inventory -- night -- a few letters -- continuation of the search -- plants and animals -- herbert in great danger -- on board -- the departure -- bad weather -- a gleam of reason -- lost on the sea -- a timely light chapter xv the return -- discussion -- cyrus harding and the stranger -- port balloon -- the engineer's devotion -- a touching incident -- tears flow chapter xvi a mystery to be cleared up -- the stranger's first words -- twelve years on the islet -- avowal which escapes him -- the disappearance -- cyrus harding's confidence -- construction of a mill -- the first bread -- an act of devotion -- honest hands chapter xvii still alone -- the stranger's request -- the farm established at the corral -- twelve years ago -- the boatswain's mate of the _britannia_ -- left on tabor island -- cyrus harding's hand -- the mysterious document chapter xviii conversation -- cyrus harding and gideon spilett -- an idea of the engineer's -- the electric telegraph -- the wires -- the battery -- the alphabet -- fine season -- prosperity of the colony -- photography -- an appearance of snow -- two years on lincoln island chapter xix recollections of their native land -- probable future -- project for surveying the coasts of the island -- departure on the th of april -- sea-view of reptile end -- the basaltic rocks of the western coast -- bad weather -- night comes on -- new incident chapter xx a night at sea -- shark gulf -- confidences -- preparations for winter -- forwardness of the bad season -- severe cold -- work in the interior -- in six months -- a photographic negative -- unexpected incident list of illustrations page turning a turtle flotsam and jetsam unpacking the marvellous chest pencroft's superstition is it tobacco? the halt for breakfast denizens of the forest the sea at that moment a shot struck the jaguar between the eyes and it fell dead "now there's something to explain the bullet!" exclaimed pencroft a wreck in the air there was no longer a ladder! the invaders of granite house capturing the orang engaging the new servant building the bridge pencroft's scarecrows the settlers' new shirts jup passed most of his time in the kitchen, trying to imitate neb pencroft to the rescue the glass-blowers the verandah on the edge of prospect heights the dockyard a valuable prize pencroft has nothing left to wish for the messenger winter evenings in granite house he saw nothing suspicious top visiting the invalid the trial trip "luff, pencroft, luff!" the departure nearing the island a hut! herbert in danger a light! a light! "poor fellow," murmured the engineer the experiment "who are you?" he asked in a hollow voice the stranger now for a good wind he seized the jaguar's throat with one powerful hand the stranger's story "here is my hand," said the engineer the engineer at work jup sitting for his portrait the snowy sheet arose and dispersed in the air another mystery returning from a sporting excursion the photographic negative the abandoned chapter i conversation on the subject of the bullet -- construction of a canoe -- hunting -- at the top of a kauri -- nothing to attest the presence of man -- neb and herbert's prize -- turning a turtle -- the turtle disappears -- cyrus harding's explanation. it was now exactly seven months since the balloon voyagers had been thrown on lincoln island. during that time, notwithstanding the researches they had made, no human being had been discovered. no smoke even had betrayed the presence of man on the surface of the island. no vestiges of his handiwork showed that either at an early or at a late period had man lived there. not only did it now appear to be uninhabited by any but themselves, but the colonists were compelled to believe that it never had been inhabited. and now, all this scaffolding of reasonings fell before a simple ball of metal, found in the body of an inoffensive rodent! in fact, this bullet must have issued from a firearm, and who but a human being could have used such a weapon? when pencroft had placed the bullet on the table, his companions looked at it with intense astonishment. all the consequences likely to result from this incident, notwithstanding its apparent insignificance, immediately took possession of their minds. the sudden apparition of a supernatural being could not have startled them more completely. cyrus harding did not hesitate to give utterance to the suggestions which this fact, at once surprising and unexpected, could not fail to raise in his mind. he took the bullet, turned it over and over, rolled it between his finger and thumb; then, turning to pencroft, he asked,-- "are you sure that the peccary wounded by this bullet was not more than three months old?" "not more, captain," replied pencroft. "it was still sucking its mother when i found it in the trap." "well," said the engineer, "that proves that within three months a gun-shot was fired in lincoln island." "and that a bullet," added gideon spilett, "wounded, though not mortally, this little animal." "that is unquestionable," said cyrus harding, "and these are the deductions which must be drawn from this incident: that the island was inhabited before our arrival, or that men have landed here within three months. did these men arrive here voluntarily or involuntarily, by disembarking on the shore or by being wrecked? this point can only be cleared up later. as to what they were, europeans or malays, enemies or friends of our race, we cannot possibly guess; and if they still inhabit the island, or if they have left it, we know not. but these questions are of too much importance to be allowed to remain long unsettled." "no! a hundred times no! a thousand times no!" cried the sailor, springing up from the table. "there are no other men than ourselves on lincoln island! by my faith! the island isn't large, and if it had been inhabited, we should have seen some of the inhabitants long before this!" "in fact, the contrary would be very astonishing," said herbert. "but it would be much more astonishing, i should think," observed the reporter, "that this peccary should have been born with a bullet in its inside!" "at least," said neb seriously, "if pencroft has not had--" "look here, neb," burst out pencroft. "do you think i could have a bullet in my jaw for five or six months without finding it out? where could it be hidden?" he asked opening his mouth to show the two-and-thirty teeth with which it was furnished. "look well, neb, and if you find one hollow tooth in this set, i will let you pull out half a dozen!" "neb's supposition is certainly inadmissible," replied harding, who, notwithstanding the gravity of his thoughts, could not restrain a smile. "it is certain that a gun has been fired in the island, within three months at most. but i am inclined to think that the people who landed on this coast were only here a very short time ago, or that they just touched here; for if, when we surveyed the island from the summit of mount franklin, it had been inhabited, we should have seen them or we should have been seen ourselves. it is therefore probable that within only a few weeks castaways have been thrown by a storm on some part of the coast. however that may be, it is of consequence to us to have this point settled." "i think that we should act with caution," said the reporter. "such is my advice," replied cyrus harding, "for it is to be feared that malay pirates have landed on the island!" "captain," asked the sailor, "would it not be a good plan, before setting out, to build a canoe in which we could either ascend the river, or, if we liked, coast round the island? it will not do to be unprovided." "your idea is good, pencroft," replied the engineer, "but we cannot wait for that. it would take at least a month to build a boat." "yes, a real boat," replied the sailor; "but we do not want one for a sea voyage, and in five days at the most, i will undertake to construct a canoe fit to navigate the mercy." "five days," cried neb, "to build a boat?" "yes, neb; a boat in the indian fashion." "of wood?" asked the negro, looking still unconvinced. "of wood," replied pencroft, "or rather of bark. i repeat, captain, that in five days the work will be finished!" "in five days, then, be it," replied the engineer. "but till that time we must be very watchful," said herbert. "very watchful indeed, my friends," replied harding; "and i beg you to confine your hunting excursions to the neighbourhood of granite house." the dinner ended less gaily than pencroft had hoped. so, then, the island was, or had been, inhabited by others than the settlers. proved as it was by the incident of the bullet, it was hereafter an unquestionable fact, and such a discovery could not but cause great uneasiness amongst the colonists. cyrus harding and gideon spilett, before sleeping, conversed long about the matter. they asked themselves if by chance this incident might not have some connection with the inexplicable way in which the engineer had been saved, and the other peculiar circumstances which had struck them at different times. however cyrus harding, after having discussed the pros and cons of the question, ended by saying,-- "in short, would you like to know my opinion, my dear spilett?" "yes, cyrus." "well, then, it is this: however minutely we explore the island, we shall find nothing." the next day pencroft set to work. he did not mean to build a boat with boards and planking, but simply a flat-bottomed canoe, which would be well suited for navigating the mercy--above all, for approaching its source, where the water would naturally be shallow. pieces of bark, fastened one to the other, would form a light boat; and in case of natural obstacles, which would render a portage necessary, it would be easily carried. pencroft intended to secure the pieces of bark by means of nails, to insure the canoe being water-tight. it was first necessary to select the trees which would afford a strong and supple bark for the work. now the last storm had brought down a number of large birch trees, the bark of which would be perfectly suited for their purpose. some of these trees lay on the ground, and they had only to be barked, which was the most difficult thing of all, owing to the imperfect tools which the settlers possessed. however, they overcame all difficulties. whilst the sailor, seconded by the engineer, thus occupied himself without losing an hour, gideon spilett and herbert were not idle. they were made purveyors to the colony. the reporter could not but admire the boy, who had acquired great skill in handling the bow and spear. herbert also showed great courage and much of that presence of mind which may justly be called "the reasoning of bravery." these two companions of the chase, remembering cyrus harding's recommendations, did not go beyond a radius of two miles round granite house; but the borders of the forest furnished a sufficient tribute of agouties, capybaras, kangaroos, peccaries, etc.; and if the result from the traps was less than during the cold, still the warren yielded its accustomed quota, which might have fed all the colony in lincoln island. often during these excursions, herbert talked with gideon spilett on the incident of the bullet, and the deductions which the engineer drew from it, and one day--it was the th of october--he said,-- "but, mr. spilett, do you not think it very extraordinary that, if any castaways have landed on the island, they have not yet shown themselves near granite house?" "very astonishing if they are still here," replied the reporter, "but not astonishing at all if they are here no longer!" "so you think that these people have already quitted the island?" returned herbert. "it is more than probable, my boy; for if their stay was prolonged, and above all, if they were still here, some accident would have at last betrayed their presence." "but if they were able to go away," observed the lad, "they could not have been castaways." "no, herbert; or, at least, they were what might be called provisional castaways. it is very possible that a storm may have driven them to the island without destroying their vessel, and that, the storm over, they went away again." "i must acknowledge one thing," said herbert, "it is that captain harding appears rather to fear than desire the presence of human beings on our island." "in short," responded the reporter, "there are only malays who frequent these seas, and those fellows are ruffians which it is best to avoid." "it is not impossible, mr. spilett," said herbert, "that some day or other we may find traces of their landing." "i do not say no, my boy. a deserted camp, the ashes of a fire, would put us on the track, and this is what we will look for in our next expedition." the day on which the hunters spoke thus, they were in a part of the forest near the mercy, remarkable for its beautiful trees. there, among others, rose, to a height of nearly feet above the ground, some of those superb coniferæ, to which, in new zealand, the natives give the name of kauris. "i have an idea, mr. spilett," said herbert. "if i were to climb to the top of one of these kauris, i could survey the country for an immense distance round." "the idea is good," replied the reporter; "but could you climb to the top of those giants?" "i can at least try," replied herbert. the light and active boy then sprang on the first branches, the arrangement of which made the ascent of the kauri easy, and in a few minutes he arrived at the summit, which emerged from the immense plain of verdure. from this elevated situation his gaze extended over all the southern portion of the island, from claw cape on the south-east, to reptile end on the south-west. to the north-west rose mount franklin, which concealed a great part of the horizon. but herbert, from the height of his observatory, could examine all the yet unknown portion of the island which might have given shelter to the strangers whose presence they suspected. the lad looked attentively. there was nothing in sight on the sea, not a sail, neither on the horizon nor near the island. however, as the bank of trees hid the shore, it was possible that a vessel, especially if deprived of her masts, might lie close to the land and thus be invisible to herbert. neither in the forests of the far west was anything to be seen. the wood formed an impenetrable screen, measuring several square miles, without a break or an opening. it was impossible even to follow the course of the mercy, or to ascertain in what part of the mountain it took its source. perhaps other creeks also ran towards the west, but they could not be seen. but at last, if all indication of an encampment escaped herbert's sight, could he not even catch a glimpse of smoke, the faintest trace of which would be easily discernible in the pure atmosphere? for an instant herbert thought he could perceive a slight smoke in the west, but a more attentive examination showed that he was mistaken. he strained his eyes in every direction, and his sight was excellent. no, decidedly there was nothing there. herbert descended to the foot of the kauri, and the two sportsmen returned to granite house. there cyrus harding listened to the lad's account, shook his head and said nothing. it was very evident that no decided opinion could be pronounced on this question until after a complete exploration of the island. two days after--the th of october--another incident occurred, for which an explanation was again required. whilst strolling along the shore about two miles from granite house, herbert and neb were fortunate enough to capture a magnificent specimen of the order of chelonia. it was a turtle of the species midas, the edible green turtle, so called from the colour both of its shell and fat. herbert caught sight of this turtle as it was crawling among the rocks to reach the sea. "help, neb, help!" he cried. neb ran up. "what a fine animal!" said neb; "but how are we to catch it?" "nothing is easier, neb," replied herbert. "we have only to turn the turtle on its back, and it cannot possibly get away. take your spear and do as i do." the reptile, aware of danger, had retired between its carapace and plastron. they no longer saw its head or feet, and it was motionless as a rock. herbert and neb then drove their sticks underneath the animal, and by their united efforts managed without difficulty to turn it on its back. the turtle, which was three feet in length, would have weighed at least four hundred pounds. "capital!" cried neb; "this is something which will rejoice friend pencroft's heart." in fact, the heart of friend pencroft could not fail to be rejoiced, for the flesh of the turtle, which feeds on wrack-grass, is extremely savoury. at this moment the creature's head could be seen, which was small, flat, but widened behind by the large temporal fossæ hidden under the long roof. "and now, what shall we do with our prize?" said neb. "we can't drag it to granite house!" "leave it here, since it cannot turn over," replied herbert, "and we will come back with the cart to fetch it." "that is the best plan." however, for greater precaution, herbert took the trouble, which neb deemed superfluous, to wedge up the animal with great stones, after which the two hunters returned to granite house, following the beach, which the tide had left uncovered. herbert, wishing to surprise pencroft, said nothing about the "superb specimen of a chelonian" which they had turned over on the sand, but, two hours later, he and neb returned with the cart to the place where they had left it. the "superb specimen of a chelonian" was no longer there! neb and herbert stared at each other first, then they stared about them. it was just at this spot that the turtle had been left. the lad even found the stones which he had used, and therefore he was certain of not being mistaken. "well!" said neb, "these beasts can turn themselves over, then?" "it appears so," replied herbert, who could not understand it at all, and was gazing at the stones scattered on the sand. "well, pencroft will be disgusted!" "and captain harding will perhaps be very perplexed how to explain this disappearance" thought herbert. "look here," said neb, who wished to hide his ill-luck, "we won't speak about it." "on the contrary, neb we must speak about it," replied herbert. and the two, taking the cart, which there was now no use for, returned to granite house. arrived at the dockyard, where the engineer and the sailor were working together herbert recounted what had happened. "oh! the stupids!" cried the sailor, "to have let at least fifty meals escape!" "but, pencroft," replied neb, "it wasn't our fault that the beast got away, as i tell you, we had turned it over on its back!" "then you didn't turn it over enough!" returned the obstinate sailor. [illustration: turning a turtle] "not enough!" cried herbert. and he told how he had taken care to wedge up the turtle with stones. "it is a miracle, then!" replied pencroft. "i thought, captain," said herbert, "that turtles, once placed on their backs, could not regain their feet, especially when they are of a large size?" "that is true, my boy," replied cyrus harding. "then how did it manage?" "at what distance from the sea did you leave this turtle?" asked the engineer, who, having suspended his work, was reflecting on this incident. "fifteen feet at the most," replied herbert. "and the tide was low at the time?" "yes, captain." "well," replied the engineer, "what the turtle could not do on the sand it might have been able to do in the water. it turned over when the tide overtook it, and then quietly returned to the deep sea." "oh! what stupids we were!" cried neb. "that is precisely what i had the honour of telling you before!" returned the sailor. cyrus harding had given this explanation, which, no doubt, was admissible. but was he himself convinced of the accuracy of this explanation? it cannot be said that he was. chapter ii first trial of the canoe -- a wreck on the coast -- towing -- flotsam point -- inventory of the case: tools, weapons, instruments, clothes, books, utensils -- what pencroft misses -- the gospel -- a verse from the sacred book. on the th of october the bark canoe was entirely finished. pencroft had kept his promise, and a light boat, the shell of which was joined together by the flexible twigs of the crejimba, had been constructed in five days. a seat in the stern, a second seat in the middle to preserve the equilibrium, a third seat in the bows, rowlocks for the two oars, a scull to steer with, completed the little craft, which was twelve feet long, and did not weigh more than pounds. the operation of launching it was extremely simple. the canoe was carried to the beach and laid on the sand before granite house, and the rising tide floated it. pencroft, who leapt in directly, manoeuvred it with the scull and declared it to be just the thing for the purpose to which they wished to put it. "hurrah!" cried the sailor, who did not disdain to celebrate thus his own triumph. "with this we could go round--" "the world?" asked gideon spilett. "no, the island. some stones for ballast, a mast, and a sail, which the captain will make for us some day, and we shall go splendidly! well, captain--and you, mr. spilett; and you, herbert; and you, neb--aren't you coming to try our new vessel? come along! we must see if it will carry all five of us!" this was certainly a trial which ought to be made. pencroft soon brought the canoe to the shore by a narrow passage among the rocks, and it was agreed that they should make a trial of the boat that day by following the shore as far as the first point at which the rocks of the south ended. as they embarked, neb cried,-- "but your boat leaks rather, pencroft." "that's nothing, neb," replied the sailor; "the wood will get seasoned. in two days there won't be a single leak, and our boat will have no more water in her than there is in the stomach of a drunkard. jump in!" they were soon all seated, and pencroft shoved off. the weather was magnificent, the sea as calm as if its waters were contained within the narrow limits of a lake. thus the boat could proceed with as much security as if it was ascending the tranquil current of the mercy. neb took one of the oars, herbert the other, and pencroft remained in the stern in order to use the skull. the sailor first crossed the channel, and steered close to the southern point of the islet. a light breeze blew from the south. no roughness was found either in the channel or the green sea. a long swell, which the canoe scarcely felt, as it was heavily laden, rolled regularly over the surface of the water. they pulled out about half a mile distant from the shore, that they might have a good view of mount franklin. pencroft afterwards returned towards the mouth of the river. the boat then skirted the shore, which, extending to the extreme point, hid all tadorn's fens. this point, of which the distance was increased by the irregularity of the coast, was nearly three miles from the mercy. the settlers resolved to go to its extremity, and only go beyond it as much as was necessary to take a rapid survey of the coast as far as claw cape. the canoe followed the windings of the shore, avoiding the rocks which fringed it, and which the rising tide began to cover. the cliff gradually sloped away from the mouth of the river to the point. this was formed of granite rocks, capriciously distributed, very different from the cliff at prospect heights, and of an extremely wild aspect. it might have been said that an immense cartload of rocks had been emptied out there. there was no vegetation on this sharp promontory, which projected two miles from the forest, and it thus represented a giant's arm stretched out from a leafy sleeve. the canoe, impelled by the two oars, advanced without difficulty. gideon spilett, pencil in one hand and note-book in the other, sketched the coast in bold strokes. neb, herbert, and pencroft chatted, whilst examining this part of their domain, which was new to them, and, in proportion as the canoe proceeded towards the south, the two mandible capes appeared to move, and surround union bay more closely. as to cyrus harding, he did not speak; he simply gazed, and by the mistrust which his look expressed, it appeared that he was examining some strange country. in the meanwhile, after a voyage of three quarters of an hour, the canoe reached the extremity of the point, and pencroft was preparing to return, when herbert, rising, pointed to a black object, saying,-- "what do i see down there on the beach?" all eyes turned towards the point indicated. "why," said the reporter, "there is something. it looks like part of a wreck half buried in the sand." "ah!" cried pencroft, "i see what it is!" "what?" asked neb. "barrels, barrels, which perhaps are full," replied the sailor. "pull to the shore, pencroft!" said cyrus. a few strokes of the oar brought the canoe into a little creek, and its passengers leapt on shore. pencroft was not mistaken. two barrels were there, half buried in the sand, but still firmly attached to a large chest, which, sustained by them, had floated to the moment when it stranded on the beach. "there has been a wreck, then, in some part of the island," said herbert. "evidently," replied spilett. "but what's in this chest?" cried pencroft, with very natural impatience. "what's in this chest? it is shut up, and nothing to open it with! well, perhaps a stone--" and the sailor, raising a heavy block, was about to break in one of the sides of the chest, when the engineer arrested his hand. "pencroft," said he, "can you restrain your impatience for one hour only?" "but, captain, just think! perhaps there is everything we want in there!" "we shall find that out, pencroft," replied the engineer; "but trust to me, and do not break the chest, which may be useful to us. we must convey it to granite house, where we can open it easily and without breaking it. it is quite prepared for a voyage, and, since it has floated here, it may just as well float to the mouth of the river." "you are right, captain, and i was wrong, as usual," replied the sailor. the engineer's advice was good. in fact, the canoe probably would not have been able to contain the articles possibly enclosed in the chest, which doubtless was heavy, since two empty barrels were required to buoy it up. it was, therefore, much better to tow it to the beach at granite house. and now, whence had this chest come? that was the important question cyrus harding and his companions looked attentively around them, and examined the shore for several hundred steps. no other articles or pieces of wreck could be found. herbert and neb climbed a high rock to survey the sea, but there was nothing in sight--neither a dismasted vessel nor a ship under sail. however, there was no doubt that there had been a wreck perhaps this incident was connected with that of the bullet? perhaps strangers had landed on another part of the island? perhaps they were still there? but the thought which came naturally to the settlers was, that these strangers could not be malay pirates, for the chest was evidently of american or european make. all the party returned to the chest, which was of an unusually large size. it was made of oak wood, very carefully closed and covered with a thick hide, which was secured by copper nails. the two great barrels, hermetically sealed, but which sounded hollow and empty, were fastened to its sides by strong ropes knotted with a skill which pencroft directly pronounced sailors alone could exhibit. it appeared to be in a perfect state of preservation, which was explained by the fact that it had stranded on a sandy beach, and not among rocks. they had no doubt whatever, on examining it carefully, that it had not been long in the water, and that its arrival on this coast was recent. the water did not appear to have penetrated to the inside, and the articles which it contained were no doubt uninjured. [illustration: flotsam and jetsam] it was evident that this chest had been thrown overboard from some dismasted vessel driven towards the island, and that, in the hope that it would reach the land, where they might afterwards find it, the passengers had taken the precaution to buoy it up by means of this floating apparatus. "we will tow this chest to granite house," said the engineer, "where we can make an inventory of its contents, then, if we discover any of the survivors from the supposed wreck, we can return it to those to whom it belongs. if we find no one--" "we will keep it for ourselves!" cried pencroft "but what in the world can there be in it?" the sea was already approaching the chest, and the high tide would evidently float it. one of the ropes which fastened the barrels was partly unlashed and used as a cable to unite the floating apparatus with the canoe. pencroft and neb then dug away the sand with their oars, so as to facilitate the moving of the chest, towing which the boat soon began to double the point to which the name of flotsam point was given. the chest was heavy, and the barrels were scarcely sufficient to keep it above water. the sailor also feared every instant that it would get loose and sink to the bottom of the sea. but happily his fears were not realised, and an hour and a half after they set out--all that time had been taken up in going a distance of three miles--the boat touched the beach below granite house. canoe and chest were then hauled up on the sand, and as the tide was then going out, they were soon left high and dry. neb, hurrying home, brought back some tools with which to open the chest in such a way that it might be injured as little as possible, and they proceeded to its inventory. pencroft did not try to hide that he was greatly excited. the sailor began by detaching the two barrels, which, being in good condition, would of course be of use. then the locks were forced with a cold chisel and hammer, and the lid thrown back. a second casing of zinc lined the interior of the chest, which had been evidently arranged that the articles which it enclosed might under any circumstances be sheltered from damp. "oh!" cried neb, "suppose it's jam!". [illustration: unpacking the marvellous chest] "i hope not," replied the reporter. "if only there was--" said the sailor in a low voice. "what?" asked neb, who overheard him. "nothing!" the covering of zinc was torn off and thrown back over the sides of the chest, and by degrees numerous articles of very varied character were produced and strewn about on the sand. at each new object pencroft uttered fresh hurrahs, herbert clapped his hands, and neb danced--like a nigger. there were books which made herbert wild with joy, and cooking utensils which neb covered with kisses! in short, the colonists had reason to be extremely satisfied, for this chest contained tools, weapons, instruments, clothes, books; and this is the exact list of them as stated in gideon spilett's note-book:-- tools:-- knives with several blades, woodmen's axes, carpenter's hatchets, planes, adzes, twibil or mattock, chisels, files, hammers, gimlets, augers, bags of nails and screws, saws of different sizes, boxes of needles. weapons:-- flint-lock guns, for percussion caps, breech-loader carbines, boarding cutlasses, sabres, barrels of powder, each containing twenty-five pounds; boxes of percussion caps. instruments:-- sextant, double opera-glass, telescope, box of mathematical instruments, mariner's compass, fahrenheit thermometer, aneroid barometer, box containing a photographic apparatus, object-glass, plates, chemicals, etc. clothes:-- dozen shirts of a peculiar material resembling wool, but evidently of a vegetable origin; dozen stockings of the same material. utensils:-- iron pot, copper saucepans, iron dishes, metal plates, kettles, portable stove, table-knives. books:-- bible, atlas, dictionary of the different polynesian idioms, dictionary of natural science, in six volumes; reams of white paper, books with blank pages. "it must be allowed," said the reporter, after the inventory had been made, "that the owner of this chest was a practical man! tools, weapons, instruments, clothes, utensils, books--nothing is wanting! it might really be said that he expected to be wrecked, and had prepared for it beforehand." "nothing is wanting, indeed," murmured cyrus harding thoughtfully. "and for a certainty," added herbert, "the vessel which carried this chest and its owner was not a malay pirate!" "unless," said pencroft, "the owner had been taken prisoner by pirates--" "that is not admissible," replied the reporter. "it is more probable that an american or european vessel has been driven into this quarter, and that her passengers, wishing to save necessaries at least, prepared this chest and threw it overboard." "is that your opinion, captain?" asked herbert. "yes, my boy," replied the engineer, "that may have been the case. it is possible that at the moment, or in expectation of a wreck, they collected into this chest different articles of the greatest use in hopes of finding it again on the coast--" "even the photographic box!" exclaimed the sailor incredulously. "as to that apparatus," replied harding, "i do not quite see the use of it; and a more complete supply of clothes or more abundant ammunition would have been more valuable to us as well as to any other castaways!" "but isn't there any mark or direction on these instruments, tools, or books, which would tell us something about them?" asked gideon spilett. that might be ascertained. each article was carefully examined, especially the books, instruments and weapons. neither the weapons nor the instruments, contrary to the usual custom, bore the name of the maker; they were, besides, in a perfect state, and did not appear to have been used. the same peculiarity marked the tools and utensils; all were new, which proved that the articles had not been taken by chance and thrown into the chest, but, on the contrary, that the choice of the things had been well considered and arranged with care. this was also indicated by a second case of metal which had preserved them from damp, and which could not have been soldered in a moment of haste. as to the dictionaries of natural science and polynesian idioms, both were english, but they neither bore the name of the publisher nor the date of publication. the same with the bible printed in english, in quarto, remarkable in a typographical point of view, and which appeared to have been often used. the atlas was a magnificent work, comprising maps of every country in the world, and several planispheres arranged upon mercator's projection, aid of which the nomenclature was in french--but which also bore neither date nor name of publisher. there was nothing, therefore, on these different articles by which they could be traced and nothing consequently of a nature to show the nationality of the vessel which must have recently passed these shores. but, wherever the chest might have come from, it was a treasure to the settlers on lincoln island. till then, by making use of the productions of nature, they had created everything for themselves, and, thanks to their intelligence, they had managed without difficulty. but did it not appear as if providence had wished to reward them by sending them these productions of human industry? their thanks rose unanimously to heaven. however, one of them was not quite satisfied: it was pencroft. it appeared that the chest did not contain some thing which he evidently held in great esteem, for in proportion as they approached the bottom of the box, his hurrahs diminished in heartiness, and, the inventory finished, he was heard to mutter these words-- "that's all very fine, but you can see that there is nothing for me in that box!" this led neb to say,-- "why, friend pencroft, what more do you expect?" "half a pound of tobacco," replied pencroft seriously, "and nothing would have been wanting to complete my happiness." no one could help laughing at this speech of the sailor's. [illustration: pencroft's superstition] but the result of this discovery of the chest was, that it was more than ever necessary to explore the island thoroughly. it was therefore agreed that the next morning at break of day they should set out, by ascending the mercy so as to reach the western shore. if any castaways had landed on the coast, it was to be feared they were without resources, and it was therefore the more necessary to carry help to them without delay. during the day the different articles were carried to granite house, where they were methodically arranged in the great hall. this day--the th of october--happened to be a sunday, and, before going to bed, herbert asked the engineer if he would not read them something from the gospel. "willingly," replied cyrus harding. he took the sacred volume, and was about to open it, when pencroft stopped him, saying,-- "captain, i am superstitious. open at random and read the first verse which your eye falls upon. we will see if it applies to our situation." cyrus harding smiled at the sailor's idea, and, yielding to his wish, he opened exactly at a place where the leaves were separated by a marker. immediately his eyes were attracted by a cross which, made with a pencil, was placed against the eighth verse of the seventh chapter of the gospel of st. matthew. he read the verse, which was this:-- "for every one that asketh receiveth; and he that seeketh findeth." chapter iii the start -- the rising tide -- elms and different plants -- the jacamar -- aspect of the forest -- gigantic eucalypti -- the reason they are called "fever trees" -- troops of monkeys -- a waterfall -- the night encampment. the next day, the th of october, all was ready for the proposed exploring expedition, which recent events had rendered so necessary. in fact, things had so come about that the settlers in lincoln island no longer needed help for themselves, but were even able to carry it to others. it was therefore agreed that they should ascend the mercy as far as the river was navigable. a great part of the distance would thus be traversed without fatigue, and the explorers could transport their provisions and arms to an advanced point in the west of the island. it was necessary to think not only of the things which they should take with them, but also of those which they might have by chance to bring back to granite house. if there had been a wreck on the coast, as was supposed, there would be many things cast up, which would be lawfully their prizes. in the event of this, the cart would have been of more use than the light canoe, but it was heavy and clumsy to drag, and therefore more difficult to use; this led pencroft to express his regret that the chest had not contained, besides "his half-pound of tobacco," a pair of strong new jersey horses, which would have been very useful to the colony! the provisions, which neb had already packed up, consisted of a store of meat and of several gallons of beer, that is to say, enough to sustain them for three days, the time which harding assigned for the expedition. they hoped besides to supply themselves on the road, and neb took care not to forget the portable stove. the only tools the settlers took were the two woodmen's axes, which they could use to cut a path through the thick forests, as also the instruments, the telescope and pocket-compass. for weapons they selected the two flint-lock guns, which were likely to be more useful to them than the percussion fowling-pieces, the first only requiring flints which could be easily replaced, and the latter needing fulminating caps, a frequent use of which would soon exhaust their limited stock. however, they took also one of the carbines and some cartridges. as to the powder, of which there was about fifty pounds in the barrel, a small supply of it had to be taken, but the engineer hoped to manufacture an explosive substance which would allow them to husband it. to the firearms were added the five cutlasses well sheathed in leather, and, thus supplied, the settlers could venture into the vast forest with some chance of success. it is useless to add that pencroft, herbert, and neb, thus armed, were at the summit of their happiness, although cyrus harding made them promise not to fire a shot unless it was necessary. at six in the morning the canoe put off from the shore; all had embarked, including top, and they proceeded to the mouth of the mercy. the tide had begun to come up half an hour before. for several hours, therefore, there would be a current, which it was well to profit by, for later the ebb would make it difficult to ascend the river. the tide was already strong, for in three days the moon would be full, and it was enough to keep the boat in the centre of the current, where it floated swiftly along between the high banks without its being necessary to increase its speed by the aid of the oars. in a few minutes the explorers arrived at the angle formed by the mercy, and exactly at the place where, seven months before, pencroft had made his first raft of wood. after this sudden angle the river widened and flowed under the shade of great evergreen firs. the aspect of the banks was magnificent. cyrus harding and his companions could not but admire the lovely effects so easily produced by nature with water and trees. as they advanced the forest element diminished. on the right bank of the river grew magnificent specimens of the ulmaceæ tribe, the precious elm, so valuable to builders, and which withstands well the action of water. then there were numerous groups belonging to the same family, amongst others one in particular, the fruit of which produces a very useful oil. further on, herbert remarked the lardizabala, a twining shrub which, when bruised in water, furnishes excellent cordage; and two or three ebony trees of a beautiful black, crossed with capricious veins. from time to time, in certain places where the landing was easy, the canoe was stopped, when gideon spilett, herbert, and pencroft, their guns in their hands, and preceded by top, jumped on shore. without expecting game, some useful plant might be met with, and the young naturalist was delighted with discovering a sort of wild spinage, belonging to the order of chenopodiaceæ, and numerous specimens of cruciferæ, belonging to the cabbage tribe, which it would certainly be possible to cultivate by transplanting. there were cresses, horse-radish, turnips, and lastly, little branching hairy stalks, scarcely more than three feet high, which produced brownish grains. "do you know what this plant is?" asked herbert of the sailor. "tobacco!" cried pencroft, who evidently had never seen his favourite plant except in the bowl of his pipe. "no, pencroft," replied herbert; "this is not tobacco, it is mustard." "mustard be hanged!" returned the sailor; "but if by chance you happen to come across a tobacco-plant, my boy, pray don't scorn that!" "we shall find it some day!" said gideon spilett. "well!" exclaimed pencroft, "when that day comes, i do not know what more will be wanting in our island!" these different plants, which had been carefully rooted, up, were carried to the canoe, where cyrus harding had remained buried in thought. the reporter, herbert, and pencroft in this manner frequently disembarked, sometimes on the right bank, sometimes on the left bank of the mercy. the latter was less abrupt, but the former more wooded. the engineer ascertained by consulting his pocket compass that the direction of the river from the first turn was obviously south-west and north-east, and nearly straight for a length of about three miles. but it was to be supposed that this direction changed beyond that point, and that the mercy continued to the north-west, towards the spurs of mount franklin, among which the river rose. during one of these excursions, gideon spilett managed to get hold of two couples of living gallinaceæ. they were birds with long, thin beaks, lengthened necks, short wings, and without any appearance of a tail. herbert rightly gave them the name of tinamons, and it was resolved that they should be the first tenants of their future poultry yard. but till then the guns had not spoken, and the first report which awoke the echoes of the forest of the far west was provoked by the appearance of a beautiful bird, resembling the kingfisher. "i recognise him!" cried pencroft, and it seemed as if his gun went off by itself. "what do you recognise?" asked the reporter. "the bird which escaped us on our first excursion, and from which we gave the name to that part of the forest." "a jacamar!" cried herbert. it was indeed a jacamar, of which the plumage shines with a metallic lustre. a shot brought it to the ground, and top carried it to the canoe. at the same time half a dozen lories were brought down. the lory is of the size of a pigeon, the plumage dashed with green, part of the wings crimson, and its crest bordered with white. to the young boy belonged the honour of this shot, and he was proud enough of it. lories are better food than the jacamar, the flesh of which is rather tough, but it was difficult to persuade pencroft that he had not killed the king of eatable birds. it was ten o'clock in the morning when the canoe reached a second angle of the mercy, nearly five miles from its mouth. here a halt was made for breakfast under the shade of some splendid trees. the river still measured from sixty to seventy feet in breadth, and its bed from five to six feet in depth. the engineer had observed that it was increased by numerous affluents, but they were unnavigable, being simply little streams. as to the forest, including jacamar wood, as well as the forests of the far west, it extended as far as the eye could reach. in no place, either in the depths of the forest or under the trees on the banks of the mercy, was the presence of man revealed. the explorers could not discover one suspicious trace. it was evident that the woodman's axe had never touched these trees, that the pioneer's knife had never severed the creepers hanging from one trunk to another in the midst of tangled brushwood and long grass. if castaways had landed on the island, they could not have yet quitted the shore and it was not in the woods that the survivors of the supposed shipwreck should be sought. [illustration: is it tobacco?] the engineer therefore manifested some impatience to reach the western coast of lincoln island, which was at least five miles distant according to his estimation. the voyage was continued, and as the mercy appeared to flow not towards the shore, but rather towards mount franklin, it was decided that they should use the boat as long as there was enough water under its keel to float it. it was both fatigue spared and time gained, for they would have been obliged to cut a path through the thick wood with their axes. but soon the flow completely failed them either the tide was going down, and it was about the hour, or it could no longer be felt at this distance from the mouth of the mercy. they had therefore to make use of the oars, herbert and neb each took one, and pencroft took the scull. the forest soon became less dense, the trees grew further apart and often quite isolated. but the further they were from each other the more magnificent they appeared, profiting, as they did, by the free, pure air which circulated around them. what splendid specimens of the flora of this latitude! certainly their presence would have been enough for a botanist to name without hesitation the parallel which traversed lincoln island. "eucalypti!" cried herbert. they were, in fact, those splendid trees, the giants of the extra-tropical zone, the congeners of the australian and new zealand eucalyptus, both situated under the same latitude as lincoln island. some rose to a height of two hundred feet. their trunks at the base measured twenty feet in circumference, and their bark was covered by a network of furrows containing a red, sweet-smelling gum. nothing is more wonderful or more singular than those enormous specimens of the order of the myrtaceæ, with their leaves placed vertically and not horizontally, so that an edge and not a surface looks upwards, the effect being that the sun's rays penetrate more freely among the trees. [illustration: the halt for breakfast] the ground at the foot of the eucalypti was carpeted with grass, and from the bushes escaped flights of little birds, which glittered in the sunlight like winged rubies. "these are something like trees!" cried neb; "but are they good for anything?" "pooh!" replied pencroft. "of course there are vegetable giants as well as human giants, and they are no good, except to show themselves at fairs!" "i think that you are mistaken, pencroft," replied gideon spilett, "and that the wood of the eucalyptus has begun to be very advantageously employed in cabinet-making." "and i may add," said herbert, "that the eucalyptus belongs to a family which comprises many useful members; the guava-tree, from whose fruit guava jelly is made; the clove-tree, which produces the spice; the pomegranate-tree, which bears pomegranates; the eugeacia cauliflora, the fruit of which is used in making a tolerable wine; the ugui myrtle, which contains an excellent alcoholic liquor; the caryophyllus myrtle, of which the bark forms an esteemed cinnamon; the eugenia pimenta, from whence comes jamaica pepper; the common myrtle, from whose buds and berries spice is sometimes made; the eucalyptus manifera, which yields a sweet sort of manna; the guinea eucalyptus, the sap of which is transformed into beer by fermentation; in short, all those trees known under the name of gum-trees or iron-bark trees in australia, belong to this family of the myrtaceæ, which contains forty-six genera and thirteen hundred species!" the lad was allowed to run on, and he delivered his little botanical lecture with great animation. cyrus harding listened smiling, and pencroft with an indescribable feeling of pride. "very good, herbert," replied pencroft, "but i could swear that all those useful specimens you have just told us about are none of them giants like these!" "that is true, pencroft." "that supports what i said," returned the sailor, "namely, that these giants are good for nothing!" "there you are wrong, pencroft," said the engineer; "these gigantic eucalypti, which shelter us, are good for something." "and what is that?" "to render the countries which they inhabit healthy. do you know what they are called in australia and new zealand?" "no, captain." "they are called 'fever trees.'" "because they give fevers?" "no, because they prevent them!" "good. i must note that," said the reporter. "note it then, my dear spilett; for it appears proved that the presence of the eucalyptus is enough to neutralise miasmas. this natural antidote has been tried in certain countries in the middle of europe and the north of africa, where the soil was absolutely unhealthy, and the sanitary condition of the inhabitants has been gradually ameliorated. no more intermittent fevers prevail in the regions now covered with forests of the myrtaceæ. this fact is now beyond doubt, and it is a happy circumstance for us settlers in lincoln island." "ah! what an island! what a blessed island!" cried pencroft. "i tell you, it wants nothing--unless it is--" "that will come, pencroft, that will be found," replied the engineer; "but now we must continue our voyage and push on as far as the river will carry our boat!" the exploration was therefore continued for another two miles in the midst of country covered with eucalypti, which predominated in the woods of this portion of the island. the space which they occupied extended as far as the eye could reach on each side of the mercy, which wound along between high green banks. the bed was often obstructed by long weeds, and even by pointed rocks, which rendered the navigation very difficult. the action of the oars was prevented, and pencroft was obliged to push with a pole. they found also that the water was becoming shallower and shallower, and that the canoe must soon stop. the sun was already sinking towards the horizon, and the trees threw long shadows on the ground. cyrus harding, seeing that he could not hope to reach the western coast of the island in one journey, resolved to camp at the place where any further navigation was prevented by want of water. he calculated that they were still five or six miles from the coast, and this distance was too great for them to attempt traversing during the night in the midst of unknown woods. the boat was pushed on through the forest, which gradually became thicker again, and appeared also to have more inhabitants; for if the eyes of the sailor did not deceive him, he thought he saw bands of monkeys springing among the trees. sometimes even two or three of these animals stopped at a little distance from the canoe and gazed at the settlers without manifesting any terror, as if, seeing men for the first time, they had not yet learned to fear them. it would have been easy to bring down one of these quadrumani with a gunshot, and pencroft was greatly tempted to fire, but harding opposed so useless a massacre. this was prudent, for the monkeys, or apes rather, appearing to be very powerful and extremely active, it was useless to provoke an unnecessary aggression, and the creatures might, ignorant of the power of the explorer's firearms, have attacked them. it is true that the sailor considered the monkeys from a purely alimentary point of view, for those animals which are herbivorous make very excellent game; but since they had an abundant supply of provisions, it was a pity to waste their ammunition. towards four o'clock, the navigation of the mercy became exceedingly difficult, for its course was obstructed by aquatic plants and rocks. the banks rose higher and higher, and already they were approaching the spurs of mount franklin. the source could not be far off, since it was fed by the water from the southern slopes of the mountain. "in a quarter of an hour," said the sailor, "we shall be obliged to stop, captain." "very well, we will stop, pencroft, and we will make our encampment for the night." "at what distance are we from granite house?" asked herbert. "about seven miles," replied the engineer, "taking into calculation, however, the _détours_ of the river, which has carried us to the north-west." "shall, we go on?" asked the reporter. "yes, as long as we can," replied cyrus harding. "to-morrow, at break of day, we will leave the canoe, and in two hours i hope we shall cross the distance which separates us from the coast, and then we shall have the whole day in which to explore the shore." "go-ahead!" replied pencroft. but soon the boat grated on the stony bottom of the river, which was now not more than twenty feet in breadth. the trees met like a bower overhead, and caused a half-darkness. they also heard the noise of a waterfall, which showed that a few hundred feet up the river there was a natural barrier. presently, after a sudden turn of the river, a cascade appeared through the trees. the canoe again touched the bottom, and in a few minutes it was moored to a trunk near the right bank. it was nearly five o'clock. the last rays of the sun gleamed through the thick foliage and glanced on the little waterfall, making the spray sparkle with all the colours of the rainbow. beyond that, the mercy was lost in the brushwood, where it was fed from some hidden source. the different streams which flowed into it increased it to a regular river further down, but here it was simply a shallow, limpid brook. it was agreed to camp here, as the place was charming. the colonists disembarked, and a fire was soon lighted under a clump of trees, among the branches of which cyrus harding and his companions could, if it was necessary, take refuge for the night. supper was quickly devoured, for they were very hungry, and then there was only sleeping to think of. but, as roarings of rather a suspicious nature had been heard during the evening, a good fire was made up for the night, so as to protect the sleepers with its crackling flames. neb and pencroft also watched by turns, and did not spare fuel. they thought they saw the dark forms of some wild animals prowling round the camp among the bushes, but the night passed without incident, and the next day, the st of october, at five o'clock in the morning, all were on foot, ready for a start. chapter iv journey to the coast -- troops of monkeys -- a new river -- the reason the tide was not felt -- a woody shore -- reptile promontory -- herbert envies gideon spilett -- explosion of bamboos. it was six o'clock in the morning when the settlers, after a hasty breakfast, set out to reach by the shortest way the western coast of the island. and how long would it take to do this? cyrus harding had said two hours, but of course that depended on the nature of the obstacles they might meet with. as it was probable that they would have to cut a path through the grass, shrubs, and creepers, they marched axe in hand, and with guns also ready, wisely taking warning from the cries of the wild beasts heard in the night. the exact position of the encampment could be determined by the bearing of mount franklin, and as the volcano arose in the north at a distance of less than three miles, they had only to go straight towards the south-west to reach the western coast. they set out, having first carefully secured the canoe. pencroft and neb carried sufficient provisions for the little band for at least two days. it would not thus be necessary to hunt. the engineer advised his companions to refrain from firing, that their presence might not be betrayed to any one near the shore. the first hatchet blows were given among the brushwood in the midst of some mastick-trees, a little above the cascade; and his compass in his hand, cyrus harding led the way. the forest here was composed for the most part of trees which had already been met with near the lake and on prospect heights. there were deodars, douglas firs, casuarinas, gum-trees, eucalypti, hibiscus, cedars, and other trees, generally of a moderate size, for their number prevented their growth. since their departure, the settlers had descended the slopes which constituted the mountain system of the island, on to a dry soil, but the luxuriant vegetation of which indicated it to be watered either by some subterranean marsh or by some stream. however, cyrus harding did not remember to have seen, at the time of his excursion to the crater, any other watercourses but the red creek and the mercy. during the first part of their excursion, they saw numerous troops of monkeys who exhibited great astonishment at the sight of men, whose appearance was so new to them. gideon spilett jokingly asked whether these active and merry quadrupeds did not consider him and his companions as degenerate brothers. and certainly, pedestrians, hindered at each step by bushes, caught by creepers, barred by trunks of trees, did not shine beside those supple animals, who, bounding from branch to branch, were hindered by nothing on their course. the monkeys were numerous, but happily they did not manifest any hostile disposition. several pigs, agoutis, kangaroos, and other rodents were seen, also two or three kaolas, at which pencroft longed to have a shot. "but," said he, "you may jump and play just now; we shall have one or two words to say to you on our way back!" at half-past nine the way was suddenly found to be barred by an unknown stream, from thirty to forty feet broad, whose rapid current dashed foaming over the numerous rocks which interrupted its course. this creek was deep and clear, but it was absolutely unnavigable. "we are cut off!" cried neb. "no," replied herbert, "it is only a stream, and we can easily swim over." "what would be the use of that?" returned harding. "this creek evidently runs to the sea. let us remain on this side and follow the bank, and i shall be much astonished if it does not lead us very quickly to the coast. forward!" "one minute," said the reporter. "the name of this creek, my friends? do not let us leave our geography incomplete." "all right!" said pencroft. "name it, my boy," said the engineer, addressing the lad. "will it not be better to wait until we have explored it to its mouth?" answered herbert. "very well," replied cyrus harding. "let us follow it as fast as we can without stopping." "still another minute!" said pencroft. "what's the matter?" asked the reporter. "though hunting is forbidden, fishing is allowed, i suppose," said the sailor. "we have no time to lose," replied the engineer. "oh! five minutes!" replied pencroft, "i only ask for five minutes to use in the interest of our breakfast!" and pencroft, lying down on the bank, plunged his arm into the water, and soon pulled up several dozen of fine crayfish from among the stores. "these will be good!" cried neb, going to the sailor's aid. "as i said, there is everything in this island, except tobacco!" muttered pencroft with a sigh. the fishing did not take five minutes for the crayfish were swarming in the creek. a bag was filled with the crustaceæ, whose shells were of a cobalt blue. the settlers then pushed on. they advanced more rapidly and easily along the bank of the river than in the forest. from time to time they came upon the traces of animals of a large size who had come to quench their thirst at the stream but none were actually seen and it was evidently not in this part of the forest that the peccary had received the bullet which had cost pencroft a grinder. in the meanwhile, considering the rapid current harding was led to suppose that he and his companions were much farther from the western coast than they had at first supposed. in fact, at this hour, the rising tide would have turned back the current of the creek if its mouth had only been a few miles distant. now, this effect was not produced, and the water pursued its natural course. the engineer was much astonished at this, and frequently consulted his compass to assure himself that some turn of the river was not leading them again into the far west. however, the creek gradually widened and its waters became less tumultuous. the trees on the right bank were as close together as on the left bank, and it was impossible to distinguish anything beyond them, but these masses of wood were evidently uninhabited, for top did not bark, and the intelligent animal would not have failed to signal the presence of any stranger in the neighbourhood. [illustration: denizens of the forest] at half past ten, to the great surprise of cyrus harding, herbert, who was a little in front, suddenly stopped and exclaimed-- "the sea!" in a few minutes more, the whole western shore of the island lay extended before the eyes of the settlers. but what a contrast between this and the eastern coast, upon which chance had first thrown them. no granite cliff, no rocks, not even a sandy beach. the forest reached the shore, and the tall trees bending over the water were beaten by the waves. it was not such a shore as is usually formed by nature, either by extending a vast carpet of sand, or by grouping masses of rock, but a beautiful border consisting of the most splendid trees. the bank was raised a little above the level of the sea, and on this luxuriant soil supported by a granite base, the fine forest trees seemed to be as firmly planted as in the interior of the island. the colonists were then on the shore of an unimportant little harbour, which would scarcely have contained even two or three fishing boats. it served as a neck to the new creek of which the curious thing was that its waters, instead of joining the sea by a gentle slope, fell from a height of more than forty feet, which explained why the rising tide was not felt up the stream. in fact, the tides of the pacific, even at their maximum of elevation, could never reach the level of the river, and, doubtless millions of years would pass before the water would have worn away the granite and hollowed a practicable mouth. it was settled that the name of falls river should be given to this stream. beyond, towards the north, the forest border was prolonged for a space of nearly two miles, then the trees became scarcer, and beyond that again the picturesque heights described a nearly straight line which ran north and south. on the contrary, all the part of the shore between falls river and reptile end was a mass of wood, magnificent trees, some straight, others bent, so that the long sea swell bathed their roots. now, it was this coast, that is, all the serpentine peninsula, that was to be explored, for this part of the shore offered a refuge to castaways, which the other wild and barren side must have refused. [illustration: the sea.] the weather was fine and clear, and from the height of a hillock on which neb and pencroft had arranged breakfast, a wide view was obtained. there was, however, not a sail in sight; nothing could be seen along the shore as far as the eye could reach. but the engineer would take nothing for granted until he had explored the coast to the very extremity of the serpentine peninsula. breakfast was soon despatched, and at half-past eleven the captain gave the signal for departure. instead of proceeding over the summit of a cliff or along a sandy beach, the settlers were obliged to remain under cover of the trees so that they might continue on the shore. the distance which separated falls river from reptile end was about twelve miles. it would have taken the settlers four hours to do this, on a clear ground and without hurrying themselves; but as it was they needed double the time, for what with trees to go round, bushes to cut down, and creepers to chop away, they were impeded at every step, these obstacles greatly lengthening their journey. there was, however, nothing to show that a shipwreck had taken place recently. it is true that, as gideon spilett observed, any remains of it might have drifted out to sea, and they must not take it for granted that because they could find no traces of it, a ship had not been cast away on the coast. the reporter's argument was just, and besides, the incident of the bullet proved that a shot must have been fired in lincoln island within three months. it was already five o'clock, and there were still two miles between the settlers and the extremity of the serpentine peninsula. it was evident that after having reached reptile end, harding and his companions would not have time to return before dark to their encampment near the source of the mercy. it would therefore be necessary to pass the night on the promontory. but they had no lack of provisions, which was lucky, for there were no animals on the shore, though birds, on the contrary, abounded--jacamars, couroucoos, tragopans, grouse, lories, parrots, cockatoos, pheasants, pigeons, and a hundred others. there was not a tree without a nest, and not a nest which was not full of flapping wings. towards seven o'clock the weary explorers arrived at reptile end. here the seaside forest ended, and the shore resumed the customary appearance of a coast, with rocks, reefs, and sands. it was possible that something might be found here, but darkness came on, and the further exploration had to be put off to the next day. pencroft and herbert hastened on to find a suitable place for their camp. amongst the last trees of the forest of the far west, the boy found several thick clumps of bamboos. "good," said he; "this is a valuable discovery." "valuable?" returned pencroft. "certainly," replied herbert. "i may say, pencroft, that the bark of the bamboo cut into flexible laths, is used for making baskets; that this bark, mashed into a paste, is used for the manufacture of chinese paper; that the stalks furnish, according to their size, canes and pipes, and are used for conducting water; that large bamboos make excellent material for building, being light and strong, and being never attacked by insects. i will add that by sawing the bamboo in two at the joint, keeping for the bottom the part of the transverse film which forms the joint, useful cups are obtained, which are much in use among the chinese. no! you don't care for that. but--" "but what?" "but i can tell you, if you are ignorant of it, that in india these bamboos are eaten like asparagus." "asparagus thirty feet high!" exclaimed the sailor. "and are they good?" "excellent," replied herbert. "only it is not the stems of thirty feet high which are eaten, but the young shoots." "perfect, my boy, perfect!" replied pencroft. "i will also add that the pith of the young stalks, preserved in vinegar, makes a good pickle." "better and better, herbert!" "and lastly, that the bamboos exude a sweet liquor which can be made into a very agreeable drink." "is that all?" asked the sailor. "that is all!" "and they don't happen to do for smoking?" "no, my poor pencroft." herbert and the sailor had not to look long for a place in which to pass the night. the rocks, which must have been violently beaten by the sea under the influence of the winds of the south west, presented many cavities in which shelter could be found against the night air. but just as they were about to enter one of these caves a loud roaring arrested them. "back!" cried pencroft. "our guns are only loaded with small shot, and beasts which can roar as loud as that would care no more for it than for grams of salt!". and the sailor, seizing herbert by the arm, dragged him behind a rock, just as a magnificent animal showed itself at the entrance of the cavern. it was a jaguar of a size at least equal to its asiatic congeners, that is to say, it measured five feet from the extremity of its head to the beginning of its tail. the yellow colour of its hair was relieved by streaks and regular oblong spots of black, which contrasted with the white of its chest. herbert recognised it as the ferocious rival of the tiger, as formidable as the puma, which is the rival of the largest wolf! the jaguar advanced and gazed around him with blazing eyes, his hair bristling as if this was not the first time he had scented man. at this moment the reporter appeared round a rock, and herbert, thinking that he had not seen the jaguar, was about to rush towards him, when gideon spilett signed to him to remain where he was. this was not his first tiger, and advancing to within ten feet of the animal he remained motionless, his gun to his shoulder, without moving a muscle. the jaguar collected itself for a spring, but at that moment a shot struck it in the eyes, and it fell dead. herbert and pencroft rushed towards the jaguar. neb and harding also ran up, and they remained for some instants contemplating the animal as it lay stretched on the ground, thinking that its magnificent skin would be a great ornament to the hall at granite house. "oh, mr. spilett, how i admire and envy you!" cried herbert, in a fit of very natural enthusiasm. "well, my boy," replied the reporter, "you could have done the same." [illustration: at that moment a shot struck the jaguar between the eyes and it fell dead] "i! with such coolness!--" "imagine to yourself, herbert, that the jaguar is only a hare, and you would fire as quietly as possible." "that is," rejoined pencroft, "it is not more dangerous than a hare!" "and now," said gideon spilett, "since the jaguar has left its abode, i do not see, my friends, why we should not take possession of it for the night." "but others may come," said pencroft. "it will be enough to light a fire at the entrance of the cavern," said the reporter, "and no wild beasts will dare to cross the threshold." "into the jaguar's house, then!" replied the sailor, dragging after him the body of the animal. whilst neb skinned the jaguar, his companions collected an abundant supply of dry wood from the forest, which they heaped up at the cave. cyrus harding, seeing the clump of bamboos, cut a quantity, which he mingled with the other fuel. this done, they entered the grotto, of which the floor was strewn with bones, the guns were carefully loaded, in case of a sudden attack, they had supper, and then just before they lay down to rest, the heap of wood piled at the entrance was set fire to. immediately, a regular explosion, or rather, a series of reports, broke the silence! the noise was caused, by the bamboos, which, as the flames reached them, exploded like fireworks. the noise was enough to terrify even the boldest of wild beasts. it was not the engineer who had invented this way of causing loud explosions, for, according to marco polo, the tartars have employed it for many centuries to drive away from their encampments the formidable wild beasts of central asia. chapter v proposal to return by the southern shore -- configuration of the coast -- searching for the supposed wreck -- a wreck in the air -- discovery of a small natural port -- at midnight on the banks of the mercy -- the canoe adrift. cyrus harding and his companions slept like innocent marmots in the cave which the jaguar had so politely left at their disposal. at sunrise all were on the shore at the extremity of the promontory, and their gaze was directed towards the horizon, of which two-thirds of the circumference were visible. for the last time the engineer could ascertain that not a sail nor the wreck of a ship was on the sea, and even with the telescope nothing suspicious could be discovered. there was nothing either on the shore, at least, in the straight line of three miles which formed the south side of the promontory, for beyond that, rising ground hid the rest of the coast, and even from the extremity of the serpentine peninsula cape claw could not be seen. the southern coast of the island still remained to be explored. now should they undertake it immediately, and devote this day to it? this was not included in their first plan. in fact, when the boat was abandoned at the sources of the mercy, it had been agreed that after having surveyed the west coast, they should go back to it, and return to granite house by the mercy. harding then thought that the western coast would have offered refuge, either to a ship in distress, or to a vessel in her regular course; but now, as he saw that this coast presented no good anchorage, he wished to seek on the south what they had not been able to find on the west. gideon spilett proposed to continue the exploration, that the question of the supposed wreck might be completely settled, and he asked at what distance claw cape might be from the extremity of the peninsula. "about thirty miles," replied the engineer, "if we take into consideration the curvings of the coast." "thirty miles!" returned spilett. "that would be a long day's march. nevertheless, i think that we should return to granite house by the south coast." "but," observed herbert, "from claw cape to granite house there must be at least another ten miles." "make it forty miles in all," replied the engineer, "and do not hesitate to do it. at least we should survey the unknown shore, and then we shall not have to begin the exploration again." "very good," said pencroft. "but the boat?" "the boat has remained by itself for one day at the sources of the mercy," replied gideon spilett; "it may just as well stay there two days! as yet, we have had no reason to think that the island is infested by thieves!" "yet," said the sailor, "when i remember the history of the turtle, i am far from confident of that." "the turtle! the turtle!" replied the reporter. "don't you know that the sea turned it over?" "who knows?" murmured the engineer. "but--" said neb. neb had evidently something to say, for he opened his mouth to speak and yet said nothing. "what do you want to say, neb?" asked the engineer. "if we return by the shore to claw cape," replied neb, "after having doubled the cape, we shall be stopped--" "by the mercy! of course," replied herbert, "and we shall have neither bridge nor boat by which to cross." "but, captain," added pencroft, "with a few floating trunks we shall have no difficulty in crossing the river." "never mind," said spilett, "it will be useful to construct a bridge if we wish to have an easy access to the far west!" "a bridge!" cried pencroft. "well, is not the captain the best engineer in his profession? he will make us a bridge when we want one. as to transporting you this evening to the other side of the mercy, and that without wetting one thread of your clothes, i will take care of that. we have provisions for another day, and besides we can get plenty of game. forward!" the reporter's proposal, so strongly seconded by the sailor, received general approbation, for each wished to have their doubts set at rest, and by returning by claw cape the exploration would be ended. but there was not an hour to lose, for forty miles was a long march, and they could not hope to reach granite house before night. at six o'clock in the morning the little band set out. as a precaution the guns were loaded with ball, and top, who led the van, received orders to beat about the edge of the forest. from the extremity of the promontory which formed the tail of the peninsula the coast was rounded for a distance of five miles, which was rapidly passed over, without even the most minute investigations bringing to light the least trace of any old or recent landings; no _debris_, no mark of an encampment, no cinders of a fire, nor even a footprint! from the point of the peninsula on which the settlers now were their gaze could extend along the south-west. twenty-five miles off the coast terminated in the claw cape, which loomed dimly through the morning mists, and which, by the phenomenon of the mirage, appeared as if suspended between land and water. between the place occupied by the colonists and the other side of the immense bay, the shore was composed, first, of a tract of low land, bordered in the background by trees; then the shore became more irregular, projecting sharp points into the sea, and finally ended in the black rocks which, accumulated in picturesque disorder, formed claw cape. such was the development of this part of the island, which the settlers took in at a glance, whilst stopping for an instant. "if a vessel ran in here," said pencroft, "she would certainly be lost. sandbanks and reefs everywhere! bad quarters!" "but at least something would be left of the ship," observed the reporter. "there might be pieces of wood on the rocks, but nothing on the sands," replied the sailor. "why?" "because the sands are still more dangerous than the rocks, for they swallow up everything that is thrown on them. in a few days the hull of a ship of several hundred tons would disappear entirely in there!" "so, pencroft," asked the engineer, "if a ship has been wrecked on these banks, is it not astonishing that there is now no trace of her remaining?" "no, captain, with the aid of time and tempest. however, it would be surprising, even in this case, that some of the masts or spars should not have been thrown on the beach, out of reach of the waves." "let us go on with our search, then," returned cyrus harding. at one o'clock the colonists arrived at the other side of washington bay, they having now gone a distance of twenty miles. they then halted for breakfast. here began the irregular coast, covered with lines of rocks and sandbanks. the long sea-swell could be seen breaking over the rocks in the bay, forming a foamy fringe. from this point to claw cape the beach was very narrow between the edge of the forest and the reefs. walking was now more difficult, on account of the numerous rocks which encumbered the beach. the granite cliff also gradually increased in height, and only the green tops of the trees which crowned it could be seen. after half an hour's rest, the settlers resumed their journey, and not a spot among the rocks was left unexamined. pencroft and neb even rushed into the surf whenever any object attracted their attention. but they found nothing, some curious formations of the rocks having deceived them. they ascertained, however, that eatable shell-fish abounded there, but these could not be of any great advantage to them until some easy means of communication had been established between the two banks of the mercy, and until the means of transport had been perfected. nothing therefore which threw any light on the supposed wreck could be found on this shore, yet an object of any importance, such as the hull of a ship, would have been seen directly, or any of her masts and spars would have been washed on shore, just as the chest had been, which was found twenty miles from here. but there was nothing. towards three o'clock harding and his companions arrived at a snug little creek. it formed quite a natural harbour, invisible from the sea, and was entered by a narrow channel. at the back of this creek some violent convulsion had torn up the rocky border, and a cutting, by a gentle slope, gave access to an upper plateau, which might be situated at least ten miles from claw cape, and consequently four miles in a straight line from prospect heights. gideon spilett proposed to his companions that they should make a halt here. they agreed readily, for their walk had sharpened their appetites; and although it was not their usual dinner-hour, no one refused to strengthen himself with a piece of venison. this luncheon would sustain them till their supper, which they intended to take at granite house. in a few minutes the settlers, seated under a clump of fine sea-pines, were devouring the provisions which neb produced from his bag. this spot was raised from fifty to sixty feet above the level of the sea. the view was very extensive, but beyond the cape it ended in union bay. neither the islet nor prospect heights were visible, and could not be from thence, for the rising ground and the curtain of trees closed the northern horizon. it is useless to add that notwithstanding the wide extent of sea which the explorers could survey, and though the engineer swept the horizon with his glass, no vessel could be found. the shore was of course examined with the same care from the edge of the water to the cliff, and nothing could be discovered even with the aid of the instrument. "well," said gideon spilett, "it seems we must make up our minds to console ourselves with thinking that no one will come to dispute with us the possession of lincoln island!" "but the bullet," cried herbert. "that was not imaginary, i suppose!" "hang it, no!" exclaimed pencroft, thinking of his absent tooth. "then what conclusion may be drawn?" asked the reporter. "this," replied the engineer, "that three months or more ago, a vessel, either voluntarily or not, came here." "what! then you admit, cyrus, that she was swallowed up without leaving any trace?" cried the reporter. "no, my dear spilett, but you see that if it is certain that a human being set foot on the island, it appears no less certain that he has now left it." "then, if i understand you right, captain," said herbert, "the vessel has left again?" "evidently." "and we have lost an opportunity to get back to our country?" said neb. "i fear so." "very well, since the opportunity is lost, let us go on, it can't be helped," said pencroft, who felt home sickness for granite house. but just as they were rising, top was heard loudly barking; and the dog issued from the wood, holding in his mouth a rag soiled with mud. neb seized it. it was a piece of strong cloth! top still barked, and by his going and coming, seemed to invite his master to follow him into the forest. "now there's something to explain the bullet!" exclaimed pencroft. "a castaway!" replied herbert. "wounded, perhaps!" said neb. "or dead!" added the reporter. all ran after the dog, among the tall pines on the border of the forest. harding and his companions made ready their fire-arms, in case of an emergency. they advanced some way into the wood, but to their great disappointment, they as yet saw no signs of any human being having passed that way. shrubs and creepers were uninjured, and they had even to cut them away with the axe, as they had done in the deepest recesses of the forest. it was difficult to fancy that any human creature had ever passed there, but yet top went backwards and forwards, not like a dog who searches at random, but like a being endowed with a mind, who is following up an idea. in about seven or eight minutes top stopped in a glade surrounded with tall trees. the settlers gazed around them, but saw nothing, neither under the bushes nor among the trees. "what is the matter, top?" said cyrus harding. top barked louder, bounding about at the foot of a gigantic pine. all at once pencroft shouted,-- [illustration: "now there's something to explain the bullet!" exclaimed pencroft] "ho, splendid! capital!" "what is it?" asked spilett "we have been looking for a wreck at sea or on land!" "well?" "well, and here we've found one in the air!" and the sailor pointed to a great white rag, caught in the top of a pine, a fallen scrap of which the dog had brought to them. "but that is not a wreck!" cried gideon spilett. "i beg your pardon!" returned pencroft. "why? is it--?" "it is all that remains of our airy boat, of our balloon, which has been caught up aloft there, at the top of that tree!" pencroft was not mistaken, and he gave vent to his feelings in a tremendous hurrah, adding,-- "there is good cloth! there is what will furnish us with linen for years. there is what will make us handkerchiefs and shirts! ha, ha, mr spilett, what do you say to an island where shirts grow on the trees?" it was certainly a lucky circumstance for the settlers in lincoln island that the balloon, after having made its last bound into the air, had fallen on the island and thus given them the opportunity of finding it again, whether they kept the case under its present form, or whether they wished to attempt another escape by it, or whether they usefully employed the several hundred yards of cotton, which was of fine quality. pencroft's joy was therefore shared by all. but it was necessary to bring down the remains of the balloon from the tree, to place it in security, and this was no slight task. neb, herbert, and the sailor, climbing to the summit of the tree, used all their skill to disengage the now reduced balloon. the operation lasted two hours, and then not only the case, with its valve, its springs, its brasswork, lay on the ground, but the net, that is to say a considerable quantity of ropes and cordage, and the circle and the anchor. the case, except for the fracture, was in good condition, only the lower portion being torn. [illustration: a wreck in the air] it was a fortune which had fallen from the sky. "all the same, captain," said the sailor, "if we ever decide to leave the island, it won't be in a balloon, will it? these air-boats won't go where we want them to go, and we have had some experience in that way! look here, we will build a craft of some twenty tons, and then we can make a main-sail, a fore-sail, and a jib out of that cloth. as to the rest of it, that will help to dress us." "we shall see, pencroft," replied cyrus harding; "we shall see." "in the meantime, we must put it in a safe place," said neb. they certainly could not think of carrying this load of cloth, ropes, and cordage, to granite house, for the weight of it was very considerable, and whilst waiting for a suitable vehicle in which to convey it, it was of importance that this treasure should not be left longer exposed to the mercies of the first storm. the settlers uniting their efforts managed to drag it as far as the shore, where they discovered a large rocky cavity, which owing to its position could not be visited either by the wind or rain. "we needed a locker, and now we have one," said pencroft; "but as we cannot lock it up, it will be prudent to hide the opening. i don't mean from two-legged thieves, but; from those with four paws!" at six o'clock, all was stowed away, and after having given the creek the very suitable name of "port balloon," the settlers pursued their way along claw cape. pencroft and the engineer talked of the different projects which it was agreed to put into execution with the briefest possible delay. it was necessary first of all to throw a bridge over the mercy, so as to establish an easy communication with the south of the island; then the cart must be taken to bring back the balloon, for the canoe alone could not carry it, then they would build a decked boat, and pencroft would rig it as a cutter, and they would be able to undertake voyages of circumnavigation round the island, etc. in the meanwhile night came on, and it was already dark when the settlers reached flotsam point, the place where they had discovered the precious chest. the distance between flotsam point and granite house was another four miles, and it was midnight when, after having followed the shore to the mouth of the mercy, the settlers arrived at the first angle formed by the mercy. there the river was eighty feet in breadth, which was awkward to cross, but as pencroft had taken upon himself to conquer this difficulty, he was compelled to do it. the settlers certainly had reason to be pretty tired. the journey had been long, and the task of getting down the balloon had not rested either their arms or legs. they were anxious to reach granite house to eat and sleep, and if the bridge had been constructed, in a quarter of an hour they would have been at home. the night was very dark. pencroft prepared to keep his promise by constructing a sort of raft, on which to make the passage of the mercy. he and neb, armed with axes, chose two trees near the water, and began to attack them at the base. cyrus harding and spilett, seated on the bank, waited till their companions were ready for their help, whilst herbert roamed about, though without going to any distance. all at once, the lad, who had strolled by the river, came running back, and, pointing up the mercy, exclaimed,-- "what is floating there?" pencroft stopped working, and seeing an indistinct object moving through the gloom,-- "a canoe!" cried he. all approached, and saw to their extreme surprise, a boat floating down the current. "boat ahoy!" shouted the sailor, without thinking that perhaps it would be best to keep silence. no reply. the boat still drifted onwards, and it was not more than twelve feet off, when the sailor exclaimed-- "but it is our own boat! she has broken her moorings, and floated down the current. i must say she has arrived very opportunely." "our boat?" murmured the engineer. pencroft was right. it was indeed the canoe, of which the rope had undoubtedly broken, and which had come alone from the sources of the mercy. it was very important to seize it before the rapid current should have swept it away out of the mouth of the river, but neb and pencroft cleverly managed this by means of a long pole. the canoe touched the shore. the engineer leapt in first, and found, on examining the rope, that it had been really worn through by rubbing against the rocks. "well," said the reporter to him, in a low voice, "this is a strange thing." "strange indeed!" returned cyrus handing. strange or not, it was very fortunate. herbert, the reporter, neb, and pencroft, embarked in turn. there was no doubt about the rope having been worn through, but the astonishing part of the affair was, that the boat should have arrived just at the moment when the settlers were there to seize it on its way, for a quarter of an hour earlier or later it would have been lost in the sea. if they had been living in the time of genii, this incident would have given them the right to think that the island was haunted by some supernatural being, who used his power in the service of the castaways! a few strokes of the oar brought the settlers to the mouth of the mercy. the canoe was hauled up on the beach near the chimneys, and all proceeded towards the ladder of granite house. but at that moment, top barked angrily, and neb, who was looking for the first steps, uttered a cry. there was no longer a ladder! [illustration: there was no longer a ladder!] chapter vi pencroft's halloos -- a night in the chimneys -- herbert's arrows -- the captain's project -- an unexpected explanation -- what has happened in granite house -- how a new servant enters the service of the colonists. cyrus harding stood still, without saying a word. his companions searched in the darkness on the wall, in case the wind should have moved the ladder, and on the ground, thinking that it might have fallen down.... but the ladder had quite disappeared. as to ascertaining if a squall had blown it on to the landing-place, half way up, that was impossible in the dark. "if it is a joke," cried pencroft, "it is a very stupid one; to come home and find no staircase to go up to your room by; for weary men, there is nothing to laugh at that i can see." neb could do nothing but cry out, "oh! oh! oh!" "i begin to think that very curious things happen in lincoln island!" said pencroft. "curious?" replied gideon spilett, "not at all, pencroft, nothing can be more natural. some one has come during our absence, taken possession of our dwelling and drawn up the ladder." "some one," cried the sailor. "but who?" "who but the hunter who fired the bullet?" replied the reporter. "well, if there is any one up there," replied pencroft, who began to lose patience, "i will give them a hail, and they must answer." and in a stentorian voice the sailor gave a prolonged "halloo!" which was echoed again and again from the cliff and rocks. the settlers listened and they thought they heard a sort of chuckling laugh, of which they could not guess the origin. but no voice replied to pencroft, who in vain repeated his vigorous shouts. there was something indeed in this to astonish the most apathetic of men, and the settlers were not men of that description. in their situation every incident had its importance, and, certainly, during the seven months which they had spent on the island, they had not before met with anything of so surprising a character. be that as it may, forgetting their fatigue in the singularity of the event, they remained below granite house, not knowing what to think, not knowing what to do, questioning each other without any hope of a satisfactory reply, every one starting some supposition each more unlikely than the last. neb bewailed himself, much disappointed at not being able to get into his kitchen, for the provisions which they had had on their expedition were exhausted, and they had no means of renewing them. "my friends," at last said cyrus harding, "there is only one thing to be done at present, wait for day, and then act according to circumstances. but let us go to the chimneys. there we shall be under shelter, and if we cannot eat, we can at least sleep." "but who is it that has played us this cool trick?" again asked pencroft, unable to make up his mind to retire from the spot. whoever it was, the only thing practicable was to do as the engineer proposed, to go to the chimneys and there wait for day. in the meanwhile top was ordered to mount guard below the windows of granite house, and when top received an order he obeyed it without any questioning. the brave dog therefore remained at the foot of the cliff whilst his master with his companions sought a refuge among the rocks. to say that the settlers, notwithstanding their fatigue, slept well on the sandy floor of the chimneys would not be true. it was not only that they were extremely anxious to find out the cause of what had happened, whether it was the result of an accident which would be discovered at the return of day, or whether on the contrary it was the work of a human being; but they also had very uncomfortable beds. that could not be helped, however, for in some way or other at that moment their dwelling was occupied, and they could not possibly enter it. now granite house was more than their dwelling, it was their warehouse. there were all the stores belonging to the colony, weapons, instruments, tools, ammunition, provisions, etc. to think that all that might be pillaged and that the settlers would have all their work to do over again, fresh weapons and tools to make, was a serious matter. their uneasiness led one or other of them also to go out every few minutes to see if top was keeping good watch. cyrus harding alone waited with his habitual patience, although his strong mind was exasperated at being confronted with such an inexplicable fact, and he was provoked at himself for allowing a feeling to which he could not give a name, to gain an influence over him. gideon spilett shared his feelings in this respect, and the two conversed together in whispers of the inexplicable circumstance which baffled even their intelligence and experience. "it is a joke," said pencroft; "it is a trick some one has played us. well, i don't like such jokes, and the joker had better look out for himself, if he falls into my hands, i can tell him." as soon as the first gleam of light appeared in the east, the colonists, suitably armed, repaired to the beach under granite house. the rising sun now shone on the cliff and they could see the windows, the shutters of which were closed, through the curtains of foliage. all here was in order; but a cry escaped the colonists when they saw that the door, which they had closed on their departure, was now wide open. some one had entered granite house--there could be no more doubt about that. the upper ladder, which generally hung from the door to the landing, was in its place, but the lower ladder was drawn up and raised to the threshold. it was evident that the intruders had wished to guard themselves against a surprise. pencroft hailed again. no reply. "the beggars," exclaimed the sailor. "there they are sleeping quietly as if they were in their own house. hallo there, you pirates, brigands, robbers, sons of john bull!". when pencroft, being a yankee, treated any one to the epithet of "son of john bull," he considered he had reached the last limits of insult. the sun had now completely risen, and the whole façade of granite house became illuminated by his rays; but in the interior as well as on the exterior all was quiet and calm. the settlers asked if granite house was inhabited or not, and yet the position of the ladder was sufficient to show that it was; it was also certain that the inhabitants, whoever they might be, had not been able to escape. but how were they to be got at? herbert then thought of fastening a cord to an arrow, and shooting the arrow so that it should pass between the first rounds of the ladder which hung from the threshold. by means of the cord they would then be able to draw down the ladder to the ground, and so re-establish the communication between the beach and granite house. there was evidently nothing else to be done, and, with a little skill, this method might succeed. very fortunately bows and arrows had been left at the chimneys, where they also found a quantity of light hibiscus cord. pencroft fastened this to a well-feathered arrow. then herbert fixing it to his bow, took a careful aim for the lower part of the ladder. cyrus harding, gideon spilett, pencroft, and neb drew back, so as to see if anything appeared at the windows. the reporter lifted his gun to his shoulder and covered the door. the bow was bent, the arrow flew, taking the cord with it, and passed between the two last rounds. the operation had succeeded. herbert immediately seized the end of the cord, but, at that moment when he gave it a pull to bring down the ladder, an arm, thrust suddenly out between the wall and the door, grasped it and dragged it inside granite house. "the rascals!" shouted the sailor. "if a ball can do anything for you, you shall not have long to wait for it." "but who was it?" asked neb. "who was it? didn't you see?" "no." "it was a monkey, a sapago, an orang-outang, a baboon, a gorilla, a sagoin. our dwelling has been invaded by monkeys, who climbed up the ladder during our absence." and, at this moment, as if to bear witness to the truth of the sailors words, two or three quadrumana showed themselves at the windows, from which they had pushed back the shutters, and saluted the real proprietors of the place with a thousand hideous grimaces. "i knew that it was only a joke," cried pencroft, "but one of the jokers shall pay the penalty for the rest." so saying, the sailor, raising his piece, took a rapid aim at one of the monkeys and fired. all disappeared, except one who fell mortally wounded on the beach. this monkey, which was of a large size, evidently belonged to the first order of the quadrumana. whether this was a chimpanzee, an orang-outang, or a gorilla, he took rank among the anthropoid apes, who are so called from their resemblance to the human race. however, herbert declared it to be an orang-outang. "what a magnificent beast!" cried neb. "magnificent, if you like," replied pencroft; "but still i do not see how we are to get into our house." "herbert is a good marksman," said the reporter, "and his bow is here. he can try again." "why, these apes are so cunning," returned pencroft, "they won't show themselves again at the windows and so we can't kill them, and when i think of the mischief they may do in the rooms and storehouse--" "have patience," replied harding; "these creatures cannot keep us long at bay." "i shall not be sure of that till i see them down here," replied the sailor "and now, captain, do you know how many dozens of these fellows are up there?" it was difficult to reply to pencroft, and as for the young boy making another attempt, that was not easy; for the lower part of the ladder had been drawn again into the door, and when another pull was given, the line broke and the ladder remained firm. the case was really perplexing. pencroft stormed. there was a comic side to the situation, but he did not think it funny at all. it was certain that the settlers would end by reinstating themselves in their domicile and driving out the intruders, but when and how? that is what they were not able to say. [illustration: the invaders of granite house] two hours passed, during which the apes took care not to show themselves, but they were still there, and three or four times a nose or a paw was poked out at the door or windows, and was immediately saluted by a gun-shot. "let us hide ourselves," at last said the engineer. "perhaps the apes will think we have gone quite away and will show themselves again. let spilett and herbert conceal themselves behind those rocks and fire on all that may appear." the engineer's orders were obeyed, and whilst the reporter and the lad, the best marksmen in the colony, posted themselves in a good position, but out of the monkeys' sight, neb, pencroft, and cyrus climbed the plateau and entered the forest in order to kill some game, for it was now time for breakfast and they had no provisions remaining. in half an hour the hunters returned with a few rock pigeons, which they roasted as well as they could. not an ape had appeared. gideon spilett and herbert went to take their share of the breakfast, leaving top to watch under the windows. they then, having eaten, returned to their post. two hours later, their situation was in no degree improved. the quadrumana gave no sign of existence, and it might have been supposed that they had disappeared; but what seemed more probable was that, terrified by the death of one of their companions, and frightened by the noise of the firearms, they had retreated to the back part of the house or probably even into the storeroom. and when they thought of the valuables which this storeroom contained, the patience so much recommended by the engineer, fast changed into great irritation, and there certainly was room for it. "decidedly it is too bad," said the reporter; "and the worst of it is, there is no way of putting an end to it." "but we must drive these vagabonds out somehow," cried the sailor. "we could soon get the better of them, even if there are twenty of the rascals; but for that, we must meet them hand to hand. come now, is there no way of getting at them?" "let us try to enter granite house by the old opening at the lake," replied the engineer. "oh!" shouted the sailor, "and i never thought of that." this was in reality the only way by which to penetrate into granite house so as to fight with and drive out the intruders. the opening was, it is true, closed up with a wall of cemented stones, which it would be necessary to sacrifice, but that could easily be rebuilt. fortunately, cyrus harding had not as yet effected his project of hiding this opening by raising the waters of the lake, for the operation would then have taken some time. it was already past twelve o'clock when the colonists, well armed and provided with picks and spades, left the chimneys, passed beneath the windows of granite house, after telling top to remain at his post, and began to ascend the left bank of the mercy, so as to reach prospect heights. but they had not made fifty steps in this direction, when they heard the dog barking furiously. and all rushed down the bank again. arrived at the turning, they saw that the situation had changed. in fact, the apes, seized with a sudden panic, from some unknown cause, were trying to escape. two or three ran and clambered from one window to another with the agility of acrobats. they were not even trying to replace the ladder, by which it would have been easy to descend; perhaps in their terror they had forgotten this way of escape. the colonists, now being able to take aim without difficulty, fired. some, wounded or killed, fell back into the rooms, uttering piercing cries. the rest, throwing themselves out, were dashed to pieces in their fall, and in a few minutes, so far as they knew, there was not a living quadrumana in granite house. at this moment the ladder was seen to slip over the threshold, then unroll and fall to the ground. "hullo!" cried the sailor, "this is queer!" "very strange!" murmured the engineer, leaping first up the ladder. "take care, captain!" cried pencroft, "perhaps there are still some of these rascals..." "we shall soon see," replied the engineer, without stopping however. all his companions followed him, and in a minute they had arrived at the threshold. they searched everywhere. there was no one in the rooms nor in the storehouse, which had been respected by the band of quadrumana. "well now, and the ladder," cried the sailor; "who can the gentleman have been who sent us that down?" but at that moment a cry was heard, and a great orang, who had hidden himself in the passage, rushed into the room, pursued by neb. "ah the robber!" cried pencroft. and hatchet in hand, he was about to cleave the head of the animal, when cyrus harding seized his arm, saying,-- "spare him, pencroft." "pardon this rascal?" "yes! it was he who threw us the ladder!" and the engineer said this in such a peculiar voice that it was difficult to know whether he spoke seriously or not. nevertheless, they threw themselves on the orang, who defended himself gallantly, but was soon overpowered and bound. "there!" said pencroft. "and what shall we make of him, now we've got him?" "a servant!" replied herbert. the lad was not joking in saying this, for he knew how this intelligent race could be turned to account. the settlers then approached the ape and gazed at it attentively. he belonged to the family of anthropoid apes, of which the facial angle is not much inferior to that of the australians and hottentots. it was an orang-outang, and as such, had neither the ferocity of the gorilla, nor the stupidity of the baboon. it is to this family of the anthropoid apes that so many characteristics belong which prove them to be possessed of an almost human intelligence. employed in houses, they can wait at table, sweep rooms, brush clothes, clean boots, handle a knife, fork, and spoon properly, and even drink wine,... doing everything as well as the best servant that ever walked upon two legs. buffon possessed one of these apes, who served him for a long time as a faithful and zealous servant. [illustration: capturing the orang] the one which had been seized in the hall of granite house was a great fellow, six feet high, with an admirably proportioned frame, a broad chest, head of a moderate size, the facial angle reaching sixty-five degrees, round skull, projecting nose, skin covered with soft glossy hair, in short, a fine specimen of the anthropoids. his eyes, rather smaller than human eyes, sparkled with intelligence, his white teeth glittered under his moustache, and he wore a little curly brown beard. "a handsome fellow!" said pencroft; "if we only knew his language, we could talk to him." "but, master," said neb, "are you serious? are we going to take him as a servant?" "yes, neb," replied the engineer, smiling. "but you must not be jealous." "and i hope he will make an excellent servant," added herbert. "he appears young, and will be easy to educate, and we shall not be obliged to use force to subdue him, nor draw his teeth, as is sometimes done. he will soon grow fond of his masters if they are kind to him." "and they will be," replied pencroft, who had forgotten all his rancour against "the jokers." then, approaching the orang,-- "well, old boy!" he asked, "how are you?" the orang replied by a little grunt which did not show any anger. "you wish to join the colony?" again asked the sailor. "you are going to enter the service of captain cyrus harding?" another respondent grunt was uttered by the ape. "and you will be satisfied with no other wages than your food?" third affirmative grunt. "this conversation is slightly monotonous," observed gideon spilett. "so much the better," replied pencroft, "the best servants are those who talk the least. and then, no wages, do you hear, my boy? we will give you no wages at first, but we will double them afterwards if we are pleased with you." thus the colony was increased by a new member. as to his name the sailor begged that in memory of another ape which he had known, he might be called jupiter, and jup for short. and so, without more ceremony, master jup was installed in granite house. [illustration: engaging the new servant] chapter vii plans -- a bridge over the mercy -- mode adopted for making an island of prospect heights -- the drawbridge -- harvest -- the stream -- the poultry yard -- a pigeon-house -- the two onagas -- the cart -- excursion to port balloon. the settlers in lincoln island had now regained their dwelling, without having been obliged to reach it by the old opening, and were therefore spared the trouble of mason's work. it was certainly lucky, that at the moment they were about to set out to do so, the apes had been seized with that terror, no less sudden than inexplicable, which had driven them out of granite house. had the animals discovered that they were about to be attacked from another direction? this was the only explanation of their sudden retreat. during the day the bodies of the apes were carried into the wood, where they were buried; then the settlers busied themselves in repairing the disorder caused by the intruders, disorder but not damage, for although they had turned everything in the rooms topsy-turvy, yet they had broken nothing. neb relighted his stove, and the stores in the larder furnished a substantial repast, to which all did ample justice. jup was not forgotten, and he ate with relish some stone-pine almonds and rhizome roots, with which he was abundantly supplied. pencroft had unfastened his arms, but judged it best to have his legs tied until they were more sure of his submission. then, before retiring to rest, harding and his companions seated round their table, discussed those plans, the execution of which was most pressing. the most important and most urgent was the establishment of a bridge over the mercy, so as to form a communication with the southern part of the island and granite house; then the making of an enclosure for the musmons or other woolly animals which they wished to capture. these two projects would help to solve the difficulty as to their clothing, which was now serious. the bridge would render easy the transport of the balloon case, which would furnish them with linen, and the inhabitants of the enclosure would yield wool which would supply them with winter clothes. as to the enclosure, it was cyrus harding's intention to establish it at the sources of the red creek, where the ruminants would find fresh and abundant pasture. the road between prospect heights and the sources of the stream was already partly beaten, and with a better cart than the first, the material could be easily conveyed to the spot, especially if they could manage to capture some animals to draw it. but though there might be no inconvenience in the enclosure being so far from granite house, it would not be the same with the poultry-yard, to which neb called the attention of the colonists. it was indeed necessary that the birds should be close within reach of the cook, and no place appeared more favourable for the establishment of the said poultry-yard than that portion of the banks of the lake which was close to the old opening. water-birds would prosper there as well as others, and the couple of tinamous taken in their last excursion would be the first to be domesticated. the next day, the rd of november, the new works were begun by the construction of the bridge, and all hands were required for this important task. saws, hatchets, and hammers were shouldered by the settlers, who, now transformed into carpenters, descended to the shore. there pencroft observed,-- "suppose, that during our absence, master jup takes it into his head to draw up the ladder which he so politely returned to us yesterday?" "let us tie its lower end down firmly," replied cyrus harding. this was done by means of two stakes securely fixed in the sand. then the settlers, ascending the left bank of the mercy, soon arrived at the angle formed by the river. there they halted, in order to ascertain if the bridge could be thrown across. the place appeared suitable. in fact, from this spot, to port balloon, discovered the day before on the southern coast, there was only a distance of three miles and a half, and from the bridge to the port, it would be easy to make a good cart-road which would render the communication between granite house and the south of the island extremely easy. cyrus harding now imparted to his companions a scheme for completely isolating prospect heights so as to shelter it from the attacks both of quadrupeds and quadrumana. in this way, granite house, the chimneys, the poultry-yard, and all the upper part of the plateau which was to be used for cultivation, would be protected against the depredations of animals. nothing could be easier than to execute this project, and this is how the engineer intended to set to work. the plateau was already defended on three sides by watercourses, either artificial or natural. on the north-west, by the shores of lake grant, from the entrance of the passage to the breach made in the banks of the lake for the escape of the water. on the north, from this breach to the sea, by the new watercourse which had hollowed out a bed for itself across the plateau and shore, above and below the fall, and it would be enough to dig the bed of this creek a little deeper to make it impracticable for animals, on all the eastern border by the sea itself, from the mouth of the aforesaid creek to the mouth of the mercy. lastly on the south, from the mouth to the turn of the mercy where the bridge was to be established. the western border of the plateau now remained between the turn of the river and the southern angle of the lake, a distance of about a mile, which was open to all comers. but nothing could be easier than to dig a broad deep ditch, which could be filled from the lake, and the overflow of which would throw itself by a rapid fall into the bed of the mercy. the level of the lake would, no doubt, be somewhat lowered by this fresh discharge of its waters, but cyrus harding had ascertained that the volume of water in the red creek was considerable enough to allow of the execution of this project. [illustration: building the bridge] "so then," added the engineer, "prospect heights will become a regular island, being surrounded with water on all sides, and only communicating with the rest of our domain by the bridge which we are about to throw across the mercy, the two little bridges already established above and below the fall; and, lastly, two other little bridges which must be constructed, one over the canal which i propose to dig, the other across to the left bank of the mercy. now, if these bridges can be raised at will, prospect heights will be guarded from any surprise." the bridge was the most urgent work. trees were selected, cut down, stripped of their branches, and cut into beams, joists, and planks. the end of the bridge which rested on the right bank of the mercy was to be firm, but the other end on the left bank was to be movable, so that it might be raised by means of a counterpoise, as some canal bridges are managed. this was certainly a considerable work, and though it was skilfully conducted, it took some time, for the mercy at this place was eighty feet wide. it was therefore necessary to fix piles in the bed of the river so as to sustain the floor of the bridge and establish a pile-driver to act on the tops of these piles, which would thus form two arches and allow the bridge to support heavy loads. happily there was no want of tools with which to shape the wood, nor of iron-work to make it firm, nor of the ingenuity of a man who had a marvellous knowledge of the work, nor lastly, the zeal of his companions, who in seven months had necessarily acquired great skill in the use of their tools; and it must be said that not the least skillful was gideon spilett, who in dexterity almost equalled the sailor himself. "who would ever have expected so much from a newspaper man!" thought pencroft. the construction of the mercy bridge lasted three weeks of regular hard work. they even breakfasted on the scene of their labours, and the weather being magnificent, they only returned to granite house to sleep. during this period it may be stated that master jup grew more accustomed to his new masters, whose movements he always watched with very inquisitive eyes. however, as a precautionary measure, pencroft did not as yet allow him complete liberty, rightly wishing to wait until the limits of the plateau should be settled by the projected works. top and jup were good friends and played willingly together, but jup did everything solemnly. on the th of november the bridge was finished. the movable part, balanced by the counterpoise, swung easily, and only a slight effort was needed to raise it; between its hinge and the last cross-bar on which it rested when closed, there existed a space of twenty feet, which was sufficiently wide to prevent any animals from crossing. the settlers now began to talk of fetching the balloon-case, which they were anxious to place in perfect security; but to bring it, it would be necessary to take a cart to port balloon, and consequently, necessary to beat a road through the dense forests of the far west. this would take some time. also, neb and pencroft having gone to examine into the state of things at port balloon, and reported that the stock of cloth would suffer no damage in the grotto where it was stored, it was decided that the work at prospect heights should not be discontinued. "that," observed pencroft, "will enable us to establish our poultry-yard under better conditions, since we need have no fear of visits from foxes nor the attacks of other beasts." "then," added neb, "we can clear the plateau, and transplant wild plants to it." "and prepare our second cornfield!" cried the sailor with a triumphant air. in fact, the first cornfield sown with a single grain had prospered admirably, thanks to pencroft's care. it had produced the ten ears foretold by the engineer, and each ear containing eighty grains, the colony found itself in possession of eight hundred grains, in six months, which promised a double harvest each year. these eight hundred grains, except fifty, which were prudently reserved, were to be sown in a new field, but with no less care than was bestowed on the single grain. the field was prepared, then surrounded with a strong palisade, high and pointed, which quadrupeds would have found difficulty in leaping. as to birds, some scarecrows, due to pencroft's ingenious brain, were enough to frighten them. the seven hundred and fifty grains, deposited in very regular furrows, were then left for nature to do the rest. on the st of november, cyrus harding began to plan the canal which was to close the plateau on the west, from the south angle of lake grant to the angle of the mercy. there was there two or three feet of vegetable earth, and below that granite. it was therefore necessary to manufacture some more nitro glycerine, and the nitro glycerine did its accustomed work. in less than a fortnight a ditch twelve feet wide and six deep, was dug out in the hard ground of the plateau. a new trench was made by the same means in the rocky border of the lake forming a small stream, to which they gave the name of creek glycerine, and which was thus an affluent of the mercy. as the engineer had predicted, the level of the lake was lowered, though very slightly. to complete the enclosure the bed of the stream on the beach was considerably enlarged, and the sand supported by means of stakes. by the end of the first fortnight of december these works were finished, and prospect heights--that is to say, a sort of irregular pentagon having a perimeter of nearly four miles, surrounded by a liquid belt--was completely protected from depredators of every description. during the month of december, the heat was very great. in spite of it however, the settlers continued their work, and as they were anxious to possess a poultry-yard they forthwith commenced it. it is useless to say that since the enclosing of the plateau had been completed, master jup had been set at liberty. he did not leave his masters, and evinced no wish to escape. he was a gentle animal, though very powerful and wonderfully active. he was already taught to make himself useful by drawing loads of wood and carting away the stones which were extracted from the bed of creek glycerine. the poultry yard occupied an area of two hundred square yards on the south eastern bank of the lake. it was surrounded by a palisade, and in it were constructed various shelters for the birds which were to populate it. these were simply built of branches and divided into compartments made ready for the expected guests. [illustration: pencroft's scarecrows] the first were the two tinamous, which were not long in having a number of young ones; they had for companions half a dozen ducks, accustomed to the borders of the lake. some belonged to the chinese species, of which the wings open like a fan, and which by the brilliancy of their plumage rival the golden pheasants. a few days afterwards, herbert snared a couple of gallinaceæ, with spreading tails composed of long feathers, magnificent alectors, which soon became tame. as to pelicans, kingfishers, water-hens, they came of themselves to the shores of the poultry-yard, and this little community, after some disputes, cooing, screaming, clucking, ended by settling down peacefully, and increased in encouraging proportion for the future use of the colony. cyrus harding, wishing to complete his performance, established a pigeon-house in a corner of the poultry-yard. there he lodged a dozen of those pigeons which frequented the rocks of the plateau. these birds soon became accustomed to returning every evening to their new dwelling, and showed more disposition to domesticate themselves than their congeners, the wood-pigeons. lastly, the time had come for turning the balloon-case to use, by cutting it up to make shirts and other articles; for as to keeping it in its present form, and risking themselves in a balloon filled with gas, above a sea of the limits of which they had no idea, it was not to be thought of. it was necessary to bring the case to granite house, and the colonists employed themselves in rendering their heavy cart lighter and more manageable. but though they had a vehicle, the moving power was yet to be found. but did there not exist in the island some animal which might supply the place of the horse, ass, or ox? that was the question. "certainly," said pencroft, "a beast of burden would be very useful to us until the captain has made a steam cart, or even an engine, for some day we shall have a railroad from granite house to port balloon, with a branch line to mount franklin!" one day, the rd of december, neb and top were heard shouting and barking, each apparently trying who could make the most noise. the settlers, who were busy at the chimneys, ran, fearing some vexatious incident. what did they see? two fine animals of a large size, who had imprudently ventured on the plateau, when the bridges were open. one would have said they were horses, or at least donkeys, male and female, of a fine shape, dove-coloured, the legs and tail white, striped with black on the head and neck. they advanced quietly without showing any uneasiness, and gazed at the men, in whom they could not as yet recognise their future masters. "these are onagas!" cried herbert, "animals something between the zebra and the conaga!" "why not donkeys?" asked neb. "because they have not long ears, and their shape is more graceful!" "donkeys or horses," interrupted pencroft, "they are 'moving powers,' as the captain would say, and as such must be captured!" the sailor, without frightening the animals, crept through the grass to the bridge over creek glycerine, lowered it, and the onagas were prisoners. now, should they seize them with violence and master them by force? no. it was decided that for a few days they should be allowed to roam freely about the plateau, where there was an abundance of grass, and the engineer immediately began to prepare a stable near the poultry-yard, in which the onagas might find food, with a good litter, and shelter during the night. this done, the movements of the two magnificent creatures were left entirely free, and the settlers avoided even approaching them so as to terrify them. several times, however, the onagas appeared to wish to leave the plateau, too confined for animals accustomed to the plains and forests. they were then seen following the water-barrier which everywhere presented itself before them, uttering short neighs, then galloping through the grass, and becoming calmer, they would remain entire hours gazing at the woods, from which they were cut off for ever! in the meantime harness of vegetable fibre had been manufactured, and some days after the capture of the onagas, not only the cart was ready, but a straight road, or rather a cutting, had been made through the forests of the far west, from the angle of the mercy to port balloon. the cart might then be driven there, and towards the end of december they tried the onagas for the first time. pencroft had already coaxed the animals to come and eat out of his hand, and they allowed him to approach without making any difficulty, but once harnessed they reared and could with difficulty be held in. however it was not long before they submitted to this new service, for the onaga, being less refractory than the zebra, is frequently put in harness in the mountainous regions of southern africa, and it has even been acclimatised in europe, under zones of a relative coolness. on this day all the colony, except pencroft who walked at the animals' heads, mounted the cart, and set out on the road to port balloon. of course they were jolted over the somewhat rough road, but the vehicle arrived without any accident, and was soon loaded with the case and rigging of the balloon. at eight o'clock that evening the cart, after passing over the mercy bridge, descended the left bank of the river, and stopped on the beach. the onagas being unharnessed, were thence led to their stable, and pencroft before going to sleep gave vent to his feelings in a deep sigh of satisfaction that awoke all the echoes of granite house. chapter viii linen -- shoes of seal-leather -- manufacture of pyroxyle -- gardening -- fishing -- turtle-eggs -- improvement of master jup -- the corral -- musmon hunt -- new animal and vegetable possessions -- recollections of their native land. the first week of january was devoted to the manufacture of the linen garments required by the colony. the needles found in the box were used by sturdy if not delicate fingers, and we may be sure that what was sewn was sewn firmly. there was no lack of thread, thanks to cyrus harding's idea of re-employing that which had been already used in the covering of the balloon. this with admirable patience was all unpicked by gideon spilett and herbert, for pencroft had been obliged to give this work up, as it irritated him beyond measure; but he had no equal in the sewing part of the business. indeed, everybody knows that sailors have a remarkable aptitude for tailoring. the cloth of which the balloon-case was made was then cleaned by means of soda and potash, obtained by the incineration of plants, in such a way that the cotton, having got rid of the varnish, resumed its natural softness and elasticity; then, exposed to the action of the atmosphere, it soon became perfectly white. some dozen shirts and socks--the latter not knitted of course, but made of cotton--were thus manufactured. what a comfort it was to the settlers to clothe themselves again in clean linen, which was doubtless rather rough, but they were not troubled about that! and then to go to sleep between sheets, which made the couches at granite house into quite comfortable beds! it was about this time also that they made boots of seal-leather, which were greatly needed to replace the shoes and boots brought from america. we may be sure that these new shoes were large enough and never pinched the feet of the wearers. with the beginning of the year the heat was very great, but the hunting in the forests did not stand still. agoutis, peccaries, capybaras, kangaroos, game of all sorts, actually swarmed there, and spilett and herbert were too good marksmen ever to throw away their shot uselessly. cyrus harding still recommended them to husband the ammunition, and he took measures to replace the powder and shot which had been found in the box, and which he wished to reserve for the future. how did he know where chance might one day cast his companions and himself in the event of their leaving their domain? they should, then, prepare for the unknown future by husbanding their ammunition and by substituting for it some easily renewable substance. to replace lead, of which harding had found no traces in the island, he employed granulated iron, which was easy to manufacture. these bullets, not having the weight of leaden bullets, were made larger, and each charge contained less, but the skill of the sportsmen made up this deficiency. as to powder, cyrus harding would have been able to make that also, for he had at his disposal saltpetre, sulphur, and coal; but this preparation requires extreme care, and without special tools it is difficult to produce it of a good quality. harding preferred, therefore, to manufacture pyroxyle, that is to say gun-cotton, a substance in which cotton is not indispensable, as the elementary tissue of vegetables may be used, and this is found in an almost pure state, not only in cotton, but in the textile fibres of hemp and flax, in paper, the pith of the elder, etc. now, the elder abounded in the island towards the mouth of red creek, and the colonists had already made coffee of the berries of these shrubs, which belong to the family of the caprifoliaceæ. [illustration: the settlers' new shirts] the only thing to be collected, therefore, was elder-pith, for as to the other substance necessary for the manufacture of pyroxyle, it was only fuming azotic acid. now, harding having sulphuric acid at his disposal, had already been easily able to produce azotic acid by attacking the saltpetre with which nature supplied him. he accordingly resolved to manufacture and employ pyroxyle, although it has some inconveniences, that is to say, a great inequality of effect, an excessive inflammability, since it takes fire at one hundred and seventy degrees instead of two hundred and forty, and lastly, an instantaneous deflagration which might damage the firearms. on the other hand, the advantages of pyroxyle consist in this, that it is not injured by damp, that it does not make the gun-barrels dirty, and that its force is four times that of ordinary powder. to make pyroxyle, the cotton must be immersed in the fuming azotic acid for a quarter of an hour, then washed in cold water and dried. nothing could be more simple. cyrus harding had only at his disposal the ordinary azotic acid and not the fuming or monohydrate azotic acid, that is to say, acid which emits white vapours when it comes in contact with damp air; but by substituting for the latter ordinary azotic acid, mixed, in the proportion of from three to five volumes of concentrated sulphuric acid, the engineer obtained the same result. the sportsmen of the island therefore soon had a perfectly prepared substance, which, employed discreetly, produced admirable results. about this time the settlers cleared three acres of the plateau, and the rest was preserved in a wild state, for the benefit of the onagas. several excursions were made into the jacamar woods and forests of the far west, and they brought back from thence a large collection of wild vegetables, spinage, cress, radishes, and turnips, which careful culture would soon improve, and which would temper the regimen on which the settlers had till then subsisted. supplies of wood and coal were also carted. each excursion was at the same time a means of improving the roads, which gradually became smoother under the wheels of the cart. the rabbit-warren still continued to supply the larder of granite house. as fortunately it was situated on the other side of creek glycerine, its inhabitants could not reach the plateau nor ravage the newly-made plantation. the oyster-bed among the rocks was frequently renewed, and furnished excellent molluscs. besides that, the fishing, either in the lake or the mercy, was very profitable, for pencroft had made some lines, armed with iron hooks, with which they frequently caught fine trout, and a species of fish whose silvery sides were speckled with yellow, and which were also extremely savoury. master neb, who was skilled in the culinary art, knew how to vary agreeably the bill of fare. bread alone was wanting at the table of the settlers, and as has been said, they felt this privation greatly. the settlers hunted too the turtles which frequented the shores of cape mandible. at this place the beach was covered with little mounds, concealing perfectly spherical turtles' eggs, with white hard shells, the albumen of which does not coagulate as that of birds' eggs. they were hatched by the sun, and their number was naturally considerable, as each turtle can lay annually two hundred and fifty. "a regular egg-field," observed gideon spilett, "and we have nothing to do but to pick them up." but not being contented with simply the produce, they made chase after the producers, the result of which was that they were able to bring back to granite house a dozen of these chelonians, which were really valuable in an alimentary point of view. the turtle soup, flavoured with aromatic herbs, often gained well-merited praises for its preparer, neb. we must here mention another fortunate circumstance by which new stores for the winter were laid in. shoals of salmon entered the mercy, and ascended the country for several miles. it was the time at which the females, going to find suitable places in which to spawn, precede the males and make a great noise through the fresh water. a thousand of these fish, which measured about two feet and a half in length, came up the river, and a large quantity were retained by fixing dams across the stream. more than a hundred were thus taken, which were salted and stored for the time when winter, freezing up the streams, would render fishing impracticable. by this time the intelligent jup was raised to the duty of valet. he had been dressed in a jacket, white linen breeches, and an apron, the pockets of which were his delight. the clever orang had been marvellously trained by neb, and any one would have said that the negro and the ape understood each other when they talked together. jup had besides a real affection for neb, and neb returned it. when his services were not required, either for carrying wood or for climbing to the top of some tree, jup passed the greatest part of his time in the kitchen, where he endeavoured to imitate neb in all that he saw him do. the black showed the greatest patience and even extreme zeal in instructing his pupil, and the pupil exhibited remarkable intelligence in profiting by the lessons he received from his master. judge then of the pleasure master jup gave to the inhabitants of granite house when, without their having had any idea of it, he appeared one day, napkin on his arm, ready to wait at table. quick, attentive, he acquitted himself perfectly, changing the plates, bringing dishes, pouring out water, all with a gravity which gave intense amusement to the settlers, and which enraptured pencroft. "jup, some soup!" "jup, a little agouti!" "jup, a plate!" "jup! good jup! honest jup!" nothing was heard but that, and jup without ever being disconcerted, replied to every one, watched for everything, and he shook his head in a knowing way when pencroft, referring to his joke of the first day, said to him,-- "decidedly, jup, your wages must be doubled." it is useless to say that the orang was now thoroughly domesticated at granite house, and that he often accompanied his masters to the forest without showing any wish to leave them. it was most amusing to see him walking with a stick which pencroft had given him, and which he carried on his shoulder like a gun. if they wished to gather some fruit from the summit of a tree, how quickly he climbed for it! if the wheel of the cart, stuck in the mud, with what energy did jup with a single heave of his shoulder put it right again. "what a jolly fellow he is!" cried pencroft often. "if he was as mischievous as he is good, there would be no doing any thing with him!" it was towards the end of january the colonists began their labours in the centre of the island. it had been decided that a corral should be established near the sources of the red creek, at the foot of mount franklin, destined to contain the ruminants, whose presence would have been troublesome at granite house, and especially for the musmons, who were to supply the wool for the settlers' winter garments. each morning, the colony, sometimes entire, but more often represented only by harding, herbert, and pencroft, proceeded to the sources of the creek, a distance of not more than five miles, by the newly beaten road to which the name of corral road had been given. [illustration: jup passed most of his time in the kitchen, trying to imitate neb] there a site was chosen, at the back of the southern ridge of the mountain. it was a meadow land, dotted here and there with clumps of trees, and watered by a little stream, which sprung from the slopes which closed it in on one side. the grass was fresh, and it was not too much shaded by the trees which grew about it. this meadow was to be surrounded by a palisade, high enough to prevent even the most agile animals from leaping over. this enclosure would be large enough to contain a hundred musmons and wild goats, with all the young ones they might produce. the perimeter of the corral was then traced by the engineer, and they would then have proceeded to fell the trees necessary for the construction of the palisade, but as the opening up of the road had already necessitated the sacrifice of a considerable number, those were brought and supplied a hundred stakes, which were firmly fixed in the ground. at the front of the palisade a large entrance was reserved, and closed with strong folding-doors. the construction of this corral did not take less than three weeks, for besides the palisade, cyrus harding built large sheds, in which the animals could take shelter. these buildings had also to be made very strong, for musmons are powerful animals, and their first fury was to be feared. the stakes, sharpened at their upper end and hardened by fire, had been fixed by means of cross-bars, and at regular distances props assured the solidity of the whole. the corral finished, a raid had to be made on the pastures frequented by the ruminants. this was done on the th of february, on a beautiful summer's day, and every one took part in it. the onagas, already well trained, were ridden by spilett and herbert, and were of great use. the manoeuvre consisted simply in surrounding the musmons and goats, and gradually narrowing the circle around them. cyrus harding, pencroft, neb, and jup, posted themselves in different parts of the wood, whilst the two cavaliers and top galloped in a radius of half a mile round the corral. the musmons were very numerous in this part of the island. these fine animals were as large as deer; their horns were stronger than those of the ram, and their grey-coloured fleece was mixed with long hair. this hunting day was very fatiguing. such going and coming, and running and riding and shouting! of a hundred musmons which had been surrounded, more than two-thirds escaped, but at last, thirty of these animals and ten wild goats were gradually driven back towards the corral, the open door of which appearing to offer a means of escape, they rushed in and were prisoners. in short, the result was satisfactory, and the settlers had no reason to complain. there was no doubt that the flock would prosper, and that at no distant time not only wool but hides would be abundant. that evening the hunters returned to granite house quite exhausted. however, notwithstanding their fatigue, they returned the next day to visit the corral. the prisoners had been trying to overthrow the palisade, but of course had not succeeded, and were not long in becoming more tranquil. during the month of february, no event of any importance occurred. the daily labours were pursued methodically, and, as well as improving the roads to the corral and to port balloon, a third was commenced, which, starting from the enclosure, proceeded towards the western coast. the yet unknown portion of lincoln island was that of the wood-covered serpentine peninsula, which sheltered the wild beasts, from which gideon spilett was so anxious to clear their domain. before the cold season should appear the most assiduous care was given to the cultivation of the wild plants which had been transplanted from the forest to prospect heights. herbert never returned from an excursion without bringing home some useful vegetable. one day, it was some specimens of the chicory tribe, the seeds of which by pressure yield an excellent oil; another, it was some common sorrel, whose anti-scorbutic qualities were not to be despised; then, some of those precious tubers, which have at all times been cultivated in south america, potatoes, of which more than two hundred species are now known. the kitchen garden, now well stocked and carefully defended from the birds, was divided into small beds, where grew lettuces, kidney potatoes, sorrel, turnips, radishes, and other cruciferæ. the soil on the plateau was particularly fertile, and it was hoped that the harvests would be abundant. they had also a variety of different beverages, and so long as they did not demand wine, the most hard to please would have had no reason to complain. to the oswego tea, and the fermented liquor extracted from the roots of the dragonnier, harding had added a regular beer, made from the young shoots of the spruce-fir, which, after having been boiled and fermented, made that agreeable drink, called by the anglo-americans spring-beer. towards the end of the summer, the poultry-yard was possessed of a couple of fine bustards, which belonged to the houbara species, characterised by a sort of feathery mantle; a dozen shovellers, whose upper mandible was prolonged on each side by a membraneous appendage; and also some magnificent cocks, similar to the mozambique cocks, the comb, caruncle and epidermis being black. so far, everything had succeeded, thanks to the activity of these courageous and intelligent men. nature did much for them, doubtless; but faithful to the great precept, they made a right use of what a bountiful providence gave them. after the heat of these warm summer days, in the evening when their work was finished and the sea breeze began to blow, they liked to sit on the edge of prospect heights, in a sort of verandah, covered with creepers, which neb had made with his own hands. there they talked, they instructed each other, they made plans, and the rough good-humour of the sailor always amused this little world, in which the most perfect harmony had never ceased to reign. they often spoke of their country, of their dear and great america. what was the result of the war of secession? it could not have been greatly prolonged, richmond had doubtless soon fallen into the hands of general grant. the taking of the capital of the confederates must have been the last action of this terrible struggle. now the north had triumphed in the good cause, how welcome would have been a newspaper to the exiles in lincoln island! for eleven months all communication between them and the rest of their fellow-creatures had been interrupted, and in a short time the th of march would arrive, the anniversary of the day on which the balloon had thrown them on this unknown coast. they were then mere castaways, not even knowing how they should preserve their miserable lives from the fury of the elements! and now, thanks to the knowledge of their captain, and their own intelligence, they were regular colonists, furnished with arms, tools, and instruments; they had been able to turn to their profit the animals, plants, and minerals of the island, that is to say, the three kingdoms of nature. yes; they often talked of all these things and formed still more plans for the future. as to cyrus harding he was for the most part silent, and listened to his companions more often than he spoke to them. sometimes he smiled at herbert's ideas or pencroft's nonsense, but always and everywhere he pondered over those inexplicable facts, that strange enigma, of which the secret still escaped him! chapter ix bad weather -- the hydraulic lift -- manufacture of glass-ware -- the bread-tree -- frequent visits to the corral -- increase of the flock -- the reporter's question -- exact position of lincoln island -- pencroft's proposal. the weather changed during the first week of march. there had been a full moon at the commencement of the month, and the heat was still excessive. the atmosphere was felt to be full of electricity, and a period of some length of tempestuous weather was to be feared. indeed, on the nd, peals of thunder were heard, the wind blew from the east, and hail rattled against the façade of granite house like volleys of grape-shot. the door and windows were immediately closed, or everything in the rooms would have been drenched. on seeing these hailstones, some of which were the size of a pigeon's egg, pencroft's first thought was that his cornfield was in serious danger. he directly rushed to his field, where little green heads were already appearing, and, by means of a great cloth, he managed to protect his crop. this bad weather lasted a week, during which time the thunder rolled without cessation in the depths of the sky. the colonists, not having any pressing work out of doors, profited by the bad weather to work at the interior of granite house, the arrangement of which was becoming more complete from day to day. the engineer made a turning-lathe, with which he turned several articles both for the toilet and the kitchen, particularly buttons, the want of which was greatly felt. a gun-rack had been made for the firearms, which were kept with extreme care, and neither tables nor cupboards were left incomplete. they sawed, they planed, they filed, they turned: and during the whole of this bad season, nothing was heard but the grinding of tools or the humming of the turning-lathe which responded to the growling of the thunder. [illustration: pencroft to the rescue] master jup had not been forgotten, and he occupied a room at the back, near the storeroom, a sort of cabin with a cot always full of good litter, which perfectly suited his taste. "with good old jup there is never any quarrelling," often repeated pencroft, "never any improper reply! what a servant, neb, what a servant!" of course jup was now well used to service. he brushed their clothes, he turned the spit, he waited at table, he swept the rooms, he gathered wood, and he performed another admirable piece of service which delighted pencroft--he never went to sleep without first coming to tuck up the worthy sailor in his bed. as to the health of the members of the colony, bipeds or bimana, quadrumana or quadrupeds, it left nothing to be desired. with their life in the open air, on this salubrious soil, under that temperate zone, working both with head and hands, they could not suppose that illness would ever attack them. all were indeed wonderfully well. herbert had already grown two inches in the year. his figure was forming and becoming more manly, and he promised to be an accomplished man, physically as well as morally. besides, he improved himself during the leisure hours which manual occupations left to him; he read the books found in the case; and after the practical lessons which were taught by the very necessity of their position, he found in the engineer for science, and the reporter for languages, masters who were delighted to complete his education. the tempest ended about the th of march, but the sky remained covered with clouds during the whole of this last summer month. the atmosphere, violently agitated by the electric commotions, could not recover its former purity, and there was almost invariably rain and fog, except for three or four fine days on which several excursions were made. about this time the female onaga gave birth to a young one which belonged to the same sex as its mother, and which throve capitally. in the corral, the flock of musmons had also increased, and several lambs already bleated in the sheds, to the great delight of neb and herbert, who had each their favourite among these new-comers. an attempt was also made for the domestication of the peccaries, which succeeded well. a sty was constructed near the poultry-yard, and soon contained several young ones in the way to become civilised, that is to say, to become fat under neb's care. master jup, entrusted with carrying them their daily nourishment, leavings from the kitchen, etc., acquitted himself conscientiously of his task. he sometimes amused himself at the expense of his little pensioners by tweaking their tails; but this was mischief, and not wickedness, for these little twisted tails amused him like a plaything, and his instinct was that of a child. one day in this month of march, pencroft, talking to the engineer, reminded cyrus harding of a promise which the latter had not as yet had time to fulfil. "you once spoke of an apparatus which would take the place of the long ladders at granite house, captain," said he; "won't you make it some day?" "nothing will be easier; but is this a really useful thing?" "certainly, captain. after we have given ourselves necessaries, let us think a little of luxury. for us it may be luxury, if you like, but for things it is necessary. it isn't very convenient to climb up a long ladder when one is heavily loaded." "well, pencroft, we will try to please you," replied cyrus harding. "but you have no machine at your disposal." "we will make one." "a steam machine?" "no, a water machine." and, indeed, to work his apparatus there was already a natural force at the disposal of the engineer which could be used without great difficulty. for this, it was enough to augment the flow of the little stream which supplied the interior of granite house with water. the opening among the stones and grass was then increased, thus producing a strong fall at the bottom of the passage, the overflow from which escaped by the inner well. below this fall the engineer fixed a cylinder with paddles, which was joined on the exterior with a strong cable rolled on a wheel, supporting a basket. in this way, by means of a long rope reaching to the ground, which enabled them to regulate the motive power, they could rise in the basket to the door of granite house. it was on the th of march that the lift acted for the first time, and gave universal satisfaction. henceforward all the loads, wood, coal, provisions, and even the settlers themselves, were hoisted by this simple system, which replaced the primitive ladder, and, as may be supposed, no one thought of regretting the change. top particularly was enchanted with this improvement, for he had not, and never could have possessed master jup's skill in climbing ladders, and often it was on neb's back, or even on that of the orang, that he had been obliged to make the ascent to granite house. about this time, too, cyrus harding attempted to manufacture glass and he at first put the old pottery-kiln to this new use. there were some difficulties to be encountered, but after several fruitless attempts, he succeeded in setting up a glass manufactory, which gideon spilett and herbert, his usual assistants did not leave for several days. as to the substances used in the composition of glass, they are simply sand, chalk and soda, either carbonate or sulphate. now the beach supplied sand, lime supplied chalk, sea weeds supplied soda, pyrites supplied sulphuric acid and the ground supplied coal to heat the kiln to the wished-for temperature. cyrus harding thus soon had every thing ready for setting to work. the tool, the manufacture of which presented the most difficulty, was the pipe of the glass maker, an iron tube, five or six feet long, which collects on one end the material in a state of fusion. but by means of a long, thin piece of iron rolled up like the barrel of a gun, pencroft succeeded in making a tube soon ready for use. on the th of march the tube was heated. a hundred parts of sand thirty-five of chalk, forty of sulphate of soda, mixed with two or three parts of powered coal, composed the substance which was placed in crucibles. when the high temperature of the oven had reduced it to a liquid, or rather a pasty state, cyrus harding collected with the tube a quantity of the paste, he turned it about on a metal plate previously arranged so as to give it a form suitable for blowing, then he passed the tube to herbert, telling him to blow at the other extremity. [illustration: the glass-blowers] and herbert, swelling out his cheeks, blew so much and so well into the tube--taking care to twirl it round at the same time--that his breath dilated the glassy mass. other quantities of the substance in a state of fusion were added to the first, and in a short time the result was a bubble which measured a foot in diameter. harding then took the tube out of herbert's hands, and, giving to it a pendulous motion, he ended by lengthening the malleable bubble so as to give it a cylindro-conic shape. the blowing operation had given a cylinder of glass terminated by two hemispheric caps, which were easily detached by means of a sharp iron dipped in cold water; then, by the same proceeding, this cylinder was cut lengthways, and after having been rendered malleable by a second heating, it was extended on a plate and spread out with a wooden roller. the first pane was thus manufactured, and they had only to perform this operation fifty times to have fifty panes. the windows at granite house were soon furnished with panes; not very white, perhaps, but still sufficiently transparent. as to bottles and tumblers, that was only play. they were satisfied with them, besides, just as they came from the end of the tube. pencroft had asked to be allowed to "blow" in his turn, and it was great fun for him; but he blew so hard that his productions took the most ridiculous shapes, which he admired immensely. cyrus harding and herbert, whilst hunting one day, had entered the forest of the far west, on the left bank of the mercy, and, as usual, the lad was asking a thousand questions of the engineer, who answered them heartily. now, as harding was not a sportsman, and as, on the other side, herbert was talking chemistry and natural philosophy, numbers of kangaroos, capybaras, and agoutis came within range, which, however, escaped the lad's gun; the consequence was that the day was already advanced, and the two hunters were in danger of having made a useless excursion, when herbert, stopping, and uttering a cry of joy, exclaimed,-- "oh, captain harding, do you see that tree?" and he pointed to a shrub, rather than a tree, for it was composed of a single stem, covered with a scaly bark, which bore leaves streaked with little parallel veins. "and what is this tree which resembles a little palm?" asked harding. "it is a 'cycas revoluta,' of which i have a picture in our dictionary of natural history!" said herbert. "but i can't see any fruit on this shrub!" observed his companion. "no, captain," replied herbert; "but its stem contains a flour with which nature has provided us all ready ground." "it is, then, the bread-tree?" "yes, the bread-tree." "well, my boy," replied the engineer, "this is a valuable discovery, since our wheat harvest is not yet ripe; i hope that you are not mistaken!" herbert was not mistaken: he broke the stem of a cycas, which was composed of a glandulous tissue, containing a quantity of floury pith, traversed with woody fibre, separated by rings of the same substance, arranged concentrically. with this fecula was mingled a mucilaginous juice of disagreeable flavour, but which it would be easy to get rid of by pressure. this cellular substance was regular flour of a superior quality, extremely nourishing; its exportation was formerly forbidden by the japanese laws. cyrus harding and herbert, after having examined that part of the far west where the cycas grew, took their bearings, and returned to granite house, where they made known their discovery. the next day the settlers went to collect some and returned to granite house with an ample supply of cycas stems. the engineer constructed a press, with which to extract the mucilaginous juice mingled with the fecula, and he obtained a large quantity of flour, which neb soon transformed into cakes and puddings. this was not quite real wheaten bread, but it was very like it. now, too, the onaga, the goats, and the sheep in the corral furnished daily the milk necessary to the colony. the cart, or rather a sort of light carriole which had replaced it, made frequent journeys to the corral, and when it was pencroft's turn to go he took jup, and let him drive, and jup, cracking his whip, acquitted himself with his customary intelligence. everything prospered, as well in the corral as in granite house and certainly the settlers, if it had not been that they were so far from their native land, had no reason to complain. they were so well suited to this life, and were, besides, so accustomed to the island, that they could not have left its hospitable soil without regret! and yet so deeply is the love of his country implanted in the heart of man, that if a ship had unexpectedly come in sight of the island, the colonists would have made signals, would have attracted her attention, and would have departed! it was the st of april, a sunday, easter day, which harding and his companions sanctified by rest and prayer. the day was fine, such as an october day in the northern hemisphere might be. all, towards the evening after dinner, were seated under the verandah on the edge of prospect heights, and they were watching the darkness creeping up from the horizon. some cups of the infusion of elder berries, which took the place of coffee, had been served by neb. they were speaking of the island and of its isolated situation in the pacific, which led gideon spilett to say,-- "my dear cyrus, have you ever, since you possessed the sextant found in the case, again taken the position of our island?" "no," replied the engineer "but it would perhaps be a good thing to do it with this instrument, which is more perfect than that which you before used." "what is the good?" said pencroft. "the island is quite comfortable where it is!" "well, who knows," returned the reporter, "who knows but that we may be much nearer inhabited land than we think?" "we shall know to morrow," replied cyrus harding, "and if it had not been for the occupations which left me no leisure, we should have known it already." "good!" said pencroft. "the captain is too good an observer to be mistaken, and, if it has not moved from its place, the island is just where he put it." "we shall see." [illustration: the verandah on the edge of prospect heights] on the next day, therefore, by means of the sextant, the engineer made the necessary observations to verify the position which he had already obtained, and this was the result of his operation. his first observation had given him for the situation of lincoln island,-- in west longitude: from ° to °; in south latitude: from ° to °. the second gave exactly: in longitude: ° ´; in south latitude: ° ´. so then, notwithstanding the imperfection of his apparatus, cyrus harding had operated with so much skill that his error did not exceed five degrees. "now," said gideon spilett, "since we possess an atlas as well as a sextant, let us see, my dear cyrus, the exact position which lincoln island occupies in the pacific." herbert fetched the atlas, and the map of the pacific was opened, and the engineer, compass in hand, prepared to determine their position. suddenly the compasses stopped, and he exclaimed,-- "but an island exists in this part of the pacific already!" "an island?" cried pencroft. "tabor island." "an important island?" "no, an islet lost in the pacific, and which perhaps has never been visited." "well, we will visit it," said pencroft. "we?" "yes, captain. we will build a decked boat, and i will undertake to steer her. at what distance are we from this tabor island?" "about a hundred and fifty miles to the north-east," replied harding. "a hundred and fifty miles! and what's that?" returned pencroft. "in forty-eight hours, with a good wind, we should sight it!" and, on this reply, it was decided that a vessel should be constructed in time to be launched towards the month of next october, on the return of the fine season. chapter x boat-building -- second crop of corn -- hunting koalas -- a new plant, more pleasant than useful -- whale in sight -- a harpoon from the vineyard -- cutting up the whale -- use for the bones -- end of the month of may -- pencroft has nothing left to wish for. when pencroft had once got a plan into his head, he had no peace till it was executed. now he wished to visit tabor island, and as a boat of a certain size was necessary for this voyage, he determined to build one. what wood should be employed? elm or fir, both of which abounded in the island? they decided for the fir, as being easy to work, but which stands water as well as the elm. these details settled, it was agreed that since the fine season would not return before six months, cyrus harding and pencroft should work alone at the boat. gideon spilett and herbert were to continue to hunt, and neither neb nor master jup his assistant were to leave the domestic duties which had devolved upon them. directly the trees were chosen, they were felled, stripped of their branches, and sawn into planks as well as sawyers would have been able to do it. a week after, in the recess between the chimneys and the cliff, a dockyard was prepared, and a keel five-and-thirty feet long, furnished with a stern-post at the stern and a stem at the bows, lay along the sand. cyrus harding was not working in the dark at this new trade. he knew as much about ship-building as about nearly everything else, and he had at first drawn the model of his ship on paper. besides, he was ably seconded by pencroft, who, having worked for several years in a dockyard at brooklyn, knew the practical part of the trade. it was not until after careful calculation and deep thought that the timbers were laid on the keel. pencroft, as may be believed, was all eagerness to carry out his new enterprise, and would not leave his work for an instant. a single thing had the honour of drawing him, but for one day only, from his dockyard. this was the second wheat-harvest, which was gathered in on the th of april. it was as much a success as the first, and yielded the number of grains which had been predicted. "five bushels, captain," said pencroft, after having scrupulously measured his treasure. "five bushels," replied the engineer; "and a hundred and thirty thousand grains a bushel will make six hundred and fifty thousand grains." "well, we will sow them all this time," said the sailor, "except a little in reserve." "yes, pencroft, and if the next crop gives a proportionate yield, we shall have four thousand bushels." "and shall we eat bread?" "we shall eat bread." "but we must have a mill." "we will make one." the third cornfield was very much larger than the two first, and the soil, prepared with extreme care, received the precious seed. that done, pencroft returned to his work. during this time spilett and herbert hunted in the neighbourhood, and they ventured deep into the still unknown parts of the far west, their guns loaded with ball, ready for any dangerous emergency. it was a vast thicket of magnificent trees, crowded together as if pressed for room. the exploration of these dense masses of wood was difficult in the extreme, and the reporter never ventured there without the pocket-compass, for the sun scarcely pierced through the thick foliage, and it would have been very difficult for them to retrace their way. it naturally happened that game was more rare in those situations where there was hardly sufficient room to move; two or three large herbivorous animals were however killed during the last fortnight of april. these were koalas, specimens of which the settlers had already seen to the north of the lake, and which stupidly allowed themselves to be killed among the thick branches of the trees in which they took refuge. their skins were brought back to granite house, and there, by the help of sulphuric acid, they were subjected to a sort of tanning process which rendered them capable of being used. [illustration: the dockyard] on the th of april, the two sportsmen were in the depth of the far west, when the reporter, preceding herbert a few paces, arrived in a sort of clearing, into which the trees more sparsely scattered had permitted a few rays to penetrate. gideon spilett was at first surprised at the odour which exhaled from certain plants with straight stalks, round and branchy, bearing grape-like clusters of flowers and very small berries. the reporter broke off one or two of these stalks and returned to the lad, to whom he said,-- "what can this be, herbert?" "well, mr. spilett," said herbert, "this is a treasure which will secure you pencroft's gratitude for ever." "is it tobacco?" "yes, and though it may not be of the first quality, it is none the less tobacco!" "oh, good old pencroft! won't he be pleased? but we must not let him smoke it all, he must give us our share." "ah! an idea occurs to me, mr. spilett," replied herbert. "don't let us say anything to pencroft yet; we will prepare these leaves, and one fine day we will present him with a pipe already filled!" "all right, herbert, and on that day our worthy companion will have nothing left to wish for in this world." the reporter and the lad secured a good store of the precious plant, and then returned to granite house, where they smuggled it in with as much precaution as if pencroft had been the most vigilant and severe of custom-house officers. cyrus harding and neb were taken into confidence, and the sailor suspected nothing during the whole time, necessarily somewhat long, which was required in order to dry the small leaves, chop them up, and subject them to a certain torrefaction on hot stones. this took two months; but all these manipulations were successfully carried on unknown to pencroft, for, occupied with the construction of his boat, he only returned to granite house at the hour of rest. for some days they had observed an enormous animal two or three miles out in the open sea swimming around lincoln island. this was a whale of the largest size, which apparently belonged to the southern species, called the "cape whale." "what a lucky chance it would be if we could capture it!" cried the sailor. "ah, if we only had a proper boat and a good harpoon, i would say, 'after the beast,' for he would be well worth the trouble of catching!" "well, pencroft," observed harding, "i should much like to watch you handling a harpoon. it would be very interesting." "i am astonished," said the reporter, "to see a whale in this comparatively high latitude." "why so, mr. spilett?" replied herbert. "we are exactly in that part of the pacific which english and american whalemen call the whale field, and it is here, between new zealand and south america, that the whales of the southern hemisphere are met with in the greatest numbers." and pencroft returned to his work, not without uttering a sigh of regret, for every sailor is a born fisherman, and if the pleasure of fishing is in exact proportion to the size of the animal, one can judge how a whaler feels in sight of a whale. and if this had only been for pleasure! but they could not help feeling how valuable such a prize would have been to the colony, for the oil, the fat, and the bones would have been put to many uses. now it happened that this whale appeared to have no wish to leave the waters of the island. therefore, whether from the windows of granite house, or from prospect heights, herbert and gideon spilett, when they were not hunting, or neb unless presiding over his fires, never left the telescope, but watched all the animal's movements. the cetacean, having entered far into union bay, made rapid furrows across it from mandible cape to claw cape, propelled by its enormously powerful flukes, on which it supported itself, and making its way through the water at the rate little short of twelve knots an hour. sometimes also it approached so near to the island that it could be clearly distinguished. it was the southern whale, which is completely black, the head being more depressed than that of the northern whale. they could also see it throwing up from its air-holes to a great height, a cloud of vapour, or of water, for, strange as it may appear, naturalists and whalers are not agreed on this subject. is it air or is it water which is thus driven out? it is generally admitted to be vapour, which, condensing suddenly by contact with the cold air, falls again as rain. however, the presence of this mammifer preoccupied the colonists. it irritated pencroft especially as he could think of nothing else while at work. he ended by longing for it, like a child for a thing which it has been denied. at night he talked about it in his sleep, and certainly if he had had the means of attacking it, if the sloop had been in a fit state to put to sea, he would not have hesitated to set out in pursuit. but what the colonists could not do for themselves, chance did for them, and on the rd of may, shouts from neb, who had stationed himself at the kitchen window, announced that the whale was stranded on the beach of the island. herbert and gideon spilett, who were just about to set out hunting, left their guns, pencroft threw down his axe, and harding and neb joining their companions, all rushed towards the scene of action. the stranding had taken place on the beach of flotsam point, three miles from granite house, and at high tide. it was therefore probable that the cetacean would not be able to extricate itself easily, at any rate it was best to hasten, so as to cut off its retreat if necessary. they ran with pick-axes and iron-tipped poles in their hands, passed over the mercy bridge, descended the right bank of the river, along the beach, and in less than twenty minutes the settlers were close to the enormous animal, above which flocks of birds already hovered. "what a monster!" cried neb. and the exclamation was natural, for it was a southern whale, eighty feet long, a giant of the species, probably not weighing less than a hundred and fifty thousand pounds! in the meanwhile, the monster thus stranded did not move, nor attempt by struggling to regain the water whilst the tide was still high. it was dead, and a harpoon was sticking out of its left side. "there are whalers in these quarters, then?" said gideon spilett directly. [illustration: a valuable prize] "oh, mr spilett, that doesn't prove anything!" replied pencroft. "whales have been known to go thousands of miles with a harpoon in the side, and this one might even have been struck in the north of the atlantic and come to die in the south of the pacific, and it would be nothing astonishing." pencroft, having torn the harpoon from the animal's side, read this inscription on it:-- "'maria stella,' "vineyard." "a vessel from the vineyard! a ship from my country!" he cried. "the _maria stella_! a fine whaler, 'pon my word; i know her well! oh, my friends, a vessel from the vineyard!--a whaler from the vineyard!"[ ] [ ] a port in the state of new york. and the sailor brandishing the harpoon, repeated, not without emotion, the name which he loved so well--the name of his birthplace. but as it could not be expected that the _maria stella_ would come to reclaim the animal harpooned by her, they resolved to begin cutting it up before decomposition should commence. the birds, who had watched this rich prey for several days, had determined to take possession of it without further delay, and it was necessary to drive them off by firing at them repeatedly. the whale was a female, and a large quantity of milk was taken from it, which, according to the opinion of the naturalist duffenbach, might pass for cow's milk, and, indeed, it differs from it neither in taste, colour, nor density. pencroft had formerly served on board a whaling-ship, and he could methodically direct the operation of cutting up--a sufficiently disagreeable operation lasting three days, but from which the settlers did not flinch, not even gideon spilett, who, as the sailor said, would end by making a "real good castaway." the blubber, cut in parallel slices of two feet and a half in thickness, then divided into pieces which might weigh about a thousand pounds each, was melted down in large earthen pots brought to the spot, for they did not wish to taint the environs of granite house, and in this fusion it lost nearly a third of its weight. but there was an immense quantity of it; the tongue alone yielded six thousand pounds of oil, and the lower lip four thousand. then, besides the fat, which would insure for a long time a store of stearine and glycerine, there were still the bones, for which a use could doubtless be found, although there were neither umbrellas nor stays used at granite house. the upper part of the mouth of the cetacean was, indeed, provided on both sides with eight hundred horny blades, very elastic, of a fibrous texture, and fringed at the edge like great combs, of which the teeth, six feet long, served to retain the thousands of animalculæ, little fish, and molluscs, on which the whale fed. the operation finished, to the great satisfaction of the operators, the remains of the animal were left to the birds, who would soon make every vestige of it disappear, and their usual daily occupations were resumed by the inmates of granite house. however, before returning to the dockyard, cyrus harding conceived the idea of fabricating certain machines, which greatly excited the curiosity of his companions. he took a dozen of the whale's bones, cut them into six equal parts, and sharpened their ends. "this machine is not my own invention, and it is frequently employed by the aleutian hunters in russian america. you see these bones, my friends; well, when it freezes, i will bend them, and then wet them with water till they are entirely covered with ice, which will keep them bent, and i will strew them on the snow, having previously covered them with fat. now, what will happen if a hungry animal swallows one of these baits? why, the heat of his stomach will melt the ice, and the bone, springing straight, will pierce him with its sharp points." "well! i do call that ingenious!" said pencroft. "and it will spare the powder and shot," rejoined cyrus harding. "that will be better than traps!" added neb. in the meanwhile the boat-building progressed, and towards the end of the month half the planking was completed. it could already be seen that her shape was excellent, and that she would sail well. pencroft worked with unparalleled ardour, and only a sturdy frame could have borne such fatigue; but his companions were preparing in secret a reward for his labours, and on the st of may he was to meet with one of the greatest joy's of his life. on that day, after dinner, just as he was about to leave the table, pencroft felt a hand on his shoulder. it was the hand of gideon spilett, who said,-- "one moment, master pencroft, you mustn't sneak off like that! you've forgotten your dessert." "thank you, mr. spilett," replied the sailor, "i am going back to my work." "well a cup of coffee, my friend?" "nothing more." "a pipe, then?" pencroft jumped up, and his great good-natured face grew pale when he saw the reporter presenting him with a ready-filled pipe, and herbert with a glowing coal. the sailor endeavoured to speak, but could not get out a word, so, seizing the pipe, he carried it to his lips, then applying the coal, he drew five or six great whiffs. a fragrant blue cloud soon arose, and from its depths a voice was heard repeating excitedly,-- "tobacco! real tobacco!" "yes, pencroft," returned cyrus harding, "and very good tobacco too!" "o divine providence! sacred author of all things!" cried the sailor. "nothing more is now wanting to our island." and pencroft smoked, and smoked, and smoked. "and who made this discovery?" he asked at length. "you, herbert, no doubt?" "no, pencroft, it was mr. spilett." "mr spilett!" exclaimed the sailor seizing the reporter, and clasping him to his breast with such a squeeze that he had never felt anything like it before. "oh, pencroft," said spilett, recovering his breath at last, "a truce for one moment. you must share your gratitude with herbert, who recognised the plant, with cyrus, who prepared it, and with neb who took a great deal of trouble to keep our secret." "well, my friends, i will repay you some day," replied the sailor. "now we are friends for life." [illustration: pencroft has nothing left to wish for] chapter xi winter -- felling wood -- the mill -- pencroft's fixed idea -- the bones -- to what use an albatross may be put -- fuel for the future -- top and jup -- storms -- damage to the poultry-yard -- excursion to the marsh -- cyrus harding alone -- exploring the well winter arrived with the month of june, which is the december of the northern zones, and the great business was the making of warm and solid clothing. the musmons in the corral had been stripped of their wool, and this precious textile material was now to be transformed into stuff. of course cyrus harding, having at his disposal neither carders, combers, polishers, stretchers, twisters, mule-jenny, nor self-acting machine to spin the wool, nor loom to weave it, was obliged to proceed in a simpler way, so as to do without spinning and weaving. and indeed he proposed to make use of the property which the filaments of wool possess when subjected to a powerful pressure of mixing together, and of manufacturing by this simple process the material called felt. this felt could then be obtained by a simple operation which, if it diminished the flexibility of the stuff, increased its power of retaining heat in proportion. now the wool furnished by the musmons was composed of very short hairs, and was in a good condition to be felted. the engineer, aided by his companions, including pencroft, who was once more obliged to leave his boat, commenced the preliminary operations, the object of which was to rid the wool of that fat and oily substance with which it is impregnated, and which is called grease. this cleaning was done in vats filled with water, which was maintained at the temperature of seventy degrees, and in which the wool was soaked for four-and-twenty hours; it was then thoroughly washed in baths of soda, and, when sufficiently dried by pressure, it was in a state to be compressed, that is to say, to produce a solid material, rough, no doubt, and such as would have no value in a manufacturing centre of europe or america, but which would be highly esteemed in the lincoln island markets. this sort of material must have been known from the most ancient times, and, in fact, the first woollen stuffs were manufactured by the process which harding was now about to employ. where harding's engineering qualifications now came into play was in the construction of the machine for pressing the wool, for he knew how to turn ingeniously to profit the mechanical force, hitherto unused, which the waterfall on the beach possessed to move a fulling-mill. nothing could be more rudimentary. the wool was placed in troughs, and upon it fell in turns heavy wooden mallets, such was the machine in question, and such it had been for centuries until the time when the mallets were replaced by cylinders of compression, and the material was no longer subjected to beating, but to regular rolling. the operation, ably directed by cyrus harding, was a complete success. the wool, previously impregnated with a solution of soap, intended on the one hand to facilitate the interlacing, the compression, and the softening of the wool, and on the other to prevent its diminution by the beating, issued from the mill in the shape of thick felt cloth. the roughnesses with which the staple of wool is naturally filled were so thoroughly entangled and interlaced together that a material was formed equally suitable either for garments or bedclothes. it was certainly neither merino, muslin, cashmere, rep, satin, alpaca, cloth, nor flannel. it was "lincolnian felt," and lincoln island possessed yet another manufacture. the colonists had now warm garments and thick bedclothes, and they could without fear await the approach of the winter of - . the severe cold began to be felt about the th of june, and, to his great regret, pencroft was obliged to suspend his boat-building, which he hoped to finish in time for next spring. the sailor's great idea was to make a voyage of discovery to tabor island, although harding could not approve of a voyage simply for curiosity's sake, for there was evidently nothing to be found on this desert and almost arid rock. a voyage of a hundred and fifty miles in a comparatively small vessel, over unknown seas, could not but cause him some anxiety. suppose that their vessel, once out at sea, should be unable to reach tabor island, and could not return to lincoln island, what would become of her in the midst of the pacific, so fruitful of disasters? harding often talked over this project with pencroft, and he found him strangely bent upon undertaking this voyage, for which determination he himself could give no sufficient reason. "now," said the engineer one day to him, "i must observe, my friend, that after having said so much, in praise of lincoln island, after having spoken so often of the sorrow you would feel if you were obliged to forsake it, you are the first to wish to leave it." "only to leave it for a few days," replied pencroft, "only for a few days, captain. time to go and come back, and see what that islet is like!" "but it is not nearly as good as lincoln island." "i know that beforehand." "then why venture there?" "to know what is going on in tabor island." "but nothing is going on there; nothing could happen there." "who knows?" "and if you are caught in a hurricane?" "there is no fear of that in the fine season," replied pencroft. "but, captain, as we must provide against everything, i shall ask your permission to take herbert only with me on this voyage." "pencroft," replied the engineer, placing his hand on the sailor's shoulder, "if any misfortune happens to you, or to this lad, whom chance has made our child, do you think we could ever cease to blame ourselves?" "captain harding," replied pencroft, with unshaken confidence, "we shall not cause you that sorrow. besides, we will speak further of this voyage, when the time comes to make it. and i fancy, when you have seen our tight-rigged little craft, when you have observed how she behaves at sea, when we sail round our island, for we will do so together--i fancy, i say, that you will no longer hesitate to let me go. i don't conceal from you that your boat will be a masterpiece." "say 'our' boat, at least, pencroft," replied the engineer, disarmed for the moment. the conversation ended thus, to be resumed later on, without convincing either the sailor or the engineer. the first snow fell towards the end of the month of june. the corral had previously been largely supplied with stores, so that daily visits to it were not requisite; but it was decided that more than a week should never be allowed to pass without some one going to it. traps were again set, and the machines manufactured by harding were tried. the bent whalebones, imprisoned in a case of ice, and covered with a thick outer layer of fat, were placed on the border of the forest at a spot where animals usually passed on their way to the lake. to the engineer's great satisfaction, this invention, copied from the aleutian fishermen, succeeded perfectly. a dozen foxes, a few wild boars, and even a jaguar, were taken in this way, the animals being found dead, their stomachs pierced by the unbent bones. an incident must here be related, not only as interesting in itself, but because it was the first attempt made by the colonists to communicate with the rest of mankind. gideon spilett had already several times pondered whether to throw into the sea a letter enclosed in a bottle, which currents might perhaps carry to an inhabited coast, or to confide it to pigeons. but how could it be seriously hoped that either pigeons or bottles could cross the distance of twelve hundred miles which separated the island from any inhabited land? it would have been pure folly. but on the th of june the capture was effected, not without difficulty, of an albatross, which a shot from herbert's gun had slightly wounded in the foot. it was a magnificent bird, measuring ten feet from wing to wing, and which could traverse seas as wide as the pacific. herbert would have liked to keep this superb bird, as its wound would soon heal, and he thought he could tame it; but spilett explained to him that they should not neglect this opportunity of attempting to communicate by this messenger with the lands of the pacific; for if the albatross had come from some inhabited region, there was no doubt but that it would return there so soon as it was set free. perhaps in his heart gideon spilett, in whom the journalist sometimes came to the surface, was not sorry to have the opportunity of sending forth to take its chance an exciting article relating the adventures of the settlers in lincoln island. what a success for the authorised reporter of the _new york herald_, and for the number which should contain the article, if it should ever reach the address of its editor, the honourable john benett! gideon spilett then wrote out a concise account, which was placed in a strong waterproof bag, with an earnest request to whoever might find it to forward it to the office of the _new york herald_. this little bag was fastened to the neck of the albatross, and not to its foot, for these birds are in the habit of resting on the surface of the sea; then liberty was given to this swift courier of the air, and it was not without some emotion that the colonists watched it disappear in the misty west. "where is he going to?" asked pencroft. "towards new zealand," replied herbert. "a good voyage to you," shouted the sailor, who himself did not expect any great result from this mode of correspondence. with the winter, work had been resumed in the interior of granite house, mending clothes and different occupations, amongst others making the sails for their vessel, which were cut from the inexhaustible balloon-case. during the month of july the cold was intense, but there was no lack of either wood or coal. cyrus harding had established a second fireplace in the dining-room, and there the long winter evenings were spent. talking whilst they worked, reading when the hands remained idle, the time passed with profit to all. [illustration: the messenger] it was real enjoyment to the settlers when in their room, well lighted with candles, well warmed with coal, after a good dinner, elder-berry coffee smoking in the cups, the pipes giving forth an odoriferous smoke, they could hear the storm howling without. their comfort would have been complete, if complete comfort could ever exist for those who are far from their fellow creatures, and without any means of communication with them. they often talked of their country, of the friends whom they had left, of the grandeur of the american republic, whose influence could not but increase, and cyrus harding, who had been much mixed up with the affairs of the union, greatly interested his auditors by his recitals, his views, and his prognostics. it chanced one day that spilett was led to say,-- "but now, my dear cyrus, all this industrial and commercial movement to which you predict a continual advance, does it not run the danger of being sooner or later completely stopped?" "stopped! and by what?" "by the want of coal, which may justly be called the most precious of minerals." "yes, the most precious indeed," replied the engineer; "and it would seem that nature wished to prove that it was so by making the diamond, which is simply pure carbon crystallised." "you don't mean to say, captain," interrupted pencroft, "that we burn diamonds in our stoves in the shape of coal?" "no, my friend," replied harding. "however," resumed gideon spilett, "you do not deny that some day the coal will be entirely consumed?" "oh! the veins of coal are still considerable, and the hundred thousand miners who annually extract from them a hundred millions of hundredweights have not nearly exhausted them." "with the increasing consumption of coal," replied gideon spilett, "it can be foreseen that the hundred thousand workmen will soon become two hundred thousand, and that the rate of extraction will be doubled." "doubtless, but after the european mines, which will be soon worked more thoroughly with new machines, the american and australian mines will for a long time yet provide for the consumption in trade." "for how long a time?" asked the reporter. "for at least two hundred and fifty or three hundred years." "that is reassuring for us, but a bad look-out for our great grandchildren!" observed pencroft. [illustration: winter evenings in granite house] "they will discover something else," said herbert. "it is to be hoped so," answered spilett, "for without coal there would be no machinery, and without machinery there would be no railways, no steamers, no manufactories, nothing of that which is indispensable to modern civilisation!" "but what will they find?" asked pencroft. "can you guess, captain?" "nearly, my friend." "and what will they burn instead of coal?" "water," replied harding. "water!" cried pencroft, "water as fuel for steamers and engines! water to heat water!" "yes, but water decomposed into its primitive elements," replied cyrus harding, "and decomposed, doubtless; by electricity, which will then have become a powerful and manageable force, for all great discoveries, by some inexplicable law, appear to agree and become complete at the same time. yes, my friends, i believe that water will one day be employed as fuel, that hydrogen and oxygen which constitute it, used singly or together, will furnish an inexhaustible source of heat and light, of an intensity of which coal is not capable. some day the coal-rooms of steamers and the tenders of locomotives will, instead of coal, be stored with these two condensed gases, which will burn in the furnaces with enormous calorific power. there is, therefore, nothing to fear. as long as the earth is inhabited it will supply the wants of its inhabitants, and there will be no want of either light or heat as long as the productions of the vegetable, mineral or animal kingdoms do not fail us. i believe, then, that when the deposits of coal are exhausted, we shall heat and warm ourselves with water. water will be the coal of the future." "i should like to see that," observed the sailor. "you were born too soon, pencroft," returned neb, who only took part in the discussion by these words. however, it was not neb's speech which interrupted the conversation, but top's barking, which broke out again with that strange intonation which had before perplexed the engineer. at the same time top began to run round the mouth of the well, which opened at the extremity of the interior passage. "what can top be barking in that way for?" asked pencroft. "and jup be growling like that?" added herbert. in fact the orang, joining the dog, gave unequivocal signs of agitation, and, singular to say, the two animals appeared more uneasy than angry. "it is evident," said gideon spilett, "that this well is in direct communication with the sea, and that some marine animal comes from time to time to breathe at the bottom." "that's evident," replied the sailor, "and there can be no other explanation to give. quiet there, top!" added pencroft, turning to the dog, "and you, jup, be off to your room!" the ape and the dog were silent. jup went off to bed, but top remained in the room, and continued to utter low growls at intervals during the rest of the evening. there was no further talk on the subject, but the incident, however, clouded the brow of the engineer. during the remainder of the month of july there was alternate rain and frost. the temperature was not so low as during the preceding winter, and its maximum did not exceed eight degrees fahrenheit. but although this winter was less cold, it was more troubled by storms and squalls; the sea besides often endangered the safety of the chimneys. at times it almost seemed as if an under-current raised these monstrous billows which thundered against the wall of granite house. when the settlers, leaning from their windows, gazed on the huge watery masses breaking beneath their eyes, they could not but admire the magnificent spectacle of the ocean in its impotent fury. the waves rebounded in dazzling foam, the beach entirely disappearing under the raging flood, and the cliff appearing to emerge from the sea itself, the spray rising to a height of more than a hundred feet. during these storms it was difficult and even dangerous to venture out, owing to the frequently falling trees; however, the colonists never allowed a week to pass without having paid a visit to the corral. happily this enclosure, sheltered by the south-eastern spur of mount franklin, did not greatly suffer from the violence of the hurricanes, which spared its trees, sheds, and palisades; but the poultry-yard on prospect heights, being directly exposed to the gusts of wind from the east, suffered considerable damage. the pigeon-house was twice unroofed and the paling blown down. all this required to be re-made more solidly than before, for, as may be clearly seen, lincoln island was situated in one of the most dangerous parts of the pacific. it really appeared as if it formed the central point of vast cyclones, which beat it perpetually as the whip does the top, only here it was the top which was motionless and the whip which moved. during the first week of the month of august the weather became more moderate, and the atmosphere recovered the calm which it appeared to have lost for ever. with the calm the cold again became intense, and the thermometer fell to eight degrees fahrenheit, below zero. on the rd of august an excursion which had been talked of for several days was made into the south-eastern part of the island, towards tadorn marsh. the hunters were tempted by the aquatic game which took up their winter-quarters there. wild duck, snipe, teal, and grebe, abounded there, and it was agreed that a day should be devoted to an expedition against these birds. not only gideon spilett and herbert, but pencroft and neb also took part in this excursion. cyrus harding alone, alleging some work as an excuse, did not join them, but remained at granite house. the hunters proceeded in the direction of port balloon, in order to reach the marsh, after having promised to be back by the evening. top and jup accompanied them. as soon as they had passed over the mercy bridge, the engineer raised it and returned, intending to put into execution a project for the performance of which he wished to be alone. now this project was to minutely explore the interior well, the mouth of which was on a level with the passage of granite house, and which communicated with the sea, since it formerly supplied a way to the waters of the lake. [illustration: he saw nothing suspicious] why did top so often run round this opening? why did he utter such strange barks when a sort of uneasiness seemed to draw him towards this well. why did jup join top in a sort of common anxiety? had this well branches besides the communication with the sea? did it spread towards other parts of the island? this is what cyrus harding wished to know. he had resolved, therefore, to attempt the exploration of the well during the absence of his companions, and an opportunity for doing so had now presented itself. it was easy to descend to the bottom of the well by employing the rope-ladder which had not been used since the establishment of the lift. the engineer drew the ladder to the hole, the diameter of which measured nearly six feet, and allowed it to unroll itself after having securely fastened its upper extremity. then, having lighted a lantern, taken a revolver, and placed a cutlass in his belt, he began the descent. the sides were everywhere entire; but points of rock jutted out here and there, and by means of these points it would have been quite possible for an active creature to climb to the mouth of the well. the engineer remarked this; but although he carefully examined these points by the light of his lantern, he could find no impression, no fracture which could give any reason to suppose that they had either recently or at any former time been used as a staircase. cyrus harding descended deeper, throwing the light of his lantern on all sides. he saw nothing suspicious. when the engineer had reached the last rounds he came upon the water, which was then perfectly calm. neither at its level nor in any other part of the well, did any passage open which could lead to the interior of the cliff. the wall which harding struck with the hilt of his cutlass sounded solid. it was compact granite, through which no living being could force a way. to arrive at the bottom of the well and then climb up to its mouth it was necessary to pass through the channel under the rocky sub-soil of the beach, which placed it in communication with the sea, and this was only possible for marine animals. as to the question of knowing where this channel ended, at what point of the shore, and at what depth beneath the water, it could not be answered. then cyrus harding, having ended his survey, re-ascended, drew up the ladder, covered the mouth of the well, and returned thoughtfully to the dining-room, saying to himself,-- "i have seen nothing, and yet there _is_ something there!" chapter xii the rigging of the vessel -- an attack from foxes -- jup wounded -- jup cured -- completion of the boat -- pencroft's triumph -- the _bonadventure's_ trial trip to the south of the island -- an unexpected document. in the evening the hunters returned, having enjoyed good sport, and being literally loaded with game; indeed, they had as much as four men could possibly carry. top wore a necklace of teal and jup wreaths of snipe round his body. "here, master," cried neb; "here's something to employ our time! preserved and made into pies we shall have a welcome store! but i must have some one to help me. i count on you, pencroft." "no, neb," replied the sailor; "i have the rigging of the vessel to finish and to look after, and you will have to do without me." "and you, mr. herbert?" "i must go to the corral to-morrow, neb," replied the lad. "it will be you then, mr. spilett, who will help me?" "to oblige you, neb, i will," replied the reporter; "but i warn you that if you disclose your receipts to me, i shall publish them." "whenever you like, mr. spilett," replied neb; "whenever you like." and so the next day gideon spilett became neb's assistant and was installed in his culinary laboratory. the engineer had previously made known to him the result of the exploration which he had made the day before, and on this point the reporter shared harding's opinion, that although he had found nothing, a secret still remained to be discovered! the frost continued for another week, and the settlers did not leave granite house unless to look after the poultry-yard. the dwelling was filled with appetising odours, which were emitted from the learned manipulation of neb and the reporter. but all the results of the chase were not made into preserved provisions; and as the game kept perfectly in the intense cold, wild duck and other fowl were eaten fresh, and declared superior to all other aquatic birds in the known world. during this week pencroft, aided by herbert, who handled the sail-maker's needle with much skill, worked with such energy that the sails of that vessel were finished. there was no want of cordage. thanks to the rigging which had been recovered with the case of the balloon, the ropes and cables from the net were all of good quality, and the sailor turned them all to account. to the sails were attached strong bolt ropes, and there still remained enough from which to make the halliards, shrouds, and sheets, etc. the blocks were manufactured by cyrus harding under pencroft's directions by means of the turning-lathe. it therefore happened that the rigging was entirely prepared before the vessel was finished. pencroft also manufactured a flag, that flag so dear to every true american, containing the stars and stripes of their glorious union. the colours for it were supplied from certain plants used in dyeing, and which were very abundant in the island; only to the thirty-seven stars, representing the thirty-seven states of the union, which shine on the american flag, the sailor added a thirty-eighth, the star of "the state of lincoln," for he considered his island as already united to the great republic. "and," said he, "it is so already in heart, if not in deed!" in the meantime, the flag was hoisted at the central window of granite house, and the settlers saluted it with three cheers. the cold season was now almost at an end, and it appeared as if this second winter was to pass without any unusual occurrence, when, on the night of the th august, the plateau of prospect heights was menaced with complete destruction. after a busy day the colonists were sleeping soundly, when towards four o'clock in the morning they were suddenly awakened by top's barking. the dog was not this time barking near the mouth of the well, but at the threshold of the door, at which he was scratching as if he wished to burst it open. jup was also uttering piercing cries. "hallo, top!" cried neb, who was the first awake. but the dog continued to bark more furiously than ever. "what's the matter now?" asked harding. and all dressing in haste rushed to the windows, which they opened. beneath their eyes was spread a sheet of snow which looked grey in the dim light. the settlers could see nothing, but they heard a singular yelping noise away in the darkness. it was evident that the beach had been invaded by a number of animals which could not be seen. "what are they?" cried pencroft. "wolves, jaguars, or apes?" replied neb. "they have nearly reached the plateau," said the reporter. "and our poultry-yard," exclaimed herbert, "and our garden!" "where can they have crossed?" asked pencroft. "they must have crossed the bridge on the shore," replied the engineer, "which one of us must have forgotten to close." "true," said spilett, "i remember to have left it open." "a fine job you have made of it, mr. spilett," cried the sailor. "what is done cannot be undone," replied cyrus harding. "we must consult what it will now be best to do." such were the questions and answers which were rapidly exchanged between harding and his companions. it was certain that the bridge had been crossed, that the shore had been invaded by animals, and that whatever they might be they could by ascending the left bank of the mercy reach prospect heights. they must therefore be advanced against quickly and fought with if necessary. "but what are these beasts?" was asked a second time, as the yelpings were again heard more loudly than before. these yelps made herbert start, and he remembered to have already heard them during his first visit to the sources of the red creek. "they are culpeux foxes!" he exclaimed. "forward!" shouted the sailor. and all arming themselves with hatchets, carbines, and revolvers, threw themselves into the lift and soon set foot on the shore. culpeux are dangerous animals when in great numbers and irritated by hunger, nevertheless the colonists did not hesitate to throw themselves into the midst of the troop, and their first shots vividly lighting up the darkness made their assailants draw back. the chief thing was to hinder these plunderers from reaching the plateau, for the garden and the poultry-yard would then have been at their mercy, and immense, perhaps irreparable mischief, would inevitably be the result, especially with regard to the cornfield. but as the invasion of the plateau could only be made by the left bank of the mercy, it was sufficient to oppose the culpeux on the narrow bank between the river and the cliff of granite. this was plain to all, and, by cyrus harding's orders, they reached the spot indicated by him, while the culpeux rushed fiercely through the gloom. harding, gideon, spilett, herbert, pencroft, and neb posted themselves in impregnable line. top, his formidable jaws open, preceded the colonists, and he was followed by jup, armed with knotty cudgel, which he brandished like a club. the night was extremely dark, it was only by the flashes from the revolvers as each person fired that they could see their assailants, who were at least a hundred in number, and whose eyes were glowing like hot coals. "they must not pass!" shouted pencroft. "they shall not pass!" returned the engineer. but if they did not pass it was not for want of having attempted it. those in the rear pushed on the foremost assailants, and it was an incessant struggle with revolvers and hatchets. several culpeux already lay dead on the ground, but their number did not appear to diminish, and it might have been supposed that reinforcements were continually arriving over the bridge. the colonists were soon obliged to fight at close quarters, not without receiving some wounds, though happily very slight ones. herbert had, with a shot from his revolver, rescued neb, on whose back a culpeux had sprung like a tiger cat. top fought with actual fury, flying at the throats of the foxes and strangling them instantaneously. jup wielded his weapon valiantly, and it was in vain that they endeavoured to keep him in the rear. endowed doubtless with sight which enabled him to pierce the obscurity, he was always in the thick of the fight, uttering from time to time a sharp hissing sound, which was with him the sign of great rejoicing. at one moment he advanced so far, that by the light from a revolver he was seen surrounded by five or six large culpeux, with whom he was coping with great coolness. however the struggle was ended at last, and victory was on the side of the settlers, but not until they had fought for two long hours! the first signs of the approach of day doubtless determined the retreat of their assailants, who scampered away towards the north, passing over the bridge, which neb ran immediately to raise. when day had sufficiently lighted up the field of battle, the settlers counted as many as fifty dead bodies scattered about on the shore. "and jup!" cried pencroft, "where is jup?" jup had disappeared. his friend neb called him, and for the first time jup did not reply to his friend's call. every one set out in search of jup, trembling lest he should be found amongst the slain; they cleared the place of the bodies which stained the snow with their blood, jup was found in the midst of a heap of culpeux, whose broken jaws and crushed bodies showed that they had to do with the terrible club of the intrepid animal. poor jup still held in his hand the stump of his broken cudgel, but deprived of his weapon he had been overpowered by numbers, and his chest was covered with severe wounds. "he is living," cried neb, who was bending over him. "and we will save him," replied the sailor. "we will nurse him as if he was one of ourselves." it appeared as if jup understood, for he leant his head on pencroft's shoulder as if to thank him. the sailor was wounded himself, but his wound was insignificant, as were those of his companions; for thanks to their firearms they had been almost always able to keep their assailants at a distance. it was therefore only the orang whose condition was serious. jup, carried by neb and pencroft, was placed in the lift, and only a slight moan now and then escaped his lips. he was gently drawn up to granite house. there he was laid on a mattress taken from one of the beds, and his wounds were bathed with the greatest care. it did not appear that any vital part had been reached, but jup was very weak from loss of blood, and a high fever soon set in after his wounds had been dressed. he was laid down, strict diet was imposed, "just like a real person," as neb said, and they made him swallow several cups of a cooling drink, for which the ingredients were supplied from the vegetable medicine chest of granite house. jup was at first restless, but his breathing gradually became more regular, and he was left sleeping quietly. from time to time top, walking on tip-toe, as one might say, came to visit his friend, and seemed to approve of all the care that had been taken of him. one of jup's hands hung over the side of his bed, and top licked it with a sympathising air. they employed the day in interring the dead, who were dragged to the forest of the far west, and there buried deep. this attack, which might have had such serious consequences, was a lesson to the settlers, who from this time never went to bed until one of their number had made sure that all the bridges were raised, and that no invasion was possible. however jup, after having given them serious anxiety for several days, began to recover. his constitution brought him through, the fever gradually subsided, and gideon spilett, who was a bit of a doctor, pronounced him quite out of danger. on the th of august, jup began to eat. neb made him nice little sweet dishes, which the invalid discussed with great relish, for if he had a pet failing it was that of being somewhat of a gourmand, and neb had never done anything to cure him of this fault. "what would you have?" said he to gideon spilett, who sometimes expostulated with him for spoiling the ape. "poor jup has no other pleasure than that of the palate, and i am only too glad to be able to reward his services in this way!" [illustration: top visiting the invalid] ten days after having taken to his bed, on the st of august, master jup arose. his wounds were healed, and it was evident that he would not be long in regaining his usual strength and agility. like all convalescents, he was tremendously hungry, and the reporter allowed him to eat as much as he liked, for he trusted to that instinct, which is too often wanting in reasoning beings, to keep the orang from any excess. neb was delighted to see his pupil's appetite returning. "eat away, my jup," said he, "and don't spare anything; you have shed your blood for us, and it is the least i can do to make you strong again!" on the th of august neb's voice was heard calling to his companions. "captain, mr. spilett, mr. herbert, pencroft, come! come!" the colonists, who were together in the dining-room, rose at neb's call, who was then in jup's room. "what's the matter?" asked the reporter. "look," replied neb, with a shout of laughter. and what did they see? master jup smoking calmly and seriously, sitting cross-legged like a turk at the entrance to granite house! "my pipe," cried pencroft. "he has taken my pipe! hallo, my honest jup, i make you a present of it! smoke away, old boy, smoke away!" and jup gravely puffed out clouds of smoke which seemed to give him great satisfaction. harding did not appear to be much astonished at this incident, and he cited several examples of tame apes, to whom the use of tobacco had become quite familiar. but from this day master jup had a pipe of his own, the sailor's ex-pipe, which was hung in his room near his store of tobacco. he filled it himself, lighted it with a glowing coal, and appeared to be the happiest of quadrumana. it may readily be understood that this similarity of tastes of jup and pencroft served to tighten the bonds of friendship which already existed between the honest ape and the worthy sailor. "perhaps he is really a man," said pencroft sometimes to neb. "should you be surprised to hear him beginning to speak to us some day?" "my word, no," replied neb. "what astonishes me is that he hasn't spoken to us before, for now he wants nothing but speech!" "it would amuse me all the same," resumed the sailor, "if some fine day he said to me, 'suppose we change pipes, pencroft.'" "yes," replied neb, "what a pity he was born dumb!" with the month of september the winter ended, and the works were again eagerly commenced. the building of the vessel advanced rapidly, she was already completely decked over, and all the inside parts of the hull were firmly united with ribs bent by means of steam, which answered all the purposes of a mould. as there was no want of wood, pencroft proposed to the engineer to give a double lining to the hull, so as to completely insure the strength of the vessel. harding, not knowing what the future might have in store for them, approved the sailor's idea of making the craft as strong as possible. the interior and deck of the vessel was entirely finished towards the th of september. for calking the seams they made oakum of dry seaweed, which was hammered in between the planks; then these seams were covered with boiling tar, which was obtained in great abundance from the pines in the forest. the management of the vessel was very simple. she had from the first been ballasted with heavy blocks of granite walled up, in a bed of lime, twelve thousand pounds of which they stowed away. a deck was placed over this ballast, and the interior was divided into two cabins; two benches extended along them and served also as lockers. the foot of the mast supported the partition which separated the two cabins, which were reached by two hatchways let into the deck. pencroft had no trouble in finding a tree suitable for the mast. he chose a straight young fir, with no knots, and which he had only to square at the step, and round off at the top. the ironwork of the mast, the rudder and the hull, had been roughly but strongly forged at the chimneys. lastly, yards, masts, boom, spars, oars, etc., were all finished by the first week in october, and it was agreed that a trial trip should be taken round the island, so as to ascertain how the vessel would behave at sea, and how far they might depend upon her. during all this time the necessary works had not been neglected. the corral was enlarged, for the flock of musmons and goats had been increased by a number of young ones, who had to be housed and fed. the colonists had paid visits also to the oyster bed, the warren, the coal and iron mines, and to the till then unexplored districts of the far west forest, which abounded in game. certain indigenous plants were discovered, and those fit for immediate use, contributed to vary the vegetable stores of granite house. they were a species of ficoide, some similar to those of the cape, with eatable fleshy leaves, others bearing seeds containing a sort of flour. on the th of october the vessel was launched. pencroft was radiant with joy, the operation was perfectly successful; the boat completely rigged, having been pushed on rollers to the water's edge, was floated by the rising tide, amidst the cheers of the colonists, particularly of pencroft, who showed no modesty on this occasion. besides his importance was to last beyond the finishing of the vessel, since, after having built her, he was to command her. the grade of captain was bestowed upon him with the approbation of all. to satisfy captain pencroft, it was now necessary to give a name to the vessel, and, after many propositions had been discussed, the votes were all in favour of the _bonadventure_. as soon as the _bonadventure_ had been lifted by the rising tide, it was seen that she lay evenly in the water, and would be easily navigated. however the trial trip was to be made that very day, by an excursion off the coast. the weather was fine, the breeze fresh, and the sea smooth, especially towards the south coast, for the wind was blowing from the north-west. "all hands on board," shouted pencroft, but breakfast was first necessary, and it was thought best to take provisions on board, in the event of their excursion being prolonged until the evening. [illustration: the trial trip] cyrus harding was equally anxious to try the vessel, the model of which had originated with him, although on the sailor's advice he had altered some parts of it, but he did not share pencroft's confidence in her, and as the latter had not again spoken of the voyage to tabor island, harding hoped he had given it up. he would have indeed great reluctance in letting two or three of his companions venture so far in so small a boat, which was not of more than fifteen tons' burden. at half-past ten everybody was on board, even top and jup, and herbert weighed the anchor, which was fast in the sand near the mouth of the mercy. the sail was hoisted, the lincolnian flag floated from the mast-head, and the _bonadventure_, steered by pencroft, stood out to sea. the wind blowing out of union bay she ran before it, and thus showed her owners, much to their satisfaction, that she possessed a remarkably fast pair of heels, according to pencroft's mode of speaking. after having doubled flotsam point and claw cape, the captain kept her close hauled, so as to sail along the southern coast of the island, when it was found she sailed admirably within five points of the wind. all hands were enchanted, they had a good vessel, which, in case of need, would be of great service to them, and with fine weather and a fresh breeze the voyage promised to be charming. pencroft now stood off the shore, three or four miles across from port balloon. the island then appeared in all its extent and under a new aspect, with the varied panorama of its shore from claw cape to reptile end, the forests in which dark firs contrasted with the young foliage of other trees and overlooked the whole, and mount franklin whose lofty head was still whitened with snow. "how beautiful it is!" cried herbert. "yes, our island is beautiful and good," replied pencroft. "i love it as i loved my poor mother. it received us poor and destitute, and now what is wanting to us five fellows who fell on it from the sky." "nothing," replied neb; "nothing, captain." and the two brave men gave three tremendous cheers in honour of their island! during all this time gideon spilett, leaning against the mast, sketched the panorama which was developed before his eyes. cyrus harding gazed on it in silence. "well, captain harding," asked pencroft, "what do you think of our vessel?" "she appears to behave well," replied the engineer. "good! and do you think now that she could undertake a voyage of some extent?" "what voyage, pencroft?" "one to tabor island, for instance." "my friend," replied harding, "i think that in any pressing emergency we need not hesitate to trust ourselves to the _bonadventure_ even for a longer voyage; but you know i should see you set off to tabor island with great uneasiness, since nothing obliges you to go there." "one likes to know one's neighbours," returned the sailor, who was obstinate in his idea. "tabor island is our neighbour, and the only one! politeness requires us to go at least to pay a visit." "by jove," said spilett; "our friend pencroft has become very particular about the proprieties all at once!" "i am not particular about anything at all," retorted the sailor; who was rather vexed by the engineer's opposition, but who did not wish to cause him anxiety. "consider, pencroft," resumed harding, "you cannot go alone to tabor island." "one companion will be enough for me." "even so," replied the engineer, "you will risk depriving the colony of lincoln island of two settlers out of five." "out of six," answered pencroft; "you forget jup." "out of seven," added neb; "top is quite worth another." "there is no risk at all in it, captain," replied pencroft. "that is possible, pencroft; but i repeat it is to expose ourselves uselessly." the obstinate sailor did not reply, and let the conversation drop, quite determined to resume it again. but he did not suspect that an incident would come to his aid and change into an act of humanity that which was at first only a doubtful whim. after standing off the shore the _bonadventure_ again approached it in the direction of port balloon. it was important to ascertain the channels between the sandbanks and reefs, that buoys might be laid down, since this little creek was to be the harbour. they were not more than half a mile from the coast, and it was necessary to tack to beat against the wind. the _bonadventure_ was then going at a very moderate rate, as the breeze, partly intercepted by the high land, scarcely swelled her sails, and the sea, smooth as glass, was only rippled now and then by passing gusts. herbert had stationed himself in the bows that he might indicate the course to be followed among the channels, when all at once he shouted,-- "luff, pencroft, luff!" "what's the matter," replied the sailor, "a rock?" "no--wait," said herbert, "i don't quite see. luff again--right--now." so saying, herbert leaning over the side, plunged his arm into the water and pulled it out, exclaiming,-- "a bottle!" he held in his hand a corked bottle which he had just seized a few cables' length from the shore. cyrus harding took the bottle without uttering a single word he drew the cork, and took from it a damp paper, on which were written these words:-- "castaway ... tabor island: ° w long, ° ´ s lat." [illustration: "luff, pencroft, luff!"] chapter xiii departure decided upon -- conjectures -- preparations -- the three passengers -- first night -- second night -- tabor island -- searching the shore -- searching the wood -- no one -- animals -- plants -- a dwelling -- deserted. "a castaway!" exclaimed pencroft; "left on this tabor island not two hundred miles from us! ah, captain harding, you won't now oppose my going." "no, pencroft," replied cyrus harding; "and you shall set out as soon as possible." "to-morrow?" "to-morrow!" the engineer still held in his hand the paper which he had taken from the bottle. he contemplated it for some instants, then resumed,-- "from this document, my friends, from the way in which it is worded, we may conclude this: first, that the castaway on tabor island is a man possessing a considerable knowledge of navigation, since he gives the latitude and longitude of the island exactly as we ourselves found it, and to a second of approximation; secondly, that he is either english or american, as the document is written in the english language." "that is perfectly logical," answered spilett; "and the presence of this castaway explains the arrival of the case on the shores of our island. there must have been a wreck, since there is a castaway. as to the latter, whoever he may be, it is lucky for him that pencroft thought of building this boat and of trying her this very day, for a day later and this bottle might have been broken on the rocks." "indeed," said herbert, "it is a fortunate chance that the _bonadventure_ passed exactly where the bottle was still floating!" "does not this appear strange to you?" asked harding of pencroft. "it appears fortunate, that's all," answered the sailor. "do you see anything extraordinary in it, captain. the bottle must go somewhere, and why not here as well as anywhere else?" "perhaps you are right, pencroft," replied the engineer; "and yet--" "but," observed herbert, "there's nothing to prove that this bottle has been floating long in the sea." "nothing," replied gideon spilett; "and the document appears even to have been recently written. what do you think about it, cyrus?" "it is difficult to say, and besides we shall soon know," replied harding. during this conversation pencroft had not remained in-active. he had put the vessel about, and the _bonadventure_, all sails set, was running rapidly towards claw cape. every one was thinking of the castaway on tabor island. should they be in time to save him? this was a great event in the life of the colonists! they themselves were but castaways, but it was to be feared that another might not have been so fortunate, and their duty was to go to his succour. claw cape was doubled, and about four o'clock the _bonadventure_ dropped her anchor at the mouth of the mercy. that same evening the arrangements for the new expedition were made. it appeared best that pencroft and herbert, who knew how to work the vessel, should undertake the voyage alone. by setting out the next day, the th of october, they would arrive on the th, for with the present wind it would not take more than forty-eight hours to make this passage of a hundred and fifty miles. one day in the island, three or four to return, they might hope therefore that on the th they would again reach lincoln island. the weather was fine, the barometer was rising, the wind appeared settled, everything then was in favour of these brave men whom an act of humanity was taking far from their island. thus it had been agreed that cyrus harding, neb, and gideon spilett, should remain at granite house, but an objection was raised, and spilett, who had not forgotten his business as reporter to the _new york herald_, having declared that he would go by swimming rather than lose such an opportunity, he was admitted to take a part in the voyage. the evening was occupied in transporting on board the _bonadventure_ articles of bedding, utensils, arms, ammunition, a compass, provisions for a week, and this business being rapidly accomplished the colonists ascended to granite house. the next day, at five o'clock in the morning, the farewells were said, not without some emotion on both sides, and pencroft setting sail made towards claw cape, which had to be doubled in order to proceed to the south-west. the _bonadventure_ was already a quarter of a mile from the coast, when the passengers perceived on the heights of granite house two men waving their farewells; they were cyrus harding and neb. "our friends," exclaimed spilett, "this is our first separation for fifteen months." pencroft, the reporter, and herbert waved in return, and granite house soon disappeared behind the high rocks of the cape. during the first part of the day the _bonadventure_ was still in sight of the southern coast of lincoln island, which soon appeared just like a green basket, with mount franklin rising from the centre. the heights, diminished by distance, did not present an appearance likely to tempt vessels to touch there. reptile end was passed in about an hour, though at a distance of about ten miles. at this distance it was no longer possible to distinguish anything of the western coast, which stretched away to the ridges of mount franklin, and three hours after the last of lincoln island sank below the horizon. the _bonadventure_ behaved capitally. bounding over the waves she proceeded rapidly on her course. pencroft had hoisted the foresail, and steering by the compass followed a rectilinear direction. from time to time herbert relieved him at the helm, and the lad's hand was so firm that the sailor had not a point to find fault with. gideon spilett chatted sometimes with one, sometimes with the other, if wanted he lent a hand with the ropes, and captain pencroft was perfectly satisfied with his crew. [illustration: the departure] in the evening the crescent moon, which would not be in its first quarter until the th, appeared in the twilight and soon set again. the night was dark but starry, and the next day again promised to be fine. pencroft prudently lowered the foresail, not wishing to be caught by a sudden gust while carrying too much canvas; it was perhaps an unnecessary precaution on such a calm night, but pencroft was a prudent sailor and cannot be blamed for it. the reporter slept part of the night. pencroft and herbert took turns for a spell of two hours each at the helm. the sailor trusted herbert as he would himself, and his confidence was justified by the coolness and judgment of the lad. pencroft gave him his directions as a commander to his steersman, and herbert never allowed the _bonadventure_ to swerve even a point. the night passed quietly, as did the day of the th of october. a south-easterly direction was strictly maintained, unless the _bonadventure_ fell in with some unknown current she would come exactly within sight of tabor island. as to the sea over which the vessel was then sailing, it was absolutely deserted. now and then a great albatross or frigate bird passed within gun-shot, and gideon spilett wondered if it was to one of them that he had confided his last letter addressed to the _new york herald_. these birds were the only beings that appeared to frequent this part of the ocean between tabor and lincoln island. "and yet," observed herbert, "this is the time that whalers usually proceed towards the southern part of the pacific. indeed i do not think there could be a more deserted sea than this." "it is not quite so deserted as all that," replied pencroft. "what do you mean," asked the reporter. "we are on it. do you take our vessel for a wreck and us for porpoises?" and pencroft laughed at his joke. by the evening, according to calculation, it was thought that the _bonadventure_ had accomplished a distance of a hundred and twenty miles since her departure from lincoln island, that is to say in thirty-six hours, which would give her a speed of between three and four knots an hour. the breeze was very slight and might soon drop altogether. however it was hoped that the next morning by break of day, if the calculation had been correct and the course true, they would sight tabor island. neither gideon spilett, herbert, nor pencroft slept that night. in the expectation of the next day they could not but feel some emotion. there was so much uncertainty in their enterprise! were they near tabor island? was the island still inhabited by the castaway to whose succour they had come. who was this man? would not his presence disturb the little colony till then so united? besides, would he be content to exchange his prison for another? all these questions, which would no doubt be answered the next day, kept them in suspense, and at the dawn of day they all fixed their gaze on the western horizon. "land!" shouted pencroft at about six o'clock in the morning. and it was impossible that pencroft should be mistaken, it was evident that land was there. imagine the joy of the little crew of the _bonadventure_. in a few hours they would land on the beach of the island! the low coast of tabor island, scarcely emerging from the sea, was not more than fifteen miles distant. the head of the _bonadventure_, which was a little to the south of the island, was set directly towards it, and as the sun mounted in the east, his rays fell upon one or two headlands. "this is a much less important isle than lincoln island," observed herbert, "and is probably due like ours to some submarine convulsion." at eleven o'clock the _bonadventure_ was not more than two miles off, and pencroft, whilst looking for a suitable place at which to land, proceeded very cautiously through the unknown waters. the whole of the island could now be surveyed, and on it could be seen groups of gum and other large trees, of the same species as those growing on lincoln island. but the astonishing thing was that no smoke arose to show that the island was inhabited, not a signal appeared on any point of the shore whatever! and yet the document was clear enough; there was a castaway, and this castaway should have been on the watch. in the meanwhile the _bonadventure_ entered the winding channels among the reefs, and pencroft observed every turn with extreme care. he had put herbert at the helm, posting himself in the bows, inspecting the water, whilst he held the halliard in his hand, ready to lower the sail at a moment's notice. gideon spilett with his glass eagerly scanned the shore, though without perceiving anything. however at about twelve o'clock the keel of the _bonadventure_ grated on the bottom. the anchor was let go, the sails furled, and the crew of the little vessel landed. and there was no reason to doubt that this was tabor island, since according to the most recent charts there was no island in this part of the pacific between new zealand and the american coast. the vessel was securely moored, so that there should be no danger of her being carried away by the receding tide; then pencroft and his companions, well armed, ascended the shore, so as to gain an elevation of about two hundred and fifty or three hundred feet which rose at a distance of half a mile. "from the summit of that hill," said spilett, "we can no doubt obtain a complete view of the island, which will greatly facilitate our search." "so as to do here," replied herbert, "that which captain harding did the very first thing on lincoln island, by climbing mount franklin." "exactly so," answered the reporter; "and it is the best plan of proceeding." whilst thus talking the explorers had advanced along a clearing which terminated at the foot of the hill. flocks of rock-pigeons and sea-swallows, similar to those of lincoln island, fluttered around them. under the woods which skirted the glade on the left they could hear the bushes rustling and see the grass waving, which indicated the presence of timid animals, but still nothing to show that the island was inhabited. arrived at the foot of the hill, pencroft, spilett, and herbert climbed it in a few minutes, and gazed anxiously round the horizon. [illustration: nearing the island] they were on an islet which did not measure more than six miles in circumference, its shape not much bordered by capes or promontories, bays or creeks, being a lengthened oval. all around, the lonely sea extended to the limits of the horizon. no land nor even a sail was in sight. this woody islet did not offer the varied aspects of lincoln island, arid and wild in one part, but fertile and rich in the other. on the contrary this was a uniform mass of verdure, out of which rose two or three hills of no great height. obliquely to the oval of the island ran a stream through a wide meadow falling into the sea on the west by a narrow mouth. "the domain is limited," said herbert. "yes," rejoined pencroft. "it would have been too small for us." "and moreover," said the reporter, "it appears to be uninhabited." "indeed," answered herbert, "nothing here betrays the presence of man." "let us go down," said pencroft, "and search." the sailor and his two companions returned to the shore, to the place where they had left the _bonadventure_. they had decided to make the tour of the island on foot, before exploring the interior, so that not a spot should escape their investigations. the beach was easy to follow, and only in some places was their way barred by large rocks, which, however, they easily passed round. the explorers proceeded towards the south, disturbing numerous flocks of sea-birds and herds of seals, which threw themselves into the sea as soon as they saw the strangers at a distance. "those beasts yonder," observed the reporter, "do not see men for the first time. they fear them, therefore they must know them." an hour after their departure they arrived on the southern point of the islet, terminated by a sharp cape, and proceeded towards the north along the western coast, equally formed by sand and rocks, the background bordered with thick woods. there was not a trace of a habitation in any part, not the print of a human foot on the shore of the island, which after four hours' walking had been gone completely round. it was to say the least very extraordinary, and they were compelled to believe that tabor island was not or was no longer inhabited. perhaps, after all, the document was already several months or several years old, and it was possible in this case, either that the castaway had been enabled to return to his country, or that he had died of misery. pencroft, spilett, and herbert, forming more or less probable conjectures, dined rapidly on board the _bonadventure_, so as to be able to continue their excursion until nightfall. this was done at five o'clock in the evening, at which hour they entered the wood. numerous animals fled at their approach, being principally, one might say, only goats and pigs, which it was easy to see belonged to european species. doubtless some whaler had landed them on the island, where they had rapidly increased. herbert resolved to catch one or two living, and take them back to lincoln island. it was no longer doubtful that men at some period or other had visited this islet, and this became still more evident when paths appeared trodden through the forest, felled trees, and everywhere traces of the hand of man; but the trees were becoming rotten, and had been felled many years ago; the marks of the axe were velveted with moss, and the grass grew long and thick on the paths, so that it was difficult to find them. "but," observed gideon spilett, "this not only proves that men have landed on the island, but also that they lived on it for some time. now, who were these men? how many of them remain?" "the document," said herbert, "only spoke of one castaway." "well, if he is still on the island," replied pencroft, "it is impossible but that we shall find him." the exploration was continued. the sailor and his companions naturally followed the route which cut diagonally across the island, and they were thus obliged to follow the stream which flowed towards the sea. if the animals of european origin, if works due to a human hand, showed incontestably that men had already visited the island, several specimens of the vegetable kingdom did not prove it less. in some places, in the midst of clearings, it was evident that the soil had been planted with culinary plants, at probably the same distant period. what, then, was herbert's joy, when he recognised potatoes, chicory, sorrel, carrots, cabbages, and turnips, of which it was sufficient to collect the seed to enrich the soil of lincoln island. "capital, jolly!" exclaimed pencroft. "that will suit neb as well as us. even if we do not find the castaway, at least our voyage will not have been useless, and god will have rewarded us." "doubtless," replied gideon spilett; "but to see the state in which we find these plantations, it is to be feared that the island has not been inhabited for some time." "indeed," answered herbert, "an inhabitant, whoever he was, could not have neglected such an important culture!" "yes," said pencroft, "the castaway has gone." "we must suppose so." "it must then be admitted that the document has already a distant date?" "evidently." "and that the bottle only arrived at lincoln island after having floated in the sea a long time." "why not," returned pencroft. "but night is coming on," added he, "and i think that it will be best to give up the search for the present." "let us go on board, and to-morrow we will begin again," said the reporter. this was the wisest course, and it was about to be followed when herbert, pointing to a confused mass among the trees, exclaimed,-- "a hut!" all three immediately ran towards the dwelling. in the twilight it was just possible to see that it was built of planks and covered with a thick tarpaulin. the half-closed door was pushed open by pencroft, who entered with a rapid step. the hut was empty! [illustration: a hut!] chapter xiv the inventory -- night -- a few letters -- continuation of the search -- plants and animals -- herbert in great danger -- on board -- the departure -- bad weather -- a gleam of reason -- lost on the sea -- a timely light. pencroft, herbert, and gideon spilett remained silent in the midst of the darkness. pencroft shouted loudly. no reply was made. the sailor then struck a light and set fire to a twig. this lighted for a minute a small room, which appeared perfectly empty. at the back was a rude fireplace, with a few cold cinders, supporting an armful of dry wood. pencroft threw the blazing twig on it, the wood cracked and gave forth a bright light. the sailor and his two companions then perceived a disordered bed, of which the damp and yellow coverlets proved that it had not been used for a long time. in the corner of the fireplace were two kettles, covered with rust, and an overthrown pot. a cupboard, with a few mouldy sailor's clothes; on the table a tin plate and a bible, eaten away by damp; in a corner a few tools, a spade, pickaxe, two fowling-pieces, one of which was broken; on a plank, forming a shelf, stood a barrel of powder, still untouched, a barrel of shot, and several boxes of caps, all thickly covered with dust, accumulated, perhaps, by many long years. "there is no one here," said the reporter. "no one," replied pencroft. "it is a long time since this room has been inhabited," observed herbert. "yes, a very long time!" answered the reporter. "mr. spilett," then said pencroft, "instead of returning on board, i think that it would be well to pass the night in this hut." "you are right, pencroft," answered gideon spilett, "and if its owner returns, well! perhaps he will not be sorry to find the place taken possession of." "he will not return," said the sailor, shaking his head. "you think that he has quitted the island?" asked the reporter. "if he had quitted the island he would have taken away his weapons and his tools," replied pencroft. "you know the value which castaways set on such articles as these, the last remains of a wreck? no! no!" repeated the sailor, in a tone of conviction, "no, he has not left the island! if he had escaped in a boat made by himself, he would still less have left these indispensable and necessary articles. no! he is on the island!" "living?" asked herbert. "living or dead. but if he is dead, i suppose he has not buried himself, and so we shall at least find his remains!" it was then agreed that the night should be passed in the deserted dwelling, and a store of wood found in a corner was sufficient to warm it. the door closed, pencroft, herbert, and spilett remained there, seated on a bench, talking little but wondering much. they were in a frame of mind to imagine anything or expect anything. they listened eagerly for sounds outside. the door might have opened suddenly, and a man presented himself to them without their being in the least surprised, notwithstanding all that the hut revealed of abandonment, and they had their hands ready to press the hands of this man, this castaway, this unknown friend, for whom friends were waiting. but no voice was heard, the door did not open. the hours thus passed away. how long the night appeared to the sailor and his companions! herbert alone slept for two hours, for at his age sleep is a necessity. they were all three anxious to continue their exploration of the day before, and to search the most secret recesses of the islet! the inferences deduced by pencroft were perfectly reasonable, and it was nearly certain that, as the hut was deserted, and the tools, utensils, and weapons were still there, the owner had succumbed. it was agreed, therefore, that they should search for his remains, and give them at least christian burial. day dawned; pencroft and his companions immediately proceeded to survey the dwelling. it had certainly been built in a favourable situation, at the back of a little hill, sheltered by five or six magnificent gum trees. before its front and through the trees the axe had prepared a wide clearing, which allowed the view to extend to the sea. beyond a lawn, surrounded by a wooden fence falling to pieces, was the shore, on the left of which was the mouth of the stream. the hut had been built of planks, and it was easy to see that these planks had been obtained from the hull or deck of a ship. it was probable that a disabled vessel had been cast on the coast of the island, that one at least of the crew had been saved, and that by means of the wreck this man, having tools at his disposal, had built the dwelling. and this became still more evident when gideon spilett, after having walked round the hut, saw on a plank, probably one of those which had formed the armour of the wrecked vessel, these letters already half effaced:-- "br--tan--a." "britannia," exclaimed pencroft, whom the reporter had called; "it is a common name for ships, and i could not say if she was english or american!" "it matters very little, pencroft!" "very little indeed," answered the sailor; "and we will save the survivor of her crew if he is still living, to whatever country he may belong. but before beginning our search again let us go on board the _bonadventure_." a sort of uneasiness had seized pencroft upon the subject of his vessel. should the island be inhabited after all, and should some one have taken possession of her? but he shrugged his shoulders at such an unreasonable supposition. at any rate the sailor was not sorry to go to breakfast on board. the road already trodden was not long, scarcely a mile. they set out on their walk, gazing into the wood and thickets through which goats and pigs fled in hundreds. twenty minutes after leaving the hut pencroft and his companions reached the western coast of the island, and saw the _bonadventure_ held fast by her anchor, which was buried deep in the sand. pencroft could not restrain a sigh of satisfaction. after all this vessel was his child, and it is the right of fathers to be often uneasy when there is no occasion for it. they returned on board, breakfasted, so that it should not be necessary to dine until very late; then the repast being ended, the exploration was continued and conducted with the most minute care. indeed, it was very probable that the only inhabitant of the island had perished. it was therefore more for the traces of a dead than of a living man that pencroft and his companions searched. but their searches were vain, and during the half of that day they sought to no purpose among the thickets of trees which covered the islet. there was then scarcely any doubt that, if the castaway was dead, no trace of his body now remained, but that some wild beast had probably devoured it to the last bone. "we will set off to-morrow at daybreak," said pencroft to his two companions, as about two o'clock they were resting for a few minutes under the shade of a clump of firs. "i should think that we might without scruple take the utensils which belonged to the castaway," added herbert. "i think so too," returned gideon spilett; "and these arms and tools will make up the stores of granite house. the supply of powder and shot is also most important." "yes," replied pencroft; "but we must not forget to capture a couple or two of those pigs, of which lincoln island is destitute--" "nor to gather those seeds," added herbert, "which will give us all the vegetables of the old and the new worlds." "then perhaps it would be best," said the reporter, "to remain a day longer on tabor island, so as to collect all that may be useful to us." "no, mr. spilett," answered pencroft, "i will ask you to set off to-morrow at daybreak. the wind seems to me to be likely to shift to the west, and after having had a fair wind for coming we shall have a fair wind for going back." "then do not let us lose time," said herbert, rising. "we won't waste time," returned pencroft. "you, herbert, go and gather the seeds, which you know better than we do. whilst you do that, mr. spilett and i will go and have a pig hunt, and even without top i hope we shall manage to catch a few!" herbert accordingly took the path which led towards the cultivated part of the islet, whilst the sailor and the reporter entered the forest. many specimens of the porcine race fled before them, and these animals, which were singularly active, did not appear to be in a humour to allow themselves to be approached. however, after an hour's chase, the hunters had just managed to get hold of a couple lying in a thicket, when cries were heard resounding from the north part of the island. with the cries were mingled terrible yells, in which there was nothing human. pencroft and gideon spilett were at once on their feet, and the pigs by this movement began to run away, at the moment when the sailor was getting ready the rope to bind them. "that's herbert's voice," said the reporter. "run!" exclaimed pencroft. and the sailor and spilett immediately ran at full speed towards the spot from whence the cries proceeded. they did well to hasten, for at a turn of the path near a clearing they saw the lad thrown on the ground and in the grasp of a savage being, apparently a gigantic ape, who was about to do him some great harm. to rush on this monster, throw him on the ground in his turn, snatch herbert from him, then bind him securely, was the work of a minute for pencroft and gideon spilett. the sailor was of herculean strength, the reporter also very powerful, and in spite of the monster's resistance he was firmly tied so that he could not even move. "you are not hurt, herbert," asked spilett. "no, no!" "oh, if this ape had wounded him!" exclaimed pencroft. "but he is not an ape," answered herbert. at these words pencroft and gideon spilett looked at the singular being who lay on the ground. indeed it was not an ape, it was a human being, a man. but what a man! a savage in all the horrible acceptation of the word, and so much the more frightful that he seemed fallen to the lowest degree of brutishness! [illustration: herbert in danger] shaggy hair, untrimmed beard descending to the chest, the body almost naked except a rag round the waist, wild eyes, enormous hands with immensely long nails, skin the colour of mahogany, feet as hard as if made of horn,--such was the miserable creature who yet had a claim to be called a man. but it might justly be asked if there were yet a soul in this body, or if the brute instinct alone survived in it! "are you quite sure that this is a man, or that he has ever been one?" said pencroft to the reporter. "alas! there is no doubt about it," replied spilett. "then this must be the castaway?" asked herbert. "yes," replied gideon spilett, "but the unfortunate man has no longer anything human about him!" the reporter spoke the truth. it was evident that if the castaway had ever been a civilised being, solitude had made him a savage, or worse, perhaps a regular man of the woods. hoarse sounds issued from his throat between his teeth, which were sharp as the teeth of a wild beast made to tear raw flesh. memory must have deserted him long before, and for a long time also he had forgotten how to use his gun and tools, and he no longer knew how to make a fire! it could be seen that he was active and powerful, but the physical qualities had been developed in him to the injury of the moral qualities. gideon spilett spoke to him. he did not appear to understand or even to hear. and yet on looking into his eyes, the reporter thought he could see that all reason was not extinguished in him. however, the prisoner did not struggle, nor even attempt to break his bonds. was he overwhelmed by the presence of men whose fellow he had once been? had he found in some corner of his brain a fleeting remembrance which recalled him to humanity? if free, would he attempt to fly, or would he remain? they could not tell, but they did not make the experiment; and after gazing attentively at the miserable creature,-- "whoever he may be," remarked gideon spilett; "whoever he may have been, and whatever he may become, it is our duty to take him with us to lincoln island." "yes, yes!" replied herbert; "and perhaps with care we may arouse in him some gleam of intelligence." "the soul does not die," said the reporter; "and it would be a great satisfaction to rescue one of god's creatures from brutishness." pencroft shook his head doubtfully. "we must try at any rate," returned the reporter; "humanity commands us." it was indeed their duty as christians and civilised beings. all three felt this, and they well knew that cyrus harding would approve of their acting thus. "shall we leave him bound?" asked the sailor. "perhaps he would walk if his feet were unfastened," said herbert. "let us try," replied pencroft. the cords which shackled the prisoner's feet were cut off, but his arms remained securely fastened. he got up by himself and did not manifest any desire to run away. his hard eyes darted a piercing glance at the three men, who walked near him, but nothing denoted that he recollected being their fellow, or at least having been so. a continual hissing sound issued from his lips, his aspect was wild, but he did not attempt to resist. by the reporter's advice the unfortunate man was taken to the hut. perhaps the sight of the things that belonged to him would make some impression on him! perhaps a spark would be sufficient to revive his obscured intellect, to rekindle his dulled soul. the dwelling was not far off. in a few minutes they arrived there, but the prisoner remembered nothing, and it appeared that he had lost consciousness of everything. what could they think of the degree of brutishness into which this miserable being had fallen, unless that his imprisonment on the islet dated from a very distant period, and after having arrived there a rational being solitude had reduced him to this condition. the reporter then thought that perhaps the sight of fire would have some effect on him, and in a moment one of those beautiful flames, that attract even animals, blazed up on the hearth. the sight of the flame seemed at first to fix the attention of the unhappy object, but soon he turned away and the look of intelligence faded. evidently there was nothing to be done, for the time at least, but to take him on board the _bonadventure_. this was done, and he remained there in pencroft's charge. herbert and spilett returned to finish their work; and some hours after they came back to the shore, carrying the utensils and guns, a store of vegetables, of seeds, some game, and two couple of pigs. all was embarked, and the _bonadventure_ was ready to weigh anchor and sail with the morning tide. the prisoner had been placed in the fore cabin, where he remained quiet, silent, apparently deaf and dumb. pencroft offered him something to eat, but he pushed away the cooked meat that was presented to him and which doubtless did not suit him. but on the sailor showing him one of the ducks which herbert had killed, he pounced on it like a wild beast, and devoured it greedily. "you think that he will recover his senses?" asked pencroft. "it is not impossible that our care will have an effect upon him, for it is solitude that has made him what he is, and from this time forward he will be no longer alone." "the poor man must no doubt have been in this state for a long time," said herbert. "perhaps," answered gideon spilett. "about what age is he?" asked the lad. "it is difficult to say," replied the reporter; "for it is impossible to see his features under the thick beard which covers his face; but he is no longer young, and i suppose he might be about fifty." "have you noticed, mr. spilett, how deeply sunk his eyes are?" asked herbert. "yes, herbert; but i must add that they are more human than one could expect from his appearance." "however, we shall see," replied pencroft; "and i am anxious to know what opinion captain harding will have of our savage. we went to look for a human creature, and we are bringing back a monster! after all we did what we could." the night passed, and whether the prisoner slept or not could not be known; but at any rate, although he had been unbound, he did not move. he was like a wild animal, which appears stunned at first by its capture, and becomes wild again afterwards. at daybreak the next morning, the th of october, the change of weather predicted by pencroft occurred. the wind having shifted to the north-west favoured the return of the _bonadventure_, but at the same time it freshened, which would render navigation more difficult. at five o'clock in the morning the anchor was weighed. pencroft took a reef in the mainsail, and steered towards the north-east, so as to sail straight for lincoln island. the first day of the voyage was not marked by any incident. the prisoner remained quiet in the fore-cabin, and as he had been a sailor it appeared that the motion of the vessel might produce on him a salutary reaction. did some recollection of his former calling return to him? however that might be he remained tranquil, astonished rather than depressed. the next day the wind increased, blowing more from the north, consequently in a less favourable direction for the _bonadventure_. pencroft was soon obliged to sail close-hauled, and without saying anything about it he began to be uneasy at the state of the sea, which frequently broke over the bows. certainly, if the wind did not moderate, it would take a longer time to reach lincoln island than it had taken to make tabor island. indeed, on the morning of the th, the _bonadventure_ had been forty-eight hours at sea, and nothing showed that she was near the island. it was impossible, besides, to estimate the distance traversed, or to trust to the reckoning for the direction, as the speed had been very irregular. twenty-four hours after there was yet no land in sight. the wind was right ahead and the sea very heavy. the sails were close-reefed, and they tacked frequently. on the th, a wave swept completely over the _bonadventure;_ and if the crew had not taken the precaution of lashing themselves to the deck, they would have been carried away. on this occasion pencroft and his companions, who were occupied with loosing themselves, received unexpected aid from the prisoner, who emerged from the hatchway as if his sailor's instinct had suddenly returned, broke a piece out of the bulwarks with a spar so as to let the water which filled the deck escape. then the vessel being clear, he descended to his cabin without having uttered a word. pencroft, gideon spilett, and herbert, greatly astonished, let him proceed. their situation was truly serious, and the sailor had reason to fear that he was lost on the wide sea without any possibility of recovering his course. the night was dark and cold. however, about eleven o'clock, the wind fell, the sea went down, and the speed of the vessel, as she laboured less, greatly increased. neither pencroft, spilett, nor herbert thought of taking an hour's sleep. they kept a sharp look-out, for either lincoln island could not be far distant and would be sighted at daybreak, or the _bonadventure_, carried away by currents, had drifted so much that it would be impossible to rectify her course. pencroft, uneasy to the last degree, yet did not despair, for he had a gallant heart, and grasping the tiller he anxiously endeavoured to pierce the darkness which surrounded them. about two o'clock in the morning he started forward,-- "a light! a light!" he shouted. indeed, a bright light appeared twenty miles to the north-east. lincoln island was there, and this fire, evidently lighted by cyrus harding, showed them the course to be followed. pencroft, who was bearing too much to the north, altered his course and steered towards the fire, which burned brightly above the horizon like a star of the first magnitude. [illustration: a light! a light!] chapter xv the return -- discussion -- cyrus harding and the stranger -- port balloon -- the engineer's devotion -- a touching incident -- tears flow. the next day, the th of october, at seven o'clock in the morning, after a voyage of four days, the _bonadventure_ gently glided up to the beach at the mouth of the mercy. cyrus harding and neb, who had become very uneasy at the bad weather and the prolonged absence of their companions, had climbed at daybreak to the plateau of prospect heights, and they had at last caught sight of the vessel which had been so long in returning. "god be praised! there they are!" exclaimed cyrus harding. as to neb in his joy, he began to dance, to twirl round, clapping his hands and shouting, "oh! my master!" a more touching pantomime than the finest discourse. the engineer's first idea, on counting the people on the deck of the _bonadventure_, was that pencroft had not found the castaway of tabor island, or at any rate that the unfortunate man had refused to leave his island and change one prison for another. indeed pencroft, gideon spilett, and herbert were alone on the deck of the _bonadventure_. the moment the vessel touched, the engineer and neb were waiting on the beach, and before the passengers had time to leap on to the sand, harding said: "we have been very uneasy at your delay, my friends! did you meet with any accident?" "no," replied gideon spilett; "on the contrary, everything went wonderfully well. we will tell you all about it." "however," returned the engineer, "your search has been unsuccessful, since you are only three just as you went!" "excuse me, captain," replied the sailor, "we are four." "you have found the castaway?" "yes." "and you have brought him?" "yes." "living?" "yes." "where is he? who is he?" "he is," replied the reporter, "or rather he was, a man! there, cyrus, that is all we can tell you!" the engineer was then informed of all that had passed during the voyage, and under what conditions the search had been conducted; how the only dwelling in the island had long been abandoned; how at last a castaway had been captured, who appeared no longer to belong to the human species. "and that's just the point," added pencroft, "i don't know if we have done right to bring him here." "certainly you have, pencroft," replied the engineer quickly. "but the wretched creature has no sense!" "that is possible at present," replied cyrus harding; "but only a few months ago the wretched creature was a man like you and me. and who knows what will become of the survivor of us after a long solitude on this island? it is a great misfortune to be alone, my friends; and it must be believed that solitude can quickly destroy reason, since you have found this poor creature in such a state!" "but, captain," asked herbert, "what leads you to think that the brutishness of the unfortunate man began only a few months back?" "because the document we found had been recently written," answered the engineer, "and the castaway alone can have written it." "always supposing," observed gideon spilett, "that it had not been written by a companion of this man, since dead." "that is impossible, my dear spilett." "why so?" asked the reporter. "because the document would then have spoken of two castaways," replied harding, "and it mentioned only one." herbert then in a few words related the incidents of the voyage, and dwelt on the curious fact of the sort of passing gleam in the prisoner's mind, when for an instant in the height of the storm he had become a sailor. "well, herbert," replied the engineer, "you are right to attach great importance to this fact. the unfortunate man cannot be incurable, and despair has made him what he is; but here he will find his fellow-men, and since there is still a soul in him, this soul we shall save!" the castaway of tabor island, to the great pity of the engineer and the great astonishment of neb, was then brought from the cabin which he occupied in the fore part of the _bonadventure_; when once on land he manifested a wish to run away. but cyrus harding approaching, placed his hand on his shoulder with a gesture full of authority, and looked at him with infinite tenderness. immediately the unhappy man, submitting to a superior will, gradually became calm, his eyes fell, his head bent, and he made no more resistance. "poor fellow!" murmured the engineer. cyrus harding had attentively observed him. to judge by his appearance this miserable being had no longer anything human about him, and yet harding, as had the reporter already, observed in his look an indefinable trace of intelligence. it was decided that the castaway, or rather the stranger, as he was thenceforth termed by his companions, should live in one of the rooms of granite house, from which, however, he could not escape. he was led there without difficulty; and with careful attention, it might, perhaps, be hoped that some day he would be a companion to the settlers in lincoln island. cyrus harding, during breakfast, which neb had hastened to prepare, as the reporter, herbert, and pencroft were dying of hunger, heard in detail all the incidents which had marked the voyage of exploration to the islet. he agreed with his friends on this point, that the stranger must be either english or american, the name britannia leading them to suppose this, and, besides, through the bushy beard, and under the shaggy, matted hair, the engineer thought he could recognise the characteristic features of the anglo-saxon. [illustration: "poor fellow," murmured the engineer] "but, by the bye," said gideon spilett, addressing herbert, "you never told us how you met this savage, and we know nothing, except that you would have been strangled, if we had not happened to come up in time to help you!" "upon my word," answered herbert, "it is rather difficult to say how it happened. i was, i think, occupied in collecting my plants, when i heard a noise like an avalanche falling from a very tall tree. i scarcely had time to look round. this unfortunate man, who was without doubt concealed in a tree, rushed upon me in less time than i take to tell you about it, and unless mr. spilett and pencroft--" "my boy!" said cyrus harding, "you ran a great danger, but, perhaps, without that, the poor creature would have still hidden himself from your search, and we should not have had a new companion." "you hope, then, cyrus, to succeed in reforming the man?" asked the reporter. "yes," replied the engineer. breakfast over, harding and his companions left granite house and returned to the beach. they there occupied themselves in unloading the _bonadventure_, and the engineer, having examined the arms and tools, saw nothing which could help them to establish the identity of the stranger. the capture of pigs, made on the islet, was looked upon as being very profitable to lincoln island, and the animals were led to the sty, where they soon became at home. the two barrels, containing the powder and shot, as well as the box of caps, were very welcome. it was agreed to establish a small powder-magazine, either outside granite house or in the upper cavern, where there would be no fear of explosion. however, the use of pyroxyle was to be continued, for this substance giving excellent results, there was no reason for substituting ordinary powder. when the unloading of the vessel was finished,-- "captain," said pencroft, "i think it would be prudent to put our _bonadventure_ in a safe place." "is she not safe at the mouth of the mercy?" asked cyrus harding. "no, captain," replied the sailor. "half of the time she is stranded on the sand, and that works her. she is a famous craft, you see, and she behaved admirably during the squall which struck us on our return." "could she not float in the river?" "no doubt, captain, she could; but there is no shelter there, and in the east winds, i think that the _bonadventure_ would suffer much from the surf." "well, where would you put her, pencroft?" "in port balloon," replied the sailor. "that little creek, shut in by rocks, seems to me to be just the harbour we want." "is it not rather far?" "pooh! it is not more than three miles from granite house, and we have a fine straight road to take us there!" "do it then, pencroft, and take your _bonadventure_ there," replied the engineer, "and yet i would rather have her under our more immediate protection. when we have time, we must make a little harbour for her." "famous!" exclaimed pencroft. "a harbour with a lighthouse, a pier, and a dock! ah! really with you, captain, everything becomes easy." "yes, my brave pencroft," answered the engineer, "but on condition, however, that you help me, for you do as much as three men in all our work." herbert and the sailor then re-embarked on board the _bonadventure_, the anchor was weighed, the sail hoisted, and the wind drove her rapidly towards claw cape. two hours after, she was reposing on the tranquil waters of port balloon. during the first days passed by the stranger in granite house, had he already given them reason to think that his savage nature was becoming tamed? did a brighter light burn in the depths of that obscured mind? in short, was the soul returning to the body? yes, to a certainty, and to such a degree, that cyrus harding and the reporter wondered if the reason of the unfortunate man had ever been totally extinguished. at first, accustomed to the open air, to the unrestrained liberty which he had enjoyed on tabor island, the stranger manifested a sullen fury, and it was feared that he might throw himself on to the beach, out of one of the windows of granite house. but gradually he became calmer, and more freedom was allowed to his movements. they had reason to hope, and to hope much. already, forgetting his carnivorous instincts, the stranger accepted a less bestial nourishment than that on which he fed on the islet, and cooked meat did not produce in him the same sentiment of repulsion which he had showed on board the _bonadventure_. cyrus harding had profited by a moment when he was sleeping, to cut his hair and matted beard, which formed a sort of mane, and gave him such a savage aspect. he had also been clothed more suitably, after having got rid of the rag which covered him. the result was that, thanks to these attentions, the stranger resumed a more human appearance, and it even seemed as if his eyes had become milder. certainly, when formerly lighted up by intelligence, this man's face must have had a sort of beauty. every day, harding imposed on himself the task of passing some hours in his company. he came and worked near him, and occupied himself in different things, so as to fix his attention. a spark, indeed, would be sufficient to reillumine that soul, a recollection crossing that brain to recall reason. that had been seen, during the storm, on board the _bonadventure!_ the engineer did not neglect either to speak aloud, so as to penetrate at the same time by the organs of hearing and sight the depths of that torpid intelligence. sometimes one of his companions, sometimes another, sometimes all joined him. they spoke most often of things belonging to the navy, which must interest a sailor. at times the stranger gave some slight attention to what was said, and the settlers were soon convinced that he partly understood them. sometimes the expression of his countenance was deeply sorrowful, a proof that he suffered mentally, for his face could not be mistaken; but he did not speak, although at different times, however, they almost thought that words were about to issue from his lips. at all events, the poor creature was quite quiet and sad! but was not his calm only apparent? was not his sadness only the result of his seclusion? nothing could yet be ascertained. seeing only certain objects and in a limited space, always in contact with the colonists, to whom he would soon become accustomed, having no desires to satisfy, better fed, better clothed, it was natural that his physical nature should gradually improve; but was he penetrated with the sense of a new life? or rather, to employ a word, which would be exactly applicable to him, was he not becoming tamed, like an animal in company with his master? this was an important question, which cyrus harding was anxious to answer, and yet he did not wish to treat his invalid roughly! would he ever be a convalescent? how the engineer observed him every moment! how he was on the watch for his soul, if one may use the expression! how he was ready to grasp it! the settlers followed with real sympathy all the phases of the cure undertaken by harding. they aided him also in this work of humanity, and all, except perhaps the incredulous pencroft, soon shared both his hope and his faith. the calm of the stranger was deep, as has been said, and he even showed a sort of attachment for the engineer, whose influence he evidently felt. cyrus harding resolved then to try him, by transporting him to another scene, from that ocean which formerly his eyes had been accustomed to contemplate, to the border of the forest, which might perhaps recall those where so many years of his life had been passed! "but," said gideon spilett, "can we hope that he will not escape, if once set at liberty?" "the experiment must be tried," replied the engineer. "well!" said pencroft. "when that fellow is outside, and feels the fresh air, he will be off as fast as his legs can carry him!" "i do not think so," returned harding. "let us try," said spilett. "we will try," replied the engineer. this was on the th of october, and consequently the castaway of tabor island had been a prisoner in granite house for nine days. it was warm, and a bright sun darted his rays on the island. cyrus harding and pencroft went to the room occupied by the stranger, who was found lying near the window and gazing at the sky. "come, my friend," said the engineer to him. the stranger rose immediately. his eyes were fixed on cyrus harding, and he followed him, whilst the sailor marched behind them, little confident as to the result of the experiment. arrived at the door, harding and pencroft made him take his place in the lift, whilst neb, herbert, and gideon spilett waited for them before granite house. the lift descended, and in a few moments all were united on the beach. the settlers went a short distance from the stranger, so as to leave him at liberty. he then made a few steps towards the sea, and his look brightened with extreme animation, but he did not make the slightest attempt to escape. he was gazing at the little waves, which broken by the islet rippled on the sand. "this is only the sea," observed gideon spilett, "and possibly it does not inspire him with any wish to escape!" "yes," replied harding, "we must take him to the plateau, on the border of the forest. there the experiment will be more conclusive." "besides, he could not run away," said neb, "since the bridge is raised." "oh!" said pencroft, "that isn't a man to be troubled by a stream like creek glycerine! he could cross it directly, at a single bound!" "we shall soon see," harding contented himself with replying, his eyes not quitting those of his patient. the latter was then led towards the mouth of the mercy, and all climbing the left bank of the river, reached prospect heights. arrived at the spot on which grew the first beautiful trees of the forest, their foliage slightly agitated by the breeze, the stranger appeared greedily to drink in the penetrating odour which filled the atmosphere, and a long sigh escaped from his chest. the settlers kept behind him, ready to seize him if he made any movement to escape! and, indeed, the poor creature was on the point of springing into the creek which separated him from the forest, and his legs were bent for an instant as if for a spring, but almost immediately he stepped back, half sank down, and a large tear fell from his eyes. "ah!" exclaimed cyrus harding, "you have become a man again, for you can weep!" [illustration: the experiment] chapter xvi a mystery to be cleared up -- the stranger's first words -- twelve years on the islet -- avowal which escapes him -- the disappearance -- cyrus harding's confidence -- construction of a mill -- the first bread -- an act of devotion -- honest hands. yes! the unfortunate man had wept! some recollection doubtless had flashed across his brain, and to use cyrus harding's expression, by those tears he was once more a man. the colonists left him for some time on the plateau, and withdrew themselves to a short distance, so that he might feel himself free; but he did not think of profiting by this liberty, and harding soon brought him back to granite house. two days after this occurrence, the stranger appeared to wish gradually to mingle with their common life. he evidently heard and understood, but no less evidently was he strangely determined not to speak to the colonists; for one evening, pencroft, listening at the door of his room, heard these words escape from his lips:-- "no! here! i! never!" the sailor reported these words to his companions. "there is some painful mystery there!" said harding. the stranger had begun to use the labouring tools, and he worked in the garden. when he stopped in his work, as was often the case, he remained retired within himself; but on the engineer's recommendation, they respected the reserve which he apparently wished to keep. if one of the settlers approached him, he drew back, and his chest heaved with sobs, as if overburthened! was it remorse that overwhelmed him thus? they were compelled to believe so, and gideon spilett could not help one day making this observation,-- "if he does not speak it is because he has, i fear, things too serious to be told!" they must be patient and wait. [illustration: "who are you?" he asked in a hollow voice] a few days later, on the rd of november, the stranger, working on the plateau, had stopped, letting his spade drop to the ground, and harding who was observing him from a little distance, saw that tears were again flowing from his eyes. a sort of irresistible pity led him towards the unfortunate man, and he touched his arm lightly. "my friend!" said he. the stranger tried to avoid his look, and cyrus harding, having endeavoured to take his hand, he drew back quickly. "my friend," said harding in a firmer voice, "look at me, i wish it!" the stranger looked at the engineer, and seemed to be under his power, as a subject under the influence of a mesmerist. he wished to run away. but then his countenance suddenly underwent a transformation. his eyes flashed. words struggled to escape from his lips. he could no longer contain himself!... at last he folded his arms, then, in a hollow voice,-- "who are you?" he asked cyrus harding. "castaways, like you," replied the engineer, whose emotion was deep. "we have brought you here, among your fellow-men." "my fellow-men!... i have none!" "you are in the midst of friends." "friends!--for me! friends!" exclaimed the stranger, hiding his face in his hands. "no--never--leave me! leave me!" then he rushed to the side of the plateau which overlooked the sea, and remained there a long time motionless. harding rejoined his companions and related to them what had just happened. "yes! there is some mystery in that man's life," said gideon spilett, "and it appears as if he had only re-entered society by the path of remorse." "i don't know what sort of a man we have brought here," said the sailor. "he has secrets--" "which we will respect," interrupted cyrus harding quickly. "if he has committed any crime, he has most fearfully expiated it, and in our eyes he is absolved." [illustration: the stranger] for two hours the stranger remained alone on the shore, evidently under the influence of recollections which recalled all his past life--a melancholy life doubtless--and the colonists, without losing sight of him, did not attempt to disturb his solitude. however, after two hours, appearing to have formed a resolution, he came to find cyrus harding. his eyes were red with the tears he had shed, but he wept no longer. his countenance expressed deep humility. he appeared anxious, timorous, ashamed, and his eyes were constantly fixed on the ground. "sir," said he to harding, "your companions and you, are you english?" "no," answered the engineer, "we are americans." "ah!" said the stranger, and he murmured, "i prefer that!" "and you, my friend?" asked the engineer. "english," replied he hastily. and as if these few words had been difficult to say, he retreated to the beach, where he walked up and down between the cascade and the mouth of the mercy, in a state of extreme agitation. then, passing one moment close to herbert, he stopped, and in a stifled voice,-- "what month?" he asked. "december," replied herbert. "what year?" " ." "twelve years! twelve years!" he exclaimed. then he left him abruptly. herbert reported to the colonists the questions and answers which had been made. "this unfortunate man," observed gideon spilett, "was no longer acquainted with either months or years!" "yes!" added herbert, "and he had been twelve years already on the islet when we found him there!" "twelve years!" rejoined harding. "ah! twelve years of solitude, after a wicked life, perhaps, may well impair a man's reason!" "i am induced to think," said pencroft, "that this man was not wrecked on tabor island, but that in consequence of some crime he was left there." "you must be right, pencroft," replied the reporter, "and if it is so it is not impossible that those who left him on the island may return to fetch him some day!" "and they will no longer find him," said herbert. "but then," added pencroft, "they must return, and--" "my friends," said cyrus harding, "do not let us discuss this question until we know more about it. i believe that the unhappy man has suffered, that he has severely expiated his faults, whatever they may have been, and that the wish to unburden himself stifles him. do not let us press him to tell us his history! he will tell it to us doubtless, and when we know it, we shall see what course it will be best to follow. he alone besides can tell us, if he has more than a hope, a certainty, of returning some day to his country, but i doubt it!" "and why?" asked the reporter. "because that, in the event of his being sure of being delivered at a certain time, he would have waited the hour of his deliverance and would not have thrown this document into the sea. no, it is more probable that he was condemned to die on that islet, and that he never expected to see his fellow-creatures again!" "but," observed the sailor, "there is one thing which i cannot explain." "what is it?" "if this man had been left for twelve years on tabor island, one may well suppose that he had been several years already in the wild state in which we found him!" "that is probable," replied cyrus harding. "it must then be many years since he wrote that document!" "no doubt, and yet the document appears to have been recently written!" "besides, how do you know that the bottle which enclosed the document may not have taken several years to come from tabor island to lincoln island?" "that is not absolutely impossible," replied the reporter. "might it not have been a long time already on the coast of the island?" "no," answered pencroft, "for it was still floating. we could not even suppose that after it had stayed for any length of time on the shore, it would have been swept off by the sea, for the south coast is all rocks, and it would certainly have been smashed to pieces there!" "that is true," rejoined cyrus harding thoughtfully. "and then," continued the sailor, "if the document was several years old, if it had been shut up in that bottle for several years, it would have been injured by damp. now, there is nothing of the kind, and it was found in a perfect state of preservation." the sailor's reasoning was very just, and pointed out an incomprehensible fact, for the document appeared to have been recently written, when the colonists found it in the bottle. moreover, it gave the latitude and longitude of tabor island correctly, which implied that its author had a more complete knowledge of hydrography than could be expected of a common sailor. "there is in this, again, something unaccountable," said the engineer; "but we will not urge our companion to speak. when he likes, my friends, then we shall be ready to hear him!" during the following days the stranger did not speak a word, and did not once leave the precincts of the plateau. he worked away, without losing a moment, without taking a minute's rest, but always in a retired place. at meal times he never came to granite house, although invited several times to do so, but contented himself with eating a few raw vegetables. at nightfall he did not return to the room assigned to him, but remained under some clump of trees, or when the weather was bad crouched in some cleft of the rocks. thus he lived in the same manner as when he had no other shelter than the forests of tabor island, and as all persuasion to induce him to improve his life was in vain, the colonists waited patiently. and the time was near, when, as it seemed, almost involuntarily urged by his conscience, a terrible confession escaped him. on the th of november, about eight o'clock in the evening, as night was coming on, the stranger appeared unexpectedly before the settlers, who were assembled under the verandah. his eyes burned strangely, and he had quite resumed the wild aspect of his worst days. cyrus harding and his companions were astounded on seeing that, overcome by some terrible emotion, his teeth chattered like those of a person in a fever. what was the matter with him? was the sight of his fellow-creatures insupportable to him? was he weary of this return to a civilised mode of existence? was he pining for his former savage life? it appeared so, as soon he was heard to express himself in these incoherent sentences:-- "why am i here?... by what right have you dragged me from my islet?... do you think there could be any tie between you and me?... do you know who i am--what i have done--why i was there--alone? and who told you that i was not abandoned there--that i was not condemned to die there?... do you know my past?... how do you know that i have not stolen, murdered--that i am not a wretch--an accursed being--only fit to live like a wild beast far from all--speak--do you know it?" the colonists listened without interrupting the miserable creature, from whom these broken confessions escaped, as it were, in spite of himself. harding wishing to calm him, approached him, but he hastily drew back. "no! no!" he exclaimed; "one word only--am i free?" "you are free," answered the engineer. "farewell then!" he cried, and fled like a madman. neb, pencroft, and herbert ran also towards the edge of the wood--but they returned alone. "we must let him alone!" said cyrus harding. "he will never come back!" exclaimed pencroft. "he will come back," replied the engineer. many days passed; but harding--was it a sort of presentiment?--persisted in the fixed idea that sooner or later the unhappy man would return. "it is the last revolt of his wild nature," said he, "which remorse has touched, and which renewed solitude will terrify." in the meanwhile, works of all sorts were continued, as well on prospect heights as at the corral, where harding intended to build a farm. it is unnecessary to say that the seeds collected by herbert on tabor island had been carefully sown. the plateau thus formed one immense kitchen-garden, well laid out and carefully tended, so that the arms of the settlers were never in want of work. there was always something to be done. as the esculents increased in number, it became necessary to enlarge the simple beds, which threatened to grow into regular fields and replace the meadows. but grass abounded in other parts of the island, and there was no fear of the onagas being obliged to go on short allowance. it was well worth while, besides, to turn prospect heights into a kitchen-garden, defended by its deep belt of creeks, and to remove them to the meadows, which had no need of protection against the depredations of quadrumana and quadrupeds. on the th of november, the third harvest was gathered in. how wonderfully had the field increased in extent, since eighteen months ago, when the first grain of wheat was sown! the second crop of six hundred thousand grains produced this time four thousand bushels, or five hundred millions of grains! the colony was rich in corn, for ten bushels alone were sufficient for sowing every year to produce an ample crop for the food both of men and beasts. the harvest was completed, and the last fortnight of the month of november was devoted to the work of converting it into food for man. in fact, they had corn, but not flour, and the establishment of a mill was necessary. cyrus harding could have utilised the second fall which flowed into the mercy to establish his motive power, the first being already occupied with moving the felting mill; but after some consultation, it was decided that a simple windmill should be built on prospect heights. the building of this presented no more difficulty than the building of the former, and it was moreover certain that there would be no want of wind on the plateau, exposed as it was to the sea breezes. "not to mention," said pencroft, "that the windmill will be more lively and will have a good effect in the landscape!" they set to work by choosing timber for the frame and machinery of the mill. some large stones, found at the north of the lake, could be easily transformed into millstones; and as to the sails, the inexhaustible case of the balloon furnished the necessary material. cyrus harding made his model, and the site of the mill was chosen a little to the right of the poultry-yard, near the shore of the lake. the frame was to rest on a pivot supported with strong timbers, so that it could turn with all the machinery it contained according as the wind required it. the work advanced rapidly. neb and pencroft had become very skilful carpenters, and had nothing to do but to copy the models provided by the engineer. soon a sort of cylindrical box, in shape like a pepperpot, with a pointed roof, rose on the spot chosen. the four frames which formed the sails had been firmly fixed in the centre beam, so as to form a certain angle with it, and secured with iron clamps. as to the different parts of the internal mechanism, the box destined to contain the two millstones, the fixed stone and the moving stone, the hopper, a sort of large square trough, wide at the top, narrow at the bottom, which would allow the grain to fall on the stones, the oscillating spout intended to regulate the passing of the grain, and lastly the bolting machine, which by the operation of sifting, separates the bran from the flour, were made without difficulty. the tools were good, and the work not difficult, for in reality, the machinery of a mill is very simple. this was only a question of time. every one had worked at the construction of the mill, and on the st of december it was finished. as usual, pencroft was delighted with his work, and had no doubt that the apparatus was perfect. "now for a good wind," said he, "and we shall grind our first harvest splendidly!" "a good wind, certainly," answered the engineer, "but not too much, pencroft." "pooh! our mill would only go the faster!" "there is no need for it to go so very fast," replied cyrus harding. "it is known by experience that the greatest quantity of work is performed by a mill when the number of turns made by the sails in a minute is six times the number of feet traversed by the wind in a second. a moderate breeze, which passes over twenty-four feet to the second, will give sixteen turns to the sails during a minute, and there is no need of more." "exactly!" cried herbert; "a fine breeze is blowing from the north-east, which will soon do our business for us." there was no reason for delaying the inauguration of the mill, for the settlers were eager to taste the first piece of bread in lincoln island. on this morning two or three bushels of wheat were ground, and the next day at breakfast a magnificent loaf, a little heavy perhaps, although raised with yeast, appeared on the table at granite house. every one munched away at it with a pleasure which may be easily understood. in the meanwhile, the stranger had not reappeared. several times gideon spilett and herbert searched the forest in the neighbourhood of granite house, without meeting or finding any trace of him. they became seriously uneasy at this prolonged absence. certainly, the former savage of tabor island could not be perplexed how to live in the forest, abounding in game, but was it not to be feared that he had resumed his habits, and that this freedom would revive in him his wild instincts? however, harding, by a sort of presentiment, doubtless, always persisted in saying that the fugitive would return. "yes, he will return!" he repeated with a confidence which his companions could not share. "when this unfortunate man was on tabor island, he knew himself to be alone! here, he knows that fellow men are awaiting him! since he has partially spoken of his past life, the poor penitent will return to tell the whole, and from that day he will belong to us!" the event justified cyrus harding's predictions. on the rd of december, herbert had left the plateau to go and fish on the southern bank of the lake. he was unarmed, and till then had never taken any precautions for defence as dangerous animals had not shown themselves on that part of the island. meanwhile, pencroft and neb were working in the poultry-yard, whilst harding and the reporter were occupied at the chimneys in making soda, the store of soap being exhausted. suddenly cries resounded,-- "help! help!" cyrus harding and the reporter, being at too great a distance, had not been able to hear the shouts. pencroft and neb, leaving the poultry-yard in all haste, rushed towards the lake. [illustration: now for a good wind] but before them, the stranger, whose presence at this place no one had suspected, crossed creek glycerine, which separated the plateau from the forest, and bounded up the opposite bank. herbert was there face to face with a fierce jaguar, similar to the one which had been killed on reptile end. suddenly surprised, he was standing with his back against a tree, whilst the animal, gathering itself together, was about to spring. but the stranger, with no other weapon than a knife, rushed on the formidable animal, who turned to meet this new adversary. the struggle was short. the stranger possessed immense strength and activity. he seized the jaguar's throat with one powerful hand, holding it as in a vice, without heeding the beast's claws which tore his flesh, and with the other he plunged his knife into its heart. the jaguar fell. the stranger kicked away the body, and was about to fly at the moment when the settlers arrived on the field of battle, but herbert, clinging to him, cried,-- "no, no! you shall not go!" harding advanced towards the stranger, who frowned when he saw him approaching. the blood flowed from his shoulder under his torn shirt, but he took no notice of it. "my friend," said cyrus harding, "we have just contracted a debt of gratitude to you. to save our boy you have risked your life!" "my life!" murmured the stranger "what is that worth? less than nothing!" "you are wounded!" "it is no matter." "will you give me your hand?" and as herbert endeavoured to seize the hand which had just saved him, the stranger folded his arms, his chest heaved, his look darkened, and he appeared to wish to escape, but making a violent effort over himself, and in an abrupt tone,-- "who are you?" he asked, "and what do you claim to be to me?" it was the colonists' history which he thus demanded, and for the first time. perhaps this history recounted, he would tell his own. [illustration: he seized the jaguar's throat with one powerful hand] in a few words harding related all that had happened since their departure from richmond; how they had managed, and what resources they now had at their disposal. the stranger listened with extreme attention. then the engineer told who they all were, gideon spilett, herbert, pencroft, neb, himself; and he added, that the greatest happiness they had felt since their arrival in lincoln island was on the return of the vessel from tabor island, when they had been able to include amongst them a new companion. at these words the stranger's face flushed, his head sunk on his breast, and confusion was depicted on his countenance. "and now that you know us," added cyrus harding, "will you give us your hand?" "no," replied the stranger in a hoarse voice; "no! you are honest men, you! and i--" chapter xvii still alone -- the stranger's request -- the farm established at the corral -- twelve years ago -- the boatswain's mate of the _britannia_ -- left on tabor island -- cyrus harding's hand -- the mysterious document. these last words justified the colonists' presentiment. there had been some mournful past, perhaps expiated in the sight of men, but from which his conscience had not yet absolved him. at any rate the guilty man felt remorse, he repented, and his new friends would have cordially pressed the hand which they sought; but he did not feel himself worthy to extend it to honest men! however, after the scene with the jaguar, he did not return to the forest, and from that day did not go beyond the enclosure of granite house. what was the mystery of his life? would the stranger one day speak of it? time alone could show. at any rate, it was agreed that his secret should never be asked from him, and that they would live with him as if they suspected nothing. for some days their life continued as before. cyrus harding and gideon spilett worked together, sometimes chemists, sometimes experimentalists. the reporter never left the engineer except to hunt with herbert, for it would not have been prudent to allow the lad to ramble alone in the forest; and it was very necessary to be on their guard. as to neb and pencroft, one day at the stables and poultry-yard, another at the corral, without reckoning work in granite house, they were never in want of employment. the stranger worked alone, and he had resumed his usual life, never appearing at meals, sleeping under the trees in the plateau, never mingling with his companions. it really seemed as if the society of those who had saved him was insupportable to him! "but then," observed pencroft, "why did he entreat the help of his fellow-creatures? why did he throw that paper into the sea?" "he will tell us why," invariably replied cyrus harding. "when?" "perhaps sooner than you think, pencroft." and, indeed, the day of confession was near. on the th of december, a week after his return to granite house, harding saw the stranger approaching, who, in a calm voice and humble tone, said to him: "sir, i have a request to make you." "speak," answered the engineer; "but first let me ask you a question." at these words the stranger reddened, and was on the point of withdrawing. cyrus harding understood what was passing in the mind of the guilty man, who doubtless feared that the engineer would interrogate him on his past life. harding held him back. "comrade," said he, "we are not only your companions but your friends. i wish you to believe that, and now i will listen to you." the stranger pressed his hand over his eyes. he was seized with a sort of trembling, and remained a few moments without being able to articulate a word. "sir," said he at last, "i have come to beg you to grant me a favour." "what is it?" "you have, four or five miles from here, a corral for your domesticated animals. these animals need to be taken care of. will you allow me to live there with them?" cyrus harding gazed at the unfortunate man for a few moments with a feeling of deep commiseration; then,-- "my friend," said he, "the corral has only stables hardly fit for animals." "it will be good enough for me, sir." "my friend," answered harding, "we will not constrain you in anything. you wish to live at the corral, so be it. you will, however, be always welcome at granite house. but since you wish to live at the corral we will make the necessary arrangements for your being comfortably established there." "never mind that, i shall do very well." "my friend," answered harding, who always intentionally made use of this cordial appellation, "you must let us judge what it will be best to do in this respect." "thank you, sir," replied the stranger as he withdrew. the engineer then made known to his companions the proposal which had been made to him, and it was agreed that they should build a wooden house at the corral, which they would make as comfortable as possible. that very day the colonists repaired to the corral with the necessary tools, and a week had not passed before the house was ready to receive its tenant. it was built about twenty feet from the sheds, and from there it was easy to overlook the flock of sheep, which then numbered more than eighty. some furniture, a bed, table, bench, cupboard, and chest, were manufactured, and a gun, ammunition, and tools were carried to the corral. the stranger, however, had seen nothing of his new dwelling, and he had allowed the settlers to work there without him, whilst he occupied himself on the plateau, wishing, doubtless, to put the finishing stroke to his work. indeed, thanks to him, all the ground was dug up and ready to be sowed when the time came. it was on the th of december that all the arrangements at the corral were completed. the engineer announced to the stranger that his dwelling was ready to receive him, and the latter replied that he would go and sleep there that very evening. on this evening the colonists were gathered in the dining-room of granite house. it was then eight o'clock, the hour at which their companion was to leave them. not wishing to trouble him by their presence, and thus imposing on him the necessity of saying farewells which might perhaps be painful to him, they had left him alone, and ascended to granite house. now, they had been talking in the room for a few minutes, when a light knock was heard at the door. almost immediately the stranger entered, and without any preamble,-- "gentlemen," said he, "before i leave you, it is right that you should know my history. i will tell it you." these simple words profoundly impressed cyrus harding and his companions. the engineer rose. "we ask you nothing, my friend," said he, "it is your right to be silent." "it is my duty to speak." "sit down, then." "no, i will stand." "we are ready to hear you," replied harding. the stranger remained standing in a corner of the room, a little in the shade. he was bareheaded, his arms folded across his chest, and it was in this posture that in a hoarse voice, speaking like some one who obliges himself to speak, he gave the following recital, which his auditors did not once interrupt--- "on the th of december, , a steam-yacht, belonging to a scotch nobleman, lord glenarvan, anchored off cape bermouilli, on the western coast of australia, in the thirty-seventh parallel. on board this yacht were lord glenarvan and his wife, a major in the english army, a french geographer, a young girl, and a young boy. these two last were the children of captain grant, whose ship, the _britannia_, had been lost, crew and cargo, a year before. the _duncan_ was commanded by captain john mangles, and manned by a crew of fifteen men. "this is the reason the yacht at this time lay off the coast of australia. six months before, a bottle, enclosing a document written in english, german, and french, had been found in the irish sea, and picked up by the _duncan_. this document stated in substance that there still existed three survivors from the wreck of the _britannia_, that these survivors were captain grant and two of his men, and that they had found refuge on some land, of which the document gave the latitude, but of which the longitude, effaced by the sea, was no longer legible. [illustration: the stranger's story] "this latitude was ° ´ south, therefore, the longitude being unknown, if they followed the thirty-seventh parallel over continents and seas, they would be certain to reach the spot inhabited by captain grant and his two companions. the english admiralty having hesitated to undertake this search, lord glenarvan resolved to attempt everything to find the captain. he communicated with mary and robert grant, who joined him. the _duncan_ yacht was equipped for the distant voyage, in which the nobleman's family and the captain's children wished to take part; and the _duncan_, leaving glasgow, proceeded towards the atlantic, passed through the straits of magellan, and ascended the pacific as far as patagonia, where, according to a previous interpretation of the document, they supposed that captain grant was a prisoner among the indians. "the _duncan_ disembarked her passengers on the western coast of patagonia, and sailed to pick them up again on the eastern coast at cape corrientes. lord glenarvan traversed patagonia, following the thirty-seventh parallel, and having found no trace of the captain, he re-embarked on the th of november, so as to pursue his search through the ocean. "after having unsuccessfully visited the islands of tristan d'acunha and amsterdam, situated in her course, the _duncan_, as i have said, arrived at cape bermouilli, on the australian coast, on the th of december, . "it was lord glenarvan's intention to traverse australia as he had traversed america, and he disembarked. a few miles from the coast was established a farm, belonging to an irishman, who offered hospitality to the travellers. lord glenarvan made known to the irishman the cause which had brought him to these parts, and asked if he knew whether a three-masted english vessel, the _britannia_, had been lost less than two years before on the west coast of australia. "the irishman had never heard of this wreck; but, to the great surprise of the bystanders, one of his servants came forward and said,-- "'my lord, praise and thank god! if captain grant is still living, he is living on the australian shores.' "'who are you?' asked lord glenarvan. "'a scotchman like yourself, my lord,' replied the man; 'i am one of captain grant's crew--one of the castaways of the _britannia_.' "this man was called ayrton. he was, in fact, the boatswain's mate of the _britannia_, as his papers showed. but, separated from captain grant at the moment when the ship struck upon the rocks, he had till then believed that the captain with all his crew had perished, and that he, ayrton, was the sole survivor of the _britannia_. "'only,' added he, 'it was not on the west coast, but on the east coast of australia that the vessel was lost; and if captain grant is still living, as his document indicates, he is a prisoner among the natives, and it is on the other coast that he must be looked for.' "this man spoke in a frank voice and with a confident look; his words could not be doubted. the irishman, in whose service he had been for more than a year, answered for his trustworthiness. lord glenarvan, therefore, believed in the fidelity of this man, and, by his advice, resolved to cross australia, following the thirty-seventh parallel. lord glenarvan, his wife, the two children, the major, the frenchman, captain mangles, and a few sailors composed the little band under the command of ayrton, whilst the _duncan_, under charge of the mate, tom austin, proceeded to melbourne, there to await lord glenarvan's instructions. "they set out on the rd of december, . "it is time to say that ayrton was a traitor. he was, indeed, the boatswain's mate of the _britannia_; but, after some dispute with his captain, he had endeavoured to incite the crew to mutiny and seize the ship, and captain grant had landed him, on the th of april, , on the west coast of australia, and then sailed, leaving him there, as was only just. "therefore this wretched man knew nothing of the wreck of the _britannia_; he had just heard of it from glenarvan's account. since his abandonment, he had become, under the name of ben joyce, the leader of the escaped convicts; and if he boldly maintained that the wreck had taken place on the east coast, and led lord glenarvan to proceed in that direction, it was that he hoped to separate him from his ship, seize the _duncan_, and make the yacht a pirate in the pacific." here the stranger stopped for a moment. his voice trembled, but he continued,-- "the expedition set out and proceeded across australia. it was inevitably unfortunate, since ayrton, or ben joyce, as he may be called, guided it, sometimes preceded, sometimes followed by his band of convicts, who had been told what they had to do. "meanwhile the _duncan_ had been sent to melbourne for repairs. it was necessary, then, to get lord glenarvan to order her to leave melbourne and go to the east coast of australia, where it would be easy to seize her. after having led the expedition near enough to the coast, in the midst of vast forests with no resources, ayrton obtained a letter, which he was charged to carry to the mate of the _duncan_--a letter which ordered the yacht to repair immediately to the east coast, to twofold bay, that is to say, a few days' journey from the place where the expedition had stopped. it was there that ayrton had agreed to meet his accomplices, and two days after gaining possession of the letter, he arrived at melbourne. "so far the villain had succeeded in his wicked design. he would be able to take the _duncan_ into twofold bay, where it would be easy for the convicts to seize her, and her crew massacred, ben joyce would become master of the seas.... but it pleased god to prevent the accomplishment of these terrible projects. "ayrton, arrived at melbourne, delivered the letter to the mate, tom austin, who read it and immediately set sail; but judge of ayrton's rage and disappointment, when the next day he found that the mate was taking the vessel, not to the east coast of australia, to twofold bay, but to the east coast of new zealand. he wished to stop him, but austin showed him the letter!... and indeed, by a providential error of the french geographer, who had written the letter, the east coast of new zealand was mentioned as the place of destination. "all ayrton's plans were frustrated! he became outrageous. they put him in irons. he was then taken to the coast of new zealand, not knowing what would become of his accomplices, or what would become of lord glenarvan. "the _duncan_ cruised about on this coast until the rd of march. on that day ayrton heard the report of guns. the guns of the _duncan_ were being fired, and soon lord glenarvan and his companions came on board. "this is what had happened. "after a thousand hardships, a thousand dangers, lord glenarvan had accomplished his journey, and arrived on the east coast of australia, at twofold bay. 'no _duncan_!' he telegraphed to melbourne. they answered, '_duncan_ sailed on the th instant. destination unknown.' "lord glenarvan could only arrive at one conclusion: that his honest yacht had fallen into the hands of ben joyce, and had become a pirate vessel! "however, lord glenarvan would not give up. he was a bold and generous man. he embarked in a merchant vessel, sailed to the west coast of new zealand, traversed it along the thirty-seventh parallel, without finding any trace of captain grant; but on the other side, to his great surprise, and by the will of heaven, he found the _duncan,_ under command of the mate, who had been waiting for him for five weeks! "this was on the rd of march . lord glenarvan was now on board the _duncan_, but ayrton was there also. he appeared before the nobleman, who wished to extract from him all that the villain knew about captain grant. ayrton refused to speak. lord glenarvan then told him, that at the first port they put into, he would be delivered up to the english authorities. ayrton remained mute. "the _duncan_ continued her voyage along the thirty-seventh parallel. in the meanwhile, lady glenarvan undertook to vanquish the resistance of the ruffian. "at last, her influence prevailed, and ayrton, in exchange for what he could tell, proposed that lord glenarvan should leave him on some island in the pacific, instead of giving him up to the english authorities. lord glenarvan, resolving to do anything to obtain information about captain grant, consented. "ayrton then related all his life, and it was certain that he knew nothing from the day on which captain grant had landed him on the australian coast. "nevertheless, lord glenarvan kept the promise which he had given. the _duncan_ continued her voyage and arrived at tabor island. it was there that ayrton was to be landed, and it was there also that, by a veritable miracle, they found captain grant and two men, exactly on the thirty-seventh parallel. "the convict, then, went to take their place on this desert islet, and at the moment he left the yacht these words were pronounced by lord glenarvan:-- "'here, ayrton, you will be far from any land, and without any possible communication with your fellow-creatures. you cannot escape from this islet on which the _duncan_ leaves you. you will be alone, under the eye of a god who reads the depths of the heart; but you will be neither lost nor forgotten, as was captain grant. unworthy as you are to be remembered by men, men will remember you. i know where you are, ayrton, and i know where to find you. i will never forget it!' "and the _duncan_, making sail, soon disappeared. this was on the th of march .[ ] [ ] the events which have just been briefly related are taken from a work which some of our readers have no doubt read, and which is entitled _captain grant's children_. they will remark on this occasion, as well as later, some discrepancy in the dates: but later again, they will understand why the real dates were not at first given. "ayrton was alone, but he had no want of either ammunition, weapons, tools, or seeds. "at his, the convict's disposal, was the house built by honest captain grant. he had only to live and expiate in solitude the crimes which he had committed. "gentlemen, he repented, he was ashamed of his crimes and was very miserable! he said to himself, that if men came some day to take him from that islet, he must be worthy to return amongst them! how he suffered, that wretched man! how he laboured to recover himself by work! how he prayed to be reformed by prayer! for two years, three years, this went on; but ayrton, humbled by solitude, always looking for some ship to appear on the horizon, asking himself if the time of expiation would soon be complete, suffered as none other ever suffered! oh! how dreadful was this solitude, to a heart tormented by remorse! "but doubtless heaven had not sufficiently punished this unhappy man, for he felt that he was gradually becoming a savage! he felt that brutishness was gradually gaining on him! "he could not say if it was after two or three years of solitude; but at last he became the miserable creature you found! "i have no need to tell you, gentlemen, that ayrton, ben joyce, and i, are the same." cyrus harding and his companions rose at the end of this account. it is impossible to say how much they were moved! what misery, grief, and despair lay revealed before them! [illustration: 'here is my hand' said the engineer] "ayrton," said harding, rising, "you have been a great criminal, but heaven must certainly think that you have expiated your crimes! that has been proved by your having been brought again among your fellow-creatures. ayrton, you are forgiven! and now you will be our companion?" ayrton drew back. "here is my hand!" said the engineer. ayrton grasped the hand which harding extended to him, and great tears fell from his eyes. "will you live with us?" asked cyrus harding. "captain harding, leave me some time longer," replied ayrton, "leave me alone in the hut in the corral!" "as you like, ayrton," answered cyrus harding. ayrton was going to withdraw, when the engineer addressed one more question to him:-- "one word more, my friend. since it was your intention to live alone, why did you throw into the sea the document which put us on your track?" "a document?" repeated ayrton, who did not appear to know what he meant. "yes, the document which we found enclosed in a bottle, giving us the exact position of tabor island!" ayrton passed his hand over his brow, then after having thought, "i never threw any document into the sea!" he answered. "never," exclaimed pencroft. "never!" and ayrton, bowing, reached the door and departed. chapter xviii conversation -- cyrus harding and gideon spilett -- an idea of the engineer's -- the electric telegraph -- the wires -- the battery -- the alphabet -- fine season -- prosperity of the colony -- photography -- an appearance of snow -- two years in lincoln island. "poor man!" said herbert, who had rushed to the door, but returned, having seen ayrton slide down the rope of the lift and disappear in the darkness. "he will come back," said cyrus harding. "come now, captain," exclaimed pencroft, "what does that mean? what! wasn't it ayrton who threw that bottle into the sea? who was it then?" certainly, if ever a question was necessary to be made, it was that one! "it was he," answered neb, "only the unhappy man was half mad." "yes!" said herbert, "and he was no longer conscious of what he was doing." "it can only be explained in that way, my friends," replied harding quickly, "and i understand now how ayrton was able to point out exactly the situation of tabor island, since the events which had preceded his being left on the island had made it known to him." "however," observed pencroft, "if he was not yet a brute when he wrote that document, and if he threw it into the sea seven or eight years ago, how is it that the paper has not been injured by damp?" "that proves," answered cyrus harding, "that ayrton was deprived of intelligence at a more recent time than he thinks." "of course it must be so," replied pencroft, "without that the fact would be unaccountable." "unaccountable indeed," answered the engineer, who did not appear desirous to prolong the conversation. "but has ayrton told the truth?" asked the sailor. "yes," replied the reporter. "the story which he has told is true in every point. i remember quite well the account in the newspapers of the yacht expedition undertaken by lord glenarvan, and its result." "ayrton has told the truth," added harding. "do not doubt it, pencroft, for it was painful to him. people tell the truth when they accuse themselves like that!" the next day--the st of december--the colonists descended to the beach, and having climbed the plateau they found nothing of ayrton. he had reached his house in the corral during the night, and the settlers judged it best not to agitate him by their presence. time would doubtless perform what sympathy had been unable to accomplish. herbert, pencroft, and neb resumed their ordinary occupations. on this day the same work brought harding and the reporter to the workshop at the chimneys. "do you know, my dear cyrus," said gideon spilett, "that the explanation you gave yesterday on the subject of the bottle has not satisfied me at all! how can it be supposed that the unfortunate man was able to write that document and throw the bottle into the sea without having the slightest recollection of it?" "nor was it he who threw it in, my dear spilett." "you think then...." "i think nothing, i know nothing!" interrupted cyrus harding. "i am content to rank this incident among those which i have not been able to explain to this day!" "indeed, cyrus," said spilett, "these things are incredible! your rescue, the case stranded on the sand, top's adventure, and lastly this bottle.... shall we never have the answer to these enigmas?" "yes!" replied the engineer quickly, "yes, even if i have to penetrate into the bowels of this island!" "chance will perhaps give us the key to this mystery!" "chance! spilett! i do not believe in chance, any more than i believe in mysteries in this world. there is a reason for everything unaccountable which has happened here, and that reason i shall discover. but in the meantime we must work and observe." the month of january arrived. the year commenced. the summer occupations were assiduously continued. during the days which followed, herbert and spilett having gone in the direction of the corral, ascertained that ayrton had taken possession of the habitation which had been prepared for him. he busied himself with the numerous flock confided to his care, and spared his companions the trouble of coming every two or three days to visit the corral. nevertheless, in order not to leave ayrton in solitude for too long a time, the settlers often paid him a visit. it was not unimportant either, in consequence of some suspicions entertained by the engineer and gideon spilett, that this part of the island should be subject to a surveillance of some sort, and that ayrton, if any incident occurred unexpectedly, should not neglect to inform the inhabitants of granite house of it. nevertheless it might happen that something would occur which it would be necessary to bring rapidly to the engineer's knowledge. independently of facts bearing on the mystery of lincoln island, many others might happen, which would call for the prompt interference of the colonists,--such as the sighting of a vessel, a wreck on the western coast, the possible arrival of pirates, etc. therefore cyrus harding resolved to put the corral in instantaneous communication with granite house. it was on the th of january that he made known his project to his companions. "why! how are you going to manage that, captain?" asked pencroft. "do you by chance happen to think of establishing a telegraph?" "exactly so," answered the engineer. "electric?" cried herbert. "electric," replied cyrus harding. "we have all the necessary materials for making a battery, and the most difficult thing will be to stretch the wires, but by means of a draw-plate i think we shall manage it." "well, after that," returned the sailor, "i shall never despair of seeing ourselves some day rolling along on a railway!" they then set to work, beginning with the most difficult thing, for, if they failed in that, it would be useless to manufacture the battery and other accessories. the iron of lincoln island, as has been said, was of excellent quality, and consequently very fit for being drawn out. harding commenced by manufacturing a draw-plate, that is to say, a plate of steel, pierced with conical holes of different sizes, which would successively bring the wire to the wished-for tenacity. this piece of steel, after having been tempered, was fixed in as firm a way as possible in a solid framework planted in the ground, only a few feet from the great fall, the motive power of which the engineer intended to utilise. in fact, as the fulling-mill was there, although not then in use, its beam moved with extreme power would serve to stretch out the wire by rolling it round itself. it was a delicate operation, and required much care. the iron, prepared previously in long thin rods, the ends of which were sharpened with the file, having been introduced into the largest hole of the draw-plate, was drawn out by the beam which wound it round itself, to a length of twenty-five or thirty feet, then unrolled, and the same operation was performed successively through the holes of a less size. finally, the engineer obtained wires from forty to fifty feet long, which could be easily fastened together and stretched over the distance of five miles, which separated the corral from the bounds of granite house. it did not take more than a few days to perform this work, and indeed as soon as the machine had been commenced, cyrus harding left his companions to follow the trade of wire-drawers, and occupied himself with manufacturing his battery. it was necessary to obtain a battery with a constant current. it is known that the elements of modern batteries are generally composed of retort coal, zinc, and copper. copper was absolutely wanting to the engineer, who, notwithstanding all his researches, had never been able to find any trace of it in lincoln island, and was therefore obliged to do without it. retort coal, that is to say, the hard graphyte which is found in the retorts of gas manufactories, after the coal has been dehydrogenised, could have been obtained, but it would have been necessary to establish a special apparatus, involving great labour. as to zinc, it may be remembered that the case found at flotsam point was lined with this metal, which could not be better utilised than for this purpose. cyrus harding, after mature consideration, decided to manufacture a very simple battery, resembling as nearly as possible that invented by becquerel in , and in which zinc only is employed. the other substances, azotic acid and potash, were all at his disposal. the way in which the battery was composed was as follows, and the results were to be attained by the reaction of acid and potash on each other. a number of glass bottles were made and filled with azotic acid. the engineer corked them by means of a stopper through which passed a glass tube, bored at its lower extremity, and intended to be plunged into the acid by means of a clay stopper secured by a rag. into this tube, through its upper extremity, he poured a solution of potash, previously obtained by burning and reducing to ashes various plants, and in this way the acid and potash could act on each other through the clay. cyrus harding then took two slips of zinc, one of which was plunged into azotic acid, the other into a solution of potash. a current was immediately produced, which was transmitted from the slip of zinc in the bottle to that in the tube, and the two slips having been connected by a metallic wire the slip in the tube became the positive pole, and that in the bottle the negative pole of the apparatus. each bottle, therefore, produced as many currents as united would be sufficient to produce all the phenomena of the electric telegraph. such was the ingenious and very simple apparatus constructed by cyrus harding, an apparatus which would allow them to establish a telegraphic communication between granite house and the corral. on the th of february was commenced the planting, along the road to the corral, of posts, furnished with glass insulators, and intended to support the wire. a few days after, the wire was extended, ready to produce the electric current at a rate of twenty thousand miles a second. two batteries had been manufactured, one for granite house, the other for the corral; for if it was necessary the corral should be able to communicate with granite house, it might also be useful that granite house should be able to communicate with the corral. as to the receiver and manipulator, they were very simple. at the two stations the wire was wound round a magnet, that is to say, round a piece of soft iron surrounded with a wire. the communication was thus established between the two poles, the current, starting from the positive pole, traversed the wire, passed through the magnet which was temporarily magnetised, and returned through the earth to the negative pole. if the current was interrupted the magnet immediately became unmagnetised. it was sufficient to place a plate of soft iron before the magnet, which, attracted during the passage of the current, would fall back when the current was interrupted. this movement of the plate thus obtained, harding could easily fasten to it a needle arranged on a dial, bearing the letters of the alphabet, and in this way communicate from one station to the other. all was completely arranged by the th of february. on this day, harding, having sent the current through the wire, asked if all was going on well at the corral, and received in a few moments a satisfactory reply from ayrton. pencroft was wild with joy, and every morning and evening he sent a telegram to the corral, which always received an answer. this mode of communication presented two very real advantages; firstly, because it enabled them to ascertain that ayrton was at the corral, and secondly, that he was thus not left completely isolated. besides, cyrus harding never allowed a week to pass without going to see him, and ayrton came from time to time to granite house, where he always found a cordial welcome. the fine season passed away in the midst of the usual work. the resources of the colony, particularly in vegetables and corn, increased from day to day; and the plants brought from tabor island had succeeded perfectly. [illustration: the engineer at work] the plateau of prospect heights presented an encouraging aspect. the fourth harvest had been admirable, and it may be supposed that no one thought of counting whether the four hundred thousand millions of grains duly appeared in the crop. however, pencroft had thought of doing so, but cyrus harding having told him that even if he managed to count three hundred grains a minute, or nine thousand an hour, it would take him nearly five thousand five hundred years to finish his task, the honest sailor considered it best to give up the idea. the weather was splendid, the temperature very warm in the day time; but in the evening the sea-breezes tempered the heat of the atmosphere and procured cool nights for the inhabitants of granite house. there were, however, a few storms, which, although they were not of long duration, swept over lincoln island with extraordinary fury. the lightning blazed and the thunder continued to roll for some hours. at this period the little colony was extremely prosperous. the tenants of the poultry-yard swarmed, and they lived on the surplus, but it became necessary to reduce the population to a more moderate number. the pigs had already produced young, and it may be understood that their care for those animals absorbed a great part of neb and pencroft's time. the onagas, who had two pretty colts, were most often mounted by gideon spilett and herbert, who had become an excellent rider under the reporter's instruction, and they also harnessed them to the cart either for carrying wood and coal to granite house, or different mineral productions required by the engineer. several expeditions were made about this time into the depths of the far west forests. the explorers could venture there without having anything to fear from the heat, for the sun's rays scarcely penetrated through the thick foliage spreading above their heads. they thus visited all the left bank of the mercy, along which ran the road from the corral to the mouth of falls river. but in these excursions the settlers took care to be well armed, for they frequently met with savage wild boars, with which they often had a tussle. they also, during this season, made fierce war against the jaguars. gideon spilett had vowed a special hatred against them, and his pupil herbert seconded him well. armed as they were, they no longer feared to meet one of those beasts. herbert's courage was superb, and the reporter's _sang froid_ astonishing. already twenty magnificent skins ornamented the dining-room of granite house, and if this continued, the jaguar race would soon be extinct in the island, the object aimed at by the hunters. the engineer sometimes took part in the expeditions made to the unknown parts of the island, which he surveyed with great attention. it was for other traces than those of animals that he searched the thickest of the vast forest, but nothing suspicious ever appeared. neither top nor jup, who accompanied him, ever betrayed by their behaviour that there was anything strange there, and yet more than once again the dog barked at the mouth of the well, which the engineer had before explored without result. at this time gideon spilett, aided by herbert, took several views of the most picturesque parts of the island, by means of the photographic apparatus found in the cases, and of which they had not as yet made any use. this apparatus, provided with a powerful object-glass, was very complete. substances necessary for the photographic reproduction, collodion for preparing the glass plate, nitrate of silver to render it sensitive, hyposulphate of soda to fix the prints obtained, chloride of ammonium in which to soak the paper destined to give the positive proof, acetate of soda and chloride of gold in which to immerse the paper, nothing was wanting. even the papers were there, all prepared, and before laying in the printing-frame upon the negatives, it was sufficient to soak them for a few minutes in the solution of nitrate of silver. the reporter and his assistant became in a short time very skilful operators, and they obtained fine views of the country, such as the island, taken from prospect heights with mount franklin in the distance, the mouth of the mercy, so picturesquely framed in high rocks, the glade and the corral, with the spurs of the mountain in the background, the curious development of claw cape, flotsam point, etc. nor did the photographers forget to take the portraits of all the inhabitants of the island, leaving out no one. "it multiplies us," said pencroft. and the sailor was enchanted to see his own countenance, faithfully reproduced, ornamenting the walls of granite house, and he stopped as willingly before this exhibition as he would have done before the richest shop-windows in broadway. but it must be acknowledged that the most successful portrait was incontestably that of master jup. master jup had sat with a gravity not to be described, and his portrait was lifelike! "he looks as if he was just going to grin!" exclaimed pencroft. and if master jup had not been satisfied, he would have been very difficult to please, but he was quite contented, and contemplated his own countenance with a sentimental air which expressed some small amount of conceit. the summer heat ended with the month of march. the weather was sometimes rainy, but still warm. the month of march, which corresponds to the september of northern latitudes, was not so fine as might have been hoped. perhaps it announced an early and rigorous winter. it might have been supposed one morning--the st--that the first snow had already made its appearance. in fact herbert, looking early from one of the windows of granite house, exclaimed,-- "hallo! the islet is covered with snow!" "snow at this time?" answered the reporter, joining the boy. their companions were soon beside them, but could only ascertain one thing, that not only the islet, but all the beach below granite house, was covered with one uniform sheet of white. "it must be snow!" said pencroft. "or rather it's very like it!" replied neb. "but the thermometer marks fifty-eight degrees!" observed gideon spilett. cyrus harding gazed at the sheet of white without saying anything, for he really did not know how to explain this phenomenon, at this time of year and in such a temperature. "by jove!" exclaimed pencroft, "all our plants will be frozen!" and the sailor was about to descend, when he was preceded by the nimble jup, who slid down to the sand. [illustration: jup sitting for his portrait] but the orang had not touched the ground, when the snowy sheet arose and dispersed in the air in such innumerable flakes that the light of the sun was obscured for some minutes. "birds!" cried herbert. they were indeed swarms of sea-birds, with dazzling white plumage. they had perched by thousands on the islet and on the shore, and they disappeared in the distance, leaving the colonists amazed as if they had been present at some transformation scene, in which summer succeeded winter at the touch of a fairy's wand. unfortunately the change had been so sudden that neither the reporter nor the lad had been able to bring down one of these birds, of which they could not recognise the species. a few days after came the th of march, the day on which, two years before, the castaways from the air had been thrown upon lincoln island. [illustration: the snowy sheet arose and dispersed in the air] chapter xix recollections of their native land -- probable future -- project for surveying the coasts of the island -- departure on the th of april -- sea-view of reptile end -- the basaltic rocks of the western coast -- bad weather -- night comes on -- new incident. two years already! and for two years the colonists had had no communication with their fellow-creatures! they were without news from the civilised world, lost on this island, as completely as if they had been on the most minute star of the celestial hemisphere! what was now happening in their country? the picture of their native land was always before their eyes, the land torn by civil war at the time they left it, and which the southern rebellion was perhaps still staining with blood! it was a great sorrow to them, and they often talked together of these things, without ever doubting however that the cause of the north must triumph, for the honour of the american confederation. during these two years not a vessel had passed in sight of the island; or, at least, not a sail had been seen. it was evident that lincoln island was out of the usual track, and also that it was unknown,--as was besides proved by the maps,--for though there was no port, vessels might have visited it for the purpose of renewing their store of water. but the surrounding ocean was deserted as far as the eye could reach, and the colonists must rely on themselves for regaining their native land. however, one chance of rescue existed, and this chance was discussed one day in the first week of april, when the colonists were gathered together in the dining-room of granite house. they had been talking of america, of their native country, which they had so little hope of ever seeing again. "decidedly we have only one way," said spilett, "one single way for leaving lincoln island, and that is, to build a vessel large enough to sail several hundred miles. it appears to me, that when one has built a boat it is just as easy to build a ship!" "and in which we might go to the pomatous," added herbert, "just as easily as we went to tabor island." "i do not say no," replied pencroft, who had always the casting vote in maritime questions; "i do not say no, although it is not exactly the same thing to make a long as a short voyage! if our little craft had been caught in any heavy gale of wind during the voyage to tabor island, we should have known that land was at no great distance either way; but twelve hundred miles is a pretty long way, and the nearest land is at least that distance!" "would you not, in that case, pencroft, attempt the adventure?" asked the reporter. "i will attempt anything that is desired, mr. spilett," answered the sailor, "and you know well that i am not a man to flinch!" "remember, besides, that we number another sailor amongst us now," remarked neb. "who is that?" asked pencroft. "ayrton." "that is true," replied herbert. "if he will consent to come," said pencroft. "nonsense!" returned the reporter; "do you think that if lord glenarvan's yacht had appeared at tabor island, whilst he was still living there, ayrton would have refused to depart?" "you forget, my friends," then said cyrus harding, "that ayrton was not in possession of his reason during the last years of his stay there. but that is not the question. the point is to know if we may count among our chances of being rescued, the return of the scotch vessel. now, lord glenarvan promised ayrton that he would return to take him off tabor island when he considered that his crimes were expiated, and i believe that he will return." "yes," said the reporter, "and i will add that he will return soon, for it is twelve years since ayrton was abandoned!" "well!" answered pencroft, "i agree with you that the nobleman will return, and soon too. but where will he touch? at tabor island, and not at lincoln island." "that is the more certain," replied herbert, "as lincoln island is not even marked on the map." "therefore, my friends," said the engineer, "we ought to take the necessary precautions for making our presence, and that of ayrton on lincoln island known at tabor island." "certainly," answered the reporter, "and nothing is easier than to place in the hut, which was captain grant's and ayrton's dwelling, a notice which lord glenarvan and his crew cannot help finding, giving the position of our island." "it is a pity," remarked the sailor, "that we forgot to take that precaution on our first visit to tabor island." "and why should we have done it?" asked herbert. "at that time we did not know ayrton's history; we did not know that any one was likely to come some day to fetch him; and when we did know his history, the season was too advanced to allow us to return then to tabor island." "yes," replied harding, "it was too late, and we must put off the voyage until next spring." "but suppose the scotch yacht comes before that," said pencroft. "that is not probable," replied the engineer, "for lord glenarvan would not choose the winter season to venture into these seas. either he has already returned to tabor island, since ayrton has been with us, that is to say, during the last five months and has left again; or he will not come till later, and it will be time enough in the first fine october days to go to tabor island, and leave a notice there." "we must allow," said neb, "that it will be very unfortunate if the _duncan_ has returned to these parts only a few months ago!" "i hope that it is not so," replied cyrus harding, "and that heaven has not deprived us of the best chance which remains to us." "i think," observed the reporter, "that at any rate we shall know what we have to depend on when we have been to tabor island, for if the yacht has returned there, they will necessarily have left some traces of their visit." "that is evident," answered the engineer. "so then, my friends, since we have this chance of returning to our country, we must wait patiently, and if it is taken from us we shall see what will be best to do." "at any rate," remarked pencroft, "it is well understood that if we do leave lincoln island in some way or another, it will not be because we were uncomfortable there!" "no, pencroft," replied the engineer, "it will be because we are far from all that a man holds dearest in this world, his family, his friends, his native land!" matters being thus decided, the building of a vessel large enough to sail either to the archipelagos in the north, or to new zealand in the west, was no longer talked of, and they busied themselves in their accustomed occupations, with a view to wintering a third time in granite house. however, it was agreed that before the stormy weather came on, their little vessel should be employed in making a voyage round the island. a complete survey of the coast had not yet been made, and the colonists had but an imperfect idea of the shore to the west and north, from the mouth of falls river to the mandible capes, as well as of the narrow bay between them, which opened like a shark's jaws. the plan of this excursion was proposed by pencroft, and cyrus harding fully acquiesced in it, for he himself wished to see this part of his domain. the weather was variable, but the barometer did not fluctuate by sudden movements, and they could therefore count on tolerable weather. however, during the first week of april, after a sudden barometrical fall, a renewed rise was marked by a heavy gale of wind, lasting five or six days; then the needle of the instrument remained stationary at a height of twenty-nine inches and nine-tenths, and the weather appeared propitious for an excursion. the departure was fixed for the th of april, and the _bonadventure_, anchored in port balloon, was provisioned for a voyage which might be of some duration. cyrus harding informed ayrton of the projected expedition, and proposed that he should take part in it; but ayrton preferring to remain on shore, it was decided that he should come to granite house during the absence of his companions. master jup was ordered to keep him company, and made no remonstrance. on the morning of the th of april all the colonists, including top, embarked. a fine breeze blew from the south-west, and the _bonadventure_ tacked on leaving port balloon so as to reach reptile end. of the ninety miles which the perimeter of the island measured, twenty included the south coast between the port and the promontory. the wind being right ahead, it was necessary to hug the shore. it took the whole day to reach the promontory, for the vessel on leaving port had only two hours of the ebb tide, and had therefore to make way for six hours against the flood. it was nightfall before the promontory was doubled. the sailor then proposed to the engineer that they should continue sailing slowly with two reefs in the sail. but harding preferred to anchor a few cable-lengths from the shore, so as to survey that part of the coast during the day. it was agreed also that as they were anxious for a minute exploration of the coast they should not sail during the night, but would always, when the weather permitted it, be at anchor near the shore. the night was passed under the promontory, and the wind having fallen, nothing disturbed the silence. the passengers, with the exception of the sailor, scarcely slept as well on board the _bonadventure_ as they would have done in their rooms at granite house, but they did sleep however. pencroft set sail at break of day, and by going on the larboard tack they could keep close to the shore. the colonists knew this beautiful wooded coast, since they had already explored it on foot, and yet it again excited their admiration. they coasted along as close in as possible, so as to notice everything, avoiding always the trunks of trees which floated here and there. several times also they anchored, and gideon spilett took photographs of the superb scenery. about noon the _bonadventure_ arrived at the mouth of falls river. beyond, on the left bank, a few scattered trees appeared, and three miles further even these dwindled into solitary groups among the western spurs of the mountain, whose arid ridge sloped down to the shore. what a contrast between the northern and southern part of the coast! in proportion as one was woody and fertile so was the other rugged and barren! it might have been designated as one of those iron coasts, as they are called in some countries, and its wild confusion appeared to indicate that a sudden crystallisation had been produced in the yet liquid basalt of some distant geological sea. these stupendous masses would have terrified the settlers if they had been cast at first on this part of the island! they had not been able to perceive the sinister aspect of this shore from the summit of mount franklin, for they overlooked it from too great a height, but viewed from the sea it presented a wild appearance which could not perhaps be equalled in any corner of the globe. the _bonadventure_ sailed along this coast for the distance of half a mile. it was easy to see that it was composed of blocks of all sizes, from twenty to three hundred feet in height, and of all shapes, round like towers, prismatic like steeples, pyramidal like obelisks, conical like factory chimneys. an iceberg of the polar seas could not have been more capricious in its terrible sublimity! here, bridges were thrown from one rock to another; there, arches like those of a wave, into the depths of which the eye could not penetrate; in one place, large vaulted excavations presented a monumental aspect; in another, a crowd of columns, spires, and arches, such as no gothic cathedral ever possessed. every caprice of nature, still more varied than those of the imagination, appeared on this grand coast, which extended over a length of eight or nine miles. cyrus harding and his companions gazed, with a feeling of surprise bordering on stupefaction. but, although they remained silent, top, not being troubled with feelings of this sort, uttered barks which were repeated by the thousand echoes of the basaltic cliff. the engineer even observed that these barks had something strange in them, like those which the dog had uttered at the mouth of the well in granite house. "let us go close in," said he. and the _bonadventure_ sailed as near as possible to the rocky shore. perhaps some cave, which it would be advisable to explore, existed there? but harding saw nothing, not a cavern, not a cleft which could serve as a retreat to any being whatever, for the foot of the cliff was washed by the surf. soon top's barks ceased, and the vessel continued her course at a few cable-lengths from the coast. in the north-west part of the island the shore became again flat and sandy. a few trees here and there rose above a low, marshy ground, which the colonists had already surveyed; and in violent contrast to the other desert shore, life was again manifested by the presence of myriads of water-fowl. that evening the _bonadventure_ anchored in a small bay to the north of the island, near the land, such was the depth of water there. the night passed quietly, for the breeze died away with the last light of day, and only rose again with the first streaks of dawn. as it was easy to land, the usual hunters of the colony, that is to say, herbert and gideon spilett, went for a ramble of two hours or so, and returned with several strings of wild duck and snipe. top had done wonders, and not a bird had been lost, thanks to his zeal and cleverness. at eight o'clock in the morning the _bonadventure_ set sail, and ran rapidly towards north mandible cape, for the wind was right astern and freshening rapidly. "however," observed pencroft, "i should not be surprised if a gale came up from the west. yesterday the sun set in a very red-looking horizon, and now, this morning, those mares-tails don't forebode anything good." these mares-tails are cirrus clouds, scattered in the zenith, their height from the sea being less than five thousand feet. they look like light pieces of cotton wool, and their presence usually announces some sudden change in the weather. "well," said harding, "let us carry as much sail as possible, and run for shelter into shark gulf. i think that the _bonadventure_ will be safe there." "perfectly," replied pencroft, "and besides, the north coast is merely sand, very uninteresting to look at." "i shall not be sorry," resumed the engineer, "to pass not only to-night but to-morrow in that bay, which is worth being carefully explored." "i think that we shall be obliged to do so, whether we like it or not," answered pencroft, "for the sky looks very threatening towards the west. dirty weather is coming on!" "at any rate we have a favourable wind for reaching cape mandible," observed the reporter. "a very fine wind," replied the sailor; "but we must tack to enter the gulf, and i should like to see my way clear in these unknown quarters." "quarters which appear to be filled with rocks," added herbert, "if we judge by what we saw on the south coast of shark gulf." "pencroft," said cyrus harding, "do as you think best, we will leave it to you." "don't make your mind uneasy, captain," replied the sailor, "i shall not expose myself needlessly! i would rather a knife were run into my ribs than a sharp rock into those of my _bonadventure_!" that which pencroft called ribs was the part of his vessel under water, and he valued it more than his own skin. "what o'clock is it?" asked pencroft. "ten o'clock," replied gideon spilett. "and what distance is it to the cape, captain?" "about fifteen miles," replied the engineer. "that's a matter of two hours and a half," said the sailor, "and we shall be off the cape between twelve and one o'clock. unluckily, the tide will be turning at that moment, and will be ebbing out of the gulf. i am afraid that it will be very difficult to get in, having both wind and tide against us." "and the more so that it is a full moon to-day," remarked herbert, "and these april tides are very strong." "well, pencroft," asked cyrus harding, "can you not anchor off the cape?" "anchor near land, with bad weather coming on!" exclaimed the sailor. "what are you thinking of, captain? we should run aground to a certainty!" "what will you do then?" "i shall try to keep in the offing until the flood, that is to say, till about seven in the evening, and if there is still light enough i will try to enter the gulf; if not, we must stand off and on during the night, and we will enter to-morrow at sunrise." "as i told you, pencroft, we will leave it to you," answered harding. "ah!" said pencroft, "if there was only a light-house on the coast, it would be much more convenient for sailors." "yes," replied herbert, "and this time we shall have no obliging engineer to light a fire to guide us into port!" "why, indeed, my dear cyrus," said spilett, "we have never thanked you for it, but frankly, without that fire we should never have been able to reach--" "a fire?" asked harding, much astonished at the reporter's words. "we mean, captain," answered pencroft, "that on board the _bonadventure_ we were very anxious during the few hours before our return, and we should have passed to windward of the island, if it had not been for the precaution you took of lighting a fire in the night of the th of october, on prospect heights." "yes, yes! that was a lucky idea of mine!" replied the engineer. "and this time," continued the sailor, "unless the idea occurs to ayrton, there will be no one to do us that little service!" "no! no one!" answered cyrus harding. a few minutes after, finding himself alone in the bows of the vessel with the reporter, the engineer bent down and whispered,-- "if there is one thing certain in this world, spilett, it is that i never lighted any fire during the night of the th of october, neither on prospect heights nor on any other part of the island!" [illustration: another mystery] chapter xx a night at sea -- shark gulf -- confidences -- preparations for winter -- forwardness of the bad season -- severe cold -- work in the interior -- in six months -- a photographic negative -- unexpected incident. things happened as pencroft had predicted, he being seldom mistaken in his prognostications. the wind rose, and from a fresh breeze it soon increased to a regular gale; that is to say, it acquired a speed of from forty to forty-five miles an hour, before which a ship in the open sea would have run under close-reefed topsails. now, as it was nearly six o'clock when the _bonadventure_ reached the gulf, and as at that moment the tide turned, it was impossible to enter. they were therefore compelled to stand off, for even if he had wished to do so, pencroft could not have gained the mouth of the mercy. hoisting the jib to the mainmast by way of a storm-sail, he hove to, putting the head of the vessel towards the land. fortunately, although the wind was strong, the sea, being sheltered by the land, did not run very high. they had then little to fear from the waves, which always endanger small craft. the _bonadventure_ would doubtlessly not have capsized, for she was well ballasted; but enormous masses of water falling on the deck, might injure her, if her timbers could not sustain them. pencroft, as a good sailor, was prepared for anything. certainly, he had great confidence in his vessel, but nevertheless he awaited the return of day with some anxiety. during the night, cyrus harding and gideon spilett had no opportunity for talking together, and yet the words pronounced in the reporter's ear by the engineer were well worth being discussed, together with the mysterious influence which appeared to reign over lincoln island. gideon spilett did not cease from pondering over this new and inexplicable incident,--the appearance of a fire on the coast of the island. the fire had actually been seen! his companions, herbert and pencroft, had seen it with him! the fire had served to signalise the position of the island during that dark night, and they had not doubted that it was lighted by the engineer's hand; and here was cyrus harding expressly declaring that he had never done anything of the sort! spilett resolved to recur to this incident as soon as the _bonadventure_ returned, and to urge cyrus harding to acquaint their companions with these strange facts. perhaps it would be decided to make in common a complete investigation of every part of lincoln island. however that might be, on this evening no fire was lighted on these yet unknown shores, which formed the entrance to the gulf, and the little vessel stood off during the night. when the first streaks of dawn appeared in the western horizon, the wind, which had slightly fallen, shifted two points, and enabled pencroft to enter the narrow gulf with greater ease. towards seven o'clock in the morning, the _bonadventure_, weathering the north mandible cape, entered the strait and glided on to the waters, so strangely enclosed in the frame of lava. "well," said pencroft, "this bay would make admirable roads, in which a whole fleet could lie at their ease!" "what is especially curious," observed harding, "is that the gulf has been formed by two rivers of lava, thrown out by the volcano, and accumulated by successive eruptions. the result is that the gulf is completely sheltered on all sides, and i believe that even in the stormiest weather, the sea here must be as calm as a lake." "no doubt," returned the sailor, "since the wind has only that narrow entrance between the two capes to get in by; and besides, the north cape protects that of the south in a way which would make the entrance of gusts very difficult. i declare our _bonadventure_ could stay here from one end of the year to the other, without even dragging at her anchor!" "it is rather large for her!" observed the reporter. "well! mr. spilett," replied the sailor, "i agree that it is too large for the _bonadventure_; but if the fleets of the union were in want of a harbour in the pacific, i don't think they would ever find a better place than this!" "we are in the shark's mouth," remarked neb, alluding to the form of the gulf. "right into its mouth, my honest neb!" replied herbert; "but you are not afraid that it will shut upon us, are you?" "no, mr. herbert," answered neb; "and yet this gulf here doesn't please me much! it has a wicked look!" "hallo!" cried pencroft, "here is neb turning up his nose at my gulf, just as i was thinking of presenting it to america!" "but, at any rate, is the water deep enough?" asked the engineer, "for a depth sufficient for the keel of the _bonadventure_, would not be enough for those of our iron-clads." "that is easily found out," replied pencroft. and the sailor sounded with a long cord, which served him as a lead-line, and to which was fastened a lump of iron. this cord measured nearly fifty fathoms, and its entire length was unrolled without finding any bottom. "there," exclaimed pencroft, "our iron-clads can come here after all! they would not run aground!" "indeed," said gideon spilett, "this gulf is a regular abyss; but, taking into consideration the volcanic origin of the island, it is not astonishing that the sea should offer similar depressions." "one would say too," observed herbert, "that these cliffs were perfectly perpendicular; and i believe that at their foot, even with a line five or six times longer, pencroft would not find the bottom." "that is all very well," then said the reporter; "but i must point out to pencroft that his harbour is wanting in one very important respect!" "and what is that, mr. spilett?" "an opening, a cutting of some sort, to give access to the interior of the island. i do not see a spot on which we could land." and, in fact, the steep lava cliffs did not afford a single place suitable for landing. they formed an insuperable barrier, recalling, but with more wildness, the fiords of norway. the _bonadventure_, coasting as close as possible along the cliffs, did not discover even a projection which would allow the passengers to leave the deck. pencroft consoled himself by saying that with the help of a mine they could soon open out the cliff when that was necessary, and then, as there was evidently nothing to be done in the gulf, he steered his vessel towards the strait and passed out at about two o'clock in the afternoon. "ah!" said neb, uttering a sigh of satisfaction. one might really say that the honest negro did not feel at his ease in those enormous jaws. the distance from mandible cape to the mouth of the mercy was not more than eight miles. the head of the _bonadventure_ was put towards granite house, and a fair wind filling her sails, she ran rapidly along the coast. to the enormous lava rocks succeeded soon those capricious sand dunes, among which the engineer had been so singularly recovered, and which sea-birds frequented in thousands. about four o'clock, pencroft, leaving the point of the islet on his left, entered the channel which separated it from the coast, and at five o'clock the anchor of the _bonadventure_ was buried in the sand at the mouth of the mercy. the colonists had been absent three days from their dwelling. ayrton was waiting for them on the beach, and jup came joyously to meet them, giving vent to deep grunts of satisfaction. a complete exploration of the coast of the island had now been made, and no suspicious appearances had been observed. if any mysterious being resided on it, it could only be under cover of the impenetrable forest of the serpentine peninsula, to which the colonists had not yet directed their investigations. gideon spilett discussed these things with the engineer, and it was agreed that they should direct the attention of their companions to the strange character of certain incidents which had occurred on the island, and of which the last was the most unaccountable. however, harding, returning to the fact of a fire having been kindled on the shore by an unknown hand, could not refrain from repeating for the twentieth time to the reporter-- "but are you quite sure of having seen it? was it not a partial eruption of the volcano, or perhaps some meteor?" "no, cyrus," answered the reporter; "it was certainly a fire lighted by the hand of man. besides, question pencroft and herbert. they saw it as i saw it myself, and they will confirm my words." in consequence therefore, a few days after, on the th of april, in the evening, when the settlers were all collected on prospect heights, cyrus harding began by saying,-- "my friends, i think it my duty to call your attention to certain incidents which have occurred in the island, on the subject of which i shall be happy to have your advice. these incidents are, so to speak, supernatural--" "supernatural!" exclaimed the sailor, emitting a volume of smoke from his mouth. "can it be possible that our island is supernatural?" "no, pencroft, but mysterious, most certainly," replied the engineer; "unless you can explain that which spilett and i have until now failed to understand." "speak away, captain," answered the sailor. "well, have you understood," then said the engineer, "how was it that after falling into the sea, i was found a quarter of a mile into the interior of the island, and that, without my having any consciousness of my removal there?" "unless, being unconscious--" said pencroft. "that is not admissible," replied the engineer. "but to continue. have you understood how top was able to discover your retreat five miles from the cave in which i was lying?" "the dog's instinct--" observed herbert. "singular instinct!" returned the reporter; "since notwithstanding the storm of rain and wind which was raging during that night, top arrived at the chimneys, dry and without a speck of mud!" "let us continue," resumed the engineer. "have you understood how our dog was so strangely thrown up out of the waters of the lake, after his struggle with the dugong?" "no! i confess, not at all," replied pencroft; "and the wound which the dugong had in its side, a wound which seemed to have been made with a sharp instrument; that can't be understood either." "let us continue again," said harding. "have you understood, my friends, how that bullet got into the body of the young peccary; how that case happened to be so fortunately stranded, without there being any trace of a wreck; how that bottle containing the document presented itself so opportunely, during our first sea-excursion; how our canoe, having broken its moorings, floated down the current of the mercy and rejoined us precisely at the very moment we needed it; how after the ape invasion the ladder was so obligingly thrown down from granite house; and lastly, how the document, which ayrton asserts was never written by him, fell into our hands?" as cyrus harding thus enumerated, without forgetting one, the singular incidents which had occurred in the island, herbert, neb, and pencraft stared at each other, not knowing what to reply, for this succession of incidents, grouped thus for the first time, could not but excite their surprise to the highest degree. "'pon my word," said pencroft at last, "you are right, captain, and it is difficult to explain all these things!" "well, my friends," resumed the engineer, "a last fact has just been added to these, and it is no less incomprehensible than the others!" "what is it, captain?" asked herbert quickly. "when you were returning from tabor island, pencroft," continued the engineer, "you said that a fire appeared on lincoln island?" "certainly," answered the sailor. "and you are quite certain of having seen this fire?" "as sure as i see you now." "you also, herbert?" "why, captain," cried herbert, "that fire was blazing like a star of the first magnitude!" "but was it not a star?" urged the engineer. "no," replied pencroft, "for the sky was covered with thick clouds, and at any rate a star would not have been so low on the horizon. but mr. spilett saw it as well as we, and he will confirm our words." "i will add," said the reporter, "that the fire was very bright, and that it shot up like a sheet of lightning." "yes, yes! exactly," added herbert, "and it was certainly placed on the heights of granite house." "well, my friends," replied cyrus harding, "during the night of the th of october, neither neb nor i lighted any fire on the coast." "you did not!" exclaimed pencroft, in the height of his astonishment, not being able to finish his sentence. "we did not leave granite house," answered cyrus harding, "and if a fire appeared on the coast, it was lighted by another hand than ours!" pencraft, herbert, and neb were stupefied. no illusion could be possible, and a fire had actually met their eyes during the night of the th of october. yes! they were obliged to acknowledge it, a mystery existed! an inexplicable influence, evidently favourable to the colonists, but very irritating to their curiosity, was executed always in the nick of time on lincoln island. could there be some being hidden in its profoundest recesses? it was necessary at any cost to ascertain this. harding also reminded his companions of the singular behaviour of top and jup when they prowled round the mouth of the well, which placed granite house in communication with the sea, and he told them that he had explored the well, without discovering anything suspicious. the final resolve taken, in consequence of this conversation, by all the members of the colony, was that as soon as the fine season returned they would thoroughly search the whole of the island. but from that day, pencroft appeared to be anxious. he felt as if the island which he had made his own personal property belonged to him entirely no longer, and that he shared it with another master, to whom whether willing or not, he felt subject. neb and he often talked of those unaccountable things, and both, their natures inclining them to the marvellous, were not far from believing that lincoln island was under the dominion of some supernatural power. in the meanwhile, the bad weather came with the month of may, the november of the northern zones. it appeared that the winter would be severe and forward. the preparations for the winter season were therefore commenced without delay. [illustration: returning from a sporting excursion] nevertheless, the colonists were well prepared to meet the winter, however hard it might be. they had plenty of felt clothing, and the musmons, very numerous by this time, had furnished an abundance of the wool necessary for the manufacture of this warm material. it is unnecessary to say that ayrton had been provided with this comfortable clothing. cyrus harding proposed that he should come to spend the bad season with them in granite house, where he would be better lodged than at the corral, and ayrton promised to do so, as soon as the last work at the corral was finished. he did this towards the middle of april. from that time ayrton shared the common life, and made himself useful on all occasions; but still humble and sad, he never took part in the pleasures of his companions. for the greater part of this, the third winter which the settlers passed in lincoln island, they were confined to granite house. there were many violent storms and frightful tempests, which appeared to shake the rocks to their very foundations. immense waves threatened to overwhelm the island, and certainly any vessel anchored near the shore would have been dashed to pieces. twice, during one of these hurricanes, the mercy swelled to such a degree as to give reason to fear that the bridges would be swept away, and it was necessary to strengthen those on the shore, which disappeared under the foaming waters, when the sea beat against the beach. it may well be supposed that such storms, comparable to water-spouts in which were mingled rain and snow, would cause great havoc on the plateau of prospect heights. the mill and the poultry-yard particularly suffered. the colonists were often obliged to make immediate repairs, without which the safety of the birds would have been seriously threatened. [illustration: the photographic negative] during the worst weather, several jaguars and troops of quadrumana ventured to the edge of the plateau, and it was always to be feared that the most active and audacious would, urged by hunger, manage to cross the stream, which besides, when frozen, offered them an easy passage. plantations and domestic animals would then have been infallibly destroyed, without a constant watch, and it was often necessary to make use of the guns to keep those dangerous visitors at a respectful distance. occupation was not wanting to the colonists, for without reckoning their out-door cares, they had always a thousand plans for the fitting up of granite house. they had also some fine sporting excursions, which were made during the frost in the vast tadorn marsh. gideon spilett and herbert, aided by jup and top, did not miss a shot in the midst of the myriads of wild-duck, snipe, teal, and others. the access to these hunting-grounds was easy; besides, whether they reached them by the road to port balloon, after having passed the mercy bridge, or by turning the rocks from flotsam point, the hunters were never distant from granite house more than two or three miles. thus passed the four winter months, which were really rigorous, that is to say, june, july, august, and september. but, in short, granite house did not suffer much from the inclemency of the weather, and it was the same with the corral, which, less exposed than the plateau, and sheltered partly by mount franklin, only received the remains of the hurricanes, already broken by the forests and the high rocks of the shore. the damages there were consequently of small importance, and the activity and skill of ayrton promptly repaired them, when some time in october he returned to pass a few days in the corral. during this winter, no fresh inexplicable incident occurred. nothing strange happened, although pencroft and neb were on the watch for the most insignificant facts to which they attached any mysterious cause. top and jup themselves no longer growled round the well or gave any signs of uneasiness. it appeared, therefore, as if the series of supernatural incidents was interrupted, although they often talked of them during the evenings in granite house, and they remained thoroughly resolved that the island should be searched, even in those parts the most difficult to explore. but an event of the highest importance, and of which the consequence might be terrible, momentarily diverted from their projects cyrus harding and his companions. it was the month of october. the fine season was swiftly returning. nature was reviving; and among the evergreen foliage of the coniferæ which formed the border of the wood, already appeared the young leaves of the banksias, deodars, and other trees. it may be remembered that gideon spilett and herbert had, at different times, taken photographic views of lincoln island. now, on the th of this month of october, towards three o'clock in the afternoon, herbert, enticed by the charms of the sky, thought of reproducing union bay, which was opposite to prospect heights, from cape mandible to claw cape. the horizon was beautifully clear, and the sea, undulating under a soft breeze, was as calm as the waters of a lake, sparkling here and there under the sun's rays. the apparatus had been placed at one of the windows of the dining-room at granite house, and consequently overlooked the shore and the bay. herbert proceeded as he was accustomed to do, and the negative obtained, he went away to fix it by means of the chemicals deposited in a dark nook of granite house. returning to the bright light, and examining it well, herbert perceived on his negative an almost imperceptible little spot on the sea horizon. he endeavoured to make it disappear by reiterated washing, but could not accomplish it. "it is a flaw in the glass," he thought. and then he had the curiosity to examine this flaw with a strong magnifier which he unscrewed from one of the telescopes. but he had scarcely looked at it, when he uttered a cry, and the glass almost fell from his hands. immediately running to the room in which cyrus harding then was, he extended the negative and magnifier towards the engineer, pointing out the little spot. harding examined it; then seizing his telescope he rushed to the window. the telescope, after having slowly swept the horizon, at last stopped on the looked-for spot, and cyrus harding lowering it, pronounced one word only,-- "a vessel!" and in fact a vessel was in sight, off lincoln island! the temple press, printers, letchworth transcriber's notes . passages in italics are surrounded by _underscores_. . images have been moved from the middle of a paragraph to the closest paragraph break. . due to the poor scan quality of the original, text was found to be missing at some places. most prominent were the missing periods which have been added for the sake of clarity. also few missing punctuation marks like commas, quotes, etc. have been added where obvious need was felt. apart from that, some missing text has also been added after verification from other sources. . the words manoeuvred & manoeuvre have oe ligature in the original. . the following misprints have been corrected: "ned" corrected to "neb" (page ) "cruciferae" corrected to "cruciferæ" (page ) "thoughfully" corrected to "thoughtfully" (page ) "pronouced" corrected to "pronounced" (page ) "resoved" corrected to "resolved" (page ) . other than the corrections listed above, printer's inconsistencies in spelling, punctuation and hyphenation have been retained. [illustration: _general map_ of the russian empire.] account of the russian discoveries between asia and america. to which are added, the conquest of siberia, and the history of the transactions and commerce between russia and china. by william coxe, a. m. fellow of king's college, cambridge, and chaplain to his grace the duke of marlborough. london, printed by j. nichols, for t. cadell, in the strand. mdcclxxx. to jacob bryant, esq. as a public testimony of the highest respect for his distinguished literary abilities, the truest esteem for his private virtues, and the most grateful sense of many personal favours, the following pages are inscribed, by his faithful and affectionate humble servant, william coxe. cambridge, march , . preface. the late russian discoveries between asia and america have, for some time, engaged the attention of the curious; more especially since dr. robertson's admirable history of america has been in the hands of the public. in that valuable performance the elegant and ingenious author has communicated to the world, with an accuracy and judgement which so eminently distinguish all his writings, the most exact information at that time to be obtained, concerning those important discoveries. during my stay at petersburg, my inquiries were particularly directed to this interesting subject, in order to learn if any new light had been thrown on an article of knowledge of such consequence to the history of mankind. for this purpose i endeavoured to collect the respective journals of the several voyages subsequent to the expedition of beering and tschirikoff in , with which the celebrated muller concludes his account of the first russian navigations. during the course of my researches i was informed, that a treatise in the german language, published at hamburg and leipsic in , contained a full and exact narrative of the russian voyages, from to [ ]. [footnote : the title of the book is, neue nachrichten von denen neuendeckten insuln in der see zwischen asia und amerika aus mitgetheilten urkunden und auszuegen versasset von j. l. s.] as the author has not prefixed his name, i should have paid little attention to an anonymous publication, if i had not been assured, from very good authority, that the work in question was compiled from the original journals. not resting however upon this intelligence, i took the liberty of applying to mr. muller himself, who, by order of the empress, had arranged the same journals, from which the anonymous author is said to have drawn his materials. previous to my application, mr. muller had compared the treatise with the original papers; and he favoured me with the following strong testimony to its exactness and authenticity: "vous ferès bien de traduire pour l'usage de vos compatriotes le petit livre sur les isles situées entre le kamtchatka et l'amerique. ii n'y a point de doute, que l'auteur n'ait eté pourvu de bons memoires, et qu'il ne s'en foit fervi fidelement. j'ai confronté le livre avec les originaux." supported therefore by this very respectable authority, i considered this treatise as a performance of the highest credit, and well worthy of being more generally known and perused. i have accordingly, in the first part of the present publication, submitted a translation of it to the reader's candour; and added occasional notes to such passages as seemed to require an explanation. the original is divided into sections without any references. but as it seemed to be more convenient to divide it into chapters; and to accompany each chapter with a summary of the contents, and marginal references; i have moulded it into that form, without making however any alteration in the order of the journals. the additional intelligence which i procured at petersburg, is thrown into an appendix: it consists of some new information, and of three journals[ ], never before given to the public. amongst these i must particularly mention that of krenitzin and levasheff, together with the chart of their voyage, which was communicated to dr. robertson, by order of the empress of russia; and which that justly admired historian has, in the politest and most obliging manner, permitted me to make use of in this collection. this voyage, which redounds greatly to the honour of the sovereign who planned it, confirms in general the authenticity of the treatise above-mentioned; and ascertains the reality of the discoveries made by the private merchants. [footnote : the journals of krenitzin and levasheff, the short account of synd's voyage, and the narrative of shalauroff's expedition, n^o i. ix. xi.] as a farther illustration of this subject, i collected the best charts which could be procured at petersburg, and of which a list will be given in the following advertisement. from all these circumstances, i may venture, perhaps, to hope that the curious and inquisitive reader will not only find in the following pages the most authentic and circumstantial account of the progress and extent of the russian discoveries, which has hitherto appeared in any language; but be enabled hereafter to compare them with those more lately made by that great and much to be regretted navigator, captain cooke, when his journal shall be communicated to the public. as all the furs which are brought from the new discovered islands are sold to the chinese, i was naturally led to make enquiries concerning the commerce between russia and china; and finding this branch of traffic much more important than is commonly imagined, i thought that a general sketch of its present state, together with a succinct view of the transactions between the two nations, would not be unacceptable. the conquest of siberia, as it first opened a communication with china, and paved the way to all the interesting discoveries related in the present attempt, will not appear unconnected, i trust, with its principal design. the materials of this second part, as also of the preliminary observations concerning kamtchatka, and the commerce to the new-discovered islands, are drawn from books of established and undoubted reputation. mr. muller and mr. pallas, from whose interesting works these historical and commercial subjects are chiefly compiled, are too well known in the literary world to require any other vouchers for their judgement, exactness, and fidelity, than the bare mentioning of their names. i have only farther to apprize the reader, that, besides the intelligence extracted from these publications, he will find some additional circumstances relative to the russian commerce with china, which i collected during my continuance in russia. * * * * * i cannot close this address to the reader without embracing with peculiar satisfaction the just occasion, which the ensuing treatises upon the russian discoveries and commerce afford me, of joining with every friend of science in the warmest admiration of that enlarged and liberal spirit, which so strikingly marks the character of the present empress of russia. since her accession to the throne, the investigation and discovery of useful knowledge has been the constant object of her generous encouragement. the authentic records of the russian history have, by her express orders, been properly arranged; and permission is readily granted of inspecting them. the most distant parts of her vast dominions have, at her expence, been explored and described by persons of great abilities and extensive learning; by which means new and important lights have been thrown upon the geography and natural history of those remote regions. in a word, this truly great princess has contributed more, in the compass of only a few years, towards civilizing and informing the minds of her subjects, than had been effected by all the sovereigns her predecessors since the glorious æra of peter the great. catalogue of books quoted in this work in order to prevent the frequent mention of the full title of the books referred to in the course of this performance, the following catalogue is subjoined, with the abbreviations. müller's samlung russischer geschichte, ix volumes, vo. printed at st. petersburg in , and the following years; it is referred to in the following manner: s. r. g. with the volume and page annexed. from this excellent collection i have made use of the following treatises: vol. ii. p. , &c. geschichte der gegenden an dem flusse amur. there is a french translation of this treatise, called histoire du fleuve amur, mo, amsterdam, . vol. iii. p. , &c. nachrichten von see reisen, &c. there is an english and a french translation of this work; the former is called "voyages from asia to america for completing the discoveries of the north west coast of america," &c. to, london, . the title of the latter is voyages et decouvertes faites par les russes, &c. mo, amsterdam, . p. . nachrichten von der hanlung in sibirien. vol. vi. p. , sibirische geshichte. vol. viii. p. , nachricht von der russischen handlung nach china. pallas reise durch verschiedene provinzen des russischen reichs, in three parts, to, st. petersburg, , , and , thus cited, pallas reise. georgi bemerkungen einer reise im russischen reich in jahre, , iii volumes, to, st. petersburg, , cited georgi reise. fischer sibirische geschichte, volumes, vo, st. petersburg, cited fis. sib. ges. gmelin reise durch sibirien, tome iv. vo. gottingen, , cited gmelin reise. there is a french translation of this work, called voyage en siberie, &c. par m. gmelin. paris, . neueste nachrichten von kamtchatka aufgesetst im junius des ^{ten} yahren von dem dasigen befehls-haber herrn kapitain smalew. aus dem abhandlungen der freyen russischen gesellschaft moskau. in the journal of st. petersburg, april, .--cited journal of st. pet. explanation of some russian words made use of in the following work. _baidar_, a small boat. _guba_, a bay. _kamen_, a rock. _kotche_, a vessel. _krepost_, a regular fortress. _noss_, a cape. _ostrog_, a fortress surrounded with palisadoes. _ostroff_, an island. _ostrova_, islands. _quass_, a sort of fermented liquor. _reka_, a river. the russians, in their proper names of persons, make use of patronymics; these patronymics are formed in some cases by adding _vitch_ to the christian name of the father; in others _off_ or _eff_: the former termination is applied only to persons of condition; the latter to those of an inferior rank. as, for instance, among persons of condition _ivan ivanovitch_, }ivan the son of inferior rank, _ivan ivanoff_ } of ivan. _michael alexievitch_, } michael the _michael alexeeff_, }son of alexèy. sometimes a surname is added, _ivan ivanovitch romanoff_. table of russian weights, measures of length, and value of money. weight. a pood weighs russian pounds = english. measures of length. vershocks = an arsheen. an arsheen = inches. three arsheens, or seven feet = a fathom[ ], or sazshen. [footnote : the fathom for measuring the depth of water is the same as the english fathom = feet.] sazshens = a verst. a degree of longitude comprises - / versts = - / english miles. a mile is therefore , parts of a verst; two miles may then be estimated equal to three versts, omitting a small fraction. value of russian money. a rouble = copecs. its value varies according to the exchange from s. d. to s. d. upon an average, however, the value of a rouble is reckoned at four shillings. errata. p. , _reference_, _for_ appendix i. n^o i. _read_ n^o ii. , _for_ appendix i. n^o ii. _read_ n^o iii. , _for_ rogii _read_ kogii. , _for_ riksa _read_ kiska. , _for_ korovin _read_ korelin. , note--_for_ tobob _read_ tobol. , note--line , _after_ handpauken _omitted_ von verschiedenen klang. , _for_ saktunk _read_ saktunak. , line , _for_ were _read_ was. , l. . _for_ pretection _read_ protection. , l. . _for_ nor _read_ not. , _for_ sungur _read_ sirgut. , l. . _read_ other has an. , _for_ harlbadeers _read_ halberdiers. , note--line , _dele_ see hereafter, p. . , _for_ marym _read_ narym. , note--_for_ called by linnæus lutra marina _read_ lutra marina, called by linnæus mustela lutris, &c. , line , _for_ made of the bone, &c. _read_ made of bone, or the stalk, &c. , note --line , _for_ corbus _read_ corvus. , note--line , _dele_ was. , note--line , _dele_ that. ibid. note--line , "i should not" &c. _is a separate note, and relates to the extract in the text beginning_ "in ," &c. omitted in the errata. p. . l. . _r._ , . l. . _r._ , , . . advertisement. as no astronomical observations have been taken in the voyages related in this collection, the longitude and latitude ascribed to the new-discovered islands in the journals and upon the charts cannot be absolutely depended upon. indeed the reader will perceive, that the position[ ] of the fox islands upon the general map of russia is materially different from that assigned to them upon the chart of krenitzin and levasheff. without endeavouring to clear up any difficulties which may arise from this uncertainty, i thought it would be most satisfactory to have the best charts engraved: the reader will then be able to compare them with each other, and with the several journals. which representation of the new-discovered islands deserves the preferance, will probably be ascertained upon the return of captain clerke from his present expedition. [footnote : see p. .] list of the charts, and directions for placing them. chart i. a reduced copy of the general map of russia, published by the academy of sciences at st. petersburg, . to face the title-page. ii. chart of the voyage made by krenitzin and levasheff to the fox islands, communicated by dr. robertson, to face p. . iii. chart of synd's voyage towards tschukotskoi-noss, p. . iv. chart of shalauroff's voyage to shelatskoi-noss, with a small chart of the bear-islands, p. . view of maimatschin, p. . communicated by a gentleman who has been upon the spot. contents. dedication, p. iii. preface, p. v. catalogue of books quoted in this work, p. xi. explanation of some russian words made use of, p. xiii. table of russian weights, measures of length, and value of money, p. xiv. advertisement, p. xv. list of charts, and directions for placing them, p. xvi. part i. containing preliminary observations concerning kamtchatka, and account of the new discoveries made by the _russians_, p. -- . chap. i. discovery and conquest of _kamtchatka_--present state of that peninsula--population--tribute--productions, &c. p. . chap. ii. general idea of the commerce carried on to the new discovered islands--equipment of the vessels--risks of the trade, profits, &c. p. . chap. iii. furs and skins procured from _kamtchatka_ and the new discovered islands, p. . account of the russian discoveries, p. . chap. i. commencement and progress of the _russian_ discoveries in the sea of _kamtchatka_--general division of the new discovered islands, ibid. chap. ii. voyages in --first discovery of the _aleütian isles_, by _michael nevodsikoff_, p. . chap. iii. successive voyages, from to , to _beering's_ and _copper island_, and to the _aleütian isles_--some account of the inhabitants, p. . chap. iv. voyages from to . some of the further _aleütian_ or _fox islands_ touched at by _serebranikoff's_ vessel--some account of the natives, p. . chap. v. voyages from to , p. . chap. vi. voyages in , , and , to the _fox islands_, in the _st. vladimir_, fitted out by _trapesnikoff_--and in the _gabriel_, by _bethshevin_--the latter, under the command of _pushkareff_, sails to _alaksu_, or _alachshak_, one of the remotest eastern islands hitherto visited--some account of its inhabitants, and productions, which latter are different from those of the more western islands, p. . chap. vii. voyage of _andrean tolstyk_, in the _st. andrean_ and _natalia_--discovery of some new islands, called _andreanoffsky ostrova_--description of six of those islands, p. . chap. viii. voyage of the _zacharias_ and _elizabeth_, fitted out by _kulkoff_, and commanded by _dausinin_--they sail to _umnak_ and _unalashka_, and winter upon the latter island--the vessel destroyed, and all the crew, except four, murdered by the islanders--the adventures of those four _russians_, and their wonderful escape, p. . chap. ix. voyage of the vessel called the _trinity_, under the command of _korovin_--sails to the _fox islands_--winters at _unalashka_--puts to sea the spring following--the vessel is stranded in a bay of the island _umnak_, and the crew attacked by the natives--many of them killed--others carried off by sickness---they are reduced to great streights--relieved by _glottoff_, twelve of the whole company only remaining--description of _umnak_ and _unalashka_, p. . chap. x. voyage of _stephen glottoff_--he reaches the _fox islands_--sails beyond _unalashika_ to _kadyak_--winters upon that island--repeated attempts of the natives to destroy the crew--they are repulsed, reconciled, and prevailed upon to trade with the _russians_--account of _kadyak_--its inhabitants, animals, productions--_glottoff_ sails back to _umnak_--winters there--returns to _kamtchatka_--journal of his voyage, p. . chap. xi. _solovioff's_ voyage--he reaches _unalashka_, and passes two winters upon that island--relation of what passed there--fruitless attempts of the natives to destroy the crew--return of _solovioff_ to _kamtchatka_--journal of his voyage in returning--description of the islands of _umnak_ and _unalashka_, productions, inhabitants, their manners, customs, &c. &c. p. . chap. xii. voyage of _otcheredin_--he winters upon _umnak_--arrival of _levasheff_ upon _unalashka_--return of _otcheredin_ to _ochotsk_, p. . chap. xiii. _conclusion_--general position and situation of the _aleütian_ and _fox islands_--their distance from each other--further description of the dress, manners, and custom of the inhabitants--their feasts and ceremonies, &c. p. . part ii. containing the conquest of siberia, and the history of the transactions and commerce between russia and china, p. . chap. i. first irruption of the _russians_ into _siberia_--second inroad--_yermac_ driven by the tzar of _muscovy_ from the _volga_, retires to _orel_, a _russian_ settlement--enters _siberia_, with an army of _cossacs_--his progress and exploits--defeats _kutchum chan_--conquers his dominions--cedes them to the tzar--receives a reinforcement of _russian_ troops--is surprized by _kutchum chan_--his defeat and death--veneration paid to his memory--_russian_ troops evacuate _siberia_--re-enter and conquer the whole country--their progress stopped by the _chinese_, p. . chap. ii. commencement of hostilities between the _russians_ and _chinese_--disputes concerning the limits of the two empires--treaty of _nershinsk_--embassies from the court of _russia_ to _pekin_--treaty of _kiachta_--establishment of the commerce between the two nations. p. . chap. iii. account of the _russian_ and _chinese_ settlements upon the confines of _siberia_--description of the _russian_ frontier town _kiachta_--of the _chinese_ frontier town _maitmatschin_--its buildings, pagodas, &c. p. . chap. iv. commerce between the _chinese_ and _russians_--list of the principal exports and imports--duties--average amount of the _russian_ trade. p. . chap. v. description of _zuruchaitu_--and its trade--transport of the merchandize through _siberia_. p. . part iii. appendix i. and ii. containing supplementary accounts of the russian discoveries, &c. &c. appendix i. extract from the journal of a voyage made by _captain krenitzin_ and _lieutenant levasheff_ to the _fox islands_, in , , by order of the _empress of russia_--they sail from _kamtchatka_--arrive at _beering's_ and _copper islands_--reach the _fox islands_--_krenitzin_ winters at _alaxa_--_levasheff_ upon _unalashka_--productions of _unalashka_--description of the inhabitants of the _fox islands_--their manners and customs, &c. p. . n^o ii. concerning the longitude of _kamtchatka_, and of the eastern extremity of _asia_, as laid down by the _russian_ geographers. p. . n^o iii. summary of the proofs tending to shew, that _beering_ and _tschirikoff_ either reached _america_ in , or came very near it. p. . n^o iv. list of the principal charts representing the _russian_discoveries. p. . n^o v. position of the _andreanoffsky isles_ ascertained--number of the _aleutian isles_. p. . n^o vi. conjectures concerning the proximity of the _fox islands_ to the continent of _america_. p. . n^o vii. of the _tschutski_--reports of the vicinity of _america_ to their coast, first propagated by them, seem to be confirmed by late accounts from those parts. p. . n^o viii. list of the new discovered islands, procured from an _aleütian_ chief--catalogue of islands called by different names in the account of the _russian_ discoveries. p. . n^o ix. voyage of _lieutenant synd_ to the north east of _siberia_--he discovers a cluster of islands, and a promontory, which he supposes to belong to the continent of _america_, lying near the coast of the _tschutski_. p. . n^o x. specimen of the _aleütian_ language. p. . n^o xi. attempts of the _russians_ to discover a north east passage--voyages from _archangel_ towards the _lena_--from the _lena_ towards _kamtchatka_--extract from _muller's_ account of _deshneff's_ voyage round _tschukotskoi noss_--narrative of a voyage made by _shalauroff_ from the _lena_ to _shelatskoi noss_. p. . appendix ii. _tartarian_ rhubarb brought to _kiachta_ by the _bucharian_ merchants--method of examining and purchasing the roots--different species of rheum which yield the finest rhubarb--price of rhubarb in _russia_--exportation--superiority of the _tartarian_ over the _indian_ rhubarb. p. . table of the longitude and latitude of the principal places mentioned in this work. p. . part i. containing i. preliminary observations concerning kamtchatka, and ii. account of the new discoveries made by the russians. preliminary observations concerning kamtchatka, &c. chap. i. discovery and conquest of _kamtchatka_--present state of that peninsula--population--tribute--productions, &c. [sidenote: first discovery of kamtchatka.] the peninsula of kamtchatka was not discovered by the russians before the latter end of the last century. the first expedition towards those parts was made in , by sixteen cossacs, under the command of lucas semænoff morosko, who was sent against the koriacks of the river opooka by volodimir atlafsoff commander of anadirsk. morosko continued his march until he came within four days journey of the river kamtchatka, and having rendered a kamtchadal village tributary, he returned to anadirsk[ ]. [footnote : s. r. g. v. iii. p. .] the following year atlafsoff himself at the head of a larger body of troops penetrated into the peninsula, took possession of the river kamtchatka by erecting a cross upon its banks; and built some huts upon the spot, where upper kamtchatkoi ostrog now stands. [sidenote: that peninsula conquered and colonised by the russians.] these expeditions were continued during the following years: upper and lower kamtchatkoi ostrogs and bolcheretsk were built; the southern district conquered and colonised; and in the whole peninsula was finally reduced under the dominion of the russians. during some years the possession of kamtchatka brought very little advantage to the crown, excepting the small tribute of furs exacted from the inhabitants. the russians indeed occasionally hunted in that peninsula foxes, wolves, ermines, sables, and other animals, whose valuable skins form an extensive article of commerce among the eastern nations. but the fur trade carried on from thence was inconsiderable; until the russians discovered the islands situated between asia and america, in a series of voyages, the journals of which will be exhibited in the subsequent translation. since these discoveries, the variety of rich furs, which are procured from those islands, has greatly encreased the trade of kamtchatka, and rendered it a very important branch of the russian commerce. the peninsula of kamtchatka lies between and degrees of north latitude, and and of longitude from the isle of fero. it is bounded on the east and south by the sea of kamtchatka, on the west by the seas of ochotsk and penshinsk, and on the north by the country of the koriacs. [sidenote: present state of kamtchatka.] it is divided into four districts, bolcheresk, tigilskaia krepost, verchnei or upper kamtchatkoi ostrog, and nishnei or lower kamtchatkoi ostrog. [sidenote: government] the government is vested in the chancery of bolcheresk, which depends upon and is subject to the inspection of the chancery of ochotsk. the whole russian force stationed in the peninsula consists of no more than three hundred men[ ]. [footnote : journal of st. petersburg for april .] [sidenote: population.] the present population of kamtchatka is very small, amounting to scarce four thousand souls. formerly the inhabitants were more numerous, but in , that country was greatly depopulated by the ravages of the small-pox, by which disorder five thousand three hundred and sixty-eight persons were carried off. there are now only seven hundred and six males in the whole peninsula who are tributary, and an hundred and fourteen in the kuril isles, which are subject to russia. [sidenote: tribute.] the fixed annual tribute consists in sables, red foxes, sea-otters with a dam, and cub sea-otters. all furs exported from kamtchatka pay a duty of per cent. to the crown; the tenth of the cargoes brought from the new discovered islands is also delivered into the customs. [sidenote: volcanos.] many traces of volcanos have been observed in this peninsula; and there are some mountains, which are at present in a burning state. the most considerable of these volcanos is situated near the lower ostrog. in a great noise was heard issuing from the inside of that mountain, and flames of fire were seen to burst from different parts. these flames were immediately succeeded by a large stream of melted snow water, which flowed into the neighbouring valley, and drowned two kamtchadals, who were at that time upon an hunting party. the ashes, and other combustible matter, thrown from the mountain, spread to the circumference of three hundred versts. in there was another discharge, but less considerable. every night flames of fire were observed streaming from the mountain; and the eruption which attended them, did no small damage to the inhabitants of the lower ostrog. since that year no flames have been seen; but the mountain emits a constant smoke. the same phænomenon is also observed upon another mountain, called tabaetshinskian. [sidenote: productions.] the face of the country throughout the peninsula is chiefly mountainous. it produces in some parts birch, poplars, alders, willows, underwood, and berries of different sorts. greens and other vegetables are raised with great facility; such as white cabbage, turneps, radishes, beetroot, carrots, and some cucumbers. agriculture is in a very low state, which is chiefly owing to the nature of the soil and the severe hoar frosts; for though some trials have been made with respect to the cultivation of corn, and oats, barley and rye have been sown; yet no crop has ever been procured sufficient in quality or quality to answer the pains and expence of raising it. hemp however has of late years been cultivated with great success[ ]. [footnote : journal of st. petersburg.] every year a vessel, belonging to the crown, sails from ochotsk to kamtchatka laden with salt, provisions, corn, and russian manufactures; and returns in june or july of the following year with skins and furs. chap. ii. general idea of the commerce carried on to the new discovered islands.--equipment of the vessels.--risks of the trade, profits, &c. since the conclusion of beering's voyage, which was made at the expence of the crown, the prosecution of the new discoveries began by him has been almost entirely carried on by individuals. these persons were principally merchants of irkutsk, yakutsk, and other natives of siberia, who formed themselves into small trading companies, and fitted out vessels at their joint expence. [sidenote: equipment of the vessels.] most of the vessels which are equipped for these expeditions are two masted: they are commonly built without iron, and in general so badly constructed, that it is wonderful how they can weather so stormy a sea. they are called in russian skitiki or sewed vessels, because the planks are sewed together with thongs of leather. some few are built in the river of kamtchatka; but they are for the most part constructed at the haven of ochotsk. the largest of these vessels are manned with seventy men, and the smallest with forty. the crew generally consists of an equal number of russians and kamtchadals. the latter occasion a considerable saving, as their pay is small; they also resist, more easily than the former, the attacks of the scurvy. but russian mariners are more enterprising and more to be depended upon in time of danger than the others; some therefore are unavoidably necessary. [sidenote: expences attending this trade.] the expences of building and fitting out the vessels are very considerable: for there is nothing at ochotsk but timber for their construction. accordingly cordage, sails, and some provisions, must be brought from yakutsk upon horses. the dearness of corn and flour, which must be transported from the districts lying about the river lena, renders it impossible to lay-in any large quantity for the subsistence of the crew during a voyage, which commonly lasts three or four years. for this reason no more is provided, than is necessary to supply the russian mariners with quass and other fermented liquors. from the excessive scarcity of cattle both at ochotsk and [ ]kamtchatka very little provision is laid in at either of those places: but the crew provide themselves with a large store of the flesh of sea animals, which are caught and cured upon beering's island, where the vessels for the most part winter. [footnote : in there were only head of cattle upon the whole peninsula. a cow sold from to roubles, an ox from to . a pound of fresh beef sold upon an average for - / copecs. the excessive dearness of this price will be easily conceived, when it is known, that at moscow a pound of beef sells for about three copecs. journ. st. petersb.] after all expences are paid, the equipment of each vessel ordinarily costs from , to , roubles. and sometimes the expences amount to , . every vessel is divided into a certain number of shares, generally from thirty to fifty; and each share is worth from to roubles. the risk of the trade is very great, as shipwrecks are common in the sea of kamtchatka, which is full of rocks and very tempestuous. besides, the crews are frequently surprised and killed by the islanders, and the vessels destroyed. [sidenote: profits.] in return the profits arising from these voyages are very considerable, and compensate the inconveniencies and dangers attending them. for if a ship comes back after having made a profitable voyage, the gain at the most moderate computation amounts to cent. per cent. and frequently to as much more. should the vessel be capable of performing a second expedition, the expences are of course considerably lessened, and the shares are at a lower price. some notion of the general profits arising from this trade (when the voyage is successful), may be deduced from the sale of a rich cargo of furs, brought to kamtchatka, on the d of june, , from the new-discovered islands, in a vessel belonging to ivan popoff. the tenth part of the skins being delivered to the customs, the remainder was distributed in fifty-five shares. each share consisted of twenty sea-otters, sixteen black and brown foxes, ten red foxes, three sea-otter tails; and such a portion was sold upon the spot from to roubles: so that according to this price the whole lading was worth about , roubles[ ]. [footnote : georgi reise tom. i. p. , & seq. journal of st. petersburg.] chap. iii. furs and skins procured from _kamtchatka_ and the new discovered islands. [sidenote: furs and skins brought from kamtchatka and the new discovered islands.] the principal furs and skins procured from the peninsula of kamtchatka and the new discovered islands are sea-otters, foxes, sables, ermines, wolves, bears, &c.--these furs are transported to ochotsk by sea, and from thence carried to [ ]kiachta upon the frontiers of siberia; where the greatest part of them are sold to the chinese at a very considerable profit. [footnote : see part ii. chap. iii.] [sidenote: sea-otters.] of all these furs the skins of the sea-otters are the richest and most valuable. those animals resort in great numbers to the aleutian and fox islands: they are called by the russians bobry morski or sea-beavers, and sometimes kamtchadal beavers, on account of the resemblance of their fur to that of the common beaver. from these circumstances several authors have been led into a mistake, and have supposed that this animal is of the beaver species; whereas it is the true sea-otter[ ]. [footnote : s.r.g. iii. p. .] the female are called matka or dams; and the cubs till five months old medviedki or little bears, because their coat resembles that of a bear; they lose that coat after five months, and then are called koschloki. the fur of the finest sort is thick and long, of a dark colour, and a fine glossy hue. they are taken four ways; struck with darts as they are sleeping upon their backs in the sea, followed in boats and hunted down till they are tired, surprised in caverns, and taken in nets. their skins fetch different prices according to their quality. at kamtchatka[ ] the best sell for per skin from to roubles. middle sort to worst sort to at kiachta[ ] the old and middle-aged sea-otter skins are sold to the chinese per skin from to the worst sort to . [footnote : journal st. petersburg.] [footnote : pallas reise. part iii. p. .] as these furs fetch so great a price to the chinese, they are seldom brought into russia for sale: and several, which have been carried to moscow as a tribute, were purchased for roubles per skin; and sent from thence to the chinese frontiers, where they were disposed of at a very high interest. [sidenote: different species of foxes.] there are several species of foxes, whose skins are sent from kamtchatka into siberia and russia. of these the principal are the black foxes, the petsi or arctic foxes, the red and stone foxes. the finest black foxes are caught in different parts of siberia, and more commonly in the northern regions between the rivers lena, indigirka, and kovyma: the black foxes found upon the remotest eastern islands discovered by the russians, or the lyssie ostrova, are not so valuable. they are very black and large; but the coat for the most part is as coarse as that of a wolf. the great difference in the fineness of the fur, between these foxes and those of siberia, arises probably from the following circumstances. in those islands the cold is not so severe as in siberia; and as there is no wood, the foxes live in holes and caverns of the rocks; whereas in the abovementioned parts of siberia, there are large tracts of forests in which they find shelter. some black foxes however are occasionally caught in the remotest eastern islands, not wholly destitute of wood, and these are of great value. in general the chinese, who pay the dearest for black furs, do not give more for the black foxes of the new-discovered islands than from to roubles per skin. the arctic or ice foxes are very common upon some of the new-discovered islands. they are called petsi by the russians, and by the germans blue foxes. [sidenote: pennant's synopsis.] their natural colour is of a bluish grey or ash colour; but they change their coat at different ages, and in differerent seasons of the year. in general they are born brown, are white in winter, and brown in summer; and in spring and autumn, as the hair gradually falls off, the coat is marked with different specks and crosses. at kiachta[ ] all the several varieties sell upon an average to the chinese per skin from copecs to - / roubles. stone foxes at kamtchatka per skin from to - / red foxes from copecs to copecs. at kiachta from copecs to common wolves skins at per skin best sort per skin from to sables per ditto - / to [footnote : pallas reise.] a pood of the best sea-horse teeth[ ] sells at yakutsk for roubles. of the middling inferior ditto from to . [footnote : s. r. g. v. iii.] four, five, or six teeth generally weigh a pood, and sometimes, but very rarely, three. they are sold to the chinese, monguls, and calmucs. account of the new discoveries made by the russians in the eastern ocean, between kamtchatka and america. translated from the german. with notes by the translator. account of the russian discoveries. chap. i. commencement and progress of the _russian_ discoveries in the sea of _kamtchatka_--general division of the new discovered islands. a thirst after riches was the chief motive which excited the spaniards to the discovery of america; and which turned the attention of other maritime nations to that quarter. the same passion for riches occasioned, about the middle of the sixteenth century, the discovery and conquest of northern asia, a country, before that time, as unknown to the europeans, as thule to the ancients. [sidenote: conquest of siberia.] the first foundation of this conquest was laid by the celebrated yermac[ ], at the head of a band of adventurers, less civilized, but at the same time, not so inhuman as the conquerors of america. by the accession of this vast territory, now known by the name of siberia, the russians have acquired an extent of empire never before attained by any other nation. [footnote : the reader will find an account of this conquest by yermac in part ii. chap. i.] [sidenote: commencement of the new discoveries.] the first project[ ] for making discoveries in that tempestuous sea, which lies between kamtchatka and america, was conceived and planned by peter i. the greatest sovereign who ever sat upon the russian throne, until it was adorned by the present empress. the nature and completion of this project under his immediate successors are well known to the public from the relation of the celebrated muller. [sidenote: their progress.] no sooner had [ ]beering and tschirikoff, in the prosecution of this plan, opened their way to islands abounding in valuable furs, than private merchants immediately engaged with ardour in similar expeditions; and, within a period of ten years, more important discoveries were made by these individuals, at their own private cost, than had been hitherto effected by all the expensive efforts of the crown. [footnote : there seems a want of connection in this place, which will be cleared up by considering, that, by the conquest of siberia, the russians advanced to the shores of the eastern ocean, the scene of the discoveries here alluded to.] [footnote : beering had already made several expeditions in the sea of kamtchatka, by orders of the crown, before he undertook the voyage mentioned in the text. in , he departed from the mouth of the kamtchatka river, in company with tschirikoff. the purport of this voyage was to ascertain, whether the two continents of asia and america were separated; and peter i. a short time before his death, had drawn up instructions with his own hand for that purpose. beering coasted the eastern shore of siberia as high as latitude ° ´; but made no discovery of the opposite continent. in , he set sail again for the prosecution of the same design; but this second attempt equally failed of success. in , beering and tschirikoff went out upon the celebrated expedition (alluded to in the text, and which is so often mentioned in the course of this work) towards the coasts of america. this expedition led the way to all the important discoveries since made by the russians. beering's vessel was wrecked in december of the same year; and tschirikoff landed at kamtchatka on the th of october, . s. r. g. iii. nachrichten von see reisen, &c. and robertson's history of america, vol. i. p. , & seq.] soon after the return of beering's crew from the island where he was ship-wrecked and died, and which is called after his name, the inhabitants of kamtchatka ventured over to that island, to which the sea-otters and other sea-animals were accustomed to resort in great numbers. mednoi ostroff, or copper island, which takes that appellation from large masses of native copper found upon the beach, and which lies full in sight of beering's isle, was an easy and speedy discovery. these two small uninhabited spots were for some time the only islands that were known; until a scarcity of land and sea-animals, whose numbers were greatly diminished by the russian hunters, occasioned other expeditions. several of the vessels which were sent out upon these voyages were driven by stormy weather to the south-east; and discovered by that means the aleütian isles, situated about the th[ ] degree of longitude, and but moderately peopled. [footnote : the author reckons, throughout this treatise, the longitude from the first meridian of the isle of fero. the longitude and latitude, which he gives to the fox islands, corresponds exactly with those in which they are laid down upon the general map of russia. the longitude of beering's, copper island, and of the aleütian isles, are somewhat different. see advertisement relating to the charts, and also appendix i. n^o iv.] from the year , when it seems these islands were first visited, until , when the first tribute of furs was brought from thence to ochotsk, the government appears not to have been fully informed of their discovery. in the last mentioned year, one lebedeff was commander of kamtchatka. from to , captain tsheredoff and lieutenant kashkareff were his successors. in , feodor ivanovitch soimonoff, governor of tobolsk, turned his attention to the abovementioned islands; and, the same year, captain rtistsheff, at ochotsk, instructed lieutenant shmaleff, the same who was afterwards commander in kamtchatka, to promote and favour all expeditions in those seas. until this time, all the discoveries subsequent to beering's voyage were made, without the interposition of the court, by private merchants in small vessels fitted out at their own expence. [sidenote: the empress promotes all attempts towards new discoveries.] the present empress (to whom every circumstance which contributes to aggrandize the russian empire is an object of attention) has given new life to these discoveries. the merchants engaged in them have been animated by recompences. the importance and true position of the russian islands have been ascertained by an expensive voyage[ ], made by order of the crown; and much additional information will be derived from the journals and charts of the officers employed in that expedition, whenever they shall be published. [footnote : the author here alludes to the secret expedition of captain krenitzin and levaheff, whose journal and chart were sent, by order of the empress of russia, to dr. robertson. see robertson's history of america, vol. i. p. and . see appendix i. n^o i.] meanwhile, we may rest assured, that several modern geographers have erred in advancing america too much to the west, and in questioning the extent of siberia eastwards, as laid down by the russians. it appears, indeed, evident, that the accounts and even conjectures of the celebrated muller, concerning the position of those distant regions, are more and more confirmed by facts; in the same manner as the justness of his supposition concerning the form of the coast of the sea of ochotsk[ ] has been lately established. with respect to the extent of siberia, it appears almost beyond a doubt from the most recent observations, that its eastern extremity is situated beyond[ ] degrees of longitude. in regard to the western coasts of america, all the navigations to the new discovered islands evidently shew, that, between and degrees of latitude, that continent advances no where nearer to asia than the [ ]coasts touched at by beering and tschirikoff, or about degrees of longitude. [footnote : mr. muller formerly conjectured, that the coast of the sea of ochotsk stretched south-west towards the river ud; and from thence to the mouth of the amoor south-east: and the truth of this conjecture had been since confirmed by a coasting voyage made by captain synd.] [footnote : appendix i. n^o i.] [footnote : appendix i. n^o ii.] as to the new discovered islands, no credit must be given to a chart published in the geographical calendar of st. petersburg for ; in which they are inaccurately laid down. nor is the antient chart of the new discoveries, published by the imperial academy, and which seems to have been drawn up from mere reports, more deserving of attention[ ]. [footnote : appendix i. n^o iv.] [sidenote: position of the new discovered islands.] the late navigators give a far different description of the northern archipelago. from their accounts we learn, that beering's island is situated due east from kamtchatkoi noss, in the th degree of longitude. near it is copper island; and, at some distance from them, east-south-east, there are three small islands, named by their inhabitants, attak, semitshi, and shemiya: these are properly the aleütian isles; they stretch from west-north-west towards east-south-east, in the same direction as beering's and copper islands, in the longitude of , and latitude . to the north-east of these, at the distance of or versts, lies another group of six or more islands, known by the name of the andreanoffskie ostrova. south-east, or east-south, of these, at the distance of about degrees, and north by east of the aleütian, begins the chain of lyssie ostrova, or fox islands: this chain of rocks and isles stretches east-north-east between and degrees of north latitude, from degrees of longitude most probably to the continent of america; and in a line of direction, which crosses with that in which the aleütian isles lie. the largest and most remarkable of these islands are umnak, aghunalashka, or, as it is commonly shortened, unalashka, kadyak, and alagshak. of these and the aleütian isles, the distance and position are tolerably well ascertained by ships reckonings, and latitudes taken by pilots. but the situation of the andreanoffsky isles[ ] is still somewhat doubtful, though probably their direction is east and west; and some of them may unite with that part of the fox islands which are most contiguous to the opposite continent. [footnote : these are the same islands which are called, by mr. stæhlin, anadirsky islands, from their supposed vicinity to the river anadyr. see appendix i. n^o v.] the main land of america has not been touched at by any of the vessels in the late expeditions; though possibly the time is not far distant when some of the russian adventurers will fall in with that coast[ ]. more to the north perhaps, at least as high as degrees latitude, the continent of america may stretch out nearer to the coast of the tschutski; and form a large promontory, accompanied with islands, which have no connection with any of the preceding ones. that such a promontory really exists, and advances to within a very small distance from tschukotskoi noss, can hardly be doubted; at least it seems to be confirmed by all the latest accounts which have been procured from those parts[ ]. that prolongation, therefore, of america, which by delisle is made to extend westward, and is laid down just opposite to kamtchatka, between and degrees latitude, must be entirely removed; for many of the voyages related in this collection lay through that part of the ocean, where this imaginary continent was marked down. [footnote : appendix i. n^o vi.] [footnote : appendix i. n^o vii.] it is even more than probable, that the aleütian, and some of the fox islands, now well known, are the very same which beering fell-in with upon his return; though, from the unsteadiness of his course, their true position could not be exactly laid down in the chart of that expedition[ ]. [footnote : this error is however so small, and particularly with respect to the more eastern coasts and islands, as laid down in beering's chart, such as cape hermogenes, toomanoi, shumaghin's island, and mountain of st. dolmar, that if they were to be placed upon the general map of russia, which is prefixed to this work, they would coincide with the very chain of the fox islands.] as the sea of kamtchatka is now so much frequented, these conjectures cannot remain long undecided; and it is only to be wished, that some expeditions were to be made north-east, in order to discover the nearest coasts of america. for there is no reason to expect a successful voyage by taking any other direction; as all the vessels, which have steered a more southerly course, have sailed through an open sea, without meeting with any signs of land. a very full and judicious account of all the discoveries hitherto made in the eastern ocean may be expected from the celebrated mr. muller[ ]. meanwhile, i hope the following account, extracted from the original papers, and procured from the best intelligence, will be the more acceptable to the public; as it may prove an inducement to the russians to publish fuller and more circumstantial relations. besides, the reader will find here a narrative more authentic and accurate, than what has been published in the abovementioned calendar[ ]; and several mistakes in that memoir are here corrected. [footnote : mr. muller has already arranged and put in order several of the journals, and sent them to the board of admiralty at st. petersburg, where they are at present kept, together with the charts of the respective voyages.] [footnote : a german copy of the treatise alluded to in the text, was sent, by its author, mr. stæhlin counsellor of state to the empress of russia, to the late dr. maty; and it is mentioned, in the philosophical transactions for , under the following title: "a new map and preliminary description of the new archipelago in the north, discovered a few years ago by the russians in the n. e. beyond kamtchatka." a translation of this treatise was published the same year by heydinger.] chap. ii. voyages in .--first discovery of the _aleütian isles_ by _michael nevodtsikoff_. a voyage made in the year by emilian bassoff is scarce worth mentioning; as he only reached beering's island, and two smaller ones, which lie south of the former, and returned on the st of july, . [sidenote: voyage of nevodtsikoff in .] the first voyage which is in any wise remarkable, was undertaken in the year . the vessel was a shitik named eudokia, fitted out at the expence of aphanassei tsebaefskoi, jacob tsiuproff and others; she sailed from the kamtchatka river sept. , under the command of michael nevodtsikoff a native of tobolsk. [sidenote: discovers the aleütian islands.] having discovered three unknown islands, they wintered upon one of them, in order to kill sea-otters, of which there was a large quantity. these islands were undoubtedly the nearest[ ] aleütian islands: the language of the inhabitants was not understood by an interpreter, whom they had brought with them from kamtchatka. for the purpose therefore of learning this language, they carried back with them one of the islanders; and presented him to the chancery of bolcheretsk, with a false account of their proceedings. this islander was examined as soon as he had acquired a slight knowledge of the russian language; and as it is said, gave the following report. he was called temnac, and att was the name of the island of which he was a native. at some distance from thence lies a great island called sabya, of which the inhabitants are denominated rogii: these inhabitants, as the russians understood or thought they understood him, made crosses, had books and fire-arms, and navigated in baidars or leathern canoes. at no great distance from the island where they wintered, there were two well-inhabited islands: the first lying e. s. e. and s. e. by south, the second east and east by south. the above-mentioned islander was baptised under the name of paul, and sent to ochotsk. [footnote : the small group of islands lying s. e. of beering's island, are the real aleütian isles: they are sometimes called the nearest aleütian islands; and the fox islands the furthest aleütian isles.] as the misconduct of the ship's crew towards the natives was suspected, partly from the loss of several men, and partly from the report of those russians, who were not concerned in the disorderly conduct of their companions, a strict examination took place; by which the following circumstances relating to the voyage were brought to light. [sidenote: narrative of the voyage.] according to the account of some of the crew, and particularly of the commander, after six days sailing they came in sight of the first island on the th of september, at mid-day. they sailed by, and towards evening they discovered the second island; where they lay at anchor until the next morning. the th several inhabitants appeared on the coast, and the pilot was making towards shore in the small boat, with an intention of landing; but observing their numbers increase to about an hundred, he was afraid of venturing among them, although they beckoned to him. he contented himself therefore with flinging some needles amongst them: the islanders in return threw into the boat some sea-fowl of the cormorant kind. he endeavoured to hold a conversation with them by means of the interpreters, but no one could understand their language. and now the crew endeavoured to row the vessel out to sea; but the wind being contrary, they were driven to the other side of the same island, where they cast anchor. the th, tsiuproff having landed with some of the crew in order to look for water, met several inhabitants: he gave them some tobacco and small chinese pipes; and received in return a present of a stick, upon which the head of a seal was carved. they endeavoured to wrest his hunting gun from him; but upon his refusing to part with it and retiring to the small boat, the islanders ran after him; and seized the rope by which the boat was made fast to shore. this violent attack obliged tsiuproff to fire; and having wounded one person in the hand, they all let go their hold; and he rowed off to the ship. the savages no sooner saw that their companion was hurt, than they threw off their cloaths, carried the wounded person naked into the sea, and washed him. in consequence of this encounter the ship's crew would not venture to winter at this place, but rowed back again to the other island, where they came to an anchor. the next morning tsiuproff, and a certain shaffyrin landed with a more considerable party: they observed several traces of inhabitants; but meeting no one they returned to the ship, and coasted along the island. the following day the cossac shekurdin went on shore, accompanied by five sailors: two of whom he sent back with a supply of water; and remained himself with the others in order to hunt sea-otters. at night they came to some dwellings inhabited by five families: upon their approach the natives abandoned their huts with precipitation, and hid themselves among the rocks. shekurdin no sooner returned to the ship, than he was again sent on shore with a larger company, in order to look out for a proper place to lay up the vessel during winter: in their way they observed fifteen islanders upon an height; and threw them some fragments of dried fish in order to entice them to approach nearer. but as this overture did not succeed, tsiuproff, who was one of the party, ordered some of the crew to mount the height, and to seize one of the inhabitants, for the purpose of learning their language: this order was accordingly executed, notwithstanding the resistance which the islanders made with their bone spears; the russians immediately returned with their prisoner to the ship. they were soon afterwards driven to sea by a violent storm, and beat about from the d to the th of october, during which time they lost their anchor and boat; at length they came back to the same island, where they passed the winter. soon after their landing they found in an adjacent hut the dead bodies of two of the inhabitants, who had probably been killed in the last encounter. in their way the russians were met by an old woman, who had been taken prisoner, and set at liberty. she was accompanied with thirty-four islanders of both sexes, who all came dancing to the sound of a drum; and brought with them a present of coloured earth. pieces of cloth, thimbles, and needles, were distributed among them in return; and they parted amicably. before the end of october, the same persons, together with the old woman and several children, returned dancing as before, and brought birds, fish, and other provision. having passed the night with the russians, they took their leave. soon after their departure, tsiuproff, shaffyrin, and nevodsikoff, accompanied with seven of the crew, went after them, and found them among the rocks. in this interview the natives behaved in the most friendly manner, and exchanged a baidar and some skins for two shirts. they were observed to have hatchets of sharpened stone, and needles made of bone: they lived upon the flesh of sea-otters, seals, and sea-lions, which they killed with clubs and bone lances. so early as the th of october, tsiuproff had sent ten persons, under the command of larion belayeff, upon a reconnoitring party. the latter treated the inhabitants in an hostile manner; upon which they defended themselves as well as they could with their bone lances. this resistance gave him a pretext for firing; and accordingly he shot the whole number, amounting to fifteen men, in order to get at their wives. shekurdin, shocked at these cruel proceedings, retired unperceived to the ship, and brought an account of all that had passed. tsiuproff, instead of punishing these cruelties as they deserved, was secretly pleased with them; for he himself was affronted at the islanders for having refused to give him an iron bolt, which he saw in their possession. he had, in consequence of their refusal, committed several acts of hostilities against them; and had even formed the horrid design of poisoning them with a mixture of corrosive sublimate. in order however to preserve appearances, he dispatched shekurdin and nevodsikoff to reproach belayeff for his disorderly conduct; but sent him at the same time, by the above-mentioned persons, more powder and ball. the russians continued upon this island, where they caught a large quantity of sea otters, until the th of september, ; when, no longer thinking themselves secure, they put to sea with an intention of looking out for some uninhabited islands. being however overtaken by a violent storm, they were driven about until the th of october, when their vessel struck upon a rocky shore, and was shipwrecked, with the loss of almost all the tackle, and the greatest part of the furs. worn out at length with cold and fatigue, they ventured, the first of november, to penetrate into the interior part of the country, which they found rocky and uneven. upon their coming to some huts, they were informed, that they were cast away upon the island of karaga, the inhabitants of which were tributary to russia, and of the koraki tribe. the islanders behaved to them with great kindness, until belayeff had the imprudence to make proposals to the wife of the chief. the woman gave immediate intelligence to her husband; and the natives were incensed to such a degree, that they threatened the whole crew with immediate death: but means were found to pacify them, and they continued to live with the russians upon the same good terms as before. the th of may, , a party of olotorians made a descent upon the island in three baidars, and attacked the natives; but, after some loss on both sides, they went away. they returned soon after with a larger force, and were again forced to retire. but as they threatened to come again in a short time, and to destroy all the inhabitants who paid tribute, the latter advised the russians to retire from the island, and assisted them in building two baidars. with these they put to sea the th of june, and landed the st of july at kamtchatka, with the rest of their cargo, consisting of sea-otters, of which, they paid the tenth into the customs. during this expedition twelve men were lost. chap. iii. successive voyages, from_ to , to _beering's_ and _copper island,_ and to the _aleütian isles_.--some account of the inhabitants. in the year [ ] two vessels sailed from the kamtchatka river, according to a permission granted by the chancery of bolckeretsk for hunting sea-otters. one was fitted out by andrew wsevidoff, and carried forty-six men, besides eight cossacs: the other belonged to feodor cholodiloff, andrew tolstyk, and company; and had on board a crew, consisting of forty-one russians and kamtchadals, with six cossacs. [footnote : it may be necessary to inform the reader, that, in this and the two following chapters, some circumstances are occasionally omitted, which are to be found in the original. these omissions relate chiefly to the names of some of the partners engaged in the equipments, and to a detail of immaterial occurrences prior to the actual departure of the vessels.] the latter vessel sailed the th of october, and was forced, by stress of weather and other accidents, to winter at beering's island. from thence they departed may the st, , and touched at another small island, in order to provide themselves with water and other necessaries. they then steered s. e. for a considerable way without discovering any new islands; and, being in great want of provisions, returned into kamtchatka river, august , with a cargo of old sea-otter-skins, above young ones, petsi or arctic fox-skins, which were all slain upon beering's island. we have no sufficient account of wsevidoff's voyage. all that is known amounts only to this, that he returned the th of july, , after having probably touched upon one of the nearest aleütian isles which was uninhabited: his cargo consisted of the skins of sea-otters, and arctic foxes. [sidenote: voyage of emilian yugoff.] emilian yugoff, a merchant of yakutsk, obtained from the senate of st. petersburg the permission of fitting out four vessels for himself and his associates. he procured, at the same time, the exclusive privilege of hunting sea-otters upon beering's and copper island during these expeditions; and for this monopoly he agreed to deliver to the customs the tenth of the furs. october , , he put to sea from bolcheresk, in the sloop john, manned with twenty-five russians and kamtchadals, and two cossacs: he was soon overtaken by a storm, and the vessel driven on shore between the mouths of the rivers kronotsk and tschasminsk. october , he again set sail. he had been commanded to take on board some officers of the russian navy; and, as he disobeyed this injunction, the chancery of irkutsk issued an order to confiscate his ship and cargo upon his return. the ship returned on the d of july, , to new kamtchatkoi ostrog, laden with the skins of old sea-otters, of cub sea-otters, of cubs of sea-bears, and of arctic fox-skins: of the latter were white, and black. these furs were procured upon beering's and copper island. yugoff himself died upon the last-mentioned island. the cargo of the ship was, according to the above-mentioned order, sealed and properly secured. but as it appeared that certain persons had deposited money in yugoff's hand, for the purpose of equipping a second vessel, the crown delivered up the confiscated cargo, after reserving the third part according to the original stipulation. this kind of charter-company, if it may be so called, being soon dissolved for misconduct and want of sufficient stock, other merchants were allowed the privilege of fitting out vessels, even before the return of yugoff's ship; and these persons were more fortunate in making new discoveries than the above-mentioned monopolist. [sidenote: voyage of the boris and glebb.] nikiphor trapesnikoff, a merchant of irkutsk, obtained the permission of sending out a ship, called the boris and glebb, upon the condition of paying, besides the tribute which might be exacted, the tenth of all the furs. the cossac sila sheffyrin went on board this vessel for the purpose of collecting the tribute. they sailed in august, , from the kamtchatka river; and re-entered it the th of the same month, , with a large cargo of furs. in the spring of the same year, they had touched upon an unknown island, probably one of the aleütians, where several of the inhabitants were prevailed upon to pay a tribute of sea-otter skins. the names of the islanders who had been made tributary, were igya, oeknu, ogogoektack, shabukiauck, alak, tutun, ononushan, rotogèi, tschinitu, vatsch, ashagat, avyjanishaga, unashayupu, lak, yanshugalik, umgalikan, shati, kyipago, and oloshkot[ ]; another aleütian had contributed three sea-otters. they brought with them best sea-otter skins, of the second, and of the third sort, female and middle aged, and medwedki or young ones. [footnote : the author here remarks in a note, that the proper names of the islanders mentioned in this place, and in other parts, bear a surprising resemblance, both in their sound and termination, to those of the greenlanders.] [sidenote: voyage of andrew tolstyk to the aleütian isles, .] andrew tolstyk, a merchant of selenginsk, having obtained permission from the chancery of bolsheretsk, refitted the same ship which had made a former voyage; he sailed from kamtchatka august the th, , and returned july the d, . according to the commander's account, the ship lay at anchor from the th of september, , to the th of may, , before beering's island, where they caught only sea-otters. from thence they made to those aleütian islands, which were[ ] first discovered by nevodsikoff, and slew there old and middle-aged sea-otters, and cubs; besides which, their cargo consisted of the skins of blue foxes, and of young sea-bears. [footnote : see chap. ii.] the inhabitants of these islands appeared to have never before paid tribute; and seemed to be a-kin to the tschuktski tribe, their women being ornamented with different figures sewed into the skin in the manner of that people, and of the tungusians of siberia. they differed however from them, by having two small holes cut through the bottom of their under-lips, through each of which they pass a bit of the sea-horse tush, worked into the form of a tooth, with a small button at one end to keep it within the mouth when it is placed in the hole. they had killed, without being provoked, two of the kamtchadals who belonged to the ship. upon the third island some inhabitants had payed tribute; their names were reported to be anitin, altakukor, and aleshkut, with his son atschelap. the weapons of the whole island consisted of no more than twelve spears pointed with flint, and one dart of bone pointed with the same; and the russians observed in the possession of the natives two figures, carved out of wood, resembling sea-lions. [sidenote: voyage of vorobieff, .] august , , the vessel simeon and john, fitted out by the above-mentioned wsevidoff, agent for the russian merchant a. rybenskoi, and manned with fourteen russians (who were partly merchants and partly hunters) and thirty kamtchadals, sailed out for the discovery of new islands, under the command of the cossac vorobieff. they were driven by a violent current and tempestuous weather to a small desert island, whose position is not determined; but which was probably one of those that lie near beering's island. the ship being so shattered by the storm, that it was no longer in a condition to keep the sea, vorobieff built another small vessel with drift-wood, which he called jeremiah; in which he arrived at kamtchatka in autumn, . upon the above-mentioned island were caught old and cub sea-otters, blue foxes, black sea-bears, and kotiki, or cub sea-bears. a voyage made about this time from anadyrsk deserves to be mentioned. [sidenote: voyage of novikoff and bacchoff from anadyrsk.] august , , simeon novikoff of yakutsk, and ivan bacchoff of ustyug, agents for ivan shilkin, sailed from anadyrsk into the mouth of the kamtchatka river. they assigned the insecurity of the roads as their reason for coming from anadyrsk to kamtchatka by sea; on this account, having determined to risk all the dangers of a sea voyage, they built a vessel one hundred and thirty versts above anadyr, after having employed two years and five months in its construction. [sidenote: narrative of te voyage.] the narrative of their expedition is as follows. in , they sailed down the river anadyr, and through two bays, called kopeikina and onemenskaya, where they found many sand banks, but passed round them without difficulty. from thence they steered into the exterior gulph, and waited for a favourable wind. here they saw several tschutski, who appeared upon the heights singly and not in bodies, as if to reconnoitre; which made them cautious. they had descended the river and its bays in nine days. in passing the large opening of the exterior bay, they steered between the beach, that lies to the left, and a rock near it; where, at about an hundred and twenty yards from the rock, the depth of water is from three to four fathoms. from the opening they steered e. s. e. about fifty versts, in about four fathom water; then doubled a sandy point, which runs out directly against the tshuktshi coast, and thus reached the open sea. from the th of july to the th, they were driven about by tempestuous winds, at no great distance from the mouth of the anadyr; and ran up the small river katirka, upon whose banks dwell the koriacs, a people tributary to russia. the mouth of the river is from sixty to eighty yards broad, from three to four fathoms deep, and abounds in fish. from thence they put again to sea, and after having beat about for some time, they at length reached beering's island. [sidenote: shipwreck upon beering's island.] here they lay at anchor from the th of september to the th of october, when a violent storm blowing right from the sea, drove the vessel upon the rocks, and dashed her to pieces. the crew however were saved: and now they looked out for the remains of beering's wreck, in order to employ the materials for the constructing of a boat. they found indeed some remaining materials, but almost entirely rotten, and the iron-work corroded with rust. having selected however the best cables, and what iron-work was immediately necessary, and collected drift-wood during the winter, they built with great difficulty a small boat, whose keel was only seventeen russian ells and an half long, and which they named capiton. in this they put to sea, and sailed in search of an unknown island, which they thought they saw lying north-east; but finding themselves mistaken, they tacked about, and stood far copper island: from thence they sailed to kamtchatka, where they arrived at the time above-mentioned. the new constructed vessel was granted in property to ivan shilkin as some compensation for his losses, and with the privilege of employing it in a future expedition to the new discovered islands. accordingly he sailed therein on the th of october, , with a crew of twenty russians, and the same number of kamtchadals: he was accompanied by studentzoff a cossac, who was sent to collect the tribute for the crown. an account of this expedition will be given hereafter[ ]. [footnote : see chap. v.] [sidenote: voyage of durneff, in the st. nicholas, .] august, , nikiphor trapesnikoff fitted out the shitik st. nicholas, which sailed from kamtchatka under the command of the cossac kodion durneff. he first touched at two of the aleütian isles, and afterwards upon a third, which had not been yet discovered. he returned to kamtchatka in . his cargo consisted of the skins of sea-otters, of female, and cubs; besides which, the crew had obtained in barter from the islanders the skins of sea-otters, of female ditto, and cubs. [sidenote: narrative of the voyage.] from an account delivered in the d of may, , by durneff and sheffyrin, who was sent as collector of the tributes, it appears that they sailed in ten days as far as ataku, one of the aleütian islands; that they remained there until the year , and lived upon amicable terms with the natives. [sidenote: description of the aleütian isles.] the second island, which is nearest to ataku, and which contains the greatest number of inhabitants, is called agataku; and the third shemya: they lie from forty to fifty versts asunder. [sidenote: account of inhabitants.] upon all the three islands there are (exclusive of children) but sixty males, whom they made tributary. the inhabitants live upon roots which grow wild, and sea animals: they do not employ themselves in catching fish, although the rivers abound with all kinds of salmon, and the sea with turbot. their cloaths are made of the skins of birds and of sea-otters. the toigon or chief of the first island informed them by means of a boy, who understood the russian language, that eastward there are three large and well peopled islands, ibiya, ricksa, and olas, whose inhabitants speak a different language. sheffyrin and durneff found upon the island three round copper plates, with some letters engraved upon them, and ornamented with foliage, which the waves had cast upon the shore: they brought them, together with other trifling curiosities, which they had procured from the natives, to new kamtchatkoi ostrog. another ship built of larchwood by the same trapesnikoff, which sailed in under the conduct of alexei drusinin a merchant of kursk, had been wrecked at beering's island, where the crew constructed another vessel out of the wreck, which they named abraham. in this vessel they bore away for the more distant islands; but being forced back by contrary winds to the same island, and meeting with the st. nicholas upon the point of sailing for the aleütian isles, they embarked on that ship, after having left the new constructed vessel under the care of four of their own sailors. the crew had slain upon beering's island five sea-otters, arctic foxes, and sea-bears: their share of the furs, during their expedition in the st. nicholas, amounted to the skins of sea-otters, and of cubs, exclusive of sea-otter-skins, which they procured by barter. chap. iv. voyages from to . some of the further _aleütian_ or _fox islands_ touched at by _serebranikoff's_ vessel.--some account of the natives. three vessels were fitted out for the islands in , one by cholodiloff, a second by serebranikoff agent for the merchant rybenskoy, and the third by ivan krassilnikoff a merchant of kamtchatka. [sidenote: cholodiloff's ship sails from kamchatka .] cholodiloff's ship sailed from kamtchatka, the th of august, manned with thirty-four men; and anchored the th before beering's island, where they proposed to winter, in order to lay-in a flock of provisions: as they were attempting to land, the boat overset, and nine of the crew were drowned. june , , they stood out to sea in quest of new discoveries: the weather however proving stormy and foggy, and the ship springing a leak, they were all in danger of perishing: in this situation they unexpectedly reached one of the aleütian islands, were they lay from the th of september until the th of july, . in the autumn of they were joined by a kamtchadal, and a koriac: these persons, together with four others, had deserted from trapesnikoff's crew; and had remained upon the island in order to catch sea-otters for their own profit. four of these deserters were killed by the islanders for having debauched their wives: but as the two persons above-mentioned were not guilty of the same disorderly conduct, the inhabitants supplied them with women, and lived with them upon the best terms. the crew slew upon this island above sea-otters, and came back safe to kamtchatka in autumn . [sidenote: departure of serebranikoff's vessel.] serebranikoff's vessel sailed in july , manned also with thirty-four russians and kamtchadals: they discovered several new islands, which were probably some of the more distant ones; but were not so fortunate in hunting sea-otters as cholodiloff's crew. they steered s. e. and on the th of august anchored under an unknown island; whose inhabitants spoke a language they did not understand. here they proposed looking out for a safe harbour; but were prevented by the coming on of a sudden storm, which carried away their anchor. the ship being tost about for several days towards the east, they discovered not far from the first island four others: still more to the east three other islands appeared in sight; but on neither of these were they able to land. [sidenote: shipwrecked upon one of the more distant islands.] the vessel continued driving until the d of september, and was considerably shattered, when they fortunately came near an island and cast anchor before it; they were however again forced from this station, the vessel wrecked upon the coast, and the crew with difficulty reached the shore. this island seemed to be right opposite to katyrskoi noss in the peninsula of kamtchatka, and near it they saw three others. towards the end of september demitri trophin, accompanied with nine men, went out in the boat upon an hunting and reconnoitring party: they were attacked by a large body of inhabitants, who hurled darts from a small wooden engine, and wounded one of the company. the first fire however drove them back; and although they returned several times to the attack in numerous bodies, yet they were always repulsed without difficulty. [sidenote: account of the inhabitants.] these savages mark and colour their faces like the islanders above-mentioned; and also thrust pieces of bone through holes made in their under-lips. soon afterwards the russians were joined in a friendly manner by ten islanders, who brought the flesh of sea-animals and of sea-otters; this present was the more welcome, as they had lived for some time upon nothing but small shell-fish and roots; and had suffered greatly from hunger. several toys were in return distributed among the savages. [sidenote: the crew construct another vessel, and return to kamtchatka.] the russians remained until june, , upon this island: at that time they departed in a small vessel, constructed from the remains of the wreck, and called the st. peter and paul: in this they landed at katyrskoi noss; where having collected sea-horse teeth, they got safe to the mouth of the kamtchatka river. during this voyage twelve kamtchadals deserted; of whom six were slain, together with a female inhabitant, upon one of the most distant islands. the remainder, upon their return to kamtchatka, were examined; and from them the following circumstances came to light. the island, where the ship was wrecked, is about versts long, and broad. around it lie twelve other islands of different sizes, from five to ten versts distant from each other. eight of them appear to be no more than five versts long. all these islands contain about a thousand souls. the dwellings of the inhabitants are provided with no other furniture than benches, and mats of platted grass[ ]. their dress consists of a kind of shirt made of bird-skins, and of an upper garment of intestines stitched together; they wear wooden caps, ornamented with a small piece of board projecting forwards, as it seemed, for a defence against the arrows. they are all provided with stone knives, and a few of them possess iron ones: their only weapons are arrows with points of bone or flint, which they shoot from a wooden instrument. there are no trees upon the island: it produces however the cow-parsnip[ ], which grows at kamtchatka. the climate is by no means severe, for the snow does not lie upon the ground above a month in the year. [footnote : matten aus einem gevissen krautgeflochten.] [footnote : heracleum.] [sidenote: departure of krassilnikoff's vessel.] krassilnikoff's vessel sailed in , and anchored on the th of october before beering's island; where all the ships which make to the new discovered islands are accustomed to winter, in order to procure a stock of salted provisions from the sea-cows and other amphibious animals, that are found in great abundance. here they refitted the vessel, which had been damaged by driving upon her anchor; and having laid in a sufficient store of all necessaries, weighed the st of august, . the th they were in sight of an island, whose coast was lined with such a number of inhabitants, that they durst not venture ashore. accordingly they stood out to sea, and being overtaken by a storm, they were reduced to great distress for want of water; at length they were driven upon copper island, where they landed; and having taken in wood and water, they again set sail. [sidenote: shipwrecked upon copper island.] they were beat back however by contrary winds, and dropped both their anchors near the shore; but the storm increasing at night, both the cables were broken, and the ship dashed to pieces upon the coast. all the crew were fortunately saved; and means were found to get ashore the ship's tackle, ammunition, guns, and the remains of the wreck; the provisions, however, were mostly spoiled. here they were exposed to a variety of misfortunes; three of them were drowned on the th of october, as they were going to hunt; others almost perished with hunger, having no nourishment but small shell-fish and roots. on the th of december great part of the ship's tackle, and all the wood, which they had collected from the wreck, was washed away during an high sea. notwithstanding their distresses, they continued their hunting parties, and caught sea-otters, together with blue foxes. [sidenote: the crew reach beering's island in two baidars.] in spring they put to sea for beering's island in two baidars, carrying with them all the ammunition, fire-arms, and remaining tackle. having reached that island, they found the small vessel abraham, under the care of the four sailors who had been left ashore by the crew of trapesnikoff's ship: but as that vessel was not large enough to contain the whole number, together with their cargo of furs, they staid until serebranikoff's and tolstyk's vessels arrived. these took in eleven of the crew, with their part of the furs. twelve remained at beering's island, where they killed great numbers of arctic foxes, and returned to kamtchatka in the abraham, excepting two, who joined shilkin's crew. chap. v. voyages from to . [sidenote: voyage of andrean tolstyk in to the aleütian isles.] september , , the vessel andrean and natalia, fitted out by andrean tolstyk, merchant of selenginsk, and manned with thirty-eight russians and kamtchadals, sailed from the mouth of the kamtchatka river. the autumnal storms coming on, and a scarcity of provisions ensuing, they made to beering's island, where they continued until the th of june . as no sea-otters came on shore that winter, they killed nothing but seals, sea-lions, and sea-cows; whose flesh served them for provision, and their skins for the coverings of baidars. june , , they weighed anchor, and after eleven days sailing came to ataku, one of the aleütian isles discovered by nevodsikoff. here they found the inhabitants, as well of that, as of the other two islands, assembled; these islanders had just taken leave of the crew of trapesnikoff's vessel, which had sailed for kamtchatka. the russians seized this opportunity of persuading them to pay tribute; with this view they beckoned the toigon, whose name was tunulgasen: the latter recollected one of the crew, a koriac, who had formerly been left upon these islands, and who knew something of their language. a copper kettle, a fur and cloth coat, a pair of breeches, stockings and boots, were bestowed upon this chief, who was prevailed upon by these presents to pay tribute. upon his departure for his own island, he left behind him three women and a boy, in order to be taught the russian language, which the latter very soon learned. the russians wintered upon this island, and divided themselves, as usual, into different hunting parties: they were compelled, by stormy weather, to remain there until the th of june, : before they went away, the above-mentioned chief returned with his family, and paid a year's tribute. this vessel brought to kamtchatka the most circumstantial account of the aleütian isles which had been yet received. [sidenote: account of those islands.] the two largest contained at that time about fifty males, with whom the russians had lived in great harmony. they heard of a fourth island, lying at some distance from the third, called by the natives iviya, but which they did not reach on account of the tempestuous weather. the first island is about an hundred versts long and from five to twenty broad. they esteemed the distance from the first to the second, which lies east by south, to be about thirty versts, and about forty from the latter to the third, which stands south east. the original dress of the islanders was made of the skins of birds, sea-otters and seals, which were tanned; but the greatest part had procured from the russians dog-skin coats, and under-garments of sheep-skin, which they were very fond of. they are represented as naturally talkative, quick of apprehension, and much attached to the russians. their dwellings are hollowed in the ground, and covered with wooden roofs resembling the huts in the peninsula of kamtchatka. their principal food is the flesh of sea animals, which they harpoon with their bone lances; they also feed upon several species of roots and berries: namely [ ]cloud-berries, crake-berries, bilberries, and services. the rivulets abound with salmon, and other fish of the trout kind similar to those of kamtchatka; and the sea with turbot, which are caught with bone hooks. [footnote : rubus chamæmorus--empetrum--myrtillus--sorbus.] these islands produce quantities of small osiers and underwood, but no large trees: the sea however drives ashore fir and larch, sufficient for the construction of their huts. there are a great number of arctic foxes upon the first island, as well as sea-otters; and the shores, during stormy weather, are covered with wild geese and ducks. the russians, according to the order of the chancery of bolcheretsk, endeavoured to persuade the toigon of these islands to accompany them to kamtchatka, but without success: upon their departure they distributed among the islanders some linen, and thirteen nets for the purpose of catching sea-otters, which were very thankfully received. this vessel brought to kamtchatka the skins of old and young sea-otters, of old and young arctic foxes, and of medwedki or cubs of sea-otters. in the year , ivan nikiphoroff, a merchant of moscow, sent out a vessel: but we have no further account of this voyage, than that she sailed to the fox islands, at least as far as umnak. [sidenote: voyage of ivan shilkin in the capiton .] the small vessel capiton, the same that was built upon beering's island, and which was given to the merchant [ ]ivan shilkin, put to sea september , , carrying on board the cossac ignatius studentsoff, who has given an account of the voyage. [footnote : see chap. iii.] they had not long sailed, before they were driven back to the shore of kamtchatka by stress of weather, and the vessel stranded; by which accident they lost the rudder and one of the crew. this misfortune prevented them from putting to sea again until the following year, with thirty-nine of the original crew, several persons being left behind on account of sickness. they made directly to beering's island, where they took up two of krasilnikoff's crew[ ], who had been shipwrecked. they again set sail in august of the same year, and touched at the nearest aleütian isles, after suffering greatly from storms. they then continued their course to the remoter islands lying between east and south east; and having passed by the first, they anchored before the second. a boat being immediately sent out towards the shore, the crew was attacked by a numerous body of islanders in so sudden a manner, that they had scarcely time to secure themselves by returning to the vessel. they had no sooner got aboard, than a violent gale of wind blowing from the shore broke the cable, and drove them out to sea. [sidenote: shipwrecked upon one of the fox islands.] the weather became suddenly thick and foggy; and under these circumstances the vessel was forced upon a small island at no great distance from the other, and shipwrecked. the crew got to shore with difficulty, and were able to save nothing but the fire-arms and ammunition. [footnote : see chap. iv.] they had scarcely got to land, before they were beset by a number of savages, rowing in baidars from the western point of the island. this attack was the more to be dreaded, because several of the russians were disabled by cold and wet; and there remained only fifteen capable of defending themselves. they advanced however without hesitation to the islanders; and one nicholas tsiuproff (who had a slight knowledge of their language) accosted and endeavoured to sooth them, but without success. for upon their approach the savages gave a sudden shout, and saluting them at the same time with a volley of darts, wounded one person in the hand. upon this the russians fired, killed two of the assailants, and forced the remainder to retire: and although a fresh body appeared in sight, as if they were coming to the assistance of their companions, yet no new attack was made. soon afterwards the savages left the island, and rowed across the strait. from the th of september to the d of april, they underwent all the extremities of famine: during that period their best fare was shell-fish and roots; and they were even at times reduced to still the cravings of their appetite with the leather, which the waves washed ashore from the wreck. seventeen died of hunger, and the rest would soon have followed their companions, if they had not fortunately discovered a dead whale, which the sea had cast ashore. [sidenote: the crew construct a small vessel, and are again shipwrecked.] they remained upon this island another winter, where they slew sea-otters: and having built a small vessel out of the remains of the wreck, they put to sea in the beginning of summer . they had scarcely reached one of the aleütian islands, where serebranikoff's vessel lay at anchor, when they were again shipwrecked, and lost all the remaining tackle and furs. only thirteen of the crew now remained, who returned on board the above-mentioned vessel to kamtchatka july . chap. vi. voyages in , , and --to the _fox islands_--in the _st. vladimir_, fitted out by _trapesnikoff_--and in the _gabriel_, by _betshevin_--the latter under the command of _pushkareff_ sails to _alaksu_ or _alachskak_, one of the remotest eastern islands hitherto visited--some account of its inhabitants, and productions, which latter are different from those of the more western islands. [sidenote: voyage of the st. vladimir, commanded by paikoff, .] september , the merchant simeon krasilnikoff and nikiphor trapesnikoff fitted out two vessels for the purpose of catching sea-otters. one of these vessels, called the st. vladimir, sailed the th under the command of demetri paikoff, carrying on board the cossac sila shaffyrin as collector of the tribute, and a crew of forty-five men. in twenty-four hours they reached beering's island, where they wintered. july , , they steered towards the south in order to discover land, but being disappointed, they bore away to the north for the aleütian isles: being prevented however by contrary winds from reaching them, they sailed streight towards the distant islands, which are known at present under the name of lyssie ostrova or the fox islands. [sidenote: arrival at the fox island.] september , they reached the first of these, called by the natives atchu, and by the russians goreloi or the burnt island: but as the coasts were very steep and craggy, they made to amlach, lying at a small distance, where they determined to pass the winter. they divided themselves accordingly into three parties; the first, at the head of which was alexèy drusinin, went over to a small island called in the journal sitkin; the cossac shaffyrin led the second, consisting of ten persons, to the island atach; and simeon polevoi remained aboard with the rest of the crew. all these islands were well peopled; the men had bones thrust through their ears, under lips, and gristle of their noses; and the faces of the women were marked with blackish streaks made with a needle and thread in the skin, in the same manner as a cossac one of the crew had observed before upon some of the tschutski. the inhabitants had no iron; the points of their darts and lances were tipped with bone and flint. they at first imagined, that amlach was uninhabited; but in one of their hunting parties they found a boy of eight years old, whom they brought with them: they gave him the name of hermolai, and taught him the russian language, that he might serve as an interpreter. after penetrating further they discovered an hut, wherein were two women, four men, and as many boys, whom they treated kindly, and employed in hunting, fishing, and in digging of roots. this kind behaviour encouraged others to pay frequent visits, and to exchange fish and flesh for goat's hair, horses manes, and glass beads. they procured also four other islanders with their wives, who dug roots for them: and thus the winter passed away without any disturbance. in the spring the hunting parties returned; during these excursions one man alone was killed upon the island atach, and his fire-arms taken away by the natives. june , the same parties were sent again to the same islands. shaffyrin, who headed one of the parties, was soon afterwards killed, with eleven men, by the inhabitants of atach, but for what reason is not known.--drusinin received the first information of this massacre from some inhabitants of sitkin, where he then was; and immediately set out with the remaining hunters to join their companions, who were left on board. although he succeeded in regaining the vessel, their number was by this time so considerably reduced that their situation appeared very dangerous: he was soon however relieved from his apprehensions by the arrival of the merchant betshevin's vessel at the island of atchu[ ]. the two crews entered into partnership: the st. vladimir received twenty-two men, and transferred eleven of her own to the other vessel. the former wintered at amlach, and the latter continued at anchor before atchu. [footnote : atach and atchu are two names for the same island, called also by the russians goreloi or burnt island.] [sidenote: voyage of pushkareff, .] this vessel, fitted out at the expence of betshevin, a merchant of irkutsk, was called gabriel; and put to sea from the mouth of the bolshaia reka july st, . she was manned with forty russians and twenty kamtchadals, and carried on board gabriel pushkareff, of the garrison of ochotsk, andrew shdanoff, jacob sharypoff, prokopèi lobashkoff, together with nikiphor golodoff, and aphanassei oskoloff, betshevin's agents. having sailed through the second strait of the kuril isles, they reached the aleütian isles on the th of august. they stood out from thence in order to make new discoveries among those more remote islands, which lie in one continued chain to the extent of degrees of longitude. [sidenote: reaches atchu, one of the fox islands.] september they reached atchu, or burnt island, and found the above-mentioned ship the st. vladimir, lying twenty versts from that island, before amlach, in danger of being attacked by the islanders. they immediately joined crews in order to enable the enfeebled company of the st. vladimir to continue hunting; and as it is usual in such cases, entered into a contract for the division of the profit. during that winter the two crews killed partly upon siguyam, about sea otters of different sizes, about medwedki or cubs, some river otters, above red, greyish, and black foxes, and collected twelve pood of sea-horse teeth. [sidenote: departs from thence.] in june, of the following year, the two crews were distributed equally on board the two vessels: krassilnikoff's remained at amlach, with an intention of returning to kamtchatka, and belshevin's put to sea from atchu in quest of other islands. they touched first at umnak where they met nikiphoroff's vessel. here they took in wood and water, and repaired their sails: they then sailed to the most remote island alaksu[ ], or alachshak, where, having laid up the ship in a bay, they built huts, and made preparations for wintering. [sidenote: winters upon alaksu.] this island was very well inhabited, and the natives behaved at first in a very friendly manner, for they trafficked with the russians, and even delivered up nine of their children as hostages; but such was the lawless and irregular behaviour of the crew, that the islanders were soon irritated and provoked to hostilities. [footnote : this is probably the same island which is laid down in krenitzin's chart under the name of alaxa.] in january , golodoff and pushkareff went with a party of twenty men along the shore; and, as they were attempting to violate some girls upon the island unyumga, were surprised by a numerous body of the natives: golodoff and another russian were killed, and three were wounded. not long afterwards the watch of the crew was suddenly attacked by the islanders; four men were slain upon the spot, as many wounded, and the huts reduced to ashes. may , lobaschkoff and another russian were killed, as they were going to bathe in the warm springs, which lie about five versts from the haven: upon which seven of the hostages were put to death. the same month the natives attempted to surprise the russians in their huts; but being fortunately discovered in time were repulsed by means of the fire arms. at length the russians, finding themselves in continual danger from these attempts, weighed anchor, and sailed for umnak, where they took up two inhabitants with their wives and children, in order to shew them other islands. they were prevented however by tempestuous weather from reaching them; and were driven out to sea westward with such violence, that all their sails were carried away: at length on the d of september they struck against land, which they took for the peninsula of kamtchatka; and they found it to be the district of stobolikoi ostrog. six men were immediately dispatched in the small boat and two baidars to land: they carried with them several girls (who had been brought from the new discovered islands) in order to gather berries. mean while the crew endeavoured to ply the ship to the windward. when the boat returned, those on board were scarcely able, on account of the storm, to row to the ship, and to catch hold of a rope, which was flung out to them. two men remained with the baidars, and were afterwards carried by some kamtchadals to new kamtchatkoi ostrog. the ship without one sail remaining was driven along the coast of kamtchatka towards avatcha, and about seventy versts from that harbour ran into the bay of kalatzoff on the th of september. their cargo consisted of the skins of old and young sea-otters, and of foxes. pushkareff and his crew had during this voyage behaved with such inhumanity towards the islanders, that they were brought to trial in the year ; and the above-mentioned account is taken from the concurring evidence of several witnesses. it appears also, that they brought away from atchu and amleg two aleütian men and three boys, ivan an aleütian interpreter, and above twenty women and girls whom they debauched. ivan, and one of the boys whom they called moses, were the only persons who arrived at kamtchatka. upon their first approach to that coast, fourteen women were sent ashore to dig roots and to gather berries. of these, two ran away, and a third was killed, as they were returning to the ship by one gorelin: upon this the others in a fit of despair leaped into the sea and were drowned. all the remaing aleütians, excepting the two persons above-mentioned, were immediately thrown overboard by pushkareff's order. the account which follows, although it is found in the depositions, deserves not to be entirely credited in all particulars. [sidenote: account of the inhabitants of alacksu.] the natives of the above-mentioned islands are very tall and strongly made. they make their cloaths of the skins of birds; and thrust bones through their under-lips by way of ornament. they were said to strike their noses until they bled, in order to suck the blood; but we are informed from subsequent accounts, that the blood thus drawn from themselves was intended for other purposes[ ]. they were accused even of murdering their own children in order to drink their blood; but this is undoubtedly an invention of the criminals, who represented the islanders in the most hideous colours, in order to excuse their own cruelties. their dwellings under-ground are similar to those of the kamtchadals; and have several openings on the sides, through which they make their escape when the principal entrance is beset by an enemy. their weapons consist of arrows and lances pointed with bone, which they dart at a considerable distance. [footnote : it appears in the last chapter of this translation, that the islanders are accustomed to glue on the point of their darts with blood; and that this was the real motive to the practice mentioned in the text.] [sidenote: animals.] the island alaksu is said to contain rein-deer, bears, wild boars, wolves, otters, and a species of dogs with long ears, which are very fierce and wild. and as the greatest part of these animals are not found upon those fox islands which lie nearer to the west, this circumstance seems to prove that alaksu is situated at no great distance from the continent of america. as to red, black, and grey foxes, there is so large a quantity, that they are seen in herds of ten or twenty at a time. wood is driven upon the coast in great abundance. the island produces no large trees, having only some underwood, and a great variety of bulbs, roots, and berries. the coasts are frequented by large flocks of sea-birds, the same which are observed upon the shore of the sea of penshinsk. [sidenote: voyage of the peter and paul to the aleütian islands, .] august , , the peter and paul, fitted out at the expence of the merchant rybenskoi by his agent andrew serebranikoff, and manned with thirty-three persons, set sail from the mouth of the kamtchatka river. they steered southwards until the th of september without seeing any land, when they stood for the aleütian isles, one of which they reached the th of september. they remained there until the th of june, ; during which time they killed upon this and the two other islands old and young sea-otters, and obtained more by bartering with the islanders. the cossac minyachin, who was on board as collector of the tribute, calls in his account the first island by the russian name of krugloi, or round island, which he supposes to be about sixty versts in circumference: the largest island lies thirty versts from thence, and is about an hundred and fifty round: the smallest is about thirty versts from the latter, and is forty in circumference. these three islands contain several high rocky mountains. the number of inhabitants were computed to be about forty-two men, without reckoning women and children. chap. vii. voyage of _andrean tolstyk_ in the _st. andrean_ and _natalia_--discovery of some new islands called _andreanoffskye ostrova_--description of six of those islands. [sidenote: voyage of andrean tolstyk in the st. andrean and natalia, .] the most remarkable voyage hitherto made is that of the st. andrean and natalia, of which the following extract is drawn from the journals of the two cossacs, peter wasyutinskoi and maxim lasaroff. this vessel, fitted out by the above-mentioned merchant andrean tolstyk, weighed from the mouth of the kamtchatka river september , ; she stood out to sea right eastwards, and on the th reached beering's island. there she lay at anchor in a bay, from whence the crew brought all the tackle and lading ashore. soon afterwards they were driven upon the shore by a violent autumnal storm, without any other damage than the loss of an anchor. here they passed the winter; and having refitted their vessel, put to sea june , : they passed by copper island, which lies about an hundred and fifty versts from the former, and steered s. e. towards the aleütian isles, which they did not reach before the th of august. [sidenote: reaches ayagh, one of the andreanoffikye islands.] they cast anchor in an open bay near attak, in order to procure an interpreter from the toigon tunulgasen; but the latter being dead, they sent presents to the toigon bakutun. as there were already three ships lying at anchor before this island, on the th they again stood out to sea in quest of the more distant islands, for the purpose of exacting a tribute. they carried on board a relation of the toigon bakutun, who had a slight knowledge of the russian language. they steered n. e. and n. e. by e. and were driven, on the th, by a high gale of wind towards an island, before which they immediately cast anchor. the following morning the two cossacs with a party of eight persons went ashore to reconnoitre the island; they saw no inhabitants. august , the vessel was brought into a safe bay. the next day some of the crew were sent ashore to procure wood, that the ship might be refitted; but there were no large trees to be met with upon the whole island. lasaroff, who was one of the party, had been there before in serebranikoff's vessel: he called the island ayagh or kayachu; and another, which lay about the distance of twenty versts, kanaga. as they were returning to the ship, they saw two islanders rowing in small canoes towards kanaga, one of whom had served as an interpreter, and was known to lasaroff. the latter accordingly made them a present of some fresh provision, which the others gratefully accepted, and then continued their course across the strait to kanaga. soon afterwards lasaroff and eight men rowed over to that island, and having invited the toigon, who was a relation of the above-mentioned interpreter, to pay them a visit at kayachu, they immediately returned to the ship. near the place where they lay at anchor, a rivulet falls into the bay; it flows from a lake that is about two or three versts in circumference, and which is formed from a number of small springs. its course is about eight versts long; and in summer several species of salmon and other fish, similar to those which are found at kamtchatka, ascend the stream as far as the lake. lasaroff was employed in fishing in this rivulet, when the toigon of kanaga, accompanied with a considerable number of the natives in fifteen baidars, arrived at the ship: he was hospitably entertained, and received several presents. the russians seized this opportunity of persuading the islanders to acknowledge themselves subject to the empress, and to pay a regular tribute; to which they made no great objection. by means of the interpreter, the following information was obtained from the toigon. the natives chiefly subsist upon dried fish and other sea animals. they catch [ ]turbot of a very large size, and take seals by means of harpoons, to which they fasten bladders. they fish for cod with bone hooks, and lines made of a long and tough species of sea-weed, which they dip in fresh water and draw out to the size of a fine packthread. [footnote : the author adds, that these turbot [paltus] weigh occasionally seven or eight pood.] as soon as the vessel was laid up in a secure place, tolstyk, vassyutin and lasaroff, with several others, went in four baidars to kanaga. the first remained upon that island, but the two others rowed in two baidars to tsetchina, which is separated from kanaga by a strait about seven versts in breadth: the islanders received them amicably, and promised to pay tribute. the several parties returned all safe to kayachu, without having procured any furs. soon afterwards tolstyk dispatched some hunters in four baidars to tagalak, atchu, and amlach, which lay to the east of kayachu: none of these party met with any opposition from the natives: they accordingly remained with great tranquillity upon these several islands until the year . their success in hunting was not however very great; for they caught no more than full grown sea-otters, middle-aged, and cubs. [sidenote: description of the andreanoffskye islands.] the following is lasaroff's description of the above-mentioned six islands[ ] which lie in a chain somewhat to the north west of the fox islands, and must not be blended with them. the first certain account was brought by this vessel, the st. andrean and natalia, from whence they are called the andreanoffskie ostrova or the islands of st. andrean. [footnote : these are the six islands described by mr. stæhlin in his description of the new archipelago. see appendix i. n^o. v.] [sidenote: ayagh.] ayagh is about an hundred and fifty versts in circumference: it contains several high and rocky mountains, the intervals of which are bare heath and moor ground: not one forest tree is to be found upon the whole island. the vegetables seem for the most part like those which grow in kamtchatka. of berries there are found [ ]crow or crake-berries and the larger sort of bilberries, but in small quantities. of the roots of burnet and all kinds of snake weed, there is such abundance as to afford, in case of necessity, a plentiful provision for the inhabitants. the above-mentioned rivulet is the only one upon the island. the number of inhabitants cannot sufficiently be ascertained, because the natives pass continually from island to island in their baidars. [footnote : empetrum, vaccin. uliginosum, sanguisorba, & bistorta.] [sidenote: kanaga.] kanaga stands west from ayagh, and is two hundred versts in circumference. it contains an high volcano where the natives find sulphur in summer. at the foot of this mountain are hot springs, wherein they occasionally boil their provision. there is no rivulet upon this island; and the low grounds are similar to those of ayagh. the inhabitants are reckoned about two hundred souls. [sidenote: tsetchina.] tsetchina lies eastward about forty versts from kanaga, and is about eighty in circumference. it is full of rocky mountains, of which the bielaia sopka, or the white peak, is the highest. in the valley there are also some warm springs, but no rivulet abounding in fish: the island contains only four families. [sidenote: tagalak.] tagalak is forty versts in circumference, ten east from tsetchina: it contains a few rocks, but neither rivulets with fish, nor any vegetable production fit for nourishment. the coasts are rocky, and dangerous to approach in baidars. this island is also inhabited by no more than four families. [sidenote: atchu.] atchu lies in the same position forty versts distant from tagalak, and is about three hundred in circumference: near it is an harbour, where ships may ride securely at anchor. it contains many rocky mountains; and several small rivulets that fall into the sea, and of which one running eastwards abounds in fish. the roots which have just before been mentioned, and bulbs of white lilies, are found there in plenty. its inhabitants amount to about sixty souls. [sidenote: amlach.] amlach is a mountainous island standing to the east more than seven versts from atchu, and is also three hundred in circumference. it contains the same number of inhabitants as atchu, has a commodious haven, and produces roots in abundance. of several small rivulets there is one only which flows towards the north, that contains any fish. besides these a cluster of other islands were observed stretching farther to the east, which were not touched upon. [sidenote: account of the inhabitants.] the inhabitants of these six islands are tributary to russia. they live in holes dug in the earth, in which they make no fires even in winter. their clothes are made like shirts, of the skins of the [ ]guillinot and puffin, which they catch with springes. over these in rainy weather they wear an upper garment, made of the bladders and other dried intestines of seals and sea-lions oiled and stitched together. they catch cod and turbot with bone hooks, and eat them raw. as they never lay in a store of provision, they suffer greatly from hunger in stormy weather, when they cannot go out to fish; at which time they are reduced to live upon small shell-fish and sea-wrack, which they pick up upon the beach and eat raw. in may and june they kill sea-otters in the following manner: when the weather is calm, they row out to sea in several baidars: having found the animal, they strike him with harpoons, and follow him so closely, that he cannot easily escape. they take sea dogs in the same manner. in the severest weather they make no addition to their usual cloathing. in order to warm themselves in winter, whenever it freezes very hard, they burn a heap of dry grass, over which they stand and catch the heat under their clothes. the clothes of the women and children are made of sea-otter skins, in the same form as those belonging to the men. whenever they pass the night at a distance from home, they dig a hole in the earth, and lay themselves down in it, covered only with their clothes and mats of platted grass. regardless of every thing but the present moment, destitute of religion, and without the least appearance of decency, they seem but few degrees removed from brutes. [footnote : colymbus troile, alca arctica.] as soon as the several baidars sent out upon hunting parties were returned, and the vessel got ready for their departure, the toigons of these islands (excepting kanaga) came in baidars to tolstyk, accompanied with a considerable number of the natives; their names were tsarkulini, tshunila, kayugotsk and mayatok. they brought with them a voluntary tribute, making presents of pieces of dried salmon, and unanimously expressing their satisfaction upon the good conduct of the russians. tolstyk gave them in return some toys and other trifles, and desired them to recommend to the inhabitants of the other islands the like friendly behaviour towards the russian merchants who should come amongst them, if they had a mind to be treated in the same manner. june , , they sailed for kamtchatka, and anchored on the th before shemiya, one of the aleütian islands. the st they were forced from their anchor by tempestuous winds, and driven upon a rocky shore. this accident obliged them to send the lading ashore, and to draw the ship upon land in order to repair the damage, which was done not without great difficulty. on the th of august they stood out to sea and made towards atchu, which they reached on the th. having sprung a leak they again refitted the vessel; and, after taking on board the crew of a ship which had been lately cast away, they sailed for kamtchatka. [sidenote: the vessel wrecked upon the coast of kamtchatka.] on the th of september they came in sight of that peninsula near tzaschminskoi ostrog; and on the th, as they were endeavouring to run into the mouth of the kamtchatka river, they were forced by a storm upon the coast. the vessel was destroyed, and the greatest part of the cargo lost. chap. viii. voyage of the _zacharias_ and _elizabeth_, fitted out by _kulkoff_, and commanded by _drusinin_--they sail to _umnak_ and _unalashka_, and winter upon the latter island--the vessel destroyed, and all the crew, except four, murdered by the islanders--the adventures of these four _russians_, and their wonderful escape. i shall here barely mention that a vessel was fitted out in august, , at the expence of terrenti tsebaëfskoi: but i shall have occasion to be very circumstantial in my accounts concerning several others, which sailed during the following years: more copious information concerning the fox islands having been procured from these voyages, although for the most part unfortunate, than from all the preceding ones. in four vessels sailed for the fox islands: of these only one returned safe to kamtchatka. [sidenote: voyage of drusinin in the zacharias and elizabeth, .] the first was the zacharias and elizabeth, fitted out by kulkoff, a merchant of vologda and company, under the command of drusinin, and manned by thirty-four russians, and three kamtchadals. september the th, they weighed anchor from ochotsk, and arrived october the th in the haven of st. peter and paul, where they wintered. june the th, , they again put to sea, and having reached, after eleven days sailing, the nearest aleütian islands, they anchored before atach. they staid here about fourteen days, and took up seven russians who had been shipwrecked on this coast. among these was korelin, who returned to kamtchatka, and brought back the following account of the voyage. july the th, they sailed from atach towards the more distant islands. in the same month they landed upon an island, where the crew of the andrean and natalia was engaged in hunting; and, having laid in a provision of water, continued their voyage. [sidenote: arrival at umnak.] in the beginning of september they arrived at umnak, one of the fox islands, and cast anchor about a verst from the shore. they found there glottoff's vessel, whose voyage will be mentioned in a succeeding chapter[ ]. drusinin immediately dispatched his first mate maesnisk and korelin, with thirty-four of the crew, to land. they passed over to the eastern extremity of the island, which was distant about seventy versts from the vessel; and returned safe on the th of september. during this expedition, they saw several remains of fox-traps which had been set by the russians; and met with several natives who shewed some tribute-quittances. the same day letters were brought by the islanders from medvedeff and korovin[ ], who were just arrived at umnak and unalashka in two vessels fitted out by the merchants protassoff and trapesnikoff. answers were returned by the same messengers. [footnote : chap. x.] [footnote : see the following chapter.] [sidenote: winters at unalashka.] on the d, drusinin sailed to the northern point of unalashka, which lies about fifteen versts from umnak: the crew, having laid up the vessel in a safe harbour, and brought the lading ashore, made preparation to construct an hut. soon after their arrival, two toigons of the nearest village brought hostages of their own accord; their example was immediately followed by several of the more distant villages. here they received information of an hunting party sent from trapesnikoff's ship. upon which maesnyk also dispatched three companies upon the same errand, one consisting of eleven men, among whom was korelin, under the command of peter tsekaleff; a second of the same number, under michael kudyakoff; and a third of nine men, under yephim kaskitsyn. of these three parties, tsekaleff's was the only one of which we have received any circumstantial account: for not a single person of the other two parties, or of the crew remaining on board, ever returned to kamtchatka. kaskitsyn remained near the haven, and the two other companies were dispatched to the northern point of the island. kudyakoff stopped at a place called kalaktak, which contained about forty inhabitants; tsekaleff went on to inalok, which lies about thirty versts from kalaktak. he found there a dwelling with about seventy inhabitants, whom he behaved to with kindness: he built an hut for himself and his companions, and kept a constant watch. [sidenote: all the crew, except four russians, destroyed by the natives.] december the th, six of the party being dispatched to look after the pit-falls, there remained only five russians: namely, peter tsekaleff, stephen korelin, dmitri bragin, gregory shaffyrin, and ivan kokovin: the islanders took this opportunity of giving the first proofs of their hostile intentions, which they had hitherto concealed. as tsekaleff and shaffyrin were upon a visit to the islanders, the latter suddenly, and without any provocation, struck tsekaleff upon the head with a club, and afterwards stabbed him with knives. they next fell upon shaffyrin, who defended himself with an hatchet, and, though desperately wounded, forced his way back to his companions. bragin and korelin, who remained in the hut, had immediate recourse to their fire-arms; but kokovin, who was at a small distance, was surrounded by the savages, and thrown down. they continued stabbing him with knives and darts, until korelin came to his assistance; the latter having wounded two islanders, and driven away the others, brought kokovin half-dead to the hut. [sidenote: the adventures of the four russians upon unalaskka.] soon afterwards the natives surrounded the hut, which the russians had taken the precaution to provide with shooting-holes. the siege lasted four days without intermission. the islanders were prevented indeed by the fire-arms from storming the hut; but whenever the russians made their appearance, darts were immediately shot at them from all sides; so that they could not venture to go out for water. at length when shaffyrin and kokovin were a little recovered, they all sallied out upon the islanders with their guns and lances; three persons were killed upon the spot, and several wounded; upon which the others fled away and dispersed. during the siege the savages were seen at a little distance bearing some arms and caps, and holding them up in triumph: these things belonged to the six russians, who had been sent to the pit-falls, and had fallen a sacrifice to the resentment of the natives. the latter no sooner disappeared, than the russians dragged the baidar into the sea, and rowed without molestation out of the bay, which is about ten versts broad. they next landed near a small habitation: finding it empty they drew the baidar ashore, and went with their fire-arms and lances across the mountains towards kalaktak, where they had left kudyakoff's party. as they approached that place towards evening, they fired from the heights; but no signal being returned, they concluded, as was really the case, that this company had likewise been massacred by the inhabitants. they themselves narrowly escaped the same fate; for, immediately upon the report of the fire-arms, numerous bodies of the islanders made their appearance, and closely pursued the russians: darkness however coming on, the latter found means to escape over the sandy shore of a bay to a rock, where they were sheltered, and could defend themselves. they here made so good a use of their arms, that the islanders thought proper to retire: the fugitives, as soon as their pursuers were withdrawn, seized the opportunity of proceeding towards the haven, where their vessel lay at anchor: they ran without interruption during the whole night, and at break of day, when they were about three versts from the haven, they espied a locker of the vessel lying on the shore. struck with astonishment at this alarming discovery, they retreated with precipitation to the mountains, from whence they descried several islanders rowing in canoes, but no appearance of their own vessel. during that day they kept themselves closely concealed, and durst not venture again towards the haven before the evening. upon their arrival they found the vessel broken to pieces, and the dead bodies of their companions lying mangled along the beach. having collected all the provision which had been untouched by the savages, they returned to the mountains. the following day they scooped out a cavity at the foot of a mountain situated about three versts from the haven, and covered it with a piece of a sail. in the evening they returned to the haven, and found there an image of a saint and a prayer book; all the tackle and lading were taken away, excepting the sacks for provision. these sacks were made of leather: the natives had ript them up probably to see if they contained any iron, and had left them, together with the provision, behind as useless. the russians collected all that remained, and dragged as much as they were able to carry into the mountains to their retreat, where they lived in a very wretched state from the th of december to the d of february, . mean while they employed themselves in making a little baidar, which they covered with the leather of the sacks. having drawn it at night from the mountains to the sea, they rowed without waiting for break of day along the northern coast of unalaschka, in order to reach trapesnikoff's vessel, which, as they had reason to think, lay at anchor somewhere upon the coast. they rowed at some distance from the shore, and by that means passed three habitations unperceived. the following day they observed at some distance five islanders in a baidar, who upon seeing them made to makushinsk, before which place the fugitives were obliged to pass. darkness coming on, the russians landed on a rock, and passed the night ashore. early in the morning they discovered the islanders advancing towards them from the bay of makushinsk. upon this they placed themselves in an advantageous post, and prepared for defence. the savages rowed close to the beach: part landing, and part remaining in their baidars, they commenced the assault by a volley of darts; and notwithstanding the russians did great execution with their fire arms, the skirmish continued the whole day. towards evening the enemy retired, and the fugitives betook themselves with their canoe to an adjoining cavern. the attack was again renewed during the night; but the russians were so advantageously posted, that they repulsed the assailants without much difficulty. in this encounter bragen was slightly wounded. they remained in this place three days; but the sea rising at a spring-tide into the rock, forced them to sally out towards a neighbouring cavern, which they reached without loss, notwithstanding the opposition of the islanders. they were imprisoned in this cave five weeks, and kept watch by turns. during that time they seldom ventured twenty yards from the entrance; and were obliged to quench their thirst with snow-water, and with the moisture dripping from the rock. they suffered also greatly from hunger, having no sustenance but small shell-fish, which they occasionally found means to collect, upon the beach. compelled at length by extreme want, they one night ventured to draw their baidar into the sea, and were fortunate enough to get off unperceived. [sidenote: their escape from unalaschka to trapesnikoff's vessel.] they continued rowing at night, but in the day they hid themselves on the shore; by this means they escaped unobserved from the bay of makushinsk, and reached trapesnikoff's vessel the th of march, . what happened to them afterwards in company with the crew of this vessel will be mentioned in the succeeding chapter, shaffyrin alone of all the four died of sickness during the voyage; but korelin, kohovin, and bragin[ ] returned safe to kamtchatka. the names of these brave men deserve our admiration, for the courage and perseverance with which they supported and overcame such imminent dangers. [footnote : these russians were well known to several persons of credit, who have confirmed the authenticity of this relation. among the rest the celebrated naturalist mr. pallas, whose name is well known in the literary world, saw bragin at irkutsk: from him he had a narrative of their adventures and escape; which, as he assured me, perfectly tallied with the above account, which is drawn from the journal of korelin.] chap. ix. voyage of the vessel called the _trinity_, under the command of _korovin_--sails to the _fox islands_--winters at _unalashka_--puts to sea the spring following--the vessel is stranded in a bay of the island _umnak_, and the crew attacked by the natives--many of them killed--others carried off by sickness--they are reduced to great streights--relieved by _glottoff_, twelve of the whole company only remaining--description of _umnak_ and _unalashka_. [sidenote: voyage of korovin, .] the second vessel which sailed from kamtchatka in the year , was the trinity, fitted out by the trading company of nikiphor trapesnikoff, merchant of irkutsk, under the command of ivan korovin, and manned with thirty-eight russians and six kamtchadals. [sidenote: departs from kamtchatka.] september , they sailed down the kamtchatka river, and stood out to sea the th, when they were driven at large for ten days by contrary winds. at last upon the th of october they came in sight of beering's and copper island, where they cast anchor before the south side of the former. here they were resolved to winter on account of the late season of the year. accordingly they laid up the vessel in a secure harbour, and brought all the lading ashore. [sidenote: winters upon beering's island.] they staid here until the first of august, : during that time they kilted about arctic foxes and sea-otters; the latter animals resorted less frequently to this island, in consequence of the disturbance given them by the russian hunters. korovin, having collected a sufficient store of provision, several skins of sea-cows for the coverings of baidars, and some iron which remained from the wreck of beering's ship, prepared for his departure. upon his arrival at beering's island the preceding autumn, he found there a vessel fitted out by jacob protassoff, merchant of tiumen, under the command of dennis medvedeff[ ]. korovin had entered into a formal contract with medvedeff for the division of the furs. here he took on board ten of medvedeff's crew, and gave him seven in return. august , korovin put to sea from beering's island with thirty-seven men, and medvedeff with forty-nine. [sidenote: reaches unalashka.] they sailed without coming in sight of the aleütian isles: on the th, korovin made unalashka, where glottoff lay at anchor, and medvedeff reached umnak. korovin received the news of the latter's safe arrival, first by some islanders, and afterwards by letters; both vessels lay at no greater distance from each other than about an hundred and fifty versts, taking a streight line from point to point across the firth. [footnote : this is the fourth vessel which sailed in . as the whole crew was massacred by the savages, we have no account of the voyage. short mention of this massacre is occasionally made in this and the following chapters.] korovin cast anchor in a convenient bay at the distance of sixty yards from the shore. on the th he landed with fourteen men, and having found nothing but an empty shed, he returned to the vessel. after having taken a reinforcement, he again went ashore in order to look for some inhabitants. about seven versts from the haven, he came to two habitations, and saw three hundred persons assembled together. among them were three toigons, who recollected and accosted in a friendly manner one barnasheff, a native of tobolsk, who had been there before with glottoff; they shewed some tribute-quittances, which they had lately received from the cossac sabin ponomareff. two of these toigons gave each a boy of twelve years of age as an hostage, whom they passed for their children; and the third delivered his son of about fifteen years of age, the same who had been glottoff's hostage, and whom korovin called alexèy. [sidenote: lays up the ship.] with these hostages he returned to the ship, which he laid up in the mouth of a river, after having brought all the provision and lading ashore. soon afterwards the three toigons came to see the hostages; and informed korovin, that medvedeff's vessel rode securely at anchor before umnak. september , when every thing was prepared for wintering, korovin and barnasheff set out in two baidars, each with nine men and one of the hostages, who had a slight knowledge of the russian language. they went along the northern coast of the island, towards its western extremity, in order to hunt, and to enquire after a certain interpreter called kashmak, who had been employed by glottoff on a former occasion. having rowed about twenty versts, they passed by a village, and landed at another which lay about five versts further. but as the number of inhabitants seemed to amount to two hundred, they durst not venture to the dwellings, but stayed by the baidar. upon this the toigon of the place came to them, with his wife and son: he shewed a tribute-quittance, and delivered his son, a boy of thirteen years of age and whom korovin called stepanka, as an hostage, for which he received a present of corals. they rowed now further to a third village, about fifteen versts from the former, where they found the interpreter kashmak; the latter accompanied them to the two toigons, who gave them a friendly reception, and shewed their tribute-quittances. a few natives only made their appearance; the others, as the toigons pretended, were gone out to fish. the next morning each toigon gave a boy as an hostage; one of the boys korovin called gregory, and the other alexèy. the russians were detained there two days by a violent storm; during which time a letter from medvedeff was brought by an aleütian, and an answer was returned by the same person. the storm at length somewhat abating, they rowed back to the next village, where they continued two nights without any apprehensions from the savages. at length korovin returned in safety with the hostages to the crew. [sidenote: builds an hut, and makes preparations for wintering.] in the beginning of october they built a winter-hut, partly of wood and partly of seal-skins, and made all the necessary preparations for hunting. on the th, two companies, each consisting of eleven men, were sent out upon an hunting party to the eastern point of the island; they returned in four days with hostages. about sixty versts from the haven, they had met a party of twenty-five russians, commanded by drusinin. about the same time some toigons brought a present of sturgeon and whale's blubber, and received in return some beads and provision. korovin and his company now thought themselves secure; for which reason twenty-three men, under the command of the above-mentioned barnasheff, were dispatched in two baidars upon an hunting party towards the western point of the island. eight muskets were distributed to each boat, a pistol and a lance to each man, and also a sufficient store of ammunition and provision. the following day two accounts were sent from barnasheff; and letters were also received from the crew of protassoff's vessel. from the d of november to the th of december, the russians, who remained with korovin, killed forty-eight dark-coloured foxes, together with an hundred and seventeen of the common sort: during this expedition one man was lost. some of the natives came occasionally in baidars, and exchanged sea-otters and fox skins for corals. on the th of december letters were again brought from barnasheff and also from the crew of protassoff's ship. answers were returned by the same messengers. after the departure of these messengers, the mother of alexèy came with a message from the toigon her husband importing, that a large number of islanders were making towards the ship. upon this korovin ordered the men to arms, and soon after seventy natives approached and held up some sea-otter skins. the russians cried out that no more than ten at a time should come over the brook towards their hut: upon which the islanders left their skins with korovin, and returned without attempting any hostilities. their apprehensions were now somewhat quieted, but they were again raised by the arrival of three kamtchadals belonging to kulkoff's ship, who flew for protection to korovin: they brought the account that the crew had been killed by the savages, and the vessel destroyed. it was now certain that the seventy islanders above-mentioned had come with hostile intentions. this information spread such a sudden panic among the russians, that it was even proposed to burn the vessel, and to endeavour to find their companions, who were gone upon hunting parties. [sidenote: the russians attacked by the natives.] that day however passed without any attack: but towards the evening of the th of december, the savages assembled in large bodies, and invested the hut on all sides. four days and nights they never ceased annoying the russians with their darts; two of the latter were killed, and the survivors were nearly exhausted by continual fatigue. upon the fifth day the islanders took post in a neighbouring cavern, where they continued watching the russians so closely during a whole month, that none of the latter durst venture fifty paces from their dwelling. korovin, finding himself thus annoyed by the natives, ordered the hut to be destroyed: he then retired to his vessel, which was brought for greater security out of the mouth of the rivulet to the distance of an hundred yards from the beach. there they lay at anchor from the th of march to the th of april, during which time they suffered greatly from want of provision, and still more from the scurvy. during this period they were attacked by a large body of the natives, who advanced in forty baidars with the hopes of surprising the vessel. korovin had been warned of their approach by two of the inhabitants, one of whom was a relation of the interpreter kashmak: accordingly he was prepared for their reception. as soon as the savages came near the vessel, they brandished their darts and got ready for the attack. korovin however had no sooner fired and killed one person, than they were struck with a panic and rowed away. they were so incensed at this failure of success, that they immediately put to death the two good-natured natives, who had betrayed their design to the russians. soon afterwards the father of alexèy came and demanded his son, who was restored to him: and on the th of march korovin and his three companions arrived as it is mentioned in the preceding chapter. by this reinforcement the number of the crew amounted to eighteen persons. [sidenote: korovin puts to sea. the vessel stranded upon umnak.] april korovin put to sea from unalashka with the crew and eleven hostages. the vessel was driven until the th by contrary winds, and then stranded in a bay of the island umnak. the ammunition and sails, together with the skins for the construction of baidars, were brought ashore with great difficulty. during the disembarkation one sick man was drowned, another died as soon as he came to land, and eight hostages ran away amidst the general confusion. there still remained the faithful interpreter kashmak and three hostages. the whole number of the russians amounted to only sixteen persons; and of these three were sick of the scurvy. under these circumstances they secured themselves between their baidar and some empty barrels, which they covered with seal-skins, while the sails were spread over them in form of a tent. two russians kept watch; and there being no appearance of any islanders, the others retired to sleep. [sidenote: the russians in danger of being destroyed by the natives.] before break of day, about an hundred savages advancing secretly from the sea-side, threw their darts at the distance of twenty yards with such force, that many of them pierced through the baidar and the skins; others fell from above through the sails. by this discharge, the two persons who kept watch, together with the three hostages, were killed upon the spot; and all the russians were wounded. the latter indeed were so effectually surprised, as to be prevented from having recourse to their fire-arms. in this distress korovin sallied out, in company with four russians, and attacked the enemy with lances: two of the savages were killed, and the others driven to flight. [sidenote: the latter repulsed.] korovin and his party were so severely wounded, that they had scarcely strength sufficient to return to their tent. during the night the storm increased to such a degree, that the vessel was entirely dashed to pieces. the greatest part of the wreck, which was cast on shore by the sea, was carried away by the islanders. they also broke to pieces the barrels of fat, emptied the sacks of provision, and destroyed most of the furs: having thus satisfied their resentment, they went away; and did not again make their appearance until the th of april. upon their retiring, the russians collected the wretched remains which had been left untouched by the savages, or which the waves had cast on shore since their departure. april , a body of an hundred and fifty natives advanced from the eastern point of the island towards the tent; and, at the distance of an hundred yards, shot at the russians with fire arms, but luckily without execution. they also set on fire the high grass, and the wind blew the flames towards the tent; but the russians firing forced the enemy to flight, and gained time to extinguish the flames. this was the last attack which was made upon korovin; although sickness and misery detained him and his companions upon this spot until the st of july. they then put to sea in a baidar eight yards long, which they had constructed in order to make to protassoff's vessel, with whose fate they were as yet unacquainted. their number was now reduced to twelve persons, among whom were six kamtchadals. [sidenote: the russians discover the dead bodies of their countrymen who had been murdered by the natives.] after having rowed ten days they landed upon the beach of the same island umnak; there they observed the remains of a vessel which had been burnt, and saw some clothes, sails, and ropes, torn to pieces. at a small distance was an empty russian dwelling, and near it a bath-room, in which they found, to their inexpressible terror, twenty dead bodies in their clothes. each of them had a thong of leather, or his own girdle, fastened about the neck, with which he had been dragged along. korovin and his companions recollected them to have been some of those who had sailed in protassoff's vessel; and could distinguish among the rest the commander medvedeff. they discovered no further traces of the remaining crew; and as none ever appeared, we have no account of the circumstances with which this catastrophe was attended. [sidenote: relieved from their distresses by the arrival of glottoff.] after having buried his dead countrymen, korovin and his companions began to build an hut: they were prevented however from finishing it, by the unexpected arrival of stephen glottoff[ ], who came to them with a small party by land. korovin and his companions accordingly joined glottoff, and rowed the next day to his vessel. [footnote : see the following chapter.] soon afterwards korovin was sent with a party of twenty men to coast the island of umnak, in order to discover if any part of medvedeff's crew had made their escape from the general massacre: but his enquiries were without success. in the course of this expedition, as he lay at anchor, in september, before a small island situated between umnak and unalashka, some savages rowed towards the russians in two large baidars; and having shot at them with fire-arms, though without effect, instantly retired. the same evening korovin entered a bay of the island umnak, with an intention of passing the night on shore: but as he came near the coast, a large number of savages in an hundred baidars surrounded and saluted him with a volley of darts. korovin fired and soon dispersed them; and immediately made to a large baidar, which he saw at some distance, in hopes of finding some russians. he was however mistaken; the islanders who were aboard landed at his approach, and, after shooting at him from their fire-arms, retired to the mountains. korovin found there an empty baidar, which he knew to be the same in which barnasheff had sailed, when he was sent upon an hunting party. within were nothing but two hatchets and some iron points for darts. three women were seized at the same time; and two natives, who refused to surrender themselves, were put to death. they then made to the dwelling, from which all the inhabitants had run away, and found therein pieces of russian leather, blades of small knives, shirts, and other things, which had belonged to the russians. all the information which they could procure from the women whom they had taken prisoners, was, that the crew had been killed, and this booty taken away by the inhabitants, who had retired to the island unalashka. korovin gave these women their liberty, and, being apprehensive of fresh attacks, returned to the haven. towards winter korovin, with a party of twenty-two men, was sent upon an hunting expedition to the western point of unalashka: he was accompanied by an aleütian interpreter, called ivan glottoff. being informed by some islanders, that a russian ship, under the command of ivan solovioff[ ], was then lying before unalashka, he immediately rowed towards the haven where she was at anchor. on the way he had a sharp encounter with the natives, who endeavoured to prevent him from landing: of these, ten were killed upon the spot; and the remainder fled away, leaving behind them some women and children. [footnote : chap. xi.] korovin staid three days aboard solovioff's vessel, and then returned to the place where he had been so lately attacked. the inhabitants however, for this time, made no opposition to his landing; on the contrary, they received him with kindness, and permitted him to hunt: they even delivered hostages; and entered into a friendly traffic, exchanging furs for beads. they were also prevailed upon to restore several muskets and other things, taken from the russians who had been massacred. a short time before his departure, the inhabitants again shewed their hostile intentions; for three of them came up to the russian centinel, and suddenly fell upon him with their knives. the centinel however disengaging himself, and retreating into the hut, they ran away. the toigons of the village protested ignorance of this treachery; and the offenders were soon afterwards discovered and punished. korovin, as he was returning to glottoff, was forced to engage with the islanders upon unalashka, and also upon umnak, where they endeavoured to prevent him from landing. before the end of the year a storm drove the baidar upon the beach of the latter island; and the tempestuous weather setting in, they were detained there until the th of april, . during this time they were reduced, from a scarcity of provision, to live chiefly upon sea-wrack and small shell fish. on the d they returned to glottoff; and as they had been unsuccessful in hunting, their cargo of furs was very inconsiderable. three days after his arrival, korovin quitted glottoff, and went over with five other russians to solovieff, with whom he returned the following year to kamtchatka. the six kamtchadals of korovin's party joined glottoff. [sidenote: korovin's description of umnak and unalashka.] according to korovin's account, the islands umnak and unalashka are situated not much more northwards than the mouth of the kamtchatka river; and, according to the ship's reckoning, about the distance of versts eastwards from the same place. the circumference of umnak is about two hundred and fifty versts; unalashka is much larger. both these islands are wholly destitute of trees; drift-wood is brought ashore in large quantities. there were five lakes upon the northern coast of unalashka, and but one upon umnak, of which none were more than ten versts in circumference. these lakes give rise to several small rivulets, which flow only a few versts before they empty themselves into the sea: the fish enter the rivulets in the middle of april, they ascend the lakes in july, and continue there until august. sea-otters and other sea-animals resort but seldom to these islands; but there is great abundance of red and black foxes. north eastwards from unalashka two islands appeared in sight, at the distance of five or ten versts; but korovin did not touch at them. [sidenote: account of the inhabitants.] the inhabitants of these islands row in their small baidars from one island to the other. they are so numerous, and their manner of life so unsettled, that their number cannot exactly be determined. their dwelling caves are made in the following manner. they first dig an hole in the earth proportioned to the size of their intended habitation, of twenty, thirty, or forty yards in length, and from six to ten broad. they then set up poles of larch, firs, and ash driven on the coast by the sea. across the top of these poles they lay planks, which they cover with grass and earth. they enter through holes in the top by means of ladders. fifty, an hundred, and even an hundred and fifty persons dwell together in such a cave. they light little or no fires within, for which reason these dwellings are much cleaner than those of the kamtchadals. when they want to warm themselves in the winter, they make a fire of dry herbs, of which they have collected a large store in summer, and stand over it until they are sufficiently warmed. a few of these islanders wear fur-stockings in winter; but the greatest part go bare-footed, and all are without breeches. the skins of cormorants, puffins, and sea-divers, serve for the mens clothing; and the women wear the skins of sea-bears, seals, and sea-otters. they sleep upon thick mats, which they twist out of a soft kind of grass that grows upon the shore, and have no other covering but their usual clothes. many of the men have five or six wives; and he that is the best hunter or fisher has the greatest number. the women make their needles of the bones of birds wings, and use sinews for thread. their weapons are bows and arrows, lances and darts, which they throw like the greenlanders to the distance of sixty yards by means of a little hand-board. both the darts and arrows are feathered: the former are about an ell and an half long; the shaft, which is well made considering their want of instruments, is often composed of two pieces that join into each other: the point is of flint, sharpened by beating it between two stones. these darts as well as the lances were formerly tipped with bone, but at present the points are commonly made of the iron which they procure from the russians, and out of which they ingeniously form little hatchets and two-edged knives. they shape the iron by rubbing it between two stones, and whetting it frequently with sea-water. with these instruments and stone hatchets they build their baidars. they have a strange custom of cutting holes in the under-lip and through the gristle of the nose. they place in the former two little bones, wrought in the form of teeth, which project some inches from the face. in the nose a piece of bone is placed crossways. the deceased are buried with their boat, weapons, and clothes[ ]. [footnote : the author repeats here several circumstances which have been mentioned before, and many of them will occur again: but my office as a translator would not suffer me to omit them.] chap. x. voyage of _stephen glottoff_--he reaches the _fox islands_--sails beyond _unalashka_ to _kadyak_--winters upon that island--repeated attempts of the natives to destroy the crew--they are repulsed, reconciled, and prevailed upon to trade with the _russians_--account of _kadyak_--its inhabitants--animals--productions--_glottoff_ sails back to _umnak_--winters there--returns to _kamtchatka_--journal of his voyage. here follows one of the most memorable voyages yet made, which extended farther, and terminated more fortunately, than the last mentioned expeditions. [sidenote: voyage of glottoff in the andrean and natalia, .] terenty tsebaeffskoi and company, merchants of lalsk, fitted out the andrean and natalia under the command of stephen glottoff, an experienced and skilful seaman of yarensk. this vessel sailed from the bay of the river kamtchatka the st of october, , manned with thirty-eight russians and eight kamtchadals. in eight days they reached mednoi ostroff, or copper island, where having sought out a convenient harbour, they unloaded and laid up the vessel for the winter. [sidenote: winters upon copper island.] their first care was to supply themselves with provisions; and they killed afterwards a quantity of ice-foxes, and a considerable number of sea-otters. for the benefit of the crown and their own use in case of need, they resolved to take on board all the remaining tackle and iron work of beering's ship, which had been left behind on commander's island, and was buried in the beach. for this purpose they dispatched, on the th of may, jacob malevinskoy (who died soon after) with thirteen men in a baidar to that island, which was seventy versts distant. they brought back with them twenty-two pood of iron, ten of old cordage fit for caulker's use, some lead and copper, and several thousand beads. copper island has its name from the native copper found on the coast, particularly at the western point on its south side. of this native copper malevinskoy brought with him two large pieces weighing together twelve pounds, which were picked up between a rock and the sea on a strand of about twelve yards in breadth. amongst other floating bodies which the sea drives upon the shores of this island, the true right camphor wood, and another sort of wood very white, soft, and sweet-scented, are occasionally found. [sidenote: sails to the fox islands.] every preparation for continuing the voyage being made, they sailed from copper island the th of july, , and steered for the islands umnak and agunalashka, where glottoff had formerly observed great numbers of black foxes. on account of storms and contrary winds, they were thirty days before they fetched umnak. [sidenote: arrive at kadyak.] here they arrived the th of august, and without dropping anchor or losing any time, they resolved to sail further for the discovery of new islands: they passed eight contiguous to each other and separated by straits, which were to the best of their estimation from twenty to an hundred versts broad. glottoff however did not land till he reached the last and most eastward of these islands, called by the inhabitants kadyak, from which the natives said it was not far to the coast of a wide extended woody continent. no land however was to be seen from a little island called by the natives aktunak, which is situated about thirty versts more to the east than kadyak. september th, the vessel ran up a creek, lying south east of aktunak, through which a rivulet empties itself into the sea; this rivulet comes from a lake six versts long, one broad, and about fifty fathoms deep. during the ebb of the tide the vessel was left aground; but the return of the water set her again afloat. near the shore were four large huts, so crouded with people, that their number could scarcely be counted: however, soon after glottoff's arrival, all these inhabitants quitted their dwellings, and retired with precipitation. the next day some islanders in baidars approached the vessel, and accosted the people on board: and as ivan glottoff, the aleütian interpreter, did not well understand the language of these islanders, they soon afterwards returned with a boy whom they had formerly taken prisoner from isanak, one of the islands which lie to the west of kadyak. him the aleütian interpreter perfectly understood: and by his means every necessary explanation could be obtained from the islanders. in this manner they conversed with the savages, and endeavoured to persuade them to become tributary; they used also every argument in their power to prevail upon them to give up the boy for an interpreter; but all their entreaties were for the present without effect. the savages rowed back to the cliff called aktalin, which lies about three versts to the south of kadyak, where they seemed to have habitations. on the th of september kaplin was sent with thirteen men to the cliff, to treat peaceably with the islanders. he found there ten huts, from which about an hundred of the natives came out. they behaved seemingly in a friendly manner, and answered the interpreter by the boy, that they had nobody proper for an hostage; but that they would deliver up the boy to the russians agreeable to their desire. kaplin received him very thankfully, and brought him on board, where he was properly taken care of: he afterwards accompanied glottoff to kamtchatka, and was baptized by the name of alexander popoff, being then about thirteen years of age. for some days after this conference the islanders came off in companies of five, ten, twenty, and thirty: they were admitted on board in small numbers, and kindly received, but with a proper degree of circumspection. on the th of september the vessel was brought further up the creek without unloading her cargo: and on the th glottoff with ten men proceeded to a village on the shore about two hundred yards from the vessel, where the natives had begun to reside: it consisted of three summer-huts covered only with long grass: they were from eight to ten yards broad, twelve long, and about four high: they saw there about an hundred men, but neither women nor children. finding it impossible to persuade the savages to give hostages, glottoff resolved to let his people remain together, and to keep a strong guard. [sidenote: the natives attack the russians, but are defeated.] the islanders visited them still in small bodies; it was however more and more visible that their intentions were bad. at last on the st of october, by day break, a great number having assembled together in the remote parts of the island, came unexpectedly across the country. they approached very near without being discovered by the watch, and seeing nobody on deck but those on duty, shot suddenly into the vessel with arrows. the watch found refuge behind the quarter boards, and gave the alarm without firing. glottoff immediately ordered a volley to be fired over their heads with small arms; upon which they immediately returned with great expedition. as soon as it was day there was no enemy to be seen: but they discovered a number of ladders, several bundles of hay in which the savages had put sulphur, likewise a quantity of birch-tree bark, which had been left behind in their precipitate flight. they now found it very necessary to be on their guard against the attempts of these perfidious incendiaries. their suspicions were still further increased by the subsequent conduct of the natives: for though the latter came to the vessel in small bodies, yet it was observed that they examined every thing, and more particularly the watch, with the strictest attention; and they always returned without paying any regard to the friendly propositions of the russians. on the th of october about two hundred islanders made their appearance, carrying wooden shields before them, and preparing with bows and arrows for an attack. glottoff endeavoured at first by persuasion to prevail upen them to desist; but observing that they still continued advancing, he resolved to venture a sally. this intrepidity disconcerted the islanders, and they immediately retreated without making the least resistance. the th of october they ventured a third attack, and advanced towards the vessel for this purpose by day-break: the watch however gave the alarm in due time, and the whole crew were immediately under arms. the approach of day-light discovered to their view different parties of the enemy advancing under the protection of wooden screens. of these moving breast-works they counted seven; and behind each from thirty to forty men armed with bone lances. besides these a croud of armed men advanced separately to the attack, some of them bearing whale jaw-bones, and others wooden shields. dissuasion proving ineffectual, and the arrows beginning to fall even aboard the ship, glottoff gave orders to fire. [sidenote: the natives are finally repulsed by the russians.] the shot from the small arms however not being of force enough to pierce the screens, the islanders advanced under their protection with steadiness and intrepidity. glottoff nevertheless determined to risk a sally of his whole crew armed with muskets and lances. the islanders instantly threw down their screens, and fled with precipitation until they gained their boats, into which they threw themselves and rowed off. they had about seventeen large baidars and a number of small canoes. the screens which they left behind were made of three rows of stakes placed perpendicularly, and bound together with sea-weed and osiers; they were twelve feet broad, and above half a yard thick. [sidenote: the russians winter at kadyak.] the islanders now appearing to be sufficiently intimidated, the russians began to build a winter hut of floated wood, and waited in a body the appearance of spring without further annoyance. although they saw nobody before the th of december, yet glottoff kept his people together; sending out occasionally small hunting and fishing parties to the lake, which lay about five versts from the creek. during the whole winter they caught in the lake several different species of trout and salmon, soles, and herrings of a span and a half long, and even turbot and cod-fish, which came up with the flood into the lake. at last, on the th of december, two islanders came to the ship, and conversed at a distance by means of interpreters. although proposals of peace, and trade were held out to them in the most friendly manner, yet they went off without seeming to put much confidence in these offers: nor did any of them appear again before the th of april, . want of sufficient exercise in the mean time brought on a violent scurvy among the crew, by which disorder nine persons were carried off. on the th of april four islanders made their appearance, and seemed to pay more attention to the proposals: one of them at last advanced, and offered to barter two fox-skins for beads. they did not set the least value upon other goods of various kinds, such as shirts, linen, and nankeen, but demanded glass beads of different colours, for which they exchanged their skins with pleasure. [sidenote: the natives are reconciled to the russians.] this friendly traffic, together with glottoff's entreaties, operated so powerfully, that, after holding a consultation with their countrymen, they returned with a solemn declaration, that their brethren would in future commit no hostilities against the russians. from that time until their departure a daily intercourse was carried on with the islanders, who brought all sorts of fox and sea-otter skins, and received in exchange a stipulated number of beads. some of them were even persuaded to pay a tribute of skins, for which receipts were given. amongst other wares the russians procured two small carpets, worked or platted in a curious manner, and on one side set close with beaver-wool like velvet: they could not however learn whether these carpets were wrought by the islanders. the latter brought also for sale well-dressed sea-otter skins, the hair of which was shorn quite short with sharp stones, in such a manner, that the remainder, which was of a yellowish brown colour, glistened and appeared like velvet. their caps had surprising and sometimes very ornamental decorations: some of them had on the forepart combs adorned with manes like an helmet; others, seemingly peculiar to the females, were made of intestines stitched together with rein-deer hair and sinews in a most elegant taste, and ornamented on the crown with long streamers of hair died of a beautiful red. of all these curiosities glottoff carried samples to kamtchatka[ ]. [footnote : these and several other ornaments of a similar kind are preserved in the cabinet of curiosities at the academy of sciences of st. petersburg: a cabinet which well merits the attention of the curious traveller; for it contains a large collection of the dresses of the eastern nations. amongst the rest one compartment is entirely filled with the dresses, arms, and implements, brought from the new discovered islands.] [sidenote: animals of kadyak.] the natives differ considerably in dress and language from the inhabitants of the other fox islands: and several species of animals were observed upon kadyak, which are not to be found upon the other islands, viz. ermines, martens, beavers, river otters, wolves, wild boars, and bears: the last-mentioned animal was not indeed actually seen by the russians, but the prints of its feet were traced. some of the inhabitants had clothes made of the skins of rein-deer and jevras; the latter of which is a sort of small marmoset. both these skins were probably procured from the continent of america[ ]. black, brown, and red foxes were seen in great numbers; and the coast abounds with sea-dogs, sea-bears, sea-lions, and sea-otters. the birds are cranes, geese, ducks, gulls, ptarmigans, crows, and magpies; but no uncommon species was any where discovered. [sidenote: productions.] the vegetable productions are bilberries, cranberries, wortleberries, and wild lily-roots. kadyak likewise yields willows and alders, which circumstance affords the strongest proof that it lies at no great distance from the continent of america. the extent of kadyak cannot be exactly ascertained, as the russians, through apprehension of the natives, did not venture to explore the country. [footnote : although this conjecture is probable, yet, when the reader recollects that the island alaksu is said to contain rein-deer, he will perceive that the inhabitants of kadyak might have been supplied with the skins of that animal from thence. see p. .] [sidenote: account of the inhabitants.] the inhabitants, like those of the aleütian and nearer islands, make holes in the under-lips and through the gristle of the nose, in which they insert the bones of birds and animals worked into the form of teeth. their clothes are made of the skins of birds, foxes, sea-otters, young rein-deer, and marmosets; they sew them together with sinews. they wear also fur-stockings of rein-deer skins, but no breeches. their arms are bows, arrows, and lances, whose points, as well as their small hatchets, are of sharp flint: some few make knives and lance points of rein-deer bones. their wooden shields are called kuyaky, which amongst the greenlanders signifies a small canoe. their manners are altogether rude. they have not the least disposition to give a courteous reception to strangers: nor does there appear amongst themselves any kind of deference or submission from one to another. their canoes are some of them so small as to contain only one or two persons; others are large baidars similar to the women's boats of the greenlanders. their food consists chiefly of raw and dried fish, partly caught at sea with bone hooks, and partly in rivulets, in bagnets made of sinews platted together. they call themselves kanagist, a name that has no small resemblance to karalit; by which appellation, the greenlanders and esquimaux on the coast of labradore distinguish themselves: the difference between these two denominations is occasioned perhaps by a change of pronunciation, or by a mistake of the russian sailors, who may have given it this variation. their numbers seem very considerable on that part of the island, where they had their fixed habitations. the island kadyak[ ] makes, with aghunalashka, umnak, and the small islands lying between them, a continued archipelago, extending n. e. and e. n. e. towards america: it lies by the ship's reckoning in degrees of longitude; so that it cannot be far distant from that part of the american coast which beering formerly touched at. [footnote : kadyak is not laid down upon any chart of the new discovered islands: for we have no chart of glottoff's voyage; and no other russian navigator touched at that island.] the large island alaksu, lying northward from kadyak where pushkaref[ ] wintered, must be still nearer the continent: and the account propagated by its inhabitants of a great promontory, called atachtak, stretching from the continent n. e. of alaksu, is not at all improbable. [footnote : see chap. vi.] although the conduct of the islanders appeared more friendly, yet on account of their numbers glottoff resolved not to pass another winter upon kadyak, and accordingly prepared for his departure. he wanted hoops for repairing his water-casks; and being told by the natives that there were trees on the island at no great distance from the bay, he dispatched on the th of april lukas ftoruskin with eleven men for the purpose of felling wood. ftoruskin returned the same day with the following intelligence: that after rowing along the south coast of the island forty or fifty versts from the haven, he observed, about half a verst from the shore, a considerable number of alders, similar to those found in kamtchatka, growing in vallies between the rocks. the largest trunks were from two to four vershocks in diameter. of this wood he felled as much as he had occasion for; and returned without having met with either islander or habitation. [sidenote: departure from kadyak, may, .] they brought the vessel down the creek in may; and, after taking in all the peltry and stores, left kadyak on the th. contrary winds retarded their voyage, and drove them near the island alaksu, which they passed; their water being nearly exhausted, they afterwards landed upon another island, called saktunk, in order to procure a fresh stock. [sidenote: arrival at umnak.] at last on the d of july, they arrived again at umnak, and anchored in a bay which glottoff had formerly visited. he immediately went ashore in a baidar, and soon found out his former hut, which was in ruins: near it he observed another russian dwelling, that had been built in his absence, in which lay a murdered russian, but whose face none of them knew. glottoff, resolving to procure further information, went across the island the th of july, accompanied by sixteen of his crew. he discovered the remains of a burnt vessel, some prayer books, images, &c.; all the iron work and cordage were carried off. near the spot he found likewise a bathing room filled with murdered russians in their clothes. from some marks, he concluded that this was the vessel fitted out by protassoff; nor was he mistaken in his conjectures. alarmed at the fate of his countrymen, glottoff returned to the ship, and held a consultation upon the measures necessary to be taken; and it was unanimously resolved that they should endeavour to procure more intelligence concerning the vessel. in the mean time seven islanders came rowing off in baidars, and pretended that they wanted to trade. they shewed sea-otter skins at a distance, but would not venture on board; and desired by the interpreter glottoff and two of his people to come on shore and barter. glottoff however, having sufficient cause to distrust the savages, refused to comply with their demands: upon this they immediately landed, and shot from the shore with fire-arms, but without doing any execution. they were even bold enough to get into their canoes a second time, and to row near the vessel. in order if possible to procure intelligence from them, every method of persuading them to peace was tried by means of the interpreters; and at last one of them approached the ship and demanded victuals, which being thrown to him, he came on board. he then related the fate of the above-mentioned vessel, of which the islanders had made themselves masters; and gave likewise some intelligence concerning the remaining small body of fugitives under the command of korovin. he also confessed, that their design was to entice glottoff on shore, and then to kill him; for which purpose more than thirty islanders were posted in ambush behind the nearest rocks. after cutting off the leader, they imagined it would be an easy matter to seize upon the ship. upon this information glottoff detained the islander on board, and landing with a strong party attacked the savages; the latter shot with arrows, as well as from the muskets which they had seized, but without effect, and were soon forced to retire to their canoes. july the th a violent storm arose, in which glottoff's vessel parted her cable, and was forced on shore without any other loss than that of an anchor. the crew likewise, through want of fresh provisions, began to grow so sickly, that they were almost in a defenceless state. glottoff however, with ten men, set out the th of july for that part of the island, where according to information they expected to find korovin. they discovered only parts of the wreck, but none of the crew, so that they now gave them up for lost. but on the d of august, as glottoff was on his way back, five islanders approached him in canoes, and asked why the baidar had been out; to which a false answer being given, they told him, that on the other side of the island he would find korovin with his people, who were building an hut on the side of the rivulet. upon receiving this intelligence, glottoff and his companions went over land to the place pointed out by the islanders, and found every thing agreeable to their information: in this korovin had not the least share, not having been made privy to the transaction. the circumstances of his joining, and afterwards separating from glottoff, have already been mentioned[ ]. [footnote : see the preceding chapter.] [sidenote: glottoff winters upon umnak.] glottoff now resolved to winter upon umnak, and accordingly laid up his vessel for that purpose. on the d of september korovin, as is before related, was at his own desire sent out with a hunting party in two baidars. on his return, in may , they had the first intelligence of the arrival of solovioff's vessel, which lay before unalashka, and of which an account shall be given[ ]. none of the islanders appeared near the harbour during the winter, and there were none probably at that time upon umnak; for glottoff made excursions on all sides, and went once round the island. he likewise looked into the habitations of the islanders, and found them empty: he examined the country and caused a strict search to be made after the remains of the plundered vessel. [footnote : chap. xi.] according to his account umnak is about versts in circumference. it contains several small rivulets, which take their rise from lakes, and fall into the sea after a very short course. no trees were observed upon the island, and the vegetables were the same as those of kamtchatka. the following summer small parties of the inhabitants were seen; but they immediately fled upon the approach of the russians. some of them however were at last persuaded to a friendly intercourse and to pay a tribute: by these means they got back part of the arms, anchors, and iron work, of the plundered vessel. they continued to barter with the natives during the summer of , exchanging beads for the skins of foxes and sea-otters. [sidenote: departure from umnak.] the following winter hunting parties were sent out in umnak as well as to unalashka; and in july glottoff, without meeting with any more difficulties began his voyage homewards. we shall here conclude with giving a copy of the journal kept on board glottoff's vessel, the andrean and natalia; from which inferences with regard to the situation of the islands may be drawn. [sidenote: journal of the voyage.] journal of glottoff, on board the andrean and natalia. . oct. . sailed from kamtchatka bay. . wind southerly, steered between e. and s. e. three hours. . wind s. e. worked at n. e. course, hours. . from midnight sailed east with a fair wind, hours. . at six o'clock a. m. discovered beering's island distant about versts. . at o'clock came to anchor on the south east point of copper island. . at a. m. sailed to the south side of the island, anchored there at o'clock. . july . sailed from copper island at p. m. . sailed with a fair s. s. w. wind, hours. . made little way. . drove--wind e. n. e. . ditto. . ditto. aug. . ditto. . at a. m. wind n. e. steered e. . wind w. s. w. sailed knots an hour, versts. . wind south--sailed versts. . wind ditto--sailed versts. . wind ditto, knots, versts. . calm. . during the night gentle s. e. wind steered, n. e. at - / knots. . forenoon calm. at o'clock p. m. gentle n. e. wind, steered between e. n. e. and s. e. at the rate of three knots. . morning, wind e. n. e. afterwards s. s. w. with which steered n. e. . at o'clock the wind s. s. e. steered e. n. e. at the rate of three knots. . wind s. steered e. at - / knots, sailed versts. . wind s. s. e. steered e. at - / knots, sailed versts. . wind w. n. w. at knots, sailed versts. . the wind freshened, at knots, sailed versts. . wind n. n. e. steered e. s. e. at knots, sailed versts. . wind e. s. e. and s. e. light breezes and changeable. . wind s. e. steered n. e. at - / knots, sailed in hours versts. . wind s. and light breezes, steered e. at knots, sailed in hours versts. . before day-break calm; three hours after sun-rise a breeze sprung up at s. e. steered e. n. e. at knots, and sailed versts. . calm. . wind s. s. e. during the night, the ship sailed at the rate of knots; the wind afterwards came round to the s. s. w. and the ship sailed at to knots these hours versts. . saw land at day-break, at knots sailed versts. . wind w. s. w. sailed along the coast these hours versts. . wind n. w. steered n. e. at - / knots, versts. . wind e. n. e. the ship drove towards land, on which discovered a high mountain. . wind n. e. and stormy, the ship drove. . wind n. w. steered e. n. e. at the rate of knots. . wind s. s. e. at knots, steering again towards land. . a violent storm, wind west. sept. . wind west, steered n. e. at the rate of knots towards land. . wind s. w. steered n. e. towards land at knots. . wind s. w. drove n. n. e. along the coast. . wind w. n. w. steered n. e. at knots, sailed versts. . wind n. w. steered e. n. e. at knots, and towards evening came to anchor off the island kadyak. may . sailed from kadyak. . wind n. w. and made but little way w. s. w. . wind w. ship drove towards s. e. . wind w. s. w. ship drove e. s. e. the same day the wind came round to the s. when steered again towards kadyak. . wind e. s. e. fell in with the island alaska or alaksu. . wind s. w. steered n. w. . wind w. n. w. the ship drove under the foresail. . wind w. drove to the southward. june . wind w. s. w. landed on the island saktunak, for a supply of water. . wind s. e. steered s. w. along the island at knots. . wind n. e. steered w. s. w. at the rate of to knots, sailing in these hours versts. . calm. . at o'clock a. m. a small breeze s. e. . wind e. afterwards calm. towards evening the wind s.e. steered s. w. at knots, and unexpectedly discovered land ahead, which kept clear of with difficulty. from the th to the th at anchor off a small cliff. . a hard gale at s. the ship drove foul of the anchor, stood out to sea steering e. . anchored again at a small distance from land. . wind s. s. w. stood out to sea and steered e. s. e. . wind w. s. w. steered s. s. e. at the rate of knot. . calm. . wind s. steered w. at knot, the ship drove a little to the northward. . wind s. s. e. steered w. s. w. at knots. . calm. . ditto. . wind n. e. steered s. w. and sailed this day about versts. . the wind blowing right ahead, came to anchor off an unknown island, where continued till the . when stood out to sea early in the morning. . wind w. n. w. afterwards w. steered s. e. . calm, in the night a small but favourable breeze. . wind n. w. continued the course, at the rate of to knots[ ]. . wind n. e. steered w. at to knots, and saw land. . wind n. e. steered s. w. at the rate of knots. july . with the same wind and course, at the rate of knots, sailed versts. . fell in with the island umnak, and came to an anchor under a small island until next day; when brought the ship into the harbour, and laid her up. . june . brought the ship into the harbour, and continued at anchor there until the d of july. july . got under way. . wind e. . a south west wind drove the ship about versts n. e. . wind s. sailed about versts w. . wind w. s. w. the ship drove to the northward. . wind n. w. steered s. at the rate of one knot. . wind n. w. steered the whole day w. s. w. . wind s. s. w. sailed about versts w. n. w. . wind s. w. continued the same course, sailing only versts. . continued the same course, and sailed versts. . for the most part calm. . wind w. n. w. and stormy, the ship drove under the foresail. . wind s. sailed on the proper course versts. . wind e. s. e. sailed w. s. w. at the rate of knots, versts. . wind n. n. w. sailed s. w. at the rate of knots, versts. . wind s. steered w. at the rate of knots, and sailed versts. . wind s. w. the ship drove under the foresail. . wind e. n. e. steered w. n. w. at the rate of knots. . wind e. n. e. at the rate of to knots, sailed versts. . wind n. e. at - / knots, versts. . wind e. n. e. steered w. at knots, versts. . wind e. steered w. at the rate of knots, versts. . wind n. e. steered w. at knots versts. . the wind continued n. e. and freshened, steered w. at the rate of knots, versts. . a small breeze n. n. w. with which however sailed versts. . wind being w. s. w. drove hours under bare-poles. . wind south, steered w. at the rate of knots, versts--this day saw land. . wind s. s. e. sailed, at the rate of knots, versts, and approached the land, which found to be the island karaga--from the st to the th of august, continued our voyage towards the mouth of kamtchatka river, sometimes plying to windward, sometimes driving, and at last arrived happily with a rich cargo. [footnote : lief man bey nordwest wind auf den curs zu bis knoten.] chap. xi. _solovioff's_ voyage--he reaches _unalashka_, and passes two winters upon that island--relation of what passed there--fruitless attempts of the natives to destroy the crew--return of _solovioff_ to _kamtchatka_--journal of his voyage in returning--description of the islands _umnak_ and _unalashka_--productions--inhabitants--their manners--customs, &c. &c. [sidenote: voyage of solovioff in the st. peter and paul, .] in the year , jacob ulednikoff, merchant of irkutsk and company, fitted out a ship called the holy apostles peter and paul, under the command of ivan solovioff: she sailed from the mouth of kamtchatka river the th of august. the crew consisted of fifty-five men, amongst whom were some of the owners, and thirteen kamtchadals. they steered at first s. e. with the wind at n. w. but on its coming southerly they afterwards shaped their course e. n. e. the th one of the russian sailors died off kamtchatka point; the st they made beering's island, which they passed leaving it on their left. the st and nd of september they were becalmed, and afterwards the wind springing up at w. s. w. they continued their former course; until the th they sailed on with the wind at south; but on the th and th, from changeable breezes and dead calms, made no progress; from the th to the th, they sailed e. s. e. with southerly and westerly winds; and from that time to the fifteenth east, with the wind at west. september , they made the island umnak, where solovioff had formerly been in nikiphoroff's vessel. as they sailed along the northern coast, three islanders came to them in baidars; but, the crew having no interpreter, they would not come on board. as they found no good bay on that shore, they proceeded through a strait of about a verst broad, which separates umnak from unalashka. [sidenote: arrival at unalashka.] they lay-to during the night; and early on the th dropped anchor at the distance of about two hundred yards from the shore, in a bay on the north side of the last mentioned island. from thence the captain dispatched gregory korenoff at the head of twenty men in a baidar, with orders to land, reconnoitre the country, find out the nearest habitations, and report the disposition of the people. korenoff returned the same day, with an account that he had discovered one of the dwelling-caves of the savages, but abandoned and demolished, in which he had found traces of russians, viz. a written legend, and a broken musket-stock. in consequence of this intelligence, they brought the ship near the coast, and endeavoured to get into the mouth of a river called by the natives tsikanok, and by the russians osernia, but were prevented by shallow water. they landed however their tackle and lading. no natives made their appearance until the d, when two of them came of their own accord, and welcomed the russians on their arrival. they told their names, and were recognized by solovioff; he had known them on a former expedition, when agiak, one of the two, had served as an interpreter; the other, whose name was kashmak, had voluntarily continued some time with the crew on the same occasion. these two persons recounted the particular circumstances which attended the loss of kulkoff's, protassoff's, and trapesnikoff's vessels; from the last of which kashmak had, with great hazard of his life, escaped by flight. agiak had served as interpreter to protassoff's company, and related that the islanders, after murdering the hunting detachments of the russians, came to the harbour, and entered the ship under the most friendly appearances. finding the crew in perfect security, they suddenly attacked and slew them, together with their commander. he added, that he had hid himself under a bench until the murderers were gone: that since that time, he, as well as kashmak, had lived as fugitives; and in the course of their wanderings had learned the following intelligence from the girls who were gathering berries in the fields. the toigons of umnak, akutan, and toshko, with their relations of unalashka, had formed a confederacy. they agreed not to disturb any russians on their first landing, but to let them go out on different hunting excursions; being thus separated and weakened, the intention of the toigons were to attack and cut them off at the same time, so that no one party should have assistance from any of the others. they acquainted him also with glottoff's arrival at umnak. these unfavourable reports filled solovioff with anxiety; he accordingly doubled his watch, and used every precaution in his power against attacks from the savages. but wanting wood to repair his vessel, and wishing for more particular information concerning the situation of the island, he dispatched the th a party of thirty men, with the above-mentioned interpreter, to its western extremity. in three or four hours they rowed to ankonom, a point of land, where they saw a village, consisting of two large caves, and over against it a little island at no great distance. the moment the inhabitants saw them approaching, they got into their baidars, and put out to sea, leaving their dwellings empty. the russians found therein several skeletons, which, in the interpreter's opinion, were the remains of ten murdered sailors of trapesnikoff's company. with much persuasion the interpreter prevailed on the islanders to return to the place which they had just quitted: they kept however at a wary distance, and were armed for whatever might occur. [sidenote: hostilities between solovioff and the natives.] solovioff attempting to cut off their retreat, in order to secure if possible some hostages, they took the alarm, and began themselves the attack. upon this the russians fired upon and pursued them; four were killed, and seven taken prisoners, among whom was the toigon of the little island sedak. these prisoners, being bound and examined, confessed that a number of korovin's crew had been murdered in this place; and the toigon sent people to bring in a number of muskets, some kettles and tackle, which the natives had taken upon that occasion. they also brought intelligence that korovin, with a party in two baidars, had taken shelter at a place called inalga. upon this information, letters were immediately sent to korovin; upon the receipt of which he joined them the d of october. at the time of korovin's arrival, the savages made another attack on solovioff's watch with knives; which obliged the latter to fire, and six of the assailants were left dead on the spot. the captive toigon excused this attempt of his people by ascribing it to their fears, lest korovin out of revenge should put all the prisoners to death; on which account this effort was made to rescue them. solovioff, for the greater security, sent the prisoners by land to the haven, while korovin and his party went to the same place by sea. the toigon however was treated kindly, and even permitted to return home on condition of leaving his son as an hostage. in consequence of this kind behaviour the inhabitants of three other villages, agulak, kutchlok, and makuski presented hostages of their own accord. [sidenote: solovioff lays up the vessel, and winters upon unalashka.] from the remaining timber of the old dwelling the russians built a new hut; and on the fourteenth they laid up the vessel. koronoff was then sent upon a reconnoitring party to the southern side of the island, which in that part was not more than five or six versts broad: he proceeded on with his companions, sometimes rowing in canoes, sometimes travelling by land and dragging them after. he returned the twentieth, and reported that he had found upon the coast on the further side of the island an empty habitation. that he rowed from thence eastward along the shore, and behind the first point of land came to an island in the next bay; there he found about forty islanders of both sexes lodged under their baidars, who by his friendly behaviour had been induced to give him three hostages. these people afterwards settled in the above-mentioned empty hut, and came frequently to the harbour. on the th of october, solovioff himself went also upon a reconnoitring party along the north coast, towards the north-east end of the island. he rowed from the first promontory across a bay; and found on the opposite point of land a dwelling place called agulok, which lies about four hours row from the harbour. he found there thirteen men and about forty women and children, who delivered up several gun-barrels and ship-stores, and likewise informed him of two of korovin's crew who had been murdered. november , they proceeded farther; and after five or six hours rowing, they saw on a point of land another dwelling called ikutchlok, beyond which the interpreter shewed them the haven, where korovin's ship had been at anchor. this was called makushinshy bay; and on an island within it they found two toigons, called itchadak and kagumaga, with about an hundred and eighty people of both sexes employed in hunting sea-bears. these natives were not in the least hostile, and solovioff endeavoured to establish and confirm a friendly intercourse between them and his people. he remained with them until the th, when the toigons invited him to their winter quarters, which lay about five hours sail farther east: there he found two dwelling caves, each of forty yards square, near a rivulet abounding with fish which fell from a lake into a little bay. in the neighbourhood of this village is a hot spring below the sea mark, which is only to be seen at ebb tide. from hence he departed the th, but was forced back by storms, and detained there until the th of december. kagumaga then accompanied him to another village called totchikala; both the toigon and the interpreter advised him to be on his guard against the natives, whom they represented as very savage, sworn enemies to the russians, and the murderers of nine of kulkoff's crew. solovioff for these reasons passed the night on the open coast, and next morning sent the toigon before to inspire the natives with more friendly sentiments. some of them listened to his representations; but the greatest part fled upon solovioff's approach, so that he found the place consisting of four large dwelling caves almost empty, in which he secured himself with suitable precaution. here he found three hundred darts and ten bows with arrows, all which he destroyed, only reserving one bow and seventeen arrows as specimens of their arms. by the most friendly arguments he urged the few natives who remained to lay aside their enmity, and to persuade their leaders and relations to return to their habitations and live on terms of amity and friendship. on the th about an hundred men and a still greater number of women returned. [sidenote: renewal of hostilities.] but the fairest speeches had no effect on these savages, who kept aloof and prepared for hostilities, which they began on the th by an open attack. nineteen of them were killed, amongst whom was inlogusak one of their leaders, and the most inveterate fomenter of hostilities against the russians. the other leader aguladock being alive confessed, that on receiving the first news of solovioff's arrival they had resolved to attack the crew and burn the ship. notwithstanding this confession, no injury was offered to him: in consequence of this kind usage he was prevailed upon to deliver up his son as an hostage, and to order his people to live on friendly terms with the russians. during the month of january the natives delivered in three anchors, and a quantity of tackle which had been saved from a vessel formerly wrecked on that coast; and at the same time they brought three boys and two young girls as hostages and pledges of their future fidelity. january , solovioff set out for the haven where his ship lay: before his departure the toigons of makushinsk paid of their own accord a double tribute. february , kagumaga of makushink, agidalok of totzikala, and imaginak of ugamitzi, toigons of unalashka, with a great number of their relations, came to solovioff; they acquainted him with the arrival of a russian ship at unimak, the sixth island to the east of agunalashka, adding that they knew none of the crew excepting a kamtchadal named kirilko, who had been there on a former occasion. they likewise informed him that the natives, after having cut off part of the crew who had been sent out in two baidars, had found means to overpower the remainder and to destroy the vessel. from the name of the kamtchadal they concluded that this must have been another vessel fitted out by nikiphor trapesnikoff and company, of which no farther intelligence was ever received. willing to procure farther intelligence, they endeavoured to persuade the toigons to send a party of their people to the above-mentioned island; but the latter excused themselves, on account of the great distance and their dread of the islanders. february , solovioff set out a second time for the west end of the island, where they had formerly taken prisoner, and afterwards set at liberty, the toigon of sedak. from thence he proceeded to ikolga, which lies on the bay, and consists of only one hut. on the th he came to takamitka, where there is likewise only one hut on a point of land by the side of a rivulet, which falls from the mountains into the sea. here he met with korovin, in whose company he cut the blubber of a whale, which the waves had cast on shore; after this korovin went across the gulph to umnak, and he proceeded to ikaltshinsk, where on the th one of his party was carried off by sickness. march he returned to the haven, having met with no opposition from the islanders during this excursion. on his return he found one of the crew dead, and a dreadful scurvy raging amongst the rest; of that distemper five russians died in march, eight and a kamtchadal in april, and six more in may. about this time the islanders were observed to pay frequent visits to the hostages; and upon enquiring privately into the reason, some of the latter discovered, that the inhabitants of makushinsk had formed the design of cutting off the crew, and of making themselves masters of the vessel. solovioff had now great reasons to be apprehensive, for the crew were afflicted with the scurvy to such a violent degree, that out of the whole number only twelve persons were capable of defending themselves. these circumstances did not escape the observation of the natives; and they were accordingly inspired with fresh courage to renew their hostilities. on the th of may the russians perceived the toigon of itchadak, who had formerly paid a voluntary tribute, near the shore: he was accompanied by several islanders in three baidars. solovioff calling to him by the interpreter he came on shore, but kept at a distance desiring a conference with some of his relations. solovioff gave orders to seize him; and they were lucky enough to take him prisoner, together with two of his companions. he immediately confessed, that he had come with a view of enquiring of the hostages how many russians were still remaining: having procured the necessary intelligence, his intention was to surprise the watch at a convenient season, and afterwards to set fire to the ship. as they saw several islanders row past the harbour at the same time, and the toigon likewise informed them, that they were assembling to execute the abovementioned design; solovioff resolved to be much upon his guard. they separated, however, without attempting any hostilities. june , glottoff arrived at the harbour on a visit, and returned on the th to his ship. the captive toigon was now set at liberty, after being seriously exhorted to desist from hostilities. in the course of this month two more of the crew died; so that the arrival of korovin, who joined them about this time, with two of his own and two of kulkoff's crew, was of course a very agreeable circumstance. the sick likewise began to recover by degrees. july , solovioff, with a party of his people, in two baidars, made another excursion northwards; he passed by the places formerly mentioned as far as igonok, which lies ten versts beyond totzikala. igonok consists of one dwelling cave on the side of a rivulet, which falls from the mountains, and empties itself into the sea. the inhabitants amounted to about thirty men, who dwelt there with their wives and children. from thence solovioff proceeded along the shore into a bay; five versts further he found another rivulet, which has its source among the hills and flows through a plain. upon the shore of the same bay, opposite to the mouth of this rivulet, lay two villages, one of which only was inhabited; it was called ukunadok, and consisted of six dwelling caves. about thirty-five of the inhabitants were at that time employed in catching salmon in the rivulet. kulkoff's ship had lain at anchor about two miles from thence; but there were no remains of her to be found. after coming out of the bay he went forwards to the summer village umgaina distant about seven or eight leagues, and situated on the side of a rivulet, which takes its rise in a lake abounding with salmon. here he found the toigon amaganak, with about ten of the natives, employed in fishing. fifteen versts farther along the shore they found another summer village called kalaktak, where there was likewise another rivulet, which came from the hills. the inhabitants were sixty men and an hundred and seventy women and children: they gave solovioff a very friendly reception; and delivered up two hostages, who were brought from the neighbouring island akutan; with these he set out on his return, and on the th of august joined his crew. on the th he went over to the island umnak, accompanied by korovin, to bring off some ships stores left there by the latter; and returned to the haven on the th. on the st shaffyrin died, the same person whose adventures have been already related. sept. . korenoff was sent northwards upon an hunting party; he returned the th of january, . although the russians who remained at the haven met with no molestation from the natives during his absence; yet he and his companions were repeatedly attacked. having distributed to the inhabitants of the several villages through which he passed nets for the purpose of catching sea-otters, he went to the east part of the island as far as kalaktak, with an intention of hunting. upon his arrival at that place, on the st of october, the inhabitants fled with precipitation; and as all his efforts to conciliate their affections were ineffectual, he found it requisite to be upon his guard. nor was this precaution unnecessary; for on the following day they returned in a considerable body, armed with lances, made with the iron of the plundered vessels. korenoff, however, and his companions, who were prepared to receive them, killed twenty-six, and took several prisoners; upon which the others became more tractable. nov. . korenoff, upon his return to the haven, came to makushinsk, where he was kindly received by a toigon named kulumaga; but with regard to itchadak, it was plain that his designs were still hostile. instead of giving an account of the nets which had been left with him, he withdrew privately: and on the th of january, accompanied by a numerous body of islanders, made an attempt to surprise the russians. victory, however, again declared for korenoff; and fifteen of the assailants, amongst whom was itchadak himself, remained dead upon the spot. kulumaga assured them, in the strongest manner, that the design had been carried on without his knowledge; and protested, that he had often prevented his friend from committing hostilities against the russians. korenoff returned to the haven on the th of january; and on the th of february he went upon another hunting expedition toward the western point of the island. during this excursion he met with a party sent out by glottoff, at a place called takamitka; he then rowed over to umnak, where he collected a small tribute, and returned on the d of march. during his absence kyginik, kulumaga's son, paid a visit to the russians, and requested that he might be baptized, and be permitted to go aboard the vessel; his demand was immediately complied with. may th. korovin went, with fourteen men, to umnak, to bring off an anchor, which was buried in the sand. on his return preparations were made for their departure. before the arrival of korovin the hunters had killed black and brown foxes; and the same number of old and young sea-otters; since his arrival they had caught black foxes, the same number of common foxes, and sea-otters of different sizes. this cargo being put on board, the interpreter kashmak set at liberty, with a certificate of, and presents for his fidelity, and the hostages delivered up to the toigons and their relations, who had assembled at the haven, solovioff put to sea on the st of june, with an easterly wind. before his departure he received a letter from glottoff, informing him that he was likewise preparing for his return. [sidenote: journal of the voyage homewards.] june . the wind being contrary, they got but a small way from land. . steered again towards the shore, came to an anchor, and sent a boat for a supply of water, which returned without having seen any body. . weighed and steered w. with a s. e. wind. . favourable wind at n. e. and in the afternoon at n. . wind at n. w. and stormy, the ship drove under the foresail. & . sailed northwards, with a westerly wind. . calm till noon; afterwards breeze sprung up at s. with which they steered w. till next day at noon; when the wind coming round to the west, they changed their course, and steered n. w. . calm during the night. . a small breeze of northerly wind, with which they steered w. in the afternoon it fell calm, and continued so till the . at noon, when a breeze springing up at east, they steered w. on which course they continued during the . with a s. s. e. wind. from the to the . the wind was changeable from the s. w. to n. w. with which they still made a shift to get to the westward. . the wind e. they steered betwixt n. & w. which course they continued the th, th, th, with a northerly wind. . a. m. the wind changed to s. w. , , . wind at west. july . the wind changed to e. with which they steered between w. and s. w. with little variations, till the d. . they reached kamtchatkoi noss, and on the th. brought the ship, in good condition, into kamtchatka river. [sidenote: solovioff's description of the fox islands.] solovioff's description of these islands and the inhabitants being more circumstantial, than the accounts given by former navigators, deserves to be inserted at full length. according to his estimation, the island unalashka lies between and versts due east from the mouth of the kamtchatka river: the other islands to the eastward stretch towards n. e. he reckons the length of akutan at eighty versts; umnak at an hundred and fifty, and unalashka at two hundred. no large trees were seen upon any of the islands which he touched at. they produce underwood, small shrubs, and plants, for the most part similar to the common species found in kamtchatka. the winter is much milder than in the eastern parts of siberia, and continues only from november to the end of march. the snow seldom lies upon the ground for any time. rein-deer, bears, wolves, ice-foxes, are not to be found on these islands; but they abound in black, grey, brown, and red foxes; for which reason they have got the name of lyffie ostrova, or fox islands. these foxes are stronger than those of yakutsk, and their hair is much coarser. during the day they lie in caves and clifts of rocks; towards evening they come to the shore in search of food; they have long ago extirpated the brood of mice, and other small animals. they are not in the smallest degree afraid of the inhabitants, but distinguish the russians by the scent; having experienced the effects of their fire-arms. the number of sea-animals, such as sea-lions, sea-bears, and sea-otters, which resort to these shores, are very considerable. upon some of the islands warm springs and native sulphur are to be found. [sidenote: manners and customs of the inhabitants.] the fox-islands are in general very populous; unalashka, which is the largest island, is supposed to contain several thousand inhabitants. these savages live together in separate communities, composed of fifty, and sometimes of two or even three hundred persons; they dwell in large caves from forty to eighty yards long, from six to eight broad, and from four to five high. the roof of these caves is a kind of wooden grate, which is first spread over with a layer of grass, and then covered with earth. several openings are made in the iop, through which the inhabitants go up and down by ladders: the smallest dwellings have two or three entrances of this sort, and the largest five or six. each cave is divided into a certain number of partitions, which are appropriated to the several families; and these partitions are marked by means of stakes driven into the earth. the men and women sit on the ground; and the children lie down, having their legs bound together under them, in order to make them learn to sit upon their hams. although no fire is ever made in these caves, they are generally so warm, that both sexes sit naked. these people obey the calls of nature openly, and without esteeming it indecent. they wash themselves first with their own urine, and afterwards with water. in winter they go always bare-footed; and when they want to warm themselves, especially before they go to sleep, they set fire to dry grass and walk over it. their habitations being almost dark, they use particularly in winter a sort of large lamps, made by hollowing out a stone, into which they put a rush-wick and burn train oil. a stone so hollowed is called tsaaduck. the natives[ ] are whites with black hair; they have flat faces, and are of a good stature. the men shave with a sharp stone or knife, the circumference and top of the head, and let the hair which remains hang from the crown[ ]. the women cut their hair in a streight line over the forehead; behind they let it grow to a considerable length, and tie it in a bunch. some of the men wear their beards; others shave or pull them out by the roots. [footnote : von gesicht sind sie platt undweiss durchgaengig mit schwarzen haaren.] [footnote : the original in this passage is somewhat obscure. die maenner scheeren mit einem scharfen stein oder messer den umkreiss des haarkopfs und die platte, und lassen die haare um die krone des kopfs rundum ueberhangen.] they mark various figures on their faces, the backs of their hands, and lower parts of their arms, by pricking them first with a needle, and then rubbing the parts with a sort of black clay. they make three incisions in the under-lip; they place in the middle one a flat bone, or a small coloured stone; and in each of the side-ones they fix a long pointed piece of bone, which bends and reaches almost to the ears. they likewise make a hole through the gristle of the nose, into which they put a small piece of bone in such a manner as to keep the nostrils extended. they also pierce holes in their ears, and wear in them what little ornaments they can procure. their dress consists of a cap and a fur-coat, which reaches down to the knee. some of them wear common caps of a party coloured bird-skin, upon which they leave part of the wings and tail. on the fore-part of their hunting and fishing caps they place a small board like a screen, adorned with the jaw-bones of sea-bears, and ornamented with glass beads, which they receive in barter from the russians. at their festivals and dancing parties they use a much more showy sort of caps. their fur-coats are made like shirts, being close behind and before, and are put on over the head. the mens dress is made of birds skins, but the womens of sea-otters and sea-bears. these skins are died with a sort of red earth, and neatly sewed with sinews, and ornamented with various stripes of sea-otter skins and leathern fringes. they have also upper garments made of the intestines of the largest sea-calves and sea-lions. their vessels consist of two sorts: the larger are leathern boats or baidars, which have oars on both sides, and are capable of holding thirty or forty people. the smaller vessels are rowed with a double paddle, and resemble the canoes of the greenlanders, containing only one or two persons: they never weigh above thirty pounds, being nothing but a thin skeleton of a boat covered with leather. in these however they pass from one island to another, and even venture out to sea to a considerable distance. in calm weather they go out in them to catch turbot and cod with bone-hooks and lines made of sinews or sea-weed. they strike fish in the rivulets with darts. whales and other sea-animals thrown ashore by the waves are carefully looked after, and no part of them is lost. the quantity of provisions which they procure by hunting and fishing being far too small for their wants, the greatest part of their food consists of sea-wrack and shell-fish, which they find on the shore. no stranger is allowed to hunt or fish near a village, or to carry off any thing fit for food. when they are on a journey, and their provisions are exhausted, they beg from village to village, or call upon their friends and relations for assistance. they feed upon the flesh of all sorts of sea-animals, and generally eat it raw. but if at any time they choose to dress their victuals, they make use of an hollow stone; having placed the fish or flesh therein, they cover it with another, and close the interstices with lime or clay. they then lay it horizontally upon two stones, and light a fire under it. the provision which is intended for keeping is dried without salt in the open air. they gather berries of various sorts, and lily roots of the same species with those which grow wild at kamtchatka. they are unacquainted with the manner of dressing the cow-parsnip, as practised in that peninsula; and do not understand the art of distilling brandy or any other strong liquor from it. they are at present very fond of snuff, which the russians have introduced among them. no traces were found of any worship, neither did they seem to have any sorcerers[ ] among them. if a whale happens to be cast on shore, the inhabitants assemble with great marks of joy, and perform a number of extraordinary ceremonies. they dance and beat drums[ ] of different sizes: they then cut up the fish, of which the greatest and best part is consumed on the spot. on such occasions they wear showy caps; and some of them dance naked in wooden masks, which reach down to their shoulders, and represent various sorts of sea-animals. their dances consist of short steps forwards, accompanied with many strange gestures. [footnote : in the last chapter it is said that there are sorcerers among them.] [footnote : the expression in the original is "schlagen auf grossen platten handpauken," which, being literally translated, signifies "they beat upon large flat hand-kettle drums of different sounds." by the accounts which i procured at petersburg, concerning the form of these drums, they seem to resemble in shape those made use of by the sorcerers of kamtchatka, and are of different sizes. i had an opportunity of seeing one of the latter at the cabinet of curiosities. it is of an oval form, about two feet long and one broad: it is covered only at one end like the tambour de basque, and is worn upon the arm like a shield.] marriage ceremonies are unknown among them, and each man takes as many wives as he can maintain; but the number seldom exceeds four. these women are occasionally allowed to cohabit with other men; they and their children are also not unfrequently bartered in exchange for commodities. when an islander dies, the body is bound with thongs, and afterwards exposed to the air in a sort of wooden cradle hung upon a cross-bar, supported by forks. upon these occasions they cry and make bitter lamentations. their toigons or princes are those who have numerous families, and are skilful and successful in hunting and fishing. their weapons consist of bows, arrows, and darts: they throw the latter very dexterously, and to a great distance from a hand-board. for defence they use wooden shields, called kuyakin. these islanders are, notwithstanding their savageness, very docile; and the boys, whom the russians keep as hostages, soon acquire a knowledge of their language. chap. xii. voyage of _otcheredin_--he winters upon _umnak_--arrival of _levasheff_ upon _unalashka_--return of _otcheredin_ to _ochotsk_. [sidenote: voyage of otcheredin in the st. paul, .] in the year three merchants, namely, orechoff of yula, lapin of solikamsk, and shiloff of ustyug, fitted out a new vessel called the st. paul, under the command of aphanassei otcheredin. she was built in the harbour of ochotsk: his crew consisted of sixty-two russians and kamtchadals, and she carried on board two inhabitants of the fox islands named john and timothy surgeff, who had been brought to kamtchatka and baptised. september , they sailed from ochotsk, and arrived the d in the bay of bolcheresk where they wintered. august , , they continued their voyage, and having passed the second of the kuril isles, steered on the th into the open sea; on the th they reached the nearest of the fox islands, which the interpreters called [ ]atchak. a storm arising they cast anchor in a bay, but saw no inhabitants upon the shore. [sidenote: arrival at umnak.] on the th they sailed again, discovered on the th sagaugamak, along which they steered north east, and on the st came within seven miles of the island umnak; where, on account of the lateness of the season and the want of provision and water, they determined to winter. accordingly on the st of september, by the advice of the interpreters, they brought the vessel into a convenient bay near a point of land lying n. w. where they fastened it to the shore with cables. [footnote : called in a former journal atchu, p. .] upon their landing they discovered several pieces of a wreck; and two islanders, who dwelled on the banks of a rivulet which empties itself into the bay, informed them, that these were the remains of a russian vessel, whose commander's name was denys. from this intelligence they concluded that this was protassoff's vessel, fitted out at ochotsk. the inhabitants of umnak, unalashka, and of the five mountains, had assembled and murdered the crew, when separated into different hunting parties. the same islanders also mentioned the fate of kulkoff's and trapesnikoff's ships upon the island unalashka. although this information occasioned general apprehensions, yet they had no other resource than to draw the vessel ashore, and to take every possible precaution against a surprize. accordingly they kept a constant watch, made presents to the toigons and the principal inhabitants, and demanded some children as hostages. for some time the islanders behaved very peaceably, until the russians endeavoured to persuade them to become tributary: upon which they gave such repeated signs of their hostile intentions, that the crew lived under continual alarms. in the beginning of september information was brought them of the arrival of a vessel, fitted out by ivan popoff merchant of lalsk, at unalashka. about the end of the said month the toigon of the five mountains came to otcheredin, and was so well satisfied with his reception, that he brought hostages, and not only assured them of his own friendship, but promised to use his influence with the other toigons, and to persuade them to the same peaceable behaviour. but the other toigons not only paid no regard to his persuasions, but even barbarously killed one of his children. from these and other circumstances the crew passed the winter under continual apprehensions, and durst not venture far from the harbour upon hunting parties. hence ensued a scarcity of provisions; and hunger, joined to the violent attacks of the scurvy, made great havock amongst them, insomuch that six of them died, and several of the survivors were reduced to so weak a condition, that they were scarce able to move. the health of the crew being re-established in the spring, twenty-three men were sent on the th of june in two boats to the five mountains, in order to persuade the inhabitants to pay tribute. on the th they landed on the island ulaga, where they were attacked with great spirit by a large body of the inhabitants; and though three of the russians were wounded, yet the savages were repulsed with considerable loss: they were so terrified by their defeat, that they fled before the russians during their continuance on that island. the latter were detained there by tempestuous weather until the th of july; during which time they found two rusty firelocks belonging to protassoff's crew. on the th they returned to the harbour; and it was immediately resolved to dispatch some companies upon hunting expeditions. accordingly on the st of august matthew poloskoff, a native of ilinsk, was sent with twenty-eight men in two boats to unalashka with the following orders; that if the weather and other circumstances were favourable, they were to make to akutan and akun, the two nearest islands to the east, but to proceed no further. in consequence of this, poloskoff reached akutan about the end of the month; and being kindly received by the inhabitants, he left six of his party to hunt; with the remainder he went to akun, which lies about two versts from akutan. from thence he dispatched five men to the neighbouring islands, where he was informed by the interpreters there were great quantities of foxes. poloskoff and his companions continued the whole autumn upon akun without being annoyed; but on the th of december the inhabitants of the different islands assembled in great numbers, and attacked them by land and sea. they informed poloskoff, by means of the interpreters, that the russians whom he had sent to the neighbouring islands were killed; that the two vessels at umnak and unalashka were plundered, and the crew put to death; and that they were now come to make him and his party share the same fate. the russian fire-arms however kept them in due respect; and towards evening they dispersed. the same night the interpreter deserted, probably at the instigation of his countrymen, who nevertheless killed him, as it was said, that winter. january , the savages ventured to make a second attack. having surprised the guard by night, they tore off the roof of the russian dwelling, and shot down into the hut, making at the same time great outcries: by this unexpected assault four russians were killed, and three wounded; but the survivors no sooner had recourse to their fire-arms, than the enemy was driven to flight. meanwhile another body of the natives attempted to seize the two vessels, but without success; they however cut off the party of six men left by poloskoff at akutan, together with the five hunters dispatched to the contiguous islands, and two of popoff's crew who were at the westermost part of unalashka. poloskoff continued upon akun in great danger until the th of february; when, the wounded being recovered, he sailed over with a fair wind to popoff's vessel at unalashka; and on the th of may returned to otcheredin. in april popoff's vessel being got ready for the voyage, all the hostages, whose number amounted to forty, were delivered to otcheredin. july the th a vessel belonging to the same popoff arrived from beering's island, and cast anchor in the same bay where otcheredin's lay; and both crews entered into an agreement to share in common the profits of hunting. strengthened by this alliance, otcheredin prevailed upon a number of the inhabitants to pay tribute. august the d otcheredin's mate was sent with six boats and fifty-eight men to hunt upon unalashka and akutan; and there remained thirty men with the vessels in the harbour, who kept constant watch. [sidenote: otcheredin receives an account of levasheff's arrival at unalashka.] soon afterwards otcheredin and the other commander received a letter from levasheff captain lieutenant of the imperial fleet, who accompanied captain krenitzin in the secret expedition to those islands. the letter was dated september , : it informed them he was arrived at unalashka in the st. paul, and lay at anchor in the same bay in which kulkoff's vessel had been lost. he likewise required a circumstantial account of their voyages. by another order of the th he sent for four of the principal hostages, and demanded the tribute of skins which had been exacted from the islanders. but as the weather was generally tempestuous at this season of the year, they deferred sending them till the spring. may the st levasheff set sail for kamtchatka; and in returned safely from his expedition at st. petersburg. the two vessels remained at umnak until the year , during which time the crews met with no opposition from the islanders. they continued their hunting parties, in which they had such good fortune, that the share of otcheredin's vessel (whose voyage is here chiefly related) consisted in large sea-otter skins, young ones and cubs, the skins of fine black foxes, of an inferior sort, and about red fox skins. with this large cargo of furs otcheredin set sail on the d of may, , from umnak, leaving popoff's crew behind. a short time before their departure, the other interpreter ivan surgeff, at the instigation of his relations, deserted. [sidenote: return of otcheredin to ochotsk.] after having touched at the nearest of the aleütian islands, otcheredin and his crew arrived on the th of july at ochotsk. they brought two islanders with them, whom they baptized. the one was named alexèy solovieff; the other boris otcheredin. these islanders unfortunately died on their way to petersburg; the first between yakutsk and irkutsk; and the latter at irkutsk, where he arrived on the st of february, . chap. xiii. conclusion--general position and situation of the _aleütian_ and _fox islands_--their distance from each other--further description of the dress, manners, and customs of the inhabitants--their feasts and ceremonies, &c. [sidenote: position of beering's and copper islands.] according to the latest informations brought by otcheredin's and popoff's vessels, the north west point of commandorskoi ostroff, or beering's island, lies due east from the mouth of the kamtchatka river, at the distance of versts. it is from to versts long, and stretches from north west to south east, in the same direction as copper island. the latter is situated about or versts from the south east point of beering's island, and is about versts in length. [sidenote: of the aleütian isles.] about versts east by south of copper island lie the aleütian isles, of which attak is the nearest: it is rather larger than beering's island, of the same shape, and stretches from west to south east. from thence about versts eastwards is situated semitshi, extending from west to east, and near its eastern point another small island. to the south of the strait, which separates the two latter islands, and at the distance of versts from both of them, lies shemiya in a similar position, and not above versts in length. all these islands stretch between and degrees of north latitude. [sidenote: of the fox islands.] the fox islands are situated e. n. e. from the aleütians: the nearest of these, atchak, is about versts distant; it lies in about degrees north latitude, and extends from w. s. w. towards e. n. e. it greatly resembles copper island, and is provided with a commodious harbour on the notrh. from thence all the other islands of this chain stretch in a direction towards n. e. by east. the next to atchak is amlak, about versts distant; it is nearly of the same size; and has an harbour on its south side. next follows sagaugamak, at about the same distance, but somewhat smaller; from that it is versts to amuchta, a small rocky island; and the same distance from the latter to yunaksan, another small island. about versts from yunaksan there is a cluster of five small islands, or rather mountains, kigalgist, kagamila, tsigulak, ulaga, and tana-unok, and which are therefore called by the russians pät sopki, or the five mountains. of these tana-unok lies most to the n. e. towards which the western point of umnak advances within the distance of versts. umnak stretches from s. w. to n. e.; it is versts in length, and has a very considerable bay on the west end of the northern coast, in which there is a small island or rock, called adugak; and on the south side is shemalga, another rock. the western point of aghunalashka, or unalashka, is separated from the east end of umnak by a strait near versts in breadth. the position of these two islands is similar; but aghunalashka is much the largest, and is above versts long. it is divided towards the n. e. into three promontories, one of which runs out in a westerly direction, forming one side of a large bay on the north coast of the island: the second stretches out n. e. ends in three points, and is connected with the island by a small neck of land. the third or most southerly one is separated from the last mentioned promontory by a deep bay. near unalashka towards the east lies another small island called skirkin. about versts from the north east promontory of aghunalashka lie four islands: the first, akutan, is about half as big as umnak; a verst further is the small island akun; a little beyond is akunok; and lastly kigalga, which is the smallest of these four, and stretches with akun and akunok almost from n. to s. kigalga is situated about the st degree of latitude. about versts from thence lies an island called unimak[ ], upon which captain krenitzin wintered; and beyond it the inhabitants said there was a large tract of country called alashka, of which they did not know the boundaries. [footnote : krenitzin wintered at alaxa, and not at unimak. see appendix i. n^o i.] the fox islands are in general very rocky, without containing any remarkable high mountains: they are destitute of wood, but abound in rivulets and lakes, which are mostly without fish. the winter is much milder than in siberia; the snow seldom falls before the beginning of january, and continues on the ground till the end of march. there is a volcano in amuchta; in kagamila sulphur flows from a mountain; in taga-unok there are warm springs hot enough to boil provisions; and flames of sulphur are occasionally seen at night upon the mountains of unalashka and akutan. [sidenote: account of the inhabitants of the fox islands.] the fox islands are tolerably populous in proportion to their size. the inhabitants are entirely free, and pay tribute to no one: they are of a middle stature; and live, both in summer and winter, in holes dug in the earth. no signs of religion were found amongst them. several persons indeed pass for sorcerers, pretending to know things past and to come, and are accordingly held in high esteem, but without receiving any emolument. filial duty and respect towards the aged are not held in estimation by these islanders. they are not however deficient in fidelity to each other; they are of lively and chearful tempers, though rather impetuous, and naturally prone to anger. in general they do not observe any rules of decency, but follow all the calls of nature publicly, and without the least reserve. they wash themselves with their own urine. [sidenote: their food.] their principal food consists in fish and other sea-animals, small shell-fish and sea-plants: their greatest delicacies are wild lilies and other roots, together with different kinds of berries. when they have laid in a store of provisions, they eat at any time of the day without distinction; but in case of necessity they are capable of fasting several days together. they seldom heat their dwellings; but when they are desirous of warming themselves, they light a bundle of hay, and stand over it; or else they set fire to train oil, which they pour into a hollow stone. they feed their children when very young with the coarsest flesh, and for the most part raw. if an infant cries, the mother immediately carries it to the sea-side, and be it summer or winter holds it naked in the water until it is quiet. this custom is so far from doing the children any harm, that it hardens them against the cold; and they accordingly go bare-footed through the winter without the least inconvenience. they are also trained to bathe frequently in the sea; and it is an opinion generallly received among the islanders, that by that means they are rendered bold, and become fortunate in fishing. [sidenote: dress.] the men wear shirts made of the skins of cormorants, sea-divers, and gulls; and, in order to keep out the rain, they have upper garments of the bladders and other intestines of sea-lions, sea-calves, and whales, blown up and dried. they cut their hair in a circular form close to their ears; and shave also a round place upon the top. the women, on the contrary, let the hair descend over the forehead as low as the eye-brows, and tie the remaining part in a knot upon the top of the head. they pierce the ears, and hang therein bits of coral which they get from the russians. both sexes make holes in the gristle of the nose, and in the under-lips, in which they thrust pieces of bone, and are very fond of such kind of ornaments. they mark also and colour their faces with different figures. they barter among one another sea-otters, sea-bears, clothes made of bird-skins and of dried intestines, skins of sea-lions and sea-calves for the coverings of baidars, wooden masks, darts, thread made of sinews and reindeer hair, which they get from the country of alaska. their houshold utensils are square pitchers and large troughs, which they make out of the wood driven ashore by the sea. [sidenote: arms.] their weapons are bows and arrows pointed with flints, and javelins of two yards in length, which they throw from a small board. instead of hatchets they use crooked knives of flint or bone. some iron knives, hatchets, and lances, were observed amongst them, which they had probably got by plundering the russians. according to the reports of the oldest inhabitants of umnak and unalashka, they have never been engaged in any war either amongst themselves or with their neighbours, except once with the people of alashka, the occasion of which was as follows: the toigon of umnak's son had a maimed hand; and some inhabitants of alashka, who came upon a visit to that island, fastened to his arm a drum, out of mockery, and invited him to dance. the parents and relations of the boy were offended at this insult: hence a quarrel ensued; and from that time the two people have lived in continual enmity, attacking and plundering each other by turns. according to the reports of the islanders, there are mountains upon alashka, and woods of great extent at some distance from the coast. the natives wear clothes made of the skins of reindeer, wolves, and foxes, and are not tributary to any of their neighbours. the inhabitants of the fox-islands seem to have no knowledge of any country beyond alashka. [sidenote: feasts.] feasts are very common among these islanders; and more particularly when the inhabitants of one island are visited by those of the others. the men of the village meet their guests beating drums, and preceded by the women, who sing and dance. at the conclusion of the dance the hosts invite them to partake of the feasts; after which ceremony the former return first to their dwellings, place mats in order, and serve up their best provision. the guests next enter, take their places, and after they are satisfied the diversions begin. first, the children dance and caper, at the same time making a noise with their small drums, while the owners of the hut of both sexes sing. next, the men dance almost naked, tripping after one another, and beating drums of a larger size: when these are weary, they are relieved by the women, who dance in their clothes, the men continuing in the mean time to sing and beat their drums. at last the fire is put out, which had been kindled for the ceremony. the manner of obtaining fire is by rubbing two pieces of dry wood, or most commonly by striking two flints together, and letting the sparks fall upon some sea-otter's hair mixed with sulphur. if any sorcerer is present, it is then his turn to play his tricks in the dark; if not, the guests immediately retire to their huts, which are made on that occasion of their canoes and mats. the natives, who have several wives, do not withhold them from their guests; but where the owner of the hut has himself but one wife, he then makes the offer of a female servant. their hunting season is principally from the end of october to the beginning of december, during which time they kill large quantities of young sea-bears for their clothing. they pass all december in feastings and diversions similar to that above mentioned: with this difference, however, that the men dance in wooden masks, representing various sea-animals, and painted red, green, or black, with coarse coloured earths found upon these islands. during these festivals they visit each other from village to village, and from island to island. the feasts concluded, masks and drums are broken to pieces, or deposited in caverns among the rocks, and never afterwards made use of. in spring they go out to kill old sea-bears, sea-lions, and whales. during summer, and even in winter when it is calm, they row out to sea, and catch cod and other fish. their hooks are of bone; and for lines they make use of a string made of a long tenacious sea-weed, which is sometimes found in those seas near one hundred and sixty yards in length. whenever they are wounded in any encounter, or bruised by any accident, they apply a sort of yellow root to the wound, and fast for some time. when their head achs, they open a vein in that part with a stone lancet. when they want to glue the points of their arrows to the shaft, they strike their nose till it bleeds, and use the blood as glue. murder is not punished amongst them, for they have no judge. with respect to their ceremonies of burying the dead, they are as follow: the bodies of poor people are wrapped up in their own clothes, or in mats; then laid in a grave, and covered over with earth. the bodies of the rich are put, together with their clothes and arms, in a small boat made of the wood driven ashore by the sea: this boat is hung upon poles placed cross-ways; and the body is thus left to rot in the open air. the customs and manners of the inhabitants of the aleütian isles are nearly similar to those of the inhabitants of the fox islands. the former indeed are rendered tributary, and entirely subject to russia; and most of them have a slight acquaintance with the russian language, which they have learned from the crews of the different vessels who have landed there. part ii. containing the conquest of siberia, and the history of the transactions and commerce between russia and china. chap. i. first irruption of the _russians_ into _siberia_--second inroad--_yermac_ driven by the tzar of _muscovy_ from the volga, retires to _orel_ a _russian_ settlement--enters _siberia_ with an army of _cossacks_--his progress and exploits--defeats _kutchum chan_--conquers his dominions--cedes them to the tzar--receives a reinforcement of _russian_ troops--is surprized by _kutchum chan_--his defeat and death--veneration paid to his memory--_russian_ troops evacuate _siberia_--re-enter and conquer the whole country--their progress stopped by the _chinese_. [sidenote: first irruption of the russians into siberia under the reign of ivan vassilievitch i.] siberia was scarcely known to the russians before the middle of the sixteenth century[ ]. for although an expedition was made, under the reign of ivan vassilievitch i. into the north western parts of that country, as far as the river oby, by which several tartar tribes were rendered tributary, and some of their chiefs brought prisoners to moscow; yet this incursion bore a greater resemblance to the desultory inroads of barbarians, than to any permanent establishment of empire by a civilized nation. indeed the effects of that expedition soon vanished; nor does any trace of the least communication with siberia again appear in the russian history before the reign of ivan vassilievitch ii. at that period siberia again became an object of attention, by means of one anika strogonoff, a russian merchant, who had established some salt-works at solvytshegodskaia, a town in the government of archangel. [footnote : s. r. g. vi. p. - . fis. sib. ges. tom. i.] [sidenote: anika strogonoff trades with the people of siberia.] this person carried on a trade of barter with the inhabitants of the north-western parts of siberia, who brought every year to the abovementioned town large quantities of the choicest furs. upon their return to their country strogonoff was accustomed to send with them some russian merchants, who crossed the mountains, and traded with the natives. by these means a considerable number of very valuable furs were procured at an easy rate, in exchange for toys and other commodities of trifling value. this traffic was continued for several years, without any interruption; during which strogonoff rapidly amassed a very considerable fortune[ ]. at length the tzar ivan vassilievitch ii. foreseeing the advantages which would accrue to his subjects, from establishing a more general and regular commerce with these people, determined to enlarge the communication already opened with siberia. [sidenote: second irruption of the russians into siberia in the reign of ivan vassilievitch ii.] accordingly he sent a corps of troops into that country. they followed the same route which had been discovered by the russians in the former expedition, and which was lately frequented by the merchants of solvytshegodskaia. it lay along the banks of the petschora, and from thence crossed the yugorian mountains, which form the north eastern boundary of europe. these troops, however, do not seem to have passed the irtish, or to have penetrated further than the western branch of the river oby. some tartar tribes were indeed laid under contribution; and a chief, whose name was yediger, consented to pay an annual tribute of a thousand sables. but this expedition was not productive of any lasting effects; for soon afterwards yediger was defeated, and taken prisoner by kutchum chan; the latter was a lineal descendant of the celebrated zinghis chan; and had newly established his empire in those parts. [footnote : s. r. g. vi. p. - . fis. sib. ges. p. .] this second inroad was probably made about the middle of the sixteenth century; for the tzar ivan vassilievitch assumed the title of lord of all the siberian lands so early as , before the conquests made by yermac in that kingdom[ ]. but probably the name of siberia was at that time only confined to the district then rendered tributary; and as the russians extended their conquests, this appellation was afterwards applied to the whole tract of country which now bears that name. [footnote : s. r. g. vi. p. .] for some time after the above-mentioned expedition, the tzar does not appear to have made any attempts towards recovering his lost authority in those distant regions. but his attention was again turned to that quarter by a concurrence of incidents; which, though begun without his immediate interposition, terminated in a vast accession of territory. [sidenote: strogonoff forms settlements upon the kama and tchussovaia.] strogonoff, in recompence for having first opened a trade with the inhabitants of siberia, obtained from the tzar large grants of land; accordingly he founded colonies upon the banks of the rivers kama and tchussovaia; and these settlements gave rise to the entire subjection of siberia by the refuge which they not long afterwards afforded to yermac timofeeff. this person was nothing more than a fugitive cossac of the don, and chief of a troop of banditti who infested the shores of the caspian sea. but as he was the instrument by which such a vast extent of dominion was added to the russian empire, it will not be uninteresting to develop the principal circumstances, which brought this cossac from the shores of the caspian to the banks of the kama; and to trace the progress which he afterwards made in the distant regions of siberia. by the victories which the tzar ivan vassilievitch had gained over the tatars of casan and astracan, that monarch extended his dominions as far as the caspian sea; and thereby established a commerce with the persians and bucharians. [sidenote: yermac is driven from the shores of the caspian sea. a. d. .] but as the merchants who traded to those parts were continually pillaged by the cossacs of the don; and as the roads which lay by the side of that river, and of the volga, were infested with those banditti; the tzar sent a considerable force against them. accordingly, they were attacked and routed; part were slain, part made prisoners, and the rest escaped by flight. among the latter was a corps of six thousand cossacs, under the command of the above-mentioned yermac timofeeff[ ]. [footnote : s. r. g. vi. p. . fis. sib. ges. i. p. .] [sidenote: he retires to orel, one of the russian settlements.] that celebrated adventurer, being driven from his usual haunts, retired, with his followers, into the interior part of the province of casan. from thence he directed his course along the banks of the kama, until he came to orel[ ]. that place was one of the russian settlements recently planted, and was governed by maxim grandson of anika strogonoff. yermac, instead of storming the place, and pillaging the inhabitants, acted with a degree of moderation unusual in a chief of banditti. being hospitably received by strogonoff, and supplied with every thing that was necessary for the subsistence of his troops, he fixed his winter quarters at that settlement. [sidenote: determines to invade siberia.] his restless genius however did not suffer him to continue for any length of time in a state of inactivity; and from the intelligence he procured concerning the situation of the neighbouring tartars of siberia, he turned his arms toward that quarter. [footnote : s. r. g. vi. p. .] [sidenote: state of siberia.] siberia was at that time partly divided among a number of separate princes; and partly inhabited by the various tribes of independent tartars. of the former kutchum chan was the most powerful sovereign. his dominions consisted of that tract of country which now forms the south western part of the province of tobolsk; and stretched from the banks of the irtish and oby to those of the tobol and tura. his principal residence was at sibir[ ], a small fortress upon the river irish, not far from the present town of tobolsk; and of which some ruins are still to be seen. although his power was very considerable, yet there were some circumstances which seemed to ensure success to an enterprizing invader. he had newly acquired a large part of his territories by conquest; and had, in a great measure, alienated the affections of his idolatrous subjects by the intolerant zeal, with which he introduced and disseminated the mahometan religion[ ]. [footnote : several authors have supposed the name of siberia to derive its origin from this fortress, soon after it was first taken by the russians under yermac. but this opinion is advanced without sufficient foundation; for the name of sibir was unknown to the tartars, that fort being by them called isker. besides, the southern part of the province of tobolsk, to which the name of siberia was originally applied, was thus denominated by the russians before the invasion of yermac. this denomination probably first came from the permians and sirjanians, who brought the first accounts of siberia to the russians. s. r. g. vi. p. .] [footnote : s. r. g. vi. p. .] strogonoff did not fail of displaying to yermac this inviting posture of affairs, as well with a view of removing him from his present station, as because he himself was personally exasperated against kutchum chan: for the latter had secretly instigated a large body of tartars to invade the russian settlements upon the river tchussovaia; and had afterwards commenced open hostilities against them with a body of forces under the command of his cousin mehemet kul. and although both these attempts had failed of success, yet the troops engaged in them had left behind traces of havock and devastation too lasting to be easily effaced[ ]. [footnote : fis. sib. ges. i. p. .] [sidenote: marches towards siberia.] all these various considerations were not lost upon yermac: having therefore employed the winter in preparations for his intended expedition, he began his march in the summer of the following year, , along the banks of the tchussovaia. the want of proper guides, and a neglect of other necessary precautions, greatly retarded his march, and he was overtaken by the winter before he had made any considerable progress. [sidenote: returns to orel.] and at the appearance of spring he found his stock of provisions so nearly exhausted, that he was reduced to the necessity of returning to orel. but this failure of success by no means extinguished his ardour for the prosecution of the enterprize; it only served to make him still more solicitous in guarding against the possibility of a future miscarriage. by threats he extorted from strogonoff every assistance which the nature of the expedition seemed to require. besides a sufficient quantity of provisions, all his followers, who were before unprovided with fire-arms, were supplied with muskets and ammunition; and, in order to give the appearance of a regular army to his troops, colours were distributed to each company, which were ornamented with the images of saints, after the manner of the russians. having thus made all previous arrangements, he thought himself in a condition to force his way into siberia. [sidenote: his second expedition.] accordingly, in the month of june, , he set out upon this second expedition. his followers amounted to five thousand men; adventurers inured to hardships, and regardless of danger: they placed implicit confidence in their leader, and seemed to be all animated with one and the same spirit. [sidenote: arrives upon the banks of the tura.] he continued his route partly by land, and partly by water: the navigation however of the rivers was so tedious, and the roads so rugged and difficult, that eighteen months elapsed before he reached tchingi, a small town upon the banks of the tura[ ]. [footnote : s.r.g. vi. p. - - .] here he mustered his troops, and found his army considerably reduced: part had been exhausted by fatigue, part carried off by sickness, and part cut off in skirmishes with the tartars. the whole remaining number amounted to about fifteen hundred effective men; and yet with this handful of troops yermac did not hesitate a moment in advancing against kutchum chan. that prince was already in a posture of defence; and resolved to guard his crown to the last extremity. having collected his forces, he dispatched several flying parties against yermac, himself remaining behind with the slower of his troops: but all these detachments were driven back with considerable loss; and worried in many successive skirmishes. yermac continued his march without intermission, bearing down all resistance until he reached the center of his adversary's dominions. these successes however were dearly bought; for his army was now reduced to five hundred men. kutchum chan was encamped[ ] at no great distance upon the banks of the irtish, with a very superior force, and determined to give him battle. yermac, who was not to be daunted by the inequality of numbers, prepared for the engagement with a confidence which never forsook him; his troops were equally impatient for action, and knew no medium between conquest and death. the event of the combat corresponded with this magnanimity. [sidenote: defeats ketchum chan. .] after an obstinate and well fought battle, victory declared in favour of yermac: the tartars were entirely routed, and the carnage was so general, that kutchum chan himself escaped with difficulty. [footnote : the place where the tartar army lay encamped was called tschuvatch: it is a neck of land washed by the irtish, near the spot where the tobob falls into that river. fis. sib. ges. i. p. .] this defeat proved decisive: kutchum chan was deserted by his subjects; and yermac, who knew how to improve as well as gain a victory, marched without delay to sibir, the residence of the tartar princes. he was well aware, that the only method to secure his conquest was to get possession of that important fortress. he expected therefore to have found in that place a considerable garrison, determined to sacrifice their lives in its defence. but the news of the late defeat had diffused universal consternation, and sibir was entirely deserted. [sidenote: seats himself upon the throne.] a body of troops whom he sent before him, to reduce the fortress, found it quite deserted: he himself soon after made his triumphant entry, and seated himself upon the throne without the least opposition. here he fixed his residence, and received the allegiance of the neighbouring people, who poured in from all quarters upon the news of this unexpected revolution. the tartars were so struck with his gallant intrepidity and brilliant exploits, that they submitted to his authority without hesitation, and acquiesced in the payment of the usual tribute. thus this enterprising cossac was suddenly exalted from the station of a chief of banditti to the rank of a sovereign prince. it does not appear from history whether it were at first his design to conquer siberia, or solely to amass a considerable booty. the latter indeed seems the more probable conjecture. the rapid tide of success with which he was carried on, and the entire defeat of kutchum chan, afterwards expanded his views, and opened a larger scene to his ambition. but whatever were his original projects, he seems worthy, so far as intrepidity and prudence form a basis of merit, of the final success which flowed in upon him. for he was neither elated with unexpected prosperity, nor dazzled with the sudden glare of royalty: on the contrary, the dignity of his deportment was as consistent and unaffected, as if he had been born a sovereign. and now yermac and his followers seemed to enjoy those rewards which they had dearly purchased by a course of unremitted fatigue, and by victories which almost exceeded belief. not only the tribes in the neigbourhood of sibir wore the appearance of the most unreserved submission; but even princes continued flocking in from distant parts, to acknowledge themselves tributary, and to claim his protection. [sidenote: precarious situation of yermac.] however, this calm was of short duration. insurrections were concerted by kutchum chan; who, though driven from his dominions, yet still retained no small degree of influence over his former subjects. yermac saw and felt the precariousness of his present grandeur; the inconsiderable number of his followers who had survived the conquest of sibir, had been still further diminished by an ambuscade of the enemy; and as he could not depend on the affection of his new subjects, he found himself under the necessity either of calling in foreign assistance, or of relinquishing his dominion. under these circumstances he had recourse to the tzar of muscovy; and made a tender of his new acquisitions to that monarch, upon condition of receiving immediate and effectual support. the judicious manner in which he conducted this measure, shews him no less able in the arts of negotiation than of war. one of his most confidential followers was dispatched to moscow at the head of fifty cossacs. [sidenote: cedes his conquests to the tzar of muscovy.] he had orders to represent to the court the progress which the russian troops, under the command of yermac, had made in siberia: he was artfully to add, that an extensive empire was conquered in the name of the tzar; that the natives were reduced to swear allegiance to that monarch, and consented to pay an annual tribute. this representation was accompanied with a present of the choicest and most valuable furs[ ]. [sidenote: .] the embassador was received at moscow with the strongest marks of satisfaction: a public thanksgiving was celebrated in the cathedral; the tzar acknowledged and extolled the good services of yermac; he granted him a pardon for all former offences; and, as a testimony of his favour, distributed presents for him and his followers. amongst those which were sent to yermac was a fur robe, which the tzar himself had worn, and which was the greatest mark of distinction that could be conferred upon a subject. to these was added a sum of money, and a promise of speedy and effectual assistance. [footnote : s.r.g. vi. p. .] meanwhile yermac, notwithstanding the inferior number of his troops, did not remain inactive within the fortress of sibir. he defeated all attempts of kutchum chan to recover his crown; and took his principal general prisoner. he made occasional inroads into the adjacent provinces, and extended his conquests up to the source of the river taffda on one side, and on the other as far as the district which lies upon the river oby above its junction with the irtish. [sidenote: receives a reinforcement of russian troops.] at length the promised succours arrived at sibir. they consisted of five hundred russians, under the command of prince bolkosky, who was appointed wayvode or governor of siberia. strengthened by this reinforcement, yermac continued his excursions on all sides with his usual activity; and gained several bloody victories over different princes, who were imprudent enough to assert their independence. in one of these expeditions he laid siege to kullara, a small fortress upon the banks of the irtish, which still belonged to kutchum chan: but he found it so bravely defended by that monarch, that all his efforts to carry it by storm proved ineffectual. upon his return to sibir he was followed at some distance by that prince, who hung unperceived upon his rear; and was prepared to seize any fortunate moment of attack which might occur; nor was it long before a favourable opportunity presented itself. the russians to the number of about three hundred lay negligently posted in a small island, formed by two branches of the irtish. the night was obscure and rainy; and the troops, who were fatigued with a long march, reposed themselves without suspicion of danger. [sidenote: surprised by kutchum chan.] kutchum chan, apprised of their situation, silently advanced at midnight with a select body of troops; and having forded the river, came with such rapidity upon the russians, as to preclude the use of their arms. in the darkness and confusion of the night, the latter were cut to pieces almost without opposition; and fell a resistless prey to those adversaries, whom they had been accustomed to conquer and despise. the massacre was so universal, that only one man is recorded to have escaped, and to have brought the news of this catastrophe to his countrymen at sibir. [sidenote: death of yermac.] yermac himself perished in the rout, though he did not fall by the sword of the enemy. in all the hurry of surprise, he was not so much infected with the general panic, as to forget his usual intrepidity, which seemed to be encreased rather than abated by the danger of his present situation. after many desperate acts of heroism, he cut his way through the troops who surrounded him, and made to the banks of the irtish[ ]. being closely pursued by a detachment of the enemy, he endeavoured to throw himself into a boat which lay near the shore; but stepping short, he fell into the water, and being incumbered with the weight of his armour, sunk instantly to the bottom[ ]. [footnote : many difficulties have arisen concerning the branch of the irtish in which yermac was drowned; but it is now sufficiently ascertained that it was a canal, which some time before this catastrophe had been cut by order of that cossac: not far from the spot, where the vagai falls into the irtish, the latter river forms a bend of six versts; by cutting a canal in a streight line from the two extreme points of this sweep, he shortened the length of the navigation. s. r. g. p. - .] [footnote : cyprian was appointed the first archbishop of siberia, in . upon his arrival at tobolsk, he enquired for several of the antient followers of yermac who were still alive; and from them he made himself acquainted with the principal circumstances attending the expedition of that cossac, and the conquest of siberia. those circumstances he transmitted to writing; and these papers are the archives of the siberian history; from which the several historians of that country have drawn their relations. sava yefimoff, who was himself one of yermac's followers, is one of the most accurate historians of those times. he carries down his history to the year . fis. sib. ges. i. p. .] his body was not long afterwards taken out of the irtish, and exposed, by order of kutchum chan, to all the insults which revenge ever suggested to barbarians in the frenzy of success. but these first transports of resentment had no sooner subsided, than the tartars testified the most pointed indignation at the ungenerous ferocity of their leader. the prowess of yermac, his consummate valour and magnanimity, virtues which barbarians know how to prize, rose upon their recollection. they made a sudden transition from one extreme to the other: they reproached their leader for ordering, themselves for being the instruments of indignity to such venerable remains. at length their heated imaginations proceeded even to consecrate his memory: they interred his body with all the rites of pagan superstition; and offered up sacrifices to his manes. [sidenote: veneration paid to his memory.] many miraculous stories were soon spread abroad, and met with implicit belief. the touch of his body was supposed to have been an instantaneous cure for all disorders; and even his clothes and arms were said to be endowed with the same efficacy. a flame of fire was represented as sometimes hovering about his tomb, and sometimes as stretching in one luminous body from the same spot towards the heavens. a presiding influence over the affairs of the chace and of war was attributed to his departed spirit; and numbers resorted to his tomb to invoke his tutelary aid in concerns so interesting to uncivilised nations. these idle fables, though they evince the superstitious credulity of the tartars, convey at the same time the strongest testimony of their veneration for the memory of yermac; and this veneration greatly contributed to the subsequent progress of the russians in those regions[ ]. [footnote : even so late as the middle of the next century, this veneration for the memory of yermac had not subsided. allai, a powerful prince of the calmucs, is said to have been cured of a dangerous disorder, by mixing some earth taken from yermac's tomb in water, and drinking the infusion. that prince is also reported to have carried with him a small portion of the same earth, whenever he engaged in any important enterprize. this earth he superstitiously considered as a kind of charm; and was persuaded that he always secured a prosperous issue to his affairs by this precaution. s.r.g. v. vi. p. .] with yermac expired for a time the russian empire in siberia. [sidenote: the russians quit siberia.] the news of his defeat and death no sooner reached the garrison of sibir, than an hundred and fifty troops, the sad remains of that formidable army which had gained such a series of almost incredible victories, retired from the fortress, and evacuated siberia. notwithstanding this disaster, the court of moscow did not abandon its design upon that country; which a variety of favourable circumstances still concurred to render a flattering object of russian ambition. yermac's sagacity had discovered new and commodious routes for the march of troops across those inhospitable regions. the rapidity with which he had overrun the territories of kutchum chan, taught the russians to consider the tartars as an easy prey. many of the tribes who had been rendered tributary by yermac, had testified a cheerful acquiescence under the sovereignty of the tzar; and were inclined to renew their allegiance upon the first opportunity. others looked upon all resistance as unavailing, and had learned, from dear-bought experience, to tremble at the very name of a russian. the natural strength of the country, proved not to be irresistible when united, was considerably weakened by its intestine commotions. upon the retreat of the garrison of sibir, that fortress, together with the adjacent district, was seized by seyidyak, son of the former sovereign, whom kutchum chan had dethroned and put to death. other princes availed themselves of the general confusion to assert independency; and kutchum chan was able to regain only a small portion of those dominions, of which he had been stripped by yermac. [sidenote: the russians re-enter siberia.] influenced by these motives, the court of moscow sent a body of three hundred troops into siberia, who penetrated to the banks of the tura as far as tschingi almost without opposition. there they built the fort of tumen, and re-established their authority over the neighbouring district. being soon afterwards reinforced by an additional number of troops, they were enabled to extend their operations, and to erect the fortresses of tobolsk, sungur, and tara. [sidenote: re-conquer their antient territories.] the erection of these and other fortresses was soon attended with a speedy recovery of the whole territory, which yermac had reduced under the russian yoke. this success was only the fore-runner of still greater acquisitions. [sidenote: all siberia conquered and colonized.] the russians pushed their conquest far and wide: wherever they appeared, the tartars were either reduced or exterminated. new towns were built and colonies were planted on all sides. before a century had well elapsed, all that vast tract of country now called siberia, which stretches from the confines of europe to the eastern ocean, and from the frozen sea to the present frontiers of china, was annexed to the russian dominions. [sidenote: progress of the russians checked by the chinese.] a still larger extent of territory had probably been won; and all the various tribes of independent tartary which lie between the south-eastern extremity of the russian empire, and the chinese wall, would have followed the fate of the siberian hordes, if the power of china had not suddenly interposed. chap. ii. commencement of hostilities between the _russians_ and _chinese_--disputes concerning the limits of the two empires--treaty of nershinsk--embassies from the court of _russia_ to _pekin_--treaty of _kiachta_--establishment of the commerce between the two nations. towards the middle of the seventeenth century, the russians were rapidly extending themselves eastward through that important territory, which lies, on each side of the river[ ] amoor. they soon reduced several independent tungusian hordes; and built a chain of small fortresses along the banks of the above-mentioned river, of which the principal were albasin, and kamarskoi ostrog. not long afterwards, the chinese under[ ] camhi conceived a similar design of subduing the same hordes. [sidenote: rise of animosities between the russians and chinese.] accordingly the two great powers of russia and china, thus pointing their views to the same object, unavoidably clashed; and, after several jealousies and intrigues, broke out into open hostilities about the year . the chinese laid siege to kamarskoi ostrog, and though repulsed in this attempt, found means to cut off several straggling parties of russians. these animosities induced the tzar alexèy michaelovitch to send an embassy to pekin; but this measure did not produce the desired effect. [sidenote: albasin destroyed by the chinese.] the chinese attacked albasin with a considerable force: having compelled the russian garrison to capitulate, they demolished that and all the russian forts upon the amoor; and returned, with a large number of prisoners, to their own country. [footnote : amoor is the name given by the russians to this river; it is called sakalin-ula by the manshurs, and was formerly denominated karamuran, or the black river, by the mongols. s.r.g. ii. p. .] [footnote : camhi was the second emperor of the manshur race, who made themselves masters of china in . the manshurs were originally an obscure tribe of the tungusian tartars, whose territories lay south of the amoor, and bordered upon the kingdom of corea, and the province of leaotong. they began to emerge from obscurity at the beginning of the seventeenth century. about that time their chief aischin-giord reduced several neighbouring hordes; and, having incorporated them with his own tribe, under the general name of manshur, he became formidable even to the chinese. shuntschi, grandson of this chief, by an extraordinary concurrence of circumstances, was raised while an infant to the throne of china, of which his successors still continue in possession. shuntschi died in , and was succeeded by camhi, who is well known from the accounts of the jesuit missionaries. for an account of the revolution of china, see duhalde, descr. de la chine, bell's journey to pekin, and fis. sic. ges. tom. i. p. .] [sidenote: albasin rebuilt by the russians, is besieged by the chinese.] not long after their departure, a body of sixteen hundred russians advanced along the amoor; and constructed a new fort, under the old name of albasin. the chinese were no sooner apprised of their return, than they marched instantly towards that river, and sat down before albasin with an army of seven thousand men, and a large train of artillery. they battered the new fortress for several weeks, without being able to make a breach, and without attempting to take it by storm. the besieged, though not much annoyed by the unskilful operations of the enemy, were exhausted with the complicated miseries of sickness and famine; and notwithstanding they continued to make a gallant resistance, they must soon have sunk under their distresses, if the chinese had not voluntarily retired, in consequence of a treaty being set afoot between the two courts of moscow and pekin. for this purpose the russian embassador golowin had left moscow so early as the year , accompanied by a large body of troops, in order to secure his person, and enforce respect to his embassy. the difficulty of procuring subsistence for any considerable number of men in those desolate regions, joined to the ruggedness of the roads, and the length of the march, prevented his arrival at selengisk until the year . from thence messengers were immediately dispatched with overtures of peace to the chinese government at pekin. after several delays, occasioned partly by policy, and partly by the posture of affairs in the tartar country through which the chinese were to pass, embassadors left pekin in the beginning of june . golovin had proposed receiving them at albasin; but while he was proceeding to that fortress, the chinese embassadors presented themselves at the gates of nershinsk, escorted by such a numerous army, and such a formidable train of artillery, that golovin was constrained, from motives of fear, to conclude the negotiation almost upon their own terms. the conferences were held under tents, in an open plain, near the town of nershinsk; where the treaty was signed and sealed by the plenipotentaries of the two courts. when it was proposed to ratify it by oath, the chinese embassadors offered to swear upon a crucifix; but golovin preferred their taking an oath in the name of their own gods. [sidenote: treaty of nershinsk.] this treaty first checked the progress of the russian arms in those parts; and laid the foundations of an important and regular commerce between the two nations. by the first and second articles, the south-eastern boundaries of the russian empire were formed by a ridge of mountains, stretching north of the amoor from the sea of ochotsk to the source of the small river gorbitza[ ], then by that river to its influx into the amoor, and lastly by the argoon, from its junction with the shilka up to its source. [footnote : there are two gorbitzas; the first falls into the amoor, near the conflux of the argoon and shilka; the second falls into the shilka. the former was meant by the russians; but the chinese fixed upon the latter for the boundary, and have carried their point. accordingly the present limits are somewhat different from those mentioned in the text. they are carried from the point, where the shilka and argoon unite to form the amoor, westward along the shilka, until they reach the mouth of tha western gorbitza; from thence they are continued to the source of the last-mentioned river, and along the chain of mountains as before. by this alteration the russian limits are somewhat abridged.] by the fifth article reciprocal liberty of trade was granted to all the subjects of the two empires, who were provided with pass-ports from their respective courts[ ]. [footnote : s.r.g. ii. p. .] this treaty was signed on the th of august, in the year , under the reign of ivan and peter alexiewitch, by which the russians lost, exclusively of a large territory, the navigation of the river amoor. the importance of this loss was not at that time understood; and has only been felt since the discovery of kamtchatka, and of the islands between asia and america. the products of these new-discovered countries might, by means of the amoor, have been conveyed by water into the district of nershinsk, from whence there is an easy transport by land to kiachta: whereas the same merchandise, after being landed at ochotsk, is now carried over a large tract of country, partly upon rivers of difficult navigation, and partly along rugged and almost impassable roads. [sidenote: rise of the commerce with china.] in return, the russians obtained what they long and repeatedly aimed at, a regular and permanent trade with the chinese. the first intercourse between russia and china commenced in the beginning of the seventeenth century[ ]. at that period a small quantity of chinese merchandise was procured, by the merchants of tomsk and other adjacent towns, from the calmucs. the rapid and profitable sale of these commodities encouraged certain wayvodes of siberia to attempt a direct and open communication with china. for this purpose several deputations were sent at different times to pekin from tobolsk, tomsk, and other russian settlements: these deputations, although they failed of obtaining the grant of a regular commerce, were nevertheless attended with some important consequences. the general good reception, which the agents met with, tempted the russian merchants to send occasional traders to pekin. by these means a faint connection with that metropolis was kept alive: the chinese learned the advantages of the russian trade, and were gradually prepared for its subsequent establishment. this commerce, carried on by intervals, was entirely suspended by the hostilities upon the river amoor. but no sooner was the treaty of nershinsk signed, than the russians engaged with extraordinary alacrity in this favourite branch of traffic. the advantages of this trade were soon found to be so considerable, that peter i. conceived an idea of still farther enlarging it. [sidenote: caravans allowed to trade to pekin.] accordingly, in , he sent isbrand ives, a dutchman in his service, to pekin, who requested and obtained, that the liberty of trading to china, which by the late treaty was granted to individuals, should be extended to caravans. [footnote : s.r.g. viii. p. , & seq.] in consequence of this arrangement, successive caravans went from russia to pekin, where a caravansary was allotted for their reception; and all their expences during their continuance in that metropolis defrayed by the emperor of china. the right of sending these caravans, and the profits resulting from them, belonged to the crown of russia. in the mean time, private merchants continued as before to carry on a separate trade with the chinese, not only at pekin, but also at the head quarters of the mongols. the camp of these roving tartars was generally to be found near the conflux of the orchon and tola, between the southern frontiers of siberia and the mongol desert. a kind of annual fair was held at this spot by the russian and chinese merchants; where they brought their respective goods for sale; and continued until they were disposed of. this rendezvous soon became a scene of riot and confusion; and repeated complaints were transmitted to the chinese emperor of the drunkenness and misconduct of the russians. these complaints made a still greater impression from a coincidence of similar excesses, for which the russians at pekin had become notorious. exasperated by the frequent representations of his subjects, camhi threatened to expell the russians from his dominions, and to prohibit them from carrying on any commerce, as well in china as in the country of the mongols. [sidenote: embassy of ismailoff to pekin.] these untoward circumstances occasioned another embassy to pekin, in the year . leff vassilievitch ismailoff, a captain of the russian guards, who was sent embassador upon this occasion, succeeded in the negotiation, and adjusted every difficulty to the satisfaction of both parties. at his departure he was permitted to leave behind laurence lange, who had accompanied him to pekin, in the character of agent for the caravans; for the purpose of superintending the conduct of the russians. [sidenote: russians expelled from pekin.] his residence however in that metropolis was but short; for he was soon afterwards compelled, by the chinese, to return. his dismission was owing, partly, to a sudden caprice of that suspicious people, and partly to a misunderstanding, which had recently broke out between the two courts, in relation to some mongol tribes who bordered upon siberia. a small number of these mongols had put themselves under the protection of russia, and were immediately demanded by the chinese; but the russians refused compliance, under pretence that no article in the treaty of nershinsk could, with any appearance of probability, be construed as extending to the mongols. the chinese were incensed at this refusal; and their resentment was still further inflamed by the disorderly conduct of the russian traders, who, freed from all controul by the departure of their agent, had indulged, without restraint, their usual propensity to excess. this concurrence of unlucky incidents extorted, in , an order from camhi for the total expulsion of the russians from the chinese and mongol territories. these orders were regorously executed; and all intercourse between the two nations immediately ceased. [sidenote: embassy of ragusinski.] affairs continued in this state until the year , when the count sava vladislavitch ragusinski, a dalmatian in the service of russia, was dispatched to pekin. his orders were at all events to compose the differences between the two courts relating to the mongol tribes; to settle the southern frontiers of the russian empire in that quarter; and to obtain the permission of renewing the trade with china. accordingly that embassador presented a new plan for a treaty of limits and commerce to yundschin, son and successor of camhi; by which the frontiers of the two empires were finally traced as they exist at present, and the commerce established upon a permanent basis, calculated to prevent as far as possible all future sources of misunderstanding. this plan being approved by the emperor, chinese commissioners were immediately appointed to negotiate with the russian embassador upon the banks of the bura, a small river which flows, south of the confines of siberia, into the orchon near its junction with the selenga. [sidenote: treaty of kiatchta.] at this conference, the old limits, which are mentioned in the treaty of nershinsk, were continued from the source of the argoon westwards as far as the mountain sabyntaban, which is situated at a small distance from the spot where the conflux of the two rivers uleken and kemtzak form the yenisèi: this boundary separates the russian dominions from the territory of the mongols, who are under the protection of china. it was likewise stipulated, that for the future all negotiations should be transacted between the tribunal of foreign affairs at pekin, and the board of foreign affairs at st. petersburg; or in matters of inferior moment between the commanders of the frontiers[ ]. [footnote : this article was inserted, because the chinese emperor, from a ridiculous idea of superiority, had contemptuously refused to hold any correspondence with the court of russia.] the most important articles relating to commerce, were as follow: [sidenote: account of the treaty relative to commerce.] a caravan was allowed to go to pekin every three years, on condition of its not consisting of more than two hundred persons; during their residence in that metropolis, their expences were no longer to be defrayed by the emperor of china. notice was to be sent to the chinese court immediately upon their arrival at the frontiers; where an officer was to meet and accompany them to pekin. the privilege before enjoyed by individuals of carrying on a promiscuous traffic in the chinese and mongol territories was taken away, and no merchandize belonging to private persons was permitted to be brought for sale beyond the frontiers. for the purpose of preserving, consistently with this regulation, the privilege of commerce to individuals, two places of resort were appointed on the confines of siberia: one called kiatchta, from a rivulet of that name near which it stands; and the other zuruchaitu: at these places a free trade was reciprocally indulged to the subjects of the two nations. a permission was at the same time obtained for building a russian church within the precincts of their caravansary; and for the celebration of divine service, four priests were allowed to reside at pekin[ ]. the same favour was also extended to some russian scholars[ ], for the purpose of learning the chinese tongue; in order to qualify themselves for interpreters between the two nations. [footnote : the first russian church at pekin was built for the accommodation of the russians taken prisoners at albasin. these persons were carried to pekin, and the place appointed for their habitation in that city was called the russian street, a name it still retains. they were so well received by the chinese, that, upon the conclusion of the treaty of nershinsk, they refused to return to their native country. and as they intermarried with the chinese women, their descendants are quite naturalized; and have for the most part adopted not only the language, but even the religion of the chinese. hence, the above-mentioned church, though it still exists, is no longer applied to the purpose of divine worship: its priest was transferred to the church, which was built within the walls of the caravansary.] [footnote : the good effects of this institution have already been perceived. a russian, whose name is leontieff, after having resided ten years at pekin, is returned to petersburg. he has given several translations and extracts of some interesting chinese publications, viz. part of the history of china; the code of the chinese laws; account of the towns and revenues, &c. of the chinese empire, extracted from a treatise of geography, lately printed at pekin. a short account of this extract is given in the journal of st. petersburg for april, .] this treaty, called the treaty of kiachta, was, on the fourteenth of june, , concluded and ratified by the count ragusinski and three chinese plenipotentaries upon the spot, where kiachta was afterwards built: it is the basis of all transactions since carried on between russia and china[ ]. [footnote : s.r.g. viii. p. .] one innovation in the mode of carrying on the trade to china, which has been introduced since the accession of the present empress catherine ii. deserves to be mentioned in this place. [sidenote: caravans discontinued.] since the year no caravans have been sent to pekin. their first discontinuance was owing to a misunderstanding between the two courts of petersburg and pekin in . their disuse after the reconciliation had taken place, arose from the following circumstances. the exportation and importation of many principal commodities, particularly the most valuable furs, were formerly prohibited to individuals, and solely appropriated to caravans belonging to the crown. by these restrictions the russian trade to china was greatly shackled and circumscribed. [sidenote: monopoly of the fur trade abolished.] the present empress (who, amidst many excellent regulations which characterise her reign, has shewn herself invariably attentive to the improvement of the russian commerce) abolished, in , the monopoly of the fur trade, and renounced in favour of her subjects the exclusive privilege which the crown enjoyed of sending caravans to pekin[ ]. by these concessions the profits of the trade have been considerably encreased: the great expence, hazard, and delay, of transporting the merchandise occasionally from the frontiers of siberia to pekin, has been retrenched; and kiachta is now rendered the center of the russian and chinese commerce. [footnote : s.r.g. viii. p. .] [illustration: _view of the chinese frontier town_ maimatschin _with the_ brook kiachta, _taken from the west_.] chap. iii. account of the _russian_ and _chinese_ settlements upon the confines of _siberia_--description of the _russian_ frontier town _kiachta_--of the _chinese_ frontier town _maimatschin_--its buildings, pagodas, &c. by the last mentioned treaty it was stipulated, that the commerce between russia and china should be transacted at the frontiers. [sidenote: russian and chinese settlement upon the brook kiachta.] accordingly two spots were marked out for that purpose upon the confines of siberia, where they border upon the mongol desert; one near the brook kiachta, and the other at zuruchaitu. the description of the former of these places forms the subject of this chapter. this settlement consists of a russian and chinese town, both situated in a romantic valley, surrounded by high, rocky, and for the most part well-wooded, mountains. this valley is intersected by the brook kiachta, which rises in siberia, and, after washing both the russian and chinese town, falls into the bura, at a small distance from the frontiers. [sidenote: situation of the russian frontier town kiachta.] the russian settlement is called kiachta from the abovementioned brook: it lies in degrees minutes longitude from the isle of fero, and degrees n. latitude, at the distance of versts from moscow, and from pekin. [sidenote: the fortress.] it consists of a fortress and a small suburb. the fortress, which is built upon a gentle rise, is a square enclosed with palisadoes, and strengthened with wooden bastions at the several angles. there are three gates, at which guards are constantly stationed: one of the gates faces the north, a second the south towards the chinese frontiers, and a third the east close to the brook kiachta. the principal public buildings in the fortress are a wooden church, the governor's house, the custom house, the magazine for provisions, and the guard-house. it contains also a range of shops and warehouses, barracks for the garrison, and several houses belonging to the crown; the latter are generally inhabited by the principal merchants. these buildings are mostly of wood. [sidenote: suburb.] the suburb, which is surrounded with a wooden wall covered at the top with chevaux de frize, contains no more than an hundred and twenty houses very irregularly built; it has the same number of gates as the fortress, which are also guarded. without this suburb, upon the high road leading to selenginsk, stand a few houses, and the magazine for rhubarb. this settlement is but indifferently provided with water both in quality and quantity; for although the brook kiachta is dammed up as it flows by the fortress, yet it is so shallow in summer, that, unless after heavy rains, it is scarcely sufficient to supply the inhabitants. its stream is troubled and unwholesome, and the springs which rise in the neighbourhood are either foul or brackish: from these circumstances, the principal inhabitants are obliged to send for water from a spring in the chinese district. the soil of the adjacent country is mostly sand or rock, and extremely barren. if the frontiers of russia were extended about nine versts more south to the rivulet of bura; the inhabitants of kiachta would then enjoy good water, a fruitful soil, and plenty of fish, all which advantages are at present confined to the chinese. the garrison of kiachta consists of a company of regular soldiers, and a certain number of cossacs; the former are occasionally changed, but the latter are fixed inhabitants of the place. it is the province of the commander to inspect the frontiers, and, in conjunction with the president of the chinese merchants, to settle all affairs of an inferior nature; but in matters of importance recourse must be had to the chancery of selenginsk, and to the governor of irkutsk. the russian merchants, and the agents of the russian trading company, are the principal inhabitants of kiachta. the limits westwards from this settlement to the river selenga, and eastwards as far as tchikoi, are bounded with chevaux de frize, placed there to prevent a contraband trade in cattle, for the exportation of which a considerable duty is paid to the crown. all the outposts along the frontiers westwards as far as the government of tobolsk, and eastwards to the mountains of snow, are under the command of the governor of kiachta. the most elevated of the mountains that surround the valley of kiachta, and which is called by the mongols burgultei, commands the russian as well as the chinese town; for this reason, the chinese, at the conclusion of the last frontier treaty, demanded the cession of this mountain under the pretext, that some of their deified ancestors were buried upon its summit. the russians gave way to their request, and suffered the boundary to be brought back to the north side of the mountain. [sidenote: maimatschin, the chinese frontier-town.] the chinese town is called, by the chinese and mongols, maimatschin, which signifies fortress of commerce. the russians term it the chinese village (kitaiskaia sloboda) and also naimatschin, which is a corruption of maimatschin. it is situated about an hundred and forty yards south of the fortress of kiachta, and nearly parallel to it. midway between this place and the russian fortress, two posts about ten feet high are planted in order to mark the frontiers of the two empires: one is inscribed with russian, the other with manshur characters[ ]. [footnote : upon the mountain to the west of kiachta, the limit is again marked, on the russian side by an heap of stones and earth, ornamented on the top with a cross; and on the chinese by a pile of stones in the shape of a pyramid. pallas reise, p. iii. p. .] mainatschin has no other fortification than a wooden wall, and a small ditch of about three feet broad; the latter was dug in the year , during the war between the chinese and the calmucs. the town is of an oblong form: its length is seven hundred yards, and its breadth four hundred. on each of the four sides a large gate faces the principal streets; over each of these gates there is a wooden guard-house for the chinese garrison, which consists of mongols in tattered clothes, and armed with clubs. without the gate, which looks to the russian frontiers, and about the distance of eight yards from the entrance, the chinese have raised a wooden screen, so constructed as to intercept all view of the streets from without. this town contains two hundred houses and about twelve hundred inhabitants. it has two principal streets of about eight yards broad, crossing each other in the middle at right angles, with two by-streets running from north to south. they are not paved, but are laid with gravel, and kept remarkably clean. [sidenote: houses.] the houses are spacious, uniformly built of wood, of only one story, not more than fourteen feet high, plaistered and white-washed; they are constructed round a court yard of about seventy feet square, which is strewed with gravel, and has an appearance of neatness. each house consists of a sitting room, some warehouses and a kitchen. in the houses of the wealthier sort the roof is made of plank; but in meaner habitations of lath covered over with turf. towards the streets most of the houses have arcades of wood projecting forwards from the roof like a penthouse, and supported by strong pillars. the windows are large after the european manner, but on account of the dearness of glass and russian talk are generally of paper, excepting a few panes of glass in the sitting room. the sitting room looks seldom towards the streets: it is a kind of shop, where the several patterns of merchandize are placed in recesses, fitted up with shelves, and secured with paper doors for the purpose of keeping out the dust. the windows are generally ornamented with little paintings, and the walls are hung with chinese paper. half the floor is of hard beaten clay; the other half is covered with boards, and rises about two feet in height. here the family sit in the day-time and sleep at night. by the side of this raised part, and nearly upon the same level, there is a square brick stove, with a streight perpendicular cylindrical excavation, which is heated with small pieces of wood. from the bottom of this stove a tube descends, and is carried zigzag under the boarded floor above-mentioned, and from thence to a chimney which opens into the street. by this contrivance, although the stove is always open and the flame visible, yet the room is never troubled in the least degree with smoke. there is scarcely any furniture in the room, excepting one large dining table in the lower part, and two small lackered ones upon the raised floor: one of these tables is always provided with a chaffing dish, which serves to light their pipes when the stove is not heated. in this room there are several small niches covered with silken curtains, before which are placed lamps that are lighted upon festivals; these niches contain painted paper idols, a stone or metal vessel, wherein the ashes of incense are collected, several small ornaments and artificial flowers: the chinese readily allow strangers to draw aside the curtains, and look at the idols. the bucharian[ ] merchants inhabit the south west quarter of maimatschin. their houses are not so large nor commodious as those of the chinese, although the greatest part of them carry on a very considerable commerce. [footnote : "the chief merchandizes which the bucharians bring to russia, are cotton, stuffs, and half-silks, spun and raw cotton, lamb-skins, precious stones, gold-dust, unprepared nitre, sal-ammoniac, &c." see russia, or a complete historical account of all the nations that compose that empire. v. ii. p. , a very curious and interesting work lately published.] [sidenote: the governor of maimatschin.] the surgutschèi, or governor of maimatschin, has the care of the police, as well as the direction of all affairs relating to commerce: he is generally a person of rank, oftentimes a mandarin, who has misbehaved himself in another station, and is sent here as a kind of punishment. he is distinguished from the rest by the crystal button of his cap, and by a peacock's[ ] feather hanging behind. the chinese give him the title of amban, which signifies commander in chief; and no one appears before him without bending the knee, in which posture the person who brings a petition must remain until he receives the governor's answer. his salary is not large; but the presents which he receives from the merchants amount annually to a considerable sum. [footnote : in china the princes of the blood wear three peacock's feathers, nobles of the highest distinction two, and the lower class of the nobility one. it is also a mark of high rank to drive a carriage with four wheels. the governor of maimatschin rode in one with only two wheels. all the chinese wear buttons of different colours in their caps, which also denote the rank. pallas reise, p. iii. p. .] the most remarkable public buildings in maimatschin, are the governor's house, the theatre, and two pagodas. [sidenote: house of the governor.] the governor's house is larger than the others, and better furnished; it is distinguished by a chamber where the court of justice is held, and by two high poles before the entrance ornamented with flags. [sidenote: theatre.] the theatre is situated close to the wall of the town near the great pagoda: it is a kind of small shed, neatly painted, open in front, and merely spacious enough to contain the stage; the audience stand in the street. near it are two high poles, upon which large flags with chinese inscriptions are hoisted on festivals. on such occasions the servants belonging to the merchants play short burlesque farces in honour of their idols. [sidenote: the small pagoda.] the smallest of the two pagodas is a wooden building, standing upon pillars, in the centre of the town at the place where the two principal streets cross. it is a chinese tower of two stories, adorned on the outside with small columns, paintings, and little iron bells, &c. the first story is square, the second octangular. [sidenote: the idol tien.] in the lower story is a picture representing the god tien, which signifies, according to the explanation of the most intelligent chinese, the most high god, who rules over the thirty-two heavens. the manshurs, it is said, call this idol abcho; and the mongols, tingheru heaven, or the god of heaven. he is represented sitting with his head uncovered, and encircled with a ray[ ] of glory similar to that which surrounds the head of our saviour in the roman catholic paintings; his hair is long and flowing; he holds in his right hand a drawn sword, and his left is extended as in the act of giving a benediction. on one side of this figure two youths, on the other a maiden and a grey-headed old man, are delineated. [footnote : when mr. pallas obtained permission of the governor to see this temple, the latter assured him that the jesuits of pekin and their converts adored this idol. from whence he ingeniously conjectures, either that the resemblance between this idol, and the representations of our saviour by the roman catholicks, was the occasion of this assertion; or that the jesuits, in order to excite the devotion of the converts, have, out of policy, given to the picture of our saviour a resemblance to the tien of the chinese. pallas reise, p. iii. p. .] the upper story contains the picture of another idol in a black and white checquered cap, with the same figures of three young persons and a little old man. there are no altars in this temple, and no other ornaments excepting these pictures and their frames. it is opened only on festivals, and strangers cannot see it without permission. [sidenote: the great pagoda and its idols.] the great pagoda[ ], situated before the governor's house, and near the principal gate looking to the south, is larger and more magnificent than the former. strangers are allowed to see it at all times, without the least difficulty, provided they are accompanied by one of the priests, who are always to be found in the area of the temple. this area is surrounded with chevaux de frize: the entrance is from the south through two gates with a small building between them. in the inside of this building are two recesses with rails before them, behind which the images of two horses as big as life are coarsly moulded out of clay; they are saddled and bridled, and attended by two human figures dressed like grooms: the horse to the right is of a chesnut colour, the other is dun with a black mane and tail, the former is in the attitude of springing, the latter of walking. near each horse a banner of yellow silk, painted with silver dragons, is displayed. [footnote : the great pagoda is omitted in the engraving of maimatschin prefixed to this chapter; this omission was owing to the artist's being obliged to leave kiachta before he had time to finish the drawing. in every other respect, the view, as i was informed by a gentleman who has been on the spot, is complete, and represented with the greatest exactness.] in the middle of this area are two wooden turrets surrounded with galleries; a large bell of cart iron which is struck occasionally with a large wooden mallet, hangs in the eastern turret; the other contains two kettle drums of an enormous size, similar to those made use of in the religious ceremonies of the calmucs. on each side of this area are ranges of buildings inhabited by the priest of the temple. this area communicates by means of an handsome gateway with the inner court, which is bordered on each side by small compartments open in front, with rails before them; in the inside of these compartments the legendary stories of the idols are exhibited in a series of historical paintings. at the farther extremity of this court stands a large building, constructed in the same style of architecture as the temple. the inside is sixty feet long and thirty broad: it is stored with antient weapons, and instruments of war of a prodigious size; such as spears, scythes, and long pikes, with broad blades, shields, coats of arms, and military ensigns representing hands[ ], dragons heads, and other carved figures. all these warlike instruments are richly gilded, and ranged in order upon scaffolds along the wall. opposite the entrance a large yellow standard, embroidered with foliage and silver dragons, is erected; under it, upon a kind of altar, there is a series of little oblong tables, bearing chinese inscriptions. [footnote : these hands resemble the manipulary standards of the romans.] an open gallery, adorned on both sides with flower-pots, leads from the back door of the armoury to the colonade of the temple. in this colonade two slate tablets are placed, in wooden frames, about six feet high and two broad, with long inscriptions relating to the building of the temple. before one of these plates a small idol of an hideous form stands upon the ground, enclosed in a wooden case. the temple itself is an elegant chinese building, richly decorated on the outside with columns lackered, and gilded carved-work, small bells, and other ornaments peculiar to the chinese architecture. within there is a rich profusion of gilding, which corresponds with the gaudiness of the exterior. the walls are covered thick with paintings, exhibiting the most celebrated exploits of the principal idol. this temple contains five idols of a colossal stature, sitting cross-legged upon pedestals in three recesses, which fill the whole northern side. [sidenote: ghessur chan, the principal idol.] the principal idol is seated alone, in the middle recess, between two columns, entwined with gilded dragons. large streamers of silk, hanging from the roof of the temple, veil in some measure the upper part of the image. his name is ghedsur, or ghessur chan[ ]; the chinese call him loo-ye, or the first and most antient; and the manshurs, guanlöe, or the superior god. he is of a gigantic size, surpassing more than fourfold the human stature, with a face glistening like burnished gold, black hair and beard. he wears a crown upon his head, and is richly dressed in the chinese fashion: his garments are not moulded out of clay, as those of the other idols; but are made of the finest silk. he holds in his hands a kind of tablet, which he seems to read with deep attention. two small female figures, resembling girls of about fourteen years of age, stand on each side of the idol, upon the same pedestal; one of which grasps a roll of paper. at the right-hand of the idol lie seven golden arrows, and at his left a bow. [footnote : the mongols and calmucs call him by this name of ghessur chan; and although they do not reckon him among their divinities; yet they consider him as a great hero, the bacchus and hercules of eastern tartary, who was born at the source of the choango, and who vanquished many monsters. they have in their language a very long history of his heroical deeds. his title, in the mongol tongue, is as follows: arban zeeghi essin ghessur bogdo chan: the king of the ten points of the compass, or the monarch ghessur chan. i possess a copy of this manuscript, containing the history of ghessur chan; it is in the original mongol language, and was a present from mr. pallas: i should be very happy to communicate it to any person versed in the eastern languages.] before the idol is a spacious enclosure, surrounded with rails, within which stands an altar with four colossal figures, intended probably to represent the principal mandarins of the deified ghessur. two of these figures are dressed like judges, and hold before them small tablets, similar to that in the hands of the principal idol. the two other figures are accoutred in complete armour: one wears a turban; and carries, upon the left shoulder, a large sword sheathed, with the hilt upwards. the other has an hideous copper-coloured face, a large belly, and grasps in his right hand a lance with a broad blade. although all the remaining idols in the temple are of an enormous size, yet they are greatly surpassed in magnitude by ghessur chan. [sidenote: maooang.] the first idol in the recess to the right is called maooang, or the otschibanni of the mongols. he has three ghastly copper-coloured faces, and six arms; two of his arms brandish two sabres cross ways over the head; a third bears a looking glass, and a fourth a kind of square, which resembles a piece of ivory. the two remaining arms are employed in drawing a bow, with an arrow laid upon it, ready to be discharged. this idol has a mirror upon his breast, and an eye in his navel: near it are placed two small figures; one holds an arrow, and the other a little animal. [sidenote: tsaudsing.] the next idol in the same recess is called by the chinese tsaudsing, or the gold and silver god; and by the mongols tsagan-dsambala. he wears a black cap, and is dressed, after the chinese fashion, in sumptuous robes of state; he bears in his hand a small jewel casket. near him also stand two little figures, one of which holds a truncated branch. [sidenote: chusho.] in the recess to the left is the god chusho, called by the manshurs chua-schan, and by the mongols galdi, or the fire god. he is represented with a frightful fiery reddish face; clad in complete armour he wields a sword half drawn out of the scabbard, and seems on the point of starting up from his seat. he is attended by two little harlbadeers, one of whom is crying; and the other bears a fowl upon his hand, which resembles a sea-pheasant. [sidenote: niu-o.] the other idol in the same recess is the god of oxen, niu-o. he appears to be sitting in a composed posture; he is habited like a mandarin, and is distinguished by a crown upon his head. he has, in common with the other idols, a mirror upon his breast. the chinese imagine him to be the same with the yamandaga of the mongols; and it is said his manshurish name is chain killova; his mongol name, which relates to the history of ghessur, is bars-batir, the hero of tygers. before these several idols there are tables, or altars, on which cakes, pastry, dried fruit, and flesh, are placed, on festivals and prayer days: on particular occasions even whole carcases of sheep are offered up. tapers and lamps are kept burning day and night before the idols. among the utensils of the temple, the most remarkable is a vessel shaped like a quiver, and filled with flat pieces of cleft reed, on which short chinese devices are inscribed. these devices are taken out by the chinese on new-years day, and are considered as oracles, which foretel the good or ill luck of the person, by whom they are drawn, during the following year. there lies also upon a table an hollow wooden black lackered helmet, which all persons of devotion strike with a wooden hammer, whenever they enter the temple. this helmet is regarded with such peculiar awe, that no strangers are permitted to handle it, although they are allowed to touch even the idols themselves. the first day of the new and full moon is appointed for the celebration of worship. upon each of those days no chinese ever fails to make his appearance once in the temple; he enters without taking off his cap[ ], joins his hands before his face, bows five times to each idol, touches with his forehead the pedestal on which the idol sits, and then retires. their principal festivals are held in the first month of their year, which answers to february. it is called by them, as well as by the mongols, the white month; and is considered as a lucky time for the transaction of business; at that time they hoist flags before the temples; and place meat upon the tables of the idols, which the priests take away in the evening, and eat in the small apartments of the interior court. on these solemnities plays are performed in the theatre, in honour of the idols: the pieces are generally satyrical, and mostly written against unjust magistrates and judges. [footnote : they do not take off their caps out of respect; for among the chinese, as well as other eastern nations, it is reckoned a mark of disrespect to uncover the head before a superior.] [sidenote: superstion of the chinese.] but although the chinese have such few ceremonies in their system of religious worship, yet they are remarkably infected with superstition. mr. pallas gives the following description of their behaviour at maimatschin during an eclipse of the moon. at the close of the evening in which the eclipse appeared, all the inhabitants were indefatigable in raising an incessant uproar, some by hideous shrieks, others by knocking wood, and beating cauldrons; the din was heightened by striking the bell and beating the kettle drums of the great pagoda. the chinese suppose, that during an eclipse the wicked spirit of the air, called by the mongols arachulla, is attacking the moon; and that he is frightened away by these hideous shrieks and noises. another instance of superstition fell under the observation, of mr. pallas, while he was at maimatschin. a fire broke out in that town with such violence that several houses were in flames. none of the inhabitants, however, attempted to extinguish it; they stood indeed in idle consternation round the fire; and some of them sprinkled occasionally water among the flames, in order to sooth the fire god, who, as they imagined, had chosen their houses for a sacrifice. indeed if the russians had not exerted themselves in quenching the fire, the whole place would probably have been reduced to ashes[ ]. [footnote : this account of kiachta and maimatschin is taken from mr. pallas's description of kiachta, in the journal of his travels through siberia, p. iii. p. - . every circumstance relating to the religious worship of the eastern nations is, in itself so interesting that i thought it would not be unacceptable to my readers to give a translation of the above passages respecting the chinese pagodas and idols: although in a work treating of the new discoveries, and the commerce which is connected with them. in the abovementioned journal the ingenious author continues to describe from his own observations the manners, customs, dress, diet, and several other particulars relative to the chinese; which, although exceedingly curious and interesting, are foreign to my present purpose, and would have been incompatible with the size of the present work. no writer has placed the religion and history of the tartar-nations in a more explicit point of view than mr. pallas; every page in his interesting journal affords striking proofs of this assertion. he has lately thrown new lights upon this obscure subject, in a recent publication concerning the tartars, who inhabit parts of siberia, and the territory which lies between that country and the chinese-wall. of this excellent work the first volume appeared in , and contains the genealogy, history, laws, manners, and customs, of this extraordinary people, as they are divided into calmucs, mongols, and burats. the second volume is expected with impatience, and will ascertain, with minuteness and accuracy, the tenets and religious ceremonies which distinguish the votaries of shamanism from the followers of dalai-lama, the two great sects into which these tribes are distinguished. pallas samlung historischer nachrichten ueber die mongolischen volkerschafter.] chap. iv. commerce between the _chinese_ and _russians_--list of the principal exports and imports--duties--average amount of the _russian_ trade. [sidenote: merchants of maimatschin.] the merchants of maimatschin come from the northern provinces of china, chiefly from pekin, nankin, sandchue, and other principal towns. they are not settled at this place with their wives and families: for it is a remarkable circumstance, that there is not one woman in maimatschin. this restriction arises from the policy of the chinese government, which, totally prohibits the women from having the slightest intercourse with foreigners. no chinese merchant engages in the trade to siberia who has not a partner. these persons mutually relieve each other. one remains for a stated time, usually a year, at kiachta; and when, his partner arrives with a fresh cargo of chinese merchandize, he then returns home with the russian commodities[ ]. [footnote : pallas reise, p. iii. p. .] most of the chinese merchants understand the mongol tongue, in which language commercial affairs are generally transacted. some few indeed speak broken russian, but their pronunciation is so soft and delicate, that it is difficult to comprehend them. they are not able to pronounce the r, but instead of it make use of an l; and when two consonants come together, which frequently occurs in the russian tongue, they divide them by the interposition of a vowel[ ]. this failure in articulating the russian language seems peculiar to the chinese, and is not observable in the calmucs, mongols, and other neighbouring nations[ ]. [footnote : bayer, in his museum sinicum, gives several curious instances of the chinese mode of articulating those sounds, which they have not in their own language. for instance they change b d r x z into p t l s s. thus for maria they say ma-li-ya; for crux, cu-lu-su; for baptizo, pa-pe-ti-so; for cardinalis, kia-ul-fi-na-li-su; for spiritus, su-pi-li-tu-su; for adam, va-tam; for eva, nge-va; for christus, ki-li-su-tu-su; hoc, est, corpus, meum--ho-ke, nge-su-tu, co-ul-pu-su, me-vum. bayer, mus. sin. tom. i. p. .] [footnote : pallas reise, p. iii. p. .] the commerce between the russians and chinese is entirely a trade of barter, that is, an exchange of one merchandize for another. the russians are prohibited to export their own coin, nor indeed could the chinese receive it, even should that prohibition be taken off; for no specie is current amongst them except bullion[ ]. and the russians find it more advantageous to take merchandize in exchange, than to receive bullion at the chinese standard. the common method of transacting business is as follows. the chinese merchant comes first to kiachta, and examines the merchandize he has occasion for in the warehouse of the russian trader; he then goes to the house of the latter, and adjusts the price over a dish of tea. both parties next return to the magazine, and the goods in question are there carefully sealed in the presence of the chinese merchant. when this ceremony is over, they both repair to maimatschin; the russian chooses the commodities he wants, not forgetting to guard against fraud by a strict inspection. he then takes the precaution to leave behind a person of confidence, who remains in the warehouse until the russian goods are delivered, when he returns to kiachta with the chinese merchandize[ ]. [footnote : the chinese have no gold or silver coin. these metals are always paid in bullion; and for the purpose of ascertaining the weight, every chinese merchant is constantly provided with a pair of scales. as gold is very scarce in china, silver is the great vehicle of commerce. when several authors affirm that the russians draw large quantities of silver from china, they mistake an accidental occurrence for a general and standing fact. during the war between the chinese and calmucs, the former had occasion to purchase at kiachta provision, horses, and camels, for which they paid silver. this traffic brought such a profusion of that metal into siberia, that its price was greatly reduced below its real value. a pound of silver was at that period occasionally sold at the frontiers for or roubles, which at present fetches or . but since the conclusion of these wars by the total reduction of the calmucs under the chinese yoke, russia receives a very small quantity of silver from the chinese. s.r.g. iii. p. & seq. the silver imported to kiachta is chiefly brought by the bucharian merchants, who sell cattle to the chinese in exchange for that metal, which they afterwards dispose of to the russians for european manufactures. gold-dust is also occasionally obtained from the same merchants; the quantity however of those metals procured at kiachta is so inconsiderable, as scarcely to deserve mention. the whole sum imported to kiachta, in , amounted to only , roubles.] [footnote : pallas reise, p. iii. p. .] [sidenote: russian exports.] the principal commodities which russia exports to china are as follow: furs and peltry. it would be uninteresting to enumerate all the furs and skins[ ] brought for sale to kiachta, which form the most important article of exportation on the side of the russians. the most valuable of these furs are the skins of sea-otters, beavers, foxes, wolves, bears, bucharian lambs, astracan sheep, martens, sables, ermines, grey-squirrels. [footnote : the list of all the furs and skins brought to kiachta, with their several prices, is to be found in pallas reise, part iii. p. to p. . see hereafter, p. .] the greatest part of these furs and skins are drawn from siberia and the new discovered islands: this supply however is not alone fully adequate to the demand of the market at kiachta. foreign furs are therefore imported to st. petersburg, and from thence sent to the frontiers. england alone furnishes a large quantity of beaver and other skins, which she draws from hudson's bay and canada.[ ] [footnote : list of furs sent from england to petersburg in the following years: beaver-skins. otter-skins. , | | , | | , | | the finest hudson's beavers have been sold upon an average at petersburg from to roubles per skins. inferior ditto and best canada beavers from -- young or cub-beavers from -- best otter-skins from -- inferior ones from -- the qualities of these skins being very different occasion great variations in the prices. at kiachta, the best hudson's bay beaver fetches from to roubles per skin. otters' ditto -- black foxes skins from canada are also sometimes sent from england to petersburg. at kiachta they fetch from to roubles per skin.] cloth. cloth forms the second article of exportation which russia exports to china. the coarse sort is manufactured in russia; the finer sort is foreign, chiefly english, prussian, and french. an arshire of foreign cloth fetches, according to its fineness, from to roubles. camlets. calimancoes. druggets. white flannels, both russian and foreign. the remaining articles are, rich stuffs. velvets. coarse linen, chiefly manufactured in russia. russia leather. tanned hides. glass ware and looking glasses. hardware, namely, knives, scissars, locks, &c. tin. russian talk. cattle, chiefly camels, horses, and horned cattle. the chinese also pay very dear for hounds, greyhounds, barbets, and dogs for hunting wild boars. provisions[ ]. [footnote : in the year , the chinese purchased meat at kiachta, at the following prices: a pound of beef - / copecs. lamb - / horse flesh for the tartars / . pallas reise, p. iii. p.] meal.--the chinese no longer import such large quantities of meal as formerly, since they have employed the mongols to cultivate the lands lying near the river orchon[ ], &c. &c. [footnote : s. r. g. iii. p. - . pallas reise, p. iii. p. - .] [sidenote: imports.] list of the most valuable commodities procured from china. raw and manufactured silk. the exportation of raw silk is prohibited in china under pain of death: large quantities however are smuggled every year into kiachta, but not sufficient to answer the demands of the russian merchants. a pood of the best sort is estimated at roubles; of the worst sort at the manufactured silks are of various sorts, fashions, and prices, viz. sattins, taffaties, damasks, and gauzes, scanes of silk died of all colours, ribbands, &c. &c. raw and manufactured cotton. raw cotton is imported in very large quantities; a great part of this commodity is employed in packing up the china ware, and by these means is conveyed into the inland part of russia without any additional expence of carriage. a pood sells for--from roubles, cop. to . of the manufactured cotton, that which the russians call kitaika, and the english nankeen, has the most rapid sale. it is the most durable, and, in proportion to its goodness, the cheapest of all the chinese stuffs; it is stained red, brown, green, and black. teas. the teas which are brought into russia are much superior in flavour and quality to those which are sent to europe from canton. the original goodness of the teas is probably the same in both cases; but it is conjectured, that the transport by sea considerably impairs the aromatic flavour of the plant. this commodity, now become so favourite an object of european luxury, is esteemed by the russian merchants the most profitable article of importation. at kiachta a pound of the best tea[ ] is estimated at roubles. common ditto at inferior at copecs. [footnote : at petersburg a pound of the best green tea fetches roubles.] porcelain of all sorts. for some years past the chinese have brought to kiachta parcels of porcelain, painted with european figures, with copies of several favourite prints and images of the grecian and roman deities. furniture, particularly japan cabinets and cases, lackered and varnished tables and chairs, boxes inlaid with mother-of-pearl, &c. &c. fans, toys, and other small wares. artificial flowers. tiger and panther skins. rubies[ ], but neither in large quantities nor of great value. white lead, vermilion, and other colours. canes. tobacco. rice. sugar candy. preserved ginger, and other sweetmeats. rhubarb[ ]. musk. [footnote : rubies are generally procured by smuggling; and by the same means pearls are occasionally disposed of to the chinese, at a very dear rate. pearls are much sought for by the chinese; and might be made a very profitable article.] [footnote : see appendix ii.] it is very difficult to procure the genuine thibet musk, because the chinese purchase a bad sort, which comes from siberia, with which they adulterate that which is brought from thibet[ ]. [footnote : s. r. g. iii. p. - . pallas reise, p. iii. p. - .] [sidenote: advantages of this trade to russia.] russia draws great advantages from the chinese trade. by this traffic, its natural productions, and particularly its furs and skins, are disposed of in a very profitable manner. many of these furs procured from the most easterly parts of siberia, are of such little value that they would not answer the expence of carriage into russia; while the richer furs, which are sold to the chinese at a very high price, would, on account of their dearness, seldom meet with purchasers in the russian dominions. in exchange for these commodities the russians receive from china several valuable articles of commerce, which they would otherwise be obliged to buy at a much dearer rate from the european powers, to the great disadvantage of the balance of their trade. i have before observed, that formerly the exportation and importation of the most valuable goods were prohibited to individuals; at present only the following articles are prohibited. among the exports, fire-arms and artillery; gunpowder and ball; gold and silver, coined and uncoined, stallions and mares; skins of deer, reindeer, elks, and horses; beaver's hair, potash, rosin, thread, and [ ]tinsel-lace: among the imports, salt, brandy, poisons, copper-money, and rhubarb. [footnote : tinsel lace is smuggled to the chinese, with considerable profit; for they pay nearly as much for it as if it was solid silver. s. r. g. iii. p. .] the duties paid by the russian-merchants are very considerable; great part of the merchandise is taxed at per cent. furs, cattle, and provisions, pay a duty of . russian manufactures . one per cent. is also deducted from the price of all goods for the expence of deepening the river selenga; and per cent for the support of the custom-house. some articles, both of export and import, pay no duty. the exported are, writing, royal, and post paper, russia cloth of all sorts and colours, excepting peasants cloth. the imported are, satins, raw and stained cottons, porcelain, earthen-ware, glass corals, beads, fans, all musical instruments, furniture, lackered and enamelled ornaments, needles, white-lead, rice, preserved ginger, and other sweet-meats[ ]. [footnote : pallas reise, p. iii. p. .] the importance of this trade will appear from the following table. [sidenote: table of exportation and importation.] table of exportation and importation at kiachta, in the year . rbles. cop. custom-house duties, , . - / . importation of chinese goods, to the value of , , . - / . of gold and silver , . ----------------------- total of importation , , . - / . ----------------------- exportation of russian commodities , , . . from this table it appears, that the total sum of export and import amounts to , , . in this calculation however the contraband trade is not included, which is very large; and as the year was not so favourable to this traffic as the preceding ones[ ], we may venture to estimate the gross amount of the average trade to china at near , , roubles. [footnote : in the year , , , the custom-house duties at kiachta (according to mr. pallas, p. iii. p. .) produced , roubles. by taking therefore the medium between that sum and , , the amount of the duties in , the average sum of the duties will be , ; and, as the duties in make nearly a sixth of the whole sum of exportation and importation, by multiplying , by , we have the gross amount of the average exports and imports at , , . but as several goods pay no duty, and as the contraband trade according to the lowest valuation is estimated at the fifth part of the exports and imports; the gross amount of the average trade to china may be fairly computed at near , , , the sum stated above.] chap. v. description of zuruchaitu--and its trade--transport of the merchandise through siberia. the general account of the russian commerce to china has been given in the preceding chapter, because almost the whole traffic is confined to kiachta. the description of zuruchaitu, which was also fixed by the treaty of kiachta for the purpose of carrying on the same trade, will be comprised of course in a narrow compass. [sidenote: description of zuruchaitu.] zuruchaitu is situated in ° longitude, and °. ´ n. latitude, upon the western branch of the river argoon, at a small distance from its source. it is provided with a small garrison, and a few wretched barracks surrounded with chevaux de frise. no merchants are settled at this place; they come every summer from nershinsk, and other russian towns in order to meet two parties of mongol troops: these troops are sent from the chinese towns naun and merghen, and arrive at the frontiers about july. they encamp near zuruchaitu upon the other side of the river argoon, and barter with the siberian merchants a few chinese commodities, which they bring with them. [sidenote: commerce.] formerly the commerce carried on at zuruchaitu was more considerable; but at present it is so trifling, that it hardly deserves to be mentioned. these mongols furnish the district of nershinsk with bad tea and tobacco, bad silks, and some tolerable cottons. they receive in return ordinary furs, cloth, cattle, and russian leather. this trade lasts about a month or six weeks, and the annual duties of the customs amount upon an average to no more than roubles. about the middle of august the mongols retire; part proceed immediately to china, and the others descend the stream of the amoor as far as its mouth, in order to observe if there has been no usurpation upon the limits. at the same time the russian merchants return to nershinsk, and, were it not for the small garrison, zuruchaitu would remain uninhabited[ ]. [footnote : s. r. g. iii. p. . pallas reise, p. iii. p. .] [sidenote: transport of the russian and chinese commodities through siberia.] the russian commodities are transported by land from petersburg and moscow to tobolsk. from thence the merchants may embark upon the irtish down to its junction with the oby; then they either tow up their boats, or sail up the last mentioned river as far as marym, where they enter the ket, which they ascend to makoffskoi ostrog. at that place the merchandize is carried about ninety versts by land to the yenisei. the merchants then ascend that river, the tunguska, and angara, to irkutsk, cross the lake baikal, and go up the river selenga almost to kiachta. it is a work of such difficulty to ascend the streams of so many rapid rivers, that this navigation eastwards can hardly be finished in one summer[ ]; for which reason the merchants commonly prefer the way by land. their general rendezvous is the fair of irbit near tobolsk; from thence they go in sledges during winter to kiachta where they arrive about february, the season in which the chief commerce is carried on with the chinese. they buy in their route all the furs they find in the small towns, where they are brought from the adjacent countries. when the merchants return in spring with the chinese goods, which are of greater bulk and weight than the russian commodities, they proceed by water; they then descend the streams of most of the rivers, namely, the selenga, angara, tunguska, ket, and oby to its junction with the irtish; they ascend that river to tobolsk, and continue by land to moscow and petersburg. [footnote : some of these rivers are only navigable in spring when the snow water is melting; in winter the rivers are in general frozen.] [sidenote: transport of the furs from kamtchatka to kiachta.] before the passage from ochotsk to bolcheresk was discovered in , the only communication between kamtchatka and siberia was by land; the road lay by anadirsk to yakutsk. the furs[ ] of kamtchatka and of the eastern isles are now conveyed from that peninsula by water to ochotsk; from thence to yakutsk by land on horse-back, or by rein-deer: the roads are so very bad, lying either through a rugged mountainous country, or through marshy forests, that the journey lasts at least six weeks. yakutsk is situated upon the lena, and is the principal town, where the choicest furs are brought in their way to kiachta, as well from kamtchatka as from the northern parts of siberia, which lay upon the rivers lena, yana, and endigirka. at yakutsk the goods are embarked upon the lena, towed up the stream of that river as far as vercholensk, or still farther to katsheg; from thence they are transported over a short tract of land to the rivulet buguldeika, down that stream to the lake baikal, across that lake to the mouth of the selenga, and up that river to the neighbourhood of kiachta. [footnote : the furs, which are generally landed upon the eastern coast of kamtchatka, are either sent by sea to bolchoresk, or are transported across the peninsula in sledges drawn by dogs. the latter conveyance is only used in winter: it is the usual mode of travelling in that country. in summer there is no conveyance, as the peninsula contains neither oxen, horses, or rein-deer. s. r. g. iii. p. .] in order to give the reader some notion of that vast tract of country, over which the merchandize is frequently transported by land carriage, a list of the distances is here subjoined. from petersburg to moscow versts. moscow to tobolsk tobolsk to irkutsk irkutsk to kiachta from irbit to tobolsk from irkutsk to nershinsk nershinsk to zuruchaitu from ochotsk to yakutsk yakutsk to irkutsk from selenginsk to zuruchaitu zuruchaitu to pekin kiachta to pekin the chinese transport their goods to kiachta chiefly upon camels. it is four or five days journey from pekin to the wall of china, and forty-six from thence across the mongol desert to kiachta[ ]. [footnote : pallas reise, p. iii. p. .] part iii. appendix i. & ii. containing supplementary accounts of the russian discoveries, &c. &c. [illustration: krenitzin's and levasheff's _voyage to the_ fox islands _in and _.] appendix i. extract from the journal of a voyage made by captain _krenitzin_ and lieutenant _levasheff_ to the _fox islands_, in , , by order of the empress of _russia_--they sail from _kamtchatka_--arrive at _beering's_ and _copper islands_--reach the _fox islands_--_krenitzin_ winters at _alaxa_--_levasheff_ upon _unalashka_--productions of _unalashka_--description of the inhabitants of the _fox islands_--their manners and customs, &c. [sidenote: krenitzin and levasheff sail from the mouth of the kamtchatka river, .] on the d of july captain krenitzin sailed in the galliot st. catherine from the mouth of the kamtchatka river towards america: he was accompanied by lieutenant levasheff, in the hooker st. paul. their instructions were regulated by information derived from beering's expedition in . shaping their course accordingly, they found themselves more to the north than they expected; and were told by the russian traders and hunters, that a similar[ ] mistake was committed in the chart of that expedition. these traders, who for some years past were accustomed to ramble to the distant islands in quest of furs, said that they were situated much more to the south, and farther east than was imagined. [sidenote: they reach beering's island.] on the th they saw commodore's or beering's island, which is low and rocky, especially to the s. w. on this side they observed a small harbour, distinguished by two hillocks like boats, and not far from it they found a fresh water lake. [footnote : this passage is obscurely expressed. its meaning may be ascertaining by comparing krenitzin's chart with that of beering's voyage prefixed to muller's account of the russian discoveries. the route of krenitzin's vessel was confidently to the north of the course held by beering and tschirikoff, and consequently he sailed through the middle of what they had supposed to be a continent, and which he found to be an open sea. see robertson's history of america, p. , and p. , of this work. [sidenote: and copper island.] to the s. e. lies another island, called by the russians mednoi ostroff, or copper island, from a great quantity of copper found upon its n. e. coast, the only side which is known to the russians. it is washed up by the sea, and covers the shore in such abundance, that many ships may load with it. perhaps an india trader might make a profitable voyage from thence to china, where this metal is in high demand. this copper is mostly in a metallic or malleable state, and many pieces seem as if they had formerly been in fusion. the island is not high, but has many hillocks, each of which has the appearance of having formerly been the funnel of a volcano. we may here, once for all, observe, that all the islands represented in this chart[ ] abound with such funnels, called in russian sopka, in so much that no island, however small, was found without one; and many of them consisted of nothing else. in short, the chain of islands here laid down may, without any violent stretch of imagination, be considered as thrown up by some late volcanos. the apparent novelty of every thing seems to justify this conjecture: nor can any objection be derived from the vegetable productions with which these islands abound; for the summer after the lower district of zutphen in holland was gained from the sea, it was covered over with wild mustard. all these lands are subject to violent and frequent earth-quakes, and abound in sulphur. the writer of the journal was not able to inform us whether any lava was found upon them; but he speaks of a party-coloured stone as heavy as iron. from this account it is by no means improbable, that the copper abovementioned has been melted in some eruption. [footnote : namely, the chart which is prefixed to this journal.] [sidenote: arrive at the fox islands.] after leaving copper island, no land was seen from either of the ships (which had parted company in a fog) till on the s. e. quarter of their tract, was discovered the chain of islands or head-lands laid down in the chart. these in general appeared low, the shore bad, without creeks, and the water between them very shallow. during their course outwards, as well as during their return, they had frequent fogs. it appears from the journal, as well as from the relation of the hunters, that it is very uncommon to have clear weather for five days together, even during summer. [sidenote: krenitzin winters at alaxa.] the st. catherine wintered in the straits of alaxa, where they hauled her into shoal water. the instructions given to the captain set forth, that a private ship had in found there a commodious haven; but he looked for it in vain. the entrance of this strait from the n. e. was extremely difficult on account of flats, and strong currents both flood and ebb: the entrance however from the s. e. was afterwards found to be much easier with not less than - / fathoms water. upon surveying this strait, and the coast of alaxa, many funnels were observed in the low grounds close to the shore, and the soil produced few plants. may not this allow one to suppose that the coast had suffered considerable changes since the year ? few of the islands produce wood, and that only in the vallies by the rivulets. unalga and alaxa contain the most; they abound with fresh water streams, and even rivers; from which we may infer that they are extensive. the soil is in general boggy, and covered with moss; but alaxa has more soil and produces much grass. [sidenote: levasheff winters upon unalashka.] the st. paul wintered in unalashka. this wintering place was observed to lie in ° ´ north latitude, and its longitude from the mouth of kamtchatka river, computed by the ship's journal, was ° ´ east[ ]. unalashka is about fifty miles long from n. e. to s. w. and has on the n. e. side three bays. one of them called udagha stretches thirty miles e. n. e. and w. s. w. nearly through the middle of the island. another called igunck, lying n. n. e. and s. s. w. is a pretty good harbour, with three and a half fathom water at high tide, and sandy ground. it is well sheltered from the north swell at its entrance by rocks, some of which are under water. the tide flows here five feet at full and change, and the shore is in general bold and rocky, except in the bay, at the mouth of a small river. there are two burning mountains on this island, one called ayaghish, and the other (by the russians) the roaring mountain. near the former is a very copious hot spring. the land is in general rocky, with loamy and clayey grounds; but the grass is extremely coarse, and unfit for pasture. hardly any wood is to be found on it. [sidenote: productions of unalashka.] its plants are dwarf cherry ([ ]xylosteum of tournefort), wortle berry, (vaccinium uliginosum of linnæus), rasberry, farana and shikshu of kamtchatka and kutage, larch, white poplar, pine and birch[ ]. the land animals are foxes of different colours, mice, and weasels; there are also beavers[ ], sea cats, and sea lions as at kamtchatka. among their fish we may reckon cod, perch, pilchards, smelts, roach, needle fish, terpugh, and tchavitcha. the birds are eagles, partridges, ducks, teals, urili, ari, and gadi. the animals for whose russian names i can find no translations, are (excepting the ari) described in krashininikoff's history of kamtchatka, or in steller's relation contained in the second volume of the memoirs of the academy of petersburgh. [footnote : according to the general map of russia, the mouth of the kamtchatka river is in ° ´ from fero. unalashka therefore, according to this estimation, is ° ´ from fero, or ° ´ ´´ from greenwich.] [footnote : the lonicera pyrenaica of linnæus. it is not a dwarf cherry, but a species of honeysuckle.] [footnote : all the other journalists uniformly describe unalashka as containing nothing but underwood; we must therefore suppose that the trees here mentioned were very low and small, and this agrees with what goes before, "hardly any wood is to be found on it."] [footnote : by beavers the journalists certainly mean sea-otters, called by the russians sea-beavers. see p. . for a description of the sea-otter, called by linnæus lutra marina, see nov. com. petr. vol. ii. p. , et seq.] [sidenote: account of the inhabitants of the fox islands.] the inhabitants of alaxa, umnak, unalaksha, and the neighbouring islands, are of a middle stature, tawny brown colour, and black hair. in summer they wear coats (parki[ ]) made of bird skins, over which, in bad weather, and in their boats, they throw cloaks, called kamli, made of thin whale guts. on their heads they wear wooden caps, ornamented with duck's feathers, and the ears of the sea-animal, called scivutcha or sea-lion; they also adorn these caps with beads of different colours, and with little figures of bone or stone. in the partition of the nostrils they place a pin, about four inches long, made of the bone, or of the stalk of a certain black plant; from the ends of this pin or bodkin they hang, in fine weather and on festivals, rows of beads, one below the other. they thrust beads, and bits of pebble cut like teeth, into holes made in the under-lips. they also wear strings of beads in their ears, with bits of amber, which the inhabitants of the other islands procure from alaxa, in exchange for arrows and kamli. [footnote : parki in russian signifies a shirt, the coats of these islanders being made like shirts.] they cut their hair before just above the eyes, and some shave the top of their heads like monks. behind the hair is loose. the dress of the women hardly differs from that of the men, excepting that it is made of fish-skins. they sew with bone needles, and thread made of fish guts, fastening their work to the ground before them with bodkins. they go with the head uncovered, and the hair cut like that of the men before, but tied up behind in a high knot. they paint their cheeks with strokes of blue and red, and wear nose-pins, beads, and ear-rings like the men; they hang beads round their neck, and checkered strings round their arms and legs. [sidenote: manners and customs.] in their persons we should reckon them extremely nasty. they eat the vermin with which their bodies are covered, and swallow the mucus from the nose. having washed themselves, according to custom, first with urine, and then with water, they suck their hands dry. when they are sick, they lie three or four days without food; and if bleeding is necessary, they open a vein with lancets made of flint, and suck the blood. their principal nourishment is fish and whale fat, which they commonly eat raw. they also feed upon sea-wrack and roots, particularly the saran, a species of lily; they eat a herb, called kutage, on account of its bitterness, only with fish or fat. they sometimes kindle fire by catching a spark among dry leaves and powder of sulphur: but the most common method is by rubbing two pieces of wood together, in the manner practised at kamtchatka[ ], and which vaksel, beering's lieutenant, found to be in use in that part of north america which he saw in . they are very fond of russian oil and butter, but not of bread. they could not be prevailed upon to taste any sugar until the commander shewed the example; finding it sweet, they put it up to carry it home to their wives. [footnote : the instrument made use of by the kamtchadals, to procure fire, is a board with several holes in it, and a stick; the latter is put into the holes, and turned about swiftly, until the wood within the holes begins to burn, where there is tinder ready to catch the sparks. s. r. g. iii. p. .] the houses of these islanders are huts built precisely in the manner of those in kamtchatka, with the entry through a hole in the middle of the roof. in one of these huts live several families, to the amount of thirty or forty persons. they keep themselves warm by means of whale fat burnt in shells, which they place between their legs. the women set apart from the men. six or seven of these huts or yourts make a village, of which there are sixteen in unalashka. the islands seem in general to be well inhabited, as may be conjectured from the great number of boats which are seen continually plying along the shore. there are upwards of a thousand inhabitants on unalashka, and they say that it was formerly much more populous. they have suffered greatly by their disputes with the russians, and by a famine in the year ; but most of all from a change in their way of life. no longer contented with their original simplicity, they long for russian luxuries: in order therefore to obtain a few delicacies, which are presently consumed, they dedicate the greatest part of their time to hunting, for the purpose of procuring furs for the russians: by these means, they neglect to lay up a provision of fish and roots; and suffer their children frequently to die of hunger. their principal food is fish, which they catch with bone hooks. their boats, in which they row to a great distance from land, are made, like those of the innuet or esquimaux, of thin slips of wood and skins: these skins cover the top as well as the sides of the boat, and are drawn tight round the waist of the rower. the oar is a paddle, broad at both ends. some of their boats hold two persons; one of whom rows, and the other fishes: but these kind of boats seem appropriated to their chiefs. they have also large boats capable of holding forty men. they kill birds and beasts with darts made of bone, or of wood tipped with sharpened stone: they use these kind of darts in war, which break with the blow given by them, and leave the point in the wound. the manners and character of these people are what we should expect from their necessitous situation, extremely rude and savage. the inhabitants however of unalashka are somewhat less barbarous in their manners and behaviour to each other, and also more civil to strangers than the natives of the other islands; but even they are engaged in frequent and bloody quarrels, and commit murder without the least compunction. their disposition engages them in continual wars, in which they always endeavour to gain their point by stratagem. the inhabitants of unimak are formidable to all the rest; they frequently invade the other islands, and carry off women, the chief object of their wars. alaxa is most subject to these incursions, probably because it is more populous and extensive. they all join in hating the russians, whom they consider as general invaders, and therefore kill them wherever they can. the people of unalashka however are more friendly; for lieutenant levasheff, being informed that there was a russian vessel in the straits of alaxa, prevailed on some unalashkans to carry a letter, which they undertook, notwithstanding the danger they were exposed to from the inhabitants of the intervening islands. the journalist says, that these people have no kind of religion, nor any notion of a god. we observe however among them sufficient marks of such a religion as might be expected from people in their situation. for the journalist informs us, that they have fortune-tellers employed by them at their festivals. these persons pretend to foretel events by the information of the kugans or dæmons. in their divinations they put on wooden masks, made in the form in which they say the kugan appeared to them; they then dance with violent motions, beating at the same time drums covered with fish skins. the inhabitants also wear little figures on their caps, and place others round their huts, to keep off the devils. these are sufficient marks of a savage religion. it is common for them to have two, three, or four wives, and some have also an object of unnatural affection, who is dressed like the women. the wives do not all live together, but, like the kamtchadals, in different yourts. it is not unusual for the men to exchange their wives, and even sell them, in time of dearth, for a bladder of fat; the husband afterwards endeavours to get back his wife, if she is a favourite, and if unsuccessful he sometimes kills himself. when strangers arrive at a village, it is always customary for the women to go out to meet them, while the men remain at home: this is considered as a pledge of friendship and security. when a man dies in the hut belonging to his wife, she retires into a dark hole, where she remains forty days. the husband pays the same compliment to his favourite wife upon her death. when both parents die, the children are left to shift for themselves. the russians found many in this situation, and some were brought for sale. in each village there is a sort of chief, called tookoo, who is not distinguished by any particular rank or authority. he decides differences by arbitration, and the neighbours enforce the sentence. when he goes out to sea he is exempted from working, and has a servant, called kalè, for the purpose of rowing the canoe; this is the only mark of his dignity: at all other times he labours like the rest. the office is not hereditary; but is generally conferred on him who is most remarkable for his personal qualities; or who possesses a great influence by the number of his friends. hence it frequently happens, that the person who has the largest family is chosen. during their festivals, which are held after the fishing season ends in april, the men and women sing songs; the women dance, sometimes singly, and sometimes in pairs, waving in their hands blown bladders; they begin with gentle movements, which become at last extremely violent. the inhabitants of unalashka are called kogholaghi. those of akutan, and farther east to unimak, are called kighigusi; and those of unimak and alaxa are called kataghayekiki. they cannot tell whence they have these names, and now begin to call themselves by the general name of aleyut, given them by the russians, and borrowed from some of the [ ]kuril islands. upon being asked concerning their origin, they said that they had always inhabited these islands, and knew nothing of any other country beyond them. all that could be gathered from them was, that the greatest numbers came from alaxa, and that they did not know whether that land had any bounds. the russians surveyed this island very far to the n. e. in boats, being out about a fortnight, and set up a cross at the end of their survey. the boats of the islanders are like those of the americans. it appears however from their customs and way of life, so far as these are not necessarily prescribed to them by their situation, that they are of kamtchatdal original. their huts, their manner of kindling fire, and their objects of unnatural affections, lead to this conjecture. add to this, the almost continual westerly winds, which must render the passage westward extremely difficult. beering and tchirikoff could never obtain easterly winds but by going to the southward. [footnote : i cannot find, that any of the kuril isles are called aleyut in the catalogue of those islands given by mr. muller, s. r. g. iii. p, - . neither are any of them laid down under that name in the russian charts.] the russians have for some years past been accustomed to go to these islands in quest of furs, of which they have imposed a tax on the inhabitants. the manner of carrying on this trade is as follows. the russian traders go in autumn to beering's and copper island, and there winter: they then employ themselves in catching the sea-cat, and afterwards the scivutcha, or sea-lion. the flesh of the latter is prepared for food, and it is very delicate. they carry the skins of these sea-animals to the eastern islands. next summer they go eastward, to the fox-islands; and again lay their ships up for the winter. they then endeavour to procure, either by persuasion or force, the children of the inhabitants, particularly of the tookoos, as hostages. this being accomplished, they deliver to the inhabitants fox-traps, and also skins for their boats, for which they oblige them to bring furs and provisions during the winter. after obtaining from them a certain quantity of furs, by way of tax, for which they give them quittances; the russians pay for the rest in beads, false pearls, goat's wool, copper kettles, hatchets, &c. in the spring they get back their traps, and deliver up their hostages. they dare not hunt alone, nor in small numbers, on account of the hatred of the natives. these people could not, for some time, comprehend for what purpose the russians imposed a tribute of skins, which were not to be their own property, but belonged to an absent person; for their tookoos have no revenue. nor could they be made to believe, that there were any more russians than those who came among them; for in their own country all the men of an island go out together. at present they comprehend something of kamtchatka, by means of the kamtchadals and koriacs who come along with the russians; and on their arrival love to associate with people whose manner of life resembles their own. krenitzin and levasheff returned from this expedition into the mouth of the kamtchatka river in autumn . the chart which accompanies this journal was composed by the pilot jacob yakoff, under the inspection of the commanders[ ] krenitzin and levasheff. the track of the st. paul is marked both in going out and returning. the harbour of the st. paul in the island unalashka, and the straits of alaxa, are laid down from observations made during the winter ; and the islands connected by bearings and distances taken during a cruise of the st. paul twice repeated. [footnote : krenitzin was drowned soon after his return to kamtchatka in a canoe belonging to the natives.] in this chart the variation is said to be in lat. long. points ° ´. . east. - / - / - / - / n^o ii. concerning the longitude of _kamtchatka_, and of the eastern extremity of _asia_, as laid down by the _russian_ geographers. [sidenote: longitude of the extreme parts of asia.] the important question concerning the longitude of the extreme parts of asia has been so differently stated by the most celebrated geographers, that it may not be amiss to refer the curious reader to the principal treatises upon that subject. [sidenote: by mr. muller and the russian geographers.] the proofs by which mr. muller and the russian geographers place the longitude of the eastern extremity of asia beyond degrees from the first meridian of fero, or ° ´ ´´ from paris, are drawn from the observations of the satellites of jupiter, made by krassilnikoff at kamtchatka, and in different parts of siberia, and from the expeditions of the russians by land and sea towards tschukotskoi noss. [sidenote: by mr. engel.] mr. engel calls in question the exactness of these observations, and takes off twenty-nine degrees from the longitude of kamtchatka, as laid down by the russians. to this purpose he has given to the public, . memoires et observations geographiques et critiques sur la situation des pays septentrionaux de l'asie et de l'amerique. a lausanne, . . geographische und critische nachricht ueber die lage der noerdlichen gegenden von asien und america. mittau, . [sidenote: by mr. vaugondy.] it appears to monsieur de vaugondy, that there are not sufficient grounds for so extraordinary a diminution: accordingly he shortens the continent of asia only eleven degrees of longitude; and upon this subject he has given the two following treatises: . lettre au sujet d'une carte systematique des pays septentrionaux de l'asie et de l'amerique. paris, . . nouveau systeme geographique, par lequel on concilie les anciennes connoissances sur les pays au nord ouest de l'amerique. paris, . [sidenote: mons. buache supports the system of the russians against engel and vaugondy.] in opposition to these authors, monsieur buache has published an excellent treatise, entitled memoires sur les pays de l'asie et de l'amerique. paris, . in this memoir he dissents from the opinions of messrs engel and vaugondy; and defends the system of the russian geographers in the following manner. monsieur maraldi, after comparing the observations of the satellites of jupiter, taken at kamtchatka by krassilnikoff, with the tables, has determined the longitude of ochotsk, bolcheresk, and the port of st. peter and paul from the first meridian of paris as follows: h ´ ´´ [ ]longitude of ochotsk of bolcheresk of the port latitude of ochotsk ° ´, of bolcheresk ° ´, of the port ° ´. [footnote : krassilnikoff compared his observations with corresponding ones taken at petersburg, which gave results as follow: from comparing an observation of an eclipse of the first satellite, taken at ochotsk the th of january, , with an observation of an eclipse of the same satellite taken at petersburg on the th of january in the same year, the difference of longitude between petersburg and ochotsk appeared to be ^h. ´ ´´; from a comparison of two other similar observations the difference of longitude was ^h. ´ ´´, a mean of which is ^h. ´ ´´, being the true difference between the meridians of petersburg and ochotsk according to these observations. by adding the difference of the longitude between petersburg and paris, which is ^h. ´ ´´, we have the longitude of ochotsk from paris ^h. ´ ´´, which differs ´´ only from the result of mons. maraldi. nov. comm. pet. iii. p. . in the same manner the longitude of bolcheresk appears from the corresponding observations taken at that place and at petersburg to be h. ´ ´´ differing from mr. maraldi about ´ ´´. nov. com. p. . but the longitude of the port of st. peter and paul, estimated in the same manner from corresponding observations, differs from the longitude as computed by mons. maraldi no more than seconds, p. .] the comparison of the following results, deduced from corresponding observations[ ] of the eclipses of jupiter's satellites taken at bolcheresk at the port of peter and paul by krassilnikoff, and at pekin by the jesuit missionaries, will shew from their near agreement the care and attention which must have been given to the observations; and from hence there is reason to suppose, that the suspicions of inaccuracy imputed to krassilnikoff are ill founded. [footnote : obs. ast. ecc. sat. jovis, &c. nov. com. petr. vol. iii. p. , &c. obs. ast. pekini factæ. ant. hallerstein--curante max. hell. vindibonæ, .] , old stile. h ´ ´´ jan. , em. i sat. at the port of st. peter and paul. at pekin. ---------- difference of the meridian at pekin and the port ---------- h ´ ´´ jan. , imm. iii sat. at the port. at pekin. ---------- ---------- h ´ ´´ feb. , i sat. at the port. at pekin. ---------- ---------- h ´ ´´ feb. , em. i sat. ---------- ----------- and the longitude from paris to pekin being the difference of the meridians of paris and the port will be which differs only seconds from the determination of mr. maraldi. . old style. h ´ ´´ march , em. ii sat. at bolcheresk. at pekin. ----------- ----------- h ´ ´´ dec. , im. i sat. at bolcheresk. at pekin. ----------- difference of the meridians of pekin and bolcheresk ----------- h ´ ´´ by taking the medium the difference of the longitude between bolcheresk and pekin will be found to be between bolcheresk and paris which differs only one minute and one second from the determination of mr. maraldi. in order to call in question the conclusions drawn from the observations of krassilnikoff, monsieur de vaugondy pretends that the instruments and pendulums, which he made use of at kamtchatka, were much damaged by the length of the journey; and that the person who was sent to repair them was an unskilful workman. but this opinion seems to have been advanced without sufficient foundation. indeed krassilnikoff[ ] himself allows that his pendulum occasionally stopt, even when necessary to ascertain the true time of the observation. he admits therefore that the observations which he took under these disadvantages (when he could not correct them by preceding or subsequent observations of the sun or stars) are not to be depended upon, and has accordingly distinguished them by an asterisk; there are however a number of others, which were not liable to any exception of this kind; and the observations already mentioned in this number are comprised under this class. [footnote : nov. com. pet. iii. p. .] * * * * * if the arguments which have been already produced should not appear sufficiently satisfactory, we have the further testimony of mr. muller, who was in those parts at the same time with krassilnikoff, and who is the only competent judge of this matter now alive. for that respectable author has given me the most positive assurances, that the instruments were not damaged in such a manner as to effect the accuracy of the observations when in the hands of a skilful observer. [sidenote: accuracy of the russian geographers.] that the longitude of kamtchatka is laid down with sufficient accuracy by the russian geographers, will appear by comparing it with the longitude of yakutsk; for as the latter has been clearly established by a variety of observations, taken at different times and by different persons, if there is any error in placing kamtchatka so far to the east, it will be found in the longitude between yakutsk and bolcheresk. a short comparison therefore of some of the different observations made at yakutsk will help to settle the longitude of kamtchatka, and will still farther confirm the character of a skilful observer, which has been given to krassilnikoff. krassilnikoff in returning from kamtchatka observed at yakutsk several eclipses of the satellites of jupiter, of which the following are mentioned by him as the most exact. , old style. h ´ ´´ [ ]feb. . imm. i. sat. somewhat doubtful. . imm. ii. sat. } . imm. ii. sat. } mar. . imm. i. sat. } all exact. apr. . em. i. sat. } [footnote : nov. comm. petr. t. iii. p. .] the same eclipses, as calculated by the tables of mr. wargentin, for the meridian of paris, are as follow: h ´ ´´ h ´ ´´ feb. . imm. i. difference of . imm. i. the meridians . imm. ii. of paris-- mar. . imm. i. and yakutsk apr. . em. i. ---------- the mean of which is ---------- the observations of mr. islenieff[ ], made at yakutsk in the year , to which place he was sent to observe the transit of venus, have received the sanction of the imperial academy. the longitude which he fixes for yakutsk is ^h ´ ´´. this corresponds, to a sufficient degree of exactness, with the longitude inferred from, the observations of krassilnikoff. [footnote : for islenieff's observations at yakutsk, see nov. com. tom. xiv. part iii. p. to .] thus the longitude of yakutsk from paris being ^h ° ´´. or in degrees . and of bolcheresk , or in degrees ° ´ . the difference of the longitude of these two places, from astronomical observations, amounts to . or in degrees ° ´ . the latitude of bolcheresk is ° ´ ´´. and that of yakutsk ° ´ ´´. and the difference of their longitudes being from the preceding determination . the direct distance between the places measured on a great circle of the earth will appear by trigonometry to be ° ´. or about versts reckoning - / versts to a degree. this distance consists partly of sea, and partly of land; and a constant intercourse is kept up between the two places, by means of ochotsk, which lies between them. the distance by sea from bolcheresk to ochotsk is estimated by ships reckonings to be versts, and the distance by land from ochotsk to yakutsk is versts, making altogether . the direct distance deduced by trigonometry, (on a supposition that the difference of longitude between bolcheresk and yakutsk is ° ´.) is , falling short of by . a difference naturally to be expected from considering, that neither roads by land, or the course of ships at sea, are ever performed precisely on a great circle of the earth, which is the shortest line that can be drawn on the earth's surface between two places. by this agreement between the distance thus estimated, and that deduced by computation, on supposing the difference of longitude between yakutsk and bolcheresk to be ° ´. it seems very improbable, that there should be an error of many degrees in the astronomical determination. since then the longitude between fero and petersburgh is acknowledged to be °--that between petersburgh and yakutsk ° ´--and as the distance in longitude between yakutsk and bolcheresk cannot be materially less than ° ´. it follows that the longitude of bolcheresk from fero cannot be much less than ° ´. where then shall we find place for so great an error as degrees, which, according to mr. engel, or even of °. which, according to mons. vaugondy, is imputed to the russian geographers, in fixing the longitude of kamtchatka? from the isle of fero longitude of yakutsk of ochotsk of bolcheresk of the port of st. peter and paul [sidenote: longitude of the extreme parts of asia determined by the russians.] as no astronomical observations have been made further to the east than the port of st. peter and paul, it is impossible to fix, with any degree of certainty, the longitude of the north-eastern promontory of asia. it appears however from beering's and synd's coasting voyages towards tschukotskoi noss, and from other expeditions to the parts by land and sea, that the coast of asia in lat. . stretches at least ° . from the port, or to about ° longitude from the isle of fero. n^o iii. summary of the proofs tending to shew, that _beering_ and _tschirikoff_ either reached _america_ in , or came very near it. the coast which beering reached, and called cape st. elias, lay, according to his estimation, in °. ´. n. latitude, and in longitude °. from fero: the coast touched at by tschirikoff was situated in lat. °. long. °[ ]. [footnote : the reader will find the narrative of this voyage made by beering and tschirikoff in muller's account of the russian discoveries, s. r. g. iii. , &c.] [sidenote: arguments advanced by steller to prove that beering and tschirikoff discovered america.] steller, who accompanied beering in his expedition towards america, endeavours to prove, that they discovered that continent by the following arguments[ ]: the coasts were bold, presenting continued chains of high mountains, some of which were so elevated, that their tops were covered with snow, their sides were cloathed from the bottom to the top with large tracts of thick and fine wood[ ]. [footnote : see krashininikoff's account of kamtchatka, chap. x. french translation; chap. iv. english translation.] [footnote : the recent navigations in those seas strongly confirm this argument. for in general all the new discovered islands are quite destitute of trees; even the largest produce nothing but underwood, one of the most easterly kadyak alone excepted, upon which small willows and alders were observed growing in vallies at some distance from the coast. see p. .] steller went ashore, where he remained only a few hours; during which time he observed several species of birds which are not known in siberia: amongst these was the bird described by [ ]catesby, under the name of blue jay; and which has never yet been found in any country but north america. the soil was very different from that of the neighbouring islands, and at kamtchatka: and he collected several plants, which are deemed by botanists peculiar to america. [footnote : see catesby's natural history of florida, carolina, &c. this bird is called by linnæus corbus cristatus. i have seen, in mr. pennant's ms account of the history of the animals, birds, &c. of n. america, and the northern hemisphere, as high as lat. , an exact description of this bird. whenever that ingenious author, to whom we are indebted for many elegant and interesting publications, gives this part of his labours to the world, the zoology of these countries will be fully and accurately considered.] the following list of these plants was communicated to me by mr. pallas: i insert them however without presuming to decide, whether they are the exclusive growth of north america: the determination of this point is the province of botany. trillium erectum. fumaria cucullaria. a species of dracontium, with leaves like the canna indica. uvularia perfoliata. heuchera americana. mimulus luteus, a peruvian plant. a species of rubus, probably a variety of the rubus idæus, but with larger berries, and a large laciniated red calyx. none of these plants are found in kamtchatka, or in any of the neighbouring islands[ ]. [footnote : according to mr. pallas, the plants of the new-discovered islands are mostly alpine, like those of siberia; this he attributes to the shortness and coldness of the summer, occasioned by the frequency of the north winds. his words are: "quoique les hivres de ces isles soient assez temperés par l'air de la mer, de façon que les neiges ne couvrent jamais la terre que par intervalles, la plupart des plantes y sont alpines, comme en siberie, par la raison que l'eté y est tout aussi courte et froide, a cause des vents de nord qui y regnent." this passage is taken from a ms treatise in the french language, relative to the new-discovered islands communicated to me by my very learned and ingenious friend mr. pallas, professor of natural history at st. petersburg; from which i have been enabled to collect a considerable degree of information. this treatise was sent to mons. buffon; and that celebrated naturalist has made great use of it in the fifth volume of his supplement à l'histoire naturelle.] though these circumstances should not be considered as affording decisive proofs, that beering reached america; yet they will surely be admitted as strong presumptions, that he very nearly approached that continent[ ]. [footnote : the reader will recollect in this place, that the natives of the contiguous islands touched at by beering and tschirikoff "presented to the russians the calumet, or pipe of peace, which is a symbol of friendship universal among the people of north america, and an usage of arbitrary institution peculiar to them." see robertson's hist. am. vol. i. p. . s. r. g. iii. p. .] n^o iv. list of the principal charts representing the russian discoveries. the following is an authentic list of the principal charts of the russian discoveries hitherto published. it is accompanied with a few explanatory remarks. [sidenote: list of the charts of the russian discoveries]. . carte des nouvelles dècouvertes au nord de la mer du sud, tant à l'est de la siberie et du kamtchatka, qu'à l'ouest de la nouvelle france dressé sur les memoires de mr. de l'isle, par philippe buache, . a memoir relative to this chart was soon afterwards published, with the following title, explication de la carte des nouvelles dècouvertes au nord de la mer du sud par mr. de l'isle paris, , to. this map is alluded to, p. of this work. . carte des nouvelles dècouvertes entre la partie orientale de l'asie et l'occidentale de l'amerique, avec des vues sur la grande terre réconnue, par les russes, en , par phil. buache, . . nouvelle carte des dècouvertes faites par des vaisseaux russiens aux cotés inconnus de l'amerique septentrionale avec les pais adjacens, dressés sur les memoires authentiques de ceux qui ont assisté à ces dècouvertes, et sur d'autres connoissances; dont on rend raison dans un memoire separé: à st. petersburg, à l'academie imperiale des sciences, . . this map was published under the inspection of mr. muller, and is still prefixed to his account of the russian discoveries[ ]. the part which exhibits the new discovered isles and the coast of america, was chiefly taken from the chart of beering's expedition. accordingly that continent is represented as advancing, between and degrees of latitude, to within a small distance of kamtchatka. nor could there be any reason to suspect, that such experienced sailors as beering and tschirikoff had mistaken a chain of islands for promontories belonging to america, until subsequent navigators had actually sailed through that very part, which was supposed to be a continent. [footnote : this map was published by jefferys under the following title: "a map of the discoveries made by the russians on the north west coast of america, published by the royal academy of sciences at petersburg. republished by thomas jefferys, geographer to his majesty, ."] . a second chart published by the academy, but not under the inspection of mr. muller, bears the same title as the former. nouvelle carte des dècouvertes faites par des vaisseaux russiens aut côtés inconnus de l'amerique, &c. . it is for the most part a copy of a manuscript chart known in russia by the name of the chart of the promyshlenics, or merchant adventurers, and which was sketched from the mere reports of persons who had sailed to the new discovered islands. as to the size and position of the new discovered islands, this chart of the academy is extremely erroneous: it is however free from the above-mentioned mistake, which runs through all the former charts, namely, the representing of the coast of america, between and degrees of latitude, as contiguous to kamtchatka. it likewise removes that part of the same continent lying in latitude , from ° longitude to °, and in its stead lays down a large island, which stretches between latitude ° and ° ´, from ° longitude to °, to within a small distance of both continents. but whether this latter alteration be equally justifiable or not, is a question, the decision of which must be left to future navigators[ ]. [footnote : mr. muller has long ago acknowledged, in the most candid and public manner, the incorrectness of the former chart, as far as it relates to the part which represents america, as contiguous to kamtchatka: but he still maintains his opinion concerning the actual vicinity of the two continents in an higher latitude. the following quotation is taken from a letter written by mr. muller, in , of which i have a copy in my possession. "posterity must judge if the new chart of the academy is to be preferred to the former one for removing the continent of america (which is represented as lying near the coast of tschutski) to a greater distance. synd, who is more to be trusted than the promyschlenics, persists in the old system. he places america as near as before to tschukotskoi noss, but knows nothing of a large island called alashka, which takes up the place of the continent, and which ought to be laid down much more to the south or south east."] . carte du nouvel archipel du nord decouvert parles russes dans la mer de kamtchatka et d'anadir. this chart is prefixed to mr. stæhlin's account of the new northern archipelago. in the english translation it is called, a map of the new northern archipelago, discovered by the russians in the seas of kamtchatka and anadyr. it differs from the last mentioned chart only in the size and position of a few of the islands, and in the addition of five or six new ones, and is equally incorrect. the new discovered islands are classed in this chart into three groups, which are called the isles of anadyr[ ], the olutorian[ ] isles, and the aleütian isles. the two last mentioned charts are alluded to, p. of this work. [footnote : monsieur buffon has adopted the apellation and erroneous representation of the isles of anadyr, in his carte de deux regions polaires, lately published. see supplement à l'hist. nat. vol. v. p. .] [footnote : the olotorian isles are so named from the small river of olotora, which flows into the sea at kamtchatka, about latitude °. the following remarks upon this group of islands are taken from a letter of mr. muller mentioned in the last note. "this appellation of olutorian isles is not in use at kamtchatka. these islands, called upon this chart olutorians, lie according to the chart of the promyschlenics, and the chart of the academy, very remote from the river olutora: and it seems as if they were advanced upon this chart nearer to kamtchatka only in favour of the name. they cannot be situated so near that coast, because they were neither seen by beering in , nor by the promyschlenics, novikoff and bacchoff, when they sailed in from the anadyr to beering's island." see p. .] . an excellent map of the empire of russia, published by the geographical department of the academy of sciences at st. petersburg in , comprehends the greatest part of the new discovered islands. a reduced copy of this chart being prefixed to this work, i shall only mention the authorities from whence the compilers have laid down the new discovered islands. the aleütian isles are partly taken from beering's chart, partly from [ ]otcheredin's, whose voyage is related in the eleventh chapter, and partly from other ms. charts of different navigators. the islands near the coast of the tschutski are copied from synd's chart. the fox islands are laid down from the chart of otcheredin. the reader will perceive, that the position of the fox islands, upon this general map of russia, is materially different from that assigned to them in the chart of krenitzin's and levasheff's voyage. in the former they are represented as stretching between ° ´ north latitude, and ° and ° longitude from the isle of fero: in the latter they are situated between ° ´ and ° ´ latitude, and ° ´ and ° ´ longitude. according to the most recent accounts received from petersburg, the position given to them upon this general map is considerably too much to the north and east; consequently that assigned to them upon krenitzin's chart is probably the most to be depended upon. [footnote : i have a ms. copy of otcheredin's chart in my possession; but as the fox islands, in the general map of russia, are copied from thence, the reader will find them laid down upon the reduced map prefixed to this work. the anonymous author of the account of the russian discoveries, of whose work i have given a translation in part i. seems to have followed, in most particulars, otcheredin's chart and journal for the longitude, latitude, size, and position of the new discovered islands. for this reason, i should have had his chart engraved if the fox islands upon the general map had not been taken from thence: there seemed no occasion therefore for increasing the expence of this work, already too great from the number of charts, by the addition of another not absolutely necessary.] . carte des dècouvertes russes dans la mer orientale et en amerique, pour servir à l'essai[ ] sur le commerce de russie, , amsterdam. it is natural to expect, that a chart so recently published should be superior to all the preceding ones; whereas, on the contrary, it is by far the most incorrect representation of the new discovered islands which has yet appeared. [footnote : the twelfth chapter of this essay relates to the discoveries and commerce of the russians in the eastern ocean. the account of the russian discoveries is a translation of mr. stæhlin's description of the new northern archipelago. in addition, he has subjoined an account of kamtchatka, and a short sketch of the russian commerce to the new discovered islands, and to america. if we may believe the author of this essay, the russians have not only discovered america, but they also every year form occasional settlements upon that continent, similar to those of the europeans in newfoundland. his words are: "il est donc certain, que les russes ont dècouvert le continent de l'amérique; mais on peut assurer qu'ils n'y ont encore aucun port, aucun comptoir. il en est des établissements de cette nation dans la grande terre, comme de ceux des nations européennes dans l'isle de terre neve. ses vaisseaux ou frégates arrivent en amèrique; leurs equipages et les cosaques chasseurs s'etablissent sur la côte; les uns se retranchent, et les autres y font la chasse et la pêche du chien marin et du narval. ils reviennent ensuite au kamtchatka, après avoir été relevès par d'autres frégates sur les mêmes parages, ou à des distances plus ou moins eloignés, &c. &c." see essai sur le commerce de la russie, p. - . thus the publick is imposed upon by fictitious and exaggerated accounts.] n^o v. position of the _andreanoffsky isles_ ascertained--number of the _aleütian isles_. [sidenote: position of the andreanoffsky isles.] when the anonymous author published his account of the russian discoveries in , the position of the andreanoffsky isles was not ascertained. it was generally supposed, that they formed part of that cluster of islands, which synd[ ] fell in with in his voyage towards tschukotskoi noss; and buffon[ ] represents them to be the same with those laid down in stæhlin's chart, under the name of anadirsky isles. the anonymous author in the passage here referred to, supposes them to be n. e. of the aleütian isles; "at the distance of or versts; that their direction is probably east and west, and that some of them may unite with that part of the fox islands which are most contiguous to the opposite continent." this conjecture was advanced upon a supposition that the andreanoffsky isles lay near the coast of the tschutski; and that some of the fox islands were situated in latitude , as they are laid down upon the general map of russia. but according to subsequent information, the andreanoffsky isles lie between the aleütian and the fox islands, and complete the connection between kamtchatka and america[ ]. their chain is supposed to begin in about latitude , near the most easterly of the aleütian isles, and to extend in a scattered series towards the fox islands. the most north easterly of these islands are said to be so near the most southerly of the fox islands, that they seem occasionally to have been taken for them. an instance of this occurs in p. and of this work; where atchu and amlach are reckoned among the fox islands. it is however more probable, that they are part of the group called by the aleütian chief negho[ ], and known to the russians under the name of andreanoffsky islands, because they were supposed to have been first discovered by andrean tolstyk, whose voyage is related in the seventh chapter of the first part. [footnote : see n^o ix. of this appendix.] [footnote : isles anadyr ou andrien. supp. vol. v. p. .] [footnote : p. . some of the remoter islands are said to be e. s. e. of the aleütian isles; these must be either part of the andreanoffsky isles, or the most southerly of the fox islands.] [footnote : see n^o viii. of this appendix.] [sidenote: number of the aleütian isles.] i take this opportunity of adding, that the anonymous author, in describing the aleütian isles, both in the first and last chapter of the account of the russian discoveries, mentions only three; namely, attak, semitshi, shemiya. but the aleütian isles consist of a much larger number; and their chain includes all the islands comprehended by the islander in the two groups of khao and sasignan[ ]. many of them are laid down upon the general map of russia; and some of them are occasionally alluded to in the journals of the russian voyages[ ]. [footnote : see n^o viii.] [footnote : see p. , and particularly p. , where some of these islands are mentioned under the names of ibiya, kiska, and olas.] n^o vi. conjectures concerning the proximity of the _fox islands_ to the continent of _america_. the anonymous author, in the course of his account of the russian discoveries, has advanced many proofs drawn from natural history, from which he supposes the fox islands to be at a small distance from the continent of america: hence he grounds his conjecture, that "the time is not far distant when some of the russian navigators will fall in with that coast." [sidenote: proofs of the vicinity of the fox islands to america.] the small willows and alders which, according to glottoff, were found growing upon kadyak, do not appear to have been sufficient either in size or quantity to ascertain, with any degree of certainty, the close vicinity of that island to america. river-otters, wolves, bears, and wild boars, which were observed upon the same island, will perhaps be thought to afford a stronger presumption in favour of a neighbouring continent; martens were also caught there, an animal which is not known in the eastern ports of siberia, nor found upon any of the other islands. all the above mentioned animals, martens alone excepted, were seen upon alaksu, which is situated more to the north east than kadyak, and also rein-deers and wild dogs. to these proofs drawn from natural history, we must add the reports of a mountainous country covered with forests, and of a great promontory called atachtak, lying still more to the n. e. which were prevalent among the inhabitants of alaksu and kadyak. although these circumstances have been already mentioned[ ], yet i have thought proper to recapitulate them here, in order to lay before the reader in one point of view the several proofs advanced by the anonymous author, which seem to shew, that the fox islands are situated near america. many of them afford, beyond a doubt, evident signs of a less open sea; and give certain marks of a nearer approach towards the opposite continent. but how far that distance may be supposed, must be left to the judgment of the reader; and remains to be ascertained by subsequent navigators. all that we know for certain, is, that as far as any russian vessels have hitherto sailed, a chain of islands has been discovered lying e. or n. e. by e. from kamtchatka, and stretching towards america. part of this chain has only been touched at; the rest is unknown; and all beyond is uncertainty and conjecture. [footnote : see p. and - - - .] n° vii. _of the tschutski--reports of the vicinity of_ america _to their coast, first propagated by them, seem to be confirmed by late accounts from those parts._ [sidenote: the tschutski.] the tschutski, it is well known, inhabit the north eastern part of siberia; their country is a small tract of land, bounded on the north by the frozen sea, on the east by the eastern ocean; on the south it borders upon river anadyr, and on that of kovyma to the west. the n. e. cape of this country is called tschukotskoi-noss, or the promontory of the tschutski. its inhabitants are the only people of siberia who have not yet been subdued by the russians. the anonymous author agrees with mr. muller in supposing, that america advances to within a small distance of the coast of the tschutski; which he says "is confirmed by the latest accounts procured from these parts." the first intelligence concerning the supposed vicinity between asia and america was derived from the reports of the tschutski in their intercourse with the russians. vague and uncertain accounts, drawn from a barbarous people, cannot deserve implicit credit; but as they have been uniformly and invariably propagated by the inhabitants of those regions from the middle of the last century to the present time, they must merit at least the attention of every curious enquirer. [sidenote: the reports concerning the proximity of america to their coast.] these reports were first related in muller's account of the russian discoveries, and have been lately thought worthy of notice by dr. robertson[ ], in his history of america. their probability seems still further increased by the following circumstances. one plenisner, a native of courland, was appointed commander of ochotsk, in the year , with an express order from the court to proceed as far as [ ] anadirsk, and to procure all possible intelligence concerning the north eastern part of siberia, and the opposite continent. in consequence of this order plenisner repaired to anadirsk, and proceeded likewise to kovimskoi ostrog: the former of these russian settlements is situated near the southern; the latter near the western limits of the tschutski. not content however with collecting all the information in his power from the neighbouring koriacs, who have frequent intercourse with the tschutski; he also sent one daurkin into their country. this person was a native tschutski, who had been taken prisoner, and bred up by the russians: he continued two years with his countrymen, and made several expeditions with them to the neighbouring islands, which lie off the eastern coast of siberia. [footnote : hist. of america, vol. i. p. - .] [footnote : anadirsk has been lately destroyed by the russians themselves.] the sum of the intelligence brought back by this daurkin was as follows: that tschukotskoi-noss is a very narrow peninsula; that the tschutski carry on a trade of barter with the inhabitants of america; that they employ six days in passing the strait which separates the two continents: they direct their course from island to island, and the distance from the one to the other is so small, that they are able to pass every night ashore. more to the north he describes the two continents as approaching still nearer to each other, with only two islands lying between them. this intelligence remarkably coincided with the accounts collected by plenisner himself among the koriacs. plenisner returned to petersburg in , and brought with him several [ ]maps and charts of the north eastern parts of siberia, which were afterwards made use of in the compilation of the general map of russia, published by the academy in [ ]. by these means the country of the tschutski has been laid down with a greater degree of accuracy than heretofore. these are probably the late accounts from those parts which the anonymous author alludes to. [footnote : the most important of these maps comprehends the country of the tschutski, together with the nations which border immediately upon them. this map was chiefly taken during a second expedition made by major pauloffsky against the tschutski; and his march into that country is traced upon it. the first expedition of that russian officer, in which he penetrated as far as tschukotskoi-noss, is related by mr. muller, s. r. g. iii. p. -- . we have no account of this second expedition, during which he had several skirmishes with the tschutski, and came off victorious; but upon his return was surprised and killed by them. this expedition was made about the year .] [footnote : this detail i procured during my continuance at petersburg from several persons of credit, who had frequently conversed with plenisner since his return to the capital, where he died in the latter end of the year .] n^o viii. list of the new-discovered islands, procured from an _aleütian_ chief--catalogue of islands called by different names in the account of the _russian_ discoveries. [sidenote: mr. muller divides the new-discovered islands into four groups.] the subsequent list of the new-discovered islands was procured from an aleütian chief brought to petersburg in , and examined at the desire of the empress by mr. muller, who divides them into four principal groups. he regulates this division partly by a similarity of the language spoken by the inhabitants, and partly by vicinity of situation. [sidenote: first group, called sasignan.] the first group[ ], called by the islander sasignan, comprehends, . beering's island. . copper island. . otma. . samya, or shemiya. . anakta. [footnote : these two first groups probably belong to the aleütian isles.] [sidenote: khao, the second group.] the second group is called khao, and comprises eight islands: . immak. . kiska. . tchetchina. . ava. . kavia. . tschagulak. . ulagama. . amtschidga. [sidenote: negho, the third group.] the third general name is negho, and comprehends the islands known by the russians under the name of andreanoffskye ostrova: sixteen were mentioned by the islander, under the following names: . amatkinak. . ulak. . unalga. . navotsha. . uliga. . anagin. . kagulak. . illask, or illak. . takavanga, upon which is a volcano. . kanaga, which has also a volcano. . leg. . shetshuna. . tagaloon: near the coasts of the three last mentioned islands several small rocky isles are situated. . an island without a name, called by the russians goreloi[ ]. . atchu. . amla. [footnote : goreloi is supposed by the russian navigators to be the same island as atchu, and is reckoned by them among the fox islands. see part i. p. . and n^o v. of this appendix.] [sidenote: kavalang, the fourth group.] the fourth group is denominated kavalang; and comprehends sixteen islands: these are called by the russians lyssie ostrova, or the fox islands. . amuchta. . tschigama. . tschegula. . unistra. . ulaga. . tana-gulana. . kagamin. . kigalga. . schelmaga. . umnak. . aghun-alashka. . unimga. at a small distance from unimga, towards the north, stretches a promontory called by the islanders the land of black foxes, with a small river called alashka, which empties itself opposite to the last-mentioned island into a gulf proper for a haven. the extent of this land is not known. to the south east of this promontory lie four little islands. . uligan. . antun-dussume. . semidit. . senagak. [sidenote: islands called by different names in the russian journals.] many of these names are neither found in the journals or charts; while others are wanting in this list which are mentioned in both journals and charts. nor is this to be wondered at; for the names of the islands have been certainly altered and corrupted by the russian navigators. sometimes the same name has been applied to different islands by the different journalists; at other times the same island has been called by different names. several instances of these changes seem to occur in the account of the russian discoveries: namely, att, attak, and ataku. shemiya and sabiya. atchu, atchak, atach, goreloi or burned island. amlach, amlak, amleg. ayagh, kayachu. alaksu, alagshak, alachshak. aghunalashka, unalashka. n^o ix. voyage of lieutenant _synd_ to the north east of _siberia_--he discovers a cluster of islands, and a promontory, which he supposes to belong to the continent of _america_, lying near the coast of the _tschutski_. in lieutenant synd sailed from ochotsk, upon a voyage of discovery towards the continent of america. he was ordered to take a different course from that held by the late russian vessels, which lay due east from the coast of kamtchatka. as he steered therefore his course more to the north east than any of the preceding navigators, and as it appears from all the voyages related in the first part of this work[ ], that the vicinity of america is to be sought for in that quarter alone, any accurate account of this expedition would not fail of being highly interesting. it is therefore a great mortification to me, that, while i raise the reader's curiosity, i am not able fully to satisfy it. the following intelligence concerning this voyage is all which i was able to procure. it is accompanied with an authentic chart. [footnote : see p. .] [illustration: chart of synd's _voyage toward tschukotskoi noss_.] in synd put to sea from the port of ochotsk, but did not pass (we know not by what accident) the southern cape of kamtchatka and shushu, the first kuril isle, before . he then steered his course north at no great distance from the coast of the peninsula, but made very little progress that year, for he wintered south of the river uka. the following year he sailed from ukinski point due east and north east, until he fell in with a cluster of islands[ ] stretching between and degrees of latitude, and ° and ° longitude. these islands lie south east and east of the coast of the tschutski; and several of them are situated very near the shore. besides these small islands, he discovered also a mountainous coast lying within one degree of the coast of the tschutski, between and north latitude; its most western extremity was situated in longitude ° ´ from ochotsk, or ° ´ from fero. this island is laid down in his chart as part of the continent of america; but we cannot determine upon what proofs he grounds this representation, until a more circumstantial account of his voyage is communicated to the public. synd seems to have made but a short stay ashore. instead of endeavouring to survey its coasts, or of steering more to the east, he almost instantly shaped his course due west towards the course of the tschutski, then turned directly south and south west, until he came opposite to chatyrskoi noss. from that point he continued to coast the peninsula of kamtchatka, doubled the cape, and reached ochotsk in . [footnote : these are certainly some of the islands which the tschutski resort to in their way to what they call the continent of america.] n^o x. specimen of the aleütian language. sun agaiya moon tughilag wind katshik water tana fire kighenag earth hut oollae chief toigon man taiyaga wood yaga shield kuyak sea otter tscholota name of the nation. kanagist. one tagatak two alag three kankoos four setschi five tshaw six atoo seven ooloo eight kapoé nine shiset ten. asok. it is very remarkable, that none of these words bear the least resemblance to those of the same signification, which are found in the different dialects spoken by the koriaks, kamtchadals, and the inhabitants of the kuril isles. n^o xi. attempts of the _russians_ to discover a north east passage--voyages from _archangel_ towards the _lena_--from the _lena_ towards _kamtchatka_--extract from _muller's_ account of _deschneff's_ voyage round _tschukotskoi noss_--narrative of a voyage made by _shalauroff_ from the _lena_ to _shelatskoi noss_. the only communication hitherto known between the atlantic and pacific oceans, or between europe and the east indies, is made either by sailing round the cape of good hope, or by doubling cape horn. but as both these navigations are very long and dangerous, the great object of several late european voyages has been turned towards the discovery of a north east or a north west passage. as this work is entirely confined to the russian navigations, any disquisition concerning the north west passage is totally foreign to the purpose; and for the same reason in what relates to the north east, these researches extend only to the attempts of the russians for the discovery of that passage. the advocates for the north east passage have divided that navigation into three principal parts; and by endeavouring to shew that these three parts have been passed at different times, they conclude from thence, that the whole when taken collectively is practicable. these three parts are, . from archangel to the lena; . from the lena to kamtchatka; . from kamtchatka to japan. with respect to the latter, the connection between the seas of kamtchatka and japan first appeared from some japanese vessels, which were wrecked upon the coast of kamtchatka in the beginning of this century; and this communication has been unquestionably proved from several voyages made by the russians from kamtchatka to japan[ ]. [footnote : s. r. g. iii. p. , and p. , &c.] no one ever asserted that the first part from archangel to the lena was ever performed in one voyage; but several persons having advanced that this navigation has been made by the russians at different times, it becomes necessary to examine the accounts of the russian voyages in those seas. [sidenote: voyages from archangel to the yenisèi.] in lieutenant morovieff sailed from archangel toward the river oby; and got no farther the first year than the mouth of the petchora. the next summer he passed through the straits ef weygatz into the sea of kara; and coasted along the eastern side of that sea, as high as latitude ° ´, but did not double the promontory which separates the sea of kara from the bay of oby. in , the lieutenants malgyin and skurakoff doubled that promontory with great difficulty, and entered the bay of oby. during these expeditions the navigators met with great dangers and impediments from the ice. several unsuccessful attempts were made to pass from the bay of oby to the yenisèi, which was at last effected, in , by two vessels commanded by lieutenants offzin and koskeleff. [sidenote: unsuccessful attempt to pass from the yenisèi to the lena.] the same year the pilot feodor menin sailed from the yenisèi rowards the lena: he steered north as high as lat. °. ´. and when he came to the mouth of the piasida he was stopped by the ice; and finding it impossible to force a passage, he returned to the yenisèi[ ]. [footnote : p. to .] [sidenote: voyage of prontshistsheff from the lena towards the yenisèi.] july, , lieutenant prontshistsheff sailed from yakutsk up the lena to its mouth, in order to pass from thence by sea to the yenisèi. the western mouths of the lena were so choaked up with ice, that he was obliged to pass through the most easterly one; and was prevented by contrary winds from getting out until the th of august. having steered north west along the islands which lie scattered before the mouths of the lena, he found himself in lat. ° ´. he saw much ice to the north and north east; and observed ice-mountains from twenty-four to sixty feet in height. he steered betwixt the ice, which in no place left a free channel of greater breadth than an hundred or two hundred yards. the vessel being much damaged, on the st of september he ran up the mouth of the olenek, which, according to his estimation, lies in ° ´, near which place he passed the winter[ ]. [footnote : gmelin reise, ii. to .] he got out of the olenek the beginning of august in the following year; and arrived on the third at the mouth of the anabara, which he found to lie in lat. ° ´. there he continued until the th, while some of the crew went up the country in search of some mines. on the th he proceeded on his voyage: before he reached the mouth of the chatanga he was so entirely surrounded and hemmed in with ice, that it was not without great difficulty and danger he was able to get loose. he then observed a large field of ice stretching into the sea, on which account he was obliged to continue near the shore, and to run up the chatanga. the mouth of this river was in lat ° ´. from thence he bent his course mostly northward along the shore, until he reached the mouth of the taimura on the th. he then proceeded further, and followed the coast towards the piasida. near the shore were several small islands, between which and the land the ice was immovably fixed. he then directed his course toward the sea, in order to pass round the chain of islands. at first he found the sea more free to the north of the islands, while he observed much ice lying between them. he came at length to the last island, situated in lat. ° ´. between this island and the shore, as well as on the other side of the island which lay most to the north, the ice was firm and immovable. [sidenote: prevented by a chain of islands and the ice from getting to the yenisèi] he attempted however to steer still more to the north; and having advanced about six miles, he was prevented by a thick fog from proceeding: this fog being dispersed, he saw on each side, and before him, nothing but ice; that towards the sea was not fixed; but the accumulated masses were all so close, that the smallest vessel could not have worked its way through. still attempting however to pass to the north; he was forced by the ice n. e. apprehensive of being hemmed in, he returned to the taimura; and from thence got, with much difficulty and danger, to the olenek, on the th of august. this narrative of prontshistsheff's expedition is extracted from the account of professor[ ] gmelin: according to mr. muller[ ], who has given a cursory relation of the same voyage, prontshistsheff did not quite reach the mouth of the taimura; for he there found the chain of islands stretching from the continent far into the sea. the channels between the islands were so choaked up with ice, that it was impossible to force a passage: after steering as high as lat. ° ´, he found such a plain of fixed ice before him, that he had no prospect of getting any farther. accordingly he returned to the olenek. [footnote : gmelin reise, vol. ii. p. to p. .] [footnote : s. r. g. iii. p. , .] another attempt was made to pass from the lena to the yenisèi in , by chariton laptieff, with equal bad success; and he relates, that between the rivers piasida and taimura, a promontory stretches into the sea which he could not double, the sea being entirely frozen up before he could pass round[ ]. [footnote : gmelin reise, p. . mr. muller says only, that laptieff met with the same obstacles which forced prontshistsheff to return. s. r. g. iii. p. .] [sidenote: cape between the rivers chatanga and piasida never yet doubled.] from all these circumstances we must collect, that the whole space between archangel and the lena has never yet been navigated; for in going east from the yenisèi the russians could get no farther than the mouth of the piasida; and, in coming west from the lena, they were stopped, according to gmelin, north of the piasida; and, according to muller, east of the taimura. the russians, who sail almost annually from archangel, and other towns, to nova zemla, for the purpose of catching sea-horses, seals, and white bears, make to the western coast; and no russian vessel has ever passed round its north eastern extremity[ ]. [footnote : although this work is confined to the russian discoveries, yet as the n. e. passage is a subject of such interesting curiosity, it might seem an omission in not mentioning, that several english and dutch vessels have passed through the straits of weygatz into the sea of kara; they all met with great obstructions from the ice, and had much difficulty in getting through. see histoire gen. des voyages, tome xv. passim. in heemskirk and barentz, after having sailed along the western coast of nova zemla, doubled the north eastern cape lying in latitude ° , and got no lower along the eastern coast than °, where they wintered. see an account of this remarkable voyage in girard le ver's vraye description de trois voyages de mer, p. to ; and hist. gen. des voy. tom. xv. p. to . no vessel of any nation has ever passed round that cape, which extends to the north of the piasida, and is laid down in the russian charts in about ° latitude. we have already seen that no russian vessel has ever got from the piasida to the chatanga, or from the chatanga to the piasida; and yet some authors have positively asserted, that this promontory has been sailed round. in order therefore to elude the russian accounts, which clearly assert the contrary, it is pretended, that gmelin and muller have purposely concealed some parts of the russian journals, and have imposed upon the world by a misrepresentation of facts. but without entering into any dispute on this head, i can venture to affirm, that no sufficient proof has been as yet advanced in support of this assertion; and therefore until some positive information shall be produced, we cannot deny plain facts, or give the preference to hearsay evidence over circumstantial and well attested accounts. mr. engel has a remarkable passage in his essai sur une route par la nord est, which it may be proper to consider in this place, because he asserts in the most positive manner, that two dutch vessels formerly passed three hundred leagues to the north east of nova zemla; from thence he infers that they must have doubled the above-mentioned cape, which extends to the north of the piasida, and have got at least as far east as the mouth of the olenek. his words are l'illustre societé royale, sous l'an , rapporte ce voyage et dit, que peu d'années auparavant une societé de merchands d'amsterdam avoit fait une tentative pour chercher le passage du nord est, et équippa deux vaisseaux les quels etant passé au septante neuf ou huitantieme degrè de latitude, avoient poussè selon wood, jusqu' à trois cent lieues à l'est de la nouvelle zemble, &c. &c. upon this fact he founds his proof that the navigation from archangel to the lena has been performed. par consequent cette partie de la route a èté faite. he rests the truth of this account on the authority of the philosophical transactions, and of captain wood, who sailed upon a voyage for the discovery of the north east passage in . the latter, in the relation of his voyage, enumerates several arguments which induced him to believe the practicability of the north east passage.--"the seventh argument," he says, "was another narration, printed in the transactions, of two ships of late that had attempted the passage, sailed leagues to the eastward of nova zemla, and had after prosecuted the voyage, had there not a difference arose betwixt the undertakers and the east-india company." we here find that captain wood refers to the philosophical transactions for his authority. the narration printed in the transactions, and which is alluded to by both captain wood and mr. engel, is to be found in vol. ix. of the philosophical transactions, p. , for december, . it consists of a very curious "narrative of some observations made upon several voyages, undertaken to find a way for sailing about the north to the east-indies; together with instructions given by the dutch east-india company for the discovery of the famous land of jesso near japan." these instructions were, in , given to martin geritses vries, captain of the ship castricum, "who set out to discover the unknown eastern coast of tartary, the kingdom of catay, and the west coast of america, together with the isles situate to the east of japan, cried up for their riches of gold and silver." these instructions contain no relation of two dutch vessels, who passed leagues east of nova zemla. mention is made of two dutch vessels, "who were sent out in the year , under the command of captain kwast, to discover the east coast of the great tartary, especially the famous gold and silver islands; though, by reason of several unfortunate accidents, they both returned re infectà." short mention is afterwards made of captain kwast's journal, together with the writings of the merchants who were with him, as fallows: "that in the south sea, at the - / degrees northern latitude, and about spanish, or dutch miles, that is, degrees longitude east of japan, there lay a very great and high island, inhabited by a white, handsome, kind and civilized people, exceedingly opulent in gold and silver, &c. &c." from these extracts it appears, that, in the short account of the journals of the two dutch vessels, no longitude is mentioned to the east of nova zemla; but the discoveries of kwast were made in the south sea, to which place he, as well as captain vries afterwards, must have sailed round the cape of good hope. the author of the narrative concludes, indeed, that the n. e. passage is practicable, in the following words: "to promote this passage out of the east-indies to the north into europe, it were necessary to sail from the east-indies to the westward of japan, all along corea, to see how the sea-coasts trend to the north of the said corea, and with what conveniency ships might sail as far as nova zemla, and to the north of the same. where our author saith, that undoubtedly it would be found, that having passed the north corner of nova zemla, or, through weygatz, the north end of yelmer land, one might go on south-eastward, and make a successful voyage." but mere conjectures cannot be admitted as evidence. as we can find no other information relative to the fact mentioned by captain wood and mr. engel, (namely, that two dutch vessels have passed leagues to the east of nova zemla) that we have no reason to credit mere assertions without proof: we may therefore advance as a fact, that hitherto we have no authentic account, that any vessel has ever passed the cape to the east of nova zemla, which lies north of the river piasida. see relation of wood's voyage, &c. in the account of several late voyages and discoveries to the south and north, &c. london, , p. . see also engel, mem. et obs. geog. p. to . i should not have swelled my book with this extract, if the english translation of mr. muller's work was not extremely erroneous in some material passages. s. r. g. iii. p. - .] [sidenote: attempts of the russians to pass from the lena to kamtchatka.] the navigation from the lena to kamtchatka now remains to be considered. if we may believe some authors, this navigation has been open for above a century and an half; and several vessels have at different times passed round the north eastern extremity of asia. but if we consult the russian accounts, we shall find, that frequent expeditions have been unquestionably made from the lena to the kovyma; but that the voyage from the kovyma round tschukotskoi noss, into the eastern ocean, has been performed but once. according to mr. muller, this formidable cape was doubled in the year . the material incidents of this remarkable voyage are as follow. [sidenote: narrative of deshneff's voyage round tschukotskoi-noss.] "in seven kotches or vessels sailed from the mouth or the river kovyma[ ], in order to penetrate into the eastern ocean. of these, four were never more heard of: the remaining three were commanded by simon deshneff, gerasim ankudinoff, two chiefs of the cossacs, and fedot alexeeff, the head of the promyshlenics. deshneff and ankudinoff quarrelled before their departure: this dispute was owing to the jealousy of deshneff, who was unwilling that ankudinoff should share with him the honour, as well as the profits, which might result from the expected discoveries. each vessel was probably manned with about thirty persons; ankudinoff's, we certainly know, carried that number. deshneff promised before-hand a tribute of seven fables, to be exacted from the inhabitants on the banks of anadyr; so sanguine were his hopes of reaching that river. this indeed he finally effected; but not so soon, nor with so little difficulty, as he had presumed. [footnote : mr. muller calls it kolyma.] on the th of june, , the three vessels sailed upon this remarkable expedition from the river kovyma. considering the little knowledge we have of the extreme regions of asia, it is much to be regretted, that all the incidents of this voyage are not circumstantially related. deshneff[ ], in an account of his expedition sent to yakutsk, seems only as it were accidentally to mention his adventures by sea: he takes no notice of any occurrence until he reached the great promontory of the tschutski; no obstructions from the ice are mentioned, and probably there were none; for he observes upon another occasion, that the sea is not every year so free from ice as it was at this time. he commences his narrative with a description of the great promontory: "it is," says he, "very different from that which is situated west of the kovyma, near the river tschukotskia. it lies between north and north east, and bends, in a circular direction, towards the anadyr. it is distinguished on the russian (namely, the western) side, by a rivulet which falls into the sea, close to which the tschutski have raised a pile, like a tower, with the bones of whales. opposite the promontory, (it is not said on which side), are two islands, on which he observed people of the nation of the tschutski, who had pieces of the sea-horse tooth thrust into holes made in their lips. with a good wind it is possible to sail from this promontory to the anadyr in three days; and the journey by land may be performed in the same space of time, because the anadyr falls into a bay." ankudinoff's kotche was wrecked on this promontory, and the crew was distributed on board the two remaining vessels. on the th of september deshneff and fedot alexeef went on shore, and had a skirmish with the tschutski, in which alexeef was wounded. the two vessels soon afterwards lost sight of each other, and never again rejoined. deshneff was driven about by tempestuous winds until october, when he was shipwrecked (as it appears from circumstances), considerably to the south of the anadyr, not far from the river olutora. what became of fedot alexeff and his crew will be mentioned hereafter. deshneff and his companions, who amounted to twenty-five persons, now sought for the anadyr; but being entirely unacquainted with the country, ten weeks elapsed before they reached its banks at a small distance from its mouth: here he found neither wood nor inhabitants, &c. [footnote : in order thoroughly to understand this narrative, it is necessary to inform the reader, that the voyage made by deshneff was entirely forgotten, until the year , when mr. muller found, in the archives of yakutsk, the original accounts of the russian navigations in the frozen ocean. these papers were extracted, under his inspection, at yakutsk, and sent to petersburg; where they are now preserved in the library belonging to the imperial academy of sciences: they consist of several folio volumes. the circumstances relating to deshneff are contained in the second volume. soliverstoff and stadukin, having laid claim to the discovery of the country on the mouth of the anadyr, had asserted, in consequence of this claim, that they had arrived there by sea, after having doubled tschukotskoi noss. deshneff, in answer, sent several memorials, petitions, and complaints, against stadukin and soliverstoff, to the commander of yakutsk, in which he sets forth, that he had the sole right to that discovery, and refutes the arguments advanced by the others. from these memorials mr. muller has extracted his account of deshneff's voyage. when i was at petersburg i had an opportunity of seeing these papers: and as they are written in the russian language, i prevailed upon my ingenious friend mr. pallas to inspect the part which relates to deshneff. accordingly mr. pallas, with his usual readiness to oblige, not only compared the memorials with mr. muller's account, but even took the trouble to make some extracts in the most material passages: these extracts are here subjoined; because they will not only serve to confirm the exactness of mr. muller; but also because they tend to throw some light on several obscure passages. in one of deshneff's memorials he says, "to go from the river kovyma to the anadyr, a great promontory must be doubled, which stretches very far into the sea: it is not that promontory which lies next to the river tschukotskia. stadukin never arrived at this great promontory: near it are two islands, whose inhabitants make holes in their under-lips, and insert therein pieces of the sea-horse tush, worked into the form of teeth. this promontory stretches between north and north east: it is known on the russian side by the little river stanovie, which flows into the sea, near the spot where the tschutski have erected a heap of whale-bones like a tower. the coast from the promontory turns round towards the anadyr, and it is possible to sail with a good wind from the point to that river in three days and nights, and no more: and it will take up no more time to go by land to the same river, because it discharges itself into a bay." in another memorial deshneff says, "that he was ordered to go by sea from the indigirka to the kovyma; and from thence with his crew to the anadyr, which was then newly discovered. that the first time he sailed from the kovyma, he was forced by the ice to return to that river; but that next year he again sailed from thence by sea, and after great danger, misfortunes, and with the loss of part of his shipping, arrived at last at the mouth of the anadyr. stadukin having in vain attempted to go by sea, afterwards ventured to pass over the chain of mountains then unknown; and reached by that means the anadyr. soliverstoff and his party, who quarrelled with deshneff, went to the same place from the kovyma by land; and the tribute was afterwards sent to the last mentioned river across the mountains, which were very dangerous to pass amidst the tribes of koriacs and yukagirs, who had been lately reduced by the russians." in another memorial deshneff complains bitterly of soliverstoff; and asserts, "that one severka martemyanoff, who had been gained over by soliverstoff, was sent to yakutsk, with an account that he (soliverstoff) had discovered the coasts to the north of the anadyr, where large numbers of sea-horses are found." deshneff hereupon says, that soliverstoff and stadukin never reached the rocky promontory, which is inhabited by numerous bodies of the tichutski; over against which are islands whose inhabitants wear artificial teeth thrust through their under lips. this is not the first promontory from the river kovyma, called svatoi noss; but another far more considerable, and very-well known to him (deshneff), because the vessel of ankunidoff was wrecked there; and because he had there taken prisoners some of the people, who were rowing in their boats; and seen the islanders with teeth in their lips. he also well knew, that it was still far from that promontory to the river anadyr.] the following year he went further up the river, and built anadirskoi ostrog: here he was joined by some russians on the th of april, , who came by land from the river kovyma. in , deshneff having constructed a vessel, sailed down the anadyr as far as its mouth, and observed on the north side a sand bank, which stretched a considerable way into the sea. a sand bank of this kind is called, in siberia, korga. great numbers of sea-horses were found to resort to the mouth of the anadyr. deshneff collected several of their teeth, and thought himself amply compensated by this acquisition for the trouble of his expedition. in the following year, deshneff ordered wood to be felled for the purpose of constructing a vessel, in which he proposed sending the tribute which he had collected by sea to yakutsk[ ]. but this design was laid aside from the want of other materials. it was also reported, that the sea about tschukotskoi noss was not every year free from ice. [footnote : that is, by sea, from the mouth of the anadyr, round tschukotskoi noss to the river lena, and then up that river to yakutsk.] another expedition was made in to the korga, for the purpose of collecting sea-horse teeth. a cossac, named yusko soliverstoff, was one of the party, the same who had not long before accompanied the cossac michael stadukin, upon a voyage of discovery in the frozen sea. this person was sent from yakutsk to collect sea-horse teeth, for the benefit of the crown. in his instructions mention is made of the river yentshendon, which falls into the bay of penshinsk, and of the anadyr; and he was ordered to exact a tribute from the inhabitants dwelling near these rivers; for the adventures of deshneff were not as yet known at yakutsk. this was the occasion of new discontents. soliverstoff claimed to himself the discovery of the korga, as if he had sailed to that place in his voyage with stadukin in . deshneff, however, proved that soliverstoff had not even reached tschukotskoi noss, which he describes as nothing but bare rock, and it was but too well known to him, because the vessel of ankudinoff was ship-wrecked there. "tschukotskoi noss," adds deshneff, "is not the first promontory which presents itself under the name of svatoi noss[ ]. it is known by the two islands situated opposite to it, whose inhabitants (as is before-mentioned) place pieces of the sea-horse tush into holes made in their lips. deshneff alone had seen these people, which neither stadukin nor soliverstoff had pretended to have done: and the korga, or sand-bank, at the mouth of the river anadyr, was at some distance from these islands." [footnote : we may collect from deshneff's reasoning, that soliverstoff, in endeavouring to prove that he had sailed round the eastern extremity of asia, had mistaken a promontory called svatoi noss for tschukotskoi noss: for otherwise, why should deshneff, in his refutation of soliverstoff, begin by asserting, that svatoi noss was not tschukotskoi noss? the only cape laid down in the russian maps, under the name of svatoi noss, is situated degrees to the west of the kovyma: but we cannot possibly suppose this to be the promontory here alluded to; because, in sailing from the kovyma towards the anadyr, "the first promontory which presents itself" must necessarily be east of the kovyma. svatoi noss, in the russian language, signifies sacred promontory; and the russians occasionally apply it to any cape which it is difficult to double. it therefore most probably here relates to the first cape, which soliverstoff reached after he had sailed from kovyma.] while deschneff was surveying the sea-coast, he saw in an habitation belonging to some koriacs a woman of yakutsk, who, as he recollected, belonged to fedot alexieff. upon his enquiry concerning the fate of her master, she replied, "that fedot and gerasim (ankudinoff) had died of the scurvy; that part of the crew had been slain; that a few had escaped in small vessels, and have never since been heard off." traces of the latter were afterwards found in the peninsula of kamtchatka; to which place they probably arrived with a favourite wind, by following the coast, and running up the kamtchatka river. when volodimir atlassoff, in , first entered upon the reduction of kamtchatka, he found that the inhabitants had already some knowledge of the russians. a common tradition still prevails amongst them, that long before the expedition of atlassoff, one[ ] fedotoff (who was probably the son of fedot alexeeff) and his companions had resided amongst them, and had intermarried with the natives. they still shew the spot where the russian habitations stood; namely, at the mouth of the small river nikul which falls into the kamtchatka river, and is called by the russians fedotika. upon atlassoff's arrival none of the first russians remained. they are said to have been held in great veneration, and almost deified by the inhabitants, who at first imagined that no human power could hurt them, until they quarrelled amongst themselves, and the blood was seen to flow from the wounds which they gave each other: and upon a separation taking place between the russians, part of them had been killed by the koriacs, as they were going to the sea of penshinsk, and the remainder by the kamtchadals. the river fedotika falls into the southern side of the kamtchatka river about an hundred and eighty versts below upper kamtchatkoi ostrog. at the time of the first expedition to kamtchatka, in , the remains of two villages still subsisted, which had probably been inhabited by fedotoff and his companions: and no one knew which way they came into the peninsula, until it was discovered from the archives of yakutsk in . [footnote : fedotoff, in the russian language, signifies the son of fedot.] [ ]no other navigator, subsequent to deshneff, has ever pretended to have passed the north eastern extremity of asia, notwithstanding all the attempts which have been made to accomplish this passage, as well from[ ] kamtchatka as from the frozen ocean. [footnote : mr. engel indeed pretends that lieutenant laptieff, in , doubled tschukotskoi-noss, because gmelin says, that "he passed from the kovyma to anadirsk partly by water and partly by land." for mr. engel asserts the impossibility of getting from the kovyma to anadirsk, partly by land and partly by water, without going from the kovyma to the mouth of the anadyr by sea; and from thence to anadirsk by land. but mr. muller (who has given a more particular account of the conclusion of this expedition) informs us, that laptieff and his crew, after having wintered near the indigirka, passed from its mouth in small boats to the kovyma; and as it was dangerous, on account of the tschutski, to follow the coast any farther, either by land or water, he went through the interior part of the country to anadirsk, and from thence to the mouth of the anadyr. gmelin reise, vol. ii. p. . s. r. g. iii. p. . mention is also made by gmelin of a man who passed in a small boat from the kovyma round tschukotskoi-noss into the sea of kamtchatka: and mr. engel has not omitted to bring this passage in support of his system, with this difference, that he refers to the authority of muller, instead of gmelin, for the truth of the fact. but as we have no account of this expedition, and as the manner in which it is mentioned by gmelin implies that he had it merely from tradition, we cannot lay any stress upon such vague and uncertain reports. the passage is as follows: "es find so gar spuren vorhanden, dass ein kerl mit einem schifflein, das nicht viel groesser als ein schifferkahn gevesen, von kolyma bis tschukotskoi-noss vorbey, und bis nach kamtschatka gekommen sey." gmelin reise, ii. p. . mem. et obs. geog. &c. p. .] [footnote : beering, in his voyage from kamtchatka, in , towards tschukotskoi-noss, sailed along the coast of the tschutski as high as lat. ° ´. and observing the coast take a westerly direction, he too hastily concluded, that he had passed the north eastern extremity. apprehensive, if he had attempted to proceed, of being locked in by the ice, he returned to kamtchatka. if he had followed the shore, he would have found, that what he took for the northern ocean was nothing more than a deep bay: and that the coast of the tschutski, which he considered as turning uniformly to the west, took again a northerly direction. s.r.g. iii. p. .] [illustration: _chart of_ shalaurof's _voyage_.] the following narrative of a late voyage performed by one shalauroff, from the lena towards tschukotskoi-noss, will shew the great impediments which obstruct a coasting navigation in the frozen sea, even at the most favourable season of the year. [sidenote: voyage of shalauroff.] shalauroff, having constructed a shitik at his own expence, went down the lena in . he was accompanied by an exiled midshipman, whom he had found at yakutsk, and to whom we are indebted for the chart of this expedition. shalauroff got out of the southern mouth of the lena in july, but was so much embarrassed by the ice, that he ran the vessel into the mouth of the yana, where he was detained by the ice until the th of august, when he again set sail. being prevented by the ice from keeping the open sea, he coasted the shore; and, having doubled svatoi-noss on the th of september, discovered at a small distance, out at sea, to the north, a mountainous land, which is probably some unknown island in the frozen sea. he was employed from the th to the th in getting through the strait between diomed's island and the coast of siberia; which he effected, not without great difficulty. from the th he had a free sea and a fair s. w. wind, which carried them in hours beyond the mouth of the indigirka. the favourable breeze continuing, he passed on the th the alasca. soon afterwards, the vessel approaching too near the shore was entangled amongst vast floating masses of ice, between some islands[ ] and the main land. [sidenote: winters at the mouth of the kovyma.] and now the late season of the year obliged shalauroff to look out for a wintering place; he accordingly ran the vessel into one of the mouths of the river kovyma, where she was laid up. the crew immediately constructed an hut, which they secured with a rampart of frozen snow, and a battery of the small guns. the wild rein-deers resorted to this place in large herds, and were shot in great plenty from the enclosure. before the setting in of winter, various species of salmon and trout came up the river in shoals: these fish afforded the crew a plentiful subsistence, and preserved them from the scurvy[ ]. [footnote : these islands are medviedkie ostrova, or the bear islands; they are also called kreffstoffskie ostrova, because they lie opposite the mouth of the small river krestova. for a long time vague reports were propagated that the continent of america was stretched along the frozen ocean, very near the coasts of siberia; and some persons pretended to have discovered its shore not far from the rivers kovyma and krestova. but the falsity of these reports was proved by an expedition made in , by some russian officers sent by denys ivanovitch tschitcherin, governor of tobolsk. these officers went in winter, when the sea was frozen, in sledges drawn by dogs, from the mouth of the krestova. they found nothing but five small rocky islands, since called the bear islands, which were quite uninhabited; but some traces were found of former inhabitants, namely, the ruins of huts. they observed also on one of the islands a kind of wooden stage built of drift-wood, which seemed as if it had been intended for defence. as far as they durst venture out over the frozen sea, no land could be seen, but high mountains of ice obstructed their passage, and forced them to return. see the map of this expedition upon the chart of shalauroff's voyage prefixed to this number.] [footnote : raw-fish are considered in those northern countries as a preservative against the scurvy.] [sidenote: departure from thence in july.] the mouth of the kovyma was not freed from ice before the st of july, , when shalauroff again put to sea, and steered until the th n. e. by n. e. / e. here he observed the variation of the compass ashore, and found it to be ° ´´ east. the th a contrary wind, which was followed by a calm, obliged him to come to an anchor, and kept him stationary until the th of august, when a favourable breeze springing up he set sail; he then endeavoured to steer at some distance from shore, holding a more easterly course, and n. e. by e. but the vessel was impeded by large bodies of floating ice, and a strong current, which seemed to bear westward at the rate of a verst an hour. these circumstances very much retarded his course. on the th, the weather being thick and foggy, he found himself unexpectedly near the coast with a number of ice islands before him, which on the th entirely surrounded and hemmed in the vessel. he continued in that situation, and in a continual fog, until the d, when he got clear, and endeavoured by steering n. e. to regain the open sea, which was much less clogged with ice than near the shore. he was forced however, by contrary winds, s. e. and e. among large masses of floating ice. this drift of ice being passed, he again stood to the n. e. in order to double shelatskoi noss[ ]; but before he could reach the islands lying near it, he was so retarded by contrary winds, that he was obliged, on account of the advanced season, to search for a wintering place. [sidenote: not being able to double shelatskoi noss returns towards the kovyma.] he accordingly sailed south towards an open bay, which lies on the west side of shelatskoi noss, and which no navigator had explored before him. he steered into it on the th, and got upon a shoal between a small island, and a point of land which juts from the eastern coast of this bay. having got clear with much difficulty, he continued for a short time a s. e. course, then turned s. w. he then landed in order to discover a spot proper for their winter residence; and found two small rivulets, but neither trees nor drift wood. the vessel was towed along the southerly side of the bay as far as the island sabadèi. on the th of september, he saw some huts of the tschutski close to the narrow channel between sabadèi and the main land; but the inhabitants fled on his approach. [footnote : he does not seem to have been deterred from proceeding by any supposed difficulty in passing shelatskoi noss, but to have veered about merely on account of the late season of the year. shelatskoi noss is so called from the sshelagen, a tribe of the tschutski, and has been supposed to be the same as tschukotskoi noss. s. r. g. iii. p. .] not having met with a proper situation, he stood out to sea, and got round the island sabadèi on the th, when he fastened the vessel to a large body of ice, and was carried along by a current towards w. s. w. at the rate of five versts an hour. on the th, he saw far to the n. e. by n. a mountain, and steered the th and th towards his former wintering place in the river kovyma. [sidenote: winters a second time at the kovyma, and returns to the lena.] shalauroff proposed to have made the following year another attempt to double shelatskoi noss; but want of provision, and the mutiny of the crew, forced him to return to the lena in . it is worth remarking, that during his whole voyage he found the currents setting in almost uniformly from the east. two remarkable rocks were observed by shalauroff near the point where the coast turns to the n. e. towards the channel which separates the island sabadèi from the continent; these rocks may serve to direct future navigators: one is called saetshie kamen, or hare's rock, and rises like a crooked horn; the other baranèi kamen, or sheep's rock; it is in the shape of a pear, narrower at the bottom than at top, and rises twenty-nine yards above high-water mark. [sidenote: second expedition of shalauroff.] shalauroff, who concluded from his own experience, that the attempt to double tschukotskoi noss, though difficult, was by no means impracticable, was not discouraged by his former want of success from engaging a second time in the same enterprize: he accordingly fitted out the same shitik, and in departed as before from the river lena. we have no positive accounts of this second voyage; for neither shalauroff or any of his crew have ever returned. the following circumstances lead us to conclude, that both he and his crew were killed near the anadyr by the tschutski, about the third year after their departure from the lena. about that time the koriacs of the anadyr refused to take from the russians the provision of flour, which they are accustomed to purchase every year. enquiry being made by the governor of anadirsk, he found that they had been amply supplied with that commodity by the tschutski. the latter had procured it from the plunder of shalauroff's vessel, the crew of which appeared to have perished near the anadyr. [sidenote: no account of this expedition, he and his crew being killed by the tschutski.] from these facts, which have been since confirmed by repeated intelligence from the koriacs and tschutski, it has been asserted, that shalauroff had doubled the n. e. cape of asia. but this assertion amounts only to conjecture; for the arrival of the crew at the mouth of the anadyr affords no decisive proof that they had passed round the eastern extremity of asia; for they might have penetrated to that river by land, from the western side of tschukotskoi-noss. in reviewing these several accounts of the russian voyages in the frozen sea, as far as they relate to a north east passage, we may observe, that the cape which stretches to the north of the piasida has never been doubled; and that the existence of a passage round tschukotskoi noss rests upon the single authority of deshneff. admitting however a practicable navigation round these two promontories, yet when we consider the difficulties and dangers which the russians encountered in those parts of the frozen sea which they have unquestionably sailed through; how much time they employed in making an inconsiderable progress, and how often their attempts were unsuccessful: when we reflect at the same time, that these voyages can only be performed in the midst of a short summer, and even then only when particular winds drive the ice into the sea, and leave the shores less obstructed; we shall reasonably conclude, that a navigation, pursued along the coasts in the frozen ocean, would probably be useless for commercial purposes. a navigation therefore in the frozen ocean, calculated to answer any end of general utility, must (if possible) be made in an higher latitude, at some distance from the shores of nova zemla and siberia. and should we even grant the possibility of sailing n. e. and east of nova zemla, without meeting with any insurmountable obstacles from land or ice; yet the final completion of a n. e. voyage must depend upon the existence of a free passage[ ] between the coast of the tschutski and the continent of america. but such disquisitions as these do not fall under the intention of this work, which is meant to state and examine facts, not to lay down an hypothesis, or to make theoretical enquiries[ ]. [footnote : i have said a _free passage_, because if we conclude from the narrative of deshneff's voyage, that there really does exist such a passage; yet if that passage is only occasionally navigable (and the russians do not pretend to have passed it more than once) it can never be of any general and commercial utility.] [footnote : i beg leave to assure the reader, that throughout this whole work i have entirely confined myself to the russian accounts; and have carefully avoided making use of any vague reports concerning the discoveries lately made by captains cooke and clerke in the same seas. many of the geographical questions which have been occasionally treated in the course of this performance, will probably be cleared up, and the true position of the western coasts of america ascertained, from the journals of those experienced navigators.] appendix ii. _tartarian_ rhubarb brought to _kiachta_ by the _bucharian_ merchants--method of examining and purchasing the roots--different species of rheum which yield the finest rhubarb--price of rhubarb in _russia_--exportation--superiority of the _tartarian_ over the _indian_ rhubarb. [sidenote: tartarian, or turkey, rhubarb.] europe is supplied with rhubarb from russia and the east indies. the former is generally known by the name of turkey rhubarb, because we used to import it from the levant in our commerce with the turks, who procured it through persia from the bucharians. and it still retains its original name, although instead of being carried, as before, to constantinople, it is now brought to kiachta by the bucharian merchants, and there disposed of to the russians. this appellation is indeed the most general; but it is mentioned occasionally by several authors, under the different denominations of russian, tartarian, bucharian, and thibet, rhubarb. this sort is exported from russia in large roundish pieces, freed from the bark, with an hole through the middle: they are externally of a yellow colour, and when cut appear variagated with lively reddish streaks. [sidenote: indian rhubarb.] the other sort is called by the druggists indian rhubarb; and is procured from canton in longer, harder, heavier, more compact pieces, than the former; it is more astringent, and has somewhat less of an aromatic flavour; but, on account of its cheapness, is more generally used than the tartarian or turkey rhubarb. [sidenote: tartarian rhubarb procured at kiachta.] the government of russia has reserved to itself the exclusive privilege of purchasing rhubarb; it is brought to kiachta by some bucharian merchants, who have entered into a contract to supply the crown with that drug in exchange for furs. these merchants come from the town of selin, which lies south westward of the koko-nor, or blue lake toward thibet. selin, and all the towns of little bucharia; viz. kashkar, yerken, atrar, &c. are subject to china. [sidenote: the rhubarb plant grows upon the mountains of little bucharia.] the best rhubarb purchased at kiachta is produced upon a chain of rocks, which are very high, and for the most part destitute of wood: they lie north of selin, and stretch as far as the koko-nor. the good roots are distinguished by large and thick stems. the tanguts, who are employed in digging up the roots, enter upon that business in april or may. as fast as they take them out of the earth, they cleanse them from the soil, and hang them upon the neighbouring trees to dry, where they remain until a sufficient quantity is procured: after which they are delivered to the bucharian merchants. the roots are wrapped up in woollen sacks, carefully preserved from the least humidity; and are in this manner transported to kiachta upon camels. the exportation of the best rhubarb is prohibited by the chinese, under the severest penalties. it is procured however in sufficient quantities, sometimes by clandestinely mixing it with inferior roots, and sometimes by means of a contraband trade. the college of commerce at petersburg is solely empowered to receive this drug, and appoints agents at kiachta for that purpose. much care is taken in the choice; for it is examined, in the presence of the bucharian merchants, by an apothecary commissioned by government, and resident at kiachta. [sidenote: care taken in examining the roots at kiachta.] all the worm-eaten roots are rejected; the remainder are bored through, in order to ascertain their soundness; and all the parts which appear in the least damaged or decayed are cut away. by these means even the best roots are diminished a sixth part; and the refuse is burnt, in order to prevent its being brought another year[ ]. [footnote : pallas reise, part iii. p. - . when mr. pallas was at kiachta, the bucharian merchant, who supplies the crown with rhubarb, brought some pieces of white rhubarb (von milchveissen rhabarber) which had a sweet taste, and was equal in its effects to the best sort.] [sidenote: different species of rhubarb.] linnæus has distinguished the different species of rhubarb by the names rheum palmatum, r. rhaphonticum, [ ]r. rhabarbarum, r. compactum, and r. ribes. [footnote : see murray's edition of linnæus systema vegetab. gott. . in the former editions of linnæus rheum rhabarbarum is called r. undulatum.] botanists have long differed in their opinions, which of these several species is the true rhubarb; and that question does not appear to be as yet satisfactorily cleared up. [sidenote: rheum palmatum.] however, according to the notion which is most generally received, it is supposed to be the rheum[ ] palmatum; the seeds of which were originally procured from a bucharian merchant, and distributed to the principal botanists of europe. hence this plant has been cultivated with great success; and is now very common in all our botanical gardens. the learned doctor [ ]hope, professor of medicine and botany in the university of edinburgh, having made trials of the powder of this root, in the same doses in which the foreign rhubarb is given, found no difference in its effects; and from thence conclusions have been drawn with great appearance of probability, that this is the plant which produces the true rhubarb. but this inference does not appear to be absolutely conclusive; for the same trials have been repeated, and with similar success, upon the roots of the r. rhaponticum and r. rhabarbarum. [footnote : mr. pallas (to whom i am chiefly indebted for this account of the tartarian and siberian rhubarb) assured me, that he never found the r. palmatum in any part of siberia.] [footnote : phil. trans. for , p. .] [sidenote: r. rhaponticum.] the leaves of the r. rhaponticum are round, and sometimes broader than they are long. this species is found abundantly in the loamy and dry deserts between the volga and the yaik[ ], towards the caspian sea. it was probably from this sort that the name rha, which is the tartarian appellation of the river volga, was first applied by the arabian physicians to the several species of rheum. the roots however which grow in these warm plains are rather too astringent; and therefore ought not to be used in cases where opening medicines are required. the calmucs call it badshona, or a stomachic. the young shoots of this plant, which appear in march or april, are deemed a good antiscorbutic; and are used as such by the russians. the r. rhaponticum is not to be found to the west of the volga. the seeds of this species produced at petersburg plants of a much greater size than the wild ones: the leaves were large, and of a roundish cordated figure. [footnote : the yaik falls into the caspian sea, about four degrees to the east of the volga.] [sidenote: r. rhabarbarum.] the r. rhabarbarum grows in the crevices of bare rocky mountains, and also upon gravelly soils: it is more particularly found in the high vallies of the romantic country situated beyond lake baikal. its buds do not shoot before the end of april; and it continues in flower during the whole month of may. the stalks of the leaves are eaten raw by the tartars: they produce upon most persons, who are unaccustomed to them, a kind of sphasmodic contraction of the throat, which goes off in a few hours; it returns however at every meal, until they become habituated to this kind of diet. the russians make use of the leaves in their hodge-podge: accordingly, soups of this sort affect strangers in the manner above mentioned. in siberia the stalk is sometimes preserved as a sweet-meat; and a custom prevails among the germans of introducing at their tables the buds of this plant, as well as of the rheum palmatum, instead of cauli-flower. [sidenote: r. rhaponticum.] the r. rhaponticum which commonly grows near the torrents has, as well as the r. rhabarbarum of siberia, the upper part of its roots commonly rotten, from too much moisture: accordingly, a very small portion of the lower extremity is fit for use. the russian college of physicians order, for the use of their military hospitals, large quantities of these roots to be dug up in siberia, which are prescribed under the name of rhapontic. but the persons employed in digging and preparing it are so ill instructed for that purpose, that its best juices are frequently lost. these roots ought to be drawn up in spring, soon after the melting of the snows, when the plant retains all its sap and strength; whereas they are not taken out of the ground before august, when they are wasted by the increase of the stem, and the expansion of the leaves. add to this, that the roots are no sooner taken up, than they are immediately sliced in small pieces, and thus dried: by which means the medicinal qualities are sensibly impaired. [sidenote: method of drying the roots of the r. rhaponticum.] for the same roots, which in this instance were of such little efficacy, when dried with proper precaution, have been found to yield a very excellent rhubarb. the process observed for this purpose, by the ingenious mr. pallas, was as follows: the roots, immediately after being drawn out, were suspended over a stove, where being gradually dried, they were cleansed from the earth: by these means, although they were actually taken up in autumn, they so nearly resembled the best tartarian rhubarb in colour, texture, and purgative qualities, that they answered, in every respect, the same medicinal purposes. a german apothecary, named zuchert, made similar trials with the same success, both on the rheum rhabarbarum and r. rhaponticum, which grow in great perfection on the mountains in the neighbourhood of nershinsk. [sidenote: plantation of rhubarb in siberia.] he formed plantations of these herbs on the declivity of a rock[ ], covered with one foot of good mould, mixed with an equal quantity of sand and gravel. if the summer proved dry, the plants were left in the ground; but if the season was rainy, after drawing out the roots he left them for some days in the shade to dry, and then replanted them. by this method of cultivation he produced in seven or eight years very large and sound roots, which the rock had prevented from penetrating too deep; and when they were properly dried, one scruple was as efficacious as half a drachm of tartarian rhubarb. [footnote : in order to succeed fully in the plantation of rhubarb, and to procure sound and dry roots, a dry, light soil with a rocky foundation, where the moisture easily filters off, is essentially necessary.] [sidenote: the roots of the r. rhaponticum and r. rhubarbarum, equal in their effects to the tartarian rhubarb.] from the foregoing observations it follows, that there are other plants, besides the rheum palmatum, the roots whereof have been found to be similar both in their appearance and effects, to what is called the best rhubarb. and indeed, upon enquiries made at kiachta concerning the form and leaves of the plant which produces that drug, it seems not to be the r. palmatum, but a species with roundish scolloped leaves, and most probably the r. rhaponticum: for mr. pallas, when he was at kiachta, applied for information to a bucharian merchant of selin-chotton, who now supplies the crown with rhubarb; and his description of that plant answered to the figure of the rheum rhaponticum. the truth of this description was still further confirmed by some mongol travellers who had been in the neighbourhood of the koko-nor and thibet; and had observed the rhubarb growing wild upon those mountains. [sidenote: the true rhubarb probably procured from different species of rheum.] the experiments also made by zuchert and others, upon the roots of the r. rhabarbarum and r. rhaponticum, sufficiently prove, that this valuable drug was procured from those roots in great perfection. but as the seeds of the rheum palmatum were received from the father of the above-mentioned bucharian merchant as taken from the plant which furnishes the true rhubarb, we have reason to conjecture, that these three species, viz. r. palmatum, r. rhaponticum, and r. rhabarbarum, when found in a dryer and milder alpine climate, and in proper situations, are indiscriminately drawn up; whenever the size of the plant seems to promise a fine root. and perhaps the remarkable difference of the rhubarb, imported to kiachta, is occasioned by this indiscriminate method of collecting them. most certain it is, that these plants grow wild upon the mountains, without the least cultivation; and those are esteemed the best which are found near the koko-nor, and about the sources of the river koango. formerly the exportation of rhubarb was confined to the crown of russia; and no persons but those employed by government were allowed the permission of sending it to foreign countries; this monopoly however has been taken off by the present empress, and the free exportation of it from st. petersburg granted to all persons upon paying the duty. it is sold in the first instance by the college of commerce for the profit of the sovereign; and is preserved in their magazines at st. petersburg. the current price is settled every year by the college of commerce. [sidenote: price of rhubarb in russia.] it is received from the bucharian merchants at kiachta in exchange for furs; and the prime cost is rated at roubles per pood. by adding the pay of the commissioners who purchase it, and of the apothecary who examines it, and allowing for other necessary expences, the value of a pood at kiachta amounts to roubles; add to this the carriage from the frontiers to st. petersburg, and it is calculated that the price of a pood stands the crown at roubles. the largest exportation of rhubarb ever known from russia, was made in the year , when pood were exported, at roubles per pood. [sidenote: exportation of rhubarb from st. petersburg.] exportation of rhubarb from st. petersburg. { at - / dutch[ ] dollars, in , poods pounds { or roubles, copecs { per pood. in , poods pounds, at ditto, or roubles. [footnote : if we reckon a dutch dollar, upon an average, to be worth rouble copecs.] in , poods were brought by the bucharian merchants to kiachta; of which poods pounds were selected. the interior consumption of the whole empire of russia for amounted to only poods pounds[ ]. [footnote : this calculation comprehends only the rhubarb purchased at the different magazines belonging to the college of commerce; for what was procured by contraband is of course not included.] [sidenote: superiority of the tartarian over the indian rhubarb.] the superiority of this tartarian rhubarb, over that procured from canton, arises probably from the following circumstances. . the southern parts of china are not so proper for the growth of this plant, as the mountains of little bucharia. . there is not so exact an examination made in receiving it from the chinese at canton, as from the bucharians at kiachta. for the merchants, who purchase this drug at canton, are obliged to accept it in the gross, without separating the bad roots, and cutting away the decayed parts, as is done at kiachta. . it is also probable, that the long transport of this drug by sea is detrimental to it, from the humidity which it must necessarily contract during so long a voyage. table of longitude and latitude. [sidenote: table of longitude and latitude.] for the convenience of the reader, the following table exhibits in one point of view the longitude and latitude of the principal places mentioned in this performance. their longitudes are estimated from the first meridian of the isle of fero, and from that of the royal observatory at greenwich. the longitude of greenwich from fero is computed at ° ´ ´´. the longitude of the places marked * has been taken from astronomical observations. latitude. longitude. | | fero. | greenwich. | d. m. s. | d. m. s. | d. m. * petersburg | | | [ ] * moscow | | | * archangel | | | * tobolsk | | | * tomsk | | | * irkutsk | | | * selenginsk | | | kiachta | | | * yakutsk | | | * ochotsk | | | * bolcheresk | | | * port of st. peter and paul | | | eastern extremity of siberia | | | unalashka (a) | | | unalashka (b) | | | key: (a) according to the general map of russia (b) according to the chart of krenitzin & levasheff [footnote : i have omitted the seconds in the longitude from greenwich.] index. a. _agiak_, an interpreter, p. . _aguladock_, a leader of the unalashkans, taken prisoner by solovioff, . _agulok_, a dwelling-place on unalashka, . _aischin-giord_, chief of the manshurs at the beginning of the th century, . _aktunak_, an island to the east of kadyak, . _akun_ (one of the fox islands), . _akutan_ (one of the fox islands), . _alaksu_, or _alachshak_, one of the most remote eastern islands, . customs of the inhabitants, . animals found on that island, _ib._ conjectured to be not far from the continent of america, . _alaxa_, one of the fox islands, . _albasin_, and the other russian forts on the amoor, destroyed by the chinese, . the russians taken there refuse to return from pekin, . _aleütian isles_ discovered, . . their situation and names, . names of persons there, bear a surprising resemblance to those of the greenlanders, . inhabitants described, . . account of those islands, . . the manners and customs of the inhabitants resemble those of the fox islands, . are entirely subject to russia, . their number, . specimen of the aleütian language, . see _fox islands, ibiya, novodtsikoff, tsiuproff_. _alexeeff (feodot)._ see _deshneff_. _aleyut._ see _fox islands_. _allai_ (a prince of the calmucs), his superstitious regard for the memory of yermac, . _amaganak_, a toigon of unalashka, . _america_, most probable course for discovering the nearest coast of that continent, pointed out, . see _islands, delisle, alaksu, kadyak, fox islands, steller_. _amlach_, one of the andreanoffskye islands, . _anadirsky isles_, or _isles of anadyr_, so called by mr. stæhlin, and after him by buffon, p. . - . _amoor_ river, called by the manshurs sakalin-ula; and by the mongols, karamuran, or the black river. _andrianoffskie islands_, their situation doubtful, . description of, , . must not be blended with the fox islands, . account of the inhabitants, . other islands beyond them to the east, _ibid._ position of the andreanoffskie-islands, . _arachulla_, supposed by the chinese a wicked spirit of the air, . _archangel_, voyages from thence to the yenisèi, . _artic_, or _ice foxes_, description of, . _asia_, the first report of its vicinity to america, learned from the tschutski, . _atachtak_, a great promontory n. e. of alaksu, . _ataku_, one of the aleütian islands, . _atchu_, one of the andreanoffsky islands, description of, . _atchu, atchak, atach, goreloi_, or _burnt island_, one of the fox islands, . _atlassoff (volodimir)_, takes possession of the river kamtchatka, . _atrar_, a town of little bucharia, . _att_, one of the aleütian isles, . _ayagh_, or _kayachu_, one of the andreanoffsky islands, . description of, . b. _bacchoff._ see _novikoff_. _baranèi kamen_, or _sheep's rock_, description of, . _bear islands._ see _medvioedkie ostrova_. _beering_, his voyage made at the expence of the crown, . his voyage (with tschirikoff) in search of a junction between asia and america, in and , unsuccessful, . shipwrecked, _ibid._ and death on an island called after his name, . see _discoveries, steller_; see also p. . _beering's island_, the winter-station of all the ships sailing for the new-discovered islands, . _belayeff (larion)_, treats the inhabitants of the aleütian islands in an hostile manner; in which he is under-hand abetted by tsiuproff, . _bolcheretsk_, a district of kamtchatka, . see _kamtchatkoi ostrogs_. _bolkosky_ (prince), appointed waywode of siberia, . see _yermac_. _boris and glebb._ see _trapesnikoff_. _bucharia (little)_, all subject to china, . _buache_ (mr.). see _longitude_. _burgoltei_, a mountain in the valley of kiachta, . _burnt island._ see _atchu_. _buttons_ (of different colours), used as marks of distinction among the chinese, . c. _calumet of peace_, a symbol of friendship peculiar to america, . _camhi_, the second chinese emperor of the manshur race, . expels the russians from his dominions, for their riots and drunkenness, . _camphor wood_ (the true), drove by the sea on copper island, . _caravans_ (russian), allowed to trade to pekin, . discontinued, and why, . see _russia_. _chatanga_, the cape between that river and the piasida never yet doubled, - . _chinese_, origin of the disputes between them and the russians, . hostilities commenced between them, . treaty of nershinsk concluded, . beginning of the commerce between the two nations, . their trade with the russians, , &c. reckon it a mark of disrepect to uncover the head to a superior, . their superstition in regard to fires, . manner of their pronouncing foreign expressions, . no specie but bullion current among them, . advantage of the chinese trade to russia, . _cholodiloff._ voyage of a vessel fitted out by him, . _chusho_, (or the fire-god), a chinese idol, . see _chinese_. _copper island_, why so called, . . . probable that all the hillocks in that country have formerly been vulcanoes, _ibid._ subject to frequent earth-quakes, and abound in sulphur, . _cyprian_ (first archbishop of siberia), collects the archives of the siberian history, . d. _daurkin_ (a native tschutski), employed by plenisner to examine the islands to the east of siberia, . the intelligence he brought back, _ibid._ _delisle_, mistaken concerning the western coast of america, . _deshneff_, his voyage, . extracts from his papers, , . his description of the great promontory of the tschutski, . ankudinoff's vessel wrecked on that promontory, _ibid._ deshneff builds anadirskoi-ostrog on the river anadyr, . dispute between him and soliverstoff, concerning the discovery of the korga, , . no navigator since deshneff pretends to have passed round the n. e. extremity of asia, . _discoveries._ the prosecution of those begun by beering mostly carried on by individuals, . the vessels equipped for those discoveries described, _ibid._ expences attending them, . profits of the trade to the new discovered islands very considerable, . list of the principal charts of the russian discoveries hitherto published, . _dogs_, used for drawing carriages, . _drusinin (alexei)_, wrecked at beering's island, . his voyage to the fox islands, - . winters at unalashka, . all the crew, except four russians, viz. stephen korelin, dmitri bragin, gregory shaffyrin, and ivan kokovin, destroyed by the natives, . see _unalashka_. _durneff (kodion)._ his voyage, . e. _eclipse_, behaviour of the chinese at one, . _empress of russia._ see _russia_. _engel_ (mr.) disputes the exactness of the longitudes laid down by muller and the russian geographers, . _esquimaux indians_, similarity between their boats and those of the fox islands, . . f. _feathers_ (peacock's), used for a distinction of rank by the chinese, . _fedotika._ see _nikul_. _foxes_, different species of, described, . value of their skins, . _fox islands_, sometimes called the farthest aleütian isles, . their land and sea-animals, . manners and customs of the inhabitants, . warm springs and native sulphur to be found in some of them, . their dress, . . their vessels described, . are very fond of snuff, . their drums described, . their weapons, . . food of the inhabitants, . their feasts, . their funeral ceremonies, . account of the inhabitants, - . their extreme nastiness, . their boats made like those of the esquimaux indians in north america, . . are said to have no notion of a god, ; yet have fortune-tellers, who pretend to divination, by the information of spirits, _ibid._ the inhabitants called by the russians by the general name of aleyut, . proofs of the vicinity of those islands to america, . g. _geographers (russian)_, their accuracy, . _ghessur-chan_, the principal idol at maimatschin, . _glotoff (stephen)_, his voyage, - . winters upon copper island, . arrives at kadyak, the most eastward of the fox islands, . is attacked by the natives, whom he defeats, , and finally repulses, . winters at kadyak, . is reconciled to the natives, . curiosities procured by him at that island, _ibid._ no chart of his voyage, . departs from kadyak, and arrives at umnak, . . defeats a design formed against him by the natives, . meets with korovin, . winters on umnak, . journal of his voyage, - . see _solovioff, korovin_. ---- (_ivan_), an aleütian interpreter, . _golodoff_, killed at unyumga, . _goreloi._ see _atchu_. _greenlanders_, their proper names nearly similar to those used in the aleütian isles, . h. _hare's rock._ see _saetshie kammen_. _hot springs_, found in kanaga, . in tsetchina, . i. _ibiya, ricksa_, and _olas_, three large populous islands to the east of the aleütian islands, . _jesuits_, their compliance with the chinese superstition, . _igonok_, a village of unalashka, . _igunok_, a bay n. e. of unalashka, . _ikutchlok_, a dwelling place at unalashka, . _imperial academy_, their chart of the new discovered islands, not to be depended on, . . _indigirka_, a river of siberia, . _inlogusak_, a leader of the unalashkans, killed, . _isanak_, one of the islands to the west of kadyak, . _islands (new discovered)_, first tribute brought from thence to ochotsk, . list of those islands, according to mr. muller, . their names altered and corrupted by the russian navigators, . see _aleütian isles_ and _fox islands_. _islenieff_ (mr.), sent to yakutsk to observe the transit of venus, . _itchadek_ and _kagumaga_, two friendly toigons, . _ivan shilkin_, his voyage, . . shipwrecked on one of the fox islands, . great distresses of his crew on that island, . shipwrecked a second time, . _ivan vassilievitch_ i. makes the first irruption into siberia, . _ivan vassilievitch_ ii. took the title of _lord of all the siberian lands_ before the conquests of yermac, . see _russia_. _ives (isbrand)_, a dutchman. embassador from peter i. to pekin, . _iviya_, one of the aleütian islands, . k. _kadyak_, one of the fox islands, . the fondness of the natives for beads, . animals and vegetables found there, . . great reason to think it is at no great distance from the continent of america, . account of the inhabitants, . see _glottoff_. _kagumaga._ see _itchadek_. _kalaktak_, a village of unalashka, . _kama_, a river, . _kamtchatka_, discovered by the russians, . the whole peninsula reduced by the russians, . of little advantage to the crown at first, but since the discovery of the islands between asia and america its fur-trade is become a considerable branch of the russian commerce, _ibid._ its situation and boundaries, . its districts, government, and population, _ibid_. fixed and other tributes to the crown, . its soil and climate not favourable to the culture of corn; but hemp has of late years been cultivated there with great success, . supplied yearly with salt, provisions, corn, and manufactures, from ochotsk, _ibid._ rout for transporting furs from thence to kiachta, . manner of procuring fire there, and which vaksel, beering's lieutenant, found practised in that part of north america which he saw in , . see _morosko, atlassoff, koriacs, ochotsk_ and _penshinsk, bolcheresk, tigilskaia, krepost, verchnei, nishnei, kamtchatka ostrogs, volcanos, furs and skins_. _kamtchatkoi ostrogs_ (upper and lower) and bolcheretsk built, . _kanaga_, one of the andreanoffsky islands, . description of, . _karaga island_, tributary to russia, . see _olotorians_. _kashkar_, a town of little bucharia, . _kashmak_, an interpreter employed by the russians, . _kataghayekiki_, name of the inhabitants of unimak and alaxa, . _kayachu._ see _ayagh_. _kiachta_, a frontier town of siberia, . treaty concluded there between the russians and chinese, . . is at present the centre of the russian and chinese commerce, . that place and zuruchaitu agreed on for transacting the commerce between russia and china, . description of kiachta, _ibid._ _kighigusi_, inhabitants of akutan so called, . _kitaika_, a chinese stuff, . _kogholaghi_, inhabitants of unalashka so called, . _kopeikina_, a bay of the river anadyr, . _korenoff._ see _solovioff_. _korga_, a sand-bank at the mouth of the river anadyr, . see _soliverstoff_. _koriacs_, their country the northern boundary of kamtchatka, . tributary to russia, . _korovin (ivan)_, his voyage - . arrives at unalashka, his transactions there, - . builds an hut, and prepares for wintering, . being attacked by the savages, destroys his hut, and retires to his vessel, . attacked again, repulses the savages, and is stranded on the island of umnak, . after different skirmishes with the natives, is relieved by glottoff, . his description of umnak and unalashka, with their inhabitants, . see _solovioff_. _kovyma_, a river of siberia, . _krenitzin_ (captain), commands a secret expedition, . _krenitzin and levasheff_, their journal and chart sent, by order of the empress of russia, to dr. robertson, . extract from their journal, - . they arrive at the fox islands, . krenitzin winters at alaxa, and levasheff at unalashka, . they return to the river of kamtchatka, . krenitzin drowned, _ibid._ see _yakoff_. _krassilnikoff_, voyage of a vessel fitted out by him, . shipwrecked on copper island, _ibid._ the crew return to beering's island, . _krassilikoff_ (a russian astronomer), his accuracy in taking the longitude of kamtchatka, . _krashininikoff_, his history of kamtchatka, . _krestova_, a river of siberia, . _krugloi_, or _round island_, one of the aleütian islands, . _kulkoff_, his vessel destroyed, and his crew killed by the savages, . . _kullara_, a fortress belonging to kutchum chan, . _kuril isles_, subject to russia, . _kutchum chan_ (a descendant of zinghis chan), defeats yediger, and takes him prisoner, . the most powerful sovereign in siberia, . see _yermac, sibir_. l. _laptieff (chariton)_, his unsuccessful attempt to pass from the lena to the yenisèi, . see p. . _latitude of bolcheresk_, appendix i. n^o ii. see _longitude_. _lena_, a river of siberia, . attempts of the russians to pass from thence to kamtchatka, . see _menin_. _leontieff_ (a _russian_), has translated several interesting chinese publications, . _levasheff._ see _krenitzin_ and _levasheff_. _lobaschkoff (prokopèi)_, killed at alaksu, . _longitude_, of the extreme parts of asia, by mr. muller and the russian geographers, . by mr. engel, _ibid._ by mr. vaugondy, . the russian system supported by mons. buache, against engel and vaugondy, _ibid._ see _krassilnikoff_. _longitude of ochotsk, bolcheresk_, and _st. peter_ and _st. paul_, . _longitude_ and _latitude_ of the principal places mentioned in this work, . _lyssie ostrova_, or _fox islands_, . their situation and names, . description of the inhabitants, . m. _maimatschin_ (the chinese frontier town), described, . houses there described, . an account of the governor, . theatre described, . the small pagoda, . the great pagoda, . idols worshiped, _ibid._- . see _sitting-rooms_. _manshurs_, their origin, . _maooang_, a chinese idol, . _mednoi ostroff_, or _copper island_, discovered, . see _copper island_. _medvedeff (dennis)_, his crew massacred by the savages, . he and part of protassoff's crew found murdered on the island of umnak, . _menin (feodor)_, his unsuccessful attempt to pass from the yenisèi to the lena, . _merghen_, a chinese town, . _medviodkie ostrova, kreffstoffskie ostrova_, or _bear islands_, discovery of, . _minyachin_ (a cossac), a collector of the tribute, . _mongol_, the commerce between the russians and chinese, mostly carried on in that tongue, . _morosko (lucas semænoff)_, commanded the first expedition towards kamtchatka, . _muller_, (mr.) his conjecture relating to the coast of the sea of ochotsk, confirmed by captain synd, . part of a letter written by him in , concerning the vicinity of kamtchatka and america, . his list of the new discovered islands, . n. _nankin_, . _naun_, a chinese town, . _nershinsk._ see _chinese_. _nevodtsikoff (michael)_, sails from kamtchatka river, . discovers the aleutian islands, _ibid._ narrative of his voyage, - . _new moon_, ceremonies observed at, by the chinese, . _nikul_, or _fedotika_, a river which falls into that of kamtchatka, . _nishnei_, or _lower kamtchatkoi ostrog_, a district of kamtchatka, . _niu-o_, chinese idol, . _north east passage_, russians attempt to discover, - . _novikoff_ and _bacchoff_, their voyage from anadyrsk, . . are shipwrecked on beering's island, where they build a small boat, and return to kamtchatka, . o. _oby_ (bay of), . _ochotsk_ and _penshinsk_, western boundaries of kamtchatka, . see _kamtchatka, muller_. _offzin_ and _koskeleff_ (lieutenants), first effected the passage from the bay of oby to the yenisèi, . _olas._ see _ibiya_. _olotorian isles_, whence so called, . _olotorians_, invade the island of karaga, and threaten to destroy all the inhabitants who pay tribute to russia, . _onemenskaya_, a bay in the river anadyr, . _oracles (chinese)_, . _orel_, a russian settlement, . _otcheredin, (aphanassei)_, his voyage to the fox islands, - . winters at umnak, . the toigon of the five mountains gives him hostages, for which the other toigons kill one of his children, . a party sent by him to ulaga repulsed the inhabitants, who had attacked them, . is joined by popoff from beering's island, and prevails on the inhabitants to pay tribute, . receives an account of levasheff's arrival at unalashka, _ibid._ returns to ochotsk, with a large cargo, leaving popoff at umnak, . brings home two islanders, who were baptized by the names of alexey solovieff and boris otcheredin, . see _poloskoff_. p. _pagoda._ see _maimatschin_. _paikoff (demetri)_, his voyage, - . _pallas_, receives from bragin a narrative of his adventures and escape, p. . account of kiachta and maimatschin, extracted from his journal, p. . his publication concerning the mongol tribes, . list of plants found by steller upon the coast discovered by beering in , communicated by mr. pallas--quotation from a treatise of his, relative to the plants of the new-discovered islands, . extracts made by him relative to deshneff's voyage, p. - . _pauloffsky_, his expedition, in which, after several successful skirmishes with the tschutski, he is surprised and killed by them, . _peacock._ see _feathers_. _pekin._ russian scholars allowed to settle there, to learn the chinese tongue, . see _caravans_. _penshinsk_, . _peter_ i. first projected making discoveries in the seas between kamtchatka and america, . _petersburg_, length of the different routs between that city and pekin, . _piasida_, a river of siberia, . _plenisner_ (a courlander), sent on discoveries to the n. e. of siberia, . see _daurkin_. _poloskoff, (matthew)_, sent by otcheredin to unalashka, . spends the autumn at akun, and after twice repulsing the savages, returns to otcheredin, - . _popoff (ivan)_, a vessel fitted out by him arrives at unalashka, . see _otcheredin_. _prontshistsheff_ (lieutenant), his unsuccessful attempt to pass from the lena towards the yenisèi, - . _protassoff_, he and his crew destroyed by the savages, . . see _medvedeff_. _pushkareff (gabriel)_, his voyage, - . winters upon alaksu, . he, with golodoff and twenty others, attempting to violate some girls, on the island unyumga, are set upon by the natives, and at last obliged to retreat, . . he and his crew tried for their inhuman behaviour to the islanders during their voyage, . r. _rheum._ see _rhubarb_. _rhubarb_, that from russia generally called turkey rhubarb, and why, . description of, _ibid._ indian rhubarb inferior to the tartarian or turkey, . a milk-white sort described, . different species, - . planted in siberia by m. zuchert, a german apothecary, . exportation of, . superiority of the tartarian over the indian rhubarb, accounted for, . _ricksa._ see _ibiya_. _roaring mountain._ see _unalashka_. _robertson_ (dr.) see _krenitzin and levasheff_. _round island._ see _krugloi_. _russia_ (present empress of), a great promoter of new discoveries, . no communication between that country and siberia till the reign of ivan vassilievitch ii. . the empress abolishes the monopoly of the fur-trade, and relinquishes the exclusive privilege of sending caravans to pekin, . _russia_, a curious and interesting "historical account of the nations which compose that empire" lately published, . _russians_, quit siberia after the death of yermac, . recover their antient territories in that country, . their progress checked by the chinese, . are expelled from the chinese dominions, . are allowed to build a church (and to have four priests to officiate in it) within their caravansary at pekin, . commerce between them and the chinese carried on only by barter, . method of transacting business between them, . russian exports, - . imports, - . articles of trade prohibited to individuals, . duties paid by the russian merchants, . the russians' manner of trading to the fox islands, . their attempts to discover a north east passage, - . held in great veneration by the kamtchadals, till they quarrelled among themselves, . see _siberia, chinese, albasin, lena_. s _sabya_, an island at a distance from att, . see _att_. _sacred helmet_, at maimatschin, . _saetshie kamen_, or _hare's rock_, description of, . _sagaugamak_, one of the fox islands, . _st. petersburg_, the geographical calendar of not to be depended on, . _saktunak_, an island near alaksu, . _sandchue_, a northern province of china, . _sea-horse teeth_, their value, . _sea-lion_, or _scivutcha_, its flesh delicate food, . _sea-otters_, many writers mistaken concerning them, . description of, _ibid._ value of their skins, . _selin_, a town of little bucharia, . _serebranikoff_, voyage of a vessel fitted out by him, - . shipwrecked on an island opposite katyrskoi noss, in the peninsula of kamtchatka, . description of the island, . _shaffyrin (sila)_, a cossac, collector of the tribute, . . . killed, . _shalauroff_, his first voyage from the lena, - . winters at a mouth of the kovyma, . not being able to double sheletskoi noss, returns to the kovyma, winters there a second time, and returns to the lena, . no account of his second expedition, he and his crew being killed by the tschutski, . _sheep's rock._ see _baranèi kamen_. _shelatskoi noss_, whence that name is derived, . _shemiya_, one of the aleütian islands, . _shilkin (ivan)_, his voyage, . wrecked on one of the fox islands, . where the russians are attacked by the savages, whom they repulse, . after suffering the greatest distress, they build a small vessel, in which they are a second time wrecked, and return at last in serebranikoff's vessel to kamtchatka, . . _shuntschi_, the first chinese emperor of the manshur race, . _shushu_, the first of the kuril isles, . _sibir_, the principal residence of kutchum chan, . _siberia_, conquest of by yermac, . second irruption of the russians into that country, . state of at the time of yermac's invasion, . conjecture concerning the derivation of that name, _ibid._ totally reduced by the russians, . transport of the russian and chinese commodities through that country, . see _ivan vassilievitch i. russia. kutchum chan._ _sitkin_, one of the fox islands, . _sitting-rooms, (chinese)_, described, . _soliverstoff (yusko)_, his expedition to the korga, to collect sea-horses teeth, . _solovioff (ivan)_, his voyage, - . arrives at unalashka, . learns the particulars of a confederacy formed by the toigons of unalashka, umnak, akutan, and toshko, against the russians, . is joined by korovin, . hostilities between him and the natives, _ibid._ winters at unalashka, with other transactions at that island, . makes peace with the natives, and receives hostages, . meets with korovin, . his crew being greatly afflicted with the scurvy, the inhabitants of makushinsk conspire to seize his vessel, . but are happily prevented, . is visited by glottoff, _ibid._ receives hostages from the inhabitants of kalaktak, . sends korenoff in different hunting parties, . journal of his voyage homewards, . his description of the fox islands, . _solvytshegodskaia._ see _strogonoff_. _steller_, his arguments to prove that beering and tschirikiff discovered america, . _strogonoff (anika)_, a russian merchant, establishes a trade with solvytshegodskaia in siberia, . makes settlements upon the kama and tschussovaia, . see _yermac_. _studentzoff_, a cossac, collector of the tribute, . . _svatoi noss_, that name explained, . _sulphur_ found on the island of kanaga, . see _copper islands_. _synd_ (capt.) his voyage to the n. e. of siberia, . discovers a cluster of islands, and a promontory, which he supposes to belong to america, . t. _tabaetshinskian_, a mountain of kamtchatka, emitting a constant smoke, . _tagalak_, one of the andreanoffskye islands, description of, . _tartarian rhubarb._ see _rhubarb_. _tchingi_, a town on the banks of the tura, . see _yermac_. _tea_, finer in russia than in europe, and why, . _temnac_, an aleutian interpreter, . _tien_, an idol worshiped in the small pagoda at maimatschin, . _tigilskaia krepost_, a district of kamtchatka, . _tolstyk, (andrean)_, his voyage to the aleutian isles, in , . ditto, in , . ditto in , - . discovers the andreanoskie islands, . shipwrecked near the mouth of the kamtchatka river, . _toshko._ see _solovioff_. _totchikala_, a village of unalashka, . _trapesnikoff (nikiphor)_, boris and glebb, a vessel fitted out by him, her voyage and return, . . &c. another vessel fitted out by him destroyed, and the crew cut off, by the natives of unimak, . _tsaaduck_, a kind of lamp, . _tsaudsing_, a chinese idol, . _tschirikoff._ see _beering_. _tschussovaia_ (a river). see _strogonoff_. _tschutski_, a people on the river anadyr, . boundaries of their country, . see _asia_. _tschukotskoi noss_, the n. e. cape of the country of the tschutski, . stadukin and soliverstoff claim the discovery of the passage round that promontory, . see _deshneff, svatoi noss, shelatskoi noss_; see also p. . _tschuvatch._ see _yermac_. _tsetchina_, one of the andreanoffsky islands, description of, . _tsikanok_, or _osernia_, a river of unalashka, . _tsiuproff_, his adventures at the aleutian islands, . see _belayeff_. _turkey rhubarb._ see _rhubarb_. u. _vaksel._ see _kamtchatka_. _vassilievitch._ see _ivan vassilievitch_. _vaugondy._ see _longitude_. _udagha_, a bay on the n. e. of unalashka, . _verchnei_, or _upper kamtchatkoi ostrog_, a district of kamtchatka, . _ukunadok_, a village of unalashka, . _ulaga_, one of the fox islands. see _otcheredin_. _umgaina_, a village of unalashka, . _umnak_, one of the fox islands, . see _korovin, solovioff_. _unalashka_, or _agunalashka_, one of the fox islands, . adventures of four russians belonging to drusinin's crew there, - . description of, . ayaghish and the roaring mountain, two volcanos, on that island, . productions, _ibid._ the inhabitants less barbarous than those of the other fox islands, . _unimak_, an island to the east of agunalashka, . see _trapesnikoff_. _unyumga._ see _pushkareff, golodoff_. _volcanos_, some burning ones in kamtchatka, and traces of many former ones to be observed there, . one eruption near lower ostrog in , and another in , _ibid._ an high volcano on the island of kanaga, . see _copper island, unalashka_. _vorobieff_, his voyage, . w. _wheels_, a carriage with four wheels a mark, of high distinction among the chinese, . _white month_, explained, . _women_, none allowed to live at maimatschin, and why, . _wsevidoff (andrew)_, his voyage to the new-discovered islands, . y. _yakoff (jacob)_, composed the chart of krenitzin and levasheff's voyage, . _yediger_ (a tartar chief), pays tribute to the russians, . see _kutchum chan_. _yenisèi_, a river of siberia, , & seq. _yerken_, a town of little bucharia, . _yermac_, being driven from the caspian sea, retires to orel, , where he winters, and determines to invade siberia, . to which he is instigated by strogonoff, . marches towards siberia, and returns to orel, . sets out on a second expedition, and arrives at tchingi, . defeats kutchum chan at tschuvatch, . marches to sibir, and seats himself on the throne, . cedes his conquest to the tzar of muscovy, . who sends him a reinforcement, under the command of prince bolkosky, . is surprised by kutchum chan, . and drowned, . veneration paid to his memory, . see _allai, russians, siberia, ivan vassielivitch_ ii. _yefimoff (sava)_, one of yermac's followers, an accurate historian of those times, . _yugoff (emilian)_, his voyage, . dies on copper island, . z. _zuchert._ see _rhubarb_. _zuruchaitu._ description of, . its trade very inconsiderable, . see _kiachta_. finis. books printed for t. cadell. the history of england, from the invasion of julius cæsar to the revolution. a new edition, printed on a fine paper, with many corrections and additions; and a complete index, vols. royal paper, l. s. * * * another edition on small paper, l. s. another edition in vols. vo. l. s. the history of scotland, during the reigns of queen mary and of king james vi. till his accession to the crown of england; with a review of the scottish history, previous to that period; and an appendix, containing original papers: vols. by william robertson, d. d. the th edition, l. s. another edition in vols. vo. s. the history of the reign of the emperor charles v. with a view of the progress of society in europe, from the subversion of the roman empire to the beginning of the sixteenth century. by william robertson, d. d. embellished with plates, elegantly engraved; vols. l. s. another edition in vols. vo. l. s. the history of america, vol. i. and ii. by the same author. illustrated with maps. l. s. another edition in vols. vo. s. the history of the reign of philip the second, king of spain. by robert watson, ll. d. professor of philosophy and rhetoric, at the university of st. andrew. d edition; vols. l. s. another edition in vols. vo. s. the history of the decline and fall of the roman empire. by edward gibbon, esq; vol. i. from the reign of trajan, to that of constantine; the d edition, l. s. an acount of the voyages undertaken by order of his present majesty for making discoveries in the southern hemisphere, and successively performed by commodore byron, capt. wallis, and capt. carteret, in the dolphin, and swallow, and the endeavour; drawn up from the journals which were kept by the several commanders, and from the papers of joseph banks, esq; and dr. solander. by john hawkesworth, ll. d. illustrated with cuts and a great variety of charts and maps (in all plates) relative to the countries now first discovered, or hitherto but imperfectly known. price l. s. bound. an account of a voyage towards the south pole, and round the world; performed in his majesty's ships the resolution and adventure, in , , , and . written by james cooke, commander of the resolution. in which is included, captain furneaux's narrative of his proceedings in the adventure, during the separation of the ships. elegantly printed in vols. royal. illustrated with maps and charts, and a variety of portraits of persons and views of places, drawn during the voyage by mr. hodges, and engraved by the most eminent masters. l. s. lord anson's voyage round the world, l. s. a philosophical and political history of the settlements and trade of the europeans in the east and west indies, translated from the french of the abbé reynal. by j. justamond, m. a. a new edition carefully revised, in vols. vo. and illustrated with maps. l. s. a tour through sicily and malta. in a series of letters to william beckford, esq; of somerly in suffolk, from p. brydone, f. r. s. vols. illustrated with a map. d edition. s. a view of society and manners in france, switzerland, and germany, with anecdotes relating to some eminent characters. by john moore, m. d. vols. d edition. s. russia; or a compleat historical account of all the nations which compose that empire, vols. s.--the third and fourth volumes of this work are in the press. a tour through some of the northern parts of europe, particularly copenhagen, stockholm, and petersburgh, in a series of letters, by n. wraxall, jun. d edition. s. a journey to the western isles of scotland. by the author of the rambler. s. transcriber's notes: words surrounded by _ are italicized. small capitals are presented as all capitals in this e-text. symbol inverted asterism (three asterisks arranged as inverted triangle) is presented as * * * (dinkus) in this e-text. obvious punctuation errors repaired. all apparent printer's errors in the text have been retained. footnotes without anchors are removed from this e-text. they are listed here: - page : s. r. g. v. iii. pallas reise. - page : see the preceding chapter.